Digital Ricoeur - JStor

Ricoeur appearing with Search Term: work

Book Results: 4687

Journal Results: 1431

Introduction from: Exploring Jesuit Distinctiveness
Author(s) Maryks Robert Aleksander
Abstract: The following twelve essays are a selection of papers presented at the first International Symposium on Jesuit Studies held at Boston College’s Institute for Advanced Jesuit Studies in June 2015. The symposium theme was the distinctiveness of Jesuits and their ministries. The participants explored the quidditas jesuitica, or the specifically Jesuit way(s) of proceeding in which Jesuits and their colleagues operated from historical, geographical, social, and cultural perspectives. They asked whether there was an essential core of distinctive elements that characterize the way in which Jesuits lived their religious vocation and conducted their various works and how these ways of

CHAPTER 6 Colonial Theodicy and the Jesuit Ascetic Ideal in José de Acosta’s Works on Spanish America from: Exploring Jesuit Distinctiveness
Author(s) Green Bryan
Abstract: This chapter aims to demonstrate the centrality of the problem of theodicy in José de Acosta’s (1540–1600) scientific, ethnographic, and historical writings on Spanish America.¹ Based on Acosta’s experience as the Jesuit provincial of Peru and his active participation in the political and ecclesiastical reforms initiated under the viceroy Francisco de Toledo (1515–82), these works bear witness to the moral evils running rampant among his fellow Spaniards and the concomitant suffering inflicted upon the indigenous population.² While Acosta recognizes the moral evil at the root of Spanish sovereignty, namely greed in the ruthless pursuit of precious metals, his

CHAPTER 9 The Distinctiveness of the Society of Jesus’s Mission in Pedro de Ribadeneyra’s Historia ecclesiastica del schisma del reyno de Inglaterra (1588) from: Exploring Jesuit Distinctiveness
Author(s) Weinreich Spencer J.
Abstract: “Two more private and particular considerations encouraged me in the work. The first, that I am a Spaniard; the second, that I am a priest of the Society of Jesus.”¹ Such was the explanation offered by the priest and scholar Pedro de Ribadeneyra (1526–1611) for the production of the Historia eclesiastica del scisma del reyno de Inglaterra(henceforth, the “Historia”), his polemical account of the English Reformation. Troublingly, virtually all scholarship on theHistoriahas concentrated on the former factor, to the detriment of our appreciation of the latter. This chapter, and my larger project of an annotated translation

3 Charles Sumner’s “Crime Against Kansas”: from: The Political Style of Conspiracy
Abstract: Charles Sumner was a latecomer to politics. While he had established a reputation as a philanthropist and reformer in the 1830s and early 1840s, he was not politically active until the Texas annexation controversy of the mid-1840s. As is evident by his July 4, 1845, oration, ʺThe True Grandeur of Nations,ʺ Sumnerʹs sudden entrance into politics was inspired largely by his pacifism and his belief that the measure to annex Texas was the work of the slave power and designed to expand slavery westward. At the time, Massachusetts Whigs in Congress were themselves engaged in a vigorous opposition to annexation

Chapter Three Countersymbols and Confederacy from: Superchurch
Abstract: Fundamentalism has its roots in revivalism, but the Fundamentalist movement of the twentieth century has emerged as a radical reformulation of revivalist idealism. When Charles Finney addressed listeners and readers in his 1835 Lectures on Revivals of Religion, he warned of individual enemies that the revival church would have to confront and overcome in order to establish Christ’s kingdom on earth. He warned of “professors of religion” who would dismiss and speak against the work of revival. He warned often of a personal devil who conspired to keep sinners out of heaven. When he spoke against institutions and systems, however,

Book Title: Invoking the Invisible Hand-Social Security and the Privatization Debates
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Medhurst Martin J.
Abstract: In Invoking the InvisibleHand Robert Asen scrutinizes contemporary debates over proposals to privatize Social Security. Asen argues that a rights-based rhetoric employed by Social Security's original supporters enabled advocates of privatization to align their proposals with the widely held belief that Social Security functions simply as a return on a worker's contributions and that it is not, in fact, a social insurance program.By analyzing major debates over a preeminent American institution, Asen reveals the ways in which language is deployed to identify problems for public policy, craft policy solutions, and promote policies to the populace. He shows how debate participants seek to create favorable contexts for their preferred policies and how they connect these policies to idealized images of the nation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt16wd0hf

INTRODUCTION: from: Invoking the Invisible Hand
Abstract: In this famous passage from The Wealth of Nations, Adam Smith employs a powerfully evocative metaphor that bursts through his prose to escape the confines of political economy and obtain the status of a common sense. Resonating across national contexts and historical eras, the metaphor of the “invisible hand” has spoken to many people as an intuitive description of how the world works and an unparalleled prescription for ethical individual action. The invisible hand artfully captures the spirit of a market ethics by insisting that in working for oneself, an individual works for the good of others. The invisible hand

2 Competing Metaphors of Insurance and Investment from: Invoking the Invisible Hand
Abstract: Privatization promised a policy revolution born in the legitimating discourses of Social Security. In this spirit, advocates of privatization, who made their case through multiple congressional hearings beginning in earnest in the mid-1990s, pressed the logic of the rights claims asserted by the original supporters of Social Security. They, too, saw Social Security benefits as a right secured by a worker’s contributions, but advocates rebuked government control of these contributions as usurping the title to an individual’s property. Since rights rested properly with their bearers, any break in this connection by another party without the full consent of the rights

Book Title: Enigmas of Sacrifice-A Critique of Joseph M. Plunkett and the Dublin Insurrection of 1916
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Cormack W. J. Mc
Abstract: Enigmas of Sacrifice: A Critique of Joseph M. Plunkett and the Dublin Insurrection of 1916is the first critical study of the religious poet and militarist Joseph M. Plunkett, who was executed with the other leaders of the Dublin insurrection of 1916. Through Plunkett the author gains access to areas of nationalist thought that were more often assumed or repressed than publicly formulated.In this eye-opening book, W. J. Mc Cormack explores and analyzes Plunkett's brief life, work, and influence, beginning with his wealthy but dysfunctional family, irregular Jesuit education, and self-canceling sexuality. Mc Cormack continues through Plunkett's active phase when amateur theatricals and a magazine editorship brought him into the emergent neonationalist discourse of early twentieth-century Ireland. Finally, the author arrives at Holy Week 1916, when Plunkett masterminded the forgery of official documentation in order to provoke and justify the insurrection he planned. Mc Cormack analyzes Plunkett's significant texts and provides context through critical perspectives on his milieu.Enigmas of Sacrificeis unique in its effort to understand a major figure of Irish nationalism in terms that reach beyond political identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt18kcvc1

A LONG PROLOGUE: from: Enigmas of Sacrifice
Abstract: It is unlikely that the Victorian crisis of belief, loosely associated with the impact of scientific and philosophical discoveries (e.g., those of Charles Darwin, Charles Lyell, and John Tyndall), has been seriously proposed as a relevant context-background for reconsiderations of the insurrection that broke out in Dublin on Easter Monday 1916. Less unlikely, yet still remote, would be an examination of the impact of more specifically Christian-focused and critical works, most notably David Strauss’s Das Leben Jesu(1835–1836) or Ernest Renan’sVie de Jésus(1863). None of these momentous developments occurred in Ireland, though the physicist Tyndall (1820–1893)

CHAPTER 2 Actions of This Kind or That from: Enigmas of Sacrifice
Abstract: The fin de siècle witnessed a turbulent confluence of literary and philosophical energies, a clash of scientific and irrational preoccupations in which William Shakespeare featured on either side. Oscar Wilde’s “Portrait of Mr W. H.” (1889) set out to endanger the distinction between science and the irrational and, in acknowledgment, the most recent Complete Workspersists in classifying it as fiction.¹ The scholars were at work with important publications coming from E. K. Chambers, Sidney Lee, C. F. Onions, Arthur Pollard, and others in the decade or so following. Some of this was taken to be dryas-dust, for example Pollard’s

Book Title: Mourning Animals-Rituals and Practices Surrounding Animal Death
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Kalof Linda
Abstract: We live more intimately with nonhuman animals than ever before in history. The change in the way we cohabitate with animals can be seen in the way we treat them when they die. There is an almost infinite variety of ways to help us cope with the loss of our nonhuman friends-from burial, cremation, and taxidermy; to wearing or displaying the remains (ashes, fur, or other parts) of our deceased animals in jewelry, tattoos, or other artwork; to counselors who specialize in helping people mourn pets; to classes for veterinarians; to tips to help the surviving animals who are grieving their animal friends; to pet psychics and memorial websites. But the reality is that these practices, and related beliefs about animal souls or animal afterlife, generally only extend, with very few exceptions, to certain kinds of animals-pets. Most animals, in most cultures, are not mourned, and the question of an animal afterlife is not contemplated at all. Mourning Animalsinvestigates how we mourn animal deaths, which animals are grievable, and what the implications are for all animals.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt1c6v89n

Another Death from: Mourning Animals
Author(s) KISIEL EMMA
Abstract: The question of whether or not humans mourn animals is present in all of my photographic work. This theme emerged in my art when I began looking closely at dead animals and making images of roadkill animals, photographing flower and stone memorials I built around their bodies. My recent project, “Another Death,” portrays museum taxidermic animals that have suffered another kind of death after their initial demise. Frozen in time, they are presented either in the throes of death at another creature’s hand or in a limp resting pose, having just passed. Moments like these appear frequently in natural history

Creating Carnivores and Cannibals: from: Mourning Animals
Author(s) CHEZ KERIDIANA
Abstract: In the nineteenth century, the dog and the horse were man’s best friends. Sagacious, affectionate, and loyal, dog and horse were represented as faithful and helpful creatures that had played key roles in the development of civilization. Frameworks like the animal protection movement enabled, and encouraged, the development and intensification of these affectionate ties. Yet in spite of these ties, the horse was systematically served up to the dog for dinner.

Beyond Coping: from: Mourning Animals
Author(s) AUSTIN JESSICA
Abstract: Animal shelter employees face each day with the possibility of inhabiting antithetical roles: the caretaker, charged with ensuring the safety and well-being of the wards in their custody; and the executioner, overseer of these same animals’ untimely deaths. With shelter euthanasia estimates reaching three million adoptable animals per year, shelter workers shoulder a considerable burden of grief, resulting in stress and manifesting in depression and even physical complaints, such as sleep disturbance and headaches.¹ While several authors describe coping mechanisms for those whose work involves death, both in general and specifically tailored toward shelter employees, little is written about how

Mourning for Animals: from: Mourning Animals
Author(s) FAWCETT ANNE
Abstract: I always wanted to work with animals, but the euthanasia of our fifteen-year-old cat when I was fourteen catalyzed that ambition. My grief and sense of helplessness were overwhelming. I can still feel tears stinging my cheeks as I walked into school knowing that the cat I grew up with was being taken to the vet to be “put to sleep” and I could do nothing to save her.

Keeping Ghosts Close: from: Mourning Animals
Author(s) GRUEN LORI
Abstract: “I can’t take it anymore! I can’t take all this death!” she howled. Two other sanctuary workers, each with years of experience, made eye contact, wondering: How will this go? Danielle gulped, then switched gears and began reciting Dante’s

Book Title: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy-The Living Art of Michael C. Leff
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Henry David
Abstract: What distinguishes the study of rhetoric from other pursuits in the liberal arts? From what realms of human existence and expression, of human history, does such study draw its defining character? What, in the end, should be the purposes of rhetorical inquiry? And amid so many competing accounts of discourse, power, and judgment in the contemporary world, how might scholars achieve these purposes through the attitudes and strategies that animate their work? Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy: The Living Art of Michael C. Leffoffers answers to these questions by introducing the central insights of one of the most innovative and prolific rhetoricians of the twentieth century, Michael C. Leff. This volume charts Leff 's decades-long development as a scholar, revealing both the variety of topics and the approach that marked his oeuvre, as well as his long-standing critique of the disciplinary assumptions of classical, Hellenistic, renaissance, modern, and postmodern rhetoric.Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy includes a synoptic introduction to the evolution of Leff 's thought from his time as a graduate student in the late 1960s to his death in 2010, as well as specific commentary on twenty-four of his most illuminating essays and lectures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt1d10hh7

Introduction from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: What distinguishes the study of rhetoric from other pursuits in the liberal arts? From what realms of human existence and expression, of human history, does such study draw its defining character? What, in the end, should be the purposes of rhetorical inquiry? And amid so many competing accounts of discourse, power, and judgment in the contemporary world, how might scholars achieve these purposes through the attitudes and strategies that animate their work? Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy: The Living Art of Michael C. Leffoffers answers to these questions by collecting the key works and introducing the key insights

Genre and Paradigm in the Second Book of De Oratore from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: In Cicero’s rhetorical works, the concept of genre appears in two rather different and largely independent contexts. One of these involves the division of style into three general types ( tria genera dicendi), while the other has to do with the conventional tripartite division of types of speeches (tria genera causarum). Among recent scholars, attention has centered on the first of these divisions, and for good reason. Although Cicero did not originate these stylistic categories, his formulation of them proved to have an abiding influence,¹ and he applied them in ways that suggest a striking and probably original contribution to rhetorical

Up from Theory: from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: When I first began to study rhetoric, some forty or so years ago, the terms “substance” and “theory” occupied privileged positions in disciplinary consciousness. “Substance” referred to content or subject matter, and in this pre-postdisciplinary scheme of things, scholars were supposed to work within bounded and clearly differentiated domains of inquiry. A discipline, that is, needed to have a proper subject, and since scholarship demanded rationally refined, systematically organized abstract principles that stood above and apart from particulars, the study of an academic subject required the use of “theory.” In the quasi discipline then known as speech ( requiescat in pace),

Decorum and Rhetorical Interpretation: from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: I want to begin with an unlikely text, Jonathan Valin’s novel Day of Wrath, a crime novel, in fact a work belonging to that unrefined subgenre known as the “hard-boiled” detective story. The novel’s protagonist and narrator is named Harry Stoner, and the name aptly suggests the qualities of a detective-hero. Stoner, of course, has a hard and tough exterior, but more than that, his name defines a set of psychological traits which set him apart from his environment. He is self-contained, independent, resistant to the corruption that surrounds him, and impervious to social pressure. A rugged individualist and an

[PART 3. Introduction] from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: What Leff at times also deemed “textual analysis” and “textual criticism,” close reading was cultivated across the expanse of his theoretical, historiographical, and critical work

[PART 5. Introduction] from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: Teaching rhetoric, like rhetorical criticism, was one of Leff’s living arts. In the course of his varied career, he taught at Indiana University, the University of California at Davis, and the University of Wisconsin, and he chaired the Departments of Communication at both Northwestern University and the University of Memphis. He mentored countless undergraduate and graduate students at those institutions; he was also an active presence in the lives of students beyond his own university. Leff worked to build an infrastructure for rhetoric’s future that could unite students and teachers of rhetoric across the country, even the world. Scarcely a

Theory and Practice in Undergraduate Education from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: The question posed for this panel is both new and old. In the context of our own lives and careers, it is something new to question the nature and role of theory in our work. As Jo Sprague said, in her letter attempting to orient today’s speakers, not so long ago we were quite confident that we knew what theory was and how to use it as teachers. Theory, on this view, was something that stood apart from and above practice. It consisted in a set of hierarchically ordered abstract propositions (i.e., laws or rules) that were capable of explaining

CHAPTER TWO The Visual Pedagogy of Americanization from: To Become an American
Abstract: In 1919, Raymond Crist, the director of citizenship in the Bureau of Naturalization, appeared before a House committee hearing on proposed changes to naturalization laws. In his opening statement, Crist suggested that the true import of his testimony was to praise the recent education initiatives of Americanization: “There is, however, a far greater subject which I should like to present to the committee for its most careful consideration. That subject is the all-absorbing, Nation-wide question rather loosely referred to by the term ‘Americanization.’”¹ For Crist, effective Americanization altered the hearts and minds of the unnaturalized. He explained, “Americanization work starts

Neither Dawkins nor Durkheim: from: Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Author(s) Dupuy Jean-Pierre
Abstract: The greatest disservice that could be done to Girard would be to claim that he invented his theory from scratch. Girard belongs to the great Franco-German-British tradition of religious anthropology that was brought to a premature halt in 1939 by decades of structuralism and poststructuralism: in particular, the French sociological school, with the works of Numa Denis Fustel de Coulanges, Émile Durkheim, and Marcel Mauss; the British anthropological school, with James Frazer, William Robertson-Smith, and the Belgo-British anthropologist Arthur Hocart; not to forget Friedrich Nietzsche and Sigmund Freud who gave these traditions a new momentum. If Girard’s theory is right,

Girard and the Feminist Critique of Religion: from: Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Author(s) Reineke Martha
Abstract: After thirty years, as feminist theories in the philosophy of religion, theology, and religious studies approach middle age, on what basis can we reflect on Girard and that feminist critique? Surely, we would most productively move forward were we to home in on aspects of feminist theorizing about religion that have maintained the most saliency. Moreover, feminist theorists of religion would most productively engage Girard in dialogue were they to share with him a sense of urgency about the world that he has conveyed in his most recent works, especially in Battling to the End. On both counts, an observation

Girard and World Religions: from: Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Author(s) Daly Robert J.
Abstract: Presumably, I have this assignment primarily because I was the program convener for the 2000 COV&R meeting at Boston College under the title “Violence and Institution in Christianity, Judaism, Hinduism, Buddhism, and Islam,” and eventual editor of its papers in Contagion9 (2002). When, to begin this task, I asked the major presenters from that conference how their thinking on this subject had developed over the past decade, Francis Clooney, SJ,¹ helpfully informed me that the 1898 work of Silvain Lévi (on whom Girard relied in his recent book,Sacrifice)² was now considered to be a classic in the field.

The Roots of Violence: from: Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Author(s) von Rospatt Alexander
Abstract: René Girard’s complex and sophisticated theory of sacrifice offers insights into the workings of human society that transcend culture and time and, while privileging Christianity and modernity, claim a certain universality. This invites scholars of other cultures and religions to consider the applicability of Girardian thought to their own fields of study. As scholars of Buddhism we take up this challenge by bringing Buddhism into conversation with Girard. Instead of concentrating on a particular text (Schlieter 2009) or genre (Hahn 2009) or practice (Arifuku 2009), we aim for a more comprehensive and general engagement with Girard by suggesting how Buddhism

The Self in Crisis from: Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: Research work in the humanities in general, and in philosophy in particular, is today looked at with a certain degree of suspicion, for various, and sometimes even opposed, reasons. On one hand, work on subtle epistemological questions and/or historical analysis of the thought of past philosophers is regarded as a navel-gazing activity, otiose at best, wasteful at worst. On the other hand, when philosophy and intellectual analysis come to focus on popular culture phenomena, such as comics, movies, and TV programs, they are regarded as trivializing ideas and as committing themselves to marginal and eventually unimportant work. One possible solution

E. H. Carr: from: Post-Realism
Author(s) Jones Charles
Abstract: T he Twenty Years’ Crisisis the of the work of E. H. Carr most familiar to students of international relations. In this book Carr took great pains to situate himself precisely half way between utopianism and realism.¹ Yet the strategy has generally been regarded as little more than a flourish. Carr has consistently been taken for a political realist. A lecture not long ago by William Fox, subtle and knowledgeable in its treatment of Carr, unhesitatingly referred to “Carr’s realist vision” and his “version of realist doctrine,” and Carr certainly exhibited many of the characteristic marks of the realist school.²

Book Title: The Genesis of Desire- Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Webb Eugene
Abstract: We seem to be abandoning the codes that told previous generations who they should love. But now that many of us are free to choose whoever we want, nothing is less certain. The proliferation of divorces and separations reveal a dynamic we would rather not see: others sometimes reject us as passionately as we are attracted to them.Our desire makes us sick. The throes of rivalry are at the heart of our attraction to one another. This is the central thesis of Jean-Michel Oughourlian's The Genesis of Desire, where the war of the sexes is finally given a scientific explanation. The discovery of mirror neurons corroborates his ideas, clarifying the phenomena of empathy and the mechanisms of violent reciprocity.How can a couple be saved when they have declared war on one another? By helping them realize that desire originates not in the self but in the other. There are strategies that can help, which Dr. Oughourlian has prescribed successfully to his patients. This work, alternating between case studies and more theoretical statements, convincingly defends the possibility that breakups need not be permanent.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt7zt5s7

4 Converting to Consumerism: from: Christianity and the Mass Media in America
Abstract: When Everett C. Parker conducted the first major study of religious radio broadcasting in America, he had no idea what he would discover.¹ It was 1941, and World War II was drawing the nationʹs attention to Europe as the commercial radio networks already garnered large national audiences. Parker sent questionnaires to the management of all commercial radio stations in Chicago, hoping to gain a snapshot of their religious programming, including how much of it they aired, which types of religious programming seemed to hold listenersʹ interests, and how station management funded such broadcasts. Parker also sent questionnaires to the sponsors

Book Title: For René Girard-Essays in Friendship and in Truth
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Williams James G.
Abstract: In his explorations of the relations between the sacred and violence, René Girard has hit upon the origin of culture-the way culture began, the way it continues to organize itself. The way communities of human beings structure themselves in a manner that is different from that of other species on the planet.Like Albert Einstein, Sigmund Freud, Émile Durkheim, Martin Buber, or others who have changed the way we think in the humanities or in the human sciences, Girard has put forth a set of ideas that have altered our perceptions of the world in which we function. We will never be able to think the same way again about mimetic desire, about the scapegoat mechanism, and about the role of Jewish and Christian scripture in explaining sacrifice, violence, and the crises from which our culture has been born.The contributions fall into roughly four areas of interpretive work: religion and religious study; literary study; the philosophy of social science; and psychological studies.The essays presented here are offered as "essays" in the older French sense of attempts (essayer) or trials of ideas, as indeed Girard has tried out ideas with us. With a conscious echo of Montaigne, then, this hommage volume is titled Essays in Friendship and in Truth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt7zt8fr

My Encounter with René Girard from: For René Girard
Author(s) Bandera Cesáreo
Abstract: It happened in the town of East Aurora, in Western New York, where René lived at the time. We had just finished lunch, and he was talking passionately about his work. “I’m convinced,” he said, “I can explain the passage from animal to man.” I will never forget it. My reaction was a bit nervous. I think I told him, only half jokingly, that he should not say such things in public. People might think he was going a little over the edge. But I was impressed by the sheer intellectual power and the scope of what he was explaining

Detour and Sacrifice: from: For René Girard
Author(s) Dupuy Jean-Pierre
Abstract: I first came across René Girard’s work in 1975. The director of the influential journal Esprit, Jean-Marie Domenach, urged me that year to read La violence et le sacré.¹ That book represented in his opinion a major breakthrough in the social sciences, and Esprit was playing a major role in publicizing it. I read it reluctantly, as I was at the time still under the spell of the thinking of Ivan Illich, a major social critic with whom I had just collaborated in the writing of his bookMedical Nemesis.² I was impressed but not especially moved by my reading

Already from the Beginning from: For René Girard
Author(s) Dumouchel Paul
Abstract: I first read René Girard when I was an undergraduate philosophy student, twenty-one or twenty-two years old. I bought La Violence et sacréin Canada during the summer of what must have been 1972 or 1973. At that time, I worked evening shifts (from 4:00 PM to midnight) on a summer job in a shelter for street kids, mainly young addicts and victims of family violence. I read the book in early September on the plane that brought me back to France and on the train between Paris and Aix-en-Provence where I was studying. I could not put it down.

Girard, Buddhism, and the Psychology of Desire from: For René Girard
Author(s) Webb Eugene
Abstract: I have been asked to contribute a brief discussion of René Girard’s psychological thought, with some reference to the ways it has contributed to my work in my own areas of interest. My last published volume was a study of French psychological thought that focused extensively on Girard and tried to place him in the context of the Freudian influence in France from the time of Jacques Lacan.¹ Since then I have continued to be interested in the ways in which psychological development may influence or be influenced by patterns of religious thinking. My academic career has spanned several fields,

Magister Lucis: from: For René Girard
Author(s) Williams James G.
Abstract: The year 1985 was a “before and after” year for me. It was one of those years when you experience a significant event or change, so you tend to remember and identify things in your life as before or after it. I first encountered Girard’s work in April 1985 when I was in Strasbourg, France, for three weeks. While there, I presented a paper to the professors of the Catholic and Protestant faculties of biblical studies of the University of Strasbourg in which I sketched patterns in the enemy brother stories of the book of Genesis and noted one striking

Breakout from the Belly of the Beast from: For René Girard
Author(s) Hamerton-Kelly Robert
Abstract: We are asked to tell how “the encounter with his [Girard’s] work has changed your own work,” how it changed the way we do things in all the contexts about which we are willing to write. My encounter with Girard had a great impact on me and I shall try to tell of it in three contexts: general experience (anthropology), biblical interpretation (hermeneutic), and pastoral work (psychology and sociology). Our mandate means that my remarks will perforce be unusually personal; nevertheless, I shall try to stay out of the swamp of sentimentality and off the mountaintop of self-attested success. There

For René Girard: from: For René Girard
Author(s) Golsan Richard J.
Abstract: In what follows, I want to offer, first, some personal details of how I discovered Girard’s work and the stages I went through in absorbing its lessons. Then I want to point to the ways in

The Mimeticist Turn: from: For René Girard
Author(s) Carter Chris Allen
Abstract: I still remember the day I began to appreciate the work of René Girard. It was a summer morning in 1979, and I was doing research in the Bizzell Memorial Library at the University of Oklahoma. I was drafting a dissertation on Kenneth Burke and was in the habit of checking any book that came into my hands to see if there were any references to Burke. I chanced across Girard’s latest publication, To Double Business Bound.¹ Flipping through the text, I discovered this passage:

Sacrifice and Sexual Difference: from: For René Girard
Author(s) Reineke Martha
Abstract: The groundwork for my encounter with the work of René Girard was laid early in my life. I grew up in a tumultuous era that sensitized me to violence. Trips with my parents through the U.S. South enabled me to observe the persistence of Jim Crow in “colored” and “white” schools. Even as a child, I saw and felt that race-based disparities in educational opportunity constituted a reprehensible act of violence. The Vietnam War shaped my experience in high school and college. Especially in college, I brought the resources of my liberal education to bear upon the violence around me.

René Girard’s Hermeneutic: from: For René Girard
Author(s) Graham Tyler
Abstract: I discovered Girard during my junior year at Stanford University, in the spring of 1994. At that time, my primary intellectual worldview was typical of the literary theoretical climate of the day: deconstruction. Not well schooled in the work of Derrida and others engaged in that mode of criticism, I was easily led to believe that infinite interpretations (and, thus, no one true interpretation) of a text were always possible. I read Deceit, Desire, and the Novel¹ at the end of the summer, and I still recall the effect of Girard’s description of Don Quixote on the first page: the

CHAPTER ONE Settler Debauchery, Capital Punishment, and the Theater of Colonial (Dis)Order, 1683–1741 from: Executing Democracy
Abstract: In 1758 English troops stormed Senegal, seizing property valued at more than £250,000. According to Peter Linebaugh, one of the seamen who fought for the Crown in the battle, John Ward, was soon thereafter “hanged [in London] for stealing a watch.” Linebaugh thus shows how empires plunder and pillage with impunity while working stiffs, including those trained in the ways of violence by the Crown, are hanged for committing the most trifling crimes. Ward would appear to have been particularly unlucky, for Eric Williams observes that “in 1745 transportation [the euphemism for banishing convicts] was the penalty for the theft

CHAPTER 4 Shame, Respect, and Joking Exchanges: from: Nosotros
Abstract: In 1922, John Dewey wrote, “These two facts, that moral judgment and moral responsibility are the work wrought in us by the social environment, signify that all morality is social; not because we oughtto take into account the effect of our acts upon the welfare of others, but because of facts. Othersdotake into account what we do and they respond accordingly to our acts” (Dewey 1922, 316).

CHAPTER 6 Being in Prison: from: Nosotros
Abstract: Hispano life in prison is poorly documented. This is due in part to lack of access and in part to the fact that men in prison as brothers, husbands, or sweethearts are often forgotten by society. The work reported in this chapter is partly drawn from a study conducted many years ago in a southwestern state. Other material was collected at a correctional facility in another state. I refer to these institutions as CF I and CF II. For purposes of continued confidentiality I do not identify the facilities further and I have given the men fictitious names in this

CHAPTER 13 Final Thoughts: from: Nosotros
Abstract: There are several goals in this chapter. One goal is to cover some of the main findings by linking them back to some basic ideas from phenomenology. Another goal is to connect some of what has been uncovered in the previous chapters to the work of others. In the latter part of the chapter some consideration is given to applications in mental health. For example, it is noted that bracketing from phenomenological philosophy finds applications in mental health work, particularly in the study of empathy. Specifically we note that empathy is used by Husserl to understand the consciousness of another

Book Title: Memory Work-Anne Truitt and Sculpture
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): de Baca Miguel
Abstract: Memory Workdemonstrates the evolution of the pioneering minimalist sculptor Anne Truitt. An artist determined to make her way through a new aesthetic in the 1960s, Truitt was tireless in her pursuit of a strong cultural voice. At the heart of her practice was the key theme of memory, which enabled her not only to express personal experience but also to address how perception was changing for a contemporary viewership. She gravitated toward the idea that an object in one's focus could unleash a powerful return to the past through memory, which in turn brings a fresh, even critical, attention to the present moment. In addition to the artist's own popular published writings, which detail the unique challenges facing female artists,Memory Workdraws on unpublished manuscripts, private recordings, and never-before-seen working drawings to validate Truitt's original ideas about the link between perception and mnemonic reference in contemporary art. De Baca offers an insider's view of the artist's unstinting efforts to realize her artistic vision, as well as the cultural, political, and historical resonances her oeuvre has for us today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt19633fp

INTRODUCTION from: Memory Work
Abstract: Late in her life, Anne Truitt shared a budding friendship with fellow minimal artist Carl Andre. In one of their conversations, Andre remarked on Truitt’s Catawba(1962; plate 9), a sculpture grouped with of one of his artworks at the Museum of Modern Art when it reopened in 2004 after its sweeping renovation. “It has ontology,” he said, adding: “It must have cost you to make it.” She received his words as a knowing smile between artists; only another artist could truly comprehend the intellectual and emotional energy suffused in the labor of making art.¹

2 HARDCASTLE (1962) from: Memory Work
Abstract: When Anne Truitt revealed her sculpture Hardcastle (plate 6) to the art critic Clement Greenberg in her Washington, DC, studio in 1962, he backed away while muttering under his breath, “Scares the shit out of me.”¹ This comment is noteworthy, for it indexes the experiential profundity that led Greenberg later to comment favorably on this and other minimal-type works by Truitt.² Yet Greenberg’s remark is striking for another reason as well, in that it captures the essence of what Truitt began trying to do in 1962: to evoke viscerally embodied responses to her work without making the human body an

4 TRUITT IN TOKYO (1964–1967) from: Memory Work
Abstract: Truitt had breakthroughs in Tokyo, but they were hard won. Despite the professional recognition that Truitt achieved while she lived in Japan from 1964 to 1967, it was a time of deep isolation, sadness, and frustration with her studio practice. At the turn of the 1970s, Truitt looked back on the sculptures she made in Japan and found them “simply intelligent,” “lifeless,” and inconsistent with the conceptual thrust of her work since First — and in December 1971, she had the majority of these Japanese works destroyed, nineteen sculptures in all.¹ Yet, despite this iconoclasm, after Truitt returned to the United

Book Title: The Red Sea-In Search of Lost Space
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Wick Alexis
Abstract: The Red Sea has, from time immemorial, been one of the world's most navigated spaces, in the pursuit of trade, pilgrimage and conquest. Yet this multidimensional history remains largely unrevealed by its successive protagonists. Intrigued by the absence of a holistic portrayal of this body of water and inspired by Fernand Braudel's famous work on the Mediterranean, this book brings alive a dynamic Red Sea world across time, revealing the particular features of a unique historical actor. In capturing this heretofore lost space, it also presents a critical, conceptual history of the sea, leading the reader into the heart of Eurocentrism. The Sea, it is shown, is a vital element of the modern philosophy of history.Alexis Wick is not satisfied with this inclusion of the Red Sea into history and attendant critique of Eurocentrism. Contrapuntally, he explores how the world and the sea were imagined differently before imperial European hegemony. Searching for the lost space of Ottoman visions of the sea, The Red Seamakes a deeper argument about the discipline of history and the historian's craft.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt19633g6

Book Title: The Thought of Music- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Kramer Lawrence
Abstract: What, exactly, is knowledge of music? And what does it tell us about humanistic knowledge in general? The Thought of Musicgrapples directly with these fundamental questions-questions especially compelling at a time when humanistic knowledge is enmeshed in debates about its character and future. In this third volume in a trilogy on musical understanding that includesInterpreting MusicandExpression and Truth, Lawrence Kramer seeks answers in both thoughtaboutmusic and thoughtinmusic-thinking in tones. He skillfully assesses musical scholarship in the aftermath of critical musicology and musical hermeneutics and in view of more recent concerns with embodiment, affect, and performance. This authoritative and timely work challenges the prevailing conceptions of every topic it addresses: language, context, and culture; pleasure and performance; and, through music, the foundations of understanding in the humanities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt19cc225

ONE Music and the Forms of Thought from: The Thought of Music
Abstract: Much recent work, both pro and con, suggests that one thing we should be asking—still—is this: What does music have to do with ideas? The form of the question implies that the ideas at issue are not ideas about

FIVE The Cultural Field: from: The Thought of Music
Abstract: We have now come to a threshold. Regardless of whether the preceding chapters have examined musical knowledge via concepts, language, or sensation, the knowledge proposed has always been culturally inflected. What else could it have been? Musical knowledge is cultural knowledge. That is so virtually by definition. Or it would be, if we could somehow stabilize the protean term culture. Culture is something—a word, an idea, a metaphor—that we cannot seem to do without but that we always ask to do too much work for us. For present purposes, the term may be taken to denote the loose

SEVEN The Newer Musicology? from: The Thought of Music
Abstract: The vicissitudes of authorship revisited in chapter 6 point to a larger issue. Since around 2000 there has been a lot of musicological effort lavished on the “workconcept” and the competing claims of the fixed, authoritative musical work and the creative act of performance, mostly to the detriment of the work. Like most such binary quarrels, this one reveals a little and obscures a lot. It certainly oversimplifies the historical situation, which is full of complex instances in which the roles of the work—as inscription, conception, or instruction—and of performance—as animation, interpretation, or reproduction—meet, mix, and

POSTSCRIPT: from: The Thought of Music
Abstract: The musical score is iconic in classical music. Only with the score can fully composed music, musical works, be transmitted intact for realization in multiple performances. The score, one would think, is a wonderful invention. But in recent years the score has lost a good measure of the authority and prestige that once seemed to accrue to it automatically. For some, at any rate, the chief features of the score are its incompleteness and imprecision, up to and including a fundamental falseness.

Magic Words from: Symposium of the Whole
Abstract: Material reworked from The Netsilik Eskimos (1931), representing field work by Knud Rasmussen (1879–1933), Danish explorer and ethnologist, of Eskimo ancestry on his motherʹs side. Nalungiaq, ʺjust an ordinary womanʺ (she says), learned it from an old uncle, Unaraluk the shaman, whose helping spirits—his dead father and mother, the sun, a dog, and a sea scorpion—enabled him to ʺknow everything about what was on the earth and under the earth, in the sea and in the sky.ʺ

The Age of the Gods and the Origins of Language from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) VICO GIAMBATTISTA
Abstract: The ʺPrinciples of New Science of Giambattista Vico concerning the Common Nature of the Nationsʺ (first edition:1725) is a model work (comparative, evolutionary) for later history and anthropology: a view of the history of all societies as the account of their birth and development. But itʹs also a virtual speculative ethnopoetics in which the poetry of the ʺNationsʺ (= gentiles/gentes = Gk. ethnoi) already looms large. The core of the work, an extended section called ʺPoetic Wisdom,ʺ sets out a kind o f aboriginal creativity-writ-large that comes back full circle into the projected ʺnew science.ʺ Of that interplay between the

From The Marriage of Heaven & Hell from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) BLAKE WILLIAM
Abstract: As does his very different contemporary Goethe, Blake appears today as one of the first of the new poets to revive in his own work a more-than-literary role as (ʺvisionaryʺ) shaper-of-the-real. (See Vico, above, p. 4.) Of the prevalence of such a mythopoetic mode in a larger human history, he wrote: ʺThe antiquities of every Nation under Heaven, is no less sacred than that of the Jews. They are the same thing as Jacob Bryant, and all antiquaries have proved. How other antiquities came to be neglected and disbelieved, while those of the jews are collected and arranged, is an

From “Mauvais Sang” [Bad Blood] from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) RIMBAUD ARTHUR
Abstract: The center of an ethnopoetics in Rimbaudʹs work is his recovery (circa 1870 at age 16) of the shaman-like poet who ʺmust become a seer, make oneself a seer … by a long, prodigious & systematic derangement of the senses.ʺ (Compare, e.g., the Copper Eskimo word for the shaman/songman [= poet]: ʺone who has eyes.ʺ) But along with that comes an early internalization of the once distant ʺsavageʺ—a ferocious play, in Rimbaudʹs case, that fuses his imagined Gallic/pagan ancestors (ʺthe race that sang under tortureʺ) with those contemporary outcasts and criminals (local and colonial) who become for him a kind

A Note on Negro Poetry/Oceanian Art from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) TZARA TRISTAN
Abstract: As an avant-garde extremist and co-founder of the Dada movement—Zurich 1916 in the midst of World War I—Tzara called for ʺa great negative work of destructionʺ against the European nation-state as a ʺstate of madness, the aggressive complete madness of a world left in the hands of bandits who vandalize and destroy the centuries.ʺ But the constructive side of the work included a project to recoup the model of a primal art and poetry, toward which he assembled, using numerous scholarly sources, a first anthology of tribal/oral poems from a fiercely modernist perspective—poèmes nègres, never published in

On Negritude from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) DEPESTRE RENÉ
Abstract: ʺNegritudeʺ was—from one of its directions—a culmination of Surrealist concepts of an alternative consciousness ʺopposed to the values of Europeʺ and ʺviolently departing once and for all from the ways of thinking and feeling which have made life no longer bearable.ʺ (Thus: André Breton, the master of French Surrealism, in his preface—1943—to the Martinican poet Aimé CésaireʹsNotebook of a Return to the Native Land.)The young French-speaking black poets (Césaire, Senghor, et al.) who launched the movement in the 1930s tied all that tothisparticular culture or network of cultures—ʺA frica,ʺ then colonized—

The Epilogue to Shamanism from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ELIADE MIRCEA
Abstract: An experimental novelist earlier along (his objective, in the Rumanian phrase, to ʺsabotage historyʺ), Eliade became a historian of religion and the greatest living reinterpreter of the sacred dimensions of religion and thought, setting these against a contemporary ʺdesacralization of natureʺ through an impressive sweep of disciplines and cultures (shamanism, yoga, alchemy, etc.). His large work on shamanism is still the best guide to the subject, reinforcing an intuition long held of the shaman as artist and thinker as well as ʺmedicine man, priest and psychopompus.ʺ In the present co-editorʹs book, Technicians of the Sacred (the title itself is a

Poetry and the Primitive: from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) SNYDER GARY
Abstract: ʺAs a poet I hold the most archaic values on earth. They go back to the Paleolithic: the fertility o f the soil, the magic of animals. The power-vision in solitude, the terrifying initiation and rebirth, the love and ecstasy of the damned, the common work of the tribe.ʺ

Pre-Face to Technicians of the Sacred from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ROTHENBERG JEROME
Abstract: ʺTherefore, in outline: (1) the traditions in question add to any reconsideration of poetry as ʹvisionʹ & ʹcommunionʹ a series of authentic instances (historical & cultural) in which such functions were realized; (2) they provide the idea of the oral & mythic as self-corrective tellings, & the evidence of how it works; (3) they give a functional dimension to ʹmeaningʹ or ʹsignificanceʹ in the poetic act: the evidence that even apparently minimal forms may have a great complexity of function (ʹthe smallest things can turn you onʹ—P. Blackburn) … but at the same time, an expanded notion of alternative poetic & linguistic structures; (4)

The Meaning of Meaningless Words and the Coefficient of Weirdness from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) MALINOWSKI BRONISLAW
Abstract: Malinowski lays down one major line of British functionalism, as A. R. Radcliffe-Brown lays down the other (structural-functionalism). But if Radcliffe-Brownʹs version has the greater theoretical carry-over at present, Malinowski has set a model for anthropological fieldwork and its attendant theory and has had an extraordinary impact as a teacher of later anthropologists and on a range of Western and Third World thought outside of anthropology itself. His principal writings in this regard come out of his extended work in the Trobriands and other islands off the southeast tip of New Guinea (1912–1916), and include such books as Argonauts

How the Names are Changed on the Peyote Journey from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) SILVA RAMÓN MEDINA
Abstract: The poetry of reversals described by the maraʹakáme (shaman), Ramón Medina Silva, of San Sebastian, Mexico, is part of the Huichol peyote hunt and ritual (see below, p. 225). The tactic is common to the languages, acts, and dream-work of shamans and sacred clowns throughout the world. Its Crow Indian manifestation, for example, took the form of warrior societies of ʺcontrariesʺ (Crazy Dogs) whose behavior included ʺsaying the opposite of what you mean & making others say the opposite of what they mean in returnʺ (Rothenberg 1972: 195). As a more deeply rooted philosophy of contradictions, it reentered Western thought through

Koyukon Riddle-Poems from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) DAUENHAUER RICHARD
Abstract: The riddle in verbal culture is part of the stock-in-trade of academic folklore, but its relation to the poetic image (see above, p. 119) has rarely been explored. The workings presented here were originally published in the Riddle and Poetry Handbook, developed by Richard Dauenhauer as a project of the Alaska Native Education Board in Anchorage. With Nora Dauenhauer, a native Tlingit speaker, Dauenhauer has for some years engaged in translation projects (Tlingit into English, English into Tlingit) aimed at Tlingit-speaking audiences.

Izibongo: from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) COPE TREVOR
Abstract: The praise-poem as a stringing-together of new or inherited praise-names (e.g., Yoruba oriki, Zulu izibongo, Basuto lithoko, Hausa kirari) is found throughout much of Africa. ʺSuch words or phrases,ʺ writes Ruth Finnegan, ʺoccur frequently within the more complex form of a complete poemʺ (1970: 111), and the praise-poem itself can become extremely complex and diversified. But the basic method holds—a kind of ʺcollagingʺ in which the individual poet takes off from the work of the collectivity, adding to it as last in a line of makers. His art therefore is one of creation and assemblage—the weighing of line

The Divination Poetry of Ifa from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) FINNEGAN RUTH
Abstract: Though divination as such has had minimal impact on contemporary poetry, the underpinnings of divination in systematic chance procedures relate closely to processes used by experimental poets and artists, from the Dada work of Duchamp, Arp, and Tzara to its fuller development by Jackson Mac Low and John Cage. For this, the traditional system most drawn from is that of the Chinese I Ching, as modified by Carl Jungʹs speculation on ʺsynchronicity,ʺ the ʺacausal connectionsʺ between things happening at the same time (Wilhelm/Baynes 1950). But itʹs in the widespread African practices that we find a still actively creative, large, and

Some Ewe Poets from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) AWOONOR KOFI
Abstract: A major African poet and himself a native Ewe-speaker, Awoonorʹs first-hand assessment of the individuality of the Ewe song-poets puts to rest the common view of the anonymous/collective nature of all tribal poetry. His own work in English, he tells us, has ʺattempted to incorporate the features of the Ewe dirgeʺ and other forms of oral poetry, ʺborrowing liberally from [such poets as] Akpaluʺ in what Awoonor calls ʺa deliberate act of falling back upon a tradition which has been ignored in our missionary education and whose practice has been labeled paganistic by our Christian mentorsʺ (1975: 202, 208).

The Fertilizing Word from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) GRIAULE MARCEL
Abstract: The conversations between Ogotemmêli, an elder of the Dogon in the Western Sudan, and the ethnographer, Marcel Griaule, took place over thirty-three successive days in October 1946. During that time, according to Griaule, Ogotemmêli ʺlaid bare the framework of a world system: … a cosmogony as rich as that of Hesiod, poet of a dead world, and a metaphysics that has the advantage of being expressed in a thousand rites and actions in the life of a multitude of living beingsʺ (1965: 3). That ʺsystemʺ—or the part of it presented to Griaule—sets up a vast web of correspondences

The Return of the Symbol from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ELIADE MIRCEA
Abstract: The headnote on the place and work of Mircea Eliade appears on page 59, above.

The Aesthetics of the Sounding of the Text from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) LANSING J. STEPHEN
Abstract: Whatʹs ʺmissingʺ from Artaudʹs spontaneous take on Balinese theater (see above, p. 235) is the awareness of a self-conscious body of discourse, an indigenous and fully formulated Balinese poetics, behind the work observed. This poetics—following from what Stephen Lansing, on a Southeast Asian model, calls ʺthe aesthetics of the ʹsounding of the textʹ ʺ—illuminates not only Balinese performance per se but the nature of performance art in general. Such an ʺillumination in generalʺ is, of course, what weʹve always posited for forms of Western discourse—the assumption, for example, that Aristotleʹs equally localized, Athenian Poetics is the basis,

From “Shamanistic Theater: Origins and Evolution” from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) KIRBY ERNEST THEODORE
Abstract: The relation of shamans and their works to art, dance, music, poetry, performance—and, above all, to vision and healing—traces back to the Dancing Sorcerers of Europeʹs paleolithic caves. ʺRain kings, magic protectors, chiefs, artisans and ambassadors,ʺ the shamans, now rediscovered, have become the prototypical ʺculture heroes … of all the European artsʺ (La Barre 1970: 422). Weston La Barre stresses the shamanʹs ʺsecret magic, musicʺ through ʺthe harpsinging shaman Apollo … leader of the muses,ʺ but the shaman has also emerged as a kind of protopoet—ʺvery much,ʺ writes Peter Furst, ʺRadinʹs own PRIMITIVE MAN AS PHILOSOPHER.ʺ (See

From The Sorrow of the Lonely and the Burning of the Dancers from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) SCHIEFFELIN EDWARD L.
Abstract: The interaction between performer and spectator has been an issue of performance theory—Western and other—from Aristotleʹs catharsis to contemporary experiments with participatory theater, etc. (see below, p. 311). In the Papua New Guinea instance following, the projection and expulsion, here of grief and anger, works through a language-centered, basically social and nonmystical exploitation of human feelings—a cathartic geography, a primal poetry of name and place. ʺMoving and violent,ʺ in Schieffelinʹs words, the Gisaro Ceremony is itself part of a larger series of ceremonial events involving ritual exchanges between kinsmen who are living at some distance from each

From “Rites of Participation” from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) DUNCAN ROBERT
Abstract: ʺA multiphasic experience sought a multiphasic form,ʺ wrote Robert Duncan (D. Allen 1960:435) toward a poetics, rich in influences and sources, that could set the work of an avant-garde alongside both the Western ʺmainstreamʺ (Dante, Whitman, the Romantics) and those subterranean traditions (Kabbalah, Gnosticism, etc.) that had long been ʺneglected, even scornedʺ but ʺin which one begins to find the Gnosis o f the modern w orld.ʺ Duncan is also, in both his poetry and poetics, a principal reinterpreter of myth as an ongoing human process, so crucial to him that he writes: ʺThe meaning and intent of what it

A Review of “Ethnopoetics” from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) TURNER VICTOR
Abstract: Victor Turner has been a major and highly influential anthropologist since the late 1950s. His contributions to symbolic anthropology and to a unified theory of performance include concepts of liminality andcommunitas,social drama, reflexivity, and symbolic process, applicable to a wide range of human cultures but developed from particular situations such as that of the Ndembu of eastern Africa. In the present article, he reviews the proceedings of ʺthe first international symposium on ethnopoeticsʺ as gathered by Michel Benamou and Jerome Rothenberg in a special issue ofAlcheringa(Benamou 1976). Principal works:The Forest of Symbols, The Ritual Process,

Some North Pacific Coast Poems: from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) HYMES DELL
Abstract: As a major anthropological linguist, Hymesʹs early and ongoing contribution to an ethnopoetics has been a practical ʺstructuralismʺ that attempts to examine and represent ʺways in which narratives [or, as here, songs] are organizations of linguistic meansʺ—a work he has pursued not by ʺleaping to universalsʺ but by ʺthe development of theories adequate and specific to each tradition.ʺ Beginning with the present essay—a criticism and virtual ʺdeconstructionʺ of earlier translation work—Hymes later focused on the performative side of traditional oral poetry (i.e., on its ʺrealization in performanceʺ) in ways akin to the proposals and practice of Dennis

Total Translation: from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ROTHENBERG JEROME
Abstract: At the time o f this writing (1969), the other key works toward

The Tenth Horse Song of Frank Mitchell from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) McALLESTER DAVID P.
Abstract: Among the great American ethnomusicologists, David P. McAllester has had an eminent sense of the possibilities of an actual poetics emerging from the verbal materials with which he has dealt. His principal area of ethnographic concern has been Navajo, and he has worked with Navajo music and poetry (and their complex interworkings) for close to thirty-five years. The present essay was originally published alongside Jerome Rothenbergʹs experimental translations of the Navajo horse-songs (see above, pp. 381, 387), for which McAllester served as transmitter and adviser. Though their strategies for translation diverge significantly, McAllesterʹs view, circa 1966, of the spirit of

Fragments from the Prayers Made on Behalf of Nathaniel Tarn by the Tzutujil-Maya Priest Nicolas Chiviliu Tacaxoy, Santiago Atitlan, Guatemala, 1953, 1959 from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) TARN NATHANIEL
Abstract: Nathaniel Tarnʹs early work as an anthropologist (contemporary Mayan culture, popular Buddhism in Burma) informs the richness of reference in his later poetry (pre-Conquest and early post-Conquest themes inA Nowhere for Vallejo,Inuit [Eskimo] observations inAlashka,etc.). He founded, in the 1960s, the Cape Coliard poetry series and the influential Cape Editions, a series of small books which forged significant links between poetics and contemporary social theory. Principal works:Beautiful Contradictions, A Nowhere for Vallejo, Lyrics for the Bride of God, Alashka(with Janet Rodney), Rabinal Achi (Act IV).Among recent writings on ethnopoetics is ʺThe Heraldic Vision:

The Man Made of Words from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) MOMADAY N. SCOTT
Abstract: Author of the Pulitzer Prize novel, House Made of Dawn,N. Scott Momaday is the most prominent of the American Indian novelists and is a poet in the tradition of his teacher, Yvor Winters. His personal and familial works—drawing from his Kiowa Indian background and from the sense of a poetics offered in the present piece—includeThe Way to Rainy MountainandThe Names.

From “The Incredible Survival of Coyote” from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) SNYDER GARY
Abstract: Gary Snyderʹs researches, which form a part of his own work, go back to the early 1950s and a thesis, He Who Hunted Birds in His Fatherʹs Village: The Dimensions of a Haida Myth,only recently published as a book. A key contributor to the ethnopoetic discourse (see above, p. 90), his principal works includeMyths and Texts, Regarding Wave,andTurtle Island(poetry);Earth House HoldandThe Old Ways(essays); andThe Real Work(talks and interviews).

The Birth of Loba from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) DI PRIMA DIANE
Abstract: The work of Diane di Prima—poetry, theater, autobiography—relates not only to European but to non-Western folklore and mythology: her anthology, Various Fables from Various Places;her projected worldwide gathering on ʺthe goddessʺ; her early staging of new ritual performances; and her long-running auto-mythological poem, Loba,to which the present lecture excerpt refers. The selection given here can be read in relation to the two preceding sections on Coyote, or to the Ainu version of the wolf goddess (see above, p. 156), or to the various discussions herein on the suppression and reemergence of the goddess figure (p. 36,

The hinges of civilization to be put back on the door from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) OLSON CHARLES
Abstract: Charles Olson was one of the major figures between Ezra Pound and the present in opening up American poetry to a range of ancient and contemporary/Western and non-Western cultures. (See above, p. 62.) His principal ʺethnopoeticʺ works, as such, areThe Mayan Letters, Causal Mythology, The Special View of History,and the various lectures and writings assembled posthumously inMuthologos—but the same impulse is present throughout his cumulative masterwork, The Maximus Poems.

The Preface to Hades in Manganese from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ESHLEMAN CLAYTON
Abstract: From 1967—1973, Clayton Eshleman was the editor ofCaterpillar,a seminal magazine of the new poetry in which some of the early ethnopoetic discourse first appeared. His own work draws from travels to Peru (ʺOn Mule Back to Chavinʺ) and Japan (The House of Okomura, etc.)—an interplay in mind and at first hand with those and other cultures—and from extensive translations of such poets as Vallejo, Neruda, Artaud, and Césaire. The vision of the ʺpaleolithic imaginationʺ and what he calls ʺthe construction of the underworldʺ marks his distinctive contribution to an expanded ethnopoetics—pursued over the last

Talking to Discover from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ANTIN DAVID
Abstract: As an early participant in the ethnopoetic discussion, David Antin has explored a radically ʺnewʺ source for poetry in speech and discourse. This has involved, as here, a tension with the idea of poetryʹs origins in song, and an intensification, touched on in the pieces that follow and elsewhere in this book, of the old dichotomy between the oral and the written. Antinʹs own poetry over the last decade has taken a form sometimes indistinguishable from ʺtalkingʺ per se, culminating in an ongoing series of written and elaborated poem-transcriptions. (See below, p. 469.) His principal works in this genre are

From “DiaLogos: Between the Written and the Oral in Contemporary Poetry” from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) QUASHA GEORGE
Abstract: George Quashaʹs wide-ranging magazine, Stony Brook,provided a first forum, 1968–1969, to renew the discourse about ethnopoetics as such. (The term itself was first used here—by Jerome Rothenberg, who also acted as ʺethnopoetics editor.ʺ) Quasha has also been co-editor ofAmerica a Prophecy(Quasha and Rothenberg 1973), editor of two anthologies of contemporary work, Open PoetryandActive Anthology,and author of the ongoing long poem, Somapoetics.His contribution to the issues of voicing/writing as mapped in this anthology has been to expand the idea of a poetics in a variety of ways (metapoetics, parapoetics, somapoetics, etc.) and

Writing in the Imagination of an Oral Poet from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) MUNN HENRY
Abstract: The following essay by Henry Munn presents a necessary complication of the ʺoralityʺ issue in ethnopoetics (see above, passim)—the location of a concept of ʺbookʺ and ʺwritingʺ at center of the genuine ethnopoetics of a major oral poet (see above, p. 187). The interested reader can relate it to the proposal of an archécriture (or primal writing)—the idea of writing itself as, in David Antinʹs term, a ʺnatural genreʺ co-equal with speech, etc.—presented in the workings of such a contemporary philosopher as Jacques Derrida (see above, p. 139). Henry Munn is the author of an important introduction

The Death of Sedna from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) CARPENTER EDMUND
Abstract: Edmund Carpenterʹs field studies and media experiments range from the Canadian Arctic and Siberia to Southeast Asia, Borneo, and New Guinea. His early collaboration with Marshall McLuhan gave the latter his principal link to areas of anthropological concern. A significant part of Carpenterʹs own work involves the impact of the new technology and its resultant monoculture on the worldʹs surviving software cultures. Principal works:Eskimo Realities, They Became What They Beheld, Explorations in Communication(ed., with Marhsall McLuhan), andOh, What a Blow that Phantom Gave Me!

5 Weak Ties—Strong Emotions: from: A Dream Denied
Abstract: Darell had been angry a lot over the past few weeks. He felt misunderstood by his DCF caseworker and his probation officer. More than that, he didn’t care for the group home he currently lived in. “It’s not my home,” he said, “and these people are not my family members.” Whether they were family members or not, Darell was surrounded by people who were supposed to care for him. He had a probation officer, a DCF caseworker, and a social worker. Darell and his mother also saw a family therapist.

Introduction from: Listening for the Secret
Abstract: On February 24, 1974, the Grateful Dead played at Winterland in San Francisco, California. The show, presented by Bill Graham, also was introduced by the promoter, who said ʺWhatever is going on in the rest of the world, if itʹs war or kidnappings or crimes, this is a peaceful Sunday night with the Grateful Dead.ʺ Indeed; this was just one of the fifty-nine shows that the Grateful Dead played at Winterland; one more night, then, in the life of a hardworking rock and roll band.

talking at blérancourt from: i never knew what time it was
Abstract: you know if general motors makes a lemon of a car its your problem but if an artist makes a lousy artwork its his problem or her problem so it turns out that artists

Book Title: Alef, Mem, Tau-Kabbalistic Musings on Time, Truth, and Death
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Wolfson Elliot R.
Abstract: This highly original, provocative, and poetic work explores the nexus of time, truth, and death in the symbolic world of medieval kabbalah. Demonstrating that the historical and theoretical relationship between kabbalah and western philosophy is far more intimate and extensive than any previous scholar has ever suggested, Elliot R. Wolfson draws an extraordinary range of thinkers such as Frederic Jameson, Martin Heidegger, Franz Rosenzweig, William Blake, Julia Kristeva, Friedrich Schelling, and a host of kabbalistic figures into deep conversation with one another. Alef, Mem, Taualso discusses Islamic mysticism and Buddhist thought in relation to the Jewish esoteric tradition as it opens the possibility of a temporal triumph of temporality and the conquering of time through time. The framework for Wolfson's examination is the rabbinic teaching that the wordemet,"truth," comprises the first, middle, and last letters of the Hebrew alphabet,alef, mem,andtau,which serve, in turn, as semiotic signposts for the three tenses of time-past, present, and future. By heeding the letters ofemetwe discern the truth of time manifestly concealed in the time of truth, the beginning that cannot begin if it is to be the beginning, the middle that re/marks the place of origin and destiny, and the end that is the figuration of the impossible disclosing the impossibility of figuration, the finitude of death that facilitates the possibility of rebirth. The time of death does not mark the death of time, but time immortal, the moment of truth that bestows on the truth of the moment an endless beginning of a beginningless end, the truth of death encountered incessantly in retracing steps of time yet to be taken-between, before, beyond.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pn5mn

CANTO XXII Virgil and Statius Discourse from: Lectura Dantis
Author(s) KLEINHENZ CHRISTOPHER
Abstract: The various themes and narrative threads that constitute Canto XXI all come together in Canto XXII : the interrelated notions of thresholds and conversion; the shift from philosophy to theology and from philosophical prose to religious poetry; the confrontation of human reason and its limitations with profound religious mysteries; and the bittersweet celebration of the ancient world, of Virgil for the excellence of his poetic model, and of Virgil’s works for the moral and spiritual influence they reputedly exerted. This combination of elements forms what could rightly be called the triumph of Virgil and of his poetry as they were

Book Title: The Cosmic Time of Empire-Modern Britain and World Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Barrows Adam
Abstract: Combining original historical research with literary analysis, Adam Barrows takes a provocative look at the creation of world standard time in 1884 and rethinks the significance of this remarkable moment in modernism for both the processes of imperialism and for modern literature. As representatives from twenty-four nations argued over adopting the Prime Meridian, and thereby measuring time in relation to Greenwich, England, writers began experimenting with new ways of representing human temporality. Barrows finds this experimentation in works as varied as Victorian adventure novels, high modernist texts, and South Asian novels—including the work of James Joyce, Virginia Woolf, H. Rider Haggard, Bram Stoker, Rudyard Kipling, and Joseph Conrad. Demonstrating the investment of modernist writing in the problems of geopolitics and in the public discourse of time, Barrows argues that it is possible, and productive, to rethink the politics of modernism through the politics of time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pn7rg

Book Title: Postcolonial Disorders- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Good Byron J.
Abstract: The essays in this volume reflect on the nature of subjectivity in the diverse places where anthropologists work at the beginning of the twenty-first century. Contributors explore everyday modes of social and psychological experience, the constitution of the subject, and forms of subjection that shape the lives of Basque youth, Indonesian artists, members of nongovernmental HIV/AIDS programs in China and the Republic of Congo, psychiatrists and the mentally ill in Morocco and Ireland, and persons who have suffered trauma or been displaced by violence in the Middle East and in South and Southeast Asia. Painting on book jacket by Entang Wiharso
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pn9nx

POSTCOLONIAL DISORDERS: from: Postcolonial Disorders
Author(s) Pinto Sarah
Abstract: This book is a collection of essays reflecting on the nature of subjectivity—on everyday modes of experience, the social and psychological dimensions of individual lives, the psychological qualities of social life, the constitution of the subject, and forms of subjection found in the diverse places where anthropologists work at the beginning of the twenty-first century. The essays are a conscious effort to find new ways to link the social and the psychological, to examine how lives of individuals, families and communities are affected by large-scale political and economic forces associated with globalization, and to theorize subjectivity within this larger

1 MADNESS AND THE POLITICALLY REAL: from: Postcolonial Disorders
Author(s) Aretxaga Begoña
Abstract: When I was invited to take part in this seminar I was happy to have an opportunity to discuss some of my current work with former colleagues and friends. I have been increasingly preoccupied with the problem of madness as it plays and as it is displayed in the theater of politics. This is for me the beginning of a dialogue about this issue that one could broadly call “politics and madness.” In this sense what I am speaking about today is more the beginning of a formulation than a crafted thesis.

2 INDONESIA SAKIT: from: Postcolonial Disorders
Author(s) Good Byron J.
Abstract: Artists—painters, playwrights, musicians—imagined and re-imaged the state and Indonesian society as Suharto’s New Order regime unraveled after thirty-three years of autocratic rule. At the heart of this chapter are the work and reflections of three contemporary Indonesian painters and their efforts to constitute a space and visual language for critical engagement with their society. The chapter draws on our conversations about their subjective experiences of producing art and describes their ongoing efforts to carve out distinctive modes of subjectivity as artists and intellectuals during the period of reformasi, or reform, that followed the fall of Suharto.

5 LABORATORY OF INTERVENTION: from: Postcolonial Disorders
Author(s) Pandolfi Mariella
Abstract: Since the end of the colonial era, many of the territories where anthropologists have worked have been witness to an increasingly visible “humanitarian presence.” The massive army of volunteer workers, international experts, local staff, and soldiers associated with humanitarian intervention has had a remarkable impact on local cultural landscapes. Despite the increasing proliferation of these zones of humanitarian and military intervention, anthropologists are only beginning to examine the theoretical and practical consequences of these new forms of intervention. Intervention studies present a perilous but necessary challenge to the anthropological community. They force us to consider both new sites of intervention

Book Title: Interpreting Music- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Kramer Lawrence
Abstract: Interpreting Musicis a comprehensive essay on understanding musical meaning and performing music meaningfully-"interpreting music" in both senses of the term. Synthesizing and advancing two decades of highly influential work, Lawrence Kramer fundamentally rethinks the concepts of work, score, performance, performativity, interpretation, and meaning-even the very concept of music-while breaking down conventional wisdom and received ideas. Kramer argues that music, far from being closed to interpretation, is ideally open to it, and that musical interpretation is the paradigm of interpretation in general. The book illustrates the many dimensions of interpreting music through a series of case studies drawn from the classical repertoire, but its methods and principles carry over to other repertoires just as they carry beyond music by workingthroughmusic to wider philosophical and cultural questions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pnchw

5 Metaphor from: Interpreting Music
Abstract: So far in this book we have started with concepts and worked toward music. This chapter, to help keep a promise made earlier, goes in the opposite direction. It begins, literally and figuratively, with a prelude, and dwells on the minute particulars of both the music and its performance. The idea is to embark in medias res without too firm a sense of ultimate direction. The hope is that when reflection inevitably follows, the particular feelings and values that prompt it will continue to resonate as reminders that we can understand what music “is” only in light of what we

Book Title: Reason to Believe-Cultural Agency in Latin American Evangelicalism
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Smilde David
Abstract: Evangelical Protestantism has arguably become the fastest-growing religion in South America, if not the world. For converts, it emphasizes self-discipline and provides a network of communal support, which together have helped many overcome substance abuse, avoid crime and violence, and resolve relationship problems. But can people simply decide to believe in a religion because of the benefits it reportedly delivers? Based on extensive fieldwork among Pentecostal men in Caracas, Venezuela, this rich urban ethnography seeks an explanation for the explosion of Evangelical Protestantism, unraveling the cultural and personal dynamics of Evangelical conversion to show how and why these men make the choice to convert, and how they come to have faith in a new system of beliefs and practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pnncj

CHAPTER 1 Making Sense of Cultural Agency from: Reason to Believe
Abstract: Jorge was born in the Afro-Venezuelan coastal region of Barlovento and as a child moved with his family to Petare, the massive group of barrios at the eastern end of Caracas. At fourteen he dropped out of school to work and help his mother support eleven brothers and sisters. During Jorge’s formative years, Petare evolved from a slum with grinding poverty into a slum with grinding poverty, drugs, and violence—a process Jorge’s family experienced in concrete and tragic terms. When Jorge was in his late teens a feud between some of his brothers and other malandros(delinquents) led the

CHAPTER 6 The Social Structure of Conversion from: Reason to Believe
Abstract: Gabriel has suffered from epileptic seizures for most of his life. When he was a boy he worked for seven years in a shoe-repair factory. In his context it was a decent job that provided resources for his poor family; and his cousin would fill in for him when his health made it impossible to work. However, at fifteen he was in one of Caracas’s nightmarish bus accidents—in this case the bus plunged into the Guaire River that runs along most of the main highway. The injuries he suffered made his seizures more frequent and eventually obliged him to

Book Title: Between One and One Another- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Jackson Michael
Abstract: Michael Jackson extends his path-breaking work in existential anthropology by focusing on the interplay between two modes of human existence: that of participating in other peoples’ lives and that of turning inward to one’s self. Grounding his discussion in the subtle shifts between being acted upon and taking action, Jackson shows how the historical complexities and particularities found in human interactions reveal the dilemmas, conflicts, cares, and concerns that shape all of our lives. Through portraits of individuals encountered in the course of his travels, including friends and family, and anthropological fieldwork pursued over many years in such places as Sierra Leone and Australia, Jackson explores variations on this theme. As he describes the ways we address and negotiate the vexed relationships between “I” and “we”—the one and the many—he is also led to consider the place of thought in human life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pnphx

CHAPTER 1 Preamble from: Between One and One Another
Abstract: In the late 1930s, Gregory Bateson and Margaret Mead did pioneering ethnographic fieldwork in a Balinese village, using still and movie cameras to capture some of the “intangible aspects” of Balinese culture and everyday life, including trance, eating, gesture, mourning, family interactions, children’s play, art, and shadow-play puppets. In her introductory essay to their 1942 monograph, Mead speaks of a Balinese passion for being part of a noisy, festive crowd. Whether a marketplace, temple court, theatrical event, elaborate carving, or close-packed array of offerings on an altar, “the crowd preference is seen everywhere in Balinese life.¹ Women are said to

CHAPTER 11 Yonder from: Between One and One Another
Abstract: There is a compelling passage in Siri Hustvedt’s essay “Yonder” that immediately brought to my mind the life and work of the painter Ian Fairweather. Hustvedt was born in America of Norwegian parents, and her childhood map of the world “consisted of two regions only: Minnesota and Norway, my here and my there.”¹ This was the “yonder” her father described as a place “between here and there,” a place that could not be occupied without it becoming “here” and thereby creating another elusive and indeterminate yonder, elsewhere. As writers, Hustvedt and her husband, Paul Auster, were fascinated by the similarity

CHAPTER 13 On the Work and Writing of Ethnography from: Between One and One Another
Abstract: My focus is the ethical question of how it is possible, in our ethnographic fieldwork and writing, to reconcile our intellectual preoccupations with the often radically different preoccupations of our interlocutors. How, in brief, can we strike a balance between doing justice to the people who accept us into their communities, sharing their

2 The Experiential Basis of Subjectivity: from: Subjectivity
Author(s) FITZ-HENRY ERIN
Abstract: For years, the study of subjectivity has been dominated by theories of the self that interrogate cultural representations and performance. These studies have a certain richness in helping us understand how societies change because they are able to deal with collective transformations through major cultural meanings and practices. But they usually leave the intimate subjectivity of individuals unanalyzed, like a black box, or bring to it a decidedly sectarian view, such as Freudian psychoanalysis, which has long been overworked and overreached as an explanatory framework. However, anthropology has downplayed, at least since W. H. R. Rivers, the importance of theories

[PART II Introduction] from: Subjectivity
Abstract: In ″Hamlet in Purgatory,″ literary scholar Stephen Greenblatt challenges Freud′s privileging of Oedipus as the modern representative of psychological interiority. Greenblatt maintains that Shakespeare′s Hamlet is the one who does this work (chapter 5 in this volume). ″Remember me″ is the haunting demand of the dead father to Prince Hamlet. Following Goethe′s lead in seeing the prince as more of a neurotic than a hero, Greenblatt tests Jacques Lacan′s idea that the subject is the doing of the phantasm (1979) by actually traversing Hamlet′s ghost in history, so to speak. ″Something have you heard of Hamlet′s transformation: so I call

10 Hoarders and Scrappers: from: Subjectivity
Author(s) LOVELL ANNE M.
Abstract: As anthropologists rush to salvage culture in the wake of an increasingly biologized and globally homogenized psychiatry, they are focusing anew on phenomenology and the subjective experience of people afflicted with the anomalous states, feelings, and cognition of madness. But recent studies suggest that, in the Western settings in which psychiatry evolved, the cultural, macrosocial, and microsocial underpinnings of severe psychiatric conditions cannot so easily be separated from psychiatric knowledge. The comparative method of cross-cultural research, useful in uncovering the cultural dimension of psychiatric conditions outside the realm of biomedicine and Western psychiatry, is less helpful for recognizing the work

13 ″To Be Freed from the Infirmity of (the) Age″: from: Subjectivity
Author(s) KRAKAUER ERIC L.
Abstract: Ms. A is a seventy-five-year-old woman with multiple chronic medical problems related to her long history of diabetes mellitus, hypertension, and smoking. She had two myocardial infarctions that resulted in congestive heart failure. She also has a history of chronic renal failure, emphysema, chronic foot pain, and mild dementia that probably was the result of several small strokes. A working class, Protestant widow, Ms. A had lived in a retirement home for the past few years, where she required some assistance with her activities of daily living. She had worked intermittently at part-time jobs as a housekeeper and waitress, had

Book Title: The Language of the Gods in the World of Men-Sanskrit, Culture, and Power in Premodern India
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Pollock Sheldon
Abstract: In this work of impressive scholarship, Sheldon Pollock explores the remarkable rise and fall of Sanskrit, India's ancient language, as a vehicle of poetry and polity. He traces the two great moments of its transformation: the first around the beginning of the Common Era, when Sanskrit, long a sacred language, was reinvented as a code for literary and political expression, the start of an amazing career that saw Sanskrit literary culture spread from Afghanistan to Java. The second moment occurred around the beginning of the second millennium, when local speech forms challenged and eventually replaced Sanskrit in both the literary and political arenas. Drawing striking parallels, chronologically as well as structurally, with the rise of Latin literature and the Roman empire, and with the new vernacular literatures and nation-states of late-medieval Europe, The Language of the Gods in the World of Menasks whether these very different histories challenge current theories of culture and power and suggest new possibilities for practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pnqs7

CHAPTER SIX Political Formations and Cultural Ethos from: The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: Our exploration of the complex relationship between literature and space began with a legendary account of the origin of Sanskrit literature and a literary-theoretical discourse on Sanskrit styles and their regional dimensions. Both perspectives are conditioned by a conceptual matrix fundamental to Sanskrit thought for ordering and explaining the diverse phenomena of culture and society as elements in a transregional network closely related to Sanskrit’s own nonlocalized mode of existence. But there are other, literary linkages between literature and space. Narrative has an internal spatial logic, a “semiotic domain around which a plot coalesces and self-organizes,” as one scholar puts

Book Title: Imagining Karma-Ethical Transformation in Amerindian, Buddhist, and Greek Rebirth
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): OBEYESEKERE GANANATH
Abstract: With Imagining Karma,Gananath Obeyesekere embarks on the very first comparison of rebirth concepts across a wide range of cultures. Exploring in rich detail the beliefs of small-scale societies of West Africa, Melanesia, traditional Siberia, Canada, and the northwest coast of North America, Obeyesekere compares their ideas with those of the ancient and modern Indic civilizations and with the Greek rebirth theories of Pythagoras, Empedocles, Pindar, and Plato. His groundbreaking and authoritative discussion decenters the popular notion that India was the origin and locus of ideas of rebirth. As Obeyesekere compares responses to the most fundamental questions of human existence, he challenges readers to reexamine accepted ideas about death, cosmology, morality, and eschatology. Obeyesekere's comprehensive inquiry shows that diverse societies have come through independent invention or borrowing to believe in reincarnation as an integral part of their larger cosmological systems. The author brings together into a coherent methodological framework the thought of such diverse thinkers as Weber, Wittgenstein, and Nietzsche. In a contemporary intellectual context that celebrates difference and cultural relativism, this book makes a case for disciplined comparison, a humane view of human nature, and a theoretical understanding of "family resemblances" and differences across great cultural divides.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pns1h

1 KARMA AND REBIRTH IN INDIC RELIGIONS: from: Imagining Karma
Abstract: The major problem that I investigate in this work is the manner in which the “rebirth eschatologies” of small-scale societies are transformed in two large-scale historical developments: in the “karmic eschatologies” that one associates today with religions such as Buddhism and Hinduism and in the Greek religious traditions that could be broadly defined as “Pythagorean.”

3 THE IMAGINARY EXPERIMENT AND THE BUDDHIST IMPLICATIONS from: Imagining Karma
Abstract: The idea of scale is useful because historians agree that religions such as Buddhism, with their “karmic eschatologies,” emerged during India’s “second urbanization”(the first of course associated with the Indus valley civilizations). During this period small communities were linked to each other by trade networks and the imperialist designs of emergent empires. Similar, although not identical, social changes were occurring in the small Greek city-states, although the scale of change was not as great as in India. Avoiding terms like highandlow, primitiveandcivilized, greatandlittle, literateandpreliterate, classandclassless,and other such dichotomies, I

4 THE BUDDHIST ASCESIS from: Imagining Karma
Abstract: In chapter 3 I showed how religious innovations are constrained within the limits of prior structures of thought. At the same time I also wanted to give agency and creative capacity to religious innovators, but I was constrained by the imprisoning frames imposed by prior scholarship and my own preconceptions. Although poorly documented, creativity and cultural innovativeness are found in small-scale societies—we know this from the early work of Paul Radin, the lives of prophets like Handsome Lake and, of course, the famed Ogotommeli.¹ When we move to Greece in chapter 5, we will find scholarly constructions of the

6 REBIRTH AND REASON from: Imagining Karma
Abstract: Where does Plato come into our scheme of things? With him we are dealing with a thinker who carefully worked out a cosmology and eschatology of rebirth. I doubt that he would have done so had he not personally believed in its truth, and, for me, it is senseless to convert figures like the Buddha and Plato into figures of the European Enlightenment or, as some do, into modern and postmodern thinkers. Plato was not interested in conversion, but he addressed his message to those willing to listen, which for the most part meant the members of his academy. Nevertheless,

7 IMPRISONING FRAMES AND OPEN DEBATES: from: Imagining Karma
Abstract: In this final chapter I want to further explore a theme that pervades much of this work, that even radical religious innovation must occur within the frame of preexisting structures of thought, which can on occasion act as “prisons of the longue durée.” As usual I will place that notion within ethnographic and historical contexts, returning to the “small-scale” societies discussed in chapter 2, especially Trobriand. Then, varying our theme somewhat, I deal with Bali, a “nation” consisting of villages that resemble the small-scale societies of our sample yet have historical connections with Buddhist and Hindu cultures.

7 Beating the Meat/Surviving the Text, or How to Get Out of the Century Alive from: Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: Some time ago, in an issue of Science-Fiction Studies, I had occasion to rip into Jean Baudrillard’s body—both his lived body and his techno-body and the insurmountable, unthought, and thoughtless gap between them.¹ The journal had published an English translation of two of the French theorist-critic’s short essays on science fiction and technoculture,² one of them celebratingCrash, an extraordinary novel written by J. G. Ballard, first published in 1973, with a significant author’s introduction added in 1974 that was carried forward in subsequent editions.³ My anger at Baudrillard arose from what seemed his willful misreading of a work

Chapter 1 “Trifles of Jewish Music” from: Jewish Identities
Abstract: In a 1924 article Russian Soviet musicologist Leonid Sabaneyev (1881–1968) announced that through the work of a group of Jewish composers Jewish music was approaching the phase Sabaneyev called “its artistic expansion.”¹ Sabaneyev’s account of the birth of Jewish art music reflected art publicist Vladimir Stasov’s version of the development of Russian musical nationalism. Lest there be any doubt about this connection, the prophecy with which Sabaneyev closed his article demonstrated the strong effect of Russian national music on Jewish aspirations. Stasov shaped and propagated most effectively the Russian national ideals as the ideological basis for the moguchaya kuchka

Chapter 5 The Confines of Judaism and the Elusiveness of Universality: from: Jewish Identities
Abstract: Edmond Dantes, the narrator of Italo Calvino’s short story “The Count of Monte Cristo,” shares the fate of the story’s original protagonist in Dumas’s novel of the same title. Calvino’s story of the Château d’If that imprisons Dantes is a parable of human existence. As Calvino puts it, the “fortress . . . grows around us, and the longer we remain shut in it the more it removes us from the outside.” Paradoxically, by working out the possibilities for escape, Dantes is compelled to mentally construct the perfect fortress from which there would be no departure. If the real prison

Chapter 6 Uneasy Parallels: from: Jewish Identities
Abstract: The word “utopia” was coined by Thomas More, who invented it to describe an ideal society in his De Optimo Reipublicae Statu deque Nova Insula Utopia(On the best state of a commonwealth and on the new island of utopia) (1516), the first book in the long series of utopian literature that More’s famous work initiated. The complex meaning of the wordutopiaoriginates from the nomenclature and from the literature with which it has become associated. Composed of the Greekou(written as Latinuby More), which describes a negative quality, and the wordtopos, which means place

Chapter 7 Torsos and Abstractions: from: Jewish Identities
Abstract: Schoenberg left behind several drafts of his stage set for the second part of act 1 of his 1927 play The Biblical Way. On graph paper he worked out the exact dimensions of the stadium and the bleachers and made pastel and watercolor pictures of the administrative building and the stadium. The bleachers surrounding the stadium are seen from the audience’s perspective as a semicircle, on two pictures closing almost into a full circle. Nature behind the stadium appears either as bucolic green hills or as towering snow-covered peaks. In either case, nature is obviously separated from humans, who gather

Book Title: A Usable Past-Essays in European Cultural History
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): BOUWSMA WILLIAM J.
Abstract: The essays assembled here represent forty years of reflection about the European cultural past by an eminent historian. The volume concentrates on the Renaissance and Reformation, while providing a lens through which to view problems of perennial interest. A Usable Pastis a book of unusual scope, touching on such topics as political thought and historiography, metaphysical and practical conceptions of order, the relevance of Renaissance humanism to Protestant thought, the secularization of European culture, the contributions of particular professional groups to European civilization, and the teaching of history. The essays inA Usable Pastare unified by a set of common concerns. William Bouwsma has always resisted the pretensions to science that have shaped much recent historical scholarship and made the work of historians increasingly specialized and inaccessible to lay readers. Following Friedrich Nietzsche, he argues that since history is a kind of public utility, historical research should contribute to the self-understanding of society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pp5kk

Introduction from: A Usable Past
Abstract: The title of this collection is derived from Friedrich Nietzsche’s essay “On the Uses and Disadvantages of History for Life.”¹ The central argument of this passionate work, judiciously qualified, reflects my own deepest convictions about the value of historical scholarship. Nietzsche opened his essay with a quotation from Goethe: “I hate everything that merely instructs me without augmenting or directly invigorating my activity.” This meant to him that a vital historiography must serve the “life and action” of society. There is, Nietzsche argued, a “natural relationship of an age, a culture, a nation with its history—evoked by hunger, regulated

1 The Two Faces of Humanism: from: A Usable Past
Abstract: Recent emphasis, stemming primarily from the work of P. O. Kristeller, on the central importance of rhetoric for Renaissance humanism, has enabled us to understand the underlying unity of a singularly complex movement; and it has proved singularly fruitful for Renaissance scholarship. At the same time, since this approach depends on the identification of a kind of lowest common denominator for humanism, it may also have the unintended effect of reducing our perception of its rich variety and thus of limiting our grasp of its historical significance. I should like, accordingly, to begin with Kristeller’s fundamental insight, but then to

10 Venice, Spain, and the Papacy: from: A Usable Past
Abstract: Although Paolo Sarpi is one of the great figures of the seventeenth century, not only of Italy, but of all Europe, and although many historians, Italian and non-Italian, have studied his career and thought, he remains an enigma and a subject of controversy. It is true that we have good editions of his most important writings and an increasing body of information concerning his life and surroundings. Yet there is still no satisfactory general work on Sarpi, nor is there any generally accepted interpretation of his personality, his thought, and his purposes.

Book Title: The Maternal Factor-Two Paths to Morality
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Noddings Nel
Abstract: In this provocative new book, renowned educator and philosopher Nel Noddings extends her influential work on the ethics of care toward a compelling objective—global peace and justice. She asks: If we celebrate the success of women becoming more like men in professional life, should we not simultaneously hope that men become more like women—in caring for others, rejecting violence, and valuing the work of caring both publicly and personally? Drawing on current work on evolution, and bringing concrete examples from women’s lived experience to make a strong case for her position, Noddings answers this question by locating one source of morality in maternal instinct. She traces the development of the maternal instinct to natural caring and ethical caring, offering a preliminary sketch of what a care-driven concept of justice might look like. Finally, to advance the cause of caring, peace, and women’s advancement, Noddings urges women to abandon institutional, patriarchal religion and to seek their own paths to spirituality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pp657

INTRODUCTION from: The Maternal Factor
Abstract: Much work is being done today on the evolution of morality. Anthropologists, psychologists, evolution scientists, and philosophers are looking for the roots of altruism, empathy, solidarity, and cooperation.¹ Surprisingly, in seeking these roots, scholars rarely look at female experience. It may well be that one wide and increasingly influential approach to moral life—care ethics—can be traced to maternal instinct.

ONE The Evolution of Morality from: The Maternal Factor
Abstract: In this book, I am interested primarily in the evolution of morality through female experience and how that morality might be described. It makes sense, then, to start with a discussion of maternal instinct, infant bonding, and the empathic capacities developed through the basic experience of mothering. After laying out this story, we’ll look at some current work on the evolution of morality—work that often ignores female experience entirely. The chapter will conclude with an outline of topics and questions to be addressed in later chapters.

THREE Ethical Caring and Obligation from: The Maternal Factor
Abstract: In this chapter, we’ll discuss the move from natural caring to ethical caring. We’ll also take a close look at caregiving—long defined as “woman’s work.” Carework is both the incubator of natural caring and a current site of contention. On one hand, it represents the set of activities in which females have developed an enhanced capacity for empathy. On the other, society’s expectation that women will continue to do the lion’s share of care labor is a legacy of the second source of female empathy—subordination.

Book Title: Gadamer’s Repercussions-Reconsidering Philosophical Hermeneutics
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Krajewski Bruce
Abstract: Certainly one of the key German philosophers of the twentieth century, Hans-Georg Gadamer also influenced the study of literature, art, music, sacred and legal texts, and medicine. Indeed, while much attention has been focused on Gadamer's writings about ancient Greek and modern German philosophy, the relevance of his work for other disciplines is only now beginning to be properly considered and understood. In an effort to address this slant, this volume brings together many prominent scholars to assess, re-evaluate, and question Hans-Georg Gadamer's works, as well as his place in intellectual history. The book includes a recent essay by Gadamer on "the task of hermeneutics," as well as essays by distinguished contributors including Jürgen Habermas, Richard Rorty, Gerald Bruns, Georgia Warnke, and many others. The contributors situate Gadamer's views in surprising ways and show that his writings speak to a range of contemporary debates—from constitutional questions to issues of modern art. A controversial final section attempts to uncover and clarify Gadamer's history in relation to National Socialism. More an investigation and questioning than a celebration of this venerable and profoundly influential philosopher, this collection will become a catalyst for any future rethinking of philosophical hermeneutics, as well as a significant starting place for rereading and reviewing Hans-Georg Gadamer.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pp75p

Chapter 5 Literature, Law, and Morality from: Gadamer’s Repercussions
Author(s) WARNKE GEORGIA
Abstract: Richard Posner lists several reasons to think that morality and law are enterprises distinct from literature: the fact that the heinous actions of German lawyers and citizens in the 1930s and 1940s coexisted with Germany’s status as one of the most cultured nations of the world; the circumstance that one of the well-known abilities of many well-read people is to remain insensitive to the suffering of others; the fact that moral atrocities fill the literary canon without affecting either the aesthetic virtues of the work or its reader’s own moral attitudes; and, finally, the distance between the concerns of law

Chapter 11 The Art of Allusion: from: Gadamer’s Repercussions
Author(s) Gaiger Jason
Abstract: On February 11, 1995, Gadamer reached the age of ninety-five. The tributes that were paid to him were justifiably numerous; in the Frankfurter Allgemeine Zeitunghe was celebrated as “the most successful philosopher of the Federal Republic,” placed even before Jürgen Habermas, to whom the title of philosopher was awarded only with certain reservations.¹ The worldwide influence of Gadamer’s thinking is closely connected with the reception of his principal work,Truth and Method(1960). In 1979, Habermas characterized Gadamer’s achievement as the “urbanization of the Heideggerian province.” The bridges that Gadamer has built consist above all in an elaboration of

Book Title: A Problem of Presence-Beyond Scripture in an African Church
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Engelke Matthew
Abstract: The Friday Masowe apostolics of Zimbabwe refer to themselves as “the Christians who don’t read the Bible.” They claim they do not need the Bible because they receive the Word of God “live and direct” from the Holy Spirit. In this insightful and sensitive historical ethnography, Matthew Engelke documents how this rejection of scripture speaks to longstanding concerns within Christianity over mediation and authority. The Bible, of course, has been a key medium through which Christians have recognized God’s presence. But the apostolics perceive scripture as an unnecessary, even dangerous, mediator. For them, the materiality of the Bible marks a distance from the divine and prohibits the realization of a live and direct faith. Situating the Masowe case within a broad comparative framework, Engelke shows how their rejection of textual authority poses a problem of presence—which is to say, how the religious subject defines, and claims to construct, a relationship with the spiritual world through the semiotic potentials of language, actions, and objects. Written in a lively and accessible style, A Problem of Presence makes important contributions to the anthropology of Christianity, the history of religions in Africa, semiotics, and material culture studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppcdv

TWO The Early Days of Johane Masowe from: A Problem of Presence
Abstract: IN 1932 SHONIWA PETER MASEDZA was working for a shoemaker near Salisbury. Shoniwa had come from his home in Makoni, near the border with Portuguese East Africa, in the late 1920s. He had held a number of odd jobs in and around the capital: driving wagons, working as a “garden boy,” apprenticing with a carpenter. Just after starting with the shoemaker, sometime around May 1932, Shoniwa fell ill, suffering from “severe pains in the head.” He lost his speech for four months and was “unable to walk about.” During his sickness, he studied the Bible “continuously.” He dreamed that he

Book Title: Imaginary Communities-Utopia, the Nation, and the Spatial Histories of Modernity
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Wegner Phillip E.
Abstract: Drawing from literary history, social theory, and political critique, this far-reaching study explores the utopian narrative as a medium for understanding the social space of the modern nation-state. Considering the narrative utopia from its earliest manifestation in Thomas More's sixteenth-century work Utopiato some of the most influential utopias of the late nineteenth and twentieth centuries, this book is an astute study of a literary genre as well as a nuanced dialectical meditation on the history of utopian thinking as a quintessential history of modernity. As he unravels the dialectics at work in the utopian narrative, Wegner gives an ambitious synthetic discussion of theories of modernity, considering and evaluating the ideas of writers such as Ernst Bloch, Louis Marin, Gilles Deleuze, Walter Benjamin, Martin Heidegger, Henri Lefebvre, Paul de Man, Karl Mannheim, Mikhail Bakhtin, Jürgen Habermas, Slavoj Zizek, and Homi Bhabha.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppdsm

CHAPTER FOUR The Occluded Future: from: Imaginary Communities
Abstract: In one of the first significant discussions of the efflorescence of utopian writings in the late 1960s and early 1970s, Tom Moylan coins the term “critical utopia” to describe these new works. Drawing inspiration from the radical political culture and new left movements of the moment, these narrative utopias challenge not only the dominant cultural and social realties from which they emerge, but also the very assumptions and expectations of the generic institution of which they form an integral part:

CHAPTER SIX Modernity, Nostalgia, and the Ends of Nations in Orwell’s Nineteen Eighty-Four from: Imaginary Communities
Abstract: It has become something of a commonplace to point out that our finde-millenniumculture has given birth to a diversity of narratives of endings: the ending, among other things, of modernity, master narratives, and ideology; of philosophy and critique; of modernism, the avant garde, and the aesthetic; of feminism, gender, and sexuality; of liberalism, humanism, and the bourgeois subject; of industrialism, Fordism, and the welfare state; of Marxism, socialism, and communism; of the Cold War; and even of history itself. As the work of two of the more well-known proponents of this last narrative, Jean Baudrillard and Francis Fukuyama, bears

Book Title: Being There-The Fieldwork Encounter and the Making of Truth
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Hammoudi Abdellah
Abstract: Challenges to ethnographic authority and to the ethics of representation have led many contemporary anthropologists to abandon fieldwork in favor of strategies of theoretical puppeteering, textual analysis, and surrogate ethnography. In Being There,John Borneman and Abdellah Hammoudi argue that ethnographies based on these strategies elide important insights. To demonstrate the power and knowledge attained through the fieldwork experience, they have gathered essays by anthropologists working in Morocco, Saudi Arabia, Syria, Tanzania, the Canadian Arctic, India, Germany, and Russia that shift attention back to the subtle dynamics of the ethnographic encounter. From an Inuit village to the foothills of Kilimanjaro, each account illustrates how, despite its challenges, fieldwork yields important insights outside the reach of textual analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pphf4

FIVE The Obligation to Receive: from: Being There
Author(s) Coleman Leo
Abstract: From this basis we anthropologists speak of deep, participatory, long-term collaborations with our research interlocutors as both an epistemological and ethical warrant for our work (the choice of “interlocutor” itself, over “informant,”

SIX Encounter and Suspicion in Tanzania from: Being There
Author(s) Moore Sally Falk
Abstract: My fieldwork in Tanzania extended over many years, from 1968 to 1993. It was intermittent: a few months at a time, and then an interval of months, or a year or two, and then another visit. The reflexive remarks that follow are retrospective and selective. There are too many stories to tell.

EIGHT Institutional Encounters: from: Being There
Author(s) Raikhel Eugene
Abstract: Several months after my return from the field, I was reading online newspaper articles in the basement of NYU’s Bobst Library when I came across an extraordinary story. Sergei Tikhomirov, the director of St. Petersburg’s Municipal Addiction Hospital, where I had conducted much of my fieldwork, had been arrested and charged with having ordered the murder of a fellow administrator—the deputy director in charge of finances. This woman had been killed by a small bomb planted in the doorway to her apartment. The director had reported that a similar remote-controlled device was placed—but did not detonate—near his

NINE Fieldwork Experience, Collaboration, and Interlocution: from: Being There
Author(s) Borneman John
Abstract: This essay examines the relation of presence in fieldwork to interlocution. Within anthropology in the past several decades, two kinds of criticisms of the fieldwork encounter have had particular resonance: that fieldwork experience and presence do not generate any unique knowledge and that the power/dominance of the (Western) ethnographer ethically taints the knowledge derived from encounters. The questioning of the ethnographer’s presence has frequently led to text-based reading being substituted for fieldwork experience, with a corresponding focus on textual representation; the questioning of the ethnographer’s power has led to demands for collaboration and dialogue, which in turn often emphasize righteous

TEN Afterthoughts: from: Being There
Author(s) Borneman John
Abstract: As we reflect back on the essays assembled in this volume, it appears that each deals with a particular defining moment of thinking about and practicing anthropology. They do not aim to define a subdiscipline in anthropology or formulate an encompassing theoretical orientation regarding substantive issues. As a group, the authors differ in ethnicity, gender, and nationality, and in their respective stages of professional development. Though they all live near and work in U.S. and Canadian universities, their research spans societies that vary widely in geographical location, language, and sociopolitical situation: Canadian Inuit, European, Arab, African, Indian, and Russian societies.

5 Ghurbāl’s School: from: Gatekeepers of the Arab Past
Abstract: The story goes that when Muḥammad Shafīq Ghurbāl was asked to identify his most important publications he pointed at his students and said, “These are my most important books.”¹ True or not, this anecdote captures the very essence of Ghurbāl’s career: Although his publications were fragmentary and on multiple subjects, he nevertheless had an unprecedented influence as a teacher and intellectual leader.² From the perspective of intellectual history, then, his career did not provide the historian with a significant body of literature to work with. The historian’s task becomes even more frustrating once the basic tension of Ghurbāl’s career is

Introduction from: Little India
Abstract: In February 1999, two months after I had left Mauritius, having concluded my main dissertation fieldwork, riots erupted on the island for the first time since 1968. The popular singer Kaya had died under suspicious circumstances in police custody, where he had been held on drug charges. Kaya was a member of the Creole ethnic community of Mauritius, most of whom trace their ancestry to African and Malagasy slaves. After the news of Kaya’s death in the central police headquarters of Port Louis became known, protesters took to the streets in suburbs of the capital, attacking police stations and other

CHAPTER 5 Performing Purity: from: Little India
Abstract: Hindu activists in religious organizations and state and para-state bodies, some of whom are also involved in the network of Hindu nationalist organizations that operate in both India and Mauritius, are concerned about the rapid language shift from Bhojpuri to Mauritian Creole among Hindu Mauritians. Interpreting the decreasing use of Bhojpuri as a threat to the reproduction of Hindu difference in Mauritius, and making use of their close connections to state institutions, they are trying to reverse the shift to Creole by arranging for the use of Bhojpuri on national television and radio. As I will discuss below, the use

ONE Anthropology and the Man-Eating Myth from: Cannibal Talk
Abstract: As the title of this book, Cannibal Talk, implies, I deal with the discourses of cannibalism and the behaviors and practices associated with such talk (“discursive practices”) in the interaction between natives and Europeans following the “discovery” of Polynesia by Captain James Cook in the voyage of theEndeavour, 1768–72. The “South Seas” of my title is also the product of the European romantic imagination rather than an ethnographic or oceanographic category. In exploring the theme of cannibal talk I am deeply indebted to William Arens’s pioneering work,The Man-Eating Myth: Anthropology and Anthropophagy. Writing many years later and

SEVEN Narratives of the Self: from: Cannibal Talk
Abstract: Historical ignorance compels us to leave aside Lockerby and Thomas Smith and move on to Peter Dillon who on September 6, 1813, presented an eyewitness description of a cannibal feast that has not been surpassed in its detail before or since. Dillon was a well-known sea captain, trader, and self-designated explorer living in Sydney. Virtually every writer on Fiji mentions with approbation his account as truly authentic, and I considered it so too when I first read about it in J.W. Davidson’s well-known biography of Dillon.¹ It required several months of hard work at the National Library of Australia examining

V Proclus from: Homer the Theologian
Abstract: Proclus (ca. 410–85) stands near the end of the ancient Neoplatonic tradition and on the threshold of the Middle Ages. He was head of the Athenian school that traced its ancestry to Plato’s Academy—hence the title Diadochos, or Successor, often attached to his name. In 529, less than fifty years after his death, his own successors abandoned Athens when Justinian closed the pagan philosophical schools, and although they subsequently returned, they were able to carry on their work only as private individuals. Neither his immediate predecessors nor those who followed after him in Athens and in Alexandria left

VI The Transmission of the Neoplatonists’ Homer to the Latin Middle Ages from: Homer the Theologian
Abstract: Up to this point, with the exception of a brief discussion of Prudentius, this study has been concerned exclusively with Greek literature and thought. In fact, much of what has been discussed has been of Italian origin, from the archaic Pythagoreanism of southern Italy to the teachings of Plotinus and Porphyry in Rome. Virtually all the material examined, however, has been Greek in language and tradition. Traces of the Platonized Homer can be found in Latin authors as early as Apuleius,¹ a contemporary of Numenius, but there is no single work in Latin that explores at length the conception of

Book Title: Studying Global Pentecostalism-Theories and Methods
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): van der Laan Cornelis
Abstract: With its remarkable ability to adapt to many different cultures, Pentecostalism has become the world’s fastest growing religious movement. More than five hundred million adherents worldwide have reshaped Christianity itself. Yet some fundamental questions in the study of global Pentecostalism, and even in what we call “Pentecostalism,” remain largely unaddressed. Bringing together leading scholars in the social sciences, history, and theology, this unique volume explores these questions for this rapidly growing, multidisciplinary field of study. A valuable resource for anyone studying new forms of Christianity, it offers insights and guidance on both theoretical and methodological issues. The first section of the book examines such topics as definitions, essentialism, postcolonialism, gender, conversion, and globalization. The second section features contributions from those working in psychology, anthropology, sociology, and history. The third section traces the boundaries of theology from the perspectives of pneumatology, ecumenical studies, inter-religious relations, and empirical theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppt8r

2 Essentialist and Normative Approaches from: Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Droogers André
Abstract: In this chapter the role of essentialist and normative elements in the study of Pentecostalism is discussed. These elements are part of any academic effort. In studying Pentecostalism, essentialist and normative tendencies may also stem from the identity of Pentecostalism itself and from its perception by others. Any scholar studying this form of Christianity must therefore reflect on them, especially when interdisciplinary work is proposed. The overview given in this chapter serves to raise scholarly awareness of the pitfalls connected with essentialist and normative approaches. Yet both essentialist and normative tendencies can be shown to have a challenging, useful side

Book Title: Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinema- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Morgan Daniel
Abstract: With Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinema, Daniel Morgan makes a significant contribution to scholarship on Jean-Luc Godard, especially his films and videos since the late 1980s, some of the most notoriously difficult works in contemporary cinema. Through detailed analyses of extended sequences, technical innovations, and formal experiments, Morgan provides an original interpretation of a series of several internally related films-Soigne ta droite(Keep Your Right Up, 1987),Nouvelle vague(New Wave, 1990), andAllemagne 90 neuf zéro(Germany 90 Nine Zero, 1991)-and the monumental late video work,Histoire(s) du cinéma(1988-1998). Taking up a range of topics, including the role of nature and natural beauty, the relation between history and cinema, and the interactions between film and video, the book provides a distinctive account of the cinematic and intellectual ambitions of Godard's late work. At the same time,Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinemaprovides a new direction for the fields of film and philosophy by drawing on the idealist and romantic tradition of philosophical aesthetics, which rarely finds an articulation within film studies. In using the tradition of aesthetics to illuminate Godard's late films and videos, Morgan shows that these works transform the basic terms and categories of aesthetics in and for the cinema.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppvj2

INTRODUCTION from: Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinema
Abstract: As any viewer of Godard’s work over the past

1 The Work of Aesthetics from: Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinema
Abstract: If my argument is for the importance of aesthetics within Godard’s films and videos since the late 1980s, two kinds of questions quickly arise. First, if I am taking a tradition of philosophical aesthetics to be not only an interpretive framework but also explicitly present within these works, what evidence is there in the films and videos? Where does this concern manifest itself? Second, if aesthetics is as prominent as I am claiming, why have critics by and large failed to bring it up, much less discuss it as a central orientation?

Book Title: Transpacific Displacement-Ethnography, Translation, and Intertextual Travel in Twentieth-Century American Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Huang Yunte
Abstract: Yunte Huang takes a most original "ethnographic" approach to more and less well-known American texts as he traces what he calls the transpacific displacement of cultural meanings through twentieth-century America's imaging of Asia. Informed by the politics of linguistic appropriation and disappropriation, Transpacific Displacementopens with a radically new reading of Imagism through the work of Ezra Pound and Amy Lowell. Huang relates Imagism to earlier linguistic ethnographies of Asia and to racist representations of Asians in American pop culture, such as the book and movie character Charlie Chan, then shows that Asian American writers subject both literary Orientalism and racial stereotyping to double ventriloquism and countermockery. Going on to offer a provocative critique of some textually and culturally homogenizing tendencies exemplified in Maxine Hong Kingston's work and its reception, Huang ends with a study of American translations of contemporary Chinese poetry, which he views as new ethnographies that maintain linguistic and cultural boundaries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppvzv

ONE Ethnographers-Out-There: from: Transpacific Displacement
Abstract: Franz Boas’s 1903 vision for a deepened and expanded American understanding of Asia was anticipated, corroborated, and inherited by the many ethnographers, travelers, scholars, diplomats, and missionaries who went across the Pacific Ocean around the turn of the century. Some ethnographers even worked to a great extent in the fashion of Boasian cultural and linguistic anthropology, whose essential doctrine lies in identifying cultural traits in linguistic patterns. The ethnographers I study in this chapter, namely Percival Lowell, Ernest Fenollosa, and Florence Ayscough, are three who followed Boas’s lead. In a quintessential Boasian manner, they chose language as a path to

THREE The Intertextual Travel of Amy Lowell from: Transpacific Displacement
Abstract: What follows is not a coda or supplement to Imagism, although Amy Lowell’s work is often denigrated as such—“Amygism” is the usual epithet used to parody the poetry activities that went on after Lowell took over from Pound the leadership in promoting Imagism. My focus is on a new mode of conceptualizing Asia as manifested in Lowell’s work. In the preceding chapter, I described the ways in which Pound founded his pancultural program on intertextual ground; in this one, I explore a unique feature of Lowell’s ethnographic writing: her intertextual travel. As a traveler in the world of texts,

Conclusion from: Transpacific Displacement
Abstract: What I have described as transpacific displacement is a historical process of dislocation and relocation of cultural meanings via ethnography, translation, and intertextual travel. Interestingly, this complicated cross-over, of which Imagism’s appropriation and reinvention of “Chinese” poetics constitute an important part, now seems to have taken an unexpected turn: readers of contemporary Chinese poetry have been told that the work in front of them is influenced, inspired by Imagism. As the story goes, Chinese poets, such as Bei Dao and Gu Cheng, living in the poetic wasteland of the Cultural Revolution, turned to Western literature for inspiration. The books circulated

3 Annihilate Amalek! from: Fighting Words
Author(s) Asen Bernhard A.
Abstract: In the Academy Award winning movie Patton, starring George C. Scott, an important scene finds General Patton frustrated by bad weather. He summons the Third Army division chaplain and requests a “weather prayer.” Patton: “I want a prayer, a weather prayer.” Chaplain: “A weather prayer, sir?” Patton: “Yes, let’s see if you can’t get God working with us.” Chaplain: “Gonna take a thick rug for that kind of praying.” Patton: “I don’t care if it takes a flying carpet.” Chaplain: “I don’t know how this will be received, general. Praying for good weather so we can kill our fellow man.”

Book Title: Rifle Reports-A Story of Indonesian Independence
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Steedly Mary Margaret
Abstract: On August 17, 1945, Indonesia proclaimed its independence from Dutch colonial rule. Five years later, the Republic of Indonesia was recognized as a unified, sovereign state. The period in between was a time of aspiration, mobilization, and violence, in which nationalists fought to expel the Dutch while also trying to come to grips with the meaning of "independence." Rifle Reportsis an ethnographic history of this extraordinary time as it was experienced on the outskirts of the nation among Karo Batak villagers in the rural highlands of North Sumatra. Based on extensive interviews and conversations with Karo veterans,Rifle Reportsinterweaves personal and family memories, songs and stories, memoirs and local histories, photographs and monuments, to trace the variously tangled and perhaps incompletely understood ways that Karo women and men contributed to the founding of the Indonesian nation. The routes they followed are divergent, difficult, sometimes wavering, and rarely obvious, but they are clearly marked with the signs of gender. This innovative historical study of nationalism and decolonization is an anthropological exploration of the gendering of wartime experience, as well as an inquiry into the work of storytelling as memory practice and ethnographic genre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt2jcbst

Book Title: The Fate of Place-A Philosophical History
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Casey Edward S.
Abstract: In this imaginative and comprehensive study, Edward Casey, one of the most incisive interpreters of the Continental philosophical tradition, offers a philosophical history of the evolving conceptualizations of place and space in Western thought. Not merely a presentation of the ideas of other philosophers, The Fate of Placeis acutely sensitive to silences, absences, and missed opportunities in the complex history of philosophical approaches to space and place. A central theme is the increasing neglect of place in favor of space from the seventh century A.D. onward, amounting to the virtual exclusion of place by the end of the eighteenth century. Casey begins with mythological and religious creation stories and the theories of Plato and Aristotle and then explores the heritage of Neoplatonic, medieval, and Renaissance speculations about space. He presents an impressive history of the birth of modern spatial conceptions in the writings of Newton, Descartes, Leibniz, and Kant and delineates the evolution of twentieth-century phenomenological approaches in the work of Husserl, Merleau-Ponty, Bachelard, and Heidegger. In the book's final section, Casey explores the postmodern theories of Foucault, Derrida, Tschumi, Deleuze and Guattari, and Irigaray.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt2jcbw8

Postface: from: The Fate of Place
Abstract: Irigaray’s challenging reading of Aristotle’s Physicsreanimates an ancient (and very recent) question: How are body and place related? A first answer, given by Aristotle himself, posits a rigid material body in place by virtue of its sheer contiguity with the inner surface of what immediately surrounds it—a strictly physical intimacy that works by close containment. This containment acts in effect to cap and control the vagrant and violent movements of elemental qualities and powers as depicted in Plato’sTimaeus,a cosmogonic tale in which the tumult ofchōragives way to the order of determinatetopoi.Whether this

1 Evil and Ethical Terror from: Women and Evil
Abstract: People have always been fascinated by evil—by that which harms us or threatens to harm us. Primitive people sought to escape evil by magic, ritual, and appeasement. Philosophers have attempted to redeem evil by elaborate analyses designed to show that evil is somehow necessary, and theologians have produced a body of work on the “problem of evil.” Women have until recently been relatively silent on evil, in part because they have been silent on most matters, but largely because they have themselves been closely identified with evil in the traditional view. Women who have attempted to speak on moral

Emmanuel from: The Wherewithal of Life
Abstract: When Susanne Bregnbaek successfully defended her doctoral thesis in the fall of 2010, I was invited to her apartment in Christianshavn to celebrate the rite of passage with family and friends. Curiously enough, Susanne’s thesis, though based on fieldwork in Beijing, resonated with a conversation I would have later that evening with Emmanuel Mulamila, a Ugandan who was married to one

Ibrahim from: The Wherewithal of Life
Abstract: IN 2007 MY COUSIN LOUISA JACKSON and her friend Evelien Kuipers were working as volunteers for an NGO in Ghana. Louisa was helping out in an orphanage; Evelien was teaching English in an elementary school five hundred miles away. When they first met, Evelien responded instantly to Louisa’s unconventional personality, and both quickly discovered a shared commitment to protecting the environment and helping the poor. Th e two young women (Evelien was thirty, Louisa twenty-three) kept in touch by telephone and began planning a seven-week tour of Togo, Benin, and Burkina Faso when their contracts in Ghana ended. Evelien had

The Inaugural Frank Horner Lecture from: Explorations and Encounters in French
Abstract: When Frank Horner passed away in July 2004, it was at a time of renewed research interest both in the early French exploration of Australia and the achievements of the Baudin expedition, the very interest that he had been so influential in awakening. In July 2006, when planning a major series of public lectures to coincide with the three conferences of French language and culture that were to take place at the University of Adelaide, the organizers, in consultation with Frank’s family, considered this an opportune moment to pay homage to his pioneering work by inaugurating a series of scholarly

Introduction from: Whose History?
Abstract: I once was taking a unit of work on Napoleon in Moscow with my university History Curriculum and Methodology students. What sources could we use? A group of students wanted Tolstoy’s War and Peace(1869/2010), an iconic historical novel. What about Adam Zamoyski’s 1812:Napoleon’s Fatal March on Moscow(2005), one of the best nonfiction sources on the topic? The class group then debated the relative merits of historical novels versus nonfiction as teaching/learning sources in schools and colleges — a huge and multi-layered topic.

10 Whose History? from: Whose History?
Abstract: Alert students will often tell teachers and university lecturers that there is sometimes a significant discrepancy between the same historical characters, settings or incidents in historical fiction and nonfiction. An illustration of this point arises with hugely successful author Bryce Courtenay’s work of historical fiction, The Potato Factory(1995), and a subsequent work of nonfiction, which sought to put the record straight on Isaac (Ikey) Solomon, one of the principal characters in Courtenay’s novel. Judith Sackville-O’Donnell, a Melbourne author, challenged Courtenay’s depiction of Ikey Solomon, who was also believed to be the model for Charles Dickens’s fictional villain Fagin.

4 Framing New Holland or framing a narrative? from: Framing French Culture
Author(s) Fornasiero Jean
Abstract: The artists on the Baudin expedition, Charles-Alexandre Lesueur and Nicolas-Martin Petit, left us a substantial legacy in terms of the drawings of antipodean peoples, landscapes and coastal profiles which they executed during and after their voyage of scientific discovery to Australia between 1800 and 1804.¹ Many of these works are now well known, thanks to the publication of the various Atlasesof the official account of the expedition, theVoyage de découvertes aux Terres australes, and their modern facsimile editions.² Other images, which have remained unpublished, demand to be better known, given the energy that emanates from them, their sense

8 Annie Ernaux's phototextual archives: from: Framing French Culture
Author(s) Edwards Natalie
Abstract: Why would a writer publish a text that seemingly undoes the literary innovation of her life's work? Annie Ernaux has achieved fame by writing short, pithy narratives that recount isolated autobiographical moments. Rather than recounting events and extrapolating their meaning to her life within an autobiographical text, such as Michel de Montaigne falling off a horse, Jean-Jacques Rousseau stealing a ribbon, or André Gide travelling to North Africa, Ernaux chooses a specific incident — a love relationship, an abortion, a scene of domestic violence, for example — and describes this in sparse, unlyrical prose with no discussion of its consequences

9 The image of self-effacement: from: Framing French Culture
Author(s) Hogarth Christopher
Abstract: Michel Beaujour states his dissatisfaction with the term 'autoportrait' to encapsulate adequately literary endeavours at self-representation.¹ The connection between self-portraiture and painting is evident, and the slippage of the term across mediums leads, in Beaujour's opinion, to deny the specificity of literary works. Yet, referring to works such as Michel de Montaigne's Essais, Michel Leiris'sL'âge d'hommeand Jean-Jacques Rousseau'sRêveries, Beaujour highlights its usefulness as a tool that distinguishes it from autobiographical texts for two fundamental reasons. First, self-portraiture insists upon an absence of continuity, thus defying any clearly arranged order of events that contribute to a personality created

11 Georges Bataille's Manet and the 'strange impression of an absence' from: Framing French Culture
Author(s) Sheaffer-Jones Caroline
Abstract: In Manet³, Georges Bataille focuses on the life and work of Édouard Manet, undoubtedly one of the greatest painters in the Western world and considered by some to be the founder of modern art.⁴ Bataille's text, which opens with a chronology of detailed biographical and historical information, was originally published with some black-and-white reproductions in 1955 by Albert Skira Editions and now appears in volume 9 of hisŒuvres complètes after Lascaux ou la naissance de l'art. The juxtaposition ofManetwith this piece on the birth of art is not without significance, as Bataille examines the artist's extraordinary status

12 Entropy and osmosis in conceptualisations of the Surrealist frame from: Framing French Culture
Author(s) James Klem
Abstract: Since its inception, Surrealism has been associated with conservative art forms aspiring to a higher synthetic unity, unlike those modern art movements such as Pop Art or installation art, which have eschewed aesthetic and transcendental values in favour of the purely material and commercial. In Displaying the marvellous, Lewis Kachur writes that Breton was 'holding fast to Surrealism as "high" art'.¹ According to Hal Foster, 'reconciliation is theraison d'êtreof Bretonian Surrealism'², whereby the binding or 'synthetic principle'³ underlying Surrealist works is Eros and 'the uncanny is recoded as the marvellous and arrested animation is sublimated as convulsive beauty'.⁴

2.1 The Wolf in Itself: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Joseph John E.
Abstract: In the School of Philosophy, Psychology and Language Sciences in which I work, the philosophers have no doubt that they are part of the humanities. The psychologists know that they are not; the borderline that matters for them is between the social sciences and medicine. We linguists straddle the humanities and social sciences. A few of us are comfortable on the fence, while others place themselves firmly on this side or that, and generally try to hide their contempt for those on the other.

2.3 Root and Recursive Patterns in the Czuczor-Fogarasi Dictionary of the Hungarian Language from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Marácz László
Abstract: The first academic Hungarian dictionary A magyar nyelv szótára(The Dictionary of the Hungarian Language) was a monumental work compiled by two members of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences: Gergely Czuczor (1800-1866) and János Fogarasi (1801-1878) that was published in six volumes between 1862 and 1874 [Figs. 2 and 3]. Rather than just being a list of Hungarian words, Czuczor-Fogarasi’s monolingual dictionary (hereafter, the CzF Dictionary) must be considered a linguistic achievement. It contains 110,784 entries and is structured according to the agglutinative nature of the Hungarian language since it distinguishes roots and suffixes while also referring to interconnections within

3.1 A Domestic Culture: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Tollebeek Jo
Abstract: At the conclusion of her autobiographical sketch published a few years ago, the Italian historian Ilaria Porciani, living in Florence but working in Bologna, writes:

4.2 History of Religions in the Making: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Scheerlinck Eline
Abstract: As is the case for many of his colleagues within the humanities, it is hard to pin one label on Franz Cumont (1868-1947). His work moves at the crossroads of history of religions, classical philology, ancient history, archeology and Orientalism. However, Cumont employed this multidisciplinarity in such a way as to make him a pioneer within the developing field of history of religions at the turn of the nineteenth century. In what follows I will focus mainly on Cumont as a historian of religion and on the renewing role which he played in the development of the history of religions

4.5 What Books Are Made of: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Solleveld Floris
Abstract: In 1866 Alfred Blot, a history teacher at the Collège Stanislas, published a re-edition of Louis de Beaufort’s 1738 Dissertation sur l’Incertitude des Cinq Premiers Siècles de l’Histoire Romaine[Fig. 4]. Out of print for more than a century, the main virtue of Beaufort’s work was to show systematically how little we know about the mythical past. The gist of Beaufort’s argument is that most of the early Roman historical record and monuments perished in the sack of the city by the Gauls in 387 or 390 BCE, and that of the two main sources we have today, Dionysius of

6.2 Generic Classification and Habitual Subject Matter from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Efal Adi
Abstract: One of the operations included in philological inquiries is the restoration of etymologies, built up of linguistic units enduring through ages, languages, meanings, usages and contexts.² The following essay attempts a possible deployment of an etymology of the lingual unit ‘genre’. Our trail will be guided by two stations in the long and extended history of this etymon: First, the Aristotelian origins of the etymon ‘genre’ are reconsidered; second, attention is given to the presence of the same etymon in the vocabulary of modern art criticism. Working within a comparative framework, this essay tries to create a trail between literary

6.3 The Recognition of Cave Art in the Iberian Peninsula and the Making of Prehistoric Archeology, 1878-1929 from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Lanzarote-Guiral José María
Abstract: In May 1921, the Exhibition of Spanish Prehistoric Art(Exposicion de arte prehistorico español) opened its doors in Madrid. Hosted by the National Library and inaugurated by King Alphonse XIII, the exhibition presented prehistoric cave art as the first chapter of the Spanish art tradition, placing the peninsula at the cultural origins of Western civilization. This exhibition was conceived of to showcase the work undertaken by Spanish scholars in this field since 1902, when cave art was recognized as such by the international scientific community. Moreover, the organizers did not miss the chance to highlight that it was ‘foreign’ prehistorians,

7.1 Between Sciences and Humanities: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Semi Maria
Abstract: The sciences and the humanities have a long tradition of cultural crossings and reciprocal influences; this interwoven history, however, has been first somehow minimized and downplayed during the nineteenth century, and then simply slipped into a far corner of our memories – feeding on contemporary hyperspecialization and high disciplinary boundaries – until recent scholarly work evidenced how our narrow contemporary perspective was compromising a thorough understanding of the modern era. Positivism and the professionalization of academic disciplines brought about a very critical attitude toward the intellectual syncretism of the foregoing centuries. This had several consequences as, as well described by

7.3 The History of Musical Iconography and the Influence of Art History: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Ruccius Alexis
Abstract: Musical iconography is a prime example of a research field that emerged through the affiliation of two disciplines from the humanities. Over a period of 150 years, musicologists had already turned to art works in search of visual evidence to guide in the reconstruction of musical instruments and historical performance practices. Understood as being fundamentally representational in nature, pictures were used as reliable historical sources, by Julius Rühlmann or Hugo Leichtentritt, for example. In the twentieth century, under the influence of the Warburg School, this field of study expanded into an independent research field known as ‘musical iconography’. Aiming at

8.2 The Emergence of East Asian Art History in the 1920s: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Orell Julia
Abstract: Late-nineteenth- and early-twentieth-century Europe saw an increasing interest in non-European art from Africa, Pre-Columbian America, Asia, the Pacific Islands and elsewhere. Private collectors and museums eagerly collected, exhibited, and published such works, often in competition with each other in the context of colonization.¹ In addition to museums and collectors, artists developed a great interest in non-European art and artifacts since at least the mid-nineteenth century, ranging from Japanese woodcut prints to African masks, often summarized under the problematic category of primitivism. The academic discipline of art history, however, was slow in responding to the broadening range of images and objects

9.3 A Database, Nationalist Scholarship, and Materialist Epistemology in Netherlandish Philology: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Rock Jan
Abstract: The history of digital humanities may seem relatively short. The study of culture, history and humanity appears to have been affected by digital culture and networked computers for only about two decades. That is why usually not the past, but the future of digital humanities is discussed, conversation being flavored with possibilities and promises: greater convenience for scholarly labor, and increased speed in the consultation of data, the massive accessibility of which would enable the humanities to deal with their scientific arrears.

11.2 Discovering Sexuality: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Tobin Robert Deam
Abstract: Today, the study of sexuality brings together scholars from a wide variety of disciplines – history, politics, literature, religion, the arts, psychology, anthropology, medicine, and biology. At its best, this interdisciplinary work promotes critical self-reflection on disciplinary assumptions about sexuality and the data used to test those assumptions: Is there such a thing as a fixed sexuality and how would one prove its existence? Such questions have arisen ever since the emergence of the concept of ‘sexuality’ at the end of the eighteenth century. At the beginning of the nineteenth century, theorists regarded humanistic and literary sources as high quality

Epilogue from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Pickstone John V.
Abstract: In my book on Ways of Knowing: A New History of Science, Technology and Medicine(2000), I showed how a model developed from the historiography of medicine could be used to elucidate much wider histories. Since then I have published several papers refining my framework and extending its scope.¹ In June 2012, after a lecture in Utrecht, I was asked how my method might be used for the history of the humanities. This paper sketches a response.²

4 Doctrinal Development in the Normative Theological Hermeneutics of Kevin J. Vanhoozer from: In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: Kevin J. Vanhoozer, one of the most creative and constructive evangelical theologians currently working, is best known for his work in theological prolegomena and the theological interpretation of Scripture.¹ Questions about the relationship between the Bible and systematic theology initially directed his work to hermeneutics, and interdisciplinary engagement with hermeneutical and literary theory has been a staple in his research ever since.² Much like Thiselton before him, Vanhoozer has endeavored to utilize the insights of non-theological resources like contemporary hermeneutical theory in biblical interpretation and Christian theology. However, in contrast to Thiselton’s descriptive approach, Vanhoozer’s approach to theological hermeneutics is

7 Development and Continuity from: In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: The most critical issue for any model of doctrinal development is the question of doctrinal continuity. Can doctrines develop, grow, orprogresswithout compromising their fidelity to “the faith once delivered unto the saints” (Jude 3)? Can there be maintained identity between New Testament teachings and later doctrinal formulations that utilize very different conceptual frameworks? Most importantly, if doctrines do in fact develop over time through expansion, contextualization, and critical correction, how can the faith communities that develop and reformulate doctrines claim to be part of the same broad Christian tradition?

Book Title: The Mission of Demythologizing-Rudolf Bultmann's Dialectical Theology
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Congdon David W.
Abstract: Since 1941, Rudolf Bultmann’s program of demythologizing has been the subject of constant debate, widely held to indicate Bultmann’s departure from the dialectical theology he once shared with Karl Barth. In the 1950s, Barth referred to their relationship as that of a whale and an elephant: incapable of meaningful communication. This study proposes a contrary reading of demythologizing as the hermeneutical fulfillment of dialectical theology on the basis of a reinterpretation of Barth’s theological project. As such, the volume argues that dialectical theology is fundamentally governed by a missionary logic. Bultmann’s hermeneutical theology extends this dialectical, missionary theology into the field of interpretation. Contrary to many critics, the message of God’s saving work in Christ, and not modern science, funds Bultmann’s hermeneutical program. Like Barth’s own revolution, Bultmann’s program addresses a false relation between gospel and culture. Negatively, demythologizing is a program of deconstantinizing, opposing the objectifying conflation of kerygma and culture that he calls “myth.” Positively, demythologizing is a form of intercultural hermeneutics, composed of preunderstanding and self-understanding. Demythologizing is therefore a missionary hermeneutic of intercultural translation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878n5

3 The Missionary Essence of Dialectical Theology from: The Mission of Demythologizing
Abstract: It is widely acknowledged that Barth inaugurated what we might call a dialectical revolutionin modern theology. To call it a revolution does not mean it was wholly novel or that it was a complete break from the past. As others have argued—Christophe Chalamet most forcefully—many of the elements of dialectical theology were already established in the work of forebears such as Wilhelm Herrmann, Martin Kahler, Soren Kierkegaard, G. W. F. Hegel, and, of course, Martin Luther.² Certain ideas made prominent in dialectical theology, such as the distinction between Historie and Geschichte, are rooted in the German liberal

4 The Mission of Bultmann’s Dialectical Theology from: The Mission of Demythologizing
Abstract: Rudolf Bultmann was born into a family concerned with the question of mission. His paternal grandparents, Fritz and Elise Bultmann, were missionaries in the West African colony of Sierra Leone.⁴ His father, Arthur Kennedy Bultmann, was born in the mission field and later, while serving as a Lutheran pastor, wrote an article on mission in relation to modern theology in 1906.⁵ It was a concern that stayed with him throughout his life. In 1962 he wrote to a Lutheran missionary in New Guinea: “I appreciate it especially that you try to join theology and mission work.”⁶ Such a statement is

6 Toward a Dialectical Intercultural Hermeneutic from: The Mission of Demythologizing
Abstract: The key to a new perspective on demythologizing comes from the burgeoning field of intercultural hermeneutics. The work in this field is the result of an interdisciplinary (and increasingly also interreligious) dialogue among scholars in the areas of missiology, cultural anthropology, and biblical studies. The issues and questions raised by scholars

7 The Problem of Myth and the Program of Deconstantinizing from: The Mission of Demythologizing
Abstract: In the conclusion to his 1952 essay, “Zum Problem der Entmythologisierung,” Rudolf Bultmann argued that “radical demythologizing is the parallel to the Pauline-Lutheran doctrine of justification by faith alone without the works of the law. Or, rather, it is the consistent application of this

Conclusion: from: The Mission of Demythologizing
Abstract: Martin Heidegger expressed his hope to Bultmann in 1964 that “your whole work might not remain entirely obscured by the label ‘demythologizing.’”² In one sense it is deeply unfortunate that Heidegger’s wish was unfulfilled. Bultmann’s name is forever associated with that controversial label, to such an extent that many are unable to read him without assuming that every writing of his is a threat to the church and harmful to the faith. In another and more important sense, however, we can be gratefulthat Heidegger’s wish was unfulfilled, for demythologizing remains Bultmann’s greatest gift to the church. In the words

Introduction from: Writing Theologically
Author(s) Barreto Eric D.
Abstract: There is no way around it. Writing is hard, hard work.

3 Writing for the Ear from: Writing Theologically
Author(s) Wiseman Karyn L.
Abstract: Some of us write for a living. Some of us write for fun. Many of us write for school or continuing education. Still others write as a hobby. In theological education, writing is a regular—even ubiquitous—part of your life. Whether that means writing an academic paper, a personal theological statement, ordination paperwork, sermons, or

7 Writing Digitally from: Writing Theologically
Author(s) Copeland Adam J.
Abstract: Students today write more than ever before, most of it mediated by digital technologies. Take, for example, a typical day in my life. This morning, my wife and I sent five text messages to one another to coordinate drinks with a friend after work. I participated in several conversations with colleagues on Facebook, both in private messages and on public walls where others joined us. I sent four e-mails, one composed on my iPhone while walking down the hall. I typed my credit card number into a crowd-funding website, then shared news of the project on several social media platforms.

9 Writing Personally from: Writing Theologically
Author(s) Nadella Raj
Abstract: I remember spending long hours in the library working on my first seminary paper about Christology in the Gospel of Matthew. I was certainly driven by a desire to produce a well-researched and clearly articulated paper, but I had a more important goal in mind while writing the paper. I was far more interested in producing the kind of paper my instructor would consider excellent. I was obviously interested in securing a good grade. Beyond that, however, as far as I was concerned, I was not just writing the paper for that instructor’s class. I was writing it for him.

10 Writing Spiritually from: Writing Theologically
Author(s) Myers Jacob D.
Abstract: Writing is to the seminarian what plowing is to the farmer; it may feel like painful, backbreaking work, but without it “don’t nothin’ grow,” as they say in my neck of the woods.

11 Faith as Trust from: Sin Boldly!
Abstract: In the previous chapter, we looked at how—in faith—we give attention to God’s Word, perceive that God is gracious, and believe selected doctrines to be true. If we wanted to be persnickety, we might dub these acts of faith works. It takes work on our part to believe in the truth of doctrines. If it takes work to have faith as belief, then we might rightfully ask: How can our faith be saving faith if it is a form of work? Faith as belief looks like one more way to climb the spiritual ladder, right? What happened to

15 Sanctification by Grace from: Sin Boldly!
Abstract: We all know atheists and agnostics who exhibit personal integrity and even give time and money to charity. It appears that their inclination to perform good works is built in to their common humanity, not dependent on their religious affiliation or even religious beliefs.

Book Title: Lyric Apocalypse: Milton, Marvell, and the Nature of Events- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Netzley Ryan
Abstract: What's new about the apocalypse? Revelation does not allow us to look back after the end and enumerate pivotal turning points. It happens in an immediate encounter with the transformatively new. John Milton's and Andrew Marvell's lyrics attempt to render the experience of such an apocalyptic change in the present. In this respect they take seriously the Reformation's insistence that eschatology is a historical phenomenon. Yet these poets are also reacting to the Regicide, and, as a result, their works explore very modern questions about the nature of events, what it means for a significant historical occasion to happen. Lyric Apocalypse argues that Milton's and Marvell's lyrics challenge any retrospective understanding of events, including one built on a theory of revolution. Instead, these poems show that there is no "after" to the apocalypse, that if we are going to talk about change, we should do so in the present, when there is still time to do something about it. For both of these poets, lyric becomes a way to imagine an apocalyptic event that would be both hopeful and new.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287fr4

Book Title: To Make the Hands Impure: Art, Ethical Adventure, the Difficult and the Holy- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): NEWTON ADAM ZACHARY
Abstract: How can cradling, handling, or rubbing a text be said, ethically, to have made something happen? What, as readers or interpreters, may come off in our hands in as we maculate or mark the books we read? For Adam Zachary Newton, reading is anembodied practice wherein "ethics" becomes a matter of tact in the doubled sense of touch and regard. With the image of the book lying in the hands of its readers as insistent refrain, To Make the Hands Impure cuts a provocative cross-disciplinary swath through classical Jewish texts, modern Jewish philosophy, film and performance, literature, translation, and the material text. Newton explores the ethics of reading through a range of texts, from the Talmud and Midrash to Conrad's Nostromo and Pascal's Le Memorial, from works by Henry Darger and Martin Scorsese to the National September 11 Memorial and a synagogue in Havana, Cuba. In separate chapters, he conducts masterly treatments of Emmanuel Levinas, Mikhail Bakhtin, and Stanley Cavell by emphasizing their performances as readers a trebled orientation to Talmud, novel, and theater/film. To Make the Hands Impure stages the encounter of literary experience and scriptural traditions he difficult and the holy through an ambitious, singular, and innovative approach marked in equal measure by erudition and imaginative daring.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287fz7

CHAPTER 6 Ethics of Reading III: from: To Make the Hands Impure: Art, Ethical Adventure, the Difficult and the Holy
Abstract: Stanley Cavell’s memoir Little Did I Know: Excerpts From Memory(2010) introduces us to a rather thickly described Jewish upbringing for which his non-autobiographical writings may not quite have prepared us.¹ References to Jewish material culture do not exactly stand out in the body of his work. It is fair to assume that the passage from the mishnaic tractate on Temple measurements that stands as the first epigraph to this chapter is not one with which he would necessarily be familiar. The mechanism it describes, however, can be taken for a somewhat uncanny precedent for two harbingers of the cinematic

Book Title: Figures of a Changing World: Metaphor and the Emergence of Modern Culture- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): BERGER HARRY
Abstract: Figures of a Changing World offers a dramatic new account of cultural change, an account based on the distinction between two familiar rhetorical figures, metonymy and metaphor. The book treats metonymy as the basic organizing trope of traditional culture and metaphor as the basic organizing trope of modern culture. On the one hand, metonymies present themselves as analogies that articulate or reaffirm preexisting states of affairs. They are guarantors of facticity, a term that can be translated or defined as fact-like-ness. On the other hand, metaphors challenge the similarity they claim to establish, in order to feature departures from preexisting states of affairs. On the basis of this distinction, the author argues that metaphor and metonymy can be used as instruments both for the large-scale interpretation of tensions in cultural change and for the micro-interpretation of tensions within particular texts. In addressing the functioning of the two terms, the author draws upon and critiques the work of Friedrich Nietzsche, Roman Jakobson, Christian Metz, Paul Ricoeur, Umberto Eco, Edmund Leach, and Paul de Man.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287gfz

Derrida and Messianic Atheism from: The Trace of God: Derrida and Religion
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: The specter of messianic atheism was first raised by the Jewish philosopher, Emmanuel Levinas, in Totality and Infinity(1961). Derrida’s critical reckoning with Levinas in his essay “Violence and Metaphysics” (1964) did not prevent him from acknowledging a profound debt to his mentor in a number of subsequent works but especially

Book Title: Ostension-Word Learning and the Embodied Mind
Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Engelland Chad
Abstract: Ostension is bodily movement that manifests our engagement with things, whether we wish it to or not. Gestures, glances, facial expressions: all betray our interest in something. Ostension enables our first word learning, providing infants with a prelinguistic way to grasp the meaning of words. Ostension is philosophically puzzling; it cuts across domains seemingly unbridgeable -- public--private, inner--outer, mind--body. In this book, Chad Engelland offers a philosophical investigation of ostension and its role in word learning by infants. Engelland discusses ostension (distinguishing it from ostensive definition) in contemporary philosophy, examining accounts by Quine, Davidson, and Gadamer, and he explores relevant empirical findings in psychology, evolutionary anthropology, and neuroscience. He offers original studies of four representative historical thinkers whose work enriches the understanding of ostension: Wittgenstein, Merleau-Ponty, Augustine, and Aristotle. And, building on these philosophical and empirical foundations, Engelland offers a meticulous analysis of the philosophical issues raised by ostension. He examines the phenomenological problem of whether embodied intentions are manifest or inferred; the problem of what concept of mind allows ostensive cues to be intersubjectively available; the epistemological problem of how ostensive cues, notoriously ambiguous, can be correctly understood; and the metaphysical problem of the ultimate status of the key terms in his argument: animate movement, language, and mind. Finally, he argues for the centrality of manifestation in philosophy. Taking ostension seriously, he proposes, has far-reaching implications for thinking about language and the practice of philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287hgz

3 Wittgenstein: from: Ostension
Abstract: When G. E. Moore wished to refute skepticism about the existence of the external world, he proved the existence of two hands as follows: “By holding up my two hands, and saying, as I make a certain gesture with the right hand, ‘Here is one hand’, and adding, as I make a certain gesture with the left, ‘and here is another.’”² Moore thought the proof worked because he knew that the premise was true. As readers of Wittgenstein’s On Certaintyare aware, Moore’s use of the word “know” greatly troubles Wittgenstein. In thinking it through, Wittgenstein realizes that a skeptic

Book Title: Myth and Scripture-Contemporary Perspectives on Religion, Language, and Imagination
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Callender Dexter E.
Abstract: In this collection scholars suggest that using "myth" creates a framework within which to set biblical writings in both cultural and literary comparative contexts. Reading biblical accounts alongside the religious narratives of other ancient civilizations reveals what is commonplace and shared among them. The fruit of such work widens and enriches our understanding of the nature and character of biblical texts, and the results provide fresh evidence for how biblical writings became "scripture."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287n15

Myth and Social Realia in Ancient Israel: from: Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Page Hugh R.
Abstract: In this paper I will assess the strengths, weaknesses, and implications of the use of early Hebrew poems as a control group for the testing of single theories and methodological paradigms aimed at the reconstruction of myth, folklore, and social reality in ancient Israel. Here I build on the work done within the Albright-Cross-Freedman tradition on Gen 49; Exod 15; Num 23–24; Deut 32, 33; Judg 5; 1 Sam 2; 2 Sam 1, 22, 23; and Pss 18, 29, 68, 72, and 78 (see, e.g., Cross and Freedman 1952, 1997; Geller 1979; Cross 1973; Freedman 1980). Holding in abeyance

“God Was in Christ”: from: Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Johnson Luke Timothy
Abstract: Without question, 2 Corinthians is the hardest of Paul’s letters to read and understand. This is partly due to the complex character of its composition: even if we do not accept its segmentation into several fragments,¹ the logosrhetoric, especially in its arrangement, remains opaque.² Paul’s extraordinarily dense language intertwines the specific circumstances of Paul and his readers with the work of God in Christ. Readers have always found it difficult to discern precisely where Paul speaks to the very human situation of alienation existing between him and the Corinthian church and the very concrete project of his collection for

Theory of Myth and the Minimal Saul from: Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Strenski Ivan
Abstract: Fans of Robert Segal will find him in classic form here, working the permutations and combinations of both mythical narratives and theorists that he has applied to them. Novel here is Segal’s claim that the biblical narrative accounts of the life of King Saul conform to mythical patterns. Closely examined, that is, they show themselves exemplifying classic mythical themes such as the son’s desire to kill the father. As interpreted by two major classical theorists, psychoanalyst Otto Rank, and myth-ritualist Lord Raglan, Segal works over the biblical text to show how the perspectives of both Rank and Raglan can be

The Indispensability of Theories of Myth for Biblical Studies: from: Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Miller David L.
Abstract: Professor Segal’s paper, “The Life of King Saul as Myth,” was originally embedded in a longer presentation entitled “The Indispensability of Theories of Myth for Biblical Studies.” It was given to a joint session of the American Academy of Religion and the Society of Biblical Literature at their annual meetings in 2009. Professor Segal had attempted to demonstrate his thesis about the indispensability of theories of myth for biblical studies by giving a reading of the Saul narratives in the Hebrew Bible, which was informed by the hero theories of myth in the work of Otto Rank, Lord Raglan, Joseph

Book Title: Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity- Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Thatcher Tom
Abstract: In this collection scholars of biblical texts and rabbinics engage the work of Barry Schwartz, Professor Emeritus in the Department of Sociology at the University of Georgia. Schwartz provides an introductory essay on the study of collective memory. Articles that follow integrate his work into the study of early Jewish and Christian texts. The volume concludes with a response from Schwartz that continues this warm and fruitful dialogue between fields.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287n36

The Memory–Tradition Nexus in the Synoptic Tradition: from: Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Kirk Alan
Abstract: Tradition and memory are distinct yet somehow cognate phenomena, and Synoptic scholarship going back to the form critics has struggled with how properly to construe their relationship. The work of Barry Schwartz and Jan Assmann on social and cultural aspects of memory, and of experimental psychologists on its cognitive aspects, provides a framework for reconceptualizing and potentially resolving the vexed problem of the memory–tradition nexus. But the exploitation of memory research in Gospels scholarship has been scattershot and fragmentary, often ill-informed or selectively employed in special pleading. In English-language scholarship the discussion seems to have settled out into stagnating

The Memory of the Beloved Disciple: from: Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Brickle Jeffrey E.
Abstract: Barry Schwartz’s introduction to the present volume invites reflection on how social memory theory might illuminate the origins and context of the Johannine corpus. Conceiving of John as a cultural “memorian” (to borrow Jan Assmann’s term; 1997, 21) contrasts sharply with a tenaciously held view that portrays the author of the Fourth Gospel as a solitary, mystical purveyor of largely independent and idiosyncratic traditions transmitted within a relatively closed sectarian community. Schwartz’s provocative and insightful memory research compels one to reexamine John’s plausible network of associations and attempt to explain how these associations might relate to the occasion and nature

Between Knowing and Believing from: Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Elsaesser Thomas
Abstract: The Imagined Futuresresearch project, coordinated with two of my colleagues (Wanda Strauven at the University of Amsterdam, and Michael Wedel at the University of Film and Television, Potsdam), concerns itself with the conditions, dynamics and consequences of rapid media transfer and transformation. “Media” in our case refers in principle to all imaging techniques and sound technologies, but cinema has provided the conceptual starting point and primary historical focus. While changes in basic technology, public perception and artistic practice in sound and image media may often evolve over long historical cycles, our main working assumption is that there are also

The Stereopticon and Cinema from: Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Musser Charles
Abstract: Today, many academics working in the Humanities and Social Sciences are pursuing a broad interest in media studies. At least at Yale University, where we have created an interdisciplinary seminar in this area, what we mean by media studies – our actual focuses and concerns – differ substantially. In the English Department, for instance, Media Studies foregrounds the study of the book and the move from the scroll or codex. In the more contemporary context, Michael Warner and Jessica Pressman are clearly interested in the way the digital media and the Internet are impacting the book and print culture more generally. Part

The “Dispositive Effect” in Film Narrative from: Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Ortel Philippe
Abstract: Like the idea of structure, the notion of the “dispositif” does not pertain to a single level of analysis: it applies to specific objects, such as the mechanism of a watch, but also to large ensembles, as in Foucault’s work, where it came to substitute for the episteme in the late 1970s. By contrast to the episteme, focused too narrowly on the utterances produced by a society, Foucault’s dispositifrefers more widely to the totality of discourses, social practices, technical inventions, architectural creations instituting, at a given time, the partition between the true and the false in the domain of

Reality Television as Dispositive: from: Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Bouchez Charlotte
Abstract: While scholars are sometimes confronted with the ignorance of their interlocutors about their field of research, anyone who has ambitions to work on “reality TV” is in exactly the opposite situation. The mere mention of the term conjures up an impression of self-evidence, as reality television does not immediately appear to be complex subject matter. Still, a simple look at the phenomenon already reveals a variety of objects. Starting from a study carried out on reality television in French-speaking Switzerland,¹ this study questions how the term “reality television programming” has come to make sense within social exchange and examines the

Archaeology and Spectacle from: Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Paci Viva
Abstract: To examine the notion of the dispositiveand identify its place in contemporary practices at the intersection of two institutions, Cinema and the Museum, this text proposes a progression through a few individual cases, with the outlines of a study. This may appear as lacking indisciplinewith regard to the call for papers for the conference “Dispositifs de vision et d’audition” (Université de Lausanne, May 29-31, 2008), which was the first step in the present work. The call underlined how the study of a series of isolated cases would risk “perpetuating the ambiguity of encounters in which epistemological questioning

Book Title: Documenting Ourselves-Film, Video, and Culture
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Sherman Sharon R.
Abstract: But Sharon Sherman does not limit herself to the problems faced by filmmakers today. She examines the history of documentary films, tracing them from their origins as a means of capturing human motion through the emergence of various film styles. She also discusses current theories and techniques of folklore and fieldwork, concluding that advances in video technology have made the camcorder an essential tool that has the potential to redefine the nature of the documentary itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130hnq5

3 Documentation: from: Documenting Ourselves
Abstract: The event filmhas been a necessary outgrowth of shifting theoretical models in folkloristics. Scholars made observations about the social or cultural setting to expedite cross-cultural, cross-regional studies or in-depth cultural analyses. Like anthropologists, folklorists might analyze the content and context to demonstrate possible functions of folksongs, narratives, and other folk expressions; filmmakers explored the cultural milieu in which folklore was generated. In their published work, folklorists described situations in general terms; that is, tales are usually told at a feast, or a wedding, or at the storyteller’s home, or among certain ethnic groups. Films facilitating this stance resulted in

6 Structure Shifts and Style: from: Documenting Ourselves
Abstract: Effective folklore films provide a sense of involvement in the event for the audience by following the actual structure of the processes of narrating, singing, ceremony, dancing, playing, and similar events and conveying them as holistically as possible through myriad styles. How one chooses to present folklore shifts as a result of one’s growth as a filmmaker at the same time as one’s attitudes about film and technique shift. A look at my own work quickly reminds me how filmmakers change not only what they choose to shoot but how they do so. Filmmakers are not the only ones who

7 Visions of Ourselves from: Documenting Ourselves
Abstract: These words written by Steve Goodman (before the video boom) express the desire to control events in our lives by controlling images on videotape. Goodman laments that he can’t predict the future, but in terms of today’s video user, he did. Today the videotape is becoming as commonplace in fieldwork as the tape recorder. The focus on events and reflexively oriented fieldwork naturally leads from film to video. As more of us make home videos, we become accustomed to the added capabilities of instant feedback. These experiences pose new research questions about ourselves and others, and video data are exponentially

7 The Implication of the Reader from: The Shriek of Silence
Abstract: In The Dialogic ImaginationMikhail Bakhtin argues that the novel “and the world represented in it enter the real world and enirch it, and the real world enters the work and its world as part of the process of its creation, as well as part of its subsequent life, in a continual renewing of the work through the creative perception of listeners and readers” (254). This statement describes what we have called a phenomenological approach to the novel as an event. Examining what occurs in the process of the novel’s creation, we deal not only with author and character but

Book Title: Passage to the Center-Imagination and the Sacred in the Poetry of Seamus Heaney
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Tobin Daniel
Abstract: Nobel Laureate Seamus Heaney, author of nine collections of poetry and three volumes of influential essays, is regarded by many as the greatest Irish poet since Yeats. Passage to the Centeris the most comprehensive critical treatment to date on Heaney's poetry and the first to study Heaney's body of work up toSeeing ThingsandThe Spirit Level. It is also the first to examine the poems from the perspective of religion, one of Heaney's guiding preoccupations. According to Tobin, the growth of Heaney's poetry may be charted through the recurrent figure of "the center," a key image in the relationship that evolved over time between the poet and his inherited place, an evolution that involved the continual re-evaluation and re-vision of imaginative boundaries. In a way that previous studies have not, Tobin's work examines Heaney's poetry in the context of modernist and postmodernist concerns about the desacralizing of civilization and provides a challenging engagement with the work of a living master.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130jbjp

3 A Poetry of Geographical Imagination: from: Passage to the Center
Abstract: “What is the source of our first suffering? It lies in the fact that we hesitated to speak. It was born in the moment when we accumulated silent things within us.” Kept as a reminder in Heaney’s poetry notebook, Gaston Bachelard’s warning could stand as the motto for Heaney’s early work.¹ In Death of a Naturalist,the silent things given speech through the poet’s art derive primarily from his personal history, from the rhythms of the yard experienced in childhood. Not surprisingly, Narcissus is the book’s presiding deity, in whose image Heaney “rhymes to see himself.” With Heaney’s second book,

7 Unwriting Place: from: Passage to the Center
Abstract: Inspired by the monomyth of the hero’s path, Station Islandassumes self-consciously what is at the heart of Heaney’s work: the quest for self-definition. His book of changes includes the big-eyed Narcissus of the early poems, the poetic archeologist who delves into the word-hoard to discover new regions of his cultural and personal dark, and the inner emigré who rhymes his journey with paradigmatic figures of the tradition. Each book is a new trial of the self to be mastered before he can make a new beginning. Yet, as he observes, “the difficulty comes when what has happened between the

9 Things Apparent and Transparent: from: Passage to the Center
Abstract: From the outset of his career, the calling of poet has required Heaney to embark on a quest for self-definition, a quest in which every imaginative return to origins precipitates a new journey outward whereby the poet’s art and identity are redefined and enlarged. Yet, despite Heaney’s seemingly inexhaustible ability to reinvent himself in his work, the original binding connection between poet and place remains constant. The evolution of his poetry, even as it comes to embrace a vision of art and life linked to emptiness, thus consistently exemplifies what he has more recently described as a “covenant between language

Afterword from: Passage to the Center
Abstract: Throughout these pages I have interpreted Heaney’s poetry as a quest for self-definition, a rite of passage. Within this rite, the problem of identity emerges through the poet’s explorations of his personal history, a history that in time is set against the wider historical horizon of Heaney’s cultural past. Paradoxically, what gives his work continuity is his willingness to face discontinuity over again with each return to the source. Still, Heaney’s reliance on what has been called disparagingly a poetic of identity would appear to confirm Anthony Easthope’s criticism that Heaney’s poetry is “resolutely premodernist in its commitment to a

Book Title: Poetry Of Discovery-The Spanish Generation of 1956-1971
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): DEBICKI ANDREW P.
Abstract: Andrew P. Debicki's is the first detailed stylistic analysis of this generation of poets, and the first to approach their work through the particularly appropriate methods developed in "reader-response" criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130jd70

1 The Generation of 1956–1971 from: Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: Beginning in the late 1950s and extending through the 1960s, there appeared in Spain several young poets whose work reveals a high degree of originality, coupled with significant value. Because they were writing in a seemingly direct language and dealing with themes that had also been dealt with by earlier writers, these poets were at first considered mere continuers of the general tendencies of post-Civil War verse and were not accorded the importance they deserved. But as their work has grown and unfolded, as their ideas on poetry have been expressed and linked to their work, and as critics have

2 FRANCISCO BRINES: from: Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: Yet the studies so far published on Brines have not managed to explain his work adequately, to pin down fully the

3 CLAUDIO RODRÍGUEZ: from: Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: As has often been noted, Claudio Rodríguez’s poetry illustrates attitudes and tendencies that came to the fore in Spain in the 1960s. Its seemingly everyday language and its allusions to common events link this poetry to earlier tendencies of post-Civil War verse. Yet a close look at individual texts makes clear that Rodríguez employs that language in a highly unusual and creative way, imparting significance to common words and expressions and making ordinary events suggest very fundamental meanings. His work avoids easy social and conceptual messages, and deals in complex fashion with such subjects as the conflict between negative and

4 ANGEL GONZÁLEZ: from: Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: Although Angel González is considered one of the most important Spanish poets of the late 1950s and the 1960s, his work has proved perhaps the most difficult to characterize. This is due in part to its range and variety: even though González published his first book relatively late (in 1956, at the age of thirty-one), he has written a number of volumes of poetry and dealt with a variety of subjects in very different tones. Because of that he has been characterized in different ways as critics have sought to highlight individual aspects of his work.

5 GLORIA FUERTES: from: Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: The poetry of Gloria Fuertes is marked by its colloquial tone and its resemblance to conversational address. Her works are filled with references to everyday objects and events: buses, storefronts, newspaper advertisements; any more significant themes emerge from these. Almost all her poems are written in free verse, a verse that seems to deliberately avoid rhythmic regularity and consistently break the conventions of the traditional lyric. These qualities are so patent as to suggest that the author is constructing a very special kind of poetic expression.

6 JOSÉ ANGEL VALENTE: from: Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: Author of both poetic and critical works of major importance, José Angel Valente has articulated with precision the poetics and the attitude to art which underlie the works of his generation. In his essays Valente constantly stresses the goal of poetry in seizing and coming to know reality. Opposing the notion (so prevalent in the immediate post-Civil War period) that poets should communicate previously existent philosophic and social outlooks, Valente defends their role in discovering, through language, realities which would otherwise remain unexplored. This attitude is most evident in his frequently cited essay “Conocimiento y communicación”: “Todo poema es, pues,

7 JAIME GIL DE BIEDMA: from: Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: Jaime Gil de Biedma’s poems come across on first reading as clear and “realistic.” Many of them comprise detailed evocations of specific episodes, narrated by a first-person speaker who gives commentaries and conclusions. Quite often these commentaries offer philosophic insights; at times, especially in the later books, they contain social or political ideas. All of this has led some critics to characterize Gil de Biedma as a realistic poet proccupied with ethical and social issues.¹ The very clarity of his work has caused readers to miss its depth and originality.

8 CARLOS SAHAGÚN: from: Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: Carlos Sahagún’s poetry calls less attention to itself than that of most other Spanish writers of the 1960s. We do not find in it the novel use of colloquial expressions that characterizes Angel González and Gloria Fuertes, nor the surprising changes and reappraisals typical of José Angel Valente, nor the alternation of linguistic codes used by Claudio Rodríguez. The language of Sahagún’s verse seems ordinary but never blatantly colloquial; his works often consist of easy-to-understand evocations of past experiences, expressed in a low key.¹ They contain many visual images and make use of some metaphors, but these tend to be

9 ELADIO CABAÑERO: from: Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: Eladio Cabañero’s background differes considerably from those of the other major poets of his generation. Born and raised in the small town of Tomelloso, Cabañero worked as a laborer in his youth and was largely self-educated when he arrived in Madrid in his late twenties. His early poetry is affected by this background in two different ways. On the one hand it contains many references to farm life and village people and scenes; on the other it is marked by the use of carefully controlled forms and patterns, suggesting the poet’s conscious efforts to learn from and assimilate previous traditions,

Afterword from: Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: A careful study of Spanish poetry of the Generation of 1956–1971 makes evident its innovativeness and importance. Although they base their works on the ordinary reality surrounding them and write in everyday language, the members of this generation create poems of great originality by skillful use of their materials. The combination of diverse language codes in the work of Rodríguez, the blending of colloquial expressions and intertextual effects by Fuertes, and the detailed descriptions and transformations of Cabañero illustrate their transcendence of the pedestrian realism of many earlier post-Civil War writers. The poets I have studied also reveal a

Book Title: Whistling in the Dark-Memory and Culture in Wartime London
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Freedman Jean R.
Abstract: Jean Freedman interviewed more than fifty people who remember London during the war, focusing on under-represented groups, including women, Jews, and working-class citizens. In addition she examined original propaganda, secret government documents, wartime diaries, and postwar memoirs. Of particular significance to Freedman were the contemporary music, theater, film, speeches, and radio drama used by the British government to shape public opinion and impart political messages. Such bits of everyday life are mentioned in virtually every civilian's experience of wartime London but their interpretations of them often clashed with their government's intentions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130jmtp

3 Careless Talk Costs Lives: from: Whistling in the Dark
Abstract: In The Dark Lady of the Sonnets,George Bernard Shaw paints a delightful picture of the speech habits of Londoners: he shows the young Shakespeare walking around the city and writing down what people say. These notes become the dialogue of his plays; Shakespeare is depicted here as a great folk-poet, taking the living language of his people and crafting it into a work of his own, what Henry Glassie (personal communication) calls “the individual expression of the collective will” (or, in this case, “the collecting Will”). While Shaw’s portrayal of London speech is (unfortunately) exaggerated, his emphasis on the

Book Title: God--The World's Future-Systematic Theology for a New Era
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Peters Ted
Abstract: God—The World’s Future has been a proven and comprehensive textbook in systematic theology for over twenty years. Explicitly crafted to address our postmodern context, Peters explains the whole body of Christian historical doctrine from within a “proleptic” framework, “whereby the gospel is understood as announcing the pre-actualization of the future consummation of all things in Jesus Christ.” Peters skillfully deploys this concept not only to organize the various theological areas or loci but also to rethink doctrines in light of key postmodern challenges from ecumenism, critical historical thinking, contemporary science, and gender and sexuality issues. The Third Edition is thoroughly revised with updated chapters, additional chapters, updated annotations and bibliographies, and further elaborations in light of recent developments in method and theological reflection. This classic text opens up systematic theology in new dimensions, retrieving traditional categories and topics for a new generation of students and learners to give a fresh reading of Christian theology and articulation of the liberating message of the gospel of God’s grace for the future of the world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wwwrr

Introduction to Part One from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: Systematic theology explicates the content of Christian belief, often by expanding the trinitarian structure found in the Apostles’ and Nicene Creeds. This content is normally termed doctrine. The doctrinal content sits in the center, usually preceded by a section onmethodologyand followed by a discussion ofethics. The section on methodology consists of a prolegomenon that is occasionally called “foundations” or “fundamental theology.” The discussion of ethics, which sometimes appears in a work separate from the systematic theology itself, attempts to discern what conduct should flow from doctrinal belief.

2 Explicating the Christian Symbols from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: Christian theology—especially systematic theology—is the explication of, and reflection on, the basic symbols found in scripture, appropriating them to the current context within which the theologian is working. Theology is the church thinking about what it believes. In itself, theology is not the content of what the church believes. Rather it is reflection on the content of that belief. One puts faith in God, and this faith comes to expression in the way life is lived and in what is believed. The content of belief is found in the symbols that accompany faith. Theology is a form of

Introduction to Part Three from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: Part Three examines the creed’s Second Article, which deals with the story of Jesus (the person) and its significance for the redemption of creation (the work).

7 The Work and Person of Jesus Christ from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: Soteriology is a continuation of the discussion begun in Christology. It presupposes what I have already said about becoming human, unbecoming evil, and the person of Christ. It then proceeds to focus discussion on the atoning work of Christ, the concept of justification, and the outcome of human destiny in the kingdom of God. Generally, soteriology concerns itself more with the means of accomplishing salvation than with the nature or content of salvation itself. The content of salvation will be addressed here, of course, but it will extend to the locion eschatology and ethics that explicate further the symbol

8 The Gift of Justification from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: In the previous chapter on soteriology, we noted how the doctrine of justification is the result of theological reflection on the significance of the symbol of Christ as the lamb of God. The innocence of the scapegoated lamb of God is transferred to us. Our own deeds of justice, our own good works, our own holiness, do not make us just in the sight of God. Our justice is rather an alien justice, one that comes to us from without but one that becomes our own through an act of God’s grace. Our justification is a gift.

Introduction to Part Five from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: Theology is an ongoing task with which Christians are never finished because something new is always placed on its agenda. Although it is the thinking discipline whereby faith seeks to understand itself, it is also a part of the church’s ministry. Its peculiar ministry is to provide intellectual leadership. The present work in systematic theology has sought to explicate the significance of the gospel so that what Christians say is intelligible within the context of modern and emerging postmodern consciousness. Thus, a methodological foundation was laid, scriptural symbols explicated, doctrinal content clarified, and hypothetical reconstruction begun. In turning now to

13 Astrotheology from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: How large is the oikoumene? How large is God’s creation? Is Planet Earth large enough? Our Planet Earth does not exist in isolation; its life-giving generativity is due to the network of relationships it shares with the sun, the moon, the Milky Way Galaxy of 200 to 400 billion stars, and the entire cosmos of 100 or more billion galaxies. Could God’s creation be any smaller than the totality of what is? Is it time for theologians to place our ecosphere within the context of the cosmosphere?

Book Title: The Creative Word-Canon as a Model for Biblical Education
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Erickson Amy
Abstract: Every faith community knows the challenges of inviting new members and the next generation into its shared life without falling into an arid traditionalism or a shallow relativism. Renowned scholar Walter Brueggemann finds a framework for education in the structure of the Hebrew Bible canon, with its assertion of center and limit (in the Torah), of challenge (in the Prophets), and of inquiry (in the Writings). Incorporating the best insights from his own career and from the fields of canonical criticism, Old Testament theology, and pedagogical theory, Brueggemann offers a vision of how the community can draw on the shape of Scripture to educate its members. First published in 1982, The Creative Word is now updated and introduced with a foreword by Amy Erickson of Iliff School of Theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wwx1c

Book Title: Metaphor and the Ancient Novel- Publisher: Barkhuis
Author(s): Frangoulidis Stavros
Abstract: This thematic fourth Supplementum to Ancient Narrative, entitled Metaphor and the Ancient Novel, is a collection of revised versions of papers originally read at the Second Rethymnon International Conference on the Ancient Novel (RICAN 2) under the same title, held at the University of Crete, Rethymnon, on May 19-20, 2003.Though research into metaphor has reached staggering proportions over the past twenty-five years, this is the first volume dedicated entirely to the subject of metaphor in relation to the ancient novel. Not every contributor takes into account theoretical discussions of metaphor, but the usefulness of every single paper lies in the fact that they explore actual texts while sometimes theorists tend to work out of context.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wwxsr

Metaphor, Gender and the Ancient Greek Novel from: Metaphor and the Ancient Novel
Author(s) Morales Helen
Abstract: Metaphors are dangerous in other ways too. Metaphor plays a fundamental role in the construction of meaning.¹ Feminist scholarship in particular has analysed the dangers and disadvantages for women in how metaphors are used to shape concepts and experiences. It has been observed that metaphor routinely enshrines and enacts power relations, and, more often than not, works to celebrate male supremacy and female oppression.² This can be all the more dangerous when a metaphor becomes used so often that it becomes ordinary and barely visible. ‘Faded’ or ‘dead’ metaphors naturalise the power relations they enact.³ No metaphor is ever just

Metaphor in Daphnis and Chloe from: Metaphor and the Ancient Novel
Author(s) Bowie Ewen
Abstract: Metaphor is a slippery term. It may seem cowardly to offer a plain man’s working definition without some theoretical underpinning, but other papers in this collection have offered helpful definitions, and it seems to me that a substantial discussion here would yield limited returns and would not materially advance our understanding of the phenomena in the text of Longus’ Daphnis and Chloethat I want to consider. Let me say simply, then, that by metaphor (on a micro-level) I understand taking a word (or occasionally a small group of related words) with a widely or universally accepted meaning in relation

Book Title: Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: Every other is truly other, but no other is wholly other.This is the claim that Aspects of Alterity defends. Taking up the question of otherness that so fascinates contemporary continental philosophy, this book asks what it means for something or someone to be other than the self. Levinas and those influenced by him point out that the philosophical tradition of the West has generally favored the self at the expense of the other. Such a self-centered perspective never encounters the other qua other, however. In response, postmodern thought insists on the absolute otherness of the other, epitomized by the deconstructive claim every other is wholly other.But absolute otherness generates problems and aporias of its own. This has led some thinkers to reevaluate the notion of relative otherness in light of the postmodern critique, arguing for a chiastic account that does justice to both the alterity and the similitude of the other. These latter two positions-absolute otherness and a rehabilitated account of relative otherness-are the main contenders in the contemporary debate.The philosophies of Emmanuel Levinas and Gabriel Marcel provide the point of embarkation for coming to understand the two positions on this question. Levinas and Marcel were contemporaries whose philosophies exhibit remarkably similar concern for the other but nevertheless remain fundamentally incompatible. Thus, these two thinkers provide a striking illustration of both the proximity of and the unbridgeable gap between two accounts of otherness.Aspects of Alterity delves into this debate, first in order understand the issues at stake in these two positions and second to determine which description better accounts for the experience of encountering the other.After a thorough assessment and critique of otherness in Levinas's and Marcel's work, including a discussion of the relationship of ethical alterity to theological assumptions, Aspects of Alterity traces the transmission and development of these two conceptions of otherness. Levinas's version of otherness can be seen in the work of Jacques Derrida and John D. Caputo, while Marcel's understanding of otherness influences the work of Paul Ricoeur and Richard Kearney.Ultimately, Aspects of Alterity makes a case for a hermeneutic account of otherness. Otherness itself is not absolute, but is a chiasm of alterity and similitude. Properly articulated, such an account is capable of addressing the legitimate ethical and epistemological concerns that lead thinkers to construe otherness in absolute terms, but without the absolute aporiasthat accompany such a characterization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzvd0

2 Emmanuel Levinas from: Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate
Abstract: These passages, both alluded to by Levinas in various places, underscore the impetus of his thought, which argues that ethical responsibility is more fundamental than ontology, inverting twenty-five hundred years of philosophy by showing that “man’s relation to the other is prior to his ontological relation to himself (egology) or to the totality of things that we call the world (cosmology).”¹ Although his work is exceptionally focused in its concern for the other, Levinas’s philosophy is extensive enough that a complete treatment of it is beyond the scope of this project, which demands that we summarize Levinas’s philosophy and focus

3 Gabriel Marcel from: Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate
Abstract: Just as the previous chapter sketched an outline of Levinas’s thought, this chapter will summarize some of the significant elements in Marcel’s diverse and unsystematic work. The format will follow that of the previous chapter: a general summary, followed by a description of intersubjectivity and alterity, and a final focus on love and justice. Again, while intending to provide a fair representation of Marcel’s work, the role played by these first two exegetical chapters—that of anticipating an engagement between Levinas and Marcel on the question of otherness—requires a more selective summary.

5 Concrete Philosophy from: Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate
Abstract: The previous chapter examined Levinas’s transcendental critique, assessed its applicability to Marcel’s work, and offered some hypothetical Marcelian responses. This critique argued for the transcendental priority of the infinite over being—that is, the priority of the Infinite as the condition for the possibility of truth, subjectivity, transcendence, etc.—and took the form of an accusation regarding the inability to account for the other as other. Levinas’s transcendental critique of the tradition (and of Marcel) looks for the other qua other in the tradition and finds the tradition wanting. Marcel’s work, however, takes a different tack. Some of his harshest

7 The Nature of Otherness from: Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate
Abstract: The title of this work promises more than a confrontation between the philosophies of Emmanuel Levinas and Gabriel Marcel, and the time has come to make good on that promise. The comparison of Levinas and Marcel has, to be sure, been interesting in terms of addressing the perplexing incompatibility of two philosophers who are in many ways quite similar. Moreover, tracing the development of these divergent accounts of otherness to the theological soil in which they are rooted is significant both in terms of understanding Levinas and Marcel, and in terms of a broader grasp of the way in which

1 The Bliss of Peace from: Tastes of the Divine: Hindu and Christian Theologies of Emotion
Abstract: The peaceful feeling of transcendence palpable in the NBCLC chapel is śānta, therasaof peace.Śāntawon a place as the ninthrasa, in addition to the eight enumerated by Bharata, after long debate. Abhinavagupta (tenth century), possibly India’s greatest literary theorist, championsśāntaas the ninth and most importantrasa, the one into which all other aesthetic emotions eventually resolve. We shall consider Abhinavagupta’s notion ofśāntaas it evolves in his works of literary criticism: theLocana(Loc), a commentary on Ānandavardhana’sDhvanyāloka(DhĀ);² and theAbhinavabhāratī(ABh), a commentary on theNāṭya Śāstra.³ As not only

2 Suffering and Peace from: Tastes of the Divine: Hindu and Christian Theologies of Emotion
Abstract: In the work of Jyoti Sahi, a contemporary Indian Christian artist who resides near Bangalore, the peaceful sentiment has a special place among the rasas. Much of Sahi’s work explores the interplay of opposites in relation to Indian culture and religion. His bookThe Child and the Serpent, for example, looks for symbols of unconscious structures (the serpent) and their birth into consciousness (the child). His use of Jungian psychology grounds his keen interest in Hindu art and mythology in pre-Aryan themes and rituals, so that he draws inspiration both from high Sanskritic culture and from Dalit and Tribal folk

6 Dalit Arts and the Failure of Aesthetics from: Tastes of the Divine: Hindu and Christian Theologies of Emotion
Abstract: The Rural Education for Development Society (REDS) in Karnataka, South India, produces the piece of street theatre just described. The organization works for the promotion of Dalits, the current preferred name for the group formerly known as Untouchables or Harijans. REDS works in over one thousand villages, with pro-Dalit projects ranging from the organization of democratic community councils (Panchayats) to the construction and distribution of solar-powered lamps to families without electricity. There are seventy-seven Dalit groups in the South Indian state of Tamilnadu alone, and these groups include a variety of professions, religions, and ideological approaches to Dalit liberation. In

Book Title: Material Spirit: Religion and Literature Intranscendent- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): GOOD CARL
Abstract: The essays in this collection examine philosophical, religious, and literary or artistic texts using methodologies and insights that have grown out of reflection on literature and art. In them, them phrase "material spirit" becomes a point of departure for considering the continuing spectral effects of religious texts and concerns in ways that do not simply call for, or assume, new orrenewed forms of religiosity. The writers in this collection seek to examine religion beyond traditional notions of transcendence: Their topics range from early Christian religious practices to global climate change. Some of the essays explore religious themes or tones in literary texts, for example, works by Wordsworth, Hopkins, Proust, Woolf, and Teresa of Avila. Others approach in a literarycritical mood philosophical or para-philosophical writers such as Bataille, Husserl, Derrida, and Benjamin. Still others treat writers of a more explicitly religious orientation, such as Augustine, Rosenzweig, or Bernard of Clairvaux.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzvp4

Augustine, Rosenzweig, and the Possibility of Experiencing Miracle from: Material Spirit: Religion and Literature Intranscendent
Author(s) BURRUS VIRGINIA
Abstract: At a crucial turning point in his Star of Redemption, Franz Rosenzweig raises the question of “the possibility of experiencing miracle.” In so doing, he draws inspiration from Augustine’sCity of God. The pursuit of the “trace of Augustine” in Rosenzweig’s magnum opus is no easy task, however, as Francesco Paolo Ciglia’s recent research in this area has shown.³ According to Rosenzweig’s own framing,Staris a work initially conceived “in the form of a biblical commentary” but finally written “under erasure of the text [unter Weglassung des Texts].”⁴ Editing out his sources, biblical or otherwise, the German-Jewish philosopher hopes

“Come forth into the light of things”: from: Material Spirit: Religion and Literature Intranscendent
Author(s) RIGBY KATE
Abstract: The figure of light, along with the darkness that is implicitly or explicitly always summoned as its opposite, has played a central and hitherto under-researched role in the history of Euro-Western dualism, the discursive structures and social ramifications of which have been the target of numerous cultural critiques (variously, and in various conjunctions, deconstructive, feminist, postcolonial, antiracist, queer, ecophilosophical, and zoocritical) since the 1970s.¹ Emerging from its mythic association with a series of solar deities and their kingly representatives on earth in the ancient agrarian civilizations of the Mediterranean region, and set to work metaphysically within classical Greek and patristic

Book Title: The Catholic Studies Reader- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): McGUINNESS MARGARET M.
Abstract: The Catholic Studies Reader is a rare book in an emerging field that has neither a documented history nor a consensus as to what should be a normative methodology. Dividing this volume into five interrelated themes central to the practice and theory of Catholic Studies-Sources and Contexts, Traditions and Methods, Pedagogy and Practice, Ethnicity, Race, and Catholic Studies, and The Catholic Imagination-the editors provide readers with the opportunity to understand the great diversity within this area of study. Readers will find informative essays on the Catholic intellectual tradition and Catholic social teaching, as well as reflections on the arts and literature. This provocative and enriching collection is valuable not only for scholars but also for lay and religious Catholics working in Catholic education in universities, high schools, and parish schools.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzvt6

Introduction: from: The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) McGUINNESS MARGARET M.
Abstract: Margaret McGuinness was a graduate student at Union Theological Seminary (New York) when Father James J. Hennesey’s A History of the Roman Catholic Community in the United Stateswas published in 1981, even as James Fisher was studying American cultural history down the New Jersey Turnpike at Rutgers. Although other scholars, including Notre Dame’s Philip Gleason and Jay Dolan, were also writing about American Catholicism at this time, McGuinness’s church history classes were paying very little attention to their work, focusing primarily on the U.S. Protestant experience. Hennesey’s book convinced her that American Catholicism was a vital part of the

1 “The Story Is What Saves Us”: from: The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) CAMPBELL DEBRA
Abstract: Autobiographical works such as Augustine’s Confessionsare the very foundation of Catholic Studies.¹ Even a cursory look at the footnotes in the comprehensive histories of American Catholicism published since the 1950s reveals how deeply our understanding of the evolution of Catholic life in North America is grounded inlife-writings, an elastic term for personal narratives presented in a variety of genres and formats, from travel narratives and traditional memoirs to autobiographical fiction and specialized hybrids (conversion and departure narratives, “Why I am a Catholic” books, and so on). Life-writings are pervasive and various, yet they are frequently neglected as a

2 The Catholic Intellectual Tradition: from: The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) O’DONNELL MARY ELLEN
Abstract: “Just as we reject the principle of divorcing faith and works, so we reject the principle and the practice of divorcing the life of faith and the life of study,” wrote Father Leo Ward of the University of Notre Dame in 1961.¹ Describing the ideal for the Catholic school, Ward’s rejection invites reflection on Catholic intellectual life. However, this comment, which might galvanize Catholic professors who perceive themselves as exemplars of the ideal, might also solicit quite a different reaction from those outside the professionally academic arena. The public perception of Catholicism does not always incline toward a scholastic tradition.

7 Method and Conversion in Catholic Studies from: The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) LIDDY RICHARD M.
Abstract: A former editor of the prestigious theological journal Theological Studiesis reported to have remarked that Bernard Lonergan’s work was the most frequently cited in that journal. Whether accurate or not, as Lonergan’s former student in Rome in the 1960s, and as someone who owes him an immense debt of gratitude, I can testify to the great explanatory power of his work. It is no wonder that the University of Toronto Press is now publishing the many volumes of hisCollected Works. In this essay I employ Lonergan’s work to delineate the methodological issues emerging in the relatively new field

14 Working Toward an Inclusive Narrative: from: The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) NABHAN-WARREN KRISTY
Abstract: I am a non-Catholic anthropologist of religion who, until recently, has worked primarily within Mexican American Catholic communities in the Southwest, West, and Midwest. In this essay, I raise some questions and concerns that have come up for me as an ethnographer who focuses on lived Christianities in the United States. I continue to work with Mexican American Catholics and have broadened out my scope of inquiry to include Anglo American Catholics and Protestants of a variety of traditions, and I am convinced that the field of Catholic Studies can learn much from histories and ethnographies of Spanish-speaking U.S. Catholics.

16 Cultural Studies Between Heaven and Earth: from: The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) FERRARO THOMAS J.
Abstract: When the North American Studies section of the American Academy of Religion asked me to respond, in November 2005, to Robert A. Orsi’s book Between Heaven and Earth: The Religious Worlds People Make and the Scholars Who Study Them, I cast about for a way of revealing, in concentrated but also prismatic form, what is at issue in Orsi’s work for American Studies at large.¹ Surely, Orsi has succeeded in mainstreaming Italian American social history, ethnicizing American Catholic historiography, and challenging the Protestant-centeredness of U.S. religious history, and just as surely the religious-studies wing of our profession does not need

Foreword from: Givenness and God: Questions of Jean-Luc Marion
Author(s) Lane Dermot A.
Abstract: It is a pleasure for me as President of Mater Dei Institute to welcome the publication of this collection of essays celebrating the work of Jean-Luc Marion. Most of the papers were first delivered in the Mater Dei Institute, a college of Dublin City University, in January 2003, at a conference attended by Marion. It was Marion’s first visit to Ireland, and it was most appropriate that a college specializing in religious education should host the occasion: after all, Marion has not only been central in the “turn toward the theological” in recent French phenomenology, but has also generated massive

Introduction from: Givenness and God: Questions of Jean-Luc Marion
Author(s) Cassidy Eoin
Abstract: Jean-Luc Marion’s body of work has already secured his place among the top rank of twentieth-century philosophers; it seems inconceivable that his reputation will not grow even further in the twenty-first century and beyond. Though equally renowned for his scholarly work on early modern philosophy and on Husserl and Heidegger, Marion is perhaps best known for his renewal of phenomenology, for his remarkable, ongoing inquiry into the question of God, and for work bridging all of these areas. The oeuvre resulting from this fertile constellation places Marion’s writings at the center of the “theological turn” in recent French phenomenology; as

5 Reduced Phenomena and Unreserved Debts in Marion’s Reading of Heidegger from: Givenness and God: Questions of Jean-Luc Marion
Author(s) Elliott Brian
Abstract: In the question concerning the necessity of grace from Aquinas’s Summa theologiaewe find the following remark: “The free-will of man is moved by an external principle that stands above the human mind, that is, by God” (quod liberum arbitrium hominis moveatur ab aliquo exteriori principio quod est supra mentem humanum, scilicet a Deo; q. 109, art. 2).¹ If the ultimate motivator of human free will is God, then the highest object of man’s desire, eternal life, must equally be solely within God’s gift and never effected by human works. As Augustine says:

10 Marion’s Ambition of Transcendence from: Givenness and God: Questions of Jean-Luc Marion
Author(s) Dooley Mark
Abstract: The essay that best encapsulates the recent thought of Jean-Luc Marion is, in my opinion, “The Saturated Phenomenon” (SP). Here the author gives an account of what he calls the paradox of an “impossible” phenomenon, one that bedazzles the ego through an excess of intuition over intention. Although this idea has generated a good deal of fairly robust criticism,¹ most of the essay’s readers are nevertheless impressed by the way in which Marion uses it not only to enlarge upon the project of God Without Being, but also to convey a sense of where his latest work, developed in texts

Book Title: Veiled Desires: Intimate Portrayals of Nuns in Postwar Anglo-American Film- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): SABINE MAUREEN
Abstract: A provocative, interdisciplinary study of nuns on the big screen, from The Bells of St. Mary's (1945) to Doubt (2008), that shines fresh light on the cinematic nun as a woman and a religious in the twentieth century. Ingrid Bergman's engaging screen performance as Sister Mary Benedict in The Bells of St. Mary's made the film nun a star and her character a shining standard of comparison. She represented the religious life as the happy and rewarding choice of a modern woman who had a "complete understanding" of both erotic and spiritual desire. How did this vibrant and mature nun figure come to be viewed as girlish and naive? Why have she and her cinematic sisters in postwar popular film so often been stereotyped or selectively analyzed, so seldom been seen as women and religious? In Veiled Desires--a unique full-length, in-depth study of nuns in film--Maureen Sabine explores these questions in a groundbreaking interdisciplinary study covering more than sixty years of cinema. She looks at an impressive breadth of films in which the nun features as an ardent lead character, including The Bells of St. Mary's (1945), Black Narcissus (1947), Heaven Knows, Mr. Allison (1957), Sea Wife (1957), The Nun's Story (1959), The Sound of Music (1965), Change of Habit (1969), In This House of Brede (1975), Agnes of God (1985), Dead Man Walking (1995), and Doubt (2008). Veiled Desires considers how the beautiful and charismatic stars who play chaste nuns, from Ingrid Bergman and Audrey Hepburn to Susan Sarandon and Meryl Streep, call attention to desires that the veil concealed and the habit was thought to stifle. In a theologically and psychoanalytically informed argument, Sabine responds to the critics who have pigeonholed the film nun as the obedient daughter and religious handmaiden of a patriarchal church, and the respectful audience who revered her as an icon of spiritual perfection. She provides a framework for a more complex and holistic picture of nuns on screen by showing how the films dramatize these women's Christian call to serve, sacrifice, and dedicate themselves to God, and their erotic desire for intimacy, agency, achievement, and fulfillment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzx0r

CONCLUSION: SUSPECT DESIRES: from: Veiled Desires: Intimate Portrayals of Nuns in Postwar Anglo-American Film
Abstract: When I originally conceived this study, I envisagedDead Man Walkingas “the light at the end of the road” for the representational journey that women religious take in postwar popular film. It would have been satisfying to conclude on an uplifting note with a film that means so much to contemporary nuns and that honors their continuing work of making Christ’s compassionate presence felt in a troubled world. The intense and life-changing events inDead Man Walkingtake place at Easter, the supreme Christian celebration, when the God-man who humbled himself on the Cross rose from the dead, and

5 The Prayers and Tears of Friedrich Nietzsche from: The Phenomenology of Prayer
Author(s) BENSON BRUCE ELLIS
Abstract: From Nietzsche’s first work to his last, one finds the intonation of prayer and the stain of tears.¹ The child who weeps over the deaths of father and brother becomes the man who sobs peering into the abyss of the tragic or encountering a horse being abused. The child who instinctively knew how to pray becomes the adult who struggles to find a new way to pray, one that follows other instincts.

7 Irigaray’s Between East and West: from: The Phenomenology of Prayer
Author(s) KEARNS CLEO MCNELLY
Abstract: In Between East and West, her recent reflections on the encounter between her yoga practice and her work in Western philosophy, Luce Irigaray notes that breathing and speaking are, for most people, inverse operations, using the body, the diaphragm, and the lungs in almost opposite ways.¹ The result is a split, an alienation, between the verbal and the organic rather than a mutual enrichment of the two. Irigaray goes on to warn that “a religion centered on speech, without the insistence on breathing and the silence that makes it possible, risks supporting a non-respect for life” (51). As she develops

Book Title: Gazing Through a Prism Darkly: Reflections on Merold Westphal's Hermeneutical Epistemology- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): PUTT B. KEITH
Abstract: Merold Westphal has been in the foremost ranks of philosophers who proclaim a new postsecular philosophy. By articulating an epistemology sensitive to the realities of cognitive finitude and moral weakness, he defends a wisdom that begins in both humility and commitment, one that always confesses that human beings can encounter meaning and truth only as human beings, never as gods.The present volume focuses on this wisdom of humility that characterizes Westphal's thought and explores how that wisdom, expressed through the redemptive dynamic of doubt, can contribute to developing a postsecular apologetic for faith.This book can function both as an accessible introduction to Westphal for those who have not read him extensively and also as an informed critical appreciation and extension of his work for those who are more experienced readers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzzv5

Despoiling the Egyptians—Gently: from: Gazing Through a Prism Darkly: Reflections on Merold Westphal's Hermeneutical Epistemology
Author(s) DESMOND WILLIAM
Abstract: Merold Westphal is one of the most significant interpreters of Hegel in the English-speaking philosophical world. He has worked on Hegel for the whole of his academic career. His first book, History and Truth in Hegel’s Phenomenology, is still referred to with continuing respect for the help it offers students in finding their way through Hegel’s labyrinthine work.¹ Westphal was also one of those thinkers intimately involved from early on in the “Hegel revival” in the United States, as well as more generally in the Anglo-American world. He served as vice president and program chair for a biennial meeting whose

The God Who Refuses to Appear on Philosophy’s Terms from: Gazing Through a Prism Darkly: Reflections on Merold Westphal's Hermeneutical Epistemology
Author(s) MATUŠTÍK MARTIN BECK
Abstract: On April 1, 2000, sixteen scholars gathered to celebrate the lifework of my former Purdue colleague, Calvin O. Schrag, on the occasion of his retirement. In his critique of Schrag’s move “beyond classical theism,”¹ Merold Westphal encapsulated some of the main arguments developed in his later works concerning overcoming ontotheology and transcendence and selftranscendence. Westphal’s oeuvre represents one of the most consistent and sophisticated contemporary philosophical defenses of Christian theism, and yet his is not a philosophy in service of unadulterated Christian apologetics. He develops the cutting-edge work in Continental philosophy of religion in which the theistic God refuses to

The Joy of Being Indebted: from: Gazing Through a Prism Darkly: Reflections on Merold Westphal's Hermeneutical Epistemology
Author(s) WESTPHAL MEROLD
Abstract: I wish to express my deepest gratitude to the contributors to this volume. For years they have been my friends and teachers, and I have been in their debt in many ways long before the present project. Now the care and seriousness with which they have addressed my work makes me all the more indebted. I do not pretend that these brief words of response repay that debt; nor would I wish them to. For the joy of being indebted is, it seems to me, an essential aspect of friendship.

Book Title: The Conditions of Hospitality: Ethics, Politics, and Aesthetics on the Threshold of the Possible- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: Hospitality is a multi-faceted concept that has been received by, and worked into, various academic realms and disciplines, such as philosophy, politics, anthropology, aesthetics, ethics, and translation studies. The essays collected in this volume, by a wide range of international contributors, examine how, in the wake of the work of Levinas and the late Derrida, this concept has entered into and transformed the thinking of these disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzzzq

Introduction: from: The Conditions of Hospitality: Ethics, Politics, and Aesthetics on the Threshold of the Possible
Author(s) CLAVIEZ THOMAS
Abstract: The essays assembled in this volume represent the collected contributions to a conference held in Stavanger, Norway, in September 2008, with the title “The Conditions of Hospitality.” It was designed to commemorate and contemplate the lasting influence and heritage of the works of Emmanuel Levinas and the late Jacques Derrida, which have allowed us to think about hospitality in new ways.¹ The conference papers have been complemented by selected essays from renowned scholars that attest, in their disciplinary and theoretical variety, to the multifaceted way in which this concept has been received, and worked into, various scientific realms and disciplines,

Conditions for Hospitality or Defence of Identity? from: The Conditions of Hospitality: Ethics, Politics, and Aesthetics on the Threshold of the Possible
Author(s) GAD ULRIK PRAM
Abstract: As one of the last decisions before it disassembled for the summer break in 2008, the Danish Parliament, Folketinget, passed two bills to facilitate the participation of Danish municipalities in the International Cities of Refuge Network (ICORN).¹ On the face of it, it might be good news that yet another country opens its borders to writers targeted with threats and persecution. As a condition for refuge in Denmark, however, any writer granted “refuge” under the umbrella of ICORN now has to sign a rather peculiar document—a “Declaration on recognition of the fundamental values of the Danish society” (cf. Appendix).

Book Title: Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Custance Gloria
Abstract: Bruno Latour stirs things up. Latour began as a lover of science and technology, co-founder of actor-network theory, and philosopher of a modernity that had "never been modern." In the meantime he is regarded not just as one of the most intelligent and also popular exponents of science studies but also as a major innovator of the social sciences, an exemplary wanderer who walks the line between the sciences and the humanities. This book provides the first comprehensive overview of the Latourian oeuvre, from his early anthropological studies in Abidjan (Ivory Coast), to influential books like Laboratory Life and Science in Action, and his most recent reflections on an empirical metaphysics of "modes of existence." In the course of this enquiry it becomes clear that the basic problem to which Latour's work responds is that of social tradition, the transmission of experience and knowledge. What this empirical philosopher constantly grapples with is the complex relationship of knowledge, time, and culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x00jv

ONE Exegesis and Ethnology from: Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography
Abstract: Beaune is one of France’s most famous and important wine centers. The small city in Burgundy is also the birthplace of two important scientists: in 1746 the mathematician Gaspard Monge, and in 1830 the physiologist Étienne-Jules Marey. Unsurprisingly for this region of the world, wine is one of the connecting links between Monge and Marey. Both scientists came from families of winegrowers and wine merchants—the two families had actually joined forces for a time in the late eighteenth century. And even the scientific work of these two sons of Beaune was associated: although their subjects could not have been

TWO A Philosopher in the Laboratory from: Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography
Abstract: The Salk Institute, which is located directly by the sea in an area of outstanding natural beauty near San Diego, was founded by the clinical medicine researcher and virologist Jonas Salk. In 1955 Salk had presented the first effective vaccine against paralytic poliomyelitis. Although he had drawn on the work of

SIX Science and Action from: Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography
Abstract: Around 1985 the Center for the Sociology of Innovation at the Écoles des Mines in Paris became the institutional basis of actor-network theory. Although “theory of the actor-network,” “actor-network theory,” or simply “ANT” did not become common currency until the early 1990s,¹ the “author network” of actor-network theory had already formed several years previously at the Center for the Sociology of Innovation. The association between Latour and Callon was the nucleus of this network. Callon, Lucien Karpik’s successor, was director of the center from 1982 to 1994. Latour also arrived there in 1982 and stayed for almost a quarter of

EIGHT The Coming Parliament from: Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography
Abstract: The last project that the American architect Louis Kahn worked on was a parliament building complex. It had been in planning since the early 1960s. While he was building the institute in La Jolla, California, for Jonas Salk, where a few years later Latour would conduct his ethnological studies for Laboratory Life, Kahn was already working on the plans for the National Assembly in Dhaka, the capital of today’s Bangladesh. Together with his student Muzharul Islam the architect advanced this mammoth project until his unexpected death from a heart attack in 1974. The Jatiyo Sangsad Bhaban, the National Assembly Building,

Book Title: Structures of Appearing: Allegory and the Work of Literature- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Machosky Brenda
Abstract: Taking a phenomenological approach to allegory, Structures of Appearing seeks to revise the history of aesthetics, identifying it as an ideology that has long subjugated art to philosophical criteria of judgment. Rather than being a mere signifying device, allegory is the structure by which something appears that cannot otherwise appear. It thus supports the appearance and necessary experience of philosophical ideas that are otherwise impossible to present or represent. Allegory is as central to philosophy as it is to literature. Following suggestions by Walter Benjamin, Machosky argues that allegory itself must appear allegorically and thus cannot be forced into a logos-centric metaphysical system. She builds on the work of Maurice Blanchot and Emmanuel Levinas to argue that the allegorical image is not a likeness to anything, not a subjective reflection, but an absolute otherness that becomes accessible by virtue of its unique structure. Allegory thus makes possible not merely the textual work of literature but the work that literature is. Machosky develops this insight in readings of Prudentius, Dante, Spenser, Hegel, Goethe, and Kafka.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x00w1

Book Title: Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Westphal Merold
Abstract: Overcoming Onto-theology is a stunning collection of essays by Merold Westphal, one of America's leading continental philosophers of religion, in which Westphal carefully explores the nature and the structure of a postmodern Christian philosophy. Written with characteristic clarity and charm, Westphal offers masterful studies of Heidegger's early lectures on Paul and Augustine, the idea of hermeneutics, Schleiermacher, Hegel, Derrida, and Nietzsche, all in the service of building his argument that postmodern thinking offers an indispensable tool for rethinking Christian faith. A must read for every student and professor of continental philosophy and the philosophy of religion, Overcoming Onto-theology is an invaluable collection that brings together in one place fourteen provocative and lucid essays by one of the most important thinkers working in American philosophy today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0123

1 Overcoming Onto-theology from: Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: Not long ago I participated in a conference on biblical hermeneutics. It asked about the relation between trust and suspicion for Christians reading the Bible. The keynote addresses by Walter Brueggemann and Phyllis Trible were brilliant. But for me the highlight of the conference was the workshop led by Ched Myers, whose radical reading of the gospel of Mark is one of the finest pieces of biblical interpretation I have ever read.² To be more precise, the highlight was the moment in the middle of the workshop when he had us sing.

13 Divine Excess: from: Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: The title of Calvin Schrag’s splendid little book The Self after Postmodernity¹ makes explicit his assumption that the postmodern assault on the self as conceived by major strands within the western philosophical tradition is not an abolition, not a annihilation without remainder. Schrag’s work is inspired in large part by Paul Ricoeur’s attempt, among the shards of the “shattered cogito,” to develop a “hermeneutics of the self [that] is placed at an equal distance from the apology of the cogito and from its overthrow … at an equal distance from the cogito exalted by Descartes and from the cogito that

Book Title: Language, Eros, Being: Kabbalistic Hermeneutics and Poetic Imagination- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): WOLFSON ELLIOT R.
Abstract: This long-awaited, magisterial study-an unparalleled blend of philosophy, poetry, and philology-draws on theories of sexuality, phenomenology, comparative religion, philological writings on Kabbalah, Russian formalism, Wittgenstein, Rosenzweig, William Blake, and the very physics of the time-space continuum to establish what will surely be a highwater mark in work on Kabbalah. Not only a study of texts, Language, Eros, Being is perhaps the fullest confrontation of the body in Jewish studies, if not in religious studies as a whole.Elliot R. Wolfson explores the complex gender symbolism that permeates Kabbalistic literature. Focusing on the nexus of asceticism and eroticism, he seeks to define the role of symbolic and poetically charged language in the erotically configured visionary imagination of the medieval Kabbalists. He demonstrates that the traditional Kabbalistic view of gender was a monolithic and androcentric one, in which the feminine was conceived as being derived from the masculine. He does not shrink from the negative implications of this doctrine, but seeks to make an honest acknowledgment of it as the first step toward the redemption of an ancient wisdom.Comparisons with other mystical traditions-including those in Christianity, Buddhism, and Islam-are a remarkable feature throughout the book. They will make it important well beyond Jewish studies, indeed, a must for historians of comparative religion, in particular of comparative mysticism.Praise for Elliot R. Wolfson:Through a Speculum That Shines is an important and provocative contribution to the study of Jewish mysticism by one of the major scholars now working in this field.-Speculum
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x01nw

Book Title: For Derrida- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Miller J. Hillis
Abstract: This book-the culmination of forty years of friendship between J. Hillis Miller and Jacques Derrida, during which Miller also closely followed all Derrida's writings and seminars-is for Derridain two senses. It is for him,dedicated to his memory. The chapters also speak, in acts of reading, as advocates for Derrida's work. They focus especially on Derrida's late work, including passages from the last, as yet unpublished, seminars. The chapters are partial to Derrida,on his side, taking his part, gratefully submitting themselves to the demand made by Derrida's writings to be read-slowly, carefully, faithfully, with close attention to semantic detail.The chapters do not progress forward to tell a sequential story. They are, rather, a series of perspectives on the heterogeneity of Derrida's work, or forays into that heterogeneity.The chief goal has been, to borrow a phrase from Wallace Stevens, plainly to propoundwhat Derrida says. The book aims, above all, to render Derrida's writings justice. It should be remembered, however, that, according to Derrida himself, every rendering of justice is also a transformative interpretation. A book like this one is not a substitute for reading Derrida for oneself. It is to be hoped that it will encourage readers to do just that.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x01v0

CHAPTER 2 Who or What Decides, for Derrida: from: For Derrida
Abstract: The previous chapter attempts to identify Derrida’s answer to an urgent question he raises in his work on the university without condition. “To whom, to what,” he asks, am I responsible when I refuse to “reply for my thought or writing” to “constituted powers,” that is, powers of state or institutional powers, such as my university? What justifies my saying “No; I won’t do what you ask”? Derrida’s answer, as I have shown, is that I have a higher obligation to le tout autre, “the wholly other,” whatever, exactly, that may mean. In this chapter I raise a different question.

CHAPTER 3 Derrida’s Destinerrance from: For Derrida
Abstract: What is destined to happen to the corpus of Derrida’s works? What fate will befall them? As I will show in Chapter 5, Derrida was anxious about what would happen after his death to his “remains,” in the double sense of his dead body and of the body of his writings, his “corpus.” This anxiety is expressed both in A Taste for the Secretand in the long, amazing reflection on death, apropos of Robinson Crusoe’s fear of it, carried on from seminar to seminar in his last seminars, “The Beast and the Sovereign (Two)” (“La bête et le souverain

CHAPTER 11 Touching Derrida Touching Nancy from: For Derrida
Abstract: How can I touch Derrida, now that he is dead? How can I touch, in a shapely chapter, on the immense and immensely complex text he wrote touching touching, the tactile, tactility, the contingent, the tangential as a theme in Nancy’s immense work,¹ and as a theme in Western philosophy from Aristotle to Husserl, Heidegger, Levinas, Didier Franck, Jean-Louis Chrétien, and, by way of Immanuel Kant, Félix Ravaisson, Maine de Biran, and others? One little touch, that’s all I want, such as the touch at one point the tangent line makes on a curved line before flying off at a

CHAPTER 12 Absolute Mourning: from: For Derrida
Abstract: In the previous chapter I asserted that Derrida’s Le toucher, Jean-Luc Nancyis an extremely odd or exceptional work of mourning. It mourns someone who is not yet dead, since Nancy survived his heart transplant operation to persist in what might be called a posthumous life. This has lasted down to the day I am writing this. For this I rejoice. Nancy has survived Derrida’s death to write more about Derrida. As I showed, he is having the last word about matters on which they did not quite agree, now that Derrida cannot answer back.

CHAPTER 5 Religion and the Public Sphere in Senegal: from: Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Diagne Souleymane Bachir
Abstract: Those who led Senegal to independence and established the institutions of the new state, notably Léopold Sédar Senghor and Mamadou Dia, intended it to be based on the philosophical foundation of a socialism that would be both African and spiritualist. And they also meant it to be secular. African socialism, spirituality, secularism, those were the concepts that were to guide the state toward modernity and development. Socialism had transformed Russia into a world power; it was at work in China and elsewhere to bring progress to the lives of the “damned of the earth.” It was logical to think that

CHAPTER 10 Natural Right and State of Exception in Leo Strauss from: Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Vatter Miguel
Abstract: In his work on the state of exception, Giorgio Agamben relies extensively on the study of emergency powers made by an American political scientist, Clinton Rossiter, in a 1948 book entitled Constitutional Dictatorship. Rossiter shows that when constitutional democratic governments have faced severe political or economical crises, they have not hesitated to employ dictatorial means in “an unconscious but nonetheless real imitation of the autocratic methods of their enemies.”¹ He goes on to claim that modern democracies differ from totalitarian regimes on this count because in democracies the state of exception is itself used only exceptionally. Agamben’s thesis, on the

Book Title: Rethinking God as Gift: Marion, Derrida, and the Limits of Phenomenology- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Horner Robyn
Abstract: Rethinking God as Gift is situated at the intersection of philosophy, critical theory and theology. The first sustained study of the work of Jean-Luc Marion in English, it offers a unique perspective on contemporary questions and their theological relevance. Taking its point of departure from the problem of the gift as articulated by Jacques Derrida, who argues that the conditions of possibility of the gift are also its conditions of impossibility, Horner pursues a series of questions concerning the nature of thought, the viability of phenomenology, and, most urgently, the possibility of grace. For Marion, phenomenology, as the thought of the given, offers a path for philosophy to proceed without being implicated in metaphysics. His retrieval of several important insights of Edmund Husserl, along with his reading of Martin Heidegger and Emmanuel Lvinas, enables him to work out a phenomenology where even impossiblephenomena such as revelation and the gift might be examined. In this important confrontation between Marion and Derrida issues vital to the negotiation of postmodern concerns in philosophy and theology emerge with vigour. The careful elucidation of those issues in an interdisciplinary context, and the snapshot it provides of the state of contemporary debate, make Rethinking God as Gift an important contribution to theological and philosophical discussion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x02dr

3 Levinas from: Rethinking God as Gift: Marion, Derrida, and the Limits of Phenomenology
Abstract: The work of Emmanuel Levinas is important in this context for three reasons: first, because it is a dialogue with and a departure from the thinking of both Husserl and Heidegger; second, because it marks a further application and development of the phenomenological method; and third, because in each of the aforementioned respects it has had enormous influence on Jean-Luc Marion.¹ In my examination of Levinas I will order my comments according to these aspects of his relevance.

5 Being Given from: Rethinking God as Gift: Marion, Derrida, and the Limits of Phenomenology
Abstract: Étant donné, published in 1997, represents the fullest account of Marion’s phenomenology to date. Divided into five books, this monumental work repeats but also clarifies and extends the achievements ofRéduction et donation, responding to many of the criticisms leveled at the project. At the moment we are concerned largely with the first book, which focuses on the formula reached in the final pages ofRéduction et donationand developed in the article “L’autre philosophie première et la question de la donation”: “as much reduction, as much givenness.”¹ It is the same formula that Henry affirms in his article in

7 Rethinking the Gift I from: Rethinking God as Gift: Marion, Derrida, and the Limits of Phenomenology
Abstract: In accordance with both Christian tradition and his vision of phenomenology, Marion answers the question of how God might enter into human thought in terms of the gift. For Marion there is an essential coherence, if not a correlation, between what takes place at the outer limits of thought and what theology identifies as the inbreaking of God in human life. Derrida, on the other hand, is less convinced of the capacity of phenomenology to work at these outer limits, and is suspicious of what a theological hermeneutics promises to deliver. Nevertheless, as we find Marion more and more insistent

Book Title: Regard for the Other: Autothanatography in Rousseau, De Quincey, Baudelaire, and Wilde- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Burt E. S.
Abstract: Although much has been written on autobiography, the same cannot be said of autothanatography, the writing of one's death. This study starts from the deconstructive premise that autobiography is aporetic, not or not only a matter of a subject strategizing with language to produce an exemplary identity but a matter also of its responding to an exorbitant call to write its death. The I-dominated representations of particular others and of the privileged other to whom a work is addressed, must therefore be set against an alterity plaguing the I from within or shadowing it from without. This alterity makes itself known in writing as the potential of the text to carry messages that remain secret to the confessing subject. Anticipation of the potential for the confessional text to say what Augustine calls the secret I do not know,the secret of death, engages the autothanatographical subject in a dynamic, inventive, and open-ended process of identification. The subject presented in these texts is not one that has already evolved an interior life that it seeks to reveal to others, but one that speaks to us as still in process. Through its exorbitant response, it gives intimations of an interiority and an ethical existence to come. Baudelaire emerges as a central figure for this understanding of autobiography as autothanatography through his critique of the narcissism of a certain Rousseau, his translation of De Quincey's confessions, with their vertiginously ungrounded subject-in-construction, his artistic practice of self-conscious, thorough-going doubleness, and his service to Wilde as model for an aporetic secrecy. The author discusses the interruption of narrative that must be central to the writing of one's death and addresses the I's dealings with the aporias of such structuring principles as secrecy, Levinasian hospitality, or interiorization as translation. The book makes a strong intervention in the debate over one of the most-read genres of our time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x02w0

CHAPTER 3 The Shape before the Mirror: from: Regard for the Other: Autothanatography in Rousseau, De Quincey, Baudelaire, and Wilde
Abstract: Baudelaire’s work is far from self-evidently autobiographical. Les Fleurs du mal, for instance, cannot be easily compared with a self-declared poetic autobiography like Victor Hugo’sContemplations, whose poems are of decidedly personal inspiration, bear dates that attach them to experience, and lay out a plausible narrative of poetic development. In contrast, Baudelaire’s undated poems appear impersonal and, in their emblematic character, untethered to experience. Although the poet does give the collection the status of an expressive work in one letter to Ancelle: “Do I have to tell you, you who have guessed it no more than the others, that in

Book Title: Human Rights, Inc.: The World Novel, Narrative Form, and International Law- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): SLAUGHTER JOSEPH R.
Abstract: In this timely study of the historical, ideological, and formal interdependencies of the novel and human rights, Joseph Slaughter demonstrates that the twentieth-century rise of world literatureand international human rights law are related phenomena. Slaughter argues that international law shares with the modern novel a particular conception of the human individual. The Bildungsroman, the novel of coming of age, fills out this image, offering a conceptual vocabulary, a humanist social vision, and a narrative grammar for what the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and early literary theorists both call the free and full development of the human personality. Revising our received understanding of the relationship between law and literature, Slaughter suggests that this narrative form has acted as a cultural surrogate for the weak executive authority of international law, naturalizing the assumptions and conditions that make human rights appear commonsensical. As a kind of novelistic correlative to human rights law, the Bildungsroman has thus been doing some of the sociocultural work of enforcement that the law cannot do for itself. This analysis of the cultural work of law and of the social work of literature challenges traditional Eurocentric histories of both international law and the dissemination of the novel. Taking his point of departure in Goethe's Wilhelm Meister, Slaughter focuses on recent postcolonial versions of the coming-of-age story to show how the promise of human rights becomes legible in narrative and how the novel and the law are complicit in contemporary projects of globalization: in colonialism, neoimperalism, humanitarianism, and the spread of multinational consumer capitalism.Slaughter raises important practical and ethical questions that we must confront in advocating for human rights and reading world literature-imperatives that, today more than ever, are intertwined.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x031j

CHAPTER 1 Novel Subjects and Enabling Fictions: from: Human Rights, Inc.: The World Novel, Narrative Form, and International Law
Abstract: Like mythical twins separated at birth by the geographical accidents of British imperialism, two Watts—Ian and Alan—found themselves grappling with the battered legacy of the Enlightenment’s emancipatory promise in the aftermath of World War II, converging on Robinson Crusoeas a signal literary marker of the historical emergence of rationalized individualism. The apprentice literary critic Ian Watt, studying the “relation between the growth of the reading public and the emergence of the novel,” was writing at St. John’s College, Cambridge, what was to become his seminal work,The Rise of the Novel, in whichCrusoefeatures as both

CHAPTER 2 Becoming Plots: from: Human Rights, Inc.: The World Novel, Narrative Form, and International Law
Abstract: In her first major speech as United Nations High Commissioner for Human Rights in 1997, Ireland’s former president Mary Robinson admonished the international body for having abandoned its historical mission of “realising human rights”: “Somewhere along the way many in the United Nations have lost the plot and allowed their work to answer to other imperatives.”¹ Recalling the purposes for which the UN incorporated itself in 1945, Robinson insisted that “almost by definition and certainly according to its Charter, the United Nations exists to promote human rights.” Indeed, the Charter’s preamble rehearses the organization’s statement of purpose, enumerating the common

Book Title: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): WYSCHOGROD EDITH
Abstract: Exploring the risks, ambiguities, and unstable conceptual worlds of contemporary thought, Crossover Queries brings together the wide-ranging writings, across twenty years, of one of our most important philosophers.Ranging from twentieth-century European philosophy-the thought of Heidegger, Foucault, Derrida, Levinas, Janicaud, and others-to novels and artworks, music and dance, from traditional Jewish thought to Jain andBuddhist metaphysics, Wyschogrod's work opens radically new vistas while remaining mindful that the philosopher stands within and is responsible to a philosophical legacy conditioned by the negative.Rather than point to a Hegelian dialectic of overcoming negation or to a postmetaphysical exhaustion, Wyschogrod treats negative moments as opening novel spaces for thought. She probes both the desire for God and an ethics grounded in the interests of the other person, seeing these as moments both of crossing over and of negation. Alert to the catastrophes that have marked our times, she exposes the underlying logical structures of nihilatory forces that have been exerted to exterminate whole peoples. Analyzing the negationsof biological research and cultural images of mechanized and robotic bodies, she shows how they contest the body as lived in ordinary experience.Crossover Queries brings together important essays on a remarkable range of topics by one of our most insightful cultural critics. Commenting on philosophical and theological issues that have shaped the recent past as well as scientific and technological questions that will preoccupy us in the near future, Wyschogrod consistently alerts us to the urgency of problems whose importance few recognize. To avoid the challenge these essays pose is to avoid responsibility for a future that appears to be increasingly fragile.-Mark C. Taylor, Columbia University
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0385

1 Intending Transcendence: from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: In what may seem a paradoxical claim, Edmund Husserl maintains that the “rich use of fancy” in art and poetry can contribute significantly to phenomenological philosophy conceived as a rigorous science. Phenomenology “can draw extraordinary profit” from the gifts of these arts, which “in the abundance of detailed features … greatly excel the performances of our own fancy,‭” as Husserl declares ( Ideas, 184). In consonance with this claim, it may be useful to turn (briefly) to contemporary Italian artist Francesco Clemente’sInside/Outside, an artwork that mimes the apophatic discourse of negative theology in its attempt to render visually that which

9 From the Death of the Word to the Rise of the Image in the Choreography of Merce Cunningham from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: When one of the key figures in the world of dance, who is generally envisaged as an exemplar of high modernism, Merce Cunningham, appeals to the power of images rather than to a semiology of movements as the basis for his new work, then a shift that must be interrogated has occurred. As Wittgenstein demonstrated to philosophers the kinetic force of language in his apothegm “The meaning is in the use,” so Cunningham showed the world of modern dance that the meaning is in the action or movement. Along with Martha Graham, Paul Taylor, Murray Louis, and later Twyla Tharp,

18 Interview with Emmanuel Levinas from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Author(s) Levinas Emmanuel
Abstract: Edith Wyschogrod: Is there a turning ( Kehre), a change in your work, such that instead of finding moral significations by way of phenomenology, through what is inscribed in the face of the Other, you find it in language? If there is such a change, I would like to know why you now rely on the Logos more than previously.

19 Postmodernism and the Desire for God: from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Author(s) CAPUTO JOHN D.
Abstract: John D. Caputo: In just the past year [1998] we have seen two books edited by English theologians—one entitled The Postmodern God, the otherPost-Secular Philosophy—that have pressed the claim that “postmodern” must be understood to mean or at least to include “postsecular,” that the delimitation of the claims of Enlightenment rationalism must also involve the delimitation of Enlightenment secularism.¹ A critical stance toward modernism goes hand in hand with a critical stance toward secularism. In France, Jacques Derrida’s most recent work has taken a turn toward what he calls “religion without religion,” that is, toward a thinking

24 Killing the Cat: from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: Genet’s heroes are “as at home in infamy as a fish is in water.”¹ According to Sartre, the effect produced by Genet’s use of crime is not “an ethics of evil” but its metamorphosis into a “black aestheticism.”² For Mishima, descriptions of blood and gore produce a comparable result: “when blood flows existence as a whole receives its first endorsement.”³ The works I consider, Genet’s Funeral Ritesand Mishima’sTemple of the Golden Pavilion, include theoretical accounts of beauty and sacrifice that, despite their speculative nature, produce an aesthetic intoxication nearly comparable to that of the novels’ transgressive events.

26 The Moral Self: from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: The work of Levinas attempts to give an account of the uniqueness of the human person, starting from what he believes to be peculiar to persons, the recognition of others as the source of moral obligation. This criterion had already been proposed in the literature of neo-Kantianism, but the formulation it received there had been found wanting. According to Heidegger, the neo-Kantian sees in the ethical a means for transcending human finitude: “There is something in the categorical imperative which exceeds the finite being.”¹ But for Heidegger the concept of the ethical can display itself only in relation to a

28 Time and Nonbeing in Derrida and Quine from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: Contemporary philosophers may be divided into two classes: those who believe in normative epistemological discourse governed by canons of objectivity and rationality continuous with those of science, and those who think of cognitive discourse as one among many claimants to meaning. Richard Rorty argues that, if there is “no common commensurating ground between them, all we can do is be hermeneutic about the opposition.”¹ In this interpretation, it is futile to try to breach the distinctive discursive modes and ontological claims separating the work of Quine and Derrida. Quine belongs in the systematic cognitive camp, since he thinks the criteria

30 The Mathematical Model in Plato and Some Surrogates in a Jain Theory of Knowledge from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: One of the generative questions in Benjamin Nelson’s late work was: What accounts for the breakthrough insights that permit the reduction of all quality to quantity, the proclaiming of a mathematical reality behind the experiential immediacies of experience and the affirmation of a homogeneous time and space throughout the universe, insights that characterize Western science? It is a question that exercise both Nelson and Joseph Needham; both consider it from an intercivilizational perspective. To put the matter in Needham’s terms: “What was it that happened in Renaissance Europe when mathematics and science joined in a combination qualitatively new and destined

Book Title: Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: Interstices of the Sublime represents a powerful theological engagement with psychoanalytic theory in Freud, Lacan, Kristeva and Zizek, as well as major expressions of contemporary Continental philosophy, including Deleuze, Derrida, Marion, and Badiou. Through creative and constructive psycho-theological readings of topics such as sublimation, schizophrenia, God, and creation ex nihilo, this book contributes to a new form of radical theological thinking that is deeply involved in the world. Here the idea of the Kantian sublime is read into Freud and Lacan, and compared with sublimation. The sublime refers to a conflict of the Kantian faculties of reason and imagination, and involves the attempt to represent what is intrinsically unrepresentable. Sublimation, by contrast, involves the expression and partial satisfaction of primal desires in culturally acceptable terms. The sublime is negatively expressed in sublimation, because it is both the sourceof sublimation as well as that which resists being sublimated. That is, the Freudian sublime is related to the process of sublimation, but it also distorts or disrupts sublimation, and invokes what Lacan calls the Real. The effects of the sublime are not just psychoanalytic but, importantly, theological, because the sublime is the main form that Godtakes in the modern world. A radical postmodern theology attends to the workings of the sublime in our thinking and living, and provides resources to understand the complexity of reality. This book is one of the first sustained theological readings of Lacan in English.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x03fr

3 Desiring the Thing from: Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: In this chapter I suggest that conventional ethics, which is oriented toward the good, is challenged by psychoanalytic theory. Lacan’s work allows us to distinguish between desire for the Other, which is limited to symbolic language, and desire for the Thing, which lies beyond the symbolic in the Real. Primarily by reading Lacan’s discussion of the Thing in The Ethics of Psychoanalysis, I relate the idea of the Thing to the idea of God, which later becomes the focus of chapter 8, where I contrast Lacan with Jean-Luc Marion’s understanding of God as Good rather than as Being. The desire

5 Anxiety and the S(ub)lime Body of God from: Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: In his early career, Freud understood anxiety as a response to repression, but in a later work he reversed himself, arguing that anxiety is primary. In this chapter I argue that anxiety is fundamentally related to the body as well as to jouissance, which refers to a fascination with the process of expelling body to create a subject orcogito. This bodily remainder, which sometimes takes the form of slime, generates enormous anxiety, at the individual, social, and theological levels. Following Lacan’s formulas of sexuation distinguishing between the exception (man) and the not-all (woman), Slavoj Žižek applies this distinction to

8 God Without Being (God) from: Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: How can we think about God, especially in light of psychoanalytic theory from Freud to Lacan? Postmodern theology is currently assessing notions of God liberated from the constraints of being, stimulated by the work of Jean-Luc Marion. Does Lacan’s thought provide resources to think differently about some of these important discussions inspired by Marion concerning God without being?

9 Expressing the Real from: Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: Taking the triad imaginary-symbolic-Real as representative of Lacan’s consistent and core thought, one can detect a shift in emphasis from the symbolic to the Real over the course of his intellectual career, as described in chapter 3. From his conception of the mirror stage expressed in his addresses to the International Congress of Psychoanalysis to his early seminars in the 1950s, Lacan’s early work focuses on the differentiation of the imaginary and the symbolic. The attention to symbolic discourse, and the identification of desire as the expression of the subject’s speech, carries with it an ethical bent—to traverse the

10 Processing the Real from: Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: In the last chapter I discussed Lacan’s Seminar XXas an attempt to express the Real that lies at the limit of language. I acknowledged the broadly Platonic aspect of Lacan’s thought, which becomes more explicit in the work of Alain Badiou. At the same time, my reading ofBenito Cerenois also a critique of Badiou’s Platonism, or at least an effort to complicate the limit of language in a profound way. In chapter 8 I discussed Lacan’s critique of Aristotelian utilitarianism; that is, an understanding of Aristotle’sNicomachean Ethicsthat privileges goods, or the Good, especially as it

Book Title: Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): KAVKA MARTIN
Abstract: Since the publication of her first book, Emmanuel Levinas: The Problem of Ethical Metaphysics, in 1974-the first book about Levinas published in English-Edith Wyschogrod has been at the forefront of the fields of Continental philosophy and philosophy of religion. Her work has crossed many disciplinary boundaries, making peregrinations from phenomenology and moral philosophy to historiography, the history of religions (both Western and non-Western), aesthetics, and the philosophy of biology. In all of these discourses, she has sought to cultivate an awareness of how the self is situated and influenced, as well as the ways in which a self can influence others.In this volume, twelve scholars examine and display the influence of Wyschogrod's work in essays that take up the thematics of influence in a variety of contexts: Christian theology, the saintly behavior of the villagers of Le Chambon sur Lignon, the texts of the medieval Jewish mystic Abraham Abulafia, the philosophies of Levinas, Derrida, and Benjamin, the practice of intellectual history, the cultural memory of the New Testament, and pedagogy.In response, Wyschogrod shows how her interlocutors have brought to light her multiple authorial personae and have thus marked the ambiguity of selfhood, its position at the nexus of being influenced by and influencing others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x03hs

Introduction from: Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Kavka Martin
Abstract: Any volume that intends to honor a scholar whose work has shaped a field of inquiry is always about influence. This tribute to the work of Edith Wyschogrod is no exception. As a testament to the significance and extent of that influence, this volume brings together preeminent scholars in Continental philosophy of religion, as well as in Christian and Jewish theology, pragmatism, phenomenology, textual studies, and religious ethics. Many of these contributors have been Wyschogrod’s conversation partners throughout her years of scholarship. The volume includes essays that explicitly consider the salient issues in Wyschogrod’s work, as well as essays that

The Uncertainty Principle from: Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) TAYLOR MARK C.
Abstract: Edith Wyschogrod is first and foremost an ethical thinker. That is not to say she is an ethicist in the usual sense of the term; to the contrary, it is precisely because her work exceeds the bounds of ethics as traditionally defined that it is relevant today. All too often ethical reflection remains focused on specific problems and does not rise to a consideration of the broader social and cultural contexts in which it is situated. Furthermore, there is almost never any serious exploration of the question of the possibility of ethics as such: Ethicists simply presuppose the possibility of

Memory and Violence, or Genealogies of Remembering from: Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) KELBER WERNER H.
Abstract: Three interrelated features may be said to characterize the work of Edith Wyschogrod. There is first an interdisciplinary drive to rise above institutionally sanctioned boundaries and to retrieve intellectual categories from their disciplinary captivity so as to reconfigure them in novel contexts. It is this desire and the ability to bring widely differing genres, discourses and traditionally separate intellectual orbits into productive coalitions that have increasingly distinguished her writings. This linking of philosophy and theology, psychoanalysis and science, literary criticism and linguistics, architecture and the arts, media studies and above all, ethics, is carried off with a high degree of

The Historian and the Messianic “Now”: from: Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) BERGO BETTINA
Abstract: In his Ursprung des deutschen Trauerspiels, Walter Benjamin¹ turned to one of the most forgettable moments of European history—the German baroque of the seventeenth century—to unearth the work of writers who, by all accounts, rested happily in their oblivion. TheTrauerspielis in no way classical tragedy; it is a mourning play in which a spectacle is made of the buildup of ruin upon ruin, culminating in an apotheosis of abjection. These plays, derisively referred to asSturm und Drang(storm and stress), piled corpses upon corpses in what was no gesture of remembering. Like an anticipation of

An Exercise in Upbuilding from: Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) WYSCHOGROD EDITH
Abstract: In this extraordinary collection of essays, I encounter myself in a Kierkegaardian sense as “the single individual,” the one by whom the work itself “wishes to be received as if it had arisen in [the] heart” of the self whom it addresses. I read each essay as a discourse in upbuilding, as Kierkegaard understood the term, so that the writer whose name is affixed to the essay is one who generously accepts responsibility for its every word. Neither a sermon nor a treatise that is designed to increase abstract knowledge, the discourse that is upbuilding drives the addressee between alternatives

Feetishism: from: Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) ALTHAUS-REID MARCELLA MARÍA
Abstract: In 1986, Glauco Mattoso, the blind Brazilian poet and self-confessed foot fetishist,¹ wrote a book that has become almost an object of underground cult. The Loving Feetishist Handbook: Adventures and Readings from a Guy Crazy for Feetwas converted into a cartoon and renamedThe Adventures of Glaucomix, the Feetishist.Both books were very successful and even attracted international academic attention.² Glaucomix (recalling Asterix) is portrayed as a young university student and foot fetishist. In previous books and poems, Mattoso had deliberately mixed contrasting issues of marginalization and power. In these works, issues such as power and disempowerment are represented

2 The Naming Power of the Word from: Sounding/Silence: Martin Heidegger at the Limits of Poetics
Abstract: In “The Origin of the Work of Art,” Heidegger situates the earth in the “work-material” of the artwork: “the massiveness and heaviness of the stone, … the firmness and flexibility of the wood, … the lightening and darkening of color … the ringing of sound, and the naming power of the word” (OBT 24/35). That Heidegger should place “the word” last is a rhetorical gesture toward poetry’s status in the pantheon of the arts. It is both that art form to which “architecture, the visual arts, and music must all be referred back” (OBT 45/60), and also, by virtue of

3 Heidegger’s Figures from: Sounding/Silence: Martin Heidegger at the Limits of Poetics
Abstract: Given the prominence Heidegger accords to poetry throughout a Gesamtausgabethat now extends to 102 volumes, his discussions of figurative language are, at first glance, most conspicuous for their scarcity. Metaphor in particular is dismissed over four lapidary and categorical pronouncements. If this might be taken to demonstrate that Heidegger was simply uninterested in questions of metaphor, and of figurative language more generally,¹ one should nevertheless note that these pronouncements lie at the crux of his attempts both to think thealetheiccapacity of artworks, and to “undergo an experience with language” (OL 57/159). It is in this respect unsurprising

Book Title: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: This book provides an introduction to the emerging field of continental philosophy of religion by treating the thought of its most important representatives, including its appropriations by several thinkers in the United States. Part I provides context by examining religious aspects of the thought of Martin Heidegger, Emmanuel Levinas, and Jacques Derrida. Christina Gschwandtner contends that, although the work of these thinkers is not apologetic in nature (i.e., it does not provide an argument for religion, whether Christianity or Judaism), it prepares the ground for the more religiously motivated work of more recent thinkers by giving religious language and ideas some legitimacy in philosophical discussions. Part II devotes a chapter to each of the contemporary French thinkers who articulate a phenomenology of religious experience: Paul Ricoeur, Jean-Luc Marion, Michel Henry, Jean-Louis Chretien, and Jean-Yves Lacoste. In it, the author argues that their respective philosophies can be read as an apologetics of sorts-namely, as arguments for the coherence of thought about God and the viability of religious experience-though each thinker does so in a different fashion and to a different degree. Part III considers the three major thinkers who have popularized and extended this phenomenology in the U.S. context: John D. Caputo, Merold Westphal, and Richard Kearney. The book thus both provides an introduction to important contemporary thinkers, many of whom have not yet received much treatment in English, and also argues that their philosophies can be read as providing an argument for Christian faith.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0495

1 Martin Heidegger and Onto-theo-logy from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: There has been much speculation about the religious influences on Heidegger’s thought and on the religious potential of his work. Several theologians, such as Rudolf Bultmann, Karl Rahner, and Paul Tillich, were inspired by his philosophy and used it extensively in their own writings. Janicaud himself makes Heidegger to some extent responsible for the religious turn, while drawing on other aspects of Heidegger’s thought for his desire to keep philosophy pure and safe from theological contamination.¹ Heidegger’s corpus is vast indeed and I will make no attempt to treat it in its entirety here. Rather, I will focus on the

4 Paul Ricoeur: from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Ricoeur was one of the most prolific French philosophers in his long life, authoring over thirty books on a great variety of topics. He was born in 1913 and died in Paris in 2005, having taught for many years in Straβburg, Paris, and Chicago. Ricoeur is known primarily as a hermeneutic thinker, although his hermeneutic work always also refers to and assumes phenomenology and interacts with various other philosophical approaches. In fact, in many ways a possible conversation between various philosophical traditions, approaches, and discourses could be said to be a distinctive mark of Ricoeur’s philosophy. Richard Kearney suggests that

5 Jean-Luc Marion: from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Jean-Luc Marion (born in 1946) is emerging as an important contemporary French philosopher. Deeply influenced by the philosophies of Husserl, Heidegger, and Lévinas, he has formulated a radical phenomenological project that focuses on the questions of God, religious experience, and the relation between self and other (in terms of a new version of the self and in terms of love). Marion studied at the École Normale Superieur and the Sorbonne and worked closely with both Lévinas and Henry. He is presently teaching at the Institut catholique in Paris, is John Nuveen Professor at the divinity school of the University of

6 Michel Henry: from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Michel Henry (1922–2002) was one of the early phenomenologists working in France, more or less contemporaneous with Emmanuel Lévinas and Paul Ricoeur. He is most well-known for developing a “material” phenomenology, or, as he later called it, a “phenomenology of the flesh.” Many of his early writings are heavily influenced by the philosophy of Karl Marx. Only his more recent (and final) writings are more explicitly religious.¹ Although some hints of these concerns are present in his earlier works (such as an analysis of Meister Eckhart’s mysticism in Section III of his major work The Essence of Manifestation), they

7 Jean-Louis Chrétien: from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Jean-Louis Chrétien’s writings are a powerful example of the character of what I have called a new type of apologetics. In no way does he ever engage in anything like proofs for God’s existence, evidence for the validity of religious experience, or any consideration of the rational coherence of an idea of the divine. And yet his work is imbued and overflows with Christian imagery and references to Christian sources. Even when he is not addressing explicitly religious themes, his poetic language has the flavor and tonality of Christian mysticism. Chrétien (born in 1952) is one of the youngest of

9 Emmanuel Falque: from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Emmanuel Falque (born in 1963), along with Jean-Louis Chrétien, belongs to the next generation of French thinkers. He was a student of Jean-Luc Marion and Jean Greisch and is presently dean of the faculty of philosophy at the Institut catholique in Paris. He has degrees in both philosophy and theology and merges the two disciplines far more fully than any of the other thinkers, occasionally even challenging the boundaries between these subject matters as unnecessary and superficial.¹ Falque’s work is especially characterized by a phenomenological reading of theological doctrines and thinkers. His dissertation was a phenomenological reading of Bonaventure ( Saint

10 Postmodern Apologetics? from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Each of the chapters in this part of the book has identified apologetic elements in the work of the thinkers discussed. Before examining some of their appropriations in the North American context in more detail, it might be worthwhile to consider this apologetic or quasi-apologetic character more fully. Are these projects apologetic ones? Do they “defend” the divine and argue on behalf of faith? Certainly their arguments for God are not arguments in the traditional (modern) sense. They are primarily phenomenological depictions of religious experience in a variety of registers. Their depictions do not always agree, although there are indeed

11 Merold Westphal: from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Merold Westphal, recently retired as Distinguished Professor of Philosophy at Fordham University, is one of the most significant figures to have appropriated French thought about the divine and religious experience for an American audience, focusing especially on the dimensions of faith. Most of his works circle around the coherence and viability of Christian faith, seeking to show that postmodernity and faith are not as incompatible as they might seem. Deeply influenced by the work of Søren Kierkegaard to whom several of his writings are devoted, he has continually sought to translate postmodern philosophy for a Christian audience. He shows that

12 John Caputo: from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: John D. Caputo, recently retired as Thomas J. Watson Professor of Religion and Humanities at Syracuse University and David R. Cook Professor Emeritus of philosophy at Villanova University where he taught for many years, is most well-known for his friendship with Derrida and for highlighting the religious dimension of Derrida’s thought. Caputo’s work is perhaps best understood as a form of postmodern hope (especially in contrast to Westphal’s emphasis on faith and Kearney’s concern with charity). Despite being associated so firmly with Derrida, Caputo’s earliest work was on Heidegger, tracing what he called the “mystical dimension” of Heidegger’s thought and

13 Richard Kearney: from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Richard Kearney currently holds the Charles B. Seelig Chair in philosophy at Boston College and is visiting professor at University College Dublin. Originally from Ireland, Kearney worked closely with Ricoeur, Lévinas, and Derrida in France (he received his doctorate there under Ricoeur’s direction) and has taught in the United States for several decades. Over the years, he has labored vigorously to establish communication and conversation between many of the thinkers treated in this book (in various interviews, roundtable discussions, and other venues), but has himself also contributed significantly to the discussion of religious phenomenology and hermeneutics. His most recent publications

Conclusion from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: This book has suggested that several contemporary French thinkers (namely those examined in Part II of this text) sustain a quasi-apologetic argument in their respective works. I have also argued in Part I that Heidegger, Lévinas, and Derrida are not religiously motivated and do not have such an apologetic project, but that their philosophies provide the context for, and to some extent enable, these more explicitly religious projects. Finally, Part III has explored some of the ways in which the French thinkers and their respective ideas are appropriated in the English-speaking discussion of their work, especially in North American Continental

Book Title: A Scholar's Tale: Intellectual Journey of a Displaced Child of Europe- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): HARTMAN GEOFFREY
Abstract: For more than fifty years, Geoffrey Hartman has been a pivotal figure in the humanities. In his first book, in 1954, he helped establish the study of Romanticism as key to the problems of modernity. Later, his writings were crucial to the explosive developments in literary theory in the late seventies, and he was a pioneer in Jewish studies, trauma studies, and studies of the Holocaust. At Yale, he was a founder of its Judaic Studies program, as well as of the first major video archive for Holocaust testimonies.Generations of students have benefited from Hartman's generosity, his penetrating and incisive questioning, the wizardry of his close reading, and his sense that the work of a literary scholar, no less than that of an artist, is a creative act. All these qualities shine forth in this intellectual memoir, which will stand as his autobiography. Hartman describes his early education, uncanny sense of vocation, and development as a literary scholar and cultural critic. He looks back at how his career was influenced by his experience, at the age of nine, of being a refugee from Nazi Germany in the Kindertransport. He spent the next six years at school in England, where he developed his love of English literature and the English countryside, before leaving to join his mother in America.Hartman treats us to a biobibliographyof his engagements with the major trends in literary criticism. He covers the exciting period at Yale handled so controversially by the media and gives us vivid portraits, in particular, of Harold Bloom, Paul de Man, and Jacques Derrida.SEND GEOFFREY COVER COPY All this is set in the context of his gradual self-awareness of what scholarship implies and how his personal displacements strengthened his calling to mediate between European and American literary cultures. Anyone looking for a rich, intelligible account of the last half-century of combative literary studies will want to read Geoffrey Hartman's unapologetic scholar's tale.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x04h8

CHAPTER 4 Might Nature Be Interpreted as a “Saturated Phenomenon”? from: Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Gschwandtner Christina M.
Abstract: Could elements of “nature” appear to us as what Jean-Luc Marion calls “saturated phenomena”?¹ And if so, how might that be useful for environmental thinking? While at first glance it might seem obvious that natural phenomena could be experienced as saturated, Marion himself has never employed such phenomena as examples for his notion of the saturated phenomenon. In fact, there is almost no reference to (nonhuman) animals anywhere in his work and a tree is mentioned only once and in that case is listed together with a triangle as a “technical object” and thus a “poor” phenomenon.² Marion has never

Book Title: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Stagaman David
Abstract: Three of the most influential Catholic theologians of the twentieth century-Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner-were all born in 1904, at the height of the Church's most militant rhetoric against all things modern. In this culture of suspicion, Lonergan, Murray, and Rahner grew in faith to join the Society of Jesus and struggled with the burden of antimodernist policies in their formation. By the time of their mature work in the 1950s and 1960s, they had helped to redefine the critical dialogue between modern thought and contemporary Catholic theology. After the dtente of the Second Vatican Council, they brought Catholic tradition into closer relationship to modern philosophy, history, and politics. Written by leading scholars, friends, and family members, these original essays celebrate the legacies of Lonergan, Murray, and Rahner after a century of theological development. Offering a broad range of perspectives on their lives and works, the essays blend personal and anecdotal accounts with incisive critical appraisals. Together, they offer an accessible introduction to the distinctive character of three great thinkers and how their work shapes the way Catholics think and talk about God, Church, and State.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x04wz

4. Lonergan and the Key to Philosophy from: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Murray Elizabeth A.
Abstract: Bernard Lonergan is counted among the major Catholic thinkers of the twentieth century. His contribution to philosophy with his major work, Insight, and to theology with his crowning achievement,Method in Theology, has been widely recognized at international conferences and is evidenced by a growing body of scholarly publications. Some consider Lonergan to be primarily a philosopher; more consider him to be a theologian. There is also growing interest in his economic manuscripts, the fruit of his life-long avocation. Yet, he himself once remarked: “Fortunately, I don’t think I come under any single label.”²

6. John Courtney Murray’s American Stories from: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Schuck Michael J.
Abstract: When I began graduate studies twenty-five years ago, “narrative theory” and “story-discourse” did not surface as topics in my political philosophy, social theory, or theology courses. Systems theory, Kantian rationalism, Marxian analyses, existential phenomenology, personalism—all these were discussed, but not narrative and story. That soon changed. By the end of my course work in 1982, narrative approaches to politics, society, and theology were ubiquitous.

12. Karl Rahner: from: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Griener George E.
Abstract: Rahner published for sixty years, in a wide variety of genres. He was continually nuancing and rearticulating his thought. In this necessarily selective presentation, I want to say something about the man, his work, his context, and look at a few central

Book Title: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: This important book brings together in one volume a collection of illuminating encounters with some of the most important philosophers of our age-by one of its most incisive and innovative critics.For more than twenty years, Richard Kearney has been in conversation with leading philosophers, literary theorists, anthropologists, and religious scholars. His gift is eliciting memorably clear statements about their work from thinkers whose writings can often be challenging in their complexity. Here, he brings together twenty-one originally published extraordinary conversations-his 1984 collection Dialogues: The Phenomenological Heritage, his 1992 Visions of Europe: Conversations on the Legacy and Future of Europe, and his 1995 States of Mind: Dialogues with Contemporary Thinkers. Featured interviewees include Stanislas Breton, Umberto Eco, Hans-Georg Gadamer, Herbert Marcus, George Steiner, Julia Kristeva, Emmanuel Levinas, and Jean-Fran?ois Lyotard. To this classic core, he adds recent interviews, previously unpublished, with Paul Ricoeur, Jean-Luc Marion, Jacques Derrida, and George DumZzil, as well as six colloquies about his own work.Wide-ranging and accessible, these interviews provide a fascinating guide to the ideas, concerns, and personalities of thinkers who have shaped modern intellec-tual life. This book will be an essential point of entry for students, teachers, scholars, and anyone seeking to understand contemporary culture.ContentsPrefacePart One: Recent DebatesJacques Derrida: Terror, Religion, and the New PoliticsJean-Luc Marion: The Hermeneutics of RevelationPaul Ricour: (a) On Life Stories (b) On The Crisis of Authority (c) The Power of the Possible (d) Imagination, Testimony, and TrustGeorges Dumzil: Myth, Ideology, SovereigntyPart Two: From Dialogues: The Phenomenological Heritage, 1984Emmanuel Levinas: Ethics of the InfiniteHerbert Marcuse: The Philosophy of Art and PoliticsPaul Ricour: (a) The Creativity of Language (b) Myth as the Bearer of Possible WorldsStanislas Breton: Being, God, and the Poetics of RelationJacques Derrida: Deconstruction and the OtherPart Three: From States of Mind, 1995Julia Kristeva: Strangers to Ourselves: The Hope of the SingularHans Georg Gadamer: Text MattersJean-Franois Lyotard: What Is Just?George Steiner: Culture-The Price You PayPaul Ricour: Universality and the Power of DifferenceUmberto Eco: Chaosmos: The Return to the Middle AgesPart Four: Colloquies with Richard KearneyVillanova Colloquy: Against OmnipotenceAthens Colloquy: Between Selves and OthersHalifax Colloquy: Between Being and God Stony Brook Colloquy: Confronting ImaginationBoston Colloquy: Theorizing the GiftDublin Colloquy: Thinking Is DangerousAppendix: Philosophy as Dialogue
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x05cp

Terror, Religion, and the New Politics from: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Derrida Jacques
Abstract: Rk: In the interview with Dominique Janicaud ( Heidegger en France[Heidegger in France]), you talk about deconstruction as being a preference for discontinuity over continuity, fordifféranceover reconciliation, and so on. These two traits are always at work in your thought. I was wondering, at the practical level, what this preference might mean in the current political situation. In the wake of September 11, there is much talk of the West versus Islam. In Northern Ireland, there was much negotiation over decommissioning of arms. And there are all these tensions between Pakistan and India and, of course, between Palestine

The Hermeneutics of Revelation from: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Marion Jean-Luc
Abstract: Rk: They are many similarities between your work, Jean-Luc, and mine: Both of us owe a great deal of our philosophical formation to the phenomenologies of Husserl and Heidegger; we have both engaged ourselves in close dialogue with Levinas, Ricœur, and Derrida. Given these evident similarities, it would be more fruitful and interesting, it seems to me, if we take a look here into some of the differencesin our respective positions in regards to the phenomenology of God. One question that I would like to put to you, Jean-Luc, and which, in fact, I have put in a more

Myth, Ideology, Sovereignty from: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Dumézil Georges
Abstract: Gd: My work is primarily linguistic, or, to be more precise, philological. That is, the classification and interpretation of ancient myths in terms of

The Philosophy of Art and Politics from: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Marcuse Herbert
Abstract: Rk: As a Marxist thinker of international renown and inspirational mentor of student revolutions in both the United States and Europe in the sixties, you have puzzled many by the turn to primarily aesthetic questions in your recent works. How would you explain or justify this turn?

The Poetics of Language and Myth from: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Ricœur Paul
Abstract: Pr: In La Métaphore vive, I tried to show how language could extend itself to its very limits, forever discovering new resonances within itself. The termvive(living) in the title of this work is all-important, for it was my purpose to demonstrate that there is not just an epistemological and political imagination, but also, and perhaps more fundamentally, aLinguisticimagination which generates

Being, God, and the Poetics of Relation from: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Breton Stanislas
Abstract: Rk: Your philosophical journey has been wide-ranging. You have published works on such diverse topics as Neoplatonism, Thomism, Marxism, phenomenology, logic, and poetics. What would you consider to be the unifying threads in this tapestry of intellectual interests?

Deconstruction and the Other from: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Derrida Jacques
Abstract: Rk: The most characteristic feature of your work has been its determination to “deconstruct” the Western philosophy of presence. I think it would be helpful if you could situate your program of deconstruction in relation to the two major intellectual traditions of Westem European culture—the Hebraic and the Hellenic. You conclude your seminal essay on the Jewish philosopher Emmanuel Levinas with the following quotation from James Joyce’s Ulysses:“GreekJew is JewGreek.” Do you agree with Levinas that Judaism offers an alternative to the Greek metaphysics of presence? Or do you believe with Joyce that the Jewish and Greek cultures

Strangers to Ourselves: from: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Kristeva Julia
Abstract: Jk: I consider myself a cosmopolitan. I was lucky in my childhood to learn French at an early stage. My parents sent me to a French preschool in Sofia run by Dominican nuns: it was an offshoot of the Jesuit college in Constantinople. So I started French before my Bulgarian studies. Then those ladies were accused of spying and expelled from Bulgaria. Their work was taken over by the French Alliance. So I learnt French at the same time as Bulgarian, and my entry into French culture was somehow a

What Is Just? from: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Kearney Richard
Abstract: J-fl: La phénoménologiewas a homage to the thought of Merleau-Ponty: a meditation on the body, on sensible experience and, therefore—in contradistinction to Hegel, Husserl, [John-Paul] Sartre—on the “aesthetic” dimension which unfolds beneath the phenomena of consciousness. I was also reading at this time what was available of Heidegger’s work. The little book on

Between Being and God from: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) O’MURCHADHA FELIX
Abstract: Felix o’murchadha: Two of your most recent books deal explicitly and thematically with the question of God. That is not to say that this issue has been absent from your earlier work. Could you please trace the development of this theme in your philosophical joumey from Poétique du Possible[The Poetics of the Possible] toThe God Who May BeandStrangers, Gods and Monsters?

Book Title: God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Garfitt Toby
Abstract: Gathering in one place a cohesive selection of articles that deepen our sense of the vitality and controversy within the Catholic renewal of the mid-twentieth century, God's Mirror offers historical analysis of French Catholic intellectuals. This volume highlights the work of writers, thinkers and creative artists who have not always drawn the attention given to such luminaries as Maritain, Mounier, and Marcel. Organized around the typologies of renewal and engagement, editors Katherine Davies and Toby Garfitt provide a revisionist and interdisciplinary reading of the narrative of twentieth-century French Catholicism. Renewal and engagement are both manifestations of how the Catholic intellectual reflects and takes position on the relationship between the Church, personal faith and the world, and on the increasingly problematic relationship between intellectuals and the Magisterium. A majority of the writings are based on extensive research into published texts, with some occasional archival references, and they give critical insights into the tensions that characterized the theological and political concerns of their subjects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x05fq

1 “Catholicisme ondoyant”: from: God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century
Author(s) Kelly Michael
Abstract: Catholics have often struggled to achieve recognition in France as legitimate intellectuals with a distinctive voice and valuable ideas to contribute. To a large extent, this is a result of the difficult interface between religion and politics. However, key Catholic figures in the interwar period worked with great tenacity to address the problems and dilemmas that rendered the interface difficult, especially the tensions between the spiritual and temporal realms and between a long-term conception of civilization and short-term political objectives. In the process they developed a complex but workable concept of engagement, based on a notion of the human person,

10 Louis Massignon: from: God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century
Author(s) O’Mahony Anthony
Abstract: Two poles defined his life and work. The first was the world of French Catholicism, with its

Book Title: Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Stahlberg Lesleigh Cushing
Abstract: Scrolls of Love is a book of unions. Edited by a Jew and a Christian who are united by a shared passion for the Bible and a common literary hermeneutic, it joins two biblical scrolls and gathers around them a diverse community of interpreters. It brings together Ruth and the Song of Songs, two seemingly disparate texts of the Hebrew Bible, and reads them through a number of the methodological and theological perspectives. Respectful of traditional biblical scholarship, the collection of essays moves beyond it; alert to contemporary trends, the volume returns venerable interpretive tradition to center stage. Most significantly, it is interfaith. Despite the fact that Jews and Christians share a common text in the Hebrew Scripture, the two communities have read their Bibles in isolation from one another, in ignorance of the richness of the other's traditions of reading. Scrolls of Love brings the two traditions into dialogue, enriching established modes of interpretation with unconventional ones. The result is a volume that sets rabbinic, patristic, and medieval readings alongside feminist, psychoanalytic, and autobiographical ones, combining historical, literary, and textual criticism with a variety of artistic reinterpretations-wood cuts and paper cuts, poetry and fiction. Some of the works are scholarly, with the requisite footnotes to draw readers to further inquiry: others are more reflective than analytic, allowing readers to see what it means to live intimately with Scripture. As a unity, the collection presents Ruth and Song of Songs not only as ancient texts that deserve to be treasured but as old worlds capable of begetting the new.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0610

THE BOOK OF RUTH AS COMEDY: from: Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Aschkenasy Nehama
Abstract: More than any other biblical story or cycle of tales, the book of Ruth belongs to the dramatic genre. Structured as a series of short, eventful scenes animated by spirited, dynamic dialogue, it can be easily adapted for the stage. The conversation in the book of Ruth is either between two protagonists or between a protagonist and “chorus” (in the form of the women of Bethlehem, or the workers in the field, or the elders at the gate), but there are usually no more than two principal interlocutors in any given scene. The story’s narrator possesses only limited omniscience, offering

INTRADIVINE ROMANCE: from: Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Green Arthur
Abstract: The Zohar is the great medieval Jewish compendium of mysticism, myth, and esoteric teaching. It may be considered the greatest work of Jewish literary imagination in the Middle Ages. Surely it constitutes one of the most important bodies of religious texts of all times and places. It is also a lush garden of sacred eros, filled to overflowing with luxurious plantings of love between master and disciples, among the mystical companions themselves, between the souls of Israel and the shekhinah, God’s lovely bride, but most of all between the male and female elements that together make up the Godhead. Revered

THE LOVE SONG OF THE MILLENNIUM: from: Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Matter E. Ann
Abstract: The Latin Middle Ages was a period of great Christian interest in the Song of Songs. Judging from the surviving texts, at least twenty Latin line-by-line expositions of Solomon’s love songs were written between the seventh and the eleventh centuries, and over thirty survive from the twelfth century alone.¹ These are curious works of literature in a number of ways. For one thing, they were the product of an intellectual elite made up entirely of celibate men living in religious (usually monastic) communities. For another (and this is the reason that monks could have such an open interest in something

Book Title: Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Burrell David B.
Abstract: How do Catholic intellectuals draw on faith in their work? And how does their work as scholars influence their lives as people of faith?For more than a generation, the University of Dayton has invited a prominent Catholic intellectual to present the annual Marianist Award Lecture on the general theme of the encounter of faith and profession. Over the years, the lectures have become central to the Catholic conversation about church, culture, and society.In this book, ten leading figures explore the connections in their own lives between the private realms of faith and their public calling as teachers, scholars, and intellectuals.This last decade of Marianist Lectures brings together theologians and philosophers, historians, anthropologists, academic scholars, and lay intellectuals and critics.Here are Avery Cardinal Dulles, S.J., on the tensions between faith and theology in his career; Jill Ker Conway on the spiritual dimensions of memory and personal narrative; Mary Ann Glendon on the roots of human rights in Catholic social teaching; Mary Douglas on the fruitful dialogue between religion and anthropology in her own life; Peter Steinfels on what it really means to be a liberal Catholic; and Margaret O'Brien Steinfels on the complicated history of women in today's church. From Charles Taylor and David Tracy on the fractured relationship between Catholicism and modernity to Gustavo Gutirrez on the enduring call of the poor and Marcia Colish on the historic links between the church and intellectual freedom, these essays track a decade of provocative, illuminating, and essential thought. James L. Heft, S.M., is President and Founding Director of the Institute for Advanced Catholic Studies and University Professor of Faith and Culture and Chancellor, University of Dayton. He has edited Beyond Violence: Religious Sources for Social Transformation in Judaism, Christianity, and Islam (Fordham).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x06dp

CHAPTER 1 A Catholic Modernity? from: Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) TAYLOR CHARLES
Abstract: I want to say first how deeply honored I am to have been chosen as this year’s recipient of the Marianist Award. I am very grateful to the University of Dayton, not only for their recognition of my work, but also for this chance to raise today with you some issues which have been at the center of my concern for decades. They have been reflected in my philosophical work, but not in the same form as I raise them this afternoon, because of the nature of philosophical discourse (as I see it, anyway), which has to try to persuade

CHAPTER 2 The Poor and the Third Millennium from: Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) GUTIÉRREZ GUSTAVO
Abstract: I would like to express my gratitude for the Marianist Award. It is a gift. We cannot refuse a gift and we never deserve it. Thus, we may only say thanks a lot. I can say this in the beautiful word we have in Spanish, “gracias.” “Gracias” to this university for this gift, but also “gracias” for the presence of the Marianist people working in my continent and in my own country. I have very good friends among them.

CHAPTER 6 Catholicism and Human Rights from: Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) GLENDON MARY ANN
Abstract: I am deeply honored to have been chosen for this year’s Marianist Award. And I was delighted when Father Heft told me I could give this lecture on any aspect of my work, so long as I included a discussion of how my faith has affected my scholarship and how my scholarship has affected my faith. At the time, that sounded like an easy assignment, since it was the experience of representing the Holy See at a United Nations conference that led to the book I have just completed—a history of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights of 1948,

CHAPTER 7 A Feeling for Hierarchy from: Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) DOUGLAS MARY
Abstract: To receive the Marianist Award is a great honor. For the occasion I am asked to say something about the influence of my religious faith on my work, or about the interaction of one with the other. This is perhaps a straightforward assignment for a person whose work has been involved with the direction of public affairs. But it is less easy for an anthropologist, partly because it means delving into fairly intimate thoughts as you will see, and partly because of this particular religion, the Roman Catholic faith.

CHAPTER 10 The Faith of a Theologian from: Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) DULLES AVERY CARDINAL
Abstract: In the letter inviting me to accept the Marianist Award for the year 2004, your president, Dr. Curran, suggested that I might take the occasion to speak of the relationship of faith to my own scholarly work. The proposal immediately captured my fancy since faith and theology have been, so to speak, the two poles of my existence. The subject, besides, has considerable importance for our time and place, because many of the difficulties we experience in Church and society are due to the impoverishment of faith or to theology that is not in harmony with faith.

3 “A World Split Open”?: from: The Experience of God: A Postmodern Response
Author(s) CULP KRISTINE A.
Abstract: If a woman told the truth about her life, “the world would split open,” the poet Muriel Rukeyser observed.¹ This was gospel for the earliest feminist theologians. Mary Daly gave this now classic explanation, “In hearing and naming ourselves out of the depths, women are naming toward God.”² Or, to paraphrase the playwright Ntozake Shange, as feminist theologians working in the late 1970s and ’80s sometimes did, women found God in themselves and “loved her fiercely.”³ When women told what they had undergone, what had sustained them, oppressed them, and set them free, how they had endured and survived, what

4 A Womanist Experience: from: The Experience of God: A Postmodern Response
Author(s) MCKENZIE RENEE
Abstract: Kristine Culp has taken us on an interesting ride. We have experienced with her memories of her visit to Lourdes, and we have shared with her a partial yield of her reflection. We have discovered that she, unlike some postmodern feminists, wants to reclaim, at least for feminist theology, the intrinsic and extrinsic value of experience in saying something meaningful to ourselves and others about God and our self. This work is intriguing even with the recognition of its being read with the eyes of one who, in great similarity to Culp’s experience at Lourdes, could neither fully participate in

5 The Experience of the Kingdom of God from: The Experience of God: A Postmodern Response
Author(s) HART KEVIN
Abstract: Imagine that someone knocks on your door and, when you open it, the man standing there says to you, “I have experienced God.” And imagine that you have walked down the hallway from the kitchen or the study with a remote in hand, a newfangled contraption with a special feature you have been dying to try out: a pause button that works with human beings. No sooner has that remarkable statement been uttered than you press the button: the man becomes a living statue, and you are left to ponder what has been said to you without having to respond.

8 A Response to Jean-Yves Lacoste from: The Experience of God: A Postmodern Response
Author(s) BLOECHL JEFFREY
Abstract: Liturgy and Coaffection: Jean-Yves Lacoste’s title makes the reasonable suggestion that we attempt to think the relation with God together with thinking about the relation with other people, and more precisely at the level of mood and feeling. As his text unfolds, we are also required to heed the conditions defining the context for this exercise. In Lacoste’s work, this means, above all, recognizing the greater emergence of what we might call the secular dimension of our humanity,¹ but also dealing with new and sophisticated forms of thought willing to ground themselves entirely there. His approach to this twofold challenge

The Gods of Politics in Early Greek Cities from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Lloyd Janet
Abstract: I have decided to speak of “the gods” rather than “religion,” and of the “political domain [ le politique]” to identify the specific domain that has been recognized as such (astō politikōn) ever since Aristotle. As for the earliest Greek cities, they constitute the area of my present fieldwork.

The Permanence of the Theologico-Political? from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Macey David
Abstract: There was, in the nineteenth century, a widespread and lasting conviction that one cannot discern the transformations that occur in political society—that one cannot really take stock of what is appearing, disappearing, or reappearing—without examining the religious significance of the old and the new. In both France and Germany, philosophy, history, the novel, and poetry all testify to that. This conviction is not, of course, entirely new, and it can be traced far back in history. I am not thinking of the work of theologians and jurists, or of their disputations over the links between the authority of

From Rosenzweig to Levinas: from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Smith Michael B.
Abstract: It seems that through the work of Franz Rosenzweig, and subsequently that of Emmanuel Levinas, the twentieth century has seen the birth of a radically new conception of ethics. It appeared against the horizon of the two great historical catastrophes that left their mark upon that century, the First World War, in the case of Rosenzweig, and in that of Levinas, the Second World War and the massive extermination of the Jews by Nazi Germany. Rosenzweig’s generation experienced the First World War as the collapse of an age-old order bearing testimony to the stability of a European civilization that, wars

Reinhabiting Civil Disobedience from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Singh Bhrigupati
Abstract: To clarify it again, what, then, is the difference between religion and philosophy? A core distinction would be that the latter can subsist without a conception of the divine. In other words, philosophy does not necessitate a conception of another, higher world, with which to slander or to beautify, or to authorize its work in this world. It need not traffic in super-earthly hopes. Of what consequence then, is this emergent conception of a “post-secular” world where it is religion that is (so much stronger? or only more distinctly?) an intervening force in the practical affairs of this world, enmeshed

Rogue Democracy and the Hidden God from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Weber Samuel
Abstract: “America will have been my subject”—it is almost in passing, and yet with considerable emphasis, that Jacques Derrida makes this announcement early on in a lecture that was to become the major portion of Rogues(Voyous).¹ And yet the passing remark could hardly have been more significant. America—in particular, the United States—always held a special importance for Derrida’s work.² It was in American universities that Derridean “deconstruction” first began to establish its international reputation, and it was also in the United States that the backlash against deconstruction first emerged and then crystallized in connection with the revelations

Can a Minority Retain Its Identity in Law? from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) van Looijengoed Liesbeth
Abstract: Since this is the Multatuli Lecture, let me start out from his work, with a quote from “Idea Number 7” about the relationship of majorities to minorities:

The Agency of Assemblages and the North American Blackout from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Bennett Jane
Abstract: One thing that globalization names is the sense that the “theater of operations” has expanded greatly. Earth is no longer a category for ecology or geology only, but has become a political unit, the whole in which the parts (e.g., finance capital, CO 2emissions, refugees, viruses, pirated DVDs, ozone, human rights, weapons of mass destruction) now circulate. There have been various attempts to theorize this complex, gigantic whole and to characterize the kind of relationality obtaining between its parts. Network is one such attempt, as is Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri’s empire.¹ My term of choice to describe this whole

Automatic Theologies: from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Khatib Kate
Abstract: To write about surrealism and theology seems an almost heretical act, on both sides of the equation. Like other Romantic and post-Romantic artistic movements of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, surrealism owes a debt to mysticism and the occult that is already widely acknowledged, as is the occurrence of religious symbolism throughout its corpus. Were these works of art equal to the sum total of the surrealist interventions in the theological realm, there would be little more to discuss. A less cursory inspection reveals, however, that the presentation of surrealism as a fleeting moment in the artistic history

Theoscopy: from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Geroulanos Stefanos
Abstract: To be forever seen without seeing back is to succumb to a mercy and grace carved in religious force, to walk in fear and faith of a tremendous power one cannot face. It is to live a paranoid existence of nakedness before a God who is all-seeing, hence omniscient and omnipotent, and who accordingly metes out a social experience and aknowledge of oneself and one’s history that is based on this awareness of being seen. I will name this condition theoscopy. Widespread from patristic texts to contemporary media artifacts and works of social theory, theoscopy involves the establishment of a

2 The Matrix from: Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: E. V. Walters’s Placewayschronicles his journey along the sacred path to Plato’s Academy and the matrix. He calls attention to Ptolemy’s distinction betweentopos,the space of geography—and Descartes’s extension or Aristotle’s innermost container—andchora,a qualitative, phenomenological place that organizes and evokes images, memories, feelings, meanings, and the work of the imagination.¹ Like the Rome of Freud’sCivilization and Its Discontents“in which nothing once constructed ever disappears,” the matrix seems to hold in storage the entire contents of past experience. We have known this archival and creative or threatening power of place in Delphi, Chartres,

3 Plato’s Idea Theory from: Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: Since we are in for a heavy dose of my idiosyncratic Plato, some preliminaries are in order. Even among Platonists, the theory of ideas,whatever that means, is often suspect; others find it bizarre. This is especially true of those who work within my Continental tradition but who often take Nietzsche far too seriously; oddly, Platonic realism continues to be appreciated among logicians, mathematicians, and even many analytic philosophers. Can we make it appealing to our peers?

10 Elementals from: Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: If Rilke, Hölderlin, George, and Trakl are among the poets who set truth to work for Heidegger, something like this happened for me through an obscure Byzantine icon representing the Virgin Mary as the Zoodochus Pegeand another calling her “the place of the placeless.” In her welcome, “matter shows itself for the first time in its materiality.”² Llewelyn has it that “maternity is the mother of materiality because it is the in-vention of the other … a pre-naissance of pre-nature.”³

11 Time’s Arrow from: Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: In 1910s and early 1920s Whitehead provided a phenomenological basis for the principles of natural knowledge and an alternative to Einstein;¹ but in his cosmology, process is being and the phenomenological concern seemingly disappeared. What appears for the first time in the later work, however, is an assimilation of force and affectivity that was based on an interpretation of the Platonic matrix as diversified by vectors, which can be read as both physical forces and phenomenological affects. Derrida used the same interpretative freedom to gain an important insight into choraas loci ofdifférancein the general text. It also

14 Saying Something from: Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: Plato thought that light was the medium of seeing ( Rep.,407E). The sun, which causes both light and life (509B), is “the child whom the good begat in its own likeness” (508B). Thought the cause of vision and generation, the sun “is not himself generation” nor can it be seen directly through an excess of light, but only through a dark glass or in its effects; so too for the Good. Nevertheless, the sun is said to have been begotten in its likeness. Patristic apophatic theology, working from this invisibility of the Good, spoke of it as “invisible in light”

15 The Receptacle from: Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: In “How to Avoid Speaking: Denials,” Jacques Derrida approaches chorafrom the perspective of apophatic theologies in which every attributive predicate is said to be “inadequate to the essence, in truth the hyperessentuality (the being beyond Being) of God.” Only a negative attribution can claim to approach and prepare us for a silent intuition of God.¹ These claims elicit Derrida’s interest because hisdifférance,which is not a concept, describes how the matrix may work in articulating language, for in its ineffability it resembles the withdrawn God of mystical theology. He distinguishes several types that “deconstruct grammatical anthropomorphism” and awaken

Book Title: Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Heft James L.
Abstract: From the beginning, the Abrahamic faiths-Judaism, Christianity, and Islam-have stressed the importance of transmitting religious identity from one generation to the next. Today, that sustaining mission has never been more challenged. Will young people have a faith to guide them? How can faith traditions anchor religious attachments in this secular, skeptical culture?The fruit of a historic gathering of scholars and religious leaders across three faiths and many disciplines, this important book reports on the religious lives of young people in today's world. It's also a unique inventory of creative and thoughtful responses from churches, synagogues, and mosques working to keep religion a significant force in those lives.The essays are grouped thematically. Opening the book, Melchor Sanchez de Toca and Nancy Ammerman explore fundamental issues that have an impact on religion-from the cultural effects of global consumerism and personal technology to pluralism and individualism. In Part Two, leading investigators present three leading studies of religiosity among young people and college students in the United States, illuminating the gap between personal values and organized religion-and the emergence of new, different forms of spirituality and faith. How religious institutions deal with these challenges forms the heart of the book-in portraits of best practicesdeveloped to revitalize traditional institutions, from a synagogue in New York City and a Muslim youth camp in California to the famed French Catholic community of the late Brother John of Taiz. Finally, Jack Miles and Diane Winston weave the findings into a broader perspective of the future of religious belief, practice, and feeling in a changing world.Filled with real-world wisdom, Passing the Faith will be an essential resource for anyone seeking to understand what religions must, and can, do to inspire a vigorous faith in the next generation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x06n9

Looking for God: from: Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Author(s) de Toca Melchor Sánchez
Abstract: As we neared the public presentation of the Pontifical Council for Culture’s 2004 research into unbelief, religious indifference, and new forms of alternative religion, I somewhat absentmindedly recited to my secretary a rather detached theoretical analysis of unbelief. Unable to restrain herself, she burst out with her very own story: “My children have lost the faith.” They are good boys, born to a Christian family, whose mother works in the Vatican and is active in the parish. But they no longer go to Mass on Sundays. Indeed, not only do they no longer practice, but quite simply they no longer

The “Interior” Lives of American College Students: from: Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Author(s) Lindholm Jennifer A.
Abstract: “What is the meaning of college?” “What am I going to do with my life?” “How will I know I am going the ‘right’ way?” “What kind of person do I want to be?” “How is everything I’ve worked for up to this point going to contribute back to society?” “How am I going to leave my mark when I finally pass away?”

BJ: from: Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Author(s) Matalon Rabbi J. Rolando
Abstract: I am pleased to be here to talk about the work that my congregation, located on the Upper West Side of Manhattan in New York City, has been doing for the past eighteen years. Congregation Bnai Jeshurun (BJ) was founded in 1825. Until then, the only synagogue in New York City was a Spanish-Portuguese synagogue, which observed Judaism according to the customs of Sephardic Jews. In 1825, there were enough Eastern European Jews to permit the founding of their own synagogue, where they could observe Judaism according to their own customs. Originally Orthodox, this active and prominent community was eventually

1 First Philosophy from: Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: The title of Vladimir Jankélévitch’s first major work is Philosophie première. Traditionally, a first philosophy provides the cornerstone on which the rest of a thinker’s philosophy is constructed either upward in the architectonics of systematic structures or outward in concentric circles extending from the initial pulse of inspiration at the epicenter. Jankélévitch is fond of citing Henri Bergson, who wrote that a philosopher of value has said only one thing and the rest of his life and work is dedicated to that single point.¹ Or more poignantly, Jankélévitch’s philosophy follows Bergson’s insight that there is “something simple, infinitely simple, so

Introduction from: The Architecture of Concepts: The Historical Formation of Human Rights
Abstract: This book has three distinct aims. First, it seeks to contribute to our understanding of concepts. Such a contribution is doubtless fraught with difficulty since even a cursory inspection of the very wide range of disciplines and even more disparate discursive locales in which the word conceptis used leads to the conclusion that we do not seem to have a very clear sense of what concepts are, or might be. Once one begins, say, to compare how literary or social studies work with the term, or attempts to find a common thread in how philosophy, across its various subdisciplines

CHAPTER 5 The Futures of Human Rights from: The Architecture of Concepts: The Historical Formation of Human Rights
Abstract: Throughout this book I have been primarily engaged in an effort to think conceptuality in ways that might significantly enhance our understanding how the world comes to seem to us as it does. No doubt this is an ambitious objective, and it would perhaps be hubristic to assume that it could deliver on its ambition all at once or in just one book. Throughout I have kept firmly in view what I thought to be, before I started, a single concept, or conceptual network. It turns out that the story about rights during the Anglophone eighteenth century is rather more

Book Title: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: Who or what comes after God? In the wake of God, as the last fifty years of philosophy has shown, God comes back again, otherwise: Heidegger's last God, Levinas's God of Infinity, Derrida's and Caputo's tout autre, Marion's God without Being, Kearney's God who may be. Sharing the common problematic of the otherness of the Other, the essays in this volume represent considered responses to the recent work of Richard Kearney.John Panteleimon Manoussakis holds a Ph.D. in philosophy from Boston College. He is the author of Theos Philosophoumenos (in Greek, Athens 2004) and co-editor of Heidegger and the Greeks (with Drew Hyland). He has also translated Heidegger's Aufenthalte.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0741

Toward a Fourth Reduction? from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) MANOUSSAKIS JOHN PANTELEIMON
Abstract: In this essay we attempt a redefining of the phenomenological method as this has been developed mainly through three “reductions”¹ represented by three thinkers whose work advanced phenomenological research in novel ways: Edmund Husserl, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Luc Marion. Our rehearsal of the phenomenological tradition aims at formulating a set of controversial questions: Is it, perhaps, time for a fourthreduction that would better serve the sensibilities of the so-called phenomenology of the apparent? And if so, what might be its guiding principles, its ways of operating, its scope and aim? Such a fourth reduction, we believe, would not seek

Kearney’s Wager from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) BURKE PATRICK
Abstract: In a 1991 essay, Dominique Janicaud lamented a “turn” in recent French phenomenology “toward the theological,” toward the question of the nature of postmetaphysical divinity. In 1984, Richard Kearney had published Poétique du Possible: Phénoménologie Herméneutique de la Figuration, in which he had already mapped a new eschatological hermeneutics of God as possibility in critical comparison with Heidegger’s ontological hermeneutics of being asVermögend-Mögende. Kearney continues to situate his own work within this turn, arguing that the dialogue between postmodern philosophy and religion is “one of the most burning intellectual tasks of our time.” InThe God Who May Be,

Quis ergo Amo cum Deum Meum Amo? from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: Continental philosophy, since the work of Emmanuel Levinas, has been marked by a particular concern with otherness. Although this concern is expressed in a variety of ways—the Infinite, the Other, the impossible, and so on—each of these expressions orients itself around the absolute incommensurability of the other ( autre) with the self:

Divine Metaxology from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) OLTHUIS JAMES
Abstract: Richard Kearney is a possibility thinker, a philosopher, novelist, and poet fired by a passion for/of God. For Kearney, philosophy links imagination and affectivity with reason in a rhetoric of persuasion aiming for individual and societal transfiguration. In other words, as I read him, philosophy is not an abstract-theoretical exercise dedicated to getting things straight, finding solutions for particular theoretic problems. Rather, for Kearney, philosophy is a way of life, a spiritual exercise¹ working toward the incitement of passion for visionary transformation and cultural change rather than the elaboration of grand systems and the elimination of paradoxes. Indeed, it is

Hermeneutics of Revelation from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: Kearney: There are many similarities between your work, Jean-Luc, and mine: we both owe a great deal of our philosophical formation to the phenomenologies of Husserl and Heidegger; we have both engaged ourselves in close dialogue with Levinas, Ricoeur, and Derrida. Given these evident similarities, it would be more fruitful and interesting, it seems to me, if we take a look here into some of the differencesin our respective positions in regard to the phenomenology of God. One question that I would like to put to you, Jean Luc, and which, in fact, I have put in a more

God: from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) Sheppard Christian
Abstract: Sheppard: Before discussing this new book, The God Who May Be: A Hermeneutics of Religion(Indiana University Press, 2001), please comment on Richard Kearney’s work up until this point.

Kearney’s Endless Morning from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KELLER CATHERINE
Abstract: In at least two registers—one of genre and one of doctrine—Richard Kearney’s philosophical theology appears suddenly and luminously at the forefront of theology itself. In other words, it invokes a “possible God,” and thus a possible theology. Theology has wanted the fully actual, active God, however, not a possible one—and so has generated an impossible one. The possible God suggests a third space, indeed a certain kind of posseof theology itself, a “paradox of future anteriority” (Kearney’s Levinas) for a freshly Christian sense of eschatological possibility. Responding to his work mainly by way of his Villanova

Book Title: The Relevance of Royce- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Jones Jude
Abstract: This collection represents the rediscovery of Josiah Royce's rich legacy that has occurred over the past decade. The first part presents a series of historical explorations. The second takes up practical extensions of Royce's work, bringing his ideas and methods to bear on contemporary philosophical matters. Among the topics addressed are the paradoxes of individualism; loyalty, democracy, and community; Royce's efforts to respond to historical American racism; his contributions to engaged inter-faith religious discourse; the promise of his theory of error for a feminist account of knowledge; and his ethics of loyalty as a component in medical ethics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x07ns

ONE JOSIAH ROYCE: from: The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) McDermott John J.
Abstract: As this is a banquet talk, or as I prefer an “Address at the Banquet,” I take the liberty of beginning with acts of gratitude. Although the scholarly works on Josiah Royce do not match the girth of those devoted to the philosophy of William James,

FOUR ON FOUR ORIGINATORS OF TRANSATLANTIC PHENOMENOLOGY: from: The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) Bell Jason
Abstract: The forthcoming first publication in Husserliana-Dokumenteof the 1914 dissertation by Winthrop Bell on the relevance of Josiah Royce’s theory of knowledge to Edmund Husserl’s phenomenology, a thesis directed by Husserl, calls our attention to a surprising network of historical relations that connect not only Royce and Husserl, but which further connect the golden ages of American philosophy at Harvard and of German phenomenology at Göttingen. We will here consider four principal figures in this transatlantic exchange of ideas, listed here in their order of arrival as scholars at Göttingen: Josiah Royce (1855–1916),¹ Edmund

ELEVEN JOSIAH ROYCE AND THE REDEMPTION OF AMERICAN INDIVIDUALISM from: The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) Mullin Richard P.
Abstract: The specter of centrifugal forces, which threaten to tear our country apart, has haunted us throughout our history. Josiah Royce stands out as one of our most perceptive critics and the creator of a philosophy that could heal the dangerous tendency toward fragmentation and disintegration. Royce’s work lies before us as a national treasure, but mostly a buried treasure. His situation reminds one of a remark that novelist Walker Percy made about Charles Sanders Peirce: “Most people have never heard of him, but they will.”¹ Josiah Royce’s Philosophy of Loyalty remains little known outside of specialized American philosophy, and even

THIRTEEN NECESSARY ERROR: from: The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) Barnette Kara
Abstract: Throughout his works, Josiah Royce maintains that error is a crucially important philosophical issue. The existence of error provides us with proof that there is a reality outside of ourselves and establishes the need for us to come together to engage in communal inquiry. Error is also inevitable. As long as we remain finite, we will always err. However, when we come together and strive for a better understanding of the world around us with loyalty to inquiry and loyalty to loyalty itself we can often recognize error and do our best to eradicate it. In this paper, I argue

Book Title: Committing the Future to Memory: History, Experience, Trauma- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Clift Sarah
Abstract: Whereas historical determinacy conceives the past as a complex and unstable network of causalities, this book asks how history can be related to a more radical future. To pose that question, it does not reject determinacy outright but rather seeks to explore how it works. In examining what it means to be "determined" by history, it also asks what kind of openings there might be in our encounters with history for interruptions, re-readings, and re-writings. Engaging texts spanning multiple genres and several centuries from John Locke to Maurice Blanchot, from Hegel to Benjamin Clift looks at experiences of time that exceed the historical narration of experiences said to have occurred in time. She focuses on the co-existence of multiple temporalities and opens up the quintessentially modern notion of historical succession to other possibilities. The alternatives she draws out include the mediations of language and narration, temporal leaps, oscillations and blockages, and the role played by contingency in representation. She argues that such alternatives compel us to reassess the ways we understand history and identity in a traumatic, or indeed in a post-traumatic, age.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x07vw

Introduction from: Committing the Future to Memory: History, Experience, Trauma
Abstract: In the preface to the second edition of the Science of Logic, Hegel refers to “the peculiar restlessness and distraction of our modern consciousness.”¹ Although the tone of this statement makes it sound like something to be avoided or at any rate minimized, a moment’s reflection tells us that for Hegel, it is one of modernity’s irreducible and most definitive components. Superficial though it may be, restlessness is nonetheless also the forerunner of negativity, what he calls elsewhere the “seriousness, the suffering, the patience and work of the negative.”² Finally, for Hegel, this restlessness is the active dimension without which

CHAPTER ONE Narrative Life Span, in the Wake: from: Committing the Future to Memory: History, Experience, Trauma
Abstract: Jacques Derrida’s lecture “Mnemosyne,” written shortly after the death of Paul de Man and devoted both to his work and to the friendship they shared, opens with a statement that is as complex as it is succinct. Its tone is sorrowful, compounding the loss to which it testifies by indicating from the outset what the lecture will lack: “I,” he writes, “have never known how to tell a story.”¹

CHAPTER FOUR Speculating on the Past, the Impact of the Present: from: Committing the Future to Memory: History, Experience, Trauma
Abstract: To argue for a rigorous reading of the “end” of historical time in Hegel is, in some sense, the condition for thinking the experience of narrative time in a mode other than that of the simple linearity of continuous progression. In Chapter 3, we demonstrated how Hegel’s complex mode of narrating the pastness of “art in its highest determination” generates an understanding of past and future that goes beyond the notion of two distinct moments on a temporal continuum and conceives narrative temporality in terms of how an aspect of futurity is at work in it, not as a horizon

CHAPTER FIVE In Lieu of a Last Word: from: Committing the Future to Memory: History, Experience, Trauma
Abstract: To end with a discussion of the work of Maurice Blanchot is rife with difficulties, two of which I will mention by way of beginning. The first involves the sheer difficulty of reading his work. While to be sure, this seems to be something of a “side issue,” it is one with important consequences: An encounter with Blanchot’s texts—whether those of his fiction, his criticism or the aphoristic, fragmentary texts of the later years—induces a deep feeling of exposure and vertigo, the negativity or indeterminacy of which is hardly conceivable as a mediating moment toward a higher reconciliation,

2 Reading Rites: from: Divine Enticement: Theological Seductions
Abstract: Faith may work to re-enchant if it opens the world as a seductive question, asking after traces, after a particular kind of presence

In Place of a Conclusion: from: Divine Enticement: Theological Seductions
Abstract: Seduction resists conclusion—“the melancholy of everything finished,”¹ as Nietz sche aptly has it. It depends upon recurrence and sustaining, on the continued emergence of a new or re-newed and not quite comprehended possibility, on something we know we want even if we aren’t quite sure what it is (even the desire of it is to be desired as a good). To conclude a work on seduction thus seems a bit misguided, so in place of a conclusion I would like to offer this very brief meditation on the coincidence of two inconclusive possibilities, of new emergence and infinite recurrence

PREAMBLE I If Descartes Remains Overread and Underexplored … from: Reading Descartes Otherwise: Blind, Mad, Dreamy, and Bad
Abstract: Reading, or otherwise sitting on, the work of René Descartes (March 31, 1596–February 11, 1650) with the quiet plea sure I see in a g(r)azing cow, I have been savoring, and saving somewhere, this nagging thought: His philosophy—his “Cartesianism,” his “rationalism,” his “methodological” doubt, his theoretical “self-centeredness,” his historicized him-ness—seems to remain overread and underexplored. I have been sensing that something else is going on, too, in those usual pages, in that familiar picture. And here, I am inviting you, my readers, to read with

PREAMBLE II Descartes Needs Rereading from: Reading Descartes Otherwise: Blind, Mad, Dreamy, and Bad
Abstract: CAN SOMEONE today take up a work of philosophy written over 350 years ago and engage with it on its own terms? This book is an attempt to do so with Descartes’ Meditations concerning

SCENE 4 Cornered Reflection: from: Reading Descartes Otherwise: Blind, Mad, Dreamy, and Bad
Abstract: “I don’t believe in God but I miss him,” says Julian Barnes.¹ “I don’t believe he exists but I dislike him anyway,” says Wendy Lesser.² While working on a project, the completion of which seems to take much longer than expected, Descartes says to his fiend Mersenne, “I too am too much in love with the fable of my Worldto give it up if God lets me live long enough to finish it; but I cannot answer for the future” (C, 1:179/3:28).

THREE C. S. PEIRCE AND THE GROWTH OF THE IMAGINATION from: Thinking Through the Imagination: Aesthetics in Human Cognition
Abstract: The seeds of the aesthetic are buried deep in the work of Charles Sanders Peirce. The sprouts were, therefore, rather slow to show themselves. However, the concept of the imagination as framed by Kant and other German Enlightenment thinkers does emerge in the ground of his epistemology, ontology, and metaphysics. Peirce recognizes the important function of Kantian reproductive imagination as he develops a description of inquiry that underscores the continuity between bodily sensation and understanding, once again challenging the mind-body dualism to which the idealists and empiricists continually fell prey. A more radical claim emerges from this challenge, namely that

FOUR ABDUCTION: from: Thinking Through the Imagination: Aesthetics in Human Cognition
Abstract: Why were so many of Peirce’s college days spent—some might say wasted—on the topic of genius? A look through his unpublished papers points to an obsession with the work and lives of those “great men” of extraordinary mental powers—from Michelangelo, to Mozart, to Edgar Allan Poe. Like his contemporary Josiah Royce, Peirce was fascinated by history and, more particularly, by the history of genius. This fascination might be attributed to Peirce’s arrogant but not inaccurate suspicion that he would some day join the ranks of these “great men.” I would suggest that Peirce’s fascination relates to a

EIGHT EMERGENCE, COMPLEXITY, AND CREATIVITY from: Thinking Through the Imagination: Aesthetics in Human Cognition
Abstract: To say that the brain is functionally multimodal begins to point to the organic basis of metaphoric thought.¹ More generally, it points to the way in which affect and bodily sense provide the ground for complex human understanding. As Kant and Peirce both recognize, the mediation between sense and understanding is the domain of the imagination. In this respect, Donald Tucker’s Mind from Body: The Neural Structures of Experiencecould be regarded as a treatise on the imaginative basis of human cognition. Tucker’s work, unlike the empirical studies mentioned previously, provides a cohesive and detailed account of the way in

NINE BE IMAGINATIVE! from: Thinking Through the Imagination: Aesthetics in Human Cognition
Abstract: At the end of an afternoon of gardening, one looks back, if only for a moment, to survey the ground that one has covered and worked through. It seems fitting, therefore, to take account of the moves made in this book. I have argued that the imagination plays a central role in the development of human cognition and, more generally, in the humanness of human life. At the service of this argument, I have amplified, extended, and explained the opening passage of Art as Experiencethat tells us: “the imagination is a way of seeing and feeling things as they

Book Title: Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Campbell Timothy
Abstract: Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics presents a decade of thought about the origins and possibilities of political theory from one of contemporary Italy's most prolific and engaging political theorists, Roberto Esposito. He has coined a number of critical concepts in current debates about the past, present, and future of biopolitics-from his work on the implications of the etymological and philosophical kinship of community (communitas) and immunity (immunitas) to his theorizations of the impolitical and the impersonal. Taking on interlocutors from throughout the Western philosophical tradition, from Aristotle and Augustine to Weil, Arendt, Nancy, Foucault, and Agamben, Esposito announces the eclipse of a modern political lexicon-"freedom," "democracy," "sovereignty," and "law"-that, in its attempt to protect human life, has so often produced its opposite (violence, melancholy, and death). Terms of the Political calls for the opening of political thought toward a resignification of these and other operative terms-such as "community," "immunity," "biopolitics," and "the impersonal"-in ways that affirm rather than negate life. An invaluable introduction to the breadth and rigor of Esposito's thought, the book will also welcome readers already familiar with Esposito's characteristic skill in overturning and breaking open the language of politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0bdm

3. Preserving the Body: from: Cathedrals of Bone: The Role of the Body in Contemporary Catholic Literature
Abstract: It is a hallmark of Dillard’s writing that one cannot summarize much more than such a brief portion before breaking off to provide background, establish a working chronology, or simply fill the gaps. For example: although she maintains that “I knew in my

6. The Body “As It Was”: from: Cathedrals of Bone: The Role of the Body in Contemporary Catholic Literature
Abstract: On 22 January 2004, Peggy Noonan, columnist and contributing editor to the Wall Street Journal, recounted her efforts to report accurately papal reaction to the year’s most popular artistic work about the human body by a Catholic: Mel Gibson’s filmThe Passion of the Christ. “My December 17 column,” Noonan wrote, “reported that Pope John Paul II had seen Mel Gibson’s movie on the crucifixion of Christ,The Passion, and had offered a judgment on it: ‘It is as it was.’” That quote,” Noonan went on to explain, “came from the film’s producer, Steve McEveety, who told me that it

13 Words of Welcome: from: Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality
Author(s) BLOECHL JEFFREY
Abstract: Emmanuel Levinas signals the importance of hospitality for his approach to ethics and religion about two-thirds of the way through his first major work, Totality and Infinity:

14 Neither Close nor Strange: from: Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality
Author(s) SMITH WILLIAM H.
Abstract: At the outset of Totality and Infinity, Emmanuel Levinas defines the Other (l’Autrui)—the overarching theme of all his work—in terms of the stranger. He writes:

SEVEN JOHN DEWEY AND THE MORAL IMAGINATION: from: The Human Eros: Eco-ontology and the Aesthetics of Existence
Abstract: The last decades have witnessed an important series of changes in Anglo-American philosophy, not least of which has been the revival of an interest in the classical phase of American pragmatism. The work of the pragmatists seems once again to speak to the current philosophical dilemmas. Former “analytic philosophers” like the late Richard Rorty, Joseph Margolis, and Hilary Putnam came to embrace some form of neopragmatism. By and large, however, this revival has come in the domain of epistemology and the debate on realism. I would like to show here how a reappraisal of an aspect of pragmatic moral theory

THIRTEEN SANTAYANAʹS SAGE: from: The Human Eros: Eco-ontology and the Aesthetics of Existence
Abstract: In his “General Review” at the end of Realms of Being, Santayana observes that “my philosophy is like that of the ancients a discipline of the mind and heart, a lay religion.”¹ I intend to take this remark seriously and to explore what “a discipline of the mind and heart” means. Santayana was a careful writer, so already we should remark on those three key words: “discipline,” “mind,” and “heart.” This theme provides a guiding focus for understanding Santayana’s later work and illuminates what might appear to be the excessively eclectic nature of his ontology. In his intellectual autobiography, “General

Book Title: Malicious Objects, Anger Management, and the Question of Modern Literature- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Kreienbrock Jörg
Abstract: Why do humans get angry with objects? Why is it that a malfunctioning computer, a broken tool, or a fallen glass causes an outbreak of fury? How is it possible to speak of an inanimate object's recalcitrance, obstinacy, or even malice? When things assume a will of their own and seem to act out against human desires and wishes rather than disappear into automatic, unconscious functionality, the breakdown is experienced not as something neutral but affectively--as rage or as outbursts of laughter. Such emotions are always psychosocial: public, rhetorically performed, and therefore irreducible to a "private" feeling. By investigating the minutest details of life among dysfunctional household items through the discourses of philosophy and science, as well as in literary works by Laurence Sterne, Jean Paul, Friedrich Theodor Vischer, and Heimito von Doderer, Kreienbrock reconsiders the modern bourgeois poetics that render things the way we know and suffer them.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0c3f

Book Title: Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Statler Matthew
Abstract: The last half century has seen both attempts to demythologize the idea of God into purely secular forces and the resurgence of the language of Godas indispensable to otherwise secular philosophers for describing experience. This volume asks whether pietymight be a sort of irreducible human problematic: functioning both inside and outside religion.S. Clark Buckner works in San Francisco as an artist, critic, and curator. He is the gallery director at Mission 17 and publishes regularly in Artweek and the San Francisco Bay Guardian. He has a Ph.D. in philosophy from Vanderbilt University. Matthew Statler is the Director of Research at the Imagination Lab Foundation in Lausanne, Switzerland. His current research is focused on practical wisdom as it pertains to organizational phenomena such as strategy making and leadership. He also has a Ph.D. in philosophy from Vanderbilt University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0cj5

3 Suffering Faith in Philosophy from: Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Buckner S. Clark
Abstract: Since the publication of Heidegger’s Being and Time, with its appeal to explicitly religious categories, phenomenology and post-phenomenological thought has repeatedly demonstrated a distinctly religious dimension. In the United States, this religious dimension to phenomenology recently has been celebrated by leading scholars such as John Caputo and Edith Wyschogrod, while, in Germany, it has been recognized by defenders and critics of phenomenology alike since the 1920s. And in France virtually every leading post-phenomenological thinker, from Paul Ricoeur and Jean-Luc Marion to Emmanuel Levinas and Jacques Derrida, has taken up and explored this dimension to phenomenology. In the work of these

9 A Touch of Piety: from: Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Naas Michael
Abstract: “When it comes to Antigone, everything has already been said and we come too late in the game.”¹ So late do we come that it seems presumptuous, if not actually impious, even to try to lend a helping hand, let alone speak with any authority on the work that has already been done or the game that has been played out. Though we can try to forget that we are touching here on an almost sacred work of art, what Hegel called “one of the most sublime, and in every respect most consummate works of art human effort ever produced,”²

10 The Prayers and Tears of Jacques Derrida from: Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Caputo John D.
Abstract: In his notebooks of 1976, Jacques Derrida proposes to himself the task of describing his broken covenant with Judaism in a work that would “leave nothing, if possible, in the dark of what related me to Judaism, alliance [ alliance, covenant; Hebrew:berit] broken in every respect.”¹ For Derrida is Jewish without being Jewish, Jewish sans Judaism, married outside Judaism, hissonsuncircumcised, he an atheist. Of this broken covenant, this breach of analliancethat stretches “throughout thousands of years of Judaism,” he says—now the time has changed to 1989 and this note has been stitched into “Circumfession”—“that’s

14 Laughing, Praying, Weeping before God: from: Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Caputo John D.
Abstract: I work my way through things by writing. So, whenever I read what others have written about my work, whenever what I have written is read back to me by others—never, of course, without a gloss—it is as if the inert pages of books and journals have come to life and begun to talk back to me (and sometimes even to bite back). It is as if something that is structurally private, written in solitude, my most secret thoughts, meant only for me and God—like Augustine confessing to God in writing, “ cur confitemur deo scienti,” (Why do

CHAPTER 1 Breakdown: from: The Tears of Sovereignty: Perspectives of Power in Renaissance Drama
Abstract: “Theory must move among the events,” Machiavelli writes in a 1503 letter to Piero Soderini. Ten years later, he writes to Soderini again: “… that man is fortunate who harmonizes his procedure with his time, but on the contrary he is not fortunate who in his actions is out of harmony with his time and with the type of its affairs.” The question of time, in relation to sovereignty, is one of Machiavelli’s central preoccupations, and it stayed with him throughout his work. As the philosopher Antonio Negri has shown, time and theory move together in Machiavelli’s thought, particularly in

CHAPTER 4 Transformation: from: The Tears of Sovereignty: Perspectives of Power in Renaissance Drama
Abstract: Calderón de la Barca’s Life Is a Dream(La vida es Sueño) (1635) has been described as the “ultimate work of theatrical theology.”¹ Considered one of the most philosophically complex works of the early modern period,Life Is a Dreamnot only raises theological and political questions of power, but it also poses epistemological and ontological challenges to thought, particularly in relation to the increasingly sophisticated representational capacities of baroque theater. Like Suárez, in Jean-François Courtine’s account, and against a long-standing tradition that views the Jesuit playwright as a bastion of Spanish conservatism, Calderón, too, could be viewed as a

Book Title: Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Mieszkowski Jan
Abstract: This book is a major new study of the doctrines of productivity and interest in Romanticism and classical political economy. The author argues that the widespread contemporary embrace of cultural historicism and the rejection of nineteenth-century conceptions of agency have hindered our study of aesthetics and politics. Focusing on the difficulty of coordinating paradigms of intellectual and material labor, Mieszkowski shows that the relationship between the imagination and practical reason is crucial to debates about language and ideology.From the Romantics to Poe and Kafka, writers who explore Kant's claim that poetry sets the imagination freediscover that the representational and performative powers of language cannot be explained as the products of a self-governing dynamic, whether formal or material. A discourse that neither reflects nor prescribes the values of its society, literature proves to be a uniquely autonomous praxis because it undermines our reliance on the concept of interest as the foundation of self-expression or self-determination. Far from compromising its political significance, this turns literature into the condition of possibility of freedom. For Smith, Bentham, and Marx, the limits of self-rule as a model of agency prompt a similar rethinking of the relationship between language and politics. Their conception of a linguistic labor that informs material praxis is incompatible with the liberal ideal of individualism. In the final analysis, their work invites us to think about social conflicts not as clashes between competing interests, but as a struggle to distinguish human from linguistic imperatives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0d6g

FOUR Economics Beyond Interest from: Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser
Abstract: The last fifteen years have seen an explosion of interest in Adam Smith. In addition to the fact that the success of capitalism is often celebrated in his name, his oeuvre is increasingly heralded as the key to understanding the relations between politics, aesthetics, and economics in the eighteenth century. As research on Smith has moved beyond The Wealth of NationsandThe Theory of Moral Sentimentsto include his writings on jurisprudence, belles lettres, and even astronomy, it is often suggested that his work is a unique example of an interdisciplinary thought attentive to the demands of both metaphysics

12. The Conspiracy of Realism: from: Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: Despite an established but controversial alignment of King Learwith Beckett’s absurdist dramas or, at the alternative extreme, with Dante’sPurgatorio, the relation ofKing Learto allegory has remained an elusive topic. The interpretive extremes of this pendulum’s swing are thus conspicuous, but the nature of the pendulum itself seems under taboo. Those aligning a Dantesque or absurdist work withLearhave been interested in such analogous texts primarily as statements of meaning rather than as allegorical forms, that is, as content alone rather than as informed content or as the content of form. Even older critics like A.

15. Androcentrism and Acrasian Fantasies in the Bower of Bliss from: Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: Harry Berger’s “Wring out the Old: Squeezing the Text, 1951–2001” will be a major critical statement on the Bower of Bliss for years to come, and serious work on the Bower needs to engage its generously annotated, tightly argued analysis of the structural discourse that constitutes this site.¹ In “Squeezing the Text” (is the trope laundry or lemon juice?), Berger exposes the workings of misogyny as a target, and emphatically not a given, of the Bower. He reads the Spenserian narrative as an instance of “ specular tautology,” or self-reflection, which he also understands as an inversion of cause and

16. Beyond Binarism: from: Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: Shakespeare’s Antony and Cleopatra, like his earlierVenus and Adonis, is known to be generically mixed and even anomalous in the extent and degree to which it combines tragedy, comedy, and romance with lyric, allegory, myth, and history.¹ This is the first of several analogies I would draw between Shakespeare’s play and Spenser’sFaerie Queene, that hobgoblin’s garland of epic, romance, lyric, allegory, myth, history, and more. The breaking of formal conventions beyond their generic variousness also connects these works. In Ania Loomba’s view, for example, the nonteleological form ofAntony and Cleopatraresists closure, and in Margot Heinemann’s, this

Book Title: Written Voices, Spoken Signs-Tradition, Performance, and the Epic Text
Publisher: Harvard University Press
Author(s): KAHANE AHUVIA
Abstract: These innovative essays by leading scholars of Homer, oral poetics, and epic invite us to rethink some key concepts for an understanding of traditional epic poetry. Egbert Bakker examines the epic performer's use of time and tense in recounting a past that is alive. Tackling the question of full-length performance of the monumental Iliad, Andrew Ford considers the extent to which the work was perceived as a coherent whole in the archaic age. John Miles Foley addresses questions about spoken signs and the process of reference in epic discourse, and Ahuvia Kahane studies rhythm as a semantic factor in the Homeric performance. Richard Martin suggests a new range of performance functions for the Homeric simile. And Gregory Nagy establishes the importance of one feature of epic language, the ellipsis. These six essays centered on Homer engage with fundamental issues that are addressed by three essays primarily concerned with medieval epic: those by Franz BÃƒÂ¤uml on the concept of fact; by Wulf Oesterreicher on types of orality; and by Ursula Schaefer on written and spoken media. In their Introduction the editors highlight the underlying approach and viewpoints of this collaborative volume.Reviews of this book:"Despite its wide range of topics and approaches, the volume has a clear thematic focus. All contributors seek to leave behind the more formal concerns of past generations of scholars and aim instead at an understanding of orality as that which is (conceptually or actually) close, immediate, or performed. In their joint search for the new picture, classicists, linguists, and medievalists discover a range of different 'oralities'."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0fd2

Introduction from: Written Voices, Spoken Signs
Author(s) KAHANE AHUVIA
Abstract: A little more than two generations ago Milman Parry argued for the oral nature of Homeric verse. Parry’s work started an intense debate that has irrevocably changed Homeric studies and that has provided valuable impulses for a wide variety of other disciplines.¹ In the last several years the study of oral poetry has itself received considerable impulse and has undergone a dramatic increase in the variety of approaches and points of view.

CHAPTER 7 Ellipsis in Homer from: Written Voices, Spoken Signs
Author(s) NAGY GREGORY
Abstract: This preparation concentrates on four questions: (1) What is ellipsis? (2) How does ellipsis work in Homeric song-making? (3) How does ellipsis typify Homeric song-making? (4) How does Homeric song-making use ellipsis to typify itself?

CHAPTER 9 The Medial Approach: from: Written Voices, Spoken Signs
Author(s) SCHAEFER URSULA
Abstract: In their introductory essay to a collection of articles by Eric H. Havelock, Aleida and Jan Assmann speak of “the new paradigm ‘Communication and Media.’”¹ Assmann and Assmann credit Eric Havelock with having given to the formula From Mythos to Logos the empirical basis of media science:² “The new idea which Havelock has elaborated on and varied in all of his works is that of the media dependence of thinking. Sense [ Sinn], experience, reality—these are all variables of the media that we avail ourselves of. Anything that may be known, thought and said about the world is only knowable

10 The Awesome and Mundane Adventures of Flor de Manila y San Francisco from: Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Choy Catherine Ceniza
Abstract: It’s easy to notice, then overlook, the Filipino immigrant nurse. Her ubiquity in US hospitals lends her identity to stereotyping: natural caregiver, docile worker, foreign labor competition. Take for instance District of Columbia council member Marion Barry’s recent rant that pitted Filipino immigrant nurses against African Americans. When trying to explain how to get more African Americans employed in the district in April 2012, he proclaimed, “[I]f you go to the hospital now, you’ll find a number of immigrants who are nurses, particularly from the Philippines. And no offense, but let’s grow . . . our own nurses” (Craig). In

Book Title: Unsung Voices: Opera and Musical Narrative in the Nineteenth Century- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Abbate Carolyn
Abstract: Who "speaks" to us in The Sorcerer's Apprentice,in Wagner's operas, in a Mahler symphony? In asking this question, Carolyn Abbate opens nineteenth-century operas and instrumental works to new interpretations as she explores the voices projected by music. The nineteenth-century metaphor of music that "sings" is thus reanimated in a new context, and Abbate proposes interpretive strategies that "de-center" music criticism, that seek the polyphony and dialogism of music, and that celebrate musical gestures often marginalized by conventional music analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0rk0

Chapter Two WHAT THE SORCERER SAID from: Unsung Voices: Opera and Musical Narrative in the Nineteenth Century
Abstract: Paul Dukas’s symphonic scherzo L’apprenti sorcier(The Sorcerer’s Apprentice, 1893) is an eventful work—so lively, in fact, that it rattles the cage constructed of assumptions about musical narration. I shall argue thatThe Sorcerer’s Apprenticeallows a single instance of narrating. As a way into an interpretation of that sound, however, we should remember another moment, a strange passage at the midpoint of the piece, at which its entire musical progress comes to a full stop. There is a silence, and the piece begins to regenerate itself, by repeating again and again, far too many times, first a note,

Book Title: Edgar Allen Poe: A Phenomenological View- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): HALLIBURTON DAVID
Abstract: The book begins with a methodological chapter that sets out the assumptions and procedures of the approach. This is followed by analyses of Poe's major works, exploring such special problems as Poe's treatment of the material world, including technology; the interrelation of body and consciousness; poetic voice; attitudes toward women; and the will to affirmation, plenitude, and unity. The center of interest is neither Poe's biography nor environment but always the meaning of Poe's words. Because these works are shaped by a single imagination and because they are experienced in time, as a process, each work has its own "way of going." The aim of the interpretation is to find this way and go along with it; to live each work dynamically, as it "happens," while tracing its interaction with other works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1373

1 FOREWORD from: Edgar Allen Poe: A Phenomenological View
Abstract: The reader will have gathered, from the epigraphs that head this study, that its orientation is mainly European and phenomenological. The study derives, however, from American and traditional sources as well, and is therefore, in another sense, a work of synthesis. Each point deserves to be amplified, and the best way to do this, it seems to me, is to take them up one at a time. I have accordingly divided the preliminary section of the book into two parts: a methodological introduction, which clarifies phenomenological assumptions and procedures, and this foreword, which will attempt to explain the background of

4 TALES from: Edgar Allen Poe: A Phenomenological View
Abstract: The foreword endeavored, as the reader will recall, to place the present study in the framework of existing scholarship, and to explain its principal sources and debts. The methodological introduction then sought to clarify the assumptions and procedures of phenomenological interpretation in general, while outlining

Book Title: Karl Jaspers: An Introduction to His Philosophy- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): WALLRAFF CHARLES FREDERIC
Abstract: The thought of the late Karl Jaspers, co-founder of the existentialist movement, has long exerted a powerful influence on world opinion. But, surprisingly, though translations of his writings have appeared in over 160 editions in 16 countries, his strictly philosophical work has hitherto been largely inaccessible to American audiences. Even where adequate English translations exist, the difficulties imposed by Jaspers' involved reasoning, intricate style, and ingenious neologisms are such that few unfamiliar with Continental philosophy can hope to acquire an understanding of his ideas on their own.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x16m7

chapter seven How Ought We to Live? from: Karl Jaspers: An Introduction to His Philosophy
Abstract: Whatever else we may know, there is no knowing how to live. Useful as science may be in connection with means, it offers little help with our choice of ends. The laws and customs of each nation provide a framework within which men can accomplish their purposes, but this framework is always subject to correction in the name of some higher principle, be it civil rights, the demands of conscience, the divine law, or what not. Advisers are generally available, but those capable of choosing wise advisers have little use for advice, while those who need advice have no way

Book Title: Dostoevsky and the Novel- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Holquist Michael
Abstract: Michael Holquist shows that the generic impulse of the novel to explore the mysteries of individual biography met and fused in Dostoevsky's works with the national quest of the Russians for an identity of their own. The paradox of the writer's achievement consists in the degree to which his meditations on the significance of being without a past are grounded in history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x17k6

Chapter 2 The Search for a Story: from: Dostoevsky and the Novel
Abstract: It is customary to regard Notes from the Undergroundas a key to understanding the thematic concerns of the novels Dostoevsky wrote in his subsequent career, as a kind of Rosetta stone for such heiroglyphs of the major phase ofCrime and PunishmentorBrothers Karamazov.While there is much to recommend such an approach, it is perhaps no less interesting if we try to focus on the work from the other end of the telescope: that is, if we regard it in the light of worksprecedingit in the Dostoevskian canon. One of the preconceptions of what follows

History of Art and Pragmatic History from: New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) JAUSS HANS ROBERT
Abstract: At first sight, history in the realm of the arts presents two con tradictory views. With the first, it would appear that the history of architecture, music, or poetry is more consistent and more coherent than that of society. The chronological sequence of works of art is more closely connected than a chain of political events, and the more gradual transformations of style are easier to follow than the transformations of social history. Valery once said that the difference between art history and social history was that in the former the products were “filles visibles Ies unes des autres,” whereas

II The Insistency of Modern Sources from: Interpreting Modern Philosophy
Abstract: In functional terms, the historian of philosophy is an inquirer who finds his way around in some region of sources and who tries to aid others to achieve a similar familiarity. Whatever theoretical and cultural comparisons he may draw from other disciplines, they can never constitute the heart of his peculiar task. Primarily, he is responsible for accepting the discipline of the sources constituting a definite era of philosophy. His effectiveness is judged, above all, by the relative skill with which he makes everything else subserve the main work of improving our understanding and use of these primary texts. The

III The Art of Historical Questioning from: Interpreting Modern Philosophy
Abstract: Anyone working in a historical discipline experiences within himself, at certain times, a sympathetic reverberation of Stephen Dedalus’s cry that history is a nightmare from which he must awake. This feeling of suffocation steals over the philosopher when he attends to the long tradition of texts and studies in his field. Then, the history of philosophy seems to be an externally imposed and pressing structure, controlled entirely by lines of investigation laid out in the far distant past and extending into one’s present activity only in order to cramp and discourage the creative mind. This is indeed a nightmarish view

Book Title: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Banta Martha
Abstract: Ranging widely over a span of three hundred and fifty years of discussion and controversy, Martha Banta's book makes a fundamental contribution to the continuing debate on the nature of success and failure in a specifically American context. Her Whitmanesque view of the debate takes in the work of innumerable writers, particularly Emerson, Thoreau, Twain, Melville, Henry Adams, William and Henry James, Faulkner, Gertrude Stein, and Norman Mailer. She draws on the work of philosophers, psychologists, and historians as well.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1dm4

CHAPTER 2 The Sum Total of Possibility from: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: We turn from William James’s halo that eradiates and enriches—and confusingly complicates—objects by extending them far beyond their original compact, utilitarian, readily comprehensible core. Now to hear from Josiah Royce, contemporary and philosophical adversary of James. In his 1897 work, The Conception of God, Royce set down his position as neo-absolutist and idealist (the stance James rebuked with friendly lack of rancor when he told Royce, “Damn the Absolute!” and smiled as he said it, the two men facing one another, astraddle a fence in a famous photograph). Listen to Royce’s actual words before his phrases and James’s

CHAPTER 24 History—as Facts and as Faith from: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Apocalypse is defined in two general senses by Meyer Abrams: sudden revelations that renew or violent upheavals that destroy. When Abrams is working in Natural Supernaturalismwith the term as it spoke to the need of the English and Continental Romantics to revitalize decadent societies, he stresses the first of those meanings: the Biblical-historical panorama of weary, corrupt worlds which are jokingly, joyously replaced by visions of worlds freshly reborn. Those acts of the mind in America which attempt to split open the future, freeing history from its own limitations, have been informed by an urgency as great as that

Book Title: Value and Values-Economics and Justice in an Age of Global Interdependence
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Hershock Peter D.
Abstract: Especially in the aftermath of what is now being called the Great Recession, awareness has mounted of the imperative to question the modern divorce of economics from ethics. While the domains of economics and ethics were from antiquity through at least the eighteenth century understood in many cultures to be coterminous and mutually entailing, the modern assumption has been that the goal of maximizing human prosperity and the aim of justly enhancing our lives as persons and as communities were functionally and practically distinct. Working from a wide array of perspectives, the contributors to this volume offer a set of challenges to the assumed independence of the quantitative and qualitative dimensions of human and planetary well-being. Reflecting on the complex interrelationship among economics, justice, and equity, the book resists "one size fits all" approaches and struggles to revitalize the marriage of economics and ethics by activating cultural differences as the basis of mutual contribution to shared human flourishing. The publication of this important collection will stimulate or extend critical debates among scholars and students working in a number of disciplines in the social sciences and humanities, including philosophy, history, environmental studies, economics, and law.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1k8c

10 A Critique of Economic Reason: from: Value and Values
Author(s) Bilimoria Purushottama
Abstract: It is my intention in this essay to problematize the relationship between economics and ethics. The route I will take is an unconventional one—though not so unconventional if we consider Amartya Sen’s original position on capabilities and his radical revision of the Rawlsian theory of justice. Sen’s thinking is informed by his deep-rooted awareness of alternative possibilities within the heterogeneous—especially given his own argumentative Indian mind—Asian/Indian traditions. My case will be argued through a critique of models—those that have worked and those that have not, or are on the road to extinction; inevitably, the analytical discussion

12 John Dewey, Institutional Economics, and Confucian Democracies from: Value and Values
Author(s) Hickman Larry A.
Abstract: For some economists, institutional theories offer an attractive alternative, or perhaps better put, attractive supplements, to conservative approaches based on the work of free-market theorists such as Milton Friedman and Friedrich Hayek, as well as liberal theories based on the work of John Maynard Keynes, which taken together form the central doctrines of what has been called the “neoclassical synthesis.”¹ According to one noted conservative economist, neoclassical economic theory is based on several fundamental assumptions, including the following: “1. People have rational preferences among outcomes. 2. Individuals maximize utility and firms maximize profits. 3. People act independently on the basis

27 On the Justice of Caring Labor: from: Value and Values
Author(s) Shiu-Ching Wu
Abstract: Luck egalitarianism (LE), a term coined by Elizabeth Anderson,¹ has been one of the most dominant distributive theories in contemporary egalitarian justice theory.² Theorists of LE, including R. Dworkin, R. Arneson, T. Nagel, E. Rakowski, and J. Roemer, have been trying to establish a theory of justice that can reconcile the seemingly incommensurable political values of equality and liberty. To that end, they have proposed that, as far as the distribution of public goods is concerned, social justice would tolerate the inequality of individuals as a fair outcome resulting from personal choices; however, social justice should not tolerate inequality among

29 Institutional Power Matters: from: Value and Values
Author(s) Keleher Lori
Abstract: Academics and practitioners working in international economic development often cite the critical role of empowerment within development; however, relatively little attention has been paid to institutional power.¹ Institutionalized power plays an important role in generating, reinforcing, and reproducing the inequalities that prevent or limit various groups of individuals—most notably women—from acting as agents, engaging in empowerment processes, or being empowered. In other words, we cannot adequately address the role of empowerment with development without properly understanding the role of institutionalized power in empowerment. This essay seeks to briefly explain what institutionalized power is and the significant role it

CHAPTER 4 The Lure of the Modern: from: Gender and Nation in Meiji Japan
Abstract: As new social practices were introduced into Japan during the early Meiji period, they disseminated unevenly from the cities to the countryside. While Western fashions were adopted initially among the elite, who had ties to the government and who were concerned about promoting Japan’s image as a civilized nation, they soon spread to members of the middle class, who embraced Westernization as a means of social mobility and distinction. The high cost of Western fashions limited their widespread appeal, but by the Taisho period (1912–1926) and the introduction of uniformed clothing in various work professions, Western fashion became increasingly

5 Spiritualizing the National Body: from: Building a Heaven on Earth
Abstract: When the YMCA, the Presbyterian Church, and Ch’ŏndogyo started their respective rural movements, Korean peasants found themselves in a challenging situation in which many lacked the resources and power to meet the new demands and requirements of a powerful capitalist economy. Without the tools to negotiate the new conditions, a growing number of peasants had no choice but to sell their labor and become wageworkers, especially when the economy suff ered many setbacks in the 1930s because of the Great Depression.¹ Compared with the 1920s, when certain peasants were able to strengthen their holdings in relation to landowners and take

Book Title: The Worlds of Carol Shields- Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Staines David
Abstract: "Carol was a very fine writer and a remarkable human being, a wonderful person whose work I closely followed for more than 20 years. I interviewed her frequently over those years, with virtually every work she produced -novel, radio drama, play, book of stories. So I had a good sense of the span of her work and also her evolution as a stylist. But the key reason I wanted to make a book focusing on her life and work is that we were friends."-Eleanor Wachtel
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1mr3

Guilt, Guile, and Ginger in Small Ceremonies from: The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Waterston Elizabeth
Abstract: Last winter in Florida I unceremoniously bombarded my friends with Small Ceremonies.I wanted to see how readers not familiar with Carol Shields’s work would respond to this book, her first published novel. They ritually responded, “What’s with this character Furlong? So he is an American draft dodger—Why should that seem so hilarious to a Canadian author?”

Bio-Critical Afterlives: from: The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Sugars Cynthia
Abstract: Some time in the early 1970s, Carol Shields, then a master of arts student at the University of Ottawa, sat in the audience at one of the university’s Canadian Literature symposia, the very same symposium series that hosted a conference dedicated to the work of Carol Shields in 2012. Given the strange reflexivity of this coincidence, it is worth noting that Shields directly commented on the symposia and the debates about literary tradition and influence that they helped to foster. Registered as a master’s student in the university’s English Department from 1969 to 1975, and working under the supervision of

Departures, Arrivals: from: The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Ramon Alex
Abstract: The reductive classification of Carol Shields as a “domestic” novelist continues to obscure the extent to which travel is a central and recurrent aspect of her fiction. Although several critics—most notably Stephen Henighan in his contentious chapter “‘They Can’t Be about Things Here’: The Reshaping of the Canadian Novel” in When Words Deny the World(2002) and Gillian Roberts in her incisive article “Sameness and Difference: Border Crossings inThe Stone DiariesandLarry’s Party” (2006)—have explored Shields’s fiction in relation to issues of Canada/ US border crossing and cultural exchange, Shields’s work still tends to be associated

Narrative Pragmatism: from: The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Heath Tim
Abstract: Carol Shields makes Unlessinto a work that undeniably invites interpretation under the banner of postmodernism, yet to take the book up as merely postmodern risks opening it into an unavailing exercise that will not adequately unfold its meaning. Meaning, in particular the meaning of goodness and of all the intuitive “little chips of grammar,” as well as the enigmatic title ofUnless,matters greatly because Shields enters the realm of ethics with her inquiry into goodness, with her use of the woman who self-immolates, and with her suggestively allegorical feminist dialogue between Reta Winters and Danielle Westerman, respective avatars

“Grand Slam”: from: The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Stovel Nora Foster
Abstract: Carol Shields is most famous as a novelist, but she worked in many genres, including drama, producing and publishing four plays in the 1990s: Departures and Arrivals(1990),Thirteen Hands(1993),Anniversary(1998) with David Williamson, andFashion, Power, Guilt and the Charity of Families(1995) with Catherine Shields. Her interest in theatre started early: in “I/Myself,” a poem about her childhood self, she calls herself “theatrical even then” (6). Shields’s interest in drama led her to view many plays: in her “Preface” toThirteen Hands and Other Plays(2002),¹ she recalls: “I was an avid theatre-goer in the sixties

Archives as Traces of Life Process and Engagement: from: The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Hobbs Catherine
Abstract: For an archivist, treating the final portion of a person’s archives, particularly archives one is very familiar with, is a rare privilege. I am fortunate to have been able to acquire and process the latter part of the Carol Shields fonds which traces the final phase of her story and I was able to bring to this task the knowledge I have from working with the previous instalments of her archival fonds for many years.¹ What follows are my reflections as an archivist on the latter portions of Shields’s archives and what they might mean for research, both for their

The Voices of Carol Shields from: The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Clark Joan
Abstract: Carol Shields and I met thirty-six years ago when we were flying to Japan where our husbands were attending a Geotechnical Engineering Conference. An hour out of Vancouver, Don Shields suggested he and I change seats, and Carol and I talked pretty well non-stop across the Pacific. We began by talking about our work: at the time Carol had published two novels, two books of poetry, and short stories; I had published two children’s novels, poetry, and short stories. From there we moved onto other writers and their books, discussing those we admired, those we dismissed in the reckless way

The Clarity of Her Anger from: The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Urquhart Jane
Abstract: Many things could be said, and no doubt have been said, in praise of both Carol Shields and the work she created: her humanity, her ability to record and celebrate what others might see as less than dramatic lives, her skill in character development (evidenced by the veracity of dialogue, eccentricity of action, and sensitive renditions of her character’s inner lives), and her ability to put together beautifully crafted sentences. I loved Carol and loved everything about her work, and, at the end of the day, what I loved more than anything was what I will call the clarity of

Carol Shields from: The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Levin Martin
Abstract: Carol, who, I was soon to learn, hid an astringent sharpness beneath an exterior of sweet agreeableness, found nothing risible in the assignment and agreed to cooperate. To begin with, she allowed me to sit in on a workshop she was

Introduction to Part I from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Raessens Joost
Abstract: This part of the book sheds light on how play, as it was described in the introductory chapter, actually manifests itself in present-day culture. The authors in this section examine different contemporary expressions of playfulness, varying from people engaging with games, Do-It-Yourself (DIY) computer technologies, or social networks. The contributions in this section substantiate our earlier claims that play is also culturally determined and has different functions in different cultural settings. So we may speak of the current ludification of culture as evidence that play is mutable, and that what this transformation entails is versatile in scope and character. Together

3. Spiritual play: from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Aupers Stef
Abstract: The classical work Homo ludens(1938) by Dutch historian Johan Huizinga is constantly revisited and generally understood as an indisputable point of departure in the academic debate about modern play (see the introductory chapter of this volume). Huizinga’s work is currently used as a standard reference for game designers (e.g. Crawford 2003; Salen and Zimmerman 2004) and in game studies (e.g. Consalvo 2009; Copier 2005; Taylor 2006; Dibbell 2006). It has even been argued that Huizinga is a “pop icon in game studies”, while his seventy-five year old theory about play anachronistically functions as a “prehistory” and legitimation of this

6. Breaking reality: from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Glas René
Abstract: These song lyric lines accompanied a badge I earned in February 2010 while using Foursquareon my mobile phone. This location-based social network service, created by Dennis Crowley and Naveen Selvadurai and launched in 2009, offers its users the opportunity to check in at real-world venues, earning rewards (like badges) in the process. The badge I was rewarded, appropriately called “I’m on a Boat!”, is the reward for the first time you actually check in on a boat in real life.

9. The playful use of mobile phones and its link to social cohesion from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Ling Rich
Abstract: This chapter will examine how people’s playful use of the mobile phone supports social cohesion. It is true that there are a variety of ways that we use mobile telephones. We can use them to tell time, take pictures, listen to music, keep our appointment calendar, and note down memos. On advanced phones we can surf the web, sign up to play commercial multiplayer games, find directions, and sign in on social network sites. Among all these flashy applications it is important to remember that we can also talk to and text one another. Indeed it is these last functions

10. Digital cartographies as playful practices from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Lammes Sybille
Abstract: My neighbor recently looked up a Google Street View image of his tattoo parlor in Amsterdam. He noticed that his bicycle was parked in front of his shop, so he gathered that the specially equipped cars that made the panoramic photographs were traversing the city on one of his working days. Becoming intrigued he returned to the map and looked up the school of his children, whom he always picks up after school on his non-working days. On the Google Street View image a crowd of parents were gathering outside the school building. So he figured that the picture must

11. Ludic identities and the magic circle from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Calleja Gordon
Abstract: Johan Huizinga’s work has received renewed attention with the emergence and expansion of Game Studies. An important aspect of Huizinga’s explication of play is its bounded nature. Like other cultural artefacts Huizinga describes in Homo ludens(1955), the act of game playing requires the crossing of a boundary that marks the game from the ordinary world. The crossing of this boundary into game-space implies a shift in the players’ identity that takes them from their everyday, “ordinary” selves, into their ludic selves. Suits has described this as the “lusory attitude” (1978, 52); a disposition one enters into when interacting with

12. Play (for) time from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Crogan Patrick
Abstract: Through their deployment of interactivity, virtualization, and simulation, video games are prime examples of the contemporary form of what philosopher of technology Bernard Stiegler has termed the “industrial temporal object” (2009, 241). This is his term for mass produced media works designed to provide experiences that unfold over time through the user’s provision of his/her conscious attention. From the phonograph’s replaying of musical performances, to editing together film shots and the compilation of longer sequences of experience in television scheduling, to the design of systems for user-configured perceptions in newer media forms, industrial temporal objects have played an increasingly significant

15. Playing with others: from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Timmermans Jeroen
Abstract: In this chapter I zoom in on one of the characteristic paradoxes of modern, mediated identities, forged from a peculiar mix of individual interests and collective behavior, that can be encountered in people’s use of social network sites in particular. I tentatively explore the ramifications of the World Wide Web as a social medium, in which playful, light, frivolous self-presentation of people seems to be accompanied by the serious task of coping with social pressures induced by omnipresent (communication) media. The focus here is on social network sites and the paradox they create between being alone in front of a

16. New media, play, and social identities from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Fortunati Leopoldina
Abstract: In this chapter I focus on the motivations behind the current relationship between new media, play, and social identities in a framework of general, sociological categories. In particular, I intend to situate my analysis at the juncture between ludic culture, social control, and the social construction of the “ir-responsible” identity. The reason for this choice is that contemporary ludic culture can be quite well understood in light of the current imposition of social control and the mass resistance that is building against it. I am interested in answering the following research question: what is the meaning and the social function

4. Sounds Like Now: from: Muscially Sublime: Indeterminacy, Infinity, Irresolvability
Abstract: In The Inhuman, Jean-François Lyotard invents a string of associations with the Germangehorsam sein: to be obedient, or, literally translated, to be able or tending to hear. “To obey,” Lyotard suggests, “isgehorchen. Gehoörenis not far, to pertain to, to depend on an agency, to fall into a domain, under an authority, adominus. Andzuhören, to lend one’s ear.” There is, Lyotard continues, “an inexhaustible network linking listening to belonging, to the sense of obligation, a passivity I would like to translate aspassibility” (TI178). As a concept, passibility nicely merges “pssibility” (TI178). As a

Book Title: The Reinvention of Religious Music: Olivier Messiaen's Breakthrough Toward the Beyond- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): van Maas Sander
Abstract: Present-day music studies conspicuously evade the question of religion in contemporary music. Although many composers address the issue in their work, as yet there have been few attempts to think through the structure of religious music as we hear it. On the basis of a careful analysis of Olivier Messiaen's work, this book argues for a renewal of our thinking about religious music. Addressing his notion of a hyper-religiousmusic of sounds and colors, it aims to show that Messiaen has broken new ground. His reinvention of religious music makes us again aware of the fact that religious music, if taken in its proper radical sense, belongs to the foremost of musical adventures.The work of Olivier Messiaen is well known for its inclusion of religious themes and gestures. These alone, however, do not seem enough to account for the religious status of the work. Arguing for a breakthrough toward the beyondon the basis of the synaesthetic experience of music, Messiaen invites a confrontation with contemporary theologians and post-secular thinkers. How to account for a religious breakthrough that is produced by a work of art?Starting from an analysis of his 1960s oratorio La Transfiguration de Notre-Seigneur Jsus-Christ, this book arranges a moderated dialogue between Messiaen and the music theology of Hans Urs von Balthasar, the phenomenology of revelation of Jean-Luc Marion, the rethinking of religion and technics in Jacques Derrida and Bernard Stiegler, and the Augustinian ruminations of Sren Kierkegaard and Jean-Franois Lyotard. Ultimately, this confrontation underscores the challenging yet deeply affirmative nature of Messiaen's music.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14brzn4

Introduction from: The Reinvention of Religious Music: Olivier Messiaen's Breakthrough Toward the Beyond
Abstract: Is what is convincing also true? This classic question often preoccupied me when leaving the concert hall or church where, just before, a work by the French composer Olivier Messiaen (Avignon, December 10 , 1908–Paris, April 27, 1992) had been performed. The question seems naýïve, because the occasion is so evidently about experiencing a work of art that is manufactured, shaped by human hands, not a religious, sacramental ritual. Nonetheless, the great power of some of Messiaen’s work still forces this question on the listener—and I am not alone in this respect. The euphoric ovations or reverent testimony

1. It Is a Glistening Music We Seek from: The Reinvention of Religious Music: Olivier Messiaen's Breakthrough Toward the Beyond
Abstract: Olivier Messiaen is mentioned in many a twentieth-century survey in relation to the role he had in serialism. Around 1950 he was seen as a forerunner in the field of conceptual and technical innovations in music. During this brief period he produced works with often purely technical titles that to all appearances did not refer to religion. But although these works may possess an implicit religious meaning, as some authors have pointed out, Messiaen’s overall oeuvre—on paper, in any case—is emphatically determined by the many works with explicit religious titles, themes, and mottos.¹

3. Balthasar and the Religion of Music from: The Reinvention of Religious Music: Olivier Messiaen's Breakthrough Toward the Beyond
Abstract: Messiaen probably came across the work of Balthasar during his preparations for the libretto of Saint

5. The Technics of Breakthrough from: The Reinvention of Religious Music: Olivier Messiaen's Breakthrough Toward the Beyond
Abstract: The varied and conflicting vocabularies Messiaen uses when speaking of his own work are a reflection of the complex cultural-historical background that informs it: secularization, individualization, modernism, postmodernism, and technology, to name a few. In the opening paragraph of his Conférence de Kyoto, Messiaen blames the lack of understanding that often informs the reception of his work on the decline of faith. He laments the fact that as a “Christian and a Roman Catholic,” he speaks of “God, Divine Mysteries, and the Mystery of Christ to unbelievers or people who have little knowledge of religion and theology.”¹ This sounds like

Book Title: Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Smith Michael B.
Abstract: This book is a profound and eagerly anticipated investigation into what is left of a monotheistic religious spirit-notably, a minimalist faith that is neither confessional nor credulous. Articulating this faith as works and as an objectless hope, Nancy deconstructs Christianity in search of the historical and reflective conditions that provided its initial energy. Working through Blanchot and Nietzsche, re-reading Heidegger and Derrida, Nancy turns to the Epistle of Saint James rather than those of Saint Paul, discerning in it the primitive essence of Christianity as hope. The religion that provided the exit from religion,as he terms Christianity, consists in the announcement of an end. It is the announcement that counts, however, rather than any finality. In this announcement there is a proximity to others and to what was once called parousia. But parousia is no longer presence; it is no longer the return of the Messiah. Rather, it is what is near us and does not cease to open and to close, a presence deferred yet imminent.In a demystified age where we are left with a vision of a self-enclosed world-in which humans are no longer mortals facing an immortal being, but entities whose lives are accompanied by the time of their own decline-parousia stands as a question. Can we venture the risk of a decentered perspective, such that the meaning of the world can be found both inside and outside, within and without our so-immanent world?The deconstruction of Christianity that Nancy proposes is neither a game nor a strategy. It is an invitation to imagine a strange faith that enacts the inadequation of life to itself. Our lives overflow the self-contained boundaries of their biological and sociological interpretations. Out of this excess, wells up a fragile, overlooked meaning that is beyond both confessionalism and humanism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs028

Translators’ Foreword from: Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity
Author(s) Smith Michael B.
Abstract: The original title of this book was La déclosion. That term may be said not to “exist” in the French language, and it is not farfetched to claim that the volume is itself an explication of its meaning. The word recurs frequently in many chapters, particularly the last one. That chapter shares its title with the volume as a whole, explicating the leitmotif ofdéclosionand carrying it to the brink of a further dialectical sublation . Therefore it may be useful at the outset to convey our understanding (without pretending to do any of the hard work Nancy’s texts

Blanchot’s Resurrection from: Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity
Author(s) Smith Michael B.
Abstract: The theme of resurrection does not seem, on the face of it, to play a major role in Blanchot. At least it is only rarely encountered in the so-called “theoretical” texts. It may be more frequent in the narratives, but in them it is harder to isolate themes per se. Yet resurrection is indissociable in that work from death and dying, with which we are more used to associating the name Blanchot. And if the phenomenon of dying is, in turn, not only indissociable from literature or writing but consubstantial with them, that is only to the degree that it

1 “Combinatorial Algorithms” from: Missing Link
Abstract: The makings of metaphor appeared in the world when the world first appeared, and to what degree ex nihilowe may still speculate. The initiative passed through myriad incarnations that have led up to and become ourselves. This book might do well to follow a similar procedure, with an introduction of metaphor per se, a conjuring of itex nihilo: what metaphor is thought to be, how it is thought to work. With each chapter that follows, we will have occasion to draw out unique features of metaphoric behaviour as they become relevant. To avoid repeating myself too much, I’m

6 Possibility Naturalized: from: Missing Link
Abstract: Someday I’d like to write an article on the rhetoric of book and chapter titles, a fairly typical example of which you see above. We are drawn towards this kind of hinged twofold structure: there is a metaphoric or playful gesture on one side, and a discursive statement on the other telling us what the work is “really” about. The two halves are related: the discursive element participates in its metaphoric resonances, with the metaphoric resonances grounded in the discursive ballast. The colon represents an axis, a bonding agent in the juxtaposition, metaphor as part of the grammar of thinking.

7 Metaphor and Cognition from: Missing Link
Abstract: We’re at the half-way point in this book. If we were pilots on a trans-Atlantic flight crossing the gap between two continents, we’d be somewhere around the Point of No Return. No land in sight on either horizon. We would be crossing an important line and yet, if we looked out on the ocean, we would see no line at all. I consider in my argument two distinct and related contexts for the evolution of the metaphoric initiative. We have been thinking about how it has been at work inandasthe material world from its outset. The reality

8 A Word Aside: from: Missing Link
Abstract: We take a big leap at this point, a metaphoric leap, a leap that is no leap at all. We move from relatively simple cascades of computing neurons to our existential experience of consciousness. In the last chapter, we worked up some of the tools we need to achieve conscious thinking. We kept it simple, but the rudiments were there. I see this movement then from relatively elementary forms of thinking to more sophisticated symbolic modes and the qualia of mind they present to us as a question of degree rather than of kind. The nature of the neuron does

9 The Metaphor of Consciousness from: Missing Link
Abstract: Our brains store memories, images, pictures of things, feelings and ideas, words, the information and knowhow you need to tie your shoe and sound out the letter “K.” But you must have puzzled over this question at some point already in this book. How does a neuron, or even a network of neurons store things like pictures and sounds and ideas? If at some point we were able to isolate a network of neurons where an image of your house was stored, would we see a little image of your house inside it? Is there a network of neurons that,

10 Megaphors: from: Missing Link
Abstract: It often happens when you approach them, that what you thought were pinnacles become thresholds. We have worked through the metaphor of consciousness (subjective genitive, the metaphor that consciousness is). Our A = B has issued in symbolic thinking and it has assumed the echoic properties of sentient awareness. We may be inclined to think that our individual minds are the be-all and end-all so far as metaphor is concerned, that metaphor can’t do any better than produce self-reflexive thinkers like ourselves. But in truth, it may just be getting started. It is still expanding and taking on new forms.

12 The Evolution of Literature from: Missing Link
Abstract: In our tracking of the metaphoric initiative, we have seen how processes of natural evolution unfold via a logic of replication, genetic causes and effects, governed by the principle of natural selection. We asked the following questions. Is this same unconscious process at work in culture? If it is, how are we to understand ourselves as free and self-determining? If it is not, that is, if the terms and conditions of evolutionary change have themselves changed in the cultural domain, what power of agency or self-determination, if any, do we gain? Can we understand those mechanisms of change better, control

Book Title: Resentment's Virtue-Jean Amery and the Refusal to Forgive
Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Murphy Jeffrie G.
Abstract: Resentment's Virtueoffers a new, more nuanced view. Building on the writings of Holocaust survivor Jean Améry and the work of the South African Truth and Reconciliation Commission, Thomas Brudholm argues that the preservation of resentment can be the reflex of a moral protest that might be as permissible, humane or honorable as the willingness to forgive. Taking into account the experiences of victims, the findings of truth commissions, and studies of mass atrocities, Brudholm seeks to enrich the philosophical understanding of resentment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs798

5 Desmond Tutu on Anger from: Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: The life and works of Desmond Tutu are truly impressive: he is a famous apartheid opponent and Nobel Peace Prize laureate, Archbishop Emeritus, the chairperson and most prominent spokesperson of the TRC, a “moral voice” of the world. In relation to his involvement with the TRC, Tutu has been traveling the world, giving talks about his experiences and lessons learned. A story that Tutu apparently loves to tell and retell is one about his encounters with the grievously wronged yet forgiving victims who appeared before the commission. During the hearings, in his books, and in speeches, Tutu has expressed repeatedly

14 Epilogue: from: Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: After working extensively with the problems facing postwar countries and with victims in particular, Eric Stover, in a 1999 interview, expressed fatigue with reconciliation talk.² His comments came after the interviewer characterized Stover’s work with forensic investigations and postwar reconstruction as part of a process of reconciliation. I wrote this book because I felt a similar fatigue with the rhetoric of forgiveness, closure, and reconciliation, and I wanted to challenge a certain cluster of unquestioned assumptions and implied inferences. This book offers examples from various contexts, but the rhetoric and logic against which it objects are part of a global

Book Title: Intention Interpretation- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): ISEMINGER GARY
Abstract: "...an excellent and comprehensive discussion of a debate that was initiated in this century in William Wimsatt's and Monroe C. Beardsley's influential article 'The Intentional Fallacy.'...this is a splendidly conceived and very useful collection of essays. Readers will want to take issue with the arguments of individual authors, but this is to be expected in a volume at the cutting edge of a fertile philosophical controversy." --David Novitz, The Philosophical Quarterly "What is the connection, if any, between the author's intentions in (while) writing a work of literature and the truth (acceptability, validity) of interpretive statements about it?" With this question, Gary Isminger introduces a literary debate that has been waged for the past four decades and is addressed by philosophers and literary theorists in Intention and Interpretation. Thirteen essays discuss the role of appeals to the author's intention in interpreting works of literature. A well-known argument by E.D. Hirsch serves as the basic text, in which he defends the appeal to the author's intention against Wimsatt and Beardsley's claim that such an appeal involved "the intentional fallacy." The essays, mostly commissioned by the editor, explore the presuppositions and consequences of arguing for the importance of the author's intentions in the way Hirsch does. Connections emerge between this issue and many fundamental issues in metaphysics and the philosophy of mind as well as in aesthetics. The (old) "New Criticism" and current Post-Structuralism tend to agree in disenfranchising the author, and many people now are disinclined even to consider the alternative. Hirsch demurs, and arguments like his deserve the careful attention, both from critics and sympathizers, that they receive here. Literary scholars and philosophers who are sympathetic to Continental as well as to Anglo-American styles of philosophy are among the contributors. "This is a timely book appearing as it does when postmodernist views of the death of the author are disappearing quickly from the scene. As a collection it exemplifies the best work that is being done on this problem at the moment, and it will no doubt inspire further debate." --The Journal of Aesthetics and Art Criticism "[T]his volume contains important articles illuminating the central debate over the role and relevance of authorial intentions in literary interoperation." --British Journal of Aesthetics
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs87q

Introduction from: Intention Interpretation
Abstract: “What does the literary interpreter do? He tells us what a literary work means.” Thus says Monroe Beardsley,¹ who has written as thoughtfully and influentially on the subject as any philosopher in the past fifty years, and this is as good a place to start as any. Though there may well be ways of embodying interpretations that do not involve saying whatsomething means (for example, reading a poem out loud), I shall follow Beardsley’s lead and concentrate on what interpreterssay,on interpretive remarks. Consider some putative examples:

2 The Authority of the Text from: Intention Interpretation
Author(s) BEARDSLEY MONROE C.
Abstract: The first thing required to make criticism possible is an object to be criticized—something for the critic to interpret and to judge. with its own properties against which interpretations and judgments can be checked. The Principle of Independence. as it might be called. is that literary works exist as individuals and can be distinguished from other things. though it is another question whether they enjoy some special mode of existence. as has been held. I think everyone must agree on this first postulate—here rather roughly stated. But there is another postulate that is logically complementary to the first:

6 An Intentional Demonstration? from: Intention Interpretation
Author(s) ISEMINGER GARY
Abstract: What is the connection, if any, between the author’s intentions in writing a work of literature and the truth (acceptability, validity) of interpretive statements about it? E. D. Hirsch has argued for a close connection in his vigorous defense of what he calls “the sensible belief that a text means what its author meant.”¹ Here is his argument:

9 Intention and Interpretation: from: Intention Interpretation
Author(s) KRAUSZ MICHAEL
Abstract: The Author. To which author shall we address ourselves? The historical author? The reconstituted author? A postulated author? The work may have been produced over an extended period of time. perhaps in interrupted stages. Are we to assume that the author is

12 Allusions and Intentions from: Intention Interpretation
Author(s) HERMERÉN GöRAN
Abstract: Under what conditions shall we say that a literary text or a work of art contains an allusion to another text or artwork or that a particular allusion succeeds or is understood? These are the main questions I discuss in this essay. Before proposing an analysis of allusions, however, in a more informal and intuitive way I discuss allusions and some related notions and call attention to some demarcation problems, which I hope pave the way for the subsequent discussions.

Book Title: Italian Irish Filmmakers- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Lourdeaux Lee
Abstract: "This penetrating study examines how these filmmakers confronted their cultural heritage and used it as a counterpoint to their depiction of mainstream America." --American Cinematographer In this unique film history, Lee Lourdeaux traces the impact of Irish and Italian cultures on four major American directors and their work. Defining the core values and tensions within each culture, and especially focusing on the influence of American Catholicism, he presents John Ford, Frank Capra, Francis Coppola, and Martin Scorsese as ethnic Americans and film artists. Lourdeaux shows each filmmaker on set with writers and actors, learning to bypass stereotypes in order to develop a shrewd reciprocal assimilation between his ethnic background and Anglo America. Beginning with D. W. Griffith's depiction of Irish and Italian immigrants, the author discusses Hollywood's stereotypical portrayals of ethnic priests, cops, politicians, and gangsters, as well as their surface acculturation in the movies of the 1920s. By the decade's end, John Ford was using all-American stories to embody the basic myths and tensions of Irish-American life. In his later westerns and foreign films, he tried to understand both Irish political strife and the key figures of Irish liturgy. Frank Capra pitted Italian family values against the Anglo success ethic, turning out social comedies about oppressed little people. Several decades later, Martin Scorsese and Francis Coppola were highly critical of their religio-ethnic heritage, though they gradually discovered that to outline its weaknesses, like the blind pursuit of success, was to fashion a critical mirror of mainstream America. Lourdeaux discusses a number of recent films by Coppola and by Scorsese that have not yet been analyzed in any book. And, in the chapter on Scorsese, a personal interview with the director reveals how his ethnic childhood shaped his work in film. Examining the conflicts within American culture, Lourdeaux shows how the filmmakers themselves had to confront the self-destructive aspects of their ethnic background, not only to accommodate WASP audiences but to better understand their own heritage. He also observes that ethnicity is a strong draw at the box office, as in The Godfather, because it creates a sense of the Other who can both be admired and at the same time ridiculed. Illustrated with scenes of the movies discussed, this fascinating film history tells how four of America's most famous filmmakers assimilated their ethnic backgrounds on set and on screen. "Mr. Lourdeaux walks a tricky path in analyzing the films of each [director]: avoiding the trap of excessively detailing their lives and many films, while steering clear of ethnic stereotyping. Those interested in ethnic influences on outstanding persons or in the production of films by four of the best will find the book enjoyable." --The Baltimore Sun "This is an invaluable book because it arouses critical awareness of the ethnicity underlying many Hollywood movies that might otherwise appear merely to represent American archetypes." --Journal of American Studies "A valuable addition to the literature on ethnic identity in film. The insights Lourdeaux offers into major figures like Griffith, Ford, Capra, Coppola, and Scorsese contribute significantly to our understanding of their films." --Virginia Wright Wexman, University of Illinois at Chicago "For a number of years now, church historians have been giving us an account of American Catholicism that is much richer and more varied than the older institutional accounts of the Catholic Church ever let on. In this comprehensive and insightful study, Lee Lourdeaux shows us how much the ethnic movies of directors like Ford and Capra, Coppola and Scorsese have to teach us as well about Irish- and Italian-Catholic mores and instincts." --John B. Breslin, S.J., Director "A wonderfully sensitive, intelligent study of the complex issue of how the Catholic imagination works in the creative personalities of those raised in the Catholic heritage." --Andrew M. Greeley
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bsx1s

CHAPTER 1 Irish and Italian Immigrants and the Movies from: Italian Irish Filmmakers
Abstract: In the early 1900s when the American film industry was just getting on its feet, several million Irish and Italians immigrated to America looking for prosperity. They had fled the grinding poverty of Kilkenny and Catania, endured terrible hardships at sea, and then signed up for twelve-hour shifts in American factories. But at least they could feed a large family and gradually build up some savings. Nothing in their ethnic values or their religion prevented them from subscribing to the country’s Anglo-Protestant ethic of hard work, private ownership, and success.

CHAPTER 3 John Ford and the Landscapes of Irish America from: Italian Irish Filmmakers
Abstract: In A Short History of the Movies,Gerald Mast begins his discussion of John Ford’s work with a shrewd cultural observation.

CHAPTER 4 Frank Capra and His Italian Vision of America from: Italian Irish Filmmakers
Abstract: Frank Capra Frank Capra hails from the same social tradition in American film as D. W. Griffith and John Ford. Like them, he explored issues of family, law, decency, and democracy. Yet, Capra’s distinctive ethnic background also made a difference. Though as much a social moralist as Griffith, Capra brought to his characters an Italian sense of gentle compassion; his familial concern for others was an ethnic world apart from Griffith’s Anglo view of greedy human nature. As for a resemblance to Ford’s work, Capra’s films often relied on communal values and family scenes. But whereas Ford wrestled with age-old

Book Title: Hegemony-The New Shape Of Global Power
Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Agnew John
Abstract: Hegemonytells the story of the drive to create consumer capitalism abroad through political pressure and the promise of goods for mass consumption. In contrast to the recent literature on America as empire, it explains that the primary goal of the foreign and economic policies of the United States is a world which increasingly reflects the American way of doing business, not the formation or management of an empire. Contextualizing both the Iraq war and recent plant closings in the U.S., noted author John Agnew shows how American hegemony has created a world in which power is no longer only shaped territorially. He argues in a sobering conclusion that we are consequently entering a new era of global power, one in which the world the US has made no longer works to its singular advantage.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bsxmk

3 American Hegemony and the New Geography of Power from: Hegemony
Abstract: In mainstream theories of world politics, the workings of political power are usually seen as a historical constant. They share the view expressed so clearly by Paul Ricoeur that “power does not have much of a history.”¹ At the same time, political power is overwhelmingly associated with “the modern state,” to which all states are supposed to correspond, but which is usually a version of France, England, or the United States regarded as a unitary actor equivalent to an individual person. Political power is envisioned in terms of units of territorial sovereignty (at least for the so-called Great Powers) that

Book Title: The Roots Of Thinking- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Sheets-Johnstone Maxine
Abstract: "A significant contribution to the study of early humans, this book is a philosophical anthropology.... it makes genuinely novel, and highly persuasive, claims within the field itself." --David Depew In this ground-breaking interdisciplinary study about conceptual origins, Maxine Sheets-Johnstone shows that there is an indissoluble bond between hominid thinking and hominid evolution, a bond cemented by the living body. Her thesis is concretely illustrated in eight paleoanthropological case studies ranging from tool-using/tool-making to counting, sexuality, representation, language, death, and cave art. In each case, evidence is brought forward that shows how thinking is modeled on the body-specifically, how concepts are generated by animate form and the tactile-kinesthetic experience. Later chapters critically examine key theoretical and methodological issues posed by the thesis, Sheets-Johnstone demonstrates in detail how and why a corporeal turn in philosophy and the human sciences can yield insights no less extraordinary than those produced by the linguistic turn. In confronting the currently popular doctrine of cultural relativism and the classic Western metaphysical dualism of mind and body, she shows how pan-cultural invariants of human bodily life have been discounted and how the body itself has not been given its due. By a precise exposition of how a full-scale hermeneutics and a genetic phenomenology may be carried out with respect to conceptual origins, she shows how methodological issues are successfully resolved. "Ranging across the humanities and sciences, this thoroughly original book challenges both traditional metaphysics and contemporary cultural relativism. In their place, it persuasively develops a phenomenonological, tactile-kinesthetic account of the origins of thinking. This philosophical anthropology could not be more timely. It replaces the 'linguistic turn' with a promising new 'corporeal turn.'" --John J. Stuhr, University of Oregon "This work takes a much-needed stand in the inter-disciplinary field of philosophical anthropology. Sheets-Johnstone is well-read in the history of philosophy and in contemporary anthropology. The point of view she offers is inventive, insightful, well-established, and fruitful." --Thomas M. Alexander, Southern Illinois University at Carbondale
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bt5v1

8 On the Conceptual Origin of Death from: The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: Maurice Merleau-Ponty described the objective body as the “impoverished image” of the phenomenal body.¹ In an earlier work, Jean-Paul Sartre drew a similar distinction when he described the body being-for-itself and the body-for-others as existing “on different and incommunicable levels” with one another.² Many existential philosophers have gone on to extol these critical determinations and to incorporate the distinction in their work as a fundamental verity of human existence. Thus, Calvin Schrag, for example, has insisted on the necessity of consistently contrasting “the body as concretely lived” with “the body asobjectively known.”³ On the other hand, Herbert plügge, “also

Book Title: Studies in Philosophy for Children-Harry Stottlemeier's Discovery
Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Lipman Matthew
Abstract: The contributors are philosophers themselves who have taught from Lipman's novels or conducted workshops instructing elementary school teachers on how most effectively to utilize the program in their classrooms. Teaching Harryraises philosophical issues concerning such concepts as authority, morality, religion, justice, truth, knowledge, beauty, and goodness. Gracing each article with personal experience, the authors recount their own struggles against the claims of philosophers and psychologists who have previously underestimated children's moral capability because of their lack of political and social experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bt7sz

11 The Development of Reasoning in Children through Community of Inquiry from: Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Thomas John C.
Abstract: JEAN PIAGET must be counted among the most influential scientists of our time. Were it not for his work, the field of developmental psychology and our understanding of the child would be far different. His theories and his experimental results have inspired a generation of admirers who have attempted to advance the field of study he pioneered. Even those who arrive at a different conception of the child often are able to do so only because of Piaget’s contribution to that understanding. Yet his conclusions are not without problems, nor have they gone unchallenged. The Philosophy for Children program is

13 Standardization from: Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Lindop Clive
Abstract: Mr. Spence agrees to let the class work on this idea and they come up with a list of six expressions that mean the same thing as “all,” namely: “each,” “every,” “any,” “a,” “if-then,” and no modifier at all. The equivalence of “all” with these expressions is taken for granted, and the examples they

6 Why I Like Contemporary Classical Music and Contemporary Sociological Theory: from: The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) KHAN SHAMUS
Abstract: I had never heard of classical music’s first principle until I read Michael Bell’s paper (that principle is “Do what you are told”). In fact, as a violinist, what immediately popped into my head as a “first principle” was “Play in tune!” This is exactly what I was told the first time I ever played for the pedagogue Dorothy DeLay (to be more accurate, I was told, “Sugarplum, you need to work on your intonation”). So I started to ask musicians I know—some known, some working on becoming so, and some just working—“What is the first principle of

Book Title: A Moral Military- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Axinn Sidney
Abstract: Axinn answers "yes" to these questions. His objective in A Moral Militaryis to establish a basic framework for moral military action and to assist in analyzing military professional ethics. He argues for the seriousness of the concept of military honor but limits honorable military activity by a strict interpretation of the notion of war crime.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14btf9m

10 Somme Memories from: Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) Adamson Ian
Abstract: William Sloan was born in Newtownards, Co. Down, in 1897. He was the only son of Anthony and Lizzie Sloan, who lived in Roseneath Cottage, Main Street, Conlig, Co. Down, near my father’s shop at the corner of Tower Road; this leads past Clandeboye Golf Club to Helen’s Tower. The couple were married on 24 August 1896 in Ballygilbert Presbyterian Church. Anthony worked as a general labourer, and his two nieces, Martha and Isabella, eventually became my two grannies. Anthony and Lizzie had two children, William and Lillah, to whom my grannies were therefore cousins. Shortly after the outbreak of

15 Beyond Glory? from: Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) Winter Jay
Abstract: I have a distaste for certain poems written in the midst of the great war; they are in all anthologies, but I have substituted Herbert Read’s ‘End of the War’ written long after. The writers of these poems were invariably officers of exceptional courage and capacity, one a man constantly selected for dangerous work, all, I think, had the Military Cross; their letters are vivid and humorous, they were not without joy—for all skill is

1 Introduction from: Meaning and Context in the Thanksgiving Hymns
Abstract: It can be tempting for a Dead Sea Scrolls scholar working on ancient texts on the basis of damaged manuscripts to complain about the missing parts and think it is they that prevent her from fully understanding a text. It is tempting to surmise things about the contents of a missing line, thinking it might be the clue to wonderful new insights, and it is frustrating not to know for sure. One is aware that something is missing and cautious not to ignore this.

Book Title: Huihui-Navigating Art and Literature in the Pacific
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Nordstrom Georganne
Abstract: This groundbreaking anthology is the first to navigate the interconnections between the rhetorics and aesthetics of the Pacific. Like the bright and multifaceted constellation for which it is named, Huihui: Rhetorics and Aesthetics in the Pacific showcases a variety of genres and cross-genre forms—critical essays, poetry, short fiction, speeches, photography, and personal reflections—that explore a wide range of subjects, from Disney’s Aulani Resort to the Bishop Museum, from tiki souvenirs to the Dusky Maiden stereotype, from military recruitment to colonial silencing, from healing lands to healing words and music, from decolonization to sovereignty. These works go beyond conceiving of Pacific rhetorics and aesthetics as being always and only in response to a colonizing West and/or East. Instead, the authors emphasize the importance of situating their work within indigenous intellectual, political, and cultural traditions and innovations of the Pacific. Taken together, this anthology threads ancestral and contemporary discursive strategies, questions colonial and oppressive representations, and seeks to articulate an empowering decolonized future for all of Oceania. Representing several island and continental nations, the contributing authors include Albert Wendt, Haunani-Kay Trask, Mililani Trask, Chantal Spitz, Jonathan Kay Kamakawiwoʻole Osorio, Flora Devatine, Kalena Silva, Steven Winduo, Alice Te Punga Somerville, Selina Tusitala Marsh, kuʻualoha hoʻomanawanui, Craig Santos Perez, Gregory Clark, Chelle Pahinui, Dan Taulapapa McMullin, Michael Puleloa, Lisa King, and Steven Gin. Collectively, their words guide us over ocean routes like the great waʻa, vaʻa, waka, proa, and sakman once navigated by the ancestors of Oceania, now navigated again by their descendants.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14tqcww

Introduction: from: Huihui
Author(s) Nordstrom Georganne
Abstract: The metaphorical in language is now a starting place for any of us who wish to write. When one wishes to write about the Pacific, the challenge may be to acknowledge some of the old metaphors—and then to add a new one, or more, for the sake of understanding and further work. When we think of the Pacific we can think in diagrammatic terms, for example, of circles, circles within circles, webs of open space; we can think of more pictorial metaphors, like far-reaching ropes, nets of enormous size, waves or nested ripples of ocean water; we can think

Chapter Eleven Sovereignty out from under Glass? from: Huihui
Author(s) King Lisa
Abstract: The long relationship between Euro-American museums and Indigenous peoples bears a legacy of problems and abuses, as museums have interpreted Indigenous peoples’ histories and cultures through an exclusively Euro-American worldview. The Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum of Honolulu is no exception. It is this chapter’s purpose to explore the ways in which the Bishop Museum has recognized this colonial rhetorical framework through which it has maintained and displayed its collections. In particular, the chapter analyzes how the 2006–2009 renovation of the Hawaiian Hall facilities at the Bishop Museum was an active, if ultimately ambiguous, attempt to decolonize the rhetorical habits

Chapter Twelve The Many Different Faces of the Dusky Maiden: from: Huihui
Author(s) Smith Jo
Abstract: In May 2011, the Wellington City Gallery (based in New Zealand’s capital city) hosted an exhibit of photographic works by four Māori women artists—the first photographic exhibit of its kind in Aotearoa/New Zealand.¹ The exhibit was titled Maiden Aotearoa(May 21- June 26, 2011) and featured the work of Vicky Thomas (Ngāti Kahu, Pākehā, Irish/ Welsh), Suzanne Tamaki (Ngāti Maniapoto, Tūhoe, Te Arawa), Aimee Ratana (Ngai Tūhoe), and Sarah Hudson (Ngāti Awa, Tūhoe).² The collection demonstrated a range of approaches to representing Indigenous worlds and women. Some of the artists focused on the ways colonial photographers depicted women from

Chapter Eighteen He Huaka‘i ma Hā‘ena: from: Huihui
Author(s) Pahinui Chelle
Abstract: Rhetoric works to resolve conflict by forging agreement. Aesthetic works to provide diverse people with a common experience. Both, whether directly or by considerable indirection, help people who find they must share a space move from contention to community. They do that by communicating identity—a sense of self and affiliation for those who are addressed to adopt for themselves. So we might phrase it this way: rhetoric forges the kind of agreement we understand in conceptual terms, while aesthetic offers an opportunity to experience that agreement by inhabiting with others at least for a moment a common identity. When

Chapter Twenty-two First Class from: Huihui
Author(s) Wendt Albert
Abstract: If it wasn’t raining heavily, he walked to and from work. Because of his high cholesterol and blood pressure his doctor had recommended that he exercise regularly—a brisk thirty-minute walk or jog each day would be ideal. He also enjoyed the route down Woodlawn Avenue, then across the sports field of Noelani Elementary School, and round the back streets and through St. Francis High School for girls and the Newman’s Centre and into the campus. The route was lushly rich in fruit and flowering trees and plants, such as mangoes, avocadoes, bananas, vi, papaya, ginger, and frangipani and the

Book Title: Foundational Theology-A New Approach to Catholic Fundamental Theology
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Jacobs-Vandegeer Christiaan
Abstract: Fundamental theology is traditionally viewed as the starting point for the various disciplines within Catholic theology; it is the place where solid foundations are established for the further research and engagement with the vast terrain of historical, systematic, philosophical, and sacramental/liturgical theology. In Foundational Theology, a landmark new study, Neil Ormerod and Christiaan Jacobs-Vandegeer seek to ground foundational theology in the normative drive toward meaning, truth, goodness, and beauty, appropriated by the theologian through religious, moral, intellectual, and psychic conversions. In doing so, the work maps out the implications of those fundamental orientations to the specific questions and topics of the Catholic theological tradition: God, Trinity, revelation, and an array of doctrinal points of investigation. The authors in this work provide a comprehensive approach to theological foundations for theologians while employing a new, groundbreaking approach to the discipline through the application of the insights of Bernard Lonergan, one of the foremost Catholic theologians of the modern era.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j2pq

Foreword from: Foundational Theology
Author(s) Ormerod Neil
Abstract: While the initial seeds for this work go back to my own doctoral thesis,¹ the more proximate cause for the project was a celebratory dinner in which I happened to be sitting next to the eminent Australian theologian, and recognized authority on fundamental theology, Gerald O’Collins. Though we were both aware of one another’s work (who could not be aware of his work!), it was the first time we had met, and Gerald began talking about his recently published book on fundamental theology, Rethinking Fundamental Theology. He noted that in this book he mentions Lonergan at the beginning and end

1 Why Theological Foundations? from: Foundational Theology
Abstract: This book endeavors to develop sound foundations for undertaking theological study and research. More precisely, we seek foundations for the doctrinal, systematic, and communicative work of theology—its normative phase, wherein the theologian is seeking to hand on the tradition in all its revealed authority and depth. This phase differs from theology’s historical or positive phase, wherein the theologian is seeking to recover from the past just what it is that has been revealed within that tradition. The book’s final chapter (chapter 10) explains how these two phases fit together in a comprehensive theological method. Prior to the emergence of

5 Psychic Conversion and the Question of Beauty from: Foundational Theology
Abstract: Thus far, we have considered religious, moral, and intellectual conversions and their foundational role in the life of the theologian seeking to be an authentic subject engaged in theological work. The question can arise as to whether this is an exhaustive account of the foundational theological subject. What other types of conversion might we consider? Previously we have mentioned our fundamental orientation to meaning, truth, and goodness. Goodness and values relate to moral conversion, while questions of meaning and truth relate to intellectual conversion. We have already seen how the presence and absence of these conversions may impact on the

7 Revelation and Divine Self-Communication from: Foundational Theology
Abstract: Since the era of Vatican II, it has become a commonplace to speak of revelation as an act of divine self-communication. This terminology, derived from the work of Karl Rahner and adopted by Pope John Paul II, seeks to express the fact that God does not simply communicate various “facts” about God’s life and his relationship to us; rather God communicates God’s very self to us.¹ God is both the communicator and what is communicated. As Scripture puts it, we have become sharers in the divine nature (2 Pet. 1:4). God communicates something of the divine nature to us in

9 The Communicative Context from: Foundational Theology
Abstract: In the previous chapter, we provided a heuristic anticipation of certain positions in relation to the church, its nature and mission. In this chapter, we move from those more abstract considerations to the present and more concrete context of the church’s mission and communication, in a world of growing secularism on the one hand, and increasing exposure to religious pluralism on the other, while still drawing on the foundations developed in the first part of our work. Let us begin then with an ending: Ite missa est. These words express the dismissal declared at the end of the Roman Catholic

Introduction from: Citizenship in Heaven and on Earth
Abstract: In order to get a sense of the multifaceted nature of Karl Barth’s ethics, one thing to do is to conjure up before the inner eye images that western societies commonly associate with a long interval of the twentieth century such as the years between 1932 and 1967. This was the time it took Barth to publish his multi-volume Church Dogmatics (CD),¹ which comprises both theology and ethics. Moreover, the various social, ecclesial and political contexts of his work are reflected in the fact that the critical edition of Barth’s works includes five volumes of individual smaller texts, written for

1 The Development of Barth’s Ethics from the First Epistle to the Romans to Church Dogmatics I/1 from: Citizenship in Heaven and on Earth
Abstract: The emphasis on sacrifice in Barth’s early work is part of a charged issue in the political contexts

3 The Ethics of the Doctrine of Creation in Church Dogmatics III/4 from: Citizenship in Heaven and on Earth
Abstract: The discussion of CDII/2, chapter 8 detected a significant contradiction between ethical actualism on the one hand and the priority of the gospel over the law or the doctrine of election on the other. The ensuing volumes ofCDIII deal with the doctrine of creation. The subvolume discussing the ethical aspects of the doctrine of creation,CDIII/4, discusses those ethical questions that arise with regard to God’s work as Creator. In part, Barth explicitly retains the actualistic concept of ethics, especially at the beginning. Yet at the same time, he engages in the discussion of empirical phenomena,

5 Perspectives: from: Citizenship in Heaven and on Earth
Abstract: After discussing Barth’s the ethical dimension of Barth’s works from RomI toCDIV, the task of this chapter is to look back, recall some of the main results, and feed them into a constructive effort to learn from Barth’s ethical reflections for today’s Christian ethics.

Introduction from: The Executed God
Abstract: To consider the executed God and the spiritual practices it entails will demand some important preparatory work. Christians have written a great deal on the notion of Jesus’ crucifixion and death. What new turn is taken when we emphasize today, as this book does, that Jesus’ death was an execution?

6. Building Peoples’ Movements - 2: from: The Executed God
Abstract: Building people’s movements amid and against Lockdown America also includes organizing against the U.S. death penalty, which at the federal and state levels assigns death as penalty for over 60 crimes.¹ Opposing it is surely no more important than the demilitarizing of policing in the U.S. or decarcerating the nation, which I have discussed in the previous chapter. Nevertheless, work against the death penalty is no mere add-on, some “extra-issue” to be raised. Instead, it is intrinsic, or ought to be, to our work against the carceral violence encountered in U.S. policing practice and mass incarceration, as well as in

4 Maximus the Confessor on the Foolishness of God and the Play of the Word from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Louth Andrew
Abstract: I have to begin by confessing that when asked to present something on St. Maximus the Confessor, I chose the title because I was very familiar with one passage in St. Maximus that relates the theme of the foolishness of God to the play of Wisdom, or strictly the Word—because I had included the passage in the works I had translated in a book on the Confessor—and rather imagined that I would find several parallel passages, if I looked, and could build up something on that basis.¹ It didn’t quite work out like that: Maximus quite rarely refers

5 Paul’s Refusal of Wisdom in Aquinas’s Commentary on 1 Corinthians: from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Eitel Adam
Abstract: Thomas Aquinas wrote on conventional topics in conventional genres in medieval faculties of theology. Well over half of his corpus comprises commentaries on Scripture, a commentary on Peter Lombard’s Sentences, and two pedagogically motivated revisions of its topics known as theSumma Against the Gentilesand theSumma of Theology(hereafterSumma).¹ Much else in his corpus consists in disputed questions on theological topics, sermons and liturgical works, and commentaries on books by Boethius and Dionysius.² Thomas also exposited many of the Aristotelian texts that were available in the thirteenth-century Latin West.³ Can he for that reason be called a

7 Luther’s Theologica Paradoxa in Erasmus and Cusanus from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Bader Günter
Abstract: Wisdom and foolishness intertwined—the theology of the cross—and consequently speeches in the form of theologica paradoxa, of paradoxical theology: these are all widely known as characteristics of Reformation theology, especially of the Lutheran style. Indeed, it was Luther who furnished this connection and put it under the rubric oftheologica paradoxa. But why look fortheologica paradoxain Erasmus and Cusanus if this rubric is distinctive to Luther? Despite the somewhat strange juxtaposition of these two authors with Luther, it is likely that neither of them would have put their work under a Lutheran heading. Therefore, this discussion

Book Title: Resisting history-Religious transcendence and the invention of the unconscious
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Hayward Rhodri
Abstract: How can historians make sense of visions, hauntings and demonic possession? Do miraculous events have any place in a world governed by cause and effect? In Resisting history, Rhodri Hayward examines the cumulative attempts of theologians, historians and psychologists to create a consistent and rational narrative capable of containing the inexplicable. This lucid and provocative account argues that the psychological theories we routinely use to make sense of supernatural experience were born out of struggles between popular mystics and conservative authorities. Hayward’s lively analysis of the Victorian disciplines of Christology, psychology and psychical research reveals how our modern concept of the subconscious was developed as a tool for policing religious inspiration. He concludes his argument with a vivid study of the Welsh Revival of 1904-5, in which the attempt of thousands of converts to cast off their everyday identity was diffused and defeated using the language of the new psychology. By revealing the politics inherent in such language, Hayward raises questions about its deployment in the work of today’s historians. Written in a clear and accessible style, Resisting history provides a fresh and entertaining perspective for anyone interested in questioning the concepts that underlie historical writing and psychological thought today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j66d

1 The invention of the self from: Resisting history
Abstract: There are moments when the pursuit of history can seem truly unnerving. Sometimes that past which was meant to ground our ideas and conceptions gives way and reveals something stranger, alien and uncanny. Although such episodes are rare events in most historians’ lives, they form a recurring motif in fantastic literature, where they are widely associated with the breakdown of identity and personality. Stories of historians driven to madness and despair when their narratives are confounded recur repeatedly in novels, from Mary Ward’s Robert Elsmereand the ghost stories of M. R. James to the works of modern authors such

2 The invention of the unconscious from: Resisting history
Abstract: The quest for the historical Jesus was not restricted to the universities or the established Churches. Across Britain and the United States, working-class radicals debated the historical basis of the Gospel records. Before George Eliot’s translation of the Leben Jesuappeared, plebeian secularists had issued cheap pirated editions of Strauss’s work. Their turn to historical enquiry was driven by a very different set of motives to those which animated Eliot and her ecclesiastical colleagues.¹ Some, including the Chartist ex-cobbler Thomas Cooper, believed that historical criticism would reveal the ‘legendary incrustations’ that had corrupted the true history of Christ.² Like Strauss

4 The self triumphant from: Resisting history
Abstract: ‘Wales’ read the headlines of the Liverpool Echoin January 1905, ‘[is] in the grip of supernatural forces’.¹ The country was in a state of millennial fervour. Across the principality the familiar pattern of religious life was rent asunder as women and workers were being driven into public ecstasies and seized by religious raptures. Chapels and communities were transformed. The familiar procedures of the Sunday meeting were abandoned for the marathon sessions of praise and prayer. Other papers reported how natural law seemed to have lost its jurisdiction across the Principality. The nation was riven by portents and omens, from

Book Title: Acceptable words-Essays on the poetry of Geoffrey Hill
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): WAINWRIGHT JEFFREY
Abstract: Geoffrey Hill has said that some great poetry 'recognises that words fail us'. These essays explore Hill's struggle over fifty years with the recalcitrance of language. This book seeks to show how all his work is marked by the quest for the right pitch of utterance whether it is sorrowing, angry, satiric or erotic. It shows how Hill's words are never lightly 'acceptable' but an ethical act, how he seeks out words he can stand by - words that are 'getting it right'. This book is the most comprehensive and up-to-date critical work on Geoffrey Hill so far, covering all his work up to ‘Scenes from Comus’ (2005), as well as some poems yet to appear in book form. It aims to contribute something to the understanding of his poetry among those who have followed it for many years and students and other readers encountering this major poet for the first time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j67x

3 Poet, lover, liar: from: Acceptable words
Abstract: Robert Southwell (1561–95), Catholic martyr and poet from whose work Geoffrey Hill takes his epigraph for his 1975 sonnet sequence ‘Lachrimae or Seven tears figured in seven passionate Pavans’ ( Tenebrae, 1978;CPpp. 145–51) wrote in his posthumous workSt Peter’s Complaint(1595) of what he saw as his contemporaries’ abuse of their poetic talents: ‘a poet, a lover and a liar are by many reckoned but three things with one signification’. That the identification of poetry and feigning was nearly a commonplace in Elizabethan literary culture might be gauged by its reiteration by the rather less spiritually

6 History as poetry: from: Acceptable words
Abstract: The epigraph Geoffrey Hill uses for the first poem in his sequence ‘Churchill’s Funeral’ is from Edward Elgar’s note on the ‘Cockaigne’ overture and contains the phrase ‘knowing well the history’. It is apparent that Hill’s poetry has always known history very well indeed. Historical figures and events have featured substantially from the beginning: ‘Knowing the dead, and how some are disposed’ (‘Two Formal Elegies’, For the Unfallen, 1959;CPpp. 30–1). Elegy, Requiem, ‘In Memory’, ‘The Death of’, ‘Ode on the Loss of’, ‘Funeral Music’ appear in titles of the earlier work to announce a compulsion towards commemoration

10 ‘In wintry solstice like the shorten’d light’: from: Acceptable words
Abstract: This is the first stanza of John Milton’s ‘The Passion’, a poem he probably began and abandoned in 1630 ( Complete Shorter Poemsp. 119).¹ The penultimate line, as ‘In Wintry solstice like the shorten’d light’, recurs in Geoffrey Hill’sScenes from Comus, including in the very last lines of the work. The whole three-part sequence is timed close to this solstice, poised on the edge of ‘dark and long out-living night’: ‘over your / left shoulder or mine | absolute night comes / high-stalking after us’ (2.80).² Milton’s lines also point to another major preoccupation of Hill’s poem, music. As

3 Mimesis in black and white: from: The new aestheticism
Author(s) Ziarek Ewa Plonowska
Abstract: As Sarah Worth suggests, despite well-established feminist work in literary criticism, film theory and art history, feminist aesthetics ‘is a relatively young discipline, dating from the early 1990s’, and thus still open to contestation and new formulations.¹ In this context it might seem paradoxical that one of the founding texts of feminist aesthetics, Rita Felski’s Beyond Feminist Aesthetics: Feminist Literature and Social Change, proclaims its impossibility. Felski concludes that ‘no convincing case has yet been made for a gendered aesthetics’ because there are ‘no legitimate grounds for classifying any particular style of writing as uniquely or specifically feminine’.² Felski associates

5 Touching art: from: The new aestheticism
Author(s) Malpas Simon
Abstract: Throughout the history of literary and art criticism the focus has fallen, as Jean-Luc Nancy argues, on the creation or reception of works and texts. Theories of genius, authorial psychology and the material or historical conditions of production have revalued the creative processes that give rise to art in a range of different ways. Equally, important questions about reception that deal with notions of canonicity, ideology and the construction of subjectivities in texts have been generated by critical movements that seek to investigate the politics of literature, art and culture. Stripped down to a minimal point, however, the question of

10 Melancholy as form: from: The new aestheticism
Author(s) Bernstein Jay
Abstract: We can date the end of the novel precisely: the last novel ever written was Flaubert’s Sentimental Education, published in 1869. It is sometimes said that Flaubert’s work inaugurates the waning of theBildungsromanand the inauguration of the novel of disillusionment. But that says too little. Can there be aromanwithout theBildung?The unifying biographical form of the classical novel, paralleling the ambitions and trajectory of secularising modernity, chartered the formation, education, quest and achievement of identity and worldliness of its bourgeois heroes and heroines. What was previously narrative and adventure becomes in Flaubert a stutter, every

11 Kant and the ends of criticism from: The new aestheticism
Author(s) Banham Gary
Abstract: Since the beginning of the 1990s there has been a marked revival of interest in both Kant and aesthetics.¹ This revival has been accompanied with a move beyond the theoretical positions that sought to displace the notion of aesthetics and often requires a rethinking of the relationship between criticism and philosophy. I wish to present here an account of Kant’s ‘invention’ of aesthetics that allows its terms to become both operative within and yet also transformed by the practice of critical engagement with literary and visual works of art. It is important to mention however that the context for this

Series editors’ foreword from: Douglas Coupland
Author(s) Monteith Sharon
Abstract: This innovative series reflects the breadth and diversity of writing over the last thirty years, and provides critical evaluations of established, emerging and critically neglected writers – mixing the canonical with the unexpected. It explores notions of the contemporary and analyses current and developing modes of representation with a focus on individual writers and their work. The series seeks to reflect both the growing body of academic research in the field, and the increasing prevalence of contemporary American and Canadian fiction on programmes of study in institutions of higher education around the world.囎Central to the series is a concern that each

2 ‘Denarration’ or getting a life: from: Douglas Coupland
Abstract: How might a novelist represent contemporary, globalized reality if that world and its citizens have become plotless? The phenomenon of ‘denarration’ described in Coupland’s ‘Brentwood Notebook’ (1994) – a collage-report of a single day in this blandly affluent LA suburb, a putative ‘secular nirvana’ – thematizes the author’s ongoing concern with the failure of old stories to adequately explain, or render meaningful, the complexities of living in a new era ( PD,p. 148). This embryonic trend named by a writer from Canada’s west coast, much of whose early work focuses on the odd textures of 1990s Californian experience, echoes observations made twenty

3 ‘I am not a target market’: from: Douglas Coupland
Abstract: Douglas Coupland is captivated by rubbish, its possible uses and its plural connotations. Motifs of household garbage, environmental pollution and technological junk are everywhere in his fiction and visual art – the substance of his work is frequently constructed from broken things, forgotten concepts, obsolete inventions and the many ‘time-expired’, disposable items that we routinely ditch. In his ‘Canada House’ exhibition (2003; 2004–5), for example, a number of sculptures incorporate salvaged odds and ends – discarded tin cans, plastic bottles, food packaging, shreds of clothing, broken buoys and the assorted, shop-worn treasures of the tenacious beachcomber – all of which are redeployed

4 Nowhere, anywhere, somewhere: from: Douglas Coupland
Abstract: Souvenir of Canada,Coupland’s first explicit reading of the national consciousness, begins with an aerial vision of the country’s unpopulated, wild northern lands. Gazing at the enigmatic landscape, the writer lists places that, apart from the colonial act of naming, appear to be untainted by human intervention (‘Hudson Bay and the Ungava Peninsula, Ellesmere Island, Baffin Island’) and starts the work of rethinking his own relationship with geography. Cocooned in the memory of one or many aeroplane cabins – an interchangeable tourist space emblematic of modernity’s uninhibited penchant for constant motion – Coupland attempts to connect the knowable and malleable (sub)urban reality

Book Title: Conrad's Marlow-Narrative and death in 'Youth', Heart of Darkness, Lord Jim and Chance
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Wake Paul
Abstract: Variously described as ‘the average pilgrim’, a ‘wanderer’, and ‘a Buddha preaching in European clothes’, Charlie Marlow is the voice behind Joseph Conrad’s ‘Youth’ (1898), Heart of Darkness (1899), Lord Jim (1900) and Chance (1912). Conrad’s Marlow offers a comprehensive account and critical analysis of one of Conrad’s most celebrated creations, asking both who and what is Marlow: a character or a narrator, a biographer or an autobiographical screen, a messenger or an interpreter, a bearer of truth or a misguided liar? Reading Conrad’s fiction alongside the work of Walter Benjamin, Maurice Blanchot, Jacques Derrida and Martin Heidegger, and offering an investigation into the connection between narrative and death, this book argues that Marlow’s essence is located in his liminality – in his constantly shifting position – and that the emergence of meaning in his stories is at all points bound up with the process of his storytelling.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j9p3

4 Chance and the truth of literature from: Conrad's Marlow
Abstract: Conrad’s conception of the artist’s work as an act of ‘translation’ in which the writer wrestles with words ‘worn thin, defaced by ages of careless usage’ evinces a similar concern to that of the Russian formalists who set literature the task of responding to the ‘habituation’ of perception and an everyday language that, through its very overuse, ‘devours works, clothes, furniture, one’s wife, and the fear of war’.¹ In his attempts to ‘appeal to the senses’, which are close to the formalist notion of defamiliarization, Conrad repeatedly allies the processes of reading with the processes of perception – making the

CHAPTER 4 Graceful subjectivities from: The subject of love
Abstract: The themes of giving and receiving that underpin so much of Cixous’ analysis of the difference that sexual difference makes in ‘Sorties’ are continued and developed in ‘Grace and Innocence’. However, it is the spirit in which she ended ‘Sorties’, with a disquisition on what we might think of as ‘divine love’, which provides the framework for her new inquiry in ‘Grace and Innocence’. Her earlier reflections on love opened onto a new way of thinking about divinity in the light of her developing understanding of a feminine economy of desire. What is at stake continues to be a reconfiguration

CHAPTER 5 Divine Promethean love from: The subject of love
Abstract: Through the engagement with the work of Heinrich von Kleist and Clarice Lispector, in the analysis of Cixous’ ‘Grace and Innocence’ in the previous chapter, we can see how she can be understood to be reorienting the epistemological concerns of the Biblical story of the Fall through which the text is framed. In so doing, she reframes the way we might think about the notions of both grace and innocence particularly as they bear on the issue of the relationship between subjectivity and knowledge. The Fall, as such, is no longer simply meaningful in the brute dichotomy of knowledge versus

2 Adorno as educator from: The structure of modern cultural theory
Abstract: At one stage of his life he signed his work with the surname Rottweiler. This seems an appropriate indicator of the stringent, even fearsome tone of some of his writings. English-speaking readers can usefully start on Adorno by consulting the essays translated in a volume, edited by J.M. Bernstein, entitled The Culture Industry.¹ These are for the most

3 Foucault and the ethics of subjectivity from: The structure of modern cultural theory
Abstract: Michel Foucault wrote next to nothing specifically about the concept of culture, did not publish too much about art and barely addressed in a direct way the specific issue of creativity. He is sometimes assumed to be a postmodernist, and something of a pessimistic one. This chapter will argue that, to the contrary, Foucault was a modernist and that his work, especially in its late period, was saturated with the question of aesthetics – and, for that matter, with that of creativity – which, for him, was part of a bigger question than the issue of the socalled status of ‘ art’

4 Bourdieu, ethics and reflexivity from: The structure of modern cultural theory
Abstract: Pierre Bourdieu was a contrarian and sociologist, perhaps in that order. As with Adorno and Foucault, he can be claimed, also, for a further intellectual lineage – that of ethical reflection as opposed to just negatively critical, denunciatory sociology. This does not just mean that Bourdieu was right-minded and ‘ethical’ in the sense of being moral (whatever one might mean by this). It means that his work is addressed as much to issues of the self, and especially to our reflexivity and autonomy, as to just epistemic issues of positive ‘knowledge’ and denunciatory critique. In fact, the – again, ultimately ethical – issues

1 Modern philosophy and the emergence of aesthetic theory: from: Aesthetics and subjectivity
Abstract: The importance attributed to aesthetic questions in recent philosophy becomes easier to grasp if one considers the reasons for the emergence of modern aesthetic theory. Kant’s main work on aesthetics, the ‘third Critique’, the Critique of Judgement(CJ) (1790), forms part of his response to unresolved questions which emerge from hisCritique of Pure Reason(CPR) (1781) andCritique of Practical Reason(1787).¹ In order to understand the significance of theCJone needs therefore to begin by looking at the first two Kantian Critiques.² The essential problem they entail, which formed the focus of reactions to Kant’s work at

5 Hegel: from: Aesthetics and subjectivity
Abstract: Hegel’s work has come in recent years to exemplify many of the choices facing contemporary philosophy. The changed status of Hegel can, though, seem rather odd, given the labyrinthine nature of his texts, the huge divergences between his interpreters from his own time until today, and the fact that some of the philosophers who now invoke him come from an analytical tradition noted for its insistence on a clarity not always encountered in Hegel himself. Even contemporary interpreters range between those who still pursue his grand aims by trying to show how he offers a systematic answer to the major

6 Schleiermacher: from: Aesthetics and subjectivity
Abstract: The recent growth of interest in German Idealist and Romantic philosophy has tended to focus on Fichte and Hegel, and, to a lesser extent, on Schelling. However, given the philosophical motivation for the new attention to the thought of this period, it is actually rather strange that its main focus has not been the work of F.D.E. Schleiermacher (1768–1834). The contingent reasons for the neglect of Schleiermacher are, admittedly, quite simple. Schleiermacher’s theological work, as the major Protestant theologian of the nineteenth century, has largely determined his reputation, and he did not produce de fi nitive versions of his

5 Healing the scar? from: Britain and Africa Under Blair
Abstract: This chapter examines what Africa means to actors clustered around the state: MPs, officials and those working with them during the Blair era. I start out with some basic questions: How is British policy in Africa different from policy in other parts of the world? Why does Britain engage in it? What do the actors involved get out of it? Public sources gave clues: speeches, papers and initiatives from the government, and MPs directly interested or engaged in work in Africa suggested a number of themes which were pursued in interviews.

6 Idealisation in Africa from: Britain and Africa Under Blair
Abstract: I have suggested that being close to the good seems to mean extending out into a far away place where it is possible to draw an idealised picture of yourself. From Britain, the work in Africa looks very clearly good, along the lines I have drawn – it is disinterested, grand, unifying and differentiating. But if the work in Africa is to have lasting currency in these terms – if it is to continue to enable self-idealisation – there must be something about the way Britain engages in Africa that allows this idea to persist, and the ideal to remain

Book Title: Shakespeare and Spenser-Attractive opposites
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): LETHBRIDGE J. B.
Abstract: "Shakespeare and Spenser: Attractive Opposites" is a much-needed volume that brings together ten original papers by the experts, on the relations between Spenser and Shakespeare. There has been much noteworthy work on the linguistic borrowings of Shakespeare from Spenser, but the subject has never before been treated systematically, and the linguistic borrowings lead to broader-scale borrowings and influences which are treated here. An additional feature of the book is that for the first time a large bibliography of previous work is offered which will be of the greatest help to those who follow up the opportunities offered by this collection. "Shakespeare and Spenser: Attractive Opposites" presents new approaches, heralding a resurgence of interest in the relations between two of the greatest Renaissance English poets to a wider scholarly group and in a more systematic manner than before. This will be of interest to Students and academics interested in Renaissance literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jd1q

Beyond Binarism: from: Shakespeare and Spenser
Author(s) Anderson Judith H.
Abstract: Shakespeare’s Antony and Cleopatra, like his earlierVenus and Adonis, is known to be generically mixed and even anomalous in the extent and degree to which it combines tragedy, comedy, and romance with lyric, allegory, myth, and history.¹ This is the first of several analogies I would draw between Shakespeare’s play and Spenser’sFaerie Queene, that hobgoblin’s garland of epic, romance, lyric, allegory, myth, history, and more. The breaking of formal conventions beyond their generic variousness also connects these works. In Ania Loomba’s view, for example, the non-teleological form ofAntony and Cleopatraresists closure, and in Margot Heinemann’s, this

Fusion: from: Shakespeare and Spenser
Author(s) Oldrieve Susan
Abstract: Judith Anderson has said of King Learthat ‘to keep insisting that the playKing Lear. . . is not really, vitally allegorical at its core is effectually to cut it off both from its richest contemporary analogue,The Faerie Queene, and from the insight of the best recent work on the nature of allegory itself ’.¹ In his introduction toKing LearinThe Norton Shakespeare, Greenblatt acknowledges that ‘It is possible to detect inKing Learone of the great structural rhythms of Christianity: a passage through suffering, humiliation, and pain to a transcendent wisdom and love’²

Book Title: Time and world politics-Thinking the present
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Hutchings Kimberly
Abstract: This book offers the first authoritative guide to assumptions about time in theories of contemporary world politics. It demonstrates how predominant theories of the international or global ‘present’ are affected by temporal assumptions, grounded in western political thought, that fundamentally shape what we can and cannot know about world politics today. The first part of the book traces the philosophical roots of assumptions about time in contemporary political theory. The second part examines contemporary theories of world politics, including liberal and realist International Relations theories and the work of Habermas, Hardt and Negri, Virilio and Agamben. In each case, it is argued, assumptions about political time ensure the identification of the particular temporality of western experience with the political temporality of the world as such and put the theorist in the unsustainable position of holding the key to the direction of world history. In the final chapter, the book draws on postcolonial and feminist thinking, and the philosophical accounts of political time in the work of Derrida and Deleuze, to develop a new ‘untimely’ way of thinking about time in world politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jdgf

5 Time for democracy from: Time and world politics
Abstract: IN the previous chapter I argued that ‘scientific’ attempts to diagnose the post-1989 times of world politics, in spite of their explicit rejection of historicism, nevertheless depended on kairoticmeta-narratives of political temporality. The familiar ghost of philosophical history, in which the scholar’s task is both to identify the ‘real’ mechanisms underlying historical development and to intervene, or enable intervention, positively in relation to time – to workwithoragainsttime – continued to be present. One of the reasons why post-Popperian social science ostensibly rejected historicism was because it was argued that historicism was normatively driven and incapable

6 Apocalyptic times from: Time and world politics
Abstract: CHAPTERS 4 and 5 explored assumptions about the temporality of world politics at work in different bodies of literature, seeking to explain, understand and prescribe for the presenttimes of world politics in the late twentieth and early twenty-first centuries. In all cases, it was clear that predominant voices in the social science of international politics, in post-Kantian theories of cosmopolitan democracy and in post-Marxist accounts of ‘empire’ and ‘multitude’ relied upon accounts of the relation betweenchronosandkairosthat echoed arguments previously encountered in Chapter 2. Rejecting Fukuyama and Huntington, and following Popper, International Relations scholars, both liberal

3 Motherhood and history from: Mothers and meaning on the early modern English stage
Abstract: Jean Howard and Phyllis Rackin, who have worked so extensively on Shakespeare’s history plays, note that they contain ‘relatively few and often sketchy’ images of women and their comment is applicable to Elizabethan history plays in general.² Those who are represented in such plays, and, indeed, their sources, referred to by A. P. Rossiter as ‘that long line of women broken in the course of great events’, are mostly mothers.³ The typological link between mother and state discussed in previous chapters meant that motherhood developed importance as a trope by which the dramatisation of political conflict acquired validity and complexity.

Introduction: from: Contemporary Violence
Abstract: This introductory chapter seeks to identify the key theoretical literature in International Relations (IR) which can be used to explore contemporary violence. Albeit in an exploratory fashion, this chapter will touch upon the work of scholars concerned with meaning in IR. Equally, the chapter recognises the broad body of work on conflict and new wars.¹ This work illustrates how paramilitaries, international aid groups, human rights organisations, transnational media-corporations, militias and inter-governmental organisations are all involved in contemporary war. Drawing on this premise, this book argues that conventional theoretical accounts of war in IR are no longer adequate – if indeed

3 Regional politics, trans-local identity and history from: Contemporary Violence
Abstract: This chapter introduces some background themes which influence the networks, groups and affiliations, and latterly distinctive armed resistance movements, in the Balkans and the Caucasus in the mid-1990s. In both cases the armed resistance movements emerged against the backdrop of the disintegration of the USSR and Socialist Yugoslavia, but the provenance of each movement needs to be located in a broader frame of late nineteenth- and twentieth-century history. The armed resistance movements became involved in low-level conflicts in Kosovo and Chechnya, and more generally in the neighbouring regions and environs. A number of revolts and insurrections were repeated in the

5 Stories of war in the Balkans and Caucasus from: Contemporary Violence
Abstract: A substantial amount of theoretical literature now exists in both International Relations and political theory which explores how culture impacts upon violence. As yet, however, this body of literature has not been applied fully to analyse the move to war in either Kosovo or Chechnya.¹ Aside from exploring the cultural construction of an enemy – enemification – and locating this within a broader body of work on colonialism and post-colonialism, this chapter argues that stories play an important role straddling the divide between culture and politics. In many ways stories interpenetrate these two realms – aided, as mentioned in Chapter

6 Criminality and war from: Contemporary Violence
Abstract: So far this book has focused on a range of issues related to narrative and interpretive IR, as ways into analysing contemporary violence. In doing so, attention has been drawn to different levels of analysis, the role of history in the Caucasus and Balkans, and different social, cultural and local forms of identification. In both Kosovo and Chechnya we see contract soldiers, special police units and federal army units fighting against armed resistance movements. The armed resistance movements were, however, made up of a multiplicity of groups and networks, and this, alongside the role of NATO, the UN and other

8 Networks and narratives: from: Contemporary Violence
Abstract: The task of this chapter is to map the road to war in the Balkans and Caucasus. In order to do this the chapter is broken down into three constituent parts. Building on the last chapter, the analysis engages with localised social networks which informed the armed resistance movements in Kosovo and Chechnya. Firstly we turn to the battle of Gudermes in Chechnya in 1998, and the incursion into Dagestan in 1999. This demonstrates how the former nationalist-separatist movement fragmented in a number of ways, becoming reconstituted around a broader anti-Russian regional narrative. The chapter then turns to explore the

3 Those with whom the archive dwells from: The arc and the machine
Abstract: Chapter 2 of this book set out to consider the terms of a culture’s contemporary engagement with networked new media; to ask how we plug in, and to what. I argued that the engagement between humans and machines within the social totality constitutes the human–machine interface, understood in its broadest terms. Interacting with machines, at whatever scale, is therefore, and inescapably, a historically located social process as well as a technical reality. This position has implications for how contemporary interfaces are understood and investigated, not least because, viewed in this way, interactions across the human–machine interface can never

4 Annihilating all that’s made? from: The arc and the machine
Abstract: ‘This is not an image space’, but as I type these few words, describing a virtual community and its transformation, appear on my screen. I view them as an image as well as read them as a text. This textual visual display thus seems to confirm and confound the assertion it articulates. Clearly any claim that cyberspace, the interactive world that appears on the screen but that also reaches behind it to other screens in other places through a network staggering in scale and astonishing in

Book Title: A.S. Byatt-Critical storytelling
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): de Campos Amy J. Edwards
Abstract: This comprehensive study of A. S. Byatt’s work spans virtually her entire career and offers insightful readings of all of Byatt’s works of fiction up to and including her Man-Booker-shortlisted novel The Children’s Book (2009). The authors combine an accessible overview of Byatt’s œuvre to date with close critical analysis of all her major works. Uniquely, the book also considers Byatt’s critical writings and journalism, situating her beyond the immediate context of her fiction. The authors argue that Byatt is not only important as a storyteller, but also as an eminent critic and public intellectual. Advancing the concept of ‘critical storytelling’ as a hallmark of Byatt’s project as a writer, the authors retrace Byatt’s wide-ranging engagement with both literary and critical traditions. This results in positioning Byatt in the wider literary landscape. This book has broad appeal, including fellow researchers, undergraduate and postgraduate students, plus general enthusiasts of Byatt’s work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jh0n

2 Fathers, sisters and the anxiety of influence: from: A.S. Byatt
Abstract: To latter-day readers and critics, the early works of any established writer undoubtedly hold a special kind of attraction. Do their first forays into fiction ‘reveal’, as Kuno Schuhmann (2001: 75) puts it, ‘a personality that may be more carefully hidden in later texts? Does the first shaping of themes throw additional light on the later novels?’ In relation to A. S. Byatt’s early work, Kathleen Coyne Kelly (1996: 14), in her monograph on the author, provides at least a partial answer to these questions when she remarks that ‘[w]hile Byatt’s art has certainly matured over the past thirty years,

5 Tradition and transformation: from: A.S. Byatt
Abstract: Possession: A Romancecame as a surprise to many of Byatt’s longstanding readers and critics when it was published in 1990 and won the Booker Prize that same year. Those who had expected another meditative study of life in 1950s Yorkshire were either bemused or delighted to discover that a strange and colourful new hybrid – part contemporary campus comedy, part historical romance, part literary detective story – had been added to Byatt’s oeuvre. By 1990, Byatt had gained a reputation as a traditional, academically minded novelist, whose work embodied a Leavisite vision of English culture and Arnoldian standards of ‘high seriousness’.

7 Critical storytelling: from: A.S. Byatt
Abstract: Throughout her writing career, A. S. Byatt’s fictional output has been matched, in both scope and in volume, by her work as a literary and cultural commentator. Indeed, Byatt has embraced the full spectrum of contemporary critical activities, from the scholarly editions, monographs and essays one might expect of a former university lecturer, through an impressive amount of reviews and commentary in newspapers and journals, to participating in television and radio debates and ad-hoc literary discussions at festivals and live events. Assuming the role not of reclusive writer but of public intellectual, A. S. Byatt has never disappeared neatly under

3 INVENTION AND NARRATIVE from: Rhetoric and the Writing of History, 400-1500
Abstract: The categorisation of classical rhetoric into its demonstrative, judicial and deliberative forms reveals significant differences in emphasis, but also significant similarities in approach, in the way in which the relationship between an individual’s character ( mores) and deeds (res gestae) could, and should, be described by a speaker or writer. The principles which these three categories of rhetoric shared as common ground, however, exerted an impact on medieval historiography that went well beyond engineering the specific didactic, legal or political goals of particular works of history. This influence can be gauged by means of the two standard schemes according to which

CONCLUSION from: Rhetoric and the Writing of History, 400-1500
Abstract: Medieval historiography was neither crude nor credulous nor conceptually unsophisticated. Such characterisations would be no more, and no less, applicable to the writing of history in the early modern and modern periods and, if only on this basis, medieval historians deserve better than to suffer the methodological condescension of posterity. The present study has been designed accordingly as an introduction to a set of interpretative criteria on which works of medieval historiography might be assessed, primarily through examining principles of classical rhetoric which would have been second-nature to writers who had been brought up, directly or indirectly, on the precepts

Introduction from: Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) WORTON MICHAEL
Abstract: The 1990s proved to be an exciting period for women’s writing in France. It was a decade in which publishers and the media celebrated a ‘new generation’ of writers, and writing produced by women assumed its place at the forefront of what is new – and sometimes controversial – on the French literary scene. Paperback publishers J’ai lu and Pocket both launched new series ( Nouvelle générationandNouvelles voixrespectively) devoted to new names, among them many new women authors. Thus, a wide-ranging readership was introduced to the work of writers such as Christine Angot, Virginie Despentes, Linda Lê and Lorette Nobécourt

2 Evermore or nevermore? from: Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) Smith Aine
Abstract: The body of writing produced by Marie Redonnet between 1985 and 2000 is an unusually coherent one. Settings and characters drawn up in one text are echoed in later works; certain stories and motifs figure again and again; the style of writing rarely changes from one text to the next. This is not to suggest, however, that the work does not evolve over the period. Indeed, while there is a large degree of overlap between the works published in the 1980s and more recent texts, there are also significant differences, of which the most obvious is increased realism in characterisation

3 The female vampire: from: Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) ROBSON KATHRYN
Abstract: Julia Kristeva opens her text, Soleil noir: dépression et mélancolie, with the claim that ‘Ecrire sur la mélancolie n’aurait de sens, pour ceux que la mélancolie ravage, que si l’écrit même venait de la mélancolie’ (‘For those who are racked by melancholia, writing about it would have meaning only if writing sprang out of that very melancholia’).¹ This chapter explores the possibility of writing ‘de la mélancolie’ through focusing on the work of Chantal Chawaf, whose writing may be described as ‘melancholicautofiction’, melancholic autobiographical fiction. We know from interviews and publicity notices accompanying Chawaf’s texts that she was born

9 The articulation of beur female identity in the works of Farida Belghoul, Ferrudja Kessas and Soraya Nini from: Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) MCILVANNEY SIOBHÁN
Abstract: In view of the relatively recent literary success of works by secondgeneration Maghrebis born and brought up in France and the self-designatory origins of the term beur,¹ this chapter examines the work of three beur women writers in order to establish the extent to which the highly specific socio-historical locus of thebeurwriter, when combined with her female subject position, may produce narrative similarities, whether formal or thematic.Beurliterature only began to enjoy commercial success in the early 1980s, when a substantial number of the children of North African immigrants first reached adulthood. The designationbeuris considered

14 The subversion of the gaze: from: Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) MAJUMDAR MARGARET A.
Abstract: Of mixed Franco-Algerian parentage, Leïla Sebbar spans a variety of genres in her writing, including short stories, journalism, essays, children’s writing and contributions to collaborative works, including collections of visual material. She also has a number of major novels to her credit. In its thematic content, Sebbar’s work straddles the Mediterranean, focusing attention on the dynamics between the generations. She is not engaged in any mission of nostalgia for lost youth, however. Her writing is resolutely orientated towards the youth of today. This focus is evident not only in her characters, but also in the young audience that she targets.

15 Unnatural women and uncomfortable readers? from: Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) WORTON MICHAEL
Abstract: Escalle was born in 1958 in Fez, Morocco, where she lived for many years. When she came to France, it was to join the Théâtre-Laboratoire and work withLudwik

Conclusion from: Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) WORTON MICHAEL
Abstract: One of the major features of this book is its focus on various aspects of the subject and identity as they are conceived and represented in contemporary women’s writing in France. The contributors to this volume have overwhelmingly read the works of our chosen writers as tales of, quests for, explorations of, and crises in the self. It should be noted that this self is actually plural and that the selves in question are not necessarily those of the writers (either within or outside the text). Rather, as fictions, they exemplify the kaleidoscopic proliferation of selves that we are as

Book Title: Jonathan Lethem- Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Peacock James
Abstract: Jonathan Lethem is the first full-length study dedicated to the work of an exciting, genre-busting contemporary writer with an increasingly high profile in American literature. Examining all of Lethem’s novels, as well as a number of his short fictions, essays and critical works, this study shows how the author’s prolific output, his restlessness and his desire always to be subverting literary forms and genres, are consistent with his interest in subcultural identities. The human need to break off into small groupings, subcultures or miniature utopias is mirrored in the critical tendency to enforce generic boundaries. To break down the boundaries between genres, then, is partly to make a nonsense of critical distinctions between 'high' and 'low' literature, and partly to reflect the wider need to recognise difference, to appreciate that other people, no matter how outlandish and alien they may appear, share similar desires, experiences and problems. With this in mind, James Peacock argues that Lethem’s experiments with genre are not merely games or elaborate literary jokes, but ethical necessities, particularly when viewed in the light of the losses and traumas that shadow all of his writing. Jonathan Lethem, therefore, makes an important contribution not just to Lethem studies, but also to debates about genre and its position in postmodern or 'post-postmodern' literature. It will be of interest to all scholars and students of contemporary American writing, as well as those interested in genre fiction and literature’s relationship with subcultures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jht2

Series editorsʹ foreword from: Jonathan Lethem
Author(s) Monteith Sharon
Abstract: This innovative series reflects the breadth and diversity of writing over the last thirty years, and provides critical evaluations of established, emerging and critically neglected writers - mixing the canonical with the unexpected. It explores notions of the contemporary and analyses current and developing modes of representation with a focus on individual writers and their work. The series seeks to reflect both the growing body of academic research in the field, and the increasing prevalence of contemporary American and Canadian fiction on programmes of study in institutions of higher education around the world. Central to the series is a concern

3 Alice in the academy: from: Jonathan Lethem
Abstract: As these words are written, Humanities scholars across the United Kingdom are engaged in urgent dialogues about the forthcoming Research Excellence Framework, or REF. Chief amongst their concerns is the increased emphasis on ‘impact’ outside the academy. According to the Higher Education Funding Council for England, ‘significant additional recognition will be given where researchers build on excellent research to deliver demonstrable benefits to the economy, society, public policy, culture and quality of life’ (2009).¹ While it is easy to conceive of the impact medical research or stem cell research or structural engineering research might have, it is perhaps harder to

4 Far away, so close: from: Jonathan Lethem
Abstract: So far it has been argued that there is a high degree of correspondence between form and content in Lethem’s work, and that the genre decisions he makes are integral to his view of the world as a series of semi-imagined subcultural groupings or, to reprise Rick Altman’s term, ‘constellated communities’(Altman, 1999: 161). In the eccentric family unit formed at the end ofAmnesia Moonand in Alice Coombs’ parallel campus world, one sees a yearning for workable mini-utopias congruent with the implicit (and sometimes explicit) ties formed between readers of genre fiction. Genres reflect, initiate and are complex

5 ʹWe learned to tell our story walkingʹ: from: Jonathan Lethem
Abstract: In interview, Jonathan Lethem has repeatedly evoked the idea of ‘dreaming his way back’ to the borough of his birth. His tendency to divide his time between Brooklyn and other places such as Toronto or Maine he explains like this: ‘Dreaming my way back to Brooklyn seems to be a necessary part of loving it for me – continuing to also love it from afar’ (Birnbaum, 2004). Elsewhere, in ‘Patchwork Planet: Notes for a Prehistory of the Gentrification of Gowanus’, he remarks: ‘In the neighborhood of Gowanus, Boerum Hill, I’m forever a child’ (www.jonathanlethem.com). It is true that Lethem’s three

Conclusion from: Jonathan Lethem
Abstract: Anyone who has read ‘Five Fucks’, ‘Sleepy People’ (both 1996) or This Shape We’re Inmight find it surprising that Lethem claims to be an ‘extremely traditional writer’ (Personal Interview, 2009). He is ‘so devoted to the traditional means’ of ‘scenes and characters and dialogue and paragraph and plot’ and although he sometimes makes ‘intertextual jokes’, he believes there is nothing in his work to ‘threaten anyone short of the mandarins who just don’t want the Fantastic Four ever to be mentioned inside a novel’ (Personal Interview, 2009). Citing as a specific example the insertion of the ‘Liner Note’ into

3 St. Augustine from: Christian Theologies of Scripture
Author(s) Bright Pamela
Abstract: St. Augustine (354–430) was born in Thagaste (present-day Souq Ahras, Algeria), in the Roman province of Numidia, North Africa, of a non-Christian father, Patricius, and a Christian mother, Monica. Augustine became an adherent of Manichaeism in his teens, but gradually grew disillusioned by Manichee teaching. He left Carthage, where he had been teaching rhetoric, and sailed for Rome, where he was soon appointed rhetor at the imperial court in Milan. There he encountered translated works of Neo-Platonist philosophers and heard the sermons of Ambrose, the great bishop of Milan, who helped him to overcome his earlier prejudices against the

Introduction from: Jesus the Central Jew
Abstract: A vast literature has been and is now dedicated to the rediscovery of the historical Jesus. It is beyond the scope of this present attempt to do justice to more than a fraction of that literature. I must, therefore, start with an apology to all those scholars whose work is not specifically mentioned in this book. That is not a sign of nonappreciation but of the limitations of the author.

Form versus Function: from: Abiding Words
Author(s) Schuchard Bruce G.
Abstract: In 1985, Maarten Menken’s essay “The Quotation from Isa 40,3 in John 1,23”¹ signaled an important development in the direction of the work being done at the time to characterize the form of the explicit Old Testament citations in the Gospel of John.² Over a roughly ten-year time span, Menken continued to publish one after another article devoted to a focused treatment of each of the Gospel’s citations³ until, in 1996, his book Old Testament Quotations in the Fourth Gospel: Studies in Textual Formrepublished the revised sum of his previous work, adding to it an introduction, a conclusion, and

A Voice in the Wilderness: from: Abiding Words
Author(s) Myers Alicia D.
Abstract: After the work of George Kennedy, interest in the light that classical rhetoric can shed on the New Testament has boomed among certain interpreters.¹ While initially the majority of this work was limited to dissecting the arguments found in the Pauline Epistles, the rhetorical nature of the gospels is now also being acknowledged.² The Gospel of John, in particular, is ripe for rhetorical exploration with its numerous discourses and clear persuasive intent expressed in 20:30–31. Andrew Lincoln, Harold Attridge, and George Parsenios have noted a number of connections between John and juridical rhetoric while Jo-Ann Brant emphasizes the Gospel’s

Patriarchs and Prophets Remembered: from: Abiding Words
Author(s) Williams Catrin H.
Abstract: Over the past few decades the study of “John and Scripture” has been approached from a variety of perspectives and with a wide range of methodological tools. The textual form and function of the explicit quotations in John’s Gospel have, inevitably, received most attention to date, but a number of scholars are now venturing beyond the relative comfort zone of direct—and largely identifiable—quotations to explore the interpretative mechanisms at work within a narrative also saturated with a rich deposit of scriptural concepts and motifs. There is also a growing recognition that discussion of John’s engagement with the Scriptures

8 Extract from a Diary: from: Cairo Contested
Author(s) Ibrahim Kareem
Abstract: “This is unbelievable!” I said, astonished to see this beautiful building for the first time. Meanwhile he, a British expert who used to work in Historic Cairo, looked at me out of the corner of his eyes, somehow proud of the fact that he knew something about my city that I did not. I must admit that it was shocking for me to discover this highly refined building a few steps off al-Dab al-Ahmar Street, very close to the well-known Bab Zuwayla, the southern gate of Historic Cairo. Despite the fact that I have been through this area hundreds of

9 Of Demolitions and Donors: from: Cairo Contested
Author(s) Dorman W. J.
Abstract: The clearance provoked a small riot, suggesting Asef Bayat’s notion of “street politics,” with “passive networks” of solidarity connecting otherwise unrelated individuals being instantly

12 Economic Liberalization and Union Struggles in Cairo from: Cairo Contested
Author(s) Paczynska Agnieszka
Abstract: In mid-July 1998, labor activists distributed a leaflet among workers of the Iron and Steel Factory in Helwan, a sprawling industrial Cairo suburb that has long been the site of labor activism. The leaflet warned workers that the early retirement package that the government was offering would mean that their overall pension benefits would be lower than if they continued working until the usual retirement age. The leaflet appeared during a summer when the Egyptian government was trying once again to jump-start its slow-moving privatization plan, one of the central components of its structural adjustment program. The voluntary early retirement

Book Title: Tropical Apocalypse-Haiti and the Caribbean End Times
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Munro Martin
Abstract: The author begins by situating the question of the Caribbean apocalypse in relation to broader, global narratives of the apocalyptic present, notably Slavoj Žižek's Living in the End Times.Tracing the evolution of apocalyptic thought in Caribbean literature from Negritude up to the present, he notes the changes from the early work of Aimé Césaire; through an anti-apocalyptic period in which writers such as Frantz Fanon, Antonio Benítez-Rojo, Édouard Glissant, and Michael Dash have placed more emphasis on lived experience and the interrelatedness of cultures and societies; to a contemporary stage in which versions of the apocalyptic reappear in the work of David Scott and Mark Anderson.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15r3x8s

3 The Chimères and the Haitian Antihero from: Tropical Apocalypse
Abstract: Maximilien Laroche writes of an archetypal antihero figure in Haitian writing, whose function is to transform “an individual decline into a collective deliverance.” In Haitian literature, Laroche writes, “the hero makes himself a zombie amongst zombies in order to free the community. And it is by accepting his victimhood, by acknowledging it, that he denounces it, and thereby attacks the victimization to which he and his people are subject” (n.p.). Laroche’s theory of the Haitian antihero addresses patterns of victimization and self-sacrifice in Haitian literature—notably in classic works of fiction by Roumain, Alexis, and others. His idea however seems

1 Landscape Biographies: from: Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Renes Johannes
Abstract: As an essential part of human life worlds, landscapes have the potential to absorb something of people’s lives, works and thoughts. But landscapes also shape their own life histories on different timescales, imprinted by human existence, affecting personal lives and transcending individual human life cycles. This combination of reciprocity and distinctness creates a strong but complex intertwining of personhood and place – an intertwining which most people become aware of during their own lifetime. It comes as no surprise, therefore, that the ‘co-scripting’ of landscapes and people figures prominently in literature, autobiographies and academic research, as well as in our

3 Biographies of Biotopes from: Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Kolen Jan
Abstract: Even more so than the large urban networks of our time, the natural landscapes of the prehistoric past appear to have been anonymous entities, largely devoid of humans and lacking individual authorship. However, on closer inspection, even the most ‘anonymous’, ‘natural’ and ‘original’ of landscapes bears the imprint of human authorship and personal identity, not only in terms of past human presence and practices, but also in terms of aesthetic experiences, retrospective vision, scientific interpretation and naturalist engagement. For this reason, this chapter explores the possibilities of a biographical approach to places and landscapes that we conventionally experience as natural.

5 Authenticity, Artifice and the Druidical Temple of Avebury from: Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Pollard Joshua
Abstract: The prehistoric stone circle complex at Avebury on the Wiltshire chalkland of southern England is the largest of its kind in Europe (figure 5.1). A 420-metre-diameter earthwork encloses a ring of huge standing stones, which in turn encloses two other roughly circular configurations of megaliths with further stone settings at their centres. Radiating out to the south and west are linear avenues of megaliths that snake out across 3.5 kilometres of the surrounding chalk landscape to link the Avebury structures to other prehistoric earth and stone monuments. The henge earthwork and the stone settings all belong to the third millennium

15 Fatal Attraction from: Landscape Biographies
Author(s) van der Laarse Rob
Abstract: Landscape and heritage form a strong couple in European culture. Since the Renaissance landscapes have been perceived as ‘art’ and valuated by scenic qualities, represented in painting and reproduced through design and architecture. This connoisseurship is still a basic assumption of heritage conservation and tourism, working under the fetish of authenticity by singling out aesthetic styles and iconic periods. Although recent biographical approaches to historical landscapes have opposed this reductionism by stressing long-term development, the landscape/mindscape nexus can – in my view – not be grasped by the prevailing metaphor of an archaeological layering of time. Alternatively, a more dynamic

Book Title: Post-Holocaust France and the Jews, 1945-1955- Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Katz Steven T.
Abstract: With contributions from leading scholars, including Edward Kaplan, Susan Rubin Suleiman, and Jay Winter, the book establishes multiple connections between such different areas of concern as the running of orphanages, the establishment of new social and political organisations, the restoration of teaching and religious facilities, and the development of intellectual responses to the Holocaust. Comprehensive and informed, this volume will be invaluable to readers working in Jewish studies, modern and contemporary history, literary and cultural analysis, philosophy, sociology, and theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15r3xkf

8 Post-Holocaust French Writing: from: Post-Holocaust France and the Jews, 1945-1955
Author(s) CHAOUAT BRUNO
Abstract: Unsurprisingly, a period of latency, albeit a relatively short one, was needed before these works could appear.¹ Before turning to this corpus of texts published two years after the war, therefore, it is relevant to recall that in the early to mid-1940s,

11 René Cassin and the Alliance Israélite Universelle: from: Post-Holocaust France and the Jews, 1945-1955
Author(s) WINTER JAY
Abstract: This chapter contextualizes the claim that French Jews emerged from World War II with a sense of disenchantment with the republican tradition by presenting the opposite case, that of a man whose republican commitment was unshakable and indeed deepened by the war and the Shoah. René Cassin, jurist, international statesman, and one of the authors of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, never lost his faith in the republican project at home and abroad. From 1940 on, he worked to revitalize that tradition, not to discard or refashion it.¹

Book Title: Narrative Criminology-Understanding Stories of Crime
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Sandberg Sveinung
Abstract: The contributors uncover the narratives at the center of their essays through qualitative interviews, ethnographic fieldwork, and written archives, and they scrutinize narrative structure and meaning by analyzing genres, plots, metaphors, and other components of storytelling. In doing so, they reveal the cognitive, ideological, and institutional mechanisms by which narratives promote harmful action. Finally, they consider how offenders' narratives are linked to and emerge from those of conventional society or specific subcultures. Each chapter reveals important insights and elements for the development of a framework of narrative criminology as an important approach for understanding crime and criminal justice. An unprecedented and landmark collection, Narrative Criminologyopens the door for an exciting new field of study on the role of stories in motivating and legitimizing harm.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15r3xt2

FOREWORD: from: Narrative Criminology
Author(s) MARUNA SHADD
Abstract: The movement toward narrative criminology is radical in its insights and implications. As a genuine departure from and viable alternative to mainstream criminology, the work showcased in this remarkable collection is likely to create serious waves in criminology that will be unruly and difficult to contain.

3 Gendered Narratives of Self, Addiction, and Recovery among Women Methamphetamine Users from: Narrative Criminology
Author(s) GUNDERMAN MIKH V.
Abstract: Narrative criminology, with its ethnomethodological influences, has much in common with feminist theoretical frameworks that concern themselves with uncovering the constitutive nature of gendered practices, including speech (Butler 1990; Connell 2002; Stokoe 2006; West and Zimmerman 1987). If narratives provide us, as analysts, a window into how individuals “organize views of themselves, of others, and of their social worlds” (Orbuch 1997, 455), then a critical facet of narrative analysis involves investigating how “women are constructed or construct themselves” within them (Daly and Maher 1998, 4). Narratives impart essential messages about gender, with the structure, content, and usage of language emerging

Conclusion: from: The Secret Life of Stories
Abstract: In the spring of 2013, in the middle of a graduate seminar in which my students and I were working out many of the questions I have tried to pose here, suddenly a curious incident happened.

Book Title: A Godly Humanism-Clarifying the Hope That Lies Within
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): George Francis Cardinal
Abstract: For Francis Cardinal George, the Catholic Church is not a movement, built around ideas, but a communion, built around relationships. In A Godly Humanism, he shares his understanding of the Church in lively, compelling prose, presenting a way to understand and appreciate the relationships of God to human beings and of human beings to one another. These loving relationships are continually made present to us in and through the Church, from the time of Jesus' first disciples down to our own day. We are introduced to how the spiritual and intellectual life of Christians, aided in every generation by the Holy Spirit working through the Apostles and their successors, resist the danger of splitting apart from one another. Though they take different outward forms at different times, both wisdom and holiness are made possible for every Christian of every station of life. Sign-posting his conversation by the milestones of his own spiritual and intellectual journey, Cardinal George invites us to view the Church and her history in ways that go beyond the categories of politics - through which we find merely human initiative, contrivance, and adjustment - and rather to see the initiative as God's first and foremost. God is the non-stop giver, we are non-stop recipients of his gifts, and the recent popes, no less than the Father of the Church, have made every effort to make us aware of the graces - that is, of the unearned benefits - that God confers on us as Catholics, as Christians, as believers, and simply as human persons. Pope Francis, he reminds us, contrasts human planning with God's providence, and this book is at once an exposition of that providence and a personal response of gratitude for the way it has operated in one man's life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15zc91j

5 Book of Deuteronomy from: Restoring the Right Relationship
Abstract: The book of Deuteronomy is now generally linked by critical scholarship to the reform of king Josiah in the late seventh century BCE (cf 2 Kgs 22–23). It is thought the decline of Assyria provided ‘ deuteronomic reformers’ with an opportunity to promote the exclusive worship of Israel’s God via a policy of centralised worship in the Jerusalem temple and an accompanying reform of law. To enhance its authority the work was attributed to Moses, the great leader of hoary antiquity. According to Martin Noth, this reform became the prologue and interpretative key to Israel’s first major historical work

1 Book of Isaiah from: Restoring the Right Relationship
Abstract: Isaiah in chapters 40–55 thought to be the work of one or more

Chapter Two Spirited Conversations from: The Church in China
Author(s) Devaux Claudia
Abstract: ‘Li Madou? We know him from our math books!’ That was the enthusiastic response of my Chinese postgraduate students when I brought up the name of seventeenth-century Jesuit Matteo Ricci, remembered in China for his contributions to science and remembered in contemporary Christian circles for his passionate embrace of the Chinese culture, a model of what we refer to now as inculturation. We Westerners tend to forget that it was Matteo Ricci who translated the works of Confucius into Latin and thereby contributed indirectly to the development of Enlightenment thinking, whereas the Chinese do not forget that he translated Euclid

Thy Kingdom Come: from: From North to South
Author(s) Gibbs Philip
Abstract: Edward Schillebeeckx makes no reference in his published works to Papua New Guinea—a nation of seven million people in Oceania. With the exception of those trained in Catholic seminaries, very few people in Papua New Guinea would have heard of the theologian, Schillebeeckx. Yet, his theology, particularly his efforts to find alternatives to dualistic thinking about Christian presence in the world, could contribute to developments in local theologies in a place such as Papua New Guinea. This chapter will focus on Schillebeeckx’s understanding of political holiness and will enter into dialogue with the Melanesian thinking of Bernard Narokobi—perhaps

Theology and Culture: from: From North to South
Author(s) Rochford Dennis
Abstract: Because of the wide range of themes and various methodological approaches present in the writings of Edward Schillebeeckx, it is difficult to find the core concern or unifying theological thread that characterises his life’s work. Does one identify particular texts as seminal to this task?¹ If so, what texts might one choose? What subjects stand out as commanding his attention?

‘Hospitality’ at the End of Religion from: The Bonhoeffer Legacy
Author(s) McDowell John C
Abstract: So much has been written about the theologian from central Europe Dietrich Bonhoeffer as prophet, martyr, priest, that one of the challenges is to find something new and interesting to say about him. Too much passes the lips of hagiographers again to be in any way valuable in its right, slipping into an overextending of his life and work in what one might well call a hagiographic hubris – even a hagiographic hamartia. For too much writing he is made banal and sentimental, tamed by the emotivism that surrounds talk of him as something of a heroic white knight who rides

Book Title: Between the 'Mysticism of Politics' and the 'Politics of Mysticism'- Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): RANSON DAVID
Abstract: Between the Politics of Mysticism and the Mysticism of Politics traces the dialectic of ‘the mystical’ and the political’ from both a theological and an historical perspective. It presents the dialectic as a hermeneutic for the rise of the new ecclesial communities within the Roman Catholic Tradition and suggests it as the framework by which a trajectory for Christian holiness might emerge in the 21st century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t8s9

Chapter Four ‘The Mystical’ and ‘The Political’ in Tension: from: Between the 'Mysticism of Politics' and the 'Politics of Mysticism'
Abstract: As an example from recent studies of religion that suggests how the duality between ‘the mystical’ and ‘the political’ might be considered more in dialectic terms, let us firstly explore the work of Paul Ricoeur (1913–2005). Ricoeur identifies how spiritual experience itself can be categorized along two fundamental trajectories. He identifies the most basic two as ‘proclamation’ and ‘manifestation’. However, importantly, he enunciates these as a ‘polarity or tension’ that he

Chapter Five ‘The Mystical’ and ‘the Political’: from: Between the 'Mysticism of Politics' and the 'Politics of Mysticism'
Abstract: Cavanaugh only alludes to the work of Johannes Metz (b 1928).1 However, it would seem that the political theology of Metz provides a counterpoint to Cavanaugh and an alternative perspective on how the Maritainian dilemma might be addressed. In so doing, it protects against Cavanaugh’s tendency for ‘the political’ to dissolve into ‘the mystical,’ though it does, itself, open to the specter of the very opposite ‘the mystical’ dissolving into ‘the political’ which was, precisely, the Maritainian dilemma.

2 Vatican II and ‘The Study of the Sacred Page’ as ‘The Soul of Theology’ (Dei Verbum 24) from: God's Word and the Church's Council
Author(s) Moloney Francis J
Abstract: Among the many challenging developments that emerged from the Second Vatican Council, the Dogmatic Constitution on Divine Revelation, Dei Verbum(henceforthDV), one of the last documents to be promulgated by Paul VI at the close of the Council on 18 November 1965, has an important place. The document is the result of a tortured history that ran across all sittings of the Council. It began with the rejection of the schema from the preparatory commission,De Fontibus Revelationis, in November 1962.¹ The subsequent discussion, sometimes bitter, at the Council and in the commissions and working parties, led to a

3 Scripture and Tradition in the Patristic Age from: God's Word and the Church's Council
Author(s) Minns Denis P
Abstract: In October 1960 the Preparatory Theological Commission that began the process that would ultimately issue in the Dogmatic Constitution on Divine Revelation presented a working paper bearing the significant title: A Compendious Schema for the Constitution on the Sources of Revelation.¹ Famously, the Dogmatic Constitution itself would reject the (traditional) notion of Scripture and Tradition as two separate sources (fontes) of Revelation and assert that ‘Sacred Tradition and Sacred Scripture are tightly connected and linked with one another. For both flow forth from the same divine, bubbling spring, somehow or other coalesce as one thing, and extend toward the same

Chapter One Seeding Communities of the In-Between God from: In-Between God
Abstract: I recall a comment of Stanley Hauerwas that the appropriate location for Christian ethics was always ‘in the middle’ of things. His point was that we did not have the luxury of beginning outside or at the periphery of life. This resonated with my own instincts in relation to the theological enterprise. We begin and proceed encompassed by the God who is our beginning and end and who is the holy presence in and through all things. The work of theology ought not take place at some remove from the circumstances of our life nor ought it presume to deliver

Chapter Four A Future for Systematic Theology from: In-Between God
Abstract: In the 1992 Bampton Lectures Colin Gunton drew attention to the powerful influence in the Christian tradition of two ancient philosophies; the Parmenidean and the Heraclitean.² Whereas the former stressed the underlying unity and stability of the world, the latter gave prominence to plurality, particulars and state of flux of the world. The tradition of Parmenides provided the backdrop for the first millennium and a half of the Christian tradition and appeared to offer support to a Christian theism that gave order and meaning to the world. However, the Enlightenment framework of modern Christianity has been heavily influenced by the

Chapter Nine New Monasticism, Theology and the Future Church from: In-Between God
Abstract: Alasdair MacIntyre ends his important work, After Virtue, with an enticing proposal on the future of human community:

Chapter Twelve The Passions: from: In-Between God
Abstract: This topic rarely surfaces today. Indeed, interest in the ‘passions’ seems to have disappeared from our cultural discourse. As we shall see in this essay we are more familiar with the language of the ‘emotions’; their intelligence and significance in our lives. Specifying the relationship between the passions and the emotions is more difficult, but more of that in a moment. This paper arose out a quest to explore and understand the significance of the passions in my own life and work. I discovered over many years that the energies of my life could be harnessed for good or ill,

Hermeneutics of Parable Interpretation in Ellen White Compared to Those of Archbishop Trench from: Hermeneutics, Intertextuality and the Contemporary Meaning of Scripture
Author(s) McIver Robert K
Abstract: It is probably an exaggeration to date the interpretation of parables BJ and AJ—before Jülicher’ and ‘after Jülicher’—but only a slight one. From the second to the nineteenth centuries there was one dominant way to expound parables, that of allegory.¹ Jülicher’s work and publications changed that. His decisive contribution was to gather all previous comment on each of the parables, almost all of them allegorical in nature. An allegorical approach to a particular parable may well have had persuasive force when it was given, whether during the time of the church Fathers or during the Reformation. However, changing

Book Title: Opening the Bible-Selected Writings of Antony Campbell SJ
Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): Campbell Antony
Abstract: "When Tony Campbell, aged 75, asked the Council of Jesuit Theological College for Emeritus status and retirement from JTC, both were granted most graciously, along with a testimonial document which said in part: ‘His teaching has combined evocation and provocation in the best sense of those terms. He has mentored research students with scholarly exactitude and personal care. He has published books of the highest scholarly quality, of engaging readability, and of passionate conviction.’ When we at ATF were considering asking him for a volume of Collected Works or Selected Writings, we were well aware that ‘published books of the highest scholarly quality’ were likely to be found on the shelves of libraries and of specialised academics, but not with students and others generally interested. There may be a dozen or more of Tony’s books on the list from Amazon.com booksellers, along with another two or three that are not listed there. But most are heavy-duty specialist works, not easily accessible even to the educated public. We were equally well aware that there was a surprising number of essays and articles scattered in journals and proceedings of conferences that were, because of the scattering, often just as inaccessible. We thought that a collection of these in a single volume would be of great value to those interested. In the Introduction to this volume, Father Campbell has gone into some detail about the contents. Suffice for us to say that Job and the issues associated with suffering concern us all, that the interplay of history and narrative is a constant in the understanding of much biblical text, and that the nature of the Bible and its role in our lives is a major concern for most thinking Christians. While Father Campbell’s focus is on the Older Testament, pondering what he looks at throws light on much of the Newer Testament as well. The writings Tony Campbell has pulled together in this single volume address significant issues within the readable length of an article or a talk. Addressed originally to thinking people, we at ATF believe they are likely to be of interest to a wide audience."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t9t9

Synchrony and the Storyteller from: Opening the Bible
Abstract: As recently as some thirty years ago, an influential scholar, a member of the western biblical establishment, published comments suggesting a redactor might have ‘mindlessly mutilated’ a text and referring to ‘the more or less mechanical piecework of a redactor’. Such remarks may betray what Robert Polzin has pilloried as a view of ancient editing involving the ‘damned hands’ of ‘inept redactors’.¹ Where this view exists, any attempt at serious synchronic study would be dishonest and a waste of time. I fear that it has been around for a long time and in some quarters has not yet vanished. When

The Storyteller’s Role: from: Opening the Bible
Abstract: i. Limited distribution of the works, resulting from the need

Preparatory Issues in Approaching Biblical Text from: Opening the Bible
Abstract: Interpretation does not happen in a void. Interpretation emerges out of a context and speaks into a context. Interpreters are not disembodied voices. There is an interplay of interests at work, whether social or emotional, cultural or national, academic, financial, or religious. It is tempting to focus exclusively on the insights and achievements of individuals; these are usually accessible in their publications. We need to be aware of the existence of wider influences and interests that surge around individual scholars and shape something of their work.

Word of God or Word of God’s People: from: Opening the Bible
Abstract: The most significant factor contributing to the weighty significance of the Bible is probably the phrase ‘the word of the Lord’ or ‘the word of God’ ( debar yhwh) in its various equivalents in Hebrew and in translations. Church councils, church authorities, preachers, teachers, and so many others contribute to our understanding of the phrase, from literal to highly metaphoric. Leuven professor Msgr Raymond Collins in that most orthodox of reference works,The New Jerome Biblical Commentary,in his article on Inspiration, writes: ‘This traditional formula [the word of God], apparently simple, is extremely complex and polyvalent.’²

The Reported Story: from: Opening the Bible
Abstract: This paper emerges from a combination of three factors: intuition, commonsense logic, and everyday observation. The intuition is simply a storyteller’s conviction, after working with the text of 1–2 Samuel for a while, that no storytellers worth their salt would be able to tell some of the stories the way they are in the text.¹ In exciting areas, they are too bare, too bald; they cry out for embellishment. Commonsense logic says that as well as the simple telling of a story and the skilled fashioning of a story as a work of literary art, there is also the

Qohelet the Wise from: Opening the Bible
Abstract: ‘Live your life and see the value in what you do.’ Wise advice and a good mantra for human living. Simple, straightforward, and central to Qohelet (Eccl 2:24; 3:13; 5:17 [Heb.; NRSV 5:18]; cf 8:15). The Hebrew verbal root r--h is straightforward; it means ‘to see’. The Hebrew adjective tobis straightforward; it means ‘good’. The Hebrew nounamalis just as straightforward; it means ‘toil’. In an agricultural society, most people work the land; working the land is toil. Toil is what most people do in an agricultural society. Today, in an industrial or post-industrial society, what most people

Book Title: Redemptive Hope: From the Age of Enlightenment to the Age of Obama- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Campbell Timothy C.
Abstract: This is a book about the need for redemptive narratives to ward off despair and the dangers these same narratives create by raising expectations that are seldom fulfilled. The quasi-messianic expectations produced by the election of President Barack Obama in 2008, and their diminution, were stark reminders of an ongoing struggle between ideals and political realities. Redemptive Hope begins by tracing the tension between theistic thinkers, for whom hope is transcendental, and intellectuals, who have striven to link hopes for redemption to our intersubjective interactions with other human beings. Lerner argues that a vibrant democracy must draw on the best of both religious thought and secular liberal political philosophy. By bringing Richard Rorty's pragmatism into conversation with early-twentieth-century Jewish thinkers, including Martin Buber and Ernst Bloch, Lerner begins the work of building bridges, while insisting on holding crucial differences in dialectical tension. Only such a dialogue, he argues, can prepare the foundations for modes of redemptive thought fit for the twenty-first century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1657v0t

COMMANDMENTS AND COVENANT from: Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: This introductory framework should suffice to demonstrate that the very concept of “commandment,” when linked to the precepts of the Decalogue, requires a clarification that restates the authentic law. If we are to grasp the meanings of moral law in its actual cultural context, we cannot possibly trust some sort of common sense without immediately getting lost in a maze of multiple misunderstandings and contradictions. We will have to find ways to peel off the sedimented crust formed by the usual meanings and to strip ambiguity from the very debates that should have critically illuminated the problems.

CHRISTIANITY AND RATIONAL, UNIVERSAL MORALS from: Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: That the “ten words” are originally and always the major criteria of religious morals does not mean that the rational, moral conscience (or the “natural” conscience that is, in a limited sense, non revealed) may be incapable of truth. The vicissitudes of the late Middle Ages (especially with the rediscovery of Aristotle and the work of Thomas Aquinas) and then of modernity have shown the importance of the rational, moral conscience—its autonomous ability to construct an ethical form. Theological thought, likewise, has been able to recognize that revelation does not substitute for but rather conserves moral autonomy, which, thus recognized,

A WEAK COMMANDMENT from: Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: The sixth commandment appears a weak commandment no matter from what cultural vantage point you look at it. Not weak because, in private or in war, men continue to kill one another. (They continue to steal, give false testimony, and violate other imperatives of the Decalogue as well.) No: it is weak per sebecause of the inconsistency of its conceptual framework and the contradictions that run through it historically. Even its recent adaptation to the parameters of the bioethical controversy, where it presents itself as a final attempt to make the prohibition against killing absolute, ends up dragging the

Foreword: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Ferro Marc
Abstract: This foreword is based on a 2005 interview conducted with the historian Marc Ferro, a specialist on the issue of colonization and the reception of this past in French society, namely in books such as L’Histoire des colonisations(1994),Les tabous de l’Histoire(2002), andLe Livre noir du colonialisme(2003).¹ He has described the current situation—a situation in which the French public has turned its back on the work of historians—as a form of “self-censorship by citizens,” paired with a “censorship by the governing authorities.” This sort of postcolonial posture, which characterizes France at the beginning of

5 Literature, Song, and the Colonies (1900–1920) from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Ruscio Alain
Abstract: Colonial writing both could have and should have been the ancestor of the current trend of “surprising traveler” novels. However, it is not. Today, colonial literature has been all but forgotten, and even when it is evoked, it is to reaffirm its negative status. In terms of its literary qualities, the genre rarely produced texts rich enough to leave a mark on French literature. Never mind a masterpiece. There was never a French Kipling—at least not according to traditional doxa on the subject. The theme of colonization all too often produced literary works of a didactic and ideologically heavy-handed

11 To Civilize: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Blanchard Pascal
Abstract: The Other is a recurring anthropological figure in every field of social science. On the one hand, because figures of exteriority are the mirrors through which the substance and borders of collective identities are formed, transformed, firmed up, and reaffirmed.¹ The Other is endowed with “characteristics” that vary with the times, but that always fall between two poles: stigmatization and desire. On the other hand, figures of the Other play an invaluable part since they are the motors of all forms of social mobilization and are called upon and instrumentalized to inaugurate or consolidate networks of sociability, to structure or

14 The Colonial Bath: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Bancel Nicolas
Abstract: Colonial Culturein France did not begin in the interim between the two world wars, though this period did establish rather definitive contours of that culture, and even saw its insertion into everyday life. It is not possible here to detail all theaspectsrelated to the dissemination of colonial representations—illustrated newspapers, postcards, illustrations in various works, games, stamps,¹ and others— but the evidence does confirm that representations of colonized peoples, along with those of colonial spaces, were disseminated thanks to such materials. These representations both aided and accompanied the long process involved in shaping colonial mentalities and the

19 Influence: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Forsdick Charles
Abstract: The 1930s mark the apogee of the French Empire, and the euphoria accompanying the International Colonial Exposition of 1931 is perhaps the most obvious sign of the public’s obsession with the colonial enterprise. The propaganda generated by the Agence Générale des Colonies gives us a sense of the kind of pro-colonial discourse in circulation, focusing on France’s civilizing mission, as well as the commercial and political greatness bestowed on France by its Empire. However, such ideas can also be found in the editorial pages of newspapers, as well as in pamphlets, films, and books (both fiction and “scientific” works), all

20 Education: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Denis Daniel
Abstract: Novels, comic strips, movies, an abundance of colonial iconography all testify to the existence of a very specific cultural apparatus that worked to deeply inscribe the “imperial” into metropolitan culture.¹ Moreover, this imperial culture,through targeted means of forming and educating the youth, was a major factor in the creation of a “Homo imperialis” in metropolitan France. It did this according to two mechanisms, which have thus far received little scholarly attention. The first concerns the school and the textbooks in which one finds texts and images promoting imperialism. The second is the role played by an extracurricular activity with,

29 Crime: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Einaudi Jean-Luc
Abstract: Over the course of imperial history, colonial violence in France has been primarily anti-Algerian. This can in part be explained by the scale of Algerian immigration to the metropole. Officially, more than 250,000 Algerians were living in France in the early 1950s, mainly in greater Paris, though also in the northeast and in the cities of Marseille and lyon. Most were factory workers and unskilled laborers who worked in the metalworking or chemical industries, in construction, public works, and mines. Also, of course, many were unemployed. Another reason for anti-Algerian sentiment was the fact that this labor immigration was organized

37 Competition between Victims from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Benbassa Esther
Abstract: In comfortable Western societies, we are able to run from suffering and after success, happiness, health, and eternal youth. Though we do not say it out loud, we long for immortality, and our faith in ever-evolving progress has led us to believe in a future without suffering. Yet, until recently, the monotheistic homo religiosussuffered for and by God. He believed in the redemptive function of suffering. Religions, indeed, always had a penchant for the suffering of man. In it, they tried to find an explanation to make life on earth bearable. Or they worked to show that suffering was

38 The Army and the Construction of Immigration as a Threat (1961–2006) from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Rigouste Mathieu
Abstract: The army is far from being “ une grande muette.”¹ It communicates a lot, sometimes even on activities it presents as “secret,” and regularly generates reports on “threats”² and how to handle them, which are then disseminated as widely as possible throughout various networks. French military doctrine counts as part of its mission of national defense and the promotion of a “spirit of Defense” within the “collective consciousness.”³ In fact, it operates from the assumption that if the “national body” is to be able to defend itself in case of aggression, it must be mentally healthy, thus perfectly aware of potential

41 Colonial Influences and Tropes in the Field of Literature from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Moura Jean-Marc
Abstract: The focus of this chapter will be provided by a consideration of a postcolonial approach to literature and its utility to French literary studies. A postcolonial methodology considers colonial influences and tropes in literary production, and works to reveal them. Let it first be noted that postcolonialism—in terms of its focus on the colonial influences and tropes in literary production—is already an important domain in the fields of literature and social sciences in Anglophone universities and in other academic institutions all over the world. However, this is not (yet?) the case in France, something that can perhaps be

5 Speculating God: from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Niemoczynski Leon
Abstract: The relationship between contemporary Continental philosophy of religion and “the new metaphysics” (twenty-first-century metaphysics in the Continental tradition, otherwise referred to as “the new metaphysics,” “the new materialism,” “the new realism,” or, more controversially, “speculative realism”) so far remains largely an unexplored relationship, especially regarding areas of mutual concern, influence, or crossover.¹ Despite new and exciting inroads made by philosophers such as Iain Grant and his articulations of a neo-Platonic–Hegelian Absolute (a perspective not entirely unconducive to the nature theologies of the German idealists), François Laurelle’s non-philosophy and surrounding work on “non-theology,” or even Bruno Latour’s explorations of the

10 Verbis Indisciplinatis from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Ballan Joseph
Abstract: Whichever continent, real or imagined, it is aligned with, philosophy of religion in the United States occupies a somewhat uneasy position alongside other disciplines and institutional arrangements. Scholars who work on or within Asian philosophical traditions find themselves facing much the same predicament as those who locate themselves somewhere within the vaguely post-phenomenological landscape called “Continental philosophy of religion.” To what disciplinary genus does this species of scholarship—which has also become a recognizable styleof scholarship—belong? To philosophy? To religious studies? To theology? Perhaps to none of these options? In what follows, I would like to think about

14 On Reading—Catherine Malabou from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Johnson Randall
Abstract: For the most part, it seems that we approach reading as if it were neutral in all valences of any consequence: language or other sign indicators on the screen or page are touched, usually by vision, and then processed by the synaptic workings of the brain for the purpose of transfer of information. And often all of this happens without awareness, even at times the very choice of what we read. Here, there is pure—and isn’t thistheideological word par excellence that slips its way into speculative idealisms, scientific empiricisms, and even materialisms of the real—form of

Book Title: Encountering Morocco-Fieldwork and Cultural Understanding
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Dwyer Kevin
Abstract: Encountering Morocco introduces readers to life in this North African country through vivid accounts of fieldwork as personal experience and intellectual journey. We meet the contributors at diverse stages of their careers-from the unmarried researcher arriving for her first stint in the field to the seasoned fieldworker returning with spouse and children. They offer frank descriptions of what it means to take up residence in a place where one is regarded as an outsider, learn the language and local customs, and struggle to develop rapport. Moving reflections on friendship, kinship, and belief within the cross-cultural encounter reveal why study of Moroccan society has played such a seminal role in the development of cultural anthropology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gh8g5

Introduction from: Encountering Morocco
Author(s) NEWCOMB RACHEL
Abstract: This book introduces readers to Morocco by showing how anthropologists have come to understand it. Each essay takes us into a specific part of the country through the unique voice of the writer. Each delivers a very local story, a vignette of how a particular individual has done fieldwork in a specific context. And each stands as a personal meditation on cross-cultural understanding, the way that one person came to appreciate an alien social world. Together the chapters build a richly textured portrait of the Kingdom of Morocco-a key site in the development of the discipline of anthropology.

3 Thinking about Class and Status in Morocco from: Encountering Morocco
Author(s) McMURRAY DAVID A.
Abstract: A barber worked directly across the street from the front door of our apartment in the late 1980s in Nador, a gritty boomtown in the Berber north that was exploding with the repatriated wealth of emigrants away in Europe as well as the revenues from goods smuggled in from Spain and hash smuggled out of Morocco.¹ The barber’s shop was decorated with posters of stylish men, all of them models advertising various hair care products. He had hired another barber—a poorer man, judging by his attire—to help out during busy times, such as early evening hours and Fridays.

5 Suspicion, Secrecy, and Uncomfortable Negotiations over Knowledge Production in Southwestern Morocco from: Encountering Morocco
Author(s) HOFFMAN KATHERINE E.
Abstract: Power relations inherent in the encounter between anthropologist and informant engaged the advocates of reflexive anthropology working in Morocco (Crapanzano 1980; K. Dwyer 1982; Rabinow 2007 [1977]). Their analyses have reconfigured the practice and writing of ethnography over the last three decades. Questions of truth, disclosure, and suspicion shape not only anthropologists’ relationships in the field, but also the data that can be collected and the forms in which it can be presented to outsiders. Irfan Ahmad remarks in regard to ethnographic informants’ frequent suspicion of the state that perhaps we should “also talk—after Geertz’s ‘theatre state,’ Dirks’s ‘ethnographic

6 The Activist and the Anthropologist from: Encountering Morocco
Author(s) SILVERSTEIN PAUL A.
Abstract: In his afterword to Paul Rabinow’s Reflections on Fieldwork in Morocco(2007 [1977], 166–67), Pierre Bourdieu cites Jean Piaget’s famous dictum, “it is not so much that children don’t know how to talk: they try out many languages until they find one their parents can understand,” and concludes, “Ethnology will have taken a giant step forward when all ethnologists understand that something similar is taking place between informants and themselves.” This is a striking yet curious statement. Curious because it portrays anthropology as an improvable, developmental discipline, in spite of Bourdieu’s critique several pages earlier of the “positivist conception

9 Reflecting on Moroccan Encounters: from: Encountering Morocco
Author(s) KAPCHAN DEBORAH
Abstract: I encountered Morocco when I was twenty-four years old. It was, in a sense, an accidental or at least a serendipitous encounter—but then again, it may have been fate. Before leaving New York in 1981, I was in music school studying flute performance. I was working on my second BA, begun after my graduation from the English Department at New York University (with a minor in French literature), and although I was feeling too old to be a freshman for a second time, I didn’t know what else to do. My only directive was a tired but workable cliché:

11 Afterword: from: Encountering Morocco
Author(s) DWYER KEVIN
Abstract: The essays in this volume address topics that, for a long time, were present only at the margins of academic anthropological discourse, if they appeared at all. Issues like the anthropologist’s “identity”—the implications of the anthropologist’s origins and how anthropologists construct themselves in the field; the attractions and perils of friendship; the impact of the anthropologist’s family on fieldwork; suspicion of and hostility toward the anthropologist and competition between the anthropologist and others in the field; the tensions among the many aspects of an anthropologist’s humanity, and between the roles of researcher and judge, between “scientific” observation and judgmental

CHAPTER 4 “You Will (Not) Be Able to Take Your Eyes off it!”: from: Visual Culture in the Modern Middle East
Author(s) KUBALA PATRICIA
Abstract: At the beginning of 2005, Rotana—a major album production company and multi-channel satellite television network in the Middle East owned by Saudi Prince al-Walid bin Talal—added a new channel, Rotana Cinema, to its bevy of channels for music videos, entertainment programs, concerts, and religious programming (added in 2006). The Rotana channels began to run advertisements for the new cinema channel featuring one of the company’s most famous and controversial music video stars, the voluptuous Lebanese pop singer Hayfa Wahbi. Set to the music of one of Hayfa’s latest hits, “Hayat Qalbi” (Life of My Heart), the ad juxtaposed

CHAPTER 5 The Muslim “Crying Boy” in Turkey: from: Visual Culture in the Modern Middle East
Author(s) SAVAŞ ÖZLEM
Abstract: A group of paintings known as Crying Boys—attributed to Italian painter Bruno Amadio (1911–81), also known as Bragolin—gained widespread popularity in many parts of the world in the 1980s. Portraying the tearful faces of children, these works have inspired various popular cultural practices, including the establishment of fan clubs and the telling of urban legends devoted to the subjects’ “curse.”¹ In the 1970s and 1980s one of these paintings became especially popular in Turkey (fig. 5.1 and plate 11). Initially, Crying Boy was in vogue in the private realm, displayed in many working- and middle-class homes—reproductions

Book Title: Degrees of Givenness-On Saturation in Jean-Luc Marion
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): GSCHWANDTNER CHRISTINA M.
Abstract: The philosophical work of Jean-Luc Marion has opened new ways of speaking about religious convictions and experiences. In this exploration of Marion's philosophy and theology, Christina M. Gschwandtner presents a comprehensive and critical analysis of the ideas of saturated phenomena and the phenomenology of givenness. She claims that these phenomena do not always appear in the excessive mode that Marion describes and suggests instead that we consider degrees of saturation. Gschwandtner covers major themes in Marion's work-the historical event, art, nature, love, gift and sacrifice, prayer, and the Eucharist. She works within the phenomenology of givenness, but suggests that Marion himself has not considered important aspects of his philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gz4t7

INTRODUCTION: from: Degrees of Givenness
Abstract: As the subtitle of Being Givenindicates, Marion’s philosophy can be defined as a “phenomenology of givenness.” The term “givenness” featured already in his earlier preparatory workReduction and Givennesswhere he first developed the notion of a “third reduction” to givenness. “Givenness” translates the French donation, which ostensibly translates the German termGegebenheit,which is an important Husserlian term also used by Heidegger, as Marion contends in a more recent essay on that topic (RoG, 35–49; FP, 45–58). This translation of Gegebenheit withdonationand givenness is not uncontroversial, and Marion has been challenged on this.¹ The

ONE Historical Events and Historical Research from: Degrees of Givenness
Abstract: Marion uses the term “event” in two different but closely connected senses in his work, especially in his presentation in Being Given.On the one hand, he speaks of the event as a characteristic of all given phenomena: phenomena give themselves as events, they are “being given.” He develops this in §17 ofBeing Givenas the fifth characteristic ofallphenomena alongside anamorphosis, arrival, incident, and fait accompli. Most prominently, however, the event isone typeof saturated phenomenon, namely the phenomenon saturated according to quantity. The phenomenon of the historical or cultural event gives “too much” information, it

TWO Art and the Artist from: Degrees of Givenness
Abstract: Marion has written fairly extensively on art, although this topic has not been discussed much in the secondary literature on his work.¹ One of his early works, The Crossing of the Visible,is an extended reflection on the status of the image in art and contemporary culture. In his later writings, the work of art occupies a central place as the second type of saturated phenomenon, saturated according to quality. A “mediocre” Dutch painting and the practice of anamorphosis employed in painting is an element of the discussion of the given phenomenon in general in Being Given, and the chapter

FIVE Gift and Sacrifice from: Degrees of Givenness
Abstract: Marion is maybe most well-known as a philosopher of the gift. Already in a widely read article, titled “Sketch of a Phenomenological Concept of the Gift,” he attempted to illuminate the topic of the gift.¹ His major phenomenological work, Being Given,explores phenomenology as fundamentally about “givenness” and includes an entire section titled “The Gift” (part 2). He engaged in extensive debates with Jacques Derrida on the gift and economy, especially in the highly publicized debate of the 1997 conference “ Religion and Postmodernism I: God, the Gift, and Postmodernism.”² In the English-speaking world, this debate (somewhat unfortunately) dominated the

SIX Prayer and Sainthood from: Degrees of Givenness
Abstract: Prayer is a fairly prominent topic in Marion’s writings, although it is not a concern addressed much by the secondary literature on his work.¹ Already the early distinction between idol and icon in God without Beingis to a large extent about prayer or worship, about the human approach to the divine that can be expressed in idolatrous adoration or authentic prayer before an icon. The former is idolatrous for Marion because it becomes an invisible mirror that returns entirely upon the self, while the other is authentic because it is emptied of self and exposed to the divine gaze.

SEVEN Eucharist and Sacrament from: Degrees of Givenness
Abstract: Marion has explored sacraments and especially the Eucharist throughout his work, beginning with his rather controversial treatment in God without Beingand culminating with two accounts inLe croire pour le voir.Why is the Eucharist so important for Marion? On the one hand, it is obviously a central liturgical rite that particularly defines Christian identity. It is therefore especially significant for a phenomenology that seeks to explore religious experience. One might say that the Eucharist is Christian religious experience par excellence. On the other hand, the Eucharist is believed to be a central place ofGod’sself-revelation. The Eucharist

Introduction from: Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Abstract: Palabreis original in its capacity to combine the code and the network, usually with success. Employing the one without ceasing to

Book Title: Kierkegaard and Death- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): BUBEN ADAM
Abstract: Few philosophers have devoted such sustained, almost obsessive attention to the topic of death as Søren Kierkegaard. Kierkegaard and Death brings together new work on Kierkegaard's multifaceted discussions of death and provides a thorough guide to the development, in various texts and contexts, of Kierkegaard's ideas concerning death. Essays by an international group of scholars take up essential topics such as dying to the world, living death, immortality, suicide, mortality and subjectivity, death and the meaning of life, remembrance of the dead, and the question of the afterlife. While bringing Kierkegaard's philosophy of death into focus, this volume connects Kierkegaard with important debates in contemporary philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gz6m3

10. Heidegger and Kierkegaard on Death: from: Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Guignon Charles
Abstract: The jury is still out on the nature and extent of Kierkegaard’s influence on the early Heidegger, including his magnum opus Being and Time(1927) as well as his lectures and writings prior to that work. In the “Foreword” to the 1972 edition of his “Early Writings” in German, Heidegger speaks of those “exciting years between 1910 and 1914” when, together with the work of Nietzsche and Dostoevsky, he read translations of the writings of Kierkegaard.¹ However, it is not evident how much of Kierkegaard seeped into Heidegger’s thought or precisely which texts influenced his own. Theodore Kisiel suggests that

11. Kierkegaard, Levinas, Derrida: from: Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Llevadot Laura
Abstract: “A free man thinks of nothing less than of death”¹ according to proposition 47 of Spinoza’s Ethics,in which death is portrayed as a saddening thought, one which, moreover, depletes our potential to work and to think. The refusal to think about death, and specifically its association with sadness and pain for those left behind, is a constant theme in the history of philosophy. The image of Socrates presented inPhaedo,happy to accept his own death, is emblematic of the philosopher who has learned how to die. Xanthippe, his wife, is expelled from this scene in which philosophy and

13. The Soft Weeping of Desire’s Loss: from: Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Allen Jeremy J.
Abstract: In the ninth chapter of the second set of deliberations in Works of Love,Kierkegaard writes the following words: “I know of no better way to describe true recollection than by this soft weeping that does not burst into sobs at one moment—and soon subsides. No, we are to recollect the dead, weep softly, but weep long” (WL, 348/SKS 9, 342). Much of the work in the chapter you now read is spent setting up the problematic that aims at establishing a relation between grieving and the lack of recognition from those now absent from our experience of the

14. Duties to the Dead? from: Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Stokes Patrick
Abstract: Perhaps nothing in Kierkegaard’s writings has proven quite as polarizing as Works of Love. The reception of this work has been characterized by perennial charges that it articulates an inhuman, acosmic, inward-looking vision of ethical life. These criticisms famously begin with Adorno, who claims that Kierkegaard’s concern to avoid “preferential” love in all forms leads to an “object-less” love in which the other is reduced to a mere “stumbling block.”¹ The result is an ethic whose “content is oppression: the oppression of the drive which is not to be fulfilled and the oppression of the mind which is not allowed

1 Moods and Method: from: Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Ram Kalpana
Abstract: My claims for phenomenology in this essay are limited to the work of two key exponents of the philosophical method, Heidegger and Merleau-Ponty. There are specific reasons why these two philosophers recommend themselves out of the wide range of philosophers who can claim to represent phenomenological methods. Both Heidegger and

2 Toward a Cultural Phenomenology of Body-World Relations from: Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Csordas Thomas J.
Abstract: For years in my seminar on embodiment I have begun by juxtaposing the work of Merleau-Ponty, Bourdieu, and Foucault, based on the intuition that the work of these three thinkers taken together established the intellectual topology of embodiment as an “indeterminate methodological field defined by perceptual experience and mode of presence and engagement in the world” (Csordas 1994: 12). Writing against the grain of the occasional antipathy toward phenomenology articu lated by both Bourdieu and Foucault, I suggest that taken together their work helps to outline the structure of this methodological field for cultural phenomenology by defining complementary aspects of

7 Experiencing Self-Abstraction: from: Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Fisher Daniel
Abstract: This chapter draws on fieldwork in an Aboriginal Australian urban radio station in order to explore some experiential aspects of vocal cultural production and the forms of mediatized self-abstraction it entails. I focus on the ways that technical features of media production and the institutional life of media in contemporary Indigenous Australia come together to make perception available for problematization in the studio. At 4AAA, a large, Indigenous-run country music station with a broad and at times national audience, young Indigenous media trainees take on the task of representing Aboriginal Australia to itself, and their experience of learning to perform

9 Seared with Reality: from: Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Desjarlais Robert
Abstract: While traveling in the Yolmo region of north central Nepal in the summer of 2011, visiting with families I have known for some time now, I grew fond of a small, blue stool. The family I was staying with kept this bench, a foot and a half or so tall, toward the back of their household, close to a washroom and a work table. The sides and four

12 Neither Things in Themselves nor Things for Us Only: from: Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Houston Christopher
Abstract: Fiction is a genre that tells the stories of characters whose lives are parasitic upon yet identical to none of those 15 million people. Unlike macro-social science with its illuminating focus on political economic structures that mediate personal history and condition social experience, potentially making the stories of 15 million people variations on a theme, fiction gives attentive value to the particular, the quixotic, and the perverse. Characters’ lives and experiences are different from each other yet interlocked in strange and fateful ways. Nevertheless, in fiction, too, authors work with a presumption of resemblance, even as it is shown not

Afterword from: Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Jackson Michael
Abstract: At the time that I wrote my introduction to Things as They Arein 1994, very few anthropologists drew methodically on phenomenology in their work, although many explored and exemplified, in their approaches to ethnographic research and writing, key phenomenological themes, such as embodiment, lived experience, inter subjectivity, the sensorium, space and place, and critical events. Today, as the present volume attests, a significant number of anthropologists are not only engaging creatively with phenomenology, but subjecting the philo sophical insights of Husserl, Heidegger, Merleau-Ponty, Arendt, Derrida, Levinas, and Sartre to empirical tests in a variety of contemporary settings, thereby revising,

Book Title: The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity-Toward a Wider Suffrage
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): LLEWELYN JOHN
Abstract: Focusing on the idea of universal suffrage, John Llewelyn accepts the challenge of Derrida's later thought to renew his focus on the ethical, political, and religious dimensions of what makes us uniquely human. Llewelyn builds this concern on issues of representation, language, meaning, and logic with reflections on the phenomenological figures who informed Derrida's concept of deconstruction. By entering into dialogue with these philosophical traditions, Llewelyn demonstrates the range and depth of his own original thinking. The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity is a rich and passionate, playful and perceptive work of philosophical analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gz7jj

FOUR Phenomenology as Rigorous Science from: The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity
Abstract: As a student of mathematics at Berlin, Husserl became acquainted with Karl Weierstrass and his project for founding mathematical analysis on the concept of number. Not without finding Weierstrass guilty of a certain naïve empiricism, Husserl himself aimed to further this program in the dissertation On the Concept of Number(1887) which he went on to compose at Halle under the direction of Carl Stumpf, a former student of Brentano, and which became integrated into hisPhilosophy of Arithmetic(1891).¹ In these works Husserl demonstrates that numbers belong to a continuum that presupposes a mental act of collecting. It is

TEN Ecosophy, Sophophily, and Philotheria from: The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity
Abstract: Once upon a time I took part in a trek along a network of valleys to the base camp of the 1970 British expedition to the south summit of Annapurna in the Himalayas. Although our final destination was merely the edge of the Hiunchuli glacier, our sirdar Yong Tenzing acceded to my request that I might proceed on my own to a cairn a little higher up. On top of the cairn was a Norwegian 10- ørecoin. Had this been placed there, I mused, by the philosopher and mountaineer Arne Naess with some of whose writings I was familiar? If

6 Putting themselves in the pictures: from: A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Law Sandra
Abstract: Many filmmakers working in live action and animation have been concerned to find alternative means of portraying women and women’s issues. This essay explores the animation of three

7 An analysis of Susan Pitt’s Asparagus and Joanna Priestley’s All My Relations from: A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Couzin Sharon
Abstract: To describe the woman’s voice in contemporary animation requires a brief historical note on the representation of women in animation as well as their lack of participation in the planning and execution of these works. In addition, we must look to the role the feminist movement has played in both understanding and articulating the place of women in art in general – how at this point we can say the movement has re-politicised art; in this case, film.

9 Bartosch’s The Idea from: A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Moritz William
Abstract: Berthold Bartosch deserves to be discussed among the important filmmakers – not just important animators – both for the intrinsic artistry of his 1932 film The Ideaand for its seminal position as the first animation film created as an artwork with serious, even tragic, social and philosophical themes (as opposed documentary’, educational animations of McCay and the Fleischers or abstract of Ruttmann and Fischinger). That Bartosch does not always occupy position of honour in film history stems partly from the fact that the 25-minuteIdeahas not always been available to viewers and partly becauseThe Ideacould be his only

10 Norman McLaren and Jules Engel: from: A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Moritz William
Abstract: Of all the great names in animation, Norman McLaren has, paradoxically, suffered most from a kind of critical neglect. Everyone acknowledges his genius, but few discuss it. Numerous books and articles chronicle his life and describe his works, usually stressing the inventiveness of his filmic but rarely do they analyse his aesthetic qualities and achievements.¹

11 Disney, Warner Bros. and Japanese animation: from: A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Raffaelli Luca
Abstract: I concentrate on the birth and refinement of Disney’s philosophy during those years when Walt was working his hardest to promote the growth of his studios; that is, the period

14 Francis Bacon and Walt Disney revisited from: A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Pummell Simon
Abstract: Francis Bacon and Walt Disneyis the provocative title of an essay byJohn Berger.¹ The provocation is in the link between ‘High Art’ and ‘Low Art’ as seen by the bourgeois art world and Berger uses the link to question the quality of Bacon’s work. However, he does so in such detail and in such a way that he reveals a potential link far more complex and suggestive than the dismissive intent of essay. Berger is always incisive and he uncovers connections where previously cultural assumptions concealed the tracks.

15 Body consciousness in the films of Jan Svankmajer from: A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Wells Paul
Abstract: This essay examines three main areas of address in Svankmajer’s work. Firstly, the body in transition;

19 Resistance and subversion in animated films of the Nazi era: from: A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Moritz William
Abstract: The average person today might not know much about German film during the Nazi era and even animation scholars might not know what German animation existed between 1933 and 1945. Such a gap in cinema studies reflects a larger problem present in the United States’ perception of this crucial period. Forty years after the World War II, many Americans still naively accept simplistic stereotypes of the Nazis such as the demonic fiend whose appetite for sadistic cruelty is matched only by his ravenous, perverse sexual appetite (who inhabits such dramatic works as Visconti’s The Damned,and is the bumbling fool,

Book Title: Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): DAHL ESPEN
Abstract: The American philosopher Stanley Cavell (b. 1926) is a secular Jew who by his own admission is obsessed with Christ, yet his outlook on religion in general is ambiguous. Probing the secular and the sacred in Cavell's thought, Espen Dahl explains that Cavell, while often parting ways with Christianity, cannot dismiss it either. Focusing on Cavell's work as a whole, but especially on his recent engagement with Continental philosophy, Dahl brings out important themes in Cavell's philosophy and his conversation with theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gz98c

ONE Modernism and Religion from: Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: Right from his entrance on the philosophical scene in the late 1960s, Stanley Cavell has insisted that philosophy is confronted with the same cultural problems, burdens, and commitments—collectively known as modernism—that confront art. From some moment during the nineteenth century, artistic conventions for representation and composition no longer seemed to be adequate bearers of contemporary expression; along with the corrosion of the given framework of conventions, the stable relation between artist and audience also became more fragile, at times broken. As Cavell sees it, this situation is mirrored in philosophy: after Kierkegaard, Nietzsche, and Wittgenstein, there is no

Book Title: Gadamer-A Philosophical Portrait
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Keane Niall
Abstract: Hans-Georg Gadamer (1900-2002), one of the towering figures of contemporary Continental philosophy, is best known for Truth and Method, where he elaborated the concept of "philosophical hermeneutics," a programmatic way to get to what we do when we engage in interpretation. Donatella Di Cesare highlights the central place of Greek philosophy, particularly Plato, in Gadamer's work, brings out differences between his thought and that of Heidegger, and connects him with discussions and debates in pragmatism. This is a sensitive and thoroughly readable philosophical portrait of one of the 20th century's most powerful thinkers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gzb9c

4 On the Way to Philosophical Hermeneutics from: Gadamer
Abstract: The importance of the question of understanding in the aesthetic realm requires a redefinition of hermeneutics, or a critical reconstruction of its history, which in the end amounts to its actual construction. It is not an exaggeration to say that hermeneutics, in a certain sense, was constructedin the middle of the 1950s. Those are the years in which, while Heidegger inquires into the meaning of the word “hermeneutics” in his famous essay “A Dialogue on Language,” from 1953–54, Gadamer is working on his project of a philosophical hermeneutics.¹ The discipline, which only from the seventeenth century on is

7 The Enigma of Socrates: from: Gadamer
Abstract: There is already an effective history of hermeneutics that must be deconstructed if one wants to avoid leaving Truth and Methodas its magnum opus, which supposedly contains all of hermeneutics and casts its shadow over all other works, beginning with the studies

10 Keeping the Dialogue Going from: Gadamer
Abstract: Yet the publication of Truth and Method,which for Gadamer himself was still awork in progress,also marked the beginning

3 On Nietzsche’s Genealogy and Husserl’s Genetic Phenomenology: from: Nietzsche and Phenomenology
Author(s) Geniusas Saulius
Abstract: The question of suffering played a prominent part in philosophical reflections until the end of the nineteenth century. In contemporary philosophy, this question is almost entirely forgotten. Of course, one could object to such a claim and suggest that nowadays philosophers address suffering indirectlywhen they turn to the question of pain—an issue by no means uncommon in contemporary philosophical discussions. And yet in these analyses pain is addressed as a phenomenon that falls into the larger class of sensations known as bodily sensations, such as itches, tingles, and tickles.¹ It is highly doubtful whether such a framework can

4 Live Free or Battle: from: Nietzsche and Phenomenology
Author(s) Golden Kristen Brown
Abstract: It is well known that Husserl identified the approach and themes of existentialists like Nietzsche with irrationalism. He perceived them as a threat to universal science. Their supposed excesses, seeming dilettantism, and cult-like popularity were a provocation for Husserl’s final version of phenomenology. But as David Carr notes in his introduction to that work, The Crisis of European Sciences and Transcendental Phenomenology, in the years leading up to World War II, Husserl could not deny that existentialist approaches with which his project of universal science had long been at odds had brought to people’s attention “something real: a deeply felt

6 Fink, Reading Nietzsche: from: Nietzsche and Phenomenology
Author(s) Dastur Françoise
Abstract: Nietzsche’s role in European thought has been preponderant for at least fifty years. First relegated to literary studies, then, with Hitler’s rise to power, to the domain of ideology (by Alfred Baümler, in particular),¹ his work only begins to be considered as philosophy with the publication of Jaspers’s monograph in 1936² and the lectures Heidegger gave from 1936 to 1940 but did not publish until 1961. The following decade saw the flowering of what may be called “French Nietzscheism” with the publication in 1962 of Deleuze’s Nietzsche et la philosophie, which, in some sense, had set the pattern. This period

11 Nietzsche and Merleau-Ponty: from: Nietzsche and Phenomenology
Author(s) Johnson Galen A.
Abstract: It has been little remarked that Nietzsche’s Birth of Tragedy¹ made Raphael’s magnificent painting of the transfiguration of Christ the “monogram” of Nietzsche’s account of the origin of tragedy and his philosophy of art. Moreover, since that work introduces us to the figure of Dionysus, who plays an increasingly definitive role for Nietzsche’s entire philosophy as it unfolds in the later writings, we can add more emphatically that Raphael’sTransfiguration, as ironic as it may seem, is the monogram of the philosophy of the death of God. The goal of this paper will be to show how this is the

12 The Philosophy of the Morning: from: Nietzsche and Phenomenology
Author(s) Ansell-Pearson Keith
Abstract: I think it is difficult for any commentator to declare with total conviction that he has got Nietzsche right in terms of identifying him with a single or specific philosophical movement or doctrine. My view is that naturalism, existentialism, phenomenology, and poststructuralism can all, with a degree of plausibility, claim themselves heirs to his thinking.¹ Nietzsche is a thinker whose texts open up “possibilities,” and all these modes of thought can be found prefigured and at work in the text I focus on in this paper, Dawn.² Having said this, however, it is remarkable the extent to which this text

14 The Object of Phenomenology from: Nietzsche and Phenomenology
Author(s) Franck Didier
Abstract: “This universal a prioriof correlation between experienced object and manners of givenness,” Husserl confided two years before his death, “affected me so deeply that my whole subsequent life-work has been dominated by the task of systematically elaborating on thisa prioriof correlation.”¹ The discovery of this universal a priori, which is none other than that of intentionality, signifies that every being, whatever its meaning, points toward a subjective system of lived experiences; that every being, whatever its region of origin, is the object of a consciousness, or again that its objectivity is phenomenality itself. Thus the intentional analysis

FIVE Reflections on Identity from: Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith
Author(s) ELSHTAIN JEAN BETHKE
Abstract: When I was a graduate student of medieval and reformation history, I picked up and read a work that had a rather dramatic impact on me as an academic-in-training in the human sciences who was soon to find herself stifling within the confines of the then-dominant positivistic and behaviorist models in social science. That book was Erik Erikson’s Young Man Luther.¹ WhenYoung Man Lutherwas first published, there were a number of excited discussions about “psycho-history” and restoring a rich understanding of human subjects in the social sciences. Although the book was not assigned in any of my graduate

EIGHT Learning to Question from: Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith
Author(s) JOHNSON PATRICIA ALTENBERND
Abstract: Beginning graduate school in philosophy was a deciding point in my life. I majored in philosophy as an undergraduate, went on to a masters degree in comparative religion, married, taught pre-school, and worked as a live-in house-parent for ten boys, most of whom were young teenagers. The first day of the graduate program at the University of Toronto was spent taking written examinations. The following day, students faced a short oral examination based on those written examinations. At the end of the oral examinations determinations were made as to what each student would be required to take. Connected with the

SIXTEEN Toward a Visionary Politics: from: Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith
Author(s) NISSIM-SABAT MARILYN
Abstract: We need, and our society needs, to create a vision of our human future and to actualize that vision in practice. I believe that just such a vision can emerge from a synthesis of feminist, philosophical, and spiritual resources. While the project of constituting such a vision is implicit in the work of writers and activists in a variety of fields, I hope in this paper to make a contribution by making the project of synthesis explicit and discussing some of its theoretical and concrete ramifications. The following remarks explain how I came to embark on this project.

Book Title: The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): JAFFE AARON
Abstract: They have stalked the horizons of our culture, wreaked havoc on moribund concepts of dead and not dead, threatened our sense of identity, and endangered our personal safety. Now zombies have emerged from the lurking shadows of society's fringes to wander the sacred halls of the academy, feasting on tender minds and hurling rot across our intellectual landscape. It is time to unite in common cause, to shore up defenses, firm up critical and analytical resources, and fortify crumbling lines of inquiry. Responding to this call, Brain Workers from the Zombie Research Center poke and prod the rotting corpus of zombie culture trying to make sense of cult classics and the unstoppable growth of new and even more disturbing work. They exhume "zombie theory" and decaying historical documents from America, Europe, and the Caribbean in order to unearth the zombie world and arm readers with the brain tools necessary for everyday survival. Readers will see that zombie culture today "lives" in shapes as mutable as a zombie horde-and is often just as violent.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gzg4q

4 Zombie Media from: The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center
Author(s) BOHMAN ERIK
Abstract: Taken as a whole, George A. Romero’s body of work has most often been thought to mark shifts in cultural anxieties—anxieties around the Vietnam War and the civil rights era, the rise of a consumer economy, the relation of science and the military during the Cold War, the war in Iraq, and the irruptive spectacle of terrorism—anxieties that his films not only embody but also critically respond to, and all of which have been well documented. Yet, by regarding these films as markers of cultural anxieties or repressions, such readings either implicitly or explicitly tend to use psychological

Afterword: from: The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center
Author(s) NEALON JEFFREY T.
Abstract: The Year’s Work at the Zombie Research Centerboth constitutes its own unique archive and contributes to the growing archive of scholarly work on what might be the central figure that traverses our present, the zombie. When taking stock of this archive, or any archive for that matter, one is inevitably forced to ask the question, Why create a research archive around this topic rather than another? Why zombies, why now?

2 ON NOT BECOMING MAN: from: Material Feminisms
Author(s) Colebrook Claire
Abstract: Why would feminism turn to vitalism, and how could vitalism today become a way of politicizing problems? To feel the force of these questions, we might begin to consider why, until recently, “vitalism” was a pejorative term. Only then can we begin to see how and why the reworkings of the vitalist tradition have been so beneficial—and perilous—for feminist thought.

13 ORGANIC EMPATHY: from: Material Feminisms
Author(s) Wilson Elizabeth A.
Abstract: I recently attended an interdisciplinary feminist meeting that assumed a consensus about social constructionism and criticized scholarly work that was perceived as “essentialist,” because it implied a biological basis for gender attributes. During meals and breaks, however, I heard a different story. Several women were taking Prozac or similar drugs for depression. Some of their children, who had been difficult, “underachieving,” or disruptive in school, were also being medicated. These informal discussions centered on

4 The Incurved Self from: A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: The purpose of this chapter is to work out two related claims regarding how to think about the fallen self, i.e., the self in sin. First, following on the relational ontology we sketched in the previous chapter, we need to think about sin relationally rather than in terms of substance and accidents. Second, in order to understand sin, we need recourse to figurative discourse. Taking Ricoeur as a point of departure, in the first section we will see why reflection on sin and evil requires a hermeneutics of figurative discourse. Sin and evil cannot be explained, but must be described.

FIVE TWO TYPES OF CONTINENTAL PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION from: The Insistence of God
Abstract: Kierkegaard’s Johannes Climacus reports the case of one Dr. Hjortespring, who was converted to Hegelianism by a miracle on Easter morning at the Hotel Streit in Hamburg.¹ My own story is not as dramatic. Still, if truth be told, in the present work I fear I will shock my friends by declaring myself a born-again Hegelian, and this in order to distinguish myself from the Kantians. My reasoning is as follows. The event is an event of truth. The insistence of the event may also be called its insistent “truth.” The “democracy to come” means the truth that insists on

Book Title: What Is Fiction For?-Literary Humanism Restored
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Harrison Bernard
Abstract: How can literature, which consists of nothing more than the description of imaginary events and situations, offer any insight into the workings of "human reality" or "the human condition"? Can mere words illuminate something that we call "reality"? Bernard Harrison answers these questions in this profoundly original work that seeks to re-enfranchise reality in the realms of art and discourse. In an ambitious account of the relationship between literature and cognition, he seeks to show how literary fiction, by deploying words against a background of imagined circumstances, allows us to focus on the roots, in social practice, of the meanings by which we represent our world and ourselves. Engaging with philosophers and theorists as diverse as Wittgenstein, Sartre, Merleau-Ponty, Foucault, Derrida, F. R. Leavis, Cleanth Brooks, and Stanley Fish, and illustrating his ideas through readings of works by Swift, Woolf, Appelfeld, and Dickens, among others, this book presents a systematic defense of humanism in literary studies, and of the study of the Humanities more generally, by a distinguished scholar.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gzkgb

FOUR Leavis and Wittgenstein (1): from: What Is Fiction For?
Abstract: The main lines of the defense of literary humanism offered in chapter 3 were originally worked out in a series of essays that were the basis for some of the later chapters in this book. When I wrote them, my acquaintance with the work of F. R. Leavis was minimal. Readers of these essays were not long in pointing out to me, however, that some of the notions developed in them – notably, that of literature as one of the main activities involved in the constitution of “human worlds” – bear a strong family resemblance to related ideas advanced, with similar goals

Epilogue: from: What Is Fiction For?
Abstract: Part of my purpose in this book, as set out in chapter 1, has been to defend academic literary studies as a cornerstone of the humanities. That can hardly be done unless it can be shown that some works of literature are more worth studying than others, because they are better as literaturethan others. Why, otherwise, spend time and energy discussing Shakespeare or Sterne with students; why allocate the funds to support the departments, the journals, and the postgraduate research that constitute the essential infrastructure of such teaching if those students’ time might as well be spent in the

3 Latin American Philosophy and Liberation: from: Latin American Philosophy from Identity to Radical Exteriority
Abstract: In the previous chapters we found a call for recognizing Latin American philosophy, which may be traced back to the 1940s and 1950s in the work of Leopoldo Zea, along with other Latin American philosophers such as Arturo Ardao in Uruguay and Francisco Romero in Argentina. For these philosophers the fundamental questions were those of the identity, sense, and possibilities of a Latin American philosophy. As discussed in chapter 2, Salazar Bondy responded to these questions in 1968, and Leopoldo Zea engaged with that negative critique in 1969 in Latin American Philosophy as Philosophy and No More.¹ Latin American philosophy

Book Title: Levinas and the Crisis of Humanism- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): KATZ CLAIRE ELISE
Abstract: Reexamining Emmanuel Levinas's essays on Jewish education, Claire Elise Katz provides new insights into the importance of education and its potential to transform a democratic society, for Levinas's larger philosophical project. Katz examines Levinas's "Crisis of Humanism," which motivated his effort to describe a new ethical subject. Taking into account his multiple influences on social science and the humanities, and his various identities as a Jewish thinker, philosopher, and educator, Katz delves deeply into Levinas's works to understand the grounding of this ethical subject.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gzn65

6 Teaching, Fecundity, Responsibility from: Levinas and the Crisis of Humanism
Abstract: Emmanuel Levinas returned to Paris immediately following the murderous years of World War II, during which he served as an interpreter before his unit was captured. He then spent the duration of the war, 1940–1945, first in Frontstalags in Rennes and Laval, then at Vesoul, and from June 1942 until May 1945 at Stalag 11B at Fallingbostel near Magdeburg in Germany.³ Upon his return and without delay, he went to work for the Alliance Israélite Universelle (AIU) and in 1947 became the director of the École Normale Israélite Orientale (ENIO). At the event celebrating the occasion of Levinas’s eightieth

1 From Ecological Postmodernism to Material Ecocriticism: from: Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Oppermann Serpil
Abstract: The conception of physical reality within the framework of ecological postmodern thought and the nature of the material world described by quantum theory have recently been given new life by the emergence of the new materialist paradigm. The radical revisions of our ideas about the description of physical entities, chemical and biological processes, and their ethical, political, and cultural implications represented in recent discourses of feminist science studies, posthumanism, and the environmental humanities have also occasioned considerable interest among ecocritics, leading to the emergence of material ecocriticism. Proposing that we can read the world as matter endowed with stories, material

9 Semiotization of Matter: from: Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Maran Timo
Abstract: A basic claim of the newly developing field of material ecocriticism appears to be that matter has agency and embodied meanings and that it is possible to decipher this matter in the framework of textual criticism. As Serenella Iovino has put it in her ISLEintroductory essay on material ecocriticism, “The ‘material turn’ is the search for new conceptual models apt to theorize the connections between matter and agency on the one side, and the intertwining of bodies, natures, and meanings on the other side” (“Stories” 450). Material ecocriticism, she continues, “comes from the idea that it is possible to

14 Corporeal Fieldwork and Risky Art: from: Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Glotfelty Cheryll
Abstract: It may go without saying that a landscape photographer must do fieldwork. How can you take a picture of a place without being there? But this very presumption of physical presence tends to obscure the role of fieldwork in landscape photo graphy, a process that resonates strongly with the material turn in ecocritical theory. Photographer Peter Goin (b. 1951) has devoted more than thirty years to photographing altered landscapes in America, documenting the legacy of human actions on the land. Author of more than a dozen books and recipient of numerous awards, including two National Endowment for the Arts fellowships,

16 Source of Life: from: Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Adamson Joni
Abstract: At the end of the eighteenth century, German intellectual and scientist Alexander von Humboldt traveled to the Amazon. Later, back in Europe, the publication of his five-volume Cosmoswould influence a generation of thinkers on several continents. Today, his work still resonates strongly among scholars who are studying “the material interactions of bodies and natures” (Iovino and Oppermann, “Material” 77). According to Laura Dassow Walls, who describes the impact of his journey on both the sciences and the aesthetics of the Americas in her book A Passage to Cosmos, Humboldt considered “nature” as “a planetary interactive causal network operating across

TWO The Semiotics of Culture and the Diagnostics of Criticism: from: Ideas to Live For
Abstract: In an essay in progress at the time of his death, Lionel Trilling initiated an unusually fruitful dialogue with the social and cultural anthropologist Clifford Geertz.⁵ The ostensible reason for Trilling’s interest in Geertz’s work was the way it confirmed certain suspicions Trilling had come to entertain about the traditional assumptions of humanistic scholarship as a result of a course he had recently taught on Jane Austen. However, the substance of his own unfinished meditation, together with Geertz’s subsequent response, possesses a critical importance that far transcends the particular circumstances of their origin.⁶ By setting the discussion of literary as

1 Reflections on Heraclitus from: The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: The work of Heraclitus, unlike the work of Plato or Aristotle, has come down to us only in fragments preserved in various ancient sources that cited his work. As Charles Kahn has pointed out, every age has “projected its own meaning and its own preoccupations onto the text of Heraclitus.”¹ His fragments have had a peculiar attraction in modern times. Hegel said that there was not a single fragment (or “proposition”) that had not found a place in his System.² Nietzsche drew deeply from them. He claimed that “what he (Heraclitus) saw, the teaching of law in becomingand of

3 Plato’s Line Revisited: from: The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: The Platonic dialogues are not treatises in disguise. They are protreptic and proleptic instruments, positioning the reader dispositionally and providing hints for the work of completing the direction of thought by attending to “the things themselves,” the phenomena to which human beings, properly attuned, have native access. Plato, I would contend, is a proto-phenomenologist whose dialogues yield significant coherent results when approached from that point of view.

8 The Heart in/of Augustine’s Confessions: from: The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: Corappears at the beginning of the work in one of its most memorable lines: “You have made us for Yourself, O Lord; and our hearts are restless and will not rest until they rest in You” (I, i, I/2.).¹ The divine correlate appears at the end of Augustine’s search in the vision of “Beauty ever ancient,

15 The Free Spirit: from: The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: One hears in Hegel that freedom is the recognition of necessity;¹ one reads in Nietzsche that the free spirit is characterized by amor fatias the will to the Eternal Recurrence of the Same.² It seems that we have identical, if paradoxical, claims. Both of them find affinities in Spinoza, for whom everything follows with rigid necessity, and the free man is one who is privileged by the working of necessity to recognize that fact by rising above the appetites that cloud the mind.³ Awareness of belonging to the Whole and accepting the necessity of fate link Nietzsche to Spinoza

17 The Phenomenologists from: The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: What is Phenomenology? Externally considered, it is a philosophical movement that originated in Germany at the turn of the nineteenth into the twentieth century, found its classic inspiration in the sustained work of Edmund Husserl, and developed in differing ways in thinkers like Max Scheler, Martin Heidegger, Jean-Paul Sartre, and Merleau-Ponty, more recently in Paul Ricoeur and Hans-Georg Gadamer and most recently in figures like Jean-Luc Marion. It continues to have wide impact in such diverse areas as the philosophy of physical science and mathematics, psychology, psychiatry, sociology, legal theory, economics, history, literature, political science, linguistics, anthropology, aesthetics, and religion.

18 Six Heideggerian Figures from: The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: Throughout Heidegger’s works, six figures, exhibiting six different ways of life, emerge, the exposition and comparison of which might help to bring his thought into focus. I will call them the ways of the peasant, the artist-poet, the philosopher, the scientist, the man on the street, and the thinker. The peasant and the contemporary man on the street exhibit ways of life that have to be constructed out of Heidegger’s concerns, but they throw light on the other ways. They help illuminate what Being-in-the-world entails. The first two ways, that of the peasant and that of the artist-poet, antedate the

Book Title: The Incarnate Lord- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): WHITE THOMAS JOSEPH
Abstract: The Incarnate Lord, then, considers central themes in Christology from a metaphysical perspective. Particular attention is given to the hypostatic union, the two natures of Christ, the knowledge and obedience of Jesus, the passion and death of Christ, his descent into hell, and resurrection. A central concern of the book is to argue for the perennial importance of ontological principles of Christology inherited from patristic and scholastic authors. However, the book also seeks to advance an interpretation of Thomistic Christology in a modern context. The teaching Aquinas, then, is central to the study, but it is placed in conversation with various modern theologians, such as Karl Barth, Karl Rahner and Hans Urs von Balthasar. Ultimately the goal of the work is to suggest how traditional Catholic theology might thrive under modern conditions, and also develop fruitfully from engaging in contemporary controversies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16ptn5b

The Symbology of the Serpent in the Gospel of John from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Charlesworth James H.
Abstract: Over the past two decades, specialists on the Gospel of John have customarily focused on the translation, composition-history, and exegesis of this masterpiece. Less attention is addressed to the symbolic world of the Evangelist. That dimension of Johannine studies is now much clearer, thanks to archaeological research and the study of symbolism (see Charlesworth 2006 and 2008), otherwise known as symbology. The present work will illustrate this emerging clarity by exploring the deeper and fuller meaning of an incredibly rich and well-known section of the Fourth Gospel: John 3:13–17.

Aspects of Historicity in the Fourth Gospel: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Anderson Paul N.
Abstract: In reflecting upon the above treatments of aspects of historicity in the Fourth Gospel, a multiplicity of approaches and disciplines is here employed in getting at a common interest: the historical character of the Johannine tradition and ways in which it casts light upon the Jesus of history—his intentions, doings, teachings, travels, and receptions, as well as impressions, memories, interpretations, narrations, and writings about him in later settings. The division of the Gospel of John into three sections involving chapters 1–4, 5–12, and 13–21 works well as a means of dividing up the ministry of Jesus

CHAPTER 5 Story and Eucharist from: Speak Thus
Abstract: The thought and practice of sixteenth-century Anabaptism seem peculiar to many moderns precisely because modernity has no conceptual framework capable of correctly understanding the movement. Recent philosophical trends within postmodernity, however, provide fresh models for reassessing Anabaptism in terms more attuned to Anabaptism’s unique character. Some working within the Anglo-American strains of postmodernity have addressed and advanced post-Enlightenment thought in a remarkably successful manner, especially in regard to theology.¹ In this idiom, George Lindbeck is prominent among recent scholars using postmodern philosophy to help us imagine new ways of thinking about theology, particularly regarding the nature of religion, doctrine, and

CHAPTER 6 Forester, Bricoleur, and Country Bumpkin from: Speak Thus
Abstract: The introduction of Aristotle into the Christian world posed serious critical challenges, especially at the University of Paris in the 1260s and 1270s, and much of what resulted from this introduction received formal condemnation by Stephen Tempier, the bishop of Paris, in 1277. Many thought that Aquinas had not sufficiently distanced himself from the heterodox interpreters of Aristotle in his appropriation of the philosopher for Christian doctrine. Today Aquinas’s work is again at the center of a crisis, but in many ways an opposite one. Since Pope Leo XIII, in the 1879 encyclical Aeterni Patris, rekindled interest in Aquinas as

Book Title: The Renaissance of emotion-Understanding affect in Shakespeare and his contemporaries
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Sullivan Erin
Abstract: This collection of essays offers a major reassessment of the meaning and significance of emotional experience in the work of Shakespeare and his contemporaries. Recent scholarship on early modern emotion has relied on a medical-historical approach, resulting in a picture of emotional experience that stresses the dominance of the material, humoral body. The Renaissance of emotion seeks to redress this balance by examining the ways in which early modern texts explore emotional experience from perspectives other than humoral medicine. The chapters in the book seek to demonstrate how open, creative and agency-ridden the experience and interpretation of emotion could be. Taken individually, the chapters offer much-needed investigations into previously overlooked areas of emotional experience and signification; taken together, they offer a thorough re-evaluation of the cultural priorities and phenomenological principles that shaped the understanding of the emotive self in the early modern period. The Renaissance of emotion will be of particular interest to students and scholars of Shakespeare and Renaissance literature, the history of emotion, theatre and cultural history, and the history of ideas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1729w4d

1 The passions of Thomas Wright: from: The Renaissance of emotion
Author(s) Sullivan Erin
Abstract: In the study of Renaissance emotion, especially in relation to Shakespeare and his contemporaries, it doesn’t take long before coming across the work of Thomas Wright ( c.1561–1623).¹ HisThe Passions of the Minde in Generall, first published in 1601, has become something of a touchstone for literary scholars, offering a detailed description of embodied passion that has often been used as a gloss on dramatic and poetic representations of affective experience. In 2004 Mary Floyd-Wilson described Wright’sThe Passionsas ‘a handbook on rhetoric and the management of one’s emotions’, and a decade later one could be forgiven

7 What’s happiness in Hamlet? from: The Renaissance of emotion
Author(s) Chamberlain Richard
Abstract: The emotions are not simply a matter for literature: critics have them too. Or, more interestingly, perhaps, they play an important role in the critical process which goes far beyond any naively expressive response to the emotional content of literary works. The reading of Hamletpresented here raises this as a problem in the theory and history of emotions, in that it foregrounds the questions of what happiness and unhappiness are, and of how they might best be deployed in acts of criticism. Happiness, one might think, must be scarce enough in this play, and indeed it is, at least

Afterword from: The Renaissance of emotion
Author(s) Holbrook Peter
Abstract: Samuel Johnson said that reading Shakespeare would help ‘a confessor predict the progress of the passions’.¹ Shakespeare’s works have always been a prime location of powerful and intense feeling, telling us that passion is not just an unavoidable but a positive aspect of human experience. ‘O, you are men of stones!’ cries Lear at the end of his play to those around him: there is something morally wrong with restraint of feeling at this dreadful moment.² Cold-heartedness, lack of feeling, a cool, detached perspective on life: all that is declared by Lear to be less-than-human. As Johnson’s remark indicates, Shakespeare’s

Catholicism and the Struggle for Memory: from: Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Gehri Gonzalo Gamio
Abstract: The work of memory is an ethical act. Among its foci can be the recollection of violence. In 2001, a truth and reconciliation commission, or Comisión de la Verdad y Reconciliación (CVR), was established by the transitional government of Valentín Paniagua to examine atrocities committed during the 1980s and 1990s, when Peru was plagued by the worst violence in its history. The CVR was given a two-year term to produce a rigorous research on the violence. The final report was completed and published in 2003.

Roman Catholic Sisters and the Cultivation of Citizenship in the United States: from: Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Murphy Bren Ortega
Abstract: In 2009, an extraordinary exhibit started touring the United States. What made this exhibit so remarkable was that it was telling a story to the US public about an important part of their history that few had heard before. Women and Spirit: Catholic Sisters in Americapresented the complex, compelling story of what Catholic sisters have contributed and continue to contribute to the lives of not just Catholic Americans but all Americans. Working in education, health care, social work, disaster relief, immigration aid, and numerous other fields, Catholic sisters built remarkable institutions and formed democratic citizens.

Rendering unto Caesar? from: Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Schraeder Peter J.
Abstract: Observers of the complex relationship between church and state have noted throughout history that religious activity seems greater where religion is more free from state regulation.¹ Yet it is only recently that social scientists began systematically working out the mechanisms by which varying levels of church-state separation have contributed to enhanced religious vitality and religiously based political activism, most notably in support for transitions toward democracy. Indeed, the last quarter century has been marked by an increase in scholarship exploring the role and compatibility of various religious traditions with the spread and consolidation of democratic practices. Such research has included

Book Title: Keeping the Feast-Metaphors of Sacrifice in 1 Corinthians and Philippians
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Patterson Jane Lancaster
Abstract: Clarification of the strategic function of metaphors as a means of establishing an imaginative framework for ethical deliberationEvidence of Paul's active processes of theological reflectionExploration of the intertwining of Jewish cultic practice with the rhetoric of moral commitment within early Christian churches
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt17kk6wx

4 Sacrifice as an Object of Study from: Keeping the Feast
Abstract: Sacrifice has been a widely practiced human act, various in its details, variously understood by those who have sought to explain it, and now almost unknown as an actual practice in developed countries. Most of those who have written on the subject would agree that sacrifice “means something” or “accomplishes something” beyond what is strictly observed, though most primary texts on sacrifice focus on what is done, not on what itmeans.J. H. M. Beattie wrote in 1980, “sacrificial ritual, like other rites, is a form of art, a drama, which is believed by its performers … to work.

7 Conclusions, Romans, and a Look Ahead from: Keeping the Feast
Abstract: Much of this work has concerned the resonanceof metaphors and the importance of developing anearfor how it is that metaphors of sacrifice function in particular Pauline letters. So it is perhaps not out of line to make a comparison between Paul’s complex use of metaphors and something else that creates a very complicated, multi-layered sound.

ARGENTINA from: Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Oulton María Luján
Abstract: In Argentina over the last thirty years, the consumption of technology in general, and video games in particular, has increased due to the new distribution platforms (social networks) and the massive use of mobile devices (such as tablets and smartphones). These “cultural products” (Garcia Canclini 1999) have allowed millions of users to be connected online simultaneously. These global technologies helped digital games become a mass-consumption product.

INDIA from: Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Mukherjee Souvik
Abstract: India is the sleeping giant of the video game world. Recent developments in the industry and the entry of new gaming consoles, however, mark a significant shift in the culture and reception of video games. As game designer Ernest Adams comments, “India has the talent, the resources, and the attitudes required to become a major player in this industry. All [they are] lacking is experience, and that will come with training and time” (Adams 2009). Adams’s optimism is echoed by Thomas Friedman in The World Is Flatwith the warning, “So today India is ahead, but it has to work

VENEZUELA from: Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Apperley Thomas H.
Abstract: The central role of information in the global networked society creates and entrenches regions of inclusion and exclusion, thus establishing classes of locations and people that are not valued by, or fully connected to, global networked society. Two worlds are emerging: “one is information as well as economically rich, the other is information and economically poor” (Yar 2008, 617). However, new forms of communication that are emerging on the same networks also offer feasible strategies for economic and social inclusion (Martin-Barbero 2011, 47). In Venezuela, digital games are one of these technologies that potentially both increase and mitigate forms of mitigate

1 ʺKNOW THYSELFʺ: from: Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Mallgrave Harry Francis
Abstract: It is no secret that architects generally pride themselves on being artists. Design education begins with elementary artistic exercises, and professional and nonprofessional journals today consider the architect to be an important arbiter of taste within the arts, in the same way that a generation or two ago the work of Mondrian or Matisse personified the idea of a transformative modernity. But wherein resides the “art” within the “art of building” ( Baukunst)? I do not raise this question disparagingly, but I do mean to be provocative. Does the artistic component of an architectural design reside in its creativity, composition, good

2 THE EMBODIED MEANING OF ARCHITECTURE from: Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Johnson Mark L.
Abstract: Human beings are creatures of the flesh who arrange spaces and physical structures fitted to their bodies. We live in and through our ongoing interactions with environments that are both physical and cultural. The structures we make are loosely adapted to the functions we perform. Some of these functions are necessary for our survival and flourishing, such as working, eating, having shelter, playing, and sleeping. However, we also order our environments to enhance meaning in our lives and to open up possibilities for deepened and enriched experience. In other words, although we are animals evolved for fitness, we are just

4 TOWARD A NEUROSCIENCE OF THE DESIGN PROCESS from: Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Arbib Michael
Abstract: While I have come up with three different ways in which neuroscience might inform the work of architects, here I will emphasize the neuroscience of the design process, whose central question is: “What can we understand about the brain of the architect as he or she designs a building?” I will offer only a preliminary analysis, but hope to encourage further thinking about how the design process can be illuminated more and more by future research in neuroscience. In addition, I will briefly introduce the two other areas: one is theneuroscience of the experience of architecture: not what goes

6 ARCHITECTURE AND NEUROSCIENCE: from: Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Eberhard John Paul
Abstract: “How would you like to move back to Washington and organize a program to respond to Dr. Salk’s challenge?” Norman Koonce, the President of the American Architectural Foundation, and Syl Damianos, Chancellor of the College of Fellows of the American Institute of Architects, asked. At sixty-eight, I had recently retired as Head of the architecture program at Carnegie Mellon University, and was not expecting to return to work again—but how could I refuse such an offer?

7 NESTED BODIES from: Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Robinson Sarah
Abstract: We are bodies who start inside other bodies. Most of us think we know what our body is: it is the fleshy whole we inhabit; but the dictionary defines the word “body” much more broadly. A body is the entire material or physical structure of an individual organism; it is also an entity composed of numerous members—of people, things, concepts, or processes—a student body, a body of work, a body of evidence, the body politic. Body is used to describe the main or central part of something—the body of a temple, for instance. It can also describe

10 NEUROSCIENCE FOR ARCHITECTURE from: Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Albright Thomas D.
Abstract: Buildings serve many purposes. One might argue that their primary function is to provide shelter for the inhabitants and their possessions—a place to stay warm and dry, and to sleep without fear of predators or pathogens. Buildings also provide spaces to safely contain and facilitate social groups focused on learning, work, or play. And they provide for privacy, a space for solace and retreat from the social demands of human existence. These primary physical requirements, and their many subsidiaries, simply reflect the fact that we are biological creatures. In addition to building constraints dictated by site, materials, and budget,

Book Title: Luther and Liberation-A Latin American Perspective
Publisher: Augsburg Fortres
Author(s): Altmann Walter
Abstract: With the approach of the 500th anniversary of Martin Luther’s inauguration of the Protestant Reformation and the burgeoning dialogue between Catholics and Lutherans opened under Pope Francis, this new edition of Walter Altmann’s Luther and Liberation is timely and relevant. Luther and Liberation recovers the liberating and revolutionary impact of Luther’s theology, read afresh from the perspective of the Latin American context. Altmann provides a much-needed reassessment of Luther’s significance today through a direct engagement of Luther’s historical situation with an eye keenly situated on the deeply contextual situation of the contemporary reader, giving a localized reading from the author’s own experience in Latin America. The work examines with fresh vigor Luther’s central theological commitments, such as his doctrine of God, Christology, justification, hermeneutics, and ecclesiology, and his forays into economics, politics, education, violence, and war. This new edition greatly expands the original text with fresh scholarship and updated sources, footnotes, and bibliography, and contains several additional new chapters on Luther’s doctrine of God, theology of the sacraments, his controversial perspective on the Jews, and a new comparative account with the Latin American liberation theology tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt17mcsdm

3 In the Cross of Christ, Victory over All Evil from: Luther and Liberation
Abstract: How can we understand the redemptive work of Christ, according to Luther, and what is its significance for us today, in our specific context?

10 Education from: Luther and Liberation
Abstract: Luther’s first treatise on educational issues, written in 1524, is mainly what will be considered here, being a more programmatic writing.² The second, A Sermon on Keeping Children in School,³ from 1530, contains essentially the same ideas but is a more casual and pastoral piece. After six years, some cities had created schools, following Luther’s proposals. The problem was then parents’ resistance in sending their children to school, as they would lack their labor as workhands. The 1530 treatise is, then, an exhortation to parents to send their children to school.

11 The Economy and the Community from: Luther and Liberation
Abstract: In 1520, Luther wrote a sermon on usury. In 1524, he picked up the theme again, writing the work Trade and Usury, which is the main subject of this assessment on Luther’s conception of economics. The writing on the “common chest” of Leisnig from 1523 was selected to represent a creative and innovative attempt to tackle the main social problems that Luther detected. In 1539/40 Luther would again focus on issues of economic policy in a specific and particularly virulent writing against the practice of usury,³ demonstrating how this particular concern was not merely occasional but corresponded to a deep

Epilogue from: Luther and Liberation
Abstract: October 31, 2017, will be the culmination of celebrations in preparation and already underway for the 500th anniversary of the Reformation. Luther will be persistently evoked. The center of attention will be, without doubt, the town of Wittenberg, Germany, where Luther worked and wrote virtually all his voluminous works. However, he will be remembered all around the world. For the movement of the Reformation, which began there, and took shape over the centuries and in diverse ways, has spread to all continents. It will be, therefore, not a “German” but a “global” anniversary.

1 Deep Dialogue with Evans-Pritchard from: Divination’s Grasp
Abstract: This chapter reconsiders Edward Evans-Pritchard’s Witchcraft Oracles and Magic among the Azande(1937) as an open work with a remarkably controversial reception, still problematic, still richly illuminating. In it, Evans-Pritchard deliberately gave no academic citations to display theoretical sources and intellectual origins; he added no footnotes to tell who matters for the arguments. Hence a final interpretation must escape us. Instead, the present analysis, which discloses a deep dialogue, primarily with Malinowski and Lévy-Bruhl, rescues Evans-Pritchard’s textual method, and not merely his praise for observation.

4 Poetics and Archives from: Divination’s Grasp
Abstract: In this chapter, my approach turns to a more integrated, formal analysis. The need for this move comes from a comparative interest. Across considerable time, distance, and much cultural difference in southern Africa, a remarkable family of resemblances prevails in classic wisdom divination, in its poetry and its imaginative interpretation by diviners. What is very broadly shared is a common framework, similar standards of significance, like stereotypes, archetypes and imagery, roughly the same sociologic of patriarchy and male dominance.

9 The Charismatic Séance: from: Divination’s Grasp
Abstract: This chapter examines how a charismatic séance by Morebodi worked on several fronts at once: on the practical, material, and physical realities, on the sense of spiritual inspiration, and on the subjective person of each of his clients. In turn, they were oriented, at least in the diviner’s rhetoric, as persons in an ordered cosmos that included invisible beings. Here, my main interest is in the vicissitudes of consultation. My account traces shifts from moment to moment, in an actual and filmed séance and later in post-séance events, some of which reconstitute the meaning of the séance in the eyes

9 DISTINCTIONS IN THE IMAGINATION OF HARM IN CONTEMPORARY MIJIKENDA THOUGHT: from: Evil in Africa
Author(s) CIEKAWY DIANE
Abstract: In discussions about spirit aggression and human agents of harm, Mijikenda,¹ whose lifeworld is centered in the coastal hinterland of Kenya, assert particular views about the importance of moral action. Their claims are imbedded in a complex of thought and practice that has been described by various works on Mijikenda religion, most notably by David Parkin in Sacred Void: Spatial Images of Work and Ritual among the Giriama of Kenya(1991). His comprehensive volume details central dimensions of Mijikenda thought and practice and offers conceptual schemes that provide a foundation for contemporary scholarship.

12 REFLECTIONS REGARDING GOOD AND EVIL: from: Evil in Africa
Author(s) LARSEN KJERSTI
Abstract: This essay addresses the moral category of evil from an anthropological perspective. For that reason I shall explore “evil” from a particular ontology rather than as a universal concept. This is the only approach that could disclose understandings that may challenge the dominant emic Judeo-Christian theological or philosophical framework. Investigating the manner in which evil is embedded in cosmologies of the everyday, I shall pay attention to practice including discourse as, within this domain, it would only rarely be elaborated in any abstract mode. Furthermore, being attentive to how evil is perceived and identified through its practice renders possible a

4 Apes and Cannibals in Cambria: from: A Tolerant Nation?
Author(s) BOHATA KIRSTI
Abstract: The late eighteenth- and nineteenth-century imperial project to define the distinctive ethnological and ‘racial’ features of the peoples of empire (as well as the various types of European) had a profound influence on the way different races, nationalities, cultures and even classes were viewed. Fundamental to this project were the supposedly empirical sciences of physical anthropology, such as physiology, phrenology and craniology. The forms of ‘knowledge’ derived from these studies became part of the popular consciousness and, despite the complex characteristics of cultures and peoples, powerful stereotypes were constructed that often denied realities or, indeed, even worked to alter perceived

6 Through the Prism of Ethnic Violence: from: A Tolerant Nation?
Author(s) EVANS NEIL
Abstract: Historical work on ethnic relations in Wales has frequently focussed on the riot. This has been the case for a variety of reasons. Often riots have drawn the attention of historians to an aspect of Welsh society that would otherwise have been hidden under the layers of the myth of tolerance. Secondly, major social conflicts frequently generate a large amount of comment and this enables a reconstruction of attitudes and structures of relationships to be undertaken for the past. This point shades into the third point, which is that such evidence allows the use of a social drama approach to

8 Changing the Archive: from: A Tolerant Nation?
Author(s) WEEDON CHRIS
Abstract: Recent years have seen the rise of widespread interest in cultural and collective memory and their relation to history, power, voice, identity and representation. This interest is shared by family, local and academic history, museums and community projects and increasingly groups that perceive themselves as marginal to mainstream national and public history. The authors of this chapter have over twenty-five years of experience working with people’s history and community memories. These are areas that we will argue are particularly important in multi-ethnic societies like Wales where they are tied to issues of roots, identity and belonging.

9 Religious Diversity in Wales from: A Tolerant Nation?
Author(s) CHAMBERS PAUL
Abstract: Welsh religious belief and practice has historically been associated with Nonconformity and an egalitarian religious practice grounded in the local chapel and the Welsh language and culture. Nonconformism emerged as a significant cultural and social force in Welsh society in the late eighteenth century and was consolidated in the nineteenth century. Grounded in religious and cultural dissent and subject to constant schisms, the religious landscape of Welsh was dotted with a patchwork of small Protestant denominations, sects and independent congregations. Taken individually, these groups were diverse in matters of belief and politics. Taken together they constituted something rather more significant,

14 Claiming the National: from: A Tolerant Nation?
Author(s) WILLIAMS CHARLOTTE
Abstract: In over a decade of devolution Welshness has been reclaimed and reworked in new and interesting ways. Debates about nation and national identity may have always been a Welsh preoccupation but devolution has served to focus them more sharply in academic research and writing, in the arts and literature and in the public consciousness. The achievement of a measure of self-governance by a small but highly self-conscious nation was bound to carry symbolic significance in terms of Welsh identity, perhaps more so than the disruptions of constitutional reform itself. Counter narratives have emerged that have challenged dominant versions of Welsh

9 Serial / Simultaneous from: Time
Author(s) GARDNER JARED
Abstract: 1905 is famously Albert Einstein’s annus mirabilis, the year in which the patent office worker wrote a series of papers that would change forever the way in which physicists understood the universe, especially how time and its navigation would be reimagined in the twentieth century. After centuries of Newtonian physics, time was no longer absolute, nor was it any longer separate from the three dimensions that defined space. Einstein’s special theory of relativity highlighted the paradoxical relationship between two seemingly contradictory models of time:seriality, as the model that corresponds with how we experience time; andsimultaneity, as the model

11 Labor / Leisure from: Time
Author(s) ANABLE AUBREY
Abstract: In 1930, the economist John Maynard Keynes predicted that by 2030 the wealth created by new technologies would bring about an era of universal leisure.¹ We can safely say that Keynes’s prediction was way off the mark.² In the West, the postwar transformations of work—from the computerization of factories and offices to the outsourcing of manufacturing jobs to the global south—have changed the labor landscape dramatically since 1930. Still, labor, not leisure, structures the vast majority of people’s time. Labor—a word that names both the kind of remunerated work that we do and also how that work

8 Future’s Past: from: Critical Trauma Studies
Author(s) Schwab Gabriele M.
Abstract: Martin Beck Matuštík: In Holocaust studies, “second generation” has come to describe children of the survivors. Among key formative impacts on this area would be, for example, Holocaust literature as well as memoir narrative (Helen Epstein, Primo Levi, Elie Wiesel), the Yale Video Archive Testimony project (Larry Langer, Geoffrey Hartman, Shoshana Felman, Dori Laub), and theoretical struggles with representation, meaning, and faith including the memorial, political, and clinical repair work of coming to terms with the past and open future. It took you many years of courage, thinking, listening, and personal working through to offer your testimony as a member

9 “No Other Tale to Tell”: from: Critical Trauma Studies
Author(s) WICKS AMANDA
Abstract: As a temporal disruption, trauma dislocates individuals from the integrated, narrative context of personal memory and collective history.¹ Thrust into the role of survivor, trauma victims often fail to understand and navigate their new position, since trauma initially exists as an absence in the mind.² Following the initial failure to remember, trauma comes to be situated on the margins of consciousness—implicit memory and dreams—as the brain takes on the work of comprehension and meaning making that cannot yet be faced when cognizant.³ Those who emerge into trauma’s afterfind themselves confronting endless repetitions of their experience, an experience

[Part Two. Introduction] from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Abstract: The contributions to this part deal with reception as a crucial part of the communication process: they stress the issue of internal experience as an integral part of musical understanding. As such, the contributions move from semantic to semiotic and hermeneutic questions: what does music mean and how does it mean? Starting from music’s so-called inabilityto function referentially, it could be claimed that music expresses nothing but itself. But what does music represent? How do we read the musical work and what are the levels of sense-making in the imposition of meaning on the music? Contrary to the centrifugal

Reading a Work of Music from the Perspective of Integral Interpretation from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Tomaszewski Mieczysław
Abstract: I think one can agree with the idea that the primary task of the theory of music, its foundation and its point of departure irrespective of its methodological orientation consists in interpreting a work of music as a result of its reading. A work of music is thus understood as a human product for humans, its task being to delight, to stir emotions and to convey meanings and senses. In this system, the interpreter functions as a competent mediator who, by reading the work in the entirety of its inimitable features, helps others to open their ears and eyes, awakens

La musique au second degré: from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) de Castro Paulo F.
Abstract: The concept of intertextuality was originally developed in the context of poststructuralist literary theory by Julia Kristeva, who introduced the term (ca. 1966) in the wake of her engagement with Mikhail Bakhtin’s notion of dialogism. At around the same time, in L’archéologie du savoir, Michel Foucault was writing about the open borders of the book and the way every book is caught up in a system of references to other books (or texts), comparing it to a node within a network (Foucault, 1969, p. 34). The termintertextuality, quickly seized upon and given wide currency by Roland Barthes among other

Where to Draw the Line? from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Wierød Lea Maria Lucas
Abstract: Musicology has always been puzzled with semantic questions: does music have meaning? The difficulty lies in music’s inability to function referentially. One might say that literature suffers from the opposite problem: verbal texts contain a centrifugal tendency to direct the recipient’s attention away from their artwork character (form) in favor of their referential message (content) (Kyndrup, 2011, p. 87). However, the specific case of poetry (as opposed to prose) often displays a certain quality that maneuvers attention toward the form of the message itself; a move notably termed the poetic functionby Jakobson (1987, p. 69). This can be understood

Musical Semiotics and Analogical Reference from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Zbikowski Lawrence M.
Abstract: I should like to begin my consideration of the relationship between musical semiotics and analogical reference with a musical example drawn from Joseph Haydn’s oratorio The Creation, which had its premiere in April of 1798. The text for the oratorio comes from one reportedly assembled for but never used by Georg Friedrich Handel, and which was translated and abridged for Haydn’s use by Baron Gottfried van Swieten. The text is a compilation of familiar quotations from the books of Genesis and Psalms with lines reworked from Milton’sParadise Lost, and offers any number of opportunities for pictorial representation. The instance

[Part Four. Introduction] from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Abstract: Intermedial and transdisciplinary investigations are of the utmost importance in contemporary research on theoretical musicology. The next four contributions are illustrative of these developments. They deal with the analysis of medialproperties in terms of perception and analyze the borders between media and possibilities of “intermedial” referencing. This is especially true for musical performance and movie productions, which need a theoretical framework for a complex analysis that takes into account elements from the fields of the visual, advertising and web semiotics. The broadening of the field and scope of musicology by including music, pop culture, gender issues, rhetoric, advertisement and

CHAPTER TWO Mestizaje in Colonial Mexican Art from: Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) WICKSTROM STEFANIE
Abstract: Addressing ambivalence in established categories of colonial art in Mexico, this chapter proposes a “mestizo” category to characterize works of visual art elaborated during the Viceroyalty of New Spain, mainly in the sixteenth century. Those works of interest here are devotional paintings, sculptures, and the doors and façades of a number of architectural complexes, which integrate aesthetic and iconographic elements common to Western European art and pre-Columbian art of Mesoamerica. I address the connection between mestizajeand culture in art, although mestizaje in Mexico often refers to race.

CHAPTER EIGHT From Mestizos to Mashikuna: from: Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) FINE-DARE KATHLEEN S.
Abstract: This chapter provides a brief study of how some working-class residents of Ecuador’s capital city of Quito are currently (re)constructing aspects of Indigenous identity through strategies that once might have been labeled passive processes of acculturation (cultural borrowing) or mestizaje(race mixture). Through complex and often convergent mechanisms of discourse and urban sociality, indigeneity is today going through a pro cess of redefinition in this part of the Andes, less through the application of criteria of race or language than through the following: participation in cultural per for mances such as music, dance, and private ceremonies; the deployment of new

Book Title: Religion Without Redemption-Social Contradictions and Awakened Dreams in Latin America
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Löwy Michael
Abstract: The world’s eyes are on Latin America as a place of radical political inspiration and as an alternative to the neoliberal model. Each country in the region deals differently in its method of government, yet there are common cultural themes that tie the continent’s trajectory together. Religion without Redemption looks at the sociology of religion, political philosophy and the history of ideas of the continent, in an attempt to show how Western understanding fails to come close to a correct analysis of how and why political and economic characteristics work as they do. Luis Martínez Andrade focuses on how the centrality of religion for the people of Latin America has influenced how they interact with the changes in the modern economic system. Capitalism, for example, has taken on religious characteristics: it has sacred places of worship (the shopping mall) as well as its own prophets. Martínez Andrade discusses how this form of ‘cultural religion’ accompanies many aspects of life in a contradictory manner: not only does it fulfil the role of legitimating oppression, it also can be a powerful source of rebellion, unveiling thus a subversive side to the status quo. Religion Without Redemption advances the ideas of liberation theory into the 21st century, and challenges the provincialism to which many Latin American thinkers are usually consigned.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183gzrq

3 Fieldwork and Ethnography from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: Anthropology distinguishes itself from the other social sciences through the strong emphasis placed on ethnographic fieldwork as the most important source of new knowledge about society and culture. A field study may last for a few months, a year, or even two years or more, and it aims to develop as intimate an understanding as possible of the phenomena investigated. Many anthropologists return to the same field throughout their career, to deepen their understanding further or to record change. Although there are differences in field methods between different anthropological schools, it is generally agreed that the anthropologist ought to stay

5 Local Organisation from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: Much of the empirical material necessary for anthropological thinking and research is still obtained through studies of local communities. Most classic anthropological analyses are based on detailed descriptions of culture and social organisation in a delineated system, which could be a village or an urban environment. Anthropology has diversified in recent decades into a variety of new, specialised directions and, given the complexity (and often non-localised nature) of many contemporary fields of study, it has become clear that it may be necessary to consult sources which cannot be obtained through fieldwork (such as historical sources, statistics, mass and social media,

8 Marriage and Relatedness from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: Seen from a male point of view, women are a scarce resource. No matter how male-dominated a society is, men need women to ensure its survival. In matrilineal systems, the men’s sisters carry out this work; in patrilineal societies, their wives do it; and in cognatic or bilateral societies, sisters and wives each do part of the job, seen from a male perspective. A man can have a nearly unlimited number of children – in theory, he can beget several children every day – while a woman’s capacity is limited to one child per year under optimal conditions and, moreover,

10 Caste and Class from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: The concept of social classes is different, and not only because classes exist in many different kinds of societies, while caste is usually associated with Hinduism and India. Although many social scientists have demonstrated that most people in class societies take over their parents’ class membership (if one is a working-class child, it is likely that one remains in the working class), there is a great deal of mobility between the social

15 Language and Cognition from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: Benjamin Lee Whorf was a fire prevention engineer, working for an insurance company in the US in the 1920s. A recurrent problem in his job concerned the interpretation of words; their precise meaning was often rather significant with regard to indemnity payments. What did it mean, for example, that a fire was ‘self-inflicted’? And what did it mean that a drum of petrol was ‘empty’? In some cases, it could be empty of petrol, but full of petrol gas and thus highly explosive. A fire that was caused by an empty petrol drum exploding could not, however, be defined as

20 Public Anthropology from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: To the extent that anthropological texts and lectures have an audience, all anthropology could be considered to be public. However, public anthropology, as the term is generally used, refers to a specific set of practices and positions within the discipline that aim to reach out beyond the confines of the academy. This can be accomplished through writing for different audiences, engaging in advocacy-oriented work in local communities, or by taking part in the transnational conversation about the ills and spoils of the contemporary world and what it means to be human.

Book Title: Border Watch-Cultures of Immigration, Detention and Control
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Mitchell Jon P.
Abstract: Questions over immigration and asylum face almost all Western countries. Should only economically useful immigrants be allowed? What should be done with unwanted or 'illegal' immigrants? In this bold and original intervention, Alexandra Hall shows that immigration detention centres offer a window onto society's broader attitudes towards immigrants. Despite periodic media scandals, remarkably little has been written about the everyday workings of the grassroots immigration system, or about the people charged with enacting immigration policy at local levels. Detention, particularly, is a hidden side of border politics, despite its growing international importance as a tool of control and security. This book fills the gap admirably, analysing the everyday encounters between officers and immigrants in detention to explore broad social trends and theoretical concerns. This highly topical book provides rare insights into the treatment of the 'other' and will be essential for policy makers and students studying anthropology and sociology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183p2n9

2 Visual Practice and the Secure Regime from: Border Watch
Abstract: Ed Davies was a long-serving officer at Locksdon. He had joined the Prison Service after serving in the army, like many of his colleagues, and he had been content to stay as a normal grade officer rather than ‘going for promotion’ and ‘joining management’, despite his experience. Ed was popular with his colleagues but he was known to be temperamental: sometimes he was talkative and humorous, sometimes he was remote and unapproachable. There were rumours of problems at home, depression perhaps. Ed appeared to be particularly affected by the working environment at Locksdon, which he summed up as having ‘everyone

Book Title: Anthropology's World-Life in a Twenty-first-century Discipline
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Hannerz Ulf
Abstract: In this masterly, state of the art work, Ulf Hannerz maps the contemporary social world of anthropologists and its relation to the wider world in which they carry out their work. Raising fundamental questions such as 'What is anthropology really about?', 'How does the public understand, or misunderstand, anthropology?' and 'What and where do anthropologists study now, and for whom do they write?' Hannerz invites anthropologists to think again about where their discipline is going. Full of insights and practical advice from Hannerz's long experience at the top of the discipline, this book is essential for all anthropologists who want their craft to survive and develop in a volatile world, and contribute to new understandings of its ever-changing diversity and interconnections.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183p30z

2 Editing Anthropology: from: Anthropology's World
Abstract: Writing—writing anthropology, writing culture—has drawn a fair amount of attention and comment among anthropologists for some time now.¹ While otherwise the travails and the heroism of field work have been the obvious focus, it is true that only through writing (or some comparable communicative technology) does the anthropologist contribute to a shared body of scholarship and knowledge. Until, or unless, he or she “writes up,” the field worker is not really an ethnographer, only someone indulging in a kind of deep tourism. In writing, the anthropologist takes on a complicated task, trying to do justice to the people

3 Diversity Is Our Business from: Anthropology's World
Abstract: Almost since the beginnings of anthropology as an organized endeavor, its practitioners—some of them at least—seem to have had a morbid tendency to dwell on the likelihood of its impending demise. In Argonauts of the Western Pacific(1922), perhaps the earliest field-based ethnography still reasonably widely read, Bronislaw Malinowski started his foreword by proposing that his discipline was “in the sadly ludicrous, not to say tragic, position, that at the very moment when it begins to put its workshop in order, to forge its proper tools, to start ready for work on its appointed task, the material of

4 Field Worries: from: Anthropology's World
Abstract: Perhaps anthropologists always worried about “the field”—it is central to their way of knowing. In the past, however, when elders tended to be secretive or at least vague about the field experience, and when first field work was thus indeed like a rite of passage into professional maturity, they may have worried in a more private way. That field was also usually a rather fixed entity to worry about, a “tribe,” a village, some place you could get to know by covering it on foot and engaging with its people face to face. And it was self-evidently a matter

6 Flat World and the Tower of Babel: from: Anthropology's World
Abstract: You who are native English-speakers, living and working in a largely English-language environment, may want to skip this chapter—but then if you do not, you may find some food for thought about how the international scholarly community functions (or malfunctions), and some of you may get a sense of what you are missing.¹

3 EMPIRICAL RESEARCH INTO WHITE RACIALISED IDENTITIES IN BRITAIN from: White Identities
Abstract: The intellectual project of using whiteness as a tool of analysis is not one that has taken root in the UK. However, there are a number of empirical studies that investigate the racialisation of white identities. This bears some comparison to the themes thrown up by the plethora of American work in the loose multidisciplinary field labelled ‘whiteness studies’. Indeed, that corpus is far advanced: Winddance Twine and Gallagher (2008: 5) label the empirical studies of localised whiteness as it intersects with class, nation and gender, as the ‘third wave’ of whiteness studies. This scholarly movement has been blamed for

4 BRITISHNESS from: White Identities
Abstract: Among the questions we asked our interviewees in 2005–6 was what being British meant to them. Their responses reflect the precise historical moment in which this project took place: the end of the first decade of devolution, the recent 9/11 and 7/7 attacks and bombings, an intense focus on asylum and immigration, and an attempt to reinstate Britishness as an explicit point of collective identification. Starting by outlining some of the theories of national belonging, we will go on to present and analyse responses picked up in our fieldwork. We argue that the way identification is performed suggests that

5 WHITENESS AND POST-IMPERIAL BRITAIN from: White Identities
Abstract: It is assumedrather thandemonstratedin some key work in the field of post-colonial studies that British identity is still inflected by the experience of empire in twenty-first century Britain (Knowles, 2003). This also provides the backdrop for the work of critical race theorists such as Paul Gilroy, who groundsAfter Empire(2004) and its inter-related arguments about Britishness, loss, ‘conviviality’ and ‘melancholia’ in this idea. What we do in this chapter is look at data from fieldwork on identities in Britain, and advance a tentative argument about the presence of empire in people’s construction of identity in post-imperial

9 RESEARCHING WHITENESS: from: White Identities
Abstract: Psycho-social studies is an emerging tradition that very much focuses on emotion and affect to illuminate some of the core issues in the social sciences. Issues such as identity construction, dilemmas in public service sectors and the experience of rapid social change. It recognises that the split between individual and society, sociology and psychology is now unhelpful if we are to understand social and psychological phenomena. It therefore seeks to research beneath the surface using both psychoanalytic and sociological ideas using innovative new methodologies including the use of free association, biographical life history interviews and the development of psychoanalytic fieldwork.

10 CONCLUSION from: White Identities
Abstract: Our exploration of the themes of community and identity in provincial England is necessarily qualified. Our sample was relatively small and restricted to two cities. However, we suggest, in the light of further research, which admittedly focused on working-class respondents (Hoggett et al., 2008; Garner et al., 2009), that the discourses on community, Britishness and whiteness are generally applicable outside of some large metropolitan areas where Gilroy’s model of conviviality might be the dominant mode. The temptation for researcher and reader alike is to become absorbed into the details and start to lose track of the bigger picture. There are

Book Title: Fredrik Barth-An Intellectual Biography
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Garsten Christina
Abstract: Fredrik Barth is one of the towering figures of twentieth-century anthropology. This intellectual history traces the development of Barth’s ideas and explores the substance of his contributions. In an accessible style, Thomas Eriksen’s biographical study reveals the magic of ethnography to professional anthropologists and non-practitioners alike. Exploring his six decade career, it follows Barth from early ecological studies in Pakistan, to political studies in Iran, to groundbreaking fieldwork in Norway, New Guinea, Bali and Bhutan. Eriksen argues that Barth's voracious appetite for fieldwork holds the key to understanding his remarkable intellectual development and the insights it produced. The book raises many of the same questions that emerge from Barth's own work - of unity and diversity, of culture and relativism, of art and science. Thomas Eriksen is himself a major contributor to the study of anthropology, as well as a distinguished educator, and is therefore ideally placed to introduce the life and work of Fredrik Barth. This will surely be the definitive book on its subject for many years to come.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183p5d4

3 Nomadic Freedom from: Fredrik Barth
Abstract: Everything seemed to be in order before the departure. Barth had been to Paris and obtained his medical certificate at the eleventh hour, after having been interviewed by the renowned anthropologist Alfred Métraux about the assignment. The project, part of UNESCO’s Arid Zone initiative, had as its point of departure the problem with nomadic groups, seen from the perspective of the state. They are by definition difficult to govern. In most cases, nomads have no fixed address, no regular wage work and their children do not receive a formal education. They do not submit to the power monopoly of the

5 The Global Theorist from: Fredrik Barth
Abstract: The idea for the project on entrepreneurship came to Barth after a Wenner-Gren symposium on economic anthropology, to which Raymond Firth had invited him. The Wenner-Gren Foundation for Anthropological Research was founded by the Swedish businessman Axel Wenner-Gren (who is, incidentally, often described as an entrepreneur) in 1941, then under the name of the Viking Foundation. Between 1958 and 1980, more than 80 conferences and workshops within all branches of anthropology, including biological anthropology, were organised at Burg Wartenstein castle in Austria. Barth was invited to several of these symposia, and he mentions that it had been suggested, tongue in

6 Ethnic Groups and Boundaries from: Fredrik Barth
Abstract: It was mainly from his colleagues and students that Barth sought – and received – inspiration on an everyday basis. The sociologist Stein Rokkan worked, like Barth, with comparative models, but he worked historically at the macro level, and their relationship was respectful, but restricted. Other ‘professor entrepreneurs’ in the burgeoning social science departments of the new university were useful allies in the effort to establish a faculty of social science at Bergen, but there was no intellectual affinity. The philosopher Knut Tranøy was a loyal ally and a personal friend, but there were no intellectual synergies to speak of

7 Baktaman Vibrations from: Fredrik Barth
Abstract: In 1968, more than ten years had passed since Barth had carried out long-term fieldwork. He had been aboard a fishing boat and studied economic spheres in Darfur, but had not carried out a larger ethnographic work of the kind that produces monographs, anecdotes for methodology seminars and cases for theoretical articles since the Basseri.

9 Turbulent Times from: Fredrik Barth
Abstract: The fieldwork in Sohar had not been completed, but interrupted when the couple returned to Oslo in September 1974. Oslo was basking in a sunny, unusually warm Indian summer, while the returning anthropologists were shivering. By now, Barth had started his work at the Ethnographic Museum in earnest as well, and this job would – like his writing – turn out to be not entirely devoid of friction and difficulties in the coming ten years or so.

CHAPTER THREE The Track from Beyond the Grave: from: Mexico in Verse
Author(s) Matthews Michael
Abstract: The dictatorship of Porfirio Díaz (1876–1911) marked a period of rapid and expansive railway development. The growth of the country’s transportation network, above all other infrastructural accomplishments undertaken by his regime, provided the most tangible example of material progress based on massive foreign investment. The year that Díaz came to power, the nation possessed only 640 kilometers of track. By 1884, the country witnessed that transportation grid expand to 5,731 kilometers and to 12,173 kilometers by 1898. In Díaz’s final year as president, 19,280 kilometers of tracks, with another 8,000 in trunk lines, crisscrossed the nation.¹ This remarkable achievement

Conclusion from: Mexico in Verse
Abstract: For centuries scholars took this work more or less at face value. Here, they asserted, was lyrical proof of colonial optimism, pride, and potential. Contemporaries knew better. Close interpretations of the political and social context of the time now offer us a different reading from the tradition of Balbuena as lauding greatness. The tract, it seems, reflected

2 Consociation and Communitas: from: Community, Cosmopolitanism and the Problem of Human Commonality
Abstract: In the previous chapter (‘Community as good to think with’), I noted that some of the most influential theorists of community – Anthony Cohen, Benedict Anderson, Victor Turner – have located this sense of connection in oppositional or extraordinary circumstances rather than within more mundane, quotidian relations. In other words, the theorization of community has often tended to disembed this concept from day-to-day sociality. In earlier work (Amit, 2002a), I argued that one version of this tendency towards disembedding has involved an increasing analytical focus on community as an idea, that is, a symbol or categorical referent rather than a

11 Nigel Rapport Responds to Vered Amit from: Community, Cosmopolitanism and the Problem of Human Commonality
Author(s) Rapport Nigel
Abstract: 2. There is work involved and

4 Catholic Action: from: Catholicism and Crisis in Modern France
Abstract: Catholic Action is mandated to carry on one basic purpose only: to further the apostolic work of the Church. In France,

Book Title: Cities of Affluence and Anger-A Literary Geography of Modern Englishness
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): KALLINEY PETER J.
Abstract: Providing a compact literary history of the twentieth century in England, Cities of Affluence and Anger studies the problematic terms of national identity during England's transition from an imperial power to its integration in the global cultural marketplace. While the countryside had been the dominant symbol of Englishness throughout the previous century, modern literature began to turn more and more to the city to redraw the boundaries of a contemporary cultural polity. The urban class system, paradoxically, still functioned as a marker of wealth, status, and hierarchy throughout this long period of self-examination, but it also became a way to project a common culture and mitigate other forms of difference. Local class politics were transformed in such a way that enabled the English to reframe a highly provisional national unity in the context of imperial disintegration, postcolonial immigration, and, later, globalization.Kalliney plots the decline of the country-house novel through an analysis of Forster's Howards End and Waugh's Brideshead Revisited, each ruthless in its sabotage of the trope of bucolic harmony. The traditionally pastoral focus of English fiction gives way to a high-modernist urban narrative, exemplified by Woolf's Mrs. Dalloway, and, later, to realists such as Osborne and Sillitoe, through whose work Kalliney explores postwar urban expansion and the cultural politics of the welfare state. Offering fresh new readings of Lessing's The Golden Notebook and Rushdie's The Satanic Verses, the author considers the postwar appropriation of domesticity, the emergence of postcolonial literature, and the renovation of travel narratives in the context of globalization. Kalliney suggests that it is largely one city--London--through which national identity has been reframed. How and why this transition came about is a process that Cities of Affluence and Anger depicts with exceptional insight and originality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183q3bk

1. ENGLISH, ALL TOO ENGLISH: from: Cities of Affluence and Anger
Abstract: In 1936 Victor Gollancz asked George Orwell to take a tour of England’s northern industrial cities and write a documentary about his experiences among working-class people. The results of that journey were published a year later as The Road to Wigan Pier,carrying the imprint of Gollancz’s Left Book Club. Although the subscription book society boasted some 38,000 regular members before the outbreak of World War II, Orwell’s contribution is one of the few offerings to remain in continuous circulation, owing its durability partly to the fame of its author and partly to the text’s searching, desperately funny critiques of

CONCLUSION from: Cities of Affluence and Anger
Abstract: In the past ten or fifteen years, there has been an upsurge of scholarly and popular interest in Englishness, London, and the special relationship between the two. Witness, for instance, Peter Ackroyd’s recent work in London: The Biography(2000) andAlbion: The Origins of the English Imagination(2002). Pointing out the various peoples and cultures that have settled and influenced England, he observes that this ineffable sense of national belonging “has more to do with location and with territory, therefore, than with any atavistic native impulses.” The country’s painting, literature, music, and architecture, like the people themselves, may be the

Philippian (Pre)Occupations and Peopling Possibilities: from: The People beside Paul
Author(s) Marchal Joseph A.
Abstract: The working group that produced this collection of essays had been meeting and working together

Priestesses and Other Female Cult Leaders at Philippi in the Early Christian Era from: The People beside Paul
Author(s) Abrahamsen Valerie
Abstract: A people’s history of Philippi must, of necessity, include an examination of women. Recent work on Philippi, the region of Macedonia, sociological contexts, and related topics has greatly expanded our knowledge of women in antiquity, their status in the culture, their independence (or lack thereof), their family connections, their contributions, and their limitations. Examination of women at Philippi in the first centuries of the Roman Empire can expand our knowledge of the “people beside Paul.”

Introduction from: The Hidden God
Abstract: A philosophical approach to Martin Luther allows a less doctrinal access to some of his controversial but rather original ideas and methodological insights. The challenge is that such an approach has hardly been ventured before, at least not in the English-speaking literature: to analyze the seminal work of the philosopherMartin Luther. Many studies of Luther from a comparative philosophical perspective have been written over the years, for instance, his relation to Plato or Aristotle, Kant or Heidegger; but it is difficult to find contemporary efforts at reading Luther philosophically.¹ The point of such an approach is not to reject

EIGHT The Quest for Subjectivity from: The Hidden God
Abstract: Luther’s ambivalent distance to the entire framework of metaphysical discourse was polemically presented in Heidelberg Disputation. What Luther formulated there as a program of thedestructionof metaphysics (regarding the “wisdom of the wise”) is now unfolded as a questioning of the metaphysical tradition to which Luther belongs, not only in order to leave it behind, but also to reformulate and thusrecoverthe basic philosophical problems raised within that tradition. In this sense the problem of free will, which Luther rejects as illusory, is significant because itconcealsa number of other questions, such as the question of necessity

Book Title: Interrogating Cultural Studies-Theory, Politics and Practice
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Bowman Paul
Abstract: This book presents an original and innovative new approach to the field of cultural studies in the form of a series of dynamically executed interviews with some of the world’s leading and some of the most challenging emergent cultural theorists, from both sides of the Atlantic and beyond: Professor Mieke Bal, Professor Catherine Belsey, Professor Steven Connor, Professor Simon Critchley, Professor Thomas Docherty, Dr Jeremy Gilbert, Professor Sue Golding, Professor Lynette Hunter, Dr Martin McQuillan, Professor John Mowitt, Professor Christopher Norris, Professor Griselda Pollock, Professor Adrian Rifkin, Professor Jeremy Valentine, Professor Julian Wolfreys, and Professor Slavoj Zizek are all included here. The book is framed by lively and informative introductions, which introduce the work of these thinkers, and which also introduce the reader to the crucial importance of the issues that the interviews address. The result is an entertaining and hugely useful introduction to the key ideas in the field, the strengths and problematic weaknesses of cultural studies as a discipline, allowing the reader to chart its development, and to identify emerging trends. This book is ideal for students of cultural studies and the interdisciplinary arts and humanities, and will be of great interest to teachers and researchers working within a very wide range of areas of cultural studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18dzskq

5 Why I Love Cultural Studies from: Interrogating Cultural Studies
Author(s) Critchley Simon
Abstract: I see my work as intimately connected to culture and the study of culture; and by culture I mean the processes by which human beings’ identities, lives and institutions are formed. By ‘culture’ I understand ‘formation’, or what Hegel would call Bildung, which can be translated as ‘culture’. And I tend to see that in terms of my own discipline, or through my own discipline, which is philosophy. For me philosophy is and should be a meditation on the meaning of culture – a meditationonculture. But often it isn’t. So what I see as definitive of philosophy in

[Part Three: Introduction] from: Interrogating Cultural Studies
Abstract: In this part we find strong arguments forcultural studies: compelling accounts of its successes, achievements and political force. The two interviews comprising it are very different in terms of tone and apparent positioning, but surprisingly aligned nevertheless. Adrian Rifkin in a sense ‘universalises’ the singular position he finds himself in – so he speaks, apparently, only of himself and his own work, but in such a way as to cast important illumination on what you might call the universal intellectual or academic condition. On the other hand, Griselda Pollock provides an account of cultural studies’ importance in general.

14 Responses from: Interrogating Cultural Studies
Author(s) Docherty Thomas
Abstract: In all that follows, I shall make a distinction between ‘cultural studies’ on the one hand, and ‘the study of culture’ on the other. In making such a distinction, I aim to distance myself and my work, such as it has been, from ‘cultural studies’ while at the same time identifying myself as one who studies not merely or not only literature but also what used to be called the ‘histories of ideas’, philosophy, the histories of everyday conditions of living, the other arts, and so on.

Book Title: Forbidden Fictions-Pornography and Censorship in Twentieth-Century French Literature
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Phillips John
Abstract: ‘Phillips discusses texts by Apollinaire, Pierre Loüys, Georges Bataille, Pauline Réage, Alain Robbe-Grillet, Tony Duvert, Elizabeth Barillé and Marie Darrieussecq, engaging in different levels of critical analysis so as to emphasize intertextual and parodic elements in one case, or points of possible identification in another.’ TLS French culture has long been perceived by the English-speaking reader as somehow more ‘erotic’ than its Anglo-Saxon equivalent. Forbidden Fictions is the first English-language study devoted exclusively to the wide spectrum of French literary pornography in the twentieth century. John Phillips provides a broad history of the genre and the associated moral and political issues. Among the texts examined in detail – all selected for their literary or sociopolitical importance – are landmark works by Apollinaire, Louÿs, Bataille, Réage, Robbe-Grillet, Arsan, and Duvert. Phillips challenges current politically correct trends in literary criticism and stereotyped censoring discourses about pornography to provide a new reading of each text and to illustrate the genre’s potential for social subversion. Forbidden Fictions addresses the most controversial issues of contemporary sexual politics, such as objectification, sadomasochism, homoeroticism and paedophilia, with particular emphasis on the feminist debate on pornography. In the light of current controversy over the control of pornography, this is a timely and scholarly review of the ethical, moral and social arguments surrounding the censorship of sexually explicit material.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18fs6m6

2 Pornography, Poetry, Parody: from: Forbidden Fictions
Abstract: It was not until 1970 that the first legal edition of the pornographic novel, Les Onze Mille Verges, bearing the name of Guillaume Apollinaire, was published. The heirs to his estate had finally admitted the existence of the book, written over 60 years earlier, and which has been described as the most explicit and violent erotic novel ever written in French. As Jean-Jacques Pauvert observes, there was no immediate public outcry, although only two years previously, in 1968, theCommission de protection de l’enfance et de la jeunessehad attempted to prosecute Pauvert himself for illicit publication of the work,

3 Sexual and Textual Excess: from: Forbidden Fictions
Abstract: Like the man who wrote them, the novels, stories and poems of Pierre Louӱs (1870–1925) overflow with an irrepressible and childlike joie de vivreand, in the case of both man and work, the dominant trait is excess. The extreme emotions of a romantic adolescence, the practical jokes of a young poet and, later, an extravagant self-indulgence, whether in the consumption of cigarettes or in the socially less acceptable tastes of the libertine, all of these excesses in Louӱs’s life and character are reflected in his writing, both in the critically acclaimed published canon and in the erotic works

4 Masochism and Fetishism: from: Forbidden Fictions
Abstract: Introducing the Gallimard edition of Georges Bataille’s complete works, Michel Foucault declares him to be one of the most important writers of the century.¹ It is certainly true that his work covers an impressively wide area: during the course of his life (1897–1962), Bataille wrote studies in sociology, anthropology, economics, philosophy, art and literary criticism as well as novels and poems, and it is difficult to appreciate his work fully without some knowledge of the whole range of his writing. His first book, the short novel, Histoire de l’œilwas published secretly by René Bonnel in 1928, under the

6 Emmanuelle and the Sexual Liberation of Women from: Forbidden Fictions
Abstract: Emmanuelle Arsan’s first novel, Emmanuelle, was published secretly in 1959 by Eric Losfeld in Paris, at a time of renewed public interest in erotic writing. Recent court cases in France had led to the unbanning of works by Henry Miller, Boris Vian and the Marquis de Sade. At the same time, the 1950s had seen the illicit and usually anonymous publication of many new erotic novels. In particular, Pauline Réage’sHistoire d’O(1954), Vladimir Nabokov’sLolita(1955) and Jean de Berg’sL’Image(1956); all of these, in their different ways, had prepared the ‘cultured’ French reader for the more explicit

7 Progressive Slidings of Identity: from: Forbidden Fictions
Abstract: The nouveau romanor New Novel is a term coined in the 1950s by Alain Robbe-Grillet himself to denote his own work and that of a number of other writers, principally Nathalie Sarraute, Claude Simon, Michel Butor, Robert Pinget, Samuel Beckett and, initially at least, Marguerite Duras, all of whom were published by Les Éditions de Minuit, and who shared a rejection of the traditional novel’s approach to plot, characterisation and form, and so were considered experimental and avant-garde. As John de St. Jorre says of William Burroughs’sNaked Lunch, however, most New Novels remain difficult and at times inaccessible

8 Homotextuality: from: Forbidden Fictions
Abstract: Born in 1945, Tony Duvert is the author of a dozen works of fiction, all of them homoerotic, and of two polemical essays. Although Duvert has never achieved the public acclaim of a Duras or the notoriety of an Arsan, the undoubted literary merit of much of his writing has not gone entirely unrecognised: his fifth novel, Paysage de fantaisie, won the Prix Médicis, a literary prize that rewards innovation, in 1973. Duvert now lives in seclusion in a small, provincial French town and has had no direct contact with his publisher, Éditions de Minuit, for many years. His last

Book Title: Ireland Beyond Boundaries-Mapping Irish Studies in the Twenty-First Century
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): WHELAN YVONNE
Abstract: Ireland Beyond Boundaries provides an authoritative, up-to-date account of the development of Irish Studies over the past two decades. The fourteen contributors examine some of the key debates that have underpinned recent scholarship and analyse critical concerns that have shaped the subject’s remarkable growth. The book is divided into two parts. Part One traces the institutional fortunes of Irish Studies in Ireland, the USA, Canada, Australia and Britain. Part Two features in-depth critical accounts of specific trends and themes within Irish historiography, literary criticism, religion, migration, music, cultural geography, sport and media culture. Throughout the collection there is a recurring engagement with the role of interdisciplinary approaches within Irish Studies and its impact on teaching and research. Combining synoptic overviews with informed analyses, Ireland Beyond Boundaries is an essential text for all those working in the field.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18fs8kn

2 Reconfiguring Irish Studies in Canada: from: Ireland Beyond Boundaries
Author(s) Kenneally Michael
Abstract: Since its emergence as an academic subject in the 1960s, Irish Studies in Canada has evinced some of the tendencies characteristic of the discipline in general, while also moving in directions that can offer instructive critical models for further development both at home and abroad. Despite Canada’s relatively small academic population, the accomplishments of the founding generation of Irish Studies scholars over the past four decades constitute an impressive body of work. However specific their original areas of research, many of these scholars embraced and contributed to the international trend to expand both the objects of their scrutiny and the

4 ‘Our Revels Now are Ended’: from: Ireland Beyond Boundaries
Author(s) Richards Shaun
Abstract: In 2003 Irish University Reviewpublished a special issue on the Irish Literary Revival. Featuring the work of ‘an emerging generation of cultural critics’, the gathered essays offered ‘new scholarship’ and ‘new perspectives’ on the Revival, one of the most significant moments in Irish literary history (Kelleher, 2003: viii). Adrian Frazier’sIrish Timesreview acknowledged the quality of the collection but expressed surprise at the apparent consensus among the contributions, along with the absence of committed dispute and debate. Frazier’s criticisms return us to the origins of Irish Studies in Britain, a moment when ‘academic wars’ raged and ‘theory’, new

6 The Intellectual and the State: from: Ireland Beyond Boundaries
Author(s) McCarthy Conor
Abstract: This chapter concerns critical authority, and the ways that critical authority has developed and changed in Irish criticism since the 1980s. The term authorityis used here to refer to the position of the critic in his or her text regarding the work he or she is analysing; to the discursive location of the critic; to the critic’s institutional location; and finally the relationship of all of these to the final source of authority in modern society, the state (Said, 1984). The case I wish to argue is that the political and economic condition of Ireland in the period in

3 THE IRON CAGE OF CREATIVITY: from: Locating Cultural Creativity
Author(s) Friedman Jonathan
Abstract: Creativity has become something of a slogan among latter-day Birmingham cultural sociologists and their more seasoned allies, the cultural studies crowd. There has been a clear move from the study of working-class culture to the aesthetics of everyday life. While Birmingham certainly flirted with abstract structural Marxism, their interests lay more in the direction of the concrete, since they, unlike many Marxist sociologists, were trying to gain a purchase on reality in the street, so to speak – although one may have reservations about the nature of their ethnography, which, except for some of the research reports, was explicitly focused

5 CELEBRATING CREATIVITY: from: Locating Cultural Creativity
Author(s) Löfgren Orvar
Abstract: There was a great seriousness surrounding this basic notion. Both in the individual interviews and in the mass-media advice there emerged a heavy stress on the importance of producing something authentic and genuine, of reworking and elaborating existing traditions. For many people, a homemade object

8 THE ‘PLAYING’ OF MUSIC IN A STATE OF CRISIS: from: Locating Cultural Creativity
Author(s) Schade-Poulsen Marc
Abstract: Creativity is closely linked to processes of appropriation. Novelties are nothing unless acceptedandworkedon as social facts. A ‘social contract’ has to be established between the creators and their surroundings in order to generate a

10 ESCAPING CULTURES: from: Locating Cultural Creativity
Author(s) Parkin David
Abstract: I take the paradox to be globally widespread. Consumers or, more commonly, spectators of others’ consumerism, see commodities replaced one after another by new ones. Yet, despite being new, each such commodity may sometimes be regarded as representing tradition and as having originated from inside the society rather than having been imported or affected by external influences. For example, local artists and craftsmen may think they know what foreign tourists want, but in fact find that their art works are bought by local people as much as and even more than by outsiders. This unexpected outcome is not always something

12 KULA AND KABISAWALI: from: Locating Cultural Creativity
Author(s) Liep John
Abstract: Some 25 years ago I wrote a popular article about the kulaexchange system for a Danish magazine and needed some illustrations. I therefore asked the American anthropologist Jerry Leach, who had worked in the Trobriands in the early 1970s, for a selection of photographs. Among those he forwarded was one taken in 1973 showing baskets of highly decorated kula armshells on a platform outside a house built of local materials on the main island, Kiriwina. The scene would have been redolent of the ‘kula tradition’ had it not, unfortunately, been marred by incongruous intrusions of modernity. It was bad

Book Title: Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Maslov Boris
Abstract: Since the mid-1980s, attempts to think history and literature together have produced much exciting work in the humanities. Indeed, some form of historicism can be said to inform most of the current scholarship in literary studies, including work in poetics, yet much of this scholarship remains undertheorized. Envisioning a revitalized and more expansive historicism, this volume builds on the tradition of Historical Poetics, pioneered by Alexander Veselovsky (1838-1906) and developed in various fruitful directions by the Russian Formalists, Mikhail Bakhtin, and Olga Freidenberg. The volume includes previously untranslated texts of some of the major scholars in this critical tradition, as well as original contributions which place that tradition in dialogue with other thinkers who have approached literature in a globally comparatist and evolutionary-historical spirit. The contributors seek to challenge and complement a historicism that stresses proximate sociopolitical contexts through an engagement with the longue duree of literary forms and institutions. In particular, Historical Poetics aims to uncover deep-historical stratifications and asynchronicities, in which formal solutions may display elective affinities with other, chronologically distant solutions to analogous social and political problems. By recovering the traditional nexus of philology and history, Persistent Forms seeks to reinvigorate poetics as a theoretical discipline that would respond to such critical and intellectual developments as Marxism, New Historicism, the study of world literature, practices of distant reading, and a renewed attention to ritual, oral poetics, and genre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18kr6cs

Introducing Historical Poetics: from: Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) MASLOV BORIS
Abstract: Theory vs. history; form vs. content; artistry vs. ideology; close reading vs. contextualization: these dichotomies are intrinsic to the way literary scholars have come to think of their subject, especially within the—now globally influential—U.S. academy. This volume explores a critical tradition, known as Historical Poetics, that offers a way of negotiating between these familiar oppositions, blending literary theory, history of poetic forms, cultural history, philosophy of history, and (often less overtly) philosophical aesthetics. In the following chapters, this exploration is undertaken on four different fronts—new translations that make available important theoretical work from the past, contributions to

CHAPTER 3 Historicist Hermeneutics and Contestatory Ritual Poetics: from: Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) KURKE LESLIE
Abstract: The challenge of this volume is to think about different models and methods for “literary history” or the historicist reading of literary forms. I contribute to this enterprise as a representative of “New Historicism” or “Cultural Poetics,” and in that capacity, I have been thinking about the similarities and differences between New Historicism and the Russian tradition of “Historical Poetics,” and the usefulness, for the material I work on, of the latter. Both methods reject aestheticism, old-fashioned psychologizing of the author, and literary biography. And both insist on starting from the linguistic structure of the text as a formal system

CHAPTER 4 Metapragmatics, Toposforschung, Marxist Stylistics: from: Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) MASLOV BORIS
Abstract: Alexander Veselovsky’s versatile body of work is notably hard to synthesize, and the method as well as the conceptual apparatus he refined over the years, yet never fully explicated, does not lend itself easily to either systematic summary or piecemeal extraction. It is in part for this reason that Veselovsky’s legacy proved of no direct use to the totalizing twentieth-century theories of literature, such as Structuralism of the French or Soviet varieties, or to the more recent transnational literarycritical practice, whose volatile methodological eclecticism favors the propagation of isolated conceptual moves and argumentative schemata. For Veselovsky’s is an approach that

CHAPTER 8 On “Genre Memory” in Bakhtin from: Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) KLIGER ILYA
Abstract: The concept of “genre memory,” proposed by Mikhail Bakhtin in the second edition of his book on Dostoevsky from 1963, names one of the most vivid and enigmatic figurations of literary-historical continuity we have. It is of course not the first attempt to think such continuity within the Russian tradition. Almost one hundred years before Bakhtin coined the term, Alexander Veselovsky, the founder of Historical Poetics as a paradigm within literary scholarship, wondered whether “each new poetic epoch [does] not work on images bequeathed from antiquity, being of necessity constrained by their boundaries.”¹ Veselovsky would go on to refine and

CHAPTER 10 Against Ornament: from: Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) MARTIN RICHARD P.
Abstract: This essay on historical poetics will comprise two parts: historical and poetic. To put it another way, I will attempt to offer a theoretical examination and then a practical explication, the former dealing with the concept of metaphor as developed and employed by the sadly neglected Soviet-era philologist and theoretician Olga Mikhailovna Freidenberg, the latter centered on the poetry of Pindar. The goal is to see how Freidenberg’s work might still be of relevance and usefulness, not just in relation to more recent theories of metaphor, but also as a heuristic device in the study of archaic Greek poetry, one

CHAPTER 11 Breakfast at Dawn: from: Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) VINITSKY ILYA
Abstract: As the authors of the introduction to this volume observe, one of the goals of Veselovsky’s historical poetics dealt with uncovering “the ways in which literary practices constitute[d] historical experience by perpetuating conceptual, emotional, and behavioral schemata across space and time.”³ In this context, the ill-famed “age of Sensibility” in Russia⁴ presented a special interest for Veselovsky. In his classical book on Vasily Zhukovsky’s life and work, eloquently subtitled The Poetry of Sentiment and of the “Heart’s Imagination”(1903; published in 1904), the scholar posed an intriguing question of how the Western literary modes of sentimentality were absorbed by a

CHAPTER 12 From the Prehistory of Russian Novel Theory: from: Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) HOLLAND KATE
Abstract: Scholarly work on the subject of Alexander Veselovsky rarely, if ever, deals with the fact that the philologist and folklorist was an exact contemporary of the great Russian novelists Dostoevsky, Turgenev, and Tolstoy, and that most of his philological work was done in the period of the generic hegemony of the Russian novel. At first sight this omission seems understandable; in his own scholarly work Veselovsky was more interested in examining archaic drama and medieval legends than the works of his own contemporaries. Yet like his more internationally renowned successor, Mikhail Bakhtin, Veselovsky used the medium of genre as a

Epilogue: from: Practicing the City: Early Modern London on Stage
Abstract: Ben Jonson’s note “To the Readers,” inserted into the 1631 edition of The Staple of News, marks a decided intensification of his preoccupation with the reception of his work. Even without this note, the play is overloaded with critical apparatus, including an onstage audience that holds forth after every act in a series of intermeans. Returning to the device inaugurated in his first play with a London setting, Jonson envisions theatrical performance in terms of debate and disagreement. But here, in place of the urbane moderators ofEvery Man Out of His Humor, he presents a quartet of outspoken gossips,

Book Title: The Literatures of the French Pacific-Reconfiguring Hybridity
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): FORSDICK CHARLES
Abstract: Hybridity theory, the creative dissemination and restless to-and-fro of Homi Bhabha’s Third Space or of Stuart Hall’s politics of difference, for example, has opened up understandings of what may be produced in the spaces of cultural contact. This book argues that the particularity of the forms of mixing in the literatures of the French Pacific country of New Caledonia contest and complexify the characterisations of hybrid cultural exchange. From the accounts of European discovery by the first explorers and translations of the stories of oral tradition, to the writings of settler, déporté, convict, indentured labourer and their descendants, and contemporary indigenous (Kanak) literatures, these texts inscribe Oceanian or Pacific difference within and against colonial contexts. In a context of present strategic positioning around a unique postcolonial proposal of common destiny, however, mutual cultural transformation is not unbounded. The local cannot escape coexistence with the global, yet Oceanian literatures maintain and foreground a powerful sense of ancestral origins, of an original engendering. The spiral going forward continually remembers and cycles back distinctively to an enduring core. In their turn, the Pacific stories of unjust deportation or heroic settlement are founded on exile and loss. On the other hand, both the desire for, and fears of, cultural return reflected in such hybrid literary figures as Déwé Gorodé’s graveyard of ancestral canoes and Pierre Gope’s chefferie internally corrupted in response to the solicitations of Western commodity culture, or Claudine Jacques’ lizard of irrational violence, will need to be addressed in any working out of a common destiny for Kanaky-New Caledonia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18kr78q

3 Histories of Exile and Home: from: The Literatures of the French Pacific
Abstract: The previous chapters looked at two different kinds of hybrid texts that have resulted from European-Kanak contact: the texts of the European explorers in the eighteenth century and the translations into French of texts of oral tradition in the nineteenth, twentieth, and twenty-first centuries. The present chapter extends the examination of the hybridity of New Caledonian culture(s), their mix of differences and commonalities, by considering the respective approaches to a trope present in the work of every group of writers, from the colonial period to the postcolonial present. This is the theme of exile, or living in-between the lost home,

5 The Paradoxical Pathways of the First Kanak Woman Writer: from: The Literatures of the French Pacific
Abstract: The two previous chapters have tracked the differences in the shared rewriting of history and of the importance of home in contemporary New Caledonian literatures, in settler literatures (to be considered more fully in later chapters), but most particularly in the three major Kanak versions of the story of the first ancestor, Kanaké/Kënâké. Very different perspectives – political, feminist, and mythico-poetical – are at work within the third spaces constructed by these Kanak rewritings of origin. Each writer, I argued, attempts to connect to a lost or buried Kanak cultural core through his/her exploration and reconstruction of history in necessary

6 The Hybrid Within: from: The Literatures of the French Pacific
Abstract: Despite Gorodé’s resolute centring and valuing of an indigenous vision of the world, L’Épave[The Wreck] stands apart from the work of other Pacific writers, not the least for its mordant image of the ancestral canoe become a wreck. This canoe, solidified, metamorphosed into a black rock in the shape of a prow in the tribe’s canoe graveyard, a metonym of the wreckage that strews the novel, is the site of the violation of barely pubescent girls, over generations, by the cannibal ogre-ancestor.

10 Summing Up from: The Literatures of the French Pacific
Abstract: The various studies of this book have revealed the presence of multiple and shifting hybridities, at all levels of the work of recovery and reconstruction underway in all communities, if to varying degrees of transculturality. Accounts of first contacts on beaches with savages were shown to be largely a product of European Enlightenment thinking, the circulation of European ships and texts. Translation of the texts of oral tradition was an early locus of production of a hybrid new cultural entity, different nonetheless in degrees of transformation in the publications of the red virgin, the missionary-ethnographer, and the contemporary ethnographer. To

Book Title: Memory, Narrative and the Great War-Rifleman Patrick MacGill and the Construction of Wartime Experience
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Taylor David
Abstract: Memory, Narrative and the Great War provides a detailed examination of the varied and complex war writings of a relatively marginal figure, Patrick MacGill, within a general framework of our current pre-occupation with blood, mud and suffering. In particular, it seeks to explain how his interpretation of war shifted from the heroic wartime autobiographical trilogy, with its emphasis on 'the romance of the rifleman' to the pessimistic and guilt-ridden interpretations in his post-war novel, Fear!, and play, Suspense. Through an exploration of the way in which war-time experiences were remembered (and re-remembered) and retold in strikingly different narratives, and using insights from cognitive psychology, it is argued that there is no contradiction between these two seemingly opposing views. Instead it is argued that, given the present orientation and problem-solving nature of both memory and narrative, the different interpretations are both 'true' in the sense that they throw light on the ongoing way in which MacGill came to terms with his experiences of war. This in turn has implications for broader interpretations of the Great War, which has increasingly be seen in terms of futile suffering, not least because of the eloquent testimony of ex-Great War soldiers, reflecting on their experiences many years after the event. Without suggesting that such testimony is invalid, it is argued that this is one view but not the only view of the war. Rather wartime memory and narrative is more akin to an ever-changing kaleidoscope, in which pieces of memory take on different (but equally valid) shapes as they are shaken with the passing of time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18mbc8p

Chapter 4 ‘Are you Catholic or Protestant?’ from: Leaving the North
Abstract: David was born in Belfast in 1940 to a father from County Cork and a mother from Dublin. His father, an elderly man when David was born, had in a previous marriage already reared a family; working in the insurance business for many years in Dublin, Liverpool and Twickenham, London before settling in Belfast during the 1930s. He was also a Baptist lay preacher, a Freemason and held strong Unionist beliefs. David’s mother was raised in the Church of Ireland in which he himself was confirmed. In his childhood home, David remembered the photograph of King George VI on the

Book Title: EccentriCities: Writing in the margins of Modernism-St. Petersburg to Rio de Janeiro
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Allen Sharon Lubkemann
Abstract: An innovative, interdisciplinary, incisive scholarly study remapping and redefining domains and dynamics of modernism, EccentriCities: Writing in the margins of modernism critically considers how geo-historically distant and disparate urban sites, concentrating Russian and Luso-Brazilian cultural dialogue and definition, give rise to peculiarly parallel anachronistic and alternative fictional forms. While comparatively reframing these literary traditions through an extensive survey of Russian and Brazilian literature, cartography, urban design and development, foregrounding innovative close readings of works by Gogol, Dostoevsky, Bely, Almeida, Machado de Assis, Lima Barreto, Mário de Andrade, the book also redefines new constellations (eccentric, concentric, ex-centric) for understanding geo-cultural and generic dimensions of modernist and post-modern literature and theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18mbdwg

Introduction from: EccentriCities: Writing in the margins of Modernism
Abstract: Every work of genius slants the rational plane, or so claim twentieth-century writers as disparate in style and distant in setting as Mário de Andrade and Vladimir Nabokov, re-casting creative consciousness in their respectively ‘hallucinated’ cities of São Paulo and St. Petersburg.¹ While these writers eccentrically reconfigure and relocate creative consciousness in citytexts marked by peculiarly modern tempos and marginocentric topographies, they also recuperate an ancient association between art, alienation and urbanity, central to the Western canon. In work that blurs boundaries between theoretical, critical and creative literature, they align insight and innovation with a deep and diverse literary tradition

Chapter 1 Urban contexts, urbane consciousness and the eccentric slant of modernisms from: EccentriCities: Writing in the margins of Modernism
Abstract: While modernism ranges far beyond the bounds of the city, it emerges from crises concentrated in urban centres and urbane consciousness. Modernist writers converge in St. Petersburg and Rio de Janeiro, Moscow and São Paulo, as in Paris, London, Lisbon, Prague, New York and other cities whose contours filter into their fictions. These cities concentrate publication venues, a reading public and the political and critical establishments that redefine modern literary production. Within a broad Western tradition, works such as Bely’s Петербург(Petersburg), Proust’sÀ la recherche du temps perdu(In Search of Time Past), Pessoa’sO Livro do desassossego(The

Chapter 3 Gogol’s open prospects: from: EccentriCities: Writing in the margins of Modernism
Abstract: If Pushkin’s poema constitutes the cornerstone of the Petersburg text, Gogol’s Petersburg tales fill out the foundation. Yet the fundamental position of both writers’ works is paradoxical, insofar as it does not reflect origin or originality in their usual sense. Rather, it is contingent on their explicit reflection on their status as deviant, deconstructive copies of already-copied Petersburg texts. They represent a fundamental realignment and reification of the citytext, as significant in the domain of Russian literary and cultural history as Catherine’s redrawing of Peter’s blueprint,² resulting in a more dispersed, decentred, eclectic cityscape as well as the solidification of

Book Title: The Trouble with Community-Anthropological Reflections on Movement, Identity and Collectivity
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Mitchell Jon P.
Abstract: 'Community' is one of social science's longest-standing concepts. The assumption, of much social science, has been that it is in communities -- and to communities -- that human individuals, as social and cultural beings, belong. Communities are said to embody that interactive environment from which individuals' identities and senses of self derive, and in which they continue to dwell. The trouble with 'community' is that this is not necessarily so; the personal social networks of individuals' actual experience crosscut collective categories, situations and institutions. Communities can prove unviable or imprisoning; the reality of community life and identity can often be very different from the ideology and the ideal. In this provocative new book, anthropologists Vered Amit and Nigel Rapport draw on their various ethnographic experiences to reappraise the concept and the reality of 'community', in the light of globalization, religious fundamentalism, identity politics, and renascent localisms. How might anthropology better apprehend social identities which are intrinsically plural, transgressive and ironic? What has anthropology to say about the way in which civil society might hope to accommodate the on-going construction and the rightful expression of such migrant identities? Nigel Rapport and Vered Amit give their own answers to these questions before entering into dialogue to assess each other's positions. Nigel Rapport is Professor of Anthropological and Philosophical Studies at the University of St. Andrews. He is author of Transcendent Individual (1997). Vered Amit is an Associate Professor at Concordia University in Montreal. She is the editor of Realizing Community (2002).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18mvnx3

PROLOGUE: from: The Trouble with Community
Author(s) Amit Vered
Abstract: As the new century begins, politico-economic restructuring continues further to embed local economies, economic networks and

2 EMBRACING DISJUNCTION from: The Trouble with Community
Abstract: At an anthropology conference not too long ago, I presented a paper presenting some material from an ongoing research project that focuses on the lives of travelling consultants.¹ The people I had interviewed were part of a growing global army of professionals whose work involves frequent travel across large distances to a succession of distant clients. A number of these people had explicitly structured their career paths to allow for regular travel, this even when other less ambulant work opportunities were available. Thus for Margaret,² a consultant specializing in urban development and economics, a career involving travel had been a

Book Title: Pierre Bourdieu-A Critical Introduction
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Reader Keith
Abstract: 'This beautifully written and lucidly argued study is the most persuasive account of Bourdieu's work yet to be published. Lane illuminates much that can puzzle a foreign readership by expertly situating Bourdieu within a French context. At the same time he points to those aspects of Bourdieu's writing which are of particular relevance to contemporary debates on questions of citizenship and globalization. He gives a fascinating account of Bourdieu's astonishingly prescient analyses of the impact of the expansion of higher education, the influence of the mass media, the growth of the culture industries, and the changing nature of political and social elites, not just in France, but in the western world.' Professor Jill Forbes, Queen Mary and Westfield, University of London
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18mvnzm

Introduction from: Pierre Bourdieu
Abstract: In late August 1998, a photograph of the sociologist and anthropologist Pierre Bourdieu appeared on the front cover of the weekly French news magazine L’Evénement du jeudi. Below the photograph was a caption which read: ‘Bourdieu, the most powerful intellectual in France’. Inside the magazine, a lengthy ‘dossier’ discussed the perceived strengths and weaknesses of Bourdieu’s work.¹ That same month, similar ‘dossiers’ dedicated to Bourdieu appeared in the other principal French weeklies and dailies,Le Nouvel observateur, Libération, L’ExpressandLe Monde.² As the satirical French weeklyLe Canard enchaînéput it, ‘Bourdieumania’ seemed to have broken out in the

CHAPTER 2 Frenchmen into Consumers? from: Pierre Bourdieu
Abstract: If Bourdieu’s experiences during the Algerian War had led him to undertake what he had initially considered to be a temporary detour into sociology, by the mid-1960s he had become clearly established as a professional sociologist occupying a position of considerable institutional prestige, surrounded by a team of collaborators. After a year spent as Raymond Aron’s assistant at the Sorbonne, Bourdieu had been appointed as a sociology lecturer at the University of Lille in 1961, working there until 1964. During this period, he became secretary of the Centre de sociologie européenne (CSE), a loose grouping of researchers established by Aron.

CHAPTER 4 Returning to Kabylia from: Pierre Bourdieu
Abstract: In a footnote to Reproduction, Bourdieu stated that his ‘theory of pedagogic action’ was ‘grounded in a theory of the relations between objective structures, the habitus and practice’, which would ‘be set out more fully in a forthcoming book’ (1970, p. 9n.1 [p. xiii n.1]). The book in question was published two years later and drew on fieldwork Bourdieu had conducted during the Algerian War. EntitledEsquisse d’une théorie de la pratique(1972), it took the form of three anthropological studies of Kabylia followed by a sustained reflection on the political, ethical, and epistemological implications of anthropological study. Five years

CHAPTER 6 Old Wine, Distinctive New Bottles from: Pierre Bourdieu
Abstract: In 1979, Bourdieu published what was to prove his most detailed and surely most influential study of the links between class, culture and social reproduction. Distinctionwas the culmination of over fifteen years’ work, having its origins in the survey of tastes and patterns of cultural consumption Bourdieu had conducted in 1963 amongst a sample of 692 inhabitants of Paris, Lille and an unnamed provincial town. He had already used some of the data from this survey in his contribution to the 1965 study,Photography. However, much of the more general data had remained unused and in 1967-68 he had

Conclusion from: Pierre Bourdieu
Abstract: Arriving at a final assessment of the value of Bourdieu’s immense and varied output is no easy task. By placing his work in the interrelated contexts of the intellectual field out of which it emerged and the social and cultural changes it has analysed, this study has sought to emphasise the immense perceptiveness with which Bourdieu has traced the dynamic of these changes in postwar France. Indeed, he has often shown considerable prescience, anticipating the future development of socio-cultural phenomena or crystallising a more general or vaguely perceived sense of malaise. This was particularly true of the works on French

6 Growing Together: from: Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Kahl Werner
Abstract: About one hundred years ago, in 1906, at Azusa Street Mission in Los Angeles, Christians at the margins of power shared the overpowering experience of celebrating the presence of God together as one people, in spite of the ideology of racial segregation so prominent in the United States at that time. This became one of the birthplaces of modern Pentecostalism. One chronicler of the movement, Frank Bartleman, captured that experience in the following words: “The colour line was washed away in the blood (of Jesus)” (1925, 54). The believers saw the Spirit of God at work. The phenomenon of “speaking

14 Making the Circle Safer: from: Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Barker Kim
Abstract: Empirical researchas a term often conjures up images of strict clinical procedures and of painstakingly precise work conducted in sterile circumstances by a person wearing a white lab coat. Although certain types of research require such settings, in the present essay we trace a complex and often messy process that is characteristic of empirical qualitative research. Qualitative research has been described as messy, because it aims to account for the multiplicity of human experiences within a certain context:

Book Title: The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): ROOF JUDITH
Abstract: The modern age is no stranger to the cabinet of curiosities, the freak show, or a drawer full of odds and ends. These collections of oddities engagingly work against the rationality and order of the conventional archive found in a university, a corporation, or a governmental holding. In form, methodology, and content, The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive offers a counterargument to a more reasoned form of storing and recording the avant-garde (or the post-avant-garde), the perverse, the off, the bent, the absurd, the quirky, the weird, and the queer. To do so, it positions itself within the history of mirabilia launched by curiosity cabinets starting in the mid-fifteenth century and continuing to the present day. These archives (or are they counter-archives?) are located in unexpected places-the doorways of Katrina homes, the cavity of a cow, the remnants of extinct animals, an Internet site-and they offer up "alternate modes of knowing" to the traditional archive.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18z4hcm

[BOX II Introduction] from: The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive
Abstract: Tinkerers or pundits, visionaries or eccentrics, oddballs sometimes make their own archives. Surprisingly, the archives of some of history’s most anomalous figures are rarely themselves anomalous but instead come to appear exemplary because their organizing figures have emerged in some way from the pack. Oddball personae collect followings; their followers, in turn, are often the ones left in charge of collecting the oddballs’ life’s work, their leavings. The Kinsey archives, no less than the papers of the Marquis de Sade or the drawings of Adolf Wölfli, may now be managed by professional librarians, but they were once gathered and conserved

4 “MARCUSE’S UNREASON: THE BIOLOGY OF REVOLUTION” from: The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive
Author(s) Blyn Robin
Abstract: “We can use the word revolution again for the first time in many years,” Douglass Kellner declared in October 2011.¹ The scene was not Tahrir Square or the streets of Tunis. Nor was it Zuccotti Park. Rather, Kellner was speaking at the University of Pennsylvania, at the Fourth Biennial Conference of the International Herbert Marcuse Society. It was clearly a moment for Kellner and his audience to savor; together, the Arab Spring and Occupy protests of 2011 seemed to vindicate the very idea of revolution and with it the work of a philosopher variously dismissed as impractical, irrational, irrelevant, and

Introduction: from: Medium, Messenger, Transmission
Author(s) Enns Anthony
Abstract: Canadian media theorist Marshall McLuhan famously argued that the purpose of media studies was to make visible that which normally remains invisible – namely, the effects of media technologies rather than the messages they convey. When he originally proposed this idea in the 1960s McLuhan was widely celebrated as the great prophet of the media age, but in the decades that followed his work gradually fell into disregard. In the 1970s, for example, Raymond Williams claimed that McLuhan’s ideas were ‘ludicrous’¹ and Hans Magnus Enzensberger dismissed him as a ‘charlatan’ who was ‘incapable of any theoretical construction’ and who wrote

Book Title: Timing Canada-The Shifting Politics of Time in Canadian Literary Culture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Huebener Paul
Abstract: From punch clocks to prison sentences, from immigration waiting periods to controversial time-zone boundaries, from Indigenous grave markers that count time in centuries rather than years, to the fact that free time is shrinking faster for women than for men - time shapes the fabric of Canadian society every day, but in ways that are not always visible or logical. In Timing Canada, Paul Huebener draws from cultural history, time-use surveys, political statements, literature, and visual art to craft a detailed understanding of how time operates as a form of power in Canada. Time enables everything we do - as Margaret Atwood writes, "without it we can't live." However, time also disempowers us, divides us, and escapes our control. Huebener transforms our understanding of temporal power and possibility by using examples from Canadian and Indigenous authors - including Jeannette Armstrong, Joseph Boyden, Dionne Brand, Timothy Findley, Lucy Maud Montgomery, Gabrielle Roy, and many others - who witness, question, dismantle, and reconstruct the functioning of time in their works. As the first comprehensive study of the cultural politics of time in Canada, Timing Canada develops foundational principles of critical time studies and everyday temporal literacy, and demonstrates how time functions broadly as a tool of power, privilege, and imagination within a multicultural and multi-temporal nation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1970584

CONCLUSION: from: Timing Canada
Abstract: Like so many articulations of temporality, this book remains inevitably provisional. There will always be more to learn from the particular ways in which experiences of time are tied, for instance, to spatial regions of human activity or to the ecological and geological matrices of the natural world. Rather than accounting for every possible model of time within Canada, though, my goals here have been to offer a framework for understanding the major cultural structures of time that have taken hold in the nation; to articulate the ways in which social patterns that may appear unconnected to temporality can in

Book Title: Chora 7-Intervals in the Philosophy of Architecture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Parcell Stephen
Abstract: For over twenty years, the Chora series has received international acclaim for its excellence in interdisciplinary research on architecture. The seven volumes of Chora have challenged readers to consider alternatives to conventional aesthetic and technological concepts. The seventy-eight authors and eighty-seven scholarly essays in the series have investigated profound cultural roots of architecture and revealed rich possibilities for architecture and its related disciplines. Chora 7, the final volume in the series, includes fifteen essays on architectural topics from around the world (France, Greece, Iran, Italy, Korea, and the United States) and from diverse cultures (antiquity, Renaissance Italy, early modern France, and the past hundred years). Thematically, they bring original approaches to human experience, theatre, architectural creation, and historical origins. Readers will also gain insights into theoretical and practical work by architects and artists such as Leon Battista Alberti, Peter Brook, Douglas Darden, Filarete, Andy Goldsworthy, Anselm Kiefer, Frederick Kiesler, Claude-Nicolas Ledoux, and Peter Zumthor. Contributors to Chora 7 include Anne Bordeleau (University of Waterloo), Diana Cheng (Montreal), Negin Djavaherian (Montreal), Paul Emmons (Washington-Alexandria Architecture Center of Virginia Tech), Paul Holmquist (McGill University), Ron Jelaco (McGill University), Yoonchun Jung (Kyoto University), Christos Kakalis (Edinburgh School of Architecture and Landscape Architecture), Lisa Landrum (University of Manitoba), Robert Nelson (Monash University), Marc J Neveu (Woodbury University), Alberto Pérez-Gómez (McGill University), Angeliki Sioli (Monterrey Institute of Technology and Higher Education), Nikolaos-Ion Terzoglou (National Technical University of Athens), and Stephen Wischer (North Dakota State University).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19jch8m

5 “More Powerful than Love”: from: Chora 7
Author(s) Holmquist Paul
Abstract: OF ALL THE INSTITUTIONS proposed by Claude-Nicolas Ledoux for the ideal city of Chaux, none has resisted interpretation more than his enigmatic “workshop of corruption,” the Oikéma. In his L’architecture considérée sous le rapport de l’art, des moeurs et de la législation(1804), the Oikéma appears as a civic brothel for the city that Ledoux imagined around the Royal Saltworks (1779) he had built at Arc-et-Senans. Proclaiming that he had done what no government would dare, Ledoux presents the Oikéma as a temple in which the “boiling and unfaithful youth” of Chaux are free to indulge their sexual appetites to

8 Silence and Communal Ritual in an Athonian Coenobitic Monastery from: Chora 7
Author(s) Kakalis Christos
Abstract: THIS ESSAY STUDIES conditions of silence in the Gregoriou monastery at Mount Athos, a mountainous peninsula in northeastern Greece, a unesco World Heritage Site since 1988, and one of the most important contemporary pilgrimage sites. My fieldwork there in 2010–12, supported by secondary sources, notes how the community faces challenges to preserve the silence that is needed for its ascetic meditation.¹ The entire monastery is not silent at all times. Rituals performed by the eighty monks sometimes occur in the open spaces, temporarily breaking the silence with planned religious messages. Meanwhile, visitors often intrude on the monastery’s religious atmosphere.

11 Filarete’s Sforzinda: from: Chora 7
Author(s) Pérez-Gómez Alberto
Abstract: THE ARCHITECT ANTONIO DI PIERO AVERLINO (ca 1400–1469 ) characterized his life’s work rhetorically by adopting the pseudonym Il Filarete, coupling the Greek words philiaandaretéto refer to himself as a lover of virtue. In the mid-fifteenth century he became the first “modern” to design an ideal city in its totality, founded from scratch in a natural site without history. This ideal city, named Sforzinda after his patron Francesco Sforza, is the central topic of hisTrattato di architettura.¹ Although the operation that Filarete describes has been interpreted generally as a precursor of rational planning, it is

Book Title: Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literature-From Alexis to the Digital Age
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Murray-Román Jeannine
Abstract: Working with twentieth- and twenty-first-century sources ranging from theatrical works and novels to blogs, Murray-Román examines the ways in which writers such as Jacques Stephen Alexis, Zoé Valdés, Rosario Ferré, Patrick Chamoiseau, and Marlon James experiment with textually compensating for the loss of the corporeality of live relationship in performance traditions. Through their exploration of the interaction of literature and performance, she argues, Caribbean writers themselves offer a mode of bridging the disjunction between cultural and philosophical approaches within Caribbean studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19jchc5

1 Performance and the Expansion of Personhood in Marissa Chibas’s Daughter of a Cuban Revolutionary from: Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literature
Abstract: The task of this book is to think through how Caribbean textual representations of performance broaden understandings of personhood. To explore how the genre of performance specifically can intercede in definitions of personhood, this chapter offers a performance analysis of Marissa Chibas’s 2007 one-woman play Daughter of a Cuban Revolutionary. Throughout the play, Chibas performs much of the “backstage” work—such as establishing the scene’s time and place, or getting in and out of character—and exposes otherwise unseen labor. In so doing,Daughterdemonstrates how the means of creating theater give us a point of entry into redefining personhood.

3 From Spectator to Participant: from: Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literature
Abstract: As we have seen in Chamoiseau’s and James’s novels, observing how witnesses of a performance event are impacted by it is an important tool for writers to describe the significance of performance. Two reasons this strategy works particularly well for Caribbean representations of social performance are that first, audience members form the circle with their bodies, presence, and attention; and second, any audience member is a potential participant, to return to Marlene NourbeSe Philip’s encapsulation, “you crossing from looking to dancing and back again to looking” (152). This chapter focuses on the role of audience members in creating the dance

4 Staceyann Chin and Zoé Valdés: from: Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literature
Abstract: Can a dance circle exist without the copresence of persons to form it? Just as the dark and densely textured spaces examined in chapter 3 stretch the concept of the dance circle to include spaces where performer and audience are not configured in a literal circle, this chapter looks to social media interactions for examples of the circle’s permissive protection. Here, the dance circle stretches to sites where moving bodies are separated by time and space but are connected by digital networks. I analyze the online presence and interactive literary engagements of two Caribbean writers, Zoé Valdés and Staceyann Chin,

5 “Dansez et Revivez!”: from: Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literature
Abstract: In Jacques Stephen Alexis’s Les Arbres musiciens(1957), the patriarch of a Haitian peasant community, Papa Bois-d’Orme, voices a question that continues to plague Caribbean nations at the outset of the twenty-first century: “Pourquoi alors nos ancêtres ont-ils combattu? Pourquoi Dessalines a-t-il existé, si les Blancs devaient venir reprendre les terres?” (Alexis 351; So why did our ancestors fight? Why did Dessalines exist, if the whites were going to take back the land?” [my translation]). While Bois-d’Orme mournfully takes as a given the twentieth-century collusions between the nation’s leaders and multinational corporations that seek a pliable work force, Alexis uses

Book Title: Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"-Text, Image, Reception
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Huot Sylvia
Abstract: Kevin Brownlee and Sylvia Huot and the contributors to this volume-Pierre-Yves Badel, Emmanuele Baumgartner, John V. Fleming, Robert Pogue Harrison, David F. Hult, Stephen G. Nichols, Lee Patterson, Daniel Poirion, Karl D. Uitti, Dieuwke E. van der Poel, and Lori Walters-represent all the major areas of current work on the Romance of the Rose, both in American and in Europe. The volume will be of value to students and scholars of medieval literature, intellectual history, and art history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19jcj20

Introduction: from: Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Huot Sylvia
Abstract: The Romance of the Roseis generally recognized as the single most significant work in the Old French literary tradition. Written between 1225 and 1275, theRose’s success among medieval readers was extraordinary: well over two hundred manuscripts are extant, dating from a period of nearly three hundred years. Its influence was pervasive in late-medieval works both in and outside France. By the close of the fourteenth century, it had been translated into Italian, into Dutch, and into English. It was one of the only medieval vernacular texts to be cited and glossed in learnèd monastic treatises. Furthermore, its influence

5. Language and Dismemberment: from: Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Hult David F.
Abstract: Virtually from the time of its composition in the late thirteenth century, Jean de Meun’s continuation of the Romance of the Rosehas been an object of controversy: its wit and its style have been celebrated; some of its more adventurous moral or social views have been condemned. The epistolary exchange in which Christine de Pizan participated was the first extended realization of such debates, but this exchange was itself preceded by evidence we can glean from literary works modeling themselves on theRoseallegory as well as from scribal manipulation of the text itself.¹ While the plethora of manuscripts

6. Ekphrasis, Iconoclasm, and Desire from: Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Nichols Stephen G.
Abstract: Ekphrasis no longer enjoys the name recognition it once did. In the terminology of classical rhetoric, ekphrasis “was the elaborate ‘delineation’ (έκΦρασις, descriptio, description), of people, places, buildings, works of art. Late antique and medieval poetry used it lavishly” (Curtis, 69). But, along with figurative language generally, it fell victim to the hostility toward classical rhetoric manifested by literary movements from romanticism to modernism. Indeed, one history of rhetoric still in use claims authoritatively: “ekphrasis . . . perverts descriptions because it frustrates narrative movement; [and] . . . confirms a decadent habit of literature” (Baldwin, 19). The good news

7. Illuminating the Rose: from: Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Walters Lori
Abstract: MS 101 of the Municipal Library of Tournai is one of the most distinctive fourteenth-century manuscripts of the Roman de la Rose. Bearing the date of 1330, it is devoted to Gui de Mori’s rewriting of the allegorical romance¹ and includes emendations by an anonymous editor. The program of illumination presents variations on well-known iconography of theRosebesides introducing elements not found elsewhere.² In general, the illustrations refer directly to the text and follow the logical sequence of events in the work. It is evident that the person responsible for masterminding the production of the manuscript was responding to

8. Authors, Scribes, Remanieurs: from: Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Huot Sylvia
Abstract: The [ Romance of the Rose] was no sooner written than it was rewritten; and the process of revision andremaniementcontinued throughout the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries.¹ The poem was abridged, expanded through the addition of interpolations, and altered through a combination of deletions and additions. A study of the manuscript tradition reveals that scribes sometimes worked from two or more sources at once; in this way the interpolations of a given remaniement found their way into the manuscript tradition, in some cases showing up in manuscripts of several different families. Scribes also introduced more modest changes in the text,

10. Alchemical Readings of the Romance of the Rose from: Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Badel Pierre-Yves
Abstract: In 1735, when Abbot Lenglet-Dufresnoy edited the Roman de la Rose, he appended a body of prose and verse texts relating to alchemy; of these texts, the most important are theFontaine des Amoureux de Scienceby Jean de la Fontaine (otherwise known as Jean de Valenciennes), theRemontrances de Nature à l’alchimiste errant avec la Réponse du dit alchimisteby Jean de Meun, and Nicolas Flamel’sSommaire philosophique. Lenglet-Dufresnoy regarded alchemy with a possibly feigned skepticism; at any rate, his curiosity about alchemy is shown by his publication of anHistoire de la philosophie hermétiquein 1742, a work

11. The Bare Essential: from: Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Harrison Robert Pogue
Abstract: The following chapter on Il Fiorerequires a rather protracted prologue about its intention. While scholars have for the most part speculated about the work’s author, my intention was to approach theFioreas an autonomous and anonymous artifact. This soon proved an impossible prospect, however, for the poem is denied both autonomy and anonymity by its literary parentage as well as its circumstantial history. Behind it lies theRoman de la Rose: the master text, the determining precedent, the French “original” transcribed into Italian. So much for autonomy, then. The problem of anonymity is more difficult to ponder, for

12. A Romance of a Rose and Florentine: from: Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) van der Poel Dieuwke E.
Abstract: The Roman de la Roseof Guillaume de Lorris and Jean de Meun has been a very popular and influential work. Critics have noted the exceptionally great number of complete and fragmentary manuscripts that have come down to us, their profound influence on French and English literature, and the adaptations that were made in various languages: English, Italian, Dutch. These adaptations have not yet received the attention they deserve in international research. If the adaptations are considered as mere derivatives of the French text, one neglects the wealth of information they can provide about the reception of theRoman de

Book Title: Heidegger in France- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): PETTIGREW DAVID
Abstract: Dominique Janicaud claimed that every French intellectual movement-from existentialism to psychoanalysis-was influenced by Martin Heidegger. This translation of Janicaud's landmark work, Heidegger en France, details Heidegger's reception in philosophy and other humanistic and social science disciplines. Interviews with key French thinkers such as Françoise Dastur, Jacques Derrida, Éliane Escoubas, Jean Greisch, Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe, Jean-Luc Marion, and Jean-Luc Nancy are included and provide further reflection on Heidegger's relationship to French philosophy. An intellectual undertaking of authoritative scope, this work furnishes a thorough history of the French reception of Heidegger's thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19jcj7k

Translators’ Introduction from: Heidegger in France
Author(s) Raffoul François
Abstract: Dominique Janicaud’s Heidegger in Franceis a major work of breathtaking historical scope, a unique intellectual undertaking reconstituting in two volumes the history of the French reception of Heidegger, from its earliest stages in the late 1920s until 2000.¹ One “certainty” guided Dominique Janicaud in this enterprise, that of “the omnipresence in France of the influence, direct or indirect, of Heidegger’s thought and work. Apart from the mathematical sciences and life and earth sciences, there is hardly one sector of knowledge or intellectual activity that has not been positively or negatively affected by that thought” (HF, 301). Volume 1 is

6 Renewed Polemics, New Shifts from: Heidegger in France
Abstract: When it comes to the climate, whether in meteorology or in philosophy, changes can be sudden. At the beginning of the 1960s, the bright spell Heidegger had enjoyed did not of course come to an end in one day. Heidegger’s influence continued to inspire original research.¹ The work of translation—distinguished, in particular, by the publication of Chemins qui ne mènent nulle part,² an important volume published only five years earlier in Germany—continued,³ but a few signs announced the end of the most favorable years. Furthermore, a page was also being turned in another domain. In politics, the Fifth

9 The Letter and the Spirit from: Heidegger in France
Abstract: Following a sixty-year delay after the original publication of Sein und Zeit, two complete French translations ofSein und Zeitfinally appeared in 1985 and 1986. How could this not be surprising? As far as the delay itself is concerned, it was rooted in (but not completely justified by) a series of coincidences. We have seen that Corbin’s volume was the only thing available at that time; later, the war and Liberation were not conducive to long-drawn-out work; the Louvain pair of de Waehlens and Boehm translated the first forty-four paragraphs incredibly slowly and finally published them with Gallimard in

12 At the Crossroads from: Heidegger in France
Abstract: Our story having reached its chronological end, that is to say, the end of the twentieth century, it would be possible and tempting to draw some lessons and already reach some conclusions. It seemed to us, however, that the work would be incomplete and would leave the reader particularly frustrated if we were not able to stop and cast a careful glance at the landscape we have crossed after this long journey. A philosophical accounting? This is indeed what we should attempt, not without being aware of the limits of the word “accounting,” since we will never manage to establish

Conclusion from: Heidegger in France
Abstract: With respect to the certainties, what has inspired us from the very beginning has been confirmed: the omnipresence in France of the influence, direct or indirect, of Heidegger’s thought and work. Apart from the mathematical sciences and life and earth sciences, there is hardly any sector of knowledge or intellectual activity that has not been positively or negatively affected by that thought, at times marginally, often

Françoise Dastur: from: Heidegger in France
Author(s) Dastur Françoise
Abstract: I remember having read, during my last year in high school, the volume published by Henri Corbin in 1938, entitled What Is Metaphysics?and having been inspired by the text on Hölderlin that it contained. During myhypokhâgneclass in Lyon, and then during my first year as an undergraduate at the Sorbonne, I continued to read Heidegger (I remember a presentation I gave duringhypokhâgneon “Angst”). However, I did not really begin to work on Heidegger until my second year at the Sorbonne when I took courses with Ricoeur and Derrida. The

Jean Greisch: from: Heidegger in France
Author(s) Greisch Jean
Abstract: Coming from the “wilds” of Luxemburg, and having completed training in theology before “converting” to philosophy, I consider that I am totally atypical, in the sense that I was not influenced by any tradition or by any French schools of thought. My relationship to Heidegger preexisted my encounter with the “French Heideggerian School” represented by Jean Beaufret, Henri Birault, and many others. Of course, I had read their works, but all this was in addition to a relation to Heidegger that had already been established. More significantly, I

3 “Medium-sized Mortals”: from: Contemporary Australian Literature
Abstract: In The Field of Cultural Production, Pierre Bourdieu argued that, in the symbolic network of modernity, “losers win”.¹ A novelist like Flaubert, who did not enjoy much commercial success, is far more esteemed than a more commercially successful writer, not just in spite of Flaubert making less money butbecausehe made less money. The ratio between financial and imaginative success was inverse. One can see this in the counterculture as late as the 1960s, when the American bohemian writer Seymour Krim could say, “if you are a proud, searching ‘failure’ in this society, and we can take ironic comfort

4 The Long and the Short of It: from: Contemporary Australian Literature
Abstract: Mega biblion, mega kakon, pronounced the Alexandrian sage Callimachus in the early third century BC: “Big book, big problem.” Callimachus was not speaking metaphorically. It was a literal complaint about the lengthy efforts of his contemporary and rival, Apollonius of Rhodes, whose epic on Jason and the Argonauts, written in deliberate imitation of Homer, was all the rage in the court of the early Ptolemies. Since Apollonius’ book has never quite made its way into the central literary nexus (Harold Bloom, for instance, did not include it in his list of masterworks inThe Western Canon), Callimachus’ quip might be

7 Australia’s International Styles: from: Contemporary Australian Literature
Abstract: This chapter will discuss idealism in Australian literature, with especial consideration given to the role of artificial structures in promoting idealism. In the work of Frank Moorhouse, the artificial capital of Canberra is linked to a global idealism of international organisations and a realm of perpetual peace. In the work of Gerald Murnane, idealism pertains to imaginary landscapes and the cognitive and ethical power they exert. The chapter concludes with an examination of recent Australian fiction by Michelle de Kretser and Brian Castro that continues this idealism in a more mobile and transnational mode.

8 Australian Abroad: from: Contemporary Australian Literature
Abstract: This chapter will discuss the later work of Peter Carey, arguing that it is far more politically progressive and formally daring than critics have assumed, and suggesting that Carey’s extensive engagement with the United States – as aspiration, foil and enemy – speaks to the heart of how contemporary Australian fiction can challenge the banalities of neoliberalism. In this, Carey’s first novel of the twenty-first century is exemplary.

9 History Made Present: from: Contemporary Australian Literature
Abstract: This book began with an account of my own efforts as a scholar, in 1985, to understand Australia. It will end by examining the work of two writers born in that same year, 1985, both young women from the antipodes who exploded onto the world literary scene in 2013. Hannah Kent and Eleanor Catton are very different writers who, in Burial Rites(2013) andThe Luminaries(2013), wrote books very varied in setting and tone. Kent’s is dark and mournful, set on the other side of the world from Australia. Catton’s is expansive and high-spirited, set in nineteenth-century New Zealand.

Book Title: Recognizing the Gift-Toward a Renewed Theology of Nature and Grace
Publisher: Augsburg Fortres
Author(s): Rober Daniel A.
Abstract: Recognizing the Gift puts twentieth-century Catholic theological conversations on nature and grace, particularly those of Henri de Lubac and Karl Rahner, into dialogue with Continental philosophy, notably the thought of Jean-Luc Marion and Paul Ricoeur. It argues that a renewed theology of nature and grace must build on the accomplishments of the recent past while acknowledging that an engagement with the political is unavoidable for theology. Ultimately, the aim is to revive and broaden discussion of nature and grace by drawing together the insights of contemporary theologians and Continental philosophers. Too often these areas of inquiry remain quite separate, in part due to differing priorities. This work tries to open that conversation, in part by critically pointing out, in dialogue with Ricoeur, the need in Marion’s work for an acknowledgment of recognition, reciprocity, and the political. It thus argues for a theology of nature and grace in terms of recognition of the gift, drawing out the reciprocal and political nature of gift and givenness in opposition to those, including Marion, who would seek to avoid politics and reciprocity as a proper avenue of inquiry for theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19qgfxw

1 Mid-Twentieth-Century Debates about Nature and Grace from: Recognizing the Gift
Abstract: The relationship between nature and grace was arguably the most-debated topic in Catholic theology in the early to middle twentieth century, a period that is now largely seen as culminating in the change in ecclesial and theological atmosphere surrounding the Second Vatican Council (1962–1965). These midcentury debates are the inevitable historical and theological backdrop for any contemporary study of nature and grace. This chapter thus explores the development of Catholic thought on nature and grace beginning with the work of Maurice Blondel against the backdrop of the Modernist controversy, continuing with the contributions of Pierre Rousselot, and concluding with

2 Nature and Grace after Vatican II: from: Recognizing the Gift
Abstract: The first chapter analyzed the transformation in Catholic theology of nature and grace through the work of Maurice Blondel, Pierre Rousselot, Henri de Lubac, and Karl Rahner. All worked against the backdrop of secular and ecclesial politics, yet none can be called a political theologian in the sense that this term would develop. Their achievements in developing theology thus had political implications, but they remained precisely implied rather than explicit. By the later 1960s and 1970s, however, the question of politics (and thus, in a sense, of recognition) became impossible to avoid, whichever side one took. It is within this

3 Jean-Luc Marion’s Phenomenology of the Gift: from: Recognizing the Gift
Abstract: This chapter explores the work of French philosopher Jean-Luc Marion. Christina Gschwandtner has argued that at first glance, Marion’s work has “been engaged in three very different projects that apparently have very little to do with each other, namely (1) primarily historical and exegetical work on Descartes (2) theology and (3) phenomenology.”¹ As she goes on to point out, these “extremely divergent interests are, however, much less incompatible than they might seem.”² In particular, Marion in the 1980s and 1990s began developing a phenomenology of the gift that seemed to invite application to the theology of grace. This project, in

4 Paul Ricoeur and the Possibility of Recognition from: Recognizing the Gift
Abstract: This chapter continues the exploration of the problem of the gift in continental philosophy. In particular, it turns to the work of the philosopher Paul Ricoeur as a resource for reformulating Marion’s concept of a gift in such a way as to answer the criticisms posed by Milbank and Tanner while retaining important parts of the overall project. Ricoeur notably brings forward a conception of recognitionthat is underdeveloped in Marion’s work and that serves as a key corrective. Though Ricoeur was an older contemporary of Marion’s and the two had common interlocutors, such as Emmanuel Levinas and David Tracy,

5 Recognizing the Gift of Grace from: Recognizing the Gift
Abstract: The previous two chapters have raised the question of gift and recognition as a resource for the theology of nature and grace. Jean-Luc Marion’s careful analysis of the gift and the saturated phenomenon offers valuable insights while also making overtures to theology, but it falls short on some key points, particularly its denial of reciprocity and underdeveloped notion of recognition. Paul Ricoeur’s work, as I have explained, offers correctives to Marion’s by pairing a less-developed notion of gift with a stronger account of recognition and reciprocity. In the conclusion of the last chapter, I began to draw out how these

Book Title: Lex Crucis-Soteriology and the Stages of Meaning
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress, Publishers
Author(s): Loewe William P.
Abstract: What is the true story of God and humankind, and how does that story become a saving story? These are pivotal questions that constitute the narratives Christians tell about themselves, their values, and how the Christian life is to be lived. In shaping those stories into a coherent, intelligible framework that provides comprehensive meaning, soteriology—the doctrine of redemption—developed as a keystone to Christian consciousness. This study investigates that development of the soteriological tradition. Employing Bernard Lonergan’s notion of the stages of meaning as a hermeneutic, the volume traces the origins of soteriology in the early Christian tradition represented by Irenaeus to its establishment as a systematic theory in Anselm, Aquinas, and subsequent developments in the Protestant tradition of Luther and Schleiermacher. The author concludes with a constructive exploration of Lonergan’s own work on the question of soteriology that overcomes the modernist distortions that hinder Schleiermacher’s account and offers an articulation of the dynamics of Christian conversion that opens onto the social, cultural, and political mediations of redemption necessary for the contemporary age.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19qgg1x

2 Anselm and the Turn to Theory from: Lex Crucis
Abstract: The gnostic movement that, in Irenaeus’s day, threatened to engulf Christianity subsided gradually into an underground current that would rise to the surface but sporadically in subsequent Christian history. Meanwhile, the Christian church soon advanced from being a persecuted minority to become the state religion of the Roman Empire, and eventually, in many ways, its successor. Once the age of martyrs gave way to Christendom, the sacralized political order on which Christendom rested would create tensions of its own and these, nine centuries after Irenaeus, provide the setting for the next work to claim our attention, Anselm of Canterbury’s Cur

Book Title: Ways of the Word-Learning to Preach for Your Time and Place
Publisher: Augsburg Fortres
Author(s): Powery Luke A.
Abstract: Preaching, and the discipline of preaching, is at a crossroads. The changing realities of church and theological education, the diversity of our classrooms, and our increasingly complex community contexts leave us in search of tools to help train a rising generation of preachers for a future whose contours are far from clear. In Ways of the Word, a dynamic team of master preachers, Sally A. Brown and Luke A. Powery, speaks with one voice their belief that preaching is a witness to the ongoing work of God in the world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19qgg2f

5 The Preacher as Interpreter of Word and World from: Ways of the Word
Author(s) Brown Sally A.
Abstract: Human beings are nonstop interpreters. From the moment we awake, we interpret our experience through all our senses. The rumble of a truck in the dark of early dawn prompts us to wonder if we remembered to put out the trash. We sniff the cream carton and decide to take our morning coffee black. Gathering clouds prompt us to grab an umbrella on the way out the door. On the morning commute, a sudden flash of dozens of red brake lights ahead alerts us to stalled traffic. In the hallway on the way to the office, a coworker’s smile lifts

6 Interpreting Scripture for Preaching from: Ways of the Word
Author(s) Brown Sally A.
Abstract: Scripture has been the indispensable, authorizing source of Christian sermons since Christianity’s beginnings. The sermons of Peter, Stephen, and Paul in Acts all draw on Old Testament texts. The book of Hebrews, thought by some to be a collection of early Christian sermons, draws on material across the Old Testament, especially the Psalms. This chapter provides you with a disciplined, prayerful, and scholarly process for engaging Scripture. Exegetical work (close grammatical, historical, and theological study of a text) is supported in this method by meditative Scripture reading using the centuriesold process called lectio divina(“divine reading”).

Book Title: Engaging Bonhoeffer-The Impact and Influence of Bonhoeffer's Life and Thought
Publisher: Augsburg Fortres
Author(s): ZIEGLER PHILIP G.
Abstract: Engaging Bonhoeffer documents the extraordinary impact of Dietrich Bonhoeffer’s life and writing on later thought. Despite his lasting legacy, little substantial scholarship has been conducted in this area. In this magisterial collection, leading international scholars fill this striking gap and critically demonstrate the ways in which Bonhoeffer has been one of the most inspirational writers of the twentieth century. In addition to shedding light on the different trajectories that Bonhoeffer’s work may forge, Engaging Bonhoeffer offers a critical window through which to view the ideas of many leading theological voices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19qgg3z

Introduction—Whose Bonhoeffer? from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Abstract: But who actually is this Bonhoeffer? After 70 years of scholarship, have we finally figured him out? Until relatively recently, Eberhard Bethge’s magisterial work, Dietrich Bonhoeffer: A Biography, had been the authoritative version

3 The Influence of Dietrich Bonhoeffer on Karl Barth from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Greggs Tom
Abstract: It may seem an odd thing to think and speak of the influence of Dietrich Bonhoeffer on Karl Barth. Born in 1886, Barth was a half-generation older than Bonhoeffer (born 1906). Bonhoeffer was only twelve years old when Barth published his theological epoch making Romerbrief. Bonhoeffer studied Barth’s work and was influenced by him as a student, such that hisHabilitationsschrift, Act and Being, was written in large part in dialogue with Karl Barth’s work. Even though this work contains critical elements,¹ this criticism should be seen within a shared discourse—a discourse established by Barth into which Bonhoeffer enters.

6 Overcoming Ethical Abstraction: from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) de Graaff Guido
Abstract: It appears there is little scope for establishing the true nature and extent of Bonhoeffer’s influence on Hauerwas since there are few places where the latter explicitly engages with the former. In Hauerwas’s recent memoir, Hannah’s Child(2010), Bonhoeffer is barely mentioned; Karl Barth and John Howard Yoder, by contrast, are credited several times for shaping his thinking.¹ Indeed, Bonhoeffer’s name does not appear even once in Hauerwas’s seminal workThe Peaceable Kingdom(1983)—not even in the section entitled “On What I Owe to Whom” at the beginning of the book.²

7 Dietrich Bonhoeffer and Liberation Theologies from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Kirkpatrick Matthew D.
Abstract: Liberation theology is one of the most important and provocative theological developments of the last century. Although it was largely forged in Latin America in distinction from the theologies of Western Europe and North America, Dietrich Bonhoeffer is often cited as a significant inspiration. Julio de Santa Ana and Beatriz Melano, Methodist theologians from Uruguay and Brazil respectively, offer moving first-hand testimony of Bonhoeffer’s impact on the development of Protestant liberation theology from its beginnings in the early 1950s—twenty years before Gustavo Gutiérrez’s seminal work, A Theology of Liberation, brought a systematic overview to the attention of the West.¹

8 Dorothee Soelle: from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Rumscheidt H. Martin
Abstract: What high praise for a German male theologian by a German female theologian whom others praise in quite similar terms! But what of Bonhoeffer’s life and work did she have in mind when she penned those words? As this this essay will show, Dorothee Soelle engaged with a wide range of Bonhoeffer’s thought and, as with many other liberational theologians, found particular inspiration in his prison theology.² This engagement was never at the expense of her own original and often provocative thoughts, or her critical reflections on Bonhoeffer’s work. However, in Bonhoeffer Soelle found a kindred spirit whose critique of

10 God, Christ, and Church in the DDR—Wolf Krötke as an Interpreter of Bonhoeffer’s Theology from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Ziegler Philip G.
Abstract: Bonhoeffer lived out much of his theological existence in eastern Germany. He was a man of wide international and ecumenical vision. Yet, between his birth in Breslau (now Wroclaw, Poland) in 1906 and his terminal imprisonment in Berlin in 1943–45, the better part of Bonheoffer’s life and work had its centre of gravity in the historic Prussian city of Berlin and the eastern German provinces of Silesia, Brandenburg, and Pomerania. It was at the behest of the Old Prussian Union Council of Brethren that he led the illegal Confessing Church seminary at Zingst/Finkenwalde and subsequent collective pastorates in “the

11 Locating the Divine Being: from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Holmes Christopher R. J.
Abstract: Eberhard Jüngel’s masterpiece, God as the Mystery of the World: On the Foundation of the Theology of the Crucified One in the Dispute between Theism and Atheism, first published in English translation in 1983, is now in its eighth German edition.¹ What renders it a magisterial work is the extremely creative way in which Jüngel solidly stands within his own existential Lutheran tradition but receives that tradition afresh in a way that is heavily mediated by Bonhoeffer.² Jüngel does this in a manner that is remarkably dependent on, but also free in relationship to, Karl Barth, the great Reformed theologian.³

13 The Critique of Religion and Post-Metaphysical Faith: from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Gregor Brian
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur was one of the leading French philosophers of the twentieth centuries. He was also one of the most erudite. From his starting point in phenomenology, Ricoeur ventured into structuralism, psychoanalysis, biblical studies, linguistics, narrative theory, historiography, and even neuroscience. Ricoeur’s exploration in these diverse fields is part of his overarching project of philosophical anthropology, which asks the questions of human being, self-understanding, and action. These questions also provide the context for Ricoeur’s work in the philosophy of religion, which is where Bonhoeffer’s influence on Ricoeur is most evident.

Foreword from: Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: The title of this work comes from a closing line in Heidegger’s Being and Time. He is speaking of the future of phenomenology as a promise of things to come—a sentiment already anticipated in an opening claim of the book: “In phenomenology possibility stands higher than actuality.”¹ For Heidegger this spelled a revolutionary reversal of the old metaphysical paradigm of being as presence, substance, and act and a radical openness to new kinds of questioning.

The Fundamental Concepts of Phenomenology from: Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) ROMANO CLAUDE
Abstract: It seems to me that one could diagnose a current crisis in philosophy that echoes Husserl’s statement at the beginning of the last century. On one side, the positivist paradigm that prevailed for a long time in the Anglophone philosophy of language, in the wake of a certain reading of the Tractatusand the work of the Vienna Circle, has reached exhaustion: not only the idea of a

Material Phenomenology from: Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) HENRY MICHEL
Abstract: The following “interview” was compiled specifically for this volume by Jean Leclercq and Grégori Jean of the Fonds Michel Henry (which opened in 2010 at Université catholique de Louvain à Louvain-la-Neuve, Belgium) from the body of available interviews conducted over the course of Henry’s life. Below, a preface to the “interview,” written by Leclercq and Jean, offers a brief picture of the basic motivations behind Henry’s work. We translate it here:

The Phenomenology of Life from: Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) BARBARAS RENAUD
Abstract: My interest in phenomenology was sparked very early on, in secondary school, when a professor had me read Heidegger and Merleau-Ponty. I didn’t understand it all, but I felt that this manner of thinking corresponded to what I was looking for in doing philosophy. Very early, I saw myself working on Merleau-Ponty, but while I was doing my studies at the École normale supérieure de Saint-Cloud (as well as at university), I found myself thrown into a very different atmosphere, one that was essentially hostile toward phenomenology. It was the

Phenomenology and Finitude from: Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) DASTUR FRANÇOISE
Abstract: In postwar France, secondary studies were still reserved for the children of the bourgeoisie. Coming from the working class, I was initially placed in trade school, but I managed—at the age of sixteen—to catch up with the “classic” stream [ filière classique] and get into a school where one prepared for thebaccalauréat.¹ I had the good fortune of being introduced to philosophy by Monique Dixsaut,² my high school professor, who is today considered to be the greatest contemporary specialist on Plato in France. It was her first year of teaching, and it

Phenomenology and the Frontier from: Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) LACOSTE JEAN-YVES
Abstract: You have characterized your work as the exploration of the “frontier zone” between philosophy and theology, where the boundaries between them are no longer meaningful. Reflecting on your work as a whole, one might further say that your theoretical task has been to investigate, by means of phenomenology, the reaches of philosophical reflection in light of what you have called the “liturgical possibility.” What kind of possibility does the “liturgical” refer to and how does it relate to the frontier between philosophy and theology?

The Collision of Phenomenology and Theology from: Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) FALQUE EMMANUEL
Abstract: We may certainly speak of a second generation of French phenomenologists, and perhaps also a third, if we count among the first Emmanuel Lévinas, Michel Henry, and Paul Ricoeur; among the second Jean-Luc Marion, Jean-Yves Lacoste, Jean-Louis Chrétien, and Didier Franck; and among the third Claude Romano, myself, and others. In reality, a difference in context marks the distance between these different generations. The first generation, which developed in the aftermath of World War II, remained closely tied to the works of Husserl

Book Title: The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Jones Jude
Abstract: The Varieties of Transcendence traces American pragmatist thought on religion and its relevance for theorizing religion today. The volume establishes pragmatist concepts of religious individualization as powerful alternatives to the more common secularization discourse. In stressing the importance of Josiah Royce's work, it emphasizes religious individualism's compatibility with community. At the same time, by covering all of the major classical pragmatist theories of religion, it shows their kinship and common focus on the interrelation between the challenges of contingency and the semiotic significance of transcendence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19rm9gf

PRAGMATIC METHODOLOGY IN THE PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION: from: The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion
Author(s) Seibert Christoph
Abstract: The task I would like to work on is a very broad one.¹ It can be looked at from various points of view. For example, it can be dealt with in the way of comparing a pragmatic-oriented philosophy of religion with other philosophical outlooks. It can be illumed in the light of the question which particular version of pragmatic thinking is more appropriate to religion as its subject matter. Finally, it can be approached by regarding some particulars of the methodological question bound to pragmatic thinking as such. In my argument, I will focus on the latter, drawing on the

EXPRESSIVE THEISM: from: The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion
Author(s) Polke Christian
Abstract: Personalism, like pragmatism, is a new name for same old ways of thinking.”¹ It was no mere accident when Albert C. Knudson, upcoming dean of the Boston Divinity School, opened his 1927 major work, The Philosophy of Personalism, with the famous subtitle of William James’s Lowell lectures on pragmatism. Using the phrase from the perhaps best-known American philosopher of his day rather gave him the audience he wanted for presenting his own program of philosophical personalism. Of course, Knudson only represented one version of personalism, but James was also just one member of the pragmatist family. What both had in

“… HOW YOU UNDERSTAND … CAN ONLY BE SHOWN BY HOW YOU LIVE”: from: The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion
Author(s) Schlette Magnus
Abstract: In his grand narration about the rise of the secular age, Charles Taylor called the optionalization of an exclusively innerworldly orientation toward life “the great invention of the West.” This historical innovation, according to Taylor, is the concept of “an immanent order in Nature, whose working could be systematically understood and explained on its own terms, leaving open the question whether this whole order had a deeper significance, and whether, if it did, we should infer a transcendent Creator beyond it. This notion of the ‘immanent’ involved denying—or at least isolating and problematizing—any form of interpenetration between the

CHAPTER 10 Popular Cultural Action, Catholic Transnationalism, and Development in Colombia before Vatican II from: Local Church, Global Church
Author(s) Roldán Mary
Abstract: This chapter examines the history and development of Popular Cultural Action (Acción Cultural Popular, or ACPO), the multipronged project of Christian revitalization, local empowerment, and communitybased development whose radio education network, Radio Sutatenza, founded by a Colombian parish priest in 1947 to address rural adult illiteracy, became Latin America’s first Catholic radio network and the model for media-based rural education and community development programs in twenty-four countries throughout Latin America, Asia, and Africa. In nearly a half century of existence, ACPO published and distributed more than six million cartillas(illustrated instructional manuals) for its five-point “Fundamental Integral Education” (EFI) program,

Introduction: from: Husserl's Missing Technologies
Abstract: This book is about and in response to Edmund Husserl’s phenomenology and his notion of science. No one would claim that Husserl was a founder of philosophy of technology, although his writings about science are substantial and persistent. Readers may note that my Heidegger’s Technologies: Postphenomenological Perspectives(Fordham, 2010) was a response to Heidegger’s foundational work in precisely philosophy of technology. This book parallels that work by turning to Husserl on technologies despite his ambivalence and lack of focal attention to technologies or even to instruments in science. Husserl remained throughout his life a believer in the primacy of science

9 Radicalizing Modernity from: Radical Theology
Abstract: I find the article on ‘H.’ rather amusing, since I am just beginning to crawl. Other than as a list of motifs that have been, so to speak, pulled together, the matter would be hard to present. Regarding content, all one could say is that my work aims at radicalizing ancient ontology while at

10 Phenomenology and Theology from: Radical Theology
Abstract: In the very first semester of Heidegger’s five years of teaching in Marburg, in 1923, he participated in Bultmann’s seminar on the ethics of Paul. What began as a working relationship soon led to friendship. When Heidegger left for Freiburg in 1928, the two agreed to address each other using the informal Durather than the formalSie. Despite all the reciprocal fruitfulness of their relationship, the theologian clearly was and remained a theologian while the philosopher was and remained a philosopher. Bultmann did not understand philosophy simply as the handmaiden of theology, nor did Heidegger attempt to subsume theology

Book Title: Exodus and Resurrection-The God of Israel in the Theology of Robert W. Jenson
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress
Author(s): Nicol Andrew W.
Abstract: Exodus and Resurrection establishes the important place God’s identity as the “God of Israel" has in the systematic theology of Robert W. Jenson. The work demonstrates that the identification of the God of Israel as the agent of Jesus’ resurrection functions as a foundational premise in Jenson’s Trinitarian theology. Andrew W. Nicol argues that a central characteristic of Jenson’s work is not merely his recognition that the same God who rescued Israel from Egypt raised Jesus from the dead, or the related yet distinct step of renovating his theology in a nonsupersessionist fashion, but also his attempt to conceive of the full implications for doing so in Christian theology, in the church’s self-understanding, and in the church’s relation to Israel and continuing Judaism. In this, Exodus and Resurrection provides a clear and critically appreciative account of Robert W. Jenson’s work and offers a new vital architectonic map of Jenson’s systematic vision.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b3t751

1 The God of Israel in the Theology of Robert Jenson from: Exodus and Resurrection
Abstract: Robert Jenson numbers among the world’s most influential living theologians, and his Systematic Theologymay yet prove to be one of the most learned and stimulating written in English, or any language, in the last fifty years.¹ As Jenson continues to apply his breadth of knowledge to all manner of theological, ecclesial, and cultural concerns, one theme has attracted much of his energy and focus for over a decade. Indeed, the “theology of Israel” that comes to fruition in theSystematic Theologydisplays Jenson’s determination to work through the implications of a “newly demanding” confrontation with the fact of Judaism.²

7 The Identity of the One and Triune God of Israel from: Exodus and Resurrection
Abstract: As noted in chapter 1, this book is concerned to assess the impact Jenson’s understanding of the God of Israel has on his wider systematic framework, including its effect on the overall coherence of his thought. In so doing, it also seeks to situate his work within the wider dogmatic tradition, insofar as this illuminates and scrutinizes his work and the importance of the abiding significance of God’s identity as the “God of Israel.” We have seen in earlier chapters that Jenson’s explication of the dogmatic centrality of the God of Israel touches on almost all loci of theology proper.

6 Moral Reasoning from: Theology in the Flesh
Abstract: This chapter examines our moral reasoning in light of embodied cognition, metaphor, prototypes, and frames. Morality here is broadly construed in the sense of what communities consider to be good and of value. The purpose is not to propose an ethical theory, but simply, to explore how cognitive linguistics can assist us in understanding what is involved in some aspects of moral reasoning and explain why Christians in general—and American Christians in particular—agree on some basics, yet disagree on many issues. It also draws upon some recent work in cognitive science to suggest the importance of exemplars for

Book Title: The Mutual Cultivation of Self and Things-A Contemporary Chinese Philosophy of the Meaning of Being
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Meyers Chad Austin
Abstract: Yang Guorong is one of the most prominent Chinese philosophers working today and is best known for using the full range of Chinese philosophical resources in connection with the thought of Kant, Hegel, Marx, and Heidegger. In The Mutual Cultivation of Self and Things, Yang grapples with the philosophical problem of how the complexly interwoven nature of things and being relates to human nature, values, affairs, and facts, and ultimately creates a world of meaning. Yang outlines how humans might live more fully integrated lives on philosophical, religious, cultural, aesthetic, and material planes. This first English translation introduces current, influential work from China to readers worldwide.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b7x4qv

Foreword from: The Mutual Cultivation of Self and Things
Author(s) MOELLER HANS-GEORG
Abstract: Yang Guorong is one of the most creative and prominent Chinese philosophers of our time. He is a truly “Chinese” philosopher not because of his citizenship, ethnicity, or workplace, but because of the nature of his work. Yang makes ample use of the complete range of sources provided by the Chinese philosophical tradition, including all its periods and all its schools (in addition to his reliance on the Western philosophical canon). Thus to call him, for example, a “Confucian” would not do justice to the breadth of his approach. More important, however, Yang is also truly a “philosopher,” because he

Il rapporto tra libri e lettori nel web 2.0 from: Nuove solitudini
Author(s) Cirillo Jacopo
Abstract: Fin dalla sua nascita, la bandiera del cosiddetto web 2.0 è stata rappresentata dal concetto di user generated content: la possibilità cioè, per chiunque – semplificando le interfacce e istituendo degli standard (piattaforme blog e social network) – di mettere online la propria vita e le

Book Title: Grand Hotel Abyss-Desire, Recognition and the Restoration of the Subject
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): Safatle Vladimir
Abstract: Long-expected translation of the Portuguese academic bestseller Grande Hotel Abismo. In the last two decades recognition - arguably one of the most central notions of the dialectical tradition since Hegel - has once again become a crucial philosophical theme. Nevertheless, the new theories of recognition fail to provide room for reflection on transformation processes in politics and morality. This book aims to recover the disruptive nature of the dialectical tradition by means of a severe critique of the dominance of an anthropology of the individual identity in contemporary theories of recognition. This critique implies a thorough rethinking of basic concepts such as desire, negativity, will and drive, with Hegel, Lacan and Adorno being our main guides. The Marxist philosopher György Lukács said that the Frankfurt School (Horkheimer, Adorno, etc.) left us with nothing but negativity towards the state of the world. Their work failed to open up a concrete possibility of practical engagement in this world. All too eager to describe the impasses of reason, the Frankfurt philosphers remained trapped in a metaphorical Grand Hotel Abyss (Grand Hotel Abgrund). It was as living and being guardian of lettered civilization in a beautiful and melancholy grand hotel, of which the balconies face a gaping abyss. But perhaps in this way Lukács gave – and no doubt without realizing it himself – a perfect definition of contemporary philosophy, namely to confront chaos, to peer into what appears to a certain rationality as an abyss and to feel good about it. Touching Hegelian dialectics, critical theory and psychoanalysis, Grand Hotel Abyss gives a new meaning to the notion of negativity as the first essential step for rethinking political and moral engagement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b9x1k5

Chapter V An impulse toward lawlessness from: Grand Hotel Abyss
Abstract: We know, for instance, how Hegelian thought would be seen by many as deeply reliant on the conceptual framework of a philosophy of

4 War Veterans Turned Writers of War Narratives from: Moments of Silence
Author(s) GHANOONPARVAR M. R.
Abstract: Writers of fiction often rely on their imagination in their work, and professional writers are able to recreate scenes, events, and incidents of actual or imagined wars by imagining them. In contrast, some of those who experience war first hand, especially as combat soldiers, write about those experiences using the format of memoirs, and on occasion in the form of novels and short stories. The creative process for these veterans who have become writers of fiction is the reverse to that of what I have called professional writers. They fictionalize the actual traumatic events they have experienced.

12 Narratives of Silence: from: Moments of Silence
Author(s) KHORRAMI MOHAMMAD MEHDI
Abstract: In a letter to F. Scott Fitzgerald, Ernest Hemingway called war “the writer’s best subject.” Hemingway justified this description by saying that “[War] groups the maximum of material and speeds up the action and brings out all sorts of stuff that normally you have to wait a lifetime to get.”¹ Keeping in mind the notion of dramatic license, he was probably right. And considering the fact that in the past few centuries the Persian literary tradition has had many chances to experience this “best subject,” it is reasonable to expect that many great works of Persian war literature have been

Book Title: Nowhere in the Middle Ages- Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): LOCHRIE KARMA
Abstract: Drawing on a range of contemporary scholarship on utopianism and a broad premodern archive, Lochrie charts variant utopian strains in medieval literature and philosophy that diverge from More's work and at the same time plot uncanny connections with it. Examining works such as Macrobius's fifth-century Commentary on the Dream of Scipio,Mandeville's Travels, and William Langland'sPiers Plowman, she finds evidence of a number of utopian drives, including the rejection of European centrality, a desire for more egalitarian politics, and a rethinking of the division between animals and humans.Nowhere in the Middle Agesinsists on the relevance and transformative potential of medieval utopias for More's work and positions the sixteenth-century text as one alternative in a broader historical phenomenon of utopian thinking. Tracing medieval utopianisms forward in literary history to reveal their influences on early modern and modern literature and philosophy, Lochrie demonstrates that looking backward, we might extend future horizons of utopian thinking.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzkpm

Book Title: Walter Benjamin and Theology- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): SYMONS STÉPHANE
Abstract: In the Arcades Project, Walter Benjamin writes that his work is "related to theology as blotting pad is related to ink. It is saturated with it." For a thinker so decisive to critical literary, cultural, political, and aesthetic writings over the past half-century, Benjamin's relationship to theological matters has been less observed than it should, even despite a variety of attempts over the last four decades to illuminate the theological elements latent within his eclectic and occasional writings. Such attempts, though undeniably crucial to comprehending his thought, remain in need of deepened systematic analysis. In bringing together some of the most renowned experts from both sides of the Atlantic, Walter Benjamin and Theology seeks to establish a new site from which to address both the issue of Benjamin's relationship with theology and all the crucial aspects that Benjamin himself grappled with when addressing the field and operations of theological inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzm39

Introduction from: Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) SYMONS STÉPHANE
Abstract: In a famous letter written to Max Horkheimer in March 1937, Walter Benjamin describes his philosophy as “something that forbids us to conceive of history as fundamentally atheological, little as it may be granted to us to try to write it with immediately theological concepts.”¹ In The Arcades Project, he writes: “[My work is] related to theology as blotting pad is related to ink. It is saturated with it. Were one to go by the blotter, however, nothing of what is written would remain.”² For a thinker so decisive to critical literary, cultural, political, and aesthetic writings over the past

Benjamin’s Messianic Metaphysics of Transience from: Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) THIEM ANNIKA
Abstract: While religious and theological questions have seen a renewed interest within critical theory, metaphysics still remains under suspicion when it is not, as is so often the case in contemporary critical theory, considered a matter of little consequence. Similarly, Walter Benjamin’s drawing upon theological tropes as the conceptual framework for theorizing history and life is no longer met with criticism but rather is widely embraced and harnessed as a theoretical resource for political and ethical thought. However, as obvious as it is that Benjamin’s work is shot through with theological tropes and concepts, it proves more difficult to reflect systematically

Fidelity, Love, Eros: from: Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) WEIGEL SIGRID
Abstract: Fidelity certainly does not rank among the central themes of Walter Benjamin’s work.¹ Likewise, it has garnered little attention in critical reception of his work so far—one will mostly look in vain for the term in the indexes of scholarly works on Benjamin.² The word nevertheless occupies a crucial position in Benjamin’s conception of life. It appears to have played an indispensable role in the elaboration of a fundamental facet of Benjamin’s thought: the double determination of human life as both creaturely (or natural) and supernatural, and thus of a concept of life derived from its relationship to these

The Will to Apokatastasis: from: Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) JENNINGS MICHAEL W.
Abstract: To begin with the ending: Walter Benjamin’s much discussed and little understood allegory of the Turkish puppet in his last known text, “On the Concept of History,” raises one central question for the entirety of his work: exactly howmight politics take theology into its service, and to what effect?¹ Throughout his career, Benjamin’s use of theological concepts and motifs is invariably bound to the formulation of a politics; but how are we to trace the invisible strings that allow theology to ensure that historical materialism always wins? Benjamin’s deployment of theological motifs and his political commitments are of course

Seminar Notes on Walter Benjamin’s “Theses on the Philosophy of History” from: Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) TAUBES JACOB
Abstract: The notes were initially published in the German edition of Elettra Stimilli’s documentation of Taubes’s critical confrontation with Gershom Scholem’s work on the phenomenon of Messianism and its history.² They cover the first seven sessions of Taubes’s course on Benjamin, which took place from October 18 to December 6, 1984, before Taubes had to discontinue

One Time Traverses Another: from: Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) BUTLER JUDITH
Abstract: Benjamin’s “Theological-Political Fragment” opens up several questions about the status of religion in Benjamin’s work. Two questions tend to emerge when I teach this short text. One of them is whether Benjamin understands the divine as a purely immanent feature of the world. The second has to do with the notion of the “rhythm of transience” that appears in the text and, simply put, whether the rhythm of transience is itself transient—that is, it comes and goes but not in a regular or law-like way—or whether that transience comes and goes in a rhythmic way, suggesting that the

Book Title: The Adventures of Jonathan Dennis-Bicultural Film Archiving Practice in Aotearoa New Zealand
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Kelly Emma Jean
Abstract: Jonathan Dennis (1953-2002), was the creative and talented founding director of the New Zealand Film Archive. As a Pakeha (non-Maori/indigenous New Zealander) with a strong sense of social justice, Dennis became a conduit for tension and debate over the preservation and presentation of indigenous and non-indigenous film archival materials from the time the Archive opened in 1981. His work resulted in a film archive and curatorship practice which differed significantly from that of the North American and European archives he originally sought to emulate. He supported a philosophical shift in archival practice by engaging indigenous peoples in developing creative and innovative exhibitions from the 1980s until his death, recognizing that much of the expertise required to work with archival materials rested with the communities outside archival walls. This book presents new interviews gathered by the author, as well as an examination of existing interviews, films and broadcasts about and with Jonathan Dennis, to consider the narrative of a life and work in relation to film archiving.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzn6b

Chapter 1 Introduction from: The Adventures of Jonathan Dennis
Abstract: This work explores the philosophy and nature of film archiving in Aotearoa New Zealand (NZ) through an analysis of the role played by Jonathan Dennis, firstly at the New Zealand Film Archive, Ngā Kaitiaki o ngā Taonga Whitiāhua (NZFA), from 1981 until 1990 and thereafter as a freelance film curator until his death in 2002. The construction of a film archive in the early 1980s offers a valuable moment in which to analyse the wider purpose and the more specific process for the formation of a film archive. As a national institution presenting materials from the past, an archive quickly

Chapter 2 The practice of the archive from: The Adventures of Jonathan Dennis
Abstract: The cultural practice of archiving physical materials in dedicated institutions emerges from European museums and libraries and is adapted by film archives, which over time have developed their own styles most appropriate to the media which they house. In examining the literature on the physical archive it becomes quickly apparent that at times the pragmatic everyday aspects of archiving can seem very far removed from the more philosophical discussion, and that archivists may be under-resourced and overworked to the point where they take for granted the perspectives which ingrain their practice. The divide between the everyday work and the philosophical

Chapter 3 Jonathan SpencerDennis and the early years from: The Adventures of Jonathan Dennis
Abstract: Barry Barclay described Jonathan Dennis’ work and his “stumbling prescience back in the first years …” which “… showed, at least in film archive circles, certainly in this country and perhaps internationally too, how he was much ahead of his time” (Barclay, 2005 p. 107). Conal McCarthy’s text, Museums and Māori: Heritage Professionals Indigenous Collections Current Practice(2011) also briefly commented on Dennis’ work during the early 1980s which he said “demonstrated through an active public programme and community outreach how a small cultural organisation such as the archive could begin to take on board Māori values and practices” (McCarthy

Chapter 5 The New Zealand Film Archive become Guardians of the Treasured Images of Light/Ngā Kaitiaki o ngā Taonga Whitiāhua from: The Adventures of Jonathan Dennis
Abstract: Within its first decade, the NZFA developed from its “very European” origins (Dennis, 1989 p. 10) into an institution which had a working document called The Constitution/Kaupapa in which the Treaty of Waitangi principles were incorporated and acknowledged as the founding document of the nation.⁹¹ In particular the Archive developed an understanding of Article Two of the Treaty which referred to “taonga”, as we have seen, a concept which would alter the manner in which institutions in New Zealand would engage with Māori materials (McCarthy, 2011). As set out in the previous chapter, in the 1970s there was a re-evaluation

Chapter 8 Concluding discussion: from: The Adventures of Jonathan Dennis
Abstract: Dennis’ works (listed as an appendix) contributed to the growing archive of New Zealand and South Pacific culture, and demonstrate how he was never the sole author of these works; he was seeking to frame, curate and be the catalyst for the presentation of the artistic productions of others. Dennis understood that the work he did was collaborative – because he did not have all the information or skills required nor the doxa or habitus, he sought to encourage the work of others and engage with them to create presentations in various fora. Dennis shaped materials for various ends, and sought

Introduction from: Moving Images
Author(s) Widding Astrid Söderbergh
Abstract: On 17 October 1888, Thomas Alva Edison filed a caveat in which he announced that he was ‘experimenting upon an instrument which does for the Eye what the phonograph does for the Ear, which is the recording and reproduction of things in motion, and in such a form as to be Cheap, practical and convenient’. Just as work on the development of the instrument to which Edison referred, a precursor of the Kinetoscope, instances an apparatus that was framed in terms of the known technologies of the phonograph and the microscope, the essays in this collection variously address the contexts

The Bolex Motion Picture Camera from: Moving Images
Author(s) Bustamante Carlos
Abstract: The Paillard-Bolex H16 camera played a central role in the work of many avant-garde filmmakers from the 1940s through to the 1970s because of its precision and light weight, robustness and range of facilities,¹ and the high quality of its optics – especially the zoom lenses – and its simple operation, which made possible an infinite combination of creative cinematographic choices. The Bolex H16 is probably thecamera which most influenced a generation of experimental and documentary/ethnographic filmmakers. Leafing through old issues ofFilm Culture, I note that the camera was also an important prop, a kind of status symbol, included in

Space and Character Representation in Interactive Narratives from: Moving Images
Author(s) Thuresson Björn
Abstract: – How does an interactive narrative (I’m deliberately using the term ‘narrative’ instead of ‘fiction’) work and function?¹ What does it look like? How do you construct it?

5 Sound-on-disc cinema and electrification in pre-WWI Britain, France, Germany and the United States from: Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) O’Brien Charles
Abstract: In the following essay I examine sound-on-disc cinema prior to World War I through a framework of national and urban comparisons. The objective is to explore sound-on-disc’s international diffusion as an example of how the cinema’s uneven global development, its geographical diversity, was conditioned by regional variations in electric power. The focus on sound-on-disc thus involves an argument that bears implications for cinema history as a whole. One aspect of the argument concerns difficulties posed to the established nation-state film historiography by electrification, a sub-or transnational phenomenon more than a national one.

13 Teaching citizenship via celluloid from: Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Dahlquist Marina
Abstract: In the summer of 1910, Francis Oliver, the Chief of the Bureau of Licenses in New York City, conducted a study of moving picture theaters and concluded: “the motion picture theaters which were just now being condemned by a great many people, [are] a potent factor in the education of the foreign element and therefore an advantage to the city”.¹ Challenging misgivings that moving pictures suggested “bad” ideas, he further claimed “that many foreigners who could neither read nor write were enabled through the proper kind of pictures to get a good working idea of the customs of this their

18 Wondrous pictures in Istanbul: from: Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Balan Canan
Abstract: This essay presents a panorama of the evolution of viewing conventions in Istanbul, in the late 19th and early 20th centuries (from the 1890s to the 1930s). Within the Ottoman Empire, Westernist, Turkist and Islamist schools of thought were in keen competition when the cinématographe arrived in Istanbul, in 1896. Traces of the discursive space configured by these schools are quite visible in Turkish cultural history, specifically in the history of cinematic spectatorship. A set of binary oppositions – between East and West, between National and International, and, finally, between Islamist and Secular – dominated the framework for reactions to the cinématographe.

21 Spanish lecturers and their relations with the national from: Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Sánchez-Salas Daniel
Abstract: This essay addresses the question of how the concept of the national provides a context for the work of the Spanish lecturer in early cinema. As is well known, previous studies have always stressed that the film lecturer was responsible for mediating between the screen and viewers, for whom, at least in the beginning, moving pictures were something strange.¹ Also we should not forget that he was dealing with a specific public, determined not only by the period of time, but also by the location. Generally, histories of early cinema have analysed film lecturing from a local perspective. In the

Chapter 7 French Industrial Relations – Still Exceptional? from: The French Exception
Author(s) Parsons Nick
Abstract: In the 1990s, there was much debate among observers of the ‘normalisation’ of French industrial relations (Freyssinet 1993; Ruysseveldt and Visser 1996; Goetschy 1998). Broadly, the argument is that there has been a shift from an under-institutionalised system in which state intervention was needed to mediate a more or less naked class conflict between capital and labour to one based upon regular decentralised compromise bargaining between ‘social partners’. From this perspective, the system of labour regulation in France – the ‘rules of the game’ by which wages and working conditions are established – is coming to resemble more closely that of other

Chapter 1 Introduction: from: Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: Anyone proposing to write yet another book about Jean-Paul Sartre must do so with a certain sense of guilt. Given the huge number of books and articles that already exist, what justification can there be for adding to them? Moreover, any writer on Sartre lives with the melancholy awareness that Sartre himself insisted that he had never learnt anything from any of the books written about him.¹ Yet such is the richness and complexity of Sartre’s work that there are still things that have not been said – as well, unfortunately, as some that have been said all too often,

Chapter 10 Reorientation from: Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: He was, moreover, increasingly isolated. In the RDR he had been working with people like Rousset, Rosenthal, Altman and Chauvin, who had considerably more political experience than himself.

Chapter 12 Debate with the Far Left from: Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: The ‘left’ anti-Communist doesn’t want to hear any mention of working-class weariness: he shows us a proletariat of steel plunged to the hilt into the corpse of the bourgeoisie. The ‘right’ anti-Communist shows us the bourgeoisie in the form of a young giantess holding in her arms a

Chapter 17 May to December from: Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: The events of 1968, often ignorantly dismissed as no more than a year of ‘student revolt’, undermined the political certainties that had endured since 1945. In Vietnam, the world’s strongest power was proved vulnerable in face of a national liberation struggle. The Russian invasion of Czechoslovakia marked a definitive end to Moscow’s hegemony over the world’s Communist Parties. In France a general strike of over nine million workers, the biggest general strike in human history, showed that the power of the working class could not be ignored; an anti-Stalinist left that had been confined to the margins of political life

Book Title: Critical Junctions-Anthropology and History beyond the Cultural Turn
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Tak Herman
Abstract: This volume focuses on the conjunction of two disciplines where both the analytic promises as well as the difficulties involved in the meeting of humanist and social science approaches soon became obvious. Anthropologists and historians have come together here in order to recapture, elaborate, and criticize pre-Cultural Turn and non-Cultural Turn modes of analysing structures of experience, feeling, subjectivity and action in human societies and to highlight the still unexploited possibilities developed among others in the work of scholars such as Norbert Elias, Max Gluckman, Eric Wolf, E.P. Thompson and Raymond Williams.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btbxqc

Introduction: from: Critical Junctions
Author(s) Tak Herman
Abstract: This collection of studies and essays seeks to address the pitfalls of, and the alternatives to, what has become known as the “cultural turn” (or the “historic turn”) in the social and human sciences. The cultural turn has been a multifarious and pretty pervasive phenomenon in Western universities and modes of social knowledge since the early 1980s, when, in Bill Sewell’s phrasing, a “kind of academic culture mania has set in” (Sewell 1999: 36). It embraced parts of anthropology, sociology, social theory, gender studies, literary studies, various branches of history, and science studies and laid the philosophical groundwork for the

Chapter Two The Past in the Present: from: Critical Junctions
Author(s) Giordano Christian
Abstract: Having been trained as both a sociologist and an anthropologist, I have in my research consistently been oriented toward the present. While carrying out fieldwork projects, however, I have often been confronted by opinions, questions, answers, convictions, reasoning, reflections, and concrete forms of social behavior that cannot be untangled and articulated exclusively in terms of the “here and now.” It would be all too easy to develop a tendency to underestimate the past by viewing it as a dead hand upon the present, rather than an active, operating force. There is, however, more to the presentist orientation in social research

Book Title: Recollections of France-Memories, Identities and Heritage in Contemporary France
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Picard Jeanine
Abstract: Since the 1980s, France has experienced a vigorous revival of interest in its past and cultural heritage. This has been expressed as part of a movement of remembering through museums and festivals as well as via elaborate commemorations, most notably those held to celebrate the bi-centenary of the Revolution in 1989 and can be interpreted as part of a re-examinaton of what it means to be French in the context of ongoing Europeanization. This study brings together scholars from multidisciplinary backgrounds and engages them in debate with professionals from France, who are working in the fields of museology, heritage and cultural production. Addressing subjects such as war and memory, gastronomy and regional identity, maritime culture and urban societies, they throw fresh light on the process by which France has been conceptualized and packaged as a cultural object.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btbxwz

4 PUBLIC HISTORY AND THE ‘HISTORIAL’ PROJECT, 1986–1998 from: Recollections of France
Author(s) Winter Jay
Abstract: My subject is public history, history outside the academy, linking historians to the broad population interested – sometimes passionately interested – in historical inquiry. Public history is defined by this extension of the domain within which the scholar operates. The audience for historical literature defines the discipline as much as the professional credentials of the practitioner. Public history is thus an attempt to flee from the increasing specialisation and decreasing readership of professional academic work, both in journals and in monograph form. It is also a recognition that historical scholarship is intrinsically tied to concepts of educating the public, and

6 CONSTRUCTION OF A BRETON MARITIME HERITAGE: from: Recollections of France
Author(s) Péron Françoise
Abstract: It is fairly common in France to speculate as to why it has taken such a long time to recognise the importance of preserving and promoting the heritage linked to France’s maritime past. This slow awakening applies to harbours and quaysides, rope-works, military dockyards as well as merchant craft, naval vessels and fishing fleets. The French, compared to the British or the Dutch, have in the past shown only a sporadic interest in the 4,500 kilometres of coastline which circumscribe their metropolitan territory. For the French, their country has been first and foremost a land mass: its coastal regions were

Chapter 2 Identity and Selfhood as a Problématique from: Identities
Author(s) Wagner Peter
Abstract: Many formalised discourses of the human sciences—such as law, liberal political philosophy and neo-classical economics—work with a notion of the singular human being as a unit that is characterised by its indivisibility, for those reasons also called the individual. An additional assumption about the guiding orientation or behaviour of these units then needs to be introduced to arrive at ways of conceptualising stable collectivities. In the discourses mentioned above, this assumption is basically one of rationality, with specific variations. In liberal political theory, their capacity for rationality leads the individuals to enter into a social contract for their

Chapter 3 Personal and Collective Identity: from: Identities
Author(s) Straub Jürgen
Abstract: ‘Identity’ has been among the most central concepts in 20 thcentury psychology and sociology. It acquired its significance, which has persisted in all essentials until today, particularly in the context of pragmatist, interactionist and psychoanalytical thought,—even if the term played no role in the work of either Sigmund Freud or William James, but rather only in subsequent attempts to develop their theories of the subject and the self (Straub, 1991, 1994). Of course the remarkable career of ‘identity’ is due especially to certain works that were still close to the sources of psychoanalysis and pragmatism, even if they were

Chapter 4 Identities of the West: from: Identities
Author(s) Henry Barbara
Abstract: In recent debates, notions of identity are predominantly seen as coined within the framework of modernity and subsequently criticised by postmodern thought. This chapter will explore the relation of these two modes of thinking with regard to the term identity. Attention will be focused on the controversial question of the relation of myth to the identities of the West (e.g. individual, group and national identity), and the objective will be to explore how this relation can become a philosophical testing ground for a notion of political identity that is far removed from any hegemonic claims over the various Lebenswelten, and

Chapter 11 Identity as Progress – The Longevity of Nationalism from: Identities
Author(s) Geulen Christian
Abstract: It has become almost obligatory in recent work on the history of nationalism to insist that this very history has not and, for the time being, will not come to an end. History continues in the conflicts in Eastern Europe, in the Western revival of the nation as an acknowledged cultural category, and also in the ethnic con-flicts of postcolonial societies. Such observations presuppose that nationalism exists as such and that it possesses one single history, despite all evident differences. In contradistinction to phenomena such as Imperialism, Communism or National Socialism, which appear to be fixed in time and space,

Chapter 2 Beyond Vodou and Anthroposophy in the Dominican-Haitian Borderlands from: Beyond Rationalism
Author(s) Brendbekken Marit
Abstract: This essay¹ concerns the paradoxes emerging in the dynamic space of hybridisation between vodou magic² and the occult science of anthroposophy. These lived imaginaries and registers of interpretation are engaged within counter-modernising environmental discourses and practices in the Dominican-Haitian borderlands. Here NGO-affiliated European anthroposophists, orientated by the work of Rudolf Steiner,³ are organising a biodynamic programme in co-operation with marginalised Dominican and Haitian borderlands peasants who live the consequences of radical deforestation. These peasants have for long been subjugated to the often violent dictates of post-colonial ruling élites, and their world of vodou spirits is itself the creation of ‘resistant

Chapter 3 The Smell of Death: from: Beyond Rationalism
Author(s) Telle Kari G.
Abstract: In this essay I examine a form of stealing that people in rural Sasak communities on the island of Lombok find deeply problematic because of its intimate nature: theft of which they suspect that someone in their own hamlet or village is culpable. In the large village in central Lombok where I have carried out fieldwork, theft that is attributed to a so-called ‘neighbourhood thief’ is said to produce a foul smell ( bais) that begins to ooze out from where the theft occurred, enveloping the neighbourhood in a putrid stench.¹ This smell is particularly intense when the thief is not

Chapter 5 The Sorcerer as an Absented Third Person: from: Beyond Rationalism
Author(s) Rio Knut
Abstract: I will explore the historical specificity of these developments and simultaneously try to situate sorcery on Ambrym in a larger comparative framework of human sociality. Like earlier writers in the tradition of British social

Book Title: Identity and Networks-Gender and Ethnicity in a Cross-Cultural Context
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Webber Jonathan
Abstract: Contrary to the negative assessments of the social order that have become prevalent in the media since 9/11, this wide-ranging collection of essays, mostly by social anthropologists, focuses instead on the enormous social creativity being invested as collective identities are reconfigured. Using fieldwork findings drawn from Africa, Asia, and Europe, special emphasis is placed on the reformulation of ethnic and gender relationships and identities in the cultural, social, political, and religious realms of public life. Under what circumstances does trust arise, paving the way for friendship, collegiality, knowledge creation, national unity, or emergence of leadership? How is social life constructed as a collective endeavour? Does the means towards sociability become its end? And what can be said about the agency and collegiality of women? The inspiration for examining these conundrums is the work and persona of Shirley Ardener, to whom the volume is dedicated.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btc01f

1 Changing Cultures, Changing Rooms: from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Macdonald Sharon
Abstract: Moving across and between cultures is at the heart of anthropology. Ethnography is an inherently mobile enterprise, involving the ethnographer literally moving across space, over time, and between the relatively familiar and unfamiliar. Although the idea of ‘multi-sited fieldwork’ has become fashionable recently, good anthropology has always entailed a degree of multi-sitedness, even if some of those sites might be called ‘home’ and some might be encountered vicariously. Good anthropological training entails learning about many peoples and parts of the world and going to seminars beyond geographical specialisms. The themed seminar and the edited collection, in which scholars are brought

6 Towards an Ethnography of Colleagueship from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Callan Hilary
Abstract: In this short essay I focus on two issues relating to colleagueship and anthropology. First, I look at a case drawn from my own occupational experience and recent analytical work, where it seems to me that colleagueship is germane to an understanding of institution building and the negotiation of identities in a particular environment. Secondly, using the same material, I consider the ‘colleague relationship’ as a context and a tool for ethnography. The designation of this relationship is, inevitably, imprecise, but perhaps no more so than others that have been much discussed as a basis for the production of anthropological

7 Thinking the Unheard, Writing the Unwritten: from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Jingjun Shui
Abstract: At the core of my last years of research – indeed, all-pervasive in its implications – is the ongoing dialogue with my Chinese–Hui research collaborator, co-author and friend, Shui Jingjun. One of the prompters of this enduring conversation, begun over nine years ago, was my correspondence with Shirley Ardener, then not known to me in person. It was about 1994, when conducting fieldwork in Henan Province, in the interior of China, that I wrote to Shirley about the relevance of issues addressed in Perceiving Women¹ to problems arising from my own crosscultural and collaborative research. And I wrote of the

9 A Good Lady, Androgynous Angel, and Intrepid Woman: from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Kubica Grażyna
Abstract: This essay discusses the Polish-British anthropologist, Maria Czaplicka (born 1884), a contemporary of Bronisław Malinowski, who like him came to England in 1910 and studied under C.G. Seligman at the London School of Economics and Political Science. Later she worked with R.R. Marett and obtained a Diploma in Anthropology from Oxford University. In 1914–15, she led the Jenisei Expedition to Siberia, where she became an experienced fieldworker and made important finds for the Pitt Rivers Museum. While she was the first female lecturer in anthropology at Oxford University, she was also a tragic figure without a secure academic appointment.

11 Revolting, Revolutionary, and Rebellious Women: from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Frankenberg Ronnie
Abstract: This essay uses some of the Ardeners’ seminal/uterine, even vaginal insights to analyse the way that anthropological research can be seen as a cooperative exercise between subjects rather than merely informant and fieldworker – to illuminate such diverse investigations as resistance and struggle in West Africa and images in art and drama. Finally, on the basis of Rhian Loudon’s own field research, they inform analysis of the both vulnerable and powerful, dominant and muted, speech and actions of British Asian women, observed in shared multiple simultaneous realities of home and health-service/social-service workplace. It accepts one challenge posed by Ardener’s discussions

12 What Women Really Want: from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Moore Fiona
Abstract: Traditionally, social studies of factories have focused on issues of discrimination, oppression, and resistance. The earliest studies in industrial anthropology, the Hawthorne research projects, examined the ways in which workers controlled the production process against the interests of management (Baba 1986). More recently, the work of Roberts et al., Language and Discrimination(1992) focused on ways in which English managers unconsciously exclude their non-English workers through the use of language and communication, and Westwood’s (1984)All Day, Every Dayanalyses how women from a variety of ethnic origins gain empowerment against their male relatives and bosses through subversive practices. Much

13 Can You Call This Fieldwork? from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Sciama Lidia D.
Abstract: Reflexive anthropology, anthropology ‘at home’ or ‘half-way home’, and the recognition of the researcher’s as well as her informants’ subjectivity have dominated much of anthropology since the 1970s. All are intimately bound with feminist critiques of ethnographic approaches and have been guiding principles in research conducted within the framework of Oxford’s Centre for Cross-Cultural Research on Women (E. Ardener 1975; S. Ardener 1975; Ardener and Burman 1995). To reach a closer understanding of women’s lives, it proved essential to focus on the contacts and active interactions of women in the societies we studied. Indeed, one of the questions we posed

Going the Extra Mile from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Burman Sandra
Abstract: Invited to reminisce about Shirley in a page, I find it difficult to select from some forty years of memories since we first met. It is also difficult to convey briefly her many notable qualities, such as her originality of thought and quiet zest for life that make her such excellent company. But in the end I realise that an underlying feature of all my many recollections of Shirley is her empathy with those she encounters. Although she is a very private person, her concern for people who work with her has led to a greater intermingling of her personal

Shirley Ardener: from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Heinonen Paula
Abstract: My relationship with Shirley and Edwin Ardener began in 1977 when I came to Oxford as a Human Sciences undergraduate. My first glimpse of Shirley was in the quad at St John’s College when one of my friends pointed her out as one of our anthropology tutors. I blinked and she was gone. For the next few months, the same thing happened. She either flew or zoomed past me on her bike or on foot. Nothing has changed, since I found it hard to keep up with her when we eventually carried out fieldwork together on body piercing in 2003.

Shirley’s African Roots from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Swaisland Cecillie
Abstract: Shirley Ardener has a long association with West Africa, beginning when she accompanied her husband Edwin Ardener to Nigeria for his fieldwork. They had met when they were students at the LSE together. Subsequently, in the 1950s, Shirley and Edwin Ardener moved to the Cameroons, where Edwin became the Honorary Adviser on Archives and Antiquities (see S. Ardener’s introduction to her edited volume, Kingdom on Mount Cameroon, Berghahn Books, 1996). So began Shirley’s interest and concern with the Cameroons. She acted as Edwin’s associate and developed a love of the land, the people and especially the Bakweri in the south.

Returning to ‘The Mountain’ from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Geschiere Peter
Abstract: In 1995, my colleague Piet Konings and I arranged for Shirley’s return to Cameroon after more than twenty years. It did not take much persuasion to get her back. Clearly she felt it was time to revisit Buea, where she and Edwin had done so much ethnographic work beginning in the 1950s. The occasion was a conference Piet and I organised with Paul Nkwi, then at the Ministry of Scientific Research in Yaoundé. We were delighted that Shirley had agreed to attend, thus returning to Cameroon after so long.

Book Title: Critical White Studies- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Stefancic Jean
Abstract: No longer content with accepting whiteness as the norm, critical scholars have turned their attention to whiteness itself. In Critical White Studies: Looking Behind the Mirror, numerous thinkers, including Toni Morrison, Eric Foner, Peggy McIntosh, Andrew Hacker, Ruth Frankenberg, John Howard Griffin, David Roediger, Kathleen Heal Cleaver, Noel Ignatiev, Cherrie Moraga, and Reginald Horsman, attack such questions as:*How was whiteness invented, and why?*How has the category whiteness changed over time?*Why did some immigrant groups, such as the Irish and Jews, start out as nonwhite and later became white?*Can some individual people be both white and nonwhite at different times, and what does it mean to "pass for white"?*At what point does pride in being white cross the line into white power or white supremacy?*What can whites concerned over racial inequity or white privilege do about it?Science and pseudoscience are presented side by side to demonstrate how our views on whiteness often reflect preconception, not fact. For example, most scientists hold that race is not a valid scientific category -- genetic differences between races are insignificant compared to those within them. Yet, the "one drop" rule, whereby those with any nonwhite heritage are classified as nonwhite, persists even today. As the bell curve controversy shows, race concepts die hard, especially when power and prestige lie behind them.A sweeping portrait of the emerging field of whiteness studies,Critical White Studiespresents, for the first time, the best work from sociology, law, history, cultural studies, and literature. Delgado and Stefancic expressly offer critical white studies as the next step in critical race theory. In focusing on whiteness, not only do they ask nonwhites to investigate more closely for what it means for others to be white, but also they invite whites to examine themselves more searchingly and to "look behind the mirror."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bw1kc5

8 Growing Up White in America? from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) GROVER BONNIE KAE
Abstract: Growing up whitein America. How do you do that? I mean, lots of folks grow up Italian in America, lots more grow up capitalist in America, and legions of us have grown up middle class, working class, poor, or even rich in America. Butwhite?

24 The Invention of Race: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) OAKES JAMES
Abstract: When Winthrop Jordan’s White Over Blackwas published in 1968, big reviews came out right away, followed by big prizes. Everyone noticed; everyone raved. Yet for all its monumental proportions, the book cast a curiously slender historiographical shadow. Jordan’s work did not become the centerpiece of a long and fruitful scholarly debate. It sits on our shelves, the proverbial book we read in graduate school. It was Jordan’s singular misfortune to produce a history of racial attitudes at the same time that Americans were beginning to look beyond racism to the political and economic sources of social inequality. The “real”

32 Social Science and Segregation before Brown from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) HOVENKAMP HERBERT
Abstract: No historical legal policy can be evaluated without an understanding of the framework in which the policymakers viewed the world. If members of a society believe a particular scientific theory—for example, that interracial sex produces degenerate children—then they may be willing to sacrifice a great deal to avoid the consequences of interracial marriages. If they later discover that interracial marriages have no such consequences, then their views will probably change accordingly. In short, people’s scientific view of the world determines in large part the social situation that they regard as optimal. The genetic determinism that dominated social science

47 White Privilege and Male Privilege: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) McINTOSH PEGGY
Abstract: Through work to bring materials and perspectives from Women’s Studies into the rest of the curriculum, I have often noticed men’s unwillingness to grant that they are over-privileged in the curriculum, even though they may grant that women are disadvantaged. Denials which amount to taboos surround the subject of advantages which men gain from women’s disadvantages. These denials protect male privilege from being fully recognized, acknowledged, lessened, or ended.

48 From Practice to Theory, or What Is a White Woman Anyway? from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) MacKINNON CATHARINE A.
Abstract: In recent critiques of feminist work for failing to take account of race or class, race and class are regarded as unproblematically real and not in need of justification or theoretical construction.³ Only gender is not real and needs to be justified.⁴ Although many women have demanded that discussions of race or class take gender into account, typically these demands do not take the form that, outside explicit recognition of gender, race or class do not exist. That there is a diversity to the experience of men and women of color, and of working-class women and men regardless of race,

55 The Social Construction of Whiteness from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) MAHONEY MARTHA R.
Abstract: Race is a phenomenon always in formation. Therefore whiteness, like other racial constructions, is subject to contest and change. Whiteness is historically located, malleable, and contingent. Arguments about the contingency of white privilege, and its dysfunctionality for white working people, may seem counterintuitive. Most writers emphasize what whites gain—the existence and benefits of privilege—or what whites lose—the costs of change for whites—rather than looking at transformative interests for whites. Yet some struggles that brought antiracist consciousness to the defense of shared class interest succeeded, historically, even under the formidable difficulties of formal segregation, and fomentation of

63 Useful Knowledge from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) CAPPELLO MARY
Abstract: In the process of becoming official, of gaining the authority to reproduce knowledges about the history of private and public utterances in the United States, in entering the academy as an assistant professor of English, I have experienced in many ways the not-so-subtle necessity of having to move as far away as possible from who I am. When I think “working class,” pictures come to me more readily than words, thus signaling this aspect as perhaps the most unspeakable feature of my identity in academe. I am, after all, much more aware of how even my lesbianism, an obvious site

65 How Did Jews Become White Folks? from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) SACKS KAREN BRODKIN
Abstract: The late nineteenth and early decades of the twentieth centuries saw a steady stream of warnings by scientists, policymakers, and the popular press that “mongrelization” of the Nordic, or Anglo-Saxon, race—the real Americans—by inferior European races (as well as inferior non-European ones) was destroying the fabric of the nation. I continue to be surprised to read that America did not always regard its immigrant European workers as white, that it thought people from different nations were biologically different. My parents, first-generation U.S.-born eastern European Jews, are not surprised. They expect anti-Semitism to be part of the fabric of

69 Passing for White, Passing for Black from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) PIPER ADRIAN
Abstract: [T]racing the history of my family is detective work as well as historical research. To date, what I thinkI know is that our first European-American ancestor landed in Ipswich, Massachusetts, in 1620 from Sussex; another in Jamestown, Virginia, in 1675 from London; and another in Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, in 1751 from Hamburg. Yet another was the first in our family to graduate from my own graduate institution in 1778. My great-great-grandmother from Madagascar, by way of Louisiana, is the known African ancestor on my father’s side, as my great-great-grandfather from the Ibo of Nigeria is the known African ancestor on

82 Embodiment and Perspective: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) HALEWOOD PETER
Abstract: Where we are positioned in society, and how we think of and live in our bodies, are questions we do not usually connect to the (both everyday and scholarly) claims we make about social and legal problems. “The body” and “knowledge” have traditionally been understood as unrelated categories. However, recent interdisciplinary work in philosophy and law emphasizes “positionality,” and calls into question the abstract, disembodied quality of conventional Western theories of knowledge (epistemologies) which ground the Western conception of law. Western epistemology, its critics say, has artificially bracketed off the material particulars of experience and identity, including the spatial particularity

86 The Sources of The Bell Curve from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) LANE CHARLES
Abstract: By scrutinizing the footnotes and bibliography in The Bell Curve, readers can more easily recognize the project for what it is: a chilly synthesis of the work of disreputable race theorists and eccentric eugenicists. It would be unfair, of course, to ascribe to Murray and Hermstein all the noxious views of their sources. Mere association with dubious thinkers does not discredit the book by itself. But even a superficial examination of the primary sources suggests that some of Murray and Hermstein’s substantive arguments rely on questionable data and hotly contested scholarship, produced by academics whose ideological biases are pronounced. To

89 Dangerous Undertones of the New Nativism from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) KANSTROOM DANIEL
Abstract: In the late summer of 1918, with the final defeat of the German empire only a few months away, the first volume of The Decline of the Westappeared in Germany and Austria. Written by a then unknown German historian named Oswald Spengler, the book soon became a sensation with a profound impact on intellectual debate and German politics for the following two decades. Though originally conceived as a political critique of the folly and criminal and suicidal optimism of pre–First World War German foreign policy, the work grew substantially beyond that modest goal. According to Spengler, the book

101 How to Be a Race Traitor: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) IGNATIEV NOEL
Abstract: Answer an anti-black slur with, “Oh, you probably said that because you think I’m white. That’s a mistake people often make because I look white.” Reply “Me, too” to charges that “people on welfare don’t want to work, they just want to stay home and have babies.”

113 Segregation, Whiteness, and Transformation from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) MAHONEY MARTHA R.
Abstract: Transformative work against segregation and racial oppression must directly confront racism and the social construction of race. Whiteness and blackness are not merely mirror images of each other. “White” does not only mean “opposite of Other” but also stands for the dominant, transparent norm that defines what attributes of race should be counted, how to count them, and who (as in white employers or mortgage bankers) gets to do the counting. Therefore, destabilizing “Other” -ness doesn’t entirely destabilize the dominance of whiteness. Even though race has no natural reality or truth, it has great social force. More work is required,

114 White Out from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) WILKINS ROGER
Abstract: Since the late fifties, when I was a welfare caseworker in poor black precincts in Cleveland, my heart has never

Introduction: from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) VENEMA HENRY ISAAC
Abstract: One of the cruelties of death is to alter profoundly the meaning of a literary work in progress. Not only does the work no longer involve a continuation since it is finished in every sense of the word,

Asserting Personal Capacities and Pleading for Mutual Recognition from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RICOEUR PAUL
Abstract: The prize with which I have been honored by the John W. Kluge Center at the Library of Congress, and for which I extend my sincere thanks, is motivated by the humanism attributed to my life’s work by these generous benefactors. The reflections that follow are devoted to examining some of the bases of this humanism.

Remembering Paul Ricoeur from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) PELLAUER DAVID
Abstract: It is almost eighteen months now since Ricoeur’s death. I believe he would have agreed that as the work of mourning progresses, the balance shifts between what at first is an almost overwhelming sense of grief and an accompanying sense of

Toward Which Recognition? from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) GREISCH JEAN
Abstract: Since the philosopher’s death, this title takes on new connotations that transform the task of reading and appropriating his work into a “course of recognition,” with its own risks and dangers, which each reader will carry

Narrative Matters among the Mlabri: from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) HERDA ELLEN A.
Abstract: The most persuasive moment of Paul Ricoeur’s work for the development anthropologist is his idea of narrative imagination. This concept, applied to the development act of working together with the other who faces marginalization, fear, famine, and isolation, provides a medium for both the anthropologist and the local to emplot history and fiction into a social reality that brings each to a new place. Far from static, this new place is an emerging plot that enables movement from shame and hunger to selfsustainability on the part of the local, and movement from the confinement of Western individualism to an ontological

The Place of Remembrance: from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) BARASH JEFFREY ANDREW
Abstract: The theme of collective memory, conceived as a source of social cohesion, has come to assume a unique importance in the heterogeneous context of our contemporary societies. The public function of collective memory, in the form of commemorations or museums, as in the evocation of traumatic memories shared by entire social groups, has become a topic of lively debate in a large number of theoretical areas, ranging from cognitive science to sociology, political theory, history, and other disciplines of social inquiry. It is the singular achievement of the recent work of Paul Ricoeur, Memory, History, Forgetting,to take a wide

Refiguring Virtue from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) BLUNDELL BOYD
Abstract: By Paul Ricoeur’s own account, the dynamic of detour and return is the central motif of his philosophy. As he said to Charles Reagan: “Detour/return is the rhythm of my philosophical respiration.”¹ The pattern is so pervasive that it shaped the trajectory of his entire career: a philosophy of the will that detoursthrough analyses of sign, symbol, metaphor, and narrative,returningto a richer account of personal identity in his hermeneutics of the self.² But Ricoeur’s endlessly dialogical mode of thinking not only leads him to take many detours; it also makes his work suitable to be used as

Emplotting Virtue: from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur’s work remains lamentably underappreciated a few years after this death. Several factors contribute to the relative neglect of his thought. First, Ricoeur is fastidious to a fault in acknowledging his intellectual debts, which can, deceptively, make his thought appear derivative. Second, the pattern of “detour and return” that characterizes his thinking can make it difficult to keep up with him. Following Ricoeur takes one through the diverse fields of existentialism, structuralism, psychoanalysis, and analytic philosophy, to name only a few of his better-known detours. How many philosophers read both Derrida and Parfit? Heidegger and Searle? Nevertheless, those willing

Preserving the Eidetic Moment: from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RASMUSSEN DAVID
Abstract: My original encounter with the person and the work of Paul Ricoeur began with an attempt to appropriate his thought for the retrieval of the symbolic. This led to a concern with what I called mythic-symboliclanguage correlated with anthropological considerations about the nature of the human, subjectivity, the self—stemming from hisPhilosophy of the Will. At that time I had been meeting once a week with the Romanian phenomenologist of religion Mircea Eliade to discuss his work in general, which I wanted to write about. I had told Eliade that I was not particularly interested in his classes;

Book Title: Religion: Beyond a Concept- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): de VRIES HENT
Abstract: What do we talk about when we talk about religion? Is it an array of empirical facts about historical human civilizations? Or is religion what is in essence unpredictable-perhaps the very emergence of the new? In what ways are the legacies of religion-its powers, words, things, and gestures-reconfiguring themselves as the elementary forms of life in the twenty-first century?Given the Latin roots of the word religion and its historical Christian uses, what sense, if any, does it make to talk about religionin other traditions? Where might we look for common elements that would enable us to do so? Has religion as an overarching concept lost all its currency, or does it ineluctably return-sometimes in unexpected ways-the moment we attempt to do without it? This book explores the difficulties and double binds that arise when we ask What is religion? Offering a marvelously rich and diverse array of perspectives, it begins the task of rethinking religionand religious studiesin a contemporary world. Opening essays on the question What is religion?are followed by clusters exploring the relationships among religion, theology, and philosophy and the links between religion, politics, and law. Pedagogy is the focus of the following section. Religion is then examined in particular contexts, from classical times to the present Pentacostal revival, leading into an especially rich set of essays on religion, materiality, and mediatization. The final section grapples with the ever-changing forms that religionis taking, such as spirituality movements and responses to the ecological crisis.Featuring the work of leading scholars from a wide array of disciplines, traditions, and cultures, Religion: Beyond a Concept will help set the agenda for religious studies for years to come. It is the first of five volumes in a collection entitled The Future of the Religious Past, the fruit of a major international research initiative funded by the Netherlands Organization for Scientific Research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5chhf

Provincializing God? from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Lambek Michael
Abstract: My title exhibits great hubris: in the literal sense, first of all; then toward theologians and members of established religions; then also perhaps toward the many nonanthropologists in this interdisciplinary audience. But more immediately, it exhibits hubris toward Dipesh Chakrabarty, the title of whose magnificent work Provincializing Europe, I have appropriated and transformed.¹ Here are some of the objects intended by the “provincializing” of my title: first, the conceptualization of God as singular, unitary, and supreme, and, even though we can never know His mystery, as someone on the order of a human person, most likely a senior male, a

Inheriting the Wound: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Szafraniec Asja
Abstract: Contemporary philosophy has many times disavowed any relationship with religion, yet it remains strangely committed to a distinctly religious vocabulary. Stanley Cavell’s work bears traces of such problematic engagement with religion, entwined as it is in the vocabulary of faith, sacrifice, redemption, incarnation, conversion, and confession. While Cavell’s engagement with religion is not of a straightforwardly affirmative kind, we can’t call it straightforwardly dismissive, either. Rather, we could perhaps speak about a transformation, a “transfiguration” (to use his own vocabulary) of religion taking place in his work.

Secularization: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Bremmer Jan N.
Abstract: In his fascinating but not always easy to follow study “What Might an Anthropology of Secularism Look Like?” Talal Asad embarks on an important quest, namely, to determine the nature of the secular. He takes it that the secular is “a concept that brings together certain behaviors, knowledges, and sensibilities in modern life.” Moreover, he stresses that “the secular is neither singular in origin nor stable in its historical identity, although it works through a series of particular oppositions.” In fact, Asad takes the view “that ‘the religious’ and the ‘secular’ are not essentially fixed categories.” He also assumes “that

Toward a Politics of Singularity: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Weber Samuel
Abstract: 1651: England is in the midst of civil war. Cromwell has defeated the Royalists and is preparing to assume the title “Great Protector.” Thomas Hobbes begins the concluding paragraph of his treatise Leviathan, of the Matter, Forme, & Power of a Common-Wealth Ecclesiasticall and Civillwith the following resumé of the work:

Death in the Image: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Alexandrova Alena
Abstract: A number of group and solo exhibitions offer evidence that both curators and visual artists are increasingly interested in the controversial issue of religion and its role in the contemporary art scene.¹ Artworks that deal with or refer to religious themes and motifs constitute a very heterogeneous group. They have in common the fact that they do not function in religious contexts and cannot be described as “religious art.” Instead, these artworks are aboutreligion and its practices, concepts, ideas, and images in the sense that they thematize its continued cultural relevance. Curators and artists interested in religious themes are

Horizontal Transcendence: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Halsema Annemie
Abstract: “No tradition can claim to possess the religious truth of humanity,” writes Luce Irigaray in Key Writings.¹ In the Christian tradition, God too often is perceived as a fixed entity that is absolutely transcendent. Instead, we need a God who would be an inspiration to develop ourselves fully and to live fully our relation to the other, to others, and to the world around us. Even though Irigaray is critical of the Western religious tradition,² in her recent work she more and more understands religion as an indispensable and valuable dimension of human life.

Book Title: Carnal Hermeneutics- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: Building on a hermeneutic tradition in which accounts of carnal embodiment are overlooked, misunderstood, or underdeveloped, this work initiates a new field of study and concern. Carnal Hermeneutics provides a philosophical approach to the body as interpretation. Transcending the traditional dualism of rational understanding and embodied sensibility, the volume argues that our most carnal sensations are already interpretations. Because interpretation truly goes "all the way down," carnal hermeneutics rejects the opposition of language to sensibility, word to flesh, text to body. In this volume, an impressive array of today's preeminent philosophers seek to interpret the surplus of meaning that arises from our carnal embodiment, its role in our experience and understanding, and its engagement with the wider world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5cj7s

Introduction: from: Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: The essays collected in this volume all address, in one way or another, the theme of carnal hermeneutics—that is to say, the surplus of meaning arising from our carnal embodiment, its role in our experience and understanding, and its engagement with the wider world. The voices represented here are diverse, each contributing to the view that the work of Hermes goes all the way down, from the event horizon of consciousness to the most sensible embodied experiences of our world.

2 Mind the Gap: from: Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: Why “carnal” hermeneutics? Don’t we already talk enough about the body? After all, the body has, since the dawn of philosophy, been a topic of concern in one form or another. Plato talks about embodiment in the RepublicandPhilebus. Aristotle takes up the subject inDe Anima, theNicomachean Ethics, De Partibus Animalium, and other works. Augustine, Aquinas, Descartes, and others all write about the body; it has hardly been ignored. And don’t we already have enough flavors of hermeneutics? The latter half of the twentieth century was dominated by hermeneutics: Heidegger, Gadamer, and Ricoeur; the radicalization of these

10 Touched by Touching from: Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) WOOD DAVID
Abstract: In this paper I take select concrete “instances” as opportunities for reflection, openings for imagining a broader practice of carnal hermeneutics. These instances include snatches of conversation, experiences, and works of art. The general assumption is that these cases exhibit many “thinks at a time,” that philosophical reflection can bring this out, and that such reflection feeds back into deepening the original experience. After years in the deconstructive trenches, I have been recently influenced by a certain strain of Wittgensteinian practice. I have come to think that the point of philosophy is to encourage and inculcate dispositions that take up

16 Refiguring Wounds in the Afterlife (of Trauma) from: Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) RAMBO SHELLY
Abstract: As trauma theory narrated shattering endings, it turns, in a new century, to imagine impossible beginnings. How do we figure life? The task of carnal hermeneutics, as described by Richard Kearney, is to read between text and body, to think with multiple senses about the meaning of (embodied) life. How might carnal hermeneutics, as it draws on multiple senses, participate in the work of refiguring traumatic wounds? The essays in this volume note the privileging of the visual as the dominant sense in Western philosophy. The study of trauma, largely a Western enterprise, is often referred to through the image

The Immemorial: from: Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) CALABRÒ DANIELA
Abstract: Art never commemorates. It is not made to preserve a memory, and whenever it is set to work in a monument, it does not belong to the memorializing aspect of the work. . . . If art in general has any relation to memory, it is to that strange memory that has never been deposited in a remembrance, which is therefore susceptible neither to forgetting nor to

Incarnation and Infinity from: Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) JAMES IAN
Abstract: To a degree, Christianity can and must be considered a powerful confirmation of metaphysics. Jean-Luc Nancy clearly affirms this inevitable complicity of Christianity with a metaphysics of presence, and therefore with a certain trajectory of metaphysical thinking withinWestern and European philosophy, at the beginning of Dis-enclosure(D6–7/15–17). It recalls the analysis of the Eucharist in his earlier work Corpus, according to which the phraseHoc est enim corpus meumis seen as an assertion, tirelessly repeated, of the immediate presence of God, an affirmation that “God’sbodyisthere” (C3). Such an affirmation of presence, Nancy suggests, reassures

The Dis-enclosure of Contemporary Art: from: Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) Verdicchio Massimo
Abstract: I would like to let his thoughts run freely on the surface, incoercible, selfevident, without delays. I can only work on the margins, on those points that do not appear, that remain hidden in the cellar, where the pillars of the foundations start. There is nothing else to do but leave everything as is, to take up everything, once again and endlessly, but underpinning ( en sous-oeuvre). In these few sentences that I will allow to rise on the surface, on my skin, on the outside and at the edge of my thoughts, there where everything seems clear and complete, the

On Dis-enclosure and Its Gesture, Adoration: from: Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) McKeane John
Abstract: After reading the manuscript of Re-treating Religion, Jean-Luc Nancy proposed responding in the form of a dialogue about the central issues, problems, and perspectives of a deconstruction of Christianity and monotheism more generally. This conversation took place at his house in Strasbourg on June 27, 2009. At that time, Nancy was working onAdoration, the second volume of hisDeconstruction of Christianity, which appeared in spring 2010. As a result, this dialogue not only deals with the general topics of Nancy’s project but also creates a bridge fromDis-enclosureto the new book. On its back cover, Nancy expresses the

Book Title: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: Words of Life is the sequel and companion to Phenomenology and the Theological Turn,edited by Dominique Janicaud, Jean-Francois Courtine, Jean-Louis Chrtien, Michel Henry, Jean-Luc Marion, and Paul Ricoeur. In that volume, Janicaud accuses Levinas, Henry, Marion, and Chrtien of veeringfrom phenomenological neutrality to a theologically inflected phenomenology. By contrast, the contributors to this collection interrogate whether phenomenology's proper starting point is agnostic or atheistic. Many hold the view that phenomenology after the theological turn may very well be true both to itself and to the phenomenological things themselves.In one way or another, all of these essays contend with the limits and expectations of phenomenology. As such, they are all concerned with what counts as properphenomenology and even the very structure of phenomenology. None of them, however, is limited to such questions. Indeed, the rich tapestry that they weave tells us much about human experience. Themes such as faith, hope, love, grace, the gift, the sacraments, the words of Christ, suffering, joy, life, the call, touch, listening, wounding, and humility are woven throughout the various meditations in this volume. The contributors use striking examples to illuminate the structure and limits of phenomenology and, in turn, phenomenology serves to clarify those very examples. Thus practice clarifies theory and theory clarifies practice, resulting in new theological turns and new life for phenomenology. The volume showcases the work of both senior and junior scholars, including Jean-Luc Marion, Jean-Yves Lacoste, Kevin Hart, Anthony J. Steinbock, Jeffrey Bloechl, Jeffrey L. Kosky, Clayton Crockett, Brian Treanor, and Christina Gschwandtner-as well as the editors themselves.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5cjph

Being Without God from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) BLOECHL JEFFREY
Abstract: Whether or not we may now speak globally or even retrospectively about a distinctively “French” phenomenology—and both the meaning and the possibility of such an adjective have never been clear to me—we may nonetheless attend with interest to a few basic theses in the work of some contemporary French thinkers who have conduct their research in the wake of Husserl and, more so, Heidegger. More so, Heidegger: One may rightly wonder, what does it mean to grant Heideggerian thought all rights and privileges when speaking of phenomenology? And second, what does it mean to suppose that phenomenology as

The Human in Question: from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) KOSKY JEFFREY L.
Abstract: Most of the English-speaking audience was introduced to the new French phenomenology, the subject of this volume, through the work of Jean-Luc Marion. In particular, the translation of Marion’s God Without Beingwas the first major work of these authors to achieve widespread attention. Because of this, the new French phenomenology is associated with a “theological turn.” No doubt,God Without Beingjustifies being labeled a theological work. Its project was to give revelation or to think a transcendent God absolutely and unconditionally. The divine transcendence could be given by liberating God from those determinations, which, Marion argued, reduced it

The Poor Phenomenon: from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) STEINBOCK ANTHONY J.
Abstract: According to Marion, there are four main modes of saturated givenness, what he calls the event, the idol, the flesh, the icon, and, encompassing all of them, revelation.¹ The phenomenological status of the saturated phenomena is relatively clear in Marion’s work, and it has been the topic of many investigations. What remains extremely ambiguous, however,

Radical Phenomenology Reveals a Measure of Faith and a Need for a Levinasian Other in Henry’s Life from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) MERCER RONALD L.
Abstract: Jean-Yves Lacoste reminds us in “The Work and Complement of Appearing” that things exist inasmuch as they invite themselves to us. Were we but able to render an account of this invitation, were we only to perceive that it is not in disguise that things appear to us, and were we, finally, to know the conditions under which consciousness is open, all the work of philosophy would be, by right, achievable.¹ “Were we”—a contrary to fact conditional. If we wereto have made these accounts, perceptions, and conditions—but we have not—then all of philosophy’s work would be

The Truth of Life: from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) CROCKETT CLAYTON
Abstract: With the translation of I Am the Truth, Michel Henry has emerged in the English-speaking world as one of the Christian phenomenologists associated with the turn to religion on the part of contemporary continental philosophy. Henry’s previous phenomenological books, such asThe Essence of ManifestationandPhilosophy and Phenomenology of the Body, can be read as significant philosophical works in themselves or alternatively as leading toward his later, more explicitly religious writings.¹ Whether in his dense phenomenological reflections or his intense religious meditations, Henry’s language is provocative, and I would like to second Jean-Luc Marion’s initial negative reaction. Referring to

Between Call and Voice: from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) BALLAN JOSEPH
Abstract: Although the book itself offers no substantial development of its marvelous title, Paul Claudel’s The Eye Listens¹ is often cited by Jean-Louis Chrétien as a pithy formulation of an important phenomenological principle. In addition to the observation of artworks (the topic of Claudel’s book), itself impossible without the silence of listening, the concept of a listening eye applies more generally to the relations of the individual sense faculties to one another in their common, worldly labor. Seeing and hearing, touch and sight, cannot be separated one from the other but, rather, bespeak a “radical unity of sense,”² a oneness constitutive

Embodied Ears: from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: Philosophers thinking in the wake of Emmanuel Levinas—that is to say allof us working at the intersection of continental philosophy and theology—tend to construe the relationship of the self to the other in terms of one of two sensory metaphors: the visual or the oral/aural.

THE THEORY AND PRACTICE OF SEXUAL MAGIC, EXEMPLIFIED BY FOUR MAGICAL GROUPS IN THE EARLY TWENTIETH CENTURY from: Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism
Author(s) Hakl Hans Thomas
Abstract: For obvious reasons, sexual magic is a subject that evokes controversy and curiosity. Surprisingly, however, there exists—with the laudable exception of two works on the Hermetic Brotherhood of Luxor and on Paschal Beverly Randolph¹—practically no critical scholarly literature that studies it as a historical phenomenon and, as a result, the information available to a wider public tends to be sensationalist, secondhand, and mostly unreliable. In this chapter we will present a factual presentation of the theories and practices of four of the most important groups and orders devoted to sexual magic in the twentieth century, based upon direct

Book Title: Dietrich Bonhoeffer and the Ethical Self-Christology, Ethics, and Formation
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress
Author(s): Elliston Clark J.
Abstract: Dietrich Bonhoeffer’s work has persistently challenged Christian consciousness due to both his death at the hands of the Nazis and his provocative prison musings about Christian faithfulness in late modernity. Although understandable given the popularity of both narrative trajectories, such selective focus obscures the depth and fecundity of his overall corpus. Bonhoeffer’s early work, and particularly his Christocentric anthropology, grounds his later expressed commitments to responsibility and faithfulness in a “world come of age." While much debate accompanies claims regarding the continuity of Bonhoeffer’s thought, there are central motifs which pervade his work from his doctoral dissertation to the prison writings. This book suggests that a concern for otherness permeates all of Bonhoeffer’s work. Furthermore, Clark Elliston articulates, drawing on Bonhoeffer, a Christian self-defined by its orientation towards otherness. Taking Bonhoeffer as both the origin and point of return, the text engages Emmanuel Levinas and Simone Weil as dialogue partners who likewise stress the role of the other for self-understanding, albeit in diverse ways. By reading Bonhoeffer “through" their voices, one enhances Bonhoeffer’s already fertile understanding of responsibility.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c84fqp

2 Bonhoeffer and the Responsibly Oriented Self from: Dietrich Bonhoeffer and the Ethical Self
Abstract: Although Bonhoeffer only implicitly frames his ethical insights in terms of orientation, his work exhibits an abiding concern for the self–other relation, particularly through his account of human “being for others.” Moreover, this concern for a responsible relation to the other constitutes a theme within most of his main writings. Focusing on and parsing this understanding of human being as structured toward others will guide staged conversations with Emmanuel Levinas and Simone Weil. The first section of the chapter explores Bonhoeffer’s concept of the “self” as the person who exists in the world. This section begins with the human person

2 What Is Biblical Performance Criticism? from: Insights from Performance Criticism
Abstract: To describe biblical performance criticism, I start by explaining how human beings communicate. Performance criticism analyzes and practices certain kinds of communication, specifically repeated behaviors for an audience. Inquiry, imagination, and intervention are three aspects of a performance and its analysis. Biblical performance criticism is the analysis and practice of performances of biblical traditions. The basic method of biblical performance criticism is to prepare, internalize, and perform a biblical text. Although it may make it sound like a step-by-step process, performance criticism is really more circular and interrelated, like nodes on a network that influence each other rather than a

Book Title: Ascent into Heaven in Luke-Acts-New Explorations of Luke's Narrative Hinge
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress
Author(s): Pao David W.
Abstract: In comparison with other aspects of Jesus’ life and ministry, his ascent into heaven has often been overlooked within the history of the church. However, considering its placement at the end of the Gospel and the beginning of Acts—the only narrative depictions of the event in the New Testament—the importance of Jesus’ ascent into heaven is undeniable for Luke’s two-volume work. While select studies have focused on particular aspects of these accounts for Luke’s story, the importance of the ascension calls for renewed attention to the narratological and theological significance of these accounts within their historical and literary contexts. In this volume, leading scholars discuss the ascension narratives within the ancient contexts of biblical, Second Temple Jewish, and Greco-Roman literature; the literary contours of Luke-Acts; and questions of historical and theological significance in the wider milieu of New Testament theology and early Christian historiography. The volume sets out new positions and directions for the next generations of interpreters regarding one of the most important and unique elements of the Lukan writings.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c84g9z

Introduction from: Ascent into Heaven in Luke-Acts
Author(s) Pao David W.
Abstract: Despite the voluminous amount of scholarship devoted to Luke-Acts in general, and Lukan Christology and theology in particular, one of the few areas that has received far less attention in the last fifty years is Luke’s dual narration of Jesus’s ascent into heaven in Luke 24 and Acts 1. Prior to the 1980s, ascension scholarship was heavily indebted to two key works. Victoriano Larrañaga, L’ascension de Notre-Seigneur dans le Nouveau Testament(1938, original thesis written in Spanish in 1934 and published in Spanish in 1943), focused heavily on the text of the ascension narratives in the Lukan accounts. Gerhard Lohfink’s

1 Ascension Scholarship from: Ascent into Heaven in Luke-Acts
Author(s) Zwiep Arie W.
Abstract: In this contribution, I will review recent biblical scholarship on the Lukan ascension narratives, outline points of agreement and areas of ongoing debate, and briefly outline a possible agenda for future research.¹ I roughly take the work of Mikeal Parsons² and myself³ as termini a quo. First, I will map some recent developments in textual criticism and their potential repercussions on the reconstruction of the initial text (Ausgangstext) of the ascension narratives. Second, since the study of Parsons, narrative criticism and literary approaches have become increasingly popular in Lukan studies, including the study of the ascension narratives. What are the

Book Title: On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy-A Guide for the Unruly
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): BRUNS GERALD L.
Abstract: Marcel Duchamp once asked whether it is possible to make something that is not a work of art. This question returns over and over in modernist culture, where there are no longer any authoritative criteria for what can be identified (or excluded) as a work of art. As William Carlos Williams says, A poem can be made of anything,even newspaper clippings.At this point, art turns into philosophy, all art is now conceptual art, and the manifesto becomes the distinctive genre of modernism. This book takes seriously this transformation of art into philosophy, focusing upon the systematic interest that so many European philosophers take in modernism. Among the philosophers Gerald Bruns discusses are Theodor W. Adorno, Maurice Blanchot, Arthur Danto, Stanley Cavell, Hans-Georg Gadamer, Michel Foucault, Gilles Deleuze and Felix Guattari, Jacques Derrida, Jean-Franois Lyotard, Jean-Luc Nancy, Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe, and Emmanuel Levinas.As Bruns demonstrates, the difficulty of much modern and contemporary poetry can be summarized in the idea that a poem is made of words, not of any of the things that we use words to produce: meanings, concepts, propositions, narratives, or expressions of feeling. Many modernist poets have argued that in poetry language is no longer a form of mediation but a reality to be explored and experienced in its own right. But what sort of experience, philosophically, might this be? The problem of the materiality or hermetic character of poetic language inevitably leads to questions of how philosophy itself is to be written and what sort of communitydefines the work of art-or, for that matter, the work of philosophy.In this provocative study, Bruns answers that the culture of modernism is a kind of anarchist community, where the work of art is apt to be as much an event or experience-or, indeed, an alternative form of life-as a formal object. In modern writing, philosophy and poetry fold into one another. In this book, Bruns helps us to see how.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c84gmm

2 Ancients and Moderns: from: On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy
Abstract: The Play of the Artwork. Possibly there is a no more unlikely, or maybe even unwanted, commentator on modernism than Hans-Georg Gadamer, a classical philologist, distinguished Plato scholar, and author ofWahrheit und Methode(Truth and Method) (1960), the monumental articulation of philosophical hermeneutics, one of whose central chapters concerns the normative character of the “classical” or “eminent” text. (WM. 269–75/TM. 285–90). Nevertheless, it happens that Gadamer is also an accomplished art historian who thinks that the claim of the modernist work (one of Duchamp’s Readymades, for example) is every bit as compelling as that of the classical

3 Foucault’s Modernism: from: On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy
Abstract: Modernism Once More. Fredric Jameson has usefully proposed that we think of modernism not as a period concept but, more loosely, as a “narrative category” in which topics like nineteenth-century realism, self-reflexive language, and the impersonality of the artist get articulated and rearticulated in multifarious ways.¹ It is certainly the case that modernism is often defined more clearly by examples than by theories—serial music, cubism, nonlinear or fragmentary texts like Stein’sTender Buttons(or Wittgenstein’sTractatus), as well as avant-garde groups like the Surrealists whose aim was often less to produce works of art than to develop new forms

5 Francis Ponge on the Rue de la Chaussée d’Antin from: On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy
Abstract: Artspace. What becomes of things in art? This is still the question of questions in aesthetic theory, which has understood from the beginning of modernism that the terms “nonrepresentational,” “nonmimetic,” or “abstract,” however much they may capture something of what the experience of nontraditional works of art is like, have little application to twentieth-century art and literature. Modern art is filled with things. A cubist collage is made of real newspaper clippings, and so is a poem by William Carlos Williams. The method of modern poetry is, manifestly, “quotation, commentary, pastische,” as if the poem had become a space for

6 The Senses of Augustine: from: On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy
Abstract: The Pagan. At the time of his death in 1998 the French philosopher Jean-François Lyotard had begun writing what was to have been a substantial work on Augustine’sConfessions. In the event he has left us only fragments—notes, paragraphs,envois, sketches, and two lectures stitched together to form a kind of monograph called “La Confession d’Augustin”:theconfession, referring, as we shall see, to Augustine’s confession of his love for God. Like all of Lyotard’s productions, this posthumous assembly leaves us guessing as to what kind of writing it is supposed to be. In fact Lyotard was never much

Book Title: Writings on Medicine- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Meyers Todd
Abstract: At the time of his death in 1995, Georges Canguilhem was a highly respected historian of science and medicine, whose engagement with questions of normality, the ideologization of scientific thought, and the conceptual history of biology had marked the thought of philosophers such as Michel Foucault, Louis Althusser, Pierre Bourdieu, and Gilles Deleuze. This collection of short, incisive, and highly accessible essays on the major concepts of modern medicine shows Canguilhem at the peak of his use of historical practice for philosophical engagement. In order to elaborate a philosophy of medicine, Canguilhem examines paramount problems such as the definition and uses of health, the decline of the Hippocratic understanding of nature, the experience of disease, the limits of psychology in medicine, myths and realities of therapeutic practices, the difference between cure and healing, the organism's self-regulation, and medical metaphors linking the organism to society. Writings on Medicine is at once an excellent introduction to Canguilhem's work and a forceful, insightful, and accessible engagement with elemental concepts in medicine. The book is certain to leave its imprint on anthropology, history, philosophy, bioethics, and the social studies of medicine.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c84gs6

Book Title: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): McGrath Brian
Abstract: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism takes its title and point of departure from Walter Benjamin's concept of the historical constellation, which puts both "contemporary" and "romanticism" in play as period designations and critical paradigms. Featuring fascinating and diverse contributions by an international roster of distinguished scholars working in and out of romanticism--from deconstruction to new historicism, from queer theory to postcolonial studies, from visual culture to biopolitics--this volume makes good on a central tenet of Benjamin's conception of history: These critics "grasp the constellation" into which our "own era has formed with a definite earlier one." Each of these essays approaches romanticism as a decisive and unexpired thought experiment that makes demands on and poses questions for our own time: What is the unlived of a contemporary romanticism? What has romanticism's singular untimeliness bequeathed to futurity? What is romanticism's contemporary "redemption value" for painting and politics, philosophy and film?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c99996

The Pastoral Stain: from: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Jacobus Mary
Abstract: Adorno—whose account of the lyric owes much to its German Romantic origins—offers a point of entry into the convergence of past and present in a series of pastoral works by the twentieth-century American artist Cy Twombly.² A resident in Rome since the late 1950s, Twombly is best known for his scribbled, written-on canvases and a poetic lexicon that includes Greek bucolic poetry, English Romanticism, and the modernist European lyric. In 1976, he painted and drew a series of pastoral works on paper: Untitled (Thyrsis’ Lament for Daphnis)(1976),Idilli(inscribed with the words, “I am Thyrsis of Aetna

Free Indirect Filmmaking: from: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Balfour Ian
Abstract: Jane Austen was and is a phenom. One might like to have said Jane Austen’s writingwas and is that phenom, but in some respects her writing—so brilliant, so exacting—has been displaced in the popular cultural imagination by the proper name that stands in for or is associated with all the writing, the films, the made-for-TV renditions of her novels, spinoffs of many sorts, all of which are caught up in the huge network of more or less institutionalized devotion to her, from “societies” to websites to blogs to conferences where amateurs (in the original and latter-day senses)

Book Title: Memory-Histories, Theories, Debates
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): SCHWARZ BILL
Abstract: Memory has never been closer to us, yet never more difficult to understand. In the more than thirty specially commissioned essays that make up this book, leading scholars survey the histories, the theories, and the faultlines that compose the field of memory research.The volume reconstructs the work of the great philosophical and literary figures of the last two centuries who recast the concept of memory and brought it into the forefront of the modernist and postmodernist imagination-among them, Bergson, Halbwachs, Freud, Proust, Benjamin, Adorno, Derrida, and Deleuze. Drawing on recent advances in the sciences and in the humanities, the contributors address thequestion of how memory works, highlighting transactions between the interiority of subjective memory and the larger fields of public or collective memory.The public, political life of memory is an increasingly urgent issue in the societies we now inhabit, while the category of memory itself seems to become ever more capacious.Asking how we might think about the politics of memory, the closing chapters explore anumber of defining instances in which the troubled phenomenon of memory has entered and reshaped our very conception of what makes and drives the domain of politics. These include issues of slavery, the Soviet experience, the Holocaust, feminism and recovered memory, and memory in post-apartheid South Africa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c999bq

6. Memory in Freud from: Memory
Author(s) Terdiman Richard
Abstract: When Freud set out to understand how memory worked in the psyche, he wasn’t thinking about whether his ideas harmonized with the historical and cultural complex we know as “modernity.” But the theory of memory that Freud developed puts his conception of memory at modernity’s heart.

12. Memory and the Unconscious from: Memory
Author(s) Kennedy Roger
Abstract: From its early days the place and function of memory has been central to the theory and technique of psychoanalysis, though the picture of how memory functions from a psychoanalytic point of view has undergone many transformations. From memories that arose from the hypnotic treatment of adults, Freud began with the notion that hysteria was caused by the sexual molestation of children. As is well known, Freud later felt that in this early work on hysteria, he had overvalued reality and undervalued fantasy.¹ In his later work, the main emphasis passed away from actual sexual abuse as a cause of

15. Physiological Memory Systems from: Memory
Author(s) Caygill Howard
Abstract: The study of cultural memory depends almost without exception upon a prior physiological or psychological account of individual memory. Aby Warburg’s influential studies of cultural memory, including his innovative Mnemosyneproject of the mid-to late 1920s are rooted in his early work on energetic models of the physiology of memory, 1 contemporary with those that provided the point of departure for Freud’s analyses of the pathologies of memory in the 1895Project for a Scientific Psychologyand for Bergson’s 1896Matter and Memory. Charting the relationship between cultural processes of memory and the formation of individual memory remains a challenge

18. Telling Stories: from: Memory
Author(s) Freeman Mark
Abstract: Ever since the pioneering work of Sir Frederic Bartlett, it has become commonplace to assume that the process of remembering the personal past is a reconstructive one mediated by a host of significant factors, ranging from prevailing conventions of remembering all the way to the inevitable impact of present experience on the rendering of the past.¹ The recognition of this simple and seemingly indisputable fact has become something of a double-edged sword in the conceptualization of memory. On the one hand, it has vastly expanded the field of memory studies: memory, far from being the mere videotape-like replica of the

19. Ritual and Memory from: Memory
Author(s) Feuchtwang Stephan
Abstract: The study of ritual has received its greatest elaboration in the work of anthropologists. This chapter, then, will be a discussion of how anthropologists, including psychological anthropologists, say ritual is related to human memory. Let me begin the discussion with the first question a reader may ask: What is ritual?

23. Machines of Memory from: Memory
Author(s) Parisi Luciana
Abstract: In the age of sampling, chronology is twisted from a straight line into a loop. Cybernetic memories are plucked out of history, stored in machine banks, to be potentially mutated, then reassembled in any combination rhythmically. Digitally coded events leave sensory residue across distributed networks of body-machines. Memories are transgenetically transported across species and scales; biological programming becomes folded into unintended host bodies in a mnemonic symbiosis: layers of memory stratified into a machinery of achronological time.

25. Soviet Memories: from: Memory
Author(s) Merridale Catherine
Abstract: Citizens of the former Soviet Union, the men and women who grew up under Communism, share many extraordinary experiences of hardship, violence, and trauma. They have also spent the greater part of their lives interpreting and discussing their experience in a language almost entirely shaped by ideology. These aspects of their mental world lend special resonance to the work of collecting and analyzing their memories. In their case, too, the controversial term “collective memory” has real meaning. The Soviet state was very largely sealed from outside influences for several decades beginning in the 1930s. Official discourse was carefully shaped and

26. The Witness in the Archive: from: Memory
Author(s) Spitzer Leo
Abstract: “In the past half-century, two works have marked what can be called conceptual breakthroughs in our apprehension of the Holocaust,” writes Shoshana Felman in her 2002 book The Juridical Unconscious.¹ “The first was Hannah Arendt’sEichmann in Jerusalem, which appeared in the United States in 1963 as a report on the Eichmann trial held in Israel in 1961. The second was the filmShoahby Claude Lanzmann, which first appeared in France in 1985.” These two works, Felman elaborates, changed “the vocabulary of collective memory”—they added a “new idiomto the discourse on the Holocaust.” A new idiom, Felman

29. The Seventh Veil: from: Memory
Author(s) Haaken Janice
Abstract: The Seventh Veil, released in 1945, represents one of the earliest cinematic portrayals of gothic psychiatric narratives— stories that position the female psyche as a darkly shrouded mystery, revealed through the investigations of a pioneering psychiatrist.¹ As a prototype of this genre,The Seventh Veilregisters the emerging position of the psychiatrist in facilitating modern forms of female subjectivity—forms that require a reworking of memory and a therapeutic encounter with a debilitating past.

30. The Gender of Memory in Post-Apartheid South Africa from: Memory
Author(s) Coombes Annie E.
Abstract: Established in 1996 as an essential component of nation-building and the peace process, the Truth and Reconciliation Commission (TRC) was born out of the historic compromise brokered in 1993– 94 between black and white nationalism in South Africa, a compromise that many have insisted inevitably circumscribed the commission’s work, thwarting its attempts to “heal the nation.”² The commission’s brief, in the words of its chair, Archbishop Desmond Tutu, was to

Book Title: Provocations to Reading: J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come-J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Kujundžić Dragan
Abstract: This book is a marker of the state of theorytoday. Its rich array of wideranging essays explores the dimensions and implications of the work of J. Hillis Miller, one of the most eminent literary scholars in America. For nearly half a century, Miller has been known for his close and imaginative engagement with the implications of European philosophical thought and for his passionate advocacy of close reading.Building on this intellectual legacy, the contributors instantiate and extend the practice and ethics of sustained close reading that is Miller's hallmark. The book culminates in a moving piece by Jacques Derrida, Miller's close friend of forty years, who engages Miller's readings of Gerard Manley Hopkins in a historic encounter between French philosophy and American reading practices.A provocation to reading for new generations of students and teachers, these essays offer important resources for grasping the question of language in historical perspective and in contemporary life-a task essential for any democratic future. Barbara Cohen is Director of HumaniTech at the University of California, Irvine. She is co-editor of Material Events: Paul de Man and the Afterlife of Theory. Dragan Kujunzic is Professor of Russian and Comparative Literature and Director of Russian Studies at the University of California, Irvine. Among his publications is The Returns of History: Russian Nietzscheans after Modernity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c999h9

INTRODUCTION from: Provocations to Reading: J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come
Author(s) Kujundžić Dragan
Abstract: This volume is inspired by the work of J. Hillis Miller (b. 1928). Miller’s career and work span more than five decades, some fifty edited volumes and monographs (not counting translations and frequent reprints and editions of his works), and honorary doctorates and teaching positions in dozens of universities in the United States and abroad. Miller’s students and colleagues are numerous and form an ever-growing group of outstanding scholars of every generation, as this volume and several others currently in progress amply testify.¹

CHAPTER 1 “J” Is for Jouissance from: Provocations to Reading: J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come
Author(s) MacCannell Juliet Flower
Abstract: For me, the most valuable aspect of J. Hillis Miller’s work is his persistent questioning of literary language in the context of a widely ranging philosophical inquiry into the human (and lately the inhuman) conditions in which literature emerges. From his first to his most recent books, we find Miller courageously confronting whatever the mind has thought unfathomable. Indeed, Hillis Miller is one of the few great critics of our time to underscore precisely the provocativeelement in literature as he unfailingly highlights how literature stirs the mental labor necessary to face whatever threatens to flood the mind and ruin

CHAPTER 2 Broadening the Horizon: from: Provocations to Reading: J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come
Author(s) Shen Dan
Abstract: Of the influential deconstructive theorists and critics, J. Hillis Miller distinguishes himself by his serious engagement with structuralist narratology. About two decades ago, Miller carried out an influential dialogue with the narratologist Shlomith Rimmon-Kenan in Poetics Today,¹ and quite recently, in hisReading Narrative, which he calls “a work of ananarratology,”² Miller gives a forceful challenge to structuralist narratology in terms of both plot structure and discourse presentation. The present essay argues that ananarratology and narratology, although holding opposite and irreconcilable views on narrative, are to a certain extent complementary to each other. Miller’s ananarratology functions to broaden the horizon

CHAPTER 3 Finding the Zumbah: from: Provocations to Reading: J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come
Author(s) Odom Glenn
Abstract: J. Hillis Miller begins Speech Acts in Literaturewith a promise to show the problematic nature of speech acts in and as literature.¹ Miller’s promise has the authorization that comes, as he says “by being ‘appointed,’ by being given ‘tenure,’ by having [his] seminar description approved beforehand” (4). My critique of his work carries with it none of Miller’s authority. I am perhaps, to cite Miller’s citation of J. L. Austin, “Some Low Type” (or perhaps I should say “‘some low type,’” since this is my citation of Miller’s citation of Austin, a graduate student attempting to claim authority (ibid.).

CHAPTER 4 Between “the Cup and the Lip”: from: Provocations to Reading: J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come
Author(s) Castillo Larisa Tokmakoff
Abstract: Charles Dickens’s Our Mutual Friendis a retroactively oriented text, a text that works to undo the events that actuate it. The text begins with an ending, a corpse being drawn from the Thames, and withholds the circumstances surrounding this central event until half of the plot has transpired. While we learn the victim’s history much sooner than we do the events leading to his death, his history, nonetheless, is represented inconsecutively—after his demise. We are never to meet the victim himself; we are never to hear his story from his lips; we are never to receive a linear

CHAPTER 5 Hillis’s Charity from: Provocations to Reading: J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come
Author(s) Williams Jennifer H.
Abstract: J. Hillis Miller has loved well as a writer, critic, and theorist. For Hillis, one cannot read well without love—reading is a matter of love because one must submit oneself to an uncontrollable performative force that arises when one attends to a radical recognition of difference in the text. Miller’s long career teaches us that love is the primary obligation that binds the critic to his or her work because instead of covering over a multitude of sins and acting as a blinding or obfuscating force, love requires the critic to respond to the absolute differences and particularities of

Book Title: The Heart Has Its Reasons-Towards a Theological Anthropology of the Heart
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Tóth Beáta
Abstract: This book explores a hitherto neglected area of theological anthropology: the unity of human emotionality and rationality embodied in the biblical concept of the heart. While the theological contours of human reason have for long been clearly drawn and presented as the exclusive seat of the image of God, affectivity has been relegated to a secondary position. With the reintegration of the body into recent philosophical and theological discourses, a number of questions have arisen: if the image (also) resides in the body, how does this change one’s view of the theological significance of human affectivity? In what way is our likeness to God realized in the whole of what we are? Can one overcome the traditional dissociation between intellect and affectivity by a renewed theory of love? In conversation with patristic and medieval authors (e.g., Irenaeus, Tertullian, Gregory of Nyssa, Maximus, Aquinas) and in dialogue with more recent interlocutors (Pascal, Ricoeur, Marion, Milbank, John Paul II), this work pursues a novel theological vision of the essential unity of our humanity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c999mv

Book Title: Machiavellian Rhetoric-From the Counter-Reformation to Milton
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Kahn Victoria
Abstract: Historians of political thought have argued that the real Machiavelli is the republican thinker and theorist of civic virtù. Machiavellian Rhetoricargues in contrast that Renaissance readers were right to see Machiavelli as a Machiavel, a figure of force and fraud, rhetorical cunning and deception. Taking the rhetorical Machiavel as a point of departure, Victoria Kahn argues that this figure is not simply the result of a naïve misreading of Machiavelli but is attuned to the rhetorical dimension of his political theory in a way that later thematic readings of Machiavelli are not. Her aim is to provide a revised history of Renaissance Machiavellism, particularly in England: one that sees the Machiavel and the republican as equally valid--and related--readings of Machiavelli's work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c99bcq

[PART ONE: Introduction] from: Machiavellian Rhetoric
Abstract: THE EARLY Italian reception of The Princeand theDiscoursesshows that, from the outset, Machiavelli’s readers recognized and responded to his distinctive rhetorical flair. They were shocked (or pretended to be) by his brutal examples of practical politics; they resented his exposure of the inefficacy of the traditional virtues. They saw that the dramatic effect of Machiavelli’s work depended on his subversion of the conventions of humanist treatises on politics.¹ And some, like Guicciardini, recognized that, precisely because of this, Machiavelli was more of a humanist than he would have his reader believe.

THREE RHETORIC AND REASON OF STATE: from: Machiavellian Rhetoric
Abstract: IN 1531 and 1532 the DiscoursesandThe Princewere published by Blado in Rome with the papal imprimatur. By 1559 Machiavelli’s works appeared—along with those of Erasmus, Boccaccio, and Savonarola—on the papal index of prohibited books.¹ The Counter-Reformation was in full force and Machiavelli was censured as an enemy to religion in treatise after treatise in Spain and Italy. In particular, Machiavelli was condemned as the proponent of reason of state—the use of any and all available means, however immoral, to preserve the state and to increase the power of its ruler. For many Counter-Reformation theorists,

[PART TWO: Introduction] from: Machiavellian Rhetoric
Abstract: DECADES before the condemnation of Machiavellian reason of state in Counter-Reformation treatises of the 1590s and early 1600s, Cardinal Pole provided a quick sketch of the Machiavel in his Apologia ad Carolum Quintum(1539). He tells us that Machiavelli’s works “stink of the malice of Satan” (malitiam Satanae redolent) and thatThe Princewas written “by Satan’s hand” (Satanae digito). He also offers a synopsis of Machiavelli’s rhetorical politics, noting that the prince must learn to simulate and dissimulate according to the age-old rhetorical criteria of time, place, and audience. And he condemns Machiavelli’s divorce of ethics from politics and

SIX A RHETORIC OF INDIFFERENCE from: Machiavellian Rhetoric
Abstract: IN THIS chapter, I consider Milton’s intervention in the debate concerning things indifferent in his prose works. As we will see, in enlarging the sphere of things indifferent and giving the individual conscience discretion in such matters, Milton departs from the usual puritan position, according to which “nothing is indifferent.” At the same time, he develops the principle of indifference into a rhetoric, thereby dramatizing his awareness that the sphere of indifference is the sphere of rhetoric, in which persuasion and action may take place. Milton’s Machiavellism in his prose works is both general and specific. In reflecting on the

1 The Geometry of War: from: Empire of Chance
Abstract: It begins with an accident in the archive. On a small table piled with heaps of papers and stacks of books is a comprehensive library of war: treatises on fortification by Cataneo and Ramelli are crowded by the works of Stevin and Coehoorn, Sheeter and Pagan, Blondel and Vauban. Additional volumes on the theory of ballistics by Tartaglia, Torricelli, and Galileo are scattered among them. Together they form a small but comprehensive library of military thought from its early Italian origins in the fifteenth century through its Dutch and French developments in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries—an archive of

Introduction: from: A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) KELLY JOHN D.
Abstract: It is time to add Marshall Sahlins to the short list of great anthropologists, time to celebrate his contributions to the discipline, and time to discuss the far–reaching impact of his works. Sahlins has proved a more difficult (and diffdent) subject for celebratory synthesis than many of his peers. The works of Eric Wolf (Abbink and Vermeulen 1992), Louis Dumont (Heesterman 1985), and others have received the attention they deserve, and the paeans for Clifford Geertz began even before his unfortunate passing in 2006 (Ortner 1999, Shweder and Good 2005). The most important anthropologist of the period afted the

4 From Jew to Roman: from: A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) KAPLAN MARTHA
Abstract: Most scholars of Fiji are familiar with Adolph Brewster Joske, British colonial official, amateur anthropologist, and memoirist, through his books The Hill Tribes of FijiandThe King of the Cannibal Isles, books published in 1922 and 1937, respectively. By the time he published these works, he had retired to England (in 1910) and changed his name to A.B. Brewster. Some Fiji scholars have also read his copious administrative correspondence and reports, held at the Fiji National Archives and the Fiji Museum. For information on the cultural lives and political fortunes of the people of the highlands of Viti Levu,

8 The Kafka Connection: from: A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) FRIEDMAN JONATHAN
Abstract: Marshall Sahlins has been one of the few anthropologists and certainly the most celebrated to have continued the tradition of argument and scientific reason that has been in large part abandoned in recent years by so many intellectuals. The tradition, if I may use such a dangerous term, consists in finding structure in reality. All structure is underlying insofar as it is not obvious “to the most casual observer.” It takes a great deal of work to arrive at structural understanding, and even then it is always in the form of hypothesis that is contestable. This is the burden of

Book Title: Freud's Moses- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Yerushalmi Yosef Hayim
Abstract: In Freud's Mosesa distinguished historian of the Jews brings a new perspective to this puzzling work. Yosef Hayim Yerushalmi argues that while attempts to psychoanalyze Freud's text may be potentially fruitful, they must be preceded by a genuine effort to understand what Freud consciously wanted to convey to his readers. Using both historical and philological analysis, Yerushalmi offers new insights into Freud's intentions in writingMoses and Monotheism.He presents the work as Freud's psychoanalytic history of the Jews, Judaism, and the Jewish psyche-his attempt, under the shadow of Nazism, to discover what has made the Jews what they are. In the process Yerushalmi's eloquent and sensitive exploration of Freud's last work provides a reappraisal of Freud's feelings toward anti-Semitism and the gentile world, his ambivalence about psychoanalysis as a "Jewish" science, his relationship to his father, and above all a new appreciation of the depth and intensity of Freud's identity as a "godless Jew."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cc2kmd

Prelude for the Listener from: Freud's Moses
Author(s) Yerushalmi Yosef Hayim
Abstract: “Prelude” rather than “introduction,” for in all essential respects the work must introduce itself along the way; “listener” rather than “reader,” for the text that follows remains exactly as it was delivered orally. Except that my lectures have become chapters I have altered nothing, in the hope that some echo of the spoken word will somehow survive the transition onto the printed page. Tempted though I was to dispense with any further apparatus, my scholarly superego (as well as my own frequent frustration in trying to trace the sources of others) has induced me to add

CHAPTER TWO Ancient Mediterranean Ideas of Humankind and Nature: from: The Idea of Wilderness
Abstract: The prehistoric mediterranean world is sometimes characterized as “the first Eden” or “garden of God.”¹ The roots of the word Edeninclude the Babylonianeinduand the HebrewÉdhen, translated variously as paradise, plain, and hunting ground. The transition from a hunting-foraging way of life toagri-culture has often been associated with or identified as the so-called Fall.² In leaving the Paleolithic world for the Neolithic, humankind likely encountered a host of woes and travails unknown in its collective experience, not the least of which was work itself. Paleolithic peoples, existing in traditional ways established over untold millennia, lived in

CHAPTER SIX John Muir: from: The Idea of Wilderness
Abstract: Posterity has treated John Muir well, for the richness of his intellectual and institutional legacy continues to grow. In two decades, and especially in the ten years since the Muir archives were opened, the traditional view that he merely reiterated the tired truths of transcendentalism has been abandoned. A case can be made that he stands intellectually with Henry David Thoreau and Aldo Leopold as a thinker whose work yet exerts major influence on contemporary American ideas of wilderness. In instrumental terms, Muir is the father of the American conservation (now preservation) movement; his influence is most visibly manifest in

CHAPTER SEVEN Aldo Leopold and the Age of Ecology from: The Idea of Wilderness
Abstract: Aldo leopold, the third giant of wilderness philosophy, is, a thinker whose ideas outline the living context of the idea of wilderness. Like Thoreau, he helped to define an intellectual framework within which to formulate questions involving the concept of wild nature. And like Muir, he was instrumental in founding an organization dedicated to wilderness preservation; the Wilderness Society remains a potent legacy, forming with Muir’s Sierra Club an effective advocacy for wildlife protection. But unlike Thoreau or Muir, Leopold could find a “path with a heart” that legitimated his life’s work. He became what is today termed a wilderness

CHAPTER EIGHT The Idea of Wilderness in the Poetry of Robinson Jeffers and Gary Snyder from: The Idea of Wilderness
Abstract: This chapter focuses on the idea of wilderness in the poetry of Robinson Jeffers and Gary Snyder, consequently ignoring other writers and poets whose work also reflects that concept. The selection of Jeffers and Snyder delimits an otherwise impossibly large field, and there is some reason to think that the choice is sound since “ecological consciousness seems most vibrant in the poetic mode. The poetic voices of Jeffers and Snyder, so rare in modern poetry but frequently found in primal people’s oral tradition, are a virtual cascade of celebration of Nature/God and being.”¹ We have already argued that Modernism—or,

Book Title: Criticism in the Wilderness-The Study of Literature Today
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): HARTMAN GEOFFREY H.
Abstract: Originally published in 1980, this now classic work of literary theory explores the wilderness of positions that grew out of the collision between Anglo-American practical criticism and Continental philosophic criticism. This second edition includes a new preface by the author as well as a foreword by Hayden White."A key text for understanding 'the fate of reading' in the Anglophone world over the last fifty years."-Hayden White, from the Foreword" Criticism in the Wildernessmay be the best, most brilliant, most broadly useful book yet written by an American about the sudden swerve from the safety of established decorum toward bravely theoretical, mainly European forms of literary criticism."-Terrence Des Pres,Nation"A polemical survey that reaffirms the value of the Continental tradition of philosophical literary criticism."-Notable Books of the Year,New York Times Book Review
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cc2mjv

CHAPTER TWO The Sacred Jungle 1: from: Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: In the conclusion to his comprehensive work The Symbolism of Evil, Paul Ricoeur calls us “the children of criticism,” who “seek to go beyond criticism by means of a criticism that is no longer reductive but restorative.” The intellectual scheme revealed by those words goes back to the German Romantics. It presupposes that as moderns we aim at a second naiveté in and through critical reflection. It also presupposes that the concepts of immediacy and of the sacred (“the immediacy of the symbol”) are identical and that it is the aim of restorative criticism to disclose that identity. Criticism, as

CHAPTER SIX Purification and Danger 2: from: Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: A strange thought comes to Errlerson on reading Carlyle’s Sartor Resartus. It is an uncleanly book, a rag-bag philosophy, conceived (Carlyle jokes) among the Old Clothes shops of London, though rising to transcendental flights of fancy. “There is a part of ethics,” writes Emerson, “... which possesses all attraction to me; to wit, the compensations of the Universe, the equality and the coexistence of action and reaction, that all prayers are granted, that every debt is paid. And the skill witll which the great All maketh clean work as it goes along, leaves no rag, consumes its smoke.”¹

CHAPTER EIGHT Literary Commentary as Literature from: Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: The school of Derrida confronts us with a substantial problem. What are the proper relations between the “critical” and “creative” activities, or between “primary” and “secondary” texts? In 1923, writing his own essay on “The Function of Criticism,” T. S. Eliot accused Matthew Arnold of distinguishing too bluntly between critical and creative. “He overlooks the capital importance of criticism in the work of creation itself.” Eliot’s perception was, of course, partially based on the literary work of French writers since Flaubert and Baudelaire, including Mallarmé, Laforgue, and Valéry. But Eliot is wary lest his charge against Arnold, and in favor

A Short History of Practical Criticism from: Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: What at present preoccupies scholars and students in the literary humanities is clear: the lack of interaction between their profession and the mainstream of society. Though this is a recurrent problem, I. A. Richards had thought to find a secure place for literary studies by denying the existence of a “phantom aesthetic state” and basing the critic’s work on two pillars. “The two pillars upon which a theory of criticism must rest are an account of value and an account of communication” ( Principles of Literary Criticism, 1924). Having established these principles, an eminently “practical criticism” became possible; the bookPractical

Book Title: Wallace Stevens among Others-Diva-Dames, Deleuze, and American Culture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): JARRAWAY DAVID R.
Abstract: In Wallace Stevens among Others David Jarraway explores the extraordinary achievement of Wallace Stevens, but in contexts that are not usually thought about in connection with Stevens's work - gay literature, contemporary fiction, Hollywood film, and avant-garde architecture, among others. By viewing the poet among these "other" contexts, Jarraway considers the nature of self-reflection and pays special attention to the discrediting of self-presence as the principle of identity in American writing - a theme that reflects American authors’ abiding concern for subjectivities that engage the world from spaces of distance and difference. By returning to the work of Stevens, Jarraway seeks to refurbish this preoccupation by linking it to the literary theory of French philosopher Gilles Deleuze, whose work applies to American writers from Melville and Whitman to Fitzgerald and Cummings. Jarraway forges the link between Deleuze and Stevens by drawing out the female subjectivity found in each writer’s work to rethink the more static masculinist premises of being. Informed by a deep knowledge of and fluency with the work of Stevens and Deleuze, Jarraway uses these writers as a means of entry into American literature and culture, Wallace Stevens among Others is a sophisticated analysis that will open new directions for future scholarship.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cd0kr0

Introduction from: Wallace Stevens among Others
Abstract: To a certain extent, Wallace Stevens among Others: Diva-Dames, Deleuze, and American Cultureis anticipated by my two previous books: the first devoted to a complete reading of the poet himself (1993), and the second to readings of a number of other poets implicated in Stevens’s work by means of what I refer to as a theory of “dissident subjectivity” in American culture (2003). What is entirely new with the present monograph is my endeavour, over six separate chapters, to explore further the extraordinary achievement of American poet Wallace Stevens in the annals of modern American literature among other literary

1 “The Theory of Life”: from: Wallace Stevens among Others
Abstract: In the following collection of readings largely inspired by the work of Wallace Stevens, I endeavour to situate his poetry, sometimes directly and in other cases quite speculatively, among contexts not often associated with its extraordinary achievement in the annals of modern American culture: the gay alongside the straight fictional narrative (as in chapters 2 and 3), the classic American film (chapter 4), the postwar poetic “school” (chapter 5), and even contemporary architecture (chapter 6). Among these “other” contexts thanks to Stevens, I continue further to advance the claim elaborated previously (in Going the Distance: Dissident Subjectivity and Modernist American

4 “Both Sides and Neither”: from: Wallace Stevens among Others
Abstract: The fact that a number of contemporary American gay writers continue to return to the poetry of Wallace Stevens – the work of Mark Doty and Michael Cunningham are the signal instances in previous chapters of this study – will probably suggest the limit case for Stevens’s “masculinity” in his own poetry, and the “erotic poetics” hypothetically subtending it. But in view of the extensive correspondence between José Rodríguez Feo and Stevens gathered together in Secretaries of the Moon(1986), and of the considerable interest recounted there by the letter writers in a number of other homosexual authors familiar to

Conclusion: from: Wallace Stevens among Others
Abstract: In the heyday of formalist (or structuralist, or archetypal) criticism, the great Canadian literary critic Northrop Frye once ventured a very shrewd insight in concluding a breathlessly synoptic overview of Stevens’s entire oeuvre that I think still holds up today. In the essay entitled “The Realistic Oriole: A Study of Wallace Stevens” from 1957, Frye makes clear why Stevens’s poetry perhaps situates itself so well among the other contexts explored throughout this study for gauging the extraordinary achievement of his work in the century past. Specifically, Frye remarks on the “anti-‘poetic’ quality” of Stevens in contrast, say, to T.S. Eliot

1 The Expression Theory: from: Twentieth Century Theories of Art
Abstract: The Expression Theory is one of the distinctively modern approaches to art. “Art is the expression of emotion.” Of course earlier writers said a good deal about art and emotion. Plato described art as the feeding and watering of the passions. In the third century the Peri-Hypsous stressed the importance of vehement emotions in the literary work. Renaissance artists were much concerned with the faithful rendering of feeling states in the portrayal of their subjects. Eighteenth century artists and theorists had much to say about the sublime, the feeling of delicious terror. Hegel emphasized the insight art gives into the

4 The Sociological Approach from: Twentieth Century Theories of Art
Abstract: Any approach to art is sociological which solves the familiar problems of description, interpretation and evaluation by setting the artwork in the context of the society in which it was produced. Nowadays sociological approaches tend either to be committed to or influenced by Marxist views. I use the plural deliberately since there is not a single commonly accepted Marxist approach to a theory of art and art criticism.

5 Semiotics and Structuralism from: Twentieth Century Theories of Art
Abstract: Even more than in the case of the other sections it must be stressed that the selections presented constitute nothing more than an introduction. The double-barrelled title already suggests an embarrassment: are we dealing with one movement or two? In fact semiotics (or semiology, the term often preferred in Europe), let alone structuralism, is used to cover a considerable variety of positions. In the case of movements such as the expression theory and formalism the approaches in their alternative versions have already been pretty thoroughly worked out. Here we are dealing with a dynamic movement (or movements?) which has not

8 The Analytical/Linguistic Approach from: Twentieth Century Theories of Art
Abstract: In the English-speaking world, roughly from the 1950s to the 1970s, academic discussion of art and theory was dominated by this approach. The origin is largely in the work of English philosophers who became prominent in the forties and fifties and whose approach has been variously described as linguistic philosophy, philosophical analysis and philosophy of language. The name most prominent is that of Ludwig Wittgenstein (1889- 1951). His Philosophical Investigationswas published in 1954 though his views had become widely known during the forties through the writings of other philosophers. Other seminal influences come from John Austin, Gilbert Ryle and

Book Title: Archaeology and Memory- Publisher: Oxbow Books
Author(s): Borić Dušan
Abstract: Memory can be both a horrifying trauma and an empowering resource. From the Ancient Greeks to Nietzsche and Derrida, the dilemma about the relationship between history and memory has filled many pages, with one important question singled out: is the writing of history to memory a remedy or a poison? Recently, a growing interest in and preoccupation with the issue of memory, remembering and forgetting has resulted in a proliferation of published works, in various disciplines, that have memory as their focus. This trend, to which the present volume contributes, has started to occupy the dominant discourses of disciplines such as sociology, philosophy, history, anthropology and archaeology, and has also disseminated into the wider public discourse of society and culture today. Such a condition may perhaps echo the phenomenon of a melancholic experience at the turn of the millennium. Archaeology and Memory seeks to examine the diversity of mnemonic systems and their significance in different past contexts as well as the epistemological and ontological importance of archaeological practice and narratives in constituting the human historical condition. The twelve substantial contributions in this volume cover a diverse set of regional examples and focus on a range of prehistoric and classical case studies in Eurasian regional contexts as well as on the predicaments of memory in examples of the archaeologies of 'contemporary past'. From the Mesolithic and Neolithic burial chambers to the trenches of World War I and the role of materiality in international criminal courts, a number of contributors examine how people in the past have thought about their own pasts, while others reflect on our own present-day sensibilities in dealing with the material testimonies of recent history. Both kinds of papers offer wider theoretical reflections on materiality, archaeological methodologies and the ethical responsibilities of archaeological narration about the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cd0pmc

5. Layers of meaning: from: Archaeology and Memory
Author(s) Jones Andrew
Abstract: A number of features characterise mortuary rituals at the end of the Neolithic and the beginning of the Bronze Age in Britain (the period covering approximately 2200–1500 BC). These include the construction of barrows of layered earth and stone cairns of mounded rubble covering the dead; the burial of individuals as inhumations or cremations enclosed in grave cuts, stone cists, or coffins; and the deposition of artefacts in close association with the dead. Outside the mortuary sphere, but necessarily connected with it, this period of prehistory also witnesses the emergence of large scale hoards of artefacts, typically metalwork, typically

7. Memory and microhistory of an empire: from: Archaeology and Memory
Author(s) Boozer Anna
Abstract: Within an imperial framework, individuals and groups invoke memories of the past to denote both their social identity and their placement within the empire. An examination of quotidian mnemonic processes offers an opportunity for us to explore the ways in which local peoples negotiated, influenced, and responded to imperial social climates. The Roman Empire provides a salient framework for exploring memory because it was the iconic ancient empire, inscribing its control over a vast range of territories and peoples, each with its own distinct history and identity. The present work explores two Roman Egyptian houses as touchstones for the complex

Book Title: Land and People-Papers in Memory of John G. Evans
Publisher: Oxbow Books
Author(s): O’Connor Terry
Abstract: This volume is derived, in concept, from a conference held in honour of John Evans by the School of History and Archaeology and The Prehistoric Society at Cardiff University in March 2006. It brings together papers that address themes and landscapes on a variety of levels. They cover geographical, methodological and thematic areas that were of interest to, and had been studied by, John Evans. The volume is divided into five sections, which echo themes of importance in British prehistory. They include papers on aspects of environmental archaeology, experiments and philosophy; new research on the nature of woodland on the chalklands of southern England; coasts and islands; people, process and social order, and snails and shells - a strong part of John Evans' career. This volume presents a range of papers examining people's interaction with the landscape in all its forms. The papers provide a diverse but cohesive picture of how archaeological landscapes are viewed within current research frameworks and approaches, while also paying tribute to the innovative and inspirational work of one of the leading protagonists of environmental archaeology and the holistic approach to landscape interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cfr8z1

[Part 1 Introduction] from: Land and People
Abstract: Environmental archaeology as a discipline relies, in many ways, upon data and parallels gained from, or observed in, biology and the real world. In some cases these observations are made on experiments ranging, from the reconstruction of field movements monuments (eg, Overton Down and Wareham earthwork experiments), to the results of dog-gnawing on bones. Where data are not present as analogues for palaeo-ecological interpretation we are often forced to become ecologists ourselves, and to record and map the ecology of species in their present day habitat. Each study of a subfossil biological assemblage, or that of the geographical properties of,

5 If you go Down to the Woods Today; a re-evaluation of the chalkland postglacial woodland; implications for prehistoric communities from: Land and People
Author(s) Gardiner Julie
Abstract: The vegetation history, and its relevance to early prehistoric (postglacial) human communities on the chalk downlands of southern England, was essentially clearly proven and defined in broad terms in the 1970s, largely through the work of John Evans (1971a; 1972; 1975; Evans & Jones 1979). It was confirmed and re-affirmed by later workers (eg, Thomas 1982; Scaife 1980a) etc. Although shaken in the late 1980s by the arguments proffered by Bush and Flenley (1986) and Bush (1988), those arguments were fiercely countered by Thomas (Thomas 1989; Bush 1989). In this paper we summarise the history of the study of chalk

7 Peopling the Landscape; prehistory of the Wylye Valley, Wiltshire from: Land and People
Author(s) Allen Michael J.
Abstract: The Wylye valley, Wiltshire, downstream from Warminster, has seen remarkably little in the way of modern archaeological intervention. This, in large part, is due to the general lack of substantial development in any of the villages that lie along the river. Apart from work that preceded the construction of the Warminster and Codford bypasses on the main A36 trunk road in the early 1990s, the only major archaeological excavations have resulted from the need by the Army to construct new, permanent, range roads to facilitate the movement of heavy military vehicles within the Salisbury Plain Training Area (SPTA), which lies

9 Cows in the Wood from: Land and People
Author(s) Healy Frances
Abstract: Hambledon Hill consists of a central dome with three radiating spurs (Fig. 9.1). The extent of its Neolithic earthworks was defined by

12 On the Islandness of St Kilda from: Land and People
Author(s) Fleming Andrew
Abstract: One of the pleasures of living in south-west Wales is to take the boat to the island of Skomer, in Pembrokeshire – perhaps in May when the bluebells are out, or in October to see the seal pups. For an archaeologist, it is essential to take a copy of John Evans’ paper on the upstanding ‘almost certainly prehistoric’ archaeology of the island, or at the very least a copy of his excellent foldout map (Evans 1990, fig. 2). The product of five weeks’ work with Cardiff undergraduates, John’s Skomer paper represents a neat piece of fieldwork, which no doubt some day

13 Beaker Settlement in the Western Isles from: Land and People
Author(s) Sharples Niall
Abstract: In this paper I wish to follow up some conversations I had with John Evans about the distinctive characteristics of Beaker settlement in the Outer Hebrides. In the early stages of his career John had a particular interest in the machair landscapes of northern Britain and he worked with his students on the important Neolithic and Early Bronze Age settlements of Northton, Harris; Udal, North Uist; Rosinish, Benbecula and Skara Brae and Knap of Howar in Orkney (Evans 1979). The results from the work at Northton were particularly important and provided a signifi cant contribution to a seminal paper on

[Part 4 Introduction] from: Land and People
Abstract: John was famous for his contribution to the discipline of the study of land snails in archaeology. He studied shells, using their ecologies to help with understanding landscape, vegetation patterns, land-use and people. He worked with marine molluscs and discussed their exploitation as well as analysing assemblages from Wales with Vivian Evans. In all cases John was keenly aware of the ecology of the species under examination which was required for the first stage of interpretation – but then those data and interpretations were applied to archaeology; the interpretations were made valid and appropriate to the understanding of human communities, economies

14 Environmental Change in an Orkney Wetland: from: Land and People
Author(s) Bunting M. Jane
Abstract: Freshwater Mollusca have perhaps not figured as large in the environmental archaeology literature as their terrestrial counterparts, despite their abundance and habitat specificity. In the case of small bivalves of the genus Pisidium, the difficulties involved in their extraction and identification may be a contributory factor. Freshwater Mollusca are undoubtedly at their most valuable as part of a multi-proxy study, integrated as one of several sources of evidence. Recent work in the Orkney Islands has made good use of multi-proxy approaches to reconstruct landscape changes through the mid-Holocene (de la Vega Leinertet al.2000; 2007). Sometimes these studies can

Book Title: Atheism for Beginners-A Coursebook for Schools and Colleges
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Palmer Michael
Abstract: The word ‘atheism’ is derived from the Greek: a meaning ‘not’ is conjoined with theos meaning ‘god’. So atheism may be defined as follows: it is the belief that there is no God. Unfortunately definition of terms is rarely this straightforward. In this educational book, Michael Palmer undertakes to analyse, develop and discuss the complex and too often reduced notion of atheism. In spite of the consciously atheist point of view adopted by the author, the volume remains critical and objective, making religious, philosophical and political concepts around atheism understandable. Even though the book clearly addresses a young audience, any kind of reader will find food for thought in this vivid and detailed work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cg4jp3

1 Revising Yoderʹs Theology of Creation from: Principalities and Powers
Abstract: One of the persistent criticisms of John Howard Yoder is the insufficiency of his doctrine of creation. Both friends and foes of his Anabaptist approach worry that he places so much emphasis on the redemptive and eschatological work of Jesus in overcoming the fall that he denies the present goodness of creation. As Yoder himself put it in an early discussion of the powers, after the fall “we have no access to the good creation of God.”¹ Others indicate that his exclusive interest in the socio-political dimensions of Jesus’ ministry blinds him to personal and spiritual aspects of created humanity.

Book Title: In the Fellowship of His Suffering-A Theological Interpretation of Mental Illness — A Focus on "Schizophrenia"
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Swinton John
Abstract: Schizophrenia is often considered one of the most destructive forms of mental illness. Elahe Hessamfar’s personal experience with her daughter’s illness has led her to ask some pressing and significant questions about the cause and nature of schizophrenia and the Church’s role in its treatment. With a candid and revealing look at the history of mental illness, In the Fellowship of His Suffering describes schizophrenia as a variation of human expression. Hessamfar uses a deeply theological rather than pathological approach to interpret the schizophrenic experience and the effect it has on both the patients and their families. Effectively drawing on the Bible as a source of knowledge for understanding mental illness, she offers a reflective yet innovative view of whether the Church could or should intervene in such encounters and what such an intervention might look like. Hessamfar’s comprehensive work will provoke powerful responses from anyone interested in the prominent social issue of mental illness. Her portrayal of the raging debate between treating “insanity" either pastorally or medically will enthral readers, be they Christians, medical students or those in the field of psychiatry and social sciences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cg4kgg

2 The Historical Contexts of Psychiatry and Mental Illness from: In the Fellowship of His Suffering
Abstract: In this chapter, we will begin to develop a rich situationalperspective to further our investigation. In order to grasp the reality behind the phenomenon of mental illness, we need to contextualize it within its historical framework and understand why and how it is culturally perceived, and how that perception has influenced the treatment options. What are the historical and political dimensions of this phenomenon? Who is benefiting from it, and who are the victims? What are the real barriers to recovery? Situations, including illness, never happen in abstraction; they always happen in a context and have different forces affecting

three Satan in Story and Myth from: Facing the Fiend
Abstract: Satan is part of the myth of evil and if we assume that the story is one way to approach the reality of evil, we need to examine the myth in more detail. From a secular viewpoint, any metaphysical approach to the question of evil does not work. The responsibilities for all human actions lay, since Kant, in the agent’s will and accordingly, so does the decision to commit an evil deed. Nevertheless, despite all efforts to explain human behavior with psychology, sociology, biology, and psychoanalysis, there seems to be an explanatory gap when it comes to actions that hurt

four Satan and the Written Word from: Facing the Fiend
Abstract: In many ways, Satan is closely tied to the written word. Visitors to the Wartburg in Eisenach can still see the stain that is allegedly the result of Martin Luther throwing an inkpot at Satan while he worked to translate the Bible. The invention of the movable printing press by Johannes Gutenberg in Mainz contributed to the massive increase of printed books in Europe, and together with the efforts of the Reformation and the Counter-Reformation to educate the people, it created a literate society. Early modernity can be seen as the époque of the written word and Satan quickly became

Conclusion: from: Facing the Fiend
Abstract: The story of the possessed from Gadara is popular in art and fiction, in particular the demon’s claim, “for we are many.”² It implies not only the possible diversity of the satanic character, but also the power that stands behind him. The different characters discussed in this work are only a very small aspect of the satanic figure, but they were chosen to highlight the ambiguity of Satan’s nature and to express the diversity of his appearance in the story. The origins of Satan lay, as we have seen, in his function as the stumbling block and the adversary, he

1 Introduction: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) MacDonald Gregory
Abstract: At the most simple level Christian universalism is the belief that God will (or, in the case of “hopeful universalism,” might) redeem all people through the saving work of Christ. Within the history of Christianity such a belief has been a minority sport, and those who have embraced it have been, with some notable exceptions, not very well known. Indeed, it would probably be true to say that for most of Christian history the majority of Christians have thought that such a belief was outside the bounds of orthodoxy. In the minds of the majority it was simply agiven

6 Union with Christ: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Clymer Wayne K.
Abstract: In 1770 John Murray came to America,² and in a few years was recognized as the foremost advocate of universalism in that country. Today he is heralded by many as “the Father of [denominational] Universalism.” The Universalist Church is well aware of its debt to this apostle, but the indebtedness of John Murray to James Relly is not seldom overlooked. Murray claimed no originality for the framework of his theology, and unhesitatingly admitted that his doctrines were those preached and published by his Welsh friend whose acquaintance he had made several years before coming to America. When the news of

14 The Totality of Condemnation Fell on Christ: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Goddard Andrew
Abstract: The French Reformed lay theologian Jacques Ellul is probably better known for his original and insightful work in social analysis and critique rather than in theology, and yet his wrestling with issues of hell and universal salvation offer some original insights for contemporary theology. In one sense the focus on his sociological works is not surprising given his area of academic expertise. His original degree was in law and, from the end of the Second World War until his retirement in 1980, he served as the Professor of the History and Sociology of Institutions in the Law Faculty of Bordeaux

15 In the End, God . . . : from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Hart Trevor
Abstract: John Robinson is best remembered nowadays as an agent provocateurin ecclesial and theological terms. The self-confessed “radical”¹ became a household name more or less overnight in the early 1960s due to two particular acts of self-conscious provocation. First he appeared at the Old Bailey to defend Penguin Books against charges of obscenity in connection with their publication of an unexpurgated text ofLady Chatterley’s Lover.² Then, just as the dust was settling and the press pack losing interest, Robinson published his own “sensational” paperback,Honest to God—a popular work designed to introduce the “man on the Clapham omnibus”

16 Christ’s Descent into Hell: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Oakes Edward T.
Abstract: The many controversies provoked by Christian theology can be usefully, if roughly, divided into two genera: those controversies raised by outsiders who reject Christian doctrines entirely (like the existence of God or the resurrection of Jesus), and those that arise inside the precincts of the Christian theology (like the relationship between justification and works, or the atonement for sin won by Jesus on the cross). Inside that latter genus, no controversy has been more heated recently than the question of universal salvation.

17 Hell and the God of Love: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Hall Lindsey
Abstract: John Hick is probably best known for his work on the relationship between Christianity and the other world religions. He is a philosopher of religion who, over the course of a lifetime spent in academia, has constantly revised and developed his beliefs. Hick has ended up, theologically speaking, a very long way from where he started off. As a young man, he had a conversion experience which he described as an increasing awareness of the presence of God.¹ This was the beginning of a long spiritual journey which quickly moved from the “conservative evangelical” world to more liberal expressions of

18 The Annihilation of Hell and the Perfection of Freedom: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Ansell Nik
Abstract: “[T]he theology of the cross,” writes Moltmann in his early work The Crucified God, “is the true Christian universalism. There is no distinction here, and there cannot be any more distinctions. All are sinners without distinction, and all will be made righteous without any merit on their part by his grace which has come to pass in Christ Jesus (Rom 3:24).” Christ’s atonement for our sins is truly unlimited. That “God’s Son has died for all,” says Moltmann, “must undermine, remove, and destroy the things which mark men out as elect and non-elect.”²

2 Missions, Cultural Imperialism, and the Development of the Chinese Church from: After Imperialism
Author(s) Leung Ka Lun
Abstract: Developments in the twenty-first century are altering perceptions of Christianity and the relationship of Christianity to culture around the world. Churches in Asia, Africa, and Latin America now have an opportunity to challenge the Western-American monopolization of Christianity. While local expressions of Christianity might in some ways hinder global fellowship, I believe now is an ideal time for churches around the world to share resources and experiences and to develop strong local cultural identities as well as strong global bonds. The churches in China have begun this process of local indigenization and have also initiated global networking. This chapter will

Book Title: An Introduction to the New Testament-2nd Edition
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Robbins C. Michael
Abstract: This second edition of An introduction to the New Testament provides readers with pertinent material and a helpful framework that will guide them in their understanding of the New Testament texts. Many new and diverse cultural, historical, social-scientific, sociorhetorical, narrative, textual, and contextual studies have been examined since the publication of the first edition, which was in print for twenty years. The authors retain the original tripartite arrangement on 1) The world of the New Testament, 2) Interpreting the New Testament, and 3) Jesus and early Christianity. An appropriate book for anyone who seeks to better understand what is involved in the exegesis of New Testaments texts today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cg4mm1

Introduction from: An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: Probably no group of religious writings has influenced the Western world more than the New Testament. Its appealing message of the life and work of Jesus Christ has profoundly influenced and even transformed millions of lives. It has inspired the authors of such literary classics as The City of God, Paradise Lost, andPilgrim’s Progress. New Testament stories are read, rehearsed, and recited during the Christmas and Easter holidays. The Protestant work ethic derived from the New Testament. In the academic areas of ethics and philosophy, this provocative collection confronts the contemporary person with the ageless questions of ultimate concern:

7 The Ancient Letter Genre from: An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: In the previous chapter we looked at NT books composed in a basic narrative framework: the four Gospels and Acts. Although they include large amounts of direct discourse, such as sayings, speeches, and dialogues, the Gospels and Acts mostly contain narrative materials (e.g., miracle stories and historical legends). Also, the direct discourse in these books is joined by narrative comments and summary statements that permeate each work. The epistolary literature is primarily direct discourse. Its small amount of narrative material is mostly autobiographical. Much of its hymns, sayings, and teaching material is part of a dialogue between author and reader.

11 The Message of Jesus from: An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: Judging from the Apostles’ Creed, which jumps from the birth of Jesus to his death (Lat. Natus ex Maria virgine; passus sub Pontio Pilato), the details of neither Jesus’s life nor his teaching carried much creedal significance. But if one important function of such a creed was for baptismal instruction and for profession at baptism when the convert renounced the devil and his works, and if part of Jesus’s life was in fact a battle with evil (victory’s being a fait accompli through his death and resurrection), then perhaps in the loosest terms one can see Jesus’s life suggested between

13 The Major Phases of Early Christianity from: An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: What can be learned about the origins and development of Christianity from the NT and other relevant documents? Along with its presentation of the life and work of Jesus Christ, the NT also includes useful data for reconstructing the beginnings of Christianity. Who were the earliest followers of Jesus? What did it mean to follow Jesus the Messiah in the first century? How can the NT and related writings help us to understand these questions? In this chapter, we will attempt to respond to these and other queries.

2 Preaching and the Personal from: Preaching and the Personal
Author(s) FLORENCE ANNA CARTER
Abstract: First off, let me say how delighted I was to learn that there is a homiletics workgroup at the society for Biblical literature. It isn’t a self-evident reality. You probably know that. Studying the text is often preferable to talking about it in public.

4 Justice with Repair: from: Restorative Christ
Abstract: To repair is to make amends. These simple words separate the justice that merely reconciles from the deeper justice of the restorative Christ. Repair describes the work of justice afterreconciliation. The idea emerges from the restorative justice movement and the repair required in the aftermath of genocide in Rwanda, Sierra Leone, Bosnia, Cambodia, Liberia, and Uganda. Repair is partly symbolic because nothing—this side of heaven—can mend the atrocities witnessed in such countries during our own lifetime. Mass murder has become the weapon of choice for some regimes. Repair, however, must be pursued. It will be unusually costly.

9 SEARCHER OF THE ORACLES DIVINE from: Reading Scripture with the Saints
Abstract: Charles Wesley (1707–1788), John’s younger brother, was Methodism’s unofficial poet laureate. By the most conservative reckoning, Charles penned some 6,500 hymns, perhaps hundreds more sacred poems,¹ many of which propelled Methodist worship and evangelism in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. More controversial is whether Wesley’s hymns² are “theological works” as such.³ Less debated—only for being more neglected—are the character and quality of biblical exegesis in Wesley’s poetry. This chapter attempts some soundings of that subject.

Book Title: Returning to Reality-Christian Platonism for our Times
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Tyson Paul
Abstract: Could it be that we have lost touch with some basic human realities in our day of high-tech efficiency, frenetic competition, and ceaseless consumption? Have we turned from the moral, the spiritual, and even the physical realities that make our lives meaningful? These are metaphysical questions -questions about the nature of reality- but they are not abstract questions. These are very down to earth questions that concern power and the collective frameworks of belief and action governing our daily lives. This book is an introduction to the history, theory, and application of Christian metaphysics. Yet this book is not just an introduction, it is also a passionately argued call for a profound change in the contemporary Christian mind. Paul Tyson argues that as Western culture’s Christian Platonist understanding of reality was replaced by modern pragmatic realism, we turned not just from one outlook on reality to another, but away from reality itself. This book seeks to show that if we can recover this ancient Christian outlook on reality, reframed for our day, then we will be able to recover a way of life that is in harmony with human and divine truth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdwbb

5 How Christian is Christian Platonism? from: Returning to Reality
Abstract: Even though there is no shortage of sympathy between the New Testament and some central Platonist ideas, modern Western Christians often find the idea of Christian Platonism immediately suspect. Much of this suspicion is more the product of the distinctive epistemic and metaphysical incompatibilities that exist between modernity and Christian Platonism than it is a function of a carefully supported negative evaluation of how Christian Platonism came into being and what it actually entails. In what follows we will now do some historical spadework to dispel ignorance around how Christian Platonism arose and what its distinctive features as ChristianPlatonism

1 The Self Psychology Perspective from: Grace for the Injured Self
Abstract: New creative endeavors deeply engage three aspects of the innovator’s life: their thought, their work, and their person. These three are interrelated yet separate domains. It is possible to “read” Heinz Kohut in these three ways. One way is to look at his thought. This has to do with the ideas and conceptualizations at the heart of his self psychology. Another way is to look at his work. This involves a consideration of his self psychology as a treatment approach for those suffering from disturbances of the self. A third way is to look at his person. This focuses on

2 Self Injury and the Human Condition from: Grace for the Injured Self
Abstract: Behind every psychological theory is a vision of human fulfillment. An image of optimal health is at work when we name something “neurotic,” “sick,” or “pathological.” We cannot speak of a deficit, a fault, or a sense of brokenness without an image of human health. Or as Paul Tillich used to frequently say, every perspective on the human condition conveys a sense of what is wrong with us, how we can find healing, and how we can sustain the reality of a new life.

4 A New Pastoral Care Orientation for Parishioners from: Grace for the Injured Self
Abstract: Students in seminary are taught how to “think theologically.” More is required than just a pious spirit. Clergy need a theological template, a set of perspective-giving tools by which the activities of human life (once symbolized by the newspaper) can be understood from various theological viewpoints (once symbolized by the Bible). In ongoing parish work, pastors typically need to refer to the theological template. They have to consciously apply it rather than having so thoroughly internalized the template that they automatically “think theologically.”

8 Getting Something from Kohut’s Perspective on Religion from: Grace for the Injured Self
Abstract: In this final chapter, we will respond to the previous interviews between Randall and Kohut, as well as offer some additional reflections on Kohut’s value for understanding the psychological functions of religion. While the entire chapter represents our combined and united work, we will respond individually to these issues. We believe this will provide the reader with a broader and more comprehensive analysis of Kohut’s potential as a dialogue partner with religion. Thus, Randall’s reflections will be followed by Cooper’s.

Introduction from: The Scarlet Woman and the Red Hand
Abstract: This book examines how evangelicals in Northern Ireland read the Troubles (1966–2007) in the light of how they read the Bible. Notwithstanding its rootedness in the Northern Ireland context, this work is more than yet another addition to the existing articles and monographs that constitute the historiography of the Troubles. By considering the ways in which evangelical readings of the Bible inform their interpretations of society, this work supervenes on issues that reach out beyond this specific field of scholarly debate and makes sustained critical incursions into the much larger academic provinces of critical theory, hermeneutics and biblical studies.

Book Title: The Atheist's Primer- Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Palmer Michael
Abstract: In The Atheist's Primer, a prominent philosopher, Dr Michael Palmer, reinstates the importance of philosophy in the debate about God's existence. The 'new atheism' of Richard Dawkins and others has been driven by largely Darwinian objections to God's existence, limiting the debate to within a principally scientific framework. This has obscured the philosophical tradition of atheism, in which the main intellectual landmarks in atheism's history are to be found. With an analysis of atheistic thought from the Ancient Greeks to the present day, Palmer explains and comments on the philosophical arguments warranting atheism, discussing issues such as evil, morality, miracles, and the motivations for belief. The emphasis placed on materialism and the limitations of our knowledge might seem disheartening to some; but Palmer concludes on a positive note, arguing – alongside Nietzsche, Marx and Freud and many others – that happiness and personal fulfilment are to be found in the very materialism that religious belief rejects. Michael Palmer first addressed these issues in his student-oriented edition, The Atheist's Creed, of which The Atheist's Primer is a revised abridgement for the general reader. Palmer has now stripped out the primary texts and expanded his commentaries into fluent and concise analyses of the arguments. Free of philosophical jargon and assumptions of prior knowledge, this is an important introduction to a major cultural debate.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdxp0

7 The Motivations of Belief from: The Atheist's Primer
Abstract: In the evening I went very unwillingly to a society in Aldersgate Street, where one was reading Luther’s preface to the Epistle to the Romans. About a quarter before nine, while he was describing the change which God works in the heart through faith in Christ, I felt my heart strangely warmed. I felt I did trust in Christ, Christ alone, for salvation; and an assurance was given me that he had taken away my sins, even mine, and saved me from the law of

3 Charles Wesley’s Lyrical Theology from: Lyrical Theology of Charles Wesley - Expanded Edition
Abstract: Having established some of the parameters of lyrical theology and that Charles Wesley may be viewed and interpreted as a lyrical theologian, how are we to read his sacred poetry? This question is not raised in reference to established canons of literary interpretation of poetry, which have been discussed in many works on English literature. The question is posed primarily here in terms of the historical context within which Charles Wesley emerged as a sacred poet and the diverse theological problems facing eighteenth-century Christians in Great Britain. Both the historical and theological contexts are extremely significant in shaping Charles’s poetical

4 Literary and Ecclesial Sources Used in Charles Wesley’s Poetry from: Lyrical Theology of Charles Wesley - Expanded Edition
Abstract: Wesley’s hymnody is often read as a sacred literary corpus in isolation, but to do so is a great injustice to his work. Literary critics have also made a great mistake by considering hymn literature as unworthy of careful study. Charles Wesley is a man of his times whose hymns emerge from his education and literary influences of the period. Donald Davie has rightly observed in his book A Gathered Church: The Literature of the English Dissenting Interest, 1700–1930:

Introduction from: Storied Revelations
Abstract: Parables—used by Jesus to reveal to us the Kingdom of God, used to move us from being bystanders to active recipients of God’s work of revelation—are constantly at risk of being buried into “mummies of prose” as George MacDonald puts it. We become so familiar with the language of Scripture and are so far removed from the context in which these parables had their meaning that Jesus’ parables no longer work on us in this revelatory and transforming way. Each new generation must recover the vibrant, often shocking dimension of Jesus’ parables and create a new context in

1 George MacDonald: from: Storied Revelations
Abstract: MacDonald is primarily a theological thinker and writer. This seems surprising to many as he is mostly known today for his fiction and fairytales and his influence on the famous Inklings, especially C. S. Lewis and J. R. R. Tolkien. This book explores MacDonald’s theological rationale for writing Christian fiction, arguing that it is precisely in his less overt theological works of fiction that one finds some of his most profound thinking on the lived dimension of Christian faith. When MacDonald has been considered as a serious theologian (as is the case in two of the most recent important works

2 Patterns of Subversion and Promise: from: Storied Revelations
Abstract: Jesus was a master of using parables to shape the imagination and consequently the lives of his followers and foes alike. While Jesus’ parables are in some ways quite different from George MacDonald’s Christian fiction, there are significant ways in which MacDonald’s works resemble and imitate the way Jesus taught in and through parable. MacDonald’s fiction, especially PhantastesandLilith, are complex literary creations, and while I shall argue in this book that parabolic patterns reminiscent of the parables of Jesus are an important way by which one can understand these works, it is by no means the only or

5 Patterns of Subversion and Promise: from: Storied Revelations
Abstract: Lilith, first written in 1890, is MacDonald’s last fantastic novel. It is often considered to be his most difficult and disturbing piece of writing. He revised his first draft several times over a period of five years and completed the final version in 1895. The editing process for this novel was intense and long, and Richard Reis argues that of all the manuscripts we have of MacDonald’s works, none shows so much careful re-writing as theLilithmanuscripts.¹ This gives us some indication thatLilithis a well thought out piece of writing with its imagery carefully and purposefully chosen.

9 Common Life from: The Crisis of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Rtherford Jonathan
Abstract: The buildings of Canary Wharf in east London are huge factories of information and communications that have grown out of the old industrial structure of the Docklands. There are no longer any cranes on West India Dock lifting heavy goods from the holds of ships, very few workers engaged in physical toil, and no trade routes from the workshop of the world to the four corners of empire. The hard lives this industrial economy sustained have been made redundant. The new engines of Western capitalism are companies like Credit Suisse, HSBC, Citigroup and Morgan Stanley. The new trade routes are

Introduction: from: Drinking from the Wells of New Creation
Abstract: In Phantastes, which C. S. Lewis credits with baptizing his imagination, George MacDonald tells the story of Anodos, who has just come of age and is about to receive his inheritance.² The framework with which Anodos approaches life is one of confident mastery, self-referent pragmatism, and enough curiosity to make him wonder if there is more to life than what he has experienced. Clearly a person of strong self-esteem, Anodos expresses his sense of mastery by placing things in convenient categories. When he first meets his fairy grandmother who appears to him in “tiny woman-form” wearing a Grecian dress, he

5 The Imagination’s Third Way from: Drinking from the Wells of New Creation
Abstract: If the imagination is a gift from God and can catalyze such change, why has it often been ignored as a resource for participation in God’s kingdom work? What specific qualities of the imagination make it such a powerful tool for the Holy Spirit’s work of transformation and reconciliation? What further role does the imagination play in helping to create a new community in which there is “neither Jew nor Gentile, slave nor free, male and female,” and yet where those distinctions are still honored as a place from which particular gifts and perspectives can be offered? David Brooks writes

7 Signposts and Oases of the New Creation from: Drinking from the Wells of New Creation
Abstract: The central thesis of this book is that the Holy Spirit is God’s abiding presence to draw all people to the renewing waters of Christ’s recreating and reconciling work and life. Because of the Spirit’s universal, life-giving, and particularized presence, these waters are available even in the most turbulent and seemingly desolate places. Furthermore, I have proposed that the channels in which these waters often flow most freely, at least initially, are those of the imagination. It is through the imagination that God’s Spirit carries creativity, hope, and love into our hearts when there may be rational and psychological objections

Book Title: The Gift of the Other-Levinas, Derrida, and a Theology of Hospitality
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Bouma-Prediger Steven
Abstract: We live in an age of global capitalism and terror. In a climate of consumption and fear the unknown Other is regarded as a threat to our safety, a client to assist, or a competitor to be overcome in the struggle for scarce resources. And yet, the Christian Scriptures explicitly summon us to welcome strangers, to care for the widow and the orphan, and to build relationships with those distant from us. But how, in this world of hostility and commodification, do we practice hospitality? In The Gift of the Other, Andrew Shepherd engages deeply with the influential thought of French thinkers Emmanuel Levinas and Jacques Derrida, and argues that a true vision of hospitality is ultimately found not in postmodern philosophies but in the Christian narrative. The book offers a compelling Trinitarian account of the God of hospitality—a God of communion who “makes room" for otherness, who overcomes the hostility of the world though Jesus’ life, death, and resurrection, and who through the work of the Spirit is forming a new community: the Church—a people of welcome.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0nw

1 The Transcendence of the Other and Infinite Responsibility: from: The Gift of the Other
Abstract: Born in Lithuania in 1906, where he received a traditional Jewish education, Emmanuel Levinas began his philosophical studies at the University of Strasbourg in 1923. It was in Strasbourg that Levinas also met and began a lifelong friendship with Maurice Blanchot. In 1928, Levinas moved to Freiburg University to continue his studies in the emerging field of phenomenology being pioneered by Edmund Husserl. Here at Freibrug, Levinas also met and sat under the teaching of Martin Heidegger, whose work Sein und Zeit (Being and Time)(1927) had recently been published. In 1930, Levinas became a naturalised French citizen and with

3 Levinasian and Derridean Hospitality: from: The Gift of the Other
Abstract: In seeking to offer a theological account of the ethical practice of hospitality we have begun our journey by reflecting on the work of Emmanuel Levinas and his friend and compatriot, Jacques Derrida. The choice of Levinas and Derrida as interlocutors is not arbitrary. As well as the far-reaching influence of Levinasian and Derridean thought, not unimportant is the extent to which their respective philosophies have been shaped by their own life experiences of inhospitality, exclusion and violence. Such experiences have led them to the conclusion that not only is Western thought ill-equipped to respond to the inhospitable and unethical

4 Gifted, Called, and Named: from: The Gift of the Other
Abstract: The work of Emmanuel Levinas and Jacques Derrida has been of major significance in its critique of the modern Western understanding of selfhood and identity. For both Levinas and Derrida, Western conceptions of human identity and personhood post-Descartes are deeply disturbing. In placing the cogitoat the centre of his philosophy, Descartes and his successors give primacy to consciousness and conceive of the human person as a self-constituted entity. Philosophy which gives primacy to consciousness has, argue Levinas and Derrida, always given priority to the “I” and turned the Other into an object. They conclude that such philosophy leads ultimately

Book Title: Life in the Spirit-A Post-Constantinian and Trinitarian Account of the Christian Life
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): snavely Andréa D.
Abstract: Christians are united in saying that the Christian life is a life in the Spirit. But the unity breaks down when explaining how the Christian life is a life in the Spirit. Life in the Spirit is the first book to engage the post-Constantinian critique of the church with the field of Spirit Christology. Building upon the work of post-Constantinians John Howard Yoder and Stanley Hauerwas and upon the Trinitarian Spirit-Christology of Leopoldo Sánchez, this account provides a framework for seeing one’s Christian life as one transformed by the Spirit. Snavely rejects the characterisation of life in the Spirit as bringing sinners to faith, and instead proposes that as Jesus lived as the Son of the Father in the Spirit, the Spirit also makes other sons of the father in the image of Jesus. This Trinitarian interpretation shows the Christian life as being one of total trust in God with one’s own life, and after death living in Jesus’ resurrected life in the Spirit. Snavely’s account calls for a reimagining of the church and the Christian life in terms of ecclesial structure, Christian discipleship and the Christian view of marriage. Life in the Spirit will not only help Christians to have a better understanding of the place of vocation in the world as witnesses to the lordship of Jesus Christ, but it will also promote unity in the body of Christ based on the actual unity that all his adopted sons and daughters already have by belonging to Jesus Christ’s life in the Spirit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0pd

Foreword from: Life in the Spirit
Author(s) Okamoto Joel P.
Abstract: Christians are united when saying thatthe Christian life is a life in the Spirit. But the unity breaks down when explaininghowthe Christian life is a life in the Spirit. A stereotype of one extreme comes from my own Lutheran tradition. It can leave the impression that the Spirit’s work in the Christian life consists entirely in bringing sinners to faith, doing nothing to transform believers and bring them to new life. This can happen when Lutherans explain good works by quoting Isaiah—“as filthy rags”—and when they regard the righteousness God conveys in justification as a

1 The Christian Life as Life in the Spirit from: Life in the Spirit
Abstract: This work will give an account of the Christian life as life in the Spirit. This should be obvious enough from the new testament witness and especially Paul’s description of the Christian life as the Spirit’s work of making people into the image of Jesus Christ. However, we should not take it for granted that we have and in fact live by such an account for two reasons. The first reason is that the kind of life Jesus lived is not taken seriously for what it means for a Christian to live a life in the Spirit, or even for

2 A Spirit-Christology That Works for the Christian Life from: Life in the Spirit
Abstract: In this chapter I intend to lay the theological groundwork for an account of Spirit-Christology to be given in the following chapters that explains the Christian life as life in the Spirit based on the constitutive events in Jesus’ life and death, showing that the Christian life is not only life in the Spirit but that such life in the Spirit is also a cruciform life. to do so, I will examine other Spirit-Christologies and Pneumatologies to see whether they contribute to the kind of Spirit-Christology given here that begins with Jesus’ life and death as the basis for showing

Book Title: In the Eyes of God-A Metaphorical Approach to Biblical Anthropomorphic Language
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Howell Brian C.
Abstract: Anthropomorphic language has provided a conundrum for exegetes and theologians for millennia. Attempting to use human language to describe the divine presents ontological and epistemological problems that push our speech to the breaking point. In this new work, Howell shows that instances of divine action should not automatically be reduced simply to theological categories such as omnipotence, omniscience, omnipresence, immutability, etc., nor to criteria such as personhood, life, and approachability. Rather, he introduced readers to two unique approaches to “anthropomorphic expressions".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0wh

6 Disclosure and Disruption: from: Groundless Gods
Author(s) YI ZANE
Abstract: In A Secular Age,¹ Taylor repeats and develops a claim that he has made in earlier works.² According to Taylor, there is a disparity between the lofty ethical ideals affirmed by those living in secular, Western societies and the motivation of individuals to consistently live out and actualize these ideals. High moral standards require adequate “moral sources.” Accordingly, Taylor argues that non-religious humanisms fail to provide adequate sources and, conversely, claims that certain religions do.

3 The Cons of Contextuality . . . Kontextuality from: Contextual Theology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Havea Jione
Abstract: I begin by acknowledging—as any respectful Tongan would do, following the customary practice of fakatapu, which is where one honors thetapu(taboo), the sacredness, of land and of people, in one’s audience—that I am here sharing a reflection that I wrote, while being a migrant worker, in the country of the Darug people, in Australia. I am a foreigner to where I now live, so it is necessary to acknowledge and honor the tapu of my location, my context. I offer my fakatapu with the hope that I am permitted to think and reflect as a foreigner,

Book Title: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference-Intercivilizational Engagement
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Chung Paul S.
Abstract: In response to the religious and spiritual transition experienced in our modern world, Chung creates a postcolonial framework for inter-religious exchange, focussing on issues of interpretation, moral deliberation and ethical praxis. He investigates the relationship between hermeneutical theory and ethics and produces a new theory for intercivilizational dialogue, studying theological-philosophical theory of interpretation, ethics, the experience of cultural hybridity and inter-civilisational alliance, set within multiple horizons and diverse contexts
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf16n

Introduction from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: An engagement with the themes of the hermeneutical self and the ethical difference is undertaken in a comparative religious framework. In the aftermath of colonialism it implies an attempt to overcome the Western tradition of individual consciousness from Descartes to Husserl. In this tradition the thinking subject (knowledge of the self) takes on an ever-increasing importance in the theory of knowledge. In this philosophical development, the thinking subject has been prioritized, while sidestepping human life embedded within socio-historical locations and ethical practices. To improve on this shortcoming, I undertake a comparative religious-ethical study concerning interpretation and ethical self in dialogue

4. Understanding and Linguistic Experience from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: Heidegger (1884–1976) studied Husserl’s early writings and worked as his assistant in 1916, and succeeded Husserl in the chair at the University of Freiburg in 1928. Unlike Husserl, Heidegger’s basic conviction is that we do not study our activities by bracketing the world, because we are always “in-the-world.” Heidegger in his early career declared that the fundamental question of metaphysics is the question of Being: “why is there anything at all rather than nothing?” He sought to discover Being or reality (later called a new ground of meaning) by beginning with authentic human existence. This project introduces us to

6. Interpretation and Ethics of Virtue: from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: Driven by Gadamer’s appropriation of Aristotle into hermeneutical self, I take interest in examining Aristotle’s implication for interpretation and ethical theory. A notion of the mean and prudence is central to Aristotle’s notion of interpretation. This chapter is a study of Aristotle concerning interpretation and virtue ethics. This provides us with a framework for upholding a comparative study between Confucian ethics and Greek ethics in the next chapter.

9. A Comparative Religious Study of Aquinas and Mengzi from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: With a comparative study of Aquinas and Mengzi (371–289 BCE), Yearley makes a contribution the religious study of virtue-ethics. To undertake a comparative, religious study of Aquinas and Mengzi, I also study Matteo Ricci (1552–1610), the first Western missionary scholar in China, who undertook studies of and developed intercivilizational encounters with Confucianism. Reviewing Yearely’s and Ricci’s works, I introduce Weber’s comparative study of Confucianism and Puritanism. Weber acknowledges the charismatic dimension of Mengzi’s political ethics better than Ricci and Yearley, but it remains insufficient. I will bring up Mengzi’s political ethics as one of the major contributions of

12. Neo-Aristotelian Ethics and Neo-Kantian Framework from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: In the work of Aristotle, the central question is: “How should I live? or “How should one live?” Practical questions are invested with teleological significance. The question “what ought I to do?” or “what is right for me?” is subordinate to the question “what is the good life?” Aristotle speaks of the good and happy life in this regard. He views the ethos of the individual as embedded in the poliscomprising the citizen body. Practical reason assumes the role of judgment illuminating the historical life-horizon of an ethos.¹ In the turn toward an ethics of the good, practical reason

15. Engaging the Cave and the Butterfly: from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: For a comparative religious study of interpretation and morality in an intercivilizational framework, I begin my long route in chapter 15 and 16 by comparing Plato’s analogy of the cave and Zhuangzi’s story about the butterfly dream. Plato, a pupil of Socrates, uses the analogy of a cave to illustrate his well-known and powerful image of the human condition in his book Republic(514a–519a).¹ He likens the ordinary human to a prisoner in a cave, forced to gaze at shadows. The human being strives to see the light that brings illumination to the truth. This story venerates the journey

4 The Praxis of Sacramental Presence after Heidegger from: Sacramental Presence after Heidegger
Abstract: Up to this point in our analysis, we have made our way very broadly through the conceptual scaffolding of the work of Louis-Marie Chauvet and Lieven Boeve, identifying the major postmodern features of their thought and drawing an initial connection between these features and their bearing on the theme of sacramental presence. What has not yet been accomplished is a more detailed consideration of the implications—whether proximate or remote—of these features in regard to the individual sacraments themselves and therefore in relation to the praxis of sacramental presence. To this end, we select two sacraments for study in

Book Title: Jesus and the Cross-Necessity, Meaning, and Atonement
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Laughlin Peter
Abstract: According to the Nicene Creed, Christ died for us and for our salvation. But while all Christians agree that Christ’s death and resurrection has saving significance, there is little unanimity in how and why that is the case. In fact, Christian history is littered with accounts of the redemptive value of Christ’s death, and new models and motifs are constantly being proposed, many of which now stand in stark contrast to earlier thought. How then should contemporary articulations of the importance of the death of Christ be judged? At the heart of this book is the contention that Christian reflection on the atonement is faithful inasmuch as it incorporates the intention that Jesus himself had for his death. In a wide-reaching study, the author draws from both classical scholarship and recent work on the historical Jesus to argue that not only did Jesus imbue his death with redemptive meaning but that such meaning should impact expressions of the saving significance of the cross.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf285

Foreword from: Jesus and the Cross
Author(s) Ormerod Neil
Abstract: I can still remember as a young theology student coming across the book The Aims of Jesusby biblical scholar, Ben Meyer. It was a heady time for theology students with the appearance of works by Hans Küng (On Being a Christian) and Edward Schillebeeckx (Jesus: An Experiment in Christology) both reflecting the impact of critical biblical scholarship on our understanding of Jesus. Within the excitement of these works, Meyer’s book stood out as something different, serious, scholarly, patient and measured in its conclusions. But one thing that really struck me was the implication of the title—Jesus had intentions,

4 The Meaning of Jesus’ Death from: Jesus and the Cross
Abstract: In the previous chapter I argued for the viability of a theological engagement with history for the purpose of informing our theology of the atonement with the historical intention of Jesus of Nazareth. The task now is to discuss what can be known of the world of meaning that Jesus constituted for his death and then, in the next chapter, to bring these results to bear on our understanding of Christian atonement. Easy enough perhaps to state, a rather more difficult task in practice. Indeed, the endeavor threatens to become all-consuming; John Meier’s four-volume work is ample evidence of the

1 Introduction: from: Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) GUNNER GÖRAN
Abstract: Lutheran tradition has been of immense importance not just within the churches in quite a lot of countries worldwide but also for society and culture in general. Ideas within Reformation theology have in various ways influenced education, health care, attitudes to work, economy, and politics. This impact of Lutheran tradition has been based on particular theological positions that have been developed in different ways. Some of these positions are the doctrine of justification by grace alone, the idea that the Bible has a particular role as a source for theological reflection, the doctrine of original sin, the idea of a

9 Lutheran Theology and Dialogical Engagement in Post-Christian Society from: Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) CHILDS JAMES M.
Abstract: In Canadian philosopher Charles Taylor’s massive and highly regarded work, he has examined the impact of a long and continuing process of secularization on our views of religion in society.¹ In the societies of the Western world we commonly see secularization as implicated in the development of our post-Christendom age and the emergence of post-Christian society. Post-Christendom and post-Christian are not terms that Taylor employs. However, he sees one expression of secularity to be the public sphere “emptied of God or any reference to ultimate reality” and the norms of our various spheres of activity devoid of any reference to

13 Priesthood of All Believers as Public Opinion: from: Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) CLAESSON URBAN
Abstract: Historical research has often focused on how the doctrines of Luther’s theology were used by rulers and kings to legitimize power. However, Luther’s theology provided tools for men of political power and critics alike. The latter aspect needs to be explored in a more sophisticated fashion. In this chapter I will try to do just that. I will present a case from Swedish church history where Luther’s doctrine of the priesthood of all believers seems to have worked as an unexplored precursor of public opinion, and as a new way to legitimize power from below.

15 “Satis est” (CA 7): from: Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) THEIßEN HENNING
Abstract: This chapter provides a rereading of the ecclesiological key article of the Augsburg Confession, preceded by some reflections on why present-day theologians still consider the confessional writings from the Reformation period to be meaningful for their work in the early twenty-first century. In doing so, they seem to subscribe to a historicalview of the Reformation as a model for interpreting the present. This is what may at first sight seem odd in thedoctrinalapproach I will be following in these pages, since that view is somewhat in danger of overestimating the normative role of the confessional writings (norma

Book Title: Reading Daniel as a Text in Theological Hermeneutics- Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Hebbard Aaron B.
Abstract: Reading Daniel as a Text in Theological Hermeneutics sets out to read the book of Daniel as a narrative textbook in the field of theological hermeneutics. Employing such disciplines as historical criticism, literary criticism, narrative theology, and hermeneutics, this work seeks to maintain an interdisciplinary outlook on the book of Daniel. Two inherently linked perspectives are utilized in this reading of Daniel. First is the perception that the character of Daniel is the paradigm of the good theological hermeneut; theology and hermeneutics are inseparable and converge in the character of Daniel. Readers must recognize in Daniel certain qualities, attitudes, abilities, and convictions well worth emulating. Essentially, readers must aspire to become a Daniel. Second is the standpoint that the book of Daniel on the whole should be read as a hermeneutics textbook. Readers are led through a series of theories and exercises meant to be instilled into their theological, intellectual, and practical lives. Attention to readers is a constant endeavor throughout this thesis. The concern is fundamentally upon contemporary readers and their communities, yet with sensible consideration given to the historical readerly community with which contemporary readers find continuity. Greater concentration is placed on what the book of Daniel means for contemporary readers than on what the book of Daniel meant in its historical setting. In the end, readers are left with difficult challenges, a sobering awareness of the volatility of the business of hermeneutics, and serious implications for readers to implement both theologically and hermeneutically.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf34k

1 A Brief Sketch of Newbigin’s Life and Work from: Grasping Truth and Reality
Abstract: Each generation since the modern missionary movement began in the eighteenth century has produced a few great missionary statesmen, persons whose thought and work were a major influence on the global missionary enterprise during their particular era and who have influenced subsequent missionary thinking as well. At the end of the twentieth century this honor, it would seem, fell upon Lesslie Newbigin, long time missionary to India and global ecumenical leader.

3 Grasping Truth and Reality: from: Grasping Truth and Reality
Abstract: A survey of Newbigin’s thought makes it obvious that at the most basic levels the major concerns to which he tended to give theological attention and the major insights which lie at the heart of his reflections were to a remarkable degree formed during his early years, particularly those spent as an undergraduate at Cambridge, as a staff worker for the SCM in Scotland, and at Cambridge again

1 Moltmann’s Hope and Moltmannian Hope from: Our Only Hope
Abstract: The Patron Of Theological hope in the United States for the past fifty years has been Jürgen Moltmann. His celebrated book of 1964, Theology of Hope: On the Ground and the Implications of a Christian Eschatology,reinvigorated theological scholarship about hope and still inspires academic and congregational engagements with hope. His account of hope emphasizes God’s experience of crucified godforsakenness, Jesus Christ’s promise of resurrection, the future coming of God’s new creation, and the work of hope in this life, now. Moltmann’s theology inspires a body of writing and belief—Moltmannian hope—that approximately reflects his work and functions as

2 The Costs of a Moltmannian Theological Hope from: Our Only Hope
Abstract: The Legacy Of Moltmann’s theological hope abides as a contemporary doctrine, loosely articulated and broadly accepted. The broad outlines of his eschatological hope shape the presuppositions and imaginations of many theologians, clergy, and lay Christians, including some who have never engaged with his work directly. I have identified the legacy of Moltmann’s theology of hope as Moltmannian, because it reflects his work, at least indirectly, even though it does not attend to all of the particulars of his theological scholarship. When this Moltmannian hope constitutes the exclusive resource for eschatological hope, the costs are great.

Book Title: Translating the English Bible-From Relevance to Deconstruction
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Goodwin Philip W.
Abstract: In his detailed and thought-provoking work, Philip Goodwin conducts a thorough analysis of the challenges facing the Biblical translator, with particular focus on the problematic dominance of the King James Version of the Bible in our imaginations – a dominance which has had a deleterious effect upon the accuracy and originality of the translator's work. Goodwin considers the first two chapters of the Lukan narratives in depth, comparing and contrasting a breadth of widely disparate translations and drawing on a rich body of Biblical scholarship to support his thesis. A wide-ranging discussion of other linguistic issues is also conducted, touching on such vital matters as incorporating the contextual implications of the original text, and the attempt to challenge the reader's pre-existing encyclopaedic knowledge. Goodwin evolves a fresh and comprehensive answer to the difficulties of the translator's task, and concludes by providing his own original and charming translation of the first two chapters of Luke's Gospel. 'Translating the English Bible' provides a fascinating insight into the processes of translation and will interest anyone seeking accuracy and fidelity to the Scriptural message. It will also enlighten readers seeking a challenging translation of Luke that casts off the shackles of the 'Holy Marriage' tradition of Biblical translation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf395

Chapter Two Challenging the Holy Marriage: from: Translating the English Bible
Abstract: Relevance Theory is a development of communication theory springing from Paul Grice’s notion that there must be a ‘Co-operative Principle’ at work in conversation. This principle underwrites Maxims of Conversation underlying our ability to communicate. One of these, the so-called Maxim of Relation, simply specifies this: Be Relevant. Grice observed that speakers in conversation seem to observe this maxim, both in speaking and in interpreting, and that it is this ‘unspoken agreement’ which allows communication to take place, despite the indeterminacy of reference which is characteristic of language. Two linguists, Dan Sperber and Deirdre Wilson picked up this ball in

Chapter Four When is a priest not a priest? from: Translating the English Bible
Abstract: In Chapter Three we considered the Preface to Luke’s gospel, and found that it was a certain combination of syntactical features, rather than the semantics of the piece, which gave it its relevance. This, of course, is not the universal or perhaps even the normal state of affairs: on the contrary, the semantic properties of a text are normally very important in how it achieves relevance. Although part of the agenda of the present work is to challenge the assumption that semantics are always and everywhere the ‘trump card’ in interpreting a text, it has to be acknowledged that they

2 A Survey of the interpretive history of 1–2 Samuel from: The Fate of Saul's Progeny in the Reign of David
Abstract: Chapter 1 laid out the primary concern of this work, the investigation of the fates of Saul’s heirs in David’s reign. It also situated the books of Samuel in the context of the DtrH, highlighting the connection between the Torah and its important motifs and themes, not the least of which is justice—the undergirding criterion for evaluating David’s dealings with the Saulides in the book.

3 Narrative Criticism from: The Fate of Saul's Progeny in the Reign of David
Abstract: The present chapter discusses the methodological approach of the present work—narrative criticism. It explores both the rise of narrative criticism, its elements, how the method

Chapter Two The Anthropological Dimension from: Onslaught against Innocence
Abstract: Jstates that Cain offered the fruit of his fare to God. Abel did the same with the product of his shepherding. From the very beginning of his narrative composition, J has displayed a striking preoccupation with the human work. Does it mean originally the opposite of rest and enjoyment? J’s first answer comes with the myth of Adam and Eve, and it is a resounding No. In the Garden of Eden, the human enjoyable activity was work (see Gen 2: 15). But, while the origin of work is devoid of pain and anxiety, it is transformed after the human transgression

Epilogue from: The Philokalia and the Inner Life
Abstract: Being a shepherd, I am told, is not as romantic as it may sound. It is hard work. It requires perseverance in all weathers. It requires patience. Similarly, the process of “shepherding thoughts” that is described in the Philokaliais not for the faint hearted. It requires a self emptying that imitates that of Christ, it requires discipline, it requires watchfulness and patience. Above all, it requires perseverance in prayer. Just as sheep require pasture and protection every day, so do thoughts. [Theognostos] employs an image of the intellect as a sheep dog that has to keep watch lest the

8 The Double Vision Hermeneutics of a Chinese Pastor’s Intersubjective Experience of Shì Engaging Yìzhuàn and Pauline Texts from: A Double Vision Hermeneutic
Abstract: This chapter aims to present the result and evaluate the claim of the double vision hermeneutic, i.e., its efficacy in interpreting the intersubjective experience of shìand the multilayered intersubjective relationships between Texts A1 + A2 and Texts b1 + b2 and between these texts and the subject. In this regard, an assessment of a double vision hermeneutics as a preferable interpretive framework for the simultaneous handling of both concerns alongside the intersubjective experience ofshì, needs to be undertaken.

12 All Great Works of God Begin in Secret from: Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond
Abstract: The great New Testament scholar Johannes Weiss, in commenting on the dearth of information we possess about the beginnings of the Christian church, said, “it lies in the nature of things that the first beginnings of a religious movement are obscure, and hid from the eyes of contemporaries.”² Put into theological terms, I would say that it lies in the very nature of God to begin all great works in secret. That is what I want to speak to you about this evening. Throughout the Bible, and also in our own day, we see that great works of God begin

1 Utopia and Narrative: from: Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Ehret Verna
Abstract: Religion is the deeply human enterprise of evaluating and interpreting self and others based on what concerns one ultimately. religion simultaneously gives one an image of whom one is meant to be and of a society that promotes this realization in and for others. in other words, religion puts forth a utopic image—the image of a complete human life in relation to culture, society, and civilization as a whole. it is the work of the theologian to engage the changing narratives of religion in order to promote religion’s capacity to work continuously toward this utopic vision of human flourishing.

3 What Means Utopia to Us? from: Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Baggett Marybeth
Abstract: Almost five centuries after Thomas More’spublication ofUtopia, the insights of that work have all but disappeared beneath the mountain of fiction, criticism, and theory that has been built up around it. in many ways, the popular and critical reception of More’s text epitomizes the prediction about the written word plato offers in thePhaedrus.¹it has lost the protection of its author, and the many translations, adaptations, and appropriations of More’s material make difficult authentic engagement with his work. Yet, in light of More’s contemporary influence, his historical reputation, and his contribution to the popularization of humanism,Utopia

9 Who We Are Is God’s Dying: from: Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Schroeder Steven
Abstract: Many times the same dream visited me in my past life, appearing in different forms but saying the same thing. “Socrates,” it said, “get to work and make music. At the time, I took this to mean what I was doing already and assumed the dream was encouraging and urging me on—the way people cheer for members of their own team—to make music. And, philosophy being the greatest music, I was doing that already. But now after the trial, with the religious festival delaying my execution, it occurred to me that if the dream was urging me to

12 No-Places for Sacred Communities: from: Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Boscaljon Daniel
Abstract: In David fincher’s 1998 cult classic Fight Club,based on Chuck palahniuk’s 2005 novel, edward norton plays an anonymous protagonist lured away from a corporate life of khakis and power points by the charismatic proclamations of Brad pitt’s tyler durden. durden’s message responds to social conditions in the late twentieth and early twenty-first century, unmasking the twinned ideological frameworks supporting America: consumerism and religion. I base this assessment on paul ricoeur’s discussion of the conservative nature of ideology, which “conserves, in the sense of making firm the human order that could be shattered by natural or historical forces, by external

[Part I Introduction] from: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: The work of Paul Ricoeur has inspired an impressive amount of literature. The formidable breadth of his philosophical compass, including as it does, fields as diverse as literary criticism and analytic philosophy, psychoanalysis and biblical interpretation, not only recapitulates the battles and aspirations of his own generation, but witnesses to the living tension between reflection and action, past and present, academic vogues and enduring truths. In a century of turmoil, marked by alternations of unprecedented bursts of hope for a reconciled humanity and unfathomable sources

4 Hegel the Philosopher of Revelation from: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: The purpose of this chapter is to set Hegel in context. I shall formally adopt a historical-systematic approach without delving too deeply into the details of Hegel’s conceptual intricacies. Nonetheless, some general clarifications will be attempted about both content and method, the nature of the subject matter, and the nature of the approach itself. By looking at the kind of claims Hegel makes within both the overall perspective of his philosophy and the general intellectual climate of his day, a particular interpretative position will come to view, pleading for the centrality of the theological framework of interpretation, if a holistic

5 The Unfolding of God’s Story: from: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: It was Gadamer who suggested that Hegel may become more important for hermeneutics than Schleiermacher.¹ This may come as a surprise for those who know Hegel as the author of the absolute system, the “conceptual” Hegel, the philosopher who thought he could think God’s thoughts “before the creation of nature and of finite mind.”² As it is well known, immediately after his death, Hegel’s disciples divided among themselves, and the division has continued ever since, as nobody has succeeded in showing convincingly how Hegel’s system works in actual fact.

8 Conclusions: from: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: We have seen in the course of our argument that by following the adventures of the modern subject, within the framework created by a mere dispute between the “inside” and the “outside” one cannot adequately speak of the emergence of Truth. That is why neither the expressivist, “constructive” self nor its “receptive” counterpart configured by the “outside” is ultimately able to convey the full dimension of this emergence. I have suggested here that a theological reply to this epistemological decision must question the more general framework of its theological assumptions. My proposal has gradually emerged as a response to what

Book Title: Biblical Knowing-A Scriptural Epistemology of Error
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Bartholomew Craig G.
Abstract: The Christian Scriptures could be theologically described as beginning and ending with an epistemological outlook. The first episode of humanity’s activity centers on the knowledge of good and evil. The final stage of humanity is pictured by Jeremiah as a universally prophetic and knowing society: 'And no longer shall each one teach his neighbor and each his brother, saying, 'Know the Lord', for they shall all know me, from the least of them to the greatest, declares the Lord' (Jer 31:34). What happens to knowledge in between? In this work, Dru Johnson reconsiders epistemology with the tool of biblical theology: an approach to knowledge as developed in Genesis 2 and explored throughout the Tanakh (i.e., the Old Testament) and New Testament. By re-examining the neglected idea that Christian Scripture might be developing robust descriptions of knowing that can direct us today, the ambition of this book is to lay the groundwork for a biblical theology of knowledge - how knowledge is broached, described, and how error is rectified within the texts of the Christian canon. Proper knowing as it occurs in the Scriptures means that there are better and worse ways to know. Even more, the epistemology that is found to be advocated in Scripture is not relegated to religious knowing. Johnson argues that scientific epistemology and biblical epistemology make significant points of contact suggesting that they are fundamentally consistent with each other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf65j

Foreword from: Biblical Knowing
Author(s) Runner H. Evan
Abstract: It is a privilege to write the foreword to Dru Johnson’s creative and excellent work on Biblical Knowing. I had the privilege of being his external examiner for his PhD and am glad to see his work there now gathering further momentum in this impressive book.

9 Implications for Theologians and the Church from: Biblical Knowing
Abstract: For those familiar with the work of T. F. Torrance, it

Book Title: Spiritual Complaint-The Theology and Practice of Lament
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Bulkeley Tim
Abstract: Every life, and every land and people, has reasons for lament and complaint. This collection of essays explores the biblical foundations and the contemporary resonances of lament literature. This new work presents a variety of responses to tragedy and a world out of joint are explored. These responses arise from Scripture, from within the liturgy of the church, and from beyond the church; in contemporary life (the racially conflicted land of Aotearoa- New Zealand, secular music concerts and cyber-space). The book thus reflects upon theological and pastoral handling of such experience, as it bridges these different worlds. It brings together in conversation specialists from different fields of academy and church to provide a resource for integrating faith and scholarship in dark places.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf6b4

6 Blurring the Boundaries: from: Spiritual Complaint
Author(s) Boase Elizabeth
Abstract: The affinity between Isa 63:7—64:11 and the psalms of communal lament has long been noted.¹ Similarities with the book of Lamentations, and the penitential prayers of Ezra 9 and Neh 9 have also been identified.² Discussion as to the relationship between these texts has frequently been based within the methodological framework of form and/or tradition criticism,³ however, within this chapter, Isa 63:7—64:11 will be discussed from the perspective of the rhetorical and ideological climate of the exilic and post-exilic period, drawing on the literary framework of Mikhail Bakhtin.⁴ The chapter seeks to argue that Isaiah 63:7—64:11, through

7 The Profit and Loss of Lament: from: Spiritual Complaint
Author(s) Moffat Donald P.
Abstract: Lament and penitential prayer are closely related. Both are responses to suffering and crisis yet the ways in which they address God and the assumptions they make about the relationship and the allocation of responsibility are quite different. In the light of recent research on penitential prayer I want to re-examine aspects of the relationship between such prayers and the laments. In the process I want to look again at the implications for theology and Christian practice that were highlighted in seminal work by Claus Westermann and Walter Brueggemann.¹

12 Framing Lament: from: Spiritual Complaint
Author(s) Mathews Jeanette
Abstract: In this chapter I suggest that the form-critically identified laments of the Hebrew Bible can be understood via the performance concept of “framing.” In art, drama, and literature the frame lifts the work or event to a heightened consciousness and provides a context for practitioners and audiences to interact. My interest is in the link between frame (form) and content. I argue that the lament form provides a literary framework for the expression of anguish by empowering those who are suffering to name their pain, despite the constraints of the form that generally culminate in a leaning towards hope. Comparison

13 Public Lament from: Spiritual Complaint
Author(s) Taylor Steve
Abstract: There has been a surge of scholarship around lament in recent times. Although the initial impetus for this resurgence can be found in the works of both Westermann and Brueggemann, the focus on lament has moved beyond the boundaries of biblical studies and has taken on a particular urgency in light of global events since the turn of the millennium.¹ The first decade of the twenty-first century has seen tragedies which have touched the consciousness of people worldwide. Headline examples include the attack on the world trade centre in 2001, the wars in Afghanistan and Iraq, terrorist bombings in Bali

CHAPTER 6 John Wesley’s Covenant Theology in Context: from: From Faith to Faith
Abstract: It is increasingly apparent that while there was a strong consensus on many aspects of the theological core of covenant theology and general agreement among Calvinists and Arminians alike on the shape of its superstructure (the covenants of works and of grace), the details were subject to nuancing. And the nuancing was soteriologically critical, as evidenced in the long-running conversations Wesley joined in progress as he sought to stake out the theological foundations of a Methodist morphology of conversion. His regard for the authority of Scripture, his commitment to preserve the Reformation doctrine of justification by faith along with his

CHAPTER 7 The Salvific Sufficiency of the Covenant of Grace from: From Faith to Faith
Abstract: The attention given thus far to the context of John Wesley’s use of the servant-son metaphor has been compelled in part by the need to lay the groundwork for understanding the soteriological affirmations he expected it to convey. But it has also been compelled by the need to account for his apparent confidence that the theological repertoire of his audience was such that he could draw upon the metaphor with little or no introduction. This judgment on Wesley’s part suggests that neither the metaphor nor the primary elements of its supporting theology were original to him. Yet, it is hardly

Book Title: Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul-Reflections on the Work of Douglas Campbell
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Adams Edward
Abstract: In his work 'Deliverance of God' Douglas Campbell presents what Chris Tilling considers a "complete rereading of Paul’s letters that genuinely offers a way beyond problems associated with old and new perspectives. And his resultant picture of Paul’s theology generally, and the Apostle’s soteriology particularly, is beautiful, liberating, consistent, exegetically rigorous, theologically aware and pastorally compelling. It captures, I think, the best of the old perspective, with its concern to speak energetically about the God who saves, and it takes seriously the concerns of the new perspective on Second Temple Judaism. But in remarkable and jarringly elegant ways, it moves beyond them both." This collection of essays is divided into two sections. Part One analyses key aspects of Campbell’s account of the problem confronting readers of Paul. Part Two analyses key aspects of Campbell’s proposed solution to to the current confused state of Pauline interpretation. This book is essential reading for anyone involved in the study of Paul.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf6fp

Foreword from: Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Adams Edward
Abstract: In december 2011, at King’s College London, was convened a conference critically engaging with Douglas Campbell’s monumental The Deliverance of God. a follow-up conference was held in November 2012 at duke divinity school. The present volume arises from papers presented at these gatherings. It is appropriate that the first conference took place at King’s, where Douglas’s work on the project that would lead to Deliverance began in earnest. I was a colleague of his during his time at King’s and witnessed first hand the early birth pangs of the project. It was a great delight to welcome my old friend

1 A Review of Douglas Campbell’s The Deliverance of God from a Theological Perspective from: Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Torrance Alan J.
Abstract: I have been invited to assess Douglas Campbell’s door-stopper of a tome from a theological perspective. Given that this is a work in Pauline scholarship by a leading New Testament scholar, what is the justification for involving a theologian? Clearly, it is because the argumentation of this book is driven by a theological critique of certain key methodological, epistemological, and indeed, ontological suppositions that have functioned to sustain what Campbell calls “justification discourse”—an approach to Pauline interpretation that Campbell argues is outmoded, confused, and ultimately incoherent.

7 A Response to Campbell’s “Connecting the Dots” from: Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Hilborn David
Abstract: Douglas Campbell has produced an ambitious interdisciplinary tour de force in The Deliverance of God.Those who, like me, are not new testament specialists but who seek to ensure that their work in other theological fields is informed by contemporary biblical scholarship, will surely appreciate its rich synthesis of systematics, ethics, social theology, and church history with biblical exegesis and hermeneutics.

14 Campbell’s Faith: from: Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Tilling Chris
Abstract: Campbell’s work on Paul’s πίστις/πιστεύω language represents some of the most exegetically innovative and insightful work in Deliverance. Yet it is also the case that his arguments have not always been understood by his reviewers, and his key exegetical moves have largely been ignored. We will now survey some of his central arguments before briefly considering some potential objections.

CHAPTER 1 The Demise of Foundationalism and the Retention of Truth: from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: In a recent essay entitled “ The Postpositivist Choice: Tracy or Lindbeck?,” Richard Lints suggests that there are basically two methodological options available to contemporary theology: either the postmodern approach that highlights the public or universal character of theological rationality or the postliberal emphasis on intertextuality, narrative, and the cultural-linguistic framework of all knowledge.¹ Although Lints writes from within the evangelical tradition, a movement well known for taking a stand for the truth, he refrains from offering an answer to the question posed in the title, preferring instead to provide a descriptive survey of the two options.² As part of

CHAPTER 2 Pragmatist and Pragmaticist Trajectories for a Postmodern Theology from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: Pragmatism, even if limited to its specifically North American and philosophical trajectories, is quite diverse.¹ Not only are pragmatist philosophers working in various areas—e.g., philosophy of science, linguistics, logic, social theory—but they are also debating issues of validity and legitimacy regarding developments within the tradition itself. It is inevitable that the classical pragmatism of Peirce, Royce, and James would have inspired a wide spectrum of philosophical projects, and that these would have been extended by the legacy of “middle pragmatists” such as Dewey, G. H. Mead, C. I. Lewis, and the Chicago School.² Even so, pragmatism was eclipsed

CHAPTER 3 In Search of Foundations: from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: Over the past three and a half decades, Donald L. Gelpi, S.J., was one of the few individuals working at the intersections of theology and philosophy, and who had been, at the same time, involved with the charismatic movement (the Catholic Charismatic Renewal, in his case). Among other results has been the emergence of a systematic philosophical theology and spirituality that is imbued with intuitions derived from the charismatic experience, which continue to be appreciated as such by charismatic scholars working in these areas. In the past few years, Gelpi’s overall project, begun in earnest with the trilogy of Charism

CHAPTER 4 The “Baptist Vision” of James Wm. McClendon Jr.: from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: On 30 October 2000, shortly after completing the final pages of his Systematic Theology, James William McClendon Jr., Distinguished Scholar in Residence at Fuller Theological Seminary, returned home to be with the Lord.¹ The following review, reflection, and response to McClendon’s “baptist vision” is written in recognition of its importance for contemporary Christian theology. At the same time, insofar as it seeks to participate in, complement, and extend the theological conversation to which McClendon had devoted his life’s work, it should also be considered as a tribute to his legacy. Part one of this chapter will summarize some of the

CHAPTER 5 Whither Evangelical Theology? from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: It was the appearance of Veli-Matti Kärkkäinen’s most recent book [as of the time of writing], One with God: Salvation as Deification and Justification, that occasioned the invitation to review his larger corpus in the pages of this journal.¹ My long-standing appreciation for Kärkkäinen’s theological work had previously been registered in my collecting, editing, and publishing a set of his essays in book form a few years ago.² In the editor’s introduction to that book, I noted that Kärkkäinen was fast becoming one of the more important theologians to be reckoned with in our time. He had not only already

CHAPTER 7 From Quantum Mechanics to the Eucharistic Meal: from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: Rev Dr. John Polkinghorne, KBE, FRS needs no extended introduction to Metanexus Onlinereaders.¹ In brief, he has had two successive careers, first as an elementary particle physicist at Edinburgh and then Cambridge (1956–1979), and then as an Anglican priest (1981–present), during which he has served in a variety of ecclesial positions (as curate, vicar, and chaplain) as well as being president of Queen’s College (1989–1996). Since entering the priesthood, Polkinghorne has worked tirelessly at the frontiers of the science and theology conversation, having authored, coauthored, or edited more than twenty-five books on various related topics. His

CHAPTER 10 The True Believers? from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: In the last twenty-plus years, Francis X. Clooney, SJ, has emerged as perhaps one of the most important theologians in our contemporary global Christian context through his work on reading Hindu and Christian texts side by side. Yet despite his remarkable output, Clooney’s work has received little attention from evangelical thinkers or theologians. I would urge, however, that evangelicals neglect interacting with Clooney’s work to their loss; rather, Clooney’s project is important precisely because of his concerns about maintaining confessional integrity as a Christian theologian (in his case as a lifelong Roman Catholic priest) while crossing over into and taking

CHAPTER 12 Toward a Relational Apologetics in Global Context: from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: Let me say up front that van den Toren’s book takes the discussion of apologetics to a whole new level.¹ In the distant background is a Kampen Theological University (Dutch-language) PhD thesis on Barth and apologetics,² from which the central ideas have been leavened by eight years of living and teaching in the Central African Republic. The work of at least four or five other books later, many of these interfacing with the theme of apologetics as well as with a broad spectrum of approaches to apologetics, informs the present contribution by this current dean of the faculty at Wycliffe

1 Introduction: from: Mothers on the Margin?
Abstract: This thesis grew out of an initial observation. Within the first few verses of Matthew’s patrilineal genealogy that opens his Gospel, four women are referred to: Tamar, Rahab, Ruth, and “she of Uriah.” Why, I wondered, did Matthew choose to include four Old Testament women in the annotations of his genealogy and why these particular four women? This question is not a new one and in part my work is a response to a long-held, traditional view that has collectively labeled these woman as sinners or sexually scandalous. Other explanations have also sought for one denominator common to all four

9 Others on the Margin in Matthew’s Gospel from: Mothers on the Margin?
Abstract: New Testament scholar Duling, using the work of others in the social sciences, defines four different concepts of marginality, which he then applies to antiquity particularly in relation to Matthew’s Gospel. The first and most commonly recognized form of marginality is structural marginality. Structural marginality refers “to structural inequities in the social system: some persons are in the center and some are on the periphery.” Duling refers to this as involuntary marginality. Such individuals aren’t able to participate in normative social statuses, their roles and duties. As a result they can’t access the material and nonmaterial resources available to those

Introduction to Part Two: from: God's Wounds
Abstract: Like the first divine wound, this second wound of God originates from the interaction of the two presuppositions that I examined in the first volume of this work.¹ The second divine wound, however, differs from God’s first wound in the following way. Human betrayal of the divine lover inflicted the first divine wound, thereby

Foreword from: Martin Luther and Buddhism
Author(s) Moltmann Jürgen
Abstract: A foreword is neither an afterword nor a review. A foreword should open up the door to a text and make one feel so invited that the book gets read. I will confine my introductory remarks to such an invitation. The work of Paul Chung says much more than the title suggests. The title speaks of a comparison between Martin Luther and (Mahayana) Buddhism in regard to the “Aesthetics of Suffering,” but the content provides an extraordinarily rich theology that combines Europe with Asia, the sixteenth century with the twenty-first century, and Christian theology with the history of religion in

1 Martin Luther in the Context of Poverty and Religious Pluralism from: Martin Luther and Buddhism
Abstract: It becomes an inevitable reality in Asia that a way of dealing with the gospel/culture question turns into a gospel/religions question without further ado. Consider a story about a missionary and a tribal leader: A young missionary worked with a tribal group for several months and then sent a message to his senior colleague asking him to officiate at a baptism as the sign of recognizing them as Christians. The senior missionary arrived and made a plan for baptism on the following day. During the night the tribal council had a serious discussion, and then sent a message of regret

5 Luther and Asian Theology of Trinity from: Martin Luther and Buddhism
Abstract: I begin with the filioque(the Spirit proceeding from the Father and the Son) controversy. Under the influence of Eastern Orthodox theology of the Trinity, Moltmann makes a wholesale attack on Sabellian notes in Western trinitarian theology. Thus, ecumenical challenges to thefilioqueadded to the creed of Nicea and Constantinople have a well-known history. The doctrine of the Trinity reaches its climax in God’s plan of salvation in the person and the work of Jesus Christ, his incarnation, crucifixion, resurrection, and ascension through the Spirit (cf. Eph 1:3–14).

Introduction from: Facing the Other
Abstract: This book adds to a litany of works in recent years that argue for a theological significance of the body. It shares the sentiment of Matthew’s gospel that the theological meaning of the body exceeds outer apparel, even the language used to describe it or the metaphors with which it is dressed. It is indeed “more than clothes.” However, this book resists the temptation to merely propose a carnivalesque or reductionist postmodern account of the human person in which goodness and truth are tied to the pleasures of the body. Rather, the approaches of two notable twentieth-century thinkers are teased

2 John Paul II’s Theology of the Body from: Facing the Other
Abstract: The place of the body in the thought of John Paul II is situated within a prolific literary legacy for philosophy and theology.¹ Here, his original contribution to theological anthropology will be of interest, specifically his development of a theology of the body.² This chapter has three sections. The first is on the formative influences upon the younger Karol Wojtyla, the second outlines his theological framework which accentuated his thought as Bishop of Rome, and the third looks closely at Man and Woman He Created Them. The latter was written while Wojtyla was Archbishop of Krakow, but presented and published

3 Levinas, Alterity, and the Problem of the Body from: Facing the Other
Abstract: The place of the body is a problematic feature in the thought of Emmanuel Levinas. Here, it will be considered in light of his Jewish tradition and the ambiguity of the term “God” in his writings, as well as some theological responses. In both his major works, Totality and InfinityandOtherwise Than Being, Levinas refers often to the body. In the former, he offers a concise description of its dual nature: “To be a bodyis on the one handto stand[se tenir], to be master of oneself, and, on the other hand, to stand on the earth,

5 On What is Given: from: Facing the Other
Abstract: The place of the body in John Paul II and Levinas has been studied in detail, as well as major themes that emerge from both, especially erosand sexual desire. It has been seen how the problematic understanding of the body in postmodern thought might be theologically situated. While consideration was given to that which isdesiredin the body, this chapter considers what isgivenin the body. In addition to the dialogue between John Paul and Levinas, the work of Jean-Luc marion will be considered further, whose work explicitly crosses the divide between philosophy and theology. Marion’s “saturated

2 Contextual Methods within the Theological Processes of Christian Churches from: Contextual Theology
Abstract: Missiologists, such as Lamin Sanneh and Andrew Walls, have made it clear that the migratory nature of Christianity is evident today in a dramatic way. We are facing a new Christianity centered geographically, socially, culturally, economically, and politically in environments unfamiliar to the West, such that our theological work is called upon to think creatively in terms of the ideas and cultural life, the beliefs and practices of the churches of the new center.¹ The reality of a new Christianity in the offing is the stimulus for a commitment to an ecumenical and ecclesial theology and praxis of mission. It

3 The Helpfulness of Theology in the Life of the Church from: Contextual Theology
Abstract: The rise of the “new Christianity” has led Christian theologians to retrieve insights within Christian traditions that are helpful as the faith takes root and forms new and vital communities and practices. According to these traditions, good theology is not a search for universal truths that can be applied in all contexts and times, but rather an engagement with the lives of peoples and communities. The eschatological framework of Christian thinking and the centrality of theological theories of God’s grace ensure the openness of Christian thinking to new contexts. The creation of new Christian communities is a social and cultural

Book Title: Allegorizing History-The Venerable Bede, Figural Exegesis and Historical Theory
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Furry Timothy J.
Abstract: What is history? This question can be taken in many ways, including radically skeptical ones, but in 'Allegorizing History' Timothy J. Furry asks the questions not with that axe to grind but because it has become clear to him, through study of Bede and other ancient Christians, that history is not so simple. To be sure, many, if not all scholars, know that thanks to the work of postmodern philosophers and twentieth-century historical theorists like R.G. Collingwood, Hans-Georg Gadamer, and Hayden White. In this work, Furry shows that there are competing notions and purposes of historical practice, more specifically between Bede and the scholars who have recently studied him. Moreover, he explaisn why this difference matters and what implications result from such competing notions and practices of history, especially in the exegesis of Scripture as well as how exegesis also influences conceptions of history. Following a tradition of historians and theologians who have sought to blur the lines between theology and other disciplines, Furry explores how, if biblical exegesis was not an isolated discipline for ancient and medieval Christians, then its effects should be seen in other arenas. His argument here is that one of these arenas or disciplines is history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgfb0w

Introduction from: Allegorizing History
Abstract: What is history? This question can be taken in many ways, including radically skeptical ones, but I ask it not with that axe to grind. Instead, I ask it because it has become clear to me, through my study of Bede and other ancient Christians, that history is not so simple. To be sure, many, if not all scholars, know that thanks to the work of postmodern philosophers and twentieth-century historical theorists like R. G. Collingwood, Hans-Georg Gadamer, and Hayden White. In what follows, I will show that there are competing notions and purposes of historical practice, more specifically between

1 (Re)Framing History: from: Allegorizing History
Abstract: As with scholarship on any historical figure, much has changed in how the Venerable Bede has been understood, specifically as an historian and with respect to what he was trying to accomplish in his Historia ecclesiastica gentis anglorum. This chapter will explore historiographical issues beginning with Plummer’s introduction to the 1896 edition of theHistoriaand ending with more recent publications on Bede and his histories. I will show how scholars wrestled with integrating Bede’s theological, exegetical, and historical works into even a quasi-coherent account throughout the twentieth century, while highlighting theoretical obstacles that caused them difficulties. Due to the

4 Anachronism and the Status of the Past in Bede’s Historia and Figural Exegesis from: Allegorizing History
Abstract: Before transitioning to the subject for this chapter, a brief recounting of my argument to this point seems appropriate. Along with summarizing contemporary scholarship on Bede’s Historiaand exegesis, Chapter 1 alluded to the fact that reading Bede in light of modern historical methods and presumptions results in distortion. Part of that discussion revolved around the status of the past and its relationship to the present. The work of Charles Jones made such issues come to the fore in my historiography, specifically Jones’s application of the categories of realist and romantic to Bede, and Jan Davidse applied such concerns to

2 Being Human, Becoming Human: from: Being Human, Becoming Human
Author(s) Zimmermann Jens
Abstract: John de Gruchy’s work, both in his essay in this volume and in previous publications,¹ already suggests that Bonhoeffer’s theology is best characterized as a Christian humanism. De Gruchy seeks to recover Christian humanism as an alternative cultural stance to scientific fundamentalism on the one hand and to religious fundamentalism on the other,² especially when the latter conflates religion and nationalism.³ Let me say from the outset that I fundamentally agree with de Gruchy’s desire to affirm a humanist identity for Christians and that Bonhoeffer is indeed a rich resource for doing so. As the title of my contribution suggests,

4 Sociality, Discipleship, and Worldly Theology in Bonhoeffer’s Christian Humanism from: Being Human, Becoming Human
Author(s) Green Clifford J.
Abstract: A striking phenomenon of the vast secondary literature about Dietrich Bonhoeffer is that so little of it tries to address his theology as a whole. What are its fundamental patterns of thought? What are their enduring characteristics? What are new developments? What drives its movement? When we look at Bonhoeffer’s older contemporaries in Protestant theology in the twentieth century—Barth and Tillich, for example—there is a fairly broad consensus about their work read as a whole. There is no such consensus about Bonhoeffer. Indeed, while early interpreters were bold to advance theses about the nature of Bonhoeffer’s theology as

5 Community Turned Inside Out: from: Being Human, Becoming Human
Author(s) Nielsen Kirsten Busch
Abstract: But it must be added that more specifically Bonhoeffer—without separating the person of Christ from the work of Christ—lets Christology take its point of departure in soteriology. Paul’s words in 2 Corinthians that God reconciled us to himself through Christ and gave us the ministry of reconciliation (2 Cor 5: 18–19)

8 Following-After and Becoming Human: from: Being Human, Becoming Human
Author(s) Gregor Brian
Abstract: According Jürgen Moltmann, the notion of discipleship is “a Cinderella of Protestantism.” For a long time it was a lowly and despised stepsister. In the established churches it was considered an excess of the pietist fringe, that is, “the ‘voluntary’ groups on the left wing of the Reformation the people who were notoriously slandered as ‘enthusiasts’, ‘fanatics’, ‘do-gooders’ or ‘radicals.’”¹ At the same time, it also threatened to contaminate the gospel with the works-righteousness of the medieval imitatio Christi. One of Dietrich Bonhoeffer’s many achievements, Moltmann proposes, was to make it possible to mention discipleship in polite society.² Bonhoeffer gave

Book Title: Making Memory-Jewish and Christian Explorations in Monument, Narrative, and Liturgy
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Vincent Alana M.
Abstract: The twentieth century has been called a "century of horror". Proof of that, designation can be found in the vast and ever-increasing volume of scholarly work on violence, trauma, memory, and history across diverse academic disciplines. This book demonstrates not only the ways in which the wars of the twentieth century have altered theological engagement and religious practice, but also the degree to which religious ways of thinking have shaped the way we construct historical narratives. Drawing on diverse sources - from the Hebrew Bible to Commonwealth war graves, from Greek tragedy to post-Holocaust theology - Alana M. Vincent probes the intersections between past and present, memory and identity, religion and nationality. The result is a book that defies categorization and offers no easy answers, but instead pursues an agenda of theological realism, holding out continued hope for the restoration of the world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgfbg4

TWO Antigone and Athenian War-dead: from: Making Memory
Abstract: Biblical texts are not the only ancient texts with a significant interpretative afterlife. Western culture has also had a lengthy relationship of rereading with the literature of ancient Greece and Rome—this is the origin of the “Western philosophical tradition,” which I contrasted with the Jewish tradition of biblical interpretation in chapter one. In this chapter, I will turn to a brief examination of Sophocles’ Antigoneand its history of interpretation as a window into the way that discourse over mourning and ownership of the dead has developed. This discussion will provide a framework for the readings of Canadian material

1 Why Draw on the Insights of Bernard Lonergan? from: Religion and Violence
Abstract: At this point, I want to present a justification for turning to the insights of the Catholic Canadian theologian and philosopher, Bernard Lonergan. While Lonergan’s works do not specifically concern themselves with religiously motivated violence, his insights nevertheless address the problem of violence by examining the performance of the subject as subject and by providing a philosophical analysis of the self-transcending subject. Lonergan postulates a set of foundational categories for discerning how we come to have religious knowledge, an explanatory account of historical progress and breakdown in human history, and a way forward for recovery in history that is achieved

3 Lonergan, Religion, and Violence from: Religion and Violence
Abstract: The insights presented by Girard, Taylor, Jones, and Juergensmeyer have provided us with enough evidence to support the proposition that some forms of religious expression both motivate and justify the violent actions of religious agents. However, the survey of these authors’ works also leads me to assert that it is not enough simply to demonstrate empirically that people are motivated to commit violent acts by religious images, symbols, and doctrines. It is also important to dialectically engage religious images, symbols, and doctrines so as to judge whether they are conducive to authentic living, whether they are authentic understandings of a

4 A Dialectical Engagement with Cosmic War: from: Religion and Violence
Abstract: In the previous chapter, I outlined a theoretical framework for authentic and historical meaning-making based on Lonergan’s creative and healing vectors within the scale of values. The creative vector constitutes the movement from below upward, from vital, to social, cultural, and personal values. The need to realize vital values on a recurrent basis gives rise to questions at the social level to address the needs of sustainable living. Sustainable living invites questions at the cultural level so that a direction conducive to human living might be found. Questions at the cultural level draw forth our capacity for personal self-transcendence.

2 Procedural Principles from: God's Wounds
Abstract: The procedural principles that roughly define my method in this work constitute the outline of a strategy for a Chaoskampf, a struggle for the discovery of a pattern within the competing and often conflicting varieties of Christian attestations to the suffering God. ¹ I have not formulated this

3 Hypothetical Structure of the Christian Symbol of Divine Suffering from: God's Wounds
Abstract: On the basis of my previous preparatory steps, this chapter supplies a third, briefer, and final orientation for interaction with the Christian symbol of divine suffering. In one sense, this chapter initiates that interaction, since it provides a hypothetical overview of the symbol’s structure. In another sense, however, this chapter retains its orienting character, in that it does not yet fullybegin to interpret actual Christian attestations to divine suffering. Rather, in this chapter, I offer an overview of the symbol’s structure as a hypothesis that I will demonstrate throughout all three volumes of this work. The present chapter serves,

4 Divine Lover: from: God's Wounds
Abstract: This chapter constitutes the first stage in my analyses of the first presupposition of the Christian symbol of divine suffering. I repeat my formulation of this presupposition: The God whose life is love limits the divine self in God’s creative activity; or, as the creator who is love, God limits the divine self as God creates. This first stage of my analysis works on the basis of an abstraction of divine life or being from divine activity, in order to clarify the characteristic ways in which this symbol envisions the actualization of divine love in divine creative activity. In the

Introduction to Division Two: from: God's Wounds
Abstract: My analysis of this symbol’s first presupposition disclosed the implicit character of the second presupposition in the first presupposition. As a consequence, that disclosure requires an analysis of the second and implied presupposition, in order to comprehend as satisfactorily as possible even the first presupposition. Having begun with an analysis of this second presupposition would have required the same procedure in reverse. The elegant and fertile dialectical network between this symbol’s first and second presuppositions, as a result, begins to appear in all of its complexity through the present exposition. Although herein I continue to treatthese two presuppositionsdistinctly

Epilogue: from: God's Wounds
Abstract: In this study, I have aimed both to establish an approach to the Christian symbol of divine suffering and to inaugurate the first stages of an interpretation of this symbol through an analysis of its two principal presuppositions. The dialectical network between these two presuppositions constitutes the symbol of divine vulnerability: the symbolic condition of possibility for all forms or modes of actual divine suffering, according to the Christian symbol of divine suffering.

Foreword from: Church and Ethical Responsibility in the Midst of World Economy
Author(s) Duchrow Ulrich
Abstract: Who can write a book like this one? I guess only someone who has worked for a long time in interdisciplinary, intercultural, and interreligious ways. Paul Chung has already brought into dialogue Martin Luther with Buddhism, Karl Barth with religious pluralism, as well as Asian minjungtheology with Buddhism, Daoism, and Confucianism—in order to construct an “Irregular Theology.” Now he masters the social, economic, historical, and cultural complexities of capitalism in the context of today’s crises. What is his special contribution to the broad debate on this subject spurred by the nearly complete collapse of the financial system in

3 Political Right and Economic Freedom from: Church and Ethical Responsibility in the Midst of World Economy
Abstract: In the previous two chapters we discussed the historical genesis and development of Capitalism within the framework of the world-economy, colonialism, and the rationalization process. Tracing the economic movement of Christian theology and mission, a critical study was undertaken in regard to Christian mission and colonialism in the New World and also Weber’s thesis of the Protestant ethic and capitalist spirit. Along with the capitalist development of world-economy and sociological analysis of religious ideas, it is necessary to examine how closely the philosophical ideas of individual rights, civil society, and freedom have been intertwined with the economic individualism of capitalism.

“A Great Historic Day”: from: Vatican II
Author(s) Skira Jaroslav Z.
Abstract: This essay will broadly examine some of the late Metropolitan Maxim Hermaniuk (1911–96) of Winnipeg’s contributions to the preparatory stages and sessions of the Second Vatican Council¹ through his comments on his experiences on the Preparatory Theological Commission, the Secretariat for Christian Unity, and in actual council debates. This research is largely based on selected passages of his unpublished council diaries and his work on two conciliar pastoral letters of the Synod of the Ukrainian Catholic Bishops.² In these diaries the late metropolitan dealt with a number of themes, such as relations with the Orthodox churches, interreligious dialogue, sobornicity

Vatican II and the Changing Mission of the Catholic Women’s League of Canada from: Vatican II
Author(s) Jardine Sarah
Abstract: English-speaking Canadian lay Roman Catholic women have had a long and vital role in creating community and parish life in the twentieth century.¹ In 1891 Pope Leo XIII’s encyclical Rerum Novarum was issued in response to societal pressures. As a result, opportunities for lay people, particularly women, to minister in the Church were greatly increased. While the call to personal piety as a way of seeking grace and building the Church was still emphasized, working in the world with and for other people was encouraged. Both Pope Pius X and Pope Pius XI issued calls to the laity to become

1 Vellum and Vaccinium: from: Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Masemann Charlotte
Abstract: The systematic study of gardens as loci of food production during the Middle Ages has largely been overlooked by agrarian historians. Economic agrarian history is based epistemologically on the idea that human actions can best be understood through their economic foundations and consequences, and methodologically on the idea that the best and most accurate conclusions can be reached from a base of quantifiable and documented evidence. This strong epistemological and methodological base has resulted in a large body of excellent and rigorous work. Its focus on numbers and documents has, however, largely obscured the economic importance of cultivation carried out

4 Re-disciplining the Body from: Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Helps Lisa
Abstract: Despite the “veritable flood of books, conferences, and panels on body history, or bodies in history,” why, historian Kathleen Canning asks, has the body remained a largely “unexplicated and undertheorised historical concept.”¹ I would add that this lack of historicaltheorization is particularly surprising in light of the veritable torrent of literature on the body over the last fifteen years in areas as diverse as geography, philosophy, anthropology, cultural studies, and biology, to name only a few. In addressing this disparate body of work, medieval historian Caroline Bynum has argued that “despite the enthusiasm for the topic, discussions of the

13 Reporting the People’s War Ottawa (1914-1918) from: Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Keshen Jeff
Abstract: It was Canada’s first total war. It defined politics, economics, and the ideological milieu. But until recently, nearly all works on Canada’s home front in the Great War have kept analysis to the macro level, removing the conflict from day-to-day life to focus on matters such as the war’s role in building Canadian nationalism, as well as, conversely, national cleavages. This is now changing as demonstrated by recently published works on World War I Toronto and a comparative study of the Great War experience in Guelph, Medicine Hat and Trois-Rivieres.¹ Still, as historians Jay Winter and Jean-Louis Major wrote in

17 What do the Radio Program Schedules Reveal? from: Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) MacLennan Anne F.
Abstract: Although content analysis is used extensively in the field of communications, it has been applied only sporadically to broadcasting history. Most of the standard works on Canadian radio history are nationalistic in tone and make reference to the threat of American programming without quantifying its impact for assessment. Extensive content analysis of Canadian radio program schedules during the 1930s in Vancouver, Montreal, and Halifax questions some of the long-held historical misconceptions about Canadian radio. While judgmental samples and the representations of lobbyists to government commissions would be considered suspect and completely unsuitable for a contemporary study, these remain the standard

VII The Helping Relationship: from: The Helping Relationship
Author(s) Lund Kristine
Abstract: These common presenting issues elicit a variety of therapeutic responses, such as solution focused, cognitive behavioural, or psychoanalytic theory, to address unresolved issues from childhood or family of origin patterns that are influencing the client’s current relationships. More recently, therapists have looked at client issues from a systemic perspective, especially narrative and constructionist, and in particular have worked to build on client strengths to address current concerns.

VIII Mentoring: from: The Helping Relationship
Author(s) Ste-Marie Lorraine
Abstract: Mentoring is generally understood as a relationship between two people aimed at enabling a wide range of learning, experimentation, and development. Although mentoring is becoming increasingly recognized as a significant aspect of both personal and professional development today, the mentoring-type relationship has existed in all of human history. This is well exemplified in the characters of Mentor and his mentee, Telemachus, in the ancient Greek story of The Odyssey(Daloz, 1999, p. 17). In the past 25 years, there has been an increase in the use of formal mentoring programs in the workplace as well as in academic and professional

X The Pastorate as Helping Relationship from: The Helping Relationship
Author(s) Morrison Bradley T.
Abstract: Spiritual care is rapidly replacing pastoral care in institutional settings. While the assumptions of spiritual counselling may be a better fit for hospitals, nursing homes, and counselling centres, the pastoral paradigm remains the better fit for congregational care. This chapter argues that the pastoral paradigm provides a productive framework for addressing developments in the field of pastoral care and congregational ministry. The chapter correlates the psychotherapy outcome research of the common factors model with features of the pastoral paradigm to identify the ways in which the pastoral paradigm leverages the relational and communal dimensions of congregational life. The pastorate is

Book Title: Multiculturalism and Integration-Canadian and Irish Experiences
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Conrick Maeve
Abstract: The volume brings together an international group of scholars working in a variety of fields including politics, law, sociolinguistics, literature, philosophy, and history. Their interdisciplinary approach addresses the complex factors influencing integration and multiculturalism, painting detailed and accurate portraits of these issues in Canada and Ireland.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ch782p

Chapter IX Moving to Canada: from: Multiculturalism and Integration
Author(s) GORMAILE PÁDRAIG Ó
Abstract: The experience of settling in Canada can be examined in the work of the established, contemporary Irish-Canadian writer Pádraig Ó Siadhail (born in

Chapter XI Writing “Irish” in Pre-Confederation Canada: from: Multiculturalism and Integration
Author(s) PETERMAN MICHAEL
Abstract: If Canadians today think back to the decade before Confederation, they do so with precious little interest or curiosity. Yet, it was a complicated and fiery prelude to that period of developing Canadian nationhood, a vexed and contradictory era, marked by religious pressures, shifting political alliances, much tentativeness and a climate of financial uncertainty. Powerful national, religious and ethnic agendas were at work before the gaze of an anxious and sometimes violent public. If, for instance, one were Irish-born and living in Canada, one’s position on the possibility of “confederation” depended upon many factors—whether one was Catholic or Protestant,

Foreword to the Paperback Edition from: Red, White, and Blue
Abstract: A classic, it is said, is a work, whether art, literature, or scholarship, that can profitably be re-encountered throughout one’s life, with added appreciation when one places even a presumptively well-known work in the context of a later time. By any of these measures, Mark Tushnet’s Red, White, and Blue: A Critical Analysis of Constitutional Law,is a classic, and Jeff Tulis and I, as coeditors of the Constitutional Thinking series at the University Press of Kansas, are delighted to be the agents of its republication more than a quarter-century after its initial publication in 1988. It can be read

5 Intuitionism and Little Theory from: Red, White, and Blue
Abstract: The preceding chapters have explained the important role that grand theory plays in the liberal tradition. They have also suggested that grand theory cannot be made coherent today because of the erosion of the republican tradition. So far, though, we have considered only one theory at a time. Perhaps the theories could be combined so that their strengths reinforce each other and the strengths of one cancel the weaknesses of another. Unfortunately that strategy will not work. In discussing each grand theory I made two general kinds of arguments. First I developed an internal critique of the theory. That critique

Cross-Talk, Postcolonial Pedagogy, and Transnational Literacy from: Home-Work
Author(s) BRYDON DIANA
Abstract: My title, “cross-talk,” evokes the ambivalence of the conflictual classroom where dialogue is engaged about issues that matter enough to get people angry. Postcolonial questions in Canadian contexts can function like lightning rods for channelling complex and inarticulate anxieties about the changing shape of the nation. This paper was first inspired by my surprise at the anger that Dionne Brand’s perspective on the Writing Thru Race conference, held in 1994 after significant media controversy, can still inspire, several years after its enactment. It arises from my attempts in the classroom, together with my students, to work through that anger to

Literary Citizenship: from: Home-Work
Author(s) PENNEE DONNA PALMATEER
Abstract: This paper offers theoretical considerations of the ways in which literary postcoloniality in the teaching of Canadian literatures constitutes both a continuation of and a departure from the institutionalized history of literature as a key mode of delivery in civic education. To say that postcolonial pedagogy continues and departs from the institutionalization of literary studies is to say something of such obviousness that it would seem not to bear repeating, yet it is precisely to “the obvious” that pedagogy must attend insofar as both pedagogy and the obvious perform so much social—and so much complex—work. An equal obviousness

Globalization, (Canadian) Culture, and Critical Pedagogy: from: Home-Work
Author(s) MIKI ROY
Abstract: 3. verb: to put (something, especially a pump) into working order by filling or charging it with something; to apply a first coat, e.g., of paint or oil, to (a surface), especially in preparation for painting.

How Long Is Your Sentence?: from: Home-Work
Author(s) BOIRE GARY
Abstract: This cranky academic discussion has two aims. One is to explore the uncanny presence of social class (more precisely, working classes) within the Canadian literatures—and how this ghostly revenant conjures in the classroom the related spectres of law, transgression, and power. To teach the reality of social class as both a literary trope and a socio-political category, in other words, raises issues concerning, not solely pedagogy or social hierarchy, but personal agency, identity politics, and subject formation. In this modest proposal I share an understanding with my friend, Alan Lawson, who approaches postcolonialism as “a textual effect, as a

Reading against Hybridity?: from: Home-Work
Author(s) HÄRTING HEIKE
Abstract: Both of these epigraphs serve as a rough itinerary of this essay’s conceptual inquiries and multi-generic reading practices. Through their different political perspectives, the two quotations raise questions about, first, indigenous accounts of what Zygmunt Bauman calls the “human” and “social consequences of the globalizing process” (1), and, second, the theoretical and pedagogical value of diverse concepts and metaphors of cultural hybridity in an indigenous context. But they are also a reminder that “epigraph[s],” in Jacques Derrida’s words, “will never make a beginning” but comprise an indefinite network of texts ( Dissemination43) and conversations. Indeed, to a great extent, the

Literary History as Microhistory from: Home-Work
Author(s) MURRAY HEATHER
Abstract: Now that the “linguistic turn” has been replaced by an “historical turn,” it may seem unnecessary to argue for literary history as a mode of work. In recent years, English-Canadian literary criticism has been both deepened and enhanced by the wealth of writing (often by innovative junior scholars) on lesser-known authors and texts. (As a graduate student, I would have dated early Canadian literature as predating the Confederation poets; a student of today may well find Renaissance Canadian literature, or early Native discourses, a familiar terrain.) Literary work for English Canada is, by now, and by and large, historical in

Book Title: Rephrasing Heidegger-A Companion to 'Being and Time'
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): SEMBERA RICHARO
Abstract: This is the first detailed commentary in English by a Heidegger specialist trained at Heidegger's own university by the world-renowned Heidegger scholar Prof. F.-W. von Herrman, the editor of the most important volumes of Heidegger's collected works in German.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpcvp

INTRODUCTION from: Rephrasing Heidegger
Abstract: The aim of this book is to present the main ideas of Being and Time,Heidegger’s most important philosophical work, in a clear and accessible manner. In so doing, the book also strives to correct certain fundamental misconceptions of Heidegger’s thought, including the mischaracterization of Heidegger as an “existentialist.” No one could plausibly deny thatBeing and Timeis a dense and difficult philosophical treatise. Its stylistic flaws, even in the original German, are too obvious to excuse. Nevertheless it is equally undeniable thatBeing and Timeis an original, systematic, and epoch-making philosophical work. Without a doubt it was

CHAPTER 2 HERMENEUTIC PHENOMENOLOGY AS FUNDAMENTAL ONTOLOGY from: Rephrasing Heidegger
Abstract: In Chapter 1 we discussed the history of the phenomenological movement and emphasized the themes and approaches that are particularly significant for an adequate comprehension of Heidegger’s philosophy as it is presented in his main work, Being and Time.¹ We noted that in order to understand Heidegger’s phenomenological methodology, it is particularly important to begin with a basic knowledge of the phenomenology of Edmund Husserl. Without a knowledge of Husserl, it is very easy to confuse Heidegger’s philosophical methodology with a merely “descriptive” approach, a confusion that we will address in the course of the following sections. Of course, the

Retracing the Labyrinth of Modernism: from: At the Speed of Light There is Only Illumination
Author(s) MANGANIELLO DOMINIC
Abstract: Marshall mcluhan sounds a keynote of his literary criticism with a description of modern art as a process of recovery by retracing. Landmark works such as UlyssesandThe Waste Landmove simultaneously forward and backward in a timeless present, he argues, providing the reader with a discontinuous or cubist perspective from which to view various stages of aesthetic apprehension. This modernist method of composition in reverse was made possible by the shift in focus from exterior to interior landscape, apaysage intérieur, that occurred after Edgar Allen Poe, Charles Baudelaire, Rimbaud, and Stephane Mallarme. The period spanning the early

Making Sense of McLuhan Space from: At the Speed of Light There is Only Illumination
Author(s) GOW GORDON A.
Abstract: Metaphor is a polestar in the work of Marshall McLuhan: everything revolves around it. His journey through media, culture, and mind was guided largely by means of metaphor, since his thoughts on technology, his method, and his mode of presentation were all intimately oriented toward it in some form or another. Yet the contemporary study of metaphor in McLuhan’s work is made difficult precisely because it is so pervasive. This paper is an initial attempt to chart some of the contours of a persistent formof metaphor in McLuhan’s work—namely, that of space. Spatial metaphor, as I will demonstrate,

2 Modernity, Science and Democracy from: Modernité en transit - Modernity in Transit
Author(s) Harding Sandra
Abstract: The “modern” in “modern science” is a relatively unexamined concept within the sciences and in the philosophy, sociology and history of science; it is a concept for which theories have yet to be developed, this at a time when other aspects of Western sciences have been fruitfully explored in critical and illuminating ways, and when the exceptionalism and triumphalism characteristic of Western attitudes toward our sciences have been explicitly criticized and purportedly abandoned by many of the scholars working in science studies fields. By exceptionalism is meant the belief that Western sciences alone, among all human knowledge systems, are capable

5 One Modernity or Many? from: Modernité en transit - Modernity in Transit
Author(s) Schulze-Engler Frank
Abstract: For many of us working in literary and cultural studies, the notion of “modernity in transit” marks a certain irony: if in the last two to three decades, modernity seemed to have withered away as a theoretical concept in a vast array of academic disciplines (including important branches of philosophy and the social sciences), and postmodernism seemed to have won the day in much of the humanities, modernity seems to have returned with a vengeance in recent years. Now it is the grand narration of the postmodern condition entailing a total break with modernity that seems on its way out,

7 Exploring Post/Modern Urban Space: from: Modernité en transit - Modernity in Transit
Author(s) Löbbermann Dorothea
Abstract: Ever since the 1980s, the problem of urban homelessness has occupied not only activists and social critics, but also the cultural imagination, reviving, in a way, a topic that has been prevalent in North American literature since the 19 thcentury (on the history of homelessness in 19th- and early 20th-century American literature and culture, see Giamo, 1989; Kusmer, 2001; Allen, 2004). In recent literature, homeless characters have started to move from the margin to the centre of urban representation (see for instance, the work of Paul Auster [Moon Palace, 1989;In the Country of Last Things, 1987], Samuel R. Delany

Book Title: Philosophical Theory and the Universal Declaration of Human Rights- Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Sweet William
Abstract: Philosophical Theory and the Universal Declaration of Human Rightsexamines the relations and interrelations among theoretical and practical analyses of human rights. Edited by William Sweet, this volume draws on the works of philosophers, political theorists and those involved in the implementation of human rights. The essays, although diverse in method and approach, collectively argue that the language of rights and corresponding legal and political instruments have an important place in contemporary social political philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpdx6

Twelve MACINTYRE OR GEWIRTH? from: Philosophical Theory and the Universal Declaration of Human Rights
Author(s) Walters Gregory J.
Abstract: Within the history of Western ethics, we find both the teleological approach, exemplified by Aristotle’s ethics of virtues, and the deontological approach, heralded by Kant’s ethics of duty, rule-utilitarianism, and divine will/command conceptions of morality. Usually, we assume that these two approaches are incompatible and we must follow either the “good” or the “right.”¹ In this essay, I am concerned with what I believe is the most significant contemporary manifestation of the virtue-rights debate. Alasdair Maclntyre’s work in virtue ethics is now well known, but rarely discussed is Maclntyre’s critique of Alan Gewirth’s theory of morality as a theory of

Book Title: Robertson Davies-A Mingling of Contrarieties
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Morra Linda M.
Abstract: This collection of essays on the writing of Robertson Davies addresses the basic problems in reading his work by looking at the topics of doubling, disguise, irony, paradox, and dwelling in "gaps" or spaces "in between." The essays present new insights on a broad range of topics in Davies' oeuvre and represent one of the first major discussions devoted to Davies' work since his death in 1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpdzq

“A Hint of the Basic Brimstone”: from: Robertson Davies
Author(s) BALISCH FAITH
Abstract: The comic mode is inseparable from Robertson Davies’ way of viewing the world; it is the illuminating medium, that “light that plays on the writer’s mind, in which all aspects of his work live and take their being.”¹ Nevertheless, amidst the considerable body of criticism of his writing, one finds little or no examination of his humour.² In his interviews, essays, speeches, plays, and works of fiction, Davies repeatedly reiterates his belief that humour is not incompatible with serious purpose, and that comedy “does not mean simply making people laugh. It is not the art of the stand-up comedian, the

Magic in the Web: from: Robertson Davies
Author(s) PETTIGREW TODD
Abstract: To complicate matters, scholarly opinion about Davies’ work, perhaps inevitably, is more complicated and varied than the work itself. Criticism about Davies seems to include hyperbolic praise and openly hostile attacks in equal measure. John Irving has called him “the

CHAPTER THREE Erläuterungen: from: Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Fisette Denis
Abstract: Husserl, a trained mathematician, just like Frege and Bolzano, and student of two of the most notable scholars of that field, Kronecker and Weierstrass, had first-hand knowledge of his contemporaries’ scientific work. Although his contribution to mathematics as such remains modest, one would be wrong to minimize the importance of formal and natural sciences within Husserl’s philosophical itinerary. For instance, his project of a universal mathesisand the articulation of his doctrine of definite manifolds were Husserl’s response to mathematical problems, namely, those of imaginary numbers, and are among the few ideas to which Husserl remained faithful until the end

CHAPTER FOUR HUSSERL AND HILBERT ON GEOMETRY from: Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Majer Ulrich
Abstract: Anyone who attempts to compare Husserl’s and Hilbert’s approach to geometry faces an almost insurmountable difficulty. Whereas Hilbert, over a period of more than ten years, worked out a systematic and detailed presentation of geometry which was published in his book Grundlagen der Geometric, there is nothing comparable in Husserl’s work.¹ All that we find in Husserl’s Nachlafβ² is a blueprint for a book on geometry, some scattered remarks about the epistemological origin of our knowledge of space, two somewhat longer scripts (one on the history of geometry, the other on topological questions), and last but not least, some shorter

CHAPTER EIGHT HERMANN WEYL’S LATER PHILOSOPHICAL VIEWS: from: Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Bell John L.
Abstract: In what seems to have been his last paper, Insight and Reflection(1954), Hermann Weyl provides an illuminating sketch of his intellectual development, and describes the principal influences – scientific and philosophical – exerted on him in the course of his career as a mathematician. Of the latter the most important in the earlier stages was Husserl’s phenomenology. In Weyl’s work of 1918–22 we find much evidence of the great influence Husserl’s ideas had on Weyl’s philosophical outlook - one need merely glance through the pages ofSpace-Time-MatterorThe Continuumto see it. Witness, for example, the following

Book Title: Charting the Future of Translation History- Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): BANDIA PAUL F.
Abstract: This book aims at claiming such autonomy for the field with a renewed vigour. It seeks to explore issues related to methodology as well as a variety of discourses on history with a view to laying the groundwork for new avenues, new models, new methods. It aspires to challenge existing theoretical and ideological frameworks. It looks toward the future of history. It is an attempt to address shortcomings that have prevented translation history from reaching its full disciplinary potential. From microhistory, archaeology, periodization, to issues of subjectivity and postmodernism, methodological lacunae are being filled.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpfkh

Perspectives on the History of Interpretation: from: Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) BAIGORRI-JALÓN JESÚS
Abstract: Eighty-five years ago, in 1919, a lawyer from Quebec, Joseph Belleau, was recruited to participate as an interpreter in the first international conference derived from the Paris Peace Conference (even before the League of Nations began its work). This was the Washington Conference, which gave birth to the International Labor Organization (ILO). Belleau’s file in the League of Nations archives in Geneva contains just a few documents. From that file and from other documents, we have gathered information about the way interpreting services were organized and provided at that Conference. This information will be published in an article, “Conference Interpreting

Translation, History and the Translation Scholar from: Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) FOZ CLARA
Abstract: There is no doubt that history and translation are bound together. Translation represents not only a central process in historical work, but is, in itself, a historical practice. However, so far these ties have not forged connections across the two disciplines. It must be acknowledged that the difference between the status of translation and history in the research community is such that the use of translation by historians has long been considered “normal” and “natural,” while translators studying the history of their profession (so far of little interest to those who are historians by trade) are in general careful not

“Long Time No See, Coolie”: from: Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) ST. ANDRÉ JAMES
Abstract: In 1900, Ernest Bramah Smith published The Wallet of Kai Lung, purporting to be a collection of tales told by a Chinese storyteller, Kai Lung. Following its success, Smith published at least four additional anthologies sporadically over the next thirty years, and most of these works were reprinted one or more times up to the 1980s (see bibliography). Although it is nowhere explicitly stated, the stories purport to be “genuinely” Chinese. Such works form part of the intersection of two minor traditions in European literature, that of the Oriental tale and that of spurious translation (original works that are passed

Translating the New World in Jean de Léry’s from: Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) YORK CHRISTINE
Abstract: One of the effects of translating a historical text years, even hundreds of years after its initial publication is the continued life given to it by the translation. The work lives on in its translation. The voices contained within the text are revived and returned to circulation. We shall see this occur in Janet Whatley’s 1990 translation of a book first published in 1578, Jean de Léry’s Histoire d’un voyage fait en la terre du Brésil. The book describes Léry’s voyage, part of an early attempt by France to establish a colony in the New World, and his contact with

Book Title: Philosophical Apprenticeships-Contemporary Continental Philosophy in Canada
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Robinson Jason
Abstract: Philosophical Apprenticeshipsgathers fresh and innovative essays written by the next generation of Canada's philosophers on the work of prominent Canadian philosophers currently researching topics in continental philosophy. The authors--doctoral students studying at Canadian universities--have studied with, worked with, or been deeply influenced by these philosophers. Their essays present, discuss, and develop the work of their mentors, addressing issues such as time, art, politics, hermeneutics, and phenomenology. The result is a volume that introduces the reader to the work of current Canadian philosophers and to that of their successors, who will soon be making their own contributions to Canadian continental philosophy.Includes articles by Gabriel Malenfant on Bettina Bergo, Saulius Geniusas on Gary Madison, John Marshall on Samuel Mallin, François Doyon on Claude Piché, Stephanie Zubcic on Jennifer Bates, Alexandra Morrison on Graeme Nicholson, Scott Marratto on John Russon, and Jill Gilbert on John Burbridge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpgcw

Book Title: Northrop Frye-New Directions from Old
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Rampton David
Abstract: More than fifty years after the publication of Anatomy of Criticism, Northrop Frye remains one of Canada's most influential intellectuals. This reappraisal reasserts the relevance of his work to the study of literature and illuminates its fruitful intersection with a variety of other fields, including film, cultural studies, linguistics, and feminism. Many of the contributors draw upon the early essays, correspondence, and diaries recently published as part of theCollected Works of Northrop Fryeseries, in order to explore the development of his extraordinary intellectual range and the implications of his imaginative syntheses. They refute postmodernist arguments that Frye's literary criticism is obsolete and propose his wide-ranging and non-linear ways of thinking as a model for twenty-first century readers searching for innovative ways of understanding literature and its relevance to contiguous disciplines. The volume provides an in-depth examination of Frye's work on a range of literary questions, periods, and genres, as well as a consideration of his contributions to literary theory, philosophy, and theology. The portrait that emerges is that of a writer who still has much to offer those interested in literature and the ways it represents and transforms our world. The book's overall argument is that Frye's case for the centrality of the imagination has never been more important where understanding history, reconciling science and culture, or reconceptualizing social change is concerned.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckph8t

Recovery of the Spiritual Other: from: Northrop Frye
Author(s) Tóth Sára
Abstract: In the posthumously published Double Vision, the only book in which Northrop Frye explicitly discussed the question of religion and the church as distinguished from literature, he described God as “a spiritual Other” (dv20). Although Frye’s engagement with religious and spiritual questions was certainly evident to careful readers of his work from the beginning, with the ongoing posthumous publication of his diaries and notebooks from 1996 onward, the religious aspect of his work has become that much more obvious. The notebooks contain uninhibited speculations on the nature of God, and they reveal how Frye’s theological vision grounded and guided

Frye’s “Pure Speech”: from: Northrop Frye
Author(s) Sherbert Garry
Abstract: Given the desire to write about “pure speech” ( dv83) in literature and the work of Northrop Frye, one might suspect that I would be precipitously thrown into a discourse on religion for, as Jacques Derrida observes, “the desire for purification in general” is “the desire for the safe and sound, for the intact or immune (heilige)” (Echographies134). In his essay “Faith and Knowledge: The Two Sources of ‘Religion’ at the Limits of Reason Alone,” Derrida asks, “Can a discourse on religion be dissociated from a discourse on salvation: which is to say, on the holy, the sacred, the

The Earth’s Imagined Corners: from: Northrop Frye
Author(s) Dolzani Michael
Abstract: A utopian tale traditionally begins by recounting how a traveller discovered utopia, usually by stumbling across it accidentally. I stumbled across “utopia” as a subject by editing two Frye texts, first the “Third Book” notebooks, and later the Collected Works edition of Words With Power. Somewhere around 1964, Northrop Frye began recording notes toward what he called the “Third Book”—that is, his third major work afterFearful SymmetryandAnatomy of Criticism. SinceAnatomywas a “centripetal” approach, concerned with the formal relations of literature, the Third Book was to be about criticism and society. Its first subject was

Book Title: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams- Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Melchin Kenneth R.
Abstract: This study analyzes both pragmatic and theoretical perspectives of ethical deliberation, as well as the professional and philosophical backgrounds for the ethical deliberation of social workers, nurses and doctors working in the field of chronic illness. In doing so, this volume expands the scope of current research through an analysis of the process and its dynamics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckphjz

Introduction from: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Melchin Kenneth R.
Abstract: Technological changes have had a dramatic impact upon the financing, organization and delivery of health care services in Canada. Professionals and health care decision makers now wrestle with increasingly complex sets of challenges that must involve various types of professionals in programs of care. The result is that administrators, nurses, physicians, social workers and other professionals have had diverse roles to play in programs of care and, consequently, have insisted that their voices be heard in the decision-making process alongside the voices of patients and their families. Needless to say, the ensuing discussions have become difficult because the diverse professional

Chapter 4 The Social Worker as Moral Agent from: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Flaherty Tim
Abstract: In the course of the literature search on nurses and physicians, the indicators drawn from professional journals and texts were collected into dimensions that gave us three ideal types of each profession with distinct approaches to ethical issues due to their distinct implicit ethics. In the course of the documentary analysis on the social worker, having used a corpus of literature comparable to that for physicians and nurses, it became evident that our discussion of the social worker would be different. First of all, it is clear that for the social worker in the field of pediatric chronic illness, there

Chapter 5 Synthesis of Part 1 from: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Flaherty Tim
Abstract: The objective of this part of the study was to use the tools of ideal type, a “portrait,” to provide the background to examine both the ways in which conflicts of values are lived and the ways in which ethical decisions are made in long-term care units of pediatric hospitals. The most fruitful result of this documentary research has come as insightsinto the professional interaction of physicians, nurses and social workers. This interaction is considered on both intraprofessional and interprofessional levels.

Introduction to Part 2 from: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Melchin Kenneth R.
Abstract: Currently, health care practitioners who must wrestle with ethical issues in their daily work experience are confronted with a diversity of theories and principles in the field of ethics. Professionals do not have a standardized set of ethical tools and methods for deliberating and deciding on issues. Rather, they must choose among diverse sets of such tools. Furthermore, their own personal choices are never the last word. They must work with other professionals whose approaches to ethics are often quite different. These differences often give rise to conflicts. In health care institutions, these conflicts often must be resolved through discourse

Chapter 8 Value Conflicts in Health Care Teams from: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Monette Peter
Abstract: Conflicts among professionals in health care teams often involve differences over values. As was observed in part 1, these value differences are often implicit and are often related to the diverse ways in which professionals of different types understand themselves and their work. The field of conflict resolution has developed a range of insights into the dynamics of conflicts and a range of tools for helping disputants move toward resolution in situations of conflict. In this chapter we will examine some contributions from this field, particularly those contributions that lend themselves to better understanding value conflicts in health care contexts.

Conclusion to Part 2 from: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Melchin Kenneth R.
Abstract: Part 2 of this project began with a survey of literature in the field of discourse ethics. Chapter 6, by James Sauer, identified two main lines of theory in this field—the proceduralists and the contextualists—and provided preliminary arguments for the complementarity of the two. Chapter 7, by Kenneth R. Melchin, introduced the cognitional theory of Bernard Lonergan as an ethical framework for the project and drew upon insights from Lonergan scholarship to identify how proceduralists, contextualists and cognitional theorists can contribute to an understanding of ethical discourse in health care teams. The work of part 1 of the

Introduction to Part 3 from: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Melchin Kenneth R.
Abstract: Part 3 of this study takes the results of parts 1 and 2 and applies them to a case-study, action-research context. Two teams of health care professionals from Anglophone and Francophone pediatric chronic care institutional settings volunteered to participate in videotaped discussions of case studies involving ethical issues typically encountered in their work. These videos were then examined by the research team in the light of the analyses of parts 1 and 2. In keeping with the overall goals of this study, the observers focussed on the ethical deliberation process. We sought to determine whether insights from the implicit ethics

Chapter 9 Action Research on Ethical Deliberation from: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Monette Peter
Abstract: The work of the action research went forward with these two goals pursued concurrently. The members of the research team,

Chapter 11 Thinking About Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams from: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Melchin Kenneth R.
Abstract: The goal of this chapter is to stand back and reflect on the whole project, to ask about the overall framework that guided the research and developed through the project and to examine how this framework unified the various parts of the project. While the theoretical literature in ethics is massive and diverse, three central concerns guided the development of the theoretical framework.

CHAPTER 2 The Closure of Kant’s Problematic: from: Apperception, Knowledge, and Experience
Abstract: Kant’s central thesis is that the mind structures the sensible manifold, which is given to us under the a priori forms of space and time, into a public world of objects by synthesizing that manifold according to certain a priori rules. This thesis is supposed to defeat scepticism by providing a body of a priori laws that govern the structure of experience. These laws provide the conceptual framework within which all empirical cognition takes place. But they hold only of the phenomenal world and not of things as they may be in themselves and apart from the manner in which

The University’s New Clothes: from: Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Epp Juanita Ross
Abstract: The original call for papers for this book asked for accounts of success stories in feminizing Canadian institutions. When that request landed on my desk, I thought it must be a joke. There seemed to be too many oxymorons in those phrases: successful feminizing? feminized institutions? I work at a university. Entire books hâve been devoted to an examination of how thé “invisible paradigm of thé académie System...marginalize(s) or trivialize(s) thé lives of ail women...so effectively that we no longer see it, notice its présence, or, most important, name it for thé determining force that it is” (Schuster and Van

[PART II Introduction] from: Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Abstract: Linda Briskin’s article addresses thé topic of women and unions within économie parameters. She notes events from as early as 1981, and informs us about unions and feminist leaders across Canada. Exclusion from male-dominated executive boards and educational courses has been central to oppression of women in unions, particularly at national levels. In spite of thé introduction of affirmative action policy, Briskin recognizes that complex patterns of structural discrimination continue. A feminist leader in labour studies, she emphasizes thé importance of mutual support among union women at thé local level in achieving goals important for working women. Parsons and Goggins

Intersecting Multiple Sites of Marginalization: from: Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Goggins Starla
Abstract: I am a Black woman of West African and American cultural héritage. Having witnessed firsthand thé Détroit riots of thé late 1960s, my politics hâve been gready influenced by thé efforts of those involved in thé Civil Rights Movement. This history, in conjunction with my own expériences of racism within Canada, give me thé particular perspective which I bring to my activist work.

Dancing the Road to Success: from: Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Gordon Jane
Abstract: To most people, dance is a féminine art because women are thé majority of performers. However, dance as a performance art has its own genderbased hiérarchies. In contrast, thé dance group I studied is run largely by and for women and girls, and has been successful and effective in maintaining a structure which is inclusive, non-hierarchical, and appréciative of work donc by women, both paid and unpaid. It has sustained thèse patterns through thé twenty-odd years of its existence and through its expansion from a small, informai group of dancers to a large educational and cultural body in its community.

Alternatives to Hierarchy in Feminist Organizational Design: from: Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Laiken Marilyn E.
Abstract: Beyond management practices, which include issues of power and particular difficulty with thé rôle of executive director (Martin 1990; Ristock 1991), there seem to be many other obstacles to thé effective functioning of such organizations. Issues of class, gender, and ethnicity challenge increasingly multi-cultural and mixed économie workforces: “The attempt to replace

[PART V Introduction] from: Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Abstract: Feminist researchers Baukje Miedema and Nancy Clark describe thé lives of working-class women who choose to mother other peuples children. This paper leads to an interesting examination of thé family, with an exploration of mothering, childhood, and family relations. The New Brunswick foster mothers interviewed in this article must often use their own runds to meet thé needs of thé children in their care since state support is insufficient. Child care, including thé nurturing donc by thèse women, has little status in society. While thèse social relations oppress foster mothers and thé children they care for, thé authors report that

Implementing Principles: from: Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Rogerson Pat
Abstract: To nurture partners and networks.

Feminizing Social Welfare: from: Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Garrett Heather L.
Abstract: The formation of womens organisations was a widespread phenomenon in thé mid-nineteenth century. Many of thèse womens groups began in churches and were committed to charity work. It has been argued that toward thé end of thé nineteenth century, there was an increase in womens organizations committed to social reform (Baines 1988). Some womens groups which hâve been studied are thé Young Women's Christian Association (YWCA), thé Womens Christian Tempérance Union (WCTU), and thé National Council of thé Women of Canada (NCWC). Historians connect thé groups’ émergence with a séries of fundamental changes in thé late nineteenth century: thé entry

Conclusion The Faces of Feminist Change—Les multiples visages du changement féministe from: Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Kirby Sandra
Abstract: In thé preceding chapter, we hâve analyzed what constitutes success in making feminist change. Our analysis has shown that, although some authors emphasize certain thèmes more than others, each authors work contributes in some way to our understanding of ail thé identified thèmes. In other words, there is a shared understanding of how feminism is defined across many Canadian constituencies. At thé same time, thé constituencies represented in this book vary by bodily condition/disability/ability, geographical location, class, race, âge, and ethnicity. Thus, while there is a shared sensé of what feminism is, it is not surprising to find that feminist

INTRODUCTION from: Myth, Symbol, and Colonial Encounter
Abstract: This book is unabashedly concerned with the well-trod issue of native–white relations in Canada. I admit that the theme may be at best fashionable, at worst overworked; yet it remains that a great deal has yet to be said on the subject. My hope is that there might be some constructive value in approaching the issue from what will no doubt appear to be a less conventional perspective. The perspective I am suggesting is that of religion, and its value lies, I hope, in its potential for creatively confronting a problem of community that plagues Canadian society. I would

CONCLUSION from: Myth, Symbol, and Colonial Encounter
Abstract: I began this inquiry by noting that one or another form of alienation appears to have been the experience of all Acadia’s peoples. The bulk of this work has concerned itself with a search for the historical roots of alienation, but it may not have constituted a historical analysis in any familiar sense of the term, since it has consciously focussed upon human religiosity as that which gives meaning to history. History, like religion, is very much a product of the scholar’s own historical context as well as of the scholar’s purpose for writing. In that sense, this historical work

Book Title: Roman Ingarden's Ontology and Aesthetics- Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): KLIBANSKY Raymond
Abstract: A leading Polish philosopher of the 20th century, Roman Ingarden is principally renowned in Western culture for his work in aesthetics and the theory of literature. Jeff Mitscherling demonstrates, in this extensive work, how Ingarden's thought constitutes a major contribution to the more fundamental fields of ontology and metaphysics. Unparalleled in existing literature, Mitscherling's comprehensive survey of Ingarden's philosophy will give the reader an informed introduction to this major work of phenomenological analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cn6sd9

FOREWORD from: Roman Ingarden's Ontology and Aesthetics
Author(s) Klibansky Raymond
Abstract: Dr. Mitscherling provides the first comprehensive monograph on the life and the works of a philosopher who in Germany and in his native Poland has long been known as a thinker of marked originality. Now that several of Roman Ingarden’s writings have become available in English translations and that his distinguished pupil Anna-Teresa Tymieniecka has published some essays on him, his thought is attracting growing interest both in Europe and in North America.

INTRODUCTION from: Roman Ingarden's Ontology and Aesthetics
Abstract: The basic claim of this book is twofold: (1) that we are not in a position accurately to interpret and evaluate Ingarden’s studies in aesthetics until we place them within the framework provided by his realist ontological position as a whole, and (2) that, conversely, we cannot fully appreciate the force of Ingarden’s arguments in his ‘non-aesthetic’ epistemological and ontological investigations—such as we find in his magnum opus, The Controversy Over the Existence of the World¹—without understanding how Ingarden intended his studies in aesthetics to provide those investigations, and his own position with regard to the idealism/realism debate,

CHAPTER THREE CONTROVERSY OVER THE EXISTENCE OF THE WORLD from: Roman Ingarden's Ontology and Aesthetics
Abstract: While Danuta Gierulanka correctly remarks that Ingarden’s Controversy“came about in a spirit of opposition to Husserl’s idealism,” and that Ingarden began the preparatory work for Controversy in 1925,¹ he had, in a sense, begun this work as early as July 1918, when he wrote the ‘idealism letter’ to Husserl (discussed in Chapter 2). Indeed, he writes in that letter that “the problem of Idealism,” whichControversyis devoted to treating, had “tormented [him] already several years.”² Ingarden’s relationship to Husserl, like his entire philosophical career, seems to have revolved around that problem:³

CHAPTER FOUR THE LITERARY WORK OF ART from: Roman Ingarden's Ontology and Aesthetics
Abstract: Although the main subject of my investigations is the literary work, or the literary work of art, the ultimate motives for my work on this subject are of a general philosophical nature, and they far transcend this particular subject. They are closely connected to the problem of idealism-realism, with which I have been concerning myself for many years.

CHAPTER SIX INGARDEN AND CONTEMPORARY AESTHETICS from: Roman Ingarden's Ontology and Aesthetics
Abstract: As I shall be explaining in Sections B and C below, Ingarden’s analyses of the ontology of art provide both a strong foundation and a powerful tool that could be employed in current research in aesthetics and theory of art.¹ The operative expression here, however, is ‘could be’, for Ingarden’s work has exerted surprisingly little influence on the contemporary scene.² Zhang Jin-Yan, speaking of the influence of Ingarden’s analyses of the literary work on contemporary literary criticism, accurately sums up the situation regarding his influence in general:

Book Title: A Theology for the Earth-The Contributions of Thomas Berry and Bernard Lonergan
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): DALTON ANNE MARIE
Abstract: While many feel that something must be done, few perceive the state of the ecological crisis as a "profound religious problem." While Thomas Berry sought to fire the imagination and motivate his listener to action, Bernard Lonergan was absorbed by the growing gulf between traditional Christian theology and its relevance to modern problems. This book brings together the work of these dynamic thinkers and examines their mutual contribution to theology for our time and for our planet.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cn6smd

FOREWORD from: A Theology for the Earth
Author(s) Berry Thomas
Abstract: I have seldom reflected on the epistemological or critical implications of my writings. Thus it is a special delight to read these pages of Anne Marie Dalton. They give me insights into my own thinking that I have seldom thought about in any conscious manner. It is particularly helpful to have her reflections done in the context of the epistemological and theological work of Bernard Lonergan. She is quite correct in understanding my work in terms of Lonergan’s notion of Descriptive Discourse, for my intent has been simply to present and to leave the reader to respond out of whatever

CHAPTER ONE THE METHOD AND TRADITION OF BERRY’S CULTURAL HISTORY from: A Theology for the Earth
Abstract: Berry wrote his dissertation on Giambattista Vico. Even a cursory look at the work on Vico is enlightening in clarifying the significance of Berry’s self-designation as

CHAPTER FOUR THE INFLUENCE OF MODERN SCIENCE from: A Theology for the Earth
Abstract: Given the nature of the genetic development of Berry’s thought, it is no surprise that Berry’s interest in science was primarily in scientific critiques of mainstream post-Enlightenment scientific methodology. While he always maintained a respect for many of the contributions of Western science, he relied especially in his own work on scientists who tested new waters and were often only tentatively accepted by the established scientific community. He considered these scientists to give credibility to the counter-Enlightenment traditions that he upheld. His overriding interest remained cultural; therefore, his questions for science were concerned with the cultural assumptions and effects of

CHAPTER SIX BERNARD LONERGAN AND EMERGENT PROBABILITY from: A Theology for the Earth
Abstract: The previous chapters have been an attempt to understand Berry’s response to the ecological crisis in the context of the genetic development of his thought and under the horizon that attracted him in the later years of his work. In moving the horizon to Christian theology, we move beyond the question of what Berry himself meant or intended to the further question, What aspects of his work are going forward with respect to a reform of Christian theology in the light of the ecological crisis? Bernard Lonergan’s compelling and inclusive account of emergent probability is especially suited as a framework

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS from: A Theology for the Earth
Abstract: This work originated in a desire to discover the relationship between two urgencies of our times. The first was the ecological crisis and the second, the reform of Christian theology. The preliminary, largely untested insights that moved the project into actuality were that (1) as Thomas Berry had loudly and clearly proclaimed, the ecological crisis was also religious; it had religious roots and it required a religious solution, and (2) a theology that did not serve to increase hope in the possibility of authentically negotiating the major crises of our time had already died. Bernard Lonergan seemed to corroborate this

Introduction: from: Future Indicative
Author(s) MOSS JOHN
Abstract: Future Indicative: Literary Theory and Canadian Literature. University of Ottawa Symposium. April 25 to 27, 1986. The title worked well—as a rubric under which to gather; as a non-proscriptive label of activities; as a summary of the symposium’s achievement. As a book title it works well, too. The implications it carries of change, commitment, and the prophetic are, perhaps, even more appropriate to a book.

The Reader as Actor in the Novels of Timothy Findley from: Future Indicative
Author(s) SEDDON ELIZABETH
Abstract: When the novelist experiments with narrative techniques the reader, necessarily, becomes actively engaged in the process of discerning patterns and perceiving meanings. Within the context of reader response theory this paper explores the narrative layering in the novels of Timothy Findley and the structuring of texts that consciously anticipate the role of the reader. Implicit in this reading of Findley’s work is a tripartite model of reader response theory that includes a self-consciously constructing writer, a self-referentially deconstructing reader, and the enigmatic text of their mutual exchange. While the theory of the reader’s response has tended to be based on

GETTING TRANSLATED: from: Europe et traduction
Author(s) Pym Anthony
Abstract: “The gréât Panama Canal to France has been opened...” Thus wrote Nietzsche to his friend Heinrich Kôselitz (Peter Gast) on 22 December 1888, jubilant at thé prospect of having his works translated into French. The translations would be an opening of some importance, not just a contact between océans but apparently also an avenue of escape from thé frustrations of writing in German for Germans. The move would make Nietzsche a properly European writer. And this enthusiasm coincided, at thé end of 1888, with thé date announced for thé first passage through thé Panama Canal. Yet history was not quite

Jesus and Pilate: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Carter Warren
Abstract: Might explicit attention to John’s presentation of the scene between Pilate and Jesus contain some historical data of significance for understanding the historical Jesus’s death and life’s work and for answering questions about why jesus was killed by crucifixion (see fredriksen 2007 and powell 2007a)?

Story, Plot, and History in the Johannine Passion Narrative from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Zumstein Jean
Abstract: Both narrative analysis as practiced by paul ricoeur (1983–1985) and the new approach to history as seen in Hayden White (1999) have emphasized the decisive hermeneutical role of plot in the construction of a story. In particular, the shaping of the plot in historiographical works allows the narrator to structure and contextualize the story and place it in a certain perspective (Bauckham 2007a; Luz 2009; Schmeller 2009). The creation of the plot is a central moment in the creation of meaning.

The Works of Jesus in John: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Anderson Paul N.
Abstract: The works of Jesus are described in a number of ways in the canonical Gospels. Some of them are common to John and the Synoptics, while others are only in the Synoptics or only in John. John’s riddles include the fact that many of the Synoptic features of Jesus’s works are missing from John: Jesus’s baptism, his temptation in the wilderness, calling twelve disciples, exorcisms, healing lepers and women, dining with sinners, tax collectors, and Pharisees, sending out disciples on service trips, ministering in Nazareth, feeding the four thousand, the transfiguration on the mount, and making a long and momentous

Jesus in Relation to John “the Testifier” and not “the Baptizer”: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Webb Robert L.
Abstract: The Fourth Gospel presents a distinctive picture of John the Baptist in relation to Jesus. This essay is a high-level overview of this distinctive picture, with the purpose of considering to what extent and with what level of probability elements of this picture may be judged historical. The focus of the Society of Biblical Literature John, Jesus, and History Group at this point in its research agenda is on the works of Jesus, and so that is the focus of this essay. It does require us, however, to begin more broadly and also examine the fourth Gospel’s picture of John

The Signs in the Gospel of John from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Schnelle Udo
Abstract: The Johannine miracle stories are of decisive importance for the interpretation of Johannine Christology, because, according to John 10:41, the working of signs is the distinguishing feature of Jesus as Messiah. Moreover, the miraculous signs are extremely important for an understanding that the Gospel as a whole, since πcιεϊν σημεϊα (“doing signs”) marks the beginning (2:11), the turning point (12:37), and the end (20:30) of Jesus’s activity in the Gospel of John. Only John tells his readers how they are to understand the miracles/signs: “Now Jesus did many other signs in the presence of the disciples, which are not written

Siloam, Bethesda, and the Johannine Water Motif from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Burge Gary M.
Abstract: The recent discovery of the Second Temple Siloam Pool in Jerusalem has drawn marked interest from the archaeology community, but it also bears important implications for our work in the historicity of the Fourth Gospel. The connection between John and Siloam is well known and was summarized in the John, Jesus, and History Group of the Society of Biblical Literature in 2005 by Urban von Wahlde.¹ In John 9 Jesus heals a blind man, places a mud plaster on his eyes, and then tells him to “go wash in the pool of Siloam.” For John, as every commentary will report,

John, Jesus, and Virtuoso Religion from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Ling Tim
Abstract: In November 2009, somewhere over the Atlantic Ocean on a flight to Dallas International Airport, I found myself having a conversation with a fellow passenger. She was returning home from Northern Sudan, where she had been working for an aid organization. She told me about the profound restrictions on the freedom of women to participate in any form of public life that for her characterized life in Sudan. She also, without noting the irony, told me about her work, which involved leading project teams and advocacy, including liaising with local political leaders. Her experience was both real and exceptional. We

The Aphorisms of Jesus in the Fourth Gospel: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Bridges Linda McKinnish
Abstract: The literary genre “aphorism” finds full expression in the Gospel of John. Vestiges of the world of orality, aphorisms invite intense reflection and response as they illumine not only the literary landscape of the Gospel but also provide a lens for viewing Jesus tradition in the Gospel of John. This study is indebted to the research of John Dominic Crossan, author of In Fragments(1983), who has written the definitive work on the aphorisms of Jesus in the Synoptics. More exploration, however, is needed on the aphorisms of Jesus in John’s Gospel. Although the aphorisms of Jesus in John were

Observations on God’s Agent and Agency in John 5–9: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Borgen Peder
Abstract: The Gospel of John is the product of expository activity. The most important components are the life of Jesus and the scriptures, transmitted as traditions and subject to applications and other forms of interpretation. The expository activity followed certain methods. Thus a dynamic process was at work, so that the metaphor of “biology” seems more adequate than the metaphor of “anatomy” (Culpepper 1983) as a descriptor for the Fourth Gospel’s character and structure.

CHAPTER 1 All Theologians Are Philosophers, Whether Knowingly or Not from: Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) MOREROD CHARLES
Abstract: Theologians have many debts of gratitude owed to the life and prodigious work of Professor Ralph McInerny. He called attention to the need for a genuinely philosophical formation for any theologian committed to the truth of our Catholic faith and teaching. In this he was echoing many a papal warning.

CHAPTER NINE Tunc scimus cum causas cognoscimus: from: Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) BELLAMAH TIMOTHY
Abstract: At the outset of the Metaphysics, Aristotle says that “all men suppose what is called wisdom (sophia) to deal with the first causes (aitia) and the principles (archai) of things,” and that it is these causes and principles that he proposes to study in this work.¹ During the thirteenth century the recent recovery of Aristotle’s works of natural philosophy (Physics, Metaphysics, De anima, Meteora), resulted in an evolution of the understanding of causality, which in turn resulted in remarkable developments in biblical interpretation.² Especially at the universities of Paris and Oxford commentators reevaluated conventional anthropological presuppositions and reassessed the human

CHAPTER SIXTEEN Charles De Koninck and Aquinas’s Doctrine of the Common Good from: Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) PRAEM O
Abstract: Charles De Koninck taught Prof. McInerny at the University of Laval in Quebec in the mid-1950s, and (as those of us who knew him can attest) McInerny considered himself a disciple of De Koninck. In later years, McInerny would express ever-increasing gratitude to De Koninck for the formation he received in Thomistic thought, and was even responsible for editing and publishing the works of his former teacher as an expression of his gratitude.

CHAPTER SEVENTEEN Reading Aquinas’s Commentary on Aristotle’s Nicomachean Ethics: from: Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) KACZOR CHRISTOPHER
Abstract: Numerous questions arise in connection with St. Thomas Aquinas’s commentaries on Aristotle. Aquinas devoted a great deal of time to these commentaries through his professional responsibilities focused on commenting on Scripture. In terms of overall volume, they constitute about 13 percent of his entire corpus, roughly matching the 13.5 percent of the opera omniadevoted to commenting on the Bible. Should these works be construed as theology or philosophy? What were Aquinas’s goals in writing them? Were they notes in preparation for writing the moral parts of theSumma theologiae?Were they expositions to provide his brother Dominicans a guide

8 Women’s Virtue, Church Leadership, and the Problem of Gender Complementarity from: Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Tiemeier Tracy Sayuki
Abstract: Recently, I was asked how a thinking woman could be Catholic. The question threw me—not because I had never been asked that before (indeed, I have been asked the question many times), but because it was a prominent Christian leader whose work focused on collaborating with Catholic communities who had asked the question. Although he knew many “thinking women” who were Catholic, he still did not understand how we could stay Catholic.

10 What Child Is This? from: Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Bidlack Bede Benjamin
Abstract: Comparative theology begins with reading across religious bound aries until the reader finds a doctrine—or a practice, trope, or work of art—that resonates with his or her own faith. Close study disturbs the theologian’s categories and presuppositions. Usually, such a disturbance results in the expansion of a category, its rediscovery, or simply the growth of the reader. Such is the supposed path of the theological explorer.

15 Salvation in the After-Living: from: Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Rambo Shelly
Abstract: Leafing through introductory textbooks in Christian systematic theology, you will find discussions of salvation located in multiple places—under the topics of Christology (the nature and work of Christ), the “other” religions, and eschatology, the study of last or final things. Insofar as these primers orient elementary readers into knowledge of Christian faith, they set out the major points for theological discussion and debate. Eschatology often becomes the major landing point for discussions of salvation because the question of salvation is often framed in terms of ultimate ends. Under the doctrine of eschatology, soteriological discussions will circle around Jesus’s saying,

Foreword from: Beyond Bali
Author(s) Herzfeld Michael
Abstract: What happens when a minority group in a fraught, conflict-ridden colony finds itself a distrusted entity within the new nation-state, its sacrifices in the cause of national independence swept aside by suspicions that its members are not loyal to the emergent realities of majority rule? What happens when its members intermarry with the hated colonizers, or flee to the colonizers’ European land in search of work? What do terms like heritage and history mean to them, against the background drumbeat of an increasingly fierce nationalism?

1 Kebalian, Long-Distance Nationalism, and the Balinese Left in Exile from: Beyond Bali
Abstract: Early Saturday morning on 24 January 2004, I took a tram to Slotermeer, a neighbourhood located in the western part of Amsterdam. For the first time in my fieldwork, I was on my way to attend the Galungan-Kuningan, a pan-Balinese festival that takes place once every 210 days according to the Balineseukucalendar.¹ This festival celebrates the victory of virtue (dharma) over evil (adharma). In Bali, celebrations ofGalungan-Kuningantake place at all temples, accompanied with particularly rich offerings.Galunganis the first day of the ten-day festival during which it is believed that deities and ancestral spirits descend

Book Title: Analogies of Transcendence- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): FIELDS STEPHEN M.
Abstract: The problem of nature and grace lies at the heart of Christian theology. No dimension of divine revelation can be addressed without implicitly drawing reference to this issue.Analogies of Transcendence focuses on the central role that the analogies of being and faith play in developing a solution to the problem. These link God, as self-manifesting transcendence, to the human person as both fallen and justified, and to the material cosmos. Although the proposed solution draws on the work of Maréchal, de Lubac, Balthasar, and Rahner, it criticizes their approach for its underdeveloped analogies that diminish nature in grace's engagement with it. In redressing this weakness, Fr. Fields adapts its solution to the intellectual struggle of our time. This volume examines the origins and structure of modernity, which, it asserts, has not been superseded and is therefore critical of'‘postmodernism,' as well as of some ambiguous legacies of Thomism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d8hbbv

Chapter 2 ATTEMPTED REUNIONS from: Analogies of Transcendence
Abstract: We have seen that Dei Verbumexpansively recapitulates medieval exegesis. Building on the letter as the intrinsic symbol of the spirit, it understands divine revelation as a system of continuous symbols that join together Christ, his words and works, the apostolic tradition of the church, and the written scriptures and their interpretation. Whenever a synthesis is grounded in symbolism, its aesthetic dimension cannot help but be invoked. Heidegger reminds us, for instance, that symbolism constitutes the essence of art.¹ In the creative fashioning of an artifact, truth itself is preserved as beauty. Accordingly, if the Son is the Father’s image,

Chapter 3 RECENT WEDDING from: Analogies of Transcendence
Abstract: Influenced by recent efforts to reunite nature and grace, the thought of Popes John Paul II and Benedict XVI seizes on the harmonious interpenetration of both orders. Exploiting the creative tension between these orders, the pontiffs expound a paradox: nature realizes its own autonomy only when it mediates a higher synthesis. A theme thus uniting their work concerns nature as grace’s sacrament. In John Paul, this theme undergirds the reciprocity between faith and reason and guides his reflections on the eucharist. In Benedict, nature understood as grace’s sacrament structures the relation between justice and charity. In developing this relation, the

AFTERWORD from: Analogies of Transcendence
Abstract: If this modest work has achieved its purpose, it has indicated the need, within the human person’s single graced end, for a robust concept of nature. Although weakened, it can be rebuilt, we have argued, by developing a better understanding of the complex analogies that constitute its relation with its partner. We have also argued that the sacramental model constituted by these analogies can address modernity. Moreover, in the essay’s last part, we have shown how this model can deepen insights into several of Christianity’s perennial problems: the doctrine of God, God’s relation with the world, and the relation of

Book Title: The Event-Literature and Theory
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): ROWNER ILAI
Abstract: Rowner offers a new method of thinking about the particular characteristics of the event within literary works and defines the creative value of literature as the aspiration toward the un-happening within the happening. In this study the experience of literature-as an act of both writing and reading-becomes the struggle to capture the excessive movement of the event while also revealing the creative energy within that work of literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d9nk7w

1 Introduction: from: The Event
Abstract: The central objective of this book is to reconsider the concept of the eventfrom a philosophical vantage point, and with special reference to the literary text. Through the study of Heidegger, Blanchot, Derrida, and Deleuze, this book will suggest a method of thinking about the event of the literary work, both by examining the fundamental question of the literary creation and by providing the conditions for a different approach to literary criticism. The termeventwill be defined here as any irregular occurrence, real or fictional, that has effectively and obviously come about. At the same time, it is

4 Maurice Blanchot: from: The Event
Abstract: While Heidegger takes a general ontological perspective, Blanchot deals with the question of the event as an interrogation that mainly concerns the being of literature. Language is no longer the channel through which Being and man come to belong to one another; the fictive essence of language according to Blanchot deprives the subject of self and robs the real of sense. If Heidegger regards poetry as a truthful principle that is the source and foundation of man’s dwelling, Blanchot assigns it an illusory principle that affects both the experience of the writer and the written work itself. Thus the event

5 Jacques Derrida: from: The Event
Abstract: Derrida is evidently a Blanchotian philosopher. While continuing to affirm Heidegger’s influence, he radicalizes, through Levinas, the thought of differencein order to methodologically establish the condition for a “science of the singular.” Here, the thinking of the event and its challenge to modern existence must first of all takes the shape of a concrete and dramaticperformanceof writing: to write in the limits and in the margins of thinking so that the making of the work itself testifies to the subversive powers at play when the grounds of thinking come under question. Indeed, Heidegger and Blanchot can be

Why Ethos? from: Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: Houellebecq’s work and persona provide for a book like mine almost too good a case.¹ Let me explain what I mean through some brief comments on Atomised, the author’s breakthrough novel, and its reception.²Atomisedtells the story of two half brothers, Bruno and Michel, left to the care of their grandparents by their mother, who went off to discover the thrills and deceptions of self-actualization, spurred by the spirit of May 1968 in France. While Bruno is obsessed with sex, which brings him more solitary suffering than pleasure, Michel, just as lonely and desperate, withdraws into the realm of

[PART 1. Introduction] from: Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: The question of how and why readers would attribute an ethos to literary characters, narrators, or authors is part of the more general issue of how people make meaning from and with texts. Within the humanities, such issues are traditionally the province of hermeneutics, which encompasses the theory, the method (or the “art”), and the practice of interpreting texts. Alternately, interpretations and their underlying processes are studied from the perspective of literary and aesthetic phenomenology, the sociology of literature, discourse analysis, the reception history of literary works ( Wirkungsgeschichte), or empirical research on actual readers’ responses. Current literary and narrative studies

1 Literary Interpretation, Ethos Attributions, and the Negotiation of Values in Culture from: Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: The following chapter brings together insights from different theoretical frameworks. My intention is not, however, to suggest that such an eclectic juxtaposition amounts to a theory. My aim is, rather, to point out between these quite different frameworks transversal echoes that shed fresh light on narrative, interpretation, and in particular, ethos attributions. While this chapter’s wide-angle perspective seems to lead us away from the more concrete issue of ethos attribution in the context of literary narratives, it actually speaks to the broader relevance of my study, explaining why it is important to debate the authenticity of James Frey’s narrator or

2 Ethos as a Social Construction: from: Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: Who or what determines the credit granted to Houellebecq’s work and to himself, as a writer? Is it appropriate to ask about the sincerity or authority of his novel’s denunciation of the rotten state of Western culture? What clues would we have to answer this question, or does trust come before the clues? What is the role in such an ethos attribution of clues derived from an author’s public image? Drawing on a combination of approaches and models, this chapter engages with the social fabrication of meaning and the literary value of narratives and with the role of authorial ethos

[PART 2. Introduction] from: Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: The controversy surrounding frey’s A Million Little Pieces, sparked by his passing off as factually correct and honest a memoir that rather creatively invented its truth, raises some central questions. What might the consequences be of framing a work as fiction, or rather as (to some extent) factual, and of experiencing our reading of such a novel as a communication with a fictional character, or rather with a narrator, or even an author? In what respect would our ethos attribution change? What made readers expect Frey to be authentic and truthful in his narration of his character’s tribulations? Can and

4 Key Concepts Revised: from: Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: Should the debunkers of Frey’s “fraud” have done their narratological homework better? Would any of the current branches of narratology, each of which claims to analyze how we make meaning from narrative texts, have helped explain the bewilderment that for some readers, like Oprah, followed from Frey’s exposure? Perhaps, to the extent that narratologies offer heuristic procedures and concepts to tease out stances conveyed in narratives. Not really, or not yet, because narratology, though concentrating on textual features, insufficiently takes into account the conventions through which these features are invested with narrative functionality and meaning.

Book Title: Anthropologists and Their Traditions across National Borders- Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): GLEACH FREDERIC W.
Abstract: Volume 8 of the Histories of Anthropology Annual series, the premier series published in the history of the discipline, explores national anthropological traditions in Britain, the United States, and Europe and follows them into postnational contexts. Contributors reassess the major theorists in twentieth-century anthropology, including the work of luminaries such as Franz Boas, Claude Lévi-Strauss, Bronisław Malinowski, A. R. Radcliffe-Brown, and Marshall Sahlins, as well as lesser-known but important anthropological work by Berthold Laufer, A. M. Hocart, Kenelm O. L. Burridge, and Robin Ridington, among others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d9nmkj

2 A. M. Hocart: from: Anthropologists and Their Traditions across National Borders
Author(s) LAUGHLIN CHARLES D.
Abstract: Arthur Maurice Hocart (1883–1939), better known as A.M. Hocart, was a British sociocultural anthropologist living and working in the same era as A.R. Radcliffe-Brown and Bronislaw Malinowski. Yet despite his extensive ethnographic fieldwork, scientific sophistication, and prolific writings, his legacy is far less known than his more famous contemporaries. Indeed, Thomas O. Beidelman (1972) referred to Hocart as a “neglected master,” and Meyer Fortes (1967) spoke of him as a “neglected pioneer.” An accomplished master he was, being far more scholarly, experienced, and methodologically and theoretically astute in his explanations than the functionalist accounts of either Malinowski or Radcliffe-Brown.

4 Radcliffe-Brown and “Applied Anthropology” at Cape Town and Sydney from: Anthropologists and Their Traditions across National Borders
Author(s) CAMPBELL IAN
Abstract: A. R. Radcliffe-Brown (1881–1955) was one of the founders of modern social anthropology. His published output was not large, but it was influential. His reputation was probably greater through his teaching and personal contacts, for he was a compelling lecturer with an apparently powerful and attractive personality. The extent of his fieldwork is compared unfavorably with that of his contemporary, Bronislaw Malinowski (though Malinowski’s only sustained experience of fieldwork was his enforced stay in the Trobriands). Hence Radcliffe-Brown is known mainly as a theorist, not as an ethnographer, and as an advocate of pure research grounded in the scientific

10 Anthropologists as Perpetrators and Perpetuators of Oral Tradition: from: Anthropologists and Their Traditions across National Borders
Author(s) FLYNN LINDY-LOU
Abstract: The discipline of anthropology is abundant with narratives by and about anthropologists, their unique research projects, their academic philosophies, and their theoretical approaches or contributions. I present here an unpublished 1988 student assignment as a conduit for my ideas on the value of oral tradition in the anthropology classroom, the construction of anthropological kinship networks, and the ways in which both anthropology professors and their students have persisted in telling and retelling the histories of anthropology over time. The 1988 paper incorporates some of my audio recorded lectures of Professors Kenelm O.L. Burridge and Robin Ridington at the University of

Book Title: Artifacts and Illuminations-Critical Essays on Loren Eiseley
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska Paperback
Author(s): MAHER SUSAN N.
Abstract: As a writer who bridged the sciences and the humanities, Eiseley is a challenge for scholars locked into rigid disciplinary boundaries. Artifacts and Illuminations, the first full-length collection of critical essays on the writing of Eiseley, situates his work in the genres of creative nonfiction and nature writing. The contributing scholars apply a variety of critical approaches, including ecocriticism and place-oriented studies ranging across prairie, urban, and international contexts. Contributors explore such diverse topics as Eiseley's use of anthropomorphism and Jungian concepts and examine how his work was informed by synecdoche. Long overdue, this collection demonstrates Eiseley's continuing relevance as both a skilled literary craftsman and a profound thinker about the human place in the natural world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d9nqjg

6 “The Borders between Us”: from: Artifacts and Illuminations
Author(s) LYNCH TOM
Abstract: Loren Eiseley’s literary reputation today rests almost exclusively on the significance of his nonfiction nature essays, which deservedly stand as influential exemplars of creative nonfiction science and nature writing. However, in his early years as an undergraduate at the University of Nebraska, Eiseley had the reputation as an important and promising poet, and he published poetry in a range of literary journals. Most notably, his work appeared in the earliest editions of Prairie Schooner, whose editorial staff he joined in 1927, the year after it began publication. And, not limited to his own school’s journal, he published in a variety

9 The Spirit of Synecdoche: from: Artifacts and Illuminations
Author(s) CASON JACQUELINE
Abstract: The way we read the past shapes our present and future, and the genius of Loren Eiseley’s evolutionary metaphors remains relevant to current cultural and ecological issues. William Zinsser describes the sixties as the “golden era of nonfiction” (56). Eiseley’s books sold well after World War II, when the reading public developed an appetite for works that dealt directly with reality, preferring nonfiction to novels and short stories. W. H. Auden read everything of Eiseley’s he could lay his hands on (15). Yet in spite of a loyal and diverse following, Eiseley has yet to receive critical attention commensurate with

12 Epic Narratives of Evolution: from: Artifacts and Illuminations
Author(s) MERCIER STEPHEN
Abstract: In 1961 Loren Eiseley was awarded the prestigious John Burroughs Medal for The Firmament of Time, joining the ranks of distinguished authors of natural history such as Ernest Thompson Seton, Rachel Carson, Joseph Wood Krutch, and Roger Tory Peterson. Indeed, both Burroughs (1837–1921) and Eiseley (1907–77) belong to a long list of writers who imaginatively delve into environmental explorations, forging connections to ecological and evolutionary dynamics. Surely, their writings cannot escape influences from a long history of previous nature works, from Gilbert White’s discursive firsthand observations on his beloved Selbourne, to Charles Darwin’s profound theories of evolution, to

Book Title: Writing at the Limit-The Novel in the New Media Ecology
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): PUNDAY DANIEL
Abstract: By examining how some of our best fiction writers have taken up the challenge of film, television, video games, and hypertext, Daniel Punday offers an enlightening look into the current status of such fundamental narrative concepts as character, plot, and setting. He considers well-known postmodernists like Thomas Pynchon and Robert Coover, more-accessible authors like Maxine Hong Kingston and Oscar Hijuelos, and unjustly overlooked writers like Susan Daitch and Kenneth Gangemi, and asks how their works investigate the nature and limits of print as a medium for storytelling.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d9nr4r

4 Writing Beyond the Media Limit? from: Writing at the Limit
Abstract: The contemporary novelists whose works we examined in the previous chapter have approached the limit of what the novel can do. Gangemi’s use of film, Coover’s use of television, or Daitch’s use of comics each contemplated another medium and then turned back to the novel the wiser. It should go without saying that another way to respond to these limits is to leave writing and move on to another medium. Some have done so for purely financial reasons, like William Faulkner’s writing for Hollywood in the 1930s and ’40s, while others have seen in another medium aesthetic possibilities, like William

Book Title: Contemporary Comics Storytelling- Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): KUKKONEN KARIN
Abstract: Applying a cognitive approach to reading comics in all their narrative richness and intricacy, Contemporary Comics Storytellingopens an intriguing perspective on how these works engage the legacy of postmodernism-its subversion, self-reflexivity, and moral contingency. Its three case studies trace how contemporary comics tie into deep traditions of visual and verbal storytelling, how they reevaluate their own status as fiction, and how the fictional minds of their characters generate complex ethical thought experiments. At a time when the medium is taken more and more seriously as intricate and compelling literary art, this book lays the groundwork for an analysis of the ways in which comics challenge and engage readers' minds. It brings together comics studies with narratology and literary criticism and, in so doing, provides a new set of tools for evaluating the graphic novel as an emergent literary form.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ddr8c6

1 How to Analyze Comics Cognitively from: Contemporary Comics Storytelling
Abstract: The first Sunday installment of Milton Caniff’s Steve Canyonseries (1947–88) presents readers with a formidable density of narrative information: from patterns of black and white on the page, readers can construct an entire story. They identify characters, understand what motivates them and how they relate to each other, and connect their actions and words into a narrative. How does this process work? And how can we harness insights into the cognitive processes involved when reading comics for analyzing them? Milton Caniff, one of the comics authors who set the standards for storytelling in the medium in the 1930s

4 Interview with Ernest Wichner from: Herta Müller
Author(s) Brandt Bettina
Abstract: Ernest Wichner (b. 1952, Guttenbrunn, Romania) is a founding member of the Aktionsgruppe Banat. Wichner left Romania in 1975 and has been living in Berlin ever since. He is a writer, translator, and editor, and he has served as the director of the Literaturhaus (Literary Institute, Berlin) since 2003. In 2004, Wichner accompanied Herta Müller and the poet Oskar Pastior on a research trip to the Ukraine, where they visited the remainders of a campsite to which Pastior had been deported in 1945 and where he worked as a forced laborer until 1949. The interview was conducted in German via

7 Facts, Fiction, Autofiction, and Surfiction in Herta Müller’s Work from: Herta Müller
Author(s) Bozzi Paola
Abstract: Over the last fifteen years the emergence of groundbreaking work on trauma in literature and critical theory has made a profound impact both within and beyond the field of literature. This cutting-edge research has been applied to Herta Müller’s work by scholars such as Beverley Driver Eddy, Brigid Haines, and Lyn Marven, who have connected images and strategies of fragmentation and disruption with trauma theory. Müller surely represents and reflects upon the traumatic events of twentiethcentury Europe, as well as the cultural diversity of East Central Europe; she feels compelled to write about them (Glajar 2) and to show her

9 “Wir können höchstens mit dem, was wir sehen, etwas zusammenstellen”: from: Herta Müller
Author(s) Eddy Beverley Driver
Abstract: There have been many attempts to decipher Müller’s collages; many of them, like Leitner’s, concentrating on the texts and largely ignoring the artworks that accompany them.² Some note the similarities in appearance between her collage texts and those

12 Herta Müller’s Art of Reverberation: from: Herta Müller
Author(s) Rotaru Arina
Abstract: Herta Müller belongs to a generation of ethnic German writers born in Romania who were influenced by the rhetoric of the Aktionsgruppe Banat, a group that combined experimentation with realism. Among the influences on the Aktionsgruppe Banat, dismembered by the Romanian Securitate in 1975, critics count Franz Kafka, the surrealists, konkrete Poesie, the theater of the absurd,le nouveau roman, and New American lyric and pop art (Sterbling 75; Spiridon 75, 210, 214). Müller uses experimental literary techniques such as collage and montage, primarily as inherent components of her idiosyncratic verse. In this way, her work invokes multiple literary traditions

1 Should Translation Work Take Place? from: Born in the Blood
Author(s) Dyck Carrie
Abstract: For many First Nations communities, translation represents a “sea change”: while all languages are passed on through word of mouth, only a subset of languages have writing systems, and even fewer are regularly translated. Many First Nations languages (and many other languages) are primarily oral; writing and translation are recent additions. Writing, literacy, and translation work potentially leads to great changes in a language community, and their introduction raises a host of ethical questions.

2 Reading a Dictionary: from: Born in the Blood
Author(s) Leavitt Robert M.
Abstract: When I sat down to proofread the thousands of entries in A Passamaquoddy-Maliseet Dictionary¹ (Francis and Leavitt 2008), I expected to endure a long, tedious chore, compensated only by seeing the broad scope of the words David A. Francis and I, working with dozens of Passamaquoddy and Maliseet contributors, had compiled. But an unexpected pleasure awaited. In the words themselves and the example sentences, the Passamaquoddy world of the past hundred years came welling up from the pages. I could sense what speakers mean when they say that the language is “a unique mindset, in which I feel completely at

3 Translating Time: from: Born in the Blood
Author(s) Koyiyumptewa Stewart B.
Abstract: This chapter takes as its focus the question of how Hopi feelings, experiences, and knowledge of the past are, or can be, translated. Our motivation for this chapter grew out of our work together and conversations about the first author’s own (non-Pueblo) experiences at ancient sites compared to how the second author perceives the role of the past in his own life and more broadly in Hopi society. From our exchanges we have to come to believe that addressing the ways in which these two disparate affinities for the material past—and ultimately closing the gap between non-Pueblo and Pueblo

6 Performative Translation and Oral Curation: from: Born in the Blood
Author(s) Ridington Robin
Abstract: In 1999, as Amber Ridington was preparing to enter the ma program in folk studies at Western Kentucky University, her father, anthropologist Robin Ridington, recorded a French folktale told by Sammy Acko, a talented Dane-z̲aa storyteller (for the full text of this story see appendix A). The Dane-z̲aa, also known as the Beaver Indians (or Dunne-za in earlier publications), are subarctic hunting-and-gathering people who live in the Peace River region of northeastern British Columbia, Canada, close to the town of Fort St. John, where Amber was born. For almost fifty years, since Robin began his fieldwork in the area, the

9 Ethnopoetic Translation in Relation to Audio, Video, and New Media Representations from: Born in the Blood
Author(s) Ridington Amber
Abstract: This chapter describes our use of video and Web-based media to present an electronic equivalent of “interlinear” translations of ethnographic texts. The initial tape recordings of elders of the Dane-z̲aa of northeastern British Columbia were made by Robin Ridington in the 1960s. Jillian Ridington and Howard Broomfield joined the work in the 1970s and 1980s, and Jillian continues to be a partner in the projects. In recent years, Robin has added video recordings to the collection. The entire audio archive has been cataloged and digitized and is available to members of the Danez̲aa community. More recently the Doig River First

15 Toward Literature: from: Born in the Blood
Author(s) Haag Marcia
Abstract: The central problem of translation, namely, the competition between faithfulness to meaning and preservation of form, grows more attenuated as translation moves from simple conveyance of information to artistic forms. Generally, in working with translations among European languages, the translator struggles with word choices when one language contains a particular word that denotes or connotes an idea that the other language does not. Then the translator seeks synonyms, or may resort to a phrase that more completely captures the sense intended. The translator may also have to deal with problems of grammatical structure: a language may lack a particular verbal

19 Memories of Translation: from: Born in the Blood
Author(s) Thompson Laurence C.
Abstract: As linguists working on dying unwritten languages, where much if not all of the traditional culture survives only in the memory of elderly speakers, it is hard to translate

9 Shape-shifters, Ghosts, and Residual Power: from: Phantom Past, Indigenous Presence
Author(s) LANDRUM CYNTHIA
Abstract: In the summer of 1991, a Hunkpapa Lakota Sioux tribal member, Don Tenoso, was scheduled to provide a routine demonstration of traditional doll-making techniques in the Native American exhibition hall at the National Museum of Natural History of the Smithsonian Institution in Washington dc. At the time, I was a museum technician with the Department of Anthropology and was working in the Natural History building. Since we were about to begin the work of conserving and moving the Plains Indian collection that was in storage, I was curious to see what he had to say about the cultural significance of

10 Ancestors, Ethnohistorical Practice, and the Authentication of Native Place and Past from: Phantom Past, Indigenous Presence
Author(s) GRADY C. JILL
Abstract: At the turn of the twenty-first century, scholars produced a series of analyses that addressed the literary works written about Native American ghosts (Brogan 1998, Bergland 2000, Richardson 2003). These critics constructed the analyses by relying primarily upon the Euro-Western philosophical and social theories of Freud and Marx, with scant attention given to the extant ethnohistorical and anthropological analyses that pertain to cross-cultural and multicultural studies. Anthropologists and ethnohistorians have long recognized the significant roles played by ghosts in Native American social organizations and belief systems, though they hesitate to apply analytical theories to those roles. It is my intent

Book Title: Conception, Reception, and the Spirit-Essays in Honour of Andrew T. Lincoln
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Pietersen Lloyd K.
Abstract: A number of distinguished biblical scholars and theologians come together in this volume to honour the life and work of Andrew T. Lincoln. The title of this volume reflects Andrew Lincoln’s lifelong interests in Christian origins, the reception of biblical texts in believing and scholarly communities, and the embodiment of the gospel in believing communities made possible by the Spirit. These essays cover exegetical matters, theological interpretation, and theology and embodiment. Several essays engage directly with Lincoln’s monographs, Truth on Trial, and Born of a Virgin?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dfnrc1

Introduction from: Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) PIETERSEN LLOYD K.
Abstract: We are delighted to present this Festschriftin honor of our esteemed friend and colleague, Professor Andrew T. Lincoln, on the occasion of his retirement. The title of this volume reflects andrew’s lifelong interests in Christian origins, the reception of biblical texts in believing and scholarly communities, and the embodiment of the gospel in believing communities made possible by the Spirit. Furthermore, his commitment to careful exegesis of biblical texts, combined with a sensitivity to theological interpretation of those texts and a passionate desire to see such theological interpretation worked out in the life and practice of believing communities, result

3 Let John be John (2) from: Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) DUNN JAMES D. G.
Abstract: I offer in congratulation this reflection on its distinctive christology, drawn principally from my current work on the subject.² For it is undoubtedly John’s christology which constitutes his greatest contribution to the development of Christian theology. But our over-familiarity with it has probably diminished our perception of the radical transmutation that John in fact makes in his portrayal of Christ.

12 Historical Criticism, Theological Interpretation, and the Ends of the Christian Life from: Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) FOWL STEPHEN
Abstract: It is an enormous honor for me to be asked to contribute to a Festschriftfor andrew Lincoln. I had been working on my PhD thesis for a couple of years when andrew Lincoln became my supervisor. i doubt very much that he remembers our first meetings to discuss my work; they are, however, vividly stamped in my memory. andrew’s questions were always clear and non-polemical, but also deeply probing. The more he probed, the more it became clear that my thesis lacked a thesis. it was more like a set of disconnected observations. andrew’s clear-eyed reading of my work

14 Who and What is Theological Interpretation For? from: Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) PADDISON ANGUS
Abstract: In recent years “Theological interpretation” has consolidated itself as a key contributor to the series of conversations that make up contemporary theology.¹ as a movement it has spawned commentary and book series, dedicated journals, countless monographs, and edited volumes. amidst this flurry of activity is the particular contribution made by the edited volume that andrew and i produced whilst we worked together at the University of Gloucestershire, Christology and Scripture: Interdisciplinary Perspectives. The volume arose out of an intensive and memorable weekend spent in a diocesan retreat house in the company of systematic theologians, church historians, and biblical scholars. at

Book Title: Slavery's Capitalism-A New History of American Economic Development
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Rockman Seth
Abstract: During the nineteenth century, the United States entered the ranks of the world's most advanced and dynamic economies. At the same time, the nation sustained an expansive and brutal system of human bondage. This was no mere coincidence. Slavery's Capitalismargues for slavery's centrality to the emergence of American capitalism in the decades between the Revolution and the Civil War. According to editors Sven Beckert and Seth Rockman, the issue is not whether slavery itself was or was not capitalist but, rather, the impossibility of understanding the nation's spectacular pattern of economic development without situating slavery front and center. American capitalism-renowned for its celebration of market competition, private property, and the self-made man-has its origins in an American slavery predicated on the abhorrent notion that human beings could be legally owned and compelled to work under force of violence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dfnrs7

CHAPTER 1 Toward a Political Economy of Slave Labor: from: Slavery's Capitalism
Author(s) BAPTIST EDWARD E.
Abstract: Charles Ball had been a family man, a skilled worker. From his cabin on Maryland’s Eastern Shore, he had seen a brighter future. True, he was enslaved, like his wife and children. Yet in 1805, men with his intelligence and drive were finding ways to buy their freedom from enslavers in Mary land’s tobacco districts. But on this morning, when a blaring horn jerked him out of sleep before dawn, he sat up in a loft bed at the top of a cabin 500 miles to the south-west, and he was no longer who he had been. In fact, he

CHAPTER 7 August Belmont and the World the Slaves Made from: Slavery's Capitalism
Author(s) BOODRY KATHRYN
Abstract: Recent work on the financial history of slavery has focused on the creation of slave-backed securities and the entangled relationship of state-chartered banks, government-issued bonds, and remote investors in Europe and the northern United States. Such scholars as Edward Baptist and Richard Kilbourne have recovered the precarious schemes of the Consolidated Association of the Planters of Louisiana (a bank that took slaves as collateral for loans issued to purchase additional slaves) and the United States Bank of Philadelphia (Nicholas Biddle’s post–Bank War enterprise that invested heavily in upstart southern banks). It is crucial, however, to remember that the most

CHAPTER 13 The Market, Utility, and Slavery in Southern Legal Thought from: Slavery's Capitalism
Author(s) BROPHY ALFRED L.
Abstract: Pre–Civil War Americans turned to all sorts of technology, from canals, steam power, and the telegraph to more obscure forms such as the daguerreotype and mining lamps, to hasten the pace of economic and moral progress. Law was another key technology they used. The law worked in favor of economic growth in several ways. First, judicial decisions self-consciously molded the law to promote economic efficiency. Second, legislatures used statutes to streamline credit markets, market transactions, and the formation of corporations. For the last several decades, scholars have often invoked Morton J. Horwitz’s apt insight that there was an “instrumental

Book Title: The Grecanici of Southern Italy-Governance, Violence, and Minority Politics
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Pipyrou Stavroula
Abstract: The Grecanici of Southern Italyprovides a comprehensive ethnography that examines the ways the minority developed and sustain enduring cultural forms of solidarity and relatedness. Stavroula Pipyrou proposes the concept of "fearless governance" to describe overlapping and sometimes contradictory systems of power, authority, and relational networks that enable the Grecanici to achieve political representation at the intersection of local, national, and global encounters. Refuting easy assumptions of top-down governmental influence, Pipyrou shows how the Grecanici find political representation through the European Union and UNESCO, state policy, civic associations, family networks and illegal organizations; not being afraid to take risks, incur wrath, lose friends, or risk death in challenging the political status-quo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dfnrzt

Chapter 2 Meet the Grecanici from: The Grecanici of Southern Italy
Abstract: A prolific number of studies on minorities have shed light on the historical and political genealogies of what is meant by minority status in Europe (see Cowan 2000, 2010). Scholars such as Jennifer Jackson Preece (1997), Mark Mazower (2004), and Jane Cowan (2010) examine the historical predicament of developing a comprehensive UN framework toward the protection of minority populations after 1918. Looking at the issue of the minorities from a top-down perspective, these studies delve deeply into the logics of treaties and the thorny position of minority recognition on a pan-European level. Subsequently, nation-state recognition of minorities was a criterion

Chapter 4 Hegemonic Networks, Kinship Governance from: The Grecanici of Southern Italy
Abstract: Kinship, Herzfeld argues, “carried the dead weight of outmoded assumptions” (2007:315). Like Fabian’s (1983) perceptions regarding the subject of anthropology, kinship became the “Other,” perpetually locked in direct association with Africanist structuralist theory. Nevertheless, kinship “has insidiously slipped back everywhere” (Herzfeld 2007:315) and is here to stay. Grecanici kinship is highly politicized and contributes to dense networks of governance and representation. With a strong emphasis on patrilineality, kinship is a political and genealogical order with far-reaching consequences for socioeconomic organization. The coordination of the next generation of relatives is desired by people who know exactly their own lines of relatedness.

Chapter 5 Messy Realities of Relatedness from: The Grecanici of Southern Italy
Abstract: So far I have discussed conventional kinship organization among the Grecanici, based predominantly on sharing the same blood. Alongside blood kin, further lines of relatedness are pursued that create equally strong politicized links between the related parties, thus forming dense networks for minority governance. This chapter discusses amicizia(friendship) andcomparaticoorSangiovanni(godparenthood)¹ in order to account for kinship-like arrangements that infiltrate political domains. Civil society factions are predominantly based on friendship, godparenthood, and kinship, creating an ultra-dense matrix for claims to national and international resources available for the governance of the linguistic minority. In their desire to create

Chapter 6 Ancestors, Saints, and Governance from: The Grecanici of Southern Italy
Abstract: ’Ndrangheta is one of the most successful networks of political representation in Reggio Calabria that exceeds solely violence and extortion (Gambetta 1988:168–70). In local oral and textual accounts, examined in this chapter, ’Ndrangheta is

Chapter 8 Minority on the Fringes of Europe from: The Grecanici of Southern Italy
Abstract: When I left Reggio Calabria, I felt I had left a part of myself back in the field. “Making relatedness” between the ethnographer and the research participants reveals the deep humanistic nature of the ethnographic adventure (Gay y Blasco 2012b). The final story narrates the relationship between Venere and the ethnographer. While Venere is an actual person, she also stands as a metonymy for the complex networks of relatedness present in Reggio Calabria on which fearless governance is built.

Book Title: Useful Fictions-Evolution, Anxiety, and the Origins of Literature
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): AUSTIN MICHAEL
Abstract: Drawing on evolutionary biology, anthropology, narrative theory, cognitive psychology, game theory, and evolutionary aesthetics, Austin develops the concept of a "useful fiction," a simple narrative that serves an adaptive function unrelated to its factual one. In his work we see how these useful fictions play a key role in neutralizing the overwhelming anxiety that humans can experience as their minds gather and process information. Rudimentary narratives constructed for this purpose, Austin suggests, provided a cognitive scaffold that might have become the basis for our well-documented love of fictional stories. Written in clear, jargon-free prose and employing abundant literary examples-from the Bible to One Thousand and One Arabian NightsandDon QuixotetoNo Exit-Austin's work offers a new way of understanding the relationship between fiction and evolutionary processes-and, perhaps, the very origins of literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dfnsfj

6 Sex, Lies, and Phenotypes from: Useful Fictions
Abstract: Though lying is not the same as storytelling, the two are not entirely unrelated. Both involve the construction and communication of counterfactual propositions and narratives. The difference between the two is in both the intent of the speaker and the understanding of the audience. Liars know the truth and attempt to conceal it, usually to advantage themselves at the expense of their auditors. On the other hand, both storytellers and story hearers (or story readers) usually understand that a fictional story is something other than literal truth—rather than working against each other, they collaborate in a mutually beneficial form

Introduction: from: Daviborshch's Cart
Abstract: One year after the arrival of German forces, as workers on the collective farms toiled in the fi elds throughout the region, the second wave of mass killings of Ukraine’s Jewish population began. The remaining Jews in the village of Israylovka, later

2 Representing Colonial Violence from: Violence in Francophone African and Caribbean Women's Literature
Abstract: In this chapter, I posit that the selected works by Michèle Lacrosil, Ken Bugul, and Ousmane Sembène complicate Fanon’s formula for colonial violence by offering a specifically female perspective on the experience and legacy of colonialism’s brutality. This chapter discusses these relationships in two different areas. First, I examine the process of epistemological violence — brainwashing through formal and informal education — as a legacy of colonialism. Second, I study the specificity of women’s experience within the colonial discourse. This involves a close analysis of Ken Bugul’s violent encounter with the West and Lacrosil’s depiction of a severe case of

Book Title: Views from the Margins-Creating Identities in Modern France
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): Curtis Sarah A.
Abstract: This collection of essays offers examples drawn from an imperial history of France that show the power of the periphery to shape diverse and dynamic modern French identities at its center. Each essay explains French identity as a fluid process rather than a category into which French citizens (and immigrants) are expected to fit. In using a core/periphery framework to explore identity creation, Views from the Marginsbreaks new ground in bringing together diverse historical topics from politics, religion, regionalism, consumerism, nationalism, and gendered aspects of civic and legal engagement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dgn3mw

2. FEASTS OF WIRE from: The Rhizomatic West
Abstract: To examine one specific type of critical regionalism I wish to turn to José David Saldívar’s Border Matters: Remapping American Cultural Studies(1997), a work influenced by the theoretical syncretism of Stuart Hall’s and Paul Gilroy’s British cultural studies and seeking to present “the U.S.-Mexico border zone as a paradigm of crossings, intercultural exchanges, circulations, resistances, and negotiations as well as of militarised ‘low-intensity’ conflict.” Saldívar argues that the border represents “a model for a new kind of U.S. cultural studies … that challenges the homogeneity of U.S. nationalism and popular culture,” with the nation “re-imagined … as a site

4. “THE ‘WESTERN’ IN QUOTES” from: The Rhizomatic West
Abstract: As I discussed in the previous chapter, Sergio Leone’s films were seen by some as the death knell of the Western and by others as its regenerative force, breathing new life into a tired, mythic formula and seeing the genre as the site for cultural critique and counterhegemonic practice. The established generic grid of the Western proved elastic and porous enough for new filmmakers looking to utilize its broad expectations and codes for different purposes, building on the promising works of directors such as Nicholas Ray, Sam Peckinpah, and Robert Altman. Often these innovations came from outside the Hollywood mainstream,

5. DIALOGICAL LANDSCAPES from: The Rhizomatic West
Abstract: Joel Meyerowitz has written of how he believes photographs work: “You picture something in a frame and it’s got lots of accounting going on in it—stones and buildings and trees and air—but that’s not what fills up a frame. You fill up a frame with feelings, energy, discovery, and risk, and leave room enough for someone else to get in there. … A photo must have room in it for entrance by outsiders, so that the photographer himself or herself hasn’t built a structure that keeps you out, but instead has left some crack that allows you the

5 Transatlantic Crossings: from: Transatlantic Voices
Author(s) GEORGI-FINDLAY BRIGITTE
Abstract: How much are Native Americans part of the project of American identity? How have Native American novels contributed to it, particularly in the context of recent debates over multiculturalism? Considering the growing popularity of Native American literature in Europe, how far have Europeans become an implied audience? How “American” or “cosmopolitan” are Native American novels? These are the questions that led me to look at some recent novels by Native American authors. I was also curious about whether we can detect certain trends or new directions in Native American works of fiction. I will argue that many recent novels explore

The Literary Consumption of Actors in Seventeenth-Century China from: Writing and Materiality in China
Author(s) Volpp Sophie
Abstract: Among the luxury goods traded by the elite during the late Ming and early Qing were actors.¹ Not only individual actors but entire troupes were bestowed on friends, bequeathed to relatives, or sold. Their circulation served to create and maintain networks of social exchange, in much the same manner as did gifts of fine ceramic wares, calligraphic scrolls, and ancient bronzes. The cultural prestige of the actor as a luxury good was, in turn, predicated on a highly refined discourse of connoisseurship, typified by the theater aficionado Pan Zhiheng’s 潘之旦(1556–1622) disquisitions on the art of acting, which were collected

Considering a Coincidence: from: Writing and Materiality in China
Author(s) Widmer Ellen
Abstract: The year 1828 saw the publication of two works of fiction that at first glance appear to inhabit different worlds. The first is Zai zaotian, 再造天,a tanci彈詞 (or prosimetric fictional narrative) by Hou Zhi 侯芝 (1764–1829), a woman editor, author, and poet. In contrast to some of her other output,Zai zaotianhas not enjoyed much scholarly or readerly acclaim. This is in part because of its didacticism. The plot, which concerns a struggle over control of the throne during the Yuan dynasty, centers almost exclusively on the lessons to be learned from the good and bad

A Folksong Immortal and Official Popular Culture in Twentieth-Century China from: Writing and Materiality in China
Author(s) Liu Lydia H.
Abstract: Five years after the new copyright laws and regulations protecting intellectual property rights went into effect in China in January 1991, a retroactive lawsuit over the violation of the copyrights in the film Liu Sanjie劉二姐 was filed.¹ Released in 1961, this Him had been adapted from a well-known musical drama written by a team of local writers from the Guangxi Zhuang Autonomous Region, which is dominated by the Zhuang 僮 nationality. In preparing the script, the writers had done extensive fieldwork among this minority group collecting folksongs, and on the basis of those materials, a local opera troupe produced

INTRODUCTION: from: Public Memory in Early China
Abstract: In 2004, during the rushed archeological work prior to the planned flooding of the Three Gorges region on the Yangzi River, excavators discovered a stele dated 173 ce and dedicated to a local prefect who had otherwise disappeared from history (Figure 1). In language common for such gravestones from the later years of the Han dynasty (202 bce–220 ce), the two-meter-high slab lavishly praised the administration of this minor official, named Jing Yun 景雲 (d. 103 ce). It describes how the local populace wept at his death “as if mourning for a parent” (如喪考妣), how they set aside their

Book Title: Lydia Ginzburg's Prose-Reality in Search of Literature
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Van Buskirk Emily
Abstract: Based on a decade's work in Ginzburg's archives, the book discusses previously unknown manuscripts and uncovers a wealth of new information about the author's life, focusing on Ginzburg's quest for a new kind of writing adequate to her times. She writes of universal experiences-frustrated love, professional failures, remorse, aging-and explores the modern fragmentation of identity in the context of war, terror, and an oppressive state. Searching for a new concept of the self, and deeming the psychological novel (a beloved academic specialty) inadequate to express this concept, Ginzburg turned to fragmentary narratives that blur the lines between history, autobiography, and fiction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dr36q1

CHAPTER 4 Passing Characters from: Lydia Ginzburg's Prose
Abstract: In her book On Psychological Prose, first published in 1971, Ginzburg articulates the realm in which life and literature dynamically interact as we model our personalities: in daily life, people understand themselves and others through “creative constructs,” carrying out the aesthetic work of “selection, correlation, and symbolic interpretation of psychic elements.” The processes through which we compose and project our self-images resemble the creative acts authors perform when designing literary characters or lyric personae. Not only are these processes similar, they are symbiotic, since a personality “shapes itself, both internally and externally, by means of images, many of which have

3 The Other Self: from: Forms of Life
Abstract: If characters exist for the sake of novels, they exist only as much as and in the way that the novel needs them. Jane Austen’s world is a strikingly limited one. It is a world of visits and conversations, which usually take place in houses and gardens. We do not see people at work; we do not directly encounter violent action or violent passion. The limits of what may be said are fairly narrow. We are given, in effect, a shallow and well-lighted stage where we can see the comedy of manners played out with great attention to speech and

4 Austen: from: Forms of Life
Abstract: Jane Austen’s novels present a world more schematic than we are accustomed to find in more recent fiction. The schematism arises in part from her “vocabulary of discrimination,”² those abstract words which classify actions in moral terms. Wittgenstein’s remarks recall the adaptability of our responses, the readiness of our minds to discover how a literary work conveys its meanings and to make insensible adjustments to the forms its signs may take. Black-and-white photography can make discrminations and tonal gradations that cannot be achieved by color, just as, in another case, an engraving can define a structure through line that a

5 Stendhal: from: Forms of Life
Abstract: Stendhal’s irony is more radical than Jane Austen’s. His characters tend to be unstable compounds, and they demand a shifting and flexible response from the reader. That response is enacted for us by the narrator, who regards his hero from constantly varying distances and directions. Stendhal’s rhetoric recalls, in its shifts and dodges, the example of Byron’s Don Juan. That poem, like Stendhal’s novels, is a work of an age of reaction and political repression, of institutionalized banality. Behind both lie the French Revolution and the remarkable career of Napoleon. The vitality of the revolution and of the young Napoleon

8 Tolstoy and the Forms of Life from: Forms of Life
Abstract: It is difficult to account for the remarkable sense of depth as well as breadth we feel in reading Tolstoy. Sir Isaiah Berlin, in describing that sense, has come closer than anyone else to explaining it. Tolstoy’s heroes achieve a kind of serenity through coming to accept “the permanent relationships of things and the universal texture of human life.” Through them we become aware of an order underlying and perhaps girding the world of our experience. It is an order which “ ‘contains’ and determines the structure of experience, the framework on which it—that is, we and all we

13 The Beauty of Mortal Conditions: from: Forms of Life
Abstract: The sentence is from the sketch which was Joyce’s earliest version of his portrait of the artist.¹ It reveals some of the difficulty of that process by which the work of art emerges from the conditions of its creation and the artist from the natural man. Artistic creation may be one of the ways of most fully realizing the self, but it is achieved only as the artist is freed of impediments within the

Book Title: The Postmodern Bible-The Bible and Culture Collective
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Wuellner Wilhelm
Abstract: The burgeoning use of modern literary theory and cultural criticism in recent biblical studies has led to stimulating-but often bewildering-new readings of the Bible. This book, argued from a perspective shaped by postmodernism, is at once an accessible guide to and an engagement with various methods, theories, and critical practices transforming biblical scholarship today.Written by a collective of cutting-edge scholars-with each page the work of multiple hands- The Postmodern Bibledeliberately breaks with the individualist model of authorship that has traditionally dominated scholarship in the humanities and is itself an illustration of the postmodern transformation of biblical studies for which it argues.The book introduces, illustrates, and critiques seven prominent strategies of reading. Several of these interpretive strategies-rhetorical criticism, structuralism and narratology, reader-response criticism, and feminist criticism-have been instrumental in the transformation of biblical studies up to now. Many-feminist and womanist criticism, ideological criticism, poststructuralism, and psychoanalytic criticism-hold promise for the continued transformation of these studies in the future. Focusing on readings from both the Hebrew Bible and the New Testament, this volume illuminates the current multidisciplinary debates emerging from postmodernism by exposing the still highly contested epistemological, political, and ethical positions in the field of biblical studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dr3804

10 What Is Tradition? from: Hermeneutics Ancient and Modern
Abstract: My purpose in this chapter is not to try to clarify the hermeneutical concept of tradition in the usual analytical style but rather to work through a number of dialectical reversals in which the concept seems to play itself out, as if it were trying to resist conceptualization. Anyhow I cannot promise to produce a clear idea of what tradition is. Possibly it will be enough if I can just make it harder for people to speak of tradition in the usual way, which is to say, without a second thought—much the way Terry Eagleton speaks of it in

EDITORS’ INTRODUCTION from: Local Knowledge, Global Stage
Author(s) GLEACH FREDERIC W.
Abstract: This volume rounds off what would have been a decade of Histories of Anthropology Annualif we had met the ideal in producing an annual volume. In actuality it has taken a couple of extra years to reach this point.HoAAbegan in the book division at the University of Nebraska Press, then moved to the journals portfolio, and then returned to the book division with a renewed emphasis on the stand-alone character of each volume. Each volume now has a unique title, albeit still within the mandate ofHoAAto provide an outlet for work in the history of

2 Dead and Living Authorities in The Legend of Perseus: from: Local Knowledge, Global Stage
Author(s) ROSA FREDERICO D.
Abstract: Edwin Sidney Hartland (1848–1927) was a British solicitor and politician whose proficiency as a self-made folklorist and evolutionary anthropologist went far beyond dilettantism, following in the footsteps of his principal mentor, Edward B. Tylor (1832–1917). Hartland was a prominent figure in the Folklore Society, which he presided over at the turn of the century. Indeed, he was one of the members of the “Great Team” of British late Victorian folklorists, to use the expression coined by Richard Dorson (1968:202). Between 1884 and 1924 Hartland’s prolific production included his magnum opus: a three-volume work titled The Legend of Perseus:

3 Anthropology in Portugal: from: Local Knowledge, Global Stage
Author(s) DE MATOS PATRÍCIA FERRAZ
Abstract: In recent years, several works have been published on the history of anthropology in specific national contexts (e.g., Stocking 1974, 1995; Kuklick 1991; Barth et al. 2005; Ranzmaier 2011) but little on the history of anthropology in Portugal—and the exceptions have largely been written from and for the Portuguese community (e.g., Areia and Rocha 1985; Branco 1986; Pereira 1986, 1998; Pina-Cabral 1991; Leal 2000, 2006; Roque 2001; Santos 2005; Sobral 2007; Matos 2013). Even then, with the exception of some authors such as Guimarães (1995), Pereira (1998), Roque (2001), Santos (2005), and my own work (Matos 2013), it has

4 A View from the West: from: Local Knowledge, Global Stage
Author(s) FAULHABER PRISCILA
Abstract: In this chapter I focus on the significance of frontier in the history of social anthropology, especially fieldwork in the Amazon supported by the Institute of Social Science (ISS) of the University of California at Berkeley (UCB). I understand that subventions for scholarly research in the western part of the United States resonate in the scientific field of moving-frontier theories. ISS supported projects on “economic and cultural boundaries,” relocating to the social domain the former biological metaphor of botanical germination. This institute supported projects that went beyond domestic U.S. issues, embracing social problems in other countries such as Mexico and

5 Scientific Diplomacy and the Establishment of an Australian Chair of Anthropology, 1914–25 from: Local Knowledge, Global Stage
Author(s) GRAY GEOFFREY
Abstract: During the first decades of the twentieth century, Australian scientists, supported by their British counterparts, worked to convince the recently formed (1901) Commonwealth government of Australia, a federation of the states and territories,¹ of the value of anthropology. They argued that it had value as an academic discipline for two reasons: first, it sought to ascertain the laws of human sociality and origins, and second, it would be useful in training colonial field officials (Kuper 1996; Kuklick 1991; Stocking 1995). To this end they argued for the establishment of a chair of anthropology in an Australian university. It was a

8 Genealogies of Knowledge in the Alberni Valley: from: Local Knowledge, Global Stage
Author(s) GREEN DENISE NICOLE
Abstract: Asking for help is important. I learned this over the five years I spent in Nuu-chah-nulth First Nations’ haahuulthii(traditional territory) as an anthropology PhD student: I witnessed networks of relatives work together to celebrate important moments in their interwoven lives throughn’uushitl(potlatching) andtl’itscuu(feasting).¹ Asking for help demonstrates an understanding that most cultural “business” is larger than the individual.² One must reach out to find the appropriate resource. This is how I eventually found myself, in the fall of 2013, immersed in the archive of Dr. Susan Golla. Someone asked me for help.

Book Title: In a Different Place-Pilgrimage, Gender, and Politics at a Greek Island Shrine
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Dubisch Jill
Abstract: In a Different Placeoffers a richly textured account of a modern pilgrimage, combining ethnographic detail, theory, and personal reflection. Visited by thousands of pilgrims yearly, the Church of the Madonna of the Annunciation on the Aegean island of Tinos is a site where different interests--sacred and secular, local and national, personal and official--all come together. Exploring the shrine and its surrounding town, Jill Dubisch shares her insights into the intersection of social, religious, and political life in Greece. Along the way she develops the idea of pilgrimage-journeying away from home in search of the miraculous--as a metaphor for anthropological fieldwork. This highly readable work offers us the opportunity to share one anthropologist's personal and professional journey and to see in a "different place" the inadequacy of such conventional anthropological categories as theory versus data, rationality versus emotion, and the observer versus the observed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dxg8nz

CHAPTER THREE The Anthropological Study of Pilgrimage from: In a Different Place
Abstract: When I first began my research on pilgrimage at the Church of the Annunciation on Tinos in 1986, the phenomenon was not one that had been well studied by anthropologists. Aside from Victor Turner’s works on pilgrimage as ritual and on the place of pilgrimage in the Christian tradition (1974, 1979; Turner and Turner 1978), works that provided much of the initial inspiration for my own research, there existed only a handful of anthropological studies of pilgrimage. Recently, however, anthropological interest in the topic has burgeoned. While there are still no general theoretical works of a scope to rival Turner’s,

CHAPTER SIX The Observer Observed from: In a Different Place
Abstract: My own “vow” reflects a particularly complex, long-term, and even intimate relationship with a certain set of religious practices. As I look back on my earlier fieldwork, I realize that religion was part of my experience of Greek life almost from my first days in the village. This is illustrated by an entry in my journal on August 4, 1969, about two weeks after my husband and I had settled in Falatados. I spent part of this day with some village women, accompanying them to their garden in the countryside. It was a frustrating experience for me as I struggled

CHAPTER SEVEN An Island in Space, an Island In Time from: In a Different Place
Abstract: So far I have brought both the pilgrim and the anthropologist to Tinos and have described something of the activities of each at the pilgrimage site. These activities are located within two larger fields: the practices and beliefs of the Greek Orthodox religion on the one hand, and the practices and beliefs of anthropology on the other. Up to this point Tinos, the island, has remained in the background, noted merely as the location of the Church of the Annunciation, as the site of my earlier village fieldwork, and as a place to which both pilgrim and anthropologist must travel

Book Title: Firewalking and Religious Healing-The Anastenaria of Greece and the American Firewalking Movement
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Danforth Loring M.
Abstract: "If the Saint calls you, if you have an open road, then you don't feel the fire as if it were your enemy," says one of the participants in the Anastenaria. This compelling work evokes and contrasts two forms of firewalking and religious healing: first, the Anastenaria, a northern Greek ritual in which people who are possessed by Saint Constantine dance dramatically over red-hot coals, and, second, American firewalking, one of the more spectacular activities of New Age psychology. Loring Danforth not only analyzes these rituals in light of the most recent work in medical and symbolic anthropology but also describes in detail the lives of individual firewalkers, involving the reader personally in their experiences: he views ritual therapy as a process of transformation and empowerment through which people are metaphorically moved from a state of illness to a state of health. Danforth shows that the Anastenaria and the songs accompanying it allow people to express and resolve conflict-laden family relationships that may lead to certain kinds of illnesses. He also demonstrates how women use the ritual to gain a sense of power and control over their lives without actually challenging the ideology of male dominance that pervades Greek culture. Comparing the Anastenaria with American firewalking, Danforth includes a gripping account of his own participation in a firewalk in rural Maine. Finally he examines the place of anthropology in a postmodern world in which the boundaries between cultures are becoming increasingly blurred.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dxg8pg

II The Interpretation of Religious Healing from: Firewalking and Religious Healing
Abstract: The Anastenaria is concerned with healing in the broadest sense. It is both a religious ritual and a form of psychotherapy. Any attempt to understand the Anastenaria as a system of religious healing must therefore integrate approaches from medical anthropology with those from the anthropological study of religion. It must bring together the concerns of transcultural psychiatry and those of symbolic anthropology. Such a synthesis, which constitutes an interpretive or hermeneutic approach to the study of ritual therapy, provides the theoretical framework for this study of the Anastenaria.

III The Anastenaria from: Firewalking and Religious Healing
Abstract: The village of Ayia Eleni is located fifteen kilometers south of Serres, an important commercial center in the eastern part of Greek Macedonia with approximately forty thousand inhabitants. The Strymonas River flows nearby on its eighty-kilometer journey from the Bulgarian border to the Aegean Sea. It is the water of the Strymonas distributed through an elaborate irrigation network that is largely responsible for the high standard of living that the people of Ayia Eleni and the other villages of the Serres basin have come to enjoy.

VIII The American Firewalking Movement from: Firewalking and Religious Healing
Abstract: Firewalking is certainly one of the most dramatic activities that take place at the many classes, seminars, and workshops attended by the increasing number of Americans who hope to bring about a “New Age” of peace, unity, and higher consciousness through personal growth and spiritual transformation. By the 1980s a wide range of belief systems, social causes, and healing practices, whose origins lay in the counterculture of the 1960s, had come together under the general rubric of New Age phenomena. The women’s movement, the environmental movement, and the peace movement; health food, renewable resources, and appropriate technology; parapsychology, astrology, and

IX Contemporary Anthropology in a Postmodern World from: Firewalking and Religious Healing
Abstract: When I Left the United States for Greece in August 1974 to begin my research on the Anastenaria, I had a fairly traditional idea of what ethnographic fieldwork would be like. I was an American, a graduate student in anthropology, and I had been brought up as a member of a liberal Protestant church in a white, upper-middle-class suburb of Boston. I was going to live in a Greek village, a warm emotional place where people ate exotic food outdoors late at night and men embraced each other in public—a place where people lived lives that were somehow more

12. Convents in the Netherlands: from: Des couvents en héritage / Religious Houses: A Legacy
Author(s) Nelissen Nico
Abstract: In the Netherlands, the first convents were founded in the seventh and eighth centuries by missionaries from Ireland who had come to convert the northern regions of Europe to Christianity. The famous saying ora et labora(prayer and work) implied not only praying and carrying out missionary activities, but also often very hard work. The monks’ first work was to cultivate the land, prepare the ground,

Foreword from: New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) Haase Donald
Abstract: It’s about time. Time , that is, for a collection of essays like this. Time for scholars of folktales and fairy tales to acknowledge the role that teaching plays in their work. The study of folktales and fairy tales has a long history that took a radical turn in the 1970s and ’80s, a turn that reinvented, revitalized, and expanded the field across disciplines. That burgeoning interest generated new university courses on fairy tales that over the last thirty years have introduced countless students to a new, critical understanding of the fairy tale and to a host of new tales,

3 At the Bottom of a Well: from: New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) Wood Juliette
Abstract: The numerous tales brought together by the Brothers Grimm and other collectors provide a seemingly endless selection of folk narratives. Although early scholarship sought to situate the folktale within theoretical frameworks that could explain the evolution of culture, it also recognized the characteristically patterned nature of such tales and produced indexes concerned with mapping out the components of oral tales. The most notable and comprehensive indexes were undoubtedly those of Stith Thompson and Antti Aarne, which are still in use today (Aarne and Thompson 1961).

10 Teaching Hans Christian Andersen’s Tales: from: New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) François Cyrille
Abstract: As one of the most famous fairy-tale writers and one of the most translated authors in the world, Andersen should be given a prime place in a teaching unit on fairy tales. At the same time, as he was a Danish writer, both the language and the cultural context make it difficult for non-Danish -speaking instructors to grasp the many dimensions of his work. This chapter gives advice and suggests activities that can be used to work on Andersen’s tales in an academic setting, focusing on a comparative analysis of translations to approach the particular language in which they were

12 Binary Outlaws: from: New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) Duggan Anne E.
Abstract: Within the domain of fairy-tale studies, queer theory has yet to receive the critical attention that it deserves, particularly given the centrality of sexuality in fairy tales.¹ This situation increasingly is changing, evident in the work of Kay Turner and Pauline Greenhill, among others.² Approaching fairy-tale texts and films from the perspective of queer theory can help students understand the ways in which fairy-tale plots can subvert what is often—and problematically—taken for granted in classical tales: the heteronormative plot, upheld by a specific configuration of gender roles. As Turner has argued, “Even if many tales hurtle headlong toward

13 Teaching “Gender in Fairy-Tale Film and Cinematic Folklore” Online: from: New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) Orme Jennifer
Abstract: Teaching fully online a third-year undergraduate University of Winnipeg Women’s and Gender Studies (WGS) course called “Gender in Fairy-Tale Film and Cinematic Folklore” (GFFCF) offered significant challenges, but also considerable rewards. Though the course’s final form was strongly influenced by the particular demands of Internet delivery, like any other course, live or online, GFFCF reflected a compromise between pedagogical goals, available materials, and approaches to the content (see, e.g., Garrison 2011; Simpson 2012). Our chapter explores how we worked to balance the latter three issues, particularly in terms of the online medium’s usually positive influence on our teaching. We detail

Introduction from: Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Bruehler Bart B.
Abstract: Sociorhetorical interpretation (SRI) is a heuristic that is properly called an interpretive analytic rather than a method. This means an interpreter can select any series of strategies to analyze and interpret rhetorical, social, and cognitive picturing and reasoning to help interpreters learn how a text prompts and influences thinking, emotion, and behavior. Since it is not a method, it does not prescribe a series of scientific steps or formulae designed to perform and produce predictable results in accord with a particular conceptual framework. Rather, the goal is to produce a programmatic exploration guided by a particular constellation of strategies and

Reworking Aristotle’s Rhetoric from: Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Kennedy George A.
Abstract: My title, “Reworking Aristotle’s Rhetoric,” has several possible meanings. For one thing, all of us who study rhetoric are in some sense engaged in our own reworking, interpretation, and application of it. More specifically, I have recently worked through theRhetoricagain in the process of making a new translation of it, with introduction and notes. I would like to discuss some of the things I have noticed, but will only comment occasionally on my own translation. Finally, I will say something about the strengths and weaknesses of theRhetoricand how it, as a general rhetoric, may need to

The Aristotelian Topos: from: Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Miller Carolyn R.
Abstract: Although the topoi have routinely been thought of as instruments of decorum serving a managerial function in rhetoric, Richard McKeon noted that they can also be understood as sources of novelty, as having a generative function.¹ To establish what the Aristotelian topos can contribute to contemporary interests in generative rhetoric, this essay examines the conceptual contexts from which Aristotle drew his use of the term and the framework from which he drew his thinking about invention. Sources examined include his earlier works, the PhysicsandOn Coming-to-Be and Passing-Away, as well as aspects of prephilosophical Greek thought that constitutes what

From This Place: from: Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Bruehler Bart B.
Abstract: Given the complex nature of what is public, political, and private combined with the relative lack of careful attention to these social-spatial categories in New Testament scholarship, this study will establish a critical and contextual classification of space for Luke’s gospel. This requires three things: an informed theoretical perspective, an adequate system of classification, and broad and specific comparative material. The first third of this chapter will describe several scholars and works that contribute to the eclectic theoretical perspective of this study. However, this study does not delve into unplowed ground. Unfortunately, most previous studies of the public and private

KNOWING IS SEEING: from: Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Huber Lynn R.
Abstract: As we saw in chapter 1,¹ since the earliest centuries of the church, interpreters have acknowledged the imagistic or metaphorical nature of the book of Revelation, although they disagree about what this characterization means. This suggests that bringing the insights of metaphor theory to bear on Revelation would be an appropriate and fruitful endeavor, especially contemporary theories of metaphor that emphasize the cognitive nature of this phenomenon. This is not to suggest that scholars have ignored discussions about metaphor in their work on Revelation; rather, there has been little systematic analysis of the metaphorical language in the text. Scholars who

2. Sovereignties, Poetic and Otherwise from: Writing of the Formless
Abstract: In a recent study of the place of the foco , or the theory of the guerrilla, in the unfolding of the Cuban Revolution, Juan Duchesne Winter offers a temporally determined cause for the ultimate failure of Ernesto Che Guevara’s strategy. His first claim is that it is in the narrative of Pasajes de la guerra revolucionariaand not in the theoretically inflectedLa guerra de guerrillasthat the Argentine gives full body to the theory of the foco. “This is due,” he explains, “to the ability of narrative discourse to display thespace of experienceas the work of

4 Nihilism: from: Writing of the Formless
Abstract: The theological underpinnings of the Cuban Revolution are often confronted as if it were a nationally circumscribed problematic, even as its analysis reproduces dynamics that are perceptible and operative on a much broader scale.¹ Yet something is erased when the national furnishes the only framework to think through this difficult terrain, and it concerns the specific role of politics. This might seem paradoxical, for how could politics be disregarded when it comes to revolution? Politics becomes invisible when the only viable strategic maneuver to dismiss a political position hinges on the accusation that an authority in power is not legitimate

Introduction: from: Citizen Subject
Abstract: The present work is finally appearing in print after having been announced as forthcoming on several occasions by the publisher who accepted it for publication nearly twenty years ago. Exasperated though he must have been by my broken promises, he did not show it; and he never gave up asking for the manuscript. I am profoundly grateful to him. Without such unflagging interest and friendship I might never have pursued my original intentions, in spite of the stimulus that I received along the way from various meetings and collaborations. No less grateful am I to Bruno Karsenti and Guillaume le

FOUR From Sense Certainty to the Law of Genre: from: Citizen Subject
Abstract: The present discussion is not exclusively devoted to the thought and work of Jacques Derrida. It is rather an attempt to bring the reading and discussion of Derrida in relation with other texts, and other heritages, in order to illustrate how his manner of philosophizing has transformed our understanding of certain fundamental problems. I would argue that what distinguishes his specific practice of deconstruction is the way in which it displaces the classical question of the “paradoxes of the universal,” if only because it dismantles the metaphysical opposition between the universal and the particular, along with that of the absolute

FIVE Ich, das Wir, und Wir, das Ich ist: from: Citizen Subject
Abstract: The present talk—and I offer my thanks to Pierre Macherey for the invitation to speak to his working group, which afforded me an opportunity to write it—should fit, not too arbitrarily, I hope, into this year’s program devoted to exploring an discussing the category of “modernity.” That said, my intention is not to contribute directly to this discussion, even if the problems of philosophy and history that I elaborate are generally considered relevant to our prevailing ideas of a “modern moment” and our manner of situating ourselves in relation to it. About these ideas, I will restrict myself

SEVEN Zur Sache Selbst: from: Citizen Subject
Abstract: Certain great commentators on Hegel’s Phenomenology of Spirit(Kojève, Marcuse, Luk á cs), in part inspired by Marxism and Existentialism, built their interpretations around the statement that defines spiritual “substance” (Substanz) as a “work” (Werk) resulting fromthe activity of all and each (das Tun aller und jeder).¹ Sartre should also be included, since one section of theCritique of Dialectical Reasoncomprises an explicit allusion to the “animal regime of spirit” and could be read as a gigantic attempt, in permanent altercation with Hegel, to reformulate the dialectic of “action in common” as the collectivized (and thus aa a

TWELVE The Invention of the Superego: from: Citizen Subject
Abstract: On the occasion of the 150th anniversary of the birth of Sigmund Freud, speaking in an amphitheater that bears the name of Jean-Martin Charcot, the theoretician of hysteria who was his teacher, I would like to present a synthesis—and thus inevitably a mere summary—of the initial results of the research that I have been conducting over the last several years, primarily within the framework of the seminars that Bertrand Ogilvie or ganized at the Université de Paris X–Nanterre. These seminars led me to reconsider what I believed I knew about the evolution of Freud’s thinking, in particular

1 A Sacramental This-Worldliness from: Taking Hold of the Real
Abstract: In Richard Strauss’s opera Ariadne auf Naxos, the wealthiest man in Vienna hosts a grand banquet, to be followed by two performances—one a tragic grand opera based on the Ariadne legend, the other an example of Italiancommedia dell’arte, featuring a cast of harlequins, nymphs, and buffoons. This is disconcerting to the young composer of the opera, given that the theme of his work is “the expression of ultimate solitude”, a subject he thinks unsuitable for pairing with a vulgar comedy. Matters are only made worse when it is announced that the lord of the manor wishes that the

3 The Future of a Technological Illusion from: Taking Hold of the Real
Abstract: Dietrich Bonhoeffer’s critique of a world come of age, scattered across a handful of documents from prison, offers keen insight into the time in which we live and the place where we have been sent to testify to God’s work of judgment and reconciliation in Christ. He brings to light the irony in modernity’s claim to have reached a stage of intellectual and moral maturity, enabling us to see that for all of its knowledge, expertise, and technological success, the age is as godless and without resource as previous generations. But he also draws our attention to the distinctive and

Chapter Two URBAN OPPOSITIONS: from: Alternative Modernities in French Travel Writing
Abstract: In this chapter I draw some of the theory already outlined into dialogue with two urban travel accounts to London dating from the latter half of the nineteenth century: Jules Janin’s Le Mois de mai à Londres et l’exposition de 1851 / London in the Month of May and the Exhibition of 1851(1851) and Jules Vallès’s,La Rue à Londres / The London Street(1876). As can already be discerned from their titles, both works are concerned with different architectures and spatial arrangements of the city, and indeed both texts exhibit a consciousness of space as a material configuration

Chapter Five WRITING AROUND THE LINES: from: Alternative Modernities in French Travel Writing
Abstract: So far we have argued that centric perspectives on urban space have their own poetics, or formal means of operating, and their ownpolitics– a relation, therefore, with social space that invests these perspectives in networks of power. We now move to connect the ethics of this power – its relative exclusions and hierarchies that work at the cognitive, aesthetic and affective levels within social space – to the performance of legibility in literary form, a move that allows us to obtain a view of travel discourse as a means of producing social space. It is time now to

INTRODUCTION from: The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Robbins Derek
Abstract: We are familiar with the tension between quantitative and qualitative research in sociology, between data collection and analysis on the one hand and the recording of narrative on the other. One way to situate Pierre Bourdieu’s work in these terms is to understand it as an alternative response to the situation of the natural and cultural sciences identified by Jürgen Habermas.

Chapter 1 READING BOURDIEU PHENOMENOLOGICALLY from: The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Robbins Derek
Abstract: I believe that Pierre Bourdieu is best understood as a phenomenological sociologist and that, equally, responses to his work in the spirit of its production have also to be understood phenomenologically. I first offer a brief justification of that view. I then seek to clarify what I take to be the nature of Bourdieu’s phenomenological orientation before proceeding to an elaboration of its implications both for our understanding of Bourdieu’s work and for an assessment of the range of responses to his work presented in this volume. In the light of these preliminary remarks, I then offer reflections on each

Chapter 2 THE SOCIOLOGICAL CHALLENGE OF REFLEXIVITY IN BOURDIEUSIAN THOUGHT from: The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: The main purpose of this chapter is to examine Pierre Bourdieu’s conception of reflexivity. The concept of reflexivity plays a pivotal role in Bourdieu’s attempt to develop a ‘critical sociology’ ( sociologie critique), often referred to as ‘reflexive sociology’ in the Anglophone literature. Based on a thorough textual analysis of his key works, the chapter aims to demonstrate that the following twelve elements are particularly important to Bourdieu’s conception of reflexivity: (1) ‘science’, (2) ‘vigilance’, (3) ‘consciousness’, (4) ‘self-awareness’, (5) ‘critique’, (6) ‘self-objectification’, (7) ‘distance-taking’ (8) ‘rupture’, (9) ‘epistemology’, (10) ‘historicization’, (11) ‘understanding’ and (12) ‘emancipation’. Although the concept of reflexivity

Chapter 3 SOCIOLOGY AT THE SCALE OF THE INDIVIDUAL: from: The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Vandenberghe Frédéric
Abstract: Since the turn of the century, the international reception of the work of Pierre Bourdieu has steadily gathered pace and taken on such a magnitude that we can say (with some exaggeration) that genetic structuralism now occupies the position of the hegemon within the global field of sociological theory, comparable perhaps to the one of structural functionalism in the post-war period. Nowadays, one can like or detest Bourdieu’s critical sociology; however, one cannot afford to ignore it. He is the main ‘attractor’ in the field of sociology (with Michel Foucault playing a similar role within the rival, anti-disciplinary field of

Chapter 6 THE PRINCIPLE OF DIFFERENTIATION IN JAPANESE SOCIETY AND INTERNATIONAL KNOWLEDGE TRANSFER BETWEEN BOURDIEU AND JAPAN from: The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Iso Naoki
Abstract: In this essay, we examine the history of the Japanese reception of Pierre Bourdieu’s works generally, and his essays on Japan specifically, from the viewpoints of the principle of differentiation and the concept of capital, both regarding international knowledge transfer (Robbins 2012).¹ The Japanese modernization and industrialization processes are always embedded within a unique knowledge transfer process. Japanese modernization processes, especially during the Meiji era, are often identified as Wakon Yōsai(和魂洋才), which means ‘Japanese spirit, Western technology’ (Hirakawa 1971, 2004; Chew 2014). Japanese modernization processes often emphasized the maximization of utility and function in a Japanese spirit influenced by

Chapter 7 WORLDS WITHIN AND BEYOND WORDS: from: The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Jain Sheena
Abstract: While verbal expressions, whether oral or written, sometimes fail to convey all that we wish to, and as precisely as we want to, this is seldom viewed as a limitation inherent in language itself. More often than not, it is attributed, with some justification, to a lack of adequate skills on the part of the speaker or author. Just as often, the fact that theoretical expressions in the social sciences are linguistically mediated is something that is taken for granted and regarded as unproblematic, while it is in the conceptual framework of the theory being considered that the source of

Book Title: The Southern Hospitality Myth-Ethics, Politics, Race, and American Memory
Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): Richardson Riché
Abstract: Historians have offered a variety of explanations of the origins and cultural practices of hospitality in the antebellum South. Economic historians have at times portrayed southern hospitality as evidence of conspicuous consumption and competition among wealthy planters, while cultural historians have treated it peripherally as a symptomatic expression of the southern code of honor. Although historians have offered different theories, they generally agree that the mythic dimensions of southern hospitality eventually outstripped its actual practices. Szczesiul examines why we have chosen to remember and valorize this particular aspect of the South, and he raises fundamental ethical questions that underlie both the concept of hospitality and the cultural work of American memory, particularly in light of the region's historical legacy of slavery and segregation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g2km4s

Book Title: New Perspectives on James Weldon Johnson's "The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man"- Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): Morrissette Noelle
Abstract: James Weldon Johnson (1871-1938) exemplified the ideal of the American public intellectual as a writer, educator, songwriter, diplomat, key figure of the Harlem Renaissance, and first African American executive of the NAACP. Originally published anonymously in 1912, Johnson's novel The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Manis considered one of the foundational works of twentieth-century African American literature, and its themes and forms have been taken up by other writers, from Ralph Ellison to Teju Cole.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g2kmgz

INTRODUCTION from: New Perspectives on James Weldon Johnson's "The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man"
Author(s) MORRISSETTE NOELLE
Abstract: When James Weldon Johnson wrote these words, he possessed not only the hindsight of sixty-two years in America but a carefully considered knowledge of centuries of New World blacks. His knowledge was familial and represented an expansive geography, based on his mother’s Bahamian and Haitian heritage and his father’s experiences as a free black man in Virginia who worked at hotels for wintering vacationers in Florida and had family in New York City. Johnson’s knowledge was personal, based on his experiences with Jim Crow and with the geographic, linguistic, and visual diversity of New World black cultures: Cuban itinerant workers

“Stepping across the Confines of Language and Race”: from: New Perspectives on James Weldon Johnson's "The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man"
Author(s) OLIVER LAWRENCE J.
Abstract: In his autobiography, Along This Way, James Weldon Johnson relates that after he moved from Jacksonville to New York City in 1902, intent on making his career as a songwriter with his brother, Rosamond, and Bob Cole, he began taking literature classes at Columbia University (then Columbia College) from Brander Matthews (1852–1929), whose writing he had read. Johnson’s description of his first meeting with Matthews leaves no doubt that it was a critical event in his literary career. Matthews received him cordially, and Johnson was flattered to discover that the professor was familiar with his work in musical comedy.

The Futurity of Miscegenation: from: New Perspectives on James Weldon Johnson's "The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man"
Author(s) PAULIN DIANA
Abstract: Although both Hopkins’s Of One Blood(1902–3) and Johnson’sThe Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man(1912) are now considered canonical African American literary texts, they have been examined most extensively in terms of their contributions to African American literary representation, including their excavations of the undocumented past and their complex depictions of self-discovery, interiority, passing, and racial hybridity.¹ Interdisciplinary scholarship has added to current understandings of the interactivity of these texts with diverse forms of African American, black diasporic, and transnational cultural production, like Susan Gillman’s work on Hopkins and the occult and Siobhan Somerville’s queer readings of both

[PART FOUR Introduction] from: New Perspectives on James Weldon Johnson's "The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man"
Abstract: The essay included in this collection was originally delivered as part of the 2009 W. E. B. Du Bois Lecture Series at Harvard University. Stepto discusses several scenes of racial education, both fictional and autobiographical, from major works by twentieth-century African American authors: Johnson’s The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man, Du Bois’sThe Souls of Black Folk, Zora Neale Hurston’sTheir Eyes Were Watching God, and Barack Obama’sDreams from My Father. The “search for race” involves the recognition and navigation of racial tropes by subjects who find themselves made into objects at the center of the racial lesson. Yracing

AFTERWORD from: New Perspectives on James Weldon Johnson's "The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man"
Author(s) SINGH AMRITJIT
Abstract: James Weldon Johnson, who thought of The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Manas a living, moving work— a “biography of the race”—no doubt would have had much to add to his novel as he viewed more than a century of African American experiences following its publication. The novel has proven prescient in the way it anticipated the ongoing story of African American life. This story, still unfolding in the twenty-first century, is central to everything the United States as a nation stands for. As Ralph Ellison reminds readers in his essay “Twentieth-Century Fiction and the Black Mask of Humanity,”

Book Title: Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making- Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Fernández Christian
Abstract: This edited volume offers new perspectives from leading scholars on the important work of Inca Garcilaso de la Vega (1539-1616), one of the first Latin American writers to present an intellectual analysis of pre-Columbian history and culture and the ensuing colonial period. To the contributors, Inca Garcilaso's Royal Commentaries of the Incaspresented an early counter-hegemonic discourse and a reframing of the history of native non-alphabetic cultures that undermined the colonial rhetoric of his time and the geopolitical divisions it purported. Through his research in both Andean and Renaissance archives, Inca Garcilaso sought to connect these divergent cultures into one world.This collection offers five classical studies ofRoyal Commentariespreviously unavailable in English, along with seven new essays that cover topics including Andean memory, historiography, translation, philosophy, trauma, and ethnic identity. This cross-disciplinary volume will be of interest to students and scholars of Latin American history, culture, comparative literature, subaltern studies, and works in translation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g2kmm1

INTRODUCTION from: Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Castro-Klarén Sara
Abstract: The central idea for this volume on the seminal Royal Commentaries of the IncasandGeneral History of Peru(1609) by Inca Garcilaso de la Vega (1539–1616) is to bring together, in a single volume in English, key essays authored by some of the most distinguished students of Inca Garcilaso’s work. Thus far, most of the book-length scholarship on Inca Garcilaso’s work has been published in Spanish, with the notable exception of John Grier Varner’sEl Inca: The Life and Times of Garcilaso de la Vega(1968) and Margarita Zamora’sLanguage, Authority, and Indigenous History in the Comentarios reales

1 RHETORIC AND POLITICS from: Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Fernández Christian
Abstract: Studies on Inca Garcilaso have paid little attention to the coat of arms that appears in the frontispiece of the first edition of the Royal Commentaries(1609).¹ Indeed, this is so much the case that most modern editions do not even include a reproduction of it.² I argue here that the analysis of the symbols represented in Garcilaso’s heraldic insignia is of the utmost importance for an interpretation of this work. Those same symbols are extremely relevant for an interpretation of Garcilaso’s self-fashioning of his mestizo identity.³

3 THE DISSEMINATION AND READING OF THE ROYAL COMMENTARIES IN THE PERUVIAN VICEROYALTY from: Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Pérez Pedro M. Guibovich
Abstract: Read, glossed, cited, and paraphrased, Inca Garcilaso de la Vega’s Royal Commentaries(1609) have enjoyed enormous acclaim from readers since their first appearance at the beginning of the seventeenth century.¹ The existence of numerous translations into most modern languages proves their success in Europe. Several factors explain this fact: the socioethnic background of the author, the literary quality of the work, the nature of the sources consulted for its composition, and the fact that until late into the nineteenth century it would remain the only published text solely dedicated to the topic of Incan history. The purpose of this chapter

4 TRANSLATION AND WRITING IN THE WORK OF INCA GARCILASO DE LA VEGA from: Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Leiva Wendy P.
Abstract: Until the end of the nineteenth century, the work of Inca Garcilaso de la Vega (Cusco 1539–Córdoba 1616) was considered to be the definitive work of reference for studying the history of the Incario.¹The discovery of new documents and the publication of chronicles unknown in the first decades of the twentieth century illuminated aspects of Garcilaso’s biography and produced significant changes in the evaluation of his work as well as the trustworthiness of his data. In the second half of the twentieth century, new approaches became oriented toward considering Garcilaso’s writing as a function of the creative imagination. These

6 “FOR IT IS BUT A SINGLE WORLD” from: Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Castro-Klarén Sara
Abstract: One of the objectives of this chapter is to try to assess not only the survival of the Royal Commentaries(1609) as a text for our day, but also to advance the notion that Garcilaso’s ability to appeal to different readerships throughout the centuries, and perhaps in the future, is grounded in the strategies of translation and commentary that Garcilaso detected in the work of Marsilio Ficino (1433–99), Plato’s Renaissance translator and commentator.¹ Another point argues that Garcilaso’s familiarity with Plato’s ideas on the origin of the world and the natural diversity of its cultures allows Garcilaso’s to mount

7 WRITING THE HISTORY OF AN ANDEAN GHOST from: Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Martínez Francisco A. Ortega
Abstract: Garcilaso de la Vega’s The Royal Commentaries(1609) has enjoyed an everwider appeal since the early seventeenth century.¹ Such rising popularity has taken place despite fundamental changes in readers’ criteria of evaluation and appreciation of this work. Up to the late nineteenth century, Garcilaso’s account had been taken as the most accomplished historical depiction of the Inca, but the discovery of new written and archeological sources and the emergence of modern historiography source criticism led historians and anthropologists to challenge its truthfulness. As a result, Garcilaso’shistorylost credibility. At the same time, thenarrativewas hailed as possessing the

9 LOCKE AND INCA GARCILASO from: Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Fuerst James W.
Abstract: The following foray into Garcilacism—the study of the reception and appropriation of the works of El Inca Garcilaso de la Vega (1539– 1616)—is also an excursion into the political thought of John Locke (1632–1704).¹ However unlikely this pairing may seem, it is one that Locke himself submitted for perusal in section 14 of his Second Treatise of Government(1689). Initially Locke’s “Promises and Bargains for Truck, & c . between two Men in the Desert Island, mentioned by Garcilasso De la vega, in hisHistory of Peru” (Two Treatises, 276; section 14) affords precious little territory upon

10 SIGNIFYIN(G), DOUBLE CONSCIOUSNESS, AND COLONIALITY from: Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Lamana Gonzalo
Abstract: Garcilaso’s work has been quite popular. Published soon after they were written, the Royal Commentarieswere not only celebrated

AFTERWORD from: Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Beverley John
Abstract: Every form of cultural identity is inauthentic, a kind of imposture. But because of the circumstances of Spanish colonialism, Latin American cultural identity is perhaps especially so. I am far from having the scholarly authority to speak about Inca Garcilaso de la Vega or his work. At best, I know it superficially. But I know enough to at least suggest that Garcilaso might be said to be the founding moment of that Latin American cultural in authenticity. To celebrate the anniversary of Royal Commentariesis also to mark a limit to a certain conception of Latin American identity that sees

Book Title: Indebted-Capitalism and Religion in the Writings of S. Y. Agnon
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Sagiv Yonatan
Abstract: This is the first book to examine the oeuvre of Shmuel Yosef Agnon, 1966 Nobel laureate in literature, through a reading that combines perspectives from economic theory, semiotics, psychoanalysis, narrative theory, and Jewish and religious studies. Sagiv outlines the vital role economy plays in the construction of religion, subjectivity, language, and thought in Agnon's work, and, accordingly, explores his literary use of images of debt, money, and economy to examine how these themes illuminate other focal points in the canonical author's work, excavating the economic infrastructure of discourses that are commonly considered to reside beyond the economic sphere.Sagiv's analysis of Agnon's work, renowned for its paradoxical articulation of the impact of modernity on traditional Jewish society, exposes an overarching distrust regarding the sustainability of any economic structure. The concrete and symbolic economies surveyed in this project are prone to cyclical crises. Under what Sagiv terms Agnon's "law of permanent debt," the stability and profitability of economies are always temporary. Agnon's literary economy, transgressing traditional closures, together with his profound irony, make it impossible to determine if these economic crises are indeed the product of the break with tradition or, alternatively, if this theodicy is but a fantasy, marking permanent debt as the inherent economic infrastructure of human existence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g2kmnj

INTRODUCTION from: Indebted
Abstract: Reading the works of Shmuel Yosef Agnon in New York in 2008 against the backdrop of the economic crisis evolving in the United States at that time had an unintended effect: I started to think of Agnon as an economist. Encountering Agnon in high school (as every child who grows up in the Israeli education system does), and later in university, my perception of the canonical author was shaped through Gershon Shaked’s paradoxical definition of Agnon as a “revolutionary traditionalist.” Born in 1888 in Galicia, an erudite “pupil” of the Jewish sacred multi-textual tradition but also of the writings of

CHAPTER 3 CAN’T BUY ME LOVE from: Indebted
Abstract: “In common sense as well as in scholarship,” writes Eva Illouz, “romantic love stands above the realm of commodity exchange and even against the social order.”¹ Indeed, Illouz’s research on love in capitalist culture begins by expanding on this common divide; whereas the concept of “romantic love” is predicated on the private sphere, irrationality, selflessness, and singularity, the capitalist market is associated with the public sphere, rationality, self-interest, and interchangeability. However, working against this division, Illouz shows how the very modern construction of romantic love is paradoxically shaped by the forces of the capitalist market itself. In a similar vein,

Book Title: Transcendence and the Concrete-Selected Writings
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Moore Ian Alexander
Abstract: Jean Wahl (1888GÇô1974), once considered by the likes of Georges Bataille, Gilles Deleuze, Emmanuel Levinas, and Gabriel Marcel to be among the greatest French philosophers, has today nearly been forgotten outside France. Yet his influence on French philosophical thought can hardly be overestimated. Levinas wrote that GÇ£during over a half century of teaching and research, [Wahl] was the life force of the academic, extra-academic, and even, to a degree anti-academic philosophy necessary to a great culture.GÇ¥ And Deleuze, for his part, commented that GÇ£Apart from Sartre, who remained caught none the less in the trap of the verb to be, the most important philosopher in France was Jean Wahl.GÇ¥_x000D_ Besides engaging with the likes of Bataille, Bergson, Deleuze, Derrida, Levinas, Maritain, and Sartre, Wahl also played a significant role, in some cases almost singlehandedly, in introducing French philosophy to movements like existentialism, and American pragmatism and literature, and thinkers like Hegel, Kierkegaard, Nietzsche, Jaspers, and Heidegger. Yet Wahl was also an original philosopher and poet in his own right. This volume of selections from WahlGÇÖs philosophical writings makes a selection of his most important work available to the English-speaking philosophical community for the first time._x000D_ Jean Wahl was Professor of Philosophy at the Sorbonne from 1936 to 1967, save during World War II, which he spent in the United States, having escaped from the Drancy internment camp. His books to appear in English include The Pluralist Philosophies of England and America (Open Court, 1925), The Philosopher's Way (Oxford UP, 1948), A Short History of Existentialism (Philosophical Library, 1949), and Philosophies of Existence (Schocken, 1969).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g2kn1q

2 Preface to Toward the Concrete from: Transcendence and the Concrete
Author(s) Lawlor Leonard
Abstract: Three years after his book on Hegel, and two years after his study of Plato’s Parmenides, Jean Wahl published a work that in many ways captured the spirit of the age. As Jean-Paul Sartre noted, many years later,

4 Hegel and Kierkegaard from: Transcendence and the Concrete
Author(s) Ford Russell
Abstract: In 1930, a substantial review of Le malheur de la conscience dans la philosophie de Hegel(The unhappiness of consciousness in Hegel’s philosophy) appeared in theRevue Philosophique de la France et de l’Étranger. Its author was Alexandre Koyré. Although now principally known as a philosopher and historian of science, Koyré’s initial work was in the philosophy of religion; his thesis, on René Descartes’s proofs for the existence of God, was completed in 1922—two years after Jean Wahl’s own thesis on Descartes—and in 1929 he received hisdoctorat d’ état for La philosophie de Jakob Boehme(The philosophy

5 Heidegger and Kierkegaard: from: Transcendence and the Concrete
Author(s) Moore Ian Alexander
Abstract: It is only slightly hyperbolic to say that Jean Wahl’s “Heidegger and Kierkegaard: An Investigation into the Original Elements of Heidegger’s Philosophy” legitimized Søren Kierkegaard in French academia and inaugurated French existentialism as such.¹ First published in 1932/1933 in Recherches Philosophiques, “perhaps the most significant [journal] of its time,”² it was republished in 1938 as an appendix toÉtudes kierkegaardiennes, which would go on to become the most important book on Kierkegaard in France. Wahl’s article laid the groundwork for the anthropological, humanist reading of Martin Heidegger by showing how Heidegger’s philosophy must be seen as an attempt to ontologize

Book Title: The Quest for Meaning-Friends of Wisdom from Plato to Levinas
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Peperzak Adriaan T.
Abstract: One of our most distinguished thinkers, Adriaan Peperzak has masterfully explored the connections between philosophy, ethics, religion, and the social and historical contexts of human experience. He offers a personal gathering of influences on his own work as guides to the uses of philosophy in our search for sense and meaning. In concise, direct, and deeply felt chapters, Peperzak moves from Plato, Plotinus, and the Early Christian theologians to Anselm, Bonaventure, Descartes, Pascal, Leibniz, Hegel, and Levinas. Throughout these carefully linked essays, he touches on the fundamental ideas-from reason and faith to freedom and tradition-that inform the questions his work has consistently addressed, most specifically those concerning philosophy as a practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g2kn48

1 Philosophia from: The Quest for Meaning
Abstract: The relation between philosophy and theology is no longer a hotly debated question among Christians, and yet it is constitutive for the framework in which their thinking develops. Their schools seem to have found a modus vivendifor the coexistence of both disciplines, but as far as I know, this coexistence is not supported by a generally accepted metatheory and “philosophico-theological” methodology. In this chapter I would like to challenge a powerful conception of the way in which philosophy and theology are and should be related and to propose a different conception. I will focus here on these disciplines insofar

10 Leibniz on God and Suffering from: The Quest for Meaning
Abstract: In 1710 Leibniz presented his conception of the relation between God and the evil that disfigures his creation in his Theodicy¹. This work does not present a systematic treatise on positive or natural theology but is rather a long series of polemical arguments, the whole of which constitutes a plea for the goodness of God: “it is the case of God that we plead.”² Bayle is the principal prosecutor, and Leibniz takes the defense of the accused, in full confidence that “the assistance of God is not lacking to those who do not lack good will.”

12 The Significance of Levinas for Christian Thought from: The Quest for Meaning
Abstract: Levinas’s work rings with the voice of a master, not only in the sense of a teacher who translates a common heritage, but also in the sense of a critic

1 Continental Philosophy of Religion: from: Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Goodchild Philip
Abstract: What is a Continental philosophy of religion?¹ Philosophy of religion, in English-speaking countries, has a clear and distinct identity, and has been enjoying a resurgence: it focuses largely on the truth-claims, rationality, and coherence of religious propositions, and particularly those of “classical theism.”² Yet for those who work in the traditions of philosophy derived from Germany and France, the problems, tasks, concepts, reasoning, and cultural location are markedly different from this identity. When even the individual terms of the phrase “Continental philosophy of religion” are highly contestable, can this title designate any determinate field? In spite of its weaknesses, this

3 Toward a “Continental” Philosophy of Religion: from: Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Halteman Matthew C.
Abstract: In what follows, I examine this Continental legacy in the context of Jacques Derrida’s recent work on the concept of responsibility. First I discuss three guiding themes (the limits of

5 Anxious Responsibility and Responsible Anxiety: from: Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Bergo Bettina
Abstract: In recent years two thinkers, Derrida and Levinas, have contributed decisively to shaping the concept of radical responsibility, both before the human other and what has been called the divine. Within the parameters of philosophy of religion, if we would understand the way in which the concept of responsibility opens new avenues of thinking about the meaning of human justice, then we must come to terms with what Derrida and Levinas have recently argued. Furthermore, both men’s thought—preeminently and explicitly that of Derrida—is as if haunted by the work of Kierkegaard.

6 Derrida, the Messianic, and Eschatology from: Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Banham Gary
Abstract: The predominant reception of Specters of Marxhas been to view it as a work in which Derrida reveals an unexpected receptivity to the notion of the messianic. That this understanding of the work is at best partial is what I wish to make clear, through setting out the kind of use Derrida is making of the notion of the messianic. In one of the most frequently cited passages from the work, Derrida refers to an “ascesis” that strips the messianic hope of all Biblical forms, and he adds that this “denuding” is done in view of:

7 Birth and the Powers of Horror: from: Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Jantzen Grace M.
Abstract: In these words, Julia Kristeva explores the religious sensibility of the seventeenth-century mystic Jeanne Guyon, setting her against Descartes, who completed the foundation of secular modernity by the “subordination of passions to thought.”¹ In Kristeva’s work, the transformation of the West into a secular symbolic is crucial for understanding the modern subject, who, with the loss of religion, no longer has available the “cathartic power" that was part of the central drama of Christianity.² Human subjects, she holds (following Freud and Lacan), are constituted by “a series of splittings . . . birth, weaning, separation, frustration, castration.” Such splittings are

14 Schelling, Bloch, and the Continental Philosophy of Religion from: Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Hudson Wayne
Abstract: In this essay I discuss in part I some aspects of the approach to religion that Schelling developed in his late “positive philosophy.” In part II, I explain how these ideas were taken up and reworked by Ernst Bloch. In part III, I interpret the implications of these developments for the contemporary Continental philosophy of religion. The first two parts of the essay are fairly conventional; the third part is not. Since at least the seventeenth century, there have been attempts to challenge “stasis thinking” in the West. The most important challenge to stasis thought, however, occurred in the work

Book Title: How John Works-Storytelling in the Fourth Gospel
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Sheridan Ruth
Abstract: An introduction to the Fourth Gospel through its narrative features and dynamicsFifteen features of story design that comprise the Gospel of JohnShort, targeted essays about how John works that can be used as starting points for the study of other Gospels/texts
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g69w8s

1 Genre from: How John Works
Author(s) Attridge Harold W.
Abstract: Crafting a literary work does not happen in isolation. Imitation and creative adaptation of extant models are regular parts of the creative process. Imitation and adaptation result in the formation of literary “genres” or types that conform to certain patterns, generating expectations on the part of readers.¹ Genres are thus inevitable wherever literature is created.² In some contexts, generic patterns may be more formally recognized and described by theorists, but genres are operating whether formally recognized or not.

9 Imagery from: How John Works
Author(s) Lee Dorothy A.
Abstract: Images in literary works are words that appeal to the senses to conjure up a corresponding picture in the mind of the reader. By definition, such images appeal to the reader’s imagination, which has the capacity both to visualize and to interpret. The Gospel of John uses a remarkable number of sensory images to tell its story and express its unique perspective on faith. Many of these images, through the course of the Johannine narrative, take on the character of religious symbols: vehicles of the divine world. Appealing to the imagination, image and symbol make it possible for the implied

10 Scripture from: How John Works
Author(s) Chennattu Rekha M.
Abstract: This chapter illustrates how the Fourth Evangelist uses and interprets Scripture to develop the Johannine narrative of Jesus in a unique manner in order to make John’s Gospel truly credible and normative. In what follows, we shall first examine the use of Old Testament theological motifs, metaphors, imageries, allusions, festivals, and structural frameworks in John’s Gospel. We shall then explore the use and interpretation of direct and indirect Old Testament citations as well as references to the law in the gospel. An investigation of the understanding of the words as well as commandments of Jesus in the gospel will follow.

15 Culture from: How John Works
Author(s) Hill Charles E.
Abstract: As even the casual reader knows, there is something different about John’s Gospel. No, there are lots of things about it that are different. Many of the literary traits that help make John’s Gospel what it is and which serve to differentiate it from other books and even from other gospels have been identified and explored in the present volume. Genre, style, time and space, imagery, characterization, protagonist, plot, point of view, use of Scripture, rhetoric, persuasion, closure, audience: each plays a part in shaping the story of the gospel, helping to reveal “how John works.”

1 Language and Conversion Within the Limits of De Trinitate from: The Gift of Love
Abstract: As he begins the work, Augustine presents his De Trinitateas a response to the cry of the Psalmist, “Seek his face always,”¹ through a pursuit of “the unity of the three, of Father and Son and Holy Spirit”²—an endeavor, he warns, in which no “mistake is more dangerous, or the search more laborious, or the discovery more advantageous.”³ Having struggled with his own conception of God for years⁴ and all too aware of the difficulty of the text to come, the Bishop of Hippo invites his reader along the path of charity, in hope that this “gentle authority”

9 Appraising the Gift of Love from: The Gift of Love
Abstract: If the theologian must obtain forgiveness for every essay in theology—forgiveness for speaking beginning with another, for speaking in another’s words, and also for speaking these groundless words that are always haunted by the impossibility of the very unconditionality the theologian hopes to signify through them—then must Marion also do so? That is, if Marion names the unconditioned and names it God, then surely he too must seek permission for this presumptive attempt at impossible signification. It is thinking the unconditioned, the excess, that drives Marion’s phenomenological work, but theologically considered, he is seeking not the unconditionedas

Conclusion to Part Three from: The Gift of Love
Abstract: To set about making an inexpressible reality inexpressibly seen¹ (or the invisible God visible as invisible, the impossible possibleas impossible) in a work of theology is, itself, an impossible task and one that was never my intention. It was never my desire to try to present the Trinity to my readers, to present Godas such. It is my hope, however, that this work might instead serve as an exercise in phenomenological theology, whereby the reception of the gift of love can be explored in the transformation it effects within us. It was never my intention to put this

Book Title: Acting for Others-Trinitarian Communion and Christological Agency
Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): Hinlicky Paul R.
Abstract: This book explores why the metaphor of the church as a family is insufficient. Taking up Arendt’s notions of action and her criticism of privatization, the author examines community, relation, and human subjects through the work of Bonhoeffer and Stăniloae. Synthesizing Bonhoeffer and Stăniloae, Christian calling is unfolded not only as acting for others, but also with others as Trinitarian participatory response—response to the words and deeds of the three divine Persons acting in communion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ggjhd0

Foreword from: Acting for Others
Author(s) Hinlicky Paul R.
Abstract: Michaela Kušnieriková, in this welcome study, takes her place in the rising generation of theologians theorizing Christianity after Christendom. She does this work, fittingly enough, from the religious crossroads of Europe: between East and West, to be sure, but also the battle site of the Wars of Religion between North and South that so devastated and discredited the church. Kušnieriková grew up in the spiritually vacated place where all the subsequent bloody contests between the would-be ideological replacements of religion exchanged totalitarianisms.

4 Composite, Partial, Created and Floating Bodies: from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Simandiraki-Grimshaw Anna
Abstract: This paper operates within the framework of the Cretan Bronze Age ( c.3000–1100 BC) and focuses on a category of complex buildings dating mainlyc.1900–1430 BC. We use the term “Palaces” for the sake of continuity, although we are mindful that it does not automatically imply (only) a royal residence (cf. Hood 1995; Day and Relaki 2002; Schoep 2010). We also use the term “Minoan” to refer to the Cretan Bronze Age, again for the sake of consistency, although we are aware that this also invites analysis/deconstruction (cf. Karadimas and Momigliano 2004; Whitley 2006). We are particularly

15 Lithics and Identity at the Middle Palaeolithic site of Lakonis Cave I, Southern Peloponnese, Greece from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Panagopoulou Eleni
Abstract: Recent developments in the study of Palaeolithic society have emphasised the need to adopt a more comprehensive approach to the interpretation of human behaviour by taking into consideration various scales of analysis, encompassing both time and space. These scales of analysis can include individuals interacting for only a few hours in the course of a brief encounter, to larger groups and for longer periods, in the context of complex social networks within extended spatial units (Gamble 1999, 67–8). The study of individuals in particular, has generally been regarded as beyond the resolution of the Palaeolithic record (Clark 1992, 107),

18 From Potter’s Mark to the Potter Who Marks from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Christakis Kostis
Abstract: The application of marks on pottery during the manufacture and before the firing of a pot is a widespread practice in both the archaeological and ethnographic records of a range of different cultural milieus. Given that the mark was applied before the firing process, it is generally agreed that it is the potter who was responsible for marking the pot. Discussions so far have focused exclusively on the function and meaning of these marks. Most scholars relate them to potters and/or workshops ( e.g.Bikaki 1984, 9, 22, 42; Papadopoulos 1994; Hirschfeld 1999, 33; Lindblom 2001, 132–3; Ditze 2007, 279

26 Collective Selves and Funerary Rituals. from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Papadimitriou Nikolas
Abstract: The present paper aims at investigating — both theoretically and in the context of the Early Mycenaean period in mainland Greece (Table 26.1) — the relation of funerary rituals with processes of shaping, negotiating and transmitting collective identities. In particular, I wish to explore the role of specially designated ritual spaces (in this case, the dromoiof Mycenaean tombs) as frameworks for the creation of embodied experiences of shared remembering and identification. In this effort, I will draw extensively on anthropological literature examining rituals as public performances. Anthropologists recognise widely the ability of rituals to instil social values, worldviews and power relations

Book Title: Marxism and Form-20th-Century Dialectical Theories of Literature
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): SARTRE JEAN-PAUL
Abstract: For more than thirty years, Fredric Jameson has been one of the most productive, wide-ranging, and distinctive literary theorists in the United States and the Anglophone world. Marxism and Form provided a pioneering account of the work of the major European Marxist theorists--T. W. Adorno, Walter Benjamin, Herbert Marcuse, Ernst Bloch, Georg Lukács, and Jean-Paul Sartre--work that was, at the time, largely neglected in the English-speaking world. Through penetrating readings of each theorist, Jameson developed a critical mode of engagement that has had tremendous in.uence. He provided a framework for analyzing the connection between art and the historical circumstances of its making--in particular, how cultural artifacts distort, repress, or transform their circumstances through the abstractions of aesthetic form.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ggjkw6

CHAPTER ONE T. W. ADORNO; OR, HISTORICAL TROPES from: Marxism and Form
Abstract: To whom can one present a writer whose principal subject is the disappearance of the public? What serious justification can be made for an attempt to summarize, simplify, make more widely accessible a work which insists relentlessly on the need for modern art and thought to be difficult, to guard their truth and freshness by the austere demands they make on the powers of concentration of their participants, by their refusal of all habitual response in their attempt to reawaken numb thinking and deadened perception to a raw, wholly unfamiliar real world?

Introduction: from: Psychoanalytic Mediations between Marxist and Postcolonial Readings of the Bible
Author(s) Liew Tat-siong Benny
Abstract: The essays in this volume question whether and how psychoanalytic readings might mediate between the important materialist grounding of Marxism and the poststructuralist analysis of exclusion and oppression in postcolonialism. Taken together, these essays consider how the unconscious workings of the very real material exploitations of capitalism and colonialism (ancient and modern) are variously worked out in the biblical text and its afterlives, via fetish or antifetish, storytelling, silence, dream work, and fantasy.

Conversations in Africa: from: Psychoanalytic Mediations between Marxist and Postcolonial Readings of the Bible
Author(s) Punt Jeremy
Abstract: In South African biblical studies, postcolonial work finds itself in an unenviable position. It is often overlooked, notwithstanding the focus and concern of a postcolonial hermeneutical approach to include and give voice to the muted voices of the colonized, the voiceless, the marginalized, or the oppressed. Postcolonial investigations of disproportionate power relationships at the geopolitical as well as subsidiary levels, and at social and personal levels of the powerful ruler and the subaltern, remain un(der) utilized. So, too, do investigations of the interrelationship and debunking of (apparent) distinctions and contrasts between center and periphery.¹ Postcolonial biblical interpretation’s focus on relationships

Book Title: The Chatter of the Visible-Montage and Narrative in Weimar Germany
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): McBride Patrizia C.
Abstract: The Chatter of the Visible examines the paradoxical narrative features of the photomontage aesthetics of artists associated with Dada, Constructivism, and the New Objectivity. While montage strategies have commonly been associated with the purposeful interruption of and challenge to narrative consistency and continuity, McBride offers an historicized reappraisal of 1920s and 1930s German photomontage work to show that its peculiar mimicry was less a rejection of narrative and more an extension or permutation of it—a means for thinking in narrative textures exceeding constraints imposed by “flat" print media (especially the novel and other literary genres). McBride’s contribution to the conversation around Weimar-era montage is in her situation of the form of the work as a discursive practice in its own right, which affords humans a new way to negotiate temporality, as a particular mode of thinking that productively relates the particular to the universal, or as a culturally specific form of cognition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gk08k8

3 Storytelling in the Age of Its Technological Reproducibility: from: The Chatter of the Visible
Abstract: “The Work of Art in the Age of Its Technological Reproducibility” (1935–39) and “The Storyteller” share much common ground. Both texts seize on the transformed status of art and aesthetic experience as a privileged point of entry for reflecting on the modern condition. Each essay examines the changes wrought by a watershed event in the development of technology—in “The Storyteller,” the propagation of movable print and a book culture that displaces the oral practice of storytelling, marking the dislocation of the collective wisdom of tradition by the putative objectivity of information; in the artwork essay, the advent of

CHAPTER 5 Baggage Screening from: The Muses on Their Lunch Hour
Abstract: By situating four of her digital media installations among the permanent artifacts of the Freud Museum, Renate Ferro ensures that her work interceded with, interrupted, and blended in with the collections and ephemera of the two Freuds: Sigmund and Anna. An installation in Anna Freud’s study on the second floor of the Hampstead house is called “This Suitcase Has No

Book Title: Assia Djebar-Out of Algeria
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): FORSDICK CHARLES
Abstract: For more than fifty years, Assia Djebar, former Silver Chair of French at New York University and winner of the Neustadt Prize for Contribution to World Literature, used the tools of poetry, fiction, drama and film to vividly portray the world of Muslim women in all its complexity. In the process, she became one of the most important figures in North African literature. In Assia Djebar, Jane Hiddleston traces Djebar's development as a writer against the backdrop of North Africa's tumultuous history. Whereas Djebar's early writings were largely an attempt to delineate clearly the experience of being a woman, an intellectual, and an Algerian embedded in that often violent history, she had in her more recent work evinced a growing sense that the influence of French culture on Algerian letters may make such a project impossible. The first book-length study of this significant writer,Assia Djebarwill be of tremendous interest to anyone studying post-colonial literature, women's studies or Francophone culture in general.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gn6bp9

CHAPTER ONE The Early Years from: Assia Djebar
Abstract: Assia Djebar wrote four novels during the first phase of her career between 1957 and 1967. After leaving the Ecole normale supérieure at Sèvres during the war of independence, she worked for the national newspaper El moudjahidconducting interviews with Algerian refugees in Tunis and Morocco, before going on to teach history in Rabat and later in Algiers. The novels consist at this stage in a form of experimentation, and the period can be seen as one of apprenticeship in the strategies and techniques of writing. At times highly naive and a little self-indulgent, Djebar’s early novels set out to

CHAPTER THREE Feminism and Women’s Identity from: Assia Djebar
Abstract: The notion of womanhood or femininity occupies a fraught position in Djebar’s work. She is on the one hand clearly preoccupied with Algerian women’s particular experiences, narrating numerous scenes of female oppression and liberation occurring at different moments in the history of the country. She sets out to retrieve suppressed feminine voices as she reflects on the relation between women and writing, and on the importance of creating a sense of agency through self-expression. On the other hand, however, Djebar also unsettles the very category of femininity, dissociating herself from women’s writing movements and contesting the validity of any specified

CHAPTER FOUR Violence, Mourning and Singular Testimony from: Assia Djebar
Abstract: During the 1990s Djebar’s work becomes increasingly, immediately politically engaged. While Loin de Médinereturns to the early days of Islam in order to denounce the misuse of the past by resurgent Islamists at the end of the 1980s, Djebar’s next group of texts focuses overtly and pointedly on the present. As the political climate in Algeria becomes steadily more fraught, reflections on femininity and genealogy are superseded by a direct engagement with current confrontations and losses, and Djebar’s horror at the upsurge of Islamist terrorism leads her to interrogate more pointedly the contemporary disintegration of her native land. Bearing

CHAPTER FIVE Haunted Algeria from: Assia Djebar
Abstract: The most recent phase of Djebar’s work, including La Femme sans sépultureandLa Disparition de la langue française, announces a further step towards expatriation, a break from any intended quest for identity and a reconfiguration of Algeria as necessarily lost. WhileLe Blanc de l’AlgérieandOran, langue mortebegin a process of mourning and resuscitate the ghosts of some of Algeria’s writers, intellectuals and resistance fighters, the next two novels present that process of mourning as always, inevitably incomplete. Algeria in this final phase is not merely a victim of loss butconstitutedby loss, peopled by spectres,

Conclusion from: Assia Djebar
Abstract: Djebar’s trajectory and development as a writer can be conceived as a gradual movement away from any specific form of identification with Algeria towards a new configuration of her native land as severed, diverse and haunted by its past. The lingering traces of a search for the specific in the earlier works give way, by the time of La Femme sans sépultureandLa Disparition, to a depiction of Algeria’s culture, language and history as intractable or spectral – present but impossible to grasp. It is in this sense that her writing constitutes a hesitant ‘expatriation’, a movement outside the

Book Title: Science Fiction Double Feature-The Science Fiction Film as Cult Text
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): DUCHOVNAY GERALD
Abstract: Critical discussion of cult cinema has often noted its tendency to straddle or ignore boundaries, to pull together different sets of conventions, narrative formulas, or character types for the almost surreal pleasure to be found in their sudden juxtapositions or narrative combination. With its own boundary-blurring nature—as both science and fiction, reality and fantasy—science fiction has played a key role in such cinematic cult formation. This volume examines that largely unexplored relationship, looking at how the sf film’s own double nature neatly matches up with a persistent double vision common to the cult film. It does so by bringing together an international array of scholars to address key questions about the intersections of sf and cult cinema: how different genre elements, directors, and stars contribute to cult formation; what role fan activities, including “con" participation, play in cult development; and how the occulted or “bad" sf cult film works. The volume pursues these questions by addressing a variety of such sf cult works, including Robot Monster (1953), Zardoz (1974), A Boy and His Dog (1975), Tetsuo: The Iron Man (1989), Space Truckers (1996), Ghost in the Shell 2 (2004), and Iron Sky (2012). What these essays afford is a revealing vision of both the sf aspects of much cult film activity and the cultish aspects of the whole sf genre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gn6btc

6. Whedon, Browncoats, and the Big Damn Narrative: from: Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Wilcox Rhonda V.
Abstract: The story of Firefly’s death and rebirth is fairly well known; indeed, for some, the story has gained the status of myth, a myth that they are “living in.” The television series was created by Joss Whedon, famous for the success ofBuffy the Vampire Slayer(1997–2003), which ran for seven years, and the spin-offAngel(1999–2004), which ran for five. The Fox network ranFireflyfor just three months: September 20, 2002 to December 20, 2002. Yet the fans and the series’ makers refused to let it die. Organized expressions of fan interest, such as postcard campaigns

11. Science Fiction and the Cult of Ed Wood: from: Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Hill Rodney F.
Abstract: As a body of work, the films of Edward D. Wood, Jr., virtually defy classification. Wood’s career output included exploitation films, short subjects, industrial films, commercials, pornography, and unproduced screenplays, as well as various forays into sf. Yet even at an individual level, several of Wood’s best-known films elude our grasp in terms of genre: Bride of the Monster(aka,Bride of the Atom, 1955) freely traverses the borders between sf and horror; and recent criticism has noted the avant-garde qualities evident in Wood’s sf opusPlan 9 from Outer Space(1956, released 1959), as well as the exploitation film

15. Bubba Ho-tep and the Seriously Silly Cult Film from: Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Weinstock Jeffrey Andrew
Abstract: By looking at the example of Don Coscarelli’s unapologetically silly 2002 film, Bubba Ho-tep, I want to propose that we consider sf, fantasy, and indeed cult films of all stripes as both literal and figurative “strange attractors.” Excluding perhaps what J. P. Telotte refers to as “classical” cult films inThe Cult Film Experience—mainstream Hollywood films such asCasablanca(Michael Curtiz, 1942) that have inspired fiercely loyal fan followings—cult films typically are works that foreground their thematic, structural, and/or aesthetic deviation from loosely defined Hollywood norms. Theyliterallyattract due to their strangeness. Borrowing from chaos theory, however,

Book Title: Patrick Chamoiseau-Recovering Memory
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): FORSDICK CHARLES
Abstract: This timely new book skilfully examines the work of the award-winning writer Patrick Chamoiseau. Considered by many as one of the most innovative writers to hit the French literary scene in over 40 years, Chamoiseau made his name with his book Texaco (published in 1992 and winner of the highest literary prize in France, the Prix Goncourt). His books have gone on to sell millions and his work has been translated by a number of academic presses. McCusker sets the author in context, providing a valuable contribution to ‘memory studies’ by looking at literary representation of memory in Martinique, a society founded on slavery but now politically assimilated to the metropolitan centre, France.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gn6cf5

Book Title: Patrick Modiano-Second Edition
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): KAWAKAMI AKANE
Abstract: Conceived as a second edition to Kawakami's acclaimed A Self-Conscious Art, which was the first full-length study in English of Patrick Modiano’s work, this book has been comprehensively updated with two new chapters, notably discussing the author's recent work and his Nobel Prize win. Kawakami shows how by parodying precursors such as Proust or the nouveau romanciers, Modiano's narratives are built around a profound lack of faith in the ability of writing to retrieve the past through memory, and this failure is acknowledged in the discreet playfulness that characterises his novels. This welcome update on the work of one of the most successful modern French novelists will be essential reading for scholars working on contemporary French writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gn6dst

CHAPTER FOUR Being Serious: from: Patrick Modiano
Abstract: Modiano is still best known for writing novels set in the Occupation. His apparent obsession, especially in his earlier works, with this dark period of French history has been the main concern of his critics and reviewers. It is certainly a controversial subject: it was one of the main causes for the impact that Modiano’s first novels had on the public, instantly creating a reputation for the young author.¹ We may wonder, however, whether there was more to this reaction than that of simple choice of subject matter. What is the nature of Modiano’s treatment of the subject? Is it

CHAPTER SIX Being Popular: from: Patrick Modiano
Abstract: Modiano may be both serious and playful, but above all he is popular. His novels sell extremely well: they are always on the best-seller lists when they first appear, and even his older works display staying power on the market. What are the reasons for this popularity, structurally and ‘socially’ speaking? Is there a certain novelistic genre or structure related to popularity? What is the social status of that kind of novel?

Imaging the Present: from: At the Limits of Memory
Author(s) Griffiths Claire
Abstract: As memories of slavery re-emerge in recent historiographies of the transatlantic slave trade, contemporary visual culture from Francophone Africa is participating in this reassessment of the past as part of an on-going discussion of ‘development’ in present-day Africa. By engaging with the history of the slave trade and exploring its connections with the use of African labour in contemporary modes of production in West Africa, recent art works from the region that once formed the heartland of the French slave trade can be seen to offer a discursive platform on which to foreground ‘alternative memorial practices and forms of memory-making’

Book Title: Strange Narrators in Contemporary Fiction-Explorations in Readers' Engagement with Characters
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): CARACCIOLO MARCO
Abstract: A storyteller's craft can often be judged by how convincingly the narrative captures the identity and personality of its characters. In this book, the characters who take center stage are "strange" first-person narrators: they are fascinating because of how they are at odds with what the reader would wish or expect to hear-while remaining reassuringly familiar in voice, interactions, and conversations. Combining literary analysis with research in cognitive and social psychology, Marco Caracciolo focuses on readers' encounters with the "strange" narrators of ten contemporary novels, including Bret Easton Ellis's American Psycho, Haruki Murakami'sHard-Boiled Wonderland and the End of the World, and Mark Haddon'sThe Curious Incident of the Dog in the Night-Time. Caracciolo explores readers' responses to narrators who suffer from neurocognitive or developmental disorders, who are mentally disturbed due to multiple personality disorder or psychopathy, whose consciousness is split between two parallel dimensions or is disembodied, who are animals, or who lose their sanity.A foray into current work on reception, reader-response, cognitive literary study, and narratology,Strange Narrators in Contemporary Fictionillustrates why any encounter with a fictional text is a complex negotiation of interlaced feelings, thoughts, experiences, and interpretations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gr7dkd

Coda: from: Strange Narrators in Contemporary Fiction
Abstract: In the concluding lines of Why We Read Fiction, Lisa Zunshine writes, “I can say that I personally read fiction because it offers a pleasurable and intensive workout for my Theory of Mind” (2006, 164). Zunshine’s argument is well known: we feel attracted to fiction because it affords opportunities for exercising our “theory of mind” (our capacity to attribute mental states to other subjects), thus functioning as some sort of cognitive “weightlifting” (124–25). In discussing this gymnastic metaphor, Zunshine is careful to uncouple the pleasure provided by reading fictional characters’ minds from its real-world consequences, adding that “[just] as

The Dark Side of the Truth. from: Theodor W. Adorno: Truth and Dialectical Experience / Verità ed esperienza dialettica
Author(s) Matteucci Giovanni
Abstract: The title of this paper refers to the peculiar and indeed special role played by the concepts of nature, in general, and natural beauty, in particular, in Adorno’s philosophy. In fact, since Adorno’s early works of the 1930s up to his mature works of the 1960s, nature seems to represent what has been systematically repressed in the course of civilization. Hence, if observed from a dialectical point of view and expressed in somehow Pinkfloydian terms, nature appears as something like “the dark side of the truth” (or, in a more Springsteenian fashion, the “darkness” that lies “at the edge of

The Enigma of Experience; Art and Truth Content from: Theodor W. Adorno: Truth and Dialectical Experience / Verità ed esperienza dialettica
Author(s) Huhn Tom
Abstract: The enigma of the work of modern art is also the name for its constitutive character. The character of this self-contradicting existence is what makes the work of art into the occasion for a baffling and befuddling encounter. The complement to enigma in the work of art is its truth content. Key to engaging the work of art’s enigma and truth content is the mimetic relation between experience and the work of art. The misalignment between the work of art and human experience is an opportunity for encountering what exists as objective contradiction. The ongoing dance between the mimetic misalignments

Form, Appearance, Testimony: from: Theodor W. Adorno: Truth and Dialectical Experience / Verità ed esperienza dialettica
Author(s) Di Giacomo Giuseppe
Abstract: In The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction(1936), Walter Benjamin claims that an work of art’s “cult value” excludes the possibility of its replication or reproduction, while the culture of printing copies of original works, which begins during the Renaissance, replaces this “cult value” with “exhibition value”. As a result, these copies are clearly distinct from the work of art, whose uniqueness is what Benjamin calls “aura”. Industrialisation brought about a radical change in the conditions of production, meaning that a series of objects could be produced from one mould, as the completely mechanical production process

Ratio, Mimesis, Dialectics: from: Theodor W. Adorno: Truth and Dialectical Experience / Verità ed esperienza dialettica
Author(s) Desideri Fabrizio
Abstract: From Dialectic of EnlightenmenttoAesthetic Theory: these two book titles somehow sum up the entire development of Adorno’s philosophy. From a meditation (together with his friend and colleague Horkheimer) on the unavoidable polarity in the Modern between the dynamics of rationalization and the persistence of myth, to an arduous analysis of the relationship between the work of art and philosophy. His posthumous and unfinishedAesthetic Theoryhas often been read as nothing more than an outcome to which Adorno was led by the internal aporias of a “critical theory” of the late-capitalist society understood as an “administered world” in

Contingent Antagonism. from: Theodor W. Adorno: Truth and Dialectical Experience / Verità ed esperienza dialettica
Author(s) Zanotti Giovanni
Abstract: Although often overlooked, a passage from Marx’s Manuscripts of 1844represents an important turning point in the history of dialectical philosophy. In this work, a theoretical perspective is opened, which I define as the “contingency of antagonism” – an Adornian concept. I will argue: (a) that this is an original perspective, irreducible to any previous philosophical positions, (b) that Marx’s intuition finds a more sophisticated reformulation in Adorno, and (c) that the idea of a contingent antagonism can provide a key to overcome the apparently antinomical outcome of negative dialectic. My aim here is to offer some preliminary clarification about the

Chapter 5 1968 – WAS IT REALLY A YEAR OF SOCIAL CHANGE IN PAKISTAN? from: Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) Shaikh Riaz Ahmed
Abstract: In 1968 on the completion of ten years of autocratic rule, Pakistan’s first military dictator, General Ayub Khan decided to celebrate ‘the decade of development’. The Ayub regime had achieved the fastest economic growth in Pakistan’s history and was lauded in the West as a dynamic model for Third World capitalism. Despite this, inequality and the percentage of the population living below the poverty line had increased. Wealth was concentrated in few hands and the country’s twenty-two richest families controlled approximately 90 percent of the assets of financial institutions. In 1968 disillusioned students, workers and peasants, as well as members

Chapter 3 THE SCHOOL OF HATRED: from: Modern European Tragedy
Author(s) O’NEILL EUGENE
Abstract: It will hardly appear surprising that a selection of the key texts of European twentiethcentury drama should include a work by Eugene O’neill, being yet another response to the emergence of the twentieth century’s tragic consciousness. Of course he was American, but the matrix of his work is deeply rooted in European culture and theatrical research, with a pessimistic anthropology and a probing of behaviour based on depth psychology (one of the major axes of twentieth-century thought), embedded in a formal structure that is original and innovative compared to the currents of commercial Broadway theatre.¹

Chapter 6 DIANOETIC LAUGHTER IN TRAGEDY: from: Modern European Tragedy
Author(s) BECKETT SAMUEL
Abstract: In Beckett, as in the earliest perception of the tragic in the West, weeping is an inextricable part of human life, a sign of living. And yet, as nell has observed in an earlier passage in the work: ‘nothing is funnier than unhappiness […]. Yes, yes, it’s the most comical thing in the world.’³

Chapter 7 THE ARROGANCE OF REASON AND THE ‘DISAPPEARANCE OF THE FIREFLIES’: from: Modern European Tragedy
Author(s) PASOLINI PIER PAOLO
Abstract: In Pasolini it is not so much philosophical culture as literary (in this case ancient Greek drama) and anthropological culture that constitute the matrix of the work in consideration and provide the basic ideas with which the universal experiences of the limit and necessity are reinterpreted.¹ The tragic action is presented as an arrogant and

Chapter 8 THE APOCALYPSE OF A CIVILIZATION: from: Modern European Tragedy
Author(s) GROTOWSKI JERZY
Abstract: Jerzy Grotowski, whose work I now intend to explore, was the great teacher and founder of the Teatr Laboratorium. Grotowski presented to the audience’s vigilant consciousness the great

Chapter Five TOCQUEVILLE AS AN ETHNOGRAPHER OF AMERICAN PRISON SYSTEMS AND DEMOCRATIC PRACTICE from: Knowledge and Human Liberation
Abstract: Alexis de Tocqueville is one of the most influential interlocutors of modernity whose reflections on democracy continue to inspire, engage and haunt us as we are supposedly in an age of global democratization. Tocqueville’s work on democracy, Democracy in America, was published between 1835 and 1840. Around this period, european society was making a transition from an ancient regime to a form of social and political system whose full contours were yet to emerge. Not only the transition from feudalism to democracy but also other lines of transition, such as the transition from feudalism to the industrial and the capitalistic

Chapter 3 WHITHER MODERNITY? from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Marquez Ivan
Abstract: Western philosophy has had a long engagement with the philosophicalanthropological issue of the nature of and prospects for humanity. Aristotle, for instance, placed humans within a functional, organic, cosmic totality, where the part–whole relation between humans and the rest of nature ascribed the telosand proper flourishing of humans. Many seventeenth-century philosophers – rationalists like Descartes, materialists like Hobbes and empiricists like Locke – defined humans as rational, self-interested and atomistic. With eighteenthcentury French Enlightenment thought – especially the idea of progress in the work of de Saint-Pierre, Turgot, Voltaire, d’Holbach, Helvetius and Condorcet – and nineteenth-century German idealism, especially Hegel, human nature

Chapter 5 THE ENGAGEMENT OF PHILOSOPHY AND ANTHROPOLOGY IN THE INTERPRETIVE TURN AND BEYOND: from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kämpf Heike
Abstract: One of the most interesting and fruitful anthropological discussions of philosophy occurred within the so-called ‘interpretive turn’ in anthropology. This turn was inspired by philosophy and initiated a reconsideration of philosophical concepts. In particular, the reconsideration of the hermeneutic notion of ‘ understanding’ led to new anthropological readings of the works of Martin Heidegger, Hans-Georg Gadamer and Paul Ricoeur. At the same time this anthropological discussion had its impact on philosophy. On the one hand, hermeneutic and analytic philosophy came closer together while questioning the possibilities of understanding alien cultures: Peter Winch and Richard Rorty dealt with the problem of

Chapter 11 GROUND, SELF, SIGN: from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kjaerholm Lars
Abstract: Far more than a theory of signs, Peirce’s semiotics is also an attempt to summarize ontology as seen in his time and in the Kantian tradition in which he is situated. The concepts of firstness, secondnessandthirdnesssum up the forms and conditions under which anything can exist, within the framework of the ontological tradition that Peirce belonged to. Peirce has various ways of defining Firstness. It is ‘what the world was to Adam on the day he opened his eyes, before he had even drawn distinctions, or had become conscious of his own existence’ (1.357). This makes Peirce’s

Chapter 12 RICOEUR’S CHALLENGE FOR A TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY ANTHROPOLOGY from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Taylor Betsy
Abstract: The overt paradoxes in this poem concatenate with silent allusions to the aporias central to earlier works. On the one hand, the poem evokes

Chapter 13 CLIFFORD GEERTZ: from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Saalmann Gernot
Abstract: Clifford Geertz (1926–2006) was one of the main figures to build a new kind of anthropology, beginning in the 1960s. In doing so, he borrowed many ideas from philosophy. Although some of his works have been read by philosophers too, the influence of his anthropology on philosophy is negligible. The reception of his thoughts does not conform to the generally accepted significance of his writings, appropriate to their philosophical content. Most often, Geertz is read only superficially and the reading is confined to his two most famous texts – ‘Thick Description’ (1973) and ‘Deep Play: Notes on Balinese Cockfight’ (1972).

Chapter 16 BORDER CROSSINGS BETWEEN ANTHROPOLOGY AND BUDDHIST PHILOSOPHY from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Goonatilake Susantha
Abstract: This chapter attempts to locate anthropology historically as to its epistemological roots, its critique that occurred after decolonization and its future, as once again the centre of gravity of the world’s economic axis shifts to Asia. The position taken in this chapter is that of standpoint theory, namely that all theoretical as well as empirical statements are bound within a social framework and perspective.

Chapter 17 ‘ANTHROPOLOGY OF PHILOSOPHY’ IN AFRICA: from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kresse Kai
Abstract: An anthropological investigation into philosophy can provide us with insights and information about traditions of knowledge and intellectual practice elsewhere in the world, in social contexts very different from our own. The project needs to engage with – and first of all be able to identify – philosophy as part of social discourse, and as a social practice, within any given region. Here, I am carving out one particular approach about how this could work, in relation to the Swahili context and against the background of discussions in African philosophy. Philosophy, as socialized discourse and practice, overlaps with other (more established) areas

Chapter 19 ANTHROPOLOGY, DEVELOPMENT AND THE MYTH OF CULTURE from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Feleppa Robert
Abstract: Anthropologists have become increasingly involved as participants on development teams, but their great potential to promote sustainable development is hindered by vestiges of one of cultural anthropology’s founding myths. It is the notion of cultures construed as self-contained symbol systems, conceptually opaque to all but true insiders, with an implied notion of correct translation, which makes it an ‘all or nothing’ matter. This notion is also linked to long-standing concerns in the field with moral relativism, value neutrality and colonialism. As a result, within the community of anthropologists working in development, two somewhat opposed positions have arisen: one holds that

Three Theories of Justice: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Turner Bryan S.
Abstract: All scientific work starts with some simplification of basic concepts. Once these have been defined and established, we begin to pile up empirical variations. During this process, the simplifying notions are modified and, eventually, they may disappear. For example, economics assumes scarcity, and hence the need to rationalize and economize; politics presupposes the existence of struggles to maximize power; and sociology insists upon the necessity of social solidarity. Taking our cue from the etymology of socius , sociology is the science of companionship or friendship. For social science as a whole, civil society is the space in which these somewhat

The Spirit of Luc Boltanski: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: In Chapter 1,¹ Bridget Fowlerprovides a comprehensive and critical introduction to Boltanski’s work. Anyone who is not, or barely, familiar with Boltanski’s key contributions to the contemporary social sciences will find this chapter useful. To start with, Fowler examines Boltanski’s writings in relation toclassical sociological thought. In so doing, she argues that his critical engagement with the concept of domination is firmly situated in the Marxist and Weberian traditions of social analysis, whilst his sustained interest in moral

CHAPTER 1 Figures of Descent from Classical Sociological Theory: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Fowler Bridget
Abstract: Luc Boltanski, whose work is reaching a crescendo, has made an enduring contribution to sociology. His distinction lies chiefly in his inventive crossing of the approach to domination in the Marxist and Weberian traditions with the interest in moral and symbolic representations of the Durkheimian tradition. Yet, it also bears all the fascination of his early alliance with his master, Bourdieu, and his subsequent public break from him. In particular, we see the mature Boltanski wrestling productively with a fruitful conceptual framework for understanding the contemporary mode of production, and the reappearance within it of mass precariousness in relation to

CHAPTER 4 The Moral Idealism of Ordinary People as a Sociological Challenge: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Lemieux Cyril
Abstract: In 1987, a theoretical book that had been co-written by the sociologist Luc Boltanski and the economist and statistician Laurent Thévenot appeared in an obscure, poorly distributed collection of the Presses Universitaires de France. At first sight, its title may have sounded rather strange: Les économies de la grandeur (Economies of Worth). What was even more disconcerting, however, was the apparent disproportion between the ordinariness of the main issues in question (that is, disputing processes in the workplace, the family, the neighbourhood, etc.) and the ambitious nature of the theoretical framework. In fact, the authors put forward a whole set

CHAPTER 5 Is There Such a Thing as a ‘Pragmatic Sociology of Critique’? from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: In the contemporary sociological literature, not only in the Francophone² world but also in Germanophone³ and Anglophone⁴ contexts, the work of Luc Boltanski is widely recognized as a major contribution to the social sciences. The value and influence of Boltanski’s writings manifest themselves in the emergence of a new paradigm: the sociology of critiqueor, as it has been recently characterized not only by sympathetic and unsympathetic critics alike but also by the author himself, thepragmatic sociology of critique.⁵ It is true that the concept of critique plays a pivotal role in most of Boltanski’s writings.⁶ His recent book

CHAPTER 8 Enlarging Conceptions of Testing Moments and Critical Theory: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Jacobs Amy
Abstract: Discussing Luc Boltanski’s research is a particularly delicate task for the person who co-authored works and articles with him that have given rise to a new sociological paradigm and led to the creation of the Groupe de Sociologie Politique et Morale. I could have avoided the difficulty by choosing a masterwork of his that is quite different from the works we wrote together, such as the admirable La condition foetale(Boltanski, 2004). Yet, I have chosen instead to confront it in the spirit of the long, friendly, and ongoing conversation between us, renewed this past year. I would like to

CHAPTER 12 The Promise of Pragmatic Sociology, Human Rights, and the State from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Nash Kate
Abstract: As a sociologist working in the emerging area of the sociology of human rights, I find the approach that Luc Boltanski and his various collaborators take to cultural, moral, and political questions inspiring. There is an urgent need to develop theoretical concepts and methodologies to study human rights, which have been growing in importance as a result of the activities of transnational advocacy networks, digital communication, and the codification and enactment of international law since the end of the Cold War (see Nash, 2012). What resources do human rights offer for the critique of injustices? Are human rights contributing to

CHAPTER 13 ‘The Political’ in the ‘Pragmatic Sociology of Critique’: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Blokker Paul
Abstract: Whilst a political dimension was perhaps not at the forefront of Luc Boltanski and Laurent Thévenot’s ‘sociology of critical capacity’, as most prominently articulated in On Justification(2006 [1991]), it can be argued that their work engages with important questions regarding ‘the political’ and politics. In this chapter, I shall make the political dimension in French pragmatic sociology more explicit and shall explore a tendency to ‘politicization’ of pragmatic sociology in some more recent works of Luc Boltanski. This is done with an eye to what I see as a normative dimension in pragmatic sociology that links it with (radical)

CHAPTER 15 The Civil Sphere and On Justification: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Eulriet Irène
Abstract: Indeed, these works have many affinities. Both draw on Durkheimian thought or concepts. Both display a common lexis from ‘justice’ to ‘pragmatics’ and ‘compromise’, as well as a common inclination to connect philosophical and sociological issues. Both endeavours have been

CHAPTER 17 Reflections on the Indignation of the Disprivileged and the Underprivileged from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Turner Bryan S.
Abstract: One persistent theoretical and practical problem in Marxism was to explain the failures of working-class opposition to capitalist exploitation. Karl Marx had assumed that the organized working class would eventually engage in a successful political struggle against the ruling class alongside a background of systematic crises in the economic system. A wide range of explanations as to why this transformation did not take place has been developed over the decades after Marx’s death in 1883. At the end of the nineteenth century, it appeared that the condition of the German working class had improved, suggesting that capitalism could be reformed.

CHAPTER 24 Sociology of Critique or Critical Theory? from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: The ‘sociology of critique’ and ‘critical theory’ offer different perspectives on the phenomenon of critique. The former approach has been developed by Luc Boltanski, as well as by other members of the Groupe de Sociologie Politique et Morale (GSPM), with the aim of providing an alternative to Pierre Bourdieu’s ‘critical sociology’. The latter approach has been developed further by Axel Honneth, who proposes a ‘theory of recognition’, and whose work descends from the tradition of the Frankfurt School. Is critique, first and foremost, an achievement of ‘ordinary’ actors or a task of theory? What is the relationship between theory and

CHAPTER 25 The Fragility of Reality: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: Luc Boltanski is a sociologist and Directeur d’études at the École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales. Born in 1940, he is the author of 15 books, which are based on various field studies and transcend disciplinary boundaries: nursing, reproduction, abortion, the professional world of cadres, humanitarian issues, and management – to mention only a few of the topics covered in his works. His sociology focuses on the analysis of normative orders and resources mobilized by human actors in order to preserve, or challenge, particular sets of social arrangements. As reflected in the debates sparked by his ‘pragmatic turn’, the conceptual

Luc Boltanski and His Critics: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: This Afterword provides a summary of the key themes, issues, and controversies covered in each of the preceding chapters. Readers who are not, or barely, conversant with Luc Boltanski’s key contributions to the contemporary social sciences will appreciate the clarity with which Bridget Fowler provides a valuable, wide-ranging, and critical introduction to his work in the opening chapter of this volume. As indicated in the title of her piece, ‘Figures of Descent from Classical Sociological Theory: Luc Boltanski’,¹ Fowler examines Boltanski’s writings in relation to classical sociological thought. In so doing, she suggests that his critical engagement with mechanisms of

CHAPTER ONE Between Structuralism and Theory of Practice: from: The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Skinner Alex
Abstract: Bourdieu’s work was deeply moulded by the national intellectual milieu in which it developed, that of France in the late 1940s and 1950s, a milieu characterised by disputes between phenomenologists and structuralists. But it is not this national and cultural dimension that distinguishes Bourdieu’s writings from those of other ‘grand theorists’. Habermas and Giddens, for example, owed as much to the academic or political context of their home countries. What set Bourdieu’s approach apart from that of his German and British ‘rivals’ was a significantly stronger linkage of theoretical and empirical knowledge. Bourdieu was first and foremost an empirical sociologist,

CHAPTER FIVE With Weber Against Weber: from: The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: Pierre Bourdieu: I began with Die protestantische Ethik. During that time, I was working on a book which was intended to summarise my research on Algeria. InDie protestantische Ethikthere was an abundance of things on the traditional, pre-capitalist ‘spirit’, and on economic behaviour – wonderful descriptions which were very useful and indeed quite impressive. I drew on Weber’s work in order to

CHAPTER SEVEN Elias and Bourdieu from: The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Emirbayer Mustafa
Abstract: The deeper one penetrates the universes of Norbert Elias and Pierre Bourdieu, the clearer it becomes: the similarities between their visions of society are striking. While the two sociologists always showed great sympathy for one another,¹ there are no indications that they were fully aware of how fundamental the subterranean intellectual affinities were.² And even though many social scientists combine a high regard for some of Elias’s works with great admiration for several works by Bourdieu, thereby showing an instinctive sense of the affinities between these authors, until now it seems that no one has noticed the degree to which

CHAPTER EIGHT Bourdieu and Adorno on the Transformation of Culture in Modern Society: from: The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: This chapter examines the transformation of culture in modern society by drawing upon the works of Pierre Bourdieu and Theodor W. Adorno. Far from intending to embrace the entire complexity of Bourdieusian and Adornian thought, the analysis focuses on some key dimensions that are particularly relevant to understanding the relationship between modern culture and modern society. This study seeks to show that comprehending the transformation of culture in the modern world requires taking into account the transformation of society as a whole. In order to demonstrate this, the chapter is structured as follows.

CHAPTER NINE The Grammar of an Ambivalence: from: The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Basaure Mauro
Abstract: In the mid-1980s, Axel Honneth – successor to Jürgen Habermas, and now considered the most prominent representative of the Frankfurt School’s third generation – made an important contribution to the sociophilosophical reading of Pierre Bourdieu’s work that fundamentally shaped its German reception (see Behr, 2001). This contribution is marked by a clear ambivalence. On the one hand, it is obvious that it was in no way gratuitous. Honneth knew from the beginning that Bourdieu’s work was to play a key role in his own project to renew the tradition of critical theory (Honneth, Basaure, Reemtsma and Willig, 2009). At the

CHAPTER THIRTEEN Social Theory and Politics: from: The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Robbins Derek
Abstract: The purpose of this contribution is to explore historically the relationship between the social theory emerging at the Centre de sociologie européenne in Paris during the 1960s and the Parisian events of May 1968. Adopting the terminology of an article of 1981 by Pierre Bourdieu himself (‘Décrire et prescrire. Note sur les conditions de possibilité et les limites de l’efficacité politique’ [‘Describing and Prescribing. A Note on the Conditions of Possibility and the Limits of Political Effectiveness’] (Bourdieu, 1981), my purpose is to consider in what ways the work of the Centre de sociologie européenne could be said to describe

AFTERWORD: from: The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: Those who are unfamiliar, or barely familiar, with the writings of Pierre Bourdieu will find a useful and comprehensive introduction to his work in the opening chapter, entitled ‘Between Structuralism and Theory of Practice: The Cultural Sociology of Pierre Bourdieu’. In it, Hans Joas and Wolfgang Knöbl provide us with a clear and accessible overview of some of the main philosophical and sociological themes that run through Bourdieu’s writings. Joas and Knöbl centre their analysis on five interrelated concepts that play a pivotal role in Bourdieu’s work: the concepts of (1) practice, (2)action, (3)the social, (4)cultural sociology,

Chapter 2 RESURRECTION: from: Fabricating Authenticity in Soviet Hungary
Abstract: Having succeeded the suppression of the revolution in October 1956, the first time that the new Communist regime evoked the events of 1919 was likely in the 21 November issue of the Népszabadság(People’s freedom), the party’s official daily. That day the editors published a letter, which had allegedly been sent to the government by an old worker. The author of this letter first gives an account of his life spent within the labour movement since 1917. The worker writes about his sufferings and privation during the previous regime, then recalls the happy years following the end of the war.

Shared Pleasure to Soothe the Broken Spirit: from: Bible through the Lens of Trauma
Author(s) Helsel Philip Browning
Abstract: Modern sociologist Kai Erikson studied human-caused disasters as a witness for plaintiffs in disaster lawsuits. He maintained that communal responses to disaster share some common features. He noted that the symptoms of collective trauma coalesce into a form of syndrome that is more than the injury to each of the individuals combined.¹ He also indicated that there is a spiritual or existential component to such harm, what we might call a collective sense of “broken-spiritedness,” to borrow a term from the psychologist John Wilson, who works with refugees.² Broken-spiritedness refers to massive disruption that interferes with sources of meaning and

Reflections on the Prose Sermons in the Book of Jeremiah: from: Bible through the Lens of Trauma
Author(s) Stulman Louis
Abstract: The study of trauma has taken center stage in fields as varied as film and orthopedics, psychotherapy and education, aesthetics and international politics. This diversity speaks to the influence of trauma studies across disciplines.¹ Notwithstanding this interdisciplinary reach, biblical studies is actually a latecomer to trauma studies. Although a number of fine works have recently appeared that explore the intersection of trauma and the Bible,² until November 2013 the Society of Biblical Literature had not devoted a program unit to the hermeneutics of trauma.

Between Text and Trauma: from: Bible through the Lens of Trauma
Author(s) West Gerald O.
Abstract: “‘Every South African has been damaged by apartheid,’ Michael Lapsley and his colleagues of the Institute for Healing of Memories used to say when they facilitated the first Healing of Memories workshops in the late 1990s.”¹ As we enter the third decade of liberation and democracy “we realise,” argues Philippe Denis, another pioneer of memory work in the South African context, “that, as part of the legacy of apartheid, a host of challenges face South African society. We are also damaged by HIV and AIDS, domestic violence, sexual abuse, violent crime, xenophobia, corruption and various forms of discrimination.” In sum,

CHAPTER 5 Proportional Thinking in Kepler’s Science of Light from: Light and Death
Abstract: Light is at the center of Kepler’s optics, astronomy, and cosmology. Verbal and mathematical analogy, whether as concept, proportion, or both, is crucial to his methodology and, indeed, to his habits of thought. In addition to these thematic and methodological reasons, Kepler plays an exemplary role in my study because he is an intellectual hybrid who combines ideas about light, deriving especially from Neoplatonist and perspectivist traditions, with mathematical and physical discoveries anticipating those of Descartes and Newton, both of whom number among his debtors. The longstanding debate as to whether Kepler’s work is the culmination of medieval perspectivism or

Introduction from: I Am Because We Are
Abstract: It is in the texts from Africa included here that the three generative themes discussed in our introduction are most clearly articulated. From the beginnings of recorded African thought in The Book of Coming Forth by Day(better known as the egyptianBook of the Dead) to the stirring words of Nelson Mandela, from the conceptualization of negritude in the work of Léopold Sédar Senghor and Aimé Césaire to the profound reimagining of identity and gender in the recent contributions of Kwame Gyekye and Oyèrónké Oyewùmí, there is a repeated emphasis on the relation between the individual and his/her community.

from Myth, Literature, and the African World (1976) from: I Am Because We Are
Author(s) SOYINKA WOLE
Abstract: The question must now be confronted: How comes it then that, despite the extolled self-apprehending virtues of these and other works, it is possible to entertain a hostile attitude towards the programmatic summation in the secular vision of negritude? There is none of these works whose ideals may not be interpreted as the realization of the principles of race-retrieval which are embodied in the concept of negritude, yet negritude continues to arouse more than a mere semantic impatience among the later generation of African writers and intellectuals, in addition to—let this be remembered—serious qualifications of or tactical withdrawal

Introduction from: I Am Because We Are
Abstract: In the texts from the caribbean included here, the generative themes of African philosophy find expression in the context of the black diaspora forced by the Atlantic slave trade. The ontological emphasis on a relational con ception of reality plays a particularly important role in helping define the black community as something distinct from the European community of slaveholders. In turn, the Caribbean philosophical tradition presented here devotes much attention to the issues of constructing notions both of identity and self-determination and of culture and ethos within the framework of the black community. Thus the relational humanism so characteristic of

Racism and Culture (1956) from: I Am Because We Are
Author(s) FANON FRANTZ
Abstract: There are, we may say, certain constellations of institutions, established by particular men in the framework of precise

from The Racial Contract (1997) from: I Am Because We Are
Author(s) MILLS CHARLES W.
Abstract: If the epistemology of the signatories, the agents, of the racial contract requires evasion and denial of the realities of race, the epistemology of the victims, the objects, of the racial contract is, unsurprisingly, focused on these realities themselves. (so there is a reciprocal relationship, the racial contract tracking white moral/political consciousness, the reaction to the racial contract tracking nonwhite moral/political consciousness and stimulating a puzzled investigation of that white moral/political consciousness.) The term “standpoint theory” is now routinely used to signify the notion that in understanding the workings of a system of oppression, a perspective from the bottom up

Introduction from: I Am Because We Are
Abstract: The black experience in north America shares important historical roots with that in the caribbean: in both regions, slavery assaulted the black community while reinforcing the need for this community, and strategies of dehumanization were integral to the dominant group’s maintenance of its domination. Thus, as in the caribbean, black philosophy in north America—at least that north American tradition we highlight here—works with the generative themes of the African philosophical tradition in ways that stress the importance of community in preserving and refiguring identity. However, where caribbean philosophy announces itself as a fundamental player in the struggle for

Book Title: Fueling Culture-101 Words for Energy and Environment
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Yaeger Patricia
Abstract: How has our relation to energy changed over time? What differences do particular energy sources make to human values, politics, and imagination? How have transitions from one energy source to another—from wood to coal, or from oil to solar to whatever comes next—transformed culture and society? What are the implications of uneven access to energy in the past, present, and future? Which concepts and theories clarify our relation to energy, and which just get in the way? Fueling Culture offers a compendium of keywords written by scholars and practitioners from around the world and across the humanities and social sciences. These keywords offer new ways of thinking about energy as both the source and the limit of how we inhabit culture, with the aim of opening up new ways of understanding the seemingly irresolvable contradictions of dependence upon unsustainable energy forms. Fueling Culture brings together writing that is risk-taking and interdisciplinary, drawing on insights from literary and cultural studies, environmental history and ecocriticism, political economy and political ecology, postcolonial and globalization studies, and materialisms old and new. Keywords in this volume include: Aboriginal, Accumulation, Addiction, Affect, America, Animal, Anthropocene, Architecture, Arctic, Automobile, Boom, Canada, Catastrophe, Change, Charcoal, China, Coal, Community, Corporation, Crisis, Dams, Demand, Detritus, Disaster, Ecology, Electricity, Embodiment, Ethics, Evolution, Exhaust, Fallout, Fiction, Fracking, Future, Gender, Green, Grids, Guilt, Identity, Image, Infrastructure, Innervation, Kerosene, Lebenskraft, Limits, Media, Metabolism, Middle East, Nature, Necessity, Networks, Nigeria, Nuclear, Petroviolence, Photography, Pipelines, Plastics, Renewable, Resilience, Risk, Roads, Rubber, Rural, Russia, Servers, Shame, Solar, Spill, Spiritual, Statistics, Surveillance, Sustainability, Tallow, Texas, Textiles, Utopia, Venezuela, Whaling, Wood, Work For a full list of keywords in and contributors to this volume, please go to: http://ow.ly/4mZZxV
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1hfr0s3

America from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Pease Donald
Abstract: Oil capitalism shaped significant turns in US national history. President Monroe imagined the Americas as a national protectorate, but Big Oil installed the transportation, commercial, military, and geopolitical networks that guaranteed US seigniorage over

Arctic from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Ruiz Rafico
Abstract: “Arctic” is a cultural figuration that does a lot of work. It marks a nebulous geographic region, an atmospheric condition, and, increasingly, perhaps thecommon place where environmental CHANGE is made manifest. With the proliferation of time-lapse satellite images showing the shrinking polar ice cap, documentary PHOTOGRAPHY and film following the pace of glacial melt, and the prominence of the Northwest Passage as a maritime transportation corridor, the Arctic has a recurring cultural visuality and instrumentality all its own and utterly of the present. Part of the Arctic’s figurative work depends on its being perceived as a mappable territory—a

Coal Ash from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Hatmaker Susie
Abstract: To live in a coal-fueled culture is to live in the time of ash: a time of irrationality, unpredictability, and unanticipated events that reveal not the work of an angry god, but the limits to human progress and scientific planning. Power generation and electrification emerged in the twentieth century as core elements of modernization and development on a global scale. The failure to account for the corresponding production of waste is neither mistake nor oversight, but inherent to this logic.

Demand from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Walker Gordon
Abstract: In borrowing the physicists’ definition in order to understand the historic and ongoing dynamics of energy demand, we need a broad interpretation of work—one that includes practices of sociability, having fun, growing up and growing old, and eating and sleeping, along with work in the more conventional sense of production, employment, and labor. Most social practices generate

Future from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Dufresne Todd
Abstract: 2. Capitalism’s success can be measured by how effectively it has erased the myriad possibilities of the future, how well its a version of the future is accepted as natural, given, inevitable. In extremis, the capitalist narrative blots out all alternative futures. De facto, it must contend with alternative futures proposed by social and political opposition, science fiction, and utopic literature. However, the de facto experiences of toothless alternatives only work to reinforce

Infrastructure from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Diamanti Jeff
Abstract: The safest place for rich people to dump their money during a recession is usually the one most likely to receive government stimulus—historically, public works projects aimed at shoring up both employment rates and the physical carrying capacity of an economic setting. Whether new, refurbished, or expanded, infrastructure has always functioned as a kickstarter for macroeconomic recovery, leading (so this fantasy goes) to long-term growth. The idea is somewhat paradoxical: the current configuration of a given economy (call it economy A) has either 1) reached a natural limit or 2) never really worked but works so badly now that

Mediashock from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Grusin Richard
Abstract: More than a decade after 9/11, the networked world remains in an acute state of “mediashock.” At the first sign of meteorological turmoil, social unrest, financial turbulence, or natural cataclysm, news media shift into 24–7 crisis mode, generating on-the-ground reports, live updates, multiple commentaries, and breaking news. CNN pioneered this mode in global cable news as far back as the 1980s, but the media’s obsession with remediating disaster and premediating shock has intensified in the twenty-first century, jump-started by the events of 9/11 but escalating since then. With the exception of regularly scheduled events like to the Olympics or

Networks from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Parks Lisa
Abstract: Every keyboard button you push, every screen you view, every ringtone you hear requires electrical ENERGY. If you are reading on an e-reader, smartphone, or computer interface right now, consider how these words arrived before your eyes, how packets of data hopped through network nodes to become digitally rendered pages for your perusal. Data, whether text, image, or sound, moves so rapidly and transparently that we rarely consider the energizing of networks, the fueling of cultures. Building on work in environmental media studies (see Cubbit 2005; Maxwell and Miller 2012; Bozak 2012), I offer three energy-media network scenarios involving water,

Nuclear 2 from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Hecht Gabrielle
Abstract: Fukushima: from the coasts of Tamil Nadu to the halls of the German Bundestag, the word now stands for danger and deception, contamination and vulnerability. Every day brings new distress. Cesium-137 clings tenaciously to the soil and buildings of northeastern Japan. Radioactive fish promenade across the Pacific. Over 40 percent of children examined by the Fukushima Health Management Survey have thyroid abnormalities; no one really knows yet what that means for their health. Contractors hired for cleanup operations rely on yakuza networks for a steady stream of disposable workers and toss contaminated debris into forest glens and mountain streams when

Resilience from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) O’Brien Susie
Abstract: “In our current (and long overdue) efforts to drastically cut carbon emissions, we must also give equal importance to the building . . . of resilience” (Hopkins 2010). This is the premise of Rob Hopkins’s The Transition Handbook: From Oil Dependency to Local Resilience(2010), which outlines the process by which communities can work toward local autonomy, reducing their dependence on fossil fuels.¹ Environmentalists hailed the publication, with one review proclaiming: “At last, here is a book about our common future that we don’t have to be afraid to read” (L. Wallace 2010). In a 2011 speech titled “Resilience and

Rubber from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Loman Andrew
Abstract: The petroleum industry emerged alongside the late-Victorian imperial romance, a genre of FICTION in which white men have violent adventures at the Empire’s periphery before returning, usually enriched, to its core. Because petroleum exploration was global, it would not be surprising to see cross-pollination between the romance and discourses on petroleum, in the form, for instance, of adventure novels about oil explorers.¹ Yet no such subgenre of Victorian petro-romance exists.² Still, even if the major imperial romances do not make oil an explicit subject, certain well-known works are demonstrably interested in petromodernity. Edgar Rice Burroughs’s Tarzan of the Apesand

Russia from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Penzin Alexei
Abstract: The video for “I Love Oil” begins with a shot of a petroleum worker, dressed in a blue uniform and wearing a yellow helmet. He presents a metallic

Sustainability from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Medovoi Leerom
Abstract: In recent decades, the vision of a genuinely ecological economics has focused on the principle of sustainability. Capitalism, we are told, should be refashioned as a “sustainable economy” whose growth, in the words of the United Nation’s Brundtland Commission Report, “meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of FUTURE generations to meet their own needs” (Brundtland 1987). Like other liberal political ideals (e.g., democracy, freedom, tolerance), the ideological work performed by sustainability is complex and multivalent. As Joan Martinez-Alier (2009) notes, ecological economics understands the economy not as a system of exchange but rather as a metabolic

Wood from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Nardizzi Vin
Abstract: “There’s wood enough within”: projected from offstage, this response to Prospero’s summoning in The Tempestlaunches Caliban into literary history (Shakespeare 1999, 1.2.315). Its emphasis on adequacy indicates that the slave has completed his work. Stemming from this sense of closure, its disgruntled tone suggests an insubordination later elaborated in Caliban’s plan to murder Prospero and burn his books. Such acts of defiance have made Caliban, as Jonathan Goldberg says, “a byword for anticolonial riposte” (2004, ix). But what of the wood? This question may seem slight when weighed against empire and resistance to it, but Caliban uncovers the indispensability

Work 1 from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Turcot Susan
Abstract: I enter an oil company HQ. It has taken a year to find a way through the fortress wall to access a shift worker live-in camp. Having learned portraiture as a way to spend time with shift workers, I’m aware that a portrait artist gains access to workers in a way that a researcher or journalist might not.

Work 2 from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Shukaitis Stevphen
Abstract: “One of the problems,” my friend and comrade Ben said, “is that while we’ve been quite good at celebrating the refusal of work, we never had anything like zerowork training.” This statement struck me as strange, and not merely because of the context—a meeting of the editorial collective for Autonomedia, a long-running Brooklyn-based autonomist publisher. After a decade of involvement with the project, Ben was moving on. In the autonomist equivalent of an exit meeting, Ben declared his exit from a collective whose stated goal was to exit from work itself, to “substruct the planetary work machine,” in the

SEVEN Reflections on a Giotto Exhibit: from: Supper at Emmaus
Abstract: From March 6 through June 29, 2009, an exhibit on Giotto (c. 1267–1337), “Giotto and the Fourteenth Century: The Sovereign Master of Painting,” was held at the Vittoriano in Rome. The exhibit showed twenty works by Giotto himself and 130 illustrating his influence. I was able to visit it in early June, and the following records a reflection that came to me at that time on one aspect of Giotto’s achievement. I have nothing particularly novel to say about Giotto himself, but seeing some of his works up close did reinforce the common judgment on how alive they are.¹

Book Title: Children of God in the World- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): O’Callaghan Paul
Abstract: Children of God in the World is a textbook of theological anthropology structured in four parts. The first attempts to clarify the relationship between theology, philosophy and science in their respective approaches to anthropology, and establishes the fundamental principle of the text, stated in Vatican II's Gaudium et spes, n. 22, "Christ manifests man to man." The second part provides a historical overview of the doctrine of grace: in Scripture (especially the teaching of the book of Genesis on humans 'made in the image of God', as well as Paul and John), among the Fathers (in particular the oriental doctrine of 'divinization' and Augustine), during the Middle Ages (especially Thomas Aquinas) and the Reformation period (centered particularly on Luther and the Council of Trent), right up to modern times. The third part of the text, the central one, provides a systematic understanding of Christian grace in terms of the God's life present in human believers by which they become children of God, disciples, friends and brothers of Christ, temples of the Holy Spirit. This section also provides a reflection on the theological virtues (faith, hope and charity), on the relationship between grace and human freedom, on the role of the Church and Christian apostolate in the communication of grace, and on the need humans have for divine grace. After considering the relationship between the natural and the supernatural order, the fourth and last part deals with different philosophical aspects of the human condition, in the light of Christian faith: the union between body and soul, humans as free, historical, social, sexual and working beings. The last chapter concludes with a consideration of the human person, Christianity's greatest and most enduring contribution to human thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1hrdn0m

INTRODUCTION from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: This treatise on theological anthropology works off of five presuppositions. The first is that it is based on a search for unity and integrity. As we inquire into human identity, we commonly experience a wearying sense of complexity and incertitude. However, this does not mean that our explanation of human nature and of the human person need be involved or complicated. In fact, anthropology seeks above all a once-off, simple, unitary, integrated explanation of human identity. The search for truth, in fact, is always a search for unity, for simplicity, for harmony, for coherence. In other words, in order to

5 GRACE AND JUSTIFICATION OF THE SINNER IN PAUL from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: Let us now consider the doctrine of grace in the corpus paulinum.¹ In the face of human sinfulness and the presumptuous attitude humans often have in performing “good works,” the apostle to the Gentiles insists above all on humans’ absolute need for the grace of Christ, God’s pure gift, in order to be saved. Grace places us in a new state by means of a “new creation” in which we become children of God through the power of the Holy Spirit and are freed from sin and slavery, introduced into a new life, and moved to witness our faith before

9 “CREATED GRACE” IN THE MEDIEVAL PERIOD from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: Three aspects of Augustine’s understanding of the workings of Christian grace may be noted: the priority of divine action (what would later be designated as “uncreated grace”), the human experience of grace (Augustine speaks of the suavitas amoris), and human ethical action that derives from grace. According to Augustine, anterior divine action—grace—produces adelectatio, a pleasing spiritual inclination in the soul, and divinizes believerssuaviter et fortiter(gently and firmly), moving them through love to carry out good works. Not only that: it isgrace itselfthat carries out the divine actions in humans.

11 THE MODERN PERIOD: from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: The principal theological issue of the period that immediately followed Luther and Trent involved the relationship between grace and freedom. This is an expression of the tension, already present throughout the Middle Ages, between a transcendent, omnipotent God, on the one hand, and created human beings, who, though fallen, search for their rightful, God-given autonomy, on the other. Three episodes are of particular interest during the period: the de auxiliiscontroversy; the Augustinianism of Michael Baius, a theologian who worked in the years after Trent; and the theology of the seventeenth-century bishop Cornelius O. Jansen. Although in many ways Protestant

14 DIVINE LIFE IN HUMANS: from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: We have considered the life of grace from the perspective of its one and only origin, God: the project or plan of divine love that finds its first expression in the work of creation is expressed in terms of predestination and calling, and culminates in justification and glorification. In the previous chapter we considered the fundamental condition of human beings in grace, that is, adopted divine filiation, with its Christological and pneumatological (and therefore Trinitarian) structure.

Book Title: Memory Ireland-The Famine and the Troubles, Volume 3
Publisher: Syracuse University Press
Author(s): Frawley Oona
Abstract: Volume 3 focuses on the impact of the Famine and the Troubles on theformation and study of Irish cultural memory. Topics considered includehunger strikes, monuments to the Famine, trauma and the politics of memoryin the Irish peace process, and Ulster Loyalist battles in the twenty-firstcentury. Gathering the work of leading scholars such as Margaret Kelleher,Joseph Lennon, David Lloyd, Joseph Valente, and Gerald Dawe, this collectionis an essential contribution to the field of Irish studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j1ns3x

6 Narrating Sites of History: from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) KELLY NIAMH ANN
Abstract: Emblematic of a dark period in a troubled colonization, the workhouse is a dirty word in Irish history. Its system, buildings, and sites comprise a challenging representational struggle between erasure and reconstruction in remembrance. Workhouses took years to build, employed thousands in the building process, subsequently housed hundreds of thousands from 1840s onward and yet remain a quiet aspect of Famine memory in visual and material culture.¹ The absence of extensively conserved workhouses is a consequence of life going on after the Famine, as some sites became utilized for different purposes and others succumbed to politically motivated destruction.² Workhouses have

8 Life-Stories, Survivor Memory, and Trauma in the Irish Troubles: from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) DAWSON GRAHAM
Abstract: Since the 1994 paramilitary ceasefires, the Irish peace process has stimulated a flowering of practices of history-making, remembrance, and commemoration concerned with the legacy of the Troubles in “post-conflict” Northern Ireland.¹ Much of this work has taken the form of oral-history and life-history narrative that enables personal reflection on the significance of violent conflict in the recent past and reassessment of its impact upon individuals, families, and local areas. Such memory-work has intersected with wider public debate over, and engagement with, the question of the victims of violence, including the formation of numbers of local victims’ support groups addressing the

10 At Visionʹs Edge: from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) BARBER FIONNA
Abstract: The past is always present in Northern Ireland, structuring everyday experience to a degree not generally found elsewhere. In a society where historical events are continually relevant to contemporary life, both cultural memory and processes of memorialization become significant means whereby people live out their identities. In turn, this level of awareness also informs aspects of the visual: artists are not separate from the culture they inhabit but are equally formed by its shared experiences of community, danger, and loss. Much of the work of artists in post-conflict Northern Ireland bears the marks of this communality of experience, whether through

Book Title: Memory Ireland-Diaspora and Memory Practices, Volume 2
Publisher: Syracuse University Press
Author(s): Frawley Oona
Abstract: In the second volume of a series that will ultimately include four, the authors consider Irish diasporic memory and memory practices. While the Irish diaspora has become the subject of a wide range of scholarship, there has been little work focused on its relationship to memory. The first half of the volume asks how diasporic memory functions in different places and times, and what forms it takes on. As an island nation with a history of emigration, Ireland has developed a rich diasporic cultural memory, one that draws on multiple traditions and historiographies of both "home" and "away." Native traditions are not imported wholesale, but instead develop their own curious hybridity, reflecting the nature of emigrant memory that absorbs new ways of thinking about home. How do immigrants remember their homeland? How do descendants of immigrants "remember" a land they rarely visit? How does diasporic memory pass through families, and how is it represented in cultural forms such as literature, festivals, and souvenirs?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j1nv2c

2 Roots and Rhizomes in Irish-Australian Ancestral Memory from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) HABEL CHAD
Abstract: The terrain of Irish memory in Australia is diverse and uneven, but Australian authors have done much to map this territory in the past few decades, beginning with Vincent Buckley’s Memory Irelandand reaching a new height in the 1990s in the work of authors like Thomas Keneally and Christopher Koch. For these authors, memories of Ireland are maintained and promulgated through ancestry, which, as both a personal and communal phenomenon, is a definitive manifestation of cultural memory. Indeed, ancestry can be seen as an example of alieu de memoire,in Pierre Nora’s terminology, because of the coexistence of

17 Cooking at the Hearth from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) KENNEALLY RHONA RICHMAN
Abstract: The proliferation of Irish-cottage-as-icon is complemented by the work of archaeologists,

Introduction from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) FRAWLEY OONA
Abstract: James Joyce’s relation to “cultural memory” is inordinately complex. Joyce’s texts have come to be seen as embodying and somehow representing both memory and history, particularly in an Irish context, but also in an international one. When considered individually but especially as a collective, Joyce’s works function as narratives of the gigantic, in Susan Stewart’s phrase (Stewart 1994), that have consumed not just the particular periods in which they are set, not only whole swathes of Irish history and culture, but have come to function as digestives of world histories, languages, cultures: so that what we confront is the notion

5 ʺFabled by the daughters of memoryʺ from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) SCHWARZE TRACEY
Abstract: Sir Roger Casement—Irish crusader for the rights of Congolese Africans and Putumayo Indians of the Peruvian Amazon basin, knighted for this work by the British government in 1911, and hanged by the same government for treason in August 1916 after a failed attempt to secure German arms and recruit Irish POWs to aid the Easter Rising in Ireland—is undoubtedly a figure of complex personal and political identities. Stripped of his knighthood on June 30, 1916, immediately following his conviction of high treason, Casement had enjoyed a significant career in the British consular service. His report detailing atrocities in

8 Ghosts through Absence from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) JONES ELLEN CAROL
Abstract: Borrowing and disjoining the language of the past, James Joyce’s work both parodies that past and bears witness to its truth.¹ To bear witness to the past is to comprehend its spectral repetition in the present. Indeed, even if acts of historical retrieval are intended to serve also as gestures of psychic restitution, the net effect of such reiterative reworkings of history is a repetition of the same in nightmarish, spectral, unheimlich, returns (Leerssen 2001, 220): “history repeating itself with a difference” (U616). Homi Bhabha delineates how the “mimesis of memorialization—the restitution of record, date, time, name—anxiously

10 Weaving the Wind from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) BEPLATE JUSTIN
Abstract: Joyce, it seems, prized memory above all human faculties, going so far as to declare to his friend Frank Budgen that “[i]magination is memory” (Budgen 1970, 187). While the comment suggests a neat equivalence of imagination and memory, Joyce’s apparent monism is belied by the considerably more nuanced treatment of this theme in his writings. While he may have championed Giambattista Vico’s belief that the artist’s imagination is essentially a reworking of memory, it does not follow that mastering one’s powers of recall is always sufficient in controlling one’s creative material. As the “hides and hints and misses in prints”

12 ʺOld Hauntsʺ from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) GIBBONS LUKE
Abstract: In his early review of A Portrait of the Artist as a Young Man, Ezra Pound noted in passing that Joyce’s work acquired an additional currency for readers in the aftermath of the Easter Rising of 1916: “If more people had readA Portraitand certain stories in Mr Joyce’sDublinersthere might have been less recent trouble in Ireland. A clear diagnosis is never without value” (Pound 1970, 83). For Pound, it is as if Joyce is writing in the prose ofcounter-insurgency, diagnosing the ills that should have been redressed to prevent revolution, but for others his writing

Book Title: Seamus Heaney as Aesthetic Thinker-A Study of the Prose
Publisher: Syracuse University Press
Author(s): MacKillop James
Abstract: Seamus Heaney’s unexpected death in August 2013 brought to completion his body of work, and scholars are only now coming to understand the full scale and importance of this extraordinary career. The Nobel Prize–winning poet, translator, and playwright from the North of Ireland is considered the most important Irish poet after Yeats and, at the time of his death, arguably the most famous living poet. For this reason, much of the scholarship to date on Heaney has understandably focused on his poetry. O’Brien’s new work, however, focuses on Heaney’s essays, book chapters, and lectures as it seeks to understand how Heaney explored the poet’s role in the world. By examining Heaney’s prose, O’Brien teases out a clearer understanding of Heaney’s sense of the function of poetry as an act of public intellectual and ethical inquiry. In doing so, O’Brien reads Heaney as an aesthetic thinker in the European tradition, considering him alongside Heidegger, Derrida, Lacan, and Adorno. Studying Heaney within this theoretical and philosophical tradition sheds new and useful light on one of the greatest creative minds of the twentieth century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j1nw0t

Introduction: from: Seamus Heaney as Aesthetic Thinker
Abstract: In an ever-growing list of studies on the work of Seamus Heaney, this book will attempt something different. His poetry will not be the focus of analysis, except where it is relevant to the main theme, which is an outline of Heaney as an aesthetic thinker in the European intellectual tradition. This tradition, generally located in the sphere of Continental philosophy and cultural theory, sees the aesthetic as a valid epistemological mode of thinking. From Plato through Immanuel Kant and Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel to contemporary philosophical and theoretical writers such as Martin Heidegger, Theodor Adorno, Jacques Lacan, Jacques Derrida,

5 The Place of Writing—the Writing of Place from: Seamus Heaney as Aesthetic Thinker
Abstract: This chapter will look at the ambiguous relationship between place and writing in the thinking of Seamus Heaney. In the last chapter, we looked at how the aesthetic can be used to validate a monological, monofocal, and motivated connection between a people, a language, and a place. In this chapter, we will examine the careful and nuanced manner in which Heaney treats the connections between place and people in his work. Heaney is well aware of the attenuating influence of the “appetites of gravity” as he describes them (Heaney 1975, 43), which fuse a people to a place, and he

6 A Renegade Gentleman from: A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: André realized that among the forms of wealth he enjoyed as a child was a broader network of connections than most, a network he took for granted. It was his father’s task to

12 The War Worsens: from: A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: In the opening months of 1942, Marshal Pétain was still popular in sectors of this new French State. Church authorities were still willing to regard some of the more odious actions the government took (e.g., the Jewish Statute of October 3) as necessary compromises made in exchange for the Vichy government’s independent status. Pétain’s emphasis on the three virtues of work, family, and fatherland was accepted as a commonplace template for the moral reform of the French nation. Church publications made repeated favorable comment on this celebrated triptych. The president of the ÉRF, Pastor Boegner, was still in support of

14 The Bridge from War to Peace from: A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: At age twenty, a young German-speaking Swiss by the name of Hans-Ruedi Weber was looking for a project, something that would help him sort out his future. He had heard about the work of the Secours Suisse aux Enfants in Le Chambon-sur-Lignon, and offered his services if they would have him. He was accepted and arrived in Le Chambon in January of 1944.

15 Versailles: from: A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: The Trocmés’ final four years in Le Chambon-sur-Lignon were also their first years of new and different responsibilities. Only a few of his parishioners shared Trocmés’ understanding that the hard work of reconciliation was as important as the courage of resistance.

16 Versailles: from: A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: The Italian visits were, like those in Germany, a return to familiar nations and networks, and the Trocmés had a handle at least on what had happened there during the decade from 1935 to 1945. America was another story. Both Trocmés had done their graduate studies there. Both felt at ease in the United States and in the English language, but they were not nearly as familiar with what had transpired in America during the two decades since their single year as foreign students there.

Book Title: Memory Ireland-History and Modernity, Volume 1
Publisher: Syracuse University Press
Author(s): Frawley Oona
Abstract: Despite the ease with which scholars have used the term "memory" in recent decades, its definition remains enigmatic. Does cultural memory rely on the memories of individuals, or does it take shape beyond the borders of the individual mind? Cultural memory has garnered particular attention within Irish studies. With its trauma-filled history and sizable global diaspora, Ireland presents an ideal subject for work in this vein. What do stereotypes of Irish memory—as extensive, unforgiving, begrudging, but also blank on particular, usually traumatic, subjects—reveal about the ways in which cultural remembrance works in contemporary Irish culture and in Irish diasporic culture? How do icons of Irishness—from the harp to the cottage, from the Celtic cross to a figure like James Joyce—function in cultural memory? This collection seeks to address these questions as it maps a landscape of cultural memory in Ireland through theoretical, historical, literary, and cultural explorations by top scholars in the field of Irish studies. In a series that will ultimately include four volumes, the sixteen essays in this first volume explore remembrance and forgetting throughout history, from early modern Ireland to contemporary multicultural Ireland. Among the many subjects addressed: Guy Beiner disentangles "collective" from "folk" memory in "Remembering and Forgetting the Irish Rebellion of 1798," and Anne Dolan looks at local memory of the civil war in "Embodying the Memory of War and Civil War." The volume concludes with Alan Titley’s "The Great Forgetting," a compelling argument for viewing modern Irish culture as an artifact of the Europeanization of Ireland and for bringing into focus the urgent need for further, wide-ranging Irishlanguage scholarship.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j1w050

2 Toward a Theory of Cultural Memory in an Irish Postcolonial Context from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) FRAWLEY OONA
Abstract: While terms like “memory,” “cultural memory,” and their variants frequently occur in the discourses of Irish literature, culture, and history, “memory” has remained largely undefined, addressed laterally. That the field of Irish studies has thus far failed adequately to define memory is hardly surprising, since those who have made memory their lifework experience similar problems. Memory, as the neuroscientist Antonio Damasio points out, is particularly elusive. “We are not conscious,” he writes, “of which memories we store and which memories we do not; of how we store memories; of how we classify and organize them; of how we interrelate memories

6 Women and the Survival of Archaeological Monuments in Nineteenth-Century Ireland from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) CHEALLAIGH MÁIRÍN NÍ
Abstract: In the 1840s, while famine and disease gnawed at the lives of large sections of Ireland’s poor, Irish antiquarians increasingly turned their attention to the study of prehistoric and other archaeological remains. Inspired by the visit of the Danish antiquarian Worsaae and his account of the development of the chronological framework known as the “Three Age System” (Worsaae 1845–7, 312–14), members of learned societies and students of the past visited and described a variety of mounds and megalithic constructions. They may also, consciously or unconsciously, have been mirroring Worsaae’s observation that “It was immediately after great national calamities,

Prothesis from: Disability Rhetoric
Abstract: First, here we are in Periclean Athens, following the Ten Years’ War. Many Athenians have been wounded and disabled. The city must be rebuilt. A huge festival is held to celebrate Hephaestus, the Greek god of metallurgy, a god with a physical disability, his feet twisted and pointed in opposite directions. In this “new” Athens, there will be a need for craftspeople like Hephaestus—everyone will have to get to work. There is also a shift toward new bodily values. Hephaestus becomes the figure for new forms of ingenuity and

INTERCHAPTER: from: Disability Rhetoric
Abstract: The goal of Disability Rhetoricis to instantiate an expanded sense and a more inclusive framework through which we might view the rhetorical body. In introducing terms likeaphrona, anmut, apate,andpseilos,I am not trying to establish a new lexicon, but rather I am working to show that we could choose to view a history in which disability and rhetoricity were consubstantial, in which this connection was fully theorized, when we screen our stories again. In the next chapter I will expand on these enabling approaches to embodiment through the stories ofmētis. But, as I promised at

5 Eating Rhetorical Bodies from: Disability Rhetoric
Abstract: The celebration of Hephaestus, his craft, his cunning, his ability, as well as the deification of his disability are means of challenging held perceptions about the mythical character, but also about all of us—defined as we all are by concepts of ability, by rhetorics of normalcy. An epideictic and forensic exploration of his myths does not just martial praise or blame through his body or question the truth or falsity of rhetorical history; this rhetorical work should shift body values and roles, becoming a deliberation on embodied possibilities.

Book Title: Placing Aesthetics-Reflections on the Philosophic Tradition
Publisher: Ohio University Press
Author(s): Wood Robert E.
Abstract: Examining select high points in the speculative tradition from Plato and Aristotle through the Middle Ages and German tradition to Dewey and Heidegger, Placing Aestheticsseeks to locate the aesthetic concern within the larger framework of each thinker's philosophy.In Professor Robert Wood's study, aesthetics is not peripheral but rather central to the speculative tradition and to human existence as such. In Dewey's terms, aesthetics is "experience in its integrity." Its personal ground is in "the heart," which is the dispositional ground formed by genetic, cultural , and personal historical factors by which we are spontaneously moved and, in turn, are inclined to move, both practically and theoretically, in certain directions.Prepared for use by the student as well as the philosopher,Placing Aestheticsaims to recover the fullness of humanness within a sense of the fullness of encompassing Being. It attempts to overcome the splitting of thought, even in philosophy, into exclusive specializations and the fracturing of life itself into theoretical, practical, and emotive dimensions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j7x66b

II PLATO from: Placing Aesthetics
Abstract: In my treatment of Plato, the first of the great philosophers to address matters aesthetic, I begin to flesh out more fully the framework considerations I have offered in the previous chapter by an interpretation that builds a whole world of meaning, encompassing every aspect of human existence. There is a sense in which one might say that Plato’s philosophy is essentially an aesthetic. Beauty plays a central role in his thought, though he has some harsh things to say about its appearance in art. However, in spite of the latter, his own works exhibit an artistry unmatched in the

IV PLOTINUS AND THE LATIN MIDDLE AGES from: Placing Aesthetics
Abstract: Though the artistic practice of the Middle Ages was unparalleled, especially in the construction of the cathedrals that housed magnificent sculptural and pictorial works and were filled with the haunting sounds of Gregorian chant, it might not be too far off the mark to claim that, from the point of view of aesthetics (i.e., reflection on the nature of art and beauty), the thought of the Middle Ages was essentially derivative. Indeed, among the major thinkers, the great philosopher-theologians, besides citation and paraphrase of traditional sources, one finds very little sustained treatment of aesthetic matters, and almost nothing of any

V KANT from: Placing Aesthetics
Abstract: Once on immanuel kant’s tombstone stood the words, “The starry skies above, the moral law within.”¹ They are taken from the closing paragraphs of his Critique of Practical Reason, the second work in his critical project. The beginning of the quotation reads: “Two things fill the heart with ever new and increasing admiration and awe[Bewunderung und Ehrfurcht]….”² The starry skies above are the object and model for mechanistic science. In Newtonian mechanics the laws that govern the stars govern all terrestrial motions as well. It was such knowing that furnished the exemplar of knowing analyzed in the first part

VII SCHOPENHAUER from: Placing Aesthetics
Abstract: One way of looking at Arthur Schopenhauer’s thought is to view it as a synthesis between Kant and Plato (together with Plotinus) on the one hand and the Indian tradition on the other. Schopenhauer’s early work On the Fourfold Root of the Principle of Sufficient Reasonwas straight Kantian analysis.¹ Recall in Kant the three levels of form, which function as filters or glasses through which the world of appearance is constituted. The first level is that of the forms of sensibility—space and time—which furnish the encompassing frame of all appearance; the second, the level of the categories

IX DEWEY from: Placing Aesthetics
Abstract: Outside of hegel and Schelling, there is no major philosopher who has devoted as much attention to the aesthetic or given it as central a role as John Dewey. This may come as a surprise to some. In their standard two-volume survey of American philosophy, Elizabeth Flower and Murray Murphey do not even mention Dewey’s Art as Experience, in spite of their relatively extensive period-by-period, work-by-work survey of his publications.¹ And yet for Dewey the aesthetic furnishes the basic measure of everything human.

X HEIDEGGER from: Placing Aesthetics
Abstract: From martin heidegger’s first major work, Being and Time, his thought has focused on the notion of Being, but the method of his approach was phenomenology, the method characterizing my own introduction. Heidegger’s approach falls in the line of his teacher, Edmund Husserl, the founder of Phenomenology. Husserl understood Phenomenology to be comprehensive philosophy; it is at least permanent prolegomenon, acknowledged or not, to any philosophy. Phenomenology comes from two Greek terms,phainomenon, appearance, andlogos, essence. Phenomenology is a comprehensive descriptive inventory of all the essential ways in which appearance—that is, presence to consciousness—occurs: direct evidence in

CHAPTER 1 DEATH, ESCAPE, AND THINKING BEYOND BEING from: Prophetic Politics
Abstract: At the outset of his first original philosophical work, On Escape, Levinas traces the path taken by modern philosophy. The modern approach begins with human freedom and the limitations the real imposes on that freedom—the “non-I” restricts the I, and the I “revolts” against this constraint. Subjectivity is understood as a substantial subject lying behind its accidental modifications: “The simplicity of the subject lies beyond the struggles that tear it apart.” These struggles are heroic attempts to overcome obstacles to fulfillment, understood as self-sufficiency. Being itself is thus conceived as sufficiency; and the subject enhances its being by becoming

Book Title: Metaphor and the Slave Trade in West African Literature- Publisher: Ohio University Press
Author(s): MURPHY LAURA T.
Abstract: Metaphor and the Slave Tradeprovides compelling evidence of the hidden but unmistakable traces of the transatlantic slave trade that persist in West African discourse. Through an examination of metaphors that describe the trauma, loss, and suffering associated with the commerce in human lives, this book shows how the horrors of slavery are communicated from generation to generation.Laura T. Murphy's insightful new readings of canonical West African fiction, autobiography, drama, and poetry explore the relationship between memory and metaphor and emphasize how repressed or otherwise marginalized memories can be transmitted through images, tropes, rumors, and fears. By analyzing the unique codes through which West Africans have represented the slave trade, this work foregrounds African literary contributions to Black Atlantic discourse and draws attention to the archive that metaphor unlocks for scholars of all disciplines and fields of study.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j7x98t

INTRODUCTION from: Metaphor and the Slave Trade in West African Literature
Abstract: Metaphor and the Slave Tradeexamines the hidden though significant role the transatlantic slave trade has played in the Anglophone West African imagination and the means by which it has been metaphorized in the literary production of the region. It explores how four canonical authors in particular—Amos Tutuola, Ben Okri, Ayi Kwei Armah, and Ama Ata Aidoo—integrated metaphors of the slave trade into their fictional worlds, metaphors that were inherited from or invented as a reflection of the coded discourse surrounding the slave trade in their cultures. In much of West African fiction—even in works that employ

CHAPTER TWO Magical Capture in a Landscape of Terror: from: Metaphor and the Slave Trade in West African Literature
Abstract: One afternoon while young Olaudah Equiano’s parents worked in the fields, he spied an intruder kidnap the “stout” children of his neighbors two yards over. He shouted out to his friends, who caught the assailants and bound them, and together they waited for their parents to return home and punish the crime. This was no uncommon occurrence: attackers from other regions frequently raided Equiano’s village to “carry off as many [children] as they could seize,”¹ a practice that was especially acute in times of famine. So common were these raids and other attacks on his village that Equiano’s family and

Introduction from: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Author(s) Bonk Jonathan J.
Abstract: Our vision for the missions and missionaries volume is to focus on central themes in the missionary enterprise and not cover specific missionaries or missionary organizations, as these are well documented in existing reference works…. We would also like the volume to be

A from: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: Emphasis on the great missionary movement of the nineteenth century sometimes gives the impression that Africa was one of the last continents to be evangelized and that missionary work was largely undertaken by Europeans and North Americans. This seriously misrepresents the state of affairs. Orthodox Christianity flourished in northeast Africa for more than a millennium before the onset of the Western missionary endeavor. The Acts of the Apostles records a story of the conversion of an Ethiopian (or Nubian) official by the evangelist Philip. This comes in the chapter before Paul, the apostle to Europe, is introduced. A flourishing A

B from: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: When William Carey published his Enquiry into the Obligations of Christians, to Use Means for the Conversion of the Heathens, in 1792, he was doing what Christians traditionally do (but in Carey’s day had been badly neglected), namely demonstrating from the Bible that cross-cultural missionary work was an essential part of the calling of the church.

G from: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: The largest organized women’s movement in North America in the early twentieth century was the women’s missionary movement, whose expansive involvement reached across the globe into Asia, Africa, Latin America, and the Middle East. Women missionaries constituted an indispensable workforce in the foreign missionary enterprise, representing almost 60 percent of the entire mission personnel by 1890. Despite the significant role of women in the foreign missionary enterprise, it is only since the 1980s have women missionaries and their subjects of conversion begun to draw scholarly attention. Since then, much research has shown that, although women were precluded from clerical rights

J from: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: As late as the 1970s sociologists like James Beckford were able to characterize the Jehovah’s Witnesses as a working-class phenomenon

L from: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: In 1493 Christopher Columbus made his second voyage to America. Included with his colonists were members of religious orders, but only three of these attempted to evangelize the native population. They were lay brothers Ramón Pané, a Jeronymite who in 1498 wrote a short account of his mission work, and Juan Deledeule and Juan Tisin, both Franciscans about

N from: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: Mission work among Native Americans, whether Catholic or Protestant, is marked by incongruities and inconsistencies. Missionaries, though fired by zeal for the Christian faith, love of God, and concern for humankind, often confused Christianity with their own Western cultures. Wittingly or unwittingly, they frequently worked hand in hand with national governments as the humanitarian arm in colonial conquests. They could show deep compassion for those they sought to “save,” while exhibiting the attitudes of paternalistic superiority that were current in their day. It should be little wonder that after five hundred years of missionization the number of Native American adherents

O from: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: Christian missionary work in the Pacific Islands and Australasia has been dominated by two main expressions of Christianity: Protestantism rooted in Britain and North America and Roman Catholicism from continental Europe. Christianity first entered the Pacific Islands through the Spanish colonial presence on the Pacific Rim. In the sixteenth and early seventeenth centuries Spanish navigators in the Pacific searched for peoples to bring under the rule of imperial Spain and to convert to Catholic Christianity. They took away a small number of islanders for instruction and baptism. In the 1660s the Spanish royal house sent Jesuits from the Philippines to

R from: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: It is difficult to make blanket statements about missionaries and their ideas concerning race because such ideas have differed dramatically over time. Moreover, racial attitudes have differed according to denomination, among sponsoring groups, from mission field to mission field (e. g., the attitudes of missionaries to Africa differed from those of missionaries to Asia), from mission station to mission station, and even among individual missionaries working in the same area and for the same organization.

6 Kierkegaard and Kant on the “Duty to Love” from: Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) FERREIRA M. JAMIE
Abstract: Attempts to compare and contrast Kant’s ethics with Kierkegaard’s ethics usually use Kant’s Groundwork for the Metaphysics of Moralsand Kierkegaard’s pseudonymous writingsEither-OrandFear and Trembling. It seems to me that a more fruitful comparison of their ethics is possible by drawing on the more mature ethical accounts of both thinkers: in Kant’s case, the later and fullerMetaphysics of Moralsand, in Kierkegaard’s case,Works of Love, signed in his own name. In particular, I suggest that a study of their views of the scriptural commandment to “love your neighbor” can be mutually illuminating.¹

7 The Problematic Love for God: from: Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) VACEK EDWARD COLLINS
Abstract: Since Jesus declared that love for God was the first and greatest commandment, we might expect that theologians would long ago have developed a standard account of this love. Not so. Of course, many theologians write about God’s love for us. And contemporary Christian ethicists, such as Gene Outka, have done marvelous, if still contested, work on the connection between love for God and love for neighbor or love for self.¹ In various ways, these ethicists hold that “love for God subtends or affects all one’s goals and projects, not simply the moral ones.”² But they seldom focus on love

9 Forgiveness in the Service of Love from: Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) FARLEY MARGARET A.
Abstract: In a volume that aims to expand our understandings of Christian love by clarifying love’s meaning in theory and practice, a chapter devoted to “forgiveness” may appear marginal to the task. Yet the opposite is the case. There is no genuine Christian forgiveness without love, and love is sometimes tested in its ultimate possibility and imperative by the forgiveness it generates. Moreover, the construals of forgiveness that are central to much of Christian theology slip into caricature unless they include love in their foundation, framework, and movement. Christians believe that God’s love for humans is revealed—perhaps centrally—in God’s

16 Love in the Vocation of Christian Sexual Ethics: from: Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) JORDAN MARK D.
Abstract: Instead, Christian sexual ethics has been conducted as controversy. It is one branch of Christian ethics that regularly figures in campaign debates and political reporting. Candidates and network journalists may not care much for Gospel exhortations to selfless humility or courageous pacifism, but they seek out what churches say about

17 Meditations on Love and Violence from: Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) TOWNES EMILIE M.
Abstract: I was initially somewhat amused at the invitation to participate in this volume because the key ethical and moral category I deal with in my work and teaching is justice, not love. However, when I hit the global “find” button on the computer to see how I reflect on love, I discovered that it is always twined with justice. This is not surprising given that love and justice are extremely natural if not necessary dance partners. They inform each other and enrich our ethical reflection as moral, believing animals in a vast creation.¹ Justice is the corporate or communal expression

43. Spellmaker or The Witcher? from: Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Salich Hanna
Abstract: The short story entitled Wiedźmin(known to English readers asThe Witcherand/orSpellmaker) is one of the most important fantasy narratives in Poland. The short story first appeared in December 1986 issue ofFantastykamagazine; since then it has been published in numerous short story collections,Ostatnie źyczenie(The Last Wish) being one of them.Wiedźminopens this collection and the whole cycle of literary works about the adventures of a witcher.

EL PAPEL DE LOS PRINCIPIOS EN LA TEORÍA DEL DERECHO DE RONALD DWORKIN from: Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del Derecho II
Author(s) Fontanillo José Antonio Pinto
Abstract: “El filósofo del derecho más importante de su generación” al decir de Richard Revesz decano de la NYU Law School y el segundo autor norteamericano del siglo XX más citado en el campo del Derecho según The Journal of Legal Studies,Ronald Myles Dworkin (Worcester, Estados Unidos, 11 de diciembre de 1931; Londresl4 de febrero de 2013) ha dejado sin duda una importante estela de su paso por el universo jurídico. Ya sea en el ámbito académico: Harvard, Yale, Oxford, London (University College) y Nueva York, ya sea en las tribunas de opinión de actualidad (especialmente desde su atalaya del

Book Title: Teoría contemporánea de los derechos humanos. Elementos para una reconstrucción sistémica- Publisher: Dykinson
Author(s): García José Antonio López
Abstract: El respaldo a la teoría de los derechos humanos, así como a las declaraciones y tratados internacionales, es un hecho geo-político de la mayor relevancia, al cual se han sumado por razones de convicción o conveniencia la mayoría de los países delo que llamamos “el mundo civilizado". Tales instrumentos se han convertido entonces en un punto de referencia obligado para cualquier estudio y discusión de carácter moral, jurídico y político, y en un paradigma para los valores humanos y criterios de legitimidad del ejercicio del poder público. La ciencia jurídica actual ha considerado que la dignidad humana es cualidad principalísima de todo ser humano, que debe ser respetada bajo cualquier circunstancia y bajo ese sustrato que fundamenta la convivencia social, la tendencia real es lograr su adecuada protección, encontrarla idea de que todos estamos involucrados en una tarea común; la tarea de conocer cuál es el vínculo que nos une en cuanto seres humanos o humanidad para llegar al cumplimiento de una responsabilidad de todas y todos; la preservación de la dignidad humana como núcleo esencial de los derechos humanos. El propósito de este libro es presentar, con una virtud de orientación teórica y sistémica, la más amplia información sobre las propuestas que los grandes tratadistas en la materia han formulado en los últimos años, haciendo énfasis en las expresiones que delimitan su concepción; tales como derechos naturales, derechos fundamentales, derechos subjetivos o derechos morales. Se resaltan también los aciertos y debilidades de sus distintas definiciones y de todo el elenco de categorías jurídicas relacionadas, para intentar ofrecernos un extenso panorama de lo que son o se consideran los derechos humanos y la forma en que su estudio se ha desarrollado desde el análisis de gabinete hasta la práctica. Para todo lo anterior, se abordan, entre otras, las teorías de los iusfilósofos recientes más reconocidos como Gregorio Peces-Barba, Luigi Ferrajoli, Angelo Papacchini, Robert Alexy, Ronald Dworkin, John Rawls, Francisco Laporta, Antonio E. Pérez Luño, LiborioHierro, y Elías Díaz; con lo que esta obra pretende convertirse en referencia ineludible para todos aquellos que se dediquen al estudio, investigación y aplicación de los temas que aborda, lo mismo que para quienes sólo deseen introducirse con bases firmes a la teoría contemporánea de los derechos humanos. GEOFREDO ANGULO LOPEZ. Es doctor en derechos fundamentales por la Universidad de Jaén, Andalucía (España), asesor ejecutivo de la Comisión de Derechos Humanos del Estado de Yucatán (México) y profesor e investigador del Centro de Investigaciones Jurídicas de la Facultad de Derecho de la Universidad Autónoma de Yucatán (México). Ha recibido el Primer lugar del Concurso estatal de Ensayo Jurídico La impartición de Justicia en el Nuevo Contexto Constitucional del Poder Judicial del Estado de Yucatán, 2012. Dentro de sus publicaciones destacan: “La ductilidad como núcleo esencial del Derecho: La reforma al artículo 1° de la Constitución mexicana", Revista de Estudios Jurídicos, Segunda Época n° 14, 2014. Colabora en la formación y capacitación especializada de funcionarios públicos en materia de derechos humanos.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1k232zb

1 The Faith of Jacob: from: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: The goal of this chapter is to lay the groundwork for all that is to follow by discussing three foundational issues. First, since my concern in this volume is to develop and defend a particular hermeneutic of Scripture, I need to go beyond what was said in the introduction and spell out a bit further my understanding of what is entailed in the confession that all Scripture is “God-breathed” (2 Tim 3: 16).

6 Is the Centrality of the Cross Thesis Defensible? from: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: First, a number of contemporary scholars argue that “among the symbols” used in the artwork of Christians during the first four centuries of church history, “we find nothing that signifies suffering, death, or self-immolation.”³ “Jesus does not suffer or die in pre-Constantinian art,” Graydon Fisher Snyder argues. “There is no

14 The Heavenly Missionary: from: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: I have been acquainted with several people who have worked as missionaries to tribes in Third World countries that had not yet heard the gospel. I am told that serving in these contexts often requires a great deal of patience and flexibility. One sometimes encounters centuriesold customs such as “female circumcision” that are, by western Christian standards, utterly inhumane.³ The missionary cannot simply point out the inhumanity of these ancient customs and expect the tribe to abandon them. If the missionary ever hopes to have the tribe eventually embrace the gospel and abandon their inhumane customs, they must rather initially

1 Introduction and History of Interpretation from: Memories of Asaph
Abstract: The biblical psalms attributed to Asaph (Psalms 50, 73–83) exhibit the most concentrated collection of historical referents in the Psalter. These historical referents, embodied in the Asaphite collection, serve as the marshals of Israel’s historical memory and establish a cultic framework in which Israel’s memory is formed, its history represented, and its identity shaped. My contention is that the historical material in these psalms, paired as it is with a broad vocabulary of remembrance, is a form of cultic historiography that is principally attested in Asaph and is distinctive of the Psalter.

Book Title: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative- Publisher: Ohio State University Press
Author(s): RICHARDSON BRIAN
Abstract: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrativeoffers a collection of foundational essays introducing the reader to the full scope of unnatural narrative theory: its meaning, its goals, its extent, its paradoxes. This volume brings together a distinguished group of international critics, scholars, and historians that includes several of the world's leading narrative theorists. Together, they survey many basic areas of narrative studies from an unnatural perspective: story, time, space, voice, minds, narrative levels, "realism," nonfiction, hyperfiction, and narrative poetry. Rarely have these fundamental concepts been subjected to such an original and thoroughgoing reconceptualization. Much of the book is directed toward an investigation of experimental and antirealist work. Each essay focuses on texts and episodes that narrative theory has tended to neglect, and each provides theoretical formulations that are commensurate with such exceptional, albeit neglected, works.A Poetics of Unnatural Narrativearticulates and delineates the newest and most radical movement in narrative studies. This anthology will be of great interest to students and scholars of narrative studies and of the history and theory of modern fiction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1kgqw52

Introduction from: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) RICHARDSON BRIAN
Abstract: IN RECENT YEARS, unnatural narratology has developed into the most exciting new paradigm in narrative theory and the most important new approach since the advent of cognitive narratology. A wide range of scholars have become increasingly interested in the analysis of unnatural texts, that is, texts that feature strikingly impossible or antimimetic elements.¹ Such works have been consistently neglected or marginalized in existing narratological frameworks.

1 Unnatural Stories and Sequences from: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) RICHARDSON BRIAN
Abstract: A CONVENTIONAL, realistic, or conversational natural narrative typically has a fairly straightforward story of a certain magnitude that follows an easily recognizable trajectory. Unnatural narratives challenge, transgress, or reject many or all of these basic conventions; the more radical the rejection, the more unnatural the resulting story is. For me, the fundamental criterion of the unnatural is its violation of the mimetic conventions that govern conversational natural narratives, nonfictional texts, and realistic works that attempt to mimic the conventions of nonfictional narratives. In what follows, I will focus on works that are decidedly antimimetic, but I will also look at

10 The Unnaturalness of Narrative Poetry from: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) McHALE BRIAN
Abstract: THE UNDERLYING working hypothesis of all cognitive approaches to narrative, as I understand it, is that narrative is natural, in the sense that it arises spontaneously among all human groups, across eras and cultures, and that wherever and whenever it occurs it displays similar features. Its ubiquity and longevity are explained by the fact that it reflects fundamental categories and processes of human cognition and experience. The baseline form of all narrative is spontaneously occurring conversational narratives of personal experience, and according to the “natural narrative” hypothesis, the cognitive parameters of natural conversational narrative remain in force even in the

Book Title: Postclassical Narratology-Approaches and Analyses
Publisher: Ohio State University Press
Author(s): FLUDERNIK MONIKA
Abstract: The contributors also demonstrate that narratologists nowadays see the object of their research as more variegated than was the case twenty years ago: they resort to a number of different methods in combination when approaching a problem, and they tend to ground their analyses in a rich contextual framework.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1kgqw6k

Introduction from: Postclassical Narratology
Author(s) FLUDERNIK MONIKA
Abstract: The title of this collection of recent narratological work, Postclassical Narratology: Approaches and Analyses, openly alludes to David Herman’s seminal bimillennial volumeNarratologies: New Perspectives on Narrative Analysis(1999b), in which he introduced the term postclassical narratology¹ and defined it as follows:

3 Large Intermental Units in Middlemarch from: Postclassical Narratology
Author(s) PALMER ALAN
Abstract: Intermental thoughtis joint, group, shared or collective thought, as opposed to intramental, or individual or private thought. It is also known associally distributed, situated,orextended cognition, and also asintersubjectivity. Intermental thought is a crucially important component of fictional narrative because much of the mental functioning that occurs in novels is done by large organizations, small groups, work colleagues, friends, families, couples and other intermental units. It could plausibly be argued that a large amount of the subject matter of novels is the formation, development and breakdown of these intermental systems.¹ However, this aspect of narrative has

6 Hypothetical Intentionalism: from: Postclassical Narratology
Author(s) ALBER JAN
Abstract: Cinematic narration figures prominently in the work of several narratologists. Basically, three schools of thought exist. The first, represented by David Bordwell, argues that film has narration but no narrator (1985: 61). According to Bordwell, cinematic narration is created by the viewer, who uses cognitive schemata to transform the film’s visual images and sounds into a series of perceptible configurations, which he or she then interprets as a story.¹ In contrast to Bordwell’s approach, the second school, represented by Seymour Chatman, argues that films are narrated by acinematic narrator. Chatman defines this narrator in terms of “the organizational and

8 Narrators, Narratees, and Mimetic Desire from: Postclassical Narratology
Author(s) MARCUS AMIT
Abstract: Girard’s thesis of mimetic desire (also called “triangular” or “metaphysical” desire)¹ has aroused much theoretical interest among literary scholars, who have expanded and expounded his theory, while at the same time criticizing its universal pretensions and its blurring of differences between different types of desire (e.g., male vs. female, heterosexual vs. homosexual).² Literary interpretations that apply Girard’s ideas from his work Deceit, Desire, and the Novel(1965) to fictional narratives focus on the dynamics of mimetic desire and rivalry between two (or more) characters on the story level: the desiring subject, the mediator (or rival), and the desired object.

11 Natural Authors, Unnatural Narration from: Postclassical Narratology
Author(s) NIELSEN HENRIK SKOV
Abstract: Hardly anything is more familiar to literary scholars than fictional narrative. Yet this simple term contains a slight tension between the inventionassociated with fiction, from its root in the Latinfictio, and theknowingassociated with narration and its root in the Latingnarus. How can you invent what you know or know what you invent? In all standard models of narratology, the answer to this question has been to split the tasks and distinguish between the narrator who knows and the author whoinvents, and this is the case particularly in the framework of Gérard Genette.²

FOREWORD from: The IMAGINATION OF CLASS
Author(s) Brantlinger Patrick
Abstract: On the contributors’ page for the Spring 1992 issue of NOVEL, the editors list Roger Henkle, whose article on George Gissing, Arthur Morrison, and urban poverty in late-nineteenth-century British fiction it contains. Following Roger’s name, they indicate that he “was at work on a book-length study of the fiction of urban poverty in late-Victorian England before his untimely death on October 5, 1991.” Thanks to Professor Daniel Bivona of Arizona State University, The Imagination of Classis at last the completed version of that book-length study. I am certain that Roger, our mutual friend and Dan’s former mentor and dissertation

CHAPTER 3 Morrison, Gissing, and the Stark Reality from: The IMAGINATION OF CLASS
Abstract: In the early 1890s a stark vision of life in the East End emerges from the pens of two writers with a close acquaintance with life there: Arthur Morrison and George Gissing. Morrison was born in Poplar in 1863, the son of an engine fitter who worked on the docks. His father died of consumption when Arthur was a boy, and his mother raised the three children by running a haberdasher’s shop in Grundy Street. Arthur himself took a job early as office boy in the architect’s department of the School Board of London at a weekly salary of seven

CHAPTER 4 Hell Hath Its Flâneurs: from: The IMAGINATION OF CLASS
Abstract: Gissing’s response to East End poverty was, like Hardy’s to rural poverty, to associate energy with antisocial behavior and enervation with the requirements of goodness. There was a type of active energy that writers could deploy, however: the energy required by social investigation and reporting. The combination of culturalist critique, moral judgment, and risk-taking that these activities required and called forth signifies a change in the conceptualization of working and lower class life among male intellectuals in the 1890s, especially among those we associate with what we are calling the “discourse of the abyss.” If the model of the earnest

CHAPTER 2 “PROV’DENCE DON’T FIRE NO BLANK CA’TRIDGES, BOYS”: from: The REVEREND MARK TWAIN
Abstract: THE OVERLAND MONTHLYwas hardly alone in its repeated estimation thatRoughing It(1872) was a “grotesque” production (“Anonymous Review” 580, 581). In the years following the book’s publication, many reviewers noted the presence of the grotesque inRoughing It. Writing inAppleton’s Journal, George Ferris lauded the “grotesque and irresistible form” present in Twain’s work (17). B. B. Toby, reviewing the book for theSan Francisco Morning Call, criticized the illustrations as “even more grotesque than the text,” yet found the “grotesqueness and absurdity” of the text strangely appealing (1). As for Twain’s most perceptive critic, William Dean Howells

CHAPTER 3 MARK TWAIN’S HYMNS IN PROSE: from: The REVEREND MARK TWAIN
Abstract: GIVEN SOME of Mark Twain’s comments about his novel The Adventures of Tom Sawyer(1876), it is somewhat surprising that the structure of the work has been the focus of many substantive articles. “Since there is no plot to the thing,” Twain wrote William Dean Howells, “it is likely to follow its own drift, & so is as likely to drift into manhood as anywhere—I won’t interpose” (MTHL 1: 87–88). Of course, Twain made other comments belying this disingenuous assertion, and beyond his claims of artlessness stands the novel itself; scholarly commentary, too. Considering the tendency to neglect

CHAPTER 6 Q: WHAT DO SOCRATES AND THE SHORTER CATECHISM HAVE IN COMMON? from: The REVEREND MARK TWAIN
Abstract: ON MAY 9, 1875, Olivia Clemens, wife of writer Mark Twain, sat writing a letter to her mother. “Mr. Clemens is reading aloud in ‘Plato’s Dialogues,’” she began, “so if I write incoherently you must excuse it” (Gribbon, Mark Twain’s Library2: 549). This “polyphony in the parlor” is emblematic of the sometimes unexpected influences on Twain’s work; far from causing Twain to “write incoherently,” as it may have for Mrs. Clemens, the writer thrived on a plurality of voices and influences. In the last decade, scholars have increasingly examined minority and female voices in Twain’s writing, analyzing the extent

CHAPTER 1 Revelation in History: from: Revelation and Convergence
Author(s) Schloesser Stephen
Abstract: Although it has been twenty-five years since Linda Schlafer investigated the seminal importance of Flannery O’Connor’s encounter with the work of Léon Bloy (1846–1917), scholars have been slow to follow her lead.² Yet Bloy’s literary style, indelibly marked by rhetorical violence and vitriolic humor, sounds much like characterizations of O’Connor’s own “language of apocalypse” and “imagination of extremity.”³ Moreover, Bloy’s privileging of “suffering” as redemption apparently responded to O’Connor’s felt need for what Ralph Wood has called a “darker reading of human misery, a more startling revelation of transcendent hope.”⁴ Perhaps most important, Bloy’s symbolist vision of history—the

CHAPTER 2 Breaking Bodies: from: Revelation and Convergence
Author(s) Murphy Michael P.
Abstract: George Bernanos, the great French writer (or “scribbler,” as he called himself) of the twentieth-century French Catholic literary revival, wrote in the “Sermon from an Agnostic on the Feast of St. Therese of Lisieux” episode from his 1938 work The Great Cemeteries under the Moonthe following: “Because you do not live your faith, your faith has ceased to be a living thing. It has become abstract—bodiless. Perhaps we shall find that the disincarnation of the Word of God is the real cause of all our misfortune.”¹ This propensity—the tendency to idealize experience and “disincarnate” theological phenomena from

CHAPTER 4 O’Connor’s “Pied Beauty”: from: Revelation and Convergence
Author(s) Bosco Mark
Abstract: In a 2010 essay on the use of color in the works of Flannery O’Connor, the scholar Bruce Gentry offers a striking list of words that populate O’Connor’s texts: rat-colored, chocolate purple, dead-silver, dried yellow, fox-colored, freezing-blue, gold sawdust, gray-purple, a green that was almost black or a black that was almost green, green-gold, mole-colored, monkey white, polluted lemon yellow, sticky-looking brown, sweet-potato-colored, toast colored, and tobacco-colored. Gentry further highlights the way O’Connor describes skin tones, white or otherwise: burnt-brown, cinnamon, coffee, gray, purple, red, tan, yellowish, mottled, speckled, clay pink, purple-faced, and almost-gray.¹ O’Connor’s palette recalls the powerfully evocative

CHAPTER 6 The “All-Demanding Eyes”: from: Revelation and Convergence
Author(s) Garavel Andrew J.
Abstract: “Parker’s Back,” which Flannery O’Connor wrote as she was dying at the age of thirty-nine, is a story of conversion in which God’s grace overwhelms the title character, O. E. Parker, after years of wandering, denial, and dissatisfaction. The present reading points out significant affinities between this narrative and the conversion of St. Augustine of Hippo (354–430) recounted in his Confessions, a text that exerts a considerable influence on O’Connor’s story.¹ “Parker’s Back,” in its author’s words, “dramatiz[es] a heresy” that figures importantly in Augustine’s work.² In addition, the theory of illumination set forth inThe Confessionscan help

Book Title: The Algerian New Novel-The Poetics of a Modern Nation, 1950-1979
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): ORLANDO VALÉRIE K.
Abstract: This book considers Algerian writing from 1950-1979 in the context of the French New Novel and proposes that many of the works of this era need to be considered as avant-garde and exemplary of literary experimentation, expressing a new age literarily as well as politically and culturally.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1kk66x9

INTRODUCTION from: The Algerian New Novel
Abstract: The modern Algerian novel, blending styles, languages, and ways of looking at and being in the world, demonstrates that Algerian writing of French expression has indeed always been cosmopolitan and global, exuding the Maghreb pluriel(multiple) ethic that Moroccan philosopher Abdelkébir Khatibi maintains privileges “une pensée autre” (an-Other way of thinking), which he first articulated in the 1980s. The philosopher’s concept explores the inherent hybridity of the Maghrebi subject, particularly the author writing in French, as a celebration of his/her bilingualism, which, according to Khatibi, always displays “two languages in a heterogeneous position, one working on the other, crisscrossing over,

4 CLAUDE OLLIER’S LE MAINTIEN DE L’ORDRE AND KATEB YACINE’S LE POLYGONE ÉTOILÉ: from: The Algerian New Novel
Abstract: Through labyrinths of eternal returns, flashbacks and flash-forwards, anonymous characters, and places with no designations, Claude Ollier and Kateb Yacine stand on either side of a narrative abyss that is fragile and dark, offering few answers to the unsettling questions that were associated with Algeria during the revolutionary period. Claude Ollier’s novel Le Maintien de l’ordre(Law and Order), published in 1961, and Kateb Yacine’s final novel in what he vaguely described as the concluding work to theNedjmatrilogy,Le Polygone étoilé(The starred polygon, 1966), are the bookends to a chapter in Algerian his tory that is as

5 MOHAMMED DIB’S HABEL AND THE EXPERIMENTAL ALGERIAN NOVEL: from: The Algerian New Novel
Abstract: By the mid-1960s when Kateb published Le Polygone étoilé,Algerian authors of French expression had already become disillusioned with the reality in which they were living. While this chapter further considers authors’ disillusionment and alienation in the postcolonial climate, it also studies to what degree the sociopolitical turbulence of the late 1960s continued to shape their works well into the 1970s. Third World movements across Africa and Latin America propelled forward by Algeria’s independence, the nascent U. S.-Vietnam war, the U. S. civil rights movement, and the social movements in France culminating into May ’ 68, all contributed to Algerian

7 NABILE FARÈS’S YAHIA, PAS DE CHANCE, AND OTHER EXPERIMENTAL NOVELS: from: The Algerian New Novel
Abstract: Much of what has been written about Algerian Nabile Farès’s work focuses on exile, his use of multiple languages (Berber, Arabic, and French), linguistic registers, and the historical events depicted in his first three novels covering the period 1954–62 of the Algerian Revolution. His fictional works from 1971 to his death in 2016 express the desire to keep his native Kabylian culture present and alive, to use the Berber language, which he spoke before he knew French, and to break apart the codified structures of all languages. In his novels Farès, like Boudjedra and Kateb, reflects on his disappointment

AFTERWORD: from: The Algerian New Novel
Abstract: The authors of the 1950s, ’60s, and ’70s, writing in the avant-garde of the French New Novel, set Algerian writers on a path that has inspired them to continue to explore inventive writing styles and themes up to the present day. From the past to the present, these authors have viewed the role of literature, specifically the novel, much in the same way the French-Czech writer and literary theorist Milan Kundera conceptualizes literature’s function in society in his work L’Art du roman(The Art of the Novel, 1986): “The novel does not examine reality, but existence. And existence is not

2. FAMILY RELATIONS from: Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: Assumptions about the self, power, and interaction inform two kinds of action—interpersonal encounter and ascetic practices—that stand as complementary opposites in Java These assumptions do not simply suffuse the atmosphere, however, they must be learned and acted upon. They are never systematically taught, nor are they often explicitly articulated. Instead, they are learned and applied in specific contexts, and in diverse ways My purpose in this chapter is to show how young Javanese become familiar with these assumptions in the workings of Javanese families In the following three chapters, I will consider how people draw upon such understandings

4. POTENCY, POSSESSION, AND SPEECH from: Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: A powerful figure in Java suggests the possibility of protection, wellbeing, and prosperity. He thereby invites voluntary submission. In return for the style and, to some degree, the services indicative of deference, an individual wins some assurance of the powerful person’s material and/or mystical support. However, ideological precepts and practical patterns of avoidance show distrust of the impulse to compromise one’s own sovereignty m dependence upon or submission to a powerful figure. At the same time, such figures may resist people’s attempts to put claims upon them. I have discussed the nature and workings of such ambivalence in relations between

10. CONCLUSION from: Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: In contemporary anthropology, much is made of the ways in which meaning is constructed by a culture’s members. The interpretive act by which sense is asserted, such as in the interpretation of art or dreams or language, is a moment m which such constructions of meaning become particularly clear. It seems therefore a particularly vital point at which to observe a culture’s workings. The meeting of individuals and events that interpretation implies is a reapplication of principles, occasionally a revision, rarely, in Java at least, a radical reconsideration of them. But in interpreting phenomena of whatever sort, people act upon

CHAPTER 1 ON THE ESSENTIAL IN MYTH: from: Mythical Intentions in Modern Literature
Abstract: The archetypalist position is a very familiar one in literary studies, where it has sanctioned a long history of interpretation as the art of translating symbols into universal archetypes. From this we learn, according to Jung, that the creative process “consists in the unconscious activation of an archetypal image, and in elaborating and shaping this image into the finished work. By giving it shape, the artist translates it into the language of the present, and so makes it possible for us to find our way back to the deepest springs of life.”³ Jung is clearly the most influential figure in

Book Title: Flannery O'Connor and the Language of Apocalypse- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): KESSLER EDWARD
Abstract: Seeing Flannery O'Connor in the company of poets, rather than realistic prose writers, this work shows how she uses recurring figures of speech to transform or re-create the external world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1m323xn

IV MAKING AN END from: Flannery O'Connor and the Language of Apocalypse
Abstract: In her story “Greenleaf,” Flannery O’Connor created one of her typical matriarchs, fearful of the unknown and resolutely determined to make her earthly “place” secure. Mrs. May sees herself as a good person, whose virtue shows in the charitable works she performs for others, particularly the Greenleaf family. She speculates that it would be ironic if, after all her efforts, one of the Greenleaf children should sue her for injuries his father suffered on her farm: “she thought of it almost with pleasure as if she had hit on the perfect ending for a story she was telling her friends.”

TEN Seneca’s Patricide and the Trace of Writing from: Language and Desire in Seneca's "Phaedra"
Abstract: As the secondary elaboration of a celebrated classic, Seneca’s Phaedrais at nearly every point conscious of its literary ancestry and therefore of its literariness. The ghost of Euripides haunts every line. Seneca has his own message to convey; but, because that message is inextricable from his implicit commentary on the Euripidean play, his work calls attention to its textuality, that is, to its status as a workwrittenin response to a pre-existent text that the author knows, presumably, through reading. It thus stands in a context of verbal artifice and artificiality; and its very existence implies and demands

Book Title: Literary visions of multicultural Ireland-The immigrant in contemporary Irish literature
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Villar-Argáiz Pilar
Abstract: The first full-length monograph to address the impact that Celtic-Tiger immigration has exerted on the poetry, drama and fiction of contemporary Irish writersNow available in paperback, this pioneering collection of essays deals with the topic of how Irish literature responds to the presence of non-Irish immigrants in Celtic-Tiger and post-Celtic-Tiger Ireland. The book assembles an international group of 18 leading and prestigious academics in the field of Irish studies from both sides of the Atlantic, including Declan Kiberd, Anne Fogarty and Maureen T. Reddy, amongst others. Key areas of discussion are: what does it mean to be ‘multicultural’ and what are the implications of this condition for contemporary Irish writers? How has literature in Ireland responded to inward migration? Have Irish writers reflected in their work (either explicitly or implicitly) the existence of migrant communities in Ireland? If so, are elements of Irish traditional culture and community maintained or transformed? What is the social and political efficacy of these intercultural artistic visions?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1mf6zgx

2 White Irish-born male playwrights and the immigrant experience onstage from: Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) McIvor Charlotte
Abstract: Donal O’Kelly’s Asylum! Asylum!premiered in 1994 on the Abbey Theatre’s Peacock stage and was the first play by an Irish-born playwright to directly address the issue of racism and immigration in Celtic Tiger Ireland. O’Kelly represented the vanguard of a group of white Irish-born male playwrights including Charlie O’Neill, Declan Gorman, Dermot Bolger, Roddy Doyle, Jim O’Hanlon, Paul Meade, and Paul Kennedy who would deal with these issues head-on in their work throughout the 1990s and 2000s. In the context of an Irish theatre scene criticised by Jason King and George Seremba among others for being largely silent about

4 ‘A nation of Others’: from: Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Villar-Argáiz Pilar
Abstract: The changing face of Irish society and the new influx of immigration during the economic boom of the country have compelled Irish poets to rethink nationhood intersectionally, as modulated by race and ethnicity. Depictions of ethnic migrant communities in Ireland have appeared in the work of poets since the early 1990s. Eithne Strong, for instance, dealt with this topic in her poems ‘Let Live’, about the emotional impact the Indian community has on the native Irish population with its ‘oddness’ and ‘alternative culture’ (1993: 75–6), and ‘Woad and Olive’, which reflects on the difficulty of ‘harmonious coexistence’ among different

7 ‘Our identity is our own instability’: from: Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Llena Carmen Zamorano
Abstract: In 1995 the then President of Ireland Mary Robinson gave an address entitled ‘Cherishing the Irish diaspora’ to the Houses of the Oireachtas in order to commemorate the 150 thanniversary of the beginning of the Great Irish Famine. This historical event, which has been reworked as one of the founding traumas of the Irish nation, also marked a dramatic increase in the Irish exodus that made Ireland the only country in Europe to experience a decline in population growth in the second half of the nineteenth century (Kuhling and Keohane, 2007: 53). Significantly, Mary Robinson’s speech did not delve into

Book Title: The humanities and the Irish university-Anomalies and opportunities
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): O’Sullivan Michael
Abstract: This is the first book-length study of the humanities and the Irish university. Ireland was a deeply religious country throughout the twentieth century but the colleges of its National University never established a religion or theology department. The official first language of Ireland is Irish but the vast majority of teaching in the arts and humanities is in English. These are two of the anomalies that long constrained humanities education in Ireland. This book charts a history of responses to humanities education in the Irish context. Reading the work of John Henry Newman, Padraig Pearse, Sean O Tuama, Denis Donoghue, Declan Kiberd, Richard Kearney and others, it looks for an Irish humanities ethos. It compares humanities models in the US, France and Asia with those in Ireland in light of work by Immanuel Kant, Pierre Bourdieu and Jacques Derrida. It should appeal to those interested in Irish education and history.The first book-length study of the humanities and the Irish university
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1mf70vj

3 Newman and the origins of the National University from: The humanities and the Irish university
Abstract: John Henry Newman is regarded by many as the most eloquent champion of the liberal education the university must impart. For Newman, ethics and civic virtue are bound up with an education in theology.¹ Newman’s The Idea of a University, a series of discourses delivered to mark the inauguration of the Catholic University in Dublin in 1852, is widely regarded as the most influential work ever to have been written on university education. In his celebrated introduction to the Oxford edition, I. T. Ker writes: ‘if it can be said without gross exaggeration that “modern thinking on university education is

4 The emergence of an Irish humanities ethos from: The humanities and the Irish university
Abstract: Because the language question was such an important issue for education policy especially in the early years of the State, it is important to look at the work of some of the educationalists and university academics who worked extensively on Irish language literature. One of the first professors of English at University College Cork (UCC), Daniel Corkery, who later spent a great deal of time working on Irish literature, writes in The Hidden Irelandthat the ‘soul of a people is most intimately revealed, perhaps, in their literature’ (1984: 7). The next sections will therefore examine perspectives on a humanities

5 International comparisons from: The humanities and the Irish university
Abstract: The work of leading French academics such as Pierre Bourdieu and Jacques Derrida on education points to key differences in emphasis in the Irish and French university systems. However, the French university system did share, only much earlier, many of the key changes that have come to Irish universities since the 1980s. It experienced a surge in university numbers slightly earlier than its Irish counterpart. Alain Bienayme notes that the French experienced its ‘unprecedented growth in its student population’ (1984: 152) in the 1960s. In 1963, 5% of the French eighteen-to twenty-six-year-old age group was in university. This had risen

1 St Margaret and the literary politics of Scottish sainthood from: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) Ash Kate
Abstract: Canonised in 1250, Queen Margaret of Scotland is perhaps one of the most familiar Scottish saints to modern readers, yet surprisingly little material relating to her life (beyond brief mentions in chronicles) survives from the Middle Ages. Furthermore, there has been little scholarly consideration of the literariness of representations of Margaret. What work has been done focuses on Margaret as a historical figure, or uses material relating to her sanctity as evidence for the existence of particular sites of veneration within Scotland. These studies are useful for understanding Margaret’s role in Scotland in historical and religious terms, and suggest avenues

Modelling holiness: from: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) Barr Jessica
Abstract: ‘Dere lord Ihesu mercy, þat welle art of mercy, why wyl not myn herte breste and cleue in-two?’¹ So begins the shorter of Richard Rolle’s Meditations on the Passion, a fourteenth-century affective devotional text that describes the speaker’s imagined witnessing of Christ’s passion. Noteworthy here is the use of pronouns: while theMeditationsis in a large sense for its audience’s spiritual benefit, the speaker’s focus is on his own emotional state; it ishisheart that he wishes would split, so overwhelmed is he by the evidence of Jesus’ sacrifice and his own unworthiness. In a work that serves

7 Reading classical authors in Capgrave’s Life of St Katherine from: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) James Sarah
Abstract: To characterise John Capgrave as a writer of ‘literature’ has been, until recently, to court controversy, if not outright dissent. In his foreword to the Early English Text Society’s edition of Capgrave’s Life of St Katherine, Frederick Furnivall spares no time to consider what, if any, literary merit might attach to the work, being instead concerned to provide a rather patronising author portrait before launching into an embittered attack upon Carl Horstmann’s editorial decision-making; the text, it seems, is of no more than antiquarian concern.¹ More recently M. C. Seymour dismisses Capgrave’s literary credentials; hisLife of St Norbertis

8 Lydgate’s saintly poetics from: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) Bernau Anke
Abstract: While most scholarship on the works of John Lydgate has tended to concentrate on ‘secular’ works such as Troy Book(c. 1412–20) or Fall of Princes (c. 1431–38), more recently some voices have started to speak out about the innovative aspects of his religious writings, especially his saints’ lives. Thus, in 2006, Fiona Somerset urged scholars to look across Lydgate’s immense and diverse oeuvre, arguing that ‘Lydgate’s hagiographical writings are a particularly fertile ground for such cross-comparison’.¹ Jennifer Sisk, taking up that invitation in 2010, writes aboutSt Edmund and St Fremund(c. 1433) that it ‘modulates in

10 Reforming sanctity: from: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) Atkin Tamara
Abstract: Sanctity, the quality of being holy, is by definition an inviolable state.¹ This chapter takes as its subject two plays that give dramatic shape to the life of Mary Magdalene, the sinner turned saint whose conversion might best be read as a crash course in becoming holy. They are: the Digby Mary Magdalen(c. 1490s), which survives in a single manuscript, Oxford, Bodleian Library, MS Digby 133; and Lewis Wager’sLife and Repentaunce of Marie Magdalene(c. 1553), which was printed twice in the 1560s. Although both plays work to reveal the holiness of the Magdalene’s life, the decisions made

Introduction: from: Sodomscapes
Abstract: The Cleveland Museum of Art houses one of the most challenging treatments of the Sodom story in twentieth-century visual culture, Anselm Kiefer’s multimedia work Lots Frau(plate 1). It is easy to miss the pale script spelling out “Lots Frau” in the painting’s lower right-hand corner; yet, without it, the work hardly bears relation to either Sodom’s biblical account or the art-historical archive. The inscription supplies only minimal clues, just enough so that the railway tracks and the postapocalyptic landscape eventually prompt recognition of the Sodom story’s generic narrative elements—the drama of exile, the specter of annihilation. For viewers

CHAPTER 2 The Rise of Prophecy: from: Sodomscapes
Abstract: There’s no getting around it. The route connecting Maître François’s illuminated rendering of the flight from Sodom to Blanchot’s and Levinas’s guarded turns to the Sodom archive has no historical warranty. Blanchot and Levinas’s mutual interest in the question of art charted a wide-ranging interrogation of the enigmatic fact of the artwork’s existence and the unquiet character of art’s aesthetic and ethical open-endedness, conducted across several genres and historical environments.² Their expedition, however, did not pause at the late-medieval scene of manuscript illumination.

Book Title: Sin and Evil-Moral Values in Literature
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): PAULSON RONALD
Abstract: The confusion of sin and evil, or religious and moral transgression, is the subject of Ronald Paulson's latest book. He calls attention to the important distinction between sin and Evil (with a capital E) that in our times is largely ignored, and to the further confusion caused by the term "moral values." Ranging widely through the history of Western literature, Paulson focuses particularly on American and English works of the eighteenth through twentieth centuries to discover how questions of evil and sin-and evil and sinful behavior-have been discussed and represented.The breadth of Paulson's discussion is enormous, taking the reader from Greek and Roman tragedy, to Christian satire in the work of Swift and Hogarth, to Hawthorne's and Melville's novels, and finally to twentieth-century studies of good and evil by such authors as James, Conrad, Faulkner, Greene, Heller, Vonnegut, and O'Brien. Where does evil come from? What are "moral values"? If evil is a cultural construct, what does that imply? Paulson's literary tour of sin and evil over the past two hundred years provides not only a historical perspective but also new ways of thinking about important issues that characterize our own era of violence, intolerance, and war.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1njjx9

CHAPTER THREE Sin and Evil Redefined: from: Sin and Evil
Abstract: Christopher Marlowe, writing in the 1590s, inherited Ovid’s humanism, the insurgency that led to his exile. At King’s School in Canterbury and Corpus Christi College, Cambridge, he would have had nothing in the curriculum against which to balance the Calvinism of Alexander Nowell’s Catechism, or First Instruction of Christian Religionexcept the classical Latin of the pagan poets, in particular Virgil and Ovid. David Riggs’s biography of Marlowe shows “how fully his work articulates the contradiction, inherent in the educational system that bred him, between Christian selfabnegation and humanist self-empowerment.”¹

Book Title: Henri Peyre-His Life in Letters
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): CAWS MARY ANN
Abstract: Henri Peyre (1901-1988), a giant figure in French studies, did more to introduce Americans to the modern literature and culture of French than any other person. Sterling Professor and chair of the French Department of Yale University for more than four decades, Peyre was also the author of forty-four books, a brilliant speaker, and a mentor to two generations of students. He left enormous legacies as both teacher and scholar.Peyre also left a large and fascinating body of correspondence. This collection of his letters documents the era in which he lived. His lively letters also bear witness to the vast network of his friends and colleagues, including such major post-war literary figures as Robert Penn Warren, Andre Gide, and Andre Malraux.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1np8vd

CHAPTER TWO the 1930s from: Henri Peyre
Abstract: PEYRE, Henri, Maurice. Appointed for the continuation of researches in France on Louis Ménard, a Frenchman of letters of the XIXth century, and the completing of a work on that subject.

Book Title: Time and the Shape of History- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): CORFIELD PENELOPE J.
Abstract: In its global approach the book is part of the new shift toward "big history," in which traditional period divisions are challenged in favor of looking at the entire past of the world from start to end. The approach is thematic. The result is a view of world history in which outcomes are shown to be explicable, once they happen, but not necessarily predictable before they do. This book will inform the work of historians of all periods and at all levels, and contributes to the current reconsideration of traditional period divisions (such as Modernity and Postmodernity), which the author finds outmoded.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1np9c3

CHAPTER 1 History in Time from: Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: To situate history in the long term entails having a view upon time. Its dynamic force provides the unfolding framework within which things both continue from the past and also change. Time’s three perspectival states of past, present, and potential future remain fixed in their successive sequencing. Yet the eras to which they apply are always being updated. As that happens, more history is generated daily for humans to consider.

CHAPTER 8 History Past and Future from: Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: Time’s outwardness and inwardness mean that we not only observe but simultaneously live the process. And, as a result, we share it too, since we all belong within this universal framework.

Book Title: The Event of Literature- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): EAGLETON TERRY
Abstract: In a highly unusual combination of critical theory and analytic philosophy, the author sees all literary work, from novels to poems, as a strategy to contain a reality that seeks to thwart that containment, and in doing so throws up new problems that the work tries to resolve. The "event" of literature, Eagleton argues, consists in this continual transformative encounter, unique and endlessly repeatable. Freewheeling through centuries of critical ideas, he sheds light on the place of literature in our culture, and in doing so reaffirms the value and validity of literary thought today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1npb45

CHAPTER 3 What is Literature? from: The Event of Literature
Abstract: We can turn now to the moral dimension of literary works. I use the word ‘moral’ to signify the realm of human meanings, values and qualities, rather than in the deontological, anaemically post-Kantian sense of duty, law, obligation and responsibility.¹ It was literary figures in nineteenth-century England, from Arnold and Ruskin to Pater, Wilde and – supremely – Henry James, who helped to shift the meaning of the term ‘morality’ from a matter of codes and norms to a question of values and qualities. It was a project consummated in the twentieth century by some of the age’s most eminent

Introduction from: Who Was Jacques Derrida?
Abstract: During his lifetime, Derrida elicited both intense celebration and intense scorn. Rather than judging him in the manner of his disapproving critics, or celebrating him like his followers, I aim to explain his career. Now that Derrida is gone, it is time for a more measured assessment of his worth. His thought was neither as world changing as his disciples claimed nor as dangerous (or absurd) as his critics suspected. It does, however, offer us a necessary lesson concerning the self-imposed limits of philosophy: the way that it tries to purify itself, and the hazards of such purity. Derrida’s work,

II Writing and Difference and Of Grammatology from: Who Was Jacques Derrida?
Abstract: In this chapter I devote extensive attention to two books that Derrida published in 1967, Writing and DifferenceandOf Grammatology. In both works, Derrida insists on the skeptical position he had established in his studies of Husserl. Yet, more important, he also moves beyond the battle between metaphysics and deconstructive skepticism. The real story ofWriting and DifferenceandOf Grammatology, especially the former, is Derrida’s desire for a new, even revolutionary, truth. This truth cannot be found through the mere act of debunking metaphysical assertions. Derrida seeks something more, an empirically present reality: the encounter with the face

Coda from: Who Was Jacques Derrida?
Abstract: Two days after Jacques Derrida died of pancreatic cancer, on October 10, 2004, the readers of the New York Timessaw a front-page obituary titled “Jacques Derrida, Abstruse Theorist, Dies at 74.” TheTimesobituary called Derrida’s works “turgid and baffling” and noted that he seemed to aim for an effect of maximum incomprehensibility. When asked to define his trademark term, deconstruction, Derrida would say only: “It is impossible to respond” (so theTimesreported). TheTimes’s farewell to Derrida was, to say the least, not respectful: rarely has an obituary been so openly scornful of its subject. Why such

9 The Faith of the Philosophers from: The Enlightenment and the Intellectual Foundations of Modern Culture
Abstract: In this chapter I shall discuss the main philosophical responses to the challenges to religion described in the preceding one. Some philosophers, such as Leibniz and Clarke, responded from within the rationalist tradition. Others, among them Malebranche, Berkeley, and Jacobi, considered philosophical rationalism the very source of the religious crisis and repudiated it altogether. The first group attempted to revive philosophical theology, a branch of metaphysics that had existed since the early Stoics and that aimed at establishing the existence and nature of God. The Arabs, in their commentaries on the works of Aristotle, revived it as a rational foundation

2. Sketching a Theory of Simplexity from: Simplexity
Abstract: I would like to try to sketch out a theory of simplexity. A sketch is not a final drawing; it is the expression of an intention, an idea, imprecise and indecisive, the bearer of its own evolution. It is a question that hints at its response, a kind of free association. Let me suggest that a simplex process is one governed by several principles,implemented successively or in parallel. My list of principles is intended to define a framework, incomplete and open to discussion, whose aim is to delimit the concept of simplexity. To avoid any misunderstanding, let me emphasize

3. Gaze and Empathy from: Simplexity
Abstract: Throughout evolution, solutions have been devised to permit living organisms to act rapidly and efficiently. My hypothesis is that incredibly numerous and varied solutions—the diversity of life—are found in very different organisms. Simplexity responds to the same rules as language or culture: It encompasses both diversity and universality, as is evident in the opposing ideas of American linguist Noam Chomsky (who stresses the universality of grammar)¹ and his French contemporary Claude Hagège (who emphasizes the diversity of language).² The problem is present as well in the work of the late anthropologist Claude Lévi-Strauss, who based his structural anthropology

7. The Laws of Natural Movement from: Simplexity
Abstract: Have you ever seen an anatomical cutaway—one of those images that reveal the extraordinary complexity of the network of subcutaneous nerves that link the muscles to the spinal cord and ultimately to the brain? One of the problems posed by this complex network is that of transmission delays. In the human male, the distance from the foot to the cerebellum is around 1.80 meters, whereas a distance of barely 15 centimeters separates the neck from the cerebellum. As a result, if the speed of transmission along the nerves was the same for the feet and the neck, it would

Book Title: The American Classics-A Personal Essay
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Donoghue Denis
Abstract: How is a classic book to be defined? How much time must elapse before a work may be judged a "classic"? And among all the works of American literature, which deserve the designation? In this provocative new book Denis Donoghue essays to answer these questions. He presents his own short list of "relative" classics--works whose appeal may not be universal but which nonetheless have occupied an important place in our culture for more than a century. These books have survived the abuses of time-neglect, contempt, indifference, willful readings, excesses of praise, and hyperbole.Donoghue bestows the term classic on just five American works: Melville's Moby-Dick, Hawthorne'sThe Scarlet Letter, Thoreau'sWalden, Whitman'sLeaves of Grass, and Twain'sAdventures of Huckleberry Finn.Examining each in a separate chapter, he discusses how the writings have been received and interpreted, and he offers his own contemporary readings, suggesting, for example, that in the post-9/11 era,Moby-Dickmay be rewardingly read as a revenge tragedy. Donoghue extends an irresistible invitation to open the pages of these American classics again, demonstrating with wit and acuity how very much they have to say to us now.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nphkp

2 Moby-Dick from: The American Classics
Abstract: When we refer to literature and its contexts, we mean to advert to the various ways in which a particular work is sensitive to forces at large. Some of these are immitigably personal, an affiliation of genetic, familial, and social circumstances. Some are more distant: the forces, political, economic, religious, or cultural, by which a writer is surrounded and, it may be, beset. A writer may yield to any or all of these forces, or may press back against them. Some of them may be ignorable. Jane Austen paid little attention to current affairs. George Eliot seems to have ignored

INTRODUCTION: from: Clueless in Academe
Abstract: Given the inherent difficulty of academic intellectual work, some degree of cluelessness

10 The Application Guessing Game from: Clueless in Academe
Author(s) Hoberek Andrew
Abstract: This chapter is based on our experience working together from 1995 to 1998 as director and assistant director

12 A Word for Words and a Vote for Quotes from: Clueless in Academe
Abstract: IN A RECENT CANADIAN RADIO SERIES on “The Education Debates,” interviewer David Cayley makes reference to “the great divide” between child-centered and curriculum-centered models of education. He suggests that the work of some current educators “straddles” this divide and thereby makes “a hash” of it.¹ Although Cayley is speaking specifically of Theodore Sizer’s writings and their application in Sizer’s national school network, the Coalition of Essential Schools, I think his comment accurately describes a trend represented by a number of prominent educational reformers, whose work also straddles and makes a hash of the great divide between progressive, studentcentered and traditional,

14 Deborah Meier’s Progressive Traditionalism from: Clueless in Academe
Abstract: THE TEACHING APPROACH that I have been outlining in this book straddles the divide between traditional and progressive philosophies of education. If I had to nominate one educator whose work best exemplifies this “progressive traditionalism,” my choice would be Deborah Meier, whose 1993 book The Power of Their Ideas: Lessons for America from a Small School in Harlemcould be its manifesto. Meier’s work as a writer, teacher, and school administrator provides a rich model of how schooling can be demystified.

CHAPTER 7 Russian Formalism from: Theory of Literature
Abstract: We now start a sequence that takes us through deconstruction, a sequence that has genuine continuity. I don’t have to stretch to point out similarities and divergences because the ensuing series of theorists are themselves retrospectively working with all the interconnections I could see fit to mention. Nevertheless, for later developments, the relationship between the foundational Russian formalists and the foundational work of the linguist Ferdinand de Saussure is a rather complex matter that I’m going to postpone summing up for some time. Much will become clearer when we actually get into what’s called “structuralism” and you read the essay

CHAPTER 13 Jacques Lacan in Theory from: Theory of Literature
Abstract: There is an obvious link between the work we reviewed of Peter Brooks and this particular essay of Lacan, “The Agency of the Letter in the Unconscious,” that I’d like to begin by emphasizing. It concerns the part of Lacan’s argument that is probably most accessible to you after your tour through structuralism and offers perhaps the best means of understanding the relevance of Lacan for literary theory.

CHAPTER 14 Influence from: Theory of Literature
Abstract: Those of you who are chiefly familiar with How to Read a Poem, the books on religion, andShakespeare and the Invention of the Humanmay be surprised to find Harold Bloom on a literary theory syllabus; but the great outpouring of work that began withThe Anxiety of Influence, A Map of Misreading, Poetry and Repression, and many other books in the 1970s put Bloom in the very midst of the theoretical controversies then swirling. He was associated with the so-called Yale school, and although even at the time he expressed disaffection with many aspects of his colleagues’ work,

CHAPTER 17 The Frankfurt School of Critical Theory from: Theory of Literature
Abstract: As we move into social perspectives on literature and art, you may ask yourself, “Why Marx? Why so much Marx? Why is it Marx who seems to stand behind the idea that the social criticism of art is the best and most relevant way to approach this subject matter?” Well, it’s because whatever the outcome of Marxist thought may have proven to be or yet prove to be historically, it remains nevertheless the most devastating critique we have of social delusion as it both inspires and conditions works of art historically. When we turn to Fredric Jameson in the next

CHAPTER 21 African American Criticism from: Theory of Literature
Abstract: The African American literary tradition is rich and long-standing. As Henry Louis Gates tells you, the first important poet in the tradition, Phillis Wheatley, lived during the American colonial period. The flourishing of the slave narrative form begins in the eighteenth century and continues into the nineteenth. In the twentieth century, most conspicuously in the Harlem Renaissance but throughout the century in gathering volume, there has been remarkable work done in all genres. This extended tradition contrasts in duration with the equally rich but also very recent tradition of African American literary theory and criticism.

CHAPTER 22 Postcolonial Criticism from: Theory of Literature
Abstract: Postcolonial studies is by far the most varied of the identity fields we review in this part of the course: necessarily varied because of the immense variety of the materials and cultures covered, but also because of controversies that swirl within postcolonial studies, or “po-co,” as it’s affectionately known. In this lecture we are concentrating on one developmental strand in postcolonial studies, a progression from the work of Edward Said to that of Homi Bhabha that can be presented as a matter of contrasting intellectual agendas, each widely influential in turn.

THE POLYPHONIC ETHICS OF THE APOSTLE PAUL from: In Search of the Early Christians
Abstract: In Ethics and the Limits of PhilosophyBernard Williams has reminded us that moral conviction is not the same thing as certainty, nor can it be reduced to naked existential decision. What is required for a robust ethical life, writes Williams, is “moral confidence,” and moral confidence “is basically a social phenomenon.”¹ The study of the work of Paul acquires a new accent if we consider his letters in light of the question suggested by Williams’s argument: What is the social process by which a religious movement like that of the early Christians undertakes to instill moral confidence in its

I The Beautiful: from: The Good, the True, and the Beautiful
Abstract: The term neuroestheticsis of recent origin. It was coined by Semir Zeki, and the first conference on the theme was held in San Francisco in 2002. It reflected a somewhat older concept, such as that expounded by Alexander Luria in the 1970s, aimed at finding the neural basis for contemplating and creating artworks and studying it scientifically. In the next pages I shall attempt to link some personal aspects of art and esthetics to various biological observations, in the hope that the reader will accept plausible, but not definitive, interrelationships.

Chapter 2 An Awesome and Unbloody Sacrifice from: The Spirit of Early Christian Thought
Abstract: ALL THE FIGURES portrayed in this book prayed regularly, and their thinking was never far removed from the church’s worship. Whether the task at hand was the defense of Christian belief to an outsider, the refutation of the views of a heretic, or the exposition of a passage from the Bible, their intellectual work was always in service of praise and adoration of the one God. “This is the Catholic faith,” begins an ancient creed, “that we worship one God in Trinity and Trinity in Unity.” Often their treatises ended with a doxology to God, as in Augustine’s On the

Chapter 9 The Glorious Deeds of Christ from: The Spirit of Early Christian Thought
Abstract: WALKING INTO THE private library of a provincial Gaulic landowner, a Christian bishop in the fifth century felt he had wandered into the towering shelves of a bookseller. The books were arranged in sections, light reading and devotional works in one area and works of distinguished Latin stylists in another. Among the manuscripts were to be found writings not only of Horace and Varro, but also of Christian authors, Prudentius and Augustine. The bishop, Sidonius Apolinaris, expressed no surprise at seeing the writings of two Christians, and one, Prudentius, a poet, among works of literature.¹ Sidonius allows us a precious

1 Contextual Narrative: from: Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink
Abstract: Philosophy is never done nowhere. If it is not the work of a particular someone at a particular time and in a particular place, then it isnot at all. What we shall be looking into is the philosophy that was done in a special place at a very special time in the history of the twentieth century, but the question of the particular someone is precisely the matter that is at issue. For it was not just one particular person who was involved; there was a second particular someone engaged in this same philosophic endeavor. The two, of course,

3 Orientation II: from: Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink
Abstract: The years 1929 and 1930 saw Fink in an extraordinary philosophical situation. Here was Martin Heidegger, lecturing with stunning originality and insightfulness, the chosen successor of Husserl openly taking issue with his once indispensable patron. And here was Husserl, model of intense, meticulous phenomenological study, shocked into recognition that “his” Heidegger was a man other than he had thought him to be and a figure whose philosophical development was a profound challenge to all that Husserl had thought was the secure foundation of his life’s work. And there stood Eugen Fink, fresh with his doctorate gained while listening to both

5 Fundamental Thematics II: from: Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink
Abstract: If we would begin the treatment of time and temporality at the level of critical phenomenological consideration sketched out in the previous three chapters, we could simply start with material drawn from Fink’s notes and sketches for the study of time beyond the Bernau texts, that is, from 1933 and 1934 (and later), correlating them with Husserl’s newer work in the C-manuscripts on temporality of 1930 to 1934. For example, the critical insights we considered in chapter 4 are neatly continued in some of the points Fink makes in several outline variants for an “Introduction” to his then projected “time-book.”

8 Corollary Thematics I: from: Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink
Abstract: The import of the meontic in determining the function and import of the speculative dimension did not have to wait until the very last to have an effect upon the reconsideration that the phenomenological findings in Husserl’s vast analytic investigations had to undergo. It was already in play from the earliest work that Fink did with and for Husserl, as the long trajectory of the present study has been showing. However, in our following this effort of reconsideration, this reorienting and recasting of descriptive features already disclosed in the investigative analytic that allowed new aspects to come to the fore

Book Title: Freedom and Time-A Theory of Constitutional Self-Government
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): RUBENFELD JED
Abstract: Should we try to "live in the present"? Such is the imperative of modernity, Jed Rubenfeld writes in this important and original work of political theory. Since Jefferson proclaimed that "the earth belongs to the living"-since Freud announced that mental health requires people to "get free of their past"-since Nietzsche declared that the happy man is the man who "leaps" into "the moment-modernity has directed its inhabitants to live in the present, as if there alone could they find happiness, authenticity, and above all freedom.But this imperative, Rubenfeld argues, rests on a profoundly inadequate, deforming picture of the relationship between freedom and time. Instead, Rubenfeld suggests, human freedom-human being itself--necessarily extends into both past and future; self-government consists of giving our lives meaning and purpose over time. From this conception of self-government, Rubenfeld derives a new theory of constitutional law's place in democracy. Democracy, he writes, is not a matter of governance by the present "will of the people"; it is a matter of a nation's laying down and living up to enduring political and legal commitments. Constitutionalism is not counter to democracy, as many believe, or a pre-condition of democracy; it is or should be democracy itself--over time. On this basis, Rubenfeld offers a new understanding of constitutional interpretation and of the fundamental right of privacy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1npqs8

Five COMMITMENT from: Freedom and Time
Abstract: If we think candidly about how we live, how we modern Western men and women exercise the tremendous degree of autonomy so many of us undeservedly possess, we will find that we do not “live in the present” at all. Much of our time we spend working out the possibilities and requirements of projects and attachments—to persons, places, purposes—to which we engaged ourselves some time in the past. We decide what to do giventhese temporally extended projects and attachments. In other words, we constantly act now on the basis of decisions, relations, and intentions formed in the

Book Title: Engaging the Moving Image- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Carroll Noël
Abstract: Noël Carroll, a brilliant and provocative philosopher of film, has gathered in this book eighteen of his most recent essays on cinema and television-what Carroll calls "moving images." The essays discuss topics in philosophy, film theory, and film criticism.Drawing on concepts from cognitive psychology and analytic philosophy, Carroll examines a wide range of fascinating topics. These include film attention, the emotional address of the moving image, film and racism, the nature and epistemology of documentary film, the moral status of television, the concept of film style, the foundations of film evaluation, the film theory of Siegfried Kracauer, the ideology of the professional western, and films by Sergei Eisenstein and Yvonne Rainer. Carroll also assesses the state of contemporary film theory and speculates on its prospects. The book continues many of the themes of Carroll's earlier work Theorizing the Moving Imageand develops them in new directions. A general introduction by George Wilson situates Carroll's essays in relation to his view of moving-image studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nps8x

Chapter 6 Film Form: from: Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: As with other artforms, the initial problem of talking about style or form in film is complicated by the fact that the concept of style can be applied to so many different kinds of things and at so many different levels of generality.¹ One might use “style” to refer to whole periods of filmmaking, speaking, for example, of the German Expressionist style, or Hollywood studio style in the thirties. Or one might apply the concept of style to the work of a particular filmmaker’s oeuvre, referring, for instance, to the style of Stanley Donen or Yvonne Rainer or Theo Angelopoulos.

Book Title: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years-1916-1938
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): MOHANTY J. N.
Abstract: As in his earlier work, Mohanty here offers close readings of Husserl's main texts accompanied by accurate summaries, informative commentaries, and original analyses. This book, along with its companion volume, completes the most up-to-date, well-informed, and comprehensive account ever written on Husserl's phenomenological philosophy and its development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1npzng

Introduction from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: This introduction is primarily for those who may not have read my Philosophy of Edmund Husserl: A Historical Development(New Haven: Yale University Press, 2008), of which this present work is a continuation. In that preceding volume I traced the development of Husserl’s thought from his Halle years through the Göttingen period. The story began with the 1886 workPhilosophy of Arithmeticand ended with 1913’sIdeas toward a Pure Phenomenology and Phenomenological Philosophy. Thus the previous volume covered a period of almost thirty years, and in this volume we take up the story from 1916, when Husserl moved to

1 The Freiburg Project from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: Before I begin my exposition of Husserl’s work let me briefly summarize the philosophical accomplishments of the Göttingen years, so that we keep in mind where precisely Husserl took off in Freiburg. These are:

3 Constitution of Nature from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: A complete draft of the second book of the Ideaswas prepared by Husserl in 1912, apparently soon after he wrote the first book. However, it appears that he was not quite satisfied with that draft; he worked on the manuscript from time to time, more so after moving to Freiburg. In 1916, he appointed Edith Stein as his assistant and entrusted her with the task of preparing the second and the third parts of theIdeasfor the publication. Stein prepared two versions of theIdeas II—one in 1916 and another in 1918—using many of Husserl’s lectures

11 Transcendental Logic I from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: Husserl’s researches into transcendental logic, it appears, had their origin in the 1920s, as he came to develop the ideas of passive synthesis and genetic constitution. The lectures of the winter semester of 1920–21 were called “Transzendentale Logik,” now published as a supplementary volume (Hua XXXI) to the Analyzen zur passiven Synthesis. These lectures develop the contrast between activity and passivity (as we saw in the preceding chapter), and then turn toward “active objectification” and to theory of judgment. Eventually, the researches will culminate in the two worksFormale und transzendentale Logik(1929) andErfahrung und Urteil, written about

12 Transcendental Logic II from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: In the year 1929, Husserl—in a hurried frenzy of writing—finished his Formale und transzendentale Logik, which may be regarded as his second great systematic work after theIdeas(I deal with it in the next chapter). After finishing this work, Husserl was concerned about writing a more readable introduction to his philosophy of logic, becauseFormale und transzendentale Logikmoved on a much higher plane and was a relatively difficult work. He therefore asked his then assistant Ludwig Landgrebe to collect his manuscripts and lectures on transcendental logic. In 1919–20, Husserl had given a lecture course entitled

13 Transcendental Logic III: from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: The precise relation between the Formale und transzendentale Logik(Formal and Transcendental Logic) and the much later posthumous workErfahrung und Urteil(Experience and Judgment, edited by Landgrebe and published in 1938), is difficult to determine with precision. One would expect that, as many remarks of Landgrebe seem to suggest, the 1929 book should serve as an introduction to the later book. But the later book makes extensive use of manuscripts of much earlier logic lectures, which the 1929 book also made use of, and it appears that the exposition ofFormal and Transcendental Logicremains difficult for readers and

15 The Lectures between 1925 and 1928: from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: In the years after the Erste Philosophielectures and preceding theCartesian Meditationsof 1929, Husserl devoted several of his lectures to the theme of a phenomenological psychology,¹ first in the summer semester of 1925, then in the winter semester of 1926–27, and again in the summer of 1928. In addition, in 1927 he was working on his article for theEncyclopedia Britannicawith the cooperation of Heidegger, and in April 1928 he wrote the Amsterdam Lectures—in all of which the idea of a phenomenological, intentional psychology remained at the center of his attention. It is interesting that

18 “Origin of Geometry” and Husserl’s Final Philosophy of History from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: Among the fragments from the Krisisperiod were pieces that might have been composed with the larger work in view but were never taken up into theKrisisvolume. Luckily they were included by Walter Biemel asBeilagenin Husserliana volume VI, and also included by David Carr in his English translation ofKrisis. Among them is a fragment that today is very much in the minds of Husserl scholars. This piece is entitled “Origin of Geometry,” a title given not by Husserl himself but most probably by Eugen Fink, who published it under that title in 1939 in the

21 A Theory of Intentionality: from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: Among Husserl’s lasting contributions to philosophy remains, in this author’s estimation, a theory of intentionality. At the end of this work, which follows on my Philosophy of Edmund Husserl, it is worthwhile to take a final look at this theory. For perspicuity, I intend to present it in the form of thirty propositions,P₁toP₃₀, divided into three sets.

2 The Peoples of the Earth and the Tents of Jacob: from: Abraham's Children
Author(s) RAMON EINAT
Abstract: The Ramon (Weissberg)-Alpern family, from which I come and whose members live today in various locations in Israel, has always considered Zionism, Judaism, and human solidarity to be deeply intertwined. Zionism provided us with the framework for hope that we, as Jews, would live a life of dignity, together, in our own land after 2,000 years of exile, enduring contempt in various countries and under various regimes—Christian, Muslim, and secular (Communist). And though engraved in our minds were the memories of “righteous gentiles” (non-Jews who were our grandparents’ friends from the old countries and non-Jews who had sometimes helped

4 Revisiting the Holy Rebellion from: Abraham's Children
Author(s) SHAKDIEL LEAH
Abstract: And all his years on the Land he spent working for National-Religious schooling.

Book Title: Sin-A History
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): anderson gary a.
Abstract: What is sin? Is it simply wrongdoing? Why do its effects linger over time? In this sensitive, imaginative, and original work, Gary Anderson shows how changing conceptions of sin and forgiveness lay at the very heart of the biblical tradition. Spanning nearly two thousand years, the book brilliantly demonstrates how sin, once conceived of as a physical burden, becomes, over time, eclipsed by economic metaphors. Transformed from a weight that an individual carried, sin becomes a debt that must be repaid in order to be redeemed in God's eyes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nq1r7

2 a burden to be borne from: Sin
Abstract: Setting the stage for the texts I discuss requires a chronological framework. The majority of events recorded in the Old Testament take place within what is known as the First Temple period, which refers to the era in which the temple erected by King Solomon stood in Jerusalem. The temple was built in the mid-tenth century BCE and was destroyed by King Nebuchadnezzar and his Babylonian armies in 587 BCE. That national tragedy led to a period known as the exile, during which many of Israel’s leaders were carried off to Babylon and attempted to refashion Jewish life while bereft

4 redemption and the satisfaction of debts from: Sin
Abstract: I resume the exploration of sin as a debt by returning to the Hebrew Bible. By the time we get to materials from the later Second Temple period, such as those at Qumran (second century BCE through the first century CE), the metaphor of sin as a debt has become well established. The dialect of Mishnaic Hebrew, which I assume is close to the Hebrew Jesus would have spoken, illustrates how complete the transformation had become. The usage of nās’ā’‛ǎwōnas an idiom to describe culpability has by and large fallen out of use in these works.¹ One does not

10 salvation by works? from: Sin
Abstract: Roman Garrison has confronted this problem head-on in a book that examines the various ways the work of Christ can be described in the early church.² In it he illustrates those differences through

12 why god became man from: Sin
Abstract: No book on the history of sin as debt would be complete without a discussion of St. Anselm of Canterbury, who served as archbishop there from 1093 to 1109 and is perhaps best known among philosophers for his ontological argument in favor of the existence of God. As such, his work has spawned an enormous literature. Among theologians, however, he is best known for his classic work Cur deus homo(Why God Became Man), in which he articulates why it was necessary for the incarnation to take place.¹ In developing his argument, he provides an account of the sin of

CHAPTER THREE Job’s Comforters from: On Evil
Abstract: Whenever some tragedy or natural disaster takes place these days, one can be sure to find a group of men and women holding homemade placards inscribed with the pregnant word “Why?” These people are not looking for factual explanations. They know very well that the earthquake was the result of a fissure deep in the earth, or that the murder was the work of a serial killer released too soon from custody. “Why?” does not mean, “What was the cause of this?” It is more of a lament than a query. It is a protest against some profound lack of

The Vortex Beneath the Story from: Whose Freud?
Author(s) Mitchell Juliet
Abstract: The widespread diffusion of psychoanalysis into myriad therapies coincides with the relative weakening of its own center as a clinical practice and theory that emanates therefrom. Psychoanalysis is a discipline that demands the hard work of fifty minutes of daily free association from the patient and the suspension of consciousness from the analyst in order to listen to unconscious effects that, despite all their differences, somewhere as humans (as analyst and analysand) they share.

Introduction from: Whose Freud?
Abstract: The four essayists here come from and work between many disciplines, bridging psychoanalysis with literary interpretation, art criticism, history, and feminist theory. The eclecticism of the group stems from the eclectic texture of Freud’s writing: while always maintaining a base in medical science and therapeutic technique, Freud’s work comes to include an array of essays in interpretation and several monumental theories of history and culture. This part of the volume investigates the relation between the techniques of psychoanalysis as a medical therapy and the application of psychoanalysis as a mode of cultural interpretation, considering questions raised by the unique way

Discussion from: Whose Freud?
Abstract: Esther de Costa Meyer, Moderator: Professor Loewenberg, you were talking about Robert Jan van Pelt, who was the first architectural historian to work on Auschwitz seriously. It struck me that the first man to publish the fact that Bauhaus architects were involved in the actual building of the concentration camps was in fact a negationist. It was Jean-Claude Pressac: a man who went to Auschwitz for other purposes, and there discovered all these boxes of documents, and in this aboutface—which in itself calls out for psychoanalytic interpretation—then turns around, has this conversion, and begins to publish all this

Introduction from: Whose Freud?
Abstract: This section considers the role of psychoanalysis in posing the question of sexual identity: a question crucial to psychoanalysis, but also one in which Freud’s own views have been most open to attack. Paul Robinson, an intellectual historian, begins by showing how an ambivalent or vacillating perspective toward homosexuality—within Freud’s own work—generates various perspectives on sexual desire and social norms in twentieth-century psychoanalytic thought. On one hand, as Robinson claims, “no one has done more to destabilize the notion of heterosexuality than Freud.” For Freud, the “homosexual object choice” is present in allindividuals’ psychic development; it is

Speaking Psychoanalysis from: Whose Freud?
Author(s) Bersani Leo
Abstract: What exactly is psychoanalytic thought, and how might answering this question help us to define what might be called the psychoanalytically constituted subject? One of the most curious aspects of Civilization and Its Discontentsis Freud’s reiterated self-reproach to the effect that he is not speaking psychoanalytically. The work was written in 1929, late in Freud’s career, so it’s not as if he hadn’t had time to develop a distinctively psychoanalytic language. You would think that by now Freud would be “speaking psychoanalysis” fluently. But the complaints start in Chapter 3, where he laments that “so far we have discovered

Whose Psychohistory? from: Whose Freud?
Author(s) Lifton Robert Jay
Abstract: In this essay I wish to discuss my work not as applied psychoanalysis—that term still has some of the aura of early psychoanalytic imperialism, Freud’s talk about “conquering” various spheres of thought—but rather in connection with psychoanalysis as its source. My work in psychohistorical areas begins with psychoanalytic influence, and never loses that influence, but it does evolve in its own way in certain additional directions. There is a real paradox here, important to keep in mind particularly in historical and cultural studies: without psychoanalysis, we don’t have a psychology worthy of address to history and society or

Truth in Psychoanalysis from: Whose Freud?
Author(s) Lear Jonathan
Abstract: Roughly speaking, there are two ways to approach the concept of truth in psychoanalysis, “from the outside” and “from the inside.” In working “from the outside,” we bring a conception of truth, developed, say, in philosophy, to psychoanalysis as an object of study. Truth, then, is deployed as a metatheoretical concept or predicate, applied to the assertions of psychoanalysis, and allowing us to see the conditions under which those assertions are true. By contrast, when we are working “from the inside,” we are concerned with how the issue of truth ariseswithinthe analytic situation. There is value in

1 Closing the Books: from: Agitations
Abstract: Several years ago, a man I knew, an assistant professor of English at an Ivy League university, decided to scrap his library—a gesture that at the time did not properly impress me. What interested me were the books themselves, as I was one of those invited to plunder the novels, biographies, anthologies of plays and poetry, works of criticism, short-story collections, a sampling of history and philosophy—exactly what you’d expect from a lifetime of liberal-arts collecting. The reason he gave them away, and the reason I didn’t catch on to what was really happening, is that he had

9 Art and Craft from: Agitations
Abstract: Mistah Conrad—he dead.Well, yes. Conrad died in 1924, but he also died a second death during the 1970s when the author, or rather the idea of the Author, suffered an untimely demise. Although not the first time that the work took precedence over the worker (at midcentury the New Criticism insisted on the separation of poem and poet), this latest incarnation of the text’s primacy was particularly despotic, in both a philosophical and political sense. Literary movements, however, come and go, and the doctrines that rudely deposited authors into their conceptual coffins—I mean, the semiotic/deconstructionist writings of

Book Title: The God of All Flesh-and Other Essays
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Hanson K.C.
Abstract: Biblical faith is passionately and relentlessly material in its emphasis. This claim is rooted in the conviction that the creator God loves the creation and summons creation to be in sync with the will of the creator God. This collection of essays is focussed on the bodily life of the world as it ordered in all of its problematic political and economic forms. The phrase of the title “all flesh" in the flood narrative of Genesis 9 refers to all living creatures who are in covenant with God – human beings, animals, birds, and fish – as recipients of God’s grace, as dependent upon God’s generosity, and as destined for praise and obedience to God. The insistence on the materiality of life as the subject of the Bible means that the difficult issues of economics and the demanding questions of politics are front and centre in the text. So the Pentateuch pivots around the Exodus narrative and the emancipation from an unbearable context of abusive labour practices. In a similar manner, the prophets endlessly address such questions of social policy and the wisdom teachers reflect on how to manage the material things of life and social relationships for the well-being of the community. This emphasis, pervasive in these essays, is a powerful alternative and a strong resistance against all of the contemporary efforts to transcend (escape!) the material into some form of the “spiritual". All around us are efforts to find an easier, more harmonious faith. This may be evoked simply because of a desire to shield economic, political advantage from the inescapable critique of biblical faith. Such a temptation is a serious misreading of the Bible and a critical misjudgment about the nature of human existence. Thus the Bible addressed the most urgent issues of our day, and refuses the “religious temptation" that avoids lived reality where the power of God is a work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1p5f1q3

two THE CREATURES KNOW from: The God of All Flesh
Abstract: It is by now a truism that “wisdom thinks resolutely within the framework of a theology of creation.”¹ That now common assumption among interpreters, however, has not always been obvious. It is, rather, a hard-won consensus that emerged in a season of scholarship preoccupied with “history,” in which theological interpretation of the Old Testament was dominated by the programmatic slogan “God acts in history.” The connection between wisdom and creation has permitted interpretation to move outside “history” and to challenge the fear of “natural theology” that pertained in Barthian circles of interpretation. Once that consensus judgment was reached about creation

four ISRAEL’S SENSE OF PLACE IN JEREMIAH from: The God of All Flesh
Abstract: It is a delight to offer this essay to James Muilenburg, the only one of his kind in our discipline. His delicate balance of rigorous objectivity and passionate subjectivity is a rare model for us. This paper, which seeks to pursue themes and methods important in his own work, is presented with the gratitude only his students can understand.

seven PSALM 37: from: The God of All Flesh
Abstract: In two decades of energetic activity, wisdom studies have reached something of a plateau.¹ As a result of the work of Professor Whybray, along with Gerhard von Rad, James L. Crenshaw, and Roland E. Murphy (to name the most prominent), we are now able to take as a consensus a great deal concerning Israelite wisdom literature, e. g. its modes of disclosure, its assumptions about authority, its probable social contexts, its general theological intentionality, its tensions with more dominant modes of faith, and its paradoxical relation to broader wisdom traditions in the Near East.² The dominant wisdom literature, which functions

Book Title: Becoming Human Again-The Theological Life of Gustaf Wingren
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Olson Daniel M.
Abstract: One of the most influential Swedish theologians of the twentieth century, Gustaf Wingren’s career spanned more than forty years of upheaval both in his field and around the globe. Provocative and challenging, Wingren revelled in a good argument and this attitude set the tone for much of his scholarship. A Swedish Lutheran, he made his name through his research into the theology of Martin Luther, breaking away from both traditional interpretations of Luther and the theology of his famous teachers, Karl Barth and Anders Nygren, before shifting his focus onto systematic theology. In a fresh take, Bengt Kristensson Uggla delves into the influence of Wingren’s second wife, Greta Hofsten, on the direction of his theology. Hofsten, a left-wing political activist who was searching for a new language of faith, wove Wingren’s work together with her own political philosophy to create an unusual kind of Christian socialism. Her thinking had a profound effect on Wingren, causing him to recontextualise his older work entirely. In Becoming Human Again, Uggla examines how Wingren’s combative nature often served him well as a theologian, driving him to engage with innovations in the field and re-examine his older views.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1p5f1x6

6 The Final Academic Battlefield from: Becoming Human Again
Abstract: Gustaf Wingren retired in 1977 after an academic career spanning more than forty years. His position as a tenured professor at Lund University had allowed him to fully engage himself in his work. The basic structure and frame of reference for his theological project were largely complete by the 1950s and were magnificently concluded with the Swedish edition of his book Gospel and Church(1960/1964). In any case, he penned no other books of the same caliber or scale for the rest of the 1960s.

8 “This Plague of Egocentricity” from: Becoming Human Again
Abstract: During the last century the importance, position, and conditions of the church in Swedish society have changed dramatically. At the time of Gustaf Wingren’s birth in November 1910, Sweden was still largely a homogeneous Lutheran society, almost without any kind of freedom of religion, as we know the term today. Although the growing free church movement that had begun in the mid-1800s had given rise to the beginnings of religious pluralism in Sweden, it had done so within the framework of Christianity in general and Protestantism in particular. Wingren himself would be forty years old by the time blasphemy ceased

Postscript to the English Edition from: Becoming Human Again
Abstract: In association with the English edition of this book, I have resisted the temptation to rewrite the text, thus transforming it into a new book. Of course, some few corrections and explanations have been necessary to add in order to make the presentation accessible for non-Swedish readers. Besides the fact that I have included information about the posthumously published Homilies: Gustaf Wingren Preaches(Postilla: Gustaf Wingren predikar, 2010), I have refrained from investigating the English-speaking reception of Wingren’s theology—and limited myself to the intention to further contribute to a broader picture of this work in future research. In general,

Book Title: The Operation of Grace-Further Essays on Art, Faith, and Mystery
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Wolfe Gregory
Abstract: The Operation of Grace collects a decade’s worth of essays by Gregory Wolfe taken from the pages of Image, the literary journal he founded more than a quarter century ago. As he notes in the preface, his Image editorials, while they cover a wide range of topics, focus on the intersection of “art, faith, and mystery". Wolfe believes that art and religion, while hardly identical, offer illuminating analogies to one another—art deepening faith through the empathetic reach of the imagination and faith anchoring art in a vision beyond the artist’s ego. Several essays dwell on how aesthetic values like ambiguity, tragedy, and beauty enlarge our understanding of the spiritual life. There are also a series of reflections that extend Wolfe’s campaign to renew the neglected and often misunderstood tradition of Christian humanism. Finally, there are sections that contain more personal meditations arising from Wolfe’s involvement in nurturing and promoting the work of emerging writers and artists. The Operation of Grace demonstrates once again why novelist Ron Hansen has spoken of Wolfe as “one of the most incisive and persuasive voices of our generation".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1p5f2hg

The Tragic Sense of Life from: The Operation of Grace
Abstract: When i first arrived at Oxford University in the early 1980s to pursue graduate work, I was all swagger on the outside, but that was to conceal the soft center of terror within. I had gone from being a big man on a small midwestern campus situated between two cornfields to a nobody at an ancient European university whose “New College” had been founded in the fifteenth century. For one thing, there were the social bewilderments attendant upon entering a society where class was a more important and more complex phenomenon than I had ever known it could be. But

Strange Pilgrims from: The Operation of Grace
Abstract: In his masterful book The Life You Save May Be Your Own, Paul Elie has crafted a braided narrative about the lives and works of four twentiethcentury American Catholic writers, all now canonical figures: Dorothy Day, Thomas Merton, Flannery O’Connor, and Walker Percy. The first sentence begins casually but ends with a kick: “In the photographs, they don’t look like people who might make you want to change your life.”

Secular Scriptures from: The Operation of Grace
Abstract: Any new book about the relationship between the Bible and literature enters a crowded field, one strewn with masterworks by the likes of Robert Alter, Frank Kermode, Northrop Frye, and Gabriel Josipovici. So the bar is set high. Nicholas Boyle’s Sacred and Secular Scriptures: A Catholic Approach to Literatureclears that bar with room to spare. While the subtitle might put some readers on guard, Boyle proves a hospitable and respectful writer; at points the Catholic tradition takes center stage, but much of the book speaks with equal power and resonance to Jewish and Protestant traditions.

Shouts and Whispers from: The Operation of Grace
Abstract: The argument goes like this: writers like C. S. Lewis, W. H. Auden, Evelyn Waugh, and Flannery O’Connor created works that offered Christianity as an alternative to modern secularism. Many of them were public converts to the faith, and wrote works in which conversion is the

The Culture Wars Revisited from: The Operation of Grace
Abstract: Ten years ago in these pages I attempted to explain “ Why I Am a Conscientious Objector in the Culture Wars.” At that time, the dust had only recently settled on the public controversies over National Endowment for the Arts funding of works by Robert Mapplethorpe and Andres Serrano. In addition to the debate over public funding of the arts, the central culture war issues had emerged: abortion, euthanasia, welfare, homosexual rights, and church/state relations. James Davison Hunter had followed up his groundbreaking book Culture Warswith the even more ominously titledBefore the Shooting Starts.

Poetic Justice from: The Operation of Grace
Abstract: Before I came down here to deliver this talk on how art and social justice should—and shouldn’t—mix, I posted on Facebook that I was preparing by reading the works of various writers. One commentator singled out Gustave Flaubert from my list and responded with a skeptical “Hmm.” I understood the reaction: after all, Flaubert was known as a writer who cared more for style than social justice (“One never tires of what is well-written, style is life!”). In contrast to the two other great social realists of nineteenth-century French fiction—Honoré de Balzac and Émile Zola—Flaubert rarely

4 The Influence of Monastics, Saints, and Theologians on Thomas Merton’s Thinking on the Child Mind from: The Only Mind Worth Having
Abstract: Thomas Merton was living the scriptures through the monastic offices, reading extensively the works of the religious, the lives of the saints, and the work of theologians. In his writings and especially in the journals many are cited and some of these are selected here to be discussed in the context of the child mind. Bernard of Clairvaux (1090–1153) was a French abbot and primary builder of the reforming Cistercian monastic order. Guerric of Igny ( c. 1070/80–1157) was a Cistercian abbot. Thomas Merton was steeped in Cistercian monastic thinking. He wrote a book on Bernard calledThe Last

14 The Internal Landscape of the Child Mind and Models of Spiritual Maturity from: The Only Mind Worth Having
Abstract: Thomas Merton was constantly struggling with the question of identity, and in his search for spiritual integrity and thereby maturity he engaged in a continual struggle to be free from an imprisoning and distorting self-consciousness that plagued him and, he believed, all human beings to a greater or lesser extent. He included in this searching both grace and psychology and he saw that these could work together, sometimes being in conflict. Merton was searching for full identity in Christ and for what spiritual maturity might mean, and from glimpses of his work the suggestion in this book is that he

Jaspers’ Begriff der „Weltanschauung“ im Anschluss an Dilthey und Weber from: Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Olay Csaba
Abstract: The concept of „worldview“ is one of the basic categories of Jaspers’ thought, even if it gets marginalised in the later work. Worldview is considered in the secondary literature primarily in connection with the concept of shell ( Gehäuse) Jaspers took from Max Weber. In the paper I defend the claim that Jaspers’ conception of „worldview“ unites motives from Wilhelm Dilthey and Max Weber, constructing a weberised Dilthey. After some conceptual clarifications I treat first the specific contribution of Dilthey and Max Weber to Jaspers’ theory, and discuss the latter afterwards. Finally, I show that despite its dissappearance in the later

Heideggers Stellungnahme zur „Psychologie der Weltanschauungen“ als Wegmarke der Jaspers’schen Existenzphilosophie from: Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Immel Oliver
Abstract: This paper focuses on the genesis of Karl Jaspers’ concept of existential philosophy by discussing the intention of Jaspers’ Psychologie der Weltanschauungenand the impact of Martin Heidegger’s review „ Anmerkungen zu Karl Jaspers’ Psychologie der Weltanschauungen“ on Jaspers’ later works. By analyzing personal statements, letters and the consequences of Heidegger’s critique for Jaspers’ subsequent philosophical publications, particularlyDie geistige Situationder Zeit and the three-volumedPhilosophie, I want so show in which respect Heidegger’s review made thePsychologie der Weltanschauungenretrospectively appear as historically „ the earliest work of the later so-called modern existential philosophy“, as Jaspers put it

Il “mondo” nella Psychologie der Weltanschauungen from: Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Achella Stefania
Abstract: The aim of this paper is to analyse the concept of “world” in Karl Jaspers’ Psychology of Worldviews, to show how the tension between the theoreticalcontemplative and existential approaches finds evident expression in the different roles that the “world” plays in the first and second parts of this work. In the first part, the world is still the object of a subject, although this relationship is neither evaluative (as in theWertphilosophie) nor only gnoseological, but is also the result of an Erlebnis, thus presenting itself as a lived world. In the second part, beginning with the section on the

Praktiken des Verstehens und Weltanschauungsanalyse from: Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Schulz Reinhard
Abstract: This paper focuses on the relationship between Karl Jaspers’ early work and practice theories of Foucault and Bourdieu. Compared with the hermeneutical tradition (Dilthey, Gadamer, Merleau-Ponty) world views seem outdated after the end of a normative understanding of hermeneutics. As a consequence we need to turn to plural practices of understanding instead. Looking on Jaspers’ Psychopathology and Psychology of Worldviewsa change of perspective from and beyond Jaspers leads to a future-oriented conception of psychopathology. Practices of understanding enable an emancipatory-practical potential of therapeutic practices as well as of hermeneutic understanding in the sense of “a realization of freedom unburdened

Gli involucri tra forma e vita: from: Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Donise Anna
Abstract: The present essay analyses Jasper’s concept of “ Gehäuse”. TheGehäuse, “cases” or “shells”, are the forms that define subjectivity, which we work very hard to construct. When the subject experiences change or development, though, the “shell” can become too rigid and suffocating, so the subject feels the need to get out of that form, at the risk of ending up like “an oyster without the shell”. In Jaspers’ perspective, however, these “casings” are unavoidable and their dismissal is a question of “metamorphosis” rather than veritable “destruction”: as soon as one form is rejected, another one is constructed. This paper in

Wahn, Weltanschauung und Habitus. from: Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Thoma Samuel
Abstract: Karl Jaspers’ theory of delusion ( General Psychopathology, 1913/1946) is still widely discussed today, much unlike his theory of worldviews, laid out in his 1919 workPsychology of Worldviews, which has more or less fallen into oblivion. Based on Jaspers’ casuistic observations of nihilistic delusion and nihilistic worldview, as presented in 1919, we first analyze the relationship between delusion and worldview – a relationship analogous to that between “psychotic process” and “development of personality” in his concept of psychopathology. We then scrutinize this categorical distinction and its underlying methodical assumptions and consider possible links between delusion and worldview. Our conclusion is that,

2 The Encyclopedia from: The Cruft of Fiction
Abstract: Having in the last chapter treated “information” in its technical sense, this chapter will treat the more colloquial use of the word by examining a mega-novel subgenre drawing on a different type of reference work, the encyclopedic novel. That term has been frequently used over the past six decades to refer to mega-novels that incorporate substantial specialized information from the sciences, the arts, and history.¹ Most famously Edward Mendelson defined encyclopedic narratives as those that “attempt to render the full range of knowledge and beliefs of a national culture,” echoing Northrop Frye’s earlier claim that encyclopedic fiction presents “a total

3 Life-Writing from: The Cruft of Fiction
Abstract: The first two chapters have dealt with cruft that mimics the excessive, born-textual data of reference guides. However, ever since Tristram Shandy set out to recount his life and opinions, only to find upon finishing the fourth volume that he was barely past his own birth and that “ things have crowded in so thick upon me, that I have not been able to get into that part of my work, towards which, I have all the way, looked forwards,” we have known that the details of a single life can sprawl out similarly.¹ While Tristram finds this situation stressful,

Conclusion: from: The Cruft of Fiction
Abstract: The past six chapters have analyzed how we process text in the meganovel, ranging from its sentence-level lacunae up to its macro-scale figurations of nation and world. Given how utterly mega-novel text overwhelms our limited working memory and how often it dissolves its most important text into a large amount of cruft, I have argued that we must hone our ability to modulate attention to an extremely fine degree, filtering the latter so as to better perceive the former. Some passages should be processed closely and slowly, while others should be read more quickly; some are best read distantly, and

CHAPTER 5 Jihad and Resistance in North Lebanon: from: The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East
Abstract: As the Lebanese civil war was drawing to a close, various Salafi groups began incorporating the country’s Palestinian camps into their religious networks. That they were so quickly successful bears witness to the failure of the PLO’s political socialization tools within the camp. Several factors explain this dynamic. First, Salafism offered a new intellectual horizon to its partisans, allowing those who had not personally experienced the Palestinian nationalist struggle to look beyond their geographical, legal, and political restrictions as “Palestinian refugees” in Lebanon. Salafism offered a new religious identity and new possibilities for action severed from a Palestinian cause that

Book Title: The Art of Visual Exegesis-Rhetoric, Texts, Images
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Jeal Roy R.
Abstract: With a special focus on biblical texts and images, this book nurtures new developments in biblical studies and art history during the last two or three decades. Analysis and interpretation of specific works of art introduce guidelines for students and teachers who are interested in the relation of verbal presentation to visual production. The essays provide models for research in the humanities that move beyond traditional disciplinary boundaries erected in previous centuries. In particular, the volume merges recent developments in rhetorical interpretation and cognitive studies with art historical visual exegesis. Readers will master the tools necessary for integrating multiple approaches both to biblical and artistic interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pk86wt

Topos versus Topia: from: The Art of Visual Exegesis
Author(s) Weemans Michel
Abstract: The emergence and development of landscape painting in Flanders during the sixteenth century, far from coinciding with a secularization of art and the rise of a purely aesthetic appreciation of nature—according to a late modern conception of landscape that has long been applied to these early works—actively participated in the “visual piety” that characterizes the early modern period.¹ “The pleasure of contemplating landscape paintings is as great as that experienced in the contemplation of nature itself,” stated Cardinal Borromeo, patron and friend of Jan Brueghel and Paul Bril and himself a famous collector of Flemish landscapes. He added:

Book Title: Faces of Displacement-The Writings of Volodymyr Vynnychenko
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): SOROKA MYKOLA
Abstract: "Whom do our people read? Vynnychenko. Whom do people talk about if it concerns literature? Vynnychenko. Whom do they buy? Again, Vynnychenko." So wrote Mykhailo Kotsiubynsky about the young Volodymyr Vynnychenko. An innovative and provocative writer, Vynnychenko was also a charismatic revolutionary and politician who responded to the dramatic upheavals of the first half of the twentieth century by challenging old values and bringing forward new ideas about human relationships. Despite his inseparable association with Ukraine, what is often overlooked is the fact that Vynnychenko wrote the majority of his works outside his native land following his flight from Tsarist and Soviet tyranny. In this ground-breaking study, Mykola Soroka draws on contemporary theories of displacement to show how Vynnychenko's expatriate status determined his worldview, his choice of literary devices, and his attitudes toward his homeland and hostlands. Soroka considers concepts of identity to study the intertwined experiences of the writer - as an exile, émigré, expatriate, traveler, and nomad - and to demonstrate how these experiences invigorated his art and left a lasting impact on his work. The first book-length study in English on Volodymyr Vynnychenko, Faces of Displacement is an insightful examination of an exiled writer that sheds new light on the challenges faced by the displaced.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pq15d

6 Homecoming, 1941–1951 from: Faces of Displacement
Abstract: The waning years mark a stage in life when it is natural for people to feel nostalgic and recollect their pasts. Kathleen Woodward and Murray Schwartz argue that “aging anticipates loss,” which intensifies the work of memory and fantasy (3). Although it is generally understood that the elderly experience a waning in their ability to remember, the decline mainly affects the recall of new learning, while the capacity to vividly recall episodes from the past may be high and even stronger than that of young adults (Burke, 124–6). Verbal narrative, imagery, and emotions are the three main components of

Book Title: Bearing Witness-Perspectives on War and Peace from the Arts and Humanities
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Johnstone Tiffany
Abstract: As the centenary of the Great War approaches, citizens worldwide are reflecting on the history, trauma, and losses of a war-torn twentieth century. It is in remembering past wars that we are at once confronted with the profound horror and suffering of armed conflict and the increasing elusiveness of peace. The contributors to Bearing Witness do not presume to resolve these troubling questions, but provoke new kinds of reflection. They explore literature, the arts, history, language, and popular culture to move beyond the language of rhetoric and commemoration provided by politicians and the military. Adding nuance to discussions of war and peace, this collection probes the understanding and insight created in the works of musicians, dramatists, poets, painters, photographers, and novelists, to provide a complex view of the ways in which war is waged, witnessed, and remembered. A compelling and informative collection, Bearing Witness sheds new light on the impact of war and the power of suffering, heroism and memory, to expose the human roots of violence and compassion. Contributors include Heribert Adam (Simon Fraser University), Laura Brandon (Carleton University), Mireille Calle-Gruber (Université La Sorbonne Nouvelle), Janet Danielson (Simon Fraser University), Sandra Djwa (emeritus, Simon Fraser University), Alan Filewod (University of Guelph), Sherrill Grace (University of British Columbia), Patrick Imbert (University of Ottawa), Tiffany Johnstone (PhD Candidate, University of British Columbia), Martin Löschnigg (Graz University), Lauren Lydic (PhD, University of Toronto), Conny Steenman Marcusse (Netherlands), Jonathan Vance (University of Western Ontario), Aritha van Herk (University of Calgary), Peter C. van Wyck (Concordia University), Christl Verduyn (Mount Allison University), and Anne Wheeler (filmmaker).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pq1ds

7 Above or Below Ground? from: Bearing Witness
Author(s) BRANDON LAURA
Abstract: More than 60,000 Canadians died during the First World War (1914–18), ten per cent of those who enlisted. More than 150,000 were injured. Over one million Canadians served between 1939 and 1945; 45,000 of them died, and 55,000 suffered injuries in a conflict marked by unprecedented violence on both sides. While a significant number of Canadian artworks from these wars depict the destruction meted out on the built, manufactured, and natural environments, the subject of physical violence is rare. Nonetheless, whether the soldiers, airmen, or sailors were from the allied or combatant sides of the conflicts, a survey of

8 Bearing Witness and Cultural Memory: from: Bearing Witness
Author(s) GRACE SHERRILL
Abstract: Over the past thirty years, and with increasing frequency, Canadian writers, filmmakers, and playwrights have assumed the task of recreating the experiences of Canadians in the Second World War. Canadians are by no means unique in this work of cultural memory and the recreation of the past; artists, historians, and philosophers from many of the countries involved in that global war have revisited it, tried to make sense of the sheer senselessness of many events, and yet stubbornly insisted that later generations must remember and must try to understand. For me, however, since my subject is literature and the arts,

Book Title: Precarious Visualities-New Perspectives on Identification in Contemporary Art and Visual Culture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Ross Christine
Abstract: Through the study of exemplary media works and practices - photography, film, video, performance, installations, web cams - scholars from various disciplines call attention to the unsettling of identification and the disablement of vision in contemporary aesthetics. To look at an image that prevents the stabilization of identification, identity and place; to perceive a representation that oscillates between visibility and invisibility; to relate to an image which entails a rebalancing of sight through the valorization of other senses; to be exposed, through surveillance devices, to the gaze of new figures of authority - the aesthetic experiences examined here concern a spectator whose perception lacks in certainty, identification, and opticality what it gains in fallibility, complexity, and interrelatedness. Precarious Visualities provides a new understanding of spectatorship as a relation that is at once corporeal and imaginary, and persistently prolific in its cultural, social, and political effects. Contributors include Raymond Bellour (École des hautes études en sciences sociales), Monika Kin Gagnon (Concordia University), Beate Ochsner (University of Mannheim -Universität Mannheim), Claudette Lauzon (McGill University), David Tomas (Université du Québec à Montréal), Slavoj Zizek (Ljubljiana University and University of London), Marie Fraser (Université du Québec à Montréal), Alice Ming Wai Jim (Concordia University), Julie Lavigne (Université du Québec à Montréal), Amelia Jones (University of Manchester), Eric Michaud (École des hautes études en sciences sociales), Hélène Samson (McCord Museum), and Thierry Bardini (Université de Montréal).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pq1zh

Introduction from: Precarious Visualities
Abstract: Part 2 is as much about explorations of aesthetic strategies that represent subjects through a dialogue between visibility and invisibility as it is about strategies that solicit the spectator in a perceptual experience in which representation itself is structured through in/visibility. A similar concern mobilizes these explorations: the attempt to create image-viewer interfaces that immerse the spectator in the work while always ensuring its attachment to what exists outside the work – a city, a landscape, a historical event, an unexpected Other’s gaze, all of which are mutable realities. The viewer-work interface takes its precariousness and raison d’être from the spectator’s

Introduction from: Precarious Visualities
Abstract: In “One Place after Another: Site-Specific Art and Locational Identity” (2004), an examination of site-specific art and artistic representations of the role of place in identity formation, art historian Miwon Kwon proposed a major rereading of site-specificity by emphasizing the double task of de-essentializing site and recognizing the importance of a “network of unanchored flows” in which the attachment of the self to place would become irrelevant:

Introduction from: Precarious Visualities
Abstract: Polysensoriality mainly refers to artworks that are attentive to the ways in which an image ceases to work merely at the level of vision. Questioning formalist opticality (the understanding of the image as a purely optical reality to be apprehended by an eye detached from the other senses), the chapters in this section propose to show how the artwork’s interpellation of the spectator through touch, vision and smell, touch and vision, or surrogate vision can enrich aesthetic experience. The section opens with Julie Lavigne’s examination of Janine Antoni’s Lick and Lather(1993– 94), which shows a polysensoriality that involves smell and

Prologue from: The Wind From the East
Abstract: According to an oft-cited maxim, all history is the history of the present. Try as they might, historians are incapable of abstracting from contemporary issues and concerns. In fact, were they to do so, their work would surely reek of antiquarian sterility. At best, historians can make their biases clear to ensure they do not exercise an overtly disfiguring influence on their presentations and findings.

CHAPTER 1 Showdown at Bruay-en-Artois from: The Wind From the East
Abstract: April 6, 1972. The scene was a mining town in provincial Normandy, Bruay-en-Artois. A young working-class girl, Brigitte Dewevre, had been sadistically murdered, her mutilated, unclothed corpse left in a vacant field. The crime scene bespoke a level of brutality to which France was entirely unaccustomed. Adding to the event’s macabre nature was the fact that Brigitte’s body was discovered the next day by her younger brother in the course of a pickup soccer match.

CHAPTER 2 France during the 1960s from: The Wind From the East
Abstract: From 1958 to 1969 General Charles de Gaulle wholly dominated the landscape of French politics. One cannot understand France during the 1960s, as well as the nature of the political system against which the sixty-eighters rebelled, without examining the general’s central role. By the same token, the political closure the general had mandated engendered a trenchant body of oppositional cultural criticism that ultimately succeeded in undermining Gaullism’s credibility as a political model. As the decade evolved, pathbreaking works of fiction, film, and theory emerged, forming a cultural template through which the sixty-eighters viewed the shortcomings of postwar French society.

INTRODUCTION. from: The Vision of the Soul
Abstract: The reflections with which I begin these pages may seem, at moments, to indulge in the barbed and the bitter, and the reader unfamiliar with my subject and with my own work, and otherwise disinclined to assertive denunciation, may be tempted to let the book slip back quietly to the shelf. But what I have to say on the matter of conservatism and culture emerges from my own life experience and comes in answer to questions salient to my own search for self-knowledge as well as to questions of a more obviously public nature regarding the goods of political and

SEVEN Re-Reading the Book of Nature from: The Vision of the Soul
Abstract: In the last chapter, I concluded with the observation that the form of Theodor W. Adorno’s philosophy is patterned on his vision of the artwork. We must ask, then, what is art itself and whence comes the truth it reveals? I shall discuss four ways of thinking about art that seem to command the attention of the skeptic who doubts its value as anything more than an empty gesture of liberal humanism. These four ways are also, in a qualified way, consonant with the account, which is a central claim of this book, of the reality of beauty as a

EIGHT Art as Intellectual Virtue from: The Vision of the Soul
Abstract: Jacques Maritain’s Art and Scholasticism(1920) constitutes one of the French neo-Thomist philosopher’s briefest and most austere works; and yet, belying the more or less serviceable prose and apparent modesty of scope, it is a wide ranging series of interventions on nearly every significant philosophical question of Maritain’s—or any—day. In speaking of beauty, Maritain sought to guide the intellectual life of an entire age. This can make the short treatise and the essays and notes later appended to it difficult reading: one cannot fully appreciate the significance of Maritain’s claims if one does not also sense the positions

TWELVE Mnemosyne: from: The Vision of the Soul
Abstract: So successful was the advent of modernist poetic, musical, and visual art in disrupting the critical vocabulary by which we describe them that we have all but lost the means to account for how art actually works. So blinding was its revolutionary blast that we have sometimes failed to distinguish the various courses these arts took during the modernist period; moreover, we have often assumed modern art effected more radical changes than it did, as if it put the aesthetic upon an entirely new basis. Abstraction in painting, dissonance and atonality in music, and free verse in poetry stand of

THIRTEEN Novel, Myth, Reality: from: The Vision of the Soul
Abstract: In the last chapter, I contended that all art depends upon narrative. Even those modernist works, such as nonrepresentational painting, that seem most to escape the gravity of story-telling end up simply rendering the narrative exogenous but no less essential. I concluded by urging artists and writers to appreciate what such modernist experiments help reveal about the nature of art, but also to return to formal practices that better respect Mnemosyne as the mother of the arts and, in turn, better respect the form of the story as an essential means to understanding the human condition. In this recommendation, I

Book Title: In/visible War-The Culture of War in Twenty-first-Century America
Publisher: Rutgers University Press
Author(s): LUCAITES JOHN LOUIS
Abstract: In/Visible Waraddresses a paradox of twenty-first century American warfare. The contemporary visual American experience of war is ubiquitous, and yet war is simultaneously invisible or absent; we lack a lived sense that "America" is at war. This paradox of in/visibility concerns the gap between the experiences of war zones and the visual, mediated experience of war in public, popular culture, which absents and renders invisible the former. Large portions of the domestic public experience war only at a distance. For these citizens, war seems abstract, or may even seem to have disappeared altogether due to a relative absence of visual images of casualties. Perhaps even more significantly, wars can be fought without sacrifice by the vast majority of Americans.Yet, the normalization of twenty-first century war also renders it highly visible. War is made visible through popular, commercial, mediated culture. The spectacle of war occupies the contemporary public sphere in the forms of celebrations at athletic events and in films, video games, and other media, coming together as MIME, the Military-Industrial-Media-Entertainment Network.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pv89fv

Book Title: Constructing Constructive Theology-An Introductory Sketch
Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): Wyman Jason A.
Abstract: To date, constructive theology hasn’t been viewed or conceptualized as a movement or trend in theology on its own as a whole. Questions arise as to what constructive theology is, where it came from, why it considers itself “constructive," and why constructive is something different from the ways in which theology has been done in the past. This book traces the overall historical arc of constructive theology, from proto-movement through the present. Inklings of constructive theology emerged well before it began to take any formalized shape. At the same time, an important shift occurred when a group of theologians decided to create the Workgroup on Constructive Theology. Further, even as the workgroup continues to work collectively, producing textbooks, statements, and methodologies concerning theology, many theologians who are not part of the workgroup or may not even know it exists have adopted the moniker of “constructive theologian." The book also considers the term “constructive" itself, offering possible reasons and historical contexts that led to this distinction being made in contrast to “systematic" theology and its subcategories. Constructive theology speaks to a very specific, historically situated emergence in the academy generally and in theology’s attempts to engage those shifts specifically.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pwt3qp

Introduction from: Constructing Constructive Theology
Abstract: Theology, as an academic discipline, has found a comfortable place as a “systematic” endeavor. Responding to the rigors of the academy, historical philosophies, and the Enlightenment and modernity, theology has for the most part produced works systematically, using classic theological doctrinal loci one by one in order to arrive at a coherent, rigorous whole, either through dogmatic theology or systematic theology. Yet in recent years, such a preoccupation hasn’t sustained talk about God as it has in the past. Within theological work, there has always been a constructive element or phase of doing theology; recently, however, a methodological trend has

4 Constructive Theology as Activist Theology from: Constructing Constructive Theology
Abstract: Of course, constructive theologians had been working in a progressive, justice-oriented mode before

5 Constructive Theology as a Method and a Tradition from: Constructing Constructive Theology
Abstract: [Systematic theology] seeks to develop a system, based on philosophical approaches or particular themes or insights, which provides a comprehensive framework for theological topics. Constructive theology, on the

Book Title: The Priority of Injustice-Locating Democracy in Critical Theory
Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): Doshi Sapana
Abstract: Debates about radical democracy, Barnett argues, have become trapped around a set of oppositions between deliberative and agonistic theories-contrasting thinkers who promote the possibility of rational agreement and those who seek to unmask the role of power or violence or difference in shaping human affairs. While these debates are often framed in terms of consensus versus contestation, Barnett unpacks the assumptions about space and time that underlie different understandings of the sources of political conflict and shows how these differences reflect deeper philosophical commitments to theories of creative action or revived ontologies of "the political." Rather than developing ideal theories of democracy or models of proper politics, he argues that attention should turn toward the practices of claims-making through which political movements express experiences of injustice and make demands for recognition, redress, and re pair. By rethinking the spatial grammar of discussions of public space, democratic inclusion, and globalization, Barnett develops a conceptual framework for analyzing the crucial roles played by geographical processes in generating and processing contentious politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pwt43v

Book Title: Textual Silence-Unreadability and the Holocaust
Publisher: Rutgers University Press
Author(s): LANG JESSICA
Abstract: There are thousands of books that represent the Holocaust, but can, and should, the act of reading these works convey the events of genocide to those who did not experience it? In Textual Silence, literary scholar Jessica Lang asserts that language itself is a barrier between the author and the reader in Holocaust texts-and that this barrier is not a lack of substance, but a defining characteristic of the genre.Holocaust texts, which encompass works as diverse as memoirs, novels, poems, and diaries, are traditionally characterized by silences the authors place throughout the text, both deliberately and unconsciously. While a reader may have the desire and will to comprehend the Holocaust, the presence of "textual silence" is a force that removes the experience of genocide from the reader's analysis and imaginative recourse. Lang defines silences as omissions that take many forms, including the use of italics and quotation marks, ellipses and blank pages in poetry, and the presence of unreliable narrators in fiction. While this limits the reader's ability to read in any conventional sense, these silences are not flaws. They are instead a critical presence that forces readers to acknowledge how words and meaning can diverge in the face of events as unimaginable as those of the Holocaust.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pwtdjf

INTRODUCTION from: Textual Silence
Abstract: Reading Holocaust texts is difficult, nearly impossible in fact.¹ Such a statement seems a contradiction in terms for, once the skills behind reading are mastered, reading becomes almost instinctual or automatic. It is difficult notto read when faced with a text—an aspect of reading (and audience) that has long been recognized and assumed, as evidenced by the multitude of public texts all around us. Moreover, given the sheer number of texts that invoke the Holocaust, texts that position the Holocaust as either primary or secondary, the claim that wecannotread these works when precisely that task—reading—

Book Title: Divination and Human Nature-A Cognitive History of Intuition in Classical Antiquity
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Struck Peter T.
Abstract: Divination and Human Naturecasts a new perspective on the rich tradition of ancient divination-the reading of divine signs in oracles, omens, and dreams. Popular attitudes during classical antiquity saw these readings as signs from the gods while modern scholars have treated such beliefs as primitive superstitions. In this book, Peter Struck reveals instead that such phenomena provoked an entirely different accounting from the ancient philosophers. These philosophers produced subtle studies into what was an odd but observable fact-that humans could sometimes have uncanny insights-and their work signifies an early chapter in the cognitive history of intuition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1q1xs0v

CHAPTER 1 Plato on Divination and Nondiscursive Knowing from: Divination and Human Nature
Abstract: In his most vivid narrative of his hero’s life story, Plato has Socrates center his autobiography on an act of divination. The Apologyshows a man driven by a provocative pronouncement from the Delphic oracle to devote his life to solving its riddle. Pleading his own defense before an Athenian jury, Socrates presents a carefully constructed speech, rich in mythological allusions. He compares himself to Achilles (28c) and likens his life’s work to a Herculean labor (22a).¹ A more subtle and also more powerful point of reference is another figure, the Theban hero Oedipus, whose life was as profoundly shaped

CHAPTER 2 Aristotle on Foresight through Dreams from: Divination and Human Nature
Abstract: In contrast to Plato, the surviving portion of Aristotle’s corpus is made up of his esoteric works—lectures, essays, and sometimes apparently just notes, meant for an audience already at the advanced stage. One salutary aspect is immediately apparent. Aristotle has little use for dramatic irony and deals with issues more directly and systematically than Plato does. On the other hand, the particular challenges for Aristotle’s readers are apparent as well. Whereas Plato could be said to present sometimes too many words, elaborating long and intricate lines of argument in which his investment remains indeterminate, Aristotle nearly always presents too

CHAPTER 4 Iamblichus on Divine Divination and Human Intuition from: Divination and Human Nature
Abstract: One may enter the world of the Neoplatonists expecting that traditional divinatory thinking will find fertile ground. This ancient school, after all, advanced ideas on union with the divine, spiritual ascent through contemplative askêsis, and the practice of theurgy. But the expectation is not exactly met. It is something of a enigma, which the prior work allows us to understand better. The most serious Neoplatonic thinker on the question, Iamblichus, will advance restrained views toward traditional divination, and will even be ready to toss aside the whole practice. He expresses these nuances while vigorously embracing a newly configured notion of

CONCLUSION. from: Divination and Human Nature
Abstract: Though they have different ideas on how exactly it works and how to value it, the Greek philosophers considered here show a consistent understanding of traditional divinatory insight as the result of an ancillary form of cognition that takes place outside our self-conscious, purposive thinking. It enters into our awareness and offers incremental insight into what is around the corner. They construe it as a feature of human nature, as embedded in physiological processes that have to do with our status as embodied organisms situated in a surrounding atmosphere of stimuli. It relies on mechanisms buried deep in our natural

Book Title: Restless Secularism-Modernism and the Religious Inheritance
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Mutter Matthew
Abstract: A scholarly and deeply sensitive study that explores how religion and secularism are tightly interwoven in the major works of modernist literatureMatthew Mutter provides a broad survey of modernist literature, examining key works against a background of philosophy, theology, intellectual and social history, while tracing the relationship of modernism's secular imagination to the religious cultures that both preceded and shaped it. Mutter's provocative study demonstrates how, despite their explicit desire to purify secular life of its religious residues, Wallace Stevens, Virginia Woolf, and other literary modernists consistently found themselves entangled in the religious legacies they disavowed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1q1xt6f

Book Title: Stories of the Middle Space-Reading the Ethics in Postmodern Realisms
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Bowen Deborah C.
Abstract: Highlighting the wide variety of ethical concerns considered by writers such as Timothy Findley, Thomas King, Carol Shields, Julian Barnes, A.S. Byatt, and Salman Rushdie, Deborah Bowen makes the case for a new category of "postmodern realism" and shows how contemporary stories about "the real" and "the good" are constructed. Applying theoretical insights from Emmanuel Levinas and Mikhail Bakhtin, Bowen investigates categories of postmodern realism such as magic realism, parody, and metafiction while laying the groundwork for Christian readings of a medium that is often perceived as largely irreligious. An illuminating study of well-known contemporary writers, Stories of the Middle Space is a critically nuanced and methodologically innovative work that reads the postmodern from a faith-based perspectives to create new literary insights.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1q6073

Effects of Population Aging on Health Care Expenditure and Financing: from: A World Growing Old
Author(s) Leidl Reiner
Abstract: In Europe the impact of population aging has become a popular threat to the health care systems. Recently, 2,700 European “opinion leaders” working in the health field were asked to identify the most significant problem contributing to the growth of health care expenditure. The survey reported population aging to be the number one issue.¹ Much of the popularity of this response may be related to the fact that it is hard to blame someone in the health field for this problem.² But in contrast to this broad agreement on the significance of the population aging issue in the health field,

Book Title: The Goals of Medicine-The Forgotten Issues in Health Care Reform
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Callahan Daniel
Abstract: The Hastings Center coordinated teams of physicians, nurses, public health experts, philosophers, theologians, politicians, health care administrators, social workers, and lawyers in fourteen countries to explore these issues. In this volume, they articulate four basic goals of medicine - prevention of disease, relief of suffering, care of the ill, and avoidance of premature death - and examine them in light of the cultural, political, and economic pressures under which medicine functions. In reporting these findings, the contributors touch on a wide range of diverse issues such as genetic technology, Chinese medicine, care of the elderly, and prevention and public health.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1qd8zdh

The Goals of Medicine: from: The Goals of Medicine
Abstract: This is a report of a project that examined the goals of medicine in light of its contemporary possibilities and problems. Where has medicine been, where ought it to be going, and what should its future priorities be? These are important and difficult questions. An international group worked on them four years, and this report is the result of its efforts. While there is by no means total agreement among those who developed it on every item in the report, what follows represents a general consensus. We struggled to define the issues, and then to see if we could come

Book Title: Redescribing the Gospel of Mark- Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Miller Merrill P.
Abstract: This final volume of studies by members of the Society of Biblical Literature's consultation, and later seminar, on Ancient Myths and Modern Theories of Christian Origins focuses on Mark. As with previous volumes, the provocative proposals on Christian origins offered by Burton L. Mack are tested by applying Jonathan Z. Smith's distinctive social theorizing and comparative method. Essays examine Mark as an author's writing in a book culture, a writing that responded to situations arising out of the first Roman-Judean war after the destruction of the Jerusalem temple in 70 CE. Contributors William E. Arnal, Barry S. Crawford, Burton L. Mack, Christopher R. Matthews, Merrill P. Miller, Jonathan Z. Smith, and Robyn Faith Walsh explore the southern Levant as a plausible provenance of the Gospel of Mark and provide a detailed analysis of the construction of Mark as a narrative composed without access to prior narrative sources about Jesus. A concluding retrospective follows the work of the seminar, its developing discourse and debates, and the continuing work of successor groups in the field.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1qd8zmm

Introduction from: Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Crawford Barry S.
Abstract: This is the third of a three-volume series of studies by members of the society of biblical literature’s consultation (1995–1997), then seminar (1998–2003), on ancient Myths and Modern Theories of christian origins, both concerned with redescribing the beginnings of christianity as religion, that is, with theories and methods developed in the social sciences and related areas for studying religious phenomena of various sorts and geographical locations, not just the specific literature, beliefs, and practices of early christians. The work of the consultation and seminar did not end, however, with the completion of the seminar’s term in 2003. Its

Conjectures on Conjunctures and Other Matters: from: Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Smith Jonathan Z.
Abstract: Fieldwork, the distinctive procedural hallmark of the anthropological enterprise, became an unquestioned professional requirement during the decades of sociocultural anthropology’s “classical period,” roughly 1925 to 1960. for our purposes, the major consequence of this is a presentism characteristic of much ethnographic reporting: the society as observed at the time of the fieldworker’s interaction with it. While this presentism raises large conceptual questions,¹ its practical result with respect to theory was a strong bias against the historical in dominant approaches, whether the latter was functionalism or structuralism (to name but two, all but opposite options). in addition to reflecting contemporary practice,

The Markan Site from: Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Smith Jonathan Z.
Abstract: Among the various Oceanic specialists who have remarked on Marshall Sahlins’s work, Nicholas Thomas, at the Australian National University, is perhaps the most interesting, both in his particular studies, as represented by Entangled Objects: Exchange, Material Culture, and Colonialism in the Pacific, and in his more theoretical work,Out of Time: History and Evolution in Anthropological Discourse.¹ In the latter, Thomas develops the argument that Sahlins’s mechanisms of reproduction/transformation, which stress “the creative dynamics of the indigenous cultural scheme,” entail “a particular power relation which could exist only at a certain phase of colonial history, namely the period between initial

On Smith, On Myth, On Mark from: Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Arnal William E.
Abstract: It is extraordinarily difficult to find a place from which to respond adequately to Jonathan Z. Smith’s tour de force on the ways in which Marshall Sahlins’s conceptual apparatus may assist the work of this seminar. I will, therefore, simply use Smith’s massive papers as a launching pad for some of my own concerns, without making the futile attempt to do these papers justice thereby.

Markan Grapplings from: Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Matthews Christopher R.
Abstract: My agreement with the steering committee for this paper was to offer reflections on aspects of the other papers prepared for our sessions in Toronto. Both Burton L. Mack and William E. Arnal have responded in some detail to Jonathan Z. Smith’s extensive work that allows the seminar to conceptualize a theoretical grappling hook for the recovery of the “submerged” Markan situation. Mack’s and Arnal’s coverage of Smith’s contributions has allowed me the luxury of focusing on some of the issues that they have raised from my own perspective. I am in complete accord with Arnal’s sentiments, expressed at the

The Spyglass and the Kaleidoscope: from: Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Mack Burton L.
Abstract: The meetings of the seminar on Ancient Myths and Modern Theories of Christian Origins, held in toronto, produced several challenges to our categories of social formation and mythmaking. We had asked Jonathan Z. Smith to consider the Levant as a social setting for the Gospel of Mark. Merrill P. Miller had Jesus and the Village Scribes¹ in mind, where William E. Arnal set the text of the Sayings Gospel Q aside while he worked out a social description of the Galilee as the setting into which Q could then be placed. So we asked Smith if something like that might

Mark, War, and Creative Imagination from: Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Arnal William E.
Abstract: The Gospel according to Mark, arguably, laid the framework for most subsequent understandings of Jesus and of the “movement” he allegedly instigated.¹ The predominant “ancient myth” with which our “modern theories” are struggling is thus precisely the one laid down by Mark. It receives fuller elaboration and extension forward in time in Luke-Acts, which in its turn offers a basis for Eusebius’s even more ambitious conceptualization.² But the narrative modeand the substantive implications of that mode—the view, in short, that Jesus is understood best in terms of his activity and particularly in terms of a series of sequential

A Profession of Trust: from: The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) O’Donovan Leo J.
Abstract: There is a profound similarity between physicians and educators: The coin of both our realms is trust. Trust is at the heart of being a good doctor; it also is at the heart of being a good educator. In this essay, I reflect on the importance and value of trust in our lives and in our work.

Learning through Experience and Expression: from: The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Benner Patricia
Abstract: Florence Nightingale envisioned the work of the nurse as placing the body in the best condition for repair and recovery.² In the West, nursing

Moral Courage: from: The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Purtillo Ruth B.
Abstract: Edmund Pellegrino’s work on medical humanism stands out among contemporary writings devoted to a deep understanding of the health professional as healer and friend. Time and again I have turned to Pellegrino’s work to regain my moral equilibrium as a health professional and bioethicist. His examination is instructive for many scholars in their search for resources available to health professionals: What will assist professionals in their desire to walk the walk of respect for patients? What can educators do to nurture “the spirit of sincere concern” that initially motivated many professionals to enter their chosen field? As important, how can

Reproductive Technologies: from: The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) McCormick Richard A.
Abstract: The birth of Louise Brown on July 25, 1978, in Oldham, England, was greeted with enormous fanfare. She was the first baby born from in vitrofertilization (IVF) and embryo transfer (ET), the crowning work of the late Patrick Steptoe and Robert Edwards. The fanfare included questions, accusations, expressions of fears and doubts, warnings, hopes, and joyful congratulations (including that of Pope John Paul I)—in short, just about every human reaction that greets a medical breakthrough that touches human life. People wondered whether Louise would suffer the effects of being a medical freak. They expressed misgivings about the embryos

The Role of Reason, Emotion, and Aesthetics in Making Ethical Judgments from: The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Loewy Erich H.
Abstract: Medicine must wear a human face and make human judgments. Indeed, the question of how judgments are made is tacitly present throughout any work on philosophy of medicine in clinical medical education or, more recently, bioethics. To be a sentient being is to make judgments; to be a physician or medical educator is to make judgments that may critically affect many others. In this essay, I examine the role of various components of judging and the process by which judgments are made.

The Contribution of Philosophical Hermeneutics to Clinical Ethics from: The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Benaroyo Lazare
Abstract: In this essay, I explore the significance of philosophical hermeneutics for medical ethics. I claim that hermeneutics is the philosophical framework within which the ethical core of the healing act comes into being.

Prologue: from: Cather Studies, Volume 11
Author(s) MURPHY JOHN J.
Abstract: About a year ago, while helping one of my grandsons with a college English assignment, I rediscovered Wallace Stevens’s 1942 poem “Of Modern Poetry” and was surprised how applicable it is to the Cather canon, a body of work distinguished by the task of constructing a new stage during an age when the set script used by many generations of poets had become what Stevens refers to as “a souvenir” (line 6). “[T] he problem of modern life and art was for Cather, as it was for Wallace Stevens,” observes Tom Quirk, “finding ‘what will suffice’” (155). Her project is

6 Willa Cather, Ernest L. Blumenschein, and “The Painting of Tomorrow” from: Cather Studies, Volume 11
Author(s) JAAP JAMES A.
Abstract: Willa Cather was both enamored of and inspired by the region, people, and culture of the American Southwest. Scholars have had a lot to say about her relationship to this region, but even so, gaps remain. One unexplored aspect of Cather’s Southwest experiences is her relationship with the modernist American painter Ernest L. Blumenschein. Born in Pittsburgh and raised in Dayton, Ohio, Blumenschein began his career illustrating works by Joseph Conrad, Stephen Crane, and Jack London for such publications as Century,McClure’s, andHarper’s. In 1907, Blumenschein provided the illustrations for Cather’s third story inMcClure’s, “The Namesake.” He and

13 Re(con)ceiving Experience: from: Cather Studies, Volume 11
Author(s) DOLEŽAL JOSHUA
Abstract: Anyone hazarding a scientific reading of Willa Cather’s work might take warning from her scorn for her former professor Lucius Sherman at the University of Nebraska. Sherman’s Analytics of Literature(1893) counted word frequency and used equations to measure sentence length and “ratios of force” (Woodress 80). In his preface, Sherman claims great success with his “objective” method in literature classes: “Those accustomed to write in a lumbering awkward fashion began to express themselves in strong, clear phrases, and with a large preponderance of simple sentences. . . . Students apparently without a taste for reading, or capacity to discern

Epilogue: from: Cather Studies, Volume 11
Author(s) STOUT JANIS
Abstract: Anyone who works on Cather knows what a difference it makes to have or not to have the letters. Years of difficult access and the need to paraphrase, or to read only in someone else’s paraphrases, approximate at best, fastened our eyes toward a hoped-for future when the letters themselves, or at least some of them, would be readily accessible in print. Even so, the question posed here—What difference do letters make?—seems worth thinking about, both in a general way and in ways that pertain specifically to The Selected Letters of Willa Cather.

Flavius Josephus and Biblical Women from: Early Jewish Writings
Author(s) Ilan Tal
Abstract: Flavius Josephus, the great Jewish historian of the first-century of the common era, left four works to posterity: a kind of autobiography ( The Life) as the conclusion of his literary work; a polemical work in defense of Judaism,Against Apion; a comprehensive presentation of and reflection on the first Jewish-roman war (66–73 CE) and its historical background beginning in the second-century BCE (Jewish War); and theJewish Antiquities, a history of the Jewish people in twenty books, which begins with the creation of the world and continues until the beginning of the war in 66 CE.¹ In the first

Book Title: Identity and Control-How Social Formations Emerge (Second Edition)
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): White Harrison C.
Abstract: In this completely revised edition of one of the foundational texts of network sociology, Harrison White refines and enlarges his groundbreaking theory of how social structure and culture emerge from the chaos and uncertainty of social life. Incorporating new contributions from a group of young sociologists and many fascinating and novel case studies, Identity and Control is the only major book of social theory that links social structure with the lived experience of individuals, providing a rich perspective on the kinds of social formations that develop in the process. Going beyond traditional sociological dichotomies such as agency/structure, individual/society, or micro/macro, Identity and Controlpresents a toolbox of concepts that will be useful to a wide range of social scientists, as well as those working in public policy, management, or associational life and, beyond, to any reader who is interested in understanding the dynamics of social life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1r2fg1

PROLOGUE: from: Identity and Control
Abstract: The data-mining of Quentin Van Doosselaere (2006) will suggest how, over two centuries, a capitalist trade economy spun out in networks

ONE IDENTITIES SEEK CONTROL from: Identity and Control
Author(s) Godart Frederic
Abstract: Identities spring up out of efforts at control in turbulent context. But our everyday sense of reality then guides us. Being common sense, it enables communication among us, and thus makes our lives work. This book argues that “common sense” also obscures the social processes that lie behind us and our everyday perceptions.

TWO NETWORKS AND STORIES from: Identity and Control
Author(s) Wuerkner Sabine
Abstract: Social networks are traces from dynamics across netdom switchings. As two identities come over time to focus control attention

THREE THREE DISCIPLINES from: Identity and Control
Author(s) Steiny Don
Abstract: In chapter 1, we saw that a public was produced jointly as a forum for the fleeting netdoms—that are the phenomenological base of networks—and disciplines can

FIVE INSTITUTIONS AND RHETORICS from: Identity and Control
Author(s) Thiemann Matthias
Abstract: Going to an appointment is an institution, sustained by a rhetoric of promptness played out in some public, large or small.¹ An institutional system shepherds social processes by channeling them, by configuring institutions through rhetorics in a way that proves self-sustaining. They draw heavily on structural equivalence as they invoke story-sets across networks. Blockmodels, introduced in chapter 2, can suggest architectures, blueprints for institutional systems. A given institutional system has selected only some among the very many homomorphisms which as analysts we can compute from blockmodels as being possible (Boyd 1991).

Milk from: Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) BEACHY KIRSTEN EVE
Abstract: Jason and I unfold ourselves from the car into the manure-sweet air of the dairy farm. It’s after seven o’clock but his parents are still hard at work. I watch the scrawny kittens frisk by the milk room door for a few minutes then take possession of the kitchen, where I toss a taco salad and buzz up berry smoothies. In the farm kitchen with its yellow curtains, Jason’s mother Elaine washes the dishes after every meal so there’s plenty of counter space. In our own little kitchen in Harrisonburg, I let the dishes pile up while I spend my

Mimicking Maternal Gestures: from: Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) STOESZ SUSIE FISHER
Abstract: Following the annual extended Stoesz family dinner last Christmas, in a wood-framed house, tucked quietly away on an expansive treed property in Manitoba’s beautiful Pembina Valley, I watched as my mother-in-law, Violet Stoesz, her sister, Yvonne Stoesz, and their mother, Sara Unger Stoesz, cleared the long table together. The three women moved comfortably and efficiently between table and kitchen, their shuffling gaits and melodic laughter matching one another almost perfectly. They worked quietly in step with Yvonne’s humming, lifting plates above our heads, skirting the flow of relatives moving in and out of the kitchen, and dodging the young ones’

“Home” Schooling from: Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) CROCKER WENDY A.
Abstract: It would be fair to ask why a researcher who is neither a Mennonite nor a mother would be interested in the topic of Old Colony Mennonite¹ mothering, and what she could contribute to the discussion. In this essay, I write from the privileged position of an educated white woman who is known within the community where I live and work as someone who holds a position of authority and trust within the education sector. As a school principal, I have interacted extensively with Old Colony Mennonite children and their families. My vantage point as an “Outsider” provides a unique

That Fat Man is Giving Birth: from: Natal Signs
Author(s) SURKAN K. J.
Abstract: “Did you always want to be pregnant?” The social worker peered across the room at the two of us, but the question is directed to me, since I am the patient. My partner and I are sitting in an office in a prestigious urban teaching hospital, on a floor dedicated to reproductive medicine. On any given day in this location, scores of women emerge from the elevator, sit in waiting rooms, have vital signs checked, undergo blood tests, ultrasounds, and internal exams, and consult with doctors, nurses, social workers, and patient coordinators—all in the attempt to have a baby.

Crone and Moon, Umbilical Cords/Blood Ties from: Natal Signs
Author(s) REID BRESCIA NEMBER
Abstract: The subsequent illustration, cut-out in black paper, offers a depiction of the intergenerational continuum of birth. This work imagines a family line, with umbilical cords still attached, a snapshot of multiple generations seen at once, in non-linear time. Centering a representation of queer birthers, including trans folks and LGBT-TIQ2S people, is integral to this web of generations. Homage is paid to the curious reality of human reproductive physiology—a fetus with ovaries is born containing their entire life’s supply of “eggs” (Moore, Persaud, and Torchia 269). This means that the eggs that were fertilized to become each of us were

Imminent from: Natal Signs
Author(s) LONG JENNIFER
Abstract: For over fifteen years, my artistic practice has explored issues of doubt, vulnerability, perceived ideals, and communication within the context of interpersonal relationships. Working with constructed narratives and a feminist lens, I describe the emotions and quiet moments of everyday life. Touch, gesture, and gaze all play significant roles as conduits of conscious and unconscious modes of communication. My artwork parallels my life experiences and has recently concentrated on pregnancy and mothering through the series Swallowing Ice,Fold, andImminent.Imminentbegan as a series of self-portraits that visually articulated my reflections of being pregnant and the primary caregiver to

Refusing Delinquency, Reclaiming Power: from: Natal Signs
Author(s) BOURGEOIS CHERYLLEE
Abstract: The artwork

Resistance and Submission: from: Natal Signs
Author(s) EINION ALYS
Abstract: This paper emerged from my work for a Ph.D. in Creative Writing. Motivated by a desire to analyse women’s life stories, and informed by many years as a midwife, I took on the task of retelling a life story revolving around the centrality of the character’s bodily experience of womanhood, manifested through her experiences of rape, intimate violence, birth, and mothering. This enterprise opened the door to a critical understanding of the nature of subjectivity as represented and re-presented in fiction and non-fiction in the form of birth narratives. As a midwife and a feminist, I had long been aware

Does Labour Mean Work? from: Natal Signs
Author(s) JOLLY NATALIE
Abstract: In this chapter, I examine the social landscape of femininity to contextualize women’s fear of pain in childbirth. For many women, vaginal delivery has become something to avoid. Trends in medicalization and surgical intervention (including increased rates of elective cesarean section) suggest that childbirth need not involve labour (both generally, in terms of effortful work, and specifically, in terms of the three stages of the birth process). In this chapter, I consider what has motivated this trend towards increased medicalization of birth, with an eye towards the cultural features of our social world. In particular, I suggest that the components

Representing Birth: from: Natal Signs
Author(s) LYONS JEANNE
Abstract: As a midwife and an artist, I see many commonalities between art making, midwifery, and birth giving. As a midwifery educator I find value in representing the point of view that birth is a work of art that we are privileged to participate in. As well, I find value in using artistic modalities to explore and teach the art of midwifery. How birth is represented can leave long-term and powerful impressions. How do we, as midwives, present birth to the families we serve? What impressions are left on midwifery students as they traverse our educational systems, and in turn what

Birth is a Labour of Art from: Natal Signs
Author(s) KOTAK MARNI
Abstract: For me, my existence as an artist and a mother are deeply intertwined and reflect my belief that human life is the most profound work of art. Being a mother as an artist has the potential to unlock cultural institutions that have traditionally codified the maternal body as irrational, weak, and economically ineffectual (Liss 2). Giving birth and raising my child as a work of art challenges our capitalist society that glorifies products over people and the spectacle over authentic human experience.

Flower of My Flesh from: Natal Signs
Author(s) ROSENZWEIG ROSIE
Abstract: When I was pregnant for the first time in 1959, I was working as a librarian at the Indiana State Library, with all the most recently published books at my disposal. Hot off the press, Marjorie Karmel’s book Thank You, Dr. Lamazewas read in one sitting. Ms. Karmel described a new method of giving birth without drugs, a method that her French doctor modelled after his experiences in Russia at the time. It became known eventually as the Lamaze method of childbirth. The Mayo Clinic describes that the goal of this method is to increase confidence in your ability

Birth Shock: from: Natal Signs
Author(s) WATTS LISA
Abstract: The birth project is funded research by the Arts and Humanities Research Council, UK. New mothers are being given the opportunity to explore their experiences of pregnancy, birth, and post-natal readjustments using different art forms: phototherapy, photo-diaries, and participatory arts. In The Birth Project, the arts are being used to interrogate this complex topic. We situate this endeavour in the context of an emerging practice of health humanities (Crawford et al.) art as social action (Levine and Levine) and visual research methodologies (Pink, Advances, The Future). This chapter will focus on the participatory arts work already undertaken to date with

Kids Aren’t Cute from: Natal Signs
Author(s) OSNES BETH
Abstract: Let’s get a few more things straight about kids. Kids aren’t cute. Kids aren’t cute, but they are little and little is cute, but it’s only the little that’s cute, not the kid. Think about it, a six-foot newborn would not be cute. Not only are kids not cute, they don’t like cute things. They don’t even like primary colours. Given the chance, they always go for the black remote control. They don’t want fuzzy stuffed animals; they want to turn the oven on. They want to drive the car. They want to work that new table saw. They only

1. Obāchan’s Garden: from: Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) WILSON SHEENA
Abstract: Mothers and the experience of motherhood have been historically overwritten by patriarchal practices that accord some lives and certain life stories greater value. Fiction and non-fiction stories by and about mothers—particularly the stories of poor women, working women, and women of colour—have gone largely unrecorded. What remains are patriarchal daughter-centred stories of young women who move from one male protector to another: father to husband to son. As a response to this history of literary and cultural production, the telling of mother-stories can be reclaimed as an act of resistance, whether mothers are telling their own stories, or

3. Discourses of the Maternal in the Cinema of Eastern Europe from: Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) SYWENKY IRENE
Abstract: Approaching the development of the cinematic tradition in Eastern Europe necessarily calls for a historical contextualization of this phenomenon in the framework of the cataclysmic socio-political changes that shaped the region throughout the twentieth century. Representations of maternal space in films are conditioned by the ideologies and social institutions that shape understandings of women’s role in society, and, as such, they also explore connections between motherhood, social order, and articulations of private and public spheres. Focusing on the cinematic tradition of Eastern Europe, the chapter explores the construction of motherhood from a socio-historical and political perspective during the early Soviet

4. (Re)Producing Globalization: from: Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) WINGARD JENNIFER
Abstract: How do the flows of global capital impress themselves on the female body? Much of the feminist literature on globalization discusses the ways women are affected by global economies, politics, and migration. The economic imperative to cross borders, and what this border crossing means to the identities of both communities and individuals, has been examined.¹ This work is vital to understanding how global capital affects the opportunities and identities of those forced to navigate it, but this focus on borders and identities often obscures the ways in which “the body” is affected by the flows of globalization.

Book Title: Red Legacies in China-Cultural Afterlives of the Communist Revolution
Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Zhang Enhua
Abstract: What has contemporary China inherited from its revolutionary past? How do the realities and memories, aesthetics and practices of the Mao era still reverberate in the post-Mao cultural landscape? The essays in this volume propose “red legacies" as a new critical framework from which to examine the profusion of cultural productions and afterlives of the communist revolution in order to understand China’s continuities and transformations from socialism to postsocialism. Organized into five parts—red foundations, red icons, red classics, red bodies, and red shadows—the book’s interdisciplinary contributions focus on visual and performing arts, literature and film, language and thought, architecture, museums, and memorials. Mediating at once unfulfilled ideals and unmourned ghosts across generations, red cultural legacies suggest both inheritance and debt, and can be mobilized to support as well as to critique the status quo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1sq5t95

FOUR SOCIALIST VISUAL EXPERIENCE AS CULTURAL IDENTITY: from: Red Legacies in China
Author(s) Tang Xiaobing
Abstract: A central figure in the fast-moving and globally connected story of contemporary art from China, a story often narrated in close parallel to the growing prominence of the Chinese economy since the early 1990s, is no doubt Wang Guangyi 王广义 (1957‒).¹ Best known since the early 1990s for his Great Criticismseries, Wang is in many a survey and art-historical account described as the defining Political Pop artist, a Chinese Andy Warhol with a poignant political thrust. His bold, poster-like images of Chinese socialist subjects, be they workers or Red Guards, charging at Western consumer brand names such as Coca-Cola

Book Title: Literature Against Criticism-University English and Contemporary Fiction in Conflict
Publisher: Open Book Publishers
Author(s): Eve Martin Paul
Abstract: This is a book about the power game currently being played out between two symbiotic cultural institutions: the university and the novel. As the number of hyper-knowledgeable literary fans grows, students and researchers in English departments waiver between dismissing and harnessing voices outside the academy. Meanwhile, the role that the university plays in contemporary literary fiction is becoming increasingly complex and metafictional, moving far beyond the ‘campus novel’ of the mid-twentieth century. Martin Paul Eve’s engaging and far-reaching study explores the novel's contribution to the ongoing displacement of cultural authority away from university English. Spanning the works of Jennifer Egan, Ishmael Reed, Tom McCarthy, Sarah Waters, Percival Everett, Roberto Bolaño and many others, Literature Against Criticism forces us to re-think our previous notions about the relationship between those who write literary fiction and those who critique it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1sq5v00

1. Authors, Institutions, and Markets from: Literature Against Criticism
Abstract: For those working in university English departments in the early twenty-first century, these words will probably sound all too familiar: “[t]his man possesses great eloquence. See that he is denied justice for some time and arrange for all his grandiose speeches to be recorded”. Yet, despite the plausibility of the scenario, this passage is not a sadistic diktatissued from a university administrator to an unsuspecting humanities underling, perhaps enforcing lecture capture or a similar contemporary technology. It comes instead, in rough translation, from a Ninth- or Tenth- Dynasty Ancient Egyptian story called theTale of the Eloquent Peasant. Briefly

7. Genre and Class from: Literature Against Criticism
Abstract: In the preceding parts of this book, I have demonstrated several reasons why contemporary fiction may choose to represent the academy, mostly focusing on the fact that in contemporary metafiction, the critical space is shared by the academy and fiction. This results in a struggle for the right to express critique and then a legitimation battle. Beginning with Tom McCarthy’s oblique engagement with the academy through his public intellectualism and canny understanding of generic conventions, I suggested that C, although not a work that directly depicts academia, is a novel tightly bound to formalist criticism and canon formation and a

9. Conclusion from: Literature Against Criticism
Abstract: Throughout this book I have demonstrated a variety of ways in which the university — and specifically university English — is used and abused in works of contemporary fiction. While far from a conclusive study, the representative range of texts here examined leads to several conclusions about the interaction between the novel and the academy. Roughly speaking, these findings can be schematised into aesthetic and political critique, legitimation, and disciplinary feedback loops.

Book Title: Love and its Critics-From the Song of Songs to Shakespeare and Milton’s Eden
Publisher: Open Book Publishers
Author(s): Movsesian Arpi
Abstract: This book is a history of love and the challenge love offers to the laws and customs of its times and places, as told through poetry from the Song of Songs to John Milton’s Paradise Lost. It is also an account of the critical reception afforded to such literature, and the ways in which criticism has attempted to stifle this challenge. Bryson and Movsesian argue that the poetry they explore celebrates and reinvents the love the troubadour poets of the eleventh and twelfth centuries called fin’amor: love as an end in itself, mutual and freely chosen even in the face of social, religious, or political retribution. Neither eros nor agape, neither exclusively of the body, nor solely of the spirit, this love is a middle path. Alongside this tradition has grown a critical movement that employs a 'hermeneutics of suspicion', in Paul Ricoeur’s phrase, to claim that passionate love poetry is not what it seems, and should be properly understood as worship of God, subordination to Empire, or an entanglement with the structures of language itself – in short, the very things it resists. The book engages with some of the seminal literature of the Western canon, including the Bible, the poetry of Ovid, and works by English authors such as William Shakespeare and John Donne, and with criticism that stretches from the earliest readings of the Song of Songs to contemporary academic literature. Lively and enjoyable in its style, it attempts to restore a sense of pleasure to the reading of poetry, and to puncture critical insistence that literature must be outwitted. It will be of value to professional, graduate, and advanced undergraduate scholars of literature, and to the educated general reader interested in treatments of love in poetry throughout history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1sq5vd6

9. Love and its Costs in Seventeenth-Century Literature from: Love and its Critics
Abstract: The theme of love as resistance to authority is transformed and amplified in the lyric poetry of John Donne and Robert Herrick. In work filled with a sense of the fragility and shortness of life, these poets contribute to an ethos that has come to be known by the name carpe diem, a phrase made famous by Horace, “who in Ode, I. xi, tells his mistress that […] life is short, so they must ‘enjoy the day’, for they do not know if there will be a tomorrow”.¹ Horace’s line, “carpe diem quam minimum credula postero”² (“Seize the day, put

SIX Rules from: Philosophical criminology
Abstract: In political and policy rhetoric there is much talk of ‘playing by the rules’. For instance, in the US Barak Obama declared in his 2010 State of the Union address that, ‘we should … enforce our laws, and ensure that everyone who plays by the rules can contribute to our economy and enrich our nation’. Similarly, in the UK during his successful 2010 election campaign David Cameron claimed, ‘We’re fighting the fact that people who do the right thing, who work hard, who save, who play by the rules get hit by the system’. Six years earlier Tony Blair (2004)

SEVEN Respect from: Philosophical criminology
Abstract: So far this book has considered philosophical ideas of values, morality, aesthetics, order and rules and how they relate to criminological concern. This chapter explores a positive way forward centred on the concept of respect. The meaning of ‘respect’ has been a concern for moral philosophy for some time (for example Darwall, 1977; Dworkin, 1977; Hill, 2000; Bagnoli, 2007; Carter, 2011). Much of this work draws, at least in part, on the writings of Immanuel Kant centred on the categorical imperative (see Chapter Three) and the notion of human dignity, that ‘respect for the moral law entails treating persons (oneself

Book Title: Researching the lifecourse-Critical reflections from the social sciences
Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Hardill Irene
Abstract: Researching the Lifecourse features methods linking time, space and mobilities and provides practitioners with practical detail in each chapter. It covers the full lifecourse and includes innovative methods and case study examples from different European and North American contexts.The lifecourse perspective continues to be an important subject in the social sciences. Researching the Lifecourse offers a distinctive approach in that it truly covers the lifecourse (childhood, adulthood and older age), focusing on innovative methods and case study examples from a variety of European and North American contexts. This original approach connects theory and practice from across the social sciences by situating methodology and research design within relevant conceptual frameworks. This diverse collection features methods that are linked to questions of time, space and mobilities while providing practitioners with practical detail in each chapter.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1t89635

ONE Introduction from: Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Hardill Irene
Abstract: Lifecourse research is undertaken by researchers from across the social sciences, often working in a multidisciplinary context, using the lifecourse as an underpinning concept and/or a method of study. In this book we aim to represent the diversity of lifecourse methodologies employed in the social sciences, as well as having a concern for epistemology – how different knowledge claims are connected to our research practices. Moreover, the contributors in this edited book emphasise how different theoretical frameworks and positionality affect the research process – each contributor examines the challenges of their research design and how they worked through methodological issues

FOUR A restudy of young workers from the 1960s: from: Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) O’Connor Henrietta
Abstract: Since 2000 we have been undertaking a detailed restudy of Norbert Elias’s previously lost ‘Adjustment of Young Workers to Work Situations and Adult Roles’ (1962–4) project.¹ This project was not only important because of its links to Norbert Elias or because it was one of the largest studies of school to work transition at that time (see Goodwin and O’Connor, 2005a), but also because there are very few ‘classic’ studies from the post war period that focused on the English East Midlands and a key centre of engineering, textiles and clothing and footwear manufacture. As part of the restudy

NINE Triangulation with softGIS in lifecourse research: from: Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Schmidt-Thomé Kaisa
Abstract: In this chapter I focus on the possibilities that embodied knowledge opens up when undertaking research on the lifecourse. Shotter (2009) argues that social theorists often overlook embodied knowledge as they evaluate human action through causes (emphasising structures) or reasons (emphasising agency). In my work on ‘geobiographies’ I connect the highly contextual and unique with lifecourse information, specifically relating current everyday life (especially outdoor activities) with the habitualities developed over a participant’s lifecourse. I examine embodied knowledge as a joint outcome of the lifecourse and its geographical context – space and place. In this chapter I use geo-coordinates as a

Book Title: Retiring to Spain-Women's narratives of nostalgia, belonging and community
Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Ahmed Anya
Abstract: This book is a study of nostalgia, belonging and community which provides a new theoretical framework for understanding retirement migration. It is the first account of retirement migration that focuses on the voices of retired working-class British women, who are considering either return migration to the UK or permanent/temporary settlement in Spain. Through a narrative approach, we follow their journeys as they seek, recreate and construct community in a new context and their experiences of belonging and non-belonging are unravelled. The book offers a critical perspective, challenging positivistic, essentialist definitions of community.The book offers a critical perspective, challenging positivistic, essentialist definitions of lifestyle migration. We follow the journeys of retired working class British women as they seek, recreate and construct community in a new context.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1t896fb

SEVEN Belonging to networks: from: Retiring to Spain
Abstract: In the previous chapter I focused on how the women featured experience and narratively construct belonging and non-belonging to Spain and the complex relationships they have with place(s), highlighting that such associations can be imagined and pragmatic, shaped by social ‘locations’, and also contingent on experiences and intentions, or the end point of plot movement (Bakhtin, 1981). In this chapter, the core theme is networks and their connection with spatial, temporal and social locations. I explore how geographical location – where one is from and where one is located – is significant in shaping belonging to networks and how women’s

EIGHT Renegotiating family relationships: from: Retiring to Spain
Abstract: It is now becoming clear that the relationship between place – being from the UK and living in an urbanisation in Spain – shapes the kind of networks that women form and is also influenced by their translocated positionalities. For Cynthia, Celia, Mabel, Margot, Mabel, Agatha and Myra, fulfilling the quest’s goal was possible because they were able to overcome a number of obstacles. Bernice and Viv were satisfied by living a heterolocal life, enjoying the best of both worlds, spending part of the year in the UK and part of the year in Spain, while Enid, disillusioned by the

THREE Agency, identity and personhood in the social sciences from: Personhood, identity and care in advanced old age
Abstract: In the previous chapter we outlined the various ways that terms like ‘agency’, ‘identity’ and ‘personhood’ have been understood within philosophy, and how such understandings have been applied particularly in response to the problems of mental infirmity in later life. We argued that the de-construction of the term ‘person’ into the separable issues of agency and identity may provide a more useful framework through which to interpret these problems than by approaches based on the more generic term ‘personhood’. Irrespective of their ‘powers’ to express agency and identity, the common humanity of people with infirmities can serve as the underlying

Book Title: Biography and social exclusion in Europe-Experiences and life journeys
Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Torrabadella Laura
Abstract: Throughout Europe, standardised approaches to social policy and practice are being radically questioned and modified. Beginning from the narrative detail of individual lives, this book re-thinks welfare predicaments, emphasising gender, generation, ethnic and class implications of economic and social deregulation.Based on 250 life-story interviews in seven European Union countries, Biography and social exclusion in Europe: analyses personal struggles against social exclusion to illuminate local milieus and changing welfare regimes and contexts; points to challenging new agendas for European politics and welfare, beyond the rhetoric of communitarianism and the New Deal; vividly illustrates the lived experience and environmental complexity working for and against structural processes of social exclusion; refashions the interpretive tradition as a teaching and research tool linking macro and micro realities. · · Students, academic teachers and professional trainers, practitioners, politicians, policy makers and researchers in applied and comparative welfare fields will all benefit from reading this book.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1t8982m

TWO Suffering the fall of the Berlin Wall: from: Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Torrabadella Laura
Abstract: The research work carried out by Sostris was based on the shared assumption that our subjects were active and resourceful individuals dealing with all kinds of challenges. This chapter puts this basic assumption to the test. Nicolás from Catalonia and Heike from eastern Germany, two well-educated young adults who, geographically speaking, happen to live at opposite ends of the EU, have both come to a dead end in their life journeys – a ‘biographical blockage’. Although we found it demanding enough to try to understand the processes that brought these two young people to this point, we also wanted to

FIVE A tale of class differences in contemporary Britain from: Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Rustin Michael
Abstract: The chapter demonstrates how the life experiences of a small number of individuals can illuminate an important dimension of British social structure. Its particular focus is an ever-present aspect of British society – class¹. The meaning and effects of class are seen through the prism of four people’s experience of enforced redundancy or early retirement during the early 1990s. Two of our subjects belonged to what would normally be described as industrial working-class occupations – both were coal miners. One had worked on the coalface, the other was a craftsman engineer, engaged in maintenance work underground. Their stories show that

SIX The shortest way out of work from: Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Murard Numa
Abstract: Readers of Robert Roberts’ famous book, The classic slum, will remember a photograph showing men standing at the doorstep of a pub, with the legend: “The shortest way out of Manchester”. What these men wish to escape by drinking is not work in itself, the book relates, but the combination of low wages, exhaustion and awful working conditions, together with miseries in everyday life, such as terrible housing, shortage of food, illness, and all the outcomes of these at the levels of public and private life, privacy and intimacy. These men want to escape from their life as a whole,

SEVEN Male journeys into uncertainty from: Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Mestheneos Elizabeth
Abstract: The notion of Ithaki for most men and women has been historically and socially differentiated, the result of socially determined gender expectations and personal and social constraints. Men’s journeys in this century have typically been associated with their lives outside the home and at work (Seccombe, 1986). However, the social and economic changes of the past three decades have made many men feel that the journey to the island is no longer a well-charted one. Journeys in modern capitalist states have become increasingly uncertain. They depend on the ability of the individual to negotiate the Scylla and Charybdis1 of unemployment,

ELEVEN Corporatist structures and cultural diversity in Sweden from: Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Peterson Martin
Abstract: The cases portray some dramatic shifts in Swedish history. The lives of some began between the 1950s and 1970s, when both society and the workplace appeared

THREE Balancing precarious work, entrepreneurship and a new gendered professionalism in migrant self-employment from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Apitzsch Ursula
Abstract: The structural crisis experienced generally in post-industrial society since the last third of the 20th century has been characterised by the continuous dismantling of jobs and workplaces, with no compensation in sight. This has prompted some intellectuals and policy makers to speak in terms of the ‘economically redundant’, in much the same way that industrialisation discourse of the 19th century spoke of a ‘surplus population’¹.

FOUR Considerations on the biographical embeddedness of ethnic entrepreneurship from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Kontos Maria
Abstract: Over recent decades in most European countries, the long-term decline in self-employment rates has significantly reversed (Apitzsch, 2000; Bögenhold, 2000). These ‘new self-employed’ differ from the classical type of self-employed in their motives for entrepreneurship. Whether it is the desire for self-realisation, to achieve an autonomous life plan (Hakim, 1999) or, in the case of collective entrepreneurship, a wish for solidarity in the workplace through self-employment (Vonderach, 1980; Heider, 1996), or the goal of gaining access to income (Bögenhold, 1987), the ‘new self-employment’ seems to have little to do with the classical entrepreneur. Self-employment seems to have become an individual

NINE Maintaining a sense of individual autonomy under conditions of constraint: from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Nagel Ulrike
Abstract: This chapter deals with the biographical situation and coping strategies of highly educated cadres under the authoritarian regime of the former German Democratic Republic (GDR). It draws from a study of work biographies of contemporary East German managers who had previously been economic cadres in the GDR. The second part of the chapter considers methodological difficulties of cross-cultural research, particularly in the arenas of post-socialist transformation research and migration research. The problem of providing an adequate framework of interpretation for the social phenomena of a culture unfamiliar to the researcher will be captured by the notion of lacking the ‘common

ELEVEN The biographical turn in health studies from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Rickard Wendy
Abstract: This chapter offers an overview of existing biographical methods in health studies. The focus comes from my own efforts over the past few years to draw together a picture of some potentialities, possibilities and challenges of using biographical methods in health studies, both in research with marginalised groups and individuals, and in university teaching. I came to the topic initially from British oral history work in the two different – but both highly politicised – areas of HIV and AIDS (for example, Rickard, 1998, 2000) and prostitution (for example, Rickard, 2001; Rickard and Growney, 2001), work that I undertook in

TWELVE Ethical aspects of biographical interviewing and analysis from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Kaźmierska Kaja
Abstract: It may seem obvious to say that biographical research differs from all other sociological research. The differences apply to research techniques, procedures of analysing biographical material and something that can be called a ‘style of work’, which covers the very time-consuming research stages of material collection and analysis. These and many other specific features of biographical research are grounded in theoretical and methodological assumptions which vary for particular types of biographical work. However, the outstanding characteristic of this kind of work is that the research material is biography.

FOURTEEN ‘Bucking and kicking’: from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Gunaratnam Yasmin
Abstract: Concerns about how to work with and across differences of ethnicity, culture, language and religion are central to discussions on policy and practice development in the health and social care services in Britain (Alexander, 1999), where references to the need for cultural ‘awareness’, ‘sensitivity’ and ‘competence’ are commonplace. These concerns have taken on further meaning with the renewed attention to ‘institutional racism’ (Macpherson, 1999) in public sector services, and with the extension of race relations legislation (2000 Race Relations [Amendment] Act) to these services. However, despite the increasing attention being given to the need for culturally sensitive and anti-discriminatory professional

FIFTEEN Biography as empowering practice: from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Walmsley Jan
Abstract: The use of biography and autobiography today, compared with only 20 years ago in the UK, is now ubiquitous in work with vulnerable people in care settings. Biographical materials exist implicitly and explicitly in a variety of forms, from documents (such as case notes, patient histories, and care plans) to more journalistic public accounts in the media following instances of abuse or fatal accident, as well as in service users’ own accounts often presented in the form of life storybooks, or audiovisual recordings. The use of autobiography and biography has also become a common research tool in health and social

SIXTEEN ‘It’s in the way that you use it’: from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Kyllönen Riitta
Abstract: How do social workers use biographies in designing social welfare intervention? How can biographies be useful in analyses of the ideological dimensions of welfare practices? These are questions that I will elucidate in this chapter. My discussion is based on a study that I conducted of how Venetian social welfare services interpret their lone mother recipients’ needs and respond to them¹. First, I locate social welfare services in the feminine subsystem of welfare programmes and discuss how the feminine subtext defines the status of its beneficiaries. I then go on to delineate the analytical framework adopted to examine discursive and

SEVENTEEN Interpreting the needs of homeless men: from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Schlücker Karin
Abstract: Staff members of an advice centre for homeless men were seeking to improve the effectiveness of their service by investigating the ‘needs’ of service users, actual or potential¹. I was approached by one of my students to see if I could help set up and conduct a project without incurring high financial cost, and so the study was initiated within the framework of a university training programme in qualitative research². Exceptionally, the research was set up as a supervised students’ project. In weekly meetings, students planned each step of their research design with their two lecturers and reflected on their

EIGHTEEN In quest of teachers’ professional identity: from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Chanfrault-Duchet Marie-Françoise
Abstract: As a researcher in scientific linguistics, I have worked for 20 years on the life story as a tool for collecting data within the framework of the social sciences. As an academic, I

NINETEEN Narratives, community organisations and pedagogy from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Mortlock Belinda
Abstract: This chapter engages with three categories of narrative: stories about teaching a social research course; students’ stories about their practice as researchers; and the stories of 42 women and men working for community organisations in a city in New Zealand. These stories emerge from a teaching programme in which final-year sociology students are involved in biographical research. Students write a life-story narrative drawn from multiple interviews with a single narrator, as well as a research journal, in which they offer an autobiographical account of their research process. They also submit an analytical essay; that is, a sociological commentary that locates

TWENTY Doctors on an edge: from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) West Linden
Abstract: This chapter derives from in-depth, longitudinal, collaborative and what is termed auto/biographical research among 25 general practitioners (GPs), or family physicians, working in demanding inner-city contexts, including inner London (West, 2001). The research focuses on the learning, role and wellbeing of such GPs during a time of changing roles and expectations, including within the management of healthcare in Britain, and a period of growing criticism over performance and levels of accountability. The serial killer Dr Harold Shipman has replaced, at least in part, the heroic Dr Kildare in the popular mind, and stories of doctors’ mistakes far outweigh the triumphs

TWENTY ONE Intercultural perspectives and professional practice in the university: from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Herrschaft Felicia
Abstract: Attracting students from other countries and world regions has been an objective for German universities for some time, and more recent policies have facilitated the admission of foreign students. Their attendance is understood as contributing towards internationally recognised standards of education. It was always expected that graduates would act as multipliers upon their return to their countries of origin, although currently there is also a perceived need that for a competitive economy, highly qualified graduates should stay on in Germany to work. At the universities, new study courses and credit point systems have been established towards internationally comparable academic degrees.

ONE Introduction from: Localism and neighbourhood planning
Author(s) Bradley Quintin
Abstract: This statement and the legislation that followed it unleashed a new wave of community-based planning in England. As one of a range of rights and powers introduced by the localism agenda of 2011, neighbourhood groups were able to draw up statutory land-use plans, thereby creating a new tier in the planning framework. Five years later, with close to 2,000 neighbourhoods formally engaged in the process, it was clear that neighbourhood planning had emerged as one of the most widespread community initiatives in recent years and one of the most current topics within spatial planning. As such, it demands further investigation,

NINE Assembling neighbourhoods: from: Localism and neighbourhood planning
Author(s) Brownill Sue
Abstract: The issue of power is central to neighbourhood planning, yet it is also one of its most contested and debated areas. Implicit (and often explicit) within these debates is the notion of scale. The spatial metaphors that accompany these debates often suggest the idea of power moving up or down a vertical scale between the neighbourhood and a variety of levels of governance (Bailey and Pill, 2014) or horizontally through networked power relations along the lines of collaborative planning (Healey, 1987; Gallant and Robinson, 2012). These relations are seen as either enabling or constraining the possibilities for neighbourhoods to determine

Book Title: Zhou Zuoren and an Alternative Chinese Response to Modernity- Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Daruvala Susan
Abstract: This book explores the issues of nation and modernity in China by focusing on the work of Zhou Zuoren (1885-1967), one of the most controversial of modern Chinese intellectuals and brother of the writer Lu Xun. Zhou was radically at odds with many of his contemporaries and opposed their nation-building and modernization projects. Through his literary and aesthetic practice as an essayist, Zhou espoused a way of constructing the individual and affirming the individual’s importance in opposition to the normative national subject of most May Fourth reformers. Zhou’s work presents an alternative vision of the nation and questions the monolithic claims of modernity by promoting traditional aesthetic categories, the locality rather than the nation, and a literary history that values openness and individualism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tfj8w7

Book Title: The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time- Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Struve Lynn A.
Abstract: For many years, the Ming and Qing dynasties have been grouped as “late imperial China," a temporal framework that allows scholars to identify and evaluate indigenous patterns of social, economic, and cultural change initiated in the last century of Ming rule that imparted a particular character to state and society throughout the Qing and into the twentieth century. This paradigm asserts the autonomous character of social change in China and has allowed historians to create a “China-centered history." Recently, however, many scholars have begun emphasizing the singular qualities of the Qing. Among the eight contributors to this volume on the formation of the Qing, those who emphasize the Manchu ethos of the Qing tend to see it as part of an early modernity and stress parallel and sometimes mutually reinforcing patterns of political consolidation and cultural integration across Eurasia. Other contributors who examine the Qing formation from the perspective of those who lived through the dynastic transition see the advent of Qing rule as prompting attempts by the Chinese subjects of the new empire to make sense of what they perceived as a historical disjuncture and to rework these understandings into an accommodation to foreign rule. In contrast to the late imperial paradigm, the new ways of configuring the Qing in historical time in both groups of essays assert the singular qualities of the Qing formation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tfj908

Foreword from: The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) von Glahn Richard
Abstract: For three decades, historians of China have situated the Qing dynasty within a “late-imperial” epoch of Chinese history stretching from the midsixteenth to the early twentieth century. The late-imperial paradigm was conceived in reaction to the long-dominant characterization of China before the Opium War as caught in a repetitive “dynastic cycle” that reproduced an essentially inert “traditional” society until China was fully exposed to the forces of modernization issuing from the Western world. The late-imperial framework instead sought to identify and evaluate indigenous patterns of social, economic, and cultural change initiated in the last century of the Ming dynasty that

CHAPTER 2 The Qing Formation, the Mongol Legacy, and the ‘End of History’ in Early Modern Central Eurasia from: The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) Millward James A.
Abstract: This volume, and the conference that produced it, have come at an apt historiographical moment. New data and new interpretations have led in recent years to something of a paradigm shift in how the Qing is viewed by historians of China (Rawski 1996). At the same time, the developing field of world history has been seeking new approaches to the last few centuries of accelerated global communication and integration, approaches that avoid “the West and the rest” dichotomies. Working China into such approaches has not been simple: while comparativists labor to relate China to frameworks based on European historical experience,¹

CHAPTER 5 The Qing Formation and the Early-Modern Period from: The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) Rawski Evelyn S.
Abstract: In this chapter I cite studies of the early Qing period to argue that what might called the “Qing formation” bears many of the hallmarks of the early-modern paradigm used to characterize European history in the seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries. In outlining my reasons for taking this stance, I place this work in the context of the others in this “Early Modern?” part of the volume.

CHAPTER 7 The Diachronics of Early Qing Visual and Material Culture from: The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) Hay Jonathan
Abstract: Not long ago it was common in Western scholarship to portray Qing China as one of the modern West’s several contrasting Others, on the assumption that the Chinese were imprisoned in their own past, from which they would be rescued by the forces of modernization or Westernization. After World War II, this version of the Qing “story” was updated within the framework of a concept of “later Chinese history,” which evolved into the more specific “late-imperial China.” This revision gave the Qing period a new and more sympathetic image as the historical moment when Chinese society and culture contended with

Book Title: Muslim Chinese-Ethnic Nationalism in the People’s Republic
Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Gladney Dru C.
Abstract: This second edition of Dru Gladney’s critically acclaimed study of the Muslim population in China includes a new preface by the author, as well as a valuable addendum to the bibliography, already hailed as one of the most extensive listing of modern sources on the Sino-Muslims. China's ten million Hui are one of the Muslim national minorities recognized by the Chinese government. Dru Gladney's fieldwork among these people has enabled him to identify diverse patterns of interaction between their rising nationalism and state policy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tg5gkz

ONE Muslim Nationalism in China: from: Muslim Chinese
Abstract: Just prior to the bloody suppression of the 1989 democracy movement in China, in the midst of the flood of protesting students and workers who, for a remarkably lengthy moment in history, marched relatively unimpeded across Tiananmen Square and the screens of the world’s television sets, another comparatively unnoticed, but nevertheless significant, procession took place. Starting at the Central Institute for Nationalities, the state-sponsored college that attempts to “educate” some of the most elite representatives of China’s 91 million minority nationalities, the protest began with mainly Hui Muslim students who were joined by representatives of all 10 Muslim nationalities in

Book Title: Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation-From the Late Ming to the Late Qing and Beyond
Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Wei Shang
Abstract: This volume addresses cultural and literary transformation in the late Ming (1550–1644) and late Qing (1851–1911) eras. Although conventionally associated with a devastating sociopolitical crisis, each of these periods was also a time when Chinese culture was rejuvenated. Focusing on the twin themes of crisis and innovation, the seventeen chapters in this book aim to illuminate the late Ming and late Qing as eras of literary-cultural innovation during periods of imperial disintegration; to analyze linkages between the two periods and the radical heritage they bequeathed to the modern imagination; and to rethink the “premodernity" of the late Ming and late Qing in the context of the end of the age of modernism. The chapters touch on a remarkably wide spectrum of works, some never before discussed in English, such as poetry, drama, full-length novels, short stories, tanci narratives, newspaper articles, miscellanies, sketches, familiar essays, and public and private historical accounts. More important, they intersect on issues ranging from testimony about dynastic decline to the negotiation of authorial subjectivity, from the introduction of cultural technology to the renewal of literary convention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tg5hxm

The Daughter’s Vision of National Crisis: from: Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Hu Siao-chen
Abstract: Among literary tancitexts with romantic and domestic inclinations,Tianyuhua天雨花 stands out for its strong political statement. Since the work addresses late Ming political events and ends with a martyrdom, it is often labeled a loyalist text.¹ What may come betweenTianyuhuathe text and the idea of loyalism, however, is the identity of the author. The literarytanciis often said to have a close connection with women, as both readers and writers, and many of the most famous literarytanciare known to have women authors. However, as with narrative fiction, the authorship oftanciis often difficult

Ethics of Form: from: Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Xu Gang Gary
Abstract: The transition from the late Ming to the early Qing witnessed a boom in fictional narratives with explicit sexual content. Notable titles include Ruyijun zhuan如意君傳Jin Ping Mei金瓶梅,Rou putuan肉蒲團,Langshi浪史,Bian er chai弁而釵, andYichun xiangzhi宜春香質. These works variously present obscene versions of court history, tell stories about excessive sexual enjoyment and transgressions by townspeople, focus on male-male sexual relations, or parody scholar-beauty motifs by replacing poetic exchanges with sexual encounters between scholars and beauties. Despite the thematic differences, they have at least one thing in

A New Mode of Literary Production in the Late Qing: from: Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Des Forges Alexander
Abstract: In the mid-1870s, the narrative Xinxi xiantan昕夕閑談 (Idle chats morning and evening; translated from Edward Bulwer-Lytton’sNight and Morning) and other miscellaneous works appeared in installments in various literary periodicals published by the Shenbao Press 申報館 in Shanghai. In 1882, the lengthy novelYesou puyan(A humble rustic’s simple words) was published in installments in the Shanghai newspaperHubao滬報. Later in the 1880s, travel narratives and other accounts in literary Chinese were serialized in the illustrated magazineDianshizhai huabao點石齋畫報¹ These early serial presentations represent an important moment in late Qing publication history; at the time, however

The Narrator’s Voice Before the “Fiction Revolution” from: Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Hanan Patrick
Abstract: The crises at the end of the Ming and Qing dynasties, crises caused by dynastic weakness and the threat of foreign domination, had obvious effects on the writing of vernacular fiction, drawing in new authors and giving rise to new themes and new techniques.¹ Of the two crises, the late Qing was the more complex, with economic and cultural challenges superimposed on the military and political threats. Moreover, two additional factors were at work in this period: the new media of newspapers and journals, and foreign fiction, available in translation for the first time.

Creating Subjectivity in Wu Jianren’s The Sea of Regret from: Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Huters Theodore
Abstract: At least since the publication of Jaroslav PrůŠek’ s path breaking work of the 1950s and 196os on the transformation of narrative modes in modern and late traditional Chinese literature, the question of the introduction of new sorts of subjectivity (or what critics now would be more inclined to refer to as “interiority”)¹ into modern Chinese literature has inspired much further analysis.² Průšek’s work was part of his broader effort to ascertain a world trend in literary writing, a tendency that many later critics would label a function of an unacknowledged impulse to establish the universal validity of narrative developments

Women’s Poetic Witnessing: from: Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Chang Kang-i Sun
Abstract: In traditional Chinese poetry, the task of witnessing-especially on the subject of war and other political issues-was generally assumed to be male territory. But, in fact, the earliest important work of political witnessing in Chinese poetry was attributed to a woman. In a poem written at the end of the Han dynasty (late second century BeE) and entitled “Beifen shi” 悲憤詩 (Poem of lament and indignation), Cai Yan 蔡琰 narrated her unfortunate experiences during the upheavals of the Dong Zhuo rebellion, including her capture by “barbarian” Xiongnu and her many subsequent dilemmas, experiences over which she had little or no

Conclusions: from: Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Hegel Robert E.
Abstract: Although the focus of this chapter is the literary representations of and reactions to the fall of the Ming in the seventeenth century, I will refer to two later ends of time(s) by way of contrast: when read against the fall of real dynasties, unconventional conclusions in Ming and Qing works of historical fiction reveal levels of political engagement and significance often overlooked by other readings. I begin by examining the beginnings of two novels.

Book Title: Transmitters and Creators-Chinese Commentators and Commentaries on the Analects
Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Makeham John
Abstract: The Analects (Lunyu) is one of the most influential texts in human history. As a putative record of Confucius’s (551–479 B.C.E.) teachings and a foundational text in scriptural Confucianism, this classic was instrumental in shaping intellectual traditions in China and East Asia until the early twentieth century. But no premodern reader read only the text of the Analects itself. Rather, the Analects was embedded in a web of interpretation that mediated its meaning. Modern interpreters of the Analects only rarely acknowledge this legacy of two thousand years of commentaries. How well do we understand prominent or key commentaries from this tradition? How often do we read such commentaries as we might read the text on which they comment? Many commentaries do more than simply comment on a text. Not only do they shape the reading of the text, but passages of text serve as pretexts for the commentator to develop and expound his own body of thought. This book attempts to redress our neglect of commentaries by analyzing four key works dating from the late second century to the mid-nineteenth century (a period substantially contemporaneous with the rise and decline of scriptural Confucianism): the commentaries of He Yan (ca. 190–249); Huang Kan (488–545); Zhu Xi (1130–1200); and Liu Baonan (1791–1855) and Liu Gongmian (1821–1880).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tg5j9s

CHAPTER 1 He Yan, Authorship, and Xuanxtie Thought from: Transmitters and Creators
Abstract: Collected Explanations of the Analects (hereafter Collected Explanations)¹ is a corporate work of unusual importance and complexity. It is important because it is the representative writing of the “old commentary” tradition of the Analects, as opposed to the “new commentary” tradition represented by Zhu Xi’s Collected Annotations on the Analects. Collected Explanations preserves a selection of some of the earliest commentaries ever written for the Analects, including substantial selections attributed to two of the earliest commentators, Kong Anguo and Bao Xian 包咸 (6 B.C.–A.D. 65).² Although Zheng Xuan was arguably the single most influential commentator between the Han and

CHAPTER 4 The Philosophical Character of Elucidation of the Meaning from: Transmitters and Creators
Abstract: Freed from the constraints imposed by the “closed system” that had been both the sustainer and the stifler of much Han classical scholarship, thinkers increasingly used the commentary as a vehicle for expressing individual thought from the early third century on. Although all interpretation can be considered a creative act,¹ when a commentary introduces a philosophical platform or series of platforms that are foreign to or undeveloped in the original text, it becomes more than an appendage to another body of writing and a work in its own right. Some of the more prominent examples of this written in the

Introduction from: A Patterned Past
Abstract: In 638 B.C.E., in an episode that was to become a matter of some difficulty to Confucian commentators, an army from the southern state of Chu defeated a force of the state of Song on the banks of the river Hong. Song’s ruler, Duke Xiang (r. 650-637), had worked for some years to establish himself as hegemon ( ba) of the central states, a role left vacant by the death of Duke Huan of Qi (r. 685-643).¹ His efforts had necessarily brought him into conflict with Chu, the threat against which the earlier alliance had been organized.

THREE Intelligibility in the Extra-human World from: A Patterned Past
Abstract: Although speakers in historiography do much of their reasoning through citation and application of the Shiand other texts, they also call on many types of knowledge beyond the reach of inherited language. TheZuozhuanandGuoyushow a more sustained interest in the workings of the natural and supernatural worlds than any extant earlier works and go well beyond early Zhou texts in reasoning about the cosmos and its principles. When speeches incorporate this sort of knowledge, they put it to political and moral use, if only because the position defined for speeches within this system requires such use.

EIGHT Writing and the Ends of History from: A Patterned Past
Abstract: To narrate is to encode an ideology. Fredric Jameson, applying an insight of Levi-Strauss to the study of narrative, has written that “ideology is not something which informs or invests symbolic production; rather the aesthetic act is itself ideological, and the production of aesthetic or narrative form is to be seen as an ideological act in its own right, with the function of inventing imaginary or formal ‘solutions’ to unresolvable social contradictions.”¹ Both in selecting material and in setting the terms of its intelligibility, narrators uphold certain views on the workings of the world while rejecting others as wrong or

6. A Trinitarian Account of Divine Simplicity from: Divine Simplicity
Abstract: The previous chapters demonstrated that divine simplicity developed in opposition to false teaching (e.g., gnostics, Eunomius), subsequently received further development and clarification (by, for example, Basil, Gregory of Nyssa, and others), and remained a standard Christian doctrine until later in the nineteenth century. Its biblical roots, implicit throughout the tradition, were identified in the last chapter as deriving from scripture’s habits of (1) using the many names or descriptions of God’s nature and (2) ascribing God’s various works to the indivisible operations of the Trinity ad extra. If this is correct, then the critics of divine simplicity have misunderstood the

3. Faith as Movement in Relation to the Lectures on Genesis from: Faith in a Hidden God
Abstract: Luther’s concept of faith as trust in God’s promises stands in opposition to the medieval categories of faith in which he had been schooled, particularly those views that posited faith to be contingent upon a particular knowledge on the part of the believer. Medieval theologians, reading the Abrahamic narratives in light of the Pauline claim that Abraham was justified by faith, attempted to define precisely the kind of faith that had justified Abraham (and by extension promises to justify Christians): unformed or formed by love; acquired by works or infused by God; implicit or explicit in the mind’s assent to

4. Kierkegaard’s Reading of Genesis 22: from: Faith in a Hidden God
Abstract: This chapter examines Fear and Tremblingas a work of exegesis in order to reveal consistencies, ambiguities, and tensions in the way Kierkegaard’s pseudonymous author exegetes Genesis 22 in relation to claims about Christian faith as it relates to ethics, reason, and speech. After an examination of the historical, social, and intellectual forces that influenced Kierkegaard during the time of the pseudonymous authorship, the chapter engages in a close reading ofFear and Trembling, examining the ways in which Johannes de Silentio uses variations, silences, and obscurities to enhance the difficulties and complexities inherent in the story. Insisting that it

Book Title: "Without Ceasing to be a Christian"-A Catholic and Protestant Assess the Christological Contribution of Raimon Panikkar
Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): ROBINSON BOB
Abstract: Since his death in 2010, there has been continuing and growing interest in the life, vision, and thought of the late Spanish-Indian mystical theologian Raimon Panikkar. As well as offering both a personal affirmation and critique of Panikkar‘s thought from a Catholic and Protestant perspective, the work compares and contrasts him with a range of Western and Indian theologians, both Catholic and Protestant, and outlines the possibilities of learning from Panikkar in an ecumenical context.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tm7h06

1. Unknown Jesus or Unknown Christ? from: "Without Ceasing to be a Christian"
Author(s) RANSTROM ERIK
Abstract: This chapter exposits and evaluates Panikkar’s Christology of religions from the beginning of his publishing career until the first edition of the Unknown Christ of Hinduismin 1964.¹ Unlike his later thought, which is more consistent on a host of philosophical and theological issues, a close look at his early christological writings reveals tension in terms of how to properly formulate the relationship between Christ and the religions.² More specifically, the broad outlines of two distinct approaches to Christ and the religions are evident during this early period, one of which has immense implications for a retrieval of Panikkar’s work.

2. The “Orthodox” Creativity of Panikkar’s Early Dialogue with Hinduism from: "Without Ceasing to be a Christian"
Author(s) RANSTROM ERIK
Abstract: This chapter will explore Panikkar’s little-known comparative theological study of Hindu and Christian worship, Le mystère du culte dans l’hindouisme et le christianisme. The basis of the work was first given as a presentation at the thirty-seventh World Eucharistic Congress in Munich, Germany, in 1960.¹ The theme of the international theological conference which took place concurrently with the Congress was “Worship and Man Today.”² Panikkar’s paper was “conceived as a contribution in the Indian sphere”³ and then re-written and expanded for a book. The first edition was written by Panikkar in German⁴ and later translated into French in 1970. The

3. A Critical Reading of Panikkar’s Cosmotheandric Christology from: "Without Ceasing to be a Christian"
Author(s) RANSTROM ERIK
Abstract: This chapter features a systematization of Panikkar’s later Christology, which is characterized by an escalation of the incipient pluralist trends found in the first edition of the Unknown Christ of Hinduism. It is also marked by an utter departure from the conviction that Jesus’s person and work is constitutively key to the relationship between God and the world. The chapter will also evaluate Panikkar’s later christological development based upon priorities and principles earlier drawn from “Meditaciόn sobre Melquisedec” andLe mystère du culte, as well as various systematic theologians. I will also set Panikkar’s later theology within a wider personal

4 Giving Up the Ghost: from: Preaching Must Die!
Abstract: Complications ensue when Cobb’s deceased wife, Mal, appears. She begins to haunt his efforts, threatening to unravel his work from within (himself). The nearly impossible task of inception

Conclusion: from: Preaching Must Die!
Abstract: This coilof which Hamlet speaks has done some work for us throughout this book. The word enjoys a peculiar etymology, hence its facility for

Introduction from: World Christianity as Public Religion
Author(s) BARRETO RAIMUNDO C.
Abstract: This is a book about the public nature of religion in world perspective. It is not confined to the emerging field of public theology. Instead, it assumes that there is a public reality where public theology emerges. In an important study of Latin American liberation theology, Brazilian-French scholar Michael Lowy distinguished between liberation theology as a body of literature and the milieu in which it was formed, i.e., the broad network of social movements whose praxis gave birth to liberation theology. He called that broader movement “liberationist Christianity.”¹ According to him, liberationist Christianity preexists liberation theology. The latter is the

1 William Stringfellow: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: In a certain sense, from his moving pulpit and podium, he summoned the attentive of a generation to this theology, bringing the principalities back into the light of day and onto the map of biblical social ethics. Many would know his work largely second-hand, through the deepening work of Walter Wink, whom he also nourished and mentored (and who also in

5 Barbed Wire and Beyond: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: Author’s Note: Nuclear weapons may be thought the preeminent principality. They are the final word in escalation dominance—and so the current emblem of the domination system, the very power of death targeting the planet as creation. My own practical understanding of the principalities and powers was worked out, book-length, precisely in their guise.¹ Given that account, they are actually under-represented in this volume, yet they are the place to begin. When I wrote the following about them in 1983,² I was preparing with friends for an Easter morning liturgical action at a Strategic Air Command Base in Michigan. Because

9 Confronting the Drug Powers; Freeing the Captives (1992) from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: William Stringfellow, the theologian who may be justly credited with reviving in this country a theology of the principalities and powers, claimed to be first put onto them by his friends and legal clients in Harlem who experienced, among many other things, the mafia and its network of runners and dealers as a predatory force invading their families and neighborhoods. His years of lucid reflection began in a concrete sense with their intuitive theological street wisdom.

14 Readers before Profits: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: The situation is this: Last July, six unions representing 2,600 workers were forced to strike when the company demanded another round of deep job cuts and refused to operate under the old contracts while bargaining new. Almost immediately it announced the hiring of “permanent replacement workers.”

15 Labor Unions and the Principalities (1998) from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: The day before his death, in a prescient sermon immediately famous, Rev. Martin Luther King Jr. urged pastors and laypeople to support the striking sanitation workers of Memphis, Tennessee, by turning to Luke’s parable of the Good Samaritan. In summoning the congregation to break the court injunction

1. The Myth of the Domination System from: Engaging the Powers
Abstract: Violence is the ethos of our times. It is the spirituality of the modern world. It has been accorded the status of a religion, demanding from its devotees an absolute obedience to death. Its followers are not aware, however, that the devotion they pay to violence is a form of religious piety. Violence is so successful as a myth precisely because it does not seem to be mythic in the least. Violence simply appears to be the nature of things. It is what works. It is inevitable, the last and, often, the first resort in conflicts. It is embraced with

[Part III. Introduction] from: Engaging the Powers
Abstract: The Powers are not incorrigible. What fell in time can be redeemed in time. Even in their fallenness, institutions are able to some degree to preserve freedoms and secure justice. The flight of the communist bloc from totalitarianism shows how deep is the longing of the human spirit for the liberty to speak, travel, work, and pursue creative initiatives.

11. Beyond Just War and Pacifism from: Engaging the Powers
Abstract: The new reality Jesus proclaimed was nonviolent. That much is clear, not just from the Sermon on the Mount, but from his entire life and teaching and, above all, the way he faced his death. His was not merely a tactical or pragmatic nonviolence seized upon because nothing else would have “worked” against the Roman Empire’s near monopoly on violence. Rather, he saw nonviolence as a direct corollary of the nature of God and of the new reality emerging in the world from God. In a verse quoted more than any other from the New Testament during the church’s first

Book Title: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations- Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): GLEACH FREDERIC W.
Abstract: The Histories of Anthropology Annual presents diverse perspectives on the discipline's history within a global context, with a goal of increasing awareness and use of historical approaches in teaching, learning, and conducting anthropology. The series includes critical, comparative, analytical, and narrative studies involving all aspects and subfields of anthropology.Volume 11, Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations, examines the work and influence of scholars, including Franz Boas, Ruth Benedict, John Dewey, Randolph Bourne, A. Irving Hallowell, and Edward Westermarck, and anthropological practices and theories in Vietnam and Ukraine as well as the United States. Contributions also focus on the influence of Western thought and practice on anthropological traditions, as well as issues of relativism, physical anthropology, language, epistemology, ethnography, and social synergy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1trkjsq

1 Franz Boas as Theorist: from: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) DARNELL REGNA
Abstract: Franz Boas is uniformly credited as the dominant figure of American anthropology from the late nineteenth century to the Second World War. His stature as a public intellectual is acknowledged to have extended far beyond the borders of the discipline he established. Nonetheless, few contemporary anthropologists actually read Boas or have a clear sense of what he wrote or thought. Sadly, little of the enormous Boas scholarship is based on historicist engagement with his work. In the seven decades since his death, the theoretical preoccupations of anthropologists have shifted more than once. Furthermore, the world itself has changed such that

2 “We Are Also One in Our Concept of Freedom” from: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) HARKIN MICHAEL E.
Abstract: Franz Boas is known for his political activism, which both shaped his anthropology and was informed by it. In “Anthropology as Kulturkampf,” George Stocking (1992: 92–113) argues for understanding Boasian anthropology within the framework of progressive and reformist politics, which shifted during various phases of Boas’s life. As I have argued elsewhere, I believe that this trajectory continued beyond Boas’s lifetime and that American anthropology of the late twentieth and twenty-first centuries has become identified with a particular political worldview: what Richard Rorty (1983) called “postmodernist bourgeois liberalism.” It is important to note that while Rorty claims Dewey as

6 Continuity and Dislocations: from: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) BOWERS EVELYN J.
Abstract: This chapter reviews the contribution A. Irving Hallowell (1892–1974) made to the study of human evolution and biological/physical anthropology (Shapiro 1967:608). Hallowell’s work in human evolution bridges the pre-and postmolecular periods in biological anthropology and the evolutionary and postevolutionary periods in cultural anthropology. Because of this transition, some central elements important to our understanding of human evolution may have been lost, that is, those elements of human evolution that are difficult to quantify or to be “read” directly out of biology. Among these are the more ideational dimensions of culture—precisely the elements of culture that cultural anthropologists have

8 Westermarck and the Diverse Roots of Relativism from: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) LYONS ANDREW P.
Abstract: Cultural relativism is arguably an older concept than institutionalized anthropology. There are foreshadowings of it in the work of Herodotus, Protagoras, Sextus Empiricus, Johann Gottfried Herder, and Wilhelm von Humboldt. However, the genealogy of the concept in modern American anthropology may, as Regna Darnell shows (2001: 39, 40), be correctly traced back to Boas’s 1889 article, “On Alternating Sounds,” which drew attention to the ethnocentrism that can result when scholars from our speech community apperceive one sound in another supposedly primitive language as two alternating sounds (e.g., Inuit mvasmandv) and claim that speakers of that language

12 Between Ethnos and Nation: from: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) DAVIS BRADLEY CAMP
Abstract: The Vietnamese term dân tộcevades easy translation. Variously rendered as “nation,” “nationality,” or “ethnicity,”dân tộcconnects historical and contemporary Vietnamese discourses of ethnic difference and national belonging to two intellectual projects. The first, most closely associated with reformers in Meiji Japan (1868–1912), involved the rendering of European philosophical terminology into the logographic script common to Japanese, Chinese, Korean, and Vietnamese. The second, which occurred after the Meiji period and during French colonial rule in Southeast Asia, engaged directly with the notions of nation and gens in the work of Rousseau and Montesquieu. By the 1950s, with political

13 Arthur Nole (1940–2015): from: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) MCILWRAITH THOMAS
Abstract: Arthur Nole, Tahltan Indigenous elder and storyteller, died on January 3, 2015, after breaking his leg while chopping wood. He lived a life indicative of the complexities of Indigenous lives and, particularly, the meshing of traditional activities and wage work. He was a dedicated moose hunter and passionate hunting guide, and he was tremendously interested in the telling and recording of Tahltan history. His later life was dominated by family activities and motivated by teaching young people the traditional skills of camping, hunting, and life on the land.

Discussion in Doha: from: God's Creativity and Human Action
Author(s) MOSHER LUCINDA
Abstract: Georgetown university’s school of Foreign Service in Qatar (SFS-Q) provides a congenial atmosphere for appreciative conversation—the sort of frank and spirited exchange at the core of the Building Bridges Seminar. In 2015 SFS-Q provided us a spacious lounge with comfortable furniture and ample space for buffet-style meals, an adjacent meeting room large enough for closed lectures and plenary discussions to take place “in the round,” and, nearby, a small classroom for each of our four dialogue groups. It is in these predetermined groups, balanced by religion and gender as best as can be, that the main work of the

CHAPTER 5 Impressions: from: The Film Museum Practice and Film Historiography
Abstract: In 1995, during the Filmmuseum workshop, ‘Disorderly Order’, mentioned above, Meyer (cited in Hertogs and Klerk de, 1996: 18) asked the participating film historians the following question: ‘[S]hould we preserve these films just as we find them, or should we try to get as close to the original as possible?’ Film museums and restorers are confronted with this choice with each restoration: either to restore the imaginary ‘original version’ of the film or to make the best possible duplicate based on what the starting material looks like at the time of restoration. What is fascinating is the way these two

CHAPTER 8 Framing Programmes from: The Film Museum Practice and Film Historiography
Abstract: ‘Programming allows works to contaminate one another’ 34 – this quotation by Dominique Paini (1992: 25), former director of the Cinémathèque française, sums up the following chapter in a nutshell: namely, the way films ‘contaminate’ one another when shown together in the same programme. A similar phenomenon occurs in museum displays and exhibitions. In the field of museology, Barbara Kirshenblatt-Gimblett (1998) has coined the phrase ‘incontext presentation’ to describe how contagion works in these settings. An in-context presentation is created by means of a number of different strategies. The first entails positioning objects adjacent to one another, connecting them spatially; this

CHAPTER 9 Performances from: The Film Museum Practice and Film Historiography
Abstract: Each film museum is embedded in a history of performances. Sometimes they attempt to deny this history, showing their films in screening rooms stripped of any historical reference. In other cases, however, they choose to show films in a ‘historically accurate’ way, which often results in hybrid forms of display, a mixture of historical reconstruction and modern experimentation. What seems central to the choice of display at the Filmmuseum is the way it defined its films – as individual works of art, to be displayed and viewed in isolation, or as examples of the way films were presented in the past

Book Title: Genre Theory and Historical Change-Theoretical Essays of Ralph Cohen
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Rowlett John L.
Abstract: Ralph Cohen was highly regarded as the visionary founding editor of New Literary History, but his own theoretical essays appeared in such a scattering of publications that their conceptual originality, underlying coherence, and range of application have not been readily apparent. This new selection of twenty essays, many published here for the first time, offers a synthesis of Cohen's vital work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1v2xtv6

The Origins of a Genre: from: Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: The problem I have set for myself—the origins of a genre: descriptive poetry—belongs to the area of historical poetics (within the larger domain of historical semiotics). Such an inquiry I take to be central to the question: How do literary works relate to one another diachronically or synchronically? The genesis of a genre presupposes that “genre” is a proper and valuable theoretical concept; I shall argue that it is, but it seems reasonable to draw attention to two types of antigenre argument. The first is that every work has its own form and is important only to the

Genre Theory, Literary History, and Historical Change from: Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: In the last half of the twentieth century generic theory has reemerged as a critical force, in part owing to discussions of genre by Northrop Frye, R.S. Crane, and Rosalie Colie. More recent genre theory has reexamined the novel (Michael McKeon’s The Origins of the English Novel1660–1740), the essay (Alexander J. Butrym’sEssays on the Essay: Redefining the Genre), the short story (Susan Lohafer and Jo Ellyn Clarey’sShort Story Theory at a Crossroads), satire, elegy, lyric, tragedy, and others. New theories of genre had been advanced by Mikhail Bakhtin in his work on Dostoevsky and in translations

Innovation and Variation: from: Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: The study of literary history inevitably involves the study of literary change, and any explanation of change must distinguish among the types of change that are possible. These include changes within the work of a single writer, changes among different writers who share common ends, like the Scriblerus group (this can include, as well, changes in what are called “schools,” “movements,” and “periods”), changes in the forms of genres, changes in style, changes in critical interpretation. It is apparent that the term “change” identified with these many different literary situations—and they are not all that one can name—needs

Historical Knowledge and Literary Understanding from: Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: My argument shall be that the historical study of literature is a necessary condition for any literary analysis. As critics and scholars, we invoke historical assumptions in our practice, our methods, and our theory. The problem, therefore, is to present a conception of historical knowledge and literary understanding that will acknowledge this phenomenon and make practice consonant with it. And to do this, one must begin by recognizing the historical nature of literary study. In this essay I shall be using examples from my own work in progress—a study of literary change from Milton to Keats—and although I

6 Social and linguistic change in French: from: Imagining the popular in contemporary French culture
Author(s) Armstrong Nigel
Abstract: The phenomenon of what might be called ‘social convergence’– the nexus of attitudes that in the last four decades or so has tended to erode hierarchical structures, emphasise the worth of the individual, promote the values of youth and working-class culture and accelerate the ‘decline of deference’– tends to be assumed as a given in the study of popular culture. Social convergence or levelling has had important effects on language in this period. In language, social convergence can be seen as standing in opposition to the ‘ideology of the standard’, a term in sociolinguistics used to refer to the attitude

Book Title: Undoing Art- Publisher: Quodlibet
Author(s): Delville Michel
Abstract: What do Stéphane Mallarmé, Antonin Artaud, Meret Oppenheim, Asger Jorn, Yoko Ono, Tom Phillips and Martin Arnold have in common? Whereas a wealth of critics have diagnosed contemporary art’s preoccupations with madness, depression and self-abuse as well as its tendency to cultivate an (anti-)aesthetics of the negative, the excremental and the abject (say, from the Vienna Action Group to Serrano, McCarthy or Delvoye), much less attention has been paid to how modern and contemporary artists and public have thrived on the destruction, disfiguration and obliteration of work by the artists and/or by that of others. From Artaud’s «terminal» notebooks to the recent upsurge in «erasure poetics», the history of «undoing» art deserves to be recounted in a positive mode and rescued from popular narratives of the decline and death of the avant-garde.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1vxm83d

Disownings from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: Ken Russell, working with Derek Jarman, disowns his film with Nureyev; years before, Antonin Artaud, angry with the way in which his film La Coquille et le clergyman (The Shell and the Clergyman)had been directed by Germaine Dulac, disowned it as a badly-interpreted product of his mind. Of course group disownings go even further: Artaud, and then later Salvador Dalí were disowned, as was even the best surrealist poet of them all, Robert Desnos, by the surrealist group. Group disownings remain celebrated, exclusions, just as celebrated as are inclusions.

Obliterations and Deviations from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.D.: And then, of course, there are acts of disowning, refusal and obliteration perpetrated by artists upon the works of other artists. Among these, the success story of erasure poetics deserves our attention, if only because it has been ignored or relegated to the margins of literary and art history. Erasurism is rooted as much in contemporary philosophy’s deconstructionist turn as in Duchampian found objects and Situationist détournements, of which many of the examples examined below constitute both an extension and a critique. Recent and current developments in erasure art are closely associated with visual artists and writers (many of

Erasurism from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.D.: Paul Ricoeur memorably identified Marx, Nietzsche and Freud as the father-founders of a «school of suspicion» 10which urges readers, critics and artists to unveil the strategies by which art conceals its own constructedness and disguises its ideological complicity with dominant structures of power. Should erasure art be considered as a casualty of the «terminal case of irony» in which the humanities find themselves at the present time, driven as they are by an «uncontrollable urge to put everything in scare quotes»11? Even though erasurism does not necessarily set out to destroy the artwork per se (and thus can be

Pseudonyms and De/Retitlings from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: Among the varied coverups, the art of the pseudonym works a kind of subterfuge. Blaise Pascal wrote as five different persons, depending what he was writing: mathematics, imagined letters, and so on, and the major othering writer is without any doubt Fernando Pessoa, who had at least seventy-five other characters, known as «heteronyms»: among them Alberto Caeiro, and Ricardo Reis, each of which had a different character, history, and style.

Art from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.D.: The poems in RADI OSresult from the complete deletion of the «unwanted» words, leaving no trace of the original text except for the layout of the page (the surviving words still appear where they belong in Milton’s poem). Other erasure poets have opted for a format which allows the reader total or partial access to the original work. Jen Bervin’sNets, a rewriting of Shakespeare’sSonnets, relegates Shakespeare’s poems to a faded background text «upon which» the selected words appear in bold ink. Unlike Johnson’s, Bervin’s «reduction» does not stress the elemental and the natural but, rather, tends

Performative Undoings from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: So when the undoing is built into the work of art, is it not still art? Think of the slashes of Fontana into his canvasses, think of Serrano’s «Piss Christ» with the scandal of the title and the figuration, even simply imagined, built right in. Yes, I would say, it is art. Some of the most spectacular spectacles of undoing in recent times are the work of Jay Critchley, both in his home performances, at 7 Carnes Lane, off Pleasant Street, in Provincetown, Massachusetts, and also all over the town. For example, the demolition of a bathhouse which caused

Attacks from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: October 8, 2012, there was a great deal of excitement about a man who scrawled stuff on a Rothko painting over the weekend at the Tate Modern Museum, and led to someone’s listing previous defacements of works of art. Let me meditate first on the idea of defacement: is it not also bestowing a new face on the work of art however celebrated the latter might be? A new face, as in Monument Valley, or Easter Island, something unexpected? Might we not in some moments prefer the unexpected to the ho-hum expected? Not that a Rothko is ever boringly

Redoing as Rethinking from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: The year 1985 finds another attack on a work of art, and this one on a piece celebrating an exchange between the heavens and a bed. This inadmissible work celebrates an ultimately provocative display of a woman, not just naked but with her delicate slippers tossed to the ground, her ultra-luxurious thick and gold-bordered rug thrown over a bedside table, and the bestowing angel in the heavens: against Rembrandt’s Danaea man hurled acid, and destroyed about 30 per cent of the canvas. The conceptual artist Kathleen Gilje in her series ofRestorings, this one calledDanaë: Restored (after

And How About Meta-Stuff? from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: «Katz, a détournement of Maus, has opened to a new interpretation of Art Spiegelman’s work, basically by changing every animal-faced character into a cat-faced one. Then, as Spiegelman published MetaMaus, METAKATZ was realised as a collective essai about copyright and his exceptions, like detournement, collage and sampling» 58.

States of Decay from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.D.: If we are looking for artworks which foreground the potential for self-erasure or self-destruction of the image we have to turn to experimental photography and film. In many ways, Stan Brakhage’s 1963 «Mothlight» bridges the conceptual gap between erasure techniques and (self-) destruction per se. «Mothlight» differs from Brakhage trademark hand painted films in that it incorporates insects wings, petals, leaves and blades of grass pasted upon the strips of celluloid. The director’s account of how «Mothlight» originates in personal suffering deserves to be quoted in full: «Here is a film that I made out of a deep grief.

Undoings of the Self from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: Human and ritualistic self-destruction works the same way: when you are an artist, and you jump of a bridge into water, it is surely undoing your art. So Robert Schumann trying to drown himself in the Rhine in 1854 before he was taken to an asylum where he stopped composing alto-gether, Paul Celan going off the Pont Mirabeau in Paris - of all bridges, given Apollinaire’s famous poem about its remaining! - and Ghérasim Luca off the same bridge, and then John Berryman in 1972 in Minnesota (see The New York Review of Books, June 4, 2015 for the

Self-Undoing Performed from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.D.: David Nebreda’s life and work have pushed the boundaries of undoing (and of abject, stercoral hunger art) to unprecedented extremes.

Undoings of the Other from: Undoing Art
Abstract: To say nothing, but I’d like to say something, about the woman who so adored him, who so brilliantly translated his work, and who helped him with his English, that is Dorothy Strachey Bussy, the sister of Lytton Strachey. She tore nothing up, set fire to nothing, but spent a good part of her

No Longer Art from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: A thought-provoking exhibition of artwork deemed, by insurance companies, no longer art, which is the title of the show, documented by John Reed, at the Arthur Ross Architecture Gallery at Columbia University in December of 2012. The first work he saw displayed was a 19 thcentury painting of French country life, calledThe Harvest (La Moisson), by Alexandre Dubuisson. The large gash in its surface meant that it could not be insured, which was the point of the show: thus its title «No Longer Art».

AVANT-PROPOS ET REMERCIEMENTS from: Fiction, propagande, témoignage, réalité
Abstract: Il s’agit d’un ensemble de micro-essais relativement proches les uns des autres. En effet, bien que lisibles d’une façon autonome, ces cinq réflexions isolées entretiennent des liens importants. Nourries de redites et de recommencements, elles dessinent un espace critique caractérisé par une cohésion qui n’est pas nécessairement continue. Cet espace critique a d’ailleurs l’ambition de constituer — par le biais d’une série d’approximations successives — un véritable work in

Book Title: A Political Companion to James Baldwin- Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Deneen Patrick J.
Abstract: This volume not only considers Baldwin's works within their own historical context, but also applies the author's insights to recent events such as the Obama presidency and the Black Lives Matter movement, emphasizing his faith in the connections between the past and present. These incisive essays will encourage a new reading of Baldwin that celebrates his significant contributions to political and democratic theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1vxm8w9

Series Foreword from: A Political Companion to James Baldwin
Author(s) Deneen Patrick J.
Abstract: America’s literature is distinctive because it is, above all, intended for a democratic citizenry. In contrast to eras when an author would aim to inform or influence a select aristocratic audience, in democratic times, public influence and education must resonate with a more expansive, less leisured, and diverse audience to be effective. The great works of America’s literary tradition

6 The Negative Political Theology of James Baldwin from: A Political Companion to James Baldwin
Author(s) Lloyd Vincent
Abstract: Religious language, ideas, and images pervade the essays, plays, stories, and novels of James Baldwin. A product of Black Pentecostalism and a teenage preaching prodigy, Baldwin describes his writing style as influenced by the King James Bible and the storefront church.¹ Verses from the Bible and snippets of gospel music pervade Baldwin’s texts. Yet religion also appears in Baldwin’s work as something he has overcome, a distasteful encounter with authoritarianism that he passed through to reach his present secular, democratic enlightenment. If this is the case, the religious language that appears in Baldwin’s texts could be read as rhetorical flourish,

7 Go Tell It on the Mountain: from: A Political Companion to James Baldwin
Author(s) McWilliams Wilson Carey
Abstract: James Baldwin was a constant American despite all his years of expatriation, a native son whose subjects and audiences were primarily American, even when (as in Giovanni’s Room) he set his story overseas. He was a fervent critic of the American regime precisely because he was an anguished lover, and nothing is clearer in Baldwin’s work than the depth of his concern for American political life and culture.

Book Title: Negative Cosmopolitanism-Cultures and Politics of World Citizenship after Globalization
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): TOMSKY TERRI
Abstract: From climate change, debt, and refugee crises to energy security, environmental disasters, and terrorism, the events that lead nightly newscasts and drive public policy demand a global perspective. In the twentieth century the world sought solutions through formal institutions of international governance such as the United Nations, the International Criminal Court, and the World Bank, but present-day responses to global realities are often more provisional, improvisational, and contingent. Tracing this uneven history in order to identify principal actors, contesting ideologies, and competing rhetoric, Negative Cosmopolitanism challenges the Kantian ideal of cosmopolitanism as the precondition for a perpetual global peace. Uniting literary scholars with researchers working on contemporary problems and those studying related issues of the past – including slavery, industrial capitalism, and corporate imperialism – essays in this volume scrutinize the entanglement of cosmopolitanism within expanding networks of trade and global capital from the eighteenth century to the present. By doing so, the contributors pinpoint the ways in which whole populations have been unwillingly caught up in a capitalist reality that has little in common with the earlier ideals of cosmopolitanism. A model for provoking new and necessary questions about neoliberalism, biopolitics, colonialism, citizenship, and xenophobia, Negative Cosmopolitanism establishes a fresh take on the representation of globalization and modern life in history and literature. Contributors Include Timothy Brennan (University of Minnesota), Juliane Collard (University of British Columbia), Mike Dillon (California State University, Fullerton), Sneja Gunew (University of British Columbia), Dina Gusejnova (University of Sheffield), Heather Latimer (University of British Columbia), Pamela McCallum (University of Calgary), Geordie Miller (Dalhousie University), Dennis Mischke (Universität Stuttgart), Peter Nyers (McMaster University), Liam O’Loughlin (Pacific Lutheran University), Crystal Parikh (New York University), Mark Simpson (University of Alberta), Melissa Stephens (Vancouver Island University), and Paul Ugor (Illinois State University).From climate change, debt, and refugee crises to energy security, environmental disasters, and terrorism, the events that lead nightly newscasts and drive public policy demand a global perspective. In the twentieth century the world sought solutions through formal institutions of international governance such as the United Nations, the International Criminal Court, and the World Bank, but present-day responses to global realities are often more provisional, improvisational, and contingent. Tracing this uneven history in order to identify principal actors, contesting ideologies, and competing rhetoric, Negative Cosmopolitanism challenges the Kantian ideal of cosmopolitanism as the precondition for a perpetual global peace. Uniting literary scholars with researchers working on contemporary problems and those studying related issues of the past – including slavery, industrial capitalism, and corporate imperialism – essays in this volume scrutinize the entanglement of cosmopolitanism within expanding networks of trade and global capital from the eighteenth century to the present. By doing so, the contributors pinpoint the ways in which whole populations have been unwillingly caught up in a capitalist reality that has little in common with the earlier ideals of cosmopolitanism. A model for provoking new and necessary questions about neoliberalism, biopolitics, colonialism, citizenship, and xenophobia, Negative Cosmopolitanism establishes a fresh take on the representation of globalization and modern life in history and literature. Contributors Include Timothy Brennan (University of Minnesota), Juliane Collard (University of British Columbia), Mike Dillon (California State University, Fullerton), Sneja Gunew (University of British Columbia), Dina Gusejnova (University of Sheffield), Heather Latimer (University of British Columbia), Pamela McCallum (University of Calgary), Geordie Miller (Dalhousie University), Dennis Mischke (Universität Stuttgart), Peter Nyers (McMaster University), Liam O’Loughlin (Pacific Lutheran University), Crystal Parikh (New York University), Mark Simpson (University of Alberta), Melissa Stephens (Vancouver Island University), and Paul Ugor (Illinois State University).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1w0ddq5

7 Representing Migrant Labour in Contemporary Britain: from: Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) McCallum Pamela
Abstract: In the early twenty-first century a horrific event drew attention to the precarious situation of migrant workers in northern Europe and Britain. On 5 February 2004, on the beach of Morecambe Bay in northwest England, twenty-three Chinese cockle pickers drowned when gangmasters sent them out onto the sands late in the day.¹ They may have ignored the high winds, the treacherously swift local tides, and the quicksands, or, strangers to the area, they may not have known. On the way onto the sands, the Chinese workers passed groups of returning local cockle pickers who, alert to the predicted high tide,

CHAPTER 5 REVALUATION from: Nietzsche's Great Politics
Abstract: With Thus Spoke Zarathustra, Nietzsche has in his grasp his three fundamental philosophical notions: the eternal return, will to power, and overman. The “thought of eternal return,” which Nietzsche considers to be the “basic idea of the work,” the “highest possible formula of affirmation,” came to him on a fateful day in August 1881. In Sils-Maria, “6,000 feet beyond people and time,” on his daily walk around Silvaplana Lake, Nietzsche “stopped near Surlei by a huge, pyramidal boulder”—the rock of the eternal return—where the thought came to him (EH Z 1). Projecting himself back a couple of months

CONCLUSION: from: Nietzsche's Great Politics
Abstract: one effect of Nietzsche’s work, as that of others, may be to make us question how far the criteria we think we have are actually expressed in anything that actually happens. What we have to do, rather, is to take up those elements of Nietzsche’s thought that seem to make most sense to us in terms of such things as our ethical understanding, our understanding of history, and the relations of

Book Title: Class in the Composition Classroom-Pedagogy and the Working Class
Publisher: Utah State University Press
Author(s): THELIN WILLIAM H.
Abstract: As community colleges and universities seek more effective ways to serve working-class students, and as educators, parents, and politicians continue to emphasize the value of higher education for students of all financial and social backgrounds, conversations must take place among writing instructors and administrators about how best to serve and support working-class college writers. Class in the Composition Classroomwill help writing instructors inside and outside the classroom prepare all their students for personal, academic, and professional communication.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1whm918

1 PEDAGOGY AT THE CROSSROADS: from: Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Knutson Anna V.
Abstract: While composition instructors are frequently encouraged to recognize the intersectional identities of their students, including social class identity, we assert in this chapter that it is equally critical to recognize the identities of composition instructors. Too often we assume instructors of college composition classes are universally middle-and upper-class individuals who must be attentive to the needs of their working-class students. While this, in many cases, may be true, we would like to make two related assertions: (1) socioeconomic diversity exists in the ranks of composition instructors, and by overlooking that, we miss a major puzzle piece central to our understanding

2 NO HOMO! from: Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Denny Harry
Abstract: We have struggled with the adjectives students, particularly men, assign us in classroom settings. If our identities as white, male, working-class academics seem transparent and privileged, our gender and sexuality work counterintuitively. In public spaces, particularly when with students, Rob is a “guys’ guy” and Harry is the “ambiguously gay” guy. We both have come to embrace our identities, particularly our masculinities and how their performativity enables men who share our background a certain degree of comfort with us, especially for those men who have historically felt out of place in writing classrooms. During classes and conferences, our masculinity provides

3 IMPLICATIONS OF REDEFINING “WORKING CLASS” IN THE URBAN COMPOSITION CLASSROOM from: Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Corbett Patrick
Abstract: How do we identify urban working-class students as working

4 CALIFORNIA DREAMS: from: Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Dulin Cassandra
Abstract: The US Department of Education has found that forty percent of students who set out to complete a bachelor’s degree from a four-year institution fail to graduate in six years.¹ There are many reasons students leave college before they complete their degrees. A study conducted in 2009 found that working while going to school was the main reason students left before finishing their programs.² Juggling work and school is difficult and stressful. This same study also found that the students who dropped out due to strenuous work schedules admitted it would be too hard to reenroll. These students live with

5 THE WRITING SPACE AS DIALECTICAL SPACE: from: Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Preston Jacqueline
Abstract: In most public and private universities, students are placed in one or another writing course based on scores from the ACT, SAT or another standardized assessment, such as Accuplacer. As it stands, most writing assessments used to place students measure primarily students’ capacity to demonstrate knowledge of middle-class “Standard Written English” of the essayist bent. We know students of low-income families are likely to achieve lower scores on these aptitude tests. Not surprisingly, a high percentage of students of working-class origin fill basic writing (BW) and first-semester first-year writing (FYW) classrooms. At worst, many of these courses, as well as

6 CHANGING DEFINITIONS OF WORK AND CLASS IN THE INFORMATION ECONOMY from: Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Edwards Mike
Abstract: Class changes. As coauthors, our own attitudes toward class differ in some ways and overlap in others. Edie-Marie worked as an undergraduate with federally funded TRIO programs for disadvantaged students but does not identify as working class, despite her dad having worked in a factory all her life and having worked in one herself. Mike served for four years as an enlisted soldier driving tractor trailers for the United States Army but does not claim a working-class identity despite that experience. As contributors to this volume, we have both been interested in the differences between our own experiences of class

8 EMOTIONAL LABOR AS IMPOSTERS: from: Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Mack Nancy
Abstract: By teaching writing I am asking students to buy into an academic identity and to learn to write like a member of what I have sarcastically called the discourse community country club. I also know that teaching this prestigious discourse to working-class students places them in a subordinate status to those who have been privileged by the academy.¹ Language is a class marker that can expose inferiority with one error in punctuation, word ending, or pronunciation. Conversely, hearing, speaking, or writing one small turn of phrase from my working-class roots can be ethically satisfying.² Language is so powerful that its

11 NEVER AND FOREVER JUST KEEP COMING BACK AGAIN: from: Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Phegley Missy Nieveen
Abstract: As a high-school teacher in the mid-90s, I often integrated technical writing into the curriculum for my non-college-boundclasses (a label used by the school administrators to differentiate from thecollege-prepclasses), which were mainly populated with working-class students who planned to enter the workforce immediately after graduation. Consequently, I frequently asked these students to create documents using a computer. On one particular occasion, after introducing a new assignment, I asked my class whether they had any questions, and I received the usual Areyou gonna make us type this?As I answered, a tall white student nicknamed “Fro” for

12 SOCIAL ECONOMIES OF LITERACY IN RURAL OREGON: from: Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Brewster Cori
Abstract: Drawing on a subset of interviews conducted with fifty-two students from rural Oregon attending eleven public two-and four-year colleges across the state, I focus in this chapter on the diverse sponsorship histories of seven rural, working-class students and the social economies of literacy in which these students participate.¹ I include occasions in which students have been sponsored as well as occasions in which they have served as self-sponsors and actively sponsored the literacies of others. As Kim Donehower, Charlotte Hogg, and Eileen Schell have argued, the “rhetoric of lack” through which rural experience is so often read in public discourse

13 RETHINKING CLASS: from: Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Toth Christie
Abstract: The educational impact of poverty on working-class students often goes unexamined in disciplinary conversations about composition pedagogy and theory. This elision reflects a long-standing national rhetoric that simplifies interactions between social classes and hails a middle-class identity so persuasively that most Americans self-identify as middle class, regardless of their economic bracket, material affordances, or social interests.² As a result, narratives about education and social uplift tend to obscure many of the lived realities of students experiencing poverty.³ In first-year composition courses, where many students first encounter the linguistic and cultural expectations of a middle-class professoriate, examining the relationships between class

15 “BEING PART OF SOMETHING GAVE ME PURPOSE”: from: Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Carter Genesea M.
Abstract: College instructors who wish to help first-year working-class students transition from high school to college are often tasked with teasing out the array of intentions working-class students have for attending college. Working-class students attend college for a variety of reasons that have been well documented,² and supporting them in the classroom is not necessarily easy. Academia, as a well-oiled discourse community, can be inflexible and unforgiving toward new members who may not be prepared for the expectations therein. Students who are academic insiders already know how to “process, comprehend, and respond to existing knowledge—in short, making it their own

Introduction from: Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Mäkikalli Aino
Abstract: Narratological concepts, such as focalization, perspective, implied author, the distinction between story and discourse, and even homo- and heterodiegetic narration, today belong to the toolkit of scholars of literature, including those who do not consider themselves narratologists. Since literary analysis almost always also encompasses formal aspects of works, narratological concepts concerning the structure and forms of a narrative are taken by many as a ‘natural’ choice. Narratologists did not originally see their work as ‘a handmaiden to interpretation’; their theoretically-based taxonomic description of narrative was separated from interpretation, which always also has to do with the content of the narrative

The Tension between Idea and Narrative Form from: Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Waldschmidt Christine
Abstract: For the literature of the eighteenth century, particularly for those works that are seen as part of the Enlightenment, critics have foregrounded the moral, didactic interest of these texts. In the Enlightenment view, literature is supposed to serve a purpose (cf. Pizer, 2005, p. 91), and literary texts are always understood in terms of their function as serving moral goals. This penchant for the usefulness of literature is not very surprising: The Enlightenment defines itself as a movement towards greater intellectual independence and moral instruction – leading mankind out of its ‘selfinflicted immaturity’.² Hence the Enlightenment tends to explain the (ever-noticeable)

‘Speaking Well of the Dead’ from: Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Pritchard Penny
Abstract: In depicting the character and personality of their deceased subject, English Protestant ministers in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries employ features of writing strikingly comparable to contemporary works of fictional narrative. Such features include not only the selective inclusion of biographical details from the subject’s life and death, but a spectrum of seemingly ‘literary’ devices such as the portrayal of multiple points of view through eyewitness ‘testimonials’, direct quotation of correspondence, poetry, diary entries, and vividly-realized deathbed scenes (some of which include dialogue).

Peritextual Disposition in French Eighteenth-Century Narratives from: Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Ikonen Teemu
Abstract: The study of the so-called transnational novel has demonstrated the variety of practices of rewriting inside and across linguistic borders in the eighteenth century Europe (see e.g. Montandon, 1999; Stewart, 2009). Original works from the period are hard to distinguish from translations, translations of translations, pseudo-translations, authorial revisions, free adaptations, impostures, crudely abridged editions and other versions (Stewart, 2009, pp. 164-65). According to Coulet (1992), French authors were particularly busy revising their own works. Significant changes in narration and plot were common. Well-known is marquis de Sade’s transposition from first-person narration in Justine(1791) to third person inLa Nouvelle

Chapter Five The RISE of ÑUU TNOO from: Encounter with the Plumed Serpent
Abstract: The history of the lineages begins with the warmth and energy of the first rising of Lord Sun (Iya Ndicandii), who, with his rays of life-giving power and his call to work and glory, created a human world of knowledge and seeing while the past became a time of darkness and mystery, solid and cold as stone. The IyaandIyadzehe,who had their origin in Yuta Tnoho, were children of light and heat; the earlier populations were reduced to immobile rock formations in their new landscape. As it was in the beginning, this process of awakening and coming to

1 Changing history: from: Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Parker Michael
Abstract: Given the variety and energy of Irish creative and critical writing and its contribution to re-thinking relationships, histories and futures within and beyond Ireland, the first decade of the twenty-first century seems an opportune moment to examine and evaluate the literary voices that continue to enhance and enrich contemporary Irish culture. The book that follows consists of seventeen chapters focusing on the drama, poetry and autobiography fiction published since 1990, but also reflecting upon related forms of creative work in this period, including film and the visual and performing arts. The ‘diverse voices’ in the title refers not only to

13 ‘Sacred spaces’: from: Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Regan Stephen
Abstract: One of the familiar conventions of autobiography is its revelation of an individual life through a compelling first-person narrative voice. To work upon its readers most effectively, autobiography needs to present the life in question as both unique and typical; it must offer an appealing account of an existence that is special enough and significant enough to warrant attention, but it must also sustain that attention through an insistence on common human dilemmas and a shared sense of endeavour. At the same time as presenting a single life as unfolding and uncertain, shaped by that which can only be dimly

CHAPTER 4 John Henry Newman: from: The Three Dynamisms of Faith
Abstract: One of his groundbreaking works, An Essay in Aid of a Grammar of Assent, is composed of two parts, as Edward Caswall of

3. INEVITABLE INSINCERITY: from: Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: Like Immanuel Kant before him, Søren Kier kegaard exhibits modernity’s acute ambivalence toward self-congruence. Kierkegaard’s opposition to incongruence reveals itself in his career-long indictment of hypocrisy. Caught in the crosshairs of much of Kierkegaard’s work are the pretentious ambitions of Hegelian philosophy, whose practitioners claim to know more than they do,¹ and the insincere conformity of the Danish state church, whose members claim to believe more than they do.² Kierkegaard’s works (published and unpublished, pseudonymous and signed, philosophical and religious) exhort the reader to shun incongruence. Instead, they encourage the reader to be true to the actual, existing “single individual,”

4. HIDDEN LIVES, IRONIC SELVES: from: Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: Kierkegaard’s deep-seated ambivalence toward self-congruence and theatricality extends beyond his pseudonymous works, and into his signed religious discourses, written, as the title page to each indicates, by ”S. Kierkegaard.” What’s more, the career-long oscillation between pseudonymous and nonpseudonymous works (published in a more or less alternating pattern from 1843 to 1849) dramatizes the depths of that ambivalence. While pseudonymity—what Kierkegaard elsewhere calls ”polyonymity” ( SV7:545/CUP625)—cautions readers against the assumption of sincerity (i.e., that any particular claim is necessarily Kierkegaard’s own), nonpseudonymity renews questions about sincerity. One rightly wonders if a signed work represents Kierkegaard’s own sincerely held

Book Title: The Illiberal Imagination-Class and the Rise of the U.S. Novel
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Shapiro Joe
Abstract: Through close readings of the works of foundational U.S. novelists, including Charles Brockden Brown, Hugh Henry Brackenridge, Catharine Maria Sedgwick, James Fenimore Cooper, and Harriet Beecher Stowe, Joe Shapiro demonstrates that while voices of economic egalitarianism and working-class protest find their ways into a variety of early U.S. novels, these novels are anything but radically dialogic; instead, he argues, they push back against emergent forms of class consciousness by working to naturalize class inequality among whites. The Illiberal Imaginationthus enhances our understanding of both the early U.S. novel and the history of the way that class has been imagined in the United States.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1wx93xr

3 The Providence of Class: from: The Illiberal Imagination
Abstract: In the last two chapters, I have tried to show that unwieldy U.S. novels published in the final decade of the eighteenth century and the first two decades of the nineteenth century work as rejoinders to Enlightenment-era and radical plebeian varieties of economic egalitarianism. This chapter moves to the 1830s, a decade in which socialism as a political perspective begins to edge onto the stage in the United States. More particularly, this chapter argues that two of Catharine Maria Sedgwick’s 1830s sentimental novels, The Poor Rich Man, and the Rich Poor Man(1836) andLive and Let Live(1837), should

4 No Apologies for the Anti-Renters: from: The Illiberal Imagination
Abstract: Sedgwick’s The Poor Rich Man and Live and Let Live,I argued in the previous chapter, legitimate economic inequality in part by imagining the working class as politically docile: in Sedgwick’s 1830s novels, the working class assents to an economically hierarchical social order, discovering in economic inequality the manifestation of “providence.” Yet, what if U.S. workers do not assent to economic inequality? What if U.S. workers understand economic inequality as a violation of “natural law”? These are questions that animate James Fenimore Cooper’s now (also) largely forgotten 1840s Littlepage novels—Satanstoe(1845),The Chainbearer(1846), andThe Redskins(1846). In

5 Working-Class Abolitionism and Antislavery Fiction: from: The Illiberal Imagination
Abstract: In the final chapter of Love and Theft:Blackface Minstrelsy and the American Working Class,Eric Lott details how 1850s stage adaptations of Harriet Beecher Stowe’sUncle Tom’s Cabinwere indebted to blackface minstrelsy, which was one of the primary forms of working-class entertainment in the antebellum North. These adaptations, Lott writes, “could not . . . have avoided making use of blackface devices: minstrelsy was the current material condition of theatrical production in the representation of racial matters.” But while these adaptations thus reproduced the problematic racial politics of blackface minstrelsy, they also refashioned minstrelsy, Lott contends, “for explicit antislavery

Conclusion from: The Illiberal Imagination
Abstract: The Illiberal Imaginationhas ventured three interrelated arguments. They are, in a nutshell: first, the U.S. novel has from its beginning been “about” class; second, early U.S. novels “about” class are to be read as rejoinders to emergent forms of oppositional political economy; and, third, through the 1840s the U.S. novel does not hide class—but, rather, works to naturalize it.

Chapter 1 Historical Narration: from: History
Abstract: Hayden White, with elaborate sagacity, labored to convince historians of this fact when he treated “the historical work as what it most manifestly is,” that is to say, “a verbal structure in the form of a narrative prose discourse.” But since he explicated this discourse

Chapter 7 Theoretical Approaches to an Intercultural Comparison of Historiography from: History
Abstract: Most works on historiography have been done within the framework of a national history.² A broader perspective is related to European or Western historiography³, or to the historiography of non-Western cultures. The latter mainly deals with a single country or a single culture such as China⁴ or India.⁵ Comparative studies have been rare so far.⁶ There are a lot of reasons for this but I will only mention two: the difficulty of combining the competences of research in different historical cultures, and the dominance of Western historical thinking in historical studies even in non-Western countries. This dominance draws the academic

Chapter 8 Loosening the Order of History: from: History
Abstract: Historical studies as an academic discipline is under discussion, which treats its roots, functions and principles in a way that render them at the same time satisfactory and uncomfortable. The satisfaction may result from the new attention history has got in the realm of the humanities. One of the most dominating issues here is memory and its role in human culture. “Memory” covers the entire field of dealing with the past, thus including the realm of history as a subject matter and as a mode of recalling the past into life of its representation in the cultural framework of human

2. Private and Public Roles in Civil Society from: Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Nardin Terry
Abstract: There is an ambiguity in the idea of “civil society” as the arena of private economic and social relations, rather than of government. First, there is the idea that these relations are freely chosen. Civil society, as Michael Walzer puts it, is “the space of uncoerced human association.” But second, there is the idea that these relations depend upon shared values. Civil society is therefore also “the set of relational networks—formed for the sake of family, faith, interest, and ideology—that fill this space.” … The idea of civil society, then, can receive both liberal and communitarian interpretation, depending

6. In Common Together: from: Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Elshtain Jean Bethke
Abstract: The question of the one and the many, of unity and diversity, has been posed since the beginning of political thought in the West. The American Founders were well aware of the vexations attendant upon the creation of a new political body. They worked with, and against, a stock of metaphors that had previously served as the symbolic vehicles of political incorporation. As men of the Enlightenment, they rejected the images of the body politic that had dominated medieval and early modern political thinking. For a Jefferson or a Madison such tropes as “the King’s two bodies” or John of

13. Industrial Policy—Will Clinton Find the High Wage Path? from: Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Faux Jeff
Abstract: Bill Clinton’s charge that “we are working harder for less” was repeated at campaign bus stops all the way to the White House. Echoing a decade of policy debate among Democrats, he talked of the need for America to seek a “high-wage” path through the new competitive global marketplace. With his election, “industrial policy” has crept back on to the national agenda: the question now is not whether the government should guide the private sector to become more competitive, but how.

Book Title: The Imaginary Revolution-Parisian Students and Workers in 1968
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Seidman Michael
Abstract: The events of 1968 have been seen as a decisive turning point in the Western world. The author takes a critical look at "May 1968" and questions whether the events were in fact as "revolutionary" as French and foreign commentators have indicated. He concludes the student movement changed little that had not already been challenged and altered in the late fifties and early sixties. The workers' strikes led to fewer working hours and higher wages, but these reforms reflected the secular demands of the French labor movement. "May 1968" was remarkable not because of the actual transformations it wrought but rather by virtue of the revolutionary power that much of the media and most scholars have attributed to it and which turned it into a symbol of a youthful, renewed, and freer society in France and beyond.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1x76fq7

Chapter Four Workers Respond from: The Imaginary Revolution
Abstract: Wage earners took advantage of the momentary weakness of state power in the middle of May to initiate the largest strike wave in French history. The fact that student radicals looked to workers to make the revolution was less important in sparking strikes than the divisions among political elites. What has been called the “political opportunity structure” encouraged the extension of the unrest to wage earners.¹ Even some members of the Gaullist majority wavered in support for the government. As in 1789, 1848, and 1871, cleavages within ruling groups promoted popular revolt. Both student and worker actions were parts of

Conclusion: from: The Imaginary Revolution
Abstract: After the revolts of May and June, Marxists and anarchists of various stripes continued to believe that agitation would persist and that the working class was on the road to revolution.¹ Radicals, confident of their dynamism and bolstered by the youthful demographic bulge, were hopeful about the future. Like their counterparts throughout the world, they felt that morality and history were on their side. Revolutionary artists reflected this sentiment in posters, such as “May 68: The Beginning of a Long Struggle” (see figure 15). Several books published at the end of 1968 carried the title It Is Only a Beginning.

Book Title: Ethnographica Moralia-Experiments in Interpretive Anthropology
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Marcus George E.
Abstract: Panourgia and Marcus bring together anthropologists working in various parts of the world (Greece, Bali, Taiwan, the United States) with classicists, historians, and scholars in cultural studies. The volume takes into account global realities such as 9/11 and the opening of the Cypriot Green Line and explores the different ways in which Geertz’s anthropology has shaped the pedagogy of their disciplines and enabled discussions among them. Focusing on place and time, locations and temporalities, the essays in this volume interrogate the fixity of interpretation and open new spaces of inquiry. The volume addresses a wide audience from the humanities and the social sciences—anyone interested in the development of a new humanism that will relocate the human as a subject of social action.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1x76fs8

Contemporary Fieldwork Aesthetics in Art and Anthropology: from: Ethnographica Moralia
Author(s) Marcus George E.
Abstract: In recent years, Douglas Holmes and I have been working toward an articulation, and a refunctioning even, of ethnographic research practices so basic to the identity of anthropology.¹ It is remarkable to reflect on how much research in social and cultural anthropology, especially in the United States, has consisted of variations on a particular aesthetic of practice that can be condensed to a near-mythic scene of encounter—a Malinowskian one, or latterly, a Geertzian one (e.g., the famous opening of Geertz’s “Deep Play” essay²). Recall, for instance, these oft-quoted lines from the beginning of the Argonauts of the Western Pacific,

Canonical and Anticanonical Histories from: Ethnographica Moralia
Author(s) Liakos Antonis
Abstract: The purpose of this paper is to propose an interpretation of national historiography(-ies) as a specific way of making sense of the past, within a framework of tensions in the making of a global sphere of production of history. The term historyis a linguistic and cultural indicator of diverse ways of understanding social temporality. These ways of understanding are different in time and space. In some cultures, the concept of history and more generally the understanding of chronology were entirely different from the meaning of history in Western tradition. In Polynesia, for instance, historicity unfolds as an eternal return,

Foreword: from: Chinese Landscape Painting as Western Art History
Author(s) Purtle Jennifer
Abstract: I read the manuscript for this book expecting to hate it. Rumors about the manuscript bemoaned a non-specialist author who presumed to tell specialists in the field of Chinese painting history working to recover traditional Chinese ideas about painting that and how they practiced Western art history. Moreover, the author allegedly did so in terms not interesting to many specialists in the field of Chinese painting history, nor fully intelligible to some. To propose the Westernness of the practice of art history in the field of Chinese painting history—which has, since the middle of the twentieth century, sought means

Chapter 4 WRITING, FEMININITY AND COLONIALISM: from: Migrant Nation
Author(s) Ravenscroft Alison
Abstract: How to write of a white feminine Iso as not to tell – once more – the story of the woman we already know, the woman we take ourselves to be? The answer might lie in a kind of writing that gives a formal place to uncertainty. This would be a writing practice that aims at a writer’s doubts about herself and others, rather than closing them over, and which works with anaestheticsof uncertainty and not just avocabulary. Such a writing practice would also aim at the production of doubt in a reader. If aesthetics is

6 Time and the Other (Husserl, Heidegger, Levinas) from: Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: Time and the Otheris the title of a short but famous work published in 1948, reproducing the stenographic record of four lectures given in 1946 and 1947 by Emmanuel Levinas at the Collège Philosophique founded by Jean Wahl in the Latin Quarter. In this text, for the first time, Levinas accomplished what we could call, borrowing from the title of an essay he had published in 1935, an “evasion”¹ of the thought of being by trying to understand the relation to the other, not in accordance with the Heideggerian horizon ofMitsein, being-with, but rather as time—that is,

12 History and Hermeneutics (Ricoeur and Gadamer) from: Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: A ten-day conference dedicated to Paul Ricoeur’s work was organized at Cerisy in August 1988 by Jean Greisch and Richard Kearney around the theme of “Les metamorphoses de la raison herméneutique.” There, David Carr, author of a remarkable study on Husserl’s Crisis,¹ focused his intervention on the question of the philosophical status of the story. I would like to begin by citing the first lines of his conference:

14 The Phenomenology of Finitude (Heidegger and Patočka) from: Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: In the course of these last few years, it has been a plea sure to discover that among all the readings undertaken in Europe and elsewhere of Heidegger’s work, one of them, which is also the work of a great philosopher and not merely an epigone, was able to touch on and take the true measure of the coherence of Heideggerian thought. Should we be astonished that such a reading comes to us from Eastern Europe, from that “engaged” thinker Jan Patočka? In order to move with such assurance directly to the keystone of Heidegger’s thought, to the assumption of

16 The “Last God” of Phenomenology (Husserl and Heidegger) from: Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: Although it is formed of two Greek roots, the term “phenomenology” itself appears only very late in the philosophical tradition. It had probably been coined by Lambert, who, in his Nouvel Organonof 1764, baptized “phenomenology” as a discipline whose task is to allow the recognition of appearances and to furnish the means to escape them and arrive at the truth.¹ In the 1770 letter accompanying the copy of theDissertationhe sent to Lambert, Kant, situating himself in the framework of the traditional opposition between the sensible and intelligible worlds, also recognized the necessity of elaborating a “phaenomenologia generalis”

INTRODUCTION from: The Face of the Other and the Trace of God
Author(s) Bloechl Jeffrey
Abstract: Rather than summarize each contribution in this volume, I wish only to say a few things about their relation to one another, which of course does require me to mention briefly what each author has set out to do. My original intention as editor was simply to gather some older works perhaps less known in the Anglo-American world, augmented by some newer ones. To this I have added the idea of mixing contributions by authors on both sides of the Atlantic, with the obscure aim of asking whether there might be different trends or currents in reading Levinas. A more

2 The Phenomenology of Eros: from: The Face of the Other and the Trace of God
Author(s) Moyaert Paul
Abstract: The existential phenomena that Levinas takes up are not alien to philosophical discourse. However, in his analysis he does show how in these recognizable experiences there is at work an existential logic which escapes the conceptual framework of a certain ontology and which dislocates from

8 The Significance of Levinas’s Work for Christian Thought from: The Face of the Other and the Trace of God
Author(s) Peperzak Adriaan T.
Abstract: Levinas’s work rings with the voice of a master, not only in the sense of a teacher who translates a common heritage, but also in the sense of a critic

Book Title: How to Do Comparative Theology- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): VON STOSCH KLAUS
Abstract: For a generation and more, the contribution of Christian theology to interreligious understanding has been a subject of debate. Some think of theological perspectives are of themselves inherently too narrow to support interreligious learning, and argue for an approach that is neutral or, on a more popular level, grounded simply open-minded direct experience. In response, comparative theology argues that theology, as faith seeking understanding, offers a vital perspective and a way of advancing interreligious dialogue, aided rather than hindered by commitments; theological perspectives can both complement and step beyond the study of religions by methods detached and merely neutral. Thus comparative theology has been successful in persuading many that interreligious learning from one faith perspective to another is both possible and worthwhile, and so the work of comparative theology has become more recognized and established globally. With this success there has come to the fore new challenges regarding method: How does one do comparative theological work in a way that is theologically grounded, genuinely open to learning from the other, sophisticated in pursuing comparisons, and fruitful on both the academic and practical levels?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr5zg

Introduction from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) von Stosch Klaus
Abstract: The fifteen essays collected in How to Do Comparative Theologyare the fruits of an August 2014 conference in Paderborn, Germany, which itself was part of a larger conversation involving senior and junior scholars in the field over the five years before that. The conference brought together scholars in the field of comparative theology in the United States and Eu rope to share their work in this emerging field, and to reflect together on the nature and best methods current today by listening to how each of us actually does it.

1 The Problem of Choice in Comparative Theology from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Cornille Catherine
Abstract: The discipline of comparative theology is steadily growing and diversifying. While it is often seen as originating within Christian, and predominantly Roman Catholic, theological circles, it is increasingly practiced by Christians of other denominations and by other religious traditions. And comparative theologians of any one tradition are presented with a seemingly endless possibility of choice in terms of which tradition, which text, or which aspect of that tradition to engage in comparative work. Once other religions are recognized as possible resources for constructive religious reflection and insight, there is no limit to where such truth or insight might manifest itself

9 Using Comparative Insights in Developing Kalām: from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Tatari Muna
Abstract: When I started working on my dissertation in Paderborn in 2010, I was already quite familiar with Islamic theology.¹ I had graduated University with a degree in Islamic studies, a subject quite separate and apart from Islamic theology. I was also a visiting student at an Islamic theological faculty in Jordan for three semesters, and finally studied Islamic theology at a private institute in Hamburg for six semesters. From 1996 to 2010, I worked as a freelance facilitator in the field of inter-religious dialogue. I regularly trained teachers and vicars and co-developed teaching materials with groups of Muslims, Christians, Buddhists,

10 Difficult Remainders: from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Clooney Francis X.
Abstract: The Christian comparative theological engagement with other faith traditions is most often driven by attention to select themes, images, and practices already somewhat familiar, even if inexactly, in Christian tradition. This approach makes sense and is fruitful. The preference for the familiar risks an evasion of the more difficult realm of the unfamiliar, and reducing the great texts of other traditions to compendia of ideas available for selective consideration as desired. Comparisons are often asymmetrical, too. Christian comparativists at their best work with a rich sense of the completeness of Christian faith, and of the organic coherence of Christian doctrine

1 The Survival of the Question: from: The Forgiveness to Come
Abstract: In 1969, Simon Wiesenthal, already internationally recognized for his work in the Documentation Center of the Association of Jewish Victims of the Nazi Regime in Vienna, published an autobiographical narrative based on an exceptional encounter between himself and a dying, repentant Nazi soldier. On his deathbed this soldier confessed to Wiesenthal that he had participated in the murder of hundreds of Jews (including children) and asked Wiesenthal—at the time himself a prisoner in a concentration camp in Poland—for his forgiveness. Responding at the time with silence, Wiesenthal confessed nonetheless to being haunted by the dying man’s request, unable

2 Reading Forgiveness in a Marrano Idiom: from: The Forgiveness to Come
Abstract: Many recent studies have focused on the contemporary proliferation around the world of requests and offers of apology, reconciliation, and forgiveness. Eliza Barkan, notably, has spoken of an “age of apology,” referring to the impressive number of heads of state, leaders of the ecclesiastical hierarchies, and even multinational companies, who over the last twenty-five years have been asked to—and in some cases have made—public confessions, offers of apology, and requests for forgiveness.¹ It is to the detriment of many of these studies that they have not been informed by a careful reading of the work of the philosopher

4 A Hyper-Ethics of Irreconcilable Contradictions: from: The Forgiveness to Come
Abstract: Until recently the work of French philosopher and musician Vladimir Jankélévitch (1903–1985) has been scarcely acknowledged in the English-speaking world. Over the last few years, some of his texts have appeared in English translation, in part because of the growing recognition of the importance of his moral philosophy for figures such as Paul Ricoeur, Emmanuel Levinas, and Jacques Derrida.¹ It is little known, for example, that Emmanuel Levinas acknowledged Jankélévitch as a source of the notion of the “absolutely” or “wholly other” ( le tout autre).² Born of Russian Jewish émigrés, a student of Henri Bergson, about whom he wrote

Introduction: Genre Trouble: from: Spiritual Grammar
Abstract: Grammar is al-naḥw, “the way.” We journey along “the way” today as wayfarers before us have done. “The way” gives us direction, even if we sometimes stray from it with missteps and slipups of various magnitudes. The two texts that are the focus of the present study are works that school readers in “the way.” Their authors, both master wayfarers, hoped to make “the way” easier and clearer for those who followed. My study of their texts has led to the discovery of “spiritual grammar,” a genre of religious literature that until now has not been recognized as such.

3 Gerson’s “Moralized” Primer of Spiritual Grammar from: Spiritual Grammar
Abstract: Like a catechism, the Donatus moralizatustext, which Gerson apparently wrote in the year 1411, begins with a question.¹ (See the Appendix for full translation.) That question sets up the grammatical framework that structures the rest of the text: “How many parts of speech are there?” Beginning the text already with a specialized term from the discipline of grammar, the question fronts the idea of “parts of speech,” thus emphasizing it over the number of how many parts there are. Though the wordoratio, as not only “speech,” but also “prayer,” presents immediately a possible pun, Gerson passes over this

4 From the Names of God to the Grammar of Hearts from: Spiritual Grammar
Abstract: We now tack east and back in history, from Latin to Arabic, French to Persian, Christian to Islamic. While juxtaposing Gerson’s Moralized Grammarand Qushayrī’sGrammar of Heartscreates a new context for the two texts, they are also linked to their respective times and places of origins. Attending to these original contexts grounds the fresh literary and theological understandings that the present study constructs. To prepare for understandingThe Grammar of Heartsin both its literary form and its religious content, we will examine in this chapter two of Qushayrī’s most famous works and two of his less well-known

Book Title: The Rigor of Things-Conversations with Dan Arbib
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Tracy David
Abstract: In these interviews, Marion's language is more conversational than in his formal writing, but it remains serious and substantive. The book serves as an excellent and comprehensive introduction to Marion's thought and work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr68m

1. My Path from: The Rigor of Things
Abstract: Jean-Luc Marion, what would you say if you had to summarize in a few comments the meaning of the philosophical work that has prompted you along the course of your career?

3. Phenomenology from: The Rigor of Things
Abstract: You completed your great cycle on Descartes withOn Descartes’ Metaphysical Prismin 1986 [published in English in 1999]. In 1989 you publishedReduction and Givenness[published in English in 1998], which is a collection of essays on Husserl’s and Heidegger’s phenomenology.¹In a sense, this book has produced paradoxical results. Although it claimed to be an erudite study in the history of Husserl’s and Heidegger’s phenomenology, it gave rise to important reactions, as if you had hit upon something absolutely central that could not but elicit reservations from several phenomenologists. What led you to phenomenology after your work on

4. Theology from: The Rigor of Things
Abstract: Idol and Distancewas written very quickly in 1976, although it relied on material already worked out over several years, especially arguments that had been put to the test in articles published inRésurrectionduring the years 1970 through 1973. In this sense, then, it was an occasional book, but it tackled a haunting or even stubborn problem, one that occupied me and many others for years—the question of the “death of God.” I ended up approaching

4 BEGINN, ANFANG, URSPRUNG from: The Origin of the Political
Abstract: The complexity underlying the relation between object and interpretation is grounded in the fact that in Arendt there are two distinct and even contradictory readings of origin that lie in pursuit of each other, alternating and intertwining throughout the entirety of her work. The first is of a deconstructive nature, while the second is constitutive. In order to identify them separately—and before turning to the antonymic point at which they converge—we need to return to two authors who were both very much present in Arendt’s formative years. The first is Nietzsche and, more specifically, the “genealogist” Nietzsche, who

Book Title: Sexual Disorientations-Queer Temporalities, Affects, Theologies
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): MOORE STEPHEN D.
Abstract: Sexual Disorientations brings some of the most recent and significant works of queer theory into conversation with the overlapping fields of biblical, theological and religious studies to explore the deep theological resonances of questions about the social and cultural construction of time, memory, and futurity. Apocalyptic, eschatological and apophatic languages, frameworks, and orientations pervade both queer theorizing and theologizing about time, affect, history and desire. The volume fosters a more explicit engagement between theories of queer temporality and affectivity and religious texts and discourses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr6tw

Introduction. from: Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) MARCHAL JOSEPH A.
Abstract: It’s about time. This book is principally about time—queer time, to be precise. But it’s also about time that a book on queer theologies tackled queer temporalities, together with queer affects.¹ Like the colloquium out of which it emerged, this volume seeks to engage with certain field-reorienting—and field-disorienting—inflections of queer theory whose origins lie in the midto late 1990s but which have been oddly underremarked even by those in the theological disciplines most invested in all matters queer. The literature by biblical scholars, theologians, and church historians that has been assembled incrementally under the patchwork queer banner

Unbinding Imperial Time: from: Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) HOKE JAMES N.
Abstract: The empire binds time. The idea of time being bound by institutions of power (ancient or modern) to have a normalizing effect, of course, comes from Elizabeth Freeman. She identifies such a binding as chrononormativity, “the use of time to organize individual human bodies toward maximum productivity.”¹ Under a modern capitalist system, for example, a normal “workday” is arranged (including “free” time) in such a way that workers produce more labor, and thus capital, for their employers. Chrononormativity, therefore, produces the most benefit for those at the top of the socioeconomic hierarchy.

More Than a Feeling: from: Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) SCHNEIDER LAUREL C.
Abstract: New thinking in queer temporalities and affects outside of the (temporally, affectively charged) field of religion constitutes a challenge and invitation to stretch queer thinking in theology yet again, and further. Although feminist, womanist, process, and other theorists in religion and theology have been working around the fuzzy borders and stubborn impasses that fleshy experiences—bodies and histories of bodies—present, queerly inflected affect theory expands these moves into a complex materialism.¹ Affect theory’s approach to embodiment in terms of the deeply constitutive dynamics of temporality, proximity, touch, and even elemental gravitation provides a conceptual framework that helpfully limits any

Response: from: Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) RUBENSTEIN MARY-JANE
Abstract: On numerous occasions, I have had the chance to respond to Karmen MacKendrick’s challenging and beautiful work, or to respond to her response to something I have written (often under the influence of her challenging and beautiful work). In the face of this complex and perennial entanglement, I admit to feeling both prideful and indulgent. Steeped in such sinful affect, I would like to think for a nonlinear moment within some of the possibilities MacKendrick’s thinking opens, most recently in the preceding essay “Remember—When?” for something like a queer-incarnational apophasis.

Book Title: Piaget's Theory of Knowledge-Genetic Epistemology and Scientific Reason
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): KITCHENER RICHARD F.
Abstract: Best known as a child psychologist, Jean Piaget considered himself primarily an epistemologist who was engaged in empirical research on the development of knowledge. In this book, philosopher and psychologist Richard F. Kitchener provides the first comprehensive study in English of Piaget's genetic epistemology, or his theory of knowledge. Drawing largely on a careful perusal of Piaget's untranslated works, Kitchener presents little-known aspects of Piaget's thought and argues that, in fact, Piagest has been misunderstood and was completely justified in his claim to be an epistemologist rather than a psychologist.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xp3sbd

Chapter Two T. S. Eliot and the Archaeology of Poetry from: American Poetry
Abstract: In a lecture presented at the Library of Congress in 1948, T. S. Eliot acknowledges so early an acquaintance with Poe that he cannot be sure whether his own work has been influenced by him. He then distances himself from his predecessor by focusing on Poe’s relation to the French Symbolists Baudelaire, Mallarmé, and Valéry.¹ This detour through another country and another language is the standard reading of the Eliot-Poe connection: Poe’s insistence on the poem as a formal artifact, as well as his critical self-consciousness, influenced the French Symbolists, who in turn influenced Eliot. Clearly, Eliot shares the Symbolists’

Chapter Four Ralph Waldo Emerson: from: American Poetry
Abstract: In being set up as the spiritual and literary father figure of American poetry, Emerson has become a tangle of contradictions. His work has been splintered into numerous “oppositions” and “dialectics,” and his insistence on the necessity of poetic forms has been largely ignored so that he can sustain his role as the father of all his unlikely brood. If obviously antithetical poets come out of Emerson, there must be a basic contradiction between his early or Orphic and late phases, between his essays and poems, between “Bacchus” and “Merlin,” and so on. By restoring the unity of Emerson’s career

Chapter Six The Re-Verses of Elizabeth Bishop from: American Poetry
Abstract: Elizabeth Bishop extends Stevens’s revision of Emerson and his bipartite career by engaging in a process of “constant re-adjustment” between subject and object, mind and nature, rhetoric and meters. The seemingly contradictory commentary that her work sustains proves her success in “con-fusing” romantic and modernist oppositions: she has been read as an autobiographical poet with an impersonal touch, as a surrealist given to meticulous observations of natural facts, and as a formalist whose poems are open-ended accumulations of detail.¹ Her distinction is to have developed the kind of diction and formal flexibility that enable her to be at home on

Chapter Eight Ezra Pound’s Hard Currency from: American Poetry
Abstract: Ezra Pound wrote in 1933, “Mr. Eliot and I are in agreement … in so far as we both believe that existing works form a complete order which is changed by the introduction of the ‘really new’ work.” But he offered a qualification that measures the radical “disagreement” between the two poets: “‘Existing monuments form an ideal order among themselves.’ It would be healthier to use a zoological term rather than the word monument. It is much easier to think of the OdysseyorLe Testamentor Catallus’Epithalamiumas something living than as a series of cenotaphs. After all,

Chapter Nine Frank O’Hara: from: American Poetry
Abstract: “Great art,” Frank O’Hara insists, “is seldom about art”—“except in baroque periods.” Its insights may be so compelling and so pervasive that they can be applied to art as well, but its true subject is the “structure” of nature. In de Kooning’s work, for example, “structures of classical severity” grant “insight into the structure of man’s identification with nature and the play of forces which it involves.” Similarly, “to think that late Mondrian is ‘painting about painting’ is a grievous error,” and “when Keats wrote, ‘Beauty is truth, truth beauty,’—it is a grievous error to think that he

Chapter Ten Emily Dickinson’s Untitled Discourse from: American Poetry
Abstract: Emily Dickinson’s work represents an ironic comment on nineteenth-century poetics, for she plays against each other the rhetorics that implicitly or explicitly authorize other major nineteenth-century poets. She claims only the privilege of her “provincial” “discemment”;¹ as she puts it in a poem about Thanksgiving Day,

Chapter Eleven Hart Crane: from: American Poetry
Abstract: Taking on himself the oppositions that generate the discourse of literary history, Hart Crane assumes a sacrificial role in American poetry. Just as Emily Dickinson dissects Christian and transcendental poetics, Crane plays against each other his two major influences—an Eliotic formalism with its roots in French Symbolism, and a Whitmanic organicism.¹ Crane has been repeatedly judged a failure on the grounds that his Symbolist and Whitmanic visions are incompatible; less often, he has been defended on the same grounds. For example, Sherman Paul sees that the “‘confusion’ in Crane’s work is not inadvertent, as Tate and others believe, but

CHAPTER 7 Specific Imaginative-Intuitive Faculties as Forms of Dreaming from: The Multiplicity of Dreams
Abstract: Evidence of creative imagistic activity in dream formation does not encourage us to assimilate all dreaming to representational language. Still, the difficulty in evaluating when dream imagery goes beyond prior verbal understanding suggests that imagery and language must continuously interact anyway. The linguistic processes that enter dreams most readily are more presentational than representational—in that “the whole domain of verbal wit is put at the disposal of the dreamwork” (Freud, 1900, p. 376). Certainly, in many of Freud’s own dreams ordinary language has been spontaneously rearranged in the form of rebuslike wordplay, visual hieroglyphics based on special turns of

CHAPTER 9 Archetypal and Titanic Dreams: from: The Multiplicity of Dreams
Abstract: Archetypal dreams, essentially the same as the culture pattern dreams of anthropology (see chapter lo), are more like self-sufficient cohesive visions than the patchwork mnemic reorganizations of ordinary dreaming.¹ Jung’s own dreams, recounted in his autobiography Memories, Dreams, Reflections(1961), provide evident examples (see chapter 10 for a detailed comparison of the dreams of Freud and Jung). However, my colleagues and I (Hunt et al., 1982) have found evidence that most subjects report archetypal dreams like those of Jung when asked to provide their most “fantastic dreamlike dream” (see appendix, table 1). Thus, although statistically speaking, subjects tend to have

CHAPTER 12 The Visual-Spatial Side of Dream Formation from: The Multiplicity of Dreams
Abstract: The correlation of visual-spatial forms of dream bizarreness with waking measures of imagination and creativity is not sufficient to establish the metaphoric roots of such experience. Despite recent demonstrations of cortical antecedents in phasic REM discharge, it could still be that imagistic bizarreness works on the randomization model of creativity, so favored in current artificial intelligence accounts. On that model, creative imagery would operate by destroying the continuity of ongoing propositional intelligence, so that its later reestablishment would have to include novel and so potentially useful elements. The question becomes whether visual-spatial transformations in dreams and closely related features of

Introduction from: Heidegger's Estrangements
Abstract: My purpose in what follows will simply be to work through Martin Heidegger’s later writings on language and poetry in order to give as clear an account as I can of what he has to say, as well as of the way in which his “saying” has to be enclosed in quotation marks. As Habermas says, “Communication does not belong to the basic vocabulary of this philosophy.”¹ By “work through” I mean roughly, or loosely, what my discipline calls a close reading that lends special attention to the language of the dark or recalcitrant text. So what follows is also

7 Criticism, Disturbance, and Rhetorical Community: from: Norms of Rhetorical Culture
Abstract: Eloquence deepens and distinguishes the contours of a practice, as do all noble exceptions, the few showing the many what might be accomplished. But for the pedestrian art of rhetoric, these “many” are more than also-rans in the parade; they are also the constitutive stuff of the art. Ours has been the century of Mahler and Shostakovich and of Elvis, Janis, and Chuck Berry as well. Rhetoric works its magic inconspicuously, in small successes as well as noble failures. Above all, it works bothsides of the street. In this chapter, I address a problem which haunts contemporary practice: namely,

III Torquato Tasso: from: Trials of Desire
Abstract: Like Du Bellay’s Deffence, Tasso’sApologia in difesa della “Gerusalemme Liberata” (1585) is a strange and convoluted work that records a poet’s effort to defend and define his literary identity. Critics from the Florentine Accademia della Crusca had violently attacked theGerusalemme Liberata, arguing that it was inferior in style and content to Ariosto’sOrlando Furioso.¹ To defend himself, Tasso had to prove the superiority of his Christian epic to Ariosto’s poem, which was, in Tasso’s view, ethically and aesthetically confused, an “animal of uncertain nature.”² Basically, Tasso defines the difference between his and Ariosto’s poems in terms of a

IV Sir Philip Sidney: from: Trials of Desire
Abstract: In 1586, a year after Tasso wrote his Apologia, Sir Philip Sidney died of a wound he received while fighting for the Protestant cause in the Netherlands. He left unfinished the revision of hisArcadia, a prose romance which concludes, in its original version, with a dramatic scene of trial. Like many of his readers, Sidney was evidently unsatisfied with the resolution of that trial: a father condemns his son and nephew to death for their crimes of passion, but the sentence is miraculously suspended when a supposedly dead king revives and pardons the princes. Tue work thus ends happily,

Conclusion: from: Trials of Desire
Abstract: Tue prospect of ending a piece of work, like the prospect of beginning one, so frequently generates defensive discourse that one is led to speculate, a bit nostalgically, about the medieval convention of the retraction. As a version of the Augustinian confession, with its drama of a conversion from secular words to sacred ones, the retraction served psychological and aesthetic, as well as religious, aims by providing a formal channel for the apologetic impulse that perennially besets authors preparing to take leave of their books.¹ Although the retraction may seem a dead convention today, its ghost lives on in the

Book Title: The Music of Béla Bartók- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): WILSON PAUL
Abstract: According to Wilson, earlier critics of Bartók's music have often sought to discover an unvarying precompositional system that accounted for individual musical events. Wilson's approach is different in that he develops a way to explore each work within the musical contexts that the work itself creates and sustains. Wilson begins by discussing a number of fundamental musical materials that Bartók employed throughout his oeuvre. Using these materials as foundations, he then describes a series of flexible, behaviorally defined harmonic functions and a model of pitch hierarchy based on the functions and on several connective designs. Wilson shows how these hierarchical structures provide meaningful forces for coherence and for dynamism and progressional drive in the music. After analyzing the five works from Bartók's oeuvre, he concludes by explaining the philosophical similarities between his theory and the work of David Lewin and Charles Taylor in the related fields of perception and hermeneutics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xp3tqk

INTRODUCTION: from: The Music of Béla Bartók
Abstract: This book presents a theoretical account of the music of Béla Bartok. Constantly implicit in such an account is the tension between two conflicting demands: that the account be theoretical, that is, composed of (among other things) broadly applicable general statements directed to certain kinds of musical understanding; and that it be firmly situated within the detailed context formed by Bartok’s works and life, as that context has grown in our knowledge over the past fifty years and more. Where it is necessary to choose between these demands, generality must give way to context. But the book attempts to avoid

ONE FUNDAMENTALS: from: The Music of Béla Bartók
Abstract: This chapter discusses four elements fundamental to the book’s approach to Bartok’s music. That these elements are fundamental does not imply that, once described, they are to be forgotten or necessarily subsumed in some higher theoretical synthesis. Although this part of the theory is foundational for the part that follows in chapter 2, there are works by Bartok for which these fundamental concepts are the only ones that an analysis using the theory can successfully employ. In any case the topics discussed in this chapter are a constant presence in every analysis undertaken in Part 11.

THREE THE SONATA FOR PIANO from: The Music of Béla Bartók
Abstract: The series of analyses begins with the Sonata for Piano (1926).¹ This work has special significance on several grounds. Though Bartok had written important music for the piano prior to 1926, this is his first and only work for solo piano entitled “Sonata.” It stands as the first in a series of three important works for the piano written in 1926, the others being the suite Out of Doorsand the First Piano Concerto. The first movement is also, as mentioned in the introduction, his first major work after World War 1 to exhibit a strong emphasis on tonal centers.

FOUR THE THIRD STRING QUARTET from: The Music of Béla Bartók
Abstract: Bartok completed the Third String Quartet in September 1927. Shortly thereafter he entered the score in a competition for new chamber music sponsored by the Musical Fund Society of Philadelphia, and the work is dedicated to that Society. He received half of the $3000 first prize, the other half going to Alfredo Casella. In London on February 19, 1929, the Waldbauer-Kerpely Quartet gave the piece its premiere. Among Bartok’s previous works the clearest precursor of the Quartet in form and treatment of material is the Second Sonata for Violin and Piano of 1922. The Quartet is in my view one

FIVE THE FIFTH STRING QUARTET, II AND IV from: The Music of Béla Bartók
Abstract: The focus in this chapter is again on two movements that share thematic or harmonic material, but in this case the two are linked within a broader, carefully planned formal design. The design is Bartok’s famous “bridge” or “arch” plan, and the Fifth Quartet is one of three works that Bartok names as employing the general plan (the others being the Fourth Quartet and the Second Piano Concerto). He has also provided an analysis of the Fifth Quartet which describes in some detail the plan for the work and the place of these two movements in it.¹ As is well

SIX THE SONATA FOR TWO PIANOS AND PERCUSSION, I AND II from: The Music of Béla Bartók
Abstract: The Sonata for Two Pianos and Percussion was the product of a commission to compose a chamber work for the tenth anniversary of the Basel chapter of the International Society for Contemporary Music. Bartok wrote the Sonata in Budapest during July and August of 1937. It has long held a central place in his oeuvre and in the contemporary two-piano literature.

SEVEN THE CONCERTO FOR ORCHESTRA, I from: The Music of Béla Bartók
Abstract: Bartok composed the Concerto for Orchestra in the late summer and fall of 1943, in response to a commission from Serge Koussevitzky. The work received its premiere performance on December 1, 1943, with Koussevitzky conducting the Boston

Remigration reconsidered. from: Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Author(s) FEICHTINGER JOHANNES
Abstract: In der Zeit des Nationalsozialismus wurden 130.000 bis 150.000 ÖsterreicherInnen aus „rassischen“ oder politischen Gründen zur Emigration gezwungen, die überwiegende Mehrheit davon Juden (Stadler, „Emigration“ 17). Schon lange vor der Machtübernahme des Nationalsozialismus hatten viele junge ForscherInnen jüdischer Herkunft und/oder linker politischer Gesinnung Österreich verlassen, da ihnen seit Anfang der 1920er Jahre Berufslaufbahnen an den Universitäten zusehends verwehrt wurden (Feichtinger, „Braindrain“ 286-98; Taschwer 99-132). Auswanderung und Vertreibung zerstörten nicht nur die lebendige Wissenschaftskultur Österreichs zur Jahrhundertwende, sie hinterließen auch eine gravierende personelle Lücke in der Zweiten Republik: „A noticeable characteristic of Austrian science is the great shortage of scientific workers

Two Austrian Émigré Economists: from: Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Author(s) KURZ HEINZ D.
Abstract: This contribution will be devoted to the academic careers and works of two eminent Austrian economists: Josef Steindl and Kurt Wilhelm Rothschild. Both scholars had to leave Austria after the Anschlussand found exile in Great Britain. They returned to Austria after World War II and had a considerable impact on Austrian economics. Both were scholars of international reputation who published highly influential books and essays with major publishers and in leading academic journals. Alas, only one of them, Rothschild, eventually received the official recognition he deserved and was appointed to a chair in economics in Austria, whereas Steindl was

Book Title: Vatican II and Beyond-The Changing Mission and Identity of Canadian Women Religious
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Smyth Elizabeth M.
Abstract: The year 2015 marked the fiftieth anniversary of the end of the Second Vatican Council, which aimed to align the Church with the modern world. Over the last five decades, women religious have engaged with the council’s reforms with unprecedented enthusiasm, far exceeding the expectations of the Church. Addressing how Canadian women religious envisioned and lived out the changes in religious life brought on by a pluralistic and secularizing world, Vatican II and Beyond analyzes the national organization of female and male congregations, the Canadian Religious Conference, and the lives of two individual sisters: visionary congregational leader Alice Trudeau and social justice activist Mary Alban. This book focuses on the new transnational networks, feminist concepts, professionalization of religious life, and complex political landscapes that emerged during this period of drastic transition as women religious sought to reconstruct identities, redefine roles, and signify vision and mission at both the personal and collective levels. Following women religious as they encountered new meanings of faith in their congregations, the Church, and society at large, Vatican II and Beyond demonstrates that the search for a renewed vision was not just a response to secularization, but a way to be reborn as Catholic women.The year 2015 marked the fiftieth anniversary of the end of the Second Vatican Council, which aimed to align the Church with the modern world. Over the last five decades, women religious have engaged with the council’s reforms with unprecedented enthusiasm, far exceeding the expectations of the Church. Addressing how Canadian women religious envisioned and lived out the changes in religious life brought on by a pluralistic and secularizing world, Vatican II and Beyond analyzes the national organization of female and male congregations, the Canadian Religious Conference, and the lives of two individual sisters: visionary congregational leader Alice Trudeau and social justice activist Mary Alban. This book focuses on the new transnational networks, feminist concepts, professionalization of religious life, and complex political landscapes that emerged during this period of drastic transition as women religious sought to reconstruct identities, redefine roles, and signify vision and mission at both the personal and collective levels. Following women religious as they encountered new meanings of faith in their congregations, the Church, and society at large, Vatican II and Beyond demonstrates that the search for a renewed vision was not just a response to secularization, but a way to be reborn as Catholic women.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xp3w79

Introduction from: The Ambiguous Allure of the West
Author(s) Harrison Rachel V.
Abstract: Reviewing the Tate Britain gallery’s 2008 exhibition of British Orientalist painting—“The Lure of the East”—Egyptian novelist Ahdaf Soueif takes exception to the work of William Holman Hunt. She decries him for having come east primed with “an ideology and a fantasy to impose upon the landscape and the people.”² Her mistrust, echoing Edward Said’s monumental text, Orientalism (1978), is directed at the ways in which power and fantasy combine in a manipulation of “The East” and its peoples. There is little need to rehearse the detail here of Said’s well-known views on the hegemonic construction by the (arguably

CHAPTER 1 “After Schmemann”: from: Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Abstract: We may begin with the commonplace premise that in Orthodox tradition the primary meaning of theology has been taken to be prayeritself—the knowledge and experience of God acquired through participating in a relationship with him. Only secondarily does it imply (as the etymology indicates) “wordsaboutGod.”¹ Hence the notion ofliturgicaltheology, thetheologia primadiscussed above, whose elaboration was, of course, the goal of Fr. Alexander Schmemann’s life work.² It is no exaggeration to say that for him the liturgy itself is the fundamental object of interpretation. Regarding Schmemann’s approach to the Eucharist, for example, Peter

CHAPTER 3 Meaning in/and Metaphor from: Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Abstract: The focus of this chapter and the next is the functioning of religious language and the role played therein by metaphor. The task is to consider the properties by which metaphor undertakes the “redescription of reality” with which Ricoeur credits it. To navigate this major current in his thought, we will proceed in three stages. In this chapter, we introduce the “linguistic turn” and then follow the course of Ricoeur’s exegetical works to gain an appreciation of how his general theory of metaphoricity relates specifically to religious discourse: that is, the way in which the scriptural naming of God functions

CHAPTER 5 “The Summoned Subject” from: Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Abstract: In this chapter we trace the shape of liturgical subjectivity, employing the template provided by Ricoeur in his later works, especially Oneself as AnotherandThe Course of Recognition. The focus here will be on the nature of human capability itself, as fulfilled within a liturgical context; having reflected in previous chapters on the polyphony of liturgical language and symbolism, we must now consider the kind of self that may respond to such “music.” The subsequent chapters will afford the opportunity to examine the way in which the capable subject experiences the configuration of memory through the work of liturgy.

CHAPTER 7 Liturgical Time, Narrative, Memory, and History from: Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Abstract: In this chapter I propose a Ricoeurian approach to the mnemonic operations animating the ritual process—implicit though they may be. Specifically, through an investigation of several key sections of his magisterial antepenultimate work, Memory, History, Forgetting(henceforth,MHF), we will come to apprehend the complexity of the liturgical act construed as a quintessential form of “remembering.” In order to bring into relief certain elements ofMHFthat will prove germane to our intended liturgical application, we will first enter into a recent debate concerning the role of history (and historiography) in liturgical theology: The resolution of this debate (or

Chapter 1 THE EVOLUTION OF THE CITATION PROJECT: from: Points of Departure
Author(s) Jamieson Sandra
Abstract: This chapter provides an antidote to the (necessarily) highly systematized accounts of research processes to which new researchers frequently turn, accounts that in users’ minds too easily become ideals to be achieved and standards by which to measure their work. Books such as Johnny Saldaña’s (2013), Stefan Titscher et al.’s (2000), and John Creswell’s (2014) are invaluable procedural guides for conducting research—and highly recommended—but while they do acknowledge the unruliness of qualitative research, they nevertheless present a linear, cleaned-up version of the process that can leave new researchers at a loss when their own work is stalled. Along

Interchapter 2: from: Points of Departure
Abstract: One of the great challenges and opportunities of educational research is rectifying predictions about how learning theoretically works with how learning actuallyworks in—and across—different contexts. Those of us who study writing and literacy are uniquely aware of these tensions. In fact, writing studies research traditionally inquires into how beautifully divergent and surprising learning can be in practice. Conversations about writing processes in 1960s writing-pedagogy research embody this tension; theoretical understandings oftypicalprocesses of developing writers became dangerously calcified intothewriting process quite quickly. What began as inquiry about how writing happens (Cooper 1986; Emig 1971;

Chapter 3 THE THINGS THEY CARRY: from: Points of Departure
Author(s) Serviss Tricia
Abstract: For writing studies scholars like me who focus on teacher preparation, terms like teaching practicumandgraduate-student orientationstir up deep and pressing disciplinary tensions. We return to the same theoretical and practical questions as we do in the work of professionalizing ourselves as teachers:How can we best prepare writing teachers, both novice and veteran? When and how should programming support their professionalization? How do we simultaneously prepare them both as emerging writers and writing teachers?As we embrace digital writing, reading, and research tools even more fully, the cracks in our knowledge and strategies for preparing new writing

Chapter 5 TERMS AND PERCEPTIONS: from: Points of Departure
Author(s) Costello Kristi Murray
Abstract: Numerous articles and studies about research papers in first-year writing (FYW) courses appeared in English journals beginning in the 1930s, many calling for abolition of the extended research paper in FYW (Larson 1982; Strickland 2004). These recurrent calls, combined with recent Citation Project findings (Howard, Serviss, and Rodrigue 2010; Jamieson and Howard 2011; The Citation Project 2012) and other works (Nelson 2011) have led some programs to eliminate the “research paper” from their curriculum altogether. Though discussions among FYW faculty at a public university in the State University of New York (SUNY) system echoed the same questions about the validity

Chapter 6 RESEARCH AND RHETORICAL PURPOSE: from: Points of Departure
Author(s) Larson Brian N.
Abstract: In this chapter, we address student research writing in the context of a technical and professional writing course at a large public university. Specifically, we examine how students situate references to previous research in analytical reports. Our study addresses the question, for what rhetorical purposes do students integrate sources into research reports?This inquiry was inspired in part by recent work in the Citation Project regarding the ways students integrate sources into research writing. When Howard, Serviss, and Rodrigue (2010) examined eighteen student texts for instances of paraphrases, patchwriting, summary, and direct quotes, their analysis supported the hypothesis that students

Afterword: from: Points of Departure
Author(s) Howard Rebecca Moore
Abstract: When Tanya Rodrigue, Tricia Serviss, Sandra Jamieson, and I began work on the Citation Project, we faced a steep learning curve. None of us had much (if any) specific training in research methods for writing studies, and all of us knew the hermeneutics with which we were familiar were of little use for persuading audiences outside our field. None of our training prepared us for conducting research that would be replicable, aggregable, or data based. All of us thought, though, that such research was valuable for understanding how college students work with source material. Too much had been written about

CHAPTER 4 CHURCH AND DOGMA from: Fundamental Theology
Abstract: Revelation occurs only if the one addressed, the Church, hears it. But hearing is an active reception of what is heard. When the Church hears the word of God, revelation overflows Scripture itself and passes into the Church’s liturgy, practice, and dogma.¹ When the word is heard the first response is praise (liturgy). The second response is enacting the mission of charity that those who hear the word obediently embrace: first, there is sharing the truth, evangelizing those who have not heard; second, there is enacting the truth in the bodily works of love for the hungry and the naked.

CHAPTER 8 THEOLOGY from: Fundamental Theology
Abstract: God speaks to us, and his speaking demands an answer; he accomplishes our salvation in history, and that accomplishment commands a response. The first answer is the prayer of the Church in praise and thanksgiving, in words first taught to us by God in the Psalms; the first response is a re-actualization of the work of salvation in the liturgy, especially in Baptism and the Eucharist. A second response is the repetition of the word of God in evangelizing and catechesis and preaching, and the extension of God’s salvation of us in the works of love we do for others.

Book Title: Whitman & Dickinson-A Colloquy
Publisher: University of Iowa Press
Author(s): Miller Cristanne
Abstract: Whitman & Dickinsonis the first collection to bring together original essays by European and North American scholars directly linking the poetry and ideas of Walt Whitman and Emily Dickinson. The essays present intersections between these great figures across several fields of study, rehearsing well-established topics from new perspectives, opening entirely new areas of investigation, and providing new information about Whitman's and Dickinson's lives, work, and reception.Essays included in this book cover the topics of mentoring influence on each poet, religion, the Civil War, phenomenology, the environment, humor, poetic structures of language, and Whitman's and Dickinson's twentieth- and twenty-first-century reception-including prolonged engagement with Adrienne Rich's response to this "strange uncoupled couple" of poets who stand at the beginning of an American national poetic.Contributors Include:Marina Camboni Andrew Dorkin Vincent DussolBetsy Erkkilä Ed FolsomChristine GerhardtJay GrossmanJennifer LeaderMarianne NobleCécile RoudeauShira Wolosky
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1z27hqz

Rethinking the (Non)Convergence of Dickinson and Whitman: from: Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) FOLSOM ED
Abstract: We are now at the end of a full century, in the case of Walt Whitman, and well over a half century, in the case of Emily Dickinson, of serious critical investigation of the two poets that virtually everyone now agrees mark the beginnings of a unique American poetic tradition—a dynamic, two-pronged tradition of radical innovation. American poetry, as we conceive of it today, truly is the product of an unbelievable convergence—two contemporaneous poets, one female, one male, one a New Englander to the core, one a New Yorker through and through, both working to name an intense

Dickinson|Whitman: from: Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) WOLOSKY SHIRA
Abstract: Despite their pronounced differences, dickinson and Whitman are looking-glass reflections of each other and of America; although, as in facing mirrors, each one’s work is also the inverse of the other. One crux of this mutual reflection is their shared figural traditions of American culture. These originate in the biblical typologies that promised to align not only spiritual and mundane worlds, but the extensions of these into self, community, history, and God. Each practices and also tests this habit of figural alignment. The poetry of each is figurally complex, in ways often overlooked in Whitman (who can seem like the

Hyperbole and Humor in Whitman and Dickinson from: Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) MILLER CRISTANNE
Abstract: There is a long, if somewhat sporadic, history of scholarship acknowledging both Whitman and Dickinson as humorists.¹ Still, these poets’ exaggerated or hyperbolic claims are often read seriously, making Whitman seem egotistical and Dickinson depressed or without self-esteem. In this essay, we argue that the figure of hyperbole is both intrinsically linked with humor and a key element in what makes both poets’ work at once colloquially familiar and radically disorienting. For Whitman and Dickinson the use of hyperbole extends other features of their work that defamiliarize and disorient readers’ values, perceptions, and cognitive processes, while simultaneously creating the effect

Radical Imaginaries: from: Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) ERKKILA BETSY
Abstract: A decade ago, among american scholars, those who worked on Walt Whitman and those who worked on Emily Dickinson tended to divide into two distinct groups. Those who worked on Whitman, almost exclusively men, rarely ventured into Dickinson studies, which was dominated mostly by women, and those who worked on Dickinson had little to say about Whitman, except to negate his spread-eagle poetics and politics in comparison with the serious experimental art of Emily Dickinson. In recent years, as this collection and the historic conference it embodies make clear, this appears to have changed. But as someone who began my

Whitman, Dickinson, and Their Legacy of Lists and “It”s from: Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) DUSSOL VINCENT
Abstract: Indirection—Dickinson’s “Angled Road” (Fr 899)—sometimes works best: a fragment in French author Georges Perros’s Papiers collés IIsuggests the special relationship that seems to link lists to indefinites in Walt Whitman’s and Emily Dickinson’s poetry:

“Beginners”: from: Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) CAMBONI MARINA
Abstract: “Beginners” is the theoretical location in Adrienne Rich’s critical work where, taking as her starting point the eponymous poem Walt Whitman first published in the 1860–61 edition of Leaves of Grass, she develops a complex vision of American poetry while also building the genealogical line that would ultimately include her own work.² That location maps the plural logic of the poet who is not only committed to the truth of a “language intensified, intensifying our sense of possible reality,” but whose “poetic imagination” is “radical, meaning root-tangled in the grit of human arrangements and relationships:how we are with

Book Title: The Spirit of God-Short Writings on the Holy Spirit
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): Clifford Catherine E.
Abstract: Yves Congar was the most significant voice in Catholic pneumatology in the twentieth century. This new collection of short pieces makes his thought accessible to a broad range of readers - scholars, teachers, ecumenists and laity - and thus helps to ensure that an important theological voice, one that influenced many of the documents of the Second Vatican Council, continues to be heard. The Spirit of Godbrings together for the first time eight of Yves Congar's previously untranslated writings on the Holy Spirit composed after Vatican II (from 1969 to 1985). Two of these selections offer general overviews of Congar's pneumatology, a pneumatology based upon Scripture and the Tradition of the Church, but articulated in conversation with philosophers, ecumenical partners and non-believers. Other articles make clear the historical context of Vatican II's pneumatology and the Holy Spirit's crucial influence upon the unfolding of history and upon the moral life, the efficacy of the sacraments and, especially, upon ecclesial life.The writings inThe Spirit of Godhave been translated and edited by a team of scholars familiar with the work of the French Dominican theologian. An introduction situates each of the writings historically and highlights its theological significance. A bibliography lists Congar's publications on the Holy Spirit, the major articles and books written about his pneumatology, and the major scholarly resources to which Congar made reference in the notes that accompanied these writings. An index of biblical references and of personal names is also included.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zqrmtj

A Word about the Translation from: The Spirit of God
Author(s) Clifford Catherine E.
Abstract: In translating Congar’s words, we have tried to remain faithful both to the substance and to the style of the French text from which we worked. Our aim has been to make Congar’s ideas and his enthusiasm accessible to contemporary readers. To the extent that it has been possible to do so, we have supplemented Congar’s notes by giving complete publication data and by noting, in square brackets, where passages to which he refers would be found in English translations. For those writings of St. Thomas Aquinas that are cited frequently enough to appear in our list of abbreviations, we

3 The Spirit Is the Source of Life in Us Personally and in the Church from: The Spirit of God
Abstract: Having recalled the fact of an uncritical but constant claim that the Spirit of Godis at work in us and in the world, I have highlighted the main difficulties to which this claim gives rise. This sequence is well known to believers: after a time of peaceful possession of the faith, they become aware of challenges to it. If not doubt, at least an ongoing questioning—what St. Thomas called thecogitatio—is a part of the faith. It is the passport into what Paul Ricoeur calls the second naiveté,¹ which is more or less the state of a

[PART TWO Introduction] from: The Spirit of God
Abstract: “Pneumatologie dogmatique” was one of Congar’s contributions to a five-volume set, Initiation à la pratique de la théologie, edited by Bernard Lauret and François Refoulé in 1982. The book’s title might be rendered in English as “Beginning to Do Theology.” Still in print, the volumes—entitled Introduction, Dogmatics 1, Dogmatics 2, Ethics, and Practice—are meant for an academic setting, especially for the Catholic seminary context in which most of Congar’s teaching career was spent. Although an apologetic character is not absent from this presentation, Congar is here working more as a dogmatician than as an apologist, giving primacy to

1 Testimony about the Holy Spirit from: The Spirit of God
Abstract: The Third Person is not revealed to us in the way that the Son is revealed in Jesus Christ. However, the Spirit¹ has been and is made manifest by what the Spirit brings about. That is why we must examine the evidence—whether of Scripture, liturgical celebrations, or personal Christian experience. I have organized the testimonies in this section with an emphasis above all on the practical. One cannot say everything all at once, even about matters that are simultaneous and connected.The Spirit inspires people to pursue God’s work.

4 The Spirit Is the Breath of the Word and the Spirit of the Son from: The Spirit of God
Abstract: Despite how this title might be understood, my focus remains on the economy. At issue here is not the eternal processions but the work accomplished for our salvation.

[PART THREE Introduction] from: The Spirit of God
Abstract: Although the three articles that form Part Three were written and published before the works in Parts One and Two, they represent well the biblical, historical, sacramental, and pneumatological character of Congar’s mature thought. All three come from the last period of Congar’s scholarly life, 1969 to 1991, according to the periodday ization of Cornelis Van Vliet.¹ The climax of this part is arguably Congar’s most important article on the Holy Spirit, “Pneumatology or ‘Christomonism’ in the Latin Tradition?” We have included two additional writings, “Theology of the Holy Spirit and Theology of History” and “The Holy Spirit in the

Book Title: Close Encounters-Essays on Russian Literature
Publisher: Academic Studies Press
Author(s): JACKSON Robert Louis
Abstract: Close Encounters: Essays on Russian Literature combines discussions of ethical, esthetic, and philosophical interest raised by Pushkin, Gogol, Turgenev, Dostoevsky, Tolstoy, and Gorky, with close analyses of their texts. This book focuses on four thematic configurations: first (“Chance and Fate"), issues of freedom and responsibility, the necessity of free individual expression and yet the limits of will, or self-will; second (“Two Kinds of Beauty"), the unity of moral, esthetic, and spiritual categories, and the quest for the ideal; third (“Critical Perspectives"), examples of the type of commentary that approaches art with a unified ethical and spiritual perspective (Dostoevsky, Gorky, V.I. Ivanov, and the partially dissenting Bakhtin); and fourth (“Poems of Parting"), three poems (works by Tyutchev, Severyanin, and Pushkin) involving parting, loss, and recovery.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxshr0

A Glance at the Essays from: Close Encounters
Abstract: Close Encounters: Essays on Russian Literature,a selection of writings on Russian prose, poetry, and criticism in four parts, covers the period from my second book,Dostoevsky’s Quest for Form: A Study of his Philosophy of Art(1966), to the present. For reasons of space, I have omitted selections from my earliest period of writing, notably, fromThe Underground Man in Russian Literature(1958). Yet that study, with its core focus onDostoevsky’s Notes from the Underground(1864)—a work that both defends free will and criticizes self-will, while pointing to a spiritual path out of the underground—laid the

Moral-Philosophical Subtext in Pushkin’s The Stone Guest from: Close Encounters
Abstract: “The beginning is always decisive,” German novelist Theodor Fontane observed well over a hundred years ago. “If one hits it off right, then what follows succeeds through a kind of inner necessity.”² One may add that that necessity sometimes carries with it a hint of the inner content of the work. That is eminently the case with the beginning of The Stone Guest ( Kamennyi gost’, 1830) where Pushkin projects a major concern of his play: the question of Don Juan’s identity.

Turgenev’s “Knock… Knock… Knock!..”: from: Close Encounters
Abstract: As we know, even such an appreciative critic of Ivan Turgenev’s writings as Pavel V. Annenkov (1813–1887) placed the Russian writer’s “Knock… Knock… Knock!.. A Study” ( Stuk….. stuk…. Stuk...! Studiia,1871) among his “weak pieces.”² On the contrary, “Knock… Knock… Knock!..” belongs to the strongest works of Turgenev and of Russian literature. Complex in its design and brilliant in artistic execution, it is a work of psychological and philosophical depth.³ Turgenev several times stressed the importance of his story, though not without his usual admixture of apology and self-deprecation where his works were concerned. Although he found it “a

Bakhtin’s Poetics of Dostoevsky and “Dostoevsky’s Christian Declaration of Faith” from: Close Encounters
Abstract: “God can get along without man,” Mikhail M. Bakhtin wrote in “Towards a Reworking of the Dostoevsky Book” in 1961, “but man cannot get along without Him.”² How does Dostoevsky get along with God? Vyacheslav Ivanov answers this question in his Dostoevsky book (1932): “Dostoevsky has long since made his choice: his surety and pledge for it is the figure of Christ shining upon his path.”³ The “infallible criterion” for this claim, Ivanov insists, is “the accord between what Dostoevsky had to teach and the living artistic imagery in which he clothed it.”⁴ For Ivanov, “the investigation of Dostoevsky’s religious

Book Title: The Superstitious Muse-Thinking Russian Literature Mythopoetically
Publisher: Academic Studies Press
Author(s): Bethea David M.
Abstract: For several decades David Bethea has written authoritatively on the “mythopoetic thinking" that lies at the heart of classical Russian literature, especially Russian poetry. His theoretically informed essays and books have made a point of turning back to issues of intentionality and biography at a time when authorial agency seems under threat of “erasure" and the question of how writers, and poets in particular, live their lives through their art is increasingly moot. The lichnost’ (personhood, psychic totality) of the given writer is all-important, argues Bethea, as it is that which combines the specifically biographical and the capaciously mythical in verbal units that speak simultaneously to different planes of being. Pushkin’s Evgeny can be one incarnation of the poet himself and an Everyman rising up to challenge Peter’s new world order; Brodsky can be, all at once, Dante and Mandelstam and himself, the exile paying an Orphic visit to Florence (and, by ghostly association, Leningrad).This sort of metempsychosis, where the stories that constitute the Ur-texts of Russian literature are constantly reworked in the biographical myths shaping individual writers’ lives, is Bethea’s primary focus. This collection contains a liberal sampling of Bethea’s most memorable previously published essays along with new studies prepared for this occasion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxsj7q

Chapter 4 The Evolution of Evolution: from: The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Many of us know this famous passage from The Gift. Quite aside from its stylistic fireworks it has served as exhibit #1 in the ongoing debate about where Nabokov comes down on the issue of intelligent design (ID) and evolutionary theory. Depending on one’s epistemological point of departure, readers have tried now for some time to “get at” VN’s strategy for mixing and matching scientific and artistic observation. According to this strategy the artist must be able to observe and name the phenomenal world like the naturalist, the naturalist must be able to integrate different planes of reality like the

Chapter 7 Of Pushkin and Pushkinists from: The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Introductions to books and collections about Alexander Pushkin tend to begin, especially when their origin is not Russian, with de rigueurnods to the poet’s massive presence in, and seminal influence on, the native culture. Such expository scaffolding falls under the category of preemptive advertising for a figure who, outside his context and more importantly outside his language, has difficulty translating. Thus, from the operas of Glinka, Tchaikovsky, Musorgsky and Rimsky-Korsakov to the stylish illustrations and set designs of Benois, Bilibin, and Dobuzhinsky; from endlessly anthologized paintings by Kiprensky and Repin to ghosts of allusion in better known works by

Chapter 9 Pushkin’s Mythopoetic Consciousness: from: The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Pushkin was possessed of a richly mythopoetic consciousness. He was also, as numerous friends attest, intensely superstitious. Indeed, for a poet of Pushkin’s range and energy, it is not surprising that some of his finest works are motivated thematically on the dual and interpenetrating notions that myths can, literally, come to life and that forces beyond one’s control can prearrange one’s destiny. Yet Pushkin never made the connection between certain crucial myths (or beliefs, superstitions) and his own unfolding biography explicit.He was protected from this not only by his ownamour proprebut by the carapace of what Lydia

Chapter 13 Pushkin’s The History of Pugachev: from: The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: The History of Pugachevis, conceptually speaking, one of the most fascinating works in Pushkin’s oeuvre. At the same time it is, belletristically if not historiographically, pretty much a flop, a point which has been made more than once over the past two centuries, most persuasively in recent decades by Marc Raeff.² Yet Pushkin was clearly up to something important here, in 1833–34, as he gained access to government archives and gathered materials, visited the sites of the 1773–74 rebellion in the Orenburgguberniya, took down eyewitness accounts, and drafted his history, a history which was intended to

Chapter 14 Sorrento Photographs: from: The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: The Russian poet Vladislav Khodasevich (1886–1939), who spent the last seventeen years of his life in Western Europe, wrote a total of five books of verse: the first two, Youth ( Molodost’, 1908) and The Happy Little House (Shchastlivyi domik,1914), are largely derivative and, by the poet’s own admis sion, immature;² the last three, Grain’s Way (Putem zerna,1920), The Heavy Lyre (Tiazhelaia lira,1922), and European Night (Evropeiskaia noch’, 1927), form the limited body of his mature work.³ It is on the basis of the last three collections that Khodasevich’s modest reputation has been established. It is ironic

Chapter 16 Sologub, Nabokov, and the Limits of Decadent Aesthetics from: The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: One of the more fascinating aspects of Nabokov’s artistic method is the way he “covers his tracks” when referring to potential intertextual sources or “ influences.” He prefers his readers to believe that each work has emerged fully formed from the broad forehead (as opposed to dark loins) of his Zeuslike consciousness. Or so the prefaces to his novels, with their disclaimers as to matters of genealogy and their repeated references to the “Viennese delegation,” would have us think. It is not that Nabokov hesitates to engage in intertextual punning or name-dropping, which practice clearly enriches the links within his

Chapter 1 Nabokov’s Beginnings: from: The Translator’s Doubts
Abstract: In the summer of 1922, Gamaiun, a Russian publishing company in Berlin, commissioned the twenty-three-year-old Nabokov to translate Alice in Wonderlandinto Russian. As Nabokov’s biographer Brian Boyd aptly noted, Nabokov apparently “found the translation easy work afterColas Breugnon,” his first serious work of translation.¹ Though Nabokov later claimed he had translated Romain Rolland and Lewis Carroll simultaneously, Boyd, based on the evidence of Nabokov’s letters from Cambridge, dates the Carroll translation to the summer of 1922. The translation, with Sergei Zalshupin’s illustrations, was published in 1923 asAnia v strane chudes(“Ania in Wonderland”) under Nabokov’s pen name

Chapter 2 The Novel on Translation and “Über-Translation”: from: The Translator’s Doubts
Abstract: In his 1937 French essay for the Nouvelle Revue française, “Pouchkine, ou le vrai et le vraisemblable” (“Pushkin, or the Real and the Plausible”),³ Nabokov claimed that the truth of another’s life is inaccessible because thought inevitably distorts whatever it tries to encompass. However, the intuitions of a fictionalized biography motivated by love for its subject might convey a “plausible” life bearing a mysterious affinity for “the poet’s work, if not the poet himself.”⁴ This relatively early statement on this subject by Nabokov, made during centennial celebrations of Aleksandr Pushkin’s death, becomes poignant in light of Nabokov’s novel Pale Fire

INTRODUCTION from: Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: Merold Westphal stands as one of the preeminent thinkers in North America concerning Continental philosophy of religion. Moreover, together with John Caputo and Richard Kearney, Westphal can be thought of as one of the main philosophers who popularized postmodern thought on religion in North America. The present work reviews Westphal’s contributions to philosophy, what possible offerings those may have for theology, and how his work might best be understood within these discourses.

4. HEGELIANS IN HEAVEN, BUT ON EARTH . . .: from: Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: Westphal is attempting to craft a prophetic line of philosophy he finds sorely lacking, particularly with Hegel. This is also the case for Husserlian phenomenology, which he sees as replicating Hegel by being purely descriptive, never prescriptive.¹ At this point, it is clear that Westphal aims to push philosophy into the realm of action: to not just reasonably argue but to move those arguments toward helping the widow, orphan, and stranger. Westphal sees in Kierkegaard a possible way to adapt this preferential option for the poor into a postmodern framework; with Kierkegaard, Westphal finds a Christian response to a society

6. FAITH SEEKING UNDERSTANDING: from: Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: Overcoming Onto-theologyfinds itself in two worlds: one that is suspicious of postmodern critique of religion and one whose appreciation of postmodern thought makes it suspicious of religion.¹ Speaking to both, Westphal situates the work as a primer for the Christian theist’s endeavor into postmodern philosophy. The book’s very first words set this trajectory:

CONCLUSION: from: Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: As I mentioned in the introduction, when researching this book and speaking at both philosophical and theological conferences (mostly in Europe, but also in North America), I got mainly two reactions to Westphal’s thinking: those who thought his work truly embraced Protestant Christianity and provided a pathway for Christians to seriously consider mostly secular critiques of religion (similar to his opening statements in Overcoming Onto-Theology), and those who found that his work did not pass the standard for rigorous philosophical thinking. Those in the latter camp, especially phenomenologists, charged that his appropriations did not adequately consider the original context and

Book Title: The Cinema of the Soviet Thaw-Space, Materiality, Movement
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Oukaderova Lida
Abstract: Following Joseph Stalin's death in 1953, the Soviet Union experienced a dramatic resurgence in cinematic production. The period of the Soviet Thaw became known for its relative political and cultural liberalization; its films, formally innovative and socially engaged, were swept to the center of international cinematic discourse. In The Cinema of the Soviet Thaw, Lida Oukaderova provides an in-depth analysis of several Soviet films made between 1958 and 1967 to argue for the centrality of space-as both filmic trope and social concern-to Thaw-era cinema. Opening with a discussion of the USSR's little-examined late-fifties embrace of panoramic cinema, the book pursues close readings of films by Mikhail Kalatozov, Georgii Danelia, Larisa Shepitko and Kira Muratova, among others. It demonstrates that these directors' works were motivated by an urge to interrogate and reanimate spatial experience, and through this project to probe critical issues of ideology, social progress, and subjectivity within post-Stalinist culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxz0fb

INTRODUCTION from: The Cinema of the Soviet Thaw
Abstract: In May 1961 the Soviet film journal Iskusstvo kino(The Art of Cinema) published a short review of the just-released documentary The City of Great Fate (Gorod bol’shoi sud’by), directed by Il’ia Kopalin. The film—selected as an offi-cial Soviet entry for the shorts competition at the Cannes Film Festival taking place the very same month—is a visual lexicon of Moscow and joins numerous other Soviet productions of the 1960s that sought to define the image of the capital city within the more tolerant framework of post-Stalinist Soviet culture. The reviewer A. Zlobin unequivocally praised the film for its

Book Title: Sonata Fragments-Romantic Narratives in Chopin, Schumann, and Brahms
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Davis Andrew
Abstract: In Sonata Fragments, Andrew Davis argues that the Romantic sonata is firmly rooted, both formally and expressively, in its Classical forebears, using Classical conventions in order to convey a broad constellation of Romantic aesthetic values. This claim runs contrary to conventional theories of the Romantic sonata that place this nineteenth-century musical form squarely outside inherited Classical sonata procedures. Building on Sonata Theory, Davis examines moments of fracture and fragmentation that disrupt the cohesive and linear temporality in piano sonatas by Chopin, Brahms, and Schumann. These disruptions in the sonata form are a narrative technique that signify temporal shifts during which we move from the outer action to the inner thoughts of a musical agent, or we move from the story as it unfolds to a flashback or flash-forward. Through an interpretation of Romantic sonatas as temporally multi-dimensional works in which portions of the music in any given piece can lie inside or outside of what Sonata Theory would define as the sonata-space proper, Davis reads into these ruptures a narrative of expressive features that mark these sonatas as uniquely Romantic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxz0jw

6 Banal Evil and Useless Knowledge: from: Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Geddes Jennifer L.
Abstract: Three related divisions currently mark scholarship on evil. The first is the divide between studies of perpetrators and studies of victims. In the field of Holocaust studies, this division is a matter of principle for some scholars, who focus solely on the testimonies and histories of the victims. One rationale behind refusing to study the perpetrators of the Nazi horrors is the belief that they do not deserve the dignity even of being made objects of study. Behind the work of those who study the perpetrators is the idea that unless we understand how it was that humans came to

10 Terrorism, Evil, and Everyday Depravity from: Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) On Bat-Ami Bar
Abstract: The appropriation of the term “evil” by President George W. Bush’s administration has caused me to hesitate in thinking about terrorism as “evil.” Quite quickly after the Al Qaeda attacks of September 11, 2001, the Bush administration began to deploy the term “evil” in conjunction with the term “axis” and referred, with the phrase “an axis of evil,” to the Al Qaeda network and the weave of individuals, organizations, and especially states that support it (Bush 2002). The connection of “evil” with “axis” in this context is probably intended to evoke memories of World War II and use them to

Book Title: Reading Eco-An Anthology
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Capozzi Rocco
Abstract: Umberto Eco is, quite simply, a genius. He is a renowned medievalist, philosopher, novelist, a popular journalist, and linguist. He is as warm and witty as he is learned-and quite probably the best-known academic and novelist in the world today. The goal of this anthology is to examine his ideas of literary semiotics and interpretation as evidenced both in his scholarly work and in his fiction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxz0xk

1.1 Semiotics and the Philosophy of Language from: Reading Eco
Author(s) Eco Umberto
Abstract: There are many disciplines–such as linguistics or iconography or musicology–that are concerned with different semiotic systems, of which they represent the rules of functioning. We will call these disciplines grammars. In this sense Italian linguistics is a grammar, as is the study of gestural languages, or as it can be the study of different types of road signals. Any theory of signs that assumed to be a general or universal grammar would be a grammar in the above sense in so far as it takes into account only these rules that are allegedly at work in every sign-system,

1.4 Universe Of The Mind. from: Reading Eco
Author(s) Eco Umberto
Abstract: In the course of his intellectual career, Yuri M. Lotman has applied his mind to a wide range of disciplines: aesthetics, poetics, semiotic theory, the history of culture, mythology, and cinema, in addition to the principle themes of the history of Russian literature of which he is Professor at the University of Tartu in Estonia. His works range from the analysis of cultural phenomena such as blue jeans, and observations on demonology, through readings of poetic texts and consideration of the problems of interpretation, to references to mathematics and biology. However, even readers unfamiliar with the entire range of Lotman’s

1.5 An Author and his Interpreters from: Reading Eco
Author(s) Eco Umberto
Abstract: Then I think that a narrator, as well as a poet, should never provide interpretations of his own work. A text is a machine conceived for eliciting interpretations.

2.1 The Open Work in Theory and Practice from: Reading Eco
Author(s) Seed David
Abstract: Reviewing the early works of George Eliot in 1866 Henry James reflected on the possibility of foreshadowing later events in narratives without every describing them. This possibility leads James to make the following statement about the composition of novels: “In every novel the work is divided between the writer and the reader; but the writer makes the reader very much as he makes his characters. When he makes him ill, that is, makes him different, he does no work; the writer does all. When he makes him well, that is, makes him interested, then the reader does quite half the

2.3 The Themata of Eco’s Semiotics of Literature from: Reading Eco
Author(s) Doležel Lubomir
Abstract: In a key passage of The Book of Laughter and ForgettingMilan Kundera poses the question why the mature Beethoven “committed his most beautiful meditations” to the form of variations. At first glance, variations might appear to be “the most superficial of forms, … a work suited for a lacemaker rat her than a Beethoven”. But when the son-writer deciphers the unfinished gesture of his dying father-musicologist, he comes to understand that the form of variations is a voyage “into the infinite internal variety which is hidden in every thing”. The variation technique, a tenacious pursuit of certain themata with

2.9 On Truth and Lying: from: Reading Eco
Author(s) Debbèche Patrick
Abstract: Fellow travelers and long term acquaintances, Umberto Eco and Algirdas Julien Greimas’ friendship and collaboration date from the beginning of the 1960s. Indeed, they both published a chapter in the seminal volume, Communications 8, L’analyse structurale du récit, edited by Roland Barthes, along with Claude Bremond, Christian Metz, Tzvetan Todorov and Gérard Genette, to name but the most prominent of the contributors who were to have a major impact on the shaping of theory and methodology in the social sciences and the humanities. Greimas’ contribution, “Eléments pour une théorie de l’interprétation mythique,” consisted in working out the descriptive procedures for

2.10 Eco and Dramatology from: Reading Eco
Author(s) Kevelson Roberta
Abstract: That Eco makes frequent recourse to narrative fiction is not surprising since the semiotician and the author of fictive narrative are two of the most public faces he presents to us who adore and admire him from whatever portion of himself he gives freely and with great gusto. But what is a surprising fact, to use Peirce’s notable term for that which comes to us from experience and shakes us out of old habit into new play, is Eco’s occasional mention of the dramatic text as representing through the work of so me twentieth-century playwrights a prototype of the indeterminacy,

3.4 Interpretation, Overinterpretation, Paranoid Interpretation and Foucault’s Pendulum from: Reading Eco
Author(s) Bondanella Peter
Abstract: Only a very naive reader of Il pendolo di Foucault(1988,Foucault’s Pendulum) would not presume that Umberto Eco’s second novel can be enriched by reference to Eco’s theoretical works on narrative theory, semiotics, and popular culture. But the most important clue to Eco’s thinking while he composed this difficult work is infrequently cited by his critics. It is a theoretical introduction to a collection of Italian essays on esoteric interpretations of Dante from the nineteenth century–L’idea deforme: interpretazioni esoteriche di Dante(1989,The Distorted Idea: Esoteric Interpretations of Dante)–research carried out by Eco’s students in a seminar

3.6 Irony-clad Foucault from: Reading Eco
Author(s) Hutcheon Linda
Abstract: In certain critical circles, from the moment the tide of Umberto Eco’s second novel was announced, the speculation began. The Name of the Rosehad been chock full of more semiotic theories than most competent readers could ever hope to discern. Did this mean that the more helpfully namedFoucault’s Pendulumwould come complete with long discourses on sexuality, knowledge, and power? It was true that Eco had not often mentioned Michel Foucault by name in his theoretical work before this, but the tide was certainly directive, was it not? Then we began to read the novel. And—only then

3.8 “Whose ‘Excess of Wonder’ Is It Anyway?: from: Reading Eco
Author(s) Bouchard Norma
Abstract: To the reader unacquainted with Eco’s work,¹ The Island of the Day Beforeis likely to be read as an historical-cum romance novel relating the adventures of a seventeenth-century man–Roberto de La Griva–reconstructed by an anonymous narrator from his letters and unfinished novel. Following an arrest in Paris, Roberto is offered a chance for freedom by the Cardinal Mazarin if he agrees to go on a mission to uncover the British attempt to find the “punto fijo;” the fixed point to measure the longitudes which was sought by European navigators till Harrison’s invention of the maritime chronometer. Roberto

3 THE DYNAMIC OF THE TEXT BETWEEN THE TWO DEATHS: from: Trauma in First Person
Abstract: This chapter is, to a large extent, the theoretical heart of the entire book. Here I propose a semiotic model for understanding the dynamic of autobiographical writing during the course of per sis tent, brutal, and massive trauma, as experienced by victims of the Holocaust and other events of mass vio lence and harsh discrimination. The model I have used is based on concepts borrowed from the work of the French psychoanalyst Jacques Lacan, which may not be intuitive to some readers, but which I have sought to make accessible even to those who are not conversant with this discourse.

Book Title: In Praise of Heteronomy-Making Room for Revelation
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Westphal Merold
Abstract: Recognizing the essential heteronomy of postmodern philosophy of religion, Merold Westphal argues against the assumption that human reason is universal, neutral, and devoid of presupposition. Instead, Westphal contends that any philosophy is a matter of faith and the philosophical encounter with theology arises from the very act of thinking. Relying on the work of Spinoza, Kant, and Hegel, Westphal discovers that their theologies render them mutually incompatible and their claims to be the voice of autonomous and universal reason look dubious. Westphal grapples with this plural nature of human thought in the philosophy of religion and he forwards the idea that any appeal to the divine must rest on a historical and phenomenological analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxz1pf

1 EXECUTIVE AND LEGISLATIVE AUTONOMY from: In Praise of Heteronomy
Abstract: Abraham Lincoln concluded his famous Cooper Union speech in 1860 with these words: “Let us have faith that right makes might, and in that faith, let us, to the end, dare to do our duty as we understand it.”¹ Five years and much tragedy later, he concluded his Second Inaugural Address with similar but importantly different words: “With malice toward none, with charity for all, with firmness in the right as God gives us to see the right, let us strive on to finish the work we are in. . . .”² On the “crucial difference” between “our duty as

8 HEGEL’S THEOLOGY II from: In Praise of Heteronomy
Abstract: The usual story is that Hegel is the culmination of German Idealism, drawing on and revising the work of Kant, Fichte, Schelling, and a few others. There is much truth in this approach.¹ But it is also true that Hegel tells us “thought must beginby placing itself at the standpoint of Spinozism; to be a follower of Spinoza is the essentialcommencementof all Philosophy . . . when a man begins to philosophize, the soul mustcommenceby bathing in this ether of the One Substance” (HP/S, III, 257; emphasis added).

Book Title: The Prayers and Tears of Jacques Derrida-Religion without Religion
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: Caputo's book is riveting.... A singular achievement of stylistic brio and impeccable scholarship, it breaks new ground in making a powerful case for treating Derrida as homo religiosis.... There can be no mistaking the importance of Caputo's work." -Edith Wyschogrod
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005rjr

Introduction: from: The Prayers and Tears of Jacques Derrida
Abstract: In his notebooks of 1976, Jacques Derrida proposes to hirnself the task of describing his broken covenant with Judaism in a work that would “leave nothing, if possible, in the dark of what related me to Judaism, alliance [ alliance, covenant; Hebrew:Berit] broken in every respect” (Circon., 145/Circum., 154). For Derrida is Jewish without being Jewish, JewishsansJudaism, married outside Judaism, his sons uncircumcised, he an atheist. Of this broken covenant, this breach of analliancethat stretches “throughout thousands of years of Judaism,” he says—now the time has changed to 1989 and this note has been stitched

I. The Apophatic from: The Prayers and Tears of Jacques Derrida
Abstract: The messianic tone of deconstruction was not at all evident at the start. Instead, in the midst of what looked more like a certain Nietzschean tone recently adopted in French philosophy in the 1960s, Derrida was visited with a suggestive “objection” that occasioned his first encounter with theology. “[V]ery early on,” he says, “I was accused of—rather than being congratulated for—resifting the procedures of negative theology” ( Psy., 537/DNT, 74), of putting these procedures to work, it would seem, in the service of somemagnum mysteriumcalleddifférance.

II. The Apocalyptic from: The Prayers and Tears of Jacques Derrida
Abstract: The transition from the apophatic to the messianic, from Derrida’s several confrontations with the negative theology of Christian Neoplatonism to the more Jewish and prophetie strains of the later works, is best made by following his analysis of venirandà venir, of something “coming,” something, I know not what, that comes over us like an absolute surprise. If Derrida’s apophaticism is deeply messianic, as I hope to

V. Circumcision from: The Prayers and Tears of Jacques Derrida
Abstract: Derrida is not a Jewish writer in the strong sense in which that is true of Rosenzweig, Buber, or Levinas. He is a Jew who is “rightly described as an atheist,” of an “assimilated” family, raised in an Arab country, whose native language, culture, and education are thoroughly French—“Christian Latin French” ( Circon., 57/Circum., 58)—trained in the Greco-European tradition of philosophy and letters, ofmondialatinisation, who has lived in France since the age of nineteen but whose greatest following is in the United States, always being made welcome elsewhere. But this does not mean his work is not driven

VI. Confession from: The Prayers and Tears of Jacques Derrida
Abstract: Circumfession: Fifty-nine periods and periphraseswritten in a sortof internal margin, between Geoffrey Bennington’s book and work in preparation (January 1989–April 1990)is supposed to come as a surprise, to make a revelation about something we

9 Description and Comparison of Religion from: Signs and Society
Abstract: In 1947, a young anthropologist named Ward Goodenough arrived at Chuuk (formerly Truk), a group of atolls and high islands in the Caroline Islands of Micronesia, as part of the Coordinated Investigation in Micronesian Anthropology (CIMA), funded by the Office of Naval Research and supervised by George Peter Murdock of Yale University. More than a half-century later in 2002, Goodenough, by then a university professor emeritus at the University of Pennsylvania, published the results of his research on the pre-Christian religion of Chuuk in Under Heaven’s Brow, a book that represents the lifework of the most distinguished Micronesian specialist in

Book Title: A Theory of Musical Narrative- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): ALMÉN BYRON
Abstract: Byron Almén proposes an original synthesis of approaches to musical narrative from literary criticism, semiotics, historiography, musicology, and music theory, resulting in a significant critical reorientation of the field. This volume includes an extensive survey of traditional approaches to musical narrative illustrated by a wide variety of musical examples that highlight the range and applicability of the theoretical apparatus. Almén provides a careful delineation of the essential elements and preconditions of musical narrative organization, an eclectic analytical model applicable to a wide range of musical styles and repertoires, a classification scheme of narrative types and subtypes reflecting conceptually distinct narrative strategies, a wide array of interpretive categories, and a sensitivity to the dependence of narrative interpretation on the cultural milieu of the work, its various audiences, and the analyst. A Theory of Musical Narrativeprovides both an excellent introduction to an increasingly important conceptual domain and a complex reassessment of its possibilities and characteristics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005szf

2 Perspectives and Critiques from: A Theory of Musical Narrative
Abstract: The problematic status of musical narrative as a disciplinary entity today is reflected in a general disagreement about its nature, properties, and range of application. Some scholars have ascribed it primarily to programmatic music (Kivy), while others expand its reach to music that is in some manner formally problematic (Newcomb, Abbate) or to a broader spectrum of works including “absolute” music and instrumental genres (Maus). A further group (Nattiez, Abbate, Kramer) has questioned its applicability to music. Musical narrative has variously denoted a loose analogy between literary and musical patterning, a historically bounded and primarily Romantic compositional impulse (Newcomb), a

8 Ironic Narratives: from: A Theory of Musical Narrative
Abstract: The merging of inductive analytical levels—the agential and actantial—with a quartet of overarching, culturally significant categories—the narrative archetypes—is an important feature of the theory of musical narrative found in this volume. The former ensure that the musical details themselves determine the narrative trajectory, while the latter situates that trajectory within the network of social and personal value. The archetypes, as we have seen, model the distinct outcomes resulting from the interactions between alternative structures of power—interactions that are constantly being played out in our intrapsychic, interpersonal, and communal relationships. Given the pervasiveness and importance of

7 Wa-Ma Nasayna (We Have Not Forgotten): from: The War of 1948
Author(s) Ben-Zvi Tal
Abstract: Palestinian art created within Israel’s 1948 borders possesses unique characteristics deriving from its being part of the visual culture of the Palestinian minority in Israel. In this artistic-national construct, artist, graphic designer, and printmaker Abed Abdi played a leading role as a consequence of his work over the decade between 1972 and 1982 as graphics editor of the publications of the Communist Party and its successor, the Democratic Front for Peace and Equality, the Arabic language journal Al-Ittihad, and theAl-Jadidliterary journal. Additionally, many of his works were also published in the Communist Party’s Hebrew language paper,Zo Haderekh

Book Title: The Essential Caputo-Selected Writings
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): PUTT B. KEITH
Abstract: This landmark collection features selected writings by John D. Caputo, one of the most creative and influential thinkers working in the philosophy of religion today. B Keith Putt presents 21 of Caputo's most significant contributions from his distinguished 40-year career. Putt's thoughtful editing and arrangement highlights how Caputo's multidimensional thought has evolved from radical hermeneutics to radical theology. A guiding introduction situates Caputo's corpus within the context of debates in the Continental philosophy of religion and exclusive interview with him adds valuable information about his own views of his work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005tww

2 From Sacred Anarchy to Political Theology: from: The Essential Caputo
Author(s) CROCKETT CLAYTON
Abstract: CLAYTON CROCKETT (HEREAFTER CC): According to the editor B. Keith Putt, the notion of “sacred anarchy” is the hidden thread that animates your work from Radical Hermeneuticsup to the present. Can you explain in your terms what you mean by sacred anarchy, and do you agree with Keith’s insistence on the importance of this theme for your thought? JOHN D. CAPUTO (HEREAFTER JDC): Let me say first of all that this is Keith’s interpretation. It is his responsibility to demonstrate it, to carry it through. I am, structurally speaking, in no better position to comment upon it than Keith.

7 Demythologizing Heidegger: from: The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Martin Heidegger could never resist a good story. He could never resist giving what he had discovered about aletheiaand the oblivion of Being a narrative form. InBeing and Time, we were promised a story—which was to be written backwards—of the “destruction of the history of ontology.” Beginning at the end, with Kant, it was to feel its way back through the tradition in a deconstructive gesture, looking for what had all along been blocking the discovery of the temporal meaning of Being which had at last begun to emerge in Kant. In the later works this

8 Hermeneutics as the Recovery of Man from: The Essential Caputo
Abstract: When Constantine Constantius—the Kierkegaardian pseudonym—undertook a return trip to Berlin, he made an experiment in “repetition” which was, I want to argue, of some consequence for hermeneutics. I believe that what we nowadays call “hermeneutics”—Heideggerian and post-Heideggerian hermeneutics—defends the view that repetition is possible and indeed that everything in hermeneutics turns on its possibility. On this account, hermeneutics is always a work of retrieval ( Wiederholung), a laying out (auslegen) which fetches back (wiederholen), an explicating which retrieves what is latent and puts it into words for the first time, as Heidegger says (SZ, § 63, 314

10 On Not Knowing Who We Are: from: The Essential Caputo
Abstract: In this essay, which I take as the point of departure for the present study, from which indeed the whole has drawn its name, I argue that Michel Foucault’s thought is best construed as a hermeneutics of not knowingwho we are. I construe Foucault’s work to operate according to what Jacques Derrida calls the logic of the sans. That means that we get the best results by proceedingsans voir,sans avoir,sans savoir, without sight, without savvy, and without seizing hold of what we love. This is a bit of a perversity, turning as it does, not on

13 Shedding Tears beyond Being: from: The Essential Caputo
Abstract: The resources and strategies of negative theology, its “detours, locutions and syntax” ( Marg., 6/6),² have always fascinated Jacques Derrida, and that is because for Derrida, as for negative theology, our desire beyond desire is for what lies “beyond being,” to use a venerable expression from Christian Neoplatonism. But what lies “beyond being” for Derrida is tears, prayers and tears, tears shed beyond being (V, 42/40), prayers sent like sighs beyond being, truth, and knowledge. That produces, on the one hand, a remarkable proximity of his work to negative theology, even as, on the other hand, it opens up an abyss

14 The Good News about Alterity: from: The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Derrida’s work is often mistakenly criticized as a kind of linguistic subjective idealism which traps us inside a chain of linguistic signifiers, unable to do anything but play vainly with linguistic strings. In fact, Derrida’s thought is through and through a philosophy of “alterity,” of openness to the other, which provides a rich and vigorous catalyst for religious thought. After demonstrating the wrongheadedness of the subjectivist reading of Derrida, I go on to show the richness of this philosophy of alterity for theology: first, in terms of the negative theology, where alterity refers to God as the absolutely Other; and

16 Toward a Postmodern Theology of the Cross: from: The Essential Caputo
Abstract: In this age of the death of God, it is of no little interest and significance that two of the major European philosophers of this century, two of the masters of postmodernity, if this is a word we still can use, have chosen (at different points in their work: one very early on, the other only later) to comment on the ageless power and beauty of Augustine’s Confessions. In the summer semester of 1921, at the very beginning of his work, when he was still thinking within a Christian context, the young Heidegger (then thirty-two years old) devoted a lecture

18 Sacred Anarchy: from: The Essential Caputo
Abstract: “Postmodernism,” on my reading, is the issue of a crisis in hermeneutics. It is a radicalization of the problem of hermeneusisthat faces up to the fact that hermeneutics has no metaphysical backup, no Hegelian assurances that the truth is inevitably working itself out, continually being reappropriated again and again. It is a more merciless hermeneutics that does not so much deny “tradition,” as its critics charge, as redefine tradition as a highly factical, fortuitous, and almost hopelessly complex accumulation of competing subtraditions, power plays, and incommensurable language games, along with a dash of wisdom here and there. (Whose wisdom?

19 In Search of a Sacred Anarchy: from: The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Like Martin Heidegger, like many of us, Calvin Schrag has had a theological point of departure. His earliest work, Existence and Freedom, published some forty years ago, undertook one of the first important confrontations of Heidegger and Kierkegaard in English. 1 Schrag understood that a great deal of Continental philosophy originated in the decision made by Kierkegaard to expose philosophy to biblical categories, on the premise that if the categories of Greek philosophy are all we have, then the poor existing individual is lost. It was in no small part from that decision that Heidegger’sBeing and Timeemerged, and

Book Title: Feminist Phenomenology Futures- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): OLKOWSKI DOROTHEA E.
Abstract: Distinguished feminist philosophers consider the future of their field and chart its political and ethical course in this forward-looking volume. Engaging with themes such as the historical trajectory of feminist phenomenology, ways of perceiving and making sense of the contemporary world, and the feminist body in health and ethics, these essays affirm the base of the discipline as well as open new theoretical spaces for work that bridges bioethics, social identity, physical ability, and the very nature and boundaries of the female body. Entanglements with thinkers such as Heidegger, Merleau-Ponty, Beauvoir, and Arendt are evident and reveal new directions for productive philosophical work. Grounded in the richness of the feminist philosophical tradition, this work represents a significant opening to the possible futures of feminist phenomenological research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005vm7

10 TRANS-SUBJECTIVITY/TRANS-OBJECTIVITY from: Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) DAIGLE CHRISTINE
Abstract: My work, whether it is grounded in Nietzsche, Sartre, Beauvoir, or others, is informed by a desire to understand the human being’s presence in the world and seek to establish grounds for an ethics of flourishing. However, an ethical theory can be successful only if it is grounded in an adequate theory of subjectivity. Like many other feminist critics, I fail to be convinced by traditional rationalistic philosophy that paints a portrait of the relation between individual and world as straightforward and easily conceived. Instead I draw on the work of existentialists and phenomenologists, as well as structuralists and post-structuralists,

Book Title: Self-Understanding and Lifeworld-Basic Traits of a Phenomenological Hermeneutics
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): RAYMAN JOSHUA
Abstract: What are the foundations of human self-understanding and the value of responsible philosophical questioning? Focusing on Heidegger's early work on facticity, historicity, and the phenomenological hermeneutics of factical-historical life, Hans-Helmuth Gander develops an idea of understanding that reflects our connection with the world and other, and thus invites deep consideration of phenomenology, hermeneutics, and deconstruction. He draws usefully on Husserl's phenomenology and provides grounds for exchange with Descartes, Dilthey, Nietzsche, Gadamer, Ricoeur, and Foucault. On the way to developing a contemporary hermeneutical philosophy, Gander clarifies the human relation to self in and through conversation with Heidegger's early hermeneutics. Questions about reading and writing then follow as these are the very actions that structure human self-understanding and world understanding.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005w6h

CHAPTER TWO THE EXPERIENTIAL STRUCTURE OF THE SELF: from: Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: To gain the philosophical attitude that appears necessary from out of the hermeneutical turn of phenomenology for an analysis of determinate human life as facticity means, to begin with, as Pöggeler puts it, “to break away from or shut off the machinery of Husserl’s phenomenological reductions.”¹ Instead of wanting to penetrate into a deep layer of the immutable ideal “I” on the path of reductions, phenomenological hermeneutics forms its approach by recurring to pretheoretical experiences,from which it works on its ontological analysis of structure by means of the interpretation of concrete appearances. In the context of discussions of the

OPEN END from: Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: With the hermeneutical demonstration that our never other than life worldly situated self-understanding is always already historical at the origin of its self-worldly significance, the factual analysis of Heidegger’s early work comes to an end, in that for one thing, it makes explicit the point of departure of phenomenological hermeneutics of factical historical life in the wealth of its structures. For another, beyond the fact of placing the starting point in life, the central question of his early work illuminates at the same time how “factical life-experience belongs in a wholly originary sense to the problematic of philosophy,”¹ in that

Book Title: The Spirits of Crossbones Graveyard-Time, Ritual, and Sexual Commerce in London
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Hausner Sondra L.
Abstract: Every month, a ragtag group of Londoners gather in the site known as Crossbones Graveyard to commemorate the souls of medieval prostitutes believed to be buried there-the "Winchester Geese," women who were under the protection of the Church but denied Christian burial. In the Borough of Southwark, not far from Shakespeare's Globe, is a pilgrimage site for self-identified misfits, nonconformists, and contemporary sex workers who leave memorials to the outcast dead. Ceremonies combining raucous humor and eclectic spirituality are led by a local playwright, John Constable, also known as John Crow. His interpretation of the history of the site has struck a chord with many who feel alienated in present-day London. Sondra L. Hausner offers a nuanced ethnography of Crossbones that tacks between past and present to look at the historical practices of sex work, the relation of the Church to these professions, and their representation in the present. She draws on anthropological approaches to ritual and time to understand the forms of spiritual healing conveyed by the Crossbones rites. She shows that ritual is a way of creating the present by mobilizing the stories of the past for contemporary purposes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005wdm

Introduction from: The Spirits of Crossbones Graveyard
Abstract: On November 23, 1996, a London playwright and performer by the name of John Constable had a shamanic vision. In it, a totemic Goose appeared to tell him her tale. She was the spirit of a particular Goose, one who hailed from the jurisdiction of Winchester. In fact, she identified as a Winchester Goose, argot for a medieval prostitute. She and her fellow Winchester Geese had been sex workers in what were called “stews” (or “stewes”) or brothels—or, in later colloquial accounts, “nunneries”¹—on London’s South Bank, in what is now the Borough of Southwark, a mere five hundred

1 The Myth of the Winchester Goose from: The Spirits of Crossbones Graveyard
Abstract: Mythic reality is a strange and ethereal one, one of those few places in the human social universe unconstrained by the limits of time. Whether we embrace the functionalism of the Polish British fieldworker Bronislaw Malinowski or the structuralism of the great French theorist Claude Lévi-Strauss, myth is eternal, as it is designed to be. Its source and its power are both attributable to that particular, enduring capacity of myth to transcend time: mythic narrative creates, sustains, and maneuvers the very origin of our existence. We use the stories of our beginnings to recount—to ourselves and our kin—how

Epilogue from: The Spirits of Crossbones Graveyard
Abstract: Ten years of activism do not go unnoticed when they touch a cultural chord. In the spring of 2015, one of John’s lobbying goals—to open a garden for Crossbones—came to fruition. Some years earlier, Bankside Open Spaces Trust, a neighborhood charity that works to create “precious patches of green amongst the concrete and glass of Bankside”¹ had been easily won over to the campaign to create a memorial garden. That it would be dedicated to the sex workers of old was less important, perhaps, than that it would offer another grassy corner in the steely metropolis. And with

Book Title: Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment-Ancillae Vitae
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Gasché Rodolphe
Abstract: As one of the most respected voices of Continental philosophy today, Rodolphe Gasché pulls together Aristotle's conception of rhetoric, Martin Heidegger's debate with theory, and Hannah Arendt's conception of judgment in a single work on the centrality of these themes as fundamental to human flourishing in public and political life. Gasché's readings address the distinctively human space of the public square and the actions that occur there, and his valorization of persuasion, reflection, and judgment reveals new insight into how the philosophical tradition distinguishes thinking from other faculties of the human mind.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005wvb

[PART I Introduction] from: Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Abstract: IN ARISTOTLE SCHOLARSHIP, the Stagirite’s treatise on rhetoric has undergone a peculiar treatment. Not only is it one of the philosopher’s most neglected works, but this neglect has also taken peculiar forms. When it is taken seriously at all, the Rhetoricis considered only after all the other works of the philosopher have been dealt with. Commentators’ uneasiness with the work has been so great that the place usually reserved for it is, once respect has been paid to all of Aristotle’s great works, at the end of their commentaries, in the shape of an acknowledgment, an endnote, as it

1 A TRUTH RESEMBLING TRUTH from: Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Abstract: WHEREAS IN THE TOPICS, which is closely associated with theRhetoric, Aristotle clearly names his addressee, namely, students of philosophy, he does not specify for whom theRhetoricis intended.¹ This alone is reason enough not to call this work a technical handbook for rhetoricians, as it has been, and still is by most of the commentators. I do not deny that the Rhetoric also contains advice for students about public speaking; it certainly does so. But right from the beginning, Aristotle takes issue with previous compilers of “arts” of rhetoric who have, as he argues, “provided us with only

4 BREAKING WITH THE PRIMACY OF THE THEORETICAL from: Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Abstract: NOTWITHSTANDING HEIDEGGER’S regular references to theory and the theoretical, both his criticism of the theoretical attitude in Being and Timeand his rehabilitation oftheoriain some of his later work do not, at first sight, seem to be a sign that the issue of theory and the theoretical are a major concern in Heidegger’s work. This impression, however, is deceptive. Indeed, even a cursory glance at his first lecture course from theKriegsnotsemester1919 in Freiburg—a lecture course entitled “Die Idee der Philosophie und das Welt-anschaungsproblem” in which the question of the theoretical is the central theme—shows

6 BEYOND THEORY: from: Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Abstract: AT FIRST SIGHT, THE LECTURE from 1953 on “Science and Reflection” is above all concerned with the modern sciences.¹ As “the theory of the real,” they have shaped our sense of reality. But if this state of affairs requires a reflection, or rather a Besinnung, it is because something is already at work in the sciences, which, in spite of what I will call the “un-world” to which they have given rise, announces a new age of the world: an age that, in distinction from the sciences’ planetary expansion, would be one of the “world” itself.² It is in this

8 THE WIND OF THOUGHT from: Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Abstract: THE CONCERN WITH the power of judgment arises in Hannah Arendt’s work in response to critical events in modernity. As a result of the impotence of familiar standards and categories to provide answers and orientation, this power has become undone. It is a question not only of the impotence of the common standards regarding certain events of modernity but also of the fact that these events have been so terrifying that they have altogether destroyed all our habitual categories of thought and standards of judgment. Yet, as Arendt remarks in 1953 in “Understanding and Politics (The Difficulties of Understanding),” that

2 WHEN A (WAR) MEMORY HIDES ANOTHER (COLONIAL) MEMORY from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Stora Benjamin
Abstract: In a book I published in 1991, La gangrène et l’oubli,¹ I analyzed how a number of subtle lies and repressions, how denial and memory gaps, from across the Mediterranean, worked together to hide and distort the history of the Algerian War. Today, the memory of that war has surged to the fore massively, in both Algerian and French socie ties. However, behind that war hides another, even bigger piece of history, that of colonization. That “block” of history remains imposing and almost unmoving, precisely at the origin of the Algerian War; and there is still much to be explored

21 FROM SLAVERY TO THE POSTCOLONIAL from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Weil Patrick
Abstract: Nicolas Bancel: First of all,could you begin by explaining why you started working on citizenship and nationality?

29 INFILTRATION OF LIQUID POPULISM from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Liogier Raphaël
Abstract: The overused notion of “populism” should not be conflated with the term bandied about by politicians who say what they think voters want to hear. Nor is populism related to popular preoccupations, those of artisans, fishermen, workers, hunters, farmers, engineers, doctors, the rich, or the poor. In the enthusiasm surrounding populism, concrete categories within the population—professions, at times contradictory interests, class distinctions—tend to be elided over in favor of a fiction of an all encompassing, omnipresent, and omniscient people, who are believed to have a single soul and unified identity. Populists can be either Marxist, like Stalin, or

3 STRATIGRAPHIC FORM: from: The Year's Work in Nerds, Wonks, and Neocons
Author(s) LIU WARREN
Abstract: In the spirit of the other chapters in this volume, I’m interested in exploring what it might mean to read “nerdily,” and to think about the possibly productive results that might result from such reading. The object of my attention, John McPhee’s Annals of the Former World, could certainly be described as an exemplary work of nerd-like obsession, one painstakingly pieced together over the course of twenty years and incorporating four separate volumes.¹ But I am less interested in qualifying McPhee as a nerd than I am in articulating how my encounter with McPhee’s text has provided unexpectedly insightful new

8 SEX AND THE SINGLE NERD: from: The Year's Work in Nerds, Wonks, and Neocons
Author(s) ROOF JUDITH
Abstract: In the latter half of the nineteenth century, Sir Francis Galton, halfcousin of Charles Darwin and most remembered for his advocacy of eugenics (he coined the term), worked to define scientifically the phenomenon of genius. Using surveys and developing statistical methods as the basis for his anthropometric studies, Galton published Hereditary Geniusin 1869. In a 1874 lecture, “On Men in Science, Their Nature and Their Nurture,” Galton queried, “What then are the conditions of nature, and the various circumstances and conditions of life,—which I include under the general name of nurture,—which have selected that one and left

10 COMIC BOOK KID from: The Year's Work in Nerds, Wonks, and Neocons
Author(s) SMITH SCOTT T.
Abstract: In a recent conversation about comics, a friend asked me how I was able to keep separate the different identities of scholar and fan. The question troubled me. I am a medievalist by training, but I also regularly teach undergraduate courses on comics. Was the implication that my academic work was professional (scholar), while my interest in comics was more casual (fan)? Must scholarandfanbe exclusive categories—and do they describe “identities” at all? The alignment betweencomicsandfanin my friend’s question certainly implied a value judgment, as well as a distinction between different kinds of

Book Title: Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age-Refugees, Travelers, and Traffickers in Europe and Eurasia
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): SVOBODNY NICOLE
Abstract: Combining methodological and theoretical approaches to migration and mobility studies with detailed analyses of historical, cultural, or social phenomena, the works collected here provide an interdisciplinary perspective on how migrations and mobility altered identities and affected images of the "other." From walkways to railroads to airports, the history of travel provides a context for considering the people and events that have shaped Central and Eastern Europe and Russia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt20060x8

Introduction from: Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Walke Anika
Abstract: SINCE THE FALL of the Iron Curtain in the late 1980s, the movement of people is a central topic of concern, among the citizenry, among politicians, and among scholars in Central and Eastern Europe (CEE) and the former Soviet Union. The intense debate about people’s ability to move and the transfer of goods and ideas and about ways to deal with unregulated migration reflects a complex web of movements and their assigned meanings. Recent scholarship on the movement of people in this region largely uses and expands on sociological and political science frameworks, focusing on pressing problems of integration and

CHAPTER 1 Paris—St. Petersburg: from: Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Musekamp Jan
Abstract: IN 1789, THE AUTHOR of this account, famous Russian writer and historian Nikolai Mikhailovich Karamzin, went on an extended study tour of Western Europe.² Starting at Tver’ in the Russian Empire, he traveled first to St. Petersburg, then to Königsberg (Kaliningrad) in East Prussia, then to Berlin and France, and, finally, to England. In 1791–1792, he published his Letters of a Russian Traveler(Pis’ma russkogo puteshestvennika) . Karamzin did not base his literary work on actual letters but rather on notes taken during his trip.³ While scholars widely regard these “letters” as a model for contemporary Russian travel accounts

CHAPTER 4 Russian Resorts and European Leisure: from: Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Hsu Chia Yin
Abstract: AN ENGLISH-LANGUAGE HANDBOOK of North Manchuria published in 1924 by the Chinese Eastern Railway (CER), the region’s central land transportation network, ran a full-page advertisement for the railway’s “health resorts.” The CER was constructed in the Chinese territory of Manchuria by the imperial Russian state and completed in 1903. As the final stretch of the Siberian Railroad, it linked European Russia to the Pacific Ocean. The advertised resorts were located at various CER train stations and shared their names: Chalantun, Imienpo, Fularki, Hingan, Laosiaokow and Echo. The page offered scenic images of the resorts and descriptions of their surroundings. Chalantun

CHAPTER 5 Dynamic Bohemians: from: Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Winestein Anna
Abstract: THE PERIOD FROM 1870 to 1930 was the heyday of visual artistic exchange between France and Russia, during which countless Russian and later Soviet artists traveled to Paris to visit, study, create, advance their careers, and simply live. They naturally gravitated toward creative compatriots—other artists, poets and writers, musicians, scholars and scientists—but sometimes also turned to political émigrés, revolutionaries, or alternatively diplomats and other representatives of Russian officialdom. The informal networks and structured organizations that emerged not only connected the artists with other Russians in Paris but helped them interact and even integrate into the broader French art

CHAPTER 6 Sex at the Border: from: Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Stauter-Halsted Keely
Abstract: THE TURN OF the twentieth century was a time of nearly constant human movement out of Eastern Europe. A huge portion of the population of the Polish lands left home during the decades leading up to World War I, with some 8 percent of ethnic Poles crossing international boundaries for seasonal or long-term work.¹ This heightened mobility brought with it chaos, corruption, and anxiety about the fate of loved ones across the sea.² Those left behind reserved special concern for the fortunes of single women traveling abroad on their own.³ Families worried about the vulnerabilities young women suffered during the

CHAPTER 11 Andrzej Stasiuk and the Myth of the Literary Gastarbajter from: Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Gasyna George
Abstract: Andrzej Stasiuk, born in 1960 in Warsaw, ranks among postcommunist Poland’s most successful cultural exports. His novels and his persona have achieved cult status both in Poland and elsewhere, especially in Ukraine and the Balkans. Despite only one reading tour of North America, in 2010, Stasiuk is a relatively familiar name in the United States, specifically in academia. Indeed, no syllabus for a college course on postcommunist European fiction would be complete without at least one work by Stasiuk on it—most often, the novel Tales of Galiciaor collections of essays/stories such asFado or My Europeare included.

CHAPTER 12 Journeys of Identity: from: Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Wanner Adrian
Abstract: SINCE THE TURN of the millennium, a striking new phenomenon has appeared on the German literary scene: Soviet-born native speakers of Russian who immigrated to Germany and write fiction in German for a German audience. As a country that used to define itself in ethnically homogeneous terms, Germany has only belatedly and reluctantly come to acknowledge its status as a destination for immigrants. While narratives of immigration have long been at the core of America’s cultural mythology, no comparable tradition exists in Germany aside from the relatively recent phenomena of Gastarbeiterliteratur(guest worker literature) and Turkish-German literature. Russian speakers have

Book Title: Music and Embodied Cognition-Listening, Moving, Feeling, and Thinking
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): COX ARNIE
Abstract: Taking a cognitive approach to musical meaning, Arnie Cox explores embodied experiences of hearing music as those that move us both consciously and unconsciously. In this pioneering study that draws on neuroscience and music theory, phenomenology and cognitive science, Cox advances his theory of the "mimetic hypothesis," the notion that a large part of our experience and understanding of music involves an embodied imitation in the listener of bodily motions and exertions that are involved in producing music. Through an often unconscious imitation of action and sound, we feel the music as it moves and grows. With applications to tonal and post-tonal Western classical music, to Western vernacular music, and to non-Western music, Cox's work stands to expand the range of phenomena that can be explained by the role of sensory, motor, and affective aspects of human experience and cognition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt200610s

Introduction from: Music and Embodied Cognition
Abstract: Like many music students, I spent a good deal of my undergraduate and graduate coursework in music theory focusing on musical structure and making more or less factual observations about how the various elements of music fit together in particular works and styles. Since I enjoyed this kind of study, for my doctoral thesis I planned to take the same approach in analyzing the music of Debussy. But then one day the stove in my apartment stopped working, the repairman came over, and we started chatting. He asked if I was a student up at the college, and I said

9 Applications from: Music and Embodied Cognition
Abstract: In this chapter I offer three demonstrations of how the ideas in the preceding chapters, particularly chapter 8, might be applied. For this purpose I have chosen the opening of the fourth of Webern’s Five Movements for String Quartet(1909) to represent posttonal music performed directly by human exertions, Stockhausen’s electronic workStudie II(1954) to represent postcorporeal music, and the topic of dissonance treatment in Western tonal music. I have chosen the Webern and the Stockhausen because the role of affect might seem less obviously relevant here than in some other kinds of music, and because the approach described

Book Title: Novelas españolas ambientadas en Italia-Fra Filippo Lippi de Emilio Castelar; Bomarzo de Manuel Mujica Lainez
Publisher: Ediciones Universidad de Salamanca
Author(s): SANTOS M.ª ALMUDENA MATEOS
Abstract: Las fuentes en las que se fundamenta la novela histórica proporcionan, además de una ambientación correcta de la acción, la veracidad necesaria para que el lector reconozca el trabajo llevado a cabo por el autor. Este estudio se centra en descubrir las fuentes históricas, literarias, artísticas, religiosas y culturales de dos novelas muy diferentes que comparten un marco común, el Renacimiento Italiano. Mientras que en Fra Filippo Lippi de Emilio Castelar (1877-1879) la exactitud histórica se presenta sólo en determinados capítulos que parecen ralentizar la acción, en Bomarzo de Manuel Mujica Lainez (1962), lo histórico está tan integrado que es difícil detectar qué parte se corresponde con la historia y cuál con la ficción. Las fuentes consultadas por los autores e incorporadas al texto narrativo proporcionan laexhaustividad necesaria para que el ambiente histórico recreado sea preciso. Al confrontar dichas fuentes con el texto literario se observa cómo, además, el marco creado ayuda a delimitarla psicología de los protagonistas, pues, aunque son personajes históricos, los autores crean una vida de ficción a partir de los hechos históricos. Por otro lado, las referencias literarias (correspondientes a un periodo que va desde los siglos XV y XVI hasta el presente de los autores) aportan el marco necesario para que los protagonistas sean portadores de una nueva inmortalidad. La exactitud de las descripciones, la configuración de los caracteres tanto renacentistas como contemporáneos, las perspectivas artísticas o religiosas, configuran estas dos obras en una serie de coincidencias difíciles de obviar.The sources, which the historical novel is based on, provide the correct setting of the action and the necessary truthfulness for the reader to recognise the work carried out by the author. This research focuses on discovering the historical, literary, artistic, religious and cultural sources of two very different novels that share common framework of the Italian Renaissance. In Fra Filippo Lippi by Emilio Catelar (1877-1879) the historical accuracy is presented only incertain chapters, and slow down the action, whereas in Bomarzo by Manuel Mujica Lainez (1962), historical facts are integrated in such a way that it is difficult to detect which parts belong to fiction or non-fiction. The sources consulted by the authors and which are incorporated into the narrative text provide the necessary detail for the recreated historical environment to be accurate. Additionally, when comparing these historical sources with the literary text, it is obvious how the historical facts help to demonstrate the psychology of the main characters because, although they are historical characters, the authors create a living fiction based on historical events. The literary references, belonging to a period that covers the fifteenth and sixteenth century to the present of authors contribute the necessary details so that the main characters are bearers o fa new immortality. The accuracy of descriptions, the representation of both Renaissance and Contemporary characters and artistic and religious perspectives present us with a series of coincidences too obvious to ignore.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt201mp18

INTRODUCTION from: Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Jonsson-Skradol Natalia
Abstract: Soviet cultural policy in Eastern Europe after World War II has been the topic of many articles, monographs and dissertations since the initial post-war years. The growth or decline of interest in the subject has often been determined by the political and social context of a specific moment, with the research focus shifting accordingly. The novelty of the theme and the extent of transformations in the European political and cultural sphere spurred the earliest studies, in which researchers focused on ‘the scope and scale of oppression and uniformity behind the “Iron Curtain,” as did later scholars working on the immediate

Chapter Seventeen BIG BROTHER’S GRAVITY: from: Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Ponomarev Evgeny
Abstract: A literary magazine, or a ‘thick journal’, was a unique element of Soviet literary culture. Modelled on pre-revolutionary literary magazines that published the writings of authors belonging to a certain creative movement, or works of a certain genre, in the Soviet time thick journals turned into a voice of the authorities, promoting the ‘ideologically correct’ literature of the new age. After all the writers’ organizations in the USSR had been disbanded in 1932 and the Soviet Writers’ Congress called shortly thereafter to set the standards of socialist realism, the new function of thick journals became clear: they were to operate

Chapter Twenty THE SALON IN THE CAMP: from: Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Jonsson-Skradol Natalia
Abstract: ‘Lager oder Salon’ (‘Camp or Salon’) was the title of an article published in a mainstream National Socialist newspaper in 1935. The subtitle of the article was ‘Wandel der Lebensformen’ (‘A Transformation of Lifestyle’), the reference being to the inevitable decision awaiting each citizen of the country: either in favour of the cosy, comfortable, individualistic bourgeois salon, or else in favour of the rough, primitive, communal barracks of the comrades’ working camps, these latter being the embodiment of the new spirit, of the future itself. Citizens of the countries that fell within the Soviet zone of influence after World War

Chapter Three LAW, JUSTICE, AND HOLOCAUST MEMORY IN ROMANIA from: Holocaust Public Memory in Postcommunist Romania
Author(s) Climescu Alexandru
Abstract: After 1989, historiographical works, political discourses, and commemoration activities meant to rehabilitate the Antonescu regime were complemented

Book Title: Levinas and the Trauma of Responsibility-The Ethical Significance of Time
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Coe Cynthia D.
Abstract: Levinas's account of responsibility challenges dominant notions of time, autonomy, and subjectivity according to Cynthia D. Coe. Employing the concept of trauma in Levinas's late writings, Coe draws together his understanding of time and his claim that responsibility is an obligation to the other that cannot be anticipated or warded off. Tracing the broad significance of these ideas, Coe shows how Levinas revises our notions of moral agency, knowledge, and embodiment. Her focus on time brings a new interpretive lens to Levinas's work and reflects on a wider discussion of the fragmentation of human experience as an ethical subject. Coe's understanding of trauma and time offers a new appreciation of how Levinas can inform debates about gender, race, mortality, and animality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt20d87sf

2 The Traumatic Impact of Deformalized Time from: Levinas and the Trauma of Responsibility
Abstract: On levinas’s reading, formal conceptions of time depict a neutral order within which we experience events and beings. These accounts correlatively naturalize a subject who comprehends and controls her surroundings. When Levinas identifies the deformalization of time as central to his philosophical work, he is thus engaged in the critique of the image of subjectivity presupposed by formal conceptions of time. Starting in the late 1960s, Levinas describes time’s “meaningful content somehow prior to form” as traumatic: a responsibility for the other imposed on the subject, which consciousness is always too late to assimilate as a phenomenon (OUJ 232).

Questions from: Numinous Subjects
Abstract: I wonder why it is the case that at this time within the western cultural imaginary white working-class women are expected to be strong and to speak their minds, to possess a wealth of common-sense wisdom. And I wonder why a white working-class woman who makes no secret of enjoying sex is so liable to be called a slut, a whore. Why are black women expected to be spectacularly powerful mothers, to find ways out of no way to provide for their children? Why are out-spoken black women so often assumed to be as well pillars of moral authority? And

Book Title: Echoes of the Tambaran-Masculinity, history and the subject in the work of Donald F. Tuzin
Publisher: ANU E Press
Author(s): Roscoe Paul
Abstract: In the Sepik Basin of Papua New Guinea, ritual culture was dominated by the Tambaran —a male tutelary spirit that acted as a social and intellectual guardian or patron to those under its aegis as they made their way through life. To Melanesian scholarship, the cultural and psychological anthropologist, Donald F. Tuzin, was something of a Tambaran, a figure whose brilliant and fine-grained ethnographic project in the Arapesh village of Ilahita was immensely influential within and beyond New Guinea anthropology. Tuzin died in 2007, at the age of 61. In his memory, the editors of this collection commissioned a set of original and thought provoking essays from eminent and accomplished anthropologists who knew and were influenced by his work. They are echoes of the Tambaran. The anthology begins with a biographical sketch of Tuzin's life and scholarship. It is divided into four sections, each of which focuses loosely around one of his preoccupations. The first concerns warfare history, the male cult and changing masculinity, all in Melanesia. The second addresses the relationship between actor and structure. Here, the ethnographic focus momentarily shifts to the Caribbean before turning back to Papua New Guinea in essays that examine uncanny phenomena, narratives about childhood and messianic promises. The third part goes on to offer comparative and psychoanalytic perspectives on the subject in Fiji, Bali, the Amazon as well as Melanesia. Appropriately, the last section concludes with essays on Tuzin's fieldwork style and his distinctive authorial voice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt24hbjj

Introduction: from: Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Roscoe Paul
Abstract: In 2007, Donald Francis (Don) Tuzin died at the age of sixty-one. We who knew him as students and colleagues or simply admired his work from afar lost an anthropologistʹs anthropologist—a kind that has gone out of fashion, to say the least. He combined the interests of a generalist with the skills of an experienced field ethnographer. His work drew from and contributed to archaeology as well as reflexive anthropology. Driven by methodological individualism and a strong commitment to comparativism, he focused on social control, dreams, politics and art, cannibalism, food symbolism, the psychodynamics of masculinity, the origins of

2. The String Bag of the from: Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Hauser-Schäublin Brigitta
Abstract: Some things only become clear with hindsight. This goes for my own fieldwork in the Sepik area (between 1972 and 1983), and it is probably true of other anthropologists as well, many of whom, as I gather from their writings, went through the same difficulties as I did. When I set out for Papua New Guinea, I took with me a pre-postmodern conception of ʹcultureʹ, fuelled by the fascination for other, preferably still ʹautochthonousʹ world views and agency in faraway societies. This predisposition often made it difficult to grasp what appeared to me in my understanding of ʹcultureʹ as seemingly

4. Men, Modernity and Melanesia from: Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Knauft Bruce M.
Abstract: During the period of Donald Tuzinʹs impressive fieldwork—from the late 1960s through the mid-1980s—themes of traditional male cults and masculine assertion in Melanesia (MMM1) had special purchase in the anthropology of Oceania and more widely. By the 2000s, another triplicate—of mobile men with money (MMM2)—has gained particular purchase (for example, Lepani 2008), along with various other dimensions of modern masculinity. In many of these more recent treatments (see Taylor 2008), Melanesian masculinity is often seen through the lenses of guns, drunkenness and pronounced, often brutal, male violence.

5. Signs and Wonders: from: Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Birth Kevin
Abstract: As a Caribbeanist studying under Donald Tuzin, I was struck by the ways in which Don could make the implications of his ethnographic work relevant to my struggles with material from Trinidad. Often this involved delving into the ontological and epistemological relevance of ethnographic details, in order to create a context to relate Trinidad and New Guinea. This chapter is, in many respects, a continuation of some of those conversations.

6. Comparison, Individualism and ʹInteractionalismʹ in the Work of Donald F. Tuzin from: Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Gardner Don
Abstract: Don Tuzin left a magnificent corpus of work on the Ilahita Arapesh, one that presents a compelling analysis of two remarkable transitions in the history of a people. His work is also striking because of the sheer range of issues on which he focused his fine analytical eye; his work might focus on the emotions, dispositions and moral conflicts of particular persons or categories thereof (specific elders, initiands, or Christians, men, women) as readily as on the structural or historically contingent circumstances within which agents must act, and which tend to produce grand historical transformations. There are also significant essays

8. On Messianic Promise from: Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Robbins Joel
Abstract: I have learned many things from Don Tuzinʹs books. One of the formative texts of my education, as a graduate student interested in religious secrecy, was The Voice of the Tambaran (1980), and I poured over The Ilahita Arapesh: Dimensions of Unity (1976) just as carefully. Later, The Cassowaryʹs Revenge (1997) became a guiding light for me during the process of writing my thesis on Christianity and cultural change among the Urapmin of Papua New Guinea. As it has for many of my generation, this book has been a condition of possibility for my own work—a book from the

9. Klein in Bali and Ilahita: from: Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Stephen Michele
Abstract: Although many anthropologists would not even accept the existence of a deep unconscious such as outlined by psychoanalytic theory of various persuasions, the ethnographic data often provide examples of cultural constructs that seem such vivid realisations of themes described in psychoanalytic practice that one can only stand amazed. If there is no ʹunconsciousʹ, from whence do these extraordinary visions emerge and how is it they have such constancy across cultures? In this chapter, I employ Melanie Kleinʹs work on gender, fantasy and psychosocial development as a framework for comparing Balinese and Ilahita imaginings of the feminine and the maternal.

11. The Torments of Initiation and the Question of Resistance from: Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Gregor Thomas A.
Abstract: In 1982 Donald Tuzin published a short but trenchant article titled, ʹRitual Violence Among the Arapesh: The Dynamics of Moral and Religious Uncertaintyʹ. The work probes a question of broad human significance. The Ilahita Arapesh, in the course of their long initiatory cycles, terrorised their children and subjected them to excruciating ordeals. Tuzin self-consciously ascribes the word ʹbrutalʹ to these acts, partly because many of the Ilahita themselves so saw them, but also because we, if we are honest with ourselves, do so as well. Ilahita ritual (which no longer takes place) was particularly disturbing in that it was at

MASTER PLAN FOR THE OLD PORT OF MONTREAL from: Architecture, Ethics, and Technology
Author(s) ROSE PETER
Abstract: In this paper I will present the thoughts, the ideas, of a practising architect rather than those of a theoretician or an architectural historian, concerning a project on which I have worked for several years – the design of a master plan for the Vieux Port de Montréal.¹

“THE PROBLEM WITH THE ARCHITECT AS WRITER…”: from: Architecture, Ethics, and Technology
Author(s) CHI LILY
Abstract: It would be difficult to miss Aldo Rossi’s polemic: what is at stake in architectural work ultimately eludes the most familiar terms and techniques that circumscribe it

Book Title: Comics and Narration- Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): Miller Ann
Abstract: This book is the follow-up to Thierry Groensteen's ground-breaking The System of Comics, in which the leading French-language comics theorist set out to investigate how the medium functions, introducing the principle of iconic solidarity, and showing the systems that underlie the articulation between panels at three levels: page layout, linear sequence, and nonsequential links woven through the comic book as a whole. He now develops that analysis further, using examples from a very wide range of comics, including the work of American artists such as Chris Ware and Robert Crumb. He tests out his theoretical framework by bringing it up against cases that challenge it, such as abstract comics, digital comics and sh?jo manga, and offers insightful reflections on these innovations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt24hvcv

CHAPTER ONE Comics and the Test of Abstraction from: Comics and Narration
Abstract: It is in the nature of experimental works that they shift the boundaries or contest the usual definition of the medium to which they belong. This general rule is particularly applicable to comics, and I have already discussed the difficulties it poses for researchers (see Système 1, 17–21;System 1, 14–17).

Book Title: Desi Divas-Political Activism in South Asian American Cultural Performances
Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): Garlough Christine L.
Abstract: Desi Divas: Activism in South Asian American Cultural Performancesis the product of five years of field research with progressive activists associated with the School for Indian Languages and Cultures (SILC), South Asian Americans Leading Together (SAALT), the feminist dance collective Post Natyam, and the grassroots feminist political organization South Asian Sisters. Christine L. Garlough explores how traditional cultural forms may be critically appropriated by marginalized groups and used as rhetorical tools to promote deliberation and debate, spur understanding and connection, broaden political engagement, and advance particular social identities. Within this framework she examines how these performance activists advocate a political commitment to both justice and care, to both deliberative discussion and deeper understanding. To consider how this might happen in diasporic performance contexts, Garlough weaves together two lines of thinking. One grows from feminist theory and draws upon a core literature concerning the ethics of care. The other comes from rhetoric, philosophy, and political science literature on recognition and acknowledgment. This dual approach is used to reflect upon South Asian American women's performances that address pressing social problems related to gender inequality, immigration rights, ethnic stereotyping, hate crimes, and religious violence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt24hvm7

Chapter Five Cultural Activism and Sexuality in Feminist Performance from: Desi Divas
Abstract: Consequently, it is understandable that during my fieldwork, I interviewed many young South Asian American

3. Social Ethics and Moral Discourse in Late Antiquity from: Reading Patristic Texts on Social Ethics
Author(s) Van Nuffelen Peter
Abstract: The term “patristic social ethics” may convey the impression that the Church Fathers—already an immensely varied group of individuals covering at least half a millennium—shared a number of systematic views on social issues. It seems to suggest that they held a set of norms and rules, which can be reconstructed through the careful reading of their sermons, letters, and dogmatic works. On such an understanding, patristic teaching on property, poverty, or usury, takes the form of a coherent, discrete body of doctrines. Such an approach might work well for theological topics, for example, the interpretation of the Trinity

9. Social Justice in Lactantius’s from: Reading Patristic Texts on Social Ethics
Author(s) Hughson Thomas
Abstract: This inquiry interprets a fourth-century Church Father’s main work in reference to social justice, a characteristic theme in Catholic social thought and Catholic social teaching.¹ The overall perspective is postcritical in the sense of probing for a relation between an ancient text and a modern or postmodern context in Church and world. That approach does not derogate from critical study, on which it relies, though a postcritical purpose inherently assumes that readers from later contexts can bring new questions to the text as well as submit to its otherness. Moving from critical exegesis of a biblical passage to preaching an

3 THE EXEMPLARY COMIC FICTION: from: Love Song for the Life of the Mind
Abstract: Having provided an answer to the question of what comedy does, we may now attempt a more exacting answer to the question of how comedy effects a catharsis of desire (eros) and sympathy. Aristotle is clear in the extant Poetics that plot is that through which the play does its work—it is the play’s archē and psuchē. It is particularly through recognitions and peripeties that tragic plots are made most emotionally effective, and this is especially so when they occur together (1450a32–34). Since all drama is a mimesis of action, and plot is the unitary action of the

Introduction from: Rhetoric in Antiquity
Abstract: The word “rhetoric” comes from the ancient Greek rhētorikē, which means “art of the spoken word.” Right off, etymology indicates the role the ancients played in the subject of the present work. If Greco-Roman antiquity by itself did not invent the art of speaking—other, more ancient civilizations could lay claim to this honor—it did develop it in a special way and conceptualize it with an unprecedented rigor and richness. This art has occupied an important place in the history of Western culture, and it continues to exert a genuine influence, although less visibly present than before, on the

Thesaurus: from: Rhetoric in Antiquity
Abstract: Ancient rhetoric does not present conceptions and technical terms in isolation, but as part of a network taking the form of a multitude of lists. Each list means to be as complete a description as possible of one sector or aspect. It aims to detail the constitutive elements of the topic being considered, following the method of division into genera and species in order to cover it completely and to define it by enumerating its parts.

III The Interdisciplinary from: The Humanities in the Age of Technology
Abstract: On the other hand, when a researcher broaches ideas that are more universal in scope than the work of the specialist, he is praised for the light he sheds on different fields of inquiry. Generalization is the

VIII Knowing from: The Humanities in the Age of Technology
Abstract: The literary work (poetry, novel, theater) touches on reality in different ways, while criticism or philology focuses primarily on the text created by the writer, and through it on the reality it presents. History presents an interesting paradox: in literary criticism and in philosophy understanding is primarily the

THREE Humanae Vitae: from: Humanae vitae, a generation later
Abstract: On july 29, 1968, Pope Paul VI issued his long-awaited encyclical on the question of moral means for limiting family size.¹ Humanae Vitae is a succinct text that does not offer much elaboration of the claims that it makes. Such elaboration is the work of this chapter and the next. This chapter will establish some of the foundational perspectives of natural law theory; it will consider the claim of the Church to be a teacher on moral matters and will provide an explanation of the claim that organs and their related acts have purposes. We will clear the way for

EIGHT Self-Giving and Self-Mastery: from: Humanae vitae, a generation later
Abstract: The most energetic proponent and expositor of the doctrine of Humanae Vitae in recent years has been Pope John Paul II. In a series of talks given over a period of six years (1979–84), he has laid out an anthropology both philosophically and biblically based that has provided the foundation for his reflections on Humanae Vitae.¹ Two of his earlier major works, Love and Responsibility (1960) and The Acting Person (1969), were foundational for much of the thinking exhibited in this series of talks, as was Familiaris Consortio (1981).² In Familiaris Consortio he issued a “pressing invitation” to theologians

Chapter 2 Skeptical Self-Contradiction in from: Idling the Engine
Abstract: Because Julio Cortázar’s novel of 1963, Rayuela, or Hopscotch, explores basic questions about knowing, and about reading and writing in particular, it can be considered a broad investigation of hermeneutics, the pervasive and perpetual work of understanding that constitutes human being. It should not surprise us, then, that we encounter at the heart of Hopscotch doubts very similar to those so important to Paradise Lost. Horacio Oliveira, Cortázar’s protagonist, is Satan’s true heir, an engine-idler of the first order. By the time we happen upon Oliveira, he has long thought himself impaired by the original sin of historicity. The doubt

8. VIOLENT AND NONVIOLENT TELEOLOGY IN HEGEL’S from: Person, Being, and History
Author(s) Lampert Jay
Abstract: Some modern and postmodern philosophers favor violence as a means of outflanking authoritarian forms of peace and philosophy, and find promising concepts of violence in the great philosophers, above all in Hegel. This motivation is not altogether incorrect, but perhaps there are other ways besides violence to slip out of classical constraints. Kenneth Schmitz’s philosophy of freedom is, among other things, a move away from modern violence philosophies. Yet with all his classical philosophical commitments, Schmitz is as modern a philosopher as there is, particularly regarding the modern proof of unconditioned freedom. For these reasons, his work is not only

Book Title: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): Beeley Christopher A.
Abstract: This book, the newest volume in the CUA Studies in Early Christianity, presents original works by leading patristics scholars on a wide range of theological, historical, and cultural topics
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt284zwd

3. Gregory of Nazianzus and Biblical Interpretation from: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Fulford Ben
Abstract: Although sought after as a teacher of Scripture in his own day, Gregory of Nazianzus does not conform to our expectations of patristic exegesis and has attracted relatively little sustained attention as a biblical interpreter.¹ We have no formal hermeneutical treatise, no commentaries, and no proper exegetical homilies extant from him.² In what sense, then, if any might Gregory merit attention as a biblical interpreter? In what follows I do not attempt to examine every angle of Gregory’s work as a biblical interpreter, but focus on three in particular to help answer this question.³ First, Gregory carried forward an Origenian

4. Deciphering a Recipe for Biblical Preaching in from: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Matz Brian J.
Abstract: Everyone who studies the works of Gregory Nazianzen in this day eventually passes with no little amount of pleasure through the scholarship of Fred Norris. I have worked my way more than once through his helpful commentary on Gregory’s Theological Orations, through his insightful connection between Wittgenstein and Gregory’s own use of language, through his critique of Harnack in appreciating Gregory’s careful use of secular literature, and in many other fields of Gregorian studies that our editor has outlined in his introduction.¹ Meeting Professor Norris for the first time at a meeting of the North American Patristic Society some years

7. Gregory Nazianzen and Philosophy, with Remarks on Gregory’s Cynicism from: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) CHIODO CAROL
Abstract: It is well known that for the Cappadocian fathers—and especially for Gregory of Nazianzen—the term “philosophy” signifies “the Christian life” or “the contemplation of Christian truth.”¹ When referring to the contemplation of Christian truth, philosophein and theologein are almost equivalent in Gregory’s works, though philosophein occurs with greater frequency. Yet, in addition to these basic senses, philosophein carries a controversial meaning, as well. This polemical sense reflects Gregory’s sophistic art and his refined use of logoi: “[the doctor] discoursing learnedly on your disease after you are dead,” as he puts it in one of his orations.²

11. The Tax Man and the Theologian: from: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) McLynn Neil
Abstract: Gregory Nazianzen’s poem “To Hellenius, an Exhortation Concerning the Monks,” one of the small group addressed “to others,” has rarely been examined as a whole.¹ The purpose of this chapter is to attempt such an examination and to suggest that the work casts a sharper light than has been realized on Gregory’s position in local society in the early 370s. I shall also suggest, more controversially, that it bears directly upon Gregory’s involvement in theological controversy and even upon his consecration as bishop of Sasima in 372. The sheer quantity of prosopographical information contained in the poem’s 368 elegiac verses

Foreword from: Spirit's Gift
Author(s) Schmitz Kenneth L.
Abstract: Father Antonio López has given us a comprehensive study of an original thinker whose work is too little known in English language scholarship. He has traced with firmness and clarity both the development and the final expression of his subject’s thought. Claude Bruaire’s originality is not impaired by the wealth of philosophical and theological sources from which he weaves his reflection on being-as-spirit-and-as-gift. As Professor López keeps before the reader’s attention, the horizon within which Bruaire develops his thought is derived above all from Hegel, though not without a fundamental transformation which the present careful study continually makes clear. Central

CHAPTER 3 Absolute’s Freedom from: Spirit's Gift
Abstract: To enter into the question of man’s existence is to immerse oneself in the mystery of the absolute itself. Every step of Bruaire’s systematic anthropology reveals the impossibility of giving a satisfactory account of who man is if one’s understanding of the absolute is inadequate.¹ Although from his very first works Bruaire contends that only a determinate absolute is able to make reason out of man’s existence, his explication of what it means for God to be both “absolute” and “determinate” undergoes a remarkable evolution. Up until the publication of For Metaphysics in 1980, Bruaire’s concept of God as determinate

Introduction from: The One, the Many, and the Trinity
Abstract: Process-relational metaphysics demands careful attention. Like classical metaphysics, process metaphysics is too often quickly dismissed by those who do not understand it or fail to grasp its significance. Too often have contemporary philosophers and theologians viewed process thought as a recent curiosity that must be relegated to the memory of twentieth-century intellectual anomalies. This is because neither the questions process metaphysics addresses nor its complex and sophisticated answers are adequately understood, let alone appreciated. This work tries to treat process thought with the detail and thoroughness required to grasp its true significance. Theologians and philosophers doing metaphysics, as well those

CHAPTER 2 The Philosophical Process Theology of Joseph A. Bracken from: The One, the Many, and the Trinity
Abstract: Joseph A. Bracken, S.J., is a process thinker of unique importance. As one of the few process theologians working from within the Catholic tradition, Bracken has produced an unparalleled synthesis of the Catholic tradition and modern process metaphysics. In doing so, he is a living exemplar of how historically the best Catholic philosophers and theologians have seriously engaged the intellectual currents of their day. Bracken is important for Catholics thinkers because he makes a well-informed case that process metaphysics must not be rashly dismissed but seriously considered as a necessary rethinking of metaphysics in our day.

2 Josef Pieper in the Context of Modern Philosophy from: A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Malsbary Gerald
Abstract: Josef pieper belongs to that small class of modern philosophers who took the political and moral catastrophe of the past century as a challenge for their own thought and action. Although until now his work has left only a few traces in the theoretical discourse of academic circles, its effect on the life and thought of countless students and readers has been much greater.¹ While Pieper rather extensively described the historical context of his career in his autobiographical works, he let fall only a few hints here and there about the more technical philosophical context of his writing.² The following

6 The Future of Pieper’s from: A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Godfrey Joseph J.
Abstract: In this essay I propose to take the measure of Pieper’s treatise in light of some later studies on hope and on history. Pieper wrote in response to the prospect of nuclear annihilation, in response to the publication of Ernst Bloch’s 1959 The Principle of Hope, and in response to the works of Pierre Teilhard de

9 Josef Pieper on the Truth of All things and the World’s True Face from: A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Cuddeback Matthew
Abstract: The Truth of All Things is one of the defining works of Josef Pieper’s corpus.¹ In his autobiography Pieper describes the origins of this work:

10 The Platonic Inspiration of Pieper’s Philosophy from: A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Franck Juan F.
Abstract: Together with Aristotle, Augustine, and Thomas, Plato is for Josef Pieper one of the four greatest Western thinkers. Reference to the Athenian philosopher becomes more frequent in his mature works. Whereas in his first four volumes on the virtues—which date from 1934 through 1939 and are mainly conceived as a philosophical actualization of Aquinas’s thought—Plato is not quoted,¹ the other three—dating from the fifties, sixties, and seventies—show an increasing assimilation of basic Platonic theses.² This constitutes an important enrichment in Pieper’s philosophical itinerary. Without abandoning Thomas, Pieper sees in Plato a source of insights for illuminating

CHAPTER 3 The Holy Spirit and a Sense for the Faith from: The Eyes of Faith
Abstract: Since faith is the reception of revelation, at the heart of the nature of the church as a community of reception is its nature as a community of faith. Faith is a gift of the Holy Spirit which has two fundamental dimensions: faith as believing, i.e., as a personal response to God’s loving initiative (fides qua creditur), and faith as beliefs and assent to beliefs, i.e., as an affirmative response to the content of what has been revealed (fides quae creditur). As the principle of reception, the Holy Spirit is at work in both these dimensions of faith’s reception of

CHAPTER 4 Receiving Jesus Christ in the Spirit from: The Eyes of Faith
Abstract: The production of the bipartite Christian Bible is the result of a process of reception and tradition involving the interpretative organon of the sensus fidei. This organon is at work from the very start of the Jesus tradition till the written expression par excellence of that tradition in the canon of New Testament writings, with its constant theological presupposition—the Jewish Scriptures. With the Gospel written onto their hearts, the believing disciples remembered, retold, and applied their faith in Jesus Christ out of their shared experience of that Gospel. This hermeneutical process involves the understanding, interpretation, and application of Jesus

CHAPTER 6 The Inspiration of Scripture from: The Eyes of Faith
Abstract: In this chapter, I propose, as an explanatory model, that the continuous interpretative and evaluative activity of the sensus fidei/fidelium throughout the production, canonical selection, and ongoing reception/traditioning of the set canonical text constitutes its inspiration by the Holy Spirit. We have already seen how “inspiration” was not necessarily an explicit reason/criterion for inclusion of works in the canon, and that, in patristic times, there was a presumption regarding the inspiration of many writings circulating in local communities. Once works achieve canonical status, it is then that the notion of inspiration emerges, later in church history, as one way of

6 Collaboration and Conflicts: from: Papal Justice
Abstract: From the second half of the Cinquecento, via the confessional and other devices, the Holy Office continued to extend its surveillance over illicit activities and overt or covert “bad” practices like magic, witchcraft, and divination.¹ This oversight had a tight-knit network of officials with internal synergies, or so Rome intended and hoped. In the pope’s domains in Italy, between the sixteenth century and the eighteenth, the Inquisitions were nine in number: Bologna, Ferrara, Faenza, Rimini, Ancona, Fermo, Gubbio, Perugia, and Spoleto. Some of these went back to the Middle Ages; others had been set up later to ease surveillance over

4 “Past All / Grasp God” from: Reading the Underthought
Abstract: “The Wreck of the Deutschland” (1876) is the earliest Hopkins poem that we discuss, but we have postponed its analysis until we could show the workings of Jewish hermeneutics on poems less fraught with theological content. When Hopkins burned his poems and vowed to write no more before entering the Jesuit order, he could not have foreseen the circumstances that would cause him to repeal his decision. After reading a newspaper account of the shipwreck of the Deutschland and of the loss of five Franciscan nuns who had been expelled from Prussia, Hopkins mentioned to the rector of St. Beuno’s

Afterword, or Another Word from: Reading the Underthought
Abstract: Throughout this book, we have been employing a notion of the performative that the work we have done enables us to further clarify. Unlike Austin, we have not assumed that a particular linguistic formulation can itself perform a specific action or determine a certain interpretation. We do not wish to imply that the language of the poems of Hopkins and Eliot, in and of itself, makes our (or anyone else’s) readings happen. Our interest has been, rather, in situating whatever transpires in the middle ground between poem and reader. Thus, our notion of the performative has more in common with

Book Title: Destined for Liberty-The Human Person in the Philosophy of Karol Wojtyla/John Paul II
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): Kupczak Jarosław
Abstract: In this compelling new work, Jaroslaw Kupczak, O.P., presents a complete introduction to John Paul II's theory of the human person
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2853bw

CHAPTER 2 The Early Writings from: Destined for Liberty
Abstract: Between july 1948 and September 1949, Wojtyła worked as a parish priest in the small village Niegowić south of Cracow. Then he returned to Cracow, where he served for two years as an associate pastor in St. Florian’s parish. On September 1, 1951, the new Archbishop of Cracow,¹ Eugeniusz Baziak, ordered Wojtyła to take a two-year sabbatical from any kind of pastoral work in order to write a habilitation thesis.² Father Ignacy Różycki, one of Wojtyła’s former professors, suggested the topic of the compatibility of the ethical system of the German phenomenologist Max Scheler and revealed Christian ethics.³

CHAPTER 3 The Methodology from: Destined for Liberty
Abstract: As we have seen, Wojtyła’s early writings indicate that he was conversant with the history of European philosophy. He knew Plato and Aristotle, was familiar with the Christian philosophy of St. Augustine and St. Thomas Aquinas, and moved knowledgeably among such modern thinkers as David Hume, Jeremy Bentham, Immanuel Kant, and Max Scheler. However, Wojtyła’s early work also proves that he reached beyond mere historical exegesis. The young thinker showed an impressive ability to integrate into his own work the thought of other philosophers. For example, in Lublin Lectures, Wojtyła borrowed from the twentieth-century psychology of the will, Aquinas’s metaphysics,

CHAPTER ONE HEIDEGGER AND THE MEDIEVAL THEOLOGICAL PARADIGM from: The Early Heidegger and Medieval Philosophy
Abstract: Like a great oak tree that has colonized a grove by driving roots deep into subterranean springs not reached by lesser trees, Heidegger’s Sein und Zeit has dominated the twentieth century by feeding off traditions that lesser philosophical works cannot access. Not only a forgotten Aristotle, but also Martin Luther, Duns Scotus, medieval mysticism, and early Christianity are connected in numerous hidden ways to this massive monument to modern angst. These roots are buried deep beneath the surface of Sein und Zeit’s transcendental phenomenological discourse, but they are the source of the book’s strength. A central root runs through Heidegger’s

CHAPTER SEVEN PRIMAL CHRISTIANITY from: The Early Heidegger and Medieval Philosophy
Abstract: In the light of the early Freiburg lectures, it is hard to deny Rudolf Bultmann’s claim that a direct relationship exists between the Daseinanalytic and early Christianity.¹ Heidegger and Bultmann, a specialist on the New Testament at Marburg University, worked closely together during Heidegger’s Marburg years. Heidegger participated in Bultmann’s seminars on New Testatment theology and gave lectures to Bultmann’s students. In addition to the lecture “Das Problem der Sünde bei Luther,” which Heidegger gave in Bultmann’s seminar in 1924, the lecture Der Begriff der Zeit was delivered that same year to the Marburg Theologians Society. In this short piece,

Chapter 3 FROM ANARCHY TO PRINCIPLES: from: The Texture of Being
Abstract: One of the most influential movements among philosophers today is that of Deconstruction. It is the moving energy of thought at the center of much that has been called “postmodern.” Its birthplace is Paris, but it has reached North America’s universities through philosophy, linguistics, literary studies, sociology, political theory, and religious studies, and its influence among young teachers and scholars is already wide and diffuse. Its background was prepared by the hermeneutic work of German philosophers such as Heidegger, and by the work in linguistics and language by such thinkers as de Saussure and Wittgenstein. Deconstruction is part of a

Book Title: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising- Publisher: ANU E Press
Author(s): Gregor Shirley D.
Abstract: This volume contains the papers presented at the second biennial Information Systems Foundations ('Constructing and Criticising') Workshop, held at The Australian National University in Canberra from 16-17 July 2004. The focus of the workshop was, as for the first in the series, the foundations of Information Systems as an academic discipline. The particular emphasis was on the adequacy and completeness of theoretical underpinnings and the research methods employed. At the same time the practical nature of the applications and phenomena with which the discipline deals were kept firmly in view. The papers in this volume range from the unashamedly theoretical ('The Struggle Towards an Understanding of Theory in Information Systems') to the much more practically oriented ('A Procedural Model for Ontological Analyses'). The contents of this volume will be of interest and relevance to academics and advanced students as well as thoughtful and reflective practitioners in the Information Systems field.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jbj4x

6. A hermeneutic analysis of the Denver International Airport Baggage Handling System from: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Cybulski Jacob
Abstract: Although there are several reports of information systems projects that have applied hermeneutics (Boland, 1991; Klein and Myers, 1999; Myers, 1994a), there are very few publications that explain the actual hermeneutic process taken by IS (and in fact, also non-IS) researchers. What this paper strives to do is close the methodological gap and to present one potential framework for the adoption of hermeneutics in the study of information systems.

11. A unified open systems model for explaining organisational change from: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Hasan Helen
Abstract: We currently dwell in a turbulent environment, one in which change constantly occurs and elements in the environment are increasingly interrelated (Emery and Trist, 1971; Terreberry; 1971; Robbins, 1990). The nature of change has recently tended to be revolutionary rather than evolutionary. One possible explanation is that the progress in information and telecommunication technologies, together with the inception of the Internet as a global computer network, has made the world substantially more interconnected than ever before. This acts as a catalyst in fostering further change so that change is now the norm rather than an occasional occurrence. This poses an

13. A procedural model for ontological analyses from: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Indulska Marta
Abstract: As techniques for conceptual modelling, enterprise modelling, and business process modelling have proliferated over the years (e.g. Olle et al., 1991), researchers and practitioners alike have attempted to determine objective bases on which to compare, evaluate, and determine when to use these different techniques (e.g. Karam and Casselman, 1993; Gorla et al., 1995) . However, throughout the 1980s, 1990s, and into the new millennium, it has become increasingly apparent to many researchers that without a theoretical foundation on which to base the specification for these various modelling techniques, incomplete evaluative frameworks of factors, features, and facets will continue to proliferate.

10. Sacrilege: from: Negotiating the Sacred
Author(s) Hunter Ian
Abstract: In this chapter I will be looking at sacrilege in the context of Western European religion and politics in the early modern period. I will be adopting an historical-anthropological approach, with a view to making this discussion of sacrilege comparable with those of people working in other religious and cultural settings. Moreover, there is an important sense in which the societies of early modern Western Europe were themselves multicultural, not just because most contained diverse ethnic ′nations′, but more importantly because they contained mutually hostile religious communities. In fact, ′religious cleansing′ in early modern Europe provided the prototype for later

11. Expressions of religiosity and blasphemy in modern societies from: Negotiating the Sacred
Author(s) Hassan Riaz
Abstract: Until recently a widely held view in sociology was that the conditions of modernity inevitably lead to the secularisation of society. It was further argued that in a secular society, religion becomes increasingly a private concern of the individual and thus loses much of its public relevance and influence. The conditions of modernity were seen as conducive to promoting religious pluralism in which people were voluntary adherents to a plurality of religions, none of which could claim a position of hegemony in society. These and similar views appeared in the works of a number of prominent scholars including Talcott Parsons,¹

14. ′We already know what is good and just…′ : from: Negotiating the Sacred
Author(s) Lamb Winifred Wing Han
Abstract: While the theme of suspicion is muted in mainstream philosophy of religion, it is explicit and open in the work of Nietzsche, Freud and Marx but

Book Title: Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land-Land and territory in the Austronesian world
Publisher: ANU E Press
Author(s): REUTER THOMAS
Abstract: This collection of papers is the fifth in a series of volumes on the work of the Comparative Austronesian Project. Reflecting the unique experience of fourteen ethnographers in as many different societies, the papers in this volume explore how people in the Austronesian-speaking societies of the Asia-Pacific have traditionally constructed their relationship to land and specific territories. Focused on the nexus of local and global processes, the volume offers fresh perspectives to current debate in social theory on the conflicting human tendencies of mobility and emplacement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jbjn5

Chapter 3. Ritual Domains and Communal Land in the Highlands of Bali from: Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) Reuter Thomas
Abstract: The central highlands and some coastal areas of Bali are home to a little-known indigenous minority group, the Bali Aga or ′Mountain Balinese′. This paper focuses on ritual domains formed by clusters of Bali Aga ′villages′ (desa adat or desa ulu apad). These regional, spatially bounded and historically conceived networks are known as banua. The banua and its constituent desa form a sacred landscape inscribed by the memory of a continuous history of human settlement and migration, and re-inscribed through origin narratives and ritual performances at sacred sites of origin, which are marked by shrines or temples. This multi-layered process

Chapter 5. from: Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) Winn Phillip
Abstract: The Banda Islands in central Maluku have long been a site of historical transformations. As a consequence, human relationships to land and place in the Bandas need to be understood in terms of dynamic processes of culture and history. In the pre-colonial period, the islands formed a key part of extensive trading networks reaching across the archipelago to link Maluku with the northern seaports of Java, the cosmopolitan city-state of Malacca in peninsular Malaysia, and ultimately to the Middle East, China and Europe. By the arrival of the first Europeans, the population of the islands included numbers of resident Malay

Chapter 10. Contending for Ritual Control of Land and Polity: from: Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) Fox James J.
Abstract: The first task in this paper is to locate the problem at hand within a theoretical framework that identifies its significance. ¹ I begin with an examination of the idea of land and domain among the Rotinese. My specific focus is on the central domain ( nusak) of Termanu on the island of Roti itself. Although there is considerable linguistic and cultural variation among the domains of the island, the Rotinese share a basic understanding about the nature of their domains. They have all been subjected to similar formative influences. Among the domains of Roti, Termanu was the domain selected by

Chapter 14. Finishing the Land: from: Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) Patterson Mary
Abstract: The first wave of scholars interested in the archipelago of Vanuatu, known as the New Hebrides before 1980, made frequent reference in their work to continuities and commonalities linking the region to its north-west, but it is in the work of linguists and archaeologists rather than in anthropology that Vanuatu′s position in the Austronesian world has been recently established. In most of the work of the second wave of scholars working in the colonial period in Vanuatu, from the 1950s to the late 1970s, anthropologists were much more likely to refer to theoretical issues arising from work in Melanesia, for

Postscript — Spatial Categories in Social Context: from: Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) Fox James J.
Abstract: This collection of ethnographic essays on different peoples within the Austronesian-speaking world represents a step in a comparative effort that is encouraging and frustrating. The papers in this volume engage in this comparative effort in fascinating and diverse ways but their very diversity only highlights the variety of approaches adopted within a comparative Austronesian framework. The papers speak to each other and to previous papers in earlier volumes in the series on Comparative Austronesian Studies but they represent no single viewpoint, nor do they espouse a consistent methodology comparable with that of the ′comparative method′ in linguistics. The cumulative effect

Book Title: The Poetic Power of Place-Comparative Perspectives on Austronesian Ideas of Locality
Publisher: ANU E Press
Author(s): Fox James J.
Abstract: This collection of papers is the fourth in a series of volumes on the work of the Comparative Austronesian Project. Each paper describes a specific Austronesian locality and offers an ethnographic account of the way in which social knowledge is vested, maintained and transformed in a particular landscape. The intention of the volume is to consider common patterns in the representation of place among Austronesian-speaking populations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jbjrm

Chapter 2. The Water That Blesses, The River That Flows: from: The Poetic Power of Place
Author(s) Thomas Philip
Abstract: Not long after beginning fieldwork in the village of Manambondro in coastal southeast Madagascar, I was called one evening to the house of the ʺheadmanʺ of the house-group in which I was domiciled. Gathered together there in the encroaching gloom of dusk were several men, to whom the purpose of my visit was being explained. When one man heard that it was my hope to learn to speak the dialect of Malagasy spoken thereabouts he interjected to the effect that I would learn the language as quickly and easily as I drank the water of the Manambondro River.

Book Title: Origins, Ancestry and Alliance-Explorations in Austronesian Ethnography
Publisher: ANU E Press
Author(s): Sather Clifford
Abstract: This collection of papers, the third in a series of volumes on the work of the Comparative Austronesian Project, explores indigenous Austronesian ideas of origin, ancestry and alliance and considers the comparative significance of these ideas in social practice. The papers examine social practice in a diverse range of societies extending from insular Southeast Asia to the islands of the Pacific.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jbjs3

Chapter 1. Introduction from: Origins, Ancestry and Alliance
Author(s) Fox James J.
Abstract: This is the third in a series of volumes produced in the Departme of Anthropology from the work of the Comparative Austronesian Project.¹ The first of these volumes examined the comparative design of Austronesian houses and related these spatial forms to the social and ritual practices of their resident groups. The second volume provided a general survey of the Austronesians focusing on their common origins and historical transformations. This third volume explores indigenous Austronesian ideas of origin, ancestry and alliance and considers the comparative significance of these ideas in social practice. As a collection, these papers offer a variety of

Chapter 11. Histories of Diversity, Hierarchies of Unity: from: Origins, Ancestry and Alliance
Author(s) Pannell Sandra
Abstract: Writing of local origin ʺmythsʺ from the ʺTimorese Archipelagoʺ and the ʺMoluccasʺ, F.A.E. van Wouden observes that ʺone is struck by the remarkable points of resemblance … [between] … the system delineated in these myths … [and] … the structure of societyʺ (1968:195). The legitimating potential of local origin narratives alluded to by van Wouden has also been discussed in a number of more recent studies² of cultural groups in ʺEastern Indonesiaʺ although few of these works extend the analysis of ʺmythʺ beyond the charter paradigm originally proposed by Malinowski (1926) and adopted by van Wouden.

18 The Heritage of the Axial Age: from: The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) BELLAH ROBERT N.
Abstract: In this volume the contributors are focusing on the Axial Age and my chapter will do likewise. However, my work on the Axial Age comes out of a larger project concerning religion in human evolution from the Paleolithic to the Axial Age.¹ I will therefore begin with a word about evolution itself as a concept. I assume that none of the contributors to this volume has a problem with the theory of biological evolution, even though we may have some different ways of interpreting it. Problems arise when we speak of social and cultural evolution: Is that even a valid

3 Tribal Religion: from: Religion in Human Evolution
Abstract: In Chapter 1 I offered a typology of religious representation—unitive, enactive, symbolic, and conceptual—to describe the ways in which religions have understood reality. The concepts of enactive, symbolic, and conceptual representation were adapted from the work of Jerome Bruner on child development. According to Bruner, who is in turn adapting his categories from Piaget, the child first learns about the world by acting on it. It is by holding, throwing, reaching for, that the children come to know the objects that surround them. In early language learning the symbol and the object are fused—the sun and the

6 The Axial Age I: from: Religion in Human Evolution
Abstract: Ritual in tribal societies involves the participation of all or most of the members of the group—in classic Durkheimian fashion, if the ritual goes well, it leaves the group filled with energy and solidarity.¹ Some are more active than others, but many are involved, and even when, as in the case of the Navajo, the ritual centers around someone who is being cured, the whole network of people with whom that person is involved participates in and benefits from the ritual. In stark contrast, ritual in archaic societies focuses above all on one person, the divine or quasi-divine king,

10 Conclusion from: Religion in Human Evolution
Abstract: Pascal in one of his fragments says something that applies to this book: “The last thing one discovers when writing a work is what one should put first.”¹ After having written Chapters 1 through 9, and in the course of completely rewriting Chapter 2, “Religion and Evolution,” I discovered the importance of play among mammals and the extraordinary way in which play in animals provided the background for the development of play, ritual, and culture among humans.² So play, though discovered last, did get in quite early in this book, but then is largely ignored through the whole trek from

6 MEMORY AND THE SEARCH FOR MEANING IN POST-PARTITION DELHI from: Changing Homelands
Abstract: My journey to grapple with Partition began when my grandfather remarked that despite the fact of Partition, he would gladly have continued to work in Lahore. I sat there stunned, not sure if he was serious. Why, he asked, don’t people work in Dubai? And wasn’t Lahore far closer than Dubai? In post-Partition India, Lahore felt a million miles further than Dubai. His vivid memory of the desire to stay on in Lahore, despite the high politicking that had resulted in Partition and despite the long years since Partition, formed an unanalysed silence. This chapter uses oral history to think

CONCLUSION from: Changing Homelands
Abstract: Why did so many Punjabis insist that they never saw Partition coming? Was this the work of nostalgia or memories gone astray? Why did so many historians insist that Partition was inevitable? Were they victims of an inexorable faith in the power of historical explanation? Yet the players and writers of history often spoke the same language and frequently drifted into each other’s modes of explanation. I found the questions that were posed to me as I conducted interviews in 2002–2003 returning as I re-read my notes from the archives. I felt that a whole range of powerful emotions

Story 9 Marouf the Cobbler from: Stranger Magic
Abstract: Marouf the Cobbler’s life is made a misery by his wife, a harridan who subjects him to her whims and beats him when he fails to produce what she wants. He finds it hard to earn a living at his trade; nobody seems to have their shoes mended any more. One day, she demands that he bring her back a sweetmeat – shredded wheat drenched in wild honey. No work comes his way that day, but the baker takes pity on him and advances him the money he needs to buy the sweetmeat, nicely cooked in butter but steeped in

CHAPTER ELEVEN The Voice of the Toy from: Stranger Magic
Abstract: Fortune is wealth in the story of ‘Marouf the Cobbler,’ and both arise without rhyme or reason and pour down blessings on him: no special qualities of personality single out the hero, except perhaps an unparalleled willingness to blag and go along with the scam once his friend the Egyptian merchant Ali has put it in his head. No unusual marks of favour from destiny, or exceptional piety or ability entitle him. The luck that comes his way when he disturbs the jinni in the ruined warehouse puts paid to any notions that virtues like hard work and diligence and

Story 13 The Ebony Horse from: Stranger Magic
Abstract: The king tests the first two gifts. They work as promised, and the sages ask for

5 The Levellers: from: Working Knowledge
Abstract: W. V. Quine’s response to logical empiricism was notable for its neglect of the Unity of Science movement. Neither Rudolf Carnap’s program of the Logic of Science nor Otto Neurath’s grandiose attempts to orchestrate a working alliance of the sciences registered strongly at Depression-era Harvard. Nevertheless, as S. S. Stevens’s organization of the Science of Science Discussion Group made clear, members of Harvard’s interstitial academy were deeply concerned with matters of cross-disciplinary communication and coordination. This was evident from Quine’s conviction that logic, natural science, and philosophy had important things to say to one another. The problem of interdisciplinary understanding

6 Lessons of the Revolution: from: Working Knowledge
Abstract: The failure of the Carnegie Project on Theory revealed an important limitation of the Harvard complex. Parsons and his fellow Levellers had assumed that the protocols guiding seminar discussion and informal interchange in the interstitial academy would offer a suitable foundation for a general theory that could unite the Department of Social Relations. The blending of epistemology, pedagogy, and research practice seemed natural to the alumni of Henderson’s Pareto seminar. But the ambitions of the DSR’s leaders proved too grand. Harvard’s interstitial networks were too diverse and amorphous to provide the basis for a coherent independent department or an integrated

Conclusion from: The World of Persian Literary Humanism
Abstract: Abu al-Hasan Ali ibn Osman al-Jollabi al-Hujwiri al-Ghaznavi (ca. 990–1077) was a prominent Sufi master who was responsible for spreading both Persian literary prose and, through it, Sufism in south Asia. He was born in Ghazni in contemporary Afghanistan during the Ghaznavid empire and died and is buried in Lahore, in contemporary Pakistan, where to this day his mausoleum is a major site of pious pilgrims from the farthest corners of the Muslim world. Al-Hujwiri’s principal work, Kashf al-Mahjub(Unveiling the Veiled) is considered among the first and finest Sufi treatises written in Persian. Early in this text when

Book Title: Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel- Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Author(s): Tattam Helen
Abstract: Gabriel Marcel (1889–1973) stands outside the traditional canon of twentieth-century French philosophers. Where he is not simply forgotten or overlooked, he is dismissed as a ‘relentlessly unsystematic’ thinker, or, following Jean-Paul Sartre’s lead, labelled a ‘Christian existentialist’ — a label that avoids consideration of Marcel’s work on its own terms. How is one to appreciate Marcel’s contribution, especially when his oeuvre appears to be at odds with philosophical convention? Helen Tattam proposes a range of readings, as opposed to one single interpretation: a series of departures or explorations that bring Marcel’s work into contact with critical partners such as Henri Bergson, Paul Ricoeur and Emmanuel Lévinas and other insights into a host of twentieth-century philosophical shifts concerning time, the subject, the other, ethics, and religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jc857

INTRODUCTION: from: Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: The aim of this book is to shed light on the philosophy of a twentieth-century French thinker who is notoriously difficult to situate, namely Gabriel Marcel (1889–1973). Marcel stands somewhat outside the canon of twentieth-century French philosophers. As J. J. Benefield rightly notes: ‘Among the names of thinkers who are commonly listed as belonging to the French school of existentialism[,] that of Gabriel Marcel is often relegated to one side and promptly overlooked[,] if not forgotten’ (1973: 6). Furthermore, virtually every scholar who has attempted to engage with Marcel’s thought has commented on how difficult his work is to

Book Title: The Signifying Self-Cervantine Drama as Counter-Perspective Aesthetic
Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Author(s): Henry Melanie
Abstract: The Signifying Self: Cervantine Drama as Counter-Perspective Aesthetic offers a comprehensive analysis of all eight of Cervantes's Ocho comedias (published 1615), moving beyond conventional anti-Lope approaches to Cervantine dramatic practise in order to identify what, indeed, his theatre promotes. Considered on its own aesthetic terms, but also taking into account ontological and socio-cultural concerns, this study compels a re-assessment of Cervantes's drama and conflates any monolithic interpretations which do not allow for the textual interplay of contradictory and conflicting discourses which inform it. Cervantes's complex and polyvalent representation of freedom underpins such an approach; a concept which is considered to be a leitmotif of Cervantes's work but which has received scant attention with regards to his theatre. Investigation of this topic reveals not only Cervantes's rejection of established theatrical convention, but his preoccupation with the difficult relationship between the individual and the early modern Spanish world. Cervantes's comedias emerge as a counter-perspective to dominant contemporary Spanish ideologies and more orthodox artistic imaginings. Ultimately, The Signifying Self seeks to recuperate the Ocho comedias as a significant part of the Cervantine, and Golden-Age, canon and will be of interest and benefit to those scholars who work on Cervantes and indeed on early modern Spanish theatre in general.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jc86q

INTRODUCTION from: The Signifying Self
Abstract: Miguel de Cervantes (1547–1616) has long been considered a ‘literary giant’, an accolade attributed to him on account of his magnus opus,Don Quijote de la Mancha.¹ First published in 1605 and followed by a second volume in 1615, Cervantes’s creation ofel ingenioso hidalgois credited with the birth of the modern novel and has achieved iconic status in Spanish cultural history.² In his lifetime, as today, the novel eclipsed the writer’s broad range of work in verse, prose and drama; to the extent that, in relative terms, critical appraisal of Cervantes’s other literary endeavours has been minimal.³

CHAPTER 2 Staging Libertad in Cervantes’s Comedias de Cautivos from: The Signifying Self
Abstract: Cervantes’s comedias de cautivoshave been considered by one critic as ‘el resultado literario de una experiencia vital insoslayable, imposible de olvidar, que había marcado para siempre su biografía y su quehacer literario’.¹ Herein lie the two areas of investigation which have so concerned Cervantistas: the events of Cervantes’s 1575–80 North African imprisonment and the impact that such a traumatic experience has exerted on his literary production. Critical interest has resulted in copious biographies and articles and the general consensus that Cervantes’s experience as captive left an indelible mark on his work. Nonetheless, as George Camamis has noted, there

Book Title: Integral Pluralism-Beyond Culture Wars
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): DALLMAYR FRED
Abstract: Dallmayr critically compares integral pluralism against the theories of Carl Schmitt, the Religious Right, international "realism," and so-called political Islam. Drawing on the works of James, Heidegger, Gadamer, and Merleau-Ponty, Integral Pluralism offers sophisticated and carefully researched solutions for the conflicts of the modern world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jcf1j

6. Hermeneutics and Cross-Cultural Encounters: from: Integral Pluralism
Abstract: As customarily defined, hermeneuticsmeans the theory, or rather the practice or art, of interpretation. In its primary and traditional sense,interpretationmeans textual interpretation, that is, the encounter between a reader and a text. In this encounter, something has to happen, some work has to be done: the reader needs to discover the meaning of the text, which is usually far from self-evident. The difficulty of the work is increased in the case of temporal or spatial distance: when the reader wishes to understand a text from another age or in a different language. Yet to some extent, the

2 Us and Them: from: Blood in the Sand
Abstract: The State of the Union address offers every president the chance to identify his accomplishments, laud the condition of the country under his reign, and offer a vision for the future. In his speech of January 30, 2002, George W. Bush focused on the need for a drastic military buildup and a new doctrine for fighting terrorism in the aftermath of the attacks on the World Trade Center and the Pentagon by the al Qaeda terrorist network. It would become, arguably, the most important speech of his first term. The picture was painted of a nation at risk since September

7 Dub’ya’s Fellow Travelers: from: Blood in the Sand
Author(s) Jacobsen Kurt
Abstract: What are “fellow travelers”? Once upon a time, during the 1920s and 1930s, the epithet referred to left-wing intellectuals who, though not members of the Communist Party, were sympathetic to its political project. No preening right-winger or proud moderate will ever let anyone on the Left forget how writers such as Lion Feuchtwanger, Romain Rolland, Lincoln Steffens, and Beatrice and Sidney Webb traipsed off into darkest Russia, went on gracious NKVD-guided tours of the glorious Soviet future, and rhapsodized that, so far as they could see, it worked. Indeed, no one should forget this profoundly pathetic episode. True, many inquisitive

Technology and Ethics in The Day the Earth Stood Still from: The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Skoble Aeon J.
Abstract: Robert Wise’s 1951 movie The Day the Earth Stood Stillis generally regarded as a classic of science fiction film. At least as a working definition of the genre, I take science fiction to be that branch of literature (and by extension films) that deals with the effects of science or technology on the human condition or that explores the human condition via science. This can include utopian or dystopian future societies, of course, butThe Day the Earth Stood Stillis set in early 1950s America.

2001: from: The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Stoehr Kevin L.
Abstract: In 2001: A Space Odyssey(1968) we are invited by director Stanley Kubrick to experience a mesmerizing yet also alienating form of sensory liberation, as paradoxical as such an experience may at first sound. His landmark science fiction film does not attempt to free us somehow from our five senses, certainly. In fact, the film tends to enhance an appreciation of our perceptual faculties, particularly those of vision and hearing, as well as to encourage reflection on what we have experienced through our senses while watching the film. But Kubrick’s masterwork leads us beyond the borders of our conventional world

The Dialectic of Enlightenment in Metropolis from: The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Abrams Jerold J.
Abstract: For anyone living in the late twentieth and early twenty-first centuries, science fiction cinema is one of the few art forms that attempt to predict the future of human nature and civilization—a future filled with space travel, nanotechnology, genetic engineering, and widespread surveillance. Ridley Scott’s Blade Runner(1982) andAlien(1979), George Lucas’sStar Warssextology (1977–2005), the Wachowski brothers’The Matrix(1999), and Stanley Kubrick’sDr. Strangelove(1963) andA Clockwork Orange(1971) are among the most influential science fiction films. None of them, however, can be properly understood without an initial grasp of Fritz Lang’s early

Imagining the Future, Contemplating the Past: from: The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Palmer R. Barton
Abstract: A defining feature of science fiction is that such works of imaginative realism (a potent stylistic brew of perhaps irreconcilable elements) speculate about some future age or alternative, extraterrestrial world. That imagined place and time is characterized essentially by “advancements” in science that plausibly explore the consequences of what is now known and actively researched (in such areas as artificial intelligence, genetic manipulation, space travel, pharmacology, and so forth). The difference between the reader’s implied present and the postulated alternative results from the technological manipulation of the natural environment and human experience that such acquired knowledge makes possible.

The Murder of Moral Idealism: from: The Philosophy of Neo-Noir
Author(s) Berger Douglas L.
Abstract: Before Ian Campbell joined the Los Angeles Police Department (LAPD) and became a plainclothes street felony cop, this reflective, bagpipe-playing son of Scottish immigrants had taken college courses as a premed student at the University of California, Los Angeles, and nurtured an interest in the philosopher Immanuel Kant. Ian was apparently so fascinated by philosophy that his college friends often found the attachment inexplicable and teased him that it got in the way of both his other studies and his life in general.¹ It seems as though, after Ian joined the force, his mother and friends noticed that the work

Book Title: The Philosophy of Spike Lee- Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Conard Mark T.
Abstract: In The Philosophy of Spike Lee, editor Mark T. Conard and an impressive list of contributors delve into the rich philosophy behind this filmmaker's extensive work. Not only do they analyze the major themes of race and discrimination that permeate Lee's productions, but also examine other philosophical ideas that are found in his films, ideas such as the nature of time, transcendence, moral motivation, self-constitution, and justice. The authors specialize in a variety of academic disciplines that range from African American Studies to literary and cultural criticism and Philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jcwgn

(Still) Fighting the Power: from: The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Finnegan Elizabeth Hope
Abstract: Near the end of Spike Lee’s Do the Right Thing(1989), the two Italian American brothers Pino (John Tuturro) and Vito (Richard Edson) are arguing in the back room of their father’s pizzeria, where they work. Pino, the sullen, overtly racist older brother, is manhandling Vito, trying to impress on him the danger of getting too close to their multicultural—primarily African American—customers and, in particular, their delivery boy Mookie (Spike Lee). For Pino, the struggle is about maintaining a discrete and essential identity; earlier in the film he cautions his brother, “Remember who you are.” What he means

Fevered Desires and Interracial Intimacies in Jungle Fever from: The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Sundstrom Ronald R.
Abstract: Spike Lee’s 1991 film Jungle Feveris one of several concerning American taboos against interracial intimacy and sex. The earliest film on the subject was D. W. Griffith’s 1915 silent movieThe Birth of a Nation, which condemns interracial sex ormiscegenation, to use the term invented by opponents of black emancipation, as a threat to the nation. Every film on interracial intimacies since then has been a comment on Griffith’s work, which also stands apart as a milestone of epic cinematography. Most of the subsequent films, such as Elia Kazan’s 1949 filmPinkyor Guy Green’s 1965 filmA

Bamboozled: from: The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Flory Dan
Abstract: Spike Lee is no stranger to controversy. Since the beginning of his career the director has used his films to confront audiences with difficult issues that need to be understood and thought about—for example, the genesis of riots ( Do the Right Thing[1989]), the politics of interracial relationships (Jungle Fever[1991]), reasons for the existence of drug cultures (Clockers[1995]), xenophobia (Summer of Sam[1999]), and the importance of taking responsibility for one’s actions (25th Hour[2002],Inside Man[2006]). Through his work, then, Lee seeks to compel viewers to face up to and reflect on matters of urgent

Rethinking the First Person: from: The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) LaRocca David
Abstract: Can someone else write my autobiography? The question challenges the conventional meaning of autobiography. And since writing an autobiography—in America, after Benjamin Franklin—often occurs with an awareness that the status of the work is bound up with the authority of its author, the notion of authorship also becomes troubled.¹ For instance, because an autobiography appears to be direct communication from its author, the very conditions of its presentation may suggest we are reading a true story, a mere record of what happened. Yet, like the life it aims to account for, autobiography is fashioned, a literary artifact, necessarily

3 It’s the land, stupid! from: The Governance of Common Property in the Pacific Region
Author(s) Ballard Chris
Abstract: A sense of his place, his home, flooded him... His blood, urine, feces and semen, the tears, strands of hair, vomit, flakes of skin, his infant and childhood teeth, the clippings of finger and toenails, all the effluvia of his body were in that soil, part of that place. The work of his hands had changed the shape of the land, the weirs in the steep ditch beside the lane, the ditch itself, the smooth fields were echoes of himself in

4 Customary land tenure and common/public rights to minerals in Papua New Guinea from: The Governance of Common Property in the Pacific Region
Author(s) Lakau Andrew A.L.
Abstract: Throughout Papua New Guinea a wide range of natural resources or substances were extracted from land, sea and waters, using a variety of techniques. In coastal areas coral reefs, shells and other marine resources have always had great value. In the highlands, there is widespread evidence of stone quarries and other extraction sites which were worked on for thousands of years. Haynes (1995:33) summarises the evidence on the use of natural resources

Book Title: Aquinas, Feminism, and the Common Good- Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): DeCrane Susanne M.
Abstract: To dismiss the work of philosophers and theologians of the past because of their limited perceptions of the whole of humankind is tantamount to tossing the tot out with the tub water. Such is the case when feminist scholars of religion and ethics confront Thomas Aquinas, whose views of women can only be described as misogynistic. Rather than dispense with him, Susanne DeCrane seeks to engage Aquinas and reflect his otherwise compelling thought through the prism of feminist theology, hermeneutics, and ethics. Focusing on one of Aquinas's great intellectual contributions, the fundamental notion of "the common good"-in short, the human will toward peace and justice-DeCrane demonstrates the currency of that notion through a contemporary social issue: women's health care in the United States and, specifically, black women and breast cancer. In her skillful re-engagement with Aquinas, DeCrane shows that certain aspects of religious traditions heretofore understood as oppressive to women and minority groups can actually be parsed, "retrieved," and used to rectify social ills. Aquinas, Feminism, and the Common Goodis a bold and intellectually rigorous feminist retrieval of an important text by a Catholic scholar seeking to remain in the tradition, while demanding that the tradition live up to its emphasis on human equity and justice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt3q4

CHAPTER 3 A Feminist Retrieval of the Principle of the Common Good from: Aquinas, Feminism, and the Common Good
Abstract: The feminist hermeneutical method proposed in the first chapter is comprehensive and ethical. It includes a consideration of the text or tradition using appropriate analytical tools, as well as the next and necessary step into praxis. When one engages in a critical assessment of significant aspects of Aquinas’s principle of the common good, such as his anthropology, one must attend to the contributions that Aquinas’s work can make to contemporary scholarship: for example, Aquinas’s conception of the person contributes to a fuller description of the human person suggested by Martha Nussbaum’s functioning capabilities. Without openness to a mutual correlation of

CHAPTER 3 Professional Education as Transformation from: In Search of the Whole
Author(s) Deahl Robert J.
Abstract: While writing this chapter, I have been working with my staff, faculty, and advisors in completing a strategic plan for the college as we prepare to celebrate the fifteenth anniversary in 2011. This plan is part of a university-wide effort designed to meet one of the critical needs that we face in Catholic higher

CHAPTER 4 Learning to Love the Law of the Sea from: In Search of the Whole
Author(s) George William P.
Abstract: For many if not most doctoral students, the choice of a dissertation topic is a matter not only of importance but, until the choice becomes clear, also of obscurity. At least it was for me. Late in my first year of doctoral studies in the mid-1980s, I had yet to settle on a general topic that would shape my remaining coursework and outside research. Having spent four years in Zambia, and with a background in philosophy and theology primarily in the Catholic tradition, I entered the University of Chicago Divinity School’s program in ethics and society with vague ideas about

CHAPTER 11 The Hunting and the Haunting from: In Search of the Whole
Author(s) Steele Peter
Abstract: I have written well over a hundred poems that are to one degree or another after works of art—usually paintings. When I was asked recently about the attraction of such a topic, it occurred to me that the attraction lies in part in the fact that those works are finished things: whether or not they sport actual frames, they are all in some sense framed. Another way of saying this is that they are the polar opposite of the chaotic; and for reasons in part instinctive and in part educational, I do love the manifestly coherent—a brick wall

CHAPTER 12 Attaining Harmony with the Earth from: In Search of the Whole
Author(s) Vanin Cristina
Abstract: I teach at St. Jerome’s University, a small Catholic liberal arts university in southwestern Ontario. When I returned to work after an eight-month parental leave following the adoption of our two daughters from Ecuador, I indicated to close friends that on the day that I first met Sofia and Daniela, I felt as if I had been dropped off a very, very high cliff—from the life of work and relationship that I had known and had been living for a long time, into the incredible life of parenting two little girls in another country and culture, in another language,

CHAPTER THREE The Evolutionary Achievement of Jesus from: Christianity in Evolution
Abstract: In the previous chapter I offered a response to a question that Pope John Paul II once addressed to evolutionary science, whether an evolutionary perspective would throw any light on Christian beliefs, specifically on the significance of the human person as created in the image of God. In answer, I proposed that human altruism, which puzzles many evolutionary scientists, can provide a theological link between God and his human creature in that altruism originates in the life of the divine Trinity of persons as they interact in self-donation to each other and are operative in the work of creation, and

CHAPTER SEVEN Theology in Evolution from: Christianity in Evolution
Abstract: This book has aimed to explore a theology of evolution that will enable the Christian faith to take constructive and systematic note of the way in which the science of evolution has advanced our knowledge of human origins. Much of it will appear negative to many in terms of arguing to dispense with some traditional Christian beliefs, namely, the interconnected beliefs relating to original sin, the Fall, concupiscence, and the resulting need for human reconciliation and redemption and for a propitiatory sacrifice of atonement to an offended God. Yet my aim has been entirely positive. The work of constructing a

Chapter 6 September 11 in the Rearview Mirror: from: Power and the Past
Author(s) Bartov Omer
Abstract: At the end of the last century several books were published reviewing the past hundred years and making predictions about the future. Historians naturally participated both in the summing up and in the more tentative forecasts. Not surprisingly, historians are much better qualified to analyze the events of yesteryear than to predict what might happen tomorrow. But they—or I should say we—do work under the assumption that by detecting some trends, undercurrents, structures, evolutionary predilections, or revolutionary preconditions, which characterized past events, we might be better prepared for them in the future as well. In other words, we

Introduction from: Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights
Abstract: I came to this research with a worldview that has been profoundly enriched by living and working in the Caribbean and in

5 “Ay Ay Vienen Estos Juareños”: from: Telling Stories
Author(s) RAZO ELIANA
Abstract: IN THIS CHAPTER we examine what appears to be a perfect storm related to identity work in social interaction: the use of language alternation in quoting others’ speech in the course of telling conversational, or “small,” stories. Central to language alternation is laying claim to, putting off, or otherwise constructing and negotiating social identities (Torras and Gafaranga 2002). Similarly, identity formation and construction are based in narrative forms and functions (Georgakopoulou 2006; Taylor 2006). Last, identity work is at the core of reported speech (Clift 2006; Stokoe and Edwards 2007). Here we analyze two conversational stories from group interview sessions

6 A Tripartite Self-Construction Model of Identity from: Telling Stories
Author(s) COHEN LEOR
Abstract: THE PURPOSE of this study is to explore how people negotiate their place in the world through the discursive manipulations of identity. A social constructionist perspective is assumed, where identity is constructed online through discourse in social interaction. Constructionism views identity as a dynamic, fluid, multiplicitous construct able to adjust to the demands of the almost infinite array of contexts. Interactional sociolinguistics emerged out of a constructionist framework (De Fina, Schiffrin, and Bamberg 2006, 1–6), where the microanalysis of discourse affords diverse opportunities to uncover that which would otherwise be rationally invisible (Garfinkel 1967, vii; Shotter 1993, 102). This

Book Title: The Sexual Person-Toward a Renewed Catholic Anthropology
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Lawler Michael G.
Abstract: Two principles capture the essence of the official Catholic position on the morality of sexuality: first, that any human genital act must occur within the framework of heterosexual marriage; second, each and every marriage act must remain open to the transmission of life. In this comprehensive overview of Catholicism and sexuality, theologians Todd A. Salzman and Michael G. Lawler examine and challenge these principles. Remaining firmly within the Catholic tradition, they contend that the church is being inconsistent in its teaching by adopting a dynamic, historically conscious anthropology and worldview on social ethics and the interpretation of scripture while adopting a static, classicist anthropology and worldview on sexual ethics. While some documents from Vatican II, like Gaudium et spes("the marital act promotes self-giving by which spouses enrich each other"), gave hope for a renewed understanding of sexuality, the church has not carried out the full implications of this approach. In short, say Salzman and Lawler: emphasize relationships, not acts, and recognize Christianity's historically and culturally conditioned understanding of human sexuality.The Sexual Persondraws historically, methodologically, and anthropologically from the best of Catholic tradition and provides a context for current theological debates between traditionalists and revisionists regarding marriage, cohabitation, homosexuality, reproductive technologies, and what it means to be human. This daring and potentially revolutionary book will be sure to provoke constructive dialogue among theologians, and between theologians and the Magisterium.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt69p

Prologue from: The Sexual Person
Abstract: Two magisterial principles capture the essence of the Catholic moral, sexual tradition. The first principle comes from the Congregation for the Doctrine of the Faith: “Any human genital act whatsoever may be placed only within the framework of marriage.”¹ The second received its modern articulation in Pope Paul VI’s Humanae vitae: “Each and every marriage act must remain open to the transmission of life.”² In the Catholic tradition sexual activity is institutionalized within the confines of marriage and procreation, and sexual morality is marital morality.

Chapter 6 The Generative Family from: Ethics in Light of Childhood
Abstract: A SECOND WAY TO consider some of the practical implications of childism is to think about the ethical dimensions of life in families. Of course, discussion of children has historically included families centrally. From the point of view of childhood, it is clearly important for human beings to take part in close kin networks. The birth of each new person in the world is, in a way, the rebirth of family: a bodily bond to a mother and father, an emotional and economic bond to a household, a genetic bond to a larger ancestry, and a cultural bond to a

Conclusion from: Ethics in Light of Childhood
Abstract: THIS BOOK HAS BEEN exploring how the consideration of childhood should transform fundamental ethical understanding. More than just applying ethics to children, it has applied the experiences and perspectives of children to ethics. Since children are fully a third of all humanity, and since they are not morally reducible to adults, this transformation is no small matter. Reimagining ethics in light of childhood—and not just in light of adulthood—is challenging and often surprising. Philosophers and theologians throughout the ages have attempted this task from different angles, but the results of history show that much more work needs to

Book Title: Overcoming Our Evil-Human Nature and Spiritual Exercises in Xunzi and Augustine
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Stalnaker Aaron
Abstract: Can people ever really change? Do they ever become more ethical, and if so, how? Overcoming Our Evilfocuses on the way ethical and religious commitments are conceived and nurtured through the methodical practices that Pierre Hadot has called "spiritual exercises." These practices engage thought, imagination, and sensibility, and have a significant ethical component, yet aim for a broader transformation of the whole personality. Going beyond recent philosophical and historical work that has focused on ancient Greco-Roman philosophy, Stalnaker broadens ethical inquiry into spiritual exercises by examining East Asian as well as classical Christian sources, and taking religious and seemingly "aesthetic" practices such as prayer, ritual, and music more seriously as objects of study. More specifically,Overcoming Our Evilexamines and compares the thought and practice of the early Christian Augustine of Hippo, and the early Confucian Xunzi. Both have sophisticated and insightful accounts of spiritual exercises, and both make such ethical work central to their religious thought and practice. Yet to understand the two thinkers' recommendations for cultivating virtue we must first understand some important differences. Here Stalnaker disentangles the competing aspects of Augustine and Xunxi's ideas of "human nature." His groundbreaking comparison of their ethical vocabularies also drives a substantive analysis of fundamental issues in moral psychology, especially regarding emotion and the complex idea of "the will," to examine how our dispositions to feel, think, and act might be slowly transformed over time. The comparison meticulously constructs vivid portraits of both thinkers demonstrating where they connect and where they diverge, making the case that both have been misunderstood and misinterpreted. In throwing light on these seemingly disparate ancient figures in unexpected ways, Stalnaker redirects recent debate regarding practices of personal formation, and more clearly exposes the intellectual and political issues involved in the retrieval of "classic" ethical sources in diverse contemporary societies, illuminating a path toward a contemporary understanding of difference.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt78n

CHAPTER TWO Contexts for Interpretation from: Overcoming Our Evil
Abstract: I argued in chapter 1 that if one’s goal is to engage culturally distant thinkers precisely as thinkers, as theorists who have developed religious conceptions worthy of careful study, then the best comparative strategy is to interpret them with sensitivity, alert to the various contexts and traditions in which they moved and worked. This is not particularly controversial, but neither is it obvious what this implies. Proper contextualization of interpretations does not require a lengthy account of “the context” that would duplicate or mimic specialist histories; it is rather a matter of perceptive interpretation of particular points in each thinker,

CHAPTER FOUR Broken Images of the Divine from: Overcoming Our Evil
Abstract: Rather than providing a supposedly static summary, much of the best contemporary work on Augustine carefully traces the development of his thought, often correlating it to events in his life.¹ One great virtue of this approach is that it maps the changes in his views over time, illuminating every contour and ridge of his evolving conceptions, and thereby aids a more precise grappling with his ideas. Another virtue is suitability to Augustine’s thought itself, which “proceeds by way of ceaseless inquiry”² and is preserved in a vast collection of writings, almost all of which were provoked by particular circumstantial needs

CHAPTER FIVE Comparing Human “Natures” from: Overcoming Our Evil
Abstract: Bridge concepts aim to provoke accounts of widely separated figures in terms of a common set of topics that highlight particular points of similarity and difference. By creating more precise points of contact, the comparativist can provide the basis for an imaginary dialogue between the two positions thus articulated and thereby pursue more substantive investigations of the general topic the bridge concept specifies. Thus a bridge concept like “human nature” can serve to generate what might be called a problématique for inquiry. The process works as follows: Comparison provokes conceptual analysis of what at first seemed to be a straightforward

CHAPTER I Wittgenstein: from: Wittgenstein Reads Freud: The Myth of the Unconscious
Abstract: It would be futile to search the work of Wittgenstein for a thorough discussion or systematic critique of psychoanalysis. Freud’s theory is not the focus of any carefully argued statement, and the materials available to us on this subject are rather contained in conversations reported by Rush Rhees and in what are often brief, allusive remarks scattered throughout Wittgenstein’s published writings and manuscripts. Psychoanalysis most often serves as an illustration in the context of much broader philosophical discussions concerning questions such as the distinction between reasons and causes, “aesthetic” explanation and causal explanation, the nature of symbolism in general, of

CHAPTER V The Mechanics of the Mind from: Wittgenstein Reads Freud: The Myth of the Unconscious
Abstract: Freud’s colossal prejudices, in Wittgenstein’s view, all stem from three underlying assumptions of Freudian theory which he implicitly or explicitly contests. The first of these is psychic determinism, which Freud himself regularly presented as a constitutive preconception that could not be questioned. As Sulloway writes: “Freud’s entire life’s work in science was characterized by an abiding faith in the notion that all vital phenomena, including psychical ones, are rigidly and lawfully determined by the principle of cause and effect” ( Freud, Biologist of the Mind, p. 94). In thePsychopathology of Everyday Life, Freud explains what distinguishes his basic convictions from

Book Title: The Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics-Fourth Edition
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Slessarev Alexandra
Abstract: Through three editions over more than four decades, The Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poeticshas built an unrivaled reputation as the most comprehensive and authoritative reference for students, scholars, and poets on all aspects of its subject: history, movements, genres, prosody, rhetorical devices, critical terms, and more. Now this landmark work has been thoroughly revised and updated for the twenty-first century. Compiled by an entirely new team of editors, the fourth edition--the first new edition in almost twenty years--reflects recent changes in literary and cultural studies, providing up-to-date coverage and giving greater attention to the international aspects of poetry, all while preserving the best of the previous volumes
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt8jz

CHAPTER 11 Engaging the Gallican Church and the Vatican from: The Furies
Abstract: In 1789 france was 85 percent rural. Twenty-two million out of 28 million French men and women lived in the countryside, the overwhelming majority engaged in agriculture and agriculture-related work. At least one-third of them were poor or destitute. Their households and communities were trapped in inertia and were untouched by the lumiéres. Illiteracy was very much the norm. Peasant traditions and attitudes were inseparable from religious beliefs and practices in which magic at once reinforced and alleviated the fear of famine and plague, as well as of the Last Judgment. The houses and representatives of God were as omnipresent

Book Title: Being in the World-Dialogue and Cosmopolis
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Dallmayr Fred
Abstract: In Being in the World, noted political theorist Fred Dallmayr explores the globe's transition from the traditional Westphalian system of states to today's interlocking cosmopolitan network. Drawing upon sacred scriptures as well as the work of ancient philosophers such as Plato and Aristotle and more recent scholars such as Martin Heidegger, Hans-Georg Gadamer, and Raimon Panikkar, this book delves into what Dallmayr calls "being in the world," seen as an aspect of ethical-political engagement. Rather than lamenting current problems, he suggests addressing them through civic education and cosmopolitan citizenship. Dallmayr advocates a politics of the common good, which requires the cultivation of public ethics, open dialogue, and civic responsibility.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tv6pd

Introduction from: Being in the World
Abstract: By now it is a commonplace—a widely accepted commonplace—to say that we live in an age of globalization, that the world is steadily shrinking, and that people around the globe are increasingly pushed together. The saying has a ring of correctness or plausibility. What is correct is that financial markets are relentlessly expanding, that complex information networks are encircling the world, and that military weaponry is stretching around the globe (and capable of annihilating it many times over). What is not often noted is that the correctness of the saying conceals as much as it reveals. Underneath the

5. Ethics and International Politics: from: Being in the World
Abstract: It is a privilege and a pleasure to respond to my colleagues and friends.¹ It is a privilege because my colleagues are distinguished practitioners in their respective disciplines. It is a pleasure because reading their papers has broadened my horizons and responding to them enhances my critical self-understanding. My colleagues pose to me different questions and approach my work from different angles. However, if I am not mistaken, I perceive in their papers a common theme or thematic fabric that links them together: the theme of “ethics and international politics” (broadly construed). What leads me to this assumption or perception

6. Befriending the Stranger: from: Being in the World
Abstract: Cosmopolitanism has a difficult relation with borders or boundaries. It cannot completely discard borders or bounded limits—without turning into an extraterrestrial enterprise or a mere flight of fancy. But it can also not blithely accept them, preferring instead to treat them as moving horizons. This dilemma is endemic to human living and thinking. Clearly, our thinking—that is, our attempt to understand the world—inevitably proceeds from certain bounded premises, certain taken-for-granted assumptions or frames of significance—whose precise contours, however, remain amorphous and open-ended. Even if, hypothetically, we should be able to fix or determine the initial framework,

Book Title: Covering for the Bosses-Labor and the Southern Press
Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): ARONOWITZ STANLEY
Abstract: Atkins details the fall of the once-dominant textile industry and the region's emergence as the "Sunbelt South." He explores the advent of "Detroit South" with the arrival of foreign automakers from Japan, Germany, and South Korea. And finally he relates the effects of the influx of millions of workers from Mexico and elsewhere. Covering for the Bossesshows how, with few exceptions, the press has been a key partner in the powerful alliance of business and political interests that keep the South the nation's least-unionized region.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tv941

FOREWORD from: Covering for the Bosses
Author(s) Aronowitz Stanley
Abstract: The main reason for the division came about because the three leading metal workers’ unions (Auto, Steel, Machinists),

Chapter 4 LABOR, CIVIL RIGHTS, AND MEMPHIS from: Covering for the Bosses
Abstract: The seeds of the civil rights movement that rocked the South in the 1950s and 1960s were planted long before by workers and labor organizers in the Southern textile mills and coal mines, by labor leaders like John L. Lewis and Walter Reuther of the CIO, and, of course, A. Phillip Randolph of the Brotherhood of Sleeping Car Porters. Also planting those seeds were the activists who participated in Highlander, the Southern Tenant Farmers’ Union, the Southern Conference for Human Welfare, and the CIO’s Operation Dixie.

Chapter 5 LABOR, RACE, AND THE MISSISSIPPI PRESS from: Covering for the Bosses
Abstract: Claude Ramsay, the crusty, barrel-chested president of the Mississippi AFL-CIO from 1959 to 1986, delivered a stem-winder of a speech at the University of Mississippi in 1966—a time when the fires of the civil rights struggle were still burning—that included a snapshot history of the labor movement, a discussion of the twin legacies of Samuel Gompers and Eugene Debs, and a withering analysis of how the state’s political and business leaders had failed working Mississippians. His best shots, however, came in a blistering indictment of the Mississippi press.

Chapter 7 SOUTHERN EXPOSURE from: Covering for the Bosses
Abstract: The first thing I thought about when I drove up to the modest two-story, red brick building on Chapel Hill Road in Durham, North Carolina, was Egyptian president Hosni Mubarak’s comment when he visited the equally unimposing headquarters of the Al Jazeera network in Doha, Qatar. “All this noise from this matchbox?”¹ It’s an easy-to-miss building just southwest of the renovated and gentrified tobacco warehouses of downtown Durham and due south of the gothic magnificence of the Duke University campus. However, from its cluttered second-floor offices comes a rare voice for the voiceless in the U.S. South, the progressive, independent

Chapter 9 WAL-MART CONQUERS THE WORLD from: Covering for the Bosses
Abstract: “Of course, the manager came out and tried to kick us off,” the fifty-year-old former elf recalled in a March 2007 interview. A Memphis native and twenty-seven-year veteran labor organizer, she now works with UFCW’s highly visible and effective WakeUpWalMart.com campaign. Her

Chapter 11 DETROIT SOUTH from: Covering for the Bosses
Abstract: “One of the first things they showed us when we came in was an antiunion video, people throwing rocks,” the twenty-four-year-old tool-and-die worker at the company’s giant Canton, Mississippi, plant said at the January 2007 gathering. After three and a half years at Nissan, he

Chapter 12 IMMIGRANTS FROM A DEEPER SOUTH from: Covering for the Bosses
Abstract: When Mexican artist Diego Rivera traveled to the great metropolis of New York City during the Great Depression, he was both “amazed and appalled” at the shantytowns, breadlines, starvation, and suicides that he found to be endemic to a city that was for non-natives like him the very symbol of the United States. As New York journalist Pete Hamill wrote in his book on Rivera in 1999, the heavy-set, cigar-chomping, “‘big-jowled paisano’” and world-famous muralist proceeded to paint his conflicting views in one of his most compelling works, Frozen Assets. The painting is a haunting depiction of the American metropolis

Postscript from: Covering for the Bosses
Abstract: It seems that every other building or house in Sanford, North Carolina, is a landmark in our personal history—the boarded-up elementary school across from the textile mill where my father worked, the Pentecostal Holiness church where my grandfather once preached, the dairy bar where we teenagers hung out every Friday

Book Title: Faulkner-Masks and Metaphors
Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): Hönnighausen Lothar
Abstract: Honnighausen examines Faulkner's interviews and photographs for the fictions they perpetuate. Such Faulknerian role-playing he interprets as a mode of organizing experience and relates it to the crafting of the artist's various personae in his works. Mining metaphor as well as modern theories on social role-playing, Honnighausen examines unexplored aspects of image creation and image reception in such major Faulkner novels as The Sound and the Fury,Light in August,A Fable, andAbsalom, Absalom!
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tvc5d

Book Title: Faulkner and His Contemporaries- Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): URGO JOSEPH R.
Abstract: Several essays examine the environment in which Faulkner worked. Deborah Clarke concentrates on the rise of the automobile industry. W. Kenneth Holditch shows how the city of New Orleans acted as a major force in Faulkner's fiction, and Grace Elizabeth Hale examines how the civil rights era of Faulkner's later career compelled him to deal with his ideas about race and rebellion in new ways.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tvgm1

William Faulkner and Other Famous Creoles from: Faulkner and His Contemporaries
Author(s) Holditch W. Kenneth
Abstract: Please pardon the repetition if you who have heard this anecdote before, but I cannot indeed forbear. When in 1958 I was at the point of concluding my graduate course work in the English department at Ole Miss and began to consider a dissertation subject, my thoughts turned quite naturally to William Faulkner. He had been, after all, very much a presence in my life: I was born six miles from his birthplace, had always known members of his family, and had read everything he had published up to that point. That reading had been done first on my own,

“Getting Good at Doing Nothing”: from: Faulkner and His Contemporaries
Author(s) Kartiganer Donald M.
Abstract: They never met, which is probably just as well, because as writers and as personalities they seemed to be completely opposite in almost every respect. As literary stylists they created the two most distinctive and influential forms of prose fiction in America in the first half of the twentieth century. Hemingway perfected an art of exclusion. The right words were the rarest currency, their value secured by their survival of the writer’s ruthless stripping away of all the words that would not work. His essential tool was the blue pencil that signaled “cut”; his essential gift what he referred to

The Faulkner–Hemingway Rivalry from: Faulkner and His Contemporaries
Author(s) Monteiro George
Abstract: Carlos Baker, Hemingway’s first biographer and editor of his letters, reports that Wyndham Lewis’s essay on Hemingway in Men without Art(1934) so infuriated Hemingway that “he broke a vase of flowers in Sylvia Beach’s bookshop.”² Yet Lewis’s “Dumb Ox” essay starts out promisingly enough in Hemingway’s favor, one might think, with a comparison of Hemingway and Faulkner as artists: “Ernest Hemingway is a very considerable artist in prose-fiction. Besides this, or with this, his work possesses a penetrating quality, like an animal speaking. Compared often with Hemingway, Faulkner is an excellent, big-strong, novelist: but a conscious artist he cannot

“Blacks and Other Very Dark Colors”: from: Faulkner and His Contemporaries
Author(s) Pitavy-Souques Danièle
Abstract: The late 1940s and early 1950s were times of national hysteria and war on social and political heretics, times which deeply affected the South with the rise of the civil rights movement and serious commitment for or against a reconsideration of racial issues, and which affected the nation at large with the fear of communism inside the country. Such times could not leave American writers indifferent. Each, following his or her own aesthetic sensibilities, felt the urge to produce works that translated the social and political turmoil as well as reflected a deeper vision of literature and its role.

Book Title: Charles Johnson-The Novelist as Philosopher
Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): Whalen-Bridge John
Abstract: These essays engage Johnson's work from a variety of critical perspectives, revealing the philosophical, cultural, and political implications of his writings. The authors seek especially to understand "philosophical black fiction" and to provide the multifocal, "whole sight" analysis Johnson's work demands.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tvkpb

BONDAGE AND DISCIPLINE from: Charles Johnson
Author(s) BEAVERS HERMAN
Abstract: Reading The Sorcerer’s Apprenticeprompted me to revisit Paolo Friere’sPedagogy of the Oppressed, in part because the question of failed pedagogy frames the opening and closing stories in the collection. But I also decided a turn to Friere was appropriate because reading Johnson’s stories and discovering in them the investment in Eastern philosophical tenets characteristic of his other works of fiction, I determined that if pedagogy was at issue in these stories, it is best described as apedagogy of discomfort.In light of the ways that we find aspiration and desire working in each of these stories, I’m

“GO THERE” from: Charles Johnson
Author(s) GLEASON WILLIAM
Abstract: Despite the extensive attention paid by scholars to the philosophical underpinnings of the work of Charles Johnson—despite even the grandiose yet entirely fair claim by Johnson himself that “there is more engagement with philosophy—Western and Eastern—in my work than you will find anywhere in the history of black American literature” (Nash, “A Conversation,” 222)—certain philosophical traditions crucial to Johnson’s writing remain underexplored. Foremost among these is American pragmatism, a tradition whose concerns may at first seem far removed from the emphatically spiritual and idealistic vision foregrounded in Johnson’s creative work. And yet when we turn to

PRAGMATIC ETHICS IN CHARLES JOHNSON’S FICTION from: Charles Johnson
Author(s) STORHOFF GARY
Abstract: Charles Johnson is an extraordinarily innovative American writer whose work revolves around profound ethical issues. Because his ethics emerge from the philosophy he studied in graduate school, his ethical outlook is complex and difficult to discern—primarily because his is a dissenting voice from current philosophical schools of ethics.¹ Contemporary Western philosophy usually treats ethics as primarily the moral evaluation of specific actions.² However, such an approach is insufficient for a novelist with Johnson’s convictions. Johnson’s philosophical inclination is the evaluation of the whole person, in evaluating character traits that make an individual good and that lead to a worthwhile

INVISIBLE THREADS from: Charles Johnson
Author(s) WHALEN-BRIDGE JOHN
Abstract: In this essay I would like to make the case for a kind of feminism in Johnson’s work, a feminism that makes visible foundational feminine virtues within African American culture in part by revealing the effects of strong women and in part by rendering the misogynism against which this feminism defines itself. My argument runs against the grain of most though not all work on Johnson. While critics focusing on racial hybridity in Johnson’s work have celebrated his integrationalist aesthetic (Little and Storhoff), those who have focused on gender have more often found Johnson’s fiction unsatisfactory.¹ Some even draw on

THE APPLICATION OF AN IDEAL from: Charles Johnson
Author(s) NASH WILLIAM R.
Abstract: In “Shoulder to the Wheel” (2003), an interview with my fellow Johnson scholar (and good friend) John Whalen-Bridge, Charles Johnson explains what led him to publish Turning the Wheel: Essays on Buddhism and Writing(2003). The author notes, “in this phase of my life, what I call Act Three, I finally had to declare myself someone devoted to the dharma” (“Shoulder” 301). The work certainly does that; indeed, this collection of sixteen essays (seven on Buddhism, nine on writing) marks the fullest overt written articulation of elements that Johnson has “tuck[ed] into” his fiction from the publication ofFaith and

ONE Authorial Intention and the from: Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Boyle John F.
Abstract: Beryl Smalley in her landmark book, The Study of the Bible in the Middle Ages, sought to show, among other things, that not all of those who commented on the Bible in the Middle Ages were, in her words, theologians. Some were also scholars.¹ The mark of the scholar was an interest in the literal sense apart from and in contrast to the Middle Ages’ seeming fixation on the spiritual or mystical senses of Scripture. In particular, Smalley was interested in those scholars whose work was a kind of anticipation of modern biblical scholarship, especially of an historical critical flavor.

THREE Biblical Exegesis and the Speculative Doctrine of the Trinity in St. Thomas Aquinas’s from: Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Emery Gilles
Abstract: The theological exposition of the Gospel of St. John is certainly to be considered the most fully complete and most profound commentary that St. Thomas Aquinas has left us.¹ According to M.-D. Philippe, the Commentary on St. John is “the theological work par excellence of St. Thomas”: this commentary enables us to enter into the theological intelligence of St. Thomas, even better than does the Summa theologiae or the Summa contra gentiles.² This special value of the Commentary on the Gospel of St. John is to be found notably in the importance of the speculative developments of the biblical exposition,

TEN The Concept of “Life” in the from: Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Leget Carlo
Abstract: The concept of “life” is without any doubt a key word in both Aquinas’s theology and the Gospel of St. John. This can easily be shown as regards both statistics and content.¹ In this essay I will address two questions. The first question is how Thomas deals with this concept in his Commentary on St. John. In answering this question I will refer to other works of Aquinas where he deals with the concept of “life” and show how these interrelate. The second question concerns the way Aquinas’s exegesis relates to doing theology at the threshold of the third millennium.

FOURTEEN The Extent of Jesus’ Human Knowledge according to the Fourth Gospel from: Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Ashley Benedict M.
Abstract: The First and Second Parts of the Summa theologiae of St. Thomas Aquinas prepare for his exploration of the mystery of the Person and work of Jesus Christ our Savior. His treatment of the Church, the sacraments, and the goal of history are all considered as the completion of his own work during his earthly and risen life. In his exploration in the Third Part of his Summa theologiae of the Person and work of Jesus, St. Thomas Aquinas drew heavily on his previous study of the fourth Gospel.¹ In the Prologue of his commentary on this Gospel (n. 1)

Book Title: The Quest for God and the Good Life- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): Miller Mark T.
Abstract: Throughout this introductory text, progress, decline, and redemption constitute a systematic framework for examining the central terms of Catholic theology, as well as key notions in Lonergan's theology. The book provides a firm foundation for students of Lonergan as well as anyone interested in understanding Catholic theology and applying it to ministry, education, and other fields.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32b414

INTRODUCTION from: The Quest for God and the Good Life
Abstract: This book, like Lonergan’s own works, is written for those who care about such questions. It is written for those who have observed our world and celebrate what is good in it while lamenting what is not so good. It is written for those who love the world enough to be willing to work for its welfare, those willing to build themselves up in order to promote progress

1 The Natural World from: The Quest for God and the Good Life
Abstract: Deeply troubled by the Great Depression, two world wars, and modernity’s challenges to religion, Bernard Lonergan attempted to do for our age what Thomas Aquinas did for his—that is, to integrate the best of secular and sacred teaching in order to further the ongoing Catholic tradition of using both faith and reason to promote the common good and to participate in God’s work of redemption. Echoing centuries of the Catholic tradition’s esteem for secular and sacred, or natural and supernatural, forms of learning, Lonergan affirms that “God becomes known to us in two ways: as the ground and end

2 Insight and the Self-Correcting Process of Learning from: The Quest for God and the Good Life
Abstract: The previous chapter considered Lonergan’s understanding of the cosmos as a self-transcending, hierarchical order governed by emergent probability. Human beings are part of this cosmos. We have emerged from the creative world process of emergent probability. As a relatively late, higher-level emergence, humanity is a complex entity subject to both classical and statistical laws on multiple levels of being: physical, chemical, biological, and more uniquely human levels. With the advent of humanity two significant new things arrive in creation: (1) a creature’s ability to discover and work with classical and statistical laws, and thus to guide and accelerate emergent probability,

10 A Redemptive Community from: The Quest for God and the Good Life
Abstract: Typically, in Insight Lonergan credits progress to human intelligence as driven by the “detached and disinterested desire to know.” Surprisingly, however, he sometimes in this same work credits liberty. Rather than view this as an irreconcilable inconsistency, I would argue that liberty and intelligence are complementary. They work hand in hand. And both are necessary for progress.¹ Good ideas can improve the situation, but there must be liberty in the community if the ideas are to be reflected on, communicated, tested, implemented, allowed to change the social situation, and eventually to be reevaluated and corrected by new ideas.

Tradition from: Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) SOSKICE JANET
Abstract: It may be helpful, before specifically discussing “tradition” in Christian thought, to consider how much in human life is “passed on” by others. Here are two musical examples. The first is from my own workplace—the choristers of the Jesus College chapel. I want to draw attention not to the antiquity of the particular pieces of music they sing (for they sing works both ancient and modern) but to the practice of choral singing itself. The choir is composed

Newman on Revelation, Hermeneutics, and Conscience from: Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) FIELDS STEPHEN M.
Abstract: John henry newman (1801–90) stands undoubtedly as the most important Catholic thinker to emerge between the Council of Trent of the sixteenth century and the Second Vatican Council of 1963–65. If the first council posited Catholicism’s authoritative answer to the Protestant reformers, the second rightly hails Newman as its “Father.”¹ His influential essay on the development of Christian doctrine put forth a theory that made possible the council’s work of expanding Catholicism’s traditional teachings with fresh insights, precisely in order to perfect their meaning. Because the council provided a major impetus for the last half-century’s movements in ecumenism

Muḥammad ʿAbduh: from: Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) CORNELL VINCENT J.
Abstract: Chronologically the earliest of the Muslim reformers to be discussed in this volume, Muḥammad ʿAbduh is the most ambiguous in terms of understanding the full extent of his legacy in the century since his death. With the possible exception of his teacher and political mentor Jamāl al-Dīn al-Afghānī (1838–97), he is arguably the most overinterpreted figure in modern Islamic thought. Indeed, it may be useful to think of ʿAbduh as the “Illustrated Man” of contemporary Sunnī Islam. Much as with the figure that is the frame device for Ray Bradbury’s classic work of science fiction,¹ the stories that are

Tariq Ramadan (1962– ) from: Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) Ramadan Tariq
Abstract: The work of categorization left by scholars through the ages is phenomenal. Specialists in the foundations of law and jurisprudence ( usul al-fiqh), who labored at this exercise of extrapolating and categorizing rules on the basis of a reading that was both careful to be faithful to the norm and profoundly rational, have bequeathed to us an unparalleled heritage. A careful reading of these works reveals that very precise modes of grasping the sources were set down very early. Consideration of the language was supported by a double process of distinguishing on the one hand between the unequivocal and the equivocal

Book Title: Troubling Natural Categories-Engaging the Medical Anthropology of Margaret Lock
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): KIELMANN KARINA
Abstract: Where do our conventional understandings of health, illness, and the body stem from? What makes them authoritative? How are the boundaries set around these areas of life unsettled in the changing historical and political contexts of science, technology, and health care delivery? These questions are at the heart of Troubling Natural Categories, a collection of essays honouring the tradition of Margaret Lock, one of the preeminent medical anthropologists of our time. Throughout her career, Lock has investigated how medicine sets boundaries around what is deemed "normal" and "natural," and how, in turn, these ideas shape our technical and moral understandings of life, sickness, and death. In this book, nine established medical anthropologists - all former students of Lock - critically engage with her work, offering ethnographic and historical analyses that problematize taken-for-granted constructs in health and medicine in a range of global settings. The essays elaborate cutting-edge themes within medical anthropology, including the often disturbing, inherently political nature of biomedicine and biotechnology, the medicalization of mental health processes, and the formation of uniquely "local biologies" through the convergence of bodily experience, scientific discourse, and new technologies of care. Troubling Natural Categories not only affirms Margaret Lock's place at the forefront of scholarship but, with these essays, carves out new intellectual directions in the medical social sciences. Contributors include Sean Brotherton, Vinh-Kim Nguyen, Junko Kitanaka, Stephanie Lloyd, Dominique Behague, and Annette Leibing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32b73f

1 A Genealogy of Bodily Practices in Post-Soviet Cuba from: Troubling Natural Categories
Author(s) BROTHERTON P. SEAN
Abstract: Margaret Lock’s path-breaking scholarship on the anthropology of the body, spanning her earlier work on demystifying the assumptions of the natural body to more recent work on the commodification of bodily life and the materiality of the body, has set a foundational precedent in medical anthropology for critically reworking the relationship between dominant ideologies and the lived experience of bodies (Lock 1993a; 1993b; 1997; 2002; Lock and Schepher-Hughes 1987). Buttressed by rich ethnographic research in both Japan and North America, and with an acute attention to social theory, Lock’s comparative methodology has been pivotal in challenging the takenfor-granted notion of

2 Therapeutic Modernism: from: Troubling Natural Categories
Author(s) NGUYEN VINH-KIM
Abstract: I trained under Margaret Lock in the years after she published her seminal work Encounters with Aging(1993). After three years of practising full-time as an emergency and HIV physician, the grind of medical practice had left me longing for an approach that went beyond the clinical or epidemiological sciences. Neither helped me make sense of what I saw in the clinic. As I began working in West Africa as a community organizer with HIV groups, most of the anthropological work I encountered viewed the epidemic through the lens of either culture or political economy. The realities I encountered were

Book Title: Genuine Multiculturalism-The Tragedy and Comedy of Diversity
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): FOSTER CECIL
Abstract: While many modern societies are noted for their diversity, the resulting challenge is to determine how citizens from different backgrounds and cultures can see themselves and each other as equals, and be treated equally. In Genuine Multiculturalism, Cecil Foster shows that a society's failure to bridge these differences is the tragedy of modern living and that pretending it is possible to mechanically develop fraternity and solidarity among diverse groups is akin to seeking out comedy. Arguing that genuine multiculturalism is the search for social justice by individuals who have been trapped by ascribed identities or newcomers who have been shut out of perceived ethnic homelands, Foster details how this process, in essence, is the story of the Americas. Reconceptionalizing the terms of multiculturalism, he offers an intervention into Canada's claim that its definition and practice are based on recognizing equality of citizenship. Identifying genuine multiculturalism as an ongoing work in progress, rather than a tightly defined policy position, Foster challenges readers to imagine a greater and more harmonious ideal. A necessary theoretical reconsideration of diversity within society, Genuine Multiculturalism refocuses the debate about ideals and practices in modern societies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32b7ds

9 Citizenship with Difference: from: Genuine Multiculturalism
Abstract: We were “working out the politics of recognition” vis-à-vis immigrants in Canada. I wanted to reveal the difficulties some

2 Radical Constructivism, Education, and Truth as Life-Giving Disclosure from: Truth Matters
Author(s) JOLDERSMA CLARENCE W.
Abstract: Constructivism in education, an approach that depicts learners as actively constructing their own knowledge, continues to influence content areas such as math and science education as well foundation areas such as educational psychology.² It is a contested view, with advocates suggesting that it is a better framework for effective education and critics countering that it is relativistic with respect to truth.

7 A Comparative Ethics Approach to the Concept of Bearing Witness: from: Truth Matters
Author(s) RICHARDS AMY D.
Abstract: Bearing witness is an ethical act. Whether a person bears truthful witness or false witness, the act involves moral agency. Choosing to testify to an experience or event that others, or the established narrative of a culture, may contest may alter the rest of a person’s life. Witnessing is not without cost to both the agent bearing witness and also possibly to the audiences, the secondary witnesses hearing or observing the testimony. Therefore, deciding to bear or not bear witness has moral and cultural significance. Consider the example of two British journalists working in Soviet Russia and the moral and

CHAPTER 2 THE AESTHETICS OF MEMORY: from: Configuring Community
Abstract: Issues concerning the concept of community in the context of modernity which were presented in Chapter 1, will be explored in a more specific way in this chapter. My aim here is to problematize community identity by focusing upon key aspects of Julio Llamazares’s prose narratives, attending particularly to La lluvia amarilla (1988), Luna de lobos (1985), and El río del olvido (1990). Where relevant, I shall also draw upon some of Llamazares’s other works, namely Escenas de cine mudo (1994) and his earlier poetry, La lentitud de los bueyes (1979) and Memoria de la nieve (1982). My particular focus

CHAPTER 3 TEMPORAL MOSAICS: from: Configuring Community
Abstract: This chapter will examine two works by the Basque writer Bernardo Atxaga, Obabakoak (1988) and El hombre solo (1995), in order to assess their treatment of contemporary Spanish experiences of history and temporality and the subsequent effects on community identity. The previous chapter probed these issues in Llamazares’s work in the context of modernity. My aim here is to intensify the problematization of community in modernity presented in the first chapter through an analysis of Atxaga’s focus on identity in the more recent contexts of post-Francoist Spain. Underlying the key issues which arise in this chapter, therefore, is the postmodern

CHAPTER 5 THE CÓRDOBA PRISON PROJECT: from: Configuring Community
Abstract: This chapter problematizes the practice of flamenco as rehabilitation amongst gitano convicts in Córdoba prison.¹ The idea for this project, which seeks out a disciplinary overlap between cultural studies and ethnography, arose from an article in the Independent on Sunday (6 October 1996) which reported that flamenco was being practised in the penitentiary of Córdoba as a form of rehabilitation for long-term prisoners; the fieldwork during which much of the material for this chapter was collected took place in June 1998. In its course, this project is an attempt to question concepts of ethnicity and community identity within the enclosed

Book Title: Art and Its Uses in Thomas Mann's 'Felix Krull'- Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Author(s): Schonfield Ernest
Abstract: The turn of the twentieth century was a time of identity crisis for the upper and middle classes, one in which increased social mobility caused the blurring of traditional boundaries and created a need for reference works such as the British Who's Who (1897). At the same time, the rise of a new leisure industry and an increase in international travel led to a boom period for confidence men, who frequently operated in hotels and holiday resorts. Thomas Mann's "Felix Krull", written between 1910-13 and continued (though never completed) in 1951-54, uses contemporary accounts of these figures as a starting-point from which to explore the aesthetics of society. The early Krull marks an important stage in Mann's development in a number of respects.In writing it, Mann acquired a more flexible conception of identity and a new understanding of the relation between artist and public. Krull also signals a deeper engagement with Goethe and a shift in Mann's work towards a more open treatment of sexuality. The novel presents art as being central to the development of the individual and to social interaction. While Krull is nominally a confidence man, he is more of a performance artist, a purveyor of beauty who relies upon the complicity of his audience. The later Krull takes up where Mann left off and continues the justification of art as an essential human activity. This study draws upon unpublished material in order to provide a comprehensive reading of "Felix Krull". It examines the novel within the context of Mann's work as a whole, and, in doing so, it seeks to demonstrate the remarkable continuity of Mann's creative achievement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32b997

CHAPTER 1 Art and the Notation of Identity from: Art and Its Uses in Thomas Mann's 'Felix Krull'
Abstract: In this chapter I will argue that the early work on Felix Krull represents a creative watershed in Mann’s career. It marks the moment when Mann realized that he could imaginatively expand his identity to the extent that he could identify with persons and characters far removed from his own experience and disposition. I will seek to show that Felix Krull offers a creatively adaptable model of identity, and that it presents art and aesthetics as being central to the development of the individual subject.

CHAPTER 2 Art and the Notation of Community from: Art and Its Uses in Thomas Mann's 'Felix Krull'
Abstract: Much has been written about the structural dichotomy of Bürger and Künstler in the early works of Thomas Mann. In this early phase, the Künstler, as the representative of Geist, finds himself isolated from, and opposed to, the coarse realities of bourgeois life (Leben); and the possibility of conciliation between these two spheres appears remote. By the time Mann came to write the autobiographical Tonio Kröger (1903), however, he was beginning to realize that this opposition was too simplistic, and that a person could contain both types within himself. Tonio Kröger is both artist and ‘verirrter Bürger’ (VIII, 305), torn

CONCLUSION from: Art and Its Uses in Thomas Mann's 'Felix Krull'
Abstract: The main argument of this book is that, in Felix Krull, art and aesthetics are shown to be central to the life of the mind and to the life of society. The Müller-Rosé episode offers a paradigm of how art works: not as an imposed illusion, but as a mutually agreed, deliberate pretence.¹ The crucial point of this episode is that art is not a deception, but an imaginative exchange which relies upon an intersubjective arrangement. Müller-Rosé requires the ‘stillschweigende[s] Einverständnis’ (294) of his audience in order to succeed. Mann, like Coleridge, is advocating a willing suspension of disbelief,² in

13 The Royal Road: from: Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Sprinker Michael
Abstract: What is a consequent marxist view of the history and philosophy of science? Reference to Marx’s and Engels’s (or even Lenin’s) work will not yield a satisfactory answer, although certain signposts are evident. For example, there is the famous observation on method in the introduction to the Grundrisse, which argues that, contrary to the procedures adopted in classical economy, where the starting point for investigation is apparently concrete phenomena from which abstract theoretical descriptions are then derived, “the method of rising from the abstract to the concrete is the only way in which thought appropriates the concrete, reproduces it as

16 What We Need to Know about Writing and Reading, or Peter Elbow and Antifoundationalism from: Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Gardiner Ellen
Abstract: While the work of Peter Elbow has been a powerful force in composition studies, several composition theorists have been critical of the conservative political implications of Elbow’s pedagogy. James Berlin and Lester Faigley, for example, argue that Elbow’s theory “hides the social nature of language” (Faigley 531) and teaches students how to “to assert a private vision, a vision which, despite its uniqueness, finally represents humankind’s best nature” (Berlin 487). Theorists such as Patricia Bizzell have viewed Elbow as foundationalist because he believes, she argues, that students are capable of “learning to examine [their] beliefs in light of those advanced

Book Title: The Uncertain Sciences- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Mazlish Bruce
Abstract: In this wide-ranging book one of the most esteemed cultural historians of our time turns his attention to major questions about human experience and the attempts to understand it "scientifically." Bruce Mazlish considers the achievements, failings, and possibilities of the human sciences-a domain that he broadly defines to include the social sciences, literature, psychology, and hermeneutic studies. In a rich and original synthesis built upon the work of earlier philosophers and historians, Mazlish constructs a new view of the nature and meaning of the human sciences.Starting with the remote human past and moving through the Age of Discovery to the present day, the author discusses what sort of knowledge the human sciences claim to offer. He looks closely at the positivistic aspirations of the human sciences, which are modeled after the natural sciences, and at their interpretive tendencies. In an analysis of scientific method and scientific community, he explores the roles they can or should assume in the human sciences. Mazlish's approach is genuinely interdisciplinary, and he draws on an array of topics, from civil society to globalization to the interactions of humans and machines, to inform his thought-provoking discussion of historical consciousness.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bf4m

6 The Uncertain Sciences from: The Uncertain Sciences
Abstract: Having considered the achievements of the human sciences, let us low inquire into their future possibilities. What combination of positivist aspiration and hermeneutic intent can lie ahead? How can we reconcile past and present work in the natural sciences with that in the human sciences, for the two, as we have seen, are indissolubly tied together, especially, for our purposes, with the cord of evolutionary theory?

Critical Bibliography from: The Uncertain Sciences
Abstract: The notes to this book should be treated as part of the bibliography; in a few cases, works mentioned there will be commented on again here. Almost all of the books listed contain their own

III Romantic Hermeneutics and Schleiermacher from: Introduction to Philosophical Hermeneutics
Abstract: If Romanticism means simply an unsatisfiable longing for completeness, nineteenth-century hermeneutic theory was certainly Romantic. It was distinguished in fact by an unprecedented reticence about finally bringing work to publication. Hardly any authors of the great hermeneutic classics, from Schlegel to Schleiermacher, Böckh, Droysen, and Dilthey, risked allowing their hermeneutic works even to go into print. It is only thanks to their students that their inquiries were transmitted to posterity.

A Questionnaire from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) POLLOCK JACKSON
Abstract: How did your study with Thomas Benton affect your work, which differs so radically from his?

Editorial Preface from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) ROSENBERG HAROLD
Abstract: This is a magazine of artists and writers who “practice” in their work their own experience without seeking to transcend it in academic, group or political formulas.

de Kooning Paints a Picture from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) HESS THOMAS B.
Abstract: In the first days of June, 1950, Willem de Kooning tacked a 7-foot-high canvas to his painting frame and began intensive work on Woman—a picture of a seated figure, and a theme which had preoccupied him for over two decades. He decided to concentrate on this single major effort until it was finished to his satisfaction.

Artistʹs Statement from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) BOURGEOIS LOUISE
Abstract: An artist’s words are always to be taken cautiously. The finished work is often a stranger to, and sometimes very much at odds with what the artist felt, or wished to express when he began. At best the artist does what he can rather than what he wants to do. After the battle is over and the damage faced up to, the result may be surprisingly dull—but sometimes it is surprisingly interesting. The mountain brought forth a mouse, but the bee will create a miracle of beauty and order. Asked to enlighten us on their creative process, both would

In the Galleries: Franz Kline from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) SAWIN MARTICA
Abstract: When Franz Kline draws his brush across the canvas the gesture is automatically associated with authority, so much so that a showing of his latest paintings is a portentous event: he is forced to measure up to the test of his own reputation instead of coming before us freshly and without reference to previous accomplishments. The exhibition of his work which closed the 1957–58 season at the Janis Gallery has both its rewarding and its disappointing aspects, but of greatest interest was the indication of continued exploration on the artist’s part, a confident reaching out to break new ground

Excerpt from ʺThe Liberating Quality of Avant-Garde Artʺ from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) SCHAPIRO MEYER
Abstract: In doing so I risk perhaps being unjust to important works or to aspects of art which are generally not

The Unwanted Title: Abstract Expressionism from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) PAVIA P. G.
Abstract: If we temporarily shelve the over-powering personalities in the avant-garde, we can reach down to underground ideas that are foundations of the American Abstract Art movement. Subtle but strong essences of its beginnings are buried in seven very special panels given at “the club” in a series entitled “Abstract Expressionism.” Some of the ideas and the element of chance that went into making this “handy” title can be traced, ironically and philosophically, through these seven panels. The American movement of abstract art is not the fireworks of one or two artist personalities but is a deeply-rooted idea clawing the only

Jackson Pollock from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) FRIED MICHAEL
Abstract: The almost complete failure of contemporary art criticism to come to grips with Pollock’s accomplishment is striking. This failure has been due to several factors. First and least important, the tendency of art writers such as Harold Rosenberg and Thomas Hess to regard Pollock as a kind of natural existentialist has served to obscure the simple truth that Pollock was, on the contrary, a painter whose work is always inhabited by a subtle, questing formal intelligence of the highest order, and whose concern in his art was not with any fashionable metaphysics of despair but with making the best paintings

Jungian Aspects of Jackson Pollockʹs Imagery from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) WOLFE JUDITH
Abstract: Pollock’s knowledge of Jung’s work seems to have begun in 1934 when, as a janitor at the City and Country School in New York City, he met Helen Marot, a teacher interested in Jungian psychology. Through her guidance, he would

Robert Motherwellʹs from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) HOBBS ROBERT C.
Abstract: For Robert Motherwell, the act of titling his art is an essential component of the creative process. He is convinced that viewers require specific intellectual and emotional perspectives when looking at his paintings so that their experiences of them will be directed and concrete. While some titles reinforce the type of painterly abstraction for which he is renowned, others, including his justly famous Elegies to the Spanish Republic, bear political and literary tags. He intends these ad hoc conjunctions to be mutually supportive and consequently is careful to consider his options when titling works.

Symbolic Pregnance in Mark Rothko and Clyfford Still from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) KUSPIT DONALD B.
Abstract: Yes, we can continue to ask, for it is the core epistemological question about abstract art, sharply and freshly raised by the works of Rothko and Still, which generate intense sensations and unpredictable meanings and the question of their interrelation. As Michel Conil-Lacoste wrote of the late Rothko, there are “deux lectures de Rothko: non pas seulement celle du technicien de la coleur, mais aussi celle de l’âme éprise de mysticisme.”¹ The technician of color supplies the raw material of sensation, and the mystic communicates ideal meanings. But how much can the two be said to interweave, when the sensory

James Joyce and the First Generation New York School from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) FIRESTONE EVAN R.
Abstract: The artists of the first generation New York School, most of whom are known collectively as Abstract Expressionists, were as a group generally well-read or well-informed and in touch with the literary currents of their time. Non-fiction works by Nietzsche, Freud, Jung, and James Frazer combined on their reading lists with the writings of Baudelaire, the French Symbolist poets (especially Rimbaud), Herman Melville, André Breton and Garcia Lorca, among others. Although scholars have examined the connections between this group of artists and literature rather carefully, except in the case of David Smith there has been relatively little mention of James

The Impact of Nietzsche and Northwest Coast Indian Art on Barnett Newmanʹs Idea of Redemption in the Abstract Sublime from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) RUSHING W. JACKSON
Abstract: In the late 1930s and early 1940s the “myth-makers” of the New York avant-garde, including Adolph Gottlieb, Jackson Pollock, Richard Pousette-Dart, and Mark Rothko, made paintings that referred to atavistic myth, primordial origins, and primitive rituals and symbols, especially those of Native American cultures.¹ Barnett Newman began to work in a similar fashion about 1944 and was influential as a theorist and indefatigable promoter of this new art. The “myth-makers” shared a tendency to depict ritual violence or inherently violent myths as well as an archaism exemplified by biomorphic forms and, often, coarse surfaces. This self-conscious primitivism of early Abstract

Modern Man Discourse and the New York School from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) LEJA MICHAEL
Abstract: Barnett Newman’s observation that he and the other New York School painters had “made cathedrals of ourselves” attests to their participation in the divinization of the self. Schematic though it may be, the outline of some of the varied strands within Modern Man discourse provides an illuminating cultural matrix for the interests and works of the New York School painters. Like the Modern Man authors, these artists saw their work as responsive to the war and other contemporary stresses. One might assume that this was true to some extent of all art made during the war, but this was not

Reconsidering the Stain: from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) SALTZMAN LISA
Abstract: Consider, for just one moment Jackson Pollock’s Cut-Out of 1948–1950. Don’t flip to look at a reproduction. Instead, and perhaps more appropriately, conjure it in your mind. For though Pollock’s Cut-Out is a painting, it is a work from which the center, the figure, has quite literally been excised, extinguished, a work with nothing more at its core than a ghostly trace, figuration as corpse. Emptied of its bodily fullness, its corporeality, its life, Cut-Out leaves us with nothing other than figuration as a hollow shell, a specter which can only haunt abstraction. Framed by the marginal remains of

ʺOf the Earth, the Damned, and of the Recreatedʺ: from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) ANFAM DAVID
Abstract: Despite its importance, Clyfford Stillʼs work poses greater problems for scholarship than that of any other artist associated with Abstract Expressionism. Secondary sources remain either scarce or obscure, while the complete corpus of his works has neither been shown nor published.¹ What is known stems largely from Still himself, who thereby sought to pre-empt the mosaic of art-historical interpretation. He replaced it with a canon whose main agents are the gifts totalling sixty-nine paintings, together with their catalogues, made to three North American institutions: the Albright-Knox Art Gallery in Buffalo, the San Francisco Museum of Modern Art and New York’s

Excerpt from ʺWater and Lipstick: De Kooning in Transitionʺ from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) SHIFF RICHARD
Abstract: The personal collection of the painter and critic Elaine de Kooning, Willem de Kooning’s wife, included Woman—Lipstick, a small graphite drawing Willem executed while at work on his Woman series of the early 1950s. It has a unique feature: the female figure has been surrounded by red lipstick imprints, with one imprint lying within it, tinting the torso. The image might be considered a collaborative creation, a joint representation of and by Willem and Elaine. When it was auctioned in 1989 Elaine de Kooning’s explanation accompanied it: “Bill asked me to put on lipstick & ‘kiss’ this drawing, carefully picking

Arcadian Nightmares: from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) MARTER JOAN M.
Abstract: David Smith and Dorothy Dehner and their years together at Bolton Landing rival the dramatic accounts of many artist-couples, given the volatile temperament of Smith, the physicality of his work, Dehner’s determination to survive, and her vital imagery.¹ Marriages far less tumultuous have been fodder for books on the Abstract Expressionists. The De Koonings have been discussed in several publications: their drinking habits and romantic liaisons exposed, while no attempt was made to explore the relevance of their personal lives to their artistic achievements.² In Andrea Gabor’s Einstein’s Wife, Lee Krasner’s physiognomy and Jackson Pollock’s alcoholism and psychological problems are

[PART 2: Introduction] from: Hannah Arendt
Abstract: FOR EIGHTEEN YEARS, HANNAH ARENDT WAS A “STATEless person.” But this period when she had no political rights—between her flight from Nazi Germany in 1933 and her receipt of American citizenship in 1951—was her most active politically. In Paris, where she worked for organizations that helped Jewish refugees emigrate to Palestine and supplied legal aid to anti-Fascists, she left behind the apolitical intellectuality of her university circles. She found a peer group that included artists and workers, Jews and non-Jews, activists and pariahs; German was their language, but they were cosmopolitan in vision. With this group, which included

CHAPTER 8 Cura Posterior: Eichmann in Jerusalem from: Hannah Arendt
Abstract: In the summer of 1960, Hannah Arendt and Heinrich Blücher vacationed at a rambling Swiss-style boardinghouse in the Catskills, several miles from their usual haunt, the Chestnut Lawn House in Palenville, New York. Arendt spent her days at her worktable and then joined Blücher and several of their émigré friends for swimming or chess, the evening meal, and expeditions to the local bar and pool parlor. Their discussions often returned to a startling series of reports in the New York Times:Adolf Eichmann had been kidnapped by Israeli agents in Argentina on 24 May; Israel and Argentina had quarreled over

[PART 4: Introduction] from: Hannah Arendt
Abstract: HANNAH ARENDT HAD TO LEARN TO LIVE WITH THE reputation Eichmann in Jerusalembrought her. Praise, condemnation, and calumny came through the mail and the media. She was a public figure in the 1960s, despite her wishes, and she was preoccupied with more teaching responsibilities than ever, at the University of Chicago’s Committee on Social Thought and, after 1967, at the Graduate Faculty of the New School for Social Research. From 1963 through 1971, when she was an essayist rather than a book writer, her published work was both more directly topical—because she wanted to write about the changing

Chapter 9 A Provisional Synthesis from: Passage to Modernity
Abstract: In this final chapter I shall consider three responses to the religious predicament that, at least temporarily, succeeded in reuniting modern culture with its transcendent component. We can hardly speak of a single movement since a variety of individuals and groups belonging to different camps worked, for often opposite reasons, toward the goal of restoring an all-inclusive religious vision to their world. The pursuit of that common vision gave birth to a new Christian humanism in the Reformation as well as in the Counter-Reformation. It included Catholics and Protestants, mystics and Baroque artists. In differing degrees and by different methods

7 Implications for Theoretical Psychoanalysis and Other Concluding Thoughts from: Interpreting Interpretation
Abstract: In this concluding chapter I make a foray beyond the realms hitherto occupied. Thus far I have confined myself to the viability of psychoanalysis as a practiceon the hermeneutic views. But these views also have consequences for how we are to think of psychoanalysis as atheoryof psychology. I want now to consider these implications, raise other issues that deserve further research, and summarize my findings in this work.

17 Self-Observation and Introspection from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Like so many of the elements considered in this work, self-observation is no new thing. Variously referred to as inward perception, looking inward, self-scrutiny, self-examination, self-inspection, introspection, reflection, the activity of the inner sense, and so forth, it has been an activity of humankind for a very long time.

2 Kenneth Burke’s Religious Rhetoric: from: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) BOOTH WAYNE C.
Abstract: Speculation about Kenneth Burke’s actual religion, in the face of his claims to be an unbeliever, has increased over recent decades.¹ Almost everyone who digs into his Rhetoric of Religionemerges with some sense that it is a work exhibiting genuine religious inquiry. But we all are plagued by Burke’s repeated and aggressive claims that his “religious” interest is only in logology, the study of language, and not in theology: in the word “God” and not in God himself. Thus as I pursue the claim of this essay — that Burke is best thought of as a theologian, or even a

9 Prophetic Rhetoric and Mystical Rhetoric from: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) TRACY DAVID
Abstract: Perhaps we have finally reached the end of Perhaps We have finally reached the end of the more familiar discussions of Freud and religion. Surely we do not need another round of theologians showing the “ultimate concern” in the works of Freud. Nor do we really need psychoanalysts announcing, once again, that religions are finally, indeed totally, illusion. Orthodox religionists have long since noted the many obvious religious analogues in Freud’s work: the founding of the orthodox church, the purges of the heretical “Gnostic” Jung and the “Anabaptist” Adler, the debates over the translations of the sacred texts and their

Book Title: Faces of History-Historical Inquiry from Herodotus to Herder
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): KELLEY DONALD R.
Abstract: In this book, one of the world's leading intellectual historians offers a critical survey of Western historical thought and writing from the pre-classical era to the late eighteenth century. Donald R. Kelley focuses on persistent themes and methodology, including questions of myth, national origins, chronology, language, literary forms, rhetoric, translation, historical method and criticism, theory and practice of interpretation, cultural studies, philosophy of history, and "historicism."Kelley begins by analyzing the dual tradition established by the foundational works of Greek historiography-Herodotus's broad cultural and antiquarian inquiry and the contrasting model of Thucydides' contemporary political and analytical narrative. He then examines the many variations on and departures from these themes produced in writings from Greek, Roman, Jewish, and Christian antiquity, in medieval chronicles, in national histories and revisions of history during the Renaissance and Reformation, and in the rise of erudite and enlightened history in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. Throughout, Kelley discusses how later historians viewed their predecessors, including both supporters and detractors of the authors in question.The book, which is a companion volume to Kelley's highly praised anthology Versions of History from Antiquity to the Enlightenment,will be a valuable resource for scholars and students interested in interpretations of the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bs9h

2 Greek Horizons from: Faces of History
Abstract: To introduce Herodotus, I made use of the Janus image that represents him gazing into an unspecified and unfocused distance and toward, perhaps, a posterity that looks back at him; to examine Herodotean history, however, I want to look at him from the standpoint of this posterity, or at least its most recent stage.¹ What Herodotus was in the pristine condition of his own experiences is a matter of antiquarian debate, but the reception and interpretation of his work, which was “published” and so separated from its creator more than twenty-four centuries ago, is something for readers, critics, and historians

6 Renaissance Retrospection from: Faces of History
Abstract: The Middle Ages, which was itself a terminological creation of Renaissance humanism, had a strong sense of the past, as the work of Dante, torn between pagan and Christian Rome (and wanting to enjoy the best of both worlds), abundantly illustrates. Scholars in the Middle Ages also had an appreciation of classical historiography, including the rhetorical forms and values on which this rested. Yet this historical sense was selective and subordinated to deep religious commitments and inhibitions which frustrated both a discriminating perspective on the ancient world and a clear perception of the differences that separated a remote “antiquity” from

Chapter 12 Is There a Sign of Freedom? from: Metaphysics in Ordinary Language
Abstract: There is more than one way in which to honor the work of a thinker. I shall try to recognize the contribution of Josef Simon, not by a summary of his achievements or even by a textual analysis of his work, but by addressing the theme which he has so subtly articulated in the two books Wahrheit als FreiheitandPhilosophie des Zeichens. In the course of a single essay, I cannot pretend to do more than to indicate how Simon’s thinking has assisted me in stating the difficulties I see in contemporary philosophy of language.

5 A SEMIOTIC APPROACH TO IRONY IN DRAMA AND FICTION from: Semiotics and Interpretation
Abstract: I would like to begin with a brief excerpt from a literary text, a short story by H. G. Wells called “The Country of the Blind.” In the story a sighted person wanders into a remote village where all the inhabitants have been blind for generations. Keeping the old adage in mind, the sighted man expects to become master among the blind, but events do not work out that way, and he becomes a prisoner, thought by his captors to be mad. At one point he challenges one of his captors:

7 DECODING PAPA: from: Semiotics and Interpretation
Abstract: The semiotic study of a literary text is not wholly unlike traditional interpretation or rhetorical analysis, nor is it meant to replace these other modes of response to literary works. But the semiotic critic situates the text somewhat differently, privileges different dimensions of the text, and uses a critical methodology adpated to the semiotic enterprise. Most interpretive methods privilege the “meaning” of the text. Hermeneutic critics seek authorial or intentional meaning; the New Critics seek the ambiguities of “textual” meaning; the “reader response” critics allow readers to make meaning. With respect to meaning the semiotic critic is situated differently. Such

Book Title: Types of Christian Theology- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Placher William C.
Abstract: Hans W. Frei (1922-88) was one of the most important American theologians of his generation. This book makes available the work in which he was engaged during the last decade of his life. Based on his 1983 Shaffer Lectures at Yale University and his 1987 Cadbury Lectures at the University of Birmingham, it presents Frei's reflections on issues and options in contemporaryrepresented theology, especially on the relation of theology to biblical interpretation and on the place of theology as an academic tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bt4j

Foreword from: Types of Christian Theology
Author(s) OUTKA GENE
Abstract: Hans W. Frei’s projected history of Christology in the modern period was cut short by his death on 12 September 1988. It was to be a major project for which he had been preparing through most of his academic career, and those who knew him and his scholarship looked forward to it with high anticipation. As his friends and colleagues, we knew that he had worked out a typology by which to organize the material, and we knew that he had sketched some of what he wanted to say in the Shaffer Lectures he delivered at Yale Divinity School in

6 William James and the Stream of Consciousness: from: On the Nature of Consciousness
Abstract: William James, in his chapter in The Principles of Psychology (1890) entitled “The Stream of Thought,” was probably the first western thinker and scientist to address ordinary lived consciousness as an empirical phenomenon in its own right. How curious that it is this recent. In so doing, he also addressed the relationship between consciousness and physical reality in ways which have not yet been fully assimilated. James’s work informed subsequent schools of thought that are generally held to be antithetical — in psychology, functionalism and behaviorism as well as the Gestalt tradition; in philosophy, Wittgenstein as well as Husserl, Heidegger,

2 What Are the Relevant Measures of Psychoanalytic Outcome? from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Other studies, such as those by Firestein (1978), Pfeffer (1959), and Wallerstein (1986), explore outcomes in terms of multiple aspects of psychological function, such as the ability to love, work, and play, and the development of self-analytic capacities, but the interrelations

3 Predicting the Course and Outcome of Analysis from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Every psychoanalyst of some clinical experience is aware of apparently unpromising analytic situations that turned out well and of analyses that began favorably but ended badly. Often, with benefit of hindsight, it is possible to identify sources of strength or weakness that were not recognized at the outset. Examples of such situations include barely mentioned but psychologically lifesaving relationships in the patient’s early childhood, or disturbances of thinking not manifest in the initial consultation. The analyst’s particular unresolved conflicts that lead to countertransference interferences may impede the ability to work with otherwise promising patients. Sometimes the reasons for unexpected outcomes

7 The Boston Psychoanalytic Institute Prediction Studies from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: A third major group of studies of the outcome of psychoanalysis began in the 1950s and continues to this day. The project asks what factors observable during the diagnostic evaluation predict satisfactory analytic progress. In 1960 Peter Knapp and his coworkers reported a project designed to investigate the suitability for analysis of 100 supervised analytic cases. The investigation was limited because the cases were studied only through the first year of treatment. Inspired by Knapp’s work, Sashin, Eldred, and Van Amerongen (1975) studied 130 low-fee control cases that were treated by 66 student-analysts between 1959 and 1966. The patients ranged

8 The New York Psychoanalytic Institute Studies from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: The investigations we have described so far are disappointing in that they do not provide an empirical basis for the decision of whether to recommend psychoanalysis for a particular patient. Also, they all require unsupported inferences beyond their empirical findings if they are to be applied to the work of experienced analysts with the type of patients whom this group of analysts is likely to work with. A group of researchers at the New York Psychoanalytic Institute is attempting to refine analysts’ predictive abilities regarding treatment outcome. They have focused particularly on the relation between clinic findings and outcome and

9 Studies of Child and Adolescent Analysis from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: The study of child and adolescent analysis has always been placed somewhat apart from work with adults. Freud’s (1909) pessimism that children could be analyzed in ways that approximated analytic work with adults was echoed in Anna Freud’s (1927) early recommendations about child psychoanalysis. Melaine Klein (1921, 1961) consistently recommended a technique in working with children that was essentially identical to her recommendation for working with adults, except that the free association of adults was replaced by play in children. For many years Klein’s ideas had little impact on the clinical work of any but her followers, but by the

11 Clinical Follow-Up Studies and Case Studies from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Readers of the earlier chapters in this section will be understandably disappointed that, despite the enormous efforts of investigators, systematic research seems to have addressed few questions that are germane to clinical psychoanalytic practice. Either the population studied is too different from the patients ordinarily taken into psychoanalysis, or the measures of outcome and process are too crude to answer the questions that most interest analysts. The analyst wishes for investigative methods that are closer to the methods customarily used in psychoanalysis, addressing issues that confront her in daily work. The follow-up methods first introduced by Arnold Pfeffer meet many

14 Collecting Data About Psychoanalysis from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Systematic psychoanalytic research requires a body of data to investigate. Unfortunately, data about analyses adequate for research purposes are difficult to obtain, and much of the data that are available have been so transformed in the process of reduction that investigators cannot be sure of their meaning. The very fact that the data were collected may so affect the analytic process that the data do not adequately represent ordinary psychoanalytic work. Analysts who are willing to collect detailed data about their work may be highly atypical in other ways. Data that appear in published reports are usually chosen because they

15 Information About Patients from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Traditionally medical treatments have been organized around the idea that certain qualities of the patient predict the efficacy of treatment. Diagnosis should determine intervention, at least after consideration of other patient attributes, such as overall health, age, and capacity to cooperate in treatment. As we have seen in earlier chapters, this model has not worked well for psychoanalysis. In this chapter we look more closely at ways of describing patients, some of which may prove fruitful in predicting response to treatment.

Introduction from: Paul and Scripture
Author(s) Stanley Christopher D.
Abstract: This book marks the final chapter in the work of the Paul and Scripture Seminar, which operated for six years under the aegis of the annual meeting of the Society of Biblical Literature (2005–2010). A collection of essays from the first three years of the seminar, together with a few other articles that were commissioned to round out the discussion, was published in 2008 under the title As It Is Written: Studying Paul’s Use of Scripture.¹ The present volume continues the conversation with essays from the last three years of the seminar and some additional articles that were written

By the Letter? from: Paul and Scripture
Author(s) Greenspoon Leonard
Abstract: My first entry into this topic—the degree to which Paul cited Scripture from memory (rather than from a written text) and the means by which we can detect this technique on his part—was serendipitous in precisely the way that much scholarship is. I was working on an article about the Jewish biblical scholar and Bible translator Harry M. Orlinsky when I ran across these comments (dated 29 November 1936) in a batch of correspondence between James Montgomery of the University of Pennsylvania and Orlinsky:

The Use of Scripture in Philippians from: Paul and Scripture
Author(s) Fowl Stephen
Abstract: At the same time, and perhaps because of Hays’s work, one is forced to ask questions

Writing “in the Image” of Scripture: from: Paul and Scripture
Author(s) Sumney Jerry L.
Abstract: Discussion of Paul’s use of Scripture has grown exponentially since the publication of Richard Hays’s Echoes of Scripture in the Letters of Paultwenty years ago. His work has stimulated important discussions of methods for identifying and interpreting allusions, as well as of analyses of Paul’s hermeneutic. Even though I will treat Colossians as a pseudonymous work, the recent work on Paul’s use of Israel’s Scriptures demands that one stake out some initial positions about identifying allusions and their use in the broader Greco-Roman culture.

Book Title: The Future of the Biblical Past-envisioning biblical studies on a global key
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Author(s): Segovia Fernando F.
Abstract: What does global biblical studies look like in the early decades of the twenty-first century, and what new directions may be discerned? Profound shifts have taken place over the last few decades as voices from the majority of the globe have begun and continue to reshape and relativize biblical studies. With contributors from Africa, Asia, the Pacific, Europe, Latin America, the Caribbean, and North America, this volume is a truly global work, offering surveys and assessments of the current situation and suggestions for the future of biblical criticism in all corners of the world. The contributors are Yong-Sung Ahn, George Aichele, Pablo R. Andiñach, Roland Boer, Fiona Black, Philip Chia, Nancy Cardoso Pereira, Jione Havea, Israel Kamudzandu, Milena Kirova, Tat-siong Benny Liew, Monica Melancthon, Judith McKinlay, Sarojini Nadar, Jorge Pixley, Jeremy Punt, Elisabeth Schüssler Fiorenza, Fernando F. Segovia, Hanna Stenström, Vincent Wimbush, and Gosnell Yorke.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32c046

4 Unleashing the Power Within: from: The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Melanchthon Monica Jyotsna
Abstract: India can legitimately be described as one of the earliest recipients of the Bible (Sugirtharajah 2001, 15–22), and yet Indian biblical scholarship has had little impact if any on biblical studies worldwide. I thus welcome this opportunity to participate in The Future of the Biblical Past, while aware of the problematic roles that are thrust upon the nonWestern individual when she and her work enter the orbit of certain kinds of academic concerns and discursive practices pursued supposedly and predominantly only in the West. However, biblical study and interpretation are not a project of the West alone. Third World

16 Reading the Bible in “Our Home and Native Land”: from: The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Black Fiona C.
Abstract: In Canada, it appears that biblical scholars do not often avail themselves of the opportunity to reflect on how their political, historical, and social contexts impact their work on the Bible.¹ This does not mean that Canadian biblical scholarship is not “engaged”; rather, I suspect that it has more to do with a perception that there is not much about biblical studies in this country that marks it as distinct—as any different, say, from American biblical studies in general.² In fact, the reluctance to think about what makes biblical studies in this country Canadiancould look a little like

18 What Has Been Done? from: The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Liew Tat-Siong Benny
Abstract: For most people—at least those in the academy of biblical studies—racial/ethnic minority readings of the Bible in the United States started in the 1970s. Michael Joseph Brown’s account of African American biblical scholarship, for instance, dates the rise of what he calls “blackening the Bible” to this same decade (2004, 19). What is also helpful in Brown’s account is that he accounted for the rise of this scholarship, at least partly, on the basis of the pioneering work of black theology in the 1960s (2004, 16–19). The sixties was, of course, a decade of popular or grassroots

Introduction from: Aquinas the Augustinian
Abstract: Partly in response to neo-Thomistic criticisms of Augustine, the relationship between Augustine’s thought and Thomas Aquinas’s received a central place in the French Dominican Marie-Dominique Chenu’s research on Aquinas. Thomas Aquinas inherits from Augustine a theological and philosophical patrimony, says Chenu, “outside of which it is impossible to conceive a Saint Thomas.”¹ During the thirteenth century, he notes, “the works of Augustine were being more assiduously read in the original form,” and Augustine’s major writings formed the basis of the new university libraries.² He recognizes that Augustine’s influence on Aquinas is deeper for some theological topics than for others,³ and

5 Imago Dei: from: Aquinas the Augustinian
Author(s) O’Callaghan John P.
Abstract: The topic of man as the imago Dei is a prominent theme in St. Thomas’s major systematic works, including his Scriptum super libros sententarium Magistri Petri Lombardi (Commentary on the Sentences), the Quaestiones disputatae de veritate (De veritate) and the Summa theologiae (Summa). His theological approach to the theme is deeply informed by St. Augustine, in particular his De Trinitate. Thus, the topic presents a paradigm instance for considering St. Thomas as an Augustinian. In his exhaustive and excellent treatment of St. Thomas on the imago Dei, To the Image of the Trinity: A Study in the Development of St.

The Balfour Declaration and Its Implications from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Charbit Denis
Abstract: Three paragraphs, twenty lines, one hundred twenty-eight words: never in the annals of European diplomacy would so short a text have such great consequences for the political future of a region of the world. Thanks to this declaration, the name Arthur James Balfour (1848–1930) has been passed down to posterity. Neither his philosophical essays, his leadership in the British conservative party, his management of the affairs of Ireland as secretary of state, nor his legislative work in the field of education as deputy of the House of Commons has left an imperishable trace. He was prime minister from January

The Emigration of the Jews from the Arab World from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Laskier Michael M.
Abstract: While Jewish communities had lived for centuries within various Muslim societies, for the majority of them the second half of the twentieth century was the theater, sometimes brutal, of their departure. Of the 750,000 Jews in Muslim countries, 550,000 were Maghrebi. In these countries, the Jews did not always participate in the same way in the various strains of Zionism, nor did they adopt the same positions on the aliyah, immigration to Israel. Similarly, the locations of the Jews shifted in accordance with the reconfiguration of maps within the framework of Arab nationalisms—even if, at first, the Jews identified

Judeo-Arab Associations in Israel from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Charbit Denis
Abstract: Within the context of a long-lasting Israeli-Arab conflict, and given the country’s identity as a “Jewish and democratic state,” Judeo-Arab associations play a crucial role in the struggle against inequality and prejudice. Since 1967, some have been involved in the defense of the Palestinians’ rights in the occupied territories. Perceived as an indispensable tool of democratic society, they are also the target of nationalist groups. Community networks are very dense in Israel. Inspired by practices of sociability tested in the Diaspora, and with the recent development of civil society and of the “third sector” to complement the political and economic

Jewish Figures in Modern Arabic Literature from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Boustani Sobhi
Abstract: Contemporary Arab writers consider the Arab-Israeli conflict a major subject, but the Jewish figure in modern Arabic literature seems relatively limited. It is true that only an exhaustive analysis of that literature would be able to reveal all the elements of that figure, but such an approach is far beyond the means of a lone researcher. Nevertheless, the examination of a large body of work and a number of studies on the subject allow us to observe that the evolution of the Jewish figure in modern Arabic literature is closely linked to developments in the geopolitical situation in the Near

Semitism: from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Bergounioux Gabriel
Abstract: The term “Semite” gained scientific justification in the nineteenth century, in the opposition between a different family of languages and the one that comparative grammar had brought to light and circumscribed under the name “Indo-European.” This name, developed outside of the people it designated, and after it had been extended to an anthropological characterization in terms of races, was exploited in order to justify colonial domination by the European powers in the Mediterranean region. The exacerbation of nationalism and the biologization of politics led to its application against European Jewish communities at the very moment when the works of Saussure

Comparison between the Halakha and Shariʿa from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Ackerman-Lieberman Phillip
Abstract: Despite many differences in detail, Judaism and Islam have much in common in their reliance on law as an organizing framework. Both legal systems turn to canonical textual sources (both scriptural and nonscriptural), as well as the interpretation of these texts, for the foundations of practice. Questions of legal method animated much early debate within each tradition; in Islamic law, distinctive legal schools persist to this day, which maintain such debate. Over time, narrative codes emerged in each tradition that established communal norms; these codes negotiated and at times vindicated local customary practice. As Judaism and Islam encountered modernity, both

The Andalusian Philosophical Milieu from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Abbès Makram
Abstract: The Andalusian philosophical milieu of the Middle Ages holds the key to understanding the dual transmission of knowledge between East and West at that time. First, the centers of cultural life under the Abassids communicated their knowledge to Andalusia (tenth to twelfth centuries). Shortly thereafter, philosophical works from Andalusia were dispersed to the major intellectual centers of Christian Europe. Because of this dual movement of cultural transfer, Arabic Spain was the site of one of the most significant historical moments in terms of scientific exchanges and the development of ideas. Through a study of the relations between Jewish and Muslim

Images of Jews in Ottoman Court Manuscripts from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Uluç Lale
Abstract: Illustrated Ottoman manuscripts produced at the court workshop ( nakkaşhane) in Istanbul do not customarily include identifiable images of Jews. A notable exception, however, is an illustrated copy of theKitab-i Siyer-i Nebi(The Book of the Life of the Prophet) of Mustafa ibn Yusuf ibn Omar al-Maulavi al-Erzerumi, known as Darir the Blindman , produced at the Ottoman court studio and dated 1003 (1594–95).¹ Although the text had been written in Turkish some two hundred years earlier in Cairo at the behest of the Mamluk sultan,² the Ottoman court copy of 1594–95 is its earliest illustrated version. An

Book Title: Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): APTER EMILY
Abstract: In recent years, scholarship on translation has moved well beyond the technicalities of converting one language into another and beyond conventional translation theory. With new technologies blurring distinctions between "the original" and its reproductions, and with globalization redefining national and cultural boundaries, "translation" is now emerging as a reformulated subject of lively, interdisciplinary debate. Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation enters the heart of this debate. It covers an exceptional range of topics, from simultaneous translation to legal theory, from the language of exile to the language of new nations, from the press to the cinema; and cultures and languages from contemporary Bengal to ancient Japan, from translations of Homer to the work of Don DeLillo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fgz7m

Introduction from: Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) BERMANN SANDRA
Abstract: There has probably never been a time when issues of nation, language, and translation have been more important or more troubling than they are today. In a world where individual nation-states are increasingly enmeshed in financial and information networks, where multiple linguistic and national identities can inhabit a single state’s borders or exceed them in vast diasporas, where globalization has its serious—and often violent—discontents, and where terrorism and war transform distrust into destruction, language and translation play central, if often unacknowledged, roles. Though the reasons for this are undeniably complex, they are, at least in broad terms, understandable.

Levinas, Translation, and Ethics from: Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) EAGLESTONE ROBERT
Abstract: Many commentators have suggested that translation is central to the ethical philosophy of Emmanuel Levinas. Not, clearly, translation from one language to another, in the sense of translating, say, German into French, nor translation in the sense of introducing intellectual developments from one national tradition into another, although Levinas is widely credited with introducing phenomenological thought into France in 1930. The commentators suggest that Levinas offers translation in a wider sense between what he calls “Hebrew” and “Greek,” where the names for the languages stand in for much wider frameworks or worldviews. However, although this is a constructive approach that

Local Contingencies: from: Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) VENUTI LAWRENCE
Abstract: These comments are drawn from Victor Hugo’s 1865 preface to his son François-Victor’s version of Shakespeare’s works. They are worth examining, not simply because Hugo uses translation as the basis for a critique of nationalism, but because his critique at once exposes and is itself riddled with contradictions that have characterized the relations between translation and national identities, regardless of the language and culture in which the translating is performed. Formulating the contradictory implications of Hugo’s comments, then, will be a useful way to introduce my reflections on nationalist agendas in translation.

Nationum Origo from: Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) LEZRA JACQUES
Abstract: Globalization has taken our tongues from us—local, autochthonous, idiomatic, ancestral tongues. Its clamorous internationalism hangs critics on a mute peg, with no common voice or general vocabulary on which to string alternative inter- or transnational forms of work, thought, and organization. And so the disarmed, heteroglot opposition takes shelter in various weak utopianisms, in weakly regulative images generally and understandably drawn from increasingly abstract domains (from reinvigorated notions of the “human” and of “humanism,” for instance or, most recently, from the sketchy descriptions of an antihegemonic Europe that Jürgen Habermas and Derrida erect against the depredations of the United

National Literature in Transnational Times: from: Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) COOPPAN VILASHINI
Abstract: Among the many changes we credit globalization with—including the increasing interconnection of nations, cultures, and economies, the rapid and widespread flows of persons, goods, information, and capital across national borders, and the production of new forms of identity and community—we may add the reconfiguration of academic disciplines from national to global frameworks. As a practice of critical thought, intellectual globalization is marked, as Anthony D. King notes, by “the rejection of the nationally-constituted society as the appropriate object of discourse, or unit of social and cultural analysis, and to varying degrees, a commitment to conceptualising ‘the world as

Book Title: Shattered Voices-Language, Violence, and the Work of Truth Commissions
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Phelps Teresa Godwin
Abstract: Following periods of mass atrocity and oppression, states are faced with a question of critical importance in the transition to democracy: how to offer redress to victims of the old regime without perpetuating cycles of revenge. Traditionally, balance has been restored through arrests, trials, and punishment, but in the last three decades, more than twenty countries have opted to have a truth commission investigate the crimes of the prior regime and publish a report about the investigation, often incorporating accounts from victims. Although many praise the work of truth commissions for empowering and healing through words rather than violence, some condemn the practice as a poor substitute for traditional justice, achieved through trials and punishment. There has been until now little analysis of the unarticulated claim that underlies the truth commissions' very existence: that language-in this case narrative stories-can substitute for violence. Acknowledging revenge as a real and deep human need, Shattered Voicesexplores the benefits and problems inherent when a fragile country seeks to heal its victims without risking its own future. In developing a theory about the role of language in retribution, Teresa Godwin Phelps takes an interdisciplinary approach, delving into sources from Greek tragedy toHamlet, from Kant to contemporary theories about retribution, from the Babylonian law codes to the South African Truth and Reconciliation Report. She argues that, given the historical and psychological evidence about revenge, starting afresh by drawing a bright line between past crimes and a new government is both unrealistic and unwise. When grievous harm happens, a rebalancing is bound to occur, whether it is orderly and lawful or disorderly and unlawful.Shattered Voicescontends that language is requisite to any adequate balancing, and that a solution is viable only if it provides an atmosphere in which storytelling and subsequent dialogue can flourish. In the developing culture of ubiquitous truth reports, Phelps argues that we must become attentive to the form these reports take-the narrative structure, the use of victims' stories, and the way a political message is conveyed to the citizens of the emerging democracy. By looking concretely at the work and responsibilities of truth commissions,Shattered Voicesoffers an important and thoughtful analysis of the efficacy of the ways human rights abuses are addressed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fh8vr

Book Title: Homo Narrans-The Poetics and Anthropology of Oral Literature
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Niles John D.
Abstract: It would be difficult to imagine what human life would be like without stories-from myths recited by Pueblo Indian healers in the kiva, ballads sung in Slovenian market squares, folktales and legends told by the fireside in Italy, to jokes told at a dinner table in Des Moines-for it is chiefly through storytelling that people possess a past. In Homo NarransJohn D. Niles explores how human beings shape their world through the stories they tell. The book vividly weaves together the study of Anglo-Saxon literature and culture with the author's own engagements in the field with some of the greatest twentieth-century singers and storytellers in the Scottish tradition. Niles ponders the nature of the storytelling impulse, the social function of narrative, and the role of individual talent in oral tradition. His investigation of the poetics of oral narrative encompasses literary works, such as the epic poems and hymns of early Greece and the Anglo-SaxonBeowulf, texts that we know only through written versions but that are grounded in oral technique. That all forms of narrative, even the most sophisticated genres of contemporary fiction, have their ultimate origin in storytelling is a point that scarcely needs to be argued. Niles's claims here are more ambitious: that oral narrative is and has long been the chief basis of culture itself, that the need to tell stories is what distinguishes humans from all other living creatures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fh9rr

5 from: Homo Narrans
Abstract: Faced with the problem of making sense of a literary work from a very different epoch, composed according to stylistic criteria that differ markedly from those in fashion today—a poem that combines worship and narrative pleasure like the Homeric Hymn to Demeter, let us say, or a poem that presents dry lists of names within a glamourous legendary framework like the Old English poem Widsith, or an “impressive bit of showmanship” (Edel 1983:259) like the virtuoso medieval Welsh tale Culhwch ac Olwen, or a mythlike narrative on a monumental scale like the Old Irish Táin Bó Cúalnge, which is

Book Title: Shelter Blues-Sanity and Selfhood Among the Homeless
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Desjarlais Robert
Abstract: Desjarlais shows us not anonymous faces of the homeless but real people.While it is estimated that 25 percent or more of America's homeless are mentally ill, their lives are largely unknown to us. What must life be like for those who, in addition to living on the street, hear voices, suffer paranoid delusions, or have trouble thinking clearly or talking to others. Shelter Bluesis an innovative portrait of people residing in Boston's Station Street Shelter. It examines the everyday lives of more than 40 homeless men and women, both white and African-American, ranging in age from early 20s to mid-60s. Based on a sixteen-month study, it draws readers into the personal worlds of these individuals and, by addressing the intimacies of homelessness, illness, and abjection, picks up where most scholarship and journalism stops.Robert Desjarlais works against the grain of media representations of homelessness by showing us not anonymous stereotypes but individuals. He draws on conversations as well as observations, talking with and listening to shelter residents to understand how they relate to their environment, to one another, and to those entrusted with their care. His book considers their lives in terms of a complex range of forces and helps us comprehend the linkages between culture, illness, personhood, and political agency on the margins of contemporary American society.Shelter Bluesis unlike anything else ever written about homelessness. It challenges social scientists and mental health professionals to rethink their approaches to human subjectivity and helps us all to better understand one of the most pressing problems of our time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fhjmz

ʺBeauty and the Streetʺ from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: —the Au Bon Pain [a local cafe] on Mass Ave between Harvard and Central Squares couldn’t be a more inviting place to start the day. Regulars hunker down here every morning before work or school, settling into cafe chairs, eating pastries, poring sleepily over the morning papers. Rarely does anyone look up.

A Critical Phenomenology from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: Ironically, this strategy calls for a reworking of how most phenomenologically oriented studies proceed. In the opening pages of Speech and Phenomena, Jacques Derrida shows that Edmund Husserl’s

Five Coefficients from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: The need for housing, and questions as to which kind of accommodations best suited “the chronically and persistently mentally ill,” led to the research project with which my fieldwork was formally linked. The project, itself part of a nationwide comparative study, tried to assess the effects of two housing models on the welfare and well-being of the “consumers” participating in the study. To begin this project, “housing officers” and case managers recruited prospective subjects from the three DMH shelters. Once a person agreed to participate in the study, he or she was randomly assigned and relocated to either an “independent

Taking Meds from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: Martin tried to numb himself from worries and nervousness through licit and illicit drugs. Others medicated themselves as well, but usually with pharmaceuticals regulated by the state and prescribed by a psychiatrist. Some were on a fixed and steady plan of antidepressant, antianxiety, or antipsychotic medications; by definition, these antidotes countered some malady or symptom more than they fostered a new state of mind. Others repeatedly returned to “their” psychiatrists so that they could adjust the kind and amount of medications prescribed. The adjustments had a hit-or-miss quality to them; different antidotes and dosages were tried until something worked.

Pacing My Mind from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: Another way that people dealt with things was to pace. Some did not pace at all. I never saw Fred, Helen, or Peter pace, and Irving seemed somehow too regal to want to work his body so. Richard sometimes paced when others did; he shadowed Brian at times, as if the contagion of movement was another way for him to get in touch with people. Men paced more than women, although it was unclear why this was so. Perhaps the difference lay in the culture, in the medications that men took, or in how those medications affected them. More likely

Reasonable Reasonableness from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: Staff members like Lisa, Bill, Peggy, and Ray needed to act on several fronts at once in order to carry out their duties and serve the best interests of their guests. In working for an agency of the state, they were responsible for the proper care of those staying in the shelter and so could be held accountable for any

Figure, Character, Person from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: Ideas of “personhood,” for one, were powerfully at work. Whereas the streets often eroded a sense of personhood, the shelter worked in fundamental ways to reconstitute that sense. “The idea of a person,” Amelie Rorty

Book Title: Beyond the Red Notebook-Essays on Paul Auster
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Barone Dennis
Abstract: The novels of Paul Auster-finely wrought, self-reflexive, filled with doublings, coincidences, and mysteries-have captured the imagination of readers and the admiration of many critics of contemporary literature. In Beyond the Red Notebook, the first book devoted to the works of Auster, Dennis Barone has assembled an international group of scholars who present twelve essays that provide a rich and insightful examination of Auster's writings. The authors explore connections between Auster's poetry and fiction, the philosophical underpinnings of his writing, its relation to detective fiction, and its unique embodiment of the postmodern sublime. Their essays provide the fullest analysis available of Auster's themes of solitude, chance, and paternity found in works such asThe Invention of Solitude,City of Glass,Ghosts,The Locked Room,In the Country of Last Things,Moon Palace,The Music of Chance, andLeviathan. This volume includes contributions from Pascal Bruckner, Marc Chenetier, Norman Finkelstein, Derek Rubin, Madeleine Sorapure, Stephen Bernstein, Tim Woods, Steven Weisenburger, Arthur Saltzman, Eric Wirth, and Motoyuki Shibata. The extensive bibliography, prepared by William Drenttel, will greatly benefit both scholars and general readers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fhp21

Introduction: from: Beyond the Red Notebook
Author(s) Barone Dennis
Abstract: Before the publication of The New York Trilogy, Paul Auster was known primarily for having edited the Random House anthology of twentieth-century French poetry and for having written several insightful literary essays. In the short time since the publication of the Trilogy (1985–1986) he has become one of America’s most praised contemporary novelists. He has frequently been compared to authors ranging from Nathaniel Hawthorne to Alain Robbe-Grillet. Yet, perhaps because of the speed at which his novels have appeared and his reputation has grown, there is little scholarship available on his work. One has the sense, however, that just

Paul Auster, or The Heir Intestate from: Beyond the Red Notebook
Author(s) Palmunen Karen
Abstract: The Invention of Solitude is both the ars poetica and the seminal work of Paul Auster. To understand him we must start here; all his books lead us back to this one. Novel-manifesto in two parts, “Portrait of an Invisible Man” and “The Book of Memory,” this work immediately sounds the theme of remorse.

“Looking for Signs in the Air”: from: Beyond the Red Notebook
Author(s) Woods Tim
Abstract: “Space is for us an existential and cultural dominant.” So concludes Fredric Jameson, having described postmodernism’s dependence on a “supplement of spatiality” that results from its depletion of history and consequent exaggeration of the present (365). Indeed, recent years have seen an increasing interest in the politics of place, the cultural function of geography, and the reassertion of the importance of space in any cultural study. The territory of these arguments is marked out in diverse areas in the work of people like Michel Foucault, Gaston Bachelard, David Harvey, Edward Soja, Doreen Massey, Fredric Jameson, Pierre Bourdieu, and Michel de

Introduction from: The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: Here speaks the storyteller, telling by voice what was learned by ear. Here speaks a poet who did not learn language structure from one teacher and language meaning from another, nor plot structure from one and characterization from another, nor even an art of storytelling from one and an art of hermeneutics from another, but always heard all these things working together in the stories of other storytellers. And this poet, or mythopoet, not only narrates what characters do, but speaks when they speak, chants when they chant, and sings when they sing. A story is not a genre like

4 Translating Ancient Words: from: The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: As a mythographer who has learned to regard oral narrative as a performing art rather than a direct analog of literary narrative, I have aimed my work in transcription and translation at the production of a performable and breathable script or score, rather than milling out scanned verse or justified prose. This work started with tape-recordings of live performances of Zuni narratives, coming full circle with the scoring of tape-recordings of my own oral performance (in English) of the scores of the Zuni performances, as embedded in my talks before live audiences on the subject of oral narrative and related

8 The Forms of Mayan Verse from: The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: What happens when our notions about what a poetics might be are held within the orbit of linguistics is well illustrated by the work of Roman Jakobson. In a statement meant to be a general pronouncement on poetics, he argues that the “poetic function” of language is actualized as a “focus on the message for its own sake,” specifically the structure of the message, and “since linguistics is the global science of verbal structure, poetics may be regarded as an integral part of linguistics.”¹ And just as his phonology involves a repression of the continuous and material nature of speech

Book Title: Dreams of Fiery Stars-The Transformations of Native American Fiction
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Rainwater Catherine
Abstract: Selected by Choicemagazine as an Outstanding Academic Book for 1999 Since the 1968 publication of N. Scott Momaday'sHouse Made of Dawn, a new generation of Native American storytellers has chosen writing over oral traditions. While their works have found an audience by observing many of the conventions of the mainstream novel, Native American written narrative has emerged as something distinct from the postmodern novel with which it is often compared. InDreams of Fiery Stars, Catherine Rainwater examines the novels of writers such as Momaday, Linda Hogan, Leslie Marmon Silko, Gerald Vizenor, and Louise Erdrich and contends that the very act of writing narrative imposes constraints upon these authors that are foreign to Native American tradition. Their works amount to a break with-and a transformation of-American Indian storytelling. The book focuses on the agenda of social and cultural regeneration encoded in contemporary Native American narrative, and addresses key questions about how these works achieve their overtly stated political and revisionary aims. Rainwater explores the ways in which the writers "create" readers who understand the connection between storytelling and personal and social transformation; considers how contemporary Native American narrative rewrites Western notions of space and time; examines the existence of intertextual connections between Native American works; and looks at the vital role of Native American literature in mainstream society today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fhrv1

Chapter Two Imagining the Stories: from: Dreams of Fiery Stars
Abstract: As we have seen in Chapter One, narrative management exploiting power may frustrate narrativity, the process by which a reader constructs a story based upon expectations and textual cues. Such experience, in turn, might generate in the reader an expanded repertoire of semiotic practices pertaining to texts and world. We have also seen how highly resistant narrative such as Momaday’s House Made of Dawn might drive the reader’s effort to decode the work beyond the margins of the text to extratextual references. Momaday’s is a useful technique for transforming the actual reader as thoroughly as possible into a projected, biculturally

Chapter Five All the Stories Fit Together: from: Dreams of Fiery Stars
Abstract: Thomas King’s collection of short stories, One Good Story, That One, graphically and verbally illustrates an intertextual principle: elements of story escape their textual bounds to spill over into life (as we have noted in previous chapters) and into other texts. King’s Coyote—denizen of a vast number of American Indian stories including King’s novel, Green Grass, Running Water—wanders through each of the works in the collection and even leaves “Coyote tracks,” in the form of graphic images, throughout the white spaces in the text that conventionally separate one story from another. Louise Erdrich’s novels are similarly linked together

Epilogue: from: Dreams of Fiery Stars
Abstract: A quick glance at a dictionary reveals the common root of the words regenerate and genre: both derive from the Latin, generare. To “generate” is “to produce, or bring into being,” while to belong to a “genre” is to be of a certain form or “genus” produced; to “regenerate” is to bring back into being, or to revive, renew, remake. An implicit theory of semiotic “regeneration” and, so to speak, “regenre-ation” has guided my investigation of contemporary American Indian literary works throughout this study. As I have shown, and as many Native American authors declare outright, Indian literature frequently includes

2. Shṭara: from: Gender on the Market
Abstract: To get to the suq you have to cross three neighborhoods, transverse two empty lots where sheep graze on garbage and shrubs, and cut through the oily streets of the industrial quarter, where black-handed mechanics work on truck engines and repair motor bikes.

5. Reporting the New, Revoicing the Past: from: Gender on the Market
Abstract: In 1935, Roman Jakobson noted that all art is influenced by an overarching principle, what the Russian Formalists called the “dominant” (1971 : 82), a structuring orientation characterizing a work or even an entire epoch. Although a narrative may have many functions and embody several forms, an internal hierarchy exists which determines the relative value of its components. The dominant of poetic language is the aesthetic function—its form. Poetry is oriented toward the sign, while prose narrative is directed toward the referent.¹ “Poetic evolution,” says Jakobson, “is a shift in this hierarchy.”

Book Title: Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna (Ibn Sina)-With a Translation of the Book of the Prophet Muhammad's Ascent to Heaven
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Heath Peter
Abstract: Islamic allegory is the product of a cohesive literary tradition to which few contributed as significantly as Ibn Sina (Avicenna), the eleventh-century Muslim philosopher. Peter Heath here offers a detailed examination of Avicenna's contribution, paying special attention to Avicenna's psychology and poetics and to the ways in which they influenced strains of theological, mystical, and literary thought in subsequent Islamic-and Western-intellectual and religious history. Heath begins by showing how Avicenna's writings fit into the context and general history of Islamic allegory and explores the interaction among allegory, allegoresis, and philosophy in Avicenna's thought. He then provides a brief introduction to Avicenna as an historical figure. From there, he examines the ways in which Avicenna's cosmological, psychological, and epistemological theories find parallel, if diverse, expression in the disparate formats of philosophical and allegorical narration. Included in this book is an illustration of Avicenna's allegorical practice. This takes the form of a translation of the Mi'raj Nama (The Book of the Prophet Muhammad's Ascent to Heaven), a short treatise in Persian generally attributed to Avicenna. The text concludes with an investigation of the literary dimension Avicenna's allegorical theory and practice by examining his use of description metaphor. Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna is an original and important work that breaks new ground by applying the techniques of modern literary criticism to the study of Medieval Islamic philosophy. It will be of interest to scholars and students of medieval Islamic and Western literature and philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fhz90

7. The Interpretation and Function of Allegory from: Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna (Ibn Sina)
Abstract: Avicenna’s theory of allegory is straightforward, easily summarized, and, obviously, highly pertinent to an understanding of the rhetorical dimension of his allegories and philosophical writings. As with any theory of literary creation or interpretation, however, Avicenna’s hermeneutics must be taken with a grain of salt. Authorial theories of composition and reading are indeed relevant, but they should not be accepted so literally that they overly determine our understanding of the workings of the texts themselves. Writers often valorize rules of composition or endorse methods of interpretation that they themselves do not completely follow in practice.¹ Avicenna’s theory of interpretation is

Book Title: Clan Cleansing in Somalia-The Ruinous Legacy of 1991
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Kapteijns Lidwien
Abstract: In 1991, certain political and military leaders in Somalia, wishing to gain exclusive control over the state, mobilized their followers to use terror-wounding, raping, and killing-to expel a vast number of Somalis from the capital city of Mogadishu and south-central and southern Somalia. Manipulating clan sentiment, they succeeded in turning ordinary civilians against neighbors, friends, and coworkers. Although this episode of organized communal violence is common knowledge among Somalis, its real nature has not been publicly acknowledged and has been ignored, concealed, or misrepresented in scholarly works and political memoirs-until now. Marshaling a vast amount of source material, including Somali poetry and survivor accounts, Clan Cleansing in Somaliaanalyzes this campaign of clan cleansing against the historical background of a violent and divisive military dictatorship, in the contemporary context of regime collapse, and in relationship to the rampant militia warfare that followed in its wake.Clan Cleansing in Somaliaalso reflects on the relationship between history, truth, and postconflict reconstruction in Somalia. Documenting the organization and intent behind the campaign of clan cleansing, Lidwien Kapteijns traces the emergence of the hate narratives and code words that came to serve as rationales and triggers for the violence. However, it was not clans that killed, she insists, but people who killed in the name of clan. Kapteijns argues that the mutual forgiveness for which politicians often so lightly call is not a feasible proposition as long as the violent acts for which Somalis should forgive each other remain suppressed and undiscussed.Clan Cleansing in Somaliaestablishes that public acknowledgment of the ruinous turn to communal violence is indispensable to social and moral repair, and can provide a gateway for the critical memory work required from Somalis on all sides of this multifaceted conflict.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fhzvq

Chapter 1 Speaking the Unspeakable: from: Clan Cleansing in Somalia
Abstract: The research on which this book is based began as a study of Somali popular songs and poetry as mediations of civil war violence. This is a continuation of my earlier work on Somali popular songs of the nationalist era, a genre that, as I have argued elsewhere, proved to be iconic for this era’s will to modernity—its hopes for national unity and economic development as well as for a “modern,” autonomous, and desiring selfhood. In the era after state collapse, some of the most popular and widely known poetic mediations of civil war violence have indeed continued to

Chapter 3 Clan Cleansing in Mogadishu and Beyond from: Clan Cleansing in Somalia
Abstract: From mid-December 1990 on, the number of foreigners who remained in Mogadishu dwindled.¹ The U.S. embassy, where foreign nationals of many backgrounds toward the end had taken refuge, was evacuated on January 5, 1991, the Italian embassy on January 12. Both evacuations involved dramatic rescue actions by land, sea, and air.² Groups of stragglers, especially Italians who worked in the city or the agricultural areas of Jubba and Jannaale, also managed to arrange for escape but had to leave all their possessions behind.³ By January 10 even most humanitarian workers had left the country to escape the violence. A rare

1. Imaginary Gardens with Real Toads from: Body and Emotion
Abstract: While conducting fieldwork in the late 1980s among Yolmo Sherpa, an ethnically Tibetan people who live in the Helambu region of northcentral Nepal, I participated in some twenty-odd healing ceremonies as the shamanic apprentice to a veteran “grandfather” healer called Meme (t. me me). Barefoot, illiterate, sporting ragged farm clothes and a scruffy beard beneath an angular face, the sixty-seven-year-old Meme possessed a wealth of sacred knowledge. In everyday conversation his uncouth speech and manners told of the low-status family from which he came. But when healing, this dignified bombo or “shaman” (t. bon po) could communicate with the gods,

Book Title: Beyond Objectivism and Relativism-Science, Hermeneutics, and Praxis
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): BERNSTEIN RICHARD J.
Abstract: Drawing freely and expertly from Continental and analytic traditions, Richard Bernstein examines a number of debates and controversies exemplified in the works of Gadamer, Habermas, Rorty, and Arendt. He argues that a "new conversation" is emerging about human rationality-a new understanding that emphasizes its practical character and has important ramifications both for thought and action.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fj0g8

PART ONE BEYOND OBJECTIVISM AND RELATIVISM: from: Beyond Objectivism and Relativism
Abstract: There is an uneasiness that has spread throughout intellectual and cultural life. It affects almost every discipline and every aspect of our lives. This uneasiness is expressed by the opposition between objectivism and relativism, but there are a variety of other contrasts that indicate the same underlying anxiety: rationality versus irrationality, objectivity versus subjectivity, realism versus antirealism. Contemporary thinking has moved between these and other, related extremes. Even the attempts that some have made to break out of this framework of thinking have all too frequently been assimilated to these standard oppositions. There are, however, many signs that the deep

PART THREE from: Beyond Objectivism and Relativism
Abstract: The term “hermeneutics,” with its ancient lineage, has only recently begun to enter the working vocabulary of Anglo-American thinkers. Its novelty is indicated in a passage cited earlier from Thomas Kuhn’s The Essential Tension (1977) in which he confesses that “the term ‘hermeneutic’ . . . was no part of my vocabulary as recently as five years ago. Increasingly, I suspect that anyone who believes that history may have deep philosophical import will have to learn to bridge the longstanding divide between the Continental and English-language philosophical traditions.”¹

Book Title: Sensuous Scholarship- Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): STOLLER PAUL
Abstract: Among the Songhay of Mali and Niger, who consider the stomach the seat of personality, learning is understood not in terms of mental activity but in bodily terms. Songhay bards study history by "eating the words of the ancestors," and sorcerers learn their art by ingesting particular substances, by testing their flesh with knives, by mastering pain and illness. In Sensuous ScholarshipPaul Stoller challenges contemporary social theorists and cultural critics who-using the notion of embodiment to critique Eurocentric and phallocentric predispositions in scholarly thought-consider the body primarily as a text that can be read and analyzed. Stoller argues that this attitude is in itself Eurocentric and is particularly inappropriate for anthropologists, who often work in societies in which the notion of text, and textual interpretation, is foreign. ThroughoutSensuous ScholarshipStoller argues for the importance of understanding the "sensuous epistemologies" of many non-Western societies so that we can better understand the societies themselves and what their epistemologies have to teach us about human experience in general.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fj1pm

Introduction: from: Sensuous Scholarship
Abstract: Rorty’s work, of course, has considered the logical pitfalls of Western metaphysics,

1 THE SORCERER’S BODY from: Sensuous Scholarship
Abstract: In 1957 Claude Lévi-Strauss published his influential essay, “The Sorcerer and His Magic.” Lévi-Strauss’s essay built the foundation of a structuralist approach to the anthropological study of sorcery, healing, and religion. In a remarkable analysis Lévi-Strauss demonstrated that sorcerous ideologies were based on sociological fictions reinforced by magical sleight of hand. In the end the power of the sorcerer, he argued, rested not in an intrinsic power, but in the symbolic power of his or her relationship in the cultural continuum of illness and health.¹ Lévi-Strauss’s argument is based on data gleaned not from his own fieldwork in Brazil but

Book Title: The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa- Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): LEMARCHAND RENÉ
Abstract: Endowed with natural resources, majestic bodies of fresh water, and a relatively mild climate, the Great Lakes region of Central Africa has also been the site of some of the world's bloodiest atrocities. In Rwanda, Burundi, and the Congo-Kinshasa, decades of colonial subjugation-most infamously under Belgium's Leopold II-were followed by decades of civil warfare that spilled into neighboring countries. When these conflicts lead to horrors such as the 1994 Rwandan genocide, ethnic difference and postcolonial legacies are commonly blamed, but, with so much at stake, such simple explanations cannot take the place of detailed, dispassionate analysis. The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africaprovides a thorough exploration of the contemporary crises in the region. By focusing on the historical and social forces behind the cycles of bloodshed in Rwanda, Burundi, and the Congo-Kinshasa, René Lemarchand challenges much of the conventional wisdom about the roots of civil strife in former Belgian Africa. He offers telling insights into the appalling cycle of genocidal violence, ethnic strife, and civil war that has made the Great Lakes region of Central Africa the most violent on the continent, and he sheds new light on the dynamics of conflict in the region. Building on a full career of scholarship and fieldwork, Lemarchand's analysis breaks new ground in our understanding of the complex historical forces that continue to shape the destinies of one of Africa's most important regions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fj2cq

Chapter 6 Hate Crimes from: The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: The tale hardly bears retelling: in Rwanda an estimated one million people died in a frenzy of genocidal killings that was one of the most appalling bloodbaths of the twentieth century. Most of the victims were members of the country’s Tutsi minority. Few were lucky enough to be shot; the majority were hacked to pieces, drowned, speared, or beaten to death with clubs, their bodies left unburied, at the mercy of stray dogs and vultures. Although the worst of the killings was the work of militias—the notorious interahamwe, “those who stand together”—the slaughter rapidly gained a momentum of

Chapter 11 Burundi’s Endangered Transition from: The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: Few other states in the continent can claim to have emerged from a ten-year civil war under more promising circumstances than Burundi. The transition process, however long and painful, has been exemplary. Beginning with the Arusha agreement of 2000, a constitutional formula was finally worked out whereby the rights of the Tutsi minority could be reconciled with the demands of the Hutu majority.¹ The 2005 legislative and presidential elections went remarkably smoothly, giving birth to a consociational government² headed by a Hutu president, Pierre Nkurunziza, where Hutu and Tutsi held respectively 60 and 40 percent of the ministerial portfolios. A

Chapter 13 Ethnic Violence, Public Policies, and Social Capital in North Kivu from: The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: Few works of political science have received a more universal acclaim than Robert Putnam’s trailblazing inquest into the roots of democracy in contemporary Italy, appropriately titled Making Democracy Work: Civic Traditions in Modern Italy. Judging from the theme of this conference, the impact of his contribution is not limited to the American academic community. Although one may not agree with all of his ideas, their boldness is undeniable: more than an elegantly crafted case study of modern-day Italy, Making Democracy Work holds profoundly important implications for anyone trying to elucidate the conditions of successful democracy.

Conclusion from: Aliens and Sojourners
Abstract: In an important article, Rowan Greer characterizes early Christianity in terms of what he calls “the marvelous paradox of Christians as alien citizens.”¹ That is, Christians are paradoxically “both involved in and disengaged from society.”² Greer surveys the practical outworking of this paradox in both pre-Nicene writers ( Diognetus, Tertullian of Carthage, Clement of Alexandria) and later authors of the fourth-century imperial church (Eusebius of Caesarea, Lactantius, John Chrysostom, Augustine). His conclusion is that, in each instance, “the paradox of alien citizenship can never be put into practice on a social scale. All the figures I have discussed state the paradox

Chapter 1 Mysteries We Reread, Mysteries of Rereading: from: Detecting Texts
Author(s) Irwin John T.
Abstract: Let me start with a simple-minded question: How does one write analytic detective fiction as high art when the genre’s basic structure, its central narrative mechanism, seems to discourage the unlimited rereading associated with serious writing? That is, if the point of an analytic detective story is the deductive solution of a mystery, how does the writer keep the achievement of that solution from exhausting the reader’s interest in the story? How does one write a work that can be reread by people other than those with poor memories?

Chapter 3 (De)feats of Detection: from: Detecting Texts
Author(s) Black Joel
Abstract: It’s customary to credit Poe with elaborating all the conventions of detective fiction that subsequent practitioners of the genre have followed to a greater or lesser degree.¹ Yet Poe’s privileged role as founder or father of a literary genre—a role perhaps unique in literary history—has obscured the fact that he marks what can now be recognized as a first phase of the genre’s development. Key works of detective fiction in the twentieth century, especially in its latter half, represent a distinct departure from Poe’s “tales of ratiocination” and, indeed, from traditional hermeneutics.² Before we can delineate this later

Chapter 5 Work of the Detective, Work of the Writer: from: Detecting Texts
Author(s) Nealon Jeffrey T.
Abstract: The detective novel is often analyzed in terms of its metafictional and metaphysical appeal. Whether consciously or unconsciously, the genre comments upon the process of sifting through signs, and ultimately upon the possibility of deriving order from the seeming chaos of conflicting signals and motives. The unraveling work of the detective within the story mirrors and assists the work of the reader, as both try to piece together the disparate signs that might eventually solve the mystery. The reader of the detective novel comes, metafictionally, to identify with the detective, because both reader and detective are bound up in the

Chapter 9 Postmodernism and the Monstrous Criminal: from: Detecting Texts
Author(s) Ramsay Raylene
Abstract: Since the early 1950s, Alain Robbe-Grillet’s writings and films have influenced that body of French literary investigative work which reflects the “suspicion” (in Nathalie Sarraute’s sense) that the real world and natural language might be arbitrary constructions. Despite the metafictional character of his de-naturing of traditional narratives, his ex-posing of the ideologies concealed behind Western myths, and his interrogation of the hidden structures of thought and feeling (Logos and Eros) in which writer and reader are enmeshed, Robbe-Grillet’s detecting project can itself be generated only from within the traditional frames of language, myth, and feeling.

Chapter 10 Detecting Identity in Time and Space: from: Detecting Texts
Author(s) Botta Anna
Abstract: The occupation of France during World War II marks Modiano’s narrators, depriving them of an origin and consequently a stable identity. In Tabucchi’s works,

Chapter 11 ʺPremeditated Crimesʺ: from: Detecting Texts
Author(s) Berressem Hanjo
Abstract: In the following essay, I will trace elements of the metaphysical detective story in the works of Witold Gombrowicz and align them within a psychoanalytic (in particular, Lacanian) framework. For this project, I will draw on the elective affinity between detective fiction and psychoanalysis, which is based—at least partly—on the fact that, like the criminal case, the psychoanalytic case is a knotty problem with death at its center. Jacques Lacan, in fact, defines human reality in general as “The Case of the Borromean Knot,” the structure he draws upon to describe the interrelated realms of the symbolic, the

CHAPTER 6 ‘Indelible memories’: from: Performing the Past
Author(s) CAPLAN JANE
Abstract: In 2003 the Staten Island Historical Society (SIHS) in New York mounted a photographic exhibition, ‘Indelible Memories: September 11 Memorial Tattoos’, commemorating the 9/11 attack on the World Trade Center. The tattoos on display had for the most part been acquired by firefighters and police officers who had been involved in the rescue effort, or by family members of those who had perished when the towers collapsed. The fact that this exhibition took place on Staten Island was not coincidental. The Island, one of the five boroughs of New York City, is home to a largely white working-class, Catholic population

CHAPTER 9 Music and memory in Mozart’s Zauberflöte from: Performing the Past
Author(s) ASSMANN JAN
Abstract: As an art working with time and addressing the ear, music, like poetry, requires and challenges memory. As early as the fourth century, Augustine used the example of music to illustrate his meditations on time and memory, describing the process of understanding a melody that unfolds in time,¹ and Edmund Husserl, in his Untersuchungen zur Phänomenologie des inneren Zeitbewußtseins, used music as the most obvious example of how memory and expectation or, in his terminology, retention and protention, cooperate in the perceptive construction of a melody.² Perceiving and understanding a melody requires memory, the same kind of short-term memory which

CHAPTER 11 Novels and their readers, memories and their social frameworks from: Performing the Past
Author(s) LEERSSEN JOEP
Abstract: This chapter focuses on literature and the reading act as a nodal point, a relay station, in the dissemination (in space) and transmission (across generations) of cultural memory. In doing so, it draws attention to three interrelated problem areas: 1) the currency of literature is principally shaped by the language of its expression, whereas the currency of memories is principally shaped in societal or political frameworks; 2) the social and political frameworks (i.e. states and institutions) in which cultural memories are current can be less durable and more fluid than the canonicity of certain literary texts; 3) the literary evocation

Chapter Two Tape Cassettes and Former Selves: from: Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Jansen Bas
Abstract: Old cassette mix tapes tend to bring back memories. There is something accidental about this ability, because evoking memories was not their intended purpose. In the digital age, however, it is their evocative quality that they are mostly appreciated for. Besides conjuring up a wealth of autobiographical memories related to a specific tape, mix tapes naturally trigger memories of the outdated technology of the cassette recorder and of spending many an hour mixing tapes. Unlike making a playlist, mix taping involves a lot of work. As songs were generally rerecorded in real time, the process of making a mix tape

Chapter Four Taking Your Favorite Sound Along: from: Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Weber Heike
Abstract: As we know from both Michael Bull’s and Tia DeNora’s work, users of audio technologies employ recorded music to create and maintain emotions, to

Chapter Ten Technostalgia: from: Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Reinecke David
Abstract: For many musicians and collectors, the musical instruments of the past live on in the studio, on the stage, and for those rare enough instruments, in the vault.¹ Paradoxically, many of the finest guitars end up on the wall of collectors’ homes never to be played again. Vintage synthesizers, such as the Moog Minimoog, have acquired such a legendary status that they are unaffordable to most working musicians. Even old instruments and pieces of equipment that are not particularly rare, such as the Fender Deluxe tube amp favored by rock musicians for its classic rock sound, present particular problems for

Chapter Twelve All the Names: from: Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Benschop Ruth
Abstract: It was a glorious summer’s day when I visited the Netherlands American Cemetery and Memorial for World War II in the gently sloping hills in the south of the Netherlands. The grass at the cemetery was green and, as always, perfectly trimmed. The long curves of the headstones shone white in the sunlight, attracting hundreds of harvest spiders to dance among them. I had come to listen to Alle Namen[All the Names],² a soundscape made by the sound and music studio Intro | in situ.³ In the leaflet announcing the work,Alle Namenwas described as “a sound field

Book Title: Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe- Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Góis Pedro
Abstract: Globalisation, migration and integration have shaken up identity processes and identity dynamics as never before. But in a post-colonial, multi-ethnic Europe, what is identity? How is it constructed? Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe endeavours to answer these questions and more. Eleven of the thirteen chapters present empirical case studies from the Basque Country, the Netherlands, Switzerland, the United Kingdom and Portugal - thus resulting in one of the first international volumes to highlight Portugal's diverse and complex migration flows. Transnationalism also takes centre stage in several contributions that survey various types of informal and formal networks in local communities and across national borders. Via American studies, anthropology, cultural studies, ethnology, history, social psychology and sociology, the authors come from an array of disciplines as dynamic as the continent about which they write. This title is available in the OAPEN Library - http://www.oapen.org.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46mvd1

3 A streetcar named desire: from: Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) Lindo Flip
Abstract: In 1996, youth workers in one of the boroughs in the southern part of the city of Rotterdam¹ started using a converted local bus to visit places where local youth were loitering on the streets. Problems with young people in several districts of the borough, but especially a neighbourhood called Pendrecht, were the main impetus for this new strategy. Pendrecht is mostly made up of working-class housing projects (mainly blocks of flats some five stories high), constructed right after the War for dockworkers and other labourers. From the 1970s onwards, families have moved out when they could afford better housing

5 Are you who you know? from: Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) Dahinden Janine
Abstract: The proverb ‘You are who you know’ is the title of a scientific article on social networks (Smith-Lovin & McPherson 1993) that concisely illustrates the worldview of network researchers. The basic premise of network analysts is that the social embeddedness of actors in a web of specific relationships says a lot about their position in society. In contrast to current approaches, especially in sociology, which concentrate primarily on examining certain categorical variables like age, gender or level of educational, network researchers do not regard social systems as a collection of isolated actors with certain characteristics. Their attention is instead directed towards

The Cinema of Attractions as Dispositif from: The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Kessler Frank
Abstract: Raymond Bellour once characterized Christian Metz’s Grande Syntagmatiqueas an “opérateur théorique,” a theoretical operator, because to him this widely discussed model of a cinematic code actualized the possibility of a semiotics of cinema “by bringing its virtualness onto a material level.”¹ In a similar, though obviously different manner, the concept of “cinema of attractions” has become such a theoretical operator by creating a framework thanks to which early cinema could be seen as an object different from classical narrative cinema, as something which was not justearlycinema, that is an earlier form of what cinema was to become,

A Cinema of Contemplation, A Cinema of Discernment: from: The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Musser Charles
Abstract: This present anthology confirms what has been obvious for some time: the turn of phrase “cinema of attractions” has captured the enthusiastic attention of the film studies community as well as a wide range of scholars working in visual culture. It has not only provided a powerful means of gaining insight into important aspects of early cinema but served as a gloss for those seeking a quick, up-to-date understanding of its cultural gestalt. In his many articles on the topic, Tom Gunning has counterposed the cinema of attractions to narrative, arguing that before 1903-04 or perhaps 1907-08, cinema has been

Chez le Photographe c’est chez moi: from: The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) McMahan Alison
Abstract: In the original formulation of the cinema of attractions theory, Tom Gunning and André Gaudreault conceived of the attractions phase as a mode of film practice discernible before the development of classical cinematic editing and narration. In Alice Guy Blaché, Lost Visionary of the CinemaI argued, building on work by Charles Musser,¹ that attractions represent only one possible approach to filmmaking in the earliest phase of cinema. Another approach, characterized by a sophisticated use of on- and off-screen space, was in full use at the same time – most notably in some of the earliest one-shot films produced at

The Hollywood Cobweb: from: The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Tomasovic Dick
Abstract: The metaphor is not new: the cinema, like a cobweb, traps the spectator’s gaze. This quasi-hypnotic preoccupation of the image rules nowadays contemporary Hollywood production, and more specifically what forms today a type of film as precise as large, the blockbuster. If the analysis of these extremely popular, very big budget entertainment films, produced in the heart of new intermediality, can be based mainly on questions of intertextuality,¹ it can also, far from any definitive definition, be fuelled by a rich and complex network of notions which carries along in its modern rush the term of attraction.

Early Cinema as a Challenge to Film History from: The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Gunning Tom
Abstract: In 1927, Boris Eichenbaum claimed for theory the right to become history.³ In 1969, in this very same room here in Cerisy, Gérard Genette affirmed it was more a necessity than a right: “a necessity,” he said, “that originates from the movement itself and from the needs of the theoretical work.”⁴ In his paper, Genette tried to explain why what he calls the “history of forms” took so long to establish itself. Along with a number of circumstantial factors, Genette stressed two causes that we would like to take into consideration. Let’s let him speak: “The first of these causes

Chapter 1 Capturing the Family: from: Shooting the Family
Author(s) van Dijck José
Abstract: Upon returning home from work, a colleague of mine was buoyantly greeted by his ten-year-old daughter. She begged him to fetch his camcorder and come to her room, where she was playing with two other girls – a karaoke of sorts in which they combined song and dance with typical kid’s fits of laughter and fun. “You need to tape us because when we’re famous they’ll show this on TV,” his daughter explained, with a sense of urgency. The two girls’ motivation for being filmed betrayed a sophisticated reflexivity of the camcorder as a tool for producing future memories. This awareness

Chapter 4 Family Portrait: from: Shooting the Family
Author(s) Kooijman Jaap
Abstract: The opening scene of François Ozon’s first feature film Sitcom (1998) shows a mansion in the sunny French countryside, the idyllic home of the bourgeois family. Arriving home from work, the father (François Marthouret) is greeted by his family singing “Joyeux Anniversaire”. Before the birthday song is over, the father shoots each family member dead. All the action takes place inside the home, outside of the audience’s view. Not until nearly the end of the film, after a long sequence of flashbacks explaining the events leading up to the killings, do we actually see the father shooting the family, with

Chapter 9 Archiving the (Secret) Family in Egoyan’s Family Viewing from: Shooting the Family
Author(s) Baronian Marie-Aude
Abstract: Atom Egoyan’s second feature film Family Viewing (1987) presents many different thematic issues and narrative devices, which the Canadian filmmaker has continued to elaborate on. The family always appears in his work; Egoyan always explores it, albeit in different terms, forms, and intensity, in relation to visual media. In this respect, a close reading of this particular film, relevantly entitled Family Viewing, will serve to display the relationship between “family” and “viewing” or, more specifically, between the Armenian family and the videographic medium. The relation between the two, as I will argue in this chapter, will be approached through the

Chapter 11 Unfamiliar Film: from: Shooting the Family
Author(s) Staat Wim
Abstract: This chapter will take its cue from the recent debate on the renewed attention being paid to political engagement in contemporary art. In a reaction to fragmentary, self-reflexive, self-involved art, Documenta 11(2002), the international contemporary art exhibition in Kassel,¹ has replaced “post-modern” art with political art from Latin America, Asia, and Africa.Documenta 11showed a special interest in the audiovisual arts, referring explicitly to Hamid Naficy’s work on “Accented Cinema”, i.e., exilic and diasporic filmmaking. However, according to theDocumenta 11curators and to Hamid Naficy, contemporary political art has not put politics back into art by making

Chapter 12 Micropolitics of the Migrant Family in Accented Cinema: from: Shooting the Family
Author(s) Pisters Patricia
Abstract: In their seminal work about contemporary transnational society, Empire,Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri give a special place to the body of the migrant.¹ Because the migrant refuses the local constraints of his human condition and searches for a new life and a new identity, he is positively labeled a “new barbarian” who opposes any form of normalization, one of which is the family. While Hardt and Negri are optimistic about the dissolution of the family through migration, Hamid Naficy seems more cautious in this respect. In his book on transnational migratory, exilic and diasporic cinema,An Accented Cinema, Naficy

Ficino, Diacceto and Michelangelo’s Presentation Drawings from: The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) van den Doel Marieke
Abstract: The Florentine philosopher Marsilio Ficino (1433-1499) was one of the first scholars who suggested that painting, which was generally regarded as a craft, should be included among the Liberal Arts. His main work, Platonic Theology(1482), compared his own time to a Golden Age that ‘has brought back to light the Liberal Arts which had almost been extinct: Grammar, Poetry, Rhetoric, Painting, Architecture, Music and the ancient art of singing to the Orphic Lyre’.² Ficino not only replaced logic with poetry in thetrivium, but formulated an almost completely newquadrivium, removing geometry, arithmetic and astronomy, in favor of painting

Transitional Texts and Emerging Linguistic Self-Awareness. from: The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) Mehtonen P.M.
Abstract: There is probably no post factumdisagreement about the claim that the so-called linguistic turn was a significant scientific event in the twentieth century. However, the pre-history of such a turn – the turn itself consisting of a host of simultaneous intellectual processes rather than an abrupt moment of revolution – is a vaguer and largely unwritten story.¹ This vagueness in itself may be challenging and a key to such slow processes that cannot easily be detected in scientific manifestos, axioms or groundbreaking innovations. One unmistakable element of the twentieth-century linguistic turn was a claim for the linguistic framework of

Book Title: The Children's Table-Childhood Studies and the Humanities
Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): DUANE ANNA MAE
Abstract: Like the occupants of the children's table at a family dinner, scholars working in childhood studies can seem sidelined from the "adult" labor of humanities scholarship. The Children's Table brings together scholars from architecture, philosophy, law, and literary and cultural criticism to provide an overview of the innovative work being done in childhood studies-a transcript of what is being said at the children's table. Together, these scholars argue for rethinking the academic seating arrangement in a way that acknowledges the centrality of childhood to the work of the humanities. The figure we now recognize as a child was created in tandem with forms of modernity that the Enlightenment generated and that the humanities are now working to rethink. Thus the growth of childhood studies allows for new approaches to some of the most important and provocative issues in humanities scholarship: the viability of the social contract, the definition of agency, the performance of identity, and the construction of gender, sexuality, and race. Because defining childhood is a means of defining and distributing power and obligation, studying childhood requires a radically altered approach to what constitutes knowledge about the human subject. The diverse essays in The Children's Table share a unifying premise: to include the child in any field of study realigns the shape of that field, changing the terms of inquiry and forcing a different set of questions. Taken as a whole, the essays argue that, at this key moment in the state of the humanities, rethinking the child is both necessary and revolutionary. Contributors: Annette Ruth Appell, Sophie Bell, Robin Bernstein, Sarah Chinn, Lesley Ginsberg, Lucia Hodgson, Susan Honeyman, Roy Kozlovsky, James Marten, Karen Sánchez-Eppler, Carol Singley, Lynne Vallone, John Wall.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46n4rv

[Part 1. Introduction] from: The Children's Table
Abstract: Childhood studies, a field designed to dismantle inaccurate and often destructive definitions of childhood, has yet to come up with a consensus on what we mean when we say “child” in the first place. If the child is socially constructed, as Philippe Ariès has argued, and as many of our contributors take as a given, how can we possibly hope to work through those constructions to extract an authentic person? As the conversation moves between the humanities and the social sciences, between archivists and activists, childhood studies struggles with the question of how to bridge the relationship between the rhetorical

[Part 2. Introduction] from: The Children's Table
Abstract: In his watershed work Discipline and Punish—a text that

“So Wicked”: from: The Children's Table
Author(s) Bell Sophie
Abstract: After decades of critical skepticism, studies of both sentimentalism and childhood are becoming thriving areas of scholarly inquiry and analysis. In Hildegard Hoeller’s recent assessment, the study of sentiment is “cooking on all burners,” having overcome a century of marginality in the American literary canon to become a nimbly theorized, richly interdisciplinary body of work.¹ Her review of new scholarship finds sentimentality finally treated “as a central concept in American culture, the very vehicle through which Americans imagined themselves and defined their identity as a family, class, race, gender, or nation.” Far from the masculine American literary canon’s shrinking girl

[Part 3. Introduction] from: The Children's Table
Abstract: This section occupies a fissure in childhood studies that the field is working to bridge between social constructionism—a central insight of childhood studies icon Philippe Ariès and a key tenet of humanities scholarship—and social science’s emphasis on biologically determined development. Our first two contributions by Sarah Chinn and Susan Honeyman pick up the theme of educational control ably introduced in section 2 and explore the work of disciplining children’s habits of love and attachment. They do so by focusing on heteronormative control over children’s gender and sexuality or, to be more precise, the social insistence that children cannot

Childhood as Performance from: The Children's Table
Author(s) Bernstein Robin
Abstract: The relationship between young people (“children”) and the cultural construct of “childhood” constitutes a central problem in the field of childhood studies.¹ Is childhood a category of historical analysis that produces and manages adult power, as Caroline Levander, Lee Edelman, Kathryn Bond Stockton, Jacqueline Rose, James Kincaid, Anne Higonnet, Carolyn Steedman, and many others have argued? Or do the complicated lives of young people constantly deconstruct and reconstruct the abstract idealizations of childhood, as is suggested by the work of Karin Calvert, Howard P. Chudacoff, and Steven Mintz, among others?² Literary scholars who study “the child” conjured in texts as

Book Title: Poetry as Survival- Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): ORR GREGORY
Abstract: Intended for general readers and for students and scholars of poetry, Poetry as Survival is a complex and lucid analysis of the powerful role poetry can play in confronting, surviving, and transcending pain and suffering. Gregory Orr draws from a generous array of sources. He weaves discussions of work by Keats, Dickinson, and Whitman with quotes from three-thousand-year-old Egyptian poems, Inuit songs, and Japanese love poems to show that writing personal lyric has helped poets throughout history to process emotional and experiential turmoil, from individual stress to collective grief. More specifically, he considers how the acts of writing, reading, and listening to lyric bring ordering powers to the chaos that surrounds us. Moving into more contemporary work, Orr looks at the poetry of Sylvia Plath, Stanley Kunitz, and Theodore Roethke, poets who relied on their own work to get through painful psychological experiences. As a poet who has experienced considerable trauma--especially as a child--Orr refers to the damaging experiences of his past and to the role poetry played in his ability to recover and survive. His personal narrative makes all the more poignant and vivid Orr's claims for lyric poetry's power as a tool for healing. Poetry as Survival is a memorable and inspiring introduction to lyric poetry's capacity to help us find safety and comfort in a threatening world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46nc68

CHAPTER SIX The Two Survivals from: Poetry as Survival
Abstract: Risk is involved when a lyric poet feels and expresses emotion or writes about a disturbing experience. An instability accompanies the project. But instability is built into the inner workings of our consciousness, and it is omnipresent in the external world also.

CHAPTER TWELVE Whitman and the Habit of Dazzle from: Poetry as Survival
Abstract: It might seem odd to include Walt Whitman (1819–1892) among my hero-poets who have transformed trauma into visions of human possibility, because Whitman is so insistently and ecstatically affirmative. Where is the trauma in his work? Indeed, the philosopher and psychologist William James muttered aloud skeptically that Whitman was almost pathologically “healthy-minded” and optimistic. Can such an exuberant poet actually fit our scheme?

From Southern Manhood to Southern Masculinities: from: Southern Masculinity
Author(s) Friend Craig Thompson
Abstract: In 1990, political columnist George F. Will assessed Georgia Senator Sam Nunn’s skepticism about President George H. W. Bush’s militaristic response to the Gulf crisis: “Nunn is a Southerner with that region’s regard for military values. Is he not a hawk? . . . The pedigree of Nunn’s statecraft runs back to [Georgia Senator Richard] Russell, and hence back, in a sense, 125 years. For most Americans today, the Civil War is a television series. For many Southerners, . . . the ‘lost cause’ is a lesson of perennial relevance: Things often do not work out well.” Between 1953 and

William Raoul’s Alternative Honor: from: Southern Masculinity
Author(s) Blankenship Steve
Abstract: When, in 1908, William Greene Raoul Jr. decided he would “travel about, hobo if necessary, and find out what was being done in the socialist and working class world,” he committed political and social apostasy and announced his voluntary descent down the ladder of the American hierarchy his father and grandfather had struggled to climb.¹ He lived at his father’s elaborate mansion on Atlanta’s Peachtree Street, reading Marx and giving lectures on working-class virility and the virtues of socialism at local theaters.² Raoul remembered, “What was I going to do? I certainly couldn’t live off my father and work for

Introduction from: The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) ARMBRUSTER KARLA
Abstract: On a september evening in eastern Nebraska, several hundred community residents gather at Spring Creek Prairie Audubon Center, a restored tallgrass prairie, for a “Twilight on the Tallgrass” celebration. As people wander the trails, they encounter stations where they learn about native insects, birds, wildflowers, and medicinal plants. At one station, local writers read from their prairie-inspired work. Nearby, a Winnebago tribe dance troupe gets into costume for a performance of traditional pow-wow dances. Outside the visitors’ center, a local astronomy club sets up telescopes they will later use to show visitors a close-up of the night sky.

The Poetics of Water: from: The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) WRIGLESWORTH CHAD
Abstract: Since 1902, western watersheds in the United States have been managed by the Bureau of Reclamation, an extension of the U.S. Department of Interior that was established to ensure the equitable distribution of water for purposes of settlement, irrigation, and hydroelectric production in seventeen arid and semiarid states. During the 1930s, federal engineers identified the Columbia River Basin as a latent powerhouse and planned to put it to work with hydroelectric dams made to serve regional and national interests. Franklin Delano Roosevelt’s New Deal supported the Columbia Basin Project (1933), which was followed by the Reclamation Project Act (1939), and

With a Vision beyond Our Immediate Needs: from: When Our Words Return
Author(s) Mather Elsie
Abstract: In the early 1970s when bilingual schools started in the Bethel area, I was hired by what was then the Alaska State-Operated Schools to teach a bilingual kindergarten class. In the late 1970s, I worked at the Kuskokwim Community College as a language specialist and also did some part-time teaching in Yupʹik

Seeing Wisely, Crying Wolf: from: When Our Words Return
Author(s) Barker Robin
Abstract: What follows is a description of the evolution in my own thinking about a Yupʹik tale known as ʺHow Crane Got His Blue Eyes.ʺ The tale is popularly used throughout Alaska in elementary classrooms; it is presented simply, without much thought about the complexities of investigating its meaning. As an educator who worked in the Yupʹik region for twelve years, I have come to recognize that folklore must be treated in ways that take these complexities into account. Overcoming linguistic and cultural bias is not easy, however. For example, my own first interpretations of the story were strongly influenced by

Epilogue from: When Our Words Return
Abstract: We offer this book with both humility and a sense of accomplishment. We feel a bit like a young girl who has completed her first basket or a boy who has killed his first game. Like them, we are pleased; we see our work as a significant start, and we are indebted to the traditions of our forebears as well as offering an original and unique contribution to that tradition. We sense that if we really want to understand oral tradition and contribute meaningfully to the dialogue which is well under way elsewhere, we must expand our audience, and we

3 Archaeology and the Colorado Coalfield War from: The Archaeology of Class War
Author(s) LARKIN KARIN
Abstract: The Colorado Coalfield War Archaeology Project (CCWAP) strove to complement the written history of the 1913–1914 labor strike in southern Colorado. While the written history provides a thorough description of the events and their larger implications, it does not paint a complete picture of how the events affected the daily lives of the men, women, and children who experienced them. Further, it cannot show the living conditions that led up to the strike or illustrate the strike’s effect on the material conditions of the workers and their families. Such is the nature of history. The archaeology of the CCWAP

5 From Shacks to Shanties: from: The Archaeology of Class War
Author(s) CHICONE SARAH J.
Abstract: The Ludlow Massacre thrust the brutalities of labor conflict and the realities of working-class poverty into the American consciousness. The well-publicized reforms that followed the strike successfully focused national attention on “improvements” made to miners’ lives and the new relationship forged between management and labor in the early twentieth century but did little to change the lived experience of southern Colorado coal miners.

8 “Thou Shalt Not Dose Thyself”: from: The Archaeology of Class War
Author(s) HORN CLAIRE H.
Abstract: In 1913 the coal miners of southern Colorado drew up a list of seven demands to be presented by their union, the United Mine Workers of America (UMWA), to the mining companies. The sixth of the seven demands encompassed the frustration miners and their families felt over their employers’ intrusion into all aspects of home life—a lack of choice in where to live, where to shop, and where to obtain medical services. While early–twentieth-century mining companies had an interest in keeping workers relatively satisfied, the deskilling of the work and a ready force of new immigrants made workers

10 Archaeology and Workers’ Memory from: The Archaeology of Class War
Author(s) WALKER MARK
Abstract: The Ludlow Project is an explicitly political project, an attempt to fuse scholarly labor with working-class interests (Ludlow Collective 2001:95). The goal of working with union members and organized labor, an audience outside the traditional realm of archaeology, confronts us with a history little studied by archaeologists and little taught within general historical education. The Ludlow Massacre, like many historical episodes, is a silenced history, written out to the margins of national history. The Ludlow Massacre helped change the lives of working-class people throughout the United States, so its absence in official history, and the absence of events like it,

12 Why We Dig: from: The Archaeology of Class War
Author(s) SAITTA DEAN
Abstract: From its inception, the Colorado Coalfield War Archaeology Project was committed to developing a serious and focused public outreach component. We hoped we could go beyond the public lecture and other traditional forms of information sharing—important though these outlets are—to involving the public actively in our work and to a continuing conversation about its relevance to local and wider communities. We were fortunate to have archaeology as a medium to engage the public in a dialogue about Ludlow, labor wars, and class struggle. Archaeology is popular at many levels of society, as evidenced by the number of local

INTRODUCTION from: The Sacredness of the Person
Abstract: This book deals with the history of human rights and the problem of their justification. But it provides neither a comprehensive intellectual or legal history nor a new philosophical justification for the idea of universal human dignity and the human rights based upon it. Anyone harboring such expectations will be disappointed. This is not for essentially trivial reasons, such as the fact that—despite all the impressive preparatory work that has been done—further in-depth research is needed for any comprehensive history of human rights. Nor is it because any of the existing philosophical justifications, those put forward by Kant,

Book Title: Marrow of Human Experience, The-Essays on Folklore by William A. Wilson
Publisher: Utah State University Press
Author(s): Call Diane
Abstract: As a body, Wilson's essays develop related topics and connected themes. This collection organizes them in three coherent parts. The first examines the importance of folklore-what it is and its value in various contexts. Part two, drawing especially on the experience of Finland, considers the role of folklore in national identity, including both how it helps define and sustain identity and the less savory ways it may be used for the sake of nationalistic ideology. Part three, based in large part on Wilson's extensive work in Mormon folklore, which is the most important in that area since that of Austin and Alta Fife, looks at religious cultural expressions and outsider perceptions of them and, again, at how identity is shaped, by religious belief, experience, and participation; by the stories about them; and by the many other expressive parts of life encountered daily in a culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt4cgkmk

Herder, Folklore, and Romantic Nationalism from: Marrow of Human Experience, The
Abstract: When I studied folklore at Indiana University in the early 1960s, Johann Gottfried Herder did not figure at all in the curriculum on the intellectual history of folklore. Constrained by the ideologies of disciplinarity, my teachers dated the history of the field to the nineteenth-century founders of the systematic, “scientific” folklore (the Brothers Grimm, William John Thoms, Julius and Kaarle Krohn, Sven Grundtvig, Francis James Child, E. B. Tylor), with a predisposition toward the Nordic and German scholars who systematized the philological method or to the British scholars who had the good taste to write in English. Earlier works that

The Study of Mormon Folklore: from: Marrow of Human Experience, The
Abstract: Although my associations with Bert Wilson have a timeless quality, I know that our friendship was greatly deepened by the opportunity for long talks as we participated in the Fife Folklore Conference at Utah State University in 1979. Bert, his scholarly work, and our long conversations that summer are a part of who I am and how I try to think about folklore, especially the religious and spiritual dimensions of the topic that so interest both of us.

“Teach Me All That I Must Do”: from: Marrow of Human Experience, The
Abstract: I first discovered “‘Teach Me All That I Must Do’” not at the 1998 AFS meeting in Portland where it was initially presented, but rather sitting in Bert Wilson’s home office.¹ As a folklore graduate student at Brigham Young University, I was writing my thesis on reflexivity and the insider voice in Mormon folklore scholarship. Although Bert was retired and had no obligation to participate in yet another MA thesis, he generously agreed to help me with a chapter on his contribution to the field and shared with me several of his unpublished works, including this article.

An initiation into ICT professionalism from: Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Abstract: The previous section emphasised problems in adequately regulating new technologies, particularly in the information and communications technology (ICT) industry, and the demands that this places on ICT practitioners to behave professionally. The three papers in this section are all based on the industry experiences of ICT practitioners and contain important reflections on the industry. As such, they are not typical academic papers. Rather, they give insights into how a number of thoughtful practitioners view their work and professionalism in the industry. In many occupations a common way of learning, or being initiated into that occupation, is through apprenticeship or an

4. The uncertainty of ethics in IT from: Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Haughey Mark
Abstract: This paper² focuses on ethical issues that are unique to Information Technology (IT) practice, not ʹethics in the workplaceʹ issues or ʹsales ethicsʹ issues. These latter areas, while very relevant to IT (for example monitoring the workplace or promoting a product), are generic and existed before IT. As a discipline or profession, IT derives from engineering to a degree (the common job title of hardware engineer or the software engineering concept) and, therefore, some of the ethical issues faced by engineering will translate to IT. This is particularly the case with the development of projects and there will be many

9. Virtuous IT governance: from: Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Lucas Richard
Abstract: Why should this be so? Well it turns out that the problem is not with IT governance as such, but in being able to measure governance efforts within a virtuous framework. To be virtuous there must be an ideal against which governance efforts can be measured. I will now shift my discussion from governance particularly to professionalism generally. I do this

11. Educating for professionalism in ICT: from: Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Wilkinson Kim
Abstract: The ACS Computer Professional Education (CPe) Program is constructed on the established Skills Framework for the Information Age (SFIA, 2008a) plus an additional skill set labelled Professionalism.

Book Title: Philosophy of Communication- Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Butchart Garnet C.
Abstract: To philosophize is to communicate philosophically. From its inception, philosophy has communicated forcefully. Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle talk a lot, and talk ardently. Because philosophy and communication have belonged together from the beginning--and because philosophy comes into its own and solidifies its stance through communication--it is logical that we subject communication to philosophical investigation. This collection of key works of classical, modern, and contemporary philosophers brings communication back into philosophy's orbit. It is the first anthology to gather in a single volume foundational works that address the core questions, concepts, and problems of communication in philosophical terms. The editors have chosen thirty-two selections from the work of Plato, Leibniz, Hegel, Husserl, Heidegger, Wittgenstein, Benjamin, Lacan, Derrida, Sloterdijk, and others. They have organized these texts thematically, rather than historically, in seven sections: consciousness; intersubjective understanding; language; writing and context; difference and subjectivity; gift and exchange; and communicability and community. Taken together, these texts not only lay the foundation for establishing communication as a distinct philosophical topic but also provide an outline of what philosophy of communication might look like.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhcqm

14 The Subject and Power from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Foucault Michel
Abstract: My objective, instead, has been to create a history of the different modes by which, in our culture, human beings are made subjects. My work has dealt with three modes of objectification, which transform human beings into subjects.

28 Something Like: from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Lyotard Jean-Francois
Abstract: No work of art should be described or explained through the categories of communication.

31 Becoming-Media: from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Vogl Joseph
Abstract: Mediummeans middle and in the middle, mediation and mediator; it calls for a closer questioning of the role, workings, and materials of this “in-between.” Media studies’ field of inquiry is quite rightly a broad one, stretching from prehistoric registers of the tides and stars to the ubiquitous contemporary mass media, encompassing physical transmitters (such as air and light), as well as schemes of notation, whether hieroglyphic, phonetic, or alphanumeric. It includes technologies and artifacts like electrification, the telescope, or the gramophone alongside symbolic forms and spatial representations such as perspective, theater, or literature as a whole. However, the very

Book Title: Dictionary of Untranslatables-A Philosophical Lexicon
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wood Michael
Abstract: Originally published in French, this one-of-a-kind reference work is now available in English for the first time, with new contributions from Judith Butler, Daniel Heller-Roazen, Ben Kafka, Kevin McLaughlin, Kenneth Reinhard, Stella Sandford, Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, Jane Tylus, Anthony Vidler, Susan Wolfson, Robert J. C. Young, and many more.The result is an invaluable reference for students, scholars, and general readers interested in the multilingual lives of some of our most influential words and ideas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhntn

Book Title: Translating Childhoods-Immigrant Youth, Language, and Culture
Publisher: Rutgers University Press
Author(s): ORELLANA MARJORIE FAULSTICH
Abstract: Though the dynamics of immigrant family life has gained attention from scholars, little is known about the younger generation, often considered "invisible." Translating Childhoods, a unique contribution to the study of immigrant youth, brings children to the forefront by exploring the "work" they perform as language and culture brokers, and the impact of this largely unseen contribution.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hj1hn

Introduction from: Translating Childhoods
Abstract: For more than a decade, I have been documenting the work that the children of immigrants do as they use their skills in two languages to read, write, listen, speak, and do things for their families.¹ I refer to a practice that has variously been called Natural Translation, family interpreting, language brokering, and para-phrasing–terms I discuss further in chapter 1. Placing phone calls, taking and leaving messages, scheduling appointments, filling out credit card applications, negotiating sales purchases, soliciting social services, and communicating for their parents with teachers, medical personnel, and other authority figures are part of everyday life for

Chapter 1 Translating Frames from: Translating Childhoods
Abstract: At ten years old Estela was considered by her mother to be “the right hand” of the family. Estela used her knowledge of English to make and answer phone calls, schedule appointments, sort and decipher the daily mail, fill out forms, apply for credit, help her younger sister with homework, and read stories-in-translation to her youngest siblings. She also helped with general household tasks: washing dishes, vacuuming, and making purchases at the corner store. Like Jessica, the girl who drew a map to record her daily life translations, this seemed for the most part “just normal” to Estela, as it

Chapter 4 Public Para-Phrasing from: Translating Childhoods
Abstract: Like home-based translation work, public para-phrasing involved a myriad of activities involving an array of institutional domains, set in distinct relationships, and directed toward assorted problems. Children developed and used a wide array of what Luis Moll calls “funds of knowledge,”¹ as they engaged in tasks that ranged from relatively simple things such as asking where items were located in a store or for directions on the street to much more complex negotiations with doctors, lawyers, and social service providers. Translations were provided mostly for family members, as when children read signs, labels, maps, and directions; often, publicpara-phrasing acts

Chapter 5 Transculturations from: Translating Childhoods
Abstract: Because parent-teacher conferences offer particularly rich insights into the complexities of child language brokering on social, psychological, cultural, cognitive, and linguistic dimensions, I examine this activity setting in detail. The transactions also reveal adults’ assumptions about children and childhood, learning and development, and suggest how these beliefs influence children’s pathways.¹ They illuminate some challenges that interpreters face when they engage in interactions that would normally involve only two people. Cecilia Wadensjö,² in her extension of Erving Goffman’s concepts of participant frameworks,³ points out that the presence of translators makes dyadic exchanges into multiparty ones, but participants often continue to act

Chapter 6 Transformations from: Translating Childhoods
Abstract: “Marjorie!” I looked up from my lunch in this restaurant frequented by university faculty on this first day of a return visit to the Midwest, startled to see “Nova” standing straight and tall in a waiter’s white pressed shirt and red tie, looking and sounding professional, confident, mature, and at home in this position and setting. After I registered my surprise to see him here, Nova told me of his activities: working as a waiter; designing web pages for cyberspace clients who paid for his services (with a business partner from Mexico); playing on the volleyball team (despite his father’s

Chapter 7 Translating Childhoods from: Translating Childhoods
Abstract: There are many ways to understand children’s work as translators and interpreters for their families. We can focus on the burdens it sometimes places on youth and on how stress affects children’s growth and development. Turning this perspective around, we can highlight the cognitive, social, emotional, and linguistic benefits these experiences may offer to youth. We can either reject children’s involvement as a form of youth exploitation or applaud youths’ contributions to homes, schools, communities and society. We can talk about character formation, skills acquisition, and the pathways that are opened or closed through engagement in these activities, or we

Talking Back from: Theorizing Scriptures
Abstract: These essays provoke our thinking about what “scriptures” are, why they are invented, the work we make them do for us. Whatever else scriptures may be made to be for us, whatever else they may be made to do for us, we seem to make them a centering force.¹ We allow them to locate us, help define us, orient us—always, of course, in obvious relationships to some circle or framework. This means that no matter the passionate rhetorical claims and arguments, no matter the long-standing and widely held assumptions, no matter the entrenched practices and rituals in relationship to

23 Scriptures Without Letters, Subversions of Pictography, Signifyin(g) Alphabetical Writing from: Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) RABASA JOSÉ
Abstract: I seek to respond to—or better, expand—on a certain critique of subaltern studies.¹ Instead of working with assumptions that subalterns embody a revolutionary consciousness, subalterns

4 Oskar Rosenfeld and Historiographic Realism from: After Representation?
Author(s) LANG BEREL
Abstract: There is nothing startling by now in the claim of a role for style in writing (or reading) history, but most working historians would probably still vote against it, the more so if the claim included Hayden White’s conception of historical discourse as based on emplotments shaped by literary figuration or tropes. Votes, however, are not arguments, and the case that White presented in Metahistoryfor historiography as a form of writing causally intertwined with the traditional projects of historical explanation and/or a search for theeigentlichhas survived the many attacks directed against it.¹ This conclusion holds, I believe,

5 Nazi Aesthetics in Historical Context from: After Representation?
Author(s) YOUNG JAMES E.
Abstract: As is clear from the abundant literary and historical study of the victims’ diaries and memoirs, it is impossible to separate what might be called these works’ “aesthetic logic” from the victims’ very real historical and practical understanding of events as they unfolded. That is, the victims’ responses to contemporaneous events in the ghettos and camps were often shaped by how they may have literarily cast similar events the day before in letters, diaries, or chronicles. As the best new historical work on the Holocaust also makes clear, we can no longer divorce the Nazi-perpetrators’ representations of their victims from

8 The Holocaust and the Economy of Memory, from Bellow to Morrison from: After Representation?
Author(s) SPARGO R. CLIFTON
Abstract: “In this century, so agonizing to the Jews,” wrote Saul Bellow in his introduction to the 1963 volume Great Jewish Short Stories, many people thought it wrong to insist as he did “on maintaining the distinction between public relations and art.” Defending his preference for stories by a young Philip Roth, several of which treated Jews unpleasantly, over documentary work such as Leon Uris’s 1959 best sellerExodus, Bellow briefly considered whether “survivors of Hitler’s terror in Europe and Israel” might deserve only good publicity from writers, before rejecting the notion on literary grounds. “In literature we cannot accept a

11 Theorizing the Perpetrator in Bernhard Schlinkʹs The Reader and Martin Amisʹs Timeʹs Arrow from: After Representation?
Author(s) McGLOTHLIN ERIN
Abstract: Since Theodor W. Adorno’s original dictum in 1949 about the supposed barbarity of writing poetry “after Auschwitz,” debates over the ethics of literary representation of the Holocaust have revolved around the problems inherent in depicting, in particular, the suffering of the victims and survivors. Adorno later linked his misgivings about poetry after the Holocaust to his objection to the aesthetic pleasure the reader (or spectator) experiences upon contemplating works of art that portray physical suffering: “the so-called artistic representation of the sheer physical pain of people being beaten to the ground by rifle-butts contains, however remotely, the power to elicit

Book Title: Thinking About Dementia-Culture, Loss, and the Anthropology of Senility
Publisher: Rutgers University Press
Author(s): COHEN LAWRENCE
Abstract: Bringing together essays by nineteen respected scholars, this volume approaches dementia from a variety of angles, exploring its historical, psychological, and philosophical implications. The authors employ a cross-cultural perspective that is based on ethnographic fieldwork and focuses on questions of age, mind, voice, self, loss, temporality, memory, and affect.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjbhp

1 Dementia-Near-Death and “Life Itself” from: Thinking About Dementia
Author(s) KAUFMAN SHARON R.
Abstract: This chapter is about the cultural work that dementia does, the sociomedical uses to which it is put in the American hospital at the end of life. I suggest that dementia works there in three ways: as a rationale for facilitating death, as a contested feature of what matters about the patient’s identity, and as a moralclinical designation of value when a frail life is perceived to hang in the balance. In performing this multiplex work, dementia makes manifest one aspect of the ethics and politics of life itself in the negotiations it elicits about “quality of life,” “loss of

8 Creative Storytelling and Self-Expression among People with Dementia from: Thinking About Dementia
Author(s) BASTING ANNE DAVIS
Abstract: When memory fades and one’s grasp on the factual building blocks of one’s life loosens, what remains? Is a person still capable of growth and creative expression even when dementia strikes? To answer these questions, I relay the story of the Time SlipsProject, a research and public-arts storytelling project aimed at nurturing creative expression among people with Alzheimer’s disease and related dementia (ADRD) and at sharing the stories that emerged in TimeSlipsworkshops with the public at large to increase awareness of the creative potential of people with ADRD. I will (1) outline the storytelling method and my study of

The KJV and the Rapid Growth of English in the Elizabethan-Jacobean Era from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Lerer Seth
Abstract: The period from 1500 to 1650 saw the largest documented increase in the English vocabulary since the Norman Conquest.¹ It has been estimated that about 70 percent of our current, working lexicon comes from words borrowed from outside the language, and the overwhelming bulk of these words entered learned and common parlance in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries. Such words, too, were not simply lifted wholesale from other tongues. They were coined out of the raw material of classical example: inkhorn terms, aureate diction, denotations for scientific and technical material—all of these came to increase the vocabulary of the

The Influence of the KJV in Protestant Chinese Bible Translation Work from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Peng Kuo-Wei
Abstract: The history of Protestant Chinese Bible translation is a long and complex one, 1 and therefore the role of the KJV in Protestant Chinese Bible translation needs to be discussed stage by stage. The first stage begins with the translation work of the first Protestant missionaries; the second stage begins with the first (ultimately unsuccessful) attempt at a Chinese Union Version; the third stage is an era of a plethora of Chinese Bible translations; and the last stage I wish to discuss starts with the translation process that led to the completion of a Union Version.

The Word and the Words: from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Guite Malcolm
Abstract: The aim of this paper is to explore a little of the theological framework that lies behind the effort of translation and also to show the way in which the act of translation itself became a key theological metaphor, a way of understanding and unpacking the truth that the translators believed was at the heart of the words with which they were working. In particular I want to look at what Lancelot Andrewes, whose name headed the list of translators, was thinking and saying about translation in the midst of his work on the KJV, and also at the way

The KJV in Orthodox Perspective from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Crisp Simon
Abstract: A possible framework for this study is provided by the following question: What kind of influence of the King James Bible could we expect in the Orthodox world? Given that the majority of Orthodox Christians are familiar with the Scriptures in Greek or Slavonic, we might imagine that any influence would be either slight or nonexistent.

“A New Garb for the Jewish Soul”: from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Seidman Naomi
Abstract: In a field as well trodden as that of Bible translation, a would-be translator has two curiously dissimilar tasks. On the one hand, Bible translators at least since Jerome have insisted on the importance of “going back to the original text,” of coming closer to this original than previous efforts had succeeded in doing. On the other hand, new translations, particularly in the modern period, also aspire to differentiate themselves from their precursors who have worked in the same language, to gain the sort of status that accrues to new translations and is justly withheld from mere revisions.¹ Proximity and

The Master Copy: from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Sugirtharajah R. S.
Abstract: On the Richter scale of English national affection, the King James Version is way at the top, like the late Queen Mother. The lovers of the King James Version often lapse into quasi-spiritual terminology when extolling its virtues and achievements. Listen to the words of William Canton, the passionate historian of the British and Foreign Bible Society: “The blind had a new world opened to them. Hospitals were supplied with small volumes suitable for the sick-wards, and many a little book was afterwards found under the pillow of the dead. In prisons, penitentiaries, workhouses, the Bible wrought wonders.”⁴ Those of

Introduction from: Fragile Dignity
Author(s) Spronk Klaas
Abstract: In her book Frames of War, Judith Butler reminds us of a reality we know all too well: human beings are vulnerable, prone to injury, disease, and death. From the moment we are born, our survival depends on what Butler calls “a social network of hands” (Butler 2009, 14–16). Most of us are born into families that provide a child care not only to survive, but also to thrive. Family thus serves as the space that protects life. However, in many instances today, the family has unfortunately become the space in which human life is prevented from flourishing.

Family and its Discontents: from: Fragile Dignity
Author(s) Anderson Cheryl B.
Abstract: Even at first reading, the articles by Schaafsma and Mulder work well together. Schaafsma’s article acknowledges that the human dignity of individual family members may be compromised in the family itself—a problem that Dan Browning’s work seeks to address. In turn, Mulder’s article develops theological constructs to counter the low self-esteem of battered women. By discussing domestic abuse, Mulder effectively offers one example of how the human dignity of an individual family member can be undermined, just as Schaafsma notes.

Foreword from: Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Author(s) Rhoads David
Abstract: It is difficult to overestimate the significance of the work of Werner Kelber for biblical studies. His groundbreaking 1983 monograph, The Oral and the Written Gospel, challenged the core foundations of biblical scholarship by offering a paradigm shift of sweeping proportions. Over the last three decades he has affirmed, revised, refined, and expanded his work in conversation with others who work in the same field and who are interacting with his scholarchip. The articles and papers arranged in chronological order in this volume chart that pioneering course. Every essay makes an original contribution, even when Kelber is reviewing the work

Introduction from: Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: The essays collected in this volume and arranged in the chronological order of their composition were published between 1985 and 2011, spanning a period of over a quarter of a century. All the pieces have previously been published, and all have been reworked and edited. To enhance readability, to facilitate cross-referencing, and to improve the coherence of the whole, the sixteen chapters have been subdivided into sense units and numbered across the volume. All essays have been written after the publication of my earlier study The Oral and the Written Gospel(1983). They take their starting point from that book

11 The Works of Memory: from: Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: In the human and social sciences, the modern academic study of memory is generally acknowledged to have been initiated by the sociologist Maurice Halbwachs (1925; 1992). Virtually effaced from scholarly consciousness, he received academic acceptance only decades following his death in Buchenwald. His omnipresence in current memory studies owes much to the work of Jan Assmann, himself the author of a classic work on memory theory. In part dependent on Halbwachs and in part quite separately, memory has recently emerged as a pivotal concept in cultural studies and as a principal topic of research in the humanities and social sciences.

12 Orality and Biblical Scholarship: from: Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: In keeping with developments in the human and social sciences, we have for some time now experienced a recovery and reconsideration of the oral factor in biblical studies. Negatively speaking what is at stake is a challenge to what Foley has called “the textualist bias of our scholarship, with its easy assimilation of all forms of verbal art to the literary-textual model” (1995, 87). This text-centered perspective has involved a sense of textual autonomy, textualization as an end in itself, texts’ localization in intertextual networks, and a dominantly textual hermeneutics—all notions closely allied with the historical and literary paradigm.

13 Memory and Violence, or: from: Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: Three interrelated features may be said to characterize the work of Edith Wyschogrod. There is first an interdisciplinary drive to rise above institutionally sanctioned boundaries and to retrieve intellectual categories from their disciplinary captivity so as to reconfigure them in novel contexts. It is this desire and the ability to bring widely differing genres, discourses, and traditionally separate intellectual orbits into productive coalitions that has increasingly distinguished her writings. This interfacing of philosophy and theology, psychoanalysis and science, literary criticism and linguistics, architecture and the arts, media studies and above all ethics is carried off with a high degree of

14 The Work of Birger Gerhardsson in Perspective (2009) from: Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: The status of New Testament studies at the outset of the twenty-first century is impressively different from what it was in the late 1950s and early 1960s, when Gerhardsson wrote Memory and Manuscript(1961; repr. 1998). However, humanistic scholarship, including biblical studies, is ill perceived as steady growth and systematic advances in knowledge in the sense that it would allow us to simply slough off all academic work of the past as irrelevant and dead matter. To say that biblical scholarship does not conduct itself as an upward spiral toward ever-greater enlightenment but rather as a complex interfacing of present

15 The History of the Closure of Biblical Texts (2010) from: Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: Writing and print, as well as electronic devices, Ong has proposed, are technologies that produce effects in the sensible world outside us but also affect the way our minds work (1992a). Handwriting slowly undermined and partially replaced a predominantly oral lifeworld, print drastically altered all major aspects of Western civilization, and the electronic medium is well on the way to ushering in a transformation of global dimensions. These are external changes, well known and plainly in view, especially at epochal threshold events such as the alphabetic revolution in ancient Greece around 700 b.c.e. (Havelock 1981), or the fifteenth-century shift from

Chapter 1 Processes of Creative Syncretism: from: Political Creativity
Author(s) Galvan Dennis C.
Abstract: In this chapter, we argue that the origins of both institutional order and change lie in human creativity. In a previous article, we looked at institutions from the inside out.¹ From that perspective, we showed how people experience institutional rules as bundles of resources available for creative reinterpretation and recombination. We called this process “creative syncretism” and conjectured that it produced institutional order and change simultaneously. In this work, we unpack creative syncretism by conceptualizing the interplay among creative projects undertaken by the powerful and the weak in the name of both seat-of-the-pants problem solving and grand institutional engineering. To

Chapter 2 Ecological Explanation from: Political Creativity
Author(s) Ansell Chris
Abstract: If, as this volume suggests, reigning theories of institutions have difficulty in explaining institutional change, then new insights might come from howwe explain things in the social sciences. From that starting point, thisessayexplores a style of explanation only dimly perceived as a distinctive form—ecological explanation. Although ecological explanation has important and long-standing roots in the social sciences—reaching back at least to the work of the Chicago school of sociology—it is presently much better known as a strategy for explaining the natural world.¹ Natural ecologists adopt a variety of specific explanatory techniques, but are broadly

Chapter 3 Governance Architectures for Learning and Self-Recomposition in Chinese Industrial Upgrading from: Political Creativity
Author(s) Voskamp Ulrich
Abstract: For most of its post-1992 rapid industrialization, Chinese manufacturing excelled in global markets as a platform for high-volume and low-cost, export-oriented production.¹ Since China’s accession to the World Trade Organization in 2001, however, the fruits of rapid industrialization have been creating home market conditions for very different manufacturing strategies. Successful export-led industrialization has created more sophisticated domestic Chinese demand for a broad array of manufactured goods. In an effort to capture this emergent demand, Chinese producers are shifting their focus toward more advanced production and away from what was traditionally needed (or possible) within the framework of export processing relationships.

Chapter 8 The Fluidity of Labor Politics in Postcommunist Transitions: from: Political Creativity
Author(s) Sil Rudra
Abstract: Images of disaffected workers rising up against communist regimes—most evident in the case of the Solidarity-led movement in Poland and the 1989 miners’ strikes in the Soviet Union—initially spawned hopes that unions could spearhead the emergence of civil society throughout the postcommunist world. Within a decade after the fall of communism, however, a much bleaker picture emerged: “Not only have unions not experienced a rebirth—on the contrary, they have seen a drop in membership—but they have been largely unable to create for themselves a pronounced political role to allow them to shape the postcommunist transformation.”¹ Labor

Chapter 11 Interest in the Absence of Articulation: from: Political Creativity
Author(s) Harrold Deborah
Abstract: Several authoritarian regimes in the Middle East and North Africa were taken down in 2011, but this wave of challenges to strong states missed Algeria. In Algeria, large demonstrations in January 2011 and new efforts at political mobilization were overwhelmed by state security and could not continue. What Algeria lacked were the alliances built in other nations. Algeria’s civil war (1993–2000) left deep rifts and mistrust between groups.¹ Profound dissatisfaction with the state and desire for change could not take the place of the political work, underground or in open, of bridging interests and shaping alliances among democratic forces,

Conclusion: from: Political Creativity
Abstract: We hope this book fosters work on political creativity, enlarging it from a residual explanation into a research program. In that spirit, we conclude with two ventures. First, we contrast notions of agency, order, and change with those of relationality, assemblage, and time to underscore what difference it makes to analyze political phenomena through the lens of political creativity rather than through a dualist framework in which structure and agency are kept apart. Although the pairing of two sets of concepts does not fully capture the rich and wide-ranging scholarship in this volume, we find it a useful heuristic to

Book Title: How Does Social Science Work?-Reflections on Practice
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): DIESING PAUL
Abstract: At once an analysis, a critique, and a synthesis, this major study begins by surveying philosophical approaches to hermeneutics, to examine the question of how social science ought to work. It illustrates many of its arguments with untraditional examples, such as the reception of the work of the political biographer Robert Caro to show the hermeneutical problems of ethnographers. The major part of the book surveys sociological, political, and psychological studies of social science to get a rounded picture of how social science works,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjpmm

3 Kuhn and Stegmüller from: How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: KUHN’S THEORY of scientific revolutions swept through the social sciences in the early 1970s with enormous effect. One theorist after another announced that the social sciences were in crisis, that the old paradigm was collapsing under the weight of its anomalies, and that the new paradigm had just appeared. If we are to believe all these announcements, the social sciences experienced a revolution every six months, on the average, in those years. In each case, all the social sciences were included in the old paradigm except for a few anticipations and predecessors of the theorist making the announcement. His work,

5 Hermeneutics: from: How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: HERMENEUTIC PHILOSOPHIES and traditions have existed for centuries, flourishing especially in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries in Germany and other parts of continental Europe. They were concerned originally with understanding the Bible and other sacred texts, and with the interpretation of Roman law, which ruled parts of the Continent as late as the nineteenth century. But by extension all sorts of other texts could be subjected to hermeneutic techniques: the works of Plato and Aristotle, commentaries on the Bible and the Talmud, poetry and drama, myths and legends.

6 Macrosociology of Social Science from: How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: THE MODERN macrosociology of science begins with the work of Robert Merton in the 1930s. The evidence for the above statement consists of citation counts of journal articles (Cole and Zuckerman, 1975), reports of informants (Storer, 1973, esp. p. xi), and acknowledgments and tracing of ideas in leading works such as Hagstrom (1965). Many sociologists of science since 1960 were Merton’s students or students of students (Cole and Zuckerman, 1975, p. 155), and others took up and developed some of his ideas, for instance, Blissett (1972) and Mitroff (1974a). When the Society for Social Studies of Science (4S) was founded

7 Microsociology of Social Science from: How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: IT IS TIME once again to give chaos its due, and as always bring some order to it. The Mertonian scientific community was unified by shared norms and countemorms which enabled scientists to work together and achieve a shared truth. But Merton’s critics such as Michael Mulkay and Randall Collins have maintained that these norms are fictions that scientists have invented as part of their struggle for professional prestige and foundation grants. Scientists are not disinterested, not self-skeptical, and certainly not humble, the critics assert; they push their own ideas dogmatically and persistently. They do not judge others’ ideas on

10 Personality Influences in Social Science from: How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: DO SOCIAL SCIENTISTS’ personalities find expression in their work? Yes, they do. Personality effects are a class of experimenter effects, and appear in all methods involving direct contact with people-experimentation, interviewing, survey research, clinical research, and ethnography (Rosenthal, 1966). “Experimenters who differ in anxiety, need for approval, hostility, authoritarianism, status, and warmth tend to obtain different responses from their experimental subjects” (Rosenthal, 1983, p. 91).

12 Problems and Dangers on the Road of Knowledge from: How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: IN THIS CHAPTER we derive further answers to our basic questions from the materials of part II. We will focus on the second and third questions posed at the opening of chapter 11: (2) How do research programs or traditions develop knowledge; (3) What difficulties come up in this process and how can they be remedied? Under question 3, the philosophers have left two unanswered questions for us. One is a problem derived from Lakatos: there seems to be no rational basis for choosing to work in a particular research program or programs. By this we mean rational for the

3 Thickening Ambiguity from: Dancing Identity
Abstract: If existence is indeterminate, open-ended and not predictable, then we dance as unfinished metaphysical artifacts in much the same way as phenomenology and evolutionary science explain how life is ongoing. We are works in progress, in other words, and like works of art we live between content and process. Our living metaphysical reality does not mount to heaven, but spreads into our everyday dances—of auspicious being and indeterminate becoming.

4 Anti-Essentialist Trio from: Dancing Identity
Abstract: Through Simone de Beauvoir, I understand how biology, ontology, and politics are connected, and the biological politics of domination that puts nature and indeed all forms of life in harm’s way. I study Beauvoir’s work here in close proximity to Maurice Merleau-Ponty, a contemporary of hers, and Judith Butler, a contemporary of mine. These three comprise a trio of related but significantly divergent phenomenological critiques of determinism. Through them we can see how the concept of determinism shifts back and forth, how it is performed. Questions of tradition and gender in ballet also shift around essentialist thinking. I provide a

2 CARTOGRAPHY AND FORGETTING from: A Counter-History of Composition
Abstract: Following Richard Young’s 1978 NEH seminar, James Berlin accepts Young’s articulation of current-traditional rhetoric and folds vitalism into this category while at the same time revaluing Coleridge. In three articles that appeared in 1980, Berlin establishes his debt to the seminar but also turns the discourse of the field away from the more social-scientific basis that Young uses to ground the discipline. Initially, Berlin reads the concept of vitalism as natural genius and moves it from romanticism to current-traditional rhetoric via the work of Hugh Blair and Richard Whately. Though he starts out using the term vitalism in conjunction with

3 REMAPPING METHOD from: A Counter-History of Composition
Abstract: Because he was teaching at the University of Pittsburgh at the time, Paul Kameen was a part of the academic milieu surrounding Richard Young’s NEH seminar at Carnegie Mellon University in 1978. William Coles and Otis Walter, also from the University of Pittsburgh, were guests at the seminar, and Kameen was very much aware of their work regarding the composing process and rhetorical invention. Like James Berlin, Kameen was wary of the dubious connection between Coleridge and the characterization of vitalism that Young was putting forward in the seminar. Kameen also published a key article in 1980 that put forward

6 TOWARD INVENTIVE COMPOSITION PEDAGOGIES from: A Counter-History of Composition
Abstract: Most pedagogical discourse in the 1990s revolved around critical pedagogies that generally mirror James Berlin’s image of social-epistemic rhetoric. While much other work was done in the period, it inevitably evoked the social-epistemic question: does this pedagogy seek to produce the proper political subject and corresponding critical text? The emergence of technological contexts in the middle and later 1990s changed the landscape in which this question would arise. The Internet opened the way for completely new social and pedagogical contexts. Much critical pedagogy began to focus on media literacy as decoding the dominant political assumptions and values in films and

Book Title: Illness as Narrative- Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Jurecic Ann
Abstract: For most of literary history, personal confessions about illness were considered too intimate to share publicly. By the mid-twentieth century, however, a series of events set the stage for the emergence of the illness narrative. The increase of chronic disease, the transformation of medicine into big business, the women's health movement, the AIDS/HIV pandemic, the advent of inexpensive paperbacks, and the rise of self-publishing all contributed to the proliferation of narratives about encounters with medicine and mortality.While the illness narrative is now a staple of the publishing industry, the genre itself has posed a problem for literary studies. What is the role of criticism in relation to personal accounts of suffering? Can these narratives be judged on aesthetic grounds? Are they a collective expression of the lost intimacy of the patient-doctor relationship? Is their function thus instrumental-to elicit the reader's empathy?To answer these questions, Ann Jurecic turns to major works on pain and suffering by Susan Sontag, Elaine Scarry, and Eve Sedgwick and reads these alongside illness narratives by Jean-Dominique Bauby, Reynolds Price, and Anne Fadiman, among others. In the process, she defines the subgenres of risk and pain narratives and explores a range of critical responses guided, alternately, by narrative empathy, the hermeneutics of suspicion, and the practice of reparative reading. Illness as Narrativeseeks to draw wider attention to this form of life writing and to argue for new approaches to both literary criticism and teaching narrative. Jurecic calls for a practice that's both compassionate and critical. She asks that we consider why writers compose stories of illness, how readers receive them, and how both use these narratives to make meaning of human fragility and mortality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjr8p

Four Sontag, Suffering, and the Work of Writing from: Illness as Narrative
Abstract: Susan Sontag has done more than any other single writer to bring attention to how literature documents and shapes the cultural meaning and experience of illness, pain, and suffering.¹ While Sontag’s work on illness assumes center stage in Illness as MetaphorandAIDS and Its Metaphors, she wrote about suffering throughout her career, fromOn Photography, to novels such asThe Volcano Lover, and to her final book,Regarding the Pain of Others. Sontag’s body of work reveals a deep and sustained exploration—with many turns, conflicts, and contradictions—of the ethics of reception, how audiences regard and respond to

Five Theory’s Aging Body from: Illness as Narrative
Abstract: To ask about the function of criticism at the present time is to invite nearly as many answers as there are critics. The profession has traveled a long way from Matthew Arnold’s confident declaration in 1865 that the only rule a critic must follow is “disinterestedness” in order “to know the best that is known and thought in the world, irrespectively of practice, politics, and everything of the kind” (“Function,” 17). While a good number of today’s critics might define their work as motivated by “interest,” rather than disinterest, there is no consensus on what the focus of that interest

Book Title: Dance And Lived Body- Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): FRALEIGH SONDRA HORTON
Abstract: In her remarkable book, Sondra Horton Fraleigh examines and describes dance through her consciousness of dance as an art, through the experience of dancing, and through the existential and phenomenological literature on the lived body. She describes, with performance photographs, specific imagery in dance masterworks by Doris Humphrey, Anna Sokolow, Viola Farber, Nina Weiner, and Garth Fagan.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjrjj

2 DANCE AND SELF from: Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: All works of art bear the stamp of individual creation. Neither Martha Graham nor Yvonne Rainer escaped self in their dances. Yet they were both concerned, each in her own way, to transcend self-expression in dance. Rainerʹs efforts in this regard are well known, but it is too often forgotten that Graham openly rejected what she termed ʺself-expression dancing.ʺ Instead she sought a form of ʺcommunicationʺ adequate to her own time.¹ Dance is a form of expression – and communication – that necessarily involves the self. But how? Or under what conditions is self involved when dance is viewed as

7 EXPRESSIONIST-FORMALIST TENSION from: Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Plato succinctly states two areas of interwoven aesthetic values realized through dance: ʺOne department of dancing is the presentation of works of poetical inspiration with the care for the preservation of dignity and decorum; the other, which aims at physical fitness, nobility, and beauty, ensures an appropriate flexure and tension in the actual bodily limbs and members, and endows them all with a grace of movement which is incidentally extended to every form of the dance and pervades all intimately.ʺ¹ Thus he sees that poetic expressiveness as well as beauty and grace of form are the purposes of dance.²

12 DANCE IMAGES from: Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: In order to consider various forms that dance imagery may take and to underscore the lived essence of all dance, I will describe specific imagery in dance master works from different historical periods, which illustrate highly contrasting styles of modern dance. First I describe abstract formalist imagery in early modern dance in one of Doris Humphreyʹs works, then symbolic expressionist imagery in a well-known work by Anna Sokolow,

INTRODUCTION: from: The Reparative in Narratives
Abstract: ‘Narratives’ and ‘reparative’: these two words will be used throughout this book, and the nature of their relationship will remain unstable. Originally, I was looking for a working definition of what a ‘reparative narrative’ would be, might be. And positing that reparative narratives could be found was of the order of a theoretical hypothesis. I was not sure that they existed but it was clear that if they did, I needed them, and needed them badly. I wanted to learn at the same time how to identify them and to understand how they worked in order to recognize them and

CONCLUSION: from: The Reparative in Narratives
Abstract: In January 2008, after the evening national news, France 2 network showed an episode of the popular P.J. Saint Martindetective series called ‘Erreurs de jeunesse’ [Mistakes of Youth].¹ I remember following the plot with a growing sense of astonishment as it slowly became apparent that the puzzle the investigators were slowly putting back together was telling a story about France’s colonial past or more importantly about its impact on the immediate present. The episode made three assumptions that I thought were remarkably revealing about the recent thematic and generic norms that govern memorial narratives (even if they remain invisible).

Book Title: A Self-Conscious Art-Patrick Modiano’s Postmodern Fictions
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): KAWAKAMI AKANE
Abstract: A Self-Conscious Art is the first full-length study in English to attempt to deal with the formal complexities of Modiano’s work, by reading ‘against the grain’ of his self-professed ingenuousness. A detailed examination of his narratives shows the deeply postmodern nature of his writing. Parodying precursors such as Proust or the nouveau romanciers, his narratives are built around a profound lack of faith in the ability of writing to retrieve the past through memory, and this failure is acknowledged in the discreet playfulness that characterises his novels. This book is a timely introduction to the work of one of the most successful modern French novelists.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vj9nz

CHAPTER FOUR Being Serious: from: A Self-Conscious Art
Abstract: Modiano is still best known for writing novels set in the Occupation. His apparent obsession, especially in his earlier works, with this dark period of French history has been the main concern of his critics and reviewers. It is certainly a controversial subject: it was probably one of the main causes for the impact that Modiano’s first novels had on the public, instantly creating a reputation for the young author.¹ We may wonder, however, whether there was more to this reaction than that of simple choice of subject matter. What is the nature of Modiano’s treatment of the subject? Is

CHAPTER SIX Being Popular: from: A Self-Conscious Art
Abstract: Modiano may be both serious and playful, but above all he is popular. His novels sell extremely well: they are always on the best-seller lists when they first appear, and even his older works display staying power on the market. What are the reasons for this popularity, structurally and ‘socially’ speaking? Is there a certain novelistic genre or structure related to popularity? What is the social status of that kind of novel?

CHAPTER FOUR The Kingdom of the Narrator from: Michel Tournier and the Metaphor of Fiction
Abstract: Tournier is a prominent media figure in France. In addition to his fictional output he is an accomplished essayist and expert on photography, and has contributed numerous press articles on subjects ranging from food, to German history, to arms sales. Just as the thematic content of some of his fiction has provoked hostility, so views that he has expressed in articles or during interviews have proved controversial. Inevitably therefore we are invited not only to read his work in the company of other Tournier critics, but also to situate it within the matrix of contemporary society. Tournier is not an

Foreword from: The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Wiegandt Klaus
Abstract: The present work documents the talks given at the conference, supplemented by the contribution by Gudrun Krämer. This third volume continues the series ‘Forum for Responsibility’, which accompanies the conferences, a series which began with the publications Evolution(2003) andHumanity and the Cosmos(2004).¹

12 Value Change in Europe from the Perspective of Empirical Social Research from: The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Thome Helmut
Abstract: When studying values empirically, social researchers apply a methodological perspective which differs substantially from that characteristic of philosophers, social anthropologists, or historians of ideas. In empirical research, values are treated as something ‘measurable’, measurable, above all, with the instrument of systematic surveys. This is a persistent source of irritation, and not just among non-sociologists; I shall therefore deal briefly with this methodology by way of introduction. The first thing to bear in mind is that we constantly produce rough-and-ready ‘measurements’ of values in everyday conversation. Referring to a colleague, for example, we say that he values his work more than

Book Title: Black Intersectionalities-A Critique for the 21st Century
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Rocchi Jean-Paul
Abstract: Black Intersectionalities: A Critique for the 21st Century explores the complex interrelationships between race, gender, and sex as these are conceptualised within contemporary thought. Markers of identity are too often isolated and presented as definitive, then examined and theorised, a process that further naturalises their absoluteness; thus socially generated constructs become socialising categories that assume coercive power. The resulting set of oppositions isolate and delimit: male or female, black or white, straight or gay. A new kind of intervention is needed, an intervention that recognises the validity of the researcher’s own self-reflexivity. Focusing on the way identity is both constructed and constructive, the collection examines the frameworks and practices that deny transgressive possibilities. It seeks to engage in a consciousness raising exercise that documents the damaging nature of assigned social positions and either/or identity constructions. It seeks to progress beyond the socially prescribed categories of race, gender and sex, recognising the need to combine intellectualization and feeling, rationality and affectivity, abstraction and emotion, consciousness and desire. It seeks to develop new types of transdisciplinary frameworks where subjective and political spaces can be universalized while remaining particular, leaving texts open so that identity remains imagined, plural, and continuously shifting. Such an approach restores the complexity of what it means to be human.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjbrv

3 Postcolonial Backlash and Being Proper: from: Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Schuhmann Antje
Abstract: From homophobic hate crimes and the reinforcing of dress codes for women in townships to the censorship of the arts in the name of “proper” femininity, culture, morality, and nation-building, the right to female self-determination is being challenged concretely in contemporary post-apartheid South Africa. Threats to the Constitution by Christian right-wingers working alongside members of the Government currently target the right to abortion and the right to same-sex marriage, and normative understandings of womanhood seem to be gaining ground in multiple ways (Schuhmann, 2009a). In this context, the spectacle around the questioning of athlete Caster Semenya’s sex after her outstanding

5 “I Hugged Myself”: from: Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Bast Florian
Abstract: This study gives an introduction to the complex interrelation of agency and first-person narration in the works of Octavia Butler by way of the short story “The Evening and the Morning and the Night” (1987).¹ Butler’s diverse oeuvre utilizes narrative perspective as it conspicuously employs complex constructions of homodiegetic narrations: in its discussion of notions of identity, power, control, and freedom, it gives voice to, among others, a runaway in a dystopian future in Survivor(1978), a black woman repeatedly forced to travel back to the times of slavery inKindred(1979), a human–alien hybrid of a third gender

8 The Souls of Black Gay Folk: from: Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Nero Charles
Abstract: This chapter explores the influence and impact of the Black Arts Movement on the Black Gay Generation of 1986. The year 1986 refers to the publication of Joseph Beam’s pioneering In the Life: A Black Gay Anthology, the first collective expression of African American gay identity. That anthology was followed five years later by a sequel,Brother to Brother: New Writings by Black Gay Men, co-edited by Beam and Essex Hemphill. Together the two anthologies defined a generation of black gay writing. Some of the notable writers and culture workers in the two anthologies, in addition to Beam and Hemphill,

9 “Risking Sensuality”: from: Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Raynaud Claudine
Abstract: While past scholarship has explored at great length the inscription of the black body in Morrison’s work, recent analysis has focused on her “use of the erotic” – to take up Audre Lorde’s phrase (Turpin, 2010) – in an effort to locate her specific work with language in comparison and contrast with Audre Lorde and Dionne Brand. I wish to argue in this chapter that writing the erotic is what Morrison has been “risking” throughout her output since Sula(1973) throughBeloved(1987) andJazz(1992), down toA Mercy(2008). The erotic is not a “theme,” a moment in the novels’

11 Richard Wright’s Poetics of Black Being: from: Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Fisher Rebecka Rutledge
Abstract: In this chapter, I examine how Richard Wright, in The Man Who Lived Underground(1944), puts into practice what Paul Ricoeur describes as metaphor’s knowledge of its relation to being.¹ The poetics I describe are evident not in this novella alone; they appear in many familiar works of African American literature throughout the modern period.² While this chapter cannot, of course, lay claim to a comprehensive study that presents an exhaustive overview of all the texts that constitute this literary tradition; my hope is that my analysis will suggest a theory of metaphor alive in Wright’s work, a theory that

Book Title: Ciaran Carson-Space, Place, Writing
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): ALEXANDER NEAL
Abstract: Ciaran Carson is one of the most challenging and inventive of contemporary Irish writers, exhibiting verbal brilliance, formal complexity, and intellectual daring across a remarkably varied body of work. This study considers the full range of his oeuvre, in poetry, prose, and translations, and discusses the major themes to which he returns, including: memory and history, narrative, language and translation, mapping, violence, and power. It argues that the singularity of Carson’s writing is to be found in his radical imaginative engagements with ideas of space and place. The city of Belfast, in particular, occupies a crucially important place in his texts, serving as an imaginative focal point around which his many other concerns are constellated. The city, in all its volatile mutability, is an abiding frame of reference and a reservoir of creative impetus for Carson’s imagination. Accordingly, the book adopts an interdisciplinary approach that draws upon geography, urbanism, and cultural theory as well as literary criticism. It provides both a stimulating and thorough introduction to Carson’s work, and a flexible critical framework for exploring literary representations of space.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjcgf

Introduction from: Ciaran Carson
Abstract: The publication in 2008 of Ciaran Carson’s Collected Poems, timed to coincide with the poet’s sixtieth birthday, is an obvious milestone along the way of his development as a writer. Leafing through its nearly 600 pages, which include work from eight principal collections produced over a period of more than thirty years, the reader is likely to be struck by the extraordinary scope and resourcefulness of Carson’s writing. Experimental rather than self-consciously avant-garde, Carson’s poetry exhibits a remarkable linguistic inventiveness, formal complexity, and intellectual daring, always making a concerted effort to communicate with the reader yet also foregrounding the resistances

CHAPTER ONE Imaginative Geographies: from: Ciaran Carson
Abstract: The singularity of a literary work, argues Derek Attridge, is best understood as an event in which the reader experiences both inventiveness and alterity. Each reading constitutes ‘an appreciation, a living-through, of the invention that makes the work not just different but a creative reimagination of cultural materials’.¹ My contention is that the singularity of Ciaran Carson’s writing rests upon his far-reaching imaginative engagements with ideas of space and place, and particularly urban spatiality in an Irish context. It is the purpose of this chapter to set out a critical framework for exploring these engagements in their widest manifestations. Carson’s

CHAPTER SIX Babel-babble: from: Ciaran Carson
Abstract: Translation is a longstanding and recurrent component of Ciaran Carson’s work, not only as practice, process, and artefact – as his recent book-length versions of Dante’s Inferno, Brian Merriman’sThe Midnight Court, and the Old Irish epic,The Táin, attest – but also as a theme or trope that relates to the multifarious effects of language itself. In this regard ‘translation’ concerns itself with the ways in which transactions between words, idioms, discourses, and languages reveal the difference that is internal to all language. Or, as Walter Benjamin expresses it, ‘all translation is only a somewhat provisional way of coming to terms

Lafcadio Hearn’s American Writings and the Creole Continuum from: American Creoles
Author(s) Gallagher Mary
Abstract: Lafcadio Hearn (1850–1904) is famous principally for having ‘interpreted’ Japan for the West in the closing years of the nineteenth century. Even if his life and work are recognized as falling into two main periods, the American and the Far Eastern, the latter is usually seen as outshining the former. It is less, however, the work of Hearn’s Japanese period than the inscapes of his American/Caribbean writings that hold the key – if not to the overall significance, then certainly to the contemporary resonance of this unusual fin-de-sièclefigure and of his work. These writings are clearly founded on

‘Fightin’ the Future’: from: American Creoles
Author(s) Munro Martin
Abstract: The plantation societies of the Americas were set up essentially as modern, profit-driven machines that used human beings as combustible, disposable parts. Far from nurturing cohesive communities, European colonists created anti-societiesthat relied on the continuous supply and consumption of bodies uprooted and thrown out of step, out of rhythm with the places and cultures they were born into. In the colonial Caribbean, where the indigenous population was more or less wiped out by illness and warfare, the new populations comprised many disparate groups of African slaves and a number of European nationalities. Set up to be dystopian, segregated work

Leaving the South: from: American Creoles
Author(s) Lane Jeremy F.
Abstract: In his biography of Frantz Fanon, David Macey is somewhat dismissive of the scattered allusions to jazz Fanon makes throughout his work. Thus, according to Macey, the ‘parody of the négritudevision of Louis Armstrong’s music’ inPeau noire, masques blancs(1952) proves that Fanon knew little about the music itself and was interested primarily, if not exclusively, in its sociological significance (Macey, 2000: 124). The promotion of modern jazz, inLes Damnés de la terre(1961), as a model for the ‘national culture’ of a newly independent Algeria, meanwhile, was simply ‘not at all pertinent’ to Algeria (ibid.: 378).

Go Slow Now: from: American Creoles
Author(s) Wiedorn Michael
Abstract: ‘Nous réclamons le droit à l’opacité’ [We demand the right to opacity]:¹ this demand, articulated on the first pages of the Discours antillais[Caribbean Discourse] (Glissant, 1981: 11), resonates throughout Édouard Glissant’s work.² For Glissant, one way that literature can deploy opacity is to engage in a set of paired, paradoxical operations. It can say the unsayable, or make the invisible visible – or, more accurately put, present the absent. With his literary-critical textFaulkner, Mississippi, Glissant perceives both of these operations in the novels of an author whom he has hailed as the greatest of the twentieth century (Glissant,

Édouard Glissant and the Test of Faulkner’s Modernism from: American Creoles
Author(s) Azéradt Hugues
Abstract: In Faulkner, Mississippi, Glissant provides us with an innovative reading of an author whose work we thought we already knew almost inside out. Indeed, in 1996, compared with other great modernists such as Joyce, Woolf, Proust, Kafka and Musil, Faulkner was beginning to seem outdated, ‘unsaleable’ and even undesirable within the field of literary criticism. Faulkner’s heyday was under New Criticism and at the time of the White House’s anti-communist policies of the 1950s and 1960s (Schwartz, 1988), and only a small number of brilliant hardliners such as Philip Weinstein, Barbara Ladd, John Mathews, Richard Godden, André Bleikasten and Claude

Book Title: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World- Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Murphy David
Abstract: In the late 1990’s, Postcolonial Studies risked imploding as a credible area of academic enquiry. Repeated anthologization and an overemphasis on the English-language literatures led to sustained critiques of the field and to an active search for alternative approaches to the globalized and transnational formations of the post-colonial world. In the early twenty-first century, however, postcolonial began to reveal a new openness to its comparative dimensions. French-language contributors to postcolonial debate (such as Edouard Glissant and Abdelkebir Khatibi) have recently risen to greater prominence in the English-speaking world, and there have also appeared an increasing number of important critical and theoretical texts on postcolonial issues, written by scholars working principally on French-language material. It is to such a context that this book responds. Acknowledging these shifts, this volume provides an essential tool for students and scholars outside French departments seeking a way into the study of Francophone colonial postcolonial debates. At the same time, it supplies scholars in French with a comprehensive overview of essential ideas and key intellectuals in this area.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjgn6

CHAPTER 2 Maryse Condé: from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Leservot Typhaine
Abstract: How does one introduce Maryse Condé to the uninitiated reader? Condé’s centrality to Francophone studies and her popularity outside academic circles make this question more than merely rhetorical. Indeed, her fame has spread beyond the academic circle of scholars and students in Francophone studies – far beyond, in fact. English, German, Dutch, Italian, Japanese, Portuguese and Spanish translations of her work testify to her growing global audience. Her oeuvre has earned her a number of accolades that reflect her widespread appeal: the French government named her Commandeur de l’Ordre des Arts et des Lettres in 2001 and Chevalier de la

CHAPTER 5 Frantz Fanon: from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Silverman Max
Abstract: Little more than twenty years ago, Homi Bhabha could justifiably write ‘in Britain today Fanon’s ideas are effectively “out of print”’ (Bhabha, 1986: viii). This demonstrates the extent to which Fanon’s current status as probably the most influential thinker in the field of postcolonial studies is a relatively recent phenomenon. In this chapter, following a brief overview of Fanon’s life and career, I will outline the major stages of his thought in three sections. In the opening section, I will discuss his first major work, Black Skin, White Masks(1952); in the second section, I will deal with Fanon’s political

CHAPTER 9 Albert Memmi: from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Crowley Patrick
Abstract: Since the publication of his first novel, The Pillar of Salt(1953), Albert Memmi has offered textual portraits that bring the discomforting perspective of hisvécu[lived experience] to bear upon discourses, practices and legacies of domination. In particular, and not surprisingly, Memmi’s name often appears alongside those of critics of colonization such as Aimé Césaire, Frantz Fanon and Jean-Paul Sartre (for discussion of these writers, see Chapters 1, 5 and 11 of this volume). Jean-Marc Moura provides a typical example of this when he writes that the work of Memmi, Césaire and Fanon constitute ‘les essais de combat’ [the

CHAPTER 11 Roads to Freedom: from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Williams Patrick
Abstract: There is, perhaps, an excessive obviousness in the decision to focus on the concept of freedom in any discussion of Jean-Paul Sartre, since if there is one pre-eminently Sartrean theme, it is arguably that of freedom. However, precisely because of the dangers inherent in the ‘obviousness’, in regarding the chosen subject as already known and comprehended, but also because of the inevitably changing and evolving sense of the term in the context of a lifetime’s passionate engagement, we would be wrong to think that we fully understand Sartre’s repeated working through – ‘elaboration’ in the strongest Gramscian sense – of

CHAPTER 12 Léopold Sédar Senghor: from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Murphy David
Abstract: Since the beginning of the new millennium there has been a remarkable turnaround in the critical appraisal of the life and work of Senegalese poet-president, Léopold Sédar Senghor, the writer most closely associated with the Francophone literary movement of Negritude. In the course of the preceding decades, Senghor had come to be seen by numerous critics (if by no means all) as an anachronistic figure, whose ideas had served their time and were no longer useful in thinking about Africa. The high point of the more recent positive reappraisal came in 2006 (the centenary of his birth), which l’Organisation Internationale

CHAPTER 23 Gender and Empire in the World of Film from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Woodhull Winifred
Abstract: Insofar as film scholarship followed literary studies, in the 1980s and 1990s, in taking up Benedict Anderson’s work on the construction of national identity through imagined communities, much attention has been devoted to looking at French films that participate in that process by construing colonized peoples as primitive and frequently feminized ‘Others’, in opposition to whom the French define themselves as rational, enlightened and civilized. Like the films themselves, the analyses vary in the degree to which they see colonizer/colonized relations in terms of stark binaries or in terms of ambiguous hybrid identities on both sides. Yet whatever the emphasis,

Book Title: Sympathetic Ink-Intertextual Relations in Northern Irish Poetry
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): ALCOBIA-MURPHY SHANE
Abstract: Northern Irish poets have been accused of reticence in addressing political issues in their work. In Sympathetic Ink, Shane Alcobia-Murphy challenges this view through a consideration of the works of Seamus Heaney, Paul Muldoon and Medbh McGuckian. Making use of substantial collections of the poets’ papers which have only recently become available, Alcobia-Murphy focuses on the oblique, subtle strategies employed by these poets to critique contemporary political issues. He employs the concept of sympathetic ink, or invisible ink, arguing that rather than avoiding politics, these poets have, via complex intertextual references and resonances, woven them deeply into the formal construction of their works. Acute and learned, Sympathetic Ink re-examines existing attitudes towards Northern Irish poetry as well as being the first critical work to address the poetry of Medbh McGuckian.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjgq5

1 ‘As if he’s swallowed a dictionary’: from: Sympathetic Ink
Abstract: Although Paul Muldoon’s poetry is renowned for its erudition, allusiveness and formal precision, it is also notorious for being enigmatic and unforthcoming. A ‘Muldoonian’ poem is described thus: ‘confessional but reticent, lucid but ambiguous, idiomatic but classically formed, artless but supremely erudite, confident but self-effacing, approachable but unknowable’.² Two main strands of thought fuel the accusation that he is ‘simply’ a playful technician. First, some critics focus unduly on the Barthesian nature of his work whereby the author’s ashes rest peacefully in a well-wrought urn and authority (in every sense) passes on to the reader: ‘Far from placing writerly control

2 Medbh McGuckian: from: Sympathetic Ink
Abstract: The poetry of Medbh McGuckian has by no means received universal critical acclaim and many of her reviewers have been notoriously acerbic and personal in their attacks. Patrick Williams classifies her work as ‘colourful guff’: ‘McGuckian’s concoctions of endless poeticism are non-visionary, and the funny, sealed little worlds where harmless cranks parley with themselves in gobbledegook won’t impinge on the real world of loot and dragons.’¹ Such criticism of her work’s supposedly vexatious obliquity is not unusual: she is labelled fey and mannered,² whimsical,³ at best intricate and enigmatic, at worst inaccessible and subjective.⁴ Gerald Dawe complains that much of

3 ‘Something a little nearer home’: from: Sympathetic Ink
Abstract: The fragmented, multivoiced complexity of much mainstream Irish poetry is often dismissed as fatally hermetic; what is allusive is elitist and insincere, a latter-day art for art’s sake. Iain Sinclair’s polemical introduction to Conductors of Chaos, for example, makes the remarkable claim that in anthologies of Irish poetry, ‘[e]vent is adulterated by self-regarding tropes, false language’.¹ Especially vituperative in his description of Irish anthologists’ (and, by extension, Irish poets’) self-interested preoccupation with ‘[b]og and bomb and blarney’, he dismisses their work as ‘a heap of glittering similes burnished for westward transit’.² Although justified in voicing a general anxiety concerning the

5 ‘The eye that scanned it’: from: Sympathetic Ink
Abstract: A chapter based upon poets’ responses to works of art risks appearing passé: from Horace’s ‘ut pictura poesis’ to J. D. McClatchy’sPoets on Painters¹ and beyond, the subject has been tackled extensively, if not exhaustively. In relation to Northern Irish poetry, Edna Longley’s impressive ‘No More Poems about Paintings?’² would seem the definitive account. However, this chapter not only corrects certain misconceptions and inaccuracies in Longley’s analysis, more importantly it offers a comparative study of ‘the gaze’ of both Paul Muldoon and Medbh McGuckian. Rather than presenting a study comparing the compositional and technical similarities of poetry and painting,

Conclusion from: Sympathetic Ink
Abstract: Throughout this monograph I have argued that for a comprehensive appreciation of Paul Muldoon and Medbh McGuckian’s poetry the reader must unearth labyrinthine networks of intertextual relations. While Muldoon’s intrusive literary allusions demand the reader’s attention, his poetry would remain opaque and open to the charge of pretentiousness if their functions and effects were not properly understood. The same is not true of McGuckian’s poetry: unaware of its true dialogism, the reader is likely to detect only disembodied voices. This work has not only introduced the reader to the capacious intellectual resources in which their poetry is grounded, it has

Book Title: The Poetry of Saying-British Poetry and its Discontents, 1950-2000
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): SHEPPARD ROBERT
Abstract: In The Poetry of Saying Robert Sheppard explores an array of ‘experimental’ writers and styles of writing many of which have never secured a large audience in Britain, but which are often fascinatingly innovative. As a published poet in this tradition, Sheppard provides a detailed and thought provoking account of the development of the British poetry movement from the 1950s. As well as analysing the work of individual poets such as Roy Fisher, Lee Harwood and Tom Raworth The Poetry of Saying also examines the influence of the Poetry Society and poetry magazines on the evolution of British poetry throughout this period. The overriding virtue of the poetry of this period is its diversity, a fact that Sheppard has not ignored. As well as providing a fascinating into the work of these poets, The Poetry of Saying offers an ‘insider’s’ commentary on the social, political and historical background during this exciting period in British poetry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjh2f

INTRODUCTION: from: The Poetry of Saying
Abstract: While this work offers a unifying theory of the poetry studied, I am cautioned by what has become increasingly clear to me after writing about (and writing) this verse for the last twenty years: the overriding virtue of its diversity. I am aware, therefore, that any theoretical approach needs to emphasize the particularity of this heterodoxy, to allow its otherness to speak.

4 Keeping the Doors Open: from: The Poetry of Saying
Abstract: Lee Harwood’s first book-length publication in Britain was The White Room(1968), published by Fulcrum Press. The first section, ‘Early Poems 1964–1965’ contains ‘Cable Street’ and some poems reprinted from the 1965 Writers Forum pamphlet,title illegible. The section collecting the poems fromThe Man with Blue Eyes, his award-winning New York publication, opens with Harwood’s first mature poem, ‘As Your Eyes are Blue’, dating from 1965; while it is influenced by the New York school of Ashbery and O’Hara, a good many of the salient features of Harwood’s subsequent work are also displayed here. In a recent short

5 The Persistence of the Movement Orthodoxy in the 1980s and 1990s from: The Poetry of Saying
Abstract: The anthology which claimed to succeed Alvarez’s The New PoetrywasThe Penguin Book of Contemporary British Poetryof 1982, edited by the criticpoets Blake Morrison and Andrew Motion. Despite the bland inclusiveness of the title, it admits to being self-consciously ‘didactic’, and claims to exemplify the work and literary taste of a particular ‘poetic generation’.¹ Older writers, and those included in Alvarez’s collection, have been excluded. Its introduction several times draws comparisons withThe New Poetry, which is characterized as ‘the last serious anthology of British poetry’ (CBP, p. 11). Taking over Alvarez’s notion, but not his metaphor, of

6 Linguistically Innovative Poetry 1978–2000 from: The Poetry of Saying
Abstract: During the 1990s the clumsy term Linguistically Innovative Poetry began to be used of much of the alternative British work of the era. It encompasses a poetic of increased indeterminacy and discontinuity, the use of techniques of disruption and of creative linkage, though its differences with the creativework of the British Poetry Revival do not constitute an absolute break. However, the increased willingness of emerging poets to operate theoretically, in terms of post-structuralist and other theory, to even expound poetics more coherently, was in marked contrast to an earlier lack of such discourse. Ultimately, the definition of ‘linguistically innovative’

7 What Was To One Side or Not Real: from: The Poetry of Saying
Abstract: The implications of this poetics will be felt throughout this chapter, which traces Raworth’s career as it navigates both the years of the British Poetry Revival and of Linguistically Innovative Poetry; his work has been of importance to both groupings. Marjorie

8 Creative Linkage in the Work of Allen Fisher, Adrian Clarke and Ulli Freer during the 1980s and 1990s from: The Poetry of Saying
Abstract: Since modernism, linkage – what Raworth calls ‘connectives’ – has been an essential issue for any art which achieves formal defamiliarization and deautomatization through effects of fragmentation. Indeterminacy and discontinuity have long provided descriptions of radical art, as in Umberto Eco’s poetics of the open work.¹ However, Gilbert Adair, in the short document which furnished the term Linguistically Innovative Poetry, points out that because, for example, ‘advertisements are ample in “discontinuities”’, the term is not neutral and can only be used of British Poetry if it expresses ‘positivities’.² He says, usefully, ‘Cutting across formations categorized as discrete, “discontinuity” is so only if

9 The Ballet of the Speech Organs: from: The Poetry of Saying
Abstract: Bob Cobbing, who died in 2002, was a senior and major exponent of the international concrete poetry movement, but he was a visual artist before he was a poet. His earliest duplicator print of 1942 presages his later work and his interest in the mechanics and accidents of office, rather than fine art, printing.¹ However it was not until 1964, after some years of involvement in the literary underground, as recorded in Chapter 2, that Cobbing came to maturity with the alliterative sequence ABC in Sound.By this time the awareness he had gained of the international concrete poetry movement

Book Title: Translating Life-Studies in Transpositional Aesthetics
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): STEAD ALISTAIR
Abstract: This volume brings together eighteen substantial essays by distinguished scholars, critics and translators, and two interviews with eminent figures of British theatre, to explore the idea and practice of translation. The individual, but conceptually related, contributions examine topics from the Renaissance to the present in the context of apt exploration of the translation process, invoking both restricted and extended senses of translation. The endeavour is to study in detail the theory, workings and implications of what might be called the art of creative transposition, effective at the level of interlingual transcoding, dynamic rewriting, theatrical and cinematic adaptation, intersemiotic or intermedial translation, and cultural exchange. Many of the essays focus on aspects of intertextuality, the dialogue with text, past and present, as they bear on the issue of translation, attending to the historical, political or cultural dimensions of the practice, whether it illuminates a gendered reading of a text or a staging of cultural difference. The historic and generic range of the discussions is wide, encompassing the Elizabethan epyllion, Sensibility fiction, Victorian poetry and prose, modern and postmodern novels, but the book is dominated by dramatic or performance-related applications, with major representation of fresh investigations into Shakespeare (from A Midsummer Night’s Dream to The Tempest) and foregrounding of acts of self-translation on stage, in the dramatic monologue and in fiction. Contributions from theatre practitioners such as Sir Peter Hall, John Barton and Peter Lichtenfels underscore the immense practical importance of the translator on the stage and the business of both acting and directing as a species of translation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjj6t

‘... tinap ober we leck giant’: from: Translating Life
Author(s) JONES ELDRED DUROSIMI
Abstract: Shakespeare reached Africa perhaps as soon as or sooner than his work reached the most distant parts of his own country. In 1607 there are reports of performances of HamletandRichard IIby British sailors off the coast of Sierra Leone. This hardly raised the floodgates of performance, but in 1800 the ‘African Theatre’ in Cape Town opened with a performance ofHenry IV(which Part is not clear), and the amateur entertainments of colonial officers, the educational priorities of missionary and colonial government schools, plus the professional companies imported to entertain settler communities, ensured that the plays of

(Post) colonial Translations in V. S. Naipaul’s The Enigma of Arrival from: Translating Life
Author(s) CHEW SHIRLEY
Abstract: Joseph Conrad was the first modern writer V. S. Naipaul encountered at the age of ten; and Conrad, seaman turned author, was also someone who ‘had been everywhere before me’ and who ‘sixty to seventy years ago meditated on my world’ ( CD, p. 210). Indeed, Conrad’s vision of this world, as some critics have remarked,² is one which Naipaul seems bound to repeat in his own work: ‘half-made societies ... where there was no goal, and where always “something inherent in the necessities of successful action ... carried with it the moral degradation of the idea”’ (CD, p. 208). This

Thackeray and the ‘Old Masters’ from: Translating Life
Author(s) ORMOND LEONÉE
Abstract: Among the great Victorian novelists, Thackeray could probably best be described as a natural connoisseur of the fine arts. George Eliot and Hardy acquired considerable expertise in matters of art, but both set out with a deliberate intention to learn the subject which was very different from Thackeray’s comfortable familiarity. This may help to explain why Hardy’s novels make more direct reference to painters and their works than do those of Thackeray, although an equally plausible explanation could be found in the later date at which Hardy was writing. After the onset of the Aesthetic movement, reference to the work

Helena Faucit: from: Translating Life
Author(s) MARSHALL GAIL
Abstract: Any artistic production inevitably involves an act of translation, a transference of a form, commodity, or idea across a boundary, be that boundary one of time, space, language, or cultural medium. Shakespeare and his works are among the most durable and flexible of translated media, and seem unlikely to be easily exhausted. Particularly interesting are the ways in which ‘Shakespeare’ operates both as an enabling medium and as an object who is himself translated. Within the economy of translation, the facilitating medium is a common point of reference, a shared experience which first makes conceivable the possibility and desirability of

‘More a Russian than a Dane’: from: Translating Life
Author(s) HOLLAND PETER
Abstract: Take a look at the following books: Don Quixote(complete, in all seven or eight parts). It’s a fine work by Cervantes, who is placed on just about the level of Shakespeare. I recommend Turgenev’s ‘Hamlet and Don Quixote’ to our brothers if they haven’t read it already. As for you, you wouldn’t understand it.¹

Translation in the Theatre I: from: Translating Life
Author(s) Batty Mark
Abstract: Mark Batty You’re known specifically as a writers’ director, and you have yourself commented that ideally the author should be present when you’re dealing with his work and that it is a privilege to be in the head of genius when working on a classic play. Given these views, what relationship do you like to have with a translator of the work of a non-living author?

Translation in the Theatre II: from: Translating Life
Author(s) Batty Mark
Abstract: Mark Batty You’ve done a great deal of work in the theatre that has involved intricate reworking of texts. You have worked in collaboration with Inga-Stina Ewbank on a number of Ibsen’s plays, for example. How do you see the work you have done on adapting and translating texts in relation to your primary role as a director? Are these activities extensions of that role or separate interests?

CHAPTER 10 The Visibility of the Holocaust: from: Social Theory after the Holocaust
Author(s) SALTER MICHAEL
Abstract: Although less well known to social theorists than that of other Frankfurt School members, the work of Franz Neumann has recently become the focus of renewed interest.¹ Within contemporary legal scholarship, that interest has centred largely upon how this ‘junior’ member of the Frankfurt School combined classic liberal constitutional values, particularly a belief in the rule of law, with a distinctive sociological analysis of law.² Several historians have studied the wartime record of Neumann, Kirchheimer and Marcuse,³ but Neumann’s wartime service with US military intelligence has received little attention from legal theorists, in spite of its clear relationship with his

4 Constructing Famine Spaces in Ireland from: Commemorating the Irish Famine
Abstract: In Ireland, unlike so many previous epochs of historical commemorations where local efforts piggy-backed onto or modified narratives enshrined at the national level (as with the 1798 rebellion, Easter Rising, or the First World War), the Famine was an intensely local experience, not one which occurred at a remove from daily life. Today the remnants of that experience pervade the depopulated Irish landscape: abandoned stone cottages, crumbling workhouses and overgrown mass graves, and the endlessly stonewalled and subdivided smallholdings that are testament to the meagre acreage allotted to the Famine poor existing at the very margins of society. At many

2 A Short History of French Studies in the UK from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Holmes Diana
Abstract: In October 1999 the journal French Cultural Studiesbrought out an original and engaging special issue entitled ‘Personal Voices, Personal Experiences’. It was composed of eight essays by academics of different backgrounds and generations, each working in some aspect of French Studies, all but one within the UK, and it put the emphasis on autobiographical trajectories, on how each had come to choose French as their discipline and its teaching and study as their career. Brian Rigby, the volume’s editor, commented in the introduction on how little has been written on the development of French as an academic discipline, and

7 Contemporary Women’s Writing in French: from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Rye Gill
Abstract: In the UK and elsewhere in the anglophone world, contemporary literature in French continues to be a strong field of study in both research and teaching. Traditionally lone scholars, researchers of literature are now increasingly being pressured by their institutions to network, to collaborate and, above all, to generate large sums of external research funding. Contemporary women-authored literature is not the threatened subject that some other contributions to this publication document – it is widely researched and taught on a range of undergraduate and postgraduate courses – except perhaps in the sense that if women’s writing is not made visible,

10 Oxford, Theatre and Quarrels from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Viala Alain
Abstract: Oxford University’s French subfaculty occupies a rather unusual position in the network of French Studies in the UK: the size of the department, the collegiate structure of the university, and certain of its very specific traditions all contribute to this singularity. But in recent years this department has, like so many others, undergone a series of necessary changes; some of them welcome and others less so. Certain of these changes will doubtless require development in the coming years: it is these changes that form the subject of this chapter.

13 The Rise of Translation from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Rothwell Andrew
Abstract: As is now widely recognised, translation has played a major role at key historical periods in the development of national cultures and vernacular languages across Europe, with France being no exception. The terms traductionandtraducteurwere introduced into French in the sixteenth century by Etienne Dolet (1509–46), a humanist and translator regarded as the first translation theorist (and infamously burnt at the stake for a doctrinally deviant ‘mistranslation’ of Plato). Translation in the Renaissance, a preoccupation of the Pléiade poets as it was of Montaigne, served both to make Classical works available to a wider audience and to

14 Teaching and Research in French Cinema from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Reader Keith
Abstract: Teaching and research in French cinema has developed rapidly in a relatively short time since the mid- to late 1970s. At that time, teaching was confined to the occasional course unit in a handful of universities, and research was only just starting to emerge from work aimed at cinephile rather than academic readerships. This chapter starts by considering the ways in which teaching has evolved over that time, and then gives an account of developments in research, with a strong focus on the UK, but also taking into account work done in France and the USA.

17 French Studies and the Postcolonial: from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Murphy David
Abstract: Over the past two decades, we have witnessed what Françoise Lionnet has termed the ‘becoming-transnational’ of French Studies.¹ French and the other modern languages had originally been constructed as academic subjects around the framework of the nineteenth-century European nation-state but, as the primacy of the nation state has come to be challenged in the era of globalisation, this structure has been increasingly questioned by scholars working from transnational, global and postcolonial perspectives.² The prominent North American critic Lawrence Kritzman has been prompted to ask, in light of these developments, whether the very existence of French Studies is now in question:

Book Title: London Irish Fictions-Narrative, Diaspora and Identity
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): MURRAY TONY
Abstract: This is the first book about the literature of the Irish in London. By examining over 30 novels, short stories and autobiographies set in London since the Second World War, London Irish Fictions investigates the complex psychological landscapes of belonging and cultural allegiance found in these unique and intensely personal perspectives on the Irish experience of migration. As well as bringing new research to bear on the work of established Irish writers such as Edna O’Brien, John McGahern, Emma Donoghue and Joseph O’Connor, this study reveals a fascinating and hitherto unexplored literature, diverse in form and content. By synthesising theories of narrative and diaspora into a new methodological approach to the study of migration, London Irish Fictions sheds new light on the ways in which migrant identities are negotiated, mediated and represented through literature. It also examines the specific role that the metropolis plays in literary portrayals of migrant experience as an arena for the performance of Irishness, as a catalyst in transformations of Irishness and as an intrinsic component of second-generation Irish identities. Furthermore, by analysing the central role of narrative in configuring migrant cultures and identities, it reassesses notions of exile, escape and return in Irish culture more generally. In this regard, it has particular relevance to current debates on migration and multiculturalism in both Britain and Ireland, especially in the wake of an emerging new phase of Irish migration in the post-‘Celtic Tiger’ era.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjm19

1 Introduction from: London Irish Fictions
Abstract: For centuries, London has occupied a powerful place in the imagination of artists of all kinds. Writers, in particular, have profoundly influenced popular perceptions of the city. This has especially been the case for people who have visited or migrated to London from elsewhere. New arrivals, whether from the provinces, continental Europe or further afield, have all formed relationships with the city in the light of work by writers such as Samuel Pepys, Charles Dickens, Virginia Woolf and Zadie Smith. For arrivals from other parts of the former British Empire or the Commonwealth, coming to London has often been a

2 The Irish in London from: London Irish Fictions
Abstract: Irish people have been deeply woven into the fabric of London life for centuries. The first records of Irish migrant workers originate from the twelfth century, when the majority were employed as labourers and street-vendors, although some had to resort to other means of survival, as evidenced by a statute in 1243 to expel Irish beggars.¹ By Tudor times, the Irish were no strangers to a city which had, in John Denvir’s lurid description, ‘seen many an Irish chief and noble brought in chains to perish miserably in the gloomy dungeons of the Tower’.² Lesser mortals were excluded from work

3 Navvy Narratives from: London Irish Fictions
Abstract: In the closing days of 2003, heated debates took place in the Irish parliament over the plight of elderly Irish men in Britain in the wake of a documentary shown on national television.¹ Many of the interviewees in the programme had spent the best part of their working lives on the building sites of England, but due to major changes in the construction industry over the previous twenty years and the financially insecure nature of their employment, such men were now living out their final days in extremely impoverished conditions in the very towns and cities they helped rebuild after

4 Escape and its Discontents from: London Irish Fictions
Abstract: Edna O’Brien is regarded today as one of Ireland’s most eminent writers. Declan Kiberd, for instance, has referred to her prose style as one of ‘surpassing beauty and exactitude’.¹ Such accolades, however, are a relatively recent phenomenon. It is only in the last ten to fifteen years that substantial critical attention has been paid to her work, largely due to the endeavours of feminist scholars.² Most criticism of O’Brien’s work has been from the perspective of gender and sexuality, something which is not surprising given the subject-matter of her early work.³ For critics who read her through psychoanalytical theory, it

5 Ersatz Exiles from: London Irish Fictions
Abstract: The prospects for pursuing a literary career in the censorious moral climate of mid-twentieth-century Ireland were seriously circumscribed. Literature was a key target of the draconian censorship laws passed by the government of the Irish Free State and there were few opportunities and outlets for young aspiring writers, many of whom were forced (in time-honoured fashion) to seek fulfilment of their ambitions abroad.¹ For centuries, London had provided Irish writers with a potentially international market for their work. As a global hub of theatre and publishing, and by 1945 more physically accessible than hitherto, it became the favoured choice of

Introduction from: London Irish Fictions
Abstract: As Ireland slipped into severe recession in the late 1970s and early 1980s, unemployment rose dramatically. By 1984, it accounted for 16.4 per cent of the workforce and one in three out of work were under the age of twenty-five.¹ In parts of Dublin the figures were much higher, and it was here that the social consequences of unemployment were most marked, with a major drug and crime epidemic hitting the city. Meanwhile, in Northern Ireland, the intransigent position of the Thatcher government in relation to republican prisoners’ demands for political status led to the hunger strikes of 1981. As

7 Gendered Entanglements from: London Irish Fictions
Abstract: Margaret Mulvihill is one of the few Irish women writers to have written consistently about the experiences of the post-war Irish in Britain. Her three novels are all period pieces set in London in the 1980s and early 1990s and her characterizations of young Irish migrants from this time mirror some of the satirical observations in earlier work by Anthony Cronin and Donall Mac Amhlaigh. However, for Mulvihill, who was born in Dublin in 1954 and came to London in her twenties, her perspective on the subject of migration was also imbued with a pronounced feminist sensibility. Apart from being

8 Ex-Pat Pastiche from: London Irish Fictions
Abstract: In the economic and political circumstances of 1980s’ Ireland, emigration presented an attractive option – and in some cases the only option – for young people north and south of the border. The two key protagonists of the works I examine in this chapter, the first from Dublin and the second from Belfast, are representative of these changes. Their authors, Joseph O’Connor and Robert McLiam Wilson respectively, were typical of a new generation of Irish authors at the time who brought a renewed youthful iconoclasm to the pages of Irish fiction. Here, familiar locations of Irish London (the building site;

10 Irish Cockney Rebels from: London Irish Fictions
Abstract: The authors of the three memoirs I analyse in this chapter are all second-generation Irish men who grew up in working-class neighbourhoods of post-war London and explore this experience from the perspective of middle age. In the course of writing about their backgrounds, they regenerate themes and tropes familiar from texts in the previous two parts of this study. These occur in relation to narratives of nationality and gender, and also with regard to religion, class and sexuality. The conflicts and disjunctions of belonging that ensue are in part common experiences of childhood and adolescence, but in other ways they

11 Elastic Paddies from: London Irish Fictions
Abstract: In September 2009, Fintan O’Toole wrote an article in the Irish Timesin tribute to the late second-generation Irish poet, Michael Donaghy. Born in the Bronx, Donaghy lived most of his life in London and, through his work, epitomized the ambivalent yet undeniable attachment to Ireland experienced by many of the second generation. In the article, for which O’Toole coined the term I have used to title this chapter, he makes the following statement about Irishness:

Introduction: from: Back to Modern Reason
Abstract: In his youth, Johan Hjerpe served in the linen shop of the wholesaler Anders Kjellstedt in the Old Town. Like others he started at the bottom but did better than most, rising in time above his humble beginnings.² An industrious and decent man, in 1801 he eventually acquired a small workshop for the production of silk thread and camel hair, by which time he was already thirty-five

Chapter 5 Johan Hjerpe and the culture of Enlightenment from: Back to Modern Reason
Abstract: Within the relativistic framework of Enlightenment philosopy, a number of coherent thematic groupings stand out more than others: a secularised deismor atheism, an expanded awareness of the value of foreign cultures, and the transformative idea that history will never return to its starting point – a notion that for some like Fontenelle, Turgot or Condorcet was elevated to a belief in progress.

Gender and Artfulness in Rochester’s ‘Song of a Young Lady to Her Ancient Lover’ from: Reading Rochester
Author(s) WILCOX HELEN
Abstract: This essay arises primarily out of the experience of discussing Rochester’s work with readers who possess plenty of ‘Youth, Fire, Wit and Discernment’, namely, fascinated but perplexed undergraduates. How does Rochester, they ask, achieve that astonishing rational directness, that surprisingly delicate lyric grace? Why does he so regularly challenge these, and his readers, with cynicism and obscenity? Is his wit sharpened in anger or love? Is it concerned or dispassionate? Is there a consistent perspective underlying and shaping the variety of poetic masks worn in and by the texts? More particularly, as a male author did he regard the human

‘Something Genrous in Meer Lust’?: from: Reading Rochester
Author(s) CLARK STEPHEN
Abstract: Given Rochester's undisputed status as ‘one of the dirtiest poets in the canon’,¹ one might think that any sustained consideration of his work would at some point involve detailed attention to the issue of misogyny. This has not, however, proved to be the case. It is not that feminist criticism has neglected his writing: in the last 20 years Fabricant, Wilcoxon, Wintle and Nussbaum have all provided illuminating commentaries.² Yet considering the attention devoted to niceties of satiric form or problems of textual attribution, this aspect of his work has suffered at least comparative neglect, the issues involved apparently being

On Not Being a Very Punctual Subject: from: Reading Rochester
Author(s) DAVIS NICK
Abstract: Samuel Johnson, coming across the claim in Wood’s standard reference work and feeling obliged to do something with it, has recourse to sarcasm: ‘He read what is considered as polite learning so much, that he is

Book Title: Varieties of World Making-Beyond Globalization
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): WAGNER PETER
Abstract: Globalization has been the topic of heated debate in recent years, with one side asserting that it will produce a better standard of living for people around the world, and a fierce opposition arguing that it will ultimately lead to greater poverty and the destruction of unique human cultures. Varieties of World Making tackles the issue from a different angle, proposing that the contemporary global network of business, politics and culture be viewed from the inter-disciplinary perspective of ‘world making’. Drawn from the ranks of sociology, law, international relations, political philosophy and history, the distinguished contributors cut through polarized rhetoric to examine the current global situation. Their proposed diagnoses draw upon thoughtful analyses of various political dilemmas whose ripple effects are felt around the world, such as the volatile relationship between Islam and Europe, or the legal foundations for a true international order absent in the shadows of imperialism. Varieties of World Making will be an essential resource for all those grappling with the complex consequences of globalization for the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjmbn

CHAPTER FIVE Crime scene: from: Spanish Spaces
Abstract: This chapter and the next consider the links between the law and national identity, as further examples of the ways in which a notion of nation can trace itself through space and place. Space is one of the ideas listed by Tim Edensor in his discussion of the imbrications of legal frameworks, national identities and everyday life. ‘In a very practical sense, national identity is facilitated by the state’s legislative framework, which delimits and regulates the practices in which people can partake, the spaces in which they are permitted to move, and in many other ways provides a framework for

Book Title: V. Y. Mudimbe-Undisciplined Africanism
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): FRAITURE PIERRE-PHILIPPE
Abstract: VY Mudimbe: Undisciplined Africanism is the first English-language monograph dedicated to the work of Valentin Yves Mudimbe. This book charts the intellectual history of the seminal Congolese philosopher, epistemologist, and philologist from the late 1960s to the present day, exploring his major essays and novels. Pierre-Philippe Fraiture highlights Mudimbe’s trajectory through major debates on African nationalism, Panafricanism, neo-colonialism, negritude, pedagogy, Christianisation, decolonisation, anthropology, postcolonial representations, and a variety of other subjects, using these as contexts for close readings of many of Mudimbe’s texts, both influential and lesser-known. The book demonstrates that Mudimbe’s intellectual career has been informed by a series of decisive dialogues with some of the key exponents of Africanism (Herodotus, EW Blyden, Placide Tempels), continental and postcolonial thought (Jean-Paul Sartre, Frantz Fanon, Michel Foucault, and Claude Lévi-Strauss), and African thought and philosophy from Africa and the diaspora (L.S. Senghor, Patrice Nganang, and Achille Mbembe).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjnck

3 ‘The West or the Rest?’ from: V. Y. Mudimbe
Abstract: Anger, hope, Utopia, and radicalism are the four axes of V. Y. Mudimbe’s work in the 1970s. There is in this corpus a marked tendency to exaggerate the West’s supposed oneness and to convey the impression that the world, to use an expression first coined by Chinweizu² and the American anthropologist Marshall Sahlins,³ is made up of the ‘West and the Rest’. This dualistic dimension is all the more surprising given that Mudimbe advocates at the end of both L’Autre FaceandL’Odeuran epistemological ‘insurrection’ that would reject the very dualistic basis upon which colonialismandneo-colonialism are predicated.

Book Title: Thresholds of Meaning-Passage, Ritual and Liminality in Contemporary French Narrative
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): DUFFY JEAN H.
Abstract: Thresholds of Meaning examines contemporary French narrative and explores two related issues: the centrality within recent French fiction and autofiction of the themes of passage, ritual and liminality; and the thematic continuity which links this work with its literary ancestors of the 1960s and 1970s. Through the close analysis of novels and récits by Pierre Bergounioux, François Bon, Marie Darrieussecq, Hélène Lenoir, Laurent Mauvignier and Jean Rouaud, Duffy demonstrates the ways in which contemporary narrative, while capitalising on the formal lessons of the nouveau roman and drawing upon a shared repertoire of motifs and themes, engages with the complex processes by which meaning is produced in the referential world and, in particular, with the rituals and codes that social man brings into play in order to negotiate the various stages of the human life-cycle. By the application of concepts and models derived from ritual theory and from visual analysis, Thresholds of Meaning situates itself at the intersection of the developing field of literature and anthropology studies and research into word and image.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjnd2

Book Title: Heidegger and the Thinking of Place-Explorations in the Topology of Being
Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Malpas Jeff
Abstract: The idea of place--topos--runs through Martin Heidegger's thinking almost from the very start. It can be seen not only in his attachment to the famous hut in Todtnauberg but in his constant deployment of topological terms and images and in the situated, "placed" character of his thought and of its major themes and motifs. Heidegger's work, argues Jeff Malpas, exemplifies the practice of "philosophical topology." In Heidegger and the Thinking of Place, Malpas examines the topological aspects of Heidegger's thought and offers a broader elaboration of the philosophical significance of place. Doing so, he provides a distinct and productive approach to Heidegger as well as a new reading of other key figures--notably Kant, Aristotle, Gadamer, and Davidson, but also Benjamin, Arendt, and Camus. Malpas, expanding arguments he made in his earlier book Heidegger's Topology (MIT Press, 2007), discusses such topics as the role of place in philosophical thinking, the topological character of the transcendental, the convergence of Heideggerian topology with Davidsonian triangulation, the necessity of mortality in the possibility of human life, the role of materiality in the working of art, the significance of nostalgia, and the nature of philosophy as beginning in wonder. Philosophy, Malpas argues, begins in wonder and begins in place and the experience of place. The place of wonder, of philosophy, of questioning, he writes, is the very topos of thinking.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjp35

2 The Turning to/of Place from: Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: In T. H. White’s magnificent retelling of Malory, The Once and Future King, the character of Merlin has one especially peculiar characteristic: he lives his life backward, from future to past.¹ It has always seemed to me that a similarly backward trajectory is particularly suited to the reading of philosophers—at least those whose work is sustained by a significant unity of vision—and especially to the reading of a philosopher such as Heidegger (who himself tells us that in essential history the beginning comes last²). Much of my own reading of Heidegger (and not only Heidegger, but Davidson too)

3 The Place of Topology from: Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: The idea of philosophical topology, or “topography” as I call it outside of the Heideggerian context, takes the idea of place or toposas the focus for the understanding of the human, the understanding of world, and the understanding of the philosophical. Although the idea is not indebted solely to Heidegger’s thinking (it also draws, most notably, on the work of Donald Davidson and Hans-Georg Gadamer), it is probably to Heidegger that it owes the most. Moreover, one of my claims (a claim that underpins many of the essays here) is that Heidegger’s own work cannot adequately be understood except

10 Topology, Triangulation, and Truth from: Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: Heidegger’s Being and Timeis not primarily concerned with questions of interpretation or understanding. Its driving interest is instead ontological—an interest in the question of the “meaning of being.” Yet inasmuch as the work adopts a thoroughly hermeneuticized approach to ontology—the very focus on themeaningof being suggests as such—so the inquiry into ontology also involves Heidegger in an inquiry into the “structure” of understanding. Although the explicitly hermeneutic focus disappears from Heidegger’s later work, still the concern with understanding, thought in terms of a broader happening of disclosedness—a happening of world—can be seen

11 Heidegger in Benjaminʹs City from: Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: The work of Walter Benjamin is inextricably bound with the images and ideas associated with the metropolitan spaces and places that figure so prominently in his writing, and in close proximity to which his own life, from his childhood in Berlin to the last years in Paris, was lived. The work of Martin Heidegger, on the other hand, is usually taken to bring with it an almost entirely contrary set of associations—those of the rural and the provincial, of the peasant and the countryside—that can be seen as themselves deriving from Heidegger’s own rootedness in the Alemannic-Swabian countryside,

12 The Working of Art from: Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: What is the relation between the “objectivity” of an artwork, that is, its material being as an object, and its natureas an artwork?¹ The relation is surely not an irrelevant or contingent one, and yet its nature is not at all self-evident. Indeed, in the case of some artworks, namely those that fall within the category of certain forms of so-called conceptual art, it might seem as if the material objectivity of the work (where “objectivity” is taken to refer to what we might also call, a little awkwardly in English, the “thingness” of the work) is entirely incidental

Book Title: Interested Readers-Essays on the Hebrew Bible in Honor of David J. A. Clines
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Maier Christl M.
Abstract: Readers of the Hebrew Bible are interested readers, bringing their own perspectives to the text. The essays in this volume, written by friends and colleagues who have drawn inspiration from and shown interest in the scholarship of David Clines, engage with his work through examining interpretations of the Hebrew Bible in areas of common exploration: literary/exegetical readings, ideological-critical readings, language and lexicography, and reception history. The contributors are James K. Aitken, Jacques Berlinerblau, Daniel Bodi, Roland Boer, Athalya Brenner, Mark G. Brett, Marc Zvi Brettler, Craig C. Broyles, Philip P. Chia, Jeremy M. S. Clines, Adrian H. W. Curtis, Katharine J. Dell, Susan E. Gillingham, Susanne Gillmayr-Bucher, Edward L. Greenstein, Mayer I. Gruber, Norman C. Habel, Alan J. Hauser, Jan Joosten, Paul J. Kissling, Barbara M. Leung Lai, Diana Lipton, Christl M. Maier, Heather A. McKay, Frank H. Polak, Jeremy Punt, Hugh S. Pyper, Deborah W. Rooke, Eep Talstra, Laurence A. Turner, Stuart Weeks, Gerald O. West, and Ian Young.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjz47

(Divine) Silence Is Golden: from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Brettler Marc Zvi
Abstract: It is a privilege to participate in this volume honoring David. He supported me early in my career, accepting my dissertation as a JSOT Supplement volume; he welcomed me to Sheffield when I was on sabbatical in England and wanted to discuss my second book, and has always been supportive of my work. His range, creativity, skill, boldness, and love of fun have served as a model for me, as has his ability to combine solid old-style philology with modern approaches to biblical studies.

Egypt-Watching: from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Lipton Diana
Abstract: In Orientalism,¹ Edward Said set out his influential account of the way that the West views the East, a perspective characterized by fantasies of licentiousness and rampant sexuality, heightened human fecundity and agricultural abundance, dubious moral values, wealthy despotic rulers, and practitioners of the unnatural arts. Later on, inCulture and Imperialism,² Said joined his critics in nuancing some aspects of his work. Most significantly, he broke down the East-West dichotomy that lay at the heart of his earlier manifesto. Orientalism was not after all a matter of geographic direction—the way the West regards the East—but of differentiation,

Desperately Seeking Yhwh: from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Turner Laurence A.
Abstract: The enigma of God’s absence from the MT of Esther has intrigued readers for centuries. This study will investigate the claims made for the literary phenomenon of acrostics, which allegedly reveal the divine name in the book. Particular attention will be given to popular works of the last century or so, in which such arguments are regularly made and which show no signs of diminishing.

Reading as a Canaanite: from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Brett Mark G.
Abstract: Professor David Clines has authored a number of provocative works in which he has argued, in various ways, for the rights of readers over against authors. In this essay I will engage with only two versions of the argument and make some observations on the relationships between them. In one version, which might be termed Ideologiekritik, he suggests that it is incumbent on critical readers to block the flow of ideology from biblical texts to scholarly commentary.¹ If this first version of the argument can be understood as a restriction on hermeneutical trade, then ironically, the second version sounds decidedly

Voice and Ideology in Ecclesiastes: from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Lai Barbara M. Leung
Abstract: Two notions, rooted in the rubrics of biblical interpretation in general and reading strategy in particular, form the conceptual framework and specific directives for this endeavor. First, the biblical text is an ideological production. This not only means that all texts have ideology, but that interpreters also read the text from their respective ideological formations.² The ideologies of the ancient community of Israel ingrained in the Hebrew Bible are “historically and culturally far removed from the ideologies of our owndays.”³ Engaging in ideological critical reading is, in essence, the merging of the two horizons—the horizon of the ancient text

Possibilities and Prospects of Postcolonial Biblical Interpretation: from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Punt Jeremy
Abstract: Biblical scholarship is (generally) self-reflective and self-critical. Scholars investigate and interpret biblical texts while exploring the value as well as the limitations of theories and methodologies in their work.¹ Older, existing theories are adjusted and new models are probed and developed.² Various biblical scholars see in postcolonial biblical interpretation a further development along the lines of ideological criticism—even if not perpetuating it. But what is postcolonial biblical interpretation? And how does it manifest in South(ern) Africa? The answer is of course determined by both inquirer and respondent, constituted as they are withinand constitutive as they areofof

The Invention of Language in the Poetry of Job from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Greenstein Edward L.
Abstract: The book of Job, particularly its poetic core, appears to contain more unique words and linguistic usages than any comparable work from the ancient Near East. The distinctive language of Job has been attributed to a number of literary factors. For one thing, the characters and events are set in a much earlier, legendary period—the time of the patriarchs.¹ Not only does Job enjoy a lifestyle that is reminiscent of the rural, sheep-and-goat-herding Hebrew patriarchs, but the description of Job and his situation in the narrative framework of the book features language and allusions to the stories of Genesis.²

Notes on Some Hebrew Words in Ecclesiastes from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Weeks Stuart
Abstract: Biblical scholars in general are well provided with lexicographical resources—not least among them now the Dictionary of Classical Hebrew, edited by David Clines. The inclusion by this work of new words and meanings found only in Ben Sira and the Qumran texts has been especially helpful for those of us working on late biblical materials, and students of Ecclesiastes, in particular, have had the benefit also in recent years of Antoon Schoors’s magisterial work on the language of Qoheleth, the second volume of which is devoted to a consideration of the book’s vocabulary.¹ There are many words in Ecclesiastes,

The Bible in the Twenty-First Century—Where and How? from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Brenner Athalya
Abstract: David Clines has been an original interpreter of things biblical for decades. His brands of interpretation have always been interesting, original, and erudite, combining the old and the new “on the way to the [post] modern.” His love of the Hebrew bible,¹ unromantic and nonromanticizing, critical yet steadfast, shines through his oeuvre: a veritable Torah scholar. He read and still reads in context and out of context, from various perspectives and directions: so to speak from left-to-right, his own idiom,² and also from right-to-left.³ In his work as a scholar, publisher, teacher, and administrator, he made a profoundly serious difference

Judging Judges Scholarship from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Hauser Alan J.
Abstract: This essay is dedicated to David Clines, whose commitment to the reassessment, reconfiguration, and advancement of biblical scholarship has been a hallmark of his career and whose breadth of scholarly interests serves as a model to us all. David’s accomplishments in a variety of venues of biblical scholarship have truly been remarkable, as has been his assistance to other scholars in getting their works disseminated, both through the press he founded, and through the numerous journals he launched. David is a remarkable scholar and friend.

Boaz Reawakened: from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Pyper Hugh S.
Abstract: Among his other signal contributions to the development of biblical studies, David Clines has been a pioneering voice in the study of masculinity in biblical texts. It is a mark of his importance in this field that he contributes some “final reflections” to Ovidiu Creangă’s edited volume on Men and Masculinity in the Hebrew Bible and Beyond, in addition to contributing a chapter himself.¹ In these reflections, while acknowledging that the volume marks a coming of age for such studies, he makes a threefold plea for further work. First, he calls for a broadening of the theoretical base of masculinity

Book Title: Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II-The Pontigny Encounters at Mount Holyoke College, 19421944
Publisher: University of Massachusetts Press
Author(s): Remmler Karen
Abstract: Sixty years ago, at the height of World War II, an extraordinary series of gatherings took place at Mount Holyoke College in western Massachusetts. During the summers of 1942–1944, leading Europeanﬁgures in the arts and sciences met at the college with their American counterparts for urgent conversations about the future of human civilization in a precarious world. Two Sorbonne professors, the distinguished medievalist Gustave Cohen and the existentialist philosopher Jean Wahl, organized these “Pontigny” sessions, named after an abbey in Burgundy where similar symposia had been held in the decades before the war. Among the participants—many of whom were Jewish or had Jewish backgrounds—were the philosophers Hannah Arendt and Rachel Bespaloff, the poets Marianne Moore and Wallace Stevens, the anthropologist Claude LéviStrauss and the linguist Roman Jakobson, and the painters Marc Chagall and Robert Motherwell. In this collection of original essays, Stanley Cavell and Jacques Derrida lead an international group of scholars—including Jed Perl, Mary Ann Caws, Jeffrey Mehlman, and Elisabeth YoungBruehl—in assessing the lasting impact and contemporary signiﬁcance of Pontignyen Amérique. Rachel Bespaloff, a tragicﬁgure who wrote a major work on the Iliad, is restored to her rightful place beside Arendt and Simone Weil. Anyone interested in the “intellectual resistance” of Francophone intellectuals and artists, and the inspiring support from such Americanﬁgures as Stevens and Moore, will want to read this pioneering work of scholarship and historical recreation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vk4c8

The Tiger Leaps: from: Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Mehlman Jeffrey
Abstract: Surely Walter Benjamin, who had been at Pontigny in 1938, would have been at the Mount Holyoke Pontigny colloquia of the war years, and the pathos of those gatherings owes not a little to his absence. Benjamin called one of his protracted meditations preliminary to the Arcades Project “Zentralpark”—largely because he no doubt imagined himself working out the Baudelairean issues those pages deal with while strolling through Central Park in Manhattan. What would the final format of the Arcades Project have been? And might there not have been a Mount Holyoke Konvolut—a folder of citations and observations assembled

A Tale of Two Iliads from: Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Benfey Christopher
Abstract: The critic Kenneth Burke once suggested that classic literary works could serve as “equipment for living” by revealing familiar narrative patterns in new and chaotic circumstances.¹ If so, it should not surprise us that European readers in times of war should look to their first poem for guidance. As early as the fall of 1935, Jean Giraudoux’s popular play La guerre de Troie n’aura pas lieuencouraged his French audience to think of their country as vulnerable Troy while an armed and menacing Hitler was the “Tiger at the Gates” (as the play was titled in English). Truth was the

Rediscovering Rachel Bespaloff from: Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Jutrin Monique
Abstract: For many years I have been studying the work of Benjamin Fondane, a poet, philosopher, critic, and playwright, who was a contemporary of Rachel Bespaloff. In a diary of Fondane’s encounters and discussions with Shestov I came across the name of Rachel Bespaloff for the first time.¹ She appeared an irritating woman who never agreed with Shestov. Bespaloff’s father, Daniel Pasmanik, a friend of Shestov’s, introduced his daughter to him. At first, she was very impressed by Shestov. He awakened her to philosophical thought, and she is still considered a disciple of Shestov, though she later became opposed to certain

Chapter 2 The Reformulation of the Philoponean Proofs in Mediaeval Jewish Thought from: Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Hegedus Gyongyi
Abstract: This essay seeks to provide three examples of how proofs about the createdness of the world, found in the works of the Aristotelian/Neo-Platonic philosopher John Philoponus (490–570) were reformulated in early medieval Jewish thought, namely, in two works of Saadya Gaon (882–942).¹ In the vivid atmosphere of the religious debates of 10 thcentury Baghdad, it became necessary both for Muslim and Jewish thinkers to provide a system through which the statements of the Bible and of the Qur’an could be justified not by mere belief and acceptance but also by rationalistic proofs. The question of creation ex nihilo,

Chapter 3 Putting Islam and ‘The West’ Together Again: from: Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Armour Leslie
Abstract: The voices of reason are often drowned out when the talk turns to the prospects of a ‘clash of civilizations’. M. M. Sharif was one of the two most influential Muslim philosophers of the 20 thcentury. Only Mohammed Iqbal (1877–1938), perhaps, equalled him. Sharif was the creator of an original philosophical system, the editor of the most impressive collection of studies on the history of Muslim philosophy, and the founder of the Pakistan Philosophical Congress. Yet he is little heard of now and, indeed, no library in North America or England has a complete set of his works.

Chapter 4 British Idealism as a Migrating Tradition from: Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Sweet William
Abstract: It has long been recognized that the philosophy of late-19 th- and early-20th-century British Idealism had a significant influence in Britain, not only on the philosophical thought of the time, but also on religion, politics and social and public policy.¹ Its impact, however, was felt not only in Britain but throughout much of its empire and even beyond. Recent studies have noted the presence of the work of the British idealists in Canada, Australia and South Africa, and also in the United States, India, Japan and China.² Nevertheless, relatively little has been written concerning precisely how and how far the presence

Chapter 5 The Migration of Ideas and Afrikaans Philosophy in South Africa from: Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Duvenage Pieter
Abstract: The phenomenon of philosophy in the Afrikaans language is the result of social and cultural circumstances that have played themselves out for more than two centuries in South Africa. From the 19 thcentury, Afrikaans (and South African) philosophy has been influenced by British Idealism, continental thought (including phenomenology, existentialism, critical theory, hermeneutics, and post-structuralism), Anglo-American conceptual analysis, and philosophies informed by religious traditions, such as Reformational philosophy and Thomism. It is presently also no surprise that philosophers who work on postmodernism, postcolonialism, feminism, analytic philosophy and African philosophy do so by utilizing formulations of other contexts. Consequently, the following questions

Chapter 9 A Buddhist ‘good life’ Theory: from: Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Patrik Linda E.
Abstract: Scholars in diaspora carry their texts with them—as many texts as possible—to preserve their cultural and intellectual tradition when they are threatened by political forces and military invasions. The Tibetan scholars who fled Tibet in 1959 managed to bring out a large number of classic texts central to the Mahayana Buddhist philosophy and religion of pre-invasion Tibet. Among these texts was an old Indian Buddhist work on ethics, Śāntideva’s Bodhicaryāvatāra (Guide to the Bodhisattva Path), which had itself been carried out of India centuries earlier during the time when Buddhism disappeared from its Indian birthplace. For over a

Chapter 13 The Philosophers of Al Andalus and European Modernity from: Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Lea David
Abstract: This chapter explores the development of the concept of autonomous reason within the Islamic tradition, with special emphasis on the philosophers of Al Andalus—those of the Iberian peninsula and the region of the Languedoc, following the Omayyad Muslim conquest from the 8 thcentury. The chapter draws attention to important parallels that may show instances of the influence of their thinking during the European Renaissance and the Enlightenment as seen in the philosophical works of Descartes, Rousseau and Kant. After pointing out a number of similarities and possible influences, I also note the fact that Western philosophy after the Renaissance

2 FROM IDEA TO RESEARCH PROPOSAL: from: Researching Dance
Author(s) Hanstein Penelope
Abstract: Research is a confusing term; it has so many meanings and applications that it is difficult to understand precisely what we mean when we speak about research in a scholarly sense. We all have done research of one sort or another—looked up the date of the first performance of a favored dance work, sought pedagogical information by asking several experienced teachers about the best way to present material in a choreography class, or consulted Consumer Reportsto select the best VCR to purchase. All of these activities do indeed involve research, but are they research as scholarship?

3 MODELS AND METAPHORS: from: Researching Dance
Author(s) Hanstein Penelope
Abstract: New knowledge may take many forms, ranging from art works to personal narratives to mathematical theorems to scientific findings. Such knowledge emerging from the research process is most often in the form of theory. Theory, like research, has many definitions and applications. Some of these are narrow and restrictive, requiring a theory to be derived from quantifiable data and capable of being tested. Other definitions are more inclusive and consider a theory to be a systematically organized set of statements that analyze and explain the nature and behavior of a specified set of phenomena. This understanding includes those theories resulting

5 SCIENTIFIC EXPLORATION IN DANCE from: Researching Dance
Author(s) Chatfield Steven J.
Abstract: The history of science is replete with experimentalists who, like the princes of Serendip, “were always making discoveries, by accident or sagacity, of things they were not in quest of.”¹ Because of its conventional presentational format, scientific experimentation might appear to some to be an extremely orderly, even formulaic sequence of steps that all experimentalists follow in their efforts to contribute to the smoothly cumulative, linear advancement of scientific knowledge. However, in an analysis of the history of science it becomes apparent that many great discoveries were happy accidents discovered by creative and perceptive workers through absorption in inventive experimental

10 EVERY LITTLE MOVEMENT HAS A MEANING ALL ITS OWN: from: Researching Dance
Author(s) Brennan Mary Alice
Abstract: To state that human movement is the basis of dance is not a revelation. What is surprising is that its detailed study has not more fully permeated all areas of dance research and that a conceptual framework and systematic approach of movement analysis applicable for inclusion in varied research designs is still not widely accepted. Attention to the analysis of dance movement is not new. For centuries people have given verbal descriptions of steps, drawn pictures or symbols of dance, and eloquently detailed in words the poetry of dance movement. Through these efforts present-day scholars have clues to what dance

4.1 Explanations of Colors: from: Mindscapes
Author(s) Machamer Peter
Abstract: It is difficult to critically comment upon a paper with which one agrees both about the general goals and about their substantive implementation. Hardin’s paper is informative and well argued, and certainly furthers the work in color perception that he established in Color for Philosophers. Most interestingly, in this paper he took what is thought to be clearly aphilosophicalproblem, the inverted spectrum, and showed how attention to detail, scientific and phenomenological, could be utilized to dissolve the force of the case. It appears that humans could not invert the spectrum without there being noticeable differences—“something got lost

6 Explaining Voluntary Action: from: Mindscapes
Author(s) Prinz Wolfgang
Abstract: There is a common and widespread belief that the way we perceive the physical world is fundamentally different from the way we are aware of our own mental world. In order to perceive events in the outer world, it is held, the mind has to get into contact with matter. For this purpose it relies on a complex machinery (sense organs, nerves, central processing modules, etc.), and the working of that machinery yields results that may be more or less adequate representations of the events to be represented.

The Consolations and Dangers of Fantasy: from: The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) Sullivan Daniel
Abstract: The horror film genre is part of the foundation of Tim Burton’s personality and body of work. His philosophy of life and film is partly shaped by the possibilities he has long seen in the realm of dark cinematic fantasy. As a child, Burton saw in horror films and writing an inventive escape from drudgery and an outlet for aggressive or antisocial tendencies. In particular, he was captivated by the work of Vincent Price and Roger Corman, who brought the stories and poems of Edgar Allan Poe to big-screen life in the 1960s. The creative potentialities Burton saw in horror

Johnny Depp Is a Big Baby! from: The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) Walling Mark
Abstract: Ed Wood (Johnny Depp) is directing a scene in Tim Burton’s biopic ( Ed Wood,1994) of the man voted the worst film director of all time. The film isBride of the Atom,which was released asBride of the Monster(1955), one of Wood’s more infamous works. As he enters a room, Tor Johnson (George “The Animal” Steele), a bald-headed, hairy-shouldered professional wrestler turned actor, receives instructions from Wood to act upset. Tor grasps his rock of a head with massive hands. Wood corrects, “No, no, you’re not that upset. You want to keep moving. You’ve got to get

A Symphony of Horror: from: The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) Jenkins Jennifer L.
Abstract: Sweeney Todd(2007) marks a significant deviation for Tim Burton in terms of his prior work and practice.¹ While he had already worked on musicals (The Nightmare Before Christmas[1993],Corpse Bride[2005]) and literary adaptations (Sleepy Hollow[1999],Planet of the Apes[2001],Big Fish[2004],Charlie and the Chocolate Factory[2005]),Sweeneydiffers by being an adaptation of an existing stage musical with a long provenance. Nor is it scored by Burton’s longtime collaborator Danny Elfman. It shares with his other adapted works a firm grounding in the American literary canon, Stephen Sondheim being the touted scion of

It’s Uncanny: from: The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) McMahon Jennifer L.
Abstract: For a quarter of a century, Tim Burton has captivated audiences with his offbeat creations. Known for his macabre style and predisposition for the fantastic, Burton consistently delights viewers with his strange settings and peculiar characters. As anyone acquainted with Burton’s corpus is aware, his work is often characterized as macabre because it features death so prominently. Whether blatantly, through the presence of characters that personify death, or merely through a character’s encounter with mortality, Burton consistently reminds audiences of their finitude. Indeed, he reinstates the long-standing artistic tradition of memento mori, the tradition of incorporating explicit symbols of mortality

Affect without Illusion: from: The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) LaRocca David
Abstract: The director Edward D. Wood Jr. is derided for the films he made in the 1950s and otherwise notorious as the “worst director of all time”—a sort of patron saint of the B movie.¹ Part of the pleasure audiences derive from proclaiming Wood the worst practitioner of filmmaking seems linked with an expression of resentment: hidden in the criticism of his work lies a belief and expectation (perhaps unacknowledged or unarticulated) that filmmakers are supposed to show us our world by taking us out of it. To outer space if need be. Science fiction, for example, is a film

Book Title: Joseph Brodsky-A Literary Life
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Miller Jane Ann
Abstract: In this penetrating biography, Brodsky's life and work are illuminated by his great friend, the late poet and literary scholar Lev Loseff. Drawing on a wide range of source materials, some previously unpublished, and extensive interviews with writers and critics, Loseff carefully reconstructs Brodsky's personal history while offering deft and sensitive commentary on the philosophical, religious, and mythological sources that influenced the poet's work. Published to great acclaim in Russia and now available in English for the first time, this is literary biography of the first order, and sets the groundwork for any books on Brodsky that might follow.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkrv3

CHAPTER TWO from: Joseph Brodsky
Abstract: BRODSKY’S APPLICATION to the submarine school of the Second Baltic Naval Academy was rejected, and he always assumed that he’d been turned down because he was Jewish. When he dropped out of school just short of sixteen years of age, he first found work as an apprentice machinist at Factory No. 671, better known in the city by its older and more revealing name, the Arsenal. He worked there for roughly six months.

CHAPTER THREE from: Joseph Brodsky
Abstract: Thanks to his native energy and imagination, there are good lines to be found even in the work he wrote at age eighteen or nineteen. But these poems are mainly youthful stabs at writing “deathless verse.” Like others his age,

Book Title: Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Weir Justin
Abstract: One hundred years after his death, Tolstoy still inspires controversy with his notoriously complex narrative strategies. This original book explores how and why Tolstoy has mystified interpreters and offers a new look at his most famous works of fiction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkwn0

Introduction from: Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: When Tolstoy states dramatically in his aesthetic treatise What Is Art?that “the interpretation of works of art by words only indicates that the interpreter is himself incapable of feeling the infection of art,”¹ one forgets, for just a moment, that Tolstoy himself is using words to tell us how to understand art. For me, the exploration of this kind of mild contradiction is part of what makes reading Tolstoy enjoyable. Sometimes the contradiction is really nothing more than the thematic chiaroscuro of a story, as when Tolstoy celebrates fidelity in vivid stories of adultery, or cherishes the innocence of

3 Legitimate Fictions and Narrative Diversions from: Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: Tolstoy’s authorial personality, even in the antipoetic guise quoted above, was the fruit of much thought and creative imagination. He considered how his fiction created a public perception of him, and realized that perception would affect how people read his fiction. A work of literature invariably presents some kind of image of the author to the reader, and publication is an opportunity for authors to shape and manage their presentation of a self. What kind of self does Tolstoy craft for his reader? Neither an entirely accessible, unmediated essence (an ideal of the diary), nor an opaque and impersonal source

8 Anna Incommunicada from: Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: Chernyshevsky coined the term inner monologuefor Tolstoy’s technique of describing “the secret process through the mediation of which a thought or a feeling is worked out.”² But Anna’s final impressions go

11 The Role of Violence in Art from: Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: Although Hadji Murad(1896–1904) is, as we have seen, a story in which violence seems indivisible from fiction, Tolstoy spent most of the years of its authorship developing, publicizing, and trying to live by the precepts of his religious philosophy. His most important work espousing nonviolence in these years wasThe Kingdom of God Is within You(1893). Nonviolence united Tolstoy’s dreams for a communal brotherhood of man with his increasingly strident opposition to the government and Russian Orthodox church. Was Tolstoy a hypocrite for preaching nonviolence while simultaneously writing sometimes lurid violent fiction? No, not in the ordinary

12 On Tolstoy’s Authorship from: Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: For the conclusion of this book, I would like to treat Tolstoy’s narrative alibi within the tradition of primarily western theories of authorial intent and identity. Narrative alibi is the term I have been using throughout this study to describe, first, Tolstoy’s exculpatory fictions, works like “Father Sergius,” where the author looks back at his previous sinful life and creates a narrative arc that leads toward conversion and repentance. I have also used the term narrative alibito characterize the gaps or absences that Tolstoy incribed into his early works. Although all literary texts have gaps, Tolstoy especially worked to

Book Title: Utopia-Second Edition
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): HARP JERRY
Abstract: Saint Thomas More's Utopiais one of the most important works of European humanism and serves as a key text in survey courses on Western intellectual history, the Renaissance, political theory, and many other subjects. Preeminent More scholar Clarence H. Miller does justice to the full range of More's rhetoric in this masterful translation. In a new afterword to this edition, Jerry Harp contextualizes More's life andUtopiawithin the wider frames of European humanism and the Renaissance."Clarence H. Miller's fine translation tracks the supple variations of More's Latin with unmatched precision, and his Introduction and notes are masterly. Jerry Harp's new Afterword adroitly places More's wonderful little book into its broader contexts in intellectual history."-George M. Logan, author ofThe Meaning of More's "Utopia""Sir Thomas More'sUtopiais not merely one of the foundational texts of western culture, but also a book whose most fundamental concerns are as urgent now as they were in 1516 when it was written. Clarence H. Miller's wonderful translation of More's classic is now happily once again available to readers. This is the English edition that best captures the tone and texture of More's original Latin, and its notes and introduction, along with the lively afterward by Jerry Harp, graciously supply exactly the kinds of help a modern reader might desire."-David Scott Kastan, Yale University
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkxkg

BOOK 1 from: Utopia
Abstract: Recently the invincible king of England,²¹ Henry the eighth of that name, who is lavishly endowed with all skills necessary for an outstanding ruler, had some matters of no small moment²² which had to be worked out with Charles, the most serene prince of Castile.²³ To discuss and resolve these differences he sent me to Flanders as his ambassador; I was the companion and colleague of the incomparable Cuthbert Tunstall, whom he recently appointed to be Master of the Rolls, to the enormous satisfaction of everyone.²⁴ I will say nothing in his praise, not because I am afraid that my

Book Title: The Allure of the Archives- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Davis Natalie Zemon
Abstract: Arlette Farge's Le Goût de l'archiveis widely regarded as a historiographical classic. While combing through two-hundred-year-old judicial records from the Archives of the Bastille, historian Farge was struck by the extraordinarily intimate portrayal they provided of the lives of the poor in pre-Revolutionary France, especially women. She was seduced by the sensuality of old manuscripts and by the revelatory power of voices otherwise lost. InThe Allure of the Archives, she conveys the exhilaration of uncovering hidden secrets and the thrill of venturing into new dimensions of the past.Originally published in 1989, Farge's classic work communicates the tactile, interpretive, and emotional experience of archival research while sharing astonishing details about life under the Old Regime in France. At once a practical guide to research methodology and an elegant literary reflection on the challenges of writing history, this uniquely rich volume demonstrates how surrendering to the archive's allure can forever change how we understand the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vm50t

Foreword from: The Allure of the Archives
Author(s) Davis Natalie Zemon
Abstract: Readers of Arlette Farge’s writings have marveled at the world of eighteenth-century France that she has opened before our eyes. Whether in her stylish and lyrical French or in excellent English translation, her books have brought to life women and men of Paris in their workshops, bedrooms, and kitchens; on their doorsteps and in their streets and taverns; making appeals to their parish church and summoned before the commissariat of police. She has retrieved stories of love and abandonment among young working people and servants; of quarrels between apprentices and masters, with the master’s wife standing in the middle; of

Aggressors, Victims, and Peacemakers: from: The Religion and Science Debate
Author(s) NUMBERS RONALD L.
Abstract: Talk of the relations between “science” and “religion” first became audible in the early 1800s, about the time that students of nature began referring to their work as science rather than natural philosophy (or natural history). Because natural philosophy allowed its practitioners, in the words of Isaac Newton, to discourse about God “from the appearances of things,” one searches almost in vain for references to “natural philosophy and religion.” Some writers expressed concern about tension between faith and reason, but they never pitted religion against science.¹

2 Cassirer’s Concept of a Philosophy of Human Culture from: Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) VERENE DONALD PHILLIP
Abstract: Cassirer’s philosophy, in the end, is a philosophy of culture. He makes this clear in the title of his book An Essay on Man: An Introduction to a Philosophy of Culture, published a year before his death, which he intended to be a summary of his philosophy of symbolic forms. In a review of this work, Brand Blanshard, while expressing admiration for Cassirer’s great learning, regrets its lack of speculative depth. He says: “It is hard not to think, as one reads a book so wealthy as this in historic and scientific erudition, but at the same time so oddly

3 The Modern Concept of Culture as Indicator of a Metaphysical Problem from: Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) ORTH ERNST WOLFGANG
Abstract: In this essay I will not attempt to give an interpretation of Cassirer’s philosophy, that is, of his philosophy of symbolic forms; rather, by starting with problems and results in Cassirer’s work, I want to thematize our presentday concept of culture and show its role in our general orientation in philosophy. My thesis is that the concept of culture is coming more and more to fulfill a metaphysical function and that in this way the philosophy of culture is being transformed—explicitly or implicitly—into a new prima philosophia.

7 Styles of Change: from: Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) Powell Larson
Abstract: On first looking into a text by Cassirer, nearly every reader notices two things: first, the clear language, which loses none of its immediacy even when Cassirer elucidates the most complex theoretical contexts, and, second, the difficulty, despite this clarity and vividness of language, of reconstructing the argumentative process of Cassirer’s thought.¹ Cassirer’s texts blend the objects represented with the author’s own position or thesis in each work. This individual, if not idiosyncratic type of argumentation often has the effect of making the place and voice of the author seem to disappear behind the problem in question. It is thus

9 From Culture to Politics: from: Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) RUDOLPH ENNO
Abstract: Cassirer did not write an ethics, and there are interpreters of his work who consider this a deficiency. This criticism reminds me of a question an interlocutor whose name we don’t know is supposed to have directed to Martin Heidegger: “When will you write ethics?” Heidegger tells us about this event in his famous “Letter on Humanism,” which he wrote to Jean Beaufret in 1946.¹ In the wake of “destroying” the traditional understanding of humanism he raises this question after a revealing reference to a pre-Socratic philosopher, Heraclitus, and provides the following answer: ethics derives from the Greek “ethos” which

10 Speaking of Symbols: from: Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) BISHOP PAUL
Abstract: At first glance, the differences between the philosophy of Ernst Cassirer and the psychology of C. G. Jung would seem to outweigh any affinities.¹ To begin with, the one was a philosopher who taught in university departments, the other a psychologist with no philosophical training and a practice to run. (One of the most important philosophical sources for Jung was the second edition of the Allgemeines Handwörterbuch der philosophischen Wissenschaften[1832] by Wilhelm Traugott Krug [1770–1842], a distinctly popular, if famous, work.) As far as personal background and education are concerned, Cassirer was born of factory-owning, Jewish parents in

Introduction from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Noordegraaf Julia
Abstract: Since their emergence, time-based media such as film, video, and digital media have been used by artists who experimented with the potential of these media. In the 1920s, visual artists like Marcel Duchamp and Fernand Léger tested the aesthetic possibilities of film – a practice that continues into the 21st century in the oeuvre of artists such as Tacita Dean and Stan Douglas. The introduction of the first portable video recording system in the 1960s inspired artists like Nam June Paik and Andy Warhol to explore its application in sculptures, projection-based works, and multimedia events, initiating a wave in video

INTRODUCTION from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Hediger Vinzenz
Abstract: What is media art? Providing a working definition of its object is critical to any emerging new field of study, but particularly to the field of media art. The product of practices that often involve rapidly changing technologies and ephemeral performance elements, media art is difficult for critics, curators, and archivists to pin down in terms of the established taxonomies of art history or film and media studies. Laying the groundwork for the following parts of the book, this part offers four different approaches to the methodological, theoretical, and practical challenges involved in developing a taxonomy of media art that

CHAPTER 3 Media Aesthetics from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Marchiori Dario
Abstract: Aesthetics as a philosophical discipline arose in the middle of the 18th century, when art came to be defined as an autonomous field of rules, social practices, and institutions (like museums). For that historical reason, aesthetics is not just “art theory,” as it articulates both more general and more particular issues, for instance: perception through the senses, the definition of beauty, judgment of taste, the truth content of an artwork and its relationship to (physical, psychological, economic etc.) reality, the questions of originality and newness; eventually, the definition and the very possibility of “art” itself, which becomes a serious matter

CHAPTER 4 Media Art and the Digital Archive from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Saba Cosetta G.
Abstract: This chapter aims to introduce an epistemological reflection on the concept of “digital archiving” applied to media art. If the latter appears for many reasons to constitute something “transient and un-archivable” (Ernst, 2004 and 2010), it is because it presents itself ontologically in an exponentially complex form. In other words, the aim is to underline the problems (theoretical and methodological) that media art poses to digital archiving. In order to keep media artworks accessible to contemporary and future users, their inclusion in digital archives is desirable. Digital archives can support the fundamental function of the cultural conservationof these works

INTRODUCTION from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Noordegraaf Julia
Abstract: Whereas the conservation, restoration, and exhibition of classical artworks like painting and sculpture generally primarily raises

CHAPTER 5 The Analysis of the Artwork from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Marchiori Dario
Abstract: While the Greek etymology of analysis means “dis-solution,” analysis as a thinking practice (which has been theorized since the ancient times, initially in the realm of geometry¹) involves the related idea of a “breaking up”²: the first experience of it may be considered that of a child breaking a toy to understand its internal structure, and the way it works. Modern thought has reinforced this “decompositional” conception of analysis, which “found its classic statement in the work of Kant at the end of the eighteenth century” and “set the methodological agenda for philosophical approaches and debates in the (late) modern

CHAPTER 6 Methodologies of Multimedial Documentation and Archiving from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Abstract: Documentation is the process of gathering and organizing information about a work, including its condition, its content, its context, and the actions taken to preserve it. For the writing of art history one used to be able to rely on the art objects. When artworks become prone to obsolescence or are only meant to exist for a short period, documentation is the only thing people can fall back on. The traditional documentation strategy for the conservation of art is focused on describing the object, in the best objective way possible. But conservation as a practice is not as fixed as

INTRODUCTION from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Saba Cosetta G.
Abstract: Within a framework of the system of relations between “technology” and “culture,” the third part of this book is dedicated to preservation and restoration theories and practices, and has two sides. On one hand (in chapter 7), the history of research and technological innovation in the media area is highlighted, also in the case of “low cost” examples, emphasizing the deconstruction and reinvention processes produced by artistic practices with respect to the industrial structures of cinema (7.1), television (7.2), and information technology (7.3). On the other hand (in chapter 8), epistemological frameworks are introduced, as well as working methodologies, projects,

CHAPTER 7 Technological Platforms from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Abstract: Technological systems are dynamic entities, the stability of which relates to temporary convergencephenomena¹ within a cultural set that establishes the media system, based on industrial and communication standards and protocols. The dynamics of convergence do not only relate to the physical and technical identity of media, they also work in terms of individual and social imagery. In this sense, the aesthetic experiment in the artssub specietechnology has always worked as much on technological innovations as it has on protocols.² The protocols (like standards and recommendations) are the results of an economic and socio-cultural negotiation; they are a

CHAPTER 8 Theories, Techniques, Decision-making Models: from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Abstract: The operating practices of preservation and restoration raise complex questions of a methodological and theoretical nature. However, there are basically three questions that we must answer in order to work correctly: a) What is the identity of the material that we are analyzing? b) What are its conditions? c) How can we look after it? The first two questions are of a diagnostic nature, whilst the last one concerns the issues of prognosis.

INTRODUCTION from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Le Maître Barbara
Abstract: This fourth part of this book, which focuses on what is generally referred to as “exhibition strategies,” is structured in two parts. First, the ten contributions that make up chapter 9 explore the diversity of setups or principles of exhibition relating to film images that left behind their original cinematographic context (and its regime of projection in a theater with the lights off) to move towards museum spaces; or to works which come from the large and difficult to define category that is sometimes called media art or even time-based art. Second, Sarah Cook asks and discusses a fundamental question

CHAPTER 10 On Curating New Media Art from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Cook Sarah
Abstract: An untested observation about the existing scholarship of curatorial practice suggests that the majority of articles about curating and the curatorial profession (considering those mostly published in the mainstream contemporary art press but also those found in the academic press) concerns the work of freelancers and what their large-scale temporary shows mean for the state of contemporary art (O’Neill, 2007). In

Epilogue from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) de Tilly Ariane Noël
Abstract: During the fall of 2007, the Stedelijk Museum CS in Amsterdam presented the exhibition Andy Warhol. Other Voices, Other Rooms.¹ Curated by Eva Meyer-Hermann, the exhibition put forward the great variety of media Warhol used in his career such as film, photography, video, sound, graphic design, painting, and printmaking. Divided in three main sections –Cosmos, Filmscape, andTV-Scape– the exhibition shed light on artworks within Warhol’s oeuvre that were not yet widely known by the public: his films and videotapes. The sectionCosmoswas conceived as an inventory of all the media and themes Warhol had worked with.

Chapter Two Orkontros: from: Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Oosterbaan Martijn
Abstract: The boom in transportation and communication technology initiated in the last century has drastically changed the social and spatial geography of most European cities. Much in line with the work of Saskia Sassen,¹ Manuel Castells describes the new “informational city” as the “urban expression of the whole matrix of determination of the Informational Society, as the Industrial City was the spatial expression of the Industrial Society”.² Cities can be seen as hubs in the global network of people, information and goods, and – depending on their centrality in networks of finance, labour, production and information – such a position in

Chapter Six Digital Cartographies as Playful Practices from: Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Lammes Sybille
Abstract: My neighbour recently looked up a Google Street View image of his tattoo parlour in Amsterdam. He noticed that his bicycle was parked in front of his shop, so he gathered that the specially equipped cars that made the panoramic photographs were traversing the city on one of his working days. Becoming intrigued he returned to the map and looked up the school of his children whom he always picks up on his non-working days. On the Google Street View image a crowd of parents were gathering outside the school building. So he figured that the picture must have been

Chapter Eleven The Case of ccMixter: from: Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Jansen Bas
Abstract: The opening decade of the new millennium, especially the later part, saw a surge of enthusiasm for new digital technologies and the ways in which these enable formerly passive consumers to activate themselves and engage creatively with the culture surrounding them. Music technologies played a substantial role in this phenomenon. Nowadays, any enthusiast can home-record. Sampling and manipulating pre-existing music have become much simpler. Likewise, the distribution of music is no longer difficult and expensive. It is easy and costs next to nothing. As a consequence of these developments, the question how pop music production works no longer has a

Chapter Twelve On the Need for Cooperation between Art and Science from: Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Zwijnenberg Robert
Abstract: Over the last two decades there has been an increasing tendency for artists to seek partnerships with academics and vice versa.¹ Exchange projects like artist-in-residency programmes at universities have become common practice and there are many organizations that initiate and actively promote collaboration between artists and academics.² To stimulate theoretical reflection on this development, the Netherlands Organisation for Scientific Research (NWO) launched in 2006 the CO-OPs programme. CO-OPs focused on the processes of knowledge production that take place when artists and academics work together on a common research question. On the one hand, it aimed at the formation of new

Chapter Sixteen How to Succeed in Art and Science: from: Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Werner Jeroen
Abstract: The Observatory Observedwas one of seven CO-OPs projects – cooperation between artists and scientists or scholars – that took place over the year of 2007. As the name of the project suggests, its aim was to investigate observatories, places where astronomers observe heavenly bodies. We were the artist and scholar involved. Jeroen Werner came to the project because of his previous artwork, which consists of optical installations creating spaces of light beams and image projections that explore the geometry of seeing. Geert Somsen was involved as a historian of science interested in the shifting cultural meanings and social functions

Introduction from: Contemporary Culture
Abstract: In 2002, the Netherlands Organisation for Scientific Research (NWO) launched a large-scale research programme to explore recent transformations in the cultural field and develop new theoretical concepts and frameworks for the humanities. Transformations in Arts and Cultureran for almost a decade and consisted of seven sub-programmes involving over 30 senior and junior scholars at different universities in the Netherlands. In addition, an art-science programme CO-OPs was set up in which artists and academics explored how art and academe could mutually benefit from each other’s practices and ideas.

CHAPTER 6 Elements of a critique of the laïcité-religion framework from: Secularism, Assimilation and the Crisis of Multiculturalism
Abstract: This chapter traces the historical particularity of the laïcité-religion framework to its intellectual, political and cultural backgrounds in the early French Third Republic (1870-1914). This is the same period of time that formed the background to the Dreyfus Affair. I concentrate on the occurrence of several neo-Kantian and modernist schemes in French political culture in the early Third Republic. I analyse four political cartoons from the time of the installation of the separation between Church and State in 1905 and further scrutinise the ways in which the relation between modernity, secularity and religion appears in the work of neo-Kantian scholars

CHAPTER 9 Concluding remarks from: Secularism, Assimilation and the Crisis of Multiculturalism
Abstract: In this concluding chapter, I bring together four issues that seem essential in looking back on this study. Firstly, I reflect on some uses and abuses of referring today to the memory of Jewish assimilation in 19th-century France. Secondly, I specify lessons that can be learned from reading Marcel Proust’s In Search of Lost Timein the context of today’s questions surrounding the position of ethnic and religious minorities in Europe. Thirdly, I briefly summarise why I problematise the secularism-religion framework instead of trying to define a ‘better’laïcité. Fourthly, I address the question of what alternatives could be developed,

1 The Life of the Bay of Bengal from: Crossing the Bay of Bengal
Abstract: Ahmad Rijaluddin traveled across the Bay of Bengal, from Penang to Calcutta, in late 1810. He accompanied Robert Scott—son of James Scott, one of Penang’s first residents and wealthiest merchants. Rijaluddin was himself the son of a rich local family: his father was a Tamil trader, his mother was Malay. He worked as an interpreter for the Europe an merchants of Penang, which had been established in 1786 as a settlement of the British East India Company. Rijaluddin’s memoir, written in the Malay language, is probably the first modern account published by an Asian traveler of crossing the Bay

5 Oceans’ Crossroads from: Crossing the Bay of Bengal
Abstract: Ramasamy Narayanasamy boarded the S.S. Rajullahfor Singapore in 1930, a boy of fourteen. Though the depression had stemmed the flow of Indian labor to Southeast Asia, young Ramasamy found work through his uncle, herding cattle along Singapore’s Serangoon Road (still today the heart of the city’s Little India) for local magnate Kadir Sultan. He moved on to work at the Krishna Vilas and Ananda Bhavan restaurants; he graduated from wiping tables to grinding rice forthosai,and then to selling them from a street stall for ten cents each. He lived at 40 Poplar Road, in the midst of

Book Title: A New Republic of Letters- Publisher: Harvard University Press
Author(s): McGann Jerome
Abstract: Jerome McGann's manifesto argues that the history of texts and how they are preserved and accessed for interpretation are the overriding subjects of humanist study in the digital age. Theory and philosophy no longer suffice as an intellectual framework. But philology--out of fashion for decades--models these concerns with surprising fidelity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wpnfx

Introduction from: A New Republic of Letters
Abstract: Here is surely a truth now universally acknowledged: that the whole of our cultural inheritance has to be recurated and reedited in digital forms and institutional structures. But as the technology of cultural memory shifts from bibliographical to digital machines, a difficult question arises: what do we do with the books? This is a problem for society at large and many people are working at it, none more assiduously than certain expert persons, often technicians. Highly skilled and motivated as they are, book history and the complex machineries of books fall outside their professional expertise. Humanist scholars, the long-recognized monitors

1 Why Textual Scholarship Matters from: A New Republic of Letters
Abstract: Why does textual scholarship matter? Most students of literature and culture who worked in the twentieth century would have thought that a highly specialized question, and many still do. But a hundred years ago the question would hardly have been posed at all. Until the early decades of the twentieth century what we now call literary and cultural studies was called philology, and all its interpretive procedures were clearly understood to be grounded in textual scholarship. But twentieth-century textual studies shifted their center from philology to hermeneutics, that subset of philological inquiry focused on the specifically literary interpretation of culture.

6 Digital Tools and the Emergence of the Social Text from: A New Republic of Letters
Abstract: Like another important edition of our time, Hans Gabler’s Ulysses, J. C. C. Mays’s edition on Coleridge—three volumes, each in two parts—set an inspiring example of scholarly thoroughness and integrity.¹ But the real strength of the work rests ultimately in something else—something quite rare in the scholarly editions of English-speaking authors produced in the last fifty years. Mays is deeply sympathetic to Coleridge’s poetry—not unaware of or reticent to address its failings and limitations, but fronting all the work with what Desmond McCarthy, writing of Coleridge, called “the most delicate sympathy.” “When he writes of it

1 OSCILLATION from: Seven Modes of Uncertainty
Abstract: What does an author owe his work? Wayne Booth, in his comprehensive articulation of the various dimensions of literary ethics in The Company We Keep,asks and answers:

4 ACCOUNTING from: Seven Modes of Uncertainty
Abstract: I. A. Richards, William Empson’s undergraduate supervisor at Cambridge, once genially described the origin of his pupil’s first and most famous work, Seven Types of Ambiguity:

Book Title: The Economics of Creativity- Publisher: Harvard University Press
Author(s): MENGER PIERRE-MICHEL
Abstract: Creative work is governed by uncertainty. So how can customers and critics judge merit, when the disparity between superstardom and obscurity hinges on minor gaps in ability? The Economics of Creativity brings clarity to a market widely seen as either irrational or so free of standards that only power and manipulation count.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wpr8v

Introduction from: The Economics of Creativity
Abstract: Research shows that artists are better educated than most other workers, but also that on-the-job training and learning through experience play such

CHAPTER FOUR Talent and Reputation: from: The Economics of Creativity
Abstract: In this chapter, I will examine how differences in remuneration and reputation are analyzed in the social sciences, and investigate why artists attain such widely varying degrees of success. The commonsense view is that the main cause of differences in artists’ success levels is talent. But how can talent be defined and to what source can it be traced? Theoretical frameworks surrounding giftedness and vocation provide a stereotypical answer: Talent is the expression of abilities that seem to originate in the genetic lottery (especially if they manifest themselves early in the artist’s life) as well as in the interaction between

CHAPTER FIVE How Can Artistic Greatness Be Analyzed? from: The Economics of Creativity
Abstract: Analyzing the career and the work of a great artist assumes that it is possible to describe a fragment of the history of the world subject to the laws of causality, and at the same time to endow the artist with the power to act: The artist’s greatness can then be characterized by his ability to change the predictable course of things (in the artistic world and beyond it, directly or indirectly, in the world in general)—an ability to which causes and reasons must be assigned. That is why works on artistic greatness or genius hesitate between several formulas.

CHAPTER SIX Profiles of the Unfinished: from: The Economics of Creativity
Abstract: An artwork is usually conceived in the fine arts as a finished, lasting reality, complete, never changing—a candidate for material and cultural eternity. What happens to it later is separate, something completely formed being pulled into a turbulent future. Diverse viewpoints, readings, and incompatible interpretations give it multiple meanings. Diverse formats of exhibition, “publishing,” and diffusion create new connections, putting the artwork into changeable contexts where its meanings will be seen from new perspectives. Reproduction, in media which may not transmit all its original characteristics, or restoration, will subject it to an unforeseeable flow of uses and manipulations. The

Conclusion from: The Economics of Creativity
Abstract: At the end of the six chapters of this book, what does creative activity look like? In Chapter 6, I quoted Gilles-Gaston Granger’s remark that “ quawork, aesthetic creation is one of our attempts to overcome the impossibility of theoretically grasping the individual.” This statement can serve to underline my reason for seeking to shift the focus of the analysis from employment and the artistic professions to the act of invention and its essential uncertainties.

Chapter Two Decorative Science, Pedants, and Spanish Realism from: Signs of Science
Abstract: In the literary mind, science can either work alongside the Muses or attempt to replace them. As the previous chapter shows, the realists relegated discussions of the most radical scientific theory of the nineteenth century—organic evolution—to the periphery of their texts. Despite their hesitancy on that particular subject, they nevertheless grappled with many questions about the place of modem science in society. The realists’ most important discoveries—as evidenced by their increased skepticism toward positivism—incorporate two different perspectives on scientific discourse. Friedrich Nietzsche argued that the “real world” studied by scientists was pitifully bleak and bereft of

Chapter Three Science, Faith, and Reference from: Signs of Science
Abstract: In his 1956 song “(How Little It Matters) How Little We Know,” Frank Sinatra aptly poses the. epistemological verity facing every scientific investigator: scientific knowledge eventually fails to explain certain phenomena. Despite voluminous increases in scientific research and publishing, most scientists couch descriptions of the state of their disciplines (which often frame requests for additional funding) in terms of how much there remains to be discovered. Of course, they never intimate (or could even conceive) that their own particular work matters little. However, the Sinatra tune outlines even more vividly the theme of this chapter, late-nineteenth-century unease about the limits

Chapter Five The Tragicomedy of Science in 1898 from: Signs of Science
Abstract: Cajal’s studies of the nervous system trace the limits of scientific realism. The workings of the cellular world obviously have global effects on the body, but the greater the detail of Cajal’s descriptions, the more difficult it becomes for him to explain human behavior in terms of cells. What is it about the branches of neurons that makes individuals think the way they do? Literary realism has similar limits. It may be obvious that environmental factors like alcoholism or poverty have dramatic effects on a person’s (and a character’s) identity, but the realist process of amassing minute observations is often

Conclusion from: A Jesuit Garden in Beijing and Early Modern Chinese Culture
Abstract: The jingis an aesthetic concept of Chinese garden and landscape construction. The linear perspective was created in the European Renaissance and did not exist in Chinese painting until it was introduced by Jesuits working in Beijing in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. The encounter ofjingand the Western linear perspective took place in the Western garden of the Yuanming Yuan. Although the ruins of Yuanming are frequently appropriated for political intentions, ideologies cannot bring to light the beauty of cultural encounters. Chinese intellectuals tend to think the Yuanming Yuan is the most forceful proof of imperialist aggressions and

Dialogue as Praxis: from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Moore James F.
Abstract: My relationship with Zev Garber now spans more than twenty years. He has helped me to develop a special approach to dialogue that not only shapes all of my work but also has led to the forming of a group that has now engaged in a dialogue on sacred texts for nearly fifteen years.¹ It is this aspect of my relationship with Zev that I illustrate in this essay and offer as a contribution to this Festschriftdedicated to him. I do so by engaging in a dialogue with another colleague whom I have now known for twenty-five years and

Exegetical Theology and Divine Suffering in Jewish Thought from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Fishbane Michael
Abstract: It is an honor to participate in this volume in celebration of Zev Garber. His lifework has been devoted to the phenomenon of Jewish suffering and its study, including the pedagogies of its cultural transmission. In this regard, he has also focused on the exegetical uses and transformations of this subject, for good and ill, in both the scholarly and the popular culture. For these reasons, I would like to contribute an essay that shall attempt to set forth some of the Jewish expressions of our subject—in a way that seeks to illuminate some of the inner structures and

Rabbi Abraham Joshua Heschel’s Paths to God from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Kasimow Harold
Abstract: In his best-known work, God in Search of Man, a book that has been called “the single most sophisticated, profound and comprehensive statement within modern Judaic theology,” Abraham Joshua Heschel (1907–72), one of the most significant Jewish thinkers of the twentieth century, expresses his deep concern over the decline of religion today.¹ This concern extends beyond the survival of Judaism to the survival of humanity itself. In a 1967 article he says:

“But It Isn’t on the Test!”: from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Jacobs Louanne Clayton
Abstract: I currently teach in the School of Education at a state university that is considered one of the Historically Black Colleges and Universities (HBCU). By the time students have enrolled in one of the education courses I teach, they have typically completed most if not all of their required coursework in history, English, mathematics, and science. By the time students enter my classroom they have learned most of whatthey will teach and have begun preprofessional courses designed to help them learnhowto teach it.

Soft-core Holocaust Denial: from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Berenbaum Michael
Abstract: I am pleased to join this volume in honor of Zev Garber’s work, which has earned him the respect of colleagues, and pleased more to honor Zev Garber the scholar, the teacher, and the man for the rather unique way in which he embodies his scholarship in his being. To have reached a milestone age of life is a tribute not only to longevity, but productivity, and creativity, and, most significantly in Zev’s case, decency.

The Scroll of the Shoah: from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Edelman Samuel M.
Abstract: This essay is written with Zev Garber in the forefront of my mind. He has always been a whirlwind of energy and activity. For the amount of teaching he does, his level of scholarly productivity is mind-boggling. Not only that, but Zev has been the mentor of many younger scholars. He inspires, he encourages, and he finds ways to get their work published. In short, Zev is an inspiration for scholarly achievement and passion. In the area of interfaith dialogue, Zev has been a pioneer with the Scholars Conference on the Holocaust and the Churches Post-Shoah Midrash Reading Group. In

Once More to the Jabbok: from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Knight Henry F.
Abstract: Do midrash.¹ Work dialogically.² Attend to the missing faces.³ These three simple sentences guide my work as a post-Holocaust theologian, educator, and religious professional. Indeed, if by midrash I mean not simply the formal interpretive work of rabbinic tradition but the hermeneutic practice of reading sacred texts and other important documents with an interruptive logic that kindles what the rabbis call the “white fire” of the texts, then these three admonitions describe my understanding of public responsibility in a post-Shoah world.

Hebrew Literature, Academic Politics, and Feminist Criticism: from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Fuchs Esther
Abstract: To what extent can we draw on our personal and professional narratives as a valid source of knowledge in order to substantiate a critique of our respective academic fields? How can we possibly crosscut from a subjective to a critical discourse, from emotion to fact and back? The following attempt to account for the unusual relationship between “my self” and “my work,” and between “my work” and “my field” will be partial both epistemologically and chronologically. The possessive pronoun in “my life” suggests ownership and control; yet, it is precisely the relinquishment of this control that I would like to

The Folktales of Rabbi Yosef Hayyim from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Hakak Lev
Abstract: Rabbi Yosef Hayyim (1834–1909) was born in Baghdad, Iraq, into a family of notable rabbis. He was also known as Ben Ish Hai, which is the title of his major work on Jewish law published in Jerusalem in 1898. Yosef Hayyim was considered the most prominent rabbi of the Babylonian Jews in the latest generations. At the age of thirteen he was admitted to the famous Midrash Bet Zilkha, where the great Rabbi Abdallah Somekh taught him. A few years later, he retreated to his attic to study alone. At age twenty-one he was already well known for his

The Literary Quest for National Revival: from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Morahg Gilead
Abstract: From the earliest settlement period, mainstream Zionist writers have expressed concern that the psychological and ideological deformations that shaped Jewish life in the Diaspora will continue to define Israeli identity and pervert the relationship of the people of Israel to the Land of Israel. This concern, which has its canonical literary expression in Haim Hazaz’s story, “The Sermon” (1942), is still very much in evidence in A. B. Yehoshua’s masterful novel, Mr. Mani(1990). The fact that two works separated by half a century of enormous change in Israeli life share this particular concern is intriguing enough to invite critical

Book Title: Genre Fusion-A New Approach to History, Fiction, and Memory in Contemporary Spain
Publisher: Purdue University Press
Author(s): Brenneis Sara J.
Abstract: Genre Fusion opens with a straightforward overview of the relationships among history, fiction, and memory in contemporary culture. While providing an up-to-date context for scholarly debates about Spain’s historical memory, Genre Fusion also expands the contours of the discussion beyond the specialized territory of Hispanic studies. To demonstrate the theoretical necessity of genre fusion, Brenneis analyzes pairs of interconnected texts (one a work of literature, the other a work of historiography) written by a single author. She explores how fictional and nonfictional works by Montserrat Roig, Carmen Martín Gaite, Carlos Blanco Aguinaga, and Javier Marías unearth the collective memories of Spain’s past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wq3rh

Chapter Two Montserrat Roig: from: Genre Fusion
Abstract: Catalan photographer Francesc Boix’s filmed deposition at the Nuremberg Trials, in January 1946, illustrates the power of testimony. An unseen interlocutor asks Boix in French, “Does the witness recognize among the defendants anyone who visited the camp of Mauthausen?” Boix looks to his right, rises from the witness stand, and points across the room, responding to the question with one word: “Speer.” He proceeds to describe how at Mauthausen he developed photographs of Albert Speer, Hitler’s chief architect during World War II, and thus could vouch for Speer’s presence at the Austrian work camp in 1943 (“Trial Testimony against Albert

Chapter Two Critical Hybridity and the Building of Methodological Bridges from: Postmodern Texts and Emotional Audiences
Abstract: The theory and method informing this study can best be described as a dialectical mediation between dissimilar cultural genres and between antagonistic scholarly traditions. The critical dialectic of sentimental postmodernism allows me to illuminate theoretical biases and blind spots in scholarship concerning both postmodernism and popular affective genres. While many theorists of postmodern culture pay lip service to the idea that postmodernism breaks down the division between high and popular culture, most of their exemplary texts are nonetheless high art or avant-garde works. Focusing on irony, self-reflexivity, avant-garde aesthetics, and poststructuralist ideas about language, many of these critics draw a

Chapter Five Kiss of the Spider Woman and the Politics of Camp from: Postmodern Texts and Emotional Audiences
Abstract: With its thematic focus on identification and leftist politics, Manuel Puig’s Kiss of the Spider Womanis a paradigmatic text of sentimental postmodernism. Since the text is also centrally concerned with the politics of mass culture and of homosexuality, it bears some relationship to the critical practice called “camp.” Many critics have analyzedKiss of the Spider Womanas a work of “gay fiction,” but none has attempted to situate Puig’s text or its film and musical adaptations in relation to camp as a gay or queer critique of heterosexual mass culture and its value systems. Any academic discussion of

Conclusion from: Postmodern Texts and Emotional Audiences
Abstract: Without these detailed case studies of the impact of sentimental postmodernism upon readers and viewers, an analysis of the politics of this hybrid style would be incomplete and highly speculative. My contextual and empirical work with audiences is crucial to the conclusion that much of the political power of sentimental postmodernism can be found in the intense identifications that it fosters both within and across sexual identities, genders, and ethnicities. Much of the current critical work about identification has been produced by textual scholars writing from psychoanalytic perspectives. While these textual theorists have given us valuable insights concerning the ambivalent

4 Jesus the “Material Jew” from: The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Schwartz Joshua
Abstract: To speak today of “Jesus the Jew” is commonplace. Jesus, son of Joseph and Mary, residents of Nazareth, was born a Jew, lived as a Jew and died as one. But what kind of Jew was he? During the course of the years, scholarship has helped us understand much about his life and his basic teachings and not a small amount of work has been done on the Jewish context of his life and teachings. However, much less attention has been paid to the physical and material realities surrounding the everyday life and teachings of Jesus. The “academic” Judaism of

7 Psalm 22 in Pesiqta Rabbati: from: The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Ulmer Rivka
Abstract: Psalm 22 is cited in several critical New Testament passages; by comparison, Psalm 22 is rarely cited in rabbinic literature. In particular, Psalm 22 is used as an expression of personal suffering by the New Testament writers in the cruci-fixion scenes that recount the suffering of Jesus. In rabbinic literature, Psalm 22 is also cited as relating to the afflictions of a Jewish Messiah. The major rabbinic passage addressing the subject of a suffering Messiah is found in Pesiqta Rabbati, a rabbinic homiletic work that contains numerous messianic passages, as well as four entire homilies that present apocalyptic messianic visions,

12 Typical Jewish Misunderstandings of Christ, Christianity, and Jewish-Christian Relations over the Centuries from: The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Fisher Eugene J.
Abstract: I have spent a large portion of my professional life since I finished my coursework at New York University’s Institute of Hebrew Studies in 1971 educating my fellow Christians on the Jewishness of Jesus, of his teachings, and of Christianity down through the ages. My dissertation analyzed the treatment of Jews and Judaism in Catholic religious education materials, a study I was happy to share with the publishers a few years later in a program co-sponsored with the Anti-Defamation League, which resulted, I am even happier to say, in a number of improvements in Catholic textbooks. My first book¹ briefly

17 Edith Stein’s Jewish Husband Jesus from: The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Silverman Emily Leah
Abstract: Edith Stein (1891-1942), a philosopher, mystic, and Jewish Carmelite nun, had a queer relationship to Jesus in that her personal religious framework was simultaneously Jewish and Roman Catholic. Her relationship to Jesus was unusual and out of line within the context of Carmelite spiritual practice. She saw Jesus as a Jew before Christian theologians took this fact seriously, but her mystical marriage to him reveals that she advanced in her interior life an unambiguous supersessionism that demands the replacement of Judaism with Christianity. For Stein, this interior devotion to her husband, Jesus the Jew, was a form of spiritual resistance

EPILOGUE from: Edmund Husserl's Phenomenology
Abstract: During his lifetime and especially after his death, Husserl’s ideas have had an enormous influence on twentieth-century thought. Husserl may very well have been the most influential philosopher of the century. Toward the end of his life he was often discouraged. In addition to the almost unbearable political situation in which he had come to find himself, there was the full realization that there really was nobody willing and able to continue the work he had started. He had hoped that Heidegger would have been this person; yet Heidegger preferred to go his own way. In Husserl’s view, the task

CHAPTER ONE Presenting the Philosopher from: Reinterpreting Modern Culture
Abstract: This chapter introduces Nietzsche’s philosophy from two different approaches. First, it presents two of Nietzsche’s own explications of his philosophy, one taken from his early writings, the other from one of his later works. The interpretation of these presentations will show the continuity of Nietzsche’s self-conception and will adumbrate the specific themes that will later be discussed in separate chapters. Second, it depicts the life of Nietzsche as the philosopher who said that “every great philosophy so far has been … the personal confession of its author and a kind of involuntary and unconscious memoir” (BGE 6). It depicts a

Book Title: Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory- Publisher: Purdue University Press
Author(s): Tihanov Galin
Abstract: This book offers original research by leading scholars from the United States, United Kingdom, Germany, France, and Russia, which covers the central areas of Shpet's work on phenomenology, philosophy of language, cultural theory, and aesthetics and takes forward the current state of knowledge and debates on his contribution to these fields of enquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wq645

Gustav Shpet's Life and Works: from: Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Tihanov Galin
Abstract: Gustav Gustavovich Shpet (1879-1937) has emerged as one of the most prominent Russian philosophers of the twentieth century. The principle promoter of Husserlian phenomenology, at the same time creatively modifying Husserl and at times departing from him, Shpet was also an early advocate of hermeneutics. He left behind seminal work spanning philosophy, aesthetics, psychology, literary and theater theory, and the history of Russian thought. Significantly, many of his concerns anticipate preoccupations that have dominated the discourses of cultural theory and the philosophy of language over the last few decades.

Gustav Shpet's Literary and Theater Affiliations from: Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Tihanov Galin
Abstract: Gustav Shpet's theoretical work on literature and theater has not been systematically studied, nor has sufficient attention been paid to his overall presence on the Russian cultural scene from the 1910s to the 1930s. As a result, our knowledge and appreciation of the scope of his writings and the variety of Russian literary and theater life in the first third of the twentieth century have remained less rich and well informed than they could otherwise have been. Shpet's participation in contemporary literature and theater assumed different forms: to start with, he wrote on both from a theoretical perspective grounded in

Vladimir Solov'ev and the Legacy of Russian Religious Thought in the Works of Gustav Shpet from: Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Dennes Maryse
Abstract: The task of studying Vladimir Solov'ev's legacy as well as that of Russian religious thought in the works of Gustav Shpet should come as no surprise since the publication of Tatiana Shchedrina's book on the intellectual biography of Gustav Shpet in 2004. So far only a few papers have been devoted to this topic (see Boiko; Cassedy; Noskov; Epina, "G.G. Shpet," "Tvorchestvo"). The approach I use here will shed further light on this subject. I attempt to demonstrate that such a legacy is not only present in Shpet's works, but also has a pivotal role, insofar as it allows the

Shpet's Departure from Husserl from: Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Nemeth Thomas
Abstract: Already in the early 1900s, we find references to Husserl in Russian philosophical literature. N.O. Losskii mentioned him in his 1906 work Obosnovanie intuitivizma, where in the context of a discussion of the structure of judgmental acts Losskii quoted from the former'sLogical Investigations. Shpet's mentor in Kiev and later Moscow, G.I. Chelpanov, a keen observer of contemporary developments abroad in philosophy and psychology, had already presented in 1900 a relatively brief synopsis of Husserl's 1891 treatisePhilosophy of Arithmetic. Translations were soon to follow: the original first volume of theLogical Investigations, the "Prolegomena to Pure Logic," appeared in

Sign and/vs. Essence in Shpet from: Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Seifrid Thomas
Abstract: What I mean to indicate by my somewhat cryptic title is a certain tension or distance, perhaps introduced by our retrospective gaze but possibly present in Shpet's thought itself, between two different kinds of philosophical projects that unfold within his works: between, on the one hand, Shpet's several insightful theorizations on the nature of semiotic phenomena and their role in human culture; and, on the other, a project that is present throughout but less evident, which I would briefly summarize as an attempt to elaborate a model of selfhood that is grounded in linguistic consciousness and to establish its ontological

Problems of Sense, Significance, and Validity in the Work of Shpet and the Bakhtin Circle from: Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Brandist Craig
Abstract: The works of Gustav Shpet and the Bakhtin Circle (most notably Mikhail Bakhtin and Valentin Voloshinov) represent two of the most important episodes in the Russian reception of the so-called linguistic turn in philosophy. Each recognized the paucity of systematized thought in Russian philosophy of the period and was dissatisfied with the intuitive, even mystical manner with which language was understood. While nineteenth-century Russian philology reached considerable heights, philosophical reflections on language had developed largely within the bounds of Orthodox theology and this continued to shape the spirit of secular debates on language in the twentieth century and to endow

Introduction to Excerpts from Shpet's "Germenevtika i ee problemy" ("Hermeneutics and Its Problems") from: Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Kline George L.
Abstract: "Hermeneutics and Its Problems" offers a concise critical history of hermeneutics—"the general theory of understanding and interpretation," from its Greek and Hellenistic origins, through the formulations, focused on Biblical interpretation, of medieval, Renaissance, and Reformation theorists, to the British, Scottish and French thinkers of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. It concludes with a close examination of the (mainly German) hermeneutical systems of the early nineteenth century, which culminated in the work of Schleiermacher and Boeckh, and the late nineteenth- and early twentieth-century developments in Dilthey and Husserl. This brief outline suggests why Soviet censors did not permit the publication

Book Title: Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies- Publisher: Purdue University Press
Author(s): de Zepetnek Steven Tötösy
Abstract: Papers in the volume are by scholars working in Holocaust Studies in Australia, Germany, Hungary, Israel, Serbia, the United Kingdom, and the US.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wq6nd

Introduction from: Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Vasvári Louise O.
Abstract: The editors of Comparative Central European Holocaust Studiesand the authors of the volume's articles subscribe to the proposition that the study of the Holocaust is of immanent social relevance and responsibility in scholarship and public discourse. In turn, the notion of the social relevance of humanities and social sciences scholarship is a tenet of the theoretical and methodological framework of comparative cultural studies (McClennen and Morello, McClennen and Fitz; Tötösy de Zepetnek,Comparative Literature, "From Comparative Literature," "Comparative Cultural," "The New Humanities"). Thus, work presented in the volume in the humanities and social sciences is based on a number

On the Translation of Kertész's Sorstalanság (Fatelessness) into Serbian from: Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Čudić Marko
Abstract: The work of Imre Kertész belongs to those texts whose emerging readership and reception faces the question: what are the possibilities and chances of translating such complex prose fiction from Hungarian into other languages? In this paper, I focus on Kertész's novel Sorstalanság(Fatelessness) and its translation into Serbian by Aleksandar Tišma. My analysis is based on the questions about the linguistic and poetic aspects of the novel that can be transferred into a foreign language and those that can be transferred only to the detriment of the original text. In the summer of 2003, György Vári organized a round

Towards a New Reading of Ida Fink's The Journey from: Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Milner Iris
Abstract: Ida Fink, a Holocaust survivor (born 1921 in Zbaraż, Poland), stayed in Poland for twelve years after the end of World War II. Although she had already written some short stories at that time, it was only upon her arrival in Israel in 1957 that she became intensely involved in literary work—always in her mother tongue, Polish. Her first publication, a Hebrew translation of a collection of short stories that came out in Israel in 1974, did not gain her much acknowledgment. However, the original Polish version, published in London in 1976, and a subsequent collection of short stories

Book Title: Mediating Across Difference-Oceanic and Asian Approaches to Conflict Resolution
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Bleiker Roland
Abstract: To address the ensuing challenges, this book introduces and explores some of the rich insights into conflict resolution emanating from Asia and Oceania. Although often overlooked, these local traditions offer a range of useful ways of thinking about and dealing with difference and conflict in a globalizing world. To bring these traditions into exchange with mainstream Western conflict resolution, the editors present the results of collaborative work between experienced scholars and culturally knowledgeable practitioners from numerous parts of Asia and Oceania. The result is a series of interventions that challenge conventional Western notions of conflict resolution and provide academics, policy makers, diplomats, mediators, and local conflict workers with new possibilities to approach, prevent, and resolve conflict.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqfzw

Chapter 3 Local Conflict Resolution in the Shadows of Liberal International Peacebuilding from: Mediating Across Difference
Author(s) Richmond Oliver P.
Abstract: Scholars and policy makers concerned with conflict resolution and peacebuilding have recently turned their attention to the importance of local community participation in efforts to generate sustainable peace. But the Western frameworks through which local engagement is promoted displays very specific cultural biases. The dominant form of international engagement with local practices of conflict resolution is strongly shaped by liberal approaches to peacebuilding. Such approaches revolve around a top-down approach that prescribes and then enforces particular understandings of governance. Traditional liberalism seeks to establish a contract between ruler and ruled that enables the preservation of life, liberty, and property. The

Chapter 7 Christianity, Custom, and Law: from: Mediating Across Difference
Author(s) Kere Joy
Abstract: In recent years the area of the Western Pacific known as Melanesia has been dubbed part of a geopolitical ’arc of instability’ by Australian policy makers and political scientists.¹ Challenges arise in part because Melanesian states are young—Papua New Guinea gained independence from Australia in 1975, Solomon Islands from Britain in 1978, and Vanuatu from both Britain and France in 1980. National boundaries also cut across older cultural affinities and trade networks in a region with the highest degree of cultural and linguistic diversity in the world.² Politics is fluid, even chaotic, with a combination of traditional “big man”

Book Title: Japanese Philosophy-A Sourcebook
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Maraldo John C.
Abstract: With Japanese Philosophy: A Sourcebook,readers of English can now access in a single volume the richness and diversity of Japanese philosophy as it has developed throughout history. Leading scholars in the field have translated selections from the writings of more than a hundred philosophical thinkers from all eras and schools of thought, many of them available in English for the first time.TheSourcebookeditors have set out to represent the entire Japanese philosophical tradition-not only the broad spectrum of academic philosophy dating from the introduction of Western philosophy in the latter part of the nineteenth century, but also the philosophical ideas of major Japanese traditions of Buddhism, Confucianism, and Shinto. The philosophical significance of each tradition is laid out in an extensive overview, and each selection is accompanied by a brief biographical sketch of its author and helpful information on placing the work in its proper context. The bulk of the supporting material, which comprises nearly a quarter of the volume, is given to original interpretive essays on topics not explicitly covered in other chapters: cultural identity, samurai thought, women philosophers, aesthetics, bioethics.An introductory chapter provides a historical overview of Japanese philosophy and a discussion of the Japanese debate over defining the idea of philosophy, both of which help explain the rationale behind the design of the Sourcebook. An exhaustive glossary of technical terminology, a chronology of authors, and a thematic index are appended. Specialists will find information related to original sources and sinographs for Japanese names and terms in a comprehensive bibliography and general index.Handsomely presented and clearly organized for ease of use,Japanese Philosophy: A Sourcebookwill be a cornerstone in Japanese studies for decades to come. It will be an essential reference for anyone interested in traditional or contemporary Japanese culture and the way it has shaped and been shaped by its great thinkers over the centuries.24 illus.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqg76

Jiun Sonja 慈雲尊者 (1718–1804) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Sonja Jiun
Abstract: Jiun Sonja was a leading Buddhist reformer, scholar, and apologist during the Edo period (1600–1868). At a time when the Buddhist establishment was increasingly occupied with tasks imposed on it by the Tokugawa government, such as keeping registers of the local citizenry, and conducting funeral and memorial services, Jiun devoted himself to reviving traditional monastic life, based on the model of the historical Buddha and grounded in Buddhist philosophy. To study early Buddhism, he undertook the study of Sanskrit, using the limited resources available to him in Japan, and compiled the 1,000-chapter Guide to Sanskrit Studies, a work unparalleled

Ishizu Teruji 石津照璽 (1903–1972) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Teruji Ishizu
Abstract: A specialist in Kierkegaard and Heidegger, Ishizu’s best-known works on the philosophy of religion were published late in life. But probably his most original work was

Hakuin Ekaku 白隠慧鶴 (1685–1768) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Ekaku Hakuin
Abstract: Born into a working class family, Hakuin Ekaku was attracted to Buddhism at an early age, studying its literature before dedicating himself to Zen practice at the age of twenty-two. Confident of his “awakening” two years later, he went to see the reclusive Zen master Shōju Rōjin who at first ridiculed him, but under whose direction he achieved his spiritual breakthrough. Hakuin eventually returned to his hometown where he had a long career as a Zen master in a small, rundown temple, attracting students from throughout Japan. In his later years, he began to make drawings of himself and of

Karaki Junzō 唐木順三 (1904–1980) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Junzō Karaki
Abstract: Karaki Junzō was active throughout the Shōwa period more as a critic than a philosopher professionally trained in western sources. He studied under Nishida Kitarō* at Kyoto University and remained indebted to the thinking of Kyoto School philosophers throughout his life. At the same time, the religious ideas of Dōgen’s* Zen and Shinran’s* ⌜Pure Land⌝ teachings are also reflected in the development of his thought. Beginning with early works on modern and contemporary literary criticism, in later years he turned to medieval literature and to figures like the haiku poet, Bashō. Throughout his career, his abiding concern was with aesthetics

Kiyozawa Manshi 清沢満之 (1863–1903) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Manshi Kiyozawa
Abstract: Kiyozawa Manshi, who lived and wrote in the last decades of the nineteenth century, left an impression on generations of philosophers after him, including Nishida Kitarō*. As one of the first generation studying western philosophy at Tokyo University, he published on questions and thinkers at the core of philosophy, writing at a time when the Japanese philosophical vocabulary had not yet been settled. At the same time he was a devoted practitioner of ⌜Pure Land⌝ Buddhism, and cut short his graduate studies in philosophy to work for the Ōtani branch of the ⌜Shin⌝ sect, which entrusted him with setting up

Yamazaki Ansai 山崎闇斎 (1618–1682) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Ansai Yamazaki
Abstract: Yamazaki Ansai was both the most faithful and virtually unquestioning exponent of Zhu Xi’s neo-Confucian philosophy in Tokugawa Japan as well as a later pioneer of a syncretistic religious-philosophical system affirming the fundamental unity of neo-Confucianism and Shinto. Compared to the perfection of Zhu Xi’s work, other forms of neo-Confucianism seemed to him incomplete, shallow, or distorted. These criticisms, reiterated by his disciples, carried over to thinkers like Hayashi Razan* who drew on authors critical of Zhu Xi.

Kumazawa Banzan 熊沢蕃山 (1619–1691) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Banzan Kumazawa
Abstract: A major Japanese advocate of the neo-Confucian philosophy of Wang Yangming, Kumazawa Banzan gravitated from the metaphysical toward more practical, sociopolitical, and economic applications of that intuitive, mind-centered system. Rather than the doctrinal innovations, often very spiritual in nature, advanced by his teacher, Nakae Tōju*, Banzan’s major works, Questions and Answers on the Great Learning and Japanese Writings on Accumulating Righteousness, spell out his conviction that a true philosophy is one that can be applied to the real and pressing issues of the day. Banzan took his philosophical commitment to practical political concerns seriously and continued to speak out even

Ishida Baigan 石田梅岩 (1685–1744) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Baigan Ishida
Abstract: Ishida Baigan was a clerk at a dry-goods shop in Kyoto who dedicated himself to book learning early in the morning and late at night while his fellow-workers were sleeping. In 1729 he quit his job and began to give free lectures to the public on selected Japanese and Chinese classics, taking care to use terms that could be easily understood by the merchants and artisans of his own milieu. Baigan’s message, which came to be called ⌜Shingaku⌝or the “Learning of the Mind,” centered on the critical importance of understanding one’s own true nature. According to Baigan, the Way,

Tominaga Nakamoto 富永仲基 (1715–1746) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Nakamoto Tominaga
Abstract: Tominaga Nakamoto was born and raised in Osaka, the son of a soy merchant who was one of the founders of the Kaitokudo academy, a center of neo-Confucian philosophizing for merchants and townspeople. Though he passed away at age thirty-one after a lengthy illness, Nakamoto authored two important works, Emerging from Meditation(1745) andThe Writings of an Old Man(1746). The former attempts a kind of historical deconstruction of the Buddhist tradition in Asia, while the latter outlines Nakamoto’s critiques of Shinto, Buddhist, and Confucian traditions. A third work, since lost, entitledAn Explanation of Errors, critically analyzed Confucian

Miura Baien 三浦梅園 (1723–1789) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Baien Miura
Abstract: Miura Baien lived in the small village of Tominaga (present-day Oita prefecture) on the island of Kyushu, where he taught and developed his philosophical ideas. In the meantime, he maintained contacts with neo-Confucian scholars, one of whom was his good friend the astronomer Asada Gōryū (1734–1799), who independently discovered the relationship of the length of a planet’s orbit to its distance from the sun. Baien’s major writings comprise a work on ethics called Daring Words, an exposition of his own metaphysics,Deep Words, and a companion volume,Additional Words.

Ninomiya Sontoku 二宮尊徳 (1787–1856) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Sontoku Ninomiya
Abstract: Ninomiya Sontoku was born into a dysfunctional family, but through dedicated hard work, a fascination with learning, and a survival-driven devotion to self-help, he was able to attain high office, an impressive following, and a legacy in modern Japan that few if any Tokugawa thinkers of any philosophical stripe would ever begin to approximate.

Kamo no Mabuchi 賀茂真淵 (1697–1769) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Mabuchi Kamo no
Abstract: Born in Hamamatsu to a family with ancestral connections to Shinto, Kamo no Mabuchi’s early education took place in local scholarly circles that combined Shinto studies with the study of ⌜waka⌝poetry. In 1728 Mabuchi enrolled as a student of the famous Shinto scholar Kada no Azumamaro (1669–1736), later moving to Kyoto to be closer to his teacher. After Azumamaro’s death, Mabuchi moved to Edo to work with his nephew Kada no Arimaro (1706–1751), a scholar of Japanese studies in the employ of Tayasu Munetake, second son of the shōgun Tokugawa Yoshimune. In 1742 Mabuchi was invited to

Fujitani Mitsue 富士谷御杖 (1768–1823) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Fujitani Mitsue
Abstract: Fujitani Mitsue, or Narimoto as he was also known, was born into a prominent family of intellectuals in Kyoto. His father, Fujitani Nariakira was an erudite and imaginative scholar who authored several works analyzing Japanese poetic language in the light of new grammatical categories of his own device. His uncle, Minagawa Kien, was a well-known Confucian scholar who also had a strong interest in linguistic theory. The Fujitani family served as hereditary retainers of the Yanagawa domain, a position that provided them with a comfortable living. As a youth, Mitsue was schooled in the most important cultural practices of his

Nishi Amane 西周 (1829–1887) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Amane Nishi
Abstract: Nishi Amane is known for his pioneering work in introducing European philosophy and other disciplines into Japan. Born in the Tsuwano domain (presentday Tsuwano town in Shimane Prefecture), he was educated in Zhu Xi philosophy at a domain school for samurai youth, but later began to sympathize deeply with the thought of Ogyū Sorai,* a critic of the Zhu Xi School. Nishi learned Dutch and English in Edo (present-day Tokyo) and translated western texts for Tokugawa ⌜shogunate⌝ officials. In 1862 he and the legal scholar Tsuda Mamichi were sent by the shogunate to study in Leiden in the Netherlands, where

Fukuzawa Yukichi 福沢諭吉 (1835–1901) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Yukichi Fukuzawa
Abstract: Fukuzawa Yukichi, in his own estimation, was the initiator, or at least an inspiration for, many of the reforms that took place during Japan’s process of modernization. Be that as it may, his was a strong dissenting voice against the lingering habits of feudalistic thought. Trained in western learning, Fukuzawa taught himself Dutch and English. Shortly after the opening of Japan, he made the first of three trips to the United States. On returning he was employed in the Tokugawa ⌜shogunate’s⌝ translation bureau. It was during this period that he published his first work, Conditions in the West, which was

Inoue Enryō 井上円了 (1858–1919) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Enryō Inoue
Abstract: Inoue Enryō was probably the most influential and prolific Buddhist theorist of the Meiji period. He was expected to become a priest in the True ⌜Pure Land⌝ sect of Buddhism, but after studying philosophy in Tokyo, decided to go his own way. He traveled widely throughout Japan and its colonies, delivering thousands of lectures in village and town halls, and journeyed around the world three times. Although a philosopher by profession, he is widely remembered for his multivolume work on supernatural phenomena, A Study of Ghosts and Phantoms.

Nishida Kitarō 西田幾多郎 (1870–1945) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Kitarō Nishida
Abstract: Nishida Kitarō, generally considered Japan’s greatest academic philosopher, made it his lifelong task to wed the spiritual awareness cultivated through a decade of Zen practice with modern philosophy. From Zen he had come to appreciate the living unity of experience that precedes dichotomies of mind and body, subject and object; in western philosophy he recognized the importance of logical thinking, the critical examination of preconceptions, and a comprehensive vision of the world. Beginning with the experiment of his maiden work, An Inquiry into the Good, to see all of reality as “pure experience,” each step of Nishida’s way posed new

Tanabe Hajime 田辺元 (1885–1962) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Hajime Tanabe
Abstract: Tanabe Hajime was first drawn to philosophy through his study of mathematics and the natural sciences. His early work on the philosophy of science brought him into contact with the neo-Kantians, which inspired him to rethink Kant’s transcendental logic in the light of Husserl’s phenomenology, Bergson’s vitalism, and the original philosophy of Nishida Kitaro*. After Nishida invited him to join the faculty at Kyoto University, he was able to fulfill his dream of studying in Europe. Although quickly disillusioned with Husserl, he was befriended by the young Heidegger.

Mutai Risaku 務台理作 (1890–1974) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Risaku Mutai
Abstract: Mutai Risaku, a peripheral figure of the Kyoto School, was first attracted to psychology, but during his time under Nishida Kitarō* at Kyoto University he was persuaded to secure a solid basis in philosophy from Kant to the present day. In 1923 he took a post at Ōtani University, leaving three years later for studies in France and Germany, where he worked for a time directly under Husserl. He later taught at Taipei Imperial University before assuming a post at the Tokyo University of Education in 1932. During these years, under the direction of Tanabe Hajime*, he continued his studies

Miki Kiyoshi 三木清 (1897–1945) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Kiyoshi Miki
Abstract: Miki Kiyoshi is a tragic figure among the Kyoto School philosophers. He studied under Nishida Kitarō* and Tanabe Hajime* in Kyoto and then under Martin Heidegger in Freiburg. He was gifted with both keen philosophical insight and superior writing skills. In 1930 he lost his job as a lecturer at Hōsei University and was imprisoned on the trumped-up charge that he actively supported the Communist party. Shortly after his release in the same year, his wife passed away. Unable to resume his teaching duties, he began to work as a journalist. In 1942, he was sent against his will to

Kōsaka Masaaki 高坂正顕 (1900–1969) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Masaaki Kōsaka
Abstract: Less a metaphysician than a historian of philosophy, Kōsaka Masaaki was concerned with the continuity between “nation and culture” in the historical world. This shows up in his 1937 work The Historical World, where he focused on Hegel’s civil society and the role of the nation in the philosophy of history, as well as on Marx’s idea of class, all the while maintaining the neo-Kantian personalist standpoint he had elaborated previously. A disciple of Nishida Kitarō* (on whose thought he later published a splendid introductory volume), Kōsaka pursued this perspective not only in his reading of Nishida’s philosophy of the

Takeuchi Yoshinori 武内義範 (1913–2002) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Yoshinori Takeuchi
Abstract: Takeuchi Yoshinori was born in 1913 in the northern city of Sendai, Japan. He studied philosophy under Tanabe Hajime*, concentrating on Hegel’s Phenomenology of Mindand then broadening out to other major German philosophers of the nineteenth century. As a graduate student he also worked under Nishitani Keiji*, Tanabe’s successor to the chair at Kyoto University. Takeuchi’s philosophical interests were balanced by an interest in early Buddhism, particularly as he found it in the writings of Ui Hakuju and Watsuji Tetsurō*. At Tanabe’s recommendation, though initially resisting the idea, he focused his graduate studies on Shinran*, a figure neglected in

Ōhashi Ryōsuke 大橋良介 (1944– ) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Ryōsuke Ōhashi
Abstract: After completing undergraduate studies at Kyoto University in 1969, Ōhashi Ryōsuke traveled to Germany where he entered the graduate program in philosophy at the University of Munich, receiving a doctorate in 1974 with a thesis on Schelling and Heidegger. He returned to take up a university post in Japan and to begin work on a major study of Hegelian logic, which he submitted for Habilitationat the University of Würzburg in 1983. His aim of locating a point of encounter for philosophies East and West was influenced by his study abroad and by the philosophy of Nishida Kitarō*—in particular,

Hatano Seiichi 波多野精一 (1877–1950) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Seiichi Hatano
Abstract: After completing studies at Tokyo Imperial University in 1899, Hatano began teaching the history of philosophy at Tokyo Senmon Gakkō (present-day Waseda University). Five years later, in 1904, after publishing his doctoral thesis on Spinoza in German, he was sent to study for two years in Berlin and Heidelberg. His 1901 book, Outlines of the History of Western Philosophy, was widely read throughout the Taishō era as a reference work. His more specialized writings on western philosophy ranged from studies of ancient Greek thought to Plotinus and Kant. Hatano, who had been baptized a Christian in 1902, began to focus

Abe Jirō 阿部次郎 (1883–1959) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Jirō Abe
Abstract: Born in Yamagata Prefecture in 1883, Abe Jirō entered Tokyo Imperial University in 1904 and studied philosophy under the guidance of Raphael von Koeber. In 1912 he was granted a research fellowship by the Ministry of Education to study in Europe. On returning to Japan the following year, he was appointed as the first professor of aesthetics at Tōhoku Imperial University. Influenced by Theodor Lipps’s theory of empathy, Abe is one of the pioneers of research on aesthetics in Japan. His numerous works include Basic Problems of Ethics(1916),Aesthetics(1917),Social Status of Art(1925),Art and Society in

Nakamura Yūjirō 中村雄二郎 (1925–) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Yūjirō Nakamura
Abstract: A critique of modern rationalism carried by theories of the body and the passions runs through such works as The Age of Pathos(1965),Common Sense(1979),Notes on a Philosophy of Evil(1994), and reflections on the Aum Shinrikyō

Kimura Bin 木村敏 (1931– ) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Bin Kimura
Abstract: Perhaps no thinker in twentieth-century Japan better represents the interface between psychology and philosophy than Kimura Bin. While maintaining his psychiatric practice and publishing widely on abnormal psychology, particularly on schizophrenia and depersonalization, his wider philosophical interests are evident from his early works. In foray after foray into the mysteries of the self—its construction and its breakdown, its awareness and its scotosis—Kimura is not an armchair philosopher but a doctor engaged in the experiences of his patients. If there is one constant theme running through his reading of twentieth-century philosophers, it is the conviction that a true phenomenology

Hiromatsu Wataru 廣松渉 (1933–1994) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Wataru Hiromatsu
Abstract: Hiromatsu Wataru obtained his doctorate in philosophy from Tokyo University and went on to teach philosophy there for many years. He is well known for his novel interpretation of Marx’s concept of reification. In particular, he believed that Georg Lukács’s treatment of this concept presupposed a duality between subject and object, which Hiromatsu believed was misleading. Hence in his own philosophical work, he constantly attempts to show how objects or phenomena are always already mediated. In the selection included below we see how he constantly shows how so-called objective phenomena are mediated by the subjects and thus appear to lead

Fujita Masakatsu 藤田正勝 (1949– ) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Masakatsu Fujita
Abstract: After finishing his undergraduate and doctoral course work at Kyoto University in 1978, Fujita Masakatsu spent a number of years in Bochum, Germany, where he earned a doctorate in 1982 with a dissertation on the early Hegel’s philosophy of religion. After returning to Japan, Fujita continued his work on German idealism, while also increasingly turning his attention to modern Japanese philosophy, Nishida Kitarō* in particular. In addition to two monographs on Nishida’s thought, Fujita has edited and contributed to numerous volumes, among them The Philosophy of the Kyoto SchoolandJapanese Philosophy in the World. He is also a founding

Karatani Kōjin 柄谷行人 (1941– ) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Kōjin Karatani
Abstract: The writings of Karatani Kōjin, like those of many other literary critics today, cross disciplinary boundaries and challenge the presuppositions of academic philosophy. Educated in economics and English literature at Tokyo University, Karatani has exerted an influence far beyond his native land and original fields of training. At Yale University in the mid-1970s he worked alongside Paul de Man and Fredric Jameson on problems associated with formalism and structuralism. His Transcritique: On Kant and Marx(2003) was a seminal work for thinkers like Slavoj Zizek who practice philosophy as cultural criticism. Teaching at Columbia University since 1990 and occasionally at

Overview from: Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: As Alexander Gottlieb Baumgarten (1714–1762) indicates at the beginning of his treatise Aesthetica, “Aesthetics (theory of the liberal arts, doctrine of inferior knowledge, art of beautiful thinking, art of analogous reasoning) is the science of sensible knowledge” (1750, 17). This is the opening statement of a work that is considered to be the genealogical moment in the creation of aesthetics as an autonomous philosophical field—a creation prompted by the need to rescue the senses from the primacy of reason. The association of feelings (aisthesis) with the fallacious world of experience has a long history that goes back to

Ōnishi Yoshinori 大西克禮 (1888–1959) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Yoshinori Ōnishi
Abstract: Ōnishi Yoshinori taught aesthetics at the University of Tokyo from 1922 until his retirement in 1949. As his voluminous writings reflect, he specialized in German aesthetics from the Romantics through Kant to twentieth-century phenomenology. Ōnishi applied his knowledge of western philosophy to the elucidation of key concepts in Japanese aesthetics and poetics that had been debated and discussed for centuries by Japanese poets and theorists. His life work is reflected in a two-volume work on Aesthetics,the first volume of which deals with the West while the second, published posthumously the following year, takes up the analysis of key Japanese

Izutsu Toyoko 井筒豊子 (1925– ) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Toyoko Izutsu
Abstract: After graduating from the Tokyo University’s Department of Arts and Letters in 1952, Izutsu Toyoko (alias Toyo) married the celebrated philosopher and orientalist Izutsu Toshihiko,* with whom she collaborated closely until his death in 1993. A gifted writer in her own right, she published translations, essays, and short stories, as well as a lengthy study on late-Heian and medieval Japanese wakaas a “cognitive field,” for a volume edited by Yuasa Yasuo.* She is best known outside of Japan for a work she composed jointly with her husband in English, and which was later translated into German, on the fundamentals

Overview from: Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: In spring of 1771, a small group of Japanese doctors gathered to perform an autopsy on the cadaver of an executed fifty-year old woman criminal known as the Green Tea Hag, with a copy of a recently acquired Dutch work on anatomy lying open on the table before them. One of their number, Sugita Genpaku (1733–1817), who was later to translate that book, recalls:

LIFE WRITING AND THE MAKING OF COMPANIONABLE OBJECTS: from: Locating Life Stories
Author(s) GEORGE KENNETH M.
Abstract: This essay explores some of the cultural, political, and ethical work of life writing that goes on in national and transnational art worlds. We commonly think of life writing as forms or fragments of discourse that depict the lives of human actors, and that give actors’ experiences intelligibility, purpose, and recognition. But life writing also plays a part in the making of what I call “companionable objects”—those things with which we have ethical and affective ties. Things, too, can be actors, and mingle with us in our everyday lifeworlds and publics. They, too, gain intelligibility and purpose from life

Introduction from: Great Fool
Abstract: Generations have called this beggar-monk of the early nineteenth century “Ryōkan-san,” the informal suffix “ san” expressing affectionate respect. Only two other eminent Buddhist figures in Japanese history have received this particular honor: “Kōbō-san” or “Daishi-san,” Kūkai, the ninth-century founder of Shingon Buddhism, who is remembered in popular legends as a savior–miracle worker; and “Ikkyū-san,” the fifteenth-century Zen monk whose eccentric life-style has inspired numerous folk stories in which he is depicted as a marvelously quick-witted child novice. Ryōkan is a singularly attractive figure. Minakami Tsutomu, the celebrated contemporary novelist, explains why, despite countless earlier works examining the minutest details

A Poetics of Mendicancy: from: Great Fool
Author(s) Abé Ryūichi
Abstract: “ TextmeansTissue,” writes Roland Barthes, “but whereas hitherto we have always taken this tissue as a product, a ready-made veil, behind which lies, more or less hidden, meaning (truth), we are now emphasizing, in the tissue, the generative idea that the text is made, is worked out in a perpetual interweaving.”¹ Barthes’ proposal to understand text as the topos of incessant semantic production—rather than as the representation of fixed meanings outside of it—speaks eloquently of the seminal shift of emphasis in contemporary philosophical and literary theories in their approach to studying text. Such a reminder, however, seems

Reflections on Buddhism from: Great Fool
Abstract: Ryōkan was critical of the Buddhist temple establishment of his day, regarding it as degraded. Yet, as the following works reveal, he remained committed to Buddhism itself and to the monk’s vocation. “Invitation to the Way” (Tōgō Toyoharu, Ryōkan zenshū1, no. 1) is a summary of the history of Buddhism, and Zen in particular, in which Ryōkan assesses the current situation of Buddhism in Japan. “The Priesthood” (Zenshū1, no. 2) presents Ryōkan’s criticism of the contemporary Buddhist clergy. “On Begging One’s Food” (Zenshū1, no. 102) explains Ryōkan’s views on the importance of the monk’s begging practice. Ryōkan

Book Title: Relative Histories-Mediating History in Asian American Family Memoirs
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Davis Rocío G.
Abstract: Relative Histories focuses on the Asian American memoir that specifically recounts the story of at least three generations of the same family. This form of auto/biography concentrates as much on other members of one’s family as on oneself, generally collapses the boundaries conventionally established between biography and autobiography, and in many cases—as Rocío G. Davis proposes for the auto/biographies of ethnic writers—crosses the frontier into history, promoting collective memory. Davis centers on how Asian American family memoirs expand the limits and function of life writing by reclaiming history and promoting community cohesion. She argues that identity is shaped by not only the stories we have been told, but also the stories we tell, making these narratives important examples of the ways we remember our family’s past and tell our community’s story. In the context of auto/biographical writing or filmmaking that explores specific ethnic experiences of diaspora, assimilation, and integration, this work considers two important aspects: These texts re-imagine the past by creating a work that exists both in history and as a historical document, making the creative process a form of re-enactment of the past itself. Each chapter centers on a thematic concern germane to the Asian American experience: the narrative of twentieth-century Asian wars and revolutions, which has become the subtext of a significant number of Asian American family memoirs (Pang-Mei Natasha Chang’s Bound Feet and Western Dress, May-lee and Winberg Chai’s The Girl from Purple Mountain, K. Connie Kang’s Home Was The Land of Morning Calm, Doung Van Mai Elliott’s The Sacred Willow); family experiences of travel and displacement within Asia in the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, which unveil a history of multiple diasporas that are often elided after families immigrate to the United States (Helie Lee’s Still Life With Rice, Jael Silliman’s Jewish Portraits, Indian Frames, Mira Kamdar’s Motiba’s Tattoos); and the development of Chinatowns as family spaces (Maxine Hong Kingston’s China Men, Lisa See’s On Gold Mountain, Bruce Edward Hall’s Tea that Burns). The final chapter analyzes the discursive possibilities of the filmed family memoir ("family portrait documentary"), examining Lise Yasui’s A Family Gathering, Ruth Ozeki Lounsbury’s Halving the Bones, and Ann Marie Fleming’s The Magical Life of Long Tack Sam. Davis concludes the work with a metaliterary engagement with the history of her own Asian diasporic family as she demonstrates the profound interconnection between forms of life writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqmkt

Book Title: On Diary- Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): DURNIN KATHERINE
Abstract: On Diary is the second collection in English of the groundbreaking and profoundly influential work of one of the best-known and provocative theorists of autobiography and diary. Ranging from the diary’s historical origins to its pervasive presence on the Internet, from the spiritual journey of the sixteenth century to the diary of Anne Frank, and from the materials and methods of diary writing to the question of how diaries end, these essays display Philippe Lejeune’s expertise, eloquence, passion, and humor as a commentator on the functions, practices, and significance of keeping or reading a diary. Lejeune is a leading European critic and theorist of diary and autobiography. His landmark essay, "The Autobiographical Pact," has shaped life writing studies for more than thirty years, and his many books and essays have repeatedly opened up new vistas for scholarship. As Michael Riffaterre notes, "Lejeune’s work on autobiography is the most original, powerful, effective approach to a difficult subject. . . . His style is very personal, lively. It grabs the reader as scholarship rarely does. Lejeune’s erudition and methodology are impeccable." Two substantial introductory essays by Jeremy Popkin and Julie Rak place Lejeune’s work within its critical and theoretical traditions and comment on his central importance within the fields of life writing, literary genetic studies, and cultural studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqmvp

THE ʺJOURNAL DE JEUNE FILLEʺ IN NINETEENTH-CENTURY FRANCE from: On Diary
Abstract: Matten: Saturday, August 1, 1992. I am late. I feel somewhat guilty and embarrassed. I have been working on this subject for more than a year. I have conceived the book I am about to publish,Le Moi des demoiselles(1993), as a journal, to avoid a synthesis that I feared would be premature. I shall attempt to write this synthesis now … for you. I am in the Oberland, near Bern, Switzerland, sitting in a small bedroom with a low ceiling; the window, lined with geraniums, looks on the mountains; it is late in the afternoon and a thunderstorm

HOW DO DIARIES END? from: On Diary
Abstract: The question occurred to me in 1997 as I was preparing an exhibit called Un Journal à soi[A diary of one’s own], created by the Association pour l’Autobiographie at the Lyon public library (Lejeune and Bogaert). My approach was didactic: I wanted to construct a story where the spectator would follow the different phases in the life of a diary, just as in the good old days, in primary school, they used to show us the workings of the digestive system, beginning with a mouthful of bread. A story, Aristotle will tell you, must have a beginning, a middle,

AUTO-GENESIS: from: On Diary
Abstract: How does one become a “geneticist?” Why didn’t I become one earlier? And have I really become one? It is a fact that for nearly five years I have been working on the avant-textes of contemporary autobiographies: Sartre’s Les Mots(1964), Perec’sW ou le souvenir d’enfance(1975), Nathalie Sarraute’sEnfance(1983), and, more recently, theDiaryof Anne Frank. I did not begin these studies with any overall plan—it was a series of chance occasions: an invitation to be part of a Sartre team at the Institut des Textes et Manuscrits Modernes, a seminar on Perec, hearing a

SURVEYING DIARIES, SURVEYING CULTURES from: On Diary
Abstract: The diary’s distinct status has led me to change the method of study I originally developed in my work on autobiography. For autobiography, I had worked out a theoretical line of thought—

CHAPTER 2 The Transcendent’s Cultural Repertoire from: Making Transcendents
Abstract: At the most basic level, how ought we to think about the ways in which individuals relate to their cultures, traditions, or religions? In the study of religion, a Western discipline devoted to a concept rooted in the histories of Western societies, the relation between individuals and religions is most often framed in two ways, cognitive and social: a person (ideally at least) “believes in” (the cognitive aspect) the core claims of the religion to which he “belongs” (the social aspect).¹ This model of religious participation, usually taken for granted as universally applicable, works well in—because it arose in

5 SOCIAL MOBILITY: from: The Melodrama of Mobility
Abstract: In chapters 3 and 4 we observed the complexity of South Korean class and class mobility. The women’s class locations and identifications, told obliquely through the stories of the networks through which I came to meet them, are, we learned, never static, and are inextricable from gender and from gendered stories. The education stories tutored us in the complexity of class work; it is there that people set out to effect their own or others’ class mobility. In these stories, we also saw that gender—ideas about gendered ways of being and becoming—is always already part of the picture.

7 GENDERING DISPLACEMENT: from: The Melodrama of Mobility
Abstract: This chapter focuses on a prevailing national and historical narrative: that of male subjectivity ( chuch’esŏng). I consider how male subjectivity—particularly its loss or displacement—works as an actor in the narratives of the women in this book, and in South Korea more generally (see Em 1995; Jager 1996a; and Schmid 1997 on Korean gendered narratives of nation and history). Beginning with a discussion of male displacement, I then introduce three films in order to elaborate and illustrate the popular and public narration of the loss or displacement of male subjectivity. Next, we will consider gender in national narratives more

CODA from: The Melodrama of Mobility
Abstract: From their very start to their final finish, all books are a collection of words—a prosaic thought indeed. This one has also paid attention to the work of words themselves. As I have written earlier, all of the women in this book considered their lives worthy of the written word. We could ask of them, “Worthy in what sense?” Although I do not presume that all of their answers would be the same, I think there would be common themes: among them their lives having been hard and their having been witness to earth-shattering transformations in the world about

Book Title: The Subject in Crisis in Contemporary Chinese Literature- Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Cai Rong
Abstract: Post-Mao China produced two parallel discourses on the human subject in the New Era (1976–1989). One was an autonomous, Enlightenment humanist self aimed at replacing the revolutionary paragon that had dominated under Mao. The other was a more problematic subject suffering from either a symbolic physical deformity or some kind of spiritual paralysis that undermines its apparent normalcy. How do we explain the stubborn presence, in the literature of the 1980s and 1990s, of this crippled agent who fails to realize the humanist autonomy envisioned by post-Mao theorists? What are the anxieties and tensions embedded in this incongruity and what do they reveal? This illuminating and original critical study of the crippled subject in post-Mao literature offers a detailed textual analysis of the work of five well-known contemporary writers: Han Shaogong, Can Xue, Yu Hua, Mo Yan, and Jia Pingwa. The author investigates not only the literary characters within the texts, but also their creators—real subjects in history, Chinese writers whose own agency was being tested and established in the search for a new subjectivity. She argues that, reenacting the Maoist legacy, the literary search failed to provide a viable model for a postrevolutionary China. In addition, the deficiency and inadequacy of the subject cannot always be contained in the Communist past—a history to be transcended in the design of modernity after Mao. The representation of the problematic subject thus punctured post-Mao optimism and foreshadowed the eventual abandonment of the move to rethink subjectivity in the 1990s. By diving beneath the euphoria of the 1980s and the confusion and frustration of the 1990s, these critical readings offer a unique perspective with which to gauge the complexity of China’s quest for modernity and a fuller understanding of the self’s multifaceted experience in the post-Mao era.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqw1p

5 The Post-Mao Traveler on the New Long March from: The Subject in Crisis in Contemporary Chinese Literature
Abstract: In the preceding two chapters, I concentrated on a number of works published by Han Shaogong and Can Xue in the heyday of the New Era, the mid-1980s. The two writers’ visions of the physically and symbolically deformed being are anything but congruent with the optimism of the age that had invested much of its energies and desires in the recovery of the ren, the human being writ large. Despite differences in their subject matter and artistic sensibilities, Han Shaogong and Can Xue are products of the times. Embodying as well as contributing to the ethos of the 1980s, their

Book Title: The Phantom Heroine-Ghosts and Gender in Seventeenth-Century Chinese Literature
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): ZEITLIN JUDITH T.
Abstract: The "phantom heroine"—in particular the fantasy of her resurrection through sex with a living man—is one of the most striking features of traditional Chinese literature. Even today the hypersexual female ghost continues to be a source of fascination in East Asian media, much like the sexually predatory vampire in American and European movies, TV, and novels. But while vampires can be of either gender, erotic Chinese ghosts are almost exclusively female. The significance of this gender asymmetry in Chinese literary history is the subject of Judith Zeitlin’s elegantly written and meticulously researched new book. Zeitlin’s study centers on the seventeenth century, one of the most interesting and creative periods of Chinese literature and politically one of the most traumatic, witnessing the overthrow of the Ming, the Manchu conquest, and the subsequent founding of the Qing. Drawing on fiction, drama, poetry, medical cases, and visual culture, the author departs from more traditional literary studies, which tend to focus on a single genre or author. Ranging widely across disciplines, she integrates detailed analyses of great literary works with insights drawn from the history of medicine, art history, comparative literature, anthropology, religion, and performance studies. The Phantom Heroine probes the complex literary and cultural roots of the Chinese ghost tradition. Zeitlin is the first to address its most remarkable feature: the phenomenon of verse attributed to phantom writers—that is, authors actually reputed to be spirits of the deceased. She also makes the case for the importance of lyric poetry in developing a ghostly aesthetics and image code. Most strikingly, Zeitlin shows that the representation of female ghosts, far from being a marginal preoccupation, expresses cultural concerns of central importance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqx52

Coda: from: The Phantom Heroine
Abstract: Hong sheng’s masterpiece,Palace of Lasting Life, has long been acknowledged as one of the two last great works of the southern drama, representing both the culmination and the virtual endpoint of the literary playwright’s creative engagement with this form of theater.¹ Begun in 1679 and completed around 1688, after nearly ten years of work, this fifty-act play is also important as one of several early Qing plays to reflect upon the fall of the Ming in 1644 and the memory of its loss.² This occurs on several planes inPalace of Lasting Life. On the narrative level, the play

GROUNDING A THEORY OF RIGHTS IN FALLIBILIST EPISTEMOLOGY from: Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Bontekoe Ron
Abstract: In listening to Richard Rorty’s paper (see “Justice as a Larger Loyalty” in this volume), it struck me yet again that what Rorty fails to appreciate sufficiently is that workable social arrangements are discoveries. As someone who identifies himself as a pragmatist, but one who hews to the Peirce-Dewey line rather than to Rortian neopragmatism, I think we need to take our discoveries rather seriously. While I agree that we should eschew paying ourselves and our ways of doing things empty compliments by designating them as “rational” in some transcendental sense, I feel as well that we should avoid needlessly

THE DISAPPEARANCE OF THE PUBLIC GOOD: from: Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Grange Joseph
Abstract: In this essay, I wish to describe the disappearance of the public good as a subject of philosophical discourse. The works of Confucius and of John Dewey contain robust concepts of the public good. But in the controversial work of Richard Rorty, the idea of the public good undergoes a radical transformation. I will examine The Great Learningof Confucius, John Dewey’sThe Public and Its Problemsand Richard Rorty’sContingency, Irony, and Solidarity. What I hope will emerge from this cross-cultural study is a reconsideration of the relation between metaphysics and social philosophy.

JUSTICE AND GLOBAL DEMOCRACY from: Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Dallmayr Fred
Abstract: Ours is a time of perplexing cross-currents. As we approach the end of the second millennium, we seem to enter the stage of a new pax Romana—but now on an unprecedented scale: a world order or world civilization, basically of Western design, encircling the globe with a network of universal/ uniform ideas and practices. Among these ideas, easily the most prominent and influential is that of liberal democracy, a regime founded on popular self-determination and equal citizenship rights. Thus the near-providential advance of liberal democracy, apprehended dimly by Tocqueville over a century ago, seems to have reached in our

CHAPTER 6 Solutions: from: Dark Writing
Abstract: Shortly after working on Tracks,the opportunity arose to advise on the design of a new public space at Victoria Harbour in Melbourne’s Docklands. The emergence of the Docklands precinct had been a side effect of the advent of containerization in the 1980s. The Port of Melbourne Authority had made the decision to develop other docks to accommodate the new scale of cargo vessel, and the fate of Victoria Dock as a major commercial wharf was sealed when, as part of the City Link Project, the Bolte Bridge was built just downstream at the junction of the Yarra and Maribyrnong

Book Title: Out of the Margins-The Rise of Chinese Vernacular Fiction
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Ge Liangyan
Abstract: The novel Water Margin (Shuihu zhuan), China's earliest full-length narrative in vernacular prose, first appeared in print in the sixteenth century. The tale of one hundred and eight bandit heroes evolved from a long oral tradition; in its novelized form, it played a pivotal role in the rise of Chinese vernacular fiction, which flourished during the late Ming (1368-1644) and Qing (1644-1911) periods. Liangyan Ge's multidimensional study considers the evolution of Water Margin and the rise of vernacular fiction against the background of the vernacularization of premodern Chinese literature as a whole. This gradual and arduous process, as the book convincingly shows, was driven by sustained contact and interaction between written culture and popular orality. Ge examines the stylistic and linguistic features of the novel against those of other works of early Chinese vernacular literature (stories, in particular), revealing an accretion of features typical of different historical periods and a prolonged and cumulative process of textualization. In addition to providing a meticulous philological study, his work offers a new reading of the novel that interprets some of its salient characteristics in terms of the interplay between audience, storytellers, and men of letters associated with popular orality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wr0tj

2 Told or Written: from: Out of the Margins
Abstract: The field of early Chinese vernacular fiction has long been haunted by questions concerning the origins of the genre. How was each of the earliest full-length vernacular novels— Shuihu zhuan, Sanguo yanyi, andXiyou ji—related to the long oral tradition that preceded it? Did the popular story-cycles only provide the subject matter for the composition of the narrative, or did the oral model exert a shaping influence on the work in print on the level of narrative discourse as well? These questions are so hard to answer simply because we know so little about those popular traditions and about

4 From Voice to Text: from: Out of the Margins
Abstract: In the previous chapter, the narrative discourse of Shuihu zhuanis discussed in terms of the oral mode of composition and story making. The discussion, I hope, helps elucidate the fact that much of the narrative discourse indeed took shape in an oral milieu, with many elements characteristic of oral literature intact or discernible in its present textual form. Of course, the voice of the storyteller is gone forever, and it is only in the form of the printed text that the narrative exists today. The current chapter addresses the issue of the textualization of the work. My argument here

Chapter 3 Kollumba Kang Wansuk, an Early Catholic Activist and Martyr from: Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Ledyard Gari
Abstract: Kollumba (Columba) Kang Wansuk (1761–1801), who perished in the great anti-Catholic persecution of 1801, is well known among a small number of historians of Korean Catholicism, but not among more general scholars of Korean history or in the wider field of Korean Studies. She should be more broadly recognized, since aside from her importance as an early Catholic, she was also a remarkable woman who worked in a cause that unfolded outside the home in public space, something that was hardly imaginable for a woman in her time and probably without precedent in earlier Korean history. She had a

Chapter 8 Mothers, Daughters, Biblewomen, and Sisters: from: Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Clark Donald N.
Abstract: In 1984, the publication of Jane Hunter’s study of women missionaries in China opened a new window of scholarly inquiry about the work and interactions of Western and Chinese Christian women, particularly single women, in the promotion of Christian institutions and opportunities for “native” women.¹ Especially notable is the field of women’s education. Less familiar is the work of evangelistic missionaries and their local counterparts. The contributions and achievements of the “agents and actors” in these areas are not in doubt. However, the practitioners remain objects for study rather than people to identify with, and missionaries—and again this seems

Chapter 10 Minjung Theology’s Biblical Hermeneutics: from: Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Kim Wonil
Abstract: As has been the case with liberation theologians of the Americas, it is therefore not surprising that minjungtheologians do their work by showing that the theology they are constructing is rooted in the Bible in some significant way, and therefore credible. While we can hardly label them biblicists, their reliance on the Bible as an indispensable primary source of their theology is unmistakable.

3 Contending Narratives in Classical Voices from: Cult, Culture and Authority
Abstract: This chapter will discuss three works written about Liễu Hạnh in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. All of them were written in Hán (the classical Chinese language). Together they constitute a discussion of the role of

4 Vernacularization of the Sublime from: Cult, Culture and Authority
Abstract: In the previous chapter, we saw how in the eighteenth century Ðoàn Thị Ðiểm wrote her story about Liễu Hạnh in classical prose to harness the sublime for the emancipation of educated women. It was addressed to the restricted audience of educated people. This chapter discusses two works on Liễu Hạnh written in vernacular poetry, one from the mid-nineteenth century and one from the early twentieth century. Both of these works use Ðoàn Thị Ðiểm’s Vân Cát Thần Nữ Truyện(Story of the Vân Cát Goddess) as a master text; however, each processes this master text into the vernacular in

2 From Female Sovereign to Mother of the Nation: from: Heian Japan, Centers and Peripheries
Author(s) WATANABE TAKESHI
Abstract: The Heian age stands out for the contributions made by noblewomen in the production of literary works and as sponsors of the arts and religious ceremonies. Their participation in political decisions at the center, however, has traditionally been seen as limited, especially when compared to the two hundred years between Empress Suiko’s accession (592) and Empress Shōtoku’s death (770), when men and women reigned in equal numbers and shared similar spans of rule. This context seems to be unique to ancient Japan as one is unlikely to find this many female rulers during such an extended period in other premodern

12 Life of Commoners in the Provinces: from: Heian Japan, Centers and Peripheries
Author(s) VON VERSCHUER CHARLOTTE
Abstract: The elites of Kyoto — emperors, court officials, monks, literati, and poets — have been the focus of many studies of Heian Japan. What is often overlooked is that the local population in the provinces provided the food, clothing, and various supplies the elites needed to perform their daily duties. And although the commoners rarely appear in the historical sources or the literary works of the age, they were of central importance to the livelihoods of the central elites. This chapter focuses on provincial life and examines Heian society from a material point of view in an attempt to explore this codependence.

Chapter 1 THE BANUA AS A CATEGORY AND A SOCIAL PROCESS from: Custodians of the Sacred Mountains
Abstract: The social landscape of highland Bali is patterned by regional networks of ritual alliance among groups of villages. Such networks are locally referred to as banua,or “ritual domains.” How these regional associations are conceptualized and maintained, and how they generate a sense of shared identity among the mountain people and set the stage for a regional status economy will be explored in the following chapters. The study of regional social interaction among the Bali Aga leads to a magical world where human beings, ancestors, spirits, and gods share a sacred landscape and timescape, brought to life in an intricate

(NATIVE) AMERICAN JEREMIAD from: American Indian Rhetorics of Survivance
Author(s) Bizzell Patricia
Abstract: WILLIAM APESS identified himself in his writings as an Indian.¹ He was perhaps the most successful activist on behalf of Indian rights in the antebellum United States. At the same time, he adopted the European religion of Christianity, and used the European language of English for all of his published works and public addresses.² Thus he can be described as what literary historian Bernd Peyer calls a ʺtranscultural individualʺ (17), incorporating elements from different cultures into his identity. Peyer emphasizes that this internal integration process can be empowering: ʺRather than being incapacitated by a disturbed personality, the transcultural individual can,

INSIDE THE CIRCLE, OUTSIDE THE CIRCLE from: American Indian Rhetorics of Survivance
Author(s) Redfield Karen A.
Abstract: I CAME to teach at the Lac Courte Oreilles Ojibwe Community College in January 1997. Along with teaching, I was going to collect student writing samples and conduct interviews with students and staff; this work was the foundation of my PhD dissertation. In addition to that project, I was contributing to the Center for English Learning and Achievement project, specifically in the area of Wisconsin literacy. Although I had never lived through a northern Wisconsin winter, or taught at a tribal college, I was fairly confident that I had packed all the necessities for winter survival and good fieldwork: my

CRITICAL TRICKSTERS from: American Indian Rhetorics of Survivance
Author(s) DeRosa Robin
Abstract: THIS project grew out of my essay, ʺAssimilated Positions: Storytelling and Silence in Zitkala-Saʹs Old Indian Legends.ʺ In the paper, I used a postmodern approach to the text, which I neither fully defined nor problematized. When I was asked by one reader to step up to the plate, so to speak, and justify my use of theory in the paper, I realized I had only a slight philosophy in place about what it might mean to rely heavily on contemporary literary theory in an essay dealing with a work by a Native American author. My rote postmodern answers (that theory

THE WORD MADE VISIBLE from: American Indian Rhetorics of Survivance
Author(s) Arnold Ellen L.
Abstract: LESLIE MARMON SILKO comments in her introduction to Yellow Woman and a Beauty of the Spirit(1996) that she is interested in ʺthe written word as a picture of the spoken wordʺ (14). As I have argued elsewhere in relation to Silkoʹs first novelCeremony(1977), Silkoʹs concern with the visualization of narrative in both image and written text is part of an ongoing project in her work to close the gap between signifier and signified, to recontextualize printed language and reconnect the written word with the dynamic, multisensory, multidimensional experience of orality.¹ Silkoʹs second novel,Almanac of the Dead

AMERICAN INDIAN SOVEREIGNTY from: American Indian Rhetorics of Survivance
Author(s) dʹErrico Peter
Abstract: Inter Caetera, May 3, 1493—Among other works well pleasing to the Divine Majesty and cherished of our heart, this assuredly ranks highest, that in our times especially the Catholic faith and the Christian religion be exalted and everywhere increased and spread, that the health of souls be cared for and that barbarous nations be overthrown and brought to the faith itself. …Our beloved son Christopher Columbus, …

Chapter 1 In Search of Rivers: from: Traces Of A Stream
Abstract: In 1983, I discovered that African American women write essays, and it was then I began to notice features of this type of writing that served ultimately to shape and direct the writing of this book. What prompted these insights was my reading of Alice Walker’s collection of previously published and unpublished essays, entitled, after the best-known essay in the group,In Search of Our Mothers’ Gardens: Womanist Prose. First among the distinctions of this volume is that it was published during a time when works by African American women were being celebrated as a literary “renaissance.” By the 1980s

Chapter 2 Toward an Analytical Model for Literacy and Sociopolitical Action from: Traces Of A Stream
Abstract: My imperativein theorizing literacy in the lives of African American women is to account for how, within this group, literacy has been practiced and made usable, with emphasis on the essay as a particularly instructive literate form. I acknowledge that there are many variables in African American women’s lives and work, which make their stories of literacy far from monothematic. Vibrant among these practices, however, is the use of literacy as an instrument for producing spiraling effects in both sociopolitical thought and sociopolitical action. Literacy has enabled African American women to create whirlpools in the pond of public discourse,

Chapter 5 From This Fertile Ground: from: Traces Of A Stream
Abstract: In 1956Jeanne L. Noble became the first researcher to publish a scholarly work on African American women and higher education for a mainstream market.¹ Her book,The Negro Woman’s College Education,published by the Teachers College of Columbia University, received the 1955 Pi Lambda Theta Award from the National Association for Women in Education. It was a landmark publication that examined the goals and aspirations of contemporary African American college-educated women and analyzed the types of curricula available to them, the opportunities that were encouraged and not encouraged for them as college-educated women, their attitudes about their training, as

Photographic Essay: from: Traces Of A Stream
Abstract: African American Women speak and write in public arenas, so the saying of when and where they enter, they certainly did. They entered every arena they could, with Anna Julia Cooper being one of the most eloquent among them in articulating their rights and abilities to do so. Cooper was born a slave in 1858 in Raleigh, North Carolina. Despite such humble beginnings, however, over the course of her life and work her accomplishments were manifold. She became one of the first African American women to receive a doctorate degree, the first African American woman to be named president of

Chapter 6 A View from a Bridge: from: Traces Of A Stream
Abstract: In resonance with this epigraph,my goal here is to share knowledge and experience, not about the literate practices of African American women as in the previous chapters but about my own standpoint as a researcher and scholar in the process of completing this book. The first and most consistent challenges have come hand in hand with the very choosing of the work itself, that is, with identifying myself as a researcher who focuses on a multiply marginalized group; whose interests in this group center on topics not typically associated with the group, such as nonfiction and public discourse rather

Book Title: Literature and Subjection-The Economy of Writing and Marginality in Latin America
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Legrás Horacio
Abstract: Through theoretical, philosophical, cultural, political, and historical analysis, Horacio Legras views the myriad factors that have both formed and stifled the integration of peripheral experiences into Latin American literature. Despite these barriers, Legras reveals a handful of contemporary authors who have attempted in earnest to present marginalized voices to the Western world. His deep and insightful analysis of key works by novelists Juan José Saer (The Witness),Nellie Campobello(Cartucho),Roa Bastos(Son of Man),and Jose María Arguedas(The Fox from Up Above and the Fox from Down Below),among others, provides a theoretical basis for understanding the plight of the author, the peripheral voice and the confines of the literary medium. What emerges is an intricate discussion of the clash and subjugation of cultures and the tragedy of a lost worldview.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrbr2

One Literature, Subjection, and the Historical Project of Latin American Literature from: Literature and Subjection
Abstract: Beginning roughly at the end of the nineteenth century, Latin American writers launched a project to map the whole convoluted reality of their countries in their literary works. However, Latin American countries were (and still are) notoriously heterogeneous spaces. Soon, then, the literary enterprise was confronted with the task of giving voice to a vast array of people with whom literature shared little in terms of values and cultural makeup. Writers did not recoil from the challenge. Convinced as they were of literature’s representational power and its seemingly limitless ethical neutrality, they focused on the best strategies to represent the

Six The Cross of Literature in Paraguay from: Literature and Subjection
Abstract: Confronted by the work of Roa Bastos, critical reading stands in disavowal. Not that Roa Bastos lacks critical attention: the bibliography on his work, especially on his two great novels, Son of Man(1960) andI the Supreme(1974), has increased year after year. But these readings have been marked by what Gerald Martin calls an unwillingness to draw conclusions that, although inescapable, are also “unacceptable to the great majority of writers, critics and other intellectuals concerned with the problems of contemporary Latin America” (1979, 169). Hence the wearisome insistence on the novels’ formal traits: How many voices composeI

Book Title: From Darkness To Light-Class, Consciousness, & Salvation In Revolutionary
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): HALFIN IGAL
Abstract: In this interdisciplinary and controversial work, Igal Halfin takes an original and provocative stance on Marxist theory, and attempts to break down the divisions between history, philosophy, and literary theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrcc6

4 The Making of the “New Intelligentsia” from: From Darkness To Light
Abstract: THE 1920S BOLSHEVIKS sought to turn the universities into “construction sites” for the fabrication of the New Man. The young state was determined to have the institutions of higher education function as the meeting place of the working class and its consciousness. Inevitably, the old intelligentsia proved an obstacle, insisting on civic liberties, occupying the universities, and refusing to turn them over to the proletariat. Lenin set the tone for the Bolshevik enterprise when he summarily rejected the idea that education could be indifferent to class. “The very term ‘apolitical,’” he said in November 1920, “is a piece of bourgeois

5 Davidson and Gadamer on Plato’s Dialectical Ethics from: Interpretation
Author(s) Gjesdal Kristin
Abstract: Over the past twenty years, there has been an increasing interest in the relation between Donald Davidson’s theory of radical interpretation and Hans-Georg Gadamer’s philosophical hermeneutics. Whereas some of this interest has been geared toward the intellectual horizon and heritage of Davidson’s work,¹ philosophers such as Richard Rorty and John McDowell have taken Gadamer’s hermeneutics to suggest a possible avenue beyond what they perceive to be the limitations of Davidson’s theory.² This essay approaches the Davidson-Gadamer relation from a different point of view. My concern is not to ask about the proper location or possible limitations of Davidson’s philosophy, but

7 The Explanation of Consciousness and the Interpretation of Philosophical Texts from: Interpretation
Author(s) Wilson Catherine
Abstract: Let me begin by recapitulating Nicholas Rescher’s theory of historical interpretation as he presents it in his valuable and thought-provoking summary, “The Interpretation of Philosophical Texts.”¹ Rescher distinguishes first between three approaches to a historical text. The first is creative or imaginative,and it is in this way that many nonprofessional philosophers read philosophical texts, finding suggestive ideas and images that are experienced subjectively as fitting into a conceptual framework. This framework is relatively personal; the meaning derived is not the sort that could be or needs to be discussed and debated in a scholarly community, though there is a

12 Concept Formation via Hebbian Learning: from: Interpretation
Author(s) Churchland Paul M.
Abstract: Training artificial networks to be selectively sensitive to typical kinds of temporal processes has proved to be relatively easy. But in biological creatures, the process of experience-dependent long-term adjustment of the brain’s synaptic connections is definitely not governed by the supervised back-propagation-of-errors technique widely used to train up the computer-modeled artificial networks familiar from the past two decades. That brute-force artificial technique requires that the “correct behavior” for a mature

Book Title: Listening Long and Late- Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Everwine Peter
Abstract: "What a rich array of music lies within Listening Long and Late.With refreshing authenticity, Everwine weds playfulness to practice, lyricism to narrative, pathos to the ordinary. Indeed, he has listened 'long and late' to the music of such venerable masters as Tu Fu, the hidden genius on the street, and the anonymous Aztec poets of the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries. Everwine writes with the same 'deified heart' that divines the mystery of his quotidian subjects in a language that is at once plain and poetic. His own work seamlessly segues into his translations from the Hebrew and Nahuatl, as if all the poems belonged to the same poet, which they in fact do, as the glorious multitudes of Peter Everwine, one of the masters of our age."-Chard deNiord
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrdd4

Book Title: Ecocritical Theory-New European Approaches
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Rigby Kate
Abstract: One of the more frequently lodged, serious, and justifiable complaints about ecocritical work is that it is insufficiently theorized. Ecocritical Theoryputs such claims decisively to rest by offering readers a comprehensive collection of sophisticated but accessible essays that productively investigate the relationship between European theory and ecocritique. With its international roster of contributors and subjects, it also militates against the parochialism of ecocritics who work within the limited canon of the American West. Bringing together approaches and orientations based on the work of European philosophers and cultural theorists, this volume is designed to open new pathways for ecocritical theory and practice in the twenty-first century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrhdg

Raymond Williams: from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) RYLE MARTIN
Abstract: Raymond Williams was born in 1921 and died in 1988. Many would regard him as the single-most important critic of literature and culture at work in postwar Britain. He was a major figure on the British intellectual left: “by far the most commanding figure,” in Terry Eagleton’s assessment.¹ Working initially in university adult education, at the age of forty he was appointed a Lecturer, and subsequently became Professor of Drama, at Cambridge. He made the ancient university a new base for his continued extramural commitments: to the critical public discussion of ideas, to the political Left, to his native Wales

Martin Heidegger, D. H. Lawrence, and Poetic Attention to Being from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) NORRIS TREVOR
Abstract: The thought of the German philosopher Martin Heidegger (1889–1976) is a challenge to thinking because it asks us to imagine being differently. His works are not straightforward and do not set out an explicit program for social change but rather invite a shift in attention and conception of self in relation to world, time, and the nature of knowledge. This shift involves refusing a major aspect of our late modernity, that is, the ubiquity and dominance of forms of abstract and theoretical knowledge. Heidegger wishes to return this knowledge to its proper place, grounded in pragmatic relationships that respond

Merleau-Ponty’s Ecophenomenology from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) WESTLING LOUISE
Abstract: Maurice Merleau-Ponty is the only major European philosopher who embraces the consequences of evolution and sees humans as interdependent members of the ecosystem. His thinking manifests a lifelong engagement with modern science, which he saw in a necessary complementarity with philosophy. Although his untimely death prevented the completion of his ambitious philosophy of nature, enough of the work in progress exists in manuscript to indicate its shape and importance as a radically ecological philosophy.

Gernot Böhme’s Ecological Aesthetics of Atmosphere from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) RIGBY KATE
Abstract: In The Ideology of the Aesthetic, Terry Eagleton acclaims A. G. Baumgarten’s “discourse of the body” as “the first stirrings of a primitive materialism—of the body’s long inarticulate rebellion against the tyranny of the theoretical.”¹ While Baumgarten is widely acknowledged as a founding figure in modern philosophical aesthetics, the counterideological potential that Eagleton locates in his valorization of corporeality failed to be realized, as the emergent discipline of aesthetics fled the flesh, restricting itself instead to a consideration of the formal properties and moral-intellectual significance of the work of art. Gernot Böhme, a leading figure in contemporary German ecological

Dialoguing with Bakhtin over Our Ethical Responsibility to Anothers from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) MURPHY PATRICK D.
Abstract: The Russian theorist Mikhail Bakhtin (1895–1975) provides a valuable set of tools for ecocritical analysis and a method of approaching literary works and their interrelationship with the material world. Bakhtin’s attitude toward language positions him in opposition to Ferdinand de Saussure and Saussurean linguistics. Instead, he can be aligned with his contemporary, Émile Benveniste, as well as current linguists such as George Lakoff and Mark Johnson, who have emphasized discourse over language. This emphasis leads to seeing speaking and writing as individual acts undertaken at particular moments in specific configurations of the world. That recognition of immersion leads to

The Ecological Irigaray? from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) COHOON CHRISTOPHER
Abstract: It could appear that the work of Luce Irigaray bears little relevance to environmental thought.¹ Irigaray is a feminist philosopher of sexual difference, after all, and the injustices that concern her are explicitly social and political. Most prominently, her work has sought to undermine the dominance of masculine culture by exposing the systematic exclusion of women from psychoanalytic theory and traditional Western philosophy; to discover positive forms of feminine subjectivity; and to imagine social and political relationships that advance beyond masculine monism and inaugurate a “culture of two subjects”—man and woman in their irreducible difference.² And yet, as we

Ecocentric Postmodern Theory: from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) OPPERMANN SERPIL
Abstract: The ecological turn has not only brought an integral awareness of the natural world into the field of literary studies, reorienting the humanities toward a more biocentric worldview, but has also drawn attention to the role of literature in influencing our knowledge of the world. According to Norman N. Holland: “Literature has power over us. At least it certainly feelsthat way when we are, as we say, ‘absorbed’ in a story or drama or poem.”¹ The cognitive function accorded to literature is of fundamental importance for ecocritics, who expect of writers that they inscribe ecological viewpoints in their work.

Blake, Deleuze, and the Emergence of Ecological Consciousness from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) LUSSIER MARK
Abstract: Gilles Deleuze (often in collaboration with Félix Guattari) sought to move analytic philosophy and theoretical psychoanalysis beyond “abstraction” and toward a “transcendental empiricism” already present in earlier philosophic work. This remarkable combination of traditionalism and innovation describes a state elusively beyond any linguistic epistemology—yet resident in any experiential event—and offers a method to capture individual experience of “pure immanence.”¹ The emphasis Deleuze placed on event and experience stimulated the energetic analysis of their interrelations by Alain Badiou, turning philosophy away from cognitive mapping through Kantian categorical imperatives and re/turning it to the world. Rereading “the role of rhythm

Book Title: Freud and Augustine in Dialogue-Psychoanalysis, Mysticism, and the Culture of Modern Spirituality
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): PARSONS WILLIAM B.
Abstract: Adopting an interdisciplinary, dialogical, and transformational framework for interpreting Augustine's spiritual journey in his Confessions,Parsons places a "mystical theology" at the heart of Augustine's narrative and argues that his mysticism has been misunderstood partly because of the limited nature of the psychological models applied to it. At the same time, he expands Freud's therapeutic legacy to incorporate the contemporary findings of physiology and neuroscience that have been influenced in part by modern spirituality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrm01

one RHETORIC from: Freud and Augustine in Dialogue
Abstract: Psychoanalytic explorations of the Confessionshave led to the emergence of a major interpretive divide over whether the work is a predominantly biographical memoir or a predominantly rhetorical text intended to teach and instill belief. This interpretive divide in turn reflects differences in methodological persuasion.

Book Title: Essays from the Edge-Parerga and Paralipomena
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): JAY MARTIN
Abstract: All of these efforts can be considered what Arthur Schopenhauer called, to borrow the title of one of his most celebrated collections, "parerga and paralipomena." As essays from the edges of major projects, they illuminate Jay's major arguments, elaborate points made only in passing in the larger texts, and explore ideas farther than would have been possible, given the focus of the larger works themselves. The result is a lively, diverse offering from an extraordinary intellect.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrp5b

Introduction from: Essays from the Edge
Abstract: In 1851, the German philosopher Arthur Schopenhauer gathered together two volumes of his scattered essays, aphorisms, dialogues, and random thoughts and published them under the recherché title Parerga and Paralipomena.¹ Far more than his masterwork of 1819,The World as Will and Representation,it reached a surprisingly wide readership and made his reputation. The 1850s were, after all, a grim period of political reentrenchment following the failures of the revolutions of 1848, and the time was ripe for the sour pessimism and disillusionment with reason expressed in his philosophy of the irrational will. If any progress were to be made,

Cultural Relativism and the Visual Turn from: Essays from the Edge
Abstract: On April 30, 1988, the Dia Art Foundation in New York hosted a well-attended conference on the theme of vision and visuality. It brought together a number of scholars working on the then nascent field of visual culture: Hal Foster, Jonathan Crary, Rosalind Krauss, Norman Bryson, Jacqueline Rose, and this author. The slim volume of conference proceedings, including vigorous debate among the participants, was published later that year as the second volume in Dia’s series Discussions in Contemporary Culture.¹ In hindsight, Vision and Visuality,as the book came to be called, may be seen as the moment when the visual

Visual Parrhesia? from: Essays from the Edge
Abstract: Cézanne’s famous assertion in a letter to a friend in 1905, “I owe you the truth in painting and I will tell it to you,” was first brought into prominence by the French art historian Hubert Damisch in his 1978 Huit thèses pour (ou contre?) une sémiologie de la peintureand then made into the occasion for a widely discussed book by Jacques Derrida,La verité en peinture,later the same year.¹ In that work, Derrida challenged the distinction between work and frame,ergonandparergon,that had allowed philosophers like Kant to establish an autonomous, disinterested realm for art,

The Kremlin of Modernism from: Essays from the Edge
Abstract: At odd intervals in the main galleries of the renovated Museum of Modern Art, there are textual supplements to paintings, rarely more than a paragraph, providing snippets of information about the artist, the context of the work’s production, or the place it holds in the narrative of modern art. What makes these random exceptions to the more frequent practice of labeling the artwork only by artist, title, and date so intriguing is that they seem to follow no obvious pattern that might justify the choices made by the curators to arrest the process of pure looking. Perhaps more text will

Book Title: Postcolonial Francophone Autobiographies-From Africa to the Antilles
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Sankara Edgard
Abstract: Bringing a comparative perspective to the study of autobiography, Edgard Sankara considers a cross-section of postcolonial francophone writing from Africa and the Caribbean in order to examine and compare for the first time their transnational reception. Sankara not only compares the ways in which a wide selection of autobiographies were received locally (as well as in France) but also juxtaposes reception by the colonized and the colonizer to show how different meanings were assigned to the works after publication.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrpth

Introduction from: Postcolonial Francophone Autobiographies
Abstract: Postcolonial Francophone Autobiographies: From Africa to the Antillesreflects a broad spectrum of Francophone autobiographies, examining the works of such authors as Valentin Mudimbé from the Democratic Republic of the Congo; Amadou Hampâté Bâ from Mali (formerly French Sudan); Kesso Barry from Guinea; Patrick Chamoiseau and Raphaël Confiant from Martinique; and Maryse Condé from Guadeloupe. To date, there has been a paucity of scholarship in the field of comparative Francophone studies. With its rich geographical and cultural coverage of Africa and the diaspora, this study fills an important gap by juxtaposing works from two colonized entities as they relate to

CHAPTER TWO Valentin Mudimbé: from: Postcolonial Francophone Autobiographies
Abstract: Valentin Mudimbé is well known in the American academy for his numerous works on Africa. The publication of his autobiography, Les Corps glorieux des mots et des êtres, on his fiftieth birthday attests to his continued interest in Africa as well as his own academic achievements. In the present chapter, I propose that the autobiography of this African scholar who was born and raised in the colonial Belgian Congo is a site where history, philosophy, and self-narrative meet, largely because of the hybridity of the work. Second, I show how philosophy permeates and shapesLes Corps glorieux des mots et

CHAPTER FOUR Patrick Chamoiseau: from: Postcolonial Francophone Autobiographies
Abstract: Patrick Chamoiseau was born in Fort-de-France, the capital of Martinique, in 1953. He studied law both in his country of birth and in France, and he served as a probation officer in Fort-de-France before working as a librarian with young prisoners in France. Chamoiseau collaborated with his fellow countryman Raphaël Confiant and Jean Bernabé on the literary manifesto Eloge de la Créolité; the three authors are considered the primary partisans of Créolité, the theory of French West Indian literature, culture, and identity. In this chapter, I demonstrate thatAntan d’enfance,one of a series of autobiographies by Chamoiseau, uses orality

CHAPTER SIX Maryse Condé: from: Postcolonial Francophone Autobiographies
Abstract: Maryse Condé is a prolific writer, known for her fictional works, but known also for being at odds with critics, one of whom has called her “the recalcitrant” daughter of Africa.¹ Yet Maryse Condé is much more: in addition to being a Guadeloupean, she has attained international fame and is known as a globetrotter, a cosmopolitan writer who has made the questioning of identity a fundamental part of her fictional creations. In this chapter I explore the “autobiographical space” of Maryse Condé in three of her texts—Heremakhonon (1976), La Vie scélérate (1987), and Le Coeur à rire et à

CHAPTER 1 Eranos and the “History of Religions” from: Religion after Religion
Abstract: The crucial context for understanding Scholem’s concept of mysticism in general and the position of Jewish mysticism within the wider framework of the humanities, as well as his methodological approach to the study of the subject, is that of his long-standing, though submerged and, to a very large extent, hidden confrontation with the Jung-Eliade school of thought, which culminated in the 1950s and 1960s. This chapter in Scholem’s life is also meaningful for the understanding of his

CHAPTER 7 A Rustling in the Woods: from: Religion after Religion
Abstract: The most influential and brilliant students of Hermann Cohen (1842—1918), the neo-Kantian Jewish philosopher of Marburg, largely rejected one of his fundamental views on Judaism. Opposing his characterization of Judaism as the religion definitively opposed to myth—Judaism as virtually identical with a demythologized Enlightenment rationality—these post-Cohenian thinkers turned to a view of myth as a creative and living force. At least three Cohen students, Franz Rosenzweig, Ernst Bloch, and Ernst Cassirer, wrote revolutionary works that innovatively reassessed the relations between myth, the History of Religions, and Judaism. These figures were joined by a much larger cohort in

CHAPTER 9 The Idea of Incognito: from: Religion after Religion
Abstract: Henry Corbin produced scholarship prolifically for nearly fifty years. But his voluminous corpus is that rarity, one whose breadth easily is matched by its depth. My intention in this chapter, therefore, cannnot be to provide a comprehensive review of this vast and subtle body of work. Rather, I want tentatively to explicate one aspect of his vision, the idea of hidden authority. I want to suggest that the theory of discipleship espoused by Corbin, especially when understood in light of its historical and political contexts, is one we embrace at our own intellectual peril

CHAPTER 10 Mystic Historicities from: Religion after Religion
Abstract: A stumbling block often encountered by new readers of Mircea Eliade is the discovery that the History of Religions oddly is defined by its opposition to history. Gershom Scholem’s version of History of Religions seemed to obviate this dilemma, inasmuch as he championed historical research and the historical method. Henry Corbin used a variety of terms, such as “imaginal” and “prophetic,” to characterize his stridently antihistoricist Islamic studies. But all three shared a developed interest in metahistory. Both Scholem and Corbin thus spoke of “historiosophy.” They also spoke of their own work in terms of a kind of “counter-history.”¹ Corbin

CHAPTER 11 The Chiliastic Practice of Islamic Studies According to Henry Corbin from: Religion after Religion
Abstract: One must study the totality of Corbin’s published work to understand that this great Islamicist was something other than an Islamicist.¹ He wrote what he came to call “prophetic philosophy,” a kind of esoteric science complemented by the acceptable apparatus of footnotes.² Influences on this elaborate conception, however, have not yet been traced in full, though many of them are by now well known. Corbin’s esoterism blended medieval philosophy, occultism, History of Religions, Lutheran theology, Shi‘ite ideology, into a brilliantly polished, absolutely authentic, and utterly irreproducible mixture. It is my conviction that he may have been the most sophisticated and

CHAPTER 15 On the Suspension of the Ethical from: Religion after Religion
Abstract: There is little explicit discussion of ethics in the work of Scholem, Corbin, and Eliade. For Eliade and Corbin the onticaleffectively replaced theethicalat the center of intellectual concern. Scholem certainly wrote more directly on ethics than did his two friends.¹ But to the extent that he replaced, in effect,mitzvot(commandments) andHalakha(Jewish law) with “the dialectics of continuity and revolt” as the driving force of Jewish history, he may be said to have deethicized Judaism.² If, as I have tried to show in the preceding chapters, the aesthetic was far more fully developed than the

Book Title: Liberal Languages-Ideological Imaginations and Twentieth-Century Progressive Thought
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Freeden Michael
Abstract: He employs the complex theory of ideological analysis that he developed in previous works to explore in considerable detail the experimental interfaces created between liberalism and neighboring ideologies on the left and the right. The nature of liberal thought allows us to gain a better perspective on the ways ideologies present themselves, Freeden argues, not necessarily as dogmatic and alienated structures, but as that which emanates from the continuous creativity that open societies display.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rh6k

CHAPTER ONE Twentieth-Century Liberal Thought: from: Liberal Languages
Abstract: In this chapter I seek to investigate how liberalism was portrayed throughout the twentieth century in dedicated liberal literature, that is, works primarily devoted to an exposition of the basic tenets of liberalism. On the surface many, though not all, of these works present themselves as “second-order” overviews of liberal theory and ideology. Sometimes, as with the Rawlsian family of arguments, they intend both to offer a novel interpretation of liberal principles and, in parallel, reflect given cultural understandings unconsciously and unintentionally. On the whole, though, writers about liberalism have tended to elucidate a tradition rather than depart from it.

CHAPTER FIVE J. A. Hobson as a Political Theorist from: Liberal Languages
Abstract: J. A. Hobson was one of the half-dozen most influential political thinkers in late-nineteenth—early-twentieth-century Britain, a fact that even the partial revival of his fortunes has infrequently brought to light. The main reason for this oversight has two complementary facets: Hobson’s contribution lay chiefly in his formulation of a liberal version of British welfare thought, an ideological genre that until recently was accorded insufficient recognition; and, conversely, recourse to conventional modes of political theorising, utilising existing traditions, or referring to the constructs of leading individuals, was not paramount in his work. It is symptomatic that in the various reading

CHAPTER NINE The Ideology of New Labour from: Liberal Languages
Abstract: In march 1998 Tony Blair addressed the French parliament in its native language to general applause. But Martine Aubry, the French employment minister, was annoyed by Blair’s speech. As the Independentreported: “Among other things, he had said ideology was dead; all that counted in government was that policies should work. Ms Aubry told colleagues that she found his address ‘lamentable.’ ”¹

Book Title: Birth of the Symbol-Ancient Readers at the Limits of Their Texts
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Struck Peter T.
Abstract: The book notes that Aristotle and his followers did not discuss the use of poetic symbolism. Rather, a different group of Greek thinkers--the allegorists--were the first to develop the notion. Struck extensively revisits the work of the great allegorists, which has been underappreciated. He links their interest in symbolism to the importance of divination and magic in ancient times, and he demonstrates how important symbolism became when they thought about religion and philosophy. "They see the whole of great poetic language as deeply figurative," he writes, "with the potential always, even in the most mundane details, to be freighted with hidden messages."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rk2m

INTRODUCTION from: Birth of the Symbol
Abstract: This study examines the ancient history of an idea, or perhaps it is better called a hope or desire. What do we expect from poetry? Is it an entertaining diversion? An edifying tale? A craft whose masters delight and move us with their elegance and fine workmanship? Yes, perhaps. But a few bold souls, ancient as well as modern, have it in mind that poetry will do something more for us. They suspect that the poets’ stories might say more than they appear to say, and that their language might be more than just words. Though these readers are likely

Book Title: Available Light-Anthropological Reflections on Philosophical Topics
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Geertz Clifford
Abstract: Geertz, who once considered a career in philosophy, begins by explaining how he got swept into the revolutionary movement of symbolic anthropology. At that point, his work began to encompass not only the ethnography of groups in Southeast Asia and North Africa, but also the study of how meaning is made in all cultures--or, to use his phrase, to explore the "frames of meaning" in which people everywhere live out their lives. His philosophical orientation helped him to establish the role of anthropology within broader intellectual circles and led him to address the work of such leading thinkers as Charles Taylor, Thomas Kuhn, William James, and Jerome Bruner. In this volume, Geertz comments on their work as he explores questions in political philosophy, psychology, and religion that have intrigued him throughout his career but that now hold particular relevance in light of postmodernist thinking and multiculturalism. Available Lightoffers insightful discussions of concepts such as nation, identity, country, and self, with a reminder that like symbols in general, their meanings are not categorically fixed but grow and change through time and place.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rkn7

II Thinking as a Moral Act: from: Available Light
Abstract: When I try to sum up what, above all else, I have learned from grappling with the sprawling prolixities of John Dewey’s work, what I come up with is the succinct and chilling doctrine that thought is conduct and is to be morally judged as such. It is not the notion that thinking is a serious matter that seems to be distinctive of this last of the New England philosophers; all intellectuals regard mental productions with some esteem. It is the argument that the reason thinking is serious is that it is a social act, and that one is therefore

V The State of the Art from: Available Light
Abstract: One of the advantages of anthropology as a scholarly enterprise is that no one, including its practitioners, quite knows exactly what it is. People who watch baboons copulate, people who rewrite myths in algebraic formulas, people who dig up Pleistocene skeletons, people who work out decimal point correlations between toilet training practices and theories of disease, people who decode Maya hieroglyphics, and people who classify kinship systems into typologies in which our own comes out as “Eskimo” all call themselves anthropologists. So do people who analyze African drum rhythms, arrange the whole of human history into evolutionary phases culminating in

VII The Legacy of Thomas Kuhn: from: Available Light
Abstract: The death of Thomas Kuhn—“Tom” to all who knew him, and considering his principled refusal to play the role of the intellectual celebrity he clearly was, an extraordinary number of people did— seems, like his professional life in general, on the way to being seen, in these days of pomos and culture wars, as but another appendix, footnote, or afterthought to his The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, written in the fifties and published in 1962.¹ Despite the fact that he produced a number of other important works, including the at least as original and rather more carefulThe Essential

Book Title: Essays on Giordano Bruno- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): GATTI HILARY
Abstract: This book gathers wide-ranging essays on the Italian Renaissance philosopher and cosmologist Giordano Bruno by one of the world's leading authorities on his work and life. Many of these essays were originally written in Italian and appear here in English for the first time. Bruno (1548-1600) is principally famous as a proponent of heliocentrism, the infinity of the universe, and the plurality of worlds. But his work spanned the sciences and humanities, sometimes touching the borders of the occult, and Hilary Gatti's essays richly reflect this diversity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rmc2

13 BRUNO’S USE OF THE BIBLE IN HIS ITALIAN PHILOSOPHICAL DIALOGUES from: Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: This chapter originated with the realization that during the composition of his philosophical works, Giordano Bruno made a constant and expert use of numerous Biblical texts. This may seem surprising, at first sight, in a philosopher noted above all, in his own days and in ours, for his heretical opinions with respect to the fundamental doctrines of both the Hebrew and the Christian religions. Nonetheless, Bruno’s Biblical references do not appear to have a merely rhetorical or ornamental function, nor do they express a purely ironical or satirical attitude toward the Biblical texts, although they are certainly eccentric with respect

14 SCIENCE AND MAGIC: from: Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: This chapter attempts to make a contribution to a discussion that has been developing for some decades, but that seems far from being exhausted. It becomes particularly relevent in the light of the recent book by this author that reproposes Bruno’s thought as concerned, in many of its most central moments, with properly scientific and even technological subjects, in a modern sense of those words.¹ Such a reading of Bruno’s thought creates a problem with respect to an approach such as that of Frances Yates, which claims not only to find in his works a radical culmination of the magical,

EPILOGUE from: Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: In one of his italian philosophical dialogues written and published in London in 1584, De l’infinito,universo et mondi, Giordano Bruno described his life’s work as an attempt to define a “tranquil universal philosophy”: a philosophy that he imagined as a peaceful swim through the infinite ocean of universal being.¹ This was Bruno’s third philosophical dialogue written in Italian. In it, he criticizes the fifteenth-century Catholic cardinal, Nicholas Cusanus, who anticipated him in proposing an infinite universe. Cusanus, however, proposed a dualistic universe of Aristotelian origin and with clearly Christian and neo-Thomistic implications, divided between spheres of being of intense

Chapter Three Mimesis and the Best Life: from: The Aesthetics of Mimesis
Abstract: In uncovering the psychological infrastructure of Plato’s engagement with mimesis I suggest in chapter 2 that his unease over the transformative power of mimetic art—its capacity to shape the minds of its audiences by absorbing them imaginatively in the possibility of “other lives”—culminates in an acute anxiety over one particular kind of art, tragedy. It is above all to tragic poetry, a category that Plato, on grounds that will soon emerge, does not limit to Attic drama but treats as embracing the work of Homer (“first of the tragedians”) too,¹ that “the greatest charge” of Republic10.605c6 relates: the

Chapter Five Inside and Outside the Work of Art: from: The Aesthetics of Mimesis
Abstract: The understanding of Aristotelian mimesis has suffered almost as much at the hands of its ostensible friends as at those of its avowed opponents. While the philosopher’s concept of mimesis has played a vital role in the long story of Western attitudes to artistic representation, that role has often been mediated through the reworking and misinterpretation of his ideas, especially those found in the Poetics. The critical balance of the treatise has been prejudicially weighted down, at different times, either on the side of a doctrinal didacticism or, equally distortingly, on that of a formalist creed of pure artistic autonomy.

Chapter Six The Rewards of Mimesis: from: The Aesthetics of Mimesis
Abstract: It emerged in the preceding chapter that for Aristotle, just as much as for Plato, a mature philosophical theory of artistic mimesis involves integral consideration of the kinds of experience that mimetic artworks offer to and invite from their audiences. The purpose of the present chapter is to explore further this psychological dimension of Aristotle’s mimeticism, and more particularly to argue that his concept of mimesis, in the Poeticsand elsewhere, entails the interlocking functioning of three elements—pleasure, understanding, and emotion—that have too often been separately discussed by students of this area of his thinking. The product of

Book Title: A Theory of the Trial- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Burns Robert P.
Abstract: Burns explores the rich narrative structure of the trial, beginning with the lawyers' opening statements, which establish opposing moral frameworks in which to interpret the evidence. In the succession of witnesses, stories compete and are held in tension. At some point during the performance, a sense of the right thing to do arises among the jurors. How this happens is at the core of Burns's investigation, which draws on careful descriptions of what trial lawyers do, the rules governing their actions, interpretations of actual trial material, social science findings, and a broad philosophical and political appreciation of the trial as a unique vehicle of American self-government.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rnt9

Chapter Seven The Ethical Turn from: Freud, the Reluctant Philosopher
Abstract: The controversies swirling around psychoanalysis for over a century may be reduced to the nature of its truth claims. Freud believed he followed strong empiricist methods in his analysis of signs and symptoms, and within the clinical tradition in which he trained and worked, he sought to achieve the same clinical status for psychoanalysis afforded other schools of psychiatry (Jones 1953–57; Decker 1977; Clark 1980; Gay 1988; Breger 2000; Makari 2008). The scientific standing of Freud’s theory has suffered for many reasons, not the least of which results from the success of modern psychiatry in transforming itself into a

Book Title: Reading Renunciation-Asceticism and Scripture in Early Christianity
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Clark Elizabeth A.
Abstract: Elizabeth Clark's remarkable work will be of interest to scholars of late antiquity, religion, literary theory, and history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rs06

CHAPTER THREE Reading in the Early Christian World from: Reading Renunciation
Abstract: A recent spate of scholarly works on the history of reading and writing has focused on the distinction between oral and literate cultures, and on the prevalence (or absence) of literacy at various historical periods. To place early Christians in this discussion has proved a vexing question. An important contribution to this exchange is classicist William V. Harris’ Ancient Literacy, published in 1989. Arguing for a minimalist view of ancient literacy, Harris claims that not more than 10 percent of the adult population of the Roman Empire at the time of Christianity’s origin was literate and that literacy declined from

CHAPTER FIVE Exegetical and Rhetorical Strategies for Ascetic Reading from: Reading Renunciation
Abstract: In this chapter, I survey the various ways in which the church fathers produce ascetic meaning from Scriptural texts, especially those of the Old Testament. As will become evident, the degree of exegetical work needed to render these texts as messages of sexual renunciation varied considerably: in some cases, passages stood ready-to-hand for appropriation, while in others, textual displacement, or even textual violence, was necessary to extract an ascetic meaning. I here identify eleven modes of reading, some closely related, that were frequently used by ascetically inclined church fathers. Although these modes of reading often have recourse to figurative interpretations,

Afterword from: Reading Renunciation
Abstract: Far from being writers—founders of their own place, heirs of the peasants of earlier ages now working on the soil of language, diggers of wells and builders of houses—readers are travellers; they move across lands belonging to someone else, like nomads poaching their way across fields they did not write, despoiling the wealth of Egypt to enjoy it themselves.¹

Book Title: The Sense of Music-Semiotic Essays
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Hatten Robert
Abstract: Based on the assumption that music cannot be described without reference to its meaning, Raymond Monelle proposes that works of the Western classical tradition be analyzed in terms of temporality, subjectivity, and topic theory. Critical of the abstract analysis of musical scores, Monelle argues that the score does not reveal music's sense.That sense--what a piece of music says and signifies--can be understood only with reference to history, culture, and the other arts. Thus, music is meaningful in that it signifies cultural temporalities and themes, from the traditional manly heroism of the hunt to military power to postmodern "polyvocality."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rszr

3 TOPIC AND LEITMOTIV from: The Sense of Music
Abstract: It is strange to find leitmotivs listed as though they were purely musical ideas or given numbers instead of names, conveying the impression that the operas are abstract symphonic works. This is the policy of William Mann in his translations of the libretti; he avoids naming the leitmotivs because “no

9 NEW BEGINNINGS from: The Sense of Music
Abstract: A musician, more than anyone else, ought to be aware of the need for faithfulness to one’s material. The philosophical mind seeks logi cal sequence and noncontradiction; but the best composers override logic in a desire to let their material work itself out unhindered. For this reason, Jacques Barzun identified Romanticism with realism, as I recorded above in Chapter 5. The process of stylization in Romantic art was aimed “not in the direction of a common norm, but in the direction of complete expressiveness. This is the desire to make each object disclose itself as fully as possible under the

SEVEN OF MANS FIRST DIS from: The Satanic Epic
Abstract: In the last chapter, I analyzed some of the words for “evil” that Milton deploys in strategic ways throughout the poem. Now it is time to notice that, beyond the specific words that “mean” evil or Satan, there is a network of echoing sounds and words that extends and complicates the Satanic focus of the epic. And it begins at the beginning. That remarkable forward shift of stresses in the opening pentameter of Paradise Lostplaces special emphasis on the first syllable of the long word “disobedience.”

NINE SATAN TEMPTER from: The Satanic Epic
Abstract: The well-known anthropologist Ruth Finnegan, author of important books such as Oral Literature in AfricaandOral Poetry, did her initial fieldwork among the Limba people of Sierra Leone. She spent a lot of time collecting their traditions, especially their tales, for her thesis. One day they told her, now its your turn. We’ve told you lots of our stories, now you tell us one of yours. She protested briefly, but then chose to tell them the story of Adam and Eve. They listened politely but made little comment at the time. Two years later she went back to Sierra

Book Title: Brahms and His World-(Revised Edition)
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): KARNES KEVIN C.
Abstract: The essays are complemented by a new selection of criticism and analyses of Brahms's works published by the composer's contemporaries, documenting the ways in which Brahms's music was understood by nineteenth- and early twentieth-century audiences in Europe and North America. A new selection of memoirs by Brahms's friends, students, and early admirers provides intimate glimpses into the composer's working methods and personality. And a catalog of the music, literature, and visual arts dedicated to Brahms documents the breadth of influence exerted by the composer upon his contemporaries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rxmx

Brahms, Max Klinger, and the Promise of the Gesamtkunstwerk: from: Brahms and His World
Author(s) KARNES KEVIN C.
Abstract: On the first day of January 1894, the artist Max Klinger sent Brahms a remarkable gift in the form of his newest creation. That gift, a volume consisting of forty-one etchings and engravings interspersed with the complete scores of six of Brahms’s vocal works, Klinger called the Brahms-Phantasie.¹ By the time Klinger unveiled his tribute to Brahms, he had achieved considerable renown as a visual artist. Indeed, as Hugo von Hofmannsthal declared, he was considered by some to be “the most original artist that Germany has the honor of calling her own.”² But theBrahms-Phantasiewas something more than just

Five Early Works by Brahms (1862) from: Brahms and His World
Author(s) FRISCH WALTER
Abstract: there inevitably must appear a musician called to give expression to his times in ideal fashion; a musician who would reveal his mastery not in a gradual evolution, but like Athene would spring fully armed from Zeus’s head. And such a one hasappeared; a young man over whose cradle Graces and Heroes have stood watch. His name isJohannes Brahms,and he comes from Hamburg, where he has been working in quiet obscurity,

Discovering Brahms (1862–72) from: Brahms and His World
Author(s) KARNES KEVIN C.
Abstract: Johannes Brahms has now presented himself as composer and virtuoso before the public in a concert of his own.⁶ Brahms’s compositions do not number among those immediately understandable and captivating works that carry one along in their flight. Their esoteric character, nobly disavowing every sort of popular effect, combined with their significant technical difficulties, assures that a broad embrace of these works will be much longer in coming than Schumann delightedly prophesized for his darling as a parting blessing.ᦍ In Vienna, none of Brahms’s larger compositions had previously been performed, and among his smaller works we had heard only a

Brahms’s Four Serious Songs, op. 121 (1914) from: Brahms and His World
Author(s) KARNES KEVIN C.
Abstract: Brahms left us several written statements about his Four Serious Songs, the maestro’s final work, designated opus 121. These statements—sometimes running parallel to, other times diverging from his verbal remarks—might seem to contradict each other. At first glance, the contradictions appear to be profound. However, a closer look does away with them completely. The first thing one notes is the jovial, almost frivolous tone with which Brahms speaks of the “godlessSchnadahüpferln,” the “Schnadahüpferlnof May 7,” or simply the “Schnadahüpferln,” as if it were obvious that he could only be referring, with this term, to the Four

“A Modern of the Moderns”: from: Brahms and His World
Author(s) BOZARTH GEORGE S.
Abstract: The real interest of the evening centered upon the Brahms Symphony, which stood at the head of the programme. There is no living musician about whose compositions there is a greater variety of opinions, or these opinions more changeable, than the same Johannes Brahms. People whose patience is limited, and whose ears itch for taking melodies—well or ill elaborated—may find enchantment at a first hearing of such limpid works as Raff’s “Leonore” Symphony. But let a Brahms “Requiem,” or wonderfully complex and original variations, or symphony, for the first time sound forth, and they will compare the work to muddy

Johannes Brahms as Man, Teacher, and Artist from: Brahms and His World
Author(s) KARNES KEVIN C.
Abstract: It was in Leipzig in late December of the year 1887 that I first met Brahms.He had traveled there to oversee the performance of two of his newest works, the Double Concerto and the Piano Trio in C Minor, and he knew that I was coming from Kiel to visit him, to ask him to give his opinion of my musical abilities based on a selection of my compositions. This is how it came about.³

Brahms and the Newer Generation: from: Brahms and His World
Author(s) FRISCH WALTER
Abstract: When I think of the time during which I had the fortune to know Brahms personally—it was during the last two years of his life—I can recall immediately how his music affected me and my colleagues in composition, including Schoenberg. It was fascinating, its influence inescapable, its effect intoxicating. I was still a pupil at the Vienna Conservatory and knew most of Brahms’s works thoroughly. I was obsessed by this music. My goal at the time was nothing less than the appropriation and mastery of this wonderful, singular compositional technique.

Book Title: Freud's Wishful Dream Book- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): WELSH ALEXANDER
Abstract: In Welsh's book, readers are invited on Freud's journey, to pause at each concealed pass in his seminal work and ask where the guide is taking them and why. Along the way, Welsh shows how Freud's arbitrary turnings are themselves wishful, intended to persuade by pleasing the reader and author alike; that his interest in secrets and his self-proclaimed modest ambition are products of their time; and that the book may best be read as a romance or serial comedy. "Some of the humor throughout," Welsh notes, "can only be understood as a particular kind of fine performance." Welsh offers the first critical overview of the argument in Freud's masterpiece and of the author who presents himself as guide.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7s0j7

CHAPTER ONE “A Dream Is the Fulfilment of a Wish” from: Freud's Wishful Dream Book
Abstract: The interpretation of dreamsdeserves to be regarded as Freud’s masterpiece, in two widely accepted meanings of that term: a famous work that contains many of his most important ideas, and the work that qualified him not merely as a member but as the founder of a guild. Among those most devoted to the study of psychoanalysis, both insiders and outsiders have affirmed the book’s prominence. The early disciple and official biographer Ernest Jones calls it “Freud’s most original work,” which established “a secure basis for the theory of the unconscious in man” and remains “the best known and most

INTRODUCTION from: Performing Africa
Abstract: Performance!—a ubiquitous term that currently is mapped onto disparate social worlds as if it were transcendent, its meaning immediately apparent. Yet the social life of performance as a concept is worth unraveling to track its significance in creating distinctive regions and different subjects. There is no better place to explore the contours of performance as an idea and as practice than in the context of Africa, which has been made into an object through a number of performative tropes. This work examines the ways performance becomes a frame ofenactment, creating moments of “Africa” not justinAfrica but,

PART ONE Representations / Performances from: Performing Africa
Abstract: Cultural theorist Homi Bhabha has suggested that there is something in the nature of stereotypes that makes them easy to utter repetitively (1983). For Bhabha, this repetition can be attributed to the role of stereotypes in the making of the psyche. Yet it is also possible that speakers are caught up in repetitive modes, that is, narrative conventions that encourage them to repeat stereotypes, which allow them to remain in the conversation. Conversations, then, as well as psyches, are constituted in repetitions of their foundational frameworks. These ideas provide a context in which to discuss my interpretative lens for understanding

PART TWO Professional Dreams from: Performing Africa
Abstract: History projects attempt to make a past that answers the challenge of nation-building and political identity. Yet the elements required to generate a sense of national identity and political culture are not clear. The chapters in this part discuss the negotiation of Gambian political culture in the postcolonial era up to the early 1990s, before the shift in political leadership in 1994. I examine the divergent political and cultural projects of those who imagine themselves as its makers: professional historians, government bureaucrats, national elites, and jali. I discuss the social context and cultural frameworks in which these official forays have

CHAPTER FOUR Personalistic Economy from: Performing Africa
Abstract: Early in the morning on any given weekday in the capital city of Banjul, people made their way to offices and to the markets. The slow opening to the day had taxi vans and buses making their way through the main street bringing people from the surrounding areas to work. Some of the men, civil servants, were dressed in dark Western-style suits and others in gray nationalist “African” suits and plain cotton shirts and trousers. Scattered among the civil servants in their modern attire were jali, many of whom appeared distinctive because they were wearing brightly colored, elaborately embroidered robes.

Book Title: Writing Outside the Nation- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): SEYHAN AZADE
Abstract: Writing Outside the Nationboth contributes to and departs from postcolonial studies in that it focuses specifically on transnational writers working outside of their "mother tongue" and compares American and German diasporic literatures within a sophisticated conceptual framework. It illustrates how literature's symbolic economy can reclaim lost personal and national histories, as well as connect disparate and distant cultural traditions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7s8h3

1 Introduction from: Writing Outside the Nation
Abstract: The words of the eighteenth-century German Romantic poet Novalis (Friedrich von Hardenberg) resonate beyond the boundaries of their history and geography and are poignantly rearticulated by a contemporary master of the arts of memory. Salman Rushdie’s critical sentiment stands as a testimony to the labor of remembrance that reclaims the lost experience of another time and place in language and imagination. The work of commemoration is often the only means of releasing our (hi)stories from subjugation to official or institutionalized regimes of forgetting. Remembering is an act of lending coherence and integrity to a history interrupted, divided, or compromised by

4 At Different Borders/On Common Grounds from: Writing Outside the Nation
Abstract: An active European site of fiery debates, where stakes in labor migration, immigration, patriation, and national and ethnic identity politics are very high, is the reunified German state. At this historical juncture, over six million foreigners, including Gastarbeiter (guest workers), refugees, asylum seekers, writers, artists, and professionals are permanently settled in Germany. In the embattled Europe of the post-cold-war era, Germany, with its economic power, political stability, generous welfare system, and what until recently were very flexible asylum laws, has become, perhaps quite unwittingly and unwillingly, the destination for a growing body of dis- placed peoples. This unprecedented presence of

Book Title: Plato's Fable-On the Mortal Condition in Shadowy Times
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Mitchell Joshua
Abstract: Plato's Fableis not simply a work of textual exegesis. It is an attempt to move debates within political theory beyond their current location. Mitchell recovers insights about the depth of the problem of mortal imitation from Plato's magnificent work, and seeks to explicate the meaning of Plato's central claim--that "only philosophy can save us."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7s9fm

INTRODUCTION from: William Faulkner
Abstract: MY TITLE intends no metaphor in its linking of language and economy. Words, as social instruments, exemplifying what Marx calls “practical consciousness,”¹ act upon a reality which they make as much as find. If the real is in a real sense made through words, those words needs must tend to complexity, not least because speakers inherit a language always “already occupied”² by prior and unknown users and usage. Since verbal instrumentalists work with a partially known instrument, and in circumstances not of their own design, they, to adapt Marx, are practically unconscious concerning large portions of their practice. Yet that

Introduction from: Contesting Spirit
Abstract: In 1886, at the height of his powers as writer and thinker, Friedrich Nietzsche wrote a series of prefaces for new editions of his early works.¹ As autobiography, they embellish the plain facts of his life; as philosophy, they say more about what Nietzsche was thinking in 1886 than about the early texts with which they are concerned. Still, they disclose a vibrant and paradoxical vision of Nietzsche as a thinker. Read together, the new prefaces narrate the trajectory of Nietzsche’s writing and thinking as a life that transpired between hopeless disillusion and the joy of love’s recovery. In the

Chapter Five ECSTATIC PHILOSOPHY from: Contesting Spirit
Abstract: It is one thing to claim that Zarathustracontains writing that one might describe as mystical or ecstatic poetry, it is another to claim that there is a mystical element pervading Nietzsche’s thought in general. What is the relevance ofZarathustrafor Nietzsche’s later work? One might argue that the ecstatic poetry of Nietzsche’s enigmatic “gift” is actually a parody of mystical affirmations, or an ironic warning against overexuberant hopes and loves. Given Nietzsche’s attack on ascetic practices and mystical states in theGenealogy, such an interpretation cannot be dismissed. Yet, Nietzsche’s later writing, viewed with a discerning eye, also

Conclusion from: Contesting Spirit
Abstract: I began with the prefaces of 1886 and Nietzsche’s celebration of a life rejuvenated in the recovery of health and love. By the turn of the new year 1889, Nietzsche had fallen into madness, where he would remain for the final ten years of his life. In the months leading up to his collapse, Nietzsche had been working at a feverish pace, and at times had experienced intense feelings of euphoria. Some of his most “affirmative” statements come out of this period, particularly in Ecce Homo. We do not know why Nietzsche went mad—whether he suffered from a congenital

Prologue from: The Wind from the East
Abstract: According to an oft-cited maxim, all history is the history of the present. Try as they might, historians are incapable of abstracting from contemporary issues and concerns. In fact, were they to do so, their work would surely reek of antiquarian sterility. At best, historians can make their biases clear to ensure they do not exercise an overtly disfiguring influence on their presentations and findings.

CHAPTER 1 Showdown at Bruay-en-Artois from: The Wind from the East
Abstract: April 6, 1972. The scene was a mining town in provincial Normandy, Bruay-en-Artois. A young working-class girl, Brigitte Dewevre, had been sadistically murdered, her mutilated, unclothed corpse left in a vacant field. The crime scene bespoke a level of brutality to which France was entirely unaccustomed. Adding to the event’s macabre nature was the fact that Brigitte’s body was discovered the next day by her younger brother in the course of a pickup soccer match.

CHAPTER 2 France during the 1960s from: The Wind from the East
Abstract: From 1958 to 1969 General Charles de Gaulle wholly dominated the landscape of French politics. One cannot understand France during the 1960s, as well as the nature of the political system against which the sixty-eighters rebelled, without examining the general’s central role. By the same token, the political closure the general had mandated engendered a trenchant body of oppositional cultural criticism that ultimately succeeded in undermining Gaullism’s credibility as a political model. As the decade evolved, pathbreaking works of fiction, film, and theory emerged, forming a cultural template through which the sixty-eighters viewed the shortcomings of postwar French society.

CHAPTER ONE Global Civil Society: from: Through Other Continents
Abstract: How permanent is the nation as an associative form? Do human beings congregate naturally as sovereign states, defining themselves naturally by their membership in nations? Or are there other ties, other loyalties and commitments, based on non-national ideals and flourishing on nonnational platforms? Bruce Ackerman speaks of a “world constitutionalism,”¹ creating a rule of law across national boundaries. Jürgen Habermas argues for a “postnational constellation,” made up of a broad array of nongovernmental forms, an integrated network reflecting the planet as an integrated environment. Such a network casts doubt not only on the primacy but on the very rationality of

CHAPTER FIVE Transnational Beauty: from: Through Other Continents
Abstract: Does beauty come under the jurisdiction of the nation-state? Is it a controlled phenomenon, the handiwork (and perhaps the handmaiden) of a territorial regime? Or is it more primitive, more unruly, having a deeper relation to humans as a species? If so, can it be invoked as a common ground of sorts, a platform for our shared humanness, over and against what would divide us?

CHAPTER SEVEN African, Caribbean, American: from: Through Other Continents
Abstract: Is african-american literature national or is it diasporic? Just how important is the first half of that hyphenated word? Does “African” reside solely in the pigment of the skin, or is it more active than that, more complexly present, working its way into ritual and music, into the very words one uses and the grammar that strings those words together? Is there a research program embedded in the word “African,” and if so, how does it square with the geography and chronology of the United States?

Book Title: Modernity's Wager-Authority, the Self, and Transcendence
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Seligman Adam B.
Abstract: Adam Seligman, one of our most important social thinkers, continues the incisive critique of modernity he began in his previously acclaimed The Idea of Civil SocietyandThe Problem of Trust.In this provocative new work of social philosophy, Seligman evaluates modernity's wager, namely, the gambit to liberate the modern individual from external social and religious norms by supplanting them with the rational self as its own moral authority. Yet far from ensuring the freedom of the individual, Seligman argues, "the fundamentalist doctrine of enlightened reason has called into being its own nemesis" in the forms of ethnic, racial, and identity politics. Seligman counters that the modern human must recover a notion of authority that is essentially transcendent, but which extends tolerance to those of other--or no--faiths.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7sp0b

INTRODUCTION from: Modernity's Wager
Abstract: Like people everywhere and in all ages, most members of modern societies readily understand the workings of power. Power and power differentials are everywhere. We are schooled in its uses and abuses.

Book Title: Charred Lullabies-Chapters in an Anthropography of Violence
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Daniel E. Valentine
Abstract: How does an ethnographer write about violence? How can he make sense of violent acts, for himself and for his readers, without compromising its sheer excess and its meaning-defying core? How can he remain a scholarly observer when the country of his birth is engulfed by terror? These are some of the questions that engage Valentine Daniel in this exploration of life and death in contemporary Sri Lanka. In 1983 Daniel "walked into the ashes and mortal residue" of the violence that had occurred in his homeland. His planned project--the study of women's folk songs as ethnohistory--was immediately displaced by the responsibility that he felt had been given to him, by surviving family members and friends of victims, to recount beyond Sri Lanka what he had seen and heard there. Trained to do fieldwork by staying in one place and educated to look for coherence and meaning in human behavior, what does an anthropologist do when he is forced by circumstances to keep moving, searching for reasons he never finds? How does he write an ethnography (or an anthropography, to use the author's term) without transforming it into a pornography of violence? In avoiding fattening the anthropography into prurience, how does he avoid flattening it with theory? The ways in which Daniel grapples with these questions, and their answers, instill this groundbreaking book with a rare sense of passion, purpose, and intellect.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7srks

6 SUFFERING NATION AND ALIENATION from: Charred Lullabies
Abstract: When violence is transformed into art—or even artful prose, be it reportorial or even analytic—its aestheticization is obvious. Art makes sense out of the senseless. The aestheticizing impulse, however, is less obvious in another creation of culture: the nation-state, that political work of art. The nation-state too promises to bring forth order out of disorder, mold form from that in which form is absent. But even though this order may be posited as a future hope, something to be achieved in the making, this hope is drenched in nostalgia, the imagined glory that once was. In South Asia

Book Title: Cultures in Flux-Lower-Class Values, Practices, and Resistance in Late Imperial Russia
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Steinberg Mark D.
Abstract: The authors vividly convey the vitality as well as the contradictions of social life in old regime Russia, while also confronting problems of interpretation, methodology, and cultural theory. They tell of peasant death rites and religious beliefs, family relationships and brutalities, defiant peasant women, folk songs, urban amusement parks, expressions of popular patriotism, the penny press, workers' notions of the self, street hooliganism, and attempts by educated Russians to transform popular festivities. Together, the authors portray popular culture not as a static, separate world, but as the dynamic means through which lower-class Russians engaged the world around them.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ssdz

4 CONFRONTING THE DOMESTIC OTHER: from: Cultures in Flux
Author(s) Frank Stephen P.
Abstract: In an 1889 report on his field studies of Sarapul’skii district, Viatka province, the Russian ethnographer P.M. Bogaevsky noted that peasants who spent time working in cities served as pioneers of urban culture upon returning to their villages. Unfortunately, he added, repeating with dismay an already widespread observation, the rural population had interpreted this culture in the most undesirable manner, thereby allowing it to destroy ancient precepts and customs. Young peasants in particular now regarded with disdain the centuries-old traditions of their grandparents—traditions that had given the Russian peasantry its special form of communal life and shaped its worldview.

Book Title: Slavery and the Culture of Taste- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Gikandi Simon
Abstract: Through a close look at the eighteenth century's many remarkable documents and artworks, Slavery and the Culture of Tastesets forth the tensions and contradictions entangling a brutal practice and the distinctions of civility.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7svr8

1 Overture: from: Slavery and the Culture of Taste
Abstract: Sometime around 1659, the Dutch painter Harmenszoon van Rijn Rembrandt sat in his studio in Amsterdam and commenced work on Two Negroes(fig. 1.1), considered one of the most compelling paintings of the last phase of his illustrious career. Working with African models and operating within a Dutch culture whose domestic economy was driven by the slave trade, Rembrandt sought to turn his black figures, people who most probably had arrived in the European Low Countries as slaves or servants, into elevated subjects through art. This gesture—the transformation of the most marginal figures in society into elevated works of

6 The Ontology of Play: from: Slavery and the Culture of Taste
Abstract: Sometime between 1730 and 1745, an African drum was collected in Virginia by a certain Reverend Clarke on behalf of Sir Hans Sloane, distinguished English naturalist and founder of the British Museum (fig. 6.1). The drum, now at the British Museum, is a remarkable piece of work, one whose meaning is suspended somewhere between the aura of art and ritual. Constructed in the Akan style, and made of wood (Cordia and Baphia) native to Africa, deerskin, and vegetable fiber, it is considered to be one of the earliest known surviving examples of African objects in North America.¹ If the drum

Conclusion from: The Harmony of Illusions
Abstract: In 1994, the American Psychiatric Association published a fourth edition of its official nosology. The new manual, DSM-IV, perpetuates the Kraepelinian framework established byDSM-III. Disorders are generally represented as monothetic categories, each one bounded by a distinctive list of criterial features. The manual’s most obvious departure from the previous editions is rhetorical and concerns the definition of its eponymic subject, “mental disorders.” InDSM-IIIandDSM-III-R, the term is defined in a way that includes all of the factions and orientations that were then represented in the American Psychiatric Association:

Book Title: Anthropos Today-Reflections on Modern Equipment
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Rabinow Paul
Abstract: Paul Rabinow brings together years of distinguished work in this magisterial volume that seeks to reinvigorate the human sciences. Specifically, he assembles a set of conceptual tools--"modern equipment"--to assess how intellectual work is currently conducted and how it might change.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7sz2j

Introduction from: Anthropos Today
Abstract: This book is proposed as a meditation on Michel Foucault’s claim that “equipment is the medium of transformation of logos into ethos.” A good deal of work is required, however, to grasp what such a claim might mean. The difficulty in part lies in the fact that the terms “equipment” and “meditation” are used in a distinctive technical sense. Furthermore, why one would want to transform “logos” into “ethos” equally requires explanation. Hence the reader is alerted that reading this book will require a certain patience. Additionally, and unexpectedly, the book addresses the reader as a friend. Initially this appellation

Chapter 3 Object from: Anthropos Today
Abstract: All of the explicit uses of the concept of problématisationare found late in Foucault’s work. It first appears inDiscipline and Punish, and this appearance is, as the saying goes, no accident.¹ It is integrally related to Foucault’s changing understanding of thinking. In 1969 he was nominated for appointment to the Collège de France and as part of the standard selection process was obliged to present a research project and to propose a name for the chair he would occupy. Foucault named his chair “History of Systems of Thought.”² By the mid-1970s, at the latest, Foucault had abandoned the

Chapter 5 Form from: Anthropos Today
Abstract: The anthropology that concerns me is one that is practically and essentially mediated by a form of actual experience. There have been different names given to the practice that grounds anthropology in empirical work. The names from the past—fieldwork, participant observation—are no longer adequate to the practice I am seeking to conceptualize. Regardless of how one might best characterize this practice (a topic to which I return below), it eventually passes through one or another form of figuration, especially writing. The traditional name for that practice of figuration is ethnography, but that term is inadequate and misleading, at

Book Title: Forbidden Fruit-Counterfactuals and International Relations
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Lebow Richard Ned
Abstract: Could World War I have been averted if Franz Ferdinand and his wife hadn't been murdered by Serbian nationalists in 1914? What if Ronald Reagan had been killed by Hinckley's bullet? Would the Cold War have ended as it did? In Forbidden Fruit, Richard Ned Lebow develops protocols for conducting robust counterfactual thought experiments and uses them to probe the causes and contingency of transformative international developments like World War I and the end of the Cold War. He uses experiments, surveys, and a short story to explore why policymakers, historians, and international relations scholars are so resistant to the contingency and indeterminism inherent in open-ended, nonlinear systems. Most controversially, Lebow argues that the difference between counterfactual and so-called factual arguments is misleading, as both can be evidence-rich and logically persuasive. A must-read for social scientists,Forbidden Fruitalso examines the binary between fact and fiction and the use of counterfactuals in fictional works like Philip Roth'sThe Plot Against Americato understand complex causation and its implications for who we are and what we think makes the social world work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7t05p

CHAPTER ONE Making Sense of the World from: Forbidden Fruit
Abstract: Forbidden Fruitis an avowedly provocative but also inviting title. The two, as Eve knew, are often reinforcing. Her offer of the apple to Adam is an invitation to eat from the Tree of Knowledge and possibly transcend their human condition. It is a provocation because it involved violating the one proscription laid down by their creator.¹ Eating from the Tree of Knowledge, the couple soon discover, entails expulsion from the Garden of Eden, hard work to survive, pain in childbirth, and mortality.² Counterfactuals can be considered an analog to the apple, and the invitation to engage with them a

CHAPTER TWO Counterfactual Thought Experiments from: Forbidden Fruit
Abstract: The ability to imagine alternative scenarios is a ubiquitous, if not essential, part of human mental life.¹ It is a universal phenomenon, not a practice restricted to or more pronounced in Western culture.² Counterfactuals are routinely used by ordinary people and policymakers to work their way through problems, reach decisions, cope with anxiety, and make normative judgments. They are readily inspired by disconfirmed expectations and failed actions and the regrets they evoke.³ In these circumstances, counterfactual scenarios can empower us by making us believe that we could have brought about better outcomes.⁴ When people invent counterfactuals for any of these

Book Title: Touching the World-Reference in Autobiography
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): EAKIN PAUL JOHN
Abstract: Paul John Eakin's earlier work Fictions in Autobiography is a key text in autobiography studies. In it he proposed that the self that finds expression in autobiography is in fundamental ways a kind of fictive construct, a fiction articulated in a fiction. In this new book Eakin turns his attention to what he sees as the defining assumption of autobiography: that the story of the self does refer to a world of biographical and historical fact. Here he shows that people write autobiography not in some private realm of the autonomous self but rather in strenuous engagement with the pressures that life in culture entails. In so demonstrating, he offers fresh readings of autobiographies by Roland Barthes, Nathalie Sarraute, William Maxwell, Henry James, Ronald Fraser, Richard Rodriguez, Henry Adams, Patricia Hampl, John Updike, James McConkey, and Lillian Hellman. In the introduction Eakin makes a case for reopening the file on reference in autobiography, and in the first chapter he establishes the complexity of the referential aesthetic of the genre, the intricate interplay of fact and fiction in such texts. In subsequent chapters he explores some of the major contexts of reference in autobiography: the biographical, the social and cultural, the historical, and finally, underlying all the rest, the somatic and temporal dimensions of the lived experience of identity. In his discussion of contemporary theories of the self, Eakin draws especially on cultural anthropology and developmental psychology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7t2zt

CHAPTER ONE The Referential Aesthetic of Autobiography from: Touching the World
Abstract: THIS INQUIRY into the referential aesthetic of autobiography attempts to answer a question that has haunted me for a long time: why should it make a difference to me that autobiographies are presumably based in biographical fact? This is really another way of asking why people read autobiographies, a question intimately linked to the question of why people write them. There seems to be no doubt that readers do read autobiographies differently from other kinds of texts, especially from works they take to be “fictions.” All who have studied the reading of autobiography agree that reference lies at the heart

CHAPTER FOUR Living in History from: Touching the World
Abstract: WARS may not loom large in the diminishing perspective of la longue duréeespoused by the French historians of theAnnalesschool, but they are routinely invoked to demarcate historical periods. For better or worse, they function as the most familiar symbols of our collective experience. Wartime propaganda promotes this identification between the individual and society: to enlist is to enlist in history, to participate in a global movement of some kind. The pressure to make such identifications often leads noncombatants to an even livelier grasp of the dynamic at work than that of the veterans themselves. As Henry James

Chapter 1 FRONTIERS: WALLS AND WINDOWS from: Journeys to the Other Shore
Abstract: In a globalized world grown smaller by progressively dizzying flows of people, knowledge, and information, ʺtravelʺ seems to have become the image of the age. Porous borders, portable allegiances, virtual networks, and elastic identities now more than ever evoke the language of mobility, contingency, fluidity, provisionality, and process rather than that of stability, permanence, and fixity.¹ Scholars who traffic in the lingo of deterritorialization and nomadism increasingly traverse disciplines and regions, mining disparate experiences of displacement such as tourism, diaspora, exile, cyberculture, and migration as ʺcontact zones,ʺ sites that articulate the preconditions and implications of cross-cultural encounters.²

Book Title: War at a Distance-Romanticism and the Making of Modern Wartime
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Favret Mary A.
Abstract: Favret examines wartime literature and art as varied as meditations on the Iliad, the history of meteorology, landscape painting in India, and popular poetry in newspapers and periodicals; she locates the embedded sense of war and dislocation in works ranging from Austen, Coleridge, and Wordsworth to Woolf, Stevens, and Sebald; and she contemplates how literature provides the public with methods for responding to violent calamities happening elsewhere. Bringing to light Romanticism's legacy in reflections on modern warfare, this book shows that war's absent presence affects home in deep and irrevocable ways.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7t6rs

CHAPTER FIVE Viewing War at a Distance from: War at a Distance
Abstract: When Henri Lefebvre looks at the everyday and finds there a truth “waiting for us, besieging us on all sides”; when Sigmund Freud imagines the frail organism “suspended in the middle of an external world” that attacks it with “stimuli,” they demonstrate the figurative power of the siege well into the twentieth century.¹ The siege concentrates warfare, bringing it home in the most immediate and violent way. The siege marks therefore the end of war at a distance. It is thus appropriate to conclude with a meditation on sieges, or at least on the representational work sieges may perform. Even

Book Title: Mappings-Feminism and the Cultural Geographies of Encounter
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): FRIEDMAN SUSAN STANFORD
Abstract: Defending the pioneering role of academic feminists in the knowledge revolution, this work draws on a wide variety of twentieth-century cultural expressions to address theoretical issues in postmodern feminism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7t6x1

CHAPTER 9 Craving Stories: from: Mappings
Abstract: The necessity of narrative—indeed the hunger for it—evident in these epigraphs resonates with the work of narrative theorists such as Robert Caserio and Peter Brooks, both of whom identify narrative as an essential mode of understanding reality. But curiously, their insistence on narrative is out of tune with the views of a number of poststructuralist theorists such as Roland Barthes, Julia Kristeva, and Hélène Cixous as well as those whom they have influenced. These theorists have variously suggested that what they loosely call “poetry,” the “poetic,” or the “lyric” is the avant-garde of modernity’s disruptions of the symbolic

CHAPTER FIVE Conviction and Community from: Acts of Compassion
Abstract: Debbie Carson began doing volunteer work in high school. Much of it was organized by her youth group at church. She visited inmates at the county jail and sang hymns at local nursing homes on Sunday afternoons. She also worked as a candy striper at a hospital. Volunteering became a habit. So did caring for the needy. In college she majored in special education. After college she worked for a year in an inner-city program for disadvantaged families. After that she taught children with learning disabilities.

CHAPTER SEVEN Bounded Love from: Acts of Compassion
Abstract: “Several years earlier, while working at the state prison, Carla had befriended, then fallen in love with, an inmate.... After washing the supper

CHAPTER NINE Envisioning a Better Society from: Acts of Compassion
Abstract: Jane addams’s decision to become a volunteer also forced her to become an advocate of social justice. The girl from rural Illinois moved to Chicago with the hope of helping disadvantaged individuals. She quickly discovered that caring for individuals could go only so far. To improve the conditions of poor people in Chicago would take the help of city hall and eventually even the federal government. With the help of labor unions and social-reform organizations, she was able to institute juvenile-court laws, the first “mother’s pension” law, tenement-house regulations, an eight-hour workday law for women, factory-inspection laws, and workers’ compensation.

CHAPTER TEN The Case for Compassion from: Acts of Compassion
Abstract: Imagine for a moment that our roles are reversed: you are the writer and I am the reader. Impossible, you say; it will not work; it is only some not-so-subtle trick you want to play. But see: you have already begun to speak. Perhaps there are interesting possibilities here after all. Ask yourself, before you say anything more, whether you believe compassion is a good thing. And if you believe it is a good thing, see if you can frame an argument that will convince me.

CHAPTER 6 Visions, Dreams, and Mathematics from: Circles Disturbed
Author(s) MAZUR BARRY
Abstract: Mathematicians can hardly avoid making use of stories of various kinds, to say nothing of images, sketches, and diagrams, to help convey the meaning of their accomplishments and their aims. As Peter Galison points out in chapter 2, we mathematicians often are nevertheless silent—or perhaps even uneasy—about the role that stories and images play in our work.

CHAPTER 8 Mathematics and Narrative: from: Circles Disturbed
Author(s) TEISSIER BERNARD
Abstract: There are many types of narrations, from origin myths to the ship logs of maritime explorers, from children’s bedtime stories to works of literature—including poetry—and theater. We might also recall here Kipling’s joke in one of his letters from Japan about the person who, having borrowed a dictionary, gives it back with the comment that the stories are generally interesting, but too diverse.

CHAPTER 9 Narrative and the Rationality of Mathematical Practice from: Circles Disturbed
Author(s) CORFIELD DAVID
Abstract: How is it to act rationally as a mathematician? For much of the Anglo-American philosophy of mathematics this question is answered in terms of what mathematicians most obviously produce—journal papers. From this perspective, the mathematician’s work is taken to be of interest solely insofar as in consists in deducing the consequences of various axioms and definitions. This view of the discipline, with its strong focus on aspects of mathematics that do not feature largely elsewhere—its use of deductive proof, its supposed capacity to be captured by some formal calculus, the abstractness of the objects it studies—isolates the

CHAPTER 14 Mathematics and Narrative: from: Circles Disturbed
Author(s) MARGOLIN URI
Abstract: The systematic study of the manifold relations between narrative (especially fictional) and mathematics (including formal logic) is in its infancy. From my point of view as a student of literary fictional narrative, it would be most useful to map out for further work the areas of interrelations between these two kinds of symbolic discourse. Needless to say, the list of areas I discuss is neither exclusive nor exhaustive but rather a tentative staking out of the terrain, to be modified and improved by further work. I should also mention that my command of literature and literary theory is far superior

The Apprentice Years of a Counter-Revolutionary: from: Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Darcel Jean-Louis
Abstract: The four years Joseph de Maistre spent in Lausanne during the French Revolution (13 April 1793 to 28 February 1797) are certainly the best known of his life. The period in Lausanne, which marked the entry of the Senator from Chambéry into political and literary life, has attracted biographers and historians who have had at their disposal abundant information, particularly precious when it throws light on the genesis of his works. This is equally the period when the author had been the least miserly with information about himself. His journal devotes ninety pages to these years, almost half of the

Joseph de Maistre and the House of Savoy: from: Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Darcel Jean-Louis
Abstract: Fifteen years ago the Institut d’études maistriennes was created in Chambéry. It is not up to me to judge the presentations, articles, studies, and works published under its aegis, in the context of the Centre d’études franco-italiennes, I can at least recall the objectives the research centre established for itself.

Maistre’s Theory of Sacrifice from: Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Bradley Owen
Abstract: Joseph de Maistre’s “Eclaircissement sur les Sacrifices” (1810)² is an unjustly neglected work of a most unjustly neglected author. Written concurrently with his masterwork Les Soirées de Saint-Pétersbourg,“Enlightenment on Sacrifices” provides a theoretical underpinning to Maistre’s notorious, often mysterious, and sometimes repellent reflections on punishment, war, the French Revolution, and the ways of Providence. The present essay outlines Maistre’s theory of sacrifice, describes how he applied it to historical events, processes, and institutions, and begins to explore the significance of Maistre’s theory for modern European intellectual history.

Joseph de Maistre’s Theory of Language: from: Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Thurston Benjamin
Abstract: Ever since the appearance of Maupertuis’s Réflexions sur I’origine des langues et la signification des motsin 1748, the Berlin Academy had been at the centre of a vigorous debate on the origin, formation, and function of language. Arguments of considerable ingenuity were put forward, including seminal works by Süssmilch, Michaelis, and Herder. Such studies were much more than finger exercises for philologists, however; a given account of the genesis and development of language would situate its author in a wider polemic of political and religious contention. At the same time, there was an abiding fascination for, and curiosity to

Joseph de Maistre, New Mentor of the Prince: from: Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Darcel Jean-Louis
Abstract: Joseph de Maistre, it has often been noticed, did not create an ideology Counter-Revolution; his works are fragmented essays, sometimes unfinished, often published after his death. In twenty years, from Considerations sur la FrancetoLes Soirées de Saint-Pétersbourg,²they touched on topics from political history to philosophical and religious controversy without constructing a doctrine in the sense that we would understand it, which is surprising on the part of the most radical denigrator of modernity. Diverse reasons for this have been advanced: his rejection of a rational organization of society led him to condemn all intellectual constructions, which he

Joseph de Maistre’s Works in Russia: from: Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Miltchyna Vera
Abstract: The great subject of “Joseph de Maistre in Russia” can be treated in two different ways: on the one hand, one can concentrate on Joseph de Maistre’s relations with Russians during his stay in St. Petersburg as minister of the king of Sardinia, a stay that lasted fourteen years - from 1803 to 1817; on the other hand, one can speak of what one calls “the reception”-reactions (sometimes very unexpected) that Maistre’s works have provoked among Russian authors. The two subjects are equally interesting, however the first is - at least in broad terms - well enough known. Maistre’s biographers

The Persistence of Maistrian Thought from: Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Pranchère Jean-Yves
Abstract: For a long time it has been a commonplace of Maistrian studies - and a well-founded commonplace - to emphasize the paradoxical character of Maistre’s work. Almost all interpreters have recognized that this work is placed under the sign of paradox from a triple point of view: paradox surges especially in the contrast between a cruel and ferocious opus and an author whose correspondence shows him to be charitable and tolerant; it appears as well as the mark of the Maistrian style, which made great rhetorical use of the oxymoron,of the association of contrary terms; and finally it characterizes

Book Title: Buried Astrolabe-Canadian Dramatic Imagination and Western Tradition
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): WALKER CRAIG STEWART
Abstract: Craig Walker devotes the main body of his work to critical readings of James Reaney, Michael Cook, Sharon Pollock, Michel Tremblay, George F. Walker, and Judith Thompson, respecting the distinctive elements of the writer's voice while helping the reader appreciate the cultural context that informs each play. He analyses the poetics or mythological underpinning of the works and investigates the cultural significance of the tropes that typify their works. The Buried Astrolabe stakes the claim of Canadian playwrights to be considered among the most important in the contemporary world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zpzs

1 James Reaney: from: Buried Astrolabe
Abstract: What surely strikes most of us first about James Reaney’s work is its paradoxical combination of sophistication and naïveté. Among Canadian writers Reaney is one of the most self-conscious craftsmen, bringing a staggering level of erudition to his work, though always insisting on childlike simplicity in its theatrical execution. Gerald Parker’s 1991 of Reaney’s theatre is aptly named How To Play.Juxtaposition complexity and triviality is one of the hallmarks of modernism, yet are some who find Reaney’s particular variant off-putting rather engaging. Louis Dudek, for example, complained in 1974 that in contrast to the moderns, Reaney follows William Blake’s

8 Speaking in Tongues: from: Writing Lovers
Abstract: The nouns “tissue” and “text” originate from the selfsame root, Marlatt reveals in her essay “Self-Representation and Fictionalysis,” in which she at once fictionalizes autobiography and locates self-representation in the context of “a living tissue we live together with / in” (205). Critics have responded to Marlatt’s textual tissue by emphasizing her “intricate networks” and “labyrinthean structures” (Godard, “Body I” 481), by locating her lyrical, locutionary narratives as a “textual field” intersected by various trajectories (Butling 167), by suggesting that the received cultural script frays in Marlatt’s texts into an infinitely more complex web of connections (Nichols 114), and by

1 The Comparative History of New Collectivities and Founding Cultures from: The Making of the Nations and Cultures of the New World
Abstract: The idea of this research on the comparative history of new collectivities arose in the course of a previous extensive study on the Saguenay, an area of settlement situated in northern Quebec and opened to colonization in the 1830s. This study in social history aimed to reconstitute the (demographic, economic, cultural, etc.) features of rural French-Canadian society as it developed in those remote places, recently carved out of the bush (Bouchard 1996b). Given their typical isolation, it was reasonable to assume that these settlement communities exhibited such features in a rather magnified form. The results of my work were thus

4 Interpretation from: Word of the Law
Abstract: Any legal scholar oblivious to the claims that have been made recently for “interpretation” (or, as it is more popularly known, “hermeneutics”⁴) in law would have to have been in a state of anaesthesia for the past ten years.⁵ Thus, for example, Ronald Dworkin has written that “legal practice is an exercise in interpretation not only when lawyers interpret particular documents or statutes, but generally.”⁶ And Gerald Bruns asserts that “law is not only a sortof hermeneutical discipline; rather, it can be taken as exemplary of what it means to understand and interpret anything at all,”⁷

CHAPTER THREE Charting Meta-utopia: from: Russian Experimental Fiction
Abstract: Among the canonical markers of utopian writing is the ambiguous location of the ideal society in space and time. Thus, a good point of departure for a discussion of meta-utopian fiction will be a definition of it in terms of its treatment of spatial and temporal dimensions. Moreover, the positioning of plot events in a matrix of space and time, what Bakhtin calls “chronotope,” lays the coordinates for a sustained valuative framework.¹ Chronotopes can give a palpable sense of the ideological project central to meta-utopian fiction. This fiction is about liberation from spatial and temporal stasis. It is about the

CHAPTER SEVEN Making Meta-utopia Accessible: from: Russian Experimental Fiction
Abstract: Can narrative innovation, ideological challenge, and popular appeal coexist in one work of art? According to Irving Howe, one of the major historians of Western modernism, the answer is—no. Literature can no longer be avant-garde if it has become popular.¹ Once it gains broad appeal and is frequently imitated, it loses its “otherness” and becomes simply a marker of the existing ideology. It is by definition no longer new. But according to more recent critics, the Russian apologist for literary experiment V. O. Ksepma or the Canadian theorist of postmodernism Linda Hutcheon, the answer is—yes. Innovative, ludic art

Book Title: Sung Dynasty Uses of the I Ching- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wyatt Don J.
Abstract: The I Ching, or Book of Changes, has been one of the two or three most influential books in the Chinese canon. It has been used by people on all levels of society, both as a method of divination and as a source of essential ideas about the nature of heaven, earth, and humankind. During the eleventh and twelfth centuries, Sung dynasty literati turned to it for guidance in their fundamental reworking of the classical traditions. This book explores how four leading thinkers--Su Shih, Shao Yung, Ch'eng I, and Chu Hsi--applied theI Chingto these projects. These four men used the Book of Changes in strikingly different ways. Yet each claimed to find in it a sure foundation for human values. Their work established not only new meanings for the text but also new models for governance and moral philosophy that would be debated throughout the next thousand years of Chinese intellectual history. By focusing on their uses of theI Ching, this study casts a unique light on the complex continuity-within-change and rich diversity of Sung culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztn88

CHAPTER ONE The I Ching Prior to Sung from: Sung Dynasty Uses of the I Ching
Abstract: Shao Yung built his philosophical framework from elements he found in and around the I

CHAPTER SIX The Psychic Economy and Cultural Meaning of Coleridge’s Magnum Opus from: Romanticism and the Forms of Ruin: Wordsworth, Coleridge, the Modalities of Fragmentation
Abstract: In the E. J. Pratt Library of Victoria University in Toronto there are three clasped vellum manuscript volumes. They, along with a manuscript chapter in a commonplace book in the Huntington Library, and some data in the Berg Collection of the New York Public Library, are what remains of one of the most legendary works ever conceived: the magnum opusof Samuel Taylor Coleridge—or as he sometimes called it, “my Great Work.” I say “legendary” advisedly, for by that adjective I mean to focus three aspects of the enterprise: first of all, its fame; secondly, its basis in fact;

Book Title: The Matrix of Modernism-Pound, Eliot, and Early Twentieth-Century Thought
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Schwartz Sanford
Abstract: Sanford Schwartz situates Modernist poetics in the intellectual ferment of the early twentieth century, which witnessed major developments in philosophy, science, and the arts. Beginning with the works of various philosophers--Bergson, James, Bradley, Nietzsche, and Husserl, among others--he establishes a matrix that brings together not only the principal characteristics of Modernist/New Critical poetics but also the affiliations between the Continental and the Anglo-American critical traditions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztqsd

CHAPTER III Ezra Pound: from: The Matrix of Modernism
Abstract: In this chapter and the next, the focus shifts from the articulation of a global structure to the examination of individual writers. While the dynamics of abstraction and experience will continue to guide the investigation, the turn from paradigm to person will bring to light distinctive features of the works of Pound and Eliot. The present chapter, devoted to Ezra Pound, begins with the poet’s tendency to think in terms of certain oppositions—form/flux, abstraction/experience, identity/difference, unity/multiplicity—and then to find constructs that hold together the antithetical terms. This attempt to integrate form and flux is typical of Pound’s approach

CHAPTER IV Incarnate Words: from: The Matrix of Modernism
Abstract: The opposition between “surfaces” and “depths” is central to the works of T. S. Eliot. In his readings of turn-of-the-century philosophy, psychology, and ethnology, Eliot encountered this opposition in various forms. Bradley’s immediate experience dovetailed with Jung’s substratum of archetypal symbols and Frazer’s substratum of ritual behavior: all expressed the same distinction between the surface forms of everyday life and the hidden depths that ordinarily elude us. This distinction is evident in the early poetry, where Eliot places highly conventional personae in contexts that evoke a deeper reality of which they are unaware. It is also a feature of the

CONCLUSION from: The Matrix of Modernism
Abstract: Throughout this book I have explored the modern tendency to think in terms of “surfaces” and “depths,” focusing particularly on the opposition between conceptual abstraction and concrete sensation. These terms have been used to conduct an investigation that might be extended well beyond the limits of this study. They inform the works of many writers of the early twentieth century, and Chapters III and IV merely suggest the kind of work to be done with Yeats, Stevens, and Williams, as well as the novelists of the period. In many respects these terms are still central to the human sciences, philosophy,

Book Title: Milton's Epics and the Book of Psalms- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): RADZINOWICZ MARY ANN
Abstract: This book traces the density of poetic voices in the epicsvoices arising from the echoing of psalm kindsand the ironic paralleling of important episodes in them. At the same time, Radzinowicz's book relates to each other Milton's two remarkable poetic oeuvres derived from the Old and New Testaments: one an anonymous, powerful, ancient, worship-centered, lyric work, the other an individually determined, revolutionary, heroic work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztqxb

Book Title: The Darwinian Heritage- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): KOTTLER MALCOLM J.
Abstract: Representing the present rich state of historical work on Darwin and Darwinism, this volume of essays places the great theorist in the context of Victorian science. The book includes contributions by some of the most distinguished senior figures of Darwin scholarship and by leading younger scholars who have been transforming Darwinian studies. The result is the most comprehensive survey available of Darwin's impact on science and society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztrtb

Introduction: from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Kohn David
Abstract: The Darwinian Heritagerepresents the present rich state of historical work on Darwin and Darwinism. The common thread of the essays in this volume is a sensitivity to the pressing need to place Darwin in the context of Victorian science. The organization of the work reflects the goal of building bridges between the study of an individual and his place in scientific culture. Part One,The Evolution of a Theorist, explores Darwin’s growth as a scientific thinker from his student days in Edinburgh to the writing of theOrigin of Species. Part Two,Darwin in Victorian Context, examines both Darwin’s

1 Going the Limit: from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Gruber Howard E.
Abstract: In this view, creative work is seen as a purposeful growth process. Much work on the psychology of creativity reveals a certain tropism toward monolithicity. In

2 The Wider British Context in Darwin’s Theorizing from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Schweber Silvan S.
Abstract: The Origin of Specieswas the culmination of Darwin’s theorizing of the previous twenty years. Its unique role in delineating the subsequent debates over all aspects of evolution account for the enduring interest in the construction of theOriginand the intellectual and other factors that helped shape its final form. We know from Darwin’s correspondence that he saw himself as constantly engaged in “species-work” during the period from 1840 to 1854. It was “far-distant work” but he did indicate to several of his correspondents that he intended to write a book on the species question, though he would “not

8 Darwin’s Principle of Divergence as Internal Dialogue from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Kohn David
Abstract: However strongly we may see scientific ideas as socially and culturally contingent in their origin and expression, we must acknowledge that they are also the products of individuals. Hence even if we all consider scientific activity to be the reworking of prior scientific activity, the dynamics by which individual scientists develop their theories is a subject integral to the history of science. If we accept the proposition that knowledge grows by public and critical dialogue, we should not ignore the fact that important phases of the dialogue may occur within an individual. Such is the case for Charles Darwin, who

9 Darwin’s Intellectual Development (Commentary) from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Pancaldi Giuliano
Abstract: If I were to give a title to my comments on the papers by Sulloway, Schweber, and Kohn I would suggest “Disciplines to work by”. To explain what I mean, I would add that I want to make a plea for a discipline approach to the study of Darwin’s intellectual development. “Disciplines to work by” is of course an allusion to David Kohn’s well-known essay entitled “Theories to work by” (1980), which alludes in its turn to a crucial sentence in Darwin’s Autobiography(p. 120). That I have substituted “disciplines” for “theories” is connected with the point I wish to

11 The Ascent of Nature in Darwin’s Descent of Man from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Durant John R.
Abstract: It is a fact familiar to all historians of science that Darwin was extremely slow to put his most important ideas into print. Having become a convinced transmutationist in 1837, he made such rapid progress over the next few years that he soon foresaw the prospect of writing a work that would revolutionize natural history. Yet it was not until 1844 that he produced an essay that was suitable for publication by his family in the event of his death; and fourteen years later, the unexpected arrival of Wallace’s short paper “On the tendency of varieties to depart indefinitely from

13 Darwin on Animal Behavior and Evolution from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Burkhardt Richard W.
Abstract: In an obituary notice of 1882 examining the causes of Darwin’s success and the importance of Darwin’s works, the Genevan botanist and pioneer of the history of science Alphonse de Candolle identified two characteristics in particular that had made Darwin such an exceptional thinker. One was Darwin’s ability to occupy himself simultaneously with both the smallest details and the broadest theoretical considerations. The other was the extraordinary rangeof Darwin’s researches and the way that each of Darwin’s separate studies, however specialized, contributed to the whole of Darwin’soeuvre(Candolle 1882).

16 Darwin the Young Geologist from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Herbert Sandra
Abstract: The question I propose to answer in this paper is this: was the work Charles Darwin did as a young geologist compatible with the development of the field of geology in England in the 1830s, and, if so, how? I shall begin by outlining what I see as the major features of the development of geology as a field in England during the period. First, however, I should like to quote a statement on the subject by Martin Rudwick:

18 Darwin and the Breeders: from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Secord James A.
Abstract: In 1898, sixteen years after the death of Charles Darwin and two years after that of his wife Emma, the fate of their famous residence at Down was highly uncertain. The aging botanist Joseph Hooker, writing to Darwin’s son George, suggested that the historic house might well be saved for future generations by turning it to practical use as an experimental station for the study of animal breeding (Atkins 1974, p. 101). Although never taken up, the idea was an appropriate one. Almost from the very beginning of his career as a transmutationist, Darwin looked to the work of animal

24 Darwin and Russian Evolutionary Biology from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Acanfora Michele
Abstract: As is well known, Darwin produced a large number of theories, many of which dealt explicitly with evolution or special aspects of it, and many others of which were closely related to problems in evolution, although the evolutionary aspect was only implicit. Furthermore, throughout his life Darwin varied the emphasis he placed on different processes and mechanisms, and, for some of them, he radically altered his position. In his published works, Darwin hardly ever indicated precisely how any single topic he discussed could or should be connected with other topics, in an overall interpretative framework of evolutionary phenomena. Thus there

Book Title: The Three Genres and the Interpretation of Lyric- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Rogers William Elford
Abstract: William Elford Rogers proposes a genre-theory that will clarify what we mean when we speak of literary works as dramatic, epic, or lyric. Focusing on lyric poetry, this book maintains that the broad genre-concepts need not be discarded but can be preserved by a new interpretive model that gives us conceptual knowledge not about works but about interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zttcz

Introduction from: The Three Genres and the Interpretation of Lyric
Abstract: The discipline of hermeneutics in general, and of literary criticism in particular, is in a state of extraordinary ferment. Ferment is healthy when it calls into question the assumptions that we have never articulated or that we have forgotten we ever made. One’s assumptions perhaps depend ultimately on one’s temperament or even one’s faith, but that is all the more reason for articulating them. In this book I shall try to articulate certain assumptions about literary works and the nature and ends of criticism, and I shall try to see what consequences follow.

CHAPTER I Lyric, Epic, Dramatic: from: The Three Genres and the Interpretation of Lyric
Abstract: A theory of genre that will produce certainty about the real nature of literary works must await an answer to the question, “How is language possible?” Current theories that treat language “scientifically” in the narrow sense, as an object among other objects, must fail to deal adequately with the consciousness of meaning in the speaking and understanding subject. Precisely where the structuralist enterprise attempts to usurp the task of hermeneutics, as Paul Ricoeur points out, it oversteps its limits as a science.¹ On the other hand, philosophies of language that begin from the thinking subject and postulate a prelinguistic consciousness

CHAPTER II The Anomalous Voice and the Impersonal Lyric from: The Three Genres and the Interpretation of Lyric
Abstract: In the preceding chapter, I argued that we can retain the broad genre-concepts as interpretive models, provided that we regard those concepts as reflexive. The concepts themselves are fully interpreted only in the act of interpreting particular works. It follows from the reflexivity of the genre-concepts that the concepts by themselves are insufficient to “prove” that some particular work is a lyric, an epic, or a drama. We canshow, given some particular explicit interpretation, that the interpretationunderstandsthe work as lyric, as epic, or as drama. In an important sense, the genre-concepts do not refer to something that

CHAPTER III Standards of Interpretation and Evaluation from: The Three Genres and the Interpretation of Lyric
Abstract: Adopting any model of literary interpretation plunges one at once into enormously involved philosophical problems. I have provisionally put forward a model on Heideggerian lines. But the model is Heideggerian onlyin that it accepts Heidegger’s crucial notion that interpretation is a making-explicit of what is already grasped (“understood”), but not fully articulated, in our encounters with literary works. What concerns me here is something I have previously mentioned in passing—namely, the fact that a Heideggerian model might seem to lead inevitably to a strict relativism, and, therefore, to the conclusion that knowledge in the human studies is impossible.

Book Title: Interpreting SAMSON AGONISTES- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): WITTREICH JOSEPH ANTHONY
Abstract: Joseph Wittreich reveals Samson to be an intensely political work that reflects the heroic ambitions and failings of the Puritan Revolution and the tragic ambiguities of the era. He sees in the work not the purveyance of Medieval and early Renaissance typological associations but an interrogation of them and a consequent movement away from them.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztvq7

CHAPTER VII SAMSON AGONISTES IN CONTEXT from: Interpreting SAMSON AGONISTES
Abstract: The wisdom of putting Paradise RegainedandSamson Agonistestogether in the same volume, writes John Shawcross, “is the commerce which is thus established between them”: “Perhaps we have misreadSamson Agonistesso ineptly because we have not fully acknowledged the interrelationships of the two works.”¹ And Balachandra Rajan comments similarly: “How little in the impressive outpouring of Milton scholarship bears explicitly on this problem” of intertextual connection.² The poems in Milton’s 1671 volume, for a long time, seemed resistant to the sort of criticism that both Shawcross and Rajan would sponsor; for on the one hand they clearly embody

Book Title: Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): COOK ELEANOR
Abstract: In the first full-length study of Wallace Stevens's word-play, Eleanor Cook focuses on Stevens's skillful play with grammar, etymology, allusion, and other elements of poetry, and suggests ways in which this play offers a method of approaching his work. At the same time, this book is a general study of Stevens's poetry, moving from his earliest to his latest work, and includes close readings of three of his remarkable long poems--Esthetique du Mal, Notes toward a Supreme Fiction, and An Ordinary Evening in New Haven. The chronological arrangement enables readers to follow Stevens's increasing skill and changing thought in three areas of his "poetry of the earth": the poetry of place, the poetry of eros, and the poetry of belief.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztwr5

CHAPTER ONE Places, Common and Other: from: Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: Stevensis such a master of openings that we expect the first poems of Harmoniumto entice us, and we are a little baffled when they do not. Stevens selected these poems to openHarmonium, choosing from work written between 1916 and 1921; he saw no reason to alter the order in 1931 for a second edition or in 1954 for hisCollected Poems. They are the entrance into his work and I propose to begin with the first six. Slight, pleasing poems, they lead into the powerful pair,Domination of BlackandThe Snow Man, but have themselves attracted little

CHAPTER SEVEN Concerning the Nature of Things: from: Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: The Man with the Blue Guitaris pivotal in Stevensʹ work, at once a review and a new direction, a refinding of vocation and a preliminary to the major long poems of the forties. The series has a certain austerity, and Stevens himself conceded some boring patches, but rightly judged the poemʹs overall strength: ʺthe man with the blue guitar … while it bores me in spots, is a very much better book than ideas of orderʺ (L338, April 27, 1939). Stevensʹ effects are sometimes abrupt or compacted; there is occasional bitterness and disgust, and the poem approaches desperation

CHAPTER THIRTEEN Late Poems: from: Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: I have moved from the end of Transport to SummertoAn Ordinary Evening in New Haven, the major long poem of Stevensʹ next volume. That poem, and the volumeʹs title poem,Auroras of Autumnexplore ways of saying farewell. At the same time, Stevens increasingly writes short poems of peculiar force and intensity that do not give the effect of meditating on farewells, except by indirection. Randall Jarrell describes them as the work of a man ʺat once very old and beyond the dominion of age; such men seem to have entered into (or are able to create for

Book Title: Beauty and Holiness-The Dialogue Between Aesthetics and Religion
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Martin James Alfred
Abstract: In this broad historical and critical overview based on a lifetime of scholarship, James Alfred Martin, Jr., examines the development of the concepts of beauty and holiness as employed in theories of aesthetics and of religion. The injunction in the Book of Psalms to "worship the Lord in the beauty of holiness" addressed a tradition that has comprehended holiness primarily in terms of ethical righteousness--a conception that has strongly influenced Western understandings of religion. As the author points out, however, the Greek forbears of Western thought, as well as many Eastern traditions, were and are more broadly concerned with the pursuit of beauty, truth, and goodness as ideals of human excellence, that is, with the "holiness of beauty." In this work Martin describes a philosophical stance that should prove to be most productive for the dialogue between aesthetics and religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztx00

INTRODUCTION from: Beauty and Holiness
Abstract: The titleof this book expresses its unique intent I believe that responsible discussion of the relation of art to religion must address some fundamental questions of theory and method that are frequently overlooked or inadequately addressed in works on religious art, “religion and art,” or “art in religion.” Any worthwhile discussion of religion, whether in relation to art or to any other human phenomenon, entails or presupposes a theory of what religion is, or is taken to be, in that discussion Any worthwhile discussion of art, whether historical or critical, entails or presupposes a theory of what art is

SEVEN THE COMMUNIST PROBLEM from: Merleau-Ponty and the Foundation of Existential Politics
Abstract: Theory inserts itself into this process of historical change through a pedagogical function: it brings its interpretation of reality to the working classes to catalyze those changes in outlook that will set in motion a revolutionary transformation of social structures. In

1 The Concept of Ideology from: The Social Vision of William Blake
Abstract: For the past fifteen years or so English and American scholars have been catching up with the Continent in their theoretical discussions of the concept of ideology and its application to literature. A good deal of their work has been to translate, interpret, and extend the major theories: those of Georg Lukács (especially during his brief phase around 1922 as an independent Marxist), Antonio Gramsci, the Frankfurt School (Theodor Adorno, Walter Benjamin, Herbert Marcuse), Jean-Paul Sartre, and French structuralist Marxists such as Louis Althusser. In England, almost alone, Raymond Williams has been patiently working out his own theory of “cultural

6 Labor from: The Social Vision of William Blake
Abstract: The opposite of liberty, Christian or civil, is slavery, but slavery is also the antithesis of creative labor. When we allow a tyrant to get control of our spirits or our cities, the first thing he will do is put us to work at backbreaking and stultifying tasks. Blake felt the tyranny of the English Church and state not only in its censorship and prosecution of radical writers but also in the way it governed public taste, driving radical artists to drudgery for the market. The Hebrew slaves built pyramids for the Egyptians; Blake engraved other people’s designs for other

My Page Makes Love from: Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: A few examples are in order. The novelist Longus (second-third century a.d.) prefaces his novel Daphnis and Chloewith a bold statement of the triangular tension that is its structure and raison d’être. He was moved to write the tale, he tells us, because he encountered “a painted image of the history of Eros” that struck him as the most beautiful thing he had ever seen. Longing (pothos) seized him to “create a rival image in writing” and he set to work on the novel. There are three components in Longus’ opening conceit. There is the painted icon of Eros,

Mythoplokos from: Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: Imagine a city where there is no desire. Supposing for the moment that the inhabitants of the city continue to eat, drink and procreate in some mechanical way; still, their life looks flat. They do not theorize or spin tops or speak figuratively. Few think to shun pain; none give gifts. They bury their dead and forget where. Zeno finds himself elected mayor and is set to work copying the legal code on sheets of bronze. Now and again a man and a woman may marry and live very happily, as travellers who meet by chance at an inn; at

Book Title: Authority, Autonomy, and Representation in American Literature, 1776-1865- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): PATTERSON MARK R.
Abstract: A work of literary history and criticism, this study also offers valuable insights into matters of political and literary theory. In separate chapters on Benjamin Frankin, Hugh Henry Brackenridge, and Charles Brockden Brown in the post-Revolutionary period and on Fenimore Cooper, Emerson, and Melville in the antebellum period, Patterson provides a series of brilliant readings of major texts in order to describe how American writers have conflated political and literary concerns as a means to their own social authority.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zv1pd

CONCLUSION from: Authority, Autonomy, and Representation in American Literature, 1776-1865
Abstract: Coming at the brink of the Civil War, The Confidence-Manproved to be Melville’s most desperate attempt to lay bare the radical lack of trust propelling America into the abyss. This work’s obscurity provides a measure of his determination to ignore the demands of critics and audience in order to attack the self-destructive impulses of American society. Like Cooper, he faced the complete loss of his dwindling audience as reward for his persistence. Melville’s career recapitulates the dilemma of American writers: Attempting to gain a readership and establish authority, they inevitably ran counter to the demands of society. Some writers,

ONE The Literariness of Shakespeare from: Shakespeare
Abstract: No one in 1623 would have said that Shakespeare’s work marked and embodied some general change in European self-understanding. We often say so now. Portentous and wistful by turns, our talk about Shakespeare habitually sets him between times, last witness for the old, first prophet of the new, a genius of the divided vision and a symbol of our own life on the margins of tradition. Commonplaces can be false, of course, but the proof of this one is repetition, not only iteration of such judgments about Shakespeare’s place in history, but our constant recurrence to his texts, which have

FOUR Proust’s Palimpsest: from: Poetics of Reading
Abstract: A striking similarity between Madame BovaryandA la recherche du temps perduis the central importance given to the question of reading. Both novels include detailed descriptions of how their central characters read and respond to works of art. While the focus inMadame Bovaryis on negative versions of reading that warn us, through irony, about the dangers of misreading, Proust’s novel abounds in models of reading designed to show how the fictions of art and literature set in motion a process of reading that is creative, not destructive. Though Proust’s narrator also gives a few examples of

Prolegomena to a Theory of Reading from: The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Culler Jonathan
Abstract: The fact that people engaged in the study of literature are willing to read works of criticism or articles like this one tells us something important about the nature of our discipline. Few people, one imagines, open these pages in the belief that this is the most relaxing and entertaining way to spend an hour. We attend to criticism and discussions of criticism because we hope to hear worthwhile proposals, arguments, and discussions. We believe, it would seem, that what is said about literature can matter; that it can affect our own and other’s dealings with literature and thus help

Interaction between Text and Reader from: The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Iser Wolfgang
Abstract: From this we may conclude that the literary work has two poles, which we might call the artistic and the aesthetic: the

Toward a Sociology of Reading from: The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Suleiman Susan R.
Abstract: When raising the question of the reader’s status in the text, we may have in mind two sets of problems. According to one approach, the reader is thought of as an end conceived by the writer, whose work, accordingly, may be read in reference to the idea we have of that reader. A certain number of studies have enriched the history of literary criticism in this way, showing that the expectations of a particular public aimed at by the writer were determinative down to the most secret strata of the text (Jauss’s Erwartungshorizontfor example).

9 Autonomy and Multinationality in Spain: from: Contemporary Majority Nationalism
Author(s) FOSSAS ENRIC
Abstract: It is not easy to summarize the twenty-five years of Spanish decentralization, because it was an exercise of great political and legal complexity that included several factors and many nuances. It is therefore a very difficult subject to deal with in a satisfying manner within the framework of a conference, where this chapter originated. Moreover, every assessment is always tainted by some subjectivity that is inevitably dependent on preconceived political ideas, as well as inescapable cultural sensibilities. Finally, the time when a study is conducted can influence the evaluation of a historical period, which is the case today, since Spain

Book Title: The Skeptic Disposition-Deconstruction, Ideology, and Other Matters
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Goodheart Eugene
Abstract: Eugene Goodheart examines the skeptic disposition that has informed advanced literary discourse over the past generation, arguing that the targets of deconstructive suspicion are fundamental humanistic values. "[This book] is a fair-minded, generous critique of the deconstructionist theories of Jacques Derrida, Paul de Man, and their followers. These writers have argued that language is so inherently slippery it can never express a speaker's intended meaning. The critic's role, in their view, is to explore the contradictions, subtexts, and metaphorical byways of works that may be most radically deceptive when they appear simple. Critics have castigated this language-centered skepticism as a form of nihilism geared to multiply numbingly similar readings of already familiar texts. Mr. Goodheart's objection is more subtle. He suggests that the philosophical orientation of deconstructive critics leads them to overemphasize the tricky propositional sense of words at the expense of the broader impact of literature--its power to wound, thrill, or transform us."--Morris Dickstein, The New York Times Book Review
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zv4x4

INTRODUCTION from: The Skeptic Disposition
Abstract: Until recently theory occupied an uncertain place in literary study. The New Criticism taught us how to read individual works of literature. Its theory consisted of heuristic concepts like paradox and ambiguity (concepts that told us what to look for). It cautioned against certain fallacies in reading, for example, the intentional fallacy, which mistakes the source of meaning in the author’s intentions or the affective fallacy, which confuses the reader’s private emotional associations with the feelings evoked by the work. To say this is to be unfair to the achievements of I. A. Richards and Kenneth Burke, but I am

2 THE TRANSCENDENTAL SITE: from: The Skeptic Disposition
Abstract: There is an unintended irony in Arnold’s view of romanticism as deficient in ideas. It was, after all, romanticism that made the greatest contribution to Arnold’s principal idea: the relocation of the transcendental site from heaven to earth. The idea is the legacy of both English and German romanticism, and studies of its literary consequences can be found in, among other works, Georg Lukács’s The Theory of the Novel(1920) and Meyer Abrams’sNatural Supernaturalism(1971), which provides an account of lyric poetry remarkably similar to Lukács’s account of the novel. In their most ambitious moods, the novel and the

3 ROLAND BARTHES AND THE MONSTER OF TOTALITY from: The Skeptic Disposition
Abstract: The work of Roland Barthes is pivotal in the history of post-structuralism, for it is marked by an incompletely resolved ambivalence toward “the monster of totality.” This ambivalence shows itself in his career as a demystifier.

4 READING WITH/OUT A TEXT from: The Skeptic Disposition
Abstract: For Roland Barthes, the pleasure of the text is in the making of one’s own text at the expense of the text of another. “Thus begins at the heart of the critical work, the dialogue of two histories and two subjectivities, the author’s and the critic’s. But this dialogue is egoistically shifted toward the present: criticism is not an homage to the truth of the past or to the truth of ‘others’—it is a construction of the intelligibility of our own time.”¹ In shamelessly confessing the egoism of the critical act, Barthes casts doubt upon the objective existence of

INTRODUCTION from: Scripture, Canon and Commentary
Abstract: COMMENTARIES and commentarial modes of thinking dominated the intellectual history of most premodern civilizations, a fact often obscured by the “great ideas” approach to the history of thought and by modern scholars’ denigration of the works of mere exegetes and annotators. Until the seventeenth century in Europe, and even later in China, India, and the Near East, thought, especially within high intellectual traditions, was primarily exegetical in character and expression. As José Faur has observed, “The most peculiar aspect of the medieval thinker is that he developed his ideas around a text and expressed them as a commentary.”¹ Even those

Chapter 3 ORIGINS, DIMENSIONS, AND APOTHEOSIS OF COMMENTARIES from: Scripture, Canon and Commentary
Abstract: HE RANGE of works typed as “commentary” may vary widely. By a narrow definition, a commentary may refer only to a running gloss on a text generally recognized as classical or scriptural.¹ A wider conception would identify much of the literature of the postclassical, or “silver,” age in several civilizations or traditions as forms of commentary (or, in some cases, hidden commentary) on the classics. Barry Holtz, for example, has remarked that almost all of Jewish literature, from the legal codes of the Middle Ages to the Hasidic homilies of the nineteenth century, “presents itself as nothing more than interpretation,

Book Title: The Status and Appraisal of Classic Texts- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): CONDREN CONAL
Abstract: Conal Condren examines the criteria for judging both works of political theory and texts associated with related academic genres. He discusses the rhetoric surrounding terms like originality," "influence," and "coherence," the value of these terms as criteria of textual assessment, and their use in charting the history of texts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvc26

CHAPTER 4 Originality from: The Status and Appraisal of Classic Texts
Abstract: Medieval writers, if they made any explicit reference to initiation, were apt to ascribe their own work to others, or invent authors to whom their work could be ascribed. Malory ‘translated’ from the French, and although he certainly did

CHAPTER 6 Coherence from: The Status and Appraisal of Classic Texts
Abstract: I shall take coherenceas existing at the center of a network of terms (principallyunity,precision,oneness,consistency,validity), and as representing an unavoidable and persistent genus of concern in textual analysis. No matter what else we may wish to say about a given text, to some extent we are logically obliged to trade in the currency ofcoherence. At one extreme a cursory statement about an author’s central concern or an indication of what a book is about represents some minimal coherence claim. At another, detailed analysis will frequently go much further by trying to elicit to what

The Poetics of the Story: from: Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) JØrgensen Bo Hakon
Abstract: Unfortunately translations are unable to express the special mixture of humour and irony which characterizes Claussen's work. If this were not the case he

Isak Dinesen Versus Postmodernism: from: Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) Kyndrup Morten
Abstract: The very notion of a genuine postmodernist view of the world would certainly be a contradictio in adjecto. In this paper I shall discuss the criticism of Modernity and the problem of non-simultaneousness in relation to Dinesen's work, and this discussion will in turn be seen in relation to the ideas of postmodernism as a certain state of sign production and receptionon the borderlines, i.e., behind and consequently inside of what we call Modernity. As a start, I shall provide a rough outline of the kind of framework in which we talk about postmodernism. Secondly, I shall try to show

The Phenomenon of Intertextuality and the Role of Androgyny in Isak Dinesen’s “The Roads Round Pisa” from: Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) Black Casey Bjerregaard
Abstract: A work can only be read in connection with or against other texts, which provide a grid through which it is read and structured by establishing expectations which enable one to pick out salient features and give them a structure.¹

INTRODUCTION from: The Skeptic Disposition In Contemporary Criticism
Abstract: Until recently theory occupied an uncertain place in literary study. The New Criticism taught us how to read individual works of literature. Its theory consisted of heuristic concepts like paradox and ambiguity (concepts that told us what to look for). It cautioned against certain fallacies in reading, for example, the intentional fallacy, which mistakes the source of meaning in the author’s intentions or the affective fallacy, which confuses the reader’s private emotional associations with the feelings evoked by the work. To say this is to be unfair to the achievements of I. A. Richards and Kenneth Burke, but I am

2 THE TRANSCENDENTAL SITE: from: The Skeptic Disposition In Contemporary Criticism
Abstract: There is an unintended irony in Arnold’s view of romanticism as deficient in ideas. It was, after all, romanticism that made the greatest contribution to Arnold’s principal idea: the relocation of the transcendental site from heaven to earth. The idea is the legacy of both English and German romanticism, and studies of its literary consequences can be found in, among other works, Georg Lukács’s The Theory of the Novel(1920) and Meyer Abrams’sNatural Supernaturalism(1971), which provides an account of lyric poetry remarkably similar to Lukács’s account of the novel. In their most ambitious moods, the novel and the

3 ROLAND BARTHES AND THE MONSTER OF TOTALITY from: The Skeptic Disposition In Contemporary Criticism
Abstract: The work of Roland Barthes is pivotal in the history of post-structuralism, for it is marked by an incompletely resolved ambivalence toward “the monster of totality.” This ambivalence shows itself in his career as a demystifier.

4 READING WITH/OUT A TEXT from: The Skeptic Disposition In Contemporary Criticism
Abstract: For Roland Barthes, the pleasure of the text is in the making of one’s own text at the expense of the text of another. “Thus begins at the heart of the critical work, the dialogue of two histories and two subjectivities, the author’s and the critic’s. But this dialogue is egoistically shifted toward the present: criticism is not an homage to the truth of the past or to the truth of ‘others’—it is a construction of the intelligibility of our own time.”¹ In shamelessly confessing the egoism of the critical act, Barthes casts doubt upon the objective existence of

Chapter 1 INTERPRETERS AT THE FEAST, OR A DIALOGUE BETWEEN ANCIENTS AND MODERNS from: History as a Visual Art in the Twelfth-Century Renaissance
Abstract: Some friends have suggested that I begin these inquiries with a word about method. By what method can we apprehend a way of understanding that is not linguistic, and that is not equivalent with interpretation? The idea of an introduction on this subject is appealing. However, in some important ways, every text discussed or referred to in the following pages requires the development of a special method. When I work with texts, I read them to grasp the message of the letter and also to explore what is unsaid between the lines of written words. Sometimes this work requires attention

Chapter 5 THE KINGDOM OF GOD: from: History as a Visual Art in the Twelfth-Century Renaissance
Abstract: Thus far, we have identified a few guidelines that governed historical writing as an art of the imagination. Like any compositions, the works with which we are concerned depended on exclusion as well as inclusion, but even what was included has appeared shapeless to modern scholars. There is little regard for narrative unity, no organic wholeness. At some times, one encounters gaps in a narrative; at others, a concatenation of narratives. To lay hands on the thinking behind the montage effect of these texts, we must turn from the words to the silences between the words, understanding, to be sure,

Chapter 8 CONCLUSIONS: from: History as a Visual Art in the Twelfth-Century Renaissance
Abstract: At the outset, I invoked the authority of John Scotus Eriugena. In some Scriptural parables, he found, hidden beneath the surface of the text, a structure of transitions that enabled astute interpreters to move from one figure to another, thus establishing multiple meanings. These transitions constituted an invisible framing structure, but one that was by no means evident to all (see Preface, n. 2). I have suggested that twelfth-century historical writers likewise assumed invisible transitusin their own works, as well as in Scripture, and that they indicated as much by the analogies that they drew between their works and

3 NON-SOVEREIGN FREEDOM IN HORACEʹS SATIRES 1 from: The Life of Roman Republicanism
Abstract: In chapter 1, I defended the claim that the republican conception of freedom is grounded in the understanding that politics is constituted in the fundamental antagonism between the haves and the have-nots. Chapter 2 turned to the the obstacles to justice as Sallust represents them: the vulnerability of the political process to greed and corruption; the dangerous failure of the senatorial order to recognize the poor and marginalized; and finally, the constraints on just judgment created by the irrepressible play of chance. I sought to point out, too, how Sallust exposes and works with the corporeal element in world-perception.

Eleven Scholarship as Social Action from: What's Happened to the Humanities?
Author(s) BROMWICH DAVID
Abstract: There have long been university scholars in America dedicated to particular causes or general programs of reform, and often their interests as scholars have seemed inseparable from their commitments outside scholarship. John Dewey in philosophy is the most celebrated example. Others, like Helen and Robert Lynd in sociology and F. O. Matthiessen in literature, suggest the range of work that came under this description earlier in the century: it is hard to think of books like MiddletownorThe Public and Its ProblemsorAmerican Renaissanceas separable from the hopes these scholars cherished for their societv and the ambition

INTRODUCTION from: The Tale of the Tribe
Abstract: In 1920, Georg Lukács published a critical study entitled The Theory of the Novel.The subtitle of this work, “A historico-philosophical essay on the forms of great epic literature,” announces Lukács’ decision to treat thenovelas the fundamental form of epic literature in modern writing. Subsequently, he justifies this decision, explaining:

CHAPTER SEVEN A LOCAL WAR? from: The Tale of the Tribe
Abstract: To judge a poem, even in part, by the responses it helped to provoke in subsequent texts is obviously a dangerous practice. Not only may the responses be irrelevant to the actual accomplishment of the initial work, but the discussion of these other writings is bound to be one-sided in its emphasis. Yet if one acknowledges that Pound’s argument about “the artist who does the next job” suggests a valuable, if rarely used, critical method, then my own procedure in the following two sections will appear far from arbitrary. Not only did Williams and Olson offer many of the most

CHAPTER NINE SPEED AGAINST THE INUNDATION from: The Tale of the Tribe
Abstract: Paterson, as J. M. Brinnin rightly observes, has “an all-of-a-piece consistency on an intellectual level, but on an emotive level the poem is vastly uneven.”² Accordingly, much of the critical energy devoted to Williams’ poem has centered on an explication—and implicit celebration—of the work’s “intellectual consistency,” combined with a nervous awareness of how difficult it is to reconcile that reassuring surface coherence with its unstable and shifting bases. Yet, I suspect thatPatersonsucceeds only when it abandons its symbolic structure, when, in place of the eponymous hero and his metaphoric landscape, the text directly confronts the “delirium

ONE Vision and Perception from: Symbol and Truth in Blake's Myth
Abstract: Any attempt to understand what Blake’s poems mean must begin by considering how they mean, for he and his modern interpreters assert that his meanings are fundamentally symbolic and are to be understood in a special way. In the twentieth century symbolism has been intensively studied in a wide range of disciplines, including anthropology, depth psychology, linguistics, and philosophy, not to mention literary criticism (usually drawing on one or more of the above). Blake, by contrast, had no such developed body of theory to work with, although he was of course familiar with the speculations of mythographers and iconographers. In

TWO The Truth of Symbols from: Symbol and Truth in Blake's Myth
Abstract: Even when we have understood that Blake’s theory of perception is grounded in the Divine Body of Jesus, an unresolved antinomy remains. Are symbols arbitrary and inadequate images from the fallen world that will be superseded in Edenic perception, or are they the very basis of experience and the guarantee of truth? Blake’s answer, ultimately, is that symbols become true by being organized into myth, where they take on conceptual form and are available to imaginative interpretation. But before we consider how his myth works, we need to examine closely the basis of its symbols in a theory of perception.

FOUR The Zoas and the Self from: Symbol and Truth in Blake's Myth
Abstract: Blake’s myth is above all else psychological. His cosmology, theology, and even epistemology are all transpositions of the central inquiry into the self. This is no disinterested quest. Like many in his age Blake was haunted, if not obsessed, by dividedness within the self and between self and world. As Hegel said in his first published work, division or discord (Entzweiung)“is the source of the need for philosophy.” And both Hegel and Blake were convinced that harmony must be achieved by restoring the fruitful interaction of opposites, not by abolishing them. “When the power of unification disappears from the

SEVEN Blake and Los from: Symbol and Truth in Blake's Myth
Abstract: To ask in what sense it is “given” is to approach the final complex of problems that will occupy us, those surrounding the work of the prophetic poet who labors to mediate his vision to other human beings. Ultimately the pictures and poems are intended to lead us to the brink of an inner apocalypse which each must experience

Book Title: I Am You-The Hermeneutics of Empathy in Western Literature, Theology and Art
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Morrison Karl F.
Abstract: The author uses diverse sources: in theology ranging from Augustine to Schleiermacher, in art from the religious art of the Christian Empire to posty2DAbstractionism, and in literature from Donne to Joyce, Pirandello, and Mann. In this work he builds on the thought of two earlier books: Tradition and Authority in the Western Church: 300-1140 (Princeton, 1969) and The Mimetic Tradition of Reform in the West (Princeton, 1982). "I Am You" goes beyond their themes to the inward act that, according to tradition, consummated the change achieved by mimesis: namely, empathetic participation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvm0c

EPILOGUE ON DISCARDED ALTARPIECES from: I Am You
Abstract: Almost at the very beginning of this book, we considered John Donne’s verses on the delight that painters take “not in made work, but whiles they make” (Chapter 3, n. 79). All that we have said locates the bonding of the “I” and the “you” in art in the creative act, but we have also seen that the creative act may occur, not once only, but many times. It may occur, as Donne wrote, when a painting is first made. Or it may occur repeatedly, as often as viewers imaginatively reexperience the creative instant when artist and painting both were

THREE FICTIONALITY, HISTORICITY, AND TEXTUAL AUTHORITY: from: Neverending Stories
Author(s) Ryan Judith
Abstract: Let it be fiction, one feels, or let it be fact. The imagination will not serve under two masters simultaneously.”¹ Dorrit Cohn quotes this dictum of Virginia Woolf in her paper “Fictional versusHistorical Lives,” in which she studies—among other things—such borderline cases as “biographies that act like novels” and one extraordinary “novel that acts like a biography.”² As far as I can see, Dorrit Cohn is quite correct to regard the latter, Wolfgang Hildesheimer’sMarbot: Eine Biographie,³ as generically unique; nonetheless, it has its predecessors, not least in Virginia Woolfs own work. Indeed, Woolf is by no

SIX AUTHENTICITY AS MASK: from: Neverending Stories
Author(s) Hamburger Käte
Abstract: Wolfgang hildesheimer’s latest book, Marbot: A Biography,invites us to consider questions quite different from those that every literary work, in one way or another, provokes.¹ This is also an indication of how unusual, indeed extraordinary, this book is. But its unconventionality is not without pitfalls, and thus it presents us with a difficult case for interpretation and evaluation. This only becomes completely clear if we put ourselves in the position of a reader fifty or one hundred years hence, when it is no longer possible to set up television interviews with the author, or indeed to ask him any

SEVEN INTERPRETIVE STRATEGIES, INTERIOR MONOLOGUES from: Neverending Stories
Author(s) Rimmon-Kenan Shlomith
Abstract: The broadest conceptual framework for this paper is my belated realization that interpretation permeates many more analytic activities than was usually believed in the heyday of structuralist narratology. Todorov’s 1966 distinction between the “sense” of an element, “its capacity to enter into correlation with other elements of the same work and with the work as a whole,” and the “interpretation” of an element, its inclusion “in a system which is not that of the work but that of the critic,”¹ seems to me now to be much more problematic than it did when it was initially proposed. It seems problematic

TEN PATTERNS OF JUSTIFICATION IN YOUNG TÖRLESS from: Neverending Stories
Author(s) Corngold Stanley
Abstract: I am concerned with the logic of justification informing Robert Musil’s first novel, Young Törless(1906).¹ The novel appears to do everything in its power to ward off moral criticism. It is doubly, triply insulated against it. I shall discuss the various strategies of narrative and persuasion by which the novel achieves a certain dandylike countenance of impassiveness and superiority. I do not believe that Musil consciously set about constructing fortifications around his work in order to defend against scandal, yet it is as ifYoung Törlesshad in fact been constructed that way. Pursuing its defensive design might throw

SIXTEEN A NARRATOLOGICAL EXCHANGE from: Neverending Stories
Author(s) Genette Gérard
Abstract: What follows is a translation of letters originally published in Poétique61 (February 1985) under the title “Nouveaux nouveaux discours du récit.” They were written shortly after the publication of Genette’sNouveau discours du récit(Paris: Seuil, 1983), the sequel to his “Discours du récit” inFigures III(Paris: Seuil, 1972). Both works are now available in English, under the tidesNarrative Ducourse Revisited(trans. Jane E. Lewin, Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1988) andNarrative Discourse(trans. Jane E. Lewin, Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1980). Page numbers without further specification refer to the English edition ofNarrative Discourse Revisited.The

[PART TWO Introduction] from: The Language of Balinese Shadow Theater
Abstract: It is surprising that, among all of Bali’s varied dramatic arts, the shadow theater (wayang)has received relatively little detailed attention in the works of scholars The standard treatise on dance and drama of the island (de Zoete and Spies 1938, new edition 1973) mentions wayang only in passing¹ In the most popular introduction to Balinese culture in general, Covarrubias (1937 243) gives some description of the setting and technique of wayang, noting that even though foreign visitors might not see much of interest in the drama,

6 SHAPING, SELECTING, AND SETTING THE PLAY from: The Language of Balinese Shadow Theater
Abstract: Up to this point, the discussion of Balinese wayang parwa has focused on characteristic verbal forms. This information is only one part of what we need to know and understand about the textuahty of any wayang performance. By “textuahty,” I mean those elements, structures, constraints, and contrastive dimensions that together lend aesthetic unity and coherence to a work of verbal art.

Book Title: Fabricating History-English Writers on the French Revolution
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Friedman Barton R.
Abstract: At the same time, this work explores questions about narrative strategies, as they are shaped by, or shape, events. Narratives incorporate the ideological and metaphysical preconceptions that the authors bring with them to their writing. "This is not to argue," Professor Friedman says, "that historical narratives are only about the mind manufacturing them or, more narrowly yet, about themselves as mere linguistic constructs. They illumine both the time and place they seek to re-create and, if by indirection, the time and place of the mind thinking them into being."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvq6m

CHAPTER ONE Fiction in Autobiography: from: Fictions in Autobiography
Abstract: Most readers naturally assume that all autobiographies are based on the verifiable facts of a life history, and it is this referential dimension, imperfectly understood, that has checked the development of a poetics of autobiography. Historians and social scientists attempt to isolate the factual content of autobiography from its narrative matrix, while literary critics, seeking to promote the appreciation of autobiography as an imaginative art, have been willing to treat such texts as though they were indistinguishable from novels. Autobiographers themselves, of course, are responsible for the problematical reception of their work, for they perform willy-nilly both as artists and

Book Title: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5-The Twentieth Century: Quine and After
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Shand John
Abstract: Ranging over 2,500 years of philosophical writing, this five-volume collection of essays is an unrivalled companion to the study and reading of philosophy. Central Works of Philosophy provides both an overview of particular works and clear and authoritative expositions of their central ideas, giving readers the resources and confidence to read the works themselves. These books offer remarkable insights into the ideas out of which our present ways of thinking emerged and without which they cannot fully be understood.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvsm

The Twentieth Century: Quine and After: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Shand John
Abstract: It would be a distortion to attribute to philosophy in the latter half of the twentieth century any overall unity of philosophical outlook, and I shall, therefore, not try to impose one. Moreover, the closeness to the present of the works in this period makes it even more difficult than usual to discern a prevailing direction in recent philosophy or identify what value posterity will assign to any particular part of it. If one true observation about late-twentieth-century philosophy may be made, it is perhaps only the trite one of its diversity.¹

1 W.V.Quine: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Kemp Gary
Abstract: Western philosophy since Descartes has been marked by certain seminal books whose concern is the nature and scope of human knowledge. After Descartes's Meditations,works by Locke, Berkeley, Hume and Kant are perhaps the most familiar and enduringly influential examples. Quine'sWord and Object(1960) not conspicuously announce itself as an intended successor to these, but is very much what it is. And after Wittgenstein'sPhilosophical Investigations,it is among the most likely of the philosophical fruits of the twentieth century to attain something like the prestige of those earlier works (setting aside century's great achievements in pure logic and

3 John Rawls: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Laden Anthony Simon
Abstract: In his classes, John Rawls routinely quoted R. G. Collingwood’s remark that “the history of political theory is not the history of different answers to one and same question, but the history of a problem more or less constantly changing, whose solution was changing with it" (Rawls 2000b: xvi). To understand Rawls’s own work, we would do well to understand the problem he took himself be addressing. Fortunately, Rawls tells us what that problem is:

8 Saul Kripke: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Burgess John P.
Abstract: Kripke first became known for technical work on modal logic, the logic of necessity and possibility, much of it done in the late 1950s as a high-school student, and summarized in Kripke (1963). (Among other things this work popularized a revival of the picturesque Leibnizian language according to which necessity is truth in all possible worlds.) Under the influence of Kripke's later work philosophers have come to distinguish several conceptions of necessity and possibility, in a manner to be described below; but Kripke’s early technical work was not tied to any special conception. Rather, it provides tools applicable to many

9 Hilary Putnam: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Clark Peter
Abstract: In the late 1970s and early 1980s Hilary Putnam produced a major sequence philosophical works all directed at criticism of a certain view of the relation between language and reality. Two of the most salient of those works were Reason, Truth and History(1981; hereafterRTH) andMeaning and the Moral Sciences(1978). Both works were independently philosophicaltours de forceand both were enormously influential, producing a huge secondary literature. This essay concerns principally the former work, although we shall often have to refer to the latter also. Putnam is unselfconsciously one of those philosophers¹ who is not afraid

10 Bernard Williams: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Moore A.W.
Abstract: Bernard Williams (1929-2003) was one of the greatest twentieth-century British philosophers, renowned especially for his work in moral philosophy. When Ethics and the Limits of Philosophywas published, in 1985, he had already written numerous highly influential articles in the area. He had also written a beautifully concise and widely read introduction to the subject entitledMorality: An Introduction to Ethics([1972] 1993a), and had contributed the second half of a joint publication with J. J. C. Smart entitledUtilitarianism: For and Against(Smart & Williams 1973); Williams’s contribution, “A Critique of Utilitarianism”, provided the case against. A number of

14 John McDowell: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Thornton Tim
Abstract: John McDowell’s Mind and Worldwas first published in 1994. Based on his six 1991 John Locke Lectures, it is the most free flowing of his published work. It also the only book-length account of his philosophy. It is an important, dramatic and challenging work for three reasons.

Book Title: Between Muslim and Jew-The Problem of Symbiosis under Early Islam
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): WASSERSTROM STEVEN M.
Abstract: In Part I, "Trajectories," the author explores early Jewish-Muslim interactions, studying such areas as messianism, professions, authority, and class structure and showing how they were reshaped during the first centuries of Islam. Part II, "Constructions," looks at influences of Judaism on the development of the emerging Shi'ite community. This is tied to the wider issue of how early Muslims conceptualized "the Jew." In Part III, "Intimacies," the author tackles the complex "esoteric symbiosis" between Muslim and Jewish theologies. An investigation of the milieu in which Jews and Muslims interacted sheds new light on their shared religious imaginings. Throughout, Wasserstrom expands on the work of social and political historians to include symbolic and conceptual aspects of interreligious symbiosis. This book will interest scholars of Judaism and Islam, as well as those who are attracted by the larger issues exposed by its methodology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvsxn

Book Title: Modernist Anthropology-From Fieldwork to Text
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Manganaro Marc
Abstract: Recent insights into the nature of representation and power relations have signaled an important shift in perspective on anthropology: from a fieldwork-based "science" of culture to an interpretive activity bound to the discursive and ideological process called "text-making." This collection of essays reflects the ongoing cross-fertilization between literary criticism and anthropology. Focusing on texts written or influenced by anthropologists between 1900 and 1945, the work relates current perspectives on anthropology's discursive nature to the literary period known as "Modernism.".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvt1j

Sir James Frazer’s The Golden Bough: from: Modernist Anthropology
Author(s) ROTH MARTY
Abstract: Reading James Frazer’s Golden Boughas an imaginary construction is made easier by the fact that theGolden Boughhas long been invalidated as a work of anthropology. Frazer has been made the subject of anthropological “contempt and ridicule . . . abhorrence and denunciation”—his own estimate of the only acknowledgment that a “savage forefather” is likely to get from a modern (Frazer [1922], 307). This intention is further accommodated by the opening of the work itself, which is characterized, first, by particularly “fine” writing—a sudden access ofstyle;second, by the display of a work of fine

The Politics of Ethnographic Authority: from: Modernist Anthropology
Author(s) GORDON DEBORAH
Abstract: In the 1980s, cultural anthropology in the United States was transformed by a growing body of critical literature that focused on the politics of ethnography. Historians of anthropology, anthropologists themselves, and literary critics have turned their attention toward the writing of fieldwork as a locus of power relations and historical contexts.¹ The text itself, the document that certifies the authenticity of fieldwork, has come under scrutiny from critics who view ethnography not as a transparent window onto another culture but rather as a poetic and rhetorical translation, inevitably partial and contested. This focus on representation as problematic, incomplete, and responsible

Ruth Benedict and the Modernist Sensibility from: Modernist Anthropology
Author(s) HANDLER RICHARD
Abstract: In recent works, Michael Levenson (1984) and Kathryne Lindberg (1987) have charted the tension within literary modernism between the quest for self-expression and the desire to recover a viable tradition. Both critics, in strikingly different ways, have presented the dialogue and debate between Ezra Pound and T. S. Eliot (among others) as emblematic of the larger opposition of individuality and tradition, or deconstructive originality and cultural constraint. In my work on the literary endeavors of Boasian anthropologists, I have examined a similar tension in the development of a culture theory that could accommodate both cultural holism and human individuality. Using

The Historical Materialist Critique of Surrealism and Postmodernist Ethnography from: Modernist Anthropology
Author(s) WEBSTER STEVEN
Abstract: Form has become important in some contemporary ethnographic writing. However, the social theory implicit in the writing cannot be easily distinguished from its form. History is obscured in this merger, which is itself historic. In the social sciences, the long-established distinction between aesthetic criticism and social science, although often questioned, seems to have become blurred in practice and problematic in theory since about the 1960s. In aesthetics and literary criticism, on the other hand, the apparent convergence has long been implicit in the conceptual framework of modernism. Since the 1970s the perhaps related processes in some of the social sciences

CHAPTER THREE ‘Parody’ or the Imitation of Disciplines from: The Writer Writing
Abstract: The books that I hope to understand at present, Shaw’s Saint Joanand Proust’sA la recherche du temps perdu,each present a represented author in scientific or academic costume. Before I discuss how these authors use a special technique that helps them associate their work with knowledge of the sort that might affect the way their readers act, I shall identify that technique more thoroughly.

CHAPTER SIX Marcel Proust: from: The Writer Writing
Abstract: A la recherche du temps perduis so unconventional that there is no danger of mistaking it for an “ordinary” novel. The demands it makes of its readers are so great that Proust is almost obliged to promise more than the ordinary aesthetic pleasures of fiction as a condition for finding readers at all. He does promise more and has apparently fulfilled his promise. Early critics who accused his book of being formless, chaotic, and self-indulgent have long since given way to those who see it as a distinguished and serious work, not only a great work of fiction but

Book Title: The Semantics of Desire-Changing Models of Identity from Dickens to Joyce
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Weinstein Philip M.
Abstract: This work examines the dialectic of desire and value, as it affects the protagonist's identity, in fiction from Dickens and George Eliot through Hardy and Conrad to Lawrence and Joyce. Philip Weinstein describes the growing sexualization of the imagined body--the transformation of the protagonistic self from a figure defined by semantics, signification, and cultural value to one characterized by desire, force, and natural impulse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvwf7

[PART ONE Introduction] from: The Semantics of Desire
Abstract: The chapters on Dickens and Eliot move, in their respective ways, laterally and downward. They seek to convey the imaginative geography of each writer’s world—its norms of characterization, plot sequence, and setting—as well as to identify within each world, beneath the surface, a cluster of latent confusions. I attend to Dickens and Eliot in the measure that their work reveals an internal resistance to its own premises. Indeed, one formulation of Dickens’ more capacious achievement is that his work manages (as Eliot’s does not) to assimilate—by out-maneuvering, by disguising, by blinking—its own fissures.

Chapter Four The Perigord Phantastikon from: Modernist Poetics of History
Abstract: In “Psychology and Troubadours,” the lecture on mediaeval mysticism that Pound wrote for G.R.S. Mead’s theosophical Quest Society in 1912, Pound used the word phantastikonto describe the workings of an individual’s consciousness. Some people’s minds seem “to rest, or to have [their] center more properly, in what the Greek psychologists called thephantastikon.Their minds are, that is, circumvolved about them like soap-bubbles reflecting sundry patches of the macro-cosmos” (SR, 92). As Pound uses the term, it becomes clear that he allows it to refer not only to the consciousness of an individual but the consciousness of an entire

Chapter Seven Eeldrop and Appleplex: from: Modernist Poetics of History
Abstract: Eliot first came to visit Pound in the triangular study of his Kensington apartment in the Autumn of 1914, and Pound immediately sent “The Love Song of J. Alfred Prufrock” to Harriet Monroe, calling it “the best poem I have yet had or seen from an American” (L, 40). At the same time, Eliot wrote to Conrad Aiken that he found Pound’s verse “touchingly incompetent.”¹ This opinion would change. Eliot went up to Oxford, completed his dissertation on the philosophy of F. H. Bradley, married Vivienne Haigh-Wood, suffered, moved back to London, and began working at Lloyds Bank in 1917.

Chapter Nine The Contrived Corridors of Poems 1920 from: Modernist Poetics of History
Abstract: In his preface to The Spirit of RomancePound made it clear that his interest in mediaeval literature was far from “archaeological”: “I am interested in poetry,” he wrote. “I have attempted to examine certain forces, elements or qualities which were potent in the mediaeval literature of the Latin tongues, and are, I believe, still potent in our own” (SR, 5). Pound’s interest in the literature of the past was always subordinate to his desire to write poetry in the present. Eliot admired this aspect of Pound’s work above all others. In “Studies in Contemporary Criticism” (1918) he wrote that

3 Perspectives from Social Scientists and Humanists from: Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) Krimsky Sheldon
Abstract: The first thing that comes to mind when I hear the term “transdisciplinarity” is problem-centered investigations in contrast to “discipline-centered investigations.” Disciplines provide methods of investigation and therotical frameworks that inform the methods of inquiry. The questions asked are based on what has been accomplished in the past. Natural science is largely incremental. We build on prior work. The lattice of concepts and theories is self-reinforcing. It is only during periods of major paradigm shifts or scientific revolutions when one experiences the collapse of the entire structure. That may mean the theory has been replaced, but it doesn’t necessarily implied

Preamble from: Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) Rapport David J
Abstract: There were four plenary sessions on the first day of the colloquium and concurrent workshops on each of these plenary topics on the second day. These sessions and workshops were structured around

7 Exploring Transdisciplinarity from: Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) Macdonald Roderick
Abstract: One of the crucial activities in any transdisciplinary endeavor is the process of clarifying assumptions, recognizing commonalities and differences, and formulating a working agreement in order to achieve a particular goal. Our assigned goal was to generate a definition of transdisciplinarity. The working group divided its time into three phases: initial exploratory discussion, a more focused effort to create a single definition, and preparation of an oral report to the colloquium.

5 Experience and the Temporal Logic of Late Modernity from: Subaltern Appeal to Experience
Abstract: A confluence of sociohistorical vectors so impinged on processes of self-formation, then, that by the mid- to late eighteenth century the self increasingly becomes a narrative of events, or, to use Taylor’s expression, a “chain of happenings.” And these events, or happenings, insofar as they are reflexively reworked into a self’s horizon, are what experience is all about. But it is legitimate at this point to ask whether the continuity between the late eighteenth and the late twentieth century noted by Taylor still holds – whether, in other words, those late-eighteenth-century socio-historical preconditions for an accentuated role of experience in

6 FONDATION ROTHSCHILD WORKERS’ RESIDENCE: from: In Search of Elegance
Abstract: You are now invited to accompany me to a remarkable residential complex in a traditional working-class neighbourhood of Paris, the twelfth arrondissement.

Book Title: Living Prism-Itineraries in Comparative Literature
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): KUSHNER EVA
Abstract: She discusses the current state of comparative literary studies and the renewed role of comparative literature in a world that is at once more plural and more globalized, as well as some of the debates now taking place within literary criticism as a whole, including the interchange between comparative literature and cultural studies, the re-envisaging of the Renaissance, the work of Northrop Frye, myth and literature at the end of the twentieth century, modern drama, and post-colonialism. To play an important role in the human sciences, comparative literature had first to free itself of a number of restrictive habits, such as an insufficiently critical literary history. In order to do this, it had to think theoretically, but without yielding to the temptation of letting theory become an end in itself. Kushner demonstrates that, while under strong pressures to be a more rigourous science, comparative literature has realized that in the human sciences the validation of knowledge has to seek its own tests and criteria, becoming increasingly more open to individuality, difference, and life situations and controlling its tendency to universalize. With its emphasis on whether literary history is possible and the problems it raises for literary theory and for comparative literature in particular, The Living Prism adds an important dimension to the ongoing debate about criticism and comparative literary studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt801kq

Foreword: from: Living Prism
Author(s) KRYSINSKI WLADIMIR
Abstract: Since the beginning of her university career as a scholar in French literature and as a comparatist, the author of The Living Prismhas been committed to the multicultural and multicontextual approach to literature. For Eva Kushner the comparative ethos has always implied understanding through comparison. Understanding what? Worlds and literatures, subjective discourses and collective memories, values, structures and ideas, works and movements, writers in their social, biographical, and individual totality, cognitive passions, legacies, and history.

Introduction from: Living Prism
Abstract: The unity of this book lies not in any answers it may bring but in the persistence of its questionings. The circumstances of life, study, and work had led me to the humanities: a smattering of Protestant theology, followed by philosophy, followed in turn by French literature of the twentieth century but gradually also of the sixteenth; and, along these paths, the discovery of comparative literature. These were – and are – widely separate disciplines, guarded by specialists who would view any border trespassing with suspicion. My transgressions were due to the availability of certain programs of study rather than others, and

1 Literature in the Global Village from: Living Prism
Abstract: From their earliest days comparative literature studies have lived in a paradox: they presuppose universals at work within human literatures and cultures, and seek to bring them to light through the examination of the diversity of these literatures and cultures. In recent decades the entire field of literary studies has undergone a vast movement of self-examination and self-legitimation as part of a wider movement among the human sciences to demonstrate both their scientific worth and their relevance to the situation and psyche of mankind. The question remains, however, whether this search for truth, necessarily underpinned by questioning the process of

5 Comparative Literature in Canada: from: Living Prism
Abstract: Canada is a vast country with a relatively small but hugely diverse population. Its educational system is largely entrusted to provincial rather than federal authorities. It is therefore even more perilous to generalize about the state of a discipline in Canada than in countries where higher education is more evenly dispensed, structured, supported. The scholars, works, and events presented here are meant to be a set of representative examples rather than a hierarchical listing in any sense.

17 The Renewed Meaning of the Renaissance Dialogue from: Living Prism
Abstract: To work in the humanities, particularly in early modern studies, forces upon us a double sense of time: on the one hand, all documents and monuments from even the most distant past, at least those that have been stored, preserved, printed, discovered, reclaimed, are at our disposal in a kind of eternal present, and we feel a kinship with all these creations of human imagination; on the other, when we attempt to make them our own, we very quickly discover the immensity of distance to be bridged and that, in order to exist in history, the phenomena of the past

20 Imagining the Renaissance Child from: Living Prism
Abstract: To this vast subject I shall not attempt to bring answers but merely to raise questions and to devise, only programmatically, a conceptual framework. Many of the recent findings of social history contradict certain admittedly naïve expectations regarding the accomplishments of the Renaissance. Simplistically one might say that there has been a gap between theoretical visions of the Renaissance and its practices. I suspect there is much more to be said, and that pursuing the discrepancies is a necessary part of rewriting and rereading the Renaissance so as to uproot, destabilize, complexify our images of Renaissance children both in concept

22 Northrop Frye and the Historicity of Literature from: Living Prism
Abstract: Pondering the legacy of Northrop Frye necessarily leads to recognizing its scope, which goes far beyond the study of the literary system alone; this in turn entails recognizing the philosophical status of his thought. In Anatomy of Criticism, once he established the specificity of the critical activity among intellectual disciplines, Frye showed little interest in the labels others would apply to his sphere of activity: critic or historian or theorist or philosopher. In practice, however, he always dealt, explicitly or by implication, with the whole universe of human culture, emphasizing the role of works of imagination within it. The philosophical

23 The Social Thought of Northrop Frye from: Living Prism
Abstract: The Anatomybegins by magnificently establishing the specificity of the literary pursuit, in terms both of literary works and of the critical and theoretical study

24 Liberating Children’s Imagination from: Living Prism
Abstract: Fictionality, whether intended for children or adults, by multiplying possible worlds has a liberating effect, but also works better than the didactic imposition of moral lessons; this is no more than a restatement of Horace’s still valid conjoining of the pleasant and the useful.

1 (Un)framing Genres from: From Cohen to Carson
Abstract: In choosing to work with the lyric, the long poem, and the novel, I have invoked three of the most established – but also the vaguest – terms in literary criticism. The formal innovation that critics identify as a key aspect of the lyric also characterizes the long poem and the novel. Paul Ricoeur remarks that the novel “has, since its creation, presented itself as the protean genre par excellence ... Indeed, it has constituted for at least three centuries now a prodigious workshop for experiments in the domains of composition.”² My aim here is not to wrestle these shape-shifting genres into

5 Daphne Marlatt: from: From Cohen to Carson
Abstract: In the ongoing cinerama of Marlatt’s poetry and prose, her first book, the long poem Frames of a Story(1968), establishes a narrative framework that reappears in her novellaZócalo(1977) and her novelAna Historic(1988). These works perform variations on the heterosexual quest narrative that Marlatt finds in the source text forFrames of a Story,Hans Christian Andersen’sThe Snow Queen(1884). Taken together, the erotic plots ofFrames of a Story, Zócalo,andAna Historicmap a lesbian quest narrative, departing from a scene of heterosexual dissatisfaction and moving towards one of lesbian fulfillment. Although not

Book Title: Patriotic Elaborations-Essays in Practical Philosophy
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): BLATTBERG CHARLES
Abstract: Blattberg's is a genuinely original philosophical voice. The essays collected here discuss how to re-conceive the political spectrum, where "deliberative deomocrats" go wrong, why human rights language is tragically counterproductive, how nationalism is not really secular, how many nations should share a single state, a new approach to the Arab-Israeli conflict, and why Canada might have something to teach about the "war on terror." We also learn about the right way to deny a role to principles in ethics, how to distinguish between the good and the beautiful, the way humor works, the rabbinic nature of modernism, the difference between good, bad, great, and evil, why Plato's dialogues are not really dialogues, and why most philosophers are actually artists.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt8054j

8 From Moderate to Extreme Holism from: Patriotic Elaborations
Abstract: Jonathan Dancy has described his Ethics without Principlesas the culmination of twenty-five years of work, and indeed it is a major statement by a leading contemporary moral philosopher. Dancy’s basic aim is to provide an alternative to those mainstream, principlesbased approaches to ethics, which is why a great deal of his energy in this and previous works has been devoted to criticizing that mainstream. My critique here, however, is different in that it comes from “the other side,” so to speak, for I wish to argue that Dancy’s alternative does not take us far enough.

3 The Kingston Years (1971–present) from: Istvan Anhalt
Author(s) SMITH GORDON E.
Abstract: The pathway that led Istvan Anhalt from McGill to Queen’s appeared only after much reflection. As seen in chapter 2, Anhalt’s decision to leave his full-time professorship at McGill University for Queen’s in 1971 did not come easily. He had worked at McGill since his arrival in Canada in 1949 with good results, building up the theory and composition department, establishing the Electronic Music Studio, and forming his reputation as a teacher and a composer. Over the twenty-two year period in Montreal, Anhalt had also found a stimulating circle of colleagues and friends, both English and French speaking. As an

4 The Instrumental Solo and Chamber Music from: Istvan Anhalt
Author(s) ELLIOTT ROBIN
Abstract: Anhalt’s purely instrumental solo and chamber music dates, with one important exception, from early in his career. Most of the music he composed in Europe falls into this category, as do the works he wrote during his first six years in Canada. The only chamber music work to date that reflects the style of Anhalt’s later operatic, vocal, and orchestral compositions is Doors … shadows (Glenn Gould in memory). The works under consideration here, with place and date of completion in parentheses, are as follows:

5 Orchestral Works from: Istvan Anhalt
Author(s) BECKWITH JOHN
Abstract: Istvan Anhalt’s orchestral oeuvre contains eight works: Concerto in stilo di Handel, a neobaroque concerto composed during his studies in Paris; Interludium andFuneral Music, two short works from his first years in Montreal; Symphony, his major work of the 1950s;Symphony of Modules, his major work of the 1960s; and then, in a sudden creative burst of the late 1980s, a triptych of large-scale orchestral essays –Simulacrum,SparkskrapS, andSonance·Resonance (Welche Töne?).

6 Electroacoustic Music from: Istvan Anhalt
Author(s) KEANE DAVID
Abstract: Istvan Anhalt first heard electronic music during a broadcast in the late 1950s on cbc radio, hosted by Helmut Blume. Blume often travelled in Europe, and he had acquired, in Germany, broadcast tapes of two works by Karlheinz Stockhausen. One of the works Anhalt heard was Studie ii(1954), a work created from white noise¹ carefully filtered to produce striking contrasts in timbre. The second and more recent work wasGesang der Jünglinge(1955–56), a remarkable piece created through transformations of the voice of a boy soprano mixed with electronically produced sounds. This latter work remains one of the

7 Alternatives of Voice: from: Istvan Anhalt
Author(s) BENJAMIN WILLIAM E.
Abstract: Over the past half-century, Istvan Anhalt has produced a body of work as technically refined, as rich in meaning, and as fully engaged with musicality as any other from this period. There are reasons why it does not enjoy the wide recognition accorded other oeuvres, of which many have less potential to reward the discerning listener. The professional cost of reaching full production only after the age of fifty can be cited – if easily explained by way of thirty-five years of unstinting devotion to teaching – as can the fractured state of musical politics (like all politics) in Canada,

Introduction from: Istvan Anhalt
Abstract: Throughout his career in Canada, Istvan Anhalt has demonstrated a stimulating talent not only for composing but also for writing about music. For all of his own major compositions he has provided at least one and in some instances several essays explaining the work’s aesthetic and musical qualities. His major contribution as an engaged and profound thinker about music is his book Alternative Voices, in which he brings his wide learning to bear on the subject of contemporary vocal and choral composition. It seems fitting, then, to include Anhalt’s voice here, in a number of essays that deal with his

12 An Operatic Triptych in Multiple Texts from: Istvan Anhalt
Abstract: The first work in this triptych, La Tourangelle, was the outcome of a cbc Radio commission. Its story is told elsewhere on these pages. The composition took place during the years 1970–75, and the premiere in the summer of 1975. It was followed byWinthrop, which I began in the fall of 1975 and completed in 1983. During the early 1980s, while still at work onWinthrop, I began to think that eventually I should consider adding a third work, one based on the story of a Jewish figure, thus endeavouring to tell about the group with which I

15 Three Songs of Love from: Istvan Anhalt
Abstract: There are two versions of this piece for women’s choir: the first was written as an a cappella work, in 1951 in Montreal; the other, with two added wind instruments (flute, clarinet), in 1997 in Kingston. The sentiment and thought behind it, however, go back to the year 1941. Its contents were also influenced by events and conditions that occurred in my life in 1951–52, and after a long hiatus, in the mid-1990s.

16 A Continuing Thread? from: Istvan Anhalt
Abstract: I am writing this in December 1997, about a year and a half after the premiere of Traces(Tikkun). I am now in the midst of composing a new work for voices and orchestra which I am calling “A Voice-Drama for the Imagination.” As on earlier occasions, the thought that these works might be related, in some way, to my earlier works for voices (Comments, Cento, Foci, Thisness, and others) keeps coming back to mind. I now believe that there is a connection linking these pieces together; as a result, they could be, or perhaps even ought to be, regarded

Book Title: Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism-Essays on Interpretation, Language and Politics
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): JONES BEN
Abstract: New readings and perspectives on Nietzsche's work are brought together in this collection of essays by
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt806gf

Foreword from: Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism
Author(s) Jones Ben
Abstract: These essays, gathered as they are from a group of conference papers, show diversities of approach, concern, rhetoric and strategy. But they have been assembled with a sense of composition. They were not presumed to bring into focus a singular Nietzsche, this Nietzsche whose mark is plural. The conference, “Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism” (held at Carleton University, Ottawa, Canada, 25-28 September 1986), set out to initiate discussion of Nietzsche’s work, recognizing conventional interpretation of it, and to pose questions about whether or not (and if so, how?) it is rhetorical and nihilistic. Are there relations between rhetoric and

INTRODUCTION from: Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism
Author(s) Egyed Béla
Abstract: Nietzsche had much to say about nihilism. It might even be argued that it is the single most important theme running through his works. He says comparatively little about rhetoric. But one could assert that rhetoric is strongly implicated as one of Nietzsche’s permanent concerns. Indeed, it could be argued that such Nietzschean themes as perspectivism, nihilism, will to power, eternal recurrence, or the overman lose altogether

Nihilism and Autobiography from: Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism
Author(s) Robinson Sinclair
Abstract: No doubt—having read all of Nietzsche’s works, as well as the comments on these works (I am thinking particularly of Heidegger’s book)—we know the essential things about nihilism, we know the main points of the problematic, the fundamental axes of the set of themes which this term is supposed to cover. No doubt, if we get together to talk about this theme, at least from the orientation provided by the title of our colloquium, we have, each of us, a certain idea, a representation, perhaps an interpretation of this theme. In all probability, we no doubt also have,

Passing-A-Way-Of-The-Child from: Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism
Author(s) Egyed Béla
Abstract: It is a bit late already and, I imagine, you have done a lot of work for the last two days, and will, no doubt, continue to do so. You have listened, in English and in French, to discourses of a high degree of intellectual, moral, and philosophical import. I would not wish to add, be it even a grain of coriander, to the mass of knowledge with which you now find yourselves loaded, like Nietzschean camels— no harm intended¹—who are ready to brave the crossing of the desert in hopes of carrying on their backs the richest products

“Nihilism: from: Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism
Author(s) Brown Richard S.G.
Abstract: In Thus Spoke Zarathustra, Nietzsche makes the rather categorical claim: “… the awakened and knowing say: body am I entirely, and nothing else; and soul is only a word for something about the body” (part one, 4). In a work which is replete with exaggeration couched in poetic, figurative, and metaphoric language, one fact might easily be overlooked. Nietzsche is making this claim literally and takes this claim very seriously: “Body am I entirely.” Within the context ofZarathustra, a book which is addressed to “all or no one,” Nietzsche attempts to persuade those few who are capable of actualizing

Khayyam Paltiel: from: Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Whitaker Reg
Abstract: It is a very great honour for me to remember Khayyam Paltiel, a man who was to me, in turn, teacher, research director, colleague, and friend. It is a daunting task when one is called upon to provide a theme appropriate to a man as complex and as many-talented as Khayyam. I briefly pondered the idea of providing a serious summation of the value of Khayyam’s intellectual legacy as embodied in his published writings, of reflecting on the significance of his work on political finance, political patronage, interest groups, nationalism, minority rights and so on. Eventually I chose not to

The Comparative Study of Clientelism and the Realities of Patronage in Modern Societies: from: Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Roniger Luis
Abstract: The study of patronage and clientelism — which has burgeoned in the social sciences since the late 1960s — can be considered part of a broader reaction against evolutionary assumptions about the presumed generalized move of modern society towards Western liberal forms of political development and bureaucratic-universalism. From different vantage points, these assumptions were seriously questioned by the research of scholars who analyzed the actual operation of modern institutions. Thus, over and above their concrete contribution, works by Khayyam Paltiel on the financing of modern parties and studies on political machines by J. Scott, René Lemarchand and Keith Legg — among others —have

Reflections on Political Marketing and Party “Decline” in Canada . . . or, A Funny Thing Happened on the Way to the 1988 Election from: Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Tanguay A. Brian
Abstract: Are Canada’s political parties in “decline” ? Do they matter less to voters and citizens now than they did during that mythical golden age of Macdonald, Laurier, Mackenzie King, and St. Laurent? Are they less successful now than they once were in mobilizing voters, structuring political choices, or generating policy ideas? These are the sorts of questions that Khayyam Paltiel addressed in one of his last published works (Paltiel, 1989), a wide-ranging survey of the impact of changing political technologies (polling, consulting, direct mail, and so on) on the health of party organizations in both Canada and the United States.

The Dysfunctions of Canadian Parties: from: Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Meisel John
Abstract: The study of political parties, like that of other subjects, is from time to time jolted by the appearance of seminal works so enriching and transforming the art that they elevate it to a new plateau. The books by Ostrogorski (1902), Michels (1915), Key (1942), Schattschneider (1942), Duverger (1954), McKenzie (1955), Eldersveld (1964), and Sartori (1976), among others, comprise such milestones on our road to the mastery of the party phenomenon. A potentially similar formative flashpoint burst on the scene in 1949, when R.K. Merton’s “Manifest and Latent Functions” (a revision of an earlier paper) appeared in the first edition

3 Matthew Arnold’s Wordsworth: from: Mind in Creation
Author(s) CURTIS JARED
Abstract: Wordsworth very nearly published a poem called The Tinkerin the collection of 1807, but he vigorously crossed it out before sending copy to the printer, and never printed it thereafter.¹ Had he published the poem, then or later, it might have tempered somewhat his Victorian reputation as a sombre poet of ideas. Sprinkled with cheerfulnon sequitursand local slang, the fifty-line poem is an amusing portrait of an itinerant pot-mender with a penchant for humming loudly at his work. No one has ever taken the poem seriously enough to suggest that it is a mock-heroic picture of the

5 En-Gendering the System: from: Mind in Creation
Author(s) RAJAN TILOTTAMA
Abstract: Until recently Blake criticism has conferred a systematic coherence on his work through a canonical reading that contains the errancy of the early texts by making them experiments with or types of the later system.¹ The Bible, which Blake describes as the great code of art, has been the model by which both we and he have read his secular scripture. Assembled out of the writings of many men, and conjoining two cultures, it provides analogies not only for a unification of the authorial canon but also for a hermeneutics of cultural history that we may now recognize as imaginative

AFTERWORD from: Mind in Creation
Author(s) WOODMAN ROSS G.
Abstract: When, in the early 1950s, I began working on Shelley, among the models I used was Dante’s notion of four levels in his Convivioby which, in Shelley’s words, he “feigns himself to have ascended to the throne of the Supreme Cause.”¹ To feign oneself meant to me at the time in some sense to fool oneself. Shelley, I knew, did not believe in a Supreme Cause. He was, as C.E. Pulos has demonstrated, sufficiently a Humean sceptic to question the very idea of causality, finding the only empirical evidence for it in the associational workings of the human mind.²

Conclusion from: The Modern Dilemma
Abstract: I was initially prompted to undertake this comparative study of Wallace Stevens and T.S. Eliot by the fact that two men of such similar background, and of comparable achievement in the field of letters, had avoided any sort of relationship, and even much comment on the work and accomplishments of one another. Given the considerable fame of both men, the avoidance had to be deliberate, and if deliberate, it must have had a discoverable motivation.

Book Title: Chora 4-Intervals in the Philosophy of Architecture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Parcell Stephen
Abstract: Essays in this group include a discussion of the accomplishments of Gordon Matta-Clark, a reading of Alfred Hitchcock's Rear Window, and an analysis of the implications of ethical/formal questions in the work of Ludwig Wittgenstein for architecture. Contributors include Caroline Dionne (Université de Québec à Montréal), Mark Dorrian (University of Edinburgh), Michael Emerson (University of New South Wales), Marc Glaudemans (University of Technology), George Hersey (emeritus, Yale University), Robert Kirkbride (design director, Studiolo), Joanna Merwood (doctoral dissertation, Princeton University), Michel Moussette (Ph.D. at the Université de Montréal), Juhani Pallasmaa (architect, Finland, emeritus Washington University in St. Louis), Alberto Pérez-Gómez (McGill University), David Theodore (McGill University), and Dorian Yurchuk (architect, New York City).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt809nx

Alberti at Sea from: Chora 4
Author(s) Emerson Michael
Abstract: The sea is traditionally the site for a wide range of practical, theoretical, and ethical investigations concerning motion and constructive spatial practices. The manner of their collation, like the sea itself, is not fixed and responds to time and place. Three nautical terms – water, navigation, ship – are the shifting objects of this essay’s investigation of spatial practice and fluidity in the early Renaissance works of Leon Battista Alberti (1404–72). This investigation poses the following questions: what sort of place was Alberti’s sea? what traditions informed his aquatic investigations? and what were the difficulties of constructive, spatial engagement

The Glass Architecture of Fra Luca Pacioli from: Chora 4
Author(s) Pérez-Gómez Alberto
Abstract: The importance of luca pacioli’s late fifteenth-century work on the golden section and its applications to stereotomy has never been properly grasped. Despite his personal acquaintance with Alberti and Leonardo, his knowledge of Vitruvius’s treatise, and his presence in important architectural contexts such as Urbino and Milan, mainstream architectural history has generally ignored his work. Pacioli’s plagiarism of Piero della Francesca’s work, as well as a lack of evidence that Pacioli’s contemporaries were interested in his book, have not contributed to challenge scholarly perceptions about the relative obscurity and marginality of his work. Although there is a whole section devoted

Introduction,Troping the Territory from: Tropes and Territories
Author(s) NEW W. H.
Abstract: This collection of essays looks at the narrative and discursive paradigms of short stories, tales, and short fictions that have been written in postcolonial societies, where the genre of short fiction has enjoyed an atypically forceful canonical role. The book brings together the work of over twenty scholars from Europe, North America, and the South Pacific so as to investigate the practices of production and reception in post-imperial spaces, and to theorize on the relations between genre and space when both are perceived as peripheral. The hybrid forms of Canadian, Australian, and New Zealand writing, for example, demonstrate among other

Between Fractals and Rainbows: from: Tropes and Territories
Author(s) MOSS LAURA
Abstract: I began my presentation at the “Tropes and Territories” short story conference with the admission that I had written two papers. The first was the one I said I would write – comparing portraits of the everyday in stories by Rohinton Mistry and Eden Robinson. The second – the one I actually presented – came out of my own discomfort with the first. When I read my initial paper, I felt as if I had read it before. I recognized the pro formanature of my original argument. The more I worked through my ideas about critical expectation, the more I found that

Alistair MacLeod and the Gaelic Diaspora from: Tropes and Territories
Author(s) DAVIES GWENDOLYN
Abstract: In Alistair MacLeod’s “The Closing Down of Summer,” Gaelic-speaking Cape Breton miners carry sprigs of spruce from Cape Breton with them “to Africa as mementos or talismans or symbols of identity.” “Much,” argues the narrator, “as our Highland ancestors, for centuries, fashioned crude badges of heather or whortleberries to accompany them on the battlefields of the world. Perhaps so that in the closeness of their work with death they might find nearness to their homes and an intensified realization of themselves” ( As BirdsII).

Book Title: Chora 3-Intervals in the Philosophy of Architecture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Parcell Stephen
Abstract: The thirteen essays in this collection include historical subjects as well as speculative theoretical "projects" that blur conventional boundaries between history and fiction. Ricardo Castro provides an original reading of the Kogi culture in Colombia; Maria Karvouni explores philological and architectonic connections between the Greek demas (the political individual) and domus (the house); Mark Rozahegy speculates on relationships between architecture and memory; Myriam Blais discusses technical inventions by sixteenth-century French architect Philibert de l'Orme; Alberto Pérez-Gómez examines the late sixteenth-century reconstruction of the Temple of Jerusalem by Juan Bautista Villalpando; Janine Debanné offers a new perspective on Guarino Guarini's Chapel of the Holy Shroud in Turin; Katja Grillner examines the early seventeenth-century writings of Salomon de Caus and his built work in Heidelberg; David Winterton reflects on Charles-François Viel's "Letters"; Franca Trubiano looks at Jean-Jacques Lequeu's controversial Civil Architecture; Henrik Reeh considers the work of Sigfried Kracauer, a disciple of Walter Benjamin; Irena ðantovská Murray reflects on work by artist Jana Sterbak; artist Ellen Zweig presents a textual project that demonstrates the charged poetic space created by film makers such as Antonioni and Hitchcock; and Swedish writer and architect Sören Thurell asks a riddle about architecture and its mimetic origins.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80ckv

Invention as a Celebration of Materials from: Chora 3
Author(s) Blais Myriam
Abstract: IN THE SPIRIT OF MEANINGFUL EXCHANGE suggested by Serres, this article explores the possibility of thinking about technology as a place For celebration.² For that purpose, technology is defined here as the prudent use of techniques and implies a careful consideration of both thought and materials. This proposition relies on the sixteenth-century works of François Rabelais, doctor and novelist, and Philibert de 1’Orme, architect, for their useful suggestions about providing a space for this celebration. Indeed, de 1’Orme claimed to have contributed many beautiful and useful inventions to architecture, inventions that were supported by poetical illustrations relating to his interest

Juan Bautista Villalpando’s Divine Model in Architectural Theory from: Chora 3
Author(s) Pérez-Gómez Alberto
Abstract: THE BIBLICAL DESCRIPTION of the Temple of Solomon in Jerusalem has generated many diverse architectural speculations throughout our history. According to tradition, the Temple followed the designs of God and therefore could be interpreted as the archetypal work of architecture - a work that revealed a true order beyond the whimsical tastes of man and any temporal expressions of political power. In diverse times and cultures, mythical accounts of technological making and building demonstrated mankind’s keen awareness of the problems involved in transforming a given “sacred” world for the sake of survival. In the Christian tradition the Temple of Solomon

A Grand Piano Filled with Sand: from: Chora 3
Author(s) Thurel Sören
Abstract: If I am concerned with conveying to you the uncertainty of things, not as a sign of the failure of meaning but because of its fullness, this cannot be stated in an unequivocal manner. It is something which has to be shared, worked on together.

Domesticity and Diremption: from: Chora 3
Author(s) Murray Irena Žantovská
Abstract: The body as a focus of Sterbak’s work has been frequently discussed, most

Book Title: A Portrait of the Artist as Australian-L’Oeuvre bizarre de Barry Humphries
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): ST PIERRE PAUL MATTHEW
Abstract: A Portrait of the Artist as Australian offers the first critical assessment of Barry Humphries' entire career - as a daring postmodern deconstructionist on stage, film, and television, with sixty-seven stage shows, twenty-four film and thirty-four video appearances, thirty-four television series and seventy-one television appearances, and seventy-two audio recordings, but especially what he calls his "second career" as author of twenty-nine books. With an oeuvre that includes novels, biographies, autobiographies, editions, compilations, comic books, poetry, dramatic monologues, sketches, film scripts, and several unclassified works, Humphries is a literary and dramatic artist of considerable significance. Arguing that Humphries is one of Australia's greatest writers, Paul Matthew St Pierre reveals a multi-faceted artist whose success is rooted in music halls, Dadaism, and his identity as an Australian.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80fzm

Book Title: Postmodernism and the Ethical Subject- Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Ilcan Suzan
Abstract: Writing across the disciplines of sociology, literature, film, anthropology, and museology, the contributors examine the way in which radical postmodern shifts around knowledge and value have mobilized new relations between ourselves and others and transformed a range of cultural practices. This volume includes philosophical reflections and essays on museums and memory, visual culture, and relations with the other. Postmodernism and the Ethical Subject examines the altered frameworks that simultaneously help us to meet the contemporary challenge and raise the ethical stakes of our historical moment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80grb

“Writing against the Ruins”: from: Postmodernism and the Ethical Subject
Author(s) GABRIEL BARBARA
Abstract: The scene I am describing is Canadian multi-media artist Vera Frenkel’s installation … from the Transit Bar, a reconstruction at the National Gallery of Canada, from 9 May to 27 October 1996, of the work first shown four years earlier at documenta 1X in Kassel, Germany. In its blurring of the boundaries of the artwork and the “real,” Frenkel’s installation inhabits a postmodern space that extends many of the conceptual problems posed earlier in the century by the Duchamps ready-made. This time round, however, they are folded into a scenic framework intensely saturated with social concerns. “Whosestory?” the viewer

The Unbearable Strangeness of Being: from: Postmodernism and the Ethical Subject
Author(s) GABRIEL BARBARA
Abstract: The appearance of Edgar Reitz’s film chronicle Heimaton West German television in an eleven-part film-length series in the autumn of 1984, after a premiere at the Munich film festival earlier in the summer, marked an important foray into cultural debates around the nation’s place in twentieth-century history. Though both a film and an “event” that would eventually spiral into an ongoing project, it was initially designed to take back the history that had been “stolen” from Germany in the American television seriesHolocaust.¹ Its wider context, however, was the ongoing labour of national memory-work taking place around what Adorno

1 The End(s) of Myth: from: Rewriting Apocalypse in Canadian Fiction
Abstract: In Timothy Findley’s first novel, The Last of the Crazy People(1967), an eleven-year-old boy becomes convinced that the end of the world is fast approaching. His belief in the world’s imminent destruction is instilled by the prophetic visions of a drunken servant. In her booming voice, she warns him: ‘“No one knows, ‘cept they knows it’s coming. Arm’geddon ... Like for a moment it’s gonna be real, real, terrible, hon ... But for those of us in this perditionnow,it will surely be bless’d relief”’ (98-9). The power of the apocalyptic narrative works on the child’s imagination, and at

5 Broken Letters: from: Rewriting Apocalypse in Canadian Fiction
Abstract: All of the works in this study interrogate the secular view of apocalypse as a fanciful biblical story that addresses the problem of evil by fabricating images of the violent destruction of the earthly world and the creation of a new and perfect heavenly world. As these fictions illustrate, apocalypse - far from being a quaint literary artifact that merely describes the categories of good and evil - functions as a vital, discursive mechanism for the inscriptionof these categories. More important, rather than contain violence in the realm of art or imagination, these texts, owing to their emphasis on

CONCLUSION: from: Rewriting Apocalypse in Canadian Fiction
Abstract: Fashioning an ending for a book about fictions that advocate skepticism about endings is, admittedly, a tricky business. However, in light of this study’s findings that it is dangerous to ignore the myth of the end, it seems prudent to offer some concluding remarks. This study began with the desire to explore the treatment of the apocalyptic paradigm from the ex-centric perspective of contemporary Canadian writers. In effect, their works confirm Ronald Granofsky’s observation that 1945 was “the year a certain innocence ended for the human race, a Second Fall” (2). Using the grammar of apocalypse outlined in the introduction,

6 Narrative from: Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description
Abstract: As I hope to have made clear, this book is not only about description in the usual sense (or senses) but also about the role of scrutiny in a much larger intellectual pattern that dominates Bishop’s work. Chapters 2 through 4 lay this pattern out as it pertains to knowledge and the mind, showing how Bishop always emphasizes the study of smaller, more concrete things at least partially because she believes that study to be the only avenue to the larger, more abstract ones. The preceding chapter shifts gears somewhat, tracing this same pattern as it applies to the opposition

8 Description from: Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description
Abstract: Poetry, like fiction, has a time-sense, and it is worth extending the ideas laid out in “Time’s Andromedas” to the formal – rather than thematic – elements of Bishop’s poetics. Generally, critics writing about Bishop have used the question of time to buttress arguments about the “mind thinking”: the notion that Bishop’s goal is to capture the feeling of a mind in the process of working out a thought rather than a mind relating a fully formed idea. The distinction is one Bishop found in an essay on Baroque prose by Morris Croll and used in both a paper of her own

8 The Revolutionary Reading of Justice from: Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual
Abstract: The different opinions expressed during the French Revolution crystallize conceptions of the individual and society that the philosopheshad entertained but never completely developed. On the whole, the revolutionary ideologies expressed values that were far from liberal; thus they provided fertile ground for the emergence of the intellectuals. TheDéclaration des droits de I’homme et du citoyen(1789) together with the writings of Sieyès, who is quite representative of his time, and the discourse of the Jacobins, show a convergence of ideas that share a perception of reason and its function in the workings of society.

5 My Self: A Task from: Kierkegaard as Humanist
Abstract: What is Kierkegaard saying about freedom in this formulation? Clearly, he is rejecting the idea that human “freedom” is nothing more than the immanent, inferential, necessary working out of the inherent potentialities of one’s given finitude. And, as already noted above, freedom is something more, something otherthan the openness of human imaginative infinitive to being

Book Title: Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary- Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): JONES MANINA
Abstract: Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary begins with a previously unpublished article by Shields. In the essays that follow, international scholars employ a variety of theories and methodologies in their analyses of her work, including narrative theory, cultural criticism, feminist analysis, psychoanalytic approaches, tropological explication, theories of authorship, and ficto-criticism to demonstrate how Shields's writing represents a genuine revision of literary realism in which the ordinary is subject to contemplation and not just celebration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80snq

Out of the Ordinary: from: Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) JONES MANINA
Abstract: In March 2003, literary scholars, students, and creative writers gathered in Paris for a colloquium entitled “Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary,” a forum designed to open up an international critical dialogue on the career of Carol Shields. Shields, a prolific writer whose work includes novels, short stories, poetry, plays, criticism, biography, and essays, is by all measures an extraordinary, internationally recognized literary figure: her uncommon talent has been acknowledged by a Pulitzer Prize, a National Book Critics Circle Award, an Orange Prize for Fiction, a Governor General’s Literary Award, a Canadian Authors Association Award, the Charles Taylor Prize for literary

12 Disappearance and “the Vision Multiplied”: from: Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) DVOŘÁK MARTA
Abstract: This essay sets out to throw light on the work of a highly erudite, francophile Canadian writer by placing it within the larger cultural context of certain aesthetic currents such as modernism and postmodernism, in particular their subsidiary tendencies in European and especially French postmodern writing. The discussion will focus first of all on a story from the collection Dressing Up for the Carnival, “Absence,” situating it within the continuum of experimental writers such as Raymond Queneau and Georges Perec, whose landmark works – whether they be direct influences or not – can serve a useful exegetical function. This involves

14 Mischiefs, Misfits, and Miracles from: Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) HERK ARITHA VAN
Abstract: To perform any ficto-critical homage to the work of Carol Shields proposes beginning with an epigraph, a pithy frame, modest rather than forward, introductory in intent but with the gentle exertion of a raised eyebrow, an awning hiding a venerable umbrella shop or sheltering two characters walking arm in arm, enmeshed in a conversation so intense as to ripple with sedulous waves. The effect of Shields’s style and voice, her fictions generous as gestures and intricate as spiderwebs, is to arouse an ardour that can only culminate in another story, the langue d’oïlof a glow-worm tale. A gesture of

Book Title: Karl Polanyi on Ethics and Economics-Foreword by Marguerite Mendell
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Baum Gregory
Abstract: Exploring Polanyi's lesser-known works as well as The Great Transformation, Baum provides a more complete and nuanced understanding of Polanyi's thought. He examines Polanyi's interpretation of modern economic and social history, clarifies the ethical presuppositions present in Polanyi's work, and addresses how Polanyi's understanding of the relation between ethics and economics touches on many issues relevant to the contemporary debate about the world's economic future. Baum argues that we should look to Polanyi's understanding of modern capitalism to reinstate the social discourse and, in political practice, the principles of reciprocity and solidarity. He points to examples, both in Canada and abroad, of attempts to formulate alternative models of economic development and to create new forms of institutional and cultural intervention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80wmh

Foreword from: Karl Polanyi on Ethics and Economics
Author(s) Mendell Marguerite
Abstract: There is currently widespread interest in the work of Karl Polanyi among progressive thinkers, activists, and a growing community of heterodox social scientists. Although The Great Transformation, published in 1944, is acclaimed in France as one of the ten classics of twentieth-century social thought and has been translated into eight languages, Polanyi's influence within North America was, until recently, largely within the discipline of anthropology. Those who acknowledged the broader significance of his writings to contemporary social thought were marginalized by the intellectual community.

1 Polanyi’s Theory of the Double Movement from: Karl Polanyi on Ethics and Economics
Abstract: In The Great Transformation, Karl Polanyi analyses the crisis of modern society. He does not claim that his idea is wholly original, for he finds aspects of it in the thought of the nineteenth-century social reformer Robert Owen. Owen argued that the new capitalism had caused not simply the material impoverishment of the workers but also the disruption of the ethical culture to which they belonged and through which they defined their identity. He was among the first to recognize that economic institutions have an impact on people’s cultural self-understanding. He advocated — and actually established - an alternative organization of

4 Alexandre Chenevert from: Aphorism in the Francophone Novel of the Twentieth Century
Abstract: An examination of the aphorisms in Gabrielle Roy’s most substantial work, Alexandre Chenevert,brings to light a version of humanism akin to Saint-Exupéry’s yet divergent from it in subtle but significant ways. FollowingTerre des hommeswithAlexandre Chenevertin this study constitutes an interesting exercise, for Saint-Exupéry exerted considerable influence on Roy’s thought and pen, and clear affinities exist between each of their bodies of writing.

5 Gouverneurs de la rosée from: Aphorism in the Francophone Novel of the Twentieth Century
Abstract: In a study subtitled the “Life and Work of Jacques Roumain” Carolyn Fowler consolidates key information from a disparate secondary literature, examines significant new primary sources, and conducts interviews in order to provide a reliable overview of the Haitian author’s career. She echoes a unified critical view that Roumain’s final work, Gouverneurs de la rosée,represents a synthesis and a pinnacle within his literary production (248–9, 253–4).

7 La Route des Flandres from: Aphorism in the Francophone Novel of the Twentieth Century
Abstract: The all too brief pages allotted here to Claude Simon’s best-known work will run counter to the critical mainstream, which posits the impracticability of establishing meaning from this novel’s narrative sequences. J.A.E. Loubère offers a tidy summary of the prevailing view of the secondary literature: “Far from bringing elucidation, the text [Simon] elaborates refuses to resolve itself in information. It demonstrates instead that it is the enemy of information, either because of its power to breed new texts ... or because of its tendency to peter out and vanish in the deserts of the imagination” (102). Immediately following this statement,

8 Présence de la mort from: Aphorism in the Francophone Novel of the Twentieth Century
Abstract: In one of the more recent overviews of Ramuz’s work David Be van devotes only a single line to Prèsence de la mort(59). Instead, he turns his attention to three novels of the author’s mature period:La Grande Peur dans la montagne (1926), Farinet ou la fausse monnaie (1932),andDerborence(1934). Bevan and many other critics consider these later works to be Ramuz’s finest.

9 Neige noire from: Aphorism in the Francophone Novel of the Twentieth Century
Abstract: The critical bibliography at the end of a selection of Hubert Aquin’s essays, published in 1982 under the title Blocs erratiques,lists well over a hundred studies of various lengths on the author’s work. A perusal of the topics covered indicates something of a critical morass.

4 F(R)ICTIONS: from: Gender and Narrativity
Author(s) Godard Barbara
Abstract: The border/play characteristic of contemporary women’s parodic re/- writing of fictional genres reveals engagement with narrative as a critical strategy designed to expose the positioning of woman as silent other, on whose mutilated body narrative is constructed in dominant (patriarchal) discourse, and to posit alternate positionings for women as subjects producing themselves in/by language. What feminist theory has shown is that strategies of writing and reading are forms of cultural resistance. They work to turn dominant discourses inside out and challenge theory in its own terms, the terms of a semiotic space constructed in language. They do so by unfixing

8 ANDROGYNOUS REALISM IN HEINRICH VON KLEIST’S “DIE HEILIGE CÄCILIE ODER DIE GEWALT DER MUSIK (EINE LEGENDE)” from: Gender and Narrativity
Author(s) Bohm Arnd
Abstract: Relatively neglected by critics in comparison to others of his works, Kleist’s story with the elaborate tripartite title, which can be approximately translated into English as “Saint Cecilia, or the Power of Music (A Legend),” has begun to attract increasing attention. To some extent, this is due to the fact that the other works have been examined and reexamined with such exhausting intensity that a turn to lesser-known texts is inevitable. But it is also the case that, among Kleist’s puzzling prose, this story stands out for its strangeness. What is it about? What is its “message”? In this case,

CHAPTER SEVEN Jacques Soustelle: from: Political Ecumenism
Abstract: Born in Montpellier on 3 February 1912 to a working-class Catholic father and a Protestant mother, Jacques Soustelle was baptized in the Reformed communion. Although as an adult he drifted away from his childhood faith, Soustelle always saw himself as shaped by the Huguenot tradition. He never forgot early memories of itinerant lay preachers who travelled door-to-door throughout the Protestant heartland in the Cévennes distributing tracts with their message of eternal salvation. In writing about his wartime commitment to Free France, Soustelle recalls taking heart from these sometimes solitary pilgrims:

1 Contemplation and the Dominican Vocation from: Contemplation and Incarnation
Abstract: A THEOLOGY IS BORN NOT in a vacuum but as a result of an encounter. This encounter then reveals a vocation. In looking for the traces of such an encounter‚ in looking for the origin of vocation‚ and hence for the roots of a theology‚ there are always the dangers of psychologism‚ of reducing the objective quality of a body of work to a subjective and perhaps even sentimental experience. Yet it is the very objectivity of a work that points to its living source. These roots would remain secret and hidden were it not for these pointers.

1 Horizons of Justice: from: Imagining Justice
Abstract: Academic postcolonialism has generally neglected to address the politics of reconciliation, despite the recent emergence of reconciliation political programs and movements in a wide range of national and international contexts. However, one obligation of postcolonial work is to “fully recognize” what Gyan Prakash refers to as “another history of agency and knowledge alive in the dead weight of the colonial past.”¹ This task of recognition necessitates understanding acts of anti-colonial dissent not only as theorizable but as fully productive, conceptually constructive theoretical “events” in their own right. Prakash argues that we might begin to trace the emergence of postcolonial theory

3 Vigils amid Violence: from: Imagining Justice
Abstract: In their articulation of the hope that forgiveness and reconciliation are possible in the midst of overwhelming violence, the reflections above by Michael Ondaatje concerning the reception of Anil’s Ghostmay at first seem radically at odds with the vision of the work. For in capturing the despondency surrounding a war to which there seems no foreseeable end, Ondaatje’s novel exposes the intractableness of a conflict that arguably rules out the possibility of a different, more peaceful future.

Book Title: Chora 2-Intervals in the Philosophy of Architecture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Parcell Stephen
Abstract: Karsten Harries provides a new and long-overdue reading of Martin Heidegger's well-known essay "Building Dwelling Thinking." Donald Kunze and Stephen Parcell consider possibilities of meaningful architectural space for a visual culture, continuing themes they addressed in Chora 1. Further reflections on the spaces of literature, cinema, and architecture include an interview with French writer and film maker Alain Robbe-Grillet and articles by Dagmar Motycka Weston on the surrealist city, Tracey Eve Winton on the museum as a paradigmatic modern building, and Terrance Galvin on spiritual space in the works of Jean Cocteau. Jean-Pierre Chupin and Bram Ratner explore historical themes in their essays on French Renaissance architect Philibert de l'Orme and the Jewish myth of the Golem. Gregory Caicco addresses ethical questions in his essay on the Greek agora and the death of Socrates, as does Lily Chi in her meditation on the critical issue of use in architectural works. A concern with architectural representation and generative strategies for the making of architecture is present throughout, especially in the essay by Joanna Merwood on the provocative House by British artist Rachel Whiteread.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt8180c

3 Hermes’ Laugh: from: Chora 2
Author(s) Chupin Jean-Pierre
Abstract: IT IS A HISTORICAL FACT, however strange, that architects often associate architectural creation with “divine” venture. From Plato to Vitruvius, and from Philibert de l’Orme to Le Corbusier, there is a recurrent and symbolic set of images that connects the architect’s role and the intervention of a demiurge. Although for most historians these images are understood as common metaphors, they are rarely recognized as partaking in an overall analogical framework of thoughts. Beyond religious beliefs or dogmatic standpoints, it is this peculiar way of thinking about architecture called “analogical” that I will be exploring in this paper. Numerous analogies can

7 Concrete Blonde: from: Chora 2
Author(s) Merwood Joanna
Abstract: Houseis the concrete cast of the inside of a nineteenth-century house in Hackney, East London, the last of a row of terrace houses demolished to make way for a park. The work, a sculpture by

10 The Legend of the Golem from: Chora 2
Author(s) Ratner Bram
Abstract: IN THE HEBREW YEAR 5340 (1580 C.E.) the great Rabbi Judah Loew ben Bezalel, or as he is more commonly known, the Maharal¹ of Prague, undertook the making of a Golem to combat the continued attempt of the fanatical priest Thaddeus to cause mischief toward the Jewish community of Prague. On the second day of the month of Adar, after midnight, Rabbi Loew took his son-in-law, Isaac ben Simson, and his pupil, Jacob ben Chayim Sasson, to the outskirts of town and the banks of the river. There, by torchlight and amid the chanting of Psalms, they worked to form

Book Title: Figuring Grief-Gallant, Munro, and the Poetics of Elegy
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): SMYTHE KAREN E.
Abstract: The title, Figuring Grief, refers to the narrative process whereby mourning is depicted. In her textual analysis, Smythe explores various connections between representation and consolation. Drawing on genre and narratological theory, she outlines the development of the "fiction-elegy" as a sub-genre and suggests that the modernist writings of Woolf and Joyce are paradigmatic examples of the form. She then uses these paradigms as suggestive "reading models" for the interpretation of works by Gallant, Munro, and other contemporary fiction-elegists. Figuring Grief offers new readings of specific works and suggests that new ways of reading are both demanded and rewarded by a poetics of elegy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt818sp

3 Gallant and the Ethics of Reading from: Figuring Grief
Abstract: In chapter 2 I argued that Gallant figures the elegiac in her fiction in a variety of ways, including the use of plot as trope, experimentation with contrasting points of view, and the subversion of sequential chronology. The work of mourning is demonstrated in Gallant’s stories to be a form of “narrative thinking,” which, according to John Robinson and Linda Hawpe, “consists of creating a fit between a situation and the story schema. Establishing a fit, that is, making a story out of experience, is a heuristic process,” they continue, “one which requires skill, judgment, and experience.”¹ The reader, too,

6 Forms of Loss: from: Figuring Grief
Abstract: In this study I have argued that Mavis Gallant and Alice Munro have adapted conventions of elegy within fictional frameworks, a practice refined by modernist fiction-elegists such as Virginia Woolf and James Joyce. A digressive structure, the focus on the self (on the narrator-elegist or character-elegist as survivor), and a tendency towards selfreflexivity are characteristics of both modern and late modern fiction-elegies. But where Woolf and Joyce employ self-reflexivity as a trope of consolation and suggest that the work of art is an immortal and idealized product achieved at the end of the work of mourning, Gallant and Munro use

CHAPTER TWO Smoke Signals from: Ghost Brothers
Abstract: Infinitely layered echoes of past, present, and future phantoms, which reflect the interaction and transformations of internalized life and communal events within the self and society, take place within the crux of a multilevel framework that extends through time and space. Twins held the keys to one another’s lives, but their relationship also symbolically represents the communal reality. I look at communal twinship on a macro level, examining it via time and space. First, I look at political and socio-economic twinships and their demographic character. Then I map out the geographical context and spatial negotiations within which the interethnic dialogue

CHAPTER EIGHT Outside in, inside out from: Ghost Brothers
Abstract: Immigration strains the capacities of those who undergo it. Few immigrate without some strong necessity or ideal urging them to disrupt their at least nominally supportive home life. Immigrants become stuck in the liminal, but isolated, passageway between two worlds until they can reorient themselves, reach out to an additional social network, and re-establish themselves. The patchy and ambiguous nature of French settlement in Native North America catalyzed the anomie reverberating within the individual, who mourned the absence of his/her lost world and was surrounded by surprises in the new. The multilayered dialogue set up through twinning with Native nations

4 Which Ontology after Metaphysics? from: Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) Valgenti Robert T.
Abstract: One of Gianni Vattimo’s indisputable accomplishments over the past three decades has been to carry forward the “urbanizing of Heidegger” (to use the famous expression of Jürgen Habermas) initiated by the hermeneutics of Hans-Georg Gadamer in his truly epochemachendwork of 1960 –Truth and Method. To that end, Vattimo’s philosophical program – expressed by the very successful formula “weak thought,” but in my view more adequately summed up in the expression “ontology of decline” – has made crucial contributions to the international scene, thanks to the initial convergence and to the subsequent uninterrupted confrontation with the neopragmatism of Richard Rorty. Based on

13 Looking Back on Gadamer’s Hermeneutics from: Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) Scott Jim
Abstract: Jürgen Habermas occasionally characterized Hans-Georg Gadamer’s work with gentle irony as the “urbanization of Heideggerian parochialism.” As a student, I myself took a lively interest in this kind of controversy. The so-called Frankfurt School retreated from neo-Marxism to a Kantianizing theory of speech acts. On the other hand, the Heideggerian efforts on behalf of ontology merged into the universe of hermeneutic interpretation. I heard a lot of tales from inside the Heidegger School and met and fully admired the master himself on his sporadic visits to seminars that he held for his disciples in Heidelberg. Habermas participated in my PHD

19 Postmodern Disarmament from: Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) PERL JEFFREY M .
Abstract: A disclaimer, to begin with: I was trained not as a philosopher but as a scholar of comparative literature, and Italian is not among the languages I read. Neither Gadamer, Gianni Vattimo’s teacher – nor Heidegger, Gadamer’s – is a thinker who means much to my own work or had any place in my education. I find aspects of the hermeneutic enterprise counterproductive. My relationship to Vattimo, therefore, is unobvious, yet definable precisely. Our relation is editorial.

CHAPTER TWO Phenomenology from: Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty
Abstract: Many philosophers influenced the direction of Merleau-Ponty's thinking, as was shown in Chapter 1, but the single most significant influence was that of Edmund Husserl (1859-1938) and the “phenomenological” school that he founded. If we are to understand Merleau-Ponty properly, we have to see him above all in relation to phenomenology. At least in his major works, he certainly saw himself as a phenomenologist, and even the other influences on his thought were filtered through his conception of phenomenology. And, clearly, if we are to understand Merleau-Ponty's relationship to Husserlian phenomenology, we must first say something about Husserl's own thought.

Book Title: Diasporic Feminist Theology-Asia and Theopolitical Imagination
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Kang Namsoon
Abstract: How do we navigate the question of identity in the fluid and pluralist conditions of postmodern society? Even more, how do we articulate identity as a defining particularity in the disappearance of borders, boundaries, and spaces in an increasingly globalist world? What constitutes identity and the formation of narratives under such conditions? How do these issues affect not only discursive practices, but theological and ethical construction and practice? This volumes explores these issues in depth. Diasporic Feminist Theology attempts to construct feminist theology by adopting diaspora as a theopolitical and ethical metaphor. Namsoon Kang here revisits and reexamines today’s significant issues such as identity politics, dislocation, postmodernism, postcolonialism, neoempire, Asian values, and constructs diasporic, transethnic, and glocal feminist theological discourses that create spaces of transformation, reconciliation, hospitality, worldliness, solidarity, and border-traversing. This work draws on diverse sources from contemporary critical discourses of diaspora studies, cultural studies, ethnic studies, postmodernism, postcolonialism, and feminism and feminist theology from a transterritorial space. This book is a landmark work, providing a comprehensive discourse for feminist theology today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0snb

1 Diasporic Feminist Theology from: Diasporic Feminist Theology
Abstract: One must begin somewhere. In order to write or express, one must find one’s point of entry. I find my point of entry in the adjective diasporicbecause the diasporic has been a way of seeing and experiencing where I am and what I am: an academic in the United States, who could not find an academic home in her own place of birth. Here the binary approach to the issue of diaspora in terms of voluntariness or involuntariness does not work because the two poles inextricably intertwine. In diasporic life, the both sides are somehow always an aspect of

1 The Universe and Humanity from: The Sense of the Universe
Abstract: Contemporary physical cosmology is a well-established and vast enterprise that includes astronomical observations, space programs, research institutions, and funding strategies. Cosmology develops fast: numerous conferences, workshops, and public lectures are held constantly, resulting in further publications of collective volumes, and numerous new studies, academic and popular, appear daily on the Internet and in bookstores. Apart from physical scientists, cosmology attracts historians and philosophers of science, as well as millions of those who adore science and trust its final word on the nature of things. This is a dynamic set of enquiries about the world around us that constitutes an integral

Book Title: Augustine's Theology of Preaching- Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): SANLON PETER T.
Abstract: Scholarship has painted many pictures of Augustine—the philosophical theologian, the refuter of heresy, or contributor to doctrines like Original Sin—but the picture of Augustine as preacher, says Sanlon, has been seriously neglected. When academics marginalize the Sermones ad Populum, the real Augustine is not presented accurately. In this study, Sanlon does more, however, than rehabilitate a neglected view of Augustine. How do the theological convictions that Augustine brought to his preaching challenge, sustain, or shape our work today? By presenting Augustine’s thought on preaching to contemporary readers Sanlon contributes a major new piece to the ongoing reconsideration of preaching in the modern day, a consideration that is relevant to all branches of the twenty-first century church.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0t0m

3 Training Preachers: from: Augustine's Theology of Preaching
Abstract: Though short, De Doctrinais a dense work. We cannot aim to do more than outline how our terms of investigation feature here, and suggest how

Book Title: Hope in Action-Subversive Eschatology in the Theology of Edward Schillebeeckx and Johann Baptist Metz
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Rodenborn Steven M.
Abstract: This volume contends against a major lacuna in the story of eschatology in the twentieth century by offering a historical and comparative analysis of Edward Schillebeeckx’s prophetic eschatology and Johann Baptist Metz’s apocalyptic eschatology with the goal of identifying relative advantages and limitations of these divergent eschatological frameworks for rendering a Christian account of hope that prompts action in the public arena. Rodenborn provides a fresh angle on eschatologies of hope, bringing to the fore two Catholic theologians whose influences range from Vatican II to Latin American liberation theology. Hope in Action offers an innovative contribution to the theological account of the emergence of European political theologies and the role of eschatology as a practical and destabilizing theological category.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0t4j

4 Schillebeeckx's Prophetic Eschatology: from: Hope in Action
Abstract: In chapter 3, we watched as Schillebeeckx worked to identify a critical and productive orientation for the Christian’s hope. It was out of this interest that his massive christological project, the story of the eschatological prophet, emerged. It was also within the context of this project that Schillebeeckx once again engaged the Christian claim that Jesus has universal significance for all of human history, considered in chapter 2. In returning to this claim in the 1970s, however, Schillebeeckx would directly confront the questions of whether and how we can speak of the universal significance of any human person and whether

6 Metz’s Apocalyptic Theology of History: from: Hope in Action
Abstract: As we have just seen, Metz turned to a practical fundamental theology developed through the categories of memory, narrative, and solidarity in search of the resources necessary to disrupt the conditions of modernity and to revivify an eschatological hope. It is to that central focus of this chapter—Metz’s apocalyptic eschatology—that we now turn. As we shall see, Metz located in the apocalyptic the fundamental temporal framework through which a subversive expectation for the future becomes possible within the historical context of modernity and, ultimately, postmodernity. He became convinced that in the face of persistent and intractable suffering, an

Book Title: Christian Doctrine and the Grammar of Difference-A Contribution to Feminist Systematic Theology
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): McRandal Janice
Abstract: Christian Doctrine and the Grammar of Difference argues that the most potent and resourceful theological response to the challenging questions of gender and difference is to be found in a retrieval of a doctrinal framework for feminist theology. In particular, it is suggested that a doctrinal narrative of creation, fall, and redemption—underpinned by the doctrinal grammar of the Trinity—provides resources to resolve the theological impasse of difference in contemporary feminist theology. The divine economy reveals a God who enters into history and destabilizes fixed binaries and oppressive categories. The biblical narrative discloses a subtle yet potent fluidity to the Triune relationships. As created subjects—precisely in our difference—we are sustained, affirmed, and drawn back into the Triune life. The subtleties of divine transgression are already recognized in the patterns of the liturgy, in prayer, and in practices of contemplation. Here, bodies not only encounter the transgressive love of God but are enabled to inhabit their differentiated humanity with distinctiveness and grace. The grammar of Christian faith cannot ultimately be uncovered except in prayer, opened beyond itself to a source of life and giving.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0tfw

Book Title: By Bread Alone-The Bible through the Eyes of the Hungry
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Pilarski Ahida Calderón
Abstract: Important ecclesiastical documents have stressed the urgency of world hunger and put in the foreground its natural and historical causes, from famine to global austerity measures and welfare. These concerns have not always affected the way the biblical texts themselves have been read, however. Here, inspired by calls, from Dorothee Sölle and Kathleen O Connor, biblical scholars apply a "hermeneutics of hunger" to the Bible, taking readings of texts from the Old and New Testaments alike on the premise that human hunger and want are urgent concerns that rightly shape the work of interpretation. Too often, however, as the authors show, biblical texts—like Jesus' well-known words that humans do not live "by bread alone"—have been used to marginalize such concerns within religious communities. Their essays here explore the dynamics of hunger and its causation in ancient Israel and the Greco-Roman world and challenge readers to take seriously the centrality of hunger concerns in the Bible.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0tp8

5 Social and Theological Aspects of Hunger in Sirach from: By Bread Alone
Author(s) Gregory Bradley C.
Abstract: Ben Sira was a scribe who lived and worked in Jerusalem in the late third and early second centuries bce, when Judea was under the rule first of the Ptolemies and then the Seleucids. While his primary mode of instruction was oral, near the end of his life, perhaps around 180 bce, he set his teachings into written form.¹ Ben Sira’s work is characteristic of “traditional wisdom” and he was deeply influenced by the book of Proverbs in both form and content. While the focus here will be on the role of hunger in Ben Sira’s thought, it will be

10 2 Thessalonians vs. the Ataktoi: from: By Bread Alone
Author(s) Wilson-Reitz Megan T.
Abstract: The remarks in Second Thessalonians about the ataktoi, in particular 2 Thess. 3:10 (“anyone unwilling to work should not eat”), have received great attention from those who use the Bible to promote particular political and economic perspectives. In the United States, verse 10 has been quoted in support of a surprisingly diverse array of political and economic viewpoints, including the Populist platform of 1892, socialist John Spargo, and laissez-faire capitalist William Graham Sumner.¹ Max Weber argued that this passage is at the heart of the Protestant work ethic, which he saw as a necessary condition for the rise of American

3 Avery Dulles from: Liturgy as Revelation
Abstract: Avery Dulles wrote one of the first and best critical appraisals of René Latourelle’s Théologie de la Révélation. Not only did he recognise the work as an “enormous step forward,”¹ but he recognized in it “a number of major questions . . . which would seem to call for concentrated labour on the part of Catholic theologians.”² Whether his extensive writings in fundamental theology are a conscious response to the invitation he recognized in Latourelle’s work remains uncertain, but the points of issue that he identifies in his 1964 article “The Theology of Revelation” are ones that remain central to

4 Salvatore Marsili from: Liturgy as Revelation
Abstract: Achille Maria Triacca suggests that “it would be worth writing a biography of Marsili to show its course parallel with the history of the liturgical movement in Italy, in a way that elevates the contribution to liturgical renewal of the meritorious Benedictine.”¹ Though far from a biography, it is hoped that this chapter will make apparent some of the more important connections between the work of other theologians of the liturgical renewal and the particular contribution of Salvatore Marsili. Yet there are other interesting parallels to be drawn from the biography of Marsili that are perhaps more pertinent to this

Conclusion from: Liturgy as Revelation
Abstract: It was always the advice of my teachers never to introduce new material into the conclusion of an essay. On this occasion I will risk ignoring what I recognize is generally sound advice for two reasons. To have offered a study that has reflected at length on the relationship between revelation and the liturgy in the period of Vatican II without significant mention of Joseph Ratzinger seems clumsy, if not foolhardy.¹ Moreover, perhaps the questions and tensions that can be found in Ratzinger’s work in regard to our subject both identify the key issue clearly and also indicate avenues of

Book Title: Postmodernity and Univocity-A Critical Account of Radical Orthodoxy and John Duns Scotus
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Horan Daniel P.
Abstract: Nearly twenty-five years ago, John Milbank inaugurated Radical Orthodoxy, one of the most significant and influential theological movements of the last two decades. In Milbank’s Theology and Social Theory, he constructed a sweeping theological genealogy of the origins of modernity and the emergence of the secular, counterposed by a robust retrieval of traditional orthodoxy as the critical philosophical and theological mode of being in the postmodern world. That genealogy turns upon a critical point—the work of John Duns Scotus as the starting point of modernity and progenitor of a raft of philosophical and theological ills that have prevailed since. Milbank’s account has been disseminated proliferously through Radical Orthodoxy and even beyond and is largely uncontested in contemporary theology. The present volume conducts a comprehensive examination and critical analysis of Radical Orthodoxy’s use and interpretation of John Duns Scotus. Daniel P. Horan, OFM, offers a substantial challenge to the narrative of Radical Orthodoxy’s idiosyncratic take on Scotus and his role in ushering in the philosophical age of the modern. This volume not only corrects the received account of Scotus but opens a constructive way forward toward a positive assessment and appropriation of Scotus’s work for contemporary theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0v6z

1 Radical Orthodoxy’s Use of John Duns Scotus from: Postmodernity and Univocity
Abstract: The establishment of an explicit genealogy that traces modernity, and, subsequently, the concept of nihilism as substantial res, back to John Duns Scotus (d. 1308) occurred through an evolutionary process. In recent history, this genealogy finds its advent in the seminal work of John Milbank, and it is upon the foundation of his work that others have constructed edifices built on the narrative of Scotus astheprotomodern antagonist. Displacing the early modern Enlightenment thinkers, Scotus serves as the inaugurator of all that is ill with modernity. While Milbank is correct in pointing to the existence of scholarly opinions prior

2 The Reach of Radical Orthodoxy’s Influence from: Postmodernity and Univocity
Abstract: One of the more interesting aspects of Radical Orthodoxy’s interpretation of John Duns Scotus has been the unexpected and at times unattributed influence that it has had on so many other thinkers and their projects, particularly in the English-speaking world. Whereas one might naturally anticipate that some academic theologians would appropriate the thought of their Radical Orthodoxy colleagues, what is surprising is the way in which the Scotus Story has made its way into the work of historians, philosophers, and popular religious writers beyond the confines of the academic theological guild. As early as ten years after the launch of

3 Major Critiques and Analysis of Radical Orthodoxy’s Use of Scotus from: Postmodernity and Univocity
Abstract: In the previous two chapters, we explored the genesis and subsequent development of what I have termed the Scotus Story in Radical Orthodoxy and beyond. Tracing the scripting of the Scotus as protomodern antagonist narrative, we came to see the increasing degree of influence and ubiquity the story has gained. Through the work of John Milbank, Catherine Pickstock, and others, many contemporary theologians have adopted the Scotus Story. As we saw in chapter 2, this influential narrative has gone largely unquestioned and unanalyzed, especially by those who have adopted it in their own work. There exists little opposition to the

4 Toward A Correct Reading of Scotus’s Univocity from: Postmodernity and Univocity
Abstract: Having examined the arguments put forward by the Radical Orthodox theologians in chapter 1, the ways in which the Scotus Story has been appropriated in chapter 2, and the critiques of that reading of John Duns Scotus in chapter 3, it is necessary for us to explore the doctrine of univocity as Scotus himself presents it. Following the substantial critique leveled against the Radical Orthodoxy reading and subsequent interpretation of this theory of univocity, it is important to present a reading of the subtle doctor’s work that provides a more accurate account of Scotus’s position in contrast to the Radical

Book Title: Parables Unplugged-Reading the Lukan Parables in Their Rhetorical Context
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Thurén Lauri
Abstract: For far too long, Lauri Thurén argues, the parables of Jesus have been read either as allegories encoding Christian theology—including the theological message of one or another Gospel writer—or as tantalizing clues to the authentic voice of Jesus. Thurén proposes instead to read the parables “unplugged” from any assumptions beyond those given in the narrative situation in the text, on the common-sense premise that the very form of the parable works to propose a (sometimes startling) resolution to a particular problem. Thurén applies his method to the parables in Luke with some surprising results involving the Evangelist’s overall narrative purposes and the discrete purposes of individual parables in supporting the authority of Jesus, proclaiming God’s love, exhorting steadfastness, and so on. Eschatological and allegorical readings are equally unlikely, according to Thurén’s results. This study is sure to spark learned discussion among scholars, preachers, and students for years to come.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0vdv

2 The Bad Samaritan (10:25-37) from: Parables Unplugged
Abstract: The parable in 10:30b-35 is often used for purposes that have little relevance to the situation described in the framework narrative (10:25-30a, 36-37). When it is exploited as a source of information about the historical Jesus and his sociohistorical environment,

5 The Wicked Tenants (20:9-19) from: Parables Unplugged
Abstract: The parable of the Wicked Tenantssuffers from the too-obvious christological interpretation and too-alluring intertextual and historical connections, which have left the actual story in the shadow. Thus the attempt to look behind all the extraneous material to see how the story is designed in order to persuade its actual recipients, the audience of the Lukan Jesus and the readers of the Lukan work, is intriguing.

Book Title: Walking with the Mud Flower Collective-God's Fierce Whimsy and Dialogic Theological Method
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Jost Stina Busman
Abstract: Arguing for a retrieval of the landmark work, God’s Fierce Whimsy, Stina Busman Jost establishes the critical importance of this volume for the construction of a dialogic theological method. This is accomplished through a close reading of God’s Fierce Whimsy in which the author identifies key methodological characteristics informing the volume’s formation. Critical importance also is established through interviews with the volume’s authors, the Mud Flower Collective—which included Katie G. Cannon, Beverly W. Harrison, Carter Heyward, Ada María Isasi-Díaz, Bess B. Johnson (Delores Williams), Mary D. Pellauer, and Nancy D. Richardson. Undergirding this endeavor is a recognition of the theoretical importance of difference to the project of theological construction and the vital form of the dialogic as constitutive of theological practice; this is carried forward through engagement with the pivotal theorists Martin Buber and Mikhail Bakhtin, who helped pioneer the philosophical and literary critical importance of otherness, difference, and dialogue. Finally, the author constructively engages recent developments in feminist theologies and postcolonial theories—ultimately making the argument that a dialogic theological method is relevant for the doing of theology today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0vfb

Introduction: from: Walking with the Mud Flower Collective
Abstract: What happens when seven scholars sit down face-to-face and commit to do theology collaboratively with their differences on the table? Are their differences minimized? Championed? Moreover, what is their method for such a task? Do they end up following old systems of constructing theology? Or do they forge a new methodological path? These are the questions I will take up in this book. Specifically, this work is a critical investigation of God’s Fierce Whimsy—a challenging and innovative text written and published in the 1980s by a group of seven women who identified themselves as the Mud Flower Collective.¹ This

3 Foundational Dialogic Characteristics in Godʹs Fierce Whimsy from: Walking with the Mud Flower Collective
Abstract: Dialogue is a term used and affirmed frequently in theology published today. Yet such usage and affirmation do not always translate into actual evidence of dialogue in published work. Undeniably, dialogue may be the means by which a theological work comes into being as a published product,¹ but the emphasis and priority often lie not on this process but on the goal—the end result that entails distinct, definitive claims that can be accessed online or sent to press. In other words, as it concerns theological method, most theological work is primarily teleological in focus,² and while such an approach

2 The “Inside” and the “Outside” of Everything from: The World in the Trinity
Abstract: At the end of the last chapter, I indicated the problem posed by the wave-particle complementarity (or, in the view of some, duality) for theoretical physicists working in quantum mechanics. A scientist can no longer stand apart from and objectively analyze the empirical data as was generally assumed to be the case in early modern natural science. The scientist, with his choice of experiment and equipment for accurate measurement of the data, is an integral part of the experiment and the results thereby achieved. She also has to take into account her own finite powers of perception and understanding. As

8 Miracles and the Problem of Evil from: The World in the Trinity
Abstract: It might initially seem strange to link analysis of the possibility of miracles, that is, special divine interventions into the workings of the natural order, with the longstanding philosophical problem of evil in a book dedicated to a process-oriented understanding of the God-world relationship. For, if the symbiotic relationship between the natural and the supernatural order of events is working properly, then there should be no need for God to suspend or even to tinker with the normal workings of nature so as to help human beings to deal with some catastrophic series of events in the world of nature

Literary Scrivenings 3: from: The Future of the Word
Abstract: An unlikely juxtaposition of novels works toward reconciliation and forgiveness in the final scrivenings and the conclusion of this book: Francine Rivers’s Redeeming Love(1991/1997), a Christian inspirational romance novel that retells the biblical book of Hosea in gold-rush California and Vladimir Nabokov’sLolita(1955), the fictional memoir and apologia of a pedophile. Though it seems reasonably assured that these two texts may never elsewhere come into as close proximity as they do in this book, they do have a few things in common. Both novels take up childhood sexual slavery and pedophilia; both push boundaries; both are significantly revised

Book Title: Antiochene Theoria in the Writings of Theodore of Mopsuestia and Theodoret of Cyrus- Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Perhai Richard J.
Abstract: Biblical scholars have often contrasted the exegesis of the early church fathers from the eastern region and “school” of Syrian Antioch against that of the school of Alexandria. The Antiochenes have often been described as strictly historical-literal exegetes in contrast to the allegorical exegesis of the Alexandrians. Patristic scholars now challenge those stereotypes, some even arguing that few differences existed between the two groups. This work agrees that both schools were concerned with a literal and spiritual reading. But, it also tries to show, through analysis of Theodore and Theodoret’s exegesis and use of the term theoria, that how they integrated the literal-theological readings often remained quite distinct from the Alexandrians. For the Antiochenes, the term theoria did not mean allegory, but instead stood for a range of perceptions—prophetic, christological, and contemporary. It is in these insights that we find the deep wisdom to help modern readers interpret Scripture theologically.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0vzk

2 Theōria in Theodore’s and Theodoret’s Commentaries from: Antiochene Theoria in the Writings of Theodore of Mopsuestia and Theodoret of Cyrus
Abstract: This chapter provides analysis of primary source material in the writings of Theodore of Mopsuestia and Theodoret of Cyrus in order to illustrate and develop a definition of Antiochene theoria—or at leasttheōriaas understood by Theodore and Theodoret. Primary sources for this research include manuscripts of Theodore’s and Theodoret’s exegetical works found in the TLG database¹ and in J. P. Migne’sPatrologia Graeca(PG).² These are supplemented with recent translations such as those in the Fathers of the Church (FC) multivolume series and catenae such as the Ancient Christian Commentary on Scripture (ACCS).³

3 Research on Antiochene Theōria since 1991 from: Antiochene Theoria in the Writings of Theodore of Mopsuestia and Theodoret of Cyrus
Abstract: In chapter 2 I surveyed and analyzed the terms theōriaandtheōreōin the commentaries of Theodore and Theodoret. I concluded that they both understandtheōriaandtheōreō, when used as hermeneutical terms, as the contemplative interpretive process enabled by the Holy Spirit and applicable for OT prophets, for NT apostles, as well as for postcanonical interpreters who have faith to see. In comparison, Bradley Nassif concludes that, for John Chrysostom,theōriais broadly defined as “the divine revelation or mystical illumination of spiritual realities which attends the process of inscripturation, interpretation, or homiletical discourse within the framework of Incarnation

Chapter 11 Medicine and the State: from: Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Hashash Yali
Abstract: Feminist and sociology researchers in Israel over the last two decades have consistently claimed that Israeli reproductive policy has always been, and remains, an expression of the State’s nation-building efforts. Within this framework, two main contentions are made: (a) Israel’s reproductive policy primarily aims at winning a “demographic race” against the Palestinian Arabs and is, therefore, pronatalist¹; and (b) Israel, although pronatalist, is equally concerned with the reproduction of the “New Jew,” who exhibits physical and/or cultural attributes that fit Westernized/modernistic qualitative demands.²

Chapter 12 The Mirth of the Clinic: from: Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Kahn Susan Martha
Abstract: Assisted conception is so unprecedented and the consequences for beliefs about reproduction so uncertain that we anthropologists have had our plates full as we try to construct theoretical frameworks with adequate explanatory power. Much of the recent anthropological work in the Israeli context follows these trends, often using Foucauldian frameworks to illuminate the complex social processes inherent in the social uses of new reproductive technologies. I draw particular attention to the works in this volume. To date, however, little has been written about the routinization of conception enabled by these technologies and the everyday experience of the people who work

Chapter 13 Between Reproductive Citizenship and Consumerism: from: Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Remennick Larissa
Abstract: Some recent sociological analyses of reproduction approached the relations between women as mothers and various social institutions (legal and medical systems, labor market, social welfare, mass media, etc.) within the continuum between reproductive citizenship, on one hand, and individualism/consumerism, on the other. Thus, Bryan Turner (2001) has defined the concept of reproductive citizenship as a route to active social participation through reproduction, all the more important in the times of general erosion of other traditional forms of citizenship (such as worker-citizen and warrior-citizen). Reproductive citizenship is a reflection of nationalism and demographic interests of the state, which has a stake

Introduction from: Time and History
Author(s) Rüsen Jörn
Abstract: For most academics all over the world the concept of history is deeply influenced by the feature of historical studies as an academic discipline. The world is full of very different manifestations of history: oral narratives, monuments, exhibitions, museums, films, street names, advertisements, not to mention the manifold presentations of the past in literature, music, and the Fine Arts. Nevertheless, at least in the minds of the professionals, history is the realm of the work of the historians. And here we get the impression of a great similarity and uniformity. The professionals all over the world follow similar concepts and

CHAPTER 1 Making Sense of Time: from: Time and History
Author(s) Rüsen Jörn
Abstract: The following argumentation is developed in the context of research dedicated to historiography in a comparative perspective.¹ Such a comparison can be easily done within a cultural context that is grounded on the same or at least on similar principles of understanding the past as history. Substantial comparative research and interpretation of Western historical thinking has been done. It is much more difficult to compare treatments of the past that lead to historical thinking in an intercultural perspective. Not much work has been done in this field; and such work as there is tends to take the most advanced form

CHAPTER 3 The Diffuse in Testimonies from: Culture, Rhetoric and the Vicissitudes of Life
Author(s) Weine Stevan M.
Abstract: Testimony is when survivors of traumas tell their story. This text considers several literary models for approaching how survivors of historical traumas may give their testimonies. Reading W.G. Sebald and rethinking his notion of the diffuseilluminates what historical traumas ask of the individual survivor giving testimony and of all those who seek to respond to survivors’ traumas with a narrative. Applying Mikhail Bakhtin’s theory of the dialogic narrative could assist survivors and those working with them in producing testimonies that engage the diffuse through better embodying the polyphonic, dialogic, unfinalizable nature of historical traumas. This text closes with an

CHAPTER 4 Medical Rhetoric in the U.S. and Africa: from: Culture, Rhetoric and the Vicissitudes of Life
Author(s) Biesele Megan
Abstract: A rhetorical subtitle for this paper might be ‘The Ubiquity of Persuasion in Medicine’. As in most other areas of human life, it is difficult, in healing performance and discourse, to get away from the primacy of nuanced communication about socialized belief. Thinking back some twelve years after my original writing in light of both anthropological work on Ju/’hoan San texts of many kinds and the complex indigenous politics which increasingly inform their production and use, I feel that social anthropology is nothing if not combined with rhetorical awareness.

CHAPTER 7 Ordeals of Language from: Culture, Rhetoric and the Vicissitudes of Life
Author(s) Basso Ellen B.
Abstract: There is a kind of rhetorical functioning in the disorderly zones of human life, which sustains and transforms the persons involved. Linguistic operations at the edges of disorder appear as we engage our human deceptive and imaginative abilities, our abilities to produce alternatives, to resist what we learn is expected of us. In these zones, discomfort with the limits of our own cultures motivates tropological experiments, ‘the sleight of hand at the limit of a text’, as Voloshinov wrote. Here especially, the rhetorics of emotion work to transform socioemotional reality, having a critical and often unwitting impact on social life.

CHAPTER 8 Inventions of Hyperbolic Culture from: Culture, Rhetoric and the Vicissitudes of Life
Author(s) Cintron Ralph
Abstract: If there is a theorist who worked both anthropologically and rhetorically and deserves to be called a major theorist of rhetoric culture , it is Michel de Certeau. Given that this paper is about 9/11 and the dialectics of modernity, a particular passage of his seems clairvoyant. At some point in his career he stood atop the World Trade Center and later wrote:

Book Title: Hannah Arendt and the Uses of History-Imperialism, Nation, Race, and Genocide
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Stone Dan
Abstract: Hannah Arendt (1906-1975) first argued that there were continuities between the age of European imperialism and the age of fascism in Europe in The Origins of Totalitarianism(1951). She claimed that theories of race, notions of racial and cultural superiority, and the right of 'superior races' to expand territorially were themes that connected the white settler colonies, the other imperial possessions, and the fascist ideologies of post-Great War Europe. These claims have rarely been taken up by historians. Only in recent years has the work of scholars such as Jurgen Zimmerer and A. Dirk Moses begun to show in some detail that Arendt was correct.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qcjrb

Introduction from: Hannah Arendt and the Uses of History
Author(s) Stone Dan
Abstract: One hundred years after her birth, Hannah Arendt (1906–1975) scarcely needs the usual sort of introduction, since her work has become so well known of late. Much of it has at least. The point of this collection is to foreground aspects of her work, especially drawn from The Origins of Totalitarianism(1951), which bear on imperialism, slavery, race, and genocide but have been neglected in the general revival of interest in Arendt.

Chapter 5 On Pain of Extinction: from: Hannah Arendt and the Uses of History
Author(s) Barta Tony
Abstract: These are not words that can be found in the first edition of Hannah Arendt’s great work The Origins of Totalitarianism, conceived during the Second World War and published in 1951. In it, the continuities between the age of European imperialism and the age of fascism in Europe were traced through theories of race, notions of racial and cultural superiority, and the right of “superior races” to expand territorially. An idiosyncratic history linking the failure of the bourgeoisie, “the decline of the nation state,” and “the alliance between mob and capital” provided some brilliant insights into the newly baptized phenomenon

Chapter 11 The “Subterranean Stream of Western History”: from: Hannah Arendt and the Uses of History
Author(s) Eaglestone Robert
Abstract: What sort of a book is The Origins of Totalitarianism?One of Arendt’s strongest defenders, Seyla Benhabib, writes that it is too “systematically ambitious and over-interpreted” to be strictly history, “too anecdotal, narrative and ideographic” for social science, and is “too philosophical” for political journalism.¹ In this chapter I will argue that the work is not only, as others have argued, an act of storytelling, but also an attempt to reframe the stories we tell. I use the word “reframe” precisely because of its Heideggerian echoes. As Arendt’s extraordinarily abstruse fable “Heidegger the Fox” suggests and as much scholarship has

Chapter 12 Hannah Arendt and the Old “New Science” from: Hannah Arendt and the Uses of History
Author(s) Maloney Steven Douglas
Abstract: Hannah Arendt’s political writings are frequently analyzed through the lenses of her German-Jewish identity or her tutelage under existenzphilosophers like Martin Heidegger or Karl Jaspers. This approach has been useful in understanding much of what Arendt was trying to offer in her writings, but it also restricts our understanding of Arendt in very significant ways. Too much focus on Arendt’s direct influences (teachers, identity, place in history) has created an environment where academic work on Arendt has tried to dig into every possible historical clue it can to “come to terms” with her thought, in the same way that

Conclusion from: Hannah Arendt and the Uses of History
Author(s) King Richard H.
Abstract: Ironically for a thinker who has been accused—with some justification—of Eurocentrism, the issues Hannah Arendt addressed in The Origins of Totalitarianism(1951) and her work up to the early 1960s are as relevant to the “globalized” world of today as they were to the events of her own time. Already during World War II, Arendt had realized that the West was entering an era that demanded a fundamental rethinking of its basic concepts and traditions. In particular, she contended that “the idea of humanity” entailed the moral necessity of assuming “the obligation of global responsibility . . .

Book Title: Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries-Cultural Meanings, Social Practices
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Paletschek Sylvia
Abstract: Popular presentations of history have recently been discovered as a new field of research, and even though interest in it has been growing noticeably very little has been published on this topic. This volume is one of the first to open up this new area of historical research, introducing some of the work that has emerged in Germany over the past few years. While mainly focusing on Germany (though not exclusively), the authors analyze different forms of popular historiographies and popular presentations of history since 1800 and the interrelation between popular and academic historiography, exploring in particular popular histories in different media and popular historiography as part of memory culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qck1n

3 Popular Presentations of History in the Nineteenth Century: from: Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Paletschek Sylvia
Abstract: The nineteenth century has many names: the century of the bourgeoisie, the century of nations, the century of industrialization, and the century of natural science and technology.¹ However, it might just as well be called the century of history. From the late eighteenth century on, the engagement with the past, and particularly with ‘patriotic’ history ( vaterländischer Geschichte), was an important means of shaping individual and collective identity. After the collapse of theAlte Reich(the Holy Roman Empire of the German Nation) in 1803–1806, and following the Congress of Vienna in 1815, the German states in their new patchwork

CHAPTER 1 The Dance of Rhetoric: from: The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Shotter John
Abstract: Giambattista Vico saw the necessity of this shift long ago, and his work has

CHAPTER 5 The Spellbinding Aura of Culture: from: The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Streck Bernhard
Abstract: This blow by the “philosopher with the hammer” (Nietzsche himself) strikes at least two thousand five hundred years in which, after the discovery of the “naked” truth, it was contrasted with merely fictional worlds—and with the consequential demand that they should disappear. Jacob Taubes dubbed this program Abendländische Eschatologie(1991) and spoke in his last work of the prophetic dictate to replace “speaking” with “saying” (1995: 109)—the Yiddish “tachles,” or the truth of the word standing here in contrast to the Zarathustra as a parody of the Bible and other works of art. “Poets lie,” say intellectuals since

CHAPTER 12 In Defense of the Orator: from: The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Robling Franz-Hubert
Abstract: The following chapter presents the main results of a work in progress intended to reconstruct the ideal of the orator in classical rhetoric.¹ Classical rhetoric, or school rhetoric, is a theory that is mainly based on rhetorical handbooks from Greek and Roman antiquity, and more recent ones written up until the end of the eighteenth century. I shall give here only an outline without detailed references of the sources. My aim is not just the reconstruction of the concept of the orator, but also its application to problems in modern rhetorical research. In many scientific fields today, scholars speak of

Chapter 2 1950s Popular Culture: from: Stardom in Postwar France
Author(s) Weiner Susan
Abstract: ‘Barthes is back’, announced the 4 December 2002 cover story of Les Inrockuptibles,a weekly dedicated to international high and popular culture trends for the would-be plugged-in reader. The occasion was multiple: an exhibition dedicated to this major intellectual at Beaubourg, the revised edition of the complete works, as well as the first-time publication of his Collège de France seminars, also available on CD-ROM (fourteen and twenty-one hours of listening time).¹ Barthes may have been back in France, but for Anglo-Americans, he had never gone away. In academe, Barthes was among the first emissaries of ‘Theory,’ via the English translations

Chapter 7 The Intellectual as Celebrity: from: Stardom in Postwar France
Author(s) Johnson Christopher
Abstract: If there is an intellectual in France who has achieved an iconic status at least comparable to that formerly enjoyed by Jean-Paul Sartre, it is Claude Lévi-Strauss. An anthropologist by training, author of works whose technical complexity exclude all but a small group of specialists, everything would seem to confine this figure to the rarefied sphere of academic exchange. And yet Lévi-Strauss’s reputation extends far beyond his own area of specialisation. In France, at the beginning of the twenty-first century, he has assumed the status of the elder of the tribe, a respected sage, a ‘living national treasure’ (Clément 1993:

CHAPTER 2 Origin and Ritualization of Historical Awareness: from: Dark Traces of the Past
Author(s) Bosse Hans
Abstract: The authenticity of psychoanalytic knowledge can be measured by the change in awareness of the person being analysed,¹ just as the verifiability of group analytical findings is measured by the changes in the group with whom the group analyst works. That is why psychoanalytic or group analytic theory formation has to be related to case studies in order not to be speculative. Due to the brevity of this chapter I cannot undertake any full, systematic ethnohermeneutic reconstruction in the way I would prefer; therefore, I will have to confine myself to proposals, to some case studies published,² and to my

CHAPTER 4 Transgenerational Trauma, Identification, and Historical Consciousness from: Dark Traces of the Past
Author(s) Bohleber Werner
Abstract: The Holocaust, as well as the fate of its survivors and their children, has made us realize that political and social catastrophes, the so-called man-made disasters, unsettle a society in such a persistent and lasting way that we are forced to concern ourselves over several generations with their traumatic effects, and with identifying those effects still detectable beneath the surface of our own time. Generally speaking, the generations cling together, and in so doing the heritage of the earlier one is taken up and reworked by the next. The concrete experiences of that first generation are what the next will

CHAPTER 9 Working toward a Discourse of Shame: from: Dark Traces of the Past
Author(s) Wagner Irmgard
Abstract: Positionality has long been recognized as an important category in historical discourse. An author’s position is even more relevant to a psychoanalytical perspective on historical writing, and particularly so to the topic under investigation here. As a native German scholar living in the United States and working in the field of German language and literature ( Germanistik), I am a priori placed in the dialectic ofeigen(own, innate) andfremd(foreign)—that which pertains to the self versus that which pertains to the other. It is precisely the dialectic of self and other that is constitutive for the discourse of

INTRODUCTION TO PART I from: Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Rapport Nigel
Abstract: The two essays in Part Idescribe human capacities that locate actors beyond the economy; both in the sense of providing an ethnographic fullness to individual lives that exceeds the narrow determinisms of Homo oeconomicus, and in the sense of charting a course to individual lives that sees them escaping the logic of any one economic system or set of relations. Here are Mexican migrants in Canada (Chapter 1) and Canadian students working abroad (Chapter 2) whose ‘liminality’, alike, cannot be construed, conscripted, as serving purely economic calls, whether of nation, family, sector or even global marketplace. An understanding of these

Chapter 1 CONVERSATIONS WITH EULOGIO: from: Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Ferguson Nelson
Abstract: On the other side of the thin polyurethane walls, the breeze is cool and sweet. But here, inside the greenhouse, the air is hot, the humidity stifling. Eulogio and I have been working in this mounting heat for hours, yet what feels like an eternity still lies between now and our lunch break. We work in silence, placing one potted tree after another onto the wagon. Dirt and run-off from the irrigation system mingle with the sweat on our skin until we are both coated with salty mixtures of grime and muck. We struggle to grip the heavy pots, each

Chapter 8 ‘LIVE IN FRAGMENTS NO LONGER’: from: Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Skinner Jonathan
Abstract: As a social science, it is characteristic of anthropology to examine the particularities of human cultures through detailed and nuanced ethnographic investigation (Crapanzano 2004; Abu Lughod 1993). In so doing, a choice is made by anthropologists as to whether or not to deploy etic distinctions between culture and nature and between human and animal – the former with the capacity ‘to produce’ in order to live (Godelier 1986) – or to work from emic constructions of like divisions and the ways in which people locally live by them, or to challenge and contest all such divisions as anthropocentric (Bateson 1999;

1 The Intellectual Pursuit of the Sacred from: Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: The central goal of this book is to map the emergence, trajectory, and influence of a very particular kind of intellectual project that I call mystic Durkheimianism, which unites two seemingly very strange bedfellows: Durkheimian sociology and poststructuralism. An understanding of its existence and influence in the French intellectual world will contribute to a better understanding of some otherwise fairly mysterious facts in intellectual history. Moreover, there are to date no treatments of this important piece of the history of French social theory by a sociologist using sociological terms and tools, and I hope to contribute to the work of

2 Intellectual Production and Interpretation: from: Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: Pierre Bourdieu’s theoretical framework for the study of intellectual production is presented in The Field of Cultural Production

7 Being a Durkheimian Intellectual from: Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: We now have something of a macro-sociological image of the two fields in which our two groups of intellectuals put their ideas into play, as well as information on the masters of ceremonies for the two groups and the central political event that positioned both. However, the reconstruction of their habitusrequires a closer examination of the ways in which the members of the two groups actively viewed and set about the process of constructing identities as intellectuals in the two periods from within more intimate micro-social networks of influences and collaborators and in response to the set of intellectual

12 The Sacred in Poststructuralist Thought from: Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: With the Durkheimian group, it was necessary to do a significant amount of work to demonstrate the ways in which their intellectual work constituted a statement about the role and identity of intellectuals; with the poststructuralists, a good deal of that connection of the work to an autobiographical project is done by the poststructuralists themselves. Foucault spoke frequently of the connection between his intellectual work and his own experience and identity: “I have always held that my books are, in a sense, autobiographical fragments” (2001b: 1566–67). One of Derrida’s close friends and colleagues has argued that “all Derrida’s texts

7 Voices: from: Practicing the Faith
Author(s) Coleman Simon
Abstract: A story is told of Kenneth Hagin Sr., the founder of Rhema Bible Training Center and the charismatic preacher who is generally credited for establishing the Faith Movement in the United States. Hagin was accused of plagiarizing the works of a rather more obscure preacher and writer, E. W. Kenyon. Hagin’s response was telling, and invoked a charismatic version of a Durkheimian conscience collective. Of course there were close parallels between his work and that of Kenyon. After all, both were inspired by the same source: God.

CHAPTER 3 “Modern” masculinities: from: Ethno-Baroque
Abstract: While conducting the household survey as part of my research, I received explicit proof of how important education has become for ethnic Albanians. It was a Friday afternoon on a hot summer day. I was in my top-floor apartment, working with my research assistant, Adnan, a twenty-eight-year-old ethnic Albanian man who had been helping me for the past year. I had become very close to him and his fiancé Mersiha, and his extended family was one of the most important contact base throughout my research. We had grown to be a well-synchronized team. It was his turn to dictate while

Introduction from: The French Road Movie
Abstract: A man at the wheel of his car loses himself to the sounds of his radio and the sights of the landscape, trying to leave behind him the troubles of his work and family; while another, fuelled by whisky, drives down a midnight highway in a delirium of speed and fluorescent lights. A girl, meanwhile, her boots torn apart at the seams, hitches along dusty roads; while elsewhere, two delinquents steal a car, then blaze a trail through the country’s roads. At the same time and in another place, a desperate young man hijacks a bus, leading it at gunpoint

One Road to Autopia: from: The French Road Movie
Abstract: This chapter will consider the road movie as a trans-contextual or parodic form, mainly through an analysis of Les Valseuses. However, just as it is proved important to reconsider the road movie’s historical flow of influence, it will be equally important in this instance to consider the workings of parody. Parody, I suggest here, is positioned ambivalently between the thing it derides and a fascination with that same thing. The objects of desire that are the perennial targets of parody, in other words, may prove more significant than the act of parodying itself. As I argue in this chapter, this

CHAPTER 1 Romancing the Past: from: A Lover's Quarrel with the Past
Abstract: Every historical work

Afterword: from: A Lover's Quarrel with the Past
Author(s) Ghosh Ranjan
Abstract: Hayden White, speaking to me, mentioned that ‘history’ refers ‘both to investigation of the past by professional specialists in different areas of study and to consideration of the relations between present and past and the process by which the present becomes past or the past intrudes itself into the present. The former notion belongs to the specialist, the latter one belongs to everybody – because everyone has a right to work out what he or she will make of this relationship for oneself ’.¹ This ‘everyone’ is the agency I have become an embodied part of, a space that triggered the

Book Title: Melanesian Odysseys-Negotiating the Self, Narrative, and Modernity
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Josephides Lisette
Abstract: In a series of epic self-narratives ranging from traditional cultural embodiments to picaresque adventures, Christian epiphanies and a host of interactive strategies and techniques for living, Kewa Highlanders (PNG) attempt to shape and control their selves and their relentlessly changing world. This lively account transcends ethnographic particularity and offers a wide-reaching perspective on the nature of being human. Inverting the analytic logic of her previous work, which sought to uncover what social structures concealed, Josephides focuses instead on the cultural understandings that people make explicit in their actions and speech. Using approaches from philosophy and anthropology, she examines elicitation (how people create their selves and their worlds in the act of making explicit) and mimesis (how anthropologists produce ethnographies), to arrive at an unexpected conclusion: that knowledge of self and other alike derives from self-externalization rather than self-introspection.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qd3fk

Chapter 3 Narrating the Self I: from: Melanesian Odysseys
Abstract: The previous chapter provided a conceptual framework for understanding human interactions as operations that construct the self and the other in a reciprocal activity through forcefully eliciting practices. The same operations simultaneously negotiate understandings of cultural practices and social knowledge. Subsequent chapters will show how much of this activity is telescoped in the accounts that people give about themselves, their lives and their achievements. The importance of narrative, then, is from the outset analytically bound up with the human interactions that are central to this study. The present chapter does something different: it uses older people’s narratives to provide for

Chapter 5 Narrating the Self III: from: Melanesian Odysseys
Abstract: The narratives in chapters 4 and 5 draw their vitality and very life from the landscape painted in the chapter preceding each of them. Then, sometimes tentatively but always inevitably, they proceed to paint over it, creating a palimpsest of culture, traditions, practices, ethics, persons. By now the landscape painted by the earliest narratives is completely written over, and the experiences of the narrators are based on a transformed reality. The younger adults in this chapter are all involved in the new spheres of life; instead of wars, spirit houses, courting and magic, they talk of roadbuilding work, plantation labour,

Chapter 8 The Politics of Death from: Melanesian Odysseys
Abstract: Early on in my fieldwork, when I first witnessed death ceremonies, I noted the tendency for smouldering troubles to be rekindled and become urgent on these occasions. In this chapter I describe events surrounding the deaths of three people: a middle-aged man (Rake) who had been a Councillor and politically influential; an old man (Wapa) who had been a great warrior; and his wife (Payanu), who followed him thirteen years later. The three reports thus span the whole of my fieldwork period, and encapsulate three key questions of crucial interest to the Kewa. Rake’s death gave rise to questionings of

Chapter 9 Mimesis, Ethnography and Knowledge from: Melanesian Odysseys
Abstract: In an earlier ethnography (Josephides 1985) I traced a Kewa ‘master narrative’ as it attempted to account for the production of inequalities in so-called egalitarian societies. It presented a generalized picture of culture and dealt with the problems of a complex social reality by means of a theoretical stratagem that posited a contradiction between ideology and practice.¹ The present work complements that ethnography with a picture of everyday social interactions, including many-layered accounts, whose effect is to break up any putative master narrative about ‘Kewa culture’. People’s constant endeavours to shape their lives in complex negotiations within specific situations, drawing

Chapter 6 Ghost Bikes: from: Grassroots Memorials
Author(s) Dobler Robert Thomas
Abstract: In October 2003, the first “ghost bike” appeared in St. Louis, Missouri, to memorialize the death of a cyclist who had been hit by a car. A local bicycle shop owner witnessed the accident and placed a mangled bike, painted stark white, on the scene, with a sign proclaiming “Cyclist struck here.” The movement quickly spread beyond St. Louis, and similar memorials have since appeared in thirty other cities across North and South America, Europe, and Australia, creating a network of mourners and activists who are working to increase vehicular awareness of bicyclists. The sudden popularity of ghost bike memorials

Chapter 4 Immobilization in “Cattle Cars” from: The Train Journey
Abstract: With this letter, Zalmen Gradowski, a worker in a Sonderkommando unit at Auschwitz, issued an invitation. Enter the “eternally traveling Jewish train,” he asked, a plea that is not limited to wartime trains if one looks at the image of the freight car housed in the permanent exhibition at the United States Holocaust Memorial Museum (USHMM) in Washington, DC (see Figure 4.1). The image of the freight car fuses historical space and contemporary memory practices. By looking at the platform of Auschwitz from the departure side of the rail car, the photo promises an Auschwitz arrival to the museum visitor.

CHAPTER 2 Precursors of Rhetoric Culture Theory from: Culture and Rhetoric
Author(s) Meyer Christian
Abstract: Rhetoric Culture theory has its roots in a long history, and in what follows I present some of the ideas that scholars—mainly rhetoricians, but also some philosophers—have developed over the centuries in order to grasp the difficult and complex relationship between rhetoric, culture, and humanity. Throughout, I have given priority to the voices of the precursors of Rhetoric Culture theory and have kept my own interpretation and comments to a minimum. At the end, I recall the work of scholars who were among the first to empirically study the constitutive role of rhetoric in non-European cultures.

Transnational Approaches to Contentious Politics: from: Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Romanos Eduardo
Abstract: Emerging from an international workshop, this volume examines a variety of different aspects of social mobilization since 1945, while the contributors constitute an equally heterogeneous group of young political scientists and historians, anthropologists, as well as researchers on social movement and the media. Their research poses numerous questions covering a broad range of issues across time and space, looking retrospectively at global interactions during the Cold War, as well as looking forward at reconfigurations of protest politics in the twenty-first century, both in Western and Eastern Europe. Blurring chronological and geographical boundaries of study and merging strictly defined methods and

Chapter 7 From “British Rights for British Citizens” to “British Out”: from: Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Bosi Lorenzo
Abstract: The Northern Ireland Civil Rights Movement (hereafter, CRM) between the 1960s and early 1970s shifted from an inclusive, reformist movement to an exclusivist, ethnonationalist one.* What is the explanation for such a significant transformation? This chapter seeks to answer the question by looking at the complex interactions of political opportunities/threats and the internal dynamics and competitiveness between different organizations and groups within the movement. What I am suggesting in this work is that much of the process of social movement development is understandable only by looking at the broader political environment as well as by looking within the movement itself.

Chapter 9 Organizational Communication of Intermediaries in Flux: from: Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Lachenmeier Dominik
Abstract: Social movements are networks of persons, groups, and organizations that want to induce, stop or

Book Title: Narrating the Nation-Representations in History, Media and the Arts
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Mycock Andrew
Abstract: A sustained and systematic study of the construction, erosion and reconstruction of national histories across a wide variety of states is highly topical and extremely relevant in the context of the accelerating processes of Europeanization and globalization. However, as demonstrated in this volume, histories have not, of course, only been written by professional historians. Drawing on studies from a number of different European nation states, the contributors to this volume present a systematic exploration, of the representation of the national paradigm. In doing so, they contextualize the European experience in a more global framework by providing comparative perspectives on the national histories in the Far East and North America. As such, they expose the complex variables and diverse actors that lie behind the narration of a nation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdcbq

Chapter 1 Historical Representation, Identity, Allegiance from: Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Megill Allan
Abstract: The disinterested, scientific side of the project is manifested throughout the detailed research proposal that the ‘National Histories in Europe’ research network submitted to

Chapter 5 The Institutionalisation and Nationalisation of Literature in Nineteenth-century Europe from: Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Neubauer John
Abstract: Friedrich Schlegel (1772–1829) first conceived of literary history as an evolving system of individual works and authors, a subsystem of

Chapter 7 Being “Made” Through Conflict: from: Young Men in Uncertain Times
Author(s) Roche Rosellen
Abstract: With few exceptions in academic literature concerning violence in Northern Ireland (Bell 1990; Jenkins 1983; Roche 2008; Roche 2007; Roche 2005a; Roche 2003), young people and their violent interplay have not held much appeal for social scientists. This is so even despite the fact that throughout urban, enclaved, and economically deprived working-class housing areas in Northern Ireland, young people, and particularly young men, are reported as consistently participating in “low-level” violent activities. While no formal definition of this notion of “low-level” violence exists, its use in the Northern Irish context is widespread. Thoughts vary on the origin of the expression

Chapter 11 Big Man System, Short Life Culture: from: Young Men in Uncertain Times
Author(s) Evans Gillian
Abstract: Towards the end of the summer holiday in southeast London in 2009, in the week when young people are awaiting their GCSE results, a sixteen-year-old black boy is stabbed five times in broad daylight. An A* student without any reputation for making trouble, the young man was said to be simply on his way home, traveling through his own neighborhood. The incident sent a ripple of terror—another ripple of terror—through the network of concerned parents of teenage boys in Southeast London. The stabbing symbolized fears of a horrifying escalation in violent knife crime on the streets. This was

Book Title: Conflicted Memories-Europeanizing Contemporary Histories
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Ramsbrock Annelie
Abstract: Despite the growing interest in general European history, the European dimension is surprisingly absent from the writing of contemporary history. In most countries, the historiography on the 20th century continues to be dominated by national perspectives. Although there is cross-national work on specific topics such as occupation or resistance, transnational conceptions and narratives of contemporary European history have yet to be worked out. This volume focuses on the development of a shared conception of recent European history that will be required as an underpinning for further economic and political integration so as to make lasting cooperation on the old continent possible. It tries to overcome the traditional national framing that ironically persists just at a time when organized efforts to transform Europe from an object of debate to an actual subject have some chance of succeeding in making it into a polity in its own right.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdff2

Chapter 1 History of Memory, Policies of the Past: from: Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Rousso Henry
Abstract: According to common sense both within and beyond the boundaries of Europe, we more or less take for granted the existence of a European ‘culture’ or ‘civilization.’ In spite of geopolitical uncertainties, divergent points of view, and ideological discrepancies, this topos is firmly anchored in the collective imagination, even though it frequently gives rise to misunderstandings. Even the most chauvinistic of historians subscribe to this idea, out of either conviction or convenience. Moreover, several works have been written in recent years about the history of European institutions or organizations, and about the economic, social, and cultural history of European countries

Chapter 4 Between Europe and the Nation: from: Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Lagrou Pieter
Abstract: As we all know, French contemporary history followed a very peculiar path. From 1789 until at least 1945, the French nation was deeply divided over the implications of the founding event of French contemporary history, the Revolution.¹ From Robespierre to Napoleon III, Captain Dreyfus, Charles Maurras, Léon Blum, and Philippe Pétain, the cleavage over the legacy of the revolution— les guerres franco-françaises—provides again and again the interpretational framework needed to understand French history. Not that 1945 was the end of it: the momentous changes of 1958, 1968, and 1981 served each time to underscore how, in some inscrutably French

Chapter 10 Twentieth-Century Culture, ‘Americanization,’ and European Audiovisual Space from: Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Siefert Marsha
Abstract: Since the Renaissance—or more especially since its historical appreciation—the idea of Europe has resonated with the idea of ‘Culture.’ Artists, writers, musicians, and their works circulated throughout Europe while imperial capitals and emerging nation-states built institutions to train, exhibit, and judge artists and their work. By the nineteenth century what could be called the European cultural space was global, as opera houses and theatres were built in colonial capitals and outposts from Buenos Aires to Hanoi, and as European educators and performers took ‘Culture’ to the far reaches of empire. Even before the First World War, however, several

Chapter 12 A European Civil Society? from: Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Kaelble Hartmut
Abstract: In recent years, the term ‘civil society’ has played an increasingly significant role in the language of the European Union. It is employed in speeches given by the president of the European Commission, in the much-discussed white paper on Governance in the European Union, and in debates about the European Constitution, as well as in the catalogue of research topics supported within the Sixth Framework Programme and in several hundred additional documents published by the EU. It is nevertheless still a matter of dispute whether a civil society has in fact emerged on the level of the European Union or

Book Title: The Great Tradition and Its Legacy-The Evolution of Dramatic and Musical Theater in Austria and Central Europe
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Rudolph Richard L.
Abstract: Both dramatic and musical theater are part of the tradition that has made Austria - especially Vienna - and the old Habsburg lands synonymous with high culture in Central Europe. Many works, often controversial originally but now considered as classics, are still performed regularly in Vienna, Prague, Budapest, or Krakow. This volume not only offers an excellent overview of the theatrical history of the region, it is also an innovative, cross-disciplinary attempt to analyse the inner workings and dynamics of theater through a discussion of the interplay between society, the audience, and performing artists.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdgfh

Introduction: from: The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Filipowicz Halina
Abstract: Most people, when they think of the performing arts in Austria, remember the Great Tradition: Mozart, Haydn, Mahler. But what of Johann Nepomuk Nestroy, Karl Goldmark, Elfriede Jelinek? What of Thomas Bernhard’s “scandalous” plays, which have delighted some critics and terrified others? Can we now come at the Great Tradition differently? It is to redress the balance in creative, interdisciplinary ways and to explore the remarkably innovative achievement of what is known as the Great Tradition that we offer this volume. It brings together new readings of a rich juxtaposition of major and minor works, the relation of these works

Chapter 2 Taming a Transgressive National Hero: from: The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Filipowicz Halina
Abstract: My starting point is a deceptively simple query. What happens when transgressors of cultural norms, which camouflage class and gender inequalities, prove themselves worthy of admission to a pantheon of national heroes? The cult of national heroes, of course, has been indispensable in promoting national unity and pride. Instilling the people with properly national characteristics, modeled after national heroes, has been a central preoccupation for educators, artists, and scholars. Transgressive candidates for national heroes make this task harder but not impossible. Hence it is necessary to rephrase the question. How does the admission of transgressors to a patriotic canon work

Chapter 3 Nestroy and His Naughty Children: from: The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Weber Carl
Abstract: Nestroy’s contemporary, Friedrich Count Schwarzenberg, noted in 1844 that “in Nestroy there lives a truly Shakespearean spirit, humor, and wit.”² And in 1912 the eminent Austrian writer and critic Karl Kraus claimed that Nestroy “is the first German satirist in whose work language itself reflects on the things [that constitute human life].”³ Outside the

Chapter 6 Elfriede Jelinek’s Nora Project; or, What Happens When Nora Meets the Capitalists from: The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Kiebuzinska Christine
Abstract: The distinguishing feature of the work of the contemporary Austrian writer Elfriede Jelinek is the unmasking of the illusion perpetuated by misreadings of canonical texts. In her play Was geschah, nachdem Nora ihren Mann verlassen hatte oder Stützen der Gesellschaften(What Happened after Nora Left Her Husband and Met the Pillars of Societies), written in 1979 as a reflection upon the centennial of Henrik Ibsen’sA Doll’s House, Jelinek superimposes a strong materialist feminist reading on a range of contemporary issues: the demythologization of canonical texts that adhere to the fictions of everyday life, the continuity of patriarchal structures in

Chapter 8 Thomas Bernhard’s Heldenplatz: from: The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Pfabigan Alfred
Abstract: What we call a scandal was a phenomenon that accompanied Bernhard’s work for decades.² He was often accused of provoking scandals to get attention and ensure the success of his work.³ Although this is an insinuation, Bernhard,

Chapter 9 Pulling the Pants off History: from: The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Malkin Jeanette R.
Abstract: One of Thomas Bernhard’s most historically specific plays, Vor dem Ruhestand(Eve of Retirement, 1979) is also one of his most ritualistic. A play of “doubleness” and unsynthesizable tensions, it is both realistic and metaphoric, structured both causally and cyclically. Steeped in public history, it simultaneously ritualizes history through private memory. This doubleness—the coexistence of historical and ahistorical consciousness, of development and stasis, time and timelessness—is, no doubt, central to Bernhard’s work as a whole; and it is knowingly, indeed pointedly used by Bernhard in this play to both reflect and implicate the history and memory of his

Introduction: from: The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Cherlin Michael
Abstract: The pre-eminent reference work in English on the history of music, The New Grove Dictionary of Music and Musicians, devotes a twenty-nine page article to musical Vienna. In the context of a reference work, a twenty-nine page article is fairly lengthy, yet the article is minuscule in comparison to the numerous separate articles on the musicians and music associated with that city.¹ Even if we were to restrict our comments to Vienna alone, the richness and complexity of that city’s contribution to the world of music could fill a library; a book length treatment could hardly do it justice. If

Chapter 13 Karl Goldmark’s Operas during the Directorship of Gustav Mahler from: The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Revers Peter
Abstract: During the late nineteenth century, Karl Goldmark was among the most internationally celebrated of Viennese composers. Goldmark’s opera The Queen of Shebapremiered on 10 March 1875, under the baton of Johann Herbeck, Director of the Viennese Hofoper from 1870 to 1875. The work was a huge success, and performances in many European cities followed. Goldmark’s centrality as a canonic figure seemed secure. Yet today only a few works by Goldmark are still performed with any regularity—exceptions might include the program symphonyLändliche Hochzeitop. 26 (Rural Wedding, 1876), and the Violin Concerto in A, op. 28 (1877).

Book Title: Academic Anthropology and the Museum-Back to the Future
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Bouquet Mary
Abstract: The museum boom, with its accompanying objectification and politicization of culture, finds its counterpart in the growing interest by social scientists in material culture, much of which is to be found in museums. Not surprisingly, anthropologists in particular are turning their attention again to museums, after decades of neglect, during which fieldwork became the hallmark of modern anthropology - so much so that the "social" and the "material" parted company so radically as to produce a kind of knowledge gap between historical collections and the intellectuals who might have benefitted from working on these material representations of culture. Moreover it was forgotten that museums do not only present the "pastness" of things. A great deal of what goes on in contemporary museums is literally about planning the shape of the future: making culture materialize involves mixing things from the past, taking into account current visions, and knowing that the scenes constructed will shape the perspectives of future generations. However, the (re-)invention of museum anthropology presents a series of challenges for academic teaching and research, as well as for the work of cultural production in contemporary museums - issues that are explored in this volume.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdgkf

3 Picturing the museum: from: Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Porto Nuno
Abstract: Photography and museum studies have recently entered into dialogue, as historians and anthropologists begin to deal with that peculiar class of museum artefacts: the photographic archives. Roughly three types of approach can be distinguished. First there is the approach that sees photographic collections as the basis for historical discourse on a specific social group at a specific point in time, such as Geary’s (1988) work on Bamum. Then there is the line that sets out from the transformation of views about a specific group, constructed through time by several different authors, who may or may not have known about each

8 Behind the scenes at the Science Museum: from: Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Macdonald Sharon
Abstract: Between 1988 and 1990 I carried out ethnographic fieldwork in the Science Museum, London – Britain’s national museum of science and industry, generally acknowledged to be one of the world’s major science museums. Looking back, I can still feel the tremor of excitement I felt on first being permitted to go ‘backstage’ with my own key to use doors – half-hidden by displays – at the back of galleries leading to what seemed initially like a maze of footfall-echoey spiral staircases and further mysterious doors, behind the scenes. The world which I was exploring as an ethnographer was quite literally divided into ‘back

10 Inside out: from: Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Cannizzo Jeanne
Abstract: This chapter uses a case study, the development of the exhibition David Livingstone and the Victorian Encounter with Africa, to examine the theoretical construction, methodological issues and analytical frameworks which govern cultural production. The negotiations necessary to resolve any conflicts or tensions which result from the pairing of different academic disciplines on a curatorial team will be explored. Certain aspects of almost all academic training, regardless of discipline, which may be antithetical to the exhibition process will also be addressed. Possible analogies with the production of radio documentaries for public broadcasting will be offered. Like a museum exhibition, but unlike

Book Title: Between Educationalization and Appropriation-Selected Writings on the History of Modern Educational Systems
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): Vervenne Marc
Abstract: Advanced reader on the history of education Developments in educational systems worldwide have largely contributed to the modernization and globalization of present-day society. However, in order to fully understand their impact, educational systems must be interpreted against a background of particular situations and contexts. This textbook brings together more than twenty (collaborative) contributions focusing on the two key themes in the work of Marc Depaepe: educationalization and appropriation. Compiled for his international master classes, these selected writings provide not only a thorough introduction to the history of modern educational systems, but also a twenty-five year overview of the work of a well-known pioneer in the field of history of education. Covering the modernization of schooling in Western history, the characteristics and origins of educationalization, the colonial experience in education and the process of appropriation, Between Educationalization and Appropriation will be of great interest to a larger audience of scholars in the social sciences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdwdd

14 The Canonization of Ovide Decroly as a “Saint” of the New Education from: Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Van Gorp A.
Abstract: If any Belgian educator belongs to the canon of the New Education, it is certainly Ovide Decroly (1871-1932). Particularly in southern Europe and in many Latin American countries,¹ the ideas and the work of this French-speaking Brussels doctor have been inspirational for a movement that projected itself worldwide—albeit in different modes—as the “child-oriented,” “progressive” alternative to the rigid, traditional school.² As recent research has shown,³ this movement manifested itself primarily by means of the development of its own language and discourse in which the “new school” was projected into a “new” society. However, ultimately, it turned out that

18 Struggling with the Historical Attractiveness of Psychology for Educational Research: from: Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Depaepe M.
Abstract: A few years ago, when we determined the themes for the upcoming meetings of the Leuven Research Community, I thought that there could be no easier task than that which lay before me at the moment: reporting on the history of the attractiveness of psychology for educational research. On the basis of my work in the history of educational science on the development of the empirical-analytical paradigm (Depaepe, 1993), it seemed that one could quite easily formulate a number of hypotheses with regard to

19 Demythologizing the Educational Past: from: Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Depaepe M.
Abstract: “My life in the history of education” – to borrow the title of a recent British series of scholarly autobiographies¹ – began with a lively interest in educational practice. I became interested in the organization of the subject-based grade-school system and wished to find its origins. This was an organizational form introduced for reasons not particularly educational, and it persisted chiefly because of the order and efficiency to which it gave rise.² My work was both a form of educational criticism and a demonstration of the relevance of the history of education to educational science, practice, and policy.

A FEMALE SCRIBE REVEALS HERSELF: from: Medieval Manuscripts in Transition
Author(s) DE BUNDEL Katty
Abstract: Although research on the position of women in the literary cultural landscape of the Middle Ages has increased considerably in recent years, a specific aspect of this position is still underexposed. Female patronage and reception have received a great deal of attention, but when we speak of the direct involvement of women in the total production of a book – writing/translating, scribal work and commissioning – a great deal of work remains to be done, especially for the Dutch speaking regions. This task is hampered by a lack of direct data, which forces us to weigh and interpret as much

THE SECRET HISTORY OF THE FOX AND THE HARE IN TRINITY B.11.22 from: Medieval Manuscripts in Transition
Author(s) MEUWESE Martine
Abstract: Whereas miniatures or historiated initials generally attempt to illustrate the relevant text, marginal images need not do so. The abundant marginal decorations in psalters and prayer books are often text-independent, for they usually do not illustrate the accompanying religious text. In the margins artists could indulge their imagination, reverse roles, and even mock the authority of Christian doctrine. Marginal themes may refer to the accompanying text, to works of ‘literature’ such as sermons, romances, fables and bestiaries, but also to the activities of daily life such as hunting or children’s play, or to a whole range of oral discourse, whether

Poetic Pleasure, Psychosis, and Perversion: from: Origins and Ends of the Mind
Author(s) Geyskens Tomas
Abstract: In 1905, Freud wrote Three Essays on the Theory of SexualityandJokes and their Relation to the Unconscious. In both of these works, the concept of ‘fore-pleasure’ plays a central and structuring role, but only inJokesis it thoroughly analyzed. Freud’s theory of sexuality, therefore, can only be understood when it is confronted with his theory of jokes. Surprisingly, such a simultaneous reading ofJokesandThree Essaysleads us very far away from the classical interpretation of Freud’s theory of sexuality and especially from his later theory centred on the Oedipus complex. First, we will confront Freud’s

Psychoanalysis: from: Origins and Ends of the Mind
Author(s) De Kesel Marc
Abstract: Today, entitling a theory an ontology is far from being ‘politically incorrect’. Publications featuring expressions such as ‘cultural ontology’, ‘ontology of mind’, ‘social ontology’, are no longer exceptional in the field of social sciences.² Even critical theory is seduced by the term. Is one of Žižek’s major works, The Ticklish Subject, not subtitled ‘The Absent Centre of Political Ontology’? Also the conference that gave rise to the present volume was originally entitled ‘PsychoanalyticalOntology of the Human’.³ Ontology is ‘in’. Again. Also in psychoanalysis.

Book Title: Beyond Federal Dogmatics (pdf)-The Influence of EU Law on Belgian Constitutional Case Law Regarding Federalism
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): Feyen Stef
Abstract: The relationship between EU law and national constitutional law, including constitutional law in federalism matters, has been subject to an ongoing scholarly debate. This monograph contributes to this debate in two ways. The author argues for an approach to constitutional law that goes beyond the classic - coined dogmatic - understanding of constitutional case law regarding federalism as expounded in Belgian academia. Building on that basis, he sets out to rethink the framework within which the connection between EU law and national constitutional law can be understood. The analysis delves into the relationship (and sometimes tension) between ‘rule-of-law' values (which may serve as checks upon instrumental forms of reasoning) and the toolbox deployed in constitutional court case law to accommodate several rather pragmatic needs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qf0vf

Foreword from: Beyond Federal Dogmatics (pdf)
Author(s) Alen André
Abstract: In some respects, this book has characteristics which one could expect from a junior researcher: it tries to be innovative, explores issues from a (whole array of) different angle(s), and could be read as provocative. At the same time, the work radiates academic maturity in some other respects: the depth and width of the considerations taken into account are impressive, and even if some points might come across as provocative

Book Title: Islam & Europe-Crises are Challenges
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): SHAH Prakash
Abstract: Within the framework of the Forum A. & A Leysen, several experts from in and outside the Muslim world contributed to this book. In Islam and Europe: Crises Are Challenges they discuss how dialogues between Islam and the West, with a focus on Europe, can be achieved. The various authors (legal scholars, political theorists, social scientists, and psychologists) explore in these collected essays such interrelated questions as: How much diversity is permissible within a liberal pluralistic democratic society? How strong are the implications of citizenship? What are equitable accommodations of contested practices? They argue for an adequate understanding of how Western Muslim communities in Europe experience their minority position and what needs to be done to improve their participation in European society. The second part of this volume is a collection of papers written around the work of Abdullahi Ahmed An-Na'im, who also makes his own contribution to the book. The Catholic University of Leuven awarded An-Na'im an honorary doctorate in 2009 on the theme of multiculturalism, intercultural relations and diversity. An-Na'im is recognized the world over as a leading expert in the area of religion and law, and as a human rights activist. Islam and Europe: Crises Are Challenges reinforces our sense that a better knowledge and awareness of the growing diversity of our society, and striving for harmonious relations between Islam and the West, are among the most important challenges of our time. With contributions by: Ahmed Aboutaleb, Durre S. Ahmed, Abdullahi Ahmed An-Na'im, Shaheen Sardar Ali, Mohamed Benzakour, Jean-Yves Carlier, Marie-Claire Foblets, Ziba Mir-Hosseini, Fouad Laroui, Bettina Leysen, Rashida Manjoo, Bhikhu Parekh, Mathias Rohe, Cedric Ryngaert, Prakash Shah. Other publication: Islam and Europe, Challenges and Opportunities
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qf1dm

Foreword and Acknowledgements: from: Islam & Europe
Abstract: We were privileged and pleased to have been given the opportunity, within the framework of the A. & A. Leysen Forum, to invite an illustrious roster of scholars of Islam whose essays are collected here, to Leuven, in 2008 and 2009. From the outset, we, therefore, wish to express our deepest thanks to them and special appreciation for their sustaining support that made the Forum and this work possible. this is the second book in the series of the Leysen Forum. Informed by their several contributions collected in the first book¹, this volume continues in the same vein and seeks

An-Na ‘im and His Work Toward An Islamic Reformation: from: Islam & Europe
Author(s) Carlier Jean-Yves
Abstract: The works of Abdullahi Ahmed An-Na ‘im contributes greatly to intercultural dialogue and discussion of the place of Islamic law, especially in western societies. His first book, Toward an Islamic Reformation(1990), defends a modernist interpretation of Islam that combines respect for the foundations of Muslim identity and basic principles of democratic societies. his latest book,Islam and the Secular State(2008), lends broad support to the effectiveness of a neutral State from the standpoint of religion. His works as a whole attest to the vitality of innovative thought within Islam. This also represents a major (scholarly) contribution to both

The ‘Secularization’ of Shari‘a in Iran from: Islam & Europe
Author(s) Mir-Hosseini Ziba
Abstract: ‘the culmination of’ his life’s work and his ‘final statement on the issues’ he has been struggling with for nearly a half

2 Liminal Futures: from: Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Watts Laura
Abstract: The following prose poem was a response to my first month of ethnography in Orkney, an archipelago off the northeast coast of Scotland. I wanted to gather my experiences and evoke them in a way that academic prose could not do. At the time, I was living and working with people who imagine and design future technologies in the islands. My interest was, and is, in how location and landscape affect the way the future is imagined and made. How are futures made differently in different places? Why are certain landscapes and places regarded as centers of innovation, and others

3 Freifunk: from: Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Petersen Gregers
Abstract: Freifunk is an assemblage of a friction–filled multiplicity of interests and effects of technology use in everyday life in the twenty–first century. It is a community that originates in Berlin, a particular form of social movement, and a specific technological approach to computer networking. The tale of Freifunk’s emergence and distillation tells of a process in which the everyday tactics of solving one’s own problems (in this case, a lack of Internet access) are integrated with a more general strategy of political subversion. Thus it is also a tale of how technical appropriation becomes a sociotechnical subversion. To

9 Structuring the Social: from: Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Blackwell Alan F.
Abstract: The goal of this chapter is to present a view from the inside, as it were. I am concerned with the inside of ICT—because where there is a technology, there must also be technologists. How, then, are the themes of this book perceived by information and communications technologists? It is important to note that the phrase “information and communications technologist” is not one that I would choose myself. Indeed, from within our profession, the phrase “ICT” is often considered pejorative and even hostile, a construction of commentators and policy makers who wish to caricature our work. At the time

Series Foreword from: Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Caplan Arthur
Abstract: The Basic Bioethics series makes innovative works in bioethics available to a broad audience and introduces seminal scholarly manuscripts, state-of-the-art reference works, and textbooks. Topics engaged include the philosophy of medicine, advancing genetics and biotechnology, end-of-life care, health and social policy, and the empirical study of biomedical life. Interdisciplinary work is encouraged.

2 Creating Life: from: Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Boldt Joachim
Abstract: In 1978, the molecular medical scientists Waclaw Szybalski and Anna M. Skalka wrote in an editorial of the journal Gene, “The work on restriction nucleases not only permits us easily to construct

3 Engineered Microbes in Industry and Science: from: Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Kaebnick Gregory E.
Abstract: With some scientific and technological developments, the public gets excited when the technology hits the streets and generates new products and services. Radio caught the public’s attention when radios became available. The Internet had been in the works for some years before most people even knew about it. But with developments in biology, the excitement tends to precede the application. In the 1990s, genetic engineering was going to cure the incurable; fifteen years on, there are only a few scattered reports of success, and then only on a few individuals at a time and not completely smoothly (the treatment has

Book Title: Constructing Feminine Poetics in the Works of a Late-20th-Century Catalan Woman Poet: Maria-Mercè Marçal- Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Author(s): Vicedo Noelia Díaz
Abstract: This study focuses upon the work of the Catalan woman poet Maria-Mercè Marçal. It analyses the interaction between body and language in her first five books of poetry. Drawing on the Italian feminist thought of il pensiero della differenza sessuale, it examines the ways in which Marçal’s poetic images display her Catalan feminine subjectivity, including the function of the poet, the space of poetry and the representation of love. It also explores the potentiality of the space of poetry to reconstruct female identity and reconfigure reality. In addition, it unravels the way in which the poet uses poetry to express the love for the other whilst also extending the boundaries of the self. The central concern is to bridge the fissure between female experience and universal precepts on the art of poetry through the predominance of an embodied and natural iconography. This study presents Marçal’s poetic compositions within the international panorama of poetry and feminist studies and aims to open up new terrains of discussion in the field of language, body and writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qfbjk

INTRODUCTION from: Constructing Feminine Poetics in the Works of a Late-20th-Century Catalan Woman Poet: Maria-Mercè Marçal
Abstract: This book analyses questions of the female body, writing and poetry in the works of Catalan poet Maria-Mercè Marçal (1952–1998) through the in-depth study of the corpus composed between 1973 and 1988 — Cau de llunes, Bruixa de dol, Sal oberta, Terra de Mai, La germana, l’estrangeraandDesglaç. It aims, firstly, to introduce the complex and innovative work of a prominent Catalan female author within a broader panorama of both Hispanic and international literary traditions, through a detailed analysis of some aspects of her work such as love, passion, the figure of the poet and the space of poetry.

CHAPTER 2 Poiesis from: Constructing Feminine Poetics in the Works of a Late-20th-Century Catalan Woman Poet: Maria-Mercè Marçal
Abstract: The preceding chapter has explored the theoretical framework and direction that the paradigm of the body takes in relation to language in Marçal’s poems. Through various perspectives and insights, I have explored how the body connects poetry and feminism in her work and how feminism is based on praxis rather than theory. By juxtaposing differenza sessualewith Judith Butler’s theorization of gender, I have discussed the means by which the body conditions Marçal’s composition and how its presence in the texts should be taken as the poet’s particular experience of being.

CHAPTER 3 The Poetics of Space: from: Constructing Feminine Poetics in the Works of a Late-20th-Century Catalan Woman Poet: Maria-Mercè Marçal
Abstract: Through a detailed analysis of Marçal’s poetic evolution in the previous chapter, I have examined the conceptual and iconic frameworks that allow the poet to reelaborate her experience around the concept of being, particularly of her ser dona. As a result, the dynamic poetic space and form shapes this remaking, rewriting and rereading of the self. Furthermore, it highlights the system of structures (linguistic and semiotic) that merge in the process of poetically reinscribing female identity. In this third chapter, I consider how the literary space of poetry harnesses the possibility of becoming a subject, formed and conceptualized in alternative

AFTERWORD: from: Constructing Feminine Poetics in the Works of a Late-20th-Century Catalan Woman Poet: Maria-Mercè Marçal
Abstract: This book has explored, through the analysis of contested images, the convergence between language and body in Marçal’s poetry and has considered the extent to which its poetic effects reveal the possibilities of theorizing the construction of a feminine poetics within the Catalan context. This research on Marçal’s work is situated within the field of Catalan feminist studies in the Peninsula, which has seen the exploration of sexual difference in critical theory and literature. My contribution to the existing debate has been the consideration of the body as a point of reflection in order to redefine the boundaries of the

INTRODUCTION: from: Soul
Author(s) Drukman Steven
Abstract: For a white middle-class child of the seventies, Black Power ran in color on three major networks. Its “power” was ignited on cathode ray tubes or was motored at 33 1/3 r.p.m. I was aware of Stokely Carmichael’s coinage mostly through the sexy-but-safe denizens of Room 222,or through downcast, dark-skinned malcontents being preached to by a pious Joe Friday onDragnet. Or, I heard the phrase as anthem-like, its exclamation point coinciding with Sly Stone’s at the end of “Stand!” It was later, in high school, when I learned about the Student Nonviolent Coordinating Committee (SNCC) and how white

2 Afro Images: from: Soul
Author(s) Davis Angela Y.
Abstract: Not long ago, I attended a performance in San Francisco by women presently or formerly incarcerated in the County Jail, in collaboration with Bay Area women performance artists. After the show, I went backstage to the “green room,” where the women inmates, guarded by deputy sheriffs stationed outside the door, were celebrating with their families and friends. Having worked with some of the women at the jail, I wanted to congratulate them on the show. One woman introduced me to her brother, who at first responded to my name with a blank stare. The woman admonished him: “You don’t know

4 Fragmented Souls: from: Soul
Author(s) White Artress Bethany
Abstract: The electric narrative structure of this interview reflects a desire to communicate the ways in which history constantly informs and is reinformed by contemporary life and art. When I first encountered the work of Renée Cox I found myself standing in front of a seven-foot framed photograph of a naked black woman in pumps holding a baby titledYo Mama.Here stood a woman daring the viewer to make her someone’s mammy, bed warmer, or doormat. Cox challenges viewers to leave historical stereotypes about black female sexuality by the wayside and to engage in the act of reinventing the black

13 Ethnophysicality, or An Ethnography of Some Body from: Soul
Author(s) Jackson John L.
Abstract: “That boy can flat-out sing,” seventeen-year-old Shanita says to me as she ever so carefully drapes a just-ironed pair of Boss jeans over a wire hanger. And who am I? I’m AnthroMan®, the anthropologist-in-training who is superscientifically stretched out across Shanita’s pecan-sandy colored comforter.¹ I’m engaged in fieldwork on this day (that rite of passage called participant observation) and one of my first tasks as an ethnographer is to discursively render my environment. So I simply sit on the comforter, take in my surroundings, and jot down notes.

18 Question of a “Soulful Style”: from: Soul
Author(s) Gilroy Paul
Abstract: This interview with Paul Gilroy took place in the spring of 1996 in New York City, In recent years, scholars and writers have begun to investigate the international dimensions of soul as it emanates from the Caribbean, Great Britain, and other urban metropoles. Gilroy’s work has been crucial to our (and others’) critical (re)considerations of soul because it calls for a rigorous investigation of the impact that the exchange of ideas and commodities across various national borders has had on these global communities. Similarly, he calls upon us to interrogate both the differences and commonalities among black diasporic communities in

Book Title: A Politics of the Ordinary- Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Dumm Thomas L.
Abstract: In A Politics of the Ordinary, Thomas Dumm dramatizes how everyday life in the United States intersects with and is influenced by the power of events, on the one hand, and forces of conformity and normalcy on the other. Combining poststructuralist analysis with a sympathetic reading of a strain of American thought that begins with Emerson and culminates in the work of Stanley Cavell, A Politics of the Ordinary investigates incidents from everyday life, political spectacles, and popular culture. Whether juxtaposing reflections about boredom in rural New Mexico with Emerson's theory of constitutional amendment, Richard Nixon's letter of resignation with Thoreau's writings to overcome quiet desperation, or demonstrating how Disney's Toy Story allegorizes the downsizing of the American white-collar work force, Dumm's constant concern is to show how the ordinary is the primary source of the democratic political imagination.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qfjxk

4 Civil Society from: A Politics of the Ordinary
Abstract: Cultivation is dirty work. It entails everyday patience and impatience, care and carelessness, conversation, gesture, housecleaning, grocery shopping, taking out the trash, pulling weeds, making dinner, putting kids to bed, trying to listen to a friend when you don’t really have it in you, attending to the pain of a loved one. All in all, cultivation is a process of commitment. It involves all the quotidian obligations and routines that require thought at its lower register, often draining thought and frustrating the illusions of a higher ambition, in the hope and sense that this gesture or that chore is what

7 Wild Things from: A Politics of the Ordinary
Abstract: In the spring of 1989, Jean Baudrillard attended a conference at the University of Montana in Missoula that was devoted to a wide-ranging exploration of his work and its cultural implications. After delivering the keynote lecture for the conference, he listened to a response by an American L-A-N-G-U-A-G-E poet and then editor of the Socialist Review, Ron Silliman. Silliman allegorized Baudrillard as “the drag queen of theory.”¹ Misunderstanding Silliman’s comments; or taking the compliment as too little, too late; or deciphering a deep insult that some of us missed; or suffering from an uncharacteristic failure of imagination, for some reason

Book Title: America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth-Reform Beyond Electoral Politics
Publisher: Monthly Review Press
Author(s): GIROUX HENRY A.
Abstract: America's latest war, according to renowned social critic Henry Giroux, is a war on youth. While this may seem counterintuitive in our youth-obsessed culture, Giroux lays bare the grim reality of how our educational, social, and economic institutions continually fail young people. Their systemic failure is the result of what Giroux identifies as four fundamentalisms: market deregulation, patriotic and religious fervor, the instrumentalization of education, and the militarization of society. We see the consequences most plainly in the decaying education system: schools are increasingly designed to churn out drone-like future employees, imbued with authoritarian values, inured to violence, and destined to serve the market. And those are the lucky ones. Young people who don't conform to cultural and economic discipline are left to navigate the neoliberal landscape on their own; if they are black or brown, they are likely to become ensnared by a harsh penal system.Giroux sets his sights on the war on youth and takes it apart, examining how a lack of access to quality education, unemployment, the repression of dissent, a culture of violence, and the discipline of the market work together to shape the dismal experiences of so many young people. He urges critical educators to unite with students and workers in rebellion to form a new pedagogy, and to build a new, democratic society from the ground up. Here is a book you won't soon forget, and a call that grows more urgent by the day.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qfrqc

3. Violence, USA: from: America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: Since 9/11, the war on terror and the campaign for homeland security have increasingly mimicked the tactics of the enemies they sought to crush. Violence and punishment as both a media spectacle and a bone-crushing reality have become prominent and influential forces shaping American society. As the boundaries between “the realms of war and civil life have collapsed,” social relations and the public services needed to make them viable have been increasingly privatized and militarized.¹ The logic of profitability works its magic in channeling the public funding of warfare and organized violence into universities, market-based service providers, Hollywood cinema, cable

5. The “Suicidal State” and the War on Youth from: America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: In spite of being discredited by the economic recession of 2008, unfettered free-market capitalism has once again become a dominant force in American society. This pervasive regime of neoliberalism is producing unprecedented inequalities in wealth and income, runaway environmental devastation, egregious amounts of human suffering, and what Alex Honneth has called an “abyss of failed sociality.”¹ The Gilded Age is back with big profits for the ultra-rich and large financial institutions, and increasing impoverishment and misery for middle and working classes. Political illiteracy and religious fundamentalism have cornered the market on populist rage, providing support for a country in which,

6. Religious Fundamentalism, the Attack on Public Schools, and the Crisis of Reason from: America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: Right-wing fundamentalists such as former Republican presidential candidate Rick Santorum loathe public schools (derisively labeled government schools), often suggesting that they are wedded to doing the work of Satan. Santorum, true to his love affair with the secular ideology of privatization, prefers homeschooling. For him, homeschooling enshrines the notion of choice, suggesting that individuals are capable of assuming responsibility for educating themselves. But homeschooling and the notion of choice it enshrines are only two expressions of a broader issue: the government’s abandonment of people to whatever social fate or problems they may face—whether it be finding the best education

Book Title: Negotiating Justice-Progressive Lawyering, Low-Income Clients, and the Quest for Social Change
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Shdaimah Corey S.
Abstract: While many young people become lawyers for the big bucks, others are motivated by the pursuit of social justice, seeking to help people for whom legal services are financially, socially, or politically inaccessible. These progressive lawyers often bring a considerable degree of idealism to their work, and many leave the field due to insurmountable red tape and spiraling disillusionment. But what about those who stay? And what do their clients think? Negotiating Justice explores how progressive lawyers and their clients negotiate the dissonance between personal idealism and the realities of a system that doesn't often champion the rights of the poor.Corey S. Shdaimah draws on over fifty interviews with urban legal service lawyers and their clients to provide readers with a compelling behind-the-scenes look at how different notions of practice can present significant barriers for both clients and lawyers working with limited resources, often within a legal system that many view as fundamentally unequal or hostile. Through consideration of the central themes of progressive lawyering - autonomy, collaboration, transformation, and social change - Shdaimah presents a subtle and complex tableau of the concessions both lawyers and clients often have to make as they navigate the murky and resistant terrains of the legal system and their wider pursuits of justice and power.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qfs6k

3 Working for Social Justice in an Unjust System from: Negotiating Justice
Abstract: All of the lawyers in this study shared a commitment to social change. Many were troubled by how their commitment has played out in work with clients over the course of their careers, particularly in the conservative political climate of the 1990s and the early twenty-first century that is at best apathetic and at worst hostile to poor people’s claims. Clients were less direct in their discussion of social justice. While most felt dissatisfaction with the “system,” they (understandably) focused on their immediate needs. Although their narratives reveal visions of a more equitable legal system, these are often clouded by

1 Global Immigrants: from: The Lebanese Diaspora
Abstract: In December 2008 I set out to obtain an entry visa from the German Consulate in Cairo, preparing to attend an academic workshop there. I was in Cairo visiting my family and thought that spending a day of my vacation at the consulate would be better than taking the time from my busy teaching schedule in the US. After a long wait, I handed the receptionist the stack of required papers for my visa. She took one quick look at my papers and exclaimed that my application could not be processed at the consulate in Cairo, since the supporting documents

2 Law and Economics from: Legal Intellectuals in Conversation
Author(s) POSNER RICHARD
Abstract: POSNER: Well, it was in the sixties, and I was right out of law school. I spent six years in the government, first as a law clerk, then with the FTC and the Justice Department, and last working with the presidential task force.

8 Contemporary Liberal Constitutional Theory from: Legal Intellectuals in Conversation
Author(s) ACKERMAN BRUCE
Abstract: ACKERMAN: I was in government and philosophy at Harvard. My tutors were John Rawls, Judith Shklar, and William Yandell Elliott. I read about five hundred pages and wrote a twenty-page paper every week. So I really got a pretty good education in political philosophy at Harvard, and then I came to Yale Law School at one of its best moments. It was full of people with ideas, like Alex Bickel, Ronald Dworkin, Charlie Reich, Bob Bork, and

Book Title: Religion Morality & the Law-Nomos XXX
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Chapman John W.
Abstract: In this thirtieth annual volume in the American Society for Political and Legal Philosophy's NOMOS series, entitled Religion, Morality and the Law, twelve distinguished contributers consider a diverse selection of topics. Included are essays on "Natural Law and Creation Stories," "Divine Sanction and Legal Authority," and "Liberalism, Neutralism, and Rights." These works ask whether morality itself can survive without the support of religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qfxm5

Introduction from: Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: After several decades of interdisciplinary work in academic legal scholarship, it is impossible for one not to notice how obscure theories of economics, sociology, philosophy, anthropology, literary criticism, and other fields have infected recent academic writing and thinking about law and adjudication, or what is commonly understood as jurisprudence.¹ Ever since the New Deal, legal studies have become more sophisticated and more eclectic.² This expanding eclecticism has brought about sharp debate in jurisprudence. Diversity and fragmentation of jurisprudence have been stimulated by a profession that has itself become splintered as a result of competition and rivalry between new jurisprudential movements,

6. Critical Legal Studies from: Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: While law and economics attracted the attention of legal scholars, a distinct movement in legal studies established itself as a major critic of both traditional and law and economics scholarship. This new academic movement—critical legal studies (CLS—surfaced in 1976 when a group of legal scholars met at the University of Wisconsin Law School and formed a social and professional network called The Conference on Critical Legal Studies.¹ The diverse intellectual projects of these writers established the thematic character of this movement. The intellectual component of this movement known as CLS continues to grow and expand, despite the fact

8. Law and Literature from: Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: The law and literaturemovement can be traced to the 1973 publication of James Boyd White's The legal imagination,¹ a book that advanced the idea that the study of literature should be part of legal education, because literary studies have something distinctive to say about law and adjudication. Law and literature was previously a marginal subject consisting mainly of the study of stories about law found in the great works of classical literature.² Law and literature practitioners, following the example of Dean Wigmore,³ explored the way law was used in the great literary classics of Dickens, Kafka, and Melville, and

9. Critical Race Theory from: Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: As the 1980s came to a close, a new movement in legal thought emerged offering a new epistemological source for law derived from the “actual experience, history, culture, and intellectual tradition of people of color.”¹ This movement developed as racial-minority scholars within critical legal studies and other progressive networks established “an African American movement”² in legal studies to approach problems of race from the unique perspective of African Americans. Critical race theorists asserted that it was time for “different and blacker voices [to] speak new words and remake old legal doctrines.”³ The critical race theory movement emerged as minority scholars

Book Title: Keywords for Childrens Literature- Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Paul Lissa
Abstract: The study of children's literature and culture has been experiencing a renaissance, with vital new work proliferating across many areas of interest. Mapping this vibrant scholarship, Keywords for Children's Literature presents 49 original essays on the essential terms and concepts of the field. From Aesthetics to Young Adult, an impressive, multidisciplinary cast of scholars explores the vocabulary central to the study of children's literature. Following the growth of his or her word, each author traces its branching uses and meanings, often into unfamiliar disciplinary territories: Award-winning novelist Philip Pullman writes about Intentionality, Education expert Margaret Meek Spencer addresses Reading, literary scholar Peter Hunt historicizes Children's Literature, Psychologist Hugh Crago examines Story, librarian and founder of the influential Child_Lit litserv Michael Joseph investigates Liminality. The scope, clarity, and interdisciplinary play between concepts make this collection essential reading for all scholars in the field. In the spirit of Raymond Williams' seminal Keywords, this book is a snapshot of a vocabulary of children's literature that is changing, expanding, and ever unfinished.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qg46g

1 Aesthetics from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Thomas Joseph T.
Abstract: There is perhaps no more vexing, fraught, and neglected concept in the study of children’s literature than aesthetics. No doubt the neglect of a serious, theoretical inquiry into the aesthetics of children’s literature stems from our contemporary understandings of the discipline of children’s literature itself. The study of children’s literature has, historically, been the work of librarians and educators of children. Children’s literature came to be seen as an appropriate site of purely literary study only after the rise and fall of mid-twentieth century New Critical and formalist modes of criticism, a state of affairs made possible by the inchoate

11 Classic from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Kidd Kenneth
Abstract: In her study of comparative children’s literature, Emer O’Sullivan (2001) notes that children’s classics come from three sources: (1) appropriations of adult works; (2) adaptations from traditional (usually oral) narratives; and (3) works written specifically for children. A classic, then, could be a text adopted by children as well as a work written for them. But, as O’Sullivan’s study also makes clear, things are not so simple. “Classic” is an overdetermined and elastic term, one encompassing very different ideas and attitudes. The notion of a children’s classic amplifies the contradictions of the term, especially to the degree that children’s literature

15 Education from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Gruner Elisabeth Rose
Abstract: In both Keywords(Williams 1983a) andNew KeywordsBennett, Grossberg, and Morris 2005), “education”Keywordshas “educate”) is primarily an institutional practice, which, after the late eighteenth century, is increasingly formalized and universalized in Western countries. Bearing the twin senses of “to lead forth” from the Latineducere) and “to bring up” (from the Latineducare), “education” appears chiefly as an action practiced by adults on children. TheOxford English Dictionarythus defines the term as “the systematic instruction, schooling, or training given to the young in preparation for the work of life.”

44 Science Fiction from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Hastings A. Waller
Abstract: The term “science fiction” denotes a genre of imaginative literature distinguished from realism by its speculation about things that cannot happen in the world as we know it, and from fantasy by abjuring the use of magic or supernatural. In science fiction, all phenomena and events described are theoretically possible under the laws of physics, even though they may not at present be achievable. Stated in this way, it would appear that works belonging to the genre would be easily identifiable. However, critics of science fiction have struggled to find an adequate definition almost since the term was coined and

45 Story from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Crago Hugh
Abstract: Historically, “story” is probably one of the most frequently employed words in relation to children’s literature. Yet despite its constant use by reviewers and critics over much of the history of fiction written specifically for young people, it has rarely been defined or analyzed. In its apparent simplicity, taken-for-grantedness, and resistance to deconstruction, the term establishes itself as something unquestioned, like the nature of “childhood” or “the child” itself. “Story” is missing from the index of numerous works where one might reasonably expect to find it—such as Katherine Nelson’s Narratives from the Crib(1989), a psycholinguistic study of the

46 Theory from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Rudd David
Abstract: The word “theory” appears in Raymond Williams’s original Keywords(1976). He traces its origins back to the Greektheoros, meaning “spectator,” with its root inthea, for “sight,” which also gave us “theater.” As more recent commentators put it, “[T]he literal sense of looking has then been metaphorized to that of contemplating or speculating” (Wolfreys et al. 2006). The term became increasingly opposed to “practice,” not only as something removed from the everyday, but also as something involved in attempts to explain and model the everyday. Although the title of Williams’s work—Keywords—implicitly underwrites the importance of language, his

Chapter 7 Concepts of Scripture in the School of Rashi from: Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Harris Robert A.
Abstract: In considering the definition of a “Jewish conception of Scripture,” it is just so right on many levels to begin with Rashi’s Torah commentary: Jewish children have begun their own studies with this work almost since the very generation in which he wrote it. Rashi, or Rabbi Solomon ben Isaac (1040–1105), lived in Troyes, in Champagne country in northern France. Though as a young man he studied in the great centers of rabbinic scholarship in Germany, Rashi’s fame rests on the Bible and Talmud commentaries he wrote after his return to France. These commentaries provide a unique blend of

Chapter 11 Concepts of Scripture in Martin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig from: Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Cohen Jonathan
Abstract: The thought of Martin Buber (1878–1965) and Franz Rosenzweig (1886–1929) continues to exert a profound influence not only on theologians and philosophers of religion, both Jewish and Christian, but on biblical scholars as well. Their work has been foundational for readers who want not so much to deny as to move beyond historical and philological approaches that obscure biblical literature’s religious and humanistic vitality. Buber and Rosenzweig bring God back into the picture and thus represent a gesture of return to older modes of biblical interpretation. Still, their approach does not simply restore medieval or midrashic approaches to

Chapter 12 The Pentateuch as Scripture and the Challenge of Biblical Criticism: from: Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Schwartz Baruch J.
Abstract: The study of the Pentateuch among Jews in the two centuries following the appearance of modern Pentateuchal criticism had no choice but to cope with the fact that the systematic study of the Torah had become an academic enterprise carried out exclusively by Christian scholars and that its results were diametrically opposed to the tradition of Jewish learning.¹ Severe challenges to traditional Judaism emerged especially from what ultimately came to be known as the “Higher” Criticism of the Pentateuch. Higher Criticism, recognizing that the Torah contains the work of more than one author and that it achieved its current form

Book Title: The Disarticulate-Language, Disability, and the Narratives of Modernity
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Berger James
Abstract: Language is integral to our social being. But what is the status of those who stand outside of language? The mentally disabled, wild children, people with autism and other neurological disorders, as well as animals, infants, angels, and artificial intelligences, have all engaged with language from a position at its borders. In the intricate verbal constructions of modern literature, the 'disarticulate' - those at the edges of language - have, paradoxically, played essential, defining roles.Drawing on the disarticulate figures in modern fictional works such asBilly Budd, The Sound and the Fury, Nightwood, White Noise,andThe Echo Maker,among others, James Berger shows in this intellectually bracing study how these characters mark sites at which aesthetic, philosophical, ethical, political, medical, and scientific discourses converge. It is also the place of the greatest ethical tension, as society confronts the needs and desires of the least of its brothers. Berger argues that the disarticulate is that which is unaccountable in the discourses of modernity and thus stands as an alternative to the prevailing social order. Using literary history and theory, as well as disability and trauma theory, he examines how these disarticulate figures reveal modernity's anxieties in terms of how it constructs its others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qg6xh

4 Dys-/Disarticulation and Disability from: The Disarticulate
Abstract: There would seem to be a gap in my thinking that now it is time to try to discuss. My notion of the dys-/disarticulate appears to fall under the broad category of “disability” as it has been delineated over the past twenty years in the field of disability studies. I have referred to some of this work in preceding chapters, but have not yet addressed directly the question of this project’s relation to the field. The study of dys-/disarticulation is in part a study of the uses and changes in terminologies for people with varieties of cognitive impairment—idiot, feebleminded,

3 “We can have faster economic growth if we reduce inequality” from: 22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Spiegel Shari
Abstract: The Nobel laureate and renowned economist Joseph Stiglitz has long been a critic of many aspects of mainstream economic theory and policy. Here he delves into the history and failures of modern macroeconomics, which, most recently, failed to either foresee or address effectively the global economic crisis. He argues that other areas of economics have developed theories, such as behavioral economics and new paradigms of monetary economics, which can serve as building blocks for a new framework. Two areas that were not well-addressed in the standard paradigm and need to be addressed in new economic thinking are sustainability and inequality.

10 “Recognize the structural crisis of the world-system” from: 22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Harris Kevan
Abstract: In a conversation that revisits and expands upon ideas that he has worked on throughout his career, Immanuel Wallerstein reflects on a world-system in crisis. He explains the origins and current applications of his seminal notion of a world-systems analysis and applies it to the current geopolitical landscape. He argues that U.S. hegemony is indeed in decline, and much more visibly so today than in past decades, but that this decline should not be thought of as precipitous, nor should the United States be thought of as no longer a leading world power. On the other hand, the fate of

16 “Genuine dialogue requires not only talking but a great deal of listening” from: 22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Tazmini Ghoncheh
Abstract: Fred Dallmayr has written and lectured extensively about the need to respect plurality and foster dialogue among cultures, civilizations, and religions. In a thought-provoking conversation with Ghoncheh Tazmini, he expands upon many of the major themes of his life’s work in the context of continuing political crises. Challenging the prevalent either/or approaches used in mainstream accounts of current political events, he offers a more nuanced approach to philosophy and politics that gets at the context and meaning of events. In light of the Arab Spring and persistent American antagonism with Iran, he argues that Islam and democracy are not inherently

18 “Capitalism as a mode of power” from: 22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Dutkiewicz Piotr
Abstract: In a unique two-pronged dovetailing discussion, frequent collaborators and coauthors Jonathan Nitzan and Shimshon Bichler discuss the nature of contemporary capitalism. Their central argument is that the dominant approaches to studying the market—liberalism and Marxism—are as flawed as the market itself. Offering a historically rich and analytically incisive critique of the recent history of capitalism and crisis, they suggest that instead of studying the relations of capital to power we must conceptualize capital aspower if we are to understand the dynamics of the market system. This approach allows us to examine the seemingly paradoxical workings of the

Book Title: Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker-A Reader in Documents and Essays
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Smith Richard Cándida
Abstract: More than one hundred years after her death, Elizabeth Cady Stanton still stands - along with her close friend Susan B. Anthony - as the major icon of the struggle for women's suffrage. In spite of this celebrity, Stanton's intellectual contributions have been largely overshadowed by the focus on her political activities, and she is yet to be recognized as one of the major thinkers of the nineteenth century.Here, at long last, is a single volume exploring and presenting Stanton's thoughtful, original, lifelong inquiries into the nature, origins, range, and solutions of women's subordination. Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker reintroduces, contextualizes, and critiques Stanton's numerous contributions to modern thought. It juxtaposes a selection of Stanton's own writings, many of them previously unavailable, with eight original essays by prominent historians and social theorists interrogating Stanton's views on such pressing social issues as religion, marriage, race, the self and community, and her place among leading nineteenth century feminist thinkers. Taken together, these essays and documents reveal the different facets, enduring insights, and fascinating contradictions of the work of one of the great thinkers of the feminist tradition.Contributors: Barbara Caine, Richard Candida Smith, Ellen Carol DuBois, Ann D. Gordon, Vivian Gornick, Kathi Kern, Michele Mitchell, and Christine Stansell.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qgf51

Chapter 6 “Free Woman Is a Divine Being, the Savior of Mankind”: from: Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Author(s) Kern Kathi
Abstract: In 1896 the National American Woman Suffrage Association repudiated Elizabeth Cady Stanton’s recently published book, The Woman’s Bible. In a debate that was widely publicized in the national press, suffragists weighed and measured the extent to which Stanton’s controversial work had damaged their movement. Stanton was devastated. But she was also convinced that her critique of religion was more timely than ever.¹ The very integrity of the republic was at stake. “Much as I desire the suffrage,” she wrote, I would rather never vote than to see the policies of our government at the mercy of the religious bigotry of

Chapter 8 “Has Christianity Benefited Woman?” (1885) from: Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Abstract: Editors’ Note: Stanton wrote this daring, breathtaking overview of women’s history before this was a subject in which scholars worked. Imagining women as important actors shaping the destiny of humanity was an act of faith, necessary for her to challenge historians to approach their work with an enlarged understanding of how societies advanced. She had to review books across a variety of fields to cull any references to women’s contributions in previous societies. Stanton’s methodology suggests her sympathy for new positivist trends in history that were concerned with reconstructing patterns of everyday life rather than narrating the stories of kings,

Chapter 10 “The Matriarchate, or Mother-Age” (1891) from: Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Abstract: Editors’ Note: Here Stanton provides an explicitly feminist reading of the literature on matriarchy emphasizing the work of anthropological pioneer Lewis Henry Morgan. In his last book,Ancient Society(1877), Morgan argued that the status of women was the single best indicator of a people’s development from “savagery” to “civilization.” The level of women’s participation was a test for Morgan of a society’s movement toward modern civilization and an indication that a militarized aristocracy was being replaced by democratic cooperation. The closing sentences of Morgan’s Ancient Society reads: “Democracy in government, brotherhood in society, equality in rights and privileges, and

Chapter 11 “Worship of God in Man” (1893) from: Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Abstract: Editors’ Note: The same year that Stanton resigned her position as president of the National American Woman Suffrage Association (NAWSA) and delivered “Solitude of Self” to a variety of audiences, she submitted several speeches to be read for her at the Columbian Exposition in Chicago. Stanton prepared addresses to the Women’s Congress and to the World’s Parliament of Religions. By this time she had begun her work onThe Woman’s Bible,in which she dissected the most sexist portions of the Jewish and Christian scriptures. In the following selection, she highlighted selections from the Bible that promoted respect for human

Chapter 13 “Our Proper Attitude toward Immigration” (1895) from: Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Abstract: Editors’ Note: This brief essay discusses the challenge that a large immigrant population of poorly paid wage earners posed to American conceptions of republican democracy. In the first part of the article, Stanton developed her general position on immigration. She made it clear that she did not support efforts to limit immigration, but she did fear the transfer of European poverty and class distinctions into the United States. She recommended laws that would encourage immigrants to become farmers rather than factory workers. She placed the blame for growing extremes of wealth and poverty on American railroad monopolies, a position she

Chapter 14 “Significance and History of the Ballot” (1898) from: Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Abstract: Editors’ Note: In this address to the Senate Select Committee on Woman Suffrage, Stanton considers the implications of mass immigration for woman suffrage in language that has shifted from mild nativism to outright xenophobia. Her concerns about the growing divide between the educated middle class and urban industrial workers has led her to a rare questioning of the continued relevance of “universal suffrage.” She attributed electoral defeats that her cause had suffered in the 1890s, not to native-born men, but to “the immigrant vote.” In the context of rapid demographic change, she supported “Americanization” as a requirement for full participation

CHAPTER THREE “THE BELOVED ANGLICAN CHURCH OF MY BAPTISM” from: Religious Imaginaries
Abstract: To turn from nineteenth-century Congregationalism to Anglicanism, and especially Anglo-Catholicism, is in many ways to turn from what David Tracy, working from Paul Ricoeur, calls proclamation to what he calls manifestation, or from a dialectical toward an analogical imagination and language.¹ Congregationalism, we have seen, grounds the Christ-event as a Word-event, thus calling Christians to witness to that central experience in further, often dialectical, word and action. Anglicanism historically also values proclamation, with Scripture and sermon integral to its liturgy; as Tracy points out, the Christian faith has historically held that “Jesus Christ is both the decisive word and the

Book Title: Biography and turning points in Europe and America- Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Négroni Catherine
Abstract: This sociological collection advances the argument that the concept of a turning point expands our understanding of life experiences from a descriptive to a deeper and more abstract level of analysis. It addresses the conceptual issue of what distinguishes turning points from life transitions in general and raises crucial questions about the application of turning points as a biographical research method. Biography and turning points in Europe and America is all the more distinctive and significant due to its broad empirical database. The anthology includes authors from ten different countries, providing a number of contexts for thinking about how turning points relate to constructions of meaning shaped by globalization and by cultural and structural meanings unique to each country. The book will be useful across a wide range of social sciences and particularly valuable for researchers needing a stronger theoretical base for biographical work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qgpjg

ONE Unpacking biographical narratives: from: Biography and turning points in Europe and America
Author(s) Kupferberg Feiwel
Abstract: The concerns of sociologists when engaging in biography research are different from both the caring professions and oral history. Although there are clear parallels between, in particular, oral history and sociological biography research concerning methodological issues related to how to conduct and interpret biographical interviews (Charlton et al, 2007; Perks and Thomson, 2009), there are also important theoretical and conceptual differences. The latter originate from the knowledge interest of sociologists that partly coincide with but are nevertheless slightly different from historians. This can be illustrated by the works of Alessandro Portelli (1981, 1991, 2003). What mostly interests Portelli is how

TEN Conclusion: from: Biography and turning points in Europe and America
Author(s) Kupferberg Feiwel
Abstract: What are turning points, and how are they to be described and analysed? How might a stronger focus on turning points help us to advance sociological biography research? This is what this book is about. It combines theoretical work with a number of concrete, empirical analyses of turning points, starting from different theoretical and methodological traditions within the contemporary academic landscape, but nevertheless with the overall conviction that the concept of turning points is a good start, both to make a theoretical contribution and to provide methodological advice (heuristics) on how to go about interpreting biographical narratives.

Book Title: The governance of problems-Puzzling, powering and participation
Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Hoppe Robert
Abstract: Contemporary democracies need to develop a better governance of problems, as all too often, policy is a sophisticated answer to the wrong problem. This book offers a compelling approach to public policy-making as problem processing, bringing together aspects of puzzling, powering and participation, relating them in interesting and different ways to cultural theory, to issues about networks, to models of democracy and modes of citizen participation. Part of a growing body of work in policy analysis literature, the book is clearly written and accessibly presented, making this an ideal text for academics and postgraduate students.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qgx59

TWO The governance of problems: from: The governance of problems
Abstract: Much has already been written on responsive governance. This book brings together issues that are traditionally treated separately: the analysis of problems (puzzling), the politics of problem framing and network management (powering) and the politics of political participation. The conceptual ‘umbrella’ to be used for integrating these different themes is problem structuring. It is a powerful analytic concept, which manages to integrate a lot of political and policy science insights in an easily grasped way.

THREE Analysing policy problems: from: The governance of problems
Abstract: This chapter introduces the typology of policy problems that underlies the rest of the book. This requires some preliminary conceptual work. Choosing a social-constructivist approach, the first section develops the perspective of a politics of meaning. It views politics as the collective attempt to control a polity’s shared response to the adversities and opportunities of the human condition. The second section gives an overview of how others have approached the social and political analysis of policy issues or problems. Here the proposal is to look at problem structuring as socio-cognitive processes that frame political task environments. From this perspective, four

FIVE Problem types and types of policy politics from: The governance of problems
Abstract: The previous chapter looked at translation and framing dynamics from the perspective of the distribution of cultures in society. It inquired into congruencies of citizens’ ways of life with policy makers’ styles and strategies in problem framing and structuring. This chapter will deal with policy politicsin policy networks. If policy making is intertwined cogitation and interaction (Wildavsky, 1980 [1979]), then policy politics is the combination of types of cognitive processes and styles of interaction, characteristic for problem processing in an issue domain. Policy politics is the specific mode or style of policy making among the set of political actors,

SIX Problem-structuring dynamics and meta-governance from: The governance of problems
Abstract: This chapter explores a theory of problem-structuring dynamics. It follows the structuration logic proposed by Giddens (1979), showing how policy actors can influence the nature of institutionalised systems of interaction while at the same time being constrained by them. On the one hand, problem-frame shifts and the possibilities for policy change depend on the structure of policy networks. A closed, institutionalised policy network differs from an open, emergent or decaying network. Part of the difference is in shaping different types of policy-making processes, with different capacities for problem processing, and, therefore, speed, scope and direction of policy change and innovation.

SEVEN Making policy analysis doable and reflexive from: The governance of problems
Abstract: the knowledge constructions of practitionerswith active roles in policy networks; and

NINE Public engagement and deliberative designs from: The governance of problems
Abstract: Applied to political regimes or systems as a whole, the meta-theory of plural democracies of problems has strong normative and prescriptive implications. Any policy-making system ought to be sufficiently robust and flexible to encompass in its political repertoire all four problem-structuring approaches, types of policy networks, styles of doable policy analysis, and democracy types. To the extent they have, moreover, they also ought to be able to rebalance the weight of these four modes in accordance with the development of dominant problem framings. That is, governance systems ought to be capable of flexible shifts from rule and analysis/instruction learning, to

Book Title: Re-imagining child protection-Towards humane social work with families
Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Morris Kate
Abstract: Why has the language of the child and of child protection become so hegemonic? What is lost and gained by such language? Who is being protected, and from what, in a risk society? Given that the focus is overwhelmingly on those families who are multiply deprived, do services reinforce or ameliorate such deprivations? And is it ethical to remove children from their parents in a society riven by inequalities? This timely book challenges a child protection culture that has become mired in muscular authoritarianism towards multiply deprived families. It calls for family-minded humane practice where children are understood as relational beings, parents are recognized as people with needs and hopes and families as carrying extraordinary capacities for care and protection. The authors, who have over three decades of experience as social workers, managers, educators and researchers in England, also identify the key ingredients of just organizational cultures where learning is celebrated. This important book will be required reading for students on qualifying and post-qualifying courses in child protection, social workers, managers, academics and policy makers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qgzfm

ONE Introduction from: Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: Social workers are charged with entering the lives and moral worlds of families, many of whom have routinely experienced disrespect, and have longstanding histories of material and emotional deprivation. In entering such lives, social workers share with those they encounter universal experiences of loss and disappointment. However, there are additional issues that arise in the course of doing such a job involving the making of decisions that bring pain and hurt as well as joy and support with consequences that can endure for generations. This dual mandate (often known as care and control) is one to be treated with humility

TWO Re-imagining child protection in the context of re-imagining welfare from: Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: Current policy responses to the economic crisis are mobilising social forces, including social work, in a divisive and authoritarian project against those most vulnerable. In the field of child protection, as indeed in other areas of welfare, the roots of current policies are to be found in those of previous New Labour administrations, but the trends predate them. From the late 1970s onwards, the doctrines of Reagan and Thatcher became dominant, promoting the virtues of letting the market rule in a triumph of neoliberalism. Although we recognise the term neoliberal is not a satisfactory one, as it is reductive, lumping

THREE We need to talk about ethics from: Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: Written 30 years ago, this closing paragraph of a lucid ethnography of social work by sociologists Robert Dingwall and Topsy Murray and socio-legal scholar John Eekelaar underscores the moral and ethical aesthetic at the core of practice. Unfortunately, their wise counsel was not followed and social work has been mired in a series of technical fixes which have distracted us from, and masked, the moral nature of the work. Thus, the right debates have not taken place, or at least have not taken place in the right spaces.

FOUR Developing research mindedness in learning cultures from: Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: In the quotation above, Eileen Munro recommends a shift in professional cultures, so expertise is valued and organisational learning flourishes. We share these aspirations, but attempting to achieve them in the current context of child and family social work is likely to produce some vexing challenges. ‘Expertise’ is hydra headed, and each of its heads – research, evidence, intuition, practice wisdom – is two-faced. All are malleable and may be used both to open up and to delimit debate. Claims to expertise are often politicised and readily conscripted into moral missions. A learning culture should foster a rigorous scepticism about grand claims.

FIVE Towards a just culture: from: Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: That society demands accountability from public services is right and proper. That high standards of practice and service delivery should be expectable is uncontroversial. However, meeting these aspirations in social work services has proved a wicked issue. The quotations above are a stark reminder of the pervasiveness of a blaming culture in statutory children’s services which spreads beyond English social work and which has resulted from failed attempts to ensure consistent high standards. The term (and indeed the sensation of being) ‘inadequate’ is strongly correlated with shame – the primary social emotion (Scheff, 1997). That the inspectorate Ofsted should use this

SEVEN Thinking afresh about relationships: from: Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: It is our contention in this chapter that the vocabularies with which social workers in children’s services describe relationships have become impoverished. This is a point we have alluded to elsewhere in this book, but here we develop it further. Their motivations for ‘choices’ made are described as both clear and also suspicious and deliberately hidden. They are failing to put their children’s needs before their own. They are choosing to stay with a violent partner. If they are men they are useless or dangerous, or both. We argue here that it is time to resurrect the intensity and the

EIGHT Tainted love: from: Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: This chapter examines the ways in which families with complex needs have been understood and represented in policy discourses, and the implications for social work with families where there are care and protection needs. Family-minded practice has struggled to receive sustained attention in social work, and yet the notion of family as the context for the resolution of children’s needs extends the scope for supporting change and provides an accurate reflection of children’s lived experiences. The maintenance of connections for children with their birth family has been a focus of concern across the range of social work interventions, and the

NINE Conclusions from: Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: In this context it has been an important aim of this book to reexamine the language and frameworks used and to address how those currently used have

Book Title: Communities in Dispute-Current Scholarship on the Johannine Epistles
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Anderson Paul N.
Abstract: Introductory essay places the collection in contextArticles engage the work of Raymond Brown and J. Louis MartynSixteen essays from the Book of Psalms Consultation group and invitied scholars
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qh1w6

The Community that Raymond Brown Left Behind: from: Communities in Dispute
Author(s) Anderson Paul N.
Abstract: Among the paradigm-making contributions in Johannine studies over the last half century, one of the most significant is the sketching of “the community of the Beloved Disciple” by Raymond E. Brown (1979). Extending beyond Johannine studies, Brown’s (1984) work on the history of early Christianity and “the churches the apostles left behind” is also among the most practical and interesting of his forty-seven books.² Here, Brown’s analysis of the unity and diversity of early Christian approaches to leadership and community organization³ have extensive implications, not only for historical and sociological understandings of the first-century Christian movement, but also for approaches

The Cosmic Trial Motif in John’s Letters from: Communities in Dispute
Author(s) Köstenberger Andreas J.
Abstract: The cosmic trial motif is one of the most important yet often neglected overarching themes in the Johannine corpus. This neglect is particularly regrettable, because the cosmic trial motif provides an overarching framework for John’s entire theology and is able to serve as the integrative framework for many other Johannine motifs, such as those related to witness, the world, truth, and judgment.

Spirit-Inspired Theology and Ecclesial Correction: from: Communities in Dispute
Author(s) Burge Gary M.
Abstract: The work of Raymond Brown in the study of the Johannine literature has been nothing short of remarkable. When he died in 1998, many of us felt a great light had passed from the church and the academy. Brown made Johannine studies fascinating, and I can tell you from one vantage anyway, his work inspired my career as well as a host of others.

Introduction: from: Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Segovia Fernando F.
Abstract: This project on the identity and role of the Latino/a biblical critic constitutes an exercise in racial-ethnic criticism in general and minority biblical criticism in particular. To express it otherwise: just as minority biblical criticism represents a variation of racial-ethnic criticism, so does an analysis of the critical task as envisioned by minority critics represent a variation of minority biblical criticism. To explain what this variation signifies and entails, it is imperative to conceptualize and formulate its placement within both critical frameworks. Toward this end, I draw on previous reflections, offered as part of a study of the poetics of

The Challenges of Latino/a Biblical Criticism from: Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Dupertuis Rubén R.
Abstract: The term challengesin the title of this essay has a number of possible references, some of which are very personal. I was in graduate school working diligently to understand the Acts of the Apostles in the context of rhetorical training and education in the larger Greco-Roman world when I encountered an essay by Fernando Segovia (1995a) in which he critiques the methods that were at the very core of what had, up to that point, been my introduction to biblical and early Christian studies. My reaction was twofold.

Toward Latino/a Biblical Studies: from: Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Lozada Francisco
Abstract: Latino/a biblical studies, like many other approaches based on ideological and/or contextual frameworks,

Toward a Latino/a Vision/Optic for Biblical Hermeneutics from: Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Muñoz-Larrondo Rubén
Abstract: It is impossible to speak in terms of initial explorations in Latino/a hermeneutics, given the number of authors who have been at work on this task over the course of the last twenty to thirty years. The following come readily to mind: Justo González, in Mañana Theology(1990); Virgilio Elizondo onmestizaje, inGalilean Journey(1983); Fernando F. Segovia, inDecolonizing Biblical Studies(2000); Ada María Isasi-Díaz onmujeristatheology, inEn la lucha(1993); and Miguel De La Torre and Edwin David Aponte, inHandbook of Latino/a Theologies(2006)—to name but a few. However, the task of fashioning

15 Understanding in Political Science: from: Scientific Understanding
Author(s) VAN BOUWEL JEROEN
Abstract: Upon a first encounter with the field of International Relations (IR) studies, we stumble into a plurality of theoretical perspectives some of which, such as realism and liberalism, have already been around for decades, while others, such as constructivism, are more recent. A recent survey among IR scholars working in the United States gives us a rough idea of the weight attached to these different perspectives. Answering the question “What paradigm in International Relations are you primarily committed to in your research?” 25 percent chose realism/neorealism, 33 percent liberalism/neoliberalism, 15 percent constructivism, 7 percent Marxism/globalism, and 20 percent other, among

3 Indigenous Creencias, Millenarian Cultures, and Counterpublic Persuasion from: Liberalism at Its Limits
Abstract: FEMINIST AND MULTICULTURAL texts inscribe the discussion of feminist and indigenous rights into an old and already occupied hermeneutical place. They write over the already-written script of public sphere and civil society, and by so doing feminism, at least, steps into the terrain of the prophetic. Richard Rorty’s reading of Catherine MacKinnon’s work illustrates this shift in the feminist text, which holds true for the indigenous text as well. MacKinnon states that “unless women [read also indigenous groups] fit into the logical space prepared for them by current linguistic and other practices, the law doesn’t know how to deal with

4 The Violent Text: from: Liberalism at Its Limits
Abstract: I NOW MOVE FROM abstract liberal theories of the relationship between civil society and the state to the concrete workings of Colombian governance. This is a strategy to engage the propositions of social scientists in their efforts to come to terms with situations that bear little or no resemblance to the refined abstractions of liberalism, where the state represents the condensation of the relations of social forces, organizes the power bloc, and balances sectorial relations to construct a popular national will that displaces class struggle through the construction of a general interest and common sense. I am struck by the

6 Feminicidio, or the Serial Killings of Women: from: Liberalism at Its Limits
Abstract: FEMINICIDIOIS THE TERM used to refer to the serial killing of women.Feminicidioin Ciudad Juárez (a Mexican border city opposite El Paso, Texas) is a daunting marker of the shift from modern to postmodern forms of labor. Some of the women killed are workers at themaquilas, one of the newest forms of labor organization that high-tech, corporate capitalism has devised. Given thatfeminicidiois at the center of this postmodern border scene, the pathology of the serial killer is the most salient and facile explanation for this social trauma. However, texts on the subject indicate that the

Introduction: from: Barcelona
Author(s) Caulfield Carlota
Abstract: These words were pronounced by Xavier Canals during his performance of what he called an ‘ecolinguistic visual poem’ during a symposium on ‘Contemporary Barcelona: Visual Cultures, Space and Power’ held in London in March 2008. He presented the work after a day and a half of academic papers on visual culture, punctuated by more ludic interventions, such as a rehearsed reading of Pau Miró’s Plou a Barcelona(It’s Raining in Barcelona), visual poems by Gustavo Vega and J. M. Calleja, and a ‘Journey into unfamiliar space’ workshop with Lidewij Tummers. Later there was a visit to the British Library to

Chapter 1 Breaking Boundaries: from: Barcelona
Author(s) CAULFIELD CARLOTA
Abstract: The primary aim of this chapter is to provide an introduction to twentieth-century Catalan avant-garde movements and groups through a history of visual poetry. This has the advantage both of widening recognition of experimental aesthetic practices beyond Catalonia’s most famous names – Salvador Dalí (1904–89), Joan Miró (1893–1983) and Antoni Gaudí (1852–1926) – and of situating their work within the unique and complex fabric of contemporary Catalan culture. Just as a visual poem may be defined simply as an interdisciplinary artistic creation that blurs the distinction between art and text, so this chapter ranges across names associated

Chapter 5 The Case for Obsolescence: from: Barcelona
Author(s) BALIBREA MARI PAZ
Abstract: In the final scene of Joaquim Jordà’s 1980 film, Numax presenta, a documentary reflecting on the experience of self-management carried out between 1977 and 1979 by workers at Numax, a now-closed factory for the production of domestic appliances located in the Eixample (the district of Barcelona most associated with the middle classes), the protagonists throw a party to celebrate the end of their two-year experiment of life inside the factory.¹ As the group dance and drink within the space they have for so long inhabited for work and political struggle, surrounded by an atmosphere of joy and comradeship, Jordà goes

Chapter 7 The Raval on Stage: from: Barcelona
Author(s) MARCER ELISENDA
Abstract: From 13 March to 23 April 2006, the Spanish theatre company Animalario’s acclaimed production of Hamelinat the Teatre Romea in Barcelona was performed. First staged in Madrid’s Teatro Abadía in October 2005 and having subsequently had its Catalan premiere during Girona’s Temporada Alta festival, the play had already collected four awards at the 2006 Premios Max ceremony, including for best play of the season. Penned by one of Spain’s foremost contemporary playwrights, the Madrid-based Juan Mayorga (1965–), and considered by theatre critics such as Marcos Ordóñez to be Mayorga’s best work so far, the play’s origins in sensationalist

Chapter 9 Empowerment by Visualization: from: Barcelona
Author(s) TUMMERS LIDEWIJ
Abstract: Women in workshops held in Barcelona in 1993 did. Departing from a simple, accessible exercise like the one above, they initiated a debate on domestic labour, the absence of a room of one’s own, and the limitations their spatial environment imposed on experiencing citizenship. In other words, they both questioned their position as women in society and interrogated architectural stereotypes. As a consequence, they took local action.

Chapter 14 Talking about Visual Poetry: from: Barcelona
Author(s) Canals Xavier
Abstract: Three of the most remarkable contemporary visual poets who work in Barcelona are J. M. Calleja, Xavier Canals and Gustavo Vega. A long collaboration with them led to the orchestration of an interactive session with the artists, as part of the 2008 two-day international conference on Contemporary Barcelona: Visual Cultures, Space and Powerat the Institute of Germanic and Romance Studies, organized by Margaret Andrews, Helena Buffery and Carlota Caulfield. Moderated by the Welsh actor David Summer and Carlota Caulfield, the session gave participants and public a unique opportunity to participate in J. M. Calleja’sEmpremtes/Traces/Prints (1976–2006), Gustavo Vega’s

Book Title: France’s Colonial Legacies-Memory, Identity and Narrative
Publisher: University of Wales Press
Author(s): BARCLAY FIONA
Abstract: France’s Colonial Legacies offers a timely intervention in the debates around the French empire and its place in the life of the contemporary nation, drawing on the expertise of researchers working in the fields of politics, media, cultural studies, literature and film, to offer a wide-ranging picture of remembrance in contemporary France.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qhc42

Introduction: from: France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) BARCLAY FIONA
Abstract: We live in an era of commemoration. Thirty years after Pierre Nora made the claim in his magisterial work, Les Lieux de mémoire,it is no less true; indeed, the new millennium may be seen as heralding a high point in memorialisation.² This volume contributes to the debates which continue to be conducted around the place of empire in the contemporary life of the French nation, debates that have been underway since the 1990s and that now reach across public life and society with manifestations in the French parliament, media and universities. Remembrance of the past has come to the

Chapter Eight Continuity and Discontinuity in the Family: from: France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) HANDYSIDE FIONA
Abstract: Arguably one of the most notorious and certainly most critically discussed contemporary French films addressing the question of post-colonial traumas and guilt is Michael Haneke’s Caché(2005): indeed, the film continues to garner considerable critical interest from both French and film scholars.³ At the heart of this film lies an unsuccessful attempt at a (post) colonial adoption by a French family of a young child of Algerian origin, Majid. If much scholarly attention has been paid to the question of the post-colonial subject in Haneke’s film, and the possibilities that the film can be read beyond a specifically national framework

1 Postcolonialism and Wales: from: Emyr Humphreys
Abstract: A discussion of Emyr Humphreys as a postcolonial author involves a number of issues alongside an examination of his work, including whether postcolonial theories are in fact relevant in the study of Welsh literature. However, it is clear from international events in the early years of the twenty-first century that concepts of nation and national identity merit careful examination and are still a motivating force engendering significant repercussions. Throughout the twentieth century a variety of commentators from myriad backgrounds took part in the public discussion of what exactly Welsh identity comprises, alongside literary discussions concerning Welsh literature and its relationship

2 ‘A serious Welsh novelist’: from: Emyr Humphreys
Abstract: Emyr Humphreys’s views on his fiction writing and postcoloniality will be the subject of this chapter. As we have seen, there are a variety of attitudes towards the consideration of Wales as a postcolonial nation. What is of paramount concern here is the attitude of the novelist himself, and the possible reasons for that vision: the personal connections with Wales, the education and career, the important influences, the conjunction of artistic and political aims. An understanding of these issues throws light upon the fiction itself and the reasons for considering it to be postcolonial work. Indeed, one way of regarding

5 Strategies of Resistance: from: Emyr Humphreys
Abstract: Using indigenous myth within a work of fiction is an established postcolonial strategy of resistance. The fact that Humphreys made a practice of using classical myth in a variety of narrative techniques in his fiction before he began to use Celtic myths predominantly does not prevent his use of indigenous myth being considered as a deliberately anti-imperial strategy. ‘The Land of the Living’ sequence is perhaps the best, certainly the most complex, example of his use of a variety of tales from The Mabinogion, although the Blodeuwedd archetype has occurred in his fiction throughout his career.² Humphreys has written extensively

Foreword from: Darogan
Abstract: Until the late Middle Ages the role of the professional Welsh poet by convention and by Law. Poetry and politics were one, and the cultural genealogy of the poet proved the origin of his art in prophecy and divinity.¹ That aside, full engagement with the mode of prophecy is rarely seen in the surviving work of the court poets – or, at the very least, it may be said that the manuscripts (with important exceptions) rarely link the names of these poets with prophetic pieces: the pro phetic ‘origins’ are generally more implicit, more profound, and certainly more intriguing. It is

1 Prophecy, apocalypse and return from: Darogan
Abstract: British history is apocalyptic history, and Welsh literature refects this. The island of Britain was – in one tradition – revealed as a Promised Land in a visionary dream to its founder, and human sovereignty was assured on the defeat of the giant Gogmagog, when the island was given it6s name.¹ Prophecy and apocalypse go hand in hand in this foundation legend, and such apocalypse is refigured repeatedly in the literature as the legendary (and perhaps mythical)² sovereignty of Britain is lost and relost, A constant backdrop,³ it takes centre stage in many of the most monumental works, most famously in the

3 Manuscripts, multilingualism and fragmentation from: Darogan
Abstract: This section presents a focused survey of the medieval manuscripts; it provides context for the study of the daroganauand specifically those of a single manuscript. In the following sections the focus narrows to discuss in more detail the trilingual contents of Peniarth MS 50,Y Cwta Cyfarwydd, and specifically the works associated with ‘Rhys Fardd’. The evidence discussed is presented in the lists and tables found in the appendices.

Chapter One Annie Ernaux and the Narrating of Time from: French Fiction into the Twenty-First Century
Abstract: Since her first publication in 1974, Annie Ernaux (b.1940) has garnered increasing success and critical controversy with each stage of her oeuvre. To date she has published sixteen texts, which divide into four distinct categories. There are the three semiautobiographical novels with which she began her career, Les Armoires vides(1974),Ce qu’ils disent ou rien(1977) andLa Femme gelée(1981), first-person narratives dealing with issues of class and gender as the characters become distanced from their working-class origins through education, and experience oppression in social and domestic spheres. There are then the seven non-fiction texts on which her

Chapter Two Pascal Quignard and the Fringes of Narrative from: French Fiction into the Twenty-First Century
Abstract: Few writers have combined such renown with such eclecticism, such a wide readership for certain texts with such obscurity in others, as has Pascal Quignard (b.1948). He has been at the heart of French literary publishing with twenty-five years working for Gallimard, from professional reader to secrétaire général des Éditions, and has been awarded French literature’s most prestigious honour, the Goncourt Prize (forLes Ombres errantes, 2002). He writes substantial novels of modern French life in a broadly traditional, realist manner (Le Salon du Wurtemberg, 1986;Les Escaliers de Chambord, 1989), as well as sober, reflective historical novels likeTous

Chapter Three Marie Darrieussecq and the Voice of the Mind from: French Fiction into the Twenty-First Century
Abstract: Marie Darrieussecq (b.1969) is the youngest of the five writers, and has at the time of writing barely a decade to her career as a published author. In this short time, however, she has established herself as a significant voice in European literature. Following the succès de scandaleof her first novel,Truismes(1996), which divided critics yet went on to become the kind of publishing sensation not seen in France since Françoise Sagan’sBonjour Tristesse(1954), Darrieussecq has produced six further novels, along with several shorter pieces and non-fiction works.¹ The later novels, which will be our main concern

Book Title: The Brazilian Road Movie-Journeys of (Self) Discovery
Publisher: University of Wales Press
Author(s): BRANDELLERO SARA
Abstract: The innovative collection of essays by a distinguished group of scholars brought together in The Brazilian Road Movie: Journeys of (Self)Discovery represents the first book-length publication on Brazil’s encounters with and reworkings of one of cinema’s most enduringly popular genres.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qhhc7

Chapter One Silvino Santos and the Mobile View: from: The Brazilian Road Movie
Author(s) MARTINS LUCIANA
Abstract: In 1969, the documentary film-maker Silvino Santos was awarded a prize at the First Northern Festival of Brazilian Cinema (I Festival Norte do Cinema Brasileiro) in Manaos, in recognition of his pioneering work on the Amazon. Almost forgotten, aged eighty-two, Silvino Santos had been making films since 1913. In the same festival, the best film award was given to Macunaíma(1969), Joaquim Pedro de Andrade’s adaptation of Mário de Andrade’s novel from 1928. In a period of intensely politicized cultural production at the end of the 1960s, artists were looking back to modernism in order to find answers to contemporary

Chapter Seven Leaving Home in Three Films by Walter Salles from: The Brazilian Road Movie
Author(s) SADLIER DARLENE J.
Abstract: When Walter Salles began making feature films in the early 1990s, Brazilian cinema was at one of its lowest ebbs, occupying at one point less than one percent of the domestic marketplace.² Struggling in the 1980s, the industry was completely derailed by newly-elected President Fernando Collor de Mello’s 1990 austerity programme which included a freeze on all personal savings accounts and the closure of Embrafilme, the government agency that had supported film-making since 1969. Any Brazilian film-maker in this period would have needed to go outside the country for work, or at least for international financing. As a result, for

Book Title: Saul Bass-Anatomy of Film Design
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Horak Jan-Christopher
Abstract: The first book to examine the life and work of this fascinating figure, Saul Bass: Anatomy of Film Design explores the designer's revolutionary career and his lasting impact on the entertainment and advertising industries. Jan-Christopher Horak traces Bass from his humble beginnings as a self-taught artist to his professional peak, when auteur directors like Stanley Kubrick, Robert Aldrich, and Martin Scorsese sought him as a collaborator. He also discusses how Bass incorporated aesthetic concepts borrowed from modern art in his work, presenting them in a new way that made them easily recognizable to the public.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qhm5p

2 Film Titles: from: Saul Bass
Abstract: Having previously branded himself as the most innovative designer of modern Hollywood film titles, Saul Bass took a twenty-year hiatus. Between Seconds(1966) andBroadcast News(1987), he designed only a couple of titles for Otto Preminger, as well asThat’s Entertainment II(1976).¹ He took his name off the credits forLooking for Mr. Goodbar(1977) after a monumental fight with director Richard Brooks, but by then, title work was no longer a factor in the Bass studio business. Apparently, title work on several films in the late 1960s fell through, including a planned prologue and title forHawaii

4 Modernism’s Multiplicity of Views from: Saul Bass
Abstract: If one important conceptual strategy for Saul Bass’s design work was pars pro toto(finding a single image to stand for the whole), then another strategy he developed early on was creating wholes out of many individual parts. Photomontages were important in the Bauhaus, with Moholy-Nagy creating some of the most striking examples, because they taught design students about spatial proportions within the frame and the juxtaposition of intellectual content. Bass’s movie advertisements demonstrate that he was a master at both. Montage on a two-dimensional surface takes the form of a multiplicity of images often separated into panels on a

Book Title: Externalism-Putting Mind and World Back Together Again
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Rowlands Mark
Abstract: The externalist conception of the mind was one of the most significant developments in the philosophy of mind in the second half of the twentieth century. Despite its central importance, however, most recent work on externalism has been very technical, often making the basic ideas and principles difficult for students to grasp. As well, comparatively little work has been done to situate externalism in the history of philosophy, in either analytic and continental traditions. Mark Rowlands remedies both these problems, presenting a clear and accessible introduction to externalism that is grounded in wider developments in the history of philosophy. Rowlands discusses Sartre's radical reversal of idealism and the Husserlian views that prompted it; Wittgenstein's attack on the assimilation of meaning and understanding to an inner process; Putnam's and Burge's thought experiments and the externalism about content to which those experiments gave rise; the scope and limits of content externalism; and the extension of externalism to consciousness.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.cttq46qk

CHAPTER 4 The “radical reversal” of idealism from: Externalism
Abstract: An influential combination of Cartesianism and idealism is to be found in the phenomenology of Edmund Husserl. However, in the work of followers of Husserl we find the roots of what Jean-Paul Sartre, one of those followers, dubs a “radical reversal” of idealism. This radical reversal provides the basis of a very different view of the mind: anti-Cartesian and anti-idealist. Indeed, in this radical reversal of idealism we find what is, in effect, an important source of externalism. This chapter is concerned with Husserlian phenomenology and the radical reversal engendered by it.

CHAPTER 7 The scope and limits of content externalism from: Externalism
Abstract: Chapter 6 examined the arguments for content externalism and an essentially defensive reaction to those arguments – a reaction that is Cartesian in spirit – based on the dual component theory, along with the associated idea of the mental state narrowly individuated. It was argued that this Cartesian reaction to the arguments for externalism faces serious difficulties. Nonetheless, we have not yet worked out the implications of the arguments themselves. If an essentially Cartesian strategy to limit their scope does not work, we have, as yet, done nothing to work out what that scope is. This is the task of this chapter.

CHAPTER 11 Externalist axiology from: Externalism
Abstract: The Cartesian tradition yields a very definite conception of what value– moral, aesthetic and so on – must be. Or, rather, it yields a specific framework of possibilities for the sort of thing value must be. The view of the mind as essentially an interiority – something located entirely inside the skins of mental subjects – presents us with a stark choice when trying to understand the nature of value. Either value must derive from the inside – from the activities of the mind – or it must exist on the outside, objectively present in the world independently of those activities. Broadly speaking, the former

Chora: from: Chora 1
Author(s) Pérez-Gémez Alberto
Abstract: What does architecture represent within the context of everyday life? Given its techno-political context, is it even conceivable that this well-proven instrument of power may represent something other than male, egocentric will or repressive political or economic forces? Could it be that despite its common origin with instrumental and technological forms of representation, it may nonetheless allow for participatory human action and an affirmation of life-towards-death through symbolization as “presencing” through the constructed work, rather than manifest the very denial of man’s capacity to recognize existential meaning in privileged artifacts such as works of art? Could it then embody values

The Measure of Expression: from: Chora 1
Author(s) Bédard Jean-François
Abstract: It was not until the publication in 1933 of Emil Kaufmann’s Von Ledoux bis Le Corbusierthat Jean-Jacques Lequeu was officially ushered into the world of architectural historiography.² Both in this book and in a later article,³ Kaufmann asserted that Lequeu and his colleagues Etienne-Louis Boullee and Claude-Nicolas Ledoux were important forerunners of early twentieth-century modernism. Other historians have analyzed Lequeu’s work since then, variously describing him as a romantic, a surrealist, a dadaist, a schizophrenic, and a pornographer; Philippe Duboy even called him the “pataphysical” alter ego of Marcel Duchamp.⁴ Beyond these differences of interpretation, all agree that Lequeu’s

Architecture as a Site of Reception – Part I: from: Chora 1
Author(s) Kunze Donald
Abstract: In The Gastronomical Me,M.F.K. Fisher noted that our three basic needs for food, security, and love are so intermingled that we cannot think of one without encompassing the others.³ There are two important truths here. The first is that the human mind works so much through a logic of displacement, whereby concerns of one kind are written in the language of another, that in fact mind itself might be regarded as nothing more than the process of displacement.⁴ The second truth is that hunger, its object (food), and its functions (ingestion and digestion) figure prominently in that process.

Fictional Cities from: Chora 1
Author(s) Livesey Graham
Abstract: The practice of architecture in the postindustrial city is both a difficult and an essential task, given the conversion of the public realm into an alien and endless world of ambient images.¹ Through a brief examination of literary works by Bruno Schulz and André Breton, and the architecture of Aldo Rossi, this essay discusses the role that fiction and, hence, narrative can play in the redefinition of the contemporary city. To frame this inquiry, I will propose that there exists a hidden fictional and dialectical counterpart to the real city. This suggests the often overlooked role that narrative plays in

Anaesthetic Induction: from: Chora 1
Author(s) Subotincic Natalija
Abstract: This project is primarily an interpretation of Marcel Duchamp’s works. More specifically, my investigations engage his writings on perspective and the fourth dimension through an examination of his two major projects. The first is The Bride Stripped Bare By Her Bachelors, Even..., also known asThe Large Glass.This piece, begun in 1915, was intentionally left incomplete in 1923. To accompany it, Duchamp wrote a text calledThe Green Box,dated 1934.¹ The second project isEtant Donnes: i° La chute d’eau, 2° Le gas d’eclairage... (translated asGiven: i° The waterfall, 2° The illuminating gas...). Duchamp worked

4 NEUSNER: from: Common Ground
Abstract: The first thing I notice in the story of creation—and I think it is what the story wants me to notice—is that the seventh day, the Sabbath of creation, is the climax of the beginning of creation. Everything is aimed at that one thing, which commemorates and celebrates creation, all in a single sentence: “And God blessed the seventh day and declared it holy, because on it God ceased from all the work of creation that He had done.” That contains the entire message of “in the beginning”:

19 GREELEY: from: Common Ground
Abstract: Just as we are forced to view Adam, Moses, and Abraham through the lens of postprophetic and postexilic Israelite religion, so we must view the work and the person of Moses, our rabbi, through the same lens.

36 NEUSNER: from: Common Ground
Abstract: Now we come to the nub of the matter. Religions can teach one another. These pages have shown that fact. But can they communicate with one another? That is another question, and it defines the single most important problem facing religion for the next hundred years, as for the last, as an intellectual one: how to think through difference, how to account, within one’s own faith and framework, for the outsider, indeed, for many outsiders.

WRITING IN EXILE: from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Urbina José Leandro
Abstract: If I had to define simply, for the purpose of analysis, what I thought a writer was, I would say that he or she is an individual who produces texts by working with a specific language and within

REDEFINING THE CENTRE: from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Algoo-Baksh Stella
Abstract: This paper argues that West Indian Canadian Writers have contributed significantly to a redefinition of the centre.Such writers have moved black characters from the periphery to centre stage, exploring the black experience from the inside rather than from a Eurocentric vantage point. Questioning the “hegemony of the centre,” they often examine the problems of their societies from a fresh perspective. In the process, they expose the insidious effects of colonialism on the colonized, who ultimately lose sight of their own history, heritage and at times even their identity. The author emphasizes the work of Austin Clarke, the pioneer among

NATURE AND IMAGINATION: from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Arauúo Nara
Abstract: The simultaneous recognition of artists from three linguistic areas of the Caribbean seems more than a fateful coincidence and might be explained by other causes. The Nobel and the Cervantes are awarded to a whole body of work, and the Goncourt, in accordance with the statutes of the

POETIC DISCOURSE IN BABYLON: from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Case Frederick Ivor
Abstract: THOUGH DIONNE BRAND is not a member of the Rastafari, her published collections of poetry¹ display characteristics of one who has lived the alienation of Babylon and has had to confront it with the arms at her disposal. While her poetry is essentially about the right to define and to determine one’s own being, it would be misleading to speak of the universal appeal of her work, since there are many who would react sharply to her unambiguous ideological perspectives.²

BANISHED BETWEEN TWO WORLDS: from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Perron Sylvie
Abstract: THE STUDY OF LATIN AMERICAN literature written outside the country of origin leads inevitably to the theme of exile. First treated during the Middle Ages, the problem of exile lends itself in various ways to literary study. One such way is provided by the exiled character him or herself, a source of insight into a wide sphere of social issues. Appearing periodically in Latin American literature to illustrate the various sociopolitical upheavals history, the exile in our own time figures prominently in Chilean writing in Canada, where writers are currently reworking this theme, each in their own style. Of particular

“L’AMÉRIQUE C’EST MOI”: from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Ruprecht Alvina
Abstract: THE WRITINGS OF DANY LAFERRlÈRE, and more specifically his three North American novels¹ centered on the adventures of a sexually insatiable black man, are examples of textual hybridity, characteristic of “Border Writing,” as defined, among others, by Emily Hicks (1991). This notion, inscribed in a geographical metaphor, is the nucleus of a multidisciplinary network of categories useful to the understanding of a writer like Laferriére, whose work paradoxically defies and encompasses borders of all kinds.

CARTOONING AND DEVELOPMENT IN THE CARIBBEAN from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Lent John A.
Abstract: Throughout the 1960s, the Philippine Press Institute and, later the Press Foundation of Asia, worked out what they thought should be the responsibilities of journalists in developing countries. In short, they defined development journalism as

BEAUTIFUL LIES: from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Vallejo Catharina
Abstract: THE APPEARANCE OF FOUR MAJOR literary works in the space of five years in Santo Domingo between 1877 and 1882 marks the first flourishing of Dominican literature.¹ Until that time, except for short stories and some legends in verse, only one book-length literary work had been published in the city, an anthology of Dominican poetry in 1874.² The Fantasías indíjenasby José Joaquin Pérez, of 1877, is the first volume of poetry published in Santo Domingo by a Dominican author; in 1879 Manuel de Jesús Galván published Part I of the first novel with a Dominican theme,Enriquillo(completed in

Book Title: Everyone Says No-Public Service Broadcasting and the Failure of Translation
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): CONWAY KYLE
Abstract: Quebec has never signed on to Canada's constitution. After both major attempts to win Quebec's approval - the Meech Lake and Charlottetown Accords - failed, Quebec came within a fraction of a percentage point of voting for independence. Everyone Says No examines how the failure of these accords was depicted in French and English media and the ways in which journalists' reporting failed to translate the differences between Quebec and the rest of Canada. Focusing on the English- and French-language networks of the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation, Kyle Conway draws on the CBC/Radio Canada rich print and video archive as well as journalists' accounts of their reporting to revisit the story of the accords and the furor they stirred in both French and English Canada. He shows that CBC/Radio Canada attempts to translate language and culture and encourage understanding among Canadians actually confirmed viewers' pre-existing assumptions rather than challenging them. The first book to examine translation in Canadian news, Everyone Says No also provides insight into Canada's constitutional history and the challenges faced by contemporary public service broadcasters in increasingly multilingual and multicultural communities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.cttq93tk

3 “¡Silencio, he dicho!” Space, Language, and Characterization as Agents of Social Protest in Lorca’s Rural Tragedies from: Reading Modern Drama
Author(s) BLUM BILHA
Abstract: “The art of our time,” said Susan Sontag, “is noisy with appeals for silence” (12). Although originally meant as an assessment of the cultural function of modern art, Sontag’s juxtaposition of such antithetical terms as “noise” and “silence” places the work of art at a stylistic and thematic crossroads where the explicit and the implicit, the visible and the invisible, text and subtext or, indeed, what is said, shown, or done (and therefore “noisy”) and what is not, can meet and interact. Each one of these levels constitutes an integral part of the work of art and, as such, it

5 The Space Stage and the Circus: from: Reading Modern Drama
Author(s) CARRUTH ALLISON
Abstract: In 1926, two experimental theatre companies in Greenwich Village sponsored an international exposition to showcase avant-garde work in dramaturgy, stagecraft, and acting. In the exposition’s keynote address, Bauhaus-trained architect Frederick Kiesler, whose circus-inspired “space stage” had debuted two years previously in Vienna, called on New York theatre practitioners to develop an “agitator’s theatre” that would be radical in form and ideology and that would be rooted not in the conventions of the proscenium-arch stage but in the practices of popular subcultures. This essay argues that Kiesler’s polemic profoundly influenced modernist poet E.E. Cummings,³ who attended the exposition as a theatre

8 Uncloseting Drama: from: Reading Modern Drama
Author(s) SALVATO NICK
Abstract: In the late winter and early spring of 2005, the New York theatre troupe the Wooster Group staged, both in Brooklyn and Manhattan, a limited return engagement of their 1999 piece House/Lights, an “adaptation” of Gertrude Stein’s 1938 playDoctor Faustus Lights the Lights. The word “adaptation” belongs firmly in scare quotes, not only because it is a methodological description that the members of the Wooster Group would themselves resist, but also because it simultaneously over- and underrepresents the terms of the group’s engagement with Stein’s text. If an adaptation is a modified version of a work that nevertheless retains

7 Appropriations: from: Endless Propaganda
Abstract: A defining attribute of culture at the end of the twentieth century is the appeal of the eclectic, a penchant for hybrids, fusions, bricolage. And this attribute of the culture is reflected in its advertising. Consider events in the United States, always the home of experiment, in 1997 and 1998: the federal government adopted paid PSAs (for the census and for anti-drug campaigns), the Ad Council agreed to tailor PSAs to the network’s promotional efforts, the Arthritis Foundation turned to an ad-supported infomercial to raise funds, and the Children’s Television Network (purveyors ofSesame Street) proudly announced a new initiative

[PART V: Introduction] from: Endless Propaganda
Abstract: Foucault was wrong. Not completely wrong, because ‘the panoptic machine’ certainly did work to discipline the individual, but wrong about spectacle, a power which has waxed greatly in the twentieth century. Understanding why and how requires a quick tour through both theory and history.

Conclusion: from: Endless Propaganda
Abstract: The poster was by Barbara Kruger, a radical, a feminist, a film critic, and an artist already well known for her unusual presentations of social and political dissent. The next year that image would appear in an art book entitled Love for Sale, published by Abrams, further evidence of Kruger’s stature. During the 1980s and 1990s she has had exhibitions throughout the United States, in western Europe, and in Australia and New Zealand. Kruger was trained in the graphic arts and worked, in the 1970s, at Condé Nast Publications. One source of her inspiration was feminism. Another was French theory,

2 The Ethnographic Context from: Mal'uocchiu
Abstract: Since 1977, I have conducted periodic field research among Sicilian Canadians residing in a large urban centre of Southern Ontario, Canada. I also have travelled to Sicily, where I collected background information. Although my work has focused on various topics, I have concentrated primarily on idioms of distress– the culturally recognized means by which members of a particular group interpret and communicate their experience of some kinds of suffering (Nichter 1981 and Parsons 1984). The specific idioms I have examined include the evil eye (Migliore 1981; 1983; 1990), pain (Migliore 1989) and, more recently, the concept of ‘nerves’ (Migliore

5 Mal’uocchiu in Everyday Experience from: Mal'uocchiu
Abstract: During a telephone conversation, several weeks before I began to write this book, I revealed to my mother that I was concerned about how some community members might react to my publishing a book on mal’uocchiu. My concern was, and still is, that certain individuals, people who have not participated in the study, will feel that I am presenting a negative image of Sicilian Canadians – that I am depicting community members as ‘superstitious’ people. This is not my intent, but I obviously have no control over how others will interpret my work. My mother’s response surprised me. She stated:

7 Conclusion from: Mal'uocchiu
Abstract: I would like to begin the conclusion the same way I began the introduction – with an analogy. The analogy involves what is probably Pirandello’s (1952b) best-known play, Six Characters in Search of an Author.¹ The work focuses on six partially developed characters who have been discarded by their creator. As the drama unfolds, the characters enter the stage and interrupt a theatre company about to rehearse a play. The characters are in search of an author who can give them a more definitive ‘form,’ and an opportunity to communicate their story. Although the drama presents the characters’ story (or

1968-2 from: Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: The day before yesterday, I did most of the first chapter on method, and first of all I noted that there are three approaches to the notion of method: first, a purely empirical approach, where method is more an art than a science; secondly, a selective approach, where one picks the successful science and analyzes it and wishes all other sciences to be science insofar as they conform to it; that’s quite unsatisfactory for the less successful sciences that need more help really than anyone else; and consequently we were trying to work out a third approach through an analysis

1968 from: Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: Question: Do you exclude the possibility of another animal developing that won’t work in this irrevisable structure?

Introduction: from: Fighting Words and Images
Author(s) MULLER ADAM
Abstract: Julius van der Merwe fraudulently enlisted with the South African Air Force (SAAF) at the age of fourteen. From July 1942 until the end of the Second World War, he operated the tail guns of a B-26 Marauder.¹ Part of the Desert Air Force and later the Balkan Air Force, both under British command, the SAAF and van der Merwe along with it fought in North Africa, Italy, and Yugoslavia. Upon cessation of hostilities, van der Merwe stayed in northern Italy in order to assist with troop demobilization, the grunt work of getting tens of thousands of men and their

[SECTION ONE: Introduction] from: Fighting Words and Images
Abstract: The three chapters gathered together in this section address the silences arising from, and complicating, the representation of war. Each of them considers silence not so much as an absence as it does as a technique for indirectly evoking war, a large and multifaceted phenomenon whose complexity resists comprehensive articulation at nearly every turn. Jay Winter, Kate McLoughlin, and Brad Prager all work to show how silences about war may be deployed to animate an understanding of warʹs representational elusiveness. Each author, however, locates this elusiveness in different representational domains: Winter in commemorations of war organized around the construction of

12 ʹRuins: from: Fighting Words and Images
Author(s) BAKER SIMON
Abstract: The period between the conclusion of hostilities on the Western Front in 1918 and the start of the Second World War twenty years later is one within which several cultural trajectories comprising the subjects of this essay overlap: the reconstruction of the built environment in north-eastern France (the devastated areas known as the ʹRed Zonesʹ); the development and popularization of modernist and avant-garde photography in Europe; and the development and cultural assimilation of the work of Sigmund Freud, both in avant-garde literary and artistic circles and more widely in popular cultural forms such as ʹpulpʹ fiction. These three very different

1 Introduction from: Civility
Abstract: The origins of this book are rooted in my childhood. My father worked for the United Nations, so we moved from one country to another every three or four years. I came to be fascinated by the manner in which people differed from one place to another. In the British school, we were sent to the principal if we were caught using a ballpoint instead of a fountain pen. In the American school, we were forbidden from using fountain pens. In the French school, we could use anything we wanted to just as long as we didn’t forget to stand

Book Title: Magical Imaginations-Instrumental Aesthetics in the English Renaissance
Publisher: University of Toronto Press
Author(s): GUENTHER GENEVIEVE JULIETTE
Abstract: With this new understanding of early modern magic, and a fresh context for compelling readings of classic literary works, Magical Imaginationsreveals the central importance of magic to English literary history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3138/9781442693951

5 Nationalism from: Herder's Political Thought
Abstract: Herder has long been seen as a central thinker in the development of a historical and cultural particularity that has fuelled nationalist claims for self-determination. Today his work still provides a powerful theoretical justification for oppressed communities to pursue their cultural and political autonomy. Linguistic and cultural domination of minority communities by the state is conceptualized in Herder’s theory as a fundamental issue of justice. Sovereigns have a duty to tolerate the cultural diversity within their states; indeed, they are obligated to honour that diversity.

Conclusion from: Herder's Political Thought
Abstract: Herder’s thought displays a richness and subtlety that with some notable exceptions has been inadequately appreciated in the Anglo-American tradition. There are now sufficient translations from which it is possible to obtain a far richer grasp of the complexity of his ideas, but there is still considerable work that needs to be done in this regard. This lack is itself indicative of the relatively scant scholarly attention paid in the English-speaking world to one of Germany’s most important thinkers of the eighteenth century. Despite the general acknowledgment of his profound influence on the development of a wide range of disciplines

chapter nine ‘Honest mirth & merriment’: from: Redrawing the Map of Early Modern English Catholicism
Author(s) JENSEN PHEBE
Abstract: In the absence of an institutional Catholic Church in England after the Reformation, lay piety loomed particularly large in the English recusant community’s efforts to sustain a sense of religious identity and culture. Though scholars of early modern Catholicism once disagreed about whether early modern Catholic culture was characterized by the survival of late medieval traditions or the influence of missionary priests, recent work on both English and Continental Catholicism has shown that it was in fact defined by complex interactions between the two, as the traditions of the past and the spiritual directives of the Counter-Reformation merged, clashed, and

Introduction from: Avant-Garde Canadian Literature
Abstract: In 1927, Europe and America’s avant-garde arrived in Toronto for a month-long exhibition of the strangest, most disturbing, most bizarre, and most exciting visual art being made anywhere in the Western world. The show included hundreds of works by 106 active, contemporary artists from twenty-three different countries, including work by cubists such as Pablo Picasso, Alexander Archipenko, Georges Braque, and Fernand Léger; Futurists like Wassily Kandinsky, Umberto Boccioni, and Joseph Stella; Dadaists like Marcel Duchamp, Kurt Schwitters, and Francis Picabia; Surrealists like Max Ernst, Hans Arp, and Joan Miró; and other avant-garde experimentalists like Joseph Albers, Paul Klee, and Piet

Chapter Three Canadian Surrealism: from: Avant-Garde Canadian Literature
Abstract: Situated somewhere between the Cosmic Canadian pursuit of a postcolonial Canadian art through spiritualized abstraction and the TISHrealization of a postcolonial Canadian geopoetics is another group of artists who worked with the explicit ambition of liberating art and, by doing so, revolutionizing their society. The Automatists of Montreal are the most celebrated and recognizable avant-garde movement in Canada’s history. All of the hallmarks of canonical avant-garde behaviour are present: they self-identified as a group, performed or exhibited as representatives of the group, wrote manifestos that sought to articulate the aesthetic ambitions of the collective, and produced work with radically

Introduction from: Petrarch's 'Fragmenta'
Abstract: In Petrarch’s composition of Rerum vulgarium fragmenta (Fragments of Vernacular Matters) over more than four decades, the conscious manipulation of narrative time is critical.¹ The story that is told and the account of the telling are constantly interwoven and complicated by their relationship to the author’s life. In recognition of the intrinsic complexity of the work’s narrative and compositional scheme, recent commentators have voiced scepticism about long-accepted interpretations of the work.² As Marco Santagata writes, “Delle strutture simboliche, dei sovrasensi, della complessa trama di richiami di cui il libro è gravato, né i contemporanei, né i posteri si sono accorti.

Conclusion from: Petrarch's 'Fragmenta'
Abstract: As new critical perspectives unfold, today’s reader can better grasp how the publication and reception of Rerum vulgarium fragmentahas varied over the centuries, revealing the literary biases of different eras. Starting with Velutello’sIl Petrarca(1525), the original structure and sequence of theFragmentawas lost sight of as the work was cut apart and rearranged. Though later editions included all 366 poems in the proper order, the convention of beginning Part 2 at poem 267 and titling the parts “in vita” and “in morte” persisted. Writing in the second half of the sixteenth century, Antonio Minturno perceived the

A letter to my English-speaking friends from: The Vigil of Quebec
Author(s) DUMONT FERNAND
Abstract: This book is not a portrait of Quebec. Nor does it even offer an explanation for the change in all areas that has characterized what is generally known as the ‘Quiet Revolution.’ I am concerned less with isolating the forces at work than with looking for the attitudes I ought to adopt as I confront the destiny of that fragile community which is my own.

The time of the elders from: The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: In the 1930s, at the time when Saint-Denys Garneau, Jean-Louis Gagnon, André Laurendeau, and others were beginning to do their writing, I was just a little boy, carefully protected from books by my working-class milieu. I was more concerned about stealing apples from the neighbouring farmers than participating in the intellectual or political confrontations of the period. As I develop, however, I feel myself increasingly involved in those past events. They have changed, but only in appearance. Today, like yesterday, we are circling the same difficulty or empêchement(the term is that of Jean Le Moyne): we are always prowling

After the war: from: The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: When the war broke out in 1939 powerful forces of change were at work in our midst, but for a long time their activity was subterranean. We did not become really aware of them until the period from 1940 to 1960, and men in our society are still busy looking for the consequences of these changes.

Tasks before the nationalist from: The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: Let us stop to consider some current criticism. At first sight, our nationalist associations have no future, and this is a statement one often hears made. Until fairly recently, so the claim goes, they did excellent work, but now they are out of date. For a long time they were active in the general area of social problems; however, in the past few years a number of new organizations with specific objectives have appeared. What purpose can a national association serve in a minor supporting role? Again, like many Québécois, these associations have come to the independentist choice. There is

Our culture: from: The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: How can we evaluate the development of our culture during the past decade? What new challenges confront it? In connection with such questions we can only put forward here some hypotheses for reflection. Therefore I shall not draw up another balance sheet of our intellectual production over the past ten years, or even of educational reform. They have both been done often enough in books or periodicals. But I wonder to what extent, in these various attempts, we have succeeded in working out a new cultural debate. What changes have we made in the meaning of our collective utterance? Into

Socialism for Quebec from: The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: We all know how the problem of economic power is traditionally looked at in our milieu. As we have never had a substantial bourgeoisie of our own, and control almost none of the big machinery of capitalist growth, our ideas on these lines could only sway between the contestation of the modern economy in the abstract, and claims launched in the name of the national collectivity. Inevitably the class struggle has escaped us, all the more so as the economic powers that could have been challenged by our working class were, because of the nationality of the holders of power,

What is a political program? from: The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: Our society may be working out a serious kind of political thinking, but we are still groping, as it is particularly difficult to relate together such disparate requirements as our economic weakness and our desire for independence, our democratic aspirations and our socialist inclinations. These difficulties are reflected in the program of the Parti québécois. Not surprisingly, it gives rise to a type of thinking that, though committed, is still critical. Combining political conviction and free inquiry, unconnected with election-time manoeuvring, is no doubt one indication among others that things can change in Quebec’s political life.

What is politics? from: The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: The collective planning of a future can never be identified primarily with a political party program. Not that political parties are to be scorned: they represent collections of opinions, interests, and ideas that have surfaced in a combination of historical circumstances and, at the risk of hardening, have sometimes gone under later on. But political parties have their own logic, originating in the needs of their struggle to reach power. They skim the projects emerging in their vicinity, even though they make more discreet accommodations with those more subtle forces at work in the collectivities.

Introduction: from: Merleau-Ponty and Marxism
Abstract: This is a study of Maurice Merleau-Ponty’s politics. For one reason or another, students of Merleau-Ponty’s thought have only superficially examined its political dimension. Most scholars have sought to explain particular aspects of his philosophical work. Some have used his writings as a quarry of raw materials to be extracted and refined for their own constructions. A few have studied Merleau-Ponty’s writings sympathetically in order to think along with him and reason through new matters in a style they have learned from him. But this is to be a critical account. It treats his views of public affairs and political

4 The eclipse of the middle way from: Merleau-Ponty and Marxism
Abstract: Sartre called Merleau-Ponty’s understanding of Soviet and world politics during the immediate post-war period ‘one-eyed’ while everyone else’s was blind.¹ Yet his recognition of the hazy and ambiguous forces at work in the world only prompted vilification from blind men who thought they saw things clearly. Humanisme et Terreur, Merleau-Ponty’s first extended reflection upon public affairs, provoked hostility from both left and right, a preview of how virtually all his political writings were to be received. Often, though, the criticisms of his contemporaries were the result of gross and perhaps wilful misunderstanding.

6 Virtù without resignation from: Merleau-Ponty and Marxism
Abstract: What attention has been paid to Les Aventures de la Dialectiquehas shown little appreciation for its structure or its significance. Understandably enough, philosophers have tended to direct their concern towards the essays inSignesand the limpid but indirect prose of his two posthumous works. For example, Claude Lefort, who has devoted as much attention to the texts of Merleau-Ponty as anyone, traced the line of thought indicated initially inTitres et Travauxthrough its successive incarnations first inLa Prose du Monde, a manuscript from the 1951-2 period, then in his lectures at the Collège de France, and

Dante’s Three Communities: from: The World of Dante
Author(s) MAZZEO JOSEPH ANTHONY
Abstract: The divina commedia is a journey from misery to bliss, from illusion and ignorance to perfect love and knowledge, from clamour to peace, and from slavery to freedom. As a work of art, I think we have no other to compare with it in philosophic richness and perfection of execution, both in its grand design and its smallest detail. In a way, it is hard to think of it as having been written over many years. In spite of its epic proportions and encyclopaedic character, its astonishing union of massive erudition and poetic splendour and variety, the poem is so

Dante’s Katabasis and Mission from: The World of Dante
Author(s) SAROLLI GIAN ROBERTO
Abstract: Dante’s creative task has been defined as of “superhuman difficulty.” This is clearly discernible in the language of the poem; for although the Commedia, considered as a whole, seems astonishingly light and simple—thanks to its clear and orderly structure—there is no single passage that does not reflect tension and effort; one is left with the impression that the work at every step demanded of Dante a boundless devotion, an unstinting expenditure of himself. No less devotion, no less unstinting expenditure of self is demanded of Dante scholars when they are faced by the difficult question of whether or

Introduction from: The Narcissistic Text
Abstract: For some forty years now and since well before his premature death in an automobile accident in 1960, Albert Camus has been considered one of the most significant and influential writers of this century. Eloquent testimony to this fact is furnished by the several thousands of articles and books that have been devoted to the man and his work in countless countries on all five continents and in languages as diverse as Russian, Arabic, and Japanese.¹ That this status as one of the ‘classics’ of French literature would only be disputed precisely within the boundaries of his native land is

1 The Writing on the Blackboard from: The Narcissistic Text
Abstract: One finds in Camus’ fiction a curious and unremarked predilection for blackboards and analogous objects that fulfil the same function as circumscribed surfaces to be written upon. There is the blackboard on which the rebel Arabs leave Daru’s death sentence at the end of the short story ‘L’Hôte.’ The long process during which Joseph Grand labours painstakingly over the single sentence he seeks to perfect is also worked out on a blackboard, his room being described thus: ‘On remarquait seulement un rayon de bois blanc garni de deux ou trois dictionnaires, et un tableau noir sur lequel on pouvait lire

2 The Autoreferential Text: from: The Narcissistic Text
Abstract: This work starts out by explicitly designating itself as a text: ‘Les curieux événements qui font le sujet de cette chronique se sont produits en 194., à Oran.’ (i, 1217) Texts or parts or aspects of texts are mentioned

3 The Self-Generating Text: from: The Narcissistic Text
Abstract: In this chapter, I shall be looking at a different form of narcissism from that operative in La Peste. Thetextualnarcissism of the latter novel will give way to thelinguisticnarcissism that can be seen at work within the very texture of the text as it spins itself out in a process of autogeneration, continually mirroring itself so that production and reproduction become synonymous.

6 Just between Texts: from: The Narcissistic Text
Abstract: In the previous chapters, I have spoken of the way the Camusian text functions within itself, produces its own reflection, as well as the way it reproduces within itself its relationship to its reader. It remains to consider the manner in which the different texts relate to one another, for here too a mirroring effect can be seen to be at work. The intertextuality¹ in question is of a very special kind since no texts by other writers are concerned. In fact, if one were to consider the whole of Camus’ works as one single text, then one could more

Foreword from: French Existentialism
Author(s) Mascall E. L.
Abstract: A GREAT DEAL has been written about Existentialism in recent years, but this work of Dr. Kingston’s seems to me to occupy a unique and important place, and this for two reasons. First, in my opinion he seems to raise those questions about the Existentialist movement which most immediately spring to the mind of any intelligent Christian who finds himself confronted with it. Is the movement a reaction against Christian orthodoxy as such, or is it an attempt to recover certain Christian insights which Christians themselves have largely forgotten? If it is the former, how are we to explain the

Chapter Three LANGUAGE AND COMMUNION from: French Existentialism
Abstract: One of the most noteworthy characteristics of the writings of Marcel, Sartre, Camus and Simone de Beauvoir is that their philosophy is expressed not only in traditional discursive form but also in plays and novels. A question that we must ask is why philosophy is expressed in this way? It would be absurd for rational philosophers such as Spinoza and Leibniz to express philosophy in imaginative works because the subjective idea which the word embodies is reality for them and this reality is beyond any temporal process.

Chapter Four PHENOMENOLOGY from: French Existentialism
Abstract: The method of philosophy which the French non-Christian existentialists choose is phenomenology, which has been inherited from Husserl and Heidegger, and if the approach of Sartre and his followers to philosophy is to be understood their debt to these two German thinkers must be remembered. The Christian existentialists have also, in their own way, been interested in phenomenology. Marcel developed his own phenomenological method before Husserl’s works were known and he is regarded by some as a more authentic phenomenologist than Husserl or the non-Christian existentialists.¹ Gilson affirms that the phenomenological method has effected the most profound study of the

Chapter Eight VALUES from: French Existentialism
Abstract: A comparison of values¹ in the writings of Christian and non-Christian French existentialists must necessarily be inadequate because Sartre’s expected work on ethics has not yet been published. However, in Sartre’s own writings and in those of Simone de Beauvoir, a great deal of the ethical approach of the non-Christian existentialists has been revealed.

Introduction from: Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Affleck R. T.
Abstract: PEOPLE IN MONTREAL feel that the enormous impact and enormous success of Expo in many ways transcends architecture as such. Professor Bruno Zevi in his life and his work is an example of an architect who transcends architecture. This one can see in a moment when one examines his activities as a historian, a scholar, a professor, a writer, a journalist, and a practising architect, planner, and consultant. He has been involved in Expo as a consultant to the Italian pavilion. He has been involved in direct education in a very meaningful way at the University of Rome as professor

Introduction from: Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Gauvin William
Abstract: LINUS PAULING was born in Oregon and was educated at Oregon State College where he obtained a Bachelor’s degree in Chemical Engineering in 1922. The following year he married Ava Helen Miller. In addition to being a constant source of inspiration during the next forty-five years, Mrs. Pauling has, in recent times, become a collaborator in her husband’s work for world peace.

Introduction from: Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Volkoff George M.
Abstract: PROFESSOR HIDEKI YUKAWA was born in Tokyo sixty years ago. He received his education in Kyoto, obtaining his Master’s degree at the age of 22. He then was a lecturer and assistant professor at the Universities of Osaka and Kyoto. At the early age of 27 he conceived and published a piece of work which later led to his being awarded the Nobel Prize in physics. He then proceeded to complete his Doctorate degree, and was appointed full professor at the University of Kyoto in 1939. In 1948 he came to the United States, where he visited the Institute for

Introduction from: Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Herzberg G.
Abstract: PROFESSOR H. B. G. CASIMIR is known throughout the world for his fundamental contributions to theoretical physics. He was a student of the late Professor Ehrenfest at Leyden University in Holland. Ehrenfest was an extraordinary teacher who saw to it that his outstanding students had an opportunity to visit other centres of physics and meet the foremost workers in the field. I happened to be at Gottingen University thirty-eight years ago, at the time when Ehrenfest had come there for several weeks bringing along two young students, Casimir and Uhlenbeck. It was here that I had the first opportunity to

Introduction from: Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Harrison J. M.
Abstract: MME VALERIE TROITSKAYA has a doc torate in physical and mathematical sciences, and is chief of the department of the electromagnetic field in the Institute of Physics of the Earth in Moscow. This group co-ordinates the investigations of rapid variations of the earth’s magnetic field. To see Mme Troitskaya in her Moscow laboratory, as I did recently, takes a bit of luck, because she is responsible for overseeing a network of magnetic observatories extending over the whole of the Soviet Union and Mongolia. Moreover, she has helped out in various African countries as well as making studies in the French

Book Title: The Unmaking of Home in Contemporary Art- Publisher: University of Toronto Press
Author(s): LAUZON CLAUDETTE
Abstract: In a world where the notion of home is more traumatizing than it is comforting, artists are using this literal and figurative space to reframe human responses to trauma. Building on the scholarship of key art historians and theorists such as Judith Butler and Mieke Bal, Claudette Lauzon embarks upon a transnational analysis of contemporary artists who challenge the assumption that ‘home’ is a stable site of belonging. Lauzon’s boundary-breaking discussion of artists including Krzysztof Wodiczko, Sanitago Sierra, Doris Salcedo, and Yto Barrada posits that contemporary art offers a unique set of responses to questions of home and belonging in an increasingly unwelcoming world. From the legacies of Colombia’s ‘dirty war’ to migrant North African workers crossing the Mediterranean, The Unmaking of Home in Contemporary Art bears witness to the suffering of others whose overriding notion of home reveals the universality of human vulnerability and the limits of empathy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3138/j.ctt1whm8v6

3 Unhomely Archives from: The Unmaking of Home in Contemporary Art
Abstract: Lida Abdul’s video Housewheel(2003) follows the Afghani artist as she walks and runs through the streets of inner-city Los Angeles, dragging a doll-sized white plaster house behind her with a rope. As it is jolted along, the house becomes dented, chipped, and battered; within minutes, it is reduced to scattered, abandoned pieces. Created during the Taliban regime while Abdul was living in exile, the work is a poignant performance of Gaston Bachelard’s observation that homes “are in us as much as we are in them.”¹ As much as we consider (or long for) home as a space that we

4 Biennial Culture’s Reluctant Nomads from: The Unmaking of Home in Contemporary Art
Abstract: In October 2007, Doris Salcedo performed another sort of archaeological dig when she occupied the massive space of the Tate Modern’s Turbine Hall with Shibboleth, a 548-foot fissure that snakes its way along the length of the floor, beginning as a hairline crack and at times gaping to expose what appears to be a bottomless crevasse, lined with concrete and chain-link fencing. A complex meditation on the experience of immigration that simultaneously evokes the often treacherous experience of crossing borders and the “negative space” occupied by migrants within the increasingly policed borders of the European Union, the work seems determined

Book Title: Kathleen Jamie-Essays and Poems on Her work
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Falconer Rachel
Abstract: Kathleen Jamie's works are classics. No one can read Kathleen Jamie and remain indifferent or unchanged. Nationally acclaimed since her first major publications in the 1980s, Jamie stands out from other contemporary poets in her exceptional musicality, her strikingly unusual perspectives, her wry humour, translucent imagery, and hard-edged economy of expression. These 16 newly commissioned critical essays and 7 previously unpublished poems by leading poets make up the first full-length study of Kathleen Jamie's writing. The essays discuss all of her poetry collections, including The Queen of Sheba (1994), Jizzen (1999), Mr and Mrs Scotland Are Dead: Poems 1980-94 (2002), The Tree House (2004) and The Overhaul (2012), as well as her travel writing, including Among Muslims (2002), her nature writing, Findings (2005) and Sightlines (2012) and her collaborative work, including Frissure (2013), with artist Brigid Collins. Whether engaging with national politics, with gender, with landscape and place, or with humanity's relation to the natural environment, this volume demonstrates that Kathleen Jamie's verse teaches us new ways of listening, of seeing and of living in the contemporary world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt14brxr6

Introduction from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Falconer Rachel
Abstract: The ‘green and ventricular cave’, where this speaker imagines teaching herself to listen, might also stand for the space where poetry is being read these days – somewhere quiet and removed, one would hope – somewhere the word can still shudder up against silence in the reader’s mind. Kathleen Jamie’s work has been around in the public domain since 1982. She has been the recipient of numerous national awards, and in the past decade, has frequently been in the public eye or ear – in the national newspapers, or on BBC Radio. We are so used to having her around (by ‘we’ I

1. A Poetics of Listening from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Lawrence Faith
Abstract: This ‘web of our noticing’ is a significant image in Kathleen Jamie’s work, and the precursor of another web: the one woven by the ‘sulphur-and-black-striped’ spider in her 2012 collection The Overhaul.

4. Transcending the Urban: from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Bell Amanda
Abstract: Speaking in Enniskillen, Northern Ireland in August 2013, Kathleen Jamie remarked that her interest in writing about the natural world began a decade earlier, a reference to the 2004 publication of The Tree House.¹ However, the seeds of her ecological sensibility are evident in the 1994 collectionThe Queen of Sheba, which can be seen as the beginning of her mature work. Usually noted for its ‘various forensic critiques of modern Scotland’,² the collection can also be read as a paradigm for the development of an ecopoetics.

6. ‘An Orderly Rabble’: from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Baker Timothy L.
Abstract: In a recent discussion of W. S. Graham, Natalie Pollard highlights what Graham terms the ‘difficulty of speaking from a fluid identity’, arguing that he ‘depicts a world in which words are not obediently representative, and language neither serves as a vehicle for self-expression, nor lends itself to autobiography’.¹ While a similar sense of flux and indeterminacy can be found throughout Jamie’s work, it is especially visible in Jizzen(1999). LikeThe Queen of Sheba,Jizzenhas often been approached in terms of its clear parallels between national and individual identity, particularly in relation to its focus on birth and

7. ‘Sweet-Wild Weeks’: from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Simpson Juliet
Abstract: ‘To the day of St. Bride, / the first sweet-wild weeks of your life / I willingly surrender’: the last tercet of Jamie’s ‘February’ concentrates a fiercely tender chiaroscuro of birth and being, which is arguably the pulse-beat and enigma of Jamie’s 1999 collection, Jizzen ( J14). The collection’s guiding theme of ‘birth’, figured in ‘February’ as a plenitude of the ordinary, is charged with an abrupt luminosity of extraordinary connection that patterns the animal and earthy, ‘the hare in jizzen’ with the bodily and cultural (‘women’s work’) and other resonant ‘deliveries’ and discoveries of being and birthright (J45).

12. Into the Centre of Things: from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Bell Eleanor
Abstract: These reflections on walking in the Cairngorms are from Nan Shepherd’s The Living Mountain, written in the 1940s. For Shepherd, the ‘total experience’ offered by the mountains opened up deeper channels of the self, during which, she writes, ‘I am not out of myself, but in myself. I am’.¹ Previous critics have picked up on the meditative qualities within Shepherd’s work, where the mountains always remain magical and ultimately impenetrable in her Zen-like reflections: ‘The journey is itself part of the technique by which the god is sought. It is a journey into Being; for as I penetrate more deeply

13. ‘Connective Leaps’: from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Gairn Louisa
Abstract: When asked to define the genre of her 2005 essay collection, Findings, Kathleen Jamie encountered a challenge: ‘ There didn’t really seem to be a word for it’, she notes;¹ ‘It’s not nature writing, but it is; it’s not autobiography, but it is; it’s not travel writing, but it is’.² Matt McGuire notes that her work ‘disrupts the demarcation lines within recent Scottish criticism’, operating ‘in the gaps, in the places where other discourses fail to reach’.³ Similar border-crossings take place in Jamie’s latest book of essays,Sightlines(2012), which, together with her latest poetry collection,The Overhaul(2012), continues

16. ‘We Do Language Like Spiders Do Webs’: from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Johnston Maria
Abstract: Introducing Kathleen Jamie and Douglas Dunn at a poetry reading titled ‘The Friendship of Poets’ – part of the symposium Comparisons and Relations between Irish and Scottish Poetry Since 1890at Queen’s University Belfast in 2006 – the Northern Irish poet Michael Longley paid fitting tribute to Jamie as a poet of magnitude and metamorphosis, whose ‘generous, transfiguring imagination [. . .] takes in the world’.² ‘She has perfect pitch, a natural sense of cadence and verbal melody that helps to give her work the feel of organic inevitability’, Longley continued, making clear his profound appreciation for, and attentiveness to, Jamie’s sonorous,

Introduction from: Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self
Author(s) STOKES PATRICK
Abstract: Questions of self-constitution and personal identity have been amongst the most heavily contested topics in Anglophone philosophy over the last half-century. Yet the pedigree of this discussion goes back considerably further. Such questions are clearly at work as early as the second-century theologians Athenagoras and Irenaeus, who worried about how identity could be preserved in bodily resurrection,¹ and this eschatological dimension to the question was still very much alive in early modern discussions of mind and identity. Even Locke’s treatment of personal identity in his Essay Concerning Human Understanding– which has conditioned the entire discussion to the present day to

7 The End in the Beginning: from: Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self
Author(s) HELMS ELEANOR
Abstract: The controversy over the role of narrative in Kierkegaard’s philosophy concerns whether it is desirable for a self to be able to produce some kind of life-narrative. Anthony Rudd, extending the work of Marya Schechtman in The Constitution of Selves, insists that while lives have unity beyond the explicit narratives we tell, we should be able to provide articulated narratives when asked (Rudd 2012: 180, 205; Schechtman 1996: 113–19). John Lippitt has argued, on the other hand, that an important feature of selfhood is the recognition that life resists narrative (2007: 45). In other words, Rudd claims it is

8 Forgiveness and the Rat Man: from: Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self
Author(s) LIPPITT JOHN
Abstract: It is surprising to write a couple of articles and receive a book in response. Yet such has been the flattering reaction to my own modest contribution to the debate about whether or not Kierkegaard should be classed as a ‘narrativist’ in any interesting sense (Lippitt 2005, 2007). Both John J. Davenport (the author of the book in question) and Anthony Rudd have in recent work sought to clarify the conception of ‘narrative’ that they see as operative in Kierkegaard (Davenport 2011, 2012; Rudd 2007b, 2008a, 2012). In doing so, both have revised and qualified their positions in various respects,

9 The Virtues of Ambivalence: from: Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self
Author(s) DAVENPORT JOHN J.
Abstract: In recent years, narrative interpretations of selfhood in Kierkegaard’s works have provided a fertile basis for approaching a range of issues in moral psychology that are important in their own right. It is interesting how much these debates have started to focus less on Kierkegaard interpretation and more on developing Kierkegaard’s insights to make headway on some of the perennial questions of philosophical anthropology. Anthony Rudd and I have defended ‘narrative realist’ accounts of selves that draw on Kierkegaard for inspiration. Likewise, several papers in this volume challenge these narrative theories on their merits, and especially as ways to understand

11 Narrativity, Aspect and Selfhood from: Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self
Author(s) SIGRIST MICHAEL J.
Abstract: Contemporary discussions about narrativity and selfhood commonly make reference to Alastair MacIntyre’s After Virtueand to the work of Charles Taylor from the seventies and eighties, especiallySources of the Self. Paul Ricoeur’s writings on the subject also figure prominently, and more recently, Marya Schechtman’sThe Constitution of Selveshas powerfully shaped the terms of the debate. Each of these philosophers defends a narrative model of personal identity as an alternative to physicalist or embodied theories, on the one hand, and psychological theories on the other. These latter approaches have tried to understand selfhood either by appeal to a self-identical

Book Title: Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Pernin Judith
Abstract: This new book provides graduate students, scholars and professionals with critical and detailed insights into recent, yet significant, independent documentary makers and their varied works, practices and uses. Writing from a variety of areas and perspectives, the contributors to this book introduce innovative interpretations of under-studied contemporary subject matters and styles, as well as production, distribution and exhibition strategies, to the growing fields of documentary film and cross-media studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt16r0hnq

CHAPTER 2 No Going Back: from: Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Hughes John
Abstract: Documentary dealing with immigration and the migrant experience in Australia is a continuous thread running through Australian cinema, more recently eclipsed by works equally complex in their articulation of politics and culture, responding in different ways to Australia’s reaction to refugees and the troublesome obsession in Australian domestic political discourse with ‘border protection’. In what follows, we make reference to state-sponsored documentary of the early 1950s supporting immigration in post-war reconstruction, and to a number of recent documentary projects across a spectrum of contemporary forms, projects that respond to public debate around asylum seekers and refugees. Questions of editorial and

CHAPTER 10 A Personal Vision of the Hong Kong Cityscape in Anson Mak’s Essayistic Documentary Films One Way Street on a Turntable and On the Edge of a Floating City, We Sing from: Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Ingham Mike
Abstract: As Timothy Corrigan has implicitly acknowledged in his recent book on essay films, it is an important contribution to recent documentary critical discourse. By privileging Mak’s work and placing it in the company

Chapter 3 History without Passion: from: Forgetting Differences
Abstract: In the article on the city Mâcon in his 1697 Dictionnaire historique et critique, Pierre Bayle devotes a long, convolutedremarqueto the question of whether he should include material about the Wars of Religion in his work.² He begins by paraphrasing the sixteenth-century edicts of pacification that urged the French to extinguish memories of the conflicts: “it would be desirable that the memory of all of those inhuman acts had been abolished in the first place, and that all the books that spoke about it had been thrown into the fire.”³ Those who hold that memories of the conflicts

Chapter 5 From Emotion to Affect from: Forgetting Differences
Abstract: In light of works like the Guisiadeor theMort de Coligny, as well as Robert Garnier’s relentlessly grim depictions of tragic distress, we might be moved to ask Pierre Bayle’s question, this time of tragedy: how could tragic theater, with its moving representations of explosive political intrigues and interfamilial violence, possibly have functioned as an instrument of reconciliation in the wake of the Wars of Religion?

Book Title: Katherine Mansfield and Translation- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Martin Todd
Abstract: This volume enables students and scholars to appreciate Mansfield's central place in various trans-European networks of modernism working in or through translation and translated idioms.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1bgzckh

‘Among Wolves’ or ‘When in Rome’?: from: Katherine Mansfield and Translation
Author(s) Kimber Gerri
Abstract: Following Katherine Mansfield’s death in 1923, critical reviews of her work started to appear in France, fuelling an interest which concentrated primarily on her life and personal writing, and only secondarily on her fiction. This thirst for biographical detail gave impetus to the translations of the LettersandJournalin 1931 and 1932 (which had first appeared in English in 1928 and 1927, respectively). Within the space of a few years, translations of various volumes of her stories were also published. In this essay, I shall highlight how the translations of her fiction have, for the most part, diluted her

Welcome to Paradise from: Katherine Mansfield and Translation
Author(s) Hager Mandy
Abstract: It was a glimpse into Paradise. The sun caught the old town first, its jumble of faded pastels glowing like the gilded ceilings of the Vatican – yellow, pink, rose, white, red, orange, grey and cadmium; medieval plasterwork rising joyously from the silky sea as it had done for more centuries than she could even comprehend.

CHAPTER 1 Theo Angelopoulos as Film Critic from: The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Chalkou Maria
Abstract: Most of the prominent filmmakers of New Greek Cinema – a politicised, auterist and art-oriented trend which dominated the Greek filmscape of the 1970s and 1980s – started their careers as assistant directors and film practitioners in the studios of the Greek commercial film industry of the 1950s and 1960s. Theo Angelopoulos, one of New Greek Cinema’s leading directors, followed, however, a different path and entered the field professionally as a film intellectual. After studying filmmaking in Paris, he returned to Athens and, from 1964 to 1967, worked as a film critic for the newspaper Δημοκρατική Αλλαγή ( Democratic Change), while between 1969

CHAPTER 3 Generative Apogee and Elegiac Expansion: from: The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Ford Hamish
Abstract: Michelangelo Antonioni’s early 1960s cinema has long been recognised as one of the key influences on Theo Angelopoulos’ filmmaking. The director himself has often been quoted as describing Antonioni’s epochal L’avventura(1960) as a seminal moment in his development, reportedly watching it thirteen times while a student in Paris during the early 1960s (cited in Archimandritis 2013: 26). What exactly is it about Antonioni’s work that was so formative for Angelopoulos, and how can we see its effects play out in his own subsequent films? More than simply illustrating authorial influence, by examining the connections between these two filmmakers as

CHAPTER 5 Angelopoulos’ Gaze: from: The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Sinnerbrink Robert
Abstract: The films of the late Theo Angelopoulos have been praised for their historical ambition, political themes and explorations of memory, but also for their commitment to cinematic modernism. For some critics, like David Bordwell, Angelopoulos is a late modernist auteur whose ‘anachronistic’ cinematic style bears the hallmarks of 1960s and ’70s ‘political modernism’ (1997: 106; see also Rodowick 1988). For others, like Fredric Jameson, Angelopoulos’ work is best understood as hybrid or transitional: grounded in an aesthetic and historical sensibility that combines progressive elements, which render collective memory through a materialist aesthetic, and regressive elements, which revert to an individualistic,

CHAPTER 8 Megalexandros: from: The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Georgakas Dan
Abstract: In critical commentaries on the work of Theo Angelopoulos, Ο Μεγαλέξανδρος ( MegalexandrosorAlexander the Great, 1980) is usually omitted from extended discussion. The film does not relate directly to the themes of the historical films that preceded it or to the voyage and border films that followed. In many respects, however,Megalexandrosis a template for Angelopoulos’ approach to politics and offers insight into the aesthetic choices that characterised his entire career.Megalexandrosseeks to join history, myth and current events seamlessly with a healthy disrespect for all things authoritarian. In that sense, the film, for all its difficulties,

CHAPTER 11 The Narrative Imperative in the Films of Theo Angelopoulos from: The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Eades Caroline
Abstract: To examine the presence and significance of literary references in Theo Angelopoulos’ films, one can start by looking at the influence of antiquity in his work.¹ Since his historical tetralogy – Μέρες του ’36 ( Days of ’36, 1972), Ο Θίασος (The Travelling Players, 1975) Οι Kυνηγοί (The Hunters, 1977), and Ο Μεγαλέξανδρος (Megalexandros, 1980) – Angelopoulos’ oeuvre has been imbued with allusions and direct references to classical texts: Greek tragedies at first,The Odysseythroughout his work, and various passages from Plato and Ovid more sporadically. But his interest in the poetic function of language also led him to draw inspiration

CHAPTER 14 An ‘Untimely’ History from: The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Brown Precious
Abstract: An essential (albeit controversial) point should immediately be made clear: the work of Angelopoulos is not ‘modernist’ in the sense that Anglo-Saxon critics have given to this term to qualify, in art history, a time past, but still belonging to modernity.¹ From end to end, Angelopoulos’ work is, in fact, traversed by history. Yet modernity is defined precisely by our awareness of unsurpassable historicity. In the words of Jacques Rancière, we have entered into the ‘ age of history’. He adds that it is also the ‘age of cinema’, as this late art possesses a singular power of ‘historicity and

CHAPTER 17 ‘Nothing Ever Ends’: from: The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Grønstad Asbjørn
Abstract: In February 2005, Theo Angelopoulos came to the Cinémathèque in Bergen, which screened a retrospective of his work. During an interview session before Ο Μελισσοκόμος ( The Beekeeper, 1986) he said something that has stayed with me: ‘Everything that has existed will always exist. Nothing fades away, nothing dies’. Everything that has existed will always exist. Experiences. Actions. Feelings. Suffering. Love. Ideas. Thoughts. People. The discursive tenor of the director’s statement is philosophical, or perhaps poetic, but it seems that it is also embodied by his film aesthetic, which functions to bracket temporality itself. There is the impossible spatial coexistence of

6 PAPER TECHNOLOGIES, DIGITAL TECHNOLOGIES: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Kassell Lauren
Abstract: As the digital revolution takes hold, historians have begun to reflect on the ways in which paper technologies – the codex, notebook, printed book and their indexes, annotations and tools of ordering – have come into being and contributed to the production of knowledge. Objects that were once considered evidence for historical inquiry have become their subjects.¹ The same reflexivity applies to notions of evidence, observation and objectivity, often labelled as facts and data, which have themselves been historically studied.² This chapter is about what happens when historians use digital technologies to understand paper technologies. It draws on my work to digitise

7 HOW ARE/OUR WORK: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Kelly Timothy
Abstract: it is high time and past time to stop retreading old tracks not the case that the work has all been

10 THE BODY BEYOND THE ANATOMY LAB: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Allen Rachael
Abstract: I will never forget my first encounter with a corpse on entering the anatomy lab that day, unaware of the journey ahead and the profound influence these donors would have on my work as an artist. Inside here, I am grounded in a sense of belonging. Using my eyes as dissecting tools, I flay the layers of skin and fascia to reveal the inner world of strangers that are at once familiar and unknown. I am held in a momentary state of reverie.

17 MORPHOLOGICAL FREEDOM AND MEDICINE: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Dolezal Luna
Abstract: The notion that the body can be changed at will in order to meet the desires and designs of its ‘owner’ is one that has captured the popular imagination and underpins contemporary medical practices such as cosmetic surgery and gender reassignment. In fact, describing the body as ‘malleable’ or ‘plastic’ has entered common parlance and dictates common-sense ideas of how we understand the human body in late-capitalist consumer societies in the wake of commercial biotechnologies that work to modify the body aesthetically and otherwise. If we are not satisfied with some one aspect of our physicality – in terms of health,

29 LANGUAGE MATTERS: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Withington Phil
Abstract: Francis Bacon is famous today as one of the founding fathers of the so-called ‘scientific revolution’ of the seventeenth century. Although not an especially successful scientist himself, he was nevertheless the most eloquent and influential spokesperson for an approach to knowledge that promised to transform human understanding of both humanity and its relationship with the natural and social worlds.¹ The central features of this approach, as they emerged in Bacon’s own writings and the work of his protégés and associates after 1605, are equally well known. They include the importance of experiment, observation, and a sceptical attitude towards inherited wisdom

31 CULTURE IN MEDICINE: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Hester Rebecca J.
Abstract: For the last few decades cultural competence has been celebrated as the curricular response to a variety of political and social challenges in healthcare. These challenges include the persistence of race-and ethnicity-based health disparities, breakdowns in communication between the patient and provider, and issues of cultural difference around delivery and acceptance of healthcare.² Commonly defined as ‘a set of congruent behaviors, attitudes, and policies that come together in a system, agency or among professionals and enable that system, agency or those professions to work effectively in cross-cultural situations’, cultural competence is meant to engender increased sensitivity, humility and awareness with

34 ON (NOT) CARING: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Burke Lucy
Abstract: The immediate context of this paper is the so-called ‘crisis in social care’ that finds its most prolific and unsettling expression in news reports about the verbal, emotional and physical abuse of elderly people with dementia in care homes. In April 2014, BBC One’s Panoramareported on the abuse of residents at the Old Deanery care home in Essex and Oban House in Croydon.¹ In June 2014, one care worker was jailed and two others were given suspended sentences and community service for the ill treatment of women with dementia at the Granary Care Home near Bristol.² In the following

Introduction from: French Philosophy Today
Abstract: French philosophy today is laying fresh claim to the human. This is not to be mistaken for an exercise in winding back the clock, nor is it a return to previous ideas of the human, much less a coordinated ‘human turn’. It is a series of fundamentally independent and yet strikingly simultaneous initiatives arising across the diverse landscape of French thought to transform and rework the figure of the human. Whereas the latter decades of the twentieth century adopted a decidedly critical and cautious approach to the question of ‘the human’, imprisoning it within the iron bars of scare quotes

Chapter 1 Alain Badiou: from: French Philosophy Today
Abstract: For Alain Badiou the twentieth century was ‘haunted by the idea of changing man, of creating a new man’ ( S20/Cen8) with communism and fascism, humanism and antihumanism each offering its vision of a transformed humanity. At the beginning of the twenty-first century Badiou offers us his own account of transformation that both remains (or so he claims) within a materialist frame and yet dusts off and reworks motifs seemingly from a bygone religious age: immortality, grace, resurrection and miracle. If, as these terms already hint, Badiou’s reworking of the human is not a simple case of either accepting

Chapter 5 Michel Serres: from: French Philosophy Today
Abstract: In Chapter 4 we saw how Malabou in Avant demainopens the door to the possibility of an eco-synaptic account of personhood and selfhood which moves beyond the problematic way in which her earlier work tethers the human to the ‘host substance’ of the brain. Furthermore,Avant demainmoves towards a more situated, complex figure of the human being taking into account the various co-written narratives in which each human being is entangled, as well as (and on equal terms with) the synaptic encoding of memories and the allied capacity for recall. This move towards a more situated, ecological notion

Chapter 6 Bruno Latour: from: French Philosophy Today
Abstract: In the universal humanism of Michel Serres we saw both a development and a change of direction from the accounts of the human elaborated by Badiou, Meillassoux and Malabou. Whereas the figure to emerge in the thought of Badiou and Meillassoux relies on the host capacity of thought, Malabou moves away from determinate capacities but, in her early work at least, seems to favour a host cerebral substance of human personhood. Serres’s account of the human, by contrast, is multi-modal: he combines de-differentiation with a recognition of determinate capacities, and also develops a narrative account of humanity as part of

2 The Ethics of Emmanuel Levinas from: Levinas, Ethics and Law
Abstract: Levinas’s philosophy could be described as a theory of subjectivity first, and a theory of ethics second. If this observation stands up, it does so not only with respect to conceptual focus, but also chronology: his early works barely mention ethics at all. His ideas sprang out of a vehement critique of philosophies of ontology, where ‘ontology’ came to be defined by Levinas somewhat idiosyncratically as the reduction of the other to the same via a conception of being.¹ His thinking is preoccupied with the question of how we understand ourselves in our place in the world, but also the

3 Can Law Be Ethical? from: Levinas, Ethics and Law
Abstract: Moving from the ethical to the legal (or, indeed, the political) is an irreducible problem within the Levinasian framework. This is not an internal failing of his thought. Were it not a problem, were there an easy solution to this relationship, Levinas’s ethics would of course lose all of their radical purchase. Ethics is, by definition, a unique relationship. It is the very singularity of subjectivity put into discord with the infinitely chasmic accusation by the other that constitutes not only ethics but the very movement of subjectivity. The question is how we move from the singular to the general,

5 The Law of the Same: from: Levinas, Ethics and Law
Abstract: Having provided an overview of the various ways we might read Levinas in relation to law, and the issues they raise, it is time to put forward the substantive argument of the book. This is the first of two concluding chapters making the argument that Levinas is best read as someone who offers us the possibility of thinking about ethics as perpetual critique of the law, rather than as a legal theorist. In other words, instead of using his work to think about how we inject ethics into law or unveil law’s ethical foundation, his philosophy provides resources to understand

6 Law, Ethics and Political Subjectivity from: Levinas, Ethics and Law
Abstract: This chapter begins with an outline of its central arguments as well as the concluding claims of the book as a whole. As covered in Chapter 4, applications of Levinas to law typically ask us to imagine law as a responsive site for the ethical encounter – whether in its institutions, its procedures, or reflected in its substance. This rests on a typically unstated but nevertheless unavoidable premise, that law operates as the servant of human will. This largely reflects how Levinas understood law himself, as being the necessary framework in which we do the hard work of creating social

Book Title: Agamben and Radical Politics- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): McLoughlin Daniel
Abstract: These 11 essays give you new perspectives on Agamben's recent work on government and his relationship to the revolutionary tradition, opening up new ways of thinking about politics and critical theory in the post-financial crisis world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1bh2k4f

3 On Property and the Philosophy of Poverty: from: Agamben and Radical Politics
Author(s) Bignall Simone
Abstract: Despite his interest in a non-sovereign and anomial politics, Agamben makes scant reference to thinkers in the anarchist tradition.¹ However, particularly with the turn to questions of government and economy in his latest works, he delves increasingly into themes at the heart of anarchist philosophy: the renunciation of property and the practice of poverty as a means of living outside of determination by law and state; the negative and positive moments of transformation variously associated with revolt or revolution; the ‘idea of communism’ and the figure of ‘the Ungovernable’. It is noteworthy how, at the point in The Time That

4 ‘Man Produces Universally’: from: Agamben and Radical Politics
Author(s) Whyte Jessica
Abstract: In The Kingdom of the Glory, in the midst of outlining what he sees as a specifically Christian account of governing as constant praxis, Giorgio Agamben turns his attention to a text that has preoccupied him for several decades: theEconomic and Philosophic Manuscriptsof Karl Marx. Beginning with his first book,The Man without Content, Agamben has repeatedly ignored Louis Althusser’s suggestion that ‘Marx’s early works do not have to be taken into account’¹ and turned to theParis Manuscriptsin the course of formulating his own accounts of praxis and of history.² Indeed, references to Marx in Agamben’s

9 Form-of-Life and Antagonism: from: Agamben and Radical Politics
Author(s) Smith Jason E.
Abstract: Before the publication in 2011 of his Altissima povertà. Regole monastiche e forme di vita, perhaps the most important concept in the work of Giorgio Agamben remained an enigma.¹ The notion of a ‘form-of-life’ has been crucial for the conceptual system Agamben has slowly articulated since the first volume of his long-runningHomo Sacerproject appeared in 1995. This concept, however, was nowhere developed in a thematic way, referred to only rarely and seemingly in passing. Yet a detailed examination of those instances where this term does appear would show that they are always placed at crucial sites, as if

CHAPTER 2 Dostoevskii’s “White Nights”: from: Border Crossing
Author(s) Meyer Ronald
Abstract: Fedor Dostoevskii’s short story “White Nights” (1848), subtitled a “sentimental love story (from the notes of a dreamer),” has been adapted for the screen more than any other of his short works. A staggering twelve feature films have been mounted on the basis of this early short story, though only two Russian entries and Luchino Visconti’s Le notti bianche(1957) carry Dostoevskii’s title.² Perhaps even more surprising than the sheer number of adaptations, half of which were released in the twenty-first century, is the language distribution: Russian and Hindi tie for the most with three each, followed by two in

CHAPTER 3 On Not Showing Dostoevskii’s Work: from: Border Crossing
Author(s) Hasty Olga Peters
Abstract: How does French filmmaker Robert Bresson, who minimizes affect and expressivity on the screen and rejects psychological realism in filmmaking, connect with the Russian novelist Fedor Dostoevskii, a master of psychology whose works burst with emotional turmoil and scandal? The question is an important one because underlying these obvious stylistic differences are ideational ties with Dostoevskii that are vital to Bresson’s films. Allen Thiher observes that “[i]n nearly all his works, […] Bresson’s narrative turns in one way or another on isolation and humiliation, on estrangement and the impossibility of a desired community.”² It is precisely these quintessentially Dostoevskian concerns,

CHAPTER 6 “A Vicious Circle”: from: Border Crossing
Author(s) Burry Alexander
Abstract: Anton Chekhov’s “Ward no. 6” (1892) has inspired a large and varied body of hypertexts in the twentieth and twenty-first centuries. The story’s basic premise of a psychiatric doctor who is incarcerated in the same mental hospital he used to run proved extraordinarily generative for Russian writers in the following century, especially given the notorious Soviet practice of labeling political dissidents insane. Valerii Tarsis and Venedikt Erofeev, among others, reflect this aspect of the story in their works.¹ Other major themes of “Ward no. 6,” such as the unstable boundary between madness and sanity, psychological isolation from other people, and

CHAPTER 7 A Slap in the Face of American Taste: from: Border Crossing
Author(s) White Frederick H.
Abstract: In 1915, the author and playwright Leonid Andreev debuted his play He Who Gets Slappedat the Moscow Art Theater. In the following years, this dramatic work about a vanquished intellectual-turned-circus-clown, more than any of his twenty other plays, achieved spectacular success among American audiences, first as a play in English translation, then when adapted for the silver screen, then as a novel and, finally, as an opera. Andreev had argued in his “Letters on the Theater” that cinema would become the place for action and spectacle, diminishing the popularity of the realist theater. Not surprisingly then, a love affair,

Conclusion: from: Border Crossing
Author(s) White Frederick H.
Abstract: Russian literature has inspired film directors at home and abroad for over a century, and continues to do so today. American, British, French, German, and Italian cinema all have important film classics that were drawn directly from Russian literature. Some, such as French filmmaker Robert Bresson or Japanese filmmaker Akira Kurosawa, turned to Russian writers more than once in creating their own distinctive cinematic style. Kurosawa reimagined Fedor Dostoevskii’s The Idiot(Hakuchi, 1951); Maksim Gor’kii’sLower Depths(Donzoko, 1957); incorporated elements of Dostoevskii’sThe Insulted and Injuredin his filmAkahige(1965); and animated Vladimir Arsen’ev’s autobiographical workDersu Uzala

Chapter 2 Aesthetic Experience and Critical Theory from: In the Archive of Longing
Abstract: The new role for the critic beyond solitary exegesis implies a transition from criticism to the notion of critical theory: ‘The great task which remains to critical theory is to examine in detail the formal function of subject-matter’ (‘On Style’ 20). As we have seen, one of the reasons why Sontag took her stand ‘against interpretation’ was its standard treatment of the works of art as ‘statements’ (21). Against this long-established trend, she contends: ‘A work of art encountered as a work of art is an experience, not a statement or an answer to a question. Art is not only

Chapter 6 Aura, Dread and the Amateur from: In the Archive of Longing
Abstract: Sontag had earned her place as a literary critic by emancipating herself from firmly held beliefs in the critical establishment. This, however, took some time. Despite her youthful rebellion, in her first book of essays she was still working with a rather traditional notion of interpretation. She thought that ‘great art induces contemplation’ and that ‘the reader or listener or

Chapter 7 Interlocution from: In the Archive of Longing
Abstract: Sontag became aware of Benjamin’s work in the early 1960s. The first mention of his name occurs in a thin spiral notebook dated on the cover September 1963. Inside, however, the entries show abrupt chronological leaps from 1963 to March 1965; the entries continue to April 1965, then jump back to 1964. Tucked between a cluster of pages dated 1964 and an entry for April 1965 is the first reference to Benjamin. We find his name written next to ideas from The Antiquiertheit des Menschen(1957) by philosopher Günther Anders. The fragment expands on ‘the technique of reproduction’, on ‘a

Book Title: Seamus Heaney-An Introduction
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Russell Richard Rankin
Abstract: This study will enable readers to gain clearer understanding of the life and major works of Seamus Heaney. It considers literary influences on Heaney, ranging from English poets such as Wordsworth, Hughes, and Auden to Irish poets such as Kavanagh and Yeats to world poets such as Virgil and Dante.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g04zp7

Introduction from: Seamus Heaney
Abstract: Seamus Heaney’s 2013 poem, “On the Gift of a Fountain Pen,” provides an appropriate starting point for this critical introduction to his work since it encapsulates his central concern—the role of the writer. In pondering his vocation, Heaney has always worried about his obligation to others—not just readers, but also to the general public—and this poem vocalizes that worry ably. Moreover, he seems also to fear a drying-up of inspiration here. Drawing on John Keats’s “When I Have Fears that I May Cease to Be,” he opens by musing, “Now that your pen is in my hand

Chapter 1 Life and Contexts from: Seamus Heaney
Abstract: Seamus Heaney’s work vacillates restlessly between the demand for solitude by the artistic self and the lure of communal intimacy, a dialectic captured most memorably in his 1979 elegy “Casualty,” which begins by praising the solitude of a dead friend, an eel fisherman, moves to an appreciation of the Catholics murdered on Bloody Sunday, and then concludes in solitude again by recalling a fishing trip he took with the slain fisherman, Louis O’Neill. Somewhat surprisingly for one who “in the early 1970s … surely did identify with the Catholic minority,”¹ he rejects what he perceives as the “swaddling band” of

Chapter 4 Radiance: from: Seamus Heaney
Abstract: Heaney published his New Selected Poems 1966–1987in 1990 after turning fifty in 1989. The volume gathers his selections from his first seven volumes, but he also made sure to include seven prose poems from Stations and five sections from his translation,Sweeney Astray. Including those prose poems and translations suggests how he viewed that work in other genres as complementing his poetry from the same period. Moreover, the prose poems and the sections fromSweeneysuggest a poet more formally adventuresome than admirers of Heaney the lyric poet may realize, maybe even than he presents: after all, the

Chapter 6 Prose, Drama, and Translations from: Seamus Heaney
Abstract: First-time readers of Heaney may not be aware of his major achievement in other genres, which are so rich and deep that treating them in their entirety lies beyond the scope of this introductory study, focused as it is on his poetry. But those who teach Heaney’s work or who have followed his career know that he has become one of the foremost critics and translators of our time, as well as having written some fine “versions” of Greek drama, including The Cure at Troy, after Sophocles’Philoctetes, andThe Burial at Thebes, after the same playwright’sAntigone. In what

Chapter 2 Abstract Form from: Lyric Cousins
Abstract: For a poet, the notion that abstract form – not ‘meaning’, but pure shape– can play a key role in what she writes is seductive. On the one hand, it implies the possibility of developing and experimenting with the kinds of sophisticated formal patterning that we traditionally associate with verse, such as the way stanzas ‘chunk’ a ballad’s story, or a rhyme scheme creates a network of meanings that crisscross and link up within a poem. On the other, it also appeals to something more primitive. For it suggests that poets can – and perhaps even should – do

Chapter 6 The Meaning of ‘Meaning’ from: Lyric Cousins
Abstract: We resist new forms of meaning. We’re even resistant to the ideaof them. It simplyisdifficult to conceptualise ways of understanding that we haven’t thought through before, or that differ from our usual ways of thinking. This is something we have toworkat: as all school pupils can attest. To ‘get your head round’ something: even the cliché conveys a sense of effortful rearrangement. From such practical difficulty flow the many religious, philosophical or ‘commonsensical’ beliefs – some of them notorious – which in turn reinforce these resistances.¹

Chapter 7 Song from: Lyric Cousins
Abstract: While I’ve been working on this book I’ve frequently found myself explaining that I’m not writing a study of song. Yet music and poetry do meetin song. What we know of human prehistory suggests that they share an overlapping origin, in live performance, as material that was improvised and memorised, and that relied on traditions of collective transmission. But I’m no archaeologist, and specialists – like those working on the bone flutes of the early Neolithic site at Jiahu in Henan Province, China for example, or in the Acoustics and Music of British Prehistory Research Network – are articulating

Chapter 9 Closer Still: from: Lyric Cousins
Abstract: Richard Wagner’s operas are often characterised by his own expression, Gesamtkunstwerk, which English musicologists translate as ‘total artwork’. But Wagner himself only ever used the term in two essays, both published in 1849. ‘Art and Revolution’ and ‘The Artwork of the Future’ were both written from political exile; the first in Paris and the second in Zürich. The still young-ish Wagner (he was born in 1813) had supported the revolutions of 1848 and was an active, if not especially important, participant in the 1849 May Revolution in Dresden. As a result, he was to spend almost a decade in exile

Chapter 10 The Consolations of Tradition from: Lyric Cousins
Abstract: Since the millennium, certain trends in Anglophone poetry have echoed the ‘turn’ in Western art music away from what we might think of as mid-century ‘scholasticism’ towards such conventional musical rewards as readily detectable patterning, or euphony. Artistic credibility and a response by non-specialist audiences no longer appear inimical. It has once again become possible to develop serious original work using traditional verse forms such as the ballad (which we saw at work in Chapter 6), or musical tropes as familiar as the rising or falling scale on which Arvo Pärt’s famous Fratresis built.¹

Book Title: Between Deleuze and Foucault- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Smith Daniel W.
Abstract: This collection combines 3 original essays by Deleuze and Foucault, in which they respond to each other's work, with 16 critical essays by key contemporary scholars working in the field.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g052qn

Introduction: from: Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Smith Daniel W.
Abstract: Gilles Deleuze and Michel Foucault are widely accepted to be central figures of post-war French philosophy. Foucault (1926–84) held a chair in the History of Systems of Thought at the prestigious Collège de France, and remains one of the most-cited authors in the humanistic disciplines. Deleuze (1925–95), who taught at the University of Paris-St Denis until his retirement in 1987, authored more than twenty-five books, and was one of the most important and influential European philosophers of the post-war period. Cultural theorists, historians, philosophers and others have devoted considerable effort to the critical examination of the work of

Chapter 1 Deleuze and Foucault: from: Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Dosse François
Abstract: “Perhaps one day this century will be known as Deleuzian.”¹ Michel Foucault’s lucid remark, made in 1969, has often been repeated. As for Deleuze, “Gilles deeply admired Michel Foucault.”² Although they saw each other frequently and fought alongside each other for the same political causes, they never really worked together. Yet as the final tributes were being paid to Foucault at La Salpêtrière before a crowd of several hundred mourners, it was Deleuze who stood and read an excerpt from the preface to The Use of Pleasure. Some basic disagreements were surely motivated by a certain rivalry as to who

Chapter 3 Michel Foucault’s Main Concepts from: Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Deleuze Gilles
Abstract: Foucault refers to his work as “studies in history,” though he does not see it as “the work of an historian.” He does the work of a philosopher, but he does not work on the philosophy of history. What does it mean to think? Foucault has never dealt with any other problem (hence his debt to Heidegger). And the historical? It is formations which are stratified, made up of strata. But to think is to reach a non-striated material, somewhere between the layers, in the interstices. Thinking has an essential relation to history, but it is no more historical than

Chapter 4 When and How I Read Foucault from: Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Klotz Kristopher
Abstract: The journal Aut Aut² – the first journal in Italy that took an interest in Michel Foucault – published an article in its final 1978 issue that I had written one year earlier, called “On the Method of the Critique of Politics.”³ In this text, I discussed the influence that Foucault’s work had had up to this point on the thought of the Italian revolutionary left, for which I had been a militant in the 1970s. Foucault’s latest work had beenDiscipline and Punish, translated into Italian in 1976. At that time, I had begun to work again on Marx,

Chapter 5 Critical Problematization in Foucault and Deleuze: from: Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Koopman Colin
Abstract: In a 1972 conversation concerning the role of philosophy in the work of social critique, Michel Foucault and Gilles Deleuze put forward a conception of critical theory that resonates widely throughout the varied terrains of their work. At the heart of the conception they constructed together in “Intellectuals and Power” is a radical revisioning of the work that philosophy should expect of itself insofar as philosophy can legitimately expect itself to engage present social, cultural, ethical and political problems. Foucault and Deleuze clearly expected such engagements of themselves. Much of their work is located, in different ways of course, at

Chapter 7 Deleuze’s Foucault: from: Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Bankston Samantha
Abstract: Before all else, we need to acknowledge a previously held, reprehensible position: for a long time Deleuze’s book on Foucault² seemed to consist of a dogmatic rigidity that did not manage to break into the enthusiasm of what Foucault said. From cover to cover the book seemed ridiculousto us. It seemed far, so far from Foucault’s actual work, and with a menacing sort of passion we thought aboutdemonstratingthat in his book Deleuze had committed nothing more than a work of fiction. The reception of Deleuze’s presentation at the conference, “Michel Foucault, Philosopher,”³ only reinforced these poorly conceived

Chapter 9 Deleuze and Foucault: from: Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Patton Paul
Abstract: This chapter sketches an account of the relationship between Deleuze and Foucault that seeks to delve beneath the superficial view that they were fellow travelers in philosophy as in politics. It is inspired by the view that the more closely one looks at their work the more one sees differences between them. Before turning to some of their differences, I note some of the essential facts about their relationship.¹

Chapter 12 The Regularities of the Statement: from: Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Mader Mary Beth
Abstract: Gilles Deleuze wrote over twenty-five books, but only one devoted to a philosopher contemporary to him. This was his 1985 work, Foucault(Paris: Les Éditions de Minuit), a collection of six separate pieces on the work of Michel Foucault (1926–84).¹ Although scarcely more than 130 pages long, the slim volume was immediately hailed as an indisputable reference for all interested in Foucault’s thought. Roger-Pol Droit held inLe Monde, “Whether it be to support or oppose him, it will no longer be possible to read Foucault without referring to [Deleuze’s book.]”² Together, the compiled studies address nearly the whole

4 Real Folds: from: Narrative and Becoming
Abstract: To date, House of Leaveshas overwhelmingly been read in light of its mediality, the question of technology, and digital culture at large. Apart from the oft-quoted pioneering articles by Brian W. Chanen, Mark B. N. Hansen, N. Katherine Hayles, and Jessica Pressman (Chanen 2007; Hansen 2004; Hayles 2002a; Pressman 2006), three out of five essays dealing withHouse of Leavesin the first book project exclusively devoted to the works of Danielewski read the novel through this lens (McCormick 2011; Evans 2011; Thomas 2011). Add to that another two essays fromRevolutionary Leaves(Aghoro 2012; Bilsky 2012), the second

Conclusion: from: Narrative and Becoming
Abstract: To rehearse: what has been established under the heading of differential narratology is becoming as it pertains to narrative, narrativity in constant variation generating ever new variants of narrative; the virtual dance of narrative differentials producing actual, numerically differentiated narratives; the intensive sensations and forces of transcendental Narrative (affects, percepts, forces) bringing about the extensive states of affairs and networks of empirical narratives (events, existents, plots). In short, becoming, the dynamic and continuous process of selecting and gathering heterogeneous elements to be expressed, has been revealed as the ontologically primary virtual realm of any given actual narrative. But this has

[Part II: Introduction] from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Abstract: In Chapter 4, ‘A History of the Method: Examining Foucault’s Research Methodology’, Hardy provides a survey of the key research methodologies developed by Foucault across his life and work. For Hardy, it is important to distinguish between the particular methods that Foucault actually used for undertaking research (say, for example, collecting data through archival research) and what could be more broadly termed ‘Foucault’s methodology’ as such: namely, the particular theoretical frameworks he created to order and interrogate his collected data. To this end, Hardy focuses his attention mainly on the two innovative theoretical frameworks that Foucault is most famous for:

Chapter 4 A History of the Method: from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Hardy Nick
Abstract: Since Foucault started publishing in the early 1960s much ink has been spilled by both his detractors and supporters alike.¹ An interesting point to note, however, is that each tends to assign to Foucault’s work a level of coherence and/or integration that is overall quite difficult to substantiate. One of the most famous of the supportive texts is by Dreyfus and Rabinow (1982), gained from their discussions and interviews with Foucault during his annual research trips to the University of California, Berkeley. Dreyfus and Rabinow appoint to Foucault’s work a definite methodological evolution that clearly separates his ‘archaeological’ and ‘genealogical’

Chapter 5 Derrida, Deconstruction and Method from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Phillips John W.
Abstract: The problem of the relationship between words and things and, within the word, the difference between word and idea, has exercised more than twenty-five centuries of thought. The problem in grasping what is at stake in these relations and the differences that animate them lies in the fact that the only way to approach them is through the inherited concepts themselves: word, thing, idea. Couplings like form and matter, form and meaning, syntax and semantics, signifier and signified all owe their senses (we must not I suppose exclude sense and reference) to this ancient framework. Words like ‘sense’ and ‘word’

Chapter 7 Schizoanalysis: from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Buchanan Ian
Abstract: There is no straightforward way to say what schizoanalysis is. The problem is not so much that the question is not answered by Deleuze and Guattari or that it is somehow unanswerable; rather the problem is that it has several answers. Unwilling to provide any kind of ‘formula’ or ‘model’ that would enable us to simply ‘do’ schizoanalysis as a tick-box exercise in which everything relates inexorably to one single factor (e.g. the family), which is what they thought psychoanalysis had become, Deleuze and Guattari observe a quite deliberate strategy of providing multiple answers to the questions their work raises.

[Introduction] from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Abstract: In Chapter 11, ‘Derrida’s Language: Play, Différanceand (Con)text’, Anderson defends the Derridean project against some of its most well-known and influential critics. Interrogating the notion that Derrida’s work implies the radicalisation of language as a ‘play of differences’, Anderson shows how this can be used to justify various types of readings (she notes the important influence of Richard Rorty in this context) that have reduced his work to an ‘anything goes’ philosophy. Further, other critics such as Searle and Habermas have, Anderson argues, unfairly labelled Derrida’s work as perpetuating indeterminacy and nihilism. Against these images and misreadings of Derrida,

Chapter 11 Derrida’s Language: from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Anderson Nicole
Abstract: On 9 May 1992, Barry Smith and eighteen cosignatories wrote a letter to the The Timesin an attempt to sway Cambridge University dons not to award Derrida an Honorary Degree. (It failed. The vote was 336 to 204 in favour of Derrida.) This event became known as the ‘Cambridge Affair’. In this letter Barry Smith and company claim that Derrida’s writing ‘does not meet with accepted standards of clarity and rigour … his works employ a written style that defies comprehension … [and] consist in no small part of elaborate jokes and puns “logical phallusies” [sic] and the like’.

Chapter 13 Luce Irigaray: from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Russell Yvette
Abstract: Like a great many of the authors discussed in this book, Irigaray would probably contest her labelling as a ‘poststructuralist’¹ and her work is so varied and draws on such a wide range of sources and methodological traditions that any categorisation risks excluding or eliding important aspects of her thinking. What I think is important, however, and the value that this opportunity provides is to look again at her work and to do so alongside those other authors whose work contributes to the great Western canon of philosophy, the interrogation of which Irigaray has dedicated a great deal of her

[Introduction] from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Abstract: In Chapter 14, ‘Photography and Poststructuralism: the Indexical and Iconic Sign System’, Edge reflects on how the pecularity of the photographic sign sytem, and the study of photography generally, have been informed by poststructuralist thought in two important respects: one approach is concerned with the unique structure of the photograph, its indexicality; the other with the discursive effect of specific photographs in different locations – the iconic/symbolic element of the photograph. Drawing on the work of Kristeva, as well as an original case study on very early Victorian photography, Edge offers some fresh and very interesting insights on the indexical

Chapter 15 Deleuze and the Image of Film Theory from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Holohan Conn
Abstract: In the two books he wrote on the cinematic image, Gilles Deleuze proposes a fundamental break in the history of film form. This break occurred, he declares, sometime around the end of the Second World War and finds its first expression in the work of Italian neorealist film-makers such as Roberto Rossellini. In Rossellini’s images of aimless characters wandering through the ruins of a bombed-out Europe, Deleuze uncovers a decisive rupture with the logic of classical cinema, a rejection of the possibility for action upon which classical narrative depends. Cinema 1: The Movement-ImageandCinema 2: The Time-Imagewere published

Chapter 16 The Museum of Now from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Cutler Anna
Abstract: There is an ongoing debate in the museums sector about what it means to be a museum in the twenty-first century. This pursuit of meaning is not new to the discipline. Indeed there is a wealth of literature that explores the museum’s shifting social and cultural role since its emergence in the eighteenth century (Bennett 1985). Many narratives follow the development of the museum from private collections for the few, into their current status as public institutions for the many (with all the contention that this might imply). With such narratives to hand, institutions work from a foundation of experience

Chapter 17 Institutions, Semiotics and the Politics of Subjectivity from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Peters Michael A.
Abstract: If I begin with Pierre-Félix Guattari it is because I believe he embodies some of the themes and motifs that define the intellectual movement that we name ‘poststructuralism’ and because in recent applications, developments and celebrations of the work of this group of intellectuals in the English-speaking world Guattari has been eclipsed by other more prominent thinkers and the radical nature of his work has been overlooked. Yet Guattari’s work illustrates and is emblematic of a number of distinctive aspects about the wider movement. He was consumed with the question of subjectivity, a political activist, strongly interventionist and his innovations

[Introduction] from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Abstract: In Chapter 18, ‘Here and Nowhere: Poststructuralism, Resistance and Utopia’, Sotiropoulos explores the thorny problem of a poststructuralist politics or, more particularly, a poststructuralist politics of resistance. By way of an illuminating and engaging cross-comparative analysis of Foucault, Deleuze and Derrida, Sotiropoulos argues that poststructuralism can itself be seen as an event of political resistance, that it works with and through various conceptions of utopia, mobilised as so many potential material movements immanent to becomings that are at play in the social and political world. However, this poststructuralist politics of resistance is not without limits, according to Sotiropoulos, as it

[Part IV: Introduction] from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Abstract: In Chapter 21, ‘The Receptions of Poststructuralism’, Bowman illuminates how the reception(s) of poststructuralist ideas have been variously performed in the English-speaking world. Challenging the idea that there ever was a ‘French Poststructuralism’ residing somewhere (in Paris, perhaps), like an essence, prior to its construction and (performative) elaboration in the texts and contexts that came subsequently to be regarded as those of ‘French Poststructuralism’, he then goes on to show how the work of figures like Derrida, Barthes, Foucault, Lacan, Deleuze and others gets performatively elaborated in British Cultural Studies, Comparative Literature in the US, or in broader, more geographically

Chapter 21 The Receptions of Poststructuralism from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Bowman Paul
Abstract: One of the most famous figures of poststructuralism, Jacques Derrida, died on 8 October 2004. Over the following days, weeks and months, newspapers and other media the world over contained reactions, responses, comments and obituaries to him. Many of these were surprisingly hostile; they were often irreverent and disrespectful; and often also mocking, joking and scornful. Some were starkly abusive and aggressive. In fact, many obituaries, reactions and responses to the news of Derrida’s death attacked or slandered not only his work but also cast aspersions on his character and personality. A large proportion made crass jokes about whether we

Ordinary Language Philosophy from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Jolley Kelly Dean
Abstract: Ludwig Wittgenstein revered the work of Gottlob Frege and kept tabs on the location of obscure works of Frege in the Cambridge library. J. L. Austin translated Frege’s Foundations of Arithmeticinto English and made it a part of the philosophy curriculum at Oxford. I mention these facts because the tradition of Ordinary Language Philosophy (OLP) began with Frege. Frege’s three essays in hisLogical Investigations, along with his ‘On Concept and Object,’ were the first essays of OLP. Beginning the story of OLP with Frege helps to bring certain features in the tradition rightly to the front: in particular,

Pragmatism from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Rescher Nicholas
Abstract: Pragmatism as a philosophical doctrine traces back to the Academic skeptics in classical antiquity. Denying the possibility of achieving authentic knowledge ( epistēmē) regarding the real truth, they taught that we must make do withplausible information(to pithanon) adequate to the needs of practice. However, pragmatism as a determinate philosophical doctrine descends from the work of Charles Sanders Peirce. For him, pragmatism was primarily a theory of meaning, with the meaning of any concept that has application in the real world inhering in the relations that link experiential conditions of application with observable results. But by the ‘practical consequences’ of

Political Philosophy from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Neumann Michael
Abstract: Political philosophy plays virtually no role in the early history of analytic philosophy. The most prominent political philosopher after Mill, Thomas Hill Green, had too much of Kant and Rousseau to suit the tastes of the early analytic philosophers. G. E. Moore and C. D. Broad concerned themselves with ethics, not political philosophy. Bertrand Russell went on to write political works, but they had virtually no philosophical stature or influence. But what really blocked the development of an analytic political philosophy was the rise of logical positivism and ordinary language philosophy. These movements manifested not only suspicion but contempt for

Aesthetics from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Schellekens Elisabeth
Abstract: The expression ‘Analytic Aesthetics,’ generally used to refer to Philosophical Aesthetics as pursued in the Anglo-American academic world since the middle of the twentieth century, is best understood in terms of its emphasis on conceptual analysis. The rise of the discipline is clearly related to the widespread championing of cognitive and linguistic causes that distinguishes the broader framework of Analytic Philosophy, and should not in the first instance be thought of as unveiling a hitherto buried treasure of questions and concerns. The novelty of Analytic Aesthetics had rather to do with the approach used to tackle issues about aesthetic value

Frankfurt School and Philosophy from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Kellner Douglas
Abstract: The term ‘Frankfurt School’ refers to the work of members of the Institut für Sozialforschung(Institute for Social Research) which was established in Frankfurt, Germany, in 1923 as the first Marxist-oriented research centre affiliated with a major German university. Under its director, Carl Grünberg, the institute’s work in the 1920s tended to be empirical, historical, and oriented towards problems of the European working-class movement. (On the Frankfurt School, see the readers edited by Arato and Gebhardt 1978 and Bronner and Kellner 1989, and the critical studies in Jay 1973, Kellner 1989, and Wiggerhaus 1994.)

Ethics from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Raffoul François
Abstract: The development of many ethical theories in the twentieth-century Continental tradition has taken place against the background of Nietzsche’s celebrated critique of morality, as well as in response to the Holocaust and the unprecedented horrors of the century. While there have been many noteworthy developments in the areas of feminist ethics, the ‘discourse ethics’ of Habermas, and the work of the later Foucault, we will focus within the confines of this chapter on Nietzsche, Sartre, Heidegger, Levinas, and Derrida, as representative works in Continental philosophies of ethics.

Analytic Themes in Continental Philosophy from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) May Todd
Abstract: Before I started my graduate work in Continental philosophy at Penn State in the mid-1980s, I took several courses in analytic philosophy at the University of Pittsburgh. I recall a particular evening before class, overhearing one graduate student tell another that she had just read some Foucault and had found him to be interesting, except that he was a terrible writer. I was irritated at the swipe at Foucault’s prose, particularly coming from someone enrolled in a program whose mainstay was Wilfrid Sellars. In retrospect, however, the scene takes on a different hue. Rather than seeing it as just another

Chinese Philosophy from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Ames Roger T.
Abstract: Mainstream philosophy in the twentieth century has been Anglo-European philosophy. This observation is as true in Tokyo, Seoul, Beijing, Delhi, Nairobi, as it is in Boston London, Paris, and Frankfurt. That is, the indigenous philosophies of East Asia, South Asia, Africa, and indeed America too have been marginalized within their own cultural sites by the dominance of what has been called the Anglo-European analytic and Continental traditions of philosophy. It is within this historical framework that we must distinguish clearly between ‘philosophy in China’ on the one hand, and ‘Chinese philosophy’ on the other.

2 The Absolute in German Idealism and Romanticism from: The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Nassar Dalia T.
Abstract: One of the most obscure, yet significant, concepts in early nineteenth-century philosophy is that of the Absolute. As a word, the Absolute came into philosophical discourse with Schelling to mean the ontological ground of and point of identity between subject and object. In this sense Hegel adopted the term in his early works, while in his later writings he came to identify the Absolute with the process and final conclusion of reason. Although it is these figures who employed the words ‘the Absolute’ ( das Absolute), the idea of the Absolute as the ontological ground in which subject and object are

10 Embodiment: from: The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Sinclair Mark
Abstract: In contemporary philosophy the phenomenological movement has offered a compelling challenge to the mind–body dualism that was instituted by Descartes amongst others in the seventeenth century. This challenge, perhaps most notably in the work of the French phenomenologist Maurice Merleau-Ponty, does not consist in the reduction of one of the opposed terms to the other in the manner of a thoroughgoing or ‘eliminative’ materialism but rather rests on a broader critique of both terms. The self, it is argued, is not originally an isolated thinking subject, certain of its own thoughts and separable from the body, whilst the body is

16 Repetition and Recurrence: from: The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Carlisle Clare
Abstract: They want to put metaphysics in motion, in action. They want to make it act and make it carry out immediate acts. It is not enough, therefore, for them to propose a new representation of movement; representation is already mediation. Rather, it is a question of producing within the work a movement capable of affecting the mind outside of all representation; it is a question of making movement itself a work … (Deleuze [1968] 1994: 8)

Book Title: Rancière and Film- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Bowman Paul
Abstract: Jacques Rancière rose to prominence as a radical egalitarian philosopher, political theorist and historian. Recently he has intervened into the discourses of film theory and film studies, publishing controversial and challenging works on these topics. This book offers an exciting range of responses to and assessments of his contributions to film studies and includes an afterword response to the essays by Rancière himself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b27n

1 Rancière and the Disciplines: from: Rancière and Film
Author(s) Bowman Paul
Abstract: The question of the relation ‘Rancière and film’quietly presupposes another relation: ‘Rancière and filmstudies’. This leads to a bifurcation: what is the character, status and significance of Rancière’s work onfilm, and – quietly – therefore also, the character, status and significance of Rancière’s work in relation to the discipline or disciplines of filmstudies? I say ‘disciplines’ because film studies both is and is notonediscipline. No discipline is univocal. No discipline is singular – other than in the eyes, or the fantasy, of the most reductive, taxonomical and exterior gaze – a gaze from outside of the field in

2 What Does It Mean to Call Film an Art? from: Rancière and Film
Author(s) Baumbach Nico
Abstract: The origins of this essay derive from the attempt to make sense of a certain resistance to Jacques Rancière’s work that I have encountered at film studies conferences in the United States. As I see it, this resistance can be traced to what is seen as a tension or contradiction between Rancière as the self-proclaimed amateur advocating for universal equality on the one hand, and what are perceived as the trappings of cultural distinction that mark his writings on cinema on the other – specifically the familiar auteurist pantheon that makes up the films he focuses on and, perhaps more significantly,

9 Jacques Rancière’s Animated Vertigo; or, How to be Specific about Medium from: Rancière and Film
Author(s) Stamp Richard
Abstract: In a 1971 article for American Cinematographer, the monthly publication of the American Society of Cinematographers, an experimental filmmaker explains how he started developing ‘animation mechanisms’ over a decade earlier. These machines are conceived as tools capable of ‘drawing’ with precisely controlled incremental variations that might match the ‘precise incremental stepping process’ that underpins the cinematographic apparatus of celluloid film and its machines (the camera, the editing table and the projector). Although he claims that he began his work with the aim of making something ‘useful’, he then confesses, with wry self-deprecation, to a feeling of disappointment when his first

CHAPTER 3 Investigating Cultural Producers from: Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Davis Aeron
Abstract: This chapter is in four parts. Each of the first three parts offers a brief overview of the more common research approaches used to investigate cultural production. These are broadly categorised here as political economy, textual analysis and sociological/ethnographic work. The fourth part then concentrates on the third of these and the practical considerations involved. In both parts the discussion and examples draw on my own experiences of researching cultural production in the news industry and within the subcultures of financial and political elite networks. At the time of writing I have interviewed over 250 professionals employed in journalism, public

CHAPTER 6 Why Observing Matters from: Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Nightingale Virginia
Abstract: Observation-based research relies on interactions and exchanges between researcher and research participants, and it is this expanded vision of observation – observation that explicitly designs and accounts for the impact of the research process on the fieldwork experience and the data it produces – that the chapter explores. It is based on the premise that communication is a material process in the sense that it is something that can be observed, recorded, documented, analysed and written about. Fieldwork involves finding ways to transform the fleeting character of communication and social relations into durable analysable forms. Other research practices – for

CHAPTER 8 Analysing Discourse from: Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Barker Martin
Abstract: The seemingly inexorable rise of the concept of ‘discourse’ has made it almost unavoidable for cultural studies researchers, particularly since its invitation to theorise culture as ‘like a language’ coincides with so many impulses within our field. But not without substantial costs. Looking at the cultural studies field from my angle as an audience researcher, some troubling features within discourse work come into view. For all the multiplicity of approaches, and the attendant variations in attached modes of ‘discourse analysis’, there are some powerful unifying features in ‘discourse talk’; and these features presume the very thingsthat as an audience

Book Title: François Laruelle’s Philosophies of Difference-A Critical Introduction and Guide
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): GANGLE ROCCO
Abstract: Critiques philosophical Difference as a whole and the 3 specific models treated by Laruelle: Nietzsche-Deleuze, Heidegger and DerridaSituates Philosophies of Difference within the rest of Laruelle's work and contemporary European thoughtExplains the key shift from philosophy to non-philosophy which makes Laruelle so intriguing to philosophers todayShows how Laruelle impacted on the work of Deleuze and Badiou and the Speculative Realism movement
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b3gr

2 The critique of Difference from: François Laruelle’s Philosophies of Difference
Abstract: Philosophies of Differenceengages the philosophies of Nietzsche, Heidegger, Derrida and Deleuze in order to mark a distinction between philosophical thinking (which perhaps in the work of these thinkers is pushed in some sense to its limit) and a new, more general mode of thinking which will be called non-philosophy. Laruelle’s text itself bridges the diff erence both methodologically and thematically between these two kinds of thought; it is at once philosophicalandnon-philosophical. Keeping in mind that non-philosophy is not meant to be a negation but rather a generalisation of philosophy, we should understand this ‘at once’ as in

Book Title: The Agamben Dictionary- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Whyte Jessica
Abstract: Agamben's vocabulary is both expansive and idiosyncratic, with words such as 'infancy', 'gesture' and 'profanation' given specific and complex meanings that can bewilder the new reader. Bringing together leading scholars in the field, including Steven DeCaroli (Goucher College, Baltimore), Justin Clemens (University of Melbourne), Claire Colebrook (Penn State) and Steven DeCaroli (Goucher College, Baltimore) the 150 entries explain the key concepts in Agamben's work and his relationship with other thinkers, from Aristotle to Aby Warburg.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b49n

Book Title: Poetic Language-Theory and Practice from the Renaissance to the Present
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Jones Tom
Abstract: Surveys a variety of linguistic and philosophical approaches to poetic language: analytical, cognitive, post-structuralist, pragmaticProvides readings of complete poems and places those readings within the wider context of each poet's workCombines theory and practiceIncludes a Glossary of Terms, Biographical Notes on Poets and Suggested Further Reading and Further Reading (by Theoretical School)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b4vx

CHAPTER FOUR Measure: from: Poetic Language
Abstract: This chapter follows on from the last by offering an account of the differences between Wordsworth and Coleridge’s thinking on poetic diction and measure. Wordsworth’s well-known objections to poetic diction were made just before the death of Cowper, whose work Wordsworth read and admired. Wordsworth understands poetic diction as a strictly delimited and historically sanctioned set of words found frequently in poetry and infrequently in prose, and therefore an artificial deformation of language, like metre and rhyme. Unlike those deformations, however, poetic diction is unpredictable:

CHAPTER ELEVEN Selection: from: Poetic Language
Abstract: My main concerns in this chapter are the restrictions placed upon the selection of words that make up poems, whether these restrictions are more personal or social (if that distinction makes sense), and how selection for poems relates to selectional procedures in language more generally. In relation to this last topic I consider selection in the work of the generative linguist Noam Chomsky. Whilst generative grammar and modern logic understand selection as an operation pertaining to particular terms in an individual’s lexicon, following, or refusing to follow, certain rules, other theorists of literary language have focused on the selection of

CHAPTER 1 Research Methods for English Studies: from: Research Methods for English Studies
Author(s) Griffin Gabriele
Abstract: When I was working on the first edition of this volume I started it by stating that ‘Until very recently, research methods were not widely discussed in English studies.’¹ In many respects this remains the case in 2013. In the 1980s, when I was a postgraduate student, research methods did not figure at all – research was what you did, and the best you could hope for was a brief introduction to the vagaries of the library. There was no sense that you needed to know about the process of conducting research, or that how you did it might influence the

CHAPTER 2 Archival Methods from: Research Methods for English Studies
Author(s) Steedman Carolyn
Abstract: Archives and ‘the archive’ now have a wider range of meanings and potential meanings attached to them than at any point since the inauguration of European and North American state archives in the early nineteenth century.¹ There is, for a start, Jacques Derrida’s compelling philosophy of the archive in Mal d’archive(Archive Fever, 1995) in which thearkeof the Greek city state is named as the place where things begin, where power originates, with power’s workings inextricably and for all time bound up with the authority of beginnings, origins, starting points.² Those who make their way throughArchive Fever

CHAPTER 10 Interviewing from: Research Methods for English Studies
Author(s) Griffin Gabriele
Abstract: In his review of Diane Middlebrook’s biography Her Husband: Hughes and Plath – A Marriage, Andrew Motion remarks that Middlebrook’s text shows ‘only a few signs of interviews with surviving friends’ (Motion 2004: 15). This remark forms part of a brief litany of omissions which Motion presents as an implicit criticism of Middlebrook’s work. It highlights the assumption that, where possible, interview material should form part of the research conducted for a biography, and functions in this introduction as an emblem of what has been referred to as ‘the interview society’ we now live in (Atkinson and Silverman 1997).

Introduction from: A Glossary of Political Theory
Abstract: This work assumes that politics cannot be studied without theory. All our statements about parties, movements, states and relationships between them presuppose theoretical views, so that political theory is an integral part of the study of politics.

Book Title: The Lyotard Dictionary- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Sim Stuart
Abstract: Drawing on a multidisciplinary team of experts, the 168 entries in The Lyotard Dictionary explain all of his main concepts, contextualising these within his work as a whole and relating him to his contemporaries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b5xf

Book Title: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy-From Pre-history to Future Possibilities
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Stockwell Stephen
Abstract: This substantial reference work critically re-examines the history of democracy, from ancient history to possible directions it may take in the future. 44 chapters explore the origins of democracy and explore new - and sometimes surprising - examples from around the world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b6rb

Chapter 5 Israel and Phoenicia from: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Stockwell Stephen
Abstract: The Greeks made major contributions to the development of democracy not only as an idea, but even more significantly as a set of practical laws and pragmatic institutions that evolved over centuries to translate the sovereignty of the people into a relatively stable and effective system of government. However, while the Greek invention of democracy is often treated as an indisputable truth, recent work suggests that democracy may have antecedents. Martin Bernal stirred a major controversy with his book, Black Athena, and its claims to establish the ‘Afro-Asiatic’ roots of classical Greek society (Bernal [1987] 1991). A later paper sought

Chapter 9 Islam from: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Sadiki Larbi
Abstract: Nothing is more perilous than trying to wed Islam and democracy, or engaging in endless discussions on Islam’s compatibility with democracy via a framework designed within the Western episteme. This episteme assumes that Islam and democracy are two distinct and autonomous systems and, in its worst iterations, it asserts that they are antithetical to one another. Since the European Enlightenment, the scholarly discussion of Islam and democracy has been one-sided. Western intellectuals condemn religion to the margins and Enlightenment’s singular practice of rationality denounces religious foundationalism. Fixity, singularity and determinacy have all been attributed to religion, especially Islam, and cited

Chapter 40 Digital Democracy from: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Loader Brian
Abstract: Political communication and the means of its production and diffusion have always been a significant factor shaping the nature of democratic politics. From the oral tradition of the Agora, through the pamphlets and newspapers of early modern Europe, to the prevalence of the mass broadcast media in the twentieth century, the communicative power of citizens has been influenced by their access to and use of the prevailing media technologies. It was no surprise, therefore, that the emergence of new information and communication technologies (ICTs), in the form of digital networks such as the Internet, once again raised the prospect of

Chapter 42 Deliberative Democracy from: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Rostbøll Christian F.
Abstract: Over the last twenty years deliberative democracy has become the most discussed theory of democracy. The term was coined by Joseph Bessette in 1980, but academic writing on deliberative democracy really picked up in the early 1990s (Bessette 1980; Hansen 2004). While the idea of giving deliberation a core role in democracy has roots throughout the history of democracy, the most important contemporary theoretical sources for deliberative democrats are the works of Jürgen Habermas and John Rawls (Habermas 1984, 1989, 1996; Rawls 1971, 1996). The theory of deliberative democracy is often directed at two related deficiencies of actual existing democracy,

Translators’ Introduction from: Form and Object
Author(s) Rouge Baton
Abstract: As a novelist, Tristan Garcia has received widespread recognition and awards, including the Prix de Flore. But it is his most recent philosophical work,Forme et objet: Un traité des choses, that secures his place as one of the most significant systematic philosophers in contemporary France.

Book Title: The Ethics of Deconstruction-Derrida and Levinas
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Critchley Simon
Abstract: The Ethics of Deconstruction, Simon Critchley's first book, was originally published to great acclaim in 1992. It was the first book to argue for the ethical turn in Derrida's work and to show as powerfully as possible how deconstruction has persuasive ethical consequences that are vital to our thinking through of questions of politics and democracy. Rather than being concerned with deconstruction in terms of the contradictions inherent in any text - an approach typical of the early Derrida and those in literary criticism aiming to extract a critical method for an application to literature - Critchley concerns himself with the philosophical context necessary for an understanding of the ethics of deconstructive reading. Far from being some sort of value-free nihilism or textual free-play, Critchley showed the ethical impetus that was driving Derrida's work. His claim was that Derrida's understanding of ethics has to be understood in relation to his engagement with the work of Levinas and the book lays out the details of their philosophical confrontation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b76j

1 The Ethics of Deconstruction: from: The Ethics of Deconstruction
Abstract: Why bother with deconstruction? Why read deconstructive writings? Why read texts deconstructively? Why should deconstruction be necessary, or even important? What demand is being made by deconstruction? These are questions which haunt the critical reader who has followed the work of Jacques Derrida. They are questions voiced by the reader who, in pleasure and patience, has read Derrida’s work, but who now, perhaps impatiently, wants to question the demand that is placed on him or her by that work. They are questions, I shall claim, that demand an ethical response, that call deconstructive reading to responsibility, to be responsible. The

2 The Problem of Closure in Derrida from: The Ethics of Deconstruction
Abstract: Following the introductory first part, I delineate in the second part the sense and usage of the word ‘closure’, while, in the third part I trace the genesis of the concept of closure in Derrida’s work to his early readings of Husserl. The

Book Title: Virginia Woolf and Being-in-the-world-A Heideggerian Study
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Simone Emma
Abstract: The first sustained discussion of Woolf from the perspective of the philosophy of Martin HeideggerEmphasises the thematic and conceptual links between the works of Woolf and Heidegger, so that each chapter focuses upon the explication of particular issues and aspects of Being-in-the-worldCovers a wide range of Woolf's fictional and non-fictional writing
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1n7qhrd

Introduction from: Virginia Woolf and Being-in-the-world
Abstract: Referring to the work of the English writer, Virginia Woolf (1882–1941), and the German philosopher, Martin Heidegger (1889–1976), Heidi Storl suggests that a ‘discussion of the seemingly unlikely alliance between these two thinkers generates new strategies by which to “look through” much of our daily experience and discover – even if only momentarily – what it is to behuman’ (2008: 303). Despite the marked variances between Woolf and Heidegger in terms of their backgrounds, experiences, vocations, nationalities and political orientations, this book proposes that at the heart of the issue of what it means to be an individual making

Chapter 1 Being-in-the-world from: Virginia Woolf and Being-in-the-world
Abstract: Evident throughout the various forms of Woolf’s writings – from her novels and short stories, through to her essays, reviews, memoirs, letters and diary entries – is a consistent and dominant preoccupation with the relationship between the individual and the world. Reflected in these works is Woolf’s understanding that while the ‘world’ consists of the physical environment and its tangible objects, as well as those individuals with whom we co-exist, this notion also comes to be defined by the individual’s everyday involvements and engagements; that is, ‘our experienceof the world’ (Hussey 1986: xiii). As this chapter will demonstrate, for Woolf, definitive

Chapter 2 A Sense of Place from: Virginia Woolf and Being-in-the-world
Abstract: As emphasised in the previous chapter, it is the average everyday lived experience of Being-in-the-world that is a central concern and preoccupation throughout Woolf’s writings. Despite the incalculable variety of everyday experiences that any individual may encounter during his or her lifetime, each is always and inevitably located in a particular place, whether it be the home, the street, a city, the countryside, the workplace or an armchair. Place provides the setting and context for all experience.¹ The inherent connection between the individual, experience and place, and how each depends upon the other for definition and actuality, is a view

Introduction from: Immanence and Micropolitics
Abstract: It is often supposed that politics operates by way of conscious deliberation and the rational pursuit of an interest of some kind. There are innumerable instances, historical and contemporary, that immediately put this view into doubt. Instances that warrant a closer examination of the nature of the human subject at the centre of such deliberation. It is apparent that in the Westernised world, the working class seldom vote for political parties or pursue political matters representative of their real interests. Indeed, this touches on one of the most pertinent questions of our time: how has capitalism managed to live on

Chapter 3 Foucault and the Force of Power-Knowledge from: Immanence and Micropolitics
Abstract: Sartre radically displaces the centred self and begins to reconfigure the Outside/Other through his fleshism. This is advanced by Merleau-Ponty, who in reaching for the Lebensweltas a means to bypass the crisis of modern thought, ultimately provides the conceptual notion of the fold. The fold, in turn, allows us to overcome some of the more ambiguous elements in Sartre’s thought, particularly insofar as his retention of a dualistic vernacular evokes a problematic image of transcendence and therefore remains trapped in this crisis. The remaining issue with Merleau-Ponty concerns his lack of a worked-out conception of force, particularly within a

INTRODUCTION from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Wray Ramona
Abstract: In the courtyard of the “Casa di Giulietta” – and on the cover of this book – stands a striking embodiment of Shakespeare’s Juliet.¹ In the same way that Montague, in Romeo and Juliet, memorializes Capulet’s daughter – “For I will raise her statue in pure gold” (5.3.298) – so has the city of Verona elected to honour and localize a character from the early modern English stage. The work of local artist, Nereo Costantini, the sculpture of Juliet was financed by the Lions’ Club of Verona, completed in 1968 and displayed, for the first time, in 1972. Dates are suggestive, and it was

4 SHAKESPEARE AND TRANSLATION from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Huang Alexander C. Y.
Abstract: Literary translation is a love affair. Depending on the context, it could be love at first sight or hot pursuit of a lover’s elusive nodding approval. In other instances it could be unrequited love, and still others a test of devotion and faith; or else an eclectic combination of any of these events. Translation involves artistic creativity, not a workshop of equivalences. As human civilizations developed and intersected, translation emerged as a necessary form of communication and a way of life. It highlighted and put to productive use the space between cultures, between individuals with different perspectives and within one’s

5 SHAKESPEARE ANTHOLOGIZED from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Rumbold Kate
Abstract: In the twenty-first century, “Shakespeare” is not only an English cultural icon but shares some of the characteristics of a powerful global brand. This chapter shows the surprising but important role that the many books of quotations and extracts from Shakespeare’s works, published from within his own lifetime to the present day, have played in establishing that status. It argues that these anthologies have not simply reflected Shakespeare’s growing status, but actively helped to construct it. The seemingly inherent qualities for which Shakespeare is now admired – the beauty of his language, his wise understanding of human nature, his Englishness – are

8 SHAKESPEARE AND OPERA from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Streete Adrian
Abstract: For the nineteenth-century French composer, Hector Berlioz, Shakespeare offered more than artistic inspiration. In fact, the playwright and his works acted as a prism through which the composer understood and rationalized his personal and professional successes and failures, indeed his very identity. Berlioz first discovered Shakespeare in 1827, an event he describes in his Memoires (1870) with typically Romantic effusion: “This sudden and unexpected revelation of Shakespeare overwhelmed me. The lightening flash of his genius revealed the whole heaven of art to me, illuminating its remotest depths in a single flash” (Berlioz, 1932, 66; see Schmidgall, 1990, 272–9; Cairns,

10 SHAKESPEARE AND MUSICAL THEATRE from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Teague Fran
Abstract: Musical theatre is found world-wide, often with national inflections. Whether one considers a satyr play, opera, zarzuela, or Broadway show, that work is clearly an instance of musical theatre. Given the frequency with which songs occur, Shakespeare’s plays are themselves instances of musical theatre, but in this chapter I shall be focusing on one narrow branch of musical theatre, the sort of show that is sometimes called the Broadway musical (no Verdi or Elvis Costello here). A few such musicals have grown from Shakespeare’s plays, with the best-known instances being The Boys from Syracuse, West Side Story and Kiss Me,

12 SHAKESPEARE AND POPULAR MUSIC from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Hansen Adam
Abstract: This chapter addresses the following questions: how have Shakespearean characters, words, texts and iconography been represented and reworked through popular music; do all types of popular music represent Shakespeare in the same ways; if not, why not; and how do the links between Shakespeare and popular music develop what we think we know about Shakespeare, and what we think we know about popular music?

14 SHAKESPEARE AND THE RENAISSANCE STAGE from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Lamb Edel
Abstract: The Renaissance stage, the artistic milieu in which Shakespeare’s dramatic works were originally produced, is fundamental to a consideration of the relationships between the playwright and the arts. Shakespeare’s plays were produced in the rapidly expanding institution of the theatre in late sixteenth- and early seventeenth-century London and the shifting practices of this establishment had a significant influence on his plays, and are also examined in them. The Tempest, for instance, performed as part of the repertory of the King’s Men at the Blackfriars and Globe playhouses between 1611 and 1613 and at the Jacobean court in November 1611 and

15 SHAKESPEARE AND THE RESTORATION AND EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY STAGE from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Ritchie Fiona
Abstract: In 1679 John Dryden wrote of the challenges he found in adapting Shakespeare in terms that might surprise a modern reader. In remodelling Troilus and Cressida, Dryden said he “undertook to remove that heap of Rubbish, under which many excellent thoughts lay wholly bury’d”. Similarly, in 1681 Nahum Tate described Shakespeare’s King Lear as “a Heap of Jewels, unstrung and unpolisht; yet . . . dazling in their Disorder” (Clark, 1997, 295). The Restoration theatre did not have the same reverence towards Shakespeare’s works that we do today; indeed, perhaps the most surprising aspect of the performance of Shakespeare on

19 SHAKESPEARE FOR CHILDREN from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Scott-Douglass Amy
Abstract: Children’s Shakespeare is far from being young. In fact, it is more than 200 years old. From the first editions, printed in 1807, to current day adaptations, authors and illustrators have found in Shakespeare’s work ample material for retellings geared to youngsters.¹ This essay will look at the philosophies of children’s Shakespeare, and theories and practices of adaptation over the last two centuries. It will discuss several adaptations by the major figures of children’s Shakespeare: Henrietta and Thomas Bowdler, Mary and Charles Lamb, Edith Nesbit, Marchette Chutte, Leon Garfield, Lois Burdett, Marcia Williams and Tina Packer – along with other, non-canonical

29 SHAKESPEARE AND RADIO from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Greenhalgh Susanne
Abstract: The all-star Renaissance Theatre Company production of Hamlet (BBC Radio 3, 26 April 1992), featuring Kenneth Branagh as the Prince and John Gielgud as the Ghost, is a bold and richly textured achievement, one which points to many of the issues that this chapter on Shakespeare and radio will seek to address.¹ Just under four hours long, with an “entirety” script conflated from the First Folio and Second Quarto, the production presents a version “probably never heard in the author’s lifetime (and perhaps never envisaged by him)” (Jackson, 1994, 202). Effectively this is a new work, one that raises fascinating

CHAPTER 1 FILM: from: Texts
Abstract: The approaches used by critics to study literary texts, particularly novels, are often equally helpful when considering aspects of film, especially features such as theme, narrative and imagery. There are, of course, significant differences between the two genres: in terms of technology, team production, visual realisation and so forth. A film is the result of multiple efforts from hundreds of individuals, even if they are working towards achieving the vision of one person, a director who may or may not also be the screenwriter.

CHAPTER 7 NEWSPAPER ARTICLE: THE GULF WAR IN REAL TIME AND VIRTUAL SPACE from: Texts
Abstract: The literary, however identified, may be said to include many examples of non-fiction, including works of journalism. Given the reporter’s quasi-objective relationship to history, the journalistic article was in some ways seen as a model for much literature in the 1930s, with a writer such as George Orwell specialising equally in fiction, essay-writing and reportage, and a novelist such as Christopher Isherwood fashioning himself in fiction as a news camera ‘recording, not thinking’.² Newspaper articles are, in fact, defined by their place of publication rather than their content, but there are certain likely formal characteristics or principles of journalistic writing

CHAPTER 14 AUTOBIOGRAPHY: MARTIN AMIS’S from: Texts
Abstract: The study of autobiography has been resurgent in recent decades, and the genre is now often discussed by historians, literary critics and others alongside biographies, memoirs, letters, diaries and reminiscences – as well as works more conventionally considered ‘history’ or ‘fiction’ – under the banner of life writing (the term ‘self-life-writing’ is Avrom Fleishman’s). One reason for this is the rise of interdisciplinary areas of study that have found autobiography to be a particularly useful form of writing, and so have accorded it a distinctive place in the study of both authenticity and alterity. In the 1970s, women’s studies, American studies, ethnic

CHAPTER 15 VIRTUAL TEXT: AMAZONIAN DEMOCRACY from: Texts
Abstract: In his 1909 story ‘The Machine Stops’, E. M. Forster imagines a future underground world in which a vast mechanised web connects together all of its isolated, enervated citizens. In this society, all communication is undertaken through the machine, but its vast network can connect two people anywhere around the globe. Forster’s story, though less well-known than the later Dystopian visions of Huxley’s Brave New World or Orwell’s 1984, envisions one technological aspect of contemporary life more fully than either.

CHAPTER 16 WORLD MEDIA EVENT: IT’S ABOUT TIME: CULTURAL HISTORY AT THE MILLENNIUM from: Texts
Abstract: According to Iain Sinclair, writing in 1999, the millennium had no future because it had already happened. The millennial moment in Britain and beyond, was not the dawn of the year 2000 but the death of the Princess of Wales – discussed in Chapter 5. Sinclair is here working with the idea of affect and with an emotional moment; one that expresses the finality, transition and mourning that might be associated with an endpoint, even though the media mood for the millennial shift itself was unremittingly celebratory. Yet Sinclair’s view that ‘the millennium’ happened somewhere or sometime else points up many

Introduction from: Death, 'Deathlessness' and Existenz in Karl Jaspers' Philosophy
Abstract: Karl Jaspers’ existential concept of death lies at the heart of this book. For Jaspers, a human being is not merely a physical entity, but a being with a transcendent aspect, which is in some sense ‘deathless’. It is the connection between these two aspects of the human being that governs the structure of his work. This book is primarily concerned to clarify and reassess Jaspers’ concept of death and his claim that one’s transcendent self ‘knows no death’. In this respect, it is an attempt to determine what it means for a human being to be ‘deathless’ within the

CHAPTER 2 Karl Jaspers’ Philosophy of Existence from: Death, 'Deathlessness' and Existenz in Karl Jaspers' Philosophy
Abstract: Jaspers is one of the influential German thinkers of the twentieth century. His influence is found in the works of Hannah Arendt, Hans-Georg Gadamer, Jürgen Habermas, Helmut Plessner and Paul Tillich among other thinkers. Jaspers’ contribution to the medical, psychiatric and philosophical fields is extensive; his General Psychopathology, for example, is still used in psychiatry. It is none the less unfortunate that, as a philosopher, he has not been fully appreciated or fully explored in the English-speaking world. In his outlook and mode of inquiry, Jaspers’ primary focus was the concrete individual. He believed that personal experience is one’s fundamental

CHAPTER 3 Jaspers’ Concepts of from: Death, 'Deathlessness' and Existenz in Karl Jaspers' Philosophy
Abstract: In Chapter 2 we discussed Jaspers’ account of the notion of death and the distinction between death as an objective fact and death that gives rise to a boundary situation. We noted that one’s Dasein perishes at death. Existenz, one’s true self, however, ‘knows no death’, that is to say, it is deathless.¹ We also noted that the ‘deathlessness’ of Existenz within the Jaspersian framework does not imply immortality in the traditional sense of the term. In other words, there is no continued existence for Existenz after death.

CHAPTER 4 from: Death, 'Deathlessness' and Existenz in Karl Jaspers' Philosophy
Abstract: In Chapter 3, we explored the relationship between Existenz, death and eternity. We also interpreted what it means for one’s Existenz to be deathless from two different perspectives: the Mystical and the Existential Interpretations. We now turn to the final part of the analysis. In this chapter, I draw on the traditional understanding of eternity as non-temporal duration. I then take a fresh look at Jaspers’ concept of the Augenblick experience within the framework of the Existential Interpretative model. Finally, Jaspers’ assertions about the eternal aspect of one’s Existenz is reassessed.

3 Imagination and the Imaginary from: The World, the Flesh and the Subject
Abstract: In much contemporary work there has been a shift from a conception of the imagination to explorations of the imaginary (or imaginaries).¹ In this chapter we want to explore the move from imagination, conceived of as some kind of faculty, perhaps that of creating inner or outer images, to the notion of the imaginary. We will suggest that the world, the experiences of which constitute our subjectivity, is an imaginary world and that the embodiment which constitutes our mode of being in that world is an imaginary embodiment. Here the notion of imaginary existence is not, as in many theories

6 Reason, Agency and Understanding from: The World, the Flesh and the Subject
Abstract: In the previous chapter our discussion of emotion drew attention to an often made contrast between intentional engagements with the world, explicable in terms of reason, and emotional responses, themselves bodily, which apparently fall outside the sphere of purposive, intentional engagement. This contrast worked on a picture of intentional action which involved mental deliberation and the operation of impersonal standards of reasoning, and a picture of emotion as disruptive bodily eruptions of a personal kind which assail otherwise rational subjects. By the end of the chapter, however, this contrast had been undermined, by an account of our bodily emotional responses

Book Title: Death-Drive-Freudian Hauntings in Literature and Art
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Smith Robert Rowland
Abstract: Robert Rowland Smith takes Freud's work on the death-drive and compares it with other philosophies of death - Pascal, Heidegger and Derrida in particular. He also applies it in a new way to literature and art - to Shakespeare, Rothko and Katharina Fritsch, among others. He asks whether artworks are dead or alive, if artistic creativity isn't actually a form of destruction, and whether our ability to be seduced by fine words means we don't put our selves at risk of death. In doing so, he proposes a new theory of aesthetics in which artworks and literary texts have a death-drive of their own, not least by their defining ability to turn away from all that is real, and where the effects of the death-drive mean that we are constantly living in imaginary, rhetorical or 'artistic' worlds. The book also provides a valuable introduction to the rich tradition of work on the death-drive since Freud.Key Features* Includes a general introduction to the death-drive* Presents an original theory of aesthetics* Analyses both theoretical and clinical psychoanalysis* Offers in-depth treatment of Freud* Provides an overview of philosophies of death
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r23mg

Chapter 4 White Over Red from: Death-Drive
Abstract: Under the circumstances of psychoanalytic theory, that’s how. As long as the ‘I’ refers to a psychoanalytic subject, the claim has perfect validity. Freud’s famous work on parapraxes – slips of the tongue and the like – paradoxically implies the psyche never goes wrong. Chapter ten of The Psychopathology of Everyday Lifeis entitled ‘Errors’. Paragraphs

Chapter 7 The Rest of Radioactive Light from: Death-Drive
Abstract: The persistence of an old thing, even a dead one, the continuance of light over time, the concept of the photograph, the ‘radioactivity’ of artworks, Hamlet, Samuel Beckett and, again, Freud – these are the themes I want

CHAPTER 3 Metaphors We Live By from: Creating Worldviews
Abstract: The explosion of work on metaphor in recent decades has its roots in the ground-breaking book Metaphors We Live By, written by Lakoff and Johnson in 1980. Though the two authors have modified their position in separate and co-written works since then, and though cognitive approaches have moved on to other fields of linguistics, semantics and epistemology, and though they have introduced new paradigms for analysing metaphor, it is worth quoting the fundamental claims made in this work, since these claims have influenced the terms of the debate that revolves around the representation of conceptual constructs in language. The pith

CHAPTER 4 Other Developments in Metaphor Theory from: Creating Worldviews
Abstract: It would be a mistake to assume that cognitive linguists uncovered the secret power of metaphor. At least two reasons contradict such an idea: firstly, there has always been a great deal of work on metaphor, and, secondly, the concept of metaphor has itself been expanded in cognitive research to encompass questions and fields of study which up until recently had been investigated by scholars who did not consider metaphor to be their principle focus of interest. Indeed, a wide variety of disciplines from grammar to comparative linguistics have now entered into the metaphor debate. In contrast to this loose

CHAPTER 5 Further Cognitive Contributions to Metaphor Theory from: Creating Worldviews
Abstract: Cognitive approaches to metaphor show a great diversity in themselves, and this diversity is mirrored by the variety of strands within Lakoff’s own work. In his individual work since 1990, Lakoff has concentrated a great deal of his energy on applying metaphor theory to politics. Adopting the role of the engaged intellectual, he has used the concepts of folk theories, narrative theory and conceptual metaphor to analyse the discourse of political rhetoric in studies such as his accounts of the two wars in Iraq. He offered a book-length account of the deficiencies of Democrat Party rhetoric in Moral Politics, published

CHAPTER 6 Diversity on the Periphery from: Creating Worldviews
Abstract: Studies which approach the question of metaphor with a comparative approach include The Ubiquity of Metaphor: Amsterdam Studies in the Theory and History of Linguistic Science (1985) edited by Wolf Paprotté and René Dirven, the multilingual studies to be found on the metaphorik.de online journal, based in Hamburg, Germany, and work carried out by Czech and Polish scholars and published by Irena Vaňková in The Picture of the World in Language (Obraz světa v jazyce, 2001). Eve Sweetser, like Andrew Goatly, is somewhat of an exception in that she is one of the few prominent cognitive linguists to propose comparative

CHAPTER 8 from: Creating Worldviews
Abstract: In the last chapter we considered the way metaphor helped to shape and structure the worldview of Czech communists in the 1970s. We were, however, forced to accept that we were often dealing with three different kinds of worldview. The Czech language itself, as a network of concepts, conceptual links and linguistic habits, had been remodelled by the forces of the Marxist–Leninist worldview. This was by no means a one-way process: on the contrary, the concepts of ‘people’, ‘folk’ and ‘nation’ which were fundamental to the communist worldview were modelled using the plastic material of the Czech imagination, an

Introduction: from: Dissenting Histories
Abstract: This is a study of some eighteenth-century historical works. They are mostly by Dissenters, little known and less read: Edmund Calamy’s Abridgment of Mr Baxter’s History of his Life and Times, Daniel Neal’s History of the Puritans, William Harris’s Historical and Critical Account of the Life of Oliver Cromwell, Samuel Palmer’s The Nonconformist’s Memorial and Joseph Cornish’s Brief and Impartial History of the Puritans, among others. Chapters are also devoted to David Hume’s History of England and Edmund Burke’s Reflections on the Revolution in France. The object of study is not, however, a series of texts, canonical or otherwise, abstracted

2 Protestant Liberty: from: Dissenting Histories
Abstract: The most influential Dissenting history of the eighteenth century was The History of the Puritans by Daniel Neal; or to give its full title: The History of the Puritans; or, Protestant Nonconformists; from the Reformation in 1517. To the Revolution in 1688: comprising an account of their principles; their attempts for a further reformation in the Church; their sufferings; and the lives and characters of their most considerable divines. Caroline Robbins called it ‘probably the most interesting revelation of Dissenting ideas in a secular work in the second quarter of the eighteenth century’.¹

Conclusion from: Dissenting Histories
Abstract: To move beyond Burke’s Reflections into the Revolution debate of the 1790s is to move beyond the scope of this book – indeed, would warrant another book. These rich and complex exchanges, in a situation of acute political crisis, were the nexus out of which came some of the major works of Whig history of the first half of the nineteenth century, bedevilled by the unfinished business of 1688.¹ The Revolution debate was precisely – and this has been underplayed in the secondary literature – a dispute about history. It was, in key respects, initiated by the Dissenters in their campaigns against the

INTRODUCTION from: Language and Power in the Modern World
Abstract: This book is about language and power. But what is power? How should we go about studying it in relation to language? And for that matter, why? These are not easy questions to answer. Our aim in writing this book is to get you thinking about them, and to get you thinking about the way power ‘works’ in the linguistic practices that people engage in. Power in language is certainly not just about what we might initially think of as ‘powerful language’ (drowning out the voices of others by shouting a lot, for instance). Consider the claim that:

1 LANGUAGE AND THE MEDIA from: Language and Power in the Modern World
Abstract: This chapter considers the extent to which verbal interaction through the mass media differs from other kinds, such as the face-to-face interaction of individuals, and its consequences in terms of power relations. It examines the power of the media in its assertions of shared values and opinions and works through how such constructions of ‘common sense’ can be critically investigated, drawing for examples on work on racist discourse in the press. It then takes up issues specific to the mediated talk of television and radio, attending to the structuring of ‘live’ talk and to mediatised political language. This involves a

2 LANGUAGE AND ORGANISATIONS from: Language and Power in the Modern World
Abstract: This chapter explores the relationship between organisational discourse practices, power and resistance. It is concerned with the ways in which language is used to create and shape an organisation, to carve out an internal structure with circumscribed roles, responsibilities and rights for its different members, and for others with whom they interact. Covering institutional documentation, work discussions and routine talk, it also explores the discursive patterns of control and challenge as struggles for identity occur. We are interested in what has been defined as ‘institutional language’ (Thornborrow 2002; Drew and Heritage 1992) – talk that has pre-inscribed participant roles; is

Book Title: George Mackay Brown and the Philosophy of Community- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Baker Timothy C.
Abstract: In this book Timothy C. Baker situates George Mackay Brown's work within a broad literary and philosophical context to articulate how his novels engage with the question of community.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r24v9

Introduction: from: George Mackay Brown and the Philosophy of Community
Abstract: ‘Prologue’, the opening poem in George Mackay Brown’s first collection, establishes the tone for all of his work to come. One of his most anthologised and analysed works, it places his writing in a context of a wilful nostalgia and parochialism:

Chapter 2 Sainthood-towards-Death: from: George Mackay Brown and the Philosophy of Community
Abstract: The story of Magnus Erlendson,¹ twelfth-century Earl of Orkney and martyred saint, is perhaps the best known to emerge from the islands, the ‘most famous episode in Orkney’s history’.² In John Mooney’s modern hagiography, a major source for twentieth-century writing on Magnus, the earl is held to be ‘the outstanding personality of the Orkneys in olden days as well as in our own times’.³ This claim still stands seventy years after Mooney’s biography, thanks not only to the continued popularity of the Orkneyinga Saga and related Icelandic tellings, but also to George Mackay Brown’s repeated reworking of the story, especially

Chapter 3 The Individual Community and the Community of Individuals from: George Mackay Brown and the Philosophy of Community
Abstract: While in Greenvoe Brown depicts the life of an entire community, and in Magnus he focuses on the way the death of an individual can create community, in his later novels he concentrates on the individual search for community. In the largely symbolic fairy tale Time in a Red Coat, the seafaring adventure story Vinland and the elegiac Beside the Ocean of Time, Brown examines the idea of community as myth, as historical reality and as fiction itself. All three of these works can be read as examples of Denis Hollier’s definition of the novel as ‘the story of an

Conclusion: from: George Mackay Brown and the Philosophy of Community
Abstract: Alasdair Gray, in a 1983 interview, spoke of his desire for a global audience: ‘I want to be read by an English-speaking tribe which extends to Capetown in the south, Bengal in the east, California in the west, and George Mackay Brown in the north.’¹ The Scottish novelist Eric Linklater, who had strong Orcadian ties himself, also presents Brown not only as the chronicler of a particular regional identity, but as an embodiment of that region. Linklater calls Brown ‘a recognised feature of Orkney’s landscape’ and ‘essentially a poet of Orkney’.² Brown’s work and personal identity are, from these perspectives,

3 The Usual Suspects from: The Idea of Continental Philosophy
Abstract: The engagement with texts outside the mainstream of analytic philosophy that has characterised my own work in philosophy has always involved an effort indirectly to intervene in the regular programming of analytic expectations about such texts. By rendering myself capable of reading these texts I have sought to encourage others to feel less well prepared for what they might encounter. My thought is that without such a disruption they will remain prepared only for the (for them, for everyone) depressing prospect of reading the Other.¹

8 Towards a Concept of Connected Memory: from: Media and Memory
Abstract: My Facebook page is awash with unremarkable images of conventionality: new babies, weddings, beloved pets, children on the beach, families skiing, gatherings, nights out, concerts, gardens, home improvements and hobbies. The vast majority of these I am not in. Some of these I have felt compelled to add to but most are produced by an online collection of individuals who may or may not be networked to each other and most likely have not been connected to me in the real world for quite some time. They are ‘dormant memories’ as Hoskins describes them (2010). Ceaselessly streaming this data of

1 WHAT PLACE FOR DOCTRINE IN A TIME OF FRAGMENTATION? from: Philosophy of International Law
Abstract: I intend to begin simply by referring to two recent French works, the Dictionnaire encyclopédique de théorie et de sociologie du droit and a colloquium organized by the legal history department of the University of Picardie (Amiens), La Doctrine juridique. The first provides us with an authoritative and vital distinction between legal doctrine and legal dogmatics, while the second explains the problematic of keeping the former alive.

2 CONTINUING UNCERTAINTY IN THE MAINSTREAM from: Philosophy of International Law
Abstract: There is no consensus among International lawyers on a workable or operable concept of general customary law, supposed to be the fundamental source of an international law binding upon states. It is thought to represent an analytical framework within which one can assess whether states recognize a rule, principle, or practice as binding upon them as law. Jurists are to examine the same ‘raw material’ of international relations as diplomats, statesmen, historians, and political scientists. Yet according to the most orthodox view, expressed in the jurisprudence of the ICJ the jurists are to find that states have, in some sense,

Book Title: The Lacanian Left-Psychoanalysis, Theory, Politics
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Stavrakakis Yannis
Abstract: In recent years psychoanalysis – especially Lacanian theory – has been gradually acknowledged as a vital resource in the ongoing re-orientation of contemporary political theory and analysis. Of particular note is that the work of Jacques Lacan is increasingly being used by major political philosophers associated with the Left. This indicates the dynamic emergence of a new theoretico-political horizon: that of the ‘Lacanian Left’. However, this has yet to be properly conceived and structured as a field. The Lacanian Left is the first book to bring it into academic consciousness and to draw its implications for concrete political analysis in a systematic way. It offers:• An accessible mapping of its main contours. • A detailed examination of the points of convergence and divergence between the major figures active or at the periphery of this terrain, including Slavoj h the central Lacanian notion of ‘enjoyment’, The Lacanian Left puts forward innovative analyses of political power and authority, nationalism, European identity, consumerism and advertising culture, de-democratisation and post-democracy. It will be of value to everyone interested in exploring the potential of psychoanalysis to reinvigorate political theory, critical political analysis and democratic politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r288w

1 Antinomies of Creativity: from: The Lacanian Left
Abstract: Of all the theorists examined in this book, Cornelius Castoriadis is neither the most well-known nor the closest one to Lacan’s legacy. However, the decision to put this chapter first is not entirely arbitrary.¹ From a historical point of view, Castoriadis was one of the first major political and social theorists of the Left – a founding member of the famous Socialisme ou barbarie group – to engage so closely with Lacanianism, and already in the 1960s.² More importantly, exactly because he was gradually led to a violent rejection of Lacanian theory, his work can function as an external frontier, helping us

2 Laclau with Lacan on from: The Lacanian Left
Abstract: If Castoriadis constitutes the (extimate) frontier of the emerging Lacanian Left, two of its pivotal figures are certainly Ernesto Laclau and Chantal Mouffe. For a start, they have both exhibited, again and again, their increasing readiness to take on board many crucial Lacanian insights in their innovative analysis of political discourse and in reorienting the political theory of the Left in the direction of a ‘radical and plural democracy’. In their joint work, theoretical affinities with Lacanian thought are evident from at least the time of Hegemony and Socialist Strategy (Laclau and Mouffe 1985), if not earlier. This is not

3 Ž¡žekian ‘Perversions’: from: The Lacanian Left
Abstract: My engagement with the work of Laclau has focused on the importance of combining a Lacan-inspired awareness of lack and of the limits of discourse (the Lacanian conceptualisation of negativity qua encounter with the real) with a more substantive dimension, crucial for understanding political life and especially the affective aspect of identification processes: the axis of enjoyment in its different modalities and in its continuous interaction with the discursive constitution of our social and political reality, with the materiality of the signifier. As we have seen, such an articulation requires a delicate balancing act between negativity and positivity. If the

4 What Sticks? from: The Lacanian Left
Abstract: Throughout the first part of this book I have discussed central aspects of the work of major figures associated with the Lacanian Left. Engaging in a dialogue with the theoretico-political projects of Castoriadis, Laclau, Ž¡ž¡ek and Badiou, I have tried to highlight the major contributions Lacanian theory has to offer to a critical understanding of political phenomena and to a much-needed ethicopolitical re-orientation. In the second part of The Lacanian Left I will be shifting my attention to a variety of concrete issues which can be fruitfully analysed and illuminated from the Lacanian viewpoint sketched in the preceding chapters. My

4 Intended Communities: from: Intending Scotland
Abstract: Ian Hamilton Finlay’s garden at Little Sparta is not only devoted to the memory of earlier gardens, but to the recollection of the Second World War: amidst the greenery lurk aircraft carriers, warships, panzer tanks, and memorials of the battle of Midway. Like many Scottish artists of his generation, Finlay’s work is deeply marked by his experiences during the War, in which he served for three and a half years with the Royal Army Signals Corps. Betula Pendula – the Latin name for Scotland’s silver birch tree – is the inscription beneath a picture of the raised gun of a tank disguised

Afterword from: Intending Scotland
Abstract: In the 1980s, when Hamilton Finlay’s garden was coming to maturity, another Scottish poet created an institution aimed at regaining poetry’s relationship with the natural world. The International Institute of Geopoetics in Paris was launched in 1989 by Glasgow-born Kenneth White, then Professor of Twentieth-Century Poetics at the Sorbonne. Geopoetics was a response to the fact that ‘it was becoming more and more obvious that the earth (the biosphere) was in danger and that ways, both deep and efficient, would have to be worked out in order to protect it’, and that what was required was a return to ‘the

Book Title: Phenomenology or Deconstruction?-The Question of Ontology in Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Paul Ricoeur and Jean-Luc Nancy
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Watkin Christopher
Abstract: Phenomenology or Deconstruction? challenges traditional understandings of the relationship between phenomenology and deconstruction through new readings of the work of Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Paul Ricœur and Jean-Luc Nancy. A constant dialogue with Jacques Derrida's engagement with phenomenological themes provides the impetus to establishing a new understanding of 'being' and 'presence' that exposes significant blindspots inherent in traditional readings of both phenomenology and deconstruction.In reproducing neither a stock phenomenological reaction to deconstruction nor the routine deconstructive reading of phenomenology, Christopher Watkin provides a fresh assessment of the possibilities for the future of phenomenology, along with a new reading of the deconstructive legacy. Through detailed studies of the philosophy of Merleau-Ponty, Ricœur and Nancy, he shows how a phenomenological tradition much wider and richer than Husserlian or Heideggerean thought alone can take account of Derrida's critique of ontology and yet still hold a commitment to the ontological. This new reading of being and presence fundamentally re-draws our understanding of the relation of deconstruction and phenomenology, and provides the first sustained discussion of the possibilities and problems for any future 'deconstructive phenomenology'.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r29kp

1. Maurice Merleau-Ponty: from: Phenomenology or Deconstruction?
Abstract: In recent years, two trends have coincided in French thought. First, a number of authors have taken it upon themselves to assess the relation of deconstruction and phenomenology, and secondly in the same period a renewed and growing interest has been shown in the work of Maurice Merleau-Ponty.² The two tendencies are by no means independent, for Merleau-Ponty’s work is often cited in relation to deconstructive concerns, either as a precursor³ or as an antagonist.⁴ It appears that the moment has come to assess, if not settle, the ontological accounts between Merleau-Ponty and deconstruction.

6. Jean-Luc Nancy: from: Phenomenology or Deconstruction?
Abstract: The previous chapter dealt with the question of alterity in Nancy’s work. Now we turn to the problem of commensurability. Chapter 5 considered the possibility of contact with a meaningful world, while this chapter pursues the issue of the conflict of meaning(s) in the world: what is to be done when a number of incommensurable values must be measured against each other or, in other words, how are we to calculate the incalculable? It is the problem we have been posing to Derrida’s deconstruction; it is also the question at the heart of the cosmological motif we have been tracing

14 POPULAR DANCE MUSIC AND THE MEDIA from: Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Collins John
Abstract: The record business in Ghana (and indeed West Africa) began in the mid-1920s, when the British Zonophone/HMV company first issued recordings of West African popular music and local ‘spirituals’; and particularly after 1928, when the United Africa Company (UAC) became their distributor. In 1930 the Zonophone/HMV company sold 181,484 shellac 78-rpm records, and between 1930 and 1933 this company and the German Odeon company (working out of Lagos, Nigeria) sold 800,000 records in West Africa. This was possible because lucrative cash crops (like cocoa and oil palm) enabled many Ghanaian and Nigerians, even farmers, to buy wind-up gramophones and enjoy

16 ‘TO MAKE STRANGE THINGS POSSIBLE’: from: Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Behrend Heike
Abstract: The Bakor Studio in Lamu, situated on one of the main streets of the Old Town, was established in the 1960s. The founder, Mr Omar Said Bakor, born in 1932, was a self-made man and brilliant bricoleur, who never went to school. His family originated in Yemen. Before opening the studio, he worked for ten years as a street photographer. He experimented with various techniques of montage ‘to make strange things possible and for fun’, as one of his sons, Mr Najid Omar Said Bakor, explained to me in 1996. His father also recorded the history of Lamu in photographs

20 MUSEUMS IN AFRICA from: Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Wandibba Simiyu
Abstract: The word ‘museum’ is derived from the Greek word mouseion. In ancient Greece, the mouseion was the temple of the muses, the goddesses of the arts and sciences, upon whom writers called for inspiration before beginning to work. Thus, as originally conceived, the mouseion implied an environment suited to creative inspiration. By about 300 BC, this word was used to designate a library and research area in Alexandria, Egypt. In other words, the earliest known museum in the modern sense of the term was actually built in Africa.

21 LITERARY PRIZES, BOOK PRIZES AND AFRICAN WRITING from: Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Bgoya Walter
Abstract: There is a difference between a literary prize and a book prize. The former, as the name implies, is about works of literature – novels, short stories, poetry, drama, children’s literature. On

Chapter 12 Gilles Deleuzeʹs Political Posture from: Deleuze and Philosophy
Author(s) Lamble Sarah
Abstract: Is it possible to answer the question of politics in the work of Deleuze, without going through desire and its variants? Deleuze’s work spans twenty-six publications, authored by him or written in collaboration with the psychiatrist Félix Guattari. In these texts, Deleuze deals with the thought of Kant, Nietzsche, Bergson, Spinoza, Leibniz, Hume, Foucault, with the writings of Kafka, Proust, Sacher-Masoch, with Francis Bacon’s painting, and with cinema and theatre. Politics, however, because only traces and indices of it exist in his texts, seems to be permanently put to question. At first sight, it is not even clear that there

Book Title: Post-Foundational Political Thought-Political Difference in Nancy, Lefort, Badiou and Laclau
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Marchart Oliver
Abstract: A wide-ranging overview of the emergence of post-foundationalism and a survey of the work of its key contemporary exponents.This book presents the first systematic coverage of the conceptual difference between ‘politics’ (the practice of conventional politics: the political system or political forms of action) and ‘the political’ (a much more radical aspect which cannot be restricted to the realms of institutional politics). It is also the first introductory overview of post-foundationalism and the tradition of ‘left Heideggerianism’: the political thought of contemporary theorists who make frequent use of the idea of political difference: Jean-Luc Nancy, Claude Lefort, Alain Badiou and Ernesto Laclau.After an overview of current trends in social post-foundationalism and a genealogical chapter on the historical emergence of the difference between the concepts of ‘politics’ and ‘the political’, the work of individual theorists is presented and discussed at length. Individual chapters are presented on the political thought of Jean-Luc Nancy (including Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe), Claude Lefort, Alain Badiou, and Ernesto Laclau (including Chantal Mouffe).Overall the book offers an elaboration of the idea of a post-foundational conception of politics.Other titles in the Taking on the Political series: Valentine and Arditi/ Polemicisation 0 7486 1064 2Shapiro/ Cinematic Political Thought 0 7486 1289 0Chambers/ Language and the Politics of Untimeliness 0 7486 1766 3Bowman/ Post-Marxism Versus Cultural Studies 978 0 7486 1762 3Simons/ Critical Political Theory in the Media Age 0 7486 1583 0
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r2bs1

Chapter 3 Retracing the Political Difference: from: Post-Foundational Political Thought
Abstract: Every inquiry into social post-foundationalism and the conceptual difference between politics and the political will have to take into account the work presented and elaborated at the Centre for Philosophical Research on the Political between 1980 and 1984. The Centre, founded by Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe and Jean-Luc Nancy, turned out to be the location for the most intense and influential re-elaboration so far of the notion of the political, or of the difference between politics and the political. The way Claude Lefort and Alain Badiou, for instance, frame their own versions of the political difference (oftentimes in contradistinction to Nancy and

Chapter 4 The Machiavellian Moment Re-Theorized: from: Post-Foundational Political Thought
Abstract: ‘My purpose here is to encourage and to contribute to a revival of political philosophy.’ These words stand at the beginning of one of Claude Lefort’s most prominent articles (Lefort 1988: 9) – based on a talk he delivered at Nancy and Lacoue-Labarthe’s Centre for Philosophical Research on the Political. And indeed, there can be no doubt as to the significance of Lefort’s work for contemporary political philosophy and, in particular, for democracy theory. What Lefort has elaborated is one of the most powerful theorizations of the political, of democracy and totalitarianism, which can help us better to grasp the primacy

Chapter 5 The State and the Politics of Truth: from: Post-Foundational Political Thought
Abstract: Badiou’s work constitutes one of the rare examples in current theorizing of a post-foundational philosophical system – and there is hardly a contradiction here between a post-foundational stance and systematic philosophy. For Badiou, true philosophy is always systematic, yet it is not systematic in the sense of being centered around a keystone: ‘if by “system” you mean, first, that philosophy is conceived as an argumentative discipline with a requirement of coherence, and second, that philosophy never takes the form of a singular body of knowledge but, to use my own vocabulary, exists conditionally with respect to a complex set of truths,

Chapter 6 The Political and the Impossibility of Society: from: Post-Foundational Political Thought
Abstract: In the above quotation, Ernesto Laclau indicates a large part of the aim of his theoretical enterprise, and, to some extent, of Chantal Mouffe’s theoretical enterprise. Their aim is to reverse the order of priority between the social and the political. The assumption that the political has been systematically ‘absorbed’ by the social places the Laclauian enterprise in the framework of theories that share Schmitt’s neutralization thesis and Arendt’s colonization thesis, as they were discussed in Chapter 2 respectively. However, contrary to Max Weber, who can be considered the actual source of the absorption thesis, no pessimistic or even fatalistic

Chapter 7 Founding Post-Foundationalism: from: Post-Foundational Political Thought
Abstract: One of our initial assumptions was that, if our aim is to delineate the contours of current post-foundational political thought, it is not sufficient to develop the conceptual history of the emerging concept of the political. In the present investigation I wanted to go one step further by concentrating on those theories that employ the term within the post-foundational framework of what was described as left Heideggerianism. So let us once more recapitulate the thesis: in most such theories, ‘the political’ in its difference vis-à-vis ‘the social’ and ‘politics’ serves as an indicator of precisely the impossibility or absence of

Chapter 2 Before and after modernity: from: The Scots Imagination and Modern Memory
Abstract: In 1766, James Boswell, having returned from a Grand Tour accompanied by Rousseau’s mistress, left London for his native Edinburgh, where he took his final law examination and joined the Scottish bar. Meanwhile, ensconced in the Advocates Library, the Professor of Pneumatics and Moral Philosophy, Adam Ferguson, was completing his pioneering work, shortly to appear (despite David Hume’s misgivings) as An Essay on the History of Civil Society (1767). These were heady days in the precincts of the Scottish Parliament Building, when cultural conversation in the Old Town was as high as the odours of its teeming streets. On 16

Chapter 7 Remembering ‘The Forgotten Gorbals’ from: The Scots Imagination and Modern Memory
Abstract: Bert Hardy’s ‘Gorbals Boys’ is an iconic image.¹ It depicts two lads aged about ten, strolling arm-in-arm and glancing pertly at the camera. From their clothing and hairstyles, the rain-washed pavement and tall buildings framing them, the casual spectator would conclude that they are working-class, the period is sometime between 1930 and 1950 and the setting is an industrial city with a cool climate. Rendered ‘sepia’, the picture adorns the cover of the first volume of an autobiography by Ralph Glasser, as it does the front of a monograph about Hardy, and it is also available from numerous outlets as

Book Title: Memory and the Moving Image-French Film in the Digital Era
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): McNeill Isabelle
Abstract: A vital rethinking of memory and the moving image for the digital age, Isabelle McNeill investigates the role of the moving image in cultural memory, considering the impact of digital technologies on visual culture. Drawing on an interdisciplinary range of theoretical resources and an unusual body of films and moving image works, the author examines the ways in which recent French filmmaking conceptualises both the past and the workings of memory. Ultimately the author argues that memory is an intersubjective process, in which filmic forms continue to play a crucial role even as new media come to dominate our contemporary experience.Memory and the Moving Image:*Introduces new ways of thinking about the relation between film and memory, arising from a compelling, interdisciplinary study of theories and films*Subtly explores the French context while drawing theoretical conclusions with wider implications and applicability*Provides detailed and illuminating close readings of varied moving image works to aid theoretical explorations*Moves away from auteurist approaches, examining work by canonical directors including Jean-Luc Godard, Chris Marker and Agnès Varda alongside that of less well-known filmmakers such as Claire Simon and Yamina Benguigui*Brings together thinkers such as Bergson, Deleuze, Bazin and Barthes with, for example, Rodowick and Mulvey, in an engaging interweaving of theories.Works considered include Jean-Luc Godard's Histoire(s) du Cinéma (1989-98), Yamina Benguigui's Mémoires d'Immigrés (1997), Chris Marker's CD-ROM Immemory (1998), Claire Simon's Mimi (2003), Michael Haneke's Caché (2005) and Agnès Varda's multi-media exhibition, L'Île et Elle (2006).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r2cnj

Book Title: The Unexpected-Narrative Temporality and the Philosophy of Surprise
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Currie Mark
Abstract: This new study asks how stories affect the way we think about time and, in particular, how they condition thinking about the future. Focusing on surprise and the unforeseeable, the book argues that stories are mechanisms that reconcile what is taking place with what will have been. This relation between the present and the future perfect offers a grammatical formula quite different from our default notions of narrative as recollection or recapitulation. It promises new understandings of the reading process within the strange logic of a future that is already complete. It also points beyond that to some of the key temporal concepts of our epoch: prediction and unpredictability, uncertainty, the event, the untimely and the messianic. The argument is worked out in new readings of Sarah Waters’ Fingersmith, Kazuo Ishiguro’s Never Let Me Go and Julian Barnes’ The Sense of an Ending.Key Features: An original discussion of the relation of time and narrativeAn important intervention in narratologyA striking general argument about the workings of the mindProvides an overview of the question of surprise in philosophy and literature
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgrm7

Book Title: Modernism and Magic-Experiments with Spiritualism, Theosophy and the Occult
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Wilson Leigh
Abstract: While modernism’s engagement with the occult has been approached by critics as the result of a loss of faith in representation, an attempt to draw on science as the primary discourse of modernity, or as a hidden history of ideas, Leigh Wilson argues that these discourses have at their heart a magical practice which remakes the relationship between world and representation. As Wilson demonstrates, the courses of the occult are based on a magical mimesis which transforms the nature of the copy, from inert to vital, from dead to alive, from static to animated, from powerless to powerful. Wilson explores the aesthetic and political implications of this relationship in the work of those writers, artists and filmmakers who were most self-consciously experimental, including James Joyce, Ezra Pound, Dziga Vertov and Sergei M. Eisenstein.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgs1g

INTRODUCTION from: Modernism and Magic
Abstract: This book argues that the aesthetic experiments of the first half of the twentieth century that we call modernism drew on the discourses of the occult dominant during the period – in particular on spiritualism and theosophy – because in them it saw the possibilities for a reconceptualisation of the mimetic. While these discourses have been much investigated in critical works of the last few decades, what neither recent scholars nor many practitioners, or indeed critics, at the time have admitted is the extent to which they have magic at their heart. Yet these occult discourses provided possibilities for experiment for writers,

2 ‘AND WHAT HAS ALL THIS TO DO WITH EXPERIMENTAL WRITING?’: from: Modernism and Magic
Abstract: If magic is error for modernity, then the most scandalous of its errors is its collapsing into identity of words and objects. As Randall Styers argues, one of the central themes running through scholarly work on magic from the second half of the nineteenth century is the claim that magic is fixated on the power of words (Styers 2004: 219ff.). Certainly magic is often defined as that which attempts to animate matter, but again and again writers on magic assert a particular attitude to language as central to this animation. For James Frazer, if magic originates in the human fear

5 ‘DISNEY AGAINST THE METAPHYSICALS’: from: Modernism and Magic
Abstract: As we have seen in Chapter 4, the work of both Dziga Vertov and Sergei Eisenstein shows a tension between realism as faithfulness to the truth of the world on one hand and realism as reproducing the myths of bourgeois capitalism on the other. For Vertov, facts were central in overcoming this problematic of representation, as expressed in his rejection of actors, filmscripts, created scenarios, and so on. For Eisenstein, however, the relation between the facts of world and their reproduction on the screen was in some ways more complex. He criticised Vertov and kino-eye in general for misunderstanding this

Chapter 12 WHITEHALL, INTELLIGENCE AND OFFICIAL HISTORY: from: Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Murphy Christopher J.
Abstract: In the historiography of British intelligence, the publication of SOE in France– an officially sponsored account of the activities of the Special Operations Executive (SOE) during the Second World War – stands out as a significant moment. While the existence of the organisation and its activities already constituted something of an open secret – a consequence of numerous memoirs and investigative works published since its dissolution in 1946 –SOE in Francewas an account of part of the wartime secret world, which was published by Her Majesty’s Stationery Office: an official history, based on access to SOE’s own

Book Title: Deleuze's Literary Clinic-Criticism and the Politics of Symptoms
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Tynan Aidan
Abstract: The first study of Deleuze's critical and clinical projectAidan Tynan addresses Deleuze's assertion that 'literature is an enterprise of health' and shows how a concern of health and illness was a characteristic of his philosophy as a whole, from his earliest works to his groundbreaking collaborations with Guattari, to his final, enigmatic statements on 'life'.He explains why alcoholism, anorexia, manic depression and schizophrenia are key concepts in Deleuze's literary theory, and shows how, with the turn to schizoanalysis, literature takes on a crucial political and ethical role in helping us to diagnose our present pathologies and articulate the possibilities of a health to come.Key FeaturesThe first book length study of Deleuze's critical and clinical project and the conceptualisations of health and illness he developed over the course of his careerUses the idea of the literary clinic to unify Deleuze's literary theory with the political critique he developed with Guattari, and argues in this way for a distinctively Deleuzian critical practiceDraws on Deleuze conceptualisations of health and illness to reassess his relationship to key thinkers such as Spinoza, Marx, Nietzsche, Freud and Melanie Klein and literary figures such as Melville F. Scott Fitzgerald, Kafka, Beckett and Artaud
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgstk

3 Symptoms, Repetition and the Productive Death Instinct from: Deleuze's Literary Clinic
Abstract: The literary clinical procedure as a creative practice works via repetition, but there is always a chance that the procedure will fail and the repetition will remain unproductive. While failure and success are not to be judged from the point of view of conscious intent, as this would imply a transcendent judgment rather than an immanent evaluation, their effects are nevertheless quite real. The prospect of psychological disintegration, manifesting itself in the worst cases in schizophrenic illness, is, in Deleuze’s conception of writing, an ever-present threat. However, the very reality of this threat offers salvation from it. Failure and success

5 The People to Come from: Deleuze's Literary Clinic
Abstract: From his early work on Masoch, Deleuze associated health with an engagement with issues of group subjectivity and collective life. The literary clinic grasps the author’s position not as a particular and personal case of a wider social and collective generality, but precisely as a problematicintersection of the personal and the collective in which the author can be viewed as a singularity capturing both personal and collective forces at once. If Masoch or Kafka suffered their own conditions at some private or personal level, it was the procedures of their literary activity that allowed a transmutation – what we have

Conclusion from: Deleuze's Literary Clinic
Abstract: This book has presented a reconstruction of Deleuze’s critical and clinical project, arguing that this must be grasped as incomplete in terms of Deleuze’s own writings on the subject, but that it appears as a coherent set of concepts when read alongside the rest of his work. As a result, it has been necessary for me to present Deleuze’s literary clinic in terms of the developments informing the early and middle sections of his career, while at the same time insisting that the methodological principles of immanent critique have remained consistent throughout. If literary criticism and questions of health and

Book Title: Psychoanalysis is an Antiphilosophy- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Clemens Justin
Abstract: Psychoanalysis was the most important intellectual development of the twentieth century, which left no practice from psychiatry to philosophy to politics untouched. Yet it was also in many ways an untouchable project, caught between science and poetry, medicine and hermeneutics. This unsettled, unsettling status has recently induced the philosopher Alain Badiou to characterise psychoanalysis as an ‘antiphilosophy’, that is, as a practice that issues the strongest possible challenges to thought. Justin Clemens takes up the challenge of this denomination here, by re-examining a series of crucial psychoanalytic themes: addiction, fanaticism, love, slavery and torture. Drawing from the work of Freud, Lacan, Badiou, Agamben and others, 'Psychoanalysis is an Antiphilosophy' offers a radical reconstruction of the operations and import of key psychoanalytic concepts and a renewed sense of the indispensable powers of psychoanalysis for today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgt0f

Book Title: Muriel Rukeyser and Documentary-The Poetics of Connection
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Gander Catherine
Abstract: This study of twentieth-century American poet Muriel Rukeyser explores the multiple avenues of her ‘poetics of connection’ to reveal a profound engagement with the equally intertextual documentary genre. It examines previously overlooked photo narratives, poetry, prose and archival material and demonstrates an enduring dialogue between the poet’s relational aesthetics and documentary’s similarly interdisciplinary and creative approach to the world. By considering the sources of documentary in Rukeyser’s work, the study provides insight into her guiding poetic principles, situating her as a vital figure in the history of twentieth-century American literature and culture, and as a pioneering personality in the development of American Studies.Key Features: Provides a new, interdisciplinary perspective on a critically neglected author, situating her firmly within the canon of essential twentieth century American poetsExamines previously overlooked material, including photo narratives, poetry, prose, and archival materialHighlights Rukeyser’s role in the formation of American StudiesOutlines the development of documentary in the 1930s, and its role in the formation of an American literary and cultural aesthetic
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgt6b

Chapter 1 Introduction from: Muriel Rukeyser and Documentary
Abstract: Muriel Rukeyser – poet, biographer, novelist and playwright – remains surprisingly neglected by scholars of American literature and culture. Although a handful of scholars (whose important scholarship will be referred to in the course of this book) are helping to initiate a recovery of her work, Rukeyser is too often omitted from academic reading lists, library bookshelves and poetry anthologies. My reason for writing this book was principally to address this lack and to help instigate a proper reclamation of Rukeyser’s writing, situating her firmly in the canon of essential twentieth-century American poets and acknowledging her role as a critical

Chapter 4 Documentary and the Emergence of American Studies from: Muriel Rukeyser and Documentary
Abstract: It is necessary at this point to locate the sources of Rukeyser’s engagement with documentary within a larger intellectual sphere of influence. This chapter examines Rukeyser’s poetics as they developed contemporaneously with a new academic discipline, American Studies. By examining Rukeyser’s work in the context of a burgeoning scholarly discourse and intellectual re-visioning of American literary and cultural history, I wish to provide a larger framework within which to locate her involvement with documentary than has hitherto been discussed, as well as allowing for a broader understanding of documentary expression in America beyond its arguable culmination in the art and

Chapter 5 Landscape, Navigation and Cartography from: Muriel Rukeyser and Documentary
Abstract: Exploring and documenting the American landscape, topologically and historically, remained a priority for Rukeyser throughout her working life. By examining the ways in which Rukeyser became involved with and manipulated the forms and techniques of travel reportage and tour guiding – two closely related documentary genres that developed during the 1930s and pervaded writing and image-making well into the 1940s – this chapter will illustrate how she pioneered a poetic cartography that provided witness to both the past and the present.

Chapter 6 Conclusion from: Muriel Rukeyser and Documentary
Abstract: Rukeyser begins The Life of Poetrywith a call to arms and an affirmation: ‘In time of crisis, we summon up our strength.’¹ This ‘strength’, she asserts, may be derived from ‘every forgotten image … every memory that can make us know our power’.² For Rukeyser, in a manner similar to that discovered by Francis Galton when conducting his experiments into language and mental imagery, the singular image of a boat generates and communicates a vast network of imaginative associations.³ Summoning the memory of her evacuation from Spain, Rukeyser writes simply, ‘I think now of a boat on which I

Book Title: The Modernist Party- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): McLoughlin Kate
Abstract: Leading international scholars explore the party's significance to ModernismHave you ever been struck by the number of parties in Modernist literature? Mrs. Ramsay drowns in anguish at the dinner-party she gives in Woolf's To The Lighthouse. Death is a guest in Katherine Mansfield's 'The Garden Party'. Politics sour the evening party in Joyce's 'The Dead'. Have you also noticed the role played by parties in the public intellectual culture of Modernism? A party held in London by Amy Lowell on 17 July 1914, attended by Ezra Pound, Ford Madox Ford, H.D. and Richard Aldington, degenerated into an argument over the nature of Imagism. On 18 May 1922, Proust, Joyce, Picasso, Stravinsky and Diaghilev met at a post-ballet party at Paris's Hotel Majestic: an unrepeatable encounter between Modernism's leading figures. In The Modernist Party, internationally distinguished scholars explore the party both as a literary device and as a social setting in which the movement's creative values were developed.Key Features:* Develops the concept of space, currently of central concern to Modernist scholars* Explores the tensions between Modernism as an aesthetics of intensity and Modernism as a movement of the everyday* Adds a new and vital area of research to investigations of Modernism as the product of intellectual and social networksKeywords: Modernism, Literature, Party, Social Network, Collaboration, Space
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgtd7

Chapter 1 ‘The dinner was indeed quiet’: from: The Modernist Party
Author(s) Jones Susan
Abstract: Joseph Conrad’s reputation predominantly rests on his proto-modernist exploration of the individual male consciousness. Throughout his fiction, protagonists such as Charlie Marlow, Lord Jim, Razumov and Axel Heyst are preoccupied with (frequently failed) quests for identity, isolated figures grappling with a troubled psychology, trying to make sense of their situation in a hostile or unwelcoming community. In this context, parties (other than political ones) do not immediately spring to mind as familiar locations or sources for Conrad’s narratives, and when they do occur they are not always markers of social harmony in his work.¹ His emphasis on the relationship between

Chapter 2 Prufrock, Party-Goer: from: The Modernist Party
Author(s) McLoughlin Kate
Abstract: J. Alfred Prufrock would not rank highly on anyone’s list of party-guests. Distinctly lacking in conviviality, the protagonist of T. S. Eliot’s poem anticipates ‘the taking of a toast and tea’ as an excruciating occasion on which the ‘overwhelming question’ he wishes to pose will be, even if he can bring himself to pose it, painfully misunderstood.² The work’s critics have attributed the problem to Prufrock (or Eliot) himself,³ analysing his internal wrestling in terms of fear of female (and male) sexuality,⁴ hysteria and other psychological disorders,⁵ Matthew Arnold’s ‘buried life’,⁶ Sigmund Freud’s notion of the uncanny⁷ and Henri Bergson’s

Chapter 7 ‘Ezra through the open door’: from: The Modernist Party
Author(s) Winning Joanne
Abstract: In her discussion of the so-called ‘Lost Generation’ of the 1920s, Noel Riley Fitch cites F. Scott Fitzgerald’s laconic description of the summer of 1925 as the summer of ‘1,000 parties and no work’.¹ Yet the summer of 1925, as she rightly notes, occurs in ‘a year of great literary productivity’, which includes, among other things, the publication of Fitzgerald’s own The Great Gatsbyin the April and Virginia Woolf’sMrs Dallowayin the May.² Contra to Fitzgerald’s account of the division between party-going and literary production, this chapter will explore the extent to which the modernist party might be

Book Title: Travellers' Tales of Wonder-Chatwin, Naipaul, Sebald
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Cooke Simon
Abstract: Exploring travellers’ tales of wonder in contemporary literature, this study challenges a sensibility of disenchantment with travel. It reassesses travel writing as an aesthetically and ethically innovative form in contemporary international literature, and demonstrates the crucial role of wonder in the travel narratives of writers such as Bruce Chatwin, V.S. Naipaul, and W.G. Sebald. Their ‘travellers’ tales of wonder’ are read as a challenge to the hubris of thinking the world too well known, and an invitation to encounter the world – including its most troubling histories – with a sense of wonder.Key FeaturesReassesses the place of travel writing in literary history to argue that the genre is important as a site of aesthetic innovation and ethical engagement in contemporary literatureDemonstrates the central role of wonder in travel accounts often regarded as narratives of disenchantmentExplores the way travellers’ tales of wonder recover and renew ancient and early modern forms in approaching modern and contemporary issuesOffers new, in-depth readings of the work of three major writers, in each case drawing on as yet unpublished results of archival research
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgtg6

Chapter 1 A Question of Form: from: Travellers' Tales of Wonder
Abstract: Voyages and travels are among the oldest and most culturally widespread forms in literary history. Among the earliest extant texts is a traveller’s tale of an island of marvels, ‘The Shipwrecked Sailor’ (Tappan 1914: 41–6), written in Egypt’s Twelfth Dynasty (that is, around 2200 bce). The journey is the common denominator for accounts as varied as The Historiesof the ancient Greek Herodotus, Egeria’s pilgrimage to the Holy Land in the fourth century ce, the writings of household-name scientists such as Charles Darwin withVoyage of the Beagleand works by canonical literary authors such as Henry James, with

Chapter 6 W. G. Sebald’s Travels through ‘das unentdeckte Land’: from: Travellers' Tales of Wonder
Abstract: It seems fitting for a study in contemporary literary history to culminate in a reading of W. G. Sebald. The body of work he brought into expression from the late 1980s through to his death in a car accident in 2001, not far from his adopted home of some twenty years near Norwich, England, was itself a culmination, the harvest of a long personal apprenticeship: a German émigré, Sebald had been active as an academic in England since the 1960s, and was a professor of European literature at the University of East Anglia when his first major ‘non-academic’ work, the

Book Title: Material Inscriptions-Rhetorical Reading in Practice and Theory
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Warminski Andrzej
Abstract: This monograph provides readings of literary and philosophical texts that work through the rhetoric of tropes to the material inscription at the origin of these texts. The book focuses on the practice and pedagogical value of rhetorical reading. Its readings follow an itinerary from poetic texts (such as those by Wordsworth and Keats) through theoretical or philosophical texts (by Descartes and Nietzsche) to narrative fiction (by Henry James). The book also contains two essays on Paul de Man and literary theory and an interview on the topic of "Deconstruction at Yale." All three of these latter texts are explicitly about the inescapable function and importance of the rhetoric of tropes for any critical reading or literary study worthy of the name. As Andrzej Warminski demonstrates, ‘rhetorical reading’ is a species of ‘deconstructive reading’—in the full ‘de Manian’ sense—but one that, rather than harkening back to a past over and done with, would open the texts to a different future. Key Features: New readings of texts by Wordsworth, Keats, Descartes, Nietzsche, and Henry James Essays and an interview on Paul de Man and ‘Deconstruction at Yale’ Reflects on and exemplifies the pedagogical value of ‘de Manian’ rhetorical reading Attempts to open a future for 'deconstructive' or 'de Manian' reading
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt5hh2hp

Chapter 6 Reading Over Endless Histories: from: Material Inscriptions
Abstract: A reading of a Henry James story in an issue on French symbolism may seem an odd juxtaposition.¹ Certain thematic links are, of course, possible: although James wrote very little on authors whom one could count among the French symbolists, he did write a great deal on what has been called “symbolism” in the American literary tradition (a tradition in which his own work takes a place).² But the possibility of such loose linking already points up a certain symptomatic instability in the very term symbolism itself. That is, the term symbolism would want to serve as a convenient label

Chapter 7 Ending Up/Taking Back (with Two Postscripts on Paul de Manʹs Historical Materialism) from: Material Inscriptions
Abstract: Paul de Man’s work – his writing, his teaching – had and continues to have a way of getting under people’s skin.² (Indeed, as de Man himself said at one lecture occasion, this is the moment when things become interesting: “when one gets under people’s skin, when some resistance develops …”) Among the many statements and pronouncements that have succeeded in provoking this kind of response, perhaps one of the most notorious, one that seems to have rankled more intensely and for longer, is the well-known sentence toward the end of “Semiology and Rhetoric”: “This will in fact be the

Conclusion from: Happy Endings in Hollywood Cinema
Abstract: How does one conclude a book about the complexities of endings? Given my recurring interest in how happy endings tend to contain promises of continuation, it seems inescapable that I should end by hinting at what future scholarly work on this convention might look like. First, though, a few words about what we have learned.

3. COLONIAL FRACTURE AND THE COUNTER-HERITAGE FILM from: Post-beur Cinema
Abstract: As suggested in the previous chapter, the 2000s have been marked by a qualitative move towards the mainstream for a number of directors and actors of Maghrebi origin, a shift that has led to a greater variety of genres being used by these filmmakers in their work. At the heart of this chapter is an attempt to understand how what will be termed the counter-heritage cinema of Maghrebi-French directors in the 2000s engages with wider public debates around the memorialisation of France’s colonial past (see for example Chevènement 2001; Rousso 1998; Ricoeur 2004; Blanchard et al. 2006). Writing in the

4. OF SPACES AND DIFFERENCE IN THE FILMS OF ABDELLATIF KECHICHE from: Post-beur Cinema
Abstract: Kechiche was born in Tunisia and arrived in France at the age of six. He grew up on a working-class estate on the outskirts of Nice, not far from the city’s famous Victorine studios. During his youth, he indulged a passion for cinema through regular trips

Book Title: The Paul de Man Notebooks- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): McQuillan Martin
Abstract: This anthology collects texts and papers from the Paul de Man archive, including essays on art, translations, critical fragments, research plans, interviews, and reports on the state of comparative literature. The volume engages with Paul de Man's institutional life, gathering together pedagogical and critical material to investigate his profound influence on the American academy and theory today. It also contains a number of substantial, previously unpublished and untranslated texts by de Man from the span of his writing career. As a new collection of primary sources this volume further stimulates the growing reappraisal of de Man's work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt9qdr0t

Introduction from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Author(s) McQuillan Martin
Abstract: These texts are a sample of previously uncollected writings by de Man. Some were published during his lifetime in prominent journals; others are little more than drafts or fragments towards future work and should be considered as such. These later texts are presented as indicative of the material contained within the UCI archive and do not stand for de Man’s public output. However, in each case the texts add something new to our understanding of the de Man corpus. The two essays on art, The Drawings of Paul Valéry from 1948 (the archive translation by Richard Howard of de Man’s

8 Translator’s Introduction to “Rousseau and English Romanticism” (1978) from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Author(s) Moll Patience
Abstract: De Man presented Rousseau et le romantisme anglaisat the University of Geneva on June 5, 1978, as the last in a series of eight guest lectures commemorating the bicentennial of the deaths of Rousseau and Voltaire.¹ The lecture is a shorter variant of what appeared as “Shelley Disfigured” in the 1979 collectionDeconstruction and Criticism. For that work, Bloom and Hartman had asked de Man, Miller, and Derrida to contribute essays on Shelley’sTriumph of Lifein order, as Hartman writes in the preface, both to acknowledge “the importance of Romantic poetry” and to demonstrate the “shared set of

9 Rousseau and English Romanticism (1978) from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Author(s) Moll Patience
Abstract: The problem of Rousseau’s presence within English Romanticism, especially among the major poets, which is to say Coleridge, Wordsworth, Blake, Keats, and Shelley, has been treated by traditional comparative literature as a simply historical question. It has been treated, that is to say, at the level of so-called general ideas, idées reçues, and commonplaces to which the history of ideas sometimes risks sacrificing the complexity of readings.¹ The works that treat the question are few, especially in the English and German realms, where the reading of Rousseau continues to come up against some very deeply entrenched prejudices. The already mentioned

Introduction from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Author(s) McQuillan Martin
Abstract: An entire volume could be devoted to de Man as a translator. It might include his wartime translation into Flemish of Melville’s Moby Dick,or the texts produced while working as a hired hand for Henry Kissinger’s journalConfluence,when he was making ends meet prior to becoming a Junior Fellow at Harvard and translating across a range of European languages. It would include his edition ofMadame Bovaryand the French edition of Rilke. It would certainly include de Man’s translation into English of Martin Heidegger’s Hölderlin and the Essence of Poetry, published in 1959 in theQuarterly Review

24 Rhetorical Readings from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Author(s) de Man Paul
Abstract: The Seminar deals with a central problem in contemporary literary theory from a pedagogical, rather than from a purely theoretical perspective. It investigates how an awareness of the rhetorical properties of language influences the modalities and expectations of our reading and, consequently, of the way in which the reading of literary works is taught to undergraduates. This pragmatic approach is based on the experience of an experimental course for Yale undergraduates taught for the last four years. The assigned readings consist, for the most part, of literary and philosophical primary texts rather than of contemporary works of literary theory. The

31 The Portable Rousseau: from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: The selection combines the theoretical side of Rousseau’s thought, which is primarily of interest to students of political science and of intellectual history, with the more purely literary components of the works. It also provides the means to make connections between these two aspects of the work, by including such texts as the “Essay on the Origins of Language,” in which the link between Rousseau’s reflections on language and his political theory becomes manifest. The book could therefore be used incourses in European civilization,inpolitical theory, in the history of the Enlightenment, in the European novel, in romanticism

32 Outline for a Monograph on Nietzsche from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: The juxtaposition of Rousseau and Nietzsche has not been studied, partly because Nietzsche has nothing good so say about Rousseau, partly because their main common interest has for a long time been neglected in works dealing with these two authors. Of late however the theory of language and of rhetoric that both develop in their early writings has received more and more attention (on Rousseau in the work of J. Derrida, R. Althusser, implicitly in Judith Shklar, etc.; on Nietzsche in recent books and articles by Ph. Lacoue Labarthe, Gilles Deleuze, B. Pautrat, etc.). The combined presence, in both authors,

33 From Nietzsche to Rousseau from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: The project is the outcome of a fifteen-year-long concern with the history and the poetics of romantic and post-romantic literature in France, Germany and England. It began as a study of the poetry of Mallarmé, Yeats, and George written as a doctoral dissertation at Harvard under the title “The Post-Romantic Predicament.” In the course of rewriting this thesis for publication, I increasingly felt the need for a wider historical framework reaching back to the later part of the eighteenth century. At the same time, the experience of teaching alternatively in the US and in Europe has led me to reflect

34 Allegories of Reading: from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: The book offers a reading of a group of authors and texts dating from 1750 to the early twentieth century and used as examples to illustrate a mode of reading and of interpretation. The most extensive reading offered is that of Rousseau, who is considered at length in an overview that includes the major fictional, political and confessional writings. In the case of Proust and of Rilke, the corpus is much less extended, although it claims to be representative of structures that recur in the work as a whole. No such claim is made for Nietzsche, where the reading of

Introduction: from: Unfinished Worlds
Abstract: If art moves, understanding moves. Schleiermacher and Dilthey showed how within hermeneutics, understanding upholds itself by a constant, irresolvable and inconclusive movement between part and whole. The philosophy of Hans-Georg Gadamer uniquely transfers insights relating to the movement of understanding to the question of aesthetic attentiveness. In his thought, aesthetic contemplation no longer attends to changeless forms but participates in the movement of a work’s constitutive elements. Aesthetic contemplation is no longer passive but an active participant ( theoros) in the bringing forth what a work can disclose. Where Dilthey laments the inconclusiveness of understanding, Gadamer celebrates it. The ceaseless movement

1. Hermeneutics and Aesthetics: from: Unfinished Worlds
Abstract: Jan Faye’s book After Postmodernism: A Naturalistic Reconstruction of the Humanitiesreworks the hermeneutical part–whole relationship within the following conceptual confi guration: all expressions of human communication fall into an ‘intention–context–dependency, persuasion’ nexus.¹ Leaving aside the question of the persuasiveness of aesthetical communications, which will be discussed later, the intellectual context of Gadamer’s reformation of aesthetics requires a preliminary mapping. The important claims that Gadamer makes about the cognitive content of art and the transformative character of aesthetic experience are not established by strict deductive reasoning or by a dialectic of assertion and counter-assertion. Gadamer’s is a

2. Gadamer’s Re-Orientation of Aesthetics from: Unfinished Worlds
Abstract: Gadamer’s approach to aesthetic experience stands squarely in the phenomenological tradition: his concern is with the place of art in our experienceof the world.² His reflection on aesthetic theory is a rare intellectual achievement, simultaneously deconstructive and constructive. It dismantles elements of the grand traditions of Platonic and Kantian aesthetics but offers, nevertheless, a phenomenological reconstruction of many of their central insights. This makes for a flexible philosophical approach to artwork which ranges freely over a number of art forms and styles, discussing both the singularity of works and their broader significance. The approach is hermeneutical: it reacquaints us

4. Theoros and Spectorial Participation from: Unfinished Worlds
Abstract: Gadamer’s reconstruction of aesthetic experience as a participatory act offers a new valence to the part–whole relationship within hermeneutics. The emphasis given to experiential movement and transformational understanding implies participation in a part–whole nexus. In traditional literary hermeneutics, the part–whole relationship is deployed by the knowing subject as a contextualising procedure of understanding: a section of a text is explained by being set into an exposition of the whole. For Gadamer, however, the part–whole structure is not a fixed epistemological device utilised by the interpreter to set a work into a given context but an ontological

Chapter 7 Hugh MacDiarmid’s Modernisms: from: Regional Modernisms
Author(s) Milne Drew
Abstract: In The Dialect of Modernism: Race, Language & Twentieth-Century Literature,Michael North suggests a revised sense of the linguistic paradigms in play within American and transatlantic literary modernisms.² Hugh MacDiarmid’s work, and the question of Scots as a dialect or distinct language for modernist Scottish writing, warrants no mention in North’s account, though questions of race do throw up difficult political resonances within Scottish poetics, not least in the romanticised genealogies of race, nation, and identity that MacDiarmid often promoted. Despite North’s subtle intertwinings, the literary articulation of dialect forms is not only a question of race, but also a

Chapter 10 The Idea of North: from: Regional Modernisms
Author(s) Alexander Neal
Abstract: There is no doubting the importance of ideas of place in Basil Bunting’s poetry, particularly in his major work, Briggflatts(1966), where Northumbria emerges as a luminous and multi-faceted affective terrain. Bunting’s representations of place are also complex and multi-layered, issuing from a geographical imagination that thrives on contradictions. His regional modernism is characterised both by the imaginative centrality of northern landscapes and cultural paradigms to his writing, and by the refraction of such local and regional attachments through a self-consciously international modernist poetics.Briggflattsexplores its themes of dislocation and homecoming through an intense imaginative engagement with the landscapes,

CHAPTER 2 Coming to Our Senses from: Sensual Relations
Abstract: In the 1980s, just as the textual revolution was entering its secondary phase and sweeping the discipline, a few anthropologists began to question the disembodied nature of much of contemporary ethnography and its conceptual reliance on language-based models of analysis. Their work prepared the ground for a sensual turn in anthropological understanding—that is, a move away from linguistic and textual paradigms toward an understanding that treats cultures as ways of sensing the world. This chapter documents this countertradition within the anthropology of the 1980s and 1990s, which culminated in the emergence of the anthropology of the senses.

CHAPTER 3 On the Pleasures of Fasting, Appearing, and Being Heard in the Massim World from: Sensual Relations
Abstract: Malinowski’s enforced stay in the Trobriands, where he was interned as an enemy alien by the Australians during World War I, started the tradition of anthropological fieldwork.

CHAPTER 8 The Material Body of the Commodity from: Sensual Relations
Author(s) Marx Sensing
Abstract: The production of guides to reading the work of Karl Marx has become an industry unto itself over the years, with some of the finer titles including For Marx(Althusser 1969) andReading Marx Writing(Kempel 1995). This chapter proposes not another reading but a sensing of Marx’s life and works, keyed to the play of the senses in Marx’s writings and personal circumstances. It traces the origin of some of his most critical insights into the life of the senses under capitalism to the works of the materialist philosopher Ludwig Feuerbach and the utopianist Charles Fourier. It then the

Book Title: Cops, Teachers, Counselors-Stories from the Front Lines of Public Service
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Musheno Michael
Abstract: Whether on a patrol beat, in social service offices, or in public school classrooms, street-level workers continually confront rules in relation to their own beliefs about the people they encounter. Cops, Teachers, Counselors is the first major study of street-level bureaucracy to rely on storytelling. Steven Maynard-Moody and Michael Musheno collect the stories told by these workers in order to analyze the ways that they ascribe identities to the people they encounter and use these identities to account for their own decisions and actions. The authors show us how the world of street-level work is defined by the competing tensions of law abidance and cultural abidance in a unique study that finally allows cops, teachers, and counselors to voice their own views of their work.Steven Maynard-Moody is Director of the Policy Research Institute and Professor of Public Administration at the University of Kansas.Michael Musheno is Professor of Justice and Policy Studies at Lycoming College and Professor Emeritus of Justice Studies, Arizona State University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.11924

2. State Agents, Citizen Agents from: Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: How do street-level workers make sense of their world and account for what they do? These questions guide our inquiry and lie at the heart of scholarship on the state and its workforce. Much of the existing literature converges on a viewpoint of street-level workers that focuses on how they apply the state’s laws, rules, and procedures to the cases they handle. We call this viewpoint the state-agent narrative. We propose an additional viewpoint, a citizen-agent narrative, that is muted in existing scholarship yet prevalent in the stories told to us by street-level workers. The citizen-agent narrative concentrates on the

3. Story Worlds, Narratives, and Research from: Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: The purpose of our research is simple, even elemental: to collect and examine street-level workers’ everyday work stories to uncover their judgments as they see them. This simple goal belies the challenge of the interpretive task because these stories are often ambiguous and multilayered: they reference both rules and morality to defend decisions, reveal internalized as well as interactive conflicts, and document shifting positions over time. These stories are not philosophical discourses on law or fairness. They are pragmatic expressions about acts and identities and assertions of dominant yet jumbled societal views of good and bad behavior and worthy and

[Part II. Introduction] from: Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: Street-level workers care as much about who a person is as about what the person has done. Identity matters as much as acts. By identity, we mean how we come to recognize ourselves and each other through group belonging.¹ All of us belong to certain groups: this is to say that we occupy subject positions. For example, street-level workers belong to various occupational groups and are recognized for their belonging to racial, class, gender, and sexual groupings. Each of these group memberships (for example, working-class, white, female, heterosexual) represents what we call a subject position. Each subject position is filled

5. Workers Unite: from: Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: Back when I was an income-maintenance worker, we went through computer conversion when we converted all of our files and put them on the computer. We had all gone through training—and for some a couple of weeks training—and we came back and all had like over two hundred on our caseload. So we had all these cases to put on our computers, and of course we were still having to do our regular work. To try to do all that we were having to work a lot of hours overtime, for which we really weren’t getting paid.

6. Organizational and Social Divisions among Street-Level Workers from: Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: I do transition work. The situation with this student is the family was having some really severe problems. She was sixteen, which means she is old enough for transition services but not normally within the age where I would open an adult case. And there is no money that goes

[Part III. Introduction] from: Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: Street-level decision making is complexly moral and contingent rather than narrowly rule bound and fixed. A fundamental dilemma—perhaps the defining characteristic—of street-level work is that the needs of individual citizen-clients exist in tension with the demands and limits of rules. This does not mean that rules do not permeate all aspects of street-level work (they do) or that most street-level actions are not consistent with law and policy (they are). The most common situation may be that the rules effectively fit the complexity of workers’ judgments about citizen-clients. When the rules and standard procedures fit the situation, street-level

8. Who Are the Worthy? from: Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: I sent him to “work hardening,” where they teach you

9. Responding to the Worthy from: Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: This is an incident that occurred about three years ago. I was working as a detective at a school…. It’s a predominantly white school—I would say 99 percent white. Even [Flores], one of the two suspects in the case I’m going to describe, though she had a Hispanic name, seemed white…. It’s an upper-middleclass school…. Smart kids, mostly kids that are college bound…. The people in this case were no exception. All three of them were pretty affluent…. It was a lot nicer neighborhood than I live [in], with lovely homes and a bunch of horse property, so I

12. Streetwise Workers and the Power of Storytelling from: Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: Street-level stories are powerfully descriptive: they take us into the storytellers’ worlds, both real and imagined. Through the storytellers’ words, we experience the physical and emotional context of their work. We meet the students, clients, criminals, victims, bystanders, coworkers, and bosses who populate these story worlds. Street-level stories, like other narratives both grand and mundane, help us understand how sense and meaning are made and how norms are conveyed and enforced. Whether the story is of Odysseus on his mythic voyage or a voc rehab counselor confronting a difficult client, stories reveal moral reasoning as the storyteller navigates through the

Partial Justice: from: The Fate of Law
Author(s) Minow Martha
Abstract: I was surprised and delighted to be asked to speak on the topic “The Fate of Law.” l I was surprised, because this strikes me as a tall person’s topic, a topic for someone who can survey the entire world of law and comment on its overall development. To discuss “The Fate of Law” is an invitation to make statements that cast shadows. My work tends to look at the margins and corners, especially at people such as women, children, and persons with disabilities. I am interested in people who have not been the central subjects of theories of law,

Introduction from: Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Saltz David Z.
Abstract: Though the past fifteen years have observed a veritable golden age of performance theory—a lively discourse that draws on anthropology, sociology, linguistics, psychoanalysis, political theory, cultural studies, feminism, and queer theory—performance theorists rarely draw on works emanating from American philosophy departments.¹ Similarly, very few professional philosophers have focused in depth on questions pertaining to the phenomena of theater or performance.² This situation is especially surprising given the attention recent philosophers have lavished on other art forms, such as painting, music, and film.

The Essence of Millennial Reflections on International Studies from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Harvey Frank P.
Abstract: When Michael Brecher was introduced to international relations (IR) at Yale in 1946, the field comprised international politics, international law and organization, international economics, international (diplomatic) history, and a regional specialization. The hegemonic paradigm was realism, as expressed in the work of E. H. Carr, Arnold Wolfers, Nicholas Spykman, W. T. R. Fox, Hans Morgenthau, Bernard Brodie, and others.¹ The unquestioned focus of attention was interstate war and peace.

Realism and the Study of Peace and War from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Vasquez John
Abstract: Appraising realist theories or evaluating the realist paradigm from which they are derived is a very important topic; indeed it is one that has given rise to intense debate within the field from time to time. It is, however, too broad and complicated a topic for a short essay like this one. Therefore, I shall focus on realist explanations of two specific topics—peace and war—with an emphasis on the classical realism of Morgenthau, the neorealist work of Waltz and Gilpin, and the “offensive realism” of Mearsheimer.¹

Institutional Theory in International Relations from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Keohane Robert O.
Abstract: Joseph S. Nye has discussed our joint work on “transnational relations and interdependence” in his paper for this volume. We accordingly agreed that I would focus on my own work on institutional theory and cooperation, exemplified most clearly in my After Hegemony: Cooperation and Discord in the World Political Economy,¹ and subsequent work by myself and others. These lines of work are closely related. Our joint analysis of asymmetrical interdependence and power, and “complex interdependence,” describes the context of contemporary world politics within which my institutional theory is set. Furthermore, some of the key elements of that institutional theory appear

Simulation and Experimentation in Foreign Policy Analysis: from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Wilkenfeld Jonathan
Abstract: While many in the field of foreign policy analysis associate me most closely with the systematic study of foreign policy behavior in general, and conflict and crisis decision making in particular—most notably, the International Crisis Behavior (ICB) Project¹—I have chosen to highlight a somewhat different direction that my recent research has taken. During the past two decades, almost as a sideline, I have been heavily involved in the conceptualization and development of simulation approaches to the teaching of international politics and foreign policy. The network-based, distributed foreign policy simulations offered by the International Communications and Negotiations Simulations (ICONS)

Convergences Between International Security Studies and Peace Studies from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Kriesberg Louis
Abstract: International security studies and peace studies are not a single subfield of international relations. Analysts in security studies and those in peace studies have generally viewed themselves and been viewed by others as working in quite different domains. Some persons in each area have been critical or dismissive of the efforts of those in the other. Nevertheless, many persons across both areas actually share significant concerns and questions, such as how to avoid or to limit wars and other violent conflicts. Furthermore, the work being done in each of these domains is increasingly overlapping. To enhance the possibilities of beneficial

International Political Economy: from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Martin Lisa L.
Abstract: International political economy (IPE), perhaps in contrast to the field of international relations (IR) more broadly, is today characterized by growing consensus on theories, methods, analytical frameworks, and important questions. This is not

Book Title: The Chief Concern of Medicine-The Integration of the Medical Humanities and Narrative Knowledge into Medical Practices
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Vannatta Seth
Abstract: Unlike any existing studies of the medical humanities, The Chief Concern of Medicinebrings to the examination of medical practices a thorough---and clearly articulated---exposition of the nature of narrative. The book builds on the work of linguistics, semiotics, narratology, and discourse theory and examines numerous literary works and narrative "vignettes" of medical problems, situations, and encounters. Throughout, the book presents usable expositions of the ways storytelling organizes itself to allow physicians and other healthcare workers (and even patients themselves) to be more attentive to and self-conscious about the information---the "narrative knowledge"---of the patient's story.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.3157169

INTRODUCTION: from: The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: For the past decade, we have been teaching a course on literature and medicine. Our purpose has been to make medical students and physicians more cognizant of the role of narrative in medical practice and to help them develop skills that make narrative knowledge a useful and important part of their engagement with patients. To this end, in class and elsewhere (see Vannatta, Schleifer, and Crow 2005, 2010), we have attempted to arrive at—or at least circumscribe—a working definition of knowledge in the “humanistic sciences” in relation to what we are (with others) calling “narrative knowledge.” Such knowledge

3 THE CHIEF CONCERN OF MEDICINE: from: The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: In this chapter, we examine the concept and function of “narrative knowledge,” both in general and in the practice of medicine. We focus on narrative knowledge in terms of not only the knowledge that a physician-listener can glean from narrative—knowledge that Rita Charon richly describes in her presentation of part of medical practice she calls narrative medicine—but also the knowledge of narrative itself and how a working understanding of the shape and features of narrative can contribute to successful medical practices (which Charon also describes). There is great controversy concerning the nature of narrative, its “salient” features, its

6 THE PATIENT’S STORY: from: The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: In chapter 5, we examined the scene of narration; here, we examine the patient’s narration itself, the narrative knowledge it gives rise to, and the ways that knowledge fails to be apprehended by physicians. As we have already noted, the story a patient brings to the physician is usually among the first and most important pieces of information about that patient that health care workers encounter. These stories—narrated by the patient or, in special cases, by others—present information organized in specific ways that call for specific kinds of listening; that define, to a large extent, the patient-physician relationship;

9 NARRATIVE AND EVERYDAY MEDICAL ETHICS: from: The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: Ethical practices—behaviors and relationships that necessarily encompass “good” (versus “bad”) actions—are woven into every aspect of medical practices precisely because health care always is vitally concerned with issues of the nature of well-being (the good life, Aristotle’s eudaimonia), the nature of interpersonal care (responsibilities of behavior between people, especially in the face of suffering), the maintenance of health and well-being in the larger community (the public and professional roles of physicians and health care workers), and issues of life and death (measures of crucial values). Moreover, the ethics of attitude and action, like the meanings of narrative, is

10 READING THE DEATH OF IVAN ILYCH from: The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: Leo Tolstoy’s novella The Death of Ivan Ilychis a significant literary text that brings together many of the themes ofThe Chief Concern of Medicine.it is a story that resonates with the experience of health care workers—with the experience of physicians, nurses, and others confronted with suffering and dying—and at the same time provokes powerful feelings about our shared knowledge and, indeed, our shared lives as human beings. in significant ways, Tolstoy’sThe Death of Ivan Ilychis a modern version, in novelistic prose narrative, of the ancient themes of the pity and terror of suffering

Book Title: The Neuroscientific Turn-Transdisciplinarity in the Age of the Brain
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Johnson Jenell M.
Abstract: Melissa M. Littlefield and Jenell M. Johnson provide an initial framework for this most recent of "turns" by bringing together 14 original essays by scholars from the humanities, social sciences, and neurosciences. The resulting collection will appeal to neuroscientists curious about their colleagues' interest in their work; scholars and students both in established neurodisciplines and in disciplines such as sociology or English wondering about how to apply neuroscience findings to their home disciplines; and to science, technology, and society scholars and students interested in the roles of interdisciplinarity and transdisciplinarity in the construction of knowledge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.4585194

Chapter 3 The Neural Metaphor from: The Neuroscientific Turn
Author(s) Gotman Kélina
Abstract: When Descartes complained that the Ancients had misunderstood the nature and quality of the passions of the soul, in his work of the same name (1649), he drew on the brain’s mechanisms, as well as the fibrous ligaments called nerves, to describe the motion of the body, soul, and passions. He argued that whereas it appeared that the soul moves the body to act, and injects it with animal spirits, in fact the body moves of its own accord, through various mechanical operations effected by the nerves, the muscles, and the brain; and that the soul, whose thoughts could be

Chapter 6 Literacy in a Biocultural World: from: The Neuroscientific Turn
Author(s) Gorzelsky Gwen
Abstract: In “Brains, Maps, and the New Territory of Psychology,” Anne Beaulieu persuasively argues that brain mapping “recasts [social and environmental] aspects in biological terms” (2003, 563).¹ Beaulieu draws on critiques of popular discussions of brain imaging such as Joseph Dumit’s work, and on the responses of many neuroscientists to Posner and Raichle’s book on the promise of brain imaging, which targets both interested lay readers and scientists. The journal Behavioral and Brain Sciencesdevotes nearly sixty pages to a précis of the book, twenty-seven peer commentaries, and the authors’ responses to those commentaries (Posner and Raichle 1995). Like Dumit’s text,

Chapter 10 Functional Brain Imaging: from: The Neuroscientific Turn
Author(s) Fitzpatrick Susan M.
Abstract: Research questions of interest to neuroscientists share a natural overlap with those pursued by scholars studying philosophy, art, music, history, or literature. The common ground is a shared desire to understand the workings of the human mind. What initially attracts someone to study neuroscience, regardless of what aspects of nervous system function an individual career may become focused on (e.g., basic functions of the synapse), is the allure of contributing knowledge that deepens our understanding of our minds. Many neuroscientists want to know how it is that the activities of the cells of the nervous system, individually and collectively, contribute

Chapter 11 A Clinical Neuroscientist Looks Neuroskeptically at Neuroethics in the Neuroworld from: The Neuroscientific Turn
Author(s) Whitehouse Peter J.
Abstract: As a clinically oriented cognitive neuroscientist, I celebrated the past successes and future promises of science during The Decade of the Brain (1990–2000). I listened as we were told that we were well on our way to understanding how the mind worked, how we might enhance our thinking, and how the use of stem cells and other powerful biological approaches would eventually cure neurological diseases such as Alzheimer’s. I heard the call for a new field of ethical inquiry to help us manage these powerful new abilities to manipulate ourselves and others.

Book Title: The Immaterial Book-Reading and Romance in Early Modern England
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Wall-Randell Sarah
Abstract: In romances-Renaissance England's version of the fantasy novel-characters often discover books that turn out to be magical or prophetic, and to offer insights into their readers' selves. The Immaterial Bookexamines scenes of reading in important romance texts across genres: Spenser'sFaerie Queene,Shakespeare'sCymbelineandThe Tempest,Wroth'sUrania,and Cervantes'Don Quixote. It offers a response to "material book studies" by calling for a new focus on imaginary or "immaterial" books and argues that early modern romance authors, rather than replicating contemporary reading practices within their texts, are reviving ancient and medieval ideas of the book as a conceptual framework, which they use to investigate urgent, new ideas about the self and the self-conscious mind.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.4765277

CHAPTER 1 Introduction from: Strung Together
Abstract: String theory is reputed to have begun in 1968, when a postdoctoral fellow named Gabrielle Veneziano, working at CERN,¹ one of the world’s leading high energy physics laboratories, proposed a solution to a vexing problem concerning the interaction of subatomic particles in the nuclei of atoms. He accomplished this by using a formula he had found in an eighteenth-century mathematics text.² Two years later, three other theorists—Yoichiro Nambu, Leonard Susskind, and Holger Nielsen—independently suggested that Veneziano’s redeployment of this antique mathematical function implied that the particles that formed the nuclei of atoms were not actually zero-dimensional point-particles, but

CHAPTER 5 The Cosmic and Domestic from: Strung Together
Abstract: The previous chapter investigated the ways in which a selection of string theory popularizations makes an abstract theoretical space accessible through a pedagogical space. Within these string theory popularizations access becomes an imaginative mode that works to distinguish what theorists mark as novel in that space; in particular, images of strings and branes, from what the theorists frame as established yet incomplete knowledge of the cosmos. But on closer scrutiny, this novel string theoretical imaginary betrays, like the exposition within string theory technical discourse, its own incoherences. A radical heterogeneity arises from the way popularizations blend a multitude of string

Book Title: The Real and the Sacred-Picturing Jesus in Nineteenth-Century Fiction
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): GATRALL JEFFERSON J. A.
Abstract: These pioneering works of fiction, written by authors of diverse religious and national backgrounds, laid the formal groundwork for an enduring fascination with the historical Jesus in later fiction and film, from Mikhail Bulgakov's Master and Margaritato Mel Gibson'sThe Passion of the Christ. The book is enhanced by a gallery of illustrations of the historical Jesus as depicted by nineteenth-century artists.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.5339783

CHAPTER 1 The Jesus Novel from: The Real and the Sacred
Abstract: In 1830, the English writer Harriet Martineau published a short novel titled Traditions of Palestine.Given her trailblazing career as the “first woman sociologist,”¹ Martineau’s biographers tend to reserve no more than passing reference to this youthful work from her oeuvre. Martineau nevertheless claimed to “cherish” this “little volume” alongsideEastern Life, Past and Present(1848)—a freethinker’s travelogue to the Holy Land—above all her other writings. After its success in London, the novel was republished in the United States, later translated into French, and reprinted as late as 1892, more than a quarter century after the author’s death.

CHAPTER 2 Pictorial Blasphemy from: The Real and the Sacred
Abstract: In May 1850, John Everett Millais’s Christ in the House of His Parentswas exhibited at the Royal Academy in London, where it provoked a torrent of invective in the press. In Millais’s painting, Christ is depicted as a child apprentice in his father’s carpenter shop. Joseph, Anne, and an assistant laborer hover over a workbench; a young, half-naked John the Baptist walks with a bowl of water amid the wood shavings on the shop floor. The left hand of the boy Jesus, meanwhile, is bleeding from a recent wound, which he holds up for an anxious Mary to see,

CHAPTER 5 Metapoetics of the Christ Image from: The Real and the Sacred
Abstract: The genres of fiction and painting devoted to the realist Christ can be visualized as an intermedial grid. Along the vertical axis runs a time line connecting the figure of the historical Jesus, at the top, with that of the fully modernized Christ, below. The horizontal axis is divided between fiction, on the left, and painting, on the right. Into each of the four corners are grouped the dozens of works of fiction and scores of paintings throughout the nineteenth century that depict the figure of Jesus in realist style: Jesus novels and historical paintings occupy the top corners; Jesus

Afterword: from: The Real and the Sacred
Abstract: In 1897, toward the end of the period covered in this book, a new genre emerged alongside the constellation of visual and literary arts dedicated to a realist Christ image: the Jesus movie. There are many ways in which the early history of the Jesus movie echoes that of the Jesus novel more than a half century earlier, from the new genre’s immediate international scope to the hesitant, incremental advance of its pictorial resources. Over the years of 1897 and 1898 alone, French and American production companies, each working in relative isolation, made about half a dozen known Jesus movies,

4 Finding a Unified Voice? from: Forging the World
Author(s) Miskimmon Alister
Abstract: This volume argues that analyzing strategic narratives in international affairs is central to our understanding of the forces that shape the world today. This chapter assesses how international organizations construct and deploy an effective strategic narrative—in this case, the European Union. The EU has relied on a strategic narrative from its inception to the present day. The EU has tried to use this narrative to build support within Europe for deeper integration and sought to forge influence internationally. Over the years this narrative has shifted from a grand strategic vision of the people of Europe—working together across national

12 Conclusions from: Forging the World
Author(s) Roselle Laura
Abstract: This volume has made three advances in the study of international relations and communication. First, the chapters show the durabilityof the strategic narrative concept. They demonstrate how the dynamics of formation, projection, and reception and our three narrative types operate across a range of case studies. Second, the volume illustrates the inclusivity of the strategic narrative approach. Authors explored different points on the spectrum of persuasion without guidance from the editors, in ways that enrich our understanding of how influence works. Third, the volume shows the continuedpotentialof the strategic narrative approach. All authors added ideas beyond what

Book Title: Traces of the Past-Classics between History and Archaeology
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Bassi Karen
Abstract: What are we doing when we walk into an archaeological museum or onto an archaeological site? What do the objects and features we encounter in these unique places mean and, more specifically, how do they convey to us something about the beliefs and activities of formerly living humans? In short, how do visible remains and ruins in the present give meaning to the human past? Karen Bassi addresses these questions through detailed close readings of canonical works spanning the archaic to the classical periods of ancient Greek culture, showing how the past is constituted in descriptions of what narrators and characters see in their present context. She introduces the term protoarchaeological to refer to narratives that navigate the gap between linguistic representation and empirical observation-between words and things-in accessing and giving meaning to the past. Such narratives invite readers to view the past as a receding visual field and, in the process, to cross the disciplinary boundaries that divide literature, history, and archaeology.Aimed at classicists, literary scholars, ancient historians, cultural historians, and archaeological theorists, the book combines three areas of research: time as a feature of narrative structure in literary theory; the concept of "the past itself" in the philosophy of history; and the ontological status of material objects in archaeological theory. Each of five central chapters explores how specific protoarchaeological narratives-from the fate of Zeus' stone in Hesiod's Theogony to the contest between words and objects in Aristophanes' Frogs-both expose and attempt to bridge this gap. Throughout, the book serves as a response to Herodotus' task in writing the Histories, namely, to ensure that "the past deeds of men do not fade with time."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.8785930

CHAPTER 4 “Up to My Time”: from: Traces of the Past
Abstract: This chapter explores the role of visible evidence for the past in Herodotus’ Histories, exemplified in the fate of the offerings of the Lydian kings in the Lydian logos. The argument is focused on the temporal, ontological, and epistemological variables at work in the relationship between the oracles given to the Lydian kings and the offerings they inspire. Expressed in terms of a specific temporo-linguistic feature in theHistories—namely, Herodotus’ descriptions of objects that exist up to his own time (ἐπ᾿ ἐμεῦ, μέχρις ἐμέο

CHAPTER 5 Tragedy Vanishes: from: Traces of the Past
Abstract: The last forty years have seen the emergence of scholarship that attempts to read Attic drama as a visual medium, that is, to understand the extant dramatic texts in the context of Athens’ physical environment, as live performance texts, or in their relationship to the visual arts. Drawing on a variety of disciplines and methodologies, this work demonstrates that the interplay between verbal sign and visual referent in dramatic texts presents a particular challenge to interpretation.² Insofar as the dramatic text refers simultaneously to prior and future phenomena—that is, to the plot and (in principle) to the play in

Archiving/Architecture from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Kleinman Kent
Abstract: It is conventional and useful for both architects and archivists to recognize that architecture exists in two distinct modes: first, the built artifact and, second, representations of that artifact. This division is useful precisely because it allows architecture in the second sense to be collected, cataloged, and protected by archival institutions without the necessity of dealing with the messy business of built work. The Le Corbusier Foundation in Paris does not collect buildings by the French master, although it is housed in one; the Mies van der Rohe archive at the Museum of Modern Art in New York contains not

Creating a National Information System in a Federal Environment: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Millar Laura
Abstract: In late 2001, the Canadian Council on Archives, a publicly funded agency that oversees archival development in Canada, launched the Canadian Archival Information Network (CAIN), an online network of Web sites and databases designed to bring together intellectually the spectrum of activity taking place in archival repositories across the country. The network aims to provide electronic access to information about archives through searchable fonds-level archival descriptions, along with news and facts about archival programs. The developers of CAIN ultimately see the network as a tool for “communication, consultation, coordination, and cooperation” between archival stakeholders and the archival community. Its goal

Archives: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) van Albada Joan
Abstract: As a nonnative speaker of English, I am not subtle in the use of the language. English came to me as a foreign language through Kipling and Shakespeare, with words such as swans, Thames, prince, murderanddaggerandpoison. Archival English came to me in the 1980s thanks to committee work for the International Council on Archives (ICA). So I was struck when Verne Harris claimed in his paper, “Law, Evidence, and Electronic Records: A Strategic Perspective from the Global Periphery,” presented at the Seville Congress on Archives, that his work belongs to those who are in the global

Lookin’ for a Home: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Portelli Alessandro
Abstract: In 1970, Italian activist historian and cultural organizer Gianni Bosio wrote, in his description of the work of the Istituto Ernesto de Martino, Italy’s first and most important sound archive and research center for people’s cultures,

Introduction from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Abstract: In setting as one of the seminar’s principal goals the exploration of the roles that archives play in the production of knowledge, it was clear to us from the start that we could not cofine our discussions within one specific national framework. The relationship between archives and the constructs of a national past is a very close one. State archives are almost always dependent on governments for their existence. They are sustained to serve the state, however its interests may be defined. Like the interests of society more broadly, these are in constant evolution, as are those of individual citizens

Redemption’s Archive: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Eiss Paul K.
Abstract: While Alice brushed the White Queen’s tousled hair, the monarch offered her employ as a lady’s maid for a salary of two pence a week, along with a regular ration of jam. As Lewis Carroll relates in Through the Looking Glass, Alice was disinclined to accept in any case. Nonetheless, she grew disturbed when the White Queen informed her that the offered jam was only to be given “every other day”—that is, only “yesterday” and “tomorrow” but never “today.” Alice immediately realized that she would never receive jam on the series of “todays” that she worked but rather could

Social History, Public Sphere, and National Narratives: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Burguera Mónica
Abstract: During the past twenty years, the approaches and perspectives associated with both poststructuralism and feminism have prompted historians to question the centrality of some of social history’s most basic assumptions, opening the door to what Patrick Joyce has called a “self-reflexive and historicized understanding” of social history and its epistemological legacy.¹ In particular, many scholars now agree that race, gender, class, and national identities do not, as was previously thought, derive exclusively from a network of social referents external to language but rather arise from a system of representations in which language and its referents undergo a continual process of

Qing Statesmen, Archivists, and Historians and the Question of Memory from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Bartlett Beatrice S.
Abstract: The great government book-collecting project of eighteenth-century China, the “Complete Library in Four Branches of Literature,”¹ offered the Qing government (1644–1912) an opportunity to proscribe and even destroy works it found offensive, particularly those that expressed antigovernment or anti-Qing sentiments. An imperial edict deputed high officials to supervise the burning of the works on the government’s Index Expurgatorius at a site outside the capital city, Peking. After that, except for a remnant surviving in Japan or Europe, the presumption was that all copies of these works were permanently lost, just as the court had intended.

Russian History: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Smith Abby
Abstract: Those who got their academic training in Russian and Soviet history before the collapse of the Soviet Union worked under a considerable handicap: lack of access to the bulk of primary source materials in the libraries and archives in the Soviet Union. Even medievalists such as myself were routinely denied access to archives, even to those that had already appeared in print. We all dreamed of the day when we would have access—even access to inventories and finding aids seemed some sort of holy grail back then. For a brief period of time in 1991–92, all that promised

Archiving Heteroglossia: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Yekelchyk Serhy
Abstract: Working quietly in private during 1934–35, as the Soviet people were toiling to meet the targets of the Second Five Year Plan, celebrating Stalin the Great Leader, and condemning “enemies of the people,” Mikhail Bakhtin was developing the concept of heteroglossia ( raznorechieorraznogolositsa). The Russian philosopher of language understood heteroglossia as a polyphony of social and discursive forces, a diversity of social speech types that occur in everyday life. According to him, the genre of the novel is best suited for delivering the realities of heteroglossia because it allows for a network of dialogic, interactive relations among multiple

The Historian and the Source: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Ananich Boris V.
Abstract: The analysis of historical sources is perhaps the most important aspect of a historian’s work. The professional competence of the historian can be measured by his or her ability to make the right choices when choosing from many sources, as well as by his or her ability to ascertain the authenticity of a source, verify the information it contains, and compel it to “speak.” Even if the validity of the information contained within the source is doubtful, it still retains value as a rebection of its epoch—a source of information about the time and the individuals responsible for its

Book Title: American Night-The Literary Left in the Era of the Cold War
Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Author(s): WALD ALAN M.
Abstract: American Night, the final volume of an unprecedented trilogy, brings Alan Wald's multigenerational history of Communist writers to a poignant climax. Using new research to explore the intimate lives of novelists, poets, and critics during the Cold War, Wald reveals a radical community longing for the rebirth of the social vision of the 1930s and struggling with a loss of moral certainty as the Communist worldview was being called into question. The resulting literature, Wald shows, is a haunting record of fracture and struggle linked by common structures of feeling, ones more suggestive of the "negative dialectics" of Theodor Adorno than the traditional social realism of the Left.Establishing new points of contact among Kenneth Fearing, Ann Petry, Alexander Saxton, Richard Wright, Jo Sinclair, Thomas McGrath, and Carlos Bulosan, Wald argues that these writers were in dialogue with psychoanalysis, existentialism, and postwar modernism, often generating moods of piercing emotional acuity and cosmic dissent. He also recounts the contributions of lesser known cultural workers, with a unique accent on gays and lesbians, secular Jews, and people of color. The vexing ambiguities of an era Wald labels "late antifascism" serve to frame an impressive collective biography.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5149/9780807837344_wald

Book Title: Sufi Narratives of Intimacy-Ibn 'Arabī, Gender, and Sexuality
Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Author(s): Shaikh Saʿdiyya
Abstract: Thirteenth-century Sufi poet, mystic, and legal scholar Muhyi al-Din ibn al-'Arabi gave deep and sustained attention to gender as integral to questions of human existence and moral personhood. Reading his works through a critical feminist lens, Sa'diyya Shaikh opens fertile spaces in which new and creative encounters with gender justice in Islam can take place. Grounding her work in Islamic epistemology, Shaikh attends to the ways in which Sufi metaphysics and theology might allow for fundamental shifts in Islamic gender ethics and legal formulations, addressing wide-ranging contemporary challenges including questions of women's rights in marriage and divorce, the politics of veiling, and women's leadership of ritual prayer.Shaikh deftly deconstructs traditional binaries between the spiritual and the political, private conceptions of spiritual development and public notions of social justice, and the realms of inner refinement and those of communal virtue. Drawing on the treasured works of Sufism, Shaikh raises a number of critical questions about the nature of selfhood, subjectivity, spirituality, and society to contribute richly to the prospects of Islamic feminism as well as feminist ethics more broadly.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5149/9780807869864_shaikh

Chapter Four Reading Gender and Metaphor in Ibn ʿArabī’s Cosmos from: Sufi Narratives of Intimacy
Abstract: In engaging the tension between perspectives that challenge traditional gender stereotypes and those that reiterate normative conventions, feminist readers encounter a set of more nuanced methodological and theoretical considerations. At the outset, it is imperative to situate Ibn ʿArabī’s teachings on gender within the assumptions of his worldview—that is, to take seriously the Sufi framework of his engagement with gender. As is characteristic of all Ibn ʿArabī’s works, paradox, ambivalence, and contradiction are part of his mystical methodology. Since reality “as it really is” or mystical experiences give a glimpse into that which cannot be understood or captured in

Chapter Seven Ibn ʿArabī’s and Islamic Feminism from: Sufi Narratives of Intimacy
Abstract: In this final chapter, I outline how my approach to gender in Ibn ʿArabī’s work differs from other contemporary interpretations of his work. In the process, I highlight and reiterate how his central teachings offer unique ways to engage the process and goals of Islamic feminism. I conclude with some reflections on how Sufism in general and Ibn ʿArabī’s teachings in particular shift the foundations of the debates in relation to both Islamic and secular feminism, offering enriching ways to engage questions of gender.

8 Justice, Evidence, and Interdisciplinary Health Inequalities Research from: Understanding Health Inequalities and Justice
Author(s) King Nicholas B.
Abstract: At the conclusion of their book Social Justice: The Moral Foundations of Public Health and Health Policy, the bioethicists Madison Powers and Ruth Faden reflect on the interdisciplinary nature of work on justice and health inequalities: “Theories of justice without data regarding the way inequalities interact cannot result in just health or other social policies. Any plausible theory of justice needs … data provided by social and biomedical researchers who seek to understand how complex social and economic relationships affect health and other essential dimensions of well-being” (Powers and Faden 2006, 193). With respect to their own theory, they argue:

11 Health-Care Justice, Health Inequalities, and U.S. Health System Reform from: Understanding Health Inequalities and Justice
Author(s) Keirns Carla C.
Abstract: The U.S. health-care system is undergoing a major transition in financing, intended to both improve health-care access for millions of Americans and create structural changes to reduce cost and improve quality. We have been here before. The last time the United States saw major new programs that offered health-care coverage to large groups who lacked it was 1965, when Medicare and Medicaid were passed (Marmor 1970; Oberlander 2003; R. B. Stevens and Stevens 1974). These programs offered broad new entitlements to care for the elderly who qualified for Social Security based on their work history, and to certain classes of

INTRODUCTION. from: Race and the Making of the Mormon People
Abstract: This is a study of race and how Americans write about it. In America, writing about race with ink and paper has shaped the race that people see on the flesh and bone bodies of others and of themselves. Words that describe degrees of distinction—shade of skin, curl of hair, shape of lips and eyes—get read onto bodies as distinctions of kind. That is, in American history, writing about race has done the cultural work of defining racial sameness as well as racial difference. Yet in America, writing about race does not end with racial description and classification.

Book Title: Visiones de Estereoscopio-Paradigma de hibridación en la ficción y el arte de la vanguardia española
Publisher: University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill Department of Romance Studies
Author(s): UTRERA MARÌA SOLEDAD FERNÁNDEZ
Abstract: This book, written in Spanish, focuses on the literary and artistic works of such avant-garde figures as Ramon Gomez de la Serna, Benjamin Jarnes, Antonio de Obregon, Juan Chabas, Rosa Chacel, Claudio de la Torre, Almada Negreiros, Maruja Mallo, Mauricio Amster, Manuel Reinoso, Diego Rivera, and Angeles Santos y Victorio Macho. It identifies the attempt to integrate conflicting epistemological, ethical, and sociopolitical categories as the organizational principle driving the avant-garde novel and art. Seen as a means of escaping the Cartesian dualism of mind and matter, the conflict between ethical institutionism and utilitarianism, and the opposition of liberalism by socialism, this "middle path" manifests itself in the avant-garde on various levels: the theory of representation, the development of the protagonist, and the concept of history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5149/9781469639222_fernandezutrera

Book Title: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings- Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): Le Bon de Beauvoir Sylvie
Abstract: "The Useless Mouths" and Other Literary Writings brings to English-language readers literary writings--several previously unknown--by Simone de Beauvoir. Culled from sources including various American university collections, the works span decades of Beauvoir's career. Ranging from dramatic works and literary theory to radio broadcasts, they collectively reveal fresh insights into Beauvoir's writing process, personal life, and the honing of her philosophy. The volume begins with a new translation of the 1945 play The Useless Mouths, written in Paris during the Nazi occupation. Other pieces were discovered after Beauvoir's death in 1986, such as the 1965 short novel "Misunderstanding in Moscow," involving an elderly French couple who confront their fears of aging. Two additional previously unknown texts include the fragmentary "Notes for a Novel," which contains the seed of what she later would call "the problem of the Other," and a lecture on postwar French theater titled Existentialist Theater. The collection notably includes the eagerly awaited translation of Beauvoir's contribution to a 1965 debate among Jean-Paul Sartre and other French writers and intellectuals, "What Can Literature Do?" Prefaces to well-known works such as Bluebeard and Other Fairy Tales, La Bâtarde, and James Joyce in Paris: His Final Years are also available in English for the first time, alongside essays and other short articles. A landmark contribution to Beauvoir studies and French literary studies, the volume includes informative and engaging introductory essays by prominent and rising scholars. Contributors are Meryl Altman, Elizabeth Fallaize, Alison S. Fell, Sarah Gendron, Dennis A. Gilbert, Laura Hengehold, Eleanore Holveck, Terry Keefe, J. Debbie Mann, Frederick M. Morrison, Catherine Naji, Justine Sarrot, Liz Stanley, Ursula Tidd, and Veronique Zaytzeff
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt13x1m7b

Foreword to the Beauvoir Series from: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) TIMMERMANN MARYBETH
Abstract: It is my pleasure to take this opportunity to honor the monumental work of research and publication that the Beauvoir Series represents, which was undertaken and brought to fruition by Margaret A. Simons and the ensemble of her team. These volumes of Simone de Beauvoir’s writings, concerning literature as well as philosophy and feminism, stretch from 1926 to 1979, that is to say throughout almost her entire life. Some of them have been published before, and are known, but remain dispersed throughout time and space, in diverse editions, diverse newspapers or reviews. Others were read during conferences or radio programs

INTRODUCTION from: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) Naji Catherine
Abstract: Les bouches inutiles(The Useless Mouths), Simone de Beauvoir’s only play, opened with a benefit performance on October 29, 1944, at the Théâtre des Carrefours.² It has considerable importance for understanding Beauvoir’s writing, the development of her philosophical ideas particularly. However, as Virginia Fichera has pointed out, “Although it is a major work exploring the relationship between sex and gender predatingThe Second Sexby about four years, unfortunately it has been neglected by critics and scholars of her work.³ The play deals with the ethical consequences of treating some people as worthless and useless, something still of considerable social

IT’S SHAKESPEARE THEY DON’T LIKE from: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) TIMMERMANN MARYBETH
Abstract: For a year now there have been some rather considerable changes in the French press. It is truly regrettable that in glancing through the newspaper columns devoted to theatrical critiques, one might think one has been transported back to the time when Alain Laubreaux and the like systematically strove to muddle values, destroying any strong and great work with their insults.¹ It seems they have, alas, created a tradition. This outrage is what one discovers when reading the articles written in reaction to the presentation of King Lear.²

THE NOVEL AND THE THEATER from: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) FEIGL JOE
Abstract: The novel and the theater are two forms of fiction: in both cases, it is a matter of creating an imaginary world, and making characters, whose story constitutes what is called the plot, enter into this world. In order for the impact of the work to surpass that of simple entertainment, the story must also have a signification. Through carefully constructed lies, the book, like the play, strives to communicate a general human truth, but they do not rely on the same devices, and they do not seek the same type of truth.

NEW HEROES FOR OLD from: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) SIMONS MARGARET
Abstract: Today in France they frequently say that the novel is dying, that the novel is dead. That is one of the leitmotivs of postwar criticism. Nevertheless, if you loiter by the bookshop windows, or prowl among the editors’ offices, you cannot help being struck by the great number of books and manuscripts that flaunt the label “novel.” Nor are they dead works, for many of them are received by the public with enthusiasm. The critics cannot ignore this fact, but they nevertheless shake their heads and mutter, “These are not true novels. The novel is dead.” You might be tempted

EXISTENTIALIST THEATER from: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) GILBERT DENNIS A.
Abstract: I have chosen the two authors that seem to be the most representative: Jean-Paul Sartre and Camus, who had never published theatrical works before the war, and who are very indicative of the tendencies of modern theater.¹ And among their plays, I chose The Fliesand

INTRODUCTION from: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) Fell Alison S.
Abstract: “I took great pleasure in writing a preface for Violette Leduc’s La bâtarde[The Bastard]. I liked all her books, and this one more than the rest. I read them again, trying to make out just what it was that gave them their value and trying to pass on that understanding” comments Beauvoir inTout compte fait(All Said and Done) as she reviews and reflects on her 1960s literary output.¹ Beauvoir’s preface to Violette Leduc’s sixth published work and first volume of autobiography was published in 1964.La bâtardetells the story of Leduc’s life from her birth in

INTRODUCTION from: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) Fallaize Elizabeth
Abstract: When Simone de Beauvoir undertook a lecture tour of Japan with Sartre in the autumn of 1966 she had long been a writer with a substantial international reputation. She had published four novels and three volumes of her autobiography, as well as Le deuxième sexe(The Second Sex) and a number of other philosophical essays. All her major work had been translated into Japanese, and the Japanese translation ofLe deuxième sexehad been a best seller only the previous year. Beauvoir has described in her memoirs the warmth of the welcome that she received from her Japanese readers.¹ The

INTRODUCTION from: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) Holveck Eleanore
Abstract: During the thirteen years when these short prefaces were written, 1964 to 1977, Simone de Beauvoir produced an astonishing amount of work. She finished the memoir of her mother, Une mort très douce(A Very Easy Death) (1964) and the fourth volume of her autobiography,Tout compte fait(All Said and Done) (1972); two works of fiction,Les belles images(1966) andLa femme rompue(The Woman Destroyed) (1968); and her essay on old age,La vieillesse(The Coming of Age) (1970). She visited the Soviet Union and Japan; 1967 found her traveling to the Middle East during the Six-Day

Book Title: Moving Consciously-Somatic Transformations through Dance, Yoga, and Touch
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): Fraleigh Sondra
Abstract: The popularity of yoga and Zen meditation has heightened awareness of somatic practices. Individuals develop the conscious embodiment central to somatics work via movement and dance, or through touch from a skilled teacher or therapist often called a somatic bodyworker. Methods of touch and movement foster generative processes of consciousness in order to create a fluid interconnection between sensation, thought, movement, and expression. In Moving Consciously , Sondra Fraleigh gathers essays that probe ideas surrounding embodied knowledge and the conscious embodiment of movement and dance. Using a variety of perspectives on movement and dance somatics, Fraleigh and other contributors draw on scholarship and personal practice to participate in a multifaceted investigation of a thriving worldwide phenomenon. Their goal: to present the mental and physical health benefits of experiencing one's inner world through sensory awareness and movement integration. A stimulating addition to a burgeoning field, Moving Consciously incorporates concepts from East and West into a timely look at life-changing, intertwined practices that involve dance, movement, performance studies, and education. Contributors: Richard Biehl, Robert Bingham, Hillel Braude, Alison East, Sondra Fraleigh, Kelly Ferris Lester, Karin Rugman, Catherine Schaeffer, Jeanne Schul, and Ruth Way.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt1647csj

Introduction from: Moving Consciously
Abstract: As editor, I have asked the coauthors and myself what we want to achieve in this anthology. In retrospect, I see that we study the term somaticsand explain our discoveries in applying it to movement through dance, yoga, and touch. We hope to share our findings with a wide audience of somatic practitioners, dancers, yoginis, hands-on educators, and bodywork therapists. The text will also be of interest to those who

CHAPTER 4 Living Shin from: Moving Consciously
Author(s) Schaeffer Catherine A.
Abstract: Shin is alive for me in several ways that I explore in this chapter. Living Shin has enriched my work as a university professor, professional dancer, choreographer, and human being. I first reflect on my history in somatic modalities, their relation to Shin Somatics, and how this work has benefitted me professionally and personally. Second, I consider my applications of somatic knowledge to dance pedagogy, creating choreography, and the teaching and practice of yoga, healing, and wellness. In the final section, I discuss personal transformative somatic experiences and share key findings and insights that ground me in living Shin.

CHAPTER 5 Environments for Self-Learning from: Moving Consciously
Author(s) Lester Kelly Ferris
Abstract: This chapter contributes to the definition of somatic pedagogy as a means to ignite self-learning in students in diverse learning environments, including somatic movement lessons, dance technique, and online dance appreciation. I encountered the somatic movement field through dance, as my undergraduate dance education included brief moments of somatic experiences that spawned my interest in its application to performance. In 2004 I enrolled in a somatics course as part of the master of fine arts curriculum at the College at Brockport (SUNY). This initial encounter and continued studies with Sondra Fraleigh define the majority of my work as dance professor,

CHAPTER 11 Embodied Dreams from: Moving Consciously
Author(s) Schul Jeanne
Abstract: Whether or not we remember our dreams upon waking, it is part of the human condition to dream when we sleep. For some of us, this natural brain function brings powerful somatic experiences that demand our immediate attention. Those images that haunt us long after the visual stimulus has disappeared are often very vivid somatic sensations that rush through our bodies and shock us into an awareness of a highly significant psychic process at work within us. In dreamtime, an embodied image can be experienced on a somatic level with a wide variety of possible manifestations. These physical responses of

Book Title: The Minor Intimacies of Race-Asian Publics in North America
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): Daniels Roger
Abstract: An attempt to put an Asian woman on Canada's $100 bill in 2012 unleashed enormous controversy. The racism and xenophobia that answered this symbolic move toward inclusiveness revealed the nation's trumpeted commitment to multiculturalism as a lie. It also showed how multiple minor publics as well as the dominant public responded to the ongoing issue of race in Canada. In this new study, Christine Kim delves into the ways cultural conversations minimize race's relevance even as violent expressions and structural forms of racism continue to occur. Kim turns to literary texts, artistic works, and media debates to highlight the struggles of minor publics with social intimacy. Her insightful engagement with everyday conversations as well as artistic expressions that invoke the figure of the Asian allows Kim to reveal the affective dimensions of racialized publics. It also extends ongoing critical conversations within Asian Canadian and Asian American studies about Orientalism, diasporic memory, racialized citizenship, and migration and human rights. An original reconsideration of foundational concerns, The Minor Intimacies of Race focuses on the ephemeral and the nuanced to reveal the social hierarchies and power structures inherent in today's North America.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt18j8x6n

CHAPTER 3 Diasporic Fragility and Brokenness: from: The Minor Intimacies of Race
Abstract: In “I=You,” her essay on digital identity politics, Kara Keeling explores difference within collective identification via an examination of cinema, an advertising campaign, and digital storytelling. Introducing her argument with Audre Lorde’s words about women of color feminism as the “house of difference” and a turn to Brent Hayes Edwards’s insights into diasporic décalage, which he describes as “a changing core of difference; it is the work of differences within unity, an unidentifiable point that is incessantly touched and fingered and pressed” (Edwards qtd. in Keeling 55), Keeling proposes “I=Another” as “an equation in which difference functions in and as

Conclusion: from: The Minor Intimacies of Race
Abstract: Kyo Maclear’s first novel, The Letter Opener, explores the place that diasporic individuals occupy within the Canadian social imagination by focusing on the friendship between a recent Romanian refugee and a Japanese Canadian woman, both of whom work as mail-recovery employees, returning lost mail to their intended recipients. At the beginning of the novel, we are told that Andrei has disappeared without a word, leaving Naiko both grief-stricken and unsure about what to do with the bits of story that he has confided in her. The text’s premise underscores a link between the task of remembering and the material objects

CHAPTER 2 Effects of Change during the Soviet Era from: Storytelling in Siberia
Abstract: The watershed historical event for cultural revitalization in Yakutia occurred with the dissolution of the Soviet Union in the early 1990s.¹ The surge in freedom of expression for minority peoples during that period of Russian history laid the groundwork for widespread cultural renewal among the Sakha. This new vitality, in turn, contributed to the political and cultural environment necessary for supporting olonkho revitalization.²

CHAPTER 5 Elements of Resilience: from: Storytelling in Siberia
Abstract: The historical chapters of this work provide a narrative frame that informs this chapter’s discussion of continuity and change in olonkho performance. Measuring change for intangible cultural heritage remains a complicated process, but sociolinguists have found ways to address issues of language shift that may contribute helpful models for assessing music shift as well. Without drawing overly strict, problematic parallels between language and music (Tilley 2014, 487), sociolinguistic and other communication-based models can be modified effectively for measuring change in forms of artistic expression. In addition, these approaches highlight key factors related to resilience, thereby providing strategic insights into encouraging

Book Title: Been a Heavy Life-Stories of Violent Men
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): Presser Lois
Abstract: In this groundbreaking work, Lois Presser investigates the life stories of men who have perpetrated violence. She applies insights from across the academy to in-depth interviews with men who shared their accounts of how they became the people we most fear--those who rape, murder, assault, and rob, often repeatedly. Been a Heavy Life provides the discipline of criminology with two crucial frameworks: one for critically evaluating the construction of offenders own stories, and one for grasping the cultural meta-narratives that legitimize violence. For social scientists generally, this book offers a vivid demonstration of just how dynamic and contingent self-narratives are.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt1xcj9k

Foreword from: Been a Heavy Life
Author(s) ARRIGO BRUCE A.
Abstract: Ethnographic studies of “dangerous men” have generally taken us behind bars. Erving Goffman’s (1961) arresting critique of the confinement setting as a generative milieu for the exercise of power helped to spawn a series of monograph-length works recounting life, death, and survival behind prison walls (e.g., Jacobs 1978; Sykes 1971; Toch 1977). A second wave of penological analysis, still concerned with “everyday experience” behind bars, challenged the correctional system as an extension of the state’s regulatory ambit. For example, Irwin’s (1970, 1985) studies of the felon and the jail respectively ushered in a new era of incisive commentary. Crime control

2 OFFENDER IDENTITIES, OFFENDER NARRATIVES from: Been a Heavy Life
Abstract: I myself have built these premises into my working definitions of

3 THINKING ABOUT RESEARCH EFFECTS from: Been a Heavy Life
Abstract: Are researchers ever really spectators to the activities that they study? The image of researchers on the outside looking in is prevalent in most literature on methodology for social research. But it troubled me because, trained to see the social all around me, I thought social influence should extend to my research interviews. The narrative data I “collected” should, to some extent at least, be a product of the interview and not a sole-authored work of the narrator.

4 RESEARCH METHODS WHEN RESEARCH IS BEING RESEARCHED from: Been a Heavy Life
Abstract: Early on I was helped in my methodological decision making by the conventions of qualitative sociology. Some very general tools for working can be taken for granted. For example, the qualitative sociologist typically uses nonprobability sampling. If the researcher intends to conduct interviews, the interview format tends to be open-ended. The analysis usually emphasizes the perspectives of those whom one is studying, but also incorporates one’s own perspectives into analysis and documentation, the latter being the reflexive position described in chapter 3.

Introduction: from: New German Dance Studies
Author(s) RUPRECHT LUCIA
Abstract: New German Dance Studiesoffers fresh histories and theoretical inquiries that will resonate not only for scholars working in the field of dance, but also for scholars working on literature, film, visual culture, theater, and performance. The volume brings together essays by scholars working inside and outside Germany, by established leaders in the field as well as new voices. Topics range from eighteenth- and nineteenth-century theater dance to popular social dances in global circulation, although emphasis falls on twentieth- and twenty-first–century modern and contemporary dance. Three research clusters emerge: Weimar culture and its afterlife, a focus that is still

9. Warfare over Realism: from: New German Dance Studies
Author(s) CRAMER FRANZ ANTON
Abstract: The primary function of each and every true work of people’s art ( Volkskunstschaffen) is to provide a reflection of current-day life. The socialist lifestyle, new moral system and relationships among the people ought to determine the content of new dance. There’s no need to attempt

Book Title: Eight Women Philosophers-Theory, Politics, and Feminism
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): Duran Jane
Abstract: Spanning over nine hundred years, Eight Women Philosophers is the first singly-authored work to trace the themes of standard philosophical theorizing and feminist thought across women philosophers in the Western tradition. Jane Duran has crafted a comprehensive overview of eight women philosophers--Hildegard of Bingen, Anne Conway, Mary Astell, Mary Wollstonecraft, Harriet Taylor Mill, Edith Stein, Simone Weil, and Simone de Beauvoir--that underscores the profound and continuing significance of these thinkers for contemporary scholars. _x000B_Duran devotes one chapter to each philosopher and provides a sustained critical analysis of her work, utilizing aspects of Continental theory, poststructuralist theory, and literary theory. She situates each philosopher within her respective era and in relation to her intellectual contemporaries, and specifically addresses the contributions each has made to major areas such as metaphysics/epistemology, theory of value, and feminist theory. She affirms the viability and importance of recovering these women's overlooked work and provides a powerful answer to the question of why the rubric "women philosophers" remains so valuable.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt1xcn4h

introduction from: Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: Contemporary work has helped us come to grips with the notion that much of the writing done by women thinkers in the past may be philosophical in

one HILDEGARD OF BINGEN from: Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: In approaching Hildegard of Bingen (1098–1179) philosophically, one immediately runs into the oldest and most cherished conundrum with respect to female philosophers. It appears to be the case that many female thinkers whose work might be deemed to be philosophical wrote in styles that were somewhat nonstandard, even for their respective times. Thus, arguments have frequently been made that such women are absent from the canon because of the fact that their work was demonstrably nonphilosophical, rather than due to their sex. Counterarguments to the effect that at least some minor male thinkers normally found in any group of

three MARY ASTELL from: Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: Mary Astell’s (1666–1731) life and work mirrored each other; she remains, even now, a contradictory and contentious figure, whose writings are an odd amalgam of Tory principles and far-seeing calls for reform and change. Although she is described as a “pamphleteer,” the body of her work is sufficiently large, and her circle of acquaintances sufficiently vast, that she, like Anne Conway, is best thought of as a philosopher—although, in Astell’s case, as one with a decidedly political bent.¹

four MARY WOLLSTONECRAFT from: Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: Mary Wollstonecraft (1759–97), unlike Mary Astell or Anne Conway, is indisputably recognized as an important thinker of her time, and such recognition has in general not flagged since the early part of the nineteenth century. Unlike Hildegard, but perhaps like Anne Conway, Wollstonecraft is certainly recognized as a philosopher, for her works are lengthy enough and conceptually oriented enough that she is often included in anthologies of philosophical thought.¹ Thus, unlike Mary Astell—although both women are paradigmatically political thinkers—Wollstonecraft is not often labeled a “pamphleteer.”

five HARRIET TAYLOR MILL from: Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: In the process of beginning to work on Harriet Taylor Mill (1807–58) as a thinker, we need to remember not only the details of her personal life, but the time in which she lived and wrote. Insofar as political and social philosophy were concerned, this was a period dominated by Bentham’s utilitarianism and the economics of Ricardo (the latter, work that John Stuart Mill [JSM] did a great deal to both promulgate and criticize).

six EDITH STEIN from: Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: ¹ Then again, if we choose to focus on Stein’s philosophical work—much of which, unfortunately, has not yet been translated into English—we will probably

seven SIMONE WEIL from: Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: Simone Weil (1909–43) is widely regarded as one of the outstanding thinkers of twentieth-century France, and over a period of time her work has gained in importance. It is cited in a number of areas of endeavor and disciplines. Far from being regarded merely as a philosopher, Weil is frequently thought of in other terms, as a religious thinker or, as some would have it, a mystic. Her work has in common with the thought of Edith Stein a devotion to belief and an attempt to get to the core of things, while with that other Simone, Simone de

eight SIMONE DE BEAUVOIR from: Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: Of all of the women whose work I have investigated here, Simone de Beauvoir (1908–86) is by far the best known and, with the possible exception of Simone Weil, the only one whose work has already more or less passed into the pantheon of philosophy. Indeed, there is enough contemporary debate about her work and commentary on it that it does not seem necessary to reinvent the wheel; we can count Simone de Beauvoir as a philosopher, and as one whose work has been recognized.¹

Conclusion from: Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: An historical endeavor across a long span of time, by its very nature, is fraught with difficulties. I have assumed that it is possible to make a comparative analysis of the work of eight women thinkers whose lives range from the eleventh to the twentieth centuries and who, although they are all European in the broad sense, encompass cultures ranging from the Teutonic to the Anglo-Saxon to the French. If it is difficult to compare the lives of women crossculturally, it is also difficult to compare the lives of women across time—we know so little about the eleventh century,

Book Title: Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies- Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): CHRISTIANS CLIFFORD
Abstract: Each essay considers what is known and understood about these concepts. The essays give particular attention to how relevant ideas, themes, and terms were developed, elaborated, and deployed in the work of James W. Carey, the "founding father" of cultural studies in the United States. The contributors map how these important concepts, including Carey's own work with them, have evolved over time and how these concepts intersect. The result is a coherent volume that redefines the still-emerging field of critical cultural studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt2ttbx5

Space from: Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies
Author(s) VALDIVIA ANGHARAD N.
Abstract: When I was asked to write on the keyword spacein relation to Jim Carey’s work, I had two somewhat contradictory reactions. One was of flattery. The second was panic and insecurity. Do I know enough to write about Carey and space? I certainly have vivid memories of the courses I took with Professor Carey, who was no ordinary teacher or scholar. Coming straight out of undergraduate studies, I was mostly one of those lost souls barely making sense of what now seems perfectly obvious and, of course, totally brilliant. I envy those who took his courses with the full

Community from: Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies
Author(s) STEINER LINDA
Abstract: Wildly inflated, if not oxymoronic, versions of community—the intelligence community, military community, self-help community, and international business community—began proliferating a few decades ago, and such references continue apace. Communities have emerged around various diseases. They produce jobs, such as community literacy work. Although these may lack the thrill of “ecstatic communities,” “singular” communities are identified for academicians (the scholarly community), lawyers, artists, scientists, and various other professions and occupations. We can study a host of interpretive communities and in doing so form an interpretive community. The term has even been stretched to refer to momentary aggregations of people

Identity from: Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies
Author(s) RAKOW LANA F.
Abstract: For those of us in the United States who are immersed personally and professionally in issues of race and gender, the answer is obvious. Our work in the academy, undertaken against the grain of tradition in our disciplines and departments, has exposed historically and culturally bound assumptions of self and other, untangling and revealing connections between group identity and the social formation. We argue for changes in content, pedagogy, and methodology to shake up settled assumptions about the human condition (see, e. g., Blum and Press 2002; McRobbie 1997; and Steiner 2002). Outside the academy progressive political movements, with our

Professionalism from: Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies
Author(s) ALLAN STUART
Abstract: The English word journalistcan be traced back at least as far as the end of the seventeenth century, meaning broadly, “one whose work is to write or edit public journals or newspapers.” Matters quickly become complicated, however, when one seeks to determine the professional role that the everyday use of this term has prescribed over the years.

Technology from: Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies
Author(s) JONES STEVEN
Abstract: Technology is a lot like the weather. It influences us in myriad untold ways; directly or indirectly, it affects everything from our behavior to our physical health and our mental outlook. Like the weather, technology is often in the news. And we try our best to forecast and predict it, but its unpredictability continues to foil us. We know the sources of weather; that is, we know in scientific terms what causes it. Similarly, we know who creates a particular technology, but we know little about the way it works or its likely operation, and we know it best only

Epilogue from: Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies
Author(s) ZELIZER BARBIE
Abstract: Most scholars would say that they engage in intellectual work for the sheer joy of it, yet underlying a fierce curiosity about the efforts of the mind rests a humble hope that our scholarship will not perish when we are no longer around to remind others of its relevance. This volume asks us to consider concepts in cultural studies. In particular, it assesses the basic impulses of the work of James Carey in the context of those who claim its influence on their own scholarship. It is a smart, timely, and useful effort to delineate the setting in which Carey’s

Book Title: Eight Words for the Study of Expressive Culture- Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): FEINTUCH BURT
Abstract: Group. Art. Text. Genre. Performance. Context. Tradition. Identity. _x000B_No matter where we are--in academic institutions, in cultural agencies, at home, or in a casual conversation--these are words we use when we talk about creative expression in its cultural contexts. Eight Words for the Study of Expressive Culture is a thoughtful, interdisciplinary examination of the keywords that are integral to the formulation of ideas about the diversity of human creativity, presented as a set of essays by leading folklorists. _x000B_Many of us use these eight words every day. We think with them. We teach with them. Much of contemporary scholarship rests on their meanings and implications. They form a significant part of a set of conversations extending through centuries of thought about creativity, meaning, beauty, local knowledge, values, and community. Their natural habitats range across scholarly disciplines from anthropology and folklore to literary and cultural studies and provide the framework for other fields of practice and performance as well. _x000B_Eight Words for the Study of Expressive Culture is a much-needed study of keywords that are frequently used but not easily explained. Anchored by Burt Feintuchs cogent introduction, the book features essays by Dorothy Noyes, Gerald L. Pocius, Jeff Todd Titon, Trudier Harris, Deborah A. Kapchan, Mary Hufford, Henry Glassie, and Roger D. Abrahams.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt2ttc8f

2 Art from: Eight Words for the Study of Expressive Culture
Author(s) POCIUS GERALD L.
Abstract: Perhaps of all the words that surround us in our daily life, art is one of the most contentious, most controversial. In part, this is because art—like the term folklore—has a popular as well as academic parlance. While abstract concepts such as ʺtextʺ or ʺidentityʺ rarely enter common discourse, our daily lives frequently encounter popular notions of ʺartʺ: our cities are filled with establishments that sell ʺart,ʺ we take ʺart appreciationʺ courses, we buy the products of ʺrecording artists.ʺ We become disparaging when our governments fund certain varieties of ʺartʺ over others, and we lump different artworks together

5 Performance from: Eight Words for the Study of Expressive Culture
Author(s) KAPCHAN DEBORAH A.
Abstract: To perform is a transitive verb. Grammatically, this means that the verb perform takes a direct object, relating one element or property to another. One performs something, a theater piece (a drama, a comedy, a farce, a tragedy), a musical score, a ritual, a critique, a sales spiel. And this piece, this work, is performed by someone—an actor, a man, a woman, an herbalist, a hermaphrodite, a queen, a slave. Relating subject to object, to perform is also to facilitate transition. There is an agentive quality to performance, a force, a playing out of identities and histories. ʺEverything in

CHAPTER 1 MODERN PATTERNS IN EMOTIONS HISTORY from: Doing Emotions History
Author(s) STEARNS PETER N.
Abstract: After thirty to forty years of serious, informative work on emotions history, scholars have not clearly answered what would seem a vital and timely question: do emotions and emotional standards change when a society moves toward modernity? This essay seeks to explore the current status of the issue, to indicate promising lines for renewed attention, and to urge greater priority for analysis and discussion.

4 Words and War: from: Covering Bin Laden
Author(s) RADSCH COURTNEY C.
Abstract: On September 11, 2001, members of Osama bin Laden’s Al Qaeda terrorist network blew up the Twin Towers in New York City. Less than a month later on October 7, Al Jazeera swooped onto the world stage by scooping the major international media. Al Jazeera was the only news outlet in Kabul, Afghanistan, when the United States launched its war against the Taliban, and it aired an exclusive videotape of Osama bin Laden, who was seen as the mastermind for the 9/11 attacks. Its coverage was rebroadcast on leading outlets around the world, and the pan-Arab network became the leading

CHAPTER THREE EMPIRE BITES BACK from: Scenes of Projection
Abstract: The disciplinary pedagogical premise for the demonstration of image-casting devices—the camera obscura, the magic lantern, the solar microscope, and their variants—was to show and thereby train the spectator, in an idealized, ostensibly objectivizing, and instrumentalized version of how the eye works and, by extension, how the observer or witness of the experiment is supposed to see. As instrument imago of the spectator as subject of rational vision, however, projective apparatus did not actually resemble the witnessing body of the subject of rational vision.¹ This lack of corporeal resemblance is not incidental but rather the material form of a

Book Title: Cannibal Metaphysics- Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Skafish Peter
Abstract: The iconoclastic Brazilian anthropologist and theoretician Eduardo Viveiros de Castro, well known in his discipline for helping initiate its "ontological turn," offers a vision of anthropology as "the practice of the permanent decolonization of thought." After showing that Amazonian and other Amerindian groups inhabit a radically different conceptual universe than ours-in which nature and culture, human and nonhuman, subject and object are conceived in terms that reverse our own-he presents the case for anthropology as the study of such "other" metaphysical schemes, and as the corresponding critique of the concepts imposed on them by the human sciences. Along the way, he spells out the consequences of this anthropology for thinking in general via a major reassessment of the work of Claude Lévi-Strauss, arguments for the continued relevance of Deleuze and Guattari, dialogues with the work of Philippe Descola, Bruno Latour, and Marilyn Strathern, and inventive treatments of problems of ontology, translation, and transformation. Bold, unexpected, and profound, Cannibal Metaphysicsis one of the chief works marking anthropology's current return to the theoretical center stage.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt17xr4vt

Chapter Eight The Metaphysics of Predation from: Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: In Totemism TodayandThe Savage Mind, the two transitional works where the prestructuralism ofThe Elementary Structures of Kinshipgives way to the post-structuralism of theMythologiques,86Lévi-Strauss establishes a paradigmatic contrast between totemism and sacrifice that for me had a status that could be described as properly mythic, allowing me to more distinctly formulate what I had previously only confusedly perceived as

Chapter Eleven The System’s Intensive Conditions from: Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: We will return once more to the passage from Lévi-Strauss already cited several times in these pages, the one where the dean of the Americanists connects “critical analyses” of the notion of affinity (which Brazilian ethnologists led the way in 113) to the uncovering of an indigenous philosophical problematic. All of this derives, at the end of the day, from Lévi-Strauss himself, and I think that he knew it perfectly well. That South American affinity is indeed not a sociological category but a philosophical idea was something Lévi-Strauss had observed in a premonitory way in one of his very first works,

Book Title: Becoming Past-History in Contemporary Art
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Blocker Jane
Abstract: Many books have sought to understand the key directions of contemporary art. In contrast, Becoming Pastis concerned with the application of art history in the pursuit of such trends. Setting the idea of temporality decisively in the realm of art, Blocker's work is crucial for artists, art historians, curators, critics, and scholars of performance and cultural studies interested in the role of history in the practice of art.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt18s3115

Introduction from: Becoming Past
Abstract: To be a historian of contemporary art is to work in a rather challenging and uncomfortable profession. First, no one can really agree on what we’re talking about when we use the term contemporary, a word that develops etymologically fromtempusand yet yields little understanding of time.Current, recent, new, up-to-date, modern, now, present, on the horizon—contemporary’s synonyms are as numerous as they are vague. Second, whatever the contemporary is, it’s clear there’s way too much of it. Terry Smith nicely explains the unique obstacles set in the way of the contemporary art historian when he writes: “Look

INTRODUCTION from: Exchanging Clothes
Author(s) Rabinowitz Paula
Abstract: Between May 10 and 14, 2010, Kate Gilmore’s Public Art Fund–sponsored installation Walk the Walkwas on exhibit in a corner of New York’s Bryant Park. Set behind the New York Public Library on Forty-Second Street, home of Fashion Week and Midtown urban refuge for the hundreds of thousands of office workers in the surrounding buildings, the “hardcore endurance” installation featured seven young women dressed in identical canary-yellow shifts, pink cardigan sweaters (when the weather was cool), and ivory pumps continuously walking in five-hour shifts between 8:30 a.m. and 6:30 p.m. Ms. Gilmore had bought their identical rayon-and-spandex cowl-neck

2 KRIZIA AND ACCESSORIES from: Exchanging Clothes
Author(s) Mandelli (Krizia) Mariuccia
Abstract: In my opinion, accessories are small, portable talismans of our well-being. They make up that framework of meaning that we construct about ourselves; they are invaluable indicators of taste, character, style, and behavior. I can understand a lot more about people by looking at their shoes or their watch than the clothes they wear or the things they say. Walter Albini, one of my first assistants who went on to become an almost legendary name in fashion, used to say that accessories are ten times more important than clothes. I agreed then—and I agree now.

3 THE DRESS OF THOUGHT from: Exchanging Clothes
Author(s) Hollander Anne
Abstract: I want to look at clothes in the works of Homer, Virgil, Dante, and Ariosto, four great poets who represent a cumulative literary tradition, with a huge influence on centuries of later writing. Each of these writers was essential to the next, and a great deal of later Western literature shows constant evidence of having internalized them all. I’ll be dealing with a few of these poets’ common themes that treat of dress, undress, and armor, with their differences in attitude about clothes, and with real clothes in their time. I will also note how one powerful literary treatment of

6 TRAVELING LIGHT from: Exchanging Clothes
Author(s) Scatamacchia Cristina
Abstract: The American journalist Nellie Bly, whose real name was Elizabeth Cochrane, was fully aware of the importance of clothes. As a reporter, she was the first woman to do undercover investigations, creating a new kind of female sensational journalism. In the course of her reporting for Joseph Pulitzer’s New York World, she realized that clothes played a crucial role: they became masks allowing her to hide her true identity and assume a new one that would enable her to expose social abuses and political corruption. Bly was an exception among women journalists of that time, and her work marked a

8 WORD-PROCESSED FOR YOU BY A PROFESSIONAL SEAMSTRESS from: Exchanging Clothes
Author(s) Reimer Karen
Abstract: My embroidered works exploit the tensions between copy and original, object and process, and fine art and domestic craft to examine the relations between beauty, value and meaning. I’m particularly interested in how the amount of manual work invested in an object affects our judgment of which category it fits into and to what degree it possesses those related qualities. These embroidered replicas of fragments and texts range from great books to candy wrappers. Generally speaking, copies are of less value than originals, but when I copy by embroidering, the value of the copy is increased because of the elements

Book Title: Film as Philosophy- Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Herzogenrath Bernd
Abstract: Bringing together leading scholars from universities across the globe, Film as Philosophypresents major new research that leads film studies and philosophy into a productive dialogue. It provides a uniquely sweeping, historical overview of the confluence of film and philosophy for more than a century, considering films from Jean Renoir, Lars von Trier, Jørgen Leth, David Lynch, Michael Haneke, and others; the written works of filmmakers who also theorized on the medium, including Sergei Eisenstein and Jean Epstein; and others who have written on cinema, including Hugo Münsterberg, Béla Balázs, André Bazin, Henri Bergson, Gilles Deleuze, Stanley Cavell, Alain Badiou, Jacques Rancière, and many more.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt1mmft20

6 Montage Eisenstein: from: Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Vassilieva Julia
Abstract: “The artist may be known rather by what he omits,” as Eisenstein quotes Schiller in a diary entry dated June 20, 1947, almost exactly six months before his death in February 1948.¹ The quotation might strike us as incongruous, coming from the master who was never shy to voice his opinion or illustrate his points—in both his directorial work and his theoretical commentaries. Yet at this late stage of his career, Eisenstein becomes preoccupied with the issue of what he termed “great nothingness”—the opposite, the emptiness, the nonidentity against which we can define what is present and given.

10 Thinking Cinema with Alain Badiou from: Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Ling Alex
Abstract: Alain Badiou is, by any measure, one of the most original and exciting voices in continental philosophy today. His ambitious project (which involves not only a wholesale rethinking of ontology and phenomenology but also a radical reconfiguring of the place of philosophy itself ) has moreover gained considerable currency in Anglophone academia in recent years. While the inaugural English translation of one of his books only appeared comparatively recently, in 1999, the uptake of his philosophy since then has been swift indeed, and today, a very respectable (and ever-increasing) number of Badiou’s works are available in English, together with numerous

11 Thinking as Feast: from: Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Brenez Nicole
Abstract: The literary and cinematic work of the French philosopher and filmmaker Raymonde Carasco-Hébraud (1939–2009) comprises a thorough analysis of the theoretical and practical circulations, intersections, and interrelations between verbal and audiovisual thinking. Author of sixty articles and three books, two published during her lifetime and one posthumously; editor of two collected volumes; and codirector, with her husband, Régis Hébraud, of sixteen films in both 16 mm and 35 mm, Carasco is perhaps the only professional philosopher to have created such an extensive literary and cinematic body of work. Some overlap between filmmakers and philosophers does exist. Jean-François Lyotard made

Introduction from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) SAYERS JENTERY
Abstract: Well, I don’t know all the circuitry, but I can do first aid,” said artist Laurie Anderson in October 1981. She was responding to Rob La Frenais, who asked her a few questions about hardware (in La Frenais 140). By 1981, Anderson had worked extensively with technologies as art forms. In 1977, she built a tape bow violin with Bob Bielecki. Substituting magnetic tape for horsehair and a tape head for a bridge, she bowed audio, distorting it by playing canned sounds forward and backward across a range of speeds (Collins 50). Her approach transformed a recording and playback technology

Chapter 1 The Boundary Work of Making in Digital Humanities from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) KLEIN JULIE THOMPSON
Abstract: Debates on digital humanities are sites of boundary work in a history of arguments about the nature of the field. Boundary work is a composite label for the claims, activities, and structures by which individuals and groups create, maintain, break down, and reformulate boundaries between knowledge units (Fisher 13–14; Klein, Crossing1–2). Thomas Gieryn coined the term in 1983 in a study of demarcating science from non-science. It is an ideological style that constructs boundaries rhetorically in three ways: by expanding authority or expertise into domains claimed by other professions or occupations, by monopolizing authority and resources, and

Chapter 3 Project Snapshot: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) KRZYZANIAK MICHAEL
Abstract: The Living Netis one of several techno-textile projects created by the Vibrant Lives team. Using our Vibrant Lives app, we transform the network activity—or “data shed”—of event participants into a sound file that then plays through subsonic subwoofers, thereby causing the Living Net to vibrate at a variable rate depending on the amount of data being shed.

Chapter 15 All Technology Is Assistive: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) HENDREN SARA
Abstract: In 1941, the United States Navy commissioned the husband-and-wife team of Charles and Ray Eames to design a lightweight splint to get wounded soldiers safely out of the battlefield. Metal splints of the period were not secure enough to hold the leg still, causing unnecessary death from gangrene, shock, blood loss, and so on. The Eameses had been working on techniques to mold and bend plywood, and they came up with a splint design conforming to the body without a lot of extra joints and parts. The wood design became a secure, lightweight, nestable solution, and the Eameses produced more

Chapter 18 Doing History by Reverse Engineering Electronic Devices from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) TURKEL WILLIAM J.
Abstract: In this chapter we describe three experiences of collaboratively reverse engineering historical electronic artifacts at the University of Western Ontario’s Lab for Humanistic Fabrication, a setting that supports hands-on fabrication and experimentation, programming and computer-aided design, and traditional historical research. Our first case study comes from Elliott’s work on the re-creation of wireless effects designed by early-twentieth-century magicians to simulate mind reading. These effects depended on electromagnetic induction, a technique that has recently come to prominence for its applications in radio-frequency ID tagging, wireless charging, and near-field and secure wireless communications, largely driven by interest in the Internet of Things.

Chapter 25 Feminist Hackerspaces: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) ROSNER DANIELA K.
Abstract: In putting this zine together (see Figure 25.1), we wish to open a dialogue about the culture being made in and around feminist hackerspaces. Our research has started to reveal important connections between the work being done within these spaces and larger developments in corporate technology cultures. Members have reframed a concern for women’s access to technical industries as one of recognizing technical work already there, destabilizing the unmarked categories of technical labor. Our hope is that this zine can help spur a wider discussion of the practices and criticisms that are happening in these spaces. In doing so, we

Chapter 26 Project Snapshot: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) KNIGHT KIM A. BRILLANTE
Abstract: Fashioning Circuits uses wearable media as a lens to consider the social and cultural valences of bodies and identities in relation to fashion, technology, labor practices, and craft and maker cultures. A public humanities project, it combines scholarship, university coursework, and community partnerships.

Chapter 27 Making Queer Feminisms Matter: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) ROGERS MELISSA
Abstract: With maker methodologies gaining popularity in the humanities, how might we imagine queer feminist investments in and engagements with making? What do queer feminist approaches to making look like in academic environments where entrepreneurial maker movements extend the optimistic promise of transforming education through pedagogies of “invent to learn?” Science, Technology, Engineering, and Math are slowly becoming STEAM (STEM + Art), and “innovation” will supposedly rescue the increasingly obsolescent humanities for a future of corporate universities.¹ In a landscape of knowledge production where institutional resources are up for grabs for some kinds of work and as constricted as ever for

Chapter 31 Experience Design for the Humanities: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) ROBERTS-SMITH JENNIFER
Abstract: This chapter deals with two central propositions. The first is that the humanities has an opportunity to create a new kind of experience design that is fundamentally different in its goals from experience design in industry. In order to reliably appeal to customers, commercial experience designers strive for consistency. Whether working with retail outlets or amusement parks, they attempt to produce a customer experience that is similar for everyone who enters. There is, for example, a well-defined “Disney experience” that strives to keep a trip to any Disney location within the discourse of the brand. Cinderella should not take a

Chapter 35 Making the Model: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) SNYDER LISA M.
Abstract: The workflow for traditional humanistic scholarship might be loosely described as follows: (1) identify a research question, (2) gather and critically analyze the materials (primary and secondary) that inform said question, and (3) write an interpretive analysis using selected elements from your materials to support and communicate an argument.¹ In evaluating the resulting scholarship, reviewers are asked to gauge the work and its potential impact on their field. Is the research question important? Did the author use the appropriate source materials (in terms of both quantity and quality)? Were the source materials harnessed to make a convincing argument? Did the

Chapter 37 Making It Matter from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) LINDBLAD J. K. PURDOM
Abstract: In the 2014 documentary Tales of the GrimSleeper, Nick Broomfield investigates how Lonnie Franklin Jr. killed between ten and 180 working-class black women across three decades without being apprehended. The exact number of murders is unknown partly because some Los Angeles police officers used the code NHI, or “No Humans Involved,” when reporting on the crimes. Of course humans were involved, but the officers decided not to count murdered black women as humans. Following Saidiya Hartman (1997), such instances of institutional racism and oppression prompt “us to question whether the rights of man and citizen are realizable or whether

Foreword from: Veer Ecology
Author(s) GLOTFELTY CHERYLL
Abstract: If I ask you to brainstorm verbs that we commonly associate with the environmental movement, you might come up with reduce, recycle, reuse, conserve, preserve, protect, save, clean up, bike, garden, regulate, legislate, andrestore. I would argue that these actions are still necessary but no longer sufficient. Most of these words describe work we can do to help the environment, but few of them tell us how to work on ourselves in a time of environmental upheaval. Taking a cue from Nicholas Royle’s recent bookVeering: A Theory of Literature(2011), let us unpack the nounenvironmentto discover

Hope from: Veer Ecology
Author(s) SHEWRY TERESA
Abstract: A poet calls for rain, hail, and floodwater to have a future, to “laugh again.”¹ The disturbing laughter of this work—Hone Tuwhare’s “Haiku (1),” first published in 1970—affirms the potential power and exuberance of marginalized water, but it also signals tensions that are bound up in hoping for a future involving floodwater.² The life jettisoned in floods—silt-choked grass; a drowned sheep, bent against a fence post—bears the marks of the extractive economy that settler farmers interwove with water in Aotearoa New Zealand, a landmass inundated by some 560 billion cubic meters of rain and snow every

Book Title: Bioaesthetics-Making Sense of Life in Science and the Arts
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): WOLFE CARY
Abstract: Strathausen familiarizes readers with the basics of bioaesthetics, grounding them in its philosophical underpinnings while articulating its key components. Importantly, he delves into the longstanding problem of the "two cultures" that separate the arts and the sciences. Seeking to make bioaesthetics a more robust way of thinking, Strathausen then critiques it for failing to account for science's historical and cultural assumptions. At its worst, he says, biologism reduces artworks to mere automatons that rubber-stamp pre-established scientific truths.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt1pwt828

Book Title: Commemorating and Forgetting-Challenges for the New South Africa
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): MURRAY MARTIN J.
Abstract: When the past is painful, as riddled with violence and injustice as it is in postapartheid South Africa, remembrance presents a problem at once practical and ethical: how much of the past to preserve and recollect and how much to erase and forget if the new nation is to ever unify and move forward? The new South Africa's confrontation of this dilemma is Martin J. Murray's subject in Commemorating and Forgetting. More broadly, this book explores how collective memory works-how framing events, persons, and places worthy of recognition and honor entails a selective appropriation of the past, not a mastery of history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt32bck0

Book Title: The Thought of Death and the Memory of War- Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Gasché Rodolphe
Abstract: War lays bare death and our relation to it. And in the wars-or more precisely the memories of war-of the twentieth century, images of the deaths of countless faceless or nameless others eclipse the singularity of each victim's death as well as the end of the world as such that each death signifies. Marc Crépon's The Thought of Death and the Memory of War is a call to resist such images in which death is no longer actual death since it happens to anonymous others, and to seek instead a world in which mourning the other whose mortality we always already share points us toward a cosmopolitics. Crépon pursues this path toward a cosmopolitics of mourning through readings of works by Freud, Heidegger, Sartre, Patocka, Levinas, Derrida, and Ricœur, and others. The movement among these writers, Crépon shows, marks a way through-and against-twentieth-century interpretation to argue that no war, genocide, or neglect of people is possible without suspending how one relates to the death of another human being. A history of a critical strain in contemporary thought, this book is, as Rodolphe Gasché says in the Foreword, "a profound meditation on what constitutes evil and a rigorous and illuminating reflection on death, community, and world." The translation of this work received financial support from the French Ministry of Foreign Affairs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt4cggnq

2 Dying-for from: The Thought of Death and the Memory of War
Author(s) Sartre Jean-Paul
Abstract: Few passages of Sartre’s architecturally complex work Being and Nothingness are more critical of the existential analytic of Being and Time than those, in the fourth and last part, devoted to “my death.” Heidegger’s summons to an authentic Being-toward-death—to the acknowledgment by Dasein that death is its ownmost possibility—becomes, translated into Sartre’s idiom, the realization of a “project toward death,” the realization of a “freedom-to-die” that allows Dasein to “constitute itself as totality by [its] free choice of finitude.”¹ The idea that death can be the object of such a project [projet] is thus, from the beginning, put

3 Vanquishing Death from: The Thought of Death and the Memory of War
Author(s) Levinas Emmanuel
Abstract: As stated in the introduction, none of the philosophical engagements with Heidegger’s Being and Time in the last century is more clearly marked by the memory of World War II—by the torment of mass murder, the assassinations, the untold executions, and, most extraordinarily, the deportation and extermination of the Jews of Europe, which distinguishes this war from all others—than the thought of Emmanuel Levinas. It is this torment that makes for the uniqueness of the thought of death that Levinas elaborates in the pages of his work. It keeps alive, like no other, the memory of the victims

Borderline from: Meeting Place
Abstract: To stage a dialogue between northern and southern experiences of meeting is to assume a productively dialectical relationship. It is already to move beyond the nostalgia inherent in most anthropological descriptions and the urgent functionalism of sociological ideas of the crowd. It relocates both in a time and space that is not reducible to the idealized level playing field of contemporary, scientific modernity (where place-based, situational knowledge is always at a loss). It retains instead a topography of hills and vales, of crisscrossing tracks, and within the network of traces of passage lozenges of ground as yet unvisited. It is

Scales from: Meeting Place
Abstract: Killing time after you did not arrive, I found myself in the art gallery. Looking at a work called City Square, where a group of figures are arranged as if about to meet, I could not help but notice their inclination. They seemed to be attentively listening, as if they located themselves in a sea of echoes. For all their collective loneliness, they were immersed in a tumultuous medium whose message they strained to make out. The music of the tumult would not possess a clear key structure or its elements be reducible to tone and scales. It would be

Within a Cooee from: Meeting Place
Abstract: Various ways in which an enriched poetics of meeting might inform public space design have been discussed. Whether the restoration of the performative or choreographic dimension is considered from a northern or southern point of view, it entails asserting that the “aesthetic means” used (to repeat Stanner’s phrase) have binding social consequences. In some way, the “autonomy” of the “program” replicates itself, seeding eventually a network of such sociable sites—the network of creative communities invoked in the opening section of Meeting Place—that possess the political skills of self-organization needed to manage the erotic potential of amalgamation so that

All Ears from: Meeting Place
Abstract: In this scenario the wall intercedes on behalf of the experience of encounter. Materializing the place of meeting/not-meeting, it capitalizes on an originary sociality and gives it the face of sociability. The face is not a fascinating, phallocentric positivity. It is an imaginary one, in the sense that Arjun Appadurai lends that term when he writes, “The image, the imagined, the imaginary—these are all terms which direct us to something critical and new in global cultural processes: the imagination as social work. Imagination is no longer fantasy, pastime or contemplation (with their implication of withdrawal from social and political

Proxy from: Meeting Place
Abstract: When I began Meeting PlaceI thought it would end in a meeting. The failed rencontre with which it opened would be redeemed. The exacting work of understanding the environment of meeting would map all the possible paths of propinquity, in the process making the labyrinth of the passages transparent. The passages are all the possible approaches to meetings that surround a life like the skein of the spider’s web; when the walls containing them were no longer solid, I would see your fleeing figure, involved in its own blind destiny. From there it would be a simple matter of

Blue from: Prismatic Ecology
Author(s) JOY EILEEN A.
Abstract: This chapter is an attempt, and perhaps a failed one, to think about depression as a shared creative endeavor, as a transcorporeal blue (and blues) ecology¹ that would bind humans, nonhumans, and stormy weather together in what Tim Ingold has called a meshwork, where “beings do not propel themselves across a ready-made world but rather issue forth through a world-in-formation, along the lines of their relationships.”² In this enmeshment of the “strange strangers” of Timothy Morton’s dark ecology, “the only way out is down” and art’s “ambiguous, vague qualities will help us to think things that remain difficult to put

The Years Are Like Centuries from: Agitating Images
Abstract: The litany of place names and territorial monikers in this book will probably be daunting for those not familiar with Siberian history and geography. To simplify the task of reading this work, I will set the scene with the help of a few maps. These maps are meant to orient the reader within the book’s dense geographies—produced through descriptions and depictions as much as through the reader’s own experience and expectations. The first and most general term I use here is central Siberia. Central Siberia is a loosely defined zone surrounding the geographical center of the Russian Federation.¹ It

Book Title: Murder Most Modern-Detective Fiction and Japanese Culture
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Kawana Sari
Abstract: The first book-length study of interwar Japanese detective fiction, Murder Most Modern considers the important role of detective fiction in defining the country’s emergence as a modern nation-state. Sari Kawana contrasts Japanese works by Edogawa Ranpo, Unno J za, Oguri Mushitar , and others with works by Edgar Allan Poe and Agatha Christie to show how Japanese writers disseminated their ideas on the most startling aspects of modern life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttts6k1

Introduction: from: Murder Most Modern
Abstract: “Detective fiction,” declared the popular author Yumeno Kyūsaku (1889–1936) in 1935, “is like the serum for diphtheria.” Yumeno employed such an unusual metaphor to answer a nebulous question about one of the most popular genres of modern Japanese literature: “What is tantei shōsetsu[detective fiction]?” Although works in this genre, with their dazzling plots and shocking secrets, have captivated the Japanese reading public since the late nineteenth century, the genre itself has defied rigid categorization and resisted strict definition. Within the same essay, Yumeno went on to elaborate the comparison:

2. Eyeing the Privates: from: Murder Most Modern
Abstract: In Edogawa Ranpo’s 1930 work “Majutsushi” (The Magician), Hanazono Yōko, the daughter of a wealthy business owner, is kidnapped by a crazed killer. As amateur detective Tamamura Jirō, her fiancé, searches for her, he stumbles upon a bizarre show in a little theater:

Aesthetic Criticism: from: The Yale Critics
Author(s) Sprinker Michael
Abstract: What seems beautiful to me, what I should like to write, is a book about nothing, a book dependent on nothing external, which would be held together by the strength of its style, just as the earth, suspended in the void, depends on nothing external for its support; a book which would have almost no subject, or at least in which the subject would be almost invisible, if such a thing is possible. The finest works are those

J. Hillis Miller: from: The Yale Critics
Author(s) Pease Donald
Abstract: Several abrupt turns mark the critical career of J. Hillis Miller and withhold from his works that sense of stability and continuity that a lifelong pursuit of a single critical project might otherwise provide. They do so, moreover, because they seem precipitated more by Miller’s translation and adaptation of the positions of other critics than by reversals in his own thinking. First, there was the New Critical dissertation at Harvard; then, after a one-year stay at Williams in 1952-53, the years of phenomenological criticism at Johns Hopkins from 1953 to 1972, and more recently the move to deconstruction at Yale.

5 Screen Events of Velocity and Duration from: Documentary Time
Abstract: From the perspective of existential phenomenology it is interesting to note how the reflection on film and temporality has been biased toward duration and continuity, at the expense of rhythm, change, and repetition. For example, André Bazin was primarily interested in cinematic duration and the quality of lived time that may result from the tension between change and stasis within a single take. The inheritance of existential phenomenology in the work of Bazin and others includes a romantic recognition of the human gesture—a confidence in cinema to transmit directly the experience traced in faces and gestures. For example, Maurice

Book Title: Atavistic Tendencies-The Culture of Science in American Modernity
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Seitler Dana
Abstract: The post-Darwinian theory of atavism forecasted obstacles to human progress in the reappearance of throwback physical or cultural traits. In this stimulating work, Dana Seitler explores how modernity itself is an atavism. Examining late nineteenth- and early twentieth-century science, fiction, and photography, Seitler discovers how modern thought oriented itself around this paradigm of obsolescence and return—one that served to sustain ideologies of gender, sexuality, and race.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttsk90

Book Title: On the Rim-Looking for the Grand Canyon
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): NEUMANN MARK
Abstract: Why do nearly five million people travel to the Grand Canyon each year? Mark Neumann answers this question with a book as compelling as the panoramic vistas of the canyon. In On the Rim, he describes how the Grand Canyon became an internationally renowned tourist attraction and cultural icon, and delves into the meanings the place holds for the individuals who live, work, and travel there. “In the chasm’s dizzying depths and flamboyant displacement of solid ground, as well as in the perceptions of those drawn there-explorers and day-trippers, employees and outlaws, artists and fast-buck artists-Neumann discovers a context in which to examine cultural and experimental fissures that separate leisure and work, home and away, religion and science, art and life. . . . A lively read.” Boston Globe
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttskbf

5 Fantasy Trails across Popular Terrain from: On the Rim
Abstract: A photographer near Grandeur Point, who is working on a western parks feature in a national weekly magazine, says he’s frustrated with his assignment. “These guys in the New York office tell me they want shots of some long, lonely road going out toward the horizon at sunset,” he says, and adds, “without cars. Maybe one car or an RV. Where am I supposed to find that? All these people come in cars, and they’re on the roads. People are all over the trails. I’m taking pictures of crowds. They want something that isn’t here. ‘Just get it,’ they tell

3 Theoretical Disjunctures and Discourses of Liberalism from: Telling Identities
Abstract: With the arrival in 1825 of José María Echeandía, the first governor appointed by the newly independent Mexican state, the youth of Alta California, the Young Turks as it were, who would become the emergent class of the territory and who were then hungry for news of the world and new ideas, were granted an opportunity to imagine a new society upon being invited to participate in discussions on the latest ideological framework stirring debate in the Mexican capital: liberalism. Echeandia’s notions of republicanism and individual liberty clashed with feudal discourses of aristocracy, especially with long-held tenets of birthright and

Four History and Social Memory from: State Repression and the Labors of Memory
Abstract: The relationship between memory and history is nowadays a central preoccupation within several fields of the social sciences. Debates and reflection on the subject are most extensive and intensive within the discipline of history itself, particularly among those scholars who, recognizing that the historian’s craft extends beyond the mere “reconstruction” of what “actually” happened, deploy more complex modes of analysis in their work. An initial complexity emerges from the recognition that what “actually happened” includes the subjective perceptions and experiences of social actors. Furthermore, historical knowledge includes interpretive processes, the construction and selection of the “facts,” and the selection of

2 Working Images: from: Recording Reality, Desiring the Real
Abstract: This chapter introduces two questions that are central to this book: First is the question of the representability of everyday life and the project of “voicing” the ordinary as not only subjective testimony but also art—that is, as a sensory experience that is emotional and aesthetic. Second is the question of how the sounds and images of work, workers, ordinary people, and their activities signify as facts and as historical information. How has documentary film produced such discursive definitions and thus such defining discoursing? The focus here will be images of work in 1930s documentaries for these raise the

3 Monstrosity, Illegibility, Denegation: from: Monster Theory
Author(s) Clark David L.
Abstract: In a theoretical age often enamored of the “playfulness” of the sign and the “pleasure” of the text, Paul de Man’s last writings stand out as darkly sobering, driven as they are by an almost ascetic desire to bring thinking into proximity with what he calls, after Walter Benjamin, “reine Sprache,”pure language (TT, 92),² or, in Carol Jacob’s terms, “that which is purely language—nothing but language.”³ From the stringent and selfcanceling perspective afforded by de Man’s late essays, the Nietzschean rhetoric of play and gaming often associated with postmodernist theory and literary practice registers the work of a

9 Hermaphrodites Newly Discovered: from: Monster Theory
Author(s) Long Kathleen Perry
Abstract: Recent works on the figure of the hermaphrodite, especially as manifested in early modern France, have concentrated on the medical and legal bases for depiction of this dual being.¹ When philosophical sources are explored, platonic and neoplatonic sources are emphasized.² Thus the hermaphrodite becomes a figure either of menace or of divine completion and wisdom. These views evade many of the epistemological, theological, and political problems raised by ambiguity of gender, problems currently discussed in modern gender theory but already known to Renaissance audiences well versed in skepticism. The gender ambiguities played out in the court of Henri III of

14 Dinosaurs-R-Us: from: Monster Theory
Author(s) O’Neill John
Abstract: Americans love big things, including themselves. They even love things bigger than themselves, like America. Recently, Americans have demonstrated an extraordinary affection for carnivores larger than them selves—returning the earlier efforts by King Kong and other aliens such as ET to love Americans. Even when Americans love tiny creatures like Mickey Mouse what they love is their espousal of the cardinal American virtues of hardworking, asexual aggression tirelessly practiced by the little guys in totally controlled, aseptic environments such as that they have come to worship at Disneyland.¹ The Disney complex contains both a psychic and technocultural apparatus through

Book Title: Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain- Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): VILLANUEVA DARÍO
Abstract: Offers a sampling of Spanish critical work in literary theory and cultural studies. Contributors: Manuel Asensi, Juan Miguel Company-Ramón, Jesús González-Requena, Silvia L. López, Rafael Núñez-Ramos, Cristina Peña-Marín, José María Pozuelo-Yvancos, Jenaro Talens, Darío Villaneuva, Santos Zunzunegui.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttssdt

Introduction from: Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) Villanueva Darío
Abstract: This volume presents a sample of contemporary critical work now being done in Spain. More often than not, “theory” is a word associated with France, Germany, and the United States. Seldom do we read how Spanish scholars are examining and using critical perspectives such as psychoanalysis, deconstruction, discourse analysis, text theory, or the aesthetics of reception. The essays presented here, submitted by professors of communication and literary theory in the Spanish university system, differ not only in their problematics but also in style and presentation from what one is accustomed to seeing in the United States. As editors of this

Chapter 4 The Immutability of the Text, the Freedom of the Reader, and Aesthetic Experience from: Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) McMillen-Villar Susan
Abstract: One of the features most commonly attributed to a work of art is the union, inseparability, or lack of distinction between form and substance, expression and content. Even though I think that this concept is well explained by some authors (especially Lotman and Mukarovsky), perhaps it would be appropriate to consider it from a pragmatic perspective, for only in that way may we appreciate its true relevance and its influence on the general functioning of literary phenomena. The unity of form and substance is not an autonomous value in the literary text that can be appreciated in itself. It is

Chapter 7 Reading in Process, the Antitext, and the Definition of Literature from: Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) Giefer Laura
Abstract: In a previous work, dedicated to a theoría¹ of reading, I investigated the paradoxical movement that characterizes the relationship between the language of literary theory and that of literature. One of the core chapters of that work noted the characteristics of identity and difference that mediate between text and metatext. In dealing specifically with the question of difference, the problem of defining language or the literary text was brought to the foreground, a classical problem that was not addressed at the time because the investigation wandered along other paths. Nevertheless, the way was prepared for understanding that the question about

Afterword from: Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) Lewis Tom
Abstract: The selection of essays presented in Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spainaccurately reflects the balance of forces within Spanish literary theory since 1975. Fairly specific absences and emphases help to map the terrain. Gender criticism of Spanish literature remains primarily the work of scholars residing in North America. Today, in contrast to the 1960s and 1970s, Marxist theory enjoys little purchase among Spanish literary theorists or social philosophers. And, having coaxed a turn toward concepts that treat incompleteness, openness, and pragmatics as opposed to wholeness, closure, and universals, a diffuse but hegemonic “postmodernism” now overlies earlier Spanish traditions of linguistic

Book Title: The Dreams of Interpretation-A Century down the Royal Road
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Spicer Jakki
Abstract: Rethinking the importance of Sigmund Freud's landmark book The Interpretation of Dreams a century after its publication in 1900, this work brings together psychoanalysts, philosophers, cultural theorists, film and visual theorists, and literary critics in a compilation of the best clinical and theoretical work being done in psychoanalysis today. Contributors: Willy Apollon, Karyn Ball, Raymond Bellour, Patricia Gherovici, Judith Feher-Gurewich, Jonathan Kahana, A. Kiarina Kordela, Pablo Kovalovsky, Jean Laplanche, Laura Marcus, Andrew McNamara, Claire Nahon, Yun Peng, Gerard Pommier, Jean-Michel Rabaté, Laurence A. Rickels, Avital Ronell, Elke Siegel, Rei Terada, Klaus Theweleit, Paul Verhaege, Silke-Maria Weineck.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttt3ph

9. The Dream between Drive and Desire: from: The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Verhaeghe Paul
Abstract: One of the major conclusions of Freud’s The Interpretation of Dreamsis, of course, that every dream comes down to the fulfillment of a secret wish. This is the main message of Freud’s book, the one that has been kept intact for the last hundred years. The latent dream thoughts contain a forbidden unconscious desire, which finds its expression in the manifest dream content, albeit in a distorted way due to the dream-work. Every analysis has to follow the opposite road, meaning that the dream-work has to be countered by the analytic work. At the end of the analytic day,

21. The Substance of Psychic Life from: The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Ball Karyn
Abstract: Over the years, the perceived impropriety of Freud’s emphasis on the sexual dimension of the unconscious has, in the United States at least, sometimes led to a complete negation of the value of his thought. The controversy in 1995–96 over plans for a national exhibit devoted to Freud’s work and influence is a telling instance of this suppression in the public sphere both within and beyond academia. To be sure, Freud himself sometimes felt compelled to qualify a few of the more scandalous aspects of his own thinking on sexuality, such as his initial belief in his patients’ statements

22. Young Mr. Freud; or, On the Becoming of an Artist: from: The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Peck Jason
Abstract: The starting material of this piece is stone—the different kinds of marble of which statues are made. Readers of the T- Deutung,as Avital Ronell has called it, will be familiar with this complex: Freud’s wish to stand on a monument at the University of Vienna as something like “the Habsburg Kaiser.” From his early youth on, Freud is convinced that the figure of a great explorer or inventor is hidden in his body, and that his life is aimed at the task of working this figure out. Let’s say just like Elvis: his mother told him every day he

Book Title: Philosophy Beside Itself-On Deconstruction and Modernism
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Marshall Donald
Abstract: The writings of French philosopher Jacques Derrida have been the single most powerful influence on critical theory and practice in the United States over the past decade. But with few exceptions American philosophers have taken little or no interest in Derrida’s work, and the task of reception, translation, and commentary has been left to literary critics. As a result, Derrida has appeared as a figure already defined by essentially literary critical activities and interests. Stephen Melville’s aim in Philosophy Beside Itself is to insist upon and clarify the distinctions between philosophy and criticism. He argues that until we grasp Derrida’s philosophical project as such, we remain fundamentally unable to see his significance for criticism. In terms derived from Stanley Cavell’s writings on modernism, Melville develops a case for Derrida as a modernist philosopher, working at once within and against that tradition and discipline. Melville first places Derrida in a Hegelian context, the structure of which he explores by examining the work of Heidegger, Lacan, and Bataille. With this foundation, he is able to reappraise the project of deconstructive criticism as developed in Paul de Man’s Blindness and Insight and further articulated by other Yale critics. Central to this critique is the ambivalent relationship between deconstructive criticism and Lacanian psychoanalysis. Criticism—radical self-criticism—is a central means through which the difficult facts of human community come to recognition, and Melville argues for criticism as an activity intimately bound to the ways in which we do and do not belong in time and in community. Derrida’s achievement has been to find a new and necessary way to assert that the task of philosophy is criticism; the task of literary criticism is to assume the burden of that achievement. Stephen Melville is an assistant professor of English at Syracuse University, and Donald Marshall is a professor of English at the University of Iowa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttt44r

Chapter 1 On Modernism from: Philosophy Beside Itself
Abstract: Speaking at Johns Hopkins University in 1967, Jacques Derrida introduced his work to the English-speaking world in the following way:

Chapter 2 A Context for Derrida from: Philosophy Beside Itself
Abstract: The double bind, like so many of the terms by which one would describe Derrida’s position, has itself come to work as a figure within it.¹ And as with most of Derrida’s terms, what begins its life as the name of a concept ends, in his hands, differently—as a word or a trace or a gramme (more “concepts” that Derrida has retrieved from themselves, or destroyed). The double bind translates itself into French, miming its sound and its sense, as

Chapter 3 Psychoanalysis and Deconstruction from: Philosophy Beside Itself
Abstract: It can be tempting to describe Jacques Derrida’s work as in large measure an extension of psychoanalysis into the history of philosophy. Despite Derrida’s insistence to the contrary (in the section called “The Exorbitant Question of Method”), the reading of Rousseau offered in Of Grammatology—probably the work best known to Derrida’s English-speaking audience—looks like a particularly sophisticated variety of psychobiographical analysis, showing the inevitable inscription of the word “supplement”—the word with which Rousseau would name writing, his own writing in relation to speech, and culture in relation to nature—in a larger psychosexual economy (in which it

Chapter 5 Psychoanalysis, Criticism, Self-Criticism from: Philosophy Beside Itself
Abstract: Freud is hardly mentioned in Blindness and Insight, and the few scattered references to him inAllegories of Readingseem aimed at assimilating psychoanalysis to literature. Here is de Man discussing Paul Ricoeur’s work on Freud:

Chapter 5 The Body in Context: from: Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Parr James A.
Abstract: In an initial approximation, there could hardly be two more disparate works or two more dissimilar protagonists than Don Quixote and Don Juan. The differences in age, social class, self-assigned mission, attitudes toward women, and the Apollonian versus Dionysian worldview would seem to mitigate against any similarities of consequence. It will be my purpose, nevertheless, to seek out those similarities and to suggest that difference assumes a secondary role—one that could be equated with surface structure—in comparison to the commonalities of the deeper structure made manifest in the characters’ final disposition at the hands of their authors, but

Chapter 9 Camilo’s Closet: from: Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Brant Herbert J.
Abstract: Marco Denevi is one of Argentina’s most influential and important prose writers. One of the most distinctive features of his writing is the creation of a situation in which a presumed truth has been concealed with a mask. Consequently, in Denevi’s work there always seems to be an uneasy tension, a nagging suspicion that something is definitely not what it appears to be. As the reader proceeds through the narration, the numerous false facades that hide the unexpected and sometimes shocking truth lying underneath are slowly chipped away. Denevi’s numerous informes(reports),vindicaciones(vindications), andversiones(versions) of people, historical

Chapter 12 The Case for Feminine Pornography in Latin America from: Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Foster David William
Abstract: There are few topics in contemporary cultural production that are more controversial, that more divide individuals into entrenched positions, than pornography. While pornography may be a central fact of human artistic expression, as archaeology and historical studies have amply demonstrated (cf. The Invention of Pornographyfor its relationship to modern culture in general), there is yet no adequate resolution as to how to interpret its role in a global conception of cultural production. For some, typically today such implausible bedfellows as religious fundamentalists (Attorney General’s Commission on Pornography—the so-calledMeese Report)and politically correct, interventionist feminists (paradigmatically, Dworkin and Dworkin,

Chapter 14 Codifying Homosexuality as Grotesque: from: Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Chichester Ana García
Abstract: More than a decade after his death in 1979, Virgilio Piñera’s literature is still relatively unknown compared to that of many of his contemporaries. His contribution to Latin American theater and to Cuban narrative is undeniably important. Similarly, he exercised great influence on a younger generation of writers with whom he came in contact during his years at the helm of Ciclón(Cyclone; 1955-59), such as playwrights José Triana (1935) and Antón Arrufat (1935), and novelists such as Severo Sarduy (1937-93) and Reinaldo Arenas (1943-92) (González Echevarría 23). And yet, Piñera’s work remains elusive; perhaps more than any other Cuban

Chapter 15 Eroticism and Homoeroticism in Martín Fierro from: Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Lockhart Melissa A.
Abstract: José Hernández (1824-86), with his Martín Fierro(1872 and 1879), is undoubtedly the emblematic author of Argentine identity. Critics and cultural essayists have been unable to resist constructing around him a series of supposedly national and spiritual values concerning what it means to be Argentine. At the same time, they have established the canonical character of a genre known as the gauchesque.² The theme of the gaucho has passed through various stages of transformation, even though not all works of the era are considered to be part of the gauchesque genre: from Hilario Ascasubi (1807-75) to Bartolomé Hidalgo (1788-1822) and

1 Better Things to Do: from: Abiding by Sri Lanka
Abstract: At the beginning of his narrative, Valentine Daniel lets the reader know how he stumbled upon Sri Lankan violence as an object of study. When he thought up his project in 1982, he had planned to write about UpCountry Tamil workers and to produce an alternative account of their history. He wanted to listen to their songs and use the lyrics to challenge the official, and quite abject, version of their story. He arrived in Sri Lanka a year later, in 1983, ʺon the heels of the worst anti-Tamil riots known to that island paradise to find that none of

4 What, to the Leftist, Is a Good Story? from: Abiding by Sri Lanka
Abstract: First, some brutal summaries of the French critique of history that perhaps belong in a previous chapter but could also serve as an introduction to this one. To Foucault (1973), history is not the working out of an objective process that the discipline merely reflects but the ground of, that which enables, the modern episteme. Take for instance, biology, a historical discipline if there ever was one: since its object is understood to change through time, it would be impossible without this ground (arche). To Althusser (1997), radically rereading Marx, the historicist notion of time as single/homogenous and continuous is

Book Title: Calibrations-Reading for the Social
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Quayson Ato
Abstract: Ato Quayson uses a method of reading he calls calibrations: a reading of literature with what lies beyond it as a way of understanding structures of transformation, process, and contradiction that inform both literature and society. He surveys texts ranging from Bob Marley lyrics, Toni Morrison’s work, Walter Benjamin’s Theses on the Philosophy of History, and Althusser’s reflections on political economy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttt71n

4 Symbolization Compulsions: from: Calibrations
Abstract: I want to pose in this chapter a set of questions to do with nation and narration. As is frequently remarked in African literary studies, there is often a cross-mapping of literature onto national politics. Early anthologies of African literature made this point an implicit organizing principle by dividing up the literature into ″national″ contexts. Scholars such as Neil Lazarus (1990) and Ato Sekyi-Otu (1996), with a more theoretical motivation and drawing on Fanon, have tried to provide a framework by which these connections could be addressed more rigorously. All this served to relate African literary criticism to what might

Book Title: Postcolonial Insecurities-India, Sri Lanka, and the Question of Nationhood
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): KRISHNA SANKARAN
Abstract: This ambitious work explores the vexed connections among nation building, ethnic identity, and regional conflict by focusing on a specific event: Indian political and military intervention in the ethnic conflict between the Sinhalese and Tamils in Sri Lanka. Postcolonial Insecurities counters the perception of “ethnicity” as an inferior and subversive principle compared with the progressive ideal of the “nation.” Krishna, in fact, shows ethnicity to be indispensable to the production and reproduction of the nation itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttt8vt

3 Essentially Tamil: from: Postcolonial Insecurities
Abstract: Ethnicity is not. Any more than the nation. I begin this chapter by evoking Frantz Fanon’s famous quote, “The Negro is not. Any more than the white man” (1967, 231), to indicate the dialectical and mutually constitutive character of ethnicity and nation under the regimes of modernity. Neither nation nor ethnicity is an immanent force, an essence within history, destined for eventual recuperation. Rather, they have to be understood in a relational framework, one that highlights their mutual indispensability and the hierarchizing effects of their interaction (Comaroff 1991). The intellectual and political privileging of the nation-state and its univocal discourse

[2] The Memory of Loss: from: Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) NICHOLS BILL
Abstract: What follows is the result of a series of exchanges conducted primarily at a distance by e-mail. I wanted to pursue a set of topics that revolved around what seemed to be nodal aspects of Péter Forgács’s overall work.These topics address the representation of historical events and the specific means by which Forgács sidesteps the conventions of both historical narratives (fiction) and traditional documentary (nonfiction). Like early documentarians in the 1920s, in that period before the practice of shaping films drawn from the practice of everyday life were commonly called documentaries, Forgács returns to the avant-garde, modernist tradition for much

[6] Waiting, Hoping, among the Ruins of All the Rest from: Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) SILVERMAN KAJA
Abstract: “Atget . . . photographed [the deserted streets of Paris] like scenes of crime,” Walter Benjamin wrote in 1939. “A crime scene, too, is deserted; it is photographed for the purpose of establishing evidence.”¹ These might not be the first words that come to mind when we are looking at Atget’s work, but they do describe the kind of photography that tends to be accorded historical value, especially when what is being reconstructed is an atrocity. Péter Forgács’s video films focus on periods of extraordinary upheaval and cultural loss—World War II and the establishment of east-bloc Communism. They also

[10] Reenvisioning the Documentary Fact: from: Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) MILLER TYRUS
Abstract: In 1992, Péter Forgács made two films that utilize, like other of his Private Hungary films, amateur film footage but also stand out in his corpus for their explicitly reflexive, metapoetic treatment and their innovative, nonnarrative formal structure: Wittgenstein TractatusandBourgeois Dictionary.Both films, in fact, share overlapping film materials, withBourgeois Dictionarygenerally presenting lengthier, contextualized versions of some passages that appear inWittgenstein Tractatusin more pontillistic, fragmentary form. Both films also, notably, explore linguistic and quasi- mathematical frameworks for organizing the found images and motivating their potential meanings. Image, voice-over, music, and text stand in a

[12] Taking the Part for the Whole: from: Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) Evans David Robert
Abstract: Péter Forgács and Tibor Szemzö first became acquainted through stage and concert productions in the 1980s, the time of Snapshot from the Island (Pillanatfelvétel a szigetröl).This 1987 record also includes another of Szemzö’s compositions,Water-Wonder N2 (Vizicsoda),which Forgács had previously used in a 1984 video work,The Golden Age (Aranykor).This was, in fact, the first occasion on which he employed Szemzö’s music. They later met as part of the Group 180(180-as Csoport),of which Szemzö was a founding member. It was here that Forgács participated (as narrator) in the performance of Frederic Rzewski’s compositionComing Together

[14] Reorchestrating History: from: Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) KINDER MARSHA
Abstract: In 2000, the Labyrinth Project (an art collective and research initiative on interactive narrative)¹ embarked on a collaboration with Hungarian media artist Péter Forgács to turn his sixty-minute, single-channel film, The Danube Exodus,into a large scale, multiscreen immersive installation. Forgács’s film (which was aired on European television in 1997) provided intriguing narrative material: a network of compelling stories, a mysterious river captain whose motives remain unknown, a Central European setting full of rich historical associations, and a hypnotic musical score that created a mesmerizing tone.

Book Title: Compelling Visuality-The Work of Art in and out of History
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Zwijnenberg Robert
Abstract: Takes up the commonly unexplored question of what is actually present in art—what aspects have survived the vicissitudes of time. International and interdisciplinary, this volume conducts readers into a discussion of the significance of personal response to works of art. Contributors: F. R. Ankersmit, Mieke Bal, Oskar Bätschmann, Georges Didi-Huberman, Michael Ann Holly, Donald Preziosi, Renée van de Vall.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttc70

Art History after Aesthetics: from: Compelling Visuality
Author(s) Farago Claire
Abstract: The discipline of art history has always aimed to do justice to the complexity of works of art in their compelling visuality, taking the relationship between particular works of art and their individual beholders as the field’s primary object of investigation. In this respect, this book is no different from any traditional art historical inquiry. The following essays, however, articulate questions that contemporary art historians generally dismiss as ahistorical or anachronistic or—worse yet—philosophical, implying that “anything goes” when a work of art is approached “philosophically.” In her contribution to this volume, Michael Ann Holly cogently articulates the conundrum

CHAPTER ONE Ecstatic Aesthetics: from: Compelling Visuality
Author(s) Bal Mieke
Abstract: The image of a royal robe with ample folds cannot today but evoke that historical aesthetic and its contemporary counterpart that we associate with Gilles Deleuze (1993), with the idea of the fold. The image is thoroughly baroque. Walter Benjamin, whose work on German baroque drama has inspired extensive philosophical commentary on the baroqueness of his thought as exemplary of modernity in general, is here speaking not about art but about language.¹ Comparing the task of the translator with that of the poet, Benjamin creates a powerful image of the translator’s product as both rich (royal) and encompassing (ample), expansive

CHAPTER SEVEN Mourning and Method from: Compelling Visuality
Author(s) Holly Michael Ann
Abstract: My principal preoccupation as an art historian (actually as a historiographer, which means that I am a scholar of the intellectual history of the history of art) has always been a philosophical one: why do we write about works of visual art in the first place? Why do subjects ( us) need to talk about objects? What kind of a dialogue, even game, is taking place? In my book of 1996,Past Looking: Historical Imagination and the Rhetoric of the Image,¹ I tried to make a case for the variety of ways that works of art both literally and metaphorically prefigure

CHAPTER EIGHT A Guide to Interpretation: from: Compelling Visuality
Author(s) Brouwers Ton
Abstract: Art historical hermeneutics concerns itself with the well-founded interpretation of visual artworks.

1 Toward an Activity-Centered Approach to Aljamiado-Morisco Narrative from: Covert Gestures
Abstract: Literary critic Frank Kermode has argued, in an essay dealing with the relation between time and narrative, that “it is not expected of critics as it is of poets that they should help us to make sense of our lives; they are bound only to attempt the lesser feat of making sense of the ways we try to make sense of our lives” (2000, 3). The present book, a work of literary criticism, investigates the ways in which members of Morisco communities in sixteenth- and early seventeenth-century Castile and Aragon made use of handwritten traditional narratives to make sense of

4 The Prophet Is Born, Muslims Are Made from: Covert Gestures
Abstract: In the previous chapters, I have mapped out a basic theoretical framework for an activity-centered approach to aljamiado-moriscoliterature. Beginning with a discussion of the inherent interdisciplinarity of this mode of literary analysis, I concluded by defining what it means to place Morisco scribes and readers, as human agents, at the center of textual study. Rooted in what Gary Saul Morson has termed the “human dimension of time” (1994, 10), the activity-centered approach I am suggesting focuses on the uses to which Morisco readers and scribes putaljamiadotexts within their social world and the ways in which culturally embedded

6 Language Ideologies and Poetic Form from: Covert Gestures
Abstract: One of the most perplexing questions in aljamiado-moriscostudies is also one of the most fundamental: why did Moriscos produce texts inaljamiadoin the first place? Given the risks inherent in such an enterprise, it is easy to see the use of Arabic script for the production of narrative and devotional works as a practice that could backfire spectacularly, given the energetic practices of the Inquisition in Castile and Aragon. As an example of the dangers inherent in the production and possession of such texts, we may glance briefly at the case of Luis de Córdoba, a jeweler from

Conclusions from: Covert Gestures
Abstract: When we study aljamiado-moriscoliterature from the perspective of the human agents that engaged it, temporal frameworks, such as specific times in the Islamic calendar or hours of the day and the devotional practices that correspond to them, can take center stage. This feature is of course not limited toaljamiado-moriscoliterature; however, it is such a salient feature of the handwritten texts of the Moriscos of Castile and Aragon that I have chosen to focus upon it throughout the present book.

Book Title: American Prophecy-Race and Redemption in American Political Culture
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Shulman George
Abstract: Prophecy is the fundamental idiom of American politics—a biblical rhetoric about redeeming the crimes, suffering, and promise of a special people. Yet political theorists rarely analyze American prophecy and its great practitioners—from Frederick Douglass and Henry Thoreau to Martin Luther King and Toni Morrison. This paradox is at the heart of American Prophecy, a work in which George Shulman critiques the political and racial meaning of American prophetic rhetoric.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttm2n

4. James Baldwin and the Racial State of Exception: from: American Prophecy
Abstract: Like King, Baldwin is shaped profoundly by his experience in the black church, and he forges a language of love, suffering, and redemption that is both personal and political.¹ Like King, he exemplifies a “double-consciousness” toward both whites and blacks, whose entwined fates he can address partly because he refuses to be wholly defined by either. Like King, he works through a complex attachment to an “American” identity he links both to white supremacy and to a “promise” of overcoming ascription by “race, caste, and class.” Like King, he invests in African Americans a special responsibility for voicing and redeeming

Conclusion: from: American Prophecy
Abstract: I have sought in this book to bring together political theory and a version of American studies by placing central concerns of the European canon into conversation with a politics organized by racial domination and biblical language. This has meant displacing philosophical modes of apprehending politics by rhetorical practices and literary genres. Bringing political theory into conversation with an American modernity shaped by race, religion, and genre, and not only by capital, normalization, and disenchantment, also expands the vocabulary of references and theories for analyzing politics. I then could trace how prophecy is reworked by critics of white supremacy to

5. Pain, Memory, and Religious Suffering: from: Intangible Materialism
Abstract: In this chapter, I describe the relations among pain, memory, and religious suffering. In doing so, I take up, in another register, the physiology of voices I examined in Tourette syndrome, the communality and semiotics I examined in the evolution of the work of our hands, and the hierarchy of materialism I am tracing throughout Intangible Materialismaltogether. This is clear in the particular nature of pain, which, as Ariel Glucklich says, “is conscious by definition” (2001, 96; see Jackson 2002, 18, 148) even while, as Roselyne Rey notes, the “anatomical and physiological foundation” of pain makes it in important

3 Visual Agency and Ideological Fantasy in Three Films by Zhang Yimou from: Narratives of Agency
Author(s) Yue Ming-Bao
Abstract: Among China’s diverse group of internationally acclaimed Fifth Generation directors, only Zhang Yimou has managed to make films that capture and maintain the West’s undivided and unprecedented attention.¹ Although it is also true that Zhang’s fellow director Chen Kaige has launched a potential Academy-award-winning epic with his latest film, Farewell to My Concubine, his work in general has not been greeted with quite the same degree of enthusiasm.² For viewers familiar with Zhang’s hallmark artistic obsession with eroticism, this obvious discrepancy in audience reception is indicative of the powerful lure of Orientalism long thought dispelled, but now causing Hollywood critics

INTRODUCTION: from: Out of Time
Abstract: The fundamental theoretical effort of the twentieth century was the attempt to integrate time into thought. Though there were anticipations of this effort in early centuries, the twentieth century is the époque when concern for time comes to the foreground across disparate intellectual and cultural arenas. This effort did not simply take time as an object of thought but instead worked to reveal the intrinsic temporality of both thought and being. Time had to become a matter of form and not just content. This theoretical endeavor manifested itself from the novels of Virginia Woolf and Marcel Proust to Albert Einstein’s

Book Title: The Brain Is the Screen-Deleuze and the Philosophy of Cinema
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Flaxman Gregory
Abstract: In the nearly twenty years since their publication, Gilles Deleuze’s books about cinema have proven as daunting as they are enticing—a new aesthetics of film, one equally at home with Henri Bergson and Wim Wenders, Friedrich Nietzsche and Orson Welles, that also takes its place in the philosopher’s immense and difficult oeuvre. With this collection, the first to focus solely and extensively on Deleuze’s cinematic work, the nature and reach of that work finally become clear. Composed of a substantial introduction, twelve original essays produced for this volume, and a new English translation of a personal, intriguing, and little-known interview with Deleuze on his cinema books, The Brain Is the Screen is a sustained engagement with Deleuze’s cinematic philosophy that leads to a new view of the larger confrontation of philosophy with cinematic images. Contributors: Éric Alliez, Dudley Andrew, Peter Canning, Tom Conley, András Bálint Kovács, Gregg Lambert, Laura U. Marks, Jean-Clet Martin, Angelo Restivo, Martin Schwab, and François Zourabichvili.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttq6p

Chapter 2 Cinema Year Zero from: The Brain Is the Screen
Author(s) Flaxman Gregory
Abstract: Ever since Plato′s Republic, philosophy seems to have been the labor of ″master builders″: Descartes demolishes all prosaic assumptions about the world to lay the groundwork for his first principles, Kant fashions the exquisite proportions of his firstCritiquesas a propaedeutic to metaphysics, and even Hegel′s professed dislike of philosophical preludes grounds hisPhenomenology of Spirit.² We have come to expect our philosophers to build by design, pausing at the outset to reflect on the construction, and so it is all the more astonishing how Gilles Deleuze opens his cinema books. Never mind the brief, almost capricious preface that

Chapter 4 The Eye of Montage: from: The Brain Is the Screen
Author(s) McMahon Melissa
Abstract: Perhaps we will teach, in two hundred years, that twentieth-century philosophy ended with two hieroglyphics: The Movement-ImageandThe Time-Image. A misunderstanding surrounds these books: they rightly fascinate film lovers, even though they are expressly books of philosophy. As for philosophers, they find little interest in them, or else read them while leaving cinema aside, even though Deleuze considered that he could not have written them except through contact with cinema. What could have determined, in Deleuze′s work, such an encounter between philosophy and cinema?

Chapter 5 The Film History of Thought from: The Brain Is the Screen
Author(s) Hervey Sándor
Abstract: The purpose of this essay is not to attempt a general reconstruction of Deleuze′s philosophy of cinema, but only to shed light on the traces of a certain—possibly unintentional, sedimentary, and in any event undeveloped—way of thinking about the history of cinema in his work. One has to agree with the opinion of virtually all serious commentators on Deleuze that the purpose behind the two volumes this philosopher wrote on cinema is not purely film-theoretic, nor is it directed at the history of cinema. Rather, Deleuze turns to the cinema as a means of expression for certain philosophical

Chapter 6 Into the Breach: from: The Brain Is the Screen
Author(s) Restivo Angelo
Abstract: Gilles Deleuze′s work on the cinema is marked by a grand caesura, not only conceptually (movement-image giving way to time-image) and ″historiographically″ (World War II as the name for the historical moment of this giving way), but also, even, materially. Because this division materializes—one might even go so far as to say ″dramatizes,″ or ″flaunts″—what some consider to be the work′s major flaw, an insufficient grounding in history, one could argue that perhaps this is a deliberate strategy. Perhaps, that is, the ″space″ between the classical cinema and the modern cinema occurs because what happened between the two

2 Disciplining Knowledge: from: Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Stanton Michael
Abstract: Design teaching in architecture school often begins with the cube as its first topic. The same on all sides, the cube appears neutral, without hierarchies. Its only direction that of gravity, it seems to be free from symbolic content or technical constraints. It is white, pure, available yet autonomous, waiting to be filled or excavated. Like all designed forms, this one is a materialization of ideology, for the cube personifies the subject of teaching, the new student, as much as it is the first object of architectural work. Its apparently mute regularity points the direction that architectural knowledge is meant

3 On the Practices of Representing and Knowing Architecture from: Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Piotrowski Andrzej
Abstract: Designing architecture is a unique epistemological practice, a unique way of knowing resulting from a complex process of conceptual negotiations. Architects not only solve technical problems and create aesthetic objects but facilitate a process in which visions of a building acquire a particular symbolic or cultural sense. While working on a project, a designer must develop multiple architectural proposals, understand the complexity of issues they manifest, and negotiate them with the parties involved in the project—clients, local authorities, planners, consultants, contractors, bankers, and many others. A designer produces these versions in order to understand what kind of a design

Communist State Theory from: Labor of Dionysus
Abstract: “STATEMONOPOLYcapitalism consists in the subordination of the State apparatus to the capitalist monopolies.” Ever since Stalin posed this definition for the Third International in the 1930s, the official current of the workers' movement has taken few steps forward in developing the theory of the State, and has thus neglected the analytical tasks necessary to adjust the political course of international communism in light of the changes at work in the capitalist State in response to the great economic crises. (See chapter 2.) The mechanical and instrumental conception of the relationship between monopoly capital and the structure of the State has

Postmodern Law and the Withering of Civil Society from: Labor of Dionysus
Abstract: WITH THE end of the 1970s, there also ended particular conceptions of worker subjectivity, class struggle, and leftist politics in general. The 1980s seemed in many respects one long celebration of the definitive victory of capital over labor, from the neoliberal economic revolutions of Reagan and Thatcher in the early eighties to the “death of communism” dramatized by the fall of the Berlin Wall in 1989. Labor seemed to disappear from the scene while capital assumed the role of the primary productive force. The master had finally put an end to that annoying struggle and simply done away with the

1 Their Secret Elect from: Without Offending Humans
Abstract: “The philosopher, the one the animal does not look at” . . . When, for the first time, I heard Jacques Derrida speak at the Collège de philosophie, directed at the time by Jean Wahl, I reacted, all things being relative, as Malebranche did upon reading Descartes’s Treatise on Man:“His beating heart sometimes forced him to stop his reading,” writes Fontenelle. From that moment on, I did not take leave of this work nor of this man, even if it would often cause me distress to place myself in certain of his footsteps.

4 Rhetorics of Dehumanization from: Without Offending Humans
Abstract: Alphonse Toussenel, a nineteenth-century author from Angers, left to posterity two books that were each extremely popular: on the one hand, The Jewish Kings of Our Era: A History of Financial Feudalismand on the other,The Spirit of Beasts,which includedPassional Ornithology: The Birds of France,andPassional Zoology: Mammals of Franceand appeared between 1853 and 1855.¹ It would seem that the xenophobic themes of the first work can be found in the second, in a certainly minor mode, but as if natural history invested them with a new legitimacy. Should one hastily leave this production to

6 The Pathetic Pranks of Bio-Art from: Without Offending Humans
Abstract: There are certain artists that mean to mark the end of the avantgarde by setting up their studios in laboratories and working with geneticists so as to act on the mechanisms of life. Artistically modified organisms, writes Eduardo Kac, one of these artists to whose work I will be paying particular attention, “are going to become our familiar companions.”¹ He adds that “artists could usefully increase the planet’s biodiversity by inventing new forms of life.” For these artists, it is a question of replacing the representation of life with its modification and of exhibiting the results of these détournementsin

Book Title: Chaucer’s Queer Nation- Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Burger Glenn
Abstract: Bringing the concerns of queer theory and postcolonial studies to bear on Chaucer’s Canterbury Tales, this ambitious book compels a rethinking not only of this most canonical of works, but also of questions of sexuality and gender in pre- and postmodern contexts, of issues of modernity and nation in historiography, and even of the enterprise of historiography itself. Medieval Cultures Series, volume 34
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttss4

Introduction from: Chaucer’s Queer Nation
Abstract: Any book about a single author—especially one like this that treats the work of the first “great author” in the English literary tradition and whose critique situates itself within current sexual politics—raises particular and urgent theoretical questions. Why Chaucer? Why now? Why Chaucer’squeer nation?

Introduction from: Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: Although the illusionof the literary text’s autonomy as well as that of the work of art in general arises from the Enlightenment’s emancipatory project (that is, the attempt to establish a science, morality, and art answerable respectively only to scientific, ethical, and aesthetic norms), literary criticism did not begin to isolate its object of study until very recently. Such has been, since the European Renaissance, the influence of historicism, in its various modalities, and the identification of philology with its objectives and methods. It was thus in the twentieth century—and under the impact exerted almost simultaneously by structural

Chapter 3 Autobiography and Ritual Discourse: from: Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: During the years of Franco’s dictatorship, an anecdote circulated in Spain that to mind both the intellectual training and the working methods of the Spanish Civil Guard. The post commander of a city receives this telegram from provincial authorities: “Impending seismic activity—epicenter in your town-take appropriate measures.” Three days later—after having had his men work unremittingly, we suppose—the post commander answers his chief’s communiqué, also telegram: “Seismic activity quelled—Epicenter and his men arrested.”

Chapter 4 Narration and Argumentation in Autobiographical Discourse from: Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: The inclusion of autobiography in the narrative genre is not as evident as it may seem. By establishing two systems or “two different levels of utterance” (“history” and “discourse”) that concurrently distribute the French verb tenses and grammatical persons, Emile Benveniste (1971) expressly classifies autobiography as discourse, along with “correspondence, memoirs, plays, didactic works, in short, all the genres in which someone addresses himself to someone, proclaims himself as the speaker, and organizes what he says in the category of a person” (209). Historical utterance, on the contrary, which was once defined as “narration of past events” and is presently

Chapter 6 Discourse Pragmatics and Reciprocity of Perspectives: from: Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: Perhaps their working on language and on the imaginary defines the specificity of literary practices, their social dimension (and social role) as well as the confluence of different discursive formations in the literary text. It does not follow, however, that the literary text organizes itself in a purely mechanistic way. On the contrary, it is located in dialogical interaction with a concrete sociohistorical conjuncture, is mediated by various ideological instances, and participates in the contradictory network of the discursive formations of its surroundings. Thus a contextual boundary must be established that might allow an understanding of the “grand dialogue” in

Chapter 7 The Antimodernization of Spain from: Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: The term antimodernization may call to mind the currently fashionable maneuver whereby to the poorly defined concept of “modernity” is opposed a concept that derives from it— “postmodernity,” which is as poorly defined as the framework from which it originates. One does not always credit Spanish (a language where “isms” abound) with being able to distinguish between the terms of this contemporary debate and those forged by the historiography of Hispanic literatures, which has accustomed us to opposing an aesthetic movement known as modernism to what has been called the Generation of 1898, an ideological movement (as if aesthetics and

2 Turning Inward: from: Notes on Nowhere
Abstract: Depending upon the point of view from which the ideal collective is conceived, the political effect of the narrative practices that support the traditional form of utopian literature can vary dramatically. In the first part of this chapter, I examine how utopian logic operates in traditional works of utopian literature that express a more or less socialist agenda; in the second part, I explore a novel in which this traditional utopian literary form has been adapted to reflect and support a contemporary feminist vision. My study of the utopian literary tradition in this chapter is not intended to be exhaustive;

Chapter 3 Narrative and Verbal Art: from: Narrative as Communication
Abstract: So-called literary narrative is, at least in modern times and in urban, industrial societies, one of the grand categories of narrative communication, so central indeed, as we have already noted, that it has come to obfuscate the study and relevance of narrativeness in other semiotic systems, for example, film, television, advertising, photography, and drama, and appears as a model or a key antagonist for historiography, philosophy, and scientific Discourses. We must therefore try to determine the specific weight and implication of the concept “literary” in phrases like “literary narrative” and “literary work of art”; in other words, we have to

Chapter 8 Narrative Economy: from: Narrative as Communication
Abstract: At this stage of our inquiry, should we see narrative as a living species, we know probably a bit better how it is built, its anatomy and its locomotion, as well as some aspects of its physiology, but we have formulated only some very general hypotheses about its goals and motivations, its processes of reproduction, and its relations with the environment —“passive” adaptation and “active” modification. In other words, we have left value, demand, work, investment, profit, and interest on our horizon. This does not mean that such notions and, consequently, the metabolism and ecology of the narrative species are

Chapter 9 Narrative within Genres and Media from: Narrative as Communication
Abstract: Between the formation/cognition of narrative discourse and the construction of narrative significance, there is still one important mediation to consider: that of genre as technê and sociohistorical constraint. In fact, if we had not taken genre into account, implicitly at least, every time we studied individual examples of acts of narrative communication and their texts, we would have made an intolerable qualitative leap from the level of generality at which our method of analysis was situated to particular concrete situations. The purpose of this chapter is to put genre to work as efficiently as possible within the process of theorization

Chapter 10 What Tales Tell Us to Do and Think, and How (Narrative and Didactic Constructions of Meaning) from: Narrative as Communication
Abstract: I have hitherto described textual structures and the artistic communication system, among others, essentially as sets of material data and networks that constitute the preconditions for the formation of “primary” messages, that is, for the mental elaboration of relatively autonomous possible worlds. Such worlds could be considered mutually interchangeable in the eyes of an ideal, abstract “subject,” since they were approached on the basis of their production rules, not from the viewpoint of their desirability. Similarly, a nation’s industrial equipment and infrastructure can be described as able to produce heavy machinery and high tech means of transportation, without taking into

Book Title: Bad Aboriginal Art-Tradition, Media, and Technological Horizons
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Michaels Eric
Abstract: This is the account of the author‘s period of residence and work with the Walpiri Aborigines of western Central Australia, where he studied the impact of television on these remote communities. Sharp, exact, and unrelentingly honest, this volume records with an extraordinary combination of distance and immersion the intervention of technology into a remote Aboriginal community and that community’s forays into broadcasting.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttvck

Foreword from: Bad Aboriginal Art
Author(s) Hebdige Dick
Abstract: ERIC MICHAELS’s work with — to take a different example — the inventive, resilient, and varied Warlpiri Aborigines of western Central Australia effects the drastic transformation of perspective envisaged in this passage by James Clifford. Even so, the collection of essays, lectures, and book reviews assembled here hardly qualifies as ethnography pure and simple, still less as ethnography “proper.” Although he spent more than three years researching the impact of TV on this remote Aboriginal community at Yuendumu, Eric Michaels never stayed long enough in one place, figuratively speaking, to establish a career as a professional anthropologist. Prevented from joining the “academic

Introduction from: Bad Aboriginal Art
Author(s) Langton Marcia
Abstract: THE WORK of Eric Michaels straddles both anthropology and cultural criticism. His major contributions to these modes of inquiry were his descriptive and theoretical writings on cultural specificity in Aboriginal aesthetics and production. In a tangential way, his work follows on from that of N. D. Munn (1973), another scholar from the United States who worked with Warlpiri people in the late 1950s and early 1960s. But Michaels’s analysis is unique in that it addresses how Warlpiri people make video and television, and discusses the specific Aboriginal cultural modes of sociality that are brought to bear in these endeavors. He

A Primer of Restrictions on Picture– Taking in Traditional Areas of Aboriginal Australia [1986] from: Bad Aboriginal Art
Abstract: TRADITIONAL PEOPLES’ first encounters with photography sometimes lead them to conclude that the camera is a dangerous, magical instrument capable of stealing some essential part of their being, causing illness or death. Generally such anecdotes are not explained but get filed away with other exotic superstitions held by curious primitives, leaving these people to sort out their own relationship to cameras, photographs, film, and now video. Traditional people sometimes follow through by taming the magical properties of recording media. For example, when missionaries and health workers banned the preservation and display of the bones of dead ancestors in Melanesian houses,

CHAPTER ONE A Polygraph of Architectural Phenomenology from: Architecture's Historical Turn
Abstract: The nature of architectural phenomenology makes it challenging to historicize. That it presented itself as a new way of doing architectural history requires that one contend with its historiographical conventions without succumbing to them. Yet afterarchitectural phenomenology, it is not possible to simply approach it through the traditional historiographical frameworks it undermined and reconfigured. Its very nature and legacy defy that operation. It disappears under the lenses of architectural histories based on personal biography, self-identified groups, individual schools, institutions, geopolitical borders, or architectural styles.

CHAPTER 4 “De’ varie romanze volgare” from: Assembling the Lyric Self
Abstract: When Guittone d’Arezzo ordered his individual poems into a longer macrotext, strung his pearls into a necklace, he set a precedent. There is a good deal of evidence in the canzoniere Vaticano Latino 3793 (ms. V)—the largest and most important extant codex of early Italian lyric, from the end of the thirteenth or beginning of the fourteenth century—that a number of other Duecento poets also experimented with macrotextual organization. I have already mentioned V as the codex in which Guittone’s work is ordered into sequences that correspond in part to their ordering in ms. L. L and V

CHAPTER 5 Guiraut Riquier from: Assembling the Lyric Self
Abstract: Let us temporarily abandon the thriving literary culture of Florence and neighboring cities and make a geographic leap back northward and westward to examine the work of a troubadour who frequently took as his subject matter the decline of Occitan culture in his time. Guiraut Riquier flourished from 1254 to 1290, roughly contemporary with Guittone d’Arezzo, and also appears to have compiled his work into an independent book.¹ At the bottom right-hand corner of folio 288r of troubadour ms. C (Bibliothèque Nationale Française 856), a neatly copied anthology of more than 1,200 troubadour poems compiled in the south of France

CHAPTER 6 Dante’s “Vita nova” from: Assembling the Lyric Self
Abstract: The libelloof young Dante Alighieri, composed in the last decade of the thirteenth century, has much in common with Guiraut Riquier’s nearly contemporary “libre,” especially in its deliberate self-positioning in relation to previous tradition (or, in the case of Dante, to a number of previous traditions). But Dante’s small book is forward-, rather than backward-looking; Dante saw his poetry as the culmination and fulfillment of his predecessors’ poetics, and as a promise of something greater, as completing their works in the same way that the New Testament was thought to have completed the Old—a figural reading of literary

CHAPTER 8 Petrarch’s “Canzoniere” from: Assembling the Lyric Self
Abstract: When, in the second half of the fourteenth century, Francesco Petrarca assembled the work to which he gave the Latin title Rerum vulgarium fragmenta—and to which I refer by its more informal (and much later) vernacular name, theCanzoniere—he was not primarily producing a script intended for subsequent vocal or musical realization (though the poems in it have frequently been performed musically), nor was he writing an abstract, “ideal” text designed to be reproduced in countless printed editions (though he produced that, too).¹ What Petrarch was chiefly concerned with creating was not a means, but an end: a

Conclusion from: Assembling the Lyric Self
Abstract: According to Leonard Barkan, “It could be argued that all of Petrarch’s works amount to an extended act of introspection and autobiography,” and “Petrarch’s works probably represent the first sustained attempt at self-consciousness in Western writing” (206). He goes on to say that among the works, these remarks particularly apply to the Rime sparse. I cite him not because such observations are exceptionally original or insightful, but because they are typical. Petrarch is frequently given credit for the invention of a subjective, personalized literature that paved the way for a “Renaissance” or “modern” conception of autonomous human identity.¹ Yet the

Pro Patria Mori from: Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Fradenburg L. O. Aranye
Abstract: Imagining community is a work of desire, as Benedict Anderson pointed out when referring to the love people feel for the nations they dream into being.¹ Communities—their social structures, architecture, marketing practices, secret places—are not only imagined but also made by desire (Deleuze and Guattari, Anti-Oedipus, 6). They are our “territorializations,” our complex and shifting ecologies ofhabitusand habitation.² We participate in the histories of their enjoyment; we are there (where else?) when they assemble and fall apart, take (over) place and dwindle, in the course of their attempts to get as close tojouissance(impossible or

Latin England from: Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Galloway Andrew
Abstract: Thorlac Turville-Petre’s England the Nation, linking English literary communities and anthologies with the emerging national status of the English language, calls out for a succession of appendices—or rather, in the spirit of his nondogmatic and open-ended work, with its provocatively pre-Ricardian stopping point, many further chapters, in what deserves to be a vast, collaborative project assessing the ideologies and contexts of national community in late medieval English-speaking areas.¹ A simple encompassing claim about nationalism in the period will not be satisfactory, but the time is long past when we can make a flat declaration that a pan-European Christian ideology

Piers Plowman and the National Noetic of Edward III from: Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Smith D. Vance
Abstract: I begin this essay by admitting my wariness about the ethics of thinking nationally, thinking of the nation as the ground for thinking, the mnemonic place filled with the disciplinary imagery of its sovereign community. I’m skeptical because of what must be obliviated in memorializing the nation—for that is what we do when we think of a nation, of the work of its dead that goes on in us, we who must continue to reanimate them¹—not just the suppression of difference but the suppression of alternatives to the national noetic, the set of changing narratives and images that

Afterword: from: Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Turville-Petre Thorlac
Abstract: In writing England the NationI was concerned (I now think overconcerned) to demonstrate that the concept of national identity was available to writers in the fourteenth century. This seemed to me—as I suspect it does to everyone who knows anything about the Middle Ages—undeniable, though frequently denied by modernists who work on nationalism, who assert that it was a phenomenon that arose in the nineteenth century, or the late eighteenth, or the mid-sixteenth. More recently Adrian Hastings inThe Construction of Nationhoodhas taken a broader look at the development of nationalism, locating the earliest expressions of

Book Title: The Ethos of Pluralization- Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): CONNOLLY WILLIAM E.
Abstract: How plural, really, is pluralism today? In this book a prominent political theorist reworks the traditional pluralist imagination, rendering it more inclusive and responsive to new drives to pluralization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttv41s

INTRODUCTION from: From Utopia to Apocalypse
Abstract: This book is a study of revolutionary change. Inasmuch as it focuses on a set of narratives belonging predominantly to the genres of science fiction and fantasy, this study undertakes to examine the hypothetical transformations and imaginary upheavals overtaking fictitious individuals and societies. Yet the underlying contention of this work is that science fiction and fantasy, in particular narratives drawn from media often dismissed as unserious and trivial, such as the comic book and the science fiction film, are capable of achieving profound and probing insights into the principal dilemmas of political life. Indeed, this book explores such themes as

2 THE DEFENSE OF NECESSITY from: From Utopia to Apocalypse
Abstract: Toward the end of his response to Alexandre Kojève’s essay “Tyranny and Wisdom,” Leo Strauss gives a somewhat jocular twist to Marx and Engels’s famous call for the proletariat to unite and seize for themselves the reins of power. “Warriors and workers of all countries, unite, while there is time, to prevent the coming of the ‘realm of freedom.’ Defend, with might and main, if it needs to be defended, ‘the realm of necessity.’”¹ To a reader unfamiliar with the grounds of the debate between Strauss and Kojève over the meaning of Xenophon’s dialogue, “Hiero, or Tyrannicus,” the injunction to

Book Title: Avatars of Story- Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Ryan Marie-Laure
Abstract: Marie-Laure Ryan moves beyond literary works to examine other media, especially electronic narrative forms, revealing how story, a form of meaning that transcends cultures and media, achieves diversity by presenting itself under multiple avatars. Ryan considers texts such as the reality television show Survivor, the film The Truman Show, and software-driven hypertext fiction, and anticipates the time when media will provide new ways to experience stories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttv622

7. Web-Based Narrative, Multimedia, and Interactive Drama from: Avatars of Story
Abstract: In the early to mid-1990s, computer systems underwent two developments that deeply affected digital textuality: the ability to encode and transmit visual and aural data efficiently; and the ability to connect personal computers into a world-spanning network. The textual consequences of these new features are publicly posted on millions of Internet pages. Though Web pages implement the same hypertextual architecture as Storyspace fiction, they differ significantly from the latter in their linking philosophy and graphic appearance. From a visual point of view, the major design characteristic of Web pages is what Bolter and Grusin have called their “hypermediated structure”: the

Book Title: The Quay Brothers-Into a Metaphysical Playroom
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): BUCHAN SUZANNE
Abstract: This work is the first thorough analysis of the creative oeuvre of the Quay Brothers. Known for their animation shorts that rely on puppetry, miniatures, and stop-motion techniques, their fiercely idiosyncratic films are fertile fields for Suzanne Buchan’s engaging descriptions and provocative insights into the Quays’ art—and into the art of independent puppet animation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttv79m

1. AUTHENTIC TRAPPERS IN METAPHYSICAL PLAYROOMS from: The Quay Brothers
Abstract: To watch any film from the Quay Brothers is to enter a complicity of furtive glances, choreographed shadows, and a mélange of motifs and tropes. Their opus exhibits an instantly recognizable and often emulated style, a shifting composite of chiaroscuro and an assemblage of obscure objects and fragmented, skeletal narrative structures. Their works are closer to music than to dialogue, closer to poetry than to literature, closer to experimental interior monologue than to conventional fictional narrative. The first-time viewer of any of the Quay Brothers’ films is often baffled by what seems to be the filmmakers’ apparent unconcern for coherence

2. PALIMPSESTS, FRAGMENTS, VITALIST AFFINITIES from: The Quay Brothers
Abstract: Now that we are equipped with a sense of the Quays’ creative origins and their trajectory from the United States to London, from illustration to the moving image, this chapter will unfold some of the literary, thematic, and aesthetic origins that the later work commencing with Street of Crocodilesengages with: literature being a main instigator of the “twist point” that incited a significant shift in their aesthetics. What is striking about the Quays’ films is the combination of references they choose, ranging from painting, early optical experiments, puppet theater, literature, surrealism, expressionism, and Baroque architecture to musical structures, Polish

8. THESE THINGS NEVER HAPPEN BUT ARE ALWAYS from: The Quay Brothers
Abstract: This chapter explores the Quay Brothers’ two completed feature films as both variations on and culminations of their other creative works. It also proffers a summary of their poetics in works completed when this book was finished. The chapter’s (and this book’s) conclusion is an open one; the Quays have projects currently in development and no doubt more will follow. In 1995, they completed their first full-length live-action film, Institute Benjamenta, or This Dream People Call Human Life. TheStille Nachtshorts,The Comb, and the dance films had been a trying ground for the transition from animation to live-action

CONCLUSION from: The Quay Brothers
Abstract: The Quay Brothers’ live-action and puppet animation films are informed by a conceptual dialectics rooted in profound knowledge of the histories and aesthetics of painting, illustration, performance, literature, and architecture, including the –isms of modernist art practice, poetry, and cinema. The eclectic iconography of the Quays’ cinematic world—its meandering narrative structures and unique cosmogony—hinders an assured or exclusive classification to a genre or a movement. If anything, their works belong to a hybrid category of poetic-experimental film that operates at a liminal threshold between live action and animation. In a discussion of the spectator’s sensual and emotional response,

7 Playing Through: from: Gameplay Mode
Abstract: In this chapter, I will examine several alternative and critical new media projects taking computer game systems or practices as their major medium and/or theme. This will enable me to explore some instances of aesthetic and critical reproduction of mainstream computer game forms and technocultural practices for what they say about these, and for what they indicate of the future of aesthetically experimental and critical computer game projects. My examination of these works will initiate consideration of the question of critical simulation raised by several theorists, most notably in the arena of computer games by Gonzalo Frasca, who has called

Introduction from: Strategies of Deconstruction
Abstract: It is often said that Jacques Derrida’s early critiques of Husserl and Saussure provide the most carefully argued introductions to his “deconstructive” approach to the tradition of Western philosophy. Indeed, it has been said that one virtue of his early texts of the late 1960s is that in them Derrida still argued. Many writers on Derrida have found that his texts generally measure up to the highest standards of scholarly rigor. Thus in the preface to the English translation ofLa voix et le phénomène, Newton Garver writes that “Derrida’s critique of Husserl is a first-class piece of analytical work

Chapter 1 Speech and Phenomena: from: Strategies of Deconstruction
Abstract: The Introduction to Speech and Phenomenasketches out the general framework within which the argument of the book will unfold, and it must be read carefully with an eye both to the general direction Derrida will take and to the specific strategies he will use. Here he has two main concerns. First, he briefly emphasizes thecontinuityone finds in Husserl’s work, in spite of its extensive development and transformation over the years. This emphasis is crucial, as Derrida will concentrate much of his energy on the first paragraphs of the first of theLogical Investigations, which appeared in 1901

Chapter 10 Saussure from: Strategies of Deconstruction
Abstract: The deconstructive reading of Ferdinand de Saussure’s Cours de la linguistique généraleplays a crucial role inOf Grammatology, for in Saussure Derrida thinks that he can attack “the entire uncritical tradition which [Saussure] inherits” (OG, 67/46). If it can be shown that Saussure’s work is governed by a “coherence of desire producing itself in a near-oneiric way . . . through a contradictory logic,” this will “already give us the assured means of broaching the deconstruction of thegreatest totality—the concept of theepistēmēand logocentric metaphysics—within which are produced, without ever posing the radical question of

Signature from: Strategies of Deconstruction
Abstract: Derrida has an undeniable talent for putting—or at least seeming to put—his pen on important and difficult issues, and for doing so in ways that, at least on first reading, seem to be both enlightening and troubling. In addition, there can be no doubt that Derrida can be a penetrating reader: his work on the poetry of Paul Celan in "Shibboleth" (Derrida 1986a) and on Francis Ponge in Signéponge(Derrida 1984c) are ample proof of this. While both of these, and especially the latter, are quite clearly performances in their own right, one rarely has the sense that

Book Title: Striking Beauty-A Philosophical Look at the Asian Martial Arts
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): ALLEN BARRY
Abstract: Striking Beautyexplains the relationship between Asian martial arts and the Chinese philosophical traditions of Confucianism, Buddhism, and Daoism, in addition to Sunzi'sArt of War. It connects martial arts practice to the Western concepts of mind-body dualism and materialism, sports aesthetics, and the ethics of violence. The work ameliorates Western philosophy's hostility toward the body, emphasizing the pleasure of watching and engaging in martial arts, along with their beauty and the ethical problem of their violence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/alle17272

8 THE AERIAL VIEW from: Counter-Archive
Abstract: If the microscopic view provided a privileged vantage point for rediscovering the everyday in early French film theory, then its opposite, the aerial view, held a similarly privileged role in the rediscovery of the earth for human geography. In the above passage from Jean Brunhes’ major work, Géographie humaine (1910), he summons his readers like a latter-day Jules Verne to accompany him on an “imaginary” ride above the earth, where the “facts” of human geography will for the first time appear fully to the human eye, or “better still,” to the “photographic plate.” Much like the visual revolution announced by

Book Title: Roberto Bolaño's Fiction-An Expanding Universe
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): ANDREWS CHRIS
Abstract: Andrews provides new readings and interpretations of Bolaño's novels, including 2666,The Savage Detectives, andBy Night in Chilewhile at the same time examining the ideas and narrative strategies that unify his work. He begins with a consideration of the reception of Bolaño's fiction in English translation, examining the reasons behind its popularity. Subsequent chapters explore aspects of Bolaño's fictional universe and the political, ethical, and aesthetic values that shape it. Bolaño emerges as the inventor of a prodigiously effective "fiction-making system," a subtle handler of suspense, a chronicler of aimlessness, a celebrator of courage, an anatomist of evil, and a proponent of youthful openness. Written in a clear and engaging style,Roberto's Bolano's Fictionoffers an invaluable understanding of one of the most important authors of the last thirty years.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/andr16806

INTRODUCTION from: Roberto Bolaño's Fiction
Abstract: This is a book of literary criticism. Although I have had the lucky privilege of being one of Roberto Bolaño’s translators, translation will not be my main concern in the following pages. And although Bolaño responded to my queries in the last year and a half of his life, I have no biographical revelations to offer. These opening disclaimers made, I would like to comment briefly on the ways the critical approach adopted here is related—indirectly—to the work of translation and to the life of the author studied.

1 THE ANOMALOUS CASE OF ROBERTO BOLAÑO from: Roberto Bolaño's Fiction
Abstract: The reception of Roberto Bolaño’s work in English began in an unremarkable way. When Christopher Maclehose, publisher at the Harvill Press in England, bought UK rights for Nocturno de Chile(By Night in Chile) in 2001, Bolaño was already a well-established author in the Spanish-speaking world. In 1998 his first long novel,Los detectives salvajes(The Savage Detectives), had won the Premio Herralde de Novela and the Premio Rómulo Gallegos. The second of these prizes, in particular, is a mark of consecration in the Hispanic literary field, and it had been won, before Bolaño, by Mario Vargas Llosa, Gabriel García

2 BOLAÑO’S FICTION-MAKING SYSTEM from: Roberto Bolaño's Fiction
Abstract: The work of Roberto Bolaño gives a clear and almost unquestionable

THREE Modernism in the Zenana: from: Modernist Commitments
Abstract: Near the end of the celebrated Indian novel Kamala, written between 1889 and 1894 by Krupabai Satthianadhan, the eponymous protagonist, a young Hindu woman who has suffered the death of her beloved father, the disdain of her husband, and the loss of the man she loves, leaves home with her infant daughter. In pity, her husband offers her money, which she declines while telling him he will never see her again. She wanders, distraught and nearly suicidal, until a glimpse of the heavens filled with stars calls her back to a life of community service and charitable work. The narrator

FIVE Arising from the Cornlands: from: Modernist Commitments
Abstract: Agnes Smedley begins Daughter of Earth, her compelling and distinguished 1929 novel of working-class life, with a disclaimer: “What I have written is not a work of beauty, created that someone may spend an hour pleasantly; not a symphony to lift up the spirit, to release it from the dreariness of reality.” She dwells on the details of the life she will depict and its connection to the despair and ugliness of poverty in the United States. “I belong to those who do not die for the sake of beauty. I belong to those who die from other causes—exhausted by

2 ON BEING CALLED DEAD: from: A Materialism for the Masses
Abstract: IN THE LAST CHAPTER WE BEGAN TO DISCUSS THE SECRET SHARING of the Paulinism of Stanislas Breton and the aleatory materialism of Louis Althusser, tabling initially several ways in which such sharing indicates new ways to understand an apostle in the “underground current of materialism.” I want now to focus on the issue more directly by showing just what was the Paulinism of Stanislas Breton in relation to the implicit turn toward aleatory materialism in the late Althusser. My own work on both figures takes seriously something Breton once said about Christianity, something I think we should affirm in relationship

5 SEIZURES OF CHANCE: from: A Materialism for the Masses
Abstract: IN MANY WAYS AND NECESSARILY TO MULTIPLE ENDS, IT IS THE moment to seize upon an opportunity to (re)stage a work that the great Pasolini, by chance, could not himself fund. If so, our own putting into place of imaginary mises-en-scènes for a screenplay Pasolini left behind would immediately set in motion a complex comparative machinery, whirring away to effect an operational wonder about the now-time within which chance occasions and imaginary props afford a chance to bring a screenplay, not to mention an apostle, to life again. In fact, Pasolini wrote in his notes for a screenplay (written in

CONCLUSION: from: A Materialism for the Masses
Abstract: READ SIMILARLY TO NIETZSCHE, FREUD FOR ME WAS CORRECT inasmuch as he understood Paulinism as a kind of counterpoint to the “religion” of the people of Moses. But Freud was still not sleuthing hard enough, not doing enough dreamwork on the force and forms of cultural memory, when he considered Paul himself as actually having instituted the operative break between Judaism and Christianity. For all his shrewd reflections on revolution, institutionalization, and its repressions, Freud still read Paul like Martin Luther, participating in an aged panoply of a triumphalistically anti-Jewish and implicitly pro-imperial tradition inasmuch as he finds in Paul

Book Title: Reclaiming the Enlightenment-Toward a Politics of Radical Engagement
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): BRONNER STEPHEN ERIC
Abstract: With its championing of democracy, equality, cosmopolitanism, and reason -- and its vociferous attacks on popular prejudice, religious superstition, and arbitrary abuses of power -- the Enlightenment was once hailed as the foundation of all modern, progressive politics. But in 1947, this perspective was dramatically undermined when Max Horkheimer and Theodor Adorno published their classic work, Dialectic of Enlightenment, which claims that the Enlightenment was the source of totalitarianism and the worst excesses of modernity. Reclaiming the Enlightenment from purely philosophical and cultural interpretations, Bronner shows that its notion of political engagement keeps democracy fresh and alive by providing a practical foundation for fostering institutional accountability, opposing infringements on individual rights, instilling an enduring commitment to social reform, and building a cosmopolitan sensibility. This forceful and timely reinterpretation of the Enlightenment and its powerful influence on contemporary political life is a resounding wake-up call to critics on both the left and the right.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/bron12608

Book Title: The Habermas Handbook- Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): LAFONT CRISTINA
Abstract: Jürgen Habermas is one of the most influential philosophers of our time. His diagnoses of contemporary society and concepts such as the public sphere, communicative rationality, and cosmopolitanism have influenced virtually all academic disciplines, spurred political debates, and shaped intellectual life in Germany and beyond for more than fifty years. In The Habermas Handbook, leading Habermas scholars elucidate his thought, providing essential insight into his key concepts, the breadth of his work, and his influence across politics, law, the social sciences, and public life.This volume offers a comprehensive overview and an in-depth analysis of Habermas's work in its entirety. After examining his intellectual biography, it goes on to illuminate the social and intellectual context of Habermasian thought, such as the Frankfurt School, speech-act theory, and contending theories of democracy. TheHandbookprovides an extensive account of Habermas's texts, ranging from his dissertation on Schelling to his most recent writing about Europe. It illustrates the development of his thought and its frequently controversial reception while elaborating the central ideas of his work. The book also provides a glossary of key terms and concepts, making the complexity of Habermas's thought accessible to a broad readership.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/brun16642

1 THE PHILOSOPHY OF HISTORY, ANTHROPOLOGY, AND MARXISM from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) HONNETH AXEL
Abstract: It would be nearly impossible to describe the concerns Habermas articulates and addresses in his theory without referring to the three intellectual traditions named above. All his innovations—indeed, the motivational bases for his project as a whole—are so strongly shaped by the philosophy of history, philosophical anthropology, and Marxism that even the attenuated presence of these traditions in his later writings cannot conceal how much, in changed form, they have always determined his work. The following brief sketch will provide a kind of archeology of Habermas’s social philosophy in its mature phase and make plain the theoretical elements

5 HERMENEUTICS AND THE LINGUISTIC TURN from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) LAFONT CRISTINA
Abstract: In the foreword to the second edition of On the Logic of the Social Sciences, Habermas writes that the incorporation of hermeneutics into his project during the 1960s played a key role in transforming critical theory from an enterprise based on the philosophy of the subject into one founded on communication. This undertaking culminated in his main work,The Theory of Communicative Action(1981). Although Habermas indicates that his encounter with analytic philosophy (see chapters 6 and 30 in this volume) is also of central importance, in examining his turn toward the philosophy of language it is necessary to take

9 KANT from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) MAUS INGEBORG
Abstract: Habermas’s thorough engagement with the works of Kant is evident in every aspect of his philosophy. The following discusses this engagement with respect to moral philosophy; the theory of law and democracy, including the theory of international law; and epistemology.

13 POWER DISCOURSES from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) NIEDERBERGER ANDREAS
Abstract: The topic of power—and especially power that is exercised in an illegitimate, oppressive, or violent manner—stands at the center of many articulations of critical theory (Honneth 1993). Habermas’s work occupies a special place in the tradition, for it conceives power—or, as the case may be, the ways it is produced and functions—as a matter bearing (and in necessary fashion, at that) on the constitution of both theory and society; indeed, it may even be seen to express freedom. As a consequence, the critique of power and the role of this critique in critical theory must also

18 EUROPEAN CONSTITUTIONALIZATION from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) JOERGES CHRISTIAN
Abstract: For years now—across the continent, in all languages and lands—talk has been animated: Europe must determine what state it finds itself in, whether its legal system may be understood as a constitutional order, whether it can—indeed, should—be democratic, what democracy in a European union means, and what the chances of this really occurring are. The constitutionalization of Europe involves both the analysis of actual processes that make the phenomenon itself comprehensible and a normative framework offering tools of measurement—and specifying conditions necessary—for determining whether the emergent configurations “deserve recognition.” Yet analytical and empirical questions

22 FEMINISM from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) BAEHR AMY R.
Abstract: Feminist theory is critical theory. It seeks to liberate women from the conditions that deprive, oppress, and disadvantage them. It does this by explaining and criticizing those conditions and by suggesting emancipatory alternatives. Recently, feminist theorists have sought resources for feminist theory in the work of Jürgen Habermas. Some note Habermas’s personal commitment to justice for women (Fraser 1989, 7; Fleming 1997, 7; Johnson 2006, 156). But many point to insufficient attention to gender in his work overall and find it lacking well-developed theories of gender oppression and gender justice. It is debated whether his discourse theory of democracy, morality,

25 MONOTHEISM from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) DAVIS FELMON
Abstract: But from the publication of his 1988 collection of papers Postmetaphysical Thinkingto his recent work, the 2005 volume BetweenNaturalism and

27 THE THEORY OF THE PUBLIC SPHERE: from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) FRASER NANCY
Abstract: The public sphere is the most influential of Jürgen Habermas’s signature concepts. Unlike “communicative action,” “discourse ethics,” and “the colonization of the lifeworld,” which are discussed principally by specialists, this concept has become a major focus of work in fields ranging from history, law, politics, and sociology to literature, philosophy, gender studies, and media studies. Designating a central institution of modern society, one that previously lacked a name, Habermas’s concept of the public sphere enjoys a status akin to that of a scientific discovery. Widely used throughout the humanities and social sciences, even by those who do not share his

31 LATE CAPITALISM AND LEGITIMATION: from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) NULLMEIER FRANK
Abstract: Legitimation Crisisbegan as the research program for projects at the Max Planck Institute for the Study of the Scientific-Technical World in Starnberg, where he assumed the directorship with Carl-Friedrich von Weizsäcker in 1971. The book both draws on the work of researchers there (especially Claus Offe, Gertrud Nunner-Winkler, Rainer Döbert, and Klaus Eder) and synthesizes theoretical elements from the author’s earlier writings. Finally,

32 HISTORY AND EVOLUTION: from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) MCCARTHY THOMAS
Abstract: The essays collected in Zur Rekonstruktion des Historischen Materialismus(1976), all written in the mid-1970s, represent a major juncture in Habermas’s thought. They brought his reflections on historical materialism since the 1950s together with his work in the early 1970s on the theory of communicative action, on one side, and with the results of his recent exchange with Niklas Luhmann concerning social-systems theory, on the other side. Together they introduced the research program that would soon lead toThe Theory of Communicative Action(1985 [1981]).

34 STAND-IN AND INTERPRETER: from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) BRUNKHORST HAUKE
Abstract: In 1981, the Hegel Conference in Stuttgart addressed the “Hamlet debate” of German philosophy: “Kant or Hegel?” The highpoint of the event occurred when the avant-garde of American pragmatism took the stage. Richard Rorty (1983), whose groundbreaking critique of philosophical idealism Philosophy and the Mirror of Nature(1979) had just been translated into German, made a brief introduction. Willard V. O. Quine (1983), who followed him, took apart the myth of autonomous reference—demolishing the notion that the statements in which we offer our reflections hold independently of the theoretical framework in which we make them (412–413). Donald Davidson

43 COGNITIVE INTERESTS from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) REHG WILLIAM
Abstract: Habermas’s concept of “cognitive interests” lies at the center of his Knowledge and Human Interests(1972 [1968]). That work represents the culmination of his early efforts to ground critical social theory in a critique of knowledge (Erkenntniskritik), an approach he abandoned when he made the linguistic-pragmatic turn in the 1970s (see chapter 29 in this volume). With input from Karl-Otto Apel (1971), Habermas developed the idea of cognitive interests in hopes of reconstituting the philosophy of reflection, which had reached its apex in German idealism. Specifically, Habermas wanted to revive the critical, emancipatory aims of reflection in a way that

47 CONSERVATISM from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) BRUMLIK MICHA
Abstract: From the beginning, Habermas’s dialectical encounters with conservatism of all stripes have worked on—and against— Hume’s

48 CONSTITUTIONS AND CONSTITUTIONAL PATRIOTISM from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) NICKEL RAINER
Abstract: Constitutionality received a central position and a positive definition only in Habermas’s later writings, specifically in the context of his legal theory. In his early discussion of legitimation problems under late capitalism, the author voiced suspicion that “bourgeois constitutions” (Legitimation , 101) harbor ideology, but the matter appeared to be of secondary importance for the task at hand. The Theory of Communicative Actionhinted at a changed interest in structures of (constitutional) law. Finally,Between Facts and Norms—Habermas’s main work of legal theory—presented a kind of idealizing phenomenology of the democratic and constitutional state and affirmed the equiprimordiality

50 COUNTERFACTUAL PRESUPPOSITIONS from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) KOLLER ANDREAS
Abstract: The notion of unavoidable, idealizing presuppositions of a pragmatic nature that Habermas elaborates in his later works represents an effort to nuance—and, ultimately, to replace—the confusing concept of an “ideal speech situation” that he presented in the works of his middle period. Since Between Facts and Norms, Habermas has understood “counterfactual presuppositions”—or, alternatively, the “vocabulary of the as-if”—as “the nerve of my entire theoretical undertaking” (1998, 418). The social sciences in particular have paid little attention to this conceptual move, however. Accordingly, the matter represents one of the most misunderstood elements of Habermasian theory.

55 EUROPEAN CITIZENSHIP from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) JOERGES CHRISTIAN
Abstract: The concept of citizenshipspans many disciplines—without, for all that, necessarily connecting them. The following discusses the divergent understandings of the term in positive European law, on the one hand, and in the works of Jürgen Habermas, on the other. Two matters will be made clear: the conceptual anchoring of legal discourses in neoliberal visionsandthe sociocritical dimension of Habermas’s advocacy of the European project.

59 IDEOLOGY from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) SAAR MARTIN
Abstract: In Habermas’s works, the concept of ideology displays multiple—and polyvalent—aspects. It features prominently as one of the central categories in his account of Marxism—above all, in his early discussions of the project of critical theory as it was first conceived. The matter continues to be of central importance in Habermas’s discussions of “late capitalism,” where he seeks to offer a political-sociological diagnosis of the times. However, in the course of the author’s turn to the theory of communication, which crucially revises his approach to critical social analysis, ideology offers a point of reference less and less; in

61 LATE CAPITALISM from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) NULLMEIER FRANK
Abstract: Habermas’s Legitimation Crisis(Legitimationsprobleme im Spätkapitalismus[1973]) assigns the concept of “late capitalism” a position of central importance, which it has retained in his works as a whole. However, in presenting this sketch of a comprehensive theory of society, Habermas employs the term “late capitalism” only with restraint. More often, he refers to “state-regulated” or “organized capitalism.” And even when the chapter heading promises “A Descriptive Model of Advanced Capitalism,” what follows speaks primarily of “organized capitalism” (Legitimation, 33).

69 PUBLIC SPHERE from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) NANZ PATRIZIA
Abstract: The works of Jürgen Habermas have shaped the way the public sphere ( Öffentlichkeit) is understood in Germany and the Anglo-American world.The Structural Transformation of the Public Sphere(1961) presented the key ideas that later were treated in systematic fashion inBetween Facts and Norms(1992), Habermas’s main work of legal and democratic theory. The “public sphere” forms a space of reasoned communicative interaction—the principal means of arriving at collective understanding (Selbstverständigung). Under modern conditions, the public sphere of politics in the democratic community (Gemeinwesen ) plays a central role in social integration. Public debates form the basis for

70 RADICAL REFORMISM from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) BRUNKHORST HAUKE
Abstract: Just as the label “the theory of communicative action” effectively covers all of Habermas’s work to date, the phrase “radical reformism” stands for the author’s view of political praxis— i.e., the practical implications of his theoretical reflections. In a lengthy introduction—written in the winter of 1969—to his first collection of essays, notes ( Denkschriften), and contributions to debates on university reform and student protest, Habermas addressed the objectives, theoretical justifications, achievements, reactions, and origins (which were the same across the globe) of the first international movement of this kind. The piece ends with Lenin’s famous question: “What is to

73 SOCIAL PATHOLOGY from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) HARTMANN MARTIN
Abstract: The concept of pathology derives from ancient medicine, where it refers to the doctrine of kinds and causes of illness. According to Galen, the pathological is what deviates from “the normal course of nature” (Seidler 1989, 13). Discourse about social pathologies, in turn, stems from the metaphorical transferring of this medical concept onto societies—which are treated as if they were organisms that can be sick or healthy. Habermas’s reading of Freud, in Knowledge and Human Interests, is decisive for the conception of pathology in his works as a whole. For Freud, pathology is based on the linguistification or verbalization

Book Title: Randall Jarrell and His Age- Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Burt Stephen
Abstract: Burt's book examines all of Jarrell's work, incorporating new research based on previously undiscovered essays and poems. Other books have examined Jarrell's poetry in biographical or formal terms, but none have considered both his aesthetic choices and their social contexts. Beginning with an overview of Jarrell's life and loves, Burt argues that Jarrell's poetry responded to the political questions of the 1930s, the anxieties and social constraints of wartime America, and the apparent prosperity, domestic ideals, and professional ideology that characterized the 1950s. Jarrell's work is peopled by helpless soldiers, anxious suburban children, trapped housewives, and lonely consumers. Randall Jarrell and His Agesituates the poet-critic among his peers -- including Bishop, Lowell, and Arendt -- in literature and cultural criticism. Burt considers the ways in which Jarrell's efforts and achievements encompassed the concerns of his time, from teen culture to World War II to the Cuban Missile Crisis; the book asks, too, how those efforts might speak to us now.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/burt12594

Chapter 6 MEN, WOMEN, CHILDREN, FAMILIES from: Randall Jarrell and His Age
Abstract: Every family, John Demos writes, “is (and was) both a system of gender relations and a system of age relations” (12). Chapter 5 looked at children and at adolescents in Jarrell’s poems and prose; this chapter will examine women and men, mothers and fathers, the families they constitute, and how children fare within them. We have seen already how Jarrell, like his culture, associated femininity with private life and with sympathy—and how he associated himself and his work with all three.¹ Jarrell’s later poems depict some men and women who long for private connections and sympathies such as those

Conclusion: from: Randall Jarrell and His Age
Abstract: We have seen in the “Lost World” poems and throughout Jarrell’s oeuvre how he took care to define and defend the self. We have seen how his lonely personae seek intersubjective confirmation and how his alienated characters resist the so-called social world. We have seen how Jarrell’s divided, conflicted selves depend on psychoanalytic ideas—both those of a familiar Freudianism and those of later object-relations theories. We have seen how concepts of work and play, and related ideas about childhood, adolescence, and adulthood, both inform and confine the ways Jarrell’s characters think about their lives. And we have seen how

3 UTOPIA AND NATURAL ILLUSIONS from: Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) BUEY FRANCISCO FERNÁNDEZ
Abstract: The first edition of Thomas More’s great work appeared in London in 1516 under the title De optimo republicae statu deque nova insula Utopia[Nusquam], in Latin, based on an inaccurate text. It was also almost simultaneously published asLibellus vere aureus, nec minus salutaris quam festivus de optimo reipublicae statu deque nova Insula Utopia(Lovaina, T. Martens, 1516), then asDe optimo republicae statu deque nova Insula Utopia(Basilea, J. Froben, 1518, new edition revised by Erasmus). It was translated into Italian in 1548, French in 1550, English in 1551, Low German in 1562, and Spanish in 1637 with

7 A STRANGE FATE FOR POLITICS: from: Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) GRANT JOHN
Abstract: Must utopia remain utopian, or can it be achieved without at the same time announcing its own end? This question helps to orient an examination of Fredric Jameson’s engagement with utopia and the critical insights about society that come with it. In early work such as “Reification and Utopia in Mass Culture” (1979), Jameson articulates how cultural artifacts contain twin utopian and ideological components, with the latter never managing to preclude the former. In more recent work such as “The Politics of Utopia” (2004), Jameson claims that utopian thinking flourishes when we find politics has been suspended. This raises a

9 NEGATIVITY AND UTOPIA IN THE GLOBAL JUSTICE MOVEMENT from: Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) LÖWY MICHAEL
Abstract: The global justice movement is without a doubt the most important phenomenon of antisystemic resistance of the beginning of the twenty-first century. This vast, nebulous “movement of movements,” which has taken visible form since the regional or world social forums and the great protest demonstrations—against the WTO, the G8, or the imperial war in Iraq—does not correspond to the usual forms of social or political action. A large decentralized network, it is multiple, diverse, and heterogeneous, joining trade unions and peasant movements, NGOs and indigenous organizations, women’s movements, as well as ecological associations, intellectuals, and young activists. Far

12 REALISM, WISHFUL THINKING, UTOPIA from: Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) GEUSS RAYMOND
Abstract: The short monograph Philosophy and Real Politicsrepresents my attempt to give a sketchy answer to the question of how a political philosophy that can be taken seriously might look today.¹ As an explicitly programmatic work, the book certainly does not claim to contain a complete political philosophy, if completeness would even be a meaningful demand in this domain. Rather, it includes only a few positive and a few negative pointers: positive pointers as to where one could possibly continue the investigation, and negative pointers concerning approaches and modes of inquiry that have proven to be not especially promising, or

Book Title: Neopoetics-The Evolution of the Literate Imagination
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Collins Christopher
Abstract: The quest to understand the evolution of the literary mind has become a fertile field of inquiry and speculation for scholars across literary studies and cognitive science. In Paleopoetics, Christopher Collins's acclaimed earlier title, he described how language emerged both as a communicative tool and as a means of fashioning other communicative tools-stories, songs, and rituals. InNeopoetics, Collins turns his attention to the cognitive evolution of the writing-ready brain. Further integrating neuroscience into the popular field of cognitive poetics, he adds empirical depth to our study of literary texts and verbal imagination and offers a whole new way to look at reading, writing, and creative expression. Collins beginsNeopoeticswith the early use of visual signs, first as reminders of narrative episodes and then as conventional symbols representing actual speech sounds. Next he examines the implications of written texts for the play of the auditory and visual imagination. To exemplify this long transition from oral to literate artistry, Collins examines a wide array of classical texts-from Homer and Hesiod to Plato and Aristotle and from the lyric innovations of Augustan Rome to the inner dialogues of St. Augustine. In this work of "big history," Collins demonstrates how biological and cultural evolution collaborated to shape both literature and the brain we use to read it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/coll17686

By Way of an Epilogue: from: On the Difficulty of Living Together
Abstract: In the summer of 2009 I embarked with enthusiasm on a reading of Ricardo Piglia’s novel Respiración artificial,¹ convinced that it was a debt I owed myself. I was sure that, afterPlata quemadaandFormas breves(the two last texts by the Argentine writer that had come into my hands), the moment had come to delve into what, for many people, is his best work. I did so, as I said at the beginning, fired with enthusiasm, not wishing to pay too much heed to certain small details that should at least have surprised (if not worried) me. And

1 The Foucault-Derrida Debate on the Argument Concerning Madness and Dreams from: Foucault/Derrida Fifty Years Later
Author(s) HADDAD SAMIR
Abstract: The starting point for the discussion between Foucault and Derrida was the 1961 publication of Foucault’s first major work, History of Madness. This began a trajectory that, over the course of the next twenty years, contributed considerably to transforming theoretical debates at the crossroads of the sciences, history, and philosophy.

6 Philosophies of Immanence and Transcendence: from: Foucault/Derrida Fifty Years Later
Author(s) ALLEN AMY
Abstract: The critical reception of foucault’s work, particularly his early work, is marked by a curious convergence. Two of Foucault’s staunchest critics are philosophers who otherwise have very little in common, indeed, who had their own, quite heated and very public, debate: Jacques Derrida and Jürgen Habermas.¹ Moreover, the content of Derrida’s and Habermas’s criticisms of the early Foucault is strikingly similar; both philosophers deploy a kind of performative contradiction argument against Foucault’s critique of reason (though only Habermas uses that specific terminology). As Colin Koopman puts the point: “Thinkers who usually see themselves as opposed to one another—for example,

7 Foucault, Derida: from: Foucault/Derrida Fifty Years Later
Author(s) CUSTER OLIVIA
Abstract: A body of thought is too often reduced to a “silhouette” that one thinks is a summary. In thus personifying the work of philosophy, we take away its thickness. But this complexity does not exist in isolation, any more than it can be frozen in time in the form of an unchanging position. Bodies of thought enrich and transform each other through the play of interactions and reactions, strategies and exchanges, and conflicts and ruptures. One body of thought thus implicates others. This relation is not constructed simply by borrowing from, or subscribing to, other thoughts, any more than the

8 A Petty Pedagogy? from: Foucault/Derrida Fifty Years Later
Author(s) HADDAD SAMIR
Abstract: On june 14, 1973, Le Mondepublished a two-page spread with the title “Jacques Derrida: Le déconstructeur.” Aimed at introducing Derrida’s work to a broader public, it consisted of a number of short articles, such as a summary of his publications, a glossary of several “Indécidables” (trace orgramme, différance, supplement, etc.), a list of pithy one-liners culled from his texts, and an interview with Philippe Sollers on Derrida’s relation to literature. The articles were uniformly positive, with one exception—a short column in the center of the right page, which read as follows:

10 “This Death Which Is Not One”: from: Foucault/Derrida Fifty Years Later
Author(s) DEUTSCHER PENELOPE
Abstract: To recall—in derrida’s work there was “always a telephone.” It was just one of the technologies promising to annul distance, while calling into question the immediacy it promised and the distance it promised to annul.¹ Yet, as Eric Prenowitz writes, the telephone held a more peculiar interest: from “Plato’s Pharmacy,” through Derrida’s many reflections on teletechnologies (generalized inEchographies), to the ongoing dialogues with Hélène Cixous² that were also repeated openings to sexual difference. Consistent with those openings, the telephone becomes, at one point in hisThe Death Penalty, Volume 1, an umbilical cord. Here is Derrida describing teletechnology

Book Title: The Force of the Example-Explorations in the Paradigm of Judgment
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Allen Amy
Abstract: Drawing not only on Kant's Critique of the Power of Judgmentbut also on the work of Hannah Arendt, John Rawls, Ronald Dworkin, and Jürgen Habermas, Ferrara outlines a view of exemplary validity that is applicable to today's central philosophical issues, including public reason, human rights, radical evil, sovereignty, republicanism and liberalism, and religion in the public sphere.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/ferr14072

1 Judgment as a Paradigm from: The Force of the Example
Abstract: The conversation of philosophers unfolds over the ages with a continuity of themes and paradigms that only at infrequent junctures undergoes a significant reconfiguring. One of the most interesting among these turning points is constituted by the publication of Kant’s Critique of the Power of Judgment. Kant’s work of 1790 inaugurates a new paradigm for thinking of validity and normativity—the judgment paradigm—that further modifies a philosophical horizon already reshaped in depth by the more often celebrated Critique of Pure Reasonand Critique of Practical Reason and whose full promise begins to be recognized, for reasons that I will try

3 The Exemplary and the Public Realm: from: The Force of the Example
Abstract: The notion of exemplarity can be of only limited use to our reflections about politics unless we develop an understanding of what exemplarity could mean in the public realm and how its inherent normativity could play a role at that level. One way of contributing to such an understanding consists in reconstructing the kind of normativity underlying Rawls’s notions of public reason and of the reasonable. According to a somewhat popular but deeply misguided view, the transition from the framework of A Theory of Justiceto that ofPolitical Liberalismwould entail a loss of normativity, so to speak, and therefore a diminished relevance

5 Political Republicanism and the Force of the Example from: The Force of the Example
Abstract: Political traditions and philosophical conceptions differ on the extent to which they allow the force of the example, and judgment, to play a role within their framework. Only the most extreme embed the ambition to filter out any and all possible role that judgment and exemplarity might play—game theoretical approaches to political choice are of this kind, for instance—but by and large all conceptions of normativity do attribute to judgment a role at least in discerning the correct and appropriate application of independently established principles of a more general nature. Republicanism, among the various traditions in political philosophy,

3 THE POPE’S SHRUNKEN HEAD: from: History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Clemens Raymond
Abstract: Robert of Uzès (d. 1296) had decidedly unusual tastes for a Dominican at the end of the thirteenth century, and his Book of Visions (Liber visionum) is a unique, largely unstudied, collection of thirty-seven visions produced during a period of great religious anxiety and instability—the long vacancy after the death of Pope Nicholas IV, the odd selection of the saintly-hermit Peter Marrone as successor, his resignation, and the subsequent election of Boniface VIII. The visions are preserved in two manuscripts, both of which also contain Robert’s only other known work, The Book of the Words of the Lord (Liber

6 “A PARTICULAR LIGHT OF UNDERSTANDING”: from: History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Doyno Mary Harvey
Abstract: In the late 1280s a boy suffering from demonic possession begged his family to make the journey from Borgo San Sepolcro to the neighboring city of Cortona. There was, he told them, a woman in that city whose “prayers and good works” would help loosen the devil’s hold on him. According to a contemporary account, as the boy and his family made their pilgrimage up the steep hill to Cortona, “the devil could not endure the wall thrown up by [her] prayers, and with great agitations, as if he were tearing the boy apart, released him.”¹

14 WHY ALL THE FUSS ABOUT THE MIND? from: History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Clark Anne L.
Abstract: Scholarship on medieval culture and religion has been greatly enriched by attention to the body. Among other insights, this scholarship illuminates medieval perspectives on connections between body and soul and the thinking part of the person that we call the “mind.” Theorists today also highlight connections between thinking and embodiedness, and questions about how this embodied mind works are being approached in various disciplines—psychology, computer sciences, neurobiology, linguistics, philosophy, anthropology—loosely connected by the term cognitive science. Some cognitive paradigms have been developed in or applied to the study of religion. This relatively new use of cognitive theory to

16 MACHIAVELLI, TRAUMA, AND THE SCANDAL OF from: History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Frazier Alison K.
Abstract: From late February to early March 1513, after Piero Soderini’s republican government had bowed to the consequences of military defeat at Prato and a foreign power had returned the Medici to Florence as more than first citizens, Niccolò Machiavelli spent three weeks as their political prisoner.² Then, on March 11, Cardinal Giovanni de’Medici became Pope Leo X. Florence celebrated with an amnesty, and Machiavelli, liberated to territorial confinement, spent the late spring and summer writing On Principalities (De principatibus).³ Although he would write many other things before his death in 1527, including works that gave him some literary standing among

18 CRYSTALLINE WOMBS AND PREGNANT HEARTS: from: History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Jung Jacqueline E.
Abstract: Of the many splendid objects to survive from medieval convents, one of the most enchanting is a small sculpture of the Virgin Mary and St. Elizabeth from the Swiss Dominican foundation of St. Katharinenthal, currently housed in the Metropolitan Museum of Art (fig. 18.1).¹ Made during the first decade of the fourteenth century by the workshop of Henry of Constance, the “Visitation Group” will doubtless be familiar to this volume’s readers as one of the many late medieval devotional images that, in Caroline Bynum’s words, “reflect[ed] and sanctif[ied] women’s domestic and biological experience.”² Citing Jeffrey Hamburger’s now-seminal study of monastic

Conclusion from: The End of Cinema?
Abstract: Just as we were finishing the present volume, a film was released in movie theaters (yes! in movie theaters!) by Michel Gondry, an adaptation of Boris Vian’s L’Écume des jours(Mood Indigo, 2013). Critics were divided about the film, with many emphasizing the difficulty of adapting a work such as Vian’s. In the same way that Hergé’s work, as we have described, is identified with its medium, Vian’s novel is constructed in the textual and expressive space provided by literature. This, it would appear, is the reason why Gondry opted to use a considerable number of mechanical special effects in

5. CANALS ON MARS: from: Progress and Values in the Humanities
Abstract: The primary task of the humanities, especially the arts, and theories about the arts, the work of humanistic research and scholarship, is to help us understand what it means to be a human being. This has two consequences for the issue of progress in the humanities. The first is epistemological. Anyone confronting this kind of gap, this murky area of not-knowing, whether labeled humanist or scientist or historian, will tend to project onto the noise one’s favorite theory. The second is that in confronting this epistemological gap we often rely upon “great” persons whose intuitions about human being offer plausible,

Book Title: Eastwood's Iwo Jima-Critical Engagements with
Publisher: Wallflower Press
Author(s): GJELSVIK ANNE
Abstract: With Flags of Our Fathers(2006) andLetters from Iwo Jima(2006), Clint Eastwood made a unique contribution to film history, being the first director to make two films about the same event. Eastwood's films examine the battle over Iwo Jima from two nations' perspectives, in two languages, and embody a passionate view on conflict, enemies, and heroes. Together these works tell the story behind one of history's most famous photographs, Leo Rosenthal's "Raising the Flag on Iwo Jima." In this volume, international scholars in political science and film, literary, and cultural studies undertake multifaceted investigations into how Eastwood's diptych reflects war today. Fifteen essays explore the intersection among war films, American history, and Japanese patriotism. They present global attitudes toward war memories, icons, and heroism while offering new perspectives on cinema, photography, journalism, ethics, propaganda, war strategy, leadership, and the war on terror.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/gjel16564

HAUNTING IN THE WAR FILM: from: Eastwood's Iwo Jima
Author(s) BURGOYNE ROBERT
Abstract: Shortly after the introductory logo of Flags of Our Fathers (Clint Eastwood, 2006) appears, a faint voice emerges from the darkness of the screen, a voice that has an old-fashioned texture and grain, singing a song that sounds like a fragment of a half-heard radio broadcast. The lyrics, which are barely audible, come through as ‘Dreams we fashion in the night. Dreams I must gather’, and set a mood of solitude, loss, and regret. The source of the song is ambiguous; it seems to float between the opening Dreamworks logo, crafted in antique black and white, and the beginnings of

Book Title: Broken Tablets-Levinas, Derrida, and the Literary Afterlife of Religion
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): HAMMERSCHLAG SARAH
Abstract: Over a span of thirty years, twentieth-century French philosophers Emmanuel Levinas and Jacques Derrida held a conversation across texts. Sharing a Jewish heritage and a background in phenomenology, both came to situate their work at the margins of philosophy, articulating this placement through religion and literature. Chronicling the interactions between these thinkers, Sarah Hammerschlag argues that the stakes in their respective positions were more than philosophical. They were also political. Levinas's investments were born out in his writings on Judaism and ultimately in an evolving conviction that the young state of Israel held the best possibility for achieving such an ideal. For Derrida, the Jewish question was literary. The stakes of Jewish survival could only be approached through reflections on modern literature's religious legacy, a line of thinking that provided him the means to reconceive democracy. Hammerschlag's reexamination of Derrida and Levinas's textual exchange not only produces a new account of this friendship but also has significant ramifications for debates within Continental philosophy, the study of religion, and political theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/hamm17058

3 BETWEEN THE JEW AND WRITING from: Broken Tablets
Abstract: However we read the relationship between Derrida and Levinas, the lasting impact of Derrida’s first encounter with Levinas’s work is hard to dispute. Even in his final years, Derrida treated it as one of his life’s decisive turning points. In a letter written to Paul Ricoeur in January of 1996, less than two weeks after Emmanuel Levinas’s death, Derrida recalled its importance by reminding Ricoeur that it was he who first introduced Derrida to the thought of the Lithuanian phenomenologist.¹ It was 1961 or 1962, Derrida recalled, and they were walking in Ricoeur’s garden. Totality and Infinityhad just been

EPILOGUE: from: Broken Tablets
Abstract: Ten pages into Gift of Deaththere is an intriguing note to Derrida’s 1991 seminar on the secret: “Literature concerning the secret is almost always organized around scenes and intrigues that deal with death,” it begins. This is a theme, he adds, that he had attempted to demonstrate in the seminar, “referring most often to ‘American’ examples.”¹ His list includes Poe’s “The Purloined Letter,” Melville’s “Bartleby the Scrivener,” and Henry James’sThe Aspern Papersand “The Figure in the Carpet.” There are numerous traces of Derrida’s readings of the first two stories in his published works, but, as far as

Book Title: Regimes of Historicity-Presentism and Experiences of Time
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): BROWN SASKIA
Abstract: Our presentist present is by no means uniform or clear-cut, and it is experienced very differently depending on the position we occupy in society. We are caught up in global movement and accelerated flows, or else condemned to the life of casual workers, living from hand to mouth in a stagnant present, with no recognized past, and no real future either (since the temporality of plans and projects is inaccessible). The present is therefore experienced as emancipation or enclosure, and the perspective of the future is no longer reassuring, since it is perceived not as a promise, but as a threat. Hartog's resonant readings show us how the motor of history(-writing) has stalled and help us understand the contradictory qualities of our contemporary presentist relation to time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/hart16376

[Introduction] from: Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: The three meditations on ruins and the three journeys to America, described in the previous chapters, and which spanned more than half a century, gave form to three experiences of time. All three reflected a radical reappraisal of the order of time. Volney, Chateaubriand, and Tocqueville, each in his own way, expressed the realization that the old regime of historicity, which had so long been sustained by the model of historia magistra, could no longer work. In order for contemporary events to be intelligible, the categories of the past and the future had to be articulated differently, failing which “the

Book Title: Ecosickness in Contemporary U.S. Fiction-Environment and Affect
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): HOUSER HEATHER
Abstract: Tracing the development of ecosickness through a compelling archive of modern U.S. novels and memoirs, this study demonstrates the mode's crucial role in shaping thematic content and formal and affective literary strategies. Examining works by David Foster Wallace, Richard Powers, Leslie Marmon Silko, Marge Piercy, Jan Zita Grover, and David Wojnarowicz, Heather Houser shows how these authors unite experiences of environmental and somatic damage through narrative affects that draw attention to ecological phenomena, organize perception, and convert knowledge into ethics. Traversing contemporary cultural studies, ecocriticism, affect studies, and literature and medicine, Houser juxtaposes ecosickness fiction against new forms of environmentalism and technoscientific innovations such as regenerative medicine and alternative ecosystems. Ecosickness in Contemporary U.S. Fictionrecasts recent narrative as a laboratory in which affective and perceptual changes both support and challenge political projects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/hous16514

CHAPTER 4 Habermas’s Reorientation of Critical Theory Toward Democratic Theory from: The Specter of Democracy
Abstract: Despite Max Horkheimer’s fear that he was “too left-wing” to inherit the legacy of the Frankfurt School, Jürgen Habermas has modernized the tradition of critical theory just as the original Frankfurters sought to modernize Marxism: by criticizing and thereby reaffirming in his own way the premises from which the founders began. This achievement has not always been understood by his audience, despite a remarkable series of successes, each one crowned by a theoretical work of synthetic breadth and theoretical depth. Typical was the case of the book that was his Habilitationsschrift in 1962, Structural Change of the Public Sphere,¹ which

CHAPTER 6 Claude Lefort’s Passage from Revolutionary Theory to Political Theory from: The Specter of Democracy
Abstract: When he learned that I was to deliver the traditional laudatio when he was awarded the Hannah Arendt Prize for Political Thought by the city-state of Bremen in 1999, Claude Lefort reminded me jokingly that his work did not end with Socialisme et Barbarie.¹ It was easy to meet that request but harder to write the laudatio, which went through three radically different drafts. The trick is to explain the association of the recipient with the principles behind the award (in this case, with the political thought of Hannah Arendt; this was easy enough); then to explain the great worth

CHAPTER 11 Reading U.S. History as Political from: The Specter of Democracy
Abstract: Historians correctly warn their political scientist friends against the danger of an overly present-centered reading of the stakes of politics. For example, the issues roiling French politics must be understood within the symbolic framework inaugurated by the rupture begun in 1789. Seemingly unrelated actions, whose motivation seems to depend only on simple self-interest, may acquire a meaning that their authors have not consciously intended. Similarly, German politics is framed by the symbolic context created by both Frederick the Great’s early legal codification of the Allgemeines Landgesetz and by the failure of the 1848 revolution to institute a liberal parliamentary regime

FOREWORD from: Governance in the New Global Disorder
Author(s) SASSEN SASKIA
Abstract: As I read through this book, there was one image that kept recurring in my mind, albeit not one used by the author—it was more my applying Innerarity’s method to some of my work. The image is that the immigrant makesnew ground for

Book Title: Situating Existentialism-Key Texts in Context
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): BERNASCONI ROBERT
Abstract: Emphasizing the multidisciplinary and global nature of existential arguments, the chosen texts relate to philosophy, religion, literature, theater, and culture and reflect European, Russian, Latin American, African, and American strains of thought. Readings are grouped into three thematic categories: national contexts, existentialism and religion, and transcultural migrations that explore the reception of existentialism. The volume explains how literary giants such as Dostoevsky and Tolstoy were incorporated into the existentialist fold and how inclusion into the canon recast the work of Kierkegaard and Nietzsche, and it describes the roles played by Jaspers and Heidegger in Germany and the Paris School of existentialism in France. Essays address not only frequently assigned works but also underappreciated discoveries, underscoring their vital relevance to contemporary critical debate. Designed to speak to a new generation's concerns, the collection deploys a diverse range of voices to interrogate the fundamental questions of the human condition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/juda14774

14 The “Letter on Humanism”: from: Situating Existentialism
Author(s) Kleinberg Ethan
Abstract: In what follows I situate the first “Heidegger Affair” and Heidegger’s “Letter on Humanism” in relation to the initial reception of Heidegger’s philosophy in France.¹ To do so I present what I have defined as the first three “readings”—or understandings of Heidegger’s work in France—in order to clarify the relationship between Heidegger’s own work and existential philosophy. Yet I do this also to articulate the ways that Heidegger’s “Letter on Humanism” led to the demise of “existentialism” as the leading philosophy in France. All three of these readings can be traced to differing French interpretations of Heidegger’s work

Book Title: Reimagining the Sacred-Richard Kearney Debates God with James Wood, Catherine Keller, Charles Taylor, Julia Kristeva, Gianni Vattimo, Simon Critchley, Jean-Luc Marion, John Caputo, David Tracey, Jens Zimmermann, and Merold Westphal
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Zimmermann Jens
Abstract: Richard Kearney explores these questions with a host of philosophers known for their inclusive, forward-thinking work on the intersection of secularism, politics, and religion. An interreligious dialogue that refuses to paper over religious difference, these conversations locate the sacred within secular society and affirm a positive role for religion in human reflection and action. Drawing on his own philosophical formulations, literary analysis, and personal interreligious experiences, Kearney develops through these engagements a basic gesture of hospitality for approaching the question of God. His work facilitates a fresh encounter with our best-known voices in continental philosophy and their views on issues of importance to all spiritually minded individuals and skeptics: how to reconcile God's goodness with human evil, how to believe in both God and natural science, how to talk about God without indulging in fundamentalist rhetoric, and how to balance God's sovereignty with God's love.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/kear16102

Introduction from: Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) ZIMMERMANN JENS
Abstract: Richard Kearney is one of the most creative and insightful voices of the so-called theological turn in continental philosophy. His imaginative and constructive application of hermeneutic philosophy to postmodern debates about religion and culture characterizes Kearney’s mature work, contained in the trilogy of publications titled Philosophy at the Limit: On Stories, The God Who May Be, andStrangers, Gods and Monsters. With these works, Kearney established himself as one of the greatest contemporary philosophical mediators of traditional concepts that define our humanity, such as narrative identity, practical wisdom, hospitality, and perceptions of God. Unlike many postmodern treatments of religion that

3 Beyond the Impossible from: Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) Keller Catherine
Abstract: Catherine Keller is professor of constructive theology at Drew University in Madison, New Jersey. She is a process theologian with wide-ranging theoretical interests, encompassing feminist theology, ecotheology, and poststructuralist and postcolonial theory. In her highly original and influential theological works—most notably Face of the Deep, From a Broken Web, andOn the Mystery—she has sought to develop the relational potential of a theology of becoming. Her books reconfigure ancient symbols of divinity for the sake of a planetary conviviality—a life together, across vast webs of difference. Her latest book,Cloud of the Impossible(2014), explores the relation

5 New Humanism and the Need to Believe from: Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) Kristeva Julia
Abstract: Julia Kristeva is a Bulgarian-French philosopher, literary critic, psychoanalyst, sociologist, feminist, and cultural theorist. Her most recent work on “post-Christian humanism” overlaps significantly with Richard Kearney’s anatheism. Kristeva defines this humanism, with Nietzsche, as “a process of permanent refoundation.”¹ According to Kristeva, European culture is undergoing an unprecedented existential crisis concerning the definition of what it means to be human. We no longer know, “What is a man? What is a woman?” In her view, this crisis calls on the human sciences and humanism to reenvision human structures by creating new languages in literature and the creative arts for a

6 Anatheism, Nihilism, and Weak Thought from: Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) Critchley Simon
Abstract: The Italian philosopher and politician Gianni Vattimo is best known for his concept of “weak thought” ( pensiero debole). Weak thought is Vattimo’s term for his hermeneutic ontology: human existence and perception are interpretive all the way down. In his most recent work, Vattimo has argued for a “hermeneutic communism,” a communism stripped of grand metaphysical assumptions that seeks to stem the tide of capitalism by working on concrete issues—in particular, historical communities. While Vattimo derives his thinking from Nietzsche, Heidegger, and Gadamer, in the worksBelief(1999) andAfter Christianity(2002) he has also articulated weak thought in terms

7 What’s God? “A Shout in the Street” from: Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) Critchley Simon
Abstract: Simon Critchley is a British philosopher and public intellectual who is now Hans Jonas Professor of Philosophy at The New School for Social Research in New York. Critchley’s interdisciplinary research interests range from continental philosophy, literature, and psychoanalysis to ethics and political theory. After his first major book, The Ethics of Deconstruction, on Levinas and Derrida, Critchley published an essay collection on literature, death, and ethics, entitledVery Little . . . Almost Nothing, in which he first articulated what he called “atheist transcendence,” a theme that returns in his most recent work,The Faith of the Faithless.

10 Theism, Atheism, Anatheism from: Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) Zimmermann Jens
Abstract: In the following conversation, Richard Kearney’s book Anatheismis engaged by one theologian and two theologically inclined philosophers. David Tracy is a well-known Roman Catholic theologian at the University of Chicago Divinity School, who has written important works on hermeneutics and theology (The Analogical Imagination: Christian Theology and the Culture of PluralismandOn Naming the Present: Reflections on God, Hermeneutics, and Church) and has contributed immensely to interfaith dialogue. In much of his work, Tracy argues for a hermeneutic faith and recovers the incomprehensible God of the mystics, a God who reveals himself in weakness and suffering. Tracy shares

Artist’s Note on Cover Art from: Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) GALLAGHER SHEILA
Abstract: Pneuma Hostisis a flaming halo created out of gold-leafed cigarette butts. It is a maze-mandala in the form of a commercial Lasco fan, modeled on the one installed in my studio window in Boston to clear the smoke and toxic fumes from my work space. The butts and the fan blades come together in the shape of a gold host, where inhalation and exhalation, life and death, health and illness, the addict and the saint share the same space.

Book Title: Civil and Uncivil Violence in Lebanon-A History of the Internationalization of Communal Conflict
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Khalaf Samir
Abstract: In this long-awaited work, Samir Khalaf analyzes the history of civil strife and political violence in Lebanon and reveals the inherent contradictions that have plagued that country and made it so vulnerable to both inter-Arab and superpower rivalries. How did a
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/khal12476

CHAPTER 3 Reflective Judgment and the Moral Imagination from: Narrating Evil
Abstract: Stories perform many functions for those who read them and those who write them. In this sense, we should first focus on what makes a story an important model for reflective judgment. I will argue that processes of aesthetic apprehension are created by the work of the productive imagination of some moral experiences. This makes stories important vehicles of reflective judgments. Through their written expression, moral stories have demonstrated that, in spite of many theorists’ skepticism, they capture the “ineffable” characteristics of evil actions.¹ In works of fiction as well as in historical stories about evil acts, the “ineffable” seems

CHAPTER 4 Hannah Arendt and Negative Exemplarity: from: Narrating Evil
Abstract: Much has been written about Hannah Arendt’s reflections on evil and of the particular way she analyzed her two different conceptions of evil—radical evil and the banality of evil—in her works The Origins of Totalitarianism and Eichmann in Jerusalem: A Report on the Banality of Evil. I myself have explored some aspects of the theories within these two works in the introduction to my edited book Rethinking Evil: Contemporary Perspectives. I will not repeat those arguments here, nor do I wish to recall the many different and contradictory interpretations of her contributions on the subject of evil. Since

CHAPTER 5 Learning from Catastrophes from: Narrating Evil
Abstract: I must confess that when I started writing about evil, in the summer of 1998, I was of the opinion that the work of Jürgen Habermas had not focused explicitly on the problem. Many critical scholars and colleagues would have agreed with that earlier opinion.¹ Since then, however, I have come to understand that Habermas has always been concerned with the problem of evil, but has done so from a strictly postmetaphysical view. It is for this reason that, in this chapter, I would like to develop my arguments on the ways Habermas’s contribution has helped change my mind. Not

CHAPTER 6 What Remains? from: Narrating Evil
Abstract: In this chapter, I will use my model of reflective judgment to show that is it possible to connect the work and stories of Primo Levi to this moral type of judgment. I will then show the two different ways in which judgment is used—first, the reflective, then the determinant—the former in Levi’s work, and the latter in Giorgio Agamben’s Remnants of Auschwitz: The Witness and the Archive. The reason to focus on Levi’s and Agamben’s work is to show what makes a judgment a reflective one, out of specific contexts and situations, whereas the determinant judgment in

6 Reinhart Koselleck’s Model of Secularization: from: The Disclosure of Politics
Abstract: In previous chapters I have often referred to Reinhart Koselleck’s work, especially his method of conceptual history, which I consistently find useful with regard to questions of translation and innovation in the emergence of secularized forms of political concepts. Koselleck is also helpful for understanding the dynamic feedback between the formulation of a concept and the social reality that creates the space in which the concept is accepted and used. In this chapter I will focus on Koselleck’s largely negative assessment of the ways in which the problem of politics versus morality has been addressed in Enlightenment thought. Koselleck’s model

8 The Disclosure of Politics Revisited from: The Disclosure of Politics
Abstract: All human action, all political and subjective agency, entails a conceptual framework within which actors make sense of their actions and projects. The concepts I have discussed in this book entailed the disclosure of a new way of thinking about politics during the eighteenth century, which transformed the way social agents saw themselves, their experiences, and their future.¹ This process allowed them to imagine concepts such as critique, emancipation, and the political role of civil society as part of negotiating the space between their expectations and their actual political experiences. After examining six different models of secularization, it is appropriate

5 SHAPING ADMINISTRATION IN COLONIAL TAIWAN, 1895–1945 from: Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) CAROLINE TS’AI HUI-YU
Abstract: To decipher the operational network of

CHAPTER 3 The Dailiness of Trauma and Liberation in Zoë Wicomb from: Prose of the World
Abstract: Published in 1988, James Clifford’s The Predicament of Culture is an insightful exploration of metropolitan modernist aesthetics against the backdrop of a troubled global modernity in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. It is, moreover, representative of a critical momentum in the developing relationship between literary and anthropological discourse in the late twentieth century. The book has been considered a critical work in the so-called literary turn in anthropology, which was already exemplified by the influential collection co-edited by Clifford, Writing Culture, published in 1986.¹ In his introduction to the collection, Clifford points to the rising popularity of literary

Epilogue from: Religion and the Specter of the West
Abstract: Each chapter in this book has, in different ways, engaged with and provided an extended critique of the concept of religion as a cultural universal. Through a case study of Sikhism, I have tried to demonstrate how certain aspects of Sikh and Hindu traditions were reinvented in terms of the category of “religion” during the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. As scholars working in different disciplines have increasingly recognized, the context of India’s colonial encounter with the West provides fertile ground for the emergence and crystallization of concepts and categories that inform—but at the same time test the

Book Title: The Highway of Despair-Critical Theory After Hegel
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Marasco Robyn
Abstract: Hegel's "highway of despair," introduced in his Phenomenology of Spirit, represents the tortured path traveled by "natural consciousness" on its way to freedom. Despair, the passionate residue of Hegelian critique, also indicates fugitive opportunities for freedom and preserves the principle of hope against all hope. Analyzing the works of an eclectic cast of thinkers, Robyn Marasco considers the dynamism of despair as a critical passion, reckoning with the forms of historical life forged along Hegel's highway.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/mara16866

1 Hegel, the Wound from: The Highway of Despair
Abstract: Hegel did not describe his work as critique.¹ In the Phenomenology of Spirit, he portrays his efforts not in terms of critical philosophy, which would have aligned him squarely with Kant, but as an attempt to unite the desire for knowledge with actual knowing.² What Hegel had in mind in this union of philosophy and science was not quite critique in the Kantian sense, but rather theconsummationof the love of knowledge (philosophy) with the historical and phenomenological experience of knowing (science).³ Hegel aimed to “complete” philosophy, not only by giving it a definitive reality in human history, but

Book Title: Contemporary Romanian Cinema-The History of an Unexpected Miracle
Publisher: Wallflower Press
Author(s): NASTA DOMINIQUE
Abstract: Over the last decade, audiences worldwide have become familiar with highly acclaimed films from the Romanian New Wave such as 4 Months, 3 Weeks and 2 Days(2007),The Death of Mr. Lazarescu(2005), and12:08 East of Bucharest(2006). However, the hundred or so years of Romanian cinema leading to these accomplishments have been largely overlooked. This book is the first to provide in-depth analyses of essential works ranging from the silent period to contemporary productions. In addition to relevant information on historical and cultural factors influencing contemporary Romanian cinema, this volume covers the careers of daring filmmakers who approached various genres despite fifty years of Communist censorship. An important chapter is dedicated to Lucian Pintilie, whose seminal work,Reconstruction(1969), strongly inspired Romania's 21st-century innovative output. The book's second half closely examines both the 'minimalist' trend (Cristian Mungiu, Cristi Puiu, Corneliu Porumboiu, Radu Muntean) and the younger, but no less inspired, directors who have chosen to go beyond the 1989 revolution paradigm by dealing with the complexities of contemporary Romania.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/nast16744

CHAPTER 5 Mircea Daneliuc: from: Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: Mircea Daneliuc unquestionably stands as the most important Romanian director of the 1980s, while also proving relatively prolific and thought-provoking during the immediate post-Communist period (five films from 1991 to 1995). As was the case with other auteurs, his work has only been partially shown to non-domestic audiences and still needs to be reconsidered for a number of reasons. The first and most important one relates to the fact that despite enormous difficulties, Daneliucʹs films managed to escape Communist censorship, while bringing to the fore extremely authentic characters and situations, thus constituting an invaluable picture of Romanian society. The second

AGAINST HISTORY from: The Historiographic Perversion
Author(s) ANIDJAR GIL
Abstract: Thus the inescapable conclusion toward which Marc Nichanian leads us.¹ At the provisional limit of the singular trajectory traced by his extended work (of which The Historiographic Perversion constitutes a small, if remarkable, part), this formulation is hardly forced, nor does it appear to articulate a substantial departure from Theodor Adorno’s famous assertion (“to write poetry after Auschwitz is barbaric”), only an intensification of its claim, indeed, a version or translation of it.² Yet, the formulation practically engages with historical difference—“our historical differences actually make a difference”—in its claim to bridge

Book Title: The Awakened Ones-Phenomenology of Visionary Experience
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Obeyesekere Gananath
Abstract: Throughout his career, Obeyesekere has combined psychoanalysis and anthropology to illuminate the relationship between personal symbolism and religious experience. In this book, he begins with Buddha's visionary trances wherein, over the course of four hours, he witnesses hundreds of thousands of his past births and eons of world evolution, renewal, and disappearance. He then connects this fracturing of empirical and visionary time to the realm of space, considering the experience of a female Christian penitent, who stares devotedly at a tiny crucifix only to see the space around it expand to mirror Christ's suffering. Obeyesekere follows the unconscious motivations underlying rapture, the fantastical consumption of Christ's body and blood, and body mutilation and levitation, bridging medieval Catholicism and the movements of early modern thought as reflected in William Blake's artistic visions and poetic dreams. He develops the term "dream-ego" through a discussion of visionary journeys, Carl Jung's and Sigmund Freud's scientific dreaming, and the cosmic and erotic dream-visions of New Age virtuosos, and he defines the parameters of a visionary mode of knowledge that provides a more elastic understanding of truth. A career-culminating work, this volume translates the epistemology of Hindu and Buddhist thinkers for western audiences while revitalizing western philosophical and scientific inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/obey15362

INTRODUCTION from: The Awakened Ones
Abstract: In this introduction I want to give the reader a glimpse of what I aim to do in this work and a sense of the epistemological and psychological assumptions that underlie it. My “essay” is enormously long, in the old style, such as that of John Locke’s An Essay on Human Understanding. And I might say, albeit with a shrug, mine also is a piece of “human understanding,” but one that refuses to be tied down to any epistemology of empiricism. The task that I attack here is the “visionary experience,” not in its metaphoric sense but literally referring to

Book 5 CHRISTIAN DISSENT: from: The Awakened Ones
Abstract: In book 4 I have dealt with the rich visionary traditions in medieval Christianity. The rest of this essay leaps over a couple of centuries to consider those who lived and worked under the shadow of the Enlightenment. This hinge discourse builds a rough bridge between the visions of Catholic penitents and those who experienced visions in the height of the age of reason, beginning with Blake and ending with new age visionaries. We now know that it is a mistake to think that Enlightenment and scientific reason simply supplanted the prior tradition of visionary thought, even in those countries

ENVOI—INTIMATIONS OF MORTALITY: from: The Awakened Ones
Abstract: I wrote this envoi with the hope that it would ease the burden of having written a long work. But, as with joys that happen to us, burdens never cease until the clock that keeps ticking away the passage of time within our frail bodies comes to a stop. Yet had I been living in another world or another time and place I might have used another epigraph for this ending. Or, for that matter, if I believed that nothingness can mean something else, as our negative theologians and Buddhist thinkers have formulated, giving that nothingness a transcendent reality. For

Book Title: A Hedonist Manifesto-The Power to Exist
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): McClellan Joseph
Abstract: Onfray attacks Platonic idealism and its manifestation in Judaic, Christian, and Islamic belief. He warns of the lure of attachment to the purportedly eternal, immutable truths of idealism, which detracts from the immediacy of the world and our bodily existence. Insisting that philosophy is a practice that operates in a real, material space, Onfray enlists Epicurus and Democritus to undermine idealist and theological metaphysics; Nietzsche, Bentham, and Mill to dismantle idealist ethics; and Palante and Bourdieu to collapse crypto-fascist neoliberalism. In their place, he constructs a positive, hedonistic ethics that enlarges on the work of the New Atheists to promote a joyful approach to our lives in this, our only, world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/onfr17126

ONE A Philosophical Side Path from: A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: Classical historiography of philosophy is constructed by wishful thinking. Strangely, the apostles of pure reason and transcendental deduction all agree in the mythology that they create and that they perpetuate with a vengeance by teaching, compiling, lecturing, writing, and publishing fables. Through repetition, these become gospel truths. Scholarly looting, unmarked citation, conceptual regurgitation of other’s work—these are the happy practices of those who edit encyclopedias, conceive lexicons, and otherwise write the history of philosophy and the textbooks in which it is inscribed.

TWO Bodily Reason from: A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: Other powerful lineages populate the history of philosophy. There are other binaries to describe the issues and people at work in the tradition. Of course, there is Idealism and Materialism; the ascetic Ideal and the hedonist Ideal; and transcendence and immanence. But equally, there is denigration of the “I” and writing about the self. On the one hand, the philosophers I have listed did not seem to value autobiographical confession or little details derived from personal experiences. On the other hand, their lives fed their thought and they acknowledged drawing lessons from life. Some are messengers who efface themselves, trying

Book Title: The Triangle of Representation- Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Prendergast Christopher
Abstract: The Triangle of Representationraises a range of theoretical, historical, and aesthetic questions, and offers subtle readings of such cultural critics as Raymond Williams, Paul de Man, Edward Said, Walter Benjamin, and Hélène Cixous, in addition to penetrating investigations of visual artists like Gros, Ingres, and Matisse and significant insights into Proust and the onus of translating him. Above all, Prendergast's work is a striking display of how a firm grounding in theory is essential for the exploration of art and literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/pren12090

6 Representing Other Cultures: from: The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: The occasion for the following remarks on the work of Edward Said is the appearance (in French translation) of his short book Representations of the Intellectual.¹ It is the only one of Said’s books in which the word “representation” figures in the title, although, as I shall show, the term has a very long reach into the arguments for which he is best known. The book’s principal theme—the place of the so-called intellectual in the modern world—is tackled in both theoretical and personal terms, where Said relates several of his own experiences as an “exiled” Palestinian intellectual, the

8 God’s Secret: from: The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: I have to begin on what might seem a potentially discouraging note by remarking that, in a project devoted to discussing the idea of mimesis and commemorating the magisterial work of Erich Auerbach, I shall not really be talking about either, although I hope it can be taken more or less for granted that the shadow of Auerbach looms over virtually everything I will be saying.¹ My concern is broadly speaking with certain intellectual developments post-Auerbach, in connection with the concept of realism, historically and theoretically a subspecies of the concept of mimesis. The two—mimesis and realism—are often

10 Literature, Painting, Metaphor: from: The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: Proust famously defined literature as translation, in the sense of the representation of one set of terms by another.¹ Literary art as translation in Proust can be understood in a variety of contexts: extratextual (the privileged sensations of A la recherche as signes that it is the task of the writer to decode); intertextual (A la recherche as the rivalrous rewriting of Balzac’s Comédie humaine or Saint-Simon’s Mémoires); and interartistic (the literary work sustaining complex transactional relations to the other arts, notably music, sculpture, and painting).

Book Title: Encountering Religion-Responsibility and Criticism After Secularism
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): ROBERTS TYLER
Abstract: To respond to religion is to ask what religious behaviors and representations mean to us in our individual worlds, and scholars must confront questions of possibility and becoming that arise from testing their beliefs, imperatives, and practices. Roberts refers to the work of Hent de Vries, Eric Santner, and Stanley Cavell, each of whom exemplifies encounter and response in their writings as they traverse philosophy and religion to expose secular thinking to religious thought and practice. This approach highlights the resources religious discourse can offer to a fundamental reorientation of critical thought. In humanistic criticism after secularism, the lines separating the creative, the pious, and the critical themselves become the subject of question and experimentation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/robe14752

1 RELIGION AND INCONGRUITY from: Encountering Religion
Abstract: Orsi, Braun, and Wasserstrom are only a few of the many scholars who in recent years have explored the history of the study of religion, surveyed the range of theoretical approaches to it, or undertaken genealogical explorations of the idea of “religion” itself.² This theoretical and metatheoretical work is wide-ranging and, depending on one’s perspective, demonstrates either that the field is rich, pluralistic, and multi- if not interdisciplinary or that it continues to suffer from a lack of a strong sense of purpose and theoretical grounding. Those who take this second perspective and seek to make the study of religion

4 ENCOUNTERING THEOLOGY from: Encountering Religion
Abstract: At the end of chapter 2, I suggested that attention to theology as a critical discourse might help us think more generally about humanistic criticism. Having explained what I mean by humanistic criticism in chapter 3, I begin, in this chapter, to explore the boundaries between humanistic inquiry and theology. I extend my reflections on the humanistic study of religion to consider the encounter with religious texts and then examine concrete examples of such encounters in the work of two “secular” thinkers: the historian and theorist Amy Hollywood and the political theorist Romand Coles. Both show the critical work that

5 RELIGION AND RESPONSIBILITY from: Encountering Religion
Abstract: To develop my ideas about the humanistic study of religion, I have drawn from a range of disciplines and methods, from the historical work of Orsi and Hollywood, the anthropology of Jackson and Mahmood, and the political theory of Coles. I turn now to philosophy, the discipline with which I most often identify my own research and scholarship. I am tempted to write “philosophy of religion” and so name a familiar location on the map of the academic study of religion. But I resist the temptation because this map is inadequate, in part because “philosophy of religion” traditionally has been

6 ON PSYCHOTHEOLOGY from: Encountering Religion
Abstract: Eric Santner’s On the Psychotheology of Everyday Life does its work at an intersection of the thought of Sigmund Freud and Franz Rosenzweig. Early in the book, Santner quotes Rosenzweig: “The concept of the order of this world is thus not the universal, neither the arche nor the telos, neither the natural nor the historical unity, but rather the singular, the event, not beginning or end, but center of the world.”² This event, Santner points out, is for Rosenzweig an event of divine revelation. Scholars of religion thus may find it tempting to see in Rosenzweig, writing in the second

CONCLUSION from: Encountering Religion
Abstract: In Democracy and Tradition, the philosopher of religion Jeffrey Stout argues against liberal theorists such as John Rawls and Richard Rorty that religious discourse has a rightful place in the democratic public square. He also argues that “new traditionalist” theologians such as Stanley Hauerwas and John Milbank exaggerate the separation between the church and the secular public discourse of modern Western democracies. These two claims play a major role in Stout’s effort, as I described it in the first chapter, to distinguish between secularism and his own vision of a secular, pluralist framework for public discourse. I agree with Stout

Book Title: Reading the-The Literary Aims of a Theravada Buddhist History
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Scheible Kristin
Abstract: Reading the Mahavamsaadvocates a new, literary approach to this text by revealing its embedded reading advice (to experiencesamvegaandpasada) and affective work of metaphors (the Buddha's dharma as light) and salient characters (nagas). Kristin Scheible argues that theMahavamsarequires a particular kind of reading. In the text's proem, special instructions draw readers to the metaphor of light and thenagas, or salient snake-beings, of the first chapter.Nagasare both model worshippers and unworthy hoarders of Buddha's relics. As nonhuman agents, they challenge political and historicist readings of the text. Scheible sees these slippery characters and the narrative's potent and playful metaphors as techniques for refocusing the reader's attention on the text's emotional aims. Her work explains theMahavamsa's central motivational role in contemporary Sri Lankan Buddhist and nationalist circles. It also speaks broadly to strategies of reading religious texts and to the internal and external cues that give such works lives beyond the page.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/sche17138

3 NĀGAS, TRANSFIGURED FIGURES INSIDE THE TEXT, RUMINATIVE TRIGGERS OUTSIDE from: Reading the
Abstract: Why nāgas? Just as the conception of the other gives rise to a deepened awareness of self, the understanding of thenāgain theMahāvamsaurges the reader to assume a certain understanding of himself or herself. The sense of self that is derived from reading this narrative peppered withnāgasis a temporally bounded one and ultimately provokes the reader into realizing his or her own immediate and urgent responsibility and agency toward his or her own moral development. As we saw in chapter 1, the proems of the twovaṃsasI focus on enunciate the reader’s work in

Book Title: Milton and the Rabbis-Hebraism, Hellenism, and Christianity
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Shoulson Jeffrey S.
Abstract: Shoulson is unconvinced of a direct link between a specific collection of rabbinic writings and Milton's works. He argues that many of Milton's poetic ideas that parallel midrash are likely to have entered Christian discourse not only through early modern Christian Hebraicists but also through Protestant writers and preachers without special knowledge of Hebrew. At the heart of Shoulson's inquiry lies a fundamental question: When is an idea, a theme, or an emphasis distinctively Judaic or Hebraic and when is it Christian? The difficulty in answering such questions reveals and highlights the fluid interaction between ostensibly Jewish, Hellenistic, and Christian modes of thought not only during the early modern period but also early in time when rabbinic Judaism and Christianity began.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/shou12328

1 Diaspora and Restoration from: Milton and the Rabbis
Abstract: I begin with a few working definitions.¹ Midrash, from which most of my examples of rabbinic literature will be drawn, takes as its organizing principle the sequence of verses, portions, and books of the Hebrew Bible. Though its individual comments and observations can, and usually do, range widely within the biblical canon, its sequence of homilies, narratives, or legal pronouncements inevitably follows the main biblical text to which it has been appended.² In terms of the historical development of rabbinic interpretive genres, the midrashic mode seems to have predated the Mishnaic (Talmudic) mode. The midrashic approach, firmly anchored in biblical

Epilogue: from: Milton and the Rabbis
Abstract: In chapter 5 I suggested a parallel between Milton’s imagined forecast of future times in the final books of Paradise Lost and the rabbinic fantasy of Moses’s visit to the bet midrash of R. Akiba. Both mountaintop scenes render complex perspectives on history, politics, belief, and human agency. These two scenes of instruction offer useful insights into one another, but Milton’s portrayal of Michael’s postlapsarian instructions to Adam has for its precursor a more explicit biblical account of divinely granted vistas, Moses’s Pisgah sight, just before his death, in Deuteronomy 34.¹ Anticipating Milton’s own reworking of this culminating biblical episode,

1 Becoming God: from: Winged Faith
Abstract: August 14, 1999. 11.00 a.m. Brindavan, Whitefield ashram. Gokulam canteen dining hall. Shanti (forty-three) from Bombay, Teresa (sixty-two) from London, and Joule (fifty-five) from Amsterdam, all devotees of over twenty years, are shelling beans in the dining room in preparation for the evening meal for the many thousands of devotees in residence. Usually this activity is completed in meditative silence or with whispered bouts of conversation, as per the rules of the ashram, but they are known as devout, so they can talk to me as they work. We talk about the miracles attendant to Shri Sathya Sai Baba’s life

Book Title: The Death of Philosophy-Reference and Self-reference in Contemporary Thought
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): LYNCH RICHARD A.
Abstract: Thomas-Fogiel begins with postphilosophical claims such as scientism, which she reveals to be self-refuting, for they subsume philosophy into the branches of the natural sciences. She discovers similar issues in Rorty's skepticism and strands of continental thought. Revisiting the work of late-nineteenth and early-twentieth-century philosophers, when the split between analytical and continental philosophy began, Thomas-Fogiel finds both traditions followed the same path-the road of reference-which ultimately led to self-contradiction. This phenomenon, whether valorized or condemned, has been understood as the death of philosophy. Tracing this pattern from Quine to Rorty, from Heidegger to Levinas and Habermas, Thomas-Fogiel reveals the self-contradiction at the core of their claims while also carving an alternative path through self-reference. Trained under the French philosopher Bernard Bourgeois, she remakes philosophy in exciting new ways for the twenty-first century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/thom14778

Introduction from: The Death of Philosophy
Abstract: In This New Yet Unapproachable America, Stanley Cavell recounts the following anecdote: “One of the most influential American teachers of philosophy . . . declared . . . that there are only three ways to make an honest living in philosophy: learn some languages and do scholarly work, learn mathematics enough to do some real logic, or do literary psychology.”¹ Far from deploring this situation, in which philosophy is taken up by another discipline, Cavell affirms that it matters little to him, in the final analysis, whether what he does in writing his books is deemed to be philosophical. In

10 The Tension Between Reference and Self-reference in the Kantian System from: The Death of Philosophy
Abstract: In Kant, the dual question of reference and self-reference is left to be read from his terms “representation” and “reflection”—representation embodying the mind’s movement toward what is not itself, namely, the object; reflection, the mind’s questioning of its own structures. And yet, in the Kantian system, the conjunction of these two notions turns out to be, in the final analysis, impossible. This impossibility is expressed in a strange oxymoron, the use of which causes the entire framework to implode. To demonstrate the incompatibility between these two orientations, I must first bring out the meaning of the term “representation” and

2 MARXISM AND MEMORY from: Left-Wing Melancholia
Abstract: At first sight, Marxism and memory appear as two foreign continents. Since Marx, many scholars belonging to his intellectual tradition have elaborated philosophies of history or investigated historical temporalities—E. P. Thompson’s studies on time and work discipline in early industrial capitalism are the most known—but have never conceptualized collective remembrance. Opened one century ago by Henri Bergson and Maurice Halbwachs, the scholarly debate on memory deeply shaped sociology, historiography, and philosophy without receiving any significant Marxist contribution. The rare assessments made by Marxist scholars on this topic simply reproduce a classical, positivistic dichotomy between history and memory: memory

4 BOHEMIA: from: Left-Wing Melancholia
Abstract: Popularized by a novel by Henri Murger in 1846,¹ then consecrated by Puccini in his famous opera, the idea of Bohemia, in its current use, implies a lifestyle and a particular attitude toward aesthetics. Rejection of bourgeois conventions, lack (or voluntary renunciation) of a fixed abode and regular work, frequent visits to cafés, cabarets, and popular taverns, a taste for nocturnal life, ostentatious sexual freedom, a keen penchant for alcohol and drugs, the fair communal share of meager available resources, and even, at times, a certain “sectarianism” colored by the use of secret codes shared only by a select brotherhood

5 MARXISM AND THE WEST from: Left-Wing Melancholia
Abstract: Like all classics, Marx both “transcends” his own time and remains a thinker of the nineteenth century. With an incredibly imaginative strength, he was able to grasp tendencies that, still embryonic in his epoch, developed spectacularly during the following century. This astonishing modernity has led many scholars to interpret his works in naïvely anachronistic terms, as if they had been written in our age. Marx contributed to the forging of our lexicon, but many concepts through which we today apprehend the nineteenth century—for instance, imperialism—simply did not exist during his lifetime, or did not have the same meaning

EPILOGUE: from: Flight Ways
Abstract: In January 2013, while finishing work on this book, I returned to Hawai‘i tocontinue my research on the Hawaiian Crow. While all these crows currently live their lives in captivity, it is hoped that in 2014 some of them may be able to be released. If this were to happen, and if those birds could form sustainable free-living populations, then a great achievement would have been made: forests that for over a decade have not heard the raucous calls of crows, or felt the movement of their graceful half-jump—half-flight through their canopies, would again be enlivened by this

1 The God Who Is Dead from: After Christianity
Abstract: IN ONE OF the long fragments on nihilism from the 1800s (which was first published in The Will to Power), Nietzsche asks whether nihilism is compatible with some form of faith in the divine and conceives of the possibility of a pantheistic religiosity, since “after all only the moral God is denied”¹). After all, there are other, well-known passages in Nietzsche’s more mature work where he speaks of the creation of new gods. Let me remark that when announcing the death of God, Nietzsche anticipates that the latter’s shadow will continue to be cast upon our world for a long

10 Heidegger and Christian Existence from: After Christianity
Abstract: HEIDEGGER’S RELATIONSHIP TO the Christian, and specifically Catholic, tradition is still to be thoroughly explored. Heidegger was steeped in Catholicism to the extent that his bishop subsidized his studies, and he was considered the bright promise of German Catholic thought at the beginning of his career. Perhaps this relationship to Christianity will appear in a new light after the release of more unpublished works in addition to those that have appeared in recent years. Among the latter, the “Einleitung in die Phenomenologie der Religion” (Introduction to the Phenomenology of Religion)¹ has a central place. This is a transcript of the

Book Title: Not Being God-A Collaborative Autobiography
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): MCCUAIG WILLIAM
Abstract: Gianni Vattimo, a leading philosopher of the continental school, has always resisted autobiography. But in this intimate memoir, the voice of Vattimo as thinker, political activist, and human being finds its expression on the page. With Piergiorgio Paterlini, a noted Italian writer and journalist, Vattimo reflects on a lifetime of politics, sexual radicalism, and philosophical exuberance in postwar Italy. Turin, the city where he was born and one of the intellectual capitals of Europe (also the city in which Nietzsche went mad), forms the core of his reminiscences, enhanced by fascinating vignettes of studying under Hans Georg Gadamer, teaching in the United States, serving as a public intellectual and interlocutor of Habermas and Derrida, and working within the European Parliament to unite Europe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/vatt14720

5 RORSCHACH TEST from: Not Being God
Abstract: I, however, had my own personal master. Apart from school. A Thomist, an ultra-Thomist: Monsignor Pietro Caramello. A man who thought it was too progressive even to call himself a neo-Thomist. He used to protest that he was a Thomist period, forget the “neo.” He edited the works of Saint Thomas for the publisher Marietti, and he was the chaplain of the Sindone (the Shroud of Turin), practically a retainer of

15 POPULAR NOVEL from: Not Being God
Abstract: Here in Turin a group of workers held Vittorio Valletta, the CEO of Fiat, prisoner in his office. The army was getting ready to step in. The next day, June 15, the telephones weren’t working and the trains weren’t moving. Italy was split in two at Bologna. Then De Gasperi and Pope Pius XII telephoned the Italian cycling team competing in the Tour de France. Gino Bartali was twenty-two

16 ORATORY from: Not Being God
Abstract: My father died when I was barely sixteen months old. My aunt was already living on her own, my mother worked all day, my sister likewise. I studied and lived in the street. At this point the “De Gasperi” sisters stepped in, two women who owned a small grocery nearby, at the corner of Via Maria Vittoria and Via Bogino. They got their nickname because they were ultra-Catholic. “Why doesn’t this boy go to the oratory?”

18 BEYOND THE HORIZON from: Not Being God
Abstract: That summer, the summer of 1954, the summer I graduated from high school, I was at the point of going to work for Generali, the insurance company. I had filled out an application because I needed a job. I consoled myself with the thought that Kafka too had worked for Assicurazioni Generali. In the worst case, I told myself, that’s a great example.

19 WORKING-CLASS SCHOOL from: Not Being God
Abstract: The kids who attended the school were from the working-class outskirts, Michelin workers mostly.

20 DEMONIC POSSESSION from: Not Being God
Abstract: Why did the Fratelli delle Scuole Cristiane decide to get rid of me when I was twenty-three? Because I had started to frequent trade unionists, take part in worker strikes, picket factory gates. I picketed with the guys from the labor organization CISL at the Avigliana ironworks, for example.

25 FROM HEIDEGGER TO MARX from: Not Being God
Abstract: This may seem incredible, but if you work through Heidegger you can easily get to Marx. Heidegger’s forgetting of Being can be likened to Marx’s alienation and Lukács’s reification. In at least two ways: you can’t change anything by yourself, so to sort things out you have to make a revolution; and the forgetting of Being as Heidegger thinks it is what Marxism explains with the division of labor: you yourself don’t enjoy all the fruits of your labor, and a society is erected in which everything is commodified, including you as a worker.

26 THE MOVEMENT from: Not Being God
Abstract: And to be honest, the slogans that got them worked up made me laugh. For example: “We want university departments, not institutes.” Laugh? No, that was really stupid. Okay, the institutes were

34 REVOLUTIONARY MORALISM from: Not Being God
Abstract: One of my students went to jail for terrorism, too, found on some list, I believe. I don’t think he’d pulled a trigger yet, but he was certainly one of the many who were semiclandestine, one of those pretending to be a worker: he would leave the house at 6:00 AM with his lunch pail, to make people think he was headed to the factory, but he didn’t go there; I don’t know exactly where he went.

41 IN HISTORY from: Not Being God
Abstract: How are historical epochs inaugurated, according to Heidegger? For him the opening, inaugurating events are the great works

59 IF STALIN HAD BEEN A NIHILIST from: Not Being God
Abstract: At the same time technology—and about this Adorno, the philosopher I was thinking of working on after I graduated, and whom Pareyson, God bless him, steered me away from, might be right—is headed toward such possibilities of control that it is unlikely that

1 CHRISTIANITY AND MODERNITY from: Christianity, Truth, and Weakening Faith
Author(s) Girard René
Abstract: Pierpaolo antonello: I would like to begin our dialogue with the two terms that supply the framework for this encounter: Christianity and modernity. Your conceptual instruments are different—anthropological for Girard, philosophical for Vattimo—but you wind up saying more or less the same thing: that modernity, as constructed and understood by the European West, is substantially an invention of Christianity. Your research has led you to the apparently paradoxical result that Christianity is responsible for the secularization of the world. The end of the religions was brought about by a religion. In a recent book, Girard actually informs us

3 HERMENEUTICS, AUTHORITY, TRADITION from: Christianity, Truth, and Weakening Faith
Author(s) Girard René
Abstract: Robert harrison:¹ I would like to ask René Girard to comment on the particular reading that Gianni Vattimo has given to his work by reinterpreting it in a Heideggerian key.

4 HEIDEGGER AND GIRARD: from: Christianity, Truth, and Weakening Faith
Author(s) Vattimo Gianni
Abstract: The short testimony I want to contribute to this colloquium about René Girard may very well start with this quotation from Things Hidden. My purpose is to show how the work of Girard has helped me to “complete” Heidegger, to clarify the meaning of his thought and eventually to reopen communication between (some part of) contemporary postmetaphysical philosophy and the Judeo-Christian tradition. This testimony is also meant as a thanks offering to Girard for all that I believe I have learned from him, although in doing so I may well have committed misunderstandings or distortions of his original intentions.

5 NOT JUST INTERPRETATIONS, THERE ARE FACTS, TOO from: Christianity, Truth, and Weakening Faith
Author(s) Girard René
Abstract: From the standpoint of “deconstructive nihilism,” modern atheism is only one “metaphysical” creed among many others. The reassurance provided by its supposedly scientific grounding is as illusory as the reassurance of religions, philosophies, and ideologies. A complete liberation from false certainties demands that atheism be deconstructed too, along with other metaphysical illusions. Once this task is accomplished, Christianity should become attractive once again. In a genuinely “nihilistic” world, the religion of the cross should fare better than all the creeds and ideologies that imprudently relied on false scientific “objectivity.” This is what Gianni Vattimo suggests in his recent works, notably

Book Title: Political Responsibility-Responding to Predicaments of Power
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): VÁZQUEZ-ARROYO ANTONIO Y.
Abstract: Sounding the alarm for those who care about robust forms of civic engagement, this book fights for a new conception of political responsibility that meets the challenges of today's democratic practice. Antonio Y. Vázquez-Arroyo forcefully argues against the notion that modern predicaments of power can only be addressed ethically or philosophically through pristine concepts that operate outside of the political realm. By returning to the political, the individual is reintroduced to the binding principles of participatory democracy and the burdens of acting and thinking as a member of a collective. Vázquez-Arroyo historicizes the ethical turn to better understand its ascendence and reworks Adorno's dialectic of responsibility to reassert the political in contemporary thought and theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/vazq17484

2 RESPONSIBILITY IN HISTORY from: Political Responsibility
Abstract: Responsibility is now a fashionable concept in political theory, philosophy, and critical theory, and, ceteris paribus, that is a good reason not to write about it. Large bodies of work exist expounding its various connotations and meanings, ranging from questions of accountability and guilt to the need to respond to alterity. And yet there is something rather elusive about the political connotations of contemporary invocations of responsibility within the context of the turn to ethics in the humanities and social sciences, an elusiveness that at first glance seems largely due to hyperindividualized, abstract, and unhistorical thematizations of responsibility. Indeed, recent

4 ETHICAL REDUCTIONS from: Political Responsibility
Abstract: If the problems inherited from the Kantian tradition, including the critique leveled by Nietzsche, contributed to intrasubjective ideas of responsibility, it is Emmanuel Levinas’s work that has mediated the prevalence of the concept in efforts to overcome the “autonomous subject” and thus presumably formulateintersubjective theories of responsibility that give primacy to the Other. Indeed, Levinas is the sage in most transatlantic theorizations of ethical responsibility as “responsibility to the Other.” He is credited with formulating the overcoming “of the very horizon of egology,” an overcoming that paves the way to “re-conceptualize responsibility as a being ‘for the other,’” something

5 ADORNO AND THE DIALECTIC OF RESPONSIBILITY from: Political Responsibility
Abstract: “Kafka’s popularity,” Adorno observed, is due to “that comfort in the uncomfortable which has made of him an information bureau of the human condition, be it eternal or modern, and which knowingly dispenses with the scandal on which his work is built.” He goes on to say that Kafka’s work “is assimilated into an established trend of thought while little attention is paid to those aspects of his work which resist such assimilation, and which, precisely for this reason, require interpretation.”¹ Ironically, Adorno’s work has arguably suffered an even harsher fate.² Even if his work is often praised, especially his

Book Title: Spreading Buddha's Word in East Asia-The Formation and Transformation of the Chinese Buddhist Canon
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Yü Chün-fang
Abstract: The collection undertakes extensive readings of major scriptural catalogs from the early manuscript era as well as major printed editions, including the Kaibao Canon, Qisha Canon, Goryeo Canon, and Taisho Canon. Contributors add fascinating depth to such understudied issues as the historical process of compilation, textual manipulation, physical production and management, sponsorship, the dissemination of various editions, cultic activities surrounding the canon, and the canon's reception in different East Asian societies. The Chinese Buddhist canon is one of the most enduring textual traditions in East Asian religion and culture, and through this exhaustive, multifaceted effort, an essential body of work becomes part of a new, versatile narrative of East Asian Buddhism that has far-reaching implications for world history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/wu--17160

Introduction from: Spreading Buddha's Word in East Asia
Author(s) Chia Lucille
Abstract: The importance of studying the historical development of a religious canon seems obvious. Equally obvious is the daunting challenge of trying to study the many aspects of an immense canon incorporating thousands of works. In the case of the Buddhist canon in Chinese, compiled and recompiled many times and transmitted throughout East Asia,¹ much research remains to be done, especially as the canon continues to evolve in the modern digital age of information. In this volume, we present nine articles of original research on the tradition of the Chinese Buddhist canon that exemplify new directions in studying and understanding the

1. The Chinese Buddhist Canon Through the Ages: from: Spreading Buddha's Word in East Asia
Author(s) Wu Jiang
Abstract: The Chinese Buddhist canon is an organized collection of Buddhist texts translated into or written in Chinese. Its main content centers on translated Buddhist works from Indian and Central Asian regions and is supplemented with Buddhist and related texts written in Chinese. In Buddhist communities, a complete set of the canon has also been treated as the object of worship and devotion, acquiring significant textual and spiritual authority. Because of the complexity of its structure and historical evolution, the formation and transformation of the Chinese Buddhist canon can be considered a phenomenon with religious, social, and textual significance in Buddhist

6. The Life and Afterlife of Qisha Canon (Qishazang 磧砂藏) from: Spreading Buddha's Word in East Asia
Author(s) Chia Lucille
Abstract: Given the great size of the Chinese Buddhist canon—the printed editions of which usually comprise five to six thousand volumes ( ce冊) in the traditional sutra binding—it is somewhat astounding to consider the low survival rate for both the woodblocks and the printed copies of these works. Between the tenth and fourteenth centuries, the Chinese Buddhist canon was printed in China in at least seven different woodblock editions, yet not one of them is extant in its entirety.¹ We are therefore fortunate to have, among the editions of the Chinese Buddhist canon printed in the Song and Yuan,

Book Title: Chinese History and Culture-Sixth Century B.C.E. to Seventeenth Century
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Duke Michael S.
Abstract: From Yü Ying-shih's perspective, the Dao, or the Way, constitutes the inner core of Chinese civilization. His work explores the unique dynamics between Chinese intellectuals' discourse on the Dao, or moral principles for a symbolized ideal world order, and their criticism of contemporary reality throughout Chinese history. Volume 1 ofChinese History and Cultureexplores how theDaowas reformulated, expanded, defended, and preserved by Chinese intellectuals up to the seventeenth century, guiding them through history's darkest turns. Essays incorporate the evolving conception of the soul and the afterlife in pre- and post-Buddhist China, the significance of eating practices and social etiquette, the move toward greater individualism, the rise of the Neo-Daoist movement, the spread of Confucian ethics, and the growth of merchant culture and capitalism. A true panorama of Chinese culture's continuities and transition, Yü Ying-shih's two-volume Chinese History and Culture gives readers of all backgrounds a unique education in the meaning of Chinese civilization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/yu--17858

Book Title: Chinese History and Culture-Seventeenth Century Through Twentieth Century
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Duke Michael S.
Abstract: From Ying-shih Yü's perspective, the Dao, or the Way, constitutes the inner core of Chinese civilization. His work explores the unique dynamics between Chinese intellectuals' discourse on theDao, or moral principles for a symbolized ideal world order, and their criticism of contemporary reality throughout Chinese history. Volume 2 ofChinese History and Culturecompletes Ying-shih Yü's systematic reconstruction and exploration of Chinese thought over two millennia and its impact on Chinese identity. Essays address the rise of Qing Confucianism, the development of the Dai Zhen and Zhu Xi traditions, and the response of the historian Zhang Xuecheng to the Dai Zhen approach. They take stock of the thematic importance of Cao Xueqin's eighteenth-century masterpieceHonglou meng(Dream of the Red Chamber) and the influence of Sun Yat-sen'sThree Principles of the People, as well as the radicalization of China in the twentieth century and the fundamental upheavals of modernization and revolution. Ying-shih Yü also discusses the decline of elite culture in modern China, the relationships among democracy, human rights, and Confucianism, and changing conceptions of national history. He reflects on the Chinese approach to history in general and the larger political and cultural function of chronological biographies. By situating China's modern encounter with the West in a wider historical frame, this second volume ofChinese History and Cultureclarifies its more curious turns and contemplates the importance of a renewed interest in the traditional Chinese values recognizing common humanity and human dignity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/yu--17860

2. Dai Zhen and the Zhu Xi Tradition from: Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: In his essay “Zhu and Lu” and its “Postscript,” Zhang Xuecheng 章學誠 (1738–1801) made a highly illuminating and original criticism of Dai Zhen 戴震 (1724–1777) with regard to the latter’s intellectual relationship with Zhu Xi 朱熹 (1130–1200). Zhang began by pointing out that in terms of intellectual ancestry, Dai was very much in the Zhu Xi tradition, which had all along stressed classical scholarship as a Confucian calling. Since Dai had the advantage of living and working in the heyday of Qing philology, however, it was natural that, technically, he surpassed Zhu Xi in textual studies. Nevertheless,

Book Title: Why Only Art Can Save Us-Aesthetics and the Absence of Emergency
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): ZABALA SANTIAGO
Abstract: The state of emergency, according to thinkers such as Carl Schmidt, Walter Benjamin, and Giorgio Agamben, is at the heart of any theory of politics. But today the problem is not the crises that we do confront, which are often used by governments to legitimize themselves, but the ones that political realism stops us from recognizing as emergencies, from widespread surveillance to climate change to the systemic shocks of neoliberalism. We need a way of disrupting the existing order that can energize radical democratic action rather than reinforcing the status quo. In this provocative book, Santiago Zabala declares that in an age where the greatest emergency is the absence of emergency, only contemporary art's capacity to alter reality can save us. Why Only Art Can Save Usadvances a new aesthetics centered on the nature of the emergency that characterizes the twenty-first century. Zabala draws on Martin Heidegger's distinction between works of art that rescue us from emergency and those that are rescuersintoemergency. The former are a means of cultural politics, conservers of the status quo that conceal emergencies; the latter are disruptive events that thrust us into emergencies. Building on Arthur Danto, Jacques Rancière, and Gianni Vattimo, who made aesthetics more responsive to contemporary art, Zabala argues that works of art are not simply a means of elevating consumerism or contemplating beauty but are points of departure to change the world. Radical artists create works that disclose and demand active intervention in ongoing crises. Interpreting works of art that aim to propel us into absent emergencies, Zabala shows how art's ability to create new realities is fundamental to the politics of radical democracy in the state of emergency that is the present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/zaba18348

3 EMERGENCY AESTHETICS from: Why Only Art Can Save Us
Abstract: The twelve works of art I discuss in chapter 2 thrust us into essential emergencies and call into question our comfortable existence. The emergency aesthetics I limn does not simply overcome measurable representations and indifferent beauty but most of all creates the conditions that enable us to respond to the existential call of art in the twenty-first century. If this call offers any opportunity for us to save ourselves, it does so not by indicating where the danger is but rather by itself being the danger. As Martin Heidegger says, what is most dangerous is when danger conceals “itself as

AFTERWORD from: Why Only Art Can Save Us
Abstract: Attentive readers may have noticed how the three epigraphs of this book, from Arthur C. Danto, Jacques Rancière, and Gianni Vattimo, relate to the text. The first pointed out how Martin Heidegger liberated aesthetics from “beauty’s traditional limitation to calm detachment” and situated “beauty as part of the ontology of being human,”¹ the second presented works of art that aim to “produce a new perception of the world” and “create a commitment to its transformation,”² and the third recovered art’s claim to truth and its “theoretical and practical bearing”³ through hermeneutics.

Book Title: Healing Dramas- Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): ROMBERG RAQUEL
Abstract: In this intimate ethnography, Raquel Romberg seeks to illuminate the performative significance of healing rituals and magic works, their embodied nature, and their effectiveness in transforming the states of participants by focusing on the visible, albeit mostly obscure, ways in which healing and magic rituals proceed. The questions posed by Romberg emerge directly from the particular pragmatics of Puerto Rican brujería (witch-healing), shaped by the eclecticism of its rituals, the heterogeneous character of its participants, and the heterodoxy of its moral economy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/706583

Introduction from: Healing Dramas
Abstract: Close-up, intimate experiences of divination, healing, and magic rituals, along with my own experiences during fieldwork encounters with brujos and their clients in urban Puerto Rico (1995–1996), organize this project. It encompasses both the formal and phenomenological side of ritual experiences, personal stories, dreams, and my own reflections as an ethnographer and participant.¹ Paradoxically, now that the temporal distance from my own personal reflections during fieldwork has grown to be ten years, I find myself finally more comfortable sharing the more personal and intimate aspects of my ethnographic materials, those that fieldworkers usually note separately in their fieldwork diaries

Chapter Five THE SENTIENT BODY from: Healing Dramas
Abstract: As planned, I arrive at Mauro’s at one in the afternoon. We are going to a toque de tambor(alsotoque de santo), a Santería drumming celebration in honor of the orishas. But we leave at two-thirty in the afternoon because we need to wait until Ronny (the other Cuban babalawo) arrives as well. While we wait Mauro tells me about his plans to start a spiritual spa in Miami with the help of some of his influential godchildren. He talks about his relationship and spiritual work with his wife, Lorena her demands, the fact that she is in charge of everything

Chapter Six SPACE from: Healing Dramas
Abstract: Basi, the botánica owner and espiritista with whom I lived for several months, insisted I meet Ken and Mora, a married couple working together as healers. Basi and her teenage granddaughter who lived with her had participated in a series of workshops on the beach that Ken and Mora conducted about healing, cleansing, and meditation techniques. The flyer she gave me with the address and phone number read as follows: “Ken [his last name]: Magnified Healing Master Teacher” (in forty-eight-point italics) and on the next line “Reiki Treatment: Balancing of Inner Self.” I called him and met with him and

Epilogue from: Healing Dramas
Abstract: Before leaving Puerto Rico in December 1996, I asked Haydée if she would address a letter to my dissertation committee granting me permission to publish any or all of the photographs, tape recordings, and videos I had compiled while working with her. She happily agreed to my request but, in keeping with her usual spiritual entrepreneurship, suggested that we combine the writing of the letter with the fashioning of a protective and propitiatory amulet for me, the two thus becoming a kind of farewell trabajo. Notably, I had never asked her, out of concern for my work with her mixed

CHAPTER 2 The Language in Storytelling from: The Last Cannibals
Abstract: Kalapalo told me stories from the very first week in Aifa, their settlement. As a novice, my first research goal was to try to learn how to speak to the residents in their own language, and for this purpose I began my work by asking for lists of words for things, using as a translator the single Portuguese-speaking man present in the settlement at that time and the only person who used a Portuguese name. In 1952, Antonio had been taken as a teenager to live in Rio de Janeiro along with his sister Dyaqui, who was being married to

THREE DERRIDA GETS MEDIEVAL from: Why the Humanities Matter
Abstract: While teaching a graduate seminar in Michigan and Boulder one semester, I realized that behind the grand theoretical posturing—usually a third- or fourth-generation blend of Derrida, Foucault, or Lacan— were students thirsting for a more concrete understanding of buzz concepts and formulations. I suggested we detour from the readings on our syllabus and go directly to the source. While I mention concepts formulated in other works of Derrida, the chapter is centrally inspired by our reading of two articles that form bookends to Derrida’s intellectual career: “Th e Ends of Man” (1969) and “For a justice to come” (2004)

TEN THE “CULTURAL STUDIES TURN” IN BROWN STUDIES from: Why the Humanities Matter
Abstract: “My political work takes place when I teach my students how to be critical of racist stereotypes in film; it takes place when I affirm positive representations in our culture,” a graduate student declared during a seminar. I had pushed the students a little, asking where we might find proof that scholarly “cultural work” had led to political change. I had asked the question because in one way or another, having an allout faith in representations, students would make mind-blowingly smart and sophisticated rhetorical moves to argue either the text’s assertion of a transformative politics of resistance or its normalizing

THIRTEEN WHY LITERATURE MATTERS from: Why the Humanities Matter
Abstract: This chapter is inspired by that moment (usually midway through a semester of teaching an upper-division literature course filled with mostly smart and curious English majors) when brows furrow quizzically and that mental ticker-tape starts clicking: Why are we reading and analyzing books when no one I know even reads? Why not get up to speed with the times and analyze something more relevant, like film? What value does this all have in the bigger scheme of things anyway? I usually take pause from the work at hand and throw the question back out to the students. They come up

TWO DEATH AND THE AFTERLIFE IN THE LOWLANDS from: Death and the Classic Maya Kings
Abstract: As observed by Alfredo López Austin in his seminal work, The Human Body and Ideology,¹ Central Mexican peoples of the Colonial Period saw mortality as an acquired attribute. It was a stigma procured during sex or maize consumption: ingesting maize and participating in sexual activity were ways of consuming death and incorporating it into the body. In eating maize, they brought what was born of the earth—of the realm of death—into their bodies and hence began participation in a larger life cycle.² Knowingin teuhtli, in tlazolli,“the dust, the filth,” of sex was likewise viewed as a

Book Title: Cosmopolitanism in Mexican Visual Culture- Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): Fernández María
Abstract: Fernández organizes episodes in the history of Mexican art and architecture, ranging from the seventeenth century to the end of the twentieth century, around the consistent but unacknowledged historical theme of cosmopolitanism, allowing readers to discern relationships among various historical periods and works that are new and yet simultaneously dependent on their predecessors. She uses case studies of art and architecture produced in response to government commissions to demonstrate that established visual forms and meanings in Mexican art reflect and inform desires, expectations, memories, and ways of being in the world-in short, that visual culture and cosmopolitanism are fundamental to processes of subjectification and identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/745353

2 Castas, Monstrous Bodies, and Soft Buildings from: Cosmopolitanism in Mexican Visual Culture
Abstract: It is no secret that traditional discourses of classical architecture are founded on analogies to the human body. In the third volume of The Ten Books of Architecture, the Roman architect Vitruvius established what would become a permanent union between the proportions of the (male) body and classical architecture. Vitruvius asserted that the ancient Greeks designed their buildings using measuring units that corresponded to bodily proportions. “It was from the members of the body that they derived the fundamental ideas of the measures which are obviously necessary in all works, as the finger, palm, foot, and cubit”; hence symmetry in

4 Of Ruins and Ghosts from: Cosmopolitanism in Mexican Visual Culture
Abstract: Archaeological remains are more than traces of civilizations past. Like other sites of nation-building they serve as stages for the contestation of multiple interests. Official histories, tourist literature, art history, and archaeology often obscure these tensions by focusing on the impressive materiality of the monuments and on deciphering their original significance (Fig. 4.1). While these efforts illuminate our knowledge of the past, they leave out aggregates of individual and collective experiences that also contribute to the signification of the works. Ancient monuments belong to places. As E. V. Walters argued, the significance of a place is inaccessible through rational processes

8 Transnational Culture at the End of the Millennium from: Cosmopolitanism in Mexican Visual Culture
Abstract: During the period of December 26, 1999, to January 7, 2000, from 6:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m., Mexico’s City’s Zócalo was covered by an enormous canopy of light rays, visible from a distance of 15 kilometers. The rays changed position every six seconds, resulting in a new light design. Thousands of participants from four continents and from all the Mexican states created the patterns by manipulating an array of sophisticated technology. These contributions were part of a work of art titled Vectorial Elevation/Alzado Vectorial(Fig. 8.1), designed by Mexican Canadian artist Rafael Lozano-Hemmer on the occasion of Mexico’s government-sponsored celebration

Conclusion from: Cosmopolitanism in Mexican Visual Culture
Abstract: The studies in this book demonstrate that cosmopolitanism in Mexico was closely linked to colonization. International learning and belief structures and communication networks established in the colonial period were saturated with indigenous forms of knowledge and expression. These resulted in cultural products that united international with vernacular traditions. This implies that after colonization international culture ceased to be merely imported but became part and parcel of Mexican subjectivity.

INTRODUCTION. from: Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) DOORDAN DENNIS P.
Abstract: In a park-like setting along New York City’s East River the United Nations stands proudly as an enduring symbol of … what? Today the UN buildings are assailed by some as the sinister architectural symbol of a new world order that threatens to strip nations of sovereign control over their own affairs. For others, the pristine geometry and midcentury palette of materials and artworks serve as a poignant reminder of the naïve hopes and disappointing achievements that trail in the wake of the promise of a new peaceful world order rising phoenix-like from the ashes of World War II. Six

1 BUCHAREST: from: Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) MAXIM JULIANA
Abstract: On an April morning … a group of young architects and workers strolled through the [Floreasca district] around Rachmaninoff Street, which had once been deserted. They passed through three large plazas, through wide interior courts, which opened towards perspectives similar to Renaissance architectural visions. Teams of men and women were planting trees and flowers. They stopped in front of the colonnade of a large theater in neoclassical style. They walked along storefronts. In a library window was an art book titled Projects for a Socialist City…. They came to the lake, and on its shores, raised miraculously between air and

6 ʺHUMANLY SUBLIME TENSIONSʺ: from: Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) PARKER TIMOTHY
Abstract: In 1967, Luigi Moretti (1907–1973)¹ published in Fede e Artea pointed essay, “Where two or three are gathered in my name … (Matthew 18:20),” concerning the “great perplexity” facing architects of new churches in the wake of the sea change that was the Second Vatican Council (1962–1965).² Observing the “dangerous, or at least incautious, vehemence” with which otherwise sincere architects prematurely produced “a flood of purely formalistic designs,” Moretti lamented the too-frequent consequence of “bare, denuded” churches.³ The verbal terms of this judgment and disparaging visual characterization echo a description Moretti had given a work of his

7 MODERNISM AND THE CONCEPT OF REFORM: from: Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) KIECKHEFER RICHARD
Abstract: On the face of it, the rise of modern church architecture appears closely linked to the development of liturgical reform. Both were anticipated in Western Europe shortly before World War I, became discernible movements after that war, gained mainstream adherence after World War II, and became canonical if not virtually universal after the Second Vatican Council, not only in Roman Catholicism but in mainline Protestant denominations as well. At every stage there were proponents of modern church design who took inspiration and authorization from the work of liturgical reformers. Writers on church architecture of the mid-twentieth century sometimes report with

Book Title: The Fate of Earthly Things-Aztec Gods and God-Bodies
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): Bassett Molly H.
Abstract: Following their first contact in 1519, accounts of Aztecs identifying Spaniards as gods proliferated. But what exactly did the Aztecs mean by a "god" (teotl), and how could human beings become gods or take on godlike properties? This sophisticated, interdisciplinary study analyzes three concepts that are foundational to Aztec religion—teotl (god), teixiptla (localized embodiment of a god), and tlaquimilolli (sacred bundles containing precious objects)—to shed new light on the Aztec understanding of how spiritual beings take on form and agency in the material world. In The Fate of Earthly Things, Molly Bassett draws on ethnographic fieldwork, linguistic analyses, visual culture, and ritual studies to explore what ritual practices such as human sacrifice and the manufacture of deity embodiments (including humans who became gods), material effigies, and sacred bundles meant to the Aztecs. She analyzes the Aztec belief that wearing the flayed skin of a sacrificial victim during a sacred rite could transform a priest into an embodiment of a god or goddess, as well as how figurines and sacred bundles could become localized embodiments of gods. Without arguing for unbroken continuity between the Aztecs and modern speakers of Nahuatl, Bassett also describes contemporary rituals in which indigenous Mexicans who preserve costumbres (traditions) incorporate totiotzin (gods) made from paper into their daily lives. This research allows us to understand a religious imagination that found life in death and believed that deity embodiments became animate through the ritual binding of blood, skin, and bone.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/760882

Book Title: Narrative Threads- Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): URTON GARY
Abstract: The Inka Empire stretched over much of the length and breadth of the South American Andes, encompassed elaborately planned cities linked by a complex network of roads and messengers, and created astonishing works of architecture and artistry and a compelling mythology-all without the aid of a graphic writing system. Instead, the Inkas' records consisted of devices made of knotted and dyed strings-called khipu-on which they recorded information pertaining to the organization and history of their empire. Despite more than a century of research on these remarkable devices, the khipu remain largely undeciphered.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/769038

TWO Spinning a Yarn: from: Narrative Threads
Author(s) Howard Rosaleen
Abstract: Can a study of the cognitive and discursive principles at work in the telling of oral traditional stories in Quechua contribute to our insights into how the transmission of messages through the khipu might have operated? During the conference proceedings upon which this volume is based, the verbal component of the khipu-reading performance and the role of memory in activating the knowledge stored in the knots and strings were much commented on. Doubtless both cognitive and structural similarities exist between oral narratives that have no ostensible origin in the khipu and khipu-generated oral discourses. If a khipu’s message was indeed

FOUR Reading Khipu: from: Narrative Threads
Author(s) Ascher Marcia
Abstract: Beginning some thirty years ago, my collaborator (an anthropologist) and I (a mathematician) began an extensive investigation of Inka khipu. Our work included firsthand study of over 215 khipu spread throughout thirteen countries, in thirty-four museums and private collections. Recognizing the fragility and importance of the artifacts, we recorded and published detailed descriptions, including knot types and placement, cord and space measurements, and colors, for each khipu we studied (Ascher and Ascher 1978, 1988). We analyzed the khipu as a corpus, as well as analyzing them individually. Building on previous studies of khipu and on our own findings, we came

SEVEN Woven Words: from: Narrative Threads
Author(s) Hyland Sabine P.
Abstract: In 1750, Raimondo di Sangro, prince of Sansevero, published a curious book entitled Lettera apologetica. In this work, di Sangro reflected on the history of writing and, in particular, on the relationship between the mark of Cain described in the Bible (Genesis 4:50) and early textile-based writing methods. Among the more unusual passages in this book is the description of a secret writing system once used, di Sangro claimed, by ancient Peruvian bards (amauta) in the Inka Empire. According to the prince, this writing system was depicted in a seventeenth-century manuscript he had purchased from a Jesuit priest, Father Pedro

Book Title: The Political Unconscious-Narrative as a Socially Symbolic Act
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): JAMESON FREDRIC
Abstract: The Political Unconsciousis a masterly introduction to both the method and the practice of Marxist criticism. Defining a mode of criticism and applying it successfully to individual works, it bridges the gap between theoretical speculation and textual analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt1287f8w

2 MAGICAL NARRATIVES: from: The Political Unconscious
Abstract: The Marxian vision of history outlined in the previous chapter has sometimes, as we have observed, been described as a “comic” archetype or a “romance” paradigm.¹ What is meant thereby is the salvational or redemptive perspective of some secure future, from which, with William Morris’ Time Traveller, we can have our “fill of the pleasure of the eyes without any of that sense of incongruity, that dread of approaching ruin, which had always beset me hitherto when I had been among the beautiful works of art of the past.”² In such a future, indeed, or from its perspective, our own

3 REALISM AND DESIRE: from: The Political Unconscious
Abstract: The novel is the end of genre in the sense in which it has been defined in the previous chapter: a narrative ideologeme whose outer form, secreted like a shell or exoskeleton, continues to emit its ideological message long after the extinction of its host. For the novel, as it explores its mature and original possibilities in the nineteenth century, is not an outer, conventional form of that kind. Rather, such forms, and their remains—inherited narrative paradigms, conventional actantial or proairetic schemata¹—are the raw material on which the novel works, transforming their “telling” into its “showing,” estranging com

4 AUTHENTIC RESSENTIMENT: from: The Political Unconscious
Abstract: Such ideologemes are the raw material, the inherited narrative paradigms, upon which the novel as a process works and which

5 ROMANCE AND REIFICATION: from: The Political Unconscious
Abstract: Nothing is more alien to the windless closure of high naturalism than the works of Joseph Conrad. Perhaps for that very reason, even after eighty years, his place is still unstable, undecidable, and his work unclassifiable, spilling out of high literature into light reading and romance, reclaiming great areas of diversion and distraction by the most demanding practice of style and écriturealike, floating uncertainly somewhere in between Proust and Robert Louis Stevenson. Conrad marks, indeed, a strategic fault line in the emergence of contemporary narrative, a place from which the structure of twentieth-century literary and culturalinstitutionsbecomes visible

Book Title: Eating Beauty-The Eucharist and the Spiritual Arts of the Middle Ages
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): ASTELL ANN W.
Abstract: Reading the lives of the saints not primarily as historical documents but as iconic expressions of original artworks fashioned by the eucharistic Christ, Astell puts the "faceless" Host in a dynamic relationship with these icons. With the advent of each new spirituality, the Christian idea of beauty expanded to include, first, the marred beauty of the saint and, finally, that of the church torn by division-an anti-aesthetic beauty embracing process, suffering, deformity, and disappearance, as well as the radiant lightness of the resurrected body. This astonishing work of intellectual and religious history is illustrated with telling artistic examples ranging from medieval manuscript illuminations to sculptures by Michelangelo and paintings by Salvador Dalí. Astell puts the lives of medieval saints in conversation with modern philosophers as disparate as Simone Weil and G. W. F. Hegel.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt18kr4nz

6: THE EUCHARIST, THE SPIRITUAL EXERCISES, AND THE ART OF OBEDIENCE: from: Eating Beauty
Abstract: In Rome on October 6, 1554, in the presence of Ignatius of Loyola (1491–1556), Michelangelo Buonarroti (1475–1564) went down into the newly excavated foundation to set with his own hands the cornerstone for the Gesù, the mother church of the fledgling Society of Jesus.¹ Michelangelo, the master architect, had constructed a model of the church that he hoped soon to build. In a letter Ignatius enthusiastically endorsed Michelangelo’s plans: “Taking charge of the work is the most celebrated man known here, Michelangelo—who also has charge of St. Peter’s—and for devotion alone, without any other consideration.”²

7: WEIL AND HEGEL: from: Eating Beauty
Abstract: The Protestant challenges to Catholic eucharistic beliefs during the early modern period were implicitly tied to the covering of Michelangelo’s nudes and explicitly connected to an often violent iconoclasm that resulted in the destruction of works of religious art —paintings, statues, books, buildings.¹ What, if anything, does this historical rift within Christianity have to do with modern, Hegelian reflections on the imminent “end of art”?

Book Title: Mourning in America-Race and the Politics of Loss
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): McIvor David W.
Abstract: In Mourning in America, McIvor addresses significant and urgent questions about how citizens can mourn traumatic events and enduring injustices in their communities. McIvor offers a framework for analyzing the politics of mourning, drawing from psychoanalysis, Greek tragedy, and scholarly discourses on truth and reconciliation.Mourning in Americaconnects these literatures to ongoing activism surrounding racial injustice, and it contextualizes Black Lives Matter in the broader politics of grief and recognition. McIvor also examines recent, grassroots-organized truth and reconciliation processes such as the Greensboro Truth and Reconciliation Commission (2004-2006), which provided a public examination of the Greensboro Massacre of 1979-a deadly incident involving local members of the Communist Workers Party and the Ku Klux Klan.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt1d2dmt4

1 THE POLITICS OF MOURNING IN AMERICA: from: Mourning in America
Abstract: In the late morning on Saturday, November 3, 1979, a caravan of Ku Klux Klansmen steered its way through the streets of Greensboro, North Carolina. The thirty-five individuals packed into nine automobiles were on their way to disrupt a scheduled rally in a black public-housing neighborhood that had been planned by the Communist Workers Party (CWP), which had been organizing mill and cafeteria workers along with the Greensboro Association for Poor People (GAPP). Ostensibly, this disruption was to be limited to throwing eggs and making speeches, but the pistols and shotguns packed into the Klansmen’s vehicles bespoke other possibilities. As

4 “THE IS TROUBLE HERE. THERE IS MORE TO COME”: from: Mourning in America
Abstract: In this chapter, I begin to sketch out in more detail the constitutive aspects of what I am calling the democratic work of mourning. The democratic work of mourning involves the public spaces and practices by which the traumas of collective life are publicly worked through in ways that enliven social struggles for recognition while mitigating denial, disavowal, and distrust. In articulating this concept, I lean heavily on the work of object relations psychoanalysis and, in particular, the approach to mourning found in Melanie Klein and D. W. Winnicott. Klein’s concepts of the depressive position and the good object, supplemented

5 A SPLINTERING AND SHATTERING ACTIVITY: from: Mourning in America
Abstract: In chapter 4, I argued that the Greek tragic festival marked a psychopolitical innovation in Athens of the fifth century BCE. The Great Dionysia provided a space within which the members of the polis could work through public traumas and intense anxieties by facing down the ambivalence of self and other and by advancing simultaneous moral and tragic narratives about the political project in which they were engaged—including an awareness of this project’s fragility, contingency, contestability, and susceptibility to radical rupture. The Great Dionysia was a Kleinian good object, shaped by psychosocial defenses such as idealization and omnipotence that offered

Book Title: The Deed of Reading-Literature * Writing * Language * Philosophy
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): STEWART GARRETT
Abstract: To take the measure of literary writing, The Deed of Readingconvenes diverse philosophic commentary on the linguistics of literature, with stress on the complementary work of Stanley Cavell and Giorgio Agamben. Sympathetic to recent ventures in form-attentive analysis but resisting an emphasis on so-called surface reading, Stewart explores not some new formalism but the internal pressures of language in formation, registering the verbal infrastructure of literary prose as well as verse. In this mode of "contextual" reading, the context is language itself. Literary phrasing, tapping the speech act's own generative pulse, emerges as a latent philosophy of language in its own right, whereby human subjects, finding no secure place to situate themselves within language, settle for its taking place in, through, and between them.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt1h4mhkq

3 ERRANDS OF THE EAR from: The Deed of Reading
Abstract: Phonic not sonic. Latent in literary writing, not mystified by it. Secondary vocality: registering hinted aural undertones in poetry’s descriptive overtones, the phonematic beneath the semantic—and certainly before the thematic, though often cycled back through it in response. That’s how—once moving beyond the referential foreclosures of deixis—the last chapter took up as central English example the “composed lines” of Tintern Abbeyand their enunciated syncopations. Even without anticipating in Stanley Cavell’s work the skepticism that poetry and prose alike, that the fictive world in general, faces up to and stares down, we can say so far, with

6 TALKING ROOM from: The Deed of Reading
Abstract: Literature’s script makes room for its own kind of back talk: that’s one way of evoking the vocal undertow of certain inscribed turns in the prose as well as poetry we’ve surveyed. In general, as I began by regretting, there is no disciplinary tautology (far from it) in thinking of “literature writing language,” let alone its “writing language philosophy.” For language is often forgotten in cultural estimates of what is too causally termed literary writingand its effects. Whenever in evidence, any attention to the disclosure, rather than sheer service, of language within a work of words tends to educe

Book Title: Making All the Difference-Inclusion, Exclusion, and American Law
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): MINOW MARTHA
Abstract: Here is a powerful voice for change, speaking to issues that permeate our daily lives and form a central part of the work of law. By illuminating the many ways in which people differ from one another, this book shows how lawyers, political theorist, teachers, parents, students-every one of us-can make all the difference,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt1tm7j8t

CHAPTER 7 The Emergence of the Social-Relations Approach from: Making All the Difference
Abstract: The limitations of rights analysis were not unknown to the reformers who challenged the institutional treatment of mentally retarded people. They worked within a rights framework but also looked to other disciplines to reimagine the legal entitlements of marginalized people. Litigators developed an argument that the label of mental retardation is a stigma that deprives individuals of their liberty; therefore, the right to due process applies before the label can be assigned.¹ To build this argument, the critics of labeling drew on a theory developed by sociologists and shifted the focus from the deviant person to the process by which

CHAPTER 9 Rights and Relations: from: Making All the Difference
Abstract: Progressive reformers and sympathetic theorists at the turn of the century criticized liberal rights for permitting an abusive capitalism and for rendering poor and working-class people vulnerable to urban, industrial hazards and onerous working conditions. Contemporary critics cite the impoverished vision of human community implicit in liberal rights.¹ Something was lost through the triumph of liberal rights, some sense of community and mutual obligation.

Book Title: Language as Hermeneutic-A Primer on the Word and Digitization
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): van den Berg Sara
Abstract: In addition to the edited text of Language as Hermeneutic, this volume includes essays on the reconstruction of Ong's work and its significance within Ong's intellectual project, as well as a previously unpublished article by Ong, "Time, Digitization, and Dalí's Memory," which further explores language's role in preserving and enhancing our humanity in the digital age.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt1w1vk5j

Introduction from: Language as Hermeneutic
Author(s) van den Berg Sara
Abstract: Language in all its modes—oral, written, print, electronic—claims the central role in Walter J. Ong’s speculations on human culture. His provocative work was honored by his scholarly peers, by the American and French governments, and by readers who came to know his writings not only in English but also through translations into many languages, including Polish and Japanese. He spent his career in St. Louis, and traveled throughout the world to lecture, to conduct research, and to meet with other leading intellectuals (Farrell, Walter Ong’s Contributions). In the final years of his life, Ong paid special attention to

Prologue from: Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: A thesis of these reflections is that there are two encompassing and complementary movements significantly dominating the development of world culture today, digitization and hermeneutics—which is to say (as will be explained more fully throughout the work)—a fractioning movement and a holistic movement, and that these movements explain something of what has been going on in the development of human beings’ intellectual relationship and concomitant relationships to the world around them, chiefly in highly technologized societies but indirectly through all the world.

1 Orality, Writing, Presence from: Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: The historical origins of hermeneutics as a self-conscious discipline from the study of texts together with our typographical fixation on texts have occluded general awareness, even among scholars, that all use of language, not just textual use, is hermeneutic. This is the center point of this work. Hermeneutics, in the sense earlier described, the making clear to a given audience or milieu something in a manifestation that is not evident to this audience or milieu, was being practiced tens or even hundreds of thousands of years before writing was even thought of as a possibility. Speech, oral or textual, is

2 Hermeneutics, Textual and Other from: Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: Language, Gadamer observes in Truth and Method(354), is essentially writable and gains by being written. This observation is incontestable, although, as earlier noted, Gadamer’s work was too early to take note of the now vast studies (e.g., Havelock, Goody, Ong) concerning what language and thought were like in primary oral cultures (cultures with no knowledge of writing or even of its possibility—which is to say almost all human cultures over the ages, from some tens of hundreds of thousands of years ago until only some 5,000 years ago, when the first writing appears). Paul Ricoeur states that “writing

12 Epilogue: from: Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: In these reflections, we have been examining hermeneutics largely in terms of logosandmythos, more or less as these were polarized following the work of Plato, implemented as this work was by thought patterns made possible by the introduction of writing in Greek culture. Which is the more inclusive,logosormythos? Either? Neither? And in what sense or senses? These final reflections will attempt to deal with such questions. The reflections will be more suggestive than totally conclusive.

Language as Hermeneutic: from: Language as Hermeneutic
Author(s) Zlatic Thomas D.
Abstract: Walter J. Ong envisioned Language as Hermeneuticas a distillation of his life work. In 1990 he explained to a potential publisher, “Like this book of Havelock’s [The Muse Learns to Write], mine is a synthesis which I hope will prove useful at multiple scholarly levels, although its tone is at times also somewhat personal” (“Letter to Maud Wilcox”).

Book Title: Inconceivable Effects-Ethics through Twentieth-Century German Literature, Thought, and Film
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Blumenthal-Barby Martin
Abstract: In Inconceivable Effects, Martin Blumenthal-Barby reads theoretical, literary and cinematic works that appear noteworthy for the ethical questions they raise. Via critical analysis of writers and filmmakers whose projects have changed our ways of viewing the modern world-including Hannah Arendt, Franz Kafka, Walter Benjamin, the directors ofGermany in Autumn, and Heiner Mueller-these essays furnish a cultural base for contemporary discussions of totalitarian domination, lying and politics, the relation between law and body, the relation between law and justice, the question of violence, and our ways of conceptualizing "the human."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt1xx5gp

Book Title: Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images- Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Johnson Christopher D.
Abstract: While the nondiscursive, frequently digressive character of the Mnemosyne-Atlascomplicates any linear narrative of its themes and contents, Christopher D. Johnson traces several thematic sequences in the panels. By drawing on Warburg's published and unpublished writings and by attending to Warburg's cardinal idea that "pathos formulas" structure the West's cultural memory, Johnson maps numerous tensions between word and image in theMnemosyne-Atlas. In addition to examining the work itself, he considers the literary, philosophical, and intellectual-historical implications of theMnemosyne-Atlas. As Johnson demonstrates, theMnemosyne-Atlasis not simply the culmination of Warburg's lifelong study of Renaissance culture but the ultimate expression of his now literal, now metaphoric search for syncretic solutions to the urgent problems posed by the history of art and culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt2jbph1

4 Translating the Symbol: from: Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images
Abstract: It bears repeating: Mnemosyne is largely divorced from iconology as practiced by Warburg’s chief successors, who turn rather to his earlier work for their methodological inspiration.¹ Briefly put, iconology aims to explicate the significance of an individual artwork through the interpretation of the symbolic values attached to compositional or iconographic features. To decipher these contingent features, imbricated as they are in a medieval or humanist culture long since past, great erudition is usually demanded. Yet to grasp next the meaning of the work’s symbolic values, interpretation becomes mostly an intuitive act. This is because iconology tends to regard the individual

6 Exemplary Figures and Diagrammatic Thought from: Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images
Abstract: To illustrate better the motives, methods, and rhythms of Mnemosyne, but especially to chart more exactly its metaphoric logic, I want to turn again to the period after Warburg emerged from the sanatorium. Besides reimmersing himself in the cosmographical material that yielded, just before his breakdown, the magisterial essay on sixteenth-century German astrological imagery, Warburg began work in 1924 on a new topic, which eventually became the lecture Italienische Antike im Zeitalter Rembrandts, given at the K.B.W. in May 1926.¹ While only a partial text of the lecture survives, it deserves attention, firstly, because it directly informs panels 70, 71,

4 The Cambodian Refugee Camps in Thailand from: Condemned to Repeat?
Abstract: The Cambodian refugee crisis along the Thai-Cambodian border, which unfolded in 1979, arguably posed the greatest challenge to the international humanitarian system of the Cold War period. Victims and oppressors, at the outset indistinguishable in their needs, became bound together in a symbiotic relationship by the relief operation and the politics that determined its path. Seemingly powerless to change the political context in which their work was embedded, aid agencies had to confront the probability that their aid was reviving one of the most brutal regimes in modern history, the Khmer Rouge.¹

Book Title: The Light of Knowledge-Literacy Activism and the Politics of Writing in South India
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Cody Francis
Abstract: The Light of Knowledgeis set primarily in the rural district of Pudukkottai in Tamil Nadu, and it is about activism among laboring women from marginalized castes who have been particularly active as learners and volunteers in the movement. In their endeavors to remake the Tamil countryside through literacy activism, workers in the movement found that their own understanding of the politics of writing and Enlightenment was often transformed as they encountered vastly different notions of language and imaginations of social order. Indeed, while activists of the movement successfully mobilized large numbers of rural women, they did so through logics that often pushed against the very Enlightenment rationality they hoped to foster. Offering a rare behind-the-scenes look at an increasingly important area of social and political activism,The Light of Knowledgebrings tools of linguistic anthropology to engage with critical social theories of the postcolonial state.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt32b5k9

Foreword from: The Light of Knowledge
Author(s) Boyer Dominic
Abstract: It is with the greatest pleasure that I introduce you to Frank Cody’s The Light of Knowledge. In it, Cody brilliantly analyzes the work of the Arivoli Iyakkam, one of the largest literacy movements in the world, which mobilized millions across Tamil Nadu between 1990 and 2009. The Arivoli Iyakkam sought to increase the political participation and leverage of rural women and aspired to help them attain new, enlightened autonomy through literate access to science and knowledge. A range of socialist literacy movements inspired the movement, especially Paulo Freire’s “pedagogy of the oppressed.” Beginning as a volunteer-driven, nongovernmental project, such

1 On Being a “Thumbprint”: from: The Light of Knowledge
Abstract: I first started to understand the extent to which literacy activism is really a form of cultural work, not simply a matter of teaching people how to read and write, one evening in a seaside village. It turns out that many villagers were taught to desire literacy and they learned a number of other things about themselves and their place in the world along the way. The occasion of my awareness was a street-theater performance by the Dawn Arts Group, a drama troupe that had been organized by Karuppiah and Neela to encourage people to join Arivoli classes and to

3 Labors of Objectification: from: The Light of Knowledge
Abstract: Karuppiah conducted literacy lessons in the Dalit village of Katrampatti a few nights every week for about one year. Lessons were held outside, under a dim streetlamp by the side of a dirt road in the center of the hamlet. Some of his students were women he had known well his whole life as workers in the fields and as fictive kin. Some had only recently moved into the village after marrying one of its residents. Many of the older women remembered Karuppiah as a boy, from working on his family’s rice fields. He was one of the few from

Book Title: The Emergency of Being-On Heidegger’s “Contributions to Philosophy”
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): POLT RICHARD
Abstract: Polt's original reading neither reduces this challenging text to familiar concepts nor refutes it, but engages it in a confrontation-an encounter that respects a way of thinking by struggling with it. He describes this most private work of Heidegger's philosophy as "a dissonant symphony that imperfectly weaves together its moments into a vast fugue, under the leitmotif of appropriation. This fugue is seeded with possibilities that are waiting for us, its listeners, to develop them. Some are dead ends-viruses that can lead only to a monolithic, monotonous misunderstanding of history. Others are embryonic insights that promise to deepen our thought, and perhaps our lives, if we find the right way to make them our own."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt32b5pr

Introduction: from: The Emergency of Being
Abstract: The project seems crucial, but so far there is less consensus about this book than about nearly any other twentieth-century philosophical text. Is it “Heidegger’s major work” or “metaphysical dadaism”?¹ An earthshaking achievement or laughable gibberish? Specialists do not even

Book Title: Outlaw Rhetoric-Figuring Vernacular Eloquence in Shakespeare's England
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Mann Jenny C.
Abstract: Outlaw Rhetoricexamines the substantial and largely unexplored archive of vernacular rhetorical guides produced in England between 1500 and 1700. Writers of these guides drew on classical training as they translated Greek and Latin figures of speech into an everyday English that could serve the ends of literary and national invention. In the process, however, they confronted aspects of rhetoric that run counter to its civilizing impulse. For instance, Mann finds repeated references to Robin Hood, indicating an ongoing concern that vernacular rhetoric is "outlaw" to the classical tradition because it is common, popular, and ephemeral. As this book shows, however, such allusions hint at a growing acceptance of the nonclassical along with a new esteem for literary production that can be identified as native to England. Working across a range of genres, Mann demonstrates the effects of this tension between classical rhetoric and English outlawry in works by Spenser, Shakespeare, Sidney, Jonson, and Cavendish. In so doing she reveals the political stakes of the vernacular rhetorical project in the age of Shakespeare.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v6gk

Book Title: Overkill-Sex and Violence in Contemporary Russian Popular Culture
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): BORENSTEIN ELIOT
Abstract: For Borenstein, the myriad depictions of deviance in pornographic and also crime fiction, with their patently excessive and appalling details of social and moral decay, represented the popular culture industry's response to the otherwise unimaginable scale of Russia's national collapse. "The full sense of collapse," he writes, "required a panoptic view that only the media and culture industry were eager to provide, amalgamating national collapse into one master narrative that would then be readily available to most individuals as a framework for understanding their own suffering and their own fears."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v77v

Book Title: Paradigms for a Metaphorology- Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Savage Robert
Abstract: An afterword by the translator, Robert Savage, positions the book in the intellectual context of its time and explains its continuing importance for work in the history of ideas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v7cn

Translator’s Afterword. from: Paradigms for a Metaphorology
Abstract: Paradigms for a Metaphorology was first published in 1960 in the Archive for the History of Concepts (Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte), simultaneously appearing in book form with the Bouvier Verlag in Bonn.¹ At the time, Hans Blumenberg (1920– 1996) was known to the philosophically interested public only as the author of a half dozen or so articles scattered in various journals and reference works, one of which—“Light as a Metaphor of Truth” (1957)²—deserves to be mentioned as a preliminary study, or “proto-paradigm,”³ for Paradigms. His biography to that point may be sketched in a few strokes. Persecuted by the

Book Title: Artifice and Design-Art and Technology in Human Experience
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): ALLEN BARRY
Abstract: In an intriguing book about the aesthetics of technological objects and the relationship between technical and artistic accomplishment, Barry Allen develops the philosophical implications of a series of interrelated concepts-knowledge, artifact, design, tool, art, and technology-and uses them to explore parallel questions about artistry in technology and technics in art. This may be seen at the heart of Artifice and Designin Allen's discussion of seven bridges: he focuses at length on two New York bridges-the Hell Gate Bridge and the Bayonne Bridge-and makes use of original sources for insight into the designers' ideas about the aesthetic dimensions of their work. Allen starts from the conviction that art and technology must be treated together, as two aspects of a common, technical human nature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v967

INTRODUCTION: from: Artifice and Design
Abstract: There are many books about art, many about technology, but few about art and technology—about their affinity and the relationship of both together to human experience.¹ It is this relationship that is my topic here. I develop philosophical concepts of art, artifact, knowledge, technology, and tool, which I use to explore parallel questions about artistry in technology and technics in art. The result is a work of interdisciplinary philosophical research, with concepts and arguments drawn from evolutionary biology, cognitive psychology, science studies, aesthetics, and the history, philosophy, and anthropology of art and technology.

4. TECHNOLOGY from: Artifice and Design
Abstract: Technology was sold to modern societies as a wonderful engine of progress. Allied with science it would liberate people from ignorance and debilitating labor, deepen and extend democratic participation, and make the goods of high culture (music, literature, and so on) universally available. It would do all of that not by social revolution (abolishing property or social class) but by applying the science of nature to the problems of humanity. A few prominent examples from the latter-nineteenth and twentieth centuries lent credibility to the picture, including improved public health; labor-saving devices for housework and agriculture; enhanced access to high culture

Book Title: The Total Work of Art in European Modernism- Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Roberts David
Abstract: In a major departure from the existing literature David Roberts argues for twin lineages of the total work, a French revolutionary and a German aesthetic, which interrelate across the whole epoch of European modernism, culminating in the aesthetic and political radicalism of the avant-garde movements in response to the crisis of autonomous art and the accelerating political crisis of European societies from the 1890s forward.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v9cg

Introduction from: The Total Work of Art in European Modernism
Abstract: This is the first book in English to treat the total work of art as a key concept in aesthetic modernism, and, as far as I can see, the first to attempt an overview of the theory and history of the total work in European art since the French Revolution. It is therefore both an ambitious and necessarily preliminary undertaking, in which my guiding concern has been to demonstrate the significance of the idea of the total work for modern art and politics. The term “total work of art” translates the German Gesamtkunstwerk,coined by Wagner in the wake of

2 The Destination of Art from: The Total Work of Art in European Modernism
Abstract: The birth of the total work of art from the spirit of revolution cannot be separated from the fundamental break in the function, purpose, and meaning of art brought to consciousness by the French Revolution. The will to create a new civil religion that directly challenged the hegemony of the Catholic Church found practical and symbolic expression in the expropriation and secularization of church property. The remodeling of Sainte-Geneviève in Paris into the Pantheon of the heroes of the Revolution went together with confiscation and collection of church treasures destined to form the core of the national patrimony. Jean Starobinski

3 Prophets and Precursors: from: The Total Work of Art in European Modernism
Abstract: If we take Wagner’s manifestos Art and RevolutionandThe Artwork of the Future,inspired by the 1848 revolutions, as summing up the will to social and aesthetic regeneration of the whole period from the French Revolution to the year of European revolutions, it is important to add that his role as revolutionary prophet was anticipated and prepared by the social doctrines of the French age of romanticism.¹ Between 1830 and 1848 writers and artists built on the victory of the romantic generation to establish themselves as a social force in their own right. We observe on the one hand

4 Staging the Absolute from: The Total Work of Art in European Modernism
Abstract: If we define modernism (with Heidegger) as the epoch of the rule of aesthetics, the corollary of this definition is the loss of a nonaesthetic relation to art, which Heidegger understands as the inevitable consequence of the decline of great art. This decline cannot be measured aesthetically. It is not a question of the style of the work or the qualities of the artist. Artworks are great when they accomplish art’s essential task: to make manifest “what beings as a whole are,” by “establishing the absolute definitively as such in the realm of historical man.” There is thus a direct

5 Religion and Art: from: The Total Work of Art in European Modernism
Abstract: With Parsifal(1882) Wagner accomplished the return to the stage of religious cult, thereby fulfilling what Thomas Mann called “the secret longing of the theatre, its ultimate ambition”: to return to “that ritual from which it first emerged among both Christians and heathens.”¹ When Mann adds that this closeness to the sacred origins of the theatre makesParsifalthe most theatrical of Wagner’s works, it is clear that what is at stake is the very idea of theatre and that this is not simply a theatrical question. The secret longing of the theatre, we are to understand, expresses a secret

Conclusion from: The Total Work of Art in European Modernism
Abstract: In his memorable parable of the downfall of art since the spiritual synthesis of the Gothic cathedral, Adolf Behne captures the sense of loss that haunts modern art (see chapter 7). He charts the spirit’s descent from collective creation to the individual artwork as a progressive materialization that finally imprisons art in the picture frame, apt symbol of the framing of art as aesthetic object and valuable commodity. The frame, with its separating and isolating function, appears as the antithesis of the lost unity of the arts—the recurrent reminder that the commercialization of production and the privatization of reception

Book Title: Habits of the Heartland-Small-Town Life in Modern America
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Macgregor Lyn C.
Abstract: Although most Americans no longer live in small towns, images of small-town life, and particularly of the mutual support and neighborliness to be found in such places, remain powerful in our culture. In Habits of the Heartland, Lyn C. Macgregor investigates how the residents of Viroqua, Wisconsin, population 4,355, create a small-town community together. Macgregor lived in Viroqua for nearly two years. During that time she gathered data in public places, attended meetings, volunteered for civic organizations, talked to residents in their workplaces and homes, and worked as a bartender at the local American Legion post.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7z6pd

6 Beneficent Enterprise and Viroquan Exceptionalism from: Habits of the Heartland
Abstract: In their classic study of small-town life in the 1950s, Vidich and Bensman discovered that in the face of increasing competition from larger retailers, the local businessmen of “Springdale, New York,” attempted to remain solvent by ratcheting up their individual performances. The way to stay in business, they believed, was to work harder. In so doing, Springdale’s small-business owners became fiercely competitive with one another, increasingly unwilling to attempt innovations that seemed at all risky, and increasingly isolated from the community as a whole:

Book Title: Meaning, Truth, and Reference in Historical Representation- Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Ankersmit Frank
Abstract: In this book, the noted intellectual historian Frank Ankersmit provides a systematic account of the problems of reference, truth, and meaning in historical writing. He works from the conviction that the historicist account of historical writing, associated primarily with Leopold von Ranke and Wilhelm von Humboldt, is essentially correct but that its original idealist and romanticist idiom needs to be translated into more modern terms. Rehabilitating historicism for the contemporary philosophy of history, he argues, "reveals the basic truths about the nature of the past itself, how we relate to it, and how we make sense of the past in historical writing."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7z6r9

Chapter 5 The Trial Narrative in Richardson’s from: Mourning Happiness
Abstract: The Solonian idea of happiness casts a long shadow across history, in the form of the absolute priority accorded to the hermeneutic of happiness, no matter how happiness is determined in concrete historical instances. Let us consider how the Solonian idea works its effects, and what kind of “history” of this idea is even possible. We will discover that it is a strange and impossible history, even if it has taken place.

Chapter 10 Happiness in Revolution: from: Mourning Happiness
Abstract: The analysis of Kant has enabled us to understand the furthest expansion of the trial narrative paradigm—the replication of its logic in the discourses of ethics, politics, and history—and the most radical effects of the trial form. These effects are still visible in our lives today: the conception of happiness as an affect, the ambivalent attitude toward happiness, the structuring of our lives according to the alternation of desire/satisfaction or work/leisure, the ongoing legacy of utilitarianism’s reductive, mathematized conception of happiness. But the effects of the trial narrative are not always easy to discern: despite widespread criticism of

Book Title: The Aesthetics of Antichrist-From Christian Drama to Christopher Marlowe
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): PARKER JOHN
Abstract: In Dr. Faustus, Christopher Marlowe wrote a profoundly religious drama despite the theater's newfound secularism and his own reputation for anti-Christian irreverence.The Aesthetics of Antichristexplores this apparent paradox by suggesting that, long before Marlowe, Christian drama and ritual performance had reveled in staging the collapse of Christianity into its historical opponents-paganism, Judaism, worldliness, heresy. By embracing this tradition, Marlowe's work would at once demonstrate the theatricality inhering in Christian worship and, unexpectedly, resacralize the commercial theater.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7zk8k

CHAPTER 1 Lying Likenesses: from: The Aesthetics of Antichrist
Abstract: Despite a lot of variation in the commentaries, from the earliest of them onward Antichrist was frequently recognized as the supreme adversary and herald of the final days in part by his resemblance to the true Christ. “For the deceiver,” writes Hippolytus, “seeks to liken himself in all things to the Son of God” (Antichrist 6 [GCS 1:7–8; ANF 5:206]). Born among Jews, he would send his apostles to the nations and convert multitudes through the working of miracles. He would claim to be the messiah and “sit in the temple of God, leading astray those who worship him

5 “I See What You Say”: from: Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: Bernard Lonergan’s philosophical investigations of man’s noetic activities are among the richest investigations of this vast subject that we have. Together with other work of his, they have warranted the calling of an international congress devoted to the discussion of what he has had to say on this and other matters. His best known work on the nature of knowledge and of knowing is the still seminal book Insight (1957), but his other contributions on this subject are vast. In a little-known talk on “Consciousness and the Trinity” given in the late spring of 1963 at the North American College

7 From Epithet to Logic: from: Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: In 1672, two years before his death, John Milton published a logic textbook which he had written, it is quite certain, sometime in the years 1641–1647, and most probably sometime during the years 1645-1647, when he was teaching his two nephews and some other boys. The work is in Latin, as textbooks in all subjects normally had always been in Western Europe from classical times. Milton’s concern with logic, evinced by this book, shows itself throughout the corpus of his writings, as many modern studies have made clear.¹ Nowhere perhaps does this concern show itself more than in Paradise

Medievalism in the Margins: from: Studies in Medievalism XXIV
Author(s) Emery Elizabeth
Abstract: The decisions made in publishing editions or excerpts of medieval works are a form of medievalism, revealing what particular editors think about the Middle Ages. What kinds of medieval texts are considered important and for what reasons? How are they reproduced

Echoes from the Middle Ages: from: Studies in Medievalism XXIV
Author(s) Gomis Juan
Abstract: When the printer Antón de Centenera published Gómez Manrique’s Regimiento de príncipesin 1482, he could hardly have imagined that he was creating a new publishing line whose fortune in Spain would extend over four centuries. Since it was only a short work, Centenera used a single sheet for it, producing the first known pliego suelto in Spain: cordel literature was thus inaugurated.² In the first few years,pliegos sueltoswere used only to distribute short works of poetry among the court elite, but in the early sixteenth century astute printers realized the great profits that they could make by

Modern-day Ring-givers: from: Studies in Medievalism XXIV
Author(s) Simon-Jones Lindsey
Abstract: In modern, massively multiplayer online role playing games (MMORPGs), players are creating and challenging normative cultural structures as they establish, sustain, and cultivate new virtual societies. Moreover, many of these games rely heavily on medieval aspects for both their game content and their community frameworks. As Oliver Traxel notes, nearly all MMORPGs include some aspect of the medieval: “Some of the latter [computer games] are grounded in thorough research on the historical circumstances of the Middle Ages, but many more depend on overt fiction from or about the period, and almost all incorporate at least some pseudo-medieval elements.”¹ Thus, it

Book Title: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Koepke Wulf
Abstract: Johann Gottfried Herder (1744-1803) is one of the great names of the classical age of German literature. One of the last universalists, he wrote on aesthetics, literary history and theory, historiography, anthropology, psychology, education, and theology; translated and adapted poetry from ancient Greek, English, Italian, even from Persian and Arabic; collected folk songs from around the world; and pioneered a better understanding of non-European cultures. A student of Kant's, he became Goethe's mentor in Strasbourg, and was a mastermind of the Sturm und Drang and a luminary of classical Weimar. But the wide range of Herder's interests and writings, along with his unorthodox ways of seeing things, seems to have prevented him being fully appreciated for any of them. His image has also been clouded by association with political ideologies, the proponents of which ignored the message of Humanität in his texts. So although Herder is acknowledged by scholars to be one of the great thinkers of European Enlightenment, there is no up-to-date, comprehensive introduction to his works in English, a lacuna this book fills with seventeen new, specially commissioned essays. Contributors: Hans Adler, Wulf Koepke, Steven Martinson, Marion Heinz and Heinrich Clairmont, John Zammito, Jürgen Trabant, Stefan Greif, Ulrich Gaier, Karl Menges, Christoph Bultmann, Martin Keler, Arnd Bohm, Gerhard Sauder, Robert E. Norton, Harro Müller-Michaels, Günter Arnold, Kurt Kloocke, and Ernest A. Menze. Hans Adler is Halls-Bascom Professor of Modern Literature Studies at the University of Wisconsin-Madison. Wulf Koepke is Distinguished Professor Emeritus of German, Texas A&M University and recipient of the Medal of the International J. G. Herder Society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt14brrn7

Introduction from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Koepke Wulf
Abstract: The present volume tries to convey a comprehensive picture of the life and works of Johann Gottfried Herder. The nineteen authors of the following seventeen articles provide an overview of the diverse aspects of Herder’s contributions to eighteenth-century culture and beyond. It is no coincidence that this volume is the first collaborative attempt ever to compile a Companionto Herder’s works. Today it is possible and timely to do justice to Herder’s work and ideas as an achievement in their own right, to view his work as an independent historical-philosophical approach to almost all important problems of the Enlightenment and

1: Herder’s Life and Works from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Martinson Steven D.
Abstract: Johann Gottfried Herder (1744–1803) was born into a family of modest means in the German-speaking town of Mohrungen in East Prussia (today Morag in Poland) on 25 August 1744. Both his grandfather, Christoph (1681–1750), and his father, Gottfried (1706–63), were master weavers. His father was forced to supplement his trade by working as a sexton, choirmaster, and instructor for girls at the local Lutheran congregation. Jakob Peltz, Anna Elisabeth’s father, was quite successful as a master shoemaker. Herder recalled that his father was strict and just but equally good-natured, and he was good to his children. Johann

4: Herder’s Concept of Humanität from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Adler Hans
Abstract: Johann Gottfried Herder has long been known for having developed groundbreaking concepts of thought as well as having modified those of others decisively. Humanitätis—along with concepts such as origin, history, culture, Volk, and language—one of the core concepts of Herder’s works. As a matter of fact,Humanitätis Herder’s all-encompassing concept. All his thinking, writing, and actions were centered around it. In short: Herder was the philosopher ofHumanität.Not only has Herder often been called “the philosopher of humanity”; he has also been accused of being the proponent of a vague “philanthropy.”¹ The fact that scholars

7: Myth, Mythology, New Mythology from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Gaier Ulrich
Abstract: Contrary to the widespread prejudices that the eighteenth century, being a period of rational enlightenment, was an “extremely barren epoch for research in mythology”¹ and that the call for New Mythology toward the end of the century signaled an anti-rational criticism of enlightenment,² myth plays a central role as early as in the works of Christian Wolff (1679–1754) and Alexander Gottlieb Baumgarten (1714–1762), protagonists of German Enlightenment philosophy. They represent, to a certain extent, the two traditions of the mythical mode of thinking,³ which can be linked, respectively, to Plato (427–347 B.C.) and Aristotle (384–322 B.C.).

10: Herder’s Biblical Studies from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Bultmann Christoph
Abstract: Herder’s work on the Bible has a distinctly theological thrust. Thus he asserted in the opening statement of his encyclopedic Briefe, das Studium der Theologie betreffend(Letters Concerning the Study of Theology) of 1780–81: “Es bleibt dabei, mein Lieber, das beste Studium der Gottesgelehrsamkeit ist Studium der Bibel” (There is no denying it, my good man, the best study of theology is the study of the Bible . . .).¹ Taking this idea even further, he suggested that ideally “jeder gute Theolog sich seine Bibel selbst müßte übersetzt haben” (STh357; every good theologian ought to have translated his

13: Herder’s Poetic Works, His Translations, and His Views on Poetry from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Koepke Wulf
Abstract: In histories of German lyric poetry, Herder has no place. Also, his narrative and dramatic works are rarely mentioned in histories of German literature. It is true that he contributed in an extraordinary way to the evolution of a “new” poetry in the 1770s, but through theoretical stimulation rather than in his own creative practice. Herder started early to write poems, and cultivated the genre his entire life. The fact that he did not publish volumes of his own poetry seems to indicate his own doubts about its quality. Only toward the end of his life did he plan to

14: Herder’s Style from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Adler Hans
Abstract: It is not easy to read Herder’s texts, and many scholars past and present have complained about this aspect of Herder’s work. The same, however, is true for texts by, say, Kant, Fichte, or Schelling. One important and hitherto neglected difference between Herder’s way of thinking and writing on the one hand and Kant’s and Fichte’s on the other seems to lie less on the level of content but more on the level of how the ideas and reflections are presented. There is a crucial difference of thinking and expression between Herder and many other philosophers. This difference is a

15: Herder as Critical Contemporary from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Norton Robert E.
Abstract: To an extraordinary and perhaps even singular degree, Herder’s life and work are defined by the practice, function, and meaning of criticism. Despite the numerous other roles he occupied — and there were many: theologian, philosopher, linguist, historian, ethnographer, to name only a few — it was in his activity as a critic that Herder revealed his greatest strengths and arguably produced his most lasting achievements. Indeed, one might reasonably argue that Herder approached virtually everything he did asa critic, that his thinking and expression as a whole are a reflection or product of a fundamentally critical habit of mind. It

17: Herder’s Reception and Influence from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Menze Ernest A.
Abstract: The study of the reception of and influences on literature is relatively new and, for the works of many authors, has hardly begun. Current literature tends to receive the most attention. In the past, literary works were often co-opted for ideological reasons and in the process misinterpreted and distorted; this was the case with Johann Gottfried Herder through the nineteenth and well into the twentieth century. Ultimately, Herder was discredited by nationalist perversion of his works during the National-Socialist era. Whereas there are several studies dealing with Herder’s early-twentieth-century reception history, little has been done regarding Herder’s influence in earlier

Book Title: A Companion to Julian of Norwich- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): McAvoy Liz Herbert
Abstract: Julian of Norwich, the fourteenth/early fifteenth-century anchoress and mystic, is one of the most important and best-known figures of the Middle Ages. Her Revelations, intense visions of the divine, have been widely studied and read; the first known writings of an English woman, their influence extends over theology and literature. However, many aspects of both her life and thought remain enigmatic. This exciting new collection offers a comprehensive, accessible coverage of the key aspects of debate surrounding Julian. It places the author within a wide range of contemporary literary, social, historical and religious contexts, and also provides a wealth of new insights into manuscript traditions, perspectives on her writing and ways of interpreting it, building on the work of many of the most active and influential researchers within Julian studies, and including the fruits of the most recent, ground-breaking findings. It will therefore be a vital companion for all of Julian's readers in the twenty-first century. Dr LIZ HERBERT MCAVOY is Senior Lecturer in Gender in English and Medieval Studies at Swansea University. CONTRIBUTORS: KIM M. PHILLIPS, CATE GUNN, ALEXANDRA BARRATT, DENISE M. BAKER, DIANE WATT, E. A. JONES, ANNIE SUTHERLAND, BARRY WINDEATT, MARLEEN CRE, ELISABETH DUTTON, ELIZABETH ROBERTSON, LAURA SAETVEIT MILES, LIZ HERBERT MCAVOY, ENA JENKINS, VINCENT GILLESPIE, SARAH SALIH
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt14brrrs

7 Julian of Norwich and the Liturgy from: A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) SUTHERLAND ANNIE
Abstract: Within the context of late medieval affective spirituality, the first of these requests seems entirely conventional, yet Julian positions it explicitly outside the devotional framework of the Church:

11 Julian of Norwich’s ‘Modernist Style’ and the Creation of Audience from: A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) ROBERTSON ELIZABETH
Abstract: Given the prominence of Julian of Norwich’s writing in the canon of English literature, it is surprising how little we know about her audience in general. Neither historical nor manuscript evidence reveals much about her contemporary audience. To determine who read or heard her work, either as a written or oral composition, we need to consider such questions as who Julian was, who wrote down her story in its short form and then in its longer and more considered version, for whom she intended these versions, and who actually received them. Despite the fact that these questions yield only fragmentary

14 Julian’s Revelation of Love: from: A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) JENKINS ENA
Abstract: Influenced – perhaps unduly – by an early encounter with Julian in Eliot’s Four Quartets, I have long read her as a poet, like Dante both a mystical poet and a theological mystic. Hinted at inA Vision Showed to a Devout Woman, this becomes a defining characteristic ofA Revelation of Love¹ and, in looking at both texts as a work in progress, I have perceived both poet and poetic in process of becoming, the growth of a poet’s mind as Julian seeks ways of communicating what can be told of the nature of her mystical awakening. To readA Revelation

Book Title: Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Treharne Elaine
Abstract: The dynamic fields of the history of the book and the sociology of the text are the areas this volume investigates, bringing together ten specially commissioned essays that between them demonstrate a range of critical and material approaches to medieval, early modern, and digital books and texts. They scrutinize individual medieval manuscripts to illustrate how careful re-reading of evidence permits a more nuanced apprehension of production, and reception across time; analyse metaphor for our understanding of the Byzantine book; examine the materiality of textuality from Beowulf to Pepys and the digital work in the twenty-first century; place manuscripts back into specific historical context; and re-appraise scholarly interpretation of significant periods of manuscript and print production in the later medieval and early modern periods. All of these essays call for a new assessment of the ways in which we read books and texts, making a major contribution to book history, and illustrating how detailed focus on individual cases can yield important new findings. Contributors: Elaine Treharne, Erika Corradini, Julia Crick, Orietta Da Rold, A.S.G. Edwards, Martin K. Foys, Whitney Anne Trettien, David L. Gants, Ralph Hanna, Robert Romanchuk, Margaret M. Smith, Liberty Stanavage.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt14brtk5

Manuscript Production before Chaucer: from: Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts
Author(s) ROLD ORIETTA DA
Abstract: This paper concerns books written in England in the centuries before Chaucer; it considers some of the current trends in our understanding of manuscript production from the twelfth to the fifteenth centuries. It represents ideas and questions which I formed during my work on two projects funded by the Arts and Humanities Research Council, which catalogued manuscripts from very different points on the medieval chronological spectrum. On the one hand, ‘The Production and Use of English Manuscripts: 1060 to 1220’ project (EM Project) deals with manuscripts containing English texts that were copied between the end of the eleventh and the

The Ellesmere Manuscript: from: Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts
Author(s) EDWARDS A. S. G.
Abstract: TO BEGIN WITH THE OBVIOUS: Geoffrey Chaucer enjoys a foundational status as ‘the father of English poetry’ and the Canterbury Taleshas been the most popular of his works. Over eighty manuscripts of it survive, complete, selected or fragmentary; and the earlier existence of a much larger number can be confidently inferred from a variety of evidence.¹ No English poetic work occurs in more fifteenth-century copies. In addition, it was the earliest major such work in English to be printed and the only medieval English one to have been consistently republished over the centuries since Chaucer’s death. In terms of

Vanishing Transliteracies in Beowulf and Samuel Pepys’s Diary from: Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts
Author(s) TRETTIEN WHITNEY ANNE
Abstract: This essay explores how media history and the printed book’s place within it contribute to the institutional identity of literature, and how the institutional strategies by which these past documents became and maintain their authority as literary artefacts have resulted in various forms of the ‘strategic forgetting and recoding’ that Jane Newman notes in the quotation above. When we started this essay, we chose two disparate literary works from our respective periods of specialisation, Beowulfand Samuel Pepys’sDiary, for the simple reason that they both were discovered as written documents, became literature through printed editions and scholarship, and now

Descriptive Bibliography and Electronic Publication from: Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts
Author(s) GANTS DAVID L.
Abstract: As part of a session at the 1977 Annual Meeting of the Association of American University Presses, five scholarly publishers prepared business plans for an imagined work entitled No Time for Houseplants, by Purvis Mulch. The University Presses at Chicago, MIT, North Carolina, Texas and Toronto each presented detailed procedures for the acquisition, editing, design, production and marketing of this made-up book. Published asOne Book / Five Waysa year later, the results of the experiment illustrate how the physical embodiment of a single verbal text can display quite different stylistic and bibliographical characteristics. Each press brought to the

Problematising Textual Authority in the York Register from: Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts
Author(s) STANAVAGE LIBERTY
Abstract: Recent work on medieval textuality has disrupted the popular notion that books in the Middle Ages were universally treated with reverence as almost magical objects, although the notion remains disturbingly persistent.¹ The past two decades have seen an increasing interest in destabilised texts, in reified meanings and in marginalia and glosses as a component of the text, rather than a defacement. Critics such as Peter Diehl, Siân Echard, Ralph Hanna and Carol Braun Pasternack have suggested variant editorial practices that recognise the complexity of texts, rather than reducing them to a single ‘correct’ edition.² Other critics have argued the need

Book Title: Aesthetic Vision and German Romanticism-Writing Images
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Prager Brad
Abstract: The work of the groundbreaking writers and artists of German Romanticism -- including the writers Tieck, Brentano, and Eichendorff and the artists Caspar David Friedrich and Philipp Otto Runge -- followed from the philosophical arguments of the German Idealists, who placed emphasis on exploring the subjective space of the imagination. The Romantic perspective was a form of engagement with Idealist discourses, especially Kant's Critique of Pure Reason and Fichte's Science of Knowledge. Through an aggressive, speculative reading of Kant, the Romantics abandoned the binary distinction between the palpable outer world and the ungraspable space of the mind's eye and were therefore compelled to develop new terms for understanding the distinction between "internal" and "external." In this light, Brad Prager urges a reassessment of some of Romanticism's major oppositional tropes, contending that binaries such as "self and other," "symbol and allegory," and "light and dark," should be understood as alternatives to Lessing's distinction between interior and exterior worlds. Prager thus crosses the boundaries between philosophy, literature, and art history to explore German Romantic writing about visual experience, examining the interplay of text and image in the formulation of Romantic epistemology. Brad Prager is Associate Professor of German at the University of Missouri, Columbia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt169wdp2

1: Interior and Exterior: from: Aesthetic Vision and German Romanticism
Abstract: Although Lessing was not a Romantic, his writings were important precursors to Romantic thought, especially his 1766 essay on the subject of the Laocoon, which served as a foundational moment in the Romantic discourse on the perception of art. The following chapter provides background for my general argument in that it explores the philosophical consequences of Lessing’s assertions about vision, art, and the exterior world. His observations concerning theLaocoonsculpture argue against the power of works of art as they are found “in the outside world” and instead favor aesthetic experience as it is said to occur in the

2: Image and Phantasm: from: Aesthetic Vision and German Romanticism
Abstract: For the Romantics the canvas and the written page were sites of contestation, spaces on which ephemeral experience was said to be represented in the material world. Art, understood in these terms, became the middle point or stage upon which something absent and intangible was made to appear present and graspable. It was, in other words, a material invocation of a sphere unavailable to the senses. In the following chapter I attempt to reconstruct the model of aesthetic perception in the work of Wackenroder and Tieck in light of the epistemological and perceptual categories laid out by Lessing’s essay on

4: Sublimity and Beauty: from: Aesthetic Vision and German Romanticism
Abstract: Most attempts to place the work of Friedrich in context tend to focus on his Protestantism, his patriotism, his contempt for the French, and the reasons he was confined to his bed after Prussia’s defeat by Napoleon in 1806. Friedrich’s paintings from that period are in turn said to express “a desire for freedom based on a revolutionary return to a better past.¹ While this may indeed be the case, I wish to put the larger European historical context in the background and focus on several formal components of Friedrich’s style. Because analyses of Friedrich’s work tend to involve questions

Conclusion from: Aesthetic Vision and German Romanticism
Abstract: In the preceding chapters I have studied a range of literary and visual works representing a variety of Romantic encounters with art that shed light on the relationship between the real world and the space of the imagination as it was conceived around 1800. These examples have served to paint a fuller picture, so to speak, of what I consider a major turning point in the construction of the modern subject, particularly in relation to aesthetic experience. The critics and artists associated with this period opened a space we still inhabit; the contradictions they confronted have not yet been resolved.

Book Title: Cultural Performances in Medieval France-Essays in Honor of Nancy Freeman Regalado
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Burns E. Jane
Abstract: This collection of essays pays tribute to Nancy Freeman Regalado, a ground-breaking scholar in the field of medieval French literature whose research has always pushed beyond disciplinary boundaries. The articles in the volume reflect the depth and diversity of her scholarship, as well as her collaborations with literary critics, philologists, historians, art historians, musicologists, and vocalists - in France, England, and the United States. Inspired by her most recent work, these twenty-four essays are tied together by a single question, rich in ramifications: how does performance shape our understanding of medieval and pre-modern literature and culture, whether the nature of that performance is visual, linguistic, theatrical, musical, religious, didactic, socio-political, or editorial? The studies presented here invite us to look afresh at the interrelationship of audience, author, text, and artifact, to imagine new ways of conceptualizing the creation, transmission, and reception of medieval literature, music, and art. EGLAL DOSS-QUINBY is Professor of French at Smith College; ROBERTA L. KRUEGER is Professor of French at Hamilton College; E. JANE BURNS is Professor of Women's Studies and Adjunct Professor of Comparative Literature at the University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill. Contributors: ANNE AZÉMA, RENATE BLUMENFELD-KOSINSKI, CYNTHIA J. BROWN, ELIZABETH A. R. BROWN, MATILDA TOMARYN BRUCKNER, E. JANE BURNS, ARDIS BUTTERFIELD, KIMBERLEE CAMPBELL, ROBERT L. A. CLARK, MARK CRUSE, KATHRYN A. DUYS, ELIZABETH EMERY, SYLVIA HUOT, MARILYN LAWRENCE, KATHLEEN A. LOYSEN, LAURIE POSTLEWATE, EDWARD H. ROESNER, SAMUEL N. ROSENBERG, LUCY FREEMAN SANDLER, PAMELA SHEINGORN, HELEN SOLTERER, JANE H. M. TAYLOR, EVELYN BIRGE VITZ, LORI J. WALTERS, AND MICHEL ZINK.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt169wfdd

Introduction from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Doss-Quinby Eglal
Abstract: Nancy Regalado has distinguished herself as a specialist of the Middle Ages, with work ranging widely from literary to cultural history and, more recently, staging and performance. Her publications include such seminal studies as Poetic Patterns in Rutebeuf: A Study in Noncourtly Poetic Modes of the Thirteenth Century(Yale University Press, 1970);Le Roman de Fauvel in the Edition of Mesire Chaillou de Pesstain,

Intimate Performance: from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Cruse Mark
Abstract: Nancy Regalado has devoted her career to one of the most important chapters in the history of writing in the West, the centuries between 1100 and 1500, which witnessed the rise of vernacular culture. As the use of writing expanded from ecclesiastical precincts ruled by Latin into courts and towns, with their common tongues, the very conception of writing – who could write, what could be written, how texts should look, how they should be transmitted, who could have access to them – underwent radical transformations. Nancy’s work has reminded us time and again that while texts are crucial when we study

Historicizing Performance: from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Butterfield Ardis
Abstract: Adam de la Halle’s Jeu de Robin et Marionis a work that raises issues of performance in both unsubtle and subtle ways. It has gained archetypal status by being not only a rare example of pre-1300 vernacular and secular “theater,” but also apparently the only dramatized version ofpastourelleandbergeriein the period. Less obviously, it stands out from the bulk of Adam’s works by having a possible connection with the Angevin court at Naples, a connection that has seemed hard to make with the rest of his more directly urban, Arrageois work. The courtly context of Naples

The Protean Performer: from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Lawrence Marilyn
Abstract: In the midnight quiet of June 8, 2004, in her French Department office at New York University, Nancy Freeman Regalado and I celebrated her sixty-ninth birthday by sealing a Federal Express box containing the manuscript for Performing Medieval Narrative, the volume we had edited with Evelyn (Timmie) Birge Vitz. Fortified by Nancy’s favorite fig cookies, we wrapped up years of work on our book dedicated to the performance of medieval stories.¹ Work on this volume made me more keenly aware than ever before of the centrality of performance and the performer in medieval French culture.

Performing Vernacular Song in Monastic Culture: from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Duys Kathryn A.
Abstract: Gautier de Coinci cast his Miracles de Nostre Dameas a single long performance.¹ Most of his work calls for narrative recitation of miracle stories composed in octosyllabic rhymed couplets, while his songs, many of which are set to the melodies of thetrouvères’ “greatest-hits,” call for minstrel-like singing.² These performance practices are easily recognizable from secular literary models, romances and love songs, and they are well suited to the recreational purpose of theMiracles de Nostre Dame. As I have argued elsewhere, Gautier explicitly designed his work as a spiritual literary recreation for monks, nuns, and pious laypersons to

Performative Reading: from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Sheingorn Pamela
Abstract: In the introduction to the ground-breaking collection of essays Performing Medieval Narrative, edited by Evelyn Birge Vitz, Nancy Freeman Regalado, and Marilyn Lawrence, the editors describe the focus of their book as “performance in its more interpersonal, dramatic, and physical dimensions (visual, auditory, musical).”¹ The contents indicate a clear adherence to that focus, with sections on medieval performers of narrative, oral performance of books, performability, and the experiences of performers who enact medieval works today. The editors nonetheless provocatively observe that, “Any way in which a narrative is actualized can be said to be a performance. In this sense, even

“Laver de ses pechiés une pecheresse royale”: from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Brown Elizabeth A. R.
Abstract: The New York Public Library’s manuscript Spencer 56 is a strikingly unusual devotional compilation.¹ I have worked on the volume for a decade, aided and encouraged by a host of colleagues, all of them admirers of Nancy Regalado and her work. I offer this preliminary consideration of one of its many facets as a tribute to Nancy from us all.

Preaching the Sins of the Ladies: from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Postlewate Laurie
Abstract: An important strategy in the method of early Franciscan preachers and poets was to evoke understanding of vice and virtue through concrete and visible examples. In sermons and catechetical texts, Franciscans used stories and poetry full of lively images to describe sin and show it in action; in this way, the Friars Minor provided literary performance of the vices and virtues for the purpose of correcting the sins of lay society.¹ Indeed our understanding today of what “sinful” behavior was for medieval people is greatly enhanced by the depiction and enactment of specific vices in Franciscan literature. The works of

Performing the Nation: from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Walters Lori J.
Abstract: This study examines Christine de Pizan’s description of the ceremonials surrounding the 1378 visit to Paris of Emperor Charles IV of Luxembourg.¹ These events figure in her 1404 biography of Charles V, Le Livre des fais et bonnes meurs du sage roy Charles V, hereafter referred to asCharles V.² The ceremonials included a short play put on for the Emperor by Charles V at the Great Feast held in his honor. In Christine’s version of the events, the play, which depicts French princes of the blood working together in a common Christian effort, can be considered to be a

Variegated Performance of Aucassin et Nicolette from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Vitz Evelyn Birge
Abstract: The literary works that survive from the medieval period have come down to us in manuscripts. We are grateful for those manuscripts, as we are for the work of the scholars who edit and study them. But we also need to think beyond manuscripts, to the fact that few people in the Middle Ages actually read the words inscribed on those

The Pitfalls and Promise of Classroom Performance from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Bruckner Matilda Tomaryn
Abstract: During the medieval period, Arras was a major commercial and cultural center in northern France. This course explores the complex world of Arras by highlighting two of its major authors, Adam de la Halle and Jean Bodel, whose works run the gamut of literary forms practiced from the late twelfth through the thirteenth century: from epic

Book Title: Middle English Romance and the Craft of Memory- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): McKINSTRY JAMIE
Abstract: In Middle English romances many memories are created, stored, forgotten, and rediscovered by both the characters and audience; such memory work is not, however, either simple or obvious. This study examines the ways in which recollection is achieved and sustained through physical, cognitive, and interpretative challenges. It uses examples such as Sir Gawain and the Green Knight, Sir Orfeo, and Emaré, alongside romances by Chaucer and Malory, to investigate the genre's reliance on individual and collective memorial processes. The author argues that a tale's objects, places, dreams, discoveries, disguises, prophecies, and dramatic ironies influence that romance's essential memory work, which relies as much on creativity as it does accuracy. He also explores the imaginative crafts of memory that are employed by romances themselves. Dr Jamie McKinstry teaches in the Department of English Studies at Durham University, where he is a member of the Institute of Medieval and Early Modern Studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt17mvhj3

3 Topography, Redaction, and Inheritance: from: Middle English Romance and the Craft of Memory
Abstract: In the previous chapter it became clear that the remembering subject must be willing to perform memory work in order for the process of recollection to be successful. This was examined in terms of voluntary intellection and, in a medieval romance, such a journey into memory must begin in order for the current romance to exist at all. As was discussed in the Introduction, romances are glittering examples of a golden age of the past and the sense of “looking back” is encoded in the narratives’ use of past places and literary analogues. We are always still very much in

INTRODUCTION: from: God and the Gawain-Poet
Abstract: The now well-established critical consensus that the four poems of British Library MS Cotton Nero A.x, Art.3 are the work of the same person is derived in part from the recurrence in them of particular motifs and preoccupations which to that extent draws them together. We shall go further, suggesting that what we call the oeuvreof theGawain-poet presents us with a coherent religious vision, deliberately explicated according to a particular order and within a particular social context. In order to answer the questions that the Cotton poems have raised, and to account for our various reactions to them,

Between Preservation and Destruction: from: Edinburgh German Yearbook 9
Author(s) Basu Priyanka
Abstract: This essay examines the archival practices of German photographers Bernd and Hilla Becher, focusing on their first decade working together beginning in 1959, during which they produced the earliest iterations of and statements about their ongoing project photographing the industrial structures they termed “anonymous sculpture.” It considers what they meant to achieve in this production by systematically documenting these edifices—pit heads, cooling towers, blast furnaces, water towers, and others used in resource extraction and processing—of the Siegerland and Ruhr regions of central and western Germany. The Bechers keenly sensed that the industries of which these structures were emblems

Saving the Present: from: Edinburgh German Yearbook 9
Author(s) Leahy Caitríona
Abstract: Marketing its 2014 retrospective of the forty-year career of Anselm Kiefer, the Royal Academy in London declared its exhibition “a testament to the career of a man driven to confront himself and the audience with the big and complex issues of our world’s past, present and future.”¹ Kiefer, the academy said, is “a colossus of contemporary art” who “takes over our main galleries,” filling them with his “quite simply monumental” artworks. The references to size here are apt in several ways: the physical immensity of Kiefer’s exhibits stretches the capacity of the Royal Academy to accommodate them; related to that

Harun Farocki’s Critical Film Archive from: Edinburgh German Yearbook 9
Author(s) Ring Annie
Abstract: Harun Farocki died in Berlin in July 2014 at the height of an unmatched career in political filmmaking. The oeuvre of this graduate of the Deutsche Film und Fernsehakademie (German Film and Television Academy Berlin; dffb) is characterized by a technique of repurposing moving-image archives in a critical documentary mode crafted to reveal the hidden processes of preparation, acculturation, and training that pervasively constitute the present-day West and render its citizens unwittingly yet habitually complicit. In this chapter I focus on Farocki’s works that piece together found footage drawn from such diverse sources as classic Hollywood feature film, prison CCTV

Book Title: Forgotten Dreams-Revisiting Romanticism in the Cinema of Werner Herzog
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Johnson Laurie Ruth
Abstract: Werner Herzog (b. 1942) is perhaps the most famous living German filmmaker, but his films have never been read in the context of German cultural history. And while there is a surfeit of film reviews, interviews, and scholarly articles on Herzog and his work, there are very few books devoted to his films, and none addressing his entire career to date. Until now. Forgotten Dreams offers not only an analytical study of Herzog's films but also a new reading of Romanticism's impact beyond the nineteenth century. It argues that his films re-envision and help us better understand a critical stream in Romanticism, and places the films in conversation with other filmmakers, authors, and philosophers in order to illuminate that critical stream. The result is a lively reconnection with Romantic themes and convictions that have been partly forgotten in the midst of Germany's postwar rejection of much of Romantic thought, yet are still operative in German culture today. The film analyses will interest scholars of film, German Studies, and Romanticism as well as a broader public interested in Herzog's films and contemporary German cultural debates. The book will also appeal to those interested in the ongoing renegotiation - by Western and other cultures - of relationships between reason and passion, civilization and wild nature, knowledge and belief. Laurie Ruth Johnson is Associate Professor of German, Comparative and World Literature, and Criticism and Interpretive Theory at the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt18kr6wj

Introduction: from: Forgotten Dreams
Abstract: Writing in Lima on June 25, 1979, where he had arrived to work on preproduction for Fitzcarraldo, Werner Herzog called Peru a “sleepy country at which God’s wrath has cooled.”¹ But two years later, after the arduous creation of a film in which a steamship was pulled over a mountain in the jungle, political controversy and financial catastrophe nearly ended production, and the indigenous extras threatened to kill the lead actor, the director described the weather as a heaven-sent curse: “Today (June 5, 1981) the rain came down at midday as God’s scourge strikes the impious.”² Despite his short-lived conversion

Book Title: Verse and Voice in Byrd's Song Collections of 1588 and 1589- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Smith Jeremy L.
Abstract: As he grappled with the challenges of composing for various instrumental and vocal ensembles, William Byrd (c. 1540-1623), England's premier Renaissance composer, devoted considerable attention to the poetry and prose of his native language, producing such treasured masterpieces as the hauntingly beautiful "Lulla lullaby"; the infectiously comedic "Though Amarillis dance in green"; and two extraordinarily dramatic Easter anthems. This book, the first full-length study specifically devoted to Byrd's English-texted music, provides a close reading of all of the works he published in the late 1580s, constituting nearly half of his total song output. It delves into the musical, political, literary, and, specifically, the sequential qualities of Byrd's 1588 and 1589 published collections as a whole, revealing, explaining, and interpreting an overall grand narrative, while remaining fully attentive to the particularities of each individual piece. Often deemed "unliterary" and generally considered political only in his approach to Latin texts, which were often of special interest to his fellow Catholics, Byrd was not only an inspired composer who had mastered the challenges of his nation's burgeoning verse, but also one who used his voice in song to foster a more inclusive polity in a time of religious strife. Jeremy L. Smith is Associate Professor of Musicology at the University of Colorado Boulder.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1bh49c3

CHAPTER 2 Sonets & Pastoralls, I from: Verse and Voice in Byrd's Song Collections of 1588 and 1589
Abstract: The middle section of Byrd’s Psalmes, Sonets, &songs of sadnes and pietie, with sixteen songs (BE 12: 11–26), is the longest of the set. On the title page Byrd labeled the works “sonets” (BE 12, p. xli) but at the opening and ending of the section he added the word “pastoralls” (BE 12: 11) in describing them again. Neither term was used very precisely at the time, but the latter proves to be slightly more helpful, as only two songs in the section are sonnets (BE 12: 18 and BE 12: 20) whereas more, although by no means all,

CHAPTER 3 Sonets & Pastoralls, II from: Verse and Voice in Byrd's Song Collections of 1588 and 1589
Abstract: The four works of the “sonets” section on temperance, discussed in the previous chapter, form a clearly defined set that comes to a satisfying close, at least in terms of structure and narrative. Yet there are some issues evoked within them that would resonate into the next series. In the key poem of that earlier group, “Who likes to love” (BE 12: 13), Cupid was ousted from his throne because of his “love for golde” (l. 24). The gods then granted some women whom Cupid had abused a “longer day” (l. 21) to “devise” (i.e., decide, l. 22) who should

CHAPTER 6 Songs of Three Parts from: Verse and Voice in Byrd's Song Collections of 1588 and 1589
Abstract: In the preface to his Songs of sundrie naturesof 1589 Byrd celebrates the success of hisPsalmes, Sonets,& songsof 1588 – its “good passage and utterance” (BE 13, p. xxxvii) – and offers this happy outcome as his rationale for publishing another set of music of a similar vein. In 1588 he could describe all the works therein as originally composed for a single voice and (four) instruments, although he makes sure to note that he has added texts to all the parts in the edition. As they were so consistent in their scoring and, to some extent,

Book Title: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Whitehead Chris
Abstract: Across the global networks of heritage sites, museums, and galleries, the importance of communities to the interpretation and conservation of heritage is increasingly being recognised. Yet the very term "meaningful community engagement" betrays a myriad of contrary approaches and understandings. Who is a community? How can they engage with heritage and why would they want to? How do communities and heritage professionals perceive one another? What does it mean to "engage"? These questions unsettle the very foundations of community engagement and indicate a need to unpick this important but complex trend. Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities critically explores the latest debates and practices surrounding community collaboration. By examining the different ways in which communities participate in heritage projects, the book questions the benefits, costs and limitations of community engagement. Whether communities are engaging through innovative initiatives or in response to economic, political or social factors, there is a need to understand how such engagements are conceptualised, facilitated and experienced by both the organisations and the communities involved.BR> Bryony Onciul is Lecturer in History at the University of Exeter; Michelle Stefano is the Co-Director of Maryland Traditions, the folklife program for the state of Maryland and Visiting Assistant Professor in American Studies at the University of Maryland, Baltimore County; Stephanie Hawke is a project manager and fundraiser, working on a range of projects aiming to engage communities with cultural heritage. Contributors: Gregory Ashworth, Evita Busa, Helen Graham, Julian Hartley, Stephanie Hawke, Carl Hogsden, Shatha Abu Khafajah, Nicole King, Bernadette Lynch, Billie Lythberg, Conal McCarthy, Ashley Minner, Wayne Ngata, Bryony Onciul, Elizabeth Pishief, Gregory Ramshaw, Philipp Schorch, Justin Sikora, Michelle Stefano, Gemma Tully, John Tunbridge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1kgqvrc

Introduction from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Onciul Bryony
Abstract: Across the global networks of heritage sites, museums and galleries, the importance of communities to the interpretation and conservation of heritage is increasingly being recognised. Meaningful community engagement is noted as a worthy institutional goal and is a common requirement of funding bodies. Yet the very term ‘meaningful community engagement’ betrays a myriad of contrary approaches and understandings. Who is a community? How can they engage with heritage? Why would a community want to? How do communities and heritage professionals perceive one another? What does it mean to ‘engage’? These questions unsettle the very foundations of community engagement and indicate

1 The Gate in the Wall: from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Lynch Bernadette
Abstract: There are a number of moments in the Somalian author Nuruddin Farah’s wonderful book Gifts(Farah 2000) in which Duniya, a single mother and nurse working at the hospital in Mogadishu, has cause to question the generosity of others,

4 Interview – Gregory Ashworth from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Ashworth Gregory
Abstract: Please could you reflect on your career so far, focusing on your work in relation to how communities engage with heritage?

8 Interview – Evita Buša from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Buša Evita
Abstract: Since I started to work in the museum field in 1996, when simultaneously finishing my Bachelor studies in Art History at the Art Academy of Latvia, I have been looking for answers about how contemporary art and art museums are relevant to peoples’ lives. Through the years as a professional my attention always was drawn to community-based art projects. After completing an MA degree in International Museum Studies at Gothenburg University in 2004 I moved to Puerto Rico, a small island very far from my

9 Interview – Shatha Abu Khafajah from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Khafajah Shatha Abu
Abstract: I work in the architecture department at the Hashemite University in Jordan. The department takes an interdisciplinary approach to architecture, and part of this approach is viewing material of the past, especially architecture, as a source of education, inspiration and creativity. Therefore, students, at their different learning stages, are strongly encouraged to critically examine and thoroughly analyse material of the past and use this analysis in their creations of new concepts, technologies and solutions in architectural design. This engagement qualifies material from the past to become

13 At the Community Level: from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Stefano Michelle L.
Abstract: ‘Intangible cultural heritage’, as defined by the 2003 Convention for the Safeguarding of the Intangible Cultural Heritageof the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO), continues to gain traction as a concept within the international heritage discourse. Despite the fact that a decade has now passed since the enforcement of the 2003 Convention, the issue ofeffectivelysafeguarding intangible cultural heritage (hereafter ICH) remains an important topic of debate at international, national and regional levels.¹ Most importantly, there exists a framework for the safeguarding of ICH that continues to gain international acceptance: the set of guidelines and suggestions

16 Relational Systems and Ancient Futures: from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Ngata Wayne
Abstract: This chapter explores the complex engagements navigated by heritage professionals and a self-defined and genealogically connected community working together under the auspices of two separately funded but related projects: ‘Artefacts of Encounter’, funded by the UK’s Economic and Social Research Council and Arts and Humanities Research Council and based at the University of Cambridge Museum of Archaeology and Anthropology (MAA); and ‘Te Ataakura’, funded by the Māori Centre of Research Excellence Ngā Pae o te Māramatanga and based at the Eastern Institute of Technology, Aotearoa-New Zealand.¹ These brought together Toi Hauiti, the working arts group of Te Aitanga a Hauiti,

17 Interview – Conal McCarthy from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) McCarthy Conal
Abstract: I have worked in galleries and museums since the late 1980s, in a variety of roles including education, public programmes, exhibition development, collections and curatorial. From 1996 to 2000 I was a developer at Te Papa involved in education, public programmes and interpretation, including discovery centres for children and some temporary exhibitions such as the iwiexhibition with the Te Aupouri people of Northland. Since then I have moved into an academic position in museum and heritage studies, but our teaching and work placements mean

Book Title: Secret Police Files from the Eastern Bloc-Between Surveillance and Life Writing
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Petrescu Corina L.
Abstract: The communist secret police services of Central and Eastern Europe kept detailed records not only of their victims but also of the vast networks of informants and collaborators upon whom their totalitarian systems depended. These records, now open to the public in many former Eastern Bloc countries, reflect a textually mediated reality that has defined and shaped the lives of former victims and informers, creating a tension between official records and personal memories. Exploring this tension between a textually and technically mediated past and the subject/victim's reclaiming and retrospective interpretation of that past in biography is the goal of this volume. While victims' secret police files have often been examined as a type of unauthorized archival life writing, the contributors to this volume are among the first to analyze the fragmentary and sometimes remedial nature of these biographies and to examine the subject/victims' rewriting and remediation of them in various creative forms. Essays focus, variously, on the files of the East German Stasi, the Romanian Securitate (in relation to Transylvanian Germans in Romania), and the Hungarian State Security Agency. Contributors: Carol Anne Costabile-Heming, Ulrike Garde, Valentina Glajar, Yuliya Komska, Alison Lewis, Corina L. Petrescu, Annie Ring, Aniko Szucs. Valentina Glajar is Professor of German at Texas State University, San Marcos. Alison Lewis is Professor of German in the School of Languages and Linguistics, The University of Melbourne, Australia. Corina L. Petrescu is Associate Professor of German at the University of Mississippi.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1kzccdr

7: The Stasi Files on Center Stage: from: Secret Police Files from the Eastern Bloc
Author(s) Garde Ulrike
Abstract: Approximately two decades after the fall of the Berlin Wall, a number of theater practitioners began to work with documents related to the German Democratic Republic’s Ministerium für Staatssicherheit (Ministry for State Security), the so-called Stasi files, in which the secret police service had gathered information on the lives of its fellow citizens. This chapter focuses on artistic engagements with this specific type of life writing in theater productions which encouraged individual performers who had been directly affected by the surveillance to engage, along with their audiences, with fragments of Stasi files in public performance spaces in and around Germany’s

Book Title: Luis de Góngora and Lope de Vega-Masters of Parody
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): KERR LINDSAY G.
Abstract: Co-Winner of the 2014 Publication Prize awarded by the Association of Hispanists of Great Britain and Ireland Kerr traces the processes and paradoxes at work in the late parodic poetry of Luis de Góngora and Lope de Vega, illuminating the correlations and connections between two poets who have more often than not been presented as enemies.The analysis follows the parallel development of the complex parodic genre through Góngora's late mythological parody, from his 1589 Hero and Leander romance through to his culminating parody, La fábula de Píramo y Tisbe (1618) and Lope de Vega's alter ego Tomé de Burguillos, whose anthology, Rimas humanas y divinas del licenciado Tomé de Burguillos, was published a year before Lope's death, in 1634. Working from the premise that parody provides a Derridean supplément to exhausted, dominant genres (e.g. pastoral, lyric, epic), this study asks: what do these texts achieve by their supplementarity, and how do they achieve it?, and, the overarching question, why do these erudite poets turn to parody in an age of decline? Lindsay Kerr received her PhD in Spanish at Queen's University Belfast.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1t6p5zq

Introduction from: Luis de Góngora and Lope de Vega
Abstract: Luis de Góngora y Argote and Lope de Vega y Carpio, príncipe de las tinieblasandmonstruo de la naturaleza, respectively, are infrequently invoked together outside the realm of poetic belligerence. As the cultural landscape they inhabit bends and shapes to their gravity, these two literary forces collide in violent counteraction. This at least has been the prevailing view of criticism, bolstered by Emilio Orozco Díaz’s seminal workLope y Góngora frente a frente(1973), in which he illuminates the poets’ divergent poetic methodologies andethos.¹ Although Orozco admits a grudging admiration between Góngora and Lope,² my goal is to

Book Title: Writing and Heritage in Contemporary Spain-The Imaginary Museum of Literature
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): DAVIS STUART
Abstract: This is an innovative exploration of cultural heritage and the literary traditions that shape the contemporary literary scene in Spain. Through a coalescence of museum studies, metacriticism and traditional literary criticism the study interweaves discussion of museum spaces with literary analysis, exploring them as agents of memorialisation and a means for preserving and conveying heritage. Following introductory explorations of the development of museums and the literary canon, each chapter begins with a "visit" to a Spanish museum, establishing the framework for the subsequent discussion of critical practices and texts. Case studies include examination of the palimpsest and unconscious influence of canonical cores; the response to masculine traditions of poetry and art; counter-culture of the 1990s; and the ethical concerns of postmemory writing. STUART DAVIS is a Lecturer in Spanish, Girton College, and Newton Trust Lecturer in the Department of Spanish and Portuguese, University of Cambridge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1x71n1

7: “Eine Armee wie jede andere auch”? from: Twenty Years On
Author(s) Plowman Andrew
Abstract: This chapter explores the memory of the Nationale Volksarmee (NVA) of the German Democratic Republic in contemporary films and texts. It examines the origins of contemporary representations of the NVA in pre-unification works and offers readings of the following: the novel NVA, by Leander Haußmann (2005), and the film version of NVA, directed by Haußmann and co-authored with Thomas Brussig (also 2005), Jörg Waehner’s memoir Einstrich-Keinstrich: NVA-Tagebuch (2006), and Uwe Tellkamp’s novel Der Turm (2008). The NVA did not feature prominently in cultural production in the decade that followed unification, which focused rather on the Ministerium für Staatssicherheit (MfS, Stasi)

8: Matter Out of Place: from: Twenty Years On
Author(s) Pye Gillian
Abstract: As these opening quotations indicate, the questions of waste and discarding are central to the experience of transition in the former East Germany. The legacy of the destruction wrought in the Second World War and the infrastructural and material deficits of the GDR — the environmental impact of heavy industry and the rapid rate of obsolescence not only of material things, but also human skills and networks, in the turn from socialism to capitalism — mean that both physical and mental topographies have been profoundly affected by trash in the broadest sense of the term. It is hardly surprising, then,

12: Dances of Death: from: Twenty Years On
Author(s) Leeder Karen
Abstract: This chapter examines what might be termed the last literature of the German Democratic Republic (GDR). It is not so much concerned with the Ostalgie that has governed many films and texts that remember the socialist state or provide a “requiem for Communism,” to cite Charity Scribner’s influential work.² Nor does it consider the texts of the “Zonenkinder” boom that set out, more or less successfully, to re-imagine the GDR in retrospect.³ Instead it gestures toward a body of post-Wende literature that performs the last rites of the GDR more literally.

Book Title: Kafka for the Twenty-First Century- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Gross Ruth V.
Abstract: Franz Kafka's literary career began in the first decade of the twentieth century and produced some of the most fascinating and influential works in all of modern European literature. Now, a hundred years later, the concerns of a new century call for a look at the challenges facing Kafka scholarship in the decades ahead: What more can we hope to learn about the context in which Kafka wrote? How does understanding that context affect how we read his stories? What are the consequences of new critical editions that offer unprecedented access to Kafka's works in manuscript form? How does our view of Kafka change the priorities and fashions of literary scholarship? What elements in Kafka's fiction will find resonance in the historical context of a new millennium? How do we compose a coherent account of a personality with so many contradictory aspects? All these questions and more are addressed by the essays in this volume, written by a group of leading international Kafka scholars. Contributors: Peter Beicken, Iris Bruce, Jacob Burnett, Uta Degner, Doreen Densky, Katja Garloff, Rolf Goebel, Mark Harman, Robert Lemon, Roland Reuß, Ritchie Robertson, Walter Sokel, John Zilcosky, Saskia Ziolkowski. Stanley Corngold is Professor Emeritus of German and Comparative Literature at Princeton University. Ruth V. Gross is Professor of German and Head of the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures at North Carolina State University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1x72j1

3: Nietzsche and Kafka: from: Kafka for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Sokel Walter H.
Abstract: “Nietzsche and Kafka” is a significant but many-sided topic. That Kafka was always a Nietzschean from the beginning is confirmed by Max Brod, when he tells us about their first meeting. They indulged in a philosophical argument, in which Brod took the side of his favorite philosopher, Arthur Schopenhauer, while Kafka took Nietzsche’s side. Kafka was a Nietzschean from way back, and he remained one throughout his work in many differing ways.

6: Strange Loops and the Absent Center in from: Kafka for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Burnett Jacob
Abstract: Franz Kafka (like the rest of us) faces the disappearance of the millennia-old Transcendent Center from European consciousness. In the absence he does not find cause for despair but from it discovers a new dimension of existence. Through the deployment of underlying narrative “strange loops” (to borrow a term from Douglas Hofstader), Kafka’s work, in particular The Castle (Das Schloss, 1926), constructs an art that can survive the disappearance of a grounding center. His novel is an endless stairway on which, discovering that we are not lamed by the absence of God, we walk briskly on to meet ourselves in

8: Kafka, Goffman, and the Total Institution from: Kafka for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Robertson Ritchie
Abstract: Of all authors writing in German, Kafka is the one whose works have particularly fascinated readers throughout the world. One result is a division between what may be called the lay readers of Kafka and the professional or academic readers. The two groups are divided, in particular, by their attitude to the widespread notion that Kafka’s works must in some sense prophesy the Third Reich and the atrocities of the mid-twentieth century. Writing in the Times Literary Supplement, and hence largely for a lay audience, in 1963, George Steiner asserted that Kafka “was, in a literal sense, a prophet.” He

Book Title: The Novels of Josefina Aldecoa-Women, Society and Cultural Memory in Contemporary Spain
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): KENNY NUALA
Abstract: Josefina Aldecoa, in her treatment of themes such as a woman's place in society under and after dictatorship, mother-daughter relationships, war, and memory, confirmed her unique role as a contemporary novelist concerned with women's identity in Spain and as a writer of the mid-century generation ('los niños de la guerra'). The first volume of her trilogy, Historia de una maestra, was one of the earliest narratives of historical memory to be produced in Spain. In this sense, Aldecoa's work anticipated new developments in gender studies, such as the intersection of feminist concerns and cultural memory. This book offers a comprehensive examination of Aldecoa's trajectory as a novelist, from La enredadera to Hermanas, centring on her primary preoccupations of gender and memory, arguing that Aldecoa's fiction offers a new, more complex understanding of women's identity than previously understood. The work combines the two dominating theoretical components of feminism and cultural memory with close textual analysis of Aldecoa's narratives. Her novels highlight the importance of the details of women's daily experiences and struggles throughout the twentieth century, a period of significant socio-political upheaval and change in Spain's history. NUALA KENNY teaches Spanish at the National University of Maynooth, Ireland.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1x72wv

Introduction from: The Novels of Josefina Aldecoa
Abstract: The aim of this study is to present a comprehensive analysis of the novels of Josefina Aldecoa, which span the last three decades. In doing so, it employs a thematic approach, which is combined with a dual theoretical perspective centred on feminism and cultural memory in contemporary Spain. Such a structure accommodates an in-depth investigation of Aldecoa’s body of work and seeks to highlight the interconnection between women’s experiences and Spain’s current preoccupation with cultural memory. Moreover, a key objective of this book is to draw attention to the link between Aldecoa’s narrative and the historical and socio-cultural conditions in

Chapter 1 Feminism from: The Novels of Josefina Aldecoa
Abstract: In the following chapter, a brief critical history of the main tenets of feminist theory relevant to this book will be outlined. This will include an analysis of Anglo-American, French, and Spanish feminism. Each movement will be examined with reference to the political and social climate in which they emerged, the basic tenets shaping each movement and the strengths and weaknesses they possess. An understanding of the development of feminist criticism is essential if one is to appreciate the growth of literature by women in Spain, and thus, the work of Josefina Aldecoa, whose writing captures the reality of womanhood

Chapter 3 “There Are Two Great Oceans”: from: Interconnections
Author(s) Quanquin Hélène
Abstract: The anniversary of the American Equal Rights Association of May 12 and 13, 1869, was a watershed for American reformers. During the meeting, abolitionists and women’s rights activists severed personal ties already weakened by the debate over the Fourteenth and Fifteenth Amendments and divided into opposing camps. How did people who had been working side by side for several decades find themselves in the situation of choosing between the two causes—the rights of African Americans and those of women—they had previously fought for almost indiscriminately?¹ Trying to make sense of this rift, women’s rights activist Lucy Stone opted

1: Circles from: The World as Metaphor in Robert Musil's 'The Man without Qualities'
Abstract: In exile in Switzerland, having returned in the last years of his life to working on sections of the novel he had begun decades before, Musil told an inquiring friend that he was not, it was true, moving forward with his work, but that he was, he hoped, moving deeper.¹ This paradoxical deepening is attained by a circular, doubling-back motion that does not move the reader or writer toward a conclusion but rather calls attention to an experience of presence, an aesthetic resistant to progress. This resistance to forward-progression also reflects an ethical imperative based upon the complex analysis of

4: Still Life: from: The World as Metaphor in Robert Musil's 'The Man without Qualities'
Abstract: Musil began writing the different versions of the chapter “Atemzüge eines Sommertags” (Breaths of a summer’s day) as early as 1937 or even 1934; and, in an almost perfect circling, he was still working on the chapter on 15 April 1942, the day he died.¹ In these chapter drafts, which feature what appears to be a profusion of more metaphors per paragraph than in any other section of the novel, Ulrich and Agathe continue their “holy conversations.” These conversations are part of an epic deferral of physical consummation in their gated garden, which comes to represent an island excepted from

1 The Italian Appropriation of Sentimental Fiction from: Cultural Capital, Language and National Identity in Imperial Spain
Abstract: The great success of sentimental fiction during the first half of the sixteenth century indicates that, although these kinds of works may have originally been addressed to an exclusive readership pre-eminently preoccupied with the cultivation of courtly ideals and behaviors, they quickly attracted a much more heterogeneous public. This community was composed not only of noblemen intent on discovering the emblems of a longed-for world which was swiftly waning, but also of a bourgeois audience that found in these texts the elements of a behavioral code that could improve their status. From this perspective, the editorial fortune of the translations

3 Visual Eroticism, Poetic Voyeurism: from: Cultural Capital, Language and National Identity in Imperial Spain
Abstract: Luis de Góngora y Argote’s mythological poem Fábula de Polifemo y Galateahas received uninterrupted attention since it first circulated in manuscript at the court of Madrid in 1613. At the time, the object – along with Góngora’s other long poem,Soledades– of fiery and scandalized repulsion as much as of exultant praise,Polifemotoday is considered a masterwork of Spanish Baroque poetry.

4 Creating Identity: from: Cultural Capital, Language and National Identity in Imperial Spain
Abstract: The life of Ambrosio de Morales (b. Cordoba, 1513) occupied almost the entire sixteenth century, but the bulk of his work was circulated in manuscript and in print largely during its concluding quarter. The youngest of a lineage of cultivated scholars – his father a renowned medical doctor, his uncle, Fernán Pérez de Oliva, an exquisite Latin and vernacular humanist – Morales was appointed at a very young age to the cátedraof rhetoric at the then recently founded University of Alcalá. In 1563, Philip II also appointed him royal chronicler (cronista real). In this new role, Morales embarked on

Book Title: Gabriel García Márquez and Ovid-Magical and Monstrous Realities
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): ROBINSON LORNA
Abstract: This book explores the ways in which Ovid's poem, Metamorphoses, and Gabriel García Márquez's novel, One Hundred Years of Solitude, use magical devices to construct their literary realities. The study examines in detail the similarities and differences of each author's style and investigates the impact of politics and culture upon the magical and frequently brutal realities the two authors create in their works. Ultimately the book is interested in the use of magical elements by authors in political climates where freedoms are being restricted, and by using magical realism to explore Ovid's Metamorphoses, it is able to illuminate aspects of the regime of emperor Augustus and the world of Ovid and demonstrate their closeness to that of García Márquez's Colombia.BR> Lorna Robinson holds a PhD in Classics from University College London. She is the author of Cave Canem: A Miscellany of Latin Words and Phrases and the essay 'The Golden Age in Metamorphoses' and 'One Hundred Years of Solitude' in A Companion to Magical Realism (Tamesis, 2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt24hfs8

Book Title: Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Weiss Julian
Abstract: Professor Alan Deyermond was one of the leading British Hispanists of the last fifty years, whose work had a formative influence on medieval Hispanic studies around the world. There were several tributes to his work published during his lifetime, and it is fitting that this one, in his memory, should be produced by Tamesis, the publishing house that he helped establish and to which he contributed so much as author and editor right up to his death. The contributors to this volume are some of Professor Deyermond's former colleagues, doctoral students, and members of the Medieval Hispanic Research Seminar. Given Professor Deyermond's breadth of expertise, the span of the essays is appropriately wide, ranging chronologically from the thirteenth to the sixteenth century, and covering lyric, hagiography, clerical verse narrative, frontier balladry, historical and codicological studies. The volume opens with a personal memoir of her father by Ruth Deyermond, and closes with the draft of an unpublished essay found amongst Professor Deyermond's papers, and edited by his literary executor, Professor David Hook. Andrew M. Beresford is Reader and Head of Hispanic Studies at the University of Durham. Louise M. Haywood is Reader in Medieval Iberian Literary and Cultural Studies, and Head of the Department of Spanish and Portuguese at the University of Cambridge. Julian Weiss is Professor of Medieval & Early Modern Hispanic Studies at King's College London.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt284t3h

3 On the Frontiers of Juan Rodríguez del Padrón’s Siervo libre de amor from: Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond
Author(s) HAYWOOD LOUISE M.
Abstract: Much of Alan Deyermond’s work on sentimental romance concerned the various frontiers of the genre, be they generic or linguistic.¹ In this article, I wish to foreground the material frontiers of Juan Rodríguez del Padrón’s Siervo libre de amor(c. 1440) within its manuscript context as a participant text in a particularscriptum, ‘the unique presence that is the individual, concrete manuscript’ (Dagenais 1994: 129). The focus on the physical context ofSiervowill permit me some reflections on generic relations and linguistic analogues. My approach is particularly informed by the lines pursued by Pedro M. Cátedra (1995), Emily Francomano

9 ‘Manus mee distillaverunt mirram’: from: Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond
Author(s) TWOMEY LESLEY
Abstract: Alan Deyermond’s pioneering work on medieval Hispanic women writers began in the 1970s with the medieval volume of his A Literary History of Spain:

11 Vernacular Commentaries and Glosses in Late Medieval Castile, ii: from: Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond
Author(s) WEISS JULIAN
Abstract: The present checklist is the second in a series devoted to documenting the scope of vernacular commentaries and glosses on Castilian literary and religious texts during the later Middle Ages, a transformative period in the history of vernacular literary culture. Although the vast majority of the works included derive from the fifteenth century, the chronological span of these lists runs from the mid-fourteenth (with Juan García de Castrojeriz’s commentary on Aegidius Romanus’ De regimine principum) to the end of the post-incunable period (with works such as the parodic commentary on theCarajicomedia, composed 1506–19). The series starts with a

13 ‘Esta tan triste partida’ (Conde Dirlos, v. 28a): from: Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond
Author(s) Hook David
Abstract: This is the text rescued from a group of thirteen battered sheets of A4 paper, consisting of page proofs from three separate works, reused by Alan Deyermond on their blank versos as was his laudable habit. It represents the surviving typescript of a lecture delivered by him in Oviedo in 2003, as the opening session of the Jornadas de Homenaje Universitario a Isabel Uria Maqua(15–16 October). This torn, dog-eared typescript (the pages were not contained in a folder or document wallet) is a typical specimen of what seems to have been his latemodus operandiin preparing a

2 The Medievalist Rhetorics of Enlightenment from: Medievalist Enlightenment
Abstract: If the medieval did not function in the early eighteenth century, as it does in our own time, as a historical or chronological category, then how exactly did it work? I argued in the previous chapter that in actual linguistic usage, the term moyen âge often served as a literary or linguistic term, as reflected also in the common use of the accompanying adjective barbare to describe the period. In this chapter, elaborating on this notion of the medieval as a non-historical concept, I argue that during the early eighteenth century, the medieval came to embody essentially a moral category

3 Survivals: from: Medievalist Enlightenment
Abstract: Understanding the medieval as essentially a moral–literary concept, late seventeenth- and early eighteenth-century readers perceived it to be exemplified above all by one genre: the roman. In contrast to ecclesiastic historians and antiquaries who, like Mabillon, worked on charters, registers and capitularies that they did not explicitly designate as medieval,¹ it was to the roman that most other, non-professional or semi-professional readers turned when speaking of this period. Chapelain derived his arguments in favour of a reassessment of the medieval from his reading of the thirteenth-century Lancelot. Likewise, when commenting on the particularly French spirit of gallantry (esprit de

Conclusion: from: Medievalist Enlightenment
Abstract: In a provocative book about “the hidden agenda of modernity”, Stephen Toulmin has argued that modernity entailed a major philosophical shift. This was a shift from the oral to the written, from the particular to the universal, from the local to the general, from the timely to the timeless, and from humanism to rationalism.¹ The new modernity, whose rise Toulmin dates back to the major works of Descartes in the 1630s and 1640s, was marked by the “pursuit of mathematical exactitude and logical rigor, intellectual certainty and moral purity”.² While earlier thinkers had questioned the value of abstract theory for

Book Title: The Faustian Century-German Literature and Culture in the Age of Luther and Faustus
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Weeks Andrew
Abstract: The Reformation and Renaissance, though segregated into distinct disciplines today, interacted and clashed intimately in Faust, the great figure that attained European prominence in the anonymous 1587 'Historia von D. Johann Fausten'. The original Faust behind Goethe's great drama embodies a remote culture. In his century, Faust evolved from an obscure cipher to a universal symbol. The age explored here as "the Faustian century" invested the 'Faustbuch' and its theme with a symbolic significance still of exceptional relevance today. The new essays in this volume complement one another, providing insights into the tensions and forces that gave the century its distinct character. Several essays seek Faust's prototypes. Others elaborate the symbolic function of his figure and discern the resonance of his tale in conflicting allegiances. This volume focuses on the intersection of historical accounts and literary imaginings, on shared aspects of the work and its times, on concerns with obedience and transgression, obsessions with the devil and curiosity about magic, and quandaries created by shifting religious and worldly authorities. Contributors: Marguerite de Huszar Allen, Kresten Thue Andersen, Frank Baron, Günther Bonheim, Albrecht Classen, Urs Leo Gantenbein, Karl S. Guthke, Michael Keefer, Paul Ernst Meyer, J. M. van der Laan, Helen Watanabe-O'Kelly, Andrew Weeks. J. M. van der Laan is Professor of German and Andrew Weeks is Professor of German and Comparative Literature, both at Illinois State University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt284t7f

1: The German Faustian Century from: The Faustian Century
Author(s) Weeks Andrew
Abstract: As noted in the introduction, this volume aims to illuminate the Faust phenomenon by focusing on what the work shares with its age: the obsession with the devil and curiosity

10: Exploring the “Three-Fold World”: from: The Faustian Century
Author(s) Watanabe-O’Kelly Helen
Abstract: The title page of the original edition of the Historia von D. Johann Fausten¹ prepares the reader for a straightforward black-and-white “damnation narrative,” the inverse of the salvation narrative of the saint’s vita so well established in contemporary Catholic piety.² It emphasizes that this is a tale about a man who, entirely through his own fault, comes to a bad end and that it should serve as an awful warning to all “hochtragenden fürwitzigen und Gottlosen Menschen” (arrogant, inappropriately curious, and godless people). The title page even quotes, surprisingly for a Lutheran work, the Epistle of St. James (4:7): “submit

Book Title: Becoming John Updike-Critical Reception, 1958-2010
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Mazzeno Laurence W.
Abstract: When John Updike died in 2009, tributes from the literary establishment were immediate and fulsome. However, no one reading reviews of Updike's work in the late 1960s would have predicted that kind of praise for a man who was known then as a brilliant stylist who had nothing to say. What changed? Why? And what is likely to be his legacy? These are the questions that "Becoming John Updike" pursues by examining the journalistic and academic response to his writings. Several things about Updike's career make a reception study appropriate. First, he was prolific: he began publishing fiction and essays in 1956, published his first book in 1958, and from then on, brought out at least one new book each year. Second, his books were reviewed widely - usually in major American newspapers and magazines, and often in foreign ones as well. Third, Updike quickly became a darling of academics; the first book about his work was published in 1967, less than a decade after his own first book. More than three dozen books and hundreds of articles of academic criticism have been devoted to Updike. The present volume will appeal to the continuing interest in Updike's writing among academics and general readers alike. Laurence W. Mazzeno is President Emeritus of Alvernia University. Among other books, he has written volumes on Austen, Dickens, Tennyson, and Matthew Arnold for Camden House's Literary Criticism in Perspective series.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt284tfb

2: Making a Name on the National Scene (1968–1975) from: Becoming John Updike
Abstract: In retrospect, the period between 1968 and 1975 might be described as the “breakthrough years” during which Updike became a major novelist, introduced or returned to important recurring characters and themes into his fiction, and continued his exploration of the American scene. Of course, before 1968 Updike was well-known to a select group of readers and critics, many of whom had high regard for his work. While his audience among the general readership was considerable, it did not rival that of contemporary popular giants—writers like Leon Uris, Mary Renault, James Clavell, Irving Wallace, Mary Stewart, and Arthur Hailey. The

4: Pulitzer Prize Winner, Vilified Misogynist (1981–1985) from: Becoming John Updike
Abstract: While there may be no annus mirabilis in Updike’s career, it seems fair to say that the decade of the 1980s was not only one of his most productive but also, perhaps, his most noteworthy. The first five years were ones of significant accomplishment. He began by publishing the third novel in the Rabbit series, following that highly acclaimed work with a sequel to his 1970 book on Henry Bech. A year later he issued a hefty collection of his nonfiction before making a bold foray into feminist literature with The Witches of Eastwick. Consistent with his publishing practice, in

5: Crowning Achievements (1986–1990) from: Becoming John Updike
Abstract: Updike managed to grab and hold the national spotlight with the publication of Rabbit Is Rich in 1981 and The Witches of Eastwick in 1984. Viewed in hindsight, however, his work between 1981 and 1985 was prelude to what was arguably the most important five-year period in his life as a creative writer. In this period he completed his Scarlet Letter trilogy, released a collection of short stories that reinforced his reputation as one of the most skilled practitioners in that genre, and published a self-deprecating memoir that sparked lively commentary. The appearance of Rabbit at Rest in 1990 garnered

7: America and Updike, Growing Old Together (1996–1999) from: Becoming John Updike
Abstract: Any thought that Updike, approaching sixty-five, might slow down as the century moved toward its close was quickly dispelled by the publication in 1996 of what some have come to regard as his finest single novel, In the Beauty of the Lilies. That work was followed in succeeding years by another novel, a new collection about Henry Bech, and a fourth compendium of nonfiction. At the same time, however, a new generation of reviewers, raised after the post-war years of American prosperity and the angst-ridden years of the Cold War, was beginning to describe Updike as a literary dinosaur. Throughout

Book Title: El documental cinematográfico y televisivo contemporáneo-Memoria, sujeto y formación de la identidad democrática española
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): ESTRADA ISABEL M.
Abstract: Este libro evalúa la aportación del documental cinematográfico y televisivo producido en España a partir de los años 90 al debate en torno a la memoria de la represión franquista, por un lado, así como a la construcción de la identidad democrática, en términos más generales. Propongo que tanto los documentales con un enfoque histórico explícito como aquellos cuya mirada retrospectiva se realiza sin referentes tan concretos cuestionan el proyecto político teleológico concebido durante la Transición. La primera parte de mi estudio trata de la memoria histórica de la guerra civil específicamente y, la segunda, de la memoria en un sentido socioeconómico para apuntar el déficit de agencia del sujeto en la democracia neoliberal. En última instancia se reivindica la marginalidad social de la víctima a la vez que se deja al descubierto su obliteración de los procesos democráticos. Isabel M. Estrada is Visiting Assistant Professor, Franklin & Marshall College. ENGLISH VERSION This book examines how a selected group of documentaries made since 1995 for both film and television inform the debate centered on the so-called "recuperation of memory" of the Spanish Civil War and dictatorship. Estrada contends that these documentaries modify Spanish identity as it was conceived by the teleological historical project of the transition. The narrative of mass media should be examined in order to comprehend the process of the "recovery of memory" that culminated in the Law of Historical Memory (2007). She carries out a comparative analysis of the visual discourse of the documentary and the narrative discourses of history and testimony, paying special attention to the relations of power among them. Using theoretical frameworks provided by Badiou, Adorno, Renov, and Ricoeur, this study ultimately sheds light on the status of the victim in the context of Spain's neoliberal democracy. Isabel M. Estrada is Visiting Assistant Professor, Franklin & Marshall College.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt2jbkxg

5 The Massacres of 1189-90 and the Origins of the Jewish Exchequer, 1186–1226 from: Christians and Jews in Angevin England
Author(s) Stacey Robert C.
Abstract: The Jewish Exchequer is not a new subject. William Prynne in the seventeenth century, and Thomas Madox a century later, were the first scholars to devote sustained attention to the institution.¹ In their wake, a series of twentieth-century historians have followed, each making valuable contributions.² But despite the attention that has been devoted to the workings of the institution, the historical context within which we should understand the Jewish Exchequerʹs emergence, and the significance of its emergence for the subsequent history of the medieval English Jewish community, are subjects that will still repay more careful investigation. Three points in particular

Book Title: Rethinking Hanslick-Music, Formalism, and Expression
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Marx Wolfgang
Abstract: Rethinking Hanslick: Music, Formalism, and Expression' is the first extensive English-language study devoted to Eduard Hanslick--a seminal figure in nineteenth-century musical life. Bringing together eminent scholars from several disciplines, this volume examines Hanslick's contribution to the aesthetics and philosophy of music and looks anew at his literary interests. The essays embrace ways of thinking about Hanslick's writings that go beyond the polarities that have long marked discussion of his work such as form/expression, absolute/program music, objectivity/subjectivity, and formalist/hermeneutic criticism. This approach takes into consideration both Hanslick's important 'On the Musically Beautiful' and his critical and autobiographical writings, demonstrating Hanslick's rich insights into the context in which a musical work is composed, performed, and received. 'Rethinking Hanslick' serves as an invaluable companion to Hanslick's prodigious scholarship and criticism, deepening our understanding of the major themes and ideas of one of the most influential music critics of the nineteenth century. Dr Nicole Grimes is a Marie Curie Fellow at University College Dublin (UCD), and the University of California, Irvine. Dr Siobhán Donovan is a College Lecturer at the School of Languages and Literatures, UCD. Dr Wolfgang Marx is a Senior Lecturer at the School of Music, UCD.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt2jbm3b

Chapter Seven “Poison-Flaming Flowers from the Orient and Nightingales from Bayreuth”: from: Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Brodbeck David
Abstract: On May 18, 1900, the Vienna Court Opera celebrated the seventieth birthday of Carl Goldmark with a performance of the composer’s Die Königin von Saba (The Queen of Sheba), a grand opera in four acts on a libretto by Salomon Hermann Mosenthal. Although he would miss this celebratory performance, Eduard Hanslick, the semi-retired music critic for the Neue Freie Presse, made sure to mark the day with a feuilleton in which he paid friendly tribute to a composer whose works had long been a fixture in Vienna’s operatic and concert bills.¹ Hanslick had always harbored certain misgivings about Goldmark’s music,

Chapter Eight German Humanism, Liberalism, and Elegy in Hanslick’s Writings on Brahms from: Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Grimes Nicole
Abstract: Eduard Hanslick’s reviews of the works of Johannes Brahms span from 1862, when he announced “the appearance before the Viennese public of this blond, St. John visage of a composer,”¹ to the year of Hanslick’s death, 1904. Composer and critic struck up a close and lifelong friendship following their meeting in 1862, a friendship they shared with the Austrian surgeon and amateur musician Theodor Billroth—the three being on intimate du terms and forming the “closest musical threesome.”² Hanslick was the music correspondent for the Neue Freie Presse, Austria’s leading liberal daily newspaper.³ It was here that he published his

Chapter Ten “Faust und Hamlet in Einer Person”: from: Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Donovan Siobhán
Abstract: Reading Hanslick’s autobiography Aus meinem Leben (1894), one could be forgiven for thinking that both a public discourse on gender and the women’s movement were completely absent in Vienna during the latter part of the nineteenth century;¹ for nowhere does Hanslick refer to this socially and politically rousing topic.² Events such as the Prater massacre in August 1848, which witnessed the brutal suppression of a protest by female workers against a 25 percent pay cut, go completely unmentioned. Had this been pointed out to Hanslick, presumably he would have retorted that his job as music critic had nothing to do

Chapter Eleven Body and Soul, Content and Form: from: Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Marx Wolfgang
Abstract: It has been common practice since the early nineteenth century to compare a musical work with a “living organism,” a metaphor that Eduard Hanslick—like Richard Wagner, Franz Brendel, and many others—also employed, both in his treatise On the Musically Beautiful (1854) and in many of his reviews.¹ That he rarely reflects on this practice is revealing of the underlying assumptions of Hanslick’s aesthetic thinking, his musical preferences and antipathies. These unreflected, apparently self-evident paradigms are particularly relevant to the intellectual horizon of an author and his epoch. On the one hand, there is the tradition of German idealism

Book Title: The Civil Wars after 1660-Public Remembering in Late Stuart England
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Neufeld Matthew
Abstract: This book examines the conflicting ways in which the civil wars and Interregnum were remembered, constructed and represented in seventeenth- and eighteenth-century England. It argues that during the late Stuart period, public remembering of the English civil wars and Interregnum was not concerned with re-fighting the old struggle but rather with commending and justifying, or contesting and attacking, the Restoration settlements. After the return of King Charles II the political nation had to address the question of remembering and forgetting the recent conflict. The answer was to construct a polity grounded on remembering and scapegoating puritan politics and piety. The proscription of the puritan impulse enacted by the Restoration settlements was supported by a public memory of the 1640s and 1650s which was used to show that Dissenters could not, and should not, be trusted with power. Drawing upon the interdisciplinary field of social memory studies, this book offers a new perspective on the historical and political cultures of early modern England, and will be of significant interest to social, cultural and political historians as well as scholars working in memory studies. Matthew Neufeld is Lecturer in early modern British history at the University of Saskatchewan, Canada.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt2tt1n8

12: A Good Irish German: from: Representing the "Good German" in Literature and Culture after 1945
Author(s) Fischer Joachim
Abstract: Over the last ten years Hugo Hamilton (born 1953) has emerged as one of the major contemporary Irish novelists; for Bernard O’Donoghue in a review of his recent novel Disguise he is even “one of the most important writers of our time.”¹ Hamilton’s success is, at least in part, due to the new and unique perspective he has added to Irish writing in English: born into an Irish-German family and an enforced German-and Irish-speaking home environment he has made this rather unusual upbringing the starting point for his extensive creative reflections about issues of identity and belonging. His work also

Public Engagement at Prestongrange: from: Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Simpson Biddy
Abstract: Prestongrange is an open air colliery museum managed by East Lothian Council and located between Musselburgh and Prestonpans (Fig. 3.1) in East Lothian, Scotland. It has a lengthy and highly significant social and economic past. Standing remains of the 19th-century colliery and 20th-century brickworks dominate the site but it also had a historically-attested earlier life associated with the pottery and glass-making industries, which had taken place here adjacent to a thriving harbour.¹

Archaeology for All: from: Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Nevell Michael
Abstract: This paper provides an overview of a five-year project that began life under the banner of ‘I Dig Moston’ in 2003 and finished as ‘Dig Manchester’ in 2008. Two seasons of highly successful community excavations at the site of Moston Hall in Broadhurst Park, northern Manchester, encouraged both the volunteers and professionals involved to apply for Heritage Lottery funding to deliver community archaeology across the city from 2005 to 2008 (Fig. 4.1). Through Dig Manchester, local residents, school children and community groups worked alongside professional archaeologists from the university of Manchester Archaeological unit and the Manchester Museum on a programme

Politics, Publics and Professional Pragmatics: from: Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Horning Audrey
Abstract: Public and community archaeologies clearly have their deepest roots in places characterised by structural, societal inequities, and in situations where archaeologists have sought to be inclusive. As such, community archaeology has been generally theorised within a postcolonial, post-processual framework whereby we as scholars and trained professionals question our own position and our right to talk about the past of ‘other people’, often disenfranchised people. As characterised by Gemma Tully, the principal rationale for community archaeology is that ‘better archaeology can be achieved when more diverse voices are involved in the interpretation of the past.’¹ The best of these new inclusive

‘No Certain Roof but the Coffin Lid’: from: Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Janaway Robert C.
Abstract: Dramatic developments in manufacturing, mining and transportation precipitated by the Industrial Revolution brought irreversible cultural and socio-economic change to Britain. Thousands of ordinary people experienced profound changes, their life experiences and personal stories etched into their physical remains and threaded through the trappings of their death. The pressures of modern development mean that many recent burials are disinterred from their ‘final’ resting place and reburied elsewhere. The research value of post-medieval burial assemblages was recognised only relatively recently,² and this has undoubtedly influenced the strategic approach to planning and excavation. Harding³ identified the publication in English of Philippe Ariès’ work

‘Men That Are Gone … Come Like Shadows, So Depart’: from: Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Janaway Robert C.
Abstract: In common with the paper by Powers et al. (this volume) on the need for a high-level research framework for the post-medieval burial resource, this paper presents an aspirational viewpoint rather than the results of any comprehensive public consultation. We stress the need for a greater openness amongst all stakeholders concerned with the archaeology of the recent past. We detail the approaches taken by scientists, working alongside human osteologists and archaeologists, and the benefits that this work can bring in terms of integrating information that is otherwise lost to future generations. Although efforts have recently been made to clarify the

Dialogues Between Past, Present and Future: from: Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Jones Siân
Abstract: In his seminal work, The Past is a Foreign Country, David Lowenthal not only captures the inseparable nature of past and present, but also advocates that we embrace the production of a useable past in a shifting present. Today, few archaeologists would dispute that our understandings of the past are a product of the present. Moreover, most accept that archaeology is a public concern with political, ethical and social implications in wider society. Indeed, as this volume demonstrates, they actively seek to produce an engaged and engaging past. Yet this has not always been the case. For much of the

Book Title: Relecturas y narraciones femeninas de la Revolución Mexicana-Campobello, Garro, Esquivel y Mastretta
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): DE MORELOCK ELA MOLINA SEVILLA
Abstract: Este libro analiza la perspectiva de cuatro escritoras mexicanas -Nellie Campobello, Elena Garro, Laura Esquivel y Ángeles Mastretta- acerca de la Revolución Mexicana y cómo estas escritoras recuperan la memoria popular, recreando y reincluyendo a las mujeres en la narrativa nacional respecto a su participación en la propia Revolución, más allá del conocido papel de soldaderas y Adelitas que acompañaban a los diferentes ejércitos revolucionarios. Este trabajo combina diferentes planteamientos críticos feministas, antropológicos y geográficos que además de las mujeres, incluyen a los indígenas y a otras minorías étnicas contemplando la interrelación de las categorías de género, espacio, raza y clase como un todo que define y redefine, permanentemente, identidades espacializadas en cambio permanente y constante. Ela Molina Sevilla de Morelock es un latinoamericanista actualmente con sede en los EE.UU. ENGLISH VERSION This book analyzes the perspective of four Mexican women writers regarding the Mexican Revolution---Nellie Campobello, Elena Garro, Laura Esquivel, and Angeles Mastretta. It examines how they recover popular memory to re-create and re-insert women in the national narrative with respect to their participation in the Revolution, which extended beyond the role of soldiers, camp followers, and soldiers' wives. The work combines cultural studies with feminist critical readings and an anthropological and geographical awareness of the roles of indigenous people and ethnic minorities, while paying attention to different categories such as gender, place, race, and class, as a wholeness of spatialized identities in permanent and constant flux. Ela Molina Sevilla de Morelock is a Latin Americanist currently based in the U.S.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt31nj1v

Book Title: Love Poetry in the Spanish Golden Age-Eros, Eris and Empire
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): TORRES ISABEL
Abstract: This work engages with a broader evaluation of early modern poetics that foregrounds the processes rather than the products of thinking. The locus of the study is the Imperial 'home' space, where love poetry meets early modern empire at the inception of a very conflicted national consciousness, and where the vernacular language, Castilian, emerges in the encounter as a strategic site of national and imperial identity. The political is, therefore, a pervasive presence, teased out where relevant in recognition of the poet's sensitivity to the ideologies within which writing comes into being. But the primary commitment of the book is to lyric poetry, and to poets, individually and in their dynamic interconnectedness. Moving beyond a re-evaluation of critical responses to four major poets of the period (Garcilaso de la Vega, Herrera, Góngora and Quevedo), this study disengages respectfully with the substantial body of biographical research that continues to impact upon our understanding of the genre, and renegotiates the Foucauldian concept of the 'epistemic break', often associated with the anti-mimetic impulses of the Baroque. This more flexible model accommodates the multiperspectivism that interrogated Imperial ideology even in the earliest sixteenth-century poetry, and allows for the exploration of new horizons in interpretation. Isabel Torres is Professor of Spanish Golden Age Literature and Head of Spanish and Portuguese Studies at Queen's University, Belfast.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt31nj3t

6 Francisco de Quevedo Villegas (1580–1645): from: Love Poetry in the Spanish Golden Age
Abstract: Francisco de Quevedo’s remarkable love poetry has finally begun to speak to us on its own terms: as poetry. For too long its voice struggled to be heard under the considerable weight of alternative critical displacement activity; that is, engagement with the still unresolved issues of chronology, dating, and corpus definition that are inevitably dominant when a poet does not publish his work in his own lifetime. However, there are some things that we do know for certain: the first posthumous edition of Quevedo’s poetry was compiled and edited by his friend, José Antonio González de Salas, in 1648, under

8 Art Museum from: Expressing Identities in the Basque Arena
Abstract: In October 1997 the Museo Guggenheim Bilbao opened in Bilbao to a blaze of fireworks and publicity. The fireworks died down but the publicity has persisted and, from its very first day, visitors have continued to pour in, in unforeseen numbers. Almost on its own, the Museo has radically changed the image of the city, modified the regional economy, and opened up important debates about Basque identity and the place of art within it. These debates show no signs of dying down. The local effects of the Museo have been so wide-ranging and, to a great extent, so unexpected that

No End from: Expressing Identities in the Basque Arena
Abstract: Our partial survey done we can ask, to what effect? What light can a fieldwork-grounded anthropology shed on contemporary nationalisms?

Introduction from: Dialogic Aspects in the Cuban Novel of the 1990s
Abstract: This work focuses on six novels: Reinaldo Arenas’s El color del verano, Leonardo Padura Fuentes’Máscaras, Abilio Estévez’sTuyo es el reino, Daína Chaviano’sCasa de juegos, Yanitzia Canetti’sAl otro ladoand Zoé Valdés’La nada cotidiana. The selected novels were published during the 1990s, and in my view their authors, regardless of their place of residence, are products of the educational system of the Cuban revolution, since even those who left the island to go and live abroad did so as adults. The six novels that occupy my attention in this study share a common territorialization: their spatial

1 Carnival and Simulacra in Reinaldo Arenas’s El color del verano from: Dialogic Aspects in the Cuban Novel of the 1990s
Abstract: There has been a boom in the number of critical studies focused on the life and works of Reinaldo Arenas

3 The Palimpsestuous (Re)writing of the Island as a Dialogic Practice: from: Dialogic Aspects in the Cuban Novel of the 1990s
Abstract: While Abilio Estévez has achieved international success with his novels and his writings for the theatre, critical studies of his works have been relatively few and far between. This is possibly a result of

5 (Re)writing the Body as a Feminine Strategy: from: Dialogic Aspects in the Cuban Novel of the 1990s
Abstract: One of the most complete and competent studies of Yanitzia Canetti’s work is that of Yvette Fuentes (2002). Fuentes shows how Cuban women writers in the Diaspora display an isolation that challenges patriarchal discourses. She examines the three women writers that I study in this book, though the choice of novel in her study of Chaviano differs (Fuentes selects El hombre, la hembra y el hambrefor her investigation). With reference to her analysis of Canetti’sAl otro lado, Fuentes studies the discursive narratives (that is, fantasy, parody and allegory) that Canetti uses to undermine notions of gender and national

Book Title: Narratives of Identity in Alban Berg's "Lulu"- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): dos Santos Silvio J.
Abstract: Exploring the crossroads between autobiographical narrative and musical composition, this book examines Berg's transformation of Frank Wedekind's Erdgeist (1895) and Die Büchse der Pandora/ (1904) -- the plays used in the formation of the libretto for Lulu -- according to notions of gender identity, social customs, and the aesthetics of modernity in Vienna of the 1920s and 1930s. While Berg modernized several aspects of the plays by Wedekind and incorporated serial techniques of composition from Arnold Schoenberg, he never let go of the idealistic Wagnerian perspectives of his youth. In fact, he went as far as reconfiguring aspects of Richard Wagner's life as an ideal identity to be played out in the compositional process. In the process of composing the opera, Berg also reflected on the most important cultural figures in fin-de-siècle Vienna that affected his worldview, including Karl Kraus, Emil Lucka, Otto Weininger, and others. Adopting an approach that combines a systematic analysis of Berg's numerous sketches for Lulu, correspondence, and the finished work with interpretive models drawn from cultural studies and philosophy, this book elucidates the ways in which Berg grappled with his self-image as an "incorrigible romantic" (unverbesserliche Romantiker) at the end of his life, explaining aspects of his musical language that have been considered strange or anomalous in the scholarship. Silvio J. dos Santos is assistant professor of musicology at the University of Florida.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt5vj797

Conclusion: from: Narratives of Identity in Alban Berg's "Lulu"
Abstract: Berg’s fascination with Wagner, Tristanin particular, complicates our understanding of his music because it underlies not only his creative identity and actions but also some principles behind his musical compositions. In his writings, Adorno often tries to draw a distinction between Berg and Wagner, but his explanations, while illuminating, only contribute to the problem. In his reevaluation of Berg, written about twenty years after Berg’s death, Adorno recognizes the “autonomy” of Berg’s works but points to a peculiar sort of metaphysics in which Berg’s music would emerge from underneath the music drama. In other words, Adorno draws a distinction

‘Is this War?’: from: War and Literature
Author(s) PURDON JAMES
Abstract: Most writing about British Cold War culture has concentrated on nuclearism, pacifism, decolonisation, socialism, postmodernism, Americanisation – in short, on everything but war. One effect of the attention paid to these various narratives has been to obscure the fact that citizens of the USSR and those of Western capitalist democracies alike understood and feared the Cold War as war, even if later accounts have tended to lose sight of what Holger Nehring has called the ‘war-like character’ of their experiences.² If the Cold War is to have any explanatory force as a context for literary works beyond serving as a

Does Tolstoy’s War and Peace Make Modern War Literature Redundant? from: War and Literature
Author(s) RAWLINSON MARK
Abstract: The concept of redundancy employed in this essay is the one used in mathematics and linguistics to designate symbols that do not add information to a sequence. One of the hazards of teaching twentieth-century war literature is the tacit inference of redundancy by readers, namely that the representational conventions as well as the facts and values represented are ‘predictable from … context’. 90The claim that twentieth-century war writing is made superfluous byWar and Peace(1869) is polemical, but it is also intended to do serious work: to draw attention to representations of war which are not predictable from context,

Book Title: Modern German Thought from Kant to Habermas-An Annotated German-Language Reader
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Large Duncan
Abstract: German-language thinkers such as Kant, Marx, Nietzsche, and Freud are central to modernity. Yet their reception in the English-speaking world has largely depended on translations, a situation that has often hampered full engagement with the rhetorical and philosophical complexity of the German history of ideas. The present volume, the first of its kind, is a response to this situation. After an introduction charting the remarkable flowering of German-language thought since the eighteenth century, it offers extracts -- in the original German -- from sixteen major philosophical texts, with extensive introductions and annotations in English. All extracts are carefully chosen to introduce the individual thinkers while allowing the reader to pursue broader themes such as the fate of reason or the history of modern selfhood. The book offers students and scholars of German a complement to linguistic, historical, and literary study by giving them access to the wealth of German-language philosophy. It represents a new way into the work of a succession of thinkers who have defined modern philosophy and thus remain of crucial relevance today. The philosophers: Immanuel Kant, G. W. F. Hegel, Ludwig Feuerbach, Karl Marx, Arthur Schopenhauer, Friedrich Nietzsche, Sigmund Freud, Martin Heidegger, Walter Benjamin, Georg Lukács, Max Horkheimer and Theodor Adorno, Jürgen Habermas. Henk de Berg is Professor of German at the University of Sheffield. Duncan Large is Professor of German at Swansea University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt6wp91n

2: Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel (1770–1831) from: Modern German Thought from Kant to Habermas
Abstract: Born in Stuttgart in 1770, Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel studied theology and philosophy at the Tübinger Stift, the theological seminary attached to the University of Tübingen. Here, he formed friendships with two students who would also become major figures in German cultural history, the poet Friedrich Hölderlin and the philosopher F. W. J. Schelling. He graduated in 1793. Not wanting to become a vicar, he started working as a private tutor, first in Bern (where he became acquainted with the work of the economists James Steuart and Adam Smith, whose ideas would remain crucial to his thinking) and after that

8: Martin Heidegger (1889–1976) from: Modern German Thought from Kant to Habermas
Abstract: Heidegger polarizes opinion. To some, he is the most important philosopher of the twentieth century; to others, he is little more than a mystifying word-spinner. The perplexingly difficult nature of his work derives to a significant extent from his exploitation of the resources of the German language, so — even more than with most other philosophers — there is a clear advantage in reading him in the original rather than in translation. In the immediate postwar period, the vogue for Existentialism favored Jean-Paul Sartre (whose early philosophy was largely based, as Hubert L. Dreyfus once put it, on “a brilliant misunderstanding” of

10: Georg Lukács (1885–1971) from: Modern German Thought from Kant to Habermas
Abstract: The Hungarian philosopher Georg Lukács, who published most of his works in German, played a central role in the development of twentieth-century Marxism. Like many other Marxist thinkers, he was born into a rich family. His mother belonged to one of the wealthiest dynasties in the Austro-Hungarian Empire; his father, a self-made man, was a highly successful banker. Both were Jewish. Growing up in the cosmopolitan atmosphere of Budapest, Lukács became a native speaker of both Hungarian and German, while also gaining fluency in French and English. He studied at the universities of Budapest and Berlin, and was awarded his

12: Jürgen Habermas (b. 1929) from: Modern German Thought from Kant to Habermas
Abstract: Philosopher, sociologist, and political theorist Jürgen Habermas is the most distinguished German intellectual currently alive, and one of the world’s leading thinkers. Combining genuine philosophical depth with penetrating social analysis, his work draws inspiration from a wide variety of sources, including Marxism and neo-Marxist kritische Theorie, post-Wittgensteinian linguistic philosophy, and the sociological tradition since Émile Durkheim (1858–1917) and Max Weber (1864–1920).

Book Title: El niño en el cine argentino de la postdictadura (1983-2008)-alegoría y nostalgia
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): DUFAYS SOPHIE
Abstract: Este libro constituye la primera monografía dedicada al papel del niño en el cine latinoamericano. El análisis detallado de una decena de películas argentinas de la post-dictadura dirigidas entre 1983 y 2008, incluyendo tanto clásicas (La historia oficial, Un lugar en el mundo) como olvidadas (Amigomio, El rigor del destino), revela cómo la mirada y el lenguaje del niño son puestos al servicio de una alegoría nostálgica, estructurada en torno a la memoria o al lenguaje verbal y vinculada a la figura del padre ausente. Dufays combina los análisis fílmicos con una amplia reflexión teórica sobre las cuatro nociones clave de alegoría, melancolía, nostalgia y duelo y los articula con una genealogía de la figura alegórica del niño en las tradiciones narrativas latinoamericanas. Este recorrido permite al lector explorar las significaciones simbólicas y discursivas que el personaje infantil, la infancia y la familia han adquirido en el cine y en el contexto postdictatorial argentino. Sophie Dufays es investigadora postdoctoral del Fondo Nacional de Investigación Científica de Bélgica, en la Universidad de Louvain-la-Neuve. This book is the first monograph devoted to the role of the child in Latin American cinema. Through close analysis of about ten Argentine fiction films of the post-dictatorship period directed between 1983 and 2008, including both classic such as The Official Story and A Place in the World) and forgotten works such as Amigomío and El rigor del destino. Dufays shows how the child's gaze and language are a means of focusing a nostalgic form of allegory, structured around either memory or verbal language, and related to the figure of the absent father. In combining these analyses with a wide theoretical articulation of four key notions (allegory, melancholy, mourning and nostalgia) and with a genealogy of the allegorical child character in Latin American narrative traditions, Relatos de infancia allows the reader to explore the meanings that childhood and family have come to acquire in cinema, particularly in the Argentine post-dictatorial context. Sophie Dufays is a FNRS Postdoctoral Researcher (Belgian National Fund for Scientific Research) at the University of Louvain-la-Neuve.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt6wp9v7

6 Upwards to Helicon: from: Spanish Golden Age Poetry in Motion
Author(s) Mascia Mark J.
Abstract: One of Lope de Vega’s (1562–1635) longest poetic works, the Laurel de Apolo(1630), has received less critical attention than much of his other poetry due to its sheer length. This massive poem, composed of tensilvasand totalling nearly seven thousand lines, is sometimes viewed as a simple litany of praise for several hundred contemporary poets. However, one often overlooked element is the way in which Lope uses this text to engage in acts of judgement and even personal vendettas against his rivals. The purpose of this study is to examine how Lope moves his locus of enunciation

9 Jealousy in María de Zayas’s Intercalated Poetry: from: Spanish Golden Age Poetry in Motion
Author(s) Bultman Dana
Abstract: María de Zayas’s dynamic use of intercalated poetry in her Novelas amorosas y ejemplares(1637) andParte segunda del Sarao y entretenimiento honesto(1647) provides us with a sustained example of ‘poetry in motion’ across hundreds of narrative pages. Over the course of these works, Zayas intersperses lyric forms in her narrative, creating generic contrasts that are integral to the structure of both books and offering evidence for the gradual transformation of her central character, Lisis.

Book Title: Edinburgh German Yearbook 3-Contested Legacies: Constructions of Cultural Heritage in the GDR
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Rolle Sabine
Abstract: Established, commissioned, and edited by the Department of German at the University of Edinburgh, Edinburgh German Yearbook encourages and disseminates lively and open discussion of themes pertinent to German Studies, viewed from all angles but with particular interest in problems arising out of politics and history. No other yearbook covers the entire field while addressing a focused theme in each issue. Coinciding with the twentieth anniversary of the fall of the Berlin Wall, volume 3 re-directs current debates on memory and tradition, opening up fresh perspectives on the cultural history of the GDR and exploring how the nation's cultural discourses entered into a productive but often problematic dialogue with the values of the past and with the German cultural inheritance. Topics include the compositional engagement with musical heritage; industrial design and cultural politics; the establishment of antifascist monuments and their use as sites of resistance; constructions of a cultural heritage in architecture; the influence of cultural politics on literary scholarship; continuities and breaks with tradition in visual and literary culture; and engagement with the past in the works of Konrad Wolf, Irmtraud Morgner, and Anna Seghers. Contributors: Leonie Beiersdorf, Julian Blunk, Dara Bryant, Helen Finch, Carola Hähnel-Mesnard, Stacy Hartman, Elaine Kelly, Heather Mathews, Katharina Pfützner, Matthew Philpotts, Larson Powell, Tim Rei, Marianne Schwarz-Scherer, Laura Silverberg. Matthew Philpotts is Lecturer in German at the University of Manchester, and Sabine Rolle is Lecturer in German at the University of Edinburgh.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt7zssk0

Mama, ich lebe: from: Edinburgh German Yearbook 3
Author(s) Powell Larson
Abstract: Mama, ich lebehas not received much more recognition from subsequent criticism than it did from its first viewers in 1977. Like its predecessor,Der nackte Mann auf dem Sportplatz(1974), it is one of Konrad Wolf’s most subdued, leisurely and understated films. It is far less dramatic than its closest relative,Ich war neunzehn,of which it thus may superficially appear a pallid remake. YetMamareworks not only many of the same thematic materials as other of Wolf’s films — the moral pathos of political decision, of redefining individual authenticity apart from nationhood, and the constellation of private and

Formalism, Naturalism, and the Elusive Socialist Realist Picture at the GDR’s Dritte deutsche Kunstausstellung, 1953 from: Edinburgh German Yearbook 3
Author(s) Mathews Heather E.
Abstract: Willy Colberg’s painting Streikposten in Hamburg[Fig. 1] was one of a number of artworks by West Germans to be included in theDritte deutsche Kunstausstellungin 1953, a major national event dedicated to showcasing emerging socialist realist art in the German Democratic Republic. In the following discussion, I will examine how the persistence of a naturalistic style, communicated in part by West German artworks like Colberg’s, helped to shape East Germans’ perceptions of their own progress towards socialist realism. As the case of theDritte deutsche Kunstausstellungdemonstrates, exhibitions are active, public narratives through which organizers are able to

10: The Strange Absence of Tragedy in Heidegger’s Thought from: Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought
Author(s) Harries Karsten
Abstract: In Either/Or Kierkegaard has his aesthete A say this about the modern age: “It is conceited enough to disdain the tears of tragedy, but it is also conceited enough to want to do without mercy. And what, after all, is human life, the human race, when these two things are taken away?”¹ A’s rhetorical question presents us with an either/or quite different from that referred to by that work’s title: if the two volumes of Either/Orappear to present the reader with a choice between two modern life-styles, the self-centered, aesthetic life, shadowed by despair, represented by the aesthete A,

11: The Tragic Dimension in Postwar German Painting from: Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought
Author(s) Gosetti-Ferencei Jennifer Anna
Abstract: There is an undeniably tragic dimension to central motives of postwar German painting, particularly in the works of Anselm Kiefer. The imagery of devastated landscapes, charred fields and forests, empty attics and bunkers, flames, and ashen skies in Kiefer’s paintings evoke the devastation wreaked by Germany during the Second World War and by National Socialism. References to the poetry of Paul Celan and a lost Judaic heritage render such scenes extraordinarily haunting. The use of such materials as ash, lead, burnt canvas, human hair, and straw contribute to both the material innovation and the provocative nature of these works. Invoking

Book Title: Arno Schmidt's 'Zettel's Traum'-An Analysis
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Langbehn Volker Max
Abstract: Arno Schmidt (1914-1979) is considered one of the most daring and influential writers of postwar Germany; the Germanist Jeremy Adler has called him a "giant of postwar German literature." Schmidt was awarded the Fontane Prize in 1964 and the Goethe Prize in 1973, and his early fiction has been translated into English to high critical acclaim, but he is not a well-known figure in the English-speaking world, where his complex work remains at the margins of critical inquiry. Volker Langbehn's book introduces Schmidt to the English-speaking audience, with primary emphasis on his most famous novel, 'Zettel's Traum'. One reviewer called the book an "elephantine monster" because of its unconventional size (folio format), length (1334 pages and over 10 million characters), and unique presentation of text in the form of notes, typewritten pages, parallel columns, and collages. The novel narrates the life of the main characters, Daniel Pagenstecher, Paul Jacobi and his wife Wilma, and their teenage daughter Franziska. In discussing the life and works of Edgar Allan Poe, the four engage in the problems connected with a translation of Poe. Langbehn's study investigates how literary language can mediate or account for the world of experiences and for concepts. Schmidt's use of unconventional presentation formats challenges us to analyze how we think about reading and writing literary texts. Instead of viewing such texts as a representation of reality, Schmidt's novel destabilizes this unquestioned mode of representation, posing a radical challenge to what contemporary literary criticism defines as literature. No comprehensive study of 'Zettel's Traum' exists in English. Volker Langbehn is associate professor of German at San Francisco State University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81f1w

Introduction from: Arno Schmidt's 'Zettel's Traum'
Abstract: Arno Schmidt (1914–1979) is not a well-known figure in literary studies in this country. Although he has been recognized as probably the single most important experimental novelist in German since the Second World War, there is still little criticism on his work. Despite the increase in the amount of published Schmidt research over the past ten years in Germany, his works have never attracted a large readership. The linguistic density and the sophisticated cultural reflections of his texts seem to prohibit his writings from ever becoming popular. But Schmidt has at least finally gained recognition as a “giant of

1: The Art of Writing in Columns from: Arno Schmidt's 'Zettel's Traum'
Abstract: According to Schmidt, Zettel’s Traum borrows its “SpaltenTechnick” from Finnegans Wake. By structuring Zettel’s Traum into three columns or “TextSträhnen,” Schmidt expects that the reader will be able to follow the information provided in the columns.¹ To ease the reading process, Schmidt divides the three columns according to theme. The center column reflects the events of the years between 1965 and 1969, the time frame in which Zettel’s Traum was actually written. Daniel Pagenstecher, as the central narrator of the events, assists Paul and Wilma Jacobi, likewise writers and old school friends, in the translation of Poe’s works into German.

Book Title: Afro-Cuban Diasporas in the Atlantic World- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Otero Solimar
Abstract: ‘Afro-Cuban Diasporas in the Atlantic World’ explores how Yoruba and Afro-Cuban communities moved across the Atlantic between the Americas and Africa in successive waves in the nineteenth century. In Havana, Yoruba slaves from Lagos banded together to buy their freedom and sail home to Nigeria. Once in Lagos, this Cuban repatriate community became known as the Aguda. This community built their own neighborhood that celebrated their Afrolatino heritage. For these Yoruba and Afro-Cuban diasporic populations, nostalgic constructions of family and community play the role of narrating and locating a longed-for home. By providing a link between the workings of nostalgia and the construction of home, this volume re-theorizes cultural imaginaries as a source for diasporic community reinvention. Through ethnographic fieldwork and research in folkloristics, Otero reveals that the Aguda identify strongly with their Afro-Cuban roots in contemporary times. Their fluid identity moves from Yoruba to Cuban, and back again, in a manner that illustrates the truly cyclical nature of transnational Atlantic community affiliation. Solimar Otero is assistant professor of English and folklore at Louisiana State University and is research associate and visiting professor at the Women's Studies in Religion Program at the Harvard Divinity School from 2009 - 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81ff8

4 Situating Lagosian, Caribbean, and Latin American Diasporas from: Afro-Cuban Diasporas in the Atlantic World
Abstract: Pérez de la Riva answers his own question about the Cuban presence in Lagos, Nigeria, in the negative, citing a lack of “evidence of Cuban culture” in Lagos.¹ However, as seen in the work of Cuban historian Rodolfo Sarracino and from my own interviews with Aguda of Cuban heritage there is evidence of Cuban contributions to the culture of the Aguda in Lagos.² Indeed, the very name of Campos Square, where the Cuban Lodge is located, shows that an entire area in Lagos is named after a Cuban repatriate.³ Though Brazilian cultural aspects tend to dominate some visible forms of

Book Title: Love and Death in Goethe-`One and Double'
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Dye Ellis
Abstract: Goethe, in association with his younger Romantic compatriots the Schlegels, Novalis, Fichte, and Schelling, struggled with the subject-object dichotomy, and tried to bridge the gap between self and other, consciousness and nature. His theory and practice prefigured the Romantics' determination to display and interrogate the linguistic and cultural structures informing their own thinking and modes of representation--what Goethe calls one's "Vorstellungsart." His work exploits, subverts, and supplants inherited conventions and signs, demonstrating with virtuosic irony that literature is a system of texts, pre-texts, and pre-established but dynamic conceptual models. 'Love and Death in Goethe:"One and Double"' explores Goethe's use, in a wide range of his poetry and prose, of the theme of 'Liebestod' (love and death) and related embodiments of the paradox of unity in duality. Ellis Dye also examines Goethe's use of other themes related to love and death--the 'femme fatale', the 'vagina dentata, Frau Welt', the Lorelei, venereal disease, the 'Lustmord' --and considers issues of selfhood and individuation as well as the possibility that the love-death theme contains an implicit gender bias toward the existential fact of personal separateness. Poems, plays, and novels are dealt with, nevertheless, as works of art, not only as illustrations of an idea or as points of intersection in a system of rhetorical conventions, and are examined for intellectual cohesiveness, elegance, and integrity of design as well as special meanings and effects. ' Love and Death in Goethe:"One and Double" ' explores the meaning of the central theme of Romantic poetry in the works of the most important Romantic poet of all. Students of literary culture, both the lay reader and the Goethe specialist, will be enlightened by its approach and find pleasure and instruction in its revelations. Robert Ellis Dye is professor of German at Macalester College.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81fsr

4: Die Leiden des jungen Werthers from: Love and Death in Goethe
Abstract: Two of the works that Goethe wrote in 1774 end with a Liebestod. Clavigo, an enduringly popular play, does not actually celebrate the blending of the lovers in a death-transcending union: Its horizon is more social than existential and revolves around Clavigo’s difficulty in choosing between love and ambition, between ascendancy in society and government on the one hand and marriage to the declassé Marie Beaumarchais on the other. The dilemma is resolved by the thrust of a dagger from Marie’s brother, the mortally wounded Clavigo falling on the coffin of the woman he has wronged. He grasps her cold

5: Stella: from: Love and Death in Goethe
Abstract: Stella has been called a “Pendant zu Werther . . .; die Figuren der Dreiecksgeschichte sind vertauscht” (MA 1,1:757), for while in Werther it was one woman between two men, in Stella it is one man between two women. Werther ends in the death of the protagonist, Stella does so only in a late, second version, no longer subtitled “Ein Schauspiel für Liebende,” but simply “Ein Trauerspiel.” Both works pose the question of the uniqueness of personalities and raise the possibility of one lover replacing or standing in for another. In Stella, substitution is thematized, as part of a demonstration

9: Die Wahlverwandtschaften: from: Love and Death in Goethe
Abstract: In her prize-winning essay “Hierogamy versus Wedlock,” Evelyn Hinz discusses the generic classification of prose fictions in terms of the kind of marriage plot they employ.¹ Hinz refines Northrop Frye’s scheme of classification, in which Pride and Prejudice counts as a novel but Wuthering Heights is a romance, and offers the term “mythic narrative” for lengthy prose works organized by a marriage plot and portraying the “hierogamous” union of disparate partners whose love mirrors a cosmic conjunction like “the union of earth and sky.”² According to Hinz, marriage in a mythic narrative implicates the non-social as well as the social

4: Literature on New France from: History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Laflèche Guy
Abstract: The writings on New France constitute a great marginal literature spanning three centuries. The term “literature” has to be understood in a broader sense here, since literary texts, or works possessing an aesthetic value, were rare exceptions in this period. Such texts as did exist seldom concerned themselves with the French colony. Their subject was rather North America and the Native Americans — in other words, the anthropology, human geography, or, as it was called at the time, the natural history of the New World. After the discoveries, explorations, and voyages came the long and difficult missionary endeavors, conducted mostly by

14: The Modernist English-Canadian Short Story from: History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Nischik Reingard M.
Abstract: In its main line of development, the English-Canadian short story is a relatively recent literary phenomenon, spanning a little more than a hundred years to the present. It began to coalesce as a national genre in the 1890s, with writers such as Isabella Valancy Crawford, Susan Frances Harrison, Ernest Thompson Seton, and Charles G. D. Roberts. Yet it was only with the advent of the modernist short story in the 1920s that the English-Canadian short story fully emerged as a distinct literary genre, and with the works of Morley Callaghan and others joined the realm of world literature.

20: French-Canadian Drama from the 1930s to the Révolution tranquille from: History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Scholl Dorothee
Abstract: The late development of French-Canadian theater is above all a result of its institutional framework: For a long time, secular drama was decried as amoral and was therefore prohibited. The clergy, in particular, who made a decisive contribution to the history of drama by encouraging the performance of plays in the collèges for the purpose of classical education, rhetorical training, and the moral edification of pupils, rejected the performance of “profane” texts. Beginning with the 1930s, however, the influence of European theater led to a modernization in the repertoire and the performance practice of clerical theater. Many clergymen also composed

28: Literature of the First Nations, Inuit, and Métis from: History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Gruber Eva
Abstract: Before the 1960s, published writing by Aboriginal authors in Canada was sparse and virtually unknown. The English and French missionaries had introduced writing into the numerous originally oral Aboriginal cultures, and Aboriginal-authored written histories, travel accounts, and autobiographies by authors such as George Copway (1818–1869) and Peter Jones (1802–1856; both Ojibway) exist from the nineteenth century onwards. Yet with the notable exception of Mohawk-English poet and performer E. Pauline Johnson (1861–1913; Tekahionwake), whose work received widespread attention at the end of the nineteenth and beginning of the twentieth century and continues to inspire contemporary Aboriginal writers such

32: Orality and the French-Canadian Chanson from: History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Mathis-Moser Ursula
Abstract: Oralités-Polyphonix 16, a festival and symposium that took place in Quebec in June 1991, explored fundamental aspects of orality, its forms and functions as well as its specific Québécois character. Orality can operate both in a printed text and in the act of performing, whose most popular manifestation — next to theater and dance — is the chanson. One of the many facets of orality is the euphonic experiment with linguistic material, which has already been touched upon in connection with surrealist and postsurrealist sound effects and language practices (see ch. 17, Mathis-Moser), and which is especially prominent in the works of,

34: Transculturalism and from: History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Dupuis Gilles
Abstract: The concept of écritures migrantes, or migrant literature, first appeared in Quebec during the 1980s. The expression was and continues to be used today to refer to the literary production of writers who, after immigrating to Canada, decided to settle in Quebec — the only Canadian province with a francophone majority — and to write or at least publish within the framework of the province’s literary institutions. The criteria for classifying a work as migrant literature vary from one source to another. For Daniel Chartier, author of the Dictionnaire des écrivains émigrés au Québec 1800–1999 (2003), language is not a determining

35: The Institutionalization of Literature in Quebec from: History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Oberhuber Andrea
Abstract: It seems impossible today to discuss Quebec literature without considering its institutions and, in particular, its institutionalization over the past century. This predicament explains Gilles Marcotte’s (1925–) remarks on “Institution et courants d’air” (1989), in which he observes that “the literary institution is not a new topic in Quebec literature. On the contrary, it is our oldest idea. Just as God exists before creation, the institution predates the works” (26). The narrator of Catherine Mavrikakis’s (1961–) novel Deuils cannibales et mélancoliques (2000) makes a similar statement: “In Quebec, there are more literary prizes than books published. . .

Book Title: Spanish American Poetry after 1950-Beyond the Vanguard
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): SHAW DONALD L.
Abstract: Providing a basis for understanding the main lines of development of poetry in Spanish America after Vanguardism, this volume begins with an overview of the situation at the mid-century: the later work of Neruda and Borges, the emergence of Paz. Consideration is then given to the decisive impact of Parra and the rise of colloquial poetry, politico-social poetry (Dalton, Cardenal) and representative figures such as Orozco, Pacheco and Cisneros. The aim is to establish a few paths through the largely unmapped jungle of Spanish American poetry in the time period. The author emphasises the persistence of a generally negative view of the human condition and the poets' exploration of different ways of responding to it. These vary from outright scepticism to the ideological, the religious or those derived from some degree of confidence in the creative imagination as cognitive. At the same time there is analysis of the evolving outlook on poetry of the writers in question, both in regard to its possible social role and in regard to diction. DONALD SHAW holds the Brown Forman Chair of Spanish American literature in the University of Virginia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81hxc

4 OROZCO AND DALTON from: Spanish American Poetry after 1950
Abstract: What the foregoing account of the work of some of the major figures in Spanish American poetry around and immediately after the mid-twentieth century seems to illustrate is that two different attitudes towards the production of poetry faced each other. One emerges directly from Paz and has been admirably studied by Thorpe Running in The Critical Poem(1996). The other connects with Neruda’sOdas elementales, the view of poetic language espoused by Parra, and the practice of Cardenal, explored by Alemany Bay inPoesía coloquial hispanoamericana(1997). To see the difference in a nutshell, all that is necessary is to

6 Conclusion from: Spanish American Poetry after 1950
Abstract: As we survey the scene presented by Spanish American poetry after the mid-twentieth century, what strikes us most is the virtual absence of any critical framework within which we can situate all but the most famous of the individual poets. The critic’s situation is rather like that of someone hacking a way through a jungle which contains a few clearings here and there but remains basically unmapped. Occasionally he or she will meet someone who is similarly engaged and exchange a few cautious signals, before both proceed on divergent paths. The trees are many; the landmarks few; the danger of

Book Title: Narrative Deconstructions of Gender in Works by Audrey Thomas, Daphne Marlatt, and Louise Erdrich- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Rosenthal Caroline
Abstract: By analyzing the works of Thomas, Marlatt, and Erdrich through the lenses of subjectivity, gender studies, and narratology, Caroline Rosenthal brings to light new perspectives on their writings. Although all three authors write metafictions that challenge literary realism and dominant views of gender, the forms of their counter-narratives vary. In her novel 'Intertidal Life', Thomas traces the disintegration of an identity through narrative devices that unearth ruptures and contradictions in stories of gender. In contrast, Marlatt, in 'Ana Historic', challenges the regulatory fiction of heterosexuality. She offers her protagonist a way out into a new order that breaks with the law of the father, creating a "monstrous" text that explores the possibilities of a lesbian identity. In her tetralogy of novels made up of 'Love Medicine', 'Tracks', 'The Beet Queen', and 'The Bingo Palace', Erdrich resists definite readings of femininity altogether. By drawing on trickster narratives, she creates an open system of gendered identities that is dynamic and unfinalizable, positing the most fragmented worldview as the most enduring. By applying gender and narrative theory to nuanced analysis of the texts, Rosenthal's study elucidates the correlation between gender identity formation and narrative. Caroline Rosenthal is Professor and Chair of American Literature at the Friedrich-Schiller University in Jena, Germany. Her book 'Narrative Deconstructions of Gender' was published by Camden House in 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81nd9

3: “You Can’t Even Imagine?”: from: Narrative Deconstructions of Gender in Works by Audrey Thomas, Daphne Marlatt, and Louise Erdrich
Abstract: For Daphne Marlatt’s 1988 book Ana Historic, Lewis Carroll’s writings are also important subtexts as they question conventions and playfully illustrate that what is real depends on cultural frameworks and individual perspective. As another contemporary Canadian woman writer who breaks down linguistic and narrative structures, Marlatt seems to share a lot of Audrey Thomas’s aims and strategies. Like Thomas, Marlatt disrupts surface structures to defamiliarize accepted notions of femininity and to question the coherence and continuity of gender and sexual identity. Both authors mirror the process of identity (de)formation in the narratives of their protagonists who are both writers themselves.

“Trübe” as the Source of New Color Formation in Goethe’s Late Works from: Goethe Yearbook 19
Author(s) ALLERT BEATE
Abstract: Much has been written about Goethe’s earlier didactic and polemical works on color.¹ However, little attention has been paid to his late essays titled Entoptische Farben (1817–20) and Chromatik (1822), on which I shall focus in this essay.² Goethe’s experiments with colors and his writings on the visual occupied him almost for his entire life. Whereas one group of scholars argues for continuity and consistency in Goethe’s works, a second group argues that his oeuvre displays gaps and discontinuities, yet that these various parts represent different voices dialogically responding to each other while in the process also forming a

The Myth of Otherness: from: Goethe Yearbook 19
Author(s) BERNDT FRAUKE
Abstract: Western culture is dominated by representation—however, in 1993 in a series of essays, Jean-Luc Nancy counters this paradigm of all signification processes from a culturally critical perspective with a new paradigm, and proclaims “the birth to presence.”¹ In the course of this paradigm shift from representation to presence and as a consequence of Hans Ulrich Gumbrecht’s work, contemporary literary criticism has also taken an interest in “what meaning cannot convey.”² Yet, to speak of a “new” paradigm implies a kind of mastery, since presence basically represents an outdated paradigm in two respects. In the hermeneutic tradition, whose roots are

Book Title: Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): MITCHELL J. ALLAN
Abstract: Why do medieval writers routinely make use of exemplary rhetoric? How does it work, and what are its ethical and poetical values? And if Chaucer and Gower must be seen as vigorously subverting it, then why do they persist in using it? Borrowing from recent developments in ethical criticism and theory, this book addresses such questions by reconstructing a late medieval rationale for the ethics of exemplary narrative. The author argues that Chaucer's ‘Canterbury Tales’ and Gower's ‘Confessio Amantis’ attest to the vitality of a narrative - rather than strictly normative - ethics that has roots in premodern traditions of practical reason and rhetoric. Chaucer and Gower are shown to be inheritors and respecters of an early and unexpected form of ethical pragmatism - which has profound implications for the orthodox history of ethics in the West. Recipient of the 2008 John H. Fisher Award for significant contribution to the field of Gower Studies. Dr J ALLAN MITCHELL is Lecturer in Medieval Literature, University of Kent, Canterbury.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81rhw

Introduction from: Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower
Abstract: What is the good of examples in late medieval literature? That deceptively simple question first animated my study of two Middle English poets, Chaucer and Gower, and I think it serves as a useful point of entry into the larger topic of what I call the ethics of exemplarity. Ethics and exemplary narrative somehow interrelate. But before getting anywhere near answering the initial question, I want to begin with some remarks that serve to make my working assumptions and methodology explicit.

3 Gower For Example: from: Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower
Abstract: Gower’s Confessio Amantis is a veritable anthology of literary kinds, a miscellany of discourse both pragmatic and speculative, entertaining and edifying, as though its maker had aspired to join together all of the genres current in the later Middle Ages. In this respect it hardly differs from many other voluminous medieval works that combine so much “lust” and “lore.” But Gower’s massive poem of more than 30,000 lines and about 110 exempla, spread liberally over eight books and a prologue, with accompanying Latin verse headings and marginal glosses, appears to spare nothing. The work puts itself forward as at once

Introduction from: Charles d'Orléans in England, 1415-1440
Author(s) Arn M.
Abstract: When I began studying the life and work of Charles d’Orléans some twenty years ago, many of the major sources were old. Pierre Champion’s biography of the duke and edition of his French poems dated from the early part of the century; Steele and Day’s edition of the English work, from the 1940s. Only the work of Daniel Poirion, especially his book Le Poète et le prince: L’Évolution du lyrisme courtois de Guillaume de Machaut à Charles d’Orléans (1965), was relatively recent – but all that has since changed.

Two Manuscripts, One Mind: from: Charles d'Orléans in England, 1415-1440
Author(s) ARN MARY-JO
Abstract: AS peace negotiations between the English and French intensified in the late 1430s, Charles d’Orléans’s hopes must have risen. In the final years of his English captivity (1436–1440), the duke was travelling back and forth between first Surrey, then Wiltshire, and London,¹ where he was working actively to nurture the peace process that would end the Hundred Years War. After more than twenty years in England, he must have sensed that the end of his long ordeal was at hand. One bit of evidence for this is that the duke had two manuscripts made, one in French, one in

Charles of Orléans Illuminated from: Charles d'Orléans in England, 1415-1440
Author(s) BACKHOUSE JANET
Abstract: WIDELY famed for its bird’s-eye view of the Tower of London, which is endlessly reproduced in both scholarly and popular contexts, Royal MS 16 F. ii in the British Library is of major interest to all students of the work of Charles of Orléans because it is the only medieval manuscript copy of his work to have been supplied with major illustrations. His poems take up rather more than half of the volume’s 248 leaves and the associated miniatures account for three of the six fully illuminated pages in the book. It has always been clear from copious internal heraldic

Book Title: German Women's Writing in the Twenty-First Century- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Hill Alexandra Merley
Abstract: What is the status of women's writing in German today, in an era when feminism has thoroughly problematized binary conceptions of sex and gender? Drawing on gender and queer theory, including the work of Lauren Berlant, Judith Butler, and Michel Foucault, the essays in this volume rethink conventional ways of conceptualizing female authorship and re-examine the formal, aesthetic, and thematic terms in which "women's literature" has been conceived. With an eye to the literary and feminist legacy of authors such as Christa Wolf and Ingeborg Bachmann, contributors treat the works of many of contemporary Germany's most significant literary voices, including Hatice Akyün, Sibylle Berg, Thea Dorn, Tanja Dückers, Karen Duve, Jenny Erpenbeck, Julia Franck, Katharina Hacker, Charlotte Roche, Julia Schoch, and Antje Rávic Strubel -- authors who, through their writing or their role in the media, engage with questions of what it means to be a woman writer in twenty-first-century Germany. Contributors: Hester Baer, Necia Chronister, Helga Druxes, Valerie Heffernan, Alexandra Merley Hill, Lindsey Lawton, Sheridan Marshall, Beret Norman, Mihaela Petrescu, Jill Suzanne Smith, Carrie Smith-Prei, Maria Stehle, Katherine Stone Hester Baer is Associate Professor of Germanic Studies at the University of Maryland. Alexandra Merley Hill is Assistant Professor of German at the University of Portland.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt9qdmdt

5: Muslim Writing, Women’s Writing from: German Women's Writing in the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Lawton Lindsay
Abstract: Women’s memoirs that share common themes of forced marriage, honor killing, or “crimes of honor” and detail the cruelty and violence to which the protagonist is subjected during her quest to pursue a “Western” lifestyle have been a part of the German-language literary landscape for decades. As they are increasingly tied to Islam, however, these memoirs have become especially visible in the twenty-first century.¹ The similarity of these works is reinforced by marketing conventions, including sensational titles like Ich wollte nur frei sein: Meine Flucht vor der Zwangsehe(I Only Wanted to be Free: My Flight from Forced Marriage, 2005),

6: Popfeminism, Ethnicity, and Race in Contemporary Germany: from: German Women's Writing in the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Petrescu Mihaela
Abstract: In recent years several scholars have investigated the role of popfeminism, a term coined in 2007 by Sonja Eismann, which denotes Germany’s own version of contemporary feminism.¹ While these scholars have scrutinized the relationship between popfeminism, pop literature, and neoliberalism, and they have pointed out the absence of concepts of race and ethnicity in numerous popfeminist texts, they have paid little attention to those popfeminist works that do analyze the intersections between sexuality, race, and ethnicity.² In this essay I address this gap by investigating the humor-inflected popfeminist autobiographical works Einmal Hans mit scharfer Soße(An Order of Hans with

INTRODUCTION from: Arturo Pérez-Reverte: Narrative Tricks and Narrative Strategies
Abstract: To attempt an analysis of the works of any contemporary writer is fraught with difficulty, particularly when the author in question is given to creating texts which trick and trap an unwary reader. Such is the case of Arturo Pérez-Reverte who has described his own process of writing as being ‘like laying a minefield’. In that minefield, he ‘places his tricks, traps and false leads’.¹

5 Journalism and Cinema from: Arturo Pérez-Reverte: Narrative Tricks and Narrative Strategies
Abstract: There are two areas outside his fictional works for which Arturo Pérez-Reverte is known: his weekly column in El Semanaland the films based on his novels. The columns have been published in four collections:Obra breve,¹Patente de corso (1993–1998);Con ánimo de ofender (1998–2001); andNo me cogeréis vivo (2001–2005). In this chapter, it will be seen that there are unifying themes running through the articles in these collections, namely, a disillusionment with present-day Spain and a certainty that many of Spain’s woes have their origins in a lack of knowledge of its past. On

6 Order out of Chaos: from: Arturo Pérez-Reverte: Narrative Tricks and Narrative Strategies
Abstract: The time has come to attempt to draw together the various strands of this analysis of the work of Arturo Pérez-Reverte. Following certain conventions, the expected result would be to state that there has been a development in his work. Certainly such is the conclusion reached by Rocío Ocón-Garrido when she states that Pérez-Reverte leans ‘at first more towards modernity and later, more towards postmodernity’.¹ However, this present analysis has indicated that there has been a consistency of vision throughout Revertian writing that is concerned with communicating the necessity of remembering the past because it is still relevant to the

CONCLUSION from: Arturo Pérez-Reverte: Narrative Tricks and Narrative Strategies
Abstract: The six chapters of this study have undertaken to examine the writings of Arturo Pérez-Reverte from a number of perspectives. Chapter 1 looked at the context of this writer, the various links between his work and that of other contemporary writers in Spain, the role of narrative, its importance in telling the stories of the past and the cultural status of narrative as a link with that past. Chapter 2 considered how Pérez-Reverte’s characters could be interpreted in a variety of ways, particularly as representations of his readers. The binary male–female opposition in that context becomes not a feminist

Book Title: Christine de Pizan-A Bibliographical Guide: Supplement 2
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Kennedy Angus J.
Abstract: Martin Le Franc's prediction in Le Champion des dames (c. 1440) that Christine de Pizan's name would endure for ever is borne out in the current extraordinary vogue of interest in Christine as France's first professional female writer (c. 1364-c. 1431). Supplement II, building on the volumes published by Kennedy in 1984 (502 items) and 1994 (391 items), covers the most productive period to date of scholarship on her work: 1991-2002 (1255 items). The present work is made up of six chapters: Bibliographies and Manuscript Catalogues; General Surveys of Christine de Pizan's Life and Works; Studies of Specific Topics (Manuscripts, Miniatures and Manuscript Illumination; Christine de Pizan, England, Spain, and Portugal; Christine de Pizan and Italy; Feminism and Related Topics; Humanism; Political, Social, and Educational Themes; The Court of Love 1400/01; Poetic Themes and Form; Language; Musical Settings; Miscelleaneous); Anthologies, Selections, and Collected Critical Studies; Individual Works: Manuscripts, Editions, Translations, and Critical Studies; Reviews of Items Listed in the 1994 volume. The Indexes are now cumulative, covering all three volumes published to date. This analytical bibliography will provide a unique interdisciplinary resource to all scholars working in the field of late-mediaeval studies.ANGUS J. KENNEDY is Stevenson Professor of French at the University of Glasgow.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt9qdp6t

INTRODUCTION from: Christine de Pizan
Abstract: Martin Le Franc’s confident prediction in Le Champion des dames(Deschaux in 1361, V, p. 178) that Christine de Pizan’s name would endure for ever (‘dame Cristine / De laquelle a trompe et a cor / Le nom par tout va et ne fine’) has been borne out in the current extraordinary vogue of interest in her life and works. A few statistics will make this clear. TheBibliographical Guidepublished in 1984 (Kennedy, 505) contained 502 items and covered the period from Christine’s lifetime till approximately 1981; theFirst Supplement(Kennedy, 899), covering one decade (1981–1991), contained 391

Book Title: Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): de Menezes Alison Ribeiro
Abstract: This monograph offers two new perspectives on Spanish writer, Juan Goytisolo. First, under the themes of authorship and dissidence, it integrates his writing across several genres, providing a rounded assessment of his contribution to cultural debates in Spain since the sixties and arguing that resistance to repressive discourses characterizes his essays and autobiographies as much as his fiction. Second, it revises the prevailing critical interpretation of Goytisolo's fiction by building on four premises: that his novels are less clearly oppositional than prevailing interpretations imply; that, in order to engage with discourses of identity, he employs an idiom which, contrary to his own statements, is not a poststructuralist autonomous world of words; that a textual practice grounded in the recognizable experience of post-Civil War Spain, rather than one which seeks out the realm of pure textuality, is essential to Goytisolo's subversive political intentions; and that the autobiographical element of much of his work constitutes a more complex narrative aesthetic than has been appreciated. The book argues that if Goytisolo's work is interpreted as an ethical engagement with postmodernist theory, rather than as an illustration of it, then certain contradictions for which he has been criticized are seen in a new and valuable light. ALISON RIBEIRO DE MENEZES is a Senior Lecturer in Spanish at University College Dublin.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt9qdps1

5 THE AUTHOR AS VOYEUR: from: Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident
Abstract: A turn to the pictoral seems to characterize contemporary literary studies.² The late twentieth-century privileging of discourse, with its trend to read pictures and images as texts, seems now to have turned back upon itself, seeking the visual in the verbal, as well as vice versa.³ The roots of this might be traced to Foucault’s work on the panoptic gaze, but that, for him, was purely a surveillance act, and thus more restricted than the broad view of the visual that I wish to adopt here.⁴ Vision implies both to see and to be seen, but not necessarily in an

7 THE AUTHOR AS INTERTEXTUAL CRITIC: from: Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident
Abstract: In 2003, with the publication of Telón de boca, Goytisolo rather dramatically announced an end to his fifty-year career as a writer of fiction.² Whether or not this turns out to be the case, the last three novels of Goytisolo’s career to date constitute a review of the main preoccupations of his writing sinceSeñas de identidad. In this sense, they bring us full circle, for each novel tackles anew the themes of authorship, identity, and dissidence with which this book has been concerned. But these novels are not just a review or summary of past works. They also offer

Book Title: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche-Life and Works
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Bishop Paul
Abstract: Nietzsche looms over modern literature and thought; according to Gottfried Benn, "everything my generation discussed, thought through innerly; one could say: suffered; or one could even say: took to the point of exhaustion - all of it had already been said . . . by Nietzsche; all the rest was just exegesis." Nietzsche's influence on intellectual life today is arguably as great; witness the various societies, journals, and websites and the steady stream of papers, collections, and monographs. This ‘Companion’ offers new essays from the best Nietzsche scholars, emphasizing the interrelatedness of his life and thought, eschewing a superficial biographical method but taking seriously his claim that great philosophy is “the self-confession of its author and a kind of unintended and unremarked ‘memoir’.” Each essay examines a major work by Nietzsche; together, they offer an advanced introduction for students of German Studies, philosophy, and comparative literature as well as for the lay reader. Re-establishing the links between Nietzsche's philosophical texts and their biographical background, the volume alerts Nietzsche scholars and intellectual historians to the internal development of his thought and the aesthetic construction of his identity as a philosopher. Contributors: Ruth Abbey, Keith Ansell-Pearson, Rebecca Bamford, Paul Bishop, Thomas H. Brobjer, Daniel W. Conway, Adrian Del Caro, Carol Diethe, Michael Allen Gillespie and Keegan F. Callanan, Laurence Lampert, Duncan Large, Martin Liebscher, Martine Prange, Alan D. Schrift. Paul Bishop is Professor of German at the University of Glasgow.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.cttn332r

2: The Birth of Tragedy from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Del Caro Adrian
Abstract: The dramatic difference between the first edition of The Birth of Tragedy (Die Geburt der Tragödie), published in 1872, and the new edition — technically the third — of 1886 does not involve the content of the work itself, but is limited to the manner in which the new edition is framed.¹ The early title had been The Birth of Tragedy from the Spirit of Music (Die Geburt der Tragödie aus dem Geiste der Musik), now changed to The Birth of Tragedy: Or, Hellenism and Pessimism (Die Geburt der Tragödie: Oder Griechenthum und Pessimismum. Appended to the title of this

3: Untimely Meditations from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Large Duncan
Abstract: The untimely meditations ( Unzeitgemässe Betrachtungen, 1873–76) are some of Nietzsche’s most neglected works. They have attracted the attentions of translators less often than most of his other, more celebrated books — Walter Kaufmann, the doyen of postwar American Nietzsche translators, never got round to translating them, and he goes so far as to suggest that they merit translating last of all.¹ They have attracted relatively little scholarly interest, too, and are omitted from the canon established by Robert C. Solomon and Kathleen Higgins in their Reading Nietzsche,² while the term “untimeliness” has routinely been passed over in Nietzsche dictionaries.³

4: Human, All Too Human: from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Abbey Ruth
Abstract: One of the first interpretive works about Nietzsche advanced the idea that three periods can be discerned in his writings. Lou Andreas-Salomé’s Friedrich Nietzsche in seinen Werken, published in 1894, proposed that Nietzsche’s middle period comprises the two volumes of Human, All Too Human (Menschliches, Allzumenschliches, 1878–80),Daybreak (Morgenröthe, 1881), and the first four books of The Gay Science (Die fröhliche Wissenschaft, 1882).¹ Nietzsche’s middle period is thus demarcated at one end by contrast with his early writings and their enthusiasm for Wagner and Schopenhauer,² and at the other by Thus Spoke Zarathustra (Also sprach Zarathustra,1883) and his subsequent writing.

5: Daybreak from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Bamford Rebecca
Abstract: Nietzsche began to make preparatory notes for Daybreak: Thoughts on the Prejudices of Morality (Morgenröthe: Gedanken über die moralischen Vorurteile) in January 1880, and performed most of the main work of composing it in Genoa between November 1880 and May 1881; the preface was added in 1886.¹ In Ecce Homo(published 1908), Nietzsche claims that the particular pathologies of his existence provided the necessary conditions for Daybreak. He writes that during the winter of 1880, spent at Genoa, a “sweetening and spiritualization” (Versüssung und Vergeistigung) almost inseparable from an “extreme poverty of blood and muscle” (extremen Armuth an Blut und Muskel)

8: Beyond Good and Evil from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Prange Martine
Abstract: Toward the end of june 1885, Nietzsche wrote to Resa von Schirnhofer that he was dictating to Louise Röder-Wiederhold for several hours a day his “thoughts on the dear Europeans of today and— tomorrow” (meine Gedanken über die lieben Europäer von heute und — Morgen ; KSB 7, 59). Thirteen months later, these thoughts were published as the “dangerous” book Beyond Good and Evil (Jenseits von Gut und Böse , 1886).¹ The book developed out of a reworking of Human, All Too Human (Menschliches, Allzumenschliches), and it was originally conceived as a companion volume to Daybreak (Morgenröthe). Toward the end

9: On the Genealogy of Morals from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Callanan Keegan F.
Abstract: From his youth nietzsche was concerned with the problem of German culture and the possibilities for cultural renewal. In his early work his hopes for renewal centered on Wagner and the rebirth of a tragic age out of the spirit of (Wagnerian) music.¹ After his break with Wagner, he gave up the idea of an immediate transformation of culture through a public festival or performance, and sought instead to provide the foundations for a new European cultural elite. This vision of cultural renewal gave way after 1881 to a more apocalyptic notion of cultural transformation that he connected to the

Link to from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Abstract: While he and Heinrich Köselitz were still correcting the proofs of On the Genealogy of Morals (Zur Genealogie der Moral), Nietzsche told Meta von Salis that the work indicated everything essential that should be known about him: from the preface to The Birth of Tragedy (Die Geburt der Tragödie) to the preface of his latest work there was revealed, he said, “a kind of ‘evolution’” (eine Art “Entwicklungsgeschichte”; KSB 8, 151). Before Nietzsche returned to Nice for his fifth winter, E. W. Fritzsch published a composition by Nietzsche, his setting of Lou von Salomé’s “Hymn to life” (Hymnus an das

Link to from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Abstract: Turin forms the backdrop to Nietzsche’s most productive year, and his last year of sanity: in addition to The Case of Wagner (Der Fall Wagner), published in September 1888, and Nietzsche contra Wagner (a series of selections from his earlier writings, first published in 1889 and then again in 1895), 1888 saw the preparation of three new works, Twilight of the Idols (Götzen-Dämmerung), The Anti-Christ or The Anti-Christian (Der Anti-Christ),and Ecce Homo , all published posthumously—all of which stand in some relation or another to Nietzsche’s final philosophical project. This work is (or a part of it) is referred

12: The Anti-Christ from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Liebscher Martin
Abstract: The last sunday of august 1888 saw Nietzsche drafting the very last plan for his main philosophical work that was to have been entitled The Will to Power (Der Wille zur Macht).¹ This was to be endowed with the subtitle Attempt at a Revaluation of Values (Versuch einer Umwertung aller Werte). To the credit of Mazzino Montinari and the critical edition of Nietzsche’s works, there can no longer be any doubt that Nietzsche subsequently abandoned The Will to Power and replaced it with a project under the former subtitle, Revaluation of values (Umwertung aller Werte).² As a letter to Heinrich

15: Nietzsche’s from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Schrift Alan D.
Abstract: Technically speaking, nietzsche’S nachlass or literary remains is comprised of all of his work, excluding his letters, that remained unpublished when his mental collapse ended his productive life in January 1889. This would include: (1) texts that he had prepared for publication but which he was unable to see through to publication, namely The Anti-Christ (Der Antichrist), Nietzsche Contra Wagner, Dithyrambs of Dionysos (Dionysos-Dithyramben), and Ecce Homo;(2) his early, unpublished essays and lectures, many of which could be considered complete, albeit never published, works; and (3)his notes, as well as drafts and variants of his published works. The size of

Conclusion from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Abstract: In his notebooks for the period from the end of 1876 to the summer of 1877, we find the following sketch for a section in the first volume of Menschliches, Allzumenschliches(Human, All Too Human) (MA I §292; KSA 2, 235–37). Where, in the published version of this passage, which is entitled “Forward” (“Vorwärts”), Nietzsche casts his observations in the form of recommendations for the reader, in this draft he states them as his personal ambition. So it seems appropriate, as a conclusion to this Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche, to his life and his works, to this Companion to Friedrich

17 ‘Keepers of the Flame’: from: Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Forgan Sophie
Abstract: In 1854 Charles Dickens visited Paris, the scene of one of his most famous novels, A Tale of Two Cities (1859), and found inspiration in what he termed the museum of ‘Second-Hand Sovereigns’. There, in the Louvre, he found a museum of the ‘Paraphernalia of the Kings and Emperors of France’, and, despite railing against the rottenness of human grandeur, he was carried away by seeing the boots, the hats, the voluminous crimson mantle, the Emperor’s writing-table which bore ‘oh! such unmistakeable signs of hard work, indomitable perseverance, and iron will! … splashed with ink … punched with penknives …

Book Title: A Companion to Javier Marías- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): HERZBERGER DAVID K.
Abstract: This book provides the most comprehensive study to date of the full range of Marías' writing, including discussion and analysis of his literary and intellectual formation, his development as a novelist and short story writer, and his unique perspective offered in nearly twenty-five years of newspaper columns on topics ranging from religion to football. Above all, Marías is examined as a writer of fictions. As a translator of several canonical works from English to Spanish, Marías came to appreciate the preciseness of words as well as their ambiguity, their capacity to represent as well as their propensity to distort. The author examines Marías's constant awareness of how language can be used to construct stories as the foundation for engaging the world as well as for imagining it. The nature of Marías's storytelling, and the way in which he imagines, form the principal focus of this Companion. David K. Herzberger is Professor and Chair of the Department of Hispanic Studies at the University of California, Riverside.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.cttn3408

Foreword from: A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: During the course of preparing this book, in addition to the customary reading of professional criticism on the work of Javier Marías, I sought also to stay abreast of the extensive flow of information about him on various blogs and internet sites. In this way I was able to compile an array of information from many sources offered from diverse points of view. As might be expected, some of what I found was quite useful, providing a detail here or an insight there into Marías’s life and works. Marías is a popular figure among casual readers as well as academic

1 Writing in the Newspapers: from: A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: Although Marías published short essays in the Spanish press and wrote articles for newspapers as early as 1976,¹ it was not until December of 1994, when he agreed to undertake what he has called his “tareas dominicales” (“Sunday tasks”) for the magazine El Semanal‚that he began to write a regular weekly column.² For Marías, who had drolly embraced writing as a way to avoid holding a regular job bound by a fixed work schedule, the commitment to meet a deadline, and to be paid for doing so, seemed somewhat odd as well as potentially treacherous. He noted in November

II Two Early Novels: from: A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: When asked in 2006 about the relationship between his second novel, Travesía del horizonte(1972) (Voyage Along the Horizon, 2006), and the general tendencies in Spanish fiction at the time of its publication, Marías promptly linked it to his first novel,Los dominios del lobo(1971) (The Dominions of the Wolf), and then located both outside the narrative mainstream in Spain. Indeed, he placed his first two works in a context of difference from important works of Spanish fiction of the 1960s and early 1970s that were lauded for their combination of stylistic experimentation and political antagonism toward Francoism. As

III Two Transitional Novels: from: A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: El siglo(1983) is an unabashedly stylized novel. Its narrative technique (alternating chapters told in the first and third persons), its complicated sentence structure (largely baroque-like), and the slow pacing of its plot stand in marked contrast to Marías’s earlier novels,Los dominios del loboandTravesía del horizonte.¹ In the latter two works, as we have seen, Marías moves deftly but swiftly through multiple stories with sometimes tenuous connections. He rarely slows to allow for the development of complex characters, and he shapes the perspective of each novel largely through thirdperson narrators who may not possess sufficient information to

IV On Oxford, Redonda, and the Practice of Reading: from: A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: The two novels explored in this chapter, Todas las almas(1989) (All Souls‚ 1992) andNegra espalda del tiempo(1998) (Dark Back of Time, 2001), are two of the most intimately linked of all of Marías’s works of fiction.¹ This intimacy obtains on many levels, even though nine years passed between the publication of the two works, and despite the fact that Marías wrote two other novels in the intervening period,Corazón tan blanco(1992) (A Heart So White, 1995) andMañana en la batalla piensa en mí(1994) (Tommorow in the Battle Think on Me, 1996). To a large

V Two Shakespearean Novels from: A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: In Corazón tan blanco(1992) (A Heart So White, 1995) andMañana en la batalla piensa en mí(1994) (Tomorrow in the Battle Think on Me, 1996), Marías continues to emphasize two important aspects of his fiction: intertextual connections with other works of literature and film (most explicitly with Shakespeare in these two novels), and the way in which storytelling lies at the heart of how we construct our understanding of the world. Each of the novels begins with a sudden and unexpected death, and thus contains elements of a mystery novel which invite the reader to expect intrigue and

Book Title: Thomas King-Works and Impact
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Gruber Eva
Abstract: Thomas King is one of North America's foremost Native writers, best known for his novels, including 'Green Grass, Running Water', for the 'DreadfulWater' mysteries, and for collections of short stories such as 'One Good Story, That One' and 'A Short History of Indians in Canada.' But King is also a poet, a literary and cultural critic, and a noted filmmaker, photographer, and scriptwriter and performer for radio. His career and oeuvre have been validated by literary awards and by the inclusion of his writing in college and university curricula. Critical responses to King's work have been abundant, yet most of this criticism consists of journal articles, and to date only one book-length study of his work exists. 'Thomas King: Works and Impact' fills this gap by providing an up-to-date, comprehensive overview of all major aspects of King's oeuvre as well as its reception and influence. It brings together expert scholars to discuss King's role in and impact on Native literature and to offer in-depth analyses of his multifaceted body of work. The volume will be of interest to students and scholars of literature, English, and Native American studies, and to King aficionados. Contributors: Jesse Rae Archibald-Barber, Julia Breitbach, Stuart Christie, James H. Cox, Marta Dvorak, Floyd Favel, Kathleen Flaherty, Aloys Fleischmann, Marlene Goldman, Eva Gruber, Helen Hoy, Renée Hulan and Linda Warley, Carter Meland, Reingard M. Nischik, Robin Ridington, Suzanne Rintoul, Katja Sarkowsky, Blanca Schorcht, Mark Shackleton, Martin Kuester and Marco Ulm, Doris Wolf. Eva Gruber is Assistant Professor in the Department of American Studies at the University of Constance, Germany.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.cttn34mb

Introduction from: Thomas King
Author(s) Gruber Eva
Abstract: Thomas king is among the best-known contemporary Native writers in North America. In the generation that followed the first wave of Native American Renaissance authors such as Leslie Marmon Silko and N. Scott Momaday, King, along with Sherman Alexie, Louise Erdrich, and Louis Owens, is a leading voice. Through frequent public appearances at festivals, on radio shows, and most recently in the political arena, he is a highly visible personality on the literary landscape, and the sustained quality of his work has been appreciated not least through the numerous prizes and honors he has been awarded or nominated for. King

5: Rewriting Genre Fiction: from: Thomas King
Author(s) Breitbach Julia
Abstract: Under the whimsical pseudonym of Hartley GoodWeather, Thomas King has published two detective novels, or “mysteries,” to date. DreadfulWater Shows Up came out in 2002 as the first installment in a planned series of altogether four novels on Cherokee freelance investigator Thumps DreadfulWater. It was followed by The Red Power Murders: A DreadfulWater Mystery in 2006.¹ The original front cover of DreadfulWater Shows Up sported only the pseudonym, but the author’s true identity would have been evident to devoted readers of King’s work: a small photo on the back flap showed the author as film-noir sleuth, complete with trench, fedora,

7: Is This the Indian You Had in Mind? from: Thomas King
Abstract: I’m not the indian you had in mind (2007), a short film that was written and directed by Thomas King, captures recurring themes in his critical and creative work. The film begins with King wheeling a carved wooden cigar-store Indian into the shot of a trendy urban loft, looking directly at the camera, and as he speaks the camera cuts away to the image of an oversized lens projecting images onto a silver screen. The poem is interspersed with footage from Hollywood westerns showing mounted Indians riding hard across the prairie, howling war cries and brandishing tomahawks. In both the

8: “Coyote Conquers the Campus”: from: Thomas King
Author(s) Archibald-Barber Jesse Rae
Abstract: King’s importance to indigenous literatures is well established throughout Canada and the United States, and he is one of the bestknown Cherokee authors outside of North America. In his essays and fiction, King often challenges Western stereotypes of Indigenous peoples and provides literary concepts, characters, symbols, and narratives that more accurately represent the complex context of Indigenous literatures. Indeed, King’s works have been groundbreaking for the study of Indigenous issues not only in Canadian society, but also as they relate to colonial histories in countries around the world. However, although King’s works are often taught in schools, it is difficult

14: One Good Protest: from: Thomas King
Author(s) Cox James H.
Abstract: Thomas king published major works prior to and simultaneously with a shift in the primary focus of American Indian literary critical inquiry from issues of culture and identity to questions of history and politics. Much of the early scholarship on King’s fiction, therefore, approaches it with an interest in identities and storytelling strategies and assesses its cultural, multicultural, and crosscultural character. The attention to American Indian intellectual, activist, and tribal nation specific histories by Osage scholar Robert Warrior (1995), Cherokee scholar Jace Weaver (1997), and Muscogee Creek and Cherokee scholar Craig Womack (1999) shapes more recent critical work, for example,

20: Tom King and the from: Thomas King
Author(s) Flaherty Kathleen
Abstract: Once upon a time I got a call from Thomas King saying he wanted to do an old-fashioned radio show. Since we had worked together before, on radio dramas he had adapted from his own stories, I knew he had a keen sense of radio. So we talked about what he meant by old-fashioned radio. He meant short plays with people talking directly to the audience from a single location. He meant cheesy sound effects created live in the studio. The show was going to be about contemporary life from a Native perspective. And from the perspective of someone who

Book Title: Fighting For Time-Shifting Boundaries of Work and Social Life
Publisher: Russell Sage Foundation
Author(s): Kalleberg Arne L.
Abstract: Though there are still just twenty-four hours in a day, society’s idea of who should be doing what and when has shifted. Time, the ultimate scarce resource, has become an increasingly contested battle zone in American life, with work, family, and personal obligations pulling individuals in conflicting directions. In Fighting for Time, editors Cynthia Fuchs Epstein and Arne Kalleberg bring together a team of distinguished sociologists and management analysts to examine the social construction of time and its importance in American culture. Fighting for Time opens with an exploration of changes in time spent at work—both when people are on the job and the number of hours they spend there—and the consequences of those changes for individuals and families. Contributors Jerry Jacobs and Kathleen Gerson find that the relative constancy of the average workweek in America over the last thirty years hides the fact that blue-collar workers are putting in fewer hours while more educated white-collar workers are putting in more. Rudy Fenwick and Mark Tausig look at the effect of nonstandard schedules on workers’ health and family life. They find that working unconventional hours can increase family stress, but that control over one’s work schedule improves family, social, and health outcomes for workers. The book then turns to an examination of how time influences the organization and control of work. The British insurance company studied by David Collinson and Margaret Collinson is an example of a culture where employees are judged on the number of hours they work rather than on their productivity. There, managers are under intense pressure not to take legally guaranteed parental leave, and clocks are banned from the office walls so that employees will work without regard to the time. In the book’s final section, the contributors examine how time can have different meanings for men and women. Cynthia Fuchs Epstein points out that professional women and stay-at-home fathers face social disapproval for spending too much time on activities that do not conform to socially prescribed gender roles—men are mocked by coworkers for taking paternity leave, while working mothers are chastised for leaving their children to the care of others. Fighting for Time challenges assumptions about the relationship between time and work, revealing that time is a fluid concept that derives its importance from cultural attitudes, social psychological processes, and the exercise of power. Its insight will be of interest to sociologists, economists, social psychologists, business leaders, and anyone interested in the work-life balance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7758/9781610441872

Chapter 2 Understanding Changes in American Working Time: from: Fighting For Time
Author(s) Gerson Kathleen
Abstract: Time on the job is a central and increasingly contested terrain in the lives of Americans. Working time sets the framework for both work and family life, and since time is not an expandable resource, long hours at the workplace must inevitably take time away from the rest of life. Long schedules of sixty hours a week or more mean that a worker is forced to scramble for time at home, inevitably missing even simple daily rituals such as breakfast or dinner with family and friends. Yet short workweeks of thirty hours or less, which offer more time for private

Chapter 3 Employment in a 24/7 Economy: from: Fighting For Time
Author(s) Presser Harriet B.
Abstract: Over recent decades, the U.S. labor force has been experiencing greater temporal diversity in the nature of employment. The total number of weekly hours people are employed has been spreading to both ends of the continuum, so that more people are working very few as well as very many hours (Smith 1986; U.S. Department of Labor 2002). Which hours people are working has also been changing with flextime on the rise (Golden 2001; U.S. Department of Labor 1998) and more people working the “fringe times”—several hours before or after the traditional nine-to-five workday (Hamermesh 1999). It is interesting that

Chapter 4 The Health and Family-Social Consequences of Shift Work and Schedule Control: from: Fighting For Time
Author(s) Tausig Mark
Abstract: Recent changes in the U.S. economy and labor force have led to great diversity in the time workers spend on the job. The increased diversity refers not only to changes in the absolute number of working hours, as many workers work more hours per week and many others work fewer hours, but also to which hours and days they are working and how much flexibility they have in determining which hours they work. The so-called “standard shift”—thirty-five to forty hours per week, nine to five, Monday through Friday—has increasingly become the exception rather than the standard, since fewer

Chapter 7 Engineering Overwork: from: Fighting For Time
Author(s) Sharone Ofer
Abstract: After steadily decreasing throughout the first half of the twentieth century, in the late 1960s the number of hours Americans work made a sudden U-turn and began to rise (Schor 1991).¹ In 1999, American workers surpassed the Japanese to earn the dubious distinction of working the longest hours in the industrialized world (International Labour Organization 1999). Among American workers, it is the relatively well-off professional, managerial, and technical workers who are putting in the longest work hours (Jacobs and Gerson 1998).² This paper explores the causes underlying long work hours among a group of workers on the front line of

Chapter 10 Work Devotion and Work Time from: Fighting For Time
Author(s) Blair-Loy Mary
Abstract: Scholars maintain that a major source of work-family conflict is the lack of sufficient time in the day to meet work and family obligations (see, for example, Hochschild 1997; Parcel 1999). This time crunch is exacerbated by the increase in work hours over the past thirty years, especially for professional and managerial workers and for women (Jacobs and Gerson 2004). Work-family researchers generally see long work hours as negative consequences of employer demands or increased competition wrought by globalization and industry consolidation (Schor 1992; Hochschild 1997; Jacobs and Gerson 2004; Blair-Loy and Jacobs 2003; Fraser 2001). But to fully comprehend

Chapter 11 Border Crossings: from: Fighting For Time
Author(s) Epstein Cynthia Fuchs
Abstract: How do we account for the constraints faced by women and men who wish to move beyond the boundaries of their traditional sex and gender roles in contemporary society? Despite the opportunities for change made possible by advocates for equality, liberating technological advances, and changes in the law, women find it difficult to move upward through glass ceilings and men find it difficult to moderate time commitments at work to take on childcare responsibilities in the home. Ideologies and institutionalized practices in the workplace and the community form obstacles to breaking down boundaries. Among them are time ideologies and the

Book Title: After Parsons-A Theory of Social Action for the Twenty-First Century
Publisher: Russell Sage Foundation
Author(s): Bershady Harold J.
Abstract: Rather than simply celebrating Parsons and his accomplishments, the contributors to After Parsonsrethink and reformulate his ideas to place them on more solid foundations, extend their scope, and strengthen their empirical insights.After Parsonsconstitutes the work of a distinguished roster of American and European sociologists who find Parsons' theory of action a valuable resource for addressing contemporary issues in sociological theory. All of the essays in this volume take elements of Parsons' theory and critique, adapt, refine, or extend them to gain fresh purchase on problems that confront sociologists today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7758/9781610442152

Chapter 1 Parsons’s Economic Sociology and the Development of Economic Sociology from: After Parsons
Author(s) Smelser Neil J.
Abstract: In this chapter I will say a few words about the intellectual origins in Talcott Parsons’s development of the ingredients that were synthesized into a culmination of his most mature theoretical statement in Economy and Societyand outline the essential features of that statement. I will comment on that book’s subsequent “fate” in light of developments within sociology and to some extent economics, and sketch the reinvigoration of economic sociology in the past two decades, and present a critical assessment of work in those decades, partly from a “Parsonian” point of view—an assessment that will yield, finally, a programmatic

Chapter 4 Affect in Social Life from: After Parsons
Author(s) Bershady Harold J.
Abstract: Talcott Parsons conceived the idea of the generalized symbolic media of interchange in his later work. The very large question or set of questions this idea was designed to answer is this: What are the contributions each subsystem of society makes to the functioning of each of the other subsystems? A well-developed answer to this question, he believed, would provide action theory with an analysis of dynamic processes more comprehensive and rigorous than had so far been achieved.

Chapter 5 Contradictions in the Societal Community: from: After Parsons
Author(s) Alexander Jeffrey C.
Abstract: Within the strongly empiricist framework of American social science, there is very little acknowledgment of the nonempirical, theoretically driven dimension of scientific change. Yet the major developments in social science do not emerge primarily from simple accumulation of empirical knowledge or from proving previous theories false. They grow from confrontations with other, hegemonic theories. These confrontations, which are often intense and highly emotional, may take the form of critical experiments that crystallize and operationalize more general commitments, but they usually also present themselves as more general, less empirical arguments about theoretical logic itself.

Chapter 6 How Different Can We Be? from: After Parsons
Author(s) Sciortino Giuseppe
Abstract: There are few doubts about the importance of the notion of societal community to Parsons’s work. His analysis of the societal community is a cornerstone of his attempt to analyze the structure of contemporary societies, and of his interpretation of historical evolution.

Chapter 12 From Amherst to Heidelberg: from: After Parsons
Author(s) Camic Charles
Abstract: The purpose of the chapter is threefold. The first is methodological: to call attention to the reductionist manner in which interpreters of Talcott Parsons typically connect the events of his life with the content of his ideas and to urge, instead, a more developmental—or life-course—approach. The second goal is to furnish a partial illustration of this approach through a brief intellectual-historical examination of the early phases in the development on Parsons’s concept of culture. I take culture as the focus because, although it is one of the central concepts throughout Parsons’s work, not only have Parsons scholars misunderstood

Book Title: Approaches to Social Theory- Publisher: Russell Sage Foundation
Author(s): NOWAK STEFAN
Abstract: By exploring a few central issues in different ways, this unique conference worked through some lively theoretical incompatibilities and established genuine potential for communication, for complementary and collaborative effort at the core of sociology. The excitement of that dialogue, and the intellectual vitality it generated, are captured for the reader in Approaches to Social Theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7758/9781610443616

Introduction from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) Nowak Stefan
Abstract: In autumn 1982, Stefan Nowak and David Featherman planned, within the broader framework of the program of cooperation in the social sciences between the Polish Academy of Sciences and the American Council of Learned Societies and with encouragement from the International Research and Exchanges Board (IREX), a series of Polish-American conferences in sociology. The general methodological theme of the conferences was intended to be the qualitative-quantitative chasm in sociology, with the aim of helping to bridge that chasm, both in theory and in research. The first conference was to be on social theory, to be held in the United States

On W. I. Thomas and Florian Znaniecki from: Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: William Issac Thomas (1863–1947), sociologist and social psychologist, was born in Virginia. Little is known about his early years, but he entered the University of Tennessee at the age of 17 and graduated in 1884. He remained at the university for the next four years as an instructor in modern and classical languages, thereby acquiring a linguistic facility that was to prove invaluable in his later work. After marrying Harriet Park in 1888, he spent a year studying in Germany and then joined the faculty of Oberlin College, where he taught English. In 1893, while on leave from Oberlin,

The Analysis of Diversity and the Diversity of Analysis from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) JANOWITZ MORRIS
Abstract: For me, the house of sociology has many rooms. An interest in social institutions guides my work. I believe that the “institutional approach” to political sociology is close to the real world and at the same time supplies a basis for theoretical analysis of institution building in politics. Institutional analysis is especially useful in probing nation-states with democratic political institutions which are now experiencing great internal strain.

The Development of Scholasticism from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) STINCHCOMBE ARTHUR L.
Abstract: My general argument is that the development of sociology as a discipline led us systematically away from the study of humans acting in society. The higher the prestige of a piece of sociological work, the fewer people in it are sweaty, laughing, ugly or pretty, dull at parties, or have warts on their noses. Field work is the lowest status in methodology, because surprising humans keep popping out and bewildering us by doing things we do not understand; much better to have people answering closedended questions so that they fall neatly into cross-classifications to be analyzed by loglinear methods. Similarly,

General Discussion from: Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: Harrison White:In describing the fierce competition of the new German university system, Ben-David spoke of the fact that one of the things going for the experimentalists was, after all, that they were doing lab work, and he seemed to take it for granted that lab work was more communicable. I found that a fascinating puzzle because in my own experience, lab work is one of the least communicable things in the world. It is not at all easy to replicate experimental work or lab work. I would argue that the advantage of experimentalists is a paradox. You have to

Social Network Theory from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) KNOKE DAVID
Abstract: Our task here is threefold. First, we shall quickly adumbrate the particular sort of social structural analysis with which we and our associates have been concerned over the past ten years or so. We will then step back to indicate some of the central theoretical issues that have been plaguing us as we set about applying this theoretical perspective to empirical problems. To avoid confusion, we shall restrict the term “network analysis” to the emerging set of analytic techniques developed to examine network data—i.e., data typically in the form of a square matrix of rows and corresponding columns referring

General Discussion from: Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: Micbael Hecbter:This question is equally addressed to Ed Laumann and to Ron Burt. I wonder whether network theory or structural theory in general can ever successfully account for change—that is, dynamics—and if it can, I want to know what the mechanism is. So I want to know how we answer questions like, “Where do structures come from?” “How do they change?” “Where do the relationships come from?” “How do they change?”

Comment from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) ALDRICH HOWARD
Abstract: I want to emphasize a point that Hannan and Freeman have made about the paradigm shift their work represents. In 1974, at the International Sociological Association meetings in Toronto, Hannan and Freeman presented a paper called “The Population Ecology of Organizations.” Things haven’t been the same since that time! They pointed out the very high death rate of organizations compared with what the literature in the 1960s would have led us to expect. For a representative cross section of organizations, the death rate is about one in ten per year, and for new organizations it is over one in two

Comment from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) KITSUSE JOHN
Abstract: As Gusfield’s paper documents, he commands a detailed body of information about the social and cultural organization of the factual and moral status of alcohol and its use in American society. I consider his work on the drinking-driver problem an excellent example of the social construction of social problems.

Comment from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) PADGEIT JOHN
Abstract: Ever since the pioneering empirical work of Alfred Chandler, the investigation of multidivisional firms has been transforming our understanding of what organizations are and of how they operate. Williamson began the theoretical task by undermining the classical Weberian dichotomy between markets and hierarchies. Through his transaction cost analysis of contracting systems, Williamson underlined the fact that current business management is a mixture of market and hierarchy principles. Hybrid organizational forms such as diversification, profit centers, performance evaluation, transfer pricing, subcontracting, joint ventures, and conglomerates all point to the pervasiveness both of profit-oriented exchange relations within economic units and of overtly

Language Structure and Social Structure from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) LABOV WILLIAM
Abstract: The past three decades have witnessed a great deal of scholarly activity under the label of “sociolinguistics.”¹ Yet the barrier between sociology and linguistics remains as firm as ever. In their studies of speech communities, linguists have as often as not tried to create their own sociology, with curious results; and a vanishingly small number of sociologists have made use of the tools of linguistic analysis.² On the sociological side, this is not too severe a limitation. A great deal of important work has been done in the sociology of language where the data take the form “X speaks language

Comment from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) GRIMSHAW ALLEN
Abstract: William Labov has used a background which includes training in both “autonomous linguistics” and sociological methods and theory to contribute to our understanding of core issues in both disciplines. His past work has included both macro studies of phenomena of stratification (and mobility) and linguistic and social change; much of this research has employed analyses of results of extensive surveys of phonological production. He has also done micro studies of social interactional processes and rules; this research has attended to a variety of features of speech (phonological, syntactic, prosodic) in “comprehensive discourses analyses.” Labov started his paper by observing that

In Search of a New Left from: Promises of 1968
Author(s) Howard Dick
Abstract: Officially, I left the University of Texas for Paris in the summer of 1966 as a fulbright scholar. What I wanted in fact to learn was how to make a revolution—or at least to understand the Marxist theory that had been identified with this skill. I had taken part in the civil rights movement, and demonstrated against the war in Vietnam; but both of these movements seemed to be caught in the trap of using the language of liberalism against the liberal system. What was needed instead, it seemed, was a framework that would permit a radical transformation of

Betrayed Promises: from: Promises of 1968
Author(s) Iacob Bogdan
Abstract: There are moments in history that indelibly mark the memories of their contemporaries. The balcony scene on August 21, 1968, when Nicolae Ceauşescu, general secretary of the RCP, addressed a crowd of over 100,000 from the Central Committee building in one of Bucharest’s main squares and vehemently condemned the invasion of Czechoslovakia a few hours after the Warsaw Pact intervention, a scene that became a national-communist legend, was eulogized by many as a gesture of heroic proportions: the Romanian david valiantly defying the Soviet Goliath. it was in fact nothing but a skillful masquerade, but it worked: a power-obsessed neo-Stalinist

Book Title: Bones of Contention-The living archive of Vasil Levski and the making of Bulgaria's national hero
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Todorova Maria
Abstract: This book is about documenting and analyzing the living archive around the figure of Vasil Levski (1837–1873), arguably the major and only uncontested hero of the Bulgarian national pantheon. The processes described, although with a chronological depth of almost two centuries, are still very much in the making, and the living archive expands not only in size but constantly adding surprising new forms. The monograph is a historical study, taking as its narrative focus the life, death and posthumous fate of Levski. By exploring the vicissitudes of his heroicization, glorification, appropriations, reinterpretation, commemoration and, finally, canonization, it seeks to engage in several broad theoretical debates, and provide the basis for subsequent regional comparative research. The analysis of Levski's consecutive and simultaneous appropriations by different social platforms, political parties, secular and religious institutions, ideologies, professional groups, and individuals, demonstrates how boundaries within the framework of the nation are negotiated around accepted national symbols.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt128245

INTRODUCTION from: Bones of Contention
Abstract: This book is about documenting and analyzing the living archive around the figure of Vasil Levski, arguably the major and only uncontested hero of the Bulgarian national pantheon. In the course of working on the problem, it became clear that this cannot be a finite task. The processes described, although with a chronological depth of almost two centuries, are still very much in the making, and the living archive expands not only in size but constantly adds surprising new forms. While archives continue to occupy an almost sacral place both in the public imagination (as the repositories of truth) as

5. “Professionals” and “Dilettantes” from: Bones of Contention
Abstract: When speaking of the BAN debates as Turner’s redressive phase, what is peculiar about the Bulgarian case is that the whole framework upon which the redressive mechanism was based was itself in a legitimacy crisis from the mid-1980s on. By the 1990s it had completely collapsed and this is probably the most salient explanation why the redressive machinery did not “fix” the problem. What the BAN debates did demonstrate, however, is that “it is in the redressive phase that both pragmatic techniques and symbolic action reach their fullest expression.” 218

3. A Banner for All Causes: from: Bones of Contention
Abstract: The voluminous body of scholarly work on Vasil Levski, among which some genuine and masterly contributions stand out, is focused entirely on the historical figure and its activities. The first and only analysis of Levski’s posthumous fate is Genchev’s chapter on “Vasil Levski in the Bulgarian historical memory,” which he published in his 1987 book on Levski. In it, Genchev makes an attempt to explain the abrupt turn in the Levski discourse after the Balkan Wars and the First World War. He contends that history itself vindicated Levski’s ideas. The reason for this, according to Genchev, is the critical reassessment

5. Commemoration, Ritual, and the Sacred from: Bones of Contention
Abstract: How do we begin to think about all of this? What is the proper framework of interpretation? One may be tempted to see the phenomenon of Levski’s present veneration and canonization fall under the rubric of what Katherine Verdery calls “the political lives of dead bodies” in post–socialist Eastern Europe or, more aptly and wittily, in the first version of her manuscript, as “post-socialist necrophilia.” Verdery tried to make sense of the hectic activity around dead bodies (reburials of famous persons returned from abroad, or of famous and anonymous ones at home, as well as the erection and tearing

Inter-texts of identity from: Late Enlightenment
Abstract: The history of this ‘Reader’ goes back to a meeting of a group of young scholars at the Balkan Summer University in Plovdiv in 1999. The lively interaction and debates engendered by this occasion highlighted the necessity of creating a common regional framework of intercultural dialogue. A year later, meeting in the same place, the idea of a ‘Reader’ containing a representative collection of fundamental texts that had contributed to and/or reflected upon the formation of narratives of national identity in Central and Southeast Europe was conceived. We envisioned this ‘Reader’ as a new synthesis that could challenge the self-centered

14. Remembering Communism: from: Remembering Communism
Author(s) Boneva Tania
Abstract: In my study, I have tried to overcome the one-sided image of communism/socialism in Bulgaria. I hope that it answers some of the critical questions about the development of Bulgarian society in the twentieth century, and that it presents a complex picture of both peasants and workers in the region of Pernik at that time, in particular with regard to the problems of economic and social modernization of Bulgarian society in the period of communism/socialism. The social inequalities between peasants and workers, the focus on industrialization and massive migration to the town—a process typical for the whole communist period

16. Workers in the Workers’ State: from: Remembering Communism
Author(s) Cimpoieru Corina
Abstract: Following the above motto and photograph, the present study starts from an apparent paradox dealing with a subject that undergoes a dichotomic representation. While the motto contests a proletariat in re, the photograph affirms it blatantly through corpor(e)ality. The aim of presenting this paradox is to draw attention to the condition of industrial workers in socialism and its representation after the fall of the regime. The motto is frequently encountered in the postsocialist hegemonic discourse which reduces the proletariat

21. From Memory to Canon: from: Remembering Communism
Author(s) Popova Katerina
Abstract: Immediately after 1989, our past became more and more unpredictable. At the time, I did not realize how accurate this famous phrase would continue to be two decades later. Although I had been working on the problematic of collective memory for some time, I could not have imagined that the efforts of a group of politicians and historians (the European People’s Party, Stéphane Courtois, and others), who strove to legalize the formula “communism is a regime more perverse than Nazism” in the process of lobbying for Resolution 1481 of the PACE (January 2006), would not be discussed by Bulgarian historians,

22. Theater Artists and the Bulgarian Authorities in the 1960s: from: Remembering Communism
Author(s) Hristova Natalia
Abstract: For more than thirty years my research focus has been on Bulgarian culture in the second half of the twentieth century. In the last twenty years I branched out from the archive and literary works into the sprawling memoir literature, and I have been conducting interviews with Bulgarian intellectuals. I cannot recall whether my choice for interviews was based on the fact of my personal acquaintance with writers, or whether I was attracted to critical authors and their literature. Most likely, the two coincided.

24. “By Their Memoirs You Shall Know Them”: from: Remembering Communism
Author(s) Marcheva Iliana
Abstract: The relationship “scholar-political regime” and the limits of the admissible compromises, which every intellectual sets according to his/her own ideas about morality, should be of considerable interest to any scholar, at the very least for the purposes of comparison with other fellow-workers. I was interested in those questions, being myself a student of socialism, and especially as a result of my participation in a project at the Institute of History at the Bulgarian Academy of Sciences in 2004–2005. The project dealt with how “the changes” reflected upon the discipline of history in the 1980s. The emphasis was on the

Book Title: Remembrance, History, and Justice-Coming to terms with traumatic pasts in democratic societies
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Iacob Bogdan C.
Abstract: The twentieth century has left behind a painful and complicated legacy of massive trauma, monstrous crimes, radical social engineering, or collective/individual guilt syndromes that were often the premises for and the specters haunting the process of democratization in the various societies that emerged out of these profoundly de-structuring contexts. The present manuscript is a state of the art reassessment and analysis of how the interplay between memory, history, and justice generates insight that is multifariously relevant for comprehending the present and future of democracy without becoming limited to a Europe-centric framework of understanding. The manuscript is structured on three complementary and interconnected trajectories: the public use of history, politics of memory, and transitional justice. Key words 1. Europe, Eastern—Politics and government—1989– 2. Collective memory—Europe, Eastern. 3. Memory—Political aspects—Europe, Eastern. 4. Democratization— Social aspects—Europe, Eastern. 5. Europe, Eastern—Historiography—Social aspects. 6. Europe, Eastern—Historiography—Political aspects. 7. Social justice— Europe, Eastern. 8. Post-communism—Europe, Eastern. 9. Fascism—Social aspects—Europe, Eastern. 10. Dictatorship—Social aspects—Europe, Eastern.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt19z399m

European Mass Killing and European Commemoration from: Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Snyder Timothy
Abstract: The history of mass killing and the commemoration of that history are two separate subjects.¹ I would like to divide this chapter between these two topics, emphasizing that they are different, and, at the very end, I will make some modest suggestions about how they ought to be brought together. So, this is an essay about the last twenty years of my own work, which involved an attempt to bring together German and Soviet policies of mass killing in Eastern Europe in the volume Bloodlands. At the same time, the past two decades was a rich period of commemoration of

After Communism: from: Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Donskis Leonidas
Abstract: Eastern European countries seem locked mentally somewhere between the discovery of the intrinsic logic of capitalism characteristic of the nineteenth century and the post-Weimar Republic period. This is a period characterized by an incredibly fast economic growth and a passionate advocacy of the values of free enterprise and capitalism, accompanied by a good deal of anomie, fission of the body social, stark social contrasts, shocking degrees of corruption, a culture of poverty (to recall Oscar Lewis’s term which refers to low trust, self-victimization, disbelief in social ties and networks, contempt for institutions, and so on), and cynicism.

Chapter One NATION, RELIGION AND FUNDAMENTALISM LOCATING THE THEMATICAL PARAMETERS AND CONTEXT OF THE SERBIAN COSMOLOGY from: Serbian Orthodox Fundamentals
Abstract: The aforementioned statement belongs to André Breton and more specifically, forms a part of his introductory essay,² on Frida Kahlo’s exhibition in New York in 1938. In an effort to grant a more objective perspective to the interior “meaning” of her paintings, he described her work in a

Conclusion from: Serbian Orthodox Fundamentals
Abstract: George Seferis’ Mythistorema—the colloquial meaning of the title is novel—connotes to the components of istoria—both history and tale—as an expression with some coherence of the circumstances that are independent of the reader—as the characters in a novel—andmythos, a certain mythology, clearly alluded to in the thematical substance of the verse. Beyond the etymological binary of a “heading”, Seferis’ work gradually reveals to its audience his enduring inspiration from the past, in the collective recollection of creation, war or destruction and as a personal reminder of loss and exile. The emergent image is seemingly

Book Title: What Holds Europe Together?- Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Michalski Krzysztof
Abstract: The book addresses contemporary developments in European identity politics as part of a larger historical trajectory of a common European identity based on the idea of 'solidarity.' The authors explain the special sense in which Europeans perceive their obligations to their less fortunate compatriots, to the new East European members, and to the world at large. An understanding of this notion of 'solidarity' is critical to understanding the specific European commitment to social justice and equality. The specificity of this term helps to distinguish between what the Germans call "social state" from the Anglo-Saxon, and particularly American, political and social system focused on capitalism and economic liberalism. This collection is the result of the work of an extremely distinguished group of scholars and politicians, invited by the previous President of the European Union, Romano Prodi, to reflect on some of the most important subjects affecting the future of Europe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt1cgf90d

The European Union’s Enlargement to the East and Solidarity from: What Holds Europe Together?
Author(s) RUPNIK JACQUES
Abstract: The word “solidarity” has been severely battered about by recent European history. It is part of both the Christian and Socialist traditions. The Communists’ use, and abuse, of the term has largely contributed to its discrediting, with officially proclaimed solidarity becoming identified with the privileges of the ruling caste, while the term “brotherly help” was used to describe the occupation of a country with a different understanding of socialism. The first historical irony was when a Polish workers’ movement in 1980 again gave “solidarity” a good name and rescued it from the so-called United Polish Workers Party (every word in

European and Global Solidarity from: What Holds Europe Together?
Author(s) LUNACEK ULRIKE
Abstract: In economic contexts, measured by the volume of foreign trade or achievements in the area of developmental work, the EU has

CHAPTER 3 Chronophagous Discourse: from: Times of History
Abstract: Amongst all religious traditions, Islamic civilization has produced what is perhaps the most deliberately sustained concern with, and profuse body of writing on, history. The concern with the past is manifest in all genres of Arabic Schrifttum: poetry was classicized with the establishment of anterior texts and modes; pietistic and legal works established a knowledge of early Muslim practice asFürstenspiegeland valorized salutary and deleterious acts of kings and sages from many histories; Koranic exegesis required monumental knowledge of Muslim precedents and linguistic usages of yore; dynasties, times, and biographies were meticulously chronicled and recorded; universal histories were composed

Introduction: from: Past for the Eyes
Author(s) Sarkisova Oksana
Abstract: Since the late 1980s, when the changes in Eastern and Central Europe seemed overwhelming and access to previously restricted information grew exponentially, this region could safely claim an unpredictable past. Today, almost two decades after the fall of communist regimes, scholars working on the recent past are paradoxically challenged by the abundance of memory and the variety of witnesses’ accounts, which confront the professional historical narrative with the simple claim “I was there and it was completely different.” Walking down the street, having a family dinner, or flipping through postcards and photo albums, we all make daily inroads into history.

The Experiences of a Filmmaker. from: Past for the Eyes
Author(s) Solomon Alexandru
Abstract: The results of a poll recently published in Romania indicated that 50% of the population is not interested in understanding the activities of the political police under the communist regime.¹ The poll also showed that 67% do not want to find out if somebody in their family worked for the Securitate.² These figures only confirm what we already knew: there is an obvious refusal to take responsibility for the criminal activities of the regime. More than half of Romanian society wishes to forget the socialist past. One must admit that this is not very encouraging for a documentary filmmaker, working

Long Farewells. from: Past for the Eyes
Author(s) Sarkisova Oksana
Abstract: From a growing temporal distance, the Soviet historical “episode” seems to entail an emphatic beginning and a somewhat less spectacular but equally distinguishable end. The present article sets out to review the films of the last twenty years dealing with the Soviet period. Despite the declared break with the past, characteristic of transitional societies, a closer look at the social and cultural fabric of “post-Communism” reveals that the simplistic opposition of “before” versus “after” is subverted by recurrent long-term intellectual frameworks, narrative devices, and visual imagery, employed to make sense of the world “here and now” as well as “there

How Is Communism Displayed? from: Past for the Eyes
Author(s) Main Izabella
Abstract: It was a cold Monday in early December 2006. On the way to work I passed a tram stop. A black and white poster with heavy red lettering “Thou Shalt not Kill” hung on the wall of a tram shelter. It hung between two colorful posters, one with a girl saying “I am looking for a mummy and a daddy”—part of a social campaign for adoption—and another “Apocalypto by Mel Gibson”—a movie advertisement. My first idea was that the black and white poster must relate to the fairly controversial antiabortion debate. Yet, a closer inspection explained everything:

Chapter 2 The Geography of Hybridity from: Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: Courts were magnets for talented people from a variety of countries. Italian humanist expatriates served as official historians to the rulers of Hungary, Spain, France, England and elsewhere. Some artists and musicians moved from court to court, like the lutenistcomposer Valentin Bakfark, who was active in his native Transylvania, Poland and Austria, or his English colleague John Dowland, who worked in Paris and Copenhagen as well as in London.

Chapter 6 Hybrid Literatures from: Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: This chapter is concerned with hybrid writing and especially those forms of writing now known as “literature” and formerly as belles-lettres, a term that is not easy to translate into English. It will include history alongside poetry, plays and the prose fiction we describe as “novels”, while contemporaries called them “romances”. In fact, writing was not the only medium in which these works circulated, since oral performances were commonplace. The circulation of texts in performance, manuscript and print suggests that we think in terms of hybrid media.

Book Title: Where Currents Meet-Frontiers of Memory in Post-Soviet Fiction of Kharkiv, Ukraine
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Zaharchenko Tanya
Abstract: Where Currents Meet treats the Ukrainian and Russian components of cultural experience in Ukraine’s East as elements of a complex continuum. This study of cultural memory in post-Soviet space shows how its inhabitants negotiate the historical legacy they have inherited. Tanya Zaharchenko approaches contemporary Ukrainian literature at the intersection of memory studies and border studies, and her analysis adds a new voice to an ongoing exploration of cultural and historical discourses in Ukraine. This scholarly journey through storylines explores the ways in which younger writers in Kharkiv (Kharkov in Russian), a diverse, dynamic, but understudied border city in east Ukraine today come to grips with a traumatized post-Soviet cultural landscape. Zaharchenko’s book examines the works of Serhiy Zhadan, Andrei Krasniashchikh, Yuri Tsaplin, Oleh Kotsarev and others, introducing them as a “doubletake" generation who came of age during the Soviet Union’s collapse and as adults revisited this experience in their novels. Filling the space between society and the state, local literary texts have turned into forms of historical memory and agents of political life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt1d4txtp

Chapter One FRONTIERS OF IDENTITY from: Where Currents Meet
Abstract: In Ukrainian studies of recent years, the formula of Two Ukraines—a conceptualization of the country as a synthetic and flammable combination of two predetermined conflicting entities—has arguably become a universal explanatory mechanism with “a near-absolute discursive power.”¹ This proclaimed battle between the “pro-European West” and the “pro-Russian East” has provided a convenient binary interpretative framework, rendering a complex country temptingly simple: its internal dynamics could now be attributed to a skirmish between its good and bad halves.² And despite pleas for mutual understanding, this alienating approach continues to seduce minds and secure loyalties on both sides of the

Chapter Two FRONTIERS OF EMPTINESS from: Where Currents Meet
Abstract: In December 2010, the BBC Ukrainian Book of the Year prize was awarded to writer Serhiy Zhadan for his novel Voroshylovhrad. Four years later, in December 2014,Voroshylovhradwas named the BBC Book of the Decade. This literary work interlaces black humor and uncensored language (peoplespeak) with the harsh realities of post-Soviet life. The result is a collection of adroitly forthright reflections on today’s Ukraine, in all its complexities and contradictions. Among these complexities, the country’s past plays a key role.

CONCLUSION from: Where Currents Meet
Abstract: This study has examined how, in “a culture increasingly dominated by space and spatial logic,”¹ contemporary Ukrainian writers of the younger generation—doubletake writers—work their characters into a traumatized cultural landscape. In such a landscape, the language of categories and coordinates is subverted in favor of blurriness, uncertainty, and the supernatural. I call this cohort the doubletake generation, in reference to their coming of age at the time of the Soviet Union’s collapse. Upon reaching adulthood, they revisit the intense historical experience that coincided with their childhood or adolescence—a time when external changes fuse with internal ones, and

INTRODUCTION from: Utopian Horizons
Author(s) Czigányik Zsolt
Abstract: In 2016 we celebrated the five-hundredth anniversary of Thomas More’s Utopia. The year 1516 is significant, even though it marks only the birth of a neologism and a literary genre that evolved into a very rich tradition, while utopian thought, the ability to think in alternatives about human life, is probably as old as human thinking itself. Utopia has always been in the no man’s land between literature and the social sciences: literary works, including utopias, are often ignored by the social sciences, while works of imaginary literature are sometimes used as illustrations. This volume tries to look at utopian

George Orwell, Soviet Studies, and the “Soviet Subjectivity” Debate from: Utopian Horizons
Author(s) Halavach Dmitry
Abstract: One of the most recent and important contributions to Soviet history is that of “Soviet subjectivity” literature. This approach originates in the works of Igal Halfin and Jochen Hellbeck, for both of whom Michel Foucault and post-structuralist theory are major sources of inspiration. Halfin and Hellbeck use the Foucauldian analysis of the creation of subjectivity by power to look at the Stalinist purges in a new way. The self that they write about is not a Cartesian or Kantian self, but rather an intersection of discourses and mechanisms of power. This is a radical version of the linguistic turn in

Marxist Utopianism and Modern Irish Drama, 1884–1904: from: Utopian Horizons
Author(s) Remport Eglantina
Abstract: Karl Marx’s Capitalwas the seminal work of nineteenth-century socioeconomic criticism, generating heated social and political debates in Britain and Ireland. There is a view according to which the social theories proposed by Marx and his friend, Friedrich Engels, were themselves utopian, although both social critics repeatedly emphasized their rejection of nineteenth-century utopian socialism—Marx himself claimed bluntly that it was simply “silly” and “stale” and “reactionary.”¹ During the second half of the nineteenth century, Marxism, in its various shapes and forms, emerged as a powerful movement, making its very palpable presence felt in late-Victorian economic, social, and political discourses

The City in Ruins: from: Utopian Horizons
Author(s) Benczik Vera
Abstract: Since science fiction’s¹ advent in the early nineteenth century, concerns with humanity’s end have been one of the central issues thematized by the genre, abounding especially after World War II, when human self-destruction became a disturbing and looming possibility via the development of nuclear weapons and the mounting political tensions of the Cold War. These SF works, both printed and filmic, have certain things in common: they involve a cataclysmic event which brings about the epic destruction of humanity; they verbalize or visualize a collective trauma—human-induced disasters, natural catastrophes, or extra-terrestrial calamities; and depending on the scale of the

JEWISH, NOBLE, GERMAN, OR PEASANT? from: Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) WYPORSKA WANDA
Abstract: This study will discuss a selection of the ideas and images of the devil prevalent in the Polish lands during the sixteenth, seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, through the prism of Polish witchcraft trials in opposition to early modern Polish literature. The literature includes belles-lettres, encyclopedias, legal treatises and other works, dominated by eighteenth century Polish clergy, of which a brief selection will be examined. In the first part, the ideas evinced by examples of printed sources representative of elite culture will be presented, whilst the second half of the study will be concerned with details extracted from witchcraft trial records

SYSTEMATIZATION OF THE CONCEPT OF DEMONIC AND EVIL IN MONGOLIAN FOLK RELIGION from: Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) BIRTALAN ÁGNES
Abstract: Being a part of an ongoing project dealing with the new interpretation of the Mongolian mythology, this paper is an attempt to offer a kind of systematization of the phenomenon of evil and the demonic in Mongolian folk religion. Ritual and folklore texts of different Mongolian peoples, travelers’ notes, and field work materials collected since the nineteenth century are used as main sources for the systematization.

14. Eternity No More: from: Given World and Time
Author(s) Miller Tyrus
Abstract: On January 6, 1938, Walter Benjamin wrote to Max Horkheimer from San Remo to report on a remarkable development in his thinking about his Baudelaire studies and about the larger framework of the Passagenwerk, Benjamin’s decade-long historical research about nineteenth-century Paris, a project that he described as an Urgeschichte der Moderne (an archaic history of modernity). The occasion of this development was his encounter with a largely forgotten text by the famous insurrectionist Auguste Blanqui, entitled L’éternité par les astres (Eternity According to the Stars). This short book comprised a set of cosmological speculations written in prison by the old

CHAPTER 4 EAST/CENTRAL EUROPE AS A CONFIRMATORY CASE STUDY from: Imperfection and Defeat
Abstract: I will begin directly with this chapter’s thesis, leaving my conclusions to the end, along with some explanations as to how this helps the whole argument of the present book. My thesis is that over a large area of Central Europe—roughly covering what is now Austria, the Czech Republic, Slovakia, Hungary, the former Yugoslavia, Romania—society was pervaded by a common ethos, one that differed in many key points from the “Protestant work ethic.” The latter had been indispensable in the formation of modern capitalism and liberal democracy in Anglo-Saxon lands, and in Northwestern Europe in general. The Central

Book Title: Constitutions, Courts, and History-Historical Narratives in Constitutional Adjudication
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Uitz Renáta
Abstract: Emphasizes the role history and historical narratives play in constitutional adjudication. Uitz provocatively draws attention to the often-tense relationship between the constitution and historical precedence highlighting the interpretive and normative nature of the law. Her work seeks to understand the conditions under which references to the past, history and traditions are attractive to lawyers, even when they have the potential of perpetuating indeterminacy in constitutional reasoning. Uitz conclusively argues that this constitutional indeterminacy is obscured by 'judicial rhetorical toolkits' of continuity and reconciliation that allow the court's reliance on the past to be unaccounted for. Uitz' rigorous analysis and extensive research makes this work an asset to legal scholars and practitioners alike.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt2jbnzv

Introduction from: Constitutions, Courts, and History
Abstract: Theories of constitutional interpretation and constitutional adjudication seek to establish a model of constitutional review which enables courts to respond even to hard cases without transgressing the limits of the legitimate exercise of the review power.¹ In the course of this exercise one of the riddles used to be the countermajoritarian difficulty, as exposed in Bickel’s landmark work The Least Dangerous Branch (1962). Theories that understand constitutional adjudication in the matrix of the continuing operation of the branches of government respond well to challenges that stem from the undemocratic nature of constitutional review. As Dworkin explains in Freedom’s Law,. “[w]hen

Book Title: Dilemmas of Dissidence in East-Central Europe-Citizen Intellectuals and Philosopher Kings
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Falk Barbara J.
Abstract: Discusses one of the major currents leading to the fall of communism. Falk examines the intellectual dissident movements in Poland, Czechoslovakia and Hungary from the late 1960s through to 1989. In spite of its historic significance, no other comprehensive survey has appeared on the subject. In addition to the huge list of written sources from samizdat works to recent essays, Falk`s sources include interviews with many personalities of those events as well as videos and films (including Oscar winners).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt2jbp37

Chapter 2 POLAND: from: Dilemmas of Dissidence in East-Central Europe
Abstract: The frequency of protest and instability in authoritarian communist Poland can be explained according to three competing explanations. First, Polish experiences are seen unique in the region: peculiar factors such as an institutionally strong and independent Catholic Church; the survival of private ownership of land and de-collectivization of agriculture; a history replete with both anti-Russian, anti-Soviet and working class uprisings (in 1831, 1863, 1944, 1956, 1970, 1976, and 1980–1981); the relative power and prowess of intellectuals and the intelligentsia; and the weakness of party-state institutions and elites (Schöpflin, 1983; Ekiert and Kubic, 2001). Second, Poland shares with countries throughout

Chapter 5 INTELLECTUALS IN POLAND: from: Dilemmas of Dissidence in East-Central Europe
Abstract: Polish philosopher Leszek Kołakowski left Poland in 1968 after his expulsion from Warsaw University, and therefore hardly warrants being categorized as a “dissident” in terms of the time frame of this study. However, as a revisionist Marxist who goes beyond revisionism, as a mentor to the generation of Michnik, and as the author of arguably the most important theoretical text of the Polish opposition of the 1970s, he must be included.¹ The influence of his life, his work, and the changing nature of his own philosophical positions was enormous. From outside Poland’s borders, as an emigré writing for Kultura, as

Chapter 7 THE DEMOCRATIC OPPOSITION IN HUNGARY from: Dilemmas of Dissidence in East-Central Europe
Abstract: The “first generation” of Hungarian dissidents—for that is really what the Budapest School was—saw themselves not only as Lukács’ colleagues or students but described themselves as his disciples. Their self-chosen terminology is illuminating, because they both collectively and individually sought to utilize, extend, and reinterpret Lukács’ work not only in terms of his own life and struggle but more meaningfully in terms of their own.

FOREWORD from: Transition in Post-Soviet Art
Author(s) GROYS BORIS
Abstract: Few are the reliable and well-written books that seek to tell the history of recent art in Eastern Europe—that is, the history of work by the artists who crossed the line in time that divided the old, communist era from the new postcommunist one. The communist past as experienced by those who lived it is largely a foreign concept to the majority of art historians in the West, who thus tread hesitantly over its uncanny terrain. As for the new generations of Eastern European art historians, they have already partially forgotten this past or even actively suppressed the memory

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ajs.2000.106.issue-2
Date: 09 2000
Author(s): Lara Maria Pia
Abstract: Lara’s book is thick with references and interwoven arguments and is sometimes hard to follow for this reason. She is concerned with showing the possibilities for a recognition of the importance of self‐fashioning narrative in Habermas’s own work, especially in his early analysis in The Structural Transformation of the Public. She takes up discussions of deliberative democracy to show how they are enriched by a recognition of the place of narrative; she takes up postmodern accounts of identity; and she pursues her argument through the work of Paul Ricoeur, Albrecht Wellmer, and Wayne Booth, as well as a host of others. Despite the density of the work, Lara succeeds in illuminating the relation between narrative, identity, and morality. If the question of how we should live is bound up with ideas of who we are, and if we shape who we are with the help of narratives of other lives, these ideas would seem to be an integral part of the normative question that Habermas asks as to how we should live with others. Lara’s book is not only a welcome addition to recent work on Habermas, but also an important participant in current discussions of the relationship between literature and morality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/316983

Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: et.2001.112.issue-1
Date: 10 2001
Author(s): Young, Jeffrey T.
Abstract: Young’s new book on Adam Smith provides a careful textual analysis of Smith’s two major works: The Theory of Moral SentimentsandThe Wealth of Nations. Young argues, with good textual evidence, that Smith did not divide economics from moral theory and that, indeed, Smith thought of economics as a moral science. Young traces Smith’s economic and moral philosophy to Aristotle and Hume, and he points out, correctly, that “self‐interest itself had a significant moral dimension in Smith” (p. 173). Thus Smith’s alleged focus on self‐interest inThe Wealth of Nationshas normative dimensions not always recognized by all Smith scholars. Young uses Smith’s notions of the impartial spectator and benevolence as well as his theory of justice to link the two texts. This is a controversial conclusion since neither the impartial spectator nor benevolence is evident as an important concept inThe Wealth of Nations. Young also argues that Smith divides the economic sphere from the political sphere (see his matrix on p. 158), a questionable conclusion in light of Smith’s focus on political economy inThe Wealth of Nations. Young’s book also suffers from his apparently not having read Amartya Sen’s or my works on Smith, both of which make many of the same arguments Young develops. Still, Young has added further to the growing literature that reads Smith as a serious moral philosopher whose theory of self‐interest is far from libertarian and who neither divided economics from ethics nor politics from either.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/322762

Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: et.2002.112.issue-2
Date: 01 2002
Author(s): Ricoeur, Paul
Abstract: The necessity of both solidarity and proceduralism thus holds for both distributive and criminal justice. In the end, Ricoeur remains committed to notions that ground the just polity in community and mutual sharing without thinking that these notions require us to dispense with the formalism of procedures of justice. While the latter are not sufficient on their own to create or sustain a just society, while, indeed, formal procedures always presuppose some conception of the good, procedural conceptions allow us to recognize each other as subjects of rights. Although it is not always clear that Ricoeur succeeds in reconciling Rawls and Walzer or Habermas and Gadamer, he does provide a fresh perspective on current debates within his own interesting account of the structure of moral action.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/324242

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2002.28.issue-4
Date: 06 2002
Author(s): Vidal Fernando
Abstract: For an illuminating discussion and critique, see Kathleen V. Wilkes, Real People: Personal Identity without Thought Experiments(Oxford, 1988), esp. chap. 1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/341240

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ajs.2003.108.issue-4
Date: 01 2003
Author(s): Lichterman Paul
Abstract: Of course, researchers routinely pursue some of these questions, through different methods of research. Part of our methodological contribution is to bring them together in the concept of group style.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/367920

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ca.2003.44.issue-3
Date: 06 2003
Author(s): Duranti Alessandro
Abstract: Ahearn, always a perceptive writer, brings out a fear that many linguistic anthropologists have but rarely expressthe fear of being assimilated to sociocultural anthropology and thus losing their identity through the forfeiting of their specificity. This is the flip side of William Labovs original wish that sociolinguistics might disappear once linguistics agreed to see language as a social phenomenon (that this has not happened is both an indictment of linguistics narrowmindedness and a validation of Labovs and other sociolinguists efforts to develop sociolinguistics into a vibrant independent field). The question then arises why we should worry about being assimilated. Shouldnt we, on the contrary, welcome such a possibility, to be seen as a validation of our work or as the mainstreaming of our concerns? The problem is not in the future, which cannot be predicted, but in the past. Everything we know from our earlier experiences warns us that an anthropology without a distinct group of language specialists is likely to be an anthropology with a nave understanding of communication. We have seen it happen already. When anthropology departments decide not to have a linguistic subfield, thinking that they dont need one, their students tend to take language for granted, identifying it with a vague notion of discourse. It is for this reason that we need to sharpen our historical, theoretical, and methodological understanding of what it means to study language as culture. We owe it first to our students.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/368118

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ajs.2002.108.issue-1
Date: 07 2002
Author(s): Luhmann Niklas
Abstract: Theories are always, in some way, about their theorists. While Luhmann’s variant of mutant functionalism is not palatable to American tastes, his theories are as reflective of late‐20th‐century European sensibilities as Parsons’s were of mid‐20th‐century America or Bellah and Geertz’s of the upheaval of the 1960s and 1970s. Indeed, some art critics have warmed to Luhmann’s book as an exemplar of one of the newer “cool” theories of art; that is, those that challenge more subject‐centered and humanist theories and aim to accommodate the growth of new mediums such as digital art and cyberspace. But in any conception of art that includes culture, the medium is only as good as the meaning it conveys. And it is the meaning of art that is sorely lacking in Luhmann’s appraisal. Paul Ricoeur once wrote that “materialism is the truth of a world without truth.” It might then be said of Luhmann’s conception of the art system that it is the truth of art without meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/376294

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2003.29.issue-4
Date: 06 2003
Author(s): Mialet Hélène
Abstract: I would like to thank the participants of seminars and colloquia at the Max Planck Institute for the History of Science (Berlin), at the Department of Science and Technology Studies at Cornell, and at the ST&S and History of Medicine Colloquia at the University of Michigan for their helpful comments on earlier versions of this paper. I would also like to thank Robin Boast, Stephen Hirschauer, Michael Lynch, Michael Wintroub, and Skuli Sigurdsson for their suggestions, comments, and criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/377721

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ca.2004.45.issue-1
Date: 02 2004
Author(s): Juillerat Bernard
Abstract: Doctrine and method, theory and interpretation are not necessarily coordinate. Were such coordination possible, a metacritical stance would be required. By accepting uncritically the presuppositions that lie behind psychoanalytic metapsychology, Juillerat abrogates, in my view, ethnological responsibility, that is, the responsibility to measure in a receptive manner the presuppositions of ones hermeneutic against those of the culture one is studying. Though his attention to ethnographic detail leads Juillerat to refine psychoanalytic doctrine, it confirms the epistemological and hermeneutic assumptions of that doctrine (e.g., notions of the unconscious, id, ego, and superego, drives, repression, and, indeed, psychic space). Yafar myth and ritual as he presents them become allegories of that doctrineallegories, I would argue, of allegories. There would appear to be no escape, were it not for the Yafar voices that sound through Juillerats psychoanalytically predetermined presentations. (He offers us almost no contextualized verbatim texts in these essays, though he does in his monographs.) They remind us that, as LviStrauss demonstrated, myths are readily translated one into another, particularly when they are decontextualized. What is of ethnographic, indeed, psychoanalytic import is howand perhaps whytranslation is arrested and a particular myth (e.g., the Oedipal tale) becomes so authoritative that it has the power of promiscuous reduction. Though fascinated by the range of Yafar cultural expression, Juillerat fails to consider the implications of Yafars refusal to reduce their corpus of mythology and ritual to a single mytha singular ritual.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/381011

Journal Title: Journal of British Studies
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jbs.2005.44.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Seed John
Abstract: See Timothy Larsen, “Victorian Nonconformity and the Memory of the Ejected Ministers: The Impact of the Bicentennial Commemorations of 1862,” in The Church Retrospective: Papers Read at the 1995 Summer Meeting and 1996 Winter Meeting of the Ecclesiastical Society, ed. R. N. Swanson (Woodbridge, 1997), pp. 459–73. The centenary in 1762 was not apparently commemorated in any public way, though a few years later, 1688 was celebrated by Dissenters on a considerable scale.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/424945

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Marion Jean‐Luc
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, “Herméneutique de l’idée de Révélation,” in La Révélation, ed. Daniel Coppieters de Gibson (Bruxelles: Facultés universitaires Saint‐Louis, 1977), p. 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/424974

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2004.76.issue-3
Date: 09 2004
Author(s): Marino John A.
Abstract: Braudel, The Mediterranean,2d ed. (1972), 2:1243–44. Among many references to Machiavelli, see, e.g., Machiavelli,The Prince,chap. xxv, beginning of last paragraph: “I conclude, then, that so long as Fortune varies and men stand still, they will prosper while they suit the times, and fail when they do not.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/425442

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2004.31.issue-1
Date: 09 2004
Author(s): Guillory John
Abstract: On the question of the relation between writing and media, which is perhaps thequestion of a larger inquiry beyond my own, I have benefited from exchanges with Alan Liu. See his “The Future Literary: Literature and the Culture of Information,” inTime and the Literary,ed. Karen Newman et al. (New York, 2002), pp. 61–100.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/427304

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-2
Date: 04 2005
Author(s): Nicholson Hugh
Abstract: This idea of the deliberate recovery of theological tensions by crossing religious boundaries can be understood in terms of the ecumenical concept of the complementarity of conflicting doctrinal formulations. Opposing doctrinal formulations are regarded as complementary expressions of a theological truth so profound as to be irreducible to any single formulation. For the ecumenical use of the complementarity concept, see, e.g., Avery Dulles, “Paths to Doctrinal Agreement: Ten Theses,” Theological Studies47 (1986): 44–45.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/427313

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2004.76.issue-4
Date: 12 1997
Author(s): Woodall Christopher
Abstract: Scholars and their students interested in the field would do well to begin with these studies, despite some unevenness in period, place, and theme. Developments in the twentieth century, for example, are not well served, especially as their globalization bursts all traditional boundaries in the discipline, making a historical perspective essential to an understanding of ongoing transformations in literate life everywhere, not just in the West. Similarly, the absence of illustrations undermines the potential value of these books as introductions to the history of reading. Much of the work here depends on the material objects that readers actually had; without images of them, the reader develops less of a sense of the field. Finally, the exclusion of the essays on correspondence from the original collection is deeply regrettable; Chartier’s summary of their implications in the introduction hardly does justice to them, especially to the important study of the 1847 postal survey by Dauphin and two other colleagues. The translations are generally accurate, but the indexes are barely adequate.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/427573

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Robbins, Jeffrey W.
Abstract: While sharing the aim of relating philosophy and theology, I do not think the project is best accomplished by thinking ontotheologically (at least, not in its Heideggerian sense). What is needed is to insist on a sharper distinction between ontotheological philosophy and religious theology so that we can better understand how they might relate. And here again, I agree with Robbins for different reasons: Ricoeur, Lévinas, and Marion are key sources in this project, for their work maintains the distinction that it calls into question.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/428537

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Bourgeois, Patrick L.
Abstract: Ricoeur gets the relation of critique and reason right, in Bourgeois’s eyes, as a philosopher who sees imagination tied to thinking at the boundary (not limit) of reason. In a chapter examining Derrida’s views on “sign, time, and trace” (chap. 7), Bourgeois elaborates Derrida’s view that Edmund Husserl’s distinction between meaningful expression and sign depends on a stable borderline between primary and secondary memory (or retention and recollection) in his theory of “the living present” (or duration), which, Derrida asserts, is phenomenologically unavailable. In light of this analysis, Bourgeois draws an interesting contrast between Derrida’s insistence on a discrete closure of meaning and Ricoeur’s theory of language and imagination based in a view of the living present of meaning and experience that refuses such discrete closure. Once more, however, Bourgeois overreaches when he attempts to identify these accurately drawn contrasts with the limit/boundary distinction. In Bourgeois’s reading of Ricoeur, imagination does not produce reason from below (as in Heidegger); rather, “reason itself limits knowledge to experience from above, putting the imagination in a central position both in knowledge and thinking” (p. 131). A productive imagination of living metaphor takes place at the boundary of reason, allowing the living present in meaning and action to escape deconstruction’s critique while still incorporating a positive relation to alterity. Nevertheless, Bourgeois may be drawing the wrong conclusion about these contrasts, for it seems possible to read both Ricoeur and Derrida as seeking to work at the boundary (not limit) of reason and to think somehow the presentation of the Idea in the Kantian sense. Whereas Ricoeur’s theory of metaphor and narrative allows him to present the semantic content of the Ideas of Reason positively, these remain for Derrida (as for Kant) unrepresentable, or “the impossible.” This problem has been Derrida’s enduring concern since his 1962 Introduction to Husserl’s “The Origin of Geometry.”The real difference between the thought of Ricoeur and Derrida is the distinctive way each thinker supplements phenomenology to take into account the creativity of meaning at the boundary of reason. For Derrida, it is thedifféranceof deconstruction; for Ricoeur, the graft of hermeneutics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/428538

Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: signs.2005.30.issue-4
Date: 06 2005
Author(s): McNay Lois
Abstract: See especially Diana Tietjens Meyers, Self, Society, and Personal Choice(New York: Columbia University Press, 1989), and Diana Tietjens Meyers, ed.,Feminists Rethink the Self(Boulder, CO: Westview, 1997).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/429806

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-2
Date: 04 2005
Author(s): Mandry, Christof
Abstract: This is an engaging book for specialists in theological ethics and especially for those interested in the contributions of hermeneutical thinking to ethics. One can only hope that Mandry will continue to develop this line of reflection.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/430555

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: lq.2005.75.issue-2
Date: 04 2005
Author(s): Jones Bonna
Abstract: Hence, our choice of philosophies should not be limited to the two main philosophies identified by Budd but rather could take up ideas from process thinking, which is a quieter but nevertheless relevant philosophy to which LIS should attend. By valuing the processes and articulating this with better abstractions more congruent with our action, we not only further our own project; we also sustain a vital engagement with the projects of individuals. We more clearly articulate the library in the life of the user, to use the words of Wiegand [ 2].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431329

Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: signs.2005.31.issue-1
Date: 09 2005
Author(s): Johar Schueller Malini
Abstract: However, Somerville often uses strategies very similar to Butler's in seeing the primacy of the sexual. See, e.g., the analysis of Jean Toomer based on the term queer(Somerville2000, 136) and the insistence that compulsory heterosexuality is “integral” to the logic of racial segregation (137).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431372

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-4
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Lee Hyo‐Dong
Abstract: For the notion of strategic essentialism, see Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, “Subaltern Studies: Deconstructing Historiography,” in her The Spivak Reader, 214–21. Serene Jones has drawn attention to the fact that the poststructuralist theoretical assumptions about the always oppressive nature of binarisms do not necessarily hold up under the pressures of concrete political struggles and that, in order to strengthen the bond of solidarity for a coalition of diverse social and cultural identities, what is called for is some kind of grand narrative that clearly defines the powers to be resisted and dismantled. I think this applies to a coalition of different religious identities as well. Serene Jones, “Cultural Labor and Theological Critique,” in Brown, Davaney, and Tanner, eds.,Converging on Culture, 166–68.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431810

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-4
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Maggi Armando
Abstract: 1 Cor. 13:12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431811

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-4
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Young III William W.
Abstract: Frei recognized the need for greater plurality within his own reading as well, particularly with regard to the “Gospel narrative” set forth in The Identity of Jesus Christ. See Higton,Christ, Providence, and History, 200–201.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431812

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2006.32.issue-2
Date: 01 2006
Author(s): Williams Jay
Abstract: Mitchell, “ Critical Inquiryand the Ideology of Pluralism,”Critical Inquiry8 (Summer 1982): 613.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/500701

Journal Title: American Journal of Education
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: aje.2006.112.issue-3
Date: 05 2006
Author(s): Schweber Simone
Abstract: Brooks ( 2001) reported, for example, that a Pentecostal minister in Franklin County, the location symbolizing Red America in his article, “regards such culture warriors as Jerry Falwell and Pat Robertson as loose cannons.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/500714

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2006.86.issue-3
Date: 07 2006
Author(s): van der Ven Johannes A.
Abstract: Nevertheless, empiricism does not have the last word—it perhaps never has the last word, not even in what might be called “positivist empiricism,” and certainly not in practical theology, as this discipline is characterized by the interaction between empiricism and normativeness. We both share this conviction—the fifth characteristic. Therefore human rights—no matter how contested they are, which is neither surprising nor extraordinary—offer an important perspective, as the normative criteria they embody always require critical and constructive reflection. In the last part of the article I have even presented them as regulative principles of truth and justice, as a result of which they offer a kind of worldview‐related and morality‐related infrastructure for the social institutions that determine human actions in societal and personal life—the sixth characteristic. After all, for both Browning and me the ultimate issue is—the seventh characteristic—the vitality of the Christian tradition in terms of relevance and identity in the context of a multicivilization society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/503696

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2006.78.issue-2
Date: 06 2006
Author(s): Todorova Maria
Abstract: Ibid., 260. It was only at the last stages of correction of this manuscript that I learned about the work of Nikolai Voukov on the destruction of Dimitrov's mausoleum. While I find it an excellent contribution, Voukov's take on the event and its meaning is somewhat different than my own. I would like to express my gratitude to the author for sending me his manuscript, whose shorter version was published as “The Destruction of Georgi Dimitrov's Mausoleum in Sofia: The ‘Incoincidence' between Memory and Its Referents,” in Places of Memory,ed. Augustin Ioan, special issue ofOctogon(Bucharest, 2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/505801

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2006.86.issue-4
Date: 10 2006
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: Whatever normative conclusions may be drawn in the end, theological ethicists ignore the unique situation of children and childhood at their own peril. Neglecting such marginalized groups as women and minorities weakened the voice of theological ethics in the past, both by silently playing into larger social wrongs and by failing to learn and grow from those silenced. Childhood in the United States and the world presents theological ethics today with a new and different but just as acute social challenge. Methodologically, since children cannot speak up as fully as can adults for themselves, theological ethicists should engage as deeply as possible with children’s actual social experiences, including through the sophisticated observational work of the human sciences, in order more creatively to understand and respond. Substantively, childhood demands at the very least renewed attention to the asymmetrical tensions of human moral responsibility, the senses in which others demand of those around them creative self‐transformation. This childist gesture of responsiveness and self‐critique has already begun to animate the human sciences. How much more, then, should it be welcomed and deepened further by Christian ethicists, who in one way or another trace a transformed world to the possibilities incarnated in an infant’s birth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/505893

Journal Title: Isis
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: isis.2006.97.issue-2
Date: 06 2004.
Author(s): Kern Stephen
Abstract: Kern’s analysis is lucid and his thesis is ultimately persuasive. He argues that “the novel is emphatically historical in capturing a new sense of the complexity and uncertainty of causal understanding” as he traces the “sensitivity” of contemporary authors like Don DeLillo to “the significance of the new technologies of transportation, communication and investigation that transformed causal understanding in modern society” (p. 369). This is an observation with which many literary critics would agree. There are resemblances here to the methodology deployed by Ronald Thomas in his seminal and startlingly successful work Detective Fiction and the Rise of Forensic Science(Cambridge, 1999): narrative registers in its very construction the pressures of scientific and epistemological change. Yet a comparison with Thomas’s work reveals perhaps one of the few flaws of Kern’s study. IfA Cultural History of Causalityis directed toward the historian of science, one must question whether novels are ever really adequate source material for the construction of a hypothesis regarding nonfictional understandings of causality and probability. Paul Ricoeur reminds us inTime and Narrative(Chicago, 1984–1988) that literature has been seen since ancient times as “an ethical laboratory where the artist pursues through the mode of fiction experimentation with values” (Vol. 1, p. 59): fiction is thus both tethered to, yet at the same time distinct from, the world of the actual and the real. Kern acknowledges this to be so, yet his theory of mimesis, of realistic representation, seems to exclude any genuine engagement with tropes of playfulness, indeterminacy, symbolism, and ambiguity that mark literature just as deeply as any desire to replicate the real. Kern notes that he relies “primarily on novels by male authors about male murderers, because [his] method is comparative and requires controlling variables to focus on historical change” (p. 21). This seems to evade a broader question about the extent to which novels can be understood as “evidence” in any sense at all, or whether Kern should be focusing on trial reports rather than their fictionalized representations. This difficulty would be obviated if the focus of the work were an understanding of the impact of developments in scientific theory on narrative form, yet Kern seems reluctant to move fully in this direction. And indeed, if the ideal reader ofA Cultural History of Causalityis in fact a literary critic, he or she may be inclined to probe a number of Kern’s other assumptions as well—he is perhaps a little too inclined to assert that the Victorian novel is artistically “tidy,” that its patterns of closure are always neat and carefully wrought, as an expression of what Thomas Vargish has called “the providential aesthetic” in his study of the same name (Virginia, 1985). Scholars of nineteenth‐century fiction may perhaps feel that Kern’s descriptions of such neat closures sit uncomfortably with their readings ofBleak House(which is as much about the loss and destruction of evidence as it is about its recovery and careful explication) orOur Mutual FriendorDaniel DerondaorThe Brothers Karamazov(each of which problematizes our sense of a character’s relentless movement toward transgression, judgment, and punishment or acquittal). One is left with a sense that Kern occasionally deploys the term “Victorian” in a rather unsophisticated fashion: as Thomas has shown inDetective Fiction and the Rise of Forensic Science,even the most carefully crafted detective story of the nineteenth century can raise for readers and critics crucial questions about individual and national identity and the power of public surveillance. Yet these criticisms should not undermine a reader’s sense of Kern’s achievement in this book: it is a vast, ambitious attempt to effect a synthesis of scientific thought and literary experimentation, and on the whole it succeeds well.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/507355

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 508383
Date: 01 2007
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: In this respect, my project has similarities with the “multidimensional hermeneutic” approach to religious ethical inquiry proposed by William Schweiker in “On the Future of Religious Ethics: Keeping Religious Ethics, Religious and Ethics,” Journal of the American Academy of Religion74, no. 1 (March 2006): 135–51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/508386

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2006.33.issue-1
Date: 09 2006
Abstract: Young, Paul. The Cinema Dreams Its Rivals: Media Fantasy Films from Radio to the Internet.Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2006. 284 pp. $74.95 (cloth); $24.95 (paper).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/509752

Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522257
Date: 01 2007
Author(s): Ricoeur, Paul
Abstract: In a first reading of the book, I was critical of this emphasis on moral motivations, since it seemed to be overburdened by a psychological approach. But, on a second reading, I had to refrain from my critique. Ricoeur makes the point that he has no intention to “take the place of a resolution for the perplexities raised by the very concept of a struggle, still less of a resolution of the conflicts” (218). In other words, Ricoeur is proposing a well‐needed complement to the institutional design trend that has invaded contemporary political philosophy. Contrary to many, he stands before the most perplexing issue of recognition with eyes wide open: indeed, demands of recognition may never end and take the form of an “unhappy consciousness” (218). One can try to resolve this potential inflation of claims by sorting out political and substantive issues. But a solution that takes only this path could create vast areas of frustration that canny elites have learned to fuel, or come to neglect recognition claims on the grounds that they hide a Pandora's box waiting to be opened. I suspect that this neglect mechanism is one of the reasons why so many legitimate recognition claims still languish in limbo as we speak. The course taken by Ricoeur may be difficult to square with the mainstream approach in contemporary political philosophy—political liberalism, to name it—but it nonetheless deserves careful attention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/510704

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: lq.2006.76.issue-3
Date: 07 2006
Author(s): Budd John M.
Abstract: Three general features of this method can be noted in advance. First, this method must be immanent or internal to its subject matter. Dialectical theorists reject outright the idea that the thinker can occupy some privileged Archimedean point outside the subject of investigation. … A second feature of dialectical method is its dialogical character. Theorizing is an activity taking place not simply within the mind but between minds. Thinking is dialogical because it always takes the form of an exchange or a conversation between ourselves, our contemporaries, and our predecessors. … Third, the dialogical element is related to the historical dimension of theory. [ 40, pp. 167–68]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/511140

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2006.78.issue-4
Date: 12 2005
Author(s): Popkin Jeremy D.
Abstract: Instructive as his book is, Popkin could also have explored in greater depth yet the relationship between historical scholarship and expressions of the self. By focusing on autobiographies alone, he misses an opportunity to examine how such texts and scholarly publications related to (and possibly affected) one another, most notably in their divergent or convergent patterns of self‐representation. The boundary between autobiographical and scholarly writings may be more porous than Popkin intimates. Paul Hollander’s recent study of academic acknowledgments arrives, for instance, at conclusions that mirror Popkin’s regarding self‐representation and professional norms (“Acknowledgments: An Academic Ritual,” Academic Questions15, no. 1 [2001–2]: 63–76). Likewise, one could question why Popkin limited himself to the discursive analysis of published sources and “the motives that historian‐autobiographers acknowledge in their texts” (78). Autobiographies are also social practices that call for systematic research outside the text, in archival and published sources (and, perhaps, interviews as well). But Popkin is too good a historian not to know this. His book is by and about historians; it is dedicated to historians, but it is not only for historians. Its chief objective may well be to show how much the historian’s autobiography has contributed “to the literature of personal life writing” (8). In this respect as in many others,History, Historians, and Autobiographyis a success.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/511206

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2007.33.issue-2
Date: 01 2007
Author(s): Gasché Rodolphe
Abstract: See Derrida, Passions(Paris, 1993).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/511505

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509553
Date: 04 2007
Author(s): Wall, John
Abstract: Wall has skillfully woven the exegetical, dialogical, and constructive parts of his project into a thought‐provoking and readable work. Moral Creativitycould be profitably read by anyone familiar with contemporary debates in religious and philosophical ethics. It will both broaden the appeal of Ricoeur’s writings and advance the conversation about the relation of ethics to poetics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/513233

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522064
Date: 03 2007
Author(s): Harootunian Harry
Abstract: I had the benefit of reading versions of this paper at a number of institutions, and I wish to record the help I received at the University of Chicago, the University of Michigan, the New School for Social Research, Waseda University (Tokyo), and the University of Washington. I also want to thank Kristin Ross, Carol Gluck, and Hyun Ok Park for commenting on earlier revisions of the manuscript.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/513523

Journal Title: Social Service Review
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ssr.1999.73.issue-4
Date: 12 1999
Author(s): Kondrat Mary Ellen
Abstract: Professional self‐awareness is widely considered a necessary condition for competent social work practice. Alternate prescriptions for self‐awareness rely implicitly on varying definitions of what it means to be a “self” and what it means to be “aware.” I will review three approaches to professional self‐awareness conventionally adopted in the literature: ( a) simple conscious awareness (awareness of whatever is being experienced), (b) reflective awareness (awareness of a self who is experiencing something), and (c) reflexive awareness (the self's awareness of how his or her awareness is constituted in direct experience). Strengths and limitations of these three epistemological approaches are discussed. An alternate framework, based on Anthony Giddens's “structuration theory,” is developed and advanced as a more macro‐level and less exclusively psychological understanding of practitioner self‐awareness. The article concludes with illustrations from practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/514441

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509555
Date: 10 2007
Author(s): Flake Kathleen
Abstract: Bloom, American Religion, 97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/519770

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509555
Date: 10 2007
Author(s): Nicholson Hugh
Abstract: Hacker, “Distinctive Features,” 95 and passim; Michael A. Sells, Mystical Languages of Unsaying(Chicago, 1994), 1–13, esp. 12. Note that Hacker acknowledges that Śaṅkara’s discourse on brahman is all the more alive (lebendiger) for its terminological imprecision (“Distinctive Features,” 95).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/519771

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509554
Date: 07 2007
Author(s): Browning, Don S.
Abstract: While this book will be of great interest to Christian ethicists as well as to religious and moral educators, it should also be read by social scientists, philosophers, and evolutionary psychologists. Browning’s view that nontheological disciplines depend on images of the human that play a guiding role for their research, as well as for the interpretation of their results, points to the continued need for more interdisciplinary work. According to this point of view, theology should play a public role in identifying such prescientific or preempirical images as well as in describing and advancing refined and responsible images based on the Christian tradition. The present volume goes a long way in either direction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/519893

Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 518276
Date: 01 2008
Author(s): Plate Liedeke
Abstract: My encounter with this student suggests another way of thinking about the political value of rewriting. Countering all the more blasé signals my students were giving me that it was most naive to think the retelling of stories from another point of view could have any political impact, it is evidence that women’s rewritings of classic texts can still affect young women, still make them think and make them want to contribute to the discussions, the debates that shape the public sphere. Although we need, of course, to factor in serendipity—the student was on holiday and thought she had discovered a little‐known book when in fact it was a New York Timesbest seller—there is definitely a sense in which her discovery marked a moment in her life and signals the development of a feminist consciousness (broadly defined as a certain awareness of gender identity combined with a critical position in respect to misogyny and patriarchy and a conviction that things can be changed). There is no denying that increasing individualization at all levels of society has caused the loss of a sense of collective action and political projects. This is equally true for ideas of improvement, emancipation, and modernization, the responsibility of which has largely been shifted to the individual, whose “human rights,” as Bauman argues, are redefined as “the right of individuals to stay different and to pick and choose at will their own models of happiness and fitting life‐style” (2000;2005, 29). In this deregulated and privatized sociopolitical context that knows no common cause, re‐vision can only fail to formulate enabling fictions for a better future for all. Yet in its capacity to speak to individuals, it can still draw them into visions of community and collectivity. Re‐vision may thus not be the lifeline that is to haul us out of patriarchy any more, but as a structure of address that engages readers into contemplating differences, it remains one of the ways in which we keep sane and critical and thinking, moved by the stories of long‐forgotten lives into participating in an open public sphere.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/521054

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 527832
Date: 01 2008
Author(s): Scimeca Ross
Abstract: In this article, we have argued that the application of library practice requires a suspension of truth. We support this by introducing a new theory of truth that is rooted in historicism. One of the overarching missions of library practice is to acquire, manage, preserve, and make accessible human knowledge. While there are pragmatic and sociopolitical considerations that often constrict fulfillment of this mission, the public purpose of librarianship in a free and open society nonetheless dictates that materials be made accessible regardless of what the society at the current time or the majority of people within a culturally defined place consider as true.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/523909

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 526095
Date: 09 2007
Abstract: Zulawski, Ann. Unequal Cures: Public Health and Political Change in Bolivia, 1900‐1950.Durham, North Carolina: Duke University Press, 2007. 253 pp. $21.95 (paper); $74.95 (cloth).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/526093

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587019
Date: April 2004
Author(s): Woolf Daniel
Abstract: [[START 06A00070]] Reviews of Books and Films neered research in this latter area in "A Feminine Past? Gender, Genre and Historical Knowledge in England, 1500-1800," American Historical Review 102:3 [June 1997]: 645-79). But these are ungenerous caveats: this is a meticulously researched study in which analysis is ably supported by a range of impres- sive statistical data and well-chosen (and sometimes entertaining) case studies of individual readers, pub- lishers, and publications. ROSEMARY MITCHELL University of Leeds J. G. A. POCocK. [[END 06A00070]] [[START 06A00080]] Barbarism and Religion: Volume Three, The First Decline and Fall. New York: Cam- bridge University Press. 2003. Pp. xiii, 527. $60.00. In reviewing for this journal the first two volumes of J. G. A. Pocock's Barbarism and Religion, the present reviewer observed that there is a symphonic quality to Pocock's writing, as polyphonic lines in the form of concepts are spun out, developed, inverted, and brought into counterpoint with others. This third movement offers a scherzo reminiscent of the author's 1975 book, The Machiavellian Moment, and it sounds some of the same chords (republicanism, political cycles, civic virtue, arms vs. commerce). The subtitle of volume three is deceptively simple: it refers to the first (and best-known) volume of Edward Gibbon's masterpiece, which he published in 1776. That book commenced (after a very brief account of the structure of the Augustan principate) with the "Five Good" Antonine emperors from Nerva to Mar- cus Aurelius, and concluded (narratively) with Con- stantine's defeat of Licinius and restoration of a unified rule-a temporary resolution immediately fol- lowed by two chapters on Christianity that seem jarringly out of place, given the fact that Christians are scarcely mentioned through the previous fourteen chapters. Gibbon's readers had to wait until 1781 for the story to pick up again. Exposition of this "first decline and fall" in fact occupies only the last hundred pages of Pocock's volume and therefore serves as both a climax to the Pocockian story so far, and a bridge to the next volume. Volume one of Barbarism and Religion situated Gibbon intellectually within a number of different European "Enlightenments"; volume two located him on a different axis, among the various writers of "narratives of civil government" in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. (We are still missing the parallel vector running through ecclesiastical histori- ography, although Eusebius, Augustine, Orosius, and Otto of Freising figure prominently here. Christianity only begins to signal its importance with chapter fifteen of Gibbon; where he used ecclesiastical author- ities, up to that point, it was to document civil rather than sacred history.) Volume three moves in a third, diachronic dimension, tracing the transformations of key themes, in particular the idea of "decline and fall" itself, from very ancient origins up to the Scot Adam Ferguson's Progress and Termination of the Roman Republic (which appeared seven years after Gibbon's first volume and is thus offered for comparison rather than direct influence). The flight of concepts and motifs is dizzying, the lengthy quotations apposite, and as with the previous volumes, one can scarcely miss a sentence without losing a nuance or a parenthetical qualification. The theme of decline and fall, which informs the conception and beginning of Gibbon's book, would eventually yield to "barbarism and reli- gion" as its principal causes in later volumes (along with over-taxation, which Gibbon mentions at the close of chapter fourteen). But behind that idea, which only gradually emerged from Polybian political cycles via medieval notions of the translatio imperii, lay much else, including sequential recognitions of crucial turn- ing points in Roman history going back to Gracchan land reforms in the late second century B.C.E. The core problem, historiographically, remains how to explain why Gibbon, committed from an early stage to a Tacitean narrative, chose to begin his account not with the Julio-Claudians but instead at the "Antonine moment" of imperial zenith achieved by Trajan. (As he once did with cinquecento Florence, Pocock inclines to define major turning points or episodes, both historical and intellectual, in terms of "moments"-a historical Constantinean and historiographical Zosiman moment lie ahead, and the Machiavellian version even puts in a cameo appearance when this volume reaches the early eighteenth century.) Gibbon knew intimately the char- acter of Augustan rule and the flaws of the late republic; he had read his Sallust as well as Tacitus. The later imperial historians, especially Appian of Alexan- dria and Ammianus Marcellinus, also figure in this account as historians of decline, but of a decline that takes a great deal of time-all the way to the "Illyrian" recovery of the late third century-really to become unmistakeable. The subjects confronted by Gibbon's nearly two millennia of predecessors include the military problem of restless troops settling in an empire that has con- quered all its rivals and closed itself off from further expansion; the civic conflict between virtue and cor- ruption (or rather, the way in which virtue leads to military conquest and empire, which in turn produce an oriental softness); the role of the soldiers in making emperors and especially the legions' realization, in the Year of Four Emperors (68/69 C.E.), that emperors could be made "elsewhere than Rome"; the place of the Augustinian-Orosian "two cities" view of history; the vicissitudes in republicanism (an issue revived in the fifteenth century by Leonardi Bruni, who as a non-Roman concerned mainly with Florence was able to see the empire's longue duree for the first time as declinatio rather than translatio and to initiate, though not complete, a gradual transition in historiography from the latter to the former); and the extension of citizenship to the provinces, along, soon, with the capacity of provincials to be proclaimed emperor. All of these streams converge, not entirely satisfactorily AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 470 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00080]] [[START 06A00080]] Methods/Theory from either Gibbon's or Pocock's point of view, in the making of the first volume of the Decline and Fall. In Pocock's summary of Gibbon, the Augustan principate was a system that bumped along for a quarter millennium until, following fifty years of mili- tary anarchy, the Illyrian Diocletian divided the empire into two halves ruled by two senior and two junior emperors. Diocletian himself abandoned any remain- ing pretence that the emperor was merely princeps and imperator, openly assuming virtually an Asiatic despo- tism, styled dominus and secluded from public access. This set the stage for the establishment of an entirely new kind of regime under Constantine in the next generation. The very resilience of the Augustan-Anto- nine system up to that point posed narrative and explanatory challenges for Gibbon in itself, since it occurred despite runs of weak emperors, intermittent monsters (Caligula, Nero, Domitian, Commodus, Ca- racalla), the progressive emasculation of the senate (effectively completed by Septimius Severus early in the third century), and the growing independence of the military. Gibbon's flowing recit is bracketed by peintures (the gallicisms are Pocock's) of Antonine civilization at the start and of Christianity in chapter fifteen. In between the beginning and end of his volume, Gibbon appears to have realized that he had, in a way, painted himself into a corner, given that he had over a thousand years still to narrate, and a radical shift in priorities and design proved necessary. Future volumes of the Decline and Fall would give both the foreign tribes and the Christians much greater prom- inence, and before the last volume's conclusion, a Tacitean account of the decline and fall of western antiquity would evolve into an "enlightened narrative" of the triumph of barbarism and religion, recovery from which had only really begun in Gibbon's own age of civility. This volume is every bit as persuasive as its prede- cessors and, perhaps because it is as much recit as the others were peintures, it is also rather more compelling a read. More than the first two volumes of his work, volume three of Barbarism and Religion leaves one hanging; like Gibbon and his first readers, we are only at the Milvian Bridge, pondering what will follow with Constantine. One hopes that, unlike those readers, we will not have to wait five years for the next episode. DANIEL WOOLF University of Alberta [[END 06A00080]] [[START 06A00090]] LAWRENCE W. MCBRIDE, editor. Reading Irish Histories: Texts, Contexts, and Memory in Modem Ireland. Port- land, Oreg.: Four Courts Press. 2003. Pp. 233. $55.00. The final essay of this collection closes with the following sentiment from Sean Farrell Moran: "Like Socrates and Plato who stood firmly against the influ- ence of myth in Athenian democracy, academic histo- rians will step in to attempt to correct the misconcep- tions of Irish citizens" (p. 218). In the previous essay, one such "academic historian," Ben Novick, stepped into the breach in the following fashion: "Writing, as discussed throughout this book, is a primary means of disseminating information" (p. 211). Socrates and Plato have indeed met their match. It is perhaps unfortunate that this collection, edited by Lawrence W. McBride, closes with one of the most arrogant pieces of scholarship that I have ever had the displeasure of reading. The conceit of the comparison quoted above, and the condescension of statements such as "Perhaps we should pity the peasants. They made the mistake of remembering their past incor- rectly" and "The common Irish man and woman must then be re-educated about Ireland's past and abandon their memories" (p. 218), make it difficult to commend the essay as a fine conclusion to an exceptional book. One can only hope that Moran is trying to be ironic. But it would be unfair to condemn this book on the basis of one author's misguided faith in the powers of the "academic historian." Indeed, the book, although most worthy at times, has enough problems without that. The intention of the collection is clearly estab- lished in the editor's preface: to "examine how a variety of historical narratives were delivered through the written word, but with special attention paid to how readers might have reacted to these texts" (p. 13). The difficulty is that the reader is the one consistent absentee from the essays that follow. From Paul Townend's chapter on the reading rooms of the na- tional movements of the late nineteenth century to Novick's chapter on the newspaper of the Irish Volun- teers, the reader is little more than a shadowy figure. Even the most basic details are ignored; there is no attempt to estimate circulation figures for books or newspapers. Anne Kane's attempts at "reconstructing" (p. 46) what a newspaper reader during the land war might have felt amounts to little more than an essay in speculative sociology. Paul Ricoeur and Clifford Geertz seem to get more attention than the actual people who "may have" (p. 46) and "could well have" (p. 56) responded to the newspapers examined. It also seems unlikely that any farmer facing eviction could have conceived of the land war as a "ritual process" (p. 45). But Kane's essay is not the only one at fault in this fashion. The extent of the readers' absence almost begs one to question why the editor made such a particular point of drawing "special attention" to the reader at all. This is not a fault particular to this book or to these essays. Beyond specific accounts by a reader reacting to a text, which in turn have all the inherent linguistic and interpretative pitfalls of any other text, there are very few ways to interpret the readers' response to any type of narrative. Timothy McMahon is one of the few authors in this collection who actually quotes from the men and women who attended the Gaelic Summer Colleges that he examines. His essay is one of the collection's most valuable as a result. Colin Barr's piece on university education, again valuable in its factual content, has nothing to say about the students or how the changes in the universities effected them AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 471 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00090]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/530341

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587019
Date: April 2004
Author(s): Dolan Anne
Abstract: [[START 06A00080]] Methods/Theory from either Gibbon's or Pocock's point of view, in the making of the first volume of the Decline and Fall. In Pocock's summary of Gibbon, the Augustan principate was a system that bumped along for a quarter millennium until, following fifty years of mili- tary anarchy, the Illyrian Diocletian divided the empire into two halves ruled by two senior and two junior emperors. Diocletian himself abandoned any remain- ing pretence that the emperor was merely princeps and imperator, openly assuming virtually an Asiatic despo- tism, styled dominus and secluded from public access. This set the stage for the establishment of an entirely new kind of regime under Constantine in the next generation. The very resilience of the Augustan-Anto- nine system up to that point posed narrative and explanatory challenges for Gibbon in itself, since it occurred despite runs of weak emperors, intermittent monsters (Caligula, Nero, Domitian, Commodus, Ca- racalla), the progressive emasculation of the senate (effectively completed by Septimius Severus early in the third century), and the growing independence of the military. Gibbon's flowing recit is bracketed by peintures (the gallicisms are Pocock's) of Antonine civilization at the start and of Christianity in chapter fifteen. In between the beginning and end of his volume, Gibbon appears to have realized that he had, in a way, painted himself into a corner, given that he had over a thousand years still to narrate, and a radical shift in priorities and design proved necessary. Future volumes of the Decline and Fall would give both the foreign tribes and the Christians much greater prom- inence, and before the last volume's conclusion, a Tacitean account of the decline and fall of western antiquity would evolve into an "enlightened narrative" of the triumph of barbarism and religion, recovery from which had only really begun in Gibbon's own age of civility. This volume is every bit as persuasive as its prede- cessors and, perhaps because it is as much recit as the others were peintures, it is also rather more compelling a read. More than the first two volumes of his work, volume three of Barbarism and Religion leaves one hanging; like Gibbon and his first readers, we are only at the Milvian Bridge, pondering what will follow with Constantine. One hopes that, unlike those readers, we will not have to wait five years for the next episode. DANIEL WOOLF University of Alberta [[END 06A00080]] [[START 06A00090]] LAWRENCE W. MCBRIDE, editor. Reading Irish Histories: Texts, Contexts, and Memory in Modem Ireland. Port- land, Oreg.: Four Courts Press. 2003. Pp. 233. $55.00. The final essay of this collection closes with the following sentiment from Sean Farrell Moran: "Like Socrates and Plato who stood firmly against the influ- ence of myth in Athenian democracy, academic histo- rians will step in to attempt to correct the misconcep- tions of Irish citizens" (p. 218). In the previous essay, one such "academic historian," Ben Novick, stepped into the breach in the following fashion: "Writing, as discussed throughout this book, is a primary means of disseminating information" (p. 211). Socrates and Plato have indeed met their match. It is perhaps unfortunate that this collection, edited by Lawrence W. McBride, closes with one of the most arrogant pieces of scholarship that I have ever had the displeasure of reading. The conceit of the comparison quoted above, and the condescension of statements such as "Perhaps we should pity the peasants. They made the mistake of remembering their past incor- rectly" and "The common Irish man and woman must then be re-educated about Ireland's past and abandon their memories" (p. 218), make it difficult to commend the essay as a fine conclusion to an exceptional book. One can only hope that Moran is trying to be ironic. But it would be unfair to condemn this book on the basis of one author's misguided faith in the powers of the "academic historian." Indeed, the book, although most worthy at times, has enough problems without that. The intention of the collection is clearly estab- lished in the editor's preface: to "examine how a variety of historical narratives were delivered through the written word, but with special attention paid to how readers might have reacted to these texts" (p. 13). The difficulty is that the reader is the one consistent absentee from the essays that follow. From Paul Townend's chapter on the reading rooms of the na- tional movements of the late nineteenth century to Novick's chapter on the newspaper of the Irish Volun- teers, the reader is little more than a shadowy figure. Even the most basic details are ignored; there is no attempt to estimate circulation figures for books or newspapers. Anne Kane's attempts at "reconstructing" (p. 46) what a newspaper reader during the land war might have felt amounts to little more than an essay in speculative sociology. Paul Ricoeur and Clifford Geertz seem to get more attention than the actual people who "may have" (p. 46) and "could well have" (p. 56) responded to the newspapers examined. It also seems unlikely that any farmer facing eviction could have conceived of the land war as a "ritual process" (p. 45). But Kane's essay is not the only one at fault in this fashion. The extent of the readers' absence almost begs one to question why the editor made such a particular point of drawing "special attention" to the reader at all. This is not a fault particular to this book or to these essays. Beyond specific accounts by a reader reacting to a text, which in turn have all the inherent linguistic and interpretative pitfalls of any other text, there are very few ways to interpret the readers' response to any type of narrative. Timothy McMahon is one of the few authors in this collection who actually quotes from the men and women who attended the Gaelic Summer Colleges that he examines. His essay is one of the collection's most valuable as a result. Colin Barr's piece on university education, again valuable in its factual content, has nothing to say about the students or how the changes in the universities effected them AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 471 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00090]] [[START 06A00090]] Reviews of Books and Films and their learning. The academic career of one Galway student, H. Fitzwalter Kirker, is traced in its entirety, but only in a footnote. The reader gets at least something approximating a lifeline in the piece by McBride on the young reader and the teaching and learning of Irish history. That "young people are by nature curious" (p. 114), however, seems an inade- quate point on which to hang a conclusion. The book is at its strongest in the essays by Jose Lanters and Gregory Castle, which focus on the work of T. W. Rolleston and Standish O'Grady, respectively. Both historians are examined in the context of their contemporaries; both essays actually attempt to fulfill the claims they make for themselves in their opening pages. The same cannot be said, however, for Eileen Reilly's piece on J. A. Froude. Its bland rehearsal of his life is punctuated with references to his visits to Ireland and quotations from some of his more offen- sive diatribes on the Irish people. She offers little or no comment on the bigotry that billowed forth from his pen. For example, one is told of Froude's dislike for Daniel O'Connell but not the reason why. Novick's piece on the military education of the Irish Volunteers begins with an interesting description, but it is rather disappointing thereafter. Although the material is fascinating, the author's conclusions are not. At one point, he deduces that "The pattern of military education seen in the Irish Volunteer and the Workers' Republic lends weight to the idea of the Rising as blood sacrifice, since the key strategist, Joseph Plunkett, never wrote military columns for the Irish Volunteer" (p. 198). At no point does it occur to Novick that the rebels might not have printed their plans in the paper because letting the authorities in Dublin Castle know in advance was not really part of the plan. How useful, indeed, is an examination of the Irish Volunteer's role in the training of the rebels when even the author concedes that details of training on urban insurrection were "left to the writers of the Workers' Republic" (p. 210); when the author gives approximately nine lines of consideration to what he adjudges to be the more important source? Through- out there is little sense of the eye of Dublin Castle watching over what was published and curtailing what could be written. This is a worthy but a frustrating book. There is a lot of value in each essay in terms of the material that is brought to light, but there is also the crushing weight of the artificial framework under which the essays are forced to labor. Like Froude, it is perhaps this book's "portion in life to please no one faction" (p. 140). ANNE DOLAN Trinity College Dublin [[END 06A00090]] [[START 06A00100]] COLIN NEWBURY. Patrons, Clients, and Empire: Chief- taincy and Over-Rule in Asia, Africa, and the Pacific. New York: Oxford University Press. 2003. Pp. xii, 328. $72.00. It is a brave historian nowadays who admits that his or her current academic preoccupations began in the 1950s, but an unrepentant Colin Newbury tells us that imperial history at Oxford University is peculiarly marked by continuity. He says that literary theory has dominated the study of discourse for too long (al- though presumably not at Oxford), and it is time to get back to the study of political discourse using the time-honored model of patron-client relations. Drawing on his extensive knowledge of African and Pacific imperial history, with the addition of material on South and Southeast Asia, Newbury presents a well researched and cogently argued case for the persis- tence of precolonial clientage networks in certain British and French colonies. Patron-client modeling was refined by social scientists in the 1960s and 1970s, when it became a useful way of explaining why inde- pendence had brought relatively little change to the administrative systems of former colonies. That polit- ical and economic relations in some colonies can be analyzed effectively using this theory is clear; whether the exercise speaks to wider debates about empire is another question. The omission of colonies of settle- ment, along with almost all of the Portuguese, Dutch, and German empires, weakens the case considerably. Newbury draws on a wide, although extremely selec- tive, range of secondary literature to supplement his own research, wisely conceding that authors may not like the use he makes of their material. He feels no need to address the epistemological and methodolog- ical concerns raised by authors whose work he mines for empirical detail. He excludes pioneering cross- disciplinary studies, such as Jean and John Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution (1991) and Nicholas Thomas, Colonialism's Culture: Anthropology, Travel and Government (1994), which have done so much to shape current debates in postcolonial anthropology. Newbury calls for more interaction between social scientists and historians, but he does surprisingly little to encourage it. If patron-client brokerage really is the best model, Newbury should be able to tackle other theories with confidence, demonstrating their inade- quacies through constructive engagement. Instead he revives battles won long ago, such as the critique of "collaboration" and "indirect rule" analysis. There are still some historians who work with these terms, but far more interesting is the much larger number of scholars tackling more recent debates. This book's contribution to imperial historiography is therefore difficult to assess. Newbury hopes that it will help to determine whether imperial rule suc- ceeded or failed "in 'preparing' [its colonies] for the exigencies and responsibilities of devolved govern- ment" (p. viii). One wonders whether this is still a pressing question, however. It has been a long time since independence for many of the countries Newbury discusses. Scholars posing broader questions about colonialism's legacy will wonder about the cost of Newbury's ruthlessly exclusive approach. While dis- cussing the influence of indigenous networks, Newbury AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 472 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00100]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/530342

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587009
Date: February 2002
Author(s): Bender Thomas
Abstract: [[START 02P0009T]] Review Essay Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History THOMAS BENDER [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] OVER THE PAST QUARTER CENTURY, a new American history has been written.1 This rewriting of American history has often been associated with the "triumph" of social history within the discipline, but in fact the transformation is much broader than that: the domain of the historical has been vastly extended, inherited narratives displaced, new subjects and narratives introduced. While at the monographic level, one sees similar developments in various national historiographies, national synthesis-and the idea of a national synthesis- seems to have been less troubled elsewhere than in the field of U.S. history. Admittedly, generalization is risky, especially if one reaches into historiographies with which one is barely familiar. Still, I think that a variety of outstanding national histories (or histories of a people sometimes treated as nations) have been more confident of established narrative strategies. With the exception of the historians of France that I will note, historians of other modern nations seem to have had fewer doubts about the basic framing of a narrative synthesis, and they have not felt compelled to develop new approaches, even though in many cases the other work of the authors involved has been strikingly innovative.2 Yet the social, intellectual, and political developments that have complicated American historiography are likely, I suspect, to make themselves felt in other national historiographies fairly soon, a point recently made by Jacques Revel, a leading French historian.3 And that circumstance may spawn a generation of controversy about the politics and strategies of synthesis. If so, the American case may be of more general import and interest. Beginning in the 1940s, intellectual history became the synthesizing subfield in U.S. history. reDlacing the political-economic narratives of Frederick Jackson [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] I wish to thank the editors of the AHR, first, for inviting me to consider the issues in this essay, second, for the helpful comments of Acting Editor Jeffrey Wasserstrom, and, third, for the quite stimulating commentary of several anonymous reviewers. 1 See Eric Foner, ed., The New American History (Philadelphia, 1990); Foner, ed., The New American History, rev. and expanded edn. (Philadelphia, 1997). 2 I have in mind Linda Colley, Britons: Forging the Nation, 1707-1837 (New Haven, Conn., 1992); Jonathan D. Spence, The Search for Modem China (New York, 1990); Albert Hourani, A History of the Arab Peoples (Cambridge, Mass., 1991); Paul Ginsborg, A History of Contemporary Italy (Harmond- sworth, Eng., 1990); Theodore Zeldin, France, 1848-1945, 2 vols. (Oxford, 1979); Fernand Braudel, The Identity of France, Sian Reynolds, trans., 2 vols. (New York, 1988-90); Andre Burguiere and Jacques Revel, eds., Histoire de la France, 5 vols. (Paris, 1989-2000). 3 Jacques Revel, "Le fandeau de la memoire," paper presented at the conference "International- izing the Study of American History," Florence, Italy, July 5, 1999. Paper in possession of author. 129 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 130 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Turner and Charles A. Beard.4 But during the 1970s, the claims being made for a national mind or culture were challenged by social historians. Intellectual history was chastened and transformed by the confrontation with social history. Eschewing their former embrace of synthesis, intellectual historians pulled back to study more precisely defined themes and thinkers.5 Not only intellectual history but other subfields accommodated social history's provocation to rethink conventional gen- eralizations. In addition, a professional, even "social-scientific," concern for precision and specificity of reference collaborated-sometimes with forethought, often not-with a sharpened awareness of difference and conflict that came from social movements outside the academy to undermine older composite narratives. Neither the frame supplied by Charles and Mary Beard in The Rise of American Civilization (1927), with its dramatic narrative of conflict between the "people" and the "interests," nor the consensual pluralism that succeeded that interpretation in the 1950s survived.6 If the consensus historians underplayed conflict, the Beards' approach, for all of its sympathy for the dispossessed, was found to be inadequate as well. Their narrative revealed little feel for the diversity of Americans, and it paid scant attention to non-whites. Most important of all, while their narrative voice was sympathetic, one did not discover the quotidian life or hear the voices of those groups that have found voice in more recent historiography. Judged by newer historiographical expectations, The Rise of American Civilization seemed "thin," compared with the increasingly popular "thick" description that was built, in part, on the enormously influential anthropological work of Clifford Geertz.7 In the past quarter century, there has been a proliferation of exciting new research, much of it bringing previously overlooked or explicitly excluded groups and events into the light of history. The number and variety of American stories multiplied. Suddenly, there were histories where there had been none or where the available histories had not been attended to by professional historians: histories of African Americans in the era of slavery and beyond; of Native Americans; of workers at home in their communities, at work, and at play; of women at home and outside of the home and of gender relations more generally; of consumption as well as production; of ethnic minorities and "borderlands"; of popular culture and other "marginal" forms of cultural production; of objects and material culture; of whites and whiteness as historical subjects; of non-state international and intercultural relations; and much more. [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 4Frederick Jackson Turner never completed a major synthesis, but one can see how he might have done that work in his posthumously published The United States, 1830-1850 (New York, 1935); Charles A. Beard and Mary R. Beard, The Rise of American Civilization (1927; 2 volumes in 1, New York, 1930).. In fact, the Beards participated in this shift with the publication of The American Spirit: A Study of the Idea of Civilization in the United States (New York, 1942). 5 For an early anticipation of this development-from the point of view of intellectual history-see Lawrence Veysey, "Intellectual History and the New Social History," in Paul K. Conkin and John Higham, eds., New Directions in American Intellectual History (Baltimore, Md., 1979), 3-26. See also, in the same volume, David A. Hollinger, "Historians and the Discourse of Intellectuals," 42-63; and Thomas Bender, "The Cultures of Intellectual Life: The City and the Professions," 181-95. 6 For consensus history as synthesis, see especially Daniel J. Boorstin, The Americans, 3 vols. (New York, 1958-73); Louis Hartz, The Liberal Tradition in America: An Interpretation of American Political Thought since the Revolution (New York, 1955). 7 On the Beards and newer social histories, see Thomas Bender, "The New History-Then and Now," Reviews in American History 12 (1984): 612-22. For Clifford Geertz, see The Interpretation of Cultures: Selected Essays (New York, 1973). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 131 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] By the early 1980s, some commentators inside and outside the profession were wondering whether an American history had disappeared in the onslaught of highly particular studies, often about subgroups in the larger society of the United States. These developments were occurring at a moment when the number of American historians was expanding to an unprecedented degree. Disciplinary expansion both allowed and prompted increased specialization. And that worried some, who began to speak of hyperspecialization and fragmentation. The structure of specialization derived in large part from the impact of a social history that often fused the group-based particularity of focus with ideological commitments to class and identity-based social movements. This pattern of work discouraged the integration of particular histories into some kind of synthesis.8 Traditionalists, perhaps not surprisingly, were unnerved by these develop- ments.9 But even some proponents of the newer history worried. Early on, Herbert G. Gutman, one of the leading figures in the movement to write a history that included all Americans and that recognized differences-class, ethnic, racial, gender-was concerned that instead of enriching and enlarging the usable history of the United States, the new scholarship was failing to do that, perhaps making it in fact less usable. The "new social history," he wrote in the introduction to his collection of pioneering essays in the field, "suffers from a very limiting overspe- cialization." Take an Irish-born Catholic female textile worker and union organizer in Fall River involved in a disorderly strike in 1875. She might be the subject of nearly a dozen sub-specializations, which would, he feared, "wash out the wholeness that is essential to understanding human behavior."10 Later, in the wake of a national meeting of writers at which historians and history seemed to be largely ignored in discussions of the political and cultural situation in the aftermath of Richard Nixon, Gutman mused aloud in the pages of The Nation over whether the failure of historians to incorporate social history's findings into a new synthesis had seriously diminished, even evacuated, history's possible contribution to public debate."1 In the mid-1980s, in what turned out to be a controversial pair of articles, I raised a related question: how might one construct the (to my mind) needed synthesis of recent historiography on the United States.12 There was considerable negative reaction to those articles, coming from two different positions. One [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 8 For an insightful and quite worrisome examination of recent scholarly practice and its trajectory, see Winfried Fluck, "The Modernity of America and the Practice of Scholarship," in Thomas Bender, ed., Rethinking American History in a Global Age (Berkeley, Calif., 2002). 9 See, for example, Gertrude Himmelfarb, The New History and the Old (Cambridge, Mass., 1987). This volume includes essays published by Himmelfarb between 1975 and 1984. 10 Herbert G. Gutman, Work, Culture and Society in Industrializing America: Essays in American Working-Class and Social History (New York, 1976), xii-xiii. Bernard Bailyn, who did not share Gutman's political or historiographical agenda, raised similar issues a few years later in his presidential address to the American Historical Association. Bailyn, "The Challenge of Modern Historiography," AHR 87 (February 1982): 1-24. 11 Herbert G. Gutman, "The Missing Synthesis: Whatever Happened to History," The Nation, November 21, 1981. See also, in a similar spirit, Eric Foner, "History in Crisis," Commonweal (December 18, 1981): 723-26. 12 Thomas Bender, "Making History Whole Again," New York Times Book Review (October 6, 1985): 1, 42-43; Bender, "Wholes and Parts: The Need for Synthesis in American History," Journal of American History 73 (1986): 120-36. See also the earlier and less commented on essay, Bender, "New History." AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 132 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] position worried about its critique of specialization and its call for addressing a larger public. These arguments were equated with a carelessness about scholarly rigor.13 The other, and more widespread position, focused on the risks of a national narrative itself. It was evidently feared that such a narrative would, by definition, re-exclude those groups and themes that had so recently been brought under the umbrella of history and would re-inscribe a "master narrative" dominated by white, elite males.14 By the end of the 1980s, however, the question of synthesis had become less controversial. The issue became more practical, more professional in some sense: how to do it and how to do it within the parameters of inclusion that had been central to the discussion from the beginning. It was on this note that Alice Kessler-Harris, the author of the chapter on social history in The New American History (1990 edition), addressed the question. In the last section of her essay, with the section title of "The Problem of Synthesis," she acknowledged the problem and explored various possible ways to overcome "fragmentation" and move toward synthesis.15 A different issue emerged in the 1990s. Poststructuralist literary and cultural theory, sometimes broadly and even more vaguely characterized as postmodernism, was and is suspicious of any aspiration toward a comprehensive narrative. It is to this body of theory that we owe the commonplace use and misuse of the epithet "master narrative."16 These theories have been rather slow to penetrate workaday historical practice among American historians. Levels and types of awareness of them vary: from shocked indignation at the whole idea, to vague awareness and thoughtless dismissal, to intellectual fascination largely in isolation from the making of one's own histories. In his recent book, Beyond the Great Story: History as Text and Discourse (1995), Robert Berkhofer seeks to force more attention to these issues. Insistently, but not always consistently, he urges historians to recognize the dimensions of the postmodern crisis that surrounds them. He seems more interested in sounding the alarm about the quicksand before us than in guiding us [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 13 Eric H. Monkkonen, "The Dangers of Synthesis," AHR 91 (December 1986): 1146-57. 14 See the Round Table articles, Nell Irvin Painter, "Bias and Synthesis in History," Journal of American History 74 (June 1987): 109-12; Richard Wightman Fox, "Public Culture and the Problem of Synthesis," 113-16; Roy Rosenzweig, "What Is the Matter with History?" 117-22; and for my response, Thomas Bender, "Wholes and Parts: Continuing the Conversation," 123-30. For a more recent and more broadly argued critique, see Randolph Roth, "Is There a Democratic Alternative to Republi- canism? The Rhetoric and Politics of Recent Pleas for Synthesis," in Jeffrey Cox and Shelton Stromquist, eds., Contesting the Master Narrative: Essays in Social History (Iowa City, Iowa, 1998), 210-56. 15 Alice Kessler-Harris, "Social History," in Foner, New American History, 177-80. The closing chapters of Peter Novick's very influential social history of the profession worries this issue as well. Peter Novick, That Noble Dream: The "Objectivity Question" and the American Historical Profession (Cambridge, 1988), chaps. 14-16. The most recent public discussion is David Oshinsky, "The Humpty Dumpty of Scholarship: American History Has Broken in Pieces, Can It Be Put Together Again?" New York Times, August 26, 2000. 16 See Allen Megill, "Fragmentation and the Future of Historiography," AHR 96 (June 1991): 693-98. For a more general but very rich survey, see Dorothy Ross, "Grand Narrative in American Historical Writing: From Romance to Uncertainty," AHR 100 (June 1995): 651-77. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 133 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] around it or safely through. But either way, he intends to challenge the very possibility of narrative synthesis.17 While these worries, proposals, and polemics were being fashioned, the daily work of historians proceeded. Among the products of that work have been a good number of explicitly synthetic volumes. There is, of course, no clear or settled notion of what defines a work of synthesis. I have used a rather generous definition. Some of the books I am calling synthetic might alternatively be designated as monographs-archivally based but exceptionally ambitious books that tackle big questions and seek to frame a large field or to provide an interpretation for an audience well beyond specialists. Others are more obviously synthetic, relying heavily on secondary literature to establish the state of the art in a broad field for a wide audience, including, often, students and the general public. With this diversity of form, purpose, and audience in mind-as well as a concern for a reasonable distribution of fields and periods-I have, with the help of the editors of the American Historical Review, selected a few recent synthetic works for examina- tion.18 The very existence of these books mutes the question of whether we need synthetic works or whether, under the constraints of present historiographical practice, synthesis is possible. In fact, the seeming proliferation of syntheses at present-and their variousness-suggests that the field of American history is at a formative (or reformative) moment that invites synthesis: the quest for new understandings that has undermined established narratives has now, perhaps, prompted new efforts at crystallizing a very unstable body of historical writing into new syntheses. A different question, however, provides the focus of this essay. What strategies for narrative synthesis are available to historians today? How might we think about the relation between a particular structure of narrative synthesis and the author's purpose or interpretation? How do these different strategies relate to current historiography? What particular work do they do, within the profession and beyond it? And finally I want to ask some questions about the firmness of the boundaries (mostly geographical) that define what is and is not captured in synthetic narratives of U.S. history. These works do not, of course, cover the whole field of synthetic works. More and other books could have been chosen, but these eleven books (and several others mentioned along the way) at least represent different kinds of history, different [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 17 Robert F. Berkhofer, Jr., Beyond the Great Story: History as Text and Discourse (Cambridge, Mass., 1995). See the "Forum" on the book in the American Quarterly: Michael C. Coleman, "Gut Reactions of a Historian to a Missionary Tract," American Quarterly 50 (June 1998): 340-48; Saul Cornell, "Moving Beyond the Great Story: Post Modern Possibilities, Postmodern Problems," 349-57; Betsy Erkkila, "Critical History," 358-64; and Robert F. Berkhofer, Jr., "Self-Reflections on Beyond the Great Story: The Ambivalent Author as Ironic Interlocutor," 365-75. See especially the exceptionally insightful and critical review essay by Thomas L. Haskell, "Farewell to Fallibilism: Robert Berkhofer's Beyond the Great Story and the Allure of the Postmodern," History and Theory 37 (October 1998): 347-69. 18 None, incidentally though importantly, present themselves as synthetic narratives of the nation, although some to be discussed below certainly reach toward that in practical effect, particularly those authored by Eric Foner (The Story of American Freedom) and by Robert V. Hine and John Mack Faragher (TheAmerican West). In fact, I have recommended each to non-historians asking for a literate one-volume history of the United States. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 134 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] periods, and different themes. Together, the eleven total nearly 6,000 pages of outstanding historical writing. If nothing else, I can conclude that synthetic narrative invites long books. Because I cannot claim special knowledge in any of the fields being synthesized in these books, I do not propose to do the kind of analysis one would find in specialized reviews. Such criticisms that I have will be framed from the position of my interest in synthetic narrative. I say that in part to be honest about my own limitations in appraising these books but also for another, more positive reason. I want to insist that narrative synthesis is a form of knowledge, indeed, a particularly powerful form of creating, not simply summarizing, knowledge. I hope to get past or under the story enough to probe the implications of different modes of structuring a narrative synthesis. The way different narrative strategies construct that knowledge is important. While inclusion is one of the tests our generation will rightly ask of synthesis, there are other important historiographical issues that are embedded in the question of narrative synthesis.19 The more seriously we consider possible narratives of American history, the more we may be prepared to ask questions that press beyond inclusion. We may even be both bold enough and hopeful enough to worry a little about the language of inclusion, if not the principle. Is there perhaps more than a hint of dominant culture noblesse oblige in the language of inclusion? Might not a more sophisticated notion of the temporal and geographical boundaries of American history, including an awareness of the diasporic stories within American history, complicate and enrich the notion of inclusion?20 Can the historical and historiographical terrain be opened a bit more in a way that enables a deeper, denser, and more complex historiographical exploration of justice and difference at the center of American history? Might democracy be the word, the concept, the commitment that will move us in that direction? As I examine the stack of books before me, I propose to keep these issues in mind and to return to them at the end of this essay. JON BUTLER'S Becoming America: The Revolution before 1776 (2000) covers the whole mainland British colonial space and history, and it addresses a wide range of themes. In fact, themes, not time or chronology, organize his story. His brief, often one-word, chapter titles reveal a very distinctive type of synthesis, one immediately accessible to the reader, whether professional or lay: Peoples, Economy, Politics, Things Material, Things Spiritual. It is a reasonable progression, and in each case he brings together a good deal of material. Although his theme is transformation, Butler also claims (following recent historiography) a more inclusive geography, making more of the middle colonies than would have been the case a generation ago. In some ways, his manner of organizing the material topically bears a relation to [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 19 I do not propose to go into theories of narrative or even my own notions, but I will here indicate that my understanding has been greatly influenced by the work of Paul Ricoeur, Time and Narrative, Kathleen McLaughlin and David Pellauer, trans., 3 vols. (Chicago, 1984-88). 20 Such thinking is not restricted to specialists in the profession exploring the theme of diaspora. The novelist Russell Banks has recently argued that the focus for a synthesis of American history ought to be the African diaspora. See "The Star-Spangled Novel," Los Angeles Times, July 2, 2000. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 135 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Richard Hofstadter's posthumously published America at 1750: A Social Portrait (1971).21 But what might have worked for Hofstadter, who was setting the scene for a three-volume narrative history of the United States, works less well for the purposes Butler has in his book. If Hofstadter's book was intended to provide a snapshot that would serve as a starting point, Butler's title ("Becoming America") and his stated intentions announce change as his theme. He means to persuade the reader of a broad pattern of transformation that produced a distinctive and modern society in advance of 1776 and that in turn spawned the first modern revolution. Such an argument demands more complex and careful attention to process and cause than his framing of the book seems to allow. While he has surely gathered together a considerable body of material (his notes run to fifty pages), he has not produced a synthetic narrative of change over time, one that sketches a develop- mental sequence that integrates disparate elements in the interest of a causal interpretation. By bounding each unit of synthesis, Butler is stuck with a structural isolation of topics that undercuts narrative explanation. Given that Butler's theme is transformation, this narrative structure is crippling. For reasons related to structure and style of argument, Butler's claims for American modernity are quite vulnerable. While there are doubtless some specific ways in which the British North American colonies became "modern" before independence, they were not uniformly modern-over space or in all aspects of life. Many historians would readily grant numerous anticipations of modernity by the middle of the eighteenth century, but few would insist, with Butler, that so much modernity had been achieved so soon, implying that only a few pre-modern anomalies remained on the eve of revolution.22 Most give a significant role to the revolution.23 But the most serious problem is not with the phenomena he notices or does not notice, even if there is some real unevenness on this point. Rather, it is Butler's teleology of the modern, combined with his exceedingly loose, elusive, and, as is so often said today, undertheorized definition of modernity. Add to this an unneces- sary but apparently irresistible tendency to claim American uniqueness and "firsts" for nearly everything he identifies as modern in America. He names a number of phenomena that he considers evidences of the modern-polyglot, slaves, cities, market economy, refined crafts and trades, religious pluralism, and "sophisticated politics." Without further historical specification and theoretical precision, one can indulge in reductio ad absurdum. With the exception of religious pluralism, all of these qualities probably described Athens in the age of Aristotle at least as well as the British colonies. In fact, I suspect that Peter Linebaugh and Marcus Rediker, relying on their recent book The Many-Headed Hydra: Sailors, Slaves, Commoners, and the Hidden History of the Revolutionary Atlantic (2000), would argue that the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 21 Richard Hofstadter, America at 1750: A Social Portrait (New York, 1971). 22 Jon Butler, Becoming America: The Revolution before 1776 (Cambridge, Mass., 2000), 1. 23 See, for example, Gordon S. Wood, The Radicalism of the American Revolution (New York, 1992). Long before, Bernard Bailyn suggested certain developments that Butler would consider modern had developed in the eighteenth century, but he emphasized the unevenness and even paradoxical character of this proto-modernity. See "Political Experience and Enlightenment Ideas in Eighteenth-Century America," AHR 67 (January 1962): 339-51; and Bailyn, The Origins of American Politics (New York, 1968). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 136 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Atlantic world provides a better example of modernity on those terms than does the colonial mainland.24 He makes many claims for American distinctiveness. In the end, however, it is diversity, which he tends to equate with multiculturalism, that for Butler makes Americans modern. But if we look around, we cannot but wonder about his claims for a uniquely polyglot society. This assertion may be quite vulnerable from any sight line approaching a global perspective. Can he fairly claim that New York City harbored a level of diversity "never before gathered together"?25 Might not this be as plausibly said of Constantinople during the period covered by Butler's book? And did not the Ottoman Empire-of which Constantinople was the capital-far exceed the religious and ethnic diversity of the British colonies? My point here is partly one of fact, of care in making comparative statements without comparison. More important, however, are the criteria of the modern. Few, if any, major political bodies in the past half millennium more successfully accommodated diversity than the Ottomans, yet that achievement has never brought them recognition for a precocious modernity. One needs greater defini- tional and descriptive specificity to make the argument he claims. Because of the breadth and generality of synthetic narratives, it is especially important to be clear about key concepts. Similarly, he tends to claim the realization of "Americanness"-here equated with some vague notion of modernity-for events that, however interesting in themselves, hardly sustain his assertion that they designated "the American future."26 For example, writing of the French Huguenots, a group he knows well, he notes their assimilation, and he calls this "American."27 Well, of course it is, but so are the endogenous marriages that continue for various groups well into the twentieth century-sometimes because of racial difference and even legislation (as in the case of African Americans) or out of choice, as in the case of Scandinavians in the upper Midwest. Or to take a more ominous subject, it seems a bit fatalistic to say that colonial encroachment on Indian land "predicted" nineteenth-century relations with the Indians.28 Oddly, such a claim, while taking the moral high ground, nonetheless erases the postcolonial history of the United States by denying contingency and thus diminishing both the capacity and moral responsibility of all later actors or potential actors. The twin and linked teleologies of "modern" and "American" produce a distorting and de-historicizing synthesis. If there is a problem with the sort of synthesis Butler has written, what precisely is it? He makes historical claims about patterns and meanings of development on the basis of a narrative structure that effectively isolates and de-historicizes his themes. By not constructing a developmental narrative that integrates the various themes now separated in distinct chapters, the process and complexity of develop- ment is obscured. While his chapters are full of relevant and interesting details of [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 24 Peter Linebaugh and Marcus Rediker, The Many-Headed Hydra: Sailors, Slaves, Commoners, and the Hidden History of the Revolutionary Atlantic (Boston, 2000). 25 Butler, Becoming America, 9. 26 Butler, Becoming America, 36. 27 Butler, Becoming America, 22. One of Butler's previous books is The Huguenots in America: A Refugee People in a New World Society (Cambridge, Mass., 1983). 28 Butler, Becoming America, 68. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 137 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] everyday life, they never get integrated in any individual, institution, or place. In the absence of a narrative of change to explain and interpret, he resorts for a theme to repeated assertions of "modernity." The issue is not so much the claim for an eighteenth-century American modernity-although I am myself drawn to much more complex, nuanced, and contradictory discussions of that theme-as it is the incapacity of the particular model of synthesis he deploys to advance that theme or argument. Philip D. Morgan's Slave Counterpoint: Black Culture in the Eighteenth-Century Chesapeake and Lowcountry (1998) is at once similar to Butler's and quite different. Both focus tightly in each chapter on a particular topic or theme; there is little play among the different themes in both cases. While Butler's themes propose a reorganization of material, thus giving an impression of freshness, Morgan's quite important questions are phrased in well-established ways. While Butler's structure works against his theme of transformation, Morgan's similar structure better fits his goals for the book, partly because transformation plays a smaller role in his analysis than one might expect. Slave Counterpoint addresses nearly all the issues raised by a half century of vigorous scholarship on the beginnings of slavery, the practices of racial slavery as a labor and social system, and the nature of African-American culture in early America. It is a book of enviable learning: with a seeming total command of the historiography and an impressive knowledge of a substantial archival base, Morgan proceeds to pose (or re-pose) difficult historiographical issues. Again and again, he offers compelling answers. Want to know what scholarship has disclosed about slavery and African-American culture in the eighteenth-century Chesapeake and Lowcountry? Look to Morgan's synthesis of a generation of scholarship. To have done that is to have done a great deal, and he has done it magnificently. Yet one gets the sense of a summary volume, a volume driven by the past, by past questions. Synthesis can either cap a phase of scholarship or initiate another. I think Morgan's book falls into the former category, while Ira Berlin's new book, Many Thousands Gone: The First Two Centuries of Slavery in North America (1998), which also relies on a generation of scholarship and addresses many of the same issues, has the potential to become a new starting point. Berlin has captured the shift to an Atlantic perspective that has increasingly characterized scholarship by early modern Europeanists, Africanists, Latin Americanists, and historians of British North America. In this sense, his work, at least the early parts that sketch out and populate the Atlantic littoral, points forward.29 In a dramatic opening section, Berlin, relying more on secondary literatures than does Morgan, locates his story in very broad understandings of time (periodization) and space (the Atlantic world), the dimensions of which are shadowy, almost invisible, in Morgan's account. He locates Africans in an Atlantic history connecting four continents and in a rich and growing historiography reaching out from Europe, Africa, Latin America, and North America.30 One [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 29 Ira Berlin, Many Thousands Gone: The First Two Centuries of Slavery in North America (Cambridge, Mass., 1998). 30 Berlin's powerful evocation of the Atlantic builds on many predecessors. At minimum, mention should be made of Philip D. Curtin's The Atlantic Slave Trade: A Census (Madison, Wis., 1969); and The AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 138 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] wishes Berlin had sustained this perspective in the later sections. But even if he narrows the story to the territory that later became the United States and loses the multiple histories implied by his portrait of the Atlantic world, the beginnings of stories, whether novels or histories, are heavy with intention and implication that can, I hope, be built upon.31 In fact, the four Atlantic continents remain an always changing aspect of American and African histories. Attending to, or at least recognizing, that larger and continuing extended terrain of American history would enrich the story of the making of African Americans and America, a historiography that is at present too much captured by an implicit and too simple assimilation or "Americanization" model. Nonetheless, Berlin has provided a powerful image of the creation of the Atlantic world and of the origin of modern slavery within it. Morgan has a quite different strategy. His domain is not the Atlantic but the South, or two regions of the South, which he is anxious to reveal as differentiated. Thus his is a comparative history, comparing two regions within the South. Suggesting a certain scientific aspiration, he refers to his delimited space as a kind of laboratory, a site for an "indirect experiment."32 This approach offers him much. He is able to focus tightly on his questions and generally achieves sharply phrased answers. Yet, like any good scientific laboratory, his field of inquiry is almost hermetically sealed. A two-hundred-page part of the book titled "The Black World" begins with a fifteen-page section on "Africans." Yet it is in only one paragraph at the beginning and a few other scattered references that one reads anything about Africa. His story rarely strays east (or south or north or west) of the Maryland/ Virginia and South Carolina boundaries. His comparative method has impressive rigor. Yet one senses that not only does his approach trap him within a particular place, he is also caught within a very confining net woven from the existing historiography. As Walter Johnson pointed out in a review of the book in this journal, his questions are smaller than the stories he has unearthed.33 Much like another important book on African-American history, Herbert G. Gutman's The Black Family in Slavery and Freedom (1976), this book, for all its synthetic aspirations, cannot capture some of its best material within the tightly bounded historiographical questions and issues that frame it.34 As in the case of Berlin's book, Morgan's is quite explicit about time and space. There is a well-thought-out chronology of change, and one of his major arguments is that the South, and thus the black as well as white experience, was not uniform over space. He shows real and important distinctions between the experience of [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Rise and Fall of the Plantation Complex (New York, 1990; 2d edn., 1998); and John K. Thornton's Africa and Africans in the Making of the Atlantic World, 1400-1680 (New York, 1992; 2d edn., 1400-1800, 1998). 31 On the importance of beginnings, see Edward W. Said, Beginnings: Intention and Method (Baltimore, Md., 1975). 32 Philip D. Morgan, Slave Counterpoint: Black Culture in the Eighteenth-Century Chesapeake and Lowcountry (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1998), xvii. 33 Walter Johnson, review of Morgan, Slave Counterpoint, AHR 105 (October 2000): 1295-97, esp. 1297. 34 See Herbert G. Gutman, The Black Family in Slavery and Freedom, 1750-1925 (New York, 1976), which loses more than it gains by focusing so tightly on refuting the assumptions of the Moynihan Report. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 139 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] slavery in the Chesapeake and in the Lowcountry. Yet by treating both the temporal and spatial aspects of the story as sites (and very limited ones) rather than as processes of historical making, he weakens the capacity of his local analyses to explain change over time and, to a lesser extent, space. His major explanatory claims appear in the introduction. They are not only brief but also separate from the rich stories he tells and the analyses he makes of historiographical questions.35 The expansiveness of Many Thousands Gone, by contrast, evokes a strong sense of change, of process. It achieves a narrative synthesis of the movement of Africans onto the Atlantic and into the Western hemisphere. The difference between this approach and the tightly controlled analysis crafted by Morgan is striking. Like Morgan's, Michael Schudson's book, The Good Citizen: A History of American Civic Life (1998), is organized around fairly established questions- especially one big question. Has American civic life deteriorated over the course of the past three centuries? Naturally, the question is of a different order than those driving Morgan's analysis. It has not been generated by disciplinary scholarship. It arose out of American public life. Schudson thus draws on history and other disciplines to address directly a public question, one endlessly repeated today and, as he shows, in the past. Schudson himself, we should note, is not a historian. He was trained as a sociologist, and he teaches in a Department of Communication. While he reveals an impressive command of the relevant historiography, historians are not his primary reference group or audience.36 Although I am sure specialists will find some of his formulations to be of considerable historiographical significance and likely to encourage new lines of research, his intention, again, is different: his audience is a general one, and he seeks to bring historical knowledge to bear on a civic issue. What he is doing points toward the most important work that one kind of successful narrative synthesis can do, for the profession and for the public. By openly declaring his address to a public issue and for a public audience, Schudson participates in a very important tradition of historical writing. Some of the very best professional historians of the United States in this century have done precisely that: Frederick Jackson Turner, W. E. B. Du Bois, Charles Beard, and Richard Hofstadter all focused on issues, worries, or preoccupations of fairly general interest to write synthetic works that importantly rephrased fundamental themes in American history. This mutual enrichment of public and professional discourse is perhaps the ideal cultural work of narrative synthesis. Let us hope that historians can do this more often and more effectively. Yet as I make this point, I realize that all of the historians just named, including Schudson himself, were either trained as social scientists or did not recognize a significant boundary between history and the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 35Morgan, Slave Counterpoint, xv-xxiv. I should note that my concerns about boundary setting in Morgan's book do not apply nearly so much to Philip D. Morgan, "The Black Experience in the British Empire, 1680-1810," in The Oxford History of the British Empire, Vol. 2: The Eighteenth Century, P. J. Marshall, ed. (Oxford, 1998), 465-86. 36 This command is at once impressive and sometimes puzzling. In discussing the Founding and the Constitution, he does not mention Gordon Wood's The Creation of the American Republic, 1776-1787 (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1969). Nor, in writing about the first decades of the nineteenth century, does he mention either of two key books by Robert H. Wiebe, The Opening of American Society: From the Adoption of the Constitution to the Eve of Disunion (New York, 1984); and Self-Rule: A Cultural History of American Democracy (Chicago, 1995). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 140 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] (other?) once more expansive social sciences. Is this a mere coincidence, or is it an issue to be addressed by the profession? While I would not place Schudson's book in the same class as the scholarship produced by the short list of great historians, he has written a fine book. It is a book about change over time, and he establishes three eras of citizenship and participa- tion, each clearly defined. He does not devote much attention to how each configuration changes into the next, but he effectively characterizes their differ- ences, even in some very brief summaries, as in the following paragraph from early in the book: Another way to characterize the past three hundred years of political change is to say that the type of authority by which society is governed shifted from personal authority (gentlemen) to interpersonal authority (parties, coalitions, and majorities), to impersonal authority (science, expertise, legal rights, and information) ... The geographical center of politics has shifted from the countryside to the cities to the suburbs and perhaps, today, to "technoburbs," "postsuburbs," or "edge cities," or whatever we name our newer habitations. Correspondingly, the kind of knowledge a good citizen requires has changed: in an age of gentlemen, the citizen's relatively rare entrances into public discussion or controversy could be guided by his knowledge of social position; in the era of rule by majorities, the citizen's voting could be led by the enthusiasm and rhetoric of parties and their most active partisans; in the era of expertise and bureaucracies, the citizens had increasingly to learn to trust their own canvass of newspapers, interest groups, parties, and other sources of knowledge, only occasionally supported by the immediacy of human contact; and in the emerging age of rights, citizens learn to catalog what entitlements they may have and what forms of victimization they may knowingly or unknowingly have experienced.37 This paragraph reveals the argument and the narrative strategy that Schudson uses to undercut the widespread notion of civic decline: rather than a story of decline, it is one of restructuring, one that recalibrates citizenship and civic practice in relation to changing values and social experiences. What some, including me, see as the erosion of our public life and the thinning of American political culture, he presents as a complex rearticulation of expectations and institutions. Whether one fully agrees with Schudson or not, the book and the point of view it ingeniously argues constitutes an important contribution of contemporary civic life. And a narrative strategy of restructuring (as opposed to the usual rise or fall scenarios) deserves a place in the historian's menu of narrative types. "Presentist" purposes may, however, carry the danger of anachronistic readings. Schudson is vulnerable on this score, especially in his consideration of the colonial period. He too easily asks how democratic any phase of political life was. A commitment to explore the fate of democracy in our past-something I endorse- surely includes recognizing when democracy is not an available concept. He might better have asked how the legitimation and exercise of power worked. Indeed, such a deeper historicism would complement his anti-anti-Whig approach. Similarly, while a then-and-now binary invites sometimes interesting questions and offers some illumination of past and present, it also invites problems. Again, one sees this risk in Schudson's work. False categories of judgment are explicitly or implicitly brought to bear. Speaking of the first generation to live under the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 37Michael Schudson, The Good Citizen: A History of American Civic Life (New York, 1998), 8. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 141 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Constitution, he observes that little political knowledge was expected of voters, "at least little of the sort of knowledge that today's civic moralists urge upon people." Voters then were expected to have "local knowledge-not of laws or principles, but of men."38 The binary obscures the role of principles in the past and knowledge of men in the present. Most important of all, it diverts our attention from the principles that it was thought would aid voters in judging character.39 Sometimes, by focusing so much on the party system that we worry about today, he overlooks those important issues that eluded the parties or that parties avoided. Substantive issues-the reason citizenship and civic life are important-are marginalized in his account of the different concepts and patterns of public life. The result, whether intended or not, is a form of consensus history.40 "Progress or decline is not the real question," Schudson concludes.41 He converts that question into one of restructuring that points to his core argument: there must be a fit between forms of citizenship and forms of everyday life, between values and institutions, between aspirations and commitments. It is that historically informed understanding that allows him in his conclusion to speculate in quite promising ways about an evolving pattern of citizenship that may yet serve our collective hopes and needs. Still, his conclusion leaves me uneasy. Like the journalistic coverage of politics today, the substance of political conflict is subordinated to discussion of the "health" of the system, of the institutions and practices. By contrast, the tensions, conflicts, and substantive issues that made politics so important in the development of the United States and in the lives of individuals are at the center of Eric Foner's The Story of American Freedom (1998). Foner's book has an uncanny resemblance to one that at first glance might seem utterly unrelated: Richard Hofstadter's The American Political Tradition and the Men Who Made It.42 Of course, Foner inverts the point Hofstadter sought to make. If Hofstadter famously played down conflict and (less remarked upon) paid little attention to the social making of political ideologies, Foner emphasizes conflict and the changing historical construction and reconstruction of the idea and ideology of freedom. Foner's work is much more explicitly sensitive to social history, even if it parallels Hofstadter's in its interest in ideology and the limits and possibilities of American political culture. While Hofstadter was alternately comic and ironic, bitterly so at times, in The American Political Tradition, Foner's Story of American Freedom is strikingly fair and straightforward. Yet the underlying hope is similar. As James Oakes has perceptively noted, Foner's narrative is undergirded by an unstated but firm liberal ideal of freedom- one that at once shares in an Enlightenment universalism and [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 38 Schudson, Good Citizen, 81. 39 See Joyce Appleby, Inheriting the Revolution: The First Generation of Americans (Cambridge, Mass., 2000). 40 See, for example, his summary judgment of the party system at Schudson, Good Citizen, 132. Put differently, it bears at least a formal relationship to the theories of pluralism popular in political science during the 1950s. 41 Schudson, Good Citizen, 313. 42 Richard Hofstadter, TheAmerican Political Tradition and the Men Who Made It (New York, 1948). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 142 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] accommodates current concerns for inclusion and regard for difference.43 I would even argue that Hofstadter's own liberal position was closer to Foner's than one might at first suspect. Both appraised American political culture and its prospects from the position of a richer, more textured liberalism than we usually recognize in current debates.44 In thinking about the core issue in Foner's narrative, therefore, it seems fair to consider it to be the quest for a democratic liberalism, insisting on the relevance and indispensability of the modifier inserted before liberalism. One might thus characterize Foner's as a democratic synthesis, which, as I suggested above, offers a stronger and more egalitarian standard of judgment than commonplace invoca- tions of inclusion. It offers as well the implication of voice and empowerment. To Foner, as he indicates in his introduction, "abstract definitions" of freedom are not the focus. His concern is "with the debates and struggles through which freedom acquires concrete meanings, and how understandings of freedom are shaped by, and in turn help to shape, social movements and political and economic events."45 The result is a narrative that is at once focused yet always open to an examination of larger issues, structures, and events that intersect with and often drive his story. It is a dynamic story, filled with actors, with agents making freedom and using freedom. He selects key events or controversies of different eras, events that are widely contested (slavery, labor and property, the role of the state, social movements). Of course, coverage is selective; the gain is the richness deriving from a series of concentrated focal points. In each case, he examines the conflict, the parties contending, and the stakes. He does not hesitate to declare justices and injustices, to name winners and losers, and he does so from a consistently democratic perspective. Foner thus achieves inclusion without the dilution conse- quent with the faux openness characteristic of talk radio and without the postmod- ern hesitations that undermine moral judgment.46 The American West: A New Interpretive History (2000) by Robert V. Hine and John Mack Faragher spans the whole of American history, from "the European invasion" until the present.47 The book is written in the spirit of Frederick Jackson Turner. Instead of lamenting the ambiguity of Turner's conception of the frontier, which after Turner got reduced by rigorous historians to a place, the West, Hine and Faragher embrace its fullness. For them, the frontier is both a place and a nrocess. and thev recognize that it is not onlv imnossible but limiting to senarate [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 43 James Oakes, "Radical Liberals, Liberal Radicals: The Dissenting Tradition in American Political Culture," Reviews in American History 27 (1999): 503-11. 44 For just such a contemporary theorization of liberalism, see Ira Katznelson, Liberalism's Crooked Circle: Letters to Adam Michnik (Princeton, N.J., 1996). Interestingly, this work also comes from a Columbia scholar, however much it is openly acknowledged to have derived largely from his experience at the New School for Social Research. Perhaps the relevant context for this liberalism is the city of New York, with its cosmopolitan character and free-for-all quality of political contestation. For a brief statement of Hofstadter's relation to liberalism, see Thomas Bender, "Richard Hofstadter," in American National Biography, John A. Garraty and Mark C. Carnes, gen. eds. (New York, 1999), 11: 1-4. 45 Eric Foner, The Story of American Freedom (New York, 1998), xvii. 46 In Eric Foner, Reconstruction: America's Unfinished Revolution, 1863-1877 (New York, 1988), where chronological compression allows for a richer analysis, one can see more fully the method and its achievements. 47 Robert V. Hine and John Mack Faragher, The American West: A New Interpretive History (New Haven, Conn., 2000), 9. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 143 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] and sharply distinguish between the two aspects of the concept. That openness allows them to tell the history of the United States as a story of successive frontiers, including a fascinating rethinking of American regionalism as urban-centered at the end of the twentieth century.48 In fact, the chapter on the postwar era is a tour de force-imaginative, original, and quite compelling. In Turnerian fashion, they argue that "westering defined America's unique heritage."49 To a very impressive degree, they give substance to this claim, but recent historiography makes that claim, even for western history, problematic. As Hine and Faragher show, in the nineteenth century as well as today, the West (and the United States) was formed by migrations from west to east and south to north, and even in a limited way north to south, as well as east to west. The notion of westering is so strong in American and European history and culture, it is difficult to construct an alternative narrative structure, though no less important for the difficulty.50 This worry does not, however, undercut another summary point they make: the "frontier is our common past."51 The book is grounded in social history. Of all the books under consideration here, The American West is probably the most sensitive to the categories of experience and groups previously excluded from mainstream narratives of Ameri- can history. Their work goes well beyond mere representation of such groups and categories; previously invisible groups, whether Native Americans, migrating women, African-American settlers, working people, or the people of the border- lands, are actors who contributed to the shaping of history. But there are limits to this achievement. While there are multiple positions and voices represented in their narrative, only rarely does their narrative bring the reader inside group life. There is not much inquiry into the interior experience and subjective meanings shared by the various groups identified and recognized.52 While the story could have been situated in a wider context, one that revealed the global reach of the empires or, later, the importance of global markets, in its particular geographical focus the book consistently avoids privileging the English line of settlement. Other settler efforts are considered and sometimes compared. As is often the case with synthetic histories, however, there is a tendency to do the work of inclusion at a particular moment, and then lose the group at issue. For example, there is a good discussion of the origins of racial slavery, but the later [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 48 On the potential of the urban region model for historical analysis, see Jane Jacobs, Cities and the Wealth of Nations: Principles of Economic Life (New York, 1984). For an extremely stimulating extension of Turner's frontier to transnational dimensions, see Paul Sabin, "Home and Abroad: The Two 'Wests' of Twentieth-Century United States History," Pacific Historical Review 66, no. 3 (1997): 305-36. 49 Hine and Faragher, Amertican West, 531. 50 Loren Baritz, "The Idea of the West," AHR 66 (April 1961): 618-40. For three forays into alternative narrative strategies on this point, see Thomas Bender, "The Geography of Historical Memory and the Making of Public Culture," in Anna Maria Martellone, ed., Towards a New American Nation? Redefinitions and Reconstruction (Staffordshire, 1995), 174-87; Ian Tyrrell, "Beyond the View from Euro-America: Environment, Settler Societies, and Internationalization of American History," in Bender, Rethinking American History in a Global Age; Dirk Hoerder, "From the Euro- and Afro- Atlantic to the Pacific Migration System in North American History," in Bender. 51 Hine and Faragher, American West, 560. 52 In fact, they concentrate this kind of analysis in one chapter, a fascinating one in "A Search for Community," but it is limited in its cases, and it segregates such analysis from the greater part of the narrative. Hine and Faragher, American West, chap. 12. AMERICAN HISTORIcAL REvIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 144 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] extension of the plantation system and internal slave market that was a part of the frontier movement is not adequately recognized. At times, the transnational themes they develop are extremely illuminating. They refer to what would later be characterized by theorists of the global cities as a "dual economy" in describing the role of foreign migrants, especially Chinese, in the nineteenth-century California agricultural economy.53 Likewise the interplay of national and international in their discussion of the Zimmerman telegram inviting Mexico to ally with Germany in World War I and in their discussion of San Francisco's "commercial hinterland."54 But, as in the case of Butler's book, there is a bit of parochialism in making claims of distinction. Perhaps such assertions can be demonstrated, but more rigorous definitions and empirical research than we have here are required to establish, for example, that the United States is today the world's most multicultural society.55 How would it compare with Indonesia, the world's fourth most populous nation, whose citizens speak more than 100 languages and live on almost numberless islands? The social-history approach, whatever its success in representing difference, has in this instance under-represented national political institutions and policies. The development of the West, as Richard White and other historians of the West have pointed out, was profoundly indebted to what western Republicans now call "big government," for water, transportation, Indian removal, and, more recently, direct investment, as in defense contracts and installations and aerospace industries.56 The political economy and the role of markets, as has already been suggested, do not get the attention they deserve. We often overlook how much industry was in the West, and how much western industries-from milling and meatpacking to mining-were integral to the industrial system of the United States. And we forget how much the astonishing productivity of western agriculture enabled the formation of a large urban industrial labor supply. More of these dimensions of western history might have been included if only in the interest in enabling the story better to tell the national experience. If Hine and Faragher encompass both the full geographical and temporal dimensions of western history, Linda Gordon's microhistory builds out from a very delimited western space, the Sonoran highlands of Arizona, to develop a highly innovative narrative synthesis that locates itself at the various and causally interrelated scales of town, region, nation, and the transnational. Her work reminds us that there is a difference between a mere local study and a microhistory. The local histories of villages, towns, and cities, so common in the 1970s, tended to use global concepts but within artificially bounded fields of inquiry. One of the most famous of them all, Kenneth Lockridge's study of Dedham, Massachusetts, offered an isolated inwardness as a principal finding, although it was a finding that derived [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 53Hine and Faragher, American West, 358-60. 54 Hine and Faragher, American West, 395-97, 414. This story could be greatly expanded. San Francisco was closer to Asia than to Europe, a simple geographical point that usually eludes us. For an outstanding study of this relationship, see Ian Tyrrell, True Gardens of the Gods: Californian-Australian Environmental Reform, 1860-1930 (Berkeley, Calif., 1999). 55 Hine and Faragher, American West, 514. 56 Richard White, "It's Your Misfortune and None of My Own": A History of the American West (Norman, Okla., 1991). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 145 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] mainly from a methodology not only local but firmly bounded.57 By contrast, Gordon's The Great Arizona Orphan Abduction exemplifies a microhistory that enables the historian to synthesize the threads of local life, many of which are translocal in origin and implication.58 Unlike Hine and Faragher, she gets inside the subjective experience of local life, even the experience of very ordinary people, without getting trapped inside that world and without implying that the larger world of the region, the nation, and even transnational economic and religious institutions were beyond the ken of her study of a seemingly local conflict. Mostly, her account is the story of the arrival and fate of Catholic orphans from New York who were to be placed in Catholic homes. The homes were Mexican as well as Catholic, and that was the problem and the focus of conflict. The conflict played out along class, ethnic, religious, and gender lines, and it eventually reached the Supreme Court. It is a compelling and very human narrative, but one that also addresses a whole range of analytical and interpretive issues of broader interest to historians. Bringing the issues of gender, class, and race into relation with each other allows for an appraisal of their relative importance in this particular historical explanation. I think that her story reveals class to be more important than her conclusion argues, but the real point to be made is that only a narrative synthesis that brings diverse threads together will enable the historian and the reader to make this kind of judgment. These complex ends are achieved in part by her adoption of an imaginative literary strategy. Gordon's book is constructed of two types of chapters. One is quite often a broad frame for local events. In these chapters, her perspective as narrator is exterior to the action. The issues addressed are frequently structural and, as often as not, extend beyond the community. Here, one gets an analytical explanation of the relation of local experience to larger national and international cultural, political, and economic developments. Between these chapters, she has crafted others that get inside the culture of the community, providing wonderfully rich, thick descriptions of daily life and the development of the conflict. With oral histories as well as fragmentary documentary evidence, she brings the reader very close to the experience and voices of the community. The play between these accounts and the more conventional chapters produces an unusual but powerful synthesis. Whether a microhistory qualifies as a synthesis, even by my generous definition, may be debated. But the singular relevance of this book for the discussion of synthesis concerns not scale but its literary ambition, the literary experiment that gives structure to the book. Those who would write other syntheses-at various scales-will, I hope, be encouraged, even inspired, to experiment with novel narrative strategies in the interest of more powerful representations of the past. Quintard Taylor presents a third version of western history, In Search of the Racial Frontier: African Americans in the American West, 1528-1990 (1998). He offers a broad synthetic account that characterizes the experiences of African Americans over a very long period of time. While the book does not ignore the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 57Kenneth A. Lockridge, A New England Town: The First Hundred Years; Dedham, Massachusetts, 1636-1736 (New York, 1970). 58 Linda Gordon, The Great Arizona Orphan Abduction (Cambridge, Mass., 1999). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRuARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 146 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] relations among different groups in the West, particularly and inevitably between blacks and whites, but also between blacks and Native American, the contribution of the book is otherwise.59 He is mapping and making visible as a whole a history that has been largely unknown or studied in very specific instances and places. Drawing on a substantial body of scholarship, most of it published in the past quarter century, he aims to "reconstruct the history of African American women and men" in the West over five centuries, although mostly his focus is the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. Taylor's central themes are the quest for community by blacks and the relative degrees of freedom and opportunity they find in different times and places. The conjuncture of the map of African-American presence and the conventional history of the West that his story brings out compels rethinking of both African-American and western history. He makes the point, for example, that the issue of Texas independence in 1836 was not simply, as myth, even the more recent multicultural version, would have it: Anglos and Tejanos in Texas confronting a despotic government in Mexico. It was also an Anglo effort to preserve slavery.60 More broadly, the map literally reveals that African Americans in the West were overwhelmingly city and town dwellers, and it is that fact that unifies their experience. The kind of synthetic narrative that he has constructed provides an invaluable service at a particular moment, crystallizing a generation of scholarship, making generalization possible. His work not only informs the public of the dimensions of previously unrecognized histories, it also provides a base for the next generation of scholarship. In a similar way, another recent synthesis, one that focuses on a more narrowly defined but also more developed area of scholarship, reveals the harvest of recent scholarship on work and workers. American Work: Four Centuries of Black and Vhite Labor (1998) by Jacqueline Jones at once brings this rich scholarship to a wider audience and proffers a fresh way of framing the field.61 If The American West, In Search of the Racial Frontier, and American Work cover very long chronological spans, books by David M. Kennedy and Fred Anderson address short periods. Their focus is also quite different, since both concentrate on political and military history. Kennedy's Freedom from Fear: The American People in Depression and War, 1929-1945 (1999) addresses what might well be called "high politics," while Anderson's The Crucible of War: The Seven Years' War and the Fate of Empire in British North America, 1754-1766 (2000) brings social history and high politics into fruitful play, finding in that interaction the terms of his central argument about the nature of power in the British Empire. At the outset, both books locate their stories in a broad international context. Kennedy's book begins at the close of World War I, and the first character introduced is Lance Corporal Adolf Hitler, who was in a military hospital recovering from a poison gas attack when he heard the news of Germany's surrender. The international context thus suggested is obviously central to the half [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 59He explicitly recognizes the issue of intergroup relations, but he equally explicitly indicates that such is not his aim here. See Quintard Taylor, In Search of the Racial Frontier: African Americans in the American West, 1528-1990 (New York, 1998), 18-19. 60 Taylor, In Search of the Racial Frontier, 39. 61 Jacqueline Jones, American Work: Four Centuries of Black and White Labor (New York, 1998). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 147 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] of the book devoted to World War II, but it is not nearly so much developed as it might be. The geography of Washington, D.C., even that of the White House, and the biographies of three men-Franklin D. Roosevelt, Winston Churchill, and Hitler-are more important to Kennedy's story than the world beyond the borders of the United States or, for that matter, than the American people of his subtitle. One of Kennedy's aims is evidently to urge upon Americans a greater attention to and sense of responsibility in the larger world, yet with the exception of the excellent discussion of the differing explanations of the economic crisis offered by Herbert Hoover and Roosevelt, there is surprisingly little incorporation of inter- national elements into the dynamic of the story. For all the importance of the larger world, for Kennedy, as for many Americans, whether professional historians or not, the international is a sort of "other," something "over there," if I may reverse the title of one of Kennedy's earlier books.62 Kennedy- also pays little attention to social history, not even to social histories that have sought to better explain the politics of the interwar years.63 Nor does the book address intellectual history, the history of science and technology (except briefly in connection with war production), the states, education, urban history, and much more. In fact, the book would have been more accurately described by the title of William E. Leuchtenburg's classic, F.D.R. and the New Deal, 1932-1940, which is here superseded and extended into the war years.64 So titled, adding the war to the New Deal, one could have no objection to this extraordinarily well-written, deeply researched, and compellingly argued book. But is it a history of "the American people"? Freedom from Fear is a masterful narrative on the terms it has assumed for itself. Yet having said that, historiographical questions remain. Kennedy apparently assumes that three voices are the important ones; not many other voices are heard, even though each of a small clutch of additional figures is presented very effectively as a full human being: Lorena Hickok, Eleanor Roosevelt, Harry Hopkins, Raymond Moley, Herbert Hoover, John L. Lewis, and A. Philip Randolph, among a few others. History for Kennedy, unlike for the other authors of these syntheses, is made by select leaders, not by ordinary people. What is remarkable, therefore, is the illusion of synthesis that is achieved. The book was published in a series that promises narrative syntheses of the defining periods of American national history. Most so far published accept traditional definitions of periods, and they are framed as political history, but none is so severely restricted as this one, which won the Pulitzer Prize in part because it was recognized as a work of grand synthesis. Dramatic changes in the historiography of the American field make it seem anachronistic. Yet its success makes the point that political history in the grand [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 62 David M. Kennedy, Over Here: The First World War and American Society (New York, 1980). The point Kennedy makes about Americans could be turned against his own book, which assumes the same divide he finds among Americans generally. He complains in the text that Americans held tight to "the dangerous illusion that they could choose whether and when [I would add how] to participate in the world." David M. Kennedy, Freedom from Fear: The American People in Depression and War, 1929-1945 (New York, 1999), 386. 63 The only exception I spotted in the footnotes is Lizabeth Cohen, Making a New Deal: Industrial Workers in Chicago, 1919-1939 (New York, 1990). 64 William E. Leuchtenburg, F.D.R. and the New Deal: 1932-1940 (New York, 1963). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 148 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] style, focusing on a few elite figures, can still claim, at least for the general public, to be a narrative history of a people. Fred Anderson's Crucible of War again engages us with the question of elites and ordinary people, and it provides -a promising approach. While Kennedy seems quite confident of the importance of a few leaders, Anderson seems to be ambivalent, and that ambivalence enriches his history. Although I think the principal contribution of Crucible of War to our understanding of the British Empire is grounded in the social history of the political and military experience of ordinary Americans, the dramatic focus, as with Francis Parkman's great nineteenth-century narrative, is on two great leaders of the French and Indian War, the marquis de Montcalm and James Wolfe.65 Yet, as Alan Taylor has insightfully insisted, Anderson has rewritten the story of their confrontation in a way that diminishes these actors, especially Wolfe.66 To be sure, Anderson's book goes beyond Parkman in its respect for Native Americans, their agency, and their role in the empire (and the role of the empire and war for them). He also modifies Parkman on a point that is central to the book's contribution to imperial history: unlike Parkman, Anderson not only notices but makes much of the division between English colonials and English metropolitans. These differences in expectation and experience make the war in his view a "theatre of intercultural interaction."67 Like Butler, Anderson seeks to diminish the role of 1776 in understanding the development of what became the United States. Historians, he argues, will better understand the creation of the United States by closely examining the Seven Years' War and, more generally, by challenging the usual tendency to "take as our point of reference the thirteen rebelling colonies, not the empire as a whole."68 Yet, even as he argues the importance of getting behind the Revolution of 1776 so that one can discover the eighteenth century as it was experienced, the revolution remains a touchstone for him. More than anything else, he wants the reader to recognize that the shots fired in the Seven Years' War were the ones with implications around the world. But he keeps de-historicizing his story to use it to diminish the shot of lesser implication (in his view) heard 'round the world in 1775. When one begins the book, there is a sense of excitement. Here is a history of the United States ready to take the globe as its context. Before the narrative even begins, the reader is presented with a portfolio of maps. Only two of eight describe the British colonies; no more than four of them consider North America at all. The portfolio begins with a world map, revealing the global distribution of the battles that marked the Seven Years' War. There are also maps of the Indian subcontinent, Central Europe, and the Caribbean. The introduction promises a book that will make the world, or at least the full extent of the British Empire, its context and subject. We are told that "if viewed from Montreal or Vincennes, St. Augustine, Havana, Paris or Madrid-or, for that matter Calcutta or Berlin-the Seven Years' War was far more significant than the War of American Independence."69 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 65 Francis Parkman, Montcalm and Wolfe, 6th edn., 2 vols. (Boston, 1885). 66 See Alan Taylor, "The Forgotten War," New Republic (August 14, 2000): 40-45. 67 Fred Anderson, The Crucible of War: The Seven Years' War and the Fate of Empire in British North America, 1754-1766 (New York, 2000), xvi. 68 Anderson, Crucible of War, xv. 69 Anderson, Crucible of War, xvi. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 149 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Yet once the narrative is begun, it immediately narrows. We get very little of Asia (although Manila makes a brief but important comparative appearance), the Caribbean, Africa, and continental Europe. Of course, other European powers are part of the narrative, but they only have walk-on roles. We learn little of them at home or about the ways leaders or ordinary citizens interpret events, while we are, by contrast, led through elaborate accounts of high British politics. The preface, presumably written last, sketches an extraordinary agenda for what would be a stunning book. Unfortunately, Anderson did not write the book he there described. Still, judged in terms of what it did rather than what it proposed to do, it is an outstanding work of craft. It will no doubt be our generation's account of the Seven Years' War. As military history, it is superb, and it contributes importantly-but not so grandly as some of the opening rhetoric promises-to the non-controversial but still unclear issue of the causal relations that connect the Seven Years' War to the coming of the revolution. Anderson in fact offers a rich Anglo-centric narrative that explores and explains the different meaning of the war both as strategic event and as experience for the British of the metropole and in the colonies. It is written with verve and confidence-and a seemingly complete command of the materials, primary and secondary. One of its themes is the misperception of events by political elites; with the exception of William Pitt, surely Anderson's hero in this story, they fail to understand the different meaning of the war and empire for ordinary soldiers and colonial subjects. He thus makes cultural issues the heart of the book. Military and political elites play a dramatic role in the narrative, but causation for Anderson- and here he points to important newer developments in military and diplomatic history-is to be found in the culture of everyday life.70 In making this point, he not only offers an important interpretation of the war (building in part on his previous book on Massachusetts soldiers), he also reveals the empire to be less solid, more a matter of continuous negotiation, than historians often consider such entities, whether empires or nations or states.71 MORE EFFECTIVELY THAN ANDERSON, Ira Berlin, referring to the earliest history of Afro-European North America, and Daniel T. Rodgers, addressing the early twentieth century, incorporate the Atlantic, or at least the North Atlantic, into their narratives of American history. Berlin and Rodgers write very different kinds of history and focus on different periods. Berlin's is a social history, while Rodgers has written an intellectual history, or, perhaps, a history of political culture. Yet both Berlin and Rodgers recognize the complex webs that route movements-of people, of ideas, of money, of things-in the Atlantic world. The transnational terrains that Berlin and Rodgers evoke establish larger and truer frames for national histories than do notions of bounded and self-contained regions or nations. The first section of Berlin's Many Thousands Gone, a portrait of the Atlantic littoral, describes a world framed by cities and the sea, little divided by national [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 70 Anderson, Crucible of War, 453-54. 71 See Fred Anderson, A Peoples' Army: Massachusetts Soldiers and Society in the Seven Years' War (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1984). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 150 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] boundaries, which did not yet organize any of the four Atlantic continents. Berlin's opening tableau describes the emergence of the Atlantic world as an ever- expanding historical terrain, where the African presence is pervasive on the sea and in the cities, including Lisbon, where they made up 10 percent of the population in the sixteenth century. He evokes a world defined by a network of cosmopolitan cities populated by creolized peoples. African people were not only omnipresent, they were often crucial cultural and economic brokers, helping to knit this new world together. Berlin lets go of this powerful frame and image in his later chapters, where he narrows the focus to regional difference within the bounds of British North America. Still, the book's protean beginning remains in the reader's mind, inviting others to realize its narrative logic and moral meaning.72 In Atlantic Crossings: Social Politics in a Progressive Age (1998), Daniel T. Rodgers also achieves a richer historicism by expanding the space of analysis. One small indication is in the subtitle. He refers to "social politics," not the more usual "welfare state." His approach, examining relations in space as well as over time as fields of contingency, makes the welfare state a problematic common term. When he uses the more general and more mobile term "social politics," he effectively historicizes the concept, lineage, and practice of the welfare state. The development of a social politics has other possible paths and outcomes besides evolution into the national welfare state.73 The national welfare state thus becomes a historically and place-specific invention rather than a universal or, worse, the teleological endpoint of American liberal narratives-an endpoint surely upended by the politics of the last quarter of the twentieth century. Following the pioneering work of James T. Kloppenberg, who also assumed a Euro-American context for progressivism and social democracy, Rodgers ap- proaches this age of reform as at once a transnational and national issue.74 A variety of reforms-from urban planning to social insurance to regulation of capitalism- are examined as products both of general, transnational ideas and of particular, national political cultures. The complex narratives thus developed by Rodgers and Kloppenberg-ones that recognize, especially in the case of Rodgers, the historicity of the balance between national and transnational-are a major advance in the narrative synthesis of a national history. Both Rodgers and Kloppenberg impress on the reader that ideas could cross the Atlantic in either direction. This is salutary; American intellectual history is too often thought by Europeans and Americans as well to be either insignificant or derivative, not quite up to equal participation in an international world of ideas. This common point is handled differently in each book. While Kloppenberg notes [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 72 One hopes this extension of the historiographical terrain will continue and that connections as well as comparisons will be made between the North Atlantic and the South Atlantic and between the Atlantic slave trade and the slave trade that turned to the east, to the Muslim empires of the Mediterranean and today's Middle East. Big as it is, the Atlantic does not capture the logic and dimensions of slavery in this era. 73 See, for example, the argument (somewhat dependent on Rodgers's work) in Thomas Bender, "Cities, Intellectuals, and Citizenship in the United States: The 1890s and 1990s," Citizenship Studies 3 (1999): 203-20. 74 Daniel T. Rodgers, Atlantic Crossings: Social Politics in a Progressive Age (Cambridge, Mass., 1998); James T. Kloppenberg, Uncertain Victory: Social Democracy and Progressivism in European and American Thought, 1870-1920 (New York, 1986). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 151 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] direct interaction, he seems more interested in demonstrating a homological relation or a kind of convergence. Rodgers, by contrast, focuses on the specific transit of ideas and emphasizes the way intellectuals and reformers on either side of the Atlantic drew selectively on these ideas, depending on personal taste and local circumstance. The result is a fundamental and valuable reorientation of the way we might understand intellectual history. The conceptual opening they have created invites a yet more radical under- standing of the territory and movement of ideas. Let me go back to the title of Rodgers's book. I think that "Atlantic Crossings" projects too narrow an under- standing of the implications of the book. It emphasizes the movement of people and ideas back and forth across the Atlantic. To that extent, it recalls a much older Anglo-American historiography of "trans-Atlantic influences."75 Rodgers goes well beyond this historiography in showing that, in important respects, Europe was partly Americanized and the United States was partly Europeanized by the phenomena he describes. But his really important accomplishment is to get away from the "influence" model, to displace the linear A to B notion of intellectual history. But he could have gone farther yet. There is more to the circulation of ideas than this framing recognizes. It is more than an Atlantic crossing, more than a link between Western Europe and the United States. The whole Atlantic, South Atlantic as well as North Atlantic, and, indeed, increasingly, parts of the Pacific world better describe the extent of the intellectual network his book evokes. In regard to urban development and reform, an important theme in Rodgers's book, it is clear that there is a global conversation at work. Rather than the linearity of steamship crossings (the dustjacket illustration) between the port cities of Western Europe and New York, I imagine a Great Bazaar of urban ideas, technology, and aesthetics hovering over the Atlantic, with many traders and buyers. This exchange is not, of course, symmetrical, and that itself is an issue, but participation was nearly global in 1900. Progressive ideas, especially those dealing with urban reform and technologies, traveled through many circuits and with different voltage, but nearly the whole world was connected, not only Western Europe and the United States. Simply look at the cities of Eastern Europe, Latin America, parts of Africa, Central and East Asia. Surely, they were part of an international conception of urbanism-and of urban commercial culture. The remnants of the era make it clear that New York and Chicago, no less than Lyons, Cairo, Buenos Aires, or Shanghai, were local instances of a global process of city-making. THESE LAST COMMENTS SUGGEST what I take to be the next challenge of narrative synthesis. But before I conclude, let me briefly review what has been accomplished by the cohort of synthetic histories considered here. These books reveal, even verify, the capacity of narrative synthesis to achieve inclusion and to respect issues of identity. Moreover, it seems possible in synthetic narratives to combine structure [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 75 See Frank Thistlethwaite, The Anglo-American Connection in the Early Nineteenth Century (Philadelphia, 1959). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 152 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] and agency and to consider causal explanation without sacrificing the explication of subjective meaning-and vice versa. The volumes here examined reveal many narrative strategies and quite different relations to a wider reading public. There is no single model, and no one volume (yet) does all the things we might fairly expect in a realized synthesis. In addition, these books, both in what they do and do not do, suggest to me the value of embracing a narrative core that is a more explicit and deeper exploration of democracy and difference, freedom and empowerment, contest and justice. Such a focus promises a sharper analytical history, one more historical and less susceptible to teleology, whether of modernity or anything else. It seems plausible to propose that a wider canvas, a supranational context, may in fact enhance the examination of these issues. The work of Hine and Faragher, Berlin, Gordon, and Rodgers in particular enables one to imagine an even more radical synthesis of national history, one that operates on multiple geographical scales, from narratives smaller than the nation to supra-national ones-thus identifying the nation as a product of history as well as an object of historical inquiry. Such a framing of national history will increase awareness of the complexity of the multiple axes of historical interaction, causation, and identity formation. While I mean these concluding comments to suggest an ambitious new agenda for the discipline, we must not overlook an already existing and compelling example. Decades ago, David Brion Davis embarked on a multivolume history that considered all these issues. He brought them together in his majestic synthesis that explores slavery and freedom in the Atlantic world, a history of nearly global reach that is also-and I emphasize this fact-a history of the United States.76 My point, then, is that such histories can be written, have been written, and I trust that more will yet be written. The present moment seems especially propitious for such histories. The relation of the nation to both subnational and transnational solidarities is very much in question. It is a public concern as well as an object of interdisciplinary scholarly inquiry. Historians surely have an open invitation to rethink the boundaries of national histories.77 Colonial historians have been moving in this direction for some time, redefining their field as the Atlantic world long before the globalization talk. Likewise, Rodgers and Ian Tyrrell, both of whom work on the modern period, moved in this direction fairly early and for a different reason: their concern about the claims of American exceptionalism.78 With these various concerns at work, we may fairly expect a movement of American historians and other historians as well toward a wider sense of their fields. National histories will not be so firmly bounded, and the assumption of their national autarky will be softened by the recognition that national histories are [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 76 David Brion Davis, The Problem of Slavery in Western Culture (Ithaca, N.Y., 1966); The Problem of Slavery in the Age of Revolution, 1770-1823 (Ithaca, 1975), with the final installment yet to come. 77 See Bender, Rethinking American History in a Global Age; and Thomas Bender, The La Pietra Report (Bloomington, Ind., 2000), also available on the World Wide Web at www.oah.org/activities/ lapietra/index.html. 78 Ian Tyrrell, "American Exceptionalism in an Age of International History," AHR 96 (October 1991): 1031-55; Daniel T. Rodgers, "Exceptionalism," in Anthony Molho and Gordon S. Wood, eds., Imagined Histories: American Historians Interpret the Past (Princeton, N.J., 1998), 21-40. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 153 embedded in yet larger histories. And all of this will demand yet more ambitious strategies of narrative synthesis. Thomas Bender is University Professor of the Humanities and Professor of History at New York University. His scholarship has been in the broad domain of cultural history, particularly studies of cities, intellectuals, and, most recently, the history of scholarly disciplines. His books on these themes include Toward an Urban Vision (1975), New York Intellect (1987), and Intellect and Public Life (1993), as well as The Unfinished City: New York and the Metropol- itan Idea (forthcoming). He has a longstanding interest in the larger framings of American history that dates from his Community and Social Change in America (1978) and continued in his article "Wholes and Parts: The Need for Synthesis in American History," Journal of American History (1986), which provides the starting point for this essay. His thinking on this topic also derives in part from his work on the OAH-NYU project that resulted in the La Pietra Report (2000), which he authored, and Rethinking American History in a Global Age (2002), which he edited. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/532101

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587015
Date: April 2003
Author(s): Elbourne Elizabeth
Abstract: [[START 03X0760F]] Review Essays Word Made Flesh: Christianity, Modernity, and Cultural Colonialism in the Work of Jean and John Comaroff ELIZABETH ELBOURNE "IN THE BEGINNING WAS THE WORD, and the word was made flesh and dwelt among us," as the first chapter of the Book of John proclaims in a text often read at Christian Easter celebrations. The text might be taken as a something of a leitmotif of the first two volumes (of a projected three) of Jean and John Comaroff's brilliant and rightly influential series, Of Revelation and Revolution.1 The first two volumes, Christianity, Colonialism, and Consciousness in South Africa and The Dialectics of Modernity on a South African Frontier, explore the nineteenth-century encounter between British Protestant Nonconformist missionaries and the southern Tswana in a region that is now in the northern part of the Republic of South Africa. The Comaroffs attempt, however, to do far more than merely describe a series of relatively small-scale historical events. They are interested in missionaries above all because of their complex relationship to "modernity," which the Comaroffs see in turn as tightly linked to a particular phase of European colonialism. The title of the second volume, "The Dialectics of Modernity," suggests as much. Most European missionaries tried hard to function as agents of cultural change-of "civilization" in early nineteenth-century missionaries' own terms, implicitly casting the Tswana as "savage" and thereby laying out one of the key dialectical oppositions of colonial- ism, which would function as a justification for dispossession. Some Tswana interlocutors adapted some elements of "Christian behavior," the Comaroffs argue, but many others demonstrated resistance to the hegemony of British colonialism in part by resisting the colonization of their everyday lives. The nineteenth-century Protestant project to remake the world, of which the Nonconformist missionaries of southern Africa were important proponents, is thus linked by the Comaroffs forward to colonialism and to contemporary globalization, and backward in time to Part of this article was presented in a much earlier version at the Twentieth Anniversary Conference of the Journal of Southern African Studies, York, 1994; I would like to thank the participants as well as those who subsequently commented helpfully, including David Maxwell, Norman Etherington, Ed Wilmsen, and Paul Landau. For reading the current essay, my particular thanks to Catherine Desbarats, Eric Jabbari, James Ron, and Michael Wasser, as well as to Tim Rowse, Desley Deacon, Ann Curthoys, and John Docker for helpful suggestions. I am of course solely responsible for the content. The research for this essay was supported by the Social Sciences and Humanities Research Council of Canada. 1 Jean Comaroff and John L. Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, Vol. 1: Christianity, Colonialism, and Consciousness in South Africa (Chicago, 1991), and Vol. 2: The Dialectics of Modernity on a South African Frontier (Chicago, 1997). 435 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne the emergence of capitalism. Missionaries were, in effect, agents of a first wave of globalization. The missionary movement was an early exemplar of a transnational global movement, while the intellectual claims of missionaries to universality paralleled the modernist claims of a globalizing colonialism. The struggles over the texture and composition of everyday life that took place on the frontiers of colonial society in nineteenth-century southern Africa therefore tell us something not only about the nature of colonialism but also about modernity and its considerable discontents, as well as about the resistance of the colonized to the European colonial project. In this sense, a quest for origins informs the narrative structure of both books.2 Indeed, one of the reasons that this seminal text engages us so closely is its concern with the narrative of dispossession and resistance, with a beginning and therefore, implicitly, some hope for an end-an only ambivalently postmodern narrative, in fact, despite some alarm in southern Africanist circles over Of Revelation and Revolution as a postmodern nail in the coffin of materialist history.3 This focus lends moral urgency to the Comaroffs' consideration of the distant initial encounters between white missionaries and the southern Tswana in the early nineteenth century. Volume 2, for example, opens with a striking vignette: Tswana soldiers refuse to defend the white regime in 1994, as Afrikaner patriots launch a last-ditch raid on Bophuthatswana. As homeland structures crumble around them as they write, the Comaroffs acknowledge that endings and beginnings are never entirely neat. "And yet in many respects, the narrative of Tswana colonization had completed itself, finally running its course from Revelation to Revolution."4 Doubtless the authors would now adopt a less utopian position, but their enthusiasm for revolution and for endings is important, and typical of South African historical writing from the decades before the end of apartheid.5 2 Catherine Desbarats, "Essais sur quelques elements de l'6criture de l'histoire am6rindienne," Revue d'histoire de l'Ameriquefranqaise 53, no. 4 (Spring 2000): 491-520, provides an interesting model, inspired among others by Paul Ricoeur, Hayden White, and Kerwin Lee Klein, for the reading of various historical approaches to the colonial encounter as forms of narrative romance, given the inescapable narrativity of the historical text. Susan Newton-King, also drawing on Ricoeur, similarly reflects on the inescapable imposition of an artificial order on colonial encounters by the historian of colonialism. Newton-King, "Introduction," Masters and Servants on the Cape Eastern Frontier, 1760- 1803 (Cambridge, 1999). See also Kerwin Lee Klein, Frontiers of Historical Imagination: Narrating the European Conquest of Native America, 1890-1990 (Berkeley, Calif., 1997); Hayden White, The Content of the Form: Narrative Discourse and Historical Representation (Baltimore, 1987); Paul Ricoeur, Temps et recit, 3 vols. (Paris, 1985-87). 3 Meghan Vaughan, "Colonial Discourse Theory and African History, or Has Postmodernism Passed Us By?" Social Dynamics 20, no. 2 (Summer 1994): 1-23; David Bunn, "The Insistence of Theory: Three Questions for Meghan Vaughan," Social Dynamics 20, no. 2: 24-34; Clifton Crais, "South Africa and the Pitfalls of Postmodern," South African Historical Journal, no. 31 (1994): 274-79; Leon de Kock, "For and Against the Comaroffs: Postmodernist Puffery and Competing Conceptions of the 'Archive,'" South African Historical Journal, no. 31: 280-89. These authors take a variety of positions on the issues of whether or not the Comaroffs are postmodern and whether or not the rise of postmodernism in post-apartheid South African academic historical scholarship has been a positive development in a field that was previously (and in many ways still is) passionately materialist in approach. 4 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: xiii. 5 The original title of the series was reportedly From Revelation to Revolution, planned at a time before the release of Nelson Mandela. In a recent conversation with Homi Bhabha, however, John Comaroff is considerably less sanguine about the end of apartheid in South Africa and popular enthusiasm for Mandela outside South Africa, which he sees as a last gasp of modernist optimism in AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 436 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh In a similar vein, at the heart of Volume 1 is a crucial chapter, "Through the Looking Glass: Heroic Journeys, First Encounters." This chapter sets out to explore "the initial meeting of two worlds, one imperial and expansive, the other local and defensive."6 In marvelously evocative detail, the authors describe the initial entry of envoys of the London Missionary Society (LMS) in 1816 into the Tswana capital, Dithakong (seen by the missionaries themselves as a sacred journey into the land of Satan), a subsequent meeting, and the complex negotiations that took place throughout over the terms of the mission. A key metaphor is furnished by the mirror that the LMS envoy John Campbell presented as a gift to the Tswana chief, Mothibi, symbolizing the Western effort to reconfigure Tswana consciousness and the Tswana notion of the self. These initial encounters prefigured the colonial encounter to come: "the square enclosure and all that 'took place' at the center of the most public of Tswana spaces was ominous, foreshadowing a methodical reconstruction of their symbolic map."7 The Christian missionary project, this chapter further suggests, was from the start central to the creation of the dialectical oppositions of colonialism, ironic in view of its claim to erase difference. For the Comaroffs, the colonization of the Tswana thus began (although it certainly did not end) with the word, in the sense both of Bible and of cultural text, with the advent of white Protestant missionaries and their claims to possess the revealed divine word-albeit a word made flesh, clothed in material power. The roots of colonization were in a series of knowledge claims and a set of hegemonic cultural discourses, which would bolster the later seizure of land and of labor. Many scholars have explored the linkage between knowledge claims and colonial power, an issue that has long lain at the heart of postcolonial scholarship and that occupies an increasingly central place in the study of imperialism from a diversity of perspectives.8 Nonetheless, Of Revelation and Revolution furnishes a particularly influential and important statement of the position, in part because it provides a great deal of flesh on the bones of a theoretical model of cultural colonialism. The work moves from the field of discourse alone to examine in great detail concrete material struggles over the remaking of everyday life, including Tswana efforts to resist cultural colonialism. More controversially, perhaps, Of Revelation and Revolution also attempts to make explicit the links in southern Africa between a postcolonial setting. Homi Bhabha and John Comaroff, "Speaking of Postcoloniality, in the Continuous Present: A Conversation," in David Theo Goldberg and Ato Quayson, eds., Relocating Postcolonialism (Oxford, 2002). 6 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 171. 7 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 182. 8 Among many recent discussions of colonialism and European knowledge claims, see Ato Quayson and David Theo Goldberg, "Introduction: Scale and Sensibility," and Benita Parry, "Directions and Dead Ends in Postcolonial Studies," in Goldberg and Quayson, Relocating Postcolo- nialism, xi-xxii and 66-81; Michael Adas, "From Settler Colony to Global Hegemon: Integrating the Exceptionalist Narrative of the American Experience into World History," AHR 106 (December 2001): 1692-1720; various essays in Catherine Hall, ed., Cultures of Empire: Colonizers in Britain and the Empire in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries (Manchester, 2000); Gyan Prakash, "Who's Afraid of Postcoloniality?" Social Text 49 (Winter 1996): 187-203; Prakash, "Subaltern Studies as Postcolonial Criticism," AHR 99 (December 1994): 1475-90. On the reconfiguration of African history, see Frederick Cooper, "Conflict and Connection: Rethinking Colonial African History," AHR 99: 1516-45. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 437 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne political, economic, and cultural colonialism-fields the authors argue are in any case impossible to disaggregate.9 The programmatic claims that lend Of Revelation and Revolution its force also, however, cause some interesting tensions in the book. The need to make linkages and the Comaroffs' explicit commitment to the exploration of large-scale processes lead the authors to oversimplify in places. Not only that, but the imperatives of a dialectical method push the Comaroffs at times (despite their parallel stress on indeterminacy and their very explicit engagement with the costs and benefits of a dialectical analysis, especially in Volume 2) into tighter methodological corners than they might themselves like. The links between early nineteenth-century cultural colonialism and late nineteenth-century political colonialism are not as direct or as ontologically indissoluble as the Comaroffs assume they are, while the relationship of "modernity" to colonialism furnishes matter for debate, with considerable contemporary implications. The very boldness of the Comaroffs' arguments has indeed contributed to a mixed reception among scholars of southern African history and of religion in Africa, with some enthusiastically welcoming the methodological innovation of the Comaroffs and others casting doubt in a number of ways. In the second volume of the series, the Comaroffs seem to me to have backed down somewhat from some of their bolder claims, despite their spirited engagement with the critics. This in itself provides an interesting case study of the evolution of ideas during a turbulent decade in South African history. In what follows, I would like to engage with this important work in several ways. First, I want to lay out my understanding of the theoretical guidelines in the opening volume, with particular attention to the issue of hegemony and power. Second, I want to provide an alternate reading of the opening encounters between Tswana and missionary, focusing on other intermediaries and on the fact that, even before the advent of European missionaries, the region was already affected by colonialism. I shall use this example to ask whether a dialectic model does not in some ways oversimplify complicated situations and make it hard to account for fudging across the fault lines. I shall further ask whether the result is not a rather muted account of individual agency and an attenuated depiction of the multiple uses of mission Christianity, both as language and as practice. This is not, however, to deny the latent authoritarian potential of much missionary activity, particularly in a colonial context. Third, I also want to gesture, albeit sketchily, toward some issues associated with narrative and chronology, suggesting that the schematic narrative about "modernity," industrialization, and globalization that undergirds both volumes, though provocative and important, also offers a number of hostages to fortune. These include an undue stress on the capacity of missionaries to induct converts into the global economy by changing their consciousness; rather, I see converts struggling to adapt to an overpowering global economy, among other things by trying to use Christianity in a variety of ways, with greater or lesser degrees of success. Having said all that, does this fact-mongering matter?-What are the Comaroffs doing that might go beyond reading the content of particular 9 Colonialism was simultaneously a "process in political economy and culture," and these dimensions were "indissoluble aspects of the same reality, whose fragmentation into discrete spheres hides their ontological unity." Comarofff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 19. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 438 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh archives? Throughout, I want to take up some concerns of African historians and anthropologists with questions of narrative, voice, and agency in Of Revelation and Revolution. THE INITIAL CHAPTER OF THE FIRST VOLUME is a careful theoretical exposition. Although the authors rather cheerfully direct those with little stomach for theoretical discussions to skip theirs and, en bon bricoleur, to pick up the narrative at a later point, the opening discussion of anthropological concepts is in fact crucial for an understanding of what both this book and its later companion seek to accomplish. I would accordingly like to pause upon it. The stated goal of the work is to present an anthropology of the "colonial encounter," in this case between British Nonconformist missionaries and the southern Tswana, with the larger implication that the missionaries acted as the cultural arm of colonialism, while the dilemmas of the Tswana in their confrontations with colonialism mirrored, if they obviously did not precisely reproduce, the experience of other colonized African groups in South Africa. The Comaroffs state that they hope that their discussion of this particular mission will accomplish three other things: to anticipate later modes of consciousness and struggle in South Africa; to look at an example of historical processes that were happening across Africa and indeed much of the non-Western world; and to examine analytic issues to do with the "nature of power and resistance." With reference to this latter objective: How, precisely, were structures of inequality fashioned during the colonial encounter, often in the absence of more conventional, more coercive tools of domination? How was consciousness made and remade in this process? ... How were new hegemonies established and the "ground prepared," in [Antonio] Gramsci's phrase, for formal European political control? ... Even more fundamentally, how are we to understand the dialectics of culture and power, ideology and consciousness that shape such historical processes?'1 From the vantage point of 1991, the Comaroffs placed their project into a historiographical framework that has since changed considerably, in no small part due to their own work."1 At the time, the Comaroffs castigated anthropologists for 10 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 6. 11 Among many possibilities, some works of particular importance to southern Africa include Paul Stuart Landau, The Realm of the Word: Language, Gender and Christianity in a Southern African Kingdom (London, 1995); Henry Bredekamp and Robert Ross, eds., Missions and Christianity in South African History (Johannesburg, 1995); Pier M. Larson, "'Capacities and Modes of Thinking': Intellectual Engagements and Subaltern Hegemony in the Early History of Malagasy Christianity," AHR 102 (October 1997): 969-1002; Richard Elphick and Rodney Davenport, eds., Christianity in South Africa: A Political, Social, and Cultural History (Berkeley, Calif., 1997); and many other works discussed in David Chidester, Judy Tobler, and Darrel Wratten, Christianity in South Africa: An Annotated Bibliography (Westport, Conn., 1997). The sheer diversity of recent approaches to the history of mission Christianity, a growth field, is impossible to capture in a footnote but is suggested by works such as David Maxwell and Ingrid Lawrie, eds., Christianity and the African Imagination: Essays in Honour of Adrian Hastings (Leiden, 2001); Nicholas Thomas, "Colonial Conversions: Difference, Hierarchy and History in Early Twentieth-Century Evangelical Propaganda," in Hall, Cultures of Empire; Susan Thorne, Congregational Missions and the Making of an Imperial Culture in Nineteenth- Century England (Stanford, Calif., 1999); Peter van der Veer, ed., Conversion to Moderities: The Globalization of Christianity (London, 1996); Robert W. Hefner, ed., Conversion to Christianity: Historical and Anthropological Perspectives on a Great Transformation (Berkeley, 1993); Lamin Sanneh, AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 439 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne neglecting both the study of colonialism and, more broadly, history itself. Historians paid more attention to missions but in the 1960s and 1970s often focused on the theoretically crude question of "whose side were the missionaries really on?" By the 1980s, mission history had been more fruitfully incorporated into work on such long-term processes as colonial conquest, capitalist expansion, state formation, and proletarianization. The methodological innovation of the Comaroffs in the early 1990s was, however, to underscore how much this new approach was itself limited by its "preoccupation with political economy at the expense of culture, symbolism, and ideology."12 They echoed the 1986 claim of Terence Ranger that most of the historiography of early missions to that point had overestimated the political and economic factors in its expansion-in a manner, according to the Comaroffs, stemming ultimately from oppositions between mind and matter at the ontological roots of our social thought.13 In rejecting a narrowly political-economic approach, the authors believed they could better answer the questions of why it was that missionaries succeeded in effecting broad social, political, and economic changes without substantial material resources (a question that, of course, assumes that this was accomplished by missionaries). What was needed, the Comaroffs claimed, was a study of consciousness: of why people articulated belief in certain things, why they took others for granted, how colonialism and consciousness were inextricably intertwined. It is in this sense that missionaries were most clearly colonial agents: they sought to remake the lifeworld of the Tswana, indeed, to colonize their consciousness. They did not necessarily seek directly and simplistically to incorpo- rate the Tswana into an unequal colonial world: they had dreamed instead of a "global democracy of material well-being and moral merit," in the Comaroffs' phrase.14 Nonetheless, their actions contributed to building an empire of inequality. This claim rests on the additional argument that the missionaries were the products of post-Enlightenment modernity, creations and agents of rationalization in the Weberian sense. Similarly, Tswana interlocutors made a variety of unexpected uses of the evangelical message, and of evangelical attempts to remake their world, again with unpredictable results. In sum, the encounter between colonial evangelism and the southern Tswana can best be described as a "long conversation," a continuing process in the course of which "signifiers were set afloat, fought over, and recaptured on both sides of the colonial encounter."15 Over the course of this conversation, the Tswana came to conceive of themselves as constituting a separate, Translating the Message: The Missionary Impact on Culture (Maryknoll, N.Y., 1989); and V. Y. Mudimbe, The Invention of Africa: Gnosis, Philosophy, and the Order of Knowledge (Bloomington, Ind., 1988). The Currents in World Christianity Project, at the University of Cambridge, has also since 1996 lent considerable impetus to the scholarly study of missions. A longstanding African literature reconsiders missions and the truth claims of missionaries, often from a theological perspective: for example, J. N. K. Mugambi, From Liberation to Reconstruction: African Christian Theology after the Cold War (Nairobi, 1996). Many works by African scholars are less well distributed in the West than they might be, given material constraints. From a wide variety of directions, missionary activity has become a newly invigorated area of research since the 1990s, although some of the more difficult underlying issues are perhaps not adequately discussed in all the literature. 12 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 8. 13 Terence Ranger, "Religious Movements and Politics in Sub-Saharan Africa," African Studies Review 29 (1986): 1-69. 14 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 12. 15 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 17-18. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 440 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh reified entity, with a set of "Tswana" customs, or setswana. At the same time, the "forms" of the "European worldview" became inscribed on the "African land- scape": "not only did colonialism produce reified cultural orders, it gave rise to a new hegemony amidst-and despite-cultural contestation."16 Throughout this discussion, the Comaroffs reject the poststructuralist claim that all meanings are equally tenuous and open to contestation, regretting the episte- mological hypochondria and consequent intellectual immobility to which postmod- ern critiques have given rise in academia-even as the authors uphold some of the central insights of such critiques, notably their insistence that the indeterminacies of meaning and action be addressed by scholars.17 What poststructuralists cannot address is the basic question of how some meanings get widely accepted over significant periods of time by those against whose interest it is to believe them. This is the problem of hegemony, raised by Gramsci (however sketchy his discussion in the Prison Notebooks) and developed by many social theorists.18 The Comaroffs offer a solution, though over-schematic in the literal sense of the word. They see human consciousness as existing on a spectrum from "hegemony" to "ideology." At the hegemony end of the spectrum, one finds the taken-for-granted inscribed in everyday life-those beliefs that are not questioned because they are not even noticed as beliefs. At the other end, one finds articulated ideology, which is available for debate and which often tries to bring into consciousness the hegemonic beliefs of earlier stages. Culture in general is the "space of signifying practice, the semantic ground on which human beings seek to construct and represent themselves and others-and hence, society and history."l9 Somewhat oddly, hegemonic concepts are described as "constructs and conventions that have come to be shared and naturalized through a political community," while ideology is "the expression and ultimately the possession of a particular social group, although it may be widely peddled beyond."20 This psychological structure seems artificial and unwieldy; it is unclear why the province of the hegemonic idea should be the political community (a tricky concept to define in any case), while ideology is described not only as the product of communities (rather than at least sometimes of individuals) but as the province of the social rather than, say, political or even self-consciously intellectual groupings. The definition of the political is murky here, as it is throughout the book, despite (even sometimes because of) the painstaking effort of the authors to demonstrate the deeply political nature of the everyday stuff of life; what is lacking here and elsewhere is a willingness to limit and define the nature of the political in such a manner as to make it meaningful to call something political in the first place. Be that as it may, this construction of group political psychology permits the Comaroffs to draw conclusions that are critically important for their overall project. Indeed, the reconstruction of struggles over the stuff of everyday life that takes pride of place in the second volume depends ultimately on this theoretical 16 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 18. 17 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 17. 18 Antonio Gramsci, Selections from the Prison Notebooks of Antonio Gramsci, Quentin Hoare and Geoffrey Nowell-Smith, trans. (New York, 1991). 19 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 21. 20 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 24, my emphases. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 441 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elboume structure. Given the place of hegemony and ideology on an ever-changing spectrum, the two are constantly fluid; meanings are always being made and remade, as ideology challenges hegemony to reveal itself, and it is in the inchoate, fluid space between hegemony and ideology that human consciousness is at its most creative. Given that hegemony is constructed largely through the "assertion of control over various modes of symbolic production: over such things as educational and ritual processes, patterns of socialization, political and legal procedures, canons of style and self-representation, public communication, health and bodily discipline and so on," the realm of "symbolic production" is (presumably) political because it is a site for power struggles. This means both that the "symbolic production" is political and that resistance to modes of symbolic production that generate hegemony is political. Modes of resistance run across as wide a spectrum as modes of control, with at one end organized protest and other movements readily recognized as political by the West; at the other end are "gestures of tacit refusal and iconoclasms, gestures that sullenly and silently contest the forms of an existing hegemony."21 It is thus in this light that missions must be seen. They sought to extend hegemonic control over indigenous peoples by changing their worldviews to a point that new ways of behaving and seeing the world were completely internalized. Resistance to the specific forms of Christianity was also resistance to the message behind the signs. In the purest sense, resistance to Christian forms was resistance to the content of capitalism and to the global capitalist system; this is indeed a critical plank of Jean Comaroff's fascinating (if not uncontroversial) reading of African independent churches as quintessentially subversive because they appropriated and yet subverted Christian forms, in her important 1985 study Body of Power, Spirit of Resistance.22 Christian missions must also be re-read. Their gestures and ritual must be analyzed in order to see how missionaries were attempting to change far more than religious allegiance, acting as emissaries of modernity and economic transfor- mation. Finally, conversion was inextricably political, and as such a suitable site for political competition between colonizers and the colonized. The extremely rich remainder of this book and its successor volume work out the implications of these theoretical positions through a quite brilliant analysis of the nineteenth-century "colonial exchange" between the southern Tswana and the Nonconformist missions to them run first by the London Missionary Society (pioneers in the field) and then by their later-arriving brethren, the Wesleyan Methodist Missionary Society. An additional important project of the authors throughout this study is to demonstrate the importance of an imagined Africa to the British sense of themselves and more broadly to the construction of modernity. As the Comaroffs argue in Volume 2, as part of a series of seven propositions about colonialism, "colonialism was as much involved in making the metropole, and the identities and ideologies of colonizers, as it was in (re)making peripheries and colonial sub- 21 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 31. 22 Jean Comaroff, Body of Power, Spirit of Resistance: The Culture and History of a South African People (Chicago, 1985). Contrast J. M. Schoffeleers, "Ritual Healing and Political Acquiescence: The Case of the Zionist Churches in Southern Africa," Africa 61, no. 1 (1991): 1-25. Schoffeleers sees Zionist healing churches as not necessarily subversive of the established order and sometimes supportive of it. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 442 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh jects."23 In particular, in developing the theme of Africa as a "negative trope in the language of modernity" in Volume 1, the Comaroffs were among the most influential of scholars to introduce into the history of missionary activity in South Africa the postcolonialist concern with the construction of the colonial or minority "other" as a means for self-construction on the part of the person doing the defining.24 Despite their influence on many literary scholars, in Volume 2 the Comaroffs ironically confess themselves "uneasy with most literary critical ap- proaches to colonialism," eschew a vulgar Hegelian approach, and stress that they prefer to focus on "selves" and "others" in the plural; we shall return to this issue. A final critical point is that the authors see the interaction between missionary and Tswana as a form of dialectic between two key groups of interlocutors, dependent on the notion of difference. In the second volume, the Comaroffs acknowledge with more force than in Volume 1 the existence of overlap on the ground, and they reemphasize that the idea of difference was created by the dialectical process, despite some merging of lifeways on the ground and the mutual influence of Tswana and British. Note their comment that "neither 'the colonizer' nor 'the colonized' represented an undifferentiated sociological or political reality, save in exceptional circumstances."25 Since the end product of the colonial encounter was so clearly the production of difference and a series of deeply embedded dialectical oppositions, the Comaroffs nonetheless argue that this is the most productive optic through which to view the early nineteenth-century encounter between European mission- aries and Africans. This model is furthermore essential to their theoretical account of the formation of hegemony. ONE OF THE THINGS I HAVE FOUND MOST PERPLEXING about the work of the Comaroffs is, nevertheless, the question of the extent to which it is appropriate to describe the Tswana encounter with Christianity as a form of dialectic. This question implies the ancillary question of who the agents of the dialectic were at given moments. On the face of it, these are tendentious concerns, since colonialism was so clearly in many ways a dialectic between colonized and colonizer, just as colonialism clearly generated reified views of colonizer and colonized alike. Missionaries themselves usually understood their activities in dialectical terms. Yet I think one can ask whether a dialectical approach to the history of Christianity in colonial contexts 23 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 22. 24 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 86. Those influenced by the Comaroffs in this respect include David Chidester, Savage Systems: Colonialism and Comparative Religion in Southern Africa (Charlottesville, Va., 1996); Leon de Kock, Civilising Barbarians: Missionary Narrative and African Textual Response in Nineteenth-Century South Africa (Johannesburg, 1996); Doug Stuart, "'Of Savages and Heroes': Discourses of Race, Nation and Gender in the Evangelical Missions to Southern Africa in the Early Nineteenth Century" (PhD dissertation, Institute of Commonwealth Studies, University of London, 1994). This approach of course represents the concerns of many scholars of the British Empire and the related construction of British identity. Edward W. Said, Orientalism (New York, 1978; 2d edn., 1996); Henry L. Gates, ed., Race, Writing and Difference (Chicago, 1986); Mary Louise Pratt, Imperial Eyes: Travel Writing and Transculturation (London, 1992); Linda Colley, Britons: Forging the Nation (New Haven, Conn., 1992); Ann Stoler and Frederick Cooper, eds., Tensions of Empire: Colonial Cultures in a Bourgeois World (Berkeley, Calif., 1997), including Stoler and Cooper, "Rethinking a Research Agenda." 25 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 24. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 443 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne does not fail to capture some aspects of social and political reality. This is above all because of the rapidity with which Christianity was out of the hands of the missionaries and settlers who brought it, the corresponding importance of non- Europeans in the spread of Christianity, the multiplicity of uses to which diverse interest groups of all ethnicities put Christianity as both a language and a practice, and the political and cultural complications of regions with multiple power players. These issues are brought out by a re-reading of the opening encounters between missionaries and Tswana that occupy so key a role in the first volume of Of Revelation and Revolution. I should add that I made similar comments about the opening phases of the mission in an unpublished conference paper after the publication of Volume 1. The Comaroffs respond generously to this paper in Volume 2, as they do to a number of other critics, using the occasion to clarify and amplify their understanding of a dialectical approach. I do not want to beat a dead horse. Nonetheless, I think there are some useful differences of interpretation at stake, and so will abuse the Comaroffs' patience by briefly recapitulating a potential alternate reading of these opening gambits, before returning to the wider issue of different approaches to mission history.26 Let me first make a comment about regional issues. The lands of the southern Tswana were disrupted by colonialism, drought, hunger, and regional conflict well before the formal advent of missions. Furthermore, as Johannes du Bruyn has underscored, the lands inhabited by the southern Tswana were so profoundly affected by the Cape Colony to the south that it is problematic to frame a discussion of cultural colonialism primarily in terms of Europe and the Transvaal. In particular, the colonial firearms frontier moved with great speed, was highly destructive, and was arguably more important earlier than the Comaroffs suggest. Many different armed bands, some of them ethnically mixed, decimated peaceful groups in conflict situations exacerbated by hunger.27 Arguments about the regional context for evangelical missions to the Tswana are also implicit in a much wider body of literature about the so-called mfecane (or difaqane)-terms that have been much disputed by historians. Traditionally, the mfecane was a term given to the widespread wars, famines, and refugee movements that shook (and temporarily depopulated) much of the interior of southern Africa in the early nineteenth century, the impact of which on the Tswana the Comaroffs date from 1822. There is no space here to explore that debate, although it will be helpful to know that a 26 My re-reading of the opening encounter is based on my own work on LMS archives, which I consulted primarily with the aim of writing about contestation over the uses of Christianity within the Cape Colony and with a focus on Khoesan not Tswana uses of Christianity. It seems to me fruitful, however, to unite diverse perspectives on a very complex subject. Elizabeth Elbourne, Blood Ground: Colonialism, Missions and the Contest for Christianity in the Cape Colony and Britain, 1799-1853 (Montreal, 2002). There were four LMS delegations to the Tswana to establish a mission, not two as the Comaroffs have it. 27 Johannes du Bruyn, "Of Muffled Tswana and Overwhelming Missionaries: The Comaroffs and the Colonial Encounter," South African Historical Journal, no. 31 (1994): 294-309; Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 275-76. On Tswana views of the firearms frontier, see Robert Moffat to Richard Miles, Lattakoo [Kuruman], December 5, 1827, in Isaac Schapera, ed., Apprenticeship at Kuruman: Being the Journals and Letters of Robert and Mary Moffat, 1820-1828 (London, 1951), 274. Other letters in this collection describe frequent deadly raids throughout the 1820s, in which a wide variety of often ethnically mixed groups preyed on one another. On Cape influence, see also Johannes du Bruyn, "James Read en die Thlaping, 1816-1820," Historia 35 (1990). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 444 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh critical issue is whether or not covert slave trading from the Cape Colony and Portuguese territories was at the root of disruptions that have more traditionally been ascribed to the many conquests of the Zulu kingdom in the region of what is now Natal. The point I want to emphasize here is not only the great disruption in the region but also the plausibility of historian Neil Parsons's argument that Tswana territory had already been subject since the seventeenth century to political unrest and the large-scale movement of populations. Parsons in fact suggests that the roots of disruption and state formation in the area may well lie in destabilization that considerably antedated the 1820s and may in turn be linked in at least some way to eighteenth-century slave trading to the north and the rise of the predatory Cape Colony to the south.28 Scholars also tend to see later Afrikaner settler colonialism in the region as part of the same broad processes. All this calls into question the determinative impact of mission Christianity in an already destabilized region. Maybe political colonialism did precede cultural colonialism after all? How might we need to reconceptualize the Christian/Tswana encounter if we think of it as taking place in some sense in a frontier zone, or even a borderland, with multiple players, already characterized by cultural admixture, politically influenced uses of Christianity, and political turbulence? The Comaroffs are of course sensitive to these hugely important issues. I think nonetheless that they could emphasize regional complexity more and the power of missionary Christianity somewhat less in their discussion of the roots of material change (at both ends of the nineteenth century), as well as pay more attention to the implications for their overall theoretical argument of the fact that Africans tried to experiment in response to very difficult local conditions. It is also important that the missionaries entered as potential power brokers in a turbulent environment but were initially weak, able to manipulate power if and only if they could make the right alliances. With these types of broad issues in mind, the opening encounters between missionaries and Tswana, so well described by the Comaroffs, might be re-read as conversations between a number of actors. Four LMS delegations traveled between 1813 and 1817 to the southern Tswana settlement known to the missionaries as Lattakoo (later Dithakong) to try to persuade the Tswana to accept missionaries. It is perhaps symbolically appropriate that none of these delegations was exclusively white. In addition to the delegations' African members, even the missionaries themselves included a black West Indian man and a Welsh speaker. Neither, come to that, was the Tswana polity entirely "Tswana." The Thlaping polity was relatively multi-ethnic; the chief Mothibi, for example, was half !Kora (a Khoekhoe-speaking group) and (like others of the chiefly lineage) married a !Kora woman. More significantly, the Europeans were not the only, or even the most important, players promoting an evangelical mission. Key from a Tswana perspective were regional actors, the Griqua (as they 28 Julian Cobbing, "The Mfecane as Alibi: Thoughts on Dithakong and Mbolompo," Journal of African History 29, no. 3 (1988): 487-519; Caroline Hamilton, ed., Mfecane Aftermath (Johannesburg, 1996), including Neil Parsons, "Prelude to Difaqane in the Interior of Southern Africa c. 1600-1822," 323-49; Neil Parsons, "Kicking the Hornets' Nest: A Third View of the Cobbing Controversy on the Mfecane/Difaqane," address to the University of Botswana History Society, Gabarone, Botswana, March 16, 1999 (available online through the University of Botswana History Department web page, at http://ubh.tripod.com/ub/np.htm). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 445 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elboume eventually came to be known), some of whom acted as patrons of the early LMS mission to the Tswana. The Griqua were clusters of settlers in the region of Khoekhoe descent, some of whom had white fathers and Khoesan mothers, and many of whom had migrated from the Cape Colony, epitomizing the remaking of identity in the wake of colonialism. Groups spearheaded by Griqua had established regional hegemony through their access to arms and horses. They provided important trade links with the Cape Colony and were sources of trade goods for the Tswana. The Griqua were already using Christianity in a variety of complicated ways, as a token of equality with white settlers, as justification for what Robert Ross has termed "sub-imperialism" with regard to the unconverted Tswana, and indeed as a basis for their reconstituted polities. Alliances with missionaries gave these emergent polities potential access to diplomacy and markets, including the arms trade, in addition to spiritual concerns. Indeed, on the way to Mothibi's settlement, British LMS inspector Campbell had helped compose a formal written constitution for a Griqua group, reflecting the symbolic uses of the language of law. The language of Christianity was already on the loose in the interior, in other words, and subject to interpretation in Griqualand as much as in the seminaries of Europe.29 The (Khoekhoe) !Kora had also been exposed to Christianity and were also competing by the 1820s to obtain guns and horses from the Cape Colony. The decision of Mothibi and his counselors about whether to accept an LMS mission was thus complicated by the fact that the LMS came under the protection of the powerful Griqua Kok clan. During a second LMS delegation to the Tswana (overlooked by the Comaroffs), for example, Adam Kok presented newly arrived missionaries to Mothibi and acted as their translator. Mothibi was anxious not to offend the powerful Kok family, but worried because his own people had since turned against the mission. In fact, he eventually sent these missionaries away altogether. When two missionaries told Mothibi that one of them "wrought in wood, and one that was to come wrought in Iron, that we would do all the work for him in that way that he wanted," Mothibi was pleased and told Kok "he could not think of rejecting those that came with or through the medium of him." When the missionaries pursued the issue of teaching, however, Mothibi worriedly told Kok that "he would not be instructed, and if A. Kok should endeavour to press it sharply upon him, and his refusal cause a variance between them, he said that he would rather take the flight from Lattakoo, with people." Kok had to reassure Mothibi that the Griqua leader would not force the Tswana chief to relocate if the Thlaping 29 This discussion both here and below draws on Robert Ross, Adam Kok's Griquas: A Study in the Development of Stratification in South Africa (Cambridge, 1976); Elizabeth Elbourne and Robert Ross, "Combating Spiritual and Social Bondage: Early Missions in the Cape Colony," in Elphick and Davenport, Christianity in South Africa; Alan Barnard, Hunters and Herders of Southern Africa: A Comparative Ethnography of the Khoisan Peoples (Cambridge, 1992), 156-75, 193-94; Martin Legassick, "The Northern Frontier to c. 1840: The Rise and Decline of the Griqua People," in Richard Elphick and Hermann Giliomee, eds., The Shaping of South African Society, 1652-1840 (Middletown, Conn., 1988), 358-420; Nigel Penn, "The Orange River Frontier Zone, c. 1700-1805," in Andrew B. Smith, ed., Einiqualand: Studies of the Orange River Frontier (Cape Town, 1995); Karel Schoeman, ed., Griqua Records: The Philippolis Captaincy, 1825-1861 (Cape Town, 1996). Mary and Robert Moffat's letters and journals make the station's vulnerability and its reliance on Griqua protection abundantly clear. See Schapera, ed., Apprenticeship at Kuruman. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 446 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh refused missionaries.30 Once the Kuruman mission had been established, it depended for its survival on Griqua military protection for many years. If missionaries were initially dependent on Griqua intermediaries, they were also materially dependent for travel and translation on Khoesan hired in the colony. The Khoekhoe and San had long borne the brunt of brutal colonial subjugation and were in many cases more receptive to conversion than groups beyond the Cape Colony. The Comaroffs indeed have a wonderful discussion of the occlusion of such intermediary figures from missionary accounts of putatively solitary heroic jour- neys.31 I would go further than the Comaroffs, however, and suggest that at least some of these companions saw themselves as fellow missionaries. On the first delegation, Campbell was accompanied by a number of Khoesan Christians from the Cape. Their prayers and preaching had made a pilgrimage route of their journey through a country of which they saw themselves as taking spiritual possession. They were active in trying to persuade Tswana individuals to accept missionaries.32 In 1814, a synod of the southern African LMS missionaries had "set aside" in a religious ceremony several men of Khoesan descent to act as LMS agents in the interior, several of whom, including Griqua leader Andries Waterboer, subse- quently played important roles in the politics of Transorangia. Cupido Kakkerlak, a product of Eastern Cape mission schools whose letters reveal a passionate spirituality, also itinerated in the region, attempting, albeit with little success, to evangelize among the !Kora. These men were employed by the LMS. As the Comaroffs point out, the society would devote much energy to reining in and controlling "native agents" after the earliest years of the mission. Nonetheless, evidence from the Cape suggests that there was also considerable evangelical activity by converts who were not formally paid by missionary societies, including elephant hunters such as Hendrik Boesak or long-range wagon drivers. In addition, as mission stations became more like churches and congregations fought for independence from missionary control around the mid-century mark, congregations had more authority, not less. My point is that evidence from elsewhere in southern Africa suggests that Christianity was spread by people with long-range contacts other than missionaries, presumably not necessarily in orthodox form. The central- ity of Khoesan people (and later other Africans) to European-led missions to the Tswana suggests a wider oral evangelical culture that the written records would not completely reflect.33 Be that as it may, the importance of Khoesan agents to the Tswana mission is most clearly exemplified by the fourth delegation to Lattakoo, led by a former 30 Robert Hamilton to LMS Directors, Griquatown, April 28, 1816, London Missionary Society Papers, South Africa Correspondence-Incoming, 6/3/C, Council for World Mission Archives, School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London (hereafter, LMS-SA). See also LMS-SA, 6/3/C: J. Evans, R. Hamilton, and W. Corner to LMS Directors, Griquatown, May 27, 1816; LMS-SA, 6/3/C: R. Hamilton to LMS Directors, Griquatown, November 13, 1816. 31 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 78. 32 John Campbell, Travels in South Africa (London, 1815). The full extent of Khoesan missionary activity emerges most clearly from Campbell's unpublished journals, held at the National Library of South Africa, Cape Town. 33 LMS-SA, 5/2/F: "Minutes of the First Conference held by the African Missionaries at Graaff Reinet in August 1814"; V. C. Malherbe, "The Life and Times of Cupido Kakkerlak," Journal ofAfrican History 20 (1979): 365-79; Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 81, on Robert Moffat's campaign against Kakkerlak. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 447 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne carpenter from Essex, James Read, after Mothibi had finally capitulated. Read brought with him an unusually large group of people of varied ethnic origins, mostly Khoesan, including, more problematically, his own Khoekhoe wife, Elizabeth Valentyn, and his pregnant former mistress, a San woman, Sabina Pretorius, whom he claimed to have met by accident on the road. At least ten Khoesan men and six Khoesan women accompanied Read, all of whom were church members and some of whom were "zealous persons."34 It is indeed possible that the Khoesan of the Cape Colony saw this as a Khoesan mission to the Tswana, brokered by their kin among the Griqua. In any case, once Robert Moffat took over the Lattakoo station in 1821 from Read (disgraced for his adultery), he would fight successfully to diminish the influence of the Khoesan group from the Cape Colony, whom he then firmly wrote out of the history of the station. He dismissed several for immorality, despite the resistance, in which women played prominent roles, of members of the group. Moffat also found himself opposed by Griqua factions, many of whom resented his power-mongering presence.35 Before the late 1810s, the earliest LMS agents in southern Africa were not particularly good or even very enthusiastic apostles of capitalist cultural practices, mostly because they were so poor themselves and so looked-down-upon by many respectable members of colonial society. More than a few also tended to believe in dreams, to hear the personal voice of God, or to look for the imminent end of the world. Those missionaries who were closest in time to the Enlightenment, in sum, acted least like the bourgeois agents of respectability described by the Comaroffs as quintessential exemplars of the rationalizing project of modernity. The colonial unrespectability of early missionaries was compounded by the fact that perhaps a third of them married African women before 1817, while several were involved in sexual scandals. Others took high-profile political positions that were unpopular among settlers. The Comaroffs pick up the story as Moffat, in common with many of his fellows, was urgently trying to reclaim the moral high ground and to reinvent the mission as visibly respectable and as focused on "civilization." A lot of this is more about the internal history of the LMS than about African Christianity; we certainly in general need more of the latter and perhaps less of the former. Nonetheless, it argues for the importance of local detail, and for the centrality of fractures within as well as between groups. It also points forward to ways in which converts would later need to perform "civilization" and "respectability" in order to maneuver on the colonial stage, not solely because their consciousnesses had been colonized. From the start, tensions among evangelicals themselves were fueled by anxiety over the rapid removal of Christianity from the control of white missionaries. This tension was arguably innate to a type of evangelical Christianity based on textual interpretation and the notion of divine inspiration, as well as being the product of Tswana reconstruction of Christian forms. Certainly, missionaries soon lost control even of "orthodox" Christianity. Among the northern Tswana, Paul Landau has brilliantly documented the use of Christianity by junior royals to challenge existing authority in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, in ways that escaped 34 LMS-SA, 6/4/A: James Read to Joseph Hardcastle, Bethelsdorp, August 7, 1816. 35 See Schapera, ed., Apprenticeship at Kuruman. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 448 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh a series of rather peripheral white missionaries. Among the southern Tswana, Thlaping elites also exploited divisions among missionaries to their own political ends. In 1842, for example, Tswana elite men successfully appealed to LMS superintendent John Philip to fire missionary Holloway Helmore for excessive interference in congregational affairs, including deposing Mothibi's son as a deacon.36 Missionaries to the Tswana experienced other humiliations. The coherent Tswana group targeted by the mission decamped, to be replaced by a more motley group of refugees. The mission was battered by raids from various groups, could not protect its members, and was not successful at all until it started picking up displaced persons in the 1830s. A NUMBER OF QUESTIONS arise from this type of re-reading. At a macro level, the region was already turbulent and populations were mobile, so Christianity scarcely arrived as the harbinger of globalization in anything other than an ideological sense. This raises in turn the thorny and ultimately unanswerable question of whether Christianity would have had the capacity to colonize minds without the prior disruption of material conditions. We are back at the difficult issue of how determinative "culture" is by itself. Perhaps in the end, this rejigging of chronology strengthens the Comaroffs' fundamental argument about the inextricability of "culture" and material struggle. It does nonetheless pose all the more sharply the question of how Christianity-and religious innovation, more broadly defined- functioned in a frontier zone in a manner that was independent of the machinations of white missionaries.37 Also at the "macro" level, the Tswana were not entirely "local," nor were they unused to cultural difference. In a multi-lingual, multi-religious environment, were missionaries really needed to contextualize "Tswana custom"? Missionary papers record Mothibi making distinctions between !Kora, Tswana, and colonial Khoekhoe customs, for example. I would not want to deny the importance of local identity, or to exaggerate the degree of long-range contacts of the southern Tswana, in contrast to the remarkable global reach and global identity claims of the early missionary movement. There are issues of tremendous importance raised by that contrast. But it also seems important that there were other regional interlocutors who were of greater material importance initially to the Tswana than the Europeans, and with whom they already had the kind of cultural interchanges that might have permitted the type of self-consciousness about "Tswana" identity that the Comaroffs see as the fruit of the "long conversation." This is also a way of asking about what the southern African interior looked like before formal European colonialism and whether the communities of the region were really as settled as they appeared. There are echoes here of an older debate about whether the encounter with the "macrocosmic" claims of the "world religions" Christianity and Islam shattered the 36 Landau, Realm of the Word; Elbourne, Blood Ground. On Helmore's dismissal, see LMS-SA, 19/2/A: James Read to LMS Directors, Philipton, June 3, 1843. The LMS Directors overturned the dismissal and censured Philip. 37 An interesting point of contrast is provided by Janet Hodgson, "A Battle for Sacred Power: Christian Beginnings among the Xhosa," in Elphick and Davenport, Christianity in South Africa. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 449 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne "microcosm" of African localist religions, at a time when colonialism was shattering the microcosm of daily life. As Terence Ranger has argued, whatever the intellectual issues at stake, African societies, at least in the southern African interior, have to be recognized as also "macrocosmic" in the sense that they had long-range contacts, exchanged ideas over large swathes of territory (as the rapid spread of prophetic movements suggests), and rubbed up against a wide variety of different groups.38 The relative mobility of different communities was also a factor in breaking down localism. This type of approach, to my mind, decenters the European missionary-at least until the missionary came backed up by a colonial economy and a colonial army. The power exerted by the conditions of the "frontier zone" of the region is represented by the fact that even missionaries were compelled by material circumstances to take on features of African polities. The Comaroffs highlight the vision of Kuruman mission head and former gardener Robert Moffat, and his wife Mary, like that of many early nineteenth-century Nonconformist missionaries, as one of an unrealistic rural idyll, in which they sought to remake Africa in the image of a vanishing and imagined rural utopian Britain. One could, however, go further in considering the contradictions of Kuruman. Robert Moffat acted in many ways like an African leader as well as like a nostalgic Scot, and he needed to do so because of the material conditions of the frontier. In the 1820s, he proved unable to retain the allegiance of existing chiefs, for whom he was too clearly a competitor. As the refugee crisis accelerated, however, Moffat was able to gather together dispossessed people. The price of their admission was allegiance to the religion of the leader, since religion was used to rebuild communities. The currency of power was people. In similar ways, the control of women and their reproduction was important to the maintenance of the power of the patriarch, whether African chief or mission station head-Moffat even went so far, for example, as to attempt to discipline publicly Ann Hamilton, the wife of his colleague Robert Hamilton, for refusing to sleep with her husband.39 Moffat was more a part of the African frontier world than he might have liked to admit. A further critical point raised by this case study is that Africans transmitted Christianity more effectively than missionaries did. The centrality of Africans to the spread of Christianity means that much of the early history of the mission is unrecoverable. It is often unclear what kinds of Christianity were spread orally, for example. In other parts of southern Africa, prophetic figures emerged from time to time to use aspects of the Christian message in a context that suggests how quickly its language became unhinged from missionary guardianship. For example, Xhosa prophet and war hero Makanda Nxele (Makana), who led a Xhosa attack on the colony in 1819, had an earlier flirtation with the LMS; he was refused the right to work as a native agent when he insisted that there was a god for the white man and a god for the black man, and that he himself was related to Jesus Christ. The examples could be multiplied, as the Comaroffs would certainly agree. The lines 38 Terence Ranger, "The Local and the Global in Southern African Religious History," in Hefner, Conversion to Christianity, 65-98. 39 Karel Schoeman, A Thorn Bush That Grows in the Path: The Missionary Career of Ann Hamilton, 1815-1823 (Cape Town, 1995); LMS-SA, 8/3/B: Robert Moffat to LMS, Lattakoo, July 12, 1821. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 450 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh between orthodoxy as the missionaries perceived it and African prophetic innova- tion were fluid and could be crossed in both directions, explaining the anxiety of white missionaries to bring Christianity back under control. In contrast to the Comaroffs, who emphasize the orthodoxy of the Nonconformists (whom they see in rather stereotypical, indeed Victorianist, terms), I would contend that this anxiety was familiar from debates within the European churches as well; after all, Methodism had once been perceived from within the citadels of Anglican orthodoxy in ways similar to Nonconformist views of African ecstatic innovation.40 If in the early days of missionary activity, Christianity was never fully in the control of the white missionaries who had brought it and only became popular once it was spread mostly by Africans and then transformed in the process, what does this imply about how we might conceptualize the study of colonial missions? I have suggested in the past that the messy scenario I outline above, with its complications and its fudging across the fault lines, calls into question the utility at the micro level of a strict dialectical approach to the history of colonial Christianity. The ghost of French structuralist understandings of G. W. Hegel's master-slave dialectic seems to me to hover over and to constrain the first volume. In response, however, the Comaroffs argue in Volume 2 that I have too conventional an understanding of their view of dialectical processes. A dialectic is not a "formal, abstract, or strictly teleological movement through time and space," in a Hegelian sense. Rather, it is a "process of reciprocal determination; a process of material, social and cultural articulation-involving sentient human beings rather than abstract forces or structures."41 Colonialism is dialectical because it creates binary understandings of difference and depends on the idea of opposites; it is also presumably dialectical because colonial interaction shapes both the colonized and the colonizer in new ways. Returning to the issue at the end of Volume 2, the Comaroffs reiterate (although this seems to me a somewhat different take) that by "dialectics" they mean "the mutually transforming play of social forces whose outcome is neither linear nor simply overdetermined." Defined thus, they add, "it is hard to imagine how colonial history could be regarded as anything else."42 In a weak sense, this is undeniable. Furthermore, on this model, it may not matter that the early encounter between missionaries and Tswana was so much messier than a "dialectical" account would suggest. The Comaroffs' point is precisely that out of difference and mess colonialism created binary opposites. At the same time, the exact nature of this process is often hard to capture. It is interesting to hear John Comaroff raise, in a recently published transcribed conversation with Homi Bhabha, what he terms the question of theory related to "the old Manichean opposition between colonizer and colonized, those 'iteratively marked,' positionally conflated points of reference around which the human geography of empire is so widely imagined. How, other than purely by descriptive insistence, does one displace the crushing logic of binarism in terms of which 40 Among many possibilities, see Deborah Valenze, Prophetic Sons and Daughters: Female Preaching and Popular Religion in Industrial England (Princeton, N.J., 1985). 41 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 29. 42 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 410. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 451 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne colonial worlds are apprehended and narrated?"43 I think this is a genuine point of tension for the Comaroffs, and quite rightly for many others. Perhaps my own discomfort arises from the difficulty of defining who the agents of dialectic are. In the end, the Comaroffs are interested in doing a historical anthropology of colonialism, more than of religion in colonial contexts. In this optic, the fault line of interest is that between colonized and colonizer. Religious belief did not, however, adhere to that fault line, even though both colonized and colonizers mobilized religion to the ends of power struggle. Nor of course was Christianity itself static. At the same time, the very notion of ethnic difference was still in the process of being worked out more broadly well past the early era of industrialization; therefore it was incorporated differently into the views of colonial evangelists at different times. From the point of view of the Comaroffs' overall narrative structure, this leads us away from the Enlightenment and onto the terrain of more immediately nineteenth-century colonial concerns. On this model, colonial conquest and the need to maintain and justify white rule shaped the mid- nineteenth-century culture of white Christianity. The end was not contained in the beginning but formed by colonial processes. Be that as it may, it is instructive that the Khoesan themselves were not able indefinitely to maintain the interstitial status to which Christianity gave them some access. By the early 1850s, many living in the Cape Colony were forced to choose between the colonial binaries of "black" and "white," in the 1850-1853 frontier war in which many people of Khoesan descent rebelled to fight against the "white" colony, as "race" became the determinant of colonial identity.44 The example also underscores the importance of "black" and "white" as colonial binaries arguably of more importance than "English" and "Tswana." All this should not, however, lead us to read the late eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries in terms of the mid-nineteenth. There is a basic problem here that dogs the Comaroffs throughout the books. Christianity is both text and practice, and therefore difficult to pin down. Not only that, it also permits and contains a wide variety both of practices and of different interpretations of its central themes. As text, Christianity became a free-floating signifier. As a practice, it was fought over bitterly by those who wanted to benefit from it. It is therefore difficult to identify Christianity clearly with one side of a dialectical or even dialogic model. This is all the more problematic because it is hard to define Christianity clearly, other than by appeals to authority. There was considerable scope for Africans to reinvent Christianity even from the beginning of the mission described by the Comaroffs. In some ways, this is precisely the Comaroffs' point: the signs of Christianity were fought over by competing ethnic groups. The Comaroffs nonetheless cannot bring themselves to see acceptance of Christianity in its unadulterated mission form as anything other than a defeat for 43 Bhabha and Comaroff, "Speaking of Postcoloniality," 22. 44 Elbourne, Blood Ground, 345-76; Robert Ross, "The Kat River Rebellion and Khoikhoi Nationalism: The Fate of an Ethnic Identification," Kronos: Journal of Cape History/Tydskrif vir Kaaplandse Geskiedenis 24 (November 1997): 91-105. On the emergence of racial stratification more generally, see Clifton C. Crais, White Supremacy and Black Resistance in Pre-industrial South Africa: The Making of the Colonial Order in the Eastern Cape, 1770-1865 (Cambridge, 1992); Timothy Keegan, Colonial South Africa and the Origins of the Racial Order (Charlottesville, Va., 1996). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 452 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh African converts, who were thereby surrendering positions in the struggles over the colonization of consciousness. This position ultimately obscures complexity. EVENTUALLY, ONE MUST CONFRONT the type of question raised by Leon de Kock, about disciplinary conventions and the fetishization of the archive.45 De Kock argues that historians have spent too much time in their reaction to this wonderful book looking for factual flaws. To put the question in its boldest form, are the details really that essential to the overall project? Perhaps less tendentiously, what are the Comaroffs doing that goes beyond the reading of the words of colonists? The Comaroffs are important precisely because they move beyond words to decipher the gestures of people in the past. They put an anthropologist's emphasis on ritual and performance. They add thereby a crucial dimension to our reading of culture-bound historical archives. The Comaroffs' understanding of performance goes well beyond the staged performances of religious rites (although they acknowledge at the same time that people used the framework of religious ritual as a springboard for their own acting out of emotions and ideas). The missionaries are described as performing civilization, in the hope of educating the Tswana to adopt Western cultural practices through the power of display. In response, the Tswana performed noncompliance or acted out cultural bricolage. The tangible display of the body interests the Comaroffs, just as the material suffering of the colonized body that we readers know is to come provides a moral template for our reading of the early nineteenth century. The authors are particularly interested in space and the disposition of the body in space: their analyses frequently return, like the apartheid state itself, to issues of the control of the movement of African bodies.46 The Comaroffs are in some ways mistrustful of the self-interested and one-sided colonial text and find more solidity in the unspoken exchanges of bodily perfor- mance. It is this approach that both furnishes the greatest richness of the books and yet at the same time has excited unease in some interlocutors. If the evidence that remains of Tswana actions is mostly accounts of their physical activity, does that not place the reporter (the anthropologist, the historian, or even the reader) in the privileged position of interpreting Tswana actions, leaving the Tswana themselves rarely free to speak directly in their own voice? Is this even an accurate assessment of the nature of the historical record, or are there more extensive Tswana records? J. D. Y. Peel and Terence Ranger have both queried the absence of Tswana 45 De Kock, "For and Against the Comaroffs." 46 For example, Volume 2 tellingly argues that integral to the late nineteenth-century struggle over African labor was a further struggle over the "distribution of people in space and, concomitantly, their passage across the social landscape." This is a typical discussion of space that appropriately reflects the struggle of the apartheid state to control the physical body, just as slavery had earlier lent mastery of the body to the slaveowner. Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 203. Rikk van Dijk and Peter Pels, "Contested Authorities and the Politics of Perception: Deconstructing the Study of Religion in Africa," in Richard Werbner and Terence Ranger, eds., Postcolonial Identities in Africa (London, 1996), 245-70; Celestin Monga, The Anthropology of Anger: Civil Society and Democracy in Africa, Linda Fleck and Celestin Monga, trans. (Boulder, Colo., 1996), 112-15, on the "subversive and silent" nature of many African forms of dissent. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 453 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne narrative in Of Revelation and Revolution's first volume, for example.47 It seems unlikely that Christian converts did not leave a more extensive written record even in the early years of the mission or that community historical memory was not richer. The Comaroffs have responded that community historical narrative was not a genre espoused by the Tswana. They argue, furthermore, that the quest for "narrative" is elitist: it is "a short step from the stress on narrative to the history of elites, thence to elitist history."48 The issue remains uneasily unresolved. For Paul Landau, the Comaroffs themselves have a culturally constrained view of what constitutes "genuine narrative." They pay "little attention to genealogy, song, Tswana conversation, letters, political speech, tales, myth or church charters- because they are not 'genuine' narratives. Consequently Tswana people's ideas of fulfillment and transcendence do not show themselves in either volume."49 Even the Tswana intellectual and politician Sol Plaatje's great novel Mhudi, which draws on Tswana traditions about the difaqane, has been brought into the fray: for the Comaroffs, the fact that Plaatje himself claims that he could only gather material in fragments suggests that the southern Tswana indeed did not have a tradition of sustained historical narrative as late as the early twentieth century, even though Mhudi is more conventionally seen as a reflection at least to some extent of more sustained Tswana oral tradition.50 There is another critical debate at work in these discussions of agency and voice. The Comaroffs are very clear that missionary activity was part of the victimization of Africans. Much recent scholarship on southern African Christianity emphasizes instead the agency of Africans in using and reshaping Christianity to their own ends, as the focus has shifted away from missionaries and onto African Christians. In some ways, the Comaroffs want to restore a sense of moral indignation at the ways in which colonial missions did change the consciousness of Africans in a damaging fashion. Ironically, this may involve seeing people as victims who did not necessarily see themselves that way at the time-another issue of authorial voice. The Comaroffs' anger represents nonetheless an important strand of longstanding protest across the colonized world at the "colonization of the mind."51 It is impossible to deny that many Christian missionaries had a profoundly negative 47 J. D. Y. Peel, "For Who Hath Despised the Day of Small Things? Missionary Narratives and Historical Anthropology," Comparative Studies in Society and History 37, no. 3 (1995): 581-607; Terence Ranger, "No Missionary: No Exchange: No Story? Narrative in Southern Africa," unpublished paper read at All Souls College, Oxford, June 1992. 48 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 51. 49 Paul Landau, "Hegemony and History in Jean and John L. Comaroff's Of Revelation and Revolution," Africa 70, no. 3 (2000): 516. 50 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 46-47. 51 Steve Biko, I Write What I Like (1978), provides an eloquent locus classicus, as does Ezekiel Mphahlele, The African Image (London, 1962). Dickson A. Mungazi, The Mind of Black Africa (Westport, Conn., 1996), expresses typical anger, pp. 1-32. Greg Cuthbertson discusses Christian missions as a form of cultural violence in Charles Villa-Vicencio, ed., Theology and Violence: The South African Debate (Johannesburg, 1987). Sanneh, Translating the Message, emphasizes in contrast indigenous agency in the "translation" of Christianity from one culture to another. At a different end of the spectrum of debate might be those who see efforts to change the religious systems of indigenous peoples as a form (or as an element) of cultural genocide. A. Dirk Moses gives an eloquent overview of debates about genocide and cultural genocide: "Conceptual Blockages and Definitional Dilemmas in the 'Racial Century': Genocides of Indigenous Peoples and the Holocaust," Patterns of Prejudice 36, no. 4 (2002). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 454 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh impact in many areas of the world, not least when they gained (or were given) control of educational systems and thus had control over the formation of children.52 The fact that missionaries in various ways had such power was, however, almost invariably related to the expansion of the colonial state, not to the corrosive power of the message alone. Furthermore, as Peggy Brock has persuasively argued, missionary institutional structures affected the degree of control missionaries could exert over congregations, and these structures were affected by indigenous social arrangements as well as by state power.53 I would further contend, in ways there is not space to elaborate on fully here, that shame was a key element of colonial control. Mission education could and did reinforce this. At the same time, Christianity could also provide a language through which to reclaim dignity and deny the shaming process. I think it is important in sum to see Christianity as a language with many possible uses. Conversion, for example, fulfilled a wider and more flexible range of functions than is suggested by the Comaroffs' reduction of it to a symbolic field of struggle over capitalism. A reading that focuses too exclusively on Christianity as a language of cultural domination rather than a language with a multiplicity of possible meanings pays too much attention to the Western roots of Christianity and not enough to the multiple uses to which Africans very quickly put it. I make this comment in awareness of the extent to which the Comaroffs emphasize the need to explore African perspectives through every possible means, and the extent to which they clearly do this. However, conversion was even more of an empty signifier than the Comaroffs suggest, and some of these significations did not have a lot to do with rational capitalism. On the other hand, conversion was also an act, with attached rituals and beliefs, and this is important for understanding what the act meant in the immediate rather than long-term sense. Even if I am not completely at ease with a victimization model, I would want to add that these were and are enormously complicated processes. They had deep and often painful implications for many. This demands humility from any historian. Undergirding much of the above has been a historian's concern with chronology, which, while justified, cannot do full justice to the rich ferment of ideas in these remarkable books. The Comaroffs in fact comment on what they see as different disciplinary conventions and their inherent costs and benefits. They see real and longstanding differences, as they remark at the end of Volume 2, between the ideal type of a more conventional historian and the archetypal historical anthropologist: "differences between the ideographic and the nomothetic, between the effort to arrive at the fullest possible description of events in their infinite particularity and the desire to pick out general principles across time and space." The latter approach, they underscore, "demands a certain boldness of abstraction" and is "inherently risky."54 Although one would hope that historians are not as painstak- ingly antiquarian and abstraction-averse as this implies, there is some justice to the 52 A wonderfully instructive example of the ambiguities of Christian liberal control of the education system in South Africa, just before apartheid, is furnished by Shula Marks, ed., Not Either an Experimental Doll: The Separate Worlds of Three South African Women (London, 1985). 53 Peggy Brock, "Mission Encounters in the Colonial World: British Columbia and South-West Australia," Journal of Religious History 24, no. 2 (June 2000): 159-79. 54 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 411. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 455 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elboume comment, at least as it pertains to the Comaroffs' own work. The very manner in which they offer up a multitude of bold ideas, fizzing with possibility, also ensures that they offer a number of hostages to fortune. The Comaroffs are, for example, probably the most influential of recent scholars to argue for tight linkage between missionary activity, "modernity," "Enlighten- ment," and globalization. As Brian Stanley points out, this is also a question that has been much debated in the past few years by Christian theologians and mission theorists, with theologians paying particular attention to the damage done by the universalist truth claims of mission Christianity.55 More broadly, the Comaroffs are participating in a vast debate about modernity and postmodernity among social, political, and cultural theorists that it would be foolhardy to venture upon here. Their contribution is both important and vexed: important because they show the culturally constrained nature of claims to "modernity," vexed because despite everything they reify the truth claims of modernity and have too neat a view of the "Enlightenment," despite substantial historical debate on the utility of the concept. In so doing, they exaggerate the long-term influence of mission Christianity on the material subjugation of the Tswana, particularly by minimizing the impact of illiberal forces and overemphasizing cultural change. This could be true, however, and the significance of the Comaroffs' analysis of practice still be undimmed. The Comaroffs see "modernity" as "always historically constructed." It is in their view "an ideological formation in terms of which societies valorize their own practices by contrast to the specter of barbarism and other marks of negation."56 The Comaroffs link modernity to a view of the self as a rights-bearing atomistic individual, ultimately the "fully fledged bourgeois subject." They further associate modernity with a wide-ranging series of cultural and economic practices, including but not limited to dependence on a worldwide market, industrialization, the use of money, the use of "advanced" agricultural practices, the promotion of individuated space, and a sense of the body as private.57 It is part of the great richness of the Comaroffs' approach that they so fruitfully link cultural and economic practices, refusing to prioritize one over the other. At the same time, this view of modernity is slippery-and this is both its richness and an occasional source of frustration. The Comaroffs move between presenting the truth claims of modernity-its "text," if one likes-and the concrete material practices that advocates saw as characterizing the modern. The authors' desire not to take the truth claims of missionaries at face value make it difficult for them to spell out what, if any, were the irreducible material practices that defined modernity. If there weren't any, however, what was the material force behind the cultural claims and practices of missionaries? Yet it is arguable that at least some of what the Comaroffs identify as the 55 Brian Stanley, "Christian Missions and the Enlightenment: A Reevaluation," in Stanley, ed., Christian Missions and the Enlightenment (Grand Rapids, Mich., 2001), 1-2. Stanley points to David Bosch's Transforming Mission: Paradigm Shifts in Theology of Mission (Maryknoll, N.Y., 1991) as a seminal text for Christian theologians of mission in a postmodern context. 56 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 32. 57 A particularly influential figure for the Comaroffs' reading of the creation of the modern self in Volume 2 is Charles Taylor, whose Sources of the Self is a seminal text for their work. Taylor is of course a Christian Hegelian, whose view of the emergence of the modern self is certainly influenced by Hegelian dialectics, in however inexplicit a fashion. Sources of the Self: The Making of the Modem Identity (Cambridge, 1989). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 456 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh intellectual aspects of modernity are primarily identifiable with the truth claims of liberalism, and that the Comaroffs link these in turn to neoliberalism. There are echoes here of the great debates between radical and liberal historians in 1970s and 1980s South Africa, split over the origins of apartheid.58 For the "radical" school, liberalism, in both its ideological and economic sense, contributed to the economic domination that was at the root of apartheid. Radical historians argued that late nineteenth-century British capitalism precipitated and anticipated many features of South African society under apartheid, just as the Comaroffs here blame nine- teenth-century British liberal ideas about such things as money, markets, the individuated self, and the primacy of certain gender roles for the mental prepara- tion of the Tswana for labor oppression. Indeed, in their 2000 article "Millennial Capitalism: First Thoughts on a Second Coming," the Comaroffs explicitly link what they term the "Age of Revolution" (1789-1848) to the current "Age of Millennial Capitalism" with their similar anxieties and ontological challenges.59 This article makes explicit the magical, mystical elements of neoliberalism, and its culturally constrained forms, in contrast to neoliberals' claims to rationality and access to universal truth, just as Of Revelation and Revolution describes culturally constructed views of "modernity" and a "modern" economy. This is very helpful. Nonetheless, I think it would also be useful in Of Revelation and Revolution to be more explicit about actual intellectual debates among and between people: to have more ideology in places and less hegemony. The argument made by many, that early twentieth-century white liberals in practice came to support racist segregationist policies, while in ideological terms liberalism's support of the free market economy and nonviolent political action left it with little space to mobilize opposition to apartheid, all adds up to a trenchant and at least partially justified critique. By leaving out of the picture the intellectual shifts in liberalism (and among the opponents of liberalism) on the ground in the nineteenth century (and implicitly in the twentieth), however, the Comaroffs, like other authors, conflate several ills into one. Disciplinary specialists might want to throw further darts at the Comaroffs' narrative superstructure. Must industrialization and by implication modernity really begin in 1789? This is very French. What might be the impact of the questioning by economists of the linearity and suddenness of industrialization in Britain, which now looks more like an extended messy process than a "revolution" within neat chronological parameters? What difference does it make that the evangelical movement had many roots in seventeenth and eighteenth-century continental pietism? If Protestantism is the necessary condition of capitalism, where does this leave Catholic countries (not least France)? The point I want to close on is, however, that of tragedy. If there is, as I have suggested, an implicit narrative of origins that runs throughout Of Revelation and Revolution and lends the work its moral passion, this is not, for all that, a straightforward linear narrative of beginnings and ends. Rather, it is marked by 58 Christopher Saunders, The Making of the South African Past: Major Historians on Race and Class (Cape Town, 1988), describes the liberal/radical split. 59 Jean Comaroff and John L. Comaroff, "Millennial Capitalism: First Thoughts on a Second Coming," Public Culture 12, no. 2 (2000): 334. This issue has been reprinted as Comaroff and Comaroff, eds., Millennial Capitalism and the Culture of Neoliberalism (Durham, N.C., 2001). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 457 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] 458 Elizabeth Elbourne tragic irony and unexpected plot twists. The Nonconformist missionaries who labored so intensely to change the daily lives of Africans in order to induct them into the "modern" economy did not foresee the devastating consequences of that economy for the Tswana peasantry (as might be said of some of the missionaries' modern counterparts, development workers). At the same time, the Comaroffs write as though missionaries inducted the Tswana into the global market and colonized their consciousness in a way that made their engagement more likely. It seems to me just as possible that the global market and related economic coercion came crashing into the lives and consciousness of the Tswana in a way about which they could do little, particularly as their contact was frequently mediated by coercive legislation on the part of the colonial state.60 Missionaries reflected the efforts of other Westerners to moralize the market: to see it as a force for moral good. In this, they shared the ambiguities (and guilty conscience?) of nineteenth-century liberalism. It does not take a great leap of the imagination to find contemporary parallels in the neoliberal discourse, and of course the Comaroffs are right that this putatively universalist creed contains deeply embedded culturally specific assumptions, as did nineteenth-century Anglo- American liberalism itself.61 If nonetheless market expansion is relatively inevita- ble, then is it not appropriate to ask on what terms this expansion might be the most moral? Or is the most appropriate response full-fledged resistance? Must the global marketplace necessarily be bad, on average, for Africa? From a somewhat different point on the ideological spectrum, one might also ask whether in fact Africa is incorporated into the global market on the equal terms supposedly demanded by neoliberal economics. These are clearly issues beyond the scope of this article, but not without historical parallels. In late nineteenth and early twentieth-century terms, the Tswana, it could be argued, were crowded out of an agricultural market in which many were making profits and farming more effectively than whites, in fact, in order to favor white farmers artificially and in order to bolster labor for the mines, again through "artificial" restraints on movement, through the theft of land, through racially targeted taxation, and through coercive legislation. This antici- pated many of the later strategies of apartheid.62 It is not as clear to me as it is to the Comaroffs that the questions some missionaries and Africans were asking about the possibility of a just economy were not the right ones, even if the culturally constrained answers they gave were so obviously, hopelessly wrong. I do not have answers to these questions either-merely some sympathy with the misguided quest for certainty in a rapidly changing, brutal, and deeply uncertain economic universe. 60 This is a point also made by Landau, "Hegemony and History." 61 Uday Mehta, Liberalism and Empire: A Study in Nineteenth-Century British Liberal Thought (Chicago, 1999); Mehta, "Liberal Strategies of Exclusion," in Stoler and Cooper, Tensions of Empire, 59-86. 62 Ted Matsetela, "The Life Story of Mma-Pooe: Aspects of Sharecropping and Proletarianization in the Northern Orange Free State 1890-1930," in Shula Marks and Richard Rathbone, eds., Industrialization and Social Change in South Africa (New York, 1982), 212-37; Charles Van Onselen, The Seed Is Mine: The Life of Kas Maine, a South African Sharecropper, 1894-1985 (Cape Town, 1996). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh I HAVE SUGGESTED THROUGHOUT THIS ESSAY that the Comaroffs present nineteenth- century missionaries as fairly powerful figures, able to effect changes in the consciousness of Tswana interlocutors, despite the resistance of many. In contrast, I see Christianity as important but, with some important exceptions, not necessarily white missionaries themselves. I also suggest that the linkages between political and cultural colonialism are often unclear in Of Revelation and Revolution, and that the role of "cultural colonialism" is overdetermined. If it is possible to guess about such counterfactuals, I suspect that at least some of the missionaries whose work has been scrutinized by the Comaroffs would ironically have preferred the Comaroffs' account of their activities to mine, however doubtless upset they would have been at the implication that their preaching laid the groundwork for the Tswana's entrapment within enslaving capitalist systems. But the Comaroffs do give the missionaries credit for a coherent, rationalizing, globalizing system that taught one universal truth. They also recognize the missionaries' own belief that they might instill into their converts the necessary principles of "civilization" to transform totally their supposedly primitive economies and to move them rapidly up the scale of human development toward settled commercial societies. My own interpretation, while recognizing the tremendous importance of the universalizing project as a mode of domination, calls into question the capacity of Christianity to convey as effectively as it would have liked a message of unifying orthodoxy, or indeed the overall ability of missionaries to accomplish their objectives. From the very beginning of the activity of Christians in Africa, as elsewhere in the world, Christianity was out of control, unorthodox, and an available subject for reinter- pretation in light of the needs of its interlocutors. Ironically, in sum, it is not always wise to take missionaries at their word. Elizabeth Elbourne is an associate professor in the Department of History at McGill University, where she teaches British and South African history. She is also currently a visiting fellow in the History Program of the Research School of Social Sciences, Australian National University. Her publications include Blood Ground: Colonialism, Missions and the Contest for Christianity in the Cape Colony and Britain, 1799-1853 (2002), as well as various articles, most recently "Domesticity and Disposession: British Ideologies of 'Home' and the Primitive at Work in the Early Nineteenth-Century Cape," in Wendy Woodward, Patricia Hayes, and Gary Minkley, eds., Deep Histories: Gender and Colonialism in Southern Africa (2002). She earned her D.Phil. in 1992 from the University of Oxford, under the supervision of Terence Ranger. Her major fields of interest include colonialism, gender, and religion, especially the early nineteenth- century British white settler empire and southern Africa. Her current work in progress explores the creation of networks around the idea of being "aborig- inal" in the early nineteenth-century British empire, and is focusing on links between New South Wales, the Cape Colony, New Zealand, and Canadian colonies as well as on activists in Great Britain. She is also writing on liberalism and Khoekhoe citizenship at the Cape. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 459 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/533242

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 589491
2008
Author(s): Stewart Garrett
Abstract: Ibid., p. 111. Even Riffaterre's approach to the structuring unsaid of textual writing can be seen to represent on its own terms a shift from the ontology of narrative toward its epistemology at the level of form rather than content. By the deliberate provocation of his title, his semiotic narratology is interested not just in the structural essence of fiction as art but in its specific truth:a story's immanent signifying patterns in their subtextual disclosure.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/589488

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522216
Date: 10 2008
Author(s): Balsamo Gian
Abstract: Nussbaum, Upheavals of Thought, 590.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/589948

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 592372
Date: 01 2009
Author(s): Miller Richard B.
Abstract: Anscombe, “The Justice of the Present War Examined,” 81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/592359

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522216
Date: 10 2008
Author(s): Hall, W. David
Abstract: Hall sees that this argument as it develops across Ricoeur’s writings raises questions about the role of reciprocity in the Ricoeur texts he considers. He acknowledges that Ricoeur’s recognition that not all human relations are face‐to‐face leads him beyond a narrow call for solicitude and friendship at this level to a concern for the level of institutions as well. It is at this level of institutions that the question of justice really arises, and with it new questions regarding responsibility and possible reciprocity, particularly regarding our ability to respond to others who we may never meet face‐to‐face. As Hall says, “love often demands a dimension of self‐sacrifice, most notably in the form of renouncing a strict reciprocity” (150). His case could have been stronger here if he had incorporated Ricoeur’s discussions of the work of John Rawls and the antisacrificial notion of justice he saw there. Beyond this, Hall’s focal idea of a relation between love and justice marked by what he calls a poetic tension should also have included some discussion of what Ricoeur says in The Course of Recognition(Institute for Human Sciences Vienna Lecture Series, trans. David Pellauer [Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2005]; originally published asParcours de la reconnaissance[Paris: Éditions Stock, 2004]) about the limits of existing philosophies of recognition, which he saw as not getting any further than a notion of reciprocal recognition in just the sense Hall criticizes. Ricoeur’s own answer was to begin there to lay out the idea of mutual recognition beyond mere reciprocity, a higher form of recognition that stands closer, as Hall anticipates, to something like the reception of a gift that expects nothing in return but which may lead to a second gift given to others. Readers who wish to build on Hall’s argument will want also to look at this last major book from Ricoeur.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/592470

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 596101
Date: 04 2009
Author(s): Schweiker William
Abstract: I conclude, then, that the task of theological ethics and, more broadly, the humanities and, if I can be bold, more broadly still the university itself is to examine carefully and critically and from multiple perspectives—including the religions—what it means to be and to live as responsible human beings within the vulnerabilities and complexities of forms of life. When we within our several disciplines respond to this task with all the vitality and resources at our disposal, then, I believe, knowledge will indeed grow from more to more, and life will be increased without the illusions of power or servitude to the tyranny of idols.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/596069

Journal Title: Isis
Publisher: State University of New York Press
Issue: 597753
Date: 12 2007
Author(s): Zimmerman Virginia
Abstract: Excavating Victoriansbrings out very clearly the discomfort the newly discovered vast expanse of geological time gave the Victorians and examines some of the writings that helped shape responses to it. Though the book may not be of particular relevance to the historian focusing closely on Victorian geology or archaeology, for the historian of science who examines wider cultural or literary phenomena it is an important guide to the stimulus that the writings of geologists and archaeologists gave other mid-Victorian writers. Nevertheless, the specialist or narrowly focused historian of science will probably find it frustrating rather than helpful, since the overviews of Victorian geology and archaeology are brief and there are distracting errors, such as the attribution of theNinth Bridgewater Treatiseto William Buckland rather than to Charles Babbage (p. 18). The chapters on Tennyson and Dickens are both interesting and illuminating, although a reader accustomed to historical argument and with limited knowledge of the techniques of literary criticism may find them faintly bewildering in places. Nonetheless, it is in this part of the analysis that the work provides valuable guidance to the historian of science.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/597725

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: Éditions du Cerf
Issue: 598752
Date: 3 2006
Author(s): Eades Caroline
Abstract: Readers without solid background knowledge of French film and colonial history may have some difficulty navigating through Eades's tightly packed, allusive prose, especially since no index of any kind is provided. This absence is difficult to understand in a work of serious scholarship aimed at academic readers, as is the press's decision to invest in numerous glossy still‐frame illustrations that add nothing substantive to the analysis. However, the extensive, thematically organized filmographies and bibliographies that conclude the volume should prove very useful to all readers by providing a starting point for further reading and research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/598731

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 598771
Date: 8 2009
Author(s): Andrew Dudley
Abstract: See Andrew, “Time Zones and Jetlag: The Flows and Phases of World Cinema,” in World Cinemas,Transnational Perspectives, ed. Natasa Durovicová and Kathleen Newman (forthcoming).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/599587

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 598689
Date: 07 2009
Author(s): Ricoeur, Paul
Abstract: In providing clarification of previous works, Reflections on the Justis exceptionally helpful. Of particular interest in this volume is the paradoxical nature of authority—What is authority? How is it legitimated? Is it claimed or granted?—the existence of vulnerability and passivity within autonomy and initiative, and the relationship between moral ideals and historical manifestation, questions that exist more on the margins ofOneself as Another. Those interested in Ricoeur’s religious thought will find little of direct interest here. Those who see a deep connection between his moral philosophy and his philosophy of religion will find some confirmation, but there are other places where the connections are more explicitly manifest.Reflections on the Justis best approached as a companion volume to earlier philosophical works, certainlyThe Justbut perhaps more importantlyOneself as Another. As such, it holds an important place in Ricoeur’s oeuvre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/600278

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 598689
Date: 07 2009
Author(s): Mrozik, Susanne
Abstract: This second, more normative dimension of Mrozik’s project opens up some challenging questions. If it is the case, as she suggests, that a sympathetic reading of the Compendium of Trainingcan provide valuable intellectual resources for contemporary ethical reflection, it remains unclear to me how our engagement with this text should proceed, given the significant disparities in cosmological assumptions (e.g., karmic causation and rebirth) and forms of practice that separate Mrozik’s contemporary readers from the text’s original audience. The text, moreover, appears less concerned with advancing particular truth claims than with creating a distinctive kind of religious subjectivity through ascetic and ritualized practice. Can we assess the value of the text’s ethical ideals apart from the forms of discipline and practice with which they were linked in medieval India? IfVirtuous Bodiesleaves such questions open to further exploration and analysis, its nuanced reading of theCompendium of Trainingbrings into sharper focus the centrality of human embodiment in South Asian Buddhist religious discourses and encourages us to reflect deeply on its implications for our own ethical inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/600285

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 603531
Date: 10 2009
Author(s): Stokes Christopher
Abstract: Coleridge, Shorter Works, 2:1118–19.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/600876

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 644539
Date: 01 2010
Author(s): Franke, William
Abstract: Franke’s book has considerable merit, but I have a theoretical and a practical concern with his appropriation of negative theology. First, negative theology is never entirely negative, and while Franke recognizes that poetic language is both deconstructive and open, he nevertheless insists that our various theologies—literary or religious—finally have no positive content. Perhaps this is the postmodernism in his negative theology because this is not entirely consistent with the theological tradition. A good counterexample is Pseudo‐Dionysius, whose mystical theology seeks finally to overcome the limitations of both positive and negative speaking. Dionysius insists that God is love in a way that is both negative and positive. On this, Franke should consider the work of Jean‐Luc Marion and especially his response to Jacques Derrida on the subject of negative theology, and this omission is a considerable oversight. Second, many people of various faiths will never accept that their understanding of the transcendent has no positive content, and if this is a precondition for dialogue, then it is unlikely to occur. On this, the practical dimension of Franke’s study needs more development, as well as more traditional examples of poetic and theological openness from contemporary religious life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/649992

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 605587
Date: 6 2010
Author(s): Coleman Charly
Abstract: Ibid., 1:11–12, 2:443–49, quote on 1:12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/651614

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 651998
Date: 07 2010
Author(s): Kitts Margo
Abstract: Johann Huizinga, Homo Ludens: A Study of the Play‐Element in Culture(Boston: Beacon, 1950); Adolf E. Jensen,Myth and Cult among Primitive Peoples, trans. Marianna Tax Choldin and Wolfgang Weissleder (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1963); Pierre Smith, “Aspects of the Organization of Rites,” inBetween Belief and Transgression: Structuralist Essays in Religion, History and Myth, ed. Michael Izard and Pierre Smith and trans. John Leavitt (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1979), 103–28.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/651708

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 651999
Date: 10 2010
Author(s): Walter Gregory
Abstract: For instance, Hans Urs von Balthasar’s provocative account of the Eucharist: Hans Urs von Balthasar, Theodramatik(Einselden: Johannes, 1980), 3:363–78. Von Balthasar’s use of dramatic conceptuality seems to satisfy these demands by offering the Eucharist as a phenomenon that is surprising and free yet deeply imbedded within the economy of creation as a drama. Also of significance would be Bernd Wannenwetsch,Political Worship: Ethics for Christian Citizens, trans. Margaret Kohl (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/654823

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 655202
Date: 8 2010
Author(s): Hammerschlag Sarah
Abstract: Thanks to Clark Gilpin for helping me to see this double displacement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/655207

Journal Title: Isis
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 652685
Date: 9 2010
Author(s): Bono James J.
Abstract: For an approach to the issues raised by this Focus section see James J. Bono, “Perception, Living Matter, Cognitive Systems, Immune Networks: A Whiteheadian Future for Science Studies,” Configurations, 2005,13:135–181.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/655792

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 653501
Date: 08 2010
Author(s): Schildgen Brenda Deen
Abstract: Guy Guldentops, “The Sagacity of Bees: An Aristotelian Topos in Thirteenth-Century Philosophy,” in Steel, Guldentops, and Beullens, Aristotle's Animals, 296.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/656448

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 656725
Date: 01 01, 2011
Author(s): Pranger Burcht
Abstract: Augustine, Confessiones13.38.53; Chadwick, 305.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/656607

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 656725
Date: 01 01, 2011
Author(s): Thistleton Anthony C.
Abstract: These criticisms and oversights notwithstanding, there are many redeeming aspects to the book. Insofar as hermeneutics and exegesis are essential for any understanding of religious texts and traditions, Thistleton's work is a good way to be introduced to a complex history, the thorny debates, and the diverse approaches that have come to constitute its history and development. And the copious references that are made throughout and at the end of each chapter will enable readers to probe more deeply into a thinker, subject, or historical period of interest to them.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/659287

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 659348
Date: 4 2011
Author(s): Landy Joshua
Abstract: It is true, of course, that we have a much harder time postulating an author for Adaptation—that is, working out what an “ideal” Kaufman would have wanted the overall effect of his film to be—than postulating an author for the average Hollywood movie. Still, it is surely not the case thatAdaptation“undermines the concept of the author as a unifying origin and legitimation,” as Karen Diehl claims (Karen Diehl, “Once upon an Adaptation: Traces of the Authorial on Film,” inBooks in Motion: Adaptation, Intertextuality, Authorship, ed. Mireia Aragay [Amsterdam, 2005], p. 100). It may be harder to know what Kaufman is up to than what James Cameron (say) is up to, but Kaufman is clearly up tosomething, and the film bears if anything a more powerful stamp of an original vision than that average movie we find easier to read. In fact,Adaptationhas only solidified Kaufman's reputation as a filmmaker with an idiosyncratic and internally consistent way of seeing the world. (Although cinema is a collaborative enterprise, it is reasonable to imagine Spike Jonze and company collectively seeking to realize Kaufman's design.) Far from putting inherited notions of authorship into question, then, it has comfortably positioned Kaufman as the “unifying origin” of his various works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/659355

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 660269
Date: 08 2011
Author(s): Guenther Genevieve
Abstract: For the original argument that early modern drama evacuated spiritual forms of their content, see Stephen Greenblatt, “Shakespeare and the Exorcists,” in Shakespearean Negotiations: The Circulation of Social Energy in Renaissance England(Berkeley: University of California Press, 1988), 94–128.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/662147

Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 662056
Date: 01 01, 2012
Author(s): Bowman Sharon
Abstract: In sum, this is one of the most important books on selves or the practical side of personhood in the last decade. It is also well written; the particular arguments are virtually always clear, and it is not too hard to keep track of their role within in the larger argument of the book. Some portions rise to an almost literary style and provide a rich survey of key ideas in twentieth-century French philosophy, while others engage quite originally with scholarship in moral psychology and theories of self-knowledge that will be more familiar to analytic readers. This work also complements the more detailed ethical theory on Larmore’s other books. Despite its relative inattention to volitional aspects of practical identity, and some questionable moves in the critique of authenticity, then, this work is still highly recommended.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/663580

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 662286
Date: 01 01, 2012
Author(s): Regan Ethna
Abstract: The text covers a lot of ground, delving into many of the touch points between theology and human rights and endeavoring to demonstrate how those points can be sources of mutual enrichment rather than conflict. At times the comprehensive scope of the text, which draws on the insights of so many, makes it a challenging read and leaves the reader wanting more development and illustration of the fruits of the author’s argument. Overall, the text is an important contribution to the constructive engagement between theology and human rights discourse and is a serious challenge to those in either camp who would peremptorily reject the insights of the other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/663745

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 665386
Date: 10 01, 2012
Author(s): Walton Heather,
Abstract: The cultural and social sciences are welcome to examine and critique theology and Christian practice, and theology can profitably learn from these studies, but the studies themselves are not theology. To be theology, even in an interdisciplinary sense, the work must become constructive and speak to the religiousthought and practice of specific communities or faith traditions. In any given community, theology can become a displaced language in need of renewal, but theology can also uncover the displaced or implicit religion within the seemingly secular. To do this well, theology must remain in critical tension with the cultural sciences, including literature. The result may well be deconstructive, but such radical critique is necessary for any living tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/668266

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 669643
Date: 05 01, 2013
Author(s): Vásquez Manuel A.
Abstract: In sum: while it has it flaws, this book is one of the most comprehensive and up-to-date surveys of the field of theories of religion around. It is worth the cover price for that alone, which makes it definitely recommendable. Those who want to learn about the current state of theory, especially if they tend in the realist direction, will find this book very useful. Constructivists acquainted with theory will likely find it less so.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/669654

Journal Title: Journal of Near Eastern Studies
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 671448
Date: 10 01, 2013
Author(s): Feder Yitzhaq
Abstract: For a different view on the function of conceptual blending, cf. E. G. Slingerland, “Conceptual Blending, Somatic Marking and Normativity: A Case Example from Ancient Chinese,” Cognitive Linguistics16 (2005): 557–84.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/671434

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 668652
Date: 10 01, 2013
Author(s): Csordas Thomas
Abstract: Pablo Wright observes that while I leave behind Geertz’s concept of a cultural system with respect to morality, I retain the Geertzian concern with symbols and meaning. I would not dispute Wright’s statement that meaning is the master concept on a methodological level prior to the substantive issue of evil but would stress that in addition to idiom, code, practice, and symbol, experience must figure into a comprehensive account. Wright’s evocative references to “moral installation in the world” (one might consider terms like investment, suffusion, and tonality, as well as installation) and morality as a “practiced ontology in the micropolitics of social life” deserve further elaboration. Wright endorses a pluralized notion of moralities, but I reiterate that even more important is an adjectival sense of moral rather than the nominal morality. Like Parkin, Wright poses the question of how to reintroduce the ethnographically salient notions of cosmological and radical evil once evil is first construed as a human and intersubjective phenomenon. The answer is to ask how these dimensions come into play in the experiential immediacy of social life, for example, how a cosmological battle between angels and devils is experienced concretely on the human scale. Finally, he suggests that concepts of power from Otto and the shadow from Jung may be alternatives to the notion of evil, though I rejoin that they are just as much in need of critique with respect to Christian overtones. They may be valuable for the study of morality but are not suitable replacements for evil in the sense for which I have argued.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/672210

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 670329
Date: 07 01, 2013
Author(s): Fisher Cass
Abstract: Despite these caveats, Contemplative Nationis highly recommended for scholars of Jewish studies, religious studies, philosophy, and theology. The book is an excellent example of how to apply hermeneutical theories to the study of Judaism, how to bridge the gap between continental philosophy and analytic philosophy, and how to expand the scope of Jewish studies by appreciating the nature of theological discourse. While Judaica scholars could use the book in university-level courses, and rabbis could apply its approach to synagogue life, the claim that “Israel” is a “contemplative nation” will hardly resonate with most Jews today. It is very doubtful that the book could “guide the way for [the] future” of the Jewish people’s survival (226), precisely because Jews today are overwhelmingly secular, and the culture in which Jews live, both in Israel and in the Diaspora, is anti-intellectual and antitheological. Furthermore, if Fisher is so keen on Philo, he should have also reminded his readers of the fate of Philo’s enterprise: it was no coincidence that Philo became one of the Church Fathers and that his exegetical/hermeneutical project was not adopted by the tradition that became normative Judaism. When “Israel” denotes a nation of divine contemplators, “carnal Israel” (namely “Israel” as a historical, cultural, and ethnic entity) is marginalized, denigrated, and persecuted. It is true that Jewish religious life is theological, but being Jewish cannot be reduced to contemplating God.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/672230

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673367
Date: 02 01, 2014
Author(s): Lehnhof Kent R.
Abstract: Critchley uses the term in a discussion of Levinas and politics. Noting that government tends to become tyrannical when left to itself, Critchley commends the way Levinas’s ethical ideas can cultivate forms of “dissensual emancipatory praxis” that “work against the consensual idyll of the state, not in order to do away with the state or consensus, but to bring about its endless betterment” (“Five Problems in Levinas’s View of Politics,” 183).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/673478

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 674410
Date: 02 01, 2014
Author(s): Rüpke Jörg
Abstract: See the analysis of Metzger ( Religion, Geschichte, Nation). For the modern spread of the paradigm, see Leigh E. Schmidt, “A History of All Religions,”Journal of the Early Republic24 (2004): 327–34.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/674241

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673750
Date: 08 01, 2014
Author(s): Hequembourg Stephen
Abstract: See George Herbert, “The Forerunners” and “Jordan (I),” in George Herbert: The Complete English Poems, ed. John Tobin (New York: Penguin, 2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/676498

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 677726
Date: 10 01, 2014
Author(s): Urbaniak Jakub
Abstract: Depoortere, Badiou and Theology, 123–24.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/677288

Journal Title: Renaissance Drama
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673118
Date: 09 01, 2014
Author(s): Huth Kimberly
Abstract: Wayne C. Booth, “Metaphor as Rhetoric: The Problem of Evaluation,” in Sacks, On Metaphor, 61.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/678121

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 677726
Date: 10 01, 2014
Author(s): Peperzak Adriaan T.
Abstract: Peperzak in this book also offers continental thinkers an appealing alternative to the theological turn of phenomenology as practiced by Jean-Luc Marion and others. While Peperzak takes seriously the idea that “God cannot be investigated or explained … because God is not given as a describable phenomenon,” this realization does not turn his phenomenology away from the investigation of rational thinking because for Peperzak reason itself has to be rethought in terms of the intersubjective encounters between nonthematizable—human and divine—sayers (121). Consequently, much more than some of the thinkers of the theological turn, Peperzak’s work maintains a broadly humanist sensibility and a conviction that theological thinking and philosophy can be integrated quite well, provided the latter does not close itself off in autarky. In his humanism, Peperzak echoes the best elements in the philosophical style both of his teacher Paul Ricoeur and the philosophical tradition of his own Catholic faith, although he implicitly critiques the former for insisting too vehemently on the autonomy of philosophy (128) and calls out the latter for separating “natural reason” from faith (182–86). For his own part, Peperzak hopes to maintain an open space between faith and reason: “I do not see any valid argument against the integration of philosophical insights into a faith-inspired theology … neither would I protest if an integrated reflection of the Christian community about its faith would call itself philosophia” (160). For the many who share similar sentiments today,Thinking about Thinkingwill make a valuable guide to the conversation of philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/679208

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 527516
Date: 4 2005
Author(s): Popkin Jeremy D.
Abstract: This book is a very original and important contribution to both the study of autobiography and that of historiography. In addition to his analysis of autobiographies of historians, Popkin gives new insights about the relationship between narrative and history. Maybe every historian should write an autobiography at some stage as an essential step in his or her professional development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/ahr.111.2.429

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: Brill
Issue: 526084
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Mooij J. J. A.
Abstract: Closely related to the philosophical problem of consciousness of time was the question of the meaning of time and duration in psychology and in literature. Although Mooij mentions William James's notion of “specious present” in passing, he fails to explicate James's perception of time, which attempted to provide an empiricist account of our temporal concepts through the influence of John Locke (p. 197). Apart from this caveat, the book's strength lies in its perceptiveness and breadth of interpretation of the history of the concept of time. Mooij's accuracy in comprehending and in transmitting the essence of such difficult and complicated philosophies is remarkable.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/ahr.111.4.1130

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Issue: 526084
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Gutterman David S.
Abstract: Ultimately it is at times unclear what is gained in making these comparisons or if such analysis “enhances our understanding of the relationship between religious narratives and politics” (p. 92). What precisely is revealed in grouping these movements together, other than that political crisis invites prophetic criticism? Gutterman carefully unpacks the readings of shared Biblical texts, and he skillfully details contextual and interpretative differences. But one wishes he had gone beyond these descriptive endeavors to construct a more nuanced account of the relationship between religion and politics and, more importantly, of the specifically religious grounds of the activism he examines. While Gutterman can be theoretically deft—in exploring the relation between narrative and politics (p. 21) or garden/wilderness metaphors (p. 47)—he is not fully engaged with the literature on political religion, often citing unrepresentative figures like William Connolly or Stephen Carter. He is a sharp writer with an eye for interesting problems and material. I applaud his engagement with important issues and also the ambition of his thinking. But his central categories require further explication, and this book speaks to the need for more conversations across disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/ahr.111.4.1221

Journal Title: The Journal of Politics
Publisher: University of Missouri Press
Issue: jpolitics.68.issue-2
Date: 05 2004
Author(s): Eubanks Cecil
Abstract: Both Faith and PhilosophyandEric Voegelin's Dialogues with the Postmodernsilluminate and challenge the assumptions in Voegelin's philosophy and lead readers in new directions for Voegelinian scholarship. They are indispensable readings for students of political philosophy in their examination of transcendence, philosophy, and politics. By seeing Voegelin as a postmodern thinker and by showing his exchange with Strauss, both of these books provide us with a broader context to understand Voegelin's political philosophy. As part of the University of Missouri Press' new series, bothFaith and PhilosophyandEric Voegelin's Dialogues with the Postmodernsprovide intellectually provocative and serious-minded secondary works on Eric Voegelin and his ultimate place in political philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1111/j.1468-2508.2006.00420_20.x

Journal Title: Criticism
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: criticism.55.issue-3
Date: 7 1, 2008
Abstract: Sean McAlister is a doctoral candidate and instructor in the Department of English at the University of British Columbia. His work has also appeared in Language and Literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.13110/criticism.55.3.0471

Journal Title: Renaissance Quarterly
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Issue: 594996
Date: 6 2, 2005
Author(s): Anderson Judith H
Abstract: The very centrality of its questions to literary studies may be the greatest handicap for Translating Investments.Words That Matter, especially in its recovery of grammatical theory, had more surprises page-for-page. Here the big ideas are perforce more familiar, the innovations more incremental. The reward, however, is a fine sense of metaphor as a cultural project across an especially broad range of terrain in early modern England. Anderson insists, and teaches us to insist, on the local, historical conditions of metaphor’s torpor and vitality, how writers thought about and went about killing and quickening the trope she calls “the scaffolding of human culture” (216).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1353/ren.2008.0264

Journal Title: CR: The New Centennial Review
Publisher: Galaxia-Gutemberg
Issue: crnewcentrevi.14.issue-3
Date: 12 2007
Author(s): Valéry Paul
Abstract: Benjamin also notes: “Every present day is determined by the images that are synchronic with it: each ‘now’ is the now of a particular recognizability. In it, truth is charged to the bursting point with time. (This point of explosion, and nothing else, is the death of the intentio, which thus coincides with the birth of authentic historical time, the time of truth.) It is not that what is past casts its light on what is present, or what is present its light on what is past; rather, image is that wherein what has been comes together in a flash with the now to form a constellation” (2002, N3,1). The two great related demands made by T. S. Eliot in “Tradition and the Individual Talent” will also be recalled here: his call for the exercise of the “historical sense” as a juxtaposition of significant events from discontinuous times, which in turn produces an “impersonal” (nonintentional) effect. These demands define the representation of history in works such asThe Waste Landand Pound’s early cantos.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/crnewcentrevi.14.3.0001

Journal Title: QED: A Journal in GLBTQ Worldmaking
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Issue: qed.1.issue-1
Date: 4 2014
Author(s): Wight Jules
Abstract: James Poniewozik, “When Did Chelsea Manning Become Chelsea Manning?” Time, August 28, 2013,http://entertainment.time.com/2013/08/28/when-did-chelsea-manning-become-chelsea-manning/.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/qed.1.1.0118

Journal Title: Classical Antiquity
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ca.2006.25.issue-1
Date: 4 2006
Author(s): Moatti Claudia
Abstract: AbstractThis paper isolates movement as a topic for analysis in Roman imperial history. Movement is regarded under three aspects: translation (of texts, practices, ideas), migration (of officials, merchants, students, etc.), and communication (i.e. the movement of written documents). Interrelationships among the three aspects of movement are identified and discussed, as are the shared impact of translation, migration, and communication on issues of cultural and social identity and political negotiation and control. The article argues that movement changes the role of the state as well as relations between individual and states, augments the use of writing in society, transforms identities, and gives impulse to internal and external regulations. The implications of movement are understood as both pragmatic and formal, altering relations to space and time and influencing ways of organizing and thinking. The author surveys current work in the field and identifies potential areas for future research. The paper draws heavily on both literary and documentary sources and discusses material from the late republic through late antiquity, paying particular attention to continuities and discontinuities between early and later periods of the Roman empire.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ca.2006.25.1.109

Journal Title: Classical Antiquity
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ca.2013.32.issue-1
Date: 04 2013
Abstract: This article argues that the end of Tacitus's Dialogus de Oratoribusis inconclusive in ways that draw attention to the difficulty of interpretation not onlyofthe dialogue, as by modern scholars, but alsointhe dialogue, as by its leading characters. The inconclusiveness is especially marked by a commonly noted, but little discussed, feature of the end: when the rest of the characters laugh at the point of departure, Tacitus himself does not. Arguing that this difference of affective response on the part of the characters prefigures differences in interpretive response on the part of readers, the article identifies different strains in recent scholarship: pessimistic and optimistic. Both forms of response entail an attribution of a “poetics of conspiracy” (Hinds) to the ultimate speaker of the dialogue, the author Tacitus, and a “hermeneutics of suspicion” (Ricoeur) to its reader. At the same time, the author's double-position, as character and author, between narrated event and narration of the event to the reader, suggests that the other characters in the dialogue may, like the author and reader, also exercise such poetics and hermeneutics on one another and themselves. The article ends with thecomparandumof the first satire of Tacitus's near contemporary, Juvenal, suggesting that, in the case of these works that can look with hindsight on the social and political past of the Early Empire, their modes of transmission and reception may be politically determined (e.g., as conspiratorial, suspicious) but may also demonstrate, within the restrictions of social and political determinations, a high degree of contingency, reflexivity, and autonomy. Such possibilities suggest that the text itself is part of a pragmatic and performative tradition of the kind enacted by its characters, in addition to a tradition of the production of (comparatively static and unfree) “literary” works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ca.2013.32.1.1

Journal Title: International Review of Qualitative Research
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: irqr.2008.1.issue-1
Date: 05 2008
Abstract: This paper puts the nature of scientificity on the feminist agenda. Sedgwick's reparative reading, Spivak's dislocating negotiation, Wilson's analytics of breaching and Lather's getting lost are unpacked via exemplars from recent feminist re-inscriptions of empirical work in order to begin to grasp what is on the horizon in terms of new analytics and practices of inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/irqr.2008.1.1.55

Journal Title: International Review of Qualitative Research
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: irqr.2014.7.issue-2
Date: 8 2014
Author(s): Walther Joachim
Abstract: This paper explores visual response methods as a representation of student learning in a college-level interdisciplinary curriculum integrating art and engineering. The visual response methods, specifically visual journals and postcards, are examples of authentic assessment and alternative data collection methods embedded in a mixed-methods (qualitative dominant) practitioner research case study. In the paper, we focus on different means for analyzing these visual responses (e.g., through hermeneutic analysis, document analysis, and narrative analysis) and deliberate the contribution of diverse analysis methods to the researchers’ understanding of students’ experiences of interdisciplinarity in this course.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/irqr.2014.7.2.217

Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jams.2002.55.issue-3
Date: 12 2002
Author(s): Calcagno Mauro
Abstract: Conventional views of text/music relationships in early Italian opera focus on the imitation of affections. But by dealing exclusively with the referential meanings of texts (e.g., emotions, images, and concepts) these views overlook an important aspect of music's interaction with language. In opera, music also imitates language's contextual and communicative functions—i.e., discourse, as studied today by the subfield of linguistics called pragmatics. In his operas Monteverdi fully realized Peri's ideal of “imitating in song a person speaking” (“imitar col canto chi parla”) by musically emphasizing those context-dependent meanings that emerge especially in ordinary language and that are prominent in dramatic texts, as opposed to poetry and prose. Such meanings are manifest whenever words such as “I,” “here,” and “now” appear— words called “deictics”—with the function of situating the speaker/singer's utterances in a specific time and place. Monteverdi highlights deictics through melodic and rhythmic emphases, repetition, shifts of meter, style, and harmony, as part of a strategy to create a musical language suited to opera as a genre and to singers as actors. In Il ritorno d'Ulisse in patriaandL'incoronazione di Poppea, this strategy serves large-scale dramaturgical aims with respect to the relationships among space, time, and character identity, highlighting issues also discussed within the contemporary intellectual context.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jams.2002.55.3.383

Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jams.2004.57.issue-3
Date: February 2005
Author(s): Higgins Paula
Abstract: Within the theoretical framework of Roland Barthes's writings on myth and ideology, this essay seeks to expose the historical legitimation project through which the mythmaking, universalizing rhetoric of musical genius that has long surrounded the figure of Ludwig van Beethoven came to infiltrate scholarship on Josquin des Prez, culminating in his late twentieth-century apotheosis. Contextualizing the composer's reception history with respect to the debates between Joseph Kerman and Edward Lowinsky in 1965 and especially the 1971 Josquin Festival-Conference, the author suggests that the ideological refashioning of Josquin in the image of Beethoven has simultaneously shaped and derailed the intellectual trajectory of early music scholarship in the past thirty years. By privileging a discourse of musical genius in the service of which, among other concerns, the canon of works attributed to the composer is being decimated beyond historical recognition, the richness and complexity of the musical culture of which he was a vital part risks being overshadowed and obfuscated by the disproportionate amount of attention invested in his singular accomplishments. The essay advocates a resolute historicization of sixteenth-century discourses of creative endowment, a critical reassessment of the role of authentication scholarship in Josquin studies, and a renewed sensitivity to the imbrication of mythologies of musical genius in music historiographies of both the past and the present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jams.2004.57.3.443

Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jams.2012.65.issue-1
Date: April 2012
Abstract: In his 1986 essay on the intersections between music theory, phenomenology, and perception, David Lewin develops a heuristic model through which to come to terms with the constitution of multiple and heterogeneous perceptions of musical events. One of his principal vehicles for demonstrating this phenomenological turn is the well-known analysis of Schubert's “Morgengruß.” The present article considers the ramifications of Lewin's methodology, particularly with respect to the experience of time that emerges from Lewin's mobilization of the heuristic perception model, by approaching it from the perspective of Husserl's Phenomenology of Internal Time Consciousness. This perspective reveals a superposition of temporalities as well as a superposition of languages as the underlying factors through which Lewin's analysis is produced.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jams.2012.65.1.179

Journal Title: The Journal of Musicology
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jm.2014.31.issue-4
Date: 10 2014
Author(s): Cochran Timothy B.
Abstract: In volume six of Traité de rythme, de couleur, et d’ornithologie, Olivier Messiaen uses the phrase “the pebble in the water” to identify a class of especially stark rhythmic contrasts in Debussy’s music that feature long durations interrupted by rapid rhythms. He invests these contrasts with an expressive logic built around the concept of shock—that is, the sudden stimulation of a static context by an outside presence. Messiaen unites various images—both natural and psychological—around this expressive pattern via analogy, suggesting that its essence is transferrable within a network of associated metaphors. Although for the most part in volume six Messiaen refrains from linking interpretations of Debussy with his own music, many of his rhythmic contrasts manifest the same expressive logic that he ascribes to Debussy’s music, particularly durational events that signify the interjection of birdsong within serene environments and that signal the striking appearance of divine power on earth. In addition to stylistic and semiotic correlations, the logic of shock theorized for the pebble in the water recurs more abstractly in Messiaen’s idiomatic views on musical experience and spiritual encounter. His interpretation of rhythmic contrast bears the marks of his more general aesthetics of shock, which in turn can be read as a reorientation of a broader modernist hermeneutic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jm.2014.31.4.503

Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Architectural Historians
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jsah.2011.70.issue-1
Date: 03 2011
Author(s): Ortenberg Alexander
Abstract: Chapman, "Unrealized Designs," 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jsah.2011.70.1.38

Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Architectural Historians
Publisher: University of Hawai’i Press
Issue: jsah.2012.71.issue-4
Date: 12 2010
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Time and Narrative, trans. Kathleen Blamey and David Pellauer (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1985).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jsah.2012.71.4.564

Journal Title: The San Francisco Jung Institute Library Journal
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jung.1.2005.24.issue-1
Date: 02 2005
Author(s): Marlan Stanton
Abstract: Stanton Marlan, “Hesitation and Slowness: Gateway to Psyche's Depth,” San Francisco Jung Institute Library Journal, 2005, 24:1, 17-27. This paper focuses on hesitation and slowness in the work of Jungian analysis. It emphasizes the importance of patience as a way of achieving depth and of avoiding facile and abstract formulations that lack respect for the true otherness of the analysand and for the fundamental enigmas of analytic work. Alongside the techniques of Freud and Jung, and drawing on Alchemy and on Renaissance and Eastern wisdom traditions, the author articulates a complex notion of hesitation. The paper deconstructs simple binary pairings of fast and slow and suggests an attitude of purposeless wandering as an important compensation to the overly technologically-oriented attitudes and fast-paced culture that have invaded our therapeutic sensibilities and consulting rooms.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jung.1.2005.24.1.17

Journal Title: Law and Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: lal.2003.15.issue-3
Date: 11 2003
Author(s): Gana Nouri
Abstract: Abstract. Gadamer's pursuit inTruth and Methodof an applicative literary hermeneutics modeled on legal hermeneutics earns him the status of a precursor to the emergence of what is known in North America as the “literature and law movement.” Attentive to the debates and controversies surrounding this movement, this article seeks to explore an interpretive interzone in which the judge and the literary critic, if they apply themselves to a poetics of elasticity, might be of exemplary significance to each other. The notion of “exemplarity” does not, however, imply a mechanical appropriation of the practices of the one by the other, but a mutually nuanced and complicated approximation of the strengths of each by the other. In the light of this normative poetics of proximity and distance, Dworkin's model of the “chain novel” is assessed and supplemented by (an alternative) model grounded in Foucault's genealogy of authorship as expounded in his article “What Is an Author?”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/lal.2003.15.3.313

Journal Title: Mexican Studies/Estudios Mexicanos
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: msem.2004.20.issue-2
Date: 08 2004
Author(s): Matute Álvaro
Abstract: Más que hacer un recorrido a través de la vasta producción historiográfica mexicana de los últimos 20 años (1984-2004), el artículo pretende analizar las condiciones de desarrollo institucional a partir de las cuales se ha desenvuelto dicha producción historiográfica. Los sistemas de evaluación desarrollados a partir del Sistema Nacional de Investigadores cobran un papel relevante. Asimismo, se pone énfasis en el surgimiento de las nuevas generaciones de historiadores, en los nuevos temas que se han incorporado a los tradicionalmente tratados y en el contraste entre las nuevas propuestas de los historiadores provenientes de los resultados de las investigaciones y las interpretaciones a que han dado lugar y la resistencia del público, moldeado por la inercia de la historia oficial. El artículo está deliberadamente planteado con títulos y elementos de don Luis González, a cuya memoria está dedicado.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/msem.2004.20.2.327

Journal Title: Mexican Studies/Estudios Mexicanos
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: msem.2013.29.issue-2
Date: 8 2013
Author(s): Vázquez Juan de Dios
Abstract: This essay examines the novel Cementerio de Papel[Paper Cemetery] (2002), a detective thriller about a murder that took place under the dome of the Archivo General de la Nación [National General Archive] (Lecumberri). The relocation and opening of the files of the former Dirección Federal de Seguridad [Federal Security Bureau] in the former prison comes along with the return of victims and victimizers, only now they come back as ghosts of things past. The novel works with the binomial jail/archive, featuring Lecumberri as a live space from which to begin a search for justice and truth, without sinking into melancholy or victimhood.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/msem.2013.29.2.478

Journal Title: Music Theory Spectrum
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: mts.2006.28.issue-2
Date: 10 2006
Author(s): LOCHHEAD JUDY
Abstract: Charles Dodge's Any Resemblance is Purely Coincidentalposes a challenge to a musical analyst seeking to explain “how it works.” For piano and computer-generated tape, including a sample from the famed tenor Caruso singing Leoncavallo's “Vesti la giubba,” Dodge's piece challenges notions of what counts as the work's structural elements and how the analyst gathers evidence about them. The article proposes an analysis ofAny Resemblancethat addresses these challenges.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/mts.2006.28.2.233

Journal Title: Music Theory Spectrum
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: mts.2010.32.issue-2
Date: 10 2010
Author(s): Ivanovitch Roman
Abstract: At the heart of this essay is the suggestion that variation can be understood as a vital mode of Mozart's musical thinking, an impulse evident not merely in movements labeled "theme and variation," but in his output as a whole. Accordingly, I begin by sketching a more general theoretical context for the interaction of this variation impulse with the more teleological formal dynamics of sonata.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/mts.2010.32.2.145

Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ncl.2003.57.issue-4
Date: 03 01, 2003
Author(s): Stern Rebecca F.
Abstract: Christina Rossetti's "Goblin Market" (1862) has garnered seemingly limitless critical interpretation — the goblins' remarkable fruit inviting allegorical readings of the poem that reference, most popularly, Christianity, sexuality, and capitalism. In this essay I read fruit simply as food, situating the poem within the context of food adulteration contemporary with its 1859 composition. Food adulteration was a widespread problem in Victorian England, as increasing numbers of merchants cut flour with alum, doctored curry with mercury, and enhanced the appearance of potted fruits and vegetables with copper and lead. Public alarm regarding this form of fraud reached its height in the 1850s, largely due to the work of an independent Analytical Sanitary Commission, which published its findings in The Lancetbetween 1851 and 1854. While Parliament responded to these reports with the formation of a Select Committee in 1855, the popular press responded with articles, tracts, and ballads addressing this pandemic problem. Manuals that instructed consumers how to protect themselves by acquiring the accoutrements of home laboratories proliferated, as did references to adulteration in popular literature. In this essay I read Rossetti's poem as an example of this type of reference. The market of the poem's title, I argue, references a literally contaminated marketplace in which the numbers of people who ate ostensibly nutritious food, only to wither and die in consequence, provoked both governmental and popular alarm.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ncl.2003.57.4.477

Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ncl.2005.60.issue-2
Date: 09 2005
Author(s): JÖTTKANDT SIGI
Abstract: Walter Pater's theoretical "come-back" over the past forty years or so has been dominated by the competing claims of the new historicism and deconstruction, both of which discover prescient forerunners of their own, seemingly mutually exclusive, theoretical concerns in Pater's aesthetic criticism and in his historical novel Marius the Epicurean (1885). Yet despite their obvious differences, both critical approaches share one thing in common: the same post-humanist denigration of the trope of metaphor in favor of the seemingly more ethically responsive (because inclusive) trope of metonymy. In this essay I observe how the new historicism's and deconstruction's privilegings of metonymy as the prime trope of difference poses an immediate problem for ethical thought that, largely under the influence of Alain Badiou, has become increasingly cognizant of the need for a workable conception of sameness (or universality), traditionally supplied by metaphor. Accordingly, this close reading of the metaphorical dialectic of one of Pater's surprisingly underread Imaginary Portraits, "Sebastian van Storck" (1887), explores the basic charge against metaphor-namely, that it is an essentially "theological" trope insofar as it invariably pre-posits the "identity" that it modestly claims to have merely discovered. Employing the central figure of Sebastian's idealism- equation-I venture that, once rethought as a relation not of identity but of equivalence, metaphor is capable of shouldering the rhetorical burden of similarity without relinquishing its ethical claim as a primary producer of new differences in the world and is, hence, deserving of a central place in a post-deconstructive ethics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ncl.2005.60.2.163

Journal Title: 19th-Century Music
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ncm.2001.25.issue-2-3
Date: 11 01, 2001
Author(s): Webster James
Abstract: 3. A brief account of the crucial role of the 1790s in these developments, focusing on the complementary achievements of Haydn and Beethoven. For Beethoven, Haydn's and Mozart's music was, precisely, modern. Together, he and Haydn dominated the Viennese scene, producing ever-more-imposing masterworks in every genre except opera. This explicitly modernist orientation was fostered, if not indeed in part created, by their patrons. After 1800 Beethoven maintained and further developed this same tradition. These years "between" Enlightenment and Romanticism were no mere transition; they constituted an equally weighty phase, on the same historical-structural "level," as those that preceded and followed it. Concomitantly, Romanticism as such did not become predominant in music until 1815, in Viennese music (except for the Lied) perhaps not even until 1828/30. For both reasons, it makes sense to regard the beginning of the music-historical nineteenth century as having been "delayed," until around 1815 or 1830.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ncm.2001.25.2-3.108

Journal Title: 19th-Century Music
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ncm.2012.36.issue-1
Date: July 2012
Abstract: Framed in such a way, the early movements of Mahler's Second Symphony—characterized by the alternation between halting sections that dissolve almost as soon as they begin and long-breathed melodies that seem to unfold effortlessly—suggest the melancholic subject's struggle between despair in the face of abject meaninglessness and a manic euphoria, neither of which addresses the loss. By contrast, the text in the symphony's final movement, adapted by Mahler from Friedrich Klopstock's chorale on the resurrection of the dead, encourages true remembrance of the deceased as a figure beyond death. Heard as a musical enactment of mourning, the final movement suggests that the dead who are mourned are resurrected through remembrance. Forcing us to acknowledge Mahler's death on some level, the final movement completes the work of mourning by engendering the composer's own resurrection in our memories as we witness each performance of his Second Symphony.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ncm.2012.36.1.058

Journal Title: Nova Religio: The Journal of Alternative and Emergent Religions
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: nr.2010.14.issue-2
Date: 11 2010
Author(s): Thomas Paul Brian
Abstract: By utilizing the textual products of extraterrestrial-inspired religious thinkers like George Van Tassel, Raël, and Patricia Cori, as well as related materials by Erich von Däniken and Zecharia Sitchin, this article explores the concept of revisionism in ET-inspired religions. The authors examined in this article reread ancient religious texts, especially the Bible, as containing evidence of extraterrestrial influence in the course of human history. The anatomy of this "drive to revise" human history is explored, including an examination of how an improvisational millenarianism combines with a cultic milieu suspicious of authority and hegemonic narratives, and the conspiratorial intellectual maverick willing to work with "stigmatized" knowledge to produce narratives that are highly critical and suspicious of established intellectual authorities and procedures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/nr.2010.14.2.61

Journal Title: Nova Religio: The Journal of Alternative and Emergent Religions
Publisher: The University of California Press
Issue: nr.2012.16.issue-1
Date: 8 1, 2012
Abstract: Drawing on my own fieldwork experiences with the transnational Integral Yoga community, this essay offers some reflections on two possible approaches to bridging insider-outsider perspectives in the study of new religious movements. First, I consider Gerald Larson's suggestion of a “relationship of mutual reciprocity” between researcher and religious community. Second, I discuss the value of a participatory approach that attempts to integrate engaged participation with critical distance in the study of religion. I use my collaborative experience co-authoring an academic article on Sri Aurobindo and the contemporary yoga scene with an Integral Yoga practitioner to argue that while Larson's reciprocal enterprise risks either sacrificing critical concerns to apologetic agendas, or polarizing the insider as apologetic and the outsider as reductive, a participatory approach proposes a way to put insider-outsider perspectives into a more creative relation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/nr.2012.16.1.88

Journal Title: Representations
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rep.2006.93.issue-1
Date: 02 2006
Author(s): MORT FRANK
Abstract: ABSTRACT Historians of the sexual and cultural changes associated with the “permissive” moment of the 1960s have tended to emphasize a progressive narrative of reform focused on national policies and their social outcomes. This article explores a diffierent dynamic, highlighting the ways in which a series of scandalous and transgressive events, associated with particular networks of metropolitan culture in London, played a significant role in reshaping sexual beliefs and attitudes within English society during the postwar period.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rep.2006.93.1.106

Journal Title: Representations
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rep.2010.109.issue-1
Date: 02 2010
Author(s): Schaefer William
Abstract: Observing a conjunction between massive rural-to-urban migration and the recent documentary turn in Chinese art, this essay suggests some of the ways documentary photography works as a medium of historical thinking in contemporary China. Through the work of the photographer Zhang Xinmin, it examines the cultural politics of blankness and marked surfaces as representational strategies for exploring the intersection of historical remains and mass migration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rep.2010.109.1.1

Journal Title: Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rh.1996.14.issue-4
Date: 11 01, 1996
Author(s): Gross Daniel M.
Abstract: Abstract: Vico's theory of metaphor is best understood as a monster in the tradition of classical rhetorical invention. It is the mutant offspring of metaphor characterized as "necessary" (an "ear" of com, for example) and metaphor characterized in terms of analogy. From the perspective of his method. Vico marries these apparently incompatible forms inherited from Aristotle and thereby identifies a third type of linguistic metaphor. I argue that the metaphor identifies a stipulatory definition taken out of context. In order to situate this claim, I outline Vico's genetic analysis and elaborate in general terms what metaphor and definition share. Most importantly. Vico insists that beings, actions, and events are linguistically identifiedin some particular diseursive context. Indeed, in many cases that context alone determines whether the expression can be called a definition or a metaphor. Like Cicero's ideal jurist, Vico's hero employs motivated words and realizes possibilities available to common sense. Henee Vico's theory of metaphor is both "constructivist"—language has the power to makes things—and "humartist"—it must do so in a form appropriate to history and culture. Vico's theory is consequently important to us because it challenges the proper/figurative distinction championed in the philosophy of language and adds a pragmatic dimension to contemporary views of metaphor at work in literary theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rh.1996.14.4.359

Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.1986.9.issue-1
Date: May 1986
Author(s): Kleinman Sherryl
Abstract: Many sociologists have tried in vain to find the “true” meaning of the classic works in the discipline. An interactionist perspective suggests that this search is not a valid one for sociologists, especially symbolic interactionists. Although there can be no “true” meaning, some authors use conventions of writing that make their work more orless clear. Using Mead'sMind, Self and Societyas an example, we discuss the dimensions of clarity. We then argue that the sociological classics should be read to (I) simulate new theories and research (pragmatic analysis), (2) determine how sociologists have used that classic to support or refute particular theories or perspectives (rhetorical analysis), and (3) provide information about the sociological concerns of the author and his/her contemporaries (historical analysis).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.1986.9.1.129

Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.2000.23.issue-3
Date: November 2000
Author(s): !Manning Philip
Abstract: There are two ways of reading Goffman--as a theorist of trust and ritual accommodation, that is, as a theorist of the interaction order, or as a theorist of deception. I suggest a way of making these two readings compatible, by arguing that Goffman was interested in what I call the “production of credibility.” Credibility is the quality of being believable, and this quality is integral to both trust and deception. Viewed in this way, Goffman explored the ways in which people make their actions convincing to other people. Although Goffman's analysis of the interaction order did not need a theory of the self, his work actually contains two quite different theories of the self: one linked to role analysis, one to his analysis of mental illness. I argue for the latter at the expense of the former. I conclude that Goffman both initiated substantive work about the interaction order and contributed to a synthesis of a theory of the interaction order and a theory of the self.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.2000.23.3.283

Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.2001.24.issue-3
Date: 08 01, 2001
Author(s): Järvinen Margaretha
Abstract: This article combines a narrative approach on life histories, inspired by Paul Ricoeur, with the symbolic interactionist approaches of George Herbert Mead and Erving Goffman. It focuses on "negotiations" in qualitative interviews with alcoholics, that is, narrative sequences in which the interviewee's line comes into conflict with the line of the interviewer. From a larger study of drinking careers among alcoholics in Copenhagen, two interviews are singled out for a more detailed analysis. The two interviewees did not live up to the (implicit) expectations of the study: the presumptions (a) that persons contacted at institutions for heavily addicted alcoholics do indeed identify themselves as alcoholics and (b) that alcoholics are interested in structuring their life histories according to the development of their drinking problems. By struggling to defend an alternative identity for themselves than the one the interviewer had in readiness for them, the interviewees laid bare the (problematic) therapeutic framework of the study.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.2001.24.3.263

Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.2011.34.issue-1
Date: 02 2011
Author(s): Bernasconi Oriana
Abstract: Sociology and neighboring disciplines have produced different analytic tools to examine the dialogical relationship between individuals and society ("narrative work," "identity work," "moral career," "moral breakdown"). However, the question of how individuals negotiate the interpretation of personal experience over their lifetimes in a changing cultural context remains unexplored. This article introduces narrative elasticity as a feature of narrative work and as a time-sensitive analytic tool for conducting inquiries into processes of temporal retraction and expansion of what storytellers conceive as the normal order of significance. The application of this tool to the analysis of mature and elderly Chileans' life stories shows how cultural change occurs at the individual level, considers factors that motivate and inhibit processes of reinterpretation of personal experience, and identifies different levels at which it operates.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.2011.34.1.20

Journal Title: The Public Historian
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: tph.2008.30.issue-1
Date: February 2008
Author(s): GUEMBE MARIA LAURA
Abstract: Memoria Abierta's work responds to the need for a dialogue in Argentina among human rights organizations, the government, and civil society that will stimulate the formation of a collective memory about the history of State-led terrorism in the country. Processing documents, testimonies, and images related to the history of illegal repression in Argentina (c. 1974–1983), and creating a topographical reconstruction of the locations where State-led terrorism occurred poses diverse ethical, technical, and political problems regarding the recollection, description, transmission, and diffusion of the materials of memory. This article describes some of these challenges and how they affect and are shaped by the work of Memoria Abierta.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/tph.2008.30.1.63

Journal Title: The Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i243092
Date: 1 1, 1976
Author(s): Morris Robert J.
Abstract: Herbert Morris, "Shared Guilt," in Morris, On Guilt and Innocence: Essays in Legal Philosophy and Moral Psychology (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1976), pp. 111-38 Morris Shared Guilt 111 On Guilt and Innocence: Essays in Legal Philosophy and Moral Psychology 1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1045998

Journal Title: The Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i243153
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Burke Stuart C.
Abstract: Dennis F. Thompson, "Mediated Cor- ruption: The Case of the Keating Five, "Ameri- can Political Science Review, 87(2):377 (June 1993). 10.2307/2939047 377
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1047754

Journal Title: Oxford Review of Education
Publisher: Carfax Publishing
Issue: i243245
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Zeichner Pádraig
Abstract: The numerous changes and improvements which have been wrought in teacher education courses in the last two decades have not, apparently, satisfied the critics. Ironically, the reverse seems to have occurred, as recent events on both sides of the Atlantic testify. This essay argues that the developments of the last two decades in educational research and teacher education, which have yielded a wealth of new ideas and procedures, have also yielded a confusing proliferation of educational ideologies. In short, it suggests that the ascendancy of a diffuse, unselfcritical, and often combative discourse within educational studies has effectively eclipsed the more important question which must first be tackled if educational studies are to have a coherent, robust focus. This question, which is pursued in the second section of the paper, asks: is the educational enterprise, properly conceived, a distinctive, autonomous or sui generis enterprise with purposes of its own which are universal, or is it essentially a subservient enterprise, a vehicle for one or other currently prevailing ideology (cultural, technological, political, religious, etc.)? In exploring this question the essay puts to work some enduring insights from contemporary European philosophy, arguing that education as a 'practical hermeneutic discipline' holds a singular promise. Some important consequences of this promise for educational studies and teacher education are then considered.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1050455

Journal Title: Journal of Law and Religion
Publisher: Hamline University School of Law
Issue: i243307
Date: 1 1, 1986
Author(s): Cover Tristan Layle
Abstract: Id. at 833. 833
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1051194

Journal Title: Journal of Law and Religion
Publisher: Hamline University School of Law
Issue: i243325
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Lonergan Patrick McKinley
Abstract: Bernard Lonergan, Method: Trend and Variations, in A Third Collection 13, 21 (F. Crowe ed., Paulist Press 1985) Lonergan 21 13 Method: Trend and Variations, in A Third Collection 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1051496

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243648
Date: 2 1, 1963
Author(s): Jensen Mircea
Abstract: The German edition was published in 1951
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1061775

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243719
Date: 8 1, 1982
Author(s): Fenn Lawrence E.
Abstract: Richard Fenn, Liturgies and Trials (New York, 1982) Fenn Liturgies and Trials 1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062385

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243695
Date: 5 1, 1976
Author(s): Ricoeur Wade
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur has discussed how this notion of "generative" can be expanded to include the "rules" of literary genres (Interpretation Theory Fort Worth: Texas Christian University Press, 1976), pp. 32 ff. Ricoeur 32 Interpretation Theory 1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062577

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243684
Date: 5 1, 1967
Author(s): Myths N. J.
Abstract: LTCK, p. 149. 149
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062633

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243734
Date: 5 1, 1974
Author(s): Segal Whalen
Abstract: Robert A. Segal, "Joseph Campbell's Theory of Myth," in Dundee, ed. (n. 16 above), pp. 256-69 Segal 256 Joseph Campbell's Theory of Myth
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062920

Journal Title: Columbia Law Review
Publisher: Columbia University School of Law
Issue: i246901
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Trubeck William W.
Abstract: Trubeck, Where the Action Is: Critical Legal Studies and Empiricism, 36Stan. L. Rev.575, 580 et passim (1984) Trubeck 575 36 Stan. L. Rev. 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1122603

Journal Title: Columbia Law Review
Publisher: Columbia University School of Law
Issue: i246890
Date: 6 1, 1987
Author(s): Fiss Cass R.
Abstract: J. Mashaw, Due Process in the Administrative State (1985)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1122721

Journal Title: Columbia Law Review
Publisher: Columbia University School of Law
Issue: i246912
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Brest William N.
Abstract: J. Ely, Democracy and Distrust: A Theory ofJudicial Review 135-70 (1980)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1122910

Journal Title: Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i249351
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Strayer James E.
Abstract: The cross-cultural program of research presented here is about matters of temporal persistence-personal persistence and cultural persistence-and about solution strategies for solving the paradox of "sameness-in-change." The crux of this paradox resides in the fact that, on threat of otherwise ceasing to be recognizable as a self, all of us must satisfy at least two constitutive conditions. The first of these is that selves are obliged to keep moving or die, and, so, must continually change. The second is that selves must also somehow remain the same, lest all notions of moral responsibility and any commitment to an as yet unrealized future become nonsensical. Although long understood as a problem demanding the attention of philosophers, we argue that this same paradox arises in the ordinary course of identity development and dictates the different developmental routes taken by culturally mainstream and Aboriginal youth in coming to the identity-preserving conclusion that they and others are somehow continuous through time. Findings from a set of five studies are presented. The first and second studies document the development and refinement of a method for parsing and coding what young people say on the topic of personal persistence or self-continuity. Both studies demonstrate that it is not only possible to seriously engage children as young as age 9 or 10 years in detailed and codable discussions about personal persistence, but that their reasoning concerning such matters typically proceeds in an orderly and increasingly sophisticated manner over the course of their early identity development. Our third study underscores the high personal costs of failing to sustain a workable sense of personal persistence by showing that failures to warrant self-continuity are strongly associated with increased suicide risk in adolescence. Study four documents this same relation between continuity and suicide, this time at the macrolevel of whole cultures, and shows that efforts by Aboriginal groups to preserve and promote their culture are associated with dramatic reductions in rates of youth suicide. In the final study we show that different default strategies for resolving the paradox of personal persistence and change-Narrative and Essentialist strategies-distinctly characterize Aboriginal and non-Aboriginal youth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1166217

Journal Title: Educational Researcher
Publisher: American Educational Research Association
Issue: i250213
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Willinsky Pamela A.
Abstract: Reliability has traditionally been taken for granted as a necessary but insufficient condition for validity in assessment use. My purpose in this article is to illuminate and challenge this presumption by exploring a dialectic between psychometric and hermeneutic approaches to drawing and warranting interpretations of human products or performances. Reliability, as it is typically defined and operationalized in the measurement literature (e.g., American Educational Research Association [AERA], American Psychological Association, & National Council on Measurement in Education, 1985; Feldt & Brennan, 1989), privileges standardized forms of assessment. By considering hermeneutic alternatives for serving the important epistemological and ethical purposes that reliability serves, we expand the range of viable high-stakes assessment practices to include those that honor the purposes that students bring to their work and the contextualized judgments of teachers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1176218

Journal Title: Winterthur Portfolio
Publisher: University Press of Virginia
Issue: i250484
Date: 1 1, 1963
Author(s): Mead D. H.
Abstract: Sid- ney E. Mead, The Lively Experiment: The Shaping of Christianity in America (New York: Harper & Row, 1963), pp. 90-102 Mead go The Lively Experiment: The Shaping of Christianity in America 1963
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1180550

Journal Title: Comparative Education Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i250893
Date: 11 1, 1988
Author(s): Kroes Val D.
Abstract: McLaren and Hammer (n. 21 above), p. 33. 33
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1188108

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251513
Date: 7 1, 1964
Author(s): Fuchs Norman
Abstract: "it is something which cannot be exhausted in any one event but which every man experiences in his own time" (pp. 3-14, esp. 13)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201465

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251507
Date: 1 1, 1961
Author(s): Fackenheim David
Abstract: Emil L. Fackenheim, Metaphysics and Historicity (Milwaukee: Marquette University Press, 1961) Fackenheim Metaphysics and Historicity 1961
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202007

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251516
Date: 4 1, 1973
Author(s): Gerhart Mary
Abstract: The Conflict of Interpretations, p. 389
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202088

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251505
Date: 7 1, 1971
Author(s): Crossan John Dominic
Abstract: Luke 15
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202136

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251565
Date: 10 1, 1961
Author(s): Aristotle Morny
Abstract: Derrida, "Différance" (n. 21 above), p. 26.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202516

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251537
Date: 7 1, 1973
Author(s): Barthes David
Abstract: Conflict of Interpretations, p. 300= Philosophy of Paul Ricoeur, 1). 47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202814

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251563
Date: 4 1, 1976
Author(s): Levenson Jon D.
Abstract: Jon D. Levenson, Theology of the Program of Restoration ofEzekiel 40-48, Harvard Semitic Monographs no. 10 (Missoula, Mont.: Scholars Press, 1976), pp. 37-53 Levenson 37 Theology of the Program of Restoration ofEzekiel 40-48, Harvard Semitic Monographs 1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203191

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251561
Date: 10 1, 1981
Author(s): PutnamAbstract: Hilary Putnam so interprets an argument of Wittgenstein's in Reason, Truth and History (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1981), pp. 123-24. Putnam 123 Hilary Putnam so interprets an argument of Wittgenstein's in Reason, Truth and History 1981
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203420

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251571
Date: 4 1, 1954
Author(s): Murray Gregory D.
Abstract: Murray, Early Greece. p. 49. Murray 49 Early Greece
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203885

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251577
Date: 10 1, 1975
Author(s): creativity Eric J.
Abstract: creativity, Eliade attributes a "religious" importance to books (Labyrinth [n. 14 above], pp. 62-63) creativity religious 62 Labyrinth
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203955

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251574
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Fierro J. A.
Abstract: Ibid., p. 292.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1204816

Journal Title: Contemporary Literature
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i251779
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Zakin Jonathan
Abstract: Buell's view in The Environmental Imagination can serve to epitomize the prevailing consensus: "Thoreau is often thought of as Emerson's earthy opposite. But it would be truer to imagine him as moving gradually, partially, and self-conflictedly beyond the pro- gram Emerson outlined in Nature, which sacralized nature as humankind's mystic coun- terpart .... Thoreau became increasingly interested in defining nature's structure, both spiritual and material, for its own sake, as against how nature might subserve humanity, which was Emerson's primary consideration" (117)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1208760

Journal Title: Contemporary Literature
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i251779
Date: 7 1, 1977
Author(s): Williams Michael
Abstract: Caroline Brothers's clear discussion of the photo- graph as a "constant dialogue between image and society" (23) 23
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1208761

Journal Title: Contemporary Literature
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i251760
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Yerushalmi Philip
Abstract: Yerushalmi
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1208828

Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252683
Date: 1 1, 1972
Author(s): Ball Lewis A.
Abstract: 15N.Y. JURIS. REV. DOM. REL. §§ 37-39 (1972). 15 N.Y. JURIS. REV. DOM. REL. 1972
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228686

Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252711
Date: 4 1, 1964
Author(s): Fisch Thomas C.
Abstract: notes 335-339 supra
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228740

Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252711
Date: 4 1, 1973
Author(s): Epstein Michael S.
Abstract: LAw's EMPIRE, supra note 66, at 86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228741

Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252711
Date: 4 1, 1988
Author(s): Zlotchew Susan
Abstract: POSTSCRIPT, supra note 19, at 81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228742

Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252697
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Bell Charles R.
Abstract: Bell, The Suipr-eme Court1, 1984 Termii-Forewt'ord:. The Civil Rights Chro?icles, 99 HARV. L. REV.4, 56-68 (1985) Bell 4 99 HARV. L. REV. 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228797

Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252715
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Bernstein Philip P.
Abstract: Richard J. Bernstein, From Hermeneutics to Praxis, in HERMENEUTICS AND PRAXIS 273, 287-90 (R. Hollinger ed. 1985) Bernstein From Hermeneutics to Praxis 273 HERMENEUTICS AND PRAXIS 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228963

Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252719
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): Pitkin Frank
Abstract: Law- rence, supra note 101, at 942-43
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1229014

Journal Title: Renaissance Quarterly
Publisher: Renaissance Society of America
Issue: i253935
Date: 4 1, 1970
Author(s): Weinberg Jodi
Abstract: Elizabeth Cropper's introduction to Smyth, 12-21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1262256

Journal Title: Michigan Law Review
Publisher: University of Michigan Law School
Issue: i255068
Date: 8 1, 1987
Author(s): Cass Edward L.
Abstract: Farber & Frickey, Practical Reason, supra note 122, at 1643- 47
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1289072

Journal Title: Michigan Law Review
Publisher: University of Michigan Law School
Issue: i255076
Date: 8 1, 1984
Author(s): Kennedy Steven L.
Abstract: Goodman, Metaphor as Moonlighting, in ON METAPHOR, supra note 15, at 180.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1289304

Journal Title: Studies in Art Education
Publisher: National Art Education Association
Issue: i256678
Date: 1 1, 1950
Author(s): Tucker Rachel
Abstract: Ricoeur's cosmic and oneiric elements by relating funda- mental components in the structure of literature to symbolic action in ritual and wish fulfillment in dream (1957, p. 106)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1319677

Journal Title: Studies in Art Education
Publisher: National Art Education Association
Issue: i256677
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Schwaller De Lubicz William
Abstract: This paper follows two purposes: the first to unpack some of the artistic cargo of symbols as distinct from the more conventional aspects of them (e. g., their ability to refer to other things or events, and their ability to communicate ideas), and the second to show, by means of contrasts, the actual workings of Interpretation Theory as it could be applied to the analysis of art-making and art-viewing. For the first purpose, the author draws material from philosophy, dramatic writings, linguistic theory, and statements of artists in an analytic search for the often intractable character of the artistic image. For the second purpose, the author demonstrates, through the use of logic and the poetic metaphor, how a particular form of hermeneutic inquiry can be applied to assist an understanding of the assumptions upon which research is often built.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1319690

Journal Title: Studies in Art Education
Publisher: National Art Education Association
Issue: i256762
Date: 7 1, 1990
Author(s): Weber Karen
Abstract: Keifer-Boyd (1993).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1321020

Journal Title: Harvard Law Review
Publisher: Harvard Law Review Association
Issue: i257579
Date: 6 1, 1988
Author(s): Alters William W.
Abstract: supra pp. 1718-19, 1739.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1341435

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257716
Date: 10 1, 1976
Author(s): Sahlins Wayne C.
Abstract: Marshall Sahlins, Culture and Practical Reason (Chicago, 1976). Sahlins Culture and Practical Reason 1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1342977

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257722
Date: 4 1, 1978
Author(s): Smith Ernest B.
Abstract: Psychoanalysis and Language, ed. Joseph A. Smith (New Haven, Conn., and London, 1978), pp. 293-324 Smith 293 Psychoanalysis and Language 1978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343101

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257744
Date: 10 1, 1970
Author(s): Cohen Israel
Abstract: The Adventures of Don Quixote, trans. J. M. Cohen (Harmondsworth, 1970), p. 338 Cohen 338 The Adventures of Don Quixote 1970
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343464

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257763
Date: 7 1, 1977
Author(s): Conrad Johannes
Abstract: Joseph Conrad, "Karain: A Memory," Selected Tales from Conrad, ed. Nigel Stewart (London, 1977), pp. 65-66. Conrad Karain: A Memory 65 Selected Tales from Conrad 1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343766

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257769
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Buck-Morss Naomi
Abstract: p. 341
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343782

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257799
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): Zivek Dominick
Abstract: Slavoj Zivek, The Sublime Object of Ideology (London, 1989), p. 50. Zivek 50 The Sublime Object of Ideology 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1344100

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257809
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Veysey John
Abstract: Laurence Veysey, "The Plural Organized World of the Humani- ties," in The Organization of Knowledge in Modern America, ed. Alexandra Oleson and John Voss [Baltimore, Md., 1979], p. 57 Veysey The Plural Organized World of the Humanities 57 The Organization of Knowledge in Modern America 1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1344279

Journal Title: NOVEL: A Forum on Fiction
Publisher: Brown University
Issue: i257933
Date: 10 1, 1981
Author(s): Zwerdling Karen
Abstract: A Critical Reading 173 173 A Critical Reading
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1345605

Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i258247
Date: 1 1, 1986
Author(s): York ﻭﻟﻴﻢ
Abstract: This article discusses how T. S. Eliot's long poem, Four Quartets, employs the thematics of time, self, and history in an autobiographical work of literature. The article approaches autobiography primarily as an intellectual concern, rather than as a factual account of the author's life, in examining a work that is difficult to subsume under available interpretive paradigms. The first part of the article emphasizes how Augustine's Confessions, when considered as a meditation on time and religious experience, illuminates the hermeneutics of Four Quartets. The second and central part of the article provides close readings of key passages in this poem, which inscribes Greek cosmology and medieval epic in a narrative of literary development and spiritual change. The third and concluding part of the article explores how the author's later poetry and criticism highlight major tendencies in twentieth-century literature and anticipate the postmodern interpretation of history. / تعالج هذه المقالة قصيدة ﺇﻟﻴﻮﺕ الطويلة أربع رباعيات من منطلق جديد وبالرجوع إلى تيمات الزمن والذات والتاريخ في السيرة الذاتية الأدبية٠ وتتعامل المقالة مع السيرة الذاتية لا باعتبارها سجلاﹰ لما جرى في حياة صاحبها من أحداث، بل ابعتبارها سجلاﹰ مضمراﹰ للتطور الذهني لكاتبها٠ يقوم الجزء الأول من المقالة بتوظيف البعد ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻠﻲ في الزمن وفي التجربة الدينية كما ورد عند القديس أوغسطين في سيرته الذاتية الاعترافات، لإضاءة المدار التأويلي لقصيدة أربع رباعيات٠ ويقوم الجزء الثاني بتحليل مقاطع رئيسية في القصيدة، مبرزاﹰ ما تتضمنه وما تلوّح به من معتقدات كونية إغريقية وملاحم وسيطية٠ أما الجزء الثالث والأخير فيتوصل إلى أن ذهنية إليوت، بالإضافة إلى كونها تعكس التوجه العام للأدب في القرن العشرين، تمهد للتفسير ما بعد الحداثي للتاريخ٠
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1350054

Journal Title: Duke Law Journal
Publisher: Duke University School of Law
Issue: i259836
Date: 11 1, 1992
Author(s): Collier Charles W.
Abstract: Charles W. Collier, Intellectual Authority and Institutional Authority, 42 J. LEGAL EDUC. (forthcoming 1992) Collier 42 J. Legal Educ. 1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1372767

Journal Title: Feminist Review
Publisher: Taylor & Francis Group
Issue: i260667
Date: 10 1, 1931
Author(s): Woolf Steph
Abstract: This article is concerned with the ways in which women narrate a move from a 'working-class' position to a position marked (in however fragmentary and complex a way) as 'middle class'. While such a move might be seen in terms of a straightforward escape from a disadvantaged social position, I argue here that what has to be analysed is the pain and the sense of estrangement associated with this class movement. Drawing on the class narratives of a group of seven white British women, the article uses Bourdieu's concepts of symbolic capital and habitus to explore the cultural and symbolic configurations of class. These configurations may be inscribed into the self, so that the self, itself, is class marked. Since working-class selves are frequently marked in pathological terms, this raises particular difficulties for the idea of an 'escape' from such a position. Class in this sense is embedded in people's history and so cannot be so easily 'escaped'. The usual conventions of life-narratives - in which the self remains the same entity from birth to death and later events are a culmination of earlier ones - are also disrupted in this case. But if a working-class position is marked as pathological, so too is taking on the markers of middle-class existence. to do so is not only to risk 'getting it wrong', but it is also to risk the scorn attached to 'pretentiousness'. There is a particular jeopardy here for women, since it is women who have been especially associated with desires for artefacts associated with bourgeois existence. The article argues for a focus for classed desires and class envy, not in pathological terms, but in terms of a coherent response to political and social exclusions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1395585

Journal Title: Philosophy East and West
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Issue: i260914
Date: 7 1, 1983
Author(s): Needham Arran E.
Abstract: If the arguments of Edward Said's "Orientalism" are valid, Joseph Needham's "Science and Civilisation in China" stands condemned. The opposition between Foucault, Said's main source of inspiration, and both Marxism and hermeneutics is highlighted. Utilizing the work of MacIntyre, recent hermeneutic philosophy is defended against Foucault, and through this, Needham's work is defended as a form of Marxist hermeneutics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1399392

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261321
Date: 7 1, 1972
Author(s): Reid Ernest J.
Abstract: W. Blankenburg, translated by Erling Eng and to appear in a forthcoming issue of The Human Context
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1406200

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261311
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): Strauss Michael A.
Abstract: Leo Strauss in What Is Political Philosophy? Strauss What Is Political Philosophy?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1406307

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261382
Date: 10 1, 1989
Author(s): Pangle Fred
Abstract: Recent literature on Heidegger concentrates heavily on his (temporary) involvement in or collusion with Nazi ideology and policies. Without belittling the gravity of the issue, this article shifts the focus somewhat by invoking a distinction which recently has emerged (or reemerged) in political thought: namely, the distinction between "politics" and "the political" or between politics viewed as partisan ideology or policy making, on the one hand, and politics seen as regime or paradigmatic framework, on the other. The main thesis of the article is that Heidegger's promising contributions to political theory are located on the level of ontology or paradigmatic framework rather than that of ideological partisanship. While not neglecting the dismal intrusions of the latter plane, the article probes Heideggerian cues for a "rethinking of the political" by placing the accent on four topical areas: first, the status of the subject or individual as political agent; second, the character of the political community, that is, of the polity or (in modern terms) the "state"; thirdly, the issue of cultural and political development or modernization; and finally, the problem of an emerging cosmopolis or world order beyond the confines of Western culture. In discussing these topics, an effort is made to disentangle Heidegger from possible misinterpretations and to indicate how, in each area, his thought pointed in the direction of an "overcoming" of Western political metaphysics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1407522

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261417
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): Patoeka Edward F.
Abstract: This article examines the ties between the work of Václav Havel and his dissident mentor Jan Patočka. Havel's political theory consists largely of an evocative, literary reformulation of a number of themes developed by Patočka, the student of Husserl and Heidegger generally recognized as the most significant Czech philosopher of the century. Insofar as Patočka's work continues to be ignored in the West, the intuitively appealing essays of Havel will themselves fail to be fully understood. This study offers an analysis of Havel's debt to Patočka, as well as an explication of the latter's political thought. With Patočka's phenomenological interpretation of ancient and contemporary thought, of Socrates and Heidegger, a bridge is built between the classical and the postmodern that seeks to ground ethics and politics without recourse to the foundationalism of metaphysical accounts of reality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1408462

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261406
Date: 10 1, 1968
Author(s): Webb Thomas W.
Abstract: Webb, Philosopher of History, p. 35. Webb 35 Philosopher of History
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1408620

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261426
Date: 10 1, 1997
Author(s): Walzer William A.
Abstract: Karl-Otto Apel, "Discourse Ethics as a Response to the Novel Challenges of Today's Reality to Coresponsibility," Journal of Religion 74 (1993): 496-513 10.2307/1204180 496
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1408857

Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: Association of Collegiate Schools of Architecture, Inc.
Issue: i262141
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Tyler Daniel M.
Abstract: This paper proposes a theoretical foundation for extending our understanding of study drawings by bringing forward concepts from a number of disciplines that are concerned with the structure of knowledge. Study drawings are defined as the informal, private drawings that architectural designers use as a medium for graphic thinking in the exploratory stages of their work. Drawings from the work of Paxton through Picasso are analyzed to confirm the familiar characteristics of study drawings and to identify the properties which account for their role in the working process of design, including their use as a means of inquiry. This epistemological function is compared with certain features of written language in order to propose an internal structure for study drawings. The paper concludes that much of the origin and nature of knowledge in design can be explained in terms of the properties and processes of study drawings and that these terms should be used to evaluate proposals for new media in design.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1424832

Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: Butterworth-Heinemann
Issue: i262155
Date: 8 1, 1989
Author(s): Kramer Réjean
Abstract: Lloyd S. Kramer, "Literature, Criticism and Historical Imagination: The Literary Challenge of Hayden White and Dominick LaCapra," in Lynn Hunt, ed., The New Cultural History (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1989), pp. 122-124 Kramer Literature, Criticism and Historical Imagination: The Literary Challenge of Hayden White and Dominick LaCapra 122 The New Cultural History 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1425141

Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: Butterworth-Heinemann
Issue: i262163
Date: 5 1, 1981
Author(s): Gadamer Stephen
Abstract: The title of this essay comes from contemporary hermeneutics, a branch of philosophy devoted to interpretation. It refers to the domain between a human artifact and a beholder. Brought to architecture, this worldly concept implicitly questions the conventional role of the individual amidst historical works. It also offers a common ground on which products of architectural interpretation (performances or fictions) may begin to engage our normally independent territories of history and design. This essay examines the concept of the world in front of the work and speculates on its implications for architectural education. The illustrations portray interpretive projects by the author's students.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1425217

Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: i262169
Date: 11 1, 1985
Author(s): Ulmer David
Abstract: The study of metaphor provides valuable insights into the workings of thought and understanding. This article addresses the important question of what the study of metaphor has to say about the design process and design teaching. We include the findings of a series of studies involving architectural design students who were asked to report on their own design experience and that of colleagues in the context of specific projects. Our conclusions are that (1) there is a close relationship between design and metaphor that provides insights into effective design education; (2) metaphor operates through privilege, directing concern and the identification of difference; and (3) design involves the generation of action within a collaborative environment in which there is the free play of enabling metaphors.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1425318

Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: i262180
Date: 9 1, 1977
Author(s): Gadamer Eugenia Victoria
Abstract: This article investigates the perception of space through both visual and haptic systems of perception and examines the resultant impact on the process of spatial visualization. The development of technology from science as magic to science as information is used as a framework to (re)discover relationships between (1) the perception of space and the tools of visualization and (2) their effects on architectural education.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1425521

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263715
Date: 3 1, 1970
Author(s): Windisch William A.
Abstract: Considered rhetorically, or by phenomenological-literary analysis, the saying about finding one's life by losing it intends to break up the continuity of existence of the hearer to the extent that he or she is left without a frame of reference. Considered from a historical-literary point of view, however, the saying occurs in an environment and presupposes a context which gives meaning to the response. A Whiteheadian or process perspective of interpretation offers an approach which can relate these two types of understanding of the saying, and can also cast light on contemporary styles of interpretation with their ontological presuppositions, either to set the saying in a framework of "rightness" or in one of "creativity."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1462641

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263715
Date: 3 1, 1977
Author(s): Wittig Theodore J.
Abstract: The Parable of the Sower has fallen under an ancient and modern hermeneutical eclipse. Critical examination of the Markan text of the Markan text of the parable (4:3-9) indicates that the first hermeneutical eclipse of the parable's message occurred when the community which produced the interpretation of the Parable of the Sower (Mark 4:14-20) reworked the parable to conform to the community's theological needs. Removal of this community's reworked features from the text lays bare the original form of the Sower and gives us access to Jesus' original parabolic message. But apprehension of the full depth and scope of that message has not been possible with current hermeneutical methodologies. The limitations of these hermeneutics leave the message still under partial eclipse. By expanding the interpretative horizon with the help of Whiteheadian insights on ontology, epistemology, and the phenomenology of language, one is able to appreciate more fully the meaning of Jesus' proclamation in the Parable of the Sower.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1462643

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263714
Date: 12 1, 1978
Author(s): Rauschenbusch Walter
Abstract: Walter Rauschenbusch's Christianity and the Social Crisis, viewed by many as the masterpiece of the social gospel movement, has been confined to the dusty shelves of the library. Can we catch no glimpse of what astounded its massive reading public, no glimmer of Rauschenbusch's own sense of the work as a "dangerous book" written in fear and trembling? This article suggests that a generic analysis of Christianity and the Social Crisis might lead to surprising disclosures. Any generic analysis involves the discussion of a group of texts. Consequently this study proceeds via a comparison of the structure of Christianity and the Social Crisis with those of other works of a similar type which were produced between 1890 and 1915. The genre is isolated by utilizing the techniques of Tzvetan Todorov. Certain negative traits are specified which separate the genre from its neighbors. The positive leitmotif of a dual crisis-a crisis affecting society as a whole and the ramifications of that crisis within the Christian churches-is specified as the decisive trait of the genre. To deal with this leitmotif a specific structure was generated by the works under consideration. They provided-to pirate the words of Clifford Geertz in his landmark essay on modern ideologies-"maps of problematic reality" and "matrices for the creation of collective conscience." In designing their maps of problematic reality our authors worked along two separate but related vectors. The first of these vectors was constituted by a historical analysis of the origins of the present crisis, while the second consisted of a systemic analysis of the present social order. Each of these elements of the genre is examined in turn. The mapping of problematic reality by means of a historical and a structural analysis was geared towards provoking as well as defining the crisis. Crisis, once defined, demanded decision. Nevertheless the "permanent basis for action" which Rauschenbusch and others sought could not be grounded upon ideological conviction alone. It required both concrete guidelines for praxis and the creation of an institutional matrix to mobilize the moral forces of the society, to form public opinion. These works then as ideological matrices for the creation of collective conscience were also designed to precipitate the transformation of the Church into an agent of human emancipation. The art of the genre was also an act. But in an age noted for "writing-as-action" the exemplars of the genre laid a complexly interwoven, carefully stressed foundation for Christian involvement in social change. Rauschenbusch's Christianity and the Social Crisis appears at the end of this analysis as the unsurpassed formulation of this distinctive genre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463047

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263709
Date: 9 1, 1975
Author(s): Wiggins Mary
Abstract: In recent years, the need for a critique of "reader" as rigorous as that which has been developed for "text" and for "author" has become increasingly acute. Whether in the study of religion as story and biography or in interpretative reading in general, a critical notion of reader is essential if the act of reading is to be anything other than mere consumption of texts. Some new way of understanding the hermeneutical circle is required to avert the narcissism latent in the Anselmian model. The notion of "genre" as developed by four recent theorists is helpful in the task of constructing a critique of "reader." E. D. Hirsch, Hans-Georg Gadamer, Tzvetán Todorov, and Paul Ricoeur have each surpassed the idealist notion of genre as a classificatory device and developed in its place the notion of genre as a generative pinciple. Todorov, for example, illustrates how "form" is a theoretical, as distinct from a descriptive or explanatory, issue. According to both Hirsch and Todorov, somewhere between empirical details and metaphysical thematizations lie generic formulations which can assist the reader to organize his/her response to the text and to recognize the probable understanding toward which the conventions of the text are directed. In Gadamer's theory of interpretation, the notion of genre acquires historicity. After Gadamer, genres can no longer be regarded as timeless a priori categories. Rather, because they are constituted by historical reflections, their rise and decline are intrinsic to text-interpretation. Finally, in Ricoeur's theory that generic considerations are correlative principles of production and interpretation, we find a basis for understanding genre as praxis. If we understand reading to be isomorphic to authoring, it becomes clear that the reader can no longer be regarded as the self-evident recipient of text-signification. Genre, in Ricoeur's theory, transforms "speech" into a "work" and points toward a new notion of "reader" as one whose reconstruction of the text is the condition for the possibility of its being a story that "gives life." This notion of "reader" makes possible a new model of the hermeneutical circle-one which signifies the essential roles of critical thought which follows naive reading and of informed understanding which follows after thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463143

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263722
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): Zahan William G.
Abstract: The very definition of myth is problematic today; here narrow, partial, "monomythic" definitions are rejected in favor of a complex, inclusive one, the seventeen items of which are then discussed. A mythological corpus consists of a network of myths, which are culturally-important imaginal stories conveying, by means of metaphor and symbol, graphic imagery, and emotional conviction and participation, the primal, foundational accounts of the real, experienced world, and humankind's roles and relative statuses within it. Mythologies may convey the political and moral values of a culture, and provide systems of interpreting individual experience within a universal perspective, which may include the intervention of suprahuman entities, as well as aspects of the natural and cultural orders. Myths may be enacted or reflected in rituals, ceremonies, and dramas, or provide materials for secondary elaborations. Only a polyphasic definition will provide appreciation of their manifold roles within a society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463445

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263706
Date: 12 1, 1951
Author(s): Makemson Laurence L.
Abstract: M. W. Makemson, The Book of the Jaguar Priest (New York: Henry Schuman, 1951) Makemson The Book of the Jaguar Priest 1951
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463490

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263710
Date: 12 1, 1966
Author(s): Winter Charles R.
Abstract: Through the provision of a set of theses for the interpretation and evaluation of theologies of liberation, this paper attempts to mediate the existing conflict between academic theologians and theologians of liberation. It seeks to establish the legitimacy of theological discourse focused on the problem of alienation and liberation if carefully executed according to a clear set of guidelines. The paper begins with the argument that all interpretations of theologies of liberation must begin with an analysis of the theological genre within which these works fall. After insisting that theologies of liberation belong neither to the genre of systematic theology nor that of Christian social ethics, the paper develops the second thesis that theologies of liberation are best understood as members of a genre whose distinctive characteristics and functions are analogous to those intrinsic to secular ideologies. This thesis hinges upon a revisionist understanding of ideology drawn from the works of Clifford Geertz et al. and upon a careful specification of the generic similarities between the two forms of discourse. The second part of the paper moves from the level of interpretation to that of evaluation. It argues that theologies of liberation share with ideologies a tendency to occlude self-critical reflection. It suggests that a conscious recognition that theologies of liberation do not exhaust the possibilities of theological discourse but are relative models which select and interpret Christian symbols and doctrines in the light of the central dynamic of alienation and liberation might provide an antidote to this pathology. It maintains with Rosemary Ruether that there is no absolutely adequate model of alienation and liberation and that various models of alienation and liberation must be "interstructured" in order to overcome the perspectival biases of models which focus upon a single root of oppression. To establish relative degrees of adequacy between various theological models of liberation the paper argues that these models be evaluated a) by the criterion of appropriateness to the charter documents and to the historical development of one's chosen religious tradition, b) by the criterion of adequacy to the human condition in its essential commonality and in its historical diversity, and c) by the criterion of dialectical inclusiveness. The paper concludes by agreeing with theologians of liberation that ultimately no set of criteria validates a theology of liberation. As fundamentally geared to praxis, such a theology must be subject to a process of existential verification.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463752

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263713
Date: 9 1, 1970
Author(s): Teselle Robert F.
Abstract: The thesis of this paper is that an absolute origin of evil, arising from the free will of a creature, must be incomprehensible. Although Augustine occasionally acknowledges this point, nevertheless in a number of better-known passages (chiefly in The City of God) he attempts to give a causal account of the fall of Adam and/or Satan. Much of the subsequent Christian tradition has unfortunately followed his lead, and major recent commentators routinely ignore or passively approve of his conceptual error. Augustine offers three unacceptable explanations of the fall, which conflict variously with his own doctrines of divine omnipotence, the goodness of creation, and creaturely free will and responsibility, as well as violating the canons of sound argumentation and explanation. First, his contention that free creatures made "out of nothing" inevitably fall makes the fall seem ontologically necessary (unfree) and thereby lays the ultimate responsibility for it on the Creator. Second, the appeal to pride as an explanation is a spurious causal account, for "pride" is only a synonym for "fallenness" itself and not a possible antecedent condition in a being created good and not yet fallen. Finally, his assertion that the first sin is intrinsically comprehensible, but not comprehensible to us because we are fallen, is an obfuscation masquerading as an explanation, for we have no warrant for supposing that this assertion is true or even meaningful. Instead of seeking causal explanation Augustine should have stayed with his own wiser observation that an evil will has no efficient cause. Theology of the Augustinian sort (which comprises much of the Christian tradition) ought to concede that the fall as a work of genuine freedom is an absurd "fact," an incomprehensible given which steadfastly and in principle resists causal explanation. The concluding section of the paper draws upon Ricoeur's insights to tell why the narrative structure of the "Adamic myth" (which has important positive functions of its own) begets as an unfortunate byproduct this tendency to spin out a causal account of the first evil, with the conceptual confusion resulting from it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463800

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263750
Date: 12 1, 1983
Author(s): Yoder Gary L.
Abstract: Ricoeur's discussion of the relations between metaphorical, narrative, philosophical, and historical discourse (1983:41ff.; 1986b).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1464681

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263776
Date: 7 1, 1974
Author(s): Wolff Gary Alan
Abstract: "exile is already a reality" (259) 259 Exile is already a reality
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1465276

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i263803
Date: 3 1, 1958
Author(s): Wittgenstein Matthew G.
Abstract: Pelagian writings, "it is signifi- cant that Augustine now quotes Ambrose with increasing frequency and devotion" (1999b: 140)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1466069

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i263809
Date: 9 1, 1996
Author(s): Zaleski Charles T.
Abstract: Lear: 148-166, 219-246 148
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1466523

Journal Title: La Ricerca Folklorica
Publisher: Grafo Edizioni
Issue: i264940
Date: 4 1, 1967
Author(s): Wittgenstein Roberto
Abstract: Borutti, 1996:11. 11
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1479813

Journal Title: La Ricerca Folklorica
Publisher: Grafo Edizioni
Issue: i264937
Date: 10 1, 1923
Author(s): Mauss Sergio Dalla
Abstract: Field research is a crucial component, if not the very foundation, of anthropological research. The concept is straightforward enough to seem a truism. One could stop here an enthuse on the heuristic benefits of participant observation (some scholars do so with an almost religious zeal). Otherwise one can adopt a more wary attitude and question the hidden, unspeakable reasons for such passion. A look at academia with an ethnographic slant (if one is free, so to say, to "ethnograph" the ethnographer) is sufficient to realise that field-work rhetoric is pervaded with extra-scientific motives. In the background lie corporate interests more similar to exclusion and "ethnological cleaning" than epistemology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1479957

Journal Title: Western Folklore
Publisher: California Folklore Society
Issue: i266268
Date: 10 1, 1985
Author(s): Bellah Jay
Abstract: Sue Samuelson describes her own experi- ence as an "expert witness" in her "Folklore and the Legal System: The Expert Witness," Western Folklore 41 (1982): 139-144 10.2307/1499786 139
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1499375

Journal Title: British Educational Research Journal
Publisher: Carfax Publishing Company
Issue: i266364
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): Willis Leo
Abstract: This paper focuses on the need for educational researchers to recognise the dialectic between theory and method. A methodology described as quasi-historical and based on a theory of social action is discussed in the first section. The second section proposes a means whereby the meaning of actions can be understood. A schema for the interpretation of text evidence is then outlined. This schema or methodology draws upon the theoretical work of Giddens, Thompson and Habermas and the interpretation theory of Ricoeur. The proposed schema avoids a theory-method dichotomy and offers researchers a form of disciplined enquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1501153

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267120
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): Frank Steven D.
Abstract: Gadamer, Truth and Method, 299.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509553

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267129
Date: 7 1, 1798
Author(s): Wordsworth Richard E.
Abstract: Wordsworth's "Lines, Written a Few Miles Above Tintern Abbey" (1798) Wordsworth Lines, Written a Few Miles Above Tintern Abbey 1798
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509876

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267148
Date: 4 1, 1936
Author(s): Ayer Stephen W.
Abstract: Alfred J. Ayer, Lan- guage, Truth and Logic (1936; reprinted Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1971 Ayer Truth and Logic 1936
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509887

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267141
Date: 7 1, 1988
Author(s): Ruf Frederick J.
Abstract: Ruf, "Coleridge's Biographia Literaria: Extravagantly Mixed Genres." Ruf Coleridge's Biographia Literaria: Extravagantly Mixed Genres
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1510012

Journal Title: Design Issues
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i267285
Date: 10 1, 1958
Author(s): Polanyi Richard
Abstract: ) Schön (note 44).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1511599

Journal Title: Design Issues
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i267303
Date: 7 1, 1965
Author(s): Weber John
Abstract: Boltanski, "L'amour et la justice," 113 Boltanski 113 L'amour et la justice
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1511841

Journal Title: Vetus Testamentum
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i267662
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Westermann Brian
Abstract: Jacquet (pp. 541-542)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1519031

Journal Title: Black Music Research Journal
Publisher: Center for Black Music Research, Columbia College Chicago
Issue: i267690
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): White Bruce
Abstract: Foucault, talking of his work with the Groupe d'information de prisons: "When the prisoners began to speak, they possessed an individual theory of prisons, the penal system, and justice. It is this form of discourse which ultimately matters, a discourse against power, the counter-discourse of prisoners and those we call delinquents-and not a theory about delinquency" (Foucault and Delouze 1977, 209) Foucault Groupe d'information de prisons 209 When the prisoners began to speak, they possessed an individual theory of prisons, the penal system and justice. It is this form of discourse which ultimately matters, a discourse against power, the counter-discourse of prisoners and those we call delinquents-and not a theory about delinquency 1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1519942

Journal Title: The American Journal of Philology
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i270356
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): von Reden Dean
Abstract: Gentili 1988, 63–66 63
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1562221

Journal Title: Diacritics
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i270554
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Zupančič Tim
Abstract: Zupančič
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1566285

Journal Title: Perspecta
Publisher: Rizzoli International Publications
Issue: i270598
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Merleauponty Louise
Abstract: Essai sur l'Art Essai sur l'Art
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1567174

Journal Title: Studia Islamica
Publisher: G.-P. Maisonneuve-Larose
Issue: i271952
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): BloomAbstract: Bloom, Kabbalab and Criticism, pp. 33-35, 71-79, 95-126. Bloom 33 Kabbalab and Criticism
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1595855

Journal Title: Studia Islamica
Publisher: G.-P. Maisonneuve-Larose
Issue: i271962
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Schlegell Jawid A.
Abstract: B.R. Von Schlegell, Principles of Sufism (Berkeley 1990) pp. xiii-xv Schlegell xiii Principles of Sufism 1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1596163

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i273563
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Yerushalmi Howard L.
Abstract: Robert Bellah and colleagues' Habits of the Heart (1985)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1602332

Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i301520
Date: 1 1, 1963
Author(s): Milton Joel D.
Abstract: p. 84
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1770741

Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i301565
Date: 4 1, 1985
Author(s): Weber Meili
Abstract: Seyla Benhabib, who attacks him for his "neglect of the structural sources ofinequality, influence, resource and power" (124) 124
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1770799

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Porter Institute for Poetics and Semiotics
Issue: i303076
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Wellmer Gerald
Abstract: KHI 146 146
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1772571

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303078
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Schwarzchild Susan
Abstract: Rotenstreich 1968: 3-4 3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1772696

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303088
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Van Alphen Mieke
Abstract: Rembrandt's drawings mentions that a suggested con- nection with the Berlin painting cannot be maintained for stylistic reasons leading to an earlier date (1973: 45) 45
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773075

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303098
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): White Gabriel
Abstract: Zikir Vakca-i Haile-i Osmaniye
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773125

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303101
Date: 7 1, 1938
Author(s): Al-Zayyat Israel
Abstract: Ricoeur (1981: 147) 147
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773166

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303109
Date: 7 1, 1976
Author(s): Woolf Louise Shabat
Abstract: ibid.: 270 270
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773356

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303117
Date: 7 1, 1992
Author(s): Wyschogrod Shira
Abstract: Wolosky 1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773442

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: The American Historical Association
Issue: i332152
Date: 6 1, 1983
Author(s): Higham David
Abstract: john Higham, History: Professional Scholarship in America [Baltimore, Md., 1983], 241 Higham 241 History: Professional Scholarship in America 1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1873746

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: The American Political Science Association
Issue: i306776
Date: 3 1, 1968
Author(s): Lefebvre Fred R.
Abstract: In Praise of Philosophy, pp. 33, 46-47 33
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1960324

Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20006219
Date: 12 1, 1985
Author(s): Maddox Randy L.
Abstract: Johann Baptist Metz, Faith in History and Society (New York, NY: Crossroad, 1980), pp. 88-91, 110
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20006225

Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20008134
Date: 3 1, 1998
Author(s): Berthold-Bond Daniel
Abstract: 'The Earliest System - Programme of German Idealism', cited in Henry Harris, Hegel's Development: Toward the Sunlight, 1770-1801 (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1972), 511.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20008139

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20010363
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Peters Gary
Abstract: This essay is concerned with an initial mapping out of a model of intersubjectivity that, viewed within the context of education, breaks with the hegemonic dialogics of current pedagogies. Intent on rethinking the (so-called) "problem" of solipsism for phenomenology in terms of a pedagogy that situates itself within solitude and the alterity of self and other, Maurice Blanchot and Emmanuel Levinas will here speak as the voices of this other mode of teaching. Beginning with the problematization of intersubjectivity in romantic aesthetics and hermeneutics, I introduce the concept of irony as a crucial element in the conceptualization of this other pedagogical model, one that requires, initially, a discussion of Husserl's response to the charge of solipsism in the 5th Cartesian Meditation. As a starting point I introduce his symmetrical notion of bodily "pairing" into a consideration of rhetoric, understood here as an integral part of teaching, thus forging links with phenomenology via the work of Merleau-Ponty. The above provides a context for an extended discussion of pedagogy as it appears in the work of Blanchot and Levinas. Although similar in many respects, on closer inspection it will emerge that important differences are evident in the dissymmetrical and asymmetrical models suggested by the two thinkers respectively. These differences, I will argue, begin to open up a critical perspective on Levinas' "height" model of teaching in the name of the more radical configuration of phenomenology and rhetoric to be found in Blanchot.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20010368

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20010370
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Papastephanou Marianna
Abstract: Rawls's recent modification of his theory of justice claims that political liberalism is free-standing and "falls under the category of the political. It works entirely within that domain and does not rely on anything outside it." In this article I pursue the metatheoretical goal of obtaining insight into the anthropological assumptions that have remained so far unacknowledged by Rawls and critics alike. My argument is that political liberalism has a dependence on comprehensive liberalism and its conception of a self-serving subjectivity that is far more binding as well as undesirable than it has been so far acknowledged. I proceed with a heuristic approach that introduces us to the possibility that political liberalism presupposes tacitly the Occidental metanarrative of reason harnessing rampant self-interest and subordinating it to a higher-order interest. As the presuppositions of political liberalism emerge, I draw from the debate between Rawls and Habermas in order to illustrate my argument for the existence of a dependence on these presuppositions. I outline some implications of the anthropological basis of political liberalism and conclude by exemplifying them with reference to Rawls's comments on the division of a cake.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20010377

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20010381
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Fisher William P.
Abstract: Academia's mathematical metaphysics are briefly explored en route to an elaboration of the qualitatively rigorous requirements underpinning the calibration and unambiguous interpretation of quantitative instrumentation in any science. Of particular interest are Gadamer's emphases on number as the paradigm of the noetic, on the role of play in interpretation, and on Hegel's sense of method as the activity of the thing itself that thought experiences. These point toward and overlap with (1) Latour's study of the metrological social networks through which technological phenomena are brought into language as modes of being that can be understood, and (2) the way that Rasch's models for measurement comprise a potential beginning for metaphysically astute, qualitatively and quantitatively integrated, mathematical methods in the social sciences. The paper closes with observations on the general problem that is philosophy, the need to remain open to multiplicities of meaning even as clear understandings are sought and obtained.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20010389

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20011066
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Bentz Valerie Malhotra
Abstract: This paper is a reflection on the boundaries of academic discourse as I came to be acutely aware of them while attempting to teach a graduate seminar in qualitative research methods. The purpose of the readings in Husserl and Schutz and the writing exercises was to assist students trained in quantitative methods and steeped in positivistic assumptions about research to write phenomenological descriptions of lived experience. "Paul" could not write the assigned papers due to a diagnosed writing "disability" but he did submit fictional stories and sketches which beautifully illustrated the concepts of Husserl and Schutz. Paul's disability presented a natural "bracketing" experiment which brought the positivistic assumptions surrounding academic research and writing to the forefront. I engaged in verbal dialogues with Paul, in which he discussed the philosophical ideas. My work with Paul highlighted the extent to which the academic lifeworld marginalizes those who seek to write from the heart, disguising even the work of those philosophers who wish to uncover direct experiences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20011071

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20011089
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Cissna Kenneth N.
Abstract: A version of the present essay was presented at the Cen¬ tral States Communication Association and Southern States Communication Association Joint Conference, Lexington, Kentucky, in April, 1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20011095

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20011187
Date: 4 1, 1998
Author(s): Topper Keith
Abstract: In recent years a number of writers have defended and attacked various features of structural, or neo-realist theories of international politics. Few, however, have quarrelled with one of the most foundational features of neorealist theory: its assumptions about the nature of science and scientific theories. In this essay I assess the views of science underlying much neorelist theory, especially as they are articulated in the work of Kenneth Waltz. I argue not only that neorealist theories rest on assumptions about science and theory that have been questioned by postpositivist philosophers and historians of science, but also that the failure to consider the work of these writers yields theories of international politics that are deficient in several respects: they are "weak" theories in the sense that they cannot illuminate crucial features of international politics, they presuppose and sustain a narrow view of power and power relations, they reify practices and relations in the international arena and they offer little promise of producing the sort of "Copernican Revolution" for which Waltz called (or, more modestly, even a minimally satisfactory theory of international politics). In light of these shortcomings, I sketch an alternative approach to the study of international affairs, one that has been termed "prototype studies." I contend that such an approach provides scholars with a rigorous way of studying international politics, without being a theoretical science.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20011191

Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20019516
Date: 3 1, 1992
Author(s): Godlove Terry F.
Abstract: Types of Religious Experience (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1988), p. 41
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20019521

Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20019730
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Rennie B. S.
Abstract: Order Out of Chaos, p. 251
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20019737

Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20081753
Date: 11 1, 2000
Author(s): Geary Dick
Abstract: Stefan Berger and David Broughton, eds., The Force of Labour. The Western European Labour Movement and the Working Classes (Oxford: Berg, 1995).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20081764

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20097829
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Widmaier Wesley W.
Abstract: Joseph Stiglitz, 'What I Learned at the World Economic Crisis', The New Republic, 17 April 2000.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20097834

Journal Title: World Politics
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Issue: i308701
Date: 7 1, 1977
Author(s): Dittmer Lowell
Abstract: The concept of political culture embraces some of the most basic, perennially fascinating concerns in behavioral political science; because of certain ambiguities in its theoretical formulation, however, there has been a tendency for the term to grow fuzzy with continued use. Its connection with related concepts, such as political psychology, political structure, and political language, has remained unclear, with the result that political culture has been difficult to isolate as an independent variable. Thus it has come to occupy a position on the periphery of politics, and is usually presumed to reinforce the status quo. This paper re-examines previous formulations of the concept and proposes a theoretical synthesis. The analytical framework is derived from semiological theory, a branch of science specifically designed for the analysis of meanings. The central variable is the political symbol. By analyzing the interactions of political symbols within a comprehensive semiological framework, the traditional concerns of political culture can be accommodated in a more precise and systematic way.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2010039

Journal Title: World Politics
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Issue: i308720
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Jonsson Christer
Abstract: Several recent studies of Soviet foreign policy formation have sought to bring organizational and cognitive considerations to bear on the subject. The article evaluates these perspectives and suggests how future research may, through the use of cognitive methods of analysis, distinguish formally between different conceptualizations of Soviet foreign policy formation, thus permitting a more rigorous empirical examination of the organizational issues involved. A model of inference that accounts for organizational and cognitive links between the Soviet press and Soviet foreign policy formation is also constructed; examples are drawn from the items under review. In conclusion, the article outlines a research strategy for cumulating knowledge about how the Soviet system works, and specifies what the organizational and cognitive frameworks for the study of Soviet foreign policy formation may contribute to such a project.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2010325

Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i20108002
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Prendeville Brendan
Abstract: 'Bundles for Them. A History of Giving Bundles' (p. 379)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20108006

Journal Title: Synthese
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i20118056
Date: 6 1, 1998
Author(s): Schulkin Jay
Abstract: Two philosophical traditions with much in common, (classical) pragmatism and (Heidegger's) hermeneutic philosophy, are here compared with respect to their approach to the philosophy of science. Both emphasize action as a mode of interpreting experience. Both have developed important categories -- inquiry, meaning, theory, praxis, coping, historicity, life-world -- and each has offered an alternative to the more traditional philosophies of science stemming from Descartes, Hume, and Comte. Pragmatism's "abduction" works with the dual perspectives of theory (as explanation) and praxis (as culture). The hermeneutical circle depends in addition on the lifeworld as background source of ontological meaning and resource for strategies of inquiry. Thus a hermeneutical philosophy of research involves three components: lifeworld (as ontological and strategic), theory (as explanatory), and praxis (as constitutive of culture).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20118058

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20127871
Date: 3 1, 1983
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: S. Kierkegaard, Kierkegaard's Concluding Unscientific Postscript, trans. D. Swenson and W. Lowrie (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1941), p. 99.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20127878

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20131299
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Norris Christopher
Abstract: Ideology and Rationality in the History of the Life Sci- ences, trans. Arthur Goldhammer (Cambridge: MIT Press, 1988)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20131302

Journal Title: Revista de Historia de América
Publisher: Instituto Panamericano de Geografia e Historia
Issue: i20139938
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Guiance Ariel
Abstract: Véase también Servier, op. cit., especialmente cap. IV, "La utopía y la conquista del Nuevo Mundo".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20139941

Journal Title: Revista de Historia de América
Publisher: Instituto Panamericano de Geografia e Historia
Issue: i20139971
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Gómez Fernando
Abstract: The Dustbin of History by Greil Marcus, Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20139975

Journal Title: The Academy of Management Review
Publisher: Academy of Management
Issue: i20159066
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Hardy Cynthia
Abstract: Garud, Jain, & Kumar- swamy, 2001
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20159075

Journal Title: Rhetoric Review
Publisher: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates
Issue: i20176801
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): DeGenaro William
Abstract: Working-class people perform class identities. These performances are marked with ironies in which working class symbolizes power and powerlessness. Such performances elide linear meaning-making in favor of poetic paradox and help us understand the contradictions of working-class life. "The New Deal," a chapbook by my great-grandfather, represents an occasion for understanding how one working-class person used language to consider his life's contradictions. The chapbook articulates a unique "working-class poetics" and suggests why rhetoricians ought to locate representations of the paradoxes of working-class life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20176806

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i210419
Date: 7 1, 1998
Author(s): Klausner Samuel Z.
Abstract: The ways in which values are assimilated to social research differ according to the theoretical frame of reference informing the research. An example from the writings of E. Digby Baltzell illustrates how a moral commitment shaped his assumptions about the nature of the social matrix and his research strategies. A Western moral rhetoric fares well if the researcher chooses a methodologically individualist framework. The framework assists a moral rhetoric by providing it with concrete rather than abstract social actors and with a basis for explanation in terms of motive rather than situational forces. Along the way moral statements can appear in the form of empirical generalizations and historical laws. Should sociologists deem ethically neutral social research desirable, this study suggests that concentration on scientific method, without exploring the value bases for selecting a frame of reference, is not a promising approach. A value analysis, especially around Weber's "value relevance," may function propaedeuticly.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/201851

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i210405
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): Hall John R.
Abstract: Conventionally, proposals to improve working relations between sociology and history have been interdisciplinary. The present essay advances an alternative approach-consolidation of sociohistorical inquiry as a transdisciplinary enterprise. All socio-historical inquiry depends on four elemental forms of discourse: discourse on values, narrative discourse, social theoretical discourse, and the discourse of explanation. Though inquiry is transdisciplinary in the problematics of these discourses, concrete methodology typically is oriented either toward theorization in relation to cases (historical sociology) or toward comprehensive analysis of a single phenomenon (sociological history). Varying the articulated relations among the four forms of discourse once for historical sociology and again for sociological history yields eight ideal typical strategies of inquiry. The four strategies of historical sociology include universal history, theory application, macro-analytic history, and contrast-oriented comparison. The parallel strategies for sociological history are situational history, specific history, configurational history, and historicism. These ideal types offer standard reference points that help clarify the underpinnings of a diverse range of scholarly practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/201957

Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i20203578
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Birth Kevin
Abstract: Johannes Fabian's "Time and the Other" criticized anthropology for creating representations that placed the Other outside the flow of time. Fabian offered the ethnographic portrayal of coevalness as a solution to this problem. This article explores four challenges to the representation of coevalness: the split temporalities of the ethnographer; the multiple temporalities of different histories; the culturally influenced phenomenological present; and the complicated relationship between culturally variable concepts of being and becoming and cultural concepts of time. Based on these challenges, this article argues that some attempts at ethnographic coevalness have fostered a temporal framework of homochronism which subsumes the Other into academic discourses of history. To achieve coevalness and to avoid homochronism and allochronism, it is necessary to represent the temporal frameworks that research subjects use to forge coevalness with ethnographers, and to place these frameworks in relationship to commonly used academic representations of time and history. /// Dans son livre "Le Temps et les Autres," Johannes Fabian critiquait la création par l'anthropologie de représentations plaçant l'Autre en dehors du flux du temps. Selon lui, la description ethnographique de la contemporanéité pourrait être la solution à ce problème. Le présent article explore les quatre difficultés que pose la représentation de la contemporanéité: temporalités dissociées de l'ethnographe, temporalités multiples des différentes histoires, présent phénoménologique culturellement informé, relation complexe entre les concepts culturellement variables de l'être et du devenir et les concepts culturel du temps. Sur la base de ces difficultés, l'auteur avance que certaines tentatives de contemporanéité ethnographique ont suscité un cadre temporel d'homochronie qui subsume l'Autre dans les discours académiques sur l'histoire. Pour parvenir à la contemporanéité et éviter homochronie et allochronie, il est nécessaire de représenter les cadres temporels utilisés par les enquêtés pour forger la contemporanéité avec les ethnographes et de resituer ces cadres en relation avec les représentations académiques du temps et de l'histoire qui prévalent habituellement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20203581

Journal Title: Journal of the American Oriental Society
Publisher: American Oriental Society
Issue: i20297304
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Moin A. Azfar
Abstract: Meisami, "Masʿūdī and the Reign of al-Amīn," 154-55.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20297308

Journal Title: Perspectives on Politics
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20446751
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): Kedar Asaf
Abstract: This article offers an anti-naturalist philosophical critique of the naturalist tendencies within qualitative concept formation as developed most prominently by Giovanni Sartori and David Collier. We begin by articulating the philosophical distinction between naturalism and anti-naturalism. Whereas naturalism assumes that the study of human life is not essentially different from the study of natural phenomena, anti-naturalism highlights the meaningful and contingent nature of social life, the situatedness of the scholar, and so the dialogical nature of social science. These two contrasting philosophical approaches inspire, in turn, different strategies of concept formation. Naturalism encourages concept formation that involves reification, essentialism, and an instrumentalist view of language. Anti-naturalism, conversely, challenges reified concepts for eliding the place of meanings, essentialist concepts for eliding the place of contingency, and linguistic instrumentalism for eliding the situatedness of the scholar and the dialogical nature of social science. Based on this philosophical framework, we subject qualitative concept formation to a philosophical critique. We show how the conceptual strategies developed by Sartori and Collier embody a reification, essentialism, and instrumentalist view of language associated with naturalism. Although Collier's work on concept formation is much more flexible and nuanced than Sartori's, it too remains attached to a discredited naturalism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20446758

Journal Title: Revista Mexicana de Sociología
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Sociales de la Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico
Issue: i20454218
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Suárez Hugo José
Abstract: Suárez, 2003a
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20454221

Journal Title: Oxford Review of Education
Publisher: Routledge Journals, Taylor & Francis
Issue: i20462366
Date: 2 1, 2008
Author(s): Crossouard Barbara
Abstract: Formative assessment has attracted increasing attention from both practitioners and scholars over the last decade. This paper draws on the authors' empirical research conducted over eleven years in educational situations ranging from infant schools to postgraduate education to propose a theorisation of formative assessment. Formative assessment is seen as taking place when teachers and learners seek to respond to student work, making judgements about what is good learning with a view to improving that learning. However, the theorisation emphasises formative assessment as being a discursive social practice, involving dialectical, sometimes conflictual, processes. These bring into play issues of power in which learners' and teachers' identities are implicated and what counts as legitimate knowledge is framed by institutional discourses and summative assessment demands. The paper argues that, rather than only paying attention to the content of learning, an ambition for formative assessment might be to deconstruct these contextual issues, allowing a critical consideration of learning as a wider process of becoming. The article suggests a model that might be useful to teachers and learners in achieving this.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20462368

Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i20467899
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Azérad Hugo
Abstract: Giorgio Agamben, Idée de la prose, trans. by Gérard Macé (Paris: Christian Bourgois, 1998).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20467904

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i20475540
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Chaubet François
Abstract: Michel Trebitsch, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20475554

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für philosophische Forschung
Publisher: Vittorio Klostermann
Issue: i20484715
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Rinderle Peter
Abstract: Rinderle (2007, 1. Begriffe im Kontext).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20484719

Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i20486556
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Mattingly Cheryl
Abstract: In this article I consider "narrative mind reading," the practical capability of inferring the motives that precipitate and underlie the actions of others. Following Jerome Bruner, I argue that this everyday capacity depends on our ability to place action within unfolding narrative contexts. While Bruner has focused on narrative mind reading as a within-culture affair, I look to border situations that cross race and class lines where there is a strong presumption among participants that they do not, in fact, share a cultural framework. Instead, interactions often reinforce actors' perceptions of mutual misunderstanding and cultural difference. Drawing on a longitudinal study of African American families who have children with severe illnesses, I examine narrative mind reading and misreading in one mother's interactions with the clinicians who treat her child. I further explore how narrative misreadings are supported through chart notes and "familiar stranger" stories. The focus on miscommunication grounds a theory of the reproduction of cultural difference in interactive dynamics and brings Bruner's emphasis on narrative into dialogue with contemporary anthropology of cultural borderlands.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20486565

Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i20486576
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): Calabrese Joseph D.
Abstract: Euro-American theories of psychotherapeutic intervention focus on therapist behavior or the therapeutic relationship, conceived in dyadic terms. The cultural prototype is individualistic and rationalistic: a one-to-one conversation in which the patient discloses and discusses innermost feelings in regular office visits. This may be appropriate for modern Euro-Americans. However, anthropological research finds that in many traditional healing systems, intervention is communal, it utilizes dramatic ritual ordeals and altered states of consciousness rather than rational conversations, and the healer-patient relationship may be less central. This article argues that the latter approach is not ignorant of psychotherapeutic principles; it has its own (however opposed to Euro-American assumptions they may be). Understanding this paradigm clash broadens our understanding of what psychotherapeutic intervention is. It also allows clinicians and policy makers to support traditional peoples in their own efforts at self-healing. Examples will be drawn from the author's work on the healing ceremonies of the Native American Church among contemporary Navajos.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20486581

Journal Title: Human Rights Quarterly
Publisher: The Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i20486733
Date: 2 1, 2009
Author(s): Addis Adeno
Abstract: John Rawls, A Theory of Justice 455 (1971).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20486739

Journal Title: Hispamérica
Publisher: Hispamérica, Saúl Sosnowski
Issue: i20540322
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Pino-Ojeda Walescka
Abstract: James Olney, Metaphors of Self: The Meaning of Autobiography, Princeton, NJ, Princeton University Press, 1972, pp 31-2
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20540326

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20542787
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Ciutǎ Felix
Abstract: Karin Fierke, 'Changing Worlds of Security', in Keith Krause and Michael C. Williams (eds), Critical Security Studies (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press), p. 248.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20542791

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20542787
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Michel Torsten
Abstract: Martin Heidegger, 'What calls for Thinking', in David Farrell Krell (ed.), Martin Heidegger. Basic Writings from Being and Time (1927) to The Task of Thinking (1964) (London and New York: Routledge, 2007), p. 370.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20542795

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20542799
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Brincat Shannon
Abstract: Hegel quoted in Mieczyslaw Maneli, 'Three Concepts of Freedom: Kant - Hegel - Marx', Interpretation, 7:1 (January, 1978), p. 28
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20542805

Journal Title: Quaderni Urbinati di Cultura Classica
Publisher: Instituto Editoriali e Poligrafici Internazionali
Issue: i20546867
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Giordano-Zecharya Manuela
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20546873

Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: The Association for Asian Studies, Inc.
Issue: i309685
Date: 8 1, 1975
Author(s): Schutz Richard
Abstract: A. L. Becker, a premier comparative student of Javanese language, literature, and aesthetics, was the main inspiration for the organization of the symposium at which the first versions of these ar- ticles were presented, the 1982 meetings of the As- sociation for Asian Studies in Chicago Becker 1982 meetings of the Association for Asian Studies in Chicago
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2056444

Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i20622153
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Elsaghe Yahya
Abstract: In "The Magic Mountain," the only literary text by Thomas Mann in which German anti-Semitism is an object of satire, it remains uncertain whether a number of individuals are to be considered Jewish, or not. These uncertainties are symptomatic of the novel's protracted genesis, and especially of Thomas Mann's lifelong, historically and biographically conditioned efforts to distance himself from the anti-Semitic typologies evident in his early work. The most prominent of the relevant individuals in "The Magic Mountain," Dr. Krokowski, exemplifies this phenomenon. The various characteristics attributed to Krokowski evoke the continuing memory of a literary figure through whom Thomas Mann had previously only intended to relieve his anti-Semitic resentments. Thus Krokowski has a dual significance, representing Thomas Mann's early anti-Semitism and his later and vigorous, but nevertheless not entirely successful, attempts to overcome it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20622158

Journal Title: International Journal of Sociology
Publisher: M. E. Sharpe
Issue: i20628279
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Kosicki Piotr H.
Abstract: Beginning with Maurice Halbwachs's theory of collective memory and the great body of sociological, historical, and political-science literature on war and aggression that postdates Halbwachs, the author attempts to identify the elements of aggressor—victim memory through a detailed analysis of the 1994 Rwandan genocide. In participant and third-party narratives of the genocide, it is possible to observe a commemorative quality in the campaign of mass murder. The author suggests that the persistence of post-traumatic culture and the failure of dialogue can lead people to kill in remembrance of earlier aggression: in such cases, "acting out" substitutes for "working through," with horrifying consequences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20628282

Journal Title: Latin American Perspectives
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i20684666
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Barbera Rosemary
Abstract: The dictatorship in Chile perpetrated massive human rights violations for 17 years, causing a rupture in social processes and engendering fear in the population. Data being gathered in an ongoing participatory action research study of the población (shanty-town) La Pincoya show that while memory can be debilitating to most persons, it may empower others. Memories of the practices of the military regime continue to cause fear in some of the population, affecting community cohesion and participation in local organizations. This has led to the dismantling of social networks in the community, robbing members of their ability to be the protagonists of their own lives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20684672

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i20697357
Date: 11 1, 2009
Author(s): Mac-Millan Mary
Abstract: Agamben 10
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20697363

Journal Title: Visual Arts Research
Publisher: University of Illinois
Issue: i20715824
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Thunder-McGuire Steve
Abstract: Children, who are composers of meaning rather than merely handlers of art materials, proceed by strategies of generative praxis that include fictive play and autobiography and involve judgment that is critically reflective and imagination that is productive. The view of things that leads an art teacher to believe that a child is making meaningful art is one in which a child's judgment is a sign, or even a criterion of thoughtful involvement. When this reflective judgment is manifested, you see that a child is guided by an inner critic of their work, and the claim that "Michael is making art" says it all. As I interpreted the long self-sustained efforts of children composing artist books, I became most aware of the way in which children's desire to represent their stories merged with drawing and a developing schema in the same way lived experience and metaphor interchange and generate each other. This interchange is the living ground of the inner critic in children's meaningful art.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20715830

Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Society for Utopian Studies
Issue: i20719896
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Boer Roland
Abstract: Focusing on the interplay of religion and Utopia in Fredric Jameson's recent Archaeologies of the Future, I identify a tension: on the one hand, the content of religion has been superseded (although not its forms), yet, on the other, Jameson still wishes to make use of a hermeneutics of suspicion and recovery in which even the most retrograde material may be recuperated—religion included. So we find a clash underway in this work. Sometimes Jameson sidelines religion, as one would expect if religion was no longer relevant. At other times, he exercises his dialectical hermeneutics, particularly at two moments: first, a recovery, via Feuerbach, of the role of magic within fantasy literature; second, the partial treatment of apocalyptic, which comes very close to his own argument for Utopia as rupture. From here, I develop the dialectic of ideology and Utopia further by expanding Jameson's comments on the possibilities of medieval theology and the utopian role of religion (both Catholic and Protestant) in More's Utopia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20719903

Journal Title: October
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i20721262
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): COWAN MICHAEL
Abstract: Pauli, Rhythmus und Resonanz, p. 35
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20721265

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: Center for Historical Social Research / Zentrum für Historische Sozialforschung
Issue: i20761908
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Keller Reiner
Abstract: This article reviews some new international releases in the field of discourse analysis in the tradition of Michel FOUCAULT. This kind of Foucauldian discourse analysis is related to other forms in the wider interdisciplinary field of discourse analysis. Nonetheless, it can be demonstrated that the Foucauldian form of discourse analysis is the most relevant one for contemporary analysis in the social sciences. It is argued that in the German social sciences the term "discourse analysis" is primarily used for theoretical social research or is used for empirical social research, without disclosing discourse-analytic methodology. Since the 1990s, the development of empirical methodologies for social discourse analysis in Germany has intensified. From it's beginning in the late 1960s, French methodology of discourse analysis has been empirically orientated. Here, the work of Michel PÊCHEUX is the central influence in which the epistemology of discourse analysis is thoroughly discussed and theorized. In France, PÊCHEUX continued the work of Michel FOUCAULT and, since then, one can speak of a Foucauldian tradition of discourse analysis, namely "French Discourse Analysis" (FDA). This review outlines the state-of- the-art of the transformation of Foucauldian discourse theory into a discourse-analytic methodology as a new kind of qualitative social research. For this reason, the influence and the analytic tools of linguistics are critically reviewed and a comparison of FDA in France and Foucauldian discourse analysis in Germany is undertaken. The first book reviewed is a British monograph from Glyn WILLIAMS that describes the development of French discourse analysis in the context of structuralism and post-structuralism. The book contains a thorough update of French discourse analysis and is path breaking for German readers of the discourse-analytic work of Michel PÊCHEUX. The volume comes on the heels of a new German handbook of social discourse analysis (edited by KELLER; HIRSELAND, SCHNEIDER & VIEHÖVER) that continues the thread with additional articles on theory and methodology, mostly in the field of (German) Foucauldian discourse analysis. This handbook presents a collection of articles by the most influential researchers in this field and it can be regarded as representing the state-of-the-art in the German field of discourse analysis. Next, a selection of several articles related to discourse theory from an interdisciplinary conference is reviewed. The content of these papers is mainly the social theory of discourse, not discourse analytic methodology. Following this, a new and clearly written French dictionary, edited by CHARAUDEAU and MAINGUENEAU, is reviewed. It is not only the first dictionary of the French vocabulary (mainly) of FDA, but also very useful for German social research on discourse. Finally, the latest release in this field is a new and very instructive introduction to the field of social research on discourse from KELLER. This book will be very useful not only for beginners—it contains a systematic overview of the research field and discusses strategies for further discourse-analytic research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20761912

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: Center for Historical Social Research / Zentrum für Historische Sozialforschung
Issue: i20762096
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Silvennoinen Martti
Abstract: SILVENNOINEN 2003, p.167
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20762110

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: Center for Historical Social Research / Zentrum für Historische Sozialforschung
Issue: i20762255
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Keller Reiner
Abstract: Actual efforts to use Michel FOUCAULT's ideas about discourse for empirical research induce a linguistic bias which misses FOUCAULT's interests in power/knowledge. Against such tendencies, this article argues for a grounding of discourse theory and empirical discourse research in the sociology of knowledge, especially in the German-based Hermeneutische Wissenssoziologie, which follows the BERGER/LUCKMANN approach to knowledge. For the purposes of empirical discourse research on knowledge, the author first considers the interpretative dimension of research. Then, some conceptual tools for knowledge analysis are presented (interpretative scheme, classification, phenomenal structure, narrative structure). Third, drawing on grounded theory and sequential analysis, concrete work on texts is discussed. Finally, the article insists that discourse research should not be reduced to the analysis of spoken or written texts. Instead, different kinds of materiality—for example as dispositifs—have to be considered.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20762259

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: Center for Historical Social Research / Zentrum für Historische Sozialforschung
Issue: i20762315
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Oesterle Günter
Abstract: This book of collected papers, published by the DFG-Sonderforschungsbereich Erinnerungskulturen ("Memory Cultures") at the Justus Liebig University of Gießen, gives a broad overview of approaches and results of memory research within various disciplines. Despite many interesting insights, the book offers no general framework by which the different aspects analyzed by the authors could be classified and related to one another. Thus, the shortcomings of memory studies, from a cultural perspective and understood as an interdisciplinary, multidimensional research program, become visible.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20762326

Journal Title: German Studies Review
Publisher: German Studies Association
Issue: i20787905
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Gelzer Florian
Abstract: Marieluise Fleißer's Mehlreisende Frieda Geier is regarded by now as one of the most remarkable novels written during the period of the Weimar Republic. However, both at the time of its publication and in subsequent scholarship, the structure of the work was criticized for being haphazard and ineffective. Responding to this criticism, this study reveals that Fleißer simply employed a set of specifically modern narrative strategies to organize her novel, such as seasonal changes, light-dark contrasts or repetitive patterns. This unusual technique lends the text a paradoxical "dissonant unity" and secures its place among the avant-garde of late 1920s literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20787909

Journal Title: Sociological Focus
Publisher: North Central Sociological Association
Issue: i20831390
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): Dickie-Clark Hamish F.
Abstract: In this paper I try to show what kind of theory Giddens' theory of structuration is. I do so by first listing what Giddens accepts and what he rejects in his assessments of functionalism, hermeneutics, structuralism, and the writings of Marx. For what I think are good reasons, most of this part is given over to the use Giddens makes of Gadamer's hermeneutic philosophy. Next I set out my understanding of Giddens' view of theory as primarily concerned "with reworking conceptions of human being and human doing, social reproduction and social transformation" (Giddens 1984:xx). I seek to show the crucial implications of this for the way that theory enters directly into and helps to consitute social life. Taken together, these two steps lead to the conclusion that Giddens' theory is neither an attempt at an over-arching "Grand Theory," nor an imposition of new orthodoxy in place of the old. Instead I suggest that his avowed eclecticism is closely akin to the hermeneutic goal contained in Gadamer's concept of the "fusion of horizons." This notion recognizes the never-to-be-completed, but basic, human activity of creatively questioning what has been handed down from the past. It is questioned so that it may be applied — incomplete as it is — to the changed situation of the present with its different interests and problems. That those who can and do question it are themselves the products of past tradition, calls for a kind of social theory that is in some ways different from that modeled on the explanatory "laws" of natural science. I contend that Giddens' theory of structuration is such a theory. (For an introductory overview of the theory itself, see Dickie-Clark, 1984).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20831395

Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849843
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): Chenavier Robert
Abstract: Husserl, Krisis, p. All All.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20849849

Journal Title: Organization Science
Publisher: Institute for Operations Research and the Management Sciences
Issue: i20868876
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Bartel Caroline A.
Abstract: Experiences that do not fit squarely into known categories pose a challenge to notions of organizational learning that rely primarily on scientific or experiential approaches. Making sense of, responding to, and learning from such unusual experiences requires reflection and novel action by organizational actors. We argue that narrative development processes make this organizational learning possible. By developing narratives, organizational actors create situated understandings of unusual experiences, negotiate consensual meanings, and engage in coordinated actions. Through the accumulation of narratives about unusual experiences, an organization builds a memory with generative qualities. Specifically, through narratives, actors evoke memories of prior unusual experiences and how they were dealt with, and this generates new options for dealing with emerging unusual experiences. We outline a framework detailing how narrative development processes enable organizational learning from unusual experiences and conclude by summarizing how this approach differs from and yet builds upon scientific and experiential approaches to learning.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1287/orsc.1100.0536

Journal Title: American Sociological Review
Publisher: American Sociological Association
Issue: i336477
Date: 6 1, 1970
Author(s): Zimmerman Phillip A.
Abstract: Douglas (1970)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2094358

Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: State University of New York at Buffalo
Issue: i310300
Date: 6 1, 1970
Author(s): Ricoeur Clark
Abstract: The Personalist: "On the Reducibility of Hegelian to Standard Logic," Vol. 56 (1975), pp. 414-430. 414 56 The Personalist 1975
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2106868

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i211058
Date: 11 1, 1995
Author(s): Somers Margaret R.
Abstract: The English translation of Habermas's The Structural Transformation of the Public Sphere converges with the revival of the "political culture concept" in the social sciences. Surprisingly, Habermas's account of the Western bourgeois public sphere has much in common with the original political culture concept associated with Parsonian modernization theory in the 1950s and 1960s. In both cases, the concept of political culture is used in a way that is neither political nor cultural. Explaining this peculiarity is the central problem addressed in this article and its companion piece, which appeared in Sociological Theory, volume 3, number 2 (1995). I hypothesize that this is the case because the concept itself is embedded in an historically constituted political culture (here called a conceptual network)-a structured web of conceptual relationships that combine into Anglo-American citizenship theory. The method of an historical sociology of concept formation is used to analyze historically and empirically the internal constraints and dynamics of this conceptual network. The method draws from new work in cultural history and sociology, social studies, and network, narrative, and institutional analysis. This research yields three empirical findings: this conceptual network has a narrative structure, here called the Anglo-American citizenship story; this narrative is grafted onto an epistemology of social naturalism; and these elements combine in a metanarrative that continues to constrain empirical research in political sociology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/223298

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i211059
Date: 11 1, 1997
Author(s): Verheggen Theo
Abstract: By studying Durkheim through a Schopenhauerian lens, the one-sidedly cognitivist and functionalist reception of his social theory can be balanced. Durkheim explicitly rejected such monistic interpretations. His dialectical approach was always aimed at an essentially dualistic perception of man and society, wherein the lower pole, the individual, is central. In Durkheim's symbol theory, this position leads to two kinds of symbols: those that are bound to the human body, here called "this and that" symbols, and those people can choose freely, here called "this for that" symbols. This twofold symbol theory can already be found in medieval philosophy (e.g. Dante Alighieri) as well as in the work of Paul Ricoeur. For Durkheim the human person is the symbol par excellence. By implication the rituals in which the person is (re)constructed, that is the rites of passage, should be central. The interpretation here opens up new perspectives for a more psychological interpretation of Durkheim's sociology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/223308

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Jossey-Bass Inc.
Issue: i211057
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Rogers Mary F.
Abstract: The work of literary structuralists, particularly Roland Barthes, provides sharper insights into ethnomethodology than symbolic interactionism, labeling theory, or phenomenology. Further, it suggests that the metaphor of text may be fruitful for analysts of everyday life. Greater theoretical benefits derive from that metaphor, however, if one applies it using the ideas of literary theorists outside the structuralist tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/223347

Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23005130
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): PAVESI NICOLETTA
Abstract: ibid.: 46
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23005136

Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23005171
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): CEREDA AMBROGIA
Abstract: Castellani (1995: 70-72).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23005179

Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23005055
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): DE SIMONE ANTONIO
Abstract: 2007
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23005214

Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i23011305
Date: 3 1, 2011
Author(s): Armstrong-Fumero Fernando
Abstract: This article draws on ethnographic examples to examine how rural Maya-speakers in the Mexican state of Yucatán ground the experience of identity politics in quotidian engagements with pre-Hispanic objects and utterances in the Maya language. My argument is intended as a revision of models of critical scholarship that have been influenced by poststructuralism and that place an overwhelming emphasis on discourse as a modality through which politically viable identities are created and performed. Specific examples show how vernacular multiculturalism is shaped by the agency of forms of language use and physical objects that have been a part of local life-worlds long before the popularization of Mayan identity politics. This offers some potentials for collaborative work that have not been fully explored in poststructural critiques of representation. L'auteur s'appuie sur des exemples ethnographiques pour étudier la manière dont les locuteurs du maya vivant dans les zones rurales de l'état mexicain du Yucatán fondent leur expérience de la politique identitaire sur une interaction quotidienne avec les objets et énoncés préhispaniques de la langue maya. Son argumentation se veut une remise en cause des modèles universitaires critiques influencés par le poststructuralisme, qui mettent lourdement l'accent sur le discours en tant que modalité permettant de créer et de réaliser des identités politiquement viables. Des exemples concrets montrent comme un multiculturalisme vernaculaire se constitue par l'action des formes d'usage du langage et des objets matériels qui faisaient partie de la vie locale longtemps avant que la politique identitaire maya se popularise. Cette approche offre un potentiel de travail en collaboration qui n'a pas été complètement exploré par les critiques poststructuralistes de la représentation.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-9655.2010.01669.x

Journal Title: Music & Letters
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23013006
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Gelbart Matthew
Abstract: Rodel, 'Extreme Noise Terror'.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/ml/gcr037

Journal Title: Public Administration Review
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i23017455
Date: 8 1, 2011
Author(s): Rhodes R. A. W.
Abstract: What intellectual influence, if any, have British public administration scholars had on their American counterparts since World War II? In this article, the author briefly reviews the major areas of theory and research in the British study of publication administration, further identifying important contributions by British scholars in the areas of modernist-empiricism, the new public management, regulation, policy networks and governance, and interpretive theory. Although there is a discernible American influence on British public administration, there is little British impact on U.S. public administration; nowadays it is a one-way street. Increasingly, British scholars are involved in a growing community of European public administration scholars with whom they share active, two-way connections. Recent European developments suggest that American and European public administration academics are growing further apart. Due to the immense strength of modernist-empiricism throughout American universities, plus the interpretive turn to a European epistemology of "blurred genres," these twin, traditionally self-referential, communities seem to be parting company with an attendant danger that future intellectual engagement may be a dead end.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1540-6210.2011.02388.x

Journal Title: Economic and Political Weekly
Publisher: Sameeksha Trust
Issue: i23017826
Date: 8 19, 2011
Author(s): DE LOYOLA FURTADO MAX
Abstract: A small section of the Goan elite sought political and civil rights and founded the Partido Indiano (Indian Party) in 1865 in the village of Orlim. It enjoyed mass support particularly of the local Catholics. The rival party was the pro-establishment Partido Ultramarino. The violence that ensued in Margao in 1890 during the municipal elections is known as the 21 September Revolt. It lasted for a mere 20 minutes though the military firing killed 12 persons on the spot besides injuring many more. Protest meetings were held not just in Goa but also in Bombay, Poona, Karachi and Zanzibar. Even the Canadian and American press condemned the brutality and carried news on the "Goa Revolution". This article brings out the history of that revolt in the context of the working of colonialism in Goa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23017851

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i23020380
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Marks Susan
Abstract: Schwartz argues for the later rabbinic development of practices related to death: "Indeed, if it is the case that even strongly 'Jewish' Jews were often buried without the accompaniment of Jewish iconography—that despite what we are accustomed to think about such liminal moments as birth, death, marriage and so on, death was not yet generally an occasion among Palestinian Jews for strong public affirmation of group identity—then Beth Shearim shows that the judaization of Jewish burial practice was now (third-fourth century) underway in some circles" (2001: 154).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfr001

Journal Title: Shakespeare Quarterly
Publisher: The Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i23025612
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Sherman Anita Gilman
Abstract: Wulf Kansteiner, "Memory, Media, and Menschen: Where Is the Individual in Collective Memory Studies?" Memory Studies 3 (2010): 3-4.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/shq.2011.0003

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc., The Catholic University of America
Issue: i23055602
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): RORTY AMÉLIE
Abstract: Alvin Goldman, Simulating Minds (New York: Oxford University Press, 2006), Ch. 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23055638

Journal Title: Journal of Arabic Literature
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23071583
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Hayek Ghenwa
Abstract: Introduction; Jens Hanssen's Fiti-de-Siecle Beirut.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1163/157006411X596140

Journal Title: Latin American Antiquity
Publisher: Society for American Archaeology
Issue: i23072521
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Sabloff Jeremy A.
Abstract: This study builds on the premise that local knowledge of limestone—and its workable characteristics—was foundational to landscape inhabitation in the Puuc region of Yucatán, México. Classic Maya architecture of the northern Yucatán generally is considered to represent the apogee of Maya construction prowess with extensive use of core-veneer masonry and the creation of tall, wide corbelled vaults. Less commonly discussed is the variable distribution of high-quality limestone across the Yucatán, the social matrix that undergirds the quarrying, transporting, and working of limestone, and the pronounced social differences materialized in stone architecture. This study explores these three topics by bringing to bear Yucatec Mayan linguistic evidence and excavation data from the archaeological site of Sayil, in the hilly Puuc region of Yucatán. That information provides a basis for understanding the development of a sprawling residential complex, the role that variable limestone quality played in its expansion, and serves as an index of intra-compound social difference. Late additions to the dwellings indicate that recognition of the cultural value of carved stone persisted long after masonry skills became attenuated. The durability of stone renders it a particularly effective—if underutilized—medium for interpreting social landscapes of the past. Este estudio amplifica la premisa de que el conocimiento de la piedra caliza—y sus propiedades arteseanales—fue una base fundamental para la ocupación del paisaje de la Región Puuc, Yucatán, México. En general, la arquitectura de los mayas de la época Clásica del norte de Yucatán se considera representativa del apogeo de su proeza arquitectónica con el uso extensivo de núcleos de piedra burda recubiertos de piedra labrada y la creación de habitaciones con bóvedas altas y anchas. Menos mencionados son la distribución geográfica variable de piedra caliza de alta calidad a través de Yucatán, la matriz social que permite la explotación de canteras y el transporte y trabajo de los bloques, y la diferencia social profunda que se nota en la arquitectura en piedra. Este estudio explora estos tres temas usando evidencia de la lengua maya yucateca y datos de excavaciones del sitio arqueológico de Sayil, en la serranía Puuc. Esta información proporciona las bases para entender el desarrollo de un grupo residencial expansivo y el papel que la calidad variable de la piedra caliza tuvo en su expansión, y sirve como índice de diferencias sociales entre los habitantes del mismo grupo. Adiciones tardías a los edificios indican que el reconocimiento del valor cultural de la piedra trabajada persistió mucho tiempo después de la disminución de las técnicas especializadas de albañilería. La durabilidad de la piedra la hace un buen instrumento, aunque poco utilizado, para interpretar los paisajes sociales del pasado.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23072558

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Wiley-Blackwell
Issue: i23076390
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Moore Adam
Abstract: Zerubavel (1995)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23076395

Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Carocci editore
Issue: i23078532
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Zapponi Elena
Abstract: A. Wieviorka, L'era del testimone, Milano, Cortina, 1999, p. 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23078539

Journal Title: Social Analysis: The International Journal of Social and Cultural Practice
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Issue: i23182019
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Øye Inger-Elin
Abstract: Building on 25 months of fieldwork in eastern Germany from 1991 to 2003, this article explores the interpenetration of aesthetics and politics, and questions them as theoretical categories. A multilayered description depicts aesthetic perception and action, guided by an imagery of façade, as constituted and reproduced by state policies, positioned experiences, and subversive responses. Moving beyond the Cold War legacy, aesthetics' potency and politicization is dated back to early nation building and Protestant and Romantic influences. Being essential to and controlled by shifting, largely authoritarian regimes, aesthetics simultaneously provided a 'shadow life' and a 'lingua franca', cross-cutting verbal and non-verbal mediums and everyday and high culture, as people juggled with, distrusted, and decoded surfaces, expressing and in search of deeper, hidden truths. I argue that historically generated aesthetic perceptions and praxis not only mark east German political culture but also emerge in Habermas's public sphere theory and, moreover, offer arguments to revise it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23182146

Journal Title: Alternatives: Global, Local, Political
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i23210881
Date: 5 1, 2012
Author(s): Kopper Ákos
Abstract: Controlling for insecurities depends on a capacity to make inferences on the basis of experiences about the past, yet the use of knowledge about the past for anticipating and predicting future threats is highly problematic. This article examines the problem of governing individuals on the basis of what is available about their past deeds and social networks in governmental and commercial archives. It highlights the tension between administrative and private narratives about individuals, the former being constructed on the basis of minute details collected and stored about individuals since birth, and the latter referring to the accounts individuals offer of themselves. By applying the notions of ipse and idem identity developed by Paul Ricoeur, the article examines the two-way flow between memory and identity and the consequent concern that administrative narratives are blind to the ethical renewal of individuals, to the capacity of Man to extricate himself from the shackles of his past. To prepare the ground, the article considers some inherent limitations of biopolitics, pointing out that although biopolitics was classically concerned to govern both individual bodies and the body politic, administrative and governmental limitations have led states to govern the "average citizen" rather than individuals in their "individuality."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23210885

Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i23215077
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻤﻦ ﻓﺪﻭﻯ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ
Abstract: ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺒﻴﺪ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺎﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﻧﻈﺮﺍﹰ ﻟﻠﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺳﺨﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻮﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﹰ ﺣﻴﺎﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻧﻮﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ. ﻓﻜﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﻟﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺸﻴﺔ ﺃﺗﻰ ﺇﻟﻴﻨﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺮﻳﺪﺭﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺟﻼﺱ - ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ - ﻣﻜﻨﺘﻬﻢ ﻇﺮﻭﻓﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ. ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﻨﺒﻊ ﺇﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺷﻌﺐ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ، ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﻲ، ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ. ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻳﺪﺭﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺟﻼﺱ، ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ، ﻭﺇﻧﻤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﺸﻜﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﹰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻴﺎﹰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ . Slave narratives, in general, and Frederick Douglass’s works, in particular, have created a serious difficulty for their modern readers and interpreters as representations of the otherwise silent community of black slaves. Silence here denotes their inability to enter certain domains of discourse. Thus, they appear` silent despite the rich African American traditions of music, song, and story-telling, which helped to preserve their cultural identity but could not be written into the mainstream culture. The article poses questions concerning the ability of one intellectual voice to represent the collectivity of black experience and of black slaves. This does not diminish the literary value of Douglass's writing but undermines the use of it as a historical document
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23216062

Journal Title: Social Thought & Research
Publisher: Department of Sociology, University of Kansas
Issue: i23250013
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Chriss James J.
Abstract: Chriss (1999a)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23250404

Journal Title: Humboldt Journal of Social Relations
Publisher: Humboldt State University
Issue: i23261550
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): Jacobs Anton K.
Abstract: This essay suggests Friedrich Nietzsche has a contribution to make to the theoretical enterprise of social science. Contemporary theorizing, reflecting an increased attention to language, has been focusing on the dialogical mode of production and, of course, on hermeneutics. This has led to a renewal of interest in Friedrich Nietzsche. In this essay, two alternative models of the hermeneutic circle are examined: one arising out of the work of the school of Konstanz; the other associated primarily with the work of Juergen Habermas. The former presents a circular image of the "conversational" situation; the latter portrays a time schedule of the process based on the psychoanalytic process of therapy. Nietzsche's contributions are suggested to be significant, in the first model, in regard to the mode of production and, in the second, the stage of the quasi-naturalistic turn. Nietzsche's way to truth is through constant and relentless criticizing. In contrast to the rationalistic practices of Western philosophy, Nietzsche exercised an art of interpreting based on the use of metaphor and aphorism. This practice seems to reflect Nietzsche's concern to communicate truth in a world he saw as inherently ambiguous and dynamic, thus, rendering propositional truth impossible. Nietzsche radically challenges the rational foundations on which we stand. Thus he presents us with a mode of knowledge production that reclaims traditions lost to science. In addition, Nietzsche shows, by word and example, that his existential approach offers a way to see life as a text and source for quasi-naturalistic forays toward understanding. In this way Nietzsche shows that the traditional concept of knowledge is a pseudo-concept by revealing the intimate and inseparable connection between life and knowledge. Knowledge is rooted in life; it is a manifestation of concrete psychological and political realities. Consequently, it makes sense not to ignore life as a source for explanation when examining resources for re-establishing communication when the hermeneutic circle breaks down in a moment of misunderstanding.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23261695

Journal Title: Journal of British Studies
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i23265372
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Prince Simon
Abstract: Beiner (again) is among the rare exceptions to the rule that Irish memory studies overlook narrative theory: Guy Beiner, "In Anticipation of a Post-Memory Boom Syndrome," Cultural Analysis 7 (2008): 107-12.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1086/661184

Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i23270664
Date: 8 1, 2012
Author(s): BERNIER ALEXANDRE
Abstract: Nicolo ruling of 1989.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/S0960777312000264

Journal Title: Annual Review of Anthropology
Publisher: Annual Reviews
Issue: i23270692
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Zeitlyn David
Abstract: http://www.rrnpilot. org/.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1146/annurev-anthro-092611-145721

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i23277635
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): KUUKKANEN JOUNI-MATTI
Abstract: Rescher, Objectivity; Max Weber, "Objectivity in Social Sciences and Social Policy," in Weber, The Methodology of the Social Sciences (New York: The Free Press, 1949).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1468-2303.2012.00632.x

Journal Title: International Organization
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i23279968
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): de Mello e Souza André
Abstract: Grant and Keohane 2005, especially 36, 38.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23279972

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i23351874
Date: 2 1, 2013
Author(s): Doran Robert
Abstract: To claim that Hayden White has yet to be read seriously as a philosopher of history might seem false on the face of it. But do tropes and the rest provide any epistemic rationale for differing representations of historical events found in histories? As an explanation of White's influence on philosophy of history, such a proffered emphasis only generates a puzzle with regard to taking White seriously, and not an answer to the question of why his efforts should be worthy of any philosophical attention at all. For what makes his emphasis on narrative structure and its associated tropes of philosophical relevance? What, it may well be asked, did (or could) any theory that draws its categories from a stock provided by literary criticism contribute to explicating problems with regard to the warranting of claims about knowledge, explanation, or causation that represent those concerns that philosophy typically brings to this field? Robert Doran's anthologizing of previously uncollected pieces, ranging as they do over a literal half-century of White's published work, offers an opportunity to identify explicitly those philosophical themes and arguments that regularly and prominently feature there. Moreover, White's essays in this volume demonstrate a credible knowledge of and interest in mainstream analytic philosophers of his era and also reveal White as deeply influenced by or well acquainted with other important philosophers of history. White thus invites a reading of his work as philosophy, and this volume presents the opportunity for accepting it as such.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/hith.10660

Journal Title: Early China
Publisher: The Society for the Study of Early China and the Institute of East Asian Studies, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i23351649
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Schaberg David
Abstract: Duke Ling of Jin (Zuozhuan, Xuan 2.3 [Yang, 655-59]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23354245

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Centre national de la recherche scientifique
Issue: i23375394
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): CUCHET Guillaume
Abstract: Muray, 1984, passim.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23375400

Journal Title: Dappim: Research in Literature / דפים למחקר בספרות
Publisher: החוג לספרות עברית והשוואתית, אוניברסיטת חיפה
Issue: i23416296
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Levy Ze'ev
Abstract: Jacques Derrida's deconstructionism has influenced some American shools of literary criticism which aim at abolishing the distinction between literary and philosophical texts and, at the same time, deconstructing the text from its inherent meaning. If no text has any determined meaning, every interpretation is as correct as any other. This article examines some tenets of Derrida and his followers, especially their definitions of the words understanding, interpretation, and difference. It finds some surprizing affinities between Kant's formalistic esthetics and certain formalistic trends in modern criticism, in particular the concept of autonomy, which implies, in deconstructionism, the uniqueness of every text. However, if so, every reading is inevitably a 'misreading' or 'misinterpretation' thereof. This has led to the paradoxical and unwarranted conclusion that reading is impossible... The article questions some eccentric implications of this paralogism, for example, if no text is readable, does this apply to Derrida's writings as well? The article also calls attention to some interesting concepts of Jewish Kabala and of 'negative theology', which bear a striking resemblance to certain of Derrida's and other deconstructionists' ideas. Without diminishing the importance of Derrida's philosohpical work or the contribution of deconstructionism to modern hermeneutics, this article refutes certain nihilistic claims of the 'deconstructors' regarding philosophical hermeneutics and literary criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23417047

Journal Title: Dappim: Research in Literature / דפים למחקר בספרות
Publisher: החוג לספרות עברית והשוואתית, אוניברסיטת חיפה
Issue: i23416461
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Benari Motti
Abstract: The paper examines the process of figurative reading in the presence of a marker (like / as), namely the unique cognitive impact caused by shaping figurative expressions as similes. The solution is sought through theoretical discussion and analysis of relevant excerpts from Hebrew poetry. Recently Bethlehem argued that a simile does not necessarily indicate the presence of resemblance of some sort; the simile only presents itself as such via its marker, like/as, but actually it can bear a variety of figurative relations, of which metaphoric relations are only one possible option. Consequently, simile has only coincidental relations with metaphor, if any (Bethlehem, 1996: 1997) First I address this criticism, trying to reinforce the widespread view that a simile is indeed a sub-type of metaphor, and that there is no fundamental difference between them, that is, comprehension processes in metaphor and simile are basically similar. Next I distinguish the simile from the literal comparison in a new comprehensive way. Finally I try to identify and study the special impression a figurative expression might create as a result of being shaped as a simile. Despite this basic sameness of simile and metaphor, the marker's presence in a simile has its unique cognitive effects, accumulating to a distinctive impact. I analyze the unique cognitive effects potentially evolved during the construction process of the simile's meaning. In this analysis this paper reexamines central issues pertaining to similes, their essence, and the cognitive processes they trigger in readers. Among these I focus on a problem never thoroughly explored so far: the essential nature of the coexistence of similarity and dissimilarity (without working against each other) in both metaphor and simile.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23417592

Journal Title: European Journal of Psychology of Education
Publisher: I.S.P.A. / Instituto Superior de Psicologia Aplicada
Issue: i23419999
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Hviid Pernille
Abstract: How do children conceptualise their own development? From their point of view, what serve as constraints for their movements in time and space? The theoretical framework of the experiment described here was a cultural historical first person developmental perspective. The concept of transition is here put in use to capture the children's experience of their movements with or against a dynamic, inviting and demanding socio-cultural landscape over time. An interpretation of children's experience of their developmental timing with temporalities of the childhood landscape is presented. Comment les enfants conceptualisent-ils leur propre développement? De leur point de vue, qu'est-ce qui contraint leurs mouvements dans l'espace et dans le temps? Le cadre théorique de la recherche décrite ici est une perspective historico-culturelle, développementale et à la première personne. Le concept de transition est utilisé pour mettre en évidence l'expérience que les enfants ont de leurs mouvements, allant avec, ou à l'encontre de leur environnement socioculturel et temporel, lequel est à la fois dynamique, invitant et exigeant. Une interprétation de l'expérience que les enfants ont de la temporalité de leur propre développement est présentée en rapport avec les temporalités caractérisant l'environnement de l'enfance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23421597

Journal Title: Annales de Géographie
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i23458030
Date: 2 1, 2013
Author(s): Héritier Stéphane
Abstract: Gauchon et al., 2006
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23458032

Journal Title: Annales de Géographie
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i23457606
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Lefort Isabelle
Abstract: Vasset Ph. (2007), Un livre blanc. Récit avec cartes, Paris, Fayard.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23458463

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i23483400
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): SHERIDAN RUTH
Abstract: The Australian Oxford English Dictionary [ed. Bruce Moore; 2nd ed.; Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004], 968
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23487893

Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Fundación Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i23496240
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): de la Pascua Sánchez María José
Abstract: Ibidem, pp. 126-127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23496317

Journal Title: Beit Mikra: Journal for the Study of the Bible and Its World / בית מקרא: כתב-עת לחקר המקרא ועולמו
Publisher: המרכז העולמי לתנ"ך בירושלים
Issue: i23509413
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): L. Greenstein Edward
Abstract: Although the character of Job's wife has been given very little space in the biblical text of Job, she has been treated by many exegetes as significant. There are two main streams of interpretation in which she has figured prominently. In classical Christian approaches, ranging from Augustine to some modern commentators such as Habel, Job's wife tends to be regarded as a temptress in the mold of Eve and as a collaborator of the Satan. Post-modern, especially feminist, approaches tend to rehabilitate the character of Job's wife, accrediting her with prompting Job's critical reflection and with anticipating the direction in which the plot of the book develops. In the present article, interpretive approaches to Job's wife, including the favorable approach of some Jewish exegesis of antiquity, as well as the somewhat middle road of medieval Jewish exegesis, are surveyed. A critical discussion of feminist treatments of Job's wife deals primarily with the work of Newsom, Pardes and van Wolde. The place of Job's wife in the book is assessed with regard to how her theological views compare to those of the Satan on the one hand, and Job on the other, as well as to her role as a catalyst in the plot.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23509418

Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century French Studies
Publisher: The University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i23535689
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Gordon Rae Beth
Abstract: "La dérive d'une vie," that of the hero in En rade, is metaphorized by the dérive of narrative, composed of a complex network of metaphors. In 1893, Paul Souriau proposed that metaphor makes a fleeting representation pass into the unconscious. Dreams and hysteria, states in which the unconscious holds sway, are of considerable importance in this text. An analysis of the way that metaphor works will shed light on the relationships between dream and reality, and between consciousness and the unconscious in general. The double fil of extended metaphor is also metaphorized as a bifurcating road, the road of narrative and the labyrinthine path the hero's thoughts take. In fact, route or chemin is not only a metaphor for the text and for extended metaphor itself, but also for the complex pathways of the nerves and brain. If the road or path of narrative is also a representation of nerves/brain, then retracing these pathways of metaphors would be a way of following the text's attempt to dissect the brain and uncover the links between dream and reality, the double sphere of activity that characterizes this novel.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23537218

Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century French Studies
Publisher: The University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i23535931
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): WRIGHT BETH S.
Abstract: After 1814, the French looked to parallels in the past to explain the causes of contemporary events. For them historical time was doubled, understood through analogies. Signaling multiple times, easily accomplished in historiographic narratives, posed a challenge to historical painters. Delaroche utilized innovative approaches to representing time in his works, which were praised by contemporary historians and art critics as visual parallels to modern historical literature. In this essay I argue that Delaroche's repeated visual quotation of works from the Bowyer Historic Gallery enabled him to represent a doubled moment in his historical paintings. I examine his approach to temporality in Jane Grey (1834), Assassination of the duc de Guise (1834), a suite of watercolors (c.1825) on an episode in Rousseau's Confessions (1782), and Cromwell (1831). The latter was one of several works by Delaroche inspired by Chateaubriand's Les Quatre Stuarts (1828), an insistently multi-temporal text which compared Stuarts and Bourbons, written to ensure the stability of the newly restored Bourbon dynasty.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23538480

Journal Title: Biography
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press for the Biographical Research Center
Issue: i23538394
Date: 4 1, 1991
Author(s): Woods Leigh
Abstract: Written frankly for money, Charles Dickens' biography of the English stage-clown, Joseph Grimaldi, has generally been dismissed as hackwork. Dickens's Memoirs of Joseph Grimaldi, though, discloses persistent Victorian attitudes toward performers and performing, and anticipates in uncanny ways the biographical commentary that surrounds Dickens's own career as a performer.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23539893

Journal Title: Early American Studies
Publisher: THE McNEIL CENTER FOR EARLY AMERICAN STUDIES
Issue: i23545403
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): SCRABA JEFFREY
Abstract: Ibid., 10
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23546624

Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548415
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): LAWSON E THOMAS
Abstract: Humphrey and Laidlaw (1994)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23549643

Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548425
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): BLOOMQUIST L. GREGORY
Abstract: In this article I suggest ways in which rhetorical analysis can complement sociological analysis of early Christianity. On the basis of a universally acknowledged saying of Jesus ("blessed are you poor"), I suggest that those who use social scientific perspectives need to clarify more accurately the levels of data from which they are working (i.e., when they are working with probably early material, possibly the words of Jesus himself, and when they are working with the later elaboration of the traditional material) and to identify the rhetorical value of each level. I then show how, contrary to sociological analysis that depicts Jesus as merely proclaiming reversal, the historical Jesus proclaimed a reversal that had already happened but one that was away from God's intended order: what the historical Jesus was calling for was a future restoration to a state that existed before the reversal. Attention to the rhetorical nature of his follower's use of this proclamation, however, shows that when the author of the Gospel of Luke and the Lukan Acts of the Apostles uses the language of reversal and restoration, he now does so to describe what was happening not primarily vis-à-vis "the world" but in their own, now Christian communities Jesus' message of reversal of the fate of the poor becomes in this way the Lukan message of the apostolic governance of that reversal, that is, the broker's (the apostolic leadership's, after the model of Jesus) dispensation of the patron's (God's) resources.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23549644

Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548426
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): ALBINUS LARS
Abstract: Nagy 1990b: 79.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23549696

Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548454
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): GEERTZ CLIFFORD
Abstract: Lakoff and Turner 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23549990

Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548420
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Urban Hugh B.
Abstract: Eliade 1969: 8, 9
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23551195

Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548563
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Vásquez Manuel A.
Abstract: Johnson (2007: 258)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23551871

Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23555023
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Parrish John W.
Abstract: Smith (1982: xi).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23555723

Journal Title: The Annual of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23556518
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Farley Margaret A.
Abstract: Pau! Ricoeur, Oneself as Another, trans. K. Blarney (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1992), 190-91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23559614

Journal Title: The Annual of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23557606
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Richardson R. Neville
Abstract: What is the direction of South African theological ethics as that country moves out of the apartheid era into a new democratic future? Following its struggle against apartheid, how will theology respond to the new challenge of making clear its distinctive stance in a democratic, multi-faith society with a secular constitution? A danger, similar to that previously discussed in the United States, exists in South Africa as theology evolves from a mode of resistance to that of compliance and accommodation, especially under the guise of "nation-building." The essay plots a trajectory by means of a consideration of four works representing nonracial liberationist theology which emerged at key points in the past fifteen years—the Kairos Document (1985), and works by Albert Nolan (1988), Charles Villla-Vicencio (1992), and James Cochrane (1999). For all their contextual sensitivity and strength, these works appear to offer little of a distinctively theological nature, and little of Christian substance to church and society. The way lies open for the development of an African Christian ethics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23560118

Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23561471
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): Ross Susan A.
Abstract: IN THIS ESSAY I CONSIDER POSSIBLE CONTRIBUTIONS OF FEMINIST THEOLogy to theological aesthetics and ethics by comparing the work of Hans Urs von Balthasar (1905—88), the predominant figure in theological aesthetics, with that of Elizabeth Johnson and Sallie McFague. Balthasar's emphasis on contemplation and obedience in response to the unexpected revelation of God's glory contrasts with the practicality, mutuality, and creativity of feminist theological ethics. On the other hand, feminist theology's emphasis on appropriate language and images for God suggests an implicit aesthetics. The artistic work of contemporary African women in crisis situations sheds further light on both Balthasar and feminist theology and brings into relief the relationship of beauty and justice. Although Balthasar's emphasis on the transcendent glory of God may leave him with an undeveloped ethics, feminist theology's agent-oriented approach could benefit from greater attention to contemplation and a transformed understanding of obedience. These conclusions urge greater appreciation and development of the aesthetic and imaginative dimensions of feminist theological ethics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23561477

Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23561471
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): Lauritzen Paul
Abstract: SUMNER TWISS HAS ARGUED THAT HUMAN RIGHTS EDUCATION NEEDS TO be expanded to include work that traditionally is beyond the horizon of human rights literature. Specifically, human rights education could benefit from inclusion of humanistic genres such as novels, poetry, film, drama, and music, which engage our critical and emotional capacities. Examination of humanistic literature in relation to human rights atrocities might provide important and new insights into the causes of human rights abuses. In this essay I suggest that although Twiss identifies an important area for further reflection, there are some reasons to worry about the possibility of blurring genres that his proposal entails. I also suggest that we need to develop criteria for evaluating the kinds of experiential arguments that are frequently embedded in the literature Twiss highlights.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23561484

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23568647
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): Magnani Giovanni
Abstract: Merton Gill, Psychic Energy, J.A.PsA, 1977 p. 581
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23576028

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23568927
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Schmidinger Heinrich M.
Abstract: siehe oben Anm. 12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23576208

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569608
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Pelland Gilles
Abstract: «La vérité de l'Ecriture et l'herméneutique biblique», RTL 18 (1987) 171-186.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23578218

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569623
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): de Berranger Olivier
Abstract: E. Stein, L'Etre fini et l'Etre éternel, traduit par G. Casella et F.A. Viallet, Louvain-Paris, Nauwelaerts, 1972, p. 150, note 60.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579292

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570144
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Sesboüé Bernard
Abstract: Ρ. Ricoeur, «Le récit interprétatif. Exégèse et théologie dans les récits de la pas- sion», reprenant les vues de R, Alter, RSR 73, (1985), p. 18.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579791

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570159
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Novello Henry L.
Abstract: John O'Donnell, «God's Justice and Mercy: What Can We Hope For?» in Pacifica 5 (1992) 84-95.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581396

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570197
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Finamore Rosanna
Abstract: H.G. Gadamer, Verità e metodo, 442.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581824

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23572489
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Imoda Franco
Abstract: F. Imoda, Sviluppo umano psicologia e mistero, Casale Monferrato, 1993, 338.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23582747

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: J.C.B. Mohr (Paul Siebeck)
Issue: i23585001
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Ringleben Joachim
Abstract: Klopstocks sämmtliche Werke, 5. Bd., 1854, 35.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23585648

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585752
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): Schneider-Flume Gunda
Abstract: Ricceur [s. Anm. 6], Bd. 3,335- 349
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23585759

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585695
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Ahrens Theodor
Abstract: Steinmann [s. Anm. 22], 221-239), 221ff. 227ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23586129

Journal Title: Revue Tiers Monde
Publisher: l'Institut d'Étude du Développement économique et social
Issue: i23594288
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): de Freitas Dutra Eliana
Abstract: Idem.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23594373

Journal Title: Estudios de Asia y Africa
Publisher: EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO
Issue: i23608180
Date: 8 1, 2013
Author(s): ÁLVAREZ MARÍA DEL PILAR
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, La memoria, la historia, el olvido, op. cit., p. 35.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23608204

Journal Title: Histoire, Économie et Société
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i23613631
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): DE FRANCESCHI Sylvio Hermann
Abstract: L. Avezou, Sully à travers l'histoire. Les avatars d'un mythe politique, préface B. Barbiche, Paris, 2001, «Le Grand Dessein, première gloire posthume de Sully?», p. 166-172.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23613639

Journal Title: European Journal of East Asian Studies
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i23615227
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Pholsena Vatthana
Abstract: Hyunah Yang, Finding the 'map of memory，、p. 87.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23615373

Journal Title: European Journal of East Asian Studies
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23615377
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): YANG CHUNG FANG
Abstract: Cheung, Rujia Lunli Tu gjhixu Qingjie', Liu, Chui Rong, 'gjiongguoren De Caifu Guarnían' (The Chinese conception of wealth), in K.S. Yang (ed.), jjiongguoren Dejiazhi Guan (Value Orientations of the Chinese People) (Taipei: Guiguan Books, 1993).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23615674

Journal Title: Perspectives
Publisher: INSTITUTE OF INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
Issue: i23616196
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): HAYS GEORGE
Abstract: This article examines Campbell's concept of 'foreign policy' and its application to identifiers 'below' those utilized by Campbell. Campbell's discussion of 'foreign policy' at the level of the ruling elite, though perhaps necessary for the historical breadth of his analysis, provides a skewed and privileged understanding of both national identity and its creation. Through an analysis of 'foreign policy' at the sub-elite level, using the three versions of The Quiet American as illustrative examples, this article demonstrates that a separation of 'foreign policy' from Foreign Policy can yield multiple potentially conflicting national identities. While at times taking on the form of an argument ad absurdum, it is not the intent of this article to disprove Campbell's work. Rather, its intent is to use the concept of 'foreign policy' with a different level of identifier to demonstrate that the tenuousness and indefiniteness of national identity are actually greater than those proposed by Campbell.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23616255

Journal Title: Revue d'histoire des sciences
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i23634241
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): SIMON Anne
Abstract: RTP, IV, 504.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23634244

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i23644129
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Schulz-Forberg Hagen
Abstract: »Die räumlichen und zeitlichen Schichten der Globalgeschichte: Überlegungen zu einer globalen Begriffsgeschichte anhand der Ausweitung von Reinhart Kosellecks Zeitschichten in globale Räume«. Recent debates on global history have challenged the understanding of history beyond the nation-state. Simultaneously, they search for non-Eurocentric approaches. This has repercussions on the relation between historical space and time in both historical interpretation and in research design. This article reflects on the possibilities of a global conceptual history by expanding Reinhart Koselleck's theory of temporal layers (Zeitschichten) into global spaces. To this end, it introduces the notion of spatial layers (Raumschichten). First, historicisation and its relation to and interaction with spatialisation and temporalisation is pondered; then, the impact of global spatial and temporal complexities on comparative and conceptual history is considered, before, thirdly, a framework of three tensions of global history - normative, temporal and spatial - is introduced as a way to concretely unfold historical research questions through global conceptual history. Regarding time and space, the main lines of argument in global history have focused either on the question of whether or not European powers were ahead of non-European ones or on the supposedly Western linearity of time as opposed to a non-Western cosmology or circularity of time. Taking its point of departure in Zeitschichten, which break from the linear-vs.-circular logic, this article instead proposes to foreground an actor-based, multi-lingual, global conceptual history to better understand spatio-temporal practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23644524

Journal Title: RES: Anthropology and Aesthetics
Publisher: The Peabody Museum of Archaeology and Ethnology and the Harvard University Art Museums
Issue: i23646914
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): Kincaid Claude
Abstract: Strawson, "On Referring," cited in E. Laurent, "Symptôme et nom propre," in Les maladies du nom propre, La Cause freudienne 39 (Paris, 1998), p. 27.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23647765

Journal Title: Acta Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae
Publisher: AKADÉMIAI KIADÓ
Issue: i23656603
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Simon Róbert
Abstract: Goldziher (1912, pp. 92 sq)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23658556

Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i23660538
Date: 9 1, 1990
Author(s): BEDJAI MARC
Abstract: Signes, Paris, nrf, 1960, 438 p., p. 291.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23670904

Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i23662339
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Escudier Alexandre
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Liebe und Gerechtigkeit, Tubingen, 1990.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23671125

Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag GmbH
Issue: i23676237
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): ZIRK-SADOWSKI MAREK
Abstract: Ibid., p. 155.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23679193

Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676381
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Morikawa Takemitsu
Abstract: Kodalle [Fn. 21], 22
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23680910

Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676359
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Schmitz Heinz-Gerd
Abstract: A. Hamilton/J. Madison/J. Jay, The Federalist or, The New Consitution, introduction by W.R. Brock, London/New York 1961, 37
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23680922

Journal Title: The British Journal of Social Work
Publisher: ACADEMIC PRESS
Issue: i23698158
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): WHAN MICHAEL W.
Abstract: This paper examines the role of narrative as a basic linguistic form in communication. It is suggested that what clients say, and the case histories that emerge, can be understood in terms of 'fictional' genres. Reference is made to their role in the construction of social work accounts. The author indicates the complex nature of description, the need for increased sensitivity to different kinds of descriptive account and to the part of language and imagination in the making of accounts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23698163

Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23697554
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): WASINSKI Christophe
Abstract: Doubler M., Closing with Enemy - How Gis Fought the War in Europe, 1944-1945, Lawrence, University Press of Kansas, 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23703529

Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23698596
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): CEYHAN Ayse
Abstract: Perrow C., Normal Accidents, Living With High-Risk Technology, New York, Basic Books, 1984.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23703877

Journal Title: The British Journal of Social Work
Publisher: OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23709094
Date: 2 1, 1990
Author(s): McBEATH GRAHAM B.
Abstract: This paper, a reply to Professor R. S. Downie's criticisms of our paper 'A Political Critique of Kantian Ethics in Social Work', both appearing in BJSW 19, 6, tries to answer the main charge against us of illegitimately bridging the logical gap between statements of value and statements of fact. In addition to this, we explicate further our original arguments that language and power are indissolubly bound to each other, and that a Kantian approach to social work theory and practice fails in trying to dissolve that relationship by finding a neutral, universal ground from which to derive ethical principles and judgements.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23709099

Journal Title: The British Journal of Social Work
Publisher: OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23714806
Date: 4 1, 1998
Author(s): BANKS SARAH
Abstract: This paper examines the ethical implications of recent changes in social work, particularly in relation to the conception of social workers as professionals guided by a code of ethics. These changes include the fragmentation of the occupation, the increasing proceduralization of the work and the growing focus on consumer rights and user participation. Some people have argued that codes of ethics are becoming increasingly irrelevant in this climate, in that they assume a unified occupational group and are based upon professionals' definition of values without consultation with service users. On the other hand, it has also been maintained that it is ever more important to retain and strengthen codes of ethics in order to maintain professional identity and to defend the work of the profession from outside attack. This paper explores the relevance of a code of professional ethics for social work, focusing particularly on the British Association of Social Workers' code, in the context of the changing organization and practice of the work. It considers two alternative approaches: the 'new consumerism' which focuses on the worker's technical skills (rather than professional ethics) and consumer rights (as opposed to professional obligations); and a 'new radicalism' which stresses the worker's own personal or political commitment and individual moral responsibility (as opposed to an externally imposed code of professional ethics). It is concluded that the changes in social work do threaten the notion of a single set of professional ethics articulated in a code, and that, in some types of work, this model is less appropriate. However, there is still mileage in retaining and developing a code of ethics, not as an imposed set of rules developed by the professional association, but as part of a dynamic and evolving ethical tradition in social work and as a stimulus for debate and reflection on changing and contradictory values.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23714811

Journal Title: Social Work
Publisher: National Association of Social Workers
Issue: i23715106
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Norton Dolores G.
Abstract: Although the dual perspective should be used to focus on diversity, it should be applied within the context of an anthropological—ecological framework to prevent stereotyping, to illuminate the universal goals of societal organization underlying human behavior, and to explore the early socialization of children. This view is illustrated with preliminary findings from an ongoing longitudinal study of lower socioeconomic inner-city African American children that examines the importance of a sense of time, its evolution in early socialization, and the relationship of parent-child interactions to the development of a sense of time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23716885

Journal Title: The British Journal of Social Work
Publisher: OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23720551
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Wilks Tom
Abstract: Most accounts of social work values contain two central conceptual strands: social work ethics and anti-discriminatory practice. Within social work, relatively little attention has been paid to the potential of feminist approaches to ethics, grounded in identity to bring these two strands together. Narrative ethics is an approach which, like the feminist ethic of care, takes identity as its starting point and therefore has the potential to bridge these two distinctive approaches to social work values. However, in asserting the centrality of narrative in the construction of our identities, it moves beyond the feminist approach. Narrative approaches to ethics have been widely adopted in medicine. This paper explores their applicability to social work practice, particularly in the light of an increasing interest in narrative as a basis for practice intervention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23720555

Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i23730902
Date: 7 1, 2011
Author(s): IFVERSEN JAN
Abstract: http://www.concepta-net.org/beyond_classical_key_concepts.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3167/choc.2011.060104

Journal Title: The Centennial Review
Publisher: College of Arts and Letters, Michigan State University
Issue: i23736652
Date: 7 1, 1985
Author(s): Carlisle E. Fred
Abstract: Mary Hesse's analysis in Models and Analogies in Science
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23738430

Journal Title: The Centennial Review
Publisher: College of Arts and Letters, Michigan State University
Issue: i23736675
Date: 4 1, 1988
Author(s): Ramazani R. Jahan
Abstract: Hegel, pp. 33, 79.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23738567

Journal Title: Innovar: Revista de ciencias administrativas y sociales
Publisher: UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE COLOMBIA
Issue: i23741451
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Tognato Carlo
Abstract: Stevens y Toneguzzo (2004).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23745584

Journal Title: Revista Española de Pedagogía
Publisher: INSTITUTO EUROPEO DE INICIATIVAS EDUCATIVAS
Issue: i23758746
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): ALBA José Antonio MILLÁN
Abstract: Disciplina acuñada en el XIX, la filología surge como historicidad fundamental, identificando la significación de una obra con sus condiciones de producción originarias, un discurso de la ciencia (historia) sobre la lengua y la literatura. La hermenéutica contemporánea supone una ruptura de la razón histórico-filológica y una afirmación de los nuevos significados que a un texto se le añaden al pasar de un contexto cultural u otro nuevo. Para la filología, el criterio pedagógico único de explicación de los textos es la restitución de la intención deliberada y originaria del autor. Hermenéutica y teoría de la literatura afirman que no hay adecuación lógica necesaria entre sentido de la obra e intención de autor. Tras la “muerte del autor” del formalismo semiótico, la posmodernidad niega el texto mismo y afirma que éste tiene tantos sentido como lectores. A discipline minted in the 19th century, philology, emerges as a fundamental historicist approach, identifying the significance of a work with its original conditions of production, a discourse from science (history) about language and literature. Contemporary hermeneutics assumes a break with historical-philological reason, as well as an affirmation of the new meanings added to a text by passing from one cultural context to another new one. For philology, the only pedagogical criterion in explaining texts is the restitution of deliberate and original authorial intent. Hermeneutics and literary theory assert that there is no logical association necessary between the meaning of the work, and authorial intent. Since the “death of the author” of semiotic formalism, postmodernity has denied the text itself, instead asserting that it has as many meanings as it has readers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23766850

Journal Title: The Journal of Educational Thought (JET) / Revue de la Pensée Éducative
Publisher: Faculty of Education, University of Calgary
Issue: i23762745
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): ROTH WOLFF-MICHAEL
Abstract: Present discourses on technology education are taking a positive and value-neutral approach with utilitarian and vocational overtones. The discourses generally lack discussions of human agency and human responsibility for techno-scientific activities and technological literacy. To support the emergence of a collective civic literacy, we argue in this text that technology education needs to take up critical and value-acknowledging aspects with emphasis on building sustainable relationships among human beings, technology, and lifeworld. To understand the relationship between human agency and modern technology, we examine the nature of technology in the dimensions of technology as causality and technology as a relationship of lifeworld. Discussing Martin Heidegger's perspectives on the causalities of technology, we question how the nature of technology situates human beings in power-related relationships to the world. Understanding technology as process and relationship of lifeworld, the paper extends its discussion of the responsibility of a dialectical human-technology-lifeworld relation based on a socio-technical and ethico-moral framework of technology. By recognizing human responsibility of and for modern technology, we outline a critical and reflective approach to technological literacy. The approach challenges the position of current approaches to technology in the attempt to provide a foundation for a contemporary pedagogy of technological awareness and values. Aujourd'hui, les discours en matière d'enseignement de la technologie sont en train de prendre une orientation positive et dépourvue de jugement de valeur comportant des connotations utilitaristes et professionnelles. En général, les discours n'ouvrent pas assez de discussions sur l'action humaine et la responsabilité humaine dans les activités technico-scientifiques et dans l'alphabétisme technologique. Dans ce papier, afin de renforcer l'éclosion de l'alphabétisme civique collectif, nous ouvrons le débat sur le fait que l'enseignement de la technologie a besoin d'aborder des aspects critiques et de valeur reconnue avec un accent mis sur la construction durable des relations chez les êtres humains, dans la technologie et dans la vie mondiale. Dans le but de comprendre les relations entre l'action humaine et la technologie moderne, nous analysons la nature de la technologie en tant que causalité et en tant que relation de la vie mondiale. Nous discutons des perspectives de Martin Heidegger sur les causalités de la technologie. Nous posons des questions sur la manière que la nature de la technologie situe les êtres humains dans les relations basées sur le pouvoir face au monde. Nous assimilons la technologie comme processus et comme relation de la vie mondiale. L'article élargit les propos sur la responsabilité dune relation dialectale humaine technologie/vie mondiale, fondée sur une structure de technologie sociotechnique et éthico morale. En reconnaissant la responsabilité humaine de et pour la technologie moderne, nous soulignons une démarche critique et réfléchie de l'alphabétisme technologique. La démarche remet en question la position des approches actuelles vers le chemin de la technologie afin d'apporter une base à une pédagogie contemporaine de sensibilisation et de valeurs technologiques.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23767086

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i23783400
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Azevedo Valérie Robin
Abstract: Steve Stern Remembering Pinochet's Chile, 2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785644

Journal Title: Ägypten und Levante / Egypt and the Levant
Publisher: VERLAG DER ÖSTERREICHISCHEN AKADEMIE DER WISSENSCHAFTEN
Issue: i23785611
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Schneider Thomas
Abstract: Spiegel's statement (Soziale und weltan- schauliche Reformbewegungen im alten Ägypten, Heidelberg 1950, 59)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23788656

Journal Title: Durkheimian Studies / Études Durkheimiennes
Publisher: Berghahn Books and The Durkheim Press
Issue: i23861589
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Greve Anni
Abstract: The city is a key location of the modern social world, a home of rootlessness and transient everyday encounters between individuals. This essay explores the idea of 'the sanctuary' as a way in which people look for anchorage, and create and re-create images of a society, to cope with and negotiate life in the city. It mainly draws on Durkheim's work on ritual, symbolism and the sacred, together with his account of individual and collective representations. But it also discusses these concerns though other writers, notably Freud and Ricœur, and it draws on Kant's theory of art to introduce how Durkheim sees ritual —especially sacred drama — as at once a symbolism and an aesthetics, complete with the energies of a free creative 'surplus'. Even if in the end 'the sanctuary' is unequal to the marketplace, it is a necessary refuge of the transformative social imagination and a realm, not of everyday economics, but of civitas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23867061

Journal Title: Ethnicities
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i23881654
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): MAVROMMATIS GEORGE
Abstract: This article is a narrative study of local multicultural encounters taking place along Brick Lane in East London, UK. Although the area has been primarily researched for its Bangladeshi community, this article focuses on the 'creative' professionals who work and/or reside within the vicinity. It is a narrative investigation into their attitudes towards difference, ethnicity and the ethnic self. A multiplicity of local multicultural tales comes to the fore. In short, the multicultural realities of the area become narrated in many different ways, which clearly manifest a narrative complexity, unfolding within the new 'creative' Brick Lane. These different local multicultural narratives could also be indicative of the ways that multicultural meaning is created within London at large.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23889496

Journal Title: Ethnicities
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i23881003
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): SCOTT-BAUMANN ALISON
Abstract: In order to manage our daily lives, we make many decisions based on empirical evidence derived from instrumental action. At the other extreme, we are often attracted by a so-called postmodern solution that invites us to make arbitrary choices. In the education system, the pressing dilemma should not be a choice between standards of competence or unthinking relativism, but how to take action towards intercultural tolerance. Establishing a small teacher training course for a group of British Muslims has shown that communicative action informed by understanding can be disabled by the instrumentality of positivist frameworks, such as those used by government inspectors. In philosophy, Ricoeur offers a provisional dialectic of hope that can be used to show why neither positivist methods, rational analytic philosophy, postmodernity nor any one belief system for interpreting the world should be allowed to exert hegemonic control. The ethicopractical philosophy of Ricoeur also offers a reconstructive view of reality that helps us to rehabilitate belief in human nature and encourages us to seek solutions to conflicts of interpretation in understanding others. It is applied, in this instance, to project work with Muslim women in the UK, in which an ontology of action shows the power of working collaboratively towards an understanding of oneself as another.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23890295

Journal Title: BMS: Bulletin of Sociological Methodology / Bulletin de Méthodologie Sociologique
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i23884858
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Naudet Jules
Abstract: This article discusses the theoretical and methodological debates concerning the experience and consequences of upward social mobility between generations. The methods employed by researchers working on this subject are diverse, and the results they arrive at are sometimes contradictory. This article proposes, firstly, to give an overview of the different traditions of studying the experience of social mobility in order to identify the conditions for potential "cumulative" knowledge. In a second step, we argue that it is mainly through a study of the narratives of mobility that one can, simultaneously and comprehensively, grasp the ambivalence and multiplicity of effects that produce upward social mobility. Cet article revient sur les débats théoriques et méthodologiques sur l'expérience et les conséquences de la mobilité sociale ascendante intergénérationnelle. Les méthodes mobilisées par les chercheurs travaillant sur ce sujet sont multiples, et les résultats auxquels ils parviennent parfois contradictoires. Cet article se propose donc, dans un premier temps, de donner une vue d'ensemble des différentes traditions d'étude de l'expérience de la mobilité sociale afin de cerner les conditions d'une potentielle «cumulativité» des savoirs qu'elles produisent. Dans un second temps, nous défendons l'idée que c'est principalement à travers une étude du discours des personnes en mobilité que l'on peut, dans un même temps et dans un même élan, saisir l'ambivalence et la multiplicité des effets que produit la mobilité sociale ascendante.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23891865

Journal Title: Theoria: An International Journal for Theory, History and Foundations of Science
Publisher: Centro de Análisis, Lógica e Informática Jurídica (CALIJ) / SERVICIO EDITORIAL UNIVERSIDAD DEL PAIS VASCO / ARGITARAPEN ZERBITZUA EUSKAL HERRIKO UNIBERTSITATEA
Issue: i23918489
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): ZUSKA Vlastimil
Abstract: The paper offers a new model of genre. The model employs Deleuze and Guattari's concepts of plane of immanence, chaos, and, in particular, concepts and approaches of cognitive science. Genre in general and the film genre in particular are modelled as a multidimensional space with a network of vector sequences, as a plane of immanence with individual works in the role of concepts, as a cluster category without a centre. That genre model provides more explanatory power than the recent semantic-syntactical one.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23918667

Journal Title: Administrative Science Quarterly
Publisher: Cornell University Graduate School of Business and Public Administration
Issue: i341320
Date: 9 1, 1965
Author(s): Woodward Linda
Abstract: This paper examines the significance of the concept of culture for organizational analysis. The intersection of culture theory and organization theory is evident in five current research themes: comparative management, corporate culture, organizational cognition, organizational symbolism, and unconscious processes and organization. Researchers pursue these themes for different purposes and their work is based on different assumptions about the nature of culture and organization. The task of evaluating the power and limitations of the concept of culture must be conducted within this assumptive context. This review demonstrates that the concept of culture takes organization analysis in several different and promising directions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2392246

Journal Title: Administrative Science Quarterly
Publisher: Cornell University Graduate School of Business and Public Administration
Issue: i341309
Date: 12 1, 1965
Author(s): Woodward Gareth
Abstract: Burrell and Morgan (1979)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2392283

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23916373
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Velaidum Joe
Abstract: This paper addresses Northrop Frye's biblical hermeneutic. Frye intends his interpretation of the Bible to be 'literary' (as opposed to theological) which for him means that it explicates how or why a poet reads the Bible. In so doing, Frye employs typology, believing that he is able to eliminate the theological elements of typology in his purely literary interpretation of biblical texts. However, a closer examination of typology itself shows that when it is applied to the Bible, as it is in Frye's writings, typology cannot be divorced from its theological foundations. Contrary to Frye's belief that his biblical hermeneutic is a non-theological interpretation of biblical imagery, I argue that Christian typology provides the inescapable framework for Frye's reading of the Bible.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23925201

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917901
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): LeBlanc John Randolph
Abstract: Albert Camus's interrogation of the ethical and spiritual vacuity of the twentieth century convinced him that authentic political existence requires a vision that embraces while transcending the human condition. He found his ethical model in art. The work of the artist can be analogous to that of the just political actor. The principal components of ethical political being are all present in Camus's aesthetics: a vision of life in human community (lucidity), a grounded sense of justice subject to the limitations of human existence (beauty), a need to redress the defects of political reality (the urge to create), and an understanding that any structural solution is of necessity temporary (the need to rearticulate the initial vision). Camus's vision requires him to reject our positive political categories in the name of creative, grounded human being.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23925254

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917924
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Antonaccio Maria
Abstract: This article argues that Iris Murdoch makes a distinctive contribution to the agenda of theological humanism by formulating a revised theology of culture. Specifically, the article claims that Murdoch provides a compelling apologia for religious life in a secular world in two ways: by defending the significance of individual consciousness, and by retrieving an idea of the religious depth of morality. In doing so, Murdoch's work challenges antihumanist currents in modern and postmodern thought, offers an alternative to confessional forms of religious reflection, and revises previous theologies of culture (such as Tillich's) by giving priority to the ethical dimension of human life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23926051

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23926961
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Ward Graham
Abstract: The correlation of narrative and ethics has a long history in literature, and frequently ethics has been associated with a transcendental notion of truth. The recent attention to narrative and theology has offered more theoretical reflections of both poetic and hermeneutical practices that return us to the earliest literary, philosophical and theological productions. In this essay, I wish to present a different way of examining the correlation of narrative and ethics; one less orientated towards Scripture and less concerned with the Church. The narratives I consider are secular fictions from the modernist period. Through examining these works phenomenologically and the role the imagination plays in the production of beliefs, I argue that all narratives structure emotions, desires and hopes and this structuring continually opens up a transcendent horizon.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23926969

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23922201
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Tran Jonathan
Abstract: Miroslav Volf has provocatively argued that redemption necessitates forgetting (1996, 2006). Yet, Volf's claims insufficiently consider the narratival configuration of memory. This essay utilises Paul Ricoeur's work on mimesis in order to challenge Volf's case for forgetting. The author advances Ricoeur's philosophical description of forgiveness toward a theological account of divine forgiveness as re-narration, gift-giving funded by trinitarian abundance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23927340

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917940
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Wriglesworth Chad
Abstract: This essay outlines and illustrates ways that 'theological humanism' provides methodological possibilities for scholars working in religion and literary studies. I suggest there is a need to investigate more humanistic methods of interpreting literature by exploring approaches that engage questions of sacred depth. After stressing the necessary paradoxes of theological humanism as an interpretive and lived stance in the world, I offer a reading of Margaret Edson's Wit that is shaped by these principles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23927377

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917928
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Bouchard Larry D.
Abstract: Tragedy depicts harm to integrity—personal, moral, bodily, even the integrity of nature—and so offers occasions for rethinking the idea of integrity. These occasions may prompt us to set aside notions of pristine wholeness, moral perfection, and solitary authenticity for a more relational integrity, informed by the paradigms of performance and kenosis. This essay first juxtaposes King Lear with a film by Kristian Levring, The King Is Alive, and then moves to Shakespeare's earlier A Midsummer Night's Dream. All three works are metatheatrical, and depict people playing-as-others in solicitude for others. Each in its way broaches the ethical and theological possibility of 'kenotic integrity'.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23927394

Journal Title: Italianistica: Rivista di letteratura italiana
Publisher: ISTITUTI EDITORIALI E POLIGRAFICI INTERNAZIONALI®
Issue: i23921424
Date: 8 1, 2001
Author(s): Terrusi Leonardo
Abstract: Michele Dell'Aquila, ivi, pp. 90-1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23937096

Journal Title: Italianistica: Rivista di letteratura italiana
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i23922211
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Boezio Sara
Abstract: C. Hamilton, The future of Cognitive poetics, «Zeszyty Naukowe Uniwersytetu Rzeszowskiego. Seria fi- lologiczna - Studia anglica resoviensia 2», xiv, 2003, pp. 120-128
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23938239

Journal Title: Journal of Korean Religions
Publisher: Institute for the Study of Religion
Issue: i23942764
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Park Jun Hwan
Abstract: In the world of Korean shamanism, there is a particular god, called taegam, which is allegedly famous for its love of money and its abundance of greed for material wealth. During the shamanic ritual of chaesu-kut, the rites for good fortune and luck, this god is popularly worshipped as the Deity of Wealth and is typically symbolized by money placed all over its face and spirit costumes. Nonetheless, as money has the two sides of heads and tails, taegam also has two very different faces—so-taegam and taegam. This article explores the ambiguity of the two taegam gods, focusing on the symbolic action of money-offerings and how its meaning is taken from the perspective of the ritual actors, in the hope of shedding light on the place of Korea's traditional popular religion of shamanism in today's transformed urban landscape. By discussing the semantics of "money is the filial child" (a remark made by so-taegam) and "money is the enemy" (as remarked by taegam), statements I often heard during my fieldwork in Seoul, I suggest that the ambivalent symbolic nature of taegam should be seen as an indispensible vehicle for understanding ritual life, as well as everyday life, of urban Korean people since it is closely related to both normative orientations and the contradictory aspects of the material culture of contemporary urbanites inhabiting the borderless, globalized, and fluctuating modern capitalist market. This conclusion is reached partly with reference to existing sociological theories of money and anthropological inquiries into the ambivalent aspects of taegam.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23943367

Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i23955822
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): de MUL Jos
Abstract: GS XIX, 45
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23955842

Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: Presses universitaires de France
Issue: i23955850
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): Allard Julie
Abstract: J. Habermas, op. cit., p.258.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23955868

Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: Presses universitaires de France
Issue: i23955850
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): Rosenfeld Michel
Abstract: Michel ROSENFELD, Just Interpretations, at 270-71
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23955870

Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: Presses universitaires de France
Issue: i23955850
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): Timsit Gérard
Abstract: G. Timsit, Éléments pour une théorie des cas extrêmes, in Sur les cas extrêmes, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23955871

Journal Title: Leviathan
Publisher: VS Verlag für Sozialwissenschaften
Issue: i23983251
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Paul Axel T.
Abstract: Danielle de Lame: Une Colline entre mille ou le calme avant le tempête. Transforma- tions et blocages du Rwanda rurale, Tervuren 1996, S. 73.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23987369

Journal Title: European Journal of Sociology / Archives Européennes de Sociologie / Europäisches Archiv für Soziologie
Publisher: CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23997795
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): PARDO ITALO
Abstract: F. M. L. Thompson (1989)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23997798

Journal Title: European Journal of Sociology / Archives Européennes de Sociologie / Europäisches Archiv für Soziologie
Publisher: CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23998910
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): MERCKLÉ PIERRE
Abstract: Henri Desroche (1975, p. 169)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23998914

Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24003373
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Carravetta Peter
Abstract: Carravetta 1991a:13-76
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24003377

Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24006560
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Pelosi Olimpia
Abstract: Pozzi, Scrittrici mistiche italiane, p. 462: "Nel 1629 cessarono le visioni e le estasi. La fama di quelle meraviglie, uscita dalla clausura, aveva perô provocato il fenomeno, comune a molte altre estatiche, di un grande traffico spirituale intomo alla suora: le scrissero senza tregua religiosi e prelati,... ma le scrissero soprattutto dame dell'alta aristocrazia, dai vicini ducati di Mantova e . Savoia alle lontane plaghe di Spagna, Boemia, Baviera. Roma intervenne allora col solito rigore; senza emettere condanne, le proibl ogni corrispondenza con Testerno. Cos! calô su di lei un silenzio non piu rotto da fatti straordinari né da rumori del secolo, fino alla morte, avvenuta il 12 febbraio 1671".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24006576

Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24009986
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Picone Michelangelo
Abstract: Cherchi, "Opra d'aragna (RVF, clxxii)."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24009993

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24021626
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): Holzman Lois
Abstract: Racine and Müller 2008
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s10746-013-9293-x

Journal Title: Indiana Theory Review
Publisher: Graduate Theory Association
Issue: i24042833
Date: 10 1, 1996
Author(s): Rowell Lewis
Abstract: "El acceso musical al mundo" at the University of Navarra (Pamplona, Spain), 25-27 March 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24044675

Journal Title: Ethnography
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24046637
Date: 9 1, 2003
Author(s): Souza lara
Abstract: This article inquires as to the meaning of nervoso (nerves) among poor, working-class women from Salvador, Brazil. Our aim is to understand nerves as an experience that emerges from the background of a life trajectory and that, in many significant ways, disrupts the taken-for-granted character of that trajectory. From a phenomenological-hermeneutical tradition, we explore the links between experience, embodiment and temporality and then discuss the relevance of this approach for the understanding of women′s nervoso. In order to do so we present the life histories of three middle-aged women who have been afflicted with nerves. The accounts describe significant ways in which culturally inherited possibilities – grounded in a lived context of class and gender – are recovered and come to pre-figure a certain future. As we argue throughout the article, it is only when we situate the experience of nervoso within the temporal frame of life that we can truly understand it – that is, grasp it as part of a movement that involves both recovery and creation of meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24047842

Journal Title: Discourse Studies
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24049943
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Bell Allan
Abstract: This article questions the aptness of 'discourse analysis' as a label for our field, and prefers the less reductionist concept of 'Discourse Interpretation'. It does this through drawing on ideas from the field of philosophical hermeneutics – the theory and practice of interpreting texts. It operationalizes and adapts the construct of the Interpretive Arc from the philosophy of Paul Ricoeur in order to address issues that are central to discourse work, including that of how we warrant the validity of our textual interpretations. The Interpretive Arc consists of six interlinked phases, which the article presents and exemplifies through discussion of a single text – the story of Babel. Phase I of the arc defines readers as being in a state of Estrangement before the text because of the distancing created by its written or technological form. Phase 2 is that of Pre-view, the state of opinion or knowledge that readers bring to a text. At phase 3, a first reading forms readers' Proto-understanding, their initial 'guess' at what the text means. Then processes of Analysis (phase 4) test and evidence the validity of alternative readings, limiting the interpretations which can plausibly be taken from a text. Three byways of interpretive analysis are challenged and discarded: the dominance of author intention, structuralist analysis and limitless polysemy. Analysis then leads into 5, the phase of informed Understanding of the matter or injunction of the text, of what is disclosed or unfolded before the text. The Interpretive Arc is completed in phase 6, Ownership. Here, through processes of critique of their own and the text's ideologies and of fresh listening, readers are led to a new self formed by the matter of the text. There is a dialectic amongst Analysis, Understanding and Ownership, with each informing and modifying the other. The approach emphasizes interpretation as the heart of discourse work. The 3000-year-old narrative of Babel is a subject as well as an object here. It contributes to the matter of the article and its interpretation is interwoven with the theoretical substance. The story is shown to be an integrated narrative abounding in sophisticated linguistic techniques which show a delight in language. The traditional Christian and Western interpretation of Babel – as an affront to God which results in the curse of multilingualism – is challenged. A re-constructed interpretation informed by intertextual evidence reads the fault of Babel to be the people's refusal to spread through the earth. Babel can be interpreted as a manifesto against the monolingual and monocultural impetus of empires ancient and contemporary. The multilingual outcome is a positive affirmation of sociocultural and linguistic diversity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24049945

Journal Title: Discourse Studies
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24049943
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Pellauer David
Abstract: I offer some comments from the perspective of someone familiar with the work of Paul Ricoeur on Allan Bell's proposal that discourse studies take a hermeneutic turn drawing on Ricoeur's idea of an arc of interpretation. I suggest that such a hermeneutic turn would need to be more radical than Bell proposes in that he limits it largely to questions of method, without really addressing how it might affect our understanding of either the object of discourse studies or the goal of such studies. This does raise the question, however, whether discourse studies should be considered a subdiscipline of hermeneutical philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24049948

Journal Title: Discourse Studies
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24049943
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Scott-Baumann Alison
Abstract: Ricoeur placed a great deal of importance upon text and the interpretation of text. Bell accepts this by virtue of his extended analysis of the story of Babel, and I hope to offer ways of extending and developing Bell's arguments to incorporate the ethical demands that Ricoeur placed upon text, upon our interpretation of text and upon action as a form of readable text. This will not include a commentary on discourse analysis, which I am not qualified to give. Ricoeur differed from the structuralist tradition in that he saw the relationship between language and life as taking a dialectical form: debate that presumes the possibility of altering one's position by grappling with different views, and often taking inspiration from Hegelian dialectics, with their contrasting polarized views and the eventual attempt at affirmative common ground. The term λογοσ (logos) was first used in a philosophical way by Heraclitus to give us the principle of order and knowledge, and yet for Heraclitus the world was dominated by conflict and change. Ricoeur studied this tension within logos between order and disorder, partly by his writing about language and his work on signs and symbols, partly through metaphor and narrative and also through his insights on translation. For him, all these are facets of the need for both Explaining and Understanding as forms of interpretation of language, ethics and action. Ricoeur's work on logos provides us with an approach that asks whether ethics controls language or vice versa or both and how this fits in with structuralism and later movements. For Ricoeur, signs (words, texts) are not the centres of our perceptual experience. At the heart of our perception are our motivations and our actions, for which we must take responsibility in a sort of provisional affirmation that we will keep trying. In so doing we must doubt (be suspicious of) our own motives just as much as those of others, and see action as a form of readable text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24049950

Journal Title: Discourse Studies
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24049943
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Wodak Ruth
Abstract: This article discusses different theoretical and methodological approaches in the humanities and social sciences which strive to analyse and understand, interpret and explain texts and discourses in systematic, qualitative ways. After reviewing some of the salient theories in the social sciences (such as objective hermeneutics and critical hermeneutics), I argue that critical discourse studies require a 'trichotomy' consisting of explanation, interpretation and critique. Other approaches such as Ricoeur's 'hermeneutic arc' seem to neglect important structural and material dimensions of context as well as critical self-reflection. Moreover, I argue that much intuitive and non-transparent speculation in Hermeneutics might be transcended if more historical, cultural, linguistic and philological knowledges would be systematically and explicitly integrated into the analysis of text and discourse, in a retroductable manner. The latter possibility is illustrated by applying an interdisciplinary framework to some brief examples (e.g. intercultural and historical translation studies; the discourse-historical approach in critical discourse studies).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24049953

Journal Title: Discourse Studies
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24049943
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): van den Broek Paul
Abstract: Text interpretation – the main interest of discourse analysts – is a central component of the text understanding process. In this article we introduce the Landscape Model, which describes the cognitive processes underlying reading comprehension in a detailed and precise manner. Moreover, this model captures the interpretative processes in which the human mind engages during reading. Within the context of the Landscape Model, we describe the relation between discourse understanding and discourse interpretation, and explain some of the phenomena that are central to the field of discourse analysis as seen from a cognitive perspective. In the first section we describe the basic cognitive processes that underlie discourse understanding, as captured by the Landscape Model. In the following section we illustrate the way that the Landscape Model can be applied to the work of discourse analysts. We conclude by discussing the usefulness of the cognitive Landscape Model for the field of discourse analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24049954

Journal Title: Discourse Studies
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24049943
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Bell Allan
Abstract: The nine responses to my focus article 'Re-constructing Babel: Discourse analysis, hermeneutics and the Interpretive Arc' are cross-disciplinary, as is the article itself. They come from discourse studies (Van Dijk, Billig, Wodak), cognitive science (Tepe, Yeari and Van den Broek, Van Dijk), Old Testament studies (Billig), hermeneutics (Pellauer, Scott-Baumann), history (Gardner) and literature (Pratt). I identify and address five main issues which I see these responses raising for discourse interpretation: the role of author intent and the original sociocultural context in interpretation; principles of translation, particularly in relation to the Babel story; issues of certainty and subjectivism in interpretation, again including the Babel story; the role and limitations of cognitive approaches, and the potential of images like 'unfolding the matter of the text' to be realized in teaching hands-on discourse work; and finally a call to new listening in the encounter with hermeneutics, as a route to freshening the field I like to call Discourse Interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24049955

Journal Title: China Perspectives
Publisher: cefc French Centre for Research on Contemporary China
Issue: i24053272
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): GARAPON ANTOINE
Abstract: Chen Yan, L'eveil de la Chine [The awakening of China], Editions de I'Aube, 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24053278

Journal Title: China Perspectives
Publisher: cefc French Centre for Research on Contemporary China
Issue: i24054563
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): MORIER-GENOUD DAMIEN
Abstract: Robert Eskildsen, "Of Civilization and Savages: The Mimetic Imperialism of Japan's 1874 Expedition to Taiwan," American Historical Review, 107.2, April 2002, pp. 388- 418.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24054621

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i24145431
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Gerber Doris
Abstract: Currently, epistemological debates on the formation of concepts in the field of history are close to nonexistent. For that reason alone, this book written by philosopher of history Doris Gerber - with which she earned her habilitation degree at the University of Tübingen - is a welcome addition to the literature in the field. In this work, Gerber addresses the metaphysical question of what "history" really is. In this study, she considers approaches typically adopted within the field of history, and questions whether the intention to act is essential in writing history, or whether it is even required in the first place. The findings of the four reviewers that follow are diverse in their opinion of this provocative study.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24145795

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: VERLAG HERDER
Issue: i24164439
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Tschuggnall Peter
Abstract: Ausgabe H. Rochol (Meiner Verlag, Hamburg): Philosophische Bissen (1989).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24168217

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: herder
Issue: i24160379
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Rosenberger Michael
Abstract: H. J. Pottmeyer, Zeichen und Kriterien der Glaubwürdigkeit des Christentums, in: HFTh 4, 373—413; hier: 400f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24169211

Journal Title: Daat: A Journal of Jewish Philosophy & Kabbalah / דעת: כתב-עת לפילוסופיה יהודית וקבלה
Publisher: אוניברסיטת בר-אילן
Issue: i24193434
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Meir Ephraim
Abstract: The article deals with the problem of revelation in Levinas' writings. The first part of the article analizes Levinas' ideas on the Same and the Other, more particularly the topics of the face and of discourse, as these come to the fore in the first section of Totality and Infinity. Investigating the non-totalising relationship between the Same and the Other presents us with the suitable framework for understanding the relation between the finite and the Infinite. Leaving out any ontotheological speech, Levinas shows how Metaphysics is enacted in the ethical relation. The second part cootinues with a description of Levinas' position on revelation in the Jewish tradition. The active Interpretation of Biblical texts "beyond the verse" represents an opportunity of hearing the divine word today and to enter into a more primordial Order than the Order of the Same. In the course of the article, we point to affinities and striking similarities between E. Levinas' and F. Rosenzweig's view on revelation. We also demonstrate how Levinas Orients his Jewish writings to his philosophy of the Other and vice versa. In writing on revelation, Levinas' main concern seems to be the description of the possibility of a fracture in the immanent order of totality and in the self-sufficiency of reason which is its correlative. This fraction is produced by the command "thou shalt not kill", calling the Same to open itself to the Other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24195890

Journal Title: Jahrbuch für Liturgik und Hymnologie
Publisher: Internationalen Arbeitsgemeinschaft für Hymnologie / International Fellowship for Research in Hymnology / Cercle International d'Etudes Hymnologiques
Issue: i24200577
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Rickli-Koser Linda
Abstract: Ebd.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24207749

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Politik
Publisher: NOMOS Verlagsgesellschaft mbH & Co. KG
Issue: i24227920
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): Rinderle Peter
Abstract: Begriff des »Private Citizen« von Bruce Ackerman in: We the People, Vol. 1 Foundations (Cambridge, Mass. 1993, S. 232 ff.)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24228116

Journal Title: Cambridge Journal of Economics
Publisher: OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i24232498
Date: 7 1, 2011
Author(s): Frobert Ludovic
Abstract: Stiglitz, 2003, p. 77
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24232518

Journal Title: Revista de Musicología
Publisher: SOCIEDAD ESPAÑOLA DE MUSICOLOGÍA
Issue: i24243488
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): CALVO-SOTELO Javier CAMPOS
Abstract: TITON, Jeff Todd. «Music and Sustainability: An Ecological Viewpoint». The World of Music, 51, 1 (2009), pp. 119-137
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24246266

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24267380
Date: 11 1, 2008
Author(s): Garapon Antoine
Abstract: On peut notamment s'interroger sur la réalité du contrôle que procurent les indicateurs; voir à ce sujet: «Des indicateurs pour les ministres au risque de l'illusion du contrôle», par Anne Pezet et Samuel Sponem recensé par Maya Beauvallet (www.laviedesidees.fr).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24267392

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24268086
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): de Parseval Geneviève Delaisi
Abstract: J'ai remarqué que, dans les congrès, qu'ils soient médicaux, juridiques ou «psy », il est fréquent d'entendre l'orateur parler du «père biologique», voire de vrai père pour désigner le donneur de sperme... puis, se rendant compte de son lapsus au vu de quelques sourires dans la salle, tâche de se rattraper - mal, comme dans toutes les gaffes - parlant alors de « père social » pour désigner le vrai père, ce qui constitue tout autant un lapsus que le premier...
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24268099

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272900
Date: 4 1, 1994
Author(s): de Lara Philippe
Abstract: « Le juste et le bien », Revue de métaphysique et de morale, n° 1, 1988.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24275347

Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24277178
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Sente Christophe
Abstract: Louis de Brouckère et Henri de Man, le Mouvement ouvrier en Belgique, Bruxelles, Fondation J. Jacquemotte, 1965.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277190

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24308969
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Dosse François
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Soi-même comme un autre, op. cit., p. 351.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24309093

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24308872
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Moreil Françoise
Abstract: Françoise MOREIL, «La maison d'Orange à Berlin au début du XVIIIe siècle », actes du colloque international sur La principauté d'Orange, Avignon, 2005
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24309352

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i24311661
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Goyard-Fabre Simone
Abstract: CSF. pp. 289-303. pp. 368-372
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24311669

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i24311064
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Escoubas Éliane
Abstract: Heidegger dans La Vérité en peinture
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24311714

Journal Title: Rivista Italiana di Musicologia
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki Editore
Issue: i24324678
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Piras Marcello
Abstract: Per ragioni da ricercare nella stessa società accademica, e non nelle società africane.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24324688

Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: Centro de Filosofia e Clências Humanas UFSC Centro de Comunicação e Expressão UFSC
Issue: i24327075
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): VIANNA LUCIA HELENA
Abstract: FOUCAULT, 1992. p. 131.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24327268

Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: Centro de Comunicação e Expressão - CCE Centro de Filosofia e Clências Humanas - CFH
Issue: i24324948
Date: 8 1, 2008
Author(s): DE MATTOS MOTTA FLÁVIA
Abstract: Paul RICOUER, 1984.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24327761

Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: Centro de Comunicação e Expressão - CCE Centro de Filosofia e Clências Humanas - CFH
Issue: i24324905
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Kofes Suely
Abstract: SEGALEN, 1978, p. 20.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24327805

Journal Title: Bruniana & Campanelliana
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24337272
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Blum Paul Richard
Abstract: A term from the philosophy of history of Paul Ricoeur: data are gathered and made un- derstandable in a narrative plot.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24337688

Journal Title: Présence Africaine
Publisher: Présence Africaine Editions
Issue: i24347053
Date: 9 1, 1972
Author(s): OBENGA Théophile
Abstract: Before any significant attempt is made to read Negro-African history, the first task is to conquer its field of research. The critical works of Frobenius, Westermann and Bauman, Delafosse, Homburger, Murdock, Leakey and Cheikh Anta Diop provide us with appropriate means of investigation (which still require to be refined) in order to obtain a profound, inner knowledge of the Negro-African social tradition. Prehistory must become a major science in the teaching profession — especially in Africa — because it offers man a general outline of the first consequences of his past before the appearance of writing. No Africanist or African historian can allow himself to by-pass this branch of study. The same applies to Egyptology and to African linguistics, sociology and ethnology. Diop has used the last three sciences to retrace the migrations of African peoples, to establish their cultural unity and to rediscover the continuity of Negro-African history. The study of African, Greco-Roman, Arab and European documents (whether oral or written, archaeological, linguistic or sociological) gives us information concerning the appearance of homo faber in Africa about 5,500,000 years ago, the Egypto-Nubian civilizations, the African Neolithic worlds, pre-colonial Africa, the Arab invasions, the slave-trade, colonization and the present-day national liberation struggles and the formation of new States. The African cultural world has its roots in the Tertiary Period and it is beyond doubt that the biological substratum of humanity is Negro or Negroïd (C.A. Diop and the discovery of Asselar Man by the Augiéras-Draper Saharan expedition in December 1927), that Negroes were in Europe during the Upper Paleolithic and Neolithic periods and helped in the formation of today's Europoïd races. The author uses the social structures of the Pharaonic Ancient Empire (2778 - 2423 B. C.) as models to describe the history of Negro-African societies in their ensemble and contrasts the former with those of West European societies (especially that of Greece with the founding of the « city » from about 1200 B.C.) where Man was not essentially identifield with Nature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24350451

Journal Title: Présence Africaine
Publisher: Présence Africaine Editions
Issue: i24350806
Date: 3 1, 1988
Author(s): KI-ZERBO Lazare
Abstract: Le règne de la critique de R. Koselleck (éd. Minuit).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24351580

Journal Title: Présence Africaine
Publisher: Présence Africaine Editions
Issue: i24350798
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): KASEREKA Kavwahirehi M.
Abstract: M. Foucault, Dits et écrits. 1954-1988. Vol. IV 1980-1988. Édition établie sous la direction de Daniel Defert et François Ewald, Paris, Gallimard, 1994, p. 637.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24352132

Journal Title: BMS: Bulletin of Sociological Methodology / Bulletin de Méthodologie Sociologique
Publisher: AIMS
Issue: i24359731
Date: 3 1, 1997
Author(s): Jenny Jacques
Abstract: An initial awareness is needed of the debates regarding the choice of research approaches in sociology and the diversity and specificity of methods currently being used in the domain of textual data analysis in France. In general the influence of the French socio-linguistic tradition looms large, including, on the one hand, the older works of Michel Pécheux on the "discursive formations" and his A.A.D. (Analyse Automatique du Discours, 1969), and on the other hand, two main perspectives of the "Ecole Française d'Analyse du/de Discours" - which refer to the "speech act" concept and to the problematics of enunciation, and emphasizes the processes and "sociodiscursive practices" between socially-located speakers. Such theoretical conceptions and specific requirements lead to build on methodologies different from the classic, theme-based content analysis, though not yet translated into an operational software. Then the main software developments currently having an impact (at least potential) on practices of computer-aided sociological analysis of textual data, in France, are classified : from the lexicometric using procedures of "French Data Analysis" ('Analyse Factorielle des Correspondances' of Benzecri, and so on...), to a set of "expert-systems" working on specific theoretical frameworks, through more classical methods of content analysis and coding-sorting-retrieving socio-semantic procedures, eventually with various statistical methods. L'auteur expose d'abord quelques considèrations épistémologiques générales sur les présupposés implicites des méthodes de recherche sociologique, abusivement séparées en qualitatives et quantitatives, et des interrogations spécifiques sur le statut des corpus textuels et des pratiques socio-discursives dans différents domaines et selon divers types de problématique en sociologie. Puis, après un résumé des problématiques sociolinguistiques de l'"énonciation", propres aux courants de l'Analyse de Discours à la française", il propose une classification des principaux lieux d'élaboration théorico-méthodologique ayant (ou susceptibles d'avoir) un impact sur les pratiques informatisées d'analyse textuelle: de la lexicométrique inspirée de l'"Analyse des données a la française", actuellement dominante, a des quasi-systèmes-experts, branchés sur des problématiques sociologiques particulières, en passant par des méthodes plus "classiques" d'analyse de contenu thématique, de type socio-sémantique, et de codification a posteriori de réponses à des questions ouvertes et autres énoncés produits en langage naturel.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24359736

Journal Title: Cahiers du Centre Gustave Glotz
Publisher: DE BOCCARD
Issue: i24358311
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bouvier David
Abstract: P. Ellinger, La légende nationale, cit. supra, p. 71, qui a également bien relevé la référence au κτήμα ές αίεί de Thucydide.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24359953

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358410
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Lindahl Hans
Abstract: Hans Kelsen: Reine Rechtslehre, 2nd. Edition. Vienna 1960. P. 209, footnote (my trans- lation, H.L.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360612

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358794
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Welsen Peter
Abstract: Paul Ricceur: Le cercle de la démonstration. In: Ders.: Lectures I. Autour du politique. Paris 1991.217.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360727

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24360301
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Odenstedt Anders
Abstract: Gadamer: Relevance of the Beautiful. 100.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360766

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358470
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Serra Alice Mara
Abstract: Ebd. 38 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360892

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358654
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Römer Inga
Abstract: Gondek, Tengelyi: Neue Phänomenologie in Frankreich. 671, vgl. 671-673.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360912

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358589
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Summa Michela
Abstract: Husserl: Zur Phänomenologie des inneren Zeitbewusstseins. 380.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360954

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24361677
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Kowalewicz Michel Henri
Abstract: Vgl. R. Ingarden: Ο tlumaczeniach, a.a.O. [Anm. 58] 186: » Pozwolç sobie to rozwinqc na przykladzie Krytyki czystego rozumu Kanta, dokonanego przez P. Chmielowskiego. Wiadomo, ze terminologia przez Chmielowskiego przyjçta rozpowszechnila siç dose znacznie w publika- cjach polskich na temat Kanta, a nawet bywa przez niektorych filozofôw polskich stosowana w pracach specjalnie ζ filozolia Kanta nie zwi^zanych. Przyzwyczajono siç Erscheinung nazywac >zjawiskiem< (i nawet w szerokich kolach naukowych polskich, np. wsrôd fizykow), Anschau- ung - >ogli}dem<, Vernunft - >rozumem<, Verstand - >rozs^dkiem< itd. Czy mamy siç liczyc ζ tym faktem i w dalszym ci;(gu stosowac te terminy w tlumaczeniu i w pracach naszych filozoficznych? Nie da siç zaprzeczyc, ze przynajmniej niektôre ζ tych terminow nie oddajg tresci faktycznych pojçc Kantowskich. Mimo catego przyzwyczajenia do nich przy glçbszym wnikniçciu w wywody Kanta trudno nam siç zgodzic, jakoby Verstand Kantowski byt »rozsqdkiem«. Stowo to oznacza pewng wlasciwosc umyslu ludzkiego w praktycznym zachowaniu siç cztowieka, tymczasem u Kanta Verstand jest gtôwn^ poznawcz^ wtadzq (czy zdolnosciç), gdzie sprawy zycia praktyczne- go nie odgrywajg zadnej roli. Wiadomo tez, ze Kant tç stronç zycia umysiowego, czy zdolnosci umyslu, ktöra wigze siç ζ zagadnieniami praktyki (w szczegolnosci etycznej), nazwal wlasnie nie Verstand, lecz praktische Vernunft
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24361939

Journal Title: KulturPoetik
Publisher: Verlag Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i24368988
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Weiland Marc
Abstract: Schapp (Anm. 34), S. 127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24369776

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: THE POLISH SOCIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION
Issue: i24371582
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): BŁESZNOWSKI BARTŁOMIEJ
Abstract: The Care of the Self (1984)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24371587

Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: l'Institut d'études slaves
Issue: i24372731
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Bocianowska Cécile
Abstract: I. Stokfiszewski, Zwrotpolityczny, Warszawa, Wyd. Krytyki Politycznej, 2009. Sur le virage politique et ses influences sur la critique, voir aussi : D. Kozicka, Krytyczne (nie)porzqdki..., op. cit. Note du rédacteur : cette activité fait partie du groupe de jeunes intellectuels « Krytyka polityczna ». Cf. introduction dans ce volume.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24372736

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Armand Colin et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i24395823
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): DUBOUCLEZ OLIVIER
Abstract: 20. « Les acteurs savent que toute la pièce tend vers le salut » (Voir PM, p. 69).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24396932

Journal Title: Religion & Literature
Publisher: University of Notre Dame English Department
Issue: i24395981
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): Knight Christopher J.
Abstract: In this essay, I argue that Penelope Fitzgerald's The Gate of Angels attempts to work out the difficulties that any intelligent, religiously inclined person must come to terms with in the twentieth, now twentieth-first, century. Fitzgerald sought not to shelter her religious belief behind a cloister wall, thinking like her uncle the Reverend Wilfred Knox, "that no cloister walls can be high enough to exclude the cares of the world." Among these cares is the desire to give a faithful report of the world to each other, to know this world as it exists in truth, and not to misrepresent it. Early twentieth-century investigations into the makeup of the physical world as well as the theoretical and intellectual advances possible with quantum physics were very much part of this desire; and in The Gate of Angels, set in and around Cambridge University's pre-war physics laboratories, Fitzgerald offers a beautiful rendering of the excitement engendered by these investigations. At the same time, Fitzgerald offers a picture, true to her own experience, wherein things that in the popular mind are often conceived of as opposite and irreconcilable—for instance, chance and necessity—are found to stand in a relation of sympathy, casting over The Gate of Angels "that sympathetic glow which," Henry James wrote, "forms half the substance of our genial impressions."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24397714

Journal Title: Religion & Literature
Publisher: University of Notre Dame English Department
Issue: i24395973
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Kirkpatrick Robin
Abstract: This forum gathers together a set of essays composed in response to the 2011 special issue of Religion & Literature 42.1–2, titled "Something Fearful": Medievalist Scholars on the "Religious Turn" in Literary Criticism, edited by Kathryn Kerby-Fulton and Jonathan Juilfs. The forum's ten authors reflect both on essays within the original volume and on the broader questions engaged by it and through its very publication; responsive remarks from Kathryn Kerby-Fulton and two contributors to that initiating volume conclude the conversation. Through conversation, response, and critical engagement, the forum's contributors weigh questions of the language of belief in scholarly discourse, of the continuities of religious practice across history, of the assumptions and beliefs undergirding critical work on religion and literature and culture, and of the acknowledgement of the religious convictions of medievalists' scholarly subjects, scholars, and the communities of both.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24397749

Journal Title: Renaissance Studies
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i24411931
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Chojnacki Stanley
Abstract: Cf. Scott, "'Experience'", 34: '[Subjects] are not unified, autonomous individuals exercising free will, but rather subjects whose agency is created through situations and statuses conferred on them.'
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24411934

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24438872
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): KNIGHT DEBORAH
Abstract: L. B. Cebik, quoted in Branigan (1992, 27).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24438877

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24439058
Date: 7 1, 1997
Author(s): KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: "Afterwards" to my Poetics of Imagining (London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1991).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439060

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24439058
Date: 7 1, 1997
Author(s): BROTHERS ROBYN F.
Abstract: Martin J. Matustfk's treatment of individualism (1993, 1995).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439065

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24439292
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): TOHANEANU CECILIA
Abstract: Braudel's La Mediteranee.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439303

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i24439327
Date: 7 1, 2003
Author(s): STEELE MEILI
Abstract: Steele 1997, chapter 5
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439464

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i24439524
Date: 10 1, 2005
Author(s): HEDERMAN MARK PATRICK
Abstract: Is it possible to connect with the God-who-may-be without paying attention to the tapping on the wall from the other side? Kearney remains within the orbit and the idiom of so-called postmodern philosophy while he expresses phenomenologically the relationship with God as ultimate other. If we are to remain within the confines of postmodern philosophy to articulate such presence, access to what Rilke calls "heart-work" as opposed to "work of sight" might best be glimpsed through excavation of "decisiveness" in the musings of the later Heidegger.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439538

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i24439785
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): COLAPIETRO VINCENT
Abstract: "In the Wake of Darwin" (Colapietro 2003)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439818

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i24441855
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): FORRESTER JOHN
Abstract: http://users.ox.ac.uk/~jrlucas/morecon/checmor.pdf (accessed 6 June 2011).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24441865

Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i24465850
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Gandsman Ari
Abstract: For anthropologists working on the topic of human rights, fieldwork often consists of collecting narratives documenting experiences of violence and loss. Drawing on research with human organizations in Argentina, this article questions this methodological focus that is often related to human rights activism. While these narratives are often treated as organic accounts, they are also products of the human rights movement. Analyses that fail to address this larger institutional context may end up reproducing conventionally held knowledge. By exploring the larger interconnections between narrative, human rights and trauma, I conclude by questioning the prevalent normative assumptions about narrative. Pour l'anthropologue travaillant sur le sujet des droits humains, le travail de terrain consiste souvent à recueillir des récits documentant des expériences de violence et de perte. À partir de recherches menées auprès d'organismes de défense des droits humains en Argentine, cet article interroge ce parti-pris méthodologique qu'on associe souvent au militantisme pour les droits humains. Alors que ces récits sont souvent traités comme des comptes-rendus organiques, ils sont aussi des produits du mouvement pour les droits humains. Les analyses qui omettent de tenir compte de ce contexte institutionnel plus étendu peuvent finir par reproduire des connaissances conventionnellement admises. En explorant les interconnexions plus étendues entre les récits, les droits humains et les traumatismes, je conclus en remettant en question les a priori normatifs courants relatifs aux récits.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24467380

Journal Title: Revue d'histoire des sciences
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i24466320
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): SEIGNAN Gérard
Abstract: Gaël Alain, Penser mieux, travailler moins (Paris : Eyrolles, 2013).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24467764

Journal Title: Cuban Studies
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Issue: i24482950
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): GUTIÉRREZ RAFAEL ROJAS
Abstract: This essay explores the relationship between poetics and politics in Martí's work. By way of an archeology of the political images in his poetry (Ismaelillo, Versos sencillos, Versos libres) and, conversely, of the poetic representations that abound in his prose and oratory, the author argues for a tension between the two textual dimensions that is never quite resolved or diluted within a discursive or historical synthesis. And yet, the authorial schism is not exactly a fault to be "corrected" by critical reading, but rather the very axis of a martinian hermeneutics. Este ensayo explora las relaciones entre poética y política dentro de la escritura de José Martí. A través de una arqueología de las imágenes políticas que aparecen en su poesía (Ismaelillo, Versos sencillos y Versos libres) y, a la inversa, de las representaciones poéticas que abundan en la oratoria y la prosa de Martí, el autor sostiene que esos dos mundos del texto viven siempre en tensión, sin que ambas identidades textuales puedan diluirse en una síntesis discursiva o histórica. Sin embargo, la escisión de la autoría no es, aquí, una falla que el crítico debe "corregir", sino el eje de una hermenéutica del sujeto martiano.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24487741

Journal Title: French Politics, Culture & Society
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i24517600
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Mbembe Achille
Abstract: This article offers a genealogy of the impact of French and Francophone Studies during the past decades in order to offer suggestions about how the field might be reconfigured and re-imagined in the present. We argue that the best way forward will be to dispense with traditional boundaries and borders within the field and instead embrace a general identity as Francophonists in order to bring together work on and from different regions of the globe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24517984

Journal Title: French Politics, Culture & Society
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i24517599
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): Smith Andrea
Abstract: Since their arrival in France in the early 1960s, former settlers of Algeria have developed an array of private and public "sites of memory" projects that have remained unnoticed in wider French society or have been interpreted uncharitably. This article offers a new perspective on these projects. Informed by Maurice Halbwachs' concern with the material supports for collective memory and Sigmund Freud's insights on loss, I reinterpret them as stages in a work of mourning, and offer new insights on the wider question of France's relationship to its colonial past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24518001

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Periodicals, Inc.
Issue: i24542833
Date: 5 1, 2013
Author(s): ANKERSMIT FRANK
Abstract: What I have described elsewhere as "the Magritte conception of history." See Ankersmit, Meaning, Truth, and Reference in Historical Representation (Ithaca, NY, and London: Cornell Uni- versity Press, 2012), 192-196.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24542850

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Periodicals, Inc.
Issue: i24542986
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): Grethlein Jonas
Abstract: This book examines Greek engagements with the past as articulations of memory formulated against the contingency of chance associated with temporality. Based on a phenomenological understanding of temporality, it identifies four memorializing strategies: continuity (tradition), regularity (exemplarity), development, and acceptance of chance. This framework serves in pursuing a twofold aim: to reconstruct the literary field of memory in fifth-century BCE Greece; and to interpret Greek historiography as a memorializing mode. The key contention advanced by this approach is that acts of memory entailed an "idea of history" that was articulated not only in historiography, but also in epinician poetry, elegy, tragedy, and oratory. The book offers a rich account of poetic conventions and contexts through which each of these genres counterbalanced contingency through the use of exemplary and traditional modes of memory. This fine analysis highlights the grip of the present on the past as a significant feature of both historiographical and nonhistoriographical genres. The essay argues that this work fills a disciplinary gap by extending the reflection on memory to a new period, Greek antiquity. The retrospective positioning of this period at the outset of Western historical thought brings Grethlein's investigation to the center of debates about memory, temporality, and the meaning history. In engaging with the book's argument, the essay suggests that historiographical memory emerged in Greece not as a first-order encounter with time, but as a second-order encounter with forgetting. This confrontation marked a certain separation of historiography from other memorializing genres. Whereas poetic and rhetorical memories were posited against contingency, historiography sought to retrieve those aspects of the past that may otherwise have been irretrievably lost and forgotten. In doing so, it formulated the historiographical imperative as a negation of forgetting that problematized the truth-value of memory and the very act of remembering the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24542996

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24564451
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): Tomanova Zuzana
Abstract: Je remercie pour leur coopération et leur disponibilité Josef Alan, Jin Kabele, Milos Kucera, Hana Librovâ, Miloslav Petrusek, Olga Srrridovâ, Zdenëk Uherek, Ivan Vodochodsky, qui m'ont livré des récits plus ou moins bio- graphiques, et Tomas Bitrich, Marie Cerna, Zdenèk Konopâsek, Jin Nekvapil, Majda Rajanova, Eva Stehlikovâ, Tereza Stôckelovâ, dont les conseils et remarques ont considérablement contribué à la rédaction de cet article.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24564461

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24565178
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Israël Liora
Abstract: Avant le procès David Rousset et celui dit de 1'« Internationale des traîtres », qui, dans les années suivantes, ont opposé à nouveau des journalistes communistes (défendus notamment par Joë Nordmann) et des dénonciateurs de la répression soviétique. Sur le procès Rousset, voir T. Wieder, « La commission internationale contre le régime concentrationnaire, 1949-1959 : des rescapés des camps nazis combattent les camps de concentration », cité.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24565186

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24565251
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Chappuis Romain
Abstract: R. Barthes, Mythologies, op. rit, p. 217.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24565257

Journal Title: Histoire & Mesure
Publisher: Éditions du CNRS
Issue: i24563536
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): LEPETIT Bernard
Abstract: L'histoire quantitative aujourd'hui n'est plus à la mode. Pendant une génération, aux lendemains de la seconde guerre mondiale, elle a constitué pour les historiens français une pratique dominante, et la référence par rapport à laquelle furent longtemps jaugées les manières de faire de l'histoire. La tendance aujourd'hui s'est inversée. Le doute s'est répandu quant à la capacité du chiffre à rendre compte des compartements les plus fondamentaux. En examinant certaines manières de faire de l'histoire quantitative toujours fructueuses et en se gardant de certaines impasses, on cherche à montrer que la démonstration historique ne peut se ramener ni à une logique de la persuasion, ni à une logique de la narration. Les critères de sa pertinence doivent s'apprécier à l'articulation de la définition d'une problématique, des modalités de sa mise en oeuvre expérimentale, et de la confrontation au démenti des données empiriques des propositions historiques. Quantitative history is no longer in fashion. For a generation after the Second World War, it was the usual practice for French historians and the reference for judging work in history. This frame of trend has now been reversed. Doubt has spread concerning the capacity of numbers to explain the most important behaviours. While taking in consideration different styles of research in quantitative history which are always fruitful, and being aware of certain kinds of types of deadlocks, one wants to show how historic demonstration must never be pure persuasion nor pure story. The criteria of its pertinency must be appreciated adequately between the definition of problematic and of testing ground, and in confrontation between empirical data and historical assertions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24565903

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24567235
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Naudet Jules
Abstract: Pour les longues discussions que nous avons eues sur le thème de cette étude, je remercie Nicolas Patin, qui a beaucoup travaillé sur la mise en valeur de l'expérience de guerre des députés du Reichstag (Nicolas Patin, La catastrophe allemande (1914-1945), Paris, Fayard, 2014).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24567243

Journal Title: Biography
Publisher: University of Hawaiʻi Press for the Biographical Research Center
Issue: i24570179
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): FOLEY BARBARA
Abstract: As demonstrated by the workings of the political unconscious in Jean Toomer's Cane and Ralph Ellison's Invisible Man, investigation of authorial biography is an indispensable component of Marxist literary criticism. Symptomatic reading, while derogated by the advocates of "surface reading," remains crucial to textual interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24570218

Journal Title: Biography
Publisher: University of Hawaiʻi Press for the Biographical Research Center
Issue: i24570215
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): STUMM BETTINA
Abstract: This article examines the ethical responsibilities of relating and responding to subjects of oppression in the context of collaborative life writing. One well-established ethical response to oppression is the practice of recognition. Drawing on the phenomenological ethics of Emmanuel Levinas and Paul Ricoeur, as well as the related work of Kelly Oliver, I raise some of the limitations of recognition, and delineate the ethical alternative of witnessing, bringing both to bear on my collaborative work with Holocaust survivor Rhodea Shandler.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24570271

Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i24573102
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): SCHÄFER RIEKE
Abstract: W.B. Gallie, "Essentially Contested Concepts," in Philosophy and the Historical Under- standing (London: Chatto & Windus, 1964), 157-191.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24573108

Journal Title: Max Weber Studies
Publisher: Max Weber Studies
Issue: i24574382
Date: 7 1, 2004
Author(s): Lassman Peter
Abstract: Larmore, The Morals of Modernity, p. 151.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24579691

Journal Title: Max Weber Studies
Publisher: Max Weber Studies
Issue: i24577610
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Djedi Youcef
Abstract: P. Haenni, L'islam de marché, pp. 10-12, 21 sq., 30, 35 sq., 41-44,49, 50, 57, 59 sq., 70-83, 86, 91-93, 95,97-99,102,103-108.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24579976

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i24582422
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Bessy Christian
Abstract: Descombes (2004)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24583127

Journal Title: Artibus et Historiae
Publisher: IRSA
Issue: i24595727
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Burroughs Charles
Abstract: Through the analysis of a major religious painting by Botticelli, this article builds on important recent work on Botticelli's sacred art to explore apparent responses on the part of an especially sophisticated artist to the gathering atmosphere of crisis in the city's political and religious life. The artist uses various devices of connection or separation between the viewer/worshiper and the holy image; these devices are not unique to the painting, but their combination is exceptional. First, Botticelli uses a hieratic gold ground to distinguish a scene set in heaven, the coronation of the Virgin, from a more earthly zone; here recent scruples about the representation of transcendence seem to be in play. Second, the figures beneath, four major saints, embody different ways of addressing the viewer and mediating between him/her and the heavenly event. Third, the latter appears to be treated as an apsidal image within an implied architectural setting, in other words, as a representation of a representation. By establishing modes of mediation, then, Botticelli confronts issues emerging as central to the representation of the sacred, in part on the basis of a critical understanding of Albertian picture theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24595730

Journal Title: Tumultes
Publisher: ÉDITIONS KIMÉ
Issue: i24599377
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Zecchini Laetitia
Abstract: M. Darwich, Exil 4, Contrepoint.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24599382

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Medicine and Allied Sciences
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i24618790
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): SADOWSKY JONATHAN
Abstract: Pressman, Last Resort, p. 132.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24632274

Journal Title: The Journal of Theological Studies
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i24623237
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Collicutt Joanna
Abstract: W. Brueggemann, The Book that Breathes New Life (Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 2005), p. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24637949

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i24649492
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): WATSON STEPHEN H.
Abstract: Paul Klee's art found broad impact upon philosophers of varying commitments, including Hans-Georg Gadamer. Moreover, Klee himself was not only one of the most important artists of aesthetic modernism but one of its leading theoreticians, and much in his work, as in Gadamer's, originated in post-Kantian literary theory's explications of symbol and allegory. Indeed at one point in Truth and Method, Gadamer associates his project for a general "theory of hermeneutic experience" not only with Goethe's metaphysical account of the symbolic but equally with a "rehabilitation" of allegory. In this paper, I examine this position and Gadamer's own use of it in his analysis of Klee's work, contrasting it with that of Walter Benjamin's account of allegory, equally indebted to Goethe and this archive. Finally, I contrast the resulting interpretations of Klee, discussing the implications that evolve for understanding both Gadamer and Benjamin—but equally for understanding Klee's work and, provisionally, the work of art, thus construed, for philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24654833

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659492
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Watson Stephen H.
Abstract: 5 186
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24659578

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659485
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Mei Todd S.
Abstract: Ricoeur, "Work and the Word," in History and Truth, trans. C. A. Kelbley (Evanston: North- western University Press, 1965), 218.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24659841

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659511
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: Kelly Oliver in "Forgiveness and Subjectivity," Philosophy Today 47, no. 3 (2003): 280.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660187

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659511
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Rasmussen David M.
Abstract: my "Justice, Interpretation and the Cosmopolitan Idea," Distincktion 8 (2004): 37-45.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660190

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659511
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Kaplan David M.
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, The Just\ trans. David Pellauer (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2000), 76-93.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660192

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659515
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: Ricoeur, Vivant jusqu'à la mort 76.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660221

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659515
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Llewelyn John
Abstract: On the Gift," 66.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660224

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659507
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Jung Hwa Yol
Abstract: The Rustle of Language, trans. Richard Howard [New York: Hill and Wang, 1986], 72
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660238

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659567
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): WARE OWEN
Abstract: One of the central questions of Jacques Derrida's later writings concerns the sources of religion. At times he gives explicit priority to the universal dimension of religion. In other places, however, he considers the primacy of faith in its concrete, historical context. This paper will clarify Derrida's relationship to universality and historicity by first comparing his notion of "messianicity without messianism" to that of Walter Benjamin's "weak Messianism." After drawing out these differences, I will focus on Derrida's later writings. I will show that much of the ambiguity of Derrida's thinking on religion can be resolved by turning to his work on khōra, the Greek word for "space" or "matter." The rhetoric of khōra can allow us to think through a twofold logic, one that includes the universal/historical distinction and exceeds its alternatives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660640

Journal Title: Indo-Iranian Journal
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24663608
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): HILTEBEITEL ALF
Abstract: The superfluity arises from the fact that this "double of Krsna" never has to take the reins, since Nala is driving; see Hiltebeitel, Rethinking, 232-33. As men- tioned in n. 7 above, J. Brockington finds this "implausible." For valuable discus- sion of the "avatära" theme in both epics, and especially in the Rämäyam, see also Robert P. Goldman and Sally J. Sutherland, trans. The Rämäyam of Välmlki, Vol. 5: Sundarakäyanda (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1996), 29-33, 69, 73.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24663613

Journal Title: Studies in East European Thought
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24670227
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Savin Alexey E.
Abstract: The article comprises three parts. Part I contains an overview of the areas in the analysis of modern French philosophy that have been of the greatest relevance to Russian researchers over the last years. We conclude that numerous aspects of the French philosophical thought of the twentieth century are well represented in the research of Russian authors, who also point out the emerging trends in its development. Part II deals with the development of analytic philosophy in Russia within the framework of such areas as "critique of bourgeois philosophy", a purely ideological stand only nominally related to philosophy, logic, and the history of philosophy and theoretical research. Part III contains a periodization of the history of phenomenology in Russia, pointing out the most important achievements of the contemporary Russian scholars of phenomenology as well as their understanding of the essence, the problems, and the aims of phenomenological philosophy. We also indicate the tendencies within the development of the discipline in the Russian Federation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24673265

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24699234
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Anheim Étienne
Abstract: Même si ce n'était pas l'objet de ce travail, et outre les féconds prolongements de l'anthro- pologie historique déjà évoqués au début de cet article, il faut rappeler les fructueux échanges empiriques que les historiens, en particulier pour le Moyen Âge, ont pu avoir depuis vingt ans avec différents courants de l'anthropologie, qu'il s'agisse par exemple de l'anthropologie juridique dans le cadre des débats sur la mutation de l'an mil (cf. les travaux de Dominique Barthélémy [1997, 1999]), de l'anthropologie visuelle de chercheurs comme Hans Belting (cf. Schmitt [2002]; ou Baschet [2008]), de l'anthropologie des pratiques d'écriture dans la lignée de Jack Goody (pour une présentation synthétique de l'historiographie médiévale dans ce domaine, cf. Chastang [2008]), de l'anthropologie économique (avec Feller, Gramain & Weber [2005]), ou encore des réflexions de Maurice Godelier ou de Louis Dumont (mobilisés par Iogna-Prat [1998, 2006]).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24699250

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24707302
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Griffioen Sander
Abstract: J. P. van Praag, 'Levensovertuiging, filosofie en wetenschap' ('World-view, philosophy and science'), valedictory address given on retirement from the Univer- sity of Leiden, 13th November 1979, Utrecht, Humanistisch Verbond, pp. 9, 7, 10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24707304

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24707951
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Botha M. Elaine
Abstract: It would be more accurate to refer to 'ontic' or 'ontical' in this respect.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24707953

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24707971
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Morton Herbert Donald
Abstract: Thus J. van der Hoeven in an article with the telling title, Ontwikkeling in het Iicht van ontmoeting' [Development in the light of encounter], p. 159.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24707974

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708591
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Seerveld Calvin
Abstract: Jean Brun, 'Le voyage dans le temps. De la chronophotographie au Futurisme', Tempo- ralité et Aliénatkon, p.364.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708593

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708906
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Geertsema Hendrik
Abstract: Hendrik G. Geertsema, Van boven naar voren (Kampen: J.H. Kok, 1980), pp. 95-201
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708911

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708906
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Olthuis James H.
Abstract: Martin Heidegger, Being and time, trans. John Macquarrie and Edward Robinson (New York: Harper & Row, 1962), p. 174.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708912

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708906
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Blosser Philip
Abstract: Steen, Structure, p. 272; cf. above, n. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708915

Journal Title: International Journal for Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24709107
Date: 8 1, 2014
Author(s): Labooy Guus H
Abstract: Adv. haereses V, 2, 1; 'non aliéna in dolo diripiens, sed sua propria juste et benigne assumens' (http:// archive.org/stream/sanctiirenaeiep00harvgoog#page/n326/mode/2up)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709183

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24709638
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Glas Gerrit
Abstract: Interestingly enough it appears that the structural features of reconciliation show a re- versed version of the structural features of evil. Resolving the evil I do toward the other re- quires that I am able to say what I have done wrong (the reverse of silence and the tinspeakable), that I recognize my guilt (which is incompatible with splitting) and that I ask for forgiveness (which is very shameful, but may résolve shame when penitence is accepted and forgiveness is given); see Glas (in press); Muφhyand Hampton (1988); Volf (1996).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709643

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24709638
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Kang Young Ahn
Abstract: Bob Goudzwaard, (Unhalizrilinti and the Kiiigrftrm of Coït, p. 44.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709645

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24709683
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Griffioen Sander
Abstract: Desmond is certainly not blind to the risks of such an endeavor: God and the Betioeen mentions on the one hand a loss of faith in case of the forlorn mystic who in his 'ardor for the divine other' is confronted with his own 'lack and nothing' (GB 266), and on the other a possible usurpation of divine sovereignty (GB 268).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709686

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24709683
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Glas Gerrit
Abstract: Because they escape precise modal qualification, Troost suggests that insight into disposi- tions can only be gained in an idea-ruled (idee-matig) understanding, in an idea-regulated 'on the way' in the transcendental direction of time. For reformational philosophy this raises an old and prima facie purely theoretical problem: Do the modalities 'continue' right into the heart? One could paraphrase Troost's view for example such that for him the heart should primarily be sought 'below' or 'behind' the act structure, and that the dispositions — relative to this vertical axis — constitute a horizontal layer in which the lower substructures are interwoven with the act structure. In that case the integration of the lower structures in the act structure would take place via the dispositions rather than through a direct relationship with the heart. This notion — for which hints can be found in Dooyeweerd — would in any case lead to an appreciably more nuanced picture of the 'binding' and 'releasing' of substructures. If I understand Troost correctly, he would allow this interpretation for the substructures, though not for the modalities. His caution concerning the 'continuing' of the modalities 'into the' heart is epistemological: the cosmological concentration of the modal functions in the heart is a transcendental idea; at best we see dots (the idea-regulated 'on the way' in the transcendental direction of time), but we should not turn them into lines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709687

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Association for Reformational Philosophy
Issue: i24710027
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Griffioen Sander
Abstract: Broad definitions are often used in Christian apologetics. One example: 'Everyone has a worldview. Whether or not we realize it, we all have certain presuppositions and biases that affect the way we view all of life and reality. A worldview is like a set of lenses which taint our vision or alter the way we perceive the world around us.' (http://christianworldview.net/, consulted Jan. 23, 2012)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24710030

Journal Title: Revista Española de Pedagogía
Publisher: Universidad Internacional de La Rioja
Issue: i24710715
Date: 8 1, 2015
Author(s): BERTAGNA Giuseppe
Abstract: The main aim of this article is to offer a critical reflection on the need of rethinking the teachers' professional skills and their academic pathway, given the changes and current transformations (crisis, in its etymological sense). In fact, a series of changes, transformations, are identified and affect directly the educator's comprehension. Amongst others: the transformation of work bound up with the processes of the economic globalization, and the transformation of the learning environments imbued by the TICs; the population growth, a demographic transformation with geopolitics relevance, and finally, as a result from the previous ones, the raise in the migratory flows. Under this context, this paper tries to reconceptualize teachers' training and their depiction as professionals from the view of Gustav Mahler in his statement Tradition is the spreading of fire and not the veneration of ashes. Thereupon, some categories that help in the teaching update, are proposed and explained; such as authority (as reputation or moral authority, role model and, hence, less so as bare exercise of power), the personalization of education, the importance of home community (society), and, lastly, the alternation within school-society and work-study. El objetivo de este trabajo es ofrecer una reflexión acerca de la necesidad de re-pensar la profesionalidad de los docentes y de su itinerario formativo, a la luz los cambios y transformaciones actuales (crisis, en sentido etimológico). En efecto, se identifican una serie de cambios, de transformaciones, que afectan directamente a la comprensión del docente, del enseñante. Entre otros: la transformación del trabajo vinculada a los procesos de la globalización económica y la transformación de los entornos de aprendizaje imbuidos en las TICs; el aumento de la población, la transformación demográfica con trascendencia geopolítica; y por último, y como confluencia de las dos anteriores, el aumento de los flujos migratorios. En este contexto, el trabajo trata de reconceptualizar la formación de los profesores y de su imagen como profesionales desde el enfoque que era expresado por Gustav Mahler en la frase la tradición es el mantenimiento del fuego y no la adoración de sus cenizas. Así, se proponen y se explican algunas categorías que ayudan a la actualización de la docencia hoy, tales como: la autoridad (como prestigio o autoridad moral, ejemplo, y no tanto como mero ejercicio del poder), la personalización de la enseñanza, la trascendencia de la comunidad de origen (a la sociedad) y por último, la alternancia entre escuela y sociedad, trabajo y estudio.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24711293

Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i24713074
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Konz Britta
Abstract: Metz, Glaube, aaO. (Anm.4), 115.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24713091

Journal Title: Extrême-Orient Extrême-Occident
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes
Issue: i24715389
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Morier-Genoud Damien
Abstract: Benjamin (2000): 431.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24716509

Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Issue: i24721305
Date: 3 1, 2016
Author(s): Herrera-Racionero Paloma
Abstract: Herrera-Racionero y Lizcano (2012: 81-84).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24721310

Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Issue: i24721320
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Pérez-Díaz Víctor
Abstract: «Hori- zonte y dilemas de la filantropía» (2007).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24721323

Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Issue: i24721320
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Isla José Gómez
Abstract: (http://sociocav.usal.es/stata).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24721324

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i24721810
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Vassilicos Basil
Abstract: In Matter and Memory, Bergson examines the relationship between perception and memory, the status of consciousness in its relation to the brain, and more generally, a possible conjunction of matter and mind. Our reading focuses in particular on his understanding of the evanescent presence of the present and of its debt vis-à-vis the "unconscious" consciousness of a "virtual" past. We wish to show that the Bergsonian version of a critique of "the metaphysics of presence" is, for all that, an offshoot of a Platonic type of metaphysics. It is true that Bergson departs from traditional stand-points on the side of a self-sufficient and original present and a form of presence to which the transparency of consciousness would confer the character of immediate evidence. All the same, it can hardly be claimed that his rehabilitation of the past and the unconscious opens up new perspectives on how forgetting and death are bound up with the work of memory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24721816

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Derecho
Publisher: FACULTAD DE DERECHO PONTIFICIA UNIVERSIDAD CATÓLICA DE CHILE
Issue: i24721887
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Caldera Cristóbal Carmona
Abstract: Guastini (2001) p. 146.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24722062

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739848
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Julia Dominique
Abstract: F. L., 2001 : 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24739861

Journal Title: Journal for the Study of Religion
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: e24798420
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Blond Louis
Abstract: By inquiring into the translatability of Judaism and philosophy, we reawaken an ancient problem that asks after philosophy’s relation with religion: What has Athens to do with Jerusalem?Translation is a rejuvenated means of wrestling with this irksome question, which seeks to understand how multiple approaches to meaning and being can exist concurrently or whether any interaction forfeits multiplicity for the primacy of one form over all others. The specific issue that linguistic versions of the problem address is whether or not the languages that Judaism and philosophy speak are separate and distinct and if those distinctions are established on deeper, non-linguistic ground. For this reason, translation not only raises the problem of articulacy and context in interlingual translations, it also alludes to an ontological or metaphysical separation that speaks of different, non-shared worlds. Whether or not a translation theory addresses, repairs or upholds the opposition between religion and philosophy is in question, and translation becomes a vehicle for discussing what Jerusalem has to offer Athens and what Athens has for Jerusalem. In this essay, I examine the translation problem as an attempt to repair or re-gloss the relation between Judaism and philosophy by way of Michael Fagenblat’s recovery of Emmanuel Levinas’ thought in his work,A Covenant of Creatures: Levinas’s Philosophy of Judaism(2010).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24798426

Journal Title: Journal for the Study of Religion
Publisher: Murray Coombes Publishers
Issue: e24805687
Date: June 1, 1991
Author(s): Mason Garth
Abstract: In this article I examine Philip Qipa (P.Q.) Vundla’s Moral Rearmament-inspired (MRA) politics with a view to explicating the previously hidden currents at work in his political activism. In my analysis, I draw on the theoretical frameworks of Paul Ricoeur and Homi Bhabha. In terms of these conceptual foundations, I investigate Vundla’s involvement in two foundational events in the history of the South African struggle, namely the school boycott of 1955 and the bus boycott of 1957. The official history of these two events, written by social historians such as Tom Lodge, interprets them as the dawn of mass opposition against apartheid. However, I contend that a closer analysis of these two events via biographical material reveals a more complex history, implicitly connected to the person of P.Q. Vundla and his politics of negotiation and finding common ground between opposing ideologies. Vundla stands out within this context because he was a nonconforming ANC leader, who disagreed with the way the party leadership approached political activism. His approach was driven by MRA values, which sought political solutions through dialogue and aimed to benefit all communities within South Africa. Vundla can be seen as an early forerunner of the bridge-building politics of Nelson Mandela. It is hoped that, by examining the role of MRA values in Vundla’s activism, a fuller, more complex account of politics in the 1950s can be arrived at.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24805696

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Ethnologie
Publisher: REIMER
Issue: i24888256
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Malefakis Alexis
Abstract: Fieldwork is sometimes marked by experiences of frictions and frustration. Fieldwork with mobile street vendors in an African city may confront the fieldworker with the problem of locating the 'field' and attaining access to it, both spatially and temporally. As I will show by reference to my fieldwork with a group of shoe vendors on the streets of Dar es Salaam, Tanzania, the frictions that occurred at the beginning of my fieldwork nevertheless ignited a process of ethnographic knowledge-gaining that led me to understand the importance of temporality and rhythmicity for the shoe vendors' practices. In their active engagement with the spatio-temporal landscape of the city, the street vendors organised their practices as an experiential rhythm that unfolded as sequences of rising and subsequently declining cognitive and corporeal tensions. These rhythms did not flow smoothly, but were necessarily interspersed with disturbances and frictions by the rhythms of other pedestrians in the streets, whose attention the street vendors tried to attain.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24888264

Journal Title: Journal of Consumer Research
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i342758
Date: 9 1, 1979
Author(s): Zuckerman Elizabeth C.
Abstract: This article reviews and integrates recent theories of addiction drawn from a diverse set of disciplines-consumer behavior, medicine, sociology, psychiatry, and psychology-to provide a comprehensive framework for understanding the etiology of addiction and other compulsive consumer behaviors. Interpretive material from personal interviews with addicted and nonaddicted drug users is then used to illustrate the consciousness of addictive consumption. Two a priori themes-serial/simultaneous addictions and personal crises/role transitions-and five emergent themes-relapse, deception, dysfunctional families, suicide, and boundaries-are discussed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2489326

Journal Title: Region
Publisher: Slavica on behalf of the Institute of Russian Studies at the Hankuk University of Foreign Studies
Issue: i24896621
Date: 1 1, 2016
Author(s): Echevskaia Olga
Abstract: Donald E. Polk- inghorne, Narrative Knowing and the Human Sciences (Albany: SUNY Press, 1988).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24896624

Journal Title: Journal of Consumer Research
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i342774
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Woolfolk Craig J.
Abstract: Meyers-Levy's (1989)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2489789

Journal Title: Diplomatic History
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24912290
Date: 4 1, 1995
Author(s): LEFFLER MELVYN P.
Abstract: I am referring to the influential essay by Charles S. Maier, "Marking Time: The Historiography of International Relations," in The Past Before Us: Contemporary Historical Writ- ing in the United States, ed. Michael Kämmen (Ithaca, 1980), 355-87; and to the prize-winning book by Richard E. Neustadt and Ernest R. May, Thinking in Time: The Uses of History for Decision-Makers (New York, 1986).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24912293

Journal Title: Studia Musicologica Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae
Publisher: Akadémiai Kiadó
Issue: i25047383
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Richter Pál
Abstract: Richter Pál: "Bitematikus stratégiák szonáta formájú tételekben" [Bithematic Strategies of Sonata Form Movements], Magyar Zene 39/2,2001, pp. 161-162.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25047387

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University Press
Issue: i342936
Date: 2 1, 1983
Author(s): Ricoeur Hayden
Abstract: Ricoeur's latest work, Time and Narrative (Chicago, 1983). Ricoeur Time and Narrative 1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2504969

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342983
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Platt Fred
Abstract: Gerald M. Platt, "Sociology: Origins, Orientations, Crises,"Annals of Scholarship9(1992), 427-436. Platt 427 9 Annals of Scholarship 1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505404

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342993
Date: 5 1, 1981
Author(s): Goekjian Richard T.
Abstract: Bann, ibid., 367. 367
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505462

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342993
Date: 5 1, 1985
Author(s): Sternberg Nancy
Abstract: Meir Sternberg in The Poetics of Biblical Narrative (Bloomington, Ind., 1985), 7-13 Sternberg 7 The Poetics of Biblical Narrative 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505463

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342994
Date: 10 1, 1978
Author(s): Mink John H.
Abstract: L. Mink, "Narrative Form as a Cognitive Instrument," in The Writing of History: Literary Form and Historical Understanding, ed. R. H. Canary and H. Kozicki (Madison, Wisc., 1978), 129- 149. Mink Narrative Form as a Cognitive Instrument 129 The Writing of History: Literary Form and Historical Understanding 1978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505489

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342984
Date: 2 1, 1957
Author(s): Jaspers David
Abstract: Collingwood, "The Philosophy of the Christian Religion," Sept. 29, 1920, Dep 1, 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505516

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342974
Date: 10 1, 1957
Author(s): Nietzsche Wulf
Abstract: Friedrich Nietzsche, The Use and Abuse of History, transl. Adrian Collins (Indianapolis, 1957). Nietzsche The Use and Abuse of History 1957
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505526

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342968
Date: 2 1, 1983
Author(s): LaCapra Dale S.
Abstract: Dominick LaCapra, Rethinking Intellectual History: Texts, Contexts, Language (Ithaca, N. Y., 1983). LaCapra Rethinking Intellectual History: Texts, Contexts, Language 1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505607

Journal Title: Journal of Japanese Studies
Publisher: The Society for Japanese Studies
Issue: i25064644
Date: 7 1, 2006
Author(s): Kono Shion
Abstract: Nakamura Shin'ichirō, Kimura Kenkadō no saron (Tokyo: Shinchōsha, 2000).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25064647

Journal Title: Annual Review of Anthropology
Publisher: Annual Reviews
Issue: i25064938
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Morris Rosalind C.
Abstract: This article considers the legacies of Jacques Derrida in and for Anglo-American sociocultural anthropology. It begins with a survey of Derrida's own engagement with themes that have historically been foundational to the field: (a) the critique of sign theory and, with it, the questions of language and law in Lévi-Straussian structuralism; (b) the question of the unconscious; (c) the critique of the performative and its consequences for the idea of ritual; (d) the rereading of Marcel Mauss's concept of the gift, and of economy more generally; and (e) the analysis of the metaphysical basis of law, in both religious and ostensibly secular formations. It then considers the state of the field at the time when it was being infused with different forms of poststructuralism and explores the competing claims made by these discourses in relation to deconstruction. Finally, after tracing the convergences and divergences between Derridean deconstruction and theory in sociocultural anthropology, it treats two main examples of works produced against and under the influence of Derrida's thought, respectively.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25064960

Journal Title: Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies
Publisher: Harvard-Yenching Institute
Issue: i25066776
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Brashier K. E.
Abstract: Rappaport, Ritual and Religion in the Making of Humanity, p. 394.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25066779

Journal Title: Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies
Publisher: Harvard-Yenching Institute
Issue: i25066852
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Huntington Rania
Abstract: "Yihonglou shi cao xu" [Unrepresented Characters], in Chunzaitang zawen wubian, 4:6.25b-26a.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25066855

Journal Title: Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies
Publisher: Harvard-Yenching Institute
Issue: i25066852
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Kurita Kyoko
Abstract: The Content of the Form, p. 184.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25066858

Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i25069575
Date: 3 1, 2005
Author(s): Wolska Aleksandra
Abstract: Sobelle, 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25069582

Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i25074582
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Sneddon Andrew
Abstract: Concerns about advertising take one of two forms. Some people are worried that advertising threatens autonomous choice. Others are worried not about autonomy but about the values spread by advertising as a powerful institution. I suggest that this bifurcation stems from misunderstanding autonomy. When one turns from autonomous choice to autonomy of persons, or what is often glossed as self-rule, then one has reason to think that advertising poses a moral problem of a sort so far unrecognized. I diagnose this problem using Charles Taylor's work on "strong evaluation". This problem turns out to have political ramifications that have been only dimly recognized in business ethics circles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25074586

Journal Title: The Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i25098007
Date: 5 1, 2008
Author(s): Heisler Martin O.
Abstract: Societies, like individuals, strive to have positive self-concepts. They endow stories of their origin and associate their course through history with ethical principles that attest to who they are and how they want to be seen. Such principles define the society for its members and for the world at large. But all societies must at some time confront evidence of actions undertaken in their name that violate their fundamental principles and conflict with their desired self-image. Following a glance at the basic elements of the politics of history and identity, the author suggests two sources of the tensions between "bad acts" and positive self-concepts. Both relate to shifts in developmental time. First, actions not considered wrong when they were undertaken in the past are inconsistent with current expectation. Second, transsocietal differences in normative frameworks lead to cross-boundary criticisms of behavior in which the critics' societies likely engaged at an earlier time. Accusations or criticisms generally meet with defensive, often hostile responses. Hypocrisy tends to rule in most cases, with little or no normative learning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25098022

Journal Title: Historia Mexicana
Publisher: El Centro de Estudios Históricos de El Colegio de México
Issue: i25139862
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): López Antonio Irigoyen
Abstract: AGNEM, Prot. del notario Juan Bautista Espinosa, ff. 139v.-140v., 19- 11-1674.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25139864

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i25157076
Date: 3 1, 2005
Author(s): Calame Claude
Abstract: 1990, 11-35 et 60-72
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25157079

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i25157122
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Martin Denis-Constant
Abstract: Glissant 1990 : 46
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25157129

Journal Title: Arabica
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i25162277
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Natij Salah
Abstract: Goethe, cité par Pierre Bertaux, « Goethe », Encyclopédia Universalis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25162281

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Political Science / Revue canadienne de science politique
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i25165879
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Libesman Heidi
Abstract: The focus of this article is the theory of integration advanced by Alan Cairns in his book, "Citizens Plus: Aboriginal peoples and the Canadian State". Cairns' theory has had a mixed reception since its publication. Like much scholarship and public policy in the Aboriginal rights field, "Citizens Plus" has attracted strong proponents and opponents. At present "Citizens Plus" remains one of the primary competitors vying for influence in guiding the postcolonial reconfiguration of the relationship between Aboriginal peoples, the Canadian state and civil society on terms of justice that may be perceived as legitimate by both Aboriginal and non-Aboriginal peoples. The prime alternative, as conceived by both Cairns and his critics, is the nation-to-nation constitutional vision of the Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples. The author provides a political theoretical reading of "Citizens Plus". She seeks to disclose the normative and conceptual structure of Cairns' argument and to situate Cairns' theory in the context of debates concerning the future of Aboriginal peoples and the constitution of Canada. This reading foregrounds an alternative interpretation of the relationship between "Citizens Plus" and the constitutional vision of the Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples, which makes it possible to see them as complementary rather than opposed constitutional visions. The author also raises broader questions concerning the reasons for continuing the search, at the heart of Cairns' work, for a post-colonial theory and praxis of normative integration in diverse societies, and the conditions of the possibility of such a theory and praxis. Ultimately the author argues that whether one agrees or disagrees with Cairns' prescription, at a minimum "Citizens Plus" should be understood as raising a fundamental question to which multinational constitutional theory must respond. /// Le présent article a pour objet d'examiner la théorie avancée par Alan Cairns dans son ouvrage, "Citizens Plus: Aboriginal Peoples and the Canadian State". Cette théorie est loin de faire l'unanimité; comme beaucoup d'autres ouvrages ou initiatives dans le domaine des droits autochtones, "Citizens Plus" a ses partisans et ses détracteurs. À l'heure actuelle, "Citizens Plus" demeure l'une des principales approches possibles de la redéfinition postcoloniale des relations entre les peuples autochtones et l'État et la société civile canadiens sur le fondement de conditions justes dont la légitimité est susceptible d'être reconnue autant par les peuples autochtones que par les non-autochtones. La vision de relations de nation à nation, telle qu'exprimée par la Commission royale sur les peuples autochtones, est, selon Cairns ainsi que ses détracteurs, la principale alternative à "Citizens Plus". Dans le présent article, l'auteure interprète "Citizens Plus" dans une optique de théorie politique. Elle cherche à faire ressortir la structure normative et conceptuelle de l'argument de Cairns et à situer la théorie de Cairns dans le contexte des débats concernant l'avenir des peuples autochtones et de la constitution canadienne. L'auteure veut ainsi attirer l'attention sur une autre interprétation possible de la relation entre "Citizens Plus" et la vision de la Commission royale sur les peuples autochtones. Selon cette interprétation, il s'agit de visions complémentaires plutôt que contradictoires. L'auteure soulève également des questions plus générales, concernant les raisons de poursuivre la recherche d'une théorie et d'une praxie d'intégration normative au sein de sociétés empreintes de diversité, ainsi que les conditions de la possibilité d'une telle théorie et d'une telle praxie. Cette recherche est, par ailleurs, au cœur de l'œuvre de Cairns. En dernière analyse, l'auteure soutient que, peu importe que l'on souscrive ou non à ce que Cairns propose, "Citizens Plus" soulève, à tout le moins, une question fondamentale à laquelle la théorie constitutionnelle multinationale doit répondre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25165887

Journal Title: Journal for General Philosophy of Science / Zeitschrift für allgemeine Wissenschaftstheorie
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i25171186
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Buzzoni Marco
Abstract: Hermeneutic and anti-hermeneutic sides in the debate about psychoanalysis are entangled in an epistemological and methodological antinomy, here exemplified by Grünbaum's and Spence's paradigmatic views. Both contain a partial element of truth, which they assert dialectically one against the other (§§ 1 and 2). This antinomy disappers only by reconciling an operationalist approach with man's ability to suspend the effectiveness of the 'laws' applied to him (§ 3). The hermeneutic way in which the technical-operational criterion of truth works in psychoanalysis demands that clinical and extra-clinical testing methods work synergically, through a fruitful self-correcting strategy, grounded on the very psychoanalytic object: the unconscious (§ 4).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25171194

Journal Title: Educational Studies in Mathematics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i25472056
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Ongstad Sigmund
Abstract: The article investigates in the first part critically dyadic and essentialist understanding of signs and utterances in mathematics and mathematics education as opposed to a triadic view. However even Peircean semiotics, giving priority to triadic, dynamic sign may face challenges, such as explaining the sign as a pragmatic act and how signs are related to context. To meet these and other hurdles an explicit communicational, pragmatic and triadic view, found in parts of the works of Bühler, Bakhtin, Habermas, and Halliday, is developed. Two basic principles are combined and established in a theoretical framework. Firstly, whenever uttering, there will exist in any semiotic sign system, dynamic reciprocity and simultaneity between expressing through form, referring to content, and addressing as an act. Secondly, meaning will be created by the dynamics between given and new in utterances and between utterances and contextual genres. The latter principle explains how meaning merge in communication dynamically and create the basis for a discursive understanding of semiosis and hence even learning at large. The second part exemplifies each of the three main aspects and the dynamics of utterance and genre and given and new by excerpts from a textbook in mathematics education. The concept 'positioning', in use for operationalisation, is explained in relation to main principles of the framework. The article ends focusing crucial implications for validation when moving from a dyadic to a triadic understanding of mathematics and mathematics education.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25472067

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25478809
Date: 2 1, 2009
Author(s): Smith Steven G.
Abstract: Steven G. Smith, The Concept of the Spiritual (Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1988), chap. 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25478811

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25478832
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): Kansteiner Wulf
Abstract: Martin Broszat's "Plea for the Historicization of National Socialism," in Reworking the Past: Hitler, the Holocaust, and the Historians' Debate, ed. Peter Baldwin (Boston: Beacon Press, 1990), 77-87.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25478836

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25478832
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): Carbonell Bettina M.
Abstract: Susan Crane's "Memory, Distortion, and History in the Museum," History and Theory, Theme Issue 36 (1997), 44-63.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25478840

Journal Title: The Slavonic and East European Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i25479101
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): Soroka Mykola Iv.
Abstract: Shchodennyk, 2, p. 279 (15 January 1924).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25479104

Journal Title: The French Review
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of French
Issue: i25480351
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Russell Nicolas
Abstract: This paper compares Maurice Halbwachs's theory of collective memory to the most typical articulation of group memory in France before the twentieth century, especially from the late sixteenth century to the end of the eighteenth century. It argues that the twentieth-century notion of collective memory, largely based on Halbwachs's work, differs significantly from earlier articulations of this concept and that these two conceptions are modeled on two different types of personal memory. Finally, it suggests that, given these differences, we should question whether our modern concept of collective memory is a useful tool in analyzing early modern French texts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25480359

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i25484065
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Springs Jason A.
Abstract: Crossley 2004: 31-51
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfn087

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i25484099
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Roberts Tyler
Abstract: Robert Orsi here, who claims that as scholars we must allow our conceptions of ourselves to be "vulnerable to the radically destabilizing possibilities of a genuine encounter with an unfamiliar way of life" (2005: 198).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfp012

Journal Title: Irish University Review
Publisher: Irish University Press
Issue: i25484558
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Booker M. Keith
Abstract: O'Brien, At Swim-Two-Birds, p. 314.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25484569

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i25486317
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Elfenbein Andrew
Abstract: Cognitive psychologists studying the reading process have developed a detailed conceptual vocabulary for describing the microprocesses of reading. Modified for the purposes of literary criticism, this vocabulary provides a framework that has been missing from most literary-critical investigations of the history of literate practice. Such concepts as the production of a coherent memory representation, the limitations of working memory span, the relation between online and offline reading processes, the landscape model of comprehension, and the presence of standards of coherence allow for close attention to general patterns in reading and to the ways that individual readers modify them. The interpretation of Victorian responses to the poetry of Robert Browning provides a case study in the adaptation of cognitive models to the history of reading. Such an adaptation can reveal not only reading strategies used by historical readers but also those fostered by the discipline of literary criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25486327

Journal Title: Medical Anthropology Quarterly
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25487848
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Honkasalo Marja-Liisa
Abstract: In medical anthropological research, the question of suffering has been a topic of salient interest mostly from two theoretical viewpoints: those of endurance and of agency. The concept "suffering" derives its origins from two etymological roots, those of suffering-souffrance-sofferanza and of misery-misère-miseria. According to the first approach, that of "endurance" and founded largely on Judeo-Christian theology, suffering is regarded as an existential experience at the borders of human meaning making. The question then is: how to endure, how to suffer? The latter view, that of "agency," follows the Enlightenment, and later the Marxist view on mundane suffering, misery, and the modern question of how to avoid or diminish it. This article follows the lines of the second approach, but my aim is also to try to build a theoretical bridge between the two. I ask whether agency would be understood as a culturally shared and interpreted modes of enduring, and if so, which conceptual definition of agency applies in this context? I theorize the relationship between suffering and agency using Ernesto de Martino's notion la crisi della presenza. In line with Pierre Bourdieu, I think that in people's lives, there may be sufferings in a plural form, as a variety of sufferings. The article is based on a one-year long fieldwork in Finnish North Karelia.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1548-1387.2009.01037.x

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i25501821
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Emery Jacob
Abstract: Andrey Bely's novel "Petersburg" (one of the high points of Russian literary modernism and a rough analogue to James Joyce's Ulysses) repeatedly claims that parent and child, being of the same flesh and blood, share an ambivalent identity. At the same time, because the novel opens by invoking a major character's genealogical relation to Adam, the book implies that this kin identity is universal and can be applied to the entire human race. This essay analyzes the role of kinship metaphor in "Petersburg", demonstrating that tropes of parent-child identity facilitate the novel's dizzying metaphoric conflation, that they form a kind of metafictional mirror in which the novel probes its own nature as a work of the imagination, and that Bely's theory and practice of metaphor touch on broader philosophical issues of figure and fictionality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25501828

Journal Title: Irish University Review
Publisher: Irish University Press
Issue: i25517119
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Parker Michael
Abstract: George O'Brien, 'Capturing the Lonely Voice', The Irish Times, 12 May 1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25517127

Journal Title: Social Psychology Quarterly
Publisher: American Sociological Association
Issue: i25593909
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Schwartz Barry
Abstract: Burns 1997:34
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25593914

Journal Title: Social Psychology Quarterly
Publisher: American Sociological Association
Issue: i25593919
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Pagis Michal
Abstract: Dumont 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25593927

Journal Title: International Review of the Aesthetics and Sociology of Music
Publisher: Department for Music and Musicology of the Croatian Academy of Sciences and Arts, Croatian Musicological Society, Music Academy of the University of Zagreb
Issue: i25594483
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Pauset Eve Norah
Abstract: Id., p. 20.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25594487

Journal Title: Iranian Studies
Publisher: Taylor and Francis Group
Issue: i25597427
Date: 2 1, 2008
Author(s): Tourage Mahdi
Abstract: Butler, Bodies that Matter, 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25597434

Journal Title: The Musical Times
Publisher: The Musical Times Publications Ltd.
Issue: i25597630
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Cesetti Durval
Abstract: Szymanowski temporarily assuaged his desire by writing the Symphonie-Concertante, Smeterlin goes back to his original request in p.77.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25597638

Journal Title: Dance Chronicle
Publisher: Taylor & Francis Group
Issue: i25598220
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Burt Ramsay
Abstract: Mårten Spångberg also used Verdin's video to create his own reinterpretation of Steve Paxton's Goldberg Variations called Powered by Emotion / After Sade (2003).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/01472520903276800

Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Laurentian University
Issue: i25605168
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Schwimmer Eric
Abstract: Cette analyse générale de l'oeuvre de Victor Turner porte surtout sur ses rapports au structuralisme et à l'anthropologie esthétique. D'autre part, elle présente une oeuvre inédite en français: Chihamba, the White Spirit: A Ritual Drama of the Ndembu. /// This article analyzes in detail Turner's early essay titled Chihamba, the White Spirit: A Ritual Drama of the Ndembu. It is argued that Turner was less fundamentally opposed to French structuralism than is often supposed. Not only has his work made a signal contribution to religious anthropology, but his contribution to aesthetic anthropology should also not be ignored.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25605174

Journal Title: RES: Anthropology and Aesthetics
Publisher: Peabody Museum of Archaeology and Ethnology and the Harvard University Art Museum
Issue: i25608803
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): Hay Jonathan
Abstract: Hay, "Interventions," "The Author Replies" (see note 1).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25608805

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i25610177
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Udoh Fabian E.
Abstract: Luke 12:42-44
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25610185

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i25610177
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Walsh Richard
Abstract: his Handbook of Postmodern Biblical Interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25610189

Journal Title: Administrative Theory & Praxis
Publisher: Public Administration Theory Network
Issue: i25611205
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Yanow Dvora
Abstract: What would policy analysis look like if we were to begin with the assumptions of multivocality and incommensurability, rather than discover them in the midst of analytic research? Much interpretive policy analysis begins and ends by arguing on philosophical grounds with the positivist presuppositions of the field. Reflecting on the organizational and other "realities" of multiple meanings that emerged during my own field work, I raise some of the theoretical and conceptual issues that interpretive analyses engage, concluding that such analysis would have to be conducted under the demands of "passionate humility."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25611211

Journal Title: Estudios de Asia y Africa
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i25614457
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Secci M. Cristina
Abstract: Podna resultar estimulante la lectura del nümero tematico de Archivum Historicum Societatis Iesu dedicado a "The Jesuits and cultural intermediacy in the early modern world", al cuidado de Diogo Ramada Curto, 74, 2005, 147.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25614461

Journal Title: Historical Archaeology
Publisher: Society for Historical Archaeology
Issue: i25616169
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Little Barbara J.
Abstract: Discussions of post-processual archaeology are summarized in order to suggest that historical archaeology is in a particularly good position to answer the post-processual critiques of the "new" archaeology and to create a contextual archaeology that is both historically and anthropologically informed and relevant. The work of four scholars is noted as particularly influential in the development of post-processual approaches.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25616172

Journal Title: Cinema Journal
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Issue: i25619740
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Pierson Michele
Abstract: Branden W. Joseph's analysis of Smith's baroque aesthetic in "Primitives and Flaming Creatures," in Beyond the Dream Syndicate.- Tony Conrad and the Arts After Cage (New York: Zone Books, 2008), 213-278.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25619742

Journal Title: Cultural Anthropology
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25619787
Date: 8 1, 2009
Author(s): Cody Francis
Abstract: This essay examines how activists in rural southern India have sought to reshape the field of political communication by encouraging lower-caste women to submit written, signed petitions to district-level government offices, and so represent themselves to the state. I argue that contradictions between democratic recognition and the will to development that inhere to the political structure of contemporary governance in rural India correspond to tensions within the semiotic structure of signature itself, between constative representation and performative creation. Governmentality and the forms of communication that it requires often rest on the notion that written self-representation constitutes an act of political agency. But the limits of a governmental communicative reason that would conflate written subject and agent become especially clear in postcolonial contexts where the construction of those citizens that would be represented is in fact a product of the very act of representation. It is the narrative of development-as-pedagogy that holds out the promise of a future alignment of communicative frameworks, technologies, and participant roles, allowing for the transparent self-representation of an already-constituted citizen. By tracking the ambivalent experience of one group of women in particular, this account focuses on how the logic of signature as self-representation has served to recontextualize the marginality of petitioners as something within the state's broader field of power.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1548-1360.2009.01035.x

Journal Title: Annals of the Association of American Geographers
Publisher: Association of American Geographers
Issue: i323911
Date: 6 1, 1981
Author(s): Gould Peter
Abstract: In Science, great difficulty is sometimes experienced in giving up hypothesized structures. The inadequacies of Freudian hypotheses are highlighted, and attention is directed to Dasein-analysis, which stays close to the data. This perspective focuses attention upon the phenomenological tradition, and suggests that certain mathematical frameworks in human geography are inappropriate. The adequacy of a priori models is also questioned from a Heideggerian perspective, and more general qualitative algebras are suggested to replace the distorted functional thinking inherited from the physical sciences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2562790

Journal Title: Annals of the Association of American Geographers
Publisher: Association of American Geographers
Issue: i323950
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Tuan Yi-Fu
Abstract: How places are made is at the core of human geography. Overwhelmingly the discipline has emphasized the economic and material forces at work. Neglected is the explicit recognition of the crucial role of language, even though without speech humans cannot even begin to formulate ideas, discuss them, and translate them into action that culminates in a built place. Moreover, words alone, used in an appropriate situation, can have the power to render objects, formerly invisible because unattended, visible, and impart to them a certain character: thus a mere rise on a flat surface becomes something far more-a place that promises to open up to other places-when it is named "Mount Prospect." The different ways by which language contributes toward the making of place may be shown by exploring a wide range of situations and cultural contexts. Included in this paper are the contexts of hunter-gatherers, explorers and pioneers, intimate friendship, literary London, Europe in relation to Asia, and Chinese gardening and landscape art. There is a moral dimension to speech as there is to physical action. Thus warm conversation between friends can make the place itself seem warm; by contrast, malicious speech has the power to destroy a place's reputation and thereby its visibility. In the narrative-descriptive approach, the question of how and why language is effective is implied or informally woven into the presentation, but not explicitly formulated or developed. Ways of making place in different situations-from the naming of objects by pioneers, to informal conversation in any home, to the impact of written texts-are highlighted and constitute the paper's principal purpose, rather than causal explanations, which must vary with each type of linguistic behavior and each situation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2563430

Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i25650854
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Roberts John
Abstract: Janet A. Kaplan, 'Flirtations with Evidence', Art in America, October 2004, pp. 134-8, 169-70.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25650861

Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i25654931
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Fortin Jutta
Abstract: Geoffrey Gorer, 'The Pornography of Death', in Death, Grief and Mourning in Contempo- rary Britain (London: Cresset Press, 1965), pp. 192-99.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25654937

Journal Title: Rhetoric Review
Publisher: Taylor & Francis Group
Issue: i25655978
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Brauer David
Abstract: The attentions given to textual production in composition scholarship have led to a neglect of the dynamics of textual reception. Renewed acquaintance with the discipline of hermeneutics will provide scholars and instructors with a more comprehensive understanding of the relationship between interpretive processes and rhetorical strategies. Building on the work of Phelps, Mailloux, and Crusius, this article revisits Gadamer and Ricoeur, two of the more prominent scholars of modern hermeneutics, for the purpose of applying their principles to learning objectives and class assignments in college-level writing courses.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/07350190903415198

Journal Title: Proceedings of the Annual Meeting (American Society of International Law)
Publisher: The American Society of International Law
Issue: i25658878
Date: 4 8, 1995
Author(s): Ruggie John Gerard
Abstract: William C. Wohlforth, Realism and the End of the Cold War, Winter 1994/1995, 91-129.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25658896

Journal Title: Estudios Atacameños
Publisher: Universidad Católica del Norte, Instituto de Investigaciones Arqueológicas y Museo
Issue: i25671167
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): R. Pedro Mege
Abstract: Revista Pampa, septiembre de 1949
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25671175

Journal Title: Archiv für Musikwissenschaft
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i25702869
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): UTZ CHRISTIAN
Abstract: Übersichtsdarstellungen zu diesen Fragen geben u. a. die Beiträge Gunter Kreutz, Melodiewahr- nehmung: Funktionen von Arbeitsgeddähtnis und Aufinerksamkeit und Christoph Louven, Reiz- und wissensgeleitete harmonische Informationsverarbeitung, in: Musikpsychologie (Handbuch der syste- matischen Musikwissenschaft, 3), hg. von Helga de la Motte Haber und Gunther Rötter, Laaber 2005, S. 185-207 bzw. 208-230.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25702872

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25703051
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Zapata Florencia
Abstract: Greenwood, 1993: 115
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703063

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25703087
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Chartier Roger
Abstract: «Cam- bio de experiencia y cambio de metodo. Un apunte historico-antropologico*, en Reinhart Koselleck, Los es- tratos del tiempo: estudios sobre la historia, Barcelona, Buenos Aires y Mexico, Ediciones Paidos, 2001, ps. 43-92
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703098

Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i25703529
Date: 7 1, 2010
Author(s): de Looze Laurence
Abstract: Vinsauf's Poetria Nova.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703531

Journal Title: Journal of Qur'anic Studies
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Issue: i25728159
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): ‮کامبانيني‬ ‮ماسيمو‬
Abstract: The aim of the present article is to investigate how the passages of the Holy Text regarding natural sciences or the cosmological order of the universe can be read from a hermeneutical viewpoint, in a philosophical rather than a historical, grammatical or stylistic sense; the debated problems of literary and artistic character, and the relationship between Qur'an and science per se, are not involved here. If we assume as a working hypothesis the Gadamerian perspective that 'being, as far as we can understand it, is language', we can accept that the being of God and of the universe are disclosed in Qur'anic language and that the Qur'an becomes the framework of the aletheia (in the Heideggerian sense) of science. This paper utilises the above-mentioned epistemological and hermeneutical key in order to make a first attempt to explore the possibility of a philosophical analysis of the question of science in the Qur'an, and concludes that, although it can sound highly paradoxical, the attitudes of total agreement, partial agreement or no agreement between Qur'an and science are not mutually exclusive, but rather work in parallel at different linguistic levels. ‮الهدف من هذه الدراسة هو بحث کيف يمکن فهم الآيات القرآنية المتعلقة بالعلوم الطبيعية أو النظام الکوني من وجهة نظر منهج تفسيري من ناحية فلسفية لا تاريخية أو نحوية أو بلاغية. لن يتم هنا مناقشة قضايا أدبية أو فنية أو العلاقة بين القرآن والعلم في هذا البحث. إذا افترضنا أن وجهة نظر جادامير (remadaG)، ‮ وهي أن " الوجود، کما نفهمه، هو اللغة "، تعتبر نظرية قابلة للتطبيق، يمکن أن نقبل أن وجود الله والکون يبين من خلال اللغة القرآنية وأن القرآن يصبح إطار الوصول للحقيقة، طبقاً لفهم هيدجر (reggedieH). ‮إن هذا البحث يستخدم علم الحد والمنهج التفسيري من أجل القيام بأول محاولة لاستکشاف إمکانية تحليل فلسفي لقضية العلم في القرآن. وقد انتهى هذا البحث إلى أن التوافق بين القرآن والعلم تاما أو جزئيا أوعدم التوافق لا يعتبر أمرا قاطعا من الجهتين لکنه يعمل على درجات لغوية مختلفة متوازنة.‬
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25728164

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i25759142
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Grossetti Michel
Abstract: Gleick, 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25759144

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i25759932
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Thomas Dublé Eduardo
Abstract: Usigli 22
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25759942

Journal Title: Social Forces
Publisher: University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i344318
Date: 6 1, 1973
Author(s): Williame Herman
Abstract: This is the translation of a paper originally presented, under the title "Lecture phénoméno- logique de l'oeuvre de Durkheim," at the Ninth World Congress of Sociology, Uppsala, 1978 (R.C. 6: History of Sociology: Groupe d'etudes Durkheimiennes) Lecture phénoménologique de l'oeuvre de Durkheim Ninth World Congress of Sociology, Uppsala 1978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2577975

Journal Title: Samuel Beckett Today / Aujourd'hui
Publisher: Rodopi
Issue: i25781274
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Abbott H. Porter
Abstract: Beckett's aggressiveness in crossing generic lines paradoxically accompanied a keen sensitivity to genre and medium differences that often constrained his writing. My argument here is that this combination of abandon and respect was founded in a recognition not just of formal differences in art but of differences in the ways we think. In the wake of groundbreaking work by Jerry Fodor and Howard Gardner, there has been a great deal of research advancing (and qualifying) a modular conception of how the mind evolved and how it continues to work in modern humans. This work puts new light on both the formal differences between mimesis and diegesis, and on Beckett's approach to these two different ways of rendering narrative. Particularly it makes clear why Beckett should have so radically subordinated character and action to staged diegesis in his later work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25781285

Journal Title: Samuel Beckett Today / Aujourd'hui
Publisher: Rodopi
Issue: i25781402
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Oppenheim Lois
Abstract: Beckett's "Three Dialogues with Georges Duthuit" poses two distinct difficulties for the reader: the revelation of artistic process or creative energy and the resistance to representation with its implication of objectification. The first may be defined in terms of a three-stage operation resulting in a depiction of sublimation or creative force. Without recourse to psychohistory, one may explore the second in terms of the paradoxical obsession with evocative memory evident throughout Beckett's work. Of this, a disturbance in object representation, understood in the psychoanalytic sense, may be the source.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25781421

Journal Title: Samuel Beckett Today / Aujourd'hui
Publisher: Rodopi
Issue: i25781428
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Oppenheim Lois
Abstract: Beckett's Three Dialogues poses two distinct difficulties for the reader: the revelation of artistic process or creative energy and the resistance to representation with its implication of objectification. The first may be defined in terms of a three-stage operation resulting in a depiction of sublimation or creative force. Without recourse to psychohistory, one may explore the second in terms of the paradoxical obsession with evocative memory evident throughout Beckett's work. Of this, a disturbance in object representation, understood in the Psychoanalytic sense, may be the source.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25781436

Journal Title: Samuel Beckett Today / Aujourd'hui
Publisher: Rodopi
Issue: i25781496
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Lüscher-Morata Diane
Abstract: This article reflects on the question of the disappearance of the individual subject of experience in Beckett's writing, and its gradual replacement by an anonymous subject. After The Unnamable, the voice becomes increasingly ambiguous or plural. It can no longer be ascribed to any distinct individual. In the light of Paul Ricœur's analysis of narrative identity, I intend to show how Beckett's work gradually goes, through the notion of alterity, beyond the problematic of subjectivity. By suspending the question who, the Beckettian text appears to be more and more organized by a missing presence, and moves toward a gradual reinforcement of the notion of past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25781521

Journal Title: Japan Review
Publisher: International Research Center for Japanese Studies
Issue: i25791338
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Dalissier Michel
Abstract: This paper is the second part of a general study on the relationship between Nishida and Chinese philosophy. In the first, I explored the extent to which Nishida's philosophy was influenced, directly and indirectly, explicitly and implicitly, historically and conceptually, by materials coming from the intellectual horizon of Chinese thought. I concentrate here on Nishida's own position toward what he understood by "Chinese philosophy." Is this philosophy, so suggestive for Nishida, promoted to a central place in his work or not, and if so, in what sense might we take this idea of "centrality" as specifically Chinese? In setting forth several archetypes of Chinese thought present in Nishida's philosophy, the focus of this article falls on the methodological, logical and metaphysical contrasts we can identify between the Japanese philosopher and Chinese philosophy as his underground intellectual sources. 本稿は、筆者による西田幾多郎と中国哲学との関係を考察した研究論文の続編にあたる。前編の “Nishida Kitarō and Chinese Philosophy”は、西田哲学がどれだけの直接的もしくは間接的、明示的もしくは暗示的、歴史的もしくは概念的な影響を中国思想の知的土壊を基盤とする史料や人物から受けたかを考究したものである。続編である本稿では、西田が理解するところの中国哲学に対する西田自身の姿勢に焦点を絞る。この中国哲学なるものが西田の著作のなかで中心的な位置を占めているのかどうか、そうであるとするならば、この「中心」なる慨念を我々はどう理解すれば良いのか。本稿では、西田哲学に現れる中国思想の複数の原型を提示するとともに、西田という日本の哲学者と彼の知的背景としての中国哲学との間に認識できる、方法論的、論理的、形而上学的な対照に光を当てるものである。
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25791345

Journal Title: Journal of World Prehistory
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i25801252
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Watkins Trevor
Abstract: Asouti 2006
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25801256

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Ethnologie
Publisher: Dietrich Reimer Verlag
Issue: i25842884
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Scheuch Erwin K.
Abstract: Leggewie 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25842888

Journal Title: The Economic History Review
Publisher: Titus Wilson and Son Ltd.
Issue: i324319
Date: 8 1, 1981
Author(s): Vico François
Abstract: Stern, ed. The varieties of history, p. 32 32
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2596249

Journal Title: Environmental Philosophy
Publisher: Philosophy Documentation Center
Issue: e26167934
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Scharper Stephen B.
Abstract: See See Richard Peet and Micahel Watts, eds. Liberation Ecologies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26167941

Journal Title: Environmental Philosophy
Publisher: Philosophy Documentation Center
Issue: e26168024
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Treanor Brian
Abstract: Insufficiently radical environmentalism is inadequate to the problems that confront us; but overly radical environmentalism risks alienating people with whom, in a democracy, we must find common cause. Building on Paul Ricoeur's work, which shows how group identity is constituted by the tension between ideology and utopia, this essay asks just how radical effective environmentalism should be. Two "case studies" of environmental agenda—that of Michael Schellenberger and Ted Nordhaus, and that of David Brower—serve to frame the important issues of cooperation and confrontation. The essay concludes that environmentalism must lead with its utopian aspirations rather than its willingness to compromise.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26168028

Journal Title: Recherches de théologie et philosophie médiévales
Publisher: PEETERS
Issue: i26172285
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Sère Bénédicte
Abstract: P. RlCŒUR, Soi-même comme un autre, Paris 1990, p. 43: «Le concept de personne serait un concept primitif, dans la mesure où on ne saurait remonter au-delà de lui».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26172290

Journal Title: Recherches de théologie ancienne et médiévale
Publisher: ABBAYE DU MONT CÉSAR
Issue: i26188535
Date: 12 1, 1979
Author(s): Smalley B.
Abstract: G. Olsen, The Idea of the «Ecclesia Primitiva» in the Writings of the Twelflh-Cenlury Canonists, in Traditio 25 (1969) 61-86; B. Smalley, Ecclesiastical Attitudes to Novelty c. 1100-c. 1250, in Studies in Church History, op. cit., η. 32, 113-133.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26188539

Journal Title: Recherches de théologie ancienne et médiévale
Publisher: ABBAYE DU MONT CÉSAR
Issue: i26189080
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Laird Martin S.
Abstract: Conf. 10,11 (p. 138).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26189087

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: e26193081
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Rosoux Valérie
Abstract: Twelve years after the genocide, nothing has been forgotten in Rwanda. The country resembles a multiplicity of experiences, words and silences. The aim of the article is to reflect on the representations – or absence of representations – of the past. The approach is based on the ambivalence of any reference to the past. It is not a question of making a judgement in the abstract about the more or less legitimate character of the attitudes observed, but to understand the dynamics at work. The analysis is divided into three parts. The first part recalls the specific aspects of the case under study. The second examines the silences that weigh upon Rwandan society. The third notes the main accounts of the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26193085

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: e26193081
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Gensburger Sarah
Abstract: This article returns to research material initially gathered and used for an oral history project. Adopting a sociology of memory perspective, it analyses why and how the former internees at the annex camps of Drancy in Paris only rarely gave accounts of their internment to their families or in public. Following upon the work of Maurice Halbwachs, it studies the role of ties to groups and how they evolve over time in the expression of memories by the individuals concerned.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26193086

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: e26196983
Date: 1 1, 2017
Author(s): DA COSTA ANTÓNIO MARTINS
Abstract: The aim of this paper is to analyse some questions proposed by the debate on the issue of modernity and post-modernity in the context of the philosophy of Leonardo Coimbra, from the reflection on these issues made by Jürgen Habermas in the work The Philosophical Discourse of Modernity. Thus, the critique to modern reason, the reflection on the metaphysics, the issues about the relationship between reason and faith, the religious phenomenon, the process of secularization, are our starting point for the questioning and the philosophical understanding that postmodernity makes of these problems The inauguration of this new rationality allows a new questioning about the reason and the world, manifesting the sublime character of its nature, allowing a new reflection, a critique of self-sufficient and self-reflexive reason and recovering another discursive and cooperative form of reason.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26196999

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: Belin
Issue: e26197854
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): Lazarus Jeanne
Abstract: Public financial education is an emerging theme in international public policy, presented by its promoters as a way of protecting citizens faced with the liberalization of financial markets, which shifts risk from the State and collective actors to individuals. This article will examine its development in France, and its overlap with the transformation of social work. We will first describe the social space of financial education, which brings together an unexpected coalition of representatives from financial institutions and social service and aid organizations. We will then go on to focus on one of this space’s central actors, Finances et Pedagogie(an association created by the bankCaisses d’Épargne), analyzing its partnerships with associations and social services.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26197860

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26201706
Date: 9 1, 1998
Author(s): Noiriel Gérard
Abstract: C'est en vertu de cette logique que Ph. Raynaud - ignorant délibérément toutes les pages que j'ai consacrées à l'explicitation de ma problématique - peut présenter mes recherches empiriques sur l'histoire du droit d'asile comme une critique «idéologique» de la «démocratie», inspirée par la philosophie de Foucault (péché capital pour les tenants du libéralisme); voir Ph. Raynaud, «Heurs et malheurs du citoyen», Le Débat, 75, mai-août 1993, pp. 124-125. Pour une discussion plus approfondie sur ce point, voir la préface de mon livre, G. Noiriel, Réfugiés et sans-papiers. La République face au droit d'asile, Paris, Hachette-Pluriel, 1998 (rééd. en poche de la Tyrannie du national. Le droit d'asile en Europe (1793-1993), Paris, Calmann-Lévy, 1991).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26201716

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26201705
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Desrosières Alain
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Temps et Récit, Paris, Éd. du Seuil, 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26201769

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26201705
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Noiriel Gérard
Abstract: Alban Bensa, Chroniques Kanak. L'ethnologie en marche, Paris, Ethnie-Documents, n° 18-19,1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26201774

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202740
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Ponsard Nathalie
Abstract: Dans mon travail, j'ai distingué les fonctions utilitaires (ordinaires et extraordinaires) et les fonctions de divertissement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202747

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202740
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Vidal Laurent
Abstract: C. Dauphin, A. Farge (éd.), Séduction et sociétés: approches historiques, Paris, EHESS-Seuil, 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202748

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202767
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Offenstadt Nicolas
Abstract: Voir le texte de l'article : « Uses and Abuses of Historical Analogies : Not Munich but Greece », Annals of International Studies, Genève, 1970, pp. 224-232.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202776

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202872
Date: 3 1, 2004
Author(s): Vidal Laurent
Abstract: Benedict Anderson, Imagined Communities, London, Verso, 1991.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202880

Journal Title: PAJ: A Journal of Performance and Art
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: e26206385
Date: 5 1, 2012
Author(s): Rodney Lee
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Time and Narrative, Vol. 1, trans. Kathleen McLaughlin and David Pellauer (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1984), 52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26206389

Journal Title: History of Political Thought
Publisher: Imprint Academic
Issue: i26215872
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): Rengger N.J.
Abstract: Cited in Maurice Cranston, John Locke: A Biography (Oxford, 1985), p. 244.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26215878

Journal Title: History of Political Thought
Publisher: Imprint Academic
Issue: i26219815
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Swaine Lucas A.
Abstract: Sorel, Montesquieu, p. 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26219821

Journal Title: History of Political Thought
Publisher: Imprint Academic
Issue: i26219891
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Chowers Eyal
Abstract: Zygmunt Bauman, Liquid Modernity (Cambridge, 2000), p. 178. Agnes Heller makes a similar point in her 'Where are We at Home?', pp. 17-18.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26219896

Journal Title: Lares
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: e26230922
Date: 8 1, 2008
Abstract: A.M. Cirese, Simulazione informatica e pensiero ‘altro’, in Il sapere dell’antropologia. Pensare, comprendere, descrivere l’Altro, a cura di U. Fabietti, Milano, Mursia, 1993, pp. 155-170.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26230926

Journal Title: Lares
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: e26231407
Date: 8 1, 2012
Author(s): Zingari Valentina Lapiccirella
Abstract: Through the experience of some ethnographic fields between France and Italy, Tuscany and the Alps, this paper reflects upon the potential of oral history and biography both as cognitive sources and as heritage assets contributing to the processes of improving the cultural values. In particular, we try to clarify the relationship between regional research projects, exhibitions and archiving processes of the sources of ethnographic research. This in relation to the development of new technologies including the web and to the social and cognitive potential use of oral sources in the capitalization and sharing of research materials with cultural communities and within their possible uses for the scientific community. What can become an anthropological interview once recorded, stored and catalogued? What is the potential of these audio recordings and their written versions within projects of participatory museography? How can the web offer new opportunities to those sources by including them in a global system of dialogue between archives? This view changes the responsibilities and possibilities of the researcher producer of sources and collector of voices, engaging him in a quite different consideration of his work to the benefit of societal projects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26231419

Journal Title: Lares
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: e26233631
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): Riccardo Gaetano
Abstract: Cfr. Bergson, op. cit., p. 58.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26233634

Journal Title: Nueva Revista de Filología Hispánica
Publisher: CENTRO DE ESTUDIOS LINGÜÍSTICOS Y LITERARIOS EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO
Issue: e26254863
Date: 12 1, 2017
Author(s): Ayala Cossette Galindo
Abstract: This paper offers a study of fray Luis de León's Spanish translation of the Song of songsas well as of hisComentarioon the same text. It aims to shed light on the mystic-erotic paradigm, which underlies this work, as this paradigm is conceived in both the Judeo-Christian and the Greco-Roman traditions. In addition, attention is paid to questions concerning the interpretation and reception of the biblical text, as outlined in the hermeneutic work of Paul Ricoeur.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26254867

Journal Title: Ecology and Society
Publisher: Resilience Alliance
Issue: e26267950
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Lambin Xavier
Abstract: The benefits of increasing the contribution of the social sciences in the fields of environmental and conservation science disciplines are increasingly recognized. However, integration between the social and natural sciences has been limited, in part because of the barrier caused by major philosophical differences in the perspectives between these research areas. This paper aims to contribute to more effective interdisciplinary integration by explaining some of the philosophical views underpinning social research and how these views influence research methods and outcomes. We use a project investigating the motivation of volunteers working in an adaptive co-management project to eradicate American Mink from the Cairngorms National Park in Scotland as a case study to illustrate the impact of philosophical perspectives on research. Consideration of different perspectives promoted explicit reflection of the contributing researcher’s assumptions, and the implications of his or her perspectives on the outcomes of the research. We suggest a framework to assist conservation research projects by: (1) assisting formulation of research questions; (2) focusing dialogue between managers and researchers, making underlying worldviews explicit; and (3) helping researchers and managers improve longer-term strategies by helping identify overall goals and objectives and by identifying immediate research needs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26268007

Journal Title: Modern Fiction Studies
Publisher: THE PURDUE UNIVERSITY DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
Issue: i26280028
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Brown Suzanne Hunter
Abstract: "Metacommentary," PMLA, 86 (January 1971), 12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26281276

Journal Title: L'Esprit Créateur
Publisher: L'ESPRIT CREATEUR, Inc.
Issue: i26283874
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): Bauschatz Cathleen M.
Abstract: Montaigne, Œuvres Complètes, ed. Thibaudet & Rat (Paris: Gallimard, 1962), 1, xxvi. 150-51. a.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26283878

Journal Title: L'Esprit Créateur
Publisher: L'ESPRIT CREATEUR, Inc.
Issue: i26283924
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Logan Marie-Rose
Abstract: The notion of mathesis is recurrent in Barthes (see Barthes par Barthes, p. 122). In that respect, the terms mathematics and mathesis should be understood in their literal Greek acceptation, as knowledge, and the process of knowledge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26283931

Journal Title: Organization Science
Publisher: Institute of Management Sciences
Issue: i345199
Date: 1 1, 1986
Author(s): White Joanne
Abstract: Olsen 1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2634968

Journal Title: Organization Science
Publisher: Institute for Operations Research and the Management Sciences
Issue: i345219
Date: 8 1, 1974
Author(s): Wittgenstein Ramkrishnan V.
Abstract: Knowledge-intensive firms are composed of multiple communities with specialized expertise, and are often characterized by lateral rather than hierarchical organizational forms. We argue that producing knowledge to create innovative products and processes in such firms requires the ability to make strong perspectives within a community, as well as the ability to take the perspective of another into account. We present models of language, communication and cognition that can assist in the design of electronic communication systems for perspective making and perspective taking. By appreciating how communication is both like a language game played in a local community and also like a transmission of messages through a conduit, and by appreciating how cognition includes a capacity to narrativize our experience as well as a capacity to process information, we identify some guidelines for designing electronic communication systems to support knowledge work. The communication systems we propose emphasize that narratives can help construct strong perspectives within a community of knowing, and that reflecting upon and representing that perspective can create boundary objects which allow for perspective taking between communities. We conclude by describing our vision of an idealized knowledge intensive firm with a strong culture of perspective making and perspective taking, and by identifying some elements of the electronic communication systems we would expect to see in such a firm.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2634993

Journal Title: Journal of Southern African Studies
Publisher: Carfax Publishing, Taylor and Francis Ltd.
Issue: i324979
Date: 6 1, 1991
Author(s): Dube David
Abstract: Osborne, Modernity, p. 37.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2637603

Journal Title: The Historical Journal
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i325015
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Collinson Tom
Abstract: Thomas Brooks, 'Epistle to the saints', Heaven on earth, n.p
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2639939

Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: International Phenomenological Society
Issue: i345615
Date: 6 1, 1958
Author(s): Wittgenstein Daniel
Abstract: Melden, 1961, p. 208 208
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2653677

Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i325622
Date: 6 1, 2001
Author(s): Zeitlyn David
Abstract: Some systems of divination are used to select particular sections of text, which are typically arcane and erudite, in which lies the answer to the particular, pressing problems of the client. Celebrated examples of such systems are the Chinese I Ching and the Yoruba Ifa. Werbner's work on Kalanga and Tswapong divination provides a case-study of the detailed praxis in such systems. Diviners have a multiple role when a divination technique selects a text. At each consultation they must satisfy themselves, their client, and their audience that they have followed the correct procedures to select the text. A second stage follows. The client has a particular question and the selected text was not composed as a specific answer to it. Interpretation is required to satisfy the client that the question has been answered. The diviner thus plays the role of indigenous critic, a role both similar to and different from that of literary critics in the Western tradition. The concept of `dialogic' used by Barber in her analysis of Yoruba praise poetry is taken to illustrate similarities and differences between diviner and critic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2661220

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345910
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Rosen William H.
Abstract: Stanley Rosen, The Ancients and the Moderns: Rethinking Modernity (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1989). Rosen The Ancients and the Moderns: Rethinking Modernity 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2677987

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345905
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): Hall Anne
Abstract: Sewell, "Historical Events as Structural Transformations," 852 852
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2678014

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345907
Date: 2 1, 1969
Author(s): Althusser Nicole
Abstract: Althusser's formula: "Human societies secrete ideology as an element or atmosphere nec- essary for breathing and existence" (L. Althusser, For Marx [London: Verso, 1969], 232). Althusser Human societies secrete ideology as an element or atmosphere necessary for breathing and existence 232 For Marx 1969
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2678068

Journal Title: International Organization
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: i346132
Date: 4 1, 1971
Author(s): Sartre Richard K.
Abstract: Bourdieu, Outline, p. 170. 170
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2706440

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Journal of the History of Ideas, Inc.
Issue: i346279
Date: 6 1, 1977
Author(s): Taplin Margaret
Abstract: Frankel's Commentary on Agamemnon, 65.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2709287

Journal Title: Eighteenth-Century Studies
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i327842
Date: 4 1, 1973
Author(s): Defoe Robert
Abstract: Defoe, Swift, Smollett, Sterne, and Johnson all did "hack" work. J. H. Plumb, The Commercialisation of Leisure in Eighteenth-Century England. The Stenton Lecture 1972 (Reading: Univ. of Reading Press, 1973). Defoe hack The Commercialisation of Leisure in Eighteenth-Century England. The Stenton Lecture 1972 1973
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2739362

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327960
Date: 10 1, 1983
Author(s): Ulin Robert C.
Abstract: The argument of Evans-Pritchard's classic The Nuer has been subject to conflicting interpretations. We examine these interpretations and then present a reading of the work that treats it as a whole. A key conclusion is that Evans-Pritchard distinguishes among three aspects of the "systems" he describes: (1) logical possibilities immanent in all forms of action, (2) cultural or local idioms in terms of which action is formulated and expressed, and (3) conditions and patterns of action. With this framework he develops, through an examination of the way interests in cattle are translated into political practices, an analysis in which the central theoretical problem is the relationship of structure to human agency. Our reading raises questions about the utility of standard classifications of theoretical orientations in social and cultural anthropology, particularly of the category of structural-functionalism, of which The Nuer is taken to be a central text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2742453

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327968
Date: 4 1, 1985
Author(s): Webster Steven
Abstract: Using the hermeneutical theory of Paul Ricoeur, it is possible to discern symbolic dimensions in cultural anthropology. Symbols, here, are dominant images in anthropologists' texts, creatively posited by inquirers, that, most importantly, possess a surplus of meaning. A symbol's fullest surplus of meaning is a prereflexive and comprehensive "understanding" (Verstehen) that may encompass a scholar's attempts at "explanation" (Erklaren). Examples of this symbolic dimension are the "understandings" that lie implicit in two elaborate anthropological systems: Levi-Strauss's structuralism and Harris's cultural materialism. Amid their commitments to anthropological "science" and "explanation," the works of each disclose a distinctive Verstehen. For Levi-Strauss, this "understanding" is nurtured by his image "world of reciprocity." For Harris, it is carried by the image "nature." This "understanding" has two major functions. On the level of the intellectual coherence of their texts, it gives unity to their intercultural interpretations of other societies and to their intracultural interpretations of their own traditions. On a moral level, it includes modes of being-in-the-world that Levi-Strauss and Harris prefer and ocasionally press upon their readers. Discernment of symbolic dimensions of "understanding" in anthropologists' texts may be an initial step toward reflection on the matrices out of which diverse explanations are presented in anthropological literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2743131

Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Human Sciences Press
Issue: i27505519
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): Church Nathan
Abstract: Lucy Bregman's approach to Schreber's "Memoirs" is scrutinized and found to be based on a number of fallacious and contradictory assumptions that call her interpretation of the book as personal religious myth into question. A social constructionist approach to mythology maintained by Berger and Luckmann is advanced, suggesting that at best Schreber's work qualifies as a quasi-mythical attempt to explain the source of his personal sociopsychic suffering. The family and interpersonal dynamics of Schreber's quasi-myth are investigated. Similarities to other cases of psychotic quasi-myths are noted and a general relationship between oppressive socialization and psychotic communications is advanced, as well as a specific alternative interpretation of Schreber's work to that proposed by Bregman.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27505529

Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Human Sciences Press
Issue: i27510634
Date: 7 1, 1991
Author(s): Manuel Gerdenio M.
Abstract: While individual and group psychotherapy are often referred to as forms of secular confession, the relationship of early religious confessional practices to the psychology of contemporary helping group processes needs further exploration. An examination of the theology and form of the Catholic rites of reconciliation indicates that their psychology and structure clearly parallel many of the healing processes at work in group psychotherapy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27510640

Journal Title: Labour History
Publisher: Australian Society for the Study of Labour History
Issue: i27516030
Date: 5 1, 2005
Author(s): Murphy John
Abstract: The recollections of elderly men of work in a time of full employment are the focus of this paper. It is based on in-depth qualitative interviews with men who were young parents in the mid-1950s. Drawing on literature about masculinity, post-war Fordism and the constitution of self-identity through narrative, it explores their themes of how central security was to their identity as providers, and examines what satisfactions they got from working. The narrative bookends of their experience are strong memories of their parents in the Depression, and acute awareness of the contemporary insecurity of their children and grandchildren.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27516045

Journal Title: Presidential Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Center for the Study of the Presidency
Issue: i27551498
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): Dorsey Leroy G.
Abstract: This essay reconceptualizes President Theodore Roosevelt's "anti-trust" image within a "pro-business" framework. Critics who have measured Roosevelt's success by the number of anti-trust suits he brought or won miss the essentially rhetorical purposes of his involvement with corporate America. Specifically, this essay contends that his primary emphasis involved the promotion of the proper attitude in corporate leaders and the general public regarding the role of big business in American society. This Roosevelt did in two ways. First, he argued metaphorically for the necessity of corporations and the restraint of muckraking journalists. Second, along with employing metaphors to chastise big business, Roosevelt assumed the role of moral guardian and preached to corporate leaders to adhere to an ethical standard in business. For Roosevelt, corporate America could be effectively regulated only by its leaders' sense of morality and spirit of public service.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27551508

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27642764
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Casey Edward
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27642768

Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i27643303
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Jackson Robert
Abstract: Jackson (forthcoming)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27643307

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i27644419
Date: 2 1, 2007
Author(s): Honig Bonnie
Abstract: Honig 2001b
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27644422

Journal Title: International Journal for Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27646209
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): DiCenso James
Abstract: Freud (1955a, p. 98).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27646213

Journal Title: Slavic Review
Publisher: American Association for the Advancement of Slavic Studies
Issue: i27652935
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): Kliger Ilya
Abstract: O literaturnom geroe (Leningrad, 1979), 129–43.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27652939

Journal Title: Revista de Letras
Publisher: Universidade Estadual Paulista
Issue: i27666303
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): Lucas Fábio
Abstract: Cf. Arnold Rothe (ROTHE 12, p. 11)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27666314

Journal Title: Revista de Letras
Publisher: Universidade Estadual Paulista
Issue: i27666817
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Andrade Antonio
Abstract: Cf. MOTTA, 2006, p. 155.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27666822

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i27667495
Date: 8 1, 2008
Author(s): Miklavcic Alessandra
Abstract: In this article, I look at the ways in which contested memories, imagined communities, and social ressentiment are embraced and filtered by Slovenian and Italian youth as postmemory and transformed into symbolic weapons that exclude, make demands, or simply provoke. Drawing on fieldwork conducted in the Italo—Slovenian border area of Trieste, I analyze two settings in which these symbols are used: a soccer match between Slovenia and Italy played in the summer of 2002 at which a mysterious banner provoked diplomatic tensions and the everyday graffiti war waged on the walls of the city of Trieste.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27667502

Journal Title: The American Sociologist
Publisher: Transaction Periodicals Consortium
Issue: i27698778
Date: 10 1, 1996
Author(s): Caulfield Jon
Abstract: Visual sociology has two main interests: picture-making by researchers (or their subjects) in the course of sociological fieldwork, and pictures made by social actors in the context of everyday life. Focusing on the latter interest and based in three social aspects of images—that they are produced in general societal settings and specific institutional settings, and are a kind of discursive practice—three approaches to the sociology of visual material are illustrated.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27698784

Journal Title: The German Quarterly
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services, Inc.
Issue: i27701109
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): McKnight Phil
Abstract: With the portrayal of local resentment towards the massive influx of Silesian refugees after WWII in the GDR in his novel Landnahme, Christoph Hein expands the literary representation of history he began earlier in Horns Ende, again using the fictional small town of Guldenberg as paradigmatic for the GDR, extended here over time to include unified Germany. Bernhard Haber's epic, but unscrupulous struggle to overcome the will of his neighbors for him to fail provides the backdrop for Hein's depiction of how the past unavoidably writes the future and how the collective process of socialization shapes meanings and values. Using five narrators, Hein applies his earlier concept of social autobiography to trace historical developments in the acquired collective attitudes of Germans towards Gypsies, Poles, the handicapped, and African and Vietnamese workers left behind after unification, all of whom were subjected to the same abusive language and discrimination directed at the refugees.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27701116

Journal Title: Journal of Medical Ethics
Publisher: BMJ Publishing Group
Issue: i27719254
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Leget C.
Abstract: Beginning with an exemplary case study, this paper diagnoses and analyses some important strategies of evasion and factors of hindrance that are met in the teaching of medical ethics to undergraduate medical students. Some of these inhibitions are inherent to ethical theories; others are connected with the nature of medicine or cultural trends. It is argued that in order to avoid an attitude of evasion in medical ethics teaching, a philosophical theory of emotions is needed that is able to clarify on a conceptual level the ethical importance of emotions. An approach is proposed with the help of the emotion theory Martha Nussbaum works out in her book Upheavals of thought. The paper ends with some practical recommendations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27719270

Journal Title: Foro Internacional
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i27739107
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): Santiso Javier
Abstract: Véase Paul Ricoeur, " Sanction, réhabilitation, pardon ", en Ricoeur, Le juste, Paris, Esprit Editions, 1995, pp. 193-208.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27739114

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27753054
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Vilanova Mercedes
Abstract: Yara Dulce Bandeira Ataide, Decifra-me ou devoro-te, Edicoes Loyola, 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27753057

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27753135
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Cuesta Josefina
Abstract: P. Ricœur, La mémoire, op. cit, p. 207.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27753139

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27753153
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Pons Alex Matas
Abstract: P. Ricoeur, Historia y narratividad, Barcelona, Paidós, 1999, p. 153.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27753161

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27753167
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Conill Montserrat
Abstract: En las referencias que aparecen a continuación, cuando no figura el lugar de la edieión signifiea que se trata de Paris.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27753177

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27753185
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Epele María
Abstract: Connors, M., "Stories of Pain and the Problem of AIDS Prevention: Injecting Drug Withdrawal and its Effect on Pisk Behavior". Medical Anthropology Quarterly, 8–1 (1994), ps. 47–68.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27753200

Journal Title: Business & Professional Ethics Journal
Publisher: Center for Applied Philosophy and Ethics in the Professions
Issue: i27801416
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Pedersen Birthe D.
Abstract: This article presents results from an empirical investigation of the role and importance of ethics in the daily work of Danish oncology physicians and Danish molecular biologists. The study is based on 12 semi-structured interviews with three groups of respondents: a group of oncology physicians working in a clinic at a public hospital and two groups of molecular biologists conducting basic research, one group employed at a public university and the other in a private biopharmaceutical company. We found that oncology physicians consider ethical evaluation as part of their daily work. They discuss how to treat patients in groups and they have interdisciplinary seminars. In contrast, molecular biologists employed at the university do not think that basic research causes significant ethical problems, they do not talk about ethics in their daily work and they do not want to prioritise seminars on ethics. Molecular biologists employed in a private biopharmaceutical company do not think that basic research causes significant ethical problems, but the private company prioritises ethical evaluation. If the company behaves unethical, they will be punished by the consumers and by the investors in the last end. In general, oncology physicians working in the clinic experience a closer relationship between their daily work and ethical problems concerning human beings than molecular biologists conducting basic research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27801421

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i329081
Date: 11 1, 1987
Author(s): Lamont Michele
Abstract: How can an interpretive theory gain legitimacy in two cultural markets as different as France and the United States? This study examines the intellectual, cultural, institutional, and social conditions of legitimation of Jacques Derrida's work in the two countries and develops hypotheses about the process of legitimation of interpretive theories. The legitimation of Derrida's work resulted from a fit between it and highly structured cultural and institutional systems. In France, Derrida capitalized on the structure of the intellectual market by targeting his work to a large cultural public rather than to a shrinking group of academic philosophers. His work appealed to the intellectual public as a status symbol and as a novel and sophisticated way to deal with late 1960s politics. In the United States, Derrida and a group of prestigious literary critics reframed his theory and disseminated it in university departments of literature. His work was imported concurrently with the work of other French scholars with whom he shared a market. Derrida's support is more concentrated and stronger in one discipline than the support for other French intellectuals. In America, professional institutions and journals played a central role in the diffusion of his work, while cultural media were more central in France.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2780292

Journal Title: Geographische Zeitschrift
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i27818847
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): ESCHER ANTON
Abstract: This article pleads for a pragmatic strategy of transcultural understanding as a dialogic concept of insight in social geographic research in the „Islamic Orient“. Transcultural understanding is interpreted as a process of assimilating different systems of meaning, norms, and values of subjects on the one hand, and discourses on how those systems fit together on the other hand (cf. Schwemmer 1996). Understanding is organized by scientifically working out common connections respecting and recognizing foreign codes. As it were, social geographic research needs to generate theoretical frames on a common basis in order to take the differences between cultures as a theme afterwards. In preparation of the argument, the concept of the „gelebten Raum“ (Baier 1996), and the post-modern understanding of space in social geography respectively (Claval 1999) is shortly presented. Additionally, a differentiation of the „Islamic Orient“ is outlined, as are the problems of understanding everyday life and social scientific problems of understanding agency.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27818852

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i329128
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Antonio Robert J.
Abstract: Although a very important figure in interdisciplinary social theory, Nietzsche is absent from sociological theory, especially in the United States. Equating rationalization with cultural homogenization and liquidation of particularity, Nietzsche saw "decadence" where modern social theorists saw progress. He held that sociology drapes cultural domination, regimentation, and exhaustion with the appearance of legitimacy. This essay explores his views about the depletion of social resources stressed in modern theory. It elaborates his "antisociology" and then traces the impact of this framework on three divergent currents of social theory. Nietzsche is read against the backdrop of modern theory in order to explore his continuing challenge to this tradition and his relevance to sociology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2782505

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i329121
Date: 5 1, 1994
Author(s): Goodwin Jeff
Abstract: Network analysis is one of the most promising currents in sociological research, and yet it has never been subjected to a theoretically informed assessment and critique. This article outlines the theoretical presuppositions of network analysis. It also distinguishes between three different (implicit) models in the network literature of the interrelations of social structure, culture, and human agency. It concludes that only a strategy for historical explanation that synthesizes social structural and cultural analysis can adequately explain the formation, reproduction, and transformation of networks themselves. The article sketches the broad contours of such a theoretical synthesis in the conclusion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2782580

Journal Title: La Ricerca Folklorica
Publisher: Grafo
Issue: i27859582
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): ATZENI PAOLA
Abstract: Riprendo, ampliando i conte- sti di riferimento, la complessa nozione demartiniana di mun- dus (De Martino 1977:11-282) che comprende il mondo inte- riore, come vissuto psicopatolo- gico e di alienazione, e il mondo esterno spazio-temporale e sim- bolico per analizzare il rapporto discorso-mondo. Mi allontano dalla nozione di Searle (2001, trad. it. 2003: 117-137) in cui la direzione d' aggiustamento ri- guarda un mondo come real- tà supposta data. Mi accosto, invece, a Vernant (1997: 49) il cui approccio pragmatico con- duce non solo a moltiplicare i mondi - mondo esterno comu- ne, mondo interno del locuto- re, differenti mondi costituenti ciascuno il risultato di un pro- cesso specifico d'interazione e di transazione-, ma anche ad individuare senso e finalità dei discorsi e potenza interazionale e transazionale dei soggetti.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27859595

Journal Title: L'Année sociologique (1940/1948-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i27890547
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Raulin Anne
Abstract: Si la Danse du Lion ne présente pas en soi un caractère religieux, les v ux (offerts contre des dons en argent) sont proférés devant des autels, et prennent ainsi un vague caractère de bénédiction. Ces autels installés dans les boutiques, sont le plus souvent dédiés au Dieu du sol (ou « Maître des lieux ») mais aussi à d'autres divinités dont les effigies sont promenées dans les défilés mis en place dans la Petite Asie au cours des années 1990. Pour une description détaillée de la Danse du Lion, cf. Raulin, 2000, 101-102.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/anso.081.0047

Journal Title: Hebrew Studies
Publisher: National Association of Professors of Hebrew in Institutions of Higher Learning
Issue: i27913784
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Nevo Gideon
Abstract: S. Yizhar, Days ofZiklag, p. 1143.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27913803

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i27919226
Date: 9 1, 2010
Author(s): Clairmont David A.
Abstract: Maclntyre (1988: 373–375).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27919233

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944038
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Towne Edgar A.
Abstract: Sheila Greeve Davaney, "Options in Post-Modern Theology," Dialog 26 (1987), 199.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944043

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944372
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): van Huyssteen J. Wentzel
Abstract: Nicholas Rescher, A System of Pragmatic Idealism. Volume II: The Validity of Values (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1993), 3ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944375

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944386
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Dorrien Gary
Abstract: Joseph L. Price, "Pedagogy and Theological Method: The Praxis of Langdon Gilkey," ibid., 465-83.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944392

Journal Title: Revue économique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i27975857
Date: 3 1, 2011
Author(s): Sobel Richard
Abstract: Dans Les Chemins du paradis, Gorz est plus précis. En fait, il n'y a pas deux niveaux (macro- social hétéronome et individuel autonome), mais trois (les deux précédents plus un niveau micro- social autonome). Résumons ces trois niveaux: « 1) le travail macrosocial hétéronome, organisé à l'échelle de la société tout entière et qui assure le fonctionnement ainsi que la couverture des besoins de base [de l'ensemble des membres de la société] ; 2) les activités microsociales, coopéra- tives, communautaires ou associatives, auto-organisées à l'échelle locale et qui auront un caractère facultatif et volontaire, sauf dans les cas où elles se substituent au travail macrosocial pour couvrir des besoins de base ; 3) les activités autonomes correspondant aux projets et désir personnels des individus, familles ou petits groupes. » (Gorz [1988], p. 125-126.)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27975861

Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330145
Date: 9 1, 1980
Author(s): Clifford James
Abstract: Maurice Leenhardt's ethnographic work in New Caledonia spanned nearly half a century, from 1902-1948. The first part of this field research is described and analysed, as background to his later anthropological writings. Leenhardt's specific position as a missionary-ethnographer is discussed, its advantages and disadvantages weighed. A liberal missionary perspective is found, in this case, to be conducive to a portrayal of cultural process. Leenhardt's translation methodology and his relations with key informants are detailed. Transcription, the means by which ethnographic texts are constituted by more than a single subject, is speculatively extended to ethnographic practice generally. Field research may be seen as a collective, reciprocal endeavour through which textualised translations are made. This viewpoint calls into question common notions of description, interpretation and authorship in the writing of ethnography.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2801348

Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330179
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Spencer Jonathan
Abstract: This article reviews the recent interest in the literary aspects of ethnographic writing, concentrating on the work of Geertz, Sperber and the authors associated with the collective volume Writing culture. While it is argued that serious questions are raised in some of this work, it is also argued that recent fashions in literary critical theory may prove unhelpful in addresing those questions. In particular, the tendency to read texts with little or no consideration for the social and historical context in which they were written seems an especially barren approach. Instead it is argued that anthropology is as much a way of working-a kind of practical activity-as it is a way of writing. Acknowledgement of the personal element in the making of ethnographic texts may help the reader to a better assessment of the interpretation on offer; more radical change requires a change in anthropological practice as well as in anthropological writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2802551

Journal Title: American Antiquity
Publisher: Society for American Archaeology
Issue: i212395
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Leone Mark P.
Abstract: Archaeologists have tried to reconstruct patterns of thought, meaning, and ideas, using theories of structuralism, cognition, and ideology. Case studies involving each of the theories are described, and the strengths and weakness of their application to archaeological data are presented. Structuralism is found to yield substantial examples with well-worked treatments of archaeological data. These examples tend to ignore economic context, however. Materialism, especially neo-Marxism, contains thorough definitions of ideology that may be useful to archaeology because they preserve economic context. However, such definitions are new to the field and presently offer few well-worked examples of how to handle archaeological data.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/280280

Journal Title: Social Studies of Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i212655
Date: 10 1, 1999
Author(s): Bowen G. Michael
Abstract: In this paper, we describe and theorize the topology of 'vision' in field ecology, a domain considerably different from laboratory work in the physical sciences, and discuss the temporal extension of data-collection practices. Data collection in this field is characterized by widely varying measurements, measurement dimensions and temporal extension of data collection. We present the ecologists' field laboratory as a perceptual machinery with a heterogeneous and heteromaterial topology as it pertains to measures, precision, replication and other material practices. Because of the complexity of ecological fieldwork, considerable co-ordination and articulation work is necessary. Here, tables, tags and labels are central tools to achieve coherence of inscriptions. We topicalize the work that digitizes measurements conducted on lizards and their habitats, and that therefore imposes signs that lend themselves to mathematical and statistical processes. It is only through these digitizing processes that lizards become visible to other (interested) ecologists, most of whom have not seen this particular animal species in person. We thereby contribute in new ways to discussions of the topography and topology of scientific vision, to the relation of measurement to practice, and to the 'adequation' of nature and mathematics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/285799

Journal Title: French Historical Studies
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i212737
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): Rémond John
Abstract: ibid., 340-41.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/286783

Journal Title: Australasian Historical Archaeology
Publisher: The Australasian Society for Historical Archaeology
Issue: i29544323
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): SHORTLAND MICHAEL
Abstract: Sigmund Freud's work continues to attract interest from philosophers, analysts and historians, and the earliest formulation of his theory of the unconscious and the 'seduction hypothesis' have recently received particular attention. While Freud's intellectual debt to such figures as Darwin, Nietzsche, Helmholtz and Brücke has been well documented, the influence of Heinrich Schliemann on him and his work is little known. The purpose of this paper is to explore the ways in which Schliemann's work helped Freud fashion himself as an 'archaeologist of the mind' and how, in the crucial year 1896, it enabled him to construct and present his new ideas. The paper also explores Freud's interest in collecting and suggests how and why Freud's debts to archaeology are not, as commonly thought, visible in the so-called 'archaeological metaphor of mind', but present in other areas of his life and writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29544326

Journal Title: Cahiers d'Études Africaines
Publisher: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i29782741
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Chivallon Christine
Abstract: Yang-Ting (2000).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29782752

Journal Title: Social Service Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i30011441
Date: 3 1, 1981
Author(s): White Sheldon H.
Abstract: The rhetoric of social work often seeks its legitimacy and authority on the idea that knowledge can be translated into skills. Knowledge is made in universities in the form of timeless, objective, context-free truths about people and social institutions. Such knowledge rationalizes and justifies the professional practices of social work. It is not clear, however, that the knowledge-into-skills story fully explains social work practices. Practice is often ineffective and tends to throw social workers into moral quandaries, leaving them to practice in a context of faith and doubt. In addition to skills, social workers share values, purposes, the wielding of and submission to power, and mythic stories. Timely, value-expressive, contextual knowledge helps social work to create and maintain social solidarity and to shift its dispositions of skills, purposes, power, and myth to keep up with the pace of social change.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30011443

Journal Title: International Review of the Aesthetics and Sociology of Music
Publisher: Department for Music and Musicology of the Croatian Academy of Sciences and Arts, Croatian Musicological Society, Music Academy of the University of Zagreb
Issue: i30032155
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Human Suzanne de Villiers
Abstract: Sollers's L'Écriture et l'expérience des limites (Paris: Editions du Seuil, 1968: 122)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30032165

Journal Title: British Journal of Sociology of Education
Publisher: Routledge, Taylor & Francis Group
Issue: i30036245
Date: 11 1, 2007
Author(s): Westlund Ingrid
Abstract: Recently, a five-year trial period without a set timetable for compulsory school education in 79 municipalities was concluded in Sweden. The overall idea of the trial was to facilitate local participation, local time governance and flexible learning. Within the pilot trial, each individual pupil's school activities were supposed to be designed to suit his/her needs, interests and prerequisites. This article examines how teachers, principals and students describe students' schoolwork as being located in the intersection between school/home, work/leisure, time/task and individual/collective spheres. Three empirical studies indicate that the essential part of new temporal habits of school concerns a reconstructed task orientation. Time has been taken into the service of tasks and clocktime is not always a taken for granted regulator in educational settings. Potential disadvantages with a more task-oriented education are also discussed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30036255

Journal Title: British Journal of Ethnomusicology
Publisher: British Forum for Ethnomusicology
Issue: i30036862
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Laoire Lillis Ó.
Abstract: White 1998:38
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30036872

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Editions de l'Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales
Issue: i30116663
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Manevy Anne
Abstract: AUSTIN, 1955.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30116666

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Editions de l'Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales
Issue: i30128872
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Lassave Pierre
Abstract: Nouveau Testament à l'Université de Heidelberg, Gerd Theissen, né en 1943
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30128876

Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i30161639
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Konzett Matthias
Abstract: Günter Kunert, "Der Sturz vom Sockel," Frankfurter Allgemeine Zeitung 3 Sep- tember 1991: 35.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30161649

Journal Title: Revista Hispánica Moderna
Publisher: Hispanic Institute, Columbia University
Issue: i30203651
Date: 6 1, 2001
Author(s): de Ràfols Wifredo
Abstract: Lima 56-57)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30203654

Journal Title: Keats-Shelley Journal
Publisher: Keats-Shelley Association of America
Issue: i30210332
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Murphy John F.
Abstract: Reading Paul de Man Reading, ed., Lindsay Walters and Wlad Godzich (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1989), 155-70
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30210343

Journal Title: International Journal of the Classical Tradition
Publisher: Transaction Periodicals Consortium
Issue: i30224118
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Simons Karen
Abstract: Thomas' opposition of the personal and the traditional somewhat problematic, however; he writes, for instance, that "personal experience is private property, while literary tradition is shared and accessible to all poets" (183)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30224122

Journal Title: Japanese Journal of Religious Studies
Publisher: Nanzan Institute of Religion and Culture
Issue: i30233809
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bathgate Michael
Abstract: BAKHTIN 1981, 252
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30233813

Journal Title: Israel Studies
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i30245669
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Glasner-Heled Galia
Abstract: Among the prominent writers on the Holocaust, Yehiel Dinur, who wrote under the pseudonym Ka-Tzetnik, offers his readers the most horrific, almost unbearable reading experience. This article examines the reader-writer relationship in Holocaust literature by considering whether readers of Ka-Tzetnik’s works are able, in Ricoeur's terms, to appropriate or actualize the meaning of a literary text that discloses a mode of "being-in-the-world" that is intensely unbearable and seemingly inexpressible. Interviews were conducted with a group of people who, through their professions as writer, literary scholar, educator, or historian, are concerned with such issues. Two main responses to Ka-Tzetnik were discerned: Some readers perceive him as so warped by his experiences that his extreme, even "insane", vision actually stands as a barrier between the reader and the reality of the Holocaust. For others, it is precisely the unrestrained portrayal of the insane Holocaust reality that is identified with an unmediated "true" Holocaust experience. The first group of readers does not believe that Ka-Tzetnik’s texts can be appropriated. But the reading experience of the second group can also not be characterized as appropriation: for them Ka-Tzetnik creates a primarily emotional core experience, which cannot be deconstructed to reconstruct or actualize the text in the reader's own terms, in the present. The case of Ka-Tzetnik, therefore, raises the difficult question of whether the Holocaust can be understood through a dialogical process of deconstruction and appropriation, or whether Holocaust literature should offer an overwhelming, totalizing experience in which precisely the inability to deconstruct and appropriate the text ensures the communication of the inconceivable.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30245675

Journal Title: boundary 2
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i213389
Date: 7 1, 1992
Author(s): Hintikka Meili
Abstract: Bernstein, Beyond Objectivism and Relativism, 82. 82
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/303361

Journal Title: boundary 2
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i213396
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Hardt Benjamin
Abstract: Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri, Labor of Dionysus (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1994). Hardt Labor of Dionysus 1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/303724

Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i353371
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): Derrida Peter W.
Abstract: Jacques Derrida, "Différance," trans. Alan Bass, repr. in Hazard Adams and Leroy Searle, eds., Critical Theory since 1965 (Tallahassee, Fla., 1986), p. 121. Derrida Différance 121 Critical Theory since 1965 1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3040976

Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354091
Date: 3 1, 1996
Author(s): Goldbard Michael S.
Abstract: Arlene Goldbard, "Let Them Eat Pie: Philanthropy ;i la Mode," Tzkkun, xi, no. 4, July-Aug. 1996. Goldbard 4 xi Tzkkun 1996
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3046227

Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354373
Date: 12 1, 1990
Author(s): Stock Robert A.
Abstract: Of the many surviving Romanesque cartularies, very few are illuminated. After reviewing general considerations of the oral, textual, and visual elements at play in these works, this paper then focuses on the Vierzon Cartulary, particularly on the processes of its charters' transcription to codex. Specifically, this paper argues the performative role of the scribe and illuminator, who, by their transformation of the mise-en-page, appropriation of papal notarial authority, and translation of sealing practice, participated in a new diplomatic ceremony of conveyance. This paper advances a reconsideration of text-image relations to account for ritual performance, both actual and symbolic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3051335

Journal Title: Yale French Studies
Publisher: Yale University Press
Issue: i355552
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Proust Christie
Abstract: Marcel Proust, Jean Santeuil (Paris: Gallimard, 1971), 659. Proust 659 Jean Santeuil 1971
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3090583

Journal Title: Rhetoric Review
Publisher: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates
Issue: i355605
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Zimmerman Henry
Abstract: This essay argues that literary theory can no longer afford to adopt an exceptionalist view of its own disciplinary identity and relation to the Western tradition. To this end, it outlines a conceptual framework that distinguishes between competing tendencies within the Western tradition represented by the terms metaphysics and ontology. The implications of this distinction for literary theory are that the most important sources of the latter's disciplinary identity are neither the linguistics-based movement of French structuralism, as the term poststructuralism implies, nor a "modernity" that has been superseded, as the term postmodernism implies, but rather a modernist tradition of aesthetics shaped by eighteenth- and early nineteenth-century German romanticism and idealism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3093034

Journal Title: Technology and Culture
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i356114
Date: 1 1, 1936
Author(s): de Havilland Eric
Abstract: G. de Havilland, "'Filled' Resins and Aircraft Construction," Journal of the Aeronautical Sciences 3 (1936): 356-57. De Havilland concluded, based on preliminary research, that it was "likely that synthetic resins may one day play an important part in aircraft construction" (p. 357) de Havilland 356 3 Journal of the Aeronautical Sciences 1936
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3106748

Journal Title: The French Review
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of French
Issue: i357300
Date: 2 1, 1987
Author(s): Weedon Kathryn
Abstract: Computer-mediated communication (CMC) can spark students' interest and develop their cross-cultural communication skills. This article describes an on-going CMC cross-cultural project, "Images, Myths, and Realities across Cultures" (IMRAC), between French and American university students. The possibilities and limits of CMC are explored using the research of Claire Kramsch and Paul Ricœur, who provide a practical and theoretical framework in which to analyze student-authored writing. A three-fold articulation of self emerges as students participate in IMRAC. Through a process of mediation, the discussions on the chats offer students a praxis, a way of being that can contribute to making them more culturally literate citizens.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3133361

Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i357335
Date: 9 1, 1981
Author(s): Wolff Robert
Abstract: In his book, Art and agency, Alfred Gell presents a theory of art based neither on aesthetics nor on visual communication. Art is defined by the distinctive function it performs in advancing social relationships through 'the abduction of agency'. Art objects are indexes of the artist's or model's agency. This article examines Gell's use of agency, particularly in relation to the ritual art that is central to his argument. Focusing on Gell's employment of Peirce's term 'index' (out of his triad of index, icon, and symbol), I note that Peirce's approach deflects attention from signification towards the link between art works and the things to which they refer. I consider what Peirce meant by abduction, and conclude that while Gell makes a good case for the agency of art objects he does not explain the distinctive ways in which art objects extend their maker's or user's agency. Gell lacked the time to make detailed revisions before publication and I acknowledge that, given more time, he might have revised some parts of the book. / Dans son livre Art and Agency, Alfred Gell présente une théorie de l'art qui ne se base ni sur l'esthétique, ni sur la communication visuelle. Il définit l'art par sa fonction distinctive dans l'établissement de relations sociales, par «l'abduction de l'intentionnalité (agency)». Les objets d'art sont des index de l'intentionnalité de l'artiste ou du modèle. Le présent article analyse l'utilisation par Gell de l'intentionnalité, notamment dans le cadre de l'art rituel qui constitue un axe central de son raisonnement. En se concentrant sur l'usage par Gell du terme «index» de Peirce (dans la trichotomie index, icône, symbole), l'auteur note que l'approche de Peirce prête moins d'attention à la signification qu'au lien entre les œuvres d'art et les objets auxquels elles font référence. Il examine ce que Peirce entendait par «abduction» et en conclut que si Gell s'en tire bien sur l'intentionnalité des objets d'art, il n'explique pas de quelle manière distinctive ceux-ci prolongent l'intentionnalité de leur créateur ou de leur utilisateur. Gell n'a pas eu le temps d'apporter des révisions détaillées à son ouvrage avant publication, et l'auteur estime que s'il avait eu davantage de temps, il en aurait peut-être remanié certaines parties.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3134597

Journal Title: Journal of Marketing Research
Publisher: American Marketing Association
Issue: i358168
Date: 11 1, 1958
Author(s): Wittgenstein Craig J.
Abstract: Tambyah (1997)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3151963

Journal Title: Journal of the American Institute for Conservation
Publisher: American Institute for Conservation of Historic and Artistic Works
Issue: i359233
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Zumbach Steven W.
Abstract: A formal claim was made in the mid-20th century that the goal of art conservation is to present the artwork as the artist intended it to be seen. Dispute over this claim among conservators and art historians involved differences of perspective on the relative roles of science and art history in the interpretation of artist's intent. A separate but concurrent debate among philosophers, art critics, and literary critics was sparked by publication of "The Intentional Fallacy," a scholarly article discrediting appeals to the intentions of artists and authors in art and literary criticism. In this separate debate, difficulty in the evaluation and application of artist's intent was traced to ambiguity of the term "intent." The author discusses 11 variations of its meaning and puts the issues surrounding artist's intent together in the contexts of art conservation. He also presents more recent viewpoints in the social sciences that associate issues of artist's intent with the role of the artist in the continued existence of the artwork. The writings of contemporary philosophers contribute useful perspectives on the essential nature of art and the autonomy of artworks from their creators. The author finds that the interpretation and application of artist's intent is an interdisciplinary task and that its evaluation in conservation contexts is limited to consideration of distinctive stylistic characteristics that demonstrate the correlated individuality of artists and their work. /// [French] Au milieu du 20e siècle, on prétendait que l'objectif de la restauration était de rendre aux oeuvres d'art l'aspect que l'artiste avait voulu leur donner. La controverse qui s'en suivit parmi les restaurateurs et les historiens d'art suscita des différences de considération sur les rôles relatifs de la science et de l'histoire de l'art dans l'interprétation de l'intention de l'artiste. Un débat séparé mais parallèle parmi les philosophes, les critiques d'art et les critiques littéraires fut déclenché par la publication d'un article érudit intitulé "The Intentional Fallacy," qui s'opposait à cette référence aux intentions des artistes et des auteurs dans la critique artistique et littéraire. Dans ce débat particulier, la difficulté de l'évaluation et de l'application de l'intention de l'artiste provenait de l'ambiguïté même du terme "intention." L'auteur examine 11 significations différnetes de ce mot, et il pose le problème de l'intention de l'artiste dans les contextes liés au domaine de la restauration. En outre, il présente des points de vue plus recénts, tirés des sciences sociales qui associent les problèmes de l'intention de l'artiste à celui de son rôle dans l'existence continue de l'oeuvre d'art. Les ouvrages des philosophes contemporains apportent des perspectives utiles sur la nature essentielle de l'art et de l'autonomie des oeuvres vis-à-vis de leurs créateurs. L'auteur pense que l'interprétation et l'étude des intentions de l'artiste est une tâche interdisciplinaire, et que son évaluation dans les contextes de la restauration doit être limitée à la considération des caractéristiques stylistiques particulières qui démontrent l'individualité corrélative des artistes et de leurs oeuvres. /// [Spanish] A mediados del siglo 20 fue hecha una afirmación formal acerca de que el objetivo de la conservación de arte es presentar la obra para que sea vista de acuerdo a la intención del artista. La disputa sobre esta afirmación entre conservadores e historiadores del arte comprendió diferencias de perspectiva sobre los roles relativos de la ciencia y la historia del arte en la interpretación de la intención del artista. Un debate entre filósofos, criticos de arte y críticos literarios, generado en forma independiente pero concurrente con esta disputa, fue encendido por la publicación de "La Falacia Internacional," un artóculo erudito que desacredita el recurso de apelar a las intenciones de los artistas y autores en las críticas del arte y la literatura. En este debate independiente, la dificultad en la evaluación y aplicación de la intención del artista fue adjudicada a la ambigüedad del término "intención." El autor discute 11 variaciones en el significado de este término, y coloca conjuntamente las cuestiones que rodean a la intención del artista dentro de los contextos de la conservación de arte. También presenta puntos de cista mas recientes en el campo de las ciencias sociales que asocian las cuestiones relativas a la intención del artista con el rol que éste tiene en la existencia perdurable de la obra de arte. Los escritos de filósofos contemporáneos contribuyen con perspectivas útiles acerca de la naturalcza esencial del arte y la autonomía de las obras de arte respecto de sus creadores. El autor encuentra que la interpretación y aplicación de la intención del artista es una tarea interdisciplinaria, y que su evaluación en contextos de conservacíon esta limitada a consideraciones sobre caractéristicas estilísticas distintivas, que demuestran la correlativa individualidad de los artistas y sus obras.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3179782

Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i360633
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Blades David
Abstract: Against the backdrop of Blades's analysis in Foucauldian terms of the failure of a particular science-technology-society reform, this review addresses four questions: (1) the problem of postmodern writing as a language of rupture; (2) the justification of science-technology-society approaches to science teaching; (3) the fruitfulness of Foucault's explanatory framework for understanding educational change; (4) the fruitfulness of Foucault's framework for education theory in general. It is argued that Foucault's notion of authors who are "founders of discursivity" can form the basis of both a productive theory of educational change and also of an educational vision in which a school strives to become a community of such founders of discursivity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3202097

Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i360632
Date: 4 1, 1995
Author(s): Tobias Arati
Abstract: The combined works of John Dewey and Jerome Bruner provide a framework spanning a century of educational thought which can inform curriculum decisions concerning students' educational development, especially for middle school students whose waning of motivation toward school has been well documented by researchers and has long concerned parents and teachers. This framework, combined with recent contributions of motivation and interest researchers, can create broad understandings of how to collaboratively construct effective educational contexts. As early as 1913, Dewey specifically looked at the pivotal role of students' genuine interests in Interest and Effort in Education. Our current research focus on how students' interest can inform curricular contexts marks the recent shift showing an increased use of interest in education research since 1990. In this article, we discuss our study of a team-taught double classroom of sixth grade students whose interests were determined through a series of brainstorming sessions, and individual and focus group interviews. Students' interests fell into six categories centering around subject areas such as Drama, Science, and Animal Studies. Learning contexts were constructed around four of these subject areas. Students participated in their first or second choice of subject area group. We found significantly higher scores on measures of Affect and Activation if students participated in their first choice group. We found intra-group unities of preferred and dispreferred ways of learning which distinguished each group from the class as a whole. Finally, our findings indicated that students reliably described their genuine interests over time. Students' interests were found to be effective tools for informing curriculum decisions in the creation of sixth grade learning contexts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3202129

Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i360888
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Lentricchia Bruce A.
Abstract: Lentricchia's Criticism and Social Change (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1984), especially pp. 113-43 Lentricchia 113 Criticism and Social Change 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3207520

Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i360925
Date: 3 1, 1981
Author(s): Bakhtin Jeanette R.
Abstract: Mikhail Bakhtin, The Dialogic Imagination: Four Essays, ed. Michael Holquist, trans. Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist (Austin: University of Texas Press, 1981), 427. Bakhtin 427 The Dialogic Imagination: Four Essays 1981
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3208808

Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i360920
Date: 12 1, 1990
Author(s): Merleau-Ponty Stanton B.
Abstract: Great Reckonings, 8 8
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3209015

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Political Science / Revue canadienne de science politique
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i362151
Date: 3 1, 1996
Author(s): Lepetit Anne
Abstract: Lepetit, « Histoire des pratiques », 19. Lepetit 19 Histoire des pratiques
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3232167

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Political Science / Revue canadienne de science politique
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i362155
Date: 3 1, 1962
Author(s): Opitz Ellis
Abstract: Opitz and Sebba, eds., Philosophy of Order. Opitz Philosophy of Order
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3232806

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362308
Date: 4 1, 1971
Author(s): Miller Barry
Abstract: Ibid., p. 1058 1058
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234315

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362333
Date: 7 1, 1977
Author(s): Hegel Michael T.
Abstract: Hampshire, p. 271. 271
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234574

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362346
Date: 10 1, 1954
Author(s): Thucydides William
Abstract: Ibid., p. 27. 27
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234923

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362373
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Stites Alison
Abstract: Kathryn Sikkink, "Codes of Conduct: The WHO/UNICEF Case," Inter- national Organization, 40 (Autumn 1986): 815-40. 10.2307/2706830 815
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234960

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362361
Date: 7 1, 1957
Author(s): Selznick Dean C.
Abstract: p. 4
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3235049

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362399
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Levinas Robb A.
Abstract: Levinas, Beyond the Verse, xvii xvii
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3235430

Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i363325
Date: 1 1, 1880
Author(s): Spitta James
Abstract: 'Die Wiederbelebung', 57 57 Die Wiederbelebung
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3250669

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364576
Date: 10 1, 1985
Author(s): Brueggemann Walter
Abstract: Walter Brueggemann, "At the Mercy of Babylon: A Subversive Rereading of the Empire:" JBL 110 (1991) 3-22 10.2307/3267146 3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3266779

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364634
Date: 4 1, 1999
Author(s): BakhtinAbstract: OT: The God Who Feeds Her Children: An Old Testament Metaphor for God (Nashville: Abingdon, forth- coming) The God Who Feeds Her Children: An Old Testament Metaphor for God
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3268094

Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i364779
Date: 12 1, 1965
Author(s): Widengren Walter H.
Abstract: Jes P. Asmussen, "'Manichaeism," in Historia Religionum. op. cit., pp. 580-610
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3269640

Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i364859
Date: 1 1, 1970
Author(s): Shepherd Hugh B.
Abstract: Shepherd, Introduction to The Diary of a Drug Fiend, Hyde Park: University Books 1970, vii-viii. Shepherd vii Introduction to The Diary of a Drug Fiend 1970
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3270489

Journal Title: University of Pennsylvania Law Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Law School
Issue: i273470
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): Minow Steven L.
Abstract: Minow, The Supreme Court 1986 Term - Foreword: Justice Engendered, 101 HARV. L. REV.10 (1987) Minow 10 101 HARV. L. REV. 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3312131

Journal Title: University of Pennsylvania Law Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Law School
Issue: i273485
Date: 11 1, 1990
Author(s): DeWolf Steven D.
Abstract: Jefferson, supra note 11, at 958 958
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3312322

Journal Title: Anthropological Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Issue: i274799
Date: 7 1, 1985
Author(s): Turner Elizabeth M.
Abstract: This article examines some of the discursive practices through which residents of West Virginia coal-mining communities negotiate the emically defined role of "neighbor." Notions of personhood privilege the synaptic, the contextual, and the relational. The ontology informing these discursive practices is contextualized within the historical conditions of their lives as working-class. Data and analysis contest essentialized notions of 'Appalachia', working-class consciousness, and social 'identity'.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3317776

Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique
Issue: i274979
Date: 12 1, 1966
Author(s): Vergote François-André
Abstract: C. DuQuoc: op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3321166

Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique
Issue: i275049
Date: 6 1, 1991
Author(s): Wisner Nicolas
Abstract: Pre'ventique, n°; 10, aoit-septembre 1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3322034

Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i275088
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Harrison Olivier
Abstract: de White (1992, 1995)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3323136

Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i275093
Date: 6 1, 1963
Author(s): Wright Dominique
Abstract: Conan (1995)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3323160

Journal Title: The Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: University of Alberta
Issue: i275834
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Zola Tanya
Abstract: Minnich (1990)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3341823

Journal Title: California Law Review
Publisher: School of Law, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i276939
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): Donald Edward L.
Abstract: Johnson, Racial Critiques, supra note 6, at 155-60.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3480700

Journal Title: California Law Review
Publisher: School of Law, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i276943
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Meisels Paolo
Abstract: supra note 232, at 83-100
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3480757

Journal Title: California Law Review
Publisher: School of Law, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i276929
Date: 12 1, 1990
Author(s): Kagay Steven L.
Abstract: Id. at 8, col. 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3480802

Journal Title: California Law Review
Publisher: School of Law, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i276945
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): Yeats Paul F.
Abstract: W.B. YEATS, The Choice, in 1 THE COLLECTED WORKS OF W.B. YEATS: THE POEMS 246 (Richard J. Finneran ed., 1989). Yeats The Choice 246 1 The Collected Works of W.B. Yeats: The Poems 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3480888

Journal Title: Educational Studies in Mathematics
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i277409
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Yang Anna
Abstract: In this paper we present an analysis of the articles in Educational Studies in Mathematics since 1990. It is part of a larger project looking at the production and use of theories of teaching and learning mathematics. We outline the theoretical framework of our tool of analysis and discuss briefly some of the methodological difficulties we face. We then present our findings from the analysis of the journal and we also give one example of how we 'read' an article, illustrating the rules whereby criteria are applied.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3483104

Journal Title: The William and Mary Quarterly
Publisher: Omohundro Institute of Early American History and Culture
Issue: i278777
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Naipaul Catherine
Abstract: V. S. Naipaul, "Reading and Writing: A Personal Account," Literary Occasions: Essays (New York, 2003), 3-31 (quotation, 30). Naipaul Reading and Writing: A Personal Account 3 Literary Occasions: Essays 2003
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3491726

Journal Title: Revue économique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i281449
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): Yin Alain
Abstract: Genette [1983]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3503400

Journal Title: The Yearbook of English Studies
Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Issue: i284497
Date: 1 1, 1946
Author(s): Sinclair T. J.
Abstract: The Divine Comedy of Dante Alighieri, ed. and trans. by John D. Sinclair, 3 vols (London: Bodley Head, 1946), III, 74-75 Sinclair 74 III The Divine Comedy of Dante Alighieri 1946
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3509375

Journal Title: Review of Religious Research
Publisher: Religious Research Association
Issue: i284859
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): Winter Gibson
Abstract: The natural science model has fostered fragmentation among the human sciences, leaving them ill-equipped to address matters of public policy which demand more holistic approaches. This paper proposes a science of political ethics which could encompass factual, normative, and value materials. Ricoeur's processes of guessing, explanation, and comprehension are used to develop a theory of interpretation for the new science. The work of art is used as the metaphor for interpreting societal processes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3510158

Journal Title: Review of Religious Research
Publisher: Religious Research Association
Issue: i284834
Date: 10 1, 1968
Author(s): Zuck W. Widick
Abstract: This paper examines the professionalization of religious research in the United States and related topics. Because professional societies illumine value orientations and practices among workers in a given field, the nature of the American Catholic Sociological Society, the American Society of Christian Ethics, the Religious Research Association, and the Society for the Scientific Study of Religion are briefly considered. The differential appropriation of religious research in various ecclesiastical bodies, the problem of funding religious research in the American situation, and the shift in emphasis from a pragmatic problem-solving approach focused on institutional survival to a more theoretical approach to the understanding of religious phenomena are discussed. The bifurcation between persons interested in religious research trained under theological faculties and those trained under social science faculties is noted. Likely future lines of development in theory and research are projected.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3510319

Journal Title: Review of Religious Research
Publisher: Religious Research Association
Issue: i284833
Date: 4 1, 1963
Author(s): Ryan Marie Augusta
Abstract: When religious orders are compared on differences in belief described as Pre-Vatican and Post-Vatican they also differ significantly in their preference for certain theologians and their preferences for types of works. Although age also explains this difference, even with age held constant the difference remains. Those with Post-Vatican beliefs express reading preferences and choice of works which affirm action to transform society as distinct from action to adjust to existing patterns.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3510419

Journal Title: Review of Educational Research
Publisher: American Educational Research Association
Issue: i368708
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): Yaroshevsky Peter
Abstract: This essay explores the notion of meaning, particularly as applied to acts of producing and reading texts. The analysis is grounded in principles of activity theory and cultural semiotics and focuses on the ways in which reading takes place among readers and texts in a culturally mediated, codified experience characterized here as the "transactional zone." The author builds on Vygotsky's work to argue that meaning comes through a reader's generation of new texts in response to the text being read. As a means of accounting for this phenomenon, examples are provided from studies illustrating, for instance, Vygotsky's zones of meaning, the dialogic role of composing during a reading transaction, and the necessity of culturally constructed subjectivity in meaning construction. The author concludes by locating meaning in the transactional zone in which signs become tools for extending or developing concepts and the richness of meaning coming from the potential of a reading transaction to generate new texts. "When I use a word," Humpty Dumpty said in a rather scornful tone, "it means just what I choose it to mean-neither more nor less." (Lewis Carroll, Through the Looking Glass)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3516069

Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: American Musicological Society
Issue: i369130
Date: 10 1, 1967
Author(s): Hansell Martha
Abstract: K. Hansell, "Opera and Ballet at the Regio Ducal Teatro," 1:114 Hansell 114 1 Opera and Ballet at the Regio Ducal Teatro
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3519834

Journal Title: Revista Mexicana de Sociología
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Sociales de la Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico
Issue: i282482
Date: 6 1, 1996
Author(s): Weber Isabel
Abstract: Loach, 1994:48. 48
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3541230

Journal Title: Revista Mexicana de Sociología
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Sociales de la Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico
Issue: i282494
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): Vernant Haydeé Silva
Abstract: j. P. Vernant, 1999, L'univers, les dieux, les hommes, Setiil, Paris, p. 118. Vernant 118 L'univers, les dieux, les hommes 1999
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3541493

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i278737
Date: 9 1, 1969
Author(s): Wolf K.
Abstract: Concerns with how cultural factors influenced agrarian social change remained an abiding interest in the work of James Scott. I begin by sketching out the context of debates in Marxist theory, development studies, and social and political anthropology that, during the 1980s, turned to relations between ideas, power, and processes of conflict and change in a world of new postcolonial nations and rapid agrarian development. In the article, then, I carefully examine the ideas Scott developed about resistance and hegemony in conversation with the work of E. P. Thompson. Tracing the genealogy of Scott's ideas about hegemony and rural social protest, I comment in some detail on the literature on resistance that arose in anthropology during the 1980s and the role of Scott's "Weapons of the Weak" (1985) in shaping that literature while interacting with "Subaltern Studies" (Guha 1982-87), studies of social movements, and examinations of power in interpersonal relations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3567020

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i278728
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): Wiegman Hirokazu
Abstract: Social theorists' recent interest in global capitalism is partially driven by their sense of "being behind" in a changed and changing world. It is also part of their larger efforts to critique the present. In this article, I seek to find analogues of this sense of temporal incongruity between knowledge and its objects in the Tokyo financial markets. My focus is on the anxieties and hopes animating some Japanese securities traders' life choices. I argue that these traders' differing anxieties and hopes resulted from their divergent senses of the temporal incongruity among strategies, workplaces, and Japan's national location vis-à-vis the United States. Drawing on a parallel between social theorists' and traders' efforts to generate prospective momentum in their work, I propose that anthropologists investigate the work of temporal incongruity in knowledge formation more generally.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3567500

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369550
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Rüsen Jörn
Abstract: Jirn Rüsen, Introduction: "Historical Thinking as Intercultural Discourse," in Western Historical Thinking: An Intercultural Debate, ed. Jörn Rüsen (New York: Berghahn Books, 2002), 1- 14 Rüsen Historical Thinking as Intercultural Discourse 1 Western Historical Thinking: An Intercultural Debate 2002
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590639

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369543
Date: 2 1, 1966
Author(s): Ricoeur Jonathan A.
Abstract: Ibid., 214-217.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590799

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369553
Date: 10 1, 1958
Author(s): Benda A. Dirk
Abstract: Julien Benda, The Betrayal of the Intellectuals (Boston: Beacon, 1958). Benda The Betrayal of the Intellectuals 1958
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590818

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369544
Date: 5 1, 1931
Author(s): Tagore Peter
Abstract: Rabindra- nath Tagore, The Religion of Man (London: George Allen and Unwin, 1931) Tagore The Religion of Man 1931
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590880

Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i369787
Date: 7 1, 1919
Author(s): Wolf Nathaniel
Abstract: Coren's Sleep Thieves
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3593497

Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i282749
Date: 1 1, 1947
Author(s): Sund Brendan
Abstract: Sund, True to Temperament, p. 146 Sund 146 True to Temperament
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3600432

Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i282749
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Marcus Fred
Abstract: Ben Marcus, The Age of Wire and String (Alfred A. Knopf: New York, 1995), p. 94. Marcus 94 The Age of Wire and String 1995
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3600435

Journal Title: Journal of Anthropological Research
Publisher: University of New Mexico
Issue: i286629
Date: 7 1, 1956
Author(s): Steiner Roger M.
Abstract: Recent work on conventional metaphor together with reinterpretations of classic studies of "soul substance" and mana are examined to assess the dangers of overinterpretation--the attribution of nonexistent theologies and metaphysics--by ethnographers. In our project of cultural translation, are we prone to attribute deeper salience to other peoples' way of talk than they in fact imply?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3630416

Journal Title: Slavic Review
Publisher: American Association for the Advancement of Slavic Studies
Issue: i370063
Date: 4 1, 2002
Author(s): Fabian Maria
Abstract: Ibid., 165.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3650070

Journal Title: Annals of the Association of American Geographers
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i370115
Date: 9 1, 1986
Author(s): Wrigley Trevor J.
Abstract: In this article, I reflect upon and attempt to understand the changing theoretical nature of post-World War II Anglo-American economic geography. In particular, I contrast the kind of theorizing that first occurred in the discipline during the 1950s with the very different kind now carried out under what has been called the "cultural turn" or the "new economic geography." I argue that, during this transition, not only did the use of specific theories alter, but the very idea and practice of theorization also changed. I characterize the phases of this movement by using the terms "epistemological" and "hermeneutic theorizing," defined on the basis of works by pragmatist philosopher Richard Rorty and science studies writer Donna Haraway. I argue that "epistemological theorizing" best describes the first period of theorization in the discipline around the quantitative revolution of the late 1950s and early 1960s, and that it is bound by the quest for accurate (mirror) representation. In contrast, hermeneutic theorizing describes the kind of theorizing found in the new economic geography, marked by an interpretive mode of inquiry that is reflexive, open-ended, and catholic in its theoretical sources.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3651287

Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i370165
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Zilberfein Carol A.
Abstract: Despite the abundance of psychological studies on trauma related ills of descendants of historical trauma, and the extensive scholarly work describing the memory politics of silenced traumatic pasts, there has yet to emerge a critical analysis of the constitutive practices of descendants of historical trauma. This article presents an ethnographic account of a support group for descendants of Holocaust survivors, proposing that the discursive frame of intergenerational transmission of Post Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD) and support group based narrative practices allow descendants to fashion their sense of self as survivors of the distant traumatic past. The discursive frame of transmitted PTSD acts as both a mnemonic bridge to the past and a mechanism of identity making, as participants narratively reemplot their life stories as having been personally constituted by the distant past. A close ethnographic reading of on-site discursive practices points to how culture ferments to produce narratives, practices and ultimately carriers of memory to both sustain and revitalize historical grand narratives and the cultural scenarios they embed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3651794

Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i370173
Date: 3 1, 2001
Author(s): Walkerdine Valerie
Abstract: In this article, I seek to make an intervention in debates between psychological and postmodern anthropology by engaging with the theme of border crossing. I argue that the theme of the border is one that fundamentally instantiates a separation between interior and exterior with respect to subjectivity, itself a fundamental transformation and a painful and difficult border. This is related to a Cartesian distinction critiqued in this article. How the distinction between interior and exterior may be transcended is discussed in relation to examples of transformation from the crossing of class borders to the production and regulation of workers in a globalized and neoliberal economy. I begin with reference to postwar transformations of class with its anxious borders and go on to think about changes in the labor market and how these demand huge transformations that tear apart communities, destroy work-places, and sunder the sense of safety and stability that those gave. Advanced liberalism or neoliberalism brings with it a speeding up of the transformations of liberalism in which subjects are constantly invoked as self-contained, with a transportable self that must be produced through the developmental processes of personality and rationality. This self must be carried like a snail carries a shell. It must be coherent yet mutable, fixed yet multiple and flexible. But this view of the subject covers over the many connections that make subjectivity possible. I conclude by asking what it would mean to rethink this issue of the production of safe spaces beyond an essentialist psychological conception of only one mother-child space, separated from the social world, as having the power to produce feelings of safety? I end the article with an argument for a relational approach to subjectivity and sociality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3651801

Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i370160
Date: 9 1, 1987
Author(s): Young Brian
Abstract: Using life narrative interviews with Arab students with Israeli citizenship collected in 1997-98, I inquire into the processes and problems in talking about one's collective identity. In particular, I address how Arab students manage multiple identifications and the role of social relationships in shaping identity narratives. First, I argue that identity narratives do not voice a single point of view. Rather, identity narratives articulate multiple affiliations that, often, cohere in an uneasy fashion. Our identities are not incoherent, but such multiplicity provides the opportunity for talking about identity in novel ways. Second, I argue that social relationships are an integral part of identity stories that work to introduce, close off, balance, and rebalance possible self-identifications. In talking about identity, we narrativize our social relationships, and these narrated relationships are key points in the plotline of our identity stories. Drawing on this interpretation, I argue that social policies that equalize power relations and allow for the creation of social relationships based on mutual respect have the potential to shape identities that, without giving up valued affiliations, contain an acceptance of the other at their core.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3651874

Journal Title: Medical Anthropology Quarterly
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i370404
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Waal Anne-Lise
Abstract: This article looks at HIV prevention projects in which established stigmatized and stigmatizing roles were actively reversed and manipulated in pursuit of HIV harm reduction. In two Norwegian projects, sex workers and drug users carried out harm-reduction activities with other drug users and sex workers. Although HIV-related harm reduction was the aim of the projects, termination or reduction of drug use or sex work was not. Such changes nevertheless occurred among the sex workers and drug users who took active part in the project. The article considers these changes in order to reflect on the meanings and roles of participation in HIV prevention work. In particular, the discussion theorizes on possible ways in which alteration of roles and subject positions may produce self-reflective effects with transformative potentials.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3655496

Journal Title: SubStance
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i287917
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Perec H. Porter
Abstract: Assessing the limits of evolutionary and cognitive approaches to the study of culture goes to the heart of an issue that tends to divide humanists and scientists. The issue is how far, in dealing with complex cultural texts and the complex transactions we perform as readers, can we advance by scientific reduction? The issue is vexed by the fact that at times the complexity and novelty of humanistic discourse is little more than obfuscation and strained ingenuity. But such failings discredit neither the search for novelty, nor the earned perception of irreducible complexity, nor the immense importance of work that is necessarily, and terminally, speculative.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3685513

Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i288896
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): JonasAbstract: Hans Jonas, The Imperative of Responsibility. In Search of an Ethics for a Technological Age (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1984). Jonas The Imperative of Responsibility In Search of an Ethics for a Technological Age 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3735715

Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: W. S. Maney & Son Ltd
Issue: i288890
Date: 7 1, 1975
Author(s): FranchAbstract: Juan Alcina Franch and Jose Manuel Blecua, Gramática española (Barcelona: Ariel, 1975) Franch Gramática española 1975
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3736997

Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i288905
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): Nagel Marco
Abstract: Charles Taylor, 'Hegel's Philosophy of Mind', in Human Agency and Language, pp. 77-96 (p. 78).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3737813

Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i288912
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Doubrovsky Sarah
Abstract: S. Doubrovsky, 'Pourquoi l'autonction?', Le Monde, 29 April2003, p. 16. Doubrovsky 29 April 16 Le Monde 2003
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3738055

Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i288917
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Sampon Emma
Abstract: 'Andre du Bouchet', in Six French Poets ofOur Time: A Critical and Historical Study (Prince¬ ton: Princeton University Press, 1979), pp. 124-39 (p. 137). Andre du Bouchet 124 Six French Poets ofOur Time: A Critical and Historical Study 1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3738410

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290812
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Winock Michelle
Abstract: Serge Moscovici, ≪ Passion révolutionnaire et passion éthi- que ≫, dans M. Wieviorka (dir.), op. cit., p. 89-109
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3770930

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290792
Date: 9 1, 1967
Author(s): Alexis de Jacques
Abstract: "Totalitarisme", "révolutions antitotalitaires", "refus de l'oppression", "dissidence", "résistance civile": autant de termes, anciens ou nouveaux, que la bascule du siècle à "l'Est" en 1989 nous oblige à revisiter, de 1939 à 1980, en passant par 1956. Jacques Sémelin entreprend ici cet indispensable travail de réflexion. /// "Totalitarianism", "anti-totalitarian revolutions", refusal of oppression, dissidence: the century's swing of the pendulum in "the east" in 1989 forces us to revisit these terms and concepts, from 1939 to 1980 via 1956. The author undertakes this reflection by basing his work on the notion of "civil resistance" of which he is the best advocate in France.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3770982

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290798
Date: 6 1, 1993
Author(s): Delage Christian
Abstract: Christian Delage, - Cinema, history, memory., Persistence of vision (New York), a paraitre Delage Cinema, history, memory Persistence of vision
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3771543

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290798
Date: 6 1, 1983
Author(s): Ricœur Emmanuel
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Temps et récit, tome 1, L'intrigue et le récit historique, Paris, Le Seuil, 1983 (Points Essais) Ricœur L'intrigue et le récit historique 1 Temps et récit 1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3771547

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290821
Date: 3 1, 1986
Author(s): Ricœur François
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Du texte à l'action, Paris, Le Seuil, 1986, p. 391 Ricœur 391 Du texte à l'action 1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772370

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290821
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Felman François
Abstract: Shoshana Felman, À l'âge du témoignage: Shoah de Claude Lanzmann , dans Au sujet de Shoah, Paris, Belin, 1990, p. 55-56 Felman À l'âge du témoignage: Shoah de Claude Lanzmann 55 Au sujet de Shoah 1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772371

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290824
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Malraux Vincent
Abstract: Andre Malraux, Hommage à Jean Moulin et autres grands discours, Bry-sur-Marne, Institut national de laudio- visuel, 1989 Malraux Hommage à Jean Moulin et autres grands discours 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772428

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290823
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): Milward Robert
Abstract: Alan Milward, The European Rescue of the Nation-State, Londres, Routledge, 2e édition, 2000 Milward 2 The European Rescue of the Nation-State 2000
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772532

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290830
Date: 6 1, 1974
Author(s): de Certeau François
Abstract: Michel de Certeau, La possession de Loudun, op. cit., p. 218 de Certeau 218 La possession de Loudun
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772579

Journal Title: College English
Publisher: National Council of Teachers of English
Issue: i216091
Date: 2 1, 1979
Author(s): Yu Sandra
Abstract: Rosabel Lu and Robert Chiang, as well as to the work of James Liu, Pauline Yu, A. C. Watson, and James Graham
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/377300

Journal Title: College English
Publisher: National Council of Teachers of English
Issue: i216082
Date: 1 1, 1974
Author(s): Fodor Louise Wetherbee
Abstract: J. A. Fodor, T. G. Bever, and M. F. Garrett, The Psychology of Language: An Introduction to Psycholinguistics and Generative Grammar (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1974), pp. 271, 342-44. Fodor 271 The Psychology of Language: An Introduction to Psycholinguistics and Generative Grammar 1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/377350

Journal Title: Le Mouvement social
Publisher: Editions Ouvrieres
Issue: i291720
Date: 12 1, 1835
Author(s): Maleville Alain
Abstract: Tribune prolétaire, 17 mai1835 17 mai Tribune prolétaire 1835
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3778206

Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i370994
Date: 6 1, 1970
Author(s): Winch David P.
Abstract: The question addressed in this article is how people come to know the foundational axioms of their moral systems as true and correct. Drawing on my fieldwork among the Himba of northwestern Namibia, I argue that the most potent form of intellectual conviction is not generated through the external manipulations of ritual, but through a deeply internal experience in which moral knowledge coalesces with a subjectively perceived experience of timeless universality. / Dans cet article, l'auteur cherche à savoir comment les individus en viennent à savoir que les axiomes fondateurs de leur système moral sont véridiques et corrects. À partir de son travail de terrain chez les Himba du nord-ouest de la Namibie, il affirme que la forme la plus puissante de conviction intellectuelle ne naît pas de manipulations externes dans le cadre de rituels, mais d'une expérience profondément intériorisée au cours de laquelle le savoir moral fusionne avec l'expérience subjective d'une universalité intemporelle.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3804153

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i371167
Date: 11 1, 2005
Author(s): Koester David
Abstract: In this article, I examine the institutional, cultural, and discursive foundations of a historical event. I explicate global, transnational, national, intercultural, ethnic, regional, local, and personal realms of understanding as well as a range of discursive and pragmatic strategies as they came into play in a schoolroom meeting that led to the writing of a letter to the United Nations for help. The case presented is that of a group of people in a small, majority-indigenous village in Kamchatka in the Russian Far East, who, in 1993, after the collapse of the Soviet government and its support network, decided to turn to the United Nations for help.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3805353

Journal Title: Journal of Folklore Research
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i291342
Date: 4 1, 1992
Author(s): Žižek Sergei
Abstract: The literary epic Lāčplēsis, written in the nineteenth century, was a conscious attempt to create a cultural frame of reference for the emerging Latvian nation. In this article, which examines how poet Andrejs Pumpurs imagined his community, Kruks compares the Latvian epic hero with his Estonian counterpart, Kalevipoeg, who was invented at the same time under similar conditions of domination by Russians and Baltic Germans. Kruks's narrative analysis demonstrates the different frameworks through which social bonds are constructed for the heroes. Kalevipoeg is a pragmatic actor with an explicitly formulated duty; he errs, but he recognizes his personal responsibility. The Latvian hero Lāčplēsis, on the other hand, is not given a clearly formulated duty; he is simply a hero by destiny and definition. As a resource of symbols that feed contemporary discourses, the epic impedes the construction of a modern national identity capable of engendering a civic society through active pragmatic participation. For past generations, Lāčplēsis explained unjust foreign domination. Kruks argues that contemporary Latvian society now seeks a new frame of cultural reference that will permit the construction of a future-oriented national identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3814743

Journal Title: Research in African Literatures
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i292445
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): Zimra Michael F.
Abstract: Assia Djebar's most recent text, "La femme sans sepulture," returns to the site of colonial history to represent the voice of resistance hero Zoulikha, a haunting figure of the author's own personal history represented only nominally in her corpus until now. Representing Zoulikha's return in Algeria as a spectral revisitation, Djebar's text examines both the potential and the vicissitudes of representing colonial violence and resistance through the spectral domain and thus engages critically with tendencies of postcolonial theory to promote haunting as a mode of historical reinscription. Djebar's text explores how haunting relates to cultural and postcolonial memory through an investigation of the issues surrounding the inscription of Zoulikha's story of resistance and torture within the colonial context, and thereby queries the relation between the haunting memories of colonial violence and contemporary civil warfare in Algeria. This article explores, in particular, how Djebar's work engages critically with the spectral aura that haunts both postcolonial place and theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3821404

Journal Title: Victorian Studies
Publisher: Indiana University
Issue: i293966
Date: 7 1, 1983
Author(s): Coward John
Abstract: Rosalind Coward, Patriarchal Precedents: Sexuality and Social Relations (London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1983) Coward Patriarchal Precedents: Sexuality and Social Relations 1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3827465

Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i371427
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): McKendrick Karen L.
Abstract: Neil McKendrick, John Brewer and J.H. Plumb in The Birth of Consumer Society: The Commercialization of Eighteenth-Century England (Europa Publications: London, 1982) McKendrick The Birth of Consumer Society: The Commercialization of Eighteenth-Century England 1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3841014

Journal Title: Studies in English Literature, 1500-1900
Publisher: Rice University
Issue: i371527
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Crane Mary Thomas
Abstract: An assessment of recent scholarly work treating Tudor and Stuart drama and some general observations on the state of the profession. A full bibliography and price list of the works received by SEL for consideration follow.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3844651

Journal Title: Business Ethics Quarterly
Publisher: Society for Business Ethics
Issue: i294320
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): Westin Georges
Abstract: Recalling several profound disagreements about business ethics as it is currently discussed in Western societies, I emphasize the need for business ethics as an academic discipline that constitutes the "backbone" for both teaching business ethics and improving business practice (section 1). Then I outline a conceptual framework of business ethics that promotes a "bottom-up" approach (section 2). This "problem- and action-oriented" conception appears to be fruitful in terms of both practical relevance and theoretical understanding. Finally, I argue for (section 3) the relevance of discussing goals at all levels of human action (i.e., individuals, organizations, systems) as well as the indispensability of human rights, and propose Amartya Sen's "goal-rights-system" approach as a normative-ethical framework for business ethics that integrates these two fundamental aspects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3857240

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i371616
Date: 5 1, 2005
Author(s): Borden William
Abstract: Iain Borden, "Cities, Critical Theory, Architecture," in Borden and Dunster, ed., Architecture and the Sites of History, 387-399 Borden Cities, Critical Theory, Architecture 387 Architecture and the Sites of History
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3874104

Journal Title: Feminist Review
Publisher: Palgrave Macmillan
Issue: i371628
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Winnicott Amal
Abstract: Rose (2003)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3874449

Journal Title: The French Review
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of French
Issue: i216617
Date: 12 1, 1986
Author(s): Worton David
Abstract: Michel Tournier is the most controversial French writer alive today. His fiction has provided fertile ground for diverse, often conflicting theoretical practices, and sharpened critiques, yet the author himself has remained aloof and is often perplexed at the way in which his work is received. Focusing on one story from Le Médianoche amoureux (1989), this article records a quest for the essential Tournier. Under the auspices of a master narrator, the reader of "Pyrotechnie" embarks on a voyage of discovery, which is ultimately one of self-discovery, for it finishes, delightfully, in the story-telling world of the child.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/397914

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i40000455
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Sizgorich Thomas
Abstract: Bourdieu, Outline of a Theory of Practice, 192-193.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40008441

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame Press
Issue: i40000764
Date: 4 1, 1983
Author(s): Long Edward LeRoy
Abstract: What have recently published books in Christian ethics produced in the way of ethical theory or the foundations of ethical reasoning? This essay surveys works by several major figures, including Curran, Gustafson, and Winter, and a number of younger and less well known authors who have contributed to contemporary discussion of Christian ethical foundations, exploring their particular orientations and arguments and setting them in a context of debate reaching back over the past twenty years.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40014954

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame Press
Issue: i40000771
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): Read Kay A.
Abstract: This paper continues a dialogue begun in the Focus on Cosmogony and Religious Ethics published in JRE 14/1 (Spring, 1986). There Charles Reynolds and Ronald Green argued for a model of comparative religious ethics that seeks to locate certain "descriptive universals" across cultural boundaries in diverse forms of religious ethics. The present paper argues that this approach is dangerously imbalanced in its emphasis on similarities, ignoring the importance of diversity for interpreting cross-cultural phenomena and tending to impose a heterogeneous conceptual framework on all religious ethical systems examined. Using the case of the Aztec ethic, the paper argues instead for an approach that studies each particular system in depth in its own context. Such an approach, besides being more faithful to each system being examined, also carries the potential of enriching the search for universals by nuancing the description of the patterns being sought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015049

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000781
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Lewis Paul
Abstract: (1983, 184). Harrison 1985, 12-15).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015184

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000783
Date: 10 1, 1996
Author(s): Schweiker William
Abstract: Smith 1983.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015210

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000783
Date: 10 1, 1996
Author(s): Wolf Susan
Abstract: Recent discussions of religious, cultural, and/or moral diversity raise questions relevant to the descriptive and normative aims of students of religious ethics. In conversation with several illustrative works, the author takes up (1) issues of terminology, (2) explanations or classifications of types and origins of plurality and pluralism, (3) the relations between pluralism as a normative theory and the aims of a liberal state, and (4) the import of an emphasis on plurality or pluralism for the comparative study of religious ethics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015216

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000791
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Schofer Jonathan Wyn
Abstract: Schofer 2003, 43-44.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015307

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i40000904
Date: 10 1, 1977
Author(s): Conn Walter E.
Abstract: Erik Erikson's work in psychosocial developmental theory has made valuable contributions to the field of religious ethics on some very basic issues. This paper makes scattered elements of Erikson's explicit ethical perspective available in concise fashion for critical ethical reflection. It does this in such a way as to highlight the centrally important fact for religious ethics that implicitly operative in Erikson's view is a criterion of "self-transcendence" as definitive of mature personal (fully human, ethical) development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40017730

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000913
Date: 4 1, 1994
Author(s): Wallwork Ernest
Abstract: Views of the self may be plotted on a set of coordinates. On the axis that runs from fragmentation to unity, Rorty and Rorty's Freud champion the decentered self while Wallwork, Taylor, and Ricoeur argue for a sovereign, unified self. On the other axis, which runs from the disengaged, inward-turning self to the engaged and "sedimented" self, Wallwork, would be positioned near Rorty, defending self-creation against the narrative identity affirmed by Taylor and Ricoeur. Despite his skepticism concerning the communitarian agenda of the narrativists, Flanagan grants that the self is social and relational--a position further explored by Oliver, Stendahl, Deutsch, and Mack in "Selves, People, and Persons".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40017846

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000941
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): Rees Geoffrey
Abstract: (Aquinas 1964, I-II, 81.1),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40018203

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000943
Date: 7 1, 1999
Author(s): Young Josiah Ulysses
Abstract: This review essay explores Josiah Young's project of developing a liberatory Pan-Africanism that is attuned to cultural diversity and Victor Anderson's advocacy of postmodern cultural criticism in African-American religious thought. After situating African-American religious thought as a branch of Africana thought, the author examines these two religious thinkers' work as an effort to forge a position on African-American religious thought--including its relation to theology--in an age where even theory is treated as a god that is about to die. At the conclusion, secularism emerges as a religious project that normatively undergirds the methodological dimensions of these works..
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40018233

Journal Title: International Journal for Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Martinus Nijhoff
Issue: i40001924
Date: 10 1, 1974
Author(s): Schmitz Kenneth L.
Abstract: Models and Metaphors, p. 39 ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40036258

Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i40002095
Date: 4 1, 2004
Author(s): Hussain Nasser
Abstract: Clinton L. Rossiter, Constitutional Dictatorship: Crisis Government in Modern Democracies (1948).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40040179

Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005525
Date: 6 1, 1993
Author(s): de la Yncera Ignacio Sánchez
Abstract: Ibidem, p. 36.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183635

Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005577
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Alastuey Eduardo Bericat
Abstract: El presente artículo expone los principales resultados de una investigación realizada con el objeto de analizar el papel que cumplen las emociones colectivas en el mantenimiento del orden social. En concreto, trata de explicar el hecho de que las noticias más importantes que aparecen en los medios de comunicación sean noticias de horror, es decir, noticias en las que la muerte siempre aparece en el primer plano de la escena. Los informativos de los medios de comunicación expresan y fomentan la cultura del horror característica de nuestras sociedades avanzadas. Ahora bien, para entender esta cultura es preciso determinar previamente la naturaleza emocional del horror, así como establecer una definición sociológica de este sentimiento. El horror es una emoción compleja compuesta por sentimientos de terror, de asco y de conmoción. El horror, sociológicamente, puede entenderse como "la emoción mediante la que un orden social señala sus límites más extremos". El estudio concluye señalando que existen dos modos alternativos de mantener el orden y la cohesión en el seno de un sistema social. El primer modo de legitimación, característico de las sociedades centrípetas, funciona mediante la gran potencia atractiva que ejerce sobre el campo social un núcleo central de valores sociales positivos. El segundo, característico de las sociedades centrífugas, funciona mediante la gran potencia repulsiva que ejercen sobre el campo social las transgresiones flagrantes del orden moral. El modo típico en el que las sociedades centrífugas regulan el orden social explica la cultura del horror característica de nuestras sociedades avanzadas. /// This article sets out the main results obtained from a research study carried out for the purpose of analysing the role that collective emotions play in maintaining social order. In specifíc terms, it attempts to explain the fact that the most important items of news that appear in the media are news of horror, in other words, news in which death always appears in the foreground. The news programmes of the media express and encourage the culture of horror that is characteristic of our advanced societies. However, in order to understand this culture, we must first establish the emotional nature of horror and also establish a sociological definition of this feeling. Horror is a complex emotion made up of feelings of terror, disgust and shock. Sociologically speaking, horror can be understood as "the emotion through which a social order indicates its outermost limits". The study concludes showing that there are two alternative ways of maintaining order and cohesión within the bosom of a social system. The first method of legitimation, which is characteristic of centripetal societies, works through the great power of attraction it exerts over the social field of a central nucleus of positive social values. The second, which is characteristic of centrifugal societies, works through the great power of repulsion exerted by flagrant transgressions of moral order over the social field. The typical method in which centrifugal societies regulate social order explains the culture of horror that is characteristic of our advanced societies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40184683

Journal Title: Research in Higher Education
Publisher: Human Sciences Press, Inc.
Issue: i40006432
Date: 10 1, 1999
Author(s): Toma J. Douglas
Abstract: With the rise of alternative inquiry paradigms across academic fields, faculty within the same academic departments choose to ground themselves within different intellectual traditions and distinct academic cultures, not simply those parallel to the positivist tradition. One illustration of the emerging paradigmatic pluralism across academe is the actual paradigm choice by individual scholars. Appreciating these paradigm choices is critical if we are to interpret the faculty work and faculty culture that shape institutional culture and influence resource allocation at universities and colleges. Using qualitative methods, I focus upon a single discipline in my exploratory study, law, but extend these concepts and issues in analyzing and interpreting my findings to how they might apply to faculty working in other academic fields.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40196372

Journal Title: Geografiska Annaler. Series B, Human Geography
Publisher: Swedish Society for Anthropology and Geography
Issue: i40006783
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Dodgshon Robert A.
Abstract: From the moment it began to engage with time in a considered way, human geography has employed a variety of analytical and conceptual approaches to it. Recent work especially has greatly extended the range of these different approaches by stressing the innate variability of time, leading some to talk of 'multiple temporalities' and to pronounce time as 'uneven' even within the same society. Fractured by such differences over how time may be used and interpreted, the possibility of an overarching concept of time in human geography has long gone. However, this does not prevent us from asking whether it is still possible to produce a coherent review of the differences involved. This paper offers such a review, arguing that setting these differences down within a structured framework can provide a clearer sense of how diverse the debate among human geographers has become and the trends of thought that have underpinned this growing diversity. Among the trends identified, it places particular stress on the shift from objectified interpretations to those dealing with relational forms of lived and experiential time and on how the separation of early discussions of space from those on time, their dimensional stand-off from each other, has slowly given way to a view in which space and time are treated as sticky concepts that are difficult to separate from each other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40205021

Journal Title: Population Research and Policy Review
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i40008393
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Browne M. Neil
Abstract: The doctrine of comparable worth is frequently denounced by economists as inefficient, unnecessary, unworkable, incredibly costly, and replete with unfortunate consequences for the same low-wage workers it alleges to be helping. This paper attempts to identify an explanation for both the vigor and content of economists' common antipathy toward comparable worth. The methodology of the paper is taken from Donald McCloskey's recent The Rhetoric of Economics and Feyerabend's epistemology of conversation. A content analysis of economists' criticisms of comparable worth reveals a much different methodology from that deified in the beginning chapters of Principles of Economics texts. Facts and empirical validation are not the primary bases responsible for their conclusions. The theoretical and empirical support for current relative wages is not solid enough to explain either the nearunanimity of economists' arguments or their vitriolic tone. This paper analyzes the fundamental role played by metaphor in guiding economists' analysis of comparable worth. Metaphor is treated in this paper as a pre-rational image that, much like Kuhn's paradigms, provides insight and establishes blind spots.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40230000

Journal Title: Review (Fernand Braudel Center)
Publisher: Fernand Braudel Center, Binghamton University
Issue: i40009276
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Maldonado-Torres Nelson
Abstract: Fanon (1968).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40241551

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40011359
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Dawdy Shannon Lee
Abstract: -Ibid., t. 1, p. 112.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40284757

Journal Title: The American Archivist
Publisher: Society of American Archivists
Issue: i40011862
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Tussing Nicholas J.
Abstract: Pietro Balan, Gli archivi della S. Sede in relazione alla storia d'Italia. Discorso recitato nella Pontificia accade- mia di religione cattolica di Roma nel giorno 5 maggio 1881 (Rome: Fratelli Monaldi, 1881).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40294575

Journal Title: Nueva Revista de Filología Hispánica
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012112
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Resina Joan Ramón
Abstract: Clarín en su obra ejem- plar, Castalia, Madrid, 1985, p. 154.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40299118

Journal Title: Estudios de Asia y Africa
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012882
Date: 4 1, 1999
Author(s): Lara Gabriela
Abstract: Kiernan y Boua, 1982, pp. 327-328.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40313309

Journal Title: Estudios de Asia y Africa
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012913
Date: 8 1, 2008
Author(s): Muñoz Adrián
Abstract: Theosophical Transactions, en Thompson, op. cit., p. 39.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40313753

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40012947
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Henriques Fernanda
Abstract: KICOEUR, Paul -La metaphore vive, op.cit, p. 375.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40314300

Journal Title: Philosophy of Music Education Review
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i40013929
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Fink-Jensen Kirsten
Abstract: In this paper Kirsten Fink-Jensen suggests how a phenomenological-hermeneutic perspective can contribute to the knowledge of learning and teaching processes in music education in school The philosophical frame is Danish philosophy of life, represented by Knud Ejler Løgstrup, and Merleau-Ponty's philosophy of body, both pointing to the wholeness of mind and body in all kinds of actions. Within this framework interpretation is an epistemological, practical-hermeneutic activity based on different analytical methods. Phenomenologically, experiences of music are constituted in an intertwinement of personal, cultural, and local meaning. The challenge facing the teacher is then to understand what becomes meaningful to persons in a given situation. 'Bodily dialogue' is a metaphor of a hermeneutic process of understanding that highlights the importance of bodily aspects in the teacher's answer to a child's musical attuned articulations. This focus can facilitate children's learning processes and change and qualify the teacher's didactic reflections on the impact and progression of music lessons.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40327268

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014414
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Cabral Roque
Abstract: (Être et Avoir, 123).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335970

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Renaud Michel
Abstract: L'homme faillible, p. 54.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336077

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Henriques Fernanda
Abstract: Ricoeur em Temps et Récit I, Paris, Seuil, 1983, 12:
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336078

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): da Silva Estanqueiro Rocha Acílio
Abstract: HN. 614-615.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336079

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Sumares Manuel
Abstract: o terceiro volume de Temps et récit. Seuil, Paris, 1985, pp. 230-232
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336080

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): de Lourdes Sirgado Ganho Maria
Abstract: E.R.M., p. 127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336082

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014463
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Renaud Michel
Abstract: "Pléiade". t. 3. p. 50.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337055

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014479
Date: 12 1, 1999
Author(s): Cabral Roque
Abstract: Depois de uma vista panorâmica das concepções do trabalho que nos fornecem a etimologia e a história das ideias. e na linha duma distinção da encícliea Laborem Exercens. o artigo trata de certos pontos relacionados com os aspectos humano e económico do trabalho. /// After a general overview of the main concepts of work that come from both the etymology and the history of ideas, and in line with a distinction made in Laborem Exercens, this essay deals with some topics related to both the human and the economic aspects of work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337340

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Silva Maria Luísa Portocarrero
Abstract: Das Erbe Europas, 173:
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337580

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Lawrence Frederick G.
Abstract: KSI,67,461.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337583

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Duque João
Abstract: J. Duque, "Apocalíptica e teologia na pós-modernidade" in: Cendculo 150 (1999)404-425.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337585

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Carr Thomas K.
Abstract: Gadamer, The Beginning and the Beyond, p. 12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337586

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Oraa José María Aguirre
Abstract: (Traducción castellana de Manuel Jiménez, José F. Ivars y Luis Martín Santos, revisada por José Vidal Beneyto Conocimiento e interés, Madrid, Taurus, 1982, pp. 314-315).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337587

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014497
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Casalla Mario
Abstract: G.I. Roth, FCE, México, 1954,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337740

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014503
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: Jeremias, p. 253.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337865

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014503
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Treanor Brian
Abstract: Augustine, Confessions, Book X, Ch. 6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337867

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014514
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Henriques Mendo Castro
Abstract: Method in Theology, op.cit., pp. 161-2.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40338238

Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40014675
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Marre Diana
Abstract: Anderson [1991] 1993, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40340765

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40015309
Date: 4 1, 1999
Author(s): Martínez Luz Ángela
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, La metáfora viva. Buenos Aires, Ediciones Megalópolis, 1975.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40356938

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40015317
Date: 11 1, 2003
Author(s): Martíinez Luz Ángela
Abstract: En el siglo XVII
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40357074

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016231
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Morand Charles-Albert
Abstract: P. Ricoeur, op. cit. (note 31), p. 219.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370160

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016248
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Passeron Jean-Claude
Abstract: M. Weber, Gesammelte Aufsätze zur Wissenschaftslehre, Tübingen, JCB Mohr, 1922, trad. mod. ; trad. fr. J. Freund, Paris, Plon, 1965, p. 202.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370471

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016287
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Berthoud Gérald
Abstract: Brin 1998
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40371021

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i40016628
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Landres J. Shawn
Abstract: Memory brings the past into the present. It is a feature of human temporality, contingency, and identity. Attention to memory's psychological and social importance suggests new vistas for work in religious ethics. This essay examines four recent works on memory's importance for self-interpretation, social criticism, and public justice. My focus will be on normative questions about memory. The works under review ask whether, and on what terms, we have an obligation to remember, whether memory is linked to neighbors near and distant, how memory is related to justice and forgiveness, and whether memory sits easily with the kind of relationships that allegedly characterize life in democratic public culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40378119

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40016681
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Abélès Marc
Abstract: Ils furent édités en langue française par Jean Copans (1975).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40379508

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40016681
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Salgues Camille
Abstract: (Cavell 2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40379512

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40017396
Date: 2 1, 2010
Author(s): Smid Karen
Abstract: Although anthropologists have discredited use of the liberal and secular concept of "agency" for explaining Muslim women's behavior, their evidence comes from women who still appear rather agentive to Western readers, hence, muting the necessity and consequences of discovering and applying the women's own ethical and religious terms in their analysis. In Guinea's rural Fouta Djallon, women are not prone to mobilize and make self-interested decisions with immediately observable outcomes. Therefore, understanding them on their own terms requires greater attention to their religious frameworks, namely, to their use of visions of creation and afterlife to define themselves and strategize for redemption.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1548-1425.2010.01240.x

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40017405
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Simon Bennett
Abstract: Zimmerli, Ezekiel, 2:420-21 : "But the priestly/prophetic witness of Ezekiel 43 still knows nothing of that terrifying act of God in which he gives himself in his servant, in order to crown his love, to the unclean world as a pure sin offering (Is 53:10)."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40390027

Journal Title: Journal of Management Information Systems
Publisher: M. E. Sharpe
Issue: i40018336
Date: 7 1, 2006
Author(s): Sidorova Anna
Abstract: In this paper, we use concepts from actor-network theory (ANT) to interpret the sequence of events that led to business process change (BPC) failure at a telecommunications company in the United States. Through our intensive examination of the BPC initiative, we find that a number of issues suggested by ANT, such as errors in problematization, parallel translation, betrayal, and irreversible inscription of interests, contributed significantly to the failure. We provide nine abstraction statements capturing the essence of our findings in a concrete form. The larger implication of our study is that, for sociotechnical phenomena such as BPC with significant political components, an ANT-informed understanding can enable practitioners to better anticipate and cope with emergent complexities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40398827

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019046
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Rizvi Sajjad H.
Abstract: Qumml, Mirqat al-asrar in al-Arba'lniyyat, 1 54.2-1 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419487

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019047
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Jorge Maria Manuel Araújo
Abstract: António Coutinho, "Ora então, vamos à vida", Ciclo de Colóquios "Despertar para a Ciência", Reitoria da Universidade do Porto, 10/02/2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419509

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019049
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Vidal Dolors Perarnau
Abstract: sks 22 nb12: 134.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419598

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019049
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Rognon Frédéric
Abstract: Ellul, Jacques; Nordon, Didier -op. cit., p. 144.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419608

Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40019135
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Tinat Karine
Abstract: (Garner y Garfinkel, 1979)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40421164

Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Paulusdruckerei
Issue: i40020067
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Berg Mark L.
Abstract: (Damm 1938: 52, 83).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40463662

Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Paulusdruckerei
Issue: i40020091
Date: 1 1, 1997
Abstract: (Kee 1980: 145).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40465357

Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Editions St-Paul
Issue: i40020109
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Hahn Hans Peter
Abstract: Hahn (2004b).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40466874

Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Editions St-Paul
Issue: i40020113
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Singleton Michael
Abstract: Singleton (1972).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40467177

Journal Title: Research in African Literatures
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i40020159
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Mathuray Mark
Abstract: This paper departs from and problematizes the almost exclusive focus in criticism of Ngugi's early works on Christianity and the effects of the colonial intrusion. Following Ngugi's exhortation to resume the broken dialogue with the gods of his people, Ngugi's early novels are read in relation to precolonial East African discourses and practices of prophecy, Gikuyu religion, and Gikuyu nationalist strategies that drew on different and opposing prophetic traditions, and, in a broader sense, discourses of religion in Africa. By locating his early work within the nexus of these discourses, a far more nuanced view of Ngugi's relation to religious and nationalist discourses emerges. This paper also attempts to uncover a symbolic geometry in Ngugi's novels determined by Gikuyu religious and cultural concepts. A focus on The River Between reveals certain authorial deployments of historical inaccuracies and dislocations in the interests of a schematization of the conflicts in the novel.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40468115

Journal Title: The Journal of Educational Research
Publisher: Heldref Publications
Issue: i40023288
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Hendry Petra Munro
Abstract: The author suggests that all research is narrative. Resituating all research as narrative, as opposed to characterizing narrative as one particular form of inquiry, provides a critical space for rethinking research beyond current dualisms and bifurcations that create boundaries that limit the capacity for dialogue across diverse epistemologies. The contemporary bifurcation of research as either quantitative or qualitative, or as scientific or nonscientific, has resulted in a master narrative of research which assumes incommensurability across paradigms. The author weaves 3 questions through this research: (a) What is lost when narrative and science are constructed as opposing and incommensurable modes of inquiry? (b) How might scholars reconceptualize inquiry outside a binary framework that privileges science? and (c) In what ways can resituating all narrative as inquiry open spaces for dialogue across multiple epistemologies that is the heart of democratic inquiry? The author concludes by suggesting that narrative is not a method, but rather a process of meaning making that encompasses 3 major spheres of inquiry: the scientific (physical), the symbolic (human experience) and the sacred (metaphysical).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/00220670903323354

Journal Title: Sociological Forum
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i40023410
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Mische Ann
Abstract: How can we understand the social impact of cognitions of a projected future, taking into account both the institutional determinants of hopes and their personal inventiveness? How can we document the repercussions, often contrary to intentions, "back from" such projected futures to the production and transformation of social structures? These are some of the questions to be addressed by a cultural sociology that attempts to look seriously at the effects of a projected future as a dynamic force undergirding social change. In this essay I discuss some of the reasons why the analysis of the future has been so neglected in sociological theory and research, and then sketch a possible framework for reincorporating it that specifies some of the cognitive dimensions of projectivity. In the process, I will show how a focus on future projections can help us make a link between cognition and action in a manner that has so far been neglected in the sociological literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40542699

Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: Centre d'Informació Documentació Internacionals a Barcelona
Issue: i40023956
Date: 5 1, 1997
Author(s): Pinxten Rik
Abstract: We presented a model which describes the field of questions on identity as a field of dynamics. It is structured by means of particular, temporal configurations of identity through time and space. The theory of dynamic systems provides us with precise models for the representation of forms of identity, or of their evolution towards types of so-called chaos, given certain conditions. The model allows us to work in a comparative perspective, which is a sure advantage in conflict analysis. The complexity of identity phenomena is captured covering individual, group and community dynamics of identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40550305

Journal Title: Musurgia
Publisher: ESKA Editions
Issue: i40024525
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Kosmicki Guillaume
Abstract: P. Tagg, « From refrain to rave : the decline of figure and the rise of ground », Popular Music 13/2, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1994, p. 209-222.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40567119

Journal Title: Geography
Publisher: Geographical Association
Issue: i40024598
Date: 7 1, 1982
Author(s): Mead W. R.
Abstract: The paper considers the map and the milieu of Europe. Five distinguishing characteristics are discussed. Special attention is given to the "states system" of Europe, the intensity of the boundary network and the increasing tendency from the point of view of human geography to treat the continent as divided rather than as unitary. The first post-war generation of British geographers tended to neglect Europe in favour of North America. Sweden and France have been important in restoring the connection. Those whose research focuses on European topics will encounter bibliographical, linguistic and other problems; but these will be offset by the cordial working relationships among European geographers which, as among colleagues in the English-speaking world, seem to spring from the nature of the subject itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40570560

Journal Title: Recherche et Applications en Marketing
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Grenoble
Issue: i40025452
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Marion Gilles
Abstract: Floch (1995, pp. 38-41) et Corcuff (2001, pp. 98-100)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40589364

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40025495
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Colleyn Jean-Paul
Abstract: d'Andréa Paganini, pp. 482-485.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40590306

Journal Title: Musurgia
Publisher: ESKA Editions
Issue: i40025520
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): GRABÓCZ Márta
Abstract: J. Ujfalussy cité en note 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40591026

Journal Title: Musurgia
Publisher: ESKA Editions
Issue: i40025541
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Joos Maxime
Abstract: d'Enzo Restagno, op. cit., p. 80-81
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40591277

Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40026362
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): SCHUBERT WILLIAM H.
Abstract: Schultz (2008)
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-873X.2009.00468.x

Journal Title: La Linguistique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40026513
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Deprez Christine
Abstract: Andrée Tabouret-Keller, 1985, « Langage et société : les corrélations sont muettes», La Linguistique, n° 21, Paris, PUF, p. 125-139.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40605069

Journal Title: Medical Anthropology Quarterly
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40026571
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Epele María E.
Abstract: Closely linked to the increase in psychotropic pill consumption, forgetting and remembering emerged from devastated social scenarios as a new local idiom among poor youth in the late 1990s and the new millennium. Drawing on ethnographic fieldwork carried out during the years of the deepest economic crisis in Argentina (2001-03), I argue that psychotropic pill consumption is associated with not only deteriorating economic conditions but also changes in the quality and price of cocaine, and in the scarcity and subsequent change of status of medications during the economic breakdown. Taking into account developments in the field of memory studies, I examine the relationship among political economy, social memory work, and changing drug-use practices. Regarding memory as a social practice, I argue that the growth of psychotropic pill consumption in the late 1990s can be understood through the interplay of Paul Ricoeur's notions regarding different kinds and levels of forgetting. By analyzing changing survival strategies, social network dismantlement, changing mortality patterns, and abusive police repression, I discuss how social fragmentation engendered by structural reforms has modified social memory work.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1548-1387.2010.01083.x

Journal Title: Journal of Music Theory
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i40026609
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Klein Michael L.
Abstract: Klein 2004, 45-48.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40606879

Journal Title: Cités
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40027222
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Kallinikos Jannis
Abstract: http://www.lse.ac.uk/collections/informationsystems/newsAndEvents/2008events/SSIT8pro- gramme.htm.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/cite.039.0013

Journal Title: Alternatives: Global, Local, Political
Publisher: Lynne Rienner Publishers
Issue: i40027896
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Moore Cerwyn
Abstract: This article makes a contribution to hermeneutic explorations in global politics. Taking as its points of departure the growing body of work on film and the turn to aesthetic and intertextual IR, the article argues that a further conversation with cinema and poetics can be used to develop the interpretive canon in global politics. In particular, the analysis draws upon the idea of cinematic poetics, and more generally the work of Andrei Tarkovsky, who, throughout his films and written work, articulates a particular form of Russian interpretivism. The article explores Tarkovskian cinema and engages in debates about artistic creativity and aesthetics, filmic representations of belonging and spiritualism, all shaped by a Russian hermeneutic tradition. The final sections apply these themes, illustrating how the icon presents a way to read the themes of suffering and salvation, inscribing the formation of identities in global politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40645258

Journal Title: Studies in East European Thought
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40027959
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Augustyn Leszek
Abstract: Cioran (1995), p. 1047.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40646263

Journal Title: Journal of African Cultural Studies
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i40028027
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Armstrong Andrew H.
Abstract: The attempt to write extreme violence, or to reco[r]d[e] traumatic cultural memory - the representation of horror - tests both the representational capacity of language and the rationality of subjecthood. Much narrative endeavour is spent trying to narrativise or 'structure' horror into story. However, because traumatic memories resist the narrative framework of the novel, questions are posed not only about the reliability of the narrator's memory and his/her ability to narrate a credible story, but also about the suitability of the fictional form of the novel to represent historical events such as extreme violence. How does language in narrative, with its insistence on order and sequence, 'capture' the destructuring nature of violence? Where is the subject or the idea of rational subjectivity in these de-structuring acts of violence? I will attempt to address these issues through a critical 'reading' of Moses Isegawa's novels Abyssinian Chronicles (2000) and Snakepit (2004). In these novels, Isegawa recasts and reenacts a period of recent Ugandan history marked by violence and chaos, emanating from the dictatorship of Idi Amin. However, both novels stretch the limits of 'factual' or historical credulity, reminding the reader that they are in fact works of historical fabrication. I am of the view that the narrative endeavour in these two novels is not only to record the chaotic events experienced during the years before and after the fall of Idi Amin, but to recode, through the tropes of language (symbol, imagery, and metaphor), the devastating effects of those years on the literary landscape of Uganda.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/13696810903259335

Journal Title: International Labor and Working-Class History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40028073
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Pimenta Ricardo Medeiros
Abstract: The aim of this paper is to analyze how Brazilian trade unions are using social memory as a tool to build up workers' collective identities, in an attempt to fight the fragmentation resulting from the impact of the industrial restructuring of the 1990s. We will draw upon two ongoing programs conducted by the ABC Metal Workers Union (SMABC) and the Oil Workers Union of Brazil's state oil company Petrobras (Sindipetro). The SMABC and Sindipetro have recently been addressing the issue of workers memory with social and public projects. These projects are building up memories, which in spite of being institution-based are also collective, framed by the unions through the use of new types of communication and electronic media.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40648514

Journal Title: Revue de Musicologie
Publisher: Société Française de Musicologie
Issue: i40028087
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): DELANNOY Sylvìne
Abstract: Ernst Theodor Amadeus Hoffmann, Les Frères de Saint-Sérapion, vol.1, trad. Albert Béguin et Madeleine Laval (Paris : Phébus, 1981), p. 345-346.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40649016

Journal Title: Oral History
Publisher: Oral History Society
Issue: i40028140
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Gildea Robert
Abstract: This paper is the text of an inaugural lecture given as Professor of Modern History in the University of Oxford on 7 November 2008. It arises from a research project entitled Around 1968: Activism, Networks, Trajectories', which involves a team of historians examining samples of activist networks in fourteen European countries, in order to understand ways of becoming an activist, being an activist and making sense of activism. The key terms of this project are transnationalism – tracing resonances and interactions between activists and activist networks across frontiers – and subjectivity – using oral testimony to understand the phenomenon of activism. The framing and presentation of the project incited a rethink of the methods of oral history, not least because the project originated in Oxford, where scepticism persists about the credibility of oral history as a discipline. To persuade this audience of the power of oral history, the approach was taken to locate it at the confluence of three recent developments which have impacted on the study of history as a whole: the linguistic turn, memory studies, and interest in subjectivity, intersubjectivity and the unconscious. These reflections are then used to illuminate evidence drawn from French activists interviewed in the course of 2007 and 2008.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40650317

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40028448
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Leclerc Gérard
Abstract: L'article examine les conceptions de Foucault concernant l'histoire de la vérité, ainsi que les rapports entre la volonté de savoir, la volonté de vérité et les formes du pouvoir. Il rappelle comment les notions nietzschéennes de volonté de vérité et de volonté de puissance font place dans son oeuvre à la volonté de savoir comme instrument des rapports de domination. On examine ensuite comment la notion d'autorité, entendue à la fois au sens institutionnel et au sens discursif, peut permettre une sociologisation des approches traditionnelles de la vérité, élaborées par les philosophes. Comment la visée de vérité du discours s'est-elle combinée historiquement avec la volonté de savoir des institutions ? Y a-t-il différents régimes de vérité, liés à des modalités de discours différentes, mais aussi à des formes d'autorité institutionnelle ? Est-il possible de construire une généalogie des figures de l'autorité discursive ? The paper examines Foucaultian views about the history of truth, as well as the relationships between the will to truth and the different forms of power. It reminds how Nietzsche's conceptions about the will to truth and the will to power are replaced in Foucault's work by the will to truth as a means of power relationships. The paper looks furthermore at the possibility of using the notion of authority, understood both in the institutional and in the discursive sense, as a tool for a sociologization of traditional approaches to truth, constructed by philosophers. How did the pursuit of truth historically combine with the will to knowledge belonging to the institutions ? Are there different regimes of truth, tied to different discursive modalities, as well as to institutional forms of authority ? Is it possible to construct a genealogy of figures of discursive authority ?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40656810

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40028448
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Metzger Jean-Luc
Abstract: Duveau, 1961.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40656811

Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40028538
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Casanova Julián
Abstract: "El tiempo presente, la memoria y el mito", p. 25.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40657994

Journal Title: The Modern Law Review
Publisher: Wiley-Blackwell
Issue: i40028761
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Koops Bert-Jaap
Abstract: A. Rip, 'Constructing Expertise: In a Third Wave of Science Studies?' (2003) 33 Social Studies of Science 419.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40660735

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i40029008
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): Carbine Rosemary P.
Abstract: http://www.barackobama.com/speeches/index.php.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40666525

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030281
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Ladrière Paul
Abstract: Ibid., p. 127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690421

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030301
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): Moulin Pierre
Abstract: (Mallet, 1998).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690843

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030303
Date: 6 1, 2001
Author(s): Guienne Véronique
Abstract: Juaitn Schklar, The faces of injustice, Yale University Press, 1988.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690880

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030307
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): Gaussot Ludovic
Abstract: Löwy (1985)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690947

Journal Title: The German Quarterly
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of German
Issue: i216909
Date: 4 1, 1979
Author(s): Triefenbach Kenneth S.
Abstract: The rationalist fantasy of the Enlightenment is the myth of the nonviolent origins of virtue, typically represented through the image of rational birth. This myth falters when Odoardo Galotti, invoking the second birth of reason, kills his daughter. This article examines Lessing's Die Erziehung des Menschengeschlechts-essentially a treatise on the phylogeny/ontogeny distinction-in terms of a recuperative rationalist gesture that continues to inform Freud's oedipal theory as well as Claude Lévy-Strauss's understanding of the "cerebral savage." These theories are not treated as methodological frameworks for reading Lessing but rather as evidence of the tanacity of Enlightenment desires, which are already problematized by texts like Emilia Galotti.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/407077

Journal Title: Southeastern Archaeology
Publisher: Southeastern Archaeological Conference
Issue: i40031581
Date: 7 1, 1990
Author(s): Peebles Christopher S.
Abstract: The historical development of theories regarding the later prehistory of the Southeast illustrates the manner in which families of theoretical models come to form the cognitive capital of working archaeologists. Tradationally, however, Southeasternists have largely preferred to ignore overt debates over theory and method. Moreover, as a group they have shown little inclination to indulge in the rampant and fruitless forms of archaeological relativism that are emerging at present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40712917

Journal Title: Recherches Économiques de Louvain / Louvain Economic Review
Publisher: De Boeck
Issue: i40032645
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Favereau Olivier
Abstract: WHITE, in Swedberg (1980, p. 89),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40723974

Journal Title: Monumenta Serica
Publisher: Monumenta Serica Institute
Issue: i40032858
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Rule Paul
Abstract: Journal of Chinese Religion 27 (1999), pp. 105-111.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40727471

Journal Title: Jewish Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i40034196
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Feldman Yael S.
Abstract: Jews in 1939
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40753110

Journal Title: Jewish Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i40034232
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Subtelny Maria E.
Abstract: Tishby, Wisdom of the Zohar, 3: 1090-91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40753349

Journal Title: Caravelle (1988-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40038172
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): WEBER SANTOS Nádia Maria
Abstract: Lima refere-se ao livro A China e os chins. Recordações de viagem de Henrique C. R. Lisboa (edição de Montevideo de 1888).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40854243

Journal Title: Crossroads: An Interdisciplinary Journal of Southeast Asian Studies
Publisher: Northern Illinois University, Center for Southeast Asian Studies
Issue: i40038691
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Marston John
Abstract: Marston, 1999
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40860794

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40038933
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Lampert Tom
Abstract: Ibid., 139-140.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40864442

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40038933
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Miller Tyrus
Abstract: Given World and Time is a collection of essays that summarizes much of the recent work on the theory of time, including cultural, political, and social conceptualizations of temporality. The grounding narrative of this collection, roughly stated, leads from the German and German-Jewish ideas of a temporality of crisis developed in the 1920s, to the French poststructuralism of the 1960s and 1970s, and concludes with the American syntheses of the 1980s and 1990s. Methodologically, the book weaves together different historical narratives with a new emphasis on their temporal dimension, all seen from the perspective of critical theory and recent cultural critique. However, it is interesting to point out that the majority of the articles do not challenge the classic critical tools of modernism, in spite of the frequent reference to poststructuralist critique. The volume editor has also not acknowledged more recent work that treats similar topics and themes through the application of a radical political critique, most significantly the work associated with biopolitics and the so-called theological turn.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40864445

Journal Title: Canadian Slavonic Papers / Revue Canadienne des Slavistes
Publisher: Canadian Association of Slavists
Issue: i40039131
Date: 6 1, 1998
Author(s): Briker Boris
Abstract: Richards maintains that in Bunin's work memory of the past has the power to overcome death and preserve love and thus the boundaries of the personal time (Richards 167).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40869967

Journal Title: Music & Letters
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i40039166
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Lee Sherry D.
Abstract: Ibid. 313.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40871577

Journal Title: Soziale Welt
Publisher: Nomos Verlagsgesellschaft
Issue: i40039451
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Olsen Ole Johnny
Abstract: (Edwards 1979).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40878346

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039582
Date: 3 1, 1963
Author(s): VANSINA Dirk F.
Abstract: HV, 10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40880933

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039640
Date: 9 1, 1973
Author(s): HOLENSTEIN Elmar
Abstract: (Husserl, 1966, p. 339).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40882437

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039657
Date: 3 1, 1978
Author(s): VAN DER VEKEN J.
Abstract: RC 155 : „c'est L'Être qui parle en nous plutôt que nous ne parlons de l'Être".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40883139

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039658
Date: 6 1, 1978
Author(s): GEERTS Adri
Abstract: PF, p. 333-334.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40883186

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039685
Date: 9 1, 1983
Author(s): MOYAERT PAUL
Abstract: ibid., blz. 802.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40884294

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039769
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): De Visscher Jacques
Abstract: Paul Rlcoeur, Le conflit des interprétations. Essais d'herméneutique, Paris, Seuil, 1969, p. 283-329
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40889206

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039796
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): De Visscher Jacques
Abstract: Gentse Cultuurvereniging (1 oktober 2007)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40890392

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040298
Date: 6 1, 1987
Author(s): Jacques Francis
Abstract: M. Dummett, Frege : Philosophy of Language, Duckworth, 1973.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40902866

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040311
Date: 9 1, 1990
Author(s): De Munck Jean
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Temps et récit IL La configuration dans le récit de fiction, coll. « L'ordre philosophique », Paris, Seuil, 1984, p. 92.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903111

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040354
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Villani A.
Abstract: On essaie dans ces pages d'appliquer à la philosophie de Kant et de Dilthey certains concepts en vue d'une perspective critique de l'histoire. La distinction diltheyenne entre explication et compréhension est mise en rapport avec celle qu'opère Kant entre jugement déterminant et jugement réfléchissant. Puisque la majeure partie de la complexité historique ne peut trouver son explication dans des lois générales, on propose une compréhension réfléchissante du récit historique. Mettre en relation le jugement réfléchissant et la compréhension revient à souligner la dimension normative de l'interprétation historique. La perspective anthropologique de Kant fait également place aux jugements préréflexifs, préliminaires sur l'histoire, tandis que l'approche diltheyenne par les Geisteswissenschaften ramène à une conscience reflexive ou autoréférée qui replace l'individu en son temps et en son lieu. D'autres aspects peuvent encore conduire à notre rapport critique à l'histoire : le modèle kantien d'une orientation réfléchissante de la communauté humaine, les limites qu'ilpose à l'interprétation authentique, la conception heideggerienne de l'authenticité historique, l'analyse diltheyenne des systèmes d'influence réciproque comme cadre de l'idée d'une imputation causale singulière chez Paul Ricœur. This essay is an attempt at applying certain concepts to the philosophy of Kant and Dilthey, so as to develop a critical perspective on history. Dilthey's explanation-understanding distinction is related to Kant's distinction between determinant and reflective judgment. Since much of the complexity of history cannot be determinantly explained by general laws, a reflective understanding of the meaning of historical narrative is suggested. To relate judgment and understanding is to highlight the evaluative dimension of historical interpretation. Kant's anthropological perpective also makes room for pre-reflective, preliminary judgments about history, whereas Dilthey's human science approach points back to a reflexive or self-referring awareness that locates the individual in his time and place. Some other aspects may also lead us to a critical approach to history : Kant's reflective orientational model of the human community, the limits he places on authentic interpretation, Heidegger's views on authentic historicity, and Dilthey's analysis of systems of reciprocal influence seen as a framework for Ricœur's conception of singular causal imputation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903833

Journal Title: Law & Social Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i378430
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): White Stephen M.
Abstract: Devin 2003, 350-62
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4092669

Journal Title: Theory and Society
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40041727
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Franzosi Roberto P.
Abstract: Franzosi 2004a, pp. 266-269).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40928085

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041831
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Escudier Alexandre
Abstract: R. Koselleck, «Historische Kriterien...», art. cit., p. 67-86, ici p. 86, repris in Le futur passé..., op. cit., p. 77.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40929925

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041832
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Anheim Étienne
Abstract: J. Gracq, Au Château d'Argol, ibid., t. 1, p. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40929990

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Editions de l'Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales
Issue: i40041838
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): Truc Gérôme
Abstract: (Halbwachs, 2008 : 149),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40930307

Journal Title: Cultural Anthropology
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40041850
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): HAYWARD EVA
Abstract: In When Species Meet (2008) Donna Haraway proposes that creatures' identities and affinities emerge through their encounters, their relationships. Following Haraway's lead, I attend to how different species sense and apprehend one another, leaving impressions—concrescences of perceptual data, or texture. This essay reports on fieldwork alongside marine biologists and with a population of cup corals (B. elegans) housed at the Long Marine Laboratory, Santa Cruz, California. While I assisted researchers who were studying metabolic rates and reproductive strategies in coral communities, these cup corals simultaneously taught me that being and sensing are inextricably enfolded. We were variously situated—corals generating generations, me interpretations. We met through a material-semiotic apparatus I call "fingeryeyes." As an act of sensuous manifesting, fingeryeyes offers a queer reading of how making sense and sensual meaning are produced through determinable and permeable species boundaries.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1548-1360.2010.01070.x

Journal Title: Le Mouvement social
Publisher: Association Le Mouvement Social
Issue: i40042984
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Mérindol Jean-Yves
Abstract: L. Viry, Le monde vécu des universitaires ou la République des Egos, Rennes, Presses Universitaires de Rennes, 2006.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40959665

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40043093
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): NEL PHILIP
Abstract: Taylor, "The South Will Rise Again?", p. 47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40961962

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40043093
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): WEBER CYNTHIA
Abstract: Ashley, 'Living on Border Lines', p. 313.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40961963

Journal Title: Cinema Journal
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Issue: i40043125
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Celik Ipek A.
Abstract: Fredric Jameson, The Political Unconscious (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1981), 52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40962837

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043588
Date: 4 1, 1967
Author(s): LANTéRI-LAURA G.
Abstract: La pensée sauvage, op. cit., p. 328.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40969867

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043609
Date: 12 1, 1972
Author(s): WAGNER HELMUT R.
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, "Husserl and the Sense of History," in the collection of his studies published under the title Husserl: An Analysis of his Phenomenology (Evanston, Ill.: Northwestern University Press, 1967), pp. 143-174.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970117

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043645
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): SASS LOIUIS A.
Abstract: L. Sass and R. Woolfolk, "Psychoanalysis and the Hermeneutic Turn: A Critique of Narrative Truth and Historical Truth," Journal of the American Psychoanalytic Association 36.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970521

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043645
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): SAIEDI NADER
Abstract: Anthony Giddens, "Actions, Subjectivity, and the Constitution of Meaning," Social Research 53 (Autumn 1986): 538.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970528

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043647
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): COATS A.W.
Abstract: Dopfer, "The Histonomic Approach to Economics."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970547

Journal Title: Rue Descartes
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40043913
Date: 3 1, 2001
Author(s): Leclerc-Olive Michèle
Abstract: I. Calvino, Leçons américaines, Gallimard, 1989, p. 100.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40978632

Journal Title: Rue Descartes
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044003
Date: 2 1, 2007
Author(s): CHATONSKY GRÉGORY
Abstract: Jean-François Lyotard, «Domus et la mégapole» in L'Inhumain, op. cit., p. 210-212.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40980535

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40044149
Date: 12 1, 1980
Author(s): SILVERMAN HUGH J.
Abstract: Hugh J. Silverman, Between Phenomenology and Structuralism (London and Boston: Routledge & Kegan Paul, in preparation).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40982669

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40044534
Date: 3 1, 1998
Author(s): Fellous Michèle
Abstract: Le Quilt possède une double dimension, singulière et militante : chaque panneau, chaque nom énoncé lors du déploiement signifie l'unicité de chaque disparu ; mais l'assemblage des patchworks, leur abandon à l'association qui va les recueillir, les assembler et les utiliser pour porter à l'attention du monde entier l'énormité de la catastrophe renvoie à la dimension sociale inhérente au décès de chaque individu mort du sida. Le développement fulgurant du rite du patchwork aux États-Unis s'explique par ce double enjeu et par la réappropriation de symboles fondateurs de l'imaginaire américain. En se réappropriant un symbole commun, le Quilt légitime et réintègre la communauté gay porteuse du projet dans cette société qui l'a niée. The Quilt has from the outset both a singular and militant dimension : each panel, each name mentioned during the unfolding means the uniqueness of each dead ; but the assembled patchworks, their donation to the association which will conserve, assemble and use them to draw worldwide attention to this dreadful disaster refer to the social dimension inherent to each individual having died of AIDS. The extremely rapid development of the patchwork rite in the United States can be explained by these two functions and within the reappropriation of founding symbols of the Americans'world of imagination. By reappropriating a common symbol the Quilt legitimates and reintegrates the gay community, bearer of the project, into a society from which it was rejected. Von Anfang an hat der Quilt eine eigenartige und zugleich militante Dimension. Jeder Teil des Patchworks, jeder Name, der während der Entfaltung ausgesprochen wird, besagt die Eigenartigkeit jedes Gestorbenen. Doch verweisen das Zusammenfügen der Patchworkwerke und ihre Überlassung dem Verein, der sie bewahren, zusammenfügen und verwenden wird, um die Aufmerksamkeit der ganzen Welt auf diese schreckliche Katastrophe zu lenken, auf die dem Tode jedes AIDSkranken inhärente soziale Dimension. Das äusserst schnelle Fortschreiten des Patchworksritus in den Vereinigten Staaten lässt sich durch diese zwei Aufgaben and durch die Wiederaneignung von Grundsymbolen der amerikanischen Einbildungswelt erklären. Durch die Wiederaneignung eines gemeinen Symbols legitimiert und reintegriert der Quilt die homosexuelle Gemeinschaft, die das Projekt trägt, in eine Gesellschaft, die sie zurückgeworfen hat.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40989961

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044571
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Laborde Denis
Abstract: De 1997 à 2002, eurent lieu la naissance, l'élaboration puis la création par l'Ensemble Modem de Francfort d'un opéra vidéo du compositeur minimaliste américain Steve Reich et de la vidéaste Beryl Korot: Three Tales. Cet opéra était une commande de Klaus Peter Kehr, directeur musical des Wiener Festwochen (Vienne). Sa réalisation mobilisa un important réseau de collaborations aboutissant à un montage financier mené sur la base d'une coproduction de grande ampleur réunissant des festivals européens de création contemporaine de premier rang et deux festivals américains. L'auteur décrit sa démarche, à travers quelques « moteurs de recherche », ainsi que son implication personnelle dans le projet lui-même. The birth, preparation, and actual performance of Three Tales, a video opera signed by Steve Reich, the American minimalist composer, and Beryl Korot, the video-artist, took place between 1997 and 2002, under the aegis of the Frankfurt Modern Ensemble. The opera had been commissioned by Klaus Peter Kehr, musical director of the Wiener Festwochen in Vienna. The project was thus based on a vast collaborative network resulting in an coproduction agreement for funding. This agreement brought together a number of leading European festivals for contemporary creation and two American festivals. The author of the paper describes his research protocol, by way of a certain number of "search engines". He also refers to his own personal involved in the project. Zwischen 1997 und 2002 wurde die Idee zu der Videooper „Three Tales" des minimalistischen Komponisten Steve Reich und des Videokünstlers Beryl Korot vom Modernen Ensemble der Oper Frankfurt umgesetzt. Die Oper war eine Auftragsarbeit des Intendanten der Wiener Festwochen, Klaus Peter Kehr. Ihre Inszenierung konnte finanziell durch ein Netzwerk realisiert werden, einer Kooperation von hochrangigen europäischen und amerikanischen Festivals zeitgenössischer Kunst. Der Autor beschreibt seine persönliche Mitarbeit an dem Projekt und sein Vorgehen anhand einiger „Suchmaschinen“.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/ethn.081.0119

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044587
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Gensburger Sarah
Abstract: Le titre de « Juste parmi les Nations » est décerné depuis 1963 par l'État d'Israël afin d'honorer la mémoire des non-Juifs « qui ont risqué leur vie pour venir en aide à des Juifs » . Le « Juste » reçoit un diplôme et une médaille par un représentant de l'Etat hébreu lors d'une cérémonie publique où les individus « sauvés » et leurs « sauveteurs » , ou leurs descendants, sont réunis. Cet article étudie comment, à travers cette cérémonie, s'effectue un bricolage entre des « mémoires » véhiculées par des institutions et des individus, Juifs et non-Juifs, résidant en France et en Israël. Comment s'explique le recours à une seule et même pratique de rappel public du passé par des individus dont les récits des souvenirs peuvent diverger ? The title of « Righteous among the Nations » has been attributed since 1963 by the State of Israel to honor « the high-minded gentiles who risked their lives to save Jews » . Each nomination goes with the gift of a medal and a diploma to the nominee during an official ceremony. This public event gathers « rescued people » and « rescuers » and members of each family. In this article, the author studies how, through this ceremony, a « patchwork » between different and plural memories can take place. In a common place and time, the different actors crosses institutions, individuals, Jews and non-Jews, living in France or in Israël. How can we explain the use of a single common practice of remembrance by individuals whose social characteristics are different and whose narrations of the past diverge from each other ? Der Titel « Gerechte(r) unter den Nationen » wird seit 1963 vom Staat Israel verliehen, um an Nicht-Juden zu erinnern, « die ihr Leben riskiert haben um Juden zu helfen » . Der/die Gerecht(e) erhält von einem Vertreter des Staates Israel im Rahmen einer Zeremonie und im Beisein der « Geretteten » ein Diplom und eine Medaille verliehen. Dieser Artikel geht an Hand einer Analyse dieser Zeremonie der Frage nach, inwiefern durch die Übertragung von Erinnerungen der Individuen und Institutionen — jüdische und nicht-jüdische, französische und israelische - ein Patchwork von Erinnerungen entsteht. Im Vordergrund steht dabei die Frage, wie der offizielle Rückgriff auf lediglich eine Vergangenheit zu erklären ist, wo doch von einer Verschiedenheit der Erinnerungen auszugehen ist ?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40991427

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044587
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Lemee-Gonçalves Carole
Abstract: Partant du constat que les faits sociaux de mémoire sont portés par des actes de communication, il s'agit ici de dégager les pratiques qui alimentent les formes de « l'agir » socio-mémoriel, aujourd'hui présent en France et ailleurs. Quels processus sont a l'œuvre dans des situations post-génocidaires, souvent aussi post-migratoires, comme dans la Shoah (« Khurbn » en yiddish) par exemple ? Dans le cas d'Ashkénazes, il s'agit d'une reinscription qualitative au sein des cartographies de la parenté, mais aussi d'une reconnexion avec des périodes antérieures au genocide et à l'ethnocide à travers des événements culturels. Since the work of memory cannot exist without inter-subjective exchanges, this paper introduces in the study of memory the concept of « social acting » created by Weber. Attempting to point out the plurality of the practices that feed the various forms of socio-memorial movements present today in France and elsewhere. Which are the processes taking on a very particular aspect in post-genocidal as in post-migratory situations such as after the Shoah (Khurbn in Yiddish) ? In the case of the Ashkenase, these processes are also post-ethnocide and consist in a qualitative re-inscription within genealogical mapping and simultaneously in the long development of a history in which the genocide constitutes a memorial screen as well as actions of re-inscribing and re-connecting with cultural markers associated to periods antedating the genocide and ethnocide. Da Erinnerungsarbeit nicht ohne das Betrachten von zwischenmenschlichem Austausch und sozialer Praxis erfolgen kann, soll im Rahmen dieses Artikels das Webersche Konzept des « Sozialen Handelns » in die Untersuchung von Erinnerungen einbezogen werden. Ausgehend von der Tatsache, dass soziale Erinnerungen durch Kommunikation ausgedrückt werden, möchte dieser Artikel die Vielfalt der Praktiken zeigen, die heute in Frankreich und anderswo die Vielzahl der gesellschaftlichen Erinnerungsbewegungen prägen. Die Erinnerungsprozesse verdeutlichen vor allem die soziale und zeitliche Beziehung zum Anderen. Besonders interessant zu analysieren ist sind Post-Shoah-(Khurbn auf Jiddisch) und Post-Auswanderungs-Erinnerungenen. In diesem Artikel richtet sich das Augenmerk vor allem auf Ashkenasische Juden aus Deutschland, Zentral-und Osteuropa, deren Situation nach dem Ethnozid betrachtet wird. Dabei ist eine qualitative Wiederaufnahme der Lebenspraxis der Elterngeneration zu beobachten ; ebenso wie ein Anknüpfen im Rahmen bestimmter kultureller Riten an die Zeit vor dem Völkermord.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40991434

Journal Title: Análise Social
Publisher: Gabinete de Investigações Sociais
Issue: i40045563
Date: 1 1, 1972
Author(s): Aguiar Joaquim
Abstract: «L'explication en Sociologie», in Introduction à l'épistémo- logie génétique, t. III, «La pensée biologique, la pensée psychologique et la pensée sociologique», Paris, PUF, 1951 XIII, reeditado em «Études sociologi- ques», Librairie Droz, Genève, 1967.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41007596

Journal Title: Análise Social
Publisher: Gabinete de Investigações Sociais
Issue: i40045662
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Emediato Carlos A.
Abstract: Samuel Bowles, Class Power and Mass Education,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41010296

Journal Title: Análise Social
Publisher: Instituto de Ciências Sociais da Universidade de Lisboa
Issue: i40045733
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): Valentim Artur
Abstract: (Patrício, 1989, pp. 226-227).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41011406

Journal Title: The Sociological Quarterly
Publisher: JAI Press Inc.
Issue: i380530
Date: 12 1, 1965
Author(s): Weller Dwight B.
Abstract: Traditional sources of sociohistorical data capture only a narrow sense of past lifeworlds. Ethnographic accounts often preserve greater details of social practice but have less clear guidelines for use as data. We evaluate the use of hermeneutical theory as providing guidelines for a method by which ethnographies may be used as sociohistorical data. Hermeneutical analysis of ethnographic "texts" is used to reconstruct patterns of daily life in early-twentieth-century rural Appalachia. This method involves: (1) concept-critique to separate observations from the theoretical framework of the ethnographic account, and (2) validation through a logic of internal consistency and comparison. Through hermeneutical analysis, ethnographics can be made to yield observations of social relations not otherwise available. Our analysis suggests benefits and drawbacks of hermeneutical analysis of ethnographic texts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4106338

Journal Title: International Journal of Arts Management
Publisher: École des Hautes Études Commerciales
Issue: i40047561
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Cova Bernard
Abstract: The proposition is that arts marketing should be conceived of as a dedicated field of endeavour so that consumers' immersion in the artistic experience occurs even in the case of a "difficult" art work. The focus is artistic experience-related phenomena. The authors introduce the concept of appropriation and then develop an appropriation cycle construct. Empirical research comprises introspective reports on consumer attendance at classical music concerts. The results show that the artistic experience is predicated on multiple rather than one-time immersion, and that full immersion may never occur. The authors conclude that those service elements that affect the way in which consumers experience an arts event should be managed throughout the appropriation process. Les auteurs proposent de concevoir le marketing des arts comme un domaine d'activité spécifique, afin que l'immersion des consommateurs dans l'expérience artistique soit possible même dans le cas d'une œuvre « difficile » . L'accent est mis sur les phénomènes liés à l'expérience artistique. Ils présentent le concept d'appropriation, puis développent un construit du cycle d'appropriation. Ils ont recours à la recherche empirique, soit les rapports d'analyse introspective des consommateurs ayant assisté à des concerts de musique classique. Les résultats indiquent que l'expérience artistique suppose de multiples immersions, non pas une seule, et que l'immersion totale risque de ne jamais se produire. Les auteurs concluent que les éléments du service qui influent sur l'expérience individuelle d'un événement artistique devraient être gérés tout au long du processus d'appropriation. Los autores proponen la idea de que el márketing de las artes debe concebirse como un emprendimiento en sí mismo, a fin de lograr la inmersión del consumidor en experiencia artística incluso en el caso de obras de arte "difíciles". El acento, entonces, está puesto en los fenómenos que se vinculan con la experiencia artística. Los autores presentan el concepto de apropiación y elaboran luego un modelo teórico de ciclo de apropiación. Por otra parte, analuzan los resultados de uno investigación empírica basada sobre los relatos introspectivos realizados por consumidores luego de asistir a conciertos de música clásica. Dichos resultados indican que la experienca artística toma forma con múltiples inmersiones y no sólo con una, y que la inmersión total puede no darse jamás. Los autores llegan a la conclusión de que el proceso de apropiación es el abordaje más idóneo para manejar aquellos elemontos del servicio que afectan la forma en que el consumidor experimenta un evento artístico.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41064841

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048276
Date: 9 1, 2005
Author(s): Keck Frédéric
Abstract: C. Gautier dans L'invention de la société civile, Lectures anglo-écossaises, Mandeville, Smith, Fer- guson, Paris, PUF, 1993, p. 254
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41099694

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048297
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): David Alain
Abstract: Si la personnalité philosophique de Michel Henry est saluée, son œuvre continue, quarante ans apres L'essence de la manifestation, à ne pas être reçue, ou à ne l'être que sur la base de malentendus. Pourquoi ? Les raisons alléguées peuvent sembler faibles (le ton absolu de Michel Henry, l'indifférence politique ou la sensibilité de droite qu'on lui prête, etc.), elles renvoient (la reconnaissance généralement faite de la « puissance » de sa pensée, ce qui est pressenti avec ce terme, plaident en ce sens) à une autre, plus décisive : la réception n'est pas la réception dans le monde mais la reception dans la vie, de la vie par elle-même – ce qui néanmoins serait la condition d'une politique pour notre temps. If Michel Henry's philosophical personality is indeed hailed, his work goes on, forty years after The Essence of Manifestation, not being received but on the basis of misunderstandings. Why ? The alleged reasons may seem rather weak (e.g. Michel Henry's absolute tone, his so-called political indifference, or his right-winged sensitiveness) ; they refer to another, more decisive, one (what is usually acknowledged as a potency of thought) : reception does not mean reception in this very world, but in life, which nonetheless would be the condition of a new politics of our time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41100650

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048303
Date: 9 1, 2010
Author(s): De Smet Daniel
Abstract: Brunschvig, « Devoir et pouvoir », p. 183, 214.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41100921

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048317
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Boyer Alain
Abstract: Deuxième partie, chap. II, p. 211-212.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41101451

Journal Title: Portuguese Studies
Publisher: W. S. Maney & Son LTD
Issue: i40048536
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): GARCÍA ANA ISABEL BRIONES
Abstract: Pires, p. 183.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41105755

Journal Title: Sociologický Časopis / Czech Sociological Review
Publisher: Sociologický ústav Akademie Věd České Republiky
Issue: i40049614
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Jacobs Amy
Abstract: Jan Tomasz Gross, Les Voisins {The Neighbours) [2001].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41132596

Journal Title: GeoJournal
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40050915
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Rosin Christopher
Abstract: (www.argos.org.nz).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41148278

Journal Title: Amerikastudien / American Studies
Publisher: Universitätsverlag C. Winter
Issue: i40051449
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Sielke Sabine
Abstract: Sabine Sielke and Anne Hofmann, "Serienmörder und andere Killer: Die Endzeitfiktionen von Bret Easton Ellis und Mi- chel Houellebecq," Anglo-Romanische Kulturkontakte: von Humanismus bis Postkolonialismus, ed. Andrew Johnston and Ulrike Schneider (Berlin: Dahlem UP, 2002) 283-318.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41158073

Journal Title: Amerikastudien / American Studies
Publisher: Universitätsverlag C. Winter
Issue: i40051457
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Claviez Thomas
Abstract: Sherman Alexie's Reservation Blues.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41158261

Journal Title: Histoire de l'education
Publisher: Institut national de recherche pédagogique
Issue: i40051561
Date: 5 1, 2006
Author(s): BAUBÉROT Arnaud
Abstract: «Le CNAL et nous», Foi éducation, 29e année, n° 49, octobre-décembre 1959, pp. 194-196.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41160239

Journal Title: Histoire de l'education
Publisher: Institut national de recherche pédagogique
Issue: i40051564
Date: 5 1, 2007
Author(s): BAQUÈS Marie-Christine
Abstract: Op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41160280

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053874
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Violet Dominique
Abstract: Les processus complexes et souvent paradoxaux que l'alternance met en jeu chez l'apprenant se révèlent de possibles points d'appui des apprentissages signifiants. Une pédagogie qui ne tente pas de les éliminer amène alors à concevoir le travail de l'enseignant comme un travail de médiation elle aussi paradoxale. Une telle conception de l'alternance, loin d'enfermer celle-ci dans un rapport sclérosant à la tradition et sans pour autant l'en couper, montre en quoi l'articulation d'espaces et de temps contradictoires peut être pédagogiquement dynamique. Ce qui, en retour, ne manque pas d'interroger l'enseignement/apprentissage dans l'école dite traditionnelle. Complex and often paradoxical processes elaborated by the learner in an alternation situation may help realizing relevant learning. When pedagogy doesn't try to eliminate them, teacners'work can be conceived of as a mediation activity equally paradoxical. In such a conception, alternation is not separated from tradition but not blocked by it either. It shows to what extend links between contradictory spaces and periods of time may be educationally dynamic. Which, in return, asks questions concerning teaching/learning in a traditional school.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41201487

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053884
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): Olry Paul
Abstract: Se former dans le travail apparaît maintenant comme une part naturelle, évidente de l'activité. Les personnes semblent pouvoir spontanément passer d'une posture de production à une position d'apprenant. Étudier les conditions pour se former dans des univers contraints révèle la nécessité de s'ajuster aux délais de la production et au rythme de la formation. Nous désignons par tempo cet ajustement de l'individu aux contraintes temporelles de la production, lui permettant de saisir dans les situations des occasions d'apprentissage. Les exemples fournis, issus de formations qualifiantes dans l'industrie, en proposent une interprétation croisant les dimensions d'engagement personnel et de transformation de l'activité. The "on the job training" seems for everyone, a natural part of the working activity. People would be able to change their point of view to perform the product target and in the same time the goals of training. This article shows that workers have to play with the time constraints to create by themselves a learning situation. We call "tempo" this capacity to catch in the course of the job, an opportunity to learn. From examples taken in the field of the training within industry, we suggest that this tempo depends on personal involvement in the changing or the activity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41201764

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053904
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Daunay Bertrand
Abstract: Depuis que la didactique du français s'est constituée comme champ de recherche, la question de l'enseignement de la littérature a toujours été centrale, même si l'approche didactique de la littérature apparaît davantage comme un espace de questions que comme un lieu de construction d'une théorie cohérente de la littérature, de son enseignement et de son apprentissage. Concernant l'enseignement de la littérature, la didactique du français est essentiellement un champ de discussions théoriques, qui portent aussi bien sur le statut des objets enseignables et sur les conditions de leur enseignabilité que sur la sélection des outils théoriques permettant l'approche de ces objets. Si, aux fondements de la didactique de la littérature, c'est la contestation de l'enseignement traditionnel qui domine, sur des postulats théoriques à forte teneur idéologique, de nombreuses recherches descriptives ont interrogé aussi bien la notion de littérature que les pratiques de lecture des élèves comme les pratiques effectives d'enseignement de la littérature. Au cœur des recherches didactiques se place la question de la sélection des savoirs et des pratiques (lecture et écriture notamment) susceptibles de devenir objets d'enseignement et d'apprentissage, à tous les niveaux du cursus scolaire. Since the didactics of French formed a research field, the question of teaching literature has constantly been crucial, even if the didactical approach of literature seems more like a forum to ask questions, rather than a place where a coherent theory on literature, its teaching and learning is being developed. As for teaching literature, the didactics of French is mainly an area of theoretical discussion as much about the status of objects to be taught and the conditions on which they can be taught as how to select theoretical tools to approach those objects. If, of all the founding elements of didactics of literature, objecting to traditional teaching is the main element based on theoretical postulates with strong ideological content, numerous descriptive research works have questioned the notion of literature as well as the students' reading practices and the actual literature teaching practices. The question of selecting the knowledge and practices (reading and writing for instance) that could become teaching and learning objects at all schooling levels is central to didactical research. Desde que la didáctica del francés se constituyó como campo de investigación, la cuestión de la enseñanza de la literatura siempre ha sido central, aunque el enfoque didáctico de la literatura se presenta más como un espacio de cuestiones que como un lugar de construcción de una teoría coherente de la literatura, de su enseñanza y de su aprendizaje. En lo que se refiere a la enseñanza de la literatura, la didáctica del francés es esencialmente un campo de discusiones teóricas, que tratan tanto del estatuto de los objetos que se pueden enseñar y las condiciones en que pueden ser enseñados como de la selección de los instrumentos teóricos que permiten el enfoque de esos objetos. Si, en los cimientos de la didáctica de la literatura, es la discusión de la enseñanza tradicional la que domina, sobre los postulados teóricos con fuerte contenido ideológico, numerosas investigaciones descriptivas han interrogado tanto la noción de literatura como las prácticas de lectura de los alumnos como las prácticas efectivas de enseñanza de la literatura. En el medio de las investigaciones didácticas se plantea la cuestión de la selección de los saberes y de las prácticas (lectura y escritura particularmente) susceptibles de ser objetos de enseñanza y aprendizaje, en todos los niveles del recorrido escolar. Seit die Didaktik des Französichen zum Forschungsfeld herangewachsen ist, hat die Frage des Unterrichtens der Literatur immer im Mittelpunkt gestanden, auch wenn die didaktische Vorgenshensweise der Literatur eher als ein Feld der Fragen als ein Feld der Bildung einer zusammenhängenden Literaturtheorie erscheint, die die Art und Weise bestimmt, wie man sie unterrichten und lernen muss. Was das Unterrichten der Literatur angeht, erweist sich die Didaktik des Französichen als ein Feld der theoretischen Diskussionen, die sowohl den Status der zu unterrichtenden Inhalte und die Bedingungen ihres möglichen Unterrichtetwerdens als die Wahl der theoretischen Werkzeuge betreffen, die die Behandlung dieser Inhalte ermöglichen. Wenn in den Ursprüngen der Literaturdidaktik das Bestreiten des traditionnellen Unterrichts im Mittelpunkt steht, so haben auf theoretischen Postulaten mit starkem ideologischen Inhalt viele Forschungsarbeiten sowohl den Begriff der Literatur als auch die Lesepraktiken der Schüler sowie die tatsächlichen Unterrichtspraktiken der Literatur in Frage gestellt. Im Herzen der didaktichen Forschungsarbeiten steht die Frage der Auswahl der Kenntnisse und der Praktiken (insbesondere Lesen und Schreiben), die imstande sind, Lehr- und Lernobjekte in allen Stufen des Schulprogramms zu werden.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41202262

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053917
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): Théry Irène
Abstract: Cet article (1) présente une réflexion théorique sur la notion de genre, de ses définitions et ses usages en sciences sociales. S'opposant à l'approche dominante qui conçoit le genre comme identité ou attribut socialement construits des personnes, conception qu'elle considère comme essentialisante ou substantialisante, l'auteur argumente en faveur d'une approche relationnelle du genre conçu comme modalité des relations sociales. Elle se fonde pour cela sur des travaux d'anthropologie comparative et historique qui contraignent à reconsidérer le dualisme du moi et du corps constitutif de l'idéologie individualiste de la personne, et critique I'hypostase du Moi comme homoncule constitué à partir d'une absolutisation de la première personne. Analysant le système sexué des trois personnes grammaticales, elle soutient que, n'étant pas référentiel, « le je de l'interlocution n'a ni sexe, ni genre ». Les apports croisés de l'anthropologie et de la philosophie analytique la conduisent à revoir la notion de personne pour mieux penser la capacité proprement humaine de se reconnaître comme d'un sexe sans être jamais assigné à celui-ci. This article presents a theoretical work on the idea of gender, its definitions and uses in social science. The author objects to the mainstream approach that sees gender as an identity or an attribute that some people socially construct. She sees that idea as essentializing or substantializing. She argues in favor of a relational approach of gender conceived as mode of social interactions. Her approach is based on comparative and historical works of anthropologists that lead to consider the dualism of the ego and the body which make the individualistic ideology of a persona, and she criticizes the hypostasis of the ego as homunculus made up from absolutizing the id. Analyzing the gender system of the three grammatical persons, she asserts that, as it is not a reference, the other person's "I" does not have a sex nor a gender. The contributions from both anthropology and analytic philosophy lead her to reconsider the notion of persona so as to better grasp the capacity—specifically human—to see ourselves belonging to a sex group without having ever been assigned to it. Este artículo presenta una reflexión teórica respecto a la noción de género, de sus definiciones y sus usos en ciencias sociales. Oponiéndose al enfoque dominante que concibe el género como identidad o atributo socialmente construidos de las personas, concepción que considera como esencializante y sustancializante, la autora argumenta a favor de un enfoque relacional del género concebido como modalidad de las relaciones sociales. Para ella, se basa en los trabajos de antropología comparativa e histórica que obligan a reconsiderar el dualismo del yo y del cuerpo constitutivo de la ideología individualista de la persona, y critica la hipóstasis del Yo como homúnculo constituido a partir de una absolutización de la primera persona. Al analizar el sistema sexuado de las tres personas gramaticales, sostiene que al no ser referencial, "el yo de la interlocución no tiene ni sexo, ni género". Los aportes convergentes de la antropología y de la filosofía analítica lo llevan a reconsiderar la noción de persona para pensar mejor la capacidad propiamente humana de reconocerse como de un sexo sin nunca ser asignado a él. Dieser Artikel bietet theoretische Uberlegungen über den Begriff Gender, seine Definitionen und seinen Gebrauch in den Sozialwissenschaften. Die Autorin setzt sich gegen die meist verbreitete Auffassung des Genders als sozial aufgebaute Identität oder Attribut des Einzelnen, denn sie betrachtet sie als eine essentialisierende bzw. substantialisierende Definition. Dagegen argumentiert sie für eine beziehungsmäßige Herangehensweise an das Gender, die es als eine Modalität der sozialen Beziehungen erfasst. Sie bezieht sich dabei auf vergleichenden und historischen Anthropologiearbeiten, die uns dazu zwingen, das Dualismus des Ichs und des Körpers zu überdenken, der einen Bestandteil der individualistischen Ideologie des Menschen darstellt, und kritisiert dazu die Hypostase des Ichs als Einzelnen, der auf Grund einer Absolutisierung der ersten Person geschaffen wird. Indem sie das geschlechtliche System der drei grammatikalischen Personen analysiert, behauptet die Autorin, dass auf Grund seiner Unbezüglichkeit „das Ich in der Interlokution weder Geschlecht noch Gender hat". Die Beiträge der Anthropologie und der analytischen Philosophie führen zu einer Überdenkung des Begriffs Mensch, um die rein menschliche Fähigkeit besser zu erfassen, die darin besteht, dass man sich einem Geschlecht anschließt, ohne dass es einem je zugewiesen wird.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41202564

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053918
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Allieu-Mary Nicole
Abstract: Cette note de synthèse souligne la spécificité de la discipline enseignée. L'histoire scolaire occupe une position originale dans le champ des didactiques par la complexité de ses références (production savante, auto-référence scolaire et usages publics de l'histoire). Tendus entre une transmission de connaissances consensuelles et la recherche d'une posture critique, les objets d'histoire enseignés demeurent soumis à des questionnements renouvelés au gré de la demande sociale comme le montrent les récents débats autour des questions mémorielles vives et concurrentes. L'histoire enseignée apparaît ainsi comme un mixte articulant représentations sociales, savoirs privés et connaissances validées. Depuis une quinzaine d'années, des travaux ont permis de mieux cerner le « penser en histoire » et les processus cognitifs spécifiques en jeu dans la classe (temps historique, conceptualisation, problématisation, construction de schemes explicatifs). Des recherches contextualisées ont permis d'explorer les pratiques professionnelles effectives et d'en modéliser le fonctionnement « normal » : une discipline qui privilégie la transmission de savoirs disant la réalité du passé et attachée à la neutralité du texte enseigné ; une discipline qui peine à mettre en cohérence des finalités intellectuelles ambitieuses (outiller le citoyen actif dans la cité de demain) et des activités dans la classe souvent cantonnées à la mémorisation, au repérage et à la catégorisation. Aussi voit-on se dessiner dans les travaux actuels, une problématique centrée sur les écarts entre les intentions et les pratiques. En articulant la notion de soumission aux règles du « contrat didactique » avec les autres modèles théoriques des sciences humaines et sociales mobilisés au sein des équipes de recherche, les travaux menés de manière encore trop dispersée, laissent apparaître des acquis importants qui pourraient être pris en compte dans la formation des enseignants This paper underlines the specificity of the subject taught. School history holds a special position in didactics due to the complexity of its references (scholarly production, self referencing and public use of history). Set in between passing consensual knowledge on and seeking a critical position, school history objects are still under new questioning that changes with social demands as recent debates on actual competing questions related to memory show it. Therefore school history seems to be a blend of social representations, private knowledge and proven knowledge. For fifteen years, works have enabled us to better define "historical thinking" and the specific cognitive processes that are involved in class (historical time, conceptualization, problematization, construction of explanatory schemes). Conceptualized research have allowed to explore real professional practices and model their "normal" functioning: a subject that favours passing on knowledge telling the truth about the past and being attached to using neutral documents; a subject that has difficulty to coherently link ambitious intellectual purposes (preparing active citizens for tomorrow's world) to class activities often limited to memorizing, recognizing and sorting. That is why we can see a problematic develop which is centered on the difference between intentions and practices. Connecting the notion of adherence to the rules of the "didactical contract" to the other theoretical models of human sciences developed within the research team., the work -done in a still too unfocused way -reveals some important acquired knowledge which could be taken into account in teacher training programmes. Esta nota subraya la especificidad de la disciplina enseñada. La historia escolar ocupa una posición original en el campo de las didácticas por la complejidad de sus referencias (producción sabia, autorreferencia escolar y usos públicos de la historia). Divididos entre una transmisión de conocimientos consensúales y la búsqueda de una postura crítica, los objetos de historia enseñados permanecen sometidos a interrogaciones repetidas a merced de la petición social como lo muestran los debates recientes en torno a las cuestiones relativas a las memorias vivas y competidoras. La historia enseñada aparece así como una mezcla que articula representaciones sociales, saberes privados y conocimientos validados. Desde hace unos quince años, ciertos trabajos permitieron delimitar mejor el "pensar en historia" y los procesos cognoscitivos específicos en juego en la clase (tiempo histórico, conceptualización, problematización, construcción de esquemas explicativos). Investigaciones contextualizadas han permitido explorar las prácticas profesionales efectivas y modelizar su funcionamiento "normal": una disciplina que privilegia la transmisión de saberes que dicen la realidad del pasado y apegada a la neutralidad del texto enseñado; una disciplina a la que le cuesta poner en coherencia finalidades intelectuales ambiciosas (preparar al ciudadano activo en la ciudad de mañana) y actividades en la clase a menudo limitadas a la memorización, la localización y la categorización. Por eso se ve dibujarse en los trabajos actuales, una problemática centrada en las diferencias entre las intenciones y las prácticas. Articulando la noción de sumisión a las reglas del "contrato didáctico" con los otros modelos teóricos de las SHS movilizadas en el seno de los equipos de investigación, los trabajos llevados de manera todavía demasiado dispersada dejan aparecer experiencias ¡mportantes que podrían tomarse en consideración en la formación de los docentes. Dieser Bericht unterstreicht die Besonderheit des Schulfachs Geschichte. Geschichte in der Schule hat eine originale Stellung im Feld der Didaktik wegen der Komplexität ihrer Referenzen (wissenschaftliche Schriften, Referenz für sich selbst in der Schule und öffentliche Benutzung der Geschichte). Zwischen der Verbreitung konsesueller Kenntnisse und der Suche nach einer kritischen Haltung hin-und hergerissen, sind die Lehrinhalte in Geschichte nach wie vor je nach sozialer Anfrage einer ständigen Fragestellung ausgesetzt, wie neulich die Debatten um lebhafte und entgegengesetzte Gedächtnisfragen. Die Geschichte als Schulfach erscheint also als eine Mischung zwischen sozialen Vorstellungen, privatem Wissen und bewährten Kenntnissen. Seit etwa 15 Jahren haben einige Arbeiten es ermöglicht, das „Denken in Geschichte” und die kognitiven Prozesse besser einzuschätzen, die in der Schule auf dem Spiel stehen (historische Zeit, Konzeptualisierung, Problematisierung, Bildung erklärender Schemata). Kontextualisierte Forschungsarbeiten haben es erlaubt, die tatsächlichen Berufspraktiken zu erforschen und „normalen” Betrieb zu modellieren: ein Schulfach, das die Übertragung von Kenntnissen, die die Realität der Vergangenheit beschreibt und großen Wert auf die Neutralität des unterrichteten Textes legt; ein Fach, das sich Mühe gibt, ehrgeizige intellektuelle Zwecke (den aktiven Bürger in der Stadt von morgen mit Werkzeugen bewaffnen) mit Aktivitäten in der Klasse in Kohärenz zu bringen, die sich oft auf Memorisierung, Markierung und Kategorisierung begrenzen. Auf diese Weise kann man in den heutigen Arbeiten beobachten, wie eine Problematik auftaucht, im Mittelpunkt derer die Diskrepanz zwischen Absichten und Praktiken steht. In dem man den Begriff der Unterwerfung zu den Regeln des „didaktischen Vertrags” mit den anderen theoretischen Modellen (in den Sozial-und Geschichtswissenschaften) kombiniert, die in den Forschungsteams benutzt werden, lassen die bisher auf noch zu verstreute Weise geführten Arbeiten wichtige Erwerbungen erkennen, die in der Lehrerausbildung berücksichtigt werden könnten.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41202586

Journal Title: Desarrollo Económico
Publisher: Instituto de Desarrollo Económico y Social
Issue: i40054876
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): BARANGER DENIS
Abstract: D. Robbins (2008)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41219137

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40054974
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Vila-Chã João J.
Abstract: Carìtas in Ventate, nr. 45; cit., p. 78
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41220788

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40054977
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): DeRoo Neal
Abstract: Zlomislic, Mark and Neal DeRoo (ed.), Cross and Khôra: Deconstruction and Christianity in the Work of John D. Caputo (Eugene, Or.: Pickwick, 2010), pp. 118-150.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41220935

Journal Title: Reference & User Services Quarterly
Publisher: American Library Association
Issue: i40056015
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Budd John M.
Abstract: The philosophical and practical work of M. M. Bakhtin provides an important aid to theoretical grounding with regard to information seeking. In particular, his ideas of dialogic communication suggest a way to engage in the act of information seeking and the accompanying mediation. His work is especially important because of its phenomenological basis, which emphasizes the intentionality of communication, the connection of practice to being, and the relationship between self and other. Bakhtin's thought offers a framework for the rethinking of public services in libraries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41241356

Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i383814
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Zerilli Charity
Abstract: Ehrhardt and Langner
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4125406

Journal Title: Hungarian Journal of English and American Studies (HJEAS)
Publisher: Institute of English and American Studies, University of Debrecen
Issue: i40057449
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Gross Robert F.
Abstract: The Play About the Baby remains neglected by interpreters of Albee's work because its austerely schematic mode of presentation seems to keeps everything on the surface, making acts of interpretation seem superfluous. Therefore, rather than trying to interpret the play, it is more useful to ask, following the suggestion of Gilles Deleuze, what it does. The play is a dramamachine that produces loss and asserts the centrality of loss to the constitution of selfhood. This loss is achieved by the deployment of perversion, both sexual and linguistic, against Boy and Girl's innocence. The use of perversion ultimately even questions whether there was ever any state of presence that preceded loss. These tactics seem to suggest a wider set of sexual possibilities, but the tactics are ultimately subordinated to the production of melancholia though loss, a subordination that traps the work in a world of severely limited possibilities and encounters.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274460

Journal Title: Hungarian Journal of English and American Studies (HJEAS)
Publisher: Institute of English and American Studies, University of Debrecen
Issue: i40057450
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Wake Paul
Abstract: This review essay attempts to provide a broad sampling of Conrad studies that is representative of major currents in the field. The essay is structured around three basic areas of Conrad studies—biography, textual scholarship, and criticism. The first of these is given the greatest prominence because of the recent publication of two major biographies with sharply contrasting approaches to Conrad's Polish background and its importance in the appreciation of his works. The section devoted to textual scholarship comments on the ambitious project launched by Cambridge University Press to make available Conrad's works and letters in an authoritative form for the first time. The essay concludes with a brief overview of recent critical currents in Conrad scholarship, in the light of the ongoing debate over the usefulness of "extrinsic" as opposed to "intrinsic" approaches.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274480

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057457
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): HAŁAS ELŻBIETA
Abstract: (Strauss 1991 p. 19)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274562

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057460
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): BOKSZAŃSKI ZBIGNIEW
Abstract: The article begins with an analysis of the concept of identity and a description of two theoretical traditions which lie at the source of this concept and which determine the operationalisations of the identity concept within the context of social change (G.H. Mead and E. Erikson). The author then goes on to discuss the problems which evolve from the many applications of the concept of identity to analysis of collectives. The concept of collective identity is outlined and four basic ways of understanding this concept in contemporary sociology are discussed. The author refers in his presentation to the works of F. Barth, R. Turner, A. Touraine, S. N. Eisenstadt, E. Gellner, and A. Kłoskowska. The author concludes his article with several comments focusing on the relationships between social change and collective identity and he refers to those approaches which either stress the relative independence of identity formulae and social structure or even view the evolving patterns of identity as a factor contributing to social change.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274594

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057469
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): KŁOSKOWSKA ANTONINA
Abstract: As the twentieth century comes to an end, and with it a millennium, there has been much heated reflection on the passing age and the period of transition. Among the many characteristic phenomena of modern times, globalization has attracted particularly much attention. The process of European integration may be traced back to ancient times (vide Roman imperialism or Carolingian universalism). Recently, however, globalization has expanded and it has accelerated considerably. The author of this paper focuses on the current, paradoxical coexistence of global tendencies toward integration on the one hand and very clearly manifested, diversifying (or even separatists) national and nationalist tendencies on the other hand. The author analyzes these homogenizing tendencies at the level of media pop culture on the one hand and the increasing, even acute, awareness of diversity, including the diversity of national cultures, on the other hand. She does so within the framework of the symbolic culture concept. Contemporarily, tendencies toward globalization are suspended between the Scylla of uniformizatdon and the Charybdis of diversity. Sociology is particularly qualified to study these phenomena, at both local and universal levels.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274671

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057477
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): STANISZKIS JADWIGA
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, "Religia i polityka," [Religion and Politics] interview in L'Express (23-29 July 1998), reprinted in Forum , no 32, 1998.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274749

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057480
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): MISZTAL BARBARA A.
Abstract: The article asserts that a search for truth ought to be carrying out in such a way as to preserve or enhance solidarity. It demonstrates the necessity and the difficulties of making atrocious and traumatic historical events legally accountable. The necessity and difficulties have been recently fuelled by the trends towards the openness of modern identity and the growing importance of human rights, both of them demanding settling conflicts in the context of the multiplication of particularistic memories, yet without undermining social solidarity constructed on liberal foundations. The article argue that because of the hybrid nature of the task, unresolved tensions between memory and history, the erosion of the state's ability to impose unitary and unifying framework of memory, there is no simple and quick solution to tensions between memory, solidarity, and therefore to manage these strains we need to rely a plurality of contending narratives and civility of rules.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274787

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057483
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): HAŁAS ELŻBIETA
Abstract: T. Abel, Systematic Sociology in Germany: A Critical Analysis of Some Attempts to Establish Sociology as an Independent Science. New York: Columbia University Press, 1929, p. 113.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274815

Journal Title: Studies in English Literature, 1500-1900
Publisher: Rice University
Issue: i384277
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Cheney Patrick
Abstract: An assessment of recent scholarly work treating the literature of the English Renaissance and some general observations on the state of the profession. A full bibliography and price list of the works received by SEL for consideration follow.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4127500

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057513
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): STANISZKIS JADWIGA
Abstract: Brussels 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41275147

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057513
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): HAŁAS ELŻBIETA
Abstract: (Kania 2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41275150

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057514
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): WRÓBEL SZYMON
Abstract: Patrick H. Hutton, Foucault, Freud, and The Technologies of the Self , in: Technologies of the Self , Ed. Luther Martin, Huck Gutman, Patrick H. Hutton, Massachusetts 1988, p. 121.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41275157

Journal Title: The Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i384292
Date: 9 1, 1955
Author(s): Whyte Jack
Abstract: In a variety of ways, all ethnographies are politically cast and policy relevant. Each of three recurrent political rhetorics is related to a unique set of fieldwork practices. Ethnographies that report holistically on journeys to "the other side" build policy/political significance by contesting popular stereotypes. Theoretical ethnographies draw on political imagination to fill in for a lack of variation in participant observation data and to model an area of social life without attempting to rule out alternative explanations. Comparative analytic studies build political relevance by revealing social forces that are hidden by local cultures. Each of these three genres of ethnographic methodology faces unique challenges in relating fieldwork data to politically significant explanations. By shaping the ethnographers relations to subjects and readers, each methodology also structures a distinctive class identity for the researchers-as worker, as aristocrat, or as bourgeois professional.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4127626

Journal Title: British Journal of Sociology of Education
Publisher: Carfax Publishing Co.
Issue: i384398
Date: 9 1, 1995
Author(s): Zerilli Jo-Anne
Abstract: This paper seeks to outline and evaluate Pierre Bourdieu's work as it has appeared most recently in feminist studies and the field of gender and education. In particular, it suggests ways in which Bourdieu's theoretical insights could be seen to more effectively contribute to cutting edge debates in both social theory and feminist thought regarding concepts such as agency, identity and domination. It also argues that a more creative and empirical engagement with the recent work of Bourdieu, alongside an interdisciplinary reading of more recent cultural and social theories of power, would be a fruitful way forward in advancing a feminist sociology of education. In the present historical moment and against the tide of postmodern and post-structuralist feminist accounts, Bourdieu is often read as a determinist who has little to offer contemporary feminist debates or who argues that masculine domination is too tightly woven to social practices of a given field. In short, this paper argues that such a view is not only a misreading of Bourdieu's work on fundamental theoretical grounds, but fails to acknowledge the ways in which his more recent work on masculinity addresses both the cultural and social conditions underlying contemporary forms of symbolic domination. In short, the paper argues that Bourdieu's theory offers an analytical breadth and range beyond the scope of anything that a normative, liberal account of masculine domination could provide. Yet, in drawing from such diversity, Bourdieu's oeuvre is able to resist incomprehensibility. It stands as a highly focused, realistic and generative attempt (McNay, 1999; McLeod, 2004) to chart the problems of subordination, differentiation and hierarchy, and to expose the possibilities, as well as the limits, of gendered self-hood.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4128673

Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i40058283
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Longhurst C. A.
Abstract: Paul Ilie's "Language and Cognition"
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41289943

Journal Title: Historical Reflections / Réflexions Historiques
Publisher: Division of Human Studies, Alfred University
Issue: i40058661
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): Hutton Patrick H.
Abstract: François Hartog, "Time, History and the Writing of History: The Order of Time," KVHAA Konferenser (Stockholm, Sweden) 37 (1996): 95-113.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41299336

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40058715
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): BONNEUIL NOËL
Abstract: Noel Bonneuil, "Morphological Transition of Schooling in Nineteenth Century France," (submitted).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41300048

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40058716
Date: 2 1, 2011
Author(s): FORCE PIERRE
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41300058

Journal Title: Journal of Social History
Publisher: George Mason University
Issue: i40058998
Date: 7 1, 2011
Author(s): McCormack Jo
Abstract: This article examines social memories in France over the last 10 years. There has been a significant amount of 'memory work' during this period, concerning various aspects of French history, including the World Wars, but predominantly postcolonial issues: the Algerian War, the legacy of slavery, memories of Empire and memories of Immigration in particular. The 'devoir de mémoire' (duty to remember) and 'work of memory' (Paul Ricœur) have taken on greater, and controversial, proportions. While President Jacques Chirac was for some the 'président du devoir de mémoire' (President who championed the duty to remember), President Nicolas Sarkozy seems intent on ending what he sees as the trend towards 'repentance'. After a discussion of the wider memory culture in France, this article focuses on collective and social memories of the Franco-Algerian War (1954-62) Through an analysis of various 'vectors of memory' (Henry Rousso) it argues that the recent upsurge in 'memory work' in France is very much anchored in the present postcolonial social context in France. That memory work is however largely symbolic and in some ways unsatisfactory. It shows that much of the recent work of memory has been only belatedly and partially undertaken by the State, and with civil society in some ways yet to follow.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/jsh.2011.0048

Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i40059451
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Baumgartner Frédérique
Abstract: Pane, Lettre, p. 152.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/oxartj/kcr020

Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060550
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Guilhaumou Jacques
Abstract: El autor reflexiona sobre la evolución de la historia del discurso en Francia y su aproximación a la historia semántica, inspirada en la obra de Koselleck, y a la historia del discurso de tradición anglosajona. Tras repasar los antecedentes de la actual historia del discurso francesa desde los años setenta y evaluar la influencia de la obra de Foucault en esta disciplina, el autor aborda, a la luz de los últimos trabajos de Quentin Skinner, la cuestión de la intencionalidad individual y colectiva de los textos históricos, es decir, los mecanismos que constituyen y explican, en palabras de Koselleck, «la conexión empírica entre la realidad y el discurso». The author thinks about the evolution of the history of discourse in France and its approach to semantic history as inspired by the work of Koselleck, and also to the history of discourse in the Anglo-Saxon tradition. After revising the precedents of the current French history of speech from the 70s and evaluating the influence of the work of Foucault in this discipline, the author approaches, in the light of Quentin Skinner's last works, the question of the individual and collective premeditation of historical texts, that is to say, the mechanisms that constitute and explain, in words of Koselleck, «the empirical connection between reality and discourse».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41325250

Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060550
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Sebastián Javier Fernández
Abstract: Ibid., p. 632.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41325255

Journal Title: Annual Review of Anthropology
Publisher: Annual Reviews
Issue: i388662
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): Zablocki Charles F.
Abstract: Peacock & Kirsch's The Human Direction (1980) Peacock The Human Direction 1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4132879

Journal Title: Hypatia
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40061362
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): TARVER ERIN C.
Abstract: Stolberg 2009.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1527-2001.2011.01235.x

Journal Title: Acta Sociologica
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i40061446
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Lebel Udi
Abstract: Individual behaviors, such as loss-coping and “grief work” are affected in organizational contexts. In everything pertaining to coping with trauma in general, and loss more particularly, the individual is “trapped” within a political psychology that enforces the habitus and expectations of institutional dominance on the ostensibly intimate and private response. Regimes have perceived bereavement over battlefield deaths as a form of social capital that can be mobilized to enhance national loyalty and political support. Employing both existential/hermeneutic and institutional analysis, this study examines three diachronic models of bereavement — hegemonic, political and civil — and their political ramifications in the Israeli context.Drawing on changing parental conceptual orientations towards fallen sons and their role as cultural and ideological agents in public sphere, the article traces the movement of bereavement from its capture by the hegemonic state institutions to its creations under the domination of others institutions: political and civic and ultimate use in critiquing the political and military echelon. The article indicates the powerful impact of the social institutional-organizational context on the intimate-psychological context of coping with loss, by illustrating this phenomenon in the Israeli society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41330471

Journal Title: Oral History
Publisher: Oral History Society
Issue: i40061538
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Thonfeld Christoph
Abstract: As most European societies have struggled to find a consensus for working up their World War Two past, former forced labourers often had to endure ensuing societal initiatives to suppress or instrumentalise their memories or to see them tied to overreaching political or ethical imperatives. This article tries to trace the whereabouts of these memories in societal and individual perspectives. First, forced labour in Nazi Germany can be seen as part of a forced migration experience. Second, the memories of Nazi forced labour have often been used to represent the experiences of collaboration and defeat in World War Two in the respective countries. Third, national political and moral economies have shaped the societal status of former forced labourers' memories. These memories have hardly found their proper place in most of the respective national pasts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41332163

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40063719
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): PHILLIPS MARK SALBER
Abstract: Hume, Treatise , 385.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342618

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40063719
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): MARION MATHIEU
Abstract: Collingwood et la philosophie du vingtième siècle! Collingwood and Twentieth-Century Philosophy, at the Université du Québec à Montréal in October 2007 .
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342623

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40063738
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Jewsiewicki Bogumil
Abstract: (Dibwe dia Mwembu & Jewsiewicki 2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342880

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40063738
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Lallier Christian
Abstract: Gérard Althabe au séminaire de Nicolas Flamant, « Anthropologie et entreprise », à l'École des hautes études en sciences sociales, en 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342881

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40063739
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Adell Nicolas
Abstract: (Jourdain 2010)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342934

Journal Title: The French Review
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of French
Issue: i40063955
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Turk Edward Baron
Abstract: The 2010 edition of the Festival d'Avignon stayed true to its mission of programming risky and often unsettling new works that tend to focus as much interest on performing bodies as on recited texts. A substantial part of the program was devoted to works by this year's artistes associés, Christoph Marthaler and Olivier Cadiot. Another significant portion of the roster offered dance-theatre pieces by such choreographers as Alain Platel, Josef Nadj, Faustin Linyekula, and Anne Teresa De Keersmaeker. Representing a new generation of experimental creators for the stage were Philippe Quesne, Gisèle Vienne, and the Groupe de Recherche Artistique (GdRA).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41346033

Journal Title: The French Review
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of French
Issue: i40063959
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Roe Glenn H.
Abstract: A fierce opponent of the historicist approach to literature that dominated French academe during his lifetime, the essayist and poet Charles Péguy (1873–1914) would theorize an alternative literary method that through the act of faithful and participatory reading could transcend the limitations of historicism. Outlined in his dialogue with History, Clio, Péguy's vision of the literary act is that of an intersubjective operation of mutual understanding between reader and author, in which the living relevance of literary works extends beyond their narrow historical origins; a conception that prefigures the formalist and hermeneutic literary approaches that will arise decades later.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41346152

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i40064262
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Furey Constance M.
Abstract: Genealogies of Religion in 1993.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfr088

Journal Title: Merveilles & contes
Publisher: University of Colorado
Issue: i40067568
Date: 5 1, 1992
Author(s): Schmölders Claudia
Abstract: Das Mārchen als Psychologe— Eine Hommage an Max Lüthi This essay was wtitten in honor of Max Lūthi, the renowned Swiss folklorist, who died in 1991. The starting point is an article by Lüthi in which he coined the term "the fairy tale as psychologist." In contrast to the psychoanalytic approach of Freudians and Jungians, Schmölders demonstrates how Lüthi drew a line between literature and psychology in his works. First, Lüthi studied the hero in the fairy tale from an anthropomorphological viewpoint. Second, Lūthi analyzed the style of fairy tales by examining the moral, aesthetic, and economic aspects of the action. Third, Lūthi also dealt with "the legend as psychologist." Using Lüthi's notions, Schmōlders stresses the dialogic strategies and anthropomorphological concerns of the tales within the domain of psychological object-relations theory, and it is in this regard that Lūthi's term "the fairy tale as psychologist" assumes its importance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41390331

Journal Title: Revista de Crítica Literaria Latinoamericana
Publisher: Latinoamericana Editores
Issue: i40068473
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Lillo Gastón
Abstract: Gómez Moriana (1991).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41407246

Journal Title: The American Journal of Philology
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i40068944
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Becker Andrew S.
Abstract: Keil 6.178/Morelli 43
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/ajp.2012.0004

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40069706
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Fernández Germán Darío
Abstract: Descombes (1996: 287),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41427885

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: American Political Science Association
Issue: i387744
Date: 2 1, 1983
Author(s): Wyschogrod Thomas
Abstract: Wallach (2001, 189-90, 230, 298-99)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4145301

Journal Title: Church History
Publisher: American Society of Church History
Issue: i387805
Date: 9 1, 1980
Author(s): Ricoeur John D.
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Essays on Biblical Interpretation, ed. Lewis S. Mudge (Philadelphia: Fortress, 1980) Ricoeur Essays on Biblical Interpretation 1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4146418

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40072033
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Keller Reiner
Abstract: Wetherell and Potter (1988).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41478455

Journal Title: International Review of Education / Internationale Zeitschrift für Erziehungswissenschaft / Revue Internationale de l'Education
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40072112
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Malet Régis
Abstract: (Ricoeur 1990, p. 211).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41480119

Journal Title: Africa: Journal of the International African Institute
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40072402
Date: 8 1, 2011
Author(s): Ally Shireen
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/S0001972011000441

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i388289
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Wilson Neil
Abstract: Notter (2002)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4148875

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40073611
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Vieillard-Baron Jean-Louis
Abstract: Jean-Louis Chrétien montre comment le roman viole le secret de l'intériorité et le révèle, dans son bel ouvrage Conscience et roman, I. La Conscience au grand jour, Paris, Minuit, 2009.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rphi.121.0003

Journal Title: Anthropological Quarterly
Publisher: George Washington University Institute for Ethnographic Research
Issue: i387764
Date: 4 1, 2002
Author(s): Žižek Danny
Abstract: The 2001 disarmament of kamajor combatants in Bo, Sierra Leone was an event marked by violence. This paper considers that violence, and by extension other violent events in Sierra Leone's recent war, as narrative blocs: configurations of agency, time, imagery and articulation. This formulation stands in contrast to the way vionent events are often treated, as exceptional moments of outburst or eruption resulting from abnormal circumstances but meaningless in themselves. The paper draws on ethnographic fieldwork with the kamajor militia movement in Sierra Leone to trace some of these blocs both within the disarmament center and through other locations in the "war-scape" of Sierra Leone.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4150837

Journal Title: International Review of the Aesthetics and Sociology of Music
Publisher: Department for Music and Musicology of the Croatian Academy of Sciences and Arts, Croatian Musicological Society, Music Academy of the University of Zagreb
Issue: i40074891
Date: 6 1, 2012
Author(s): Viljoen Martina
Abstract: Kramer (1990; 2002),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41552763

Journal Title: Langue Française
Publisher: Larousse
Issue: i40075216
Date: 2 1, 1999
Author(s): Clarke David D.
Abstract: Rastier 1996 : 19, note 9
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41558900

Journal Title: Langue Française
Publisher: Larousse
Issue: i40075229
Date: 5 1, 2002
Author(s): Cadiot Pierre
Abstract: (Frege, 1971 : 214).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41559036

Journal Title: The Journal of Ayn Rand Studies
Publisher: Journal of Ayn Rand Studies Foundation
Issue: i40075328
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): Sciabarra Chris Matthew
Abstract: LISA M. DOLLING reviews Feminist Interpretations of Ayn Rand, edited by Mimi Reisel Gladstein and Chris Matthew Sciabarra. The anthology attempts to re-read Rand's work in light of important feminist issues and to locate it in the context of debates current in feminist discourse. Dolling argues that the book—which contains nineteen articles by philosophers, psychologists, literary theorists, and numerous others—is an important step toward bringing fresh attention to Rand's thought and toward the canon-transformation called for by contemporary scholars.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41560121

Journal Title: Bulletin d'études orientales
Publisher: Institut Français du Proche-Orient
Issue: i40076696
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): ZINE Mohammed Chaouki
Abstract: Fut., I, p. 360 (chap. 68).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41608624

Journal Title: Revista de Antropologia
Publisher: Departamento de Antropologia da Faculdade de Filosofia, Letras e Ciências Humanas da Universidade de São Paulo
Issue: i40077028
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Lagrou Elsje Maria
Abstract: O artigo é uma leitura do debate epistemológico sobre as condições de conhecimento na antropologia. Partindo das críticas que o próprío C. Geertz faz a seus seguidores, a autora se propõe a avaliar o potencial crítico da hermenêutica. Recupera seu questionamento acerca da oposiçâo sujeito/objeto e propõe a busca de uma objetividade negociada interpares e situada historicamente. A partir desse debate questiona-se uma ciência pura e sem implicações práticas e morais. O percurso que faz avaliando vários autores lhe permite concluir que o excesso de relativismo ou de subjetivismo transforma toda possibilidade de ciência em ficção. Para dar conta em sua etnografia dos sistemas simbólicos não lingüísticos, a autora busca um diálogo entre a teoría antropológica e as teorias nativas e afirma que é na experiência vivida em campo que está a fertilidade das perguntas e reformulações de conceitos da antropologia. This article is an attempt to interpret the epistemological debate concerning conditions of knoledge in antropology. Discussing the criticism which C. Geertz has made in regard to the work of his followers, the autor proposes to evaluate the critical potential of hermeneutics. A critique of the subject-object split opens the way for proposing a form of objectivity wich is historically located and negotiated among equals. This debate constitutes a point os departure for questioning the notion of a pure science devoid of moral and practical implications. In the course of discussing a number of authors, the conclusion may well be that excessive relativism and subjectivism transform all possibilities of science into fiction. In order to deal with nonlinguistic symbolic systems in etnography, the author sees the importance of dialogue between anthropological theory and native theory. Fertile grounds for raising questions and reformulating anthropological concepts are found in fieldword experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41616139

Journal Title: Revista de Antropologia
Publisher: Departamento de Antropologia da Faculdade de Filosofia, Letras e Ciências Humanas da Universidade de São Paulo
Issue: i40077039
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Lewgoy Bernardo
Abstract: O presente artigo propõe uma interpretação do fenômeno Chico Xavier na cultura e na sociedade brasileira. A partir do reconhecimento da importância cruciai de seu modelo mítico de espírita exemplar, o lugar de absolute destaque ocupado pelo médium mineiro na história do kardecismo brasileiro será interpretado à luz de urn código cultural articulado em sua biografia, que busca sintetizar os personagens paradigmáticos do "santo" e do "caxias". Desdobrado na unidade de sua obra mediúnica e trajetória pública, o tipo de espiritismo construído em Chico Xavier evidencia a proposta kardecista dominante ao longo do século XX, enquanto modelo de cidadania, prática religiosa e projeto nacional. The present article is a reading of the place of the phenomenon Chico Xavier in the Brazilian culture and society. Starting from the recognition of his crucial importance as a mythical model of exemplary spiritualist, the absolute prominence of the medium in the history of the Brazilian spiritualism will be interpreted in the light of a cultural code articulated in his biography, that synthesizes the Brazilian mythical characters of the "saint" and of the "caxias". Unfolded from his life and works the model of spiritualism built by Chico Xavier evidences the kardecismo's dominant religious point of view along the 20th Century, while citizenship model, religious practice and national project.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41616295

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung. Supplement
Publisher: GESIS - Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i40077837
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Jarausch Konrad H.
Abstract: Konrad H. Jarausch, "German Civility? Retying Social Bonds after Barbarism," European Review of History 18 (2011), 373-86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41637867

Journal Title: Iberoamericana (2001-)
Publisher: Iberoamericana Editorial Vervuert
Issue: i40078779
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Velasco Mónica Quijano
Abstract: Paz 1979: 85-100
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41676774

Journal Title: October
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i40079193
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): KURCZYNSKI KAREN
Abstract: "Le cinéma après Alain Resnais," pp. 8-9.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1162/OCTO_a_00096

Journal Title: Language in Society
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i393727
Date: 12 1, 1981
Author(s): Zerubavel Elinor
Abstract: This study examines how deadlines and time limits for conference talks organize the discourse of consensus among collaborating experimental and theoretical physicists in a university laboratory. Six months of videotaped observations, including two cycles of conference talk preparation, indicate that, as the date of an upcoming conference nears, several things happen. (a) Co-authoring physicists usually have not achieved agreement on all aspects of the findings. (b) They nevertheless direct their energies to constructing a hybrid presentation rhetoric that satisfies the co-authors and fits the talk to the official conference talk time limit. (c) In the process of working through matters of rhetoric -- what to say, what to display visually, what to leave out, and in what order the information should be presented -- the physicists construct a working consensus on matters of physics: theory and experimental data explaining the properties and dynamics of the physical universe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4168800

Journal Title: The World of Music
Publisher: Verlag für Wissenschaft und Bildung
Issue: i40079787
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Harnish David
Abstract: This study employs hermeneutics to illuminate a musical life history. I Made Lebah was a unique individual who lived during a violent and creative time of Bali's history. This paper explores his life through the lens of hermeneutics and identifies music stages through segmented, progressive hermeneutical arcs within his lifelong arc of experience. A consciousness of historical situatedness and an enabling appropriation allowed him to master a number of Balinese music styles and assume the title, "great teacher." The people he worked with, including composers Lotring and Colin McPhee and his lifelong friend, Agung Mandra, all affected him and helped him to acquire a self-awareness, a rapid learning and internalization process, and a sensitivity to reflective hermeneutics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41699351

Journal Title: The World of Music
Publisher: Verlag für Wissenschaft und Bildung
Issue: i40079811
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Ho Meilu
Abstract: Singing songs in service (kirtan seva) constitutes the primary expression of devotion in the Pushti Marg (Path of Grace) tradition of India. This liturgical practice is singular amongst South Asian, Hindu traditions in its extensive use of rag set to classical poetry. I consider the meaning of this sung liturgy using the ideas of hermeneutic philosophy that concern understanding. I suggest that performing song in service is similar to the act of understanding a work, one in which a self is disclosed in the mode of play. Critically, such continual self-unveilings over a lifetime of service to Krishna afford the practitioner the possibility of the lived liberation promised by founder, Vallabhacharya.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41699881

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40079867
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): SALAZAR PHILIPPE-JOSEPH
Abstract: Rapport, I, 4, paragr. 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41700854

Journal Title: Modern China
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i40079950
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Murthy Viren
Abstract: Although ZhangTaiyan is famous for being a late Qing nationalist and revolutionary, scholars have yet to explore fully the significance of his Buddhist writings, especially as they relate to time and history. This article closely examines Zhang's writings about time and history and points out that Zhang made two interrelated but potentially conflicting arguments. On the one hand, he invoked Yogācāra Buddhism and Zhuang Zi to expound a relativistic vision of time and history. From this perspective, each nation has its historical particularity and cannot be judged from an external standard. However, on the other hand, in a context where intellectuals were uncritically adopting a framework of history as progress, Zhang grounded the theory of evolution in a theory of karmic seeds to develop an interpretation of history as a double movement in which the good gets better and the bad gets worse. The article delves into the significance of Zhang's arguments by highlighting the symmetries between Zhang's exposition of history and the logic of capitalism. Such structural similarities suggest that Zhang could think about time and history in this way precisely because he inhabited a world mediated by the dynamic of capitalism. His writings on Zhuang Zi and Buddhism should be seen as an example of a resistance to capitalism that is not based on a narrative of progress. In the context of twentieth-century Chinese intellectual history, where narratives of progress and evolution are a dominant chord, Zhang's counterpunctual critique of evolution is especially inspiring.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41702468

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080069
Date: 10 1, 1996
Author(s): JACOT JEAN-PAUL
Abstract: Dans différents articles recueillis aujourd'hui dans un livre intitulé Antonin Artaud, ce désespéré qui vous parle, Paris, Seuil, 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704667

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080076
Date: 3 1, 2000
Author(s): QUÉRÉ HENRI
Abstract: The work of a third generation semiotician, Geninasca's approach "makes the text make sense", a project mid-way between Greimas' subjectifying of objectivity and Coquet's objectifying of subjectivity; his articles concentrate on the manner in which "literary speech" constructs the terms of belief in its existence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704758

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080090
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): DE CHALONGE FLORENCE
Abstract: M. Duras, Le Ravissement de Loi V. Stein (1964), Gallimard (Folio), 1977, p. 72.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704939

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080097
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): CAMPAIGNOLLE-CATEL HÉLÈNE
Abstract: M. Calle-Gruber, Librairie A.-G. Nizet, 1991, (Dis- cussion I: texte, intertexte, création dialogique), p. 313-314.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705032

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080097
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): TRITSMANS BRUNO
Abstract: Sol absolu et autres textes, Paris, Gallimard, coll. Poésie, 1982, p. 7-21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705034

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080110
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): CROIZY-NAQUET CATHERINE
Abstract: Michel Jarrety, art. cité, p. 82.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705188

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Armand Colin et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080123
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): ARTOUS-BOUVET GUILLAUME
Abstract: Circonfession, dans Jacques Derrida, op. cit., p. 212.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705358

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Armand Colin et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080124
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Costantini Michel
Abstract: Michel Costantini, « Le jeu d'instance et d'instant. Dix- sept minutes encore, Monsieur le bourreau », in Juan Alonso, Denis Bertrand, Michel Costantini, Sylvain Dambrine (éds), La Transversalité du sens. Parcours sémiotiques, « Essais et savoirs », Paris, PUV, 2006, p. 139-149.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705364

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Armand Colin et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080127
Date: 6 1, 2012
Author(s): Bloomfield Camille
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Temps et récit, op. cit., p. 215.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705408

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Armand Colin et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080127
Date: 6 1, 2012
Author(s): Boulay Bérenger
Abstract: Ariette Farge, La Nuit blanche, Paris, Éditions du Seuil, coll. «La librairie du XXIe siècle », 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705410

Journal Title: Business & Professional Ethics Journal
Publisher: Philosophy Documentation Center
Issue: i40080131
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Deslandes Ghislain
Abstract: "Each answer gives more than ordinary prudence requires. The right cheek? Turn the other cheek! The coat? Take the tunic as well! A thousand? One more!" (2006b, 171).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.5840/bpej20123111

Journal Title: Group
Publisher: Mental Health Resources
Issue: i40080844
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Schermer Victor L.
Abstract: A broad conceptual framework is presented for utilizing spirituality in group psychotherapy. The author considers (a) selected concepts and theory relevant to the spiritual aspect of psychotherapy practice; (b) the change in assumptions about the person and the group they imply; (c) the mystical aspects of the listening/observing process; and (d) aspects of the new sciences compatible with spiritual principles. Using a psychospiritual paradigm, the author offers a view of group therapy that emphasizes the therapist as a contemporary mystic, the group as a sacred space, and a return to profound, timeless, nonrelativist spiritual values and goals, nonsensory infinite dimensional experience leading to deep transformation of the self, and the compatibility of contemporary scientific frameworks with spiritual principles that can form the basis of new theorizing and group interpretations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41719065

Journal Title: Studies in Philology
Publisher: University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i392481
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Van Laan Arthur F.
Abstract: "Homiletic Tragicomedy and the Ending of Measure for Measure," an unpublished essay Ide has shared with me, 10
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4174289

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i40081890
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Thévenot Laurent
Abstract: Griesse 2008a, 2008b, 2011
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41756470

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40081899
Date: 11 1, 2012
Author(s): Herceg José Santos
Abstract: Foucault, Orden 38-39
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41756623

Journal Title: Traditional Dwellings and Settlements Review
Publisher: International Association for the Study of Traditional Environments (IASTE)
Issue: i40081961
Date: 4 1, 2002
Author(s): LIU YANG
Abstract: For the last six years, China's historic yaodong cave dwellings, still home to millions of people, have been a focus of work by the Green Architecture Research Center (GARC) of Xi'an University of Architecture and Technology. To date, the GARC, working intimately with the local people of Zao Yuan Village outside of Yan'an in Shaanxi Province, has designed and constructed more than one hundred new yaodong units using the principles of "green architecture." This report suggests that these efforts represent an exemplary application of Kenneth Frampton's notion of "critical regionalism." Specifically, in contrast to the rampant and largely unreflective importation of Western architectural styles common to new construction in many of China's urban centers, the new yaodong units result from a sensitive effort to merge the old with the new and maintain vernacular values.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41757895

Journal Title: Traditional Dwellings and Settlements Review
Publisher: International Association for the Study of Traditional Environments (IASTE)
Issue: i40081977
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): MARCHAND TREVOR H.J.
Abstract: This article challenges the assumption that "tradition" is a quality pertaining chiefly to objects, stylistic conventions, or the use of materials. Equally, it refutes the notion that tradition is merely the perpetuation of ritualized practices or skilled techniques. By considering the complex relation between vocational migration, heritage, and identity among contemporary fine woodworkers at London's Building Crafts College, it argues that tradition is a state of mind — a recurring nostalgia for an idealized past, or the desire for a Utopian future. More specifically, the article investigates a "tradition of longing" for engagement in nonalienating modes of production, aesthetic work, and an authentic way of living.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41758513

Journal Title: African Journal of Reproductive Health / La Revue Africaine de la Santé Reproductive
Publisher: Women's Health and Action Research Centre
Issue: i40082442
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Martin Caroline H
Abstract: At present there is under utilization of maternity service provision in Nigeria, with only a third of childbearing women electing to deliver in healthcare facilities. This is relevant since Nigeria's maternal mortality rate is second highest in the world and is estimated at 1,100 per 100,000 live births. To date, studies have sought cause and effect and have neglected the opinion of the people about what they perceive to be problematic and what they believe constitutes satisfactory maternity service provision. An exploratory qualitative study was carried out to identify pregnant women in a rural Niger Delta community's perceptions of conventional maternity service provision. Participants included 8 pregnant Niger Delta women from differing sub-groups within the homogeneous population. Semi-structured interviews were conducted to explore informants' views of what constitutes satisfactory maternity service provision, what comprises inadequate care, barriers that obstruct delivery of maternity care, and what promotes positive outcomes. Five major themes emerged from the data. These included: (1) Women's requirements for information; (1a) nutritional and dietary advice, (1b) how to recognise developing complications, (1c) appropriate fetal development, (1e) importance of attending clinics; (2) Staff services required: (2a) availability, (2b) well managed, and (2c) good quality; (3) Apparatus: (3a) equipment available, (3b) adequate infrastructure; (4) Affordability; (5) Place of traditional and spiritual methods. The interviewed childbearing Niger Delta women voiced several factors that they considered altered their satisfaction with maternity service provision. Finding out more about what causes satisfaction/dissatisfaction in childbearing women facilitates maternity care professionals to improve standards of care and allocate resources more effectively. Policy changes are driven by initiatives that reinforce strengths of current specification and recognise weaknesses. In addition, the WHO recommends that working towards improving health related culture is important. A l'heure actuelle, il y a une sous utilisation de services de gynécologie-obstétricaux au Nigeria, étant donné qu'un tiers des femmes en âge de procréer optent pour accoucher dans des établissements de santé. Les études antérieure ont recherché la cause et l'effet et ont négligé les opinions des femmes concernant ce qu'elles croient être la bonne prestation de services de gynécologie-obstétricaux. Nous avons mené une étude qualitative exploratrice pour identifier 8 femmes enceintes à partir des perceptions d'une communauté rurale du Niger Delta à l'égard de la prestation de services de gynécologie-obstétricaux conventionnels. Des interviews semi-structures ont exploré les opinions des enquêtées sur ce qui constitue la prestation de services de gynécologieobstétricaux satisfaisant, ce qui constitue les soins insuffisants, les obstacles qui entravent la prestation de soins de gynécologieobstétricaux et ce qui avance les résultats positifs. Cinq thèmes importants ont émergé à partir des données : (i) Les besoins des femmes pour les renseignements ; 1a) le conseil nutritionnel et alimentaire, 1b) comment reconnaître des complications qui se préparent, 1c) le développement approprié des fétus, le) la nécessité de fréquenter les cliniques, 2) bien gérer, 2c) la bonne qualité 3) appareil 3a) l'équipement disponible, 3b) l'infrastructure adéquate ; 4) s'ils sont abordables ; 5) la place des méthodes traditionnelles et spirituelles. Les femmes enquêtées ont mentionné plusieurs facteurs qui ont modifié leur satisfaction avec la prestation de service de gynécologie-obstétricaux. La recherche supplémentaire concernant les causes de la satisfaction ou du mécontentement rend facile la tâche des professionnels de soins de maternité leur permettant d'améliorer la qualité de soin et d'affecter des ressources plus efficacement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41762346

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Latin American and Caribbean Studies / Revue canadienne des études latino-américaines et caraïbes
Publisher: Canadian Association of Latin American and Caribbean Studies / Association Canadienne des études Latino-Américaines et Caraïbes
Issue: i40084753
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): MICÓ JOSÉ ANTONIO GIMÉNEZ
Abstract: La época que nos ha tocado vivir, que, a falta de mejores términos, denominamos tentativamente "globalización," provoca el entretejido de una malla virtual que aglutina privilegiadas zonas de contacto e ignorados ghettos de exclusión, así como irreconciliables identidades monolíticas y múltiples (individuales, locales, étnicas, religiosas, de género, de preferencias sexuales, nacionales, mundiales... et al.); fragmentaciones, opacidades, pro-, proto-, pos-, antinaciones, transnaciones, translenguas, transculturas... La novela Rojo, amarillo y verde, del autor boliviano-quebequés-canadiense-planetario Alejandro Saravia, es representativa del titubeante imaginario planetario que comienza a perfilarse. Lejos de ser una apología celebratoria de la "aldea global," este multifacético imaginario propone un contrapeso dialógico al monólogo del pensamiento único que pretende imponernos el capitalismo globalizante. La période que nous vivons, que nous nommons provisoirement la "mondialisation" à défaut de meilleurs termes, provoque l'entre-tissage d'un réseau virtuel agglutinant des zones de contact privilégiées et des ghettos d'exclusion ignorés; des identités monolithiques et multiples irréconciliables (individuelles, locales, ethniques, religieuses, de genre, d'orientations sexuelles, nationales, mondiales... et al.); des fragmentations, des opacités, des pro-, proto-, post-, anti-nations, des trans-nations, des trans-langues, des trans-cultures... Le roman Rojo, amarillo y verde, de l'auteur bolivien-québécois-canadien-planétaire Alejandro Saravia, est représentatif du chancelant imaginaire planétaire qui commence à se profiler. Loin d'être une apologie célébratoire du "Village global," cet imaginaire aux mille visages propose un contrepoids dialogique au monologue de la pensée unique, celle que le capitalisme mondialisant essaie de nous imposer. The age we find ourselves living in which, for lack of a better term, we tentatively call "globalization" provokes the interweaving of a virtual meshwork that brings together privileged zones of contact and forgotten ghettos of exclusion, as well as irreconcilable monolithic and multiple identities (individual, local, ethnic, religious, national, global, of gender or sexual preference... et al.); fragmentations, opacities, pro-, proto-, post-, antinations, transnations, translinguistics, transcultures... The novel Rojo, amarillo y verde > by Alejandro Saravia, a Bolivian-Quebecker-Canadian-Planetarian author, represents the hesitant global imaginary that is beginning to take shape. Far from being a celebratory apology of the "global village," this multifaceted imaginary proposes a dialogic counterweight to the monologue of the single thought the globalizing capitalism is trying to impose on us.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41800579

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40084987
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): CATALÃO HELENA B.
Abstract: Epstein, Helen - Écrire la vie. Trad. C. Nelson. Paris: La Cause des Livres, 2009, p. 101.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41803883

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40084990
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): RENAUD MICHEL
Abstract: Taminiaux, Jacques - "Entre l'attitude esthétique et la mort de l'art". In: Recoupements. Bruxelles,: Ousia, 1982, pp. 150-174.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41803941

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40084990
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): MORAIS CARLOS
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41803944

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40084990
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): SANTOS LAURA
Abstract: Justice Brennan,, ct., p. 9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41803947

Journal Title: Studies in English Literature, 1500-1900
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i40085680
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): JORDAN JOHN O.
Abstract: An assessment of recent scholarly work treating the literature of the nineteenth century and some general observations on the state of the profession. A full bibliography and price list of the works received by SEL for consideration follow.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/sel.2012.0041

Journal Title: Minerva
Publisher: The International Council on the Future of the University
Issue: i40085823
Date: 3 1, 1987
Author(s): EISENSTADT S. N.
Abstract: Eisenstadt, S. N., "Intellectuals and Tradition", in Eisenstadt, S. N. and Graubard, S. R. (eds), op. cit., pp. 1-21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41820678

Journal Title: Estudios Atacameños
Publisher: Universidad Católica del Norte, Instituto de Investigaciones Arqueológicas y Museo
Issue: i40086186
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Pizarro José Antonio González
Abstract: Manual Baedeker 1910: 35
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41825381

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40086215
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: « Tolérance, intolérance, intolérable », in Lectures 1, Paris, Éd. du Seuil, 1991, p. 294-311.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rmm.062.0149

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40086215
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Barash Jeffrey Andrew
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, De l'interprétation. Essai sur Freud, p. 514-543.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rmm.062.0185

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40086215
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, La mémoire, l'histoire, l'oubli, especially the epilogue entitled "Le pardon difficile", p. 593-658.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rmm.062.0197

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40086215
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Welsen Peter
Abstract: Michael Walzer, Spheres of Justice, New York, 1983.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rmm.062.0217

Journal Title: International Journal of Peace Studies
Publisher: International Peace Research Association
Issue: i40087528
Date: 7 1, 2006
Author(s): Blatz Charles V.
Abstract: Moving from repression or tyranny toward the rule of law and reason is fraught with difficulties. One question of transitional justice is whether those responsible for the horrors of the previous régime should be punished or whether those involved in the transition should travel a path toward forgiveness and unity. Within this article, it is urged that in the (re-)establishment of the rule of reason among all involved there is a commitment to peace as opposed to force. This commitment marks retribution and utilitarian punishment as incoherent and normatively indefensible. Resorting to punishment is the abandonment of reason, not its reinstatement. Indeed, the point can be generalized. Punishment, as resorting to force, is a move away from establishing or sustaining a framework of justification and its commitment to peace.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41852938

Journal Title: International Journal of Peace Studies
Publisher: International Peace Research Association
Issue: i40087534
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Ron Amit
Abstract: The article develops an understanding of public deliberations during a peace process, focusing on the interaction between the elite level negotiations and the "public peace process." It does so by examining the dialogical mechanisms that are set to work in the public sphere once the elite consider the possibility of identifying the former enemies as allies or friends. These dialogical mechanisms, the author argues, add up to a shift in the manner the public interprets the discourse that regulates its relationship with the elite toward what the author calls, following Paul Ricoeur, 'hermeneutics of suspicion.' Thus, the peace process generates a need for the public to re-examine the terms of understanding that defined its relationship with the former enemy. However this same process might also lead the public to re-examine the terms by which it understands its relationship with the elite.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41852982

Journal Title: International Journal of Peace Studies
Publisher: International Peace Research Association
Issue: i40087536
Date: 7 1, 2010
Author(s): Park Laureen
Abstract: Needs Theory (NT) has been a corner stone for conflict resolution scholarship (CRS) as it was conceived by John Burton and other pioneers of the field. Intuitively, NT makes sense. There are fundamental needs that all human beings have that if violated may cause conflict. Indeed only those conflicts that are due to the violation of such needs can truly be deep-rooted (versus disputes). However, the structural foundations for NT are still not firmly established for a variety of reasons. Psychoanalysis and critical theory help us to understand and establish the various factors that go into constituting needs, in part by critiquing the positivistic framework that has heretofore been primarily utilized in NT scholarship
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41852998

Journal Title: Anthropological Quarterly
Publisher: George Washington University Institute for Ethnographic Research
Issue: i40087820
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Battaglia Debbora
Abstract: Valentin Lebedev is a pioneer of space and earth science in Russia. He is also the first ethnographic diarist of outer space. In 1982, while "on orbit" for 211 days as a fieldworking cosmonaut, Lebedev produced a thickly descriptive account of the intimate sociality and technoculture of the Soviet space complex Salyut 7. Crafted to defamiliarize (ostranenie) a spaceworld that publics saw as flawlessly engineered and managed, the diary is an argument for the value of exospheric (exo-) surprise in human experience. But on another level, we learn that the surprise is on humans who would claim to conquer "space-as-itself"—a "zero gravity" environment of force fields both extremely inhospitable to life as we know it and also generative of life in all its expressions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41857291

Journal Title: PS
Publisher: American Political Science Association
Issue: i217323
Date: 1 1, 1945
Author(s): Burke Murray
Abstract: Kenneth Burke, A Grammar of Motives (New York: Prentice-Hall, 1945), p. 393. Burke 393 A Grammar of Motives 1945
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/418800

Journal Title: Journal of Advertising
Publisher: Board of Directors, American Academy of Advertising
Issue: i394073
Date: 9 1, 1986
Author(s): Wright Barbara B.
Abstract: This paper analyzes the presenter in advertisements by means of a theoretical framework drawn from literary criticism. The paper adapts literary theory to explore the advertising "who" -- the presenter of a message. It turns to dramaturgy and narratology theory to formulate a trichotomy of advertising "points of view" -- first-person narrator, third-person narrator, and dramatic character. The formal and functional properties of each are discussed with advertising examples. Advertising consequences are illustrated with examples taken from Advertising Age's "Best Advertising of 1989" compilation. These are discussed in terms of media patterns, message strategy, and overall communication objectives. The discussion also suggests the need for additional research to understand hybrid and parody forms.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4188803

Journal Title: Annales historiques de la Révolution française
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40088706
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): MONNIER Raymonde
Abstract: Hans-Jürgen Lüsebrink, Rolf Reichardt, Die Bastille. Zur Symbolgeschichte von Herrschaft und Freiheit, Frankfurt am Main, Fischer, 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41890504

Journal Title: Journal of Advertising
Publisher: Board of Directors, American Academy of Advertising
Issue: i394112
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Zaltman Barbara B.
Abstract: In an empirical study using five real-world creative teams from an advertising agency, participants were given a strategic brief for a new beverage product and asked to design the layout for a print ad. Think-aloud concurrent protocols obtained from each team's copywriter, art director, and the two working together were analyzed to examine the creative process and its relationship to the created advertisement. Interpretive analyses of the protocols reveal that the teams access culturally available plot patterns but in different ways. In this study and with the particular materials and situational context explored here, four of the five teams chose to pursue a single mythic structure to the apoarent detriment of their final product. Only one team engaged in fully diversified idea generation involving a wide range of alternative scenarios. Not coincidentally, as a tentative conclusion, this more flexible team produced the ad judged most successful by advertising professionals. This still-to-be-tested exploratory finding deserves further investigation in future research that embodies various methodological refinements.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4189175

Journal Title: Indian Anthropologist
Publisher: Indian Anthropological Association
Issue: i40089162
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Visvanathan Susan
Abstract: This paper attempts to compare two lives, that of Ramana Maharshi, the beloved cereberal sage of South India, and Sigmund Freud, the founding father of psychoanalysis. Much has been written on both these individuals, so what this paper does is to focus on affliction as a source of insight about life, detachment, pain, existentialism and coping. By taking narratives which delineate a historical plane on which illness can be coded, I try to understand the anthromorphic nature of suffering and its consequences in these two great lives. Individuals reflect the culture of which they are a part, so what we receive through the narratives which tell us about them is significant in terms of their similarities and their differences. Who authors narratives which we analyse is of utmost significance, and both feminism and narrative analyses looks at social anthropology as benefiting from the question of the writing subject. The Nirvana principle works in Ramana Maharshi's case to create a comfort zone for helping us to think of death as dream, in Freud it works as a comfort zone to cope with existence. Human beings work with ideas in order to evaluate the nature of life and survival, or with death as an attribute which too is natural and part of the order of reality. Paul Ricoeur's work helps me to build a bridge between the two thinkers, Ramana Maharshi and Freud, in terms of the application of the concepts of Eros, Thanatos and Ananke.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41920053

Journal Title: Northeast African Studies
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Issue: i40089818
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Mennasemay Maimire
Abstract: The article discusses the presence of emancipatory Utopian ideas in Ethiopian history through a critical hermeneutical interpretation of Lalibela. Drawing on the concept of concrete utopia, the paper argues that the works and Chronicles of Lalibela secrete a concrete Utopian surplus that points to the conceptualization of knowledge as critique and as die mastery of nature, of labor as a transformative and emancipatory acüvity, and of power relations as expressions of equality between subjects and ruler. The article contends that Lalibelas Utopian surplus implies questions and reflections about social transformation, which, being rooted in Ethiopian history, provide possibilities for developing emancipatory ideas and practices that respond to the modern needs and aspirations of Ethiopians. It argues that, if Ethiopia u to extricate herself from the poverty and tyranny traps of passive modernization and successfully meet the challenges of modernity, reflection on and the quest for democracy and prosperity need to link up with the concrete Utopian surpluses that inform Ethiopian history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41931315

Journal Title: Sociologie du Travail
Publisher: Assocaition pour le développement de la sociologie du travail; Elsevier
Issue: i40089829
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Tuchszirer Carole
Abstract: Pette et Devin, 2005
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.soctra.2009.12.012

Journal Title: Group
Publisher: Brunner/Mazel Publishers
Issue: i40090285
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): Malcus Lawrence
Abstract: Freud (1914)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41939404

Journal Title: Rhetoric and Public Affairs
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Issue: i40090309
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): Kenny Robert Wade
Abstract: This essay examines the manner in which Peter Singer exceeds the boundaries of ethical reasoning in arguing his position on life ethics. Specifically, it probes a narrative aesthetic that functions as rhetorical proof in his work. Attention is given to demonstrating the presence of ironic aesthetics in this narrative. Thereafter two conceptual structures—consubstantiality and ironic catharsis—are elaborated in order to show how Singer uses irony in an attempt to shape audience attitudes toward the traditional life ethics position.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41939870

Journal Title: Storytelling, Self, Society
Publisher: Florida Atlantic University
Issue: i40090504
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): Gale Deborah Dysart
Abstract: An increasing number of individuals worldwide are receiving home nursing care from loved ones. Many healthcare professionals are exploring the use of narrative to help family caregivers meet the personal demands of this work. Citing Ricoeur's notion of narrative identity as a social process in which cultural norms and values are negotiated between speaker and audience, this paper argues that health care professionals can assist their clients by viewing narrative as collaboration, not autonomous construction. Collaboration in construction of narrative identity was observed in interactions between family caregivers and public health workers on the Caribbean island of St. Kitts. There, caregivers were supported by a dialogic process in which interlocutors explored the cultural values that define and delimit the possibilities for living as caregivers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41942906

Journal Title: Acta Sociologica
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i388794
Date: 3 1, 1999
Author(s): Wilson Henrik
Abstract: A theory of the embodiment of action is proposed. Reflections on relations between human intentions, the human body and the notion of agency lead us to argue that phenomenological analysis is not sufficient for such a theory. Our consideration, that the most fundamental level of embodied agency is that of life itself, brings us to the philosophy of biology and the theory of the organism: briefly, certain parts of the natural environment are intrinsic to the constitution of organisms and, in their more sophisticated configuration, as agents. Action is embodied in the sense that certain physiological processes are internal in relation to it and play a constitutive role in its performance. The way in which environment, context and consciousness affect and constitute the nature of agency at personal and sub-personal levels is elaborated. We see that human agents perceive and act upon their world through a complex shifting between those levels. A summary of the ways in which the social sciences can be enriched by this more comprehensive view of human agency provides the basis of justification for claiming Actor-Network Theory (ANT), originally developed by sociologists studying science and technology, as a promising framework for the continuation of this reasoning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4194959

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40091451
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): KAHLMEYER-MERTENS ROBERTO S.
Abstract: Gadamer, Hans-Georg. – Wahrheit und Methode, ed. cit., p. 2.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41955630

Journal Title: Revista de Musicología
Publisher: Sociedad Española de Musicología
Issue: i40091550
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): García Montalbán Antonio
Abstract: Lo Maravilloso en el Siglo de las Luces: La Encyclopédie y Esteban de Arteaga (1747-1799). Valencia, Mu VIM, 2009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41959346

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40092224
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): BUCHOLC MARTA
Abstract: Jakoubek, Svoboda, Budilova 2009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41969498

Journal Title: Journal of Correctional Education
Publisher: Correctional Education Association
Issue: i40092321
Date: 6 1, 1993
Author(s): Zollmann Mary Ann
Abstract: This article explores the thesis that educators are called to define and describe truth morefoundationally than we have ever done before if tve are to facilitate existence that is right, just, correct on both a personal and communal level. This thesis is sourced in ever-deepening attentiveness to, appreciation for, and affirmation of this statement of Adrian van Kaam: "The work of reformation starts in the heart by means of the human spirit; it is the reclamation of the soul, via the spirit, of its innermost form direction. " Suggesting that education which would be truly correctional must, therefore, reach into the very heart of being, the author describes the current paradigm shift from the Newtonian model of what it means to be human with its positivistic approaches to learning to a more Einsteinian or fullfield understanding of human being and its requirement of more formative learning processes. In consonance with the truth of being as full-field, formative correctional education is reflective and experiential, dialogical, narrative in form, and globally inclusive. In her discussion of each of these methodologies, the author illustrates how each one draws us deeper into the truth of who we are and inspires us to be the unique presence that we are in the world. Through such methods and processes, individuals are formed, reformed, and transformed not only in self-appreciation and openness to their own possibilities, but in appreciation for the meaning and value of their existence with others in the world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41970960

Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40094286
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): Brewster Chris
Abstract: United Nations 1948
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s10551-012-1397-0

Journal Title: Acta Sociologica
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i388842
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Wright Philip
Abstract: From the work of Weber onwards charisma has been primarily explained in terms of its relationship to underlying social structural and psychological environments. The paper redresses this imbalance and examines the cultural structures that operate as preconditions for the attribution of charisma to political and religious leaders. Drawing on Weberian, Durkheimian and semiotic theory the paper argues that charisma arises in conjunction with salvation narratives. The internal structure of these narratives requires binary oppositions contrasting good and evil. The model is exemplified with reference to case studies of Hitler, Churchill and Martin Luther King.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4201192

Journal Title: Journal of Peace Research
Publisher: Universitetsforlaget
Issue: i217592
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): O'Neill Ernest J.
Abstract: The purpose of this paper is to foster the regeneration and reorientation of peace research in the United States through its internationalization and radicalization. The authors locate the possible sources of this 'post-modern' redirection of American peace studies in the traditions of critical theory and phenomenology and in convergent work by contemporary West European scholars in Scandinavia and the Federal Republic of Germany. The main lines of this reorientation for American peace research are limned through an exploration of three substantive themes: power, violence, and hegemony; international society as totality; and the critical peace researcher as knower and actor.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/422497

Journal Title: Science Fiction Studies
Publisher: SF-TH Inc.
Issue: i394183
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): Theweleit Manfred
Abstract: Stanislaw Lem's "Solaris" vividly embodies the problems surrounding the semantic status of fantastic utterances. It poses the problems as two related questions: what is the "objective" meaning of the notion of the Solarian ocean for the Solarist researchers in the novel, and what is the "symbolic" meaning of the novel's fantastic ocean for its readers. Since the diegetic planet Solaris has no objective relation to the meaning-producing dynamics of human work, the Solarian ocean is a projection of familiar human meanings. As for the fantastic ocean represented for the reader, it can be approached via several semantic interpretations, none of which are fully adequate. Three such approaches are the plasmatic, i.e., the different descriptions of the ocean are instances of the dominant metasemic lexeme "plasma"; the vaginal, i.e., the ocean is a displaced image of female sexuality; and the schizophrenic, i.e., the ocean is an instance of a schizophrenic "miraculation-machine" (derived from Deleuze-Guattari's Anti-Oedipus).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4240151

Journal Title: Philippine Studies
Publisher: Ateneo de Manila University Press
Issue: i40098086
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Hau Caroline Sy
Abstract: This article focuses on a close reading of Rey Ventura's autobiographical narrative of his experience as an illegal migrant worker in Japan in order to unsettle the dominant paradigm of the overseas Filipino worker as hero(ine) and martyr. It examines the ways in which both the Philippine and Japanese states have acted as apparatuses of labor capture; the various discourses of nationness which inform the political construction of the OFW as "labor," "foreign," "illegal" and "depoliticized"; and the strategies of survival used by OFWs to negotiate with, and make claims on, the labor-sending and -receiving states.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42633649

Journal Title: International Journal of Politics, Culture, and Society
Publisher: Springer Science+Business Media
Issue: i40098288
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Cyr Rachel E.
Abstract: Leuchter (1989).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s10767-013-9140-0

Journal Title: Český lid
Publisher: Ústav pro Etnografii a Folkloristiku Ceskoslovenské Akademia ved
Issue: i40098473
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): LOZOVIUK PETR
Abstract: The article is intended to indicate how the study of written and cultural texts may be used to approach the problem of identifying the system of thought characteristic of particular groups. Certain premises of what may be called an “interpretative paradigm” have been selected to create a theoretical starting-point, and in this context the most suggestive appear to be the concept of culture developed by symbolic anthropology, the cultural-semiotic concept of text and the multi-dimensional hermeneutic approach to textual intepretation. The author therefore seeks to bring together, in addition to the general features ofinterpetative ethnology, certain theoretical and methodological starting-points derived from the three approaches mentioned. One may approach the problem of understanding of a foreign testimony via “adequate interpretation”. Here, to understand means to adopt the cultural “language” of a message as one's own, and to interpret and so transfer the unknown into an accessible code, most often one's own code. The process of interpretation is understood as the discovery of the hidden content behind the apparent stirface, and in this activity the understanding of culturally remote testimony is axiomatically taken to bepossible and communicable. In a broader epistemological context we can see in adequate intepretation one of the means to the never-ending process of correction of our pre-judged knowledge. In a spirit of critical rationalism we could deflne such interpretation as the working hypothesis that may be falsified by further Scientific activity and then replaced by a better theory. Such conclusions on the methodological range of the interpretative approach indicate only one of the possible syntheses of various epistemological paradigms, for the theoretical use and application of which ethnology seems especially suited.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42639814

Journal Title: Český lid
Publisher: Etnologický Ústav Akademie ved Ceské Republiky
Issue: i40098482
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): PFLEGEROVÁ MARIANA
Abstract: The article presents an analysis of the concept of „subject“ in ethnography from its historical origins through its development over the span of the 20th century. Furthermore, based on her own experience of different cultures, the author conføonts the implicit Western philosophical background in anthropological conceptualisations of the subject and the ethnographic research with alternative philosophical frameworks, specifically the reflexive approach developed by female anthropologists. The main focus of the text lies on a re-conceptualisation of the ethnographic research as an inter-subjective process, and on a new emphasis on the role of the subject in the culture-productive processes of symbolic negotiation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42639938

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100605
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Hodrová Daniela
Abstract: This study represents a Chapter from a section devoted to the composition of a literary work and is part of a larger project called ‘The Poetics of a Work of Literature in the Twentieth Century’, which is being undertaken by the Theory Department of the Institute of Czech Literature. The fragment and fragmentariness in a twentieth-century literary work are a manifestation of a marked tendency towards discontinuity or in some cases towards continuity of a certain kind. There exist works of art that for various reasons remain fragments without, however, being preceived as such (the novels of Kafka and Ladislav Klíma’s Velký román, are cases in point); on the other hand, the fragment, that is to say an intentional fragment (such as a sketch or a synopsis), becomes an independent genre whose roots go back to Romanticism (for instance Novalis’s fragment). The fragment and fragmentarieness that manifests itself in the text in the widest possible number of ways (intentional incompleteness and sporadicity, ‘blank spots’ in the Story, the mixing of heterogeneous elements, the alternating of various genres within one work, and so on), we understand as a reaction to the idea about the work as a complete, inlernally unified and accomplished whole with a clear and single Sense, an idea that Classicism molleyeoddled, which was then to a large exient done by Realism and with it all so-called decadent literature (including tendencious, Socialist-Realist literature). The fragment and fragmentariness (with which is linked the idea of a sense that continuously defies being pinned down to any one definition, which follows from its quality of not being fully told, from suggestion, hints, silence, gaps and ‘ holes’) are, in the literature of the twentieth century, perceived as both a genre and also as approaches that can express the open nature of being and of the world better than the whole work can. Because fragmentary works often represent a work in a nascent state or in a state of transformation, they become a picture of a world that is, as Ladislav Klíma pointed out, ‘continuously creating itself’.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686479

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100618
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Špirit Michael
Abstract: Boje a směry socialistické kultury (1946a)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686700

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100622
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Jankovič Milan
Abstract: Patočka summarized his conception of style in the essay „Umění a čas" [Art and Time] (1966), in which he observes style over historie periods and its increasing departure from a priori, metaphysically ascertained and universally valid meaning. In modern art, style is established by the freedom of the Creative act; its centre of gravity shifts to the level of „signifier". Patočka's essay „O minulém rázu umìění" [Concerning the Former Nature of Art] (written 1965) helped to clarify „aesthetic attitude". In this essay, he develops an interpretational duet: a critique of Hegel's metaphysical starting point, which distances itself from the experience of modern art, and an appraisal of Hegel's interpretation of time, which remains inspirational. In accordance with it, Patočka the phenomenologist considers art the place of „destructive creation", of vivifying revelation, whose source is in man. The next part of the article calls attention to a lecture by Paul Ricoeur „Vyprávění, metafora a teorie interpretace" [Narrative, Metaphor and the Theory of Interpretation] (1987), in which Ricoeur introduced a modern hermeneutic approach to literary studies. What is most relevant here is the concept of the „double reference". The first aspect of reference relates to empirical reality; the second to the „productive reference", which designs a world created by the literary work. Semantic innovation in the narration of a story has a parallel in the semantic innovation of the metaphor. In both cases there emerges „the new, the as yet unsaid, the inexpressible - in language".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686758

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100623
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Papoušek Vladimír
Abstract: The study deals with the problem of Stephen Greenblatt's approaches to an analysis of literary work. The author analyzes Greenblatt's concepts of interpretation of literary work and notices the dangerous results of such interpretations in which literary work as a specifical esthetical object is dissolved in the wide frame of cultural history. On the other hand, he tries to represent how Greenblatt's looking for historical context via permanent negotiation with the texts and reading of textual traces can enriches the work of literary historian.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686773

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100625
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Jankovič Milan
Abstract: In the late twentieth century two conceptions of text in a literary work followed from the original distinction between Sinn (smysl, sense) and Bedeutung (význam, reference), which was made by Gottlob Frege in 1892 - namely, those of Wolfgang Iser and Paul Ricoeur. For us, they are interesting for their direct or indirect affinity to Czech Structuralism. The article presents a detailed comparison of the two conceptions: Iser's 'act of reading', culminating in the 'play of the text', and Ricoeur's proposal of 'productive reference', which heads towards the references (Bedeutungen) of a world that is irmagined, without actually being, and announces itself through the creative power of language. The article concludes by returning to the question of the game and reference in the work of Iser and Eugene Fink. Play and art guard the vitality of sense.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686799

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100650
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Jiráček Pavel
Abstract: Bohumil Nuska points out the predominant limited conception of rhythm, which is usually linked only with acoustically symbolized and aurally perceived rhythms, while the rhythms that are optically symbolized and visually perceived are utterly ignored. In lyric verse, the double, parallel mental construction, which stems from the opposition of syllable and morpheme as constituents of a higher construct of the word, creates parallel Iines of mixed mental spaces of linear and non-linear rhythms (the rhythm of verse, the rhythm of the situation; the atmosphere of the verse, and the atmosphere of the situation). Shared abstract structures in generic spaces within individual mixed spaces of lyric rhythm are shared axiological structures, represented at the highest level of abstraction by tension and relaxation (detension). The dynamic nature of these structures stems from the asymmetric distribution of tension and relaxation with regard to the dualistic symmetrical model of the axiological system. And thus deviations from its axial scheme emerge, creating these four parallel rhythmicized lyric structures (in terms of form). Similarity amongst the individual mixed mental spaces is only possible in a fractal dimension. In this theory, presented as a working hypothesis, it is assumed that the forms of the rhythm of the verse, the rhythm of the situation, the atmosphere of the verse, and the atmosphere of the situation, will be similar to each other, and their fractal mutual similarity emerges from the text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42687271

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100679
Date: 2 1, 2012
Author(s): Sládek Ondřej
Abstract: The study is devoted to the work of Lubomír Doležel, a linguist and literary theoretician, in light of his ninetieth birthday. Based of an analysis of two of his books, Studie z české literatury a poetiky (2008) and Fikce a historie v období postmoderny (2008), the study maps key concepts in his scholarly inquiry in the fields of Czech literature, history and metodology of the investigation of the Prague School, narrative semantics of fictional worids and an application of the semantics to historical worlds.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42687835

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100687
Date: 7 1, 2013
Author(s): Kotásek Miroslav
Abstract: This article discusses the options that narrative and language have in their attempts to capture or describe traumatic experience and death. It concentrates on two prose texts by Karel Čapek, Obyčejný život and Povětroň, and the first phase of Freudian psychoanalysis, pointing at generally distinguishable limits and distortions that arise when narrative and language come in contact with trauma and death. Contrary to the current trend within „trauma studies“ , the article does not deal with autobiographical records of traumatic experience. It rather tries to point out that thinking consistently about the connection between memory, language and trauma tends to blur and question the traditional distinction between fiction (understood as a work of imagination) and autobiography (taken as a description of real events). It also tries to show that psychoanalysis arrives, explicitly and implicitly, at a similar conclusion. The last part of the article poses the question what the resulting relationship between the outside (narrated, written Story) and the „inner“ experience is like, and to what extent the structure of this dyad can also be questioned.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42687982

Journal Title: Asian Perspective
Publisher: The Institue for Far Eastern Studies
Issue: i40101443
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bleiker Roland
Abstract: Dipesh Chakrabarty, Provincializing Europe: Postcolonial Thought and His- torical Difference (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 2000), p. 98.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42704577

Journal Title: Sartre Studies International
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40101498
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Perrin Christophe
Abstract: S'il déclame contre les deux principes qui sont ceux de Descartes, Sartre se réclame pourtant de lui. Sans doute n'est-il pas à un paradoxe près. Reste qu'il nous faudra ne pas l'être moins pour expliquer le sien. Car certes, le sens du texte qu'il intitule « La liberté cartésienne » et qui articule ce volume de morceaux choisis qu'est Descartes 1596-1650 confère quelque cohérence à cet apparent non-sens. Mais une fois présenté de cette oeuvre le paratexte, il nous faudra affirmer non seulement que celle-ci se lit avant L'être et le néant quoiqu'elle ait été publiée après, mais, plus encore, qu'elle est un ensemble d'écrits de Descartes sur Sartre quoiqu'elle soit un écrit de Sartre sur Descartes. C'est qu'outre l'analyse sartrienne des analyses cartésiennes de la Méditation quatrième, on y trouve une psychanalyse existentielle par l'auteur de son devancier, à l'occasion de laquelle a lieu non pas un transfert, mais un contre-transfert. Although Sartre denounces Descartes' two principles, he nevertheless draws inspiration from him. No doubt this is close to being paradoxical; we shall have to be no less paradoxical in our explanation. For although the text entitled "Cartesian Freedom," which introduces a volume of selections from Descartes, Descartes 1596Ί650, confers some coherence on this apparent non-sense, once the texts surrounding this work have been taken into account, we have to conclude not only that this text predates Beinjj and Nothingness, even though it was published afterwards, but that it is a collection of Descartes' writings on Sartre, even though it is a writing by Sartre on Descartes. For beyond the Sartrean analysis of the Cartesian analyses of the Fourth Meditation, we find Sartre's existential psychoanalysis of his predecessor, in which takes place not a transference, but a counter-transference.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3167/ssi.2013.190201

Journal Title: Biblica
Publisher: Pontificio Instituto Biblico
Issue: i40101610
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Kurz William S.
Abstract: Fitzmyer, Luke I-IX, 47-51, esp. 48.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42707320

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40101658
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Suchomel Milan
Abstract: The critical work of F. X. Šalda is from its beginnings full of the pathos of the arrival of the new poetry. The vision, comporting entirely with the principies of symbolisim, is characterized as the idea of synthesis of knowledge: ‘to abstract the Eternal, Unified, and Absolute from the secondary, accidental, relative, temporally and spatially limited, and the divided'. The analytical spirit of science and scholarship, and also of art, aroused a general scepticism and a need for a turnaround. It brought the knowledge that synthesis is the essence of art. It is from there, that Šalda derived his principies of criticism. Analysis, he argued, is justified to the extent that it is governed by a total view. The dark centre of art is accessible to criticism only at the price of criticism itself becoming art, and its essential instrument is intuition. The actual work of the critic begins when the he no longer knows where to go. He must rise above the insignificance of mere facts and look at the world from his own point of view. His work is complementary to the work of the artist, and the nature of art means that self-identification is the lot of the critic. Art cannot be explained causually; the connection between what is near and the suspected contexts, that is to say insight into the mystery of meaning, is the prerequisite of aesthetic contemplation. The author is not bound by objectivity towards the perceived world; the reader is not bound by the objectivity of the author's perceived world, is not limited by the author's intentions. The very action of synthesis is a dynamic reference and another possibility of being. The project of synthesism is a vision of thorough, concrete symbolism; both the expansion of consciousness and the indivisibility of the individual from the rest of the world are included in this postulated unity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42708256

Journal Title: The Journal of Education
Publisher: Boston University School of Education
Issue: i40104951
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Greene Maxine
Abstract: Recent events indicate that self-interest and technicism today triumph over social consciousness; yet educators naturally turn to the humanities as an antidote to positivism and technical domination, even as humanities scholars are increasingly defensive, struggling to hold on to their enclaves. For those committed to the practice of freedom in education the humanities are of vital interest, particularly when they are defined as works that are articulations of some human consciousness thrusting into the world. After giving examples of works that may be classified as "humanities" according to this definition, the following essay discusses teaching situations and literary works which might free persons for awareness of human possibility, for authentic talk and widening perspectives. The humanities must be presented not as monuments to be revered but as works to be shared by students and applied to their own life situations. Students grounded in their "everydayness" can be awakened by Freiré's dialogical method, awakened to crítical consciousness and to the possibility of praxis in a world they share.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42772897

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: British Sociological Association Publications Limited
Issue: i40108628
Date: 8 1, 1988
Author(s): Thompson John B.
Abstract: This paper argues that the analysis of culture and mass communication should be regarded as central concerns of sociology and social theory. It develops a framework for the analysis of culture and shows how this framework can be applied to the study of mass communication. Focusing on the medium of television, the paper highlights some of the distinctive characteristics of mass communication and examines some of the factors involved in the production, construction and reception of media messages. It is argued that this approach enables the analyst to pose questions concerning the ideological character of mass communication in a new and more fruitful way.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42854459

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: British Sociological Association Publications Limited
Issue: i40108642
Date: 2 1, 1993
Author(s): Erben Michael
Abstract: The study of biography as an exercise in sociology has been under-used. The early proponents of a sociology of biography -most notably Wilhelm Dilthey -have not had their work greatly developed. However, with the emergence of Paul Ricoeur's work on the nature of narrativity, time and interpretation, plus the developing influence of the work of others, a hermeneutics of biography has now begun. This paper explores this development, and, further, briefly examines two highly important biographies to explore how theoretical injunction is matched by empirical practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42855037

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: British Sociological Association Publications Limited
Issue: i40108657
Date: 5 1, 1996
Author(s): Hay Colin
Abstract: The winter of discontent continues to exert a powerful hold over the British political imaginary. It acts as a discursive key to a collective mythology seemingly appealed to, and conjured, in each wave of industrial unrest, in each hint of political turmoil and, until recently, whenever the election of a Labour Government looked credible. In this paper I consider the rhetorical strategies and linguistic devices deployed by the tabloid media in the narration of the events of the winter of 1978-79. I argue for an interpretation of the winter of discontent as a moment of state crisis. By crisis however I do not refer to the mere accumulation of contradictions but rather to a moment of transition, a moment of decisive intervention. Within such a framework, the winter of discontent emerges as a strategic moment in the transformation of the British state, and perhaps the key moment in the pre-history of Thatcherism. For, as I hope to demonstrate, the initial appeal of the New Right was premised upon its ability to offer a convincing construction of the winter of discontent as symptomatic of a more fundamental crisis of the state. In such a moment of crisis, a particular type of decisive intervention was called for. In this discursive construction of crisis the New Right proved itself capable of changing, if not the hearts and minds of the electorate, then certainly the predominant perceptions of the political context. It recruited subjects to its vision of the necessary response to the crisis of a monolithic state besieged by the trade unions. This was perhaps the only truly hegemonic moment of Thatcherism. It occurred well before Mrs Thatcher entered Number 10. It is thus not surprising that one of the most enduring and distinctive legacies of Thatcherism has been the new political lexicon of crisis, siege and subterfuge born of the winter of discontent.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42855681

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40108662
Date: 8 1, 1997
Author(s): Ezzy Douglas
Abstract: Two central unresolved problems in labour process theory are the disjuncture between structure and agency and the problem of what constitutes 'good' work. This paper argues that a hermeneutic conception of the self as constructed through narrative provides a resolution to these two issues. Hermeneutics conceptualises the self as neither a solitary entity impervious to the influence of others, nor as a mere reflection of objective structures or 'discourses of power'. Rather, in the process of self-interpretation a person uses socially learnt cultural discourses to construct and reconstruct a coherent sense of narrative-identity. Substantive illustrations are drawn from labour process theory, recent developments in management theory, and some more general studies of the meaning of working.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42855829

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40108676
Date: 2 1, 2001
Author(s): How Alan R.
Abstract: In recent times, under the influence of postmodernist thought sociology has largely rejected the idea of social evolution. An exception to this trend is to be found in the work of Jürgen Habermas. Habermas's account of social evolution has received some critical attention, but in sociology wider detail of the picture is not well known. Habermas wishes to hold to the possibility that evolutionary progress can be discerned not only in the sphere of technical control, but also in the sphere of social and moral development. The paper presents Habermas's views on social evoluton within the wider context of his development of critical theory as a 'reconstructive science'. It suggests that his account has been able to resist many of the standard criticisms of evolutionary theory and that a renewal of interest in this area could provide a rich vein of new sociological knowledge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42856255

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40108703
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Clarke Simon
Abstract: Over the past few years there has been an increasing interest in the use of psychoanalytic ideas within a sociological framework These ideas have been largely developed within sociological theory rather than practice. There does, however, seem to be a new frame of thought and practice emerging which we could term psycho-social studies, perhaps even a new discipline in its own right In this article I will discuss the development of the use of psychoanalytic ideas around sociological issues, explore some of the tensions that have arisen and evaluate the implications for methodological practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42856940

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40108723
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Cochrane James R.
Abstract: People think about health and illness in multifaceted ways, evidencing a conceptual complexity that corresponds to equally complex behaviours in relation to a diversity of healing practices. Stimulated by fieldwork in Lesotho and elsewhere, and engaging principally with Jürgen Habermas, we set out to introduce, explain and develop a conceptual innovation: healthworld. We argue that this notion describes and provides a key analytical tool for the field of health in its social context; a tool that can explain the empirical complexity of health beliefs (importantly, including religion) and behaviours, thereby illuminating possibilities for improving health practice and outcomes. Framed in relation to Habermas's notion of lifeworld, the healthworld is identified as a distinctive 'region' of the lifeworld defined by a particular telos – that of comprehensive well-being, a lifeworld without dysfunction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42857396

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40108742
Date: 5 1, 1999
Author(s): Newton Tim
Abstract: This paper links the ideas of Norbert Elias to the conceptualisation of power and subjectivity that has developed in British industrial and organisational (I/O) sociology. It examines the relevance of power and subjectivity to British I/O sociology and reviews theoretical positions that have influenced this field. Elias's work is examined in some detail, exploring his approach to power, agency, the self, individualisation and discourse. His work is then applied to a re-examination of the perspectives on power and subjectivity contained within labour process, Foucauldian and actor network theory. The paper attempts to show how Elias's work re-frames our understanding of power and subjectivity through a stress on interdependencies and their asymmetry, the 'networked' nature of agency, and the interwoven form of human and socio-political development. It argues that Eliasian analysis maintains the critical concern with power asymmetries witnessed in labour process theory, yet avoids some of the difficulties in conceptualisation of power and subjectivity that are apparent in labour process, Foucauldian work and actor network theory. Elias's work also illustrates the need for a lengthier historical perspective than is typically observed in industrial and organisational sociology, and points to the value of studies which look beyond the context of the workplace. Finally, attention is paid to some of the limitations of Elias's work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42857938

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40108744
Date: 11 1, 1999
Author(s): May Tim
Abstract: Following debates within this journal regarding the absence of adequate studies of resistance in the contemporary fields of industrial sociology and organisational behaviour, this paper seeks to understand its reasons and consequences. Through an examination of the history of approaches to the study of power and resistance at work, the grounds for this debate are considered and illuminated. The paper then suggests how this debate might be taken forward through developing the ideas of tactics and strategies and episodic and dispositional power.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42857998

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40108755
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Prior Lindsay
Abstract: This article is concerned with the ways in which people who work in and use a cancer genetics clinic in the UK talk about the 'gene for cancer'. By conceptualizing such a gene as a boundary object, and using empirical data derived from clinic consultations, observations in a genetics laboratory and interviews with patients, the author seeks to illustrate how the various parties involved adopt different discursive strategies to appropriate, describe and understand what is apparently the 'same' thing. The consequent focus on the ways in which the rhetorical and syntactical features of lay and professional talk interlink and diverge illustrates not merely how our contemporary knowledge of genes and genetics is structured, but also how different publics position themselves with respect to the biochemistry of life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42858282

Journal Title: Social History
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: i394465
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): White James
Abstract: L. S. Kramer, 'Literature, criticism, and historical imagi- nation: the literary challenge of Hayden White and Dominick LaCapra', in Hunt (ed.), New Cultural History, op. cit., 97-128
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4286515

Journal Title: Journal of Legal Education
Publisher: Association of American Law Schools
Issue: i40110909
Date: 12 1, 1983
Author(s): Gillers Stephen
Abstract: Robert B. McKay, The Lawyer in the Year 2000: Three Views, 25 Ala. L. Rev. (1972).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42897913

Journal Title: Revue d'économie financière
Publisher: Association d'Economie Financière
Issue: i40111230
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Elliet Guillaume
Abstract: Cass. civ. 1 , 5 novembre 1991, bull. civ. I, n° 297, p. 195 et JCP 92, ed. E, II, 255,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42903385

Journal Title: Shofar
Publisher: Purdue University Press
Issue: i40113339
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): Frunzâ Sandu
Abstract: "Finkielkraut, Au nom de l'autre, p. 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42944684

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113412
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): Ryan Marie-Laure
Abstract: Narratology has explored in depth the modes of narration, but it has left largely untouched the question of the modes of narrativity. This term designates the various ways in which narrative structures are realized in texts. To call a novel or short story narrative is an entirely different matter from that of applying the same term to a lyric poem or a drama. The study of the modes of narrativity attempts to answer the question: what does it mean to say "this text is narrative"? As a cognitive category necessary to the proper understanding of a work, the narrative structure of a text may be compared to the identifiable shape of an object in a visual artwork. Thus, various modes of narrative may be compared to a type of picture or visual phenomenon.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42945987

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: University of Arkansas
Issue: i40113418
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Keller Joseph
Abstract: A verbal message is a work of art because of the poetic function of language which we recognize because it appears in conversation. We understand one another through a mutual verbal accommodation. The resultant redundancy is precisely the poetic function. Analogously, when we encounter a poem with its multiple parallelism, we alter its language as well as our own, creating "community" just as we do in the most meaningful talk. A brief excursus into a variety of medieval poetry illustrates a relevance to criticism. Because the proverbs which abound in social complaint encapsulate community consensus, they reinforce poetic strategy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946081

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113430
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Fludernik Monika
Abstract: The narratological category "person" needs to be replaced by a different conceptual framework. The traditional distinctions between narrative levels and between story and discourse are inadequate to an explanation of much postmodernist writing. Classic narratological categories correlate with a realist understanding of story and with a realist conceptualization of story telling with some postmodernist techniques of writing, such as second-person fiction, refusing to play by such conceptualizations. Gabriel Josipovici's Contre-jour is an instance of a radical deconstruction of realist parameters. Realist recuperations or naturalizations of intractable writing have to be evaluated as readings against the anti-mimetic grain of such texts, and the possibility of such narrative recuperation does not provide evidence for the reinstatement of traditional narratological distinctions. The failing of current narratology to account for second-person narrative is due to the inapplicability of traditional narratological categories, a break-down that is motivated by the ideological commitments of much postmodernist, and especially second-person, fiction since these deliberately question realistic frames of cognition and story understanding.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946261

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113431
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Gorman David
Abstract: An enumerative listing of writings available in English translation by German Romantic critics and theorists (including Friedrich Hölderlin, Wilhelm von Humboldt, Novalis, Jean Paul, August Wilhelm Schlegel, Friedrich Schlegel, and Ludwig Tieck), with a list of commentaries in English on their work, followed by a selective listing (from works by Fichte, Hegel, Kant, and Schelling) of translations of writings on philosophy and aesthetics contemporary with, and relevant to, German Romanticism, with a selective list of English-language commentaries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946268

Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115221
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Tonoiu Vasile
Abstract: La personnalité, l'activité et l'œuvre de Gonseth peuvent être interprétés organiquement dans une instructive pédagogie de dialogue. L'auteur évoque a) la structure dialogale intime de Gonseth, b) les dialogues peu fructueux qu'il a entretenus avec le Cercle de Vienne, puis lors des Entretiens de Zurich, c) les dialogues qu'il a imaginés dans Les mathématiques et la réalité entre trois personnages: Parfait, Sceptique et Idoine, auxquels vient s'ajouter à la fin le Nouvel Idoine, d) les rencontres avec les néo-scolastiques à Rome, e) la «doctrine» explicite du dialogue exposée dans La loi du dialogue. L'auteur s'interroge aussi sur les conditions d'un dialogue fécond et sur les obstacles qui peuvent s'y opposer, (en particulier: l'incompatibilité des référentiels). Gonseth the man, his life and his work can be interpreted organically in an instructive account of dialogue. The author treats the following topics: a) Gonseth's intimate dialogical structure, b) the fruitless dialogues he had with the Vienna Circle and then at the Entretiens de Zurich, c) his imaginary dialogues in Les mathématiques et la réalité between the characters Perfect, Sceptic and Appropriate, and finally New Appropriate, d) his contacts with neo-scholastics at Rome, e) the explicit 'doctrine' of dialogue presented in La loi du dialogue. The article is also concerned with conditions for a fruitful dialogue and with obstacles that can stand in the way (in particular, the incompatibility of reference systems). Die Persönlichkeit, die Aktivitäten und das Werk Gonseths können im Rahmen einer lehrreichen Pädagogik des Dialogs einheitlich interpretiert werden. Der Autor erörtert a) die intime Dialogstruktur Gonseths; b) die wenig fruchtbaren Dialoge, die er mit dem Wiener Kreis und während der Zürcher Gespräche führte; c) die Dialoge dreier Figuren, die er in Les mathématiques et la réalité in Szene gesetzt hat: Perfekt, Skeptiker und Geeignet, zu denen sich am Schluss der Neue Geeignete hinzugesellt; d) die Begegnungen mit den Neo-Scholastikern in Rom; e) die explizite «Doktrin» des Dialogs, die in La loi du dialogue dargelegt ist. Der Aufsatz stellt auch die Frage nach den Bedingungen eines befruchtenden Dialogs und nach den Hindernissen, die sich ihm entgegenstellen können (im besonderen: die Inkompatibilität der Bezugsrahmen).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42969165

Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115257
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): BLACK Max
Abstract: 1. A. Richards, 92.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42969757

Journal Title: Francofonia
Publisher: Università di Bologna
Issue: i40116700
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Gangama Teddy
Abstract: M.-P. Huglo, É. Méchoulan, W. Moser, Passions du passé, recyclage de la mémoire et usages de l'oubli, Paris, L'Harmattan («Ouverture philosophique»), 2000, p. 18.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43016438

Journal Title: AAA: Arbeiten aus Anglistik und Amerikanistik
Publisher: Institut für Anglistik, Universität Graz
Issue: i40117059
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): West Russell
Abstract: Heiner Keupp, Thomas Ahbe, Wolfgang Gmür, Renate Höfe, Beate Mitzscherlich, Wolfgang Kraus & Florian Straus, Identitäts- konstruktionen: Das Patchwork der Identitäten in der Spätmoderne (Reinbek bei Hamburg: Rowohlt, 1999).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43025718

Journal Title: Médiévales
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes (Paris 8, Saint-Denis) soutenue par l'Institut des Sciences Humaines et Sociales du CNRS
Issue: i40117138
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): COURROUX Pierre
Abstract: G. Kurth, La Cité de Liège au Moyen Âge, Bruxelles, 1910, t. I, p. XXVII-XXVIII.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.4000/medievales.7004

Journal Title: Poetica
Publisher: Wilhelm Fink GmbH & Co. Verlags-KG
Issue: i40117188
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Wiegandt Kai
Abstract: Heidegger, Sein und Zeit (see note 21), § 40.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43028457

Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117266
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Capogreco Nadia
Abstract: R. Char, Partage formel, in Fureur et mystère, Paris, Gallimard, 1962.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43029449

Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117280
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Carone Angela
Abstract: cit. in Edler, Schumann e il suo tempo cit., p. 154.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43029779

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117508
Date: 6 1, 1975
Author(s): MALHERBE Jean-François
Abstract: Kuhn, 1962,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43033684

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117518
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): BOUILLARD Henri
Abstract: l'Autre, pp. 289-291
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43034031

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117549
Date: 12 1, 1985
Author(s): PETIT Jean-Luc
Abstract: P. Ricœur, « The Task of hermeneutics », op. cit., I, 1, p. 54-59.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43035008

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117551
Date: 6 1, 1986
Author(s): RAULET Gérard
Abstract: Gangl 1984-3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43035068

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117554
Date: 3 1, 1987
Author(s): MOULINES C. Ulises
Abstract: T.S. Kuhn, « Theory-change as structure-change ». Erkenntnis, 10 (1976), p. 179-199.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43035187

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117557
Date: 12 1, 1987
Author(s): PORÉE Jérôme
Abstract: Ibid., p. 30-31 / EPh, p. 23.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43035275

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117559
Date: 6 1, 1988
Author(s): LEBRUN Jocelyne
Abstract: Phénoménologie de l'Expérience Esthétique, op. cit., p. 656.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43035315

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117594
Date: 3 1, 1974
Author(s): RADNITZKY Gérard
Abstract: (Lübbe, 1972).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43036188

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117598
Date: 9 1, 1981
Author(s): GRONDIN Jean
Abstract: Bicœur P., « Phénoménologie et herméneutique », p. 50
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43036316

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117605
Date: 6 1, 1989
Author(s): MARTY François
Abstract: Critique de la raison pure, A 707, B735, Pléiade, t. 1, p. 1293-1294.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43036566

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117607
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): GAVIN William J.
Abstract: James, A Pluralistic Universe (New York, Longmans, Green, and Co., 1909) particulièrement dans les conférences V, VI, VII et VIII
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43036661

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117638
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): VILLELA-PETIT Maria
Abstract: Idées directrices pour une phénoménologie et une philosophie phénoménologique pure -Livre Troisième, trad. fr. par D. Tiffeneau sous le titre La phénoménologie et les fondements des sciences, qui reprend le sous-titre allemand, PUF, 1993 (100, 120), trad, modifiée. Edition allemande: Ideen III, Husserliana V, Nijhoff, La Haye, 1952.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43037382

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117652
Date: 12 1, 1998
Author(s): THOUARD Denis
Abstract: Ibid., p. 224.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43037732

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne Éditeur
Issue: i40117657
Date: 3 1, 2000
Author(s): JERVOLINO DOMENICO
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Soi-même comme un autre, Seuil, Paris, 1990, p. 365-367.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43037798

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117672
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): TERTULIAN NICOLAS
Abstract: « Le concept d'aliénation chez Heidegger et Lukacs », Archives de Philosophie, n° 56, juillet-septembre 1993, p. 431-443.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038068

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117682
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): POIREL CHRISTIAN
Abstract: R. Penrose, Shadows of the Mind. A Search in the Missing Science of Consciousness, Oxford University Press, New York, 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038301

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117692
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): BRENNER ANASTASIOS
Abstract: Meyerson, 1931, p. 790.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038470

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117692
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): DE LACLOS FRÉDÉRIC FRUTEAU
Abstract: Paris, PUF, 1968, p. 138-139, 162-163.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038472

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117693
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): LETH PALLE
Abstract: F. D. E. Schleiermacher, « Des différentes methodes du traduire », 1813, tr. Antoine Berman, in Des différentes méthodes du traduire et autre texte, éd. Christian Berner, Paris, Seuil, « Points », 1999, p. 47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038484

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117701
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): GABELLIERI EMMANUEL
Abstract: « Incommensurabilité et médiation: la triple puissance de la métaphysique » in Penser l'être de l'action. La métaphysique du dernier Blondel (E. Tourpe dir.), Peeters, Louvain, 2000, p. 101-118.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038615

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117703
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): DUPORTAIL GUY FÉLIX
Abstract: VI, p. 205.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038646

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117709
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): ZUMWALD DAVID
Abstract: H. Maldiney, Aîtres de la langue et demeures de la pensée, Lausanne, L'Âge d'Homme, 1975.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038748

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117718
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): ESCUDIER ALEXANDRE
Abstract: Ricoeur est explicite sur ce point en SMC A 31 ainsi que dans le texte récapitulatif inti- tulé « De l'interprétation », in DTA 13-39.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038897

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117720
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): MICHEL JOHANN
Abstract: Ibid., p. 45.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038928

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117720
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): JERVOLINO DOMENICO
Abstract: l'inachèvement de l'herméneutique de Ricœur devient à juste titre une herméneutique de l'ina- chèvement. Cet article a été confié aux Archives avant la publication de l'ouvrage de Ricœur Parcours de la reconnaissance, Stock, Paris, 2004,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038929

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117738
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): GRONDIN Jean
Abstract: Wahrheit und Methode, p. 323 (Ges. Werke, II, p. 346) ; tr. fr. p. 184.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039435

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117738
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): PINSON Jean-Claude
Abstract: P. Szondi, « Sur la connaissance philologique », in Poésies et poétiques de la modernité, édité par Mayotte Bollack, Lille, PUL, 1982.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039437

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117743
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): THOUARD DENIS
Abstract: Das individuelle Allgemeine, Francfort, Suhrkamp, 1977,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039534

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117744
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): FAGNIEZ GUILLAUME
Abstract: R. Aron, La philosophie critique de l'histoire, op. cit., p. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039553

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118210
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): van Aarde Andries G
Abstract: Smit 1987:6-9
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048164

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118227
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): West Gerald O.
Abstract: Meyers 1988
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048500

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118242
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Mouton Elna
Abstract: Smit 1997
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048809

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118266
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): McLean Bradley H.
Abstract: Deleuze, Guattari 1987 [1980], xiv, n. 24.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43049255

Journal Title: Journal of Educational Media, Memory & Society
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40118271
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Ammert Niklas
Abstract: Since the early 1990s, the concept of historical consciousness has been central to didactic research in Sweden. It has mostly been used as a theoretical framework on a macro-level or as an attempt to identify students' historical consciousness. This article applies the theoretical concept of historical consciousness to tangible source material:history textbooks from the twentieth century. It focuses on whether Swedish history textbooks for lower secondary school have articulated contexts that may be conducive to developing historical consciousness. The article employs a number of theoretical concepts—narratives, multichronology, identity, and values—in order to analyze perspectives that can be utilized to trigger historical consciousness.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43049338

Journal Title: Internationale Schulbuchforschung
Publisher: Verlag Moritz Diesterweg GmbH & Co.
Issue: i40118640
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Karlegärd Christer
Abstract: Jörn Rüsen, „Historisches Lernen", Böhlau, Köln 1994, S. 70
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43057053

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i396847
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): MellonAbstract: [3, pp. 273-99]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4308865

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i404682
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): Molyneux John M.
Abstract: Wallace [47]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4309044

Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40120543
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Hempelmann Heinzpeter
Abstract: Karpp, Kirchengeschichte, aaO. (Anm. 23), 162.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43099470

Journal Title: Cahiers d'économie politique / Papers in Political Economy
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i40121038
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Lordon Frédéric
Abstract: Charles Ramond (2005), "La loi du nombre", introduction au Traité politique, Spinoza, Œu- vres, V, Epiméthée, PUF.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43107698

Journal Title: Cahiers d'économie politique / Papers in Political Economy
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i40121039
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Ferey Samuel
Abstract: Dworkin 1988, pp. 48-51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43107704

Journal Title: Cahiers d'économie politique / Papers in Political Economy
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i40121043
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Gilardone Muriel
Abstract: On Ethics and Economics (Sen 1987a).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43107753

Journal Title: Cahiers d'économie politique / Papers in Political Economy
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i40121043
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Berthoud Arnaud
Abstract: Que veut-on dire lorsqu'on parle aujourd'hui de valeur de travail ? Une libre réflexion de philosophie économique sur la notion de valeur et sur sa famille - valeur absolue, valeur relative, valeur d'usage, valeur d'échange, évaluation, valorisation, etc. tente d'apporter ici une réponse. Avec, pour exemple privilégié, la doctrine de Marx sur le travail dans le capitalisme et dans la société communiste. What do we mean when we speak about the value of work? This article tries to provide an answer to this question by analysing the notions of value and its different forms: absolute and relative value, use value and exchange value, evaluation and the creation of value. It draws especially on Marx's doctrine of work in capitalism and the communist society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43107756

Journal Title: Journal of International and Area Studies
Publisher: Institute of International Affairs Graduate School of International Studies Seoul National University
Issue: i40121212
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Kim Mikyoung
Abstract: Fukuoka 2006: 161
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43111476

Journal Title: Cahiers d'économie politique / Papers in Political Economy
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i40121221
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): Favereau Olivier
Abstract: Favereau, Biencourt et Eymard-Duvemay [2002]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43111556

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121375
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): MARSHALL TERENCE
Abstract: Emile III, O.C. IV, p. 470.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43116151

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121488
Date: 2 1, 1991
Author(s): LEIBOVICI MARTINE
Abstract: Ibid., p. 77.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43118996

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121491
Date: 8 1, 1991
Author(s): CORCUFF PHILIPPE
Abstract: CNRS, PIRTTEM, Toulouse, 16-18 mai 1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119033

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121517
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): LECA JEAN
Abstract: Rawls, 1987, p. 21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119438

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121528
Date: 2 1, 1998
Author(s): BRUGIDOU MATHIEU
Abstract: F. Backman, M. Brugi- dou, «L'icône profane, l'image des hommes politiques, produits de consommation ou objet sociologique: quelques éléments», Sociétés, 57, 1997.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119587

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121551
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): GAXIE DANIEL
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119882

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121551
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): GENSBURGER SARAH
Abstract: Maurice Halbwachs, op. cit., p. 113.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119888

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121555
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): JOBARD FABIEN
Abstract: Michel Dobry (Sociologie des crises politiques, op. cit.) et de Michel Crozier (Le phénomène bureaucratique, op. cit.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119939

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121569
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): BUTON FRANÇOIS
Abstract: Didier Fassin, « La demande medicale à l'anthropologie », cite, p. 251.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43120202

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121665
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Corcuff Philippe
Abstract: Ibid., p. 199.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122361

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121675
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Farhat Nadim
Abstract: A. R. Zolberg, « The Making of Flemings and Walloons. Belgium : 1830-1914, art. cité, p. 233.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122616

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121681
Date: 8 1, 2013
Author(s): Zittoun Philippe
Abstract: Frank Fischer, Reframing Public Policy, Oxford, Oxford University Press 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122942

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121681
Date: 8 1, 2013
Author(s): Bevir Mark
Abstract: C. Shore, Building Europe. The Cultural Politics of European Integration, Abingdon, Routledge, 2000.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122944

Journal Title: Sociologie du Travail
Publisher: Association pour le développement de la sociologie du travail
Issue: i40123040
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): Cottereau Alain
Abstract: Schütz, 1962, notamment le chapitre On multiple realities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43149904

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40123136
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): ARY ANTÓNIO
Abstract: Ricœur, P. —"La conscience et la loi", art. cit., p. 214.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43151557

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40123137
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): PALMA MARIA FERNANDA
Abstract: Ricœur, Paul - "Démythiser l'accusation Le Conflit des interprétations, Essais d'herméneutique. Paris: Seuil, 1969, pp. 330 ss.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43151569

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40124645
Date: 3 1, 2014
Author(s): Tavory Iddo
Abstract: The role of nonhumans in social life has recently generated significant scholarly interest. The two main paradigms for explaining the sociological significance of nonhumans are constructivism and actor-network theory. We propose a pragmatist synthesis inspired by George Herbert Mead, demonstrating how interactions with nonhumans help constitute the social self—that is, the identity one constructs by imaginatively looking upon oneself as others would. Drawing upon observations of humans interacting with objects, animals, and nature, we identify two complementary ways that nonhumans organize the social self and enable people to experience group membership in absentia: (1) by molding how one is perceived by others and constraining alternative presentations of self and (2) by acting as a totem that conjures up awareness of, and feelings of attachment to, a particular social group. This formulation moves beyond constructivist claims that nonhumans reflect people's self-definitions, and it offers a corrective to actor-network theory's neglect of sociality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43186662

Journal Title: Il Politico
Publisher: Istituto di Scienze Politiche dell'Università degli Studi di Pavia
Issue: i40125674
Date: 3 1, 1973
Author(s): Kontopoulos Kyriakos
Abstract: B. Spinoza, Letters to Friend and Foe , Elwes, trans., New York, Phi- losophical Library, 1966, p. 17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43207558

Journal Title: Anthropological Journal of European Cultures
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40127035
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): GANTNER ESZTER B.
Abstract: The persecution, flight and murder of European Jews in the first half of the twentieth century and the profound social and political transformations that decisively affected European cities in the final decade of the 20th century have radically altered urban 'Jewish landscapes'. New stakeholders and institutions emerged with their own networks, goals and interests, and have constructed, staged and marketed 'Jewish culture' anew. The resultant Jewish spaces are being constituted in an urban space located at the intersection of ethnic representation, collective memory, and drawing on an imagined material culture, which includes architectural, physical and digital spaces (e.g. synagogues, Jewish quarters). This Europe-wide process is closely related to the delicate politics of memory and to discourses on the authenticity of cities. This article analyses how the image of 'Jewishness' plays an increasingly important role in the marketing of historical authenticity that cities and their tourism affiliates are undertaking.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43234607

Journal Title: Anthropological Yearbook of European Cultures
Publisher: Lit Verlag
Issue: i40127062
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Bellagamba Alice
Abstract: Hamilton (2002).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43234947

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128073
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Lawson James
Abstract: Brazilian disciple Herbert de Souza (Betinho), A lista de Ailice (Sao Paulo, 1996).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251247

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128085
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Taylor Charles
Abstract: Roger Lundin, Believing Again (Grand Rapids: Michigan: Eerdmans, 2009).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251452

Journal Title: The Hungarian Historical Review
Publisher: Institute of History, Research Centre for the Humanities, Hungarian Academy of Sciences
Issue: i40128809
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Orbán Katalin
Abstract: Clifford Geertz, "Ideology as a Cultural System," in The Interpretation of Cultures (New York: Basic Books, 1973), 193-233.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43265206

Journal Title: The Hungarian Historical Review
Publisher: Institute of History, Research Centre for the Humanities, Hungarian Academy of Sciences
Issue: i40128809
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Apor Péter
Abstract: Carlo Ginzburg, History, Rhetoric and Proof (Hanover, NH-London: University Press of New England, 1999), 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43265207

Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: Institut d'études Slaves
Issue: i40129162
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): DELAPERRIÈRE MARIA
Abstract: Th. Bernhard, Auslöschung, trad. G. Lambrichs, Paris, Gallimard, 1990, p. 507.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43271490

Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: Institut d'études Slaves
Issue: i40129176
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): RAGUET-BOUVART CHRISTINE
Abstract: « The servile path », On translation, éd. Reuben A. Brower, Cambridge (Mass.), Harvard University Press, 1959, p. 97-110.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43271914

Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: Institut d'études Slaves
Issue: i40129177
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): LANDRY TRISTAN
Abstract: Jean-Paul Sartre, Qu 'est-ce que la littérature ?, Paris, 1948, p. 52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43271945

Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: Institut d'études Slaves
Issue: i40129183
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Vrinat-Nikolov Marie
Abstract: Until about 2005, it was hard to find any publication about literature during the communist era or any important work concerning this period. Since then, this astonishing silence has given way to the publication in Bulgaria of several novels and hybrid writings. In the meantime occured not only literary, but also political and social events which changed the issue: isn't the real problem in Bulgaria today no longer the institutional, generational, historiographical or literary silence, but the dilemna between the collective or individual responsability? To cope with these problems, the author takes into account both the works of Paul Ricoeur concerning the excess of memory and the excess of oblivion, the blocked memory, manipulated memory, abusively controlled or obligated memory, and two emblematic books concerning the communist past as seen in the State Security files: The Watched Man by Vesko Branev, and Surveillance and Conditioning: the literary prose of the State security by Žerminal Čivikov. Ako flo 2005 r. JiHTepaTypHmrr kphthk MOHceme m ce nyzjH 3anjo 6i>jirapcKaTa jihtcparypa Bee ome npeMtJinaBa KOMyHHCTHneckoto MHHajio, 3 a m o see ome jinncBa 3HanHMa TBOp6a 3a TOBa MHHajio, to orroraBa H3JM3 0Xa peflHIja pOMaHH H TBOp6 H C XH6pHaeh )KaHp. Me^cAyBpeMeHHO ce cjiynnxa jiHTepaTypHH, HO H nO JIHTHH eCKH H COUHaJIHH ct»6hth«, kohto npeHacoHHxa KaTO ne jih npo6jieMaTHKaTa. H 3 rjie ^ a , cera npoGjieMa-THHHO e He TOJIKOBa MT»JIHaHHeTO - HHCTHTy- UHOHaJIHO, CeMeHHO-nOKOJieHHeCKO, HCTOpHOrpa(J)CKO, jiHTepaTypHO h t. h. - kojikoto AHJieMaTa Me>K,zjy KOJieKTHBHa h h h /jh b h - ayajiHa 0Tr0B0pH0CT. ToBa mchho me 6i>fle aHajiH3HpaHO b HacToamara cranM, kohto ce n030BaBa, o t e^Ha CTpaHa, Ha pa3BHBaHHTe o t IToji PHKbop noHOTHH 3a n p eK O M e p n a n aM em h n p e K O M e p m m o j i k o n aM em , 3a m o p M 0 3 e u a naMeT, M a n u n y n u p a n a naMeT h 3a d b JU fc eH a naMeT; o t apyra CTpaHa, Ha ^Be KHHrn, eM- 6jieMaTHHHH 3a OTHOUieHHeTO KT»M MHH3JIOTO, OTpa3eHO b ^ocneTaTa Ha flipHcaBHa cnryph o c t - Cjiedenmm noeex oт ecejiHH BpaHeB h Ha6juodeHue u pa3pa6omm: Xydootcecmeenama npo3a na JJ-bpotcaena cmypnocm ot ҖepMHHaji чиbиkob.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43272117

Journal Title: Dance Research: The Journal of the Society for Dance Research
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Issue: i40129862
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): VEROLI PATRIZIA
Abstract: Serge Lifar built his career during the 1930s, a decade crucial to understanding his 'années noires'-or 'black years', as the French historian Henry Rousso called the period of the German occupation of Paris (1940—1944). Lifar's powerful and respected position at the Paris Opéra, the social connections he had built and maintained and the psychological impact of exile: all these elements help clarify Lifar's accommodating attitude towards the German occupants of his adopted city. During the 1930s Lifar came to be accepted in French intellectual society as the 'heir' of Serge Diaghilev. Through his publications he made a powerful contribution to the process by which Diaghilev's Ballets Russes assumed its paramount position in the development of modern ballet, a process set in motion by the impresario himself. Lifar played this role chiefly in France. In the English-speaking world, where relatively few of his books appeared in translation, other writers served to canonise the Diaghilev endeavour, albeit for somewhat different ends. A list of Lifar's publications in Russian and other languages (French above all) displays the growing influence of his actions and authority, the power of his connections (inherited primarily from Diaghilev), and his relentless will to overcome the problems of emigration as he secured not only success as a dancer and choreograph but also a public reputation as an intellectual. The recent discovery of new evidence has led to the identification of the respected Pushkin authority Modeste Hofmann as the writer whose unacknowledged work enabled Lifar to establish himself as an historian. This evidence, provided by Hofmann's grandsons André and Vladimir Hofmann, raises serious questions about the authority of Lifar's books. An interplay of subjective relationships is woven into the texture of these narratives in which survival and ambition, a paternal attitude and filial respect, exist in constant tension. Neither the making of these books nor the myth of Russian dance which they espouse can be understood without placing their authors in the milieu they shared in Paris as Russian émigrés.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43281365

Journal Title: Landscape Journal
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i40132187
Date: 10 1, 1991
Author(s): Corner James
Abstract: This essay is about the crisis of creativity and meaning in contemporary Western culture and how the use of modern landscape and architectural theory works to perpetuate an excessively "hard" or neutral world—a world in which culture can no longer figure or recollect itself. A brief critique of three predominant approaches toward contemporary theory is presented: positivism, the use of paradigms, and the Avant-Garde. In different ways, each approach derives from modern techno-scientific thinking and invariably seeks closure, certainty, and control. The built landscapes that result often suffer from an equally closed explicitude: a stifling immanence where all is exposed and nothing is left to imagination. The essay suggests an alternative strategy grounded in the tradition of hermeneutics. Here, theory is something ever-open, permitting a free association of ideas through the mechanics of situational interpretation and metaphor. Hermeneutics provides the basis for a landscape architectural theory that transcends pictorial image and historical style by critically engaging contemporary circumstance and tradition. The landscape itself is a hermeneutic medium and becomes the ground for such an endeavor, enabling the remembrance, renewal, and transformation of a cultural tradition. The author argues that a hermeneutic approach to the theory and practice of landscape architecture is a way of returning to our designed landscapes the powers of the everyday and the revelatory—the grounds of memory and hope.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43323035

Journal Title: Landscape Journal
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i40132217
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Conan Michel
Abstract: The renewal of a dialog between landscape design and garden history demands a renewal of the questions and methods of garden history. This essay studies how garden reception and garden creation interact. It considers three main issues: first, it explores the domain of cultural expectations framing the engagement with a garden shared by users and creators at a given time—the poetical texture of gardens; second, the role of garden creation in exploiting, expanding or subverting this shared frame of expectations; and third, it proposes an approach—garden pragmatic—to study the broader interactions between garden creation and reception on the one hand, and social and cultural change on the other. The question of intersubjectivity—how do we share our sense and experiences of the world with others, and how do we transform them—is at the root of all the little stories—the fragments of a poetic of gardens—that propose new directions for garden history. Many of these stories have been presented during the last 15 years at symposia at Dumbarton Oaks where the author is presently the director of Garden and Landscape Studies. The general philosophy however had never been presented until the Fall 2004 when he published his "Essais de Poétique des Jardins." They were never made explicit at Dumbarton Oaks where each story only played its part in the theme of the symposium. Yet the whole course of ideas presented here results from these many exchanges with other scholars. This is why many footnotes make explicit references to their works. So, following the lead offered by this text or choosing a personal route, each reader may access many different voices that make garden history at present into a lively resource for pondering about the role of landscape creation in a multicultural world. These fragments of history are written to stimulate the designer's imagination, not to outline the course landscape design should follow.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43323728

Journal Title: Roczniki Filozoficzne / Annales de Philosophie / Annals of Philosophy
Publisher: Towarzystwa Naukowego, Katolickiego Uniwersytetu Lubelskiego
Issue: i40135135
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): CHUDY WOJCIECH
Abstract: W. Juszczak, Sophia, „Znak”, 41(1989), nr 2-3, s. 140.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43409686

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia / Aletheia - Associção Científica e Cultural
Issue: i40135186
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): LIND ANDREAS GONÇALVES
Abstract: Hölderlin, F. - Friedrich Hölderlins sämtliche Werke, ed. cit., p. 433
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43410698

Journal Title: Renaissance and Reformation / Renaissance et Réforme
Publisher: Canadian Society for Renaissance Studies / Société canadienne d'études de la Renaissance, Pacific Northwest Renaissance Society, Toronto Renaissance and Reformation Colloquium and Victoria University Centre for Reformation and Renaissance Studies
Issue: i40136175
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): RUSSELL NICOLAS
Abstract: In sixteenth-century France, the triumphal entry was closely tied to the notion of collective memory. This article defines the concept of collective memory as it is articulated in sixteenth-century texts, retraces the history of the relationship between this notion and the triumphal entry, and, in analyzing several texts tied to entry ceremonies, explores how such texts address triumphal entries' role in the production of collective memory—as opposed to its preservation, which is the typical focus in discussions of the relationship between collective memory and historiographical or poetic works during this period.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43446095

Journal Title: English Literary Renaissance
Publisher: Department of English, University of Massachusetts
Issue: i40136254
Date: 10 1, 1987
Author(s): SESSIONS WILLIAM A.
Abstract: This essay reflects the diversity and range of Bacon scholarship and the current investigation of his writings. To analyze recent work (1945-1984), it divides the criticism into the natural divisions of Bacon's canon: philosophical, scientific, rhetorical and literary, historical and political, legal and medical. The essay also discusses general works on Bacon, biographical studies, and philosophical introductions as well as encyclopedic surveys. It further indicates the relevance of various Bacon texts, some newly discovered, and classical and Renaissance texts Bacon himself owned and annotated.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43447228

Journal Title: Civilisations
Publisher: Institute de Sociologie
Issue: i40138298
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): TABOIS Stéphanie
Abstract: S. Tabois (2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43487276

Journal Title: Historical Archaeology
Publisher: The Society for Historical Archaeology
Issue: i40138497
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Tuffin Richard
Abstract: The issues raised by different kinds of oral-historical research are explored here through a dialogue between two projects. In one case, the Alderley Sandhills Project, this work has been completed; in the other, the Ardnamurchan Transitions Project, the oral-historical research is in its early stages. Through a series of interactions, this article raises a number of different questions that oral-historical research posed at Alderley Sandhills, and it considers the ramifications of and the possible differences in these questions in the case of Ardnamurchan. Adoption of a nonlinear structure echoes one of the many fascinating aspects of oral-historical research itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43491406

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40141126
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Dodier Nicolas
Abstract: B. Glaser, A. Strauss, ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43550677

Journal Title: Urban History Review / Revue d'histoire urbaine
Publisher: Becker Associates
Issue: i40141579
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Zembrzycki Stacey
Abstract: Thousands of child Holocaust survivors arrived in Montreal, Quebec, between 1947 and 1952, looking to remake their lives, rebuild their families, and recreate their communities. Integration was not seamless. As survivors struggled to carve spaces for themselves within the established Canadian Jewish community, their difficult wartime stories were neither easily received nor understood. When remembering this period, survivors tend to speak about employment, education, dating, integration into both the pre-war Jewish community and the larger society, and, perhaps most importantly, the creation of their own social worlds within existing and new frameworks. Forged in a transitional and tumultuous period in Quebec's history, these social worlds, as this article demonstrates, are an important example of survivor agency. Although survivors recall the ways in which Canadian Jews helped them adjust to their new setting, by organizing a number of programs and clubs within various spaces—Jeanne Mance House, the Young Men's and Young Women's Hebrew Association, and the Jewish Public Library—they also speak about how they forged their own paths upon arriving in this postwar city. For instance, survivors created the New World Club, an informal and grassroots social organization where they could prioritize their own needs and begin to be understood as people, and not just survivors. Establishing the interconnections between these formal and informal social worlds, and specifically, how survivors navigated them, is central to understanding the process through which they were able to move beyond their traumatic pasts and start over. Nightmares and parties are parts of the same story, and here the focus is on the memories of young survivors who prioritized their social worlds. Des milliers d'enfants survivants de l'Holocauste sont arrivés à Montréal, au Québec, entre 1947 et 1952, cherchant à refaire leurs vies, reconstruire leurs familles et recréer leurs communautés. L'intégration n'était pas sans faille. Non seulement les survivants ont-ils du mal à se tailler une place au sein de la communauté juive canadienne existante, leurs pénibles récits de la guerre ne sont ni facilement reçus, ni facilement compris. Se rappelant cette période, les survivants ont tendance à parler de l'emploi, de l'éducation, de rencontres et d'intégration à la fois dans la communauté juive et la société d'avant-guerre et, plus encore, de la création de leurs propres univers sociaux dans de cadres établis ou récents. Créés dans une période transitoire et tumultueuse de l'histoire du Québec, ces mondes sociaux, comme le montre cet article, sont un exemple important de la volonté d'agir des survivants. Bien que les survivants rappellent comment les Juifs du Canada les ont aidés à s'adapter à leur nouveau contexte, en organisant un certain nombre déprogrammes et de clubs au sein de différents espaces - Jeanne Mance House, la Young Men's and Young Women's Hebrew Association et la Jewish Public Library - ils racontent aussi comment ils ont forgé leur propre voies en arrivant dans cette ville d'aprèsguerre. Par exemple, les survivants ont créés le New World Club, un organisme social informel et populaire où ils pouvaient donner priorité à leurs propres besoins et commencer à être compris comme êtres humains et non seulement comme survivants. Démontrer les interconnexions entre ces mondes sociaux formels et informels et, plus particulièrement, comment les survivants y ont navigué, est essentiel à la compréhension du processus par lequel ils ont pu dépasser leurs expériences traumatiques et repartir à zéro. Cauchemars et fêtes sont deux versants d'une même histoire; l'accent ici est mis sur les souvenirs des jeunes survivants qui ont accordé la priorité à leurs mondes sociaux.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43560282

Journal Title: Ethnicities
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i40142780
Date: 8 1, 2013
Author(s): Werbner Pnina
Abstract: This paper contrasts intersectionality, the negative definition of identities, and multiple identities, the situational valorisation of positive identities, to argue for a generational shift in the performance of everyday multiculturalism in Britain. In everyday encounters, actors work to sustain the definition of the situation (Goffman) and with it a surface of civility and mutual respect which are nevertheless morally compelling. Everyday relationships flow smoothly and naturally, in an unreflexive, taken-for-granted way, to constitute shared positive identities (Schutz). Such surface civility may, however, be disrupted by communicative breakdowns whenever participants do not share implicit systems of relevancy. Deconstructive analyses that probe beneath the surface of the everyday can also reveal the existence of negative identities, subject to discrimination and stigmatisation. This paper contrasts the experience of first-generation Commonwealth immigrants to Britain with that of successive generations, who unreflexively displayed a shared British identity during the London 2012 Olympics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43586593

Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: Centro de Comunicação e Expressão - CCE / Centro de Filosofia e Ciências Humanas - CFH
Issue: i40143285
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Ramāo Silvia Regina
Abstract: BENJAMIN, 1980, p. 74.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43596179

Journal Title: Anabases
Publisher: Université de Toulouse-Le Mirail
Issue: i40143302
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Payen Pascal
Abstract: Thucydide I, 22, 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43596460

Journal Title: Pallas
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40143884
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): PAILLER Jean-Marie
Abstract: Schmidt 1979.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43605945

Journal Title: Pallas
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40143888
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Roullier Paul-Henri
Abstract: Hadot, 1995, p. 358-359.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43606065

Journal Title: Pallas
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40143908
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): PAYEN Pascal
Abstract: Ibid., I, 1, 1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43606498

Journal Title: Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40144558
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Liberman Kenneth
Abstract: Ethnomethodology captures ordinary events in ways that retain their dynamic and collaborative character. Ethnomethodologists identify people's methods for developing a practical objectivity that can render their local affairs meaningful and orderly, and they closely scrutinize the local details of mundane affairs in order to describe how a local cohort of cooperating parties concert themselves in providing an intelligibility for their social interaction, local work that is naturally occurring and depends upon the reflexive character of any emerging sense.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43615523

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia / Aletheia - Associção Científica e Cultural
Issue: i40145210
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): GILBERT PAUL
Abstract: Brague, Rémi — Am moyen du Moyen-Âge: philosophies médiévales en chrétienté, en judaïsme et Islam. Chatou : Éditions de la transparence, 2006.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43630978

Journal Title: Sociological Forum
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40146446
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Johnston Erin F.
Abstract: Scott (1990: 295-296)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43653896

Journal Title: Pallas
Publisher: Universités de Toulouse-Le Mirail, d'Aix-en-Provence, Limoges, Paul Valéry à Montpellier, de Pau et des Pays de l'Adour
Issue: i40146910
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): NOUILHAN Michèle
Abstract: C'est d'abord s'étonner de la place qu'occupe dans l'œuvre novatrice de Freud la culture antique. Retracer l'itinéraire de la rencontre avec Œdipe, c'est faire comme un état des lieux. L'Interprétation des Rêves, Totem et Tabou, L'Homme Moïse et la religion monothéiste, mais aussi des articles moins connus, des extraits de sa correspondance, contiennent des analyses inattendues, sur l'origine de la tragédie grecque, son évolution, sa fonction, sur la catharsis, le plaisir tragique, etc... Le but n'est pas d'apprécier la pertinence des réponses, mais de dégager l'originalité d'une démarche qui lie fiction et réalité, structure et histoire, passé et présent. And our first response will be to marvel at the importance of the culture of antiquity in Freud’s innovating work. Tracing up the stages of his encounter with Œdipus is tantamount to an inventory of fixtures. The Interpretation of Dreams, Totem and Taboo, The Man Moses and monotheistic religion, but also less known articles and extracts from his correspondence contain unexpected analyses on the origin of Greek tragedy, its evolution, its function, on catharsis, tragic pleasure, etc. Our aim is not to assess the relevance of the answers but to bring out the originality of a procedure that links up fiction and fact, structure and history, past and present
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43660649

Journal Title: Latin American Research Review
Publisher: Latin American Studies Association
Issue: i40147413
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Rotondo Santiago Alfaro
Abstract: Entrevista a Richard Enriquez y Raúl Cconcha, 8 de julio del 2009, Lima.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43670143

Journal Title: Anabases
Publisher: Université de Toulouse-Le Mirail
Issue: i40148226
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Payen Pascal
Abstract: Les Grecs, les historiens, la démocratie, p. 219-245.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43682760

Journal Title: Theory and Society
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40148922
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Mische Ann
Abstract: Latour 2005
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43694727

Journal Title: Theory and Society
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40148931
Date: 7 1, 2013
Author(s): Goldberg Chad Alan
Abstract: Alexander (2006)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43694782

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40149953
Date: 10 1, 1986
Author(s): ROBINSON ROBERT B.
Abstract: Tzvetan Todorov, "Primitive Narrative," The Poetics of Prose (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University, 1977) 63-64.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43717288

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150119
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): LAUNDERVILLE DALE
Abstract: Block, "Prophet of the Spirit," 39-41.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43724946

Journal Title: Mitteilungen des Kunsthistorischen Institutes in Florenz
Publisher: Kunsthistorisches Institut in Florenz, Max-Planck-Institut
Issue: i40150746
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Gerbron Cyril
Abstract: Humbert of Romans, "Expositio regulae B. Augustini", in: idem, Opera de vita regulan, ed. by Joachim Joseph Berthier, Rome 1888/89, 1, pp. 248-268.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43738210

Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i40150967
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): MOORE ALLAN F.
Abstract: Sentimental Journey (Carlton, 1996).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43741609

Journal Title: Der Staat
Publisher: Duncker & Humblot
Issue: i40151319
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Alexy Robert
Abstract: Robert Alexy, Ideales Sollen, in: Laura Clèrico/Jan-Reinard Sieckmann (Hrsg.), Grundrechte, Prinzipien und Argumentation, 2009, S. 21 (21-33).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43747860

Journal Title: Economic and Political Weekly
Publisher: Sameeksha Trust
Issue: i402288
Date: 4 26, 1968
Author(s): Cohn Lata
Abstract: Several debates arose in the nineteenth century on the status of women in India in the context of determining an appropriate colonial policy on such matters as "sati" which were seen to mark the depressed position of women in society. The reform of these practices was held to be part of the regenerating mission of colonisation. The most sensational and the first of these debates concerned the outlawing of "sati". The literature on "sati" (and on social reform) of the period has largely adopted the framework of modernisation theory. The paper argues that the characterisation of the official debate as one between 'preservationists' and impatient westerners obscures a number of important issues. For instance, rather than argue for the outlawing of "sati" as a cruel and barbarous act, officials in favour of abolition were at pains to illustrate that the abolition would be consonant with the principle of upholding tradition. By treating the debates on "sati" as a discourse and examining its production the article contests the conclusions on "sati" drawn by colonial officials.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4375595

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40153127
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Carlson Thomas A.
Abstract: Ignace d'Antioche, in Die Apostolichen Väter. éd. J.A. Fischer, Darmstadt, 1956, p. 158-161.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43775658

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40153127
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Falque Emmanuel
Abstract: Saint Bonaventure et l'entrée de Dieu en théologie, Paris, Vrin, « Études de philosophie médiévale», 2000, p. 24
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43775659

Journal Title: Quaderni storici
Publisher: il Mulino
Issue: i40153284
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Gribaudi Maurizio
Abstract: The article analyses the paths formed by the lives of four workers in nineteenth century France as a way of focusing on the problem of the relationship between individual life experience and the surrounding environment. The extremely rich biographical material contained in the main source used makes it possible to bring out the total identification between these two terms, which are usually seen as separate and as polar opposites. Individuals are profoundly shaped by the way they are embedded in a social milieu. And this milieu teems, beats and changes together with the individual.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43779277

Journal Title: Worldviews
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i40156045
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Mickey Sam
Abstract: Bachelard 2002a: 269
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43809353

Journal Title: Problemas del Desarrollo
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Económicas, Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México
Issue: i40157638
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): MARQUES-PEREIRA JAIME
Abstract: Schvarzer, 1999
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43837461

Journal Title: Problemas del Desarrollo
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Económicas, Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México
Issue: i40157705
Date: 9 1, 2010
Author(s): Mañán Oscar
Abstract: Boisier, 2002
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43838834

Journal Title: The Journal of Mind and Behavior
Publisher: The Institute of Mind and Behavior
Issue: i40158143
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Farber Seth
Abstract: Aurobindo, 1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43853336

Journal Title: International Journal of Musicology
Publisher: PETER LANG
Issue: i40158446
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Frigyesi Judit
Abstract: Somfai, Béla Bartók: Composition, Concepts and Autograph Sources, 170.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43858010

Journal Title: La Ricerca Folklorica
Publisher: Grafo
Issue: i40160254
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): MASSENZIO MARCELLO
Abstract: Marlene Zarader (2012: 124 et suiv.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43897005

Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: Centro de Comunicação e Expressão - CCE Centro de Filosofia e Clências Humanas - CFH Universidade Federal de Santa Catarina - UFSC
Issue: i40160623
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Veiga Ana Maria
Abstract: Poeminho do contra de Mário Quintana, criado em 1 978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43903967

Journal Title: Études rurales
Publisher: Editions de l'Ecole des Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40163031
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Deffontaines Nicolas
Abstract: Pour expliquer le suicide des agriculteurs, les médias se limitent généralement au seul facteur économique. Une approche comprehensive de cette question révèle d'autres conditions objectives de production de ce qu'on peut appeler la « souffrance sociale ». Le déséquilibre structurel entre l'organisation prescrite et l'organisation réelle du travail génère chez les agriculteurs un sentiment de pénibilité mentale. Tenus de répondre à des impératifs d'autonomie et de réalisation de soi, ces derniers ne disposent pas tous des mêmes ressources sociales pour parvenir à une image positive d'eux-mêmes. Pour se développer, la souffrance suicidaire s'appuie en effet sur la distribution inégale du capital économique, culturel et d'autochtonie. When explaining suicide among farmers, the media tend to focus exclusively on economic factors. This paper argues that adopting a more comprehensive approach to the issue highlights other conditions of production of what might be termed "social suffering". It is suggested that the structural imbalance between the prescribed and actual organization of work causes mental pain among farmers. The paper argues that amid increasing pressure to demonstrate greater autonomy and self-realization, farmers may not have the same social resources for developing a positive self-image. Research shows that an unequal distribution of economic and cultural capital and capital of autochtony leads to increased suicidal thoughts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43948334

Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167319
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): TIERNEY-TELLO MARY BETH
Abstract: This essay analyzes the relationship between text and image in La destructión delreino by Miguel Gutiérrez, with photographs by Julio Olavarria. The essay argues that the authors perform a critical type of memory work that allows their art, here photography and narration, to become a method for mourning and moving beyond the impasse produced by the guilt and the sense of loss experienced by the social subject in times of trauma.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44029493

Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167328
Date: 9 1, 2003
Author(s): hoogland renée c.
Abstract: This essay considers the critical role of art in the actualization of embodied subjectivity. Drawing on the work of Paul Ricoeur, Félix Guattari, and Mikhail Bakhtin, the author argues that an active engagement with art is intrinsic to both the generation of meaning and the process of subjective becoming.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44029622

Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167351
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): CLARKSON ROSS
Abstract: Jack Spicer's poetry is not a pursuit of the ideal of community, but rather his work is an instance of community. One of the most significant aspects of a community is its relationship to, and communication with, the dead. This essay explores Spicer's relationship to the dead poet Garcia Lorca through his book After Lorca, and Lorca's relationship to the immemorial community in Textbook of Poetry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44029930

Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167391
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): MILLER J. HILLIS
Abstract: Derrida's memorials or works of mourning for others function doubly. They put the dead friend in his or her place. They also say the best that can be said for the dead and work to ensure their survival.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44030518

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école biblique et archéologique française
Issue: i40170775
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Beauchamp Paul
Abstract: «Le Pentateuque et la lecture typologique», à paraître dans le Pentateuque (Congrès de l'A. C. F.E.B. 1991), Cerf.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44089094

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40171007
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Sonek Krzysztof
Abstract: CBQ 73 (2011): 141
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44092093

Journal Title: Policy Sciences
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40172080
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Araral Eduardo
Abstract: The first-generation literature on policy design has made considerable contributions over the last 30 years to our understanding of the process, politics and implications of policy design and instrument choice. This literature, however, has generally treated institutions as a black box and has not developed a coherent set of frameworks, theories and models of how institutions matter to policy design. In this paper, I unpack the black box of institutions using transaction cost and mechanism design to show how regulations can be better designed in developing countries when institutions are weak, unaccountable, corrupted or not credible. Under these conditions, I show that efficient regulatory design has to minimize transaction costs, particularly agency problems, by having incentive compatible (self-enforcing) mechanisms. I conclude with a second-generation research agenda on regulatory design with implications for environmental, food and drug safety, healthcare and financial regulation in developing countries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44113970

Journal Title: Human Organization
Publisher: Society for Applied Anthropology
Issue: i40172750
Date: 10 1, 1991
Author(s): GILMORE DAVID D.
Abstract: Contemporary rural anthropology, both applied and ethnographic, often takes place in situations of extreme political and class conflict. Despite recent debates over reflexivity and ethics generally in such studies, the methodological problems of doing fieldwork under conditions of class conflict rarely figure into the debate; this is particularly true of southern Europe. These problems are at once personal, moral, epistemological, and methodological. This paper describes one fieldworker's efforts to maintain scholarly neutrality in an agro-town in Franco Spain where class conflict was severe. The implications of this experience for critical anthropology and for applied anthropology are discussed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44126292

Journal Title: Human Organization
Publisher: Society for Applied Anthropology
Issue: i40172767
Date: 4 1, 1994
Author(s): BAHR HOWARD M.
Abstract: Disciplinary specialties and boundaries may impede as well as facilitate understanding. Standard scholarly orientations to the study of Navajos and other ethnic populations manifest many biases of ethnocentrism and a general tendency to stereotype. Specific observer-related tendencies to distort are noted, among them tendencies to understate social dynamics and the degree to which Navajos are functioning parts of wider social systems. The literature on Navajos is a product of changing tools in the hands of changing observers applied to changing communities in the context of ongoing change in the wider societies of both observer and observed. It is argued that "multiplying glimpses," or increasing the number and types of observers and the variety of disciplines and paradigms represented, may reduce observer and position biases that distort existing views of Navajo society. An overview of the massive literature on the Navajo leads to the identification of 21 distinct genres. These genres and other Navajo texts may profitably be viewed in the perspective of textual analysis, broadly defined. Issues of meaning and interpretation are considered, including the reality-language-text nexus, construction of texts, text-context patterns, and the interaction of text, situation, and analyst in interpretation. Appropriate use of existing texts is socially responsible "green research" and should not be professionally stigmatized. It substitutes resource-efficient recycling of discarded and underanalyzed texts for the old expensive, obtrusive colonial patterns of work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44126560

Journal Title: Cultural Geographies
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i40178163
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Hoskins Gareth
Abstract: An interest in narrative has done much to shed light on our understandings of geography. Studies linking narrative to nation building, the making of place, identity, the region, the spaces of health, heritage, and environmental history, give some indication of the breadth at which geographical scholarship has been pushed forward by an applied interest in stories. This article attempts to develop such work with a particular focus on the performative capacities of narrative; how stories might work towards various recuperative outcomes. It discusses the revision of historic tours around Angel Island Immigration Station, a California State Park property and National Historic Landmark with reference to the term narrative economy. The Immigration Station plays host to a narrative economy where stories circulating around the site acquire value on the basis of their factual content and their compatibility with a set of approved messages. Some of these stories are disputed and devalued so as to distinguish them from factual 'histories' produced by recently commissioned research. The article considers how heritage sites negotiate tensions between the burden of representational accuracy and the need to function more broadly as platforms for liberatory intervention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44251338

Journal Title: Cultural Geographies
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i40178169
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Cloke Paul
Abstract: This paper suggests that the vocabulary and meaningfulness of 'evil' can be re-articulated, and to some extent redeemed from the extremes of fundamentalism and relativism. It uses intellectual resources from Nigel Wright, Walter Wink and Rene Girard to reconstruct some foundations for a reworking of evil in human geography. It then presents an account of the reappearance of evil 'after postmodernism' in event, narrative and praxis, arguing that working through and acting against evil reveals its present nature in terms that defy the excesses of right-wing religious fundamentalism and the bland tolerance that can stem from an over-reliance on relativistic thinking. The paper considers how geographies of postsecular practice in areas such as homelessness emerge in response to discernment both of the spiritual interiorities and the exteriorities of landscapes of power, and of the ability of human action to influence these landscapes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44251434

Journal Title: Cultural Geographies
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i40178171
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Johnson Nuala C
Abstract: Drawing on the theoretical insights of Paul Ricoeur this paper investigates the geographies of public remembrance in a post-conflict society. In Northern Ireland, where political divisions have found expression through acts of extreme violence over the past 30 years, questions of memory and an amnesty for forgetting have particular resonance both at the individual and societal level, and render Ricoeur's framework particularly prescient. Since the signing of the Belfast Agreement in 1998, initiating the Peace Process through consociational structures, discovering a nomenclature and set of practices which would aid in the rapprochement of a deeply divided society has presented a complex array of issues. In this paper I examine the various practices of public remembrance of the 1998 bombing of Omagh as a means of understanding how memory-spaces evolve in a post-conflict context. In Omagh there were a variety of commemorative practices instituted and each, in turn, adopted a different contour towards achieving reconciliation with the violence and grief of the bombing. In particular the Garden of Light project is analysed as a collective monument which, with light as its metaphysical centre, invited the populace to reflect backward on the pain of the bombing while at the same time enabling the society to look forward toward a peaceful future where a politics of hope might eclipse a politics of despair.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44251471

Journal Title: Études/Inuit/Studies
Publisher: Association Inuksiutiit Katimajiit inc.
Issue: i40178329
Date: 1 1, 2016
Author(s): Møller Helle
Abstract: ibid.: 38-39
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44254675

Journal Title: Revue des Études Grecques
Publisher: SOCIÉTÉ D'ÉDITION « LES BELLES LETTRES »
Issue: i40179034
Date: 6 1, 1979
Author(s): Veyne Paul
Abstract: G. Granger, La théorie aristotélicienne de la science, Paris, Aubier- Montaigne, 1976, p. 374.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44278735

Journal Title: Cultural Geographies
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i40179555
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): DeLoughrey Elizabeth M.
Abstract: This article explores how the concept of ecosystem ecologies, one of the most influential models of systems thinking, was developed in relation to the radioactive aftermath of US nuclear weapons testing in the Pacific Islands. Historian Richard Grove has demonstrated how tropical island colonies all over the globe served as vital laboratories and spaces of social, botanical, and industrial experiment in ways that informed modernity and the conservation movement. I propose a similar relationship between the militarized American island colonies of Micronesia and how their constitution as AEC laboratories contributed to both atomic modernity and the field of ecosystem ecology. This was enacted through metaphorical concepts of island isolation and distributed visually by Atomic Energy Commission films that upheld an aerial vision of the newly acquired atolls for an American audience. Finally, the myth of isolation is also at work in the ways in which Marshall Islanders exposed to nuclear fallout became human subjects for radiation experiments due to the idea of the biological isolate.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44289602

Journal Title: Christianity and Literature
Publisher: Pepperdine University
Issue: i40180515
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Gruenler Curtis
Abstract: The works of Lewis and Girard share several central interests but seem divided by opposite views of myth. Lewis' novelistic retelling of the myth of Cupid and Psyche, however, provides a bridge: it depicts an ancient society organized around sacrifice and myth as understood in Girard's cultural theory and tells a Girardian story of conversion, in which the narrator discovers the imitative and rivalrous nature of her desire. Her rivalry and reconciliation with the story's true god carries the novel beyond Girardian myth to a contrary kind of narrative identified with fairy stories, which can extend Girard's approach to Christian conversion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44314813

Journal Title: Journal of Educational Media, Memory & Society
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40180805
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): Ghosh Shreya
Abstract: If nations are "imagined communities" as many theorists like to define them, then they need an ideology to create a cohesive imagination. In modern times, the project of writing "history" has been an important instrument in the service of this ideological purpose of justifying and reproducing the modern nation-state as the predestined and legitimate container of collective consciousness. School textbooks, at least in South Asia, have long been among the most exploited media for the presentation of the history of the national collective. This essay is a study of school textbooks in Bangladesh. It looks at narrative representations of selected episodes from the past, both pre- and postindependence, in order to reflect on how they construct "history". Through this work I endeavor to relate textual images to issues of community relations and identity by identifying and sharing the ways in which the audience for nationalist discourse is created, nurtured, and secured through symbolic means.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44320033

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: Pontificia Universitas Gregoriana
Issue: i40180925
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): O'meara Thomas F.
Abstract: Th. O'Meara, «Paul Tillich in Catholic Thought. The Past and the Future» in Fr.J. Parrella [ed.], Paul Tillich, 28
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44322231

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: Pontificia Universitas Gregoriana
Issue: i40180927
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Haers Jacques
Abstract: «Ten Building Blocks of Catholic Social Teaching», America, October 31, 1998, 9-12. See: www.americamagazine.org/content/article.cfm?article_id=11297 (last consulted: March 31, 2012).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44322322

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182084
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Ruff Pierre-Yves
Abstract: J. Zumstein, «La communauté johannique et son histoire», pp. 359-374.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357090

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182085
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: Ricœur poursuit sa discussion avec Lévinas dans SA 387-393.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357126

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182097
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Bühler Pierre
Abstract: «D'une lecture à l'autre. L'interprétation et ses déplacements» de septembre 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357519

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182098
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Hort Bernard
Abstract: Esprit, Paris, juin 1989, pp. 48 à 58,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357571

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182105
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Jacques Robert
Abstract: Genève, Labor et Fides, 1986.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357946

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182117
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Vanni Michel
Abstract: S. Mosès, L'ange de l'histoire. Rosenzweig, Benjamin, Scholem, Paris, Seuil, 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358471

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182118
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Tétaz Jean-Marc
Abstract: Friedrich Wilhelm Kantzenbach, Evangelium und Dogma. Die Bewältigung des theologischen Problems der Dogmengeschichte im Protestantismus, Stuttgart, Evangelisches Verlagswerk, 1959.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358509

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182120
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: The Principles of Morals and Legislation (1781), New York, Prometheus Books, 1988, p. 23.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358600

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182126
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Schmid Muriel
Abstract: T. Moore, Dark Eros. The Imagination of Sadism, Woodstock, Spring Publi- cations, (1994) 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358902

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182141
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Célis Raphaël
Abstract: F. Nietzsche, Poésies complètes, Seuil, Paris, 1951, p. 47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359420

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182141
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Dermange François
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Amour et justice, p. 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359421

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182150
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Ullern-Weite Isabelle
Abstract: C. Indermuhle et T. Laus, cf. le psaume qumrânien qui aurait formé une conclusion au livre biblique du Siracide, IIQPs XXI, in A. Dupont-Sommer et M. Philonenko (éds), Écrits intertesta- mentaires, Paris, Gallimard, 1987, p. 318-322.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359666

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182155
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: K . E Logstrup, Norme et spontanéité, trad. fr., Paris, Cerf, 1997.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359784

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182161
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Clavien Christine
Abstract: H. Spencer, The Data of Ethics, London, Williams and Norgate, 1879, Chap. II, § 7; Accessible en ligne : http://fair-use.org/ herbert-spencer/the-data-of-ethics
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359998

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182162
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Bühler Pierre
Abstract: Op. cit., p. 340.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360042

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182162
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: Matthieu 25,1-13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360046

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182163
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Pierron Jean-Philippe
Abstract: Paris, Stock, 2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360091

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182164
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Jervolino Domenico
Abstract: «Entre Thévenaz et Ricoeur: la 'philosophie sans absolu'», in P. Capelle, G. Hébert et G. Popelard (éds), Le souci du passage. Mélanges offerts à Jean Greise h, Paris, Beauchesne, 2004, p. 180-190.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360113

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182183
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Chalamet Christophe
Abstract: E. Jüngel, Dieu mystère du monde, t. 2, Paris, Cerf, 1983, p. 97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360666

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182196
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Bondolfi Alberto
Abstract: H. de Vries, Minimal Theologies. Critiques of Secular Reason in Adorno and Lévinas, Baltimore, John Hopkins University Press, 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360940

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182196
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Ogien Ruwen
Abstract: J. Rawls, Libéralisme politique, op. cit., p. 80.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360953

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182200
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Burri Yannick
Abstract: EC, p. 13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44361055

Journal Title: The Eastern Buddhist
Publisher: The Eastern Buddhist Society
Issue: i40182279
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Blum Mark L.
Abstract: KMZ, vol. 6, p. 215.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44362364

Journal Title: Journal of Ritual Studies
Publisher: Department of Religious Studies, University of Pittsburgh
Issue: i40182539
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Jennings Theodore W.
Abstract: Ritual studies is a new discipline within the field of the study of religion. Liturgical theology is, in the West, a recent development within the Held of systematic theology. The article describes each and indicates ways in which they may contribute to the work of the other while retaining their separate identities. The development of methods for describing and analyzing ritual action may enable liturgical theology to construct its own analyses upon a more broadly phenomenological base. At the same time theology's insight into the history of liturgical action may enable ritual studies to overcome an excessively synchronie perspective and to attend to the normative character of ritual gesture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44368318

Journal Title: Journal of Ritual Studies
Publisher: Department of Religious Studies, University of Pittsburgh
Issue: i40182541
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Laughlin Charles D.
Abstract: Masking is ubiquitous to the culture areas of the world and is a symbolic activity inextricably associated cross-culturally with cosmological drama and shamanic ritual. Our question is, "Masks work how?" In Part 1, we place masks within their physical, cultural and cosmological context so as to view the activity of masking as part of a wider symbolic process. Masks are seen to be transformations of face. In Part 2, the work of masking is realized as a transformation of experience, and is related to a general cycle of meaning in culture whereby cosmological beliefs give rise to direct experience, and experience verifies and vivifies cosmology. And in Part 3 the "how" of masking is explained using a biogenetic structural perspective which traces the possible transformations of brain that may occur within the wearer and audience and that may mediate a variety of mask-related experiences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44368364

Journal Title: Journal of Ritual Studies
Publisher: Department of Anthropology, University of Pittsburgh
Issue: i40182553
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Prattis Ian
Abstract: Metaphor, Vibration and Form identifies a process that underlies all ritual enactments. Whether it is Joseph Campbell's analysis of the Hero's journey, Victor Turner's theoretical and experiential interest in symbols, or Charles Laughlin's cycle of meaning, there is at work a particular kind of behavioral transformation system. It begins with the mind and the meanings provided metaphorically for symbols, then proceeds to an intense focus on symbolic sequences in meditation or in ritual dramas, so that the metaphor is taken into the body as physical experience. From this physical "ownership" of the metaphor, the properties associated with it are encouraged, socially and ritually, to come to the surface and be enacted in the form of everyday behavior. Questions of symbolic appropriation, the redundancy of symbol, and professional responsibility are addressed in the concluding remarks.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44368586

Journal Title: Journal of Ritual Studies
Publisher: Department of Anthropology, University of Pittsburgh
Issue: i40182557
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Brown Gavin
Abstract: This paper, theoretical in nature, discusses how the study of ritual has been re-conceptualized in terms of performance theory. This involves firstly defining the difficult term 'performance' and then proceeding to explore how ritual can be recast as a (cultural) performance. Building on this discussion, it is argued that recasting ritual as performance has led the scholar of ritual to pay closer attention to how indeterminacy inheres within all ritual performances. This is explored in two senses. Firstly, by 'privileging the moment' in ritual analysis, the essentially indeterminate nature of meaning in ritual performances becomes evident. Secondly, working with Victor Turner's idea of ritual anti-structure and cultural reflexivity, I explore how rituals are constituted by cultural indeterminacy, a condition most discernible in the execution of ritual action, that is, in performance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44368641

Journal Title: L'Espace géographique
Publisher: doin éditeurs
Issue: i40183345
Date: 12 1, 1979
Author(s): BUTTIMER Anne
Abstract: Vorträge und Aufsätze, 1954
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44380811

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184930
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): Gisel Pierre
Abstract: ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407230

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184957
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): De Bauw Christine
Abstract: « Le récit interprétatif : Exégèse etThéologie dans les récits de la Passion » (1985).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407712

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184968
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Lichnerowicz André
Abstract: Les mathématiques, auxquelles on peut joindre la logique, et depuis 1960 une large part de l'informatique théorique, fournissent un témoignage sur une part essentielle du fonctionnement de l'esprit humain. Loin de fournir seulement des outils extérieurs, elles se sont faites mode de pensée nécessaire pour appréhender la réalité physique. Elles nous ont appris que ce que nous nommons raison, démarche rationnelle, est en réalité laborieusement construit. Un bref survol de l'histoire des mathématiques, anciennes, puis surtout depuis le XIXe s., montre en quel sens le concept ancien de « vérité scientifique » s'en trouve désormais modifié. Mathematics, to which one may add logic and, since 1960, a large section of theoretical computer technique, all furnish evidence concerning an essential part of the working of the human mind. Far from providing only external tools, they have evolved as a necessary mode of thought for the understanding of physical reality. They have taught us that what we call reason, or rational deduction, is in fact something we have ourselves laboriously constructed. A brief survey of the history of mathematics, ancient and modern but especially from and after the 19th century, shows ways in which the old concept of a 'scientific truth' must henceforth be modified.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407910

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185001
Date: 7 1, 1997
Author(s): Jacques Francis
Abstract: P. Ricœur, La Métaphore vive. Seuil 1975, VIIe étude § 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408459

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185020
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Jossua Jean-Pierre
Abstract: Ibidem, p. 257.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408735

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185023
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Rey Bernard
Abstract: Cette Note présente l'ouvrage de Christian Duquoc, intitulé L'unique Christ. La symphonie différée, en en suivant le déroulement et en se montrant particulièrement attentif à son apport christologique. L'approche ne se limite pas à la question de la médiation unique du Christ. Elle aborde aussi le rapport du Christ à l'histoire et au cosmos, le sens de la mission de l'Église, sa relation au judaïsme, la signification du salut et la façon de l'envisager dans le cadre d'une pluralité des religions. Au long de sa présentation, l'auteur de cette Note montre que la théologie développée dans cet ouvrage se trouvait déjà largement amorcée dans les précédents travaux de Duquoc. This Note introduces the work of Christian Duquoc, entitled L'unique Christ. La symphonie différée, surveying its development and paying particular attention to its Christological contribution. Its approach is not limited to the question of Christ's unique mediation. It takes up as well Christ's relation to history and to the cosmos, the meaning of the Church's mission, its relation to Judaism, its signification of salvation, and the way of envisaging it within the setting of a plurality of religions. During the course of his presentation, the author of this Note shows that the theology developed in this work was largely initiated in Duquoc's earlier works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408775

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185026
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Vieillard-Baron Jean-Louis
Abstract: Op. cit., p. 74 sqq.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408822

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185074
Date: 7 1, 1981
Author(s): Labbé Yves
Abstract: Nietzsche, Ainsi parlait Zarathoustra IV, « La chanson ivre », par. 10 (trad. G. Bianquis, Paris, 1969).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44409916

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185081
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): de Berranger Olivier
Abstract: H. de Lubac, «Mystique et Mystère», TO , p. 59.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410029

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185087
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Rousse-Lacordaire Jérôme
Abstract: Théophile Bra, L'Évangile rouge. Texte établi, annoté et présenté par Jacques de Caso. Avec la collab. de André Bigotte. Postface de Frank Paul Bowman. Paris, Gallimard (coll. «Art et artistes»), 2000; 16 x 22 cm., 319 p., 155 F., ISBN 2-07- 075908-3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410154

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185091
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Harada Masaki
Abstract: G.-G. Granger, Sciences et réalité, Paris, Éditions Odile Jacob, 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410220

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185100
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Ganoczy Alexandre
Abstract: Le sentiment même de soi, Paris 2002, 259s.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410400

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185190
Date: 7 1, 1960
Author(s): Pohier J.-M.
Abstract: Mélanie Klein (l'original allemand et sa traduction anglaise datent de 1932 !) : La psychanalyse des enfants (traduction du Dr J. B. Boulanger). Paris, P. U. F., 1959.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44411764

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS - Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i40185962
Date: 1 1, 2017
Author(s): Centemeri Laura
Abstract: Jaspers 2011, 289
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44425364

Journal Title: Educational Technology
Publisher: Educational Technology Publications, Inc.
Issue: i40186207
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Faulconer James E.
Abstract: This article presents the concept of facilitative theorizing as an alternative to prescriptive and descriptive theory in educational technology. The authors contend that these traditional forms of theory do not offer sufficient assistance to practitioners as they go about everyday design work. Facilitative theorizing, as an alternative, is specifically devised to offer more flexible and useable insight to practicing educational technology designers. To clarify this view of theorizing, the authors explicate four major ideas on which it is based (co-constitution, incompletability, thick articulation, and thematization), discuss some of its implications for scholarship and practice, and offer examples of theorizing in this practice-oriented vein.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44430004

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i405514
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): MarionAbstract: his "L'Interloqué" in Who Comes after the Subject? (ed. Eduado Cadava, Peter Connor, and Jean-Luc Nancy; New York: Routledge, 1991) 236-45. Marion L'Interloqué 236 Who Comes after the Subject? 1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4495069

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i405633
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): NussbaumAbstract: "Ban graven images: Literatur als Medium ethischer Reflexion," in Literatur ohne Moral: Literaturwissenschaften und Ethik im Gespräch (ed. Christoph Mandry; Muenster: LIT, 2003) 67-83. Ban graven images: Literatur als Medium ethischer Reflexion 67 Literatur ohne Moral: Literaturwissenschaften und Ethik im Gespräch 2003
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4495096

Journal Title: Comparative Studies in Society and History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i405056
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Woolard Patrick
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur (1988)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4497713

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i405284
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): On-Cho Ng Sheldon
Abstract: On-Cho Ng, "The Epochal Concept of 'Early Modernity' and the Intellectual History of Late Imperial China," Journal of World History 14:1 (2003), 37-61. On-Cho Ng 1 37 14 Journal of World History 2003
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4502264

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i405481
Date: 12 1, 1944
Author(s): Joad Jonathan
Abstract: C. E. M. Joad, Philosophy, The Teach Yourself Books series (London: The English Universi- ties Press, 1944), 13. Joad 13 Philosophy 1944
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4502282

Journal Title: Transactions of the American Philological Association (1974-)
Publisher: The Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i406101
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): WiedemannAbstract: Davidson
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4543295

Journal Title: Research in African Literatures
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i412005
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Woeber Stefan
Abstract: This article looks at the beginnings of anti-apartheid/anticolonial literary cultures in Johannesburg and Maputo (then Lourenqo Marques) after the Second World War. It pays specific attention to the ways in which they attempted to harness aesthetics of "newness." By focusing on the influential journals Drum (1951-) and Itinerário (1941-1955), I argue that both journals tapped into transnational intellectual currents such as Harlem Renaissance writing, but that the discrete discursive networks of English and Portuguese contributed to a differentiation of their aesthetic approaches. Itinerdrio acted out an avantgarde-like resistance to bourgeois/colonial culture. Drum was market-driven and achieved in its early phase a compromise between a racially circumscribed mass-cultural appeal and the literate ideals of mission-educated South African blacks. These differences can then be factored into an analysis of persistent differences between the literatures of South Africa and Mozambique.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4618384

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219749
Date: 5 1, 1973
Author(s): White Wayne
Abstract: Literary historians have persistently regarded The Education of Henry Adams as a "paradigmatic" text. While "historical explanations" stress the book's historical achievement, "critical explications" portray it as a failure of historical consciousness that achieves its success in the ahistorical arenas of aesthetic integration and imaginative projection. To relate the products of "explication" with the aims of "historical explanation," I regard the work's true "paradigm achievement" as an inquiry into "historical being." For Adams this achievement embodies disciplinary formulation and professional commitment and thus coordinates historical speculation and self-cultivation. One must assess the ethical density and cultural significance of the text before explaining its historical identity. The Education, despite its origin in epistemological chaos, makes the past eternally relevant to the present; for it is a personal and theoretical discovery of how the narrative structures of history and selfhood create the possibilities of individual and social life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/462229

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219755
Date: 5 1, 1972
Author(s): Toulmin Paul B.
Abstract: The debate about validity in interpretation has pitted monism against pluralism. Some theorists insist that any literary work has a single, determinate meaning, and others argue that there are no limits to the readings a text allows. Neither view adequately describes the field of conflicting interpretations. Critics can and do have legitimate disagreements about literary works; yet we can also say that some readings are wrong, not simply different. The hermeneutic field is divided among conflicting systems of interpretation, each based on different presuppositions that decide what its procedures will disclose and what they will disguise. But several tests for validity-inclusiveness, efficacy, and intersubjectivity-act as constraints on reading and regulate claims to legitimacy. While these tests have limitations that prevent them from resolving all hermeneutic disagreements, literary criticism is nevertheless a rational, disciplined enterprise-though an inherently pluralistic one.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/462275

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219783
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Webber John S.
Abstract: Paradise Lost traces evil through three inceptions-Satanic, Adamic, and historical. Each origin seems to envision a different etiology: Satanic evil springs exclusively from the self in an instant of radical "Pelagian" freedom. Adamic evil emerges from the ambiguous interplay between self and seductive environment. Historical evil contaminates the whole race by means of necessary "Augustinian" inheritance. Ricoeur's analysis of the "Adamic Myth" and original sin clarifies etiological traditions Milton assimilates from Christian symbol, myth, and dogma. Through Ricoeur, we can identify the contrasting modalities of evil (inherited and imitative, physical and moral, ontological and existential, necessary and free, communal and individual) fused in Paradise Lost. Ricoeur's work reveals Milton's text to be a subtly inclusive etiological myth, one whose complex genesis of evil recovers Scripture's fullness of meaning in a new mythopoesis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/462461

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219848
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Wyschogrod David P.
Abstract: Aristotle's distinction between phronesis, or ethical knowledge, and techne, or productive knowledge, is relevant both to Romantic and to modern discussions of the relations between aesthetic and ethical experience. Wordsworth and Coleridge try in different ways to negotiate between the two kinds of knowledge, advocating the ethical force of poetry while acknowledging its status as techne; in contrast, modern criticism tends either to accept the ubiquity of techne or to revive phronesis while undervaluing the tension between the two. Hans-Georg Gadamer and Emmanuel Levinas provide a way to link phronesis to aesthetic autonomy through the means-end unity of phronesis and the ethical claim of the other, although Gadamer overemphasizes the autonomy of the artwork and Levinas underemphasizes the ethical possibilities of the aesthetic. Wordsworth and Coleridge present the ethical encounter with the other as in tension with techne, but they also show that tension itself to be ethically significant.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/463425

Journal Title: Diacritics
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i219987
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): Velay-Vallantin J. A.
Abstract: Chartier, "The Bibliothèque Bleue and Popular Reading" and "The Literature of Roguery in the Bibliothèque Bleue" in The Cultural Uses of Print in Early Modem France [240- 64 and 265-342]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/465279

Journal Title: New Literary History
Publisher: University of Virginia
Issue: i220193
Date: 10 1, 1970
Author(s): Schmidt Cyrus
Abstract: GStA, IV, 1, 266, 11. 6ff. 1 266 IV GStA
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/468347

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: New German Critique
Issue: i221182
Date: 7 1, 1975
Author(s): Riegel Trent
Abstract: Klaus Riegel, "Toward a Dialectical Theory of Development" in Human Development, Vol. 18 (1975) Riegel 18 Human Development 1975
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488026

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i221229
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): Amishai-Maisels Nicole
Abstract: Ziva Amishai-Maisels, Depiction and Interpretation: The Influence of the Holocaust on the Visual Arts (Oxford: Pergamon, 1993) 318-28 Amishai-Maisels 318 Depiction and Interpretation: The Influence of the Holocaust on the Visual Arts 1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488579

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i221233
Date: 1 1, 1967
Author(s): Hoffmann Andreas
Abstract: E.T.A. Hoffmann, "Der Sandmann," Werke 2 (Frankfurt/Main: Insel, 1967) 38. Hoffmann Der Sandmann 38 2 Werke 1967
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488598

Journal Title: The History Teacher
Publisher: Society for History Education
Issue: i221566
Date: 11 1, 1991
Author(s): Egan John E.
Abstract: Los Angeles Times, Feb. 20, 1991, p. E6 Feb. 20 6 Los Angeles Times 1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/494084

Journal Title: Chinese Literature: Essays, Articles, Reviews (CLEAR)
Publisher: CLEAR
Issue: i221614
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Ning Sheng-Tai
Abstract: "Construct- ing Postmodernism: the Chinese Case and Its Different Versions" (Canadian Review of Comparative Litera- ture 20.1-2 [1993]: 49-61 1 49 20 Canadian Review of Comparative Literature 1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/495308

Journal Title: The Review of English Studies
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i222390
Date: 8 1, 1993
Author(s): Moore Susan
Abstract: Moore, 'In Defense of Suspense', 99. Moore 99 Defense of Suspense
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/518944

Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i222581
Date: 1 1, 1967
Author(s): Ricoeur Nabila
Abstract: The "Myth of Creation" in its East African formulation is the central chapter in a book entitled, The Sacred Meadows, by an Egyptian anthropologist who did his field work in the early seventies among the Lamu community in Kenya on the shores of the Indian Ocean. The translator, in her own introduction to the translation, presents the outline of the book and provides the geographical and cultural context of the community in question. The author, in this translated chapter, sets out by exposing his theoretical position which combines both Structuralism and Functionalism. Insights from Claude Lévi-Strauss and Bronislaw Malinowski as well as those of Paul Ricoeur and Victor Turner join to develop the author's notion of myth and its symbolic mode. Then the text of the myth, in its Lamuan formulation, is narrated, followed by a close reading and analysis of its binary oppositions, mediating terms, and the underlying existential contradiction at its crux. Angels, jinn, light, fire, earth, wind, water, Adam, Eve, Cain, Abel, Satan, serpent, etc. are the agents of this sacred narrative and cosmic drama. The textual unfolding of the myth is followed by an analysis, which makes use of the structural method and explores the semantic connotations of Swahili words and idioms to explain the logic of the symbolic exchange and the rigor of thought. The themes of unity and multiplicity and their different combinations are delineated in this analysis and the repetitions and their relation to transcendence are explained.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/521626

Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i222578
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Thiongo Sabry
Abstract: This paper challenges the common assumption that the attention which modern literary theory pays to the textual aspects of literature is achieved at the expense of humanistic and moral concerns. It starts by outlining how modern literary theory differs epistemologically from the traditional critical approaches to literature. Traditional critical theory was developed in the defense of poetry against Plato's accusations, real or imagined, and this informed both its critical practice and its concept of man. It established its epistemology on an aesthetic, moral, social, philosophical or scientific basis in a manner that encumbered literature with the concepts of man inherent in them. In contrast, modern literary theory started from a different premise: instead of seeking to justify literature and its moral relevance, it strove to identify its literariness and the dynamics of its structure by using the disciplines of semiotics and linguistics. It posited the text as an autonomous entity and a complete structure aware of its existence in a society of texts with which it conducts a profoundly intertextual dialogue. As an autonomous structure, the literary work is independent of other social or philosophical constructs and thus capable of conducting a meaningful dialogue with them. The paper elaborates the various conceptual frameworks of Russian formalism, intertextuality, structuralism and deconstruction in order to examine their implicit assumptions about man. It shows how the autonomous and dialogical nature of the literary work in its Bakhtinian sense are relevant to the concept of man inherent in modern literary theory. In its elaboration of this concept, the paper shows how it was developed in conflict with the hierarchical nature of traditional, ethical and philosophical values. It illustrates also the relevance of autonomy, self-regulation, free-play and fair representation inherent in many concepts of modern literary theory to the question of human rights. The question of human rights in modern literary theory is closely connected to its concept of the "subject"; the paper outlines Barthes' concept of the centrality of the human subject and Derrida's concept of différance and its impact on his understanding of the concept of the subject. With Derrida's différance, which means both difference and deferral, it became impossible to talk about the concept of the "subject" in isolation from that of the "other," whether one is dealing with the national aspects of the subject or with its gender issues. The deconstruction of the concept of the "subject" brings into the fore the omitted, marginalised and neglected aspects pertinent to its composition and accentuates both the processes of difference and deferral inherent in it. The representation of the subject implies its difference from, and indeed suppression of, the other. It also shows how Derrida's concept of différance dealt a devastating blow to the various philosophical absolutes and social hierarchies which controlled our thinking. The paper then examines the implications of these new critical and philosophical concepts for two different "others": the similar other within the culture (women) and the different other, the stranger/outsider to the dominant Western culture. It demonstrates how modern literary theory helped women to liberate themselves from cultural oppression by deconstructing patriarchal binary thinking and its inherent bias against women and so consolidate their human rights. It limits itself in this domain to a discussion of the contribution of French feminist literary theory, particularly the work of Hélèn Cixous, Luce Irigaray and Julia Kristeva. Their work shows how the literary, philosophical and critical canon perpetuated patriarchy and oppressed women. As for the different other, the paper refers to the work of Edward Said in his deconstruction of Orientalism and its discourse which subjects the other to the demands, needs and visions of the Western "self" and sacrifices in the process his identity and human rights. It also studies the work of the African American critic Henry Louis Gates and shows how his attempt to develop a literary theory based on, and deriving its conceptual framework from, the literature of African and Afro-American writers played a significant role in liberating the African American, undermining their biased representation in the culture, and upholding their human rights.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/521802

Journal Title: The Journal of American Folklore
Publisher: American Folklore Society
Issue: i223774
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Wang Barbara Rose
Abstract: This article describes fieldwork with Gypsy musicians of the Isten Gyülekezet, a Pentecostal church in southwest Hungary. Instrumental music performance represented a special form of leadership there, restricted by gender and based in secular cultural history as well as religious practice. Musicians and other believers interpreted my role as a woman ethnographer in contrasting ways. The exposure of these differences necessitates reflection upon the depth to which the ethnographer can know the world of the people with whom she works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/541718

Journal Title: The British Journal of Sociology
Publisher: Routledge and Kegan Paul Ltd. For the London School of Economics
Issue: i224978
Date: 12 1, 1978
Author(s): Adorno Robert
Abstract: This paper is an advocacy for the employment of psychoanalytical concepts within sociological theorizing about the individual. Through an exposition of Freud's views on the development of intra-psychic structure and a critique of Parson's reduction of psychoanalysis to a branch of learning theory, I attempt to show that the sociological approach to the individual is implicitly behavioural and imprisoned in a series of assumptions which, among other things, treats subjectivity as epiphenomenal and identity as an unmediated reflection of some external reality. In contrast, psychoanalysis presents to us a picture of the individual as flawed and ambivalent in his relation to society, formed by but at odds with the demands of culture. In particular, the psychoanalytic concept of identification reveals that the acquisition of identity is a hard-won achievement marked by the renunciation of lost and forbidden objects. I argue, following Freud and Lacan, that the ego, far from being an agency of reason, somehow directly 'plugged into' reality, constitutes itself in the fantasied image of another and that the quality of this identification crucially affects the way the world is experienced and believed by the individual. This argument is elaborated through a discussion of Peter Berger's remarks on the social causes of identity crisis which, when set against the work of object-relations theorists on those suffering from disturbances of identity such as, for example, schizoid personalities, are shown to be both superficial and misleading. I conclude the paper by arguing that while psychoanalysis can enhance our understanding of the way in which the individual is formed by and through culture it also cautions us against making simple generalizations about the impact of culture upon the person, showing that the individual never submits himself unequivocally to its demands and interdicts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/589361

Journal Title: The British Journal of Sociology
Publisher: Routledge and Kegan Paul Ltd. For the London School of Economics
Issue: i224988
Date: 6 1, 1961
Author(s): Dalmais Kieran
Abstract: This paper is a preliminary exploration of a neglected area in sociology of religion. It aims to interpret and to characterize the distinctive performative basis of Christian liturgy. Ambiguities in liturgical enactment can be routinely handled as long as they relate to the nuministic content of the rite and not to its social form. Silence is a distinctive non-reducible phenomenon of rite that can be related to the regulation of ceremonial form through tactful management of the implicit. Liturgies work on the basis of an apophatic characteristic that makes them distinctive as religious rituals.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/590801

Journal Title: Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
Publisher: The School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
Issue: i225560
Date: 1 1, 1986
Author(s): Keesing Vassili
Abstract: R. Keesing, 'Rethinking mana', 153. Keesing 153 Rethinking mana
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/620877

Journal Title: Transactions of the Institute of British Geographers
Publisher: Institute of British Geographers
Issue: i225701
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Werlen Andrew
Abstract: This paper offers a dialectical interpretation of place. It argues that much of the confusion in the literature on place stems from its failure to engage with the ontological nature of place. This has led to much research implicitly accepting a restrictive Cartesian view of socio-spatial reality. Entrikin's (1991) 'betweenness of place' thesis is a notable recent illustration. In this paper I suggest that the problematic nature of place and its relationship to space can be resolved through a dialectical mode of argumentation. The spatialized dialectic of Henri Lefebvre offers a fruitful framework for reconciling the interaction between place and space insofar as it strives to overcome dualistic conceptions of capitalist spatiality. Lefevbre's dialectical approach will be counterposed to Entrikin's argument. The paper concludes by outlining the implications of the respective perspectives for robust place theorization and place politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/622564

Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i201461
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Traverso Regina M.
Abstract: This article investigates the exchanges of letters of 1987 between the historians Martin Broszat and Saul Friedlander through the interpretive framework of "dialogue." It is suggested that dialogue does not have a dyadic structure, but involves ever shifting Thirds that function as mediators in dialogue, i.e., God, conscience, reason, or tradition. On one hand, Thirds provide a seemingly stable, external reference point; on the other hand, they open up space for the play of power and desire. Four categories of Thirds are identified and their place and role in the dialogue between Broszat and Friedlander analyzed. The psychoanalytically inspired notions of "acting-out" and "working-through" are employed in order to interpret the varying degrees of critical control Broszat and Friedlander were able to apply to these interfering Thirds. Finally, I give an overall interpretation of Broszat's and Friedlander's positions in the dialogue, guided by the concepts of acting-out and working-through.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/640616

Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i201469
Date: 9 1, 1965
Author(s): Winnicott Allen
Abstract: Psychoanalytic anthropologists assume that folktales often reflect unconscious beliefs and attitudes of listeners, who can tolerate anxiety-provoking images and messages (perhaps wish fulfillments) because these have been projected at a safe distance into the characters in the story. Here I argue that our theory for how such a process occurs is inadequate in terms of contemporary psychoanalytic theory. We need to reexamine a number of questions for which we may have assumed we already have answers, including the nature of repression and how it is accomplished; who or what "hears" an unconscious idea that has been collectively repressed when it is expressed in a folktale; and whether Freud's structural model of id-ego-super-ego can provide an adequate theoretical framework for understanding how unconscious ideas find their way into "expressive culture." I examine these questions in light of a folktale collected among Brazilian peasants. I conclude by questioning the central importance of the ego in repression, and propose a concept of a whole, or supraordinate, self to describe the actual agency in charge of repression.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/640641

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226338
Date: 11 1, 1974
Author(s): Thompson Paul
Abstract: In any field of experience anthropologists are confronted by spates of signs, many of which they fail to perceive. By way of an analysis of the mundane activities associated with riding a Songhay bush taxi in the Republic of Niger, this article probes the reflexive process through which anthropologist and ethnographic other learn to interpret the signs that comprise the discourse of social action. Having been confronted repeatedly with the signs of the other's universe, anthropologists may not only gain a new awareness of the sociocultural systems they seek to uncover but may also realize the limitations of their knowledge. Through what Dilthey called the hermeneutic, anthropologists will be more able to proceed profoundly and accurately toward an understanding of those signs that give substance and order to the complexities of social universes. [ethnology, hermeneutics, fieldwork, Sahelian ethnography, Niger]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/644694

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226373
Date: 8 1, 1972
Author(s): Yates Ellen
Abstract: Adopting a reflexive approach, this article interprets a recently created healing ritual in Brittany that integrates local 19th-century notions about the curative powers of prehistoric monuments with diverse elements from non-Breton sources. Parallels are noted between this New Age therapy and witchcraft, an older explanatory framework for illness and misfortune in Brittany. The therapeutic discourse associated with the ritual draws on the past and on exotic cultures to construct a meaningful cosmology. Therefore, this discourse--like the New Age movement as a whole--has much in common with anthropology, which, it is suggested, provides Western society with an ordered vision of the world. [Brittany, New Age healing, witchcraft, interpretation of the past, anthropology as cosmology]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/645592

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226383
Date: 2 1, 1981
Author(s): Zerner Douglas
Abstract: In this article, I use Obeyesekere's concept of the work of culture to examine a case of magical poisoning among the Toraja (South Sulawesi, Indonesia). I argue that episodes of suffering must be situated not only culturally but also within the context of the individual sufferer's life experience, and suggest that we must consider carefully why only certain symbolic transformations of painful emotions may "work" for a given individual, why a symbolic transformation that "works" for one person may not for another, and why even apparently successful transformations of suffering may bring only temporary relief. [suffering, work of culture, magical poisoning, Toraja, Indonesia]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/646522

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226400
Date: 5 1, 1987
Author(s): White Michael
Abstract: Using a broadly Aristotelian framework I propose poetic form as a means for distinguishing historicities. I analyze Sakalava performances of possession by royal ancestors as the creative production of a kind of history, distinguish it from a dominant occidental model of history, and elaborate the chronotope on which it is based and the heteroglossia and historical consciousness it enables. I argue that Sakalava spirit possession has a strongly realist bent and suggest the interest of poiesis for anthropological analysis and comparison more generally. [historical production, historicity, spirit possession, mimesis, poiesis, Aristotle, Madagascar]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/646688

Journal Title: Medical Anthropology Quarterly
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226487
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Young Patricia A.
Abstract: The field of bioethics has been dominated by the tenets and assumptions of Western philosophical rationalistic thought. A principles and rights-based approach to discussions of moral dilemmas has sustained and reinforced a pervasive reductionism, utilitarianism, and ethnocentrism in the field. Recent explorations of casuistry and hermeneutics suggest a movement toward an expanded theoretical and conceptual framing of medical ethical problems. Increased attention to moral phenomenology and a recognition of the importance of social, cultural, and historical determinants that shape moral questioning should facilitate collaborative work between anthropologists and ethicists. In this article, I examine the philosophical orientation of U.S. bioethics and the relationship of the social sciences to the field of medical ethics. Deterrents to collaboration between anthropologists and bioethicists are explored. Finally, I review past and possible future contributions of anthropology to the field of bioethics and, more generally, to medical ethics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/648742

Journal Title: Medical Anthropology Quarterly
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226513
Date: 9 1, 1987
Author(s): White Cheryl
Abstract: Based on ethnographic work among North American occupational therapists, I compare two forms of everyday clinical talk. One, "chart talk," conforms to normative conceptions of clinical rationality. The second, storytelling, permeates clinical discussions but has no formal status as a vehicle for clinical reasoning. I argue that both modes of discourse provide avenues for reasoning about clinical problems. However, these discourses construct very different clinical objects and different phenomena to reason about. Further, the clinical problems created through storytelling point toward a more radically distinct conception of rationality than the one underlying biomedicine as it is formally conceived. Clinical storytelling is more usefully understood as a mode of Aristotle's "practical rationality" than the technical rationality of modern (enlightenment) conceptions of reasoning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/649684

Journal Title: Past & Present
Publisher: Past and Present Society
Issue: i226616
Date: 2 1, 1967
Author(s): Swanson Natalie Zemon
Abstract: Guy E. Swanson, Religion and Regime: A Sociological Account of the Reformation (Ann Arbor, Mich., 1967), ch. I Swanson ch. I Religion and Regime: A Sociological Account of the Reformation 1967
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/650716

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227576
Date: 6 1, 1984
Author(s): Williams Anne M.
Abstract: Colomina 1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/682216

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227565
Date: 9 1, 1953
Author(s): Wittgenstein Katherine P.
Abstract: The anthropological taboo against "going native" is examined in the context of the ethnographer's own dreams during fieldwork among Sufi saints in Pakistan. The essay demonstrates that accounts of these dreams shaped social relations in the field and argues that relativist neutrality is a cover for a refusal to believe that is impossible to hide. This refusal constitutes an implicit insistence that the relationship between ethnographer and subject be shaped by the parameters of a hegemonic Western discourse of rationality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/682301

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227580
Date: 6 1, 1991
Author(s): Žižek Georgina
Abstract: This essay uses the work of psychoanalyst Melanie Klein to reopen the dialogue between anthropology and psychoanalysis. It argues that Kleinian concepts enhance an anthropology that seeks out both intersubjective and intrasubjective difference and disjuncture, and it demonstrates the uses of major Kleinian concepts for addressing classic anthropological problems, including gender classification and the analysis of persecution in witchcraft and sorcery systems. Applying Kleinian concepts to the analysis of cultural-historical process, it shows how splitting and denial may be central to the reproduction and hegemony of dominant cultural systems through time and addresses the question of how to theorize the relationship among dominant cultural systems, social differentiation, and individual subjectivities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/683117

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227583
Date: 3 1, 1999
Author(s): Wolf Aletta
Abstract: An earlier ecological anthropology defined its project within the compass of the idealism v. materialism debate. Culture was an adaptive tool, instrumental rather than formal; it was intelligible with respect to its material effects, not - as the idealists would maintain - in terms of itself, as an autonomous, self-determining order of reality. This argument was mounted with respect to bounded, stable, self-regulating, local, or at best regional entities and the environment they inhabited. All of the premises of the earlier ecology have since been challenged, and today's ecologies - symbolic, historical, and political - radically depart from the reductions and elisions of the ecological anthropology of the past. In particular, the new ecologies override the dichotomies that informed and enlivened the debates of the past - nature/culture, idealism/materialism - and they are informed by the literature on transnationalist flows and local-global articulations. This introduction positions Rappaport's work within this historical shift from a polarized field of mutually exclusive frameworks to today's synthetic new ecologies and their antireductive materialism. Rappaport's work, produced over three decades, serves, in and through its own transformations, as a bridge between the reductive materialism of the past and a new-materialist ecology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/683337

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227591
Date: 3 1, 1972
Author(s): Wolpe Donald L.
Abstract: Recent changes within social and cultural anthropology have made history a key issue, but in this essay I argue that the field has yet to develop the resources that are required to deal with temporality. This point is made through an extended examination of Jean and John Comaroff's work on Christianity and colonialism in southern Africa. Arguably, the Comaroffs read history backward and then present its unfolding as a kind of inexorable logic. In doing so, they homogenize missionary and Tswana "cultures" and attribute agency to abstractions rather than to people acting in particular material contexts. In contrast, I argue for a narrative approach to historical anthropological explanation. The emergent qualities of events - and the variable ways in which capitalism, hegemony, Protestantism, and vernacular modernisms relate - require narrative for explanation, narrative that encompasses within itself the narratives of social actors themselves.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/683926

Journal Title: Sociological Forum
Publisher: Eastern Sociological Society
Issue: i227652
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Zelizer Orville
Abstract: Derrida, 1976:158 158
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/685074

Journal Title: Science, Technology, & Human Values
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i228033
Date: 4 1, 1995
Author(s): Suchman G. Michael
Abstract: To date, little is known about when and to what degree science students begin to participate in authentic scientific graphing practices. This article presents the results of a series of studies on the production, transformation, and interpretation of graphical representation from Grade 8 to professional scientific practice both in formal testing situations (inside) and in the course of field/laboratory work (outside). The results of these studies can be grouped into two major areas. First, there is a discontinuity in the graph-related practices that marks a boundary between people who engage in work that requires them to transform data into graphical representations (converted) and people who do not have such experiences (cannibals). Second, the didactic practices of high school textbooks and university lectures exhibit a marked discontinuity relative to graphing practices in scientific journals. Graphs used in didactic circumstances may be associated with students' difficulties in interpreting "real data." It appears that school teachers and university professors (missionaries) do little to put their students on trajectories of increasing participation in authentic scientific graphing practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/690254

Journal Title: Science, Technology, & Human Values
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i228044
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Yoxen Anne
Abstract: Representations of the active brain have served to establish a particular domain of competence for brain mappers and to distinguish brain mapping's particular contributions to mind/brain research. At the heart of the claims about the emerging contributions of functional brain mapping is a paradox: functional imagers seem to reject representations while also using them at multiple points in their work. This article therefore considers a love-hate relationship between scientists and their object: the case of the iconoclastic imager. This paradoxical stance is the result of the formation of an interdisciplinary approach that brings together a number of scientific traditions and their particular standards of what constitutes scientific evidence. By examining the various ways in which images are deployed and rejected, the origins of these conflicting tendencies can be traced to the technological, methodological, and institutional elements in the work of functional imagers. This approach provides insight into the current demarcation of imaging and reflects on features of visual knowledge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/690275

Journal Title: The Musical Quarterly
Publisher: G. Schirmer
Issue: i229701
Date: 7 1, 1981
Author(s): Thompson Laurence
Abstract: John Thompson's introduction to Ricoeur's Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences, trans., ed. John Thompson (Cambridge, 1981), p. 6 Thompson 6 Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences 1981
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/742175

Journal Title: Cardozo Studies in Law and Literature
Publisher: Jacob Burns Institute for Advanced Legal Studies, Benjamin N. Cardozo School of Law of Yeshiva University
Issue: i229819
Date: 7 1, 1851
Author(s): Adams Milner S.
Abstract: John Adams, Discourses on Davilla, in C.F. Adams, ed., 6 The Works of John Adams 221 (1851). Adams 221 6 The Works of John Adams 1851
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/743468

Journal Title: Music Theory Spectrum
Publisher: Society for Music Theory
Issue: i229978
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): Neumeyer David
Abstract: David Neumeyer, "The Three-Voice Ursatz," In Theory Only 10, nos. 1-2 (1987): 3-29 Neumeyer 1 3 10 Theory Only 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/746080

Journal Title: 19th-Century Music
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i230026
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): Miller Anthony
Abstract: n. 30 above
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/746729

Journal Title: The Journal of Musicology
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i230987
Date: 10 1, 1988
Author(s): Heinio Marianne
Abstract: Marjorie Perloff, "Postmodernism," pp. 43-63 43
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/763871

Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i231248
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Wardhaugh Michael
Abstract: Ronald Wardhaugh, An Introduction to Sociolinguistics (Oxford, 1994), 258-81 (p. 260). Wardhaugh 258 An Introduction to Sociolinguistics 1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/766394

Journal Title: October
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i231805
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Sloterdijk Hal
Abstract: Peter Sloterdijk, Critique of Cynical Reason, trans. Michael Eldred (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1987) Sloterdijk Critique of Cynical Reason 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/778862

Journal Title: Black Music Research Journal
Publisher: Center for Black Music Research, Columbia College Chicago
Issue: i231848
Date: 1 1, 1972
Author(s): Turner Bruce
Abstract: Neil Leonard, Jazz and the White Americans, 1962
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/779472

Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232679
Date: 7 1, 1953
Author(s): Aeschylus Martha
Abstract: Violence and the Word, supra note 7, at 1629 1629
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/796400

Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232710
Date: 5 1, 1989
Author(s): Milner Anthony V.
Abstract: Id. at 81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/796817

Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232728
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): Graves J. M.
Abstract: BERNARD WILLIAMS, MORAL LUCK 72-73 (1981).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/797078

Journal Title: American Bar Foundation Research Journal
Publisher: American Bar Foundation
Issue: i234248
Date: 1 1, 1959
Author(s): Goffman Alan C.
Abstract: Erving Goffman, The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life 11 (Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday & Co., Anchor Books, 1959) Goffman 11 The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life 1959
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/828228

Journal Title: Law & Social Inquiry
Publisher: American Bar Foundation
Issue: i234271
Date: 1 1, 1948
Author(s): Corner Stephen A.
Abstract: George W. Corner, ed., The Autobiography of Benjamin Rush: His "Travels Through Life" together with his Commonplace Book for 1789-1813, at 236-37 (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1948). Corner 236 1948 The Autobiography of Benjamin Rush: His "Travels Through Life" together with his Commonplace Book for 1789-1813
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/828706

Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i234478
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): Charlton Berthold
Abstract: E. T. A. Hofmnann's Musical Writings: "Kreisleriana," "The Poet and the Composer,"Music Criticism, ed. David Charlton, trans. Martyn Clarke (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989), 160-61 Charlton 160 E. T. A. Hoffmann's Musical Writings: "Kreisleriana," "The Poet and the Composer,"Music Criticism 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/832063

Journal Title: The American Journal of Comparative Law
Publisher: The American Society of Comparative Law, Inc.
Issue: i234865
Date: 7 1, 1991
Author(s): Asser-Hartkamp Jan M.
Abstract: Verbintenissenrecht 2, 375 ff 375 Verbintenissenrecht 2
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/840497

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Universidad de Chile
Issue: e90000049
Date: 12 1, 2016
Author(s): Cobos Carla Pinochet
Abstract: The new information technologies have transformed reading practices in meaningful ways, promoting other skills and competences, and activating new ways of interacting with reading devices. Based on a qualitative study conducted in Mexico City, this article aims to explore how communicational innovations have had an impact on a specific type of reader, whose distinctive feature is to have an intense and/or enjoyable relationship with the act of read: the cultural creators. The analysis of these practices and the reflection as a result of this, allows us to observe that, far from creating isolated readers, the emerging technologies contribute to develop, in other ways,the potential for the sociability of reading, thus stimulating work networks and collaborative projects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90000054

Journal Title: Transformation
Publisher: Sage Publications, Ltd.
Issue: e90008098
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Farr Bernard C.
Abstract: Baker GP & Hacker PMS (2005) Wittgenstein: Understanding and Meaning (2nd ed.). Oxford, UK: Blackwell Publishing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90008100

Journal Title: Music Theory Spectrum
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: e90012057
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): DAVIS ANDREW
Abstract: This article proposes that Romantic sonatas exploit in their formal structures multiply directed temporal narratives, comprising a temporal stream and various other streams that can be broadly characterized as atemporal. The temporal stream articulates the principal sonata trajectory and correlates with the concept known in structural narratology as thefirst narrative; the atemporal streams reside on alternate temporal levels and remain external to, or disengaged from, that of the first narrative. The structural and expressive implications of this opposition, together with the view of sonata-formal conventions made available in recent work on Sonata Theory, provide a framework within which the article explicates Chopin’s robust dialogue, in the first movement of his Piano Sonata in B Minor, Op. 58, with Classical German-Austrian sonata conventions and contemporary Romantic aesthetic currents. The reading provides a foundation for reassessing Chopin’s work in the sonata genre, the norms and expressive potential of which he is often thought of as never fully apprehending.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90012063

Journal Title: Revue économique
Publisher: Sciences Po University Press
Issue: e90016168
Date: 11 1, 2017
Author(s): Sobel Richard
Abstract: Introduced in France since a decade, the work of Moishe Postone appears as a global new interpretation of Marx. It hinges on the thesis according to which Marx does not propose a criticism of capitalism from the angle of work, but a criticism of work under capitalism. This article assesses the significance of this heterodox Marxism by trying to situate its epistemological background between a structuralist interpretation and a phenomenological interpretation of Marx. It shows that Postone builds an original structuralism, combining Althusser and Hegel, but struggles to link it up with a theory of subjectivation and action up to a thought which aims for the social transformation of and the emancipation from capitalism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90016175

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Universidad de Chile
Issue: e90016177
Date: 11 1, 2017
Author(s): Soto Ana María Riveros
Abstract: This study presents an interpretation of the configuration of the poetic subject in the books of poems El Primer Libro (1985) and Albricia (1988) by Soledad Fariña (1943), which understand a self in a continuous process of gestation and birth. This process serves the purpose of recomposing a disarticulated subjectivity lost in the framework of the political and cultural conditions imposed by the military dictatorship that ruled Chile in the 1970s and 1980s. By using a metaphor of a journey and searching for a new language, the subject attempts to access a primitive stage andfind its maternal self in order to confront the dominant power, by codifying and configuring herself through an otherness in a feminine body-text. However, this process of maturation and discovery is intervened and left incomplete by the impulse of modernity, thereby creating a deformed, dissociated and off-centered self, which aims at growing opposed to logos. This conflict turns the upcoming of the new self into a painful event, like giving birth, that stems from the subject's wounded and fractured body, intending to re-establish de selffrom its fragments, traces and memories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90016192

Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L’Harmattan
Issue: e90017741
Date: 9 1, 2017
Author(s): COLLET Victor
Abstract: House J., MacMaster N., Paris 1961…, op. cit., pp. 323-375.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90017748

Journal Title: Public Administration Review
Publisher: American Society for Public Administration
Issue: i240071
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): White William
Abstract: Does hermeneutics provide a useful framework for the study and practice of public administration? Danny L. Balfour and William Mesaros argue that a shift toward the hermeneutic perspective can move public administration towards the cutting edge of social research and practice while promoting the values of mutuality, understanding, and improved communication. Hermeneutics can help the field move away from methodological debates and toward more practical, cooperative research and an enhanced focus on the substantive issues that define and energize public policy and administration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/976676

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Education / Revue canadienne de l'éducation
Publisher: University of Toronto Press
Issue: canajeducrevucan.33.issue-4
Date: February 1, 2010
Author(s): Haig-Brown Celia
Abstract: Dans cet article, l'auteure pose la question suivante: « Quelle est la relation entre l'appropriation de la pensée autochtone et ce qu'on pourrait appeler l' apprentissage en profondeurbasé sur des années d'expérience en éducation dans des contextes autochtones? » Après avoir analysé les divers sens attribués à la notion d'appropriation culturelle, l'auteure présente des textes de Gee sur les discours secondaires, de Foucault sur la production du discours et de Wertsch sur les structures profondes du discours et fait le lien avec des expériences décisives sur le terrain tirées d'années de recherche et d'enseignement. Gardant au fond de l'espoir, l'auteure conclut l'article en présentant le protocole d'appropriation culturelle recommandé par des universitaires autochtones lors de l'utilisation de savoirs autochtones par des personnes nonautochtones dans des contextes pédagogiques.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/canajeducrevucan.33.4.925

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: State University of New York Press
Issue: canajsocicahican.33.issue-1
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Titchkosky Tanya
Abstract: Résumé. Ce texte démontre le genre de questions qui se présentent aux études sur la condition des personnes handicapées informées par la sociologieen interrogent les interactions qui émergent autour des luttes pour «l'accès» dans un milieu de travail scolaire/ académique. Au cours de mes expériences dans un des plus grands édifices dans une des plus grandes universités au Canada, j'ai amassé des paroles quotidiennes qui justifient l'exclusion des personnes handicapées. J'ai rassemblé des narratifs représentants ce-qui-est possible-de-dire aujourd'hui sur la lutte pour l'accessibilité. En utilisant une approche sociologique interprétativiste, ce texte illustre la façon dont les significations de l'incapacité sont générés par un discours qui rends légitime la construction exclusive ainsi que les structures inaccessible de la vie universitaire. Dans ce texte, je démontre que l'accès n'est pas synonyme de justice mais, par contre, est un point de départ pour la réflexion critique où les relations sociaux entre corps et espace peut être considéré à nouveau. Ce texte contribue aux études sur la condition des personnes handicapées informées par la sociologie en analysant la façon dont la narration ordinaire et quotidienne de l'incapacité peut continuer à, en même temps que l'environnement physique change, agir comme pouvoir social qui reproduit le statuquo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/canajsocicahican.33.1.37

Journal Title: Daat: A Journal of Jewish Philosophy & Kabbalah
Publisher: Beacon Press
Issue: daat.issue-81
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): Holzer Elie
Abstract: מחקר כזה יידרש בין השאר לתת את הדעת על ההבדלים בין קובצי הדרשות, כפי שציינתי בהערה 9 לעיל.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/daat.81.321

Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: UnB
Issue: estufemi.22.issue-3
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): da Silva Souza Camilla
Abstract: In this work we propose to discuss the relationship among imaginationy, work and sexuality, from the activities of crab pickers that live in the bragantina region, called Salgado Paraense. The aim is to link such themes to the enchanted figure that inhabits the mangroves where the people pick the crustaceans called Ataíde, as well as to discuss the sexual acts between people of the same sex, in this case, involving the masculine universe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/estufemi.22.3.755

Journal Title: Japanese Journal of Religious Studies
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Issue: japajrelistud.43.issue-2
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Ama Michihiro
Abstract: Kurata Hyakuzō’s The Priest and His Disciples(Shukke to sono deshi, 1916) contributed to the unprecedented rise of religious literature during the Taishō period. The development of the Japanese religious world and the growing interests in religion by Japanese intellectuals during this period encouraged Kurata to humanize Shinran and paved the way forThe Priest and His Disciplesto become a bestseller. AlthoughThe Priest and His Disciplesis much studied, the role of fiction played in the work based on the life of a medieval Buddhist priest remains unexplored. This study first provides a background toThe Priest and His Disciplesand explains why it aroused such interest at the time. It then treats the image of Shinran at the intersection of history and fiction by referring to the study of Michel de Certeau and investigates how Kurata constructed an image of Shinran as the “other” inThe Priest and His Disciplesand placed it in history and in legends about Shinran.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/japajrelistud.43.2.253

Journal Title: Journal for Early Modern Cultural Studies
Publisher: Cambridge UP
Issue: jearlmodcultstud.13.issue-3
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): Kuzner James
Abstract: Ineke Murakami is Associate Professor of English at University at Albany, SUNY . She is the author of Moral Play and Counterpublic(2011), has published inStudies in English LiteratureandReligion and Literature, and is currently at work on a project, provisionally entitledTheater of Anarchy: Theatricalilty, Politics, and Spectacle in Early Modern England.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/jearlmodcultstud.13.3.144

Journal Title: Journal of Higher Education in Africa / Revue de l'enseignement supérieur en Afrique
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: jhigheducafri.8.issue-2
Date: October 1, 1958
Author(s): Macdonald Helen M.
Abstract: Cet article est issu d'une étude ethnographique menée à l'Université de Cape Town. Il explore la dynamique d'une intervention permettant au personnel de l'université de s'engager dans une voie alternative à celle de l'apartheid en Afrique du Sud. Il traite de la politique sociale qui apparut entre l'intervention, ses participants et non-participants imaginaires par rapport à la vision « transformatrice » de l'université. L'intention des interventionnistes a été retravaillée par les participants des principaux symboles qui mettent en forme les motifs de leurs comportements et donnent un sens à leurs expériences. Utilisant le modèle d'Ortner (1973) de reconnaissance et de symboles-clés, je soutiens que la « transformation » et « l'espace sûr » représentent une élaboration symboles, en ce sens qu'ils ont le pouvoir d'action et d'élaboration conceptuelle. Ces symboles d'élaboration fonctionnent en relais avec une sorte de logique qui « cristallise l'engagement » des participants vers l'intervention d'une manière émotionnellement puissante et relativement indifférenciée. Ce faisant, ils font de l'intervention un symbole capable d'exprimer ce que leur expérience signifie pour eux en tant que communauté imaginée par rapport aux autres.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/jhigheducafri.8.2.73

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Editorial Universitaria
Issue: revchilenalit.issue-90
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Cruz María José Barros
Abstract: This article analyzes “Rotología del poroto” by Pablo de Rokha. Our contention states that the bean works as a multiple and complex metaphor, allowing the poetic voice to refer to the nation, the working-class subjects and the political project of the revolution. Each of these categories takes place in a production context marked by the presence of the hacienda and the Cold War scenario. Additionally, the article analyzes how the poem, at the time of enunciation by the speaker, builds a counterpoint between the Chile of yesterday and today to articulate a social protest speech in favor of the working-class subjects of the national community.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/revchilenalit.90.55

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique (English Edition)
Publisher: Belin
Issue: revfranscipoleng.60.issue-1
Date: 1 18, 2005
Author(s): Terry James
Abstract: Lecturer and researcher at the Institut d'Études politiques in Aix-en-Provence, junior member of the Institut universitaire de France, Christophe Traïniis currently interested in the analysis of the role of affective dimensions in the process of activist engagement as well as in the future of activist organizations. On this subject, he publishedLa musique en colère(Paris: Presses de Sciences Po, 2009) (in the series “Contester”, 04). He also edited the collectionÉmotions… mobilisation!(Paris: Presses de Sciences Po, 2009). The development of activist organizations for animal rights had already caught his attention in his work on the Chasse Pêche Nature et Traditions movement:Les braconniers de la République: les conflits autour des représentations de la Nature et la politique(Paris: PUF, 2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/revfranscipoleng.60.1.219

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique (English Edition)
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: revfranscipoleng.63.issue-3-4
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Bevir Mark
Abstract: Mark Beviris a Professor in the Department of Political Science, University of California, Berkeley. He is the author ofThe Logic of the History of Ideas(1999),New Labour: A Critique(2005),Key Concepts of Governance(2009),Democratic Governance(2010), andThe Making of British Socialism(2011), and the co-author, with R. A. W. Rhodes, ofInterpreting British Governance(2003),Governance Stories(2006), andThe State as Cultural Practice(2010). His research interests in political theory include moral philosophy, political philosophy, and the history of political thought. His work on public policy focuses on organization theory, democratic theory, and governance. His methodological interests cover the philosophy of social science, the history of social science, and interpretive analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/revfranscipoleng.63.3-4.115

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique (English Edition)
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: revfranscipoleng.64.issue-3
Date: February 18, 2010
Author(s): Raillard Sarah-Louise
Abstract: Nicolas Dodieris a sociologist at Inserm and the EHESS. He also works at the Institut Marcel-Mauss, within the Laboratoire interdisciplinaire d'études sur les réflexivités (LIER – The Interdisciplinary Laboratory for the Study of Reflexivities). He is currently interested in the issue of reparations in situations of suffering or injustice, as well as in the trial process. His publications include: (with Janine Barbot) “De la douleur au droit”, in Daniel Cefaï, Mathieu Berger, Carole Gayet-Viaud (eds),Du civil au politique(Brussels: Peter Lang, 2011), 289-322; “Penser (par) les catastrophes”, in Sandrine Revet, Julien Langumier (eds),Le gouvernement des catastrophes(Paris: Karthala, 2013), 251-76 (LIER, 10 rue Monsieur le Prince, 75006 Paris, ).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/revfranscipoleng.64.3.23

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique (English Edition)
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: revfranscipoleng.64.issue-3
Date: December 14, 2009
Author(s): Raillard Sarah-Louise
Abstract: Sélim Smaouiis currently a doctoral candidate in political science at Sciences Po Paris and a visiting lecturer and research assistant at Sciences Po Aix-en-Provence. He works primarily on protest movements concerned with the victims of Franco's regime in Spain. He is also the author of works on protest movements in Morocco, and his publications include: (with Mohamed Wazif) “Étendard de lutte ou pavillon de complaisance? S'engager sous la bannière du ‘mouvement du 20 février' à Casablanca”, in Amin Allal, Thomas Pierret (eds),Au coeur des révoltes arabes. Devenir révolutionnaires(Paris: Armand Colin, 2013), 55-79 (Sciences Po Paris, CERI, 56 rue Jacob, 75006 Paris, ).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/revfranscipoleng.64.3.51

Journal Title: South Atlantic Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: soutatlarevi.79.issue-1-2
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Cooksey Thomas L.
Abstract: Thomas L. Cooksey, recently retired, was a Professor of English and Philosophy at Armstrong State University, Savannah, GA, from which he recently retired after 28 years. He now lives in Portland, Oregon. His most recent book is Plato's Symposium: A Reader's Guide(2010), Continuum. He is currently working on the trickster in world literature. Email:thomas.cooksey@armstrong.edu.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/soutatlarevi.79.1-2.196

Journal Title: South Atlantic Review
Publisher: Cambridge UP
Issue: soutatlarevi.79.issue-3-4
Date: August 1, 1995
Author(s): Yee Pamela M.
Abstract: Pamela M. Yee is a doctoral candidate and Provost's Fellow in the English department at the University of Rochester. Her research interests include late-medieval romance and dream-visions, confessional narratives, medieval medicine, cognition, psychology, affect theory, trauma studies, and the medical humanities; a secondary strand of her scholarship includes all things Arthurian and a nascent interest in medievalism within pop culture. Her dissertation explores confessional tropes as narrative, dialogic, and patient-centered healing in late Middle English secular literature. She has recently published articles in ArthurianaandThe Once and Future Classroom, and has a forthcoming review inMedievally Speaking. In summer 2013, she curated an exhibit titled “Eugène Vinaver's MagnificentMalory” for the Rossell Hope Robbins Library. Her budding interest in Gower studies has resulted in a recent flurry of activity: her co-organizing of the 3rdInternational Congress of the John Gower Society in summer 2014 and her selection by JGS as the graduate student representative for the 2016 John Hurt Fisher Prize Committee. At her home institution, she serves as Assistant Editor of the TEAMS Middle English Texts Series, works as a library assistant for the Robbins Library, contributes to theCamelot Project, and teaches in the Writing, Speaking, and Argument Program. Email:pyee@ur.rochester.edu.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/soutatlarevi.79.3-4.89

Journal Title: Ulbandus Review
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ulbarevi.17
Date: August 31, 1997
Author(s): Mankovskaya Elizaveta
Abstract: ,Liisa H. Malkki “News and culture: Transitory phenomena and the fieldwork tradition,”inAnthropological locations: Boundaries and grounds of a field science, ed. andAkhil Gupta (:James Ferguson University of California Press,1997),91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/ulbarevi.17.86

Journal Title: Ethics & the Environment
Publisher: The Guilford Press
Issue: ete.2010.15.issue-1
Date: January 25, 2003
Author(s): Crowley Thomas
Abstract: Evaluative terms are a crucial part of the environmental discourse. These terms, and the evaluative frameworks in which they are imbedded, serve as important guides to action. “Natural,” a term commonly used as a positive evaluation, is problematic because it can both justify unfair social relations and obscure the connections between humans and the rest of nature. “Sustainable,” another popular term, is extremely malleable, and is too often elaborated in frameworks that are neither socially nor ecologically responsible. The term “sustainable” is sometimes used in the framework of ecosystem health, but even this approach can fail to highlight the interconnectedness of social and ecological systems. The framework of ecosocial flourishing, introduced in this article, is better suited for highlighting the interconnected nature of the world and for drawing attention to questions of environmental justice. Evaluative terms (like “natural”) and frameworks (like “ecosocial flourishing”) are part of larger narratives that help people make sense of their interactions with, and emotional responses to, the non-human world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/ete.2010.15.1.69

Journal Title: Global South, The
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: globalsouth.5.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Herlinghaus Hermann
Abstract: Offering a “pharmacological” perspective, this essay elaborates on the Chilean Roberto Bolaño's novel 2666. It discusses narrative imaginaries that regraph cultural experiences and spaces of self-consciousness as they emerge from singular global south networks. In2666, the Mexican-U.S. border region operates as a fraught site through which a global aesthetics of sobriety gains shape and texture, a phenomenon upon which Bolaño's text depends for its critique of Western academic knowledge. From there, I consider how a “pharmacological” problematization of Western culture can reshape our perspective of the constitution of a global modernity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/globalsouth.5.1.101

Journal Title: History & Memory
Publisher: University of British Columbia
Issue: histmemo.24.issue-1
Date: May 22, 2010
Author(s): Korac-Kakabadse Nada
Abstract: Historical narratives help construct social identities, which are maintained through differentiation between in-groups and “others.” In this article, we contend that Fatima Besnaci-Lancou's texts, as well as her reconciliation work—in which she enjoins Beurs and Harkis' offspring to write a new, inclusive, polyphonic narrative of the Algerian War—are an example of the positive use of textually mediated identity (re)construction. Her work suggests the possibility of implementing a moderate politics of empathetic recognition of the (often migration-related) memories of “others” so as to reinforce French national belongingness.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/histmemo.24.1.152

Journal Title: jml: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: U of California P
Issue: jmodelite.34.2.issue-2
Date: June 26, 1987
Author(s): Harker James
Abstract: The longstanding critical refrain that Virginia Woolf's fiction represents a turn ““inward”” to the vagaries of the inner life has more recently been countered with an ““outward”” approach emphasizing Woolf's interest in the material world, its everyday objects and their social and political significance. Yet one of the most curious and pervasive features of Woolf's oeuvre is that characters are so frequently wrong in their perceptions. This essay consolidates the inward and outward approaches by tracing the trope of misperception in Woolf's fiction as well as in her conceptions of the work of author and reader. For Woolf, the modern literary experience derives from the nature of the faculties of perception, the tenuous points of connection —— and disjunction —— between the inner and the outer worlds.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/jmodelite.34.2.1

Journal Title: jml: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: U of Chicago P
Issue: jmodelite.34.2.issue-2
Date: 01 1984
Author(s): Gaedtke Andrew
Abstract: Ruben Borg's The Measureless Time of Joyce, Deleuze and Derridaargues that James Joyce'sFinnegans Wakemust be read as a singular attempt to represent the eccentric structure of post-human temporality. The book relocates theWakewithin a long history of philosophies of time as well as recent post-structuralist and information theory. Drawing upon the work of Gilles Deleuze and Jacques Derrida, Borg shows how Joyce's formal and narratological innovations enabled him to present a structure of time that does not obey the linear, humanistic progression of thebildungsromanbut instead manifests mechanical temporal economies of production and waste.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/jmodelite.34.2.192

Journal Title: jml: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: New Directions
Issue: jmodelite.35.issue-3
Date: Oct. 1, 1991
Author(s): Carlson Celia
Abstract: Recent scholarship has given considerable attention to lyric poetry as a form of sensuous knowledge. This approach emphasizes the corporeal origins of poetry, its genesis in the body or in language viewed as material. The question of sensuous knowledge is central to the larger theoretical issue of modernity itself, in which lyric holds a central yet ambiguous status. The question of sensuous knowledge is ultimately a question of meaning. However, modern thought — thought pertaining to “modernity” — is fundamentally circular. This would seem to establish an epistemological impasse for aesthetics. But I argue that this circularity offers an important, and necessary, way to limit knowledge and thereby ground an ethical subjectivity. My essay places formalism at the heart of sensuous knowledge. In this essay I develop an account of the importance of abstraction in sensuous knowledge by way of Kant's concept of Darstellung, “presentation [of sensory experience].” The “presentation” is the object as it has undergone a structural process of internalization and been made available for psychic use as meaning; that requires a recognition of loss. Where this is important for literature is that twentieth-century American poetry frequently uses very personal images of family life as a way of conveying sincerity about corporeal experience. I use this discussion of circularity in modern aesthetic thought to argue that there is a risk to taking shortcuts to meaning through images of the material bodies of children. In these contemporary poems by Gary Snyder, Sharon Olds and Rita Dove, the poets reject loss in favor of a very modern “affirmation” of the material. But affirmation and the visual image as a sign of affirmation cannot alone bind meaning to us. That meaning must be internalized through theworkof poetic presentation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/jmodelite.35.3.158

Journal Title: Research in African Literatures
Publisher: New York African-American Institute
Issue: reseafrilite.45.issue-2
Date: avril 4 au 5, 2009
Author(s): Guèye Médoune
Abstract: The literary field in Africa came into emergence as a result of a collective yearning for lesser dependency on the symbolic constraints the Western center is forcing on its margins. Granted that a work sets itself up by setting up its own context, and that the African context stands out as one where oral literature is still alive in society, the manifestation of expressive forms associated with traditional literature in a novel must carry heavy weight in an interpretation of African works. For that reason, this essay will argue that, through her “smuggling” of narrative forms drawn from oral literature, Aminata Sow Fall's fiction testifies to an oral discursivity at work in the novel. The archi-textual approach focuses on various strategies the Senegalese woman writer resorts to in order to inscribe, deep within her creative work in French, a traditional universe hitherto conveyed through oral forms of expression.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/reseafrilite.45.2.86

Journal Title: Victorian Studies
Publisher: Duke UP
Issue: victorianstudies.55.issue-4
Date: 7 1, 1985
Author(s): Heffernan Laura
Abstract: This article reviews recent methodological interventions in the field of literary study, many of which take nineteenth-century critics, readers, or writers as models for their less interpretive reading practices. In seeking out nineteenth-century models for twenty-first-century critical practice, these critics imagine a world in which English literature never became a discipline. Some see these new methods as formalist, yet we argue that they actually emerge from historicist self-critique. Specifically, these contemporary critics view the historicist projects of the 1980s as overly influenced by disciplinary models of textual interpretation—models that first arose, we show through our reading of the Jolly Bargemen scene in Charles Dickens's Great Expectations(1860– 61), in the second half of the nineteenth century. In closing, we look more closely at the work of a few recent critics who sound out the metonymic, adjacent, and referential relations between readers, texts, and historical worlds in order sustain historicism's power to restore eroded meanings rather than reveal latent ones.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/victorianstudies.55.4.615

Journal Title: Victorian Studies
Publisher: Ashgate
Issue: victorianstudies.56.issue-4
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): Giles Paul
Abstract: P(aulGiles paul.giles@sydney.edu.au) is Challis Professor of English at the University of Sydney. His most recent books areAntipodean America: Australasia and the Constitution of U.S. Literature(2013) andTransnationalism in Practice: Essays on American Studies, Literature, and Religion(2011). He is currently working on a study of how the transnational intersects with the cross-temporal.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/victorianstudies.56.4.756

Journal Title: Comparative Literature Studies
Publisher: Saqi
Issue: complitstudies.48.4.issue-4
Date: 12 1, 2008
Abstract: Marianne Marroumis an assistant professor of English and Comparative Literature at the Lebanese American University. She has written on captivity, water and sand, and entropy and negentropy in Kobo Abe'sThe Woman in the Dunes,and on displacement and exile in modern Arabic and Francophone literature (Hanan al-ShaykhHikāyat Zahra (The Story of Zahra)and André ChedidLa maison sans racines(The House without Roots). Her articles appear inThe Comparatist(2007),Concentric: Literary and Cultural Studies(2008), andComparative Literature Studies(2008). She has also written a comparative study on the hybrid poetics and avant-garde hermeneutics of Ibn al-Muqaffa‘’sKalila wa Dimnaand Boccaccio'sOn Poetry, published inThe Weaving of Words: Approaches to Classical Arabic Prose(Beiruter Texte und Studien 112, 2009). Her current project is a book length study on cultural transmission, transculturation, and mimesis in a selection of ancient and modern works of world literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/complitstudies.48.4.0512

Journal Title: Comparative Literature Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: complitstudies.51.1.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2014
Abstract: The combinatory and ludic polyculturalism, the parodic transmutation of meanings and values, the open, multilingual hybridization [which] are the devices responsible for the constant feeding and refeeding of this “baroquizing” almagest: the carnivalized transencyclopedia of the new barbarians, where everything can coexist with everything. They are the machinery that crushes the material of tradition, like the teeth of a tropical sugarmill, transforming stalks and husks into bagasse and juicy syrup. 145
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/complitstudies.51.1.0018

Journal Title: Comparative Literature Studies
Publisher: Verso
Issue: complitstudies.51.3.issue-3
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Damrosch David
Abstract: The world is a large and various place. Those wishing to chart new planetary cartographies are finding many languages to study beyond the French–German–English triad that long dominated Western comparative studies, and they are developing new methods appropriate to the expanded scope of our field. The tough linguistic and political analyses that Emily Apter rightly wishes comparatists to pursue will best be carried forward by widening our cultural and linguistic horizons, and by employing the full variety of critical and theoretical approaches that can be included in our cartographic toolboxes today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/complitstudies.51.3.0504

Journal Title: The F. Scott Fitzgerald Review
Publisher: Penguin
Issue: fscotfitzrevi.12.1.issue-1
Date: 10 1, 1989
Author(s): Salmose Niklas
Abstract: Fitzgerald's nostalgic style, though, set an example of how a nostalgic narrative could be structured, and in its aftermath it was used by such different authors as Evelyn Waugh in Brideshead Revisited(1945), Anthony Burgess inA Clockwork Orange(1962) and the works of Kazuo Ishiguro. The author's own later work employs it as well. The technique of using the reader's textual memory in order to evoke a phenomenological nostalgic experience is very evident in both versions ofTender Is the Night(the 1934 original, and Malcolm Cowley's 1951 restructuring). In the 1951 version, the structure of the narrative closely follows the pattern of happiness and reflection. An early description of a Swiss valley communicates an awe of life and nature: “The sun swam out into a blue sea of sky and suddenly it was a Swiss valley at its best—pleasant sounds and murmurs and a good fresh smell of health and cheer” (9). In the transitory third book, “Casualties: 1925,” the tone has changed from appreciative to melancholic, as in this description of the small town of Amiens: “In the day-time one is deflated by such towns, with their little trolley cars of twenty years ago crossing the great grey cobble-stoned squares in front of the cathedral, and the very weather seems to have a quality of the past, faded weather like that of old photographs” (138). At the end of the novel both Dick and Nicole Diver become obsessed with youth and the past as well as with time: “for Nicole the years slipped away by clock and calendar and birthday, with the added poignance of her perishable beauty” (228). Toward the end of the novel, Nicole's last sight of Dick—“her eyes followed his figure until it became a dot and mingled with the other dots in the summer crowd” (386)—forces the reader to reflect in a reversed movement. Instead of vanishing like Dick, this image suggests a backward recollection of what was a Swiss valley “at its best.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/fscotfitzrevi.12.1.0067

Journal Title: Interdisciplinary Literary Studies
Publisher: Harper and Row
Issue: intelitestud.16.2.issue-2
Date: 9 1, 1971
Author(s): Eze Chielozona
Abstract: Even in her familial tone, and perhaps because of it, Jabbeh Wesley never forgets that the healing and meaning-making function of grief and mourning, as painful as grief and mourning are, is not to be avoided. Rather, as DuBose argues, based on the painful experience of his wife's miscarriage, as “‘child’ and ‘parent’ disappeared, our bodies and our society dys-appeared, and our connections and hopes re-appeared” (374). Jabbeh Wesley attaches the reappearance of the hopes for the healing and reconstruction of her Liberian world to people's ability and willingness to truly experience the painful process of grief and, perhaps informed by that cathartic experience, allow compassion and empathy to guide their relationship to others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/intelitestud.16.2.0282

Journal Title: Journal of Africana Religions
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jafrireli.1.1.issue-1
Date: 1 1, 2013
Abstract: Some time ago, Paul Ricoeur pointed out that “the symbol gives rise to thought.” These diasporic religious communities enable us to find a new beginning for thought that has the possibility of avoiding the exclusivity and elitism that has too often accompanied the objective meaning of thought as a science of the rational. Not only these diasporic religions, but also the very conundrum of the continent of Africa as a whole, to echo Skinner at the beginning of our paper, may serve in the same manner as one of the most important ways that thought might be renewed—and the relationship of thought to action and performance.38
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jafrireli.1.1.0091

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: Is SPEP the city of God? This would be going too far. Not even the theological turn in French Phenomenology would make this claim. Dick Howard already threw in a troubling question: “diversification that perhaps gives more breadth than depth?” he asked. And there are plenty more troubling questions. SPEP is now a big operation. It has committees and subcommittees, multiple simultaneous sessions, blind review. All these developments are signs, perhaps inevitable ones, of its success, but all have familiar downsides: bureaucratization, diversification for its own sake, what Habermas would call Unübersichtlichkeit. This is what happens when outsiders become insiders, the antis become their own sort of establishment. You can't blame some of us for feeling nostalgic for our long-lost innocence, even though we all know—you don't have to be a philosopher of history to know this—that we can't go there. History has rendered a judgment, but Dick Howard said, “Historywilljudge.” That's one problem with history: It's always rendering judgments, but they are never final. You'd have to be at the end of history for that, and despite the claim of some philosophers, we aren't there yet. The slaughter bench of history looks very different today from the early 1960s, but it's still in some ways a slaughter bench. So how will the SPEP of the early twenty-first century look to the philosopher-historians of 2061—or is it 2062?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0102

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: In short, it is exposure to the experientially inspired and theoretically casual atmosphere of those early SPEP meetings—where neglected topics and unorthodox modes of thinking and speaking were encouraged in an undisciplined way—to which I owe the most. Of course, SPEP grew up. It has experienced its share of embarrassing upheavals, as the heavy presence of its own versions of the social and political prejudices in the larger culture became too obvious to ignore. But it is now a major event—the four-day anchor for a week-long convention that takes over hotels, runs multiple concurrent sessions, fosters satellite groups, and often follows established lines of discussion. Some even call it the alternative APA. Yet I am sure that as long as lifeworld experience continues to trump whatever it is currently fashionable to say about it, grown-up SPEP will retain enough of its original vitality and intellectual generosity so that another generation of aging academics will have cause to repeat our present thank-yous in another fifty years.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0108

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: Our plight, then, is not simply that we are all in the same boat, let alone on the same ocean. Yet we are still bound by the responsbility of inhabiting the same planet. What would it mean, then, to share the earth with all its inhabitants, not just in terms of occupying the same planet but also in terms of caring and looking after each other in the anachronistic sense of the word dutyas plight? Can we risk pledging to solemnly avow our own investments in the very things we so self-rightousely protest against, not in order to stop protesting in the name of justice but, rather, in the hopes of turning the killing machine back against itself and taking another step toward “hunting down” and abolishing death penalities wherever they may be hiding, even in our own disowned fears and desires?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0118

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: The point here is that whoever I am in terms of my personal identity and my capacity or incapacity to identify myself through sortal terms as a being in the world with others, I will have no doubt who is in pain or who will have the pain. Here, again, is a sense of “I” in which I can be aware of myself and refer to myself without it being necessary to employ any nonindexical or third-personal referents.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0222

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: No doubt the rise of religion has not only posed a particular dilemma for critical theory but also provided a curious place to end this reflection. Having started my career doing philosophy of religion it is somewhat surprising to meet religion again as I turn to what surely must be at least a later phase of my career. I am reminded of Antonio's line from the Italian film C'eravamo Tanto Amati, translated asWe All Loved Each Other So Much: “We thought we could change the world, but the world changed us.” “Philosophers only interpret the world, the point is to change it,” so said Marx. But in a curious way those who would change the world are changed by it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0291

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: In 1986, however, SPEP's present mission statement could not have been conceived. Many important issues and questions remained unrecognized or simply ignored. But the opening before the organization was now a “postmodern” one, and a hallmark of what is called postmodern thought is its requirement that it transform in the force of its own lack of founded stability. I believe that 1986 began a series of developments that is turning SPEP toward ways of thought and life that cannot be labeled postmodern. I doubt that this turning constitutes a midlife crisis for SPEP in its fiftieth year. But it does highlight for me the fact that I have been giving a historical narrative that has to do with continuities in the dissolution of continuities, that I have not been—if I may put it this way—postmodern in an orthodox manner, although I have refused to give an unambiguous meaning to the term that has played a major role in organizing this essay. I do not know whether this discussion is postmodern, post-postmodern, or modern, and I do not care. I do care, however, about the openings that SPEP has provided for collegiality, conflict, unresolved differences, transformations, and sites for presentations, discussion, and critique. In my experience, in its own organizational development and travail, it has occasioned changes in the lives of many philosophers (mine among them). I expect that its indeterminate opening now—its continuing transformations in the interaction of many differences—will continue to surprise, irritate, and change those of us who participate in its opportunities. I close with a sense of beginning and an acknowledgment of the strangeness of the continuity that a series of beginnings provides: continuity without substance, continuity coming to pass.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0299

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: I want to conclude with one more argument from my own work. I have very often argued that philosophers of technology, regarding the expectations of society and their own traditions and habits, may come “too late” to technologies. They too often undertake their reflections afterthe technologies are in place. Rather, I argue, they should reposition themselves at what I call the “R&D” position where technologies are taking developmental shape, in think tanks, in incubator facilities, in research centers. Only then can truly “new” and emerging technologies be fully philosophically engaged.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0321

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: We at SPEP have never been modern and have made a good living off the critique of modernism and of its binary oppositions. But I think that the business as usual of Continental philosophy will have to be expanded to include a critique of the opposition of the human and the nonhuman, of physisandtechne, and of “Continental philosophy” and “science.” For the truth is that we have been a party to the science wars. That is why I think that the work of Catherine Malabou is exactly the sort of work that SPEP and Continental philosophy generally will have to do in the future. We have yet to admit how deeply inscribed the human is in the nonhuman and the technical. We have yet to appreciate that being-in-the-world is not only historicized, gendered, and incarnate but also both a neural and a galactic event, of both microscopic and macroscopic proportions. Can it be of no interest to “philosophy,” can there be nothing to “wonder” about, that our bodies are literally made of stardust? We have yet to realize how deeply interwoven is the imagination of speculative physics with the wonder of the philosophers. If the best we can do is to protect our turf by saying that science does not think, the sciences will steal our thunder, that is, our wonder, right out from under us. Science does think, and science wonders, because wonder is the piety of thought. That is a matter to which SPEP, and Continental philosophers generally, whether they have taken a theological turn or are running in the opposite direction, should give more thought.36 37
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0333

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.28.3.issue-3
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Steinbock Anthony
Abstract: The articles collected here represent the richness and diversity of philosophical work presented at SPEP and thus serve to vindicate Steinbock's vision, expressed in his Co-director's Address, of SPEP as an organization that is grounded in a fundamental openness to experience that leads it to continually push against its own limits and thus to reimagine itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.28.3.0213

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.28.3.issue-3
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Davidson Scott
Abstract: For, if phenomenology renounces its search for the absolute and for foundations, then it must give up seeing itself as a single and self-contained discourse. The minimal phenomenologist renounces monolinguism and is no longer the master of only one discourse. Instead, he or she must practice a mixed discourse. To do this is to practice diglossia, to become a code-switcher. In its ordinary sense, the practice of code-switching refers to the passage from one language or dialect to another one in the course of a single conversation, for instance, when the conversation moves from an informal to a formal setting or when it moves from one topic to another. But in the phenomenological context, this would involve the ability to shift from a phenomenological discourse to its “others,” whether they might be Freudian energetics, Deleuzian aspects, Badiouan events, and so on. This practice of translation or code-switching has perhaps always been the role of the phenomenologist, if it is accepted that phenomenological reflection does not begin from itself but is nourished by a life that precedes it and gives rise to it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.28.3.0315

Journal Title: Philosophy & Rhetoric
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: philrhet.44.2.issue-1
Date: 6 1, 1956
Abstract: In this work, I argue that creative metaphors are formed when some persistent problem, caused by an inadequacy in preexisting knowledge, descends into the collective unconscious, is reconfigured unconsciously in novel ways, and then reemerges back into consciousness where the impasse is resolved by the metaphorical expression of new knowledge. To develop this position, I (1) review and critique some well-known language-based studies of metaphor, (2) summarize psychoanalytic and depth psychological approaches to the psyche as one way to overcome the shortcomings of the language-based scholarship, (3) relate C. G. Jung's account of the psyche and his related notion of synchronicity to creative metaphors, (4) graft a quantum physics approach to material reality back onto Jung's work as a provisional structure of the collective unconscious, and finally, (5) offer some suggestions about how creative metaphors might work psychologically.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/philrhet.44.2.0101

Journal Title: Philosophy & Rhetoric
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: philrhet.45.4.issue-4
Date: 12 1, 2012
Abstract: Adopting a hyperbolic perspective is also certainly a way to argue as well as a way to examine other “texts” because it is a trope and figure of thought that reveals those moments within discourse when one is attempting to transcend the bounds of reality because the extraordinary nature of a given situation or subject matter requires the use of an excessive prophetic voice or an ardent polemical exaggeration. As Mileur posits, “The work is a hyperbole, the intersection of other hyperboles, and the subject is, insofar as he can be written about at all, another hyperbole” (1990, 86). Rather than circumventing it, understanding hyperbole as the focus of thought and action can create significant moments of inventioas well aselocutiofor the hyperbolist and critic alike. By approaching a particular text, a critical term, and even a piece of criticism itself from a hyperbolic perspective, one might (re)consider and (re)interpret these “texts” as a stretching of discursive limits that leads one toward a re-presentation of the extraordinary—an attempt to communicate the ineffable or transgress the expressible.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/philrhet.45.4.0406

Journal Title: Philosophy & Rhetoric
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: philrhet.46.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 1998
Abstract: Second, how do we account for the fact that the processes of public memory are both created by individual choices and nurtured in collective contexts? Many scholars have productively addressed this question by unpacking specific examples in which individuals or groups vie to control public memories. The critical framework I recommend offers a more systematic approach to this issue. To view representations of the past through the nested lenses of rhetoric, public memory, and the agential spiral is to focus on how human beings—individually and in groups—forge connections with people of other times through the medium of public agency. The agential spiral, derived from my reading of Ricoeur's “threefold mimesis,” aims to pinpoint three moments in the construction of narratives in which human action is represented and reinterpreted within a temporal structure. As a critical framework, the agential spiral helps us to view the creation of public memories at three key moments and to see the process as a coiling whole. Using this tool, we can better understand why certain memories persist in certain societies and how those memories powerfully connect people across time as well as space.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/philrhet.46.2.0182

Journal Title: Shaw
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: shaw.34.1.issue-1
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): Wixson Christopher
Abstract: Chicagoan, 1 June 1934, 28. Courtesy of Quigley Publishing Company, a division of QP Media, Inc.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/shaw.34.1.0001

Journal Title: Shaw
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: shaw.34.1.issue-1
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): Einsohn Howard Ira
Abstract: Moreover, for Shaw and Ricoeur, imaginative works of art have the power to project alternative and potentially redemptive ways of living together harmoniously, which in turn can substantially change hearts, alter beliefs, and reorient behavior in an empathetic direction that promotes vigilant concern for the other. Be they biblical narratives, plays for the stage, fictions for the page, or other forms of literary texts broadly construed, stories can portray freedom and fault reconciled in compassionate beings committed to advancing the common good. In this way, poetic making can and has instilled in us not only faith and hope but magnanimity as well. Thus, the answer to the provocative question Shaw poses at the beginning of his last major treatise, Everybody's Political What's What?—“Is Human Nature Incurably Depraved?” —is a resounding no: not just for him but for Ricoeur, too. Where there is faith, there is hope; and where there is hope, there is life. Life expectant.55
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/shaw.34.1.0133

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: U of California P
Issue: style.34.issue-1
Date: 3 1, 1973
Author(s): Boren Mark Edelman
Abstract: To challenge an unexamined critical alignment with Ishmael's limited epistemology in Herman Melville's Moby-Dickshows how the placing of confidence in Ishmael as witness to Ahab's monomania leads to a misreading ofMoby-Dick. Ahab lies at the center of a highly developed epistemology that competes with and eludes the narrator's comprehension. The various trophies that appear throughout the text are manifest examples of this other-than-interpretive system of knowing, and Melville uses the act of possessing trophies, particularly the act of eating trophies, to show graphically how such a system works. In other words, Melville has developed a complex epistemological system of ingestion around Ahab to model how language can be materially invested with meaning and how that meaning is performed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.34.1.1

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Norton
Issue: style.34.issue-2
Date: January 16, 1972
Author(s): Matz Jesse
Abstract: Mauriceis a novel that waits for the future (for completion, publication, and audience) but also looks nostagically to the past. This strange temporal location reflects a temporality basic to Forster's narrative structures and sexual identity: like philosophers who presently ascribe to the “tenseless theory of time,” Forster dispels identity among a tenseless order of moments, in a narrative structure that seeks likewise to trade “becoming” for a better order. InMaurice, such tactics as iterative seriality, overdetermined prolepsis, nonephiphany, and other modes of “detensing” give form to a version of homosexuality that would escape “identity,” with unusual implications for moderist temporality and narratological criticism. Forster's modernist time is eccentric for its interest in logical order; and the narratological criticism which would attend to his “tenseless” homosexual form must remember that it is often the combination of subversion and order that encourages the best narratological advances.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.34.2.188

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: style.34.issue-2
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): Richardson Brian
Abstract: Recent work in narrative theory comes from a variety of perspectives: traditional approaches, postmodern narratology, ideologically-oriented positions, and new interdisciplinary studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.34.2.319

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: UP of Virginia
Issue: style.36.issue-1
Date: 3 1, 1993
Author(s): Kelly Marian
Abstract: Elizabeth Bowen subjects both her characters and her readers to the dynamics of nostalgia in two of her novels. The House in ParisandThe Little Girlsare unique in Bowen'soeuvrein their use of “structural nostalgia”—a tripartite structure containing a section that takes place in the past put between two sections that take place in the present. Though this structure suggests that readers may simply engage in a nostalgic return along with the characters, Bowen uses it instead to force both her characters and her readers into a conscious examination of both the pleasures and the problems created by nostalgia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.36.1.1

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Cambridge UP
Issue: style.36.issue-1
Date: February 25, 1984
Author(s): Alber Jan
Abstract: In Towards a ‘Natural’ Narratology(1996), Monika Fludernik reconstitutes narrativity on the basis of experientiality, i.e., humanity's embodiedness in the world, and claims that incomprehensible texts can be made more readable if one attempts to narrativize them. Since Samuel Beckett's short prose work “Lessness” is one of the most enigmatic texts of the twentieth century, it serves as an ideal test case for this new narratological paradigm. “Lessness” does indeed lose its initial strangeness if one reads this piece as narrative. Moreover, although a “natural” narratological analysis paves the way for a new interpretation of “Lessness,” the new paradigm provides only a partially satisfying analysis of it. To make the text fit into the new consciousness-oriented paradigm, Fludernik's quasi-universal naturalizing mode has to ignore certain aspects such as the mechanical structure of “Lessness.” Beckett's later prose work challenges narrativization and the “natural” narratological project. A reading of “Lessness” should be liberated from the confines of experientiality and instead concentrate on the role of chance and chaos. Beckett's text must be located in a counterworld, a limbo between signifier and signified. One should allow this limbo world to seep into the “real world” and not attempt to explain this different counterworld by means of “real-world” knowledge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.36.1.54

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: John Benjamins
Issue: style.36.issue-3
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Steen Gerard J.
Abstract: This paper presents the background, findings, and implications of a new line of research on the technical identification of linguistic metaphor. Inspired by the cognitive-linguistic approach to metaphor launched by Lakoff and Johnson, a new theoretical framework and operational definition has been developed for the identification of metaphorical expressions in authentic discourse. The paper presents a brief report of two reliability studies of the first stage of the approach, and spells out how it may be applied in linguistic, stylistic and rhetorical text analysis with reference to a poem by Alfred Lord Tennyson.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.36.3.386

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Shocken
Issue: style.40.issue-4
Date: October 1, 1998
Author(s): Mikkonen Kai
Abstract: The recent pragmatic-contextual theory of fiction entails the possibility of changes between fact and fiction over the course of time. It is also perhaps commonplace to state that this process can be reversed—that fictional texts may cease to be fictional. The question of generic fiction-to-fact transition, however, is rarely confronted in the theory of fiction. This essay investigates the generic expectations attached to texts that make a full-scale transition from fiction to nonfiction difficult, both culturally and psychologically. “Fiction” is understood here in a limited, pragmatic sense of a work of fiction, a text known and categorized as fiction. The discussion is structured around five interrelated reasons that contribute to the difficulty: (1) the commonness of as-if structures in everyday life; (2) the generic combinations among literature, fiction, factual representation, and narrative; (3) the relative stability of the communal values and ways of checking facts that determine the categories of fiction and fact (the fact convention); (4) the popularity, in fiction, of metalepsis and the theme of transworld travel between different ontological spheres; (5) and the fictionalization of literature in the historical perspective.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.40.4.291

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: State U of New York P
Issue: style.41.issue-1
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Ward Jeff
Abstract: Jeff Ward( ) is a doctoral student in the University of Minnesota's Department of Rhetoric, Scientific and Technical Communication, where he teaches courses in professional and technical writing as well as photography. His recent work on photography in public spaces will appear in a collection of essays from the Sweetland Conference on Originality, Imitation, and Plagiarism.wardx278@umn.edu
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.41.1.94

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Johns Hopkins UP
Issue: style.42.issue-4
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Mellard James M.
Abstract: The reviewer of the collection of essay called The Cambridge Companion to John Updike, edited by Stacey Olster, confesses that in the middle years of the career of John Updike, he lost interest in the author's novels for the paradoxical reasons that he felt they were either too predictable, seemingly too programmatic or too unpredictable, Updike pumping up a flagging imagination with an assortment ofoutréforms and subjects. But the reviewer rejoices that the predominantly fine essays in theCompanion—by scholars such as D. Quentin Miller, Sanford Pinsker, Edward Vargo, Donald J. Greiner, and John N. Duvall—renewed his interest in the works unread, prompted him to do much catching up, and left him wondering, more ruefully than ever, upon Updike's death in January of 2009 why the novelist had never won a highly deserved Nobel Prize for Literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.42.4.488

Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.22.1.issue-1
Date: 1 1, 1998
Abstract: William Blake's poem Jerusalem(1804–20), like all Perennial utopias, achieves a dialectical synthesis of the ideal and the actual through the narrative focalization of a religious experience at the level of character, one that is at once transhistorical and universal. By reading the poem through the lens of the Perennial paradigm, we discover that the temporal aspects ofJerusalemare intimately tied to the religious dimensions of Blake's utopian vision. In addition to giving us a new way to understand the well-documented distinctiveness of Blake's religious message, the Perennial paradigm shows Blake's soteriology inJerusalemto be utopian rather than salvationist (that is to say, individual-religious as opposed to collective-political). Because of the ultimately subjective nature of apprehension of the Divine Vision, Blake's utopian thought is not “clearly a forward-directed anticipatory and visionary concept,” as Magnus Ankarsjö has recently argued (15). Blake does not rally the reader towards some “ensuing peaceful millennium” (15) but rather to find enlightenment in the eternal moment. In light of Blake's suspicion of ratiocination, combined with his deliberate use of narrative focalization of Albion's religious vision, readingJerusalemas a Rational utopia grounded in Judeo-Christian of notions of Apocalypse is to miss Blake's core religious message.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.22.1.0019

Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.23.1.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: What is left unsaid in this article about the relationship between utopia and rhetoric could certainly fill the pages of many books. The range is especially rich when we turn to contemporary rhetorical theorists who specifically address society as a value to be combined with a remembered or imagined better place, as in Nedra Reynolds's Geographies of Writingor bell hooks'sBelonging: A Culture of Place. Just as constitutive rhetoric (that is, cumulative discourse that contributes to building the structure of human society) has been important in the works of theorists often cited by utopists as crucial to their work, so the utopian impulse continues to be inherent in the way rhetoricians see their subject. To persuade verbally or visually, we must have our own idea of what is socially better, and we must also be able to imagine what our audience believes to be better. The function of utopia, then, may be less philosophical and ideological at its root than it is linguistic in a pragmatic sense. As Kenneth Burke has written of human beings, we are “the symbol-making, symbol-using, symbol-misusing animal … rotten with perfection.”38 39
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.23.1.0113

Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.23.2.issue-2
Date: 10 1, 2012
Abstract: Milan Kundera has described this kind of comedy as echoing a joyous, life-affirming laughter—“the serious laughter of angels expressing their joy of being.” But that is not to suggest that there is anything divinely pious in this position: if Joyce is an angel, then he is one, like Stephen Dedalus, who will not blindly or uncritically serve.168 In commenting upon an earlier version of this article, Patrick Parrinder spoke of “the difficult relationship between Utopia and comedy.” This relationship is problematized by the fact that Utopia rarely seems able to laugh at itself or therefore to offer the liberating possibilities of comedy. Joyce's later writing, however, appears to advance the rare chance of a pluralist, ambiguous, and dynamic vision of Utopia: a Utopia that might be sustained into futurity—a Utopia that still has room for dreamers and for democrats. But is it still possible that we can call this realm of radical openness, this flux of possibilities, this resolutely material site, Utopian? And do we really need to? This kind of Utopia is not a category or a frame but a direction, a progress, a confluence of streams of consciousness and of unconsciousness, flowing into the river of life: not just a symbolic river but a real one too, the Liffey, the great Anna Livia Plurabelle herself. Or as Joyce put it, more succinctly (and more joyously), it is simply “Lff!”169 170
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.23.2.0472

Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.25.1.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2014
Abstract: It is in this sense that Utopia can be understood as lying before us—in both senses of this confounding double phrase. Utopia resides in the past (beforein this instance means “behind us”) inasmuch as any reconsideration of Utopia in the present must inevitably begin with the past. But if the sources of Utopia in the present reside in the past, realization is in the future (beforein this instance means “ahead of us”). It is this double valence that links the articles that make up this special issue. Some deal with historical figures, literature, or places, while others take up analogous considerations that are closer to us now. However, in each case, the future is what is at issue: What shape will it take? How might the circumstances of its emergence be as propitious as possible? These key questions suffuse all of the articles that follow and are of the greatest urgency to all disciplines but in particular for architecture and urbanism, which are burdened with providing the stage upon which we play out the drama of our lives, individually and collectively.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.25.1.0001

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology and Philosophy
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Issue: amerjtheophil.35.2.issue-2
Date: 06 14, 2014
Author(s): Neville Robert Cummings
Abstract: Flush with the juices of adolescence, American philosophy declared independence from its European parentage in the work of Ralph Waldo Emerson and his generation. In 1837, Emerson addressed the Harvard Phi Beta Kappa Society on the occasion of its inaugural meeting for the year, which he called a "holiday." Emerson began: I greet you on the recommencement of our literary year. Our anniversary is one of hope, and, perhaps, not enough of labor. We do not meet for games of strength or skill, for the recitation of histories, tragedies, and odes, like the ancient Greeks; for parliaments of love and poesy, like the Troubadours; nor for the advancement of science, like our contemporaries in the British and European capitals. Thus far, our holiday has been simply a friendly sign of the survival of the love of letters amongst a people too busy to give letters any more. Perhaps the time is already come when it ought to be, and will be something else; when the sluggard intellect of this continent will look from under its iron lids and fill the postponed expectations of the world with something better than the expectations of mechanical skill. Our day of dependence, our long apprenticeship to the learning of other lands, draws to a close. The millions that around us are rushing into life, cannot always be fed on the sere remains of foreign harvests. Events, actions arise, that must be sung, that will sing themselves.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/amerjtheophil.35.2.0093

Journal Title: Slavic Review
Publisher: Association for Slavic East European and Eurasian Studies
Issue: slavicreview.70.issue-4
Date: 12 1, 1978–84
Abstract: In this article, Ilya Kliger and Nasser Zakariya treat Lev Tolstoi’s conception of brotherhood from a narratological perspective. In the process, they trace the outlines of late Tolstoian narrative poetics, situating it within a variegated landscape of Tolstoi’s own more properly “realist” literary practice, and offering broader suggestions on the workings of narrative in its capacity to model social relations and ethical action. A narratological focus here allows them to elucidate how stories take part in contemporary understandings of social influence, human connectedness, and alienation—not only on the level of themes but also, and more deeply, on the level of the narrative organization of events. Their main focus is on one of Tolstoi’s late novellas “The Forged Coupon” and his last novel Resurrection.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5612/slavicreview.70.4.0754

Journal Title: Science Fiction Studies
Publisher: SF-TH Inc.
Issue: sciefictstud.38.issue-1
Date: 3 1, 2011
Abstract: Characterizing the slipstream genre, Bruce Sterling locates it between mainstream and science fiction; it “sets its face against consensus reality” and makes us feel “very strange.” A strong slipstream candidate is Steven Hall’s The Raw Shark Texts(2007). Manifesting as a distributed literary system, the text has as its core a print novel, but other internet and real world sites also contain fragments or “negatives.” One of the text’s two villains, Mycroft Ward, has transformed into an online database; a posthuman subjectivity, he appropriates “node bodies” that upload their information and download new instructions. This separation of content (online database) from form (node body) is, according to Alan Liu, one of the primary characteristics of postindustrial knowledge work. To this extent, Hall positions his narrative not only against databases but also against knowledge that is, in Liu’s terms, autonomously mobile, transformable, and automated, having lost its material instantiation and been pulverized into atomized bits of information. The text’s second villain—a “conceptual shark,” the Ludovician—represents the complete fusion of form and content; the typographical symbols used to describe the shark also comprise its flesh in verbal and graphic representations. The text thus positions its protagonist, Eric Sanderson, as caught between twenty-first-century forms of knowledge and the implosion of signifier into signified. In this sense, the novel functions as a parable for the contemporary human condition, looking toward a posthuman future but incarnated within an ancient biological heritage.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5621/sciefictstud.38.1.0115

Journal Title: Science Fiction Studies
Publisher: Johns Hopkins UP
Issue: sciefictstud.41.issue-1
Date: 3 1, 1973
Abstract: This essay examines the role of agency and metatextuality in Élisabeth Vonarburg's B ridgeCycle, comprised mainly of a group of short stories originally published between 1977 and 2002 and then revised in their definitive French versions for the collectionLe Jeu des coquilles de nautilus(2003). The cycle's main storyline involves the uncertain journey between parallel worlds by a series of recurring characters. Three intimately linked narrative components—each closely related to certain protocols of reading fiction and of particular interest to science fiction—form the theoretical and analytical bases of this study: the three recurring topoï of the protagonist-Voyager's travels; character agency that in part drives the sense of these realms and their occupation; and the dénouement which gives a certain meaning and closure to the spaces in their diverse manifestations and to the characters who pursue their quests in these spaces. Vonarburg's narratives place their protagonists in a situation precisely similar to that of the reader as she must negotiate the trans-world context, come to grips with her own relative lack of agency, and at the same time seek some level of control through knowledge. Suchmise en abymeallows the author, through the choice of dénouement, to comment on the manner in which this universe and the real one are imagined, represented, and decoded, and on how meaning is conveyed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5621/sciefictstud.41.1.0093

Journal Title: Science Fiction Studies
Publisher: Harcourt Brace
Issue: sciefictstud.41.issue-3
Date: 11 1, 1950
Abstract: R.A. Lafferty's reputation for rollicking humor and poetic verve, as demonstrated in such stories as “Narrow Valley” (1966) and “Slow Tuesday Night” (1965) belies the considerable theoretical and narratological complexity of his entire body of work. This article draws on the vocabulary developed by Paul Ricoeur in Interpretation Theory(1966) andTime and Narrative(1983–85) to explore Lafferty's process of world creation in light of his startling 1979 announcement that the cognitive world of humanity had come to an end. Thus, in this post-conscious state, it was left to science fiction to develop potential replacements. In his writings Lafferty seeks not only to project new worlds but also to reconstruct the world-building capacity in others, enabling readers and writers alike to collaborate toward a future for humanity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5621/sciefictstud.41.3.0543

Journal Title: Modern Language Review
Publisher: Berghahn
Issue: modelangrevi.106.1.issue-1
Date: 1 1, 1999
Abstract: Familial memoryis indispensable to individual memory. By recounting memories, the individual gains greater control over them, integrating them within self-identity. These functions are undermined by theRepublicanfamily's fear of reprisals for articulating a counter-discourse in theFrancoist New State, and the personal history of Sunta, the narrator inAlfons Cervera's , is bereft of supportive socio-cultural frameworks. Sunta resolves this situation through the medium of narrative memory, which effects a retrospective uncovering of memory traces through images of the past, allowing her to revisit an inadequately assimilated childhood from an empowered position.El color del crepúsculo
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5699/modelangrevi.106.1.0130

Journal Title: Portuguese Studies
Publisher: Harvard University Press
Issue: portstudies.27.1.issue-1
Date: January 27, 1960
Abstract: Este artigo se inicia refletindo sobre as várias maneiras que Gilberto Freyre usou o conceito-chave de mestiçagem e os campos culturais diferentes aos quais ele estendeu o seu uso — arquitetura, culinária, esporte, literatura, urbanismo, sociologia e até mesmo sexo. Chamando a atenção para os conceitos ou metáforas alternativas que se encontram na obra de Freyre — interpenetração, mistura, hibridismo, etc. — o artigo se volta para a discussão de uma metáfora que Freyre não usou, apesar de ter se tornado usual desde sua época: tradução cultural. Após uma breve história da idéia de tradução cultural, que inclui uma discussão de suas vantagens e desvantagens, o artigo termina com um estudo de caso de tradução tanto metafórica como cultural do conceito ocidental de liberdade para o Japão após a restauração imperial de 1868.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5699/portstudies.27.1.0070

Journal Title: Philip Roth Studies
Publisher: Vintage Books
Issue: philrothstud.7.issue-2
Date: Oct. 10, 2007
Author(s): Geraci Ginevra
Abstract: In a period of immanent crisis when comprehensive historical narratives are no longer possible—nor is utopia—dystopia, or rather uchronia tinged with dystopia, seems to be a rather effective means to construct a sweeping historical narration. Through the “timeless time” of uchronia in which—as Ricoeur explains in Time and Narrative(vol. III)—“we are torn between two fleeing horizons” so that “our present sees itself in crisis,” Roth looks back at a counterfactual past in order to better investigate historical causality and to embrace past and present into a postmodern problematic perspective on the temporal dimension.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5703/philrothstud.7.2.187

Journal Title: Future Anterior: Journal of Historic Preservation, History, Theory, and Criticism
Publisher: Relógio d'Água
Issue: futuante.10.issue-2
Date: 1 1, 1992
Abstract: The article focuses on the role of the “Survey on Regional Architecture in Portugal” in 1955 and its effects on contemporary Portuguese architecture. A photographic survey organizes and indexes a group of buildings with precise criteria, allowing a general panorama. In fact these built-environment, large-scale archives play an important role in heritage preservation. In the 1930s, an interesting phenomenon gathered architects who, although committed to the modern movement and enthusiasts of industrial progress, showed a growing interest in vernacular buildings and settlements. Some of these architects became photographers, attentive to a pre-industrial world that was endangered, to record timeless architecture and expose new aesthetic values. This interest generated several movements centered on an appreciation of regional architecture. Along with nostalgia, there stood out the feeling that there were still many lessons to be drawn from these threatened vernacular structures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/futuante.10.2.0083